THE ESTATES, EMPIRES, & PRINCIPALITIES OF THE WORLD.  
Represented by the description of Countries, manners of Inhabitants, Riches of Pro: vinces, forces, Government, Religion; and the Princes that have governed in every Estate.  
With the beginning of all Military and Religious Orders.  
Translated out of French by Edw: Grims tone sergeant at Arms. S. T.  
LONDON Printed by ADAM: ISLIP: for matthew: LOWNES; and JOHN: BILL. 1615.   

TO THE MOST NOBLE AND WORTHY OF ALL HONOUR'S, AND ALL TITLES, THOMAS EARL OF SUFFOLK, LORD HIGH TREASURER OF ENGLAND.  
MY most honoured Lord, as it would argue avaine presumption to importune you with trifles, of whom the weighty burden of this Estate doth chief depend; so to distrust of your Noble acceptance of the lest tributes of duty and service which shall be presented unto you, would show a weakness and want of judgement in me, having had such worthy testimonies of honourable favour, both in countenancing my poor and weak labours, in bringing me again into the world, and giving me new life: for after eight years spent for the public service of this Estate, in France, seeing my Star without light in our Horizon, and the hopes of my service, or of further employments dead, I retired myself to this fruitless course of life, to the end I might deceive the hours of my idle time, and leave some testimony to the world of my lives employment; during the which I have passed over France, the Netherlands, and Spain, under your L. honourable protection; and now declining towards my grave, and being ready to bid the world adieu, I have adventured to take a general survey of all the world, and to bring a traveller home, to make us a true relation of all Estates and Countries in our own language, I doubt not but he will give your L. some content, if your most weighty affairs will lend you any spare hours to peruse him. The title he bears on his forehead, shows the subject whereon he treats. My most humble suit is, That your L. would be pleased to patronise this last labour of an old man, whom a desire to show his dutiful observance, hath enabled, beyond the faculties of his weak body, to finish this work, to the end he might leave as it were a dying testimony of his service, and let future ages know, that he did both live and dye  
Your L. most devoted, EDWARD GRIMESTON.   

THE TRANSLATOR to the Reader.  
GEntlemen, It is an usual custom for men in my case to writ some apology or Preface unto the Reader, either in commendation of the subject he treats of, or for his own justification and defence: I should be loathe to be held less respectful than other men, in omitting any necessary compliment that might give you content. Touching the subject of this Book, I will speak little, mine Author hath given you full satisfaction in his Preface, the which I have set down at large; his Title shows the profit you may reap by him, and every discreet and well advised traveller knows, That the true use of travel into foreign countries, is to know that which he teacheth; wherein he hath showed much diligence, and great reading, as I found by my own travel, confronting him with divers good Authors that have written of the same subject: but I will leave him to your judicious censures, and to the mercy of the Bookseller, who, it may be, will commend him in the sale, if he be not interessed in some other book of the like nature. My chiefest care is, to give you an account of my labours: I may not advow it to be a mere translation, for that I have not tied myself strictly unto the laws, but have added unto it in divers places, whereas by my own search and study, I have found somethings (happily not seen by him) which might beautify the work, and give content unto the Reader. I have also in other places omitted some things, wherein my Author had been abused by the relations of others, and in some sort taxed the honour of some Nations, the which in mine own knowledge were mistaken: it had been no discretion in me, nor any good plea to have said, I followed mine Author, as one did lately in the translation of Nassaus' victories, where he hath falsely depraved an honest and worthy action at the siege of Berghen, the which was held by all the great Commanders that were then present, to be honest and commendable. I have also, treating of the Religion of every State, been forced to vary something from his phrase, but not from the truth of the subject. There remains nothing but your kind acceptance of those my endeavous: give them leave to pass with the rest of my labours; and if you found it not written in elegant terms, consider that it is no Historical discourse, but a Description of countries, and that mine Author studied more for matter than words. Such as it is, I bequeath unto you as my last Legacy, if it shall give you content, I shall think my pains well bestowed; but if you found it defective in any thing that concerns me, let my desire to do well make satisfaction for that which is amiss. And so I rest.  
Yours, E. G.   

THE AUTHORS' PREface to the Reader.  
SOme men are borne so far in love with themselves, as they esteem nothing else, and think, that whatsoever fortune hath set without the compass of their power and government, should also be banished from their knowledge. Some others, a little more careful, who finding themselves engaged by their birth, or abode, to some one place, strive to understand how matters pass there, and remain so tied to the consideration of their own Commonweal, as they affect nothing else, carrying themselves as parties of that imperfect body, whereas in their curiosity, they should behave themselves as members of this world. And there are others, which lie groveling in the dust of their studies, searching out with the sciences, the actions and manners of the Ancient, not respecting the Modern, and they seem so to admire the dead, as they have no care of the living.  
As for the first, they must needs confess their fact to be merely brutish, seeing that men are not borne solely for themselves, that humanity requires company, and the knowledge of that which other men practise, and that to frame a man's life, as it aught to be, it is needful to see the actions of many. As for the second, we see in them a childish and simple curiosity: for what know they if the Commonweal, which contains them, be a cage of fools, and whether they have need to borrow something from strangers, to better the Estate thereof, or else to settle themselves there? And how can they judge if affairs in their own Estate be well ordered, if they do not confront them with their neighbours, or with some more remote to the end they may repair the defects, or better the beginnings? Touching the third rank, observe in them a vanity, worthy of blame, for that besides they busy themselves about dead things, and which are for the most part out of use, they perceive not that at the same time, whilst they debate of the rolling of the Heavens, they are ignorant after what manner the earth, whereon they live, doth roll and move with their Seigneuries and Estates; yet after another sort, than a subtle and fantastical Mathematician of this age, following the opinion of some of the Ancient, propounds it.  
Of these three sorts of men, leaving the first to their pasture, with Lions and Bears; and passing over the second, as incapable to see any farther, I wonder at the blindness of the last, who being endowed with excellent spirits, and exceeding curious, fill them with frivolous things, contemning the learning of that which imports them most, and as a man may say, know nothing in knowing all things.  
They that make a distinction of the clear and certain knowledge of things, divide all Sciences into Speculative and Practic; and they subdivide speculative knowledge, into natural Philosophy, the Mathematics, and Metaphysics, lodging physic under the first; Arithmetic, Music, Geometry, and Astrology, under the second; and uniting to the third, Divinity, to the which they give also for an adjunct the Canon Law. As for practive science or knowledge, they first of all make it to embrace moral Philosophy, which they divide into three, that is to say, into Ethique, which frames the manners of every particular man, into Oecanonicall, which disposeth of domestic actions; and political, which comprehends the civil actions that concern the government of a Commonweal; and this contains under it in a manner all the knowledge of the Civil Law. They do also lodge under practice, Logic, the art of Memory, Grammar, and Rhetoric, to the which may be added Poesy, and History.  
But they which by their divisions (the which I will not draw out at length, as tedious, and in a manner unprofitable in this place) have in their opinions truly described all arts and sciences, do not consider that they have forgotten the most necessary, which is called the Science or Knowledge of the world, the admirable Book of that great and religious Anthony. It is this knowledge which more than any other thing doth advance men to honours and dignities, which makes Families and Commonwealths to flourish, and the actions and words of those that understand it, pleasing both to great and small; which causeth all things to succeed wishfully, and doth in a manner force the Destinies. This knowledge is gotten by the conversation of many, by divers discourses and reports, either by word or writing, by the managing of affairs, conference with strangers, voyages into divers places, the knowledge of divers humours, and in a word, by the judicious consideration of the manners and life of one and other.  
But ●o come to the point, I say, That a good part of this knowledge is comprehended in the discourse of this Book, where you may see all sorts of persons and nations lively and naturally described, and represented with their manners and customs, as curiously as might be: so as if there lacks perfection in any part, this defect proceeds rather from the want of true relation, than from my diligence. I never undertook this work, but with a firm design, not only to make it pleasing, as Geographers do in the description of the Earth, describing and setting down such singularities as they found: but also profitable, labouring to observe not lightly, but in intelligible terms, whatsoever may make the life of man either more happy, or more civil.  
And for proof, if any one will vouchsafe to cast his eyes upon this work, although ill polished, he may in a manner at the first view, observe what I I say, and seeing the distinction which I use, and the order which I hold throughout all the whole book, he may easily judge, that beside the Readers content, I have sought their profit, giving them herein all the satisfaction they could desire upon this subject. For although my first and chief design was to deal only with politic and civil matters; yet to the end, they might found all together, and not be forced to seek for the description of countriess, whose custom I represent, I have made the Corographie, and would not fail in that point, painting out the provinces, whose discourse I undertook, it may be with as much care, as my design would give me leave, setting down the most remarkable places.  
But for the that this representation of countries would be unprofitable, if they understood not their quality, I have added it unto the rest, with all that the country yields, and the beasts which naturally live there, and have their breeding. Yet all this were little, to spend much time in the curious search of things the which are voided of sense or reason, if I should not spew you the man which dwells in ever country, and for whom all those things seem to have been made, first in his ancient posture, and with his old customs, either altogether, or for the most part abolished; then in his modern habit, either with more civility, or with more rudeness, according to the changes and revolutions of the world, to the end that every man may judge which is the better of these two Estates, and make use of part of the one, and part of the other, having carefully balanced the most considerable particularities of both.  
And for that all this labour were little, to give the Reader a solid content, if I should have left it thus naked and bore, it importing little to know the actions of nations, if they had not means to judge by the commodities which the place doth yield, what they should add or take away from their manner of living, and to know the causes for the which they suffered themselves as it were to run headlong into some error and defect, or else have loved or embraced something worthy of great praise and commendation: and if withal they did not understand the means which these people have to live in the Estate where in they are borne; I have next unto their manners, joined their wealth and riches, which show by their abundance, how men which enjoy them have abandoned themselves to delights, or else given themselves unto Sciences, and by the want thereof in what manner some have con tinued rude and barbarous, and others have applied themselves to arts and trades, to the end, they might repair the defect of nature by the perfection of their industry and labour.  
Moreover, knowing well that although a country be furnished with commodities which suffice or abound, yet the inhabitants are subject to be dislodged, if they be not able to repel them which shall undertake to wrist that violently from them which they hold: for this cause, I have presently after the discourse of their wealth, added that of their forces, to the end the Reader may observe the means which Nations have to resist either the envy of their neighbours, or to withstand the fury of a multitude of strangers, the which have come from some miserable country to seize upon another man's right; and to end they may judge if the Estates whereof I discourse may be easily overthrown and changed, and if for their defence they make use of any which is unknown to us, and which might yield unto us some profit, we might apply it to our own use, and have consideration of the forces of another nation, to make our own more fearful: but all this being without policy, is like unto a building which is in the Air, without any support or foundation, I have joined unto the rest, the government and conduct of the Estate, whose discourse I have undertaken, to the end that knowing the humours of those that are subject unto it, they may judge if they be governed according to their natural disposition, and by this judgement they may understand that all nations are not to be ruled after one sort; and if under such a conduct, the nation whereof we treat, hath not succeeded well, or hath been often afflicted or ruined, they may seek out the defects of this government, to make the country more calm and quiet, and others which are not engaged under the like command much better entrusted in that which they have to do for their assurance.  
Having done this, I would not omit the principal pieces of Commonweals, the which is Religion, whereof I have discoursed, to show that it is the fear of some divinity which maintains people in their duties, makes them obedient to their princes, and diverts them much more from all bad designs, than arms and soldiers which environ and threaten them. I do it also to show, that whereas religion wants, of what sort soever it be, policy and order fail in like manner, and barbarism, confusion, and rebellion, reign there in a manner continually: whereas they that seize on them, should presently settle in their rude minds the apprehension of some power over all, to dispose of things at pleasure.  
Y●t I was not contented herewith, so desirous I was to give satisfaction to all men: but I have annexed and joined hereunto the names of those which have governed the countries which I describe; and if this curiosity hath not extended to every discourse, the Authors which have go before me, are to be accused of this defect; for that having forgotten to treat particularly of this subject, or being not able to do it for want of sufficient instructions, they have taken from me the means to acquit myself worthily of that which I have undertaken, and in like manner they have as it were deprived the Reader of that satisfaction which he might have desired or expected.  
Thus I have laboured to make this work, not perfect and complete in every point, yet at the lest in that estate, as it may yield both pleasure and profit to those that shall vouchsafe to lend it some hours, and which shall resolve to read it at leisure, and not in haste, as they do commonly which desire only to pass the time, and not to employ it commendably in some worthy search: for who so will look narrowly to the benefit which may be drawn from these discourses, shall easily found that there are very few men but should be invited to the reading thereof, either to exercise their judgements, or for to make the design of some fortune, or else to be profitable and commodious to their countries, or for their own entertainment, or for the entertainment of others, or for both together.  
If they duly consider of all that is treated of in this Book, they shall first see that Princes, besides the relation of divers sorts of places, whereon they may ground some enterprises, fortify themselves with more advantage, better the trade of their subjects, and employ them either to the beautifying or enriching of their Provinces, and shall here found means to augment and increase their revenues, making use of some foreign inventions, and applying them to the Nations which they command, according to the disposition of times, and the humour of their subjects, bringing them always in with wisdom and judgement.  
Noblemen shall draw instructions from hence to please their Sovereign Lords and Princes, and also to make their own subjects pleasing and humble; they shall make themselves capable of some worthy Embassage, whereof they shall acquit themselves much better by this kind of course, and they shall be much better enabled to undertake or execute any enterprise, be it near or far off.  
As for simple gentlemen, they that are advanced in years shall found wherewith to entertain themselves, and withal to instruct youth: They that are of a middle age, may observe particularities, whereof they may make use, whether that their courage carries them far from their houses for any design or enterprise, or live in Court, whereas the reading hereof may purchase them reputation and credit, and draw them unto good employments, if they can make true use of it, conferring judiciously that which passeth in the State wherein they live, with that which is done in many others. Finally, young men before they see any thing, shall in a manner see all things; they shall know the Court, and the humours of Courtiers, before they know themselves; and if their generous inclinations thrust them on to the profession of arms (as it doth commonly fall out) whenas peace is settled in their own countries, they shall found here others which are in action, they shall sound their means and forces, according to the quality of those places whither they will go, they shall see if their natures be able to endure the extreme cold, or violent heat of those countries where the war is; they shall consider of their manner of living, and judge if their humours will be compatible with that of the inhabitants of those places; if strangers, especially they of his nation, may purchase any honour there, which is the chief end of Nobility; and to conclude, to the end they may win reputation, having considered all these circumstances, they will seek to force their own nature if it be wayward, lay aside all their passions whatsoever, support all kind of discommodities, and fit themselves to any thing that may happen.  
Simple soldiers, which seek to raise their birth and fortunes by the proof of their valour, have in a manner the same things to consider of: And to this end, hearing of any levy of men to go into countries which are in question, they may instruct themselves before they dislodge of that which they shall encounter there, and by this means resolve with more assurance of the voyage; they shall not found themselves surprised with any thing that is strange, having learned the truth before their departure, and seeing it, shall hold it, as a thing well practised among them.  
They that will deal in the managing of affairs and businesses of Estate, shall draw many Maxims from hence, the which they may use to so good purpose (although they be borrowed from the customs of other nations) as they shall seem their own, and will make them appear inventive, judicious, and capable to give some good and wholesome council for the welfare of their Commonweal.  
The Advocate who seems only to have need of the laws, ordinances, and customs, which are in force in the place of his abode, may, by the means of this Book, mingle in his pleading, some custom or foreign law in favour of his client, and making the most curious judges to observe it, it may be he shall move them to have such regard thereof, as many times it shall win him his cause, or at the lest purchase him reputation.  
And is not the Merchant to be held happy that shall meet with these discourses, seeing that in short time he may know the places whither he is to traffic, and instruct himself sufficiently of the nature and quality of the countries, where he may found that which he seeks, or cell that which he hath; and also have means to learn after what manner commodities are bought and sold in those places, either by exchange, or for ready money, and by what means they must gain the Barbarians which cell, or prevent the wiles and tricks of the most subtle and wary, who know how to disguise or impair their merchandise.  
As for Artizens and Tradesmen, they have news here of Provinces which seem to have need of their arts and professions; and therefore (me thinks) it is no difficult thing for them to resolve to change their abodes, whenas they shall assuredly know that the change will be profitable unto them, and that they shall benefit themselves more in other places, than where they have first planted themselves. To conclude in few words, there is no sort of people but may reap some profit by this book, which contains, as I have said, a good part of that great and most necessary science of the world, the which cannot sufficiently be esteemed, for that it makes men worthy of esteem.  
I have not spoken all this for any account I make of that which I have writtan, neither will I ever confess, that any desire of glory hath invited me to praise mine own work: my humour will not suffer me to be so vain; only a desire I had to be profitable to my country to whom I have vowed all the good I can, with the loss of mine own rest. And I protest with truth, that if I have given any rank or commendation to this work, I will give much more to those that shall labour to make it perfect; for that in my opinion it is not yet fully finished, and that any man may add something daily unto it, for that from time to time they have more certain advice from all parts, especially from those countries which have not been much frequented, either by reason of the distance, or for their barbarousness.  
I would willingly end my speech, as desiring the Reader should speedile make some trial of the truth of my words. But before I proceed any farther, seeing I discourse of the Seigneuries of the world, I desire to show as in a brief table from what stocks, in a manner all the Commonweals, and Monarchies of the Earth at this day are descended, to the eud that they may observe the changes and alterations here below, and see after what manner free people were made subject to the power of those that were more mighty. This may be chiefly done by the means of the four sovereign Empires, the which after some continuance being divided into many branches, have suffered a great number of principalities well known to us, to rise out of their shipwrecks, and which in time may feel the like accidents, either by their increase, or by the cutting off of some parts.  
The first of these Monarchies owes his beginning to mighty Nimrod, whom some have called Saturn of Babylon. This was he which he founded the principality of the Babylonians (the which was confounded with that of the Assyrians) one hundred thirty and one years after the Deluge: and some hold that the five and fortieth year of his Empire, he sent Aslur, Magog, and Mosc, with certain troops to people countries, and to erect kingdoms by their own names.  
This Nimrod had for successor Bel, called jupiter Bel, who seized upon all the countries towards the West unto Sarmatia in Europe: and his son Ninus, who held the Monarchy after him, extended his bounds farther. After the death of Ninus, his wife Semiramis reigned, and brought Ethiopia under her subjection, and made war against the Indians. But her son Zameis remained quiet, and did nothing worthy of memory. Arius, who succeeded him added the Bactrians and Caspians to his Empire. After whom they put these that follow: Aralius, than Baleus, who extended his bounds unto judea, and after him, Armatrite, then Beloch, who had for successor a second Baleus. This man was followed by Altadas, Mamite, Mancalee, and Sphere: after whom there reigned Mamele, Sparete, and Ascarades, who reduced all Syria under his Empire. After him they reckon twenty kings unto Sardanapalus the eight and thirtieth Emperor, who was forced to burn himself with all his treasure, being reduced to that extremity by two of his Lieutenants, who afterwards divided the Monarchy betwixt them; so as Beloch was king of Babylon, and Arbaces of the Medes and Persians. This Monarchy had continued one thousand and three hundred years, unto the end of Sardanapalus.  
Beloch was the nine and thirtieth, or first king of Assyria in the new Monarchy, and made Manahem king of Israel his tributary; whom the holy Scripture calls Phiel and not Beloch. He had for successor Phul-Assur surnamed Tiglat Pillesser, who seized upon some towns of judea, and led the people captive into Assyria Salmanazar followed him, who made himself master of Samaria, and he had for successor Sennacherib, who was slain by his own children. These murderers fled, and yet they took arms against Assaradon their brother, who had seized upon the Monarchy. Merodach, Lieutenant of the country of Babylon, revolted and having vanquished all, he joined the monarchy of the Assyrians to the Babylonians. Some author's place after him Ben Merodach, and Nabuchodonosor, or Nabuchadnezar, of whom the Scripture makes mention after Merodach. He made war against Egyptians, and took from them all the country which lies betwixt the river of Euphrates, and Pelusium or Damietta: then having vanquished the kings of the Ammonites and Moabites, in the end he subdued all Egypt. After him reigned Euilmerodach, than Labassardach, and after these Balthasar: but some put Balthasar presently after, Euilmerodach his father. This Balthasar was the last Emperor of Babylon, as all authors hold.  
Darius of Media, who ruined the Empire of the Assyrians, and took Babylon is called Cyaxares, son to Astyages the eight, king to the Medians, called by Daniel, Assuerus, who gave his daughter to Cyrus of Persia, his sister's son. This was the beginning of the monarchy of the Persians, the second in number; for that after the death of Darius, all came into the hands of Cyrus, who alone enjoyed the countries of Assyria, Media, and Persia, and had for successor his son Cambyses: after whom reigned Darius' son to Histaspes, to whom succeeded Xerxes his son, who was slain by his own followers, after he had spoiled Greece with two millions of men and had been chased from thence with all his po●er. Artaxerxes Longuemain held the Empire after him: then Darius the basta●●; and after him Artaxerxes Mnemon, whom Ochus the last of Darius the th●●ds sons, succeeded. This monarchy was afterwards governed by the last Darius, vanquished by Alexander, who ruined the monarchy of the Persians, which had continued two hundred years and more.  
Alexander was the author of the third monarchy, the which was presently dispersed, for that it ended with the life of this Prince, after whose death the empire was torn in pieces, and divided among the Noblemen and Captains of his train, which were, Ptolomeus, Laomedon, Cassander, Antigonus, Leonatus, Eumenes, Python, Lysimacus, Antipater, Meleager, and Seleucus; among the which, the chief were, Seleucus' King of Syria, Ptolemy of Egypt, Antigonus of the Lesser Asia, or Anatolia, and Cassander in the end King of Greece, and Macedonia. These ambitious spirits not able to live in rest, there grew great wars among them, and betwixt their children and successors, which gave occasion to the Romans to invade them, and in the end to become Masters of all that part.  
As for the empire of the Romans, for that I have made an ample relation thereof in my discourses, I will pass it over with silence, sending the Reader to that which I have formerly said, to the end he may see how all the countries have been since divided, and after what manner they have drawn the principalities which we see at this day, from those four great and principal pieces dismembered.  
Now that I have freed myself from this little scruple which remained, I will only tell them that shall busy themselves in the reading of these discourses, that I have transplanted some pieces of certain Authors which might serve my design, as well to avoid the reproach of some defect, as to spare the Readers pain in seeking that in many places which they might found in one. Moreover, this, which is a History, except in some places which are subject to the consideration of more important matters, requires no points of wit or subtle inventions, but a naked report of the truth which hath been learned by the writings or verbal relations of men worthy of credit. And of the two principal pieces which shall be found, the first is an Abridgement of the History of the Kings of Persia, compiled by a Portugal, who traveling through Persia, and having recovered the Chronicle of Taric Mirkond, a Persian borne, one of the most famous Historians, and of greatest credit and autheritie among the Persians, took the pains to translate it into the Portugal tongue. This work contains a true relation of the beginning, descent, and succession of the kings of Persia and Hormus, unto the entry of the Arabians and Portugals into those kingdoms; with a List of the Califs of Bagadet or Babylon, which have commanded in Persia since the entry of the said Arabians into those countries. This abridgement of the History contains truth in stead of lies, which antiquity would make us believe of the Persian Monarchy: and shall serve for a great light touching the affairs of this realm, the which are very confusedly written, with great contrarieties and disagreements, by Procopius, Agathius, Genebrard, Zonaras, Tornamira, and other ancient and modern writers. You shall also found another discourse of the beginnings of Knighthood, and Military orders of Christendom, and how, by whom, and at what time they were instituted, and to what intent, and under what rules and disciplines, with the blazons and devices of the said order.  
The other piece which we have held necessary for the finishing of this work, is a discourse of the beginning of Religious orders instituted in Christendom: the which, for that it could not be fitly inserted in all the places where we have discoursed of the religion of States, I have annexed it to the end of this Book. The reading of this little discourse is not only pleasing and curious, but profitable, yea necessary, for such as finding themselves unfit for worldly affairs, desire to embrace a contemplative life, and leaving the temporal, give themselves to the spiritual.  
I do willingly offer you this work, such as it is, and wish you may have as great a desire to read it, as I had to trace it, and that taking some taste in the reading thereof, you may receive as much pleasure, as I have had pains. Read it then I beseech you, not rashly, but with care and diligence, and if any thing dislikes you, blame not the whole body for one blemish or wart. Pass on still to content yourself, and seek the subject that may give you satisfaction; and whatsoever you found, if you will not spare me for mine own defence, do it at lest in regard of my design.  
Farewell.   

❧ The order of all the Estates contained within this book.  
1. A Discourse of the Estate of the king of great Britain, possessing England, Scotland, and Ireland. 
Fol. 1.  2. Of the French kings Estate. 
37.  3. Of the Estates and dominions of the king of Spain, both in Europe, Asia, Africa, and America. 
102.  4. Of the duke of Lorrains Estate. 
283.  5. Of the Estate of the Low Countries, which are now subject to the Archduke Albert of Austria, and Isabel Clara Eugenia his wife, and the donation made unto them by Philip king of Spain before his death. 
289.  6. Of the general Estates of the united Provinces of the Low Countries, and what they now hold, with the articles of truce, which they have made with the king of Spain, and the Archduke. 
319.  7. Of the Commonweal of Geneva. 
349.  8. Of the Commonalties or Cantons of the Swisses. 
353.  9 Of the Estate of the duke of Savoy. 
381.  10. Of the Estate of the Church, with a chronological Catalogue and succession of Popes unto this day: together with the order, names, and titles of the Cardinals which now live. 
394.  11. Of the Estate of Florence. 
472.  12. Of the Estate of the duke of Urbin. 
484.  13. Of the Estate of the duke of Mantova. 
488.  14. Of the Estate of the duke of Modena. 
493.  15. Of the Commonweal of Lucca. 
498.  16. Of the Commonweal of Genova. 
503.  17. Of the Commonweal of Venice, with a List of the dukes and princes which have governed in that Estate. 
516.  18. Of the Commonweal of Ragouse 
541.  19 Of the Estate of the Emperor, with a brief description of the Emperors of the East and West, which have reigned unto this day. 
548.  20. Of the Realm of Hongarie, with a short relation of the differences which happened in the said realm, since the peace made with the Turk in the year 1605, unto this present. 
613.  21. Of the Estate of the king of Poland. 
627.  22. Of the Estate of the king of Denmark. 
653.  23. Of the Estate of the king of Sueden or Sweveland. 
670.  24. Of the Estate of the great duke or emperor of Muscovie. 
685.  25. Of the Empire of the great Cham of Tartary. 
700.  26. Of the Estate of the king of China. 
714.  27. Of the Estate of the king of japon. 
745.  28. Of the Estate of the king of Brama or Pegu. 
751.  29. Of the Estate of the great Mogor. 
760.  30. Of the Estate of the king of Calicut. 
766.  31. Of the Estate of the king of Narsinge. 
772.  32. Of the of Estate of the Sophy of Persia. 779. with a discourse of the kings of Persia, according to Greek and Latin writers 
978.  Another History of the kings of Persia, drawn out of the Chronicle of Mirkond a Persian. 
872.  33. Of the Turks Estates in Europe, Africa, and Asia. 
936.  34. Of the Empire of Presbyter john. 
1077.  35. Of the Estate of the king of Monomotapa. 
1092.  36. Of the Realm of Congo. 
1095.  37. Of the Emperor of Morocco. 
1108.  38. Of the Estate of the knights of Malta. 
1141.  39 Of the beginning of Military Orders, as well Regular, which hath been approved by the See of Rome, under some rule and discipline, as Secular, instituted by Emperors, & Kings, Christian Princes, with their Blazons, and other devices. 
1174.  40. Of the beginning of all Religious Orders, wherein is briefly set down, who were the Authors, under what Popes and Emperors, and at what time they were instituted. 
1195.    

The Estate of the King of great Britain  

❧ A DISCOURSE OF ENGLAND.  

The Contents.  
1. ENgland in old time called Albrov, or Britain, and of their Etymology. 2. Description of this Island, the Situation and bigness. 3. Fertility and health of the country, yet infected sometimes with the plague. 4. It endures no venomous beast: And why there are no Wolves. 5. The river of Themes, Severne, Humber, Trent, and some others. 6. Pearls abounding in this Island in Coesars' time, and of the corselet all embroidered with pearl, which he did consecrated to the goddess Venus. 7. Money of Iron and Copper used by the ancient English. 8. Women in old time common among the English, and commanding Armies. 9 Civility, quickness of spirit, and other good qualities of the modern English, and their exercises. 10. Humour of the English, haughty, and the basest sort inclined to drunkenness. 11. Great wealth of private men growing by the traffic of wool, tin, and herring. 12. London the chief City in England, inhabited by three hundred and fifty thousand souls. 13. Traffic of England valued yearly at some millions of gold. 14. Treasure and revenues of the king of England, what it was whenas king Henry the eight fell from the Church of Rome. 15. Ordinary revenues of the Crown of England at this present. 16. Extraordinary Subsidies of two sorts in England. 17. Expense of diet in the king of England's Court. 18. Penalties imposed upon such as are Papists in England. 19 Extraordinary revenues of the Crown of England. 20. The strong situation of the Island of England, and of the great number of Ships it entertains. 21. Englishmen very expert at Sea. Their traffic into far Countries, both East and West. 22. Number of Soldiers which they may raise in England. 23. Army of England, in what order it went to the siege of Bou●len in the reign of king Henry the eight. 24. English Nobility, and of the divers sorts of Knights in England, and the ceremonies at their creation. 25. Order of the knights of the Garter, and by whom it was instituted. 26. Of the officers of the Crown of England, and what their Lords be. 27. The three Estates, or Parliament of England, their great power, offices, and ceremonies in their assembly. 28. Three kinds of judgements in England: of Royal ●urisdictionss, of Ordinary punishments, and how Trayt●rss are punished. 29. Courts at Westminster, and the starchamber, when instituted. 30. A Catalogue of the Kings of England. 31. Archbishops and Bishops which were, and are at this present in England.   

I Should seem vain, or rather tedious, if I should make relation of the long contention of the ancient names of this Island, for that it seems men should rather expect from my design a consideration of things, than of words. Yet the importune curiosity of such as might demand it at this entrance, shall invite ●● only to say, that according to the fabulous reports of the Grecians, it first carried the name of one Albion, the imaginary son of Neptune; or else according to the Latins, it was so called, by reason of the white Rocks which are seen upon the shore; afterwards it took the name of Britain, of the word Brit, signifying coloured in English; for that the inhabitants of that Island were accustomed to paint their bodies, and since it changed to the name of England, that is to say, the land of the English; for that the English Saxons did enjoy it. This should suffice them that desire to content their minds, or satisfy their sloth that will make nofurther search.  
But to come to the point, The Island of great Britain is in a manner like unto that of Sicily, having three points or capes, which extend themselves after divers sorts. The first which looks towards the West, is that of Belleria, called by the English, The C●pe of Cornwall. The second is that of Cantia, which bends to the East, called at this day, The North Foreland, of the which all the country of that Island which lies towards the East, hath taken the name of Kent, according to the Vulgar. The third is that of Orcas, of Travedee, or Travise, towards the North, called by some Dunghumbehead, or Dunsbihead, and by some others Howburne. This Island is situated towards the West of Europe, one and fifty degrees from the Equator, and is opposite upon the West to Ireland, upon the East to the Low Countries, upon the North to the Islands of Orcades, and on the South to France. As for the circuit, the English, who have more curiously surveyed it, measure it after this manner. They accounted from the cape of Travise, unto that of Belleria, for that the way goes serpent-wise, by reason of the crooked shores, taking it from the West, eight hundred and twelve miles. From that place unto Kent, three hundred and twenty miles. From thence by windings and turnings they reckon unto Travis seven hundred and four miles. So as the circuit of the whole Island contains about 1835. But for that it is a small matter to understand the bounds of a Country, if we do not in like manner know the bounty; I desire before I engage myself in any other discourse, to consider what this Island doth furnish to her Inhabitants, and in like manner what it wants.  

¶ Quality of the Country.  
THe air of this Island is gross, and very subject to mists, rain, and winds; and the grossness of this air is the reason why the cold and heat are never vehement. The nights are clear, and it is not much subject to diseases, so as they use less physic than in any other part of Europe: yet there happens many times a plague which destroys many. The soil is so fruitful in many places, as he that writes the Panegyric to Constantine, hath much commended the fertility. It brings forth all kinds of trees at all seasons, except the fir tree and beech trees: but at this day there are great numbers found of the latter sort: Yet it wants Olive trees, Oranges, and other trees, which do commonly grow in hotter regions. The stocks of Vines are rather for show than any profit unto their masters, for that they carry but few grapes, neither do they ripen in due season. They sow wheat, rye, barley, oats, and all other kinds of pulses. The corn grows soon, and ripens late, by reason of the abundant humidity of the air and soil. There are many small hills without trees, or water, which carries a very thick and ●mall grass, sufficient to feed whole troops of Sheep which they drive thither, the which either for the sweetness of the air, or the bounty of the soil have their wool longer, and more delicate than any other. Some hold that the Shepherds of England will not suffer their sheep to drink at any fountain, so as they are only watered with the ●●aw, for that they have found by long experience, that all other waters were hurtful, and did kill them. Doubtless we may rightly call this wool the Golden Fleece, for that it is the chief ground of the inhabitants wealth, whereby they gather a great quantity of gold and silver from foreign merchants. And of this wool they make such excellent fine Cloth, as the Germane, Polonians, they of Denmark, Sueden, and many other Countries do much esteem it, and do buy it more willingly than any other.  
There are in England great numbers of all sorts of beasts, at the lest of such as we have commonly in these countries, except Asses and Mules, which they have not in such abundance, and Wolves which nowhere are to be seen ranging abroad; for that the inhabitants have been so industrious, or so painful, as they have cleansed the whole country of them, whereas these beasts have been in former times plentifully amongst them: This is the reason why their cattle go freely up and down without any keepers, for that they are freed from this fear, and there are to be seen day and night, great numbers of horse, kine, and sheep in their pastures and fields, which are common to all the neighbours after that Harvest is ended. The country as I have said yields no wine, but in recompense they use beer made of barley and hops, the which is pleasing and profitable to them that use it.  
There are goodly Rivers which water the country, as the rivers of Thames, Severne, Humbar, Trent, and some others of less ●ame. The Horses of this country, which we call geldings, are for the most part gelt, to the end they may continued the longer, being at liberty in the pasture they troth not, but go a kind of amble, with the which they make great speed: at the lest few do the contrary. There are more Coneys than in any country in the world. The Englishmen have an infinite number of foul both wild and tame. The capons of Kent are very great, like unto them of Puluerare in territory of Milan, or them of Man's, or of Saint Geniez. Their geese are very delicate before they have moulted, but being great, their taste is not very pleasing. There is great store of partridge, pheasants, quails, blackbirds, thrushes, and larks: and the larks grow wonderful fat during winter, which is not very sharp; and then they take so great numbers, as their tables are plentifully furnished with them. There are swans in all their lakes and rivers, and early every morning ravens and crows are heard to cry. Many hold it for certain, that there are not so many crows to be found in any country in the world, as in England. This foul doth feed upon worms which breed in this Island in great abundance, by reason of the moisture of the soil: but they do much harm, for they not only eat the corn when it is ripe, but they also pull the seed out of the ground, when as the blade gins to appear: so as the husbandman is forced at that time often to set boys in the field to drive them away; for that their cries only will not serve to put them to flight.  
The English have very good fish, and amongst others the turbot, and the pike: As for the pike (which in former times was not in request) it is now much esteemed; for that being taken out of pools, and put into smaller ponds, they grow wonderful fat, eating the small fish and eales. When as they bring any to cell, they open his belly with a knife, and if by chance the fisherman cannot cell him, he dies not by reason of this opening, but being sowed up again, they put him among Tenches, where the wound is soon closed up, by reason of the glutinous substance of this fish. Their oysters are more delicate than in any other place of the world, and in greater abundance.  
Moreover this Island yields silver, lead, tin, and copper. There is also great store of iron, which makes the best Ordnance in the world; And there hath been found pearls. Suetonius doth observe in the life of Caesar, that the hope of finding pearls in the Island of great Britain, made him to undertake that voyage, and that they were of hat sort, as he could discern the difference of the weight with the hand. But at this day they found not any but small ones and yellow upon the coasts of Scotland and the Orcadeses, the which show not much better than the eyes of whiting. Pliny also saith, that the pearls which are found in England are small, and of a bad lustre: Yet notwithstanding that, Caesar would have it known, that the corselet which he offered unto the image of Venus, was embroidered therewith. This country hath also fountains of salt and hot Baths, very medicinable.  
Hitherto we have made mention of the commodities of England, Now let us in few words show the discommodities, and what it wants and borrows from others, either for necessity, or for pleasure. Among those things which she receives, we must make special mention of Spices, Sugar, and all sorts of first-fruits which come from France and Spain; the Wines, Oils, and Hops, necessary to make Beer, (whereof now they have plenty) the Cloth of gold, and Silks, the greatest part of our Linen cloth, and all kinds of merchandise, besides the Woad, Cochenille, and such like things necessary for dying. Now that we have discoursed of the quality of the Country, let us see that of the persons which inhabit it.   

¶ Manners of the ancient English.  
THE Inhabitants of great Britain did in old time use certain pieces of Copper, or Rings, as some say, or (according to others) plates of iron of a certain weight for their coin. They did not hold it lawful to eat of a Hare, a Hen, or a Goose, and yet they bred many for their pleasures. They of Kent were the most civil amongst them, and did not much differ from the Gauls in their behaviour. Few of them did sow any Corn, and therefore they lived of milk and flesh. They were covered with certain skins, and did colour themselves with woad, to be more fearful in battle, and even the women in some solemnities and ceremonies went naked and painted with this herb. They ware long hair, and all their bodies were shaven, except their head and their upper lip, where they kept their mustachoes. They were sometime ten or twelve which had their wives common, imitating therein the form of Plato's Commonweal, renewed in our age by the Anabaptiss. But they principally which had their wives common among them, were brethren with their brethren, and the children with their fathers; and when these women were delivered, they held them for true fathers of those children who had first accompanied with the women. They used chariots in their battles, and were accustomed to make them run with great speed, casting their darts, so as they did often break the ranks of their enemies by the terror of their horses, and the noise of their wheels; and then being in the midst of troops of horse, they suddenly left their chariots and fought on foot: in the mean time they that guided their chariots retired a little out of the press, but in such sort, that if their masters were priest by the enemy, they might soon recover their chariots and make a retreat. Finally Suetonius terms them barbarous, for that having great abundance of milk, yet for the most part they knew not how to make any Cheese. They called forests compassed in with ditches, Towns, whereas they might defend themselves from the sudden invasions of their enemies. Tacitus writes, That the English were accustomed to have women to command over Armies: and according unto Dyon of Niceas, they never tilled their land, and did live only of hunting, and of the first-fruits of trees, never eating any fish, although they had very good, and in great abundance. They did easily endure hunger, cold, and all discommodities and toils: for being plunged up to the neck in water, they endured hunger for many days, and they were nourished in forests with the barks and roots of trees. They made divers figures upon the bodies of their children, the which did grow with them. They were wonderfully given to Sorcery, yea in such sort, as they were held more skilful in that wicked Art, or at lest as much as they who had purchased their reputation to know the greatest secrets, and the deepest mysteries. They did never eat any thing being at Sea, the which they might ea●●lie do, for that their voyages were short, having no kind of traffic with any foreign Nations. They used a drink made of Barley, as they do in this age. Many things more may be spoken upon this subject: but it is sufficient to make mention of the chief of former●imeses, to come unto the manners of the English of our age.   

¶ Their Manners at this day.  
THE English at this day are neat and civil, and the English gentlemen are full of humanity and courtesy, wherein other nations have no advantage over them; although that the vanity of some doc flatter and deceive them, as they persuade themselves that there can nothing be found graceful, but in their own countries: besides they have quick spirits, prompt and subtle, capable of all arts and sciences; and their bodies have also this particularity, that they are wonderful nimble, and fit for all trials of activity, and for all exercises. The men of quality have a pleasing behaviour, and a sweetness mixed with gravity, a thousand times more seemly than the lightness of many, to whom some give the name of properness or neatness without forcing: and to speak the truth, I do not see that their actions are forced, for that they seem to have received this grace from nature, and not to have gotten it by art. They take delight to feast strangers, and they spare not any thing to make good cheer, with as great freedom as bounty. It is a thing worthy observation, that any stranger of fashion may go and dine with the Lord Mayor of London, who doth keep open house, and gives royal entertainment at his table. They are excellent Archers, and valiant in war. But some think that the greatest part of that Nation run into dangers, rather by a furious motion of nature, than by any full resolution of the knowledge of the danger, which proceeds from true valour: Whatsoever it be, they seem to be ignorant of fear and flight, and to have no other design but to vanquish: so as where there is a good number of this nation in an Army, it is not ill furnished, and there is no need but to lead them wisely. Yet they do not easily endure the discommodities of war, but are full of impatiency, desiring to fight soon with the enemy, and to vanquish or die. They that are given to study, profit so well, as there hath always been seen in England some worthy man which hath made himself famous by the perfect knowledge of many sciences. As for their apparel, they have for a long time found the fashion of the French so proper and neat, that as soon as they have any new fashion, the English carry it into their Country and follow it, though not wholly, either for the insufficiency of their Tailors, or for that they will not be held to be without invention, and to borrow this properness, (or to speak more plainly) this fantasticness from others. And in truth we may partly draw some proof of that which I have spoken from the humour of the English, who excepting some who are well bred, are generally haughty, holding that they exceed all the world in every thing. They have also (specially the base sort) this infirmity, that they love wine exceedingly, and drink more than will suffice them: and whenas they have exceeded in drinking, they use Tobacco, which makes them to voided a part of that wherewith the head is charged, and doth soon ease them; so as they may return to their cups and excess as before. So that in their manners and humours, they are mixed with good and evil, like unto those of all other Nations. But for that it is not only sufficient that a Realm should be accompanied with all the qualities above mentioned, and whereof we have knowledge, but it is also necessary to know in what sort they make their profit, it shall be therefore sit to discourse now of their wealth. For although that riches be an instrument of excess, and a step to honour, yet it is held for so strong a sinew of Common weals, as we may now say, That a Country wants motion and vigour, whenas it is destitute of that part: I will therefore begin the discourse with the profit of private men, and so will show what the King of England may draw from his Estate.   

¶ Riches of England.  
THE wealth of private men in this Kingdom grows first from the sale of their Wools, whereof they make such excellent fine Cloth, as the Germans, Polonians, they of Denmark, Sueden, and of many other Countries, do much esteem it, and buy it more willingly than any other. They hold for certain, that strangers draw in Wool and Cloth out of England, near to the value of a million and a half of gold yearly. Moreover they cell great store of Tin, which comes out of Cornwall, exceeding fine, and in a manner equal to Silver. And of this Tin, and of Lead, the English may draw yearly above four or five hundred thousand crowns. They also make great profit of Herring, which are taken upon the Northern coasts, the which are sent into many countries of Europe. They draw much silver from their Beer, which they of the low Countries do much esteem, as also of their Leather and Sea-coals.  
The City of London, the head of the kingdom, and the abode of kings, which contains with the suburbs, and Westminster, about three hundred & fifty thousand souls, is happily seated upon the river of Thames, whereas there is a great aboard of ships of three or four hundred tons burden, wherein the flowing and ebbing of the sea doth much help them, although it be above threescoore miles from the Sea unto the City. Some hold that in the companies of Adventurers (which are they that may carry merchandise from Flanders to England, and from thence into Flanders) and of the Staplers, who have permission to draw forth wools, there are many men worth fifty or threescore thousand pounds starling, all or the greatest part in ready money, the which according to the ordinary course, is above two hundred thousand crowns, besides many others of divers companies; as merchants of Tin, Spices, and other things called groceries: And that which seems incredible is, that there are Merchants of saltfish extraordinarily rich, of these sums, or greater. And as for the whole Realm of England, Guicchardine did think, that the traffic of England, before the tumults of the low Countries, did amount yearly to twelve millions of gold. Behold what may be spoken of the people's wealth: Now we will treat of the Treasure and revenues of the king, which are necessary to maintain an estate; for that we have seen how prejudicial it hath been to Princes that wanted, and were great spenders, givers, or had small revenues. To come then unto the point, before that king Henry the eight did withdraw himself from the Church of Rome, it is reported, that the ordinary revenues of the Crown of England amounted to above five hundred thousand crowns yearly, which in part was drawn from the wardships of young Orphans, that were under the age of one and twenty years: for all they that have any land, how little soever, which doth hold in knight's service of the Crown of England, remain during their minorities, Wards unto the king, who giving them small portions for their entertainment, receives the rest of their revenues, until they come to the age of one and twenty years, and then they pay a certain sum of money unto the king, to enter into their inheritances: but yet the kings are accustomed in this point to use them graciously. Besides, there is another kind of revenues, which all they pay that acknowledge to hold any thing of the Crown, when as they come to any succession of free lands. And there is also another which is called Relief, which consists in the acknowledgement of fees, the which are many, and of divers sorts, which are of more or less profit unto the king, according to the importance and qualities of the fees: And these revenues are accounted extraordinary, in regard of the ordinary, which are the demeans of the Crown, called the old Rents; whereunto now is annexed that of the Duchy of Lancaster. But above all, there is the revenue of the Custom, which is only of such merchandise as come into the Realm, or go forth, and all pay it indifferently, as well strangers as subjects: but that strangers are charged more than the English. These are the most important revenues of the Crown, which were in old time, and are yet: Besides, there is the profit which is drawn from the mines of Iron, Led, & Tin, but especially those of Tin, there being scarce any part of the Island but is subject unto it, for that the land is full of mines; but above all the country of Cornwall, from whence they draw great abundance, and exceeding fine. There was also, and is yet, the revenues of bishoprics and Abbeys which are voided; and whenas Abbeys (which are very many) were not as they are at this day, it was of great importance; and the nomination of Abbeys, as well as of bishoprics, belongs unto the King, who enjoys the first-fruits, as little, or as long as he lists, according to the importance of the thing that is voided. The King hath the confiscation of Rebels goods, besides the fines which are drawn from many seats of justice, but especially from that which is called the starchamber; in which court enormous offences of all orders are punished with pecuniary mulcts, imprisonment, and often with mutilation of their bodies. And all these revenues, as well ordinary, as extraordinary, did amount (as they said) at the time of their distraction from the Church of Rome, to the sum of a hundred and fifty thousand pounds, which are six hundred thousand crowns. Since that time the kings of England receive the Tenths of all Clergy livings, according to the decree of Henry the eight, and the annates in like manner; so now these revenues are exceedingly increased, the whole ordinary revenues are said to be about a million and three hundred thousand and odd crowns. There is moreover the extraordinary subsidies, which are of two kinds; for that sometimes they are levied generally throughout the Realm, and to this end a Parliament is called, whereas they resolve of that which is necessary, and how they shall proceed: and sometimes also the king requires a kind of subsidy of particular men, which they call a loan, and then every man strives to show his love unto his prince.  
There is no man which doubts, whenas they have no war within the Realm (for that there is not commonly any need for her safety, of any of the most important charges, as entertaining of horse and foot, nor the provision of an Army, for that it is assured of itself:) No man I say will doubt, but it is sufficient not only to provide for the preservation of the King's greatness and dignity, but abundantly to satisfy all his desires, for that in taking away the fees of the king's guard, being three hundred, and of fifty gentlemen servants, and of fifty Pensioners other servants, and deducting the reparation of ports, and of those few ships which are in being, of ordnance, the renewing of arms, and of all sorts of munition, in like manner, the reparation of the king's houses, whereof there are very many within the realm, besides entertainment of judges, and other public officers, all ordinary and necessary expenses for the preservation of a Realm, taking away I say all this, which is not of any great importance, a good part of the rest is consumed in the necessities of the chamber, diet, stable, arms, chapel, wardroab, and other offices, after a very royal manner; for that there is not any nation which spends more than the English, as well in their diet, as in other ordinary things; and the king entertaineth a great number of men, with many distinctions of degrees and offices: So as in the time of the deceased Queen Elizabeth, the only expenses of the Court for diet amounted near to threescoore thousand pounds' starling yearly. The revenues of the Crown then came from these heads, and a great part of them are spent by these means; for, that when things are best husbanded, there remains not over great surplusage for extraordinary necessities, either of war, or any other public occurrents. There remaineth one point only to be added, which is, that the Law imposeth a certain penalty upon such as will live Romish Catholics, and will not be conformable, which yields the king a good revenue. This Realm than hath no extraordinary revenues, but Subsidies which are granted by parliament, in the time of public necessity. but they are paid with great ease, having always two terms of payment given them, and they are taxed according to their estate, being bound to give more or less, according to the prince's necessity. But their valuations are reasonable, not only in respect of every man's estate, but in regard of that which is practised in other Countries: yet the same is not so little, but they commonly draw great sums of money. We have spoken sufficient of the wealth of private men, and of the revenues of the Crown. And although that they be the sinews of war, yet have they need to be fortified with other things, to make a good and firm resistance: So as we will now treat of the forces which this Realm may have.   

¶ Forces of England.  
ENgland is better seated than any other Realm, for the strength thereof; for that it hath two excellent properties, which Aristotle seeks in the situation of a Town; the one a difficult entrance for the enemy, the other is to have an easy going forth for all enterprises. For the Irish Sea which lies upon the West, is so shallow, and so full of flats and dangers, as no great ships can pass; and the British sea which is upon the South, doth flow and ebb, and rise twelve or fifteen fathoms ordinarily, with so great violence, as it is fearful. So as to come into any port, they must have the tide and wind favourable, but especially the tide. And all the coast of this Island is very high and rough, except in some few places, which are well fortified; as Berwick, Dover, and Plymouth: so as we may say, that the whole Island is nothing in a manner but a great for't. We must add to the strong situation, the sea and land forces. For as for those at sea (besides the King's navy, which is of great strength) the Realm hath so many ports, and so frequented with merchants from all parts, as the English say, that the ships which trade there commonly exceed the number of two thousand. But whatsoever it be, it is most certain, that they may draw together four hundred ships, yea more, if necessity requires. And for proof, Edward the third passed to the enterprise of Calais, and since, Henry the eight to the siege of Boullen, with a thousand sail of all sorts. So as it must be a great and difficult enterprise to invade this Island, whereas their ports are not only for the entry, but also for the access very difficult, besides the fortifications which are made. We must add to these difficulties, the valour and experience of that nation at sea, and in those affairs; for that there is not any more hardy, nor more apt to fight at sea than the English. They scour the Ocean, as well in Winter, as in Summer, with wonderful swift sailing vessels, and well furnished with ordnance, whereof they have great abundance. They traffic to Muscovie, Cataia, Alexandria in Egypt, to Constantinople, Livonia, Barbary, and Guinee. They have attempted to pass unto the Indies, sometimes by the West, coasting along the new world, and sometimes by the East, bending their course by Muscovie and Cataia. But it seems that nature hath most commonly opposed herself against their desseigns, and hath stopped their passage. Moreover in the year 1586. they invaded the Island of Hispaniola, and the new found world, yea, before the peace concluded betwixt the kings of England and Spain, they did continually molest the Islands of the Azores, Cape Verd, and brasil. Two of their Captains have with as great courage as fortune, compassed in a manner the whole world.  
Besides all this, there are many trained soldiers in the country, who are good men at land, and are of no small importance, either in regard of the number, or of the quality. As for the number, the Realm is divided into many Counties, in one of them, which is Yorkshire, they make accounted that they can levy threescoore and ten thousand foot. But what soever it be, it is certain, that the Realm can put to field a hundred thousand foot, and twenty thousand horse. Every one of these Counties is governed by a Vicont or Sheriff: but at this day there is a Lord lieutenant, who hath the command and power to levy soldiers when necessity requires; at which time the deputy, lieutenant's, and captains make choice of such as are fittest to serve: For their foot they make choice of the strongest and ablest men.  
As for their horsemen, they choose men of a mean stature, which are nimble and active. Their horses are not good for the shock, like unto the low Country and German horses (their country being to fat to breed them,) But their horsemen are of two kinds, the one hath his arms complete, and serve with lances, and they are for the most part gentlemen: the other are lightly armed, like unto the light horsemen of Italy, wearing a corselet and a morrion, like unto the pikeman, and carrying long slender staves. Although they may put to field above two thousand men at arms, and a great number of light horse, yet do we not found that their horsemen were ever so famous in any combat as their foot. And king Edward the fourth, who had fought so many battles, meaning to show in which sort of men he had most confidence, left his horse, and did fight among the footmen. But to show what a king of England may do, especially this, who withal do●h enjoy all Ireland and Scotland, I have thought it fit to set down the preparation of king Henry the eight, when as he made the enterprise of Boullein. This king past the sea with ●n army divided into three parts, There was in the forward 12000 foot, and five hundred horse lightly armed, besides a thousand horse with shirts of mail and tassets, all which were clad in blue, guarded with read. The rearward was led by the duke of Norfolk, which consisted of the like number of foot and horse, and ware the same livery. Betwixt these went a thousand Irish men, wearing long and strait shirts, with a mantle upon them, the rest was naked, they ware long hair, and went bore headed; every one of them was armed with three darts, and a long sword, and they ware a gauntlet on the left hand up to the elbow; when they come to fight, they truss up their shirts, and are good runners. The battle wherein the king's person was, did consist of twenty thousand foot, and two thousand English horse, all clothed in read, guarded with yellow. They drew after them a hundred great cannons, besides smaller pieces. They carried a hundred mills in carts, every one of which was turned with a horse, and were brought to grinned their corn; they had ovens also upon wagons to bake their bread. The number of carts was so great, as they did environ the whole army like a trench; and to draw these carts, the artillery, and baggage, there came out of the Island about 25000 horse; and beside all sorts of victuals, they brought fifteen thousand beeves, with an infinite number of other cattle. I should be too tedious in my discourse, if I should particularise the great quantity of ladders, bridges, bullets, powder, munition, wood, and other things belonging to military actions, wherewith they were furnished, having not left any thing behind which they held necessary. But as for their shipping, those which were ordinarily entertained, are much diminished, for that there is not much above forty. But we must consider, that these few, with the rest of his private subiects● whereof the king makes use in all occasions, as of his own, paying them as he doth strangers, when necessity doth press him; all these ships I say will not only serve for a defence, but will be able at need to offend, and invade; for that it is reported there is so great a number dispersed in divers parts of the Island, of great and small, fit to serve and to go against an enemy, as if they were drawn together (the which the king may easily do upon any command) they would amount to a great number, the English say four hundred. But admit the number were less, yet without doubt there would be so many, as arming one part of them with soldiers, artillery, munition, and arms, the which they may easily do (for that this Realm, in regard of all these necessary provisions, doth not envy any other) if they did not invade any man, yet at the lest they would not fear standing upon their defence, any force that should assail them.  
As for men of action, some hold that the king is able to arm five and twenty thousand Corslets, besides the Noble men and private Barons, wherewith every one of them is furnished according to his train and means. And although they be not all trained soldiers, yet being in the company of them that have been practised (for that many of this Nation, as well as of others, go here and there to the wars) they would work great effects, for the natural inclination they have to war: and even they that shall be unarmed, would by the same reason show great proofs of their persons. Whenas England was not united unto Scotland, the Sea did fortify it sufficiently against all other Nations, except the Scottish, who are in the same Island. But the English had assured that frontier with a good garrison at Berwick, a strong place, seated upon the river of Tweed, and of great traffic, by reason of the fishing for Salmon; this place was in old time taken by the English from the Scottish men. This is all that can be spoken of the Forces of England. It is now fit to treat of the government of this Realm, for that it were not sufficient to be rich, strong, and peopled, if it were not also well governed; for that we know well, that many Commonweals which have not wanted any thing of that we have observed in this Realm, have notwithstanding come to ruin for want of good conduct.   

¶ Government of England.  
THe Crown of England is successively hereditary to them that are nearest of the blood, and whenas the Males fail, the Females succeed; and hereupon the English allege that which is written in the book of Numbers, That whenas a man dieth without any sons, the succession shall belong unto his daughters; which custom is not received in France. The realm is divided among the Nobility, Gentry, Burgesses, and Commons. Among the Nobles, next to the king, they put the Princes, Dukes, Marquesses, Earls, viscounts, and Barons, who are called Lords and Noblemen; and these are followed by Knights, esquires, and Gentlemen. All Dukes, Marquesses, Earls, viscounts, and Barons, receive their dignities from the Prince, or take that of the Father, who hath carried some one of these titles; for the eldest son of a Duke, during his father's life time shall be called Earl; and the son of an Earl, Viscount, or Baron▪ but the youngest sons shall be but esquires. They do commonly call all the younger sons of a Duke, Lords, as they do an Earls eldest son. No man is borne a Knight, not not the Prince of Wales. Knights are either made before a battle, to encourage men to do well, or after a battle, when they have given good proofs of their valour, or else for some great hope they have of them in time of peace. But they are not all made after one manner, for some are made by the king, others by his commandment and authority, and some by the election of a General of an army, who finds them worthy of this honour. When any one is made Knight, he knelt down, and then the king lays a naked sword upon his shoulder, and speaks these words; Rise up Sir Knight. The knights of the Bath are made at the Coronation of kings, with long and curious ceremonies. Knight Bannerets are made in the field, & may carry their arms in their Ensigns, like into Barons; but there are few of this order now living in England. Of what rank of knights soever a man be, his wife is presently called Lady, as well as a Barons: but as for the husband, he hath not the name of a Baron, but only they add Sir unto his christian name. As for the knights of the Garter, their order was instituted by Edward the third, and it is the most honourable in England: I will not speak of the Subject, for that it is held base, and for that this order is no kind of policy, but an ornament to the Realm: I will leave this discourse to come unto the rest. esquires are they which carry the mark of their nobility in their Arms, and some hold that this name comes of the Scutcheon or Target which they did carry before knights or Noblemen, and it was given them to distinguish them from private soldiers. Gentlemen are all they that have it by birth and race, or are made so after any sor●. And certainly they become gentlemen in England very easily, for that all such as study the Law, or make profession of the liberal sciences, and line not of their labour, have the name of Master, which should be only given to Gentlemen and esquires, and are esteemed gentlemen. After gentlemen they place Burgesses, who have not only some office in their Town, but are capable of any; such persons must serve their Commonweals in such places where they devil; and they are sometimes deputed to be Burgesses in parliament, whereof the most ancient Towns do usually sand two. The offices of the Crown of England are for life, and if they be not altogether conformable in name to them of other Realms, and that the charge be different, yet in the administration, their authority is equal to those of other kingdoms. The chief Officers are these; The Lord Chancellor, The high Treasurer, The lord Privy seal, the great Chamberlain, the Constable, the lord Martial, and the Admiral; but the charge of Constable and Martial are only in time of war, or at a Coronation, or some such like ceremony. As for others, you must understand, that all do at this day belong unto the king, and the Lords have power over their subjects, having paid them their annual rents, for that all customs, taxes, and impositions belong unto the king. All the chief Towns of the Realm are governed by the king's Officers, and whereas in former time they had absolute Lords, at this day there remains no memory but the title of those places which the king keeps, in honouring whom he pleaseth, adding to these titles some small revenue, and yet they that have these titles, have no kind of jurisdiction over those places or countries, whereof they carry the title, neither may they deal with the government. Whenas the king hath given any title of honour to any family, it can never be lost, but for some heinous crime, in which case he that ●●th the title looseth i●, and so do all his discendants. Whenas this privation happens, they call it a tainting of the blood, which is as much as to say in effect, that they are deprived o● their nob●●●●, after which the king enjoys their lands, unless they be restored, the which hath happened in some houses: but they cannot be restored unto their blood, but by a parliament.  
The places whereas all Laws are made, controversies decided, and offenders punished, are the high Court of parliament, the starchamber, the Chancery, the king's Bench, the Common Pleas, the Exchequer, the court of Wards, whith the court of Requests, and the Duchy of Lancaster. All absolute power consists in the Parliament, which abrogates old Laws, and makes new, disposeth of the possessions of private men, makes bastards legitimat, changeth weights and measures, prescribes of the right of succession, ordains of taxes and subsidies, restores families dejected through the errors of their predecessors, and hath power to punish such offenders as the king hath put into their hands. The Parliament consists of two houses, the Upper or higher house, which is of the Lords spiritual and temporal, whereas the lord Chancellor is the mouth or Speaker of the house. The King hath his chair and cloth of estate at the upper end of the room, but he comes not commonly there, but at the beginning of a Parliament or Session, and at the conclusion. The Chancellor sits directly before the king, and nearer unto him than any other. The Archbishops and Bishops are on the right hand; and the Earls and Barons are on the left. The judges, with some masters of Requests, are in the midst between these two ranks, being set upon woolsacks; they have no voice in the house, but are only employed to carry messages to the house of Commons, and to give their opinions in points of law. The lower house of Parliament, or house of the Commons (as they call it) is held in a distinct place from the other, consisting of knights and Bourgesses to the number of four hundred threescore and odd, every County making choice of two knights, who speak for the whole Shire; and every borough Town sends two Bourgesses. At the beginning of the assembly they make suit unto the king, to give them leave to choose a Speaker, who is most commonly some learned and eloquent Lawyer, that is well pleasing unto him; his charge is to propound all bills, petitions, and other matters which are presented unto the house. Either house hath a Clerk to keep Records of all Acts that are past, as well those that are printed, as those that are not published, but concern the interest of private men. The manner to summon a Parliament is: The King sends forth his writs to all the Lords spiritual and temporal, that have any voice in Parliament, who are bound to come up at the time prefixed, which is most commonly forty days: and the king doth also sand his writs to the Shirises of Counties, to choose two knights in the general assembly of the freeholders, to speak their opinions for all the rest. Bills are preferred indifferently to either house; and when they have passed the one, after three readings, they are sent unto the other by certain Committees. If the Commons like of that which hath past the Lords, they confirm it with this subscription, Les Communs ont assenty, The Commons have consented: and contrariwise, if the Lords allow of that whereof the Commons are author, they writ, Les Signior ont assenty, The Lords have assented. When as the Lords and Commons concur not in opinion, they choose certain Committees of either house to debate that which is in question, and to propound their opinions together, after which they do many times yield one to an others opinion: So as nothing can be of force, unless it be allowed by both houses; which is not sufficient, unless it be in the end confirmed by the king. The last day (the King being present) the Clerk reads the title of every Act, and if it shall pass, he says, Le Roy le veult, The king will have it so; if not, he saith only, Le Roy s' advisera, The king will be advised, and then the Parliament is either dissolved, or prorogued to an other time; and all public Acts are presently printed.  
The king of England hath absolute power to pardon all crimes; yet in former times some Earls, and the Princes of Wales have challenged this right. They do commonly speak unto the king kneeling, and no man dare presume to walk in the presence chamber, although the king be absent, no more than in France, neither may any man be covered there.  
There are three kinds of trial in England, that of the Parliament, the Combat, and judicial courts. We have already declared what their manner is to give sentence in parliament. As for the Combat, it is not now in use, yet is it not forbidden, so as the English hold, that they will not refuse it any man that demands it justly: the form is to be seen in the Commentaries of Britton. These two first kinds of trial are absolute and without Appeal, like unto that which the judges decree in their assemblies. The king's Bench is so called, for that the kings of England were wont to sit there, and that all causes which concern the Crown, and which are pleaded at the king's instance, are tried there. The chief justice of England is judge in this Court, with three assistants. The court of Common pleas is that whereas private men's suits are tried, and there is in this Court one chief justice, and three assistants. All judgements given by judges, are most commonly executed by the sheriffs. There is also an Exchequer, for that which concerns the king's treasure and revenues. As for punishments, they have not in a manner any other, for murder, felony, ravishments, and such like crimes, which are not high Treason, but hanging, and it is not very usual to rack any man, to cut of his head, to quarter him, or to lay him upon a wheel. If any one attempts to murder or poison an other, he shall not die; for that the king hath not lost a subject. If any murder be committed, all that have assisted are taken for murderers, and condemned to die. Traitors are first hanged, then being cut down alive, their bowels are pulled out, their heads cut off with an axe, and their bodies quartered, and set upon poles in divers places. All Noble men that be of the Parliament, have this privilege, that being accused of Treason, they are judged by their peers.  
There is an other Court in England, the like whereof is not to be seen in any other place, called the Star Chamber, whereas the Chancellor, and all the privy Council with other judges do sit. It was ordained to judge of all riots, and to suppress the insolency of great men, whereas the party delinquent is most commonly committed to the Fleet, and condemned in a fine to the king, and expenses to the party. Some writ that it was instituted whenas Cardinal Wolsey Archbishop of York was Chancellor. The matter being pleaded by the Lawyers: and all proofs produced, than they go to sentence, every one of the judges and Lords gives his censure of the fact and punishment; the puni● speaks first, and the Chancellor, who presides in the Court concludes all, and gives the definitive sentence; the ordinary punishment is a pecuniary fine and imprisonment: whereunto they do sometimes add a corporal punishment; as for forgery and pe●●●rie. There is also the Court of Wards, which doth judge of all that concerns Orphans: and ●n the Court of that Duchy of Lancaster, all real and personal actions which do in any any sort concern the Duchy. There is the Court of Requests, which was first instituted to take notice of all petitions and complaints that were presented unto the king. But now they decide controversies between party and party: It is also called a Court of Conscience.  
There is also an Ecclesiastical jurisdiction, called the Christian Court, whereas the Archbishops and Bishops do preside; Their jurisdiction doth chiefly consist in four causes; in Testaments and Legacies, Tithes, Mortuaries, Marriages, Adultery or fornication: finally of all that concerns the preservation and ornament of the Church, and which belongs to the entertainment of Religion. And this is the order of the justice of England, and their form of government.   

¶ Religion of England.  
THe English as some writ, received the Christian Religion from joseph of Aramathia, and then from Pope El●uthere, by the preaching of Fugare and Damian, who baptised king Luce, and many of his people, about the year of our Redemption 180. But the Island being afterwards held by the English Saxons, Pope Gregory the great sen● Augustine and Me●●te, with many others thither, who renewed the Faith, and confirme● Ethelbert king of Kent, about the year 506: from which time it did begin still to degenerate into the late● Roman superstition, until king Henry the eight, finding some oppo●●●ionss and notorious fraud at Rome, upon his divorce from Katherine of Castille, who had been wife unto his elder brother Arthur, withdrew himself from the obedience of the Pope of Rome, and took upon him the title of Supreme head of the Church of England; with the consent of the Estates; Then he dissolved all the Religious houses, and ga●e the l●●dss to lay men, yet he retained the Mass still, and most of the ceremonies of the Romish religion. But king Edward the sixt his son and successor, abolished the Mass, and all the superstitious ceremonies of the Romish Church, planting the true profession of the Gospel, and causing divine Service to be said in the English tongue. But after his death, Queen Marie his sister coming to the Crown, restored the Mass, with all other Popish ceremonies; whereupon followed great persecutions of those that made profession of the Gospel, and did impugn the Pope, so as many were forced to fly into other Countries for refuge, during this storm, the which continued about four years. After whose death, Queen Elizabeth her sister succeeding her, she settled the same Religion which her brother king Edward had embraced, calling home all those that had fled from persecution, giving them spiritual dignities, according to their merits. This profession of the Gospel did flourish all the time of her reign, (notwithstanding the malicious practices of the Popes of Rome her adversaries:) and doth more and more, under the happy and peaceful reign of king james the first now reigning. Thus having related at large all the parts and conditions of this Realm, we must end this discourse, to come unto that of Scotland: having first represented the names of the Kings of England, with the ancient Archbishops and Bishops of that Realm.   

¶ Kings of England.  
THe history of England is full of confusion, until Egbert, who reigned in the year 801. And therefore I will make no difficulty to pass over with silence those that have go before: And to begin with him.  

EGbert began his reign in the year 801. he reigned 37 years, and died in the year 838, There succeeded him,  
Edelphe, who reigned 20 years: he died in the year 858.  
Ethelbald reigned 5 months.  
Ethelbert reigned 5 years: he died in the year 863.  
ethelred reigned 9 years: and died in the year 872.  
Alurede reigned 28 years: he died in the year 900.  
Edward the ancient reigned 24 years: he died in the year 924.  
Adelstan reigned 16 years: he died in the year 940, having subdued the whole Island.  
Edmond reigned 6 years: he died in the year 946.  
Eldred reigned 9 years: he died in the year 955.  
Edwin reigned 4 years: and died in the year 959.  
Edgar reigned 16 years: he died in the year 975.  
St Edward the Martyr reigned 3 years: he was slain by the ambushes of his mother in law alfred, he was afterward put in the Catalogue of Saints. He died in the year 978.  
ethelred reigned 38 years: and died in the year 1016.  
Edmond Ironside reigned 1 year: and died in the year 1017.  
Canutus' king of Norway and Denmark, and afterwards king of England, having expelled Edmond and Edward, children to Edmond Ironside, reigned in England 20 years, he died in the year 1037.  
Harald reigned 4 years: and died in the year 1041.  
Canutus the second, he reigned 2 years: and died in the year 1043.  
Edward, a holy king reigned 23 years: and died in the year 1066.  
Harald the second reigned 3 years: he died in the year 1067.  
William Duke of Normandy, expelled Harald, and made himself master of all England: he reigned 21 years: and died in the year 1088.  
William Rufus reigned 13 years: he died in the year 1101.  
Henry the first reigned 35 years: he died in the year 1136.  
Stephen Earl of Boulloin, nephew to Henry, seized upon the realm, he reigned 19 years: and died in the year 1155.  
Henry the second reigned 33 years, he died in the year 1190.  
Richard the first reigned 10 years: he died in the year 1200.  
john reigned 17 years: & died in the year 1217.  
Henry the 3 reigned 56 years, he died in the year 1273.  
Edward the first reigned 35 years, and died in the year 1308.  
Edward the second reigned 19 years, he died in the year 1327.  
Edward the third reigned 51 years, he died in the year 1378.  
Richard the second reigned 22 years, he died in the year 1400.  
Henry the fourth reigned 14 years, he died in the year 1414.  
Henry the fifth reigned 9 years, he died in the year 1423.  
Henry the sixth reigned 38 years, he died in the year 1461.  
Edward the fourth reigned 23 years, he died in the year 1484.  
Edward the fifth reigned two months, he was murdered by his uncle being but 11 years old.  
Richard the 3 reigned 2 years, he died in the year 1486, being slain in battle by his Competitor Henry.  
Henry the seventh reigned 24 years, he died in the year 1510.  
Henry the eight reigned 37 years, and died in the year 1547.  
Edward the sixth reigned 6 years, and died in the year 1553.  
Marry married to Philip of Spain, reigned 5 years and three months, she died in the year 1558.  
Elizabeth reigned 45 years, and died in in the year 1603.  
james king of Scotland hath succeeded her in the Realm of England, and reigns at this present.    

¶ Archbishops and Bishops of England.  
THere were in old time, and are yet at this day, two Archbishoprikes in England, who have under them many Suffragan Bishops: as may be seen in a Book set forth by Aubert a Cannon of Andwerpe, entitled, Notitia Episcopatuum Orbis Christiani, as followeth.  

archbishopric of Canterbury.  
London.  
Winchester.  
Ely.  
Lincoln.  
Salisbury.  
Bath and Wels.  
Coventrie and Lichfield.  
Peterborough.  
Exeter.  
Gloucester.  
Hereford.  
Norwich.  
Rochester.  
Chichester.  
Worcester.  
Bristol.  
St. David's.  
Bangor.  
Landaffe.  
St. Asaph.   

archbishopric of York.  
Durham.  
C●ester.  
Car●●●l.      

A DISCOURSE OF SCOTLAND.  

The Contents.  
1. SCotland in old time called Albania. Description, and the Provinces 2. Chief. Rivers of the Country. 3. Forest of Calidonia, where there are wild Bulls 4. A mine of Coals, which doth abound with Bitumen. 5. A mine of Gold in Crauford. 6. The lake Loumond, and the singularities thereof, remarkable for a floating Island. 7. Buthquhania, a Country which endures no Rats. 8. A Fountain from whence flow drops of Oil of great virtue. 9 Scottishmen in old time called Picts, for that they did paint their bodies and hair: Their manner of fight and arms in war. 10. S●ottishmens divided now into highland and Low land men, their arms and suffering in war: Recommended for their fidelity. 11. Sterility and wants of Scotland. 12. Edinburgh the chief City; the description: It is called the winged Castle. 13. Nobility of Scotland. 14. Golden Knights, Barons, Gentlemen. 15. Estates of the Realm consisting of three sorts of people; and how assembled. 16. College of justice, called the Session, instituted by king james the fifth. Subalternal Courts in every County, and their jurisdiction. 17. Scotland, when it received the Christian Faith. 18. Archbishops and Bishops in Scotland. 19 A Catalogue of the kings of Scotland, and their reign.   

THe most Northern part of great Britain is called Scotland, and was sometimes termed Albania, yea the Scottishmen which retain their ancient language, call it Albain, and the Irishmen Allabani. This Country is divided from England towards the South by the rivers of Tweed and Soluay. On the other three parts, it is bounded by the Sea. It is in length from the river of Tweed, unto the furthest part of the North 257 English miles; and it is 190 broad. It is divided into many Provinces, that is to say, Lauden, sometimes called Pictland, that is to say, the Country of the Picts, that is hilly and without trees; but the people are civil and courteous. Edinburgh which is the abode of the kings of Scotland, is seated in this Country, with many other good Towns. Next unto it is the Country of Merk, that is to say, the bounds of England and Scotland: that of Teifidale, that is to say, the valley of the river of Teisie, near unto England, which is full of rocks: Eschedale, near to the river of Esque: Eusedale, Niddesdale, so called of the river Nith: the valley of Anandale: Galloway, which lies towards the West, the which abounds more in pasture than in first-fruits: Caricte, which hath reasonable good pastures: coil, which is a lean and barren soil: Sterlingh, Mentheth, Cluidisdale, Lennox, Ernovale, Strathern, Story, Rossen, and Argile, which abounds in lakes, and hath more pasture than corn: this was the Country of the Calenodiens, by whom all the Region is named of the inhabitants, Allibanum: Cantire, which signifies a corner of a land, a waste Country, and full of marshes: Strathnahern: 〈◊〉 small province more fer●●●● 〈◊〉 ●he rest, in the which is the town of Saint An●●●●es: Anguse, a pleasant countr●●▪ ●eere unto the river of Zau: Marre, and Murrey, ●●●●●ries lying upon the Sea: 〈◊〉 ●●●●han, Rosse, Marray, Nesseland, and Tarbath: after that Bear●●ossen, and Sutherland: and in the end Cathnes.  

¶ Quality of the Country.  
SCotland is rough and hilly, and nothing so fertile as England, but it abounds more with Fish. The sea which environs it, hath great store of Oysters, Herrings, Coral, and Compels, an● in the valleys there are many lakes, marshes, rivers, and fountains, whereas they found abundance of Fish. Most of these lakes come from the mountain Grampie, where are also the springs of three rivers, which carry boats; the river of cloyed, sometimes called Aleuth, which falls into the Irish sea: that of Tayus, which passeth all the rivers of Scotland in greatness, whereof a part comes out of the country of Argile, 〈◊〉 a 〈◊〉 of the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, and a part out of the country of Strathern, 〈…〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 self into the german sea, and that of Forthea, which falling into the german sea, makes that great gul●e which is commonly called the Scottish sea. 〈◊〉 is also (besides Tweed, which divides England from Scotland) the rivers of 〈◊〉, Nesse, and Louth. There are mountains which have certain little plains, which have very good pasture, and some of them have both Alabaster and Marble. The forests are full of Deer, and other wild beasts, especially that of Caledonia, where there are also white bulls, which are so wild, as they cannot be tamed, and their 〈◊〉 is like unto a Lions. There is a certain place called the Mine of Coals, which 〈◊〉 with Bitumen, that doth sometimes burn, to the great hurt of the inhabi 〈◊〉▪ 〈◊〉 Scotland hath mines of gold, silver, quick silver, lead, and copper, 〈◊〉 in Crauford, they say there is a mine of gold found. In Galloway there is 〈◊〉 writers affirm) a lake called Myrtow, whereof the one part doth freeze in 〈◊〉 and the other is never frozen in the sharpest cold. There are in Caricte great oxen, whose flesh is very tender and pleasing to taste, and their suet hath this property, that 〈…〉 always like unto oil. In Lennox there is a great lake called Loumond, which is above 24 thousand paces long, and eight broad: in it there are thirty islands, whereof the greatest part are full of villages, well inhabited. In this lake there are three things worthy of memory, that it yields very good fish without any fynnes: that without any breath of wind the waves are sometimes so great, as they amaze the hardiest mariners: and ●astly an Island which floats continually where the wind drives it, and yet there is good pasture in it. In Buthquanie they see not any Rats, and if any be brought thither, they die presently. In the country of Fife they draw forth abundance of a kind of black stone, very fit for firing. Some two miles from Edinburgh (as some say) there is a fountain, where as are seen drops of oil floating, which is of that nature, as if you take not up any, they do not increase, and if you take up much, yet there still remains the same quantity of oil. This liquor is good against the roughness of the skin.   

¶ Manners of the ancient Scots.  
SO●● hold that the Scottishmen were in old time called Picts, that is to say, painted; for th●t they were accustomed to paint their bodies. But this name was not common to all, 〈◊〉 the two nations of Picts and Scots, gave their names to the inhabitants of the most ●●●therne parts of great Britain, which they invaded, according to the place whereas 〈◊〉 of these Nations stayed. These Picts made their hair also blue by art. Boetius saye●●hey were very sober in their eating and drinking, and slept little; that they made bread of any corn, and that they did commonly eat beef, or what they took in hunting; but they did use their beeves not like unto other nations, for they did o● their calves, or did geld them for their tillage, and they did eat their Cows when th●●●ere with calf, for they were then fattest: and sometimes they fed upon fish: Sometimes they did not eat till night, having made a light breakfast, and at night they made good cheer, having a drink compounded of time, mynts, anise seeds, and other good herbs, of a good scent, or else beer: but in the time of war, they drank nothing but pure water, and they carried with them as much meal as would suffice them a day. They did eat flesh half boiled, holding it to be of better taste, and to retain the substance: and they did also feed upon fish dried in the sun, if they found not any thing else to eat. In time of peace they were always bareheaded, and had their hair cut, only they left a little tuft upon the forehead. They did willingly go barefooted, to harden themselves for all discommodities. Their nether-stocks went not beneath the knee, and their breeches were of flax or hemp. In Summer their cloaks were of fine cloth, and in winter it was of a course wool: their lodging was on the ground, or on a form with a mattress. Their children were only fed with their mother's milk, and if any one did put forth her child to nurse, she was suspected of adultery. If they were vanquished in battle, they fled to the mountains, & were never quiet, until they were revenged. If the gentlemen were in danger in battle, their subjects and servants did hazard themselves to save their lives, or to die with them. They did plant upon Noble men's tombs, as many Obelisks as there had been enemies slain in fight under their commands. He that going to the war, or being in camp, was found without his iron to strike fire, or without his sword by his side, or in his hand, was whipped for ignominy: and in those days they were lightly armed with certain corslets of iron, but much more of boiled leather; and for their other arms, they had the bow, the lance, and the sword. If any one went from the Camp without leave, the first that met him might kill him, and his goods were presently confiscate. Going forth to fight, they slew the first beast they encountered, and wetting the points of their swords in the blood, they tasted of it, hoping that this ceremony should be unto them a happy presage of the victory. They drowned them that were much given to eating and drinking. They used Hieroglyphike letters, like unto the Egyptians. And this is all that can be spoken of their ancient manners.   

¶ Manners of the Scottishmen of these times.  
But before we proceed any further, we must note, that the Scottishmen are divided into highland & Low-land men, the one being more courteous than the other, and the first very rude, yet Christians, and very valiant in the war, as having no apprehension of death. The civil are they which live in the Southern parts, which is called Low-land, more fertile than the Northern, and the inhabitants are called Low-land men, who commonly speak the English tongue. The rude are they which devil towards the North, and they are called men of the highland country. They retain the manners, language, and arms of the Irish, from whom they had their beginning. They have for their arms a bow and arrows, a broad sword, with a sharp pointed dagger. Finally, the Scottishmen are very witty, and industrious; but given to revenge, when as they found means to take it. They are also very subtle and politic, and inclined to factions and seditions, and very capable of all sciences. They have been held for a long time to be very faithful: whereof the French kings, who use them for the guard of their bodies, give sufficient testimony.   

¶ Riches of Scotland.  
THe country of Scotland is in some parts lean and barren, The traffic of come, of wool, and sale of Smiths coals, of carseys, of linings, of flax, of hides, and of herring, and of salmon, which is the most profitable, frees them from discommodity, and makes them to use that which foreign Nations brings unto them, if it be necessary. And they are not without rich Merchants, who traffic into all parts, especially towards the North; and there comes unto them much shipping, by reason of the many 〈◊〉 ports they found there. But a great part of merchandise, especially of that which selves more for pleasure then necessity, is transported into England.   

¶ For●es of Scotland.  
AT this day that Scotland and England are under one King, I do not see that any other doth exceed this Realm in strength of situation; for that it is compassed round about ●y the Sea, and within it, the Country is so full of rocks, mountains, and forests, as it is held for this cause to be invincible. For if the inhabitants be forced to fly, they 〈◊〉 to the mountains, where ●hey live of dried fish, and of the flesh of wild beasts. If ●●y one should assail them in these places, they are so favourable unto them, as a ●●●●●full of men were able to defeat a great army. They have two Forts only upon the frontiers of England, whereof the one is Dunbar▪ a great port on the English coast, and in the gulf of Edinburgh, which is opposite to B●rwicke: the other is towards the West named 〈◊〉, ●ea●ed ●pon a high mountain, separated from others, and this ●ort ●●emes opposite in some sort to Starling. As for other places, there is Edinburgh, called by the Scot●ish Irish, Dun Baden, that is to say, the Town of Eaden. Some hold that it is the place which Ptolomee called the winged Castle; for that Edemborou●h signifieth a winged Castle. This is the capital Town of Scotland, seated on high, being a mile long from East to West, but much less in breadth. This Town is rich, and of reasonable strength, being compassed in with good walls. Upon the West part there is a high rock, and upon this rock a strong Castle, under which is seen a deep valley on every side, but towards the Town: and for this cause they hold this Fort impregnable, unless they contend with them that are masters of the Town. This Fort is called the Maiden castle, for that the Picts daughters were in old time kept and bred up there, until they were fit for marriage. There is also Abberdeene, which is a good for●●pon the German Sea. Moreover, there is in Marnie a good and strong Town called Fordun, whose situation will trouble them that should assail it. As for the men▪ we have already spoken of their courage, and their number is sufficient: so as they are able to resist a great foreign power, especially at this time, whenas one king enjoys both Scotland and England, the Scottishmen should always by assisted by the English, who without doubt being united, would make a great defence.   

¶ Government of Scotland.  
SCotland is composed of three Orders, that is to say, of the Nobility, the Clergy, and the third Estate. The King, to speak after their manner, is direct Lord of all the lands, and hath Royal authority and jurisdiction both over Secular and Clergy. The king's eldest son, as soon as he is borne, is called Duke of Rothsaie, and Seneschal of Scotland. The kings other children are simply called Princes. The most honourable among the Nobility, were in old time the Thanes, who were Officers unto the king, whereof the chief were called Abthanes, & they that were inferior, Vnder-Thanes. But these names are lost by degrees, since the time that Malcolme the third of that name, 〈◊〉 of Scotland, gave the title of Earl and Baron, received from the Normans, to gentle●●n of best merit. Since which time there is also crept into Scotland as well as into Engla●d the titles of Dukes, Marquises, Earls, viscounts, and Barons. The first that brought the title of Duke, was Robert the third, about the year 1400, as the king of England 〈◊〉 reigns at this present, hath brought in the honourable titles of Marquis and Vico●●●●▪ These are held for the chief of the Nobility, and have place and voice in Parliament they are called Lords, like unto the Bishops.  
Among the other ●obles, they put in the first rank the golden Knights, who take their oath with great solemnity. In the second rank are they whom they term Lairds, 〈◊〉 which number no ma●●●as admitted, unless his lands did hold immediately of the 〈◊〉 and had high, middle, and base justice. In the third rank they put those that are issued from honourable families, but without any title, and they are particularly called Gentlemen. All the rest, as Citizens, Merchants, Artisans, and others, are ranked among the people; yet the multitude doth in a manner term them all gentlemen, that are rich, or keep good houses. Moreover, the younger sons of Earls, Lords, and Knights, succeed not to any part of their father's patrimony; for that the whole succession descends unto the elder by the Laws of Scotland, to the end they may preserve their families. As for the people, to the end that no insupportable thing be ordained against them in Parliament, it is lawful for them to sand three or four Bourgesses of every Town, there to speak their opinions freely of any thing that shall be propounded, with the other two orders. In regard of power, there is not any one so potent as the Viceroy, Regent, or Governor of Scotland, who governs the whole Realm, either in the absence of the king, or at his decease, or else during the King's minority. The authority of the Parliament of the Realm is very absolute, and this assembly consists of three sorts of persons, that is to say, of Lords spiritual, as Bishops, Abbots, and Priors; of Lords temporal, as Dukes, Marquises, Earls, viscounts, and Barons; and in the third place, of the deputies of Towns. It is not long since that they have added to this number, two Deputies for every County. The king prescribes the time when they shall assemble, and sends forth the Summons. The causes of the assembly being declared by the Chancellor, the Lords Spiritual do apart choose eight of the temporal Lords, and the Temporal Lords as many of the spiritual, and all these being together, name eight of the Deputies of the Counties. And as many Bourgesses of Towns, which make two and thirty, who with the chancellor, Treasurer, Keeper of the Privy Seal, king's Secretary, and others, allow or reject that which shall be propounded to the Parliament, having first imparted it unto the king. Those things which are admitted are carefully debated, by the three Estates, and that which is allowed of by the plurality of voices, is presented unto the king, who presently doth signify his pleasure; and if any thing dislikes him, it is presently razed out.  
That which holds the first rank next unto the Parliament, is the College of justice, which they term the Session, the which was instituted by king james the fifth, in the year 1532, appointing a Precedent, and fourteen Councillors; whereof seven were Clergy men, and seven of the laity, (to whom they have since added the Chance lor, who holds the first place, and five other Councillors) three chief Registers, and as many Advocates as shall be thought good by the Parliament. This Court is held every day except Sunday and Monday, from the first of November, unto the 15 of March, and from the day after Trinity Sunday, unto the first of August. The rest of the time is spent in vacations. They judge according to the Laws and ordinances of the Realm; and whenas they fail, they have recourse unto the Civil Law.  
There are also Subalternal Courts in every County, whereas the Viscount, or his Lieutenant doth justice to them of the country, and sometimes they appeal from his sentence to the College of justice: Most of these viscounts are by succession; and their titles are hereditary: for, the Kings of Scotland, to bind the Nobility more straightly unto them, did in old time institute viscounts to be perpetual and hereditary. There are also civil Courts in Royal fees, in which there are Bailiffs, even as there are Magistrates in boroughs and free Towns. There are other Courts, which they call the Commissaries Court, whereof the chief is at Edinburgh, whereas they pled before four judges; touching Testaments, the rights of Ecclesiastical ly●●ingss, Tithes, Divorces, and such like, whereof the knowledge doth of right belong unto the Church.  
As for criminal causes, the chief judge Royal hath his seat at Edinburgh, (this office hath been long in the house of the Earl of Argathelie) and these judges appoint two or three Lawyers, to take Informations of capital crimes, or that concern the cutting off of any member, or the confiscation of any man's goods. Many times the king appoints particular judges to take knowledge of a crime. The viscounts in like manner in their jurisdictions, and the Magistrates in their Towns take notice of a murder, and 〈◊〉 out the murderer to death, so as he be taken within twenty four hours: but ●●ter that time, the knowledge belongs to the judge Royal, or to them that have Commission. Some Noble men have the same privilege against thieves, which are taken in their jurisdictions. This is all which can be spoken touching the politic Government: Now let us come unto the Church.   

¶ Religion of Scotland.  
SCotland received the Christian Faith in the time of Pope Victor the first, in the year 2●3, and Idolatry did quite cease under king Crakinte, who died in the year 313. Celest●● the f●st sent Palladius thither to root out the Pellagien heresy, which began to increase there under Eugenius the second, who died in the year 460. Since this time the Realm continued long in the profession of the Romish Church, until these latter days, when as it began to embrace the true profession of the Gospel▪ the which hath been so carefully pla●●ed▪ si●ce the Reign of king james, who now liveth, as all Romish 〈…〉 quite extinct and abolished, at lest in the public profession of Religion and orders of their Church government.  
There are two Archbishops in Scotland; The one of Saint Andrew's, and the other of Glasco. Under the Archbishop●icke of St. Andrew's, there are eight bishoprics, that is, Dunkelden, Aberdon, Moray, Dumblan, Brechin, Rossen, Cathanesse, and the Orcadeses. And that of Glasco hath three, that is to say, of Galloway, Argyle, and of Sodore, or of the Islands of Sure, Mule, Isle, and others. The Clergy were in former times governed by the authority of Decrees and Counsels: but now they are subject unto Laws made by the King, and confirmed by their own mouths. All Clergy men live after the manner of England, according to such Ordinances as have been made since the change of Religion, and rejecting the superstitious ceremonies of the Church of Rome.   

¶ Kings of Scotland▪  
FReguz was the first which carried the name of king of Scotland, 320 years before the coming of CHRIST: He reigned 25 years.  
To him succeeded these that follow.  

Ferritare reigned 15 years.  
main reigned 29 years.  
Darnadille reigned 28 years.  
Reuthere reigned 26 years.  
ruth reigned 14 years.  
Theree reigned 12 years.  
josine reigned 34 years.  
Fimam reigned 30 years.  
Dared reigned 9 years.  
Euene the first reigned 19 years.  
●illes reigned 2 years by usurpation.  
●●ene the second reigned 17 years.  
SATURN'S reigned 48 years▪ and in his time 〈◊〉 Britain was made tributary to the ●●manes.  
E●ene the 〈◊〉 reigned 7 years.  
Me●ellan raign●● in the time that our Saviour came in●● the world, his reign was of 39 years, and he died in the year of grace 34.  
●●rratace reigned 20 yeare●●he died in the ●●ate 54.  
Corbrede reigned 18 years: he died in the year 71.  
To Corbrede, Dardan succeeded, he reigned almost 4 years: and died in the year 74.  
Cothrede G●lde reigned 35 years: he died in the year 109.  
Luchtach reigned 3 years: and died in the year 112.  
Mogalle reigned 36 years: he died in the year 148.  
Conare reigned 14 years: and died in the year 162.  
Ethodie●he ●he first succeeded him.  
S●trahel succeeded him.  
donald the first reigned 21 years: and died in ●he year of grace 216.  
Ethodie the second succeeded him.  
Athirce succeeded Ethodie: of these two the one was slain, and the other slew himself.  
Natha●●●e succeeded, and was slain as a cruel tyrant in the year 253.  
Findoce reigned 10 years, he died in the year 263.  
Donald the second reigned 1 year, and was slain. Donald the third was also slain.  
Cratinthe succeeded him.  
Fincormach succeeded him.  
Romach succeeded Fincormach.  
Angusan. Fetelmache.  
Eugenius the first reigned three years: he died in the year 379 and then Maximus being sent by the Emperor, and and afterwards becoming a tyrant, invested himself of the Island of great Britain, so as Scotland remained forty four years without a king, unto the year of Grace 423.  
Ferguz the second nephew to Eugenius was made king: he reigned 7 years, and died in the year 430.  
Eugenius the second reigned 31 years, he died in the year 461.  
Dongard. Constantine.  
Congal, he died in the year 501.  
Co●ran, he reigned 35 years.  
Eugenius the third succeeded him.  
Conu●ll reigned and died in the year 578.  
Rima●ille.  
Aidan reigned 27 years, he died in the year 606. Kenneth Keir.  
Eugenius the fourth reigned 13 years, he died in the year 632.  
Ferguheard, he was put in prison.  
johevard reigned 14 years, he died in the year 646.  
Ferguhard succeeded him.  
Malduin died in the year 684.  
Eugenius the fift. Eugenius the sixt. Ambirkelet. Eugenius the seventh a religious Prince: he died in the year 716.  
Mordac. Ethfin. Eugenius the eighth.  
Fergus the third. Saluathie.  
Acheve, he died in the year 820.  
Congal. Dongal. Alpin. Remeth.  
Donald the fifth, he died in the year 860.  
Constantine the second E'the Gregory reigned 22 years, and died in the year 893.  
Donald the sixt. Constantine the third, who in the fortieth year of his reign become a Monk. Malcolme 1. duff Culen.  
Kemet died in the year 1000  
Constantine the fourth reigned 3 years.  
Grin. Malcolme the second reigned 13 years, he died in the year 1040.  
Duncan. Macachee.  
Melcome Camnoir, reigned 30 years, he died in the year 1097.  
Donald the seventh. Ethgar, he was the first which caused himself to be anointed in Scotland. David. Mal. come 3. William the Lion, he reigned 49 years & died in the year 1204.  
Alexander the third who having no heirs of his body left Scotland in great troubles, the which was governed by six men during the contention for the succession betwixt john Balliol son to the eldest daughter of king David, and Robert Bruis father to Alexander the third.  
john came unto the crown by the means of the king of England, to whom he did homage contrary to the will of the Scottishmen: In the end the English led him as a prisoner into England, and the country was governed by regents, at the devotion of the English.  
Robert was called to be king of the Scottishmen, he defeated Edward the third, and made himself peaceable master of Scotland.  
David son to Robert succeeded him, but he was expelled by Edward son of john bailiol, and fled into France: yet this Edward is not put into the number of lawful kings. Scotland also was governed by Robert Stuart, in the name of king David the second who did valiantly until the return of his king out of France. 
After the death of David the Estates of Scotland chose Robert Stuart nephew to the last king David, and son to his sister, and to Robert Governor of Scotland during the absence of king David.   
john base son to Robert, who also took the name of Robert. james the first. james the second. james the third came to the crown at the age of 7 years, in the year 1463. james the fourth. james the fift who fi●st married with Magdalein of France, daughter to king Francis the first, and after, with the Duke of Guise's daughter, of whom came Marry, who was married to Francis the second the French king, and after his death to the Earl of Lenox son, by whom she had james the sixt king of England and Scotland now reigning.      

A DISCOURSE OF IRELAND.  

The Contents.  
1. IReland, what names it carried in old time, the description and situation according unto Ptolomee the Geographer, the length and breadth. 2. Division of Ireland into five principal Countries or Provinces, and how many Counties there be in every Province, with the number and names of the Towns and Castles contained in every Count●e, and also of the chief Lords and Gentlemen of every Province. 3. The air sweet and temperate, and what diseases the Irish are subject unto. 4. Singularities of this Island in the production of Beasts, Fish, and Fowl. 5. Marti●etss, birds of an admirable property, which being dead putrify not. 6. Irish in old time lived of man's flesh, and did eat their parents dead bodies. 7. Agility and gre●t courage of the Irish. 8. The Irish pra●e commonly to the new moon. 9 Galloway and Waterford good Towns of traffic. 10. Soldiers of Ireland divided into three ranks. 11. Forts built in Ireland 12. When Ireland was made subject to the English. 13. Wild Irish how they are governed by their Lords and judges. 14. jurisdiction and Officers of Ireland. 15. Christian Religion when received in Ireland. 16. Archbishops and Bishops which be in Ireland.   

IReland, which some of the ancients called Hibernia, others juernia, Iwernia, and jerne, Iris, and Ogigia, and by the Irish themselves Erin, is seated betwixt the Arctic circle, and the Tropic of Cancer, yet approaching to the Pole Arctic, it contains in latitude four degrees and a half from the Meridian, and is enclosed, according to the computation of the Moderns, betwixt the twentieth & one and twentieth Parallel, upon the Southern parts the longest day hath six●eene hours and about three quarters, and in the farthest parts Northward it hath near eighteen hours. In regard of the terrestial Globe, this Island called by ●tolomee little Britain, lies betwixt great Britain and Spain; towards the East it hath ●●gland, divided by a tempestuous sea, of about a days sailing. This Island is near of an O●●● form from South to North, and is not half so big as great Britain. Some make the ●●●th from South to North to be of 70 german leagues, 
Every league is four English miles.  and the breadth from Wes●●●●st, 23 Germane leagues; and others measure it after another manner: but Camden, w●●●s worthy of credit, teacheth us that it hath four hundred thousand paces in length and 〈◊〉 hundred thousand in breadth. Some affirm that Ireland containeth in lengthy from ●●ockbrandon in the South (which is West, and by North Saint Michaells Mount in cornwall) unto St. Colemans' Island, alias C●rnagh in the North of Ulster (which is West upon Dunferris in Scotland) three hundred and twenty, Irish ●iless: and in breadth from Dublin (which is southwest from Chester) to Crough ●●●icke by West of Galloway▪ two hundred miles  
IReland is divided into five principal provinces, that is to say, into Leinster, which lieth on the East; into Munster, which lieth on the South; Conaugh which lieth on the West; Ulster which lieth on the North; & Meath which lieth in the midst or midland.  

¶ A BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE PROVINCE OF LEINSTER, DIVIDED INTO EIGHT COUNTIES.  
THe province of Leinster containeth that part of land which was first conquered by the English having in it these counties, that is to say, Dublin, Kildare, Caterlough, Waxford alias Washford, Kilkenny, King's County, Q●eenes' County, and Wickloe.  

¶ The first County.  
THe county of Dublin containeth all the land from Ballrothery (near to the county of Meath) to Bray, which is the length of the county, and includeth all the land between it and the town of Dublin, the king's lands, part of the mountains of Otooles, and the Cross of the county of Dublin, being the Archbishop's liberty, also his Islands in the sea, as Lambay, Ireland's Eye, and Dalkey.  
There are also in this county fifteen towns, that is to say, the town of Dublin, sword, Ballrothery, Luspicke or Luske, Clenshane, Hothe, New Castle, Kingsland, 
Towns,  Ballamore, Fowldes town, Bray or Breen, Wickloe, Macboygon, Arckloo, and Cloulerkin.  
There are moreover in this county twenty four castles, that of Dublin, sword, 
Castles.  New Castle, Tulloy, Dunshaglin, Poors Court, Castle Knock, Malahide, Castle Keven, Rathfernan, Moncton, Merion, Turvey, Dronnaugh, Donber, Belgard Lucan, Kilmamy, Donamore, Holme Patrick, Dercouragh, Ballgriffin, the Ward, Hothe Blowicke, and Ballutterell.  
The names of the lords and chief gentlemen of this county of Dublin, are, the Archbishop of Dublin, Lord Chancellor of Ireland, jerlande, Lord of Hooth, 
Lords and Gentlemen.  Sir Dudley Loftes, Fitz-Williams, Wingfield, Obernes, Otooles, Collier, the Dean of Saint Patrick, Barnewell, Bath, Neuteruill, Feaugh Mac Hugh Allin warren, Segrave, Fitz simons, Burnell, Finglas, Talbot, and Wealch: In the tenth year of King Richard the second Robert Veer Earl of Oxford was created Marquis of Dublin; and afterward made Duke of Ireland in the same king's reign.   

¶ The second County.  
THe second county in the province of Leinster is the county of Kildare, and it is placed between the counties of Dublin, Caterlough, the Kings and Queens counties, and Meath: it hath Dublin toward the East, Caterlough to the South, the Kings and Queen's counties to the West, and Meath upon the North.  
There are in this county seven towns, the names of which are Kildare, Manouth, Athy, the Naus, Kilcullen, Leixlip, and Castle Dermot. 
Towns.   
There are in this county 21. castles, that is, the castle of Kildare, that of Manouth, Lectawe, Baltinglas, Molhussey, evan Tipperer, Harriston, S. Wolstons, Lispicke, 
Castles.  Woodstock, Carbery, Marlace, Conall, Rath Goffy, S. Katherine's, Killka, Castle Marten, Donfrit, Monaster, Rathangan, and Osbertes town.  
The lords and chief gentlemen of this county are, the Earl of Kildare, 
Lords and Gentlemen.  the Bishop of Kildare, the Baronet of Rebin, Wedseley baronet of Narcowe, Eustace, Fitz-Geralds, 〈◊〉; Wh●●; Fitz G●r●et, S●reewe●●, C●oley, Saint Michael, lie, Woogan, Banerells, Al●●●●rimgham, De la ●ide, Boys, Sutton, Le●, and Flatzberry.  
The Ea●le of Kil●●te● eldest son is lord Gerald and baron of Ophaly.  
The Earl was created in Queen Mary's time, by the name of Gerrard Fitzgarret baron of Ophaly   

¶ The third County.  
THe third county in the province of Leinster, is Caterlough, alias Carlough, and it is a long slip of land lying for the most part between the rivers of Slain and barrow, and containeth divers lordships anciently inhabited by the Englishmen; but not long after, it was recovered by the Cavenaughes, which do inhabit both it, and much of the county of Wexford. It hath in it certain high mountains upon the East part, and the rest is more plain. The third part of the whole shire belongeth to the Earl of Ormond, and his brother Sir Edm●●d Butler. it is bounded with the county of Kildare to the North; to the West and South with the Queen's county; and with Kilkenny to the northwest.  

Towns.  There are in this county but two towns of any note, that is, Caterlough, (from which the county takes the name, the which also Lionel Duke of Clarence began to wall, and Belling●●m a most renowned lord deputy fortified with a castle) and Leighlin, where there was an Episcopal chair, now united to the See of Fernes, as Camden reports.  

Castles.  As for castles, this county hath the castle of Caterlough (as I have said) that of Leighlin, Rathemore, Rathulley, Fortenollon, Tully, Saint Molins, and other of less note.  

Lords and Gentlemen.  The lords and chief gentlemen of this county, are, the Bishop of Lawghlin or Leighlin, Sir Edmund Butler, Ragnal, Turlo Mac Donel Gallo-gl●sse, Hugh Mac Ihane, Harpole, Daevells, Olive, Oge, Brian Mac Caver, Cavenaughes, and Og●rmagon Barry.   

¶ The fourth County.  
THe fourth county of the province of Leinster is Wexford alias Waterford, this contie containeth all the land between the haven of Waterford, to the demesnes of A●kloo Castle upon the sea coast. It hath the sea to the East, and South; the county of Wickloe to the North; the river of Barrow near Rosse, and the county of Caterlough to the West.  

Town●s  This county hath but few towns of any importance and these are, Wexford, Rosse, Fearnes, and Colmine.  

Castles.  But it is well fortified with castles, for there are the castles, of Wexford, Fernes, Inishecorth, the tower of Hooke, Belmagir, Donbrody, baly hac, Adam's town, Bromston, Tniterne, Doncannon, Rossegarland, Old Cross, Mountgarret.  

Lords and Gentlemen.  The lords and gentlemen of this county are, the Bishop of Ferres Sir Henry Wallop, Deurox, Browne, Stafford, Lamports, also the Sep of Crean Mac Morough, Donel Spainaugh, Thomas Masterson seneschal, Williams in the right of the Lady Colcloughe, Nevel, Chevers, Mailons, Hayes, the three lords of the Knisheloughe, Mac Vado, Mac Damor, and Edmund duff, Ketinge, Sinots, Roches, Powers, Isames, Turner's, Surcots, and Cavenaughes.   

¶ The fift County.  
TH●●it county in the province of Leinster is called kilkenny: This county hath the mo●●●●ew of civility of any other of the bordering counties, in respect of the fair feats, of house's, the number of Castles and English manner of enclosure. It is bounded on the East by the ●●uer of Barrow; on the South by the river of Shower; with the Queen's county and O●●eri●●o the North; and with Tipperary to the West.  

Towns.  The chief towns in this county are the Towns of Kilkenny, Thomas town, Cal●an, Inystrong, and Ganran.  

Ca●●●●.  There are also the ●astless of Kilkenny, Ganran, bailey rigate, Kelhs, Ballingto●gh, 〈◊〉 Church, Grace town, Whites haule, and others.  
The lords and chief gentlemen of this county are, the Earl of Ormond and Osserie, 
Lords and Gentlemen.  Lord Viscount, Mount Garret, Cantwells, Archdeacon's Arches, Blanchevits, Birth Lovet, and his sons, the Bishop of Ossery, the Baronet of Burned Church, Comberfordes, Welshes, Dormers, Saint Legers, Bromesford, Butlers, Graces, she's, Denes, Rothes, Stonge, and of the English Staffords. The Earl of Ormonds' eldest son is lord Butler and viscount Thurles.   

¶ The sixt County.  
THe sixt county of this province is called King's county; but it was in old time called Ophaly, and is both wealthy and quiet, because it is by nature strong, and hath few passages and those well guarded. It containeth all the land between the county Kikdare and the river of Shenin: and it is bounded on the East with the county of Kildare, on the west with the Shenin, and West-Meath; on the South with the Queen's county, and part of Tipperary; and on the North with East-Meath.  
Philip's town is the chief town of this cowtie, 
Towns.  which took the name of king Philip, as also this county was in honour of him, called King's county.  
In this county there are the castles of Fort Dingan, Crohan, baly Burley, 
Castles.  baly Britain, Minster Oris, Eaton Dirrey.  
The names of the chief gentlemen of this county are, 
Gentlemen.  Sir George Burcher Lieutenant, Sir Edward Moore Constable of the fort, Sir john Mac Cowghlan, More, Cowley, Fitzgarrets, Philips, Omeloyes, Morrice, Sankey, Tirrill, Lany, Rosse, Denises, and Foxes.   

¶ The seventh County.  
THe seventh county in the province of Leinster is the Queen's county, alias Leese, this county containeth all the land in effect between the river of Barrow and Ormond, including all that did belong to Omore, Odiun, upper Ossery, and Slemarge. It is bounded with the county of Kilkenny to the South, with Tipperary to the West, with the king's county, and the mountain Slebloome to the North, and the river of Barrow to the East.  
There are not any towns of account in this county, but the chief town is Maryborough, so called by Queen Mary. 
Towns.   
The castles of this county are the Queen's Fort, the Shian, the Abbey of Leese, Strudballey, Donamaze, the Black Fort, Ballicockan, and Diserte. 
Ca●●●●ss.   
The lords and gentlemen of greatest reputation in this county, are, 
Lor●ss and Gentlemen.  the baron of Upper Ossery, Warham Seintleger, Lieutenant, George Haruy Constable of the Fort, Brian Mac Dovel, Pierce Butler brother to the Earl of Ormond, Cosbies', Harpoole, Bowen, Mac Callough, Bruerton, Davels, Pigot, Barington, Lamden, Odni, and divers others.   

¶ The eighth County.  
THe eighth and last county of the province of Leinster, is the county Wickloe, this was lately made a county in the government of Sir Arthur Chichester; It is bounded on the East with the sea, on the South with the county of Wexford, on the West with the counties of Carlough and Kildare, and on the North with the county of Dublin:  
Asfor towns in this county there is no mention made of any of importance and therefore I pass them over at this time.  
There is the castle of Lamtaddon and divers others of less importance. 
Castles.   
The chiefest gentlemen of this county are Sir Charles Occaroll, 
Gentlemen.  and divers others of his name. Now that I have briefly touched every particular both in the province of Linster, and also in every particular county of this province, I will now return and show you the commodities of the province of Munster, with the counties, towns and places of importance under the jurisdiction thereof.    

¶ A BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE PROVINCE OF MUNSTER, DIVIDED INTO SIX COUNTIES.  

The second Pro●●nce.  THe second province is called Munster, and is of all the other provinces the most commodious, in respect of the soil, havens, rivers, and towns, and is divided into six counties, that is to say, into Waterford, Limerick, Cork, Kerry, Desmond, and Tipperary, and the whole prou●nce is governed by a Lord precedent.  

¶ The first County.  
THe first county of this province is Waterford, which containeth all the land between the river of Shower (which falleth into the sea beneath Waterford) and the river of Younghull, called the Black water, and much of the land between the river of Bude and Black water, and includeth the mountains called the Decies; the Bishopric of Lismore united to the See of Waterford, also Preudergraftes lands, and Powers country. It hath for bounds upon the East and South, the sea; upon the North the Shower; part of the county of Cork upon the South; and part of Limericke, and Tipperary to the West.  

Towns.  The●e are in this county these towns of importance, the town of waterford, Dongar●an, Lismore, and Kill-Mac-Thmas.  

Castles.  There are moreover in this county these castles: that of Dongaruan, Kill-Mac-Thomas, the Passage, Derinleir, Cappalmi, Bellecovehin, the Hook, Moncollop, Pilton, Domano, Kilmadin, Strangally, Kilmanahim, Ardmore, Clovey, Carraghmore, and Shian.  

Lords and Gentlemen.  The lords and chief gentlemen in this county of Waterford are these, the Bishop of Waterford and Lismore, the lord Power baron of Carragmore, the heirs of Fitz-Gerrald late viscount baron of Dromano, Powers, Welshes, Wife's, Maddens, Geraldines, Whites, Mandeviles, Condons', Cragh●ss, Mading, Sherlockes, Preudergrafts, Newgents, Brownes, Dobnies, Leas, Lies, and others.   

¶ The second County.  
THe second county in this province is Limericke, and it contains all the land from the mountain near the read Shared joining to the county of Cork, to the Shenin, aswell above Limericke as beneath, in a manner as far as Carigfoile, and from the ●ountaine of Slewlougher which divides it from Kerrey, to the farthest part of Mac Bri●●●gonoughes country. It hath for bounds upon the northeast, Tipperary; to the West, Sle●●ougher; to the South the county of Cork; and the river of Shenin to the North-west.  

Towne●  The c●●efe towns of this county are these, the town of Limericke, and the town of Kilmalloc●●●  

Castles.  The castles o● this county are those of Blinity, Rakell, Carigonell Carignilishe, Adar●, Crome, Newcastle, Loughiray, Asketin, Shenet, Robert's town, Castle Doiell, or Canell.  

Lords and Gentlemen.  The lords and gentlemen of chiefest note in this county are these, the Bishop of Li●●●icke, the lord Burcke of Castle-Conell, Burckes, Laceys, Stretches, Geraldines, Purcells, Su●●les, Welshes, Obrines, Riens, Arthures, Fauts, she's, Foxes, Whites, jordens, Flaming, and some others.   

¶ The third County.  
THe third county of the province of Munster is called Clare, and it taketh the name of the Castle of Clare, now in the possession of the Earl of Twomond. It containeth nine Lordships, and hath in it two small bishoprics: It hath for limits, from the Bay of Limericke to the Bay of galway, the sea: On the West, the county of galway: to the North, and all the coast East and South it is environed with the river of Shenin: Some place this county with the county of Cork; others hold it to be the same that Twomond, in the province of Connaught.  
The towns of note in this county, are the town of Inchequin, 
Towne●  and the town of Clare.  
As for Castles, there is that of Clare, Inchequin, Ballwanghan, Bouraty, Clowrane, 
Castles.  Bridgetowne, and Donsany.  
The chief lords and gentlemen of this county are, the Earl Twomond, 
Lords and Gentlemen.  the Bishop of Killmaco, the Bishop of Killalloe, Mac Macon, OH Gardy Ochanch etc. the Baron of Inchequin. The Earl's eldest son is called Baron of Ibracan, Sir Turlo Obrien, Mac Ne Marro Reagh, Mac Ne Marro fen, OH L●ughlin, OH Veylane, and others.   

¶ The fourth County.  
THe fourth county in the province of Munster is that of Cork, and it containeth all the land adjoining to the sea from the river of Younghull, to the bay of Dingley, and the river of Manger joining to the county of Kerrey; and includeth also the lands of the two viscounts Barray & Farmoy. It hath for bounds on the East, South & southwest, the sea; on the West, the mountains of Slewlongher; and on the North, partly with the great water, and patly with the county of Limericke.  
The principal towns of this county are those of Cork, Clove or Clone, Rosse, 
Towns.  Younghull alias Yoohill, Butiout, and Kinsale.  
There are also in this county these Castles of no●e, that is to say, 
Castles.  the Castle of Liffmen, Ballimartor, Castleton, Corckleb●ge, Moyallo, Roch, Butevunt, Bear, Ballmsolly, Glanuer, Couceys, Barreys' Court, Shondon, Closshoe, etc.  
The chief lords and gentlemen of this county are these, the Earl of Clancarke, 
Lords and Gentlemen.  the Viscount of Butewnt or Barrey, the Viscount Rothe, or FLETCHER Aermoy, the lord Courey, Sir Owin Osulivan, Meagh, Donohe Okeife, Finien, Mac Carty, Cormocke, O●raldines, Coudons, Barrots Waters, Meaghes, Skides, Russells, the Bishop of Cork and Clone, the Bishop of Rosse, S. Warrham St Leger, Sir Owen Mac Carty Reagh, Mac Thomas B●rry Oge, Sir F●nn Odriscall, the sons of Sir Dertmott, and Sir Cormock Mac Teage, Ogallegan Mac Auly, Donell Pippo Mac Cartie Fits-Edmonds, seneschal of Imokelly Desmond, Osulivan More, Flemings, and divers others of good note.   

¶ The fift County.  
THe fift county in this province, is that of Kerry, and it containeth only that land which lieth between the river of Manger, and the river of Shenin, and includeth the most part of the mountain Slewlougher, which being the most Easterly part of the country boundeth upon the county of Limericke, and Cork to the East, upon the Shenin to the North, upon the Sea to the West, and upon the river of Manger to the South.  
The chief towns of this county are those of Ardsert, Dingley, and Trayly, 
Towns.  as for the rest, they are of no great importance, and therefore I will not trouble the readerwith too tedious relations thereof.  
The Castles of note of this county are those of Lixsuave Ardfert, 
Castles.  the Island Tarbrett, Castle Mange, and Carig●oyle  
The lords and gentlemen of greatest reputation in this county, are, 
Town and Gentlemen.  the Baron of Lixsuave, alias lord Fitz-Morice, the Bishop of Ardfert, Patrick Fitz-Morice, Fitzgarrets, Rice, Moore, Trant, andothers.   

¶ The sixt County.  
THe sixt co●●●i● of this Province is Tipperary, and it is divided into two▪ the one called the Cross of Tipperary, the other the county Palatine or liberty of Tipperary▪ and it hath too shirlfes, that of the Cross is under the Archbishop of Casshell, the ●●her is u●●er the Earl of Ormond. It containeth all the land in a manner from the town of Kallan in the county of Kilkenny, to Mac Ibrion Ogonoghies' country, in the county of Limerick; containing all the countries of Omitrians Mac Ibrion Arra Od●ye●●; Vpp●● O●mond, and neither Ormond, Conisshinaugh, Cossheshery, Muskry-Ouricke, the greater part of Arlow, and all Onaught. It is bounded with the county of Kil●e●●y, and th● Queen's county in the East; with the county of Limericke and Cork to the the South; with Shenin & part of Limericke to the West; and with part of King's ●●●●ie and ●ly to the North.  

Towne●.  〈…〉 these towns of good note, that is to say, the town of 〈…〉 and Carigall, and these four are strong and very well walled: then, the town of Emely, Tipperary, and that of the Holy Cross: but these last are in a manner all ruined and wasted.  
This county comprehendeth the castles of Carig, Caier, Nenaugh, Thurles, and Kil●henan; and of these the Earl of Ormond is Viscount: then that of Temple-More, D●●niglas, ●osscray, Loughmay, and Kilfekill.  

Lords and Gentlemen.  And this county hath in it many old religious houses, whereof Acashill is chief.  
The Lords and Gentlemen of greatest account in this province, are, the Archbishop of Cashe●●▪ th● Bishop of Emely the lord of Donboyne, the lord of Caier or Kercy, the Baroner of Loughmay: Butlers, Purcells, Cantwells, Kedenyes, Odwyers, Englishes, Burkes, 〈…〉 L●ughearne●, ●●itess, and others.    

¶ A BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE PROVINCE OF MEATH, DIVIDED INTO THREE COUNTIES.  

The●● ●● Province.  THe province of Meath hath his name of Medium, or the middle part of the land, for it is placed in the midst of the other four Provinces: and at the first it contained but one shire or county, commonly called by the name of Meath: but in the time of K. Henry the eight (to the end that justice might with more facility be ministered, and for that this country was too large to be governed by one Sheriff (it was divided into two counties, namely the county of East-●●ath, and the county of West Meath: and now also the county of Longford is repu●●● par●●ll thereof.  

¶ The first County.  
EA●●●●●th containeth all the land between Balrothery in the county of Dublin, & the 〈…〉 Boyne, nee●e Dro●g●ad, than not far from thence it extendeth itself from that riveled containeth all the land to the border of Cavon, and from thence in breadth to the King county, and to the county of Kildare: so that it hath the sea to the East: the county of ●●uan to the West: West-Meath, Kildare, and the king's county ●o the Southa●d South●●●st, and the county of Louth to the North.  

〈…〉  There are in this coun●●● the towns of Trim, Novan, Athbuy or Abbey, Kellis, D●●●ghada, and Calicke.  
The Castles of this county are many, that is, that of Trim, Kelline, Donsany, 
Castles.  Armoham, Stane, Goltrim, Castle Ricard, Dullerston, Gormanston, Donimore, Crixton, Cellcarne, Trimbleston, Rathmore, Molingar, Bedlowes town, Stackallon, Riverston, Castle Iorden, Arberchane, Gilliaston, Colpe, vest, Moynaltie, Doth, Maylaugh, New Castle, Castleton of Athbuy, Moynet, Dingan, Bellebogan, Culmolen, Murmudry, Platten, Castle Twerby, Bective, and many others.  
The lords and chiefest gentlemen are, the Bishop of Meath, 
Lords and Gentlemen.  the Viscount of Gormanston, the Baron of Donsany, the Baron of Kilny, the Baron of Trimbleston, the Baron of Stane: Barnewells, Haspenies, Darricotts, Segraves', Missets, Drakes, Baths, Wessels, Flemings, Eevers, Roch●ertss, Polnkets, Chevers, Whites, Provefoote, Ecostaces, Casackes, Newteruiles', Hills, Darceys, Prestons, Mores, Bethanghes, and others.   

¶ The second County.  
THe second county in the province of Meath is called West-Meath, this county contains all the land from the Read more beyond Athbuy to the Shenin & Deluin Mac Coughlan, and in breadth from the king's county to the county of Longford. It hath for bounds upon the East, the king's county: upon the South, the Shenin: upon the West, the county of Longford: and the county of Cavon and a part of East-Meath upon the North.  
The chief ●owness of this county are, the town of Molingar, Athlone, Ballimore, 
Towns.  Four, Deluin, and Kelkenny West.  
The Castlesof this county are those of Killucan, Castleton of Deluin, Waterstone, 
Castles.  Tutestone, and others of less importance, as Ruwier, Tristermaugh, and Robstone and others.  
The lords and gentlemen of greatest reputation in this county are, 
Lords and Gentlemen.  the Baron of Deluin, Nugents, Delamers, Sir Thomas le Strange, Darcyes, Tyrrells, Daltons, Tuts, Diltons, Laccis alias Pettits, Hopes, and the heirs of Sir George Stanley, and others.   

¶ The third County.  
THe third county of this province is Longford, and it is a large quantity of ground possessed by a people called Offarolls. It is bounded on the West by the river of Shenin, and a part of the county of Latrim; on the North by the county of Cavon; and on the East, and South, by the county of West-Meath.  
There is not any town nor Castle of importance in this county, but the town and Castle of Longford. 
Town and Castle.   
The names of the gentlemen of greatest note in this county are, Off●r all buy, 
Gentlemen.  Offar all bane, Nugents, Eirgus Offarall, and divers of the same name, and Dillons, and some others.    

¶ A DESCRIPTION OF THE PROVINCE OF CONNAGHT DIVIDED INTO FIVE COUNTIES.  
THe Province of Connaught, bendeth all Westwards from the river of Shanin, 
The 4. Province.  between that river and the sea, and containeth five counties, that is to say, Slego, Maio, galway, Rostoman, and Letrim: and Camden writes, that Sir Henry Sidney Lord Deputy of Ireland, hath joined to this Province the county of Clare: but because it did in former times belong unto the province of Munster, you shall find it amongst the counties of that province, in the description thereof.  

¶ The first County.  
THe first county of the province of Connaught is called Slego, this county containeth all ●he land between the borders of Magl●●●gh, and the plains of Connaught, by the skirts of the mountains of the Corlewes, to the river & Lough of boil in Mac Der●o●s country, and from thence northwest by the river of Moyne, which divideth the county of Maio from that of Slego. It hath for bounds to the East the county of Magl●n●ugh, to the West Maio, to the North the sea, and the county of Roscoven to the South.  

Towns.  There are not any towns of importance in this county but the town of Slego.  

Castles.  There are the Castles of Slego, and that of Ballimote, than those of Bondrois, and Bleeke, both which are belonging to Odonell.  

Lords and Gentlemen.  The chief gentlemen of this county are Odonell, Ochous Slego, Mac philippin, Mac 〈…〉   

¶ The second County.  
THe second county in the province of Connaught is Maio, and this county containeth all the land of Mac Willam Ewters, and all the lands of Omailes, Mac Donnells, M●● M●●rice, Mac jo●den, Mac Ou●terlough, and the Owls: it hath also certain Islands in the sea, both fertile and commodious for fishing. It is bounded toward the West and North with the Odea●, towards the East with the county of Slego and Roscomen, and with the cou●tie of galway towards the South.  
There are no towns in this county of any importance.  

Cas●●●●.  Th●●●●re some Castles in this county, which are these, Castle Bar, Ardenary, and the Ca●●le of Brownes, belonging to the Ea●le of Ormond.  

Lo●d● and G●●●tleme●.  The men of greatest note and reputation in this county, are the Bishop of Alladen●is or Auadonne, Sir Richard ●urke, Mac Iorden, Mac Morris, Sir Richard jure, Sir john ●urke Vastian Mac Do●nell, Mac C●s●eloughe, Burke●, Mac Devil a currane.   

¶ The third County.  
THe third county of ●his province is the county of galway; this county containeth a great quantity of land lying in manner square, between Maio and Twomond, North and South, and the Shenin East and West, saving the Northerly part thereof, it hath the river of Sack and Roscomen to the East. It hath three Islands in the sea within kenning of the town of G●llway.  

Tow●●●.  The chief town i● galway, which is exceeding ●aire, and that of Artheury an ancient town, but ruined and in decay, and there is also that of Toam.  

C●●tle●.  There are in this county the Castles of Clanfer●, Mileeke, Gort, Portumno, Ouram Divilaughlin, Letrim, Balliloughreugh, and Louford.  

Lo●dss and Gentlemen.  The lords and chief● gentlemen of this county▪ are, the Archbishop of Toam the 〈◊〉 of Clanrica●●, the Lord Brunegham, Sir H●bbert Mac Davy, the Bishop of Clonfert upon 〈◊〉 Shenin, the Bishop of Kil●aco, the Baron of Letrim, Ma● C●ug●, & the Burkes. The Ea●●● eldest son is Lord Burke, baron of Dunkellin or Ekelline.   

¶ The fourth County.  
THhe fourth co●●●ie of this province is called Roscoman, and it containeth all the plains of ●onna●●●● or Maughery, beginning at Abbey boil, near to the ●●●ntainess of Cur●ew, a●● stretche●h along by th● Shenin to the river of Suc. It hath th●●●●enin to the East and 〈◊〉▪ the county of Slego ●o the North; and the counties of G●●●way and Maiosto the west.  
The chief towns of note in this county, are the towns of Roscoman, and Abooie. 
Towns. Castles.   
This county hath in it these castles, that of Roscoman, Athlone, Saint jones, 
Castles.  Ballincabler, Ballimestow, and allege.  
The chief lords and gentlemen of this county are the Bishop of Elphine, 
Lords and Gentlemen.  OH Canor Dun, OH Hanley, Mac Edmond, Brabson, Tuts, Dillons, OH Conor Roose, Mac Dermot, Obern Offlangan, Mac Gerrot, S. Thomas le Strange, Nugents, the heirs of S. Nicholas Maulby, & others.   

¶ The fift County.  
THe fift county of this province of Connaught is called Letrim: It hath the county of Slego to the South and West; the Shenin to the South and Southeast; the county of Longford to the Southeast; and the counties of Donagall, and Fermanagh to the North; and Cavon to the East.  
There are no towns of importance in this county.  
There is but one Castle of importance in this county which is the castle of Letrim. 
Cas●les.   
As for the gentlemen, OH Rorcke, and those of his kindred are the chief in this county. 
Gentlemen     

¶ A BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE Province of Ulster divided into ten Counties  
THis province of Ulster lieth in the farthest part of realm Northward; and it is divided from the province of Meath with the river of Boyne on the Southeast part: 
The fif● Province.  & with the Breney which is OH Releys country on the South part: and on the southwest part, it boundeth upon Connaght, nameby upon OH Rorckes country, and OH Conor Slego: the rest is environed with the sea. It hath in it ten counties, namely, Louth, Downe, Cavon, Antrim, Armaugh, Monaghan, Fermanaugh, Tyrone, Donegall, and Londonderry.  
Lionel, son to king Edward the third, was created Earl of Ulster in the time of his father's reign.  

¶ The first County.  
THe first county of this province is called Louth: and this county containeth in it all the land by the sea side, from the river of Boyne near Drogheda unto the haven of Caringford. It confines towards the East, with the sea; towards the South, with the province of Meath; with the county of Monaghan to the West; and with the county of Armaugh to the North.  
The chief towns of any importance are, Louth, Drogheda, Dundalke, Ardec, 
Towns.  and Carlingford.  
The lords & gentlemen of chief note in this county, are the Bishop of Ardeigh, 
Lords and Gentlemen.  the lord of Louth, Brandon's, Taffies, Casshells, Barnwells', Reytons, Dowdalls, Sir Garret Moore, Sir john Bedlow, Plunkets, Bedlowes, Clinton's and many others.   

¶ The second County.  
THe second county of the province of Ulster is called down: this county containeth all the countries between the haven of Carlingford, and the Bay of Knockfergus, with the lordship of Newry, and some others. It hath for bounds to the East, the sea; to the South, the haven of Carlingford, and that river; to the West, the county of Armaugh; and the Bay of Knoc-fergus to the North.  
The chief towns of this county, are the town of down, and the Newry. 
Towns.   
There are in this county these castles, that of Dondrom, Scatricke, Raunhedy, 
Castles.  Green Castle, Castle Reagh, and the Castle of the narrow water.  
The lords and gentlemen of greatest reputation in this county, are, the Bishop of down, Sir Henry Bagnall, Sir Hugh Mac Guines, Mac Cartan, ivan Roose Mac Coulle, Savages, 
Lords and Gentlemen.  Bensons, Russels, Fitz-Simons, Doudals, Cormake OH Neale, Brian Oge-O Neale, & ●ome others.   

¶ The third County.  
THe third county of this province is called Cavon; and it contains all the lands called heretofore Oreighles country. It is bounded with the county of Letrim to the 〈◊〉, with the county of Fermanaugh, and Managhan to the North, and with the 〈◊〉 of West-Meath to the South.  

〈◊〉  There are in this county no towne● nor castles of importance but the town and 〈◊〉 of Ca●●●●  

〈◊〉.  The chi●●●●en of this county are the OH Reileys.   

¶ The fourth County.  
THe fourth county of the province of Ulster is called Antrim. It containeth all the land 〈◊〉 the ba● of Knoc-sergus and the river of Ban, to the sea. It hath the 〈…〉 West, the sea to the East, Cland●boy to the South, and the main sea to the North.  

Towns.  The chief towns of this county are those of Antrim Knoc-fergus, Kellis, and Colerane.  

Castles.  The chief castles of this county, are, Castle Marten, and Dunluce.  

〈◊〉  The chief gentlemen of greatest reputation in this county are, Sir Brian Mac Phelin, and 〈◊〉   

¶ The fift County.  
THe fift county of this province is called Armagh: it containeth all the land between the river of Dundalke, and the Black water. It is bounded to the South with the county of Louth; with the Blackwater to the North, with the river of Newry to the Ea●●, and with the county of Monaghan to the West.  

Towns.  There are no other towns of importance in this county but the town of Armagh from whence the county hath the name: it is an Archicpiscopall See, and the Metropolitan of the whole Island.  

Castles.  The chief castles are, the fort or castles called Elizabeth, where the Earl of Effex built a bridge, and the fort of the Blackwater.  

Lords and Gentlemen.  The lords and chief gentlemen of this county are, the Archbishop of Armagh, Pri●●●● and Metropolitan of all Ireland, Art Mac Baron, the clergy of Armagh, OH Hanlons, Tarlough Brasilough, Turlo Mac Mahon, Mac Henry's sons, Turlo OH Neale, & some others.   

¶ The sixt County.  
THe sixt county of this province is that of Monaghan: this county was in times past called Erriel, given at the time of the conquest to one Reginald Fitzvrse or Bearesonne, supposed to be one of the four knights that slew Thomas Beckett. It bordereth upon thecountie of Louth, Eastwards; upon the county of Cavon to the South and southwest; upon the Longharne southwest; and upon the county of Armagh towards the North.  

Town and Castle.  There are not any towns or castles of importance in this county but the town and castle of Monaghan.  

Gentlemen.  The chief men of this county are at this day called the Mac Mahons, and were at first the offpring of the Fitz-Vrses.   

¶ The seventh County.  
THe seventh county in the province of Ulster is Fermanaugh: It confines on the North with the county of Tyrone; on the West with Orwarkes country; on the South with the county of Cavon; and with the county of Monaghan on the East.  
In this county there is not any town of importance.  

Castles.  There are the Castles of Kneskellin, and the Abbey of Leekoole.  

Gentlemen.  T●●●●●●fe gentlemen of this county, are the offspring of MacGwier, who was very noble an●●●werfull until he overthrew himself and his state in the late rebellion.   

¶ The eight County.  
THhe eight ●●●ntie of this province is Londonderry: it containeth all the country called OH 〈◊〉 country, the county of Colran, and one Barony of Tyrone, formerly ●alle Inisholin: these ●●●dss are lately made an entire county at the suit of the Londo●●erss, who have undertaken to plant them with English.  
There are no towns of ●●p●rtance in this county.  

Castles.  This county hath divers castles, that of Colran and others, with two small friaries.  
The chief men of this county are the OH Chaves or OH Canes, 
Gentlemen.  who are the chief that created OH Neale, by casting a shoe over his head upon a hill in Tyrone.   

¶ The ninth County.  
THe ninth county of this province in called Tyrone, and it containeth all the land between the Blackwater, and the rivers of Liffer and fin. It hath for bounds the North, the county of Londonderry: on the South the countries of Fermanagh, and Armagh: and Tirconell on the West.  
It hath not any towns of importance in it.  
The chief castles of this county are these Dongannon, Omagh, Strabane, Benburb, 
Castles.  and Old Castle.  
The chiefest lords and gentlemen of this county are, the Earl of Tyrone, 
Lords and Gentlemen.  the Bishop of Clohere, Sir Turlo OH Neale, Turlo Lenough, and OH Cane.   

¶ The tenth County.  
THe last county in this province is that of Dongall or Tyrconell, and this county is the greatest and longest of all the countries of Ulster. It hath for bounds, on the East, North, and West, the sea: and the river of fin on the South.  
There is not any town of importance in this county but the town of Dongall. 
Towns.   
There are the castles of Dongall, Ballishewin, Read Castle, lief, fin, New Castle, 
Castles.  Beleeke, and Bondroys.  
The lords and chief gentlemen of this province are these OH Donel, 
Lords and Gentlemen.  the Bishop of Derry, the Bishop of Raboo, Hugh Duffe OH Donell, OH Golghan, Sir john OH Dohery, Sir Owin OH Gallohac, the sons of Con OH Donell, Mac Swyn Natoo, Mac Swyn saved, and others.  
There are also in this county these Abbeys, that of Dongall, Asherowe, Derry, and other small Friaries.  
Thus having showed to you (as briefly as might be) the whole description of Ireland, I will now come to speak of the Quality of the country.    

¶ The Quality.  
THis Island doth enjoy a sweet and temperate air, although it be not excellent to ripen that which is put into the ground. The heat of Summer makes them not to seek for shade, nor the rigour of Winter for fire: this country doth not breed any venomous beasts, neither can it endure any if they be brought thither: the air and soil is too moist and rheumatic, so as both Inhabitants and strangers are much troubled with catharres and the bloody flix, which they seek to prevent by Aquaitae: the country is hilly, moorish, and full of woods, exposed to winds, and it hath many pools, even in the top of the highest mountains: there are many good ports, and some goodly plains, but they are little in regard of the woodlands and mountains which are pleasing with their verdure. All Ireland in general is fertile except in Ulster, which is fruitful in many places also, and barren in others by reason of mountains, and Conach which is less tilled than other country, and hath much woodlands, bogs, and mountains. In all places the mountains are covered with cattle, and for this cause they abound with milk, butter, and cheese: it hath this inconvenience, that the corn is short and small, and vines grow there, more for ornament than for any fruit they beat: for when as the sign enters into Virgo, there blow cold winds in that country, & the sun after noon in Autumn hath not force sufficient to ripen the grapes. This Island hath good horses for lightness and the journeys of that country, which they call Hobbeys. It breeds no hurtful beasts but wolves and foxes: all other tame beasts are less than in other places, except their grayhounds. The woodlands are full of beasts, & the stags being very large are sometimes in the year very fat: there are many swine, goats, and some fallow dear, and no moles, but they have abundance of rats. Moreover this Island hath many falcons, goshaukes, eagles, and crane's, and good store of swans, towards the North, but in all the Island there are no storks, neither are there any pies, or nightingales, but there is a kind of fowl called the heath cock of a blackish colour, which hath a reddish 〈◊〉 and head, and usually ●iveth in heathie grounds. There is also great store of 〈◊〉 both of sea and fresh water, which are taken in the rivers and lakes of the country: 〈◊〉 also yield a certain black earth mixed with sulphur, which the inhabitants do use to kindle their fire. The Irish sea had small pearls many of them of a blackish colour, and many others very fair and orient, some valued at forty pounds and upwards; these are found at a leason of the year in muscle shells for the most part in the Northern rivers, and especially the river Omey which runneth to Loughfoile. Girald writes that from a certain wood which floats upon the sea, 
〈◊〉 seem 〈◊〉 be Barnacles which breed on ship sides or any old ●imber and are in great abundance in the North, and are good meat.  there flows a gum which doth harden afterwards; and that within it there breed certain creatures which first have life, than they take wings and a bill, and in the end they fly into the air, or swim upon the water, and the same Author saith, that he hath seen many of these birds half form, which would have-flowne like unto the rest if they had had their perfection. There are also other birds called Martin's, as some writ, less than a Thrush, and short as a Qua●●●, having the belly white, and the bac●● black, which have this property, that if being dead they be 〈◊〉 in a dry place, they do nor putrify, and being put among 〈…〉 them from mo●●heses: yea if they be hung in a dry place when they are dead they renew their feathers every year.   

¶ The Manners of the Ancient Irish.  
STrabo saith that the Ancient Irish were more savage than the inhabitants of great Britain, that they said upon man's flesh and were great eaters. Solinus adds more, that when they were victors they rubbed their faces with the blood of them that were slain in the fight, after they had drunk some, when a woman was delivered of a man child, the laid his first meat upon her husband's sword, and thrust the point of it gently with the meat into the Infant's mouth, wishing (according to the ordinary desire of all the nation) that he might not die but in battle, and in the midst of arms: they that would make any show of bravery among them, did put upon the hilts of their swords the teeth of certain great fishes which they found along that coast; for that those teeth were white as ivory, & the chief glory of the Irish consisted in arms. This is all that can be gathered out of ancient writers touching their manners, which were for the most part unknown, by reason of the rudeness of the people, to whom they could not have any free access: I speak this in regard of the ancient manners, but if thou desirest to see those of latter, times; thou shalt find them at large in Girald, from whom many others have drawn what may be spoken.   

¶ The Manners of the Irish at this day.  
THe Irish are generally strong, active, and of great courage, they expose themselves freely to all dangers, and do easily endure all toil, cold, hunger, and other discommodities: they are much inclined to love, courteous to strangers, constant in their friendship, and irreconcilable in their hatred, light of belief, desirous of glory, and impatient of any wrong finally they are extreme in all their passions, so as they that are bad o● not be worse, nor the good better.  
●●Meere Irishman (for they are divided like unto the Scottish) kneel down when they see 〈◊〉 moon, and speaking unto her, say, Leau● us in as good health as thou hast found us. The● hold that a ●ree or green bush planted before their doors the first day of May will 〈◊〉 their cows yield abundance of milk. It is not lawful to commend a hor●e or any 〈◊〉 beast unless they say presently, Godblesse it, and they spit against a horse when he 〈◊〉 or rouseth himself, if any mischance happen to the horse with●● three days, they see●e him that commended him, to the end that he may say a Pater 〈◊〉 in his ●are: the w●●mens have enchantments for all diseases, and they do always 〈◊〉 a Pater noster and an A●e Marie at the beginning and ending of all their enchantments 〈◊〉 their seeding, they live upon herbs, roots, shalghane, and with butter mingled with oat flower, with milk, beef broth, and oftentimes with flesh without bread, for that they do most commonly keep their corn for their horses, whereof they have great care, when they are priest with hunger they eat broiled flesh, and to disg●st it they drink much Usquebaugh. They draw blood from their kine, and when it is curdled and caked with boiling they put it upon butter, and so eat it. These be the manners of the mere Irish. There are also many others, but I fear I should be tedious in relating them, or else cross mine own design.   

¶ The Riches of Ireland.  
THat which may make the Irish rich is the access of merchants, which come from all parts, and the traffic of the inhabitants of the Island, who have not much else to cell, and sand into foreign countries but hides and some wool. Among other towns there is galway, whereas foreign merchants frequent, it is full of rich inhabitants, who have great traffic into all parts: and Waterford yields nothing unto it in number of merchants, who thrive as well there as in any country of Europe. The greatest part of Ireland is able to entertain the inhabitants, and to furnish them with all things necessary, yet the riches are not so great as in many places of Europe. Their most pleasing, and sole wealth are their kine, which give no milk in Ireland, as some hold, but when they have their calves by their sides, or the skin of a dead calf filled with straw, that it may resemble it; As for the revenue which the king of England draws from thence they be small by reason of his officers and soldiers maintained there.   

¶ The Forces of Ireland.  
THeir warlike bands consist of foot and horse; the horsemen have horses so tractable and well taught, as they do easily leap on them, although they be armed, and this is as well by reason of the dexterity of the horse, which yields unto them, as the disposition of the Irish of whom we have lately spoken. As for their footmen there are some whom they call Galloglasses which carry axes sharper than razors, at the end of long staves, and these are all the force of the Irish armies: they which hold the second rank, are called Kerne, they use darts and a broad sword, and do not think any man dead till they have cut off his head: they put in the third place their horseboyes, whom they call Stokoagh, who go disarmed, and are ready to serve the horsemen: Both footmen and horsemen do cry Pharo, Pharo, when as they go to battle. The Irish are many in number, and valiant; so as they might be held invincible if they were not opposite one unto another: but they have been ever divided, and for this cause they have given entry to the kings of England. He that reigns at this day maintains divers forts manned with horse and foot, the which were begun by Queen Elizabeth, after the late enterprises of Pope Gregory. There is the archiepiscopal town called Armaugh, the which is strong: and near unto it towards the East is Tredath, which is the greatest fort next unto that which we have named: after that there is Dublin, where the lord deputy doth usually remain, which hath a reasonable good Fort, and a Port whereas they embark that pass into England, who arrive at Chester, right against Dublin; and towards the North there is one only Fort called Knockfergus: But upon that part which looks toward England, and Westwards, there are seven Forts with their Ports, that is to say, (after Dublin) Arkloe, and Wexford, Limericke, Waterford, Rosse, Cork and Kindsale, which is upon the South.  
The passage of this channel is very dangerous, by reason of the rivers which fall from many contrary parts; so as they 'cause a confusion of waters with a contrary current, which makes the passage difficult. To conclude, the king of England hath no great cause to fear that any foreign prince should become master of Ireland, aswell for the discommodity of the seat, as for the Forts there be in it, and the soldiers which he entertains, as also for that many of the inhabitants of the country are well affected unto him.   

¶ The Government of Ireland.  
IReland in former times had many petty kings, but it is now under the power of the English, into whose hands it fell in the year 1175 when as Roderick king of Conaught termed himself king of all Ireland, who seeking to make himself king of the whole Island, fought against the other kings, who submitted themselves, without any effusion of blood, to Henry the second king of England, since which time all the kings of England have been called Sovereign Lords of Ireland, until Henry the eight, who had the title of King given him by the Estates of Ireland. Finally the king of England sends a Viceroy thither to govern, and these Viceroys were first called Conseruers of Ireland, than justices, Lieutenants, & last of all Deputies, by the patents which gave them this Royal jurisdiction and power; for they may make war and peace, ordain and dispose of all Magistrates, except some few, remit all crimes, except high reason, make knights and such like things. These Letters Patents, are read whenas any one is publicly received, and then taking the ordinary oath before the Chancellor, they put a sword into his hand, and then they set him in a chair, in the presence of the Chancellor, and the chief of the realm which are of the Council, with the king at arms, sergeant at arms and other officers of honour: he hath for assistants, the Chancellor, Treasurer of the realm, Earls, Bishops, and judges, who are of the Council. Ireland hath the same orders that England, and it is divided according to the manners of the inhabitants, into two parts, for they that will not obey the laws, but live more barbarously, are commonly called mere Irish, but they that obey the laws are called English Irishman, and their country is called the English Pale. The mere Irish have lords, or rather tyrants, who live not under the power of the English but by constraint: these lords have an OH before their names, or else the word Mac, as OH Neale, Mac Mahowne, and these have a particular right, by reason whereof they live with an insupportable authority, and dispose of their followers goods at their pleasures: These lords have their judges whom they call Breahans, as the Goths had their Bellagines. These Breahans are altogether ignorant, and and yet they do justice unto the neighbours at certain days, upon some hill: they that are accused, and can deny it, escape easily; and if they be taken in open thest they are condemned to restitution, and a fine to the lord. As for the other Irish they follow reason more, and govern themselves after the English manner. There are in Ireland five judicial Courts, as in England, that is to say, the Starchamber, the Chancery, the King's Bench, the Common Pleas, and the Exchequer: there are also justices of Assize to hear and determine, and justices of the peace in every county: the king hath also his Sergeant at law, his Attorney General, and Solicitor. Ireland hath the same municipal jaws that England, and the acts of Parliament of England were in force there until Henry the seventh, for in the tenth year of his reign they were confirmed in Ireland by the authority of the Parliament; but since, they have had their private statutes. Besides these civil magistrates, Ireland hath a military officer, that is to say, the Marshal, which is to restrain the insolency of soldiers and rebels.   

¶ The Religion of Ireland.  
THis Island received the Faith of Christ in the year 335 when as Fincomarc reigned in Scotland; and this happened by means of a woman among the Pictes, who growing familiar with the Queen, in the year 322. preached the Christian Faith unto her, and converted her: the Queen won the King, showing him what had been preached unto her, and the king disposed his people to receive baptism, about the year 335. The Irish have lived since in the Romish religion until the time of king Henry the eight when as the Protestants religion began to be preached, the which hath been since in that country planted by Queen Elizabeth, and by King james now reigning: yet the Irish are gerally given to Popery and superstition, by reason of their ignorance, and have made religion the subject of rebellion, as we have seen by many experiences during the reign of Queen Elizabeth. Ireland hath four Archbishoprickes, that of Dublin, Armaugh, cassil, and Toame: and these four have nine and twenty Suffragans.      

Of France  

DISCOURSE OF FRANCE.  

The Contents.  
1GAule what it did in old time contain, according unto Caesar and Ptolemy. 2. Description of France as it is now, the length, breadth, and limits. 3. Number of Parliaments of France, & what Archbishoprics & Bishoprics are in either of them. 4. Ample description of the Provinces of France, & first of Picardy. 5. Of the Pruostie and County of Paris, situation and stately buildings of this City, and of the Isle of France, and consequently of all the other Countries and Provinces of the realem. 6. Number of the Islands, Capes, Forests, and chief Rivers of France. 7. fertility of the Provinces of France, and wherein every Country doth abound. 8. Custom of the ancient Gauls, to wear long heir; they were studious of eloquence, and did worship Mercury, and Hercules, Ognien. They did offer men in sacrifice. 9 Druids instructors of the youth of Gaul, and Administers of justice. 10. Gauls fearful in war to all Nations, and what arms they used, and their manner of proceeding in battle. 11. Attire of the ancient Gauls, their living and manner of their funerals. 12. Nature and manners of the Parysiens, Chartrains, and of all other Provinces of France. 13. Manners and disposition of the French in general. 14. Civility of the French Nobility, and their exercises in time of peace. 15. Riches of the Realm of France, whence it grows. 16. Revenues of the Kings of France, whereunto it amounted during the reigns of Francis 1. and Henry 2. 17. Ordinary tax of one year what it comes to in France: and what money hath been levied, as well ordinary, as extraordinary, since the year 1542. unto the year 1580. 18. Forces of France at Sea. 19 Companies of horse entertained in France at this day. 20. French footmen, and what companies of foot are entertained at this present. 21. Ordinance of France reduced all to one form, and what length the Canon of France hath. 22. Number of the forts and best places of France. 23. Realm of France successive, and not elective, and the males admitted to the Crown, and not the females. 24. Privileges and authority of the Queens of France. 25. Ancient and modern form of Crowning and anointing the Kings of France. 26. Beginning and institution of the Peers of France, and other Officers of the Crown. 27. Number of the presidial Courts and other jurisdictions under every Parliament. 28. Number of the Bishoprics of France, and what parishes every Diocese contains. 29. Catalogue of the Kings of France, the Reign and death.   

THe name of Gaul is a large extent, if we comprehend all that which hath been so called; for by this means, it will not only contain the Realm of France, but also a good part of Germany and Italy. For the ancient divided Gaul into Cisalpine, and Transalpine, calling that Transalpine, or Gaul on that side the Alpss (according to their abode) which is now termed Lombardie: and giving the name of Cisalpine, or of Gaul on this side the Alpss, to the Country, which is enclosed by the River of Rhine, the Ocean sea, the Pyrenee Mountains, the Mediterranean sea, and the Alps. But Caesar divided Gaul iuto Belgic, Celrick, and Aquitanick. And Prolome propounds unto us Gaul divided into four parts, that is to say, Aquitaine, the Country of Lions (which is all one with Caesar's Celtica) Belgia and Narbonese. And of these parts Belgia is now for the most part belonging to Germany.  
But to take France as it is at this present, towards the North which looks to the Low-cuntries', they give it for a limit or line drawn from Calais unto Strasbourge, which leaves on the left hand, the Country of Artois, Henault, and Luxemburge; and on the right hand, Picardy, and Lorraine, and on that part which looks towards England, the Ocean sea, called by the ancients the British. Towards the West, the same Ocean sea doth bound it in, making a great gulf in Aquitaine. On the South side, where it joins to Spain, it hath the Pyrenee Mountains, and where it is lest restrained and more large, it hath for limits the Mediterranean sea. Finally on the East part, it hath the Alpss, which divides it from Italy, as Mount jura doth from the Swisseses, and the Rhine from Germany. The whole realm, if we take it in a direct line from East to West, 
This is 600. English miles.  from the Island of Heissant, opposite to the furthest shore of Brittany, unto the banks of Rhyne, hath in length little more than three hundred French leagues or else if we shall measure the length according unto others, from northwest, to South East, from the Isle of Aldernay in Normandy unto Glice, we shall found three hundred & thirty leagues, which is almost as much ground as there is betwixt Paris & Rome. The breadth to take it from the most Southern parts, which are towards the Mediterranean sea unto Calais, is about two hundred and twenty leagues, and the whole-circuit of France, is above 1020 leagues, every league being two good English miles or more. 
440. English miles.  This realms is enclosed betwixt the 13. and 19 parallel, that is to say, it holds in breadth from the midst of the fist climate, whereas the longest day is of 15. hours, ●nto the midst of the eight, where it is of 16. hours and a half. And as for the length, ●it contains all the Meridiens, which are comprehended betwixt the 15. and the 19 Meridien. Finally to divide France into all her parts, I thinkefit it to take it according to the Parliaments, being subject to their jurisdiction.  
She hath then eight principal Parliaments, which are Paris, Tolousa, Roven, Bourdeaux, Renes, Dijon, Grenoble, and Aix, and two others that are not of such note, that is to say, that of base Navarre, which is hel● at Saint Palaiz, and that of Me●z. The Parliament of Paris contains these Dioceses following.  

The archbishopric of Reims.  
The archbishopric of Sens.  
The Archbishopric of Lyon.  
The Bishopric of Soisson.  
Of Boullen.  
Of Amiens.  
Of Noyon.  
Of Senlis.  
Of Beawais.  
Of Paris.  
Of Chartres.  
Of Orleans.  
Of Angers.  
Of Mans.  
Of Clerimont.  
The archbishopric of Bourges.  
The archbishopric of Tours.  
The Bishopric of Laon.  
Of Chalon in Champagne.  
Of Nevers.  
Of Auxetre.  
Of Troy's in Champagne.  
Of Meaux.  
Of Poitiers.  
Of Maillezay.  
Of Lusson.  
Of Angoulesme.  
Of Saint flower.  
Of Langres.  
Of Mascon.   
And the chief Provinces where the above named Archbishoprickes, and bishoprics are contained, be the Isle of France, high and lower Beausse, Soloigne, Berry, Auvergne, Lyonnois, Forest, Beaujolois, Poictou, Anjou, Angoumois, main, Brie, Picardy, Champagne, Touraine, Nivernois, Bourbonnois, and Masconois, of all which Provinces we will hereafter discouse particularly.  

The Parliament of Tolouza hath under it,  
The archbishopric of Narbonna.  
The archbishopric of Auch.  
The archbishopric of Tolouza.   

The bishoprics be.  
Nismes.  
Vsez.  
Lodeva.  
Saint Pons de Tomieres.  
Alet.  
Montpelier.  
Besiers.  
aged.  
Carcassonne.  
mend.  
Casters.  
Alby.  
Puy.  
Rodez.  
Vabres.  
Cahors.  
Pamiers.  
Mirepoix.  
Saint Papoul.  
Montauban.  
La Vaur.  
Rieuz.  
Lombez.  
Cominges.  
Couserans.  
Tarbe.  
Laictoure.  
Viviers.   
The principal Provinces are called high and low Languedoc, which is of a great circuit, high and low Vivarez, Velay, Gevaudan, Albigeois, Rovergue, Laulaguois, Quercy, the country of Foix, and a part of Gascoine.  
The Parliament of Roven hath under it.  
The Archbishopric of Roven.  

The bishoprics be.  
Auranches.  
Eureux.  
Bayeux.  
Seez.  
Costance.  
Lisieux.   
This is the Parliament of Normandy.  

The Parliament of Bourdeaux hath under it The archbishopric of Bourdeaux. The bishoprics be.  
Bayonne.  
Aqs.  
Basaz.  
air.  
Saintes.  
Perigueus.  
Sarlat.  
Agen.  
Lymoges.  
Condom.  
Tulle.   
The chief Provinces are a part of high and low Gascoine, biscay, Xaintonge, Perigort, and Limosin.  

The Parliament of Reins hath under is these bishoprics.  
Sain● Brieu.  
Saint Malo.  
Triquier.  
Cornovaille.  
Eij  
Saint Paul de Leon.  
Nantes.  
Vannes.  
Dol.  
Renes.   
This is the Parliament of Brittany.  

The Parliament of Dijon hath under it,  
The Archbishopric of Autun.  
The Bishopric of Chalon upon Sun.   
This is the Parliament of Bourgondy.  

The Parliament of Grenoble hath under it  
The Archbishopric of Ambrun.  
The Archbishopric of Vienne.   
The Bishoprics be,  
Valence.  
Die: these two are governed by one Bishop, and yet one usurps not upon another's rights.  

Grenoble.  
Gap.  
Brianson.  
Saint Paul three castles.   
This is the Parliament of Dauphinè  
The Parliament of Aix hath under it, 

The Archbishopric of Aix.  
The Archbishopric of Arls.    
The Bishoprics be, 

dign.  
Grass.  
Glandeve.  
Senas.  
Saint Paul de Vences.  
Apt.  
Riez.  
Frejuz.  
Cisteron.  
Marseille.  
Tolon.    
This is the Parliament of Provence.  
The Parliament of Bearn hath under it, 

The Bishopric of Escar,  
and that of Oloron.    
The Parliament of Saint Palais hath under it,  
biscay, Navarrois, or base Navarre.  
The Parliament of Metz hath under it the Bishoprics of 

Metz,  
Toul,  
Verdun.    
To discourse more particularly of France, I will begin first with Picardy, which hath at this day for bounds on the West part (with a part of Normandy) the English sea; on the North, Artois and the country of Haynault, which did in old time, make a part of Belgike Gaul; towards the East, the countries of Luxembourg, & Lorraine; & to the South Champagne and the Isl of France. The chief towns are, Amiens, Soisson, Abbeville, Corbie, Peronne, Dorlen, Saint Quentin, Noion, Laon, Boullen, lafoy Fere and Beawais. This Province is divided into the true, the higher and the lower Picardy, whereof the higher is at this day, in a manner, all within the country: the true which gins at Crevecoeur, ● comprehends the Vidamies of Amiens, of Corbie, and of Piguigny, the county of Vermandois, and the Duchy of Tirasche, and of Rethelois. The Earldom of Vermandois, did comprehend Soisson, Laon, and la Fere, three of the best towns of Picardy, with Saint Quentin, which is a strong place. Rethel is the chief town of Rethelois, which lies betwixt Haynault, Lorraine, and Bar. The chief town of the Duchy of Tirasche, is Guise, where there is a reasonable good Castle. Base Picardy comprehends Santerre, where Montdidier is, Peronne, Roye, and Nesle, places of good strength, the county of Ponthieu, whereof Abbeville is the chief town; the other places are Crotoy, Rue, Treport, and Cressy: and they hold also that this county comprehends those of Saint Paul, and Monstreul. Base Picardy doth also embrace the counties of Boloign and Guynes, which are divided from the county of Oye by a great channel which passeth through the midst of the town of Guynes, and this Earldom hath under it two Baronnies, that of Ardres, and that of Courtembrone. Two leagues from Ardres towards the sea is the town of Calais, which is of the county of Oye, which extends unto Dunkirk a town of the Lowe-cuntries'. The chief rivers of Picardy are that of some, on the which stand Amiens and Abbeville; the river of Oyse, near to the which is la Fere, Marne, Ayne, Escau, and Scarpe. Of all the towns of Picardy, Soisson was in old time the abode of kings, but since the title of the realm of Soisson was transferred to an Earldom. The last ground which the English held in France, was the county of Oye, where Calais stands, the which was taken from king Philip of Valois, after the battle of Cressy in Ponthieu, in the year 1347. and was recovered during the reign of king Henry the second, by Frances of Lorraine Duke of Guise in the year 1557.  
This is all that remains at this day of Gaul Belgike. Now it is sit to treat of France taken more particularly, which is of Gaul Celtique, and which lies near unto Picardy on the West part. This country which they call more particularly France, was sometimes inhabited by the Beaunoisins, and Parisiens; and now Paris is the chief City, this country doth now contain the Provostie and county of Paris the Duchy of Valois, Hurepois, and Gastinois. The Provostie and county of Paris is divided into four, that is, that which is called Parisis, which contains on the one side all unto Pontoise, and on the other side to Clais twards Brie, this name of Parisis is in a manner extinct, and it remains but unto certain Villages, Lowre, Cormeille, Escovan, and others which they call in Parisis, and in the taxes of Parliament, whereas they make mention of soulzes, and deniers Parisis. The city of Paris was sometimes no biggerthan the Island which the river of ●●ine doth environ: But it hath been since much augmented, and doth at this day contend for circuit with the greatest of Europe. It is divided into three parts, whereof the greatest which looks towards the East and North, and is lower than the rest, is called the town; the least which stands high upon the South and West, is termed the university; and the middle which is environed of all sides with the river, is called the city. The town hath seven gates, Saint Anthony's, the Temple, Saint Martins, Saint Denis, Montmartre, S. Honore and the new Port, which is near unto the Lowre. It hath five Suburbs, Saint Martins, the Temple, Saint Denis, Montmartre and Saint Honore. And that which makes that part more remarkable than the rest, is, that it contains Lowre, the ordinary abode of ●our Kings. The city hath for her ornament the Palace or seat of justice, and moreover the new bridge, a royal work, begun by King Henry the third, but ended by Henry the great, who hath surmounted the desseine of his predecessor, & made this bridge pleasing & very profitable. This quarter doth also comprehend our Lady's bridge (made of stone like unto the new bridge) where there is nothing to be seen but shops full of rich merchandise, and so well furnished, as we cannot see any better. And if you pass from thence to the Changers bridge, the Goldsmyths have such store of jewels and glistering stones, as the most curious of such things cannot but content himself. After all this if you come to the merchant's bridge (which was sometimes the miller's bridge) you will presently say, that it is one of ornaments of Paris, and that the street which is upon this bridge, exceeds all the rest in beauty. As for the Vnuersitie, it hath the gates of Saint Victor, Saint Marceau, Saint jaques, Saint Michael, Saint German, that of Bussy and of Nesle; with the Suburbs of Saint German, Saint Michael, Saint jaques, Saint Marceau and Saint Victor. As for the Churches or chapels, whereof the number is very great, that of our Lady exceeds the rest: is supported by 120. pillars, it is 174. paces long, and 60. broad and 100 high, it hath about it 45. Chapels with bars or grates of Iron. There are i● all eleven doors, whereof three which are in the front have over them 28 statues or images of our Kings. On the one side you may see the towers, 34 Cubits high. These towers serve for steeples; in the which there is to be seen the great Bell which is so weighty, as it requires 20 men to ring it, and the sound is heard seven leagues about. Touching other places of devotion, there is not any more admirable than the holy Chapel, joining to the Palace, the which was built by Saint Lewis, having no pillar in the midst to support the great and high vault, but only on the sides. In this chapel they keep (as they say) a part of the crown of thorns, the purple rob, the reed, and the sponge of the passion. There are many Monasteries, whereof that of the Temple, taken from the Templars in the year 1309, and given unto the Knights of Rhodes, is very great: the Abbey of Saint Geneviefue, is also very spacious: and that of Saint German de pres, in the suburbs of Saint German, the which yields unto the Abbot three thousand pounds sterling yearly rent. As for Colleges, there are in all fifty, whereof that of Navarre, founded by joan Queen of Navarre, wife to Philip the fair, is the most famous. The College of Sarbonne was instituted by Robert of Sarbonne a Divine, in the time of the king Saint Lewis. As for the shops of handicraftmen, they have certain places appointed them in Paris, that is to say, for parchment-makers near to Saint Michael's bridge, for clothworkers by Saint john in grieve, and so of the rest. There are very many goodly houses, whereof the most remarkable are Soisson place, that of Longueville, Montmorency, Guife, Ost, Langres, (which is now belonging to the Duke of main) Sens, Mark, (now in the possession of the Lord Chancellor) Nemours, Espernon, Sau, Luffan, and many other goodly houses within the city; and in the suburbs of Saint Honore, Mercoeur place, and in Saint German suburbs, that proud Palace of Gondy, and Luxembourg house. There are many others, but it were tedious to number them: it shall suffice to say that a fourth part of the houses of Paris yea a third, are like unto Palaces. I will add hereunto, that if you cast your eyes upon the arsenal, you shall found the abode very fair and the building very pleasing, in which there wants not any thing that should be in a house whereas a king's Ordnance and munition is kept. But if you desire to see an admirable and royal buiding, you must look upon the Palace Royal, where besides the galleries, which do delight and ravish the beholders, you may see a great number of lodgings, so uniformly built, and supplied so that all may serve for necessity or pleasure, as the most curious can found no defect. The town house is none of the lest ornaments of this abridgement of the world. As for the great & little Chastelet, and the Bastille, they are buildings whose antiquity recommends them more than their beauty. He that would know more particularities of Paris, let him read the book which hath been expressly made, where he shall found what may be spoken. The whole city is some eight mile's compass, Near unto the city is pont Charenton, where there is an Echo, which doth answer a voice thirteen times, and if you speak a word of four syllables near unto it, it delivers it wholly again four or five times.  
The second part is that which is vulgarly calledla Goelle, the which is little known, and whose name remains only to some villages. In this country is contained the county of Danmartin, which is a borough seated upon a little hill.  
The isle of France (which is in the third place) contains all which is from S. Denis, Poissy, and Mortmorency, and generally all that is betwixt the turnings and windings of the river of Seine, bending towards Picardy, and Normandy. Some give it other bounds: but my intent is not to dispute it. Saint Denis is stately, by reason of the sepulchers of our kings, and for many holy and precious relics, and a great number of rich ornaments. At Poissy you may see a goodly convent of religious Women of the best houses of France. At Saint German in Say, which is betwixt Poissy, and Paris, is that Royal house, which hath been made a worthy abode of kings by Henry 4.  
Then follows Vexin Francois, or Vulxin, which doth reach to Clerimont in Beawoisis: but the memory is almost lost, and is not preserved but in some old records. And thus much for the provostie and county of Paris, with the four parts. The other part of France taken more particularly, is the country of Valois▪ which doth reach unto Picardy, whereof the chief town beyond Crespy, is Senlis, a Bishopric; the other are Angy, pont Saint Maixant, Pongoing, Brenonuille etc.  
The country of Hurepois gins at Seine under the little bridge of Paris, & runs along the river unto Corbeil, Melun, and Moret, where it is divided from Gastinois by the river Verine, which falls into Loing. In this countri● stands Fontainebelleau the goodliest, most pleasing and stately building of our kings, beautified after that manner by king Henry the fourth.  
In the fourth place they set Gastinois, which comprehends the Duchies of Estamps, and Nemours, the counties of Rochefort, Moret, and others, and the towns of Milly, and Montargis.  
Now follow Beausse, which some divide into three parts: the higher extends from Ablys, to the country of Chartres, and beyond, containing the counties of Dreux, and Montfort: base Beausse contains the countries of Orleans, Soloigne, and Lorris: and as for the middle, in it they place the county of Blois, under which is that of Dunois, than the Duchy of Vendosme, and that of Touraine. The town of Orleans is famous for the deeds of arms of joan the Virgin. Soloigne contains the towns of Gergeau, la Ferte, Clery, and Saint Laurens. Touraine lies betwixt Blois, and Saumur. Ambois is of Touraine, where there is one of the best castles of France. There is also Lisle Bouchard, seated upon the river of Vienne, which doth compass in the town; Chastillon upon Indre, Loche, a strong place, Asay le Brusse upon Indre, and Asay le Ferron upon the river of Chair, and Montrichard, to which some add Loudun, but others place it in Poictou.  
Anjou gins at the bank of Chouzay, and ends betwixt Montcontour, and Herraut, whereas Poictou gins, which lies upon the South of it: upon the East it hath Touraine, and Vendosme, on the North maine, and Laval, and on the West part that toucheth Britain. There are many rivers in this province, as Loire, Mien, Vienne, Dive, Loir, Sarte, and many others. The chief town is Angers; the others are Saumur, Montreneau, Bauge, Beaufort, Brissac, Monstreul Belay, Mauleurier, Chantorceau, Duretail, lafoy flesh, Chasteau-Gontier etc. Anjou came unto the crown of France under Lewis the eleventh, by the death of Charles the last Duke, nephew to Rene.  
main, which joins unto Anjou, and Touraine, comes next, and this Province hath three principal rivers, main, Loir, and Sarte: the chief town is Mans. This Province comprehended under Aquitaine was sometimes subject unto Dukes, until the accord made betwixt Lewis the ninth king of France, and Henry the third king of England, that the English should rest satisfied with Guyenne, which should be limited on the North part by the river of Charante, and on the South with the Pyrenee mountains, and that he should quit his pretensions to Normandy, maine, & Anjou, and that in consideration thereof he should have fifteen hundred thousand crowns.  
As for the country of Perch, it is divided into two parts, whereof the one is called Perch Govet, and the principal town is Nogent le Rotrou; the other is properly the county, whereof the chief town is Mortaigne, where the Bay life's seat is. For bounds it hath Vernevil towards Normandy, and Meniers upon main. Champagne is bounded in with the countries of Brie, Bourgondie, Charrolois, and Lorraine. It is divided into high and low: the low comprehends Troy's, juig●y, Bassigny, and Vallage. juigny is a county which seperats Champagne forom Bourgondy, and is near unto Sens; the chief town of juigny. Bassigny hath the rivers of Marne, and Mouse, and a small part of the Moselle. The chief town is Chaumont which they term in Bassigny, where there is a strong castle upon a rock; they call the tower a dungeon. They give unto the country of Bassigny (besides Langres) Montigny, Goeffy, Nogentle Roy, Monteclar, Andelot, Bisnay, Choiseul, Visnorry, Clesmont; all which in a manner have castles. Vallage confines with Parthois and Barrois: the chief towns are Vassy, Saint Didier, jainuille, Montirande, Dontleran●, the castle of Forges, Esclaron, and Arsy upon the river of Aube. High Champagne contains Partois, which takes his names of a little Borough which is upon Marne, named part. The chief town is Vitry, than Argilliers, Lasaincourt, Lowement and other towns.  
They add unto these two parts, that which is joining unto it, that is, the Duchies of Reinss and Langres, and the Counties of Chalons, Ligny and la Motte. The county of Champagne was united unto the Crown of France after this manner, Theobald the second, Earl of Champagne, had one son named Theobald the third, who died without children, and had for successor Henry son to Stephen King of England, who was brother to Theobald the second. Henry had one son of the same name, who dying without children, his brother Theobald (who called himself Count Palatine of Champagne) seized thereon, and being King of Navarre by the death of his Grandfather by the mother's side, he had for his successor, both in Navarre and champaign, Henry, whose daughter joane married to Philip the fair, united Champain and other Provinces to the Crown.  
Commonly they put Champagne with Brie, which joins unto Hurepois: This country gins near unto Pont Charanton, whereas the river of Marne joins with Seine, and the river of Marne divides Brie from Champagne, as Seine doth from Gastinois; and in a manner all that lies betwixt these two rivers, unto the Duchy of Bourgondie, is commonly called Brie: There is also in this country, the town of Brie Count Robert, so called of Count Robert sometimes Lord of Brie, who made his abode there. The other towns best known in ●rie, are, Chasteau-Tierry, Meaux and Nogent; and some place the town of Sens in this country.  
The last part of Gaul, which they call Celtique and Belgic, and which are under the Parliament of Paris, is the country of Lyonnois, which hath for limits on the North side, Bresse, on the East, Savoye, on the South, Dauphine and Vivarez, and on the West, Forests and Auvergne. The chief town of this country is Lion, seated upon the rivers of Soane and Rosne, whereof Soane passeth through the midst of the city. The greatness, beauty and reputation of this town is so well known, as it needs not more discourse.  
I must now come to the provinces of Aquitaine, which acknowledge the jurisdiction of the parliament of Paris; as the countries of Berry, Bourbonnois, Poictou, Angousmois, the country of Aunis and Auvergne. Berry hath for bounds on the left side Soloigne, from the which it is divided by the river of Chair: On the East, Hurepois, Nivernois and Bourbonnis, and in this place it is limited, by a little river called Fay: On the South, it hath Limosin, whereas the river of Croure runs: and on the West lies Poictou and Touraine, from which it is divided by a little river called Clery. The chief town of this country is Bourges: This town had seven gates, but since the wars three of them have been shut up: These gates are called, the one, Bourbonne, the other S. Private, the third S. Sulpitius, and the fourth Arogne. There are seventeen Collegiall Churches, and seventeen parishes, the four orders of begging Friars, two Abbeys of men, the one without the town called S. Sulpitius, the other within the town named of S. Ambrose, both very rich. There are three of women, the first of the Annonciade, the second of S. Laurence, and the last of the begging sisters of S. Clare. They make much cloth there, and it hath the Fairs of Saint Laurence, S. Lazare, S. Martin and S. Oursin, where there is a great concourse of Merchants. The other towns of the Duchy of Berry are Yssoudun, Dun le Roy, Vier●on, Me●un, Concressant. They do also place in this country, the counties of Sance●re, and S. Aignan and the Barony of Montsaucon. There is also in this country 40. Chastellenies. Sancerre hath under it, Sancergues, Beaufeu, Chapelle, Anguillon, Boucard, jalonges, Tarenay, Verdigny, Menesme, Charen●ony, and other places. The Barony of Mountfaucon comprehendeth the Seignèuries of Baugy, Gron, La Fane, Lyuron, Cony, Villabon, Seury, Marcilly, Marnay, Farges, Auor, Saligny, Percigny, Cru, Lassay, Boi●boson, Nuysement, Villiers and Compoy. The Chastellenies are Aix d'Angillon, Sury in Vaux, S. Soulange, S. Palais, Salle du Roy, Bevil, Quantilly, Femorigny Francheville, la Chapelle, Nansay, dry, Leureux, Beaulieu, Brecy, Bengy, S. Fleurant, Neufuy upon Baro●ion, Morthonnier, Marmaignes, Maubranches, S. Vrsin, Tillay, Brilliers, Vatan, S. Satur, Jury, Estrechies, Maupas, Ville-newe, Cloys and Budge. I should be too tedious if I should name in particular all the other places of Berry; wherefore I will end this discourse, having related how this Duchy was united to the Crown of France, in the time of Hugh Capet, when as Godfrey was governor for the king: Of this Godfrey descended Harpin, who bought the county of Berry from king Henry the first: he going to war, sold the said county to Philip the first, to be united to the Crown. Some years after, john of Valois obtained this county (erected to a Duchy) of his father king john for his portion. john dying without heir male, the Duchy returned unto the Crown. It was afterwards given to john son to Charles the sixt, who dying without children, left his brother Charles for his successor, who coming to the succession of the Crown of France, and chased, in a manner, out of it by the English, he was called in mockery king of Bourges: So by the means of Charles the seventh it came unto the Crown.  
The country of Bourbonnois hath for bounds on the West part, Berry and Limosin, on the North, Nivernois, on the East, Bourgondy, and on the South, Lyonno●. This country was sometimes under Dukes, whereof, the last was Archimbaud, who had no heir but one daughter, called Agnes, who was married to john Duke of Bourgondie, and he having but one daughter, called Beatrix, he married her to Robert, son to Lewis the ninth, king of France, and gave him the Duchy of Bourg●ndie, upon condition that he should carry the name of Bourbon, the which was done. Robert, son to S. Lewis, begat Lewis, surnamed the great, who was made the first Duke of Bourbon, by Philip of Valois, about the year 1329. He had for his successor, in the direct line, Peter the first, (who had a brother, called james, of whom came th● Earls of March and Vendosme) than Lewis the second, Bon, john the first, Charles, and john the second: He dying without children, Peter, the second, succeeded him, whose daughter and heir Susan, being married to Charles of Bourbon, Earl of Montpensier (son to Gilbert of Bourbon) she made her husband Duke of Bourbon. It is this Charles, who being Constable of France, and adhering to the Emperor Charles the fifth, against king Fra●ncis the first, was slain before Rome, in the year 1527. After the death of Susan, the king seized upon the Duchy of Bourbonnois, and then the Dukes of Vendosme took only the title and arms by the right of parentage. The country of Bourbonnois is divided into high and low: the lower contains the towns and two counties: the chief town is Molins, seated upon the river of Allier, abounding in fish, especially in Salmon. There is a goodly castle at Molins, and as pleasing a garden as can be seen, where there are many Lemon and Orange trees. The other towns are Bourbon, Archambaud, and Bourbon Ancy, Montmeraut, Montl●sson, S. Porcin (which some put among the towns of Auvergne) Cuffet, Chancelle, Charroux, Vernevil, Varennes Ganat, upon the frontier of Auvergne, Mont aux, Moines, Sowigny, Palisse, S. Geran, S. Peter le Monstier, Aynay le Chastea●, S. Amand and others. They did also comprehend the two counties of Forest and Beaujolois. Beaujolois doth embrace all that which is betwixt the rivers of Loire and Saone, and is seated towards the East, betwixt Forest and Bourgondie: the chief town is called Beaujeu. The country of Forest hath for his principal town, Montbrison: the rest are, Saint Stephens, Saint Guermier, Saint German Laval, Saint Bonet le Chasteau, Saint Rambet, and some others less famous. High Bourbonnois contains only the country of Combraille, where Montaigu is, this country is more hilly than the lower Bourbonnois.  
Poictou is a great Province, containing one thousand two hundred parishes, under three bishoprics of Poitiers, Maillesay and Lusson. This country hath ●or her bounds, towards the South, Angoumois and Xaintonge, towards the West, the Ocean, on the North side, Anjou and Britain, and the rest is bounded by Berry, Touraine and Limosin. This country had sometimes the title of a Realm among the Goths, who were expelled by Clovis and out of all Aquitaine. The Emperor Lewis the gentle gave the realm of Aquitaine to his son Pepin. And Charles the bald having expelled Charles and Pepin, the sons of Pepin, and put them into Monasteries, he seized upon this principality, and gave it unto Arnold his kinsman, but upon condition, that all these countries should from thenceforth carry but the title of a Duchy. Arnold had for his successors, William the good, Eblon 1. and 2. William 2. and 3. Guy William 4. and 5. and his daughter called Elinor, being sole heir, was married to Lewis 7. king of France, who doubting some treason, and suspecting her of adultery, put her away, and she suddenly married with Henry duke of Normandy, who succeeded Stephen king of England. Henry had for his successors, as well in the realm of England, as in the provinces which he held in France, his sons Richard and john. But it happening that Arthur son to Godfrey (who was also son to king Henry) contesting that he should be preferred to king john, and being persuaded and solicited by king Philip Augustus to take Poictou from john, he attempted to make himself master thereof by force: but he was defeated by john, taken prisoner, and carried to Roven, where he died in prison: whereupon john beind accused of Parricide before king Philip by Constance mother to Arthur, he was condemned, and his goods presently adjudged to king Philip, as direct Lord, when among other things Poictou did accrue unto him. But Lewis 8. his son gave it to Alphonso his son, who dying without children, it came unto king Philip, and ren●ained in the possession of our kings, until that Edward 3. recovered it in the time of Philip of Valois, and held it more amply with all Aquitaine, by the treaty which was made betwixt him and king john King Edward gave the principality of Aquitaine to his son; who having overcharged the country, he lost a great part of it, which yielded to Charles 5. king of France, and afterwards Charles 7. expelled the English out of all Guienne, in the year 1453. and left it to his son Lewis 11. he gave it to his brother Charles, after whose death, king Lewis left it to Charles 8. Since which time Guienne (whereof Poictou is a principal part) hath remained in the hands of the French kings. The chief town of all this Province is Poitiers, from which, the rest of the country hath taken the name: the other towns are Niort, Fontenay le Conte, whereas the little river of Vendee doth pass, Lusignan, Montmorillon, base March, Dorat, saint Maixant, Suiray. There is also in Poictou the principality of Talmont, and that of Roche Suron. There is the Duchy of Gastellerant, upon the river of Vienne, the vicountie of Tovars, Brosse, Bridieres, Roche-chovart; and the Baronnies of Mainlers, Partenay, Melle, Chizay, Chawigny, Lussac, Bressuire, Charrou, Chasteneraye, saint Mesmin, saint giles, Chasteaumur, Sables d'Aulonne, saint Hermine, Montaigu, Mirebeau, la Motte, saint Bewray, Vowant, S. Hilaire, Mortemer, Luzay, saint Savin, Lisle, jourdain, saint Beniot du Saut, Bourgneuf Meroil, Meruant, Bridge, Vowert, Ville-fagnaix and others.  
Angoumois is bounded on the North side, by Poictou, on the East, by Xaintonge, on the South, by Bourdelois and Perigort, and on the West, by Limosin. From East to West it is four and twenty miles long, the breadth from South to North is sixteen. The chief town of this country is Angoulesme: the other lesser towns are Marton, Chasteauneuf, Blaissac, Chabannes, Confallant, Ruff●●, Aigres, Gouruille, Rochefoucaut, which is an Earldom, Merevill, Mansac, Villebois which are of the house of Marevil, Momberon, and Bouteville, which are of the house of Montmorency.  
Charles the French king surnamed the wise, gave the Earldom of Angoulesme taken from the English, to his son Lewis, who being king left it to his son john, to whom Charles succeeded. Charles had for successor Francis 1. who coming to the crown of France, made this Earldom a duchy, and gave it to his mother, after whose death, his son Charles carried the title of Duke of Angoulesme, and he dying without children, the Duchy was united unto the crown.  
The country of Aulnis comprehends the territory of Rochel, & is of a very small compass.  
The country of Auvergne hath for limits on the East side, Forest and Lionois, on the South, the last Dioceses of Languedoc, on the West, Quercy, Perigort and Lymosin, and of the North part, Berry and Bourbonnois. This Province is divided into high and low. The chief town of high Auvergne is saint flower, the others are Orillac, Carlat, Murat, and Billon. Base Auvergne comprehends Alimaigne (it may be it was so named of the river Lamone or Lymone which falls into Allier) It is in length from the old bridge of Brivat unto Ganat (yet some extend it farther) about 40. miles. The breadth from the mountain commonly called Poy de Dome, unto the town of Thiers, is about sixteen miles. The chief town is Clermont fair and pleasing for the situation and fountains. The rest are Rion, Montferrant, Yssoire, Brioude, Aigueperse, and many others.  
These are all the Provinces, which are under the jurisdiction of the parliament of Paris, let us now come to those, which acknowledge the parliament of Tolouse.  
Quercy hath for limits, the Country of Perigord, that of Rhodes, Auvergne & Lymosin, in which are two Dioceses, that of Cahors and Montauban upon Tarn. The lesser towns are Burelle, Nazaret, Sovillac, Gourdon, Martel and others.  
The country of Rovergue joins to Quercy upon the East, the rest is environed by Languedoc and Auvergne. The chief town is Rhodes, the others are Villefranche of Rovergue, Estauges, Espeyron.  
Languedoc hath for limits towards the West, Gascoine, from the which it is divided by the river Garonne above Quercy, to the North Auvergne and Forest, and upon the East Province, and Dauphine: so as all the river of Rosne is held to be of Languedoc, and under the parliament of Tolouse: Upon the South side it hath the Mediterranean Sea, and part of the Pirenee mountains. This Province is very large, containing two and twenty Dioceses, whereof Vivarez alone which runs above twenty leagues along the river of Rosne, is taken but for one. The Dioceses be Tolouse, Narbonne, Alby, Carcassonne, Besiers, Adge, Montpelier, Nismes, Vsez, saint Pons de Tomiers, Alet, Castres●'s Pamies, Mirepoix, saint Papoul, Lodesue, Eaule, Lavaur, Montauban, Vivarez, Velay, & Gevodan. The chief town is Tolouse, seated upon the river of Garonne, in a champion and very fertile country. The others are Narbonne, Alby Carcassonne, Beziers, Pesenas, Montpelier, Nismes, Vsez, Baignolet, Aliaz, Sommieres, Pont saint Esprit, Bourg, Vivers, Voute, Tournon, Aubenas, Annonay, mend, Meruege, Puy and a great number of others which would be tedious to name. At Nismes there is to be seen the Arenes, or the ancient Amphitheatre which is wonderful work, but Pont de guard which is upon the river of Guerdon, where there are three bridges one upon an other, is much more admirable: the stones of the Arenes and of the bridge are of an extraordinary greatness. Of late years they have attributed unto Languedoc the county of Foix, the which was before of Guyenne. This country hath Languedoc upon the East, Comingeois on the West, the territory of Riviere on the North, and the Pirenee mountains on the South: and in it there is only the Bishopric of Pamies, which town is situated whereas the two rivers of Lers and Lagere join. The other towns are Saverdun and Masares, the ancient abode of the Earls of Foix.  
For that Gasconie hath some part of the jurisdiction of Tolouse, it is fit now to discourse thereof, that we may commit no disorder.  
Gasconie in our time comprehends all that which is betwixt the river of Garonne, the Pirenee mountains, the Ocean and the Guienne of Lewis xj. Some parts of Gascoine are bounded by the river of Garonne, as Armagnac and Bigorre: others lie aswell on the one as the other side of the river, as Agenois, the Duchy of Albret and the country of Cominges. The county of Armagnac contains two Bishoprics, the one of Auch, and the other of Laictour which are the two chief towns, besides the which there is Lisle jourdain and some others of no great moment.  
The county of Bigorre is betwixt the countries of Bearn and Cominges near to the Pirenee Mountains, whereof a great part is under this county, from the mountains of Aure, unto those of Saut and Asp which are of Bearn. The chief town is Tarbe, where is the Castle of Bigorre. Upon the frontiers of Bigorre are the counties of Gaure and Estrac.  
Agenois hath for limits to the East, Quercy, to the North, Perigord (and on this side Agenois reacheth unto Byron in Perigord) on the West, Gasco●ne and Garronne, which is also upon the South. This country contains two Bishoprics Again and Condom. The smaller towns are Villeneufue, of Agenois: Clairac, Marmand, Foy the great, and some others upon the river of Garonne, with Valence upon Baise, Lainac, Romien, Montreall.  
The country of Cominges is divided into high and low, the high is in the mountains, and the towns are S. Bertrand, Couserans, Saint Beatrice, Saint Fregou, Monregeau, Saliers and others. In base Cominge is the new Bishopric of Lombes, and the towns of Samathan, Lisle in Dodon, Mure●, Riumes, with many great bouroughs and rich villages. And this is all that belongs to the jurisdiction of the parliament of Tolouse.  
The parliament of Roven comprehends all Normandy, which after it had been taken from the English by Charles 7. falling afterwards into the hands of Charles his son, it was taken from him by Lewis xj. his brother, and in exchange he gave him Guienne, since which time, Normandy hath always remained in the power of our Kings, and hath not been given to any of the children of France. This Province hath at this time for bounds towards the East, the river Epte, towards the place which is called Saint Cler upon Epte, upon the West, it extends to the river of Cenon which parts Normandy from Britain, for that this river coming out of Fougeres, and watering Pontorson, falls into the Sea at the foot of Mont Saint Michael, called Tombelaine, at Cap de Genests: and from the North unto the South it hath in length the country which is from the Sea unto the river of Sartre, which divides the Normans from the Manceaux by Alencon, and from perch. And by this means the Normans have the Picards of Beawoisis on the East, the Manceaux on the South, the Ocean to the North, and Britain upon the West, having his elevation from 46. to 47. degrees, being by this means one of the coldest Regions that is under the French kings jurisdiction, except the county of Oye in Picardy. The chief town of this Province is Roven, the seat of the parliament: the other towns are Auranches, which is very near the sea; Eureux which hath within its jurisdiction the towns of Vernon, Aigle, Pas●ey, Tullieres, Ingles, Canches, Rugles, Bruin, Hermenuille. Then there is the town of Bayeux, which is reasonably good: and Says, under which are many towns, and among other countries in a manner all that of Alencon, and a part of Perch: then Constances' and Lisieux: There are in it the Duchies of Alenson, Aumale and Lon●ueville, the Earldoms of Yew, Harcourt, Eureux, tankerville, Maleurier Mo●tain, Montgommerie, Thorigny, Guysors. There is also the Realm of Yuetot, of a small extent, the which was erected in the time of Clothaire● ●. who slew Gautier Lord of Yuetot on good Friday. This realm is in the country of Caux. Moreover Normandy is divided into high and low: high Normandy (besides the Duchies and Counties above named) contains the country which is called Vexin Norman, whereof the chief town is Gi●orss, whether resort for justice Estrepagny, Escovy the great Forest of Lybonis, saint Clair upon Astre, the two Andelys, and Chasteau Gaillard. Base Normandy is divided into the country of Caux, Bessin and Constantine. The chiefetown of Caux is Dieppe: those of lesser fame be Harfleu, Honfle●, Newhaven, Caudebec and ●escamp. The country of Bessin hath besides the town of Bayeux, whereof I have spoken, those of Caen, Falaise, Hiesmes, Vire, Mortain. The country of Constantine comprehends, 
Yuetot is in ● C●●x.  besides the town of Constance, and the realm of Yuetot, the towns of Valoigne, Cherbourgh, saint Lo, Quarentan, Montebourgh, S. Saweur, S. Hermont, and saint giles.  
The parliament of Bourdeaux hath under it the countries of Perigort, Limosin, Xam●onge, Bordelois, the Tandes, Albert, Basadois, high Gascoine, and part of biscay and Medoc, beyond the river of Garonne. Limosin hath for bounds upon the North Berry, on the East Bourbonnois, on the South Awergue, on the West Perigort, and on the Northwest Poictou. There is a great Ealme betwixt Maison neusue, and Argenton which serves for a limit to Berry, Bourbonnois, Auvergne and Limosin. There is high and low Limosin. The higher hath Lymoges for the principal town: the other towns are Sousteraine, Boisson, Barat, Dorat, Confoulat: base Limofin is properly called lafoy March, and is bordering upon Auvergne and Perigort. The chief town is Tulle, seated in a rough and hilly country. There are also the towns of Vsarche, Brive lafoy gaillarde, Treignac, Donzenac, Allassac, Belloc, Meyssac, Vsset, Belmont.  
Perigort is in forty degrees elevation from the Pole, It hath upon the East the country of Limosin, on the West Angoomois and part of Xaintogne, on the North Angoumois, in to which it runs, and on the South Gascoine, according to the river of Dordonne, which makes the separation of Agenois and of the country betwixt the two seas, from Perigort. The chief town of this country is Perigueux: the rest are Sarlat, Bergerac, Riberac, Nontron, Lunel, Byron, Brathomme, la Roche, and Miramont. The parliament of Bourdeaux hath also under it in Guienne, Bourdelois, Basadois, the Lands, and Xaintonge. The chief town of Bourdelois is Budeaux, a fair and ancient city, whereas that famous poet Ausonius (one of the ornaments of France) was borne. The other towns are Blaye, Bourg upon the sea, Libourne, Condat. There is also in the Seneschallcy of Bourdeauz (which is called the country betwixt the two seas) Medoc, Buch and Fronsac. The country of Medoc comprehends all that which is betwixt Bourdeaux, the Ocean sea, and Garonne which falls into it. This country is in a manner all sand, and sometimes overflowed by the sea. In this country is Pauliac and Donissay. The country of Buche whereof the lord is called Captal, joins to Medoc, and is subject to the Earls of Candales. The Fronsadois hath the town of Fransac, whereof it hath taken the name.  
The chief town of Basadois is Basas a days journey from Bourdeaux, the others are saint Bazeille and Reule ᶜ seated upon Garonne, Monseguer upon the river of Drot, saint Farm, Castle Morou, Geronde, and Sameterre, and there are many villages even unto Dordonne.  
Then follows the country of Lapord, or Lourde, which hath two Dioceses, that is to say, Bayonne & Aqs. Bayonne is the chief town of the country, whose jurisdiction extends to the river of Iron, which is beyond saint john de Luz.  
The country of Xaintonge hath on the North side Poictou, on the East Angoumois and Perigort, on the South the river of Garonne, and on the West the Ocean. The chief town is Saintes: the others are saint john d'Angely, Lorgaire, Archaut, Pont, Loubleze, Taillebourg, jarnac, Barbesieux, josac and Brovage, famous for the salt which is made there.  
The parliament of Rennes contains the higher and base Britain, and hath upon the East Normandy, main and Anion, on the South Poictou, and on the two other sides the Ocean. It is six days journey in length, and three in breadth. They speak two languages, that of high Britain is French, the other is Breton bretonnant, or base Brittany, which hath no affinity with the French. High Britain is more Eastward, and is divided from base Britain by a line drawn from Chasteau Andron and continued betwixt Quintain and Corlay towards the gulf of Vannes unto the river of Villain, so as saint john is in base Britain. The Metropolitan town of this country is Nantes. The place of parliament is at Renes: the other towns are Dol, saint Brieu, soint Malo, Dinan, Rieux, Chasteaubriant, Lamballe, Vitray, jugon, saint Aubin du Cormier, Plerel, jocelin, Malestroit, Pontigny, saint julien Ancenex. Vannes is the chief town of base Britain, the rest are saint Paul de Leon, Landtriguer, Blavet, Breast, Morlay, Guincamp, Quimpelray, Conquerneaux, Quinpercorantin, saint Renaulde des bois. To conclude Britain of an Earldom was made a Duchy in the time of Henry 2. king of England, and was united to France after the death of Anne of Britain, who being contracted to Maximilian of Austria son to the Emperor Frederick was in the end married to Charles the eighth, the French king, and after him to Lewis the twelfth, and by this means the Duchy came unto the Crown.  
The Parliament of Dijon comprehends at this day that which is called the Duchy of Bourgondie, which they say was so named of a place called Bourg-ogne in the country of Langres. The limits are upon the North, the countries of Champagne and Auxerrois, whereof a part is of this Province: on the West, Nivernois and Bourbonnois: on the South, Beaujolois and Lyonnois: and on the East, the river of Rosne, which divides it from Savoy, Bresse, and the Franche County. The chief town of this Duchy is Dijon, seated almost upon the frontier of France, on the river of Ousche. Although this town were burnt, in the year 1227. yet is it now fairer and more stately than ever. Next there is Autun, sometimes a great and famous town, where there are goodly marks of antiquity, it did contend for the primacy with all the rest of France. This was the capital town of the Heduois, which was one of the two factions which did trouble all France. Then they accounted Beauen, Chalon upon Sao●, Semur in Laussois, Tournus, Nuyz, Aualon, Saulieu, Flavigny, Aussonne, Noyers, Ravieres, Leigne, Mombard, Chastillon, S. Seigne, Seloigne, Crevant, Viteau, Verdun, Arnay, Seurre, Tonnerre and Senescey. They place their Episcopal towns, which are of the jurisdiction of Paris, that is, Nevers, which is the chief town of the Duchy of Nivernois, Ausserre and Mascon. They add also unto the parliament of Dijon, Bresse, whereof Bourg is the chief town, and the Bishopric of Bellay, Bugey, Veromen, and the new country which joins unto Savoy. The Duchy of Bourgondie hath continued in the power of the French Kings, since the death of Charles the last Duke of Bourgondie, who was slain before Nancy, for that presently after his death Lewis the eleventh seized thereon. As for the county of Mascon, the king S. Lewis bought it of john Earl of that country, and of Elie his wife.  
The parliament of Grenoble comprehends all Dauphine, which hath for bounds, on the South part, Provence, and the town of Ambrum is the Metrapolitan of this country, which is called high Dauphine: on the North it hath the countries of Lyonnois and Bresse, and on this side is base Dauphine, of which Vienne is the Archbishop's seat: on the West it hath Rosne, which parts it from Lyonnois and Vivarez, and to the East Savoy. The chief town is Grenoble, the seat of Parliament situated almost in the midst of the province. The towns along the Rosne, or near it, are, Ternay, Vienne, Rossillon, S. valier, Them, lafoy Roche, Valence, Montelimar: within the country and in the plain, Quirieu, Cremieu, Bourgoin, la Tour du Pinnacia, la cost, S. Andre, S. Marcelin, Voyron S. Anthony of Viennois, Moretel, Beaurepaire, Moras, Romans upon Isere, Loriot, Chabeul, Crest, Die. In the mountains, Ambrum, the Archiepiscopal town, Gap, Talart, Brianson, Chorges, Serre, Mombrun, Mure, Essiles. There is in the mountains, the countries of Triesues, the Baronies, Gapensois and Briansonois. The chief countries of the plain are, Graisivodan, which is near to Grenoble, Viennois, which is some twenty miles long, Valoire, in which are the towns of Moras, Beaurepaire, & la cost, S. Andre, one of the best parts of Dauphine, and Valentinois, which is also of a great circuit. King Philip of Valois got this province of Hu●bert Dauphin of Viennois, in the year 1340. upon condition that the eldest son of France should carry the name of Dauphin.  
The parliament of Aix contains Provence, which is bounded towards the North by Dauphine and the river of Durance: on the E●st, by the Alpes and the river of Vare, upon whose banks, on the left hand, stands Nice: on the South part, the mediterranean Sea: and on the West part of the princi palitie of Orange, and part of the county of avignon. The chief town of Provence is Aix, the seat of the parliament. The rest are Marseille, Arles, near unto which is the Camarque, which is a piece of ground lying between two arms or channels of the river of Rosne, containing seven great provenciall leagues, which is above four and twenty good English miles; in this Camarque there grows great store of corn: and moreover, they have goodly pastures both for cattle and horses, whereof the inhabitants feed a great number: Moreover, there is the plain of S. Chamar, of Miramas, Senas, Mallemort, unto Ourgon, and Ardage towards the river of Darance, which may be compared to Beausse, and in all this extent of country there may be seen great numbers of Orange trees, of Lemons, Pomegranates, Olive and Fig trees, and the goodliest Vines that may be seen: there are also in this country Palm trees, which carry as good fruit as those of Africa. The other towns are Ri●z, Freius, grass, Senez, Glandesue, Vance, dign, Cisteron, Brignoles, Ourgon, Saint Trapes, Hieres, Frejuz, Antibe, Tolon, Craux, Saint Maximin, Tarascon, Draguignan, Forqualquier, Vallansolle, Pertuis, Ber●e, P●y or Peucho.  
Betwixt Aix and Marseille, is Saint Baume, whether Mary Magdalen had retired herself. Touching the manner how this county was united unto the Crown, you must understand that joane Queen of Naples, and countess of Provence, left for her successor, in her other principalities, and in this Earldom, Lewis of Anjou, son to john the French king, after that she had adopted him to be revenged of her enemies. Lewis had for his successor his son Lewis the second, and he, Lewis the third, adopted also by joan the second, Queen of Naples, to be king of Sicily, and Duke of Salabria. Lewis the third, dying without children, left his estates (with the consent of joane the second) to Rene of Anjou his brother, who refusing to resign his rights to the realm of Naples, and county of Provence, to Rene of Lorraine his grandchild, issued from his daughter Yoland, transported them to his brother Charles Earl of maine, who having lost his son Charles, made Lewis the eleventh his heir general. Others say, that this was done by the testament of Rene, not without grievous complaints of Rene of Lorraine.  
The Parliament of Bearn contains two bishoprics, that of Escar, and Oledon. This country lies all at the foot of the Pirennee mountains, the length being from South to North, and it hath upon the South side the county of Bigorre, and on the North, Biscay the royal, from the which, Bearne is separated by the river of Gave. The breadth is from East to West, and it hath on the East, the country of the Lands and Chalosse, according unto Adur, and on the West Biscay of Navarre.  
The country of Bearne is divided into two, on the one side are the mountains, where Oleron stands, on the other, the valleys where Escar is situated. The chief town is Pau, the seat of the parliament. The other towns are Orthez, the ancient abode of the Earls of Foix, and Lords of Bearn, Morlas, a place where they did coin money: Nay, a town of great traffic, which was all burnt with lightning, about the year 1545. Pontac, Coderch and Naverreins, seated at the foot of the mountains. There is also base Navarre, whereas S. Palaiz stands.  
The parliament of Mets contains Toul and Verdun, which are under the protection of the French king, who keeps garrison in them. The town of Mets was made subject to the French by king Henry the second. This town is watered by the rivers of Moselle and Seille. It was sometime the chief of the realm of Austrasia, and now all about it is called the country of Messin.  
There are some Islands which belong unto France, the which a●● in the Ocean upon the Western coast, as the Ilaud of our Lady of Bovin.  
The Island of Dieu, or God, where there are two or three good villages.  
The Island of Marmotier, where there is an Abbey, commonly called the White Abbey.  
The Island of Raiz, right against Rochel, abounding in wine, in which is the town of Saint Martin, at this day it carries the title of a Duchy.  
The Island of Oleron, where they make great store of salt.  
The Capes or Promentories of France are that of S. Matthew, or du Four, which extends beyond all France towards the West.  
After this is Blankenest, right against the Cape of Kent which is in England.  
The Cape of Talmond.  
The Cape of Buch.  
The Cape of Gercel is to be seen in the Mediterranean sea, it is called by some Cabo de Saint Sigo, and by others Cabo baxo.  
The Cape of Sete, which is in Languedoc.  
The Cape of la Haque.  
The Forests of France are many. In the country of Main, are found the Forests of Versay, Longoulnay, Persi, Sille, Charnay, Audain,' Main and Concise. In base Britain the Forests of boast blanc, Toriant and Guierche. In Poictou the Forests of Mouliere, Dine, Brosse and Ligne. In Berry, the Forests of Robert and others. In Anjou, those of Loursay and Marson. In the country of Boullein, the woods of Surene, Cells, Hardelot, Dalles and Boursin. In Vermandois, Recoigne and Bouhan. In Picardy, the woods of Baine, lafoy Fere, Beaulieu and Coussy. But above all we must esteem the Forest of Orleans, which is much greater than any one in France; and the Forest of Fountain belleau, the pleasure of our Kings, as oftentimes that of Mountargis is. There are many others, but it were tedious to number them.  
The chief rivers of France are Seine, which hath her spring in the mountain of Voge in Bourgondie, and from thence it runs to Paris, then to Roven, and so goes and dischargeth itself into the Sea.  
Seine receives into her stream the river of Marne, which comes out of the mountain of Faucilles, a little above Langres, and passing by januille, Saint Didier, Chalon Dormant and Meaux, and receiving some small rivers of less note, as Saut, Bloisse, Ourq, and Tresme, it mingles itself with Seine, at pont Charanton, near unto Paris.  
Oyse comes from a place above Guise, towards the East, near unto the village of Orgny, it passeth through Picardy, and watering Guise, lafoy Fere, Compiegne, Saint Maixant, and some other towns; it falls into the river of Seine, near unto Poyssy, a little beneath Pontoise. The river of Aisne is according unto Cesar in Gaul Belgic upon the extremities of the Diocese of Rheins. Her spring is in Barrois, above Clermont, near unto a village called Sovilly.  
The river of Loire hath her spring in Auvergne at a place called lafoy Font de Loire. This river having run a great country, and passing by Roan, Marcigne, Desise, Nevers, Sevilly, Gyen, Gergeau, Orleans, Blois, Amboise, Tours, Samur and Pont de Ce, falls into the Sea, near unto Nantes. It receiveth many navigable rivers, as Allier, Chair, Vienne and main. Allier hath her spring above Clermont, and hath greater store of fish than Loire, although it be not so great. It passeth by Molinet, and falls into Loire at a place called Bec d'Allier.  
Rosne cometh out of the mountain of Fourche in high Valois, and passeth by the Lake of Geneva, and then to Lion, whereas Soane enters into it. This river descends from thence to Vienne, Tournon, Valence, avignon and other places, until that it casts itself by two branches into the Mediterranean Sea, near unto Arles in Provence. This river receives Soane at Lion, Isere betwixt la Roche & Valence, and besides these, Droume and Durance.  
Soane hath her spring near unto the springs of Mensae and Moselle, it passeth through Bourgondie, and falls into Rosne beneath Lion, near unto the Abbay of Esnay.  
Ise●e passeth by Grenoble and Romans in Dauphine coming from Savoy, and falls into Rosne near to Valence in Dauphine.  
Droume descendeth from the Alpes, and then joineth with Rosne beneath Valence.  
Durance comes also from the Alpes, and is the most troublesome river in France, having no safe ford.  
Garonne according unto Cesar, did divide the Gauls from the Aquitains'. It comes from the Pyrenee mountains, near to a place called Cadalup, and coming from the mountains of Foix, it pasteth by Tolouse and Moissac, and from thence to Bourdeaux, near to which it falls into the Aquitaine sea. This flood receives the rivers of Tarry, Gets, Oold or Loath & Dordoigne a great navigable river, & which yields little to Garonne.  
It were too long a discourse to set down all the navigable rivers of France; wherefore I will forbear, contenting myself to have made mention of the principal.  

Quality of the Countries of France.  
AS France hath divers provinces, so they have divers qualities, which I will seek to comprehend in as few words as I can. First, the soil about Paris is very pleasant and fertile, and wants neither corn, wine, white meats, first-fruits, hay, grass, nor waters, which doth furnish it in such sort, as it is admirable. Among other you see the little strain of Gentilly, which is also called the river of Gobelins, fit than all the rivers of France to dye Scarlet. You have also at Montmartre, near unto Paris and in other neighbour places, great store of plaster, which they use at Paris for all their buildings; and it is that which makes the means easy to build in this great city. The soil about Chartres abounds in corn, wine, and first-fruits, it is watered by a little river called Doewre, which passeth through the town.  
Beausse be one of the most fertile countries of Europe for wheat, so as neither Sicily nor England do equal this Country in fertility, being one of the chief Garniers and nurseries of Paris: There is but one river in all this Country that hath any current, the whole country being flat and plain; So as Beausse being without water, the inhabitants draw their water from marshes, lakes and pits, which dry up in summer.  
Soloigne is a sandy country, where there grows much Rye.  
The soil about Bloys abounds in corn, wine, first-fruits and other commodities which serve for the use of man, it hath much underwoods and timber, many rivers, brooks, Pools and fountains, wherein it exceeds Beausse. There is Terra Sigillata found betwixt Orcheze and Blois.  
The country about Orleans is as fertile as any other in all singularities. There they shall find pleasure, whether they will fish, hawk or hunt, for that there is abundance of fishes, foul and game. But above all, the soil of Orleans is famous for the excellent wines, both white and claret, which grow there, and which they come and fetch, not only from Paris, but many times from England.  
The Country of Gastynois is not very fertile, sandy in many places, and yields little, yet pleasing for her forests and rivers.  
The soil about Sens abounds in all things that may serve for the life of man. There is store of corn and delicate wine. Flesh is very cheap, they have plenty of butter, cheese, wool, and other commodities. There is abundance of fish, and oil of nuts, for that the whole country is covered with wal-n●t-treeses, especially the Champion which lies betwixt the rivers of Yonne and Seine, from Montreau faut Yonne unto Sens: and on this side the river of Yonne towards Gastinois, there are goodly hills covered with vines.  
The country about Auxerre is no less profitable for vines, for there is such abundance of wine, as it doth furnish Paris a great part of the year.  
Champagne is a fl●t country and fit for tillage, yet in some places the soil is very light, and yields little. As for Brie, although it be full of woods, yet it is a good country, having a clear heaven, a sweet and temperate air, and great ●i●erss. Finally, there wants not any thing that is necessary for the life of man: There is wine, corn, cattles, fruit, wood, foul, game for hunting, and abundance of fish.  
The country about Provins is famous for the conserve of roses which is made there, and sent into all parts of France. They fetch wine from their neighbours, but it abounds in corn, pasture and water.  
Picardy, which is watered by the Rivers of Some, Oyse, Aynan, L●s●a●, Scarpe and others, is one of the chief Garniers of France, neither doth it want any thing but wine, which grows not rather for that the inhabitants ca●e not to plant any vines, than for any defect in the soil, which might carry grapes, & they would ripen aswell as in many other places, which are not so fit for this plant.  
Nivernois hath three navigable rivers, Loire, Allier and Yonne, with others that are not navigable, as Nyeure, recommended for the goodly meadows which it doth water: There is also Lixentes, Laubois, Aron, Alene, Acolin, Bresbre, Arrou and Quieure. The Champion country is full of wood and pasture, which makes the people to attend the feeding of cattle, and not greatly to care for tillage, nor Vines, but in some places betwixt Nevers & la charity, and in some other Chastellenies. That which is most rare in this country, it abounds with mines of silver and Iron. In former times they drew out silver near unto S. Leonard, but the mines of Iron are at this day more used, and the country hath this commodity, that they have store of wood, and they use pit coal which they found near to Dezize. Two leagues from Nevers they do find excellent stone for building, the which is transported to Orleans, Blois, Amboise, and other places, whose buildings are made of this stone, for that it is easily transported by the Loire.  
The country of Berry is fertile for the greatest part, and abounds in all that is necessary for the life of man, having woods, vines, arable ground, flesh, fruit and wool, with many rivers, as Cherseoli, Indre, Creusa, Azin, Choestre, Colin, Tripand, Moulon and Auron, whereof the greatest part join together, and falling into Loire, is a means to carry commodities out of Berry into other places.  
Touraine is one of the most fertile countries of France, and is that which they call the delight and garden of France, for that the air is so good, as the first-fruits are excellent, yea the best in Europe, so as they are carried unto Paris, where they are preferred before all others. There is abundance of corn and wine, and there wants no woods, as well for hunting, as for fire and building. There is also found a kind of fair white stone easy to cut, with the which, even the country men build their houses.  
The country of maine is warred by the rivers of Main, Sarte, Loir, and many other smaller rivers and brooks, which do fatten it, and make it fit for pasture than for tillage: So as the Manceaux may better furnish cattle than corn or wine; yet the country is not wholly unfurnished, for that they have it in some places; so as neither Anjou nor Touraine exceed it in bounty of wines, nor abundance of grain, but it is not general.  
The country of Anjou is uneven in many places, and hath little hills covered with vines for the most part: and as for the Champion country it is beautified with forests and woods of grown timber, and with valleys, where there are good meadows and pastures for the feeding of cattle. To conclude, all things necessary for man's life, yea and for delight, are to be found there: the white wines which grow in this country are much esteemed, as the best of this realm. It is also watered with many rivers, which some say to be forty, not comprehending the fountains, Pools (which are many) marshes, brooks and reseruers for fish; and to speak in one word, it is one of the pleasingst aboades in France, from thence comes a great part of the slate which we see in France. The houses in Angers, and elsewhere, are partly built, and almost all covered therewith, for that slate is better cheap there than tile. We may also see about Angers enclosures of gardens and Orchards made of great stones of Slate, sometimes higher than a man, set fast in the ground. There is also in Anjou great store of flax and hemp.  
As for Normandy, there is first about Rhoan many fair and fertile plains, as that of Rhommois, which is one of the best of France. But this country is rather given to traffic than to labour, and so in a manner is all Normandy, by reason of the commodity of the Sea. The soil about Caen hath this particularity, that although Normandy bears no wine, yet there grows some which is passable: but at Argences, which is three leagues off, the wines are very good, and there the inhabitants of Caen do commonly furnish themselves. And not to stay the Reader overmuch, if you take Normandy in general, you shall found that it wants not any thing that may serve man. There is good provision of corn and flesh. There is abundance of butter and cheese, & great store of fruit. If any one objects that there wants wine, which they must fetch from other places, I answer that they have cider and perrie whose taste is sometimes very pleasing; and this doth supply the want of wine: There is only (as in Picardy) some places near unto the sea all covered with sand, which yields small profit unto the owners.  
As for Britain, it is a good Province, it hath excellent ground for tilt, store of meadows; pasture and forests for many uses: It hath the sea for traffic, from whence the Britons draw salt made with the heat of the sun, the which they sand into their neighbour Provinces. They have iron and lead, and in some places mines of silver. They have also some wine growing, but not in such abundance nor so delicate, but the inhabitants of the country seek it elsewhere, and go into Anjou and to Bourdeaux to fetch Gascoine wines.  
If we come unto Poictou, we shall find that the country is good, fat and rich having no want of any thing that is held necessary; for there is store of corn, flesh, wine, wood, fish, wool, flax and fruit, neither do they want forests, whereas huntsmen may find game to exercise themselves.  
Xaintonge abounds in corn and wine, and is one of the best Provinces in France, so as it doth furnish Spain, England and other countries with there commodities. And the country of Angolesme is no less fertile in corn and wine, whose bounty is well known. There are also valleys so fit for gardens as there are not any more beautiful in Italy, and in these valleys there doth also grow abundance of hemp. There is also great store of wood which comes out of the forest of Braconne, the which is the greatest of that country, containing 14500. acres of land.  
The country of Perigord is hilly, stony and rough, and for the most part woody, whereof there is some oak, which the call jarry in their Language; but most commonly they are Chestnut trees, the which are very profitable to the poor people, as well for their own nourishment, as for to feed their swine. But one of the greatest commodities of this tree is, that being cut it grows again soon, and carries a fairer and better fruit. And if this were not, it were impossible to entertain so many forges of iron and steel as are in this Province. So as it seems this country is barren, and bears not any grain for the nourishment of man: But they have corn enough: yea of where to feed the inhabitants, and sometimes to spare for their neighbours. As for the wine it is good and bad according to the soil where it grows; for towards Montront, near Limosin it is small, there are places along the river of Bandiat where the wine is better; but drawing near unto the town of Perigueux, and beyond it towards Agenois, the wine is delicate, good and nourishing, not fuming, but wholesome for the stomach, and the air is so good and subtle as you shall seldom see any plague, or other contagious diseases there, there are waters also which cast the Sulphur and Allome, the which are very physical. Near unto a borough called Marsack, there is a fountain which doth ebb and flowelike unto the arm of the sea which doth pass before Bourdeaux, although it be two good days journeys from it. Near unto Lined, which is a little town upon the river of Dordonne, there is a fountain coming out of a square tower, about ten foot high, and half a fathom wide, which doth continually cast such abundance of water, as two mills do grind at all seasons. The country of Perigord abounds also in simples, which are very good for divers diseases. And four leagues from Perigueux, in a place called lafoy Roche there is a large and spacious cave in a rock, from whence they draw a great quantity of read earth, which hath the like colour and virtue to that which our apothecary's call Bolea Armoniac, so as they come from many places to fetch it. Limosin hath not much wheat, the soil being cold and lean, but it bears much rye, barley and panic. There is also abundance of chestnuts and turnips. There is also good store of wine about Lymoges, but it is green and unpleasing; yet there comes goods wine out of base Limosin; bread, flesh, fruit, wildefoule, venison and such like are good cheap, so as is good living in Lymoges. There are great store of vines in base Limosin, and the best soil is near unto Brine la Gaillarde, where there are many vines, meadows and lands for tillage.  
Auvergne which is divided into high and low, is of divers qualities according to the division. For high Auvergne doth chiefly abound in pasture, and hath much rye, but ●t is without wine; whereas base Auvergne in which Limagne is, abounds in corn, wine, wood, meadows, fountains, rivers, lakes where there are store of fish, as also in saffron and mines of silver: finally Limagne is one of the best countries of France, and which yields most unto the owners. Near unto the spring of the river Allier, they find a goodly mine of gold and azure, near unto Cleremot there passeth a little river called Tire●ane, upon the current whereof is to be seen a wonderful bridge of stone, made of the water of a fountain, which doth harden and become stone. This fountain is some three hundred paces from the river, and the bridge which the water doth make, running into the river, is above thirty and six fathom long, six thick, and eight broad. It is a remarkable thing, that this water by means of the transformation leaves the meadows through which it doth pass full of stones. There is also near unto Clermont, in the midst of a plain a little hill, from which Bitumen doth flow as water doth from a fountain; and this Bitumen is very black, fast and glutinous, which they of the country do use to ma●●● their sheep and for other occasions. There are also many hot ●●thess in Auvergne, as they of Vichy and Chaudes Aigues. As for Bourbonois and Forest they reap little whea● being for the most part a sandy country: yet there is in many places reasonable good wine, and great store of rye. Both countries are full of wood, and rough in many places; but Forest much more than Bourbonois.  
The country of Messin is fat & fertile, and it abounds in corn, wine, flesh, fish, hay, salt, wood and mineries, so as they have no great need of their neighbours.  
As for Bourgondie, the soil doth scarce yield sufficient for the inhabitants. That of Beaune is reasonably fertile, especially of good wine which is famous throughout all France. The air is very temperate, & there is great store of water. That of Autun is lean in many places. Those of Chaalons, Mascon, and Toumus are reasonably good, where there are delicate wines, and in abundance, especially at Turns.  
Lionnois is lean in some parts, and the land very light; but it is a goodly thing to see that part which they call franc Lionnois along the river of Saone, where there is much good ground, and store of vines and meadows, with a great number of fruit trees, which make this country very pleasing.  
Dauphine yields much corn in the mountains, especially rye; there is much good pasture, where they feed an infinite number of cattle, and so by consequence they have much butter and cheese. As for wine, all that mountanie country bears little: In regard of Champion country, it is in a manner all good and fertile along the river of Rhosne, and carries very good wine, whereof the most famous is that of Vienne, Tein, Valence and Montelimar: within the country, and near to Grenoble is Graisinodan, which abounds in corn, and bears excellent wine, especially near to Grenoble, where they make great account of that which they call of saint Martin: Three or four leagues from thence, there is very good ground and goodly meadows, near unto Moyrans'. Then you shall see Valoire, which doth not yield to any country of France in abundance of whea●e and beauty of the grain, neither in quantity of hay, for that you may see in a great plain the goodliest meadows of the world mixed with some pastures, all which are watered with a little river called Veuse, the which doth fatten the land wonderfully, and by the river of Oron, are the lest from the town of Beaurepaire bending towards Rosne. Manna doth also come in the country of Brianconnois.  
Province bears all that which is commonly found in the most fertile countries of France, and exceeds them in many things: for there are places which abound so in corn, as the Isle of France is not better furnished, and namely the Camarque of Arles and the plain of saint Chamar, Miramas, Senas and Malemort, from Orgon unto Aix and Marseille, and from Marseille unto Years, Frejus and Antibe, and unto the river of Var. All this continent of country bears store of oranges, lemons, olives, pomegrannats and figs, with great store of wine of the best of France. The lands or waste country is covered with rosema●e, myrtle, genneper, sage and palmetrees, safforn and rice abundance in many places, and the oil olive is exceeding good. Normandy is representd unto you by the country of Provence, and according unto the sea ports, as at Escalle, Seine, Colmars, Castelbaume and other places whereas wine grows not; but all the country is full of fruit trees like unto Normandy, as Pears, Apples, Chestnuts and other trees which grow in cold countries: For this part of Provence is cold by reason of the mountains which are always covered with snow, & yet the inhabitants are rich, by reason of their abundance of cattles, and cheeses which they make only of sheeps milk and goats. But this Province hath this inconvenience, that there is little wood and that very dear. And in the mountains of Esterell betwixt Frejus and Antebe there are great trees which bear Cork. Provence is also furnished with goodly salt pits which are at Berre, Years, Estang and Valench.  
Languedoc in my opinion is one of the Provinces of France most to be considered. For if you look unto the soil which is about Tolouse, you shall find it one of the best of France, abounding in corn and wine, and so fat a country, as it is almost impossible to get out of it after any great rain. You may travel almost seven or eight leagues in this country and not find a flint stone. The county of Lauragais hath all that can be necestarie for man, and there wants not things which nature hath given more for pleasure then necessity. Albigeois is a country in like manner furnished with all things, and if you bend towards Carcassonne you shall find one of the fattest soils of Europe: near to Bezieres you shall find the ground good, with many olive trees and vines which bear good wine. From Pesenas unto Mont Basin is a waist and rocky country, and we must confess that these three or four leagues of ground are not worth much, no more than those four going from Nismes to Vsez. But betwixt Nismes and Montpellier the soil is very good, and bears all sorts of fruit, store of corn and excellent wine, with many olive trees, and from Nismes unto Pont saint Esprite (excepting some few places) the country brings forth all that is necessary. The flat country of Vivarez which lies along the river of Rhosne, yields all that may serve for the life of man. There is come sufficient, excellent wine, especially at Cornaz, and at Toumon, all sorts of Pulses, store of hemp and fruit of all sorts, yea olives whereof there is abundance near saint Aldeol. The mountains of Vivarez bear nothing but rye, but most of them bear good wine; and the inhabitants there are so painful and industrious, as they do in a manner force the rocks to bear Vines. But these mountains have this in particular, that by reason the pastures are good, there they feed a great number of cattle.  
Velay and Gevaudan are two countries of one nature, they yield abundance of Rye and pulses, and have scarce any other thing, only great store of milk, wherewith they make cheese, which the inhabitants cell in other places, as they do their Rye to have wine. To conclude, Languedoc is one of the best provinces of France, for that it not only hath whatsoever is needful, but also wherewith to furnish many other Countries.  
The country of Rovergne is rough and hilly, and not very fertile: But Quercy hath abundance of corn and wine, which yields not to the best of Aquitaine, but to those of Bourdelois, there is store of cattle, they want no woods: they have pit-coales, and the rivers are full of fish. Above all, the river of Tarn hath much good fish, namely, sturgeons, which they of the country call Creacs, Lampreys, Shads, Pikes, Barbles and Daces.  
The mountains of Foix are full of good pastures, and infinite mines, which are discovered by their waters which taste of Sulphur. Doubtless, there is not any Country where there are better mines of iron than in Foix. There is also much rosin, turpentine, Pitch, incense, cork, marble, jaspis, slate, and other stones, and great store of venison, marvelous lakes, fearful precipices, fertile valleys, towards Pamies, and pastures upon the top of the highest mountains, with goodly and clear fountains. There are in the mountains of Lavedan the best horses of France, the which exceed the genets of Spain in force & nimbleness, but they have not so many as in Spain, for that the mountain is not very great. There is also to be seen many boors, stags, fallow Dear, wild goats & other wild beasts; & as sweet plants as the most curious searcher of simples can desire.  
As for the country of Comi●geses it is almost like to that of Foix in many places, and in some it exceeds it; for that there is much corn, wine, fruit, hay, oil of nuts, millet and other things necessary for the life of man.  
In regard of the country of Armaignac, all that towards Lectour, Auch and Vie is most fertile; but approaching near the lands of Bourdeaux, it bears nothing but chestnuts and other trees, and there is nothing but pastures and waste ground, yet in some places out of the high way it is very profitable to the owners.  
Bigorre is of a divers quality: for the valley from Bagneres unto Armaignac, along the river of Aulbe is one of the most fertile places of Guienne, and that which is by the river of Adour yields nothing unto it, having on the one side woods, and on the other good vines, and under it meadows and ploughed land fit for wheat: but that which is higher is somewhat dry and barren, so as there grows little else but millet.  
The country about Bourdeaux bears excellent wine; so as the wine of Grave is well known in all the Western and Northern parts of Europe. Besides graves wine there is that of Larmont lafoy Bastide and the neighbour places, with the white wines which come from Melion, which are not inferior unto the Greek. They also make great esteem of the bread of Potensac near to Bourdeaux. There is also great store of flesh and fish, and to speak in a word, Bourdeaux were one of the best abode in France, if the air of the sea, and the watery vapours did not make this town so subject to divers diseases, and often to the plague. The country of Buch abounds in pine trees which yield rosin, the which the poor people of that country, Armaignac, Beam and Bigorre use in steed of candles, so as their houses are all black with the smoke of this rosin. The lands are full of sand and heath and the country is so dry, as there is not any water to be found. Near unto this country is Challosse, which is commended for the good white wines that grow there. In the territory of Dax, there is a fountain of salt water, from which they draw much salt; but this salt (although it be very fair) is corrosive; for that by nature it doth participate of allome. It is also very fertile, and hath baths and mines both of Iron and other metals, and it doth also carry bitumen. The country about Bayonne is something lean, yet it yields good profit to the owners. There is great store of fruit trees to make cider, whereof they have abundance.  
Bearn hath in it the country of juranson, where there is wine equal in bounty to the best of France. Moreover, there are excellent baths, which they call Aigues-caudes, or Caude-aigues, and Cauderets, the best simples that can be found, and store of mines. This country abounds in millet for the most part, and yet they want neither corn nor wine in many places. Above all there are good pastures, and by that means much cattle, milk, butter and cheese. There is also much hemp and flax, and this province hath this particularity, that it is better furnished with goats than any country of France, for that they have means to feed them, without any hurt to their fruit trees, in the rocks and heath whereof the country abounds.   

Manners of the ancient inhabitants of France.  
CLement Alexandrinus and Strabo writ, that the Gauls were accustomed to keep their hair long, and Agathie saith, that the kings of France did never use to cut their hair, but divided it in two, on the top of the forehead. Diodorus saith, that they wash their heads often with lime, to make their hair white. Strabo writes also, that the noblemen did shave their cheeks, and did let that of the chin grow, and that they did avoid by all means to be fat and great, bellied, and if any young man were bigger than a certain measure, he was blamed. Simmacus commends them for their industry to learning, and Cato in his originals saith, that the Gauls did affect two things, war, and to speak properly. The Gauls have been often commended for their eloquence above other nations. Yet Diodorus doth blame them for their short and obscure speech. He saith moreover, that they were given to preach their own praises, and to contemn others, that they were full of threats, slanderous, and had a good opinion of themselves. So Vercingetorix vaunts in Caesar's Commentaries, that he would make an assembly of all France, which all the earth should not be able to resist.  
As for the religion of the ancient Gauls, and their customs touching sacred things, Cesar saith, that they were much given to religion, and the service of the Gods; that they did chiefly worship Mercury, whom they held to be the inventor of all arts, and the guide of travelers: and they though also that this God had great power over merchandise, and did rule in game, and govern in all things. After Mercury, they did worship Apollo, Mars, jupiter and Minerva, concurring almost in opinion of these Gods with other nations: They did think that Apollo did drive away diseases; that Minerva did give the first knowledge of all works and arts: that jupiter governed heaven, and Mars did preside in war, and had all power over arms. Pliny saith that Xenodorus made an image of Mercury, greater than any of his time in a town of Auvergne. Strabo writes that Diana of Ephesus had a Temple at Marseille. But a Marble stone that was found, shows that the Gauls did also adore another Diana surnamed of Ardenne. Lactantius, Lucian and Minutius report, that the Gauls did worship the gods Hese, Teutate and Zarane: but many learned men do hold that they are the same that Mars, Mercury and jupiter. Ausonius names Bellenus for god of the Gauls. Lucian saith also, that they worshipped Hercules furnamed Ogmien. The Gauls did worship their gods turning towards the right hand, as Atheneus writes. They did sacrifice men to their gods, and namely to Mars, as Cesar doth witness in these words: When they have resolved to fight, they do vow unto him, that which they shall take in war. They offer up the beasts which they take, and bring all the rest into one place. In many towns you may see heaps of such things, and it doth seldom happen that any one in contempt of religion doth conceal those things that are taken, or embesle any thing that hath been so laid up: and there was a grievous punishment ordained against them that should infringe this custom. They that were visited with any grievous sickness, or in danger in battle, or in any other place, offered up men, or else made a vow to offer some; and they use the Druids in such sacrifices, thinking that the gods cannot be pacified, but in giving the life of one man for another. They hold that the sacrifices of them that are taken in any theft or other crime, is more pleasing unto the gods; but when they want offenders they take innocents. Strabo also saith, that they were accustomed to strike him on the back with a sword that was appointed to be sacrificed, and that they did presage what should happen unto them by his starting. Tertullian writes that they spent whole nights about the Tombs of valiant men to receive Oracles from them. And the Gauls never made any sacrifice without calling some Druide. The Bards were the Gauls Poets, who did writ the praises of famous men, and did blame cowards. Ammianus Marcellinus makes mention of the Eubages, who made profession among the Gauls to search out the deepest secrets of nature. Laertius and Suidus make mention of the Seumothees, who differed nothing from the druids, no more than the Saronides of Dodorus Siculus: and Pliny doth many times term the druids Magitiens. For the Druids in Gaul were the same thing that the Magitiens in Persia, the Caldeens in Assiria, and the Gymnosophists in India. These druids had many young men to instruct, and they were wonderfully honoured among the Gauls, for they referred themselves unto them in all controversies, both public and private, and if any crime had been committed, they did judge and appoint what punishment they thought fit. If any public person or private did not obey their decrees, they did forbidden them to come to the sacrifice, which was a great punishment among them. And they that were interdicted after this manner, were held impious, and shunned of all the world, yea when they demanded justice, it was refused them.  
Among all the druids there was one above the rest who had sovereign authority over them. After his death they put him that best deserved into his place, and if there were many of one rank and equal in merit, the druids being assembed for the election, carried it by the plurality of voices. Sometimes they were so obstinate in the pursuit of this dignity, as from words they fell to blows. The Druids did assemble every year upon the frontier of the country of Chartres, whether all came that had any suits, and obeyed their sentence. And it seems that Caesar notes, that this place was no other but the town of Dreux, which doth yet in some sort retain the name of druids. They were not accustomed to go unto the war, and did not contribute to any thing that was imposed upon the country. So as these privileges did invite many to be their disciples, and many fathers to sand their sons to be instructed by them, and to make themselves capable to be of this rank. They that submitted themselves under their discipline, did learn a great number of verses, and held it not lawful to writ them. One only of their opinions was published (saith Melo) that the souls were immortal, and according to Diodorus, that they passed from one body to another, as Pythagoras held. Strabo saith also, that they disputed of manners, and were given to that part of philosophy, besides natural. There were also among the druids women which made the like profession. Some hold that these words a Guy the new year, come of that the Druids were accustomed to sand by their disciples, Guy to all men, in the beginning of the year, as wishing it happy unto them. These were the manners of the ancient Gauls touching sacred things.  
As for profane, they were accustomed to go armed to assemblies. Plutarch writes, that the women determined of peace and war, and that their resolutions were followed. Strabo writes that if any one interrupted him that spoke in an assembly, an officer came and threatened him with a sword in his hand, and enjoined him silence, if he did not obey, he did the like the second time, and so the third, and if he than found him obstinate, he cut of such a part of his cassack, as the rest was not fit for service. There custom was to ask news of passengers, and the people inquired of merchants from what country they came, forcing them to tell what they had seen, and the Gauls did often rely upon these reports, which where many times false, thereupon they held their assemblies, and did resolve many things which were afterwards very prejudicial unto them, for these resolutions had false bruits and light belief for there foundation. They were accustomed to punish him more grievously that had killed a stranger, than him that had taken away the life of any one of the country, for the latter was but banished, but the other was suddenly condemned to die. When any remarkable thing happened, they did presently publish it openly in the villages, and this past from hand to hand with great speed.  
As for matters which concern war, the rest of the Gauls did learn of the inhabitants of Marsille to enclose the places of their habitations with walls. Elianus saith that they were the promptest men in the world to expose themselves to all dangers. Vopiscus saith, that they were men of turbulent spirits and could not live in rest. Titus Livius holds them for men that could not command when they were in choler. Liberty was in such recommendation with them, as Florus reports that certain Gauls being taken in the war, sought to break their chains with their teeth, and in the end they presented their throats one unto an other to be strangled. Caesar holds that they were ready to undertake war, but not able to endure the discommodities; and Titus Livius saith, that the Gauls in the beginning of the fight we are more than men, and in the end less than women. But Leo is of another opinion, saying that the Gauls never faint, and that they hold the lest retreat for a shameful fight. And Sallust saith, that in his time the Gauls were so feared, as they had made all Italy to tremble, and whereas they did fight with other nations for glory, they were forced to take arms against these to defend their lives. And justine saith, that the kings of Asia, and all others did so esteem the courage of the Gauls, as they thought they could not well preserve that which they had gotten without them, nor recover what they had lost. Aristotle saith, that the Gauls did not fear the quaking of the earth. We read in Strabo, that Alexander having demanded of certain Gauls what they feared most, they answered, that they feared only lest the heavens should fall upon them. And Elcanus teacheth us, that they held all flight to be so ignomioious, as oftentimes they would not retire out of a house that was falling down or burning, so as they were sometimes consumed in the flames. But to come unto to their manner of proceeding in time of war, Caesar saith, that before they began any war, they caused an assembly to be published, whether all should come armed that had attained to the age of fourteen years, and he that came last was put to death before all the assembly with strange torments. Men of all ages went to the war, and no man was exempt by reason of his many years. They had a care never to want victuals, and on the other side to have their enemies distressed, burning to that end their bouroughes and towns.  
The Gauls arms were a weighty sword, according to Polihius, and long according to Titus Livius, but without a point, being not fit as Strabo saith, to thrust, but to strike, and these swords did hung by a chain on the left side, as Diodorus doth witness. They did also carry long targets; and in like manner two darts. They did also use lances, whose head was a cubit long. They had their heads armed with a Morion, upon which they had horns graven, or the representations of birds, or some four footed beast, which was the cause that Caesar's ninth Legion consisting of Gauls was called Alovette or Lark, for that on the head pieces of the soldiers of this Legion, there were Larks graven, or else the crests. Or else it was so named as some think, for that the soldiers used Morions made like the crest of a Lark. The Gauls did also use bows and slings. They did also garnish the hilts of their swords with coral, as they did their targets, and some put gold upon their corslets. Many Gauls did fight naked above the waist, as Titus Livius doth writ in his discourse of the battle of Cannes. They did esteem the horsemen much more than the foot, and Caesar himself had a feeling of the valour of the French horsemen, which he employed against Petreius and Afranius, and afterwards in Africa against the rest of the civil wars. They used great squadrons in their battles, yea, to the number of six thousand, as we may see in Vegetius. When they entered into fight, they made fearful cries, leapt, struck their targets, and made so great a noise with their arms, as it seemed all the places round about did echo again and cry out with them: They did also use Trumpets; And as for their valour in the midst of combats, the Author of the African war saith, that they were free men who were accustomed to fight, not with ambushes, and stratagems, but in open war. As for the ordering of their army, for that it did consist of men of divers towns, the soldiers were divided into towns and villages, and the troops of every town were appointed apart, to avoid all disorder, and to make the men of every troop more earnest to defend one another. Having gotten a victory of their enemies, they did sacrifice the prisoners to their Gods, as we read in Athaeneus; and Strabo writes, that they did hung the heads of their enemies about the necks of their horses, and then did fasten them to their Towne-gates to serve for a spectacle.  
There were two sorts of men in reputation amongst the Gauls, that is, the druids and the Knights, whereof the one assisted at the service of their Gods, and did deliver and presage their wills; and the other went to the war when occasion was offered, and led with them, according to their means, what men they could. They that were of the number of the people were held as bondmen, so as the Knights had power over them, as the Masters have over their slaves. They did not suffer their children to come in their presence before they were able to carry arms. The husbands did put in common with their wives as much goods as they had brought in marriage, and both together kept an account of the whole, and the first-fruits were reserved; If any of them did dye, the part of both did accrue unto the other, with the first-fruits of the precedent years; and the husbands had power of life and death over their wives, as well as over their children. They had also this custom, that when as any one was charged with debts, or overcharged with taxes, or oppressed by the power of great men, he made himself a bondman unto some gentleman, who for that time had as great power over him as over a slave. Their houses (according to the testimony of Caesar) were for the most part in forests, or near unto rivers, to avoid the heat of Summer. They did never shut the doors, if we shall believe Stobeus, and they used stones as they do in Germany, as we may see in the Misopogon of the Emperor julian. As for their habits, they did wear Cassocks of wool, made in lozanges of divers colours. They did wear breeches, and rings, but of the middle finger only, as Pliny saith. They did use earthen vessels very thick, and powdered with divers flowers that were represented. They did not eat sitting, but lying upon the ground upon dogs and Wolves skins and according unto Str●bo, upon beds: and they were served by young children. They made the fire near them, where was to be seen the pots and spits covered with meat, especially of hog's flesh both fresh and fal●. But most commonly they had nothing but milk for their meat. The richest drunk wine, which they sent for out of Italy, or from about Marseille, for that there were not any vines to be se●ne elsewhere: and sometimes they did put a little water into their wine. They did also invite strangers to supper, and inquired of them what they were, and what subject had drawn them from their houses. Atheneus reports, that anciently they were accustomed to set members of Mutton, or of some other beast, upon the Table, whereof the most valiant took the thigh: If any one thought that this title was better due unto him than to the other who had challenged it, they did fight unto the death. He saith moreover, there were some which took gold and silver in theatres, or some certain number of pipes of wine, swearing they should endure that for the which they received these presents; then distributing them unto their friends, they laid themselves flat upon their targets in the presence of them that should cut their throats. Amianus Marcellinus saith, that they were much given to swimming and hunting, where they did use poisoned arrows. Their funerals were stately among the Gauls; for Caesar saith, that they cast into the fire whatsoever the deceased had loved best in his life time. And Melo saith, that there were some men did cast themselves into fire, in the which the dead carcase did burn, as thinking to go and live with him. They did also cast, as Diodorus writes, letters into the fire, as if the dead man should read them. And Valerius the Great reports, that the Gauls did lend money in their life times, upon condition to be paid another day in hell.   

Manners of the French at this day.  
Sing we have undertaken to discourse of the manners of all France, it shall be fit to speak of the capital city, which is Paris, the ordinary abode of our kings, and the abridgement of all the realm, as man is of the world. The Parisiens are of a reasonable mild disposition, neither do they show themselves so harsh as the inhabitants of divers other towns of France. Yet they are easy to move, and a witty fellow is able to mutiny a thousand: This is spoken in regard of men of base quality. In former times the Parisiens were but simple, so as they termed them dolts throughout all France: but they are grown at this day so subtle as they are able to deceive the rest. And yet there are many who are not accustomed to see or do any thing, which deserve well this title. But they have no sooner looked into the world, but they are much more hard to cirumvent than many others. It is true in my opinion, that they distrust of all things which is still recommended unto them (by reason of the infinite number of cheaters which are seen in Paris) is the greatest policy they have. The women of all sorts desire to be brave, and to be better attiréd than their condition will bear, whatsoever it cost: And their husbands, who seek for the most part to please them (for that the women do in a manner govern all) employ all their means to satisfy their desires. But the women are to be commended for one thing, that the fairest, most delicate, and richest, do not disdain to visit Hospitals, to handle ulcered and diseased men, and to feed and dress them. They are very desirous to hear what news pass (as Caesar speaks of their ancestors. ) They love all kinds of sports, and to live in delights, being invited thereunto by the ordinary object of them that frequent the Court, who for the most part have no other exercise, but to play, sport, and make good cheer. If there be any marriage among handiecrafts men, they spend much more than men of the best quality of the city, where at this day all is passed over without bruit. But me must observe, that in these marriages of tradesmen, they do often give presents which do exceed the charges, and they observe this custom among men of base condition, that when they are invited every one pays his shot, as they do in many places of Touraine. Moreover, the Parisiens, who were wont to wonder at every new thing that came, are not now amazed at any thing, they are so accustomed to see strange fights. These people are always jealous of strangers that come, and therefore they are still watchful, lest their guests should go away in their debts. It is true their are many examples of such as have been deceived in using too much courtesy, not knowing the persons with whom they had to deal; But if they have found you a man of worth, and that you have lodged long in their houses, you shall receive more courtesy than from any. They have this in particular, that they go not out of their houses in the night, notwithstanding any noise that is made in the street; or that any cry that he is robbed or murdered. So as if any man falls into the hands of such sharkers, next unto God, he must trust to his hands or legs. And that which keeps them in their houses after this manner, is, that there are often false alarms which some drunkards give them, or else they be the cries of some rogues which take delight to put the world in action, and then to laugh at them, or else they be some wicked persons who make this noise of purpose, to draw men out of their lodgings, and then to murder them they hate. To conclude, the people of Paris are of a reasonable mild humour, and very tractable, and in my opinion they pass all the rest of France in civility. All that are about Paris differ little; But yet I must say, that the Peasants are as arrogant as in any other place whatsoever, by reason of the nearness of the parliament: So as you cannot speak a word that shall dislike them, but they will presently answer, and urge you to strike them; which done, they will gather together & seek to trouble you. They have also this custom about Paris, that they will exact and draw all they can possibly from travelers. So as from what part soever you come near unto Paris you shall found all things exceeding dear.  
The Chartrins are loving, courteous, affable and kind to all men, and commonly they live quietly together, they love strangers that have any good parts in them, they are given to devotion, and do much affect the religion of their ancestors, they are charitable, and given to traffic.  
They of Beausse are almost of the same disposition, that the Chartrains, of a reasonable good humour, given to labour and traffic of corn. In many places they are subtle, by reason of the number of passengers that come from all parts. The inhabitants of Chasteaudun have good wits sharp and subtle, they understand by a word what a man would say, and they use not many words. But their speech is so quick, as they do not sometimes hear one an other, neither do they suffer them that speak to end their discourse, which is natural vice of the country.  
The citizens of Blois hold of the bounty of the soil and sweetness of the air: they are courteous, mild, affable, wary, very subtle, and witty, great husbands and in continual action. They are given to the service of God, love strangers and live lovingly together. Finally all the inhabitants of this country, yield nothing in neatness to the rest of France.  
The Vendosmois are of a mild disposition, courteous, and given to all things that are most neat: yea borne to be excellent in some thing, as Peter Ronsard a gentleman of this country was, whose works are well known to all Europe, and have made him not only the honour of this country, but also the ornament of France.  
They of Orleans and there abouts are neat and civil, and have a very pleasing speech, but they are of a sour and waspish disposition, which hath made them to be called Guespins'. They are full of courage, and support one an other much, and are given to to traffic which they use in many places.  
They about Sens have given good testimony in former times how courageous they were, being the first that resolved to pass with Brennus into Italy. The people are reasonable good, and less crafty than in many other places, and they are in a manner all well affected to religion. The Auxerrois are like unto them, being people of a reasonable good temper, but courageous, mutinous, and otherwise given to traffic with their commodities.  
As for them of Champagne and Brie, although their neighbours blame them for their obstinacy, and call them headstrong, yetthis imperfection is hidden with a number of virtues which makes them commendable, for that reason makes them to subdue choler, from whence this vice proceeds wherewith they are taxed. They are affable, ready to do pleasure, fearing God, and are not subject easily to embrace new opinions.  
The Picardes are of as good an humour as any people of France, wonderfully free, courteous, ready to do pleasure, valiant, and exceeding courageous: but they are wonderfully quick, whereupon they are called hot brains: they love to make good cheer, yea to exceed; and they do not esteem any, but such as drink hard with them, so as he that will obtain any thing must drink carouse. They love well together, so as he that toucheth any one inhabitant of a town, shall presently see all the rest upon him. To conclude, it is a nation which doth not dissemble, upon whose word a man may rely.  
They of Touraine are very courteous, and affect traffic, but above all things they are faithful to their kings, as the retreat of king Charles the seventh to Tours, and that of king Henry the third, doth witness. The country is so good, as it invites them to take delight in play and in all sorts of sports, so as they are called the Laughers of Tours.  
The Manceaux are given to labour, industrious, of a subtle wit, hard to deceive, good husbands, and something more politic than their neighbours: finally they are fit for any thing they undertake, and this country doth breed up as brave and valiant gentlemen as any be in this realm.  
The Angevins and Poictevins have good wits, but the Poictevins are more cunning. They jest with a good grace, and encounter very fitly. The Peasants are very subtle, and if I may so say, wicked, and the gentlemen are gallant and courageous, as they be in Anjou.  
The Normans are cunning and subtle; they are not subject to the laws and customs of any strangers, but live according to their ancient policy, which they defend obstinately. They are very cunning in suits, and know all the tricks quirks and surprises that pettifogging can invent: so as strangers dare not converse with these people. Finally, the men have very good wits (as some personages of this age do make known, and the common practice and knowledge of some do witness.) They are very devout, and full of courage, whereof the conquest of William Duke of Normandy, who made himself king of England, and of the sons of Valonges, and of Hauteville Guischard, who made themselves lords of Poville, Calabria, Naples, and Sicily, give us assured proofs.  
As for the Britons they are more or less civil, according to the countries they inhabit: For that they that are nearest unto the Sea are not by nature so courteous as the rest: but all the Britons in general are sociable enough, and of a good conversation, yet cunning and subtle, although they seem gross. They love their profit, and are given to wine more than were fit; and for this cause they frequent taverns, where most of their affairs are treated: and to conclude, they are very devout and good Catholics. They have this particularity, that they hate the Normans mortally, as the Normans do them.  
In regard of the Angoumoisins, they that live in Angoulesme have good wits: they seek to maintain themselves in reputation, they vaunt willingly, take small delight in traffic, live for the most part of their revenues, and play the gentlemen: they love learning, and are sumptuous and courteous, and take delight (like to most of the French) in new things. As for them of the Champion country, they are gross and rude, given to labour, and wilful, yet fit to arms.  
The Perigordins are nimble, active, and sober, they content themselves with little, and use great exercises; and although they be taxed to be rude and gross, yet they that shall converse with them, shall found them discreet and fit for all honest exercises, be it either of learning or arms. The gentlemen's houses of Perigord are true Schools of virtue and courtesy, and the Bourgesses of towns imitate the fashions of the Gentry, which is very great. As for the women they are chaste, good huswives, have no other care but of their families, and are no gadders, although their husbands be not severe unto them.  
The Lymosins are sober, and drink little wine, but in good towns. They are good husbands. Kinsmen live always in concord, so as you shall see houses in villages whereas an old man shall see his children unto the third generation, yea, there are families whereas you may see above a hundred of the same blood, which live in common, as in a College. They are for the most part laborious and subtle; but they have this fault, that they will ground a process upon nothing; and which is worse, they are taxed to make a trade of bearing false witness. They hold the inhabitants of Tulle to be chiefly of this disposition. But as for them of Vserche they do not much care for Merchandise, and are more willingly given to arms. As for the gentlemen, they are in a manner always given to quarrel one with another; but yet they are stately and generous: and as for the inhabitants of towns they do imitate them in this later part.  
The Awergnaes' are wonderful subtle and cunning, very laborious, greedy after gain, and given much to traffic: They are dissemblers for the most part, quarrelers, full of violence, and dangerous men to deal with. The Nobility is very courteous and valiant, but the people love suits, and contest maliciously for a small matter.  
The inhabitants of Bourbonois which joins to Auvergne, are almost of the same disposition, but they that are farther off are more mild and courteous, they have subtle wits, they are good husbands, and given to their profit, yet affable to strangers.  
They of the country of Messin savour something of the rudeness of the Germans, and participate of their freedom. They are valiant, strong, laborious, religious and simple, but obstinate to maintain their liberty all they can. They are not given to love learning.  
As for the Bourgondians, they of Dijon are resolute in their opinions, they love and frequent together, they are jealous of their honour, covetous of greatness and offices, and are familiar. The women go bravely, and yet they are chaste and loyal to their husbands. The common people are given to labour, especially in their vines. They are devout, and good Christians, enemies to revolt and to new opinions, valiant and hardy, & such as may not be dealt withal but after a good sort. As for them of Beaune, the chief inhabitants are men of justice, and the rest apply themselves to plant vines, or to make cloth, both of wool, flax and hemp, whereof the country abounds. They of Semur are peaceable, courteous and charitable, they love one another, and live in good accord, and take delight in the acquaintance and knowledge offtrangers. They of Chalon are witty, and given to speak well, they hold of the above named, in a manner in all the rest. We may say the like of all the other countries of Bourgondie, who are for the most part full of freedom, and of a good disposition. But in some places they abuse wine as well as in Germany. The people of Lyonnois are mild and gracious, after a simple manner: but in effect, they are not so gross as they make show. For the Peasant is cunning, and as for them of a better condition, they do their business wittily. They be people of great traffic, who make money of every thing. And as for them that devil in Lions, there are more strangers among them than in any place in France, and in a manner hold the Italian humour, and both men and women love to go very sumptuously.  
The people of Forrest are subtle, cunning and witty, they can wisely provide for their affairs, they love gain, and to this end they traffic throughout all the world. But they are charitable to them of their country, when as they are reduced to any necessitiein a foreign land. He hath need to be careful of himself, that hath any business to treat with a Forretian.  
The Dauphinois, to speak generally, are much affected to their Prince, but very jealous of their liberties, constant in the pursuit of their affairs, and careful to keep their own. The inhabitants of towns are courteous, affable and witty, capable of sciences, and above all of the Mathematics, curious searchers into the secrets of nature, free of speech, and sociable, but somewhat dissembling & proud, having a good opinion of themselves and vanters. But if we will look into this people more particularly, we must divide it into them of the mountains, and Champion country. They of the mountains are rude and gross, not bred to learning, but fit for arms, and above all, given to traffic and labour. These Mountagnars have a custom, that when as winter draws near, they sand abroad all them that are able to travel, so as not any remains at home but old people, and children who cannot go and get their living. They call all them Bics, or Bisovards, which go thus abroad and return at Easter: and sometime these Bics (who are painful, and for the most part cunning) become rich merchants by their sparing. As for the gentlemen of the Mountains, they did in former time savour of the rudeness of their abode: But now that they converse at Grenoble, they yield nothing in civility to them of the Champion country, who are as complete in every thing as any be in France. They of the mountains are also very sparing, and seek to gather by many means, especially by their cattle which they breed, whereas they of the flat country (who are civil and generous) spend their revenues freely, and converse more together than any in France. And to conclude, all the Nobility support one another what they can, so as although in the heat of war, a gentleman be lodged in a weak house in the midst of a wood, yet shall he hardly be annoyed, if he have lived lovingly before with his neighbours, they are so valiant and courageous. In regard of the people of the flat country, they are more civil than them of the Mountains: but they do not much love labour, especially in fertile places, for they take great delight in idleness. They are courteous, and respect the gentlemen much, who have as great power there as in any province of France. They may draw good soldiers out of the Mountains, as also out of the Champion country, where the men seem to be as little bred to learning as in the Mountains. The men are not so greedy of gain as in other places, and content themselves, so as they may pass their days without want, not but that there are some exceeding coverous as well as in other places, but I say it is not commonly practised. At Grenoble and in other good towns, as at Vienne, Valence and Romans, the women desire to be brave, and of late days this vanity hath crept into the whole province. I will speak one word in the commendation of the gentlewomen of Dauphine, that there are few seen in France to equal them in wit and spirit, and that with their liberty and familiarity they have their honour in recommendation above all the women of the world, so as it is almost a wonder to hear speak of a woman that makes love to the prejudice of her honour.  
The Provensals are of a strange disposition, and are very sober when as they live of their own charge, they are valiant enough, but inconstant, covetous, dissembling and faithless. They are all great talkers, and take delight to vaunt and tell tales of themselves. They are arrogant and proud in their own country, and carry no respect unto their Lords, or to them that are in authority over them, whom they have many times wretchedly slain. The women are very sumptuous after the Italian manner. The Peasants are as witty as in any country of France, and deliver their minds so well, as one would say that some sufficient man bred up in affairs had instructed them. They that live towards the Sea are much given to traffic, and manage their business wittily. They are great Ballet makers, with the which they do often pass their heat, when any thing troubles them. Finally, they are much affected to religion, and are good Catholics.  
If we shall stay to survey Languedoc, we shall first see the Tolousains bred to learning, and to have good spirits, but subject to be moved upon the lest bruit: uncourteteous to strangers, but they are devout, good Catholics, and very civil: yet they agreed not well among themselves. They about Carcasonne, Beziers, Montpelier and Nismes, are sudden, great talkers, and vaunters of themselves, not secret nor considerate, full of freedom, activeness and courage. In all the country which is from Tolouse to S. Esprit, and there also the women are exceeding brave, and take delight in painting, although it be not somuch with an intent to do ill, as to be held fair; for that the whole country is naturally inclined to this vanity. And the men desire to go well attired beyond their conditions and revenues. The women do most commonly labour all the week in works of silk, and sare hard, that they may get something by their gain to make them neat and handsome on Sundays and holly days, especially from Beziers to Pont Saint Esprit: But this is not much practised at Carcassonne or Narbonne.  
If we come unto Vivarez, we shall find, in the Champion country which is very narrow, a people which is nothing given to delights or idleness, but loves labour, and makes the best of that little land he holds. The husbandman is chiefly given to manure his vines, which do commonly yield him great profit. They keep good cheer and are ill attired contrary to all the rest of Languedoc. Their wives and children labour also in their vines and ploughed lands. There are many good wits found in this country, which they make known in their discourse and actions, so as they need not to envy any others in France. The gentlemen are so civil, and receive strangers so courteously (especially they that are worthy of commendation for any good parts) as a man would say virtue had made choice of this country for her abode. As for their valour it is so well known to all men, as it were to doubt of truth itself to dispute of it, the nobility have given such proofs of their courage. But it is not the nobility alone that shows this valour, for that among the people you shall find more soldiers for the quantity of ground, then in any country of the world, and so hardy, as the greatest dangers make them more resolute and courageous. Every part swarms with men bred for the war, and in a short space you shall find so many trained soldiers, and men which have commanded in troops, as you would think this country the very place where to raise armies, at the lest for footmen. The greatest inconvenience I find, is, that commonly the mountainie country is full of quarrels and murders, and that oftentimes they assemble in troops, as if they would give a battle, and these assemblies are sometimes disperse by them that have authority in the country, and many times they are broken with effusion of blood. And as for single combats, before the king's Edict they were so ordinary, as they talked of nothing else. To speak something also of the mountains, the nobility is very courteous, and delights to make them good cheer that come; but they are not altogether so neat as others of the flat country, except such as have frequented the court, and learned the fashiones. But as for the Peasant he is rude in his actions; but not gross witted, for that he doth manage his affairs discreetly, and speaks of those things he knows with judgement. He is very laborious, so as he will toil three days in a rock that he may plant one stock of a vine, and this labour is the cause of his wealth.  
They of Velay and Gevaudan are to be put in the same rank with the inhabitants of the mountains of Vivarois: For the nobility and the people live there after the same manner, except that in Velay they are fuller of quarrels, and the people are not of so good a nature as in Vivarez. And there are also troops of Bandoliers or thieves, as in the mountains of Foix, and many other places, whereas all law comforts in force. Finally they are given to traffic with their commodities, and other things.  
The inhabitants of the country of Foix are given to labour, they endure all discommodities, be it to march in a bad country, whereunto they are accustomed, or to remain long without eating, They are also full of courage. But the country hath this inconvenience, that many not able to live in a worse country, demand a courtesy of passengers, with a Petronel in their hands like thieves. Yet for the most part they have this good humour, that if you content them willingly they do you no harm, and sometime the first you meet and give contentment unto, will set you out of danger, and free you from all bad passages. Sometimes also these Bandoliers will strip you of all, passing out of Spain into France, or from France, to Spain.  
The country of Coming abounds with valiant men; but they are little given to learning, notwithstanding that they have as good wits, and are as apt to all things as any nation of the Earth. They do easily endure all discommodities; they are sober discreet in words, and hate all superfluity of apparel and delights, or any thing that may make a man effeminate. As for the women they are chaste, great huswives, obedient to their husbands, and love not to be idle.  
In Armaignac the people are gross, simple, and good husbands; making profit of every thing, they are given to traffic, especially of cattle, and they want no courage.  
As for Bigorre, the people are proud, borne to arms, sudden in their enterprises, and yet great dissemblers, uncourteous, untractable and unpleasing, unless it be in towns. Moreover they endure not an injury easily, and commit murders for a small occasion yet they are good and loyal, and naturally simple. The nobility is brave, sociable, courtous, good and renowned for their valour.  
The Gascoignes are of an active spirit, prompt & sudden all fiery and full of courage, and fit for any thing they shall undertake: But they are proud and will always have the better, so as most commonly they make themselves odious and insupportable. Yet when they see themselves among other nations where they are too weak, they hide their natures and become tractable. But this is no hindrance but a man may discover their insolency, which they cannot dissemble. They take delight to preach their own praises, and to hear them. By their own saying no man is poor among them, and when they are in any unknown place, the most wretched & needy plays the prince. They are for the most part covetous, and greedy to get by what means soever, they are wary and know well how to do their business. Moreover they are envious of an other man's good, more than any nation whatsoever, and are so full of disdain, when they have no need of men, as they distaste many of their friends by their looks. But when they have need to use any, you never saw men more humble. As for the nobility they are as brave, courteous, gallant and courageous as any can be seen. They do so visit one an other, as the houses of gentlemen may justly be termed Inns, & when as they entertain any one, they make him the best cheer they can. But they are by nature sudden and choleric, whereby quarrels do daily grow.  
As for Bearn, the people are active, affable and courteous, but cunning and subtle, well spoken in their language, valiant, and a friend to liberty. They are also proud, think wondered well of themselves, and contemn others, and it is that which is found odious in their actions, which are otherwise commendable. The Bernois are reasonably apt to learning, and take delight to learn, & to hear strangers. The gentlemen are brave and courageous, and are not much pleased with gay apparel, thinking that the greatest or nament of a man consists in virtue, wherewith they are well suited.  
We have discoursed particularly of the people of France one after an other; now it is fit to consider what may be spoken in general.  
The people of France are good, and free, and yet the wars have deprived them of a part of this first integrity, which made them to be esteemed through out the world. But at the lest they have this particularity, that they will not so easily be drawn into a bad action as their neighbours, for that the greatest part abhor treachery and villainy. They are advised enough, yet most commonly sudden, and do not pierce so far into a business, as the Italian and Spaniard, before they undertake it. It is a nation borne to war, and they do more esteem them that make profession of arms, than those that follow learning, for that, the only need they have of learned men makes them to honour them. They do much fear the nobility, who have great power where they live, so as they carry themselves always worthy of that title. They love their kings more than any other nation of the Earth, and we may say that they are rather full of a free affection unto them, then of a servile fear of their power. They are fit for any thing they shall undertake, they are of so active a spirit. You shall see few of them subject to madness, but many light headed, and few grave; the which proceeds from their free humour, and natural plainness, more than for any want of government or judgement. This people is given to all sorts of trades and liberal arts, they are venturous and full of courage, they go throughout the world either for traffic or for war, they love novelties, are curious, and sometimes keep no secrets, they are spenders and desirous to live in show. Sometimes they have too much tongue, and many times the blow is given before a word be spoken. Every man affects honour, and they were grown to that pass before the edict against combats, as the meanest man being wronged in word, by any other of the same quality, would not fail to challenge him, to get a satisfaction of the wrong by arms, imitating therein gentlemen and soldiers. Since the peace, they are much given to study in France, for that they see how lawyers are honoured, and grow rich during this calm: So as many men of base condition sand their children to study, seeking to make them the pillars of their house, and chief supporters of the Palace: but there is so many at this day, that one starves another, and he that is most fortunate carries it from his companion sooner than the learned; for that at this day it is not needful in those courts where justice is held, to be very learned, but only to be well instructed in the formalities of justice, to understand the course of the Palace, to have knowledge of the ordonances, and (to say in a word) to have the practice in their head, and not to care for speculation: So as it is almost a folly for fathers to have their children study long, who should profit more in one year living with an attorney, having but a few scraps of latin, than he should in ten years reading of good books. Yet the courts of Parliament and other seats of justice are not without men full of all learning, as we may see by their plead and other works.  
As for the Nobility, I think the earth doth not be are any more valiant nor more gracious; and courtesy is so bred with the gentlemen, as it were a prodigy to see any one discourteous and uncivil. And for proof, strangers come to learn all kind of civility in France, and they do not think themselves well fashioned, if they have not made a voyage. The Nobility take great delight in hunting, and are given to play at weapons, to ride great horses, and to all kinds of good exercises; as also to entertain Ladies, who are as complete as in any country of the world. And this liberty which they have in France to see and to be seen, in stead of thrusting them into a careless contempt of their honour, draws them rather to the preservation thereof, and to contemn that desire which is incident to those that are restrained, in whom constraint and servitude doth breed a more violent passion to infringe this defence. They are so courageous, as I hold for certain that an army consisting wholly of French gentlemen would be invincible, and able to strike terror into all the world, and to be victorious in all enterprises. They maintain their authority over the people; so as one gentleman alone living in a bourough or village, would make all the rest to bow. It is ordinary for gentlemen to visit one an other, and one of them is no sooner affronted by a man of an other condition, but they all gather together to make him repent it that dare contest with one of their quality; and if two gentlemen be in quarrel, all their neighbours seek to reconcile them, if they be advertised in time. They love learning, not to make a gain of it, as men of an other condition, but to entertain their spirits, and for that they know that learning is none of the lest ornaments of a man well bred: Yet they do not often make show of it, neither will they make profession of what they know but among their friends. But above all they affect to speak well, and do what possible they can to purchase this perfection, whereby they think to win glory; also they think it a fit means to get the favour of ladies. They that remain commonly in courtare held more nea● than they that live continually in the country. But I dare say there are some so well bred, that never haunted the court, as they are nothing inferior to them that frequent it daily: and this happens, for that there is much good company in every country, where, they that make their profit of what they see may fashion themselves; for that in these companies, there are always some that have seen the court, and that know after what manner they should live, and these be for the most part they by whose actions they govern themselves. At this day the best part of the nobility, at the lest they that are most gallant, and have best means in every Province, come to the king, there to spend a part of the year, and there are which never abandon his train, so as the Court is always great. The ordinary exercises of courtiers are riding, dancing, or fencing; and that wherein the younger sort busy themselves, are running at the ring, or at the quintin, or fight at barriers at shrovetide. Play is none of their lest diversions, and that which spends a great part of their time, is love and the sight of Ladies. But they employ the best part in following the king wheresoever he goes; be it a hunting or elsewhere, so as he shall always be well accompanied, although he part suddenly. The French king is always more familiar, and suffers himself to be seen more freely than any prince in the world. For the French are of this nature, that they are not content when as they may not see their prince, and if any one receive the lest good countenance, he esteems it more than all the good another man can give him. 
This is written of Henry 4.  If France in former times hath had gracious and affable kings, she may now vaunt to have one who without blemish to his rank, lends his ear more to all the world, than any Monarch that ever was seen, and doth so govern his actions, that in aff●ring the most fearful and timorous by his mildness, he makes an impression of fear and respect by the lustre of his majesty, which doth commonly shine in his face. There is not any man that doth equal him in all the rest, and it is most certain that he doth eclipse the glory of all the kings that ever were; and doth strike admiration into them that live; and shall be the most perfect Model that kings of future ages can have, to make themselves complete in all things, and yet shall they never be able to attain to the perfection of this invincible prince.  
Thus far I have followed mine author touching the disposition of the French, who hath not forgotten any parts worthy of commendation in his country men, and hath but glanced at their imperfections. Some others who by their curious search and observations largely have discovered more than he is willing to confess, and have laid open in their writings published to the world, their defects, or rather peccant humours, taxing them to be talkative, vain, and inconstant, the which they show in their speech, conversation, apparel, credulity and lightness of belief, impatience, and rashness in their most important consultations; and that they have such stirring spirits, as they cannot live long quiet, but for want of foreign employment, they will be at war among themselves: Wherefore they are held to be an inconstant and wavering kind of people, as they have showed in most of their actions. Thus much I have set down by the way, touching the opinion of some, concerning the manners of the French nation, unto whom I will refer the courteous reader.   

Riches of France.  
I Should never end, if I should examine the riches of France in particular, for that there is scarce any little corner of the country, where there is not store. Wherefore I will omit the lesser particularties, to speak only of those countries, whereas this wealth is most considerable, and whereby France may be enriched. I will begin then by Paris, and will tell you that this city draws unto it the best part of the silver of France, and that if you will account the wealth of the noble men which do commonly live there, of the officers of parliament who are very rich, of advocates and proctors, who for the most part have their houses full with the substance of a million of persons; of them of the chamber of accounts, whereof the masters are richer than many noble men of France, which have good revenues, in like manner, of Precedents, Counsellors, Advocates, Treasurers, Receivers, and Indentants of the Finances, yea of Citizens and Merchants of Paris, you shall find there are few or not any cities in the world that can equal it in riches. For not only all the silver of France comes thither upon divers subjects, but also a great part of that of Italy, Spain, England, Germany, & almost all Europe. There is abundance of plate, and in my opinion, more than in all the rest of France, much silver coined, and great store of merchandise: so as Paris, alone all comprised, would be able to entertain a good army. And as for the country about Paris, it must needs be very rich, by reason of the silver which they draw forth from the commodities which the inhabitants come and cell there. The scarlet which they make at Paris, passeth throughout all Europe, yea in to Asia, and it is many times sent into China, and this stuff is admired of all men, and yields great revenues to them that make it. This is in a manner all which is carried from Paris into foreign Provinces, unless it be the trash and trifles of the Palace, which are not dear upon the place, but their value is augmented, and they are much esteemed the farther they are from the place where they were made.  
I should never end if I should number the jewels which are in the Abbey of Saint Dennis, the which are inestimable and without number. The Chartrains make great gain of their traffic of corn, wheat and rye, which they cell into all parts, like unto them of Beausse and Soloigne. But I will not make any account of this profit seeing it comes not from foreign countries. The wine of Orleans draws not only the Merchants of France, but also them of England to come and buy it: and that which favours the Orleanois for this traffic, as it doth many other provinces, is the river of Loire, whereby they transport many things easily both within and without the Realm. Besides this, Orleans should be rich by reason of the great number of Germans and Flemings which come to make their residence there, as well to study as to learn the French tongue, for that they of Orleans have the reputation to speak as well as any in France.  
The territory of Beawais hath a little town called Bule, near unto which grows the finest flax that can be seen; and for this cause the Flemings, and Hennuyers come thither to traffic & to buy this flax, wherewith they make their finest cloth, which they afterwards carry to be sold throughout the world, both by sea and land. In this soil there is also found earth fit to make vessel, as good as that which comes from Venice, and it is also carried out of the Realm. But that which doth most important for the riches of this country, is their great traffic of sarges, and cloth-rash, which they not only transport throughout France, but also into Germany, Spain, and Italy, yea into Greece, and Turkey.  
The country of Nivernois hath iron, which they carry into foreign provinces, in like manner a thousand toys of glass which are made in the town of Nevers.  
Besides the wine which Anjou sends into England and other places, there is also cloth as in Poictou, from which they draw great sums of money, especially from Spanish merchants, who have great trade for it.  
There is no town in France that is more frequented by merchants than Roven, nor where the inhabitants have more experience of traffic, or make greater voyages, be it to the West in passing the Equator, or going to the East Indies; wherefore it gets many commodities from strangers, and it is one of the richest towns in France. To conclude, all Normandy is much given to traffic, and as for those things which they sand forth, it is some cloth, Normandy Canvas, and Cider.  
As for Bretagne, there is the Parchemin of the country of Lambolois, which passeth every where; in like manner iron, lead, and some little silver which they draw out of their mines, besides the great traffic which is in the country, by reason of the sea ports which abound there. Rochel is also very rich, by reason of the nearness of the sea, and the traffic of the English and Dutch that come thither.  
In Xaintonge they make much money of their corn, which the Spaniards come and fetch every year, or else merchants go and cell it there. In Angolesine beside their corn they have abundance of hemp, which they gather together to cell unto strangers.  
Perigort hath Hogs whereof they make great traffic, yea into Spain: and there are also mines of iron and steel, and many men put it in work and draw money from all parts. Limosin hath great store of cloth which they carry out of the Realm: and above all, the town of Lymoges, although it be far from the sea or any river, is one of the greatest traffic in France; for there are such excellent workmen, as they make the ●arest works that be in France, and these are carried into foreign countries, and so are the enamelled works which are made there, the which are fair and much sought after. They of Tulle make great profit of the oil of walnuts, whereof they have abundance.  
As for Auvergne, it sends forth great store of Cheese, hairy cloth, Chamlets, and Tapestries, whereof they make great sums of money, as also of Saffron, and their Moils which go into Italy and Spain. Bourgondie sends corn into Spain and Italy, and draws from thence much silver.  
Lion is a town of as great traffic as most be in France; so as all Italy and part of Spain (which is from the straight of Gibraltar towards the mediterranean Sea) have commerce there. And by the king's edict, silks and such like merchandise must pass there, and be viewed at the Doane or custom house: yet the traffic and gain is not so great as it hath been, for that the ships pass rather by the Ocean sea. There are Bankers also who have correspondency not only in Europe, but also in Asia and Africa.  
Forest sends her works of Iron and steel into all parts, especially the town of Saint Stephens, where there are as many excellent workmen, as any be in France. There are many very rich merchants of this country, who are well accommodated without the realm.  
Dauphine makes much money of the corn they sand into Spain. They of the mountains enrich themselves by the Moils, horses and other cattle which they cell in Piedmont and Italy. They have also their Chamois which bring them money.  
Languedoc hath woad which they sand into foreign countries, and it grows principally in the county of Lauraguaez, and the plain of Montpelier. This traffic alone is able to enrich this province, it is in such request in all parts of Europe, and elsewhere for dying, so great abundance there is in this country. The Albigeois make great profit of their saffron: A good part of Languedoc is enriched by their Oil of Olives. They that are about Florensac and Pomerols, and they of Lauraguez also make great sums of the corn which they sand into Spain. They of Montpelier enrich themselves with their drugs, compositions, and waters which they make and sand out of France, as being more excellent than any other. They about Montaignac make much money of their wools. They of Frontignan and Cantaperdris grow rich with their muscat wines, and their dried grapes which they sand into all Europe. Vivarez makes money of their fir boards and ioists which they cell without the realm. Velay hath many works of wool, as caps, stockings, socks and such like, and also brooches which are made at Puy. Pecais hath salt which they sand into Suisserland, and to other places out of the realm, and make a wonderful profit.  
As for Provence it sends corn out of the realm which grows in great abundance in Camarque, and in the plains of S. Chamar and Miramas, Senas and Malemort, unto Ourgon & Ardage, & elsewhere. They have also lemons, oranges, dried grapes, dried figs, pomegranates, oil and cork, with the which they draw great profit from strangers. And this province is full of silver, by reason of the ordinary traffic of the inhabitants and their sea ports, whither many foreign merchants come.  
Foix makes great profit of Iron, and of cattle, as those countries do which are near to the Pirenee mountains: They make no less benefit of their rosin, turpentine, pitch, incense and cork. Armagnac makes no less profit of honey and wax. As for them of the parliament of Bourdeaux, they of Albret vent out of the realm much cork, pitch and rosin. All Gascoigne, especially Bourdelois, make great profit of their wines which are sold into the low countries and England: And Baionne doth the like of Ciders. To conclude, Gascoigne is rich by reason of the great abode of Spanish, English and Flemish Merchants.  
We have related as particularly as we can of the riches which France receives from foreign provinces, and have discoursed of the means it hath to draw money for that which is sought for by neighbour nations.  
And although it be the usual manner to come from general things to particular, yet I have herein followed a contrary course, to the end, that after we have seen wherein this realm abounds, and wherewith it may furnish others, we may the more easily see, that it hath means to pass without their neighbours, and that her neighbours are forced to come thither and seek for their necessities, and that after we have noted, what it wants not, I may the more easily settle a belief of the happiness of the country, in the general discourse which I take in hand, wherein I desire to show, not only the riches of the realm, but also the revenues which come to the crown.  
All the soil of France, of what sort soever it be, is good for something, for in places where there is no wine, there grows corn, and where there is no come, there are chestnuts and pasture. To conclude, there is not any thing but doth serve; whereas if we consider Italy, the Apennine hills contain, in a manner, a fourth part, all which is for the most part rocky, and of no profit: and Spain being a great country, is full of unprofitable wastes. The mountains of Auvergne have much good ground, and many places that are rich, full of fruit, abounding in cattle, from whence they draw much flesh, butter and cheese, like unto the mountains of Vivarez, Velay, Gevaudan, Sevenes, Dauphine, Forest and Provence. The rest extendes itself into goodly Champion fields full of corn, or into little hills which are very fertile, or valleys covered with grass, fit to feed cattle. A man would say, that there is abundance in all places with diversity, and profit with the beauty of the countries. And this realm hath also this particularity, that all her provinces may easily communicate their commodities and first-fruits one unto another, by the means of a great number of navigable rivers that are in it; for in the province of Anjou alone, they number forty rivers great and small. Wherefore the deceased Queen mother Katherine de Medicis, said, That there were more navigable rivers in France, than in all the rest of Europe: wherein she did not much stray from the truth. The fertility of the soil, and the commodity of rivers, for the transporting of wares, is the cause of the multitude and beauty of the towns and places of France, most of which are seated upon their banks. And although that France doth not want good ports, and many, yet the greatest towns stand not upon the Sea; the which shows that their greatness comes not from abroad, but is domestic: For the maritime towns are greater than those that are within the country, when as they receive more profit and support from the sea, than from the land, as we see in the cities of Geneva, Venice, and Ragouse. But in places whose greatness depends essentially of the land, the towns which are within the country, are greater than those that are upon the sea: as we may perceive by the city of Milan, and other places of Lombardie, as also in Germany and Hongarie. And for that all the provinces of France are rich, and the commodity of rivers is general, thence it grows, that except Paris (whose greatness proceeds from the abode of kings, the Parliament, and the University, together with the neighbourhood of rivers) all the towns and places of France are, for the most part, of a middle bigness, or small, but fair, commodious, and very well peopled. Bodin writes, that in a computation made in the time of king Henry the second (in the which Bourgondie was not comprehended) they did number seven and twenty thousand places inhabited, which had steeples. As the towns of France are favoured with many rivers, so have the castles and houses of private gentlemen many pools and lakes near unto them. And although there be no lakes in France equal in greatness to them of Italy or Suisserland, yet those we see, are full of very good fish, which supply the want of their greatness by the multitude. We may say the like of woods, which being not great, are many in numbe●: ●nd thereby in former times the kings made great profit, by reason of the great number of their demeans; and at this day gentlemen make much money thereby, selling the cutting of their woods not only to burn, but also for building. There are also many other things which draw money from strangers into France, especially the corn which they carry into Spain and Portugal, and sometimes into Italy; the salt which other nations fetch, namely at Berre in Provence, at Pecais in Languedoc, and at Brovage: whereas it seems the virtue which the Sun hath to transform the water of the sea into salt, stays, and passeth no farther towards the North. There is salt also in other places, as in a fountain of Lorraine, and in fountains and mines in divers places of Polonia, England and Germany; but this salt is of no great worth, no more than that which is found in a mine in Swethland. There is also hemp and cloth, the importance whereof is incredible, and he only can judge that knows the great quantity that is carried away for the fleets of Sevill and Lisbon, and for so many sails and ropes as are made of hemp in France. There is in like manner the wines which they fetch into England and the Low-countrieses, whereof they make so great a mass of money yearly, as it would be tedious to undertake the account, for that strangers carry away so much wine out of this realm. We must add hereunto woad and saffron, with other things of less importance, all which being put together, make a great sum to enrich a realm. And the importance is, that neighbour nations cannot live without all these things. And although there hath been sometimes strict defences, not to sand any thing out of the realm, yet in the end, they have suffered them to pass with permission, for that the profit which grows thereby, is at the lest of 15 or twenty in the hundred. And even at such time as France had war with the king of Spain, the traffic was not interrupted with the Spaniards, for the want they had of victuals, and the gain they brought. So as it is no wonder, if during the former wars, not only in Italy, but also within the realm, the soldiers received all their pay in royals, pistollets, and doublons of Spain.  
As for the revenues of the kings of France, besides their demeans, which have been in a manner all engaged, and is now redeemed by little and little, and will be within few years out of their hands which hold them: that which is drawn out of all the provinces, amounts to very great sums. When as silver was more scant, our kings received less, 
A million of gold in France is three hundred thousand pounds of sterling money.  as it was fit. Lewis the twelfth, did not raise in the whole realm, but about a million and a half of gold yearly. Francis the first, made three millions: Henry the second, came to 6: Charles the ninth, to seven: and Henry the third, past 10 millions. Lewis the twelfth, left the realm full of gold and silver, and was for this cause called the Father of the people. King Francis the first, although he had great wars, and much cause of expense, yet he left eight hundred thousand crowns in his coffers. But Henry the second, died indebted many millions of gold: so as Charles the ninth, and Henry the third, his sons, were forced, not only to charge the people, but also the Clergy, with great impositions. Which shows, that we may not esteem kings rich when they have great revenues, but when they know how to manage them well; for that king Francis the first, maintained greater wars with less revenues, and left ready money to his children; whereas Henry the second, had not such wars, neither did he entertain armies so long time, and yet he left debts to his sons, and misery to the realm.  
As for our time, we cannot make an exact account of all the king receives of his taxes, customs, casual parties or casualties, of the Clergy, and such like, for that the taxes are not always alike, but are imposed according to the occurrents; & although that the ordinary were certain, and were levied after one rate, yet the extraordinary would be always doubtful. Then the number of casual parties is so great, and in many things so secret, as the search would not only be tedious, but imperfect. Yet to satisfy the curious, I have thought good to show whereunto the ordinary tax of one year amounts, to the end he may judge of the rest, and what our kings receive yearly of the realm.   

¶ An extract made upon a breviat of the taxes of the year 1609. of such sums of money as were levied during the same, for the ordinary of the taxes and subsidies, and for the payment of officers wages: all particularly set down in either of the generallities hereafter named.  

The Generality of Paris.  For the tax, 

Every French liver is two shillings of English money.  769000 livers.  For the payment of officers wages. 
147000 livers.   

The generality of Soisson.  For the chief of the tax, 
362465 livers, 18 sou, 10 deniers.  For the payment of officers wages 
2634 livers, 1 sou, 2 deniers.   

Chaalons.  For the chief tax, 
473000 livers.  For officers wages, 
72000 livers.   

Amiens.  For all the tax, 
263000 livers.  For officers wages, 
36000 livers.   

Roven.  For all the tax, 
a millionand 72000 livers.  For officers wages, 
110000 livers.   

Caen.  For the tax, 
638280 livers.  For the wages of officers, 
9720 livers.   

Orleans.  For the tax, 
537500 livers.  For the wages of officers, 
70500 livers.   

Tours.  For the tax, 
919000 livers.  For the wages of officers, 
102000 livers.   

Bourges.  For the tax 
360740 livers.  For the wages of officers, 
49260 livers.   

Moulins.  For the tax, 
423993 livers 10 sou.  For the wages of officers, 
66406 livers 10 sou.   

Poitiers.  For the tax, 
670000 livers.  For the wages of officers, 
75000 livers.   

Rion.  For the tax, 
656000 livers.  For the wages of officers, 
9000 livers.   

Lyon.  For the tax, 
365000 livers.  For the wages of officers, 
45000 livers.   

Bourdeaux.  For the tax, 
623036 livers 7 sou.  For the wages of officers, 
40663 livers 13 sou.   

Languedoc, Tolouse, and Montpelier.  For all that is levied, 
651517 livers 4 sou 3 deniers.   

Dauphine.  For the ordinary grant comprehending the tax, 
20160 livers.  Moreover, to supply the affairs of the said country, 
30000 livers. 
Taillon was a tax imposed to increase the pay of the men at arms.   For the taillon, 
27513 livers.  sum, 
77673 livers.   

Provence.  That which is levied, amounts to the sum of 
86463 livers.   

Bourgondie and Bresse.  The king's rights there, amount unto 
168250 livers.  For the wages of officers, 
9445 livers.   

Bretagne.  There is imposed upon it, 
380460 livers.   

Lymoges.  For the tax and subsidies, 
670000 livers.  For the wages of officers, 
75000 livers.   
But to let you see, in some sort, the riches of the realm, and what comes unto the Crown, leaving these times, when as money is less rare than it was ever, I will only show the ordinary and the extraordinary sums of money levied, as well of the king's demeans, as of his subjects, and the three estates of the realm, since the coming of Henry the second unto the Crown, which was in the year 1547. unto the year 1580. during the reign of Henry the third.  

A million of livers is a hundred thousand pounds' starling, and a liver is two shillings.  FIrst, of the particular receivers of the demeans, the sum of seventy nine millions four hundred thousand livers, whereunto the revenues of the demeans did amount, comprehending all the demeans alienated, and since reunited.  
Of extraordinary sins and amerciaments, seventeen millions six hundred thousand livers, besides those that were farmed out.  
Of extraordinary confiscations, twelve millions seven hundred thousand livers, besides the confiscations reserved to farmers, and general undertakers of the demeans by their grants.  
Of legittimations, escheats, and successions of bastards, nine millions three hundred thousand livers, besides the right, part, and portion due to farmers and undertakers of the demeans.  
Of the increase or decrease of the price of pieces of gold and silver, of the lords right upon quoynes and mines, the sum of nine millions of livers.  
Of free gifts, or duties laid upon houses, threescore nine millions of livers; not comprehending therein the money which the estates appoint for the wages of provost Marshals and their guards, for fortification, renewing of corn, wine, and other victuals, for the munition of frontier places.  
Of the sale of wood taken in the king's forest, the sum of nineteen millions of livers, not comprehending the fines for the which the receivers of the demeans make a particular account.  

Aid was a kind of tax or subsidy imposed upon merchandise that was sold.  Of the farms, aides and elections of this realm, as well alienated as not alienated, and that were redeemed upon condition to pay unto the redeemers, rend, after eight in the hundred, the sum of seventy nine livers.  
Of the Doüane or custom of Lion, two and twenty millions of Livers, not comprehending many abatements made to Italians and undertakers.  

High passage is an imposition laid upon merchandise.  Of the equivalent or toll and imposition of exportage and high passage, forty nine millions of livers, comprehending the sums of money granted by the 3. estates of some provinces, for the suppression of foreign imposition of merchandise imported.  
Of the custom of salt, a hundred forty eight millions of livers, comprehending the increase and divers new impositions. Some writ that in the year 1581. the king being forced to let out this custom, he lost yearly about 800000 crowns.  
Of the prelates and clergy men beneficed within the realm, a hundred twenty four millions of livers, whereunto do amount the ordinary and extraordinary subventions of tenths, not comprehending the 6 deniers, 12 deniers, 18 deniers, & other sums, imposed upon every liver, besides the principal sums which came clearly unto our kings; and not comprehending also the sum of 36000 livers or pounds, granted every year unto the receivor generalof the subvention for his wages, and the 12 deniers upon the liver which the particular receivers took for their wages.  
Of free fees and new purchases, nineteen millions of livers, for the which the prelate's and other clergy men of the realm compounded with king Henry the second, Francis the second, Charles the ninth, Henry the third.  
Of the plate, jewels and relics, taken from churches or the clergy, nine millions of livers.  
Of the sale of clergy land, thirty nine millions of livers.  
Of Churchwardens for the building of Churches in the realm, ten millions of livers, whereunto do amount the divisions made every time by reason of twenty livers for the steeple of every parish.  
Of the pay of fifty thousand foot, the sum of forty nine millions, levied upon all the walled towns of the realm: and upon all persons privileged from taxes, except gentlemen.  

Taillon was a tax raised to increase the payof the men at arms.  Of the ordinary taxes, fourscore & fifteen millions of livers, comprehending the two sou, and four sou upon the liver, with other increases.  
Of the pay of the taillon or tax, increase or augmentation for the men at arms, a hundred and two millions of livers.  
Of the Annates, which is the annual revenue of certain benefices, six millions, seven hundred thousand Livers, which were levied as benefices fell void.  
Of the imposition of five sou for the entry of every pipe of wine twenty eight millions of Livers.  
Of general and particular loans, fifty eight millions of Livers or pounds, levied at divers times upon them that were best able within the realm.  
Of aides in the elections of this realm, six millions, five hundred thousand Livers.  
Of casual parties, a hundred thirty nine millions of livers, whereunto doth amount the composition for the sale of offices, accustomed to be taxed; were it by death, resignation, or otherwise, comprehending also the new creation of many offices.  
Of the confirmation of offices eighteen millions of livers paid at the coming of kings.  
Of the subvention of a subsidy for suits, nine millions of livers or pounds, 
Every French pound or liver is two shillings.  according to the edict, ordaining 10. s. which was wont to be paid before contestation in any cause.  
Of the suppression of offices, nine millions of livers.  
Of the contribution of the Ban and Arriereban, fee and arriere-fee, 
Ban and Arriereban are gentlemen which hold of the Crown, and are called to serve the king in p●rson  eleven millions of livers.  
Of the cutting of the wages of officers, nine millions of livers.  
Of the impost of corn and wine sent into foreign countries, ten millions of livers, not comprehending the king's corn and wine, which he hath along the sea coast, and other places.  
Of wracks and prizes at sea, one and twenty millions of livers, the rights of the admiralty, officers, masters of the ports, and Sergeants being paid both in the Levant and Western seas.  
Of the freeing them that were subject to taxes, nine millions of livers.  
Of the increase of many officers wages, fourteen millions of livers, given by many officers that would have the said augmentation.  
Of wastes, commons, and pastures, with confirmation of privileges, creation of free fairs, and such like rights, seven millions of livers.  
Of proctor's, notaries and sergeants at divers times, fourteen millions of livers.  
Of unexpected sums, nine millions of livers, growing of the forfeitures of many offenders.  
Of the new subvention or subsidy, five and thirty million●● flivers, levied upon all the cities, towns, and walled boroughs of the realm.  
Of Iron, copper and other metals, three millions of livers, for a certain subsidy which was extraordinarily imposed upon them.  
I accounted that only which hath been clearly received, which in show would have exhausted a greater realm than France: And if we shall enter into consideration of the spoils and ruins which the wars have bred, wasting a world of things without profit, we shall found reason to be amazed, and to believe that France is one of the richest realms of the world, and that the kings of France are able to work great effects with their money, as they may undertake great matters by the means of their subjects that obey them.  
And if we consider, that the French king doth at this present draw much more from many things than they did in former times, as of salt; where finding the ●armerss to make an excessive profit, paying them little; they have augmented their rents, so as now they receive very great sums, as of the Polette, of the entries of wine and cattle into towns, 
Polette is a duty which an officer pays yearly unto the king to assure his office unto his h●ireses if he dies within the year.  and of many other things which pass within the realm.  
And if France hath undergone (with the spoils of continual war) the charges which we have mentioned, and yet remains very rich, and doth at this day flourish, who will not give it the title of the best realm of Europe? Doubtless, I do not think there is the like in abundance of all commodities, although some be much greater.  
But before we end this discourse of the King's revenues, it shall not be impertinent to add something of the officers which have the charge and managing of these revenues. The supreme officer is the superintendent of the finances or the Exchequer, without whose warrant nothing doth pass: he is equal in authority to our Lord Treasurer here in England, yet he is no officer of the Crown, but hath his place only by commission. There are under him four intendants, who are controllers of the Exchequer: They have an oversight over all the Treasurers and officers that belong to the Treasure. There is a Treasurer of the Exchequer, one of casualties, a Treasurer of the king's pleasures (which is like to the keeper of the privy purse in England) Treasurers both ordinary and extraordinary of the wars, whereof the first pays the men at arms, and the second, the regiments of foot. There are also Treasurers of France, whereof there is one in every generality; and in every generality there are divers elections or places for the receipt of the revenues, in some more, some less, and in all above 160. in every of which elections there are divers receivers, some for the tax, some for the taillon, some for the aid, some for the tenths, and some for the woods; with as many controllers, besides other inferior officers: & in the chamber of accounts where their accounts are taken, some writ that there are not less than two hundred officers, besides under-clerkes. To conclude, there is such an infinite number of officers belongs unto the receipt of the king's revenues, as scarce a third part comes clearly into his coffers.   

The Forces of France.  
THe realm of France, being in the midst of Christendom, is more commodious than any other, to unite and divide the forces of the greatest princes of Europe; for before it there is Italy, behind England, Spain on the right hand, Germany on the left, the Swisses on the one side, and the Flemings on the other; and besides, it lies betwixt 2. seas, the Mediterranean and the Ocean. By reason whereof it may easily favour and trouble either by sea or land, all the enterprises and designs of the princes and potentates of Europe, at the lest, of them that are his neighbours: and as for him he is assured of all parts, both by nature and art; for that he is defended by the Alpes and Pyren●es from Spain & Italy; by the sea, from England and other countries which lie farther off: and by rivers from Germany and Flanders: and in all places upon the frontier, there are good forts, and great store of arms, artillery, and other things fit for war; and in all, good commanders and good men, to manage all things as shall be fit. And as for her own defence, we found not that since France was a realm, it was ever vanquished by any other Nation, but by the English, who by a long & continual war held a great part of it. But besides that their victory grew by the division of the French, who assisted the kings of England, it continued not long; for that they were not only dispossessed of that part of the realm which they had gotten by force, but also of Normandy and Guienne the ancient patrimony of the kings of England, which came unto our kings by forfeiture. And that which makes France stronger at this day than ever, is, that in former times there was always a Duke of Britain, a Duke of Guyenne, of Normandy, of Bourgondie or of Bourbon, which gave them passage, and received them; as when the English had any design, the Duke of Britain gave them entry, from whence they passed into Normandy. But now that Britain, Guienne, Normandy and Bourgondie are the kings, there is no great cause of fear, unless we should doubt some storm from the French conty of Bourgondy. And that which makes France the more strong, is, that the lands of the great houses of France are not divided into many parts, as in Germany, and in many places of Italy; but the greatest part comes unto the eldest, who are true heirs, and the other brethren have a small portion; so as to attain to any rank and means which may raise them according to their houses and qualities, in which they are borne, they give themselves to follow arms, and seek to make themselves excellent; and simple gentlemen seeing the gate of honour open unto them, endeavour their best in all occasions, that they may be rewarded with some charge. And hence it grows that France hath always had such great warriors.  
France hath two kinds of soldiers, that is, at sea and at land. As for the soldiers at sea, we cannot speak much, for that the want of store of shipping, and of men of command, and to row, would never suffer them to draw together so great a power, as it were able to make any great offensive enterprise; and for this cause king Francis resolved to employ the Turks at sea. True it is, that there was never any need of foreign succours to defend the realm, for that in the Ocean they might draw together about two hundred sail, and in the sea of Provence, they have sometimes armed forty galleys, the which are reduced to a smaller number, and these galleys have sometimes served in the Ocean sea, but more to pass men into Scotland than to put any prince in jealousy, or for any other effect. But the chief strength of the French consists in land men, and more in horsemen than in foot, for that the commodity they have of Germane and Swisses, and the little pleasure they take to see the common people of the realm armed, hath made the Cavalerie to be in more reputation, who in former times were all gentlemen, and by consequence very valiant; but now there is a mixture of all sorts of people, whereof some are paid, and others are bound to go to the wars at their own charge. Those that are bound are commonly called the Arriereban, which is no other thing but gentlemen bound to serve the king in person with so many horse, according to the quality of his fees, the which the king did put in practice in the last war of Savoie. And for that there are many gentlemen, the number of the Cavalerie is great. The companies of men at arms, some are of hundreds, others of fifty. Those of a hundred are commonly commanded by some prince, or by the Constable or Marshals of France. At this day being in full peace, there are very few companies of horse entertained, which be these.  

The King's company of light horse.  
The Queen's company of men at arms.  
The Dauphin's company of men at arms.  
The Duke of Orleans company of men at arms.  
The Duke of Anjous company.  
The Duke of Vendosmes company.  
The Chivalier of Vendosmes company.  
The Marquis of Vernevils' company.  
The Duke of Mayennes company.  
The Constable's company.  
The Master of the horse his company.   
And these be all the companies of horse which are entertained at this present in France.  
But if any war should happen, we should presently see such multitudes of horse fall upon the enemy, as they should be able to amaze them, and to break them; for all the Nobility doth practise riding at this day more than ever, and all other exercises which make a horseman active, and more disposed to fight. And as for the common people, there are many which have been in the late wars, who yet take delight to keep good horses; and there are many young men, which be rich and valiant, bred up to war, who would willingly go to horse, if they might hear the trumpet sound.  
As for the foot, although the Gascons and they that approach near unto Spain are held the best footmen of all, as more able to endure the pain and discommodities of war, and holding much of the inclination of the Spaniards (of whom they may draw forth to the number of eight or nine thousand) & although also that, they of Vivarez, and of the mon●taineses of Dauphine are nothing inferior to the Gascons in any thing, in their judgements that know them, and that together they can levy a greater number than the Gascons; yet they may make many thousands of footmen in all the other parts of the realm, which would be good soldiers, as they that have been long accustomed to the war: and moreover, in a manner all that are borne in France have so much courage, as we may easily found a great number of warlike soldiers, at the lest resolute for any enterprises.  
In former times the kings of France did not much employ their foot, fearing some revolt, and although that Charles the eight knowing the necessity of footmen, would ha●● five thousand French foot entertained, and king Francis afterwards would have fif●ie thousand, yet it soon vanished away, and was dissolved by the estates of the realm, to the end that the people, being unarmed, might be kept in awe by the magistrate, and should not leave their trades, and the manuring of their land, to the prejudice of every man, and to the end also, that in the time of peace they should not practise thieving, and breed a confusion within the realm. But all the conclusions of the estates, would be of no force, when the king resolves the contrary. Lewis the second was the first, who to pass what he pleased, kept the people unarmed, and levied Swisses in steed of French, the which hath been followed by his successors. But he is much deceived that thinks, that his subjects are faint hearted and weak, if he levies strangers: for resolution is gotten by experience of arms, and dangers of war; and this experience should be common within the realm to soldiers and people, if they become good soldiers, for the profession they make of arms; these also must needs be by the necessity of defence. And as to converse with good men, makes men good, so to frequent soldiers makes the people warlike. Besides many factions cannot be committed to strangers, for that they want the practice of places, and also, for that there are many enterprises of too great importance to commit to any that are not of the realm. So as it is necessary that the people in whose country the war is made, become warriors, partly by necessity, for the need the prince hath, and partly by the sight and practise of things which concern the war, as it hath happened in France during the last wars, where, in an instant it was seen full of soldiers.  
At this day there are few footmen entertained in France, and yet they would make the greatest force of an army. And these they be.  
The four companies of the guard of the king's person, who have for their captains Vitry, Montespan, Lafforce and Pra●in.  
The regiment of the guards, which should consist of twenty companies, it hath for colonel monsieur de Crequy.  
The regiment of Piedmont which should be also of twenty companies, the colonel is monsieur de Vauselas.  
The regiment of Picardy of twenty companies, it hath for colonel monsieur de Byron.  
The regiment of Navarre, of twenty companies, their colonel is monsieur de Boisse.  
The regiment of Champagne, which should be of twenty companies, the colonel is monsieur de la Guesle.  
The regiment of monsieur de Nerestan, which is of ten companies.  
The regiment of monsieur du Bourg Espinasse, which is of ten companies.  
Moreover there is a regiment of Swisses, and the hundred Swisses of the guard of the king's person.  
But if the king had need of men, there are also four thousand old soldiers entertained in foreign countries, who would not fail to come at the lest bruit of war. And as for the number of men of experience, that he might levy, and which are not entertained, they cannot be numbered, for that France doth but in a manner take breath, and hath yet ●n infinite number of men, whose arms are no more tired, neither their hearts less courageous, than in the last wars, where they have been, for the French have this in particular, that they do always affect honour, and they think (as it is true) that their is not any one greater than he that riseth by arms.  
Finally, there is such abundance of victuals in France, as it is able to feed any army whatsoever, and the victuals may so easily be transported from one place unto an other, by reason of the commodity of rivers. Wherefore when as Charles the fift entered France by Provence, and afterwards by Champagne, it did feed (besides the Garrisons) above an hundred and fifty thousand soldiers: and in our time, under Charles the ninth, there was found twenty thousand horse, and thirty thousand foot, all strangers, and fifteen thousand horse, and a hundred thousand foot French, and yet there was no dearth within the realm, and in old time the kings entertained three thousand and five hundred lances, four thousand and five hundred archers, yea sometime four thousand lances and six thousand archers, paid continually. Every lance had an archer and a half, so as every company of lances had an other company of archers, which were only distinguished by their ensign, which they called Guidon, for they had all one captain: so as to a hundred of lances there were a hundred and fifty archers. The pay of all these soldiers came yearly to thirteen hundred thousand crowns. For every lance had two hundred and fifty crowns, every archer four scoare, the ensign three hundred, the lieutenant four hundred and eighty, and the captain eight hundred and twenty. These soldiers were reduced to their perfection by Charles the eight, who determined the number, and confirmed their pay, training them in exercises, and distributing them into frontier places, under Captains, Lieutenants, Ensigns, and Guidons; and divided them into men at arms, and archers, adding moreover Harbingers, Treasurers, Paimaisters and Commissaries, and giving the charge of them to the Constable, Marshals of France, and the chief Noblemen of the realm. With all these soldiers above mentioned, the precedent kings of France have not only gotten a great estate, and been able to defend it against the force of all neighbour princes, but also to make their arms known in Asia and Africa, to fight against Germany and Spain, go into Italy, and to make all the world to tremble: for that the French are by nature prompt, hardy and courageous to undertake, and in the beginning invincible. And this happy success in the beginning is of so great importance, as oftentimes it draws all after it; and any loss in the beginning is of bad consequence for him that looseth. By reason whereof the French are held so strong and terrible, as it is a dangerous thing to assail them. It is also a very difficult thing to stay the course of this first fury, whereof the good success gives them more courage.  
As for the artillery, there is one thing in France worthy of consideration, which is, that they have a care to reduce all their pieces to one common form, not too great, lest they should be cumbersome, nor too little, lest they should work but small effect, but mean, and all of one measure, to the end that the same boullet and the like quantity of powder may serve for all, and the same instruments to conduct and manage them: The which is found wonderful profitable, as well in places as in armies, for that when as all boullets will serve for all pieces, they take away the confusion which grows in preparing them; and when as a piece is spoiled, yet they make use of the boullets and other instruments, for that all pieces are of an equal weight, or differ little, and where as one of these pieces may go, they may conduct the rest. The Cannon of France is about ten foot long, and the carriage some fourteen, and being mounted, it makes in all about nineteen foot, and the breadth (which is considered by the axle-tree) is of seven foot. There is also an other thing to be considered touching artillery, which hath been invented by the industry of the French, which is, that in the place whereas they give fire to the piece, they put a piece of iron, for that it fears not the fire like unto brass, which consumes soon, and when as the hole is big the blow hath no great force, so as the piece remains unprofitable, neither is it held good if it continued not a hundred, or at the lest four scoare shot in one day.  
All these things added to the natural situation of France, make this realm powerful, especially under so great a prince, so full ●f valour, wisdom and foresight, and furnished with so great treasure and all things necessary. For as for an offensive war, this realm hath left the marks of her power in many Provinces both near and far off. And to speak of things more ancient, the French have in old time spoiled Italy, overthrown in a manner the greatness of the Romans, and done many exploits in other countries. And if we come to times nearer unto us, Charlemagne was so powerful with the force of this realm, as he subdued Saxony and Bavaria, fought in Spain with the Sarrasins, ruined the kingdom of the Lombard's, conquered the best and greatest part of Italy, and left to his posterity, almost the moiety of Europe. We cannot read of any thing more famous than the enterprise of jerusalem and of the Holy land, resolved in France at the counsel of Clermont, and executed by the French at their private charge, with ●o ardent an un●on of wills, and so great constancy and virtue, as it hath surmounted the glory of all the enterprises that ever were celebrated in histories. Greece and Asia have also felt the arms of the French, in the conquest of the Empire of Constantinople. Barbary and Egypt have felt their forces in the time of the king Saint Lewis; who notwithstanding that he was taken had this advantage, That the king of Tunes yielded to pay him forty thousand ducats of yearly tribute. And at the same time, Charles of Anjou conquered Sicily, and the realm of Naples, and his posterity passed into Hungary, where they reigned many years. And since, in the time of our fathers, Charles the eight, with a strange and wonderful success and course of victory, seized upon a great part of Italy in a short time, which was a means, to invite his successors again to the conquest of Italy, for that king Lewis the twelfth, Francis the first, and Henry the second had the same will and desire, who won goodly victories, and had carried it all, if fortune had been answerable to their courage.  
As for defence, beside the great number of men which are in France, the which did amount to about twenty millions in the time of king Charles the ninth, according to a calcule which was made; and the victuals and artillery wherewith it is sufficiently furnished, and also the favourable situation, there are so many strong places, and in every part, as there is not any country that can have so many. There are divers things which have been the cause of these Forts. The one is, that when as the realm was divided into many principalities and signiories, every man fortified his frontier; an other reason is, that the wars of the English (who were for a time masters of a good part of France,) made them to increase the number of Forts. The situation and nature of places hath aided much in this fortification, and also the diligence and inclination of the people: for that there cannot be a nation more industrious to fortify, than the French, nor that cares less to bestow pains and money to that end. But to the end we may consider of things more particularly, let us run over France, and take view of some of her best places.  
I will not speak of Paris which is a world, the which although it had not any walls, (as in truth they are weak in many places) yet there are so many inhabitants, as this city cannot be taken, but for want of victuals.  
Corbeil might be made wonderful strong, if it were not commanded by two hills, but that which is towards Gastinois, near to the Magdeleine, is not so offensive, for that it is far off, as the other which is towards Seyne coming from Villeneufue Saint George.  
Chartres is strong enough to stay the fury of an army, as we have seen during the last wars: And Chasteaudun, which is seated upon a rock, where the access is very difficult, and it is a town of importance: This was the fort and castle of the Dunois, being a retreat in time of war; for that the enemies could have no access but of one side, which is towards the Port of Beausse.  
Orleans is of more regard than the precedent towns, as being stronger and of greater importance, by reason of the passage of the river of Loire; and the testimony of her strength may be drawn from the siege of Attila king of the Huns, who was stayed (with his victorious army) before Orleans, and from the siege which the English laid before it, in October 1428. which continued until May, and was raised by joane the virgin. Gergeau six leagues from Orleans, although it be but little yet is it reasonably well fortified, and it is of importance, by reason of the bridge and passage over Loire. Montargis is also a good place, but not so well fortified as Orleans, nor of such consequence. Chasteau-landon is a town which hath done harm enough during the last wars, and it is able to resist for a while with a mean garrison. The town of Sens seated upon the river of Yonne, which runs at the foot of it towards Gastinois, hath good walls and ditches, and is able to make defence.  
Auxer●e stands upon the banks of Yonne, and is a good strong place, which gins in a valley, and riseth to the top of a little hill, on the which it is built, and whereas the ancient castle stands fortified with great and old walls, which in old time did serve for a defence for all the country in time of war.  
troy in Champagne is also strong and hath good walls, with resolute inhabitants, ready upon any occasion, as well as they of Auxerre. Chaumont in Bassigny hath always had good and strong walls, with many towers and good ditches, and the Dungeon is now called Haute-feville. But Vitry le Parthois was re-edified and fortified in the time of king Francis, as being upon the frontier of Champagne, not in the old place, but in a village called Montcourt, upon a little hill half a league from the place where it formerly stood; jeronimo Marino a Boullonois was employed to make the design, and according to his plot this town was built as it is at this day. There is also upon the frontier of Champagne, Saint Disier, which was royally fortified, after that it had been ruined in the year 1544. Montereau which is far within the country hath a strong castle and spacious. Meaux is seated upon a mountain, having the river of Marne at the foot of it on the West part: this town is divided into two bodies, whereof one is called the town, and the other the market place or fort of the town, and these two places are divided by a little brook running upon the rock, and the ditch is very deep; within the town stands the castle upon a high place, and commands the market: there are good walls, but it is not well fortified. Chaalon in Champagn is a place neither little nor of small importance, no more than Rheims the chief town of the Province.  
But if we come unto Picardy, we shall found near unto the frontier, places wonderfully strong, as Laon, La Fere, Saint Quentin, Peronne, Capelle, Ardres, Ham, Dorlens, Corbie, Amiens, and Abbeville; with others less fortified, as Boullein, Monstrevill, Bohan and others. Soisson is also a place reasonably strong, and able to make defence. Beawois which is more within the country towards Paris, is well fortified and would endure a long siege. But if we look unto Calais upon the sea as it is now fortified by monsieur de Vic the governor, with her Richban, we shall found that this town exceeds all the rest of Picardy in fortification, and when it shall be finished according to his design, I think there will be few defects, and little means to offend it.  
Langres is a place whose situation is exceeding strong, and the walls good. Mo●●esclair was wonderfully well fortified with good bulwarks and rampires by king Francis the first and Henry the second, for that it is the first strong place in the power of the kings of France towards Lorraine.  
Nevers is a town lying far within the country, having good walls and deep ditches, and a bridge upon the river of Loire: This town is of good defence and great importance for the passage. Bourges hath also good ditches and walls, and is one of the best places in France. Sancerre seated upon the top of a mountain, is able to make head against the most obstinate: and lafoy charity upon Loire is able to stay a good army. Yssoudun in Be●ry is also a strong and well rampired place, having a castle standing somewhat high, the which is well fortified and flanked, and hath good ditches. Argenton which is upon the confines of Berry is a good town, having a strong castle with ten towers, whereof six be great, and four small. La Chastre is also environed with good walls, having strong towers and deep ditches.  
The city of Tours is well fortified, and hath good walls and ditches, with the river of Loire that joins unto it, the which makes it a place of importance. The castle of Amboise which is seven leagues off upon the same river, is also held for one of the best places in France. Saumur upon the same river hath been well fortified and hath good walls, but the castle especially would give much annoyance.  
The castle of Loches is exceeding strong, standing upon an high rock, having but one entry, defended by a great bulwark, strong walls, and double ditches which are very deep and large, and there is little means to batter this place, but in breaking the rock, which hath in circumference a thousand or twelve hundred paces, and it is impossible to sap it, for that the countermines are already made.  
Angers is a strong town, whose ditches are almost flat at the bottom, and the walls are strong and good. But the castle is one of the best places of France, having the ditches in the rock, and being as well fortified as may be. This town is of importance, standing upon the river of Sarte, and near to the river of Loire, and Pont de Cè which is a league from Angers, and upon the river of Loire, is also a good place.  
Normandy hath many good places within the country, as Roüen, which is able to maintain a long siege, and hath in old time stayed great armies. Bayeux is also a town of good importance. Falaise is so seated, that although it be set in a valley, and environed round about with hills, yet all the approaches and suburbs are lower than it; and above all, it hath a good castle seated upon a rock, which commands the town, it hath very deep ditches, and good walls. Caen, which is held for the second town of Normandy, to the which the sea flows, as it doth to Roüen, and passeth farther, is none of the lest important places in Normandy, being great and reasonably strong, and able to make a long defence; it hath a castle built upon a rock, and fortified with a dungeon, in the midst of which there is a square tower of an admirable height, the which is flanked at the four corners with four other great towers, and it hath good and broad ditches at the bottom; this castle hath so great a court as they may put five or six thousand men in battle. Auranches is also strong, standing upon a steep rock, whether the sea comes when it is full, and this town is fortified with good walls, and deep ditches. You have also along the coast Honfleau a strong place, and so is deep, where there is much Ordnance. Saint Valery in Normandy, stronger than that in Picardy. Cherebourg, the last place which king Charles the seventh took from the English, wh●n he expelled them the realm. Mont Saint Michael environed round by the sea, and the fort in the Island of Zere made against the incursion of pirates. But among all the places upon this coast of Normandy, we must prefer Newhaven, an impregnable fort built by king Francis the first, to make head against the English for that the situation is exceeding good, except it be of one side where there is a little hill which seems to command it, but yet it cannot annoyed it much.  
In Bretagne you shall found Rhein's the chief of the country, a good and strong town. Nantes is nothing inferior unto it. Dol, Vannes, Quimpercorentin, and S. Malo. But Blavet and Breast exceed all the other places which are upon the coast, being many in number and strong.  
In Poictou you have the town of Poitiers, which hath (almost in our time) endured a furious siege of fourscore thousand men. Maillezais, Ganach, S. Michael in Her, which during the troubles hath resisted long and furious assaults. Niort, Fonteney, Chasteleraud and Lusignen, all places of good importance.  
In Sainctonge you have Xainctes (where they have made one of the best Citadels of France) Saint jean d' Angely, Blaie and Ponas, strong places: and in Angoumois you have Angoulesme which is reasonably well fortified, but the citadel or castle will always make more resistance than the town. But in the country of Aunis you have Rochel a sea Port and one of the keys of France, able to annoyed great armies: going on further you have Perigueux a town well fortified, the which is not commanded but of one side, where it may easily defend itself.  
As for Limosin, her chief town hath in former times troubled great princes, and Vzerche is so situated as they hold it impregnable. In Auvergne you have the town of Clermont which is of good strength, and the castles of Vson and Nonnette which may be said almost impregnable. But we must make most esteem of Saint flower seated upon a high rock cut strait up, so as there is not in a manner any means to take it,  
Than you see Moulins in Bourbonois a place of good import upon the river of Allier, which did never yield to the attempts of any enemy during our last wars. Montaigu in Combraille is also able to make a good defence.  
As for Bourgondie for her chief and strongest places, she hath Dijon, Chalon, Seurre, Aussonne and Beaun with a very strong castle, besides a great number of smaller places of good strength. The castle of Zalan near to Dijon is also a good place. Autun is a town of importance, the which during our last wars hath been well fortified: and the town and castle of Semur are able to make good resistance.  
Near to Lorraine and Germany you have Mets, which stayed the Emperor Charles the fift long, having great store of ordnance, and an army able to terrify a whole world. It hath also a citadel which is one of the strongest places of France.  
If you go on further towards the South, you shall found the city of Lion, which is exceeding strong on that side where the citadel was ruined, where is also the bulwark of Saint john a very strong place: on the other side of the river of Saone is the castle of Pierre-Ancise seated upon a rock, which defends the entry; on the other side of Lion is Rhosne which serves for a defence, and to speak in a word, although it be not very strong towards Fouruierres and Saint Just, yet this town is able to endure a long siege, and to stay a great army and frustrate their designs, by reason of the situation.  
In Dauphine along the river of Rhosne you have Vienne, which is a good place, where are the forts of Pippet and dirty which command round about. Lower, is Valencia, one of the best towns of war in France. Going downward half a league from the river of Rhosne is the town and castle of Montlimar, able to make a great resistance. Within the country is Romans upon the river of Isere, which is reasonably strong: than you have the castles of Moras and Quirieu, whereof the last is much stronger than the first. After all these you have Grenoble, a town lately fortified by Monsieur de les Diguieres, governuor of Dauphine, who hath made it one of the best places of France. After which, you may see the the fort of Baraut near unto Savoie, which serves to curb the enemy on that side. There are other very strong places, as Die, Gap, the castle of Serre, Nyons, Ambrun, Briançon, and the castle of Essilles upon the frontier. So as the enemy should be much troubled if he should attempt to enter into the country of Dauphine, considering all these Bars.  
As for Provence, you have within the country for strong places, Aix, Arles, Cisteron, Ourgon, Brig●oles, and Pertus. But the sea towns, as Marseille, Tolon, Castle d'If, our Lady of la Guard, the tower of Bouc, Antibe, and some others, are better than they seem to be.  
In languedoc, Tolous may vaunt itself to be strong, but Narbone which is near unto the frontier is much stronger, and Leucate more stronger than it. The situation of the city of Carcassone is strong, but the base town is much better fortified. Besiers and Pezenas are of reasonable strength. But at Montpellier and Nismes they have done what they can to make them towns of defence. Pont Saint Esprite is strong, and hath a good Citadel. Puy in Velay is a strong place, and a town that never was taken. You have near unto it the castle of Polignac, which is held impregnable by reason of his situation. Montauban in Quercy is famous for her fort, and the situation is very strong.  
In Gasconie the town of Bourdeaux will not much fear a siege: Castelnau of Barbarens is a very strong place, and inaccessible: the town of Auch is built upon a rock of hard access, but towards Vicfasensac, and hath endured great assaults. Lectoure is a place which may be held one of the strongest of the Realm. Coming is also a good place, and the situation of Saint Fregeou is very strong. The town of Dax is very strong and well seated. Bayonne is also a strong town upon the frontier, of great importance, and able to make a long defence. In Bearn you have Pau, where there is a very good castle, and Navarrins a strong place at the foot of the Pyrennee Mountains.  
This is all which can be in a manner said touching the places. If we come to consider the men which are in France, and which serve for a support, we shall found that there is not any country in the world that can say it hath more valiant men; and if any one be as well peopled, or it may be better, as China may be, I will answer, That those base and effeminate people exceeds us in number (for that they say there are as many inhabitants upon the water, as on the land) but we surpass them in valour. And if we consider Europe only, we shall not found any country where there are more people.  
As for their neighbours, France might well fear the English, if they had Given or Normandy, or were banded one against another, for otherwise they are invincible; and we must think that Caesar would have prevailed little in France, if the Gauls had not hated one another, whose divisions drew him into the country, and was the total ruin of this estate. France might fear the Spaniards, but whensoever they would assail her towards Spain, they shall do it so uneasily, and have so bad a passage, as upon any little resistance made by the French in so bad a country, the Spaniard would have no courage to proceed any further; and moreover the strong places upon the frontier, towards Langeudoc and Guien will stay them suddenly to their shame.  
As for the Netherlanders, France doth not fear them: first, for that they cannot make any great attempt against this realm: secondly, for that the Estates are well united unto this crown, and will be always constant for her against their neighbours: thirdly, for that the Netherlanders do not reap sufficient to live by, for that they are under a cold Climate, having neither corn nor wine to suffice them; the which they are forced to fetch from Picardy, Bourgondie and other Provinces of France: and besides, the inhabitants of the low Countries live of their labours, and make many works, which they cell chiefly at the fairs of France: and for this cause, if they should break with the French, they should not only want victuals, but also means to vent their wares. We may say the like of the Germane, and moreover that the frontier of Germany, as that of the low countries, have strong places, able to stay him that shall attempt any thing against France.  
As for Lorraine, it is so weak, as France hath no cause to fear it, and moreover there are good forts which bridle it; as there are also to stop the incursions which might be made by the Franch county, which is a little country where they must bring an army from far; so as the length of time would make them stand upon their guard, and then all the frontier should be in arms. We might doubt the Swisses by reason of their neighbourhood, and the sudden incursions which they may make, the which cannot be in time prevented. But first of all they are allied; and moreover, the frontier places on that side are well furnished with all things necessary; so as it would hinder them much in their proceeding: besides the nature of the Suisse is rather to fight in open field, than to lay siege to any place; neither will they willingly go far from their own confines, to put themselves into an open country, and leave strong places behind them; for they would fear (as undoubtedly it would happen) that they should want victuals, and that they should not return so freely being once in an open plain, by reason of the French cavalry.  
As for the Estates of the Duke of Savoie, they have no great apprehension, for that they are bridled of all sides, and also Italy, by a great number of strong places, and by the Alpes which make the passage very difficult; and besides, at the foot of them there are many places of great defence, where they should be forced to stay, having so barren a country behind them; so as the Italians should be constrained either to undergo a great toil, or to pass by these places, which were a great folly; or else to attempt to take him, the which would hold them long in breath. Moreover Italy is not now to be feared by reason of the division of her princes.   

The Government.  
THe estate of France, which was sometimes a Democraty, is now reduced to a Monarchy and the command of one alone. The king is not elected as in many other places, 
This law is but supposed by the French, and no where extanz.  but the crown comes by succession, and the males are only admitted to reign, and not the females; according to a very ancient and fundamental law. The king hath power to resolve of war against his enemies, and to make peace with them, and alliances with other princes and commonweals; as also to impose Taxes, created Magistrates, make Laws and Ordinances, give Privileges and pardons, and to do many other things at his pleasure: so as what so ever pleaseth him is received for an inviolable law: but to show that his wills are just and reasonable, he doth not suffer his edicts to pass, until they be verified by his courts of parliament. The king's eldest son, and next heir to the crown must carry the name of Dauphin, as the assured successor of the Empire is called king of Romans.  
The queens of France have great authority, so as they have sovereign jurisdiction and sessions (if they please) in their lands, as well of their demeans, as of their dowry, to judge of appellations; and the appeal from their sessions comes to the courts of the Peers of France, although the lands and parties be of an other jurisdiction, according to a declaration made by king Lewis the great, in the year 1317. The mother of the king reigning, if she be not queen of France, gives place to the queen reigning. Gifts of kings to their wives during marriage are of force, although that among other persons they be voided. The household servants of a queen or mother to a king, have the like privilege to them that are the kings. But they have no community in purchases made by the kings their husbands, during their reign, but in such as they had made before their coming to the crown after marriage. The widow queen is commonly called queen Blanch, and this custom hath continued since the mother of S. Lewis called Blanch, who lived long, and queen Blanch widow to king Philip of Valois, who lived until the reign of Charles the sixt.  
The manner of crowning, and declaring the kings of France (before that the French had received the faith of Christ) was to raise the king being crowned, upon a great target, and to carry him upon their shoulders, thrice about the camp, when the assistants did cry out that he was their king; and they hold, that this custom did continued after the faith received, during the race of the Merovingiens. For the holy oil which I believe, with many others, was sent from heaven, 
This is a fabulous invention  was only to serve at the baptism of king Clovis, and since at the inthronizing of the kings of the second and third race. They have anointed most of our kings at Rheims, after this manner. Mass being begun, the priest turned himself, before the epistle, towards the king, and expounded unto him the catholic faith, demanding of him if he did believe it, and would defend it. The king having answered yes, they brought him the oath which heered and signed, and this was the oath: IN. now to be ordained king of France, promise' the day of my anointing before God and his Saints, that I will maintain the canonical privilege, law, and justice due to every one of you Prelates, and will defend you as much as I may (with the help of God) as a king aught by right to defend every Bishop and church committed unto him in his realm; and will grant unto the people (committed unto us) the defence of laws in their right, consisting in our authority. This oath being read, the king delivered it into the hands of the Archbishop of Rheims, in the presence of many Prelates that were present. This done, the Archbishop taking S. Remies' cross, did recite, how that Pope Victor had given by that cross, as well to him as to his church, the power of that consecration. Then was he declared king by the said Archbishop and other Prelates and Churchmen. After which the Noblemen of the realm, and then the knights and people did confirm it all with one voice, crying out thrice, We do approve him, we will have him, let it be so. Then sodianly they did sing a Te Deum, and the Archbishop did anoint the king. After which, being returned to his seat, they brought the privilege given by Pope Victor, the which was read before the Prelates. Thus I have in few words set down the ceremony which was observed, and should yet be followed. I have omitted many formalities, for that I thought they would seem tedious.  
As for Regencies, they are ordained either for minority or absence, or for the indisposition of kings: and they that have been regents, have disposed of all matters as if they had been absolute masters.  
The sons of the house of France in old time divided by equal portions, wherein the eldest had no prerogative; & base sons being advowed did inherit with the lawful children: every one holding his part with the title of a realm. The third race rejected bastards, not only from the crown, but from the aduow & surname of France, the which is now allowed to kings base children: and since Hugh Capet, kings younger sons have had nothing but private portions; and it was ordained in the year one thousand two hundred eighty three, that the younger sons should not demand any lawful part or portion to be due unto them, in the succession of the king their father, but only have a provision for their entertainment and living, at the will of their father; and if he had made no declaration thereof during his life, at the pleasure of the king their brother then reigning, neither was it lawful for them to complain of too small a portion.  
The daughters of France, if there be sons, do not inherit but in movables and purchases, according to the Salic law; and they are also perpetually excluded from the crown by custom, and a particular law of the house of France, grounded upon the magnanimity of the French, who cannot endure the sole command of women, who by their marriage might transport the crown to strangers. There hath been daughters of France married to less than kings, and yet they were called Queens with their proper names. This honour was given them during their lives, to show that they were daughters of France. The surname of France belongs to the daughters of the kings of France, whether they were borne before, or during their reign. It is true, that they that are borne before do not challenge it, but after their coming to the crown: and if they be daughters to the king's eldest son, they have the title of Madame from their birth, for an assurance that their father shall reign, if he die not. The rest have no other title but Mistress, and after his coming to the crown Madame, with the surname of France.  
As for the Peers of France, the fees being made hereditary in this realm, according to the written custom of the fees of Lombardie, they did establish in every manor, held in the chief, a certain number of vassals, called Peers, or free men of the fee, bound to keep the lords court, and to judge of feodal matters, having many great prerogatives, as it appears by the decree of the common of Ham, given the last of April 1351. this institution was not made in the time of Charlemaigne, as the fabulous Romans would make us believe, for that their authority, rank, and pre-eminence were established by Hugh Capet, and by the kings issued of his line, who by this means won the hearts of them that were worst affected; such as were the Earl of Flaunders and the Archbishop of Rheims, who oppose themselves against Capet being a usurper, and stopped rheir mouths by the example of these men, who might have bred some alteration, & having given them authority by this dignity, he bond them by oath, to hold their lands of the crown, and to be faithful unto him and to all his posterity, so as Hugh Capet, the better to ratify this thing, caused his son Robert to be crowned, calling thereunto such as he thought might oppose themselves. There were twelve of them, whereof the six temporal were the dukes of Burgundy, Normandy, and Acquitaine, & the earls of Flanders, Tolouse & Champagne, and the clergy were, the Duke and Archbishop of Rheims, the Dukes and Bishops of Laon & Langres, with the Bishops and Earls of Noion, Beawais, and Chaalons, every one of which hath a distinct office at his coronation. The Archbishop of Rheims doth anoint the king, the Bishop of Laon bears the Ampulle or holy oil: the Bishop of Beawais the royal mantle: the Bishop of Noion the girdle: the Bishop of Chaalon the ring: the Duke of Bourgondy the crown: the Duke of Guienne the first banner: the Duke of Normandy the second: the Earl of Tolouse the spurs: the Earl of Champagne the standard royal: and the Earl of Flanders the sword. But the lay Peers being united unto the crown, others do now supply their places. They are called Peers, not for that they are equal in dignity to the king, but for that they are Peers in greatness among themselves. And these cannot be disposed, nor called in question but before the court of parliament, in the which they have a place like unto the princes of the blood, for that they are of the body of the court: and before that the parliament was instituted, the Peers did judge of causes which came to the counsel and before the king's person, who did not any thing either in peace or war, without the council of his Peers who are bound to assist at the king's coronation, and the bishops of Langres and Beawaiss make show to raise the king from his royal throne, and to inquire of the people, If they do accept of him for their king and when as the assistants have answered that they are well pleased, the Archbishop of Rheims makes him to take the accustomed oath. The five ancient lay Peers are returned to the crown, and the sixt doth not acknowledge it any more. The number of the said ancient lay Peers was limited to six, like to them of the church; but the number of the lays have been often augmented from the beginning, and kings have not their hands so bound but they may created as many as they please. In former times these have been made Peers, Eureux, Alencon, Bourbon, Estampes, Artois, Bretagne, clermont in Beawoisis, Beaumond le Roger, Anjou, Berrie, Orleans and others: and in our times Espernon, Byron and S●illy. Commonly the sons of France hold their portions, and all other lands as Peers. Some Peers are created only for life, and are personal, others for them and their issue male, and some for their discendants in general: For women are capable to be Peers, they have place and voices in judgement, and are to be called and adjourned like unto the Peers, for that they hold their dignity having execution of justice.  
The lord Steward, whose charge is almost like unto that of the ancient Majors of the Palace, hath the oversight of all the Officers of the king's house, and it is his charge to take a yearly survey thereof, and to place or displace even unto the meanest Officer, and to command over them; so as not any one that hath wages of the king and is of his ordinary train, can free himself from obeying the lord Steward: and commonly this estate is in the hands of some prince, as we see it at this day held by a prince of the blood. This Office of lord Steward is no hindrance, but that he may enjoy any other office at the same time; for that we have seen two lord Stewards, whereof the one, that is Anne of Montmorency who was Constable at the same time, and the other was Francis of Lorraine Duke of Guise, who was Lieutenant general to king Henry the second.  
The name of great Chamberlain doth sufficiently show his charge, for that he is as it were the chief of all that concerns the king's chamber. It is he that may give or refuse access to them that would enter to speak with the king, and who hath commandment over all the gentlemen of the chamber, who are so many in number as it shall please the king, and have charge to cloth and unclothe him. Among these gentlemen, there is one who hath the name of First or Chief, and he is above the rest, and commands the pages of the chamber. At this day there are two chief gentlemen which are in charge, either of them as it shall please the king to appoint. The great Chamberlain, hath also power over all others (of what sort soever they be) that serve the king in his chamber, as grooms of the chamber, masters and groom of the wardrobe, and all others. Finally, the great Chamberlain is to draw on the king's buskins the day of his coronation.  
As for the Master of the horse, he hath charge over the king's stables, and hath commandment over the gentlemen who have the care of them, and over the Quirries, Pages, Posts, and Riders that are there; so as all horses, as well for service, hunting, or the race, are under his command. He is to carry the royal sword powdered with flower de Luce's in all solemn ceremonies, as at the entries, coronations, and interments of kings. At this day this office is in a manner divided into two, and the first Querrie seems to have the like authority, who also should have command over Posts, and give commission to him that they call controller over the Posts; but at this day the controller general of the Posts disposeth of all these matters.  
There is nothing more seemly for a prince than hunting, for that it makes his body more apt to ●ndure labour, and to the idleness, which is the plague of souls: he hath therefore to this end a great Huntsman and a great Faulkoner, These know at what time the king will hunt or hawk, or run a stag, and according to his will they have a care to make him sport. They have command over all gentlemen that are huntsmen, and over all those that have charge of the king's dogs and hawks.  
The Stewards or Clerks of the kitchen are as it were good husbands of the king's house, of the expenses whereof they must take knowledge and hear the accounts. They carry a staff garnished with silver at either end, and go before the gentlemen that carry meat unto the king's table. They say that in former times they had power to set prizes upon victuals, and to do many other things, which have been taken from them, and do at this day belong to the Provost of the household, for that many things are changed in the execution of offices, as it hath pleased kings to dispose of them, and to give authority to men that had them in charge.  
There is also for the king's table the great Pantler, the Sewers and the Carvers, whose names show their charge. The great Pantler in former times had the government of corn and bread, to see if the weight were just, and the measure lawful, and they did also set the price. At this day the Pantler takes say of all the meat that is served to the king. The Cupbearer doth also take the like say of the king's wine, to avoid the inconvenience which might grow, if the one or other were poisoned.  
And for that the king's household consists of men of divers humours, and by reason of the great number of Princes and Noblemen which do commonly follow the court, there are many men, either for their affairs, or without warrant, who many times commit offences, as thefts, murders and quarrels; to prevent the which, they have ordained the provost of the household, whose title shows his quality to judge of civil and criminal matters betwixt those that follow the court. The provost of the household doth pass, and allow of pardons given by the king to them of the court, and his jurisdiction doth not only extend over the household, and the king's train, but also six leagues round about. He hath two lieutenants under him, one that pro●esseth arms, an other a lawyer, with sergeants which are termed of the provost of the household, and fifty Archers with livery cassocks, like unto the Archers of the king's guard, who follow and serve him, and pursue offenders. Besides the said charge to punish offenders, he is to set the price upon bread, wine, flesh, hay and oats; the which in former times did belong to the Stewards of the king's house. It doth also belong to him to take knowledge of causes concerning the officers of the king's house, in that which is merely personal: the which was also in the jurisdiction of the Stewards of the king's house, who had the knowledge of thefts and other crimes committed in the court, and as king of the ribalds or vagabonds, was appointed to seize upon the offenders; whereas now the provost of the household hath both offices.  
The hundred gentlemen, are the king's company, and are appointed for his more safe and honourable guard, and do yet retain the name of a hundred, notwithstanding that since the reign of king Francis the first, they were made two hundred; either company having a captain and a lieutenant, and they march under the king's corner.  
The king's guard is divided into three, there being French, Scottish men, and Swisses. There are both of Scottish men and French which wear Cassocks, and they are called Archers of the guard; and there are others which wear not any, and they are called Exempts; they carry a staff, and are as it were heads of squadrons, going before the Archers, and leading them in the absence of their commanders. Besides there is the regiment of the guards under a colonel.  
There being such a multitude which follows the court, there must of necessity be some to lodge all this train, and to this end they have created Marshals of the lodging, and harbingers, whose office is to mark the places and houses, as well for the king, as for princes, noblemen, officers and other his majesties servants.  
There are also certain officers of state which follow the king, and they are the chief of the realm, through whose hands affairs of importance must pass: so as no dispatch can be lawfully made without them: These have the chancellor for their head, who is also the chief justice of France. He doth correct even the grants which the king makes, and may cancel patents signed by the king, or any one of his secretaries, so great is the authority of this office. It is he which dispatcheth pardons, immunities, estates, gifts, offices, & such like things, which the subjects do commonly demand, and all dispatches made without his seal, are of no value. If the king grow discontented with his Chancellor, for that the name is sacred and inviolable, and the title and degree cannot be taken from him but by death; they give him a substitute, who carries the name of Keeper of the seal, for that the name of Chancellor may not be attributed unto him during his life that hath this office.  
Kings had always Secretaries, and therefore there are to the number of six score of the house and Crown of France, among the which there are four chief, which are called Secretaries of estate and commandments, who make all dispatches, and have their charges divided according to the provinces, as well within as without the realm. There is also the Secretary of the Cabinet, who makes the king's private dispatches the which he would not have divulged.  
They have also erected two Counsels of the king's house for the State, whereof the one carries the name of Privy Council, the other of Great Council; which were sometimes all one, when the Parliament was ambulatory: but matters being changed, according to the necessity of the time, they were forced to divide the offices.  
The Privy Council consists of divers great personages, whereas the king appoints a precedent, when he doth not assist himself, where, of right, the Princes of the blood have place, with the Chancellor, and many of the most honourable and judicious persons of the realm. In this Council they determine all affairs, both of war and peace, and of other matters which concern the State; and sometimes they call matters of consequence before them, the which are depending in the great Council, or in the Court of Parliament. And as for the Great Council, it hath always consisted of the Chancellor, and eight masters of request of the king's house; and besides, there are seventeen Councillors, two Secretaries, the King's Attorney, and the Solicitor. In this Council they judge definitively, and the officers change every six months, for that it is like unto a moving Parliament. These judges determine of civil appeals which come before them from the provost of the household, and they do also judge of controversies which grow betwixt sovereign Courts, and of benefices which are in the king's gift. The Masters of request are assistants to the Chancellor, with whom they take knowledge of all the offices of the realm, and of the sufficiency, and insufficiency of such as pursue them; they have power to give remissions, and Letters patents of the little Chancery, as they call it, to such as have need of them: They have voices in Court of Parliament, and may preside in Bayliwickes' and Seneshalses, so as the Lieutenants to Bailiffs and Seneshals quit them the place. This is all that may be briefly spoken touching the officers of the king's house. Let us now see them that are out of it, and have charge of the affairs of war, for that thereby our kings have grown great, and then we will come to speak of the rest.  
The Constable hath command over all both foot and horse, for that he is General over all the armies that are levied in France, and over garrisons wheresoever they be. For the exercise of this jurisdiction, Princes have granted unto Constables a seat of justice in the Palace, and a Lieutenant at the Marble Table, who takes knowledge of all excess, and crimes committed by them that make profession of arms. And as he doth judge of crimes committed by soldiers, so doth he in like manner of them that wrong soldiers: he takes knowledge of booties, ransoms, and prisoners, of the mutinies of soldiers against their captains, and of them that go from the army without leave. It belongs unto the Constables to judge of soldiers and men at arms which have been cassierd and put out of their companies by commissaries of the war, captains, lieutenants, or others appointed to take musters of soldiers. He doth also judge of them that are surprised as spies; of debts, bonds and contracts which are made by reason of the war, of them that yield up strong places without leave, or not being forced with extremity; of gentlemen subject to the Ban and Ar●ier-ban, which refuse to do the service they own unto the king, of whom they hold fees, nobility, and freedom. Finally, the paymasters of companies, treasurers, and their deputies, provost-marshals, their lieutenants and archers, are under the Constable's jurisdiction.  
Next unto him we must consider of the Marshals of France, who cannot (as in former times) be dismissed from their charges, the which continued with them during their ●●uess. In the beginning there was but one, than they made two, afterwards three, and so four; and in our time there have been six or seven, and now there are five. The Ordnance saith, that it belongs to the Constable and the Marshals of France, or to their Lieutenants at the marble table, to judge of all insolences and crimes committed by soldiers, either foot or horse, in camp or in their garrison, going thither or coming from thence, or keeping the field, and of attempts made against them. They also take notice of prisoners of war, of booties, and contentions which may grow, and of them that taking the kings pay, disobey their Captains, and go from the camp without leave.  
The Admiral, who hath his office during his life, is the chief and Lieutenant general at sea, and in all places which are upon the sea coast, and hath charge of all that which is attempted at sea, as also he takes knowledge of all offences which are there committed. No man can put a ship to sea, though it be at his own cost, without his permission, nor enter into any port of France. He decides all controversies which happen, as well by reason of contracts made for matter of war, merchandise, and fishing, as for other civil and criminal causes, proceeding from that which is done at sea; and he makes what lieutenants he thinks good to determine of them. It belongs also to him to take the tenth of all prizes, and of all gain or profit which is made by sea, by any person whatsoever; and to give licence to go a fishing for herring out of season, for that without his licence no man can go a fishing to the Newfound land. It belongs to the Admiral to give order for watches and beacons which are upon the sea coast, when as necessity requires, and some hold that he may make a truce for certain days with the enemy, the which is a great privilege. There are four Admiralties, France, Bretagne, Guienne, and Provence.  
Lieutenant's general of ●rmies are appointed to supply the king's place, whose person it is not fit to hazard, as many accidents have taught us by experience; and these are set in their places to command over armies, and to have the same authority which the king should have, if he were there in person.  
Governors of provinces (which should be many in France, by reason of her spaciousness) had sometimes power to give pardons, to grant privileges of fairs and markets, to make yeomen, gentlemen, and bastards legitimate; and they had power to call unto them causes depending before ordinary judges: but Lewis the twelfth revoked these privileges by an edict, and did abrogate this power. They have yet great authority, but the ordinary justice depends not of them; but only those things which concern the war. And although the Governor represents the king, yet if there be question of any Citizen, that makes no profession of arms, he may not punish him, but his ordinary judge, and the appeal goes not before him, but before the justice established in Courts. The like may be said of them that are Lieutenants general for the king in Provinces. I will not extend myself upon the charges of Colonels of horse and foot, nor of the Great master of the ordnance, for that the name doth sufficiently show the authority that is given them.  
As the order of the Star was instituted by king john, and that of S. Michael by king Lewis the eleventh at Amboise, so king Henry the third was author of that of the holy Ghost, the which continues yet, and whose knights enjoy as goodly, yea greater privileges, than those of the other orders.  
Now it rests, that we see what is the circuit of the Court of Parliament of Paris, whereas the knights of the order have place, but no voices, unless they be Pe●reses or Princes of the blood.  
The first Bailiwicke which is under the parliament of Paris, is the town of Laon, then that of Rheims, than Amiens, Abbeville, Boullein, Senlis, Sens, Auxerre, Troy's, Viary in Partois, Chasteau Tyerry, Chaumont in Bassigny, Meaux, and Provins (whereof the two last, as Chasteau Tye●ry) are comprehended in the country of Brie. There is afterwards Melun, Poitiers▪ A●gers, Man's, Tours, ●lois, Bourges, Orleans, Chartres, Angoulesme, Rochel Montfort, l'Amaurry, Lion, Moulins, S. Peter le Monstier, Rion and Orillac in Auvergne, than the town and Provost-court of Paris; after the discourse whereof, we will see the rest, but according unto the provinces, not following the order which I have here set down.  
In Paris you have the Presidial Court of the Chastelet, where there were four and twenty Councillors, by an edict made by king Henry the second, in the year 1560. To this Presidial, repair the court of the Provostship and Vicontie, the preservation of the royal privileges of the University of Paris, the ancient jurisdictions of the said Provostship, Brie Count Robert, & la Ferte Aleps. There is also in the Chastelet a Provost, with his lieutenants, civil, criminal and particular, a protector of the privileges, the King's Council, Attorney, and Solicitor, two Registers civil and criminal, and the Commissaries of the town. For the service of this Chastelet, there are Sergeants both on horseback, and of the Mace, who execute the adiournments, and give the assignation ordained by the judges, as sent by the king, & carrying the title of officers, and the king's badge, which is the arms of France in a scutcheon. The Chastelet hath always had charge of that which concerns the civil government; so as if bakers, or any other that cell victuals, commit any error in their trades, the Commissaries have an eye over them, and the provost of Paris is to punish such offences.  
As for the court of Parliament of Paris, whereas the Princes of the blood are borne Councillors, there should be, according to the ancient number, a hundred persons, that is to say, the twelve Peers of France, whose lands hold of the jurisdiction of the said Court, than eight masters of request of the king's household, and fourscore Councillors, comprehending the four Precedents, that is to say, forty Clerks, and forty Lay men, among which, are the Bishop of Paris, and the Abbot of S. Denis, than the kings two Attorneys, and the Solicitor general. But this number hath been since much augmented, the multitude of affairs being cause of the plurality of judges. The lesser offices of the court, are the four Notaries and Secretaries, two registers, civil and criminal, the register of representations, and the Ushers. The whole body is divided into six Chambers, whereof the first is the Great Chamber, otherwise called the Golden Chamber, the Tournelle, which is that where they pled criminal causes, whereas the judges change every three months; the great Chamber of Inquests, the little Chamber of Inquests, the new Chamber, and the Chamber of demeans. You see also within the ciruit of the Palace, the Requests of the king's household, the Chancery, the Requests of the Palace, the bailiwick of the Palace, the Chamber of the masters of waters and forests; whereunto repair three hundred officers of three hundred courts of the waters and forests of this realm; the jurisdiction of the Constable and Marshals of France at the Marble Table, the Chamber of accounts, that of the Treasure, the Chamber of money, the court of Ayds, of Esleeuz or Seassers of subsidies, the court of the Admiralty at the Marble Table, and the great Pantler of France.  
The under Bayliwicks of the Chastelet of Paris, are Poissy, S. German in Lay, Tornan in Brie, Corbeil, Montlehery and Gonnesse in France.  
Under the Parliament of Paris, are these principal courts of justice that follow.  
First, in the town of Laon a Presidial Court, where, by the edict of king Henry the second, there should be ten Councillors, and one register of appeals. To this Presidial Court should repair, in cases of the edict, the town of Laon, the courts of Saint Quentin, Ribemont, Noyon, Coussy, Chauny, Soisson, Guise, Peronne, Montdidier, and Roy.  
Moreover, in the town of Rheims, an other presidial Court, there should be eight Councillors by the said edict, which we will always follow. And to this Presidial Court, should resort the court of Rheims, the preservation of the privileges of the university of the said place, the jurisdiction of Chalon, Espernay, Fismes, the county of Vertus, and the bailiwick of Saudron.  
In the town of Amiens there is a Presidial Court, where are seven Councillors, and one register of appeals for the bailiwick of Amiens.  
In the town of Abbeville another presidial court, in which are seven Councillors, and one register for the Seneshalship of Ponthieu.  
At Boullein a presidial court, seven Councillors, and one register for the Seneshalship of Boullein.  
In the town of Senlis a presidial court, eight Councillors, and one register, whereunto repair theiurisdictions of Senlis, Compiegne, Clermont in Beawoisis, Creil, the Provostship of Angy, Chaulmont in Vexin, Pontoise, Beaumond upon Oyse, Crespy, la Ferte milon, and Pierrefons.  
In the town of Sens a presidial court, ten Councillors, and one register, whither resorts the jurisdiction of Villeneufue le Roy.  
At Auxerre a presidial court, seven Councillors, and one register for the bailiwick of Auxerre.  
At Troy's a presidial court, eight Councillors, and one register, to which Court repair the jurisdiction of Troy's, the preservation of the fairs of Brie and Champagne, for that it extends into the said bailiwick, the courts of Bar upon Seine, Mussy l'Euesque, la Ferte upon Aulbe, Nogent, Pont upon Seine, Eruy le Chastel, & Saint Florentin.  
In the town of Vitry in Parthois, a presidial Court, seven Councillors, and one Register, to which presidial Court, repair the jurisdiction of Vitry, S. Menehoust, S. Disier, Rowray, and Passevant.  
In the town of Chasteau Tierry a presidial, seven Councillors, and one Register, whereunto resort the courts of the said Chasteau-Tierry, Chastillon upon Marne, Treffons, Ouchil-Chastel & Milly S. Front.  
In the town of Chamont in Bassigny a presidial Court, seven Councillors and one Register, to which Court repairs the said Chamont with the bailiwick of Bar upon Aube.  
In the town of Meaux a presidial Court, seven Councillors, and one Register, whereunto repair the jurisdictions of Meaux, Cressy, Coulommiers in Brie, & la Ferte Gaucher.  
In the town of Provins a Presidial Court, seven Councillors, and one Register. The said Provins and the courts of Sezanne, Montreau Faut Yonne, Bray upon Seine, joy le castle, and the maintenance of the fairs of Brie and Champagne, for that it extends to the said court of Provins, repair thither.  
At Melun a presidial Court, seven Councillors, and one Register, whereunto resort the said Melun, with the jurisdictions of Moret, Nemours, Chasteau landon, Chapelle lafoy rain & Milly in Gastinois.  
At Poitiers a Presidial Court for the Seneshalship of Poitiers, twelve Councillors, and one Register. To this Court repair the jurisdiction of Poitiers, and the maintenance of the privileges of the University of the said place, with the courts of Lusignen, Chasteleraut, Montmorillon, Base March & Dorat, Fontenay le Comte, Niort, Giuray and Saint Maixent.  
At Angers, for the Seneshalship of Anjou, a presidial Court, ten Councillors, and one Register. Thither resort the jurisdiction of Angers, with the Courts of Saumur, Bauge and Beaufort in the valley.  
At Tours a presidial Court, eight Councillors, and one Register, to the which repair the Courts of Tours, Chinon, Lodun, Langest, Amboise, Loches, and Chastillon upon Yndre.  
At Man's a Presidial Court for the Seneshalship of main, 8 Councillors, and one Register: thither repair the jurisdictions of Man's, of Chasteau de Loir, Laval, Beaumond, S. Susanne, Chasteau Gontier, la flesh, and main la juhaiz, Sable, & la Ferte Benard.  
At Lion a presidial Court, eight Councillors, and one Register: thither resort the Courts of Lion for the preservation of the fairs of the said place, with the Bayliwickes' of Mascon, Forest, and Beaujolois. At Lion is also kept the Court of Parliament of Dambes. And at this day Forest depends of Montbrison.  
At Moulins a presidial Court for the Seneshalship of Bourbonnois, seven Councillors, and one Register: thither resort the Court of Moulins, with the jurisdictions, according to the erection which hath been made of the Duchy, and the Courts of high March.  
At S. Pierre le Monstier a Presidial Court, seven Councillors, and a Register: thither resort the bailiwick of S. Pierre le Monstier, comprehending Donziois, Saucrains, Cusset, and the Borough of S. Stephens de Nevers.  
At Rion a presidial Court for the Seneshalship of Base Auvergne, eight Councillors, and a Register: To which there repairs the courts of justice of Rion, Montferrand, Combraille, Montaigu, Aigue pierce, Clermont, and Montpensier.  
At Orillac a presidial Court for the Seneshalship of high Auvergne, eight Councillors, and a Register: thither resort the Courts of Orillac, Saint flower, Carlat, and Murat.  
At Bloise a presidial Court for the bailiwick, seven Councillors, and a Register: to which resort the jurisdictions of Bloise, Romorentin, Millansay, Chasteaudun, and the country of Dunois.  
At Bourges a presidial Court for the bailiwick of Berry, eight Councillors, and one Register: to which repair the Cour● of the said Bourges, with the preservation of the University of that place, with the Courts of Yssoudun, Dun le Roy, Meun upon Yeure, and Concressant.  
At Orleans a presidial seat for the bailiwick of Orleans, twelve Councillors, and a Register: to which repair the jurisdiction of Orleans, as well of the bailiwick, as of the Provostship, with the maintenance of the privileges of the University of the said place, and the courts of Bois common, Chasteau Renard, Yenuille, Yeure le Chastel, Neufueille aux Loges, Gien, Montargis, Lorriz, Meun upon Loire, and Baugency.  
At Cha●tres a presidial court for the bailiwick, ten Councillors, and one Register: thither repair, besides the jurisdiction of Chartres, the courts of Chasteauneuf, Thimerays, great Perch, and Perchegovet, Estampes, Dourdan, Nogent le Roy, Bonneval, and the temporal justice of the Cathedral Church of Chartres, and the Abbey of Bonneval.  
At Angoulesme the Presidial court for the Seneshalship of Augoumois, seven Councillors, and a Register: thither resort the seat of justice of Angoulesme, with the courts of Coignac and Chasteauneuf.  
At Rochel a presidial court, seven Councillors, and a Register: to which resorts the jurisdiction of Rochel, with the country of Aulnis, and the bounds and limits of the government of the said town.  
At Montfort l'Amaury a Presidial court, seven Councillors, and a Register: to which repair the jurisdictions of Montfort, Houdan, Nantes, and Meulan.  
There are moreover, some Presidials added since king Henry the second, as the number of Councillors is augmented by the means of many edicts, for the creation of new offices.  
Normandy contains seven Bayliwickes', which are under the parliament of Roüen, that is to say, Roüen, Caux, Caen, Constantin, Euureux, Giso●s, and Alencon. King Lewis the twelfth erected the parliament of Normandy at Roüen, and there established four Precedents, and eight and twenty Councillors▪ whereof thirteen were Clerks or Clergy men, and fifteen of the laity, two Registers and one Examiner, with the kings two Attorneys, and the Solicitor general; but since they have much augmented the number of the officers of this Court, as they have done all others of the realm.  
Besides the Court of Parliament at Roüen, there is that of the Aids, which comprehends the jurisdiction of the Esleus, or Seassers for subsidies, instituted by king Charles the seventh, consisting of two Precedents, eleven Councillors, a Register, two Attorneys for the King, and one Solicitor, three Ushers, and a Receiver and Paymaster, and these judge definitively of all matters concerning aids, imposts, taxes, increases, gifts, grants, loans, provisions and such like. Of these judges depend many seassors, overseers of the king's storehouses of salt, and controllers, having their jurisdiction apart; and besides the elections of the Duchy of Normandy, there are also comprehended the elections of the Duchy of Perch, of the Provostship of Chaumont, and the increase of Magny, comprehending also Pontoise. There is also at Roüen the court of the bailiwick, and the presidial Court, with the Vicontie, and the ordinary jurisdiction, which they of the country call Cohuë.  
To set down more particularly the presidial Courts and Bayliwickes', they put in the first place,  

The bailiwick of Caudebec; and next,  
The presidial Court of Eureux.  
The bailiwick of Guysors.   
The bailiwick of Alencon: this is comprehended under the generalty of Roüen, where there are twenty Viconties, and twelve or fifteen good and royal jurisdictions.  
The presidial court of Caën,  
The bailiwick of Constance: this is comprehended under the generality of Caën, which hath seven Viconties, and some royal jurisdictions.  
The Court of Parliament of Tolouse hath under it these presidial Courts and Bayliwicks which follow.  

The Seneshalship and Presidiall of Tolouse.  
The Seneshalship of Carcassonne.  
The Seneshalship of Villefranche in Rovergne.  
The Seneshalship of Cahors in Quercy.  
The Seneshalship of Tarbe in Bigorre.   
These Courts are comprehended under the generality of Tolouse, where there are five good Courts depending of the Seneschal of Quercy and others.  
The Presidiall of Montpelier, the court of Aides, and the chamber of Accounts.  
The Presidiall of B●zierss.  
The Seneshalship and presidial Court of Beaucaire & N●●mes: this is under the Generality of Montpelier, where there are four good jurisdictions.  
The Parliament of Bourdeaux contains these country's following: 

The presidial of Bourdeaux.  
The Presidiall of Perigueux.  
The Presidiall of Agen.  
The Presidiall of Bazas.  
The Presidiall of Laws.  
The Presidiall of Xain●eses, and fifteen other jurisdictions.    
The Parliament of Bourgondie hath under it these Courts: 

The bailiwick of Dijon.  
The bailiwick of Nuys.  
The bailiwick of Beaune.  
The bailiwick of Auxonne.  
The bailiwick of S. john de Lone.  
The bailiwick of Chaalon upon Saone.  
The bailiwick of Mascon.  
The bailiwick of Autun.  
The bailiwick of Semur.  
The bailiwick of Mon●ceniz.  
The bailiwick of Charolles.  
The bailiwick of Auxois.  
The bailiwick of Analon.  
The bailiwick of Arnay le Duc.  
The bailiwick of Montag●e.  
The bailiwick of Bar upon Seine.  
The bailiwick of Getz.  
The bailiwick of Bellay.  
The presidial Court of Bourg in Bresse.    
The Parliament of Bretagne contains under it these Courts which follow: 

The presidial of Rhein's.  
The presidial and Chamber of accounts at Nantes.  
The Presidiall of Vannes.  
The Presidiall of Quimpercorentin.  
The Seneshalship of Ploruiel.  
Six other royal jurisdictions.    
The Parliament of Dauphine, resident at Grenoble, hath under it these Courts: 

The bailiwick of Gris●uaudan at Grenoble.  
The bailiwick of Vienne.  
The bailiwick of Valence.  
The Seneshalship of Montelimar.  
The bailiwick of Ambrun.  
The bailiwick of Gap.  
The bailiwick of Nyons.  
The bailiwick of Die.  
The bailiwick of Crest.  
The bailiwick of Chabeul.  
The bailiwick of S. Marcellin.  
The bailiwick of Briançon.    
In the Parliament of Provence they reckon:  
The Seneshalship of Aix, and at the lest, twenty royal jurisdictions: and note that all the towns of Parliament in France have their Chamber of Accounts, except Tolouse and Rennes.   

Religion of France.  
SAint Epiphanius doth teach us that Saint Luke preached the Christian faith in France: and Saint Clement, in his first Epistle against the jews, writes, That he was sent into Gaul by the commandment of Saint Peter to james, brother to our Saviour. They hold that Crescentius, Martial, Denis Areopagita, Eleutherus, Aphrodiseus, Rusticus, and others, did much increase the faith which had been planted; so as Tertullian saith, That in his time many Gauls made profession of the Christian faith. Finally, all the realm was converted to the faith about the year 495, under King Clovis, the History whereof is well known. Moreover, France contains a hundred and seventeen Dioceses, whereof there are fourteen Archbishoprickes, and a hundred and three Bishop●ickeses, whose names were formerly set down.  
The Bishopric of Paris contains six hundred parishes or steeples, comprehending the Hamlets.  
The Bishopric of Meaux contains four hundred and ten parishes or steeples with Hamlets.  

That of Chartres 609 parishes or steeples.  
That of Soisson 380 parishes or steeples.  
That of Beawais 592 parishes or steeples.  
That of Noyon 404 parishes or steeples.  
That of Boullein 460 parishes or steeples.  
That of Amiens 498 parishes or steeples.  
That of Rheims 1014 parishes or steeples.  
That of Chalons 360 parishes or steeples.  
That of Troy's 509 parishes or steeples.  
That of Sens 930 parishes or steeples.  
That of Orleans 700 parishes or steeples.  
That of Anger'st 668 parishes or steeples.  
That of Tours 1035 parishes or steeples.  
That of Poitiers 709 parishes or steeples.  
That of Man's 451 parishes or steeples.  
That of Lusson 213 parishes or steeples.  
That of Bourges 1260 parishes or steeples.  
That of Nevers 211 parishes or steeples.  
That of Lymoges 411 parishes or steeples.  
That of Angolesme 411 parishes or steeples.  
That of Clermont 306 parishes or steeples.  
That of Lion 411 parishes or steeples.  
That of Mascon 307 parishes or steeples.  
That of Chaalon 420 parishes or steeples.  
That of Autun 1300 parishes or steeples.  
That of Auxerre 460 parishes or steeples.  
That of Erez 960 parishes or steeples.  
That of Senlis 211 parishes or steeples.  
That of Roüen 1338 parishes or steeples.  
That of Caën 509 parishes or steeples.  
That of Alencon 390 parishes or steeples.  
That of Eureux 355 parishes.  
That of Nantes 385 parishes or steeples.  
That of Rhein's 450 parishes or steeples.  
That of Vannes 405 parishes or steeples.  
That of Bayeux 211 parishes or steeples.  
That of Seez 213 parishes or steeples.  
That of Constance 319 parishes or steeples.  
That of Auranches 362 parishes or steeples.  
That of Trignee 307 parishes or steeples.  
That of S. Malo 314 parishes or steeples.  
That of Quimpercorentin 202 parishes.  
That of Xantes 291 parishes or steeples.  
That of Perigueux 302 parishes or steeples.  
That of Langres 960 parishes or steeples.  
That of Bourdeaux 918 parishes or steeples.  
That of Montauban 414 parishes or steeples.  
That of Tarbie 292 parishes or steeples.  
That of Axe 259 parishes.  
That of Bazas' 504 parishes or steeples.  
That of Auches 768 parishes or steeples.  
That of Bayonne 349 parishes or steeples.  
That of Cahors 422 parishes or steeples.  
That of Tolouse 1152 parishes or steeples.  
That of Chastres' 412 parishes or steeples.  
That of Carcassonne 319 parishes or steeples.  
That of Narbone 972 parishes or steeples.  
That of Again 629 parishes or steeples.  
That of B●zierss 306 parishes or steeples.  
That of Montpellier 491 parishes or steeples.  
That of Agde 77 parishes or steeples.  
That of Mirepoix 89 parishes or steeples.  
That of Nismes 509 parishes or steeples.  
That of S. Paul 62 parishes or steeples.  
That of la Vaur 1●4 parishes or steeples.  
That of mand 209 parishes or steeples.  
That of Viviers 155 parishes.  
That of Alby 309 parishes.  
That of Rhodey 219 parishes or steeples.  
That of Vabres 500 parishes or steeples.  
That of S. Pons 482 parishes or steeples.  
That of S. flower 202 parishes or steeples.  
That of Lodeve 203 parishes.  
That of Rieux 500 parishes or steeples.  
That of alet 168 parishes or steeples.  
That of S. Ligier 125 parishes or steeples.  
That of Puy 428 parishes or steeples.  
That of Vienne 800 parishes or steeples.  
That of Valence 325 parishes or steeples.  
That of Gap 204 parishes.  
That of Ambrun 211 parishes.  
That of die, which is now joined to Valence, 147 parishes or steeples.  
That of Briançon 170 parishes or steeples.  
That of dign 185 parishes or steeples.  
That of Aix 800 parishes or steeples.  
That of Sisteron 200 parishes or steeples.  
That of Arles 311 parishes or steeples.  
That of Marseille 820 parishes or steeples.   
Besides in France there are a great number of Abbeys and Priories, whereof some have been ruined during the wars, and others do still subsist.  
France is divided into two sorts of religions; the one follows the Romish Catholic Church, and the other doth adhere to the opinion of Calvin. In the beginning they did employ the sword and persecution to root out the followers of this new sect, as they them; but for one head which they cut off, there came up seven, like unto a Hydra: yea they grew so obstinate of either side, as there were battles given, where, notwithstanding they of the new opinion were always the weaker, yet they never fainted, but still continued resolute, notwithstanding all edicts, which banished them the realm, or made them incapable to hold any offices. But in the end, the King considering that they were all his subjects, would entreat all them, like a father, that lived under his obedience, and having found by former experience, that the more they did afflict and persecute them of the reformed religion, the more resolute and constant they grew in their opinion, he hath renewed the edict of pacification, made by his predecessors, by the which the exercise of the reformed religion is allowed in France in those places whereas it hath been formerly practised, and the Mass hath been restored to those places, from whence the enemies being the stronger had banished it. And the most judicious hold this the true and perfect means to bring back the strayed sheep unto the fold.  
It were now fit to discourse something of the privileges and liberties of the French Church, but there are whole books written of that subject, to the which I will sand them that desire to know any thing.   

¶ The Kings of France.  
PHaramond.  
Clodion the Hairy reigned 20 years, he died in the year of Grace 447.  
Merovee reigned 12 years, he died in the year 459.  
Childeric the first, reigned six and twenty years, and died in the year four hundred eighty four.  
Clovis, the first Christian King, reigned thirty years, and died in the year five hundred and fou●e●eene.  
Childebert was king of Paris, and his other brethren reigned elsewhere: for Clotaire was king of Orleans, Clodomir of Soisson, and Theodoric had the realm of Mets and Austrasia. This Childebert reigned 45 years, and died without children in the year 559.  
Clotaire king of Orleans succeeded Childebert in the realm of Paris, he reigned fifty years.  

Aribert, or Cherebert, king of Paris.  
Chilperic, son to the said Clotaire the first, reigned 23 years, and died in the year 587.  
Clotaire the second reigned 44 years, and died in the year 631.  
Dagobert the first reigned 14 years, and died in the year 645.  
Clovis, called by some Lewis, reigned 16 years, and died in the year 662.  
Clotaire the third reigned 4 years.  
Childeric reigned 12 years.  
Theodoric reigned 14 years, and died in the year 693.  
Clovis the third reigned 4 years.  
Childebert the second reigned 18 years, and died in the year 715.  
Dagobert the second reigned 4 years.  
Clotaire the fourth reigned 2 years.  
Chilperic the second reigned 5 years.  
Theodoric the second reigned 15 years, and died in the year 741.  
Childeric the third, who was deposed by Pepin, and put into a Monastery.   

¶ The second race from Pepin to Hugh Capet.  
Pepin reigned 18 years, and died in the year 768.  
Charles the Great, otherwise called Charlemaigne, died in the year 814. having reigned 46 years.  
Lewis, the first of that name, surnamed the Gentle, reigned 26 years, and died in the year 840.  
Charles the second reigned 38 years, and died in the year 879.  
Lewis the second, called the Lisping, reigned 2 years, and died in the year 881.  
Lewis and Caroloman bastards, Kings together, whereof Lewis died a hunting, being slain by his own servants; and Caroloman, running after a maid, was bruised by his horse, and died in the year 885.  
Charles the third reigned 5 years, and died in the year 891.  
Eude reigned 9 years, he died in the year 899.  
Charles the Simple reigned 27 years, and died in the year 926.  
Raoul reigned only two years, and died at Auxerre in the year 928.  
Lewis from beyond the Sea reigned seven and twenty years, and died in the year 956.  
Lothaire reigned 31 years, and died in the year 987.  
Lewis the fifth reigned 1 year, and in him ended the second race.   

¶ The Kings from Hugh Caepet to Philip of Valois.  
Hugh Capet reigned 9 years, and died in the year 996.  
Robert reigned 34 years, and died in the year 1031.  
Henry the first reigned 30 years, and died in the year 1060.  
Philip the first reigned 49 years, and died in the year 1109.  
Lewis the Gross, the sixt of that name, reigned 28 years, and died in the year 1137.  
Lewis the seventh reigned 43 years, and died in the year 1179.  
Philip Augustus reigned 43 years, and died in the year 1223.  
Lewis the eighth reigned 4 years, and died in the year 1227.  
S. Lewis, the ninth of that name, reigned 43 years, and died in the year 1270.  
Philip the third reigned 15 years, and died in the year 1285.  
Philip the fourth, called the Fair, reigned 28 years, and died in the year 1313.  
Lewis the tenth reigned 18 months, and died in the year 1315.  
Philip the Long reigned 5 years, and died in the year 1320.  
Charles the Fair reigned 7 years, and died in the year 1328.   

¶ The Kings from Philip of Valois unto Lewis the thirteenth now reigning.  
Philip of Valois reigned 22 years, and died in the year 1350.  
john reigned 14 years, and died in the year 1363.  
Charles the fifth reigned 16 years, and died in the year 1380.  
Charles the sixt reigned 42 years, and died in the year 1422.  
Charles the seventh reigned 38 years, and died in the year 1460.  
Lewis the eleventh reigned 23 years, and died in the year 1485.  
Charles the eighth reigned 14 years, and died in the year 1497.  
Lewis the twelfth reigned 17 years, and died in the year 1514.  
Francis the first reigned 32 years, and died in the year 1547.  
Henry the second reigned 13 years, and died in the year 1559.  
Francis the second died in the year 1560. having reigned 16 months.  
Charles the ninth reigned 14 years, and died in the year 1574.  
Henry the third reigned 14 years, and died without children in the year 1589. in whom the race of the royal branch of Valois was extinct.   
Henry the Great, fourth of that name, was made king of France by the decease of Henry the third, as the nearest allied unto the Crown, being issued in the direct line from Lewis of France, Earl of Clermont in Beawoisis, son to S. Lewis. He vanquished all them that opposed themselves to his just pretensions, and hath afterwards vanquished himself in pardoning them that had banded against him. France had never the like, and they that shall come after, may justly desire to see the reign of so mighty and so good a Monarch, who hath made his people to live in peace, his neighbours in assurance, and his enemies in continual fear. He reigned 21 years, and died in the year 1610. leaving for successor, his son.  
Lewis the thirteenth, whom God hath given us as a Sun rising over our darkness, and as a goodly and lively image of that incomparable Monarch Henry the Great. And we must believe that his reign, which hath begun by the innocency of his age, will be a reign of piety, justice, and peace; which God will continued with his blessings as he hath begun.      

Of Spain  

A DISCOURSE OF THE MONARCHY OF SPAIN.  

The Contents.  
1THe names in general of all the Estates that are under the king of Spain. II Description and division, as well ancient as modern, of Spain, and how it is at this day divided into three governments. III Description of Catalogne, Arragon, Valencia, Murcia, Grenado, Anda●uzi●, wh●re the straight of Gibraltar is, i● old tim● 〈…〉 straight; of Estremadura, the two castill●ss, Galicia, of Biscay, Guipuscoa, Navarre (〈◊〉 is treated of the unjust ●s●rp●tion of this realm by ferdinand upon the princess 〈◊〉 Nau●rre) and of Por●ug●l●'s four Spa●●e abounding in mines of gold and silver, in phis●●ll f●●● 〈◊〉 both ●●t and 〈◊〉, in 〈◊〉 of in●●●di●l● 〈…〉, first-fruits of all sorts, flesh and 〈◊〉 e●ceeding gre●● 〈◊〉 of the 〈◊〉 of every 〈◊〉. V The nature and manners 〈…〉 Spaniards, and those of this age: the manner of their apparel, their exercises 〈◊〉 manner of living. VI Riches of Spain, wherein it consists, what traffic they use in all their Ports, and especially at Lisbonne; with a summary deduction of the revenues which the ●ing of Spai●e dr●●● from all his estates and realms. VII. What forces be entertains in s● gr●●t ● Mo●●●ble, both by sea and land, and therein is described the preparation of a Naval army against the Qu●ne of England and the united Provinces, in the y●re 1588. VIII. Land forces of the S●●niards', what they be, the valour of th●● footmen, the number of horse commonly entertained in all his estates, the forts built upon the frontiers. IX. Authority of the king of Spain in his realms, and the number of Counsels, by the which he governs his estates. X. Ordinary navigations of the Spaniards, and what course is set down. XI. Of religion and matters concerning the Church of Spain: how many Archbishoprics and Bishoprics there he, and ●h● valuation of every one of them. XII. Genealogy of the kings of Spain: and the succession of the Gothish Kings in all the kingdoms of Spain. XIII. A list of the Kings which 〈◊〉 reigned in Portugal. XIIII. Description of the Islands of Maiorca, Mynorca, and ot●●●●, and how they come unto the Crown of Spain: of the realm of Naples and Sicily, of the ●s●●nd of Sardinia, the estate of Milan, the Islands of the Canaries, the Island of Mozan●● the Island of Ormus, and of Dieu, the town of Daman, the Island of Goa and other count●● 〈…〉 Indies and New world. Finally, there is propounded ●n estate of the revenues which the K●●g of Spain draws yearly from his realms of Portugal, Naples, Sicily, Arragon, etc. and from ●ll ●is other estates.   

TO the end I may not confounded the Reader, and make him seek for the estates which are under the king of Spain, in divers places of this book. I have thought it more convenient to join all his countries and territories together, and having made a denumeration in general, to consider distinctly of the particularities which be most remarkable.  
The king of Spain doth at this day enjoy in Europe, the realms of Spain, the realm of Naples, the duchy of Milan, the Islands of Maiorca, Minorca, Euse or Yuisa, of Sicily and Sardinia. In Africa he holds the best Port which is upon the Medeteranian sea, that is to say, Marzalcabil, which signifieth great Port, and also the places of Oran, Melille, and Pignon of Africa. Without the Straitss he hath the Islands of Canaries, which are twelve in number, whereof there are seven principal: and in right of the crown of Portugal, he doth also hold the important places of Set and Tanger, which are the keys of the Strait, yea of our sea, and of the Atlantike Ocean, and without the Strait Mazagon. He hath also had with the crown of Portugal, the Islands of Azores, whereof the principal be the Tercere, Saint Michael, Saint Mary, Picinino, and Saint George: he doth also enjoy Saint Port, and not far from thence the Island of Madera, which is great, pleasant and rich. Moreover he hath the seven Islands of Cape Verd, and under the Equinoctial line, the Island of Saint Thomas: he doth also possess all the coasts of Africa, which extends from Cape d' Aguere, unto that of Guardasu. In Asia by reason of the crown of Portugal, he holds in a manner all the best places of her Western coast, that is to say, Ormus, Diu, Goa and Malaca. The realm of Ormuz, comprehends under it a good part of Arabia the happy, and the Island of Baaren, which is very great. He doth also hold near unto it, Daman, Bazin, and Zanaa beyond Ciaull, and the forts which are in the realms of Cananor and Cochin, and at Colan. He doth also in a manner enjoy all the coast which run● from Daman unto the town of Melipur; for that all belongs to the Spaniards or their friends, except Calicu●. The Island of Mana●, and the port of Colomban in the Island of Zeilan belongs also to the Spaniard, and so do the 40. Islands of the Philippines, whereof the chief is called Luzon, two hundred leagues long, but very narrow. They do also number among these Islands that of Vendenaio, and Tandaia (which is called by excellency, the Phillippina, for that it was the first which was discovered) and Cebe, whereas Magellan died. The other parts of the catholic kings estates lies in America: all which is divided into Islands and firm land. The Islands of the Northern sea are so many, as they are not yet known, for the Lucais only exceed the number of four hundred. That of Borichen is very great, as also jamaica, Cuba, and Hispaniola.  
As for the firm land, the Spaniard doth actually possess all that runs a long the coast of Florida, nova Hispania and jucatan, and also all the great Southern Peninsula unto the cape of California, yea unto the Quivire; for that the Castillans have discovered so far. He doth also enjoy that part of Peru which is betwixt the river of Pla●a (or of Silver) and Maragnon, and gins at Panama, and this is called Bresil. He doth also hold Peru and the realm of Mexico.  
Let us now examine in particular the most remarkable things which are in this Monarchy, and let us first speak of Spain, whereas their kings do make their ordinary residence.  
Spain which is the first part of firm landlying near un●o Africa, beyond the strait of Gibraltar, was in old time governed partly by kings, princes and lords of the country, and partly by the people themselves: who having deputed their Magistrates and Senators for the government of public affairs, lived for a while in an honourable and quiet peace, until that the warlike Carthaginians having made themselves masters of a great part of Aconicke seeking ●o increase their estate and empire, passed into this Province, where finding the people divided, they joined with some to ruin the rest, forcing a great part of the country, by the terror of their arms, to submit itself to the commonweal of Carthage, against whom the Romans sent divers armies; from whence after long, variable, and bloody wars, the Carthaginians were in the end expelled, and the Romans enjoyed it quietly. But during the reign of Honorius the Emperor, the Vandals a people of Africa chased away the Romans, and made themselves masters of a part of the country; but the Goths dispossessed them, and did peaceably reign over all Spain for many years. In the end, the Moors and Saracens of Africa invaded Spain with a mighty army, and ruined the kingdom of the Goths; yet some remainders of them being retired into the mountains, made head against the Moors, and prevailed so by their arms, as in time they have utterly expelled and driven them out of the country. It is bounded towards the East by the Pyrenee mountains, which extend from Fontarabie, in the province of Guipuscoa upon Cape de Cruz, which is at the entering in●o Catalogue betwixt Roses & Colibra. It hath for bounds on the South part, the Mediterranean sea, which they commonly call the Levant sea, which gins between Spain and ●●●icke and joins afterwards with the Ocean, from the Strait of Gibraltar to the C●pe of Saint Vincent. On the West part, it hath the Ocean, from this Cape of S. Vincent unto that of Finis Terre, and on the North side the same Ocean sea doth environ it from Cape Finis Terre unto Fontarabie. The Pyrenee mountains do not cross Spain with a direct line, but make a crooked form, so as the way from one extremity unto an other towards Spain, would be of many days journey; whereas towards France, it is neither so long not half so troublesome. These mountains go by the realm of Navarre and Roncevaux, along the valleys of Salazar and Ronoal unto Hisava, which is the last confine of the realm of Navarre; then they pass into Arragon by the mountains of jaca unto the Strait of Catalogne, and unto the point of Cape de Cruz, whereas they end in the Mediterranean sea; there being from Fontarabie, unto this Cape, about fourscore leagues. The greatest compass of Spain, is from Cape de Cruz unto Cape S. Vincent, which is near 275. leagues, so as all Spain may contain in circuit about 620. Spanish leagues, every one of which making about four Italian miles; so as these leagues would amount to 2480. miles of Italy, if they went by land, for by sea it would be nothing so much.  
The Romans have in former times divided Spain into the Hither, or that which was on this side, that is to say, which lay nearest unto the lands of the Roman Empire; it was that which is betwixt the river of Ebro and the Pirenee mountains. But the further was that which lay most remo●e from the territories of the Empire, that is to say, which extends from the river of Ebro, unto the Strait of Gibraltar. It was also divided by the Romans themselves, into three Provinces, that is to say, into Betica, Tarraconese and Lusitania, where they established fourteen jurisdictions, whereof Tarraconese comprehends seven, as the greatest of the three, Lusitania three, and Betica four. And this division continued unto the time of Attila. But since, the realm of Granado and Andaluzia have been joined to Betica, Estremadura, Arragon, Castille, Navarre and other per●ie realms to Tarraconese, and Portugal, with the realm of Algarbe unto Lusitania.  
At this day they divide Spain into three governments or realms, that is to say, Aragon, Castille and Portugal. Arragon contains Catalogne, Valentia, Maiorca, Minor●a, Sardinia, Sicily and Naples. Castille comprehends biscay, Leon, the Asturies Galic●● Estremadura, Andalusia, Grenado, Murcia and the two Castilles with the Canaries, the ●●●lme of Navarre, the duchy of Milan, the Newfound world, the Philippines and other countries. Portugal hath under it the realm of Algarbe, Portugal itself, with tha● 〈◊〉 ●●e Spaniards hold in Guien, in Aethiopia, at brasil, at the East Indies and in ●●ny Island●.  
But to begin our description, the first thing that offers itself is Catalogne, which extends itself from Salsas unto the river of Ebro, and from the Mediterranean sea unto the river of Cinga. It is for the most part barren, and abounds more in fruit than in corn, ●●d with wild trees more than with good plants; but the people help themselves (be●●●ood mariners) much by the sea, from whence they draw great profit. It doth frontier wi●●●●●nce at Salsas, the which is a fort of importance, both by reason of the situation, for that it stands in a strait passage (where, in summer the air is pestilent and infectious, by reason of certain near pools and marshes) and also for that it hath been very much fortified, since it was recovered from the French.  
Then follows Perpignan which is in the county of Rossillon, and was engaged by john king of Arragon unto the French, for a great mass of money, and afterwards restored unto the king of Spain by Charles the eight, upon a promise which he drew from the Spaniard not to hinder him in his enterprise of Naples. This Earldom lies betwixt two arms of the Pyrenee mountains, whereof the one goes to Salses, and the other to Golibra, which the ancients called Illiberis. Upon the sea shore or near unto it, we see divers places, with their ports, the which are rather necessary than safe, for that they are subject to divers winds, and not veery spacious, as at Elna, Colibra, Rosas, Empurias, Palamos and Blanos. But Barcelona is the chief town of Catelogne, where there wants nothing to make it excellent but a good port. The inhabitants stand much upon their privileges and liberties; neither do they acknowledge the king but conditionally, wherein they are very scrupulous. Within the country there is Girons, Vich, Cardona, Vrgel, Mon●herra● a hill of wonderful devotion for a miraculous image of the virgin Mary. But returning towards the sea, beyond the river we see Lobregato, and Tarragone an archbishopric from whence a great part of Spain took her denomination; and although it be without a port, yet is the situation very commodious, after which, we found the mouth of the river of Ebro famous, for that it had been the bound betwixt the Romans and Carthaginians. It riseth near unto the Biscain sea, joining to a place called Fuentibre, and running a little towards the Pirenee mountains, it turns first to the East, and then to the South, so as there is not any river which hath more turnings & windings. This river grows great by the means of other rivers which rise at the foot of the said mountains and fall into it; for on the other side it receiveth not any but Bilbilis, if we regard only that which is worthy of consideration. This river at the mouth of it, makes the Island of Alfaques, a retreat for Pirates. But following her course, you may see Tor●osa a fair town, and in a good countri●. Finally, in a manner all the rivers of Spain have high banks and shallow channels, so as they are not very navigable, yet they make some use of the river of Ebro in Arragon, and of some small rivers in the realms of Valencia and Grenado.  
Arragon hath for limits, on the East part the river of Cinga, on the West, the mountains of Moncado, and Molina, on the North, the river of Ebro, and to the South, the mountains of Brabance. We see in this realm, or to speak more properly, in this province of Spain, the towns of jaca, Huesca, Venasca and the town o● Mouson, famous for the courts & assemblies which have been kept there; whether the king must of necessity come every third year, if he will receive six hundred thousand crowns, which the Estates of Arragon pay him for that time. The chief town of the country is Sarragosse upon the river of Ebro; the fairest town in Spain if we regard the beauty of the streets, and the sumptuosnesse of palaces. Then follows Calataiut, which should hold the first rank after Sarragosse: there is Lerida also an university, above the river of Sigro.  
As for Valencia it takes the name of the chief town, and is bounded towards the East, with the Mediterranean sea, towards the North, with Arragon, on the East, with old and new Castille, and on the South, with the realm of Murcia. There are two good towns Horivel● and Valencia, they did number in this realm about two and twenty thousand families of Moors.  
The chief river is Guadalaviar, which is to say, a pure and clear water, it passeth by Valencia and Xucar, which the ancients called Sucron, whereof the bosom or Gulf of Sucro● takes the name, the which extends from the little Island of Alfaques, unto Cape Martin. The ports of this realm are Alicant called by the ancients Illice, from whence, the Gul●e (lying betwixt Cape Martin, and Cape de Polos) takes his name, and Peniscola Gandia and Denia.  
Murica hath for bounds the confines of Alicante, and Cape de Gates, there are few ●●wness well peopled, and those that be, are of small importance; Murcia is the chief town. In this realm is the port of Carthagena, which is the best in Spain upon the Mediterranean sea, for that right against it is a small Island, which assures it from all winds, and defends it from the raging of the sea, and breaks the fury thereof. Andrew Doria said, That he held three ports very safe in the Mediterranean sea, that is to say, that of Carthag●na, julie, and August. The town is a small thing and ill built. Lorca is another port, 〈◊〉 somewhat within the land.  
The realm of Granado extends from Vera unto Malaga: and here we may see of what importance tillage is, for that in the time when as the Moors ruled, this country was wonderfully well inhabited, & full of all sorts of commodities, the hills were planted with vines and fruit trees, the valleys and plains did abound with come and gardens, and the towns with people and victuals; whereas now there is not much people, and the count●●ie yields little, for that they do not manure their grounds as they have done. T●e city of G●●nado is like unto a pomegranet that is opened, for that it contains two ●●lss, which may in a manner be called two mountains, divided by a valley, through the which, the river of Darre doth pass. And this town is divided into four parts differing in situation, which are called Granado, Sierre del sol, or the mountain of the sun, ●●bayzin, and Antequerula. The merchants & gentlemen inhabit chiefly in Granado, which is the bes●part, and where there is a church of admirable structure. There is the pl●ce which they call Alca●ar, which represents a little town, having ten gates. There is the Alhambre (the palace of the Moorish kings) the which by reason of the art and the multitude of fountains, may be put among the wonders of the world: But above all, her situation is admirable, for that she hath under her upon the East part the town, upon the South the snowy mountains, and on the North a great plain. As for the o●he● parts, it is to no purpose to speak of them, for that there is nothing remarkable. The ●●ole town hath in circuit about seu●● miles, and is environed with walls, and a great number of towers; some say a thousand▪ In this realm is also seen the town of Guae●●ine leagues from Grah●●●. The other places of note are Ronde, Maluelle, Velez, Vere, Mochacar, Guascar, Baze, Couba, and Loche upon the river of Genil: seven leagues from Grenado stands the castle of Alhama. The maritime places most important of this realm are Almerie and Malaga, near unto the which there are a great number of villages. Ferdinand king of Arragon and Castille ended the conquest of this realm with the town, in the year 1490.  
Andaluzia extends itself almost from the beginning of the Strait of Gibraltar, unto the river of Guadiana. It is almost near the entrance of the Mediterranean sea, by means of the Strait of Gibraltar, of which we will make some mention, although it doth more properly belong to the Realm of Granado, than to this province. This Strait is seven miles broad, with the ordinary flowing and ebbing of the Ocean, which entering by this port, gets the name of Mediterranean sea, and extends itself unto the farthest bounds of the Great sea, 
Mare maior.  by the space of three thousand and seven hundred miles: The Greeks called it Hercules Straitss, by reason of two pillars of brass that were in Hercules' temple, or (as some will have it) by reason of two mountains, whereo● the one called Calpe is in Spain, and the other named Abile in Africa, the which p●etss have made famons, writing that they were pillars planted by Hercules for the ●●undss of his voyage. The Latins do also call this Strait, Gaditan, by reason of the 〈◊〉 of the Island of Giliz called by the Latins Gades: the Moors have given it the name of Gibraltar, by reason of a castle which is built under the mountain of Calpe, of sm●ll●●●t, but so high, as a far of it seems an Island divided from the main land. Having pas● the Strait you come unto the Island of Calais, which is about seven hundred ●oot from the land, whereunto was joined an other little Island, which had not above two hundred paces in circuit, and both these were called by the Latins Gades. In the greater (which remains to this day) there is a town, which in the Romans time was one of the noblest and richest in Spain; so as Sraho writes, that it did not yield to 〈◊〉 town of the Empire, neither in greatness, magnificence, nor in number of inhabitants of account; for that sometime they number five hundred Roman knights there, the which were not to be found in any other place but at Padova; it is nothing so great at this day, so as it m●y rather be held famous for the concourse of merchants than any town of state. The Moors did ruin it, yet was it re-edified and fortified: but of late years it was forced by an army of English, who held it divers days, and having sacked it, abandoned it. There is nothing more prejudicial to this town, than the neighbourhood of Sevill which draws away all the traffic of the Western sea. Betwixt Cales and the Continent, there is a very good port called Porto Real, and more towards the North, there is another called Saint Maria. Doubling the Cape a little off stands S. Lucar of Barrameda, whereas the ships stay either for a wind to put to sea, or for a tide to go to Sevill. This city of Sevill stands upon the left bank of Guadalquivir, it is six miles in compass, and hath many stately churches and monasteries, with fair streets and great market places. The country is wonderful pleasant and yields all kinds of fruit, oil, wine and corn. Among other things there is a wood of olive trees, of thirty leagues long.  
When as Ferdinand the great took Sevill, they did number in this territory 20000. villages or hamlets, but at this day the number is nothing so great, yet they say there are 200. walled places. The river of Guadalquivir (which is to say in the Arabian tongue, a great river; and it may justly be so called for the capacity and bounty of the water good to dye cloth, and to make the face fair) runs by the town: the tide flows two leagues above the town. From this port Spain sends forth her wine, oil, and all kind of first-fruits, into America and all the Northern parts; and they say, that whenas there enters not four thousand pipes of wine daily into Sevill, the farmer of the custom house will break. Here they also discharge the gold and silver which comes from nova Hispania and Peru, the pearl of Gubagna and Terarecchi, the emeralds of S. Ma●●a, the cuchanille of Mexico, and the coral of the Island Hispaniola, with infinite wealth from the new world, the which is dispersed into all Europe; so as the revenues of this city only, are worth a good realm unto the chatholicke king. On the other side of the river stands Tryana, which is a very pleasant member of Sevill: and although the sun be exceeding hot in Sevill, so as the corn is ripe in April, like unto Egypt, yet there are so many refresh, as king Ferdinand said, it was best to live at Sevill in summer, and in winter at Bourgos, which is a very cold city, yet, it hath wonderful defences against the cold. Besides Sevill, there are also in Andaluzia many towns and places of importance; but the chief is Cordova, to the which they may pass up the river either in great or smaller boats: it is a town of great circuit, but with few houses by reason of the multitude of gardens: it abounds with water which makes the country both pleasant and fruitful. There are near unto it many castles and strong places, whereof Lorena is one. jaen is also a remarkable town, whereof the kings of Spain term themselves lords in their other titles. There are also in this Diocese Vbeda, Baesa, Andujar, great towns, Pliego, Martos, Escalona, Estepa, Morailla, Mirabel, Almodavar, Safra, Beneuent, Aquilar, Zambra, Castellar, Arjona, Alcaladel Rio, with divers others. Neither may I let pass Almadeu and Marchena, the first is a place in the diocese of Cordova belonging to the order of Alcantara, in the which there is a rich mine of quicksilver. And Marchena is a town upon the confines of Granado and Andaluzia, near unto which are bred the best genders of Spain.  
Estremadura extends from Villareale to Badajos, and from Sierra Morena to Tagus. The river of Guadiana runs through it, upon whose banks stands the towns of Badajos and Merida. And here is to be seen a very remarkable thing which is, that this river looseth itself, and runs under the ground for the space of ten leagues, and riseth again near unto Med●lin, a place famous for the birth of Ferdinand Cortes who conquered Mexico: in all that space whereas the river runs under the ground, are excellent pastures; so as among other miracles of Spain, they were wont to say that there is a river on which cattle do seed. In this country is the image of our Lady of Guadalupa, whether infinite ●●mber of people run for devotion.  
The two Casteilles are almost alike in situation, but that Castille the new hath more p●●ineses than the old, being also more towards the South and hotter. The old abounds in come, and the new in cattle: they have divided one from the other by certain mountains, which begin upon the confines of Navarre, and runs almost throughout all Spain u●to the sea. The chief town of new Castille is Toledo, and of the old Bourgos. Toledo is a great city seated upon a high place, where they ascend and descend continually. It is some four miles in compass, but it seems not so great by reason of the inequality of the situation: it is compassed in of all sides with mountains; but towards Vega her streets are narrow, and the houses thick, and fairs within than they seem outwardly. There are twenty and three quarters, and seventeen market places. The clergy of this city is much honoured, and the richest in Christendom. The Archbishop hath temporal jurisdiction over seventeen walled towns, besides other places; and it is thought that his yearly revenues amount to two hundred thousand crowns. It is environed of three parts by the river of Tagus, whose water is drawn up into the city, by the admirable invention of jacomo Cremonese. Neere●unto Toledo they discover a great plain which is very pleasant in such places, whereas they bring the water out of Tagus. Upon the North side of Toledo, stands Madrid, in a reasonable good country, the which (by the residence of former kings, and especially of Philip the second, being invited thereunto by the wholesomeness of the air, and commodity of woods for hunting) is now become one of the best peopled towns of Spain. On this side the river of Guadiana, is c●●ie Royal; and upon the river stands Calatrava, from whence certain knights of Spain take their names and betwixt Tagus and Guadiana are situated the towns of Cuenca, (●he●e they buy good wolles) and Ocagna, famous for the gloves which are made there. Upon the river you may see Alcantara, from whence another order of knights hath taken thei● name: and above Madrid stands Alcala de Henare, sa town that is famous for the 〈◊〉 of 〈◊〉, instituted by the Archbishop and Cardinal Ximenes. But passing into Ca●●ille the old, we may see Burgos, the chief city, as I have formerly said. This town is ancient and well built▪ but the streets are narrow, and it is compassed in round abo●● with mountains, which make the dai●s shorter than the latitude of the p●ace doth ●eare; for that they keep back the sun beams in the morning, and they s●●ale them away i● the evening before suc● time as the sun should set, which makes the ai●● exceeding cold. Among other rare things, there is to be seen the Metropolitan church● made with great art, for that at one instant they may sing mass in five several. chapels, and nor disturb one another. There is a convent of a hundred and fifty religibus women, which they call Huelgues, and they be all of noble houses. This city contended for presidence and primacy with that of Toledo; which contention not being able to be decided in an assembly of the estates of Spain, king Ferdinand bethought himself h●●● to give them both content; so as he caused the city of B●rgos to speak ●irst, saying that he would speak for Toledo. Then may you see upon the river, To●mes and 〈◊〉▪ where the●● is a very fa●ous Vni●ersitie: and beyond it towards t●● North, stands Medina del Campo, a rich town and of great traffic: and near unt● it, Z●●ora▪ ●●d Vailledolid, one of the most pleasingst towns that can be seen, the w●ich is seated upon the river of Pisuergue, well built, with fair and large streets, and 〈◊〉 pall●●es: there are many ●rades there, but among others there are many good g●●smithss. This town is much increased and beautified by the abode of kings. Upon 〈◊〉 of Salamanca, is ●o ●●e seen Auila, Segovia, Sig●ença, with many other towns and 〈◊〉 which were tedious to number. But I will no● forget Soria, called by the ancien●● 〈◊〉: for that the●e is not any town●in the wo●ld, w●ich hath more annoyed and 〈◊〉 the Roman armies for a long time and with so ●ew then. Betwixt the r●●erss of Pi●u●●●● and Ezla, stands Medina del Rio Secoo, a town of traffic, and near unto that Pale●ça▪ But passing out of the confines of Castille we may ●e under the mount●●●eses of the Austuries the city of Leon, the head of a kingdom; the which was so call●●●om the time that the Mo●res conquered Spain. There the kings of Spain made their first residence, after this ravage and inundation of the Moors; and from thence they forced them in the end (after a continual war of 800 years) to return into Africa in which enterprise, the kings and nobility of Spain employed themselves with exceeding great valour & resolution. There is under it the city of Toro with divers other places.  
Galitia is contained betwixt the river of Auia & the Ocean. The roughness of the situation and the scantness of water is the cause that it is not much inhabited. The greatest and most famous places are upon the sea, whereas those people for the most part get their living, by fishing and traffic. This country is held to be rich in copper, lead, and vermilion or minium, the colour whereof gives the name unto a river that runs by it. Some writ also, that there are many mines of gold in divers places: and Pliny reports, that Galitia, Lusitania, and Asturia, did yield 20000 pound weight of gold yearly unto the people of Rome, which is above two millions of crowns. It may be that at this day (for that they do not attend it) it is not known if there be any mines of importance. Their greatest wealth is the wine of Orens (which is much commended) and their hunting and fishing. Compostella is in this country of great reputation, whereas the body of S. james the Apostle and Protector of Spain is reverenced with great devotion. Alphonso the ninth (having miraculously vanquished the Miralmumin of Morocco in a cruel battle) instituted the order of the knights of S. james, the which is the most honoured and noblest in Spain. This province hath a most excellent port at the Groin, whereas the Emperor Charles the fist ordained, that they should make their traffic for spices, but it took no effect. They have better iron than in any other province, and the water is so strong that it fortifies the metal. They are not accustomed to allow any ar●●eses to be good, but those which have received their temper in the water of the rivers of Minio or Bibilis, or in an other river called Calais, from whence they borrow their name that live near unto it being called Callibes. You may see also in this country Bayona, Pontevedre and Ribadeo sea towns. Upon the West is Cape Finis Terre.  
The Asturies is a country full of mountains, and is divided into those of Ouiedo and Santillana. They extend from the river of Ribadeo to Saint Ander. The chief town is Ouiedo whether some few Goths retired themselves at the inundation of the Moors. From thence the Idalgos of Spain take their beginning. The town of Cividadreall is in the Asturies of Ouiedo: and this country hath Galitia upon the West, and the country of Leon upon the South. The Asturies of Santillana join upon the East, in which stands Saint Ander, and in this country is the town of Santillana. Upon the South this country extends towards Victoria, and the river of Ebro, betwixt the which and the Pyrenee mountains there is a great distance: but as for the mountains of Oca they run as far as Burgos, Birbiesca: Nagera with divers other towns are seated upon the high way which passeth from France to Burgos. This province advanceth itself far towards the North.  
Biscay, Guipuscoa and Alava are Provinces of one nature and quality, rich in iron and wood and full of people who are very valiant: they are freed from all taxes, and they maintain their freedoms with so great liberty, as if the king (whom they only call Lord of biscay) will come into the country, he must of necessity go without a shoe. There grows little wine, but in steed thereof they plant apple trees and make cider. The country abounds in woods from whence they draw great store of timber for shipping, and they that are borne in the country prove excellent at sea, as well for soldiers as mariners. biscay lies betwixt Navarre, Guipuscoa, the Ocean and the Asturies: her chief places are S. Ander which hath a portable to receive any fleet; some say this town is in the As●●rieses. There is also Laredo (which is a good town with a capable port) and Portugalette. The chief town of biscay is Bilbao standing in a pleasant plain, some 2 miles from the sea, where there is plenty of victuals, especially of excellent bread & flesh. It is a town of great traffic, namely of wool, which they sand into the Northern Regions. Within the land there are but few dwellings dispersed here and there, by reason of the roughness of the country.  
Guipuscoa divides France from Spain. The chief towns are Devia, Oria, S. Sebastian which is the Bishop's seat, it hath a good haven at the mouth of a river, Fontarabie which is a strong fort upon the frontier of France, and Passage, a good port betwixt the ●ther two towns, with Renteria, and Tolosette which stands upon a river that abounds with salmon and trout. There they also make excellent blades as at Bajona and Bilbao. This country confines with that of Alava, the which is reasonable good and plentiful of come. It is some 18 miles broad, and 28 miles long, and in it stands the city of Victoria.  
Navarre lies betwixt the river of Ebro and the Pyrenee mountains. The Metropolitan town is Pampelona, the rest are Stella (which is some twenty mil●ss off) Tudela, Tafalla, 〈◊〉, Calahorra and others. This realm hath two passages towards Bearn. That which 〈◊〉 to the French king may be esteemed about a sixt part of the realm, the which hath been unjustly usurped from the kings of Navarre, and doth of right belong unto the French king that now reigns, as to him that descends from Katherine of Nau●rre, countess of Foix and Bigorre, and princess of Beam. The mischief grew, for that this Princess having married with john son to alain duke of Albret, who embraced 〈…〉 French ●ing, and assisted him against the Venetians 〈…〉, yea against Pope julie the second, the Pope being incensed (〈…〉 that realms were at his disposition) having excommunicated the king of Navarre he interdicted his realm, and abandoned i● to Ferdi●●nd, who having made himself master of Pampelona, and almost of all Navarre, hath transported this unjust usurpation to his discendants, the which cannot be of any long continuance. They that are descended from john have still retained the title with a small part of the realm, whose descent I have 〈◊〉 good to insert in this place.  

john son to A●lain duke of Albret.- His wife Katherine of  
Navarre. They had issue 

Henry of Albret king of Navarre, ●●ince of Bearne, earl of Foiz etc. His wife was M●rg●ret of Valois, sister to Francis the first. 

joane of Albret queen of Na●●rre▪ daughter to Henry, married Antony of Bourbon.  
Henry of Bourbon king of France and Navarre son to joan●— Lewis the thirteenth, king of France and Navarre.    
Charles who died near unto Naples without children.  
Some daughters.     
Now, that we have run over all that concerns the crown of Castille and Arragon, let us turn ba●ke and take a view of Portugal. This realm (being sometimes called Lu●itania or the fu●●her Spai●e) hath for limits on the North side, the rivers of Minio and Auia, unto the town of Ribadania which stands upon the banks of Auia; on this side it looks to Gallitia, and from thence drawing a li●e towards the East, to Miranda seated upon Duero, from thence towards the South you must take her limits going in a manner directly to the mouth of the river of Ant, & on this side it confines with Castille, Estre●adura and Andaluzia, and towards the South or West it hath the Atlantike or Western 〈◊〉. This realm hath in compass about eight hundred seventy and nine miles, or according unto some, eight hundred and fifty, and it hath towards the sea 470 miles: it is 〈◊〉 ●nd narrow, and lies most part upon the Ocean, it is 320 miles long and 60 broad, and 〈…〉 into two realms▪ whereof the one re●aineses the name of the whole county and 〈◊〉 is called Algarbe, an Arabian word which signifieth the Western part. The one i● 〈◊〉 from the other by a line which must be drawn by imagination from Alcotin to Onewhere, which are two castles, whereof the one stands upon the Western sea, and the other upon the river of Guadiana. Algarbe lies towards the South, and portugal towards the North. The air is wholesome, and the flowing of the sea (which is 〈◊〉 upon that coast) doth much refresh it. The situation is for the most part hilly, especially in Algarbe. The first-fruits of the earth are as good, or better than in any part of Europe. It abounds with wine, oil and honey, but they want wheat, which is brought from France and other Northern parts, they have mines of siver, gold, alum, and marble of all colours. They make excellent silk, especially in the country of Braganza: and they make good salt both for themselves and other countries. They have great fishing, especially of Tonny, and more upon the coast of Algarbe, than in any other place. There are many goodly rivers which pass through this realm, Guadiana, Tagus, Mondego, Duero and Minio, which for the most part have gold mingled with their sand. Guadiana runs 7 leagues through Portugal, Tagus 18, and Duero 28, the which divides it from Castille.  
Algarbe contains four towns under one Bishop, Tavila, Lagos, Silues, and Faro, whereof Tavila and Lagos have reasonable good ports: besides the which (having past Cape S. Vincent called by the ancients Sacrum Promontorium) there is Villa nova and som● other smaller places. Portugal contains three Archbishoprics, Braga, Lisbon, and Euora; and they have under them, besides Algarbe, nine Bishoprics. It hath three excellent ports, that of Setubal (twenty miles from Lisbon towards the South, in a gulf 20 miles long and 3 broad) that of Porto which Duero makes, and that of Lisbon which is the greatest, made by the river Tagus, by the which they enter 15 or 20 miles within the land with great shipping. Lisbon in the opinion of all men is the best peopled city in Chris●endome except Paris; it contains five small hills, betwixt which there is a plain that runs down unto the river: it hath about 20000 families divided into 25 parishes. Upon the highest hill there is an ancient Castle, which is not strong but by reason of the situation, and this serves only for a prison for men of quality. Descending upon the city side is S. julians fort, a late work, built with a design to keep the entry of the river. This city is in manner worth all the rest of the whole kingdom: for that it is infinitely peopled, and all merchandise and trade comes thither from the East Indies, Ethiopia, Brasil, the Madera, and other Islands, and from all the Northern parts. Here flee●ss are victualled, here armies are furnished, and here the whole realm is supplied of her necessary wants. At the mouth of the river of Tagus stands Cascais, whereas the ships attend the tide to go up to Lisbon, or a wind to put to sea. The other towns are Coimbra, (where there is a good University, the founder whereof was king john the third as there is an other built at Euora by cardinal Henry who was afterwards king) Lamego, Viseo, Miranda, Porto, Portalegra, Guarda, Liera, and Eluas. And although that Bragance hath no cathedral church, yet doth it enjoy the privileges of a city, and is under so powerful and rich a Duke, as it seems an incredible thing, that besides the king, there should be so great a prince in so small a realm; for they hold that a third part of the people are his subjects and live upon his lands. Besides this duke, there are also two others, three Marquises, 18 Earls, one Vicont, & one Baron. Besides the cities, some writ that Portugal hath above 470 Castles or other walled places, which for the most part lie betwixt the rivers of Tagus and Minio. For that part of the realm which is betwixt Tagus and the river of Guadiana is nothing well peopled & hath few dwellings, the country being for the most part hilly & barren, but that part which lies betwixt Duero & Minio hath infinite numbers of people, but they are poor, & liker to them of Galizia, with whom they confine, than to Portugals. This realm hath been in former times much better peopled than it is at this present, and this grows by reason of their great and long voyages to Bresil, Ethiopia, the Indies, Mallaca, the Moluccos, and to many other Islands, where they have lost and do lose daily many men, in going and returning in fight and trading, and somany stay in those remote places, as Portugal remains much unpeopled. The number of people which have been in this realm may easily be discerned by the enterprise of king john, who passed into Africa with above forty thousand men, the which was seconded by Alphonso the fift with great forces, who for this reason was called the African: But since the discovery of the Indies king Emanuel had much a do to sand an army of twenty thousand foot and two thousand seven hundred horse to the enterprise of Azamor. This power of the Portugals hath decreased by little and little by reason of the foresaid voyages and enterprises, so as king john the third lost Cape d' Aguero and abandoned Safny, Azamor, and Arzilla: and king Sebastian (in the year 1578 meaning to go in person to the conquest of the empire of Morocco) had great difficulty to draw together 12000 Portugals. The like happens unto Spain, the which for her long and many voyages and enterprises, is so weakened of men, as the cities and towns remain only full of women; for that many thousands of soldiers going forth every year in the flower of their age, and not ten of a hundred returning back again, and these few that return be either lame or old; the country is not only deprived of themselves, but of their children which should be borne. The Portugals and Castillians have herein observed a reason of state, contrary to that from whence grew the greatness and power of the Roman Empire; for the Romans finding that nothing was more necessary for great & important enterprises than multitudes of men, they employed all their studies not only to increase their numbers by marriages, colonies, and such other helps, but they did receive even their enemies into the city and made them free denizens: so as by these and such like means they did (in the end) in a manner embrace all the Empire of the world, and the number of Romans grew so great, as Rome could not be ruined but by her own forces. But the Portugals and Castillians in their enterprises (the which for the vastness of the countries and far distance of their conquests, would require great numbers of men) do not employ any but of their own nations, which are not the best peopled of Europe, and so decrease daily: and yet the Castillians have the Milanese, Neapolitans, Sicilians, and Sardinians, people that are faithful unto the crown of Spain, and who may be trusted for the long time they have been under the Spaniards government, and for the obedience and fidelity they have shown like natural subjects, and not conquered. But the Portugals could not employ any subjects of conquest, for that they have not had any, yet they might have used mercenaries, so as they were catholics and of no suspected countries.  
This want of men hath been the cause, why both the one and the other have given over many enterprises of importance, and that they proceed slowly with them they have in hand: and hence it grows that the Castillians are scarce able to defend the Islands and shores of the new world; nor the Portugals them of Brasil, Cape Verd, and others; neither have the one or the other been able to resist the men of war and pirates which have attempted them; not nor the Negroes which rebel daily in the Island of Hispaniola, S. Thomas, and in other places: yea the Portugals have of late years lost the Island of Tarnate by reason of the few men they had in it.  

¶ The Quality of the country.  
Spain in many places is not well manured, either for that the ground is stony, or the deserts unpleasant● yet if we compare it with Africa it is much more fertile, for that it is not soviolently hot. Spain in many places yields sufficient for the life of man, as wheat, wine, first-fruits, oil, cattle, flax, iron, metals, honey and wax, and it hath waters to nourish fish, with such like things. It is not so molested with winds as France, nor the air is not infected with mists, or pestilent fogs and marshes. There is greater abundance of gold, silver and iron in Spain than in any other place. They do not only dig for gold in mines, but also some writ that whenas the rivers swell with rain, their sand is mixed with gold, especially that of Tagus. There are in divers places of this realm fountains both hot and cold, which have admirable virtues to cure divers diseases. There wants no cat●ell in Spain, where there are not only many tame beasts, but also great store of wild. It is much esteemed for the horses which are bred there, the which are so swift, as some say they are engendered by the wind. It hath not many hurtful beasts unless they be coneys, which work under the ground, spoiling the roots of plants, and doing much other harm. The rivers of Spain (except that of Duero) run gently, and do not spoil the country with there violence. Some writ there be a hundred and fifty rivers great and small, whereof there be five of principal note, ●●ha is Ebro, Tagus, Guadiana (in old time called Anas) Guadalquibir or Betis, Duero and Minio. They have abundance of fish which the sea yields them. The air is generally good, cold towards the North and the Pyrenee mountains, and temperate towards the Ocean and Mediterranen seas. It yields first-fruits of all kinds, and in such abundance, as it doth in a manner furnish all the Northern regions, especially with olives, oranges, lemons, figs and such like. The flesh is of an excellent taste, especially the mutton and pork. It is not to be spoken, what store of good fish they have upon their coast, especially of Andaluzia, Portugal and Biscay. Strabo writes that towards the strait of Gibraltar, the tonnies grow wonderful fat, with acorns which fall into the sea from the oaks which grow upon the shore. And the reverend father Lewis of Grenado hath written, that in the year 1575● the sea did cast up (near to Penique in Portugal) a fish that was 40 fathom long, and 15 foot broad, and so big, as two tall men being of either side, one could scarce see the other; and the tail of it at the end, was five fathom wide. In the year 1578. there was taken, upon the coast of Valencia, a sea calf, 100 foot long. And sometimes they take such huge whales upon the coast of Biscay, as one doth yield 200 jars of oil. But to return to that which the land doth produce, it abound with pitch, scarlet, rushes, flax, hemp, quicksilver, Castille soap, turpentine and alum. Pliny doth much esteem the copper of Mont Moriana, which is at this day called Sierra Morena. There is also great store of fine wools. But to come to every country in particular.  
Cattellogina is generally barren, and yields more fruit than corn, neither hath it any store of good plants. Near unto Vich, the country is rough and stony, and half desert: but about Tortosa the soil is reasonably good.  
In Arragon near to the Pyrenee mountains, they may travel whole days, and found not any inhabitants; yet there are some valleys which yield reasonable store of fruit and corn, and the waters work great effects in all places where they pass. Near to Callatajub, the air is good, and the country fruitful.  
Valencia stands in the most temperate and pleasing air of all Spain: the country is full of gardens and places of wonderful delight, where there grows abundance of rice, sugar, corn and fruit; and this country is much like in quality, to that which is about Naples. As for the rivers which water this realm of Valencia, the chief are Gualdalaviar, which signifieth a pure and clear water, it passeth near unto the city of Valencia, and Xucar, which was in old time called Sucron. This country hath mines of silver at Buriol, of gold at Lodar, of iron at Finistrat and at jabee, of alabaster at Piacent, and of alum, lime and plaster in many places: from thence also we have the best silks in the world, cotton of Murcia, scarlet, crimson, and other precious colours, with sweet and pleasant perfumes. Finally, all the senses of man are wonderfully pleased with that which comes from thence, and grows in that happy region.  
The realm of Murcia is not well peopled, neither doth it yield any thing of importance; for that the mountains are rough and stony, and the plains not well watered with rivers, and so by consequence barren, for that it rains seldom in Spain.  
As for Grenado, it is one of the most fertile soils of Spain, especially, whereas Genil and Darre do pass; for that these two rivers do water the country about Grenado, partly of themselves, and partly by the help and industry of the inhabitants; by which means, plants, first-fruits, herbs, and corn grow in abundance; but above all it causeth great store of cattle, sugars, and as good silks as may be seen. The Moors which were expelled in the year 1492. said, that Paradise was directly in that part of Heaven which hangs over Grenado. Towards the North, there is a great plain, which is so fertile, as it is not credible without seeing of it. Ne●re to the river of Genil there is another plain which is very delightful, and yields great profit, and upon the mountains which are near, they feed great troops of cattle. Near to Alhama, there are hot baths which are wondered delightful and comfortable both for whole and sick; and near unto them there passeth a little river (which is exceeding cold) called Riofrio. The ●oile about Malaca is partly plain and partly valley, and full of very good fruit.  
There is no part of Spain that yields more fruit and come than Andaluzia, nor that hath more troops of cattle, especially of horse; and this country is such, as it may be justly termed the storehouse, fruiterie, wine-cellar, and stable of Spain, yea & a birdcage, where there are such store of birds, especially of those which we call thrushes, or felfaires (which are most excellent) as it is almost an incredible thing, for him that hath not seen it. About Siville, there is great store of fruit, wine, oil and corn. Near unto Cordova, the soil is very fruitful, and there are goodly gardens to be seen with many waters, which make it very delightful. Near unto Almaden, there is a good mine of quicksilver, which is a liquid metal, but it exceeds them that are firm in weight; it fastens itself to gold whensoever it comes near it, and doth separate it from all other metals; and when there is no gold it flies to silver, and doth purge it from the mixture of earth, copper, and lead, wherewith it is engendered: it doth not care for any other metals, but doth eat, pierce through them, and flies away, and then dissolves immediately into smoke, and from smoke returns to his substance again. In these mines of Almaden, there are two kinds of quicksilver, the best is that which comes out of stones being broken, and is called pure, or virgin: that which is of less value is found under the earth; but they are both poison by nature. They that dig it out, grow in a short time pale and wan, resembling rather ghosts than living creatures; and they do most commonly shake, and live little. Quicksilver hath this property, that it gets incensibly into the bones; so as when in the town of Almaden, they do break the bones of dead men's legs which have remained any time in the ground, there comes forth a good quantity of quicksilver; I speak of such as have laboured in the mines. Gilders to preserve themselves from this danger which grows by the handling of quicksilver, are accustomed to hold a piece of gold in their mouths when they work, the which being drawn forth is all covered with quicksilver. The rocks from whence they draw it are read, by reason of the vermilion which is as it were an excrement of these mines, and doth always accompany it: and therefore Pliny did hold that there were veins of vermilion near unto Almaden, the which in those days were much esteemed. About Marchena are bred the best and goodliest gennets of all Spain.  
Estremadura is a country more exposed to the sun than any one in Spain; and therefore as in Italy they drive their cattles from Abrusso to the plains of Apulia, when winter comes; so in Spain they pass from the Northern parts of Estremadura, where in summer the heat is excessive, which is the cause they have no great towns. In all that tract whereas the river of Guadiana runs under ground, there are very good pastures, whereon they feed many troops of cattles. The territory of Guadalcanal hath been in great estimation in our times, by reason of a good vain of Silver which hath been found there.  
New Castille is watered by the river of Tagus, the which hath many other rivers falling into it. It hath more plains than Castille the old, and therefore abounds more in corn; yet it lies more to the South. Castille the old hath her greatest revenues by cattle: the river of Duero passeth through it, the which doth so swell by reason of the abundance of waters which fall into it, as it becomes the greatest river of Spain. True it is, that by reason of her swift course and narrow channel (restrained for the most part with high and very steep rocks) it is not so commodious for navigation, neither doth it help so well in the production of first-fruits, as Ebro, Guadalquibir and Tagus. Near unto Madrid, they have a very good air, and a great commodity for woods fit for hunting. About Vailledolid, the soil is very fertile for corn, cattle, wine and first-fruits of all sorts.  
Galicia is a rough country, and hath no store of waters. There are good wines near unto Orens as hath been said, and they have good fishing, and great store of game for hunting. Asturia is of the same nature and quality that Gallicia, but it is more rocky and less inhabited.  
There grows very little wine in Biscay, and therefore in some places, especially at S. Adrian, they plant apple trees in steed of vines, of which fruit the inhabitants make cidar, which is hard of disgesture, but of a pleasing taste to him that is accustomed therewith.  
As for Portugal the air is very good, and it is refreshed by the flowing of the water, which is very great upon all that coast being full of creeks of the sea. The situation is hilly, and it yields excellent first-fruits, with many other rich commodities, whereof I have formerly made particular relation in my description of that country.   

¶ Manners of the ancient Spaniards.  
FIrmicus terms this nation to be full of arrogancy and vaunting: Vopiscus saith, That they are full of subtlety, active of body, restless, and desirous of innovations: and justine writes, that they have spirits more like beasts than men. The Spaniards in old time, saith Diodorus, did wear short and black robes. Isidore calls these garments Striges. Ptolomee and Diodorus say, That they took delight to be neat; but one of them blames them for that they were so beastly, as they washed all their bodies and rubbed their teeth with urine. Strabo affirms, that the women were accustomed to follow husbandry, and other rustic works. Diodorus telleth us, that they did eat great store of flesh, made a drink with honey, and drunk no wine, but what they bought, having none growing. Florus affirms, That they used a drink made with wheat Atheneus puts the Spaniards among those people that were accustomed to be drunk. justine makes them sparing, abstinent and very sober; so as notwithstanding that they were very rich (as we may see in Atheneus yet they drank water, and did eat alone. And Trogus saith also, that upon festival days there was no preparation for a feast. Pliny writes, That in his time they did use acorns at their second service: and Strabo saith, That they made bread of ground acorns. Pliny affirms, That they fed lying upon the ground. After the second Punic war, they did learn of the Romans to wash their bodies with warm water. justine, & Valerius the Great, say, That their bodies were able to endure hunger and toil, and that they were courageous and resolute to death. Servius writes, That they were much given to theft. They loved wars more than idleness, according unto Trogus. In the wars they did much esteem them that were best able to endure labour, were they horsemen or on foot. The horsemen being victors in battle (as Diodorus saith) they left their horses, having two swords, and did help their footmen. Their swords (according to Livy and Polybius) were short, and fit to come to handy blows, and their manner was to thrust and not to strike. Atheneus saith, that they used darts; and Diodorus, that they did carry head p●eceses of copper, and had boot-legs made of hair. Strabo writes, That they were accustomed to go lightly armed, and to carry targets, darts, and slings. Polybius saith, That they came to fight covered with a certain linen cloth bordered with purple, and that they did wear very white cassocks. The mothers did relate unto young men which went unto the wars, the goodly exploits of their fathers and predecessors, as Sallust observes in his History.  
They did set up as many small pillars about the Sepulchre of a dead man, as he had slain enemies, according to the testimony of Aristotle. Caesar saith, That they did willingly swim over rivers. justine affirms, That they did more esteem their horses of service, and their arms, than their own blood. Diodorus writes, That they were cruel to their enemies and mild and courteous to strangers. Servius and Sallust affirm, That there were many which would not survive their kings. They did so love their liberty, as in the Cantabrike war, mothers slew their children, to the end they should not fall into their enemy's hands, as Strabo doth affirm: and a son, by his father's commandment, slew all his kinsfolks, being prisoners, having found a sword to that end: and a woman did cut off the heads of such as were captives with her; and we also read, that some being laid upon a Cross to be executed, began to sing. And their resolutions are commended by justine in the person of a slave, who, during the time of the Punic war, having taken revenge for his master, laughed heartily in the midst of his torments, so as by cheerfulness he surmounted the cruelty of his tormentors. That which notes the fidelity of the Spaniards, is, as we read in Suetonius, that Caesar had Spaniards for his guard who followed him with swords. Strabo affirms, that the Spaniards did use to carry poison, which made them die without pain, to the end, that if any unexpected accident did happen, contrary to their liking, they might have it ready to kill themselves. silius affirms, that they were accustomed to have their dead bodies eaten by vultures. But Elianus writes that, particularly of the Barceens, and of those only that were slain in the war, saying, That such as died of sickness were burnt.   

¶ The manners of the Spaniards at this day.  
THe Spaniards are hot and dry by nature, and are of a tawny complexion, which makes the women in Spain to use much painting, both white and read. They have their limbs hard, and nothing effeminate. They exceed all the world in superstition, and serve as it were for guides to other nations in matters of ceremonies, flattery, proud and stately titles. They are borne and bred to be silent, and to dissemble, and to conceal their minds. They keep their gravity with an affected severity, which makes them hateful to all other nations. The women do seldom drink wine, and are not much seen; and the gentlewomen never go out of their houses, without a great company of grooms which go before them, and chambermaids that follow them. The Spaniards in their houses are sober, and contented with little: but when they are in another man's, they are gluttons, dainty, and desirous to make good cheer. They entertain strangers with little courtesy. When they are out of Spain, they will esteem honour, and commend one another, yea they will make the poorest peasant as good a gentleman as their king, if they may. They love justice, and do it exactly to all sorts of people. The industry and care of the magistrate, is the cause why there are few thefts or none at all: and within the country there are few murders committed. There is not any man that remains unpunished, if he have offended against the laws, or wronged an other man of what quality soever he be. When as two or three Spaniards are together, of what condition or quality soever they be, especially when they are in the war, they discourse of the common wealth, and of matters of state, they study the means to weaken their enemy's forces, they devise stratagems, and propound them to their commanders, when as they found them worthy of consideration.  
When they are in camp, there is not any nation in the world, that doth longer, and with more patience, endure hunger, thirst, watching, and all kind of toils. They have more art than fury, when they come to fight. Their agility and lightness of arms makes them apt to follow the enemy, and they do as easily fly when there is cause. Although they be subtle witted, yet are they not apt to learn, and when they have gotten any little knowledge, they think themselves to excel. They take great delight in the subtlety of Sophisters. In the Universities, they are more pleased to speak Spanish than Latin. We see few of their works pass the Mountains, for that they cannot writ good Latin: yet the courtesy of the French hath of late days given grace unto their works; so as now we have great numbers in France, especially at Paris and Lyon. They are more melancholic than other nations, which makes them slow in all their enterprises. They love their ease, and ground much upon shows, which makes them to employ their means to be brave in apparel, and other things. They brag much of any thing that doth concern them. They do soon found their advantage, and seek it by all possible means. They cover their weakness with great industry. They fight better on foot than on horseback, notwithstanding that they have excellent horses; and they can handle the arqebus better than any other kind of arms. They make show to carry great reverence to the Church, and to sacred things: which makes some to think that this profession of piety and religion which they all make, hath made heaven favourable unto them, and that for this consideration God hath given them the conquest of a new world. They are subject to be in love, yea in their old age: and when they love, it is with such heat and passion, as a man would ●old their actions incredible, if he had not seen them: and their custom is, not to spare any thing for their friends or mistresses. But to come unto particularities, near unto Vich in Cataloigne the inhabitants are rude, and nothing civil, but savage and full of ignorance: but in Arragon, the inhabitants of Saragosle especially, make profession of civility and neatness; and give themselves to such things as are befitting a gentleman. The inhabitants of Valencia are not much esteemed by them of the other Provinces, for that, being in a manner drowned in delights, wherewith the city and country abounds, they are not apt, neither do they give themselves much to arms: so as the rest of the Spaniards call them Penites, by reason of their daintiness. There is not any town in Europe whereas women that make love are more esteemed, and in this place voluptuousness is preferred before honesty. In the country of Andalusia, the inhabitants are neat and civil, and have good wits, they are for the most part full of discretion and wisdom. The Biskaines are excellent in sea causes, and grow to be good soldiers and mariners.   

¶ The Riches of Spain.  
Spain hath few rivers, and it rains seldom; so as their abundance is not general, and their traffic would be less than in any other place, were it not for the commecre they have with the Indies. For seeing that traffic is grounded upon the easy conduct of merchandise, and that the commodity thereof depends upon plain and easy countries, and navigable rivers; Spain being full of mountains, and having few rivers, should by consequence have little commerce and traffic. It is true they want no good ports upon the sea, where the traffic is very great. Their wealth consists in wine, oil, wax, honey, sugar, saffron, and first-fruits of all sorts, which grow there in so great abundance, as they do in a manner furnish all the Northern regions, especially with olives, oranges, lemons, figs, and such like. The fishing of Tonnie is of so great importance, as the Duke of Medina Sidonia makes yearly fourscore thousand ducats, and the Duke of Arcos twenty thousand. At Murcia they make great store of excellent vessel of chalk, and very fine silk, which yields them much money. In the town of Carthagena they have great trade for wools, the which is transported to Genoa, Florence, Milan, and other places, yea and into France, whereas now they use much Spanish wool to make felts, and to no other end. The silkworms being dead in the realm of Murcia, some years past, by reason of some unseasonable weather, the inhabitants have replenish the country more than ever, by the means of them of Granado. In the country of Granado, besides the abundance of silk, they have also great store of wool, whereof they make great profit. Malaca abounds with all sorts of victuals, so as whole fleets of shipping do commonly furnish themselves there. The port of Sevill brings great commodity to Spain, as well in regard of the wine, oil, and fruit which is transported from thence to America, and to all the Northern parts; as for the great and rich commodities which are imported from the Newfound world, and unladen there, and then distributed into all Europe. The Spaniards make great profit of their quicksilver, which they found near unto Almaden, in the Diocese of Cordova. Moreover, they receive much money for their genners, whereof they of Marchena, are the best and fairest. These gennets are so beautiful, and so well proportioned, as it seems nature takes delight to make them pleasing, and doth polish them as curiously as she can; they are so swift, as it seems, when they are in their full speed, that some wind doth carry them; and their courage is so great, as a man can scarce believe how hardy they be in combats, nor what courage they show when they are wounded; for there hath been many seen dragging their bowels after them, and yet have carried their masters out of danger. This is the reason why they are set at a higher price than all other horses: and if nature had given them strength equal to their courage, they should have all the perfections and qualities that can be desired in a horse; I speak this, for that they have more courage than strength, and are fit for light skirmishes, than long battles. Without doubt these horses jump with the nature of Spaniards, who take great delight in outward shows, and above all to be handsome and stately, for that a man cannot paint a more delicate horse for show. The greatest wealth of Galicia grows from the wine of Orens, and from the fishing of them of the country. Biscay sends fo●th her wool into the Northern parts, and sword blades which are made at Bilbao: and so doth Guipuscoa make money of them that are forged at Tolosette. Portugal sends forth silk which is made in the country about Bragance, the which is in a manner the best. They sand forth also salt, and tonnie which they fish there, and which yields them much money: the greatest part of this tonnie comes out of the country of Algarbe. Lisbonne is the aboard of all the merchandise, and the place whereas all the traffic is made for the East Indies, Ethiopia, Brasil, th● Madera, and other Islands, and for all the North: there the fleets and sea armies furnish themselves, and finally, in this place the inhabitants of the whole realm supply their necessities. But to the end we may judge better of the traffic which is made in the ports of Spain, and especially at Lisbonne, let us make a particular calcule specifying every thing distinctly.  
From Candie they bring muscadels and malmseys, the which are afterwards sent unto the East-indieses, where, by means of their long voyage, they prove excellent, and are sold for fourscore and ten, yea a hundred crowns a pipe. From Barbary, by the way of Ceuta and Tanger, there comes many Cordevant skins, and much Barbary leather, precious stones, tapistry, and other things, but not in so great abundance as in former times. There comes many ships from England laden with merchandise, and especially with cloth. There comes much linen cloth from the Low-countrieses, and small wares to sand unto the Indies. There comes wheat from France, arms from Biscai, and many times ships from the West Indies laden with great store of large hides: in like manner we see come from the Island of Hispaniola, Cassia, and Sugar, with some little gold and silver, and other things which are found in that country. From Bresil comes much sugar, the quantity whereof increaseth yearly. There is also brought much Ambergris, and store of cotton, the which increaseth daily, and the soil is so fit for it, as they may gather what they desire. From Madera they receive six hundred measures of sugar yearly, and this sugar, being the best that comes into that country, is sold for four ducats or more the measure, 
An Arobe is 25 pound● weight.  which is called an Arobe. They bring also from this Island Sanguis Draconis, or Dragons, blood, and some other things, but of small importance. In like manner from S. Thomas they have yearly above two thousand Arobes of sugar, and two hundred Negro slaves. It is not many years since they brought in cottons to Lisbonne, whereof there came the first year threescore thousand pounds weight, and is increased daily. From Paranes they have great store of rice, nuts, apes, and blue parrots. From the Island of the Prince comes sugar, rice, and Negro slaves. From the Island of Cape Verd a reasonable quantity of sugars, cotton, hides, goats skins, rice, wax, oil, and especially slaves. From the Islands of the Açor●●, great store of woad, which is disperse into England and Sicily, much wheat and barley, the which for the most part is sent to the Island of Madera, and the places of Africa, for the which they pay ten in the hundred to the king. Moreover, they make rock Alum there, which is held to be the best. From Mine in Guinne they bring only gold, which yearly doth not amount to above two hundred thousand crowns; besides that which private men do secretly carry away. From the East Indies there comes yearly the quantity of two hundred thousand kintals of pepper, 
A kintal is a hundred weight.  which was wont, with all other spices, to belong wholly to the king, who paid for it at Malaca after three ducats the kintal, being worth ten pounds sterling; and in other Islands about five ducats, the which at Lisbonne, in the Indian house, is sold for forty ducats the kintal. Of ginger, cinnamon, mastic, cloves, and nutmegs, there comes to the value of two hundred thousand crowns at every change of shipping: of Eudelles (which is a kind of grain which they use of late years in Spain to die withal in stead of woad) for above a hundred thousand ducats, selling it for a ducat the pound. Of Borax, Camphir, Sandall, Aloes, Ebon, and other drugs, there comes yearly for forty thousand ducats. Many private men bring bags of cotton of divers sorts, to the value of threescore thousand ducats; wherein they gain fourscore in the hundred. In regard of Amber and Musk, they● do usually receive for twenty thousand ducats. As for pearls and precious stones, there comes good store, but no man can justly say what quantity, for that private men conceal much to defraud the king of his custom, which is five in the hundred. From China, Malaca, Maluie, Bengala, Pegri, Lambay, and other places in those parts, there comes great store of white silk, excellent Porcelaine, and many other delicate things, which at Lisbonne they call Brincos. There comes also from China small pearl, with very delicate works, which are sold at Lisbonne for a hundred Portugal-crownes a piece, the which the Portugals wear upon their garments. And they bring from China certain litters, tables, chairs, and stools of a certain wood that is black●, and shines like Eben, wrought and garnished with gold, which gives it a great grace, with many other fine devices; whereby we may judge that the people of China have very good wits, and fit for the invention of rare devices. From Persia they bring goodly tapestries of gold and silk, and fine wools. The ships which come from the Indies bring certain little white Cockle shells, the which they found upon the sea shore, and cell at Lisbonne.  
All these merchandises come to Lisbonne from all the parts of the world, and are dispersed throughout all Europe, with great profit to the Portugals; and the king's gain had been much greater, for that he had all the spices at his commandment, if he had not been deceived by his own officers. But we may justly say, that the king of Spain hath been rather impoverished of late years, although that the merchandise be of great profit. And f●r this cause he hath suffered some particular men to rend them, reserving unto himself some customs, for the which he hath received seven hundred thousand ducats, besides the charge in regard of the merchandise. There are at this day three Viceroys at the Indies, one at Malaca, another at Binus or Ormuz, and the third at Mozambique, to have a care lest the spices pass by the read sea unto Alexandria, as they were accustomed to do, by reason of the falsehood and dishonesty of officers, who suffered themselves to be corrupted.  
The commodities which pass commonly from Lisbonne unto the Indies, are wines of Candie and Spain, silks and woollen cloth, with many other small wares. They sand into China, and to the Negroes country, certain great rings made of latten, which come from the Low country, paying for every one six pence, the which they cell afterwards to the Negroes for a third part of a ducat. To Brasil they sand wines, woollen cloth, and much apparel ready made, for that there are no workmen in that country, neither are they vented to them that are borne in the country (for that they are accustomed to go naked, to live in woods, and to eat man's flesh) but to the Portugals themselves, and other merchants which devil in that country.  
Into England they sand wines, oil, sugar, spices of all sorts, as also into the Low-countrieses, besides the great quantity of salt which is made in the mines of Portugal; and some that have good judgement, assure that there parts from thence every year (for foreign Provinces) at the lest four hundred hulcks, whereof every one is commonly four hundred ton burden.  
The ships of Italy lad spices at Lisbonne with much sugar, and in the town of Lagos, and in Alga●be much tonnie, whereof they sand a great quantity throughout all Spain.  
As for the revenues of the king of Spain, it is certain that he draws yearly above four millions of gold from his estates of Italy and Sicily; 
A million of gold i● her● valued ten hundred thousand crowns.  abo●e two millions from Portugal, about three millions of gold from the Indies, one year with another; from Maiorca and Minorca fifty thousand crowns, and from Castille a million and some four hundred thousand crowns. But all these tributes and impositions are little, in regard of that which he draws extraordinarily, and for the most part usually, as the Croisado which is worth unto him the revenues of a kingdom, the subsidies of the Church, with the which you may entertain yearly a hundred good galleys, and the fall of offices, which import more in Italy and Spain than is imagined; moreover, the ordinary and extraordinary free gifts of his subjects. For the realm of Naples gives him every third year about a million and two hundred thousand crowns: and in like manner Sicily, Sardinia, the Duchy of Milan, Castille, and his other estates at the New world make him great presents: and besides all this, the contributions are very great. For Castille did of late grant unto the king of Spain a contribution of four millions, to be paid in four years. I omit the great number of Comandaries of the orders of Monteza, Calatr●ua, Alcantara, and S. james, with the which (if he had no other means) he may (as great m●●●●●) recompense and enrich his servants and officers, or whomsoever he please, as other kings do. But he consumes all this in the entertainment of his Court, in pensions of Vice roys, and wages of Precedents and Councillors, entertainments of lieutenants, governors, captains, and ambassadors, pensions of Cardinals, presents, wages for galleys, ●po● and horse, which keep his forts and frontiers; as also, in the entertainment of Bishops and Priests which he maintains at the Indies, and in ships that go and come from thence; so as some years his whole revenue is not sufficient to defray his charges. The which doth plainly appear, in that the king of Spain is made debtor of many millions to the bank of Genoa, whereof the Genuois keep an account (yet likely never to be paid) and he is also in many merchant's books in all the good ports of Europe. All his recourse hath been unto the Indian fleet, the which is no sooner arrived, but it is carried away by the creditors, and if it miscarry by means of any tempest, or be surprised by the enemy (as the English and Hollanders have had a good share) then are they all in despair. And that which hath much exhausted the king of Spain's coffers, is the war of the Low countries, where he hath wasted an infinite treasure, and reaped little profit; and if he recover himself any thing, and fill his coffers, it will be by means of the truce and ●●●●on of arms which hath been concluded there. Yet the other expenses which he must of necessity undergo in so many several places, will be the cause that he shall never have much remaining, but shall be still forced to borrow.   

¶ Forces of the king of Spain.  
SOme hold that this Monarchy cannot long subsist, by reason that his countries lie so dispersed, and that he must be at an infinite charge to sand both ships and men into all those places, and also that they which are borne in those remote countries, may in the end enter into consideration of the small number of Spaniards, take courage and expel them; or else some Spanish governor seeing himself far from the king, may win the people's hearts of the country, aspire to a sovereign command, and revolt from his prince, having no great fear to be punished for his presumption and rebellion. Others answer, that no Spaniard dare attempt this revolt, for that he must be assured, that if he once fall from his obedience to his Prince, they of the country (who hate nothing more than Spaniards) would soon be rid of him, when he should want the assistance of Spain: so as this rebellion cannot yet happen, until that the Spaniards be multiplied in greater numbers. As for the rebellion of the people borne in the country, it is not much to be feared, for that the Spaniard holds them in continual subjection, and keeps good guard of their actions to prevent all surprises. And as for the far distance and separation of the counntries, this opposition is of no great consideration; for that among other reasons, the greatest signiories and estates are fittest to maintain themselves against the exterior causes of their ruin, and the meaner against the interior. In a Monarchy thus divided we see greatness and mediocrity united together. We see greatness in the whole body, 
〈…〉  consisting of disunited members, and mediocrity in the greatest part of the members, for that some of them (as Spain, Perou and Mexico) are very great of themselves. Whereby this Monarchy hath all the benefits which greatness and mediocrity may procure, that is to say, a great power against a foreign enemy, and a great assurance against domestic corruption and treachery. We must add hereunto that all the members of this Monarchy may be united by her forces at sea. For as Augustus with an army which he entertained at Rovenna, and another which he held at Messina, did assure all the Roman Empire: so the king of Spain entertaining two armies, one in the Mediterranean sea, and another in the Ocean, would hold all the members of his Monarchy, and all the estates which he enjoys in Europe, and at the Indies, well united together, for that a good ●●●ber of galleons and ships of war which he should keep in those seas, would not only assure the coasts of Spain and America, and the fleets which went and came, but would also keep the ships of England and of the Netherlanders from scouring the seas at their pleasures. But as for the army of the Mediterranean sea, it shall still unite all his estates in that manner, as all their forces shallbe together, as we may observe in the Portugals who with their sea forces maintain the estates which they hold in Persia, Cambaia, Decan, and the rest of the Indies, and have gloriously maintained them above 90 years. Some men of great judgement and experience have opposed against the reasons which have been made upon this subject (the concurrence of the Turk) saying, That if the king of Spain giving over his infinite charge in fortifications, will employ the money which he shall spare to entertain the body of an army of 150 or more galleys, as he may easily do, he will 'cause the Turk (who is now content with an army of 130 galleys, or thereabouts) to keep 200 at sea, to the end he may therein have always an advantage over the king of Spain: so as this king shall run into a great charge and reap no profit. But there is great subtlety herein, and in matters which consist of practice, cunning doth never succeed well. For it is not sufficient to say that the Turk would seek to be stronger at sea than the king of Spain, but we must see by what means he shall be able to raise so great a power; for that he hath neither more men fit for sea actions, nor greater commodity to have shipping than the king of Spain. For all the coast of Asricke, except Algiers and Tripoli, is not able to make and maintain two galleys. I say the like of the Euxine sea, where there is not any place of importance but Caffa and Trebisond: and we may say the like in a manner of all the coast of Asia; for that it is not enough to have great countries lying upon the sea, but also it is necessary to have men that take delight to go to sea, that can endure the toils and discommodities thereof, and have store of wood and hemp for cordage, & men that are not amazed at the blustering of winds, nor the horror of tempests, but dare hazard their lives in the midst of dangers, and defy death in the most dangerous passages. Half the Turks empire hath no sea men, which may equal the Cathalans, Biscayns, Portugals, and Genevois, whom I name particularly for the service which the king of Spain receives in his sea armies, or that are able to make head against them. Finally, this king hath two advantages over the Turk; the one is, that although he commands over more men, yet he cannot much trust them, when they are to fight against men of the same religion: the other is, that the king of Spain's dominions towards the sea, are better united than the Turks, so as he may with more ease draw an army together. Besides it hath been always seen that the armies of the West have been victors over them of the East, and they of the North of them of the South; the Romans of the Carthaginians, and the Grecians of them of Asia. So Augustus did put to rout the army of Egypt, with that of Italy; and in our time the Christians have defeated the Turks, who confess that our galleys are better than theirs, & they fear to encounter them: and for proof, whensoever the emperor Charles the fift meant to arm, he drew together such a power, as the Turk durst not make head against him; he carried to the enterprise of Algiers 500 sail, & above 600 to that of Tunes. And Andrew Doria carried such forces into Greece, as he took Patras & Corone without any difficulty. I will speak nothing of the sea forces which this king hath always entertained in the Germane seas, for the recovery of the Low-countrieses.  
If he had under his subjection the countries of Holland and Zealand, he might boldly say that he did exceed all other princes in power at sea. I forbear to speak of the great concourse of shipping to Sevill, where all the fleets of Perou & Nova-hispania arrive, and whereas they do continually employ a great number of soldier and mariners. I will also pass over with silence the valour of the Biscains at sea, whereas they prove both excellent mariners and soldiers; so as they go with as great resolution against an armed enemy, as against the furious waves of the sea. And for proof of the king of Spain's power by sea, you may observe the great preparation which he made in the year 1588. for the invading of England and the estates of the united provinces. He had in this sea army a hundred and fifty sail of all sorts, whereof there were sixty six great galleons, four galleasses of Naples, and four galleys, the rest were smaller ships. This fleet was manned with eight or nine thousand sailors, twenty thousand soldiers for land service, besides commanders and voluntaries, they had also eight hundred gunner's, and four hundred pioners, with two thousand six hundred and fifty pieces of ordnance. I forbear to make any particular relation of their provisions at sea, it being not my design to writ a History but a description of Countries: only I will say that some of their chief commanders confessed, that they were victualled for six months, that they were 32000 men strong, and that the charge cost the king 30000 ducats a day.  
Now that we have spoken of his sea forces, let us come to those at land, which consist of foot and horse. As for footmen the best of all the estates belonging to the king out of Spain, are the Walloons, I say of those that are out of Spain, for that the Spanish footman is well known to be as good as any prince can have. For the Spaniards by means of their footmen, did free their country from the subjection of the Moors, and had no sooner finished that enterprise, but they invaded Africa, and took divers places of importance, and afterwards the Portugals annoyed Mauritania, & conquered the coast of Guinee, Aethiopia, Cafraria, the Indies, Malaca, & the Islands of Moluques, and the Castillians passing the Atlantike Ocean, made themselves masters of a new world, where there are many realms and provinces, and many people differing in language, apparel, and manner of living. Their valour consists in conduct and policy, and there is not any nation that can better judge of the advantage and disadvantage in war, diligence hath also a great share in it, for that they never forget any thing that may serve them to purpose. We may also commend them for their union, for that the Spaniards were never seen to quarrel among themselves being out of their country; and finally, they are wondered patient, and do easily endure hunger, thirst, heat, cold, and all kinds of toils and discommodities, so as they are able in a manner to tyre all other nations: they have obtained great victories with these parties, & if they have been vanquished, they have also been of●en victors; yet fortune was adverse unto them in the enterprise of Algiers, and in that of England, and the army of 50000 men which the emperor Charles the fift brought into Provence, had such ill success, as those troops which remained were forced to retire miserably. As for the Italian footmen of the king of Spain's dominions, they are able to do their prince good service. In regard of horsemen, the Spaniard hath the best races for horses in Europe, that is, the gennets of Spain, the coursers of Naples, and the horses of Bourgondie & Flanders. It seems that nature would arm these men with the mines of iron in Biscay, Guipuscoa, and Molina, with the tempers of Bilbao, Tolosette & Calatajub, by the means of the workmen of Milan, Naples & Boisleduc; & that she would also furnish them with victuals by the store houses of Apulia, Sicily, Sardinia, Artois, Castille, and Andaluzia, & also with the wines of Calabria, S. Martin Ayamont, and many other places. Moreover, the king of Spain, not to unpeople his country of Spain, where his subjects are employed in so many places, & in such divers enterprises, making it by his means to be less inhabited, may levy great numbers of horse & foot, as well Italians as Germains. But the money which h● disperseth in so many places, hinders him from making such great levies, & enterprises equal to his ambition, which were to command the whole world.  
The king of Spain doth commonly entertain in his estates great numbers of horse, for that he hath in Spain 3000 horse: in the duchy of Milan 400 men at arms and 1000 light horse: in the realm of Naples 1100 men at arms, which is the greatest strength that is in Italy; and in Sicily they should furnish him with 1500 horse. It is not a matter of small import, that the Feudataries are bound to serve personally at their own charge, in occasions of defence, considering the great number of Feudataries, and noblemen that carry titles in Spain, whereof you shall hereafter have a particular relation; the Archbishops, and bishops, are subject to the like charge as noblemen. In the realm of Naples there are 14 Princes, 25 Dukes, 57 Marquesses, 54 Earls, and 428 Barons. And this shall suffice without any farther search into other countries.  
As for forts there are not many in Spain, only upon the frontiers and upon the coasts towards the Sea, upon Languedocke side he hath Salfes which was made to be opposite to Laucatee, which belongs to France. Perpignan which is on this side in the country of Rossillon, is a good town, & hath one of the best castles in Spain: Barcelona is also well fortified. King Philip the second knowing the importance of the port of Carthagena hath caused it to be fortified, lest the Turks should surprise it, & lodge themselves there. There are many strong places in the realm of Granado, by reason of the abode which the Moors made there. The citadel of Pampelona is one of the strongest places of Europe, and Fontarabie is able to make a great defence. The city of Lisbonne in Portugal is one of the best of the country. There are three Storehouses for arms, which are able to arm 15000 footmen with corslets, and many horsemen with cuirasses. There are other Storehouses houses with 20 pieces of ordnance, among the which there is one very long, which carries a bullet of a hundred weight, and is made with great art. It was taken by the Portugals from the Moors in the town of Diu at the Indies. They have also the armour of a man and horse made at the Indies, covered with precious stones, the which is valued at 160000 crowns; there are divers Magasins under the Palace royal, which they call the Indian house, whereas they lay up their spices at the return of ships. At Belem, a league from the city down the river, there is a religious Monastery of the order of S. Jerome built by the king of Portugal, whereas all the kings and princes of the royal blood are interred. Before this Monastery there is a tower environed with water, having 30 pieces of ordnance, but yet of small service in time of war, being commanded by a little hill which would soon batter it down: but they make use of it in time of peace, against any shipping that should come in. In the mouth of the port or haven they built a fort, the which can hardly be good being so little.  
As for other princes or commonweal of any consideration for their forces, which confine upon the king of Spain, there is but the French king, the Turk, & the Venetians.  
The French king is now in league & at peace with the king of Spain, & there can be no subject fit to trouble the peace of these two kingdoms, but a pretension of certain lands which the French king might demand. But admit there were a breach, and that they were in bad terms, I think that if the French should enter by Languedocke or Gascoigne, they would at their first entrance give a great check unto Spain, which is but ill peopled. And it doth not avail to say that at the same instant, they would invade France by Picardy and Savoy; for that in regard of Picardy (besides the places of strength that might stay an army) the Archduke is bridled by the estates of the united provinces, with whom he hath nothing but a suspension of arms, and his forces are not so great, but a light army may make head against him, for that his best men should be bound to go and serve whereas necessity doth most require. As for Spain (by which an army levied in the Duchy of Milan and the realm of Naples might pass, in case the Duke of Savoy would give them passage) it cannot be of so great importance, but the governor of Dauphine alone might provide them work and stay them suddenly, whereof Monsieur de les Diguieres, hath made proof during the late wars, in the midst of their greatest fury.  
As for the Venetians (since that the estate of Milan was made subject to the Spaniards) matters have passed quietly betwixt them, & this commonweal is more careful of her defence, & of the fortification of her places, than of any designs to make new conquests: for that this State having her foundations laid upon peace, it were not fit for her to altar it by troubling her neighbours affairs. Moreover, the Spaniards have employed themselves in favour of the Venetians, in the most dangerous wars which Bajazet, Soliman and Selim the second made against them in Cephalonia, at Prevese & Lepanto, & yet they had and have yet upon their flanks, Algiers, Tunes & Africa, which are much nearer unto Spain, Sicily, Sardinia, the Islands of Baleares, and the realm of Naples, than Cypress, or the Islands of the jonike Seas. The other princes and commonweals of Italy are either his friends, or tied unto him, or else they are too weak to attempt any thing against Spain. As for the Swisses, which lie near unto the French country, they cannot come in any great numbers, and besides they should found good places, against which they are not accustomed to be obstinate. In regard of the Turk and others that may annoyed the Spaniard, we have formerly made mention of it, and will speak more in their places.   

The Government of Spain.  
THe king of Spain useth many titles with the which he comprehends the realms and estates belonging to his crown, styling himself as followeth: 
Title of the king of Spain  Philip by the grace of God king of Spain, of Castille, Leon, Arragon, Navarre, Jerusalem, Naples, Sicily, Maiorca, Minorca, Sardinia, and of the Islands of the Indies, and the firm Land, king of the Ocean Sea, Archduke of Austria, Duke of Bourgondie, Lothier, Brabant, Luxembourg, gelders and Milan, Earl of Hasbourg, of Flanders, Artois, Henault, Holland, Zealand, Namur, and Zurphen, marquess of the sacred Empire, Lord of Friesland, Salines, Machlin, Vtrecht, overissel, and Groninge, and great commander of Asia and Africa. Whereat king Francis the first jested very wittily, who having received a letter from Charles the fifth, with all these titles, he only styled himself Lord of Gentilly, which is a little village near unto Paris. And in truth it is a mere vanity to take upon him these titles, for that most of these realms which he names in Spain are no better than provinces in France; and moreover, many of these titles are built in the air upon no pretensions, and others are so full of vanity, and so voided of colour, as no man of judgement but would laugh at it. But let us come to that we have undertaken.  
The kings of Spain, as mighty princes, and borne amongst a nation which is much affected unto them, are wonderfully honoured of their subjects, who carry them the greater reverence, the less they come in sight. The king therefore hath all power in Spain, and doth dispose of all things at his pleasure, yet he hath Counsels, by the which he governs himself. The realm of Spain falls to the distaff, so as the daughters of the king of Spain may succeed to the crown, and it is after this manner that the house of Austria is come to reign in Spain, as we will show hereafter. The king hath the nomination of all Archbishops, Bishops, Priories, Commandaries, and orders of knighthood, that is to say of S. james, Alcantara, and Callatrava. He is absolute master of peace and war. He doth elect and choose all Precedents, Councillors, Viceroys, Lieutenants, Governors and Captains. But the king cannot confer any benefices or spiritual livings, but to natural borne Spaniards, or to such as have been naturallized by him. And the greatest part of Spain hath so maintained themselves in their privileges, as they will not easily suffer themselves to be oppressed with excessive charges. Wherefore the Emperor Maximilian said, that he was kings, and the king of Spain, king of men; for that he could not have from the Germans but what they pleased, and the Spaniards refused not to give unto their king more than they aught by their laws and statutes.  

The king of Spain's councils.  There are many Counsels in Spain by which the king governs his estate, that is to say, the Privy Council, the Council of Castille, the Council of Arragon, the Council of Italy, the Council of the Indies, the Council of Treasure, the Council of Orders, the Council of Inquisition, the Council of war, the Council of the chamber, the Council of discharges, the Council of Portugal, & the Council of Woods. The king refers to someone of these councils, all matters concerning the preservation, and increase of his estates, and having heard their opinions, he commands that to be put in execution which shallbe held best. Every town is governed by a gentleman which is borne there, to whom the King gives the name & authority of governor, appointing him Councillors chosen by their fellow citizens; & when as the governor hath ended the time of his government, they take information of his actions, which being seen by the king's Council of State, they make report unto him, to the end he may punish the governor, if they found he hath dealt lewdly and unjustly, and that he may be no more employed, if he hath been indiscreet and negligent: and contrariwise if it appears that he hath done justice, and been careful in his government, he doth advance him to some greater office. The king of Spain hath many Councillors, to whom he refers all businesses whereof they speak unto him, or give him any memorial in writing, and they are accustomed to do both: for any man may deliver him his mind briefly, but he doth also give him an instruction, which the king reads when he retires to his chamber, and according to the quality of the business he refers it to some one of his Counsels, 
Council of State.  whereof the chief is, The Council of State; whereas they treat of all that which belongs to the government of his realms, & which concern the authority and dignity of the crown, the king presides himself in person: there are none admitted to be of this Council but men of great dignity, and the number of them is few, they have commonly 2000 ducats a year pension, and there are two Secretaries, either of which hath yearly 262 ducats and two shillings.  

Council of Castille.  The Council of Castille, or the king's Council, where they consult of customs and provisions of the realm, and all suits of other courts and jurisdictions of the Crown of Castille come thither by appeal. The Precedent is most commonly a Nobleman, & sometimes a Prelate, or at lest a Clergy man, who hath 1604 ducats, and 2 s. for his yearly wages. There are 15 Councillors, with many other inferior officers, all which have fees according to their places. In matters of difficulty and importance they go and consult with the king every Friday; and there are three of these Councillors to whom the King gives the title of Councillors of his chamber, before whom all matters of grace are dispatched, but they make report unto the king of those that are of most importance. There is a Secretary of the chamber, and two other Secretaries which assist the said 3 councillors. This Council is commonly kept on Saturday. In the year 1560 the king of Spain made a decree, by the which there were sour Auditors added to the king's Council, to take knowledge of all causes which came by appeal to the said Council, from the two Chanceries of Vailladolid and Granado, after two sentences confirmed, & confirmation of 1500 doublons. To explain the which you must understand, 
A Doublon is worth 4 royals  that at Vaillado●d and Granado there are two Chanceries which take no knowledge of any suit upon the first instant, but in matters which concern pupils, orphans, widows, and miserable persons: but by appeal they judge of all matters belonging to the crown of Castille, after sentence given by the ordinary judge; where if it happen that the sentence given by the Chancery be conformable to the first, he that is condemned may appeal to the same Chancery, who commits the cause anew to some other Auditor (yet of the same Chancery) who ends the suit if it agreed with the other two sentences; neither is it lawful to appeal any more, unless the matter exceed 4000 ducats; and then he may appeal to the king's person, & he that appeals is bound to consign 1500 doublons every one being worth 14 royals. The king was wont to commit this to one of the Councillors of his royal Council, but for that they found themselves busied with other affairs, so as they never had any end, and suits were immortal, they appointed the foresaid number of 4 assistants to the king's Council, who applied themselves only to the hearing of these suits, and if it chance that the former sentences be confirmed by them, the 1500 doublons are divided as followeth: 500 go to the chamber royal, 500 are adjudged to the adverse party, & the other 500 which remain, belong unto the judges to whom he hath done wrong, appealing from their sentences.  
In the sovereign Council of Arragon they treat of the government of the realm of Arragon, Valencia and Cattalognia, and of the Islands of Maiorca, M●norca & Sardinia, 
Council of Arragon.  and they take knowledge of matters concerning grace and justice. It hath a Precedent or Vicechancellor, who hath 3000 ducats wages by the year. Five Regent's or Councillors, every one having 1000 ducats. Two Reporters with 300 ducats a piece. The Advocate Fiscal 1000 ducats. The Treasurer general 300 ducats yearly. His Lieutenant 600 ducats. Three Secretaries, to either of them 500 ducats a year, and so of the rest of the officers of this Council which are very many in number.  
In the Council of Italy they treat of matters concerning the government of the realms of Naples, 
Council of Italy.  Sicily, & the duchy of Milan, and of that which belongs to grace and justice. In this Council they appoint governors, and judges in cities, and give reward to soldiers that serve there; but they first acquaint the king therewith. There is a precedent of this Council who hath 2000 ducats wages: six regents or councillors, whereof three be Spaniards and three Italians, every one having 1000 ducats. The secretary of the said Council 2000 ducats by the year. The fiscal 1000 ducats: two reporters, to either 500 ducats. The great official and five deputies, to either 1000 ducats. To three potters 120 ducats a piece. In this Council the rights of the Seal belong unto the king.  
In the Council of the Indies, 
Council of the Indies.  they have a care of all matters which belong to the government of the Indies. They appoint Viceroys for Perou and Nova Hispania, and they dispose of all other offices and spiritual livings. They appoint visitors to go into those Provinces to examine the actions of officers, and to hear the people's grievances; and they displace or punish as they see cause, but with the king's privity and consent. In this Council there is a Precedent who is of great esteem, he hath 2673 ducats yearly wages; eight Councillors, every one 1336 ducats and nine rials; two Proctors fiscal with the same wages; two Reporters, to either 267 ducats and four rials; two Secretaries, to either of them the like wages; two deputies of Secretaries, to either 133 ducats, 
Four and thirty Maravedis make six pence.  9 rials, and 32 Maravedis. Two Ushers of the Council, having 166 ducats, to rials and a half a piece. To the register is given a pension of 267 ducats and 4 rials. To him of the Seal the like pension. To the Paymaster 534 ducats, 8 rials. To the receiver of fines and charges of justice, the like wages. To the Secretary who dispatcheth the schedules and provisions, and the same wages.  
There is a Viceroy in new Spain, and a Viceroy in Perou, who have twelve thousand ducats for their entertainment. There is a Chancery for new Spain at Mexico. A Chancery in Guatimala. A Chancery in the city of King. A Chancery in S. Francis at Quinto. A Chancery in the new kingdom of Granado. A Chancery in the Islands of Philippina. And a Chancery in the city of S. Dominico, in the Island of Hispaniola.  

Council of Hazienda.  The Council of Hazienda, or of the Treasure, deals with the king's revenues, they make leases for farms and assignations, and they keep an account of all that is to be paid or received in the provinces of Spain. This Council is not unlike to our Exchequer of England It hath a precedent who hath 6000 ducats a year; he that keeps the accounts 267 ducats, and 4 rials, four Councillors, one Treasurer, a Secretary, a Fiscal, and four Ushers, to every one the same wages.  

Council of Orders.  As for the Council of Orders, you must understand that in Spain there are three kinds of knights brought in by precedent kings. The first is the order of S. james, which is the chief, the others are that of Calatrava and Alcantara. These three orders have many towns and castles under them; and for that their jurisdiction is very great, they have appointed this Council, where there is a Precedent, four Councillors, who are Lawyers, two Secretaries, a fiscal, the king's Advocate, with divers other inferior officers. They judge of all controversies which happen betwixt any knights of the said orders, and of all suits which fall out in any places belonging to these orders. They punish the commanders and knights which observe not their orders: and they dispose of many benefices, spiritual livings, and offices which are in the Provinces of these orders, but all with the king's privity: And finally, they provide for all things that are necessary for these orders, whereof the king is great master; and when any dispatch is made for the order of S. james, the king after his ordinary titles, puts in his letters, And perpetual administrator of S. james etc.  

The Council of ●he Inquisition.  The Council of the Inquisition deals with matters of faith, and calls men in question for heresy, or for any thing that hath been said against the Church of Rome. They appoint all the Inquisitors, Provosts and Secretaries within the realm, who condemn not any offendor before they have sent him unto this Council to determine of him. This Council was first erected, for that in the conquest of the country which the Moors did sometimes hold in Spain, it was needful to contain those people, who had been newly baptised in their duties, and to have a care lest religion should be any ways infected: yet this Inquisition hath brought in many abuses, & committed horrible cruelties. The chief of this Council is the Inquisitor general which is the Archbishop of Toledo, who for that he should assist in person, hath 1604 ducats, and 4 rials for his yearly entertainment; he hath six Councillors or Inquisitors to assist him, every one having half as much wages as himself, with many other inferior officers. There are divers places of Inquisition within the realm, as at Toledo, Siville, Cordova, Leon, Granado, Mursia, Quenca, Logrona, Llerena, Gallicia, Vailladolid and others, and there are in the realm of Spain above 2000 flies or familiars, as they call them, who be they that accuse and apprehended Delinquents as they suggest, entry of which hath 80 ducats, and two rials of yearly see.  

Council of war.  The Council of war treats for that which belongs to the war, either for defence, or for invasion by sea or land; and in like manner, for fortification and necessary provision for all the frontiers of Spain. It provides for Generals and all Commanders, with the advice of his Majesty, who is Precedent of this Council: and they punish all commanders and officers that have not carried themselves well in their charges. All Councillors of State may enter into this Council, except the Secretary, for that there is a special Secretary appointed for this Council. The Councillors have no wages.  

Council de Cam●ra.  The Council which they call de Camera hath a precedent & 3 auditor's or councillors with some other officers. They give recompenses of offices and pardon such as are condemned to die, banished men are repealed, and galley sl●ues set at liberty; there they dispatch the provisions of such gifts as the king makes: and there they also dispose of bishoprics and spiritual livings, whereof the king hath the nomination.  
The council of discharges deals only for the payment of the old kings debts, 
Council of discharges.  and the execution of their last wills, and by this means, daily the debts of the Emperor Charles the fi●t are diminished: it hath a Precedent, three Auditors and a Secretary.  
The council of woods treats of all matters that belong unto his majesty's woods, 
Council of woodss.  and take knowledge of all spoils done unto them; they provide for guards and other necessary officers: it hath a Precedent, two Auditors, a Secretary and two Porter's.  
The council of the Croisado hath charge to divide the Croisado which is granted by the Pope to the king of Spain, 
Council of Crusado.  according to the Bishoprics, and to sand forth Commissioners for the levying of the money.  
There is a council of accounts where they treat of matters of justice concerning the treasure, 
Council of Accounts.  and do end suits; touching subsidies and taxes, and appoint Collectors for the same.  
There is a council for Portugal, 
Council of Portugal, Navarre and others.  Navarre, Galicia, Siville, Arragon, Valencia, and Catalognia, in every of the which there is a Regent, six Councillors and four Alcades or Provosts, who have the hearing and determining of all civil and criminal causes within the realm, without any appeal, touching●h: which, they consult weekly with the Viceroy or Governor, who resolves what they shall do.  
There be always in the kings court four judges, who take knowledge of all matters both civil and criminal which pass within five leagues round about the court, and throughout the whole realm also by commission. They have very great authority, especially in criminal causes, wherein they proceed with much rigour, neither is it lawful to appeal from their sentences. There are one and thirty Alguazilz or sergeant of the court, and many criminal Registers, who have their seat apart and also their prison.  
The king of Spain hath been accustomed to reward old soldiers which have done him good service during his wars, or that have been maimed; yea and this recompense goes unto their children if they die in his service: the which doth animate and encourage them that are in his service to do well; and contrary wise it makes men go faintly to the war when there is no hope of recompense or reward.  
There are in Spain many dignities, and charges which are hereditary, and there be many noblemen of mark and title, as they call them in Spain, as dukes, marquesses and ●arless; all which I have endeavoured to set down under the names of their houses and families, with an estimate of most of their revenues.   

The House of Velasco.  
THe Duke of Frias, Marquis of Berlanga, Lord of the house of the seven infants of Lara, and Constable of Castille, justice, Mayor, and High Chamberlain, he is head of the Velascos. His house is in Burgos, and his estate in Castille the old, in the mountains of Biscay and the country of Soria. He is esteemed to have seventy thousand ducats yearly revenue.  
The Earl of Nieva of the same house: he hath his palace at Nieva, and his estate in the province of Rioja, his rent is 10000 ducats.  
The Earl of Ciruela is of the same house of Velasco, and hath 14000 ducats yearly ●ent.  
The house of Velasco is one of the noblest of Spain, from whence are issued the Constables of Castille, and many other noblemen and valiant captains; his extraction is from the best parts of the mountains of Biscay, where he makes his abode. He is esteemed above all the nobility.   

Mendoca, their tilt, house and revenues.  
THe Duke of Infantasgo, Marquis of Cenete and Santillana, Earl of Saldana, and lord of the royalty of Mansanares, he is head of the Mendoces, his house is at Guadalajara, and his estate in Castille the old, in the realm of Toledo, and in the province of Alava: his revenues are one hundred thousand ducats.  
The Duke of Francavilla Prince of Melito is of this house, he hath his house in Francavilla, and his estate in the realm of Toledo and Naples: he hath in rent forty thousand ducats.  
The Marquis of Mondejar Earl of Tendilla: he hath his house at Mondejar, and his estate in the province of Alcaria, he hath in rents forty thousand ducats.  
The Marquis of Montesclaros hath his house at Guadalajara, and his estate in the province of Alcaria: he hath ten thousand ducats a year.  
The Marquis of Canete of the house of Mendoces, he hath his house at Cuenca, and his estate in the dependences thereof: his yearly rents are ten thousand ducats.  
The Earl of Combrade of the same family: he hath his house at Guadalajara, and his estate in Alcaria: his rents are ten thousand ducats.  
The Earl of Castro of the same house: he hath 80000 ducats rend.  
The Earl of Montagudo, he keeps his house at Almançan, and his estate in the country of Arragon, and hath sixteen thousand ducats rend.  
The Earl of Orgas a great Nobleman, and as some hold the chief of this family of Mendoces: he holds his house at S. Olalla, and his estate in the realm of Toledo: he hath ten thousand ducats rend.  
This family of the Mendoces is very noble and of the principal of Spain: they draw their extraction from a great parsonage called Don Curio lord of Biscay.   

Henriques, with the titles of the Noblemen.  
THe Duke of Medina del Rio Secco, Marquis of Modica, Earl of Melgar and Vicont of Esterlin, Admiral of Castille, is head of the Henriques: he hath his house at Vailladolid, and his estate in the province of Campos in Catalognia, and in Sicily: he hath in rent one hundred thousand ducats.  
The Duke of Alcala de los Gazules, Marquis of Tarifa, and Earl of Ornos and Villamartin, chief Precedent in Andaluzia: he hath house in Civille, and his estate in Andaluzia: he hath 80000 ducats rend.  
The Marquis of Villanova del Rio is of the house of the Henriques: he hath his house at Sevill, and his estate in Estremadura: and hath twenty two thousand ducats in yearly rents.  
The Marquis of Alcanizes' is also of this house of Henriques, and hath twelve thousand ducats rend.  
The Earl of Alva de Lista, he hath his house at Zamora, and his estate in Castille the old and Estremadura: he is a Councillor of state, and chief Huntsman to the king, and one of his chamber: he hath thirty thousand ducats rend.  
The Earl of Cuba, his county is in Portugal, and his estate in the realm of Castille.  
The Earl of Fuentes is of this house, he makes his abode at Salamanca, and his estate is in Castille the old: he hath in rent ten thousand ducats:  
It is one of the most renowned families of Castille, whose descendants are issued from Don Henriques master of S. james, base brother to the king Don Pedro the cruel, and from an Infant of France. This Don Henriques slew Don Pedro the cruel his brother, and made himself king.   

La Cerda, a Royal family, and their titles  
THe Duke of Medina Celi, Marquis of Cogollado, Earl of Port S. Maria, chief of the family of the Cerdas: his house is at Medina Celi, and his estate in the realm of Toledo and Andaluzia: he hath 40000 ducats in yearly rent.  
The Earl of Geluas is of this family: he hath 60000 ducats in rent.  
This family of La Cerda takes her extraction from the two royal houses of Castille and France, as you may see in the genealogy of the king of Spain, and in the history of S. Lewis king of France.   

Manriques de Lara, and their titles.  
THe duke of Najera, Earl of Valencia and Treminio, head of the fam●lie of Manriques: he hath his house at Najera, and his estate in the province of Roja: he hath in rents forty thousand ducats.  
The Marquis of Aquilar, Earl of Castaneda hath his house at Carrion, and his estate in the realm of Leon, and in the province of Campos: his rents are forty thousand ducats.  
The Earl of Paredes, of the same family: his house is at Paredes, and his estate in the province of Campos: he hath twelve thousand ducats yearly rent.  
The Earl of ●forno, his house is in Vailledolid, and his estate in old Castille: his rents are twelve thousand ducats by year.  
Some hold that the valiant and ancient Earl Fernand Gonsalez of Castille was of this line, and that from him all these are descended.   

Cordova, and their titles.  
THe Duke of Sesa and Terranova, Earl of Cabra and Baiena, is head of the Cordovas' he hath his house at Cordova and Granado, and his estate in the realm of Naples and Cordova: he hath in rent seventy thousand ducats.  
This family is issued from the lords of Andaluzia, called Fernand Neunez and Aluar Perez: from them are descended many gallant knights, and among others a great captain called Gonsalo Fernandes of Cordova.  
The Earl of Alcaudette is also of the Cordou●ss: his house is in Alcaudette and his estate in the realm of Cordova.   

Toledo, and their titles.  
THe Duke of Alva and Guesca, Marquis of Coria, Earl of Saluetierra, Vicont of Saldices, and Lord of Valde Corneja, is heaed of the house of Toledo: his palace is in Alva, and his estate in Castille the old, in Portugal, and in the realm of Granado: he hath in rent eighty thousand ducats.  
The Duke of Veraguas, Admiral of the Indies: his house is in the city of Saragossa, and his estate in the realm of Arragon.  
The Marquis of Ville-Franch: he hath his house at Ville-Franch, and his estate in the realm of Leon and Naples: and his yearly rents are twenty five thousand ducats.  
The Earl of Navarre, of the family of the Toledoes: he hath his estate in the right of his wife being of the blood of Navarre, and of the Beaumont's: he hath his house at Pampelona, and his estate in the realm of Navarre: and his rents are twenty thousand ducats.  
The Earl of Altamira is of this house of Toledo: his estate is in Galicia, and hath eight thousand ducats rend.  
The Marquis of Cortes: he hath his house in Cortes, and his estate in the realm of Navarre.  
The Earl of Oripesa is of the house of Toledo and Pachecos: his house is at Tallavera, and his estate in the realm of Toledo, and he hath in rent fifteen thousand ducats.  
They of this family (as some think) are descended from a knight called Don Stephen Illan brother to an Emperor of Greece, who came into Castille to secure the king against the Moors, and stayed there.   

Suniga or Estuniga, and their titles.  
THe Duke of Bejar, Marquis of Gibraleon, Earl of Benalcaçar is the chief of the Sunigas, and of the family of Soto Maior: he hath his house at Siville and at Bejar, and his estate in the realm of Siville and Castille the old, he hath eighty thousand ducats rend.  
The Marquis of Ayamont of the family of Sunigas, and Soto Mayor: his residence is at Siville, and hath twenty five thousand duckats*  
The Marquis of Ville Manrique: he hath fiftteene thousand ducats of rent.  
The Marquis of Auilasfuentes, of the house of the Sunigas: he holds his estate and house in Castille.  
The Earl of Miranda, Marquis of Baneza, he is of this family and head of the Auillanadas: his house is at Peneranda, and his estate in Castille the old, he hath thirty five thousand ducats rend.  
This family is issued from a daughter of Navarre. In Castille the Duke of Bajar is of great command.   

Borias, and their titles.  
THe Duke of Gandia, Marquis of Loyba chief of the house of Borias: his house and estate are in the realm of Valencia, and hath twenty thousand ducats rend.  
The Marquis of Tabara, Lord of Montesa of this house of Borias: his estate is in Castille the old, and his house in Valeidolid, and hath fifteen thousand ducats rend.  
This family comes out of Valencia, from whence are descended noble men of great account.   

Guzman's, and their titles.  
THe Duke of Medina Sidonia, Marquis of S. Lucar of Barrameda, Earl of Niebla, chief of the Guzman's: he hath his house in Siville and S. Lucre's, and his estate in that country: his revenues are one hundred thirty and five thousand ducats yearly rent.  
The Marquis of Ardeles', Earl of Tobar, of the family of the Guzman's: he hath his house at Malaga, and his estate in Andaluzia, and hath fifteen thousand ducats rend.  
The Marquis of Algave de Guzman's: he hath his house at Siville, and his estate in Andaluzia: and hath fifteen thousand ducats rend.  
This family is very noble and ancient in Castille, for that it is issued from a famous king of the Goths called Gundamira from whence are descended many generous knights.  
The Earl of Olivares is also of this house.   

Cardenas, and their titles.  
The Duke of Maqueda, Marquis of Elch is head of the Cardenas: he hath his house in Toledo, and his estate in the same realm: his revenues yearly are fifty thousand ducats.  
The Marquis of Baretta hath his house at Llerena and his estate in Estremadura: he hath fifteen thousand ducats rend.  
The Earl of Puebla, hath his house in Llerena, and his estate in Estremadura.  
This family is of great esteem in Catalognia, and they say it comes from the noble house of Anjou in France.   

Figueroas, and their titles.  
THe Duke of Feria, Marquis of Cafra, is chief of the family of the Figueroas: he hath his house at Cafra, and his estate in Estremadura, and hath forty thousand ducats rend.  
The Marquis of Pliego, lord of the house of Aguilar, of the family of Figueroas: he hath his house at Cordova, and his estate in the country of Cordova: he hath sixty thousand ducats rend. This family lives in the country of Galicia, and is the chief of that Province.   

Cueva, and their titles.  
THe Duke of Albuquerque, Marquis of Biedma and Cuellar, Earl of Ledesma, is chief of the Cuevas: he hath his house at Cuellar, and his estate in Estremadura and Castille: his revenues are forty six thousand ducats.  
The Marquis of Ladrada is of this house he hath his estate in the realm of Toledo, and his house at Ladrada: he hath eight thousand ducats rend. This family is very noble and is descended from Arragon, and yet some will say that it comes from Aguilar de Campos.   

Pachecos, and their titles.  
THe Duke of Escalona, Marquis of Moya, Earl of Estevan, is head of the Pachecos: he hath his house at Toledo, and his estate in the realm of Murcia and Mancha: his revenues are one hundred thousand ducats. They of this house are descended from Portugal.   

Girones, and their titles.  
THe Duke of Ossu●a, Marquis of Pegnafiel, Earl of Vrena, is head of the Girones: he hath his house at Pegnafiel, and his estate in the countries of Siville and Castille: he hath one hundred thousand ducats in yearly revenues: they of this family are descended from a famous knight, who fight in battle against the Moors adventured his own life to save his kings; in remembrance of which generous act, and to the end it might be known to all men, the king cut off the skirts of his arms.   

Ponce de Leon, and their titles.  
THe Duke of Arcos, Marquis of Tara Earl of Marchena, is chief of the Po●ceses de Leon: he hath his house at Siville, and his estate in Andaluzia: he hath forty thousand ducats rend.  
The Earl of Baileu is of this family: he hath his house at Baileu, and his estate in the realm of jaen: his revenues are thirty six thousand ducats.  
The house of Ponce de Leon is noble and very ancient in Spain, from whence is descended a very famous knight called Don Ponce de Minerva.   

The royal House of Arragon.  
THe Duke of Villa Hermosa, Earl of Ribagorça, is chief of the house of Arragon: he hath his house at Saragosse, and his estate in Arragon: he hath in rent twenty thousand ducats. It is one of the noblest families in Spain, descended from the king of Arragon.  
The Duke of Sogorue and Gordova, Marquis of Comares, Lord of Lucena, of the blood royal of Arragon and of La Cerda: he hath his house in the city of Valencia, the duchy of Sogorue in the realm of Valencia, and that of Cordova in Catalognia: his greatest estate is in the realm of Cordova.  
The Earl of Sastago and Pina is also of this family: he hath his house at Saragosse, and his estate in the realm of Arragon.   

Siluas, and their titles.  
THe Duke of Pastrana, Prince of Eboli, is head of the Siluas: he keeps his house at Madrid, and his estate in Alcaria, his revenues are sixty thousand ducats.  
The Marquis of Montemajor is also of this house: he hath sixty thousand ducats yearely●●ent.  
The Earl of Ci●uentes; some say he is the head of this family of Siluas, he hath his house at Toledo, and his estate in Alcaria: he hath twenty thousand ducats rend. This family is issued out of Portugal, from whence some great and famous captains passed into Castille in the time of king john the first, from whom these noblemen are descended.   

Roias' and Sandovall, their titles.  
THe Duke of Lerma and Cea, Marquis of Denia and Villamisar, Earl of Ampudia, is head of the house of Roias': he hath his house at Denia, and his estate in Castille the old, his revenues are forty five thousand ducats. But his credit and power is so great with king Philip the third that now reigns, as he doth in a manner dispose absolutely of all things.  
The Marquis of Posa is of this house, he hath his house at Posa, and his estate in the province of Bureva, and hath twenty thousand ducats rend.  
The Marquis of Altamira of the same family, he hath fifteen thousand ducats rend. They of this family are very noble and famous in Castille, and their ordinary abode is at Bureva near to Berbiesca.   

Cardonas.  
THe Duke of Soma, Earl of Panamos, Admiral of Naples, is of the family of the Cardonas, he hath his house at Belpuche, and his estate in the realm of Naples.  

Osorios●  The Marquis of Astorga, Earl of Transtamara and S. Martha, lord of the house of Villalobos, is head of the Osorios: his hovose is in Astorga, and his estate in the realm of Leon: he hath fifty thousand ducats rend.  
The Earl of Osorio is of this family and of the Man●iqueses: he hath his house at Vailladolid, and his estate is in Castille the old: he hath fourteen thousand ducats rend. This ancient and noble family of the Osorios comes out of the realm of Leon.  

Castros.  The Marquis of Sarria, Earl of Lemos and Andrada of Castro and, Villalua, lord of Vlloa, he is head of the family of the Castros: he keeps his house at Montfort de Lemos, and in Sarria, and his estate is in the realm of Galicia: he hath in rent sixty thousand ducats. This house is so noble and ancient, as they hold it to be descended from a famous captain called Crastinius, who was the first at the battle of Pharsalia that did charge Pompey.  
Flavin Caluir was also of this family, he was one of the ancient judges of Castille before they were governed by Earls or Kings.  

Pimentels.  The Earl of Bennevent, head of the Pimentels, he hath his house at Vailladolid, and his estate in the province of Campos: he hath twelve thousand ducats rend.  
The Marquis of Viana of the same family, he hath his house in Vailladolid, and his estate in Galicia. This family of the Pimentels (according to the opinion of many) is issued from the realms of Portugal, Galicia and Castille, and it is of great esteem in Spain.  

Haro●  The Marquis of Carpio, Earl of Adamus, of the family of the Haros: he hath in rents four and twenty thousand ducats. This house is descended from Don Curio Lord of Biscay.  
The Marquis of Las Navas, head of the family of the Auilaes'. 
Auilla.  He hath his house in Auila, and his estate in that territory. He hath thirty five thousa●d ducats revenues. This house is descended from the noble Earl D. Blaise, who in the time of king Alphonso S. of Castille, made himself famous in the wars against the Moors, where he was general of an army.  
The Marquis of Valle son to that Fernando Cortes, who conquered new Spain, 
Cortes.  he hath his house in Siville and at Mexico, and his estate in new Spain, where he hath a hundred and fifty thousand ducats revenues. This house comes out of Arragon, from which many famous knights in Spain are descended.  
The Marquis of Falses is chief of the Peraltas, 
Peraltas.  he hath his house at Marcilla in Navarre, and his estate in the Realm of Navarre, he hath in rents six thousand ducats. This house is very noble and ancient, as being descended from the kings of Navarre.  
The Marquis of Veles and of Mula, Adelantado of Murcia, is the head of the Faiardos', 
Fajardo●  he hath his house in Murcia, and hath fifty thousand ducats rend. The Governors of the city and Realm of Murcia have been always of this house. The beginning of this family comes from Gallicia at S. Marta of Hortiguera. There was a valiant young man of this house, who to get honour went into the Realm of Murcia, where he won many victories against the Moors in service of the K. of Castille. For these exploits, among others, he had the title of Viceroy of Murcia given him, which hath continued in this house.  
The Marquis of Villenova of Barca rota, chief of the family of Puerto Carreros, he hath his house at Asa, & his estate in the Realm of Cordova, his revenues are eighteen thousand ducats.  
The Earl of Palina is of this house, his estate is in the Realm of Cordova.  
The Marquis of Alcala, of johannes de Horta is descended of the Carreroes, 
Puerto Carreros.  he hath his house in Siville, and his estate in the same Realm, & hath sixteen thousand ducats rend.  
The Earl of Medellin is of the same family, his house is in Medellin, and his estate in Estremadura. This noble house comes out of Portugal, from whence certain knights of that name passed in Castille, and served king D. Alphonso the great with such valour, as they received many recompenses.  
The Marquis of S. Cruz is head of the family of the Basans, he hath his house at Viso, 
Basan.  and his estate in the Realm of Toledo, he hath twenty five thousand ducats rend. It is one of the noblest families in the Realm of Navarre.  
The Marquis of Aunon, chief of the family of the Herreras, 
Herrera.  he hath his house at Madrid, and his estate in the province of Alcaria, he hath thirty thousand ducats revenues. Their ordinary residence is in Castille▪ and it is held to be very noble and ancient.  
The Earl of Buendia, Lord of Duenas is of the house of Acugna, 
Acugna.  his dwelling is at Duenas, and his estate in the province of Campos. This is a very honourable house in Spain, and comes out of Portugal.  
The Earl of Barajas, of the family of the Capatas, he hath his house at Madrid, 
Capata.  and his estate in the Realm of Toledo, he hath twelve thousand ducats in rent. This family (if we may believe the history) is descended from Abarca king of Arragon, from whence are issued many valiant knights in Castille.  
The Earl of Fuentes in of the house of the Heredias, 
Herredia.  he hath his estate in Arragon which yields him eight thousand ducats rend. This Earl was sent into lander, where, after the death of the Duke of Parma, he governed the country, and did many memorable exploits. Afterwards he was made governor of Milan where he died: He had many other rents besides them of his Earldom.  
The Earl of Belchite comes from this house, he hath his estate in Valencia and Arragon. This family of the Heredias is descended from the Goths.  
The ●arle of Salinas and Ribadeo is of the family of the Sarmientoes, 
Sarmie●ta.  he hath his house at Bourgos and his estate in Biscay. His yearly revenues are twenty thousand ducats: this house is very noble and of great reputation in Spain.  
The Earl of Onante is head of the Guevares, he hath his house at Onante, 
Guevara.  & his estate in Guypu●coa, with six thousand ducats rend. This family is issued from Arragon and biscay. It was one of the thirteen houses which made election of a king of Navarre.  

Ayala.  The Earl of Fuensalida is head of the Ayalas, his house is in Toledo, and his estate in the same Realm.  
The Earl of Gomera which is in the Island of the great Canary, he hath fourteen thousand ducats rend.  
The Earl of Saluatierra is also of the Ayalas, he holds his estate in Castille the old. This noble family is issued from the ancient kings of Arragon, from which many great personages are descended.  

Quignones.  The Earl of Luna is head of the Quignones and Villafanes, his house and estate are in the Realm of Leon; he hath twenty thousand ducats rend. It is an ancient and noble family in the Asturies which is called de los Vigiles.  

Azevedo.  The Earl of Montierre is head of the Azevedoes, he hath his house at Salamanca, and his estate in Gallicia. His yearly revenues are forty six thousand ducats.  

Luna.  The Earl of Morata is head of the family of the Luna's, his house is at Saragosse, and his estate in the Realm of Arragon. He hath seven thousand ducats revenues. This family is of the Realm of Arragon, from whence many famous personages are descended, namely D. Alvaro de Luna, who in the time of king john the second was great Master of Saint james, and Constable of Castille, but fortune was as averse unto him in the end, as it had been favourable in the beginning.  

Mexia.  The Marquis of Guardia Earl of Saint Euphemia head of the Mexias. He hath his house in Salamanca and his estate in the country of jaen. He hath forty thousand ducats in rent. His family comes out of Gallicia.  

Vloa.  The Marquis of La Mota is of the family of Vloas in Galicia, near unto a river called Vloa. He hath sixteen thousand ducats in revenues. There are many good knights come out of this house.  

Arellianos.  The Earl of Aguilar, Lord of Los Cameros is head of the Arellianos, he holds his estate in the Province of Rioja, & hath 15000 ducats in rent. His abode is in Navarre.  

Benavides.  The Marquis of Fiomesta, of the family of the Benavides and Henriques. He hath his house at Fiomesta, & his estate in the Province of Campos. He comes out of Galicia.  

Auellenada.  The Marquis of Benesa is of the house of the Auellenadas.  
The Earl of Ribadavia is of the same family. He hath his house at Vailladolid, and his estate in Gallicia. His revenues are six thousand ducats by the year. Their ordinary abode is in Castille the old.  

Carrillo.  The Marquis of Caracena is of the family of the Carrilloes and Tolledoes.  
The Earl of Pliego, of the house of the Carrilloes and Mendosa. He hath this house at Guadalajara, and his estate in the mountains of Cuenca. He hath in rents eight thousand ducats. they say that the extraction of this family comes from Bourgos, & is much esteemed in Spain, for that many good knights and prelates of great esteem are descended from it, and namely an Archbishop of Toledo.  

Sayavedras.  The Earl of Castellar is head of the family of the Sayavedras. He hath his house at Siville, and his estate in the same Realm, he hath twelve thousand ducats in rent. This line comes out of Gallicia, from which are issued many worthy knights. In old time they did live in certain caves which they called of Vivanco, from whence they came forth to kill dragons and other furious beasts.  

Portugal.  The Marquis of Frichilla and of Malagon, brother to the Duke of Bargançe: he hath his estate in Castille, and is of the house of Portugal. He lives in the city of Ebora in the same Realm.  
The Earl of Gelues is of the house of Portugal. He hath his house in Siville, and his estate in the same Realm.  

Cobas.  The Marquis of Cameraca and Saviota, and Earl of Riscla: he was Adelantado of Casorla. He is of the house of Cobas and Mendosa.  

Centuriones.  The Marquis of Stepa of the family of the Centurions at Genova. He hath his estate and house in the country of Siville.  

Padilla.  The Earl of S. Gadea is head of the family of the Padillas: he is a gentleman of the king's chamber, & Adcelentado mayor of Castille: he hath his house and estate in Castille 

The Earl of Citona of the house of Moncada and Heredia. 
Moncada,   
The Earl of Ayllon of the house of Leon and Cordova. 
Leon.   
The Earl of Chinchon is head of the house of the Bovadillas: 
Bovadilla.  he hath his house in Madrill, and his estate in the realm of Toledo.  
The Earl of jerra of the family of the Carios. 
Cairo.   
The Earl of Oliva of the house of the Gentillas'. 
Gentilla.   
The Earl of Puno in Rostro, is head of the Sarrias: he hath his house at Madrid, 
Sarria.  and his estate in the realm of Toledo.  
The Earl of Puebla of Montaluan, is of the family of the Tells, Girones and Pachecos: 
Tells.  he holds his estate in Estremadura.  
The Earl of Cosentania, of the house of Corella: 
Corella.  his estate and house are in the realm of Valencia.  
The Earl of Delda of the family of the Colomas: 
Colomas.  his estate and house are in the realm of Valencia.  
The Earl of Villermedina, he is of the family of the Taxis. 
Taxis.     
There are many marquesses and Earlss whose houses and families I do not found specified in any authors, and therefore I have only set down their names as followeth.  

The Marquis of Molina.  
The Marquis of Fuentes.  
The Marquis of Villada, chief  
Steward to the king.  
The Earl of Gajan.  
The Earl of Costania in Valencia.  
The Earl of Coruino.  
The Earl of Mayalde.  
The Earl of Mirabel.  
The Earl of Galua.  
The Earl of Villaflor.  
The Marquis of Laguna, chief  
Steward to the queen.  
The Marquis of Sarral●o.  
The Marquis of Cuellar.  
The Earl of Casarubios.  
The Earl of Los Arcos.  
The Earl of Salasar.  
The Earl of Villalonso.  
The Earl of Risco.  
The Earl of Malpica.  
The Earl of Torrejon.   
These be the Dukes, marquesses and Earls of Spain, which be in number twenty four Dukes, forty five marquesses and sixty eight Earls. There are moreover four Viconts, he of Peralta, of Ebuli, of Bltamira, and of Celba.  
There are six Priors of S. john in Spain.  

The Prior of S. john of Castille, who hath fifty thousand ducats in yearly rent.  
The Prior of S. john of Leon hath thirty thousand ducats.  
The Prior of S. john of Arragon hath four thousand ducats rend.  
The Prior of S. john of Cattalognia hath twelve thousand ducats rend.  
The Prior of S. john of Valencia six thousand ducats rend.  
The Prior of S. john of Navarre four thousand ducats rend.   
There are (as I have said) three orders of knights in Spain, that of S. james, Calatrava and Alcantara, whereof the king is great master and perpetual administrator, by the Pope's bull. These masterships are sometimes rent out unto farmers, who pay yearly to the king 13000 ducats: besides that they are bound to give to every knight of the said order (who hath no Commandarie, 
Abou● nine pound sterling  and is professed) twelve thousand Maraviedes yearly for his bread and water as they term it.  
There are many and great Commandaries under these orders: that of S. james hath in Castille 42 Commandaries, whose revenues are some 12000 ducats rend, some 10, some 8, some 6, and some less, whereof many are affected and commanded by noblemen. 
Comandaries belonging to the three order i● Spain  The great Commandarie of Castille hath 14000 ducats renuenues. The order of S. james hath in the province of Leon 47 Commandaries, most of which belong unto noble houses. The Marquis of S. Croix is great commander of Leon, which is worth 12000 ducats  
The order of Calatrava hath 36 Commandari●ss belonging unto 〈◊〉, whereof the duke of Alva of the ho●se of Toledo is great commander: it is worth 105000 ducats rend  
The order of Alcantara hath 32 Commandaries depending upon it whereof the great Commandarie is worth ten thousand five hundred thirty four ducats yearly. And besides all these Commandaries, there are belonging unto these orders many governments with their dependences, jurisdictions, and priories of good value.  

Orders of knights in Porugall.  There are three orders of knights in Portugal: the first is called of Christ bearing a read cross bordered with cords of gold, & in the midst one of Silver: the second is of S. james with a read cross like unto that of Castille: and the third of S. Barnard, as that of Calatrava.  
The king disposeth of many Commandaries of this order.  
There are two Dukes in Portugal: the first is the Duke of Bragance; (whose eldest son hath the title of Duke of Barcellos) he is held to be very rich, and to have 100000 crowns of Portugal in rent: the second is the Duke of Avero, who hath 50000 crowns rend. There are three marquesses, and eighteen Earls. The other gentlemen have more movable goods than lands. And for that they had been accustomed to fight disorderly with the Moors, the king of Spain hath caused them to be trained in martial discipline, sending men thither out of Spain, France, Germany and Italy to that end.  
I will speak a little touching the order which he hath settled for the navigation.  
There parts most commonly every March 4 or 6 great ships which return no more the same year; so as all the ships remain abroad for the space of 18 months: but every year there parts a company in March, and another in September; these ships disperse themselves to take in their loading in divers parts of Africa, and likewise at the Indies and in Asia: and for that in their return they have none but●marrinerss, and some few merchants, they sand 6 galleons well armed to meet them as far as Cape Verd, to assure the fleet from English pirates, who would set upon them when they come from the Indies, as they have done in times past, and spoiled the Island of Madera.  
This navigation of the Indies is become very easy, and their merchandise is assured for six or seven in the hundred. I have heard reported by a mariner (being threescore years old) that he had made twenty three voyages to the Indies, having passed the Cape of good Hope forty six times; that having passed the equinoctial (whereas they discover not the North) they may sail with the same compass which they use in our seas: for that, having passed toward the West of the Canaries, the star of the compass (as the mariners say) turns towards the North East and from the East, having passed the Meridian of the Island of S. Laurence, it turns towards the North West, the cause whereof is unknown.   

¶ Religion and matters which concern the Church of Spain.  
ALl Spain follows the opinion of the Romish Church, and the protestants religion is so hated there, as they have borough in rigorous and cruel inquisitions lest it should get any belief or credit among them. The primacy of Spain did in old time belong to the church of Siville, afterwards it was transferred to that of Toledo, until that great inundation of the Moors, and ruin of the Goths kingdom: for Toledo being fallen into the Barbarians hands, the Archbishop of Braca enjoyed this dignity, as the records of the church of Braca do witness: but after that the christians had recovered Toledo, the Archbishop of that city redemanded that dignity, and he of Braca contended with him for it, seeking to retain the thing which he had gotten; so ●s some hold, this question is not ye● determined.  
If any one desire to know the Bishops which have been in Spain (since the times of the Romans and Goths) let him read the chronicle of Vaseus, and the history Mayerne Turquet, where he may content his curiosity. After that the Spaniards had recovered their countries from the hands of the Barbarians, the Bishoprics were restored with the towns which had in old time been subject unto them; yea and there were some new erected. And these are the Archbishoprickes and bishoprics which are at this present.  
The Archbishop of Tarragone (who hath eight thousand ducats in yearly rent: some writ sixteen ●housand) hath under him these Bishoprics.  

Barcellonna, which is worth five thousand ducats rend.  
Girona, which is worth four thousand ducats.  
Vicq d Ossuna, which is worth five thousand ducats.  
Lerida, which is esteemed to be at five thousand ducats.  
Vrgill hath in yearly revenues seven thousand ducats.  
Dertosa, which is worth eight thousand ducats a year.   
The archbishopric of Saragosse is worth twenty thousand ducats a year, it hath under it these bishoprics.  
Pampilona, which is worth six thousand ducats, others writ twenty two thousand.  
Calahorra hath twelve thousand ducats in revenues, and some say twenty thousand  
Segovia hath 3000 ducats, yet some writ that he hath four and twenty thousand.  
Twy, whose revenues are four thousand ducats.  
The Archbishop of Toledo is held the chief clergy man of Spain, and hath most authority with the king: he is primate of Spain, and chancellor of Castille; his yearly revenues are above 200000 ducats, he hath these Bishoprics under him.  

Moruedra, which is worth twenty thousand ducats rend.  
Vbeda, which hath six thousand ducats.  
Burgos, which hath thirty thousand ducats in revenues.  
Plaisance, which is worth thirteen thousand ducats.  
Cuenca, which is worth sixteen thousand ducats.  
Curia, which hath eight thousand nine hundred ducats.   
Cordova, which is worth two thousand ducats: others writ that he hath forty six thousand ducats in yearly revenues. This Archbishop is temporal lord of seventeen places that are walled.  
The Archbishop of S. james of Compostella hath twenty thousand ducats rend, and some say twenty four thousand: he hath under him the Bishops of 

Auilla, which is worth eight thousand ducats a year, and some writ 20 thousand.  
Palença, which is held to be fifteen thousadd ducats a year.  
Salamanca, ten thousand ducats, and some writ twenty four thousand.  
Coria, which is valued at eight thousand ducats a year.  
Astorga, which is worth four thousand ducats a year, and others writ 18 thousand.  
Cite Rodrigo is worth ten thousand ducats a year.  
Mondonedo hath twelve thousand ducats rend in revenues.  
Zamora, which is worth twelve thousand ducats a year.  
Leon, which hath eight thousand ducats in yearly revenues.  
Badajos, which is worth six thousand ducats.    
The archbishopric of Siville is worth one hundred and ten thousand ducats of rent, and some say but eighty thousand. It hath these bishoprics under it.  
jaen, which is worth fifteen thousand ducats in rent; some writ twenty thousand.  
Carthagena, which hath five thousand ducats in rent.  
Cadis or Calix, which is worth eight thousand five hundred ducats a year, others writ twelve thousand.  
The Archbishop of Valencia hath thirteen thousand ducats yearly rent, he hath under him the Bishops of Granado, who hath a thousand ducats a year: these two have the privilege to wear cloaks.  

The Bishop of Orihuela is worth eight thousand ducats.  
The Bishopric of Segorua is worth ten thousand ducats.  
The Bishopric of Vluestre is worth six thousand ducats.   
The Archbishop of Lisbonne in Portugal is worth sixteen thousand ducats a year rend: he hath under his jurisdiction these bishoprics.  

Ebora, which is worth twenty thousand ducats a year rend.  
Porto whose revenues are not set down.  
Dividat, which is worth four thousand ducats a year.  
Leiria, whose revenues are worth eight thousand five hundred ducats a year.   
The archbishopric of Braca in Portugal which is worth eight thousand ducats a year. It hath under it these bishoprics following.  

Coimbra which is worth twelve thousand ducats in rent.  
Lamego six thousand ducats in yearly revenues.  
Viseo which is valued at eight thousand ducats.  
Almarie which is worth eight thousand ducats.  
Lugo which hath fifteen thousand ducats in yearly revenues.   
There are some Bishoprics which are exempt from their jurisdictions, and go directly to the court of Rome, the which are: 

Osma, which is worth one thousand ducats a year.  
Malaga hath one thousand ducats a year.  
Guadix is worth two thousand ducats a year.  
Orense which is valued at three thousand ducats,  
Pasa which is worth four thousand ducats.  
Canaria which is valued at eight thousand ducats.    
But if any one desire to know more exactly, what revenues all the Archbishops, Bishops, Abbots and Priors have, let them read what Damian de Goez a Portugal hath written upon that subject.   

A Geneallogie of the kings of Spain.  
IN the time of Attila, Spain was divided into twelve kingdoms, afterwards it was reduced into five, that is to say, Castille, Arragon, Navarre, Portugal and Betica or Granado. The Moors held their seat at Granado until our time. As for the kings of Castille, it is many hundred years past since they received the Christian faith: for whenas the Goths were chased out of Italy, after they had much ruined it (under Alaric and Ataulphe) they fled into Spain with their king who was called Sigeric.   

The succession of the kings of the Goths throughout all Spain.  
Sigeric, or Segeric.  
Vallias, and according unto some Valia.  
Theodoric, whom others call Roderic, he was made king in the year 491, others writ that it was in the year 440.  
Thor●smond, who had to his brethren Theodoris and Henry, both which (some writ) reigned after him.  
Alaric son to Henry, he made his first residence at Tolouse, but he was chased from thence into Spain by Clovis king of France.  
Gensalaric, he was base son to Henry or Euric, and usurped the crown.  
Amalaric son to Alaric.  
Tendie or Thendie son (as some hold) to Alaric, he was slain in his chamber by a jester,  
Tendosil, and according unto others Theodegosil or Theodiscle: he was slain by the Goths, for that he sought to abuse honest women and of noble families with his unlawful lust.  
Agla or Agila, he was slain by the faction of Athanagilda who succeeded him.  
Athanagilda, he was slain near unto Toledo, others writ that he died of his natural death.  
Lenogild or Leovigild, who had Luibe or Luide for a companion, he was an Arrian like unto all his predecessors: he had Siville subject to the realm of Castille. He did persecute his son Hermogild and slew him in the year five hundred seventy and two, for that he was a good Christian.  
Rich●red son to Lenogild was a good Christian and was converted by S. Leander.  
Luibe the second succeeded his father Richared; he was murdered by Victeric who usurped the crown.  
Victeric, who had murdered an innocent prince, was also miserably slain by his own subjects.  
Gundamir reigned two years, and died at Toledo.  
Sisebut, he was a worthy prince, and ruled over all Spain.  
Richared the second, his son, but some put him not in the Catalogue of the Kings of Spain, for that he lived but three months after his father.  
Suintilla, who had been a great captain to Sisebut, was chosen King, he was a good prince in the beginning, but in the end he grew exceeding covetous and cruel; wherefore the Goths deposed him from the crown.  
Sifinand was chosen in his place, before whom, some put Rachimir; he died after six years reign.  
Suintilla the second.  
Tulca a virtuous prince; he died in the second year of his reign.  
Find, whom others called Vindesuind or Cuidasiunthe; Some hold that he was poisoned, having reigned ten years.  
Recensuind or Reccesiunthe; he reigned nineteen years, and died at Toledo.  
Bamba, he defeated a great number of Moors which crossed through Spain; he was poisoned by Eruing or Hearing.  
Hearing or Eruing usurped the kingdom of the Goths; he took Egica his son in law to be his companion; he died at Toledo, having reigned seven years.  
Egica succeeded him, and reigned about thirteen years, and died at Toledo.  
Vitisa who put out the eyes of Theodebert, son to Resensuind, to whom the realm did belong, being but yet an infant; being blind, he married and begot Roderic, who defeated Vitisa in battle, and revenged upon him and his children the wrong done unto his father.  
Roderic, in whom the kings of the Goths ended after this manner: He had an Earl called julian, whom King Roderic had made Provost in Mauritania Tingitania. Others writ that he was sent thither in embassage, the which is more likely. In the absence of this Earl, Roderic forced his daughter; the father hearing of this violence done unto her, thought speedily of a revenge, having good means by the commodity of the place where he than was: for he solicited the Moors to come into Spain, who entered by the straits of Gibraltar, in the year 714, under the conduct of Musa, sent by the king Miramamolin, whom some call Vlit, and made themselves in a manner masters of all Spain, within the space of two years. They say that during this time there died of both sides about seven hundred thousand men. The Christians which remained of this defeated army, retired themselves into the Asturies and Gallicia, with their prince Pelagius, (who was uncle by the father side to Roderic) and took from the Moors the city of Leon, where he reigned twenty years. From that time the kings were no more called Goths or Ostrogothes, but carried the title of kings of Spain or Ouiedo.  
Fafilla his son succeeded him; some writ that he was slain by a Bear going a hunting.  
Alphonso the first, surnamed the Catholic, who lived in the time of Childeric, and of Pippin, was son in law to Fasilla, and succeeded him; some writ that he married Ormisinda sister to Fasilla.  
Froilla his son succeeded him in the year 671; he slew his brother Vimaran, and was afterward slain himself by his other brother Aurelius,  
D. silo brother in law to D. Froilla succeeded in the realm, where having reigned nine years, he died in the year 783.  
D. Maurigat, base son to Alphonso the first, expelled his nephew D. Alphonso the chaste, and usurped the crown; he made an unworthy accord with the Moors, promising to pay them a tribute yearly of fifty virgins of noble families, and as many of base condition: for the which he was hated of all men, and died without children.  
D. Veremond, the son of silo, and grandchild to Alphonso; having been of the Clergy, he was made a king, and then left the world and become a Monk again, resigning his crown to his brother D. Alphonso, the second or third year of his reign.  
D. Alphonso was sole king of Ouiedo after the death of his brother, in the year 795; he was surnamed the chaste, for that he forbore the company of any woman, notwithstanding that he was married; he lived in the time of Charlemaigne.  
D. Ramire was son to the king D. Veremond, called the Deacon, and adopted by D. Alphonso his uncle; he was a generous and worthy prince.  
D. Ordogno son to Ramire.  
D. Alphonso the third, surnamed the Great, son to D. Ordogno, a prince endowed with all royal virtues.  
D. Garcia, the first, his son; he deposed his father Alphonso, who, of a king, become his sons lieutenant against the Moors; and died in the year 887. D. Garcia having reigned three years, died without children.  
D. Ordogno the second, brother to D. Garcia, succeeded him in the realm; he was a worthy prince.  
D. Froilla the second, surnamed the Cruel, brother to D. Ordogno, usurped the realm from his nephews D. Alphonso and D. Ramires, sons to the deceased; his life was infamous, and he died a Leper, having reigned only fourteen months.  
D. Alphonso, the fourth, son to D. Ordogno, resigned his crown to his brother D. Ramire, who was in Portugal, and then become a Monk; but afterwards repenting him, and seeking to recover his realm, he was taken by his brother, who put out his eyes.  
D. Ramire was king of Ouiedo and Leon in the year 904, and died in the year 924.  
D. Ordogno, his son, succeeded him in the realm of Leon.  
To D. Ordogno there succeeded D. Sancho the first, surnamed the Fat, in the realm of Leon.  
D. Ramire, the third of that name, his son, succeeded him in the year 923; and for that he was too young, and the Moors breaking the peace which they had made with the Spaniards, they made Veremond or Bermond, son to D. Ordogno their king, in whose time Almansor took the city of Leon, and spoiled the Church of S. james in Gallicia: but Bermond took courage and gathered his forces together, with Garcia Earl of Castille (for at that time the Castillians had no king) and took many places from them.  
D. Bermond or Veremond, son to king D. Ordogno the third, united the two realms of Leon and Gallicia; he was much given to his lust and pleasure, so as he become full of the gout, and therefore was called the Gouty.  
D. Alphonso the fift, son to D. Bermond, did succeed in the realm of Leon.  
D. Veremond or Bermond, his son, the third of that name, succeeded his father D. Alphonso; he was slain in the war he had against his brother in law the king of Castille, and died without children, by which means the realm fell to his sister, who had married Ferdinand the first of that name, son to Sancho Earl of Castille; and so the Castillians (who in the beginning had their country reduced under governors called Earls) saw first of all these Earls hereditary, and in the end their country was subject unto kings, and the realms of Leon and Castille united together; the which happened in the year 1025, or according unto some 1037.  
D. Ferdinand being king of Castille and Leon, did afterward usurp the realm of Navarre, having slain D. Garcia the king his brother in battle; he recovered the town of Conubra in Portugal from the Moors, and in a manner the whole realm; and died in the fortieth year of his reign, and of Grace 1064.  
D. Sancho and D. Alphonso the sixt, brethren, sons to D. Ferdinand, were both kings, one of Castille, the other of Leon, but D. Sancho would not suffer his brother to reign whilst he lived, and seeking to dispossess his sister of her lands (being at the siege of Zamora) he was slain with a boars spear; after which the people called D. Alphonso to the ●rowne.  
D. Alphonso the sixt was king of Castille and Leon after the death of D. Sancho Fernandes his brother; he left but one daughter called Vrraca, who was married to Alphonso king of Navar●e and Arragon; she had a son named Alphonso the seventh by Ra●mond Earl of Barcelonne, her first husband: he succeeded his grandfather, and had these children, Sancho king of Castille, Ferdinand king of Leon, Alphonso the eighth, Alphonso the ninth, and Beatrix. This Alphonso the seventh recovered Cordova.  
Sancho, the third of that name, king of Castille, had to his son Alphonso the eighth, who had many children, Henry the first, king of Castille, Blanch, mother to S. Lewis, Berengarie, wi●e to Alphonso king of Leon, Vrraca, wife to the king of Portugal, and E●lenor wife to the king of Arragon; he died in the 1160, or as some writ 1214, the five and fiftieth year of his reign.  
D. Henry the first, his son, succeeded him in the realm of Castille and Toledo, he being but eleven years old, and died upon a hurt which he received with a tile that fell from a house, having reigned but two years.  
D. Ferdinand the third, son to D. Alphonso the ninth, was a king of Leon and Castille; he recovered all Spain, except the realm of Granado.  
Alphonso the tenth, son to ferdinand the third, was king of Castille and Leon; he was much given to Astronomy.  
D. Sancho, called the Brave, son to Alphonso the tenth, succeeded him.  
D. Ferdinand the fourth, son to D. Sancho, was king of Leon and Castille.  
Alphonso the eleventh, his son, succeeded him.  
Peter the first, son to Alphonso the eleventh, king of Castille and Leon; he was surnamed the Cruel, and was slain by his base brother Henry Earl of Transtamara.  
Henry the second, base son to Alphonso the eleventh, having slain his brother D. Pedro the Cruel, he made himself king.  
john the first, son to Henry the second; this john, king of Castille, and his wife Ellenor daughter to the king of Arragon, had Henry the third, king of Castille and Leon, and Ferdinand king of Arragon; Henry had two children, john King of Castille, and Marie Queen of Arragon.  
john the second, king of Castille, who succeeded his father, had Elizabeth, and Henry the fourth, king of Castille.  
Ferdinand king of Arragon had four children, Alphonso king of Arragon and Sicily, john who was king after his brother, Marry Queen of Castille, and joane Queen of Portugal. john who succeeded his brother Alphonso, had Ferdinand, who marrying Elizabeth daughter to king john the second, and heir of Castille, was king of both the realms.  
Ferdinand, the sixt of that name, son to john king of Arragon, had three children, john who married Margaret daughter to Maxmilian, Katherine who was Queen of England, first, wife to prince Arthur, and then to king Henry the eighth, his brother, and jo●●e who married Philip Archduke of Austria.  
john died without children during the life of his father Ferdinand, who presently took Philip of Austria, his son in law, for his adopted son; he was father to  
Charles the fift, Emperor and king of Spain.  
Philip the second, his son.  
Philip the third, who reigns at this present.   

¶ The Kings of Portugal.  
THe realm of Portugal is of the noble house of Lorraine, from whence came Duke Henry, who employed himself with so great valour against the Moors, for Alphon- the sixt, as this king gave him his base daughter Tiresia in marriage, with the country of Portugal, which had then but the title of an Earldom: it was in the year 1110.  
Alphonso the first took upon him the title of king; he recovered Lisbonne from the Moors, and defeated five infidel kings in battle: in remembrance whereof, he took five scutcheons for his arms.  
Sancho the first, 
the second king.  Alphonso the second, 
the third king.  Sancho the second, 
the fourth king.  Alphonso the third, 
the fift king.  Denis the first, 
the sixt king.  Alphonso the fourth, 
the seventh king.  Peter the first, 
the eight king.  Ferdinand the first, 
the ninth king.  john the first, a bastard, 
the tenth king.  Edward the first, 
the eleventh king.  Alphonso the fift, 
the twelfth king.  john the second, 
the thirteenth king.  Emanuel the first, 
the fourteenth king.  john the third, 
the fifteenth king.   
Sebastian the first, grand child to king john the third, was slain in Africa in a battle against the Moors, in the year 1578, and left not any children, to whom succeeded Henry the Cardinal his great uncle, who being about threescore and seven years old, 
Pretendance to the crown of Portugal.  and not likely to leave any successors, there were many which pretended an interest to the crown, as Philip the second, king of Spain, who came of Isabel, eldest daughter to king Emanuel, the Duke of Savoy, who was son to Beatrix the second, daughter of the said king, Ramurcia Farnese issued from Marie, eldest daughter to D. Edward, son to king Emanuel, and the Duchess of Bragance, daughter to the said infant D. Edward: and last of all, D. Anthony, Prior of Crato, whose father D. Lewis was son to king Emanuel, to whom the crown did of right belong, being issued from a male; but they objected bastardy against him, and he pleaded his Letters of legitimation, saying, That D. Lewis, his father, was secretly married to his mother, and therefore was legitimate. King Henry dying, the King of Spain fortified his title by arms, sending the Duke of Alva with a great army into Portugal, to force obedience and subjection, if they refu●ed, which bred a great confusion in the realm, during the which the Portugals proclaimed D. Anthony king at S. Iren, and received him into Lisbonne, but they were not able to defend him and keep him in this royalty, wherefore he was dispossessed by Philip, and the justice of his cause, and the will of the Portugals, were forced to yield to the power of the Spaniards, who are at this day masters.   

¶ Of the Islands of Maiorca, Minorca, and others.  
THe King of Spain doth also hold certain Islands in the Mediterranean sea, the which I think fit to describe.  
The Islands of Balliares, in old time called Gymnasies, and now Maiorca and Minorca, make one realm, whereof the king of Spain takes the title.  
Maiorca, called by the vulgar people Malorca, is nearer unto Spain than Minorca, & is within four or five hours sailing, and fourteen miles from Minorca; some say that it is in circuit two hundred and forty miles, others writ three hundred, and some four hundred and fourscore miles. 
A stade is 125. paces.  Strab● makes it six hundred stades long, which are seventy five miles, and five and twenty miles broad, but late writers have found it much broader, that is to say, about a hundred miles: and so by this means it should be much longer than Strabo hath written. There is a town of the same name with the Island, which is the chief of all the Islands. It was in old time called Palma, and at this day there is a good University, whereas R●imondus Lulliu● is in great reputation; so as they do entertain there continually, a learned man with great wages to teach his doctrine publicly. There is also another town called Bolence, which the inhabitants call Pollence, the which looks to the South, as Maiorca doth to the North.   

¶ The Quality of the country.  
THis Island is rough and barren towards the Sea, but upon the sides of hills, and in the plains and valleys it yields good store of wine, oil, wheat, and first-fruits. But especially they have good oils, which is carried from thence in to Valencia, into Flanders & Italy. They make excellent good cheese there, the which exceeds in bounty all that is sold in Rome or in Spain. Moreover the inhabitants make great traffic of course woollen cloth, which they carry unto all parts that lie about the Island, yea into Sicily. There are no hurtful beasts but Coneys, which sometimes do them infinite much harm. There are very many Stags in the Island.   

¶ Manners of the Inhabitants.  
THe Inhabitants of these Islands were in old time great Pirates at Sea, cruel and savage: they dwelled in rocks, & had no other care but to watch who passed by sea. They had small vessels, ill appointed, but very light. On a time they discovered the Roman army a far of, and thinking it had been some prey, they wen to encounter them, where at their first aboard they covered the Roman ships with stones: but in the end the Romans' forced them to fly, and then pursued them to their retreats, meaning to ruin them. In old time they used no coin of gold or silver. They made war for the Carthagenians, for the which, they had no other recompense but women and wine. They used slings, wherein they were very expert, for their mothers were accustomed to set bread upon the e●d of a staff, against the which their children cast stones, neither were they suffered to eat, until they had beaten down the bread. They are now grown civil as their neighbours, and are of an amorous complexion as they were in old time. Somewhat near unto Majorca, you have the little Islands of Dragonera, and Cabrera.   

¶ The Island of Minorca.  
MInorca lies more Easterly than Majorca. It is ahundred and fifty miles in circuit, and sixty broad: It is distant from Spain a hundred and sixty miles: In Ptolomees time there were two towns, jana, which is now called Citadella, and Mago, which they name at this day Minorca of the name of the Island. It hath many Villages, upon the Sea shore, it is environed with high mountains very full of trees: And although that this Island be less than the other, yet doth it not yield any thing in bounty, but contrariwise it feeds more beeves and other cattle, and especially of great Moils, which have a louder cry than any other. This Island hath two ports, that is to say, Mayon, and Fernelle. In our time these Islands were made a distinct Realm, the which doth also comprehend the Pytyuses, whereof the one, called in old time by the Greeks Ophiuse, and by the Latines Colubraria, hath now the name of Formentara: it hath threescore and ten miles in compass, and is fourscore miles from the firm land. This Island is desert for the most part, by reason of the multitude of Serpents which kill men.  
The other is Euissa, some ten miles of, and fifty from the main land, it is above a hundred miles about. The nature of this soil is to drive away serpents, neither can it endure any hurtful beast, but Coneys, who do commonly eat up their corn: This Island abounds in corn and in all kinds of fruit. They do gather every year great store of salt in this Island, for at a certain time the Sea overflows the land, and then the Inhabitants stop the passages by the which the water entered, and so let it stand untroubled, of which they gather great heaps of salt, which do not only serve Majorca and Minorca, but they do also carry great ships laden into Italy, wherewith they furnish many towns.  
But to show how the Realm of Majorca was united to the crown of Spain, you m●st understand, that the Moors of the Africa held these Islands until the year 1240. whe● as Ferdinand king of Castille chased them first out of Majorca. But the Moors being entered again, james of Arragon (son to king Peter who was slain before Muret, supporting the party of the Albigeois) went thither with in forces, who being succoured by the said Ferdinand, expelled the Moors, and took upon him the title of Majorca and Minorca about the year 1240. This is the right which the kings of Arragon have unto these Islands, so as the Realm of Arragon being united to that of Castille by the marriage of Ferdinand and Isabell●, the kings of Spain which are descended, hold them by a just title.  
About the Islands of Fromentera and Euissa are also three little Islands, that is, Vedran, Conerella, and Dragomago. And above Euissa betwixt Majorca, and the mouth of the river of Ebro, is a little desert Island, which they call Moncolibra, and in the mouth of the same river the Island of Alfaques, which that river and the Sea do make.  
Finally, near unto the port of Carthagena there is an Island commonly called Scombraria, the which is little and hath nothing in it that merits a discourse.     

OF THE REALM OF NAPLES.  

The Contents.  
1 divers appellations of the Realm of Naples in Histories: and the description of the bigness and bounds. II Divided first into six Provinces, and at this day into twelve, whereof the first is Terra de Laboro. III The Islands and most remarkable ports of this Realm. four Singularities which are found in this Realm, which are the goodly horses of four races which the king of Spain hath there: the springs of medicinal waters, & baths of divers virtues: a field of sulphur environed with burning rocks, from whence they drawealome: the mountain of Astrune, the Tarrentela whose poison they expel with singing and the sound of Instruments. V Description of the nature & manners of the Neapolitans both ancient & modern, & their manner of living. VI Riches of this Realm, gowing from their commerce with the Venetians and from the traffic of Almonds, Saffron, Silks, Oil, Wine, Ho●ses, Coral with strangers. VII. Forces of the Realm of Naples, wherein they consist, what, soldiers and ships are commonly entertained; The chief Forts, Towns, and Castles. VIII. Policy and government consisting in seven Viceroys, whereof the general remains at Naples. IX. Archbishops ●nd Bishops Which are in the Realm of Naples. X. The number of the kings which have reigned unto this present.   

THis Realm which contains in a manner a moiety of Italy, takes his name from the chief town that is in it, and Historians call it after this manner: sometimes the Realm of Poville or Apulia; sometimes Sicily on this side the Far, to distinguish it from the Realm or Island of Sicily which is beyond the Far, the which happened when the Realm was erected about the year 1125. when as Roger the first king was invested. This denomination might be, for that Roger being then Earl of Sicily, & desiring to honour his Estate with this royal title, he would that this other part which joined unto it, should be called Sicily by him that did invest him; for the lo●● of him, and for that he had violently seized thereon, whilst that William (who held it with the title of Duke of Povilla or Calabria) was gone to Constantinople to marri● the Emperor Alexis daughter: and after this manner the whole Realm was called the two Siciles. And in truth the essential title is the Realm of the two Siciles, although that at this day it be commonly called the Realm of Naples, by reason of the ordinary r●●●dence of kings in this town, which was made the Metropolitan and head of the Realm, then chiefly when as Peter king of Arragon seized upon Sicily, whereas the king had been accustomed to remain, the which notwithstanding, the kings of Naples did not ●●lly possess, but after that the Realm of Naples fell unto ferdinand of Spain, by whom it descends unto king Philip the third.  
This Realm gins at the river of Tranto, whose mouth tends towards the North, and from Tarracina near unto the river of Vfense or Ofense which falls into the Tuscan Sea, and extends unto the strait of Sicily; it is shut in by the adriatic and the Tuscan Seas, like a Peninsula: It hath for bounds the two rivers of Vfense and Tronto towards the West: On the North side, the adriatic Sea, on the South, the Tuscan Sea and Sicily, and on the East the Ionian Sea. They collect the measure after this manner. From Tarracina unto Naples, they reckon fourscore miles: from Naples unto the Cape of Gulf Palacastro 147 miles. From thence unto Regium in Calabria 180 miles. From Regium unto the Cape of Spartivento 133 miles. From thence unto the Cape of Colonnes 195 miles. From Cape Colonnes unto Tarentum 200 miles. From Tarentum unto Cape S. Maria 30 miles. From thence to the Cape of Orranto 26 miles. From this Cape unto that of S. Ange 222 miles. And from thence unto the river of Tronto 200 miles. All which sums reduced into one, make 1318 Italian miles, and this is the circuit going by water: whereunto if you add 150 miles, which they accounted in breadth unto the extremity of the West, as it is by land, it will make in all 1468 miles in the whole circuit of the Realm of Naples. It joins unto the the state of the Church for the space of 150 miles. It hath in length 450 miles, from the river of Tronto which is towards the North unto the Cape of Spartivento, sometimes called Hercules, in the furthest part of Calabria towards the South. The greatest breadth is 112 miles, from the lands of Gaette unto the mouth of the divine river.  
Alphonso the first, king of Arragon, Naples, and Sicily, divided it into six provinces, that is into Terra di Lavoro, or Campania the happy, the principality, Basilicata, Calabria, Povillia, and Abruzzo: but afterwards he made three parts of Povillia, divided it into the land of Otranto, Bari and the Capitenate: Ferdinand king of Spain, and Lewis 12 the French king divided it into equal parts; so as Povillia and Calabria remained to Spain, and Terra di Laoro, with the city of Naples and Abruzzo unto France. At this day they divide it commonly into 12 parts; that is, Terra di Lavoro, Abruzzo both on this side and beyond, Poville the plain, Capitenate the principality both on this side and beyond, Basilicata, Calabria high and low, the land of Bari and Otranto. It contains 2700 towns and villages that are peopled, whereof there are 20 Archbishoprickes 127 Bishoprics & 1400 bouroughs & villages where there are about two millions of souls.  
Coasting along the sea, you find Terra di Lavoro or Campania the happy (whereof Capova whereas Hannibal with his whole army grew effeminate with their delights) was in old time the chief city. Touching the which, there is an Ancient which hath written, That there were three towns capable of the majesty and greatness of an Empire, that is to say, Carthage, Corinthe, and Capova: The two first lying far from Rome, were ruined by the Romans', who consulted long, whether they should do the like unto Capova: but in the end for that they would not seem cruel by the ruin so noble a town in Italy, they assured themselves thereof by the confiscation of their lands, and depriving them of all former government. They suffered their buildings to stand, to the end they might serve as a retreat for such as did till their land, but they took from them the magistrate and public council, to the end the Inhabitants should have no means to rebel.  
This province of Lavoro, or Campania Felice hath a most temperate and delicate air, and is so fertile, as it doth not only produce all things necessary for the life of man in abundance, but also for delight and pleasure. In this Noble region you may see large and fertile fields, pleasant and fruitful hills, thick and delightful woods, sweet fountains, physical and wholesome springs of water, as well for the restoring of man's health, as for his content and delight. At this day the chief town, not only of this province, but of the whole realm, is Naples, in truth a royal city. It hath about seven miles in compass, and is much increased in our time, and had been more, if the king of Spain had not forbidden thein to build: whereunto he was persuaded by the Barons of the Realm, whose subjects did abandon their dwellings, to go and enjoy the exemptions and privileges granted to the inhabitants of Naples: and he did it also partly to avoid the danger of revolt and of the mutinies of people, who can be hardly stayed in a great & strong city which hath three Castles, whereof the principal is called Castellnova or the new Castle, the which was built by Charles of Anjou. There is not any city where there is so great a concourse of Noblemen, or where they make so great profession of riding, and whereas knights do make a better show of what they are, and give themselves more to all virtuous exercises; the gentlemen repair to five places to spend their time in honourable exercises, which they call seats. This city hath a port or haven, the which is neither very great nor very safe, but they help it by means of a peer: There is an Arsenal at Naples, whereas they do continually make many galleys and ships for war. They do number in this city above two hundred thousand persons, there is a goodly gulf with an open flat road, and Islands and Capes which are very pleasing. There is Pouzzoli● where there are so many wonders to be seen, as it seems nature took delight to make herself to be admired in this place, whether she hath drawn all that she hath beautiful and excellent. In this province is the lake of Again, Bay, Tridoli, and the lake Auvergne, with the three metropolitan cities, Naples, Capova, and Surrenta, and two and twenty cities, amongst the which those of greatest fame are Gayetta, Sessa, Ceano, Calui, Venafre, Ca●erte, Nola, and Auersa: and there are a hundred sixty six Castles or walled places, with a hundred and seventy villages.  
The principality hath for her bounds on the West Terra di Labour, or the land of Labour; and towards the East, the country of Basilicata. This Province is sixteen miles broad, and three and thirty long: her chief towns are Nocera, Sanseverin, Surrente, Massa, Vic, Rivel, Amalfe, & Salerne, Nocera is nine miles from the Sea, and four from Sarne, and round about it there are many villages Rivel is a town lately built, the which yields nothing to the chief towns of the realm of Naples, in regard of the stately buildings. Amalfe is a fair town, but it hath been more famous in former times. Some hold that the use of the Compass was found out in this town; the which Pasquier hath sufficiently refuted in his Recherches, showing by some passages of old French Poets, that this invention is more ancient. Of this town, the coast of Amalfe (which looks towards the South takes his name, and runs about twenty miles in length: it hath high mountains, especially on that side which leans towards the Sea. There is so great difficulty to ascend them, as the sight only makes men sick. Salerne is a very ancient town about a mile from the sea, having very goodly gardens within the walls. There is an University, and this town carries the title of a principality. But I must advertise you, that the principality on this side runs along the Sea, from Salerne unto Policastro, and from S. Severin unto the fen, the river of Silarie crossing in a manner through the midst of it: it contains the Archbishoprics of Salerne and Amalfe, with fifteen other towns, and two hundred and thirteen castles or walled places, amongst the which is Euoli with her wood, and Fiano with her valley being twenty miles long, and four broad, environed with little hills well inhabited. The principality on the other side extends from Nusco unto Conse & to Cedogne, & contains these two towns with eight others, that is to say, Anellin, Arrian, Bisache, Montemaran, Mont-Verd, S. Agathe, Saint Ange, Vic, and three and fifty castles or walled places.  
Basilicate contains Lucania, and a part of Povillia. It hath for bounds upon the West the river of Silare, which is the limit of Campania: upon the Sou●h the Tuscan sea, upon the East the river of jae and base Calabria, with a part of the higher, and towards the North the land of Bar● It contains the towns of Melfe, Venosa, Potence, Cerence, Tricarie, Lavell, Montpelosa, Marsico, Rapolla, with ninety three castles or walled places.  
Base Calabria hath for her bounds upon the North, high Calabria called in old time great Greece, with the river of Crathide, and a part of the Apennin hills: upon the West the river of Lau, with Basilicata, towards the South the Tuscan Sea and the strait of Sicily, and upon the East a part of the Adriatic Sea. Her metropolitan town is Cosence, an ancient town which contains seven little hills, it hath a strong castle upon the top of a hill which commands the town and all places round about it. The town is environed by the rivers of Crathide, and Busente, and is at this day reasonable rich, but it hath been in former times more wealthy. Besides this town, there are also those of Frede, Belmont, Saint Euphemia which hath given name unto the Sea that lies near it; Tropie, a fair town rich and populous: Rhegium, an ancient town seated upon the front or farthest point of Italy: in old time it was strong and mighty, but now it is in a manner desert, since the year 1594. that the Turks fired it. There is also Chasteawillare, which is upon the top of a very high mountain: Monsault which carries the title of a Duchy: Turran, Rugian, and the towns of Saint Mark: Marturan, an ancient town seated in the Apennin hills: Tavern, a good town and well peopled: Nicastro, which is three miles from the sea: Montleon a town seated upon a little hill in the Apennin, and which carries the title of an Earldom: and Terra Nova a town very well peopled.  
High Callabria, according unto Ptolemy, hath for her bounds towards the East, the Adriatic sea, upon the South, the river of Alice, and base Callabria, towards the West, the river of Crathide with the Apennin and Basilicate, and upon the North, the gulf of Tarentum, and the land of Bary. There is upon this side two Capes which are very famous, the one is that of Colonnes, in old time called Lacinia; the other is that of Scylace, which is ex●eeding dangerous. The chief town of this country is Catanzara; then have you Hierace, which carries the name of a Marquisat: Bellcastro or Fair Castle, a town eight miles from the sea: Croton a very ancient and famous town, which doth now carry the title of a Marquisat, yet is it not so rich nor so well peopled as it hath been: Cariathe, which is an Earldom: Bisignan, a principality with a strong Castle, Tarsie, Corlian, Rosan a strong town three miles from the sea: Cassan, Hauteville, which is a principality: Matera an archbishopric, a rich town and well peopled: Gravina a Duchy: Tarentum a very ancient town, in the end of high Calabria, or great Greece where there is a famous port. This was the country of the Philosopher Archites, it is now a principality.  
The land of Otranto gins at Tarentum, which doth bound it upon the South side with the sea unto Cape Sancta Maria. Upon the East it hath for confines the same Cape, with the Ionian sea, upon the North from Otranto, unto Brindes or Brundisium, and upon the We●●, the land of Bari and a great part of high Calabria. It is in form like to a Peninsula, for that it is environed with the Adria●icke and the Ionian seas; It is thirty miles broad from Brinde●●o Tarentum, as Pliny writes, and according unto Rassan forty miles: The navigation round about it, is of two hundred miles, so as the circuit of the whole country will be about two hundred and forty miles. The chief towns are Locci, which is thirty miles from Cape Stancta Maria, it is a rich town, well peopled, and well built: O●ranto a very ancient town, which is at this day reasonably well peopled, having a strong Castle upon a rock which overlookes the sea, and a good capable Port, yet subject to Northerly winds. Brindes is an ancient town, but in a manner abandoned at this day by reason of civil discords. Her port was so good in former times, as it was numbered among the chief, but it is so choked at this day, as Galleys can hardly enter: Castrois, a sea town considerable for the losses it hath received by the Turks.  
The land of Poville is divided in two by the Ancients, that is to say, into the land of Bari called Peucetia by the Ancients, and Poville the plain, which they also called Daunia, & these two countries were divided by the river of Lofante. They comprehend in the second part Capitenate, which contains Mont S. Ange and the dependences: there are in all thirteen towns, and ninety Castles or walled places. The towns are Saint Ange, Manfredonia, Siponte, Salpe, Lesina, Viesta, Ascoli, Bovina, Firenzola, Volturare, Trem●la, and Troy. It seems that all the riches of Povillo the plain are gathered together upon Mont Saint Ange, which hath almost one hundred and twenty miles in circuit. D●omedes would have reduced it to an Island, for that his Istinus is not above two miles broad. The Satrazins, finding the commodity of the place, fortified themselves there, and maintained it a long time, for that in truth there is not any place fi●ter to command and annoyed the realm of Naples, and the adriatic Sea.  
The land of Bari contains thirty six castles or walled places, and fourteen towns, whereof they of most note are Bari and Trani, than Monopoli, Polignan, Gravina, and Bitonte.  
Poville the plain, although the soil be light and sandy, and the grass thin and short, yet is it so fruitful as it doth furnish Naples, Sclavonia, Venice, and Tuscaine, with fat cattle. It hath for bounds the land of Bari, and the river of Lofante, upon the South, the Apennin hills, upon the West, Abruzzo, and towards the North, a part of the adriatic sea.  
The country of Abruzzo is the coldest part of all the kingdom, it was sometime the habitation of the Samnites, and hath for bounds upon the East, Poville the plain, with the river of Saline, towards the West, the river of Tronto, upon the North, the adriatic sea, and to the South, the Apennin hills. This country is bounded on the one side by Fortore, and on the other by Tronto, and it is divided into Abruzzo on this side, and Abruzzo on the other side of the river of Pescara. The one contains one hundred and fifty castles or walled places, and five cities, which be Beneuent, Lanciano, Chieti, Burella, & Sulmone: and the other hath two hundred eighty four castles or walled places, and four cities, which are Aquila, Atri, Pena, and Terraine; Beneuent was given to the Church of Rome by Henry the fourth, in exchange of a certain tribute remitted to the Church of Bambergue, where he was borne, by Leo the ninth, and this town having been diversly usurped and held, was in the end restored unto the Church by the Normans; Aquila was built by the Emperor Frederick the second, who led the people of Amiterne and Forcoigne thither to assure the realm on that side. They do also comprehend the country of Molisi in Abruzzo, which hath a hundred and four walled places or castles, and four towns, that is Bojano, Guardialferia, Isernia, and Trivento.  
There are in the adriatic sea, right against Poville the plain, the Islands of Diomedes, whereof the greatest at this day, are called Sancta Maria, Tremitana, and S. Dominick. Moreover, there is to be seen in the Ionian sea, right against the town of Gallipolis, the Island of Acates of small fame, and in the gulf of Tarentum some little Islands of small note, whereof the greatest is called S. Andrew. Right against the Cape of Colomnes are the two Islands of Dioscores and Calypso. In the Tuscan sea, there are certain Islands which belong unto this realm, that is, Palmarole, Pontia, and some other smaller, which have nothing remarkable.  
There are also in the gulf of Pouzzoli and of Naples about eighteen Islands, whereof the most noted is Ischia, the which hath eighteen miles in compass, & is so environed with high rocks, as there is no entrance but by one way. The●e is a place which they hold to be a Fort, the which is by reason of the situation. Near unto Ischia is Prosida, whose circuit is about six miles. The last Island is that of Capri, whether Augustus went so often: the rest which are to be seen are of no regard.  
Without doubt there are few ports in all this circuit of the country, notwithstanding that some gulfs in divers tur●ingss of the shore may at certain times serve for Ports. Yet are they not safe, as in particular that of Naples, which serves rather for pomp than for any safety to shipping that lies there, notwithstanding that it be defended by a peer: and they are accustomed when as the sea grows high and rough to carry their galleys to Bay, which is somewhat far off: and those wonderful remainders of Nero, called commonly Mermort, do at this day serve for a port. The gulf of Gaiette is also held for a port, notwithstanding that it lies open to the East. In the country of Otranto there is that of Brindes, and they say that if the port of Trani in the country of Bari were made fit, it would be able to receive 100 galleys, as also that of Tarentum● in Basilicata would be made much more capable, if they would b●stow any cost or pain. This port is at this day shut up, lest by the commodity thereof, it should invite the Turks to attempt something: for that Cleomines the Lacedimonian, and Alexander and Pyrrhus, both kings of Epirus, passing out of Greece into Italy, did always make use of this port, for that it was capable, safe, and near.  

¶ Quality of the country.  
THis realm brings forth all things needful for the life of man, and also for Physic and delights in so great abundance, as it doth furnish other countries: and among other things they breed very goodly horses, whereof the king hath four races, and many noble men do also breed them. These horses may not be transported out of the country, but by permission from the king of Spain, or his viceroy, which is hardly granted. But above all, there is great abundance of Corn, Wine, Oil, Silk and all kinds of first-fruits. The country of Rheggium, & many places of Calabria bear sugars. The land of Labour hath wine and wheat in abundance, and is wonderful delightful. There are about Poussolle many springs of phisichall waters, and baths of divers virtues. There is to be seen a field full of Sulphur, environed with a high rock which burns continually, from whence they draw and burn Alum. There is to be seen the mountain of Astrune, with a Grotte or Cave which hath three mile's compass on the top, and doth by little & little grow straighter towards the bottom, like unto the Amphitheatre, there you may see a little river run through the midst: there are baths to sweated in, and a hole which no man may approach unto without danger of death. The air in the country of Otranto is very good, and yet it is much subject to leprosy, the which grows as some think, for that they eat too much hogs flesh and dried figs, which is the ordinary meat of the poor people. The superficies of the soil seems rough and stony, but being broken up with the plough they found it good ground, and although there be but little water, yet there are goodly pastures, which yield wheat, barley, oats, olives, excellent Melons, Asses, and Moiles which are much esteemed. There breeds in this country a beast which they call Tarantela, whose poison is expelled by singing and the sound of instruments: The which Gellius writes, according to the authority of Theophrastus, of some other beasts. The Chersidres or Adders do also breed in this country, and it receives more hurt from Grasshoppers, than any part of Italy, for that they leave nothing where they pass, but devour the corn that is ripe in one night; yet it seems that nature hath provided for this inconvenience, by the means of certain birds they call Gavies which do persecute these beasts. The country is also much spoiled with hail which doth in a manner annoie it every year. There they here thunder in winter, as they do in summer in the land of Labour. The country about the town of Otranto hath a very temperate air, as it doth appear by the Bay trees, Myrtles, Olive trees and Cedars which grow there. The rocks which do environ it towards the Sea are so brittle, as the Sea hath wasted and eaten away almost four score paces in less than a hundred year. But Brindes hath a bad air, for that, as there is nothing that doth better an air more than a multitude of inhabitants (for that they dry up moorish places by tillage, they cut up thick woods, and purge the bad air with fire, and found the good with their high buildings) so there is nothing worse than solitariness in great towns, for that they are not only deprived of the aforesaid things, but the houses themselves and the ruins are retreats of corruption, witness Aquilea, Rome, Ravenna, Alexandria in Egypt and Bagadet as some say. As for Poville though the soil seem barren, yet is it good in effect, and feeds much cattle. Abruzzo is the coldest part in the realm. In the principality, S. Severin is famous for the good wine it bears. Near to Amalphi, and on this side the rocks, there are goodly valleys, with many fountains, and springs of water, from whence flow certain small brooks with a pleasant murmur. This country hath great abundance of Pomegranates, Leymons, Oranges, Olives, Pears, Plums, Cherries and such like fruit: It abounds also in wine, and doth not only please the taste, but also the smell and sight, by the Myrtle trees, bay, Box, jasmin, ivy, Rosemary, Roses, and other plants which grow there. The soil about Galerna bears many Citrons, Leymons, Oranges, Pomegranates, and all kind of fruit. Basilicate is in a manner all mountains, and therefore much subject to theft and robbing: Roses come twice a year near unto Pesta. Calabria bears wheat, barley, wine of many sorts, olives, figs, sugar, honey, salt, gold, silver, some wool, cotton and saffron. It abounds so with silk, as there is as much made as in all the rest of Italy. There is also great abundance of flax and hemp, and Manna doth also fall there from heaven. Near unto the Sea shore, and within the country there are many goodly Gardens to be seen full of Citron trees, Leimons, Oranges and other trees. As for the Islands; that of Ischia, hath store of good wines and abundance of first-fruits, and also great quantity of Sulphur and Alum, in which there are also baths▪ That of Proside, casts fire, and hath hot baths. That of Capre wants wheat, but it abounds in flesh, fish, and fowl.   

¶ Manners of the ancient Neapolitans.  
THere is an Ancient which saith, That they of the land of Labour were proud, by reason of the abundance of first-fruits, the bounty of the air and beauty of the country. There were the Acherusien Marshes, which are at this day called Caluccia a Avernus, with places under ground, and Sybilles' Cave; into which places, as Strabo writes, they did enter by sacrifices, after that they had pacified the Gods, according to the foolish belief of the Ancient. The Priests of the false Gods were there to conduct them that entered: there was a fountain, which they held to be Phlegeton, by reason that the waters did stink. The Priests received them that came to consult with the Oracle, and did live of that which they could get by the digging of metals, or by their predictions: And therefore Homer said, that they never saw Sun. These men were afterwards rooted out by a certain king, who found their predictions false. There was at Naples every fift year a combat of Wrestlers and Singers, by the commandment of the Oracle. In this realm, and not far from Rheggium, was the town of Locres so well governed by Zaleucus, where they were wont to come with a halter about their necks when they would propound any new law, to the end they might die if it were not allowed. The Sabarites were also of this country, whom they did tax to be so effeminate and delicate, as they had taught their horses to dance by the sound of Instruments. Finally, all the Inhabitants of this country were so given to delights, as Hannibal suffering himself to be corrupted with their manners, and changing his natural disposition, lost that which he had gotten, and his reputation all altogether by their dissolute customs.   

¶ The manners of the Neapolitans at this day.  
ALl the Neapolitans in a manner are active, and of good spirits, embracing pleasures more than any people in the world, and take great delight to entertain Ladies. The nobility for the most part retire to Naples, as well to enjoy the good air of that city, as to spend their time, and to see the good company that is commonly there. And in truth there cannot be seen a greater company of gallant Cavaliers than at Naples, in Summer, without the city; whither they go to encounter the Ladies which come forth to take the air in their Caroches, where they encounter them on horse back, with so good a grace, and such excellent discourse, as it is impossible to see or hear any thing more pleasing: so as it seems to belong more properly, to this Nobility than to any other, to make love and to attend upon Ladies. This gracious behaviour is most commonly accompanied with courage; for that the gentlemen of the realm of Naples go unto the war wheresoever it be, and seek to win honour, as we have seen in the wars of the Lowe-Countries, whither great numbers of the Nobility of this realm have come: the people are no less given to arms, for it is well known, that a great part of the Archdukes and the king of Spain's footmen come out of the realm of Naples. For as for natural Spaniards they are few in number. The people of this realm are also much given to traffic, but that which divers them from following of this inclination and desire, is the charge of exactions which is heavy in this country, and greater than can be imagined.  
I have said that the Neapolitans had gentle spirits, yet the rule is not so general, but there are places found whereas courtesy and civility are unknown For near unto Montsaut, they are as rude and savage as in any country of Italy, and in a manner all they of Calab●ia have not such subtle wits as the rest; as the Ancients themselves have written: and they of the country of Otranto are simple and without art, and this simplicity approacheth nearer unto stupidity, than freeness, or any good breeding. Both men and women have their minds wholly given to love, and affect this pleasure as much as any people living. There is not any place where there are better encounters to be had in that respect than at Naples, where your pain cannot be unprofitable if it be well managed, and accompanied with any merit. Finally, they give unto men and women names, which discover their humours. For they call them of Basilicata rash, them of base Calabria dull, and the women of Consence wilful, those of Beneuent rude and gross, those of Capova proud, those of Naples busy, and those of Bruides idle. The Neapolitans, like to all other Italians, keep no great good cheer in their houses, but their whole delight is to make themselves fair, and to be well appareled, employing all their expenses in outward show. The women are so sumptuous in their apparel, as the meanest seems by that she wears a Queen, and they had rather pass whole days without eating, than not to be gorgeously appareled when as they show themselves unto the world, and they that have not the means to be so brave, work day and night in silk or some other things, to the end they may show themselves on Sunday and entertain this vain pomp.   

¶ The Riches of the Realm of Naples.  
THe people of this country might justly hold themselves as happy as any in Europe, if they were not so molested and oppressed by officers; for they have not only the infallible abundance of all things, but they have also a great commodity to vent them into the estate of the Church and other Provinces: and that which may make them live at their ease, is their navigation and ancient commerce with the Venetians, to whom the people of Poville and Calabria show themselves wonderfully affected for this consideration, for that the greatest part of their traffic is with this Nation, without whom, they should endure much, as hath been seen of late years, when as all traffic was defended by reason of the plague; besides, the Venetians have held divers towns in Poville, and have been held for friends until the time of the Norman kings: so as, as well in regard of this remembrance, as of the foresaid interest, the Neapolitans have a special inclination to love them that are under this signory: There is not any Province in Italy that sends forth more things of her own increase: for she sells unto strangers great store of nuts and almonds, which they sand into Ba●barie and Alexandria: she vents her saffron into divers places: she furnisheth Genova and Tuscaine with silks: she sends oil to Venice and to other places, wines to Rome, and horses, lambs, and sheep to many countries. Poville doth furnish Venice, Sclavonia, and Tuscaine with flesh. The wine of Saint Severin is wonderfully esteemed and of great price at Rome. Base Calabria sends coral to other provinces, and Manna which is more esteemed than any other. Castra is famous for the oils which are bought there, and the merchants of Genova especially make it a good trade.  
The king of Spain draws out of this realm two millions and 500000 ducats yearly, comprehending the free gift of a million, and two hundred thousand ducats, which is given every two year to his Majesty, the which is now reduced to an ordinary rent, like to the one and thirty grains which are paid for the lodging of soldiers, and entertainment of certain gentlemen that do accompany the Viceroy, and are called Continuels: seven grains for the guard of Towers upon the coast, nine grains for the reparation of streets, & five grains for the provost of the field, from which revenues, deducting a million, and 800000 ducats in pensions and other things which are paid to divers, the remainder is not sufficient for the garrisons, foot, horse, galleys, and other expenses.   

¶ The Forces of the Realm of Naples.  
THe Neapolitans have been always inconstant and wavering, and wonderfully subject to revolts, so as in four hundred fifty four years, during the which, this realm hath been diversly held by Normans, French, Germane, Catalans, and Spaniards, they number seven and twenty famous rebellions of the Neapolitans, which have helped the pretensions and designs of one and other, who, it may be, would not so easily have yielded to the wills of Popes, who invited them, nor to their own ambition, nor to the spur of revenge, if this instability of their resolutions had not promised them much more, than the commodity which any other occasion propounded unto them.  
As for these frequent rebellions, although the subjects have been divers, yet we may set down two principal causes, that is to say, the greatness and power of the princes of the realm, and the election of the king, which did belong unto foreign princes, subject to change their wills, as well by reason of the short life of Popes, as for the diversity of them. For a part of the realm having always been divided among the princes that were borne in the country, who were great by reason of their dependences and their great revenues, have always had the hearts of their vassals obedient to their wills; so as they have often dared to threaten, yea to take arms against their own kings, and for their private interest, have disordered the whole realm: so as, having discovered the inclination of a Pope to depose a king, and having means by this emulation to effect some one of their de●figneses, without any other respect than to their private passions, they have so often (by offering to be fautors to the new king, and to the Pope's designs, and increasing the disobedience and errors of them that were suspected unto him) solicited the holy See to change; and making sometimes false interpretations unto kings of the just actions of Popes, they have given cause to be justly excommunicated and deposed, to the end they might afterwards breed that alteration of things, which they had formerly projected and desired to content their own passions. Wherein we may see how cunningly the Spaniards have sought to preserve themselves, and to confirm this estate, not only to remain united with the holy See; but also to bind Popes unto them, and to weaken by all means such as might, for any respect whatsoever, grow powerful within the realm, having principally won, by credit and by bond, the greatest part of the princes of Italy, and being assured by this means of all outward annoyance.  
And having truly considered to this purpose him that governs, and him that is governed, the one imperious and haughty, the other proud and untamed; the one hated for his sudden greatness, and by the inclination of many, and the other inclined to rebellions, and for this cause easy to be moved and favoured by pretendants: the one being so settled in the realm, as the other cannot easily shake of the yoke: they may justly either for the time, or for the wise care of him that governs, wonder at this success, concerning the which, in my opinion, as he hath been furthered by occasions, so he hath been assisted and seconded by the good conduct of his governors. For this realm being come unto the king of Spain, all lets which might breed a confusion in the country have been taken away, with this resolution to maintain it; and the prince hath sufficiently assured the possession of this estate, yea in all motives of war: for that the pretensions of the French being mortified by a peace made in the year 1559. and especially by reason of the civil wars which they have lately had; and the king of Spain having in Italy the Pope who respects him, and being allied to the duke of Savoy (notwithstanding that there hath been of late years some bad intelligence betwixt them, being in like manner at unity with the great Duke of Austria by means of the new alliance: having moreover at his devotion them of Genova, and the Luquois being without force, and the Venetians not desirous to attempt any thing against him, there remains nothing but to be assured of the chief men of the realm of Naples. The which hath been partly effected, in giving some entertainment, and especially to them that are favoured in Court; leaving public administrations seldom to great men, and that with great restrictions and limitations: punishing enemies and suspected persons severely, and nor admitting easily nor suddenly any complaints against governors: for that by the first, the subject grows loving and well affected, and feeds himself with hope of greater matters: and by the second they suffer him not to win credit with the people: and by the two last they prevent all troubles by the severity of the punishment; but much more, whenas no man shall be able to assure himself, that he hath means to justify his action. Moreover by the first, the subject being alured by such a demonstration, seeks daily by all means to show himself more thankful, and to merit more with his Prince, & spends all that he hath to raise in view of the world that petty title of Lord, Knight, Colonel, or such like, which he hath given him; so as by his advancement he becomes faithful, and doth so impoverish himself by his expense, as afterwards he hath no more courage, neither for himself, nor for others, and that as well by reason of hope, as of necessity, he cannot retire himself from his affection and service. With the second, they take away all means to make a great train, and with the other two, for that they do equally suppress open and suspected enemies, it is a cause why every man proceeds plainly, and governs himself so wisely, as the Prince may assure himself of the thoughts and actions of his subjects and vassals, who are all gentlemen or husbandmen, and the nobleman or gentleman having no means to execute any enterprise without the help of the people, whom the Spaniards support openly against them, especially in matters of justice, it happens that he is forced to endure with patience many things that are distasteful; and the people shall in vain attempt any sedition without the conduct of gentlemen. Finally there is such a discord set betwixt these two orders, as living divided with a manifest dislike, the men remain, touching this point, much weakened: moreover they do entertain among the Nobles some dissension, for that they favour one more than another, and sometimes the enemies of the one and the other rise, so as by this division, the forces of the realm, remain dismembered, and the king of Spain in outward appearance, hath no cause to fear any important reuoult of his subjects, and the rather, for that there is not any one that favours their designs, by reason of the estate of the affairs of Italy, which desires rest, but especially for the good amity of the apostolic Sea, with whom the king of Spain hath purchased so great authority, as at this day he hath a great share of the Pope's election, having bound many Cardinals unto him, either in their promotions, or by the pensions which he gives them, and he hath also a particular care, as I have said, to have the Pope always his friend, for that he remembers well, what alterations Clement 7. and Paul 4. hate bred. He hath also very good intelligence with the signory of Venice, both for the good of his subjects of this realm, as to assure himself on that side, as well in this realm, as in Lombardie; wherefore he lives at quiet on that side, and hath no cause to fear others in this realm: for that he is prepared against the French and Turk, by the peace and friendship which he entertains in Italy, seeking to make himself as strong as possible he can by Sea, the which hath been always held to be the chief force of this realm, wherein all former invasions have been always assisted, and made more sure unto the enemy by means of the Sea. Wherefore, as well to hinder the enemy, as to secure his own at all occurrents, he is resolved to fortify himself by Sea, having the commodity of all things necessary to that effect.  
As for the men of war, there are four thousand Spanish footmen, which he doth commonly entertain in this realm, under divers captains, with a Colonel and an Auditor, and this body of soldiers is called the Regiment or Terzo of Naples. In the Castles of the realm, and Towers made for the guard of the coast, they do commonly maintain a thousand six hundred foot, comprehending the officers which are accustomed to be in these Castles. There are a thousand men at arms divided into sixteen companies, that is to say, five of Spaniards, and eleven of Italy, being sixty horse in a company, except the Viceroy's which hath a hundred, and that of Marc Antoine Colo●●e, of an hundred and ten.  
There are also four hundred and fifty light horse divided into five companies. Moreover in all the Provinces of the realm, there are five footmen enrolled for every hundred fires, and there are 4011454. fires, which after the rate of five for a hundred, make 240701. footmen in ordinary.  
These are named by the magistrates of every country: yet if they do not please the Captains, they must provide them others to their liking. They are reasonably well armed, and fit to defend than to make a war, and these footmen are called the battalion: and although that they be not paid but when they serve their Captains, yet the other officers have their ordinary entertainment.  
There are thirty and seven Galleys in this realm, that is to say, thirty and three of Naples, and four which are paid to the Genevois. The Galleys of Naples do commonly lie at Mole or Peer, without soldiers, and many times without half their galleyslaves, the which are hired by captains, merchants, gentlemen and others, to unlade their ships, and for other domestic services: so as on a time, eight Galliots having taken two Galleys of Sicily, near unto the Island of Capri, they spent a whole day before they could sand out five Galleys after the Turks, for that they could neither find rowers nor soldiers. And doubtless they hold, that the king of Spain will draw small service from the expense that he makes in these Galleys, the which are furnished with small store of artillery, and have commanders of little experience, and their slaves be Turks or condemned persons, whereof the one serve with disdain and danger, and the other have little experience, and are not fit to suffer the discommodities of the Sea.  
In like manner the Garrisons of Castles, as well of the three of Naples, as of others which are throughout the realm, are two third parts less than the king of Spain pays: and the greatest force of their artillery is in the new Castle, and in that of S. Erme at Naples, and in the Fort of Gaiette and the Castle of Capova, for all the rest is of no great moment. All their munition is not great, which doth plainly show the sparing and fraud of the king's Officers, as in other things which abound in the realm.  
This realm is very well peopled: the lands are for the most part divided among particular men of the realm, under divers titles, who have increased in number and decreased in reputation, both for that they are fallen to base persons, either by purchase or otherwise, for that the owners had wasted themselves in superfluous expenses: as also, for that these men had never any charge which might add any thing unto their honour. There are of them thirteen Princes, four and twenty Dukes, five and twenty marquesses, four score and ten Earls, and about eight hundred Barons, all which are bound to serve the king of Spain● in person for the defence of the realm. The Duke of Alba, in the war which Pope Paul the fourth raised against them, did levy in this realm twenty thousand foot, seven hundred men at arms, and one thousand five hundred light horse. The chief Forts are Naples with her three Castles, that is, the new Castle, Castle Ouo, and that of S. Erme, Mancia, Crotona, Tarentum, Gallipoli, Otranto, Brindes with the Fort of Saint Andrew, Monopoli, Bari, Trani, Barlette, Manfredonia, Mont Saint Ange, and Gaye●te and within the country, Catanzara, Consence, and Aquila.   

¶ The Government of the Realm.  
THe king of Spain hath commonly a viceroy in this realm, who remains at Naples, as well as his other officers; both for that it is the ancient abode of kings, as also for the beauty of the situation, and the concourse of the nobility of the realm, and of merchants both of the country, and strangers, and the habitation of many artizens; a man may draw from this city (as from an Abbridgement) a particular and distinct discourse of matters concerning this realm, for that they sand governors from thence into the twelve Provinces, and these governors are fix in number, termed also Viceroy's, ●●t Substitutes unto him of Naples. There is also a Captain in every place of the realm which is not a Baron's land. And for that they cannot appeal from these Captains and judges, but to the Viceroy of the Province, to the Precedent and to the Council of Naples, as it shall seem best unto the parties; the jurisdictions of the chief town have a perpetual flowing of suits, the which are prolonged by the Advocates and Notaries, called by them Masters of Acts, and by Proctors, and the Prisons of the Vicarage are filled with an infinite number of persons, we may easily thereby guess, that the judges want no work.  
There are also seven principal officers in this realm, besides the Viceroy, that is, the Constable, the Chancellor, the chief justice, the high Admiral, the high Treasurer, the great Protonotary, and the great Seneschal. There are four courts which they call seats, That is Capova, Nide, Montane, and Saint Gregory, whereas the Princes, Dukes, marquesses, and all the principal of the realm, and the other orders assemble to confer of public affairs.   

¶ The Religion, and that which concerns the Church.  
ALl the inhabitants of the Realm of Naples are held to be affectionate to the Romish Religion. As for the estate of the Church of this Realm, it is composed of twenty Archbishoprics, the which have many Bishops under them, and they are set down in this order.  
The Archbishop of Naples hath under him the Bishops of 

Nola.  
Pouzzole.  
Cerre.  
Ischia.    
The Bishop of Averse is not subject to any one.  
The Archbishop of Capova hath under him the Bishops of 

Sernie.  
Thiano.  
Caiazzo.  
Carinola.  
Cessa.  
Calui.  
Caserte.  
Venafri.  
Aquino.    
The Bishop of Mont Caffin, and the Abbot of the Monastery of the same place, so ordained by Pope john the two and twentieth, is not subject to any one.  
The Archbishop of Salerna hath under him the Bishops of 

Champagne.  
Capaccio.  
P●licastro.  
Nu●co.  
Sarno.  
Marsico.  
Nocera delli Pagani.  
Acierno.    
The Bishop of Ravel and Cave are not subject to any one▪  
The Archbishop of Amal●y hath under him these Bishop's 

Letter:  
Scala.  
Capri.  
Minori.    
The Archbishop of Surrente hath under him the Bishops of 

Vica.  
Massa.  
Castell'a Mare.    
The Archbishop of Conze hath under him the Bishops of 

Muro.  
Cagiano.  
Monteverde.  
Alcedonia.  
Saint Angelo de Lombardie.  
Bisache is united to that of Saint Ange.    
The Archbishop of Cirenze hath under him these Bishops 

Aquilonia.  
Potenza.  
Gravina.  
Tricaria.    
Matere, which is now an archbishopric, it was informer times under the Diocese ofCirenze, and is now united unto it.  
The Archbishop of Tarentum hath under him the Bishops of 

Motula.  
Castellaneta.    
The Archbishop of Brindes, to whom that of Otri is joined, hath under him the Bishop of  
Hostuni.  
The Archbishop of Otranto hath under him these Bishops 

Castro.  
Galipoli.  
Vgento.  
Leccia.  
Capo di Leuco.    
The Bishop of Nardo is not subject to any one.  
The Archbishop of Bari hath under him the Bishops of 

Bitonto.  
Malfetta.  
Giovenazzo.  
Ruu●.  
Salpe.  
Pulignano.  
Moneruino.  
Lavello.  
Conuersano.  
Bitetti.  
Andri.  
Bisegli.    
The Archbishop of Trani hath under him the Bishops of 

Montepeloso.  
Rapollo.  
Alessano.    
The Bishops of Monopoli, Melphi, and Troy are not subject to any one.  
The Archbishop of Maafredonea, called Siponto, to whom that of Mont S. Ange is joined, hath under it the Bishop of  
Vieste.  
The Archbishop of Beneuent hath under him the Bishops of 

Luceria.  
Ascoli.  
Firenzola.  
Telese.  
Saint Agata di Gotti.  
Alifa.  
Monteverde.  
Marsico Vecchio.  
Monte Marano.  
Auelin is joined wi●h Frequentin.  
Vico della Baronia.  
Ariano.  
Bojano.  
Bovino.  
Turibulense.  
Dragonaria.  
Vulturaria.  
Larino.  
Can.  
Termuli.  
Lesina.  
Trevento.  
Guardia Alfana.    
The Archbishop of Ci●ita di Chietti hath under him the Bishops of 

Aquila.  
Sulmona.    
Civita di Penna, and this Bishopric is joined with that of Atri.  
The Archbishop of Laucian hath under him the Bishops of 

Sora.  
Theramo.    
The Archbishop of Reggio hath under him these Bishoprics 

Cassano.  
Nicastro.  
Catanzaro.  
Crotone.  
Tropea.  
Opido.  
Castilia Mare della Bruca.  
Geraci.  
Squillaci.  
Nicotera.  
Bove.    
The Archbishop of Cosence hath under him the Bishop of Martoran.  
The Archbishop of Rossan hath no Bishop under him.  
The Bishop of Bissignan is not subject to any.  
The Archbishop of S. Severin hath under him the Bishops of 

Vmbriato.  
Saint Marco.  
Belcastro.  
Isola.  
Ficorentino.  
Strongoli.  
Mileto.  
Cariati.    
The Bishopric of the Island of Lipari is united unto that of Parenze, and both are subject to the Archbishop of Messina.  
The Archbishops and Bishops have good revenues, and I will speak one world in the conclusion of this discourse, that among all the places of devotion which are at Naples, there is one which is called the mount of Pity, which spends sixty thousand crowns a year, either in the feeding of them that are in it, or in alms, or in the nursing of 2000 Infants throughout the realm.   

¶ Kings of Naples.  
THere was never realm like unto that of Naples, which hath been so often taken and not ruined, and which being an enemy unto itself, hath made a show of liberty in a perpetual servitude, and of command, with the greatness of her enemies. For it hath but slipped from one hand to an other, and the succession hath been so full of inconstancy, as they have sooner seen a race extinct, than fully received, and quietly settled in the realm. I will abridge my discourse, and the number of her kings as much as I may, to the end I be not tedious.  
Roger Earl of Sicily, and by the testament of William Duke of Povillia and Calabria, was descended from Tankred, son to Richard of Normandy: he took the city of Naples from the Emperor of Constantinople, about the end of September in the year 1130. and suddenly was declared king of Naples and Sicily at Beneuent, by Pope Anacletus 2. who retained the homage.  
This realm continued to the discendants of Roger, until that king William, surnamed the good, being dead without lawful children, and the Barons of the realm having chosen king, Tankred, base nephew to this William, Clement 3. pretended that this realm was divolued unto the church, made war in Povillia, and after him Celestin 3 crowning and confirming the Emperor Henry 6. upon condition that he should recover this realm, as a fee of the church, invested him publicly, and so the S●●gneurie passed from the Normans to the Germane, who held it with little good fortune, for that the Emperor Frederick 2. son to the said Henry, being a persecutor of the ●●urch, was deprived of the Empire by Innocent 4. and withal, of the realm of Naples, the which was given to a son of the king of England, but he did not endeavour to expel Fredericks children, who had made themselves Masters of the greatest part.  
Vrbain 4. transported it to Charles of Anjou, Earl of Provence, and brother to S. Lewis, who was invested by Clement 4. upon condition, that he ●hould pay 40000. ducats yearly unto the holy See, with a white Hackeney.  
The succession of this realm continued by direct line in the house of Anjou, unto jone 1. niece to king Robert, at what time Vrbain 6. transferred it to Charles of Duras, who descended from a brother of the said king Robert, and quite deprived this Queen, as excommunicate, for that she had been a Partisan in the creation of Clement 7. the Antipope, made at Fundy.  
After Charles, the children of Ladislaus reigned successively, who was also king of Hungary, and joane also, but not without difficulty. Lewis of Anjou, second son to the French king, was adopted by joane with the consent of Clement the Antipope: but he was slain before Bar, iby the troops of Charles of Duras.  
Lewis his son was crowned and invested in the realm by the same Clement: but he laboured in vain to become Master thereof.  
His son of the same name, being called to the conquest of this realm by Martin 5. who invested him, gave occasion to queen joane, to make offer thereof to Alphonso king of Arragon, who was then in Sardinia; but for that Alphonso, being come to Naples, could not endure that the whole government of the realm should pass under the queen's 〈◊〉▪ he sought to put her in prison, but she fled away secretly and declared the said Lewis her heir, disannulling the first adoption of Alphonso, who notwithstanding, after the death of Lewis, the queen declared Rene brother to Lewis her successor, and that after the queen's death Eugenius 4. pretended the realm to be fallen unto the Church: yet notwithstanding all this, Alphonso took Naples by force, and remained Master thereof, after which he did easily obtain the investiture of Eugenius; and in this manner the realm passed from the French to the Catalans. Rene left Lewis 11. the French, king for his successor in the realm of Naples.  
Charles 8. succeeded him, and made himself absolute Master of the realm of Naples. In the end, Lewis the 12. the French king, and Ferdinand king of Spain divided it betwixt them, after the flight of king Frederick: but the French lost it by their bad government, so as the Spaniards enjoyed it all: and the misfortune which fell upon king Francis at Pania, and the troubles which have since happened in France, have taken from our kings all means to recover it, but the interest they have unto this realm remains good.     

SICILY.  

The Contents.  
THe situation of Sicily, her triangular form, and the Capes which bond it, in ancient time joined to Italy, but since separated by an Earthquake, or by the fire of Montgibel. II Division of this Island into three regions, containing one hundred seventy three towns. III It abounds in bitumen, corn, muscadel, honey, pitch, saffron, wool, sugar canes mineral salt, precious stones, porphyre, marble, alabaster, and mines of gold, silver, and Iron. four Montgibell vomiting out flames of fire incessantly, yet covered with snow at all times. A lake and fountains of hot water. V Sicily inhabited sometimes by the Cyclopes and Estrigons, Giants, and divers other people in divers ages, with the humour and disposition of the Sicilians at this day. VI What the riches, and forces of this Island be. VII. Of the Parliament of Sicily. Of the free gift they offer every year unto the Viceroy. Of the three sovereign Courts which administer justice in this Island. Of the Captains of arms. Of the king's Council. Of the manner of Syndication. VIII. Inquisitors established for matters of Religion. Three Archbishoprics which have many Bishoprics under them. IX. Kings which have enjoyed or pretended the Realm.   

THis Island which yields not to any in the Mediterranean sea, lies betwixt Italy and Africa: it hath for bounds upon the North side, the Tuscaine sea, upon the East, the Adriatic and Ionian seas, towards the South, the sea of Africa, and upon the West, that of Sardinia. The extremities of this Island make a triangular form, whereof the three Angles produce so many Pomontories or Capes, whereof the one is Cape de Faro, in old time Pellorus, which is upon the North, and looks towards Italy, or the Cape of Calabria, called commonly Cauda Vulpij, the other is, Capo Passero, in old time Pachinum, towards the South and East, and looks towards Peloponnesus, the last is, Capo Boco, sometimes Lilybeum, upon the South and West, which looks towards Africa, from the which it lies one hundred miles, but Strabo and Ptolemy make it one hundred and eighty.  
This Capo Boco is from Cape de Calaris in Sardinia, one hundred and ninety miles, or according unto others, two hundred; but in those places which are nearest unto Italy, it is not distant above one thousand five hundred paces, and those which are most remote are three hundred miles distant, which is betwixt Drepane in Sicily, and Naples. And therefore all Authors in a manner are of opinion, that Sicily was in old time joined to Italy, as a Peninsula, and that since it was disjoined from the firm Land by an Earthquake, or else by reason of the burning of Montgibell, or else by the continual flowing and ebbing of the Ionian and Tuscan seas. There are great presumptions hereof, for that the sea in this straight, is not above 80 paces deep, and Rhegium, a town seated upon the Italian shore signifies breaking, and also, for that the earth is so brickle, and so full of holes, that it is in a manner wholly subject to winds: and the sea which lies betwixt Italy and Sicily, is so troublesome, as the Ancients have given unto those places, the names Scylla, and Charybdis; Scylla is a rock, and Charybdis is a gulf of the sea which turns round about, and both are very dangerous for ships.  
Finally, although that this Island be of a triangular form, yet her sides are crooked: for that part which is towards the East, is concave, and that which bends to the North, is somewhat crooked. That part which lies upon the North of Capo Boco, unto Cape de Faro, contains two hundred eighty one miles, or according unto others, two hundred eighty five, the South part, from Cape de Boco▪ unto Cape de Passero, one hundred ninety three miles, or as others writ, two hundred and forty, upon the East, from Cape de Passero, unto Cape de Faro, it contains one hundred and fifty miles, or according unto others, one hundred seventy and five. Wherefore the one makes this Island to have seu●n hundred miles in compass, and the other but six hundred twenty four. But Possidonius, by the report of Strabo, sets down but five hundred and fifty.  
This Island is set like unto Sardinia, in the fourth Climate, betwixt the eleventh and twelfth Parallel, whereas the longest day in Summer is of fourteen hours, and two third parts, and in these two Islands the Star Canope is seen, which is the clearest Star of all those that are in the ship of Argos, which Star is scarce seen in any part of Italy.  
The whole Island is divided into three Regions, which are called valleys; of those, the one is Valdemona, the second is, the valley of Neeti or Noto, and the third is, the valley of Mazara. Vademona (compassed in by Teria and Imeria) contains the Angle of Cape de Faro, and it is in that place, whereas the Messeniens and Cataneans dwelled in the time of Ptolemy, it embraceth the towns and countries of Messina, Catania, Melazzo, Tauromina, Cifalu, and Montgibel. The valley of Necti, or Noto, is compassed in by the rivers of Teria and Gele, containing all the Angle of Cape de Passero, and it was the place whereas the Siracusans had their abode, and in it are contained the towns and countries of Noto, Siracusa, Lentini, Augusta, and Castrogiovanni. The valley of Mazara contains the rest of the Island, in which is the Angle of Capo Boco, there did the Orbites and the Segestains devil: it comprehends the towns and countries of Termine, Palermo, Monreale, Mont Saint julian, Erice, Trapani, Mazara, Marsala, and Girgenti.  
The noblest part of the Island, is that which lies towards the East: for that it contains in it the famous cities of Messina, Catania, and Siracusa, with the ports of Messina, Saracusa, and Augusta; among which ports, that of Messina, hath the praise for beauty and pleasantness, and that of Augusta, for greatness, the which was so spacious, as it could not be fully fortified. There is also that of the Island of Magnisi, the which was, as some hold, the great port of Siracusa. The Island of Magnisi, is called a Peninsula, and may contain about thirty miles in compass, with an Isthmus, not above twenty or five and twenty paces broad. An excellent situation for a city. Siracusa was in old time a great city, whose walls had in compass, according unto Strabo, one hundred and eighty stades: comprehending the Island of Artigia, to the which they did pass by a bridge, 
An Italian Stade contains 125. paces.  but now it is joined to the rest, whereas at this day the city stands; there doth rise with an admirable spring of water, that famous fountain of Aretusa. Towards the North, there is not any famous city, but that of Palermo, where the Viceroys make their residence, in which there is an University: this city, for the greatness of the situation, for the multitude of inhabitants, for the concourse of nobility, for the stateliness of the building, and for the pleasantness and riches of the Territory is such, as it might do honour to two Sicily's. It had no port, but they have made a very spacious one, with an admirable Peer, not unworthy the greatness of Rome. Then follows Trapani, a strong town with a large port: in this country grows delicate wines, called Bocasie: the inhabitants of Tripani, are held the best sea men in all Sicily. Upon the Southern part, is the city of Marzala, which the Ancients did call (of the Promontory where it stands) Lelibeum. Then follows Girgenti, with a salt Lake, the which in summer doth congeal and become perfect salt. Within the Land, the places of greatest note are, Catania, sometimes a great and goodly town, it is yet famous, by reason of the University, and near unto it, there is a forest which hath eight miles in compass, Next is, Lentini, which hath a Lake, whose fishing is farmed for eighteen thousand crowns a year. Castrogiovanni, a town containing four thousand families, with a wholesome air, and a fertile country, in an eminent seat, the which they hold to be the navel of the Island. There are also mines of excellent salt. Noto and Tauromina are places very strong by nature: and Noto contends for greatness with Siracusa. It stands upon an high rock inaccessible of all sides, but by one narrow passage. It is the Key of the Realm of Sicily on that side; for that, under the Cape of Passero there is a good port, but without any Fort, and there are in all Sicily one hundred seventy three towns.  

The Quality of the Country.  
THis Island is full of fire, which it casts out abundantly, and yet it yields great store of all sorts of first-fruits, it is exposed to the winds, and generally hollow and full of Sulphur and Bitumen, matters fit to engender and nourish fire: which is the cause that it doth often vomit forth flames and sometimes vapours; and this is the reason why there are many springs of hot waters. This Island carries corn in such abundance, as in some places, the inhabitants gather a hundred measures for one; and therefore they call those places the fields of a hundred charges. It doth also bear excellent wines, which are nothing inferior to the best of Italy, especially, those which they call sweet muskadels. It abounds in honey, pitch, saffron, wool, and such like, and doth also produce the cane, which they call Canna Melle, from whence the draw by decocktion great store of sugar, especially in the town of Schizza. It yields all kinds of first-fruits which are very pleasing, with Cardus and store of the roots of wild Palms. There they also found mineral salt in many mountains, besides that which is made of the Sea water. There is much silk, especially near unto Messina, and much game for hunting, with store of fish.  
This Island doth also yield some precious stones, for they find the Agate, upon the shore of the river of Agatha, and they dig the stone called Berill near to the town of Grateria. There is also Porphire of two kinds, that is to faith, read, mingled with white and green, and of diaper read more precious than the Porphire.  
There are quarries of black marble, and others of divers other colours.  
There is also marble in the valley of Mazara, and mines of gold, silver and iron, and also of diamonds: and there grows coral betwixt Drepane, and the Island of Elie.  
They make mention of these wonders in Sicily, that although Montgibel burns continually, yet upon the top where the fire is greatest, it is always covered with snow: They say that this mountain hath three score and ten miles in compass, on the East and South side, it is covered with vines, and upon the West and North, are woods full of wild beasts. In the Territory of Menci, is to be seen that famous lake of Palicori, called at this day Naptia, which casts forth water extremely hot, by three mouths, and whilst it boiles it stinks wonderfully, and makes a great noise. Near to Montgibell there is a fountain of cold water which is sharp, and yet it boiles, whereas cloth, being dipped before in watermixt with galls, becomes suddenly black. Near upon Drepane, there is a fountain, whose water doth provoke looseness as soon as ever it is taken. In the territory which is near to Cape de Boco, there are cocks and hens which exceed in greatness all of that kind that are in Europe and Africa.   

¶ The Manners of the ancient Sicilians:  
THis Island was sometime inhabited by the Cyclopes and Lestrigons, that is to say, Giants, barbarous and inhuman people▪ as some fables and histories, yea and bones found at divers times, do e witness. Afterwards the Sicanes, Spaniards by nation dwelled there, and the Grecians transported colonies thither: yea the Trojans landed there after the ruin of Troy, and the Candi●ts arrived there with their king Minos. There were also colonies sent by the Roman● into Sicily, in the time of the first punic war, and by Augustus. It hath been held by the Emperors of Constantinople, than it was possessed by the Goths, who after seventeen years, where expelled by Bellissarius. The Sarrazins become Masters thereof, and were afterwards chased away by the Normans. Then came there a great multitude of Lombard's into this Island, and after them Germans, but they were expelled by Clement 7. and the French succeeded them, than the Arraganois become Masters. So as the manners and humours of the Inhabitants of this Island, have been divers, according to the people that have held it; and this change hath bred a strange medlee of their dispositions. They say, among other things of them of Agrigentum, that they did build as if they should live ever, and did banquet as if they were dying hourly.  
They had a sacred place, where they did swear and take their oaths; writing that which they did swear upon a table of wood, the which they did cast into the water which came from a fountain, called by them Crateres: if they swore truly, the table floated upon the water, if otherwise, it sunk unto the bottom. The humours of the Sicilians have always been found inconstant and subject to all winds, neither had they ever any certain resolution: they were eloquent in their speech, and Diodorus and Aristotle affirm that they invented the art of Rhetoric & the Eglogues; and Pliny and plutarch say, that they have innented Clocks, and some Engines for war. This was the country of that great Mathematician, Archimedes.   

The Manners of them at this day.  
THe Sicilians are for the most part subtle witted, and eloquent by nature; by reason whereof, Apul●ius terms them men with three tongues. Moreover they are pleasant, full of sentences, and witty in their answers, but very great talkers: Moreover they are full of suspicion, envious, and sometimes troublesome in their conversation: they offend others easily, and are soon drawn to take revenge of any injury that is done them: They are great flatterers; yet they have this good in them, that they entertain strangers courteously, they are fit to invent, and apt for the study of speculative sciences and for practise: they are noted to be naturally more crafty than wise, more subtle than sincere, and great lovers of novelties and contentions. They look couriously into the actions of those that have any office or charge amongst them, and hold always that for done, which they would do, if they were in the same. They are obedient to justice, faithful to their Prince, ready to serve him, and officious in the first hea●e of friendship: their nature consists of two extremities, for that they are very fearful, and extreme hardy: they are fearful in treating of their own private affairs, for that they have a great care of their particular interest, and for that they would not trouble it, they transform themselves into any shape, like unto Protheus, submitting themselves to any one, whom they think able to give an end to their designs, and they serve them in such sort, as they seem to be only borne to that end. On the other side, they are wondefully bold and hardy, when there is any question of the public interest, and then they proceed after a far different course. They hold, that they have deserved much of the Crown of Spain, for that they gave themselves voluntarily, and they think, that they own them the full observation of the Articles, with the which they were received. They are wonderful jealous of their privileges, and they hold, that all things are lawful for the maintenance and defence thereof; assuring themselves that they cannot be held rebels, for any popular sedition that shall happen.  
It is an old humour of the Noble men of Sicily, to seek some intelligence in the King of Spain's Court, sometimes with him that is in greatest credit, sometimes with the secretaries; and he that is known unto the king, will insinuate with the king himself. But all are accustomed to contract with the Regent's. They do this for two reasons, the first, in regard of the affairs which may happen daily in court, and the other to satisfy their natural inclination, which is to be perpetual censors of the actions of the Viceroy, his favourites and officers: & in truth, innocency is not able to hinder this censure, for that in writing they lay hold of every bruit and flying tale: the which they do the more boldly, when as they understand that the Viceroy is come to this charge with any difficulty, and that he is envied, and hath weak supporters in court, or that he hath not a witty Agent, who is able to pierce into the wicked practices which shall be made against his Master.   

¶ The Riches of the Island.  
THis Island was in old time held for the Garne● or corn lost of Italy, and especially of Rome, as it is many times at this day: so as the Sicilians make much money of the sale of their corn, as also, of their oils and silk, whereof they make a great quantity, especially at Messina, where the best is. The king of Spain draws yearly out of this Island three hundred thousand crowns, that is to say, a hundred thousand crowns, one within an other, of the custom of wheat: a hundred thousand crowns of weights and merchandise, and a hundred thousand crowns of buildings, bridges, tents, and gifts, which in Sicily they call secrets. There is also the extraordinary revenues, as the confiscations of the great court, the sale of places that are voided, the benefit of the Croisado, and of extraordinary gifts, which amount to great sums. The expense, which is most commonly greater than the receipt, consists in the payment of officers, horsemen, footmen, galleys, garrisons, debts, and recompenses.   

¶ The Forces of the Island.  
THe king of Spain doth commonly entertain good garrisons, especially upon the sea coast, which the Viceroy doth fur●ish, when there is need, with men & captains. Palermo and Messina are good and strong towns. There are many strong castles, which would trouble him much, that would attempt the conquest of this Island.   

¶ The Government.  
THe parliament of Sicily hath great power and authority to cross a viceroy that is not very judicious: who cannot obtain the free gift which they offer every third year, nor any other extraordinary thing, nor yet make any new decree, touching the public, without a grenerall consent of the realm, which is given in Parliament, by three sorts of persons, called by the Sicilians, the three arms of the realm: Which be all the Prelates, as well those that have great revenues, as others; and this assembly is called the ecclesiastical arm: all the Barons called the military arm: and all the king's towns, whereof every one sends a deputy, and they call this the Seigneuriall, or lordly arm.  
The Viceroy calls these men by his letters, commanding them to come at a certain day, to the place where he is: being assembled, and the Viceroy being set in a royal seat, he propounds briefly unto them the cause that had moved him to call them together, and what he desired of them. Then the first Prelate doth rise, and tells him, that they have understood his proposition, and that after some consultation, they will make him a speedy answer. After this, they make choice of a place, whereas the three arms should assemble apart, and in every place they treat most commonly of seven points, and the arms give advice one unto an other, of thatwhich either of them had concluded, to the end they may know wherein they have agreed or dissented.  
The first point which they most commonly treat of, and for the which they are called, is touching the free gift, and whether they shall give it or no: so as if they conclude, that in regard of the hard estate of the time they cannot give any thing, the parliament is ended, & there is no more to be done. But they resolve to give, than the second point of their treaty is of the quantity: the th●●, of the means how to raise it: the fourth, in how many years they shall pay it: the fift, with the conditions with the which they shall give it: the sixt, of the graces and retributions which they shall demand: and in the seventh, they treat of deputies, to whom they shall give the charge to see the execution of all that which is resolved in parliament. The town of Messina, for the quality of the situation, the commodity of the port, and the condition of the inhabitants, hath always been the key of the realm, and been much esteemed of the Masters of this Island, to whom the Messinois have most commonly done great services, beginning from the first time of the Romans, from whom they obtained great immunities and freedoms, and so continued the same course with other princes, so as there is not any subject town in the world▪ which hath so great, and such important privileges as this. We must add hereunto, a natural inclination of the Messinois to the preservation thereof: the troubles of the Viceroys have most commonly grown by the breach of their privileges, wherein they are so resolute, as they will endure all extremities, rather than see them infringed.  
There are three Sovereign Seats, or jurisdictions in Sicily, which manage all matters of justice, the great Court, the sacred Conscience, and the demeans or Patrimony.  
In the first, there is a Precedent, six judges, the king's Advocate, and the Protector of the demeans when he pleaseth. The Precedent and the king's Advocate are most commonly for life, the judges are changed every two years. There are three civil, and three criminal, which they change at the end of the first year, and the civil become criminal, and the criminal, civil.  
The second Seat, called the sacred Conscience, which signifies as much as the court of Appellations, is composed of a regent for life, and of three judges, whose offices continued but two years, and it is at the disposition of the Viceroy to appoint the judges of other causes.  
The third Court or jurisdiction called the demeans or Patrimony, which is like unto the Chamber at Rome, or the summary at Naples, hath a Precedent, a Conseruator, a Protector, a judge, and four Masters of Accounts; and for that of necessity all the Officers of the said three Courts (except the Conseruator, and Protector of the demeans, who may be strangers) must be borne within the realm, or have married Sicilian wives, and dwell there, there follows of necessity a suspicion of a thousand designs and interests, which they may have in causes which they manage: so as to prevent all inconveniences which might happen, and for the indemnity of justice, and the revenues, the Viceroy must of necessity assist thrice a week, in all causes that are handled before these Magistrates, giving one day for civil causes, another for criminal, and the third for the demeans, or revenues.  
Matters of justice are thus handled by persons, to whom the Viceroy gives great authority, according to occasions, and especially in criminal causes, and they that exercise this jurisdiction, are called Captains at arms. These Captains are of three sorts: the first is of them that are deputed to pursue banished men, which are accustomed to be four, with some soldiers on horse back, who are also paid: the second, is of them that the Viceroy appoints for a time to examine and punish a crime: the third is, when as the Viceroy sends one of the demeans, and to the end he may see matters executed he gives him the power of a captain at arms. There is also a fourth kind, when as by reason of any occurrents of war, the Viceroy gives the three valleys of the realm in government: Into every one of these valleys he sends a noblman, when there is any suspicion of war, with a certain number of foot and horse, and great authority, as well civil, as criminal. These noblemen are also called captains at arms: but if they be great men, as Dukes, or Princes, the Viceroy doth honour them with the title of Lieutenant.  
Many times the Viceroy gives so great authority to captains at arms sent against banished men, as they commit great insolences, and are the cause of a Sindication which follows, by the which they are deposed, and rigorously punished, and he much blamed that hath employed them: wherefore, it shallbe fit for him to restrain their rashness, who are more prejudicial to a realm, than banished men themselves, if the Viceroy keeps them not in awe.  
Besides the said officers, there are two other private jurisdictions at Messina and Palermo; at Messina, there is a Court established by the king, with judges, and sovereign authority, as well in civil as criminal causes; and Palermo hath a Praetor for civil causes, and a Captain for criminal: Not Citizen may be drawn out of his jurisdiction, and if a cause of the Territory of Palermo be in the great Court, it shallbe sent back to the court of Palermo, and the like is done with them of Messina.  
There is also another member of justice, which consists in the Audience, as well public as private, which the Vice roy gives, wherein he dispatches many causes summarily and fully, as they say. This Audience is the daily bread of this realm, and the first and perpetual touch of the Viceroys wisdom and judgement, especially, at his entering into his governmet, for that a general impression is of very great importance.  
There is the kings sacred Council, whereas all the Officers of the great Court of the D●meanes assist, and sometimes the Master of the Portulane. This Council is assembled for matters of great importance, whenas the Court alone, or that of the demeans may be suspected, and whenas the Viceroy will proceed, with greater assurance of justification, in some dangerous particulartie, or whenas they are to make any good provision for occasions of war.  
In the Court of the demeans, they are to keep an account of the king's revenues, as well of that which comes in, as of that which goes out of his coffers. In the business of the imposition for wheat, which is treated of in the Court of the demeans, there are four things to be observed, that is, the quantity of wheat, the price which is given, the requests which are made from abroad, and the quantity of the ordinary newly imposed.  
The quantity of wheat comes to the Viceroys knowledge, either by revelation, or by the estimate, and computation of their ha●●est. Revelation is, whenas the Viceroy sends forth commissioners, forcing every man to discover his wheat, wherein there is always some fraud committed. The Estimate of the harvest is made after this manner; they make account, that they sow in Sicily a thousand charges of wheat, and then they may not transport any thing, for that they shall have need of it in the Island to feed the inhabitants, and for their seed: but if they find they have a million of charges in the end of their harvest, then may they vent out two hundred thousand, unless the king will retain some part for good respects. And if the harvest be of the third kind, the realm shall have a million and two hundred thousand charges of wheat, whereof they may draw forth four hundred thousand charges.  
The price riseth from the quantity, which is set by persons deputed by the Viceroy, who are judicious and of a good conscience, and this is the second consideration.  
The third consideration is of requests which comes from abroad, whereof the king must be well advertised, before that he doth publish the new impost.  
The fourth consideration, is the quantity of the ordinary, that is to say, the charge which doth always follow the transportations without other imposition, and this must be known, to be able to make the design of a new impost.  
Touching this business for whea●e, there is a principal commissary called the Master Portulane, who hath a particular charge, and there are other Portulanes under his jurisdiction, yet they are not created by him, but by the Viceroy: To him all the Viceroys letterstouching, the transportation of wheat and such like matters, are directed. There are eight Chargers within the realm, five principal, and three that have but small dealings. Private men bring their wheat unto these Chargers, to be delivered into the ships: Every Charger hath a Keeper of his Magazine or Storehouse, which is an office that the King gives, and he pays well for it that will have it, for the profit is great that the increase of grain brings unto him; and for this, he gives good caution and assurance. This Mass being delivered unto the Chargers is called the heap, and there is nothing that doth sooner mutiny them of the Island, than when the Vice▪ roy doth touch this heap.  
Affairs, by reason of the reveneves, are troublesome to the Viceroy, and bring danger to his reputation; they are troublesome, for that the king's necessities force him to be sharp, and a bad payer of his debts: from whence grows, the common discontent of those which have credit in Court, and the continual complaints which come unto the king's ears, the which are such, many times, as it were fit they were satisfied. The danger grows only from the business of wheat, whereof they treat in the Court of the demeans, for interests of rates: for that the officers have always some design, and the Viceroys resolution is of very great importance: wherefore, he must be very well informed of this particularity, lest they draw him to some inconvenience by his conclusions.  
Sometimes upon complaint made by them of the Island unto the king, there are commissioners sent, to examine and censure the actions of the Vice roy, his favourites, and officers, and this is called a Syndication. 
Syndication, what it is.  This Syndication, may justly be termed the guard of justice and laws, the remedy of grievances, the bridle of officers, the general content of the whole people, and the greatest sign of the princes holy intention. For this cause they are all inclined to sand often, and to grant it willingly when the Estates demand it. But for that so good a medicine is given with contrary conditions to that it aught, to work any good effect; it happens that commonly it is more hurtful, than the disease itself. This Syndication comes into Sicily, either sent by the king upon his own motion, or demanded by the Realm. The first is bad, but the second is much worse; for that of necessity, when the king is moved of himself to sand a Syndicke or Censor into any Estate, he must hold the governor to be a weak man, or subject to his own profit, or both; and the Syndicks which know the Prince's thought, by the force of their instructions, do afterwards hold that course in their proceeding, as they force the Viceroy to departed with loss, or to remain with disgrace and shame.  
As for the Syndication which is required by the realm, the king doth presently conceive one of the aforesaid opinions, if he have it not before: and moreover, he finds that they bear him little respect in that estate, and that either through the sufferance of his bad officers, or by his own want of judgement, he hath so offended every man, as he hath little hope remaining for defence.   

¶ The Religion, and that which concerns the Church.  
THe inhabitants of this Island follow the Romish Religion: They have the fathers, Inquisitors, who are appointed there, to have a care of matters of Religion, and the faith. They call their jurisdictions the holy office. The prelates have great authority in this Island, and show what credit they have among the people in their parliaments, whereas they contradict the Viceroy openly, and debate with him of his demands, as they think the people's estate doth require. There are three Archbishoprics, that is to say, Palermo, Messina, and Montroyall, who have Bishoprics under them. For the Archbishop of Palermo hath under him the Bishops of Agrigentum, Mazara, and Malta. The Archbishop of Messina hath under him the Bishops of Lipsaleda, Pace, Lipa●i, pat, and S. Marc. The Archbishop of Montroyall hath under him the Bishops of Siracusa, and Catanea.   

¶ The Kings.  
THe same that have enjoyed or contended for the Realm of Naples, have also held and contended for the Realm of Sicily.      

Of the Estate of the king of Spain  

THE ISLAND OF SARDINIA.  

The Contents.  
1 DEscription of this Island, her length, breadth, and under what Climate. Little inhabited for the pestilent air. Among other singularities there are Muscrions whose skins serve to make Targets: and the herb Sardonica, which makes men dye laughing. II Manners of the ancient and modern inhabitants of Sardinia; their riches and mean forces. The government, religion, and number of Archbishops, like unto that of Sicily. And how after possession of divers Nations it was united to the Crown of Spain.   

SArdinia is a great Island, and almost like unto Sicily; it extends from North to South in length, and is only eight miles distant from the Island of Corsica. Upon the East, it hath the Tuscan sea, and of that side lies Sicily, distant from it some two hundred miles. Upon the South, it is bounded in by the sea of Africa, from the which, it is about one hundred and sixty miles: and on the West, it hath the Sea of Sardinia. The Moderns give it two hundred and forty miles in length, and ninety in breadth, and in circuit five hundred. It is under the fourth Climate, and comprehends the eleventh and twelfth Parallel, where the longest day in the year is of fourteen hours and almost three quarters.  

¶ Quality of the Country.  
THis Island is duided into two Regions or parts, that is to say, into the Cape of Calaris, which lies towards Corsica, where it is somewhat rough and hilly: and into the Cape of Lngudor, which looks towards Africa. This Island bears fruit of all sorts, and it abounds in Corn, yea it would equal Sicily, if it were well manured: It hath also silver; but the air is so bad, as it is well inhabited, for that the plague doth breed ordinarily there; the which happens in summer, and in the most fertile places, that is to say, at cape Lugudor, where there are many Moors & Marshes: for as for the cape of Calaris, which is hilly, as we have said, and subject to the Northerly wind, the air is better. They have store of cattles, and they sand forth corn, hides, cheese, and they make excellent white wines: They have no oil of olives, by the negligence of the inhabitants, who dress their meat with suet, and make oil of Linseed, or of Lintills. Among other beasts, they have the Muscrions, which are not found in any other part of Europe: their skins and hair is like unto the stag, or as Strabo saith, a goat, and their horns like to a sheep, but bending backward: they live in the mountains, and run very swiftly, their skins being dressed, are those which are called Cordovants. There are great store of wild Boars, Stages, and wild Goats for hunting; they have no hurtful beasts, except the Fox, and another little creature like unto the Spider. It breeds good store of horses, which be not great, but yet they arestrong and courageous. In this Island, there grows an herb called Rianuncula, in old time Sardonica, which doth shrink up the sinews of them that eat it, and makes them die in such sort, as they seem to laugh even at the last gasp. They keep their rain water in Winter, for their use in Summer, for than they want it. There are pools and lakes full of fish, and in like manner fountains of hot water, which are very good and wholesome. There are also Mines of Sulphur, Alum, and Salt.   

¶ The Manners of the Ancient.  
THe Carthaginians (who made themselves masters of Sardinia) would not suffer them that were borne in the country to till and manure the ground: The Sarrazins have held it, and then the Pisans, and lastly it fell into the hands of the kings of Arragon, so as now the king of Spain carries it among his other titles; and they have lived sometimes after one sort, sometimes after another, according to the Conqueror's nature and disposition.   

The Manners of them at this day.  
THe Inhabitants of Sardinia are strong of body, and of a brown and swart complexion, by reason of the heat of the sun. They are not very civil, and are much given to labour and to hunting: they eat gross meats willingly; but they entreat strangers courteously and live quietly among them, yet some say that they are full of cruelty. They are much given to thieving and piracy at Sea.   

¶ The Riches.  
THey make good store of money of their wine which they carry to Rome, and of their horses, which they fell at a good rate to strangers, they are so courageous and of great toil. They make also some money of their Muscrions skins, which they carry into Italy.   

¶ The Forces.  
THe king of Spain doth always entertain some garrisons in this Island, but the small number of the Inhabitants will always make it to be of less force. Calaris is the chief of the whole Island, it is a good town and well fortified, seated upon a hill, and hath under it a goodly and spacious Port. There is also Oristagne, the which is not well peopled, by reason of the bad quality of the air which grows by the nearness of the fens: it hath a port, and a river near unto it, which is the greatest of the whole Island. Then have you Sassari, a town of importance, where there is an Aqueduct to be seen that is twelve miles long. We may not omit Alghes-Bosa, a good town, a wholesome air, and a fertile country, with a spacious haven where the ships of Genoa and of Catalognia do commonly lie. Besides this Port which is six miles long, the Island hath two others able to receive any army, the one is that of Cape Gallea, and the other Carbonara, both desert. There are other towns in the Island, as Chia, Orexia, and other strong places.   

¶ The Government.  
THe king of Spain hath a Viceroy in this Island, who remains at Calaris, and disposeth of all things. The justice is in a manner like unto that which is practised in Sicily.   

¶ The Religion, and that which concerns the Church.  
THe Sardinians are Romish Catholics, and there are Inquisitors in this Island, as in that of Sicily. There are three Archbishops, that is to say, he of Calaris, who hath under him the Bishops of Sulo, Dolia, and Puella: He of Saffaris, who hath under him the Bishops of Sora, Plonata, Ampuria, Gisace, or Gerarda, Castre, Othae, and Bosane: He of Albore hath under him the Bishops of Vssella, Saint just, and Terra Alba: They of Sivita and Galtella are privileged.   

¶ The Princes.  
THe Carthagenians possessed this Island, but they were expelled by the Romans: The Saracens invaded it afterwards, upon the declining of the Roman Empire; after which, it was taken by the Genevois and the Pisans, and the Pope having wrested it out of their hands, gave it in fee to the king of Arragon, and by this means it came into the power of the king of Spain.     

THE ESTATE OF MILAN.  

The Contents.  
1CIrcuit of the Duchy of Milan: The chief towns: among others Milan peopled with two hundred thousand inhabitants: in former times possessed by the Gauls, Romans, Goths, Huns, Lombard's, and others, and how in the end it came into the hands of the kings of Spain. II Rice growing in abundance near unto Milan. Fertility of the soil of Pavia, and therefore called the Garden of Milan. III Milanois fit for arms, learning, and merchandise. four What number of ducats the king of Spain draws yearly out of the Duchy of Milan, besides the free gifts. V What soldiers both horse and foot he hath continually in pay there. VI Milanois ruled by a governor, and by the Senate of Milan, consisting of twelve Doctors, some Prelates, and certain gentlemen Milanois. VII. Genealogy of the Dul●eses of Milan.   

THe Duchy of Milan hath in circuit about three hundred miles. The chief town is Milan, from whence the who●e Duchy hath taken the name. This city is very well peopled, mighty, and strong seated in a pleasant and good situation, and it is at this day held, one of the chief cities of Europe. They number in it two hundred thousand inhabitants. The suburbs are very long and large; and make it much greater, and these suburbs are environed with water as well as the city, by two great channels, the one drawn from the river of T●sin, and the other from Adda, the which do water their meadows and fields, and make them very fruitful. By these channels, boats bring all things to Milan in so great abundance, as they are at a reasonable rate. The buildings are fair and stately, and there are in it a number of great and rich families. There have come out of this city four Popes, Alexander the second, Vrban the third, Celestin the fifth, and in our time Gregory. They admire three things in this city for their magnificence and stateliness, the Castle, the Domo or Cathedral Church, and the Hospital. Cremona stands in this Duchy, where there are goodly buildings, as well public as private: and the town of Lodi, which is rich. But these towns yield in greatness to Pavia, a good and an ancient town, sometimes the abode of the Lombard kings, in which there is an University.  
There is also Novara seated upon a little hill, wherein there are noble families: and Como a rich town, which gives her name unto a great Lake, which in old time was called Larius Lacus. In winter it hath two arms, whereof the one runs from the South unto the West, towards Como; and the other to the East, towards Leuca, whereas the river of Adda hath her passage. Strabo writes, that it hath eight and thirty miles in length, and four in breadth. The river of Adda passeth through the midst of this Lake, and yet their waters do not mingle, but the river doth float over the other. There are many castles and villages about this lake, which do beautify the place and make it exceeding pleasant. There is also an Island called Comacina, in the which there was in former times a fort, whereas the kings of the Lombard's did keep their treasure and jewels, as in a safe custody. The town of Como is famous, rich, and abounding in all things necessary for the life of man: The inhabitants are careful and industrious to be rich.  
The city of Milan was for a long time under the dominion of the Gauls, until that M. Marcellus the Consul, having defeated Virdumarus king of the Insubrians, made it subject to the Romans. The power of the emperors growing weak, this city was spoiled by many barbarous Nations, that is to say, by the Goths, Huns, and Lombard's. These last being expelled Italy by Charles the Great, this city obeyed the kings of France, and afterwards the Emperors of Germany. In the end it rebelled in the times of Frederick the first, and Frederick the second, Emperors, and had new lords, that is to say, the Galeaces, Viscontes, who had the title of Dukes given them afterward by the Emperor Wenceslaus, in the year 1395. These coming to fail, the Sforces succeeded in their place, who ended in the person of Francis. The French kings have long held this city, but in the end it fell into the hands of the King of Spain, with the whole Duchy, whereunto notwithstanding, the French kings do rightly pretend, as doth appear by the Genealogy of the Dukes of Milan.  

¶ The Quality of the Country.  
THere are many Lakes in this Country, and a great number of Rivers; the fields yield abundance of Corne. There grows also very good wine, and all sorts of first-fruits, and the Rivers and Lakes feed great store of fish. Near unto Milan, there grows such plenty of Rice, as it is not possible there should be more in the like quantity of ground. Near unto Cremona, there is store of Corn and Wine, and all sorts of fruit, of millet, and flax in great abundance. Near unto Lodi, there is so much Rye, Millet, Wine, Flax, and first-fruits, as it is not possible to be more; and besides, there are many meadows, whereas they feed great numbers of cattle. The Country about Pavia is so fertile, and so full of all first-fruits, and pasture, as they call it the Garden of Milan: there is also great store of Wildsoule, and abundance of fish. There can be nothing seen more pleasing, nor of greater profit, than the Country which is near unto Como.   

¶ The Manners of the inhabitants.  
THis Country breeds men fit for learning, arms, and merchandise, yet in some places they are gross and rude. They of Cremona have the reputation to be faithful. The people of Milan are wonderfully industrious. They of Lodi are fit for merchandise and arms, and to gather wealth. And they which live near unto Como, love labour, and are full of industry. They term the women of Pavia to be covetous, and desirous of gain; them of Milan, civil and courteous; them of Lodi, superstitious; and the women of Cremona sumptuous.   

¶ The Riches.  
MIlan is so full of all sorts of Artisans and Handicraftmen, as they say commonly, That who so will accommodat Italy, must ruin Milan. And these workmen are so industrious, and make every thing so well, as whatsoever goes from this city is held in great esteem. For we know well what price is given for harquebusses of Milan, and for all sorts of Arms that come from thence, for hilts of swords which are much regarded, for girdles and hangers, for lace, and for embroideries. So as we must confess, that this city doth draw a great mass of money from all the rest of Europe: adding hereunto their silk stockings, which are much esteemed, and their Rice, which they impart unto many other Provinces: after this, Lode makes such store of Cheese, as it is sent unto many other parts of Italy; and to be short, Milan doth furnish the Grisons and Swisses with much of her fruit, and is supplied of all that is necessary with excess.  
The king of Spain receives from this Estate yearly eight hundred thousand ducats of ordinary, besides the free gifts and other extraordinary matters: And to show, that this king can tell how to draw as much as is possible from this Estate, or that his officers make it for him, the proverb of Italy saith, That the officer of Sicily doth gnaw, He of Naples doth eat, but He of Milan doth devour.   

¶ The Forces.  
THe king of Spain doth entertain continually in this Estate three thousand foot (Spaniards) one thousand light horse, and six hundred men at arms, for the guard thereof. The great numbers of people would much fortify this Estate, if they did love the Spaniard: but some hold, that their actions are so unpleasing unto these people, as there is not any one whom they hate more: so as if they were not kept in awe, they might well attempt some innovation against them that rule over them. There are good Forts in this Estate, whereof the castle of Milan is the first. The governor draws great sums of money from the king of Spain yearly, to augment the fortification of this place, which is able to make great resistance. Cremona hath as strong a tower as may be seen, which they do number among the marvels of Europe. Pavia and Novara, in like manner, are good places. There are also many other strong places in this Estate, but the Spaniards rely chiefly upon the Castle of Milan, holding themselves invincible by reason of this Fort.  
The king of Spain hath no cause to fear any, in regard of Milan, but the Venetians, who have remained a long time quiet, and as it seems demand nothing but rest; or the duke of Savoy, who may much annoyed him, either by entering suddenly into this Estate, being assisted by some greater prince, or else in giving passage to those that would undertake to invade it: but the Alliance which is betwixt them two may free him from all fear. Or else he may fear the Swisses, who have many times safely usurped many good members of this Estate: but the Fort of Fuentes, and the good order which the Governor of this Estate doth set, will always divert them, as well as the Grisons, from any attempt.   

¶ The Government.  
THe king of Spain hath a Governor in this Duchy, who is also Captain General of the foot and horse which are entertained there, and carries the title. The knowledge of causes, both civil and criminal, depends of the Senate of Milan, where there are twelve Doctors, and certain Prelates, and gentlemen Milanois.   

Genealogy of the Dukes of Milan.  

Matthew Visconte in the year 1312. 

Galeace 

Actio.  
Marc.    
john Bishop of Milan.  
Luchin.  
Stephen. 

Matthew  
Galeace.  
Barnaby. 

john Galeace, son to Galeace: 

john Maria.  
Philip Maria. 

Blanch married to Francisco Sforce. 

Galeace.  
Lewis, Duke.  
Ascanio.  
Philip.  
Octavio.      
Valentine.    
Yoland.          

Genealogy of Sforce.  

Francisco Sforce. 

Lewis, Duke. 

Maximilian. dead without heirs.  
Francisco. dead without heirs.    
Ascanio.  
Philip.  
Octavian.  
Galeace. 

john.  
Blanch Maria. 

Bonna married to Sigismond king of Poland.  
Francisco Sforce the last duke led captive into France.          

By what right the king of France pretends the Duchy of Milan.  

john Galeace son to Galeace was first Duke, created by Wenceslaus, he had 

john Maria the second duke, who died without heirs.  
Philip Maria the third duke, who had no lawful issue. 

Blanch his base daughter married to Francisco Sforce, who usurped by force the Duchy of Milan.    
Valentine who was married to Lewis duke of Orleans, upon condition that if her two brethren died without sons, the lawful successors of Valentine should be heirs of the Duchy of Milan: and they say the Pope signed this treaty, for the which many thousands of Christians have lost their lives. 

Philip Earl of Vertus, who died without heirs. 

Galeace governor of Milan. 

john Galeace whosucceeded.  
Blanch Maria. 

Bonna married to the king of Polonia.  
Francisco Sforce the last duke, led captive into France.      
Lewis Sforce who was made duke by the Emperor after his brother's son, whom some say he poisoned. 

Maximilian died without children.  
Francisco died without children.    
Lewis the twelf●h, duke of Orleans, who also made war to recover the Duchy of Milan, and being king he took Milan by force, and carried Lewis Sforce away prisoner. 

claud daughter to Lewis, married to Francis duke of Valois, and afterwards king of France.  
Francis of Valois the French king. Henry 2. king.    
Charles Earl of Angoulesme, Loyse his wife, sister to Philibert duke of Savoy. Francis 2. the French king.    
Charles Duke of Orleans, who after his uncles death went with an army against Milan.  
john Earl of Angoulesme.        

¶ The Islands of the Canaries.  
THe Ancients place these Islands in the Atlantic sea, & call them the Fortunate Islands, but they do not agreed in their names. And modern writers are very different from the ancient, touching their disposition & situation. They were unknown since the ruin of the Roman Empire, until that a French gentleman called john of Betancorte made conquest of some of them, in the year 1405; which conquest was afterwards continued by D. Fernando de Castro, by the order of the infant, D. Henry of Portugal, who sent a good army thither in the year 1444. Some reckon they are seven in number, that is to say, the great Canary, Lansarote, Forteventure, Teneriffe, Gomera, Fierral, and Palma: Others add unto these, Gratiosa, S. Clara, Roca, Lobos, Alegrança, and Infierno. The great Canary hath ninety thousand Stades in circuit, & hath about nine thousand inhabitants. Teneriffe is somewhat less, it hath a mountain in it called the Pike, so high as it may be seen above forty leagues off. Palma is a small Island, but very pleasing.   

¶ The Quality of the Country.  
THe Islands abound in barley, honey, wax, sugar, cheese, sheep, goats, and camels, and they have great store of hides. Among other things there grows a herb called Oricela, which is very good to dye read, whereof they vent a great quantity into all the parts of Europe. The Island of Palma, which is very small, hath notwithstanding grea● commodities, and doth abound in wine, cheese, cattle and sugar. By reason whereof they that go● from Spain unto Brasil furnish themselves here with such victuals as they want. The Island of Fierral hath neither fountain nor well, but God hath provided them miraculously of water, from a cloud which doth cover a tree, from whence dot● distil so much liquor as may suffice for men and beasts, yea and to water their land. T●●s' cloud gins an hour or two before the Sun rising, and continues as long 〈◊〉 Sun●●eset▪ and the humour falls continually upon the leaves, which distils this liquor continually in●o a Cistern which they have under it to receive the water.   

¶ The Manners.  
THe inhabi●an●●, whom they call Ganches, were in former times so gross and rude, as they 〈…〉 the use of fire. They did believe in one Creator of the world who rewarded the good, and did punish the wicked, and herein they all agreed, but in other things they disagreed much. They had no iron, but did esteem it much (if any came to their hands for use. They made no account of gold or silver, saying, that it was a madness to esteem that which could not serve for any mechanic instrument. They did ●ha●e thei● heads with certain flint stones, and their arms were stones and staves: but at this day, they are grown more civil and witty, and are of an active disposition, since that the Spaniards have frequented those Islands; whereof Lanzarotta, Fierral, or Hierro, and Gomera, belong to private men: the rest are subject to the Crown of Spain.   

¶ The Riches.  
THe Islands of the Canaries vent their excellent wines into all Europe, as also, their ●●garss, for which cause the Spanish and Italian Merchant come thither to buy it, a●●●●ansport it to other places. And to this effect there is a place called by them the 〈◊〉.   

¶ The Government.  
THere is in the Island of great Canaria, a seat of justice, whereas they hear all causes, and do justice to the other Islands. The laws of Spain are practised there.   

¶ The Religion, and matters which concern the Church.  
THe people of this country in former times did worship the Sun, Moon, and Stars: but the Spaniards having made themselves masters thereof, in the year 1404, settled the faith there with their dominion, so as at this day they are all Christians. The Bishop of these Islands hath his residence in the great Canaria, with the Inquisitors of the faith.   

¶ The Islands of Cape Verd.  
SOme think that these be the ancient Islands of Hesperides: They have taken the name of Cape Verd, from Cape d'Africa, which stretcheth itself into the sea, right against the said town. They be nine in number, and were discovered, in the year 1455, by Lewis Cadamuste, others writ, that they were found out by Antonio de Nolli a Genevois, and began to be peopled in the year 1440. Their names are, Saint james, and Fueogo, or the Island of Fire, S. Anthony, S. Luce, S. Vincent, S. Nicholas, Sel, Bonavista, and May. The chiefest Island is that of S. james, the which is seventy miles long: The Portugals have in this Island a good town, which is called Ribera grand, and hath in it about five hundred families. There is and safe a spacious Port, it is situated betwixt two mountaine●. There is a River which waters it, the which doth rise some two leagues from the city, whose banks are full of Cedars, Oranges, and di●ers other plants, among which, the Indian Palm tree, which bears nuts, grows very well. The Island of S. james is generally ●ough and hilly, but it hath good and pleasant valleys, the which are very well peopled. They sow good store of Rice there and Millet, which grows ripe in forty days, wh●● doth not prospero well; they have cotton, the cloth whereof, they vent upon the co●●● of Africa. They h●ue generally throughout this Island store of goats, which every four months have three Kyds or more. There are also great store of Tortoises, whose shells are as big as a Target.  
When as the Sun passeth into Cancer, it rains in a manner continually there. Upon the West of Saint james, is the Island of Fire, and that of Bra●a, of small importance, yet the Island of Fire, hath some dwellings in it; and upon the North, is the Island of May, where there is a broad Lake, two leagues long, full of salt, a common thing in those Islands: but there is one hath more of those salt pans, than all the rest, and therefore it was called the Island of ●alt, which is otherwise barren, but only of wild goats. Bonavista hath a name, contrary to her quality, for that it is without any grace o●●ontent. There is nothing worthy observation in the other Islands. Upon the West of Cape Verd, is the Island of Palma.   

¶ The Island of the Prince.  
THis Island del Principe stands three degrees from the Equinoctial Northward; it is so called, for that the revenues thereof were assigned to the Prince of Portugal for his entertainment. It lies from the Island of S. Thomas, Northward one hundred and twent●e mi●es▪ it is little, but good, and therefore reasonably well manured, their greatest wealth grow● by sugar, whereof they sand great store into other countries: There grows also a kind of Palm tree, from whence the inhabitants draw a certain liquor, which serves them for drink, and doth quench their thirst.   

¶ Mozambique.  
MOzambique is distant from the firm land about half a mile: It is a town situated in the Island of Prase, which Island contains in bigness about half a mile, and is plain. There is a very good Port, whereas the Portugals ships lie without danger, having a Fort which covers them.   

¶ The quality of the country.  
THis Island carries Palm trees, and Indian nuts, Limo●nss and Figs. As for other first-fruits they have not many: and they bring unto them wheat, rice, and other necessary things from the Indies. They have great store of beeves, and sheep, which have broad tails and very weighty, goats, hogs, hens and such like. The flesh of their foul is exceeding black, but of a very good taste. This Island stands in the mouth of a river which they call Mogincates, in the fifteenth degree to the South: it hath no fresh water, but what they bring from the main Land, from a place which the Portugals call Cabasera, and for this cause they have great cisterns and pots wherein they keep their water. The air of Mozambique is hot and unwholesome, so as many times passengers which stay there fall sick.   

¶ Their Manners.  
THere are in this Island some forty or fifty Portugals which are married there, and dwell commonly in this Island; these men live after the manner of their own country. Besides these forty or fifty Portugals, and the Mestiz which are engendered of Indian women by Portugals, there are some four hundred families of Negroes which devil there, and their houses are covered with straw: these live partly after the manner of the Portugals, and partly like the other Negroes. But they that live betwixt Mozambique and the Cape of Good Hope, are altogether barbarous and savage, without either God or law. They all go generally naked, and the men have only a little piece of cloth which covers their privy parts, and the women from the midst of their breast unto the midst of their thighs cover themselves with a certain piece of course cotton, but they that live within the main land hide not any part of their bodies. At Mozambique, they make their greatest dainties of swine's flesh, and do not forbidden it to any sick person, as they do all other kind of flesh. It is not lawful for any one to live in this Island unless he marry. The tyrant or king of Quiloe, was sometimes ma●●ter thereof, and the Mahometans dwelled there under a governor, whom the Arabians call Zequen.   

¶ The Riches.  
THere is a mine of gold near to Sofale; which is three score French leagues from Mozambique, towards the Cape of Good Hope; there is much gold drawn out of this mine, and an other kind of gold which they call Botongo, and Ouro Po, that is to say, powder of gold, for that this gold is thin, like unto sand, and yet as good as any that comes from the East. The governor of Mozambique hath a Lieutenant which remains in the Fort of Sofale, and sends vessels called Pangajos to Mozambique, which go along the coast and carry gold to the governor. These vessels are made of a light wood, and the boards are joined together with thread having but one nail only to hold them. The mines which are near unto Angola are on the other side of Africa, distant fr●●● those of Sofale about one hundred and fifty leagues, and the Negroes do often go th●● journey by land, to bring gold to Sofale. The profit which the governor of Mozambique draws in three years, is about three hundred thousand ducats an d more, which some esteem to be nine ●unss of gold: and this profit grows chiefly from the mines of Sofale and Angola. They carry from Mozambique to the Indies, gold, ambergris, hebene, and ivory, and in like manner a great number of slaves, who are very strong and fit to endure labour.   

¶ The Forces.  
THe Portugals have a Fort in this Island, which was made perfect in ten or twelve years, it is as well fortified as any one that is in all those parts. But there is very small store of Artillery, and munition for war; neither are there many soldiers. Notwithstanding, at any time of need, all the Portugals which devil in this Island are bound to defend this Fort, for that there is not any other place of strength in this Island. By means of this Fort, the Portugals have made themselves masters of the traffic of all the neighbour countries, which abound with gold and ivory: and by means thereof, they make their voyages to the Indies more easy, for their ships do winter at this Island, and refresh themselves there. Within the Fort of this Island there are many cisterns to preserve water, where they have always provision for a whole year.   

¶ The Government.  
THe governors charge which is sent to Mozambique continues three years, at the end whereof an other succeeds him. It is the custom of the Portugals, not to continued their officers longer in any charge, but to substitute others in their places. They are chosen among them, whom the king of Spain hath employed in his Indian fleets, for that they are recompensed for the service they have done by the means of these offices, for the which they have good entertainments, beside the profit which they may make by the means of that wherein they are employed, and the place where they remain: and this profit cannot be small, for that the officers do all things at their pleasures. The ships pass once a year from Mozambique unto the Indies, that is to say, in August, and they return again in April, neither may any one be admitted to this trade but those that are married at Mozambique.   

¶ The Religion.  
Some of the Negroes which remain in the Island of Prase, whereas Mozambique stands, are Christians, but the rest hold the Mahometan law, and the opinion received by the Turks, who had been in those countries before the Portugals. But they whom they call Mestiz are all very affectionate to the Romish religion.   

¶ The town of Ormus.  
I Place Ormus in the Monarchy of Spain, for that it is tributary to the Spaniards, who have the best place in all the Island: and to avoid many repetitions, Ormus hath of the one side, the realm of Persia towards the North, and on the other side, Arabia. This Island is twenty miles broad, it lies at the mouth of the Persian Gulf, and is in the seven and twentieth degree of height.   

¶ The Quality.  
THis Island is full of rocks, stony, and in a manner barren, where there is not any grass to be seen. The rocks are all covered with salt, and their houses built of salt stones. It bears not any fruit, but receives all kind of victuals from Arabia, Persia, and the town of Bassora. Their Winter is like unto that in Portugal, but in Summer, at the same time it is so extremely hot, as the people are forced to rest themselves in certain channels covered with wood, which are full of water, wherein they plunge their whole bodies, having nothing out but their heads. The coverings of their houses are flat, and pierced with holes, to receive the coolness of the wind and air, as at Cayre. The water which they drink, is brought from the main land. There is a certain disease which rains at Ormus, which is such, as there breeds worms in their thighs which are touched therewith, and these worms proceed only from the water which they drink; they are like unto Lute strings, and are two or three ells long: they are drawn forth by little and little, causing them to turn with a straw, which they do willingly follow; but when as they resist they must deal no more with them, but only tie that which they have drawn forth, and rub the swelling beneath the hole with sweet butter, and in this manner their thighs are freed from these worms in ten or twelve days. If any one breaks one of these worms, he feels most violent torments.   

¶ The Manners.  
THe inhabitants of the Realm of Ormus, participate of the humours of the Persians and Arabians, but I will not make any long discourse of their manners and humours, but will speak more particularly thereof when I shall come to the realm of Persia, and shall treat of Arabia.   

¶ The Riches.  
BY reason of the situation, and commodity of this Island, it abounds in all things, and is frequented by the merchants of Persia, Arabia, Turkey, and the Indies, and with all the neighbour countries; but the greatest numbers are of Armenians, Persians, they of Asia, and the Venetians, who are very curious to recover the precious stones which come to Ormus from the Indies, and they return from Ormus to Venice by land. They bring to this Island, from Persia, Coraçon, and Dias, goodly tapestries which they call Alcatiffes, and Grogerans of divers sorts from Turkey; in like manner from Arabia, many herbs and physical drugs, Dragon's blood▪ Manna, Mirre, Incense, and excellent horses from Barem; with many goodly pearls from Masca●te, which is a Port betwixt the Capes of Rosalgate & Moncadon upon the Arabian shore. Moreover, they bring dried raisins, and dates of divers kinds, with marmalade, the which is afterward sent from Ormus to the Indies, by which means they are all furnished. They do also make great profit at Ormus upon the Larins, which is a kind of coin of Persia, long, and ending as it were in two branches. The cause of the great concourse of people to Ormus is this: There are two troops which assemble every year to go thither by land; they are called Caffiles, or Caravans, and they part from Aleppo a town in Syria to go to Tripoli, which is within three days journey. The Caravane observes this order: every year in April and September they choose a captain with a hundred janissaries, who conduct the Caravane unto the town of Bassore, from whence they go by sea unto Ormus without any difficulty. The merchants know well the time of the Caravans departure, at what times there will be a great multitude of horses, camels, dromedaries, and so many men ready for this voyage, as sometimes they number five or six thousand, who march in order like unto an army. Every camel carries two with their baggage, which hangs of either side, and the janissaries have a continual care lest the Arabians should annoyed this troop, as they attempt commonly to do. They pass a desert, which continues forty days journey, and at the end of every three or four days they dig pits to water their cattle, and to quench the thirst of men. There are also many Pourueiers which follow the troop, and cell victuals to them that need. Every night they sleep under Pavilions with good Sentinels on every side. They come after this manner to Bassora, having passed Babylon, which they now call Baggadet. They rest some day●s at Bassora, and meet again in this town at the time of their return, and so go back to Al●ppo after the same manner. And this is the reason of the great trade of merchants and merchandise at Ormus.  
The governor of Ormus reaps more commodity than any other at the Indies, except him of Mozambique; for he sends his vessels to Goa, Chaul, Bengala, and Mescata, and there sells his commodities, having made an Edict, that no man shall sell any merchandise before the governors have been bought. And this comes not from the king of Spain, but from the liberty which governors take, who use their authority as they please. Moreover, by a privilege which the king hath given to governors, there is no man that may sand any horses to the Indians but they, or such as they have appointed. This brings great profit to the governor, for that horses are wonderful dear at the Indies, 
A Rickes is five shillings starling.  so as a horse of a mean bounty shall be sold for four or five hundred Pardawes, every one of which, is about a Rickes Doller. The most convenient time to go from Goa to Ormus is in the months of januarie, February, March, September, and October.   

¶ The Forces.  
THe chief strength of the realm consists in the Fort which the Portugals have built there, the which is well fortified, and there are Cisterns in this Fort as in that of Mozambique, by reason that the Island hath great want of water. This Fort is reasonably well furnished with soldiers and Artillery, to keep the Mahometans in awe. All other places are of very small importance.   

¶ The Government.  
THe Portugals govern themselves after the manner of their country, and the captain or governor of the fort carries himself, as they do in other places of those quarters where they obey the king of Spain. The king of Ormus remains in this Island, but not in the place where as the Portugals are. They that are made kings hold it for a maxim of State in the beginning of their reign to put out the eyes of their brethren, and of all those of the blood royal; which done, he gives them all the contentment that they can desire, except that which may satisfy the sight: For there is a settled law, that no blind man may govern the realm, so as by this means they are freed from all fear of civil war.   

¶ The Religion.  
THe king of Ormus and all his subjects are Mahometans, and follow the Persian Religion; but they that are Portugals, or issued from Portugals, are very zealous Catholics: and moreover, there are some of the Country which have been converted by the preaching of father Gasper a jesuit of Zealand.   

¶ The Island of Diu.  
THis Island of Diu, sometimes called Alambater, is distant from the river Indus five and thirty French leagues. It is one of the most famous Islands in all the sea of Cambaia, divided from the main land by a very narrow channel, so as they pass over unto it by a bridge of sto●e. The city lies in the five and twentieth degree. It hath a good and commodious Port, the which is shut up with a chain: over the port there is a strong Fort built by the Portugals.   

¶ The Quality of the Island.  
THere is small store of fruit in this Island, but it is full of things necessary for the life of man. There is plenty of oxen, kine, sheep, foul, butter, milk, garlic, pease, and such like: yet the milk is not so cleanly as in other countries. There is also cheese, but it is very beastly. The inhabitants have great store of salt fish, and they smoke their flesh, as we do our neats-tongues.   

¶ The Manners.  
THe town of Diu is inhabited by Portugals, with whom they that are borne in the Province are mingled, as at Ormus and other towns at the Indies which the Portugals hold. Some follow the manners of the Portugals, others hold those of their neighbours, whereof we shall hereafter make mention: yet the ordinary conversation doth daily give more credit to the fashions of our Europe.   

¶ The Riches.  
THis town hath a very commodious Port, whither many merchant strangers come, so as it cannot fail to be rich: it lies betwixt two rich countries, Sinde, and Cambai●. There are always great numbers of Turks, Persians, Armenians, Arabians and others. They pay great customes●here unto the king of Spain, for that the Banjanes, Gusarates, Rumes, and Persians, which traffic into Cambaia and go towards the read Sea, do most commonly lad and unlade their ships here, by reason of the commodity of the Island.   

¶ The Forces.  
THe Portugals have so well fortified the town of Diu, as they have made it in a manner impregnable, whereof they have made good proof by two terrible sieges, the one by the soldan of Cambaia, in the year 1539, and the other by the Gusarates, in the year 1546: but they defended it so well, and interated their enemies in such sort, as they raised the siege with much loss and shame. This town is Mistress of all the navigation and traffic of those seas. Some eight leagues from thence is a little Island called Betel, as near unto the continent as Diu, and a league in compass, the which a king called Badurius thought to compass in with a wall, and to make it a Fort, but Magno de Acugna interrupted him, and cut his garrison in pieces.   

¶ The Government.  
THis Island did sometimes obey the kings of Cambaia, being seated in his realm: and this king had suffered the Portugals to build a Fort there, the which he afterwards repent, and sought by treachery to dispossess them: but in time the whole Island is come into the Portugals power, who govern themselves as in other countries which they hold in those parts.   

¶ The Town of Daman and other places.  
THis coast of the Indies is properly called the Island of Vaquas unto the gulf of Camb●ia, other places have their proper names, as Mozambique, Melinda, Ormus, Cambaia, Choromandel, Bengala, Pegu, Malaca and others. This country hath many Ports and Islands, which are under the Portugals dominion, with divers strong forts which they have built there. Daman is the first of all, and fifteen miles from thence and nineteen degrees and a half of elevation, is the town of Basaijn: ten miles from thence, and in the nineteenth degree, is the town of Chaul, with a good for't: five leagues from thence, is Dabul, which is in the eighteenth degree; and from Dabul unto the Island of Goa they reckon fifteen leagues, and Goa is in the fifteenth degree. The Inhabitants of Goa term all that country which is from Goa unto Daman, the Northern Region: and that which lies from Goa unto the Cape of Comorin the Southern; but it is properly called the land of Malaber.   

¶ The Quality of the country which is near Daman, Chaul, and Basaijn.  
ALl this country doth yield abundance of rice, pease, and other pulses, of oil, Indian nuts, and plenty of butter: But there is no oil-olive to be found in all the East Indi●s, but what is carried out of Portugal: it hath abundance of all other things necessary for the life of man: it doth also bear great quantity of ginger, but they do not much esteem it. This country called the Northern part doth enjoy a temperate air, yea the best of all the Indies.   

¶ The Riches.  
THe Towns of Daman, Chaul, and Basaijn have very good and commodious Ports, where there is a great concourse of merchants: but Chaul is the most famous, for the great commerce it hath with the Inhabitants of Ormus, Cambaia, Sinde, Mascatte and Bengola, near unto the read Sea. There are in this city merchants which are exceeding rich, and a great number of ships: in all the country they make certain works of cotton, but no great store. There is a place near unto Chaul, whereas they make many stuffs and garments of silk: and this silk is brought from China, and then wrought by the Inhabitants about Chaul, whereof they make great store of money▪ They do also make in the same town Litters and Chairs with wonderful art.   

¶ The places which the Portugals hold upon the Coast of Malabar.  
THe Coast of Malabar, gins at Cape de Ramos, which is ten miles from Goa towards the South, and ends at the Cape of Comorin, in all which space there may be about four and fifty French leagues. The Portugals have in this part the Fort of Onor, ten miles from Cape de Ramos.   

¶ The Quality and Riches.  
THere is great store of pepper in this place, so as they transport from thence yearly seven or eight thousand pound weight: and this pepper is held the best of all the Indies. It is not many years since they did traffic thither for pepper; but it is now much in request. The Queen of Baticole (to whom this country belongs) sells this pepper, and delivers it unto their Factor that transports it, who remains at Onor: but he must pay his money six months before he can receive his merchandise. There grow●● also much rice in this country.   

¶ The Force.  
THe Fort of Onor, which the Portugals have here, is not much frequented, but at such times as the ships come to lad pepper; the rest of the time it hath little company: the Fort is reasonable good and well furnished. They have also along this Coast the Fort of Barzelor, five and twenty miles from Onor, where there is much rice and good store of pepper, as at Mangabor, whereas the Portugals have also a good Fort, nine miles from Barzelor.   

¶ The Fort of Cananor.  
THere is also a Fort in Cananor ten miles from Mangalor, and this place is much esteemed, for that they found greater abundance of pepper there than in any of the other places. The Malabares have near unto this Fort a place built after their manner, whereas there is a market kept every day, and abundance of victuals brought thither, especially great store of foul, eggs, butter, honey, oil, Indian figs, which are particularly called of Cananor, and exceed all others that are at the Indies in greatness. There they also cell masts for ships, which are exceeding great and straight, and yield nothing to them of Norway, whereof they have so many as they furnish their neighbour countries. This country is full of goodly long trees, which are very pleasing to the sight. There are many white Moors, Mahometans, among the Malabares, who traffic towards the read sea. But neither these Moors nor the Indians may traffic without permission from the Portugals, who do every year scour the sea with a good army, to free it from pirates: and if they found any vessels without their privilege, they carry them away, and hold them and their merchandise for good prize. Finally, the Moors are friends and confederates to the Portugals for fear of their fort, but they conspire secretly against them, and give money to the Malabares, enemies to the Portugals, to annoyed them.   

¶ The Fort of Cochin.  
THe Portugals have also a place very well fortified in the town of Cochin, whereas the Viceroy, and the Bishop of Cochin remain.   

¶ The Fort of Coulon.  
THere is also a fort in Coulon, which is twelve miles from Cochin, whereas they do every year lad a ship with pepper.   

¶ The Fort of Colombo in the Island of Zeylan.  
THey have also a strong place in this Island, the which hath been besieged by a king of Zeylan, and did so resist him, as he returned with great loss. But the Portugals have no kind of commerce with them of the Island. The governor hath not in a manner any profit, but that which grows from the cinnamon, which the Portugals do gather forcibly in the Island where they may get it, for that it is held the best at the Indies. It is the bark of a tree, which grows like unto a Bay tree, thin & low, and it is gathered after this manner: They cut the bark off the tree round about, from one knot unto another, then giving a slit down, they pull off the bark with their hand, and set it to dry in the Sun, which makes it to turn as we see it. This tree doth not whither away, but gathers a new bark for the next year: and that cinnamon is best which is taken every year, for that which is two or three years old, is gross and not so good. Betwixt the Northern point of Zeylan, and the firm land, ariseth a little Island called Manar, where there is a Fort, built by the Portugals, to secure the fishing of pearl, which is made along that coast by the Paravians.   

¶ A Town in the realm of Bisnagar.  
THe Portugals have also a Town in this Realm, called the City of Saint Thomas, or Malepur: it is the place (as they say) whereas Saint Thomas was buried, it was in a manner desert, but now the Portugals do inhabit it, and there are some jesuits. They have built a fair Church of stone, whereas before it was but a Chapel of wood, and the door of this Church is made of the wood of that Chapel. The Portugals do vainly and superstitiously attribute many miracles to this place. This Church door is set full of nails, and covered with Iron, to the end it should not be carried away by too much devotion.   

¶ The Town and Fort of Malaca.  
MAlaca is seated upon the river of Gaza, and is a good fair Town, having in circuit near twenty miles. The originary or first inhabitants of this place report, that the beginning came of six or seven fishermen, which came to devil there, but their number increased, by the arrival of other fishermen of Siam, Pegu, and Bengola, who bi●i● a town▪ and framed a particular language, taking all the best kind of speech from other nations. They named their town Malaca, which is grown so rich and mighty in a short time by reason of her s●ituation, as she contends for precedence with the greatest towns, yea with some realms thereabouts.   

¶ The Quality of the Country.  
THe air is so troublesome, as not only strangers, but even they that are borne there are many times troubled with divers infirmities, which fasten chiefly to the skin and hair: so as it is almost a miracle if any one escape with life: which makes many forbear to go thither; yet the desire of gain doth incite many to hazard their healths by this voyage. The country yields not any fruit, but some little corn in certain places. Finally, all the realm of Malaca, which runs two hundred and seventy miles in length, is in a manner nothing but a de●●rt, if you except that which is near unto the town. The Country people sleep upon trees for fear of Tigers, where of there are so many as they will come into the town for a prey. The Portugals who took this town from a king of the Moors, found the situation so commodious, as they have made it in a manner the Centre of all the merchandise and traffic of the East, and the head of a kingdom, which extends from S●●capura to pulo, and Cambilan; yet, as I have said, the ●●re is unwholesome, by reason it lies so near the equinoctial, and is hot and moist.   

¶ The Manners of the people.  
THere are in this place about a hundred families of Portugals, which live after the manner of their country, with a Bishop, and a College of ●esuitss, besides the Castle. They that are borne in this place wear long hair, they have malicious spirits, and take delight to commit murders in the night, to the end the authors may not be know●. Both men and women make love alike, and think that there is not any Nation can manage it so well: they make amorous songs and rhymes, and do wonderfully commend the power of love in their verses, which are w●●tie, well composed, and of a good grace. They have the nearest, and most elegant language of all the East: and therefore many at the Indies do use it; as in England, Germany, and the Low-countrieses they use the French tongue.   

¶ The Riches.  
THere is a Staple in this Town or a Market place, with the traffic of all the Indies, of China, and of the Islands which are called Molucques, and other neighbour Islands: and there may you see many vessels from China, the Mo●ucqueses, Banda, ●a●●, Sumatra, Siam, Pegu, Bengola, Choro●●andel, and other places, which return laden with merchandise. This place yields great profit unto the governor, and more than any other, except Mozambique and Ormus. Every year there parts a ship from Portugal for Malaca, a month before all the rest, and goes not to any other part of the Indies without constraint. They receive their lading only at Malaca, and have the best of all them, that come thither. There are six hundred Portugals continually in the fort of Malaca.   

¶ The Government.  
THere was sometimes a Mahometan king at Malaca, but he was dispossessed by Alphonso of Albuquerque, for that he sought to annoy Lopes of Seguiera a Portugal all he could; so as both the town and realm are now under the dominion of the king of Spain, and this realm is now governed like unto the rest which obeys this prince. They coin money both of gold and silver there, whereof the Inhabitants before had not any use, for that they did use certain money of Tin, which did weigh much, and was worth little,   

¶ The Religion.  
THe Portugals which remain at Malaca do all hold the Romish religion, and they that are borne in the country, whom they call Mallayes, are for the most part Christians: but there are many merchants whose abode is sometimes long, which are of divers religions, and live at liberty. There is (as I have said) in the town of Malaca a Bishop, as at Cochin, but he is under the Archbishop of Goa.   

¶ Banda and Amboyna.  
FRom Malaca they go by Sea to Banda and Amboyna, whereas the Portugals have Forts and Captains to make the traffic easy. Banda is an Island five degrees in altitude beyond the equinoctial. The Portugals frequent there, for that there are very good nuts, which they call Maciz, the which they preserve, and they also make oil thereof which is much esteemed, and carried to Malaca, and from thence to other places. All the traffic in a manner here, is made by exchange, as at Sunde, and at java. They must not easily trust the Inhabitants of this Island, who are commonly great deceivers of merchants; so as the Islanders must bring their merchandise unto the ships, before they can treat safely with them.  
Twenty miles from the Island of Banda, towards the West northwest are divers Islands which are called Amboyna, of the principal among them, whereas the Portugals have also a little Fort; they were discovered in the year 1512. The soil is very rough and barren, and the manners of the people bad and wicked: they are men eaters, and demand one an others parents when they are old to devour them. By reason that their soil is barren, they are given to the Sea, and do much annoyed the neighbour Islands with their Piracies. There is not any great store of spices in this Island; but the ships which go from Malaca to the Molucques, refresh themselves, and water in this Island.   

¶ The Philippines.  
BEnding toward the East, a hundred miles or thereabouts from the country of Cambaia, we see the Islands called Lussones, the which are otherwise called the Islands of Manillia, or the Philippines, either by reason of the principal town or famous Port, which is called Manillia, or in honour of Philip the second king of Spain, at whose charge they were discovered first by Magellanes, who died in Cebu, which is one of the chief Islands of the Philippines: but afterwards more fully by Michael Lopes of Lagaspy, who was sent by Don Lewis of Valesco Viceroy of Mexico, by commandment from king Philip the second in the year 1564. The town of Lusson or Manillia, lies in fourteen degrees of height from the Pole Arctic. The Island hath about one thousand miles in compass. About this Island there are many others, whereof the principal are Tendaiar, which is properly called the Philippina, and is the fairest and most pleasing of all the rest; it hath one hundred and sixty leagues in compass: and Mindanao, in which Island there are many good towns, as Cailon, Pavadoes, Subut, Dapito, and Suriaco. The Spaniards have been so haughty and ambitious, as to call all them the Islands of Philippina which lie betwixt Nova Hispania and the gulf of Bengola, and they affirm for certain upon their own knowledge, that they are in number eleven thousand.   

¶ The Quality of the country.  
THe whole country is very fertile in wheat, and there is store of stags, horses, oxen, kine, goats, and hogs: There are also many civet cats, and all kind of first-fruits, with great abundance of honey and fish. The Spaniards say that they bear spices, but there is little seen or none at all. There is also great store of rice, sugars, pulses, and figs which are half a cubit long. They do also found gold and iron there: the air is good and temperate, and approaching more to heat towards the Sea, but within the country it is more cold.   

¶ The Riches.  
THe Inhabitants make much silver of their gold and iron which is transported to near places, and also into Spain, their civet cats yield them no small profit: but that which makes them more rich, is the great commerce they have with the Chinois, who brings great store of merchandise thither, as silks, cottons, porcelain dishes, sulphur, quicksilver, brass, copper, meal, nuts, chestnuts, dates, all sorts of linen cloth, inkhorns, and many other pretty toys. There comes every year twenty ships from China with such merchandizes, the which is transported to Mexico, with infinite profit to the Inhabitants   

¶ The Forces.  
THere are good places in these Islands, whereas the Spaniards entertain great garrisons, being resolved not to leave them in any sort. The loss which they made of late years, of that which they held in the Molucques, hath made them resolute to defend these better; and to this end they have great store of munition for war, and much ordnance, and are provided of men necessary for this defence.   

¶ The Government.  
THe king of Spain entertains a governor in the town of Manillia, or of Lusson, who hath charge of all these Islands: he is sent thither from New Spain. These Islands were sometime under the Monarchy of the kings of China, but being abandoned by the Chinois upon certain occasions, and the Inhabitants not supported by any, it was easy for the Spaniards to make themselves masters thereof.   

¶ The Religion.  
THe Bishop of all these Islands r●maines at Manillia: there are many persons catechised daily, and which receives the Christian religion.     

THE ISLAND OF GOA.  

The Contents.  
1. DEscription of the Island of Goa, the climate and circuit. II Barrenness of the Island, which abounds in nothing but in wine made of Palms. III Beginning of winter in April, and of summer in September, contrary to other countries. four Ordinary diseases in Goa. V Nature and disposition of the Inhabitants of Goa, and of the Portugals in all the Indies. VI What titles they bear, and what distinction there is among men. VII. Ceremonies observed in the celebration of marriages and christenings. VIII. Apparel, and the manner of living of the women of the Country, and their looseness. IX. Of the Canarins and Corumbins of the Indies, their manner of living and religion. X. Riches of Goa, consisting in the traffic of slaves, horses of Arabia, spices, gums▪ tapistry, and the exchange of silver coins. XI. The fortification of this Island, and how they are governed by the Viceroy. XII. Of the pepper which is drawn from the Indies, and their manner of proceeding. XIII. Diversity of religion at Goa, where they live with liberty of conscience. XIIII. Christianity brought first into the Indies by S. Thomas. XU. Christianity newly planted at the Indies by the Franciscans.   

THe town of Goa is the chief of all the Indies, whereas the Spaniards and Portugals do frequent. The Island with the town are in fifteen degrees of altitude towards the North: it is environed with a gulf or river of three miles in breadth, which divides it from the firm land, and compassing about the town, joins with the Sea on the South side, making in a manner the form of a half Moon. The mouth of the river unto the town is of an equal breadth; and there are, betwixt the firm land and the Island of Goa, certain little Islands inhabited by that country men: 〈◊〉 on the other side of the town, the river grows so low in summer in some places, as they may easily wade over, and go not above the knees. The Island where Goa stands is called Tizzuarin, nine miles long, and three broad. The Bards lie on the North side, whose situation is higher, and therefore the ships of Portugal lie more safely when they carry away their lading. This land is also subject to the Portugals, and hath many boroughs and villages well peopled. There is a little river which doth separate the Bards from the main land for a small space. On the South side of the Island of Goa, whereas the river enters into the sea, stands Salsette, which doth also obey the Portugals, and is in like manner divided from the main land by a little 〈◊〉. The town of Goa hath goodly houses after the Portugal fashion, but low by reason of the heat, and every house in a manner hath his garden and orchard full of all sorts of Indian first-fruits. In old time it was a little town, closed in with a weak wall, and ditc●es without water, but when the rain filled them: the walls are yet standing, but the gates are go, and about the old walls you may see the new town twice as big as the ancient, b●t it lies open.  

¶ The Quality of the Island.  
THe Island of Goa is very barren, and bears not any thing that may serve for the nourishment of man; it hath only some few sheep, goats, pigeons, and some foul. The country is rough and hilly, and therefore not fit for labour, but lies desert and unmanured. Other things fit for the life of man, come from Salsette and Bards, but principally from the firmeland. They have only wine of Palms, which they make in abundance. There is a little water at Goa that is good to drink, the which they found in a fountain called Baganijn, a quarter of a league from the town, which slaves fetch and sell. As for the water which must serve in baths, to wash them with all, and to seethe their meat, they draw it out of wells which are made in their houses. The ground is stony, dry, and of a read colour; and this hath given occasion to some Italian Alchemists to seek for gold there and brass, but the Viceroy did forbidden them, lest the reputation of this treasure should draw the neighbour nations to assault the town.  
Winter gins there about the end of April, from Cambaya unto the Cape of Comorin, by means of the Western wind which comes from the sea in this country. It gins by thunder and lightning, after which follows a continual rain until September, and then winter ends with like thunder and lightning. This continual rain makes them to call this season winter at the Indies, and at this time they can make no voyages by Sea. As for summer they take it for the clearest season of the year, and then is there a fresh wind which comes from the East, and makes the nights more pleasing: but there are no other first-fruits in summer, but such as hung on the trees all the year. Every man shuts up his goods for fear of winter, as if he were to make some long voyage by sea. At that time they lay all their ships before the town, unrigging them, and taking out all that is in them, they cover them with reeds, lest the abundance of rain should rot them. There are some houses which the continual rain doth quite ●●ine to the ground. There are certain heaps of sand which stop up the river in the beginning of winter, suffering no passage for the ships, and the sea is so troublesome and low●, as it makes all the world deaf. The river which environs the Island of Goa, becomes fresh, by means of certain read waters which do fall from the mountains, although that the water be commonly salt, and like unto the sea. In September these heaps of sand go away, and the river is open in such sort, as it not only gives passage to small vessels, but to the greatest ships of Portugal of eight hundred tun, and these ships enter freely into the river without sound or danger. Finally, winter is wonderful troublesome in this country, for that they canno●●ractise any thing by reason of the continual rain, so as men are forced to live retired in their houses, or to entertain themselves with their neighbours as well as ●●ey can. Yet the women and the Mestiz (who are well pleased when they have rain) go into the country with their grooms and servants, taking convenient victualis with them. These people have cisterns and reseruers for water in their houses, which are made to swim in, which is one of their delights. At this time in a manner all the first-fruits at the Indies do flourish. Summer gins in September and continues unto the end of April, with a bright and clear season, and little rain: and then they put their ships to sea, and the army parts to defend the coast and the merchants. The Easterly winds which come from the firm land, and are therefore called Terrenhos, blow then at Sea, and although they be pleasing, yet they breed many diseases, by reason of the great changes whereunto the Indian coast is subject. Moreover, they blow always in summer from midnight until noon; but they go not above ten miles from the land. Presently after di●●e● the Western winds rise, the which are called Vi●asonss. These winds do sometimes bring a great temperature against the insupportable heat of the country. And doubtless we must admire the quality of the air in these quarters; for that from Diu unto the Cape of Comorin, winter is boisterous and hurtful: and from the other part of the Cape of Comorin, unto the coast of Comorandel, the summer is pleasing, although that both be in one height, and but seventy miles distant, yea in some places twenty, and at one time. They that go from Cochin towards the town of saint Thomas, 
Winter an● summer at ●ne time with●● 70. miles.  being seated upon the same coast of Choromandel, and towards the mountains of Ballagatte which they must pass to go into the other country, see on the one side the fields wonderful pleasant and well m●●ured in Summer, and on the other side, a country spoiled with rain●▪ darkened with clouds, and full of the horror of thunder and lightning. And this is not seen alone in this country of the Indies, but also near unto Ormus towards the Cape of Rosalgatte, whereas the ships have a clee●e and calm season; but having once past the Cape, and being on the other side, there is nothing but wind, rain, and storms, with the same alteration of Winter and Summer as is seen in other places of the East.  
They that remain at Goa fall into many diseases by reason of this change, for they have one sudden infirmity called Mordexin, which comes unto them with so great a vomiting, as they are ready to give up the ghost: this disease is common and mortal. The flux is also contagious there, as the plague is with us continual fevers kill men often in three or four days. The Portugals find no better remedy, than to draw blood: the Heathen draw it with certain herbs, sandal, and unctions. These diseases kill many Portugals yearly, for that they eat nothing which is of good nourishment, and abandon themselves to glut their lusts with lascivious women. We may see the experience in the king's Hospital, which is a retreat for Portugal's only, out of which there are carried every year four or five hundred dead persons. The pox are very general amongst them, neither is it any blemish to him that hath them: they have the remedy from China roots, and although they be much infected, yet no man flies them, not, although they have had them three or four times: but contrariwise they glory in them, and hold this for a sweet pain, in regard of others.  
The Indians are ignorant of the plague. Many are tro●●led with the stone, and a looseness of the bowels, especially they that are married, for that they drink water continually, and commit infinite excess and disorders. They stand always with their bellies naked, in their low galleries, which are in the e●●●ing of their lodgings, receiving the wind there, having near unto them their servants, whereof the one rubs his toes, another his h●●d, and the third drives away fl●e●▪ ●hey continued in this manner two hours after their meat, and then they rest; and being 〈◊〉, they bring them many kinds of preserves, to the end the water should not trouble 〈◊〉▪ which seems unto them of a better taste. Hence it comes, that most of the men have great bellies, and are called Barriges for this cause. The days in Winter and Summer differ not above an hour: the sun riseth at six, and sets at the 〈◊〉 ho●re, according to the cou●●e thereof. At noon day in that country they have the sun perpendicular over their heads, and have little or no shadow at all. At Goa, they may se● the too Poles of the world: the South Star is not much above the Horizon, number than that of the North.   

¶ The Manners of the Inhabitants of Goa, and of the Portugals generally throughout the Indies.  
THe country of the Bards▪ is inhabited by people which are ru●e, and gross, who are called Canarins, and go all naked, except their privy parts. They spend their time chiefly in manuring their Indian Palm trees, which love sandy places, and the lean shore. Many Portugals dwelling at the Indies are majied to women of that country, and their children are called Mestiz or Mesticos, of ● yellow complexion for the most part, and reasonably well proportioned, as the women of that country be; but after 〈…〉 they differ nothing from natural Indians▪ As for the children whose father and mother are Portugals▪ they call them Castis●●, th●t is to say, of Race, for that 〈◊〉 signified Race▪ and the●● re●●emble the Portugals, but that their colour is betwixt yellow and 〈…〉. The Portugals or Mestiz live for the most part idle, yet there are 〈…〉 make 〈◊〉, shoe●●, stools, a●d vessel▪ notwithstanding▪ commonly they 'cause 〈…〉 to do it▪ Finally▪ the masters keep thei● state in such sort▪ as it is not possible to see any thing more arrogant; for they have so grave a gate as a man would hold them for princes if he knew not their natures and disposition: the which doth not only reign among gentlemen and nobles, but also among men of the basest condition, which other nations found insupportable, by reason of this slow measuring of the streets: and all do equally think that other men do own them much honour, the which they affect and look for. The Indians borne, and strangers, as well Infidels as Christians, labour in other arts and trades. All the Inhabitants are distinguished into two sorts of persons; that is to say, in those that are married, and those that are not. They that are not married are commonly called soldiers, which is a very honest name among them; not that they are enrolled under any captain, or have taken an oath to any one, for that this manner of enrolling of soldiers is not in use at the Indies. So as the Portugals which are sent out of Spain unto the Indies, are not tied to any certain place where to make their abode, but may go where they please. They are all distinguished by titles and prerogatives of dignity. Some are termed Hidalgos da casa del Reynosso Segnor, that is to say, Gentlemen of the king's house: others M●ssos Hidalgos, which are gentlemen's children, or such as the king hath bred up in this rank. Others are termed Cavelleros Hidalgos, that is to say, Knights, which carry this title for some deed of arms whereby they have made themselves famous, or for the service they have done their Prince: or to speak more truly they obtain it of the General when he is ready to go ●nto the wars, or else for money; so as at this day men which are come from base places in Portugal carry this quality, although they have no merit; and they do not refuse it to any one that seeks it, so he be rich. There are also some which they call Mosos de Camera, & de seruitio; these be gentlemen or grooms of the king's Chamber, and this name is of such esteem among them, as they desire it more than great riches. There are also Esquires or Escuderos Hidalgos, who have a rank among 〈◊〉: all the rest are termed Hombres Honrados, that is to say, honourable persons: and they that are of base condition among them carry the ●ame of soldiers, without any other title: and so he is advanced in quality as he doth service to the king, and according to their titles they have recompenses. The gentlemen do willingly entertain and feast the common soldiers when they are retired into towns, and call witnesses of this bounty. The Portu●●ls', Mestiz, and Christians, are stately in their houses, and the Portugals among others have commonly ten or twenty slaves, according to their means. They that are ma●●ie●●ave their houses well furnished, and in regard of their persons they are curious to change their apparel and linen every day, as their wives do; and even their servants change often by reason of the heat. The officers do honour all Portugals equally, as well Nobles as others. When any one goes in the street he hath one servant which carries an Vmbrello to defend him from the sun, another his cloak for fear of reign, and for the sun●e, and the other ●hird carries his sword, lest it should hinder his affected gravity. Before dinner the servant brings his master a cushion of silk to kneel on, if he have any devotion to go to the church to pray. They use great and long salutations with kissing of hands, which they spare not one to another. When they enter into the church, their servants are there before, who have prepared their seats, whereas all they that are set, rise up and salute them with great reverence. If any one doth not tender them the honour which they have done them, they are much offended, and seek all means to have revenge, calling their friends together to kill him, who by negligence hath not saluted them: but when as they will not kill him, but only revenge themselves in some sort, they beaten him cruelly with a great reed which they call Bambus, gathering great troops together to this end; and this is practised in a manner every day at the Indies, and yet the Magistrate doth not punish it: they do also beaten their enemies with long sacks full of sand, and bruise their whole bodies. When as any one of the common people goes to visit another, the Master of the lodging meets him at the door with his hat in his hand, and leads him into his hall, where he presents unto him a seat, such a one as he himself sits in, and then he demands of him the cause of his coming. When he hath a will to departed, the master of the lodging conducts him to the door, with kissing of hands, and much reverence and offers of service: if he were not entreated after this manner, he would be so much offended, as he would seek a revenge unto the death: and they do so much affect this honour, as if they give him a seat that is too low, or not so honourable as the other, he is much incensed.  
Whe●●s there is a marriage celebrated at any one's house, that is esteemed wealthy, all their friends and acquaintance come thither, either upon their own horses, or upon horses that are borrowed or hired, and there are sometimes a hundred richly appointed. They go unto the Church after this manner; with their servants and Vmbrelloes in good order: the friends go before, and the bridegroom comes betwixt two of them, which they call gossips, than the bride follows betwixt two she-gossips, who are carried in their litters richly appointed: the servants follow after without rank or order. When as the ceremony of marriage is ended in the Church, the married couple are conducted back with the same order, and their friends, neighbours, and kinsfolks go, and place themselves in windows hanged with tapestry, which are in those streets whereas they must pass, and besprinkle them with a water made of roses and sugar. Those which are of account have servants which can play upon flutes and other instruments, and rejoice the company with their music. The married couple coming near unto their dwelling house, thank such as have accompanied them, who are on horseback with much honour, and then they enter presently with the she-gossips with great gravity, and then place themselves at windows. They that have accompanied them, give some carrires unto their horses to do them honour, and the gossips begin first: others do them honour with a consort of flutes, which are much used at the Indies. After their courses, all pass before the window, and leave the house with much honour, except the gossips, who go up and make many good wishes unto the married couple, whilst there is something preparing to make them drink water, which is a sign of friendship among them. Having once tasted of that which is presented unto them, they departed, and there remains but three or four of their nearest kinsfolks, who, after they have made good cheer, stay not long with the married couple, for that they will not keep them from their content. The married couple go most commonly to bed before Sunset without any ceremony or modesty as they use here. When as they christian a child, they carry it after the same manner, and the godfather goes last of all alone, being followed by two servants on foot, whereof the one carries a silver dish, the which is white or gilt, full of roses, in the midst whereof there is a wax candle gilt and artificially made, and pierced through with certain pieces of gold and silver, which is the present of him that baptiseth the infant: an other carries a silver salt gilded in the one hand, and in the other a basin of the same metal, with goodly napkins that hung upon his shoulders: this is followed by two litters, in the one is the godmother, and in the other is the midwife with the infant, covered with rich cloth made for that purpose.  
The ceremonies of baptism being ended, they return in the same order with the sounding of flutes, and the running of horses, the godmother beholding all, as at a marriage. These are the ceremonies observed in regard of them that are married; but the soldiers which are not, go to sea in Summer and defend the coast. They are sta●ely in their houses, and observe a great gravity, having a servant who carries an Vmbrello, and sometimes they give unto a man, whom they hire to that end, five and twenty Basarucs a year. Many times ten or twelve soldiers live together, and have but one or two servants to make clean their clotheses. They live upon Rice sodden in water, salt fish, and other mea●ss of small substance, and without bread, using for their drink, fountain water. They have most commonly two or three suits of apparel in common, which they put on that go abroad, for that such as remain at home have not any need of clotheses, by reason of the great heat which makes them glad to be covered with linen. There are gentlemen and captains that be rich, who give money bountifully to these soldiers, to the end they may buy them clotheses and all other necessaries. By this means they do purchase the love of these soldiers to employ them afterwards more freely in their voyage● at sea, or in the courses they take to get their enemies. There are many which live after this manner at their ease. But the greatest profit of some of them grows from the love of the Portugals wives, from the Mestiz, and Christians at the Indies. These women are so lose and incontinent, as they give all the money they can get unto their adulterers, whom they enrich by this means. Some of these soldiers, by the favour of their she-freinds, traffic here and there, and these are called Chatins, for that they have left the profession of arms, and will serve no more as soldiers in their sea armies: For there is not any one of these that is forced to go to the wars, although he be enrolled in the book of Portugal, & notwithstanding that they are exempt from going to the war, yet for that they live unmarried, they are called soldiers. There are a great number of these Chatins at this day at the Indies, for that having little or no wars, many give themselves to merchandise, to the end they may get something: There are many reasons hereof.  
First of all, Captains who made account of soldiers, do not now much regard honour, and they give little to them they hire. The soldiers also remain always miserable with this pay, and although they have many attestations and certificates, which should make them expect some recompense, yet they cannot bear that great charge which they must undergo from thence to Portugal, nor make presents unto them who can do any thing in Spain, and yet do nothing without gain. And moreover there is this inconvenience, that although they obtain some dignity, yet must they many times attend the death of some one that goes before them, and spend their whole lives in this expectation. We must add hereunto the discommodities and dangers of the Navigation, which is the cause that many return no more into Portugal, but marry at the Indies, and give themselves to some traffic. Moreover, the war is not hot against the Barbarians, and they discover no more lands, for that the Viceroy is more curious of his own profit than of honour. For charges at the Indies (being but for three years) they that exercise them, seek nothing but to enrich themselves during the time. This is the cause why the seas are not so safe as they have been, and that Pirates do in a manner what they list, for that the Viceroy doth not ordinarily entertain a good army at sea to scour the coasts. And this doth also diminish the king of Spain's power and revenues. For no man can travel by land, for that there are many realms which are no friends to the Portugals, who only have certain forts upon the coast.  
At the Indies they do seldom see the wives of Portugals, of Mestiz, nor of Christians, but whenas they go to some Visit or to the Church; and when as they go forth, they are carefully guarded, for they are in their litters so covered as it is impossible to see them. Whenas they go to the Church or to Visit, they are proudly attired with store of pearl or precious stones, their garments are of damask, velvet, or satin stripped with gold, for silk is very common in that country. In a manner all go bore headed in their houses, having a fine smock called Baju, which covers them unto the navel, and from the navel downwards they have a linen cloth painted, twice or thrice double; the rest is uncovered. This is the habit which women of all ages and all conditions do wear in their houses, and whilst they remain within doors their maids do their business abroad: they eat no bread, no more than the servants; not for any dearth there is of corn (for they may have abundance) but upon a certain custom and inclination which they have, to eat Rice, the which they seethe with water, having for their meat salt fish, and first-fruits which are also salt, called by them Mangas, whereon they pour the broth of flesh or fish. Finally, they eat their pottage with their hands, mocking at the use of spoons, as if they were uncivil. They use for their drinking certain thin vessels made of black earth, the which are pierced in the neck; they call them Gargolettes, for that he which drinketh lifteth up the vessel, and not touching it with his lips receives the water by those little holes, the which doth gozle, and make a pleasing noise. They hold this manner of drinking more civil, to the end they defile not the cup with their mouths, which are sometimes unclean. They that come newly out of Portugal and will drink after this manner, spill much water upon their clotheses, for that they know not how to use the cup. They call such men Reynolz in mockage, and this name is applied to all those that are ignorant of the Indians manners, who being not accustomed to their affected gravity, walk freely up and down the streets not c●ring for this retiredness, whereunto notwithstanding they do soon accustom themselves.  
The men of those Eastren countries are wonderful jealous, and do not suffer any one to see their wives or daughters, be he never so dear a friend, except their Gossips. If any one knock at the door to speak with the husband, presently the women fly away and hide themselves, leaving the husband alone to entertain him that comes, yea their nearest kinsmen, and which is more, their sons, having past the age of fifteen years, are banished the places where the women remain, and have their lodgings apart. For it hath been often heard that the Nephew hath been beloved of his uncles wife, the brother of his brother's wife, yea and the brother sometimes hath had to do with his own sister. Without doubt the incontinency of the women of those parts is very great, and there are few married women chaste. Many have a soldier to be their friend, who goes to visit them secretly by means of their maids which derue as bawds. They use certain herbs to this end; and among others they have a herb called Dutroe, ●rom whose seed they draw a juice the which they mingle with their husband's drink, who having drunk it, laugh continually like men that have lost their understanding and remain without all apprehension, or else they sleep as sound as if they were without life; then the women being assured of them, enjoy their loves in the presence of their husbands, who lie without all knowledge: sometimes the force of this drink continues four and twenty hours.  
And to make these poor cuckolds recover their senses, they wash their feet with cold water, but they have no remembrance of what is past. The wives do often kill their husbands with poison, the which they do apply as they think good, to the end it may work his effect in the time which they have prefixed; so as some have lived six years after they have taken it. Husband's do also kill their adulterate wives, or that are suspected to have done them wrong, with the testimony of three or four persons, who witness that they have broken their faith in wedlock. For by the customs of Portugal, a man that kills his wife upon this occasion is not punished, but he may lawfully take another. There are many which die after this manner, and there is nothing more common at the Indies than the death of adulterous wives, yet cannot it induce others to a better life, for they hold it for a great content and glory to die in making love. Moreover they are very curious to have their houses and all other things exceeding neat and handsome, and they wash their bodies often to keep them clean. They fly labour and take delight in perfumes. They rub their heads and foreheads with Sandall that they may smell well, and they do continually eat the leaves of Bethele with garlic, and an herb called Areque which is sometimes of such force, as it makes them in manner drunk; and this herb is dry, and hath a taste like wood or roots. The women do continually chaw of these three things like unto beasts, and do swallow down the juice and spit out the rest: which is the cause that their teeth grow black and read, which amaze them that have not been accustomed to see them. These fashions come from the Indians, and these women are persuaded that they are thereby preserved from a stinking breath, and from the toothache and the pain in the stomach, so as they would rather lose their lives than these herbs. Whenas the husband is absent, the wife eating of Bethele, will stand behind a mat, to see who passeth by, and not be seen; if any one whom she loveth passeth by, she will lift up the mat gently, as a testimony of her affection: these are the beginnings which the women give unto their loves, the which they do afterwards practise by their servants, and many other stratagems. They do also eat much spice, to maintain themselves in heat, or to augment it, and they do eat certain cakes called Cachondes composed of divers sorts of spices to the same effect. And the women do not only prepare this for themselves, but they do also give them to their husbands to eat, to make them more valiant in bed, and to give themselves more content. They bathe themselves often, and swim over rivers whereunto they are accustomed. They go forth in the night to perform certain vows which they have made, and then they walk freely on foot, for that the magnificence of Litters and Chairs is defended in such occasions: the women do often long for these nights, and then their most confident slaves do accompany them, and whilst their mistress prays, they entertain their friends in some other place, where they enjoy their loves, whilst they mock at their mistress who is at her devotion. The women of those countries, hold it a great felicity to be beloved of a white man or a Portugal, and among themselves they commend the beauty of their lovers with great vehemency. The children which are borne of women slaves belong unto their masters, who rejoice whenas they have augmented their family with a servant. This is always observed whenas the children are not begotten by a Portugal, or a man of a free condition: for then the father may redeem his child eight days after his birth for little money, and make him free. But if he forbears to redeem him within eight or ten days, he is then a slave, and shall be his masters, who may cell him afterwards for what price he pleaseth or breed him up as his slave if he think good: you shall seldom see the mother although a slave and a miserable creature to kill her child upon her delivery: for it is a glory for those women to be with child by a white man: this makes the mother to keep her child carefully, and not to give it unto the father, so as if he will have it, he must steal it away. The children of Portugals, Mestiz, and other Christians are bred up naked, they have a shirt only, which we have called Baju, the which they carry until they be able to wear breeches: they are in a manner all nursed by Indian slaves.  
The pagan which live at Goa, hold the encounter of a raven to be ominous, notwithstanding that there are many of these birds at the Indies; he that hath seen any one, coming out of his lodging, returns presently, and shuts himself up with a resolution not to come forth for any cause whatsoever, so much they fear some disaster. There are many Magicians generally, who charm serpents, and drawing them out of a basket, force them to dance by the sound of some instrument; they kiss and embrace them, yea and speak unto them as to men, to the end they may get money by these tricks. They know too well how to prepare and compound poisons, and they give it freely to them they hate. The lodgings of these pagan are commonly low, and little, covered with straw, without windows, and with such low doors as they are forced to stoop when they go in or out: their beds are of mats of reeds, whereon they lie either to sleep or to rest themselves. The tables, the clotheses, and the napkins are made of fig leaves, which do also serve as dishes or pots both for oil and butter. They dress their meat in earthen po●ss, and seethe their rice in them, wherewith they fill holes which they make to that end, and they do also beaten their rice, for that being poor and miserable, they buy rice in the husks: some sow rice near unto their dwellings, for the use of their families. Whenas they will drink they use a little vessel of copper, with the which they po●re wine into their mouths, for that they will not touch the vessel. They do in a manuer rub all their houses over with cow dung for fear of flies. Finally, they keep their bodies as clean as they can, so as after the necessities of nature, they wash themselves all over: they do use to wash themselves with the left hand, for that they eat with the right hand, and do never use any spoons. They do strictly observe their superstitions and ceremonies, never going forth before they have made their prayers. When they go upon the way they do worship the horrible images of their Gods which are in rocks, mountains, and caves, and they adore the shapes of devils. Whenas they have a voyage to make either by water or land, they do nothing but sound their trumpets for the space of foure●ee●e days before their departure, and if they go by sea, they set up many Bander●lleses and Flags in every part of the ship, in honour as they say, of their Pagodes or Idols▪ and when they are returned they make the likenoise for a week or two. They observe th●se ceremonies in other solemnities, as in marriages, christenings, the seasons of the year of harvest, and seed time. There are a great number of barbers amongst them, who go up and down and are employed for a small matter: they have no shops, but go from house to house and are employed in the basest services, and to be short, they are increated as men of small account. The pagan which are skilful in physic, hold their rank in the town of Goa, for that next to Ambassadors and some Merchants, there is not any other infidels that may cover themselves with an umbrello going through the town.  
The Portugals when they are sick, disdain not to confer with those Pagan Physicians, & the Archbishop with all the Church men trust more in them than in the Portugals themselves: this is the reason why these physicians are wonderfully honoured, and gather great wealth. The labourers or husbandmen about Goa, are in a manner all Christians, yet they differ little fr●m pagan, from whom they have taken many ceremonies, whereas the Inquisitors do wink, by reason of their long custom. There are in the same town, at the end of every place, Changers, Indian Christians, who are called Xaraffos: these men have great knowledge in metals, and tell if a piece be good or false as soon as they see it. The pagan have this custom, to continued in their father's trade or profession; and they marry wives of their own art: they are all distinguished by their vocations, and they do not deal in marriage with women that are of another trade. The fathers give nothing in marriage with their daughters, except some Collars, and Carcanets, and all his other expense consists in the marriage banker. The male children carry away all the inheritance.  
There are many Gusarates and Banjanes of the country of Cambaia, which devil at Goa, Diu, Chaul, Cochin, and other places of the Indies, for the traffic of wheat, cotton, rice, and such like things, but especially for precious stones, wherein they have more skill than any man. They are learned in Arithmetic, and not only exceed other Indians in that point, but even the Portugals themselves. They will by no means eat with other nations, not though they should die for hunger. Whenas they go by sea to Cochin, they carry as much victuals as they think shallbe necessary for their voyage, but if they remain longer than they had set down, they had rather die than eat with a Christian, or any other, or to receive meat.  
Many Canarins and Decanins, which are of the country of Decan, make their abode in the town of Goa, and have shops there. They buy from the Portugals silk, damask, velvet, cotton, Pourcellain dishes, and other merchandise of China, Cambaia, and Bengola, after the great measure, to the end they may cell it again by a lesser ell. They have brokers to this end, their countrymen, who provide for their trade. These men bring victuals from the main land to Goa. They have Indian ships with the which they traffic along the coast of Cambaia, Sunde, and the read sea. There are many excellent goldsmiths among them, many gravers and other Artisans, a great number of barbers and physicians, who remain all at Goa, and do in a manner equal the Portugals, Mestiz, and Christians, in number. They farm the king's rights about Salsette, Bards, and the Island of Goa, and for this cause they are often constrained to assist at all judgements, whereas they pled their own causes, alleging the laws and statutes of Portugal, with amazement to the Portugals themselves.  
The Canarins, and Corumbins of the Indies, employ themselves only to labour and fishing, and have a care of the Indian Palm trees which carry Cocos. There are some of them which do nothing but wash linen; these are called Meynattes, and the other Patameres, that is to say, messengers by land. These (which are the basest among the Indians) live of little; they forbear to eat the flesh of cow, ox, bufle or bugle, and hog, and they live like unto the Canarins and Decanins. They go all naked, having nothing but their privy parts covered with a little cloth. The women cover themselves with a linen cloth, which hangs to their thighs; whereof they truss a part upon their shoulders, so as half the breast is seen. Many of these Canarins make profession of Christian religion, for that they do all in a manner live near unto Goa: for there are many palm trees near unto the banks, as also Rice, which is the Canarins' food, and grows in a low land. These men bring fowls, milk, fruit and eggs from the firm land unto the town: their houses are covered with straw, with a little low door whereas a man cannot enter but stooping: they beget very many children, which remain naked until they be 8 years old, and from that time they hide their privy parts. The women are delivered without any Midwife, & then they presently wash their children, & lay them upon Indian fig leaves, and so they go presently about their household business, as if they had not been newly delivered. The children, as I have said, are nursed naked, and when they are filthy, they use no other mystery but to wash them with water; so as they grow strong and active, a●d fit for any thing, for they are not daintily bred. The men of this sort live many times a hundr●d years in perfect health, and never lose tooth, mocking at our delights, with the which we wrong our lives and nature. They only keep a rust of hair on the top of their heads, and shave the rest. They are good swimmers, and go by water in boats called Almadies, which are so little as they will scarce contain one man, so as they are often overturned; but they are so nimble as they recover them again, cast out the water and go on the● voyage. But they are ver●e miserable, for that they live poorly & ill, and are most commonly by this occasion lean, weak, and of small courage, which makes the Portugals to disgrace and contemn them. They observe the Decanins ceremonies in their marriages. When as the husbands are dead, they make a pile to burn their bodies, and their wives cut their hair, and tear their garments (which are but little worth) in sign of mourning.  
There are many Moors and jews remaining at Goa, Cochin, & other places, whereof many are come from other countries, & many Indians also by birth, who have sucked Mahomatisme and judaisme with their milk: as for their families, they follow the custom of the country where they remain. They have among the Indians, Temples, Synagogues, and Mesquites, where as they exercise their religion at their pleasure. In the Portugals towns every man lives in liberty of conscience: yet no man may make sacrifices after his own manner for fear of scandal, and it is forbidden upon pain of death. The jews have most commonly fair wives. There are many come from Palistina, & yet they speak very good Spanish. As for the Moors, they live according unto Mahome●s' law (the which we will describe in the Turks Empire) and traffic towards the read sea, whither they carry spices: and although that many of them live among the Portugals, yet they hate them deadly, and hinder the advancement of the Christian faith, the which they make as odious as they can to the Indians.   

¶ The Riches.  
THe Portugals and Mestiz which remain at Goa traffic daily to Bengala, Pegu, Malaca, Cambaia, China, and other places. The ●itis●nss of Goa, the Indians and neighbour nations assemble daily in a place which is like unto the Bourse at Antuerpe, but after a different manner: for at Goa the gentlemen and others assemble with the merchants, and all things are exposed to sale, as in a market or fair: this assembly is made every day throughout the year, except the Festi●all days: it gins at seven of the clock in the morning, and continues till nine, by reason of the excessive heat in the afternoon. There are public criers in the chief place of the town which is called Leylon, and they go up and down this place with chains of gold, jewels, precious stones, and other ornaments, being accompanied by a great number of slanes of either sex, to cell, and when as any one offers to buy any of these miserable people, they bring them forth to view as we do beasts. They have also at Goa, Arabian horses, all kinds of spices and drugs, gums which smell well, goodly tapestries, & many other curiosities of Cambaia, Sinde, Bengola, China, and other places, so as it is almost a wonder to see so great a multitude of people. Some Portugals live and gather wealth by means of their slaves, which are sometimes to the number of twenty or thirty, and live of little: these slaves are hired in the town to do all works, and carry water to sell. The women slaves dress their Indian first-fruits, and make divers works, which they carry to the market to cell; for the which they choose the fairest and youngest, to the end that merchants (being alured by their beauty) may buy their commodities more willingly for the women's sake that carry them, whom they hope to enjoy, to whom these women do easily yield, to get a piece of silver. The Portugals enrich themselves easily by this means, and entertain their families. Others make great profit of silver after this manner: When as the Portugals ships arrive, they buy many great Royals of Spain, and give twelve in the hundred profit, the which they keep until April, when as the Merchants go for China, for that these Royals are in great request there, and they gain twenty or thirty in the hundred. At the same time they buy Larins of Persia, giving eight or ten profit for every hundred, and when as the Portugal ships come, they exchange them for Royals, and gain twenty or five and twenty in the hundred. The use of these Larins is necessary at the Indies, to buy pepper at Cochin, whereas this kind of coin is much esteemed. There are also other sorts of money as Pagodes, Venetians, and Santonois, which are of gold. Many do also make great profit of all these coins, especially if fortune favour them. Many live of the revenues of Cocos which their Palm trees bear them, for that they make great traffic of this fruit at the Indies: so a● you shall have one, who besides all charges, will gain in one day by one Palm tree, half a Parda●ue, whereof one is worth three Testons of Portugal money, and there are some that have four or five hundred of these trees in one f●rme, the which they let out to Canarins.  
Many of the pagan dwelling at Goa are rich merchants. There is a street in which there is nothing but shops of these people, full of silks, velvets, and other stuffs, and of Porcellains. They buy all these things first in gross by the means of their Brokers, than they cell them by retail, being wonderful witty in these businesses. In the same street there are other merchants right against them, who cell linen cloth of all sorts, and shirts ready made as well for the Portugals, as for their slaves, with much other small ware. There is another street, whereas they devil that ●●ll all kind of works for women, and hemp to make ●ailess and cordage. In another street are the Banjanes of Camba●a, who cell pearls and precious stones, coral, and such like. There is also a street whereas they make litters, chairs and stools, which they paint of divers colours, with Lacca, an Armenian Gum. The goldsmiths have also ●heir dwelling apart, as also the carpe●terss, joiners, and other tradesmen: and there are others which cell rice by great with other Indian commodities. There are a great number of Apothecaries who cell drugs and spices by retail; these are for the most part Bram●ns or Idol● Priests, who have at the end of every street shops furnished with all sorts of merchandise, the which is very commodious for the people.  
The chief and most ordinary kind of coin is the Pardawe Xerafin which is of silver, and made at Goa: it hath on the one side the image of saint Sebastian, and on the other three or four arrows bound together; it is worth three Testons or three hundred Reyses of Portugal, and the price is sometime higher, sometime lower, according to the course of the change. They use another kind of counting, by certain Tangas, five of which make a Pardawe or Xerafin of the lesser mark. For there are two kinds of money, that is to say, ●he good and the bad: for that four Tangas of good money make five of bad: by reason whereof, in buying & selling, before they conclude, they desire to know if the payment shall be in good or bad money. They have also another account by twenties, not that they are in Specie, but in his imagination that acounts: these are worth four Tangas of good, and five of bad money: their small money carries the name of Basarues: they do account for fifteen Basaru●ss of good money, eighteen of bad: a twenty and three Basaru●ss make two Reyses of Portugal money, and they are made of bad tin: three hundred seventy five Basarucs make a Pardawe: a Larin of Persia is worth a hundred and five, and a hundred and eight Basarucs, according to the course of the change. There are crowns of gold called Pagodes, which are always worth about eight Tangas: the pagan which make them, grave the figure of their Idol: the crowns of Venice or of Turkey are almost worth two Pardawes Xerafins. They have also crowns of gold of saint Thomas with the image of this Saint, which are esteemed at seven or eight Tangas. As for the money of Portugal, they receive not any but great Royalls, which are worth ●ight small ones; whenas the ships of Portugal arrive, a Royal is esteemed at one hundred thirty and six Reyses, but the price doth rise whenas the time draws near to carry them into China. There is a certain kind of counting at Goa, in regard of buying and selling. There are Pardawes Xerafins of silver which are in Specie, but there are some of gold, which are in imagination, and serve but for accounts: for whenas they buy pearls, stones, gold, silver, and horses, the Pardawes are valued at six Tangas; but in regard of other merchandise, whenas they do not specify any thing, they mean simply Pardawes Xerafins, every one of which is worth five Tangas. They also name Pardawes of Larins, and then the Pardawe is worth five Larins. These are the coins which they use at Goa, and the manner of exchange, by means whereof many grow rich. Finally, the great falsehood of these Pardawes, which are sometimes wonderfully well counterfeited, is the cause that they have great need of changers to discover this false coin. The Indians of the firm land make this false money to deceive the Portugals; so as no man dares take the lest piece of silver before he hath showed it to a changer.  
These changers are careful to provide all kinds of silver for them that demand it, having tables prepared where there are heaps of silver distinguished by Tangas. A Tangas is worth seventy and five Basarucs, and in the exchange of a Pardawe for three hundred seventy and five Basarucs, they do sometimes add eight or ten.  
The weights of Goa, are like unto them of Portugal, and are distinguished into Quintalls, Arrobes, and others: yet they have another weight called M●o, which signifies the hand, and weigheth twelve pound, the which they use in selling of butter, honey, sugar and such like. They measure pepper with the Bharo, which makes three Quintalls and a half of Portugal weight, and every Quintall is a hundred pound. They have a measure which they call Medida, which is about nine ounces: Four and twenty of these measures make the hand, and twenty hands the Candil. They measure rice, wheat, and other dry things after this manner, and lad their ships, making the account of their lading by Candils or Bharos. They cell rice also in the straw well bound up in bundles: ●●e bundle contains commonly three hands and a half. The best rice is called Girasall, and is better than that which they call Chambasall. There are also other sorts of rice of less value: when it is in the husk, they call it Batthe and it is very like unto barley.  
As for the Viceroys they are accustomed to visit the places and forts which are under the king of Spain, fifty, sixty, and eighty miles from Goa, as well towards the North as South. This survey brings him as great profit as any other thing. It is most certain that the Viceroy's have great revenues, and dispose of the king of Spain's at their pleasure, growing exceeding rich by this means, for that the king gives them absolute power. Besides the revenues and ordinary profits they receive presents from all parts, which enrich them: for all they that have any alliance with the king of Spain sand (according to the custom of Ambassadors) to the Vi●●roy newly arrived, with presents which are great and stately: and whilst he remains at Goa, he is entertained at the king's charge, like to the other officers, out of that which is received for the king in the countries of Salsette and Bards.   

¶ The Forces.  
THe Island hath only a wall towards the East, right against the land of Salsette, unto the other side of the land of Bards. This defence is not good, but against the sudden invasions of the people of the firm land, which are not under the dominion of the Portugals: there is no other fortification in this Island. There is in the land of Bards a Castle standing high at the mouth of the river, but it is almost ruined, and hath only three iron pieces, and a man to keep it.  
The Island of Goa toward the sea, for the most part discovers itself with high rocks: but the land of Bards towards the sea, hath a goodly shore of sand five hundred paces long. This is the guard of the Island: towards the East there are three or four ports near the river upon the extremity of the Island, right against the firm land of Salsette and Bards: every port hath a captain and a secretary, without whose permission no man may go to the firm land; by reason whereof, when the Indian Decanins and other Ethiopian Idolaters which remain at Goa, go to the firm land for any traffic, or to seek for victuals; they must in these passages have a mark set upon their naked arm, which mark they must show at their return, and they give for the liberty of the passage two Basarucs being paid to the Captain and Secretary, who do set a young man in Seninell all night, whose charge is to ring a Bell which hangs in the Tower. There are five of these passages, one is towards the South, which leads to the firm land and to Salsette; this passage was called Benesterijm, and now the passage of S. james, by reason that the Church of Saint james is near it. The second passage called Sec is upon the East part of the Island, and it is the common passage to go to the firm land, for that the river is easier to be waded through there, than in any other place. The third, which is called the passage of Daugijn, or of the mother of God, is upon the South side, and near unto the town; the wall reacheth unto it, beginning at the passage of S. james: and as for the rest of the Island it hath no other defence. From this passage they ferry over unto the other Island, which answers unto the firm land, and this fourth is called Nor●●●. The fifth and last passage is from the town unto half the river, upon a low flat bending towards Bards: this is the strongest of all, and is called the passage of Pangijn: and here they stay all vessels which go in, or come out of the river. These are all the fortifications of this Island, which notwithstanding doth not much fear the attempt of her neighbours, being carefully guarded and full of people. Yet that which might hurt the Portugals is the great multitude of Idolaters & Mahometans which are in this Island. But if there be any fear of that side, the Portugals do set so good an order and keep so careful a guard, as they may well live in assurance. Moreover, their armies at sea which scour the coasts, krepe them from surprise, and their entertained soldiers which are many in number secure them.   

¶ The Government.  
THe Viceroy of the Indies which remains at Goa is sent thither for three years with full power, and sometimes he continues longer, according to the king's pleasure, but it happens not often, and is very extraordinary. This Viceroy hath within this town his Council, his seat of justice, his Chancery, and his judges after the manner of Portugal, and for this cause he decides all suits and controversies in the name of the king of Spain, to whom notwithstanding they may appeal in civil causes which are of great importance, and this is the only point that is reserved. As for criminal causes, no man may appeal from the sentence that is given at Goa, unless he be a gentleman; and the Viceroy is therein restrained, that ●e cannot put a gentleman to death, but must sand him prisoner under good guard into Spain, unless the king do otherwise provide. The viceroys Palace is guarded by soldiers who are entertained to that end. This dignity continues until the arrival of another Viceroy who must succeed him, and being come to Bards, or into some other port of the Indies, he presently sends his deputies to take possession. The Viceroy upon this Summons quits the Palace to him that comes, and doth unfurnish it of all the movables, leaving nothing but bore walls, the which are presently hung with tapistry, and the rest in few days richly furnished. The precedent Viceroy returns in the same ship wherein his successor comes. This great authority is never given but for some famous recompense. The Indians say commonly, that they cannot hope for a better fortune at the Indies, whilst that this custom of sending Viceroy's for three years shall be maintained. For the first year, the Viceroy doth look into and discover the manners of the country: the second, he seeks to gather wealth: and the third, he sets every thing in good order, lest the successor surprise him. This may make them conjecture that this command will be lasting, seeing that no man can promise' unto himself a longer time to settle his affairs, and by this means it prevents the negligence of such as defer them from day to day.  
The book wherein they writ the names of such as go from Portugal to the Indies, is sent to one that hath the particular charge at the Indies, & this office is for three years like unto the rest. When as Summer comes at the Indies, and that necessity doth force them to sand an army to sea, to assure the navigation (which they of Malabar sworn enemy's to the Portugals, do hinder and trouble by all means) every year about the m●neth of September, they make a proclamation by the sound of the drum, That all such as will serve the king, should come and receive their pay. Then the Viceroy makes a General who hath many Captains under him, whereof every one commands a ship, and of these ships some hold one hundred men, and others thirty. These men have pay according to their titles, the which they receive every three months. A simple soldier hath seven Pardawes Xerafins, every Pardawe being worth three Teslons of Portugal. An honourable person hath nine Pardawes, and so of the rest. The Captains seek to draw good soldiers unto them by presents, beside their pay. The Ships are well furnished with victuals, and the Captains eat with the soldiers, and see that they be well used; for that otherwise they would not be obedient. This army doth guard and scour the seas until April, to hinde● the courses of the Malabares. About the end of April they return to Goa, and then they draw their ships a ground: the soldiers being returned, go where they please, and are no more entertained. Then the Viceroy protesteth before the General of the sea army, that by his commaundemed●, and in the king of Spain's name●he hath held an army at sea all that ●ime, and hath kep●piratss from doing any spoils. If there hath been any worthy exploit performed, he ●●kes along discourse, where amongst other points he sets down, that the General hath in regard thereof been at great charge for the king's service. The General having this testimony and certifia●, doth witness the like for the Captains that have been under his charge. They m●st also have certificates fr●● the Secretaries, and from such as have charge of the Arsenal at the Indies, to be a testimony that they have not done any thing which might hinder or diminish their recompense. The Po●tugals' return with these testimonies, having already conceived in their imaginations the offices which they affect. All officers return also at the end of three years, and it is a great favour, when as they do grant to any one a continuation of his place for his son in law, who takes the office for the marriage of his wife. Then the letters are enrolled in the great Chancery, and sent to the Indies to the end the Viceroy may confirm them. They observe the same laws in Portugal.  
As for the pepper which they draw out of the Indies, they proceed after this manner. They do not lad any ship but the five which they that hire the king of Spain's ships must have re●die. If there be so great abundance of merchandise, as th●se five ships will not contain all, than the farmers of pepper, and the king's officers require that they add some ships to the ordinary number: the which the farm●●● are forced to do, so as there may be sufficient to carry away the whole charge: the which if they refuse, than the Viceroy and the king's officers may lad at their pleasures as well the farmer's pepper, as any other merchandise that remains; to the king's benefit, neither can the farmers of ships pretend any thing: but this may only be done when as the five ships have their full lading. The farmers of pepper have a factor in every ship, to whom the king gives a place, and entertainment during the voyage. The farm of pepper continues five years, and if there happen any misfortune at sea, the loss is theirs that fraught the ships; and so is all the charge of lading: and if the money chance to be lost, this loss falls to the farmer's share. They are bound to deliver the pepper unto the king after the rate of twelve ducats for the quintal; if it wants in quantity, the loss is the farmers, and not the kings, who receives the pepper into the Indian house, being dry and clean, with an assured gain, and without any fear of loss. Finally, these farmers have their rights and privileges so well confirmed, as they cannot be infringed.  
There is not any other that may ●ell pepper upon pain of death, and this law is rigogorously observed. They may not diminish the sum of money which is prepared for the buying of pepper, nor take any part of it, for what cause soever, be it never so necessary. There is no man may gi●e any hindrance when as they lad the ships with pepper, yea they lay aside the king's affairs at that time, and the Viceroy with the other captains at the Indies have no other care, but give them assistance when they demand it. The Bhare of pepper is sold most commonly at the Indies for 28 Pagodes, and the Bhare contains three Quintalls and a half of Portugal; so as a quintal is worth twelve Xerafins Pardawes and four Tangas, and the quintal weighs one hundred twenty eight pounds. They give a certain quantity of silver to the king of Spain, if the ships arrive safely: besides, they are bound to transport, and seed the soldiers for nothing. In the end if any ship chance to be lost, the king looseth not any thing, but some money which they give him for his right, and for that he hath not the pepper which he should have at a certain price. Hence it grows that they that have the charge of matters concerning the sea, care not how few men of defence they put into these ships, whereas the kings of Portugal had a special care, for that all the pepper did belong to them.   

¶ The Religion.  
AT Goa they have liberty of conscience, where there is to be seen among the Portugals, Moors, I●weses, Armenians, Gusa●ates, Ba●janes, Bramins, and other Indians, which live there after their own manner, and according to their own religion, but that they are not suffered to burn men dead or alive, nor to celebrat their marriages, or to make show of their devilish superstitions: whereof the Bishop hath a special care, for fear of scandalising the new Christians. But if any one after he hath been baptised returns to Paganism, he is put into the Inquisition, to be punished according to the Inquisitors sentence. There are many Arabians, Persians, and Abyssins', which do partly follow the Christian religion, and partly that of the Moors, who observe the pernicious law of Mahomet. The Moors eat all things indifferently, except hog's flesh, and they are buried after the manner of the jews. Some among the Decanins, Gularates, and Canarins abstain from eating of beef, or the flesh of Bugles. Many worship the Sun and Moon, yet they acknowledge one only God, creator of all things. Finally, there are many churches and monasteries at Goa, but there is not any one of religious women, for that there is no means to persuade the Indian women to chastity. There is an Archbishop, who hath under him all the Bishops of the East Indies, and there is also an Inquisition as in Spain.   

¶ The ancient profession of Christianity at the Indies.  
SOme writ that saint Thomas the Apostle (after that this part was fallen to him in the distribution of the world) transported himself first into the Island of Socotera, where having made many Christians, he passed to Cranganor, from thence to Colan, and so to Choromandel●. Having then planted the word of God in all these places, being moved with a fame of the greatness of China, he went thither to preach jesus Christ. After that he had laboured there a while, he returned into the realm● of Choromandel to revisit the Neophites, and to confirm them in the faith. Malipur was then the chief town in this country, which the Portugals at this day call, Saint Thomas: who going about to build a Church (wherein king Sagam and the Idol Priests did cross him what they could) there fell out an accident which did much avail to manifest the power of Christ and the truth of the gospel, to these Barbarians: The sea had cast a pe●ce of timber of extraordinary greatness upon the shoa●e, which was then ten leagues from the town; the king was very desirous to employ this timber for his building, but he could never move it, neither by the means of men and instruments, nor by the force of Elephants: they say that the Apostle made offer unto the king, that if he would give him that timber to build a church unto the true God, he would draw it presently to the town, without the help of man or engine: the which the king granted, and laughed at him. Saint Thomas having then tied his girdle to a little sprig which grew out of the body thereof after that he had made the sign of the cross, he drew it without any difficulty within the walls, to the great amazement of all the people. Then having set up a cross of stone, he foretold, That when the sea should come thither, they should see white men come from afar country, to plant the doctrine which he had preached. This prophesy was verified at the coming of the Portugals to the Indies; for that a little before, the sea had approached near unto this mark. The reputation of saint Thomas increased continually, with his miracles: whereat the Brahmins' being discontented, for that they saw their credit's 〈◊〉 gain to fail one of them seeking to ruin him, slew his own son, and accu●●●● the Apostle of this 〈◊〉. The Apostle being brought before the king to purge himself of this impu●●●●●, said, that there needed no other justification, than the testimony of the dead; requiring, that it might be lawful for him to question him: his adversary could no● refu●e it, and they all being amazed at this proposition, and attending the success, the dead child was brought into the king's presence: ●lint Thomas then turning himself unto the body, said unto him, That in the name of Christ, whom he preached for the God and Saviour of the world, he should declare who was the author of his death: at the name of Christ, this body spoke, and did witness, That saint Thomas 〈…〉 of the true God, and that his father ●ad slain him, for rage and envy which he 〈…〉 the Saint. The king who had some inclination to the law of Christ, 〈…〉 seeing this miracle. But the Bramins (although convicted of their 〈…〉 the Apostles● proceedings, with the ruin of their Idols, ●esol●● 〈…〉. There 〈…〉 without the town, whether saint Thomas after the 〈…〉 of Christ did use to retire himself to medi●ate and pray; in this place he first 〈…〉 with a stone, and a wound with a dart; and in the end he was slain with 〈…〉 this body was taken up by his disciples, and buried in a church, where they did also put a pe●ce of the lance which had pierced him, and a staff with an iron which he used in his journeys to support him, and a vessel full of the earth where his blood had fallen. Some hold that the miracle of the timber was not done at Malipur, but at Cran●onor, and that king S●gams' successor put him to death at Calamine, and that his body was transported by the Christians to Edessa a town in Mesopotamia. Notwithstanding, john the third, king of Portugal, according to the common opinion, enjoined Edward de Meneses his lieutenant at the Indies to do what he could possibly to found out the body of saint Thomas upon the coast of Choromandel, and to have a care that his holy relics (which some hold are all in Mesopotamia) might be laid up in some place to be kept, with reverence: Meneses gave this charge to Emanuel Fria, who went to Malipur with some Priests, and an Architect. There among ●he ruins of the ●owne, they found the marks of a stately church, where there was not any thing standing but a little chapel with many crosses, printed within and without▪ 〈◊〉 of the country said that the Apostles body was in that place; and there they found a stone whereon was written in an old language (as they learned of some that understood it) that this church was built by saint Thomas, and that king Sagam had given the tenth● of merchandise which came into his towns, for to entertain it. They found under this stone (as they of the country assured) the king's body: but digging deeper, they ●ame unto a place which was compassed in, first with a wall of earth, and then with st●●● nine foot high, with divers cove●ingss, they said that the Apostles body was ●nder it Whereupon two Portugals (who confessed themselves and communicated before) opening this place, found certain bones very white mingled with lime and sand, a tron●hon of a lance, a travelers staff, and a vessel of earth▪ so as they knew by these marks that it was the body of the Apostle: and the rather for that the body of king Sagam, and of another disciple of saint Thomas was near unto it▪ but these two were deformed and fearful, as the colour only did distinguish the Apostles bones from the rest. The Saint's body was afterwards put into one shrine, and those of his two disciples into another, and the keys of the place 〈◊〉 brought unto the Viceroy and delivered into his hands. Two years after, the said 〈◊〉 were hidden by two Portugals under the Altar of the Chapel, and in the end 〈…〉 transported unto ●oa by a religious man of the order of saint Francis, whenas D●●●●●anti●e of Braganc● was Viceroy at the Indies. There are at this day Christians at the 〈◊〉 which are called of saint Thomas: it is ●rue that they have divers errors, being borne 〈◊〉 in the heresy of Arr●●●, and partly in that of Nestorius. This mischief ●●ept in a●o●g●● them, for that these poor people having great want of Priests and ●●●latss to instruct them and to administer the sacraments, after a long deliberation, they resolved to sand forth so●● among them to seek some and to bring them to the Indies, 〈◊〉 soever they found them: these deputies after a long and painful journey, came into Assyria, where they entreated the Patriarch of Babylon to furnish them with what they desired. This Patriarch gave them certain Priests and Prelates, who went unto the Indies, and in stead of the pure and true doctrine, did sow the cockle of divers heresies, and these heresies have continued until our time. Notwithstanding they retain many of the Apostles traditions, they have the Sacrament of the Altar in great veneration, and receive it under both kinds. They keep Aduent and Lent, sing Psalms ordinarily, and celebra● the Feast of jesus Christ, and of his Saints, but especially the eight day after Easter. These people devil at Cranganor and thereabouts, and they hold them to be about threescore and ten thousand. There are also a great number at Negapatan, and at Malipur: And moreover, in the country of Angamala, fifteen miles above Cochin towards the North. There remains the Archbishop, who depends of the Patriarch of Babylon. They do by little and little acknowledge the Catholic religion by the means of jesuits, who have a College at Vaypicota: for they confess themselves unto them, and they bring their children to be baptized, and their Priests learn to say Mass after the Roman manner. In the year 1583 the Archbishop held a Synod, whereas two jesuits did assist, and made many decrees conformable to the Romish religion. In the year 1587. the king of Portugal built a College at Malipur, with the help of the Christians of Saint Thomas, and a Seminary for the instruction of youth. I have set down these miracles of Saint Thomas according to my Author, not as an authentic authority, leaving every man at liberty to believe it if he please.   

¶ The new profession of Christianity at the Indies.  
THe first which passed unto the Indies to preach the Gospel, were the religious of the order of S. Francis, whereof the first was Friar Henry, since Bishop of Senta, who went with the army that was led by Peter Alua●o's Capral, in the year 1500, with some Priests, but neither he, nor his companions could make any great profit of their talents, by reason of the continual wars. Afterwards there went Friar Anthony Petroine, and soon after Friar Anthony Laurere, who stayed at Socotera, and there did some good. Finally, Lopes Sequeyra Viceroy at the Indies built a Church at Goa under the name of S. Francis, and a Convent for the religious men of that order: the which he did to the ●nd they might have means to employ themselves in those parts, for the service of God, and the conversion of the Indians. So as from that time they made few enterprises either of peace or war, where they did not assist. For Anthon●e Petroine was the first that said Mas●●, and preached at Daman in Cambaia, and Friar Anthon●e Casal was at the succour of Di● with D. john de Castro, and there did his duty. The first Bishop at the Indies was one Friar Fernandes of the order of S. Francis, who went in the time of Nugnez d' Acc●g●a; he in administering the Sacraments, preaching to the Portugals, and drawing the Gentiles to the faith, did execute the office of Bishop commendably, and it is credible that the faith was much advanced at that time. But there was nothing which writers did less care for in those days: for as they were few, so they busied themselves to 〈◊〉 the deeds of arms, and the voyages of fleets. Fernandes had for his successor john of Albuquerque of Castille, of the same order of S. Francis, who came unto the Indies with D. ●●rzia of Norogno; and brought with him one Friar Vincent fit to teach the doctrine o● Christ; and james of Borba a Portugal, & a famous preacher. But unto that time, there w●● 〈◊〉 seen in the Portugals an ardent desire to advance the Christian religion at the 〈◊〉, than any effect of importance: for that the governors and captains were bu●●● in the building efforts and making of ships, to gather together soldiers for the 〈◊〉 of the sea, and to invade the enemy's country: and the religious of S. 〈…〉 ●●●●ding that they had a good Convent at Goa) were so busied day and 〈…〉 ordinary exercises, and to bury the dead, as they had little leisure to 〈…〉 the Gentiles to convert them. At that time when as Stephen de 〈…〉 at the Indies, which was in the year 1540, some good men, 〈…〉 Michael Vaz, Vicar general of the Indies, and james of Borbe with sword Annia, instituted a Seminary of young men of divers Nations, to the end they might by their means plant the faith of Christ in divers parts; and they assigned unto them the revenues of their Idol Temples, ruined by Michael Vaz: and they called this Seminary, The College of the holy faith, and afterwards of Saint Paul, by reason of a Church so named. They intended to bring up in the College a good number of young men of all Nations and to in struck them in the doctrine of Christ, to the end they might be afterwards fit to preach, and to reduce their countrymen to the truth of the Gospel. At that time there was a goodly purchase made unto the Church by chance. They call those people Paraves, which dwell ne●re unto the Cape of Comorin, who are simple and of a good disposition, living for the most part of the fishing of pearl; so as the coast where they devil (which is in length from the said Cape unto the Island of Manar, about fifty leagues, in which tract they do number about five and twenty towns and villages) is called. The fishing. This people having been ruined by the Mahometans, and being reduced as well by this means as others, to extreme misery, after a long 〈◊〉 being persuaded by one john de la Croix, (who had been converted some years ●●fore and did traffic in those parts) they resolved to sand their chief men to Cochin, to demand succours, promising to embrace the Christian faith if they were relieved. Their deputies being come to Cochin, the better to assure the Portugals, they caused themselves to be presently paptised. The Portugals thought it not fit to contemn their demand, nor their offer, so as having armed a good number of ships, they not only chased the Mahometans out of that country, but also reduced the Paraves to a better condition, and made the fishing more profitable. There went certain Priests in the same ships, who did catechise and in few days baptizm all the people. But those few Clergy men were not sufficient for the instruction of them that were catechised, and the confirmation of the converted. That which did also hinder them, was the commerce and conversation they had with the Infidels, full of liberty and dissolution: so as it was easier to corrupt the old Christians than to help the new. King john being advertised hereof, spared neither cost nor pains to remedy it; and that which did incite him much thereunto, was, that he knew well he could not levy the tenths of the country, nor the taxes, nor yet make war against the Gentiles, to maintain and augment the glory of God and the preaching of the Gospel, if the Gentiles opposed themselves in the beginning. But the King's forces were not answerable to his good desires, for to effect this design he had need of a great number of men of good life, full of wisdom, learning, charity▪ of great courage, and strong of body; and Portugal had not many such at that time: for their Preachers were for the most part strangers, and the Portugals which gave themselves to learning transported themselves to Alcala, or Salamanca. The University of Coimbra which he had erected, was yet new and brought forth nothing but bitter first-fruits and the necessity of the Indies was urgent. The company of the jesuits began then to flourish, the king being advertised thereof, he writ to D. Pedro Mascarogne, his Ambassador at Rome with Paul the third, to obtain of father Ignasius founder of that Society, some of his Fathers. The Ambassador demanded them & he obtained but two, which were father Simon Rodrigues a Portugal, and Francis Xavier a Navarrois, to whom there afterwards joined Paul of Camerin in Italy, and Francis Mansilla in Portugal. Of these, Rodriguez remained afterwards in Portugal, and Xavier went to the Indies. They parted from Rome in the year 1540 Being in Portugal, and the King informed of the virtue of father Xavier he did him much honour, and having recommended 〈◊〉 him with great affection▪ the advancement of Christian religion at the Indies, he 〈…〉 a Brief from the Pope▪ by the which he was made Nuncio to the holy See, with 〈◊〉 power at the Indies. He arrived at Goa the sixteenth of May, in the year 1542, 〈◊〉 he was received with great honour by the Bishop and began presently to set hand to work, instituting the Catechism▪ He went every day throughout the streets, and with a little bell gathered many people together to come to Church. There, both he and his companions taught the Christian religion. He spent the winter 〈◊〉 this manner, and 〈◊〉 of Camerin, had the charge of the college of saint Paul where there were many young men. But the Father having heard speak of the late conversion of the Paraves, went thither in the spring, leading with him Mansilla to instruct and confirm them, and to this end he learned their language with much pain. He was forced often to encounter the Bramins, who could not endure that he should take from them their, follower's and their reputation, and discover their vanities and deceits. He stayed no longer in any one place than was needful: but he made choice of the Neophi●eses who had more virtue and better wits, and left them in his place to have ca●e of the rest. Being come to the end of one province, he returned to the other, and demanded an account of those things which he had taught, especially of those whom he had made masters of others, who are there called Canacapoles. He obtained for them a certain sum of money which the Indians were wont to give for the queen Portugal's buskins, to whom he did writ that she could not ascend up to Heaven with better buskins than the prayers of the Neophites. He spent above a year to instruct and confirm the Paraves, at the same of whose conversion the Macoes a neighbour people which belong unto the realm of Travancor, and devil upon the East of the Cape of Comorin sent messengers to the Father entreating him to go and baptizm them, the which he did, and in one month converted above ten thousand to the faith: Whilst he was thus attentive in the conversion of the Macoes, they of Manar (which is an Island betwixt Caromandell and the last Cape of Zeilan) sent messengers unto him to demand baptism: he sent some unto them, who did catechise them of Manar, whilst that he laboured in the work that he had begun: the which the king of jafanapatan (whose subjects they were) understanding, being full of wrath, he slew some, and tormented others cruelly: some which had escaped his hands came by, land to Goa (which was two hundred leagues) to demand baptism. Whilst that Father Xavier was busied in these good exercises, they sent unto him to assist him john Beyra of Pontevedro, Nicholas Lancelot of V●bi●, and Anthony criminal of Parma, and in the year 1548, he had Gaspard Berze, and Anthony Gome, with eight other companions, and at the same time there arrived at Goa twelve religious●mens of the order of saint Dominicke, whereof james Bermude was the ●●ie●t, and there they built them a fair church in a short time, with a commodious cloister. Father Xavier having left the charge of the church of the Paraves to father Anthony Criminell he gave him means to die gloriously; for the Bramins and the Badagues s●ew him.  
〈◊〉 these accidents the king of Tanor caused himself to be baptized. Tanor is a town some four score leagues distant from Goa towards the South. This king being informed of our faith, by father Vincent of the order of saint Francis and by john Suares, who went often unto him, in the end he caused himself to be baptized. The Queen and two great personages of the realm did the like soon after, but secretly, and the king himself, after his baptising, carried about his neck (for fear of sedition) the three strings, according to the custom of the Bramins of whose sect he had been. Afterwards he had a desire (for the confirming of a stricter league with the Portugals) to come to Goa, where he was received very magnificently: the Archbishop, the Viceroy, and many others persuaded him to leave those marks of the Bramins, and to make open profession of Christianity: but he alleged the danger of a revolt of his subjects and brother ●●●●eating them that they would not advise him to precipitate himself, adding that he did 〈◊〉 much affect religion and the glory of Christ, as he would not let pass any occasion to ●●crease it, but he must proceed therein wisely: he remained ten days at Goa, during the which he was confirmed by the Archbish. The Portugals having not only augmented but also settled their Empire at the Indies with a peace which followed: the na●● of Christ was also much extended: they did ruin many temples of the Idols, 〈…〉 they built stately churches. To allure the Gentills the more, they made 〈…〉 that were baptized, and did procure them charges and offices, where 〈…〉 honour and profit, exempting them from all impositions, and suffering 〈…〉 and such like. It cannot be imagined how glad the new Christians 〈…〉 king of Spain did of late years make two of them commanders of the order of Christ. They have built many houses for catachising, and eight Seminaries for ●he instruction of youth. But the faith did never increase so much at the Indies, as when Don Constantine of Bragance was Viceroy there, who employed for the conversion of Infidels not only the king's revenues, but also his own. He did assist himself at baptisms, honoured the baptised, and gave them means, and to conclude, he showed himself a father in all occasions to the Neophites. With this kind of proceeding he did not only advance religion, but did strengthen the Portugals command at the Indies. During his government; in the year 1557, the Jesuits alone baptized one thousand and eight hundred persons, and in the year following somewhat more: but in the year 1559, they baptised three thousand two hundred and sixty, and in the year 1560, there were twelve twousand seven hundred forty and two baptised: so as these fathers, or they of the order of saint Domi●icke, and saint Francis, converted in a manner all the town of Goa, which is of the bigness of Genoa: so as the years following they did not baptizm so man●●▪ ye● there hath searce past any year, but they have baptized one thousand or more either within the town or near unto it. In the year 1587. (for that the 〈◊〉 upon the coast of Malabar being priest with hunger and extreme want, sold 〈◊〉 children, and set price of themselves) there were two good decrees made for the ●●●●ase of the faith: the one was that such as were put to sale, should not be bought but by Christians: and the other was, that such as had been already bought by the Gentiles should be set at liberty if they become Christians. The conversion of Gentiles doth also advance much at Basain, whereas the Jesuits have permission from the king to take orphans, and to catechise them, and in the year 1581., the king did assign two hundred and fifty crowns rend for them that were catechised. The ordinary number of them that are converted every year at Basain, is about two hundred, and they do account as many at Colan, and a hundred at Zane; and some few less at Daman and at Chaul. Bandor●, a land near unto Goa is already wholly Christian, and so is the little Island of Co●●●. In the Island of Salsette, in the year ●583, they slew three Jesuits, for that they rui●●d their Idols and Idolatry; 〈…〉 year 1587., there were one thousand one hundred and forty persons, and afterwards fourteen whole villages converted. Upon the coast called The fishing, there are about forty thousand. Christians, and at Manar they do every year baptizm about six or seven hundred persons. Upon the coast of Travancor which is seventy and five miles long, they can hardly entertain the preaching of the word for the poverty of the 〈◊〉▪ and the cruelty of Pagan princes, and Mahometaines: yet 〈…〉 about ten thousand Christians. At Cochin they have not prevaded so well, for that the king both made an evict, by the which his subjects which become Christ●●● lose all their goods: yet there passeth no year but there are above one hundred converted.  
The 〈…〉 gethere, whereas they teach grammar, human sciences, 〈…〉 great number of scholars: as also at Chaul, whereas the work of conversion is in 〈◊〉 hands of the religious of saint Francis, and also at Nagapatan. Finally, in the year 1587., and the year after, they did baptizm in the hither part of the Indies, eight thousand persons: and in the year 1588., there were nine thousand catechised, and five thousand baptized.  
We have 〈…〉 such places of the Indies as were held by the Spaniards: ●et us now pass to the new found world, and in passing let us take view of some places and Islands subject to the king of Spain.   

¶ 〈…〉, Septa●or Seuta.  
THe 〈…〉 towns are in the realms of Fezin the country of Elabat. Arzilla is a reason 〈◊〉 town, distant from the strait of Gibraltar about seventy miles. Tanger is a 〈◊〉 a ancient town ●eared upon the Ocean, and thirty miles from the Strait of 〈◊〉 Seuta is a very great ●●vae at the mouth of the Strait, and ●●●●times the chief● of all Maurita●ia. These three towns are subject to the king of Spain, who hath also in this realm in the Province of Garet, two good towns, Medele and Chesase.   

¶ The Island of Saint Helen.  
THis Island carries the name, for the Spaniards discovered it on the one and twentieth 〈◊〉 of May, being S. Helen's day. It contains sixteen miles, and is half a degree 〈…〉 all towards the Antarctic Pole, and five hundred and fifty leagues 〈…〉 Cape of Good hope, and three hundred and fifty leagues from Angola.   

¶ The Quality of the Country.  
THis Island is ●●●●ie; and the wood which grows the●e is not fit for any thing but for ●he, it is so burnt; which shows that there are veins of fire in this Island. The soil 〈◊〉, & in some places there is a substance of sulphur. Before the coming of the Portugals, there were no beasts, neither did the trees bear any first-fruits, so as all that it could yield was fresh water, which falls from the mountains, and Howes abundantly in the 〈◊〉 near unto the Chapel, & from thence it runs into the sea by torrents. The Spania●ds' or Portugal's water the●e, and was● their linen. They have also by little & little brought all sorts of beasts, and have planted fruit trees in the valleys, so as there is at this 〈…〉 number. There is great store of fallow dear, goats, wild boars, partridges 〈…〉 every man may hunt at pleasure: they may kill them easily with a staff or a stone, there is such abundance. There are figs of Portugal, pomegranates, oranges 〈…〉 such abundance as this Island seems an earthly Paradise, and the trees doo● 〈…〉 bear continually, for that the rain doth water them every day six or 〈…〉 followed by a warm Sun, so as this mixture makes the Island 〈…〉 is also great store of fi●●▪ so as in a short space they may take 〈…〉. The mariners dry this fi●●, which is of beter taste than any other. The 〈…〉 are covered with ●alt, which sufficeth for their necessary uses: so 〈…〉 his Island was placed there to refresh the ships of Spain.  
〈…〉 use to lea●e their sick then in this Island, with rice, biscuit, oil, and some 〈…〉 and ●●esh they have store; for when as the ships go away, 〈…〉 retired into the rocks and mountains return into the valleys, 〈…〉. The sick men continued there until the next year, and then they 〈…〉 ships that pass: for the most part they are soon cured, by reason 〈…〉 of the air, which is always constant in this Island.  
〈…〉 hath made an Edict, by the which they are forbidden to build and 〈…〉, lest this common use thereof should be lost, for that it were to be feared that the inhabitants would make it private unto themselves, and appropriate that 〈…〉 and profitable to so many. Some years passed there was an 〈…〉 himself to have a care of the Chapel, and to ●●ue there with more 〈…〉 that they found that he killed goats, and made profit of their skins, he was carried back into Portugal. Moreover, two Negroes of Mozambique, and a man of 〈…〉 two slaves, hid themselves in the rocks and mountains, being slipped from the 〈…〉 men being multiplied to the number of twenty, spoiled the Island when as 〈…〉 were go, and did much hurt to the first-fruits, and whilst the ships were near 〈…〉, they kept themselves close in caves which they had in the rocks, and 〈…〉 whereas the Portugals had never been: When as the mariners had 〈…〉 they sought to take them, but it was in vain, by reason of their retreats 〈…〉 to others. In the end, by the king's express commandment, 〈…〉 into Portugal: and since that time there hath not any 〈…〉 the Island but sick men, who make little cabbens under trees, like to 〈…〉 of trees is great, and these lodgings make a show like a town. 〈…〉 these sick men 〈◊〉 to kill f●esh: every man goes a fishing, gathers first-fruits, 〈…〉: And moreover, they go in procession singing hymns. 〈◊〉 are the names of many graven in the barks of sigge trees, and these names do 〈…〉 grow exceeding great.   

¶ The Island of S. Thomas.  
THis 〈…〉 that the Portugals discovered it on S. Thomas day; it is 〈…〉 is of a round form: it hath in Diameter forty mile's 〈…〉 it was full of great trees whose branches gr●w 〈…〉 the plague. The air is hot and sound, yet there are few Christian● 〈◊〉 live to the age of fifty years, and it is a wonder to see any one with a white 〈…〉 the Negroes and they that are borne in the country come unto a hundred and more. The days and nights are equal. In March and September it rains continually, and in the other 〈◊〉 there fa●●s a thick mist. In the midst of it there is 〈…〉 a cloud, which doth so moisten the trees (whereof this 〈…〉 of water, which doth refresh their fields of 〈…〉 no wheat, vines, or any trees whose fruit hath hard stones: 〈…〉 cucumbers, pompions, figs, ginger, and especially sugar: so as 〈…〉 accustomed to lad forty ships of sugar yearly in this Island, for the which they gave in exchange wine, cheese, wheat, hides and other things necessary: but this abundance hath ceased, since that certain worms have gotten into the roots of their sugarcanes: so as at this day, they do not lad yearly above six ships with sugar. This Island doth also bear millet, rice, barley, lettuce, cabbage, parsley, and all other kind of small herbs. There grows also in this Island an herb which the inhabitants call Ignaman, they hold it for excellent, to be of great virtue and necessary for their lives; it is black on the out side, and white within, and is long like unto a great turnup, and hath many branches in the root: it hath the ta●t of a chestnut, but it is more delicate and pleasing: they eat it most commonly roasted in the ●mberss, and sometimes raw. The Spaniards which devil there 〈◊〉 transported olive trees, peaches, almonds, and other trees which make a fair she● 〈◊〉 have never carried any fruit. There are in this ●●land a kind of Crevices, which 〈◊〉 in the earth like unto moles, which turn up the ground and eat eve●iething. There 〈◊〉 also found in this Island great store of partridges, black birds, starlings, and parr●t●. The sea about this Island is full of fish, and it is a wonderful thing to see the 〈…〉 of whales which are towards the main land. They that 〈◊〉 newly, are surprised with a fever which continues very dangerously for twenty days, so as they draw blood without reckoning the ounces. The inhabitants are some white, some black▪ and as for the blacks, they say they are wonderfully tormented with fleas, 〈◊〉, and punei●e●; whereas the white men have not any one in their be●ss.  
The Portugals when they discovered this Island, found it desert: There is now a Colony, and they 〈…〉 a town which they call Paucasan, in which there are about seven hundred 〈…〉 the Bishop and Clergy men. It hath a very good port, and a little river of excellent water.   

¶ The Island of Madera.  
THis Island is the Queen of all the Islands, in the Atlantic Ocean. It is so called, for 〈…〉 when it was discovered, which was in the year 1420, being before desert, it was 〈…〉, the which were set on fire to make the land fit for tillage● it is hilly as Sicily 〈…〉 as they began to sow it▪ it did yield threescore for one: and for a time the 〈…〉 did amount to three●core thousand Arrobes, every Arrobe being 25 pound 〈…〉 ●uncess a piece, but at this day it is no● half so much. The middle of this Island 〈…〉 degree of Northerly latitude, and three degrees and a half of lon●●ude. This 〈…〉 good store of Come and excellent wines, and in like sort 〈◊〉 good first-fruits, 〈…〉 of ho●e and war, but their suga● i● most esteemed, and transported into other countries: there is great store of cattle, and the mountains are full of wild boars: this Island wants no wild peacocks, stockedoves, quails, and other birds: there are excellent fountains of water, and eight rivers: the air is hot and temperate, and never very cold: the Cedats grow very high there, whereof they make tables, chests, and such like: the Archbishop (Primate of the Indies) remains in this Island in the 〈◊〉 of Funciall, which is the chief.     

THE ISLANDS OF THE ASORES OR TERCERES.  

The Contents.  
THe beginning of the word Asores, and why these Islands were so called. II Description of the Tercere, and other Islands of the Asores. The chief towns and boroughs. III Singularities of the fruit which they call Batates, and of a plant whose root serves in steed of feathers to fill their beds: Of Wo●d, Canary birds, of 〈◊〉 of hot waters, wherein they may seethe eggs. A fountain which turns wood into stone 〈◊〉 of an incredible beauty called Teixo, which no man may use by the king of Spain's Edict 〈◊〉. Diseases peculiar to the country. V Whereunto the Inhabitants of these Islands 〈◊〉 and their manner of keeping wheat, which corrupts in a year. VI Forts of the Islands of Ter●er● kept by Spaniards. VII. Angra the chief town of all the Islands whereas the gover●●●● 〈◊〉, who forbids strangers to go about the Island, or to view their approaches.   

THey do number seven Islands of the Asores, or Flamands, that is to say, the Tercere, saint Michael, saint Marie, saint George, Graciosa, Pico, and fayal. Flores and Corues are not comprehended under the name of Asores, notwithstanding that at this day the nine Islands are put under one government. They were called Asores, of the multitude of goshaukes that were found there in the beginning, for that Açor in Spain signifies a goshawk: but at this day there are not any of them to be found. They have also been called the Flemish Islands, for that the Flemings dwelled first in the Island of fayal, where there are yet some families whose 〈◊〉 resemble Flemings in their hair and complexion, and they call a Torrent 〈…〉 well Ribera does Framengos, that is to say, the river of Flemings.  
The chief of all these Islands is the Tercere, called commonly the Island of jesus Christ of Tercere: it contains about fifteen or sixteen miles, and hath not any Port 〈…〉 to defend the ships: yet the sea bending like a half Moon before the town of 〈◊〉 makes a kind of Port, and hereof comes the name of the town, for that the 〈…〉 ●all this form of the Moon Angra. Of the one side whereas it stretcheth out like 〈…〉 there are two mountains called Bresijl, which advance into the sea in such 〈…〉 off they seem separated from the Island. Moreover they are so high as they 〈…〉 fifteen miles when as the sky is clear. There are two Pillars of stone, from 〈…〉 is in guard, gives notice of the coming of ships; for he marks those 〈…〉 from the West and South, that is to say, from both the Indies, from Bresil, 〈…〉 and Cape Verd, by the pillar upon the West side, setting up certain flags, 〈…〉 above five in number, he lets them know it, by their principal flag, and a 〈…〉 sounds: from the pillar of the East side they discover the ships which 〈…〉 Portugal, and other places of the East or North, by means of the flags 〈◊〉 he sets up, the which are seen throughout all the town by reason of the height of these pillars. The chief ●●wne of this Island i● Angra, which is also the chief of the Island of Acores: ●hree mil●● from thence is the town of Pray, which is to say, the down upon the shore, it hath ●ood wall●, but it is not well peopled. The Tercere hath also the Boroughs of saint Sebastian, saint Barba, Altars, Gualue, Vil●●nova, and others. The Island of saint Michael is almost twenty miles long, and hath many boroughs and hamlets: the chief town of this Island is called Punta del Gada: there is not any port 〈…〉 dangerous, than about the Tercere: but the ships have 〈…〉 to hinder them at the coming of any storm, to put to 〈…〉 the danger, the which is not allowed at the Tercere; for which 〈…〉 strips 〈◊〉 commonly go to ●aint Michael. The Island of saint Mary hath 〈…〉 is inhabited by Spaniards. Gratiosa contains about five or six miles: they 〈…〉 which 〈◊〉 there. The Island of saint George is twelve mile's 〈…〉 broad. The Island of Fayal contains seventeen or 〈…〉 of greatest note next to the Tercere and saint Michael. The Island of 〈◊〉 contains seven miles: about 〈◊〉 from then●e lies the little Island of Coruo, the which is two or three miles in circuit. The Tercere is in the nine and thirtieth degree of height, and lies from Lisbon Westward two hundred and fifty Spanish leagues.  

¶ The Quality of the Islands.  
ALl the Island of Terce●e bears store of wheat and wine; but their wines cannot be transported far, by reason of their weakness, for which cause, rich men use Madera, and Ca●●rie wines: the Island hath fish, flesh, and other things necessary to suffice. They 〈◊〉 o●ely oil that comes from Portugal▪ and it also wants salt, pots, dishes, and 〈…〉 vessel, and such like; i● beare● abundance of peaches, of divers sorts, but there 〈…〉 cherries, 〈…〉. There is reasonable good store of apples, ●earess, oranges, 〈…〉 f●uit, and the ground doth hear cabbages, tur●ups, and all kinds of herbs in their season. The chief fruit of this Island grows underground like 〈…〉 of this plan● are in form like a vine, but their l●●ues 〈…〉 they 〈◊〉 ●●eses first-fruits Batates, which are of a pound weight, and 〈…〉 price● it i● 〈…〉 food the people have: they are much more esteemed in 〈…〉 doth hinder the estimation there. There is another kind of 〈…〉 unto wheat, which grows round in some, almost like unto a pease, they 〈…〉 this fruit hath a pleasing taste, but the skin is harder than that of a pease▪ they 〈…〉 esteem it in other countries, but in the Island they ca●t it to their hog●. They 〈…〉 found in the same Island a plant of the height of a man, which bears 〈…〉 do●h it yield them any profit, but that the root being tender and 〈…〉 by the inhabitants, wherewith they fill their matteresses and 〈◊〉, ●●stead of feathers and wool. The Island hath not many fowls in it that m●k● their prey. There are many of those, which they call Canary birds, so as many bu●i●●h●mselueses to take them to sell. There are many quails, with store of cocks and hens of Af●i●ke. In Summer they take much fish, but in winter the Sea will not suf●●● them: for in januarie, February, March, and April, yea and in September they are never in a manne● without storms. The country is hilly, and there are rocks 〈◊〉 my sides, the which stick up like pointed Diamonds, able to cut the soles of any 〈…〉 shall pass over them: but yet these rocks are full of vines, with whose 〈…〉 all covered in Som●●r▪ 〈◊〉 a● it is a wonder to see this plant take root there. 〈…〉 no vines in the Champion country: but the plain country abounds with 〈…〉 ●oad, especially near unto the town of Pray. But it is an ordinary thing, 〈…〉 wonderful, that wheat, and other first-fruits of this Island, should not continued good 〈…〉. This Island is very subject to earthquakes, and to the brea●●i●g ou● of fire: and 〈…〉 Island, and also in that of S. Michael, there are places from which there ascend fuming vapours continually, and the ground is all burnt there. There are fountains to be seen in which the● may boil an egg, as if it were on the fire. Three miles from the town of Angra there is a fountain, which in time doth turn the wood which is 〈◊〉 i●, into story. The Island of Tercere hath such store of Cedars, as they use 〈…〉 ships, and also for their ●●ing. There is another kind of wood, which they 〈…〉, which is of the colour of ●●oud, and very beautiful. There is also another 〈…〉 would, which is white and yellow, whose colours are very lively. In the 〈…〉, there grows a tree called Tri●o, which is of such greatness as the people ar●●orbidden by the king of Spain's Edict to touch i●; the 〈◊〉 is only allowed to the king of Spain's officers: it is exceeding hard, read within, wa●ed▪ and of an admirable beauty, the which doth increase with time.  
The air is generally good, and there are very few disease● pecu●iar to the ●ou●trie, amongst the which is that which the Portugals call 〈…〉 which makes a man weak and benui●med of all his body, or of some one of his members. The●● is also another disease which the Portugals call the blood, the which doth cause certain apostumes of blood to break forth about the eyes, or else in some other part of the body. These are the two chief inconveniences, which proceed from the storms, humidity of places, and the great winds, the whi●● are such, a● in time they blead down the stones of houses, and consume iron: for there hath been seen bars of iron as big as a man's arm, in the house where the king's treasure lies, the which in six years grew as little as a straw, and the very walls were eaten and consumed to nothing in the same time. Wherefore, they are all in a manner accustomed, to put in the forefront of their houses certain stones which they gather upon the shore from under the water: these last longer against the violence of the winds. The Island of Gratiosa hath store of divers first-fruits, whereof they sand much to Tercere. The Island of S. George hath many forests and mountains, and some 〈◊〉 woad; there are also many Cedars. The Island of Fayal yields all things necessary for the life of man, it abounds in fish and cattle, which it sends to the Tercere. The Island of Pico hath store of all sorts of fruit, and many Cedar trees, and Teixo which i● so much esteemed. There is store of cattle, wine sufficient, and excellent first-fruits, among which, there are Oranges whose taste is exceeding pleasant. The Island of Flores hath much ca●tell, and very good places to feed them.   

¶ The Manners.  
THe ●●●●●itanss of Tercere are either Portugals, which live after the manner of their cou●●●●e 〈◊〉 borne in the Island, which follow the manners of the Portugals and Spaniards which rule over them. They are not given to hunting, for that the country hath no● any beasts, but some few coneys. The first inhabitants of the Island of Fayal were Flemings, so as they retain something of the humour of the Flemish Nation, whom they do affect above all others. The inhabitants of the Tercere are laborious, and give● to ma●ure the ground; so as they make vines to grow upon the rocks, which seem nothing fit for that use. They are accustomed, for the preserving of their corn, (which corrupts within the year) to hide it under the ground for the space of four of five months. All the inhabitants, of the town of Pray especially, have a great round hole in a certain 〈…〉 which a man may enter, and upon the top of it there is a covering with the 〈…〉 Master: Every man puts his wheat into this hole after harvest, which is in julie, an●●●aves it so covered until Christmas: then the inhabitants take it forth sound and un●●●●●pted, yet some draw it forth but as they spend it, and leave the rest: having been thus kept in these holes or wells during the said time, the rest of the year they preserve 〈◊〉 coffers, having no need of stirring. They are accustomed to give a name to 〈…〉 ●hich is taught to know when his master calls him. There are many artisans 〈…〉 themselves to make many pretty toys of wood; but they work not so neatly 〈…〉 in Germany. The labourers of Tercere employ themselves 〈…〉 of woad. They of Sancte Maria are given much to make earthen vessel.   

¶ The Rich●●▪  
THe English, Scot●ish and French▪ ●ra●●●cke much for 〈◊〉 in the Island of Tercere, 〈◊〉 for, th● which 〈…〉▪ T●e inhabitants do also make some●●oney 〈…〉 ●r●at numbers, which other provinces 〈…〉 this country which 〈…〉 an● other i● Europe o●●he inhabitants 〈…〉 joiners 〈◊〉, and other wooden 〈…〉 West Indies bu● as they pass to cell it afterwards in Spawn.  
〈…〉 ●●ituation to receiu●all the rich ●●eetss that come from 〈…〉 of that th●y like, leaving there also some of 〈…〉 b● which 〈◊〉 they make this Island rich, like 〈…〉 o● that which is good. The Englishmen 〈…〉 to live in tho●e seas, and to spoil all ships that bent their 〈…〉 so as many did a●oid these Islands▪ fearing to meet with 〈…〉 great hindrance of the Islanders and ship●. The Island of Fayal is common●●●●equen●ed by English merchant's, who traffic there yearly for woad. The inhabitants of Flores and Co●o are poor by reason of pirates which annoyed them, and spoil them daily lying betwixt these two Islands.   

¶ The Forces of the Islands.  
THe Island of Tercere is strong of 〈◊〉 self, by reason of the rocks which do inviton 〈…〉 sides▪ like unto a wall▪ a●d at the ●nd of these rocks is a good Fort. The 〈◊〉 of Angra is compassed 〈…〉 a reasonable good wall. At the foot of the 〈◊〉 of Bresil, there is 〈…〉 doth answer diametrally unto another, for 〈◊〉 ●●fence of the h●rb●r, so 〈…〉 can come in or go 〈◊〉 without the permissi●nd these 〈◊〉. Th● king 〈◊〉 ●●aine doth commonly entertain fourteen companies in the Island of Tercere. In former times there were none but Portugals for the guard of these Islands: but since the last troubles of Portugal, they have put a garrison of Spaniards into the Tercere, with a governor of the same Nation. This garrison remains continually in the Castles or Forts, and do no displeasure unto the Portugals, for 〈…〉 the ●ou●d 〈…〉 ●orbid 〈◊〉 to go abroad, a●d therefore a man may go throughout the Island with great safety. There is a company of Spa●i●●d● in garrison at Punta del Gada. In the Island of Saint Marie, there is not any garrison; for that being environed with●rockeses, it may be easily kept by the Inhabitants. The Island of Gratiosa is also without soldiers, for that it is not able to bear the charge of a garrison. In the town of Dortain the Island of ●●yall, 〈◊〉 is a Fort, bu● not very good, and for that the Inhabitants did once complain of the great charge of the garrison, and of the trouble they had by it, promising to guards themselves, the king of Spain retired his soldiers. But the Earl of Cumberland an English Nobleman, coming thither with a fleet, after some little resistance, and a debate which fell among the Islanders, took the Island, ruined the Castle, and carried away the Artillery, with some Caravells; so as the king of Spain 〈◊〉 forced to sand soldiers again thither in garrison, after that he had punished the 〈◊〉 authors of all this mischief.   

¶ The Government.  
THe 〈…〉 of all the Islands is Angra, whereas the Governor makes his residence, 〈…〉 there is a seat of justice, which hath authority over all the rest. All strangers are forbidden to go about the Island, or to view the approaches: The Por●●●●ls' Edicts do expressly forbidden i●▪ and in former times there was a certain street appointed in the town of Angra, for merchant strangers where they should cell their merchandise, and out of which they might not go, but when they were ready to departed: but at this day they have more liberty, so as they may walk up and down the town, and into the fields, but they may not go about the Island.   

¶ The Religion.  
THe Inhabitants of these Islands are Romanists, and nothing given to the reformed religion, nor infected with Mahometism. There is a Cathedral Church in the town of Angra, whereas the Archbishop makes his abode.   

A general consideration of the Islands described, and places which the Spaniards hold in Africa, Asia, and at the Indies. Of the profit, riches, and forces of these Estates. Of the Islands of Philippines. Of Princes which are friends and Tributaries to the king of Spain, and neighbours to this country, and of his great enemies which pretend.  
FIrst the Islands of Açores are so important for the crown of Spain, in regard of their situation, as without them the navigation of Aethiopia, the Indies, Brasil, and the new world, could not be continued: for that the fleets which come from the said countries to ●eville or Lisbonne, must in a manner of force touch there, that is to say, those of the West to follow their course, and those of the East to recover those winds which 〈◊〉 ●●●ourable unto them. After this (besides Seuta and Tanger, which the king of Spain 〈◊〉 upon the Strait of Gibraltar, and Mazagan without the Strait) he hath 〈…〉 ●oas● Afrique, from Cape d'Aguerro unto Gardasou two ●ortss of Estates: for that 〈◊〉 are immediately under him, and others are in the power of his Allies. He 〈…〉 him the Islands of Madera, Porto Sancto, Cape Verd, the Canaries, Aeguin, Saint Thomas, and others near adjacent: these Islands maintain themselves with their 〈◊〉 ●●●uall● and provisions, whereof they sand some into Europe, especially sugars 〈…〉, whereof the Island of Madera doth chiefly abound, and also of wine: and the Island of saint Thomas doth also impart great store of sugars unto other country's▪ 〈◊〉 Estates have been much troubled by men of war, both English and Dutch, 〈…〉 ●ost part have not passed the Island of Cape Verd. The Portugals have two 〈…〉 Islands of Arquin, and of Saint George de la Mine, and two places like 〈…〉 they traffic with the neighbour nations of Guinee and Libya, 〈…〉 Mandinque and other near places. Among the princes his Allies, the 〈…〉 powerful is the king of Congo, who doth possess the most temperate, and 〈…〉 realm in Aethiopia. The Portugals have two colonies there, the one in the 〈…〉 Saviour, and the other in the Island of Loande. They draw great riches 〈…〉 thi● 〈◊〉▪ but the chiefest is that of five thousand slaves which they have 〈…〉 sen● 〈◊〉 to the Islands and the New World: they are bound to pay a certain 〈…〉 ●o●ey to the king of Spain, for every slave that goes forth. They may pass 〈…〉 realm, to that of Prester jan, for that they hold it not to be far off: and it 〈…〉 ●●ephantss, and of all sorts of victuals and other necessaries, as it were very 〈…〉 for this enterprise. Congo confines with Angola; with whose king, Paul 〈…〉 contend touching certain mines of silver.  
〈…〉 had as much esteemed things that were near them, as they did those 〈…〉, and had employed their forces, with the which, having passed the Cape of 〈…〉 they arrived at the Indies at Malacca and at the Moluccos; if I say they had 〈…〉 them to the enterprise of Africa they might with more ease, and less charge 〈…〉 treasures: for that there is no country in the world richer of gold and 〈…〉 realms of Mandique, Aethiopia, Congo, Angola, Butuë, of Toros, 〈…〉, Monomotapa, Caphati, and Monoemugi: but the covetousness of man esteems another man's more than his own, and things afar off seem better than those which are near. The Portugals have, betwixt the Cape of Good Hope, and ●●rdafou, the forts of Cefala and Mozambique; with the one they maintain themselves masters of the traffic of the countries thereabouts, which abound with gold and ivory; and with the other they make their navigation to the Indies easy, for that their armies in passing do some times winter these, and sometimes but refresh themselves. They have on this side the king of Melinda for their great friend, and them of Quiloa and their neighbour Islands for their tributaries. To conclude, the Portugals want nothing but 〈◊〉▪ for besides the other Islands, which remain almost abandoned, they leave that of Saint Laurence, which is one of the greatest in the world, or it may be the greatest (for that it is one thousand and two hundred miles long, and four hundred and eighty broad) in a manner unmanured, the which is fit to bear any thing, for the goodness of the ●oil●▪ and nature hath given it good rivers, good pores, and very commodious 〈◊〉. These estates of the crown of Portugal, have no cause to dread any thing but armi●● 〈…〉, which cannot come but from the Turk: but the continual going and com●i●g of the i●●leetss assure them; for in the year 1●89, they took near unto Monbazze four galleys and a galion of Turks which had come into those parts.  
As for the Estates of Asia, they are divided into them of Persia, Cambaia and the Indies. The Portugals have in Persia the realm of Ormuz, and in Cambaia the Islands of Diu, of Daman, and Bazain. At the Indies they hold Chaul, the Island of Goa, with others that lie about i●▪ the sorts of Co●hin and Colari, the Island of Ma●●r, and the Port of Colomban in the Island of Zeilan; but the principal is Goa▪ whereas the Viceroy remains, with the forces of the Indies. Ormuz and Diu ●re ●●ch esteemed for the command of the sea, and the traffic of the gulfs of Persia and Ga●baia Cochin and Colari are commended for the abundance of ●epper which they lad there: Manar for the fishing of pearls which they use in that sea. Daman and Bazain for the bounty of the neighbour countries▪ by reason where of john the third, king of Portugal assigned this country to old soldiers. G●a is of very great importance for the commodity of the ●●ituation, together with the fertility of the soil. The king of Spain hath here also some Princes his friends, and some others that are his tributaries. The first and the richest is he of Co●hi●▪ at the first he wa● vass●ll to the king of Calicut, and was of n● great power: but now by the friendship and traffic of the Portugals, he hath gotten so great rich●ss and is of such force as the neighbour kings do envy him. The king of Colan is also a friend to the king of Spain, who hath ●or●ss of importance in both these realms. There is also the realm of Mallacca, which extends two hundred and seventy miles, but it is not well peopled: notwithstanding the town which is so called unites all their traffic, yea in a manner all the voyages▪ which are made in that great sea, from the mouths of the read sea unto the Cape of Liampo; and hither comes all the riches of the firm land, and of many Islands, all which together do not yield in greatness to Europe. Mallacca hath two mighty enemies, the kings of Yo● and Achen, whereof the first is mighty by land, and the second by sea: it hath been twice besieged, and brought to great extremity: but with the succours that came unto it from the Indies it was always relieved, with great loss unto the enemies. Last of all Paul de Lima defeated the king of Your, and took from him a sort which he had made near unto Mallacca, where among other things he found nine hundred pieces of brass ordnance: yet this Estate is in great danger for that the king of A●hen is so powerful, whose only desire is to ruin it.  
As for the Philippines they belong unto new Spain, not that they are comprehended within the confines of the New world; but for that they were discovered in the year 156● by Michael Lopes of Legaspe, who was sent to discover them by Don Lewis of Velasco Viceroy of New Spain. Some think that in this sea (which extends itself between New Spain and Sumatra) there are one thousand and one hundred Islands as well great as small▪ and although the Spaniards comprehend them all under the name of Philippines, yet this name agrees more properly to them that lie most Northerly: Of these they have already conquered about forty with a million of Inhabitants. These Islands abound generally with gold, victuals, and cinnamon, whereof they carry a great quantity into new Spain, and so into Spain itself. The king of Spain hath caused bulls, kine, horses and mares, to be carried thither for to multiply. The number of Spaniards which have conquered, and which defend these countries amount at this day to one thousand six hundred, and of these there are not above nine hundred soldiers. These estates are of greater importance than is thought; for that besides the abundance of victuals and gold which they found there, the situation is very fit to subdue the neighbour Islands, and to bring in a traffic betwixt them of this sea and of new Spain, and to make easy the commerce betwixt China and Mexico, all which are of great importance. But that which imports more is, that they have begun on this side to curb the Mahometans, who sought by little and little to make themselves masters of the Islands and of the coast of Asia. This enterprise is more easy for the Spaniards by new Spain, and by Perou, than for the Arabians by their countries; for that (besides that the first are the stronger) there have been ships which in two months have come from Peru to the Philippines, (the distance from Acapulco and Salisco is less) whereas a ship cannot come from Arabia in half a year: not only for that the first is nearer than the later; but also, for that the general winds do much more favour the navigation of the Spaniards than of the Moors; for that the one go by a direct line, and the other by an obliqne. Moreover, the first go the voyage at one time, and the others make many voyages; for that at the Cape of Comorin they found the summer changed into winter, & the like doth in a manner happen unto them at Malacca, where they are forced to stay. Moreover, the Spaniards fail always with a forewind, and in a calm sea, but the Arabians enter into a sea where for the great number of Islands they found a thousand dangerous currents, and divers winds which surprise them, and moreover, many pirates which encounter them. We must add hereunto, that the Portugals and Spaniards being united at this day, will ma●e a great resistance in those countries; and therefore the Chinois stand upon their guard, and fear the neighbourhood and forces of Christians.  
The force of the Spaniard in these estates consists in two things, the one is, the strong situation of places, the other, the number and bounty of armies: For as for situations, the Portugals knowing that they could not for their small number embrace any enterprises of importance within a country, nor resist the power of the Persians, Guzarates, of the princes of Decan, Narsingue and others, were careful to possess themselves of such places as they thought fittest, to make themselves masters of the sea and traffic, for that few men might make defence there against great armies. And for that they are masters of the ports and seas, they have means to draw together so great forces by sea, as there is not any one able to oppose himself: and their ships are such, and so well furnished, as one of theirs will not dread three or four enemies; and all that they may fear is the fury of the Hollanders, if they break again with them. And to make it in some sort appear what they may do at the Indies, Francis of Almeyda with one and twenty ships or few more did put to rout the Mamelus, neighbours to Diu▪ Alphonso of Albuquerque assailed Calicut with an army of thirty great ships, he took Goa with one and twenty, recovered it with four and twenty, and took Malacca with three and twenty ships; he entered into the read sea with twenty, and recovered Ormuz with two and twenty. Nugno of Acugna went to the enterprise of Diu with three hundred sail, where there were three thousand Portugals, and five thousand Indians, besides servants that were armed, of which they were accustomed to have great numbers. D. Constantine of Bragance had at the enterprise of Onor one hundred and sixty sail, and as many at that of jonesapatan.  
Besides the Princes which are friends and tributaries to the king of Spain, he hath very mighty enemies near unto these estates. The Sophi of Persia pretends upon Ormuz, which was sometimes one of his vassals; the king of Cambaia upon Diu, which did belong unto him, and to other lands which (as we have said) were his: the Nizzamal●● and the Idalcan (the Portugals do thus term two mighty Princes of the realm of D●●an) and the kings of Calicut and Narsingue. But the king of Persia and he of Narsingue have never attempted any thing against the Portugals, for that they have had always to do with greater enemies. The others had made great attempts to recover Diu, Chaul, Goa, and other places, but they could not prevail in any other enterprise of importance; for that the situations of places are wonderful commodious to receive succours by sea: and although that these enemies have made their enterprises in winter to hinder their succours, yet their policy hath prevailed nothing, for that the Portugals were so courageous, and their ships so good as they feared no danger: so as the besieged and their countrymen striving, the one to vanquish with patience, and the other to endure all the dangers of wind and sea to secure them, they have made their enemy's attempts frustrate. But the Spaniards have none so great an enemy as the Turk, who hath often attempted by the read sea, with the commodity which the town of Aden gives him, to chase them out of the Indies, being invited thereunto, sometimes by the king of Cambaia, and sometimes by his own ambition. The greatest army which he hath made was of sixty four vessels, which he sent to Diu, but it was shamefully put to flight, and another of seven and twenty great ships which he sent to the enterprise of Ormuz: They have no other thing in the Island of Zeiland, but a fort called Colombo, for that the king, who was their tributary, was dispossessed of his realm by a Moor called Singa Pandarus, and now he maintains himself with the aid which the Portugals give him.     

THE NEW WORLD.  

The Contents.  
1TWo notable difficulties which have hindered the Ancients to discover the New world, and which of the two were greatest: and the reasons which made the Ancients believe that there were but three pares of the world, Asia, Africa, and Europe. II The sea compass invented by a Neapolitan for the use of Navigation, in the year 1300. III Qualities and description of the burning Zone. four A comparison of the New World (taking as it was discovered) with ours; and the difference of our Hemisphere to that of the New World: and the advantages it hath over ours. V Whence the Inhabitants of this New World came, and their foolish opinion touching their beginning. VI Division of these New Lands into two parts, America, and Magellanica, and their description. VII. Description of the places and countries which the king of Spain holds at the New world, and first of the Forts of Saint Helen, and three others in Florida. VIII. Of the Gulf of Mexico. IX. Nova Hispania. X. New Gallicia. XI. Th● Provinces of Mecovacan and Mexico. XII. Gasteena. XIII. jucatan. XIIII. Guatimala. XU. The firm Landlord XVI. Nicaragua. XVII. Golden Castille. XVIII. The New kingdom of Grenado. XIX. Bresil. XX. Chile. XXI. Peru, with the chief towns and provinces. XXII. The town of Saint Croix du Mont. XXIII. Tucuma, a realm whereas the Spaniard hath five Colonies. XXIIII. Paraguays. XXV. Hispaniola. XXVI. Cuba or Ferdinand. XXVII. jamaica. XXVIII. The Islands of Cannibals or Caribes. XXIX. Discourse in general of the New World: of the forces and government as well civil as ecclesiastical. XXX. Of the knowledge which these people had of God. XXXI. Of their idolatry to the dead. XXXII. Of their idolatry towards images. XXXIII. Of their Guagcoes or Temples. XXXIIII. Of their Priests and religious persons. XXXV. Of sacrafices both of men and beasts. XXXVI. Of sacraments resembling in some sort ours, brought in among the people by the devils policy. XXXVII. Dispositions at the New World to receive the gospel of jesus Christ. XXXVIII. Of certain predictions of future preaching of the Christian faith in these Newfound Lands. THIRTY-NINE. Prodigies which went before. XL▪ What made the conversion of the Indians easy, and what did hinder it. XLI. Of the diversity of the Barbarians: and of the manner of preaching the Gospel. XLII. Of the difficulties they had in the conversion of the Americans. XLIII. Of the remedies of the said errors.   

THe other part of the king of Spain's Estates consists in the New world, where he hath all that he list, for that there is not any one that will contradict him. These Estates are divided into Islands and fume land. The Islands of the North Sea, are so many, as they cannot be yet numbered (for that the Lucayes only exceed the number of four hundred) and some of them are so great and rich, as one of them would make a good realm. Borichin is three hund●ed miles long, and sixty broad: jamaica is almost as great: Cuba hath three hundred leagues in length, and twenty in breadth: and Hispaniola hath one thousand and six hundred miles in circuit. As for the firm land, the king of Spain is actually Master of all that goes coasting along Florida, Nova Hispania, jucatan, and also that great Southern Peninsula unto the Cape of California, yea unto Quivire, for that the Spaniards have discovered so far, and farther. The coast of Nova Hispania (which beginning at S. Helena, and passing by Panama, goes unto Quivire) hath in length about five thousand miles, whereunto adding the confines which are within the country towards the North, they shall found in all nine thousand miles. After this Peru beginning from Panama, hath upon the coast twelve thousand and six hundred miles, whereof there are three thousand miles of river, betwixt Maragon, and the river of Plata or Silver, the which belongs (under the name of Brasil) to the crown of Portugal. But before I proceed any further, I must say something touching the discovery of this New World.  
Two reasons moved Aristotle and some others, to persuade themselves that there were no other people in the world but the Inhabitants of Europe, Asia, and Africa: the first was the vastness of the Atlantic Sea, which made them think that men could not pass such great waters, by any force or industries, and this moved Saint Augustine to deny the Antipodes: the other reason which deceived the ancients was that they believed that the burning Zone was inhabitable by reason of the excessive heat, as the Poles were for their insupportable cold. But the first of these two reasons had much more force than the second, for that they held this great passage at Sea to be impossible: but on the other side, we must understand that the ancients had some knowledge of the burning Zone, for that Hanno of Carthage, according unto Pliny, did coast alongst Africa, from Gibraltar unto the Read Sea, and one Eudoxus on the other side, from the Read Sea to Gibraltar: so as they were forced to pass twice under the Equinoctial, and to cross all the burning Zone. Moreover the ancients had knowledge of Aethiopia, the Indies, and the golden Chersonese, all which Provinces lie within the bounds of the burning Zone. Pliny makes mention of Taprobana which is under the Equinoctial: and the experience of our Zone might teach the Ancients that the burning was habitable: for although that the sun doth generally heat and dry with the nearness of his beams, and the more when they are perpendicular; in like manner as by his distance, and the obliquenes of his beams, he gives way to cold & moisture, as the day and night, with Winter and Summer doth show; yet this general rule doth many times fail by reason of the diversity of situations: for the virtue of general causes in the production of effects is limited, and in a manner restrained by the quality of the substance; and this is the reason why the predictions of Astrologers do many times prove vain: so we see that winds grow strong and vehement in valleys, and decrease upon plains: the heat of the sun doth increase upon concave looking glasses, and disperseth itself upon those that are plain. And to come to our purpose, the heat and coolness of the Air and countries receives a thousand diversities from places that are high or low, upon a plain, or elevated, turned towards the North or South, the East or West, near or far from the sea, lakes, woods, and rivers, or such places as are subject to winds or not. We see that England is farther from the Equinoctial than France, and yet by the report of all men, it is more temperate: and by the same proportion, Zealand is less cold than Mont Atlas. There is no greater effect of the nearness of the sun than in Summer, nor of his far distance than in Winter. But what shall we say, if in the same distance of the Equinoctial and course of the sun, we found that the seasons change at the same time? Gata is a mountain which coming out of great Caucasus runs along the Indies unto the Cape of Comorin; at the same instant on this side the mountain, Winter gins at the entering of April, and Summer on the other side of the mountain at the same time: on this side there is abundance of rain with cold and stormy winds, and on the other side, they have clear and pleasing weather: on this side the sea grows so high and troublesome, as sea men are scarce secure in their harbour, and on the other side they pass through the gulf of Bengola in assurance, and traffic in all parts: Finally, the mount of Gata works greater effects than the Equator, seeing that in so small a distance it doth change the seasons of the year. If then we found the difference of Winter & Summer in the same height, it shows that the degrees of heat and cold, of drought and moisture, do not wholly depend of the nearness, or remoteness of the Sun. Wherefore, it may be cool and fresh when the Sun is near, & moist when his beams are most strait: by which means the burning Zone cannot be without pastures, as Aristotle and some others did believe. But the other difficulty seemed to the Ancients without help, for that in their navigations they had no other guides but the Sun and Moon, the two bears, and other sta●ss. When the heavens were covered with clouds, which took from them the light of the Sun and Stars, than they governed themselves by the quality of the winds, and by the conjectures of the way which they had go; wherein they were very skilful by reason of their short navigations, and their continual voyages. The Tapo●bases, for that they saw not the North Star, carried many birds with them, and according to occasion first let fly one and then another, and for that birds do willingly seek land, they did hover before at the prows of their ships. But if the sky were darkened, and the seas troubled with divers winds, the Ancients could not comprehend where they were, for that the heaven and the sea being in this case in the like estate, there was no reason which should persuade them to go sooner on the one side than on the other. But God meaning to make easy the preaching of the Gospel, to them that had lived so long in idolatry, discovered about the year 1300 to one Fla●io of Amalphi, in the Realm of Naples, the secrets which are in the Adamant or Loadstone, and the property it hath to 'cause iron which is touched therewith to bend towards the North, and to point at it; yet there is some difference, for that in some places the needle which the mariners use, being touched with the Adamant looks directly towards the North, and in other places it bends a little towards the East, and sometimes towards the West; so as they must carefully observe the variation, if they will not fail in their voyages. The North Star is distant from our Pole about 3 degrees and a half. By means of the Adamant from which iron receives the virtue to show the pole, seamen may with assurance cross great seas, and seek new Islands and remote countries: for that when as they know where the Nor●h stands, they are also assured that turning their faces to that part, they have the East on the right hand, the West on the left, and the South behind them. And herein we may see how much God is pleased to do wonderful works by small & base means, for that a needle of iron touched with an Adamant stone, hath nothing precious in it, & yet the greatest enterprise, and the most admirable art that man doth practise (which is navigation) depends thereon.  
Now that we have showed the difficulties in the discovery of the New world, & have seen which of the two was greatest, I must now speak something of the quality of the burning Zone. We must first of all presuppose, that the Equinoctial is an imaginary circle in the firmament, which doth environ all from the East to the West, and is equally distant from the two Poles: It is called Equinoctial, for that when as the Sun passeth through that line (the which it doth twice a year, that is, in March and September) the day and night are equal, either being of twelve hours: the which is called Equinox. After which they call Tropikes two imaginary circles in the firmament, by the which the course of the Sun is limited; and they are called Tropikes, for that when as the Sun is come unto one of them, he returns back again. That which is beyond the Equinoctial towards the South, is called the Tropic of Capricorn, and that which is of our side, the Tropic of Cancer. The other is three and twenty degrees and a half Southerly from the Equator: and this is three and twenty degrees and a half Northward. They call the space which is betwixt the two Tropikes, the burning Zone: and this interval, or space, contains seven and forty degrees, the which doth answer to a thousand four hundred and ten French leagues at land, after thirty leagues for a degree. This foundation being laid, we must confess that the burning Zone abounds with water of all sorts, for it rains and snows when the Sun is nearest: and then it rains most abundantly, and the rain gins at noon day. Moreover, there is not any place upon the earth where there are greater rivers, for that in the Southern Peninsula of the New world, leaving many other great rivers of Brasil and Peru, they found that of Magdalene, which is seven leagues br●ad at the mouth: Moreover, there is that of Orillane, which is seventy leagues broad; that of Plata, forty; and Maragnon, which is one of the greatest rivers in the world, with infinite others. Moreover, there are the lakes of Tiquicaca (this is eighty leagues in circuit) Paria, and Bombom, and there are few mountains without lakes, from whence most of the rivers of these countries do flow. In the Peninsula upon the North part, there is the lake of Guatimala which is 150 miles long, and that of Nicaragua of three hundred, that of Mexico contains one hundred, that which is called the Caphalique sea, hath one hundred and fifty in circuit: And after all this, the Realm of Mechoacan is full of lakes, rivers, and fountains. And to leave the New world, where are there greater rivers and lakes, than in Aethiopia under the burning Zone? There are two, the one whereas the river of Nile hath her spring, the other by which it passeth, either of which hath 200 miles in diameter. There is another equal to these, betwixt the realm of Angola▪ and M●●omotapa: There is also the lake of Aquelonde, and that of Coluc, which are very great, and moreover, there are great rivers in Aethiopia, as that of Coante and Niger, which hath for her branches, the rivers of Senaga and Gambea. There is the river of Zai●e, which is 20 miles broad at the mouth; and most of the said rivers, not content with their own bounds, do every year overflow the fields. The Island of S. Tho. and of Suma●ra which are under the Equinoctial, are altogether mois●: that of S. Thomas hath a high mountain in the midst of it, the which is continually covered with a thick cloud, the which yields so much water, as the fields are abundantly watered: that of Sumatra is generally full of marshes and rivers, whereof the greatest part grow from a ve●ie great lake, which is upon the top of a high mountain in the midst of the Island, and nature not content with the water of the air, and of the land to moisten the burning Zone, doth produce as well in Quito, at at the Molucques (countries which are under the Equinoctial) certain great Canes wherein water is preserved. We must not forget that under the burning Zone, there is much more sea than land, as in our Zone there is more land than sea. Moreover, it is most certain that in the burning Zone the rain & waters increase, when as the Sun draws near the line, and contrariwise, when it retires towards the Tr●pikeses they fail. This doth show what effects the equality of the day & night doth work for the increase of water, for as in our Zone they have greatest showers at the equinoxes, so have they under the burning Zone, Besides, the burning Zone is not only moist, but also temperate, touching hea●, and in some parts of it, it is much more cold than hot, as at Pasto, Collao, and Potosi, and the mountains are always covered with snow and ice. The general cause of this temperature is the length of the nights near unto the line, whereas they are continually equal with the day: but the farther of you go, the days grow longer and the night's shorter, and for this cause the days in summer are longer in England than in Italy. The shortness of the day is the cause why the Sun cannot produce so many degrees of heat under the Equinoctial, as far from it: and in effect, summer is more violent in Estremadura in Spain, and in Povillia in Italy, than at Quito or Collao, for that the continuation of the working of the efficient cause, doth import much to the perfection of this effect. But what shall we say of the differences which we see in the same burning Zone, whereas one part is hot and another cool? This question is not particular to the New world, but generally to all provincs, and we have already given the solution , saying, That the heat of the Sun receives a thousand differences by the diversity of situations. But to speak something, we must consider that the New world is full of high mountains which refresh the air, and with their height (for that high places do participate more of cold than the lower) and the snow which doth never abandon them, & lakes which are exceeding cold, and the rivers which flow from them, whose water growing of snow and ice, is wonderfully cold and raw, and with the violence and swiftness with the which they run from the mountains and cross the plains, do wonderfully refresh the ay●e and earth. Moreover, the said mountains being very high, they must of necessity make a great shadow, sometimes of one side, sometime of another; and this shadow being added to the length of the nights, imports much to temper the burning Zone . Besides this, we must consider that these fresh winds do blow continually there: for first of all at sea, the summer wind reigns continually, and at Peru and Brasil they h●ue a Southern wind, which riseth at noon day, and on the other side an Easterly.  
Let us now compare one world with another, considering the new in the East, wherein it was when it was first discovered. We have some advantages in regard of the Heavens, some others for that of the Earth: in regard of Heaven, the one is, that our Hemisphere hath more stars and lights than that which is opposite: for ours hath the North star within three degrees and a half of the Pole Arctic, with a great number of other stars which do accompany it; whereas the Antarctic Pole hath not any star within thirty degrees. The other advantage of as great importance, is that the sun shines seven days in the year towards the Tropic of Cancer, more than towards that of Capricorn, as the Equinoctial and Sol●i●eses do witness: from these, two things proceeds, the coldness which is found greater in the other part than in ours, for that the other doth less enjoy the light of the sun, and ha●h sewer stars. As for the land, we have also two advantages; the one is, that ours extends more from the West unto the East, and is consequently more fit for the life of man, than the other, which restraining itself from the West to the East, enlargeth itself wonderfully from the one Pole unto the other: for the land goes from the West unto the East with more equality, and is always equally distant, from the coldness of the North, and the heat of the South, and the days and the nights go always alike: but going towards the Pole, they must of necessity found▪ nights which continued a whole month together▪ and in the end half a year. The second advantage is, that our land is more favourable by the sea, which makes it fit for traffic: for besides the Ocean, which is common to us and the New World, we have the Mediterranean sea, which doth water Europe, Asia, and Africa, and is commodious for these three parts in divers sorts. What shall we say of the Caspian and Bal●ike sea, whereof the one is very beneficial to Asia, and the other to Europe. Let us add hereunto that our land is more equal and plain, and by consequence more fit for traffic both by land and water. As for those things which the earth brings forth, the New World did yield unto this, first, in the perfection of creatures, for that they had neither dogs, sheep, goats, hogs, cats nor asses, and that which doth more import, they wanted oxen, horses, camels, moiles and elephants. As for trees, there were neither Cedars, orange trees, Lemons, pomegranates, Figs nor Quinces, but above all they wanted Olive trees and Vines. It is true that we had not greater advantage in regard of beasts, than of first-fruits; for that touching the last, we did surmount them in bounty and diversity; and in the first, in bounty only. As for grain, they had neither wheat nor rye, nor any of our kinds of corn, nor yet rice, neither melons for the beautifying of their gardens. As for arts and matters of industry, there was no comparison, for that the inhabitants of the New World used no iron, which is necessary and profitable for the life of man; and they had as little use of fire, the universal instrument o● industry. They had no knowledge of artillery, printing, letters and learning: their navigation extended no further than their sight; and herein I speak of ●hose people that were most industrious and civil, as they of Mexico and Peru. Our world doth also exceed the new in the multitude of people. There are many great mountains, moors, and high woods and forests which make great countries inhabitable; and that part which is inhabited, is not so well peopled as ours, for that these were sooner peopled, yea were altogether peopled whenas they began. Moreover, here were found arts to maintain life, as tillage; and to preserve it, as architecture and building, and to make it more commodious; so as the multiplying of mankind was assisted here both by nature and industry; and there, as a man may say, by nature alone. Also unto this day a great part of Brasil lives after a sa●age manner, and in new Spain there is a great tract of country held by the Chichimeques (a people without law, without head, and without abode) who live of hunting and of the first-fruits of the earth. They of Florida and of the Paraguais live in a manner after the same sort, and when the Spaniards came into Peru, notwithstanding that they found many places peopled, yet there was not any that had the form of a town, but Cusco: but at this day the New World is less peopled than ever, partly by reason of the Spaniards civil wars; for that they hold that in the wars (which were betwixt the factions of Pizarro and Alm●gra, and betwixt the Partisans of Pizarro and the king's men) there died a million and a half of the natural inhabitants; and partly by the cruelties and disorders of the Spaniards in the beginning, not only murdering them most cruelly, but also toiling the people infinitely, transporting them from one place unto another, far from their country air, which was the death of many, and that which did also hurt them, was the use of meats which had been transported from Europe: they did not eat so much flesh, nor so gross and nourishing, neither had they any wine, whereas now at Peru they have abundance: and for that the princes did sometime employ them to build ●ambess, sometimes to make ways and such like things, they had no leisure to gormandise and to become drunk as they have at this day, for they so abuse their liberty, as they abandon themselves to Idleness, whoredom, & drunkenness which consumes them miserably. divers general diseases have also consumed many, as the pox, and the Cocoliste in new Spain; many infants and young people died of the pox at Peru in the year 1567., and more females than males, the which they that had passed the age of thirty years escaped. They did also particularly observe that such as were borne in Europe were not touched with thi● dis●ase; ●o as for the foresaid reasons, that part of new Spain which lies upon the sea is at this day in a manner desert. In the Islands of the gulf of Mexico there are scarce any Indians remaining, no more than in the country of Paria and the plain of Peru. But to show the advantages which the new World hath over ours, i● seem that joseph Acost● would infer, that America exceeds our country in temperature, for that neither cold no● heat are offensive in many places: but this is common to those parts of our World which are under, or near the Equinoctial, as Aethiopia, the Indies, and the golden Chersonese. Next he will have the New World exceed ours in abundance of waters and pastures; and truly as touching waters, it is most certain that there is more sea, and that the rivers of Plata and Maragnon are two of the greatest in the world: he gives it also an advantage over usin greatness of woods and diversity of trees and roots, whereof those people live in many places (as in the Islands of Barlovent and Brasil) the which hath great show of truth, for the conjunction of moisture and heat which rains there continually. Last of all, he puts it out of all dispute that there are more mines of gold and silver than in our parts, the which is hard to decide, at the lest quantity for quantity: For I know nor whether the mines of gold of Peru exceeds those of Aethiopia, Monomotapa, Nandingue, Sumatra and Lequi●; or whither the mines of Potosibe richer than those of Cambebes in Angola. He adds also, that New Spain is one of the best countries in the world, the which may well be granted without prejudice. But taking the New world as it is now, in my opinion it exceeds ours, not in multitude (for that it is not so well manured) but in diversity of beasts and first-fruits, for they have in a manner added all ours to those which were private unto the Country: and it hath this advantage, that our seeds grow better in America, than those of America do with us.  
The question is now, to know from whence the inhabitants of this New world came. We must ●●rst understand that these people have a foolish opinion of their beginning: The Guanches dwelling in the valleys of Xauxe, hold for their first parents, a man and a woman come out of Guaribilque, a famous fountain amongst them. The people of Andabayle (a valley subject to Cusco) say, that they are issued out of the lake Sogdocoque. They of Cusco draw their beginning from the great lake of Tiquicaca. Others say, that after the deluge makind was restored by six persons which were saved in a certain cave. But leaving all these follies, we must confess that all men are come from Adam and Eve, & then from those which were saved in the Ark, & that by consequence the inhabitants of the New world are descended from us. It is a hard matter to found out where they passed: wherein nothing can satisfy us better, than the neighbourhood of places: but this will not avail us, for the little knowledge we have of the extremity of the earth. Vopelius saith, Th●● towards the North, Groenland joins with Estotiland, and is a firm land; in which ca●e it is likely that they of Lapland and Norway, continuing their multiplication and dwellings, have by little & little go thither: which may well be conjectured by the inhabitants of Lapland, Norway, Estotiland and Baccalaos, and their manner of li●ing: for that all devil in caves, or in hollow trees: all wear s●ale skins, or those of wild beasts, all live of fish, or of the first-fruits of the earth, and they do not much differ in colour. Towards the South, if it be true (as many hold) that the land opposed to the straight of Magellan is firm land, we must confess that some part of the inhabitants of America came that way, for that this straight in some places is not above a league over; by reason whereof the passage was easy. We have no knowledge of the extremity of the East and West; only we see that the colour of the people of the New world doth more resemble the people of the East, than of the West, for that they have a colour like brass, and there are degrees of this colour, as of white amongst us: for it is more obscure in some places, as at Peru and Brasil; and in others more clear, as in Paria and the new Realm. There are some people found black, as in Careque, a country lying betwixt Sancta Martha, and Carthagena: by reason whereof we may say that these men came by some tempest, either from Guinee or Aethiopia. It seems there have not any past from the civiler parts of Europe, before Christopher Colombus, for that they found not in all these countries any marks of learning, or of any thing of Europe: besides, it is not above two hundred years that the greatest part of the Islands which are betwixt our firm land and the New world were inhabited, as the Açores, Madera, the Islands of Cape Verd, Saint Thomas, and others of that sea. Let us then conclude that the New world was first inhabited by people who continuing the habitation of Europe and Asia (as for Africa, it seems it could not have any part in this) and searching continually for more commodious and safe dwelling, are by little and little arrived there, and that it hath also been peopled by some others which have been driven thither by tempests.  

¶ Division of the New world.  
AFter that Colombus had discovered these New lands to them of Europe, they have always continued to go on in divers expeditions: but notwithstanding that many f●ll of courage and singular valour, as well of Italy, Spain, and England, as of Po●tugal and Fran●e, have employed themselves in this search, yet could they never attain unto a perfect knowledge, especially of the farthest bounds towards the North, West, and South. For my part I will follow them of most authority which have written thereof, leaving discourses full of impertinency. This continent of land the which is called the New world (I speak of the firm land) is divided into two parts, that is, into America and Magilanica: America is again divided into two very great Peninsulas, joined by an Isthmus, or ●ongue of land which is seven leagues long, betwixt Number de Dios and Panama: for as for the eleven leagues which they do commonly make more betwixt these two places, is by reason of their turnings, in seeking to found out a more easy and convenient passage. We will name one of these Peninsulas the Northern, and the other the Southern.  
As for the Northern, they give it sixteen thousand miles of circumference, and four thousand miles in length from the East unto the West: the bounds towards the Nort● are not yet known. I●mes Cartier discovered it in the year 1535, unto the fiftieth degree: Gasper Cortere●lis a Portugal unto sixty six, and Sebastian Gabo● an Italian to sixty seven, as some writ, but he could pass no farther by reason of the cold. Of late years Sir Martin Frobi●ber made three voyages for the discovery of this North West passage to the Molucques, but he could not pass on by reason of the abundance of ice, since his time this voyage hath been continued by others, and it is yet, with hope of good success. This Peninsula is bounded on the other sides partly by the Northern sea, and partly by that of the South. That part which turns towards the East contains three great countries, that is to say, Estotiland, Labrador and Norombegue, which are in a manner opposite to Norway, ●ngland, France, and Spain. Estotiland is the most Northerly Region that is known, and it was discovered long before Colombus by certain Fishermen of Friesland, afterwards found out again in the year 1390 by Anthony Ze●o a Venetian, by the commandment of Zichim king of Friesland: this country of E●●otiland ends at the river of Negeuse, which hath sixty degrees of elevation of the P●l●, and there gins the land of Labrador, which extends itself to the river of Saint laurence, which some te●●e the Straight of the three brethren, and others the river of Ca●ada. Leaving the Straight of the th●ee brethren, they enter into a gulf which is ●●●led Ca●re, almost eight hundred miles long, and in a manner stopped up with divers Islands (Ver●zan and others ●umber them to be thirty and seven) which lie towards the East. This country is called the ●and of Baccalaos, of a fish which doth so multiply there as it is incredible. The neighbourhood of the aforesaid Islands make the sea seem to be divided into many arms and gulfs: and for this cause there are many good and safe ports. As for the Southrens Peninsula, which stretcheth to the Magellan Strait, they hold that it hath sixteen thousand miles in circuit, and four thousand in length: the breadth is divers, for that betwixt Number de Dios and Panama, it is but seven leagues; betwixt this gulf of Vraba, and that of Saint Michael seventy and five; betwixt the Cape of Saint Augustin and Cape Blank, one thousand; and at the Straight of Magellan one hundred thir●ie and four. It is crossed in a manner with very high mountains (and by consequence with an infinite ●umbe● of valleys) from the which spring many rivers; but those wh●ch fall into the North sea are greater than the others: the which is, by reason of the mountaine● which cross Peru in such so●●, as they are always within the sight of the South sea▪ so as the rivers which come from them are presently lost in the sea. You must not think that my meaning is at this present to describe all the New world, my desseign ●●ing only to show the Monarchy of Spain; so as I will make no stay, but at such places whereas the Spaniard holds something, having an intent to speak of other Provinces in their places.   

¶ The Fort of Saint Helen, and the three of Florida.  
TO begin then upon the North side, the Spaniards have a Fort at Saint Helen's Cape, which is upon the farthest bounds of Norumbega or Arambec. The French have planted Colonies in this Province, wherefore I hold it needless to describe it. As for Florida, it hath for bounds towards the East, Bahaman and the Islands of Lucayes, towards the West Mexico, and towards the South Cuba and jucatan, and upon the North Canada, Virginia, and Nova Francia. It is four hundred miles long, and advanceth into the sea with a point, and it hath in breadth eighty miles. The coast is rough, and the sea full of rocks, especially against the said point where the rocks lie, the which is called the Martyrs. It i● under the same Paralelle that Mauritania, and hath in the middle part five and thirty degrees of elevation. The Spaniards for many unfortunate accidents which have befallen them, have in a manner abandoned the enterprise of this conquest, notwithstanding that they do partly know the riches thereof. Upon the banks of Saint Helen, at the point of Florida, is Rico Secco, or the dry river, the Cape of Croix, that of Saint Augustine, and Cannaveral. But in Florida the king of Spain hath three places in which he entertains garrisons, Saint james, Saint Augustine, and Sa●nt Philip: and of this side unto the Cape of the New found land, or France Antarctike, their vessels are small and go with oars, for that the sea is shallow in those parts. Many have been of opinion that there is some strait in these countries by the which the North sea joins with the South, of which Mele●des was one, who attempted it first, for that there were certain pieces of China ships found in the North sea; and secondly, for that upon a flat w●ich doth run three hundred leagues into the land, there came Whales at a certain time of ●he year from the other sea. And some others have held, that master Candish who to●ke a ship coming from the Philippines at the Cape of Calinfornia in the year 1587. p●st ●hat way. Stephe● Gomes seeking this passage went many miles upon the river of Saint A●thonie which is in Florida, and some others have go by that of Saint Laurence, but without success.   

¶ Quality of the Country.  
THis Province abounds in many things, it hath divers first-fruits and many kinds of beasts. There is great quantity of gold and silver, which the Inhabitants gather together, cutting the rivers with little ditches. The land would carry any kind of grain if it were sown, and it is also capable of all sorts of first-fruits. There hath been pearls, turquoises, and Emeralds found there. The kine of this countr●e have hair like unto horses, and a bunch upon their backs like to a camel.   

¶ The Manners.  
THe Inhabitants are of a colour like brass, the reason is, for that they anoint themselves with a certain ointment, & the heat of the sun, notwithstanding that they are born more white. They are active and light, which is by reason of their continual exercise in going a hunting, and their food, which is for the most part of wild beasts. They have three kinds of stags, from one of which they draw milk as we do from our kine. They do arm the points of their arrows with fish bones, or flint stones. They use cockle shells for coin, but they are handsomely trimmed af●er their manner: it is not lawful for any to use them but great lords, no more than among us to coin money. Their noblemen wear garments of sables, but the rest go hal●e naked. They are cunning and crafty, and do naturally love war and revenge; for they always are in war one country against another, kill all the men they can take, but the women and children they preserve. They have great care of their victuals, and sow rice in March and june, the which they gather three months after when it is ripe, and put it into common storehouses to distribute to every one according to his estate and necessity. They fight continually against the Crocodiles, and stand continually upon their guard, as if they were environed with enemies. When they want victuals they will eat serpents, spiders, coals, and other filthy things like to the Auanares their neighbours. In this country they found many Hermaphrodites, whom they use as beasts to carry their luggage, putting them to all slavish drudgery.   

¶ The Riches.  
THe Inhabitants having gathered up gold and silver in the water, as I have formerly said, carry it to the sea side to cell, and this is the chief traffic of that country.   

¶ Forces.  
THe Spaniards hold the foresaid three places of saint james, saint Augustine, and saint Philip: and they say that, that of saint Augustine hath been newly fortified since it was ruined by sir Francis Drake. Those which stan● are reasonably strong, and have sufficient garrisons and artillery.   

¶ The Religion.  
THe Inhabitants of this country believe the immortality of the soul like unto us, but otherwise they are Idolaters.   

¶ The Gulf of Mexico.  
THis gulf, which is also called the sea of Cortes, hath as it were two ports, the one by the which the tide enters with a violent stream, and this is betwixt the farthest part of jucatan, and the Island of Cuba: the other by the which the tide goes forth, with the like force; and this is betwixt the point of Florida and Cuba. It doth water in a manner too thousand miles of Coast betwixt the said Florida and jucatan, and this is the coast of new Spain. This sea is very tempestuous, and hath sew ports that are safe, except that of the Havana towards the North. Their chief port is that of saint john de Lua, the which hath been wonderfully well fortified by the Spaniards, for that the fleets of Mexico and Spain lie safely there, being covered with an Island, which hath a league in circuit.   

¶ New Spain.  
ALl the country which extends from Florida unto the sea of California they contain under this name: on the South pa●t it confines with Guatimala and jucatan: It was subdued by Ferdinand Cortes in the year 1518. This Spain contains some famous regions, the which are new Gallicia, Mechovacan, Mexico, and Guastecan.   

¶ The Quality of New Spain in general.  
THe air (especially towards Mexico, which answers to that of the burning Zone) is temperate there: in the months of August and September it rains every day after noon. The soil is very fertile, and abounds in a manner with all sorts of first-fruits, except wine and oil; and yet there is sufficient of wine, and good store of olive trees: both which where they grow, do much increase the king of Spain's revenues. They have in a manner all kind of beasts, as well those of the country as of Europe. The Spaniards have more affected this country than any other of America. It is true that although they which are naturally borne of the country live reasonably long, yet the Spaniards (I mean those which had Spaniards to their fathers) do seldom pass sixty years, and if they exceed it, it is not much: and such as come out of Spain being already of good years, live longer than such as come thither in their youth.   

¶ Nova Gallicia.  
THe Inhabitants of this Province did formerly call it Xalisque, whereas Nugno de Guzman (who conquered it) caused the towns of Compostella, Saint Esprit, Saint Michael, and Guadalajara to be built. That part which is environed by the rivers of Piastle, and Saint Sebastian, is called Couliacan. The Metropolitan town is Couliacan, whereas the Spaniards have planted the Colony of Saint Mi●hael. Then leaving countries little known upon the right hand, for that they have not seen of their gold nor silver, they come unto the read sea, or of California, by Sibole and Grenado: hitherto the Spaniards trade, & the country is inhabited. Francis Coronado came to Sibole by the commandment of Antony de Mendoza in the year 1579, but finding small profit, returned with his soldiers to Mexico.   

¶ The Quality.  
MInes of gold are abundant in this country, and it is fit to bear all sorts of first-fruits. They take much fish in the sea that is near it, and they have many wild beasts in their forests. But the country for the most part is rough and stony.   

¶ The Manners.  
THey that devil upon the sea shore live only of fish, the rest are savage and go continually a hunting: they are poor people which go naked, and lie down in the forests whereas sleep or the night surpriseth them. They say that many times they do not forbear to eat man's flesh. They do not acknowledge any man, and live at liberty, but now they are under the dominion of the Spaniards.   

¶ M●chovacan.  
THis Province is some fifty leagues from Mexico, and hath eighty in circuit: in it is the town of Saint Sinsonse which is great and well peopled, whereas the kings of Mechovacan made their abode. There is also the town of Pascuar, whereas the Bishop did first remain, & that of Valladolid whereas he now makes his residence. There passeth through this country a swift stream, which goes always turning, and having received other twelve rivers into it, enters into a lake called the Cephalique sea, the which hath one hundred and fifty miles in circuit: going out of this lake, it doth suddenly fall into a very deep valley, and so continuing her course with a thousand turnings, she enters with great abundance of waters (which engender Crocodiles) into the the South sea: but returning a little back near unto the sea, they discover Sacatule, and within the country, Colima, with a town called the Purification, and upon the sea shore are the ports of S. james, of the Nativity, and S. Anthony.   

¶ The Quality.  
THis country is one of the best of New Spain, for that the Mahiz and divers other first-fruits do ripen twice in the year; the which yield such increase, as Francis of Torazas did reap six hundred quarts of grain, for four which he had sown. There are also many Simples, among which one is famous, the which they call Mechovacan of the name of the country. There is abundance of cotton, cutchaneal, mulberry trees, and silk. There is store of gold and silver, but it is base. There is also much honey, wax, black amber, salt, and fish: by reason whereof it is called Mechovacan, which signifies a place of fishing.   

¶ The Manners.  
THe Inhabitants are tall, strong, and active; they seem to have good wits, the which doth appear by their works which they make of birds feathers, or that are cut in canes, or such like things which come from thence: but this may be better conceived by their language which is copious and full of words, and so figurative and artificial as they that understand it prefer it before the Latin. They are of a good complexion and long life, and some hold that they are descended from the seven Races which came out of the Northern parts to people Spain.   

¶ Mexico.  
THe province of Mexico is the most pleasing and fertile in all the New world, yea, according to the judgement of joseph Acosta, one of the best of all the world. It is so called of the chief town, which is a hundred degrees from the Fortunate Islands. It was taken by Fernando Cortes in the year 1521, the thirteenth of August. This Spanish captain led to this enterprise two hundred thousand Indians, others writ but one hundred thousand, nine hundred Spaniards, eighty horse, seventeen pieces of small ordnance, thirteen brigandins, and six thousand Canoes, which are like Gondoles or Wherries. This town stands in a great plain environed with high mountains, on which there lies snow continually, and it may have about seventy leagues in compass: but there are three and thirty of them in two lakes, whereof the one is of fresh water, and the other of salt: The water which cometh from the fresh lake enters into the salt and becomes salt, in the bottom whereof they found Saltpetur. The town which was upon the salt lake was ruined by Cortes, & then built again, not in the water but upon the firm land. It contains about six thousand houses of Spaniards, and sixty thousand of Indians which devil in the suburbs. They say that there are four beautiful things at Mexico, tha● is, the women, their apparel, their horses, and the streets. Upon the banks of these lakes, there were near fifty good towns, among the which, Tescuto did ye●ld little unto Mexico. Mexico hath in it Printing, a Mint, and a most flourishing University. There is moreover in this realm, the town of Anges, with a wondered fertile soil, distinguished into valleys, little hills, and plains, where there is to be seen many troops of sheep and horned beasts, wi●h great abundance of corn and fruit. On the other s●d● stands Tlascala (which signifies a town of bread) upon a little hill having a goodly plain territory, the which is abo●● s●xtie miles in circuit: there were in old time three hundred thousand soule● in ●his ●owne, but at ●his day you shall scarce found fi●tie thousand. The Ci●i●e●●●●e ●ll ●oble, and ●●ee from taxes, which privilege they obtained for their service done ●o the crown of Spain in the conquest of Mexico, yet every man pays a little ●●an●i●i● of corn in sign of subjection, and of late years the governors have laid some ●xtraord●●ar●e charges upon them. T●e other towns of most note are Tulle, Tuluca, and ●owards' ●h●●ea (besides the town wh●●h is called the True Cross) Zempoalan, with a courtrie abo●● i●●●ound●ng in waters: ●hen Tavasco, a great town (whose Bishop doth also call himself Bishop of Capaz) which had as some say five & twenty thousand houses buil● of lime and a fat earth, and some of wood covered with straw and a certain kind of stone. It seemeth the greater, for that the ho●seses s●●nd scattering one from another, for fear of fire. The river of Aluarada runs by these places, and enters afterwards into ●he Sea by three mouths. Within the country stands Vlathan a great town, having a country full of first-fruits and well inhabited, in which there are mines of Alum and Brimstone.   

¶ The Quality of the Country.  
ALl this country is exceeding temperate, and bears great abundance of first-fruits, and all commodities necessary for the life of man: There are many mulberry ●rees with whose leaves they do feed great store of silk worms. In the fresh lake of Mexico, there grows a very good heatbe which they cu●everie Moon; and as for the salt lake, they did in former times draw great store of salt from thence, but now it fails; yet they draw forth much S●●●iter, and the Indians do ●oyle earth with dung, wherewith they make a certain kind of ●●lt, w●●●h is not wor●h ●ny thing. They do now feed many horses, asses, and ●roupess o●●he●pe ●●●●is country, and they have some mines. There is such abundance of victuals, as e●ght and ●wentie pound weight of beef is not worth above half a Royal or three pence, and a hog two Royals, or three at the most.   

¶ Manner's of the Ancients.  
THe inhabitants of this country, were in former times eaters of men, and Idolaters, and had many wives. The king of M●xico did never succeed by right of blood, but by the choice of Electors which were six in number. They made choice of youngmen, which were active, lusty, and well disposed of their persons, and fit for war, yea the Mexicans did kill one of their kings for that he was a coward. There was a sovereign Council consisting of four degrees of Nobles, and officers, without whom he could not execute any thing of importance. They had not any thing in greater commendation than the breeding up of children, and they did not esteem of any thing but religion & war. There was a man of note among them, called Tlacaellel, who was so valiant, as he conquered a good part of the estate of Mexico, and was so generous, as he refused the Realm, saying, That it was more convenient for the commonweal that another should be king, and ●hat he should execute that which was necessary for the state, than to lay the whole burden up●● his back, and that without being king he would not leave to labour for the public, a●●●ell as if he were. Their kings lived with great majesty and state, as well in their dwellings as services. They extended their dominions, of the one side unto T●gnan●pec, which i● two hundred leagues from Mexico, & on the other side to Gualimela, which is three hu●dred leagues off, and unto the North and South seas. It is true they could never subdue them of Mechovacan, Tlascalla, nor Terpeat, and the hatred which was betwixt the Mexicans and the Tlascallans opened the gate unto the Spaniards, and made the conquest of this empire easy. The Mexicans came into these places divided into seven tribes or lineages, from a Northern region, whereas of late they have discovered a rich and well peopled province, which the Spaniards call new Mexico: their chief honour consisted in arms, by the which they made themselves noble. Mot●zuma (who was the last king) instituted certain orders of knights, where of some were called Princes, others Lions, some Eagles, and some Leopards: these were allowed to wear gold and silver, to be clothed in cotton, to wear breeches, and to have vessel painted and guilt, which none of the meaner sort might use.   

¶ The Manner at this day.  
THe Mexicains are witty and industrious: they are full of courage, and think that the greatest glory of a man consists in valour. In their cumbates they use arrows, and slings with the which they cast stones, and they can now use the arqebus since the Spanairds came among them. The people are very sober and given to traffic, which is in great request in that country. Every man is given to feed silkworms, and the handicrafts men make a thousand pretty toys both of wood and feathers. They have accustomed themselves for the most part to the Spanish fashions, since they received baptism.   

¶ The Riches.  
THe hebbe which they draw every year out of the fresh lake, is not worth less unto ●he Inhabitants of Mexico than twenty thousand crowns. Finally, if Peru exceeds this country in abundance of gold and silver which is exceeding fine, this may also vaunt that it is richer than Peru in first-fruits and cattle, and that it exceeds it in arts. 
This may well seem incredible.  As for cattle, there is some one that hath above forty thousand oxen and kine of his own particular, & some other hath above a hundred and fifty thousand sheep. In the fleet which came in the year 1587. there were brought sixty four thousand cow hides into Spain, and besides this merchandise which doth amount to above six scoare thousand pounds yearly, they carry a great quantity of silver, some in ready money, and the rest in wools, sugars, silks, and cochenille, which is a worm they sow upon the leaves of Indian figtrees, where it doth grow covered with a certain delicate cotton: they gather it with great care, dry it in the sun, and so sand it into Spain, and this commodity yields not less than three hundred thousand crowns a year: the figtree that hath this seed, carries no other fruit that year but these worms. New Spain doth also traffic with China. They bring from thence flax, brass, tin, white wax, white taffetas, gold for merchandise, paper, with many delicate toys, which are transported to Per● at easy rates, and silver is the chief merchandise they sand back into China, whereas the earth yields more gold than silver; but it doth not exceed nineteen carats, and it is refined at Mexico to two and twenty.  
New Spain doth also vent into Peru for a million of crowns, in woollen cloth, silks, linen cloth, and tables. They have not yet found out the art to make glasses nor paper, and it may be more through the error of the workmen (especially in regard of Glisse) than of the matter. The paper is of an olive colour, and is good for any thing but to writ on, and the glass is obscure and gross. The Indians pay unto the king and to the feudataries twelve rials for every head, and nothing else.   

¶ Government.  
FOr that I refer it to the end of my discourse to treat of the government of America in general, and of the forces; I will only say, that the king gives to them that con●●er, and to soldiers of note, not the government of the Indians, but the vasselage a●d the right of the tax which should be due to him, and this continues but for the life of the conqueror and his son, with a bond to perform that which the king should: that is, to maintain preachers of Christ's doctrine, and priests for the service of God, and to furnish the churches. But the justice and government depends wholly of the king's courts and officers. The Viceroy and the Archbishop remain at Mexico, where the sovereign court is for New Spain. Tlascalla is governed like a common weal under the protection of the king of Spain, with a Spanish governor, and another of the country.   

¶ Gastecan.  
IN conquering the New World, the Spaniards have been careful, not to people it with any plantations, but upon the sea coast, or near unto rivers, until that being grown the stronger, they extend their dominion far into the country. Coasting then along New-Spaine, they found the mouth of the river of Palms, to the conpuest whereof Aruaro de Naruaez in the year 1527 led six hundred Spaniards and one hundred horse, who were in a manner all lost and could not found it, and some of them were so priest with famine as they did eat one another. Twenty miles beneath this river is that of Panuco, whereas Francis Garai was ill entreated by cruel and barbarous people, who slew about four hundred of his men, and did sacrifice and eat some of them, hanging their skins dried in the temples of their Idols. This country was afterwards subdued by the captains of Cortes: They called it Gastecan, or the river of Panuco, and there is a place called Zimatao, in whose territory there is to be seen at the foot of a mountain two fountains, whereof the one is of black pitch, and the other of read, and very hot. To this purpose I will tell you that in the Island of Wolves near unto Lima, there is a fountain of Bitumen which is like unto pitch, the which at Peru they call Copoy; and another at S. Helenes' point, with the which they do calk their ships exceeding well. About thirty and nine years since, there was a certain rebellion in this Province, the which was followed by a war, whereby the whole country was made defart. Then follows the read Cape, the river of Aulnerie, Ville-riche, or the rich town, so called for that it is a port by the which all the traffic doth pass betwixt old Spain and new, and Don Anthony de Mendoza caused a goodly way to be made from this place to Mexico, to make the commerce easy, and to conduct their merchandise. But the traffic was afterwards transported to the True cross for more commodity, the which lies a little lower against Saint john de Lua. The Spaniards have two colonies here, that is to say, Panuco, and Saint james of the Valley.   

¶ jucatan.  
IVcatan (which they of the country call Maiathan or Maiapar) is a great Peninsula, the which is nine hundred miles in circuit, & is in the one and twentieth degree. The more it advanceth into the sea, the more it doth extend and enlarge itself with two Capes, whereof that towardsthe North is called Cape Rogue or the Read Cape, and that of the South Cotoque. This land was first discovered by Francis Hernandes de Cordova in the year 1517, it lies opposite to the Island of Cuba.   

¶ Quality.  
MAny desert places are in this country, and it is poor in gold and silver, but in many places rich in corn, first-fruits, honey, wax, geese, hens, capons, hares and stags. And although there be no rivers that water it, yet the land continues always fresh and in good estate, for that two or three foot under the ground it is stony, from under the which there flows springs of water and little brooks.   

¶ The Manners.  
THe natural inhabitants of jucatan, are somewhat warlike and generous, and they live longer than the rest of New Spain: They did sacrifice their enemies taken in war, but they did not eat them, abhorring the Mexicanes for that cause: They used bows and targets, they did arm their heads with wood, and had corselets of cotton, and did paint their faces and bodies black: They seemed at their first discovery to be more civil than the rest of the Indians, for the Spaniards found a great town, where the houses were artificially built of stone and lime; they had goodly Temples and fair Market places: They lived under laws, and did traffic together with great sincerity, by exchanging their commodities without money: They frequented their Temples much, and were great Idolaters: They used circumcision, but not all in general: They did worship the Cross to obtain rain. Some writ, That the Spaniards when they came, found Crosses amongst them, which (they said) a beautiful man had left with them for a remembrance.   

¶ Guatimala.  
IN this country which lies betwixt jucatan and Nicaragua (besides the town of Guatimala or of S. james) you may see Chappa, Saint Saviour, and Saint Michael, Colonies of Spaniards.   

¶ The Quality.  
THe air of this country is sweet & pleasant, and the soil fertile, having both mountains and valleys which yield store of fruit. The chief town (which bears the same name) is in a pleasing valley, the which is always full of herbs, and pleasing first-fruits. Among other first-fruits it abounds in Cacao, the which is like unto an Almond, but it is round, and this fruit serves the Indians for meat, drink, and money, especially in many parts of New Spain; twenty thousand Cacaos, which make a charge, are worth one hundred and twenty Rials in Guatimala, and two hundred in Mexico. This tree flies the Sun, and loves the water; so as to the end it may grow, and carry abundance of fruit, they plant in the water, under some other tree that may shadow it, and keep it from the Sun beams. The town was first built at the foot of a certain hill, which did vomit forth flames of fire, and is called at the Indies a Vulcano. But for that in the year of our Lord 1540, on the six and twentieth day of December, a lake hidden in the bowels of this mountain, broke forth in divers places, and did overflow (with a fearful violence) and ruin the greatest part of the town, it was transported two miles from thence into a better situation, and with it the king's Council and the Bishops See. But in the year of our redemption 1581., there was so great an irruption of fire out of another Vulcano some two miles from the town, as it seemed all would have been consumed. The day following, it cast forth such abundance of ashes, as they filled the valley, and had almost buried up the town. But this was not the end of the fears and miseries of Guatimala, for that the year following, this Vulcan or Montgibel did cast forth such abundance of fire, as running for the space of four and twenty hours like a furious tor●ent downwards, it did burn stones and rocks, and did so heat five small rivers or streams, as no man could pass them, yea, some writ that it dried them up. In the mean time they did hear fearful thunders, and they saw lightnings and flames of fire waving in the air, which did strike a wonderful terror. There is a Lake in this country which is one hundred miles long, and twenty broad.   

¶ The Government.  
THe governor of the province makes his residence in the town of Guatimala, or of Saint james, where his authority is very great, for he disposeth of Comandaries that are voided to whom he pleaseth: the which neither the governor of Mexico, nor he of Peru may do. There is also in this place a precedent with the king's Council, which hath all power in matters which concern justice. This town hath also a Bishop which re●●ines there.   

¶ The Firm land.  
THis name comprehends that part of firm land, which was discovered by Columbus after the Islands, and contains all that which is betwixt Paria and jucatan, that is to say, upon the North sea, Fondura, Beragua, part of Golden Castille, Carthagena, and Vene●zole● whereunto they have since added Nicaraga, with the rest of golden Castille, which is upon the South sea. And the better to understand the situation of the said Provinces, you must know that the country which retires itself from the Southern Cape of juca●an, almost with a strait line betwixt the West and the South, advanceth itself again right against I●cata●, and leaving a great gulf in the midst, makes two Capes, whereof the 〈◊〉 is called the Cape of three points, and the other of Camaron; there is also another which is called the Cape of the grace of God, which answereth unto this. Betwixt jucatan and the three points, the gulf of Higueres enlargeth itself: betwixt the three points and Camaron they see Trugille; & betwixt Camaron and the grace of God, stands Cartagon. In Fondura or Hondura (the chief place which the Spaniards hold) is Trugille, and of the Originaries Comaiaqua, with their Bishop. In this country is Algateque, a place of some note; and a lake with many small Islands, & the valley of Olance, which is wonderful pleasing. In Beragua there is nothing more remarkable than the river from whence the country takes his name, and the Disaguadero.   

¶ Ni●aragua.  
THis Province lies next unto New Spain towards the East and South: it extendeth itself from the mines of Fond●●● towards the South sea. There are many places well ●●●pled in this province; but they are small, among the which they hold for the best towns those of Leonard Granad●.   

¶ The Quality.  
SOme writ that the province is so fertile, as the Spaniards called it Mahomet's Paradise, for the abundance of all things. It is not great, but is sandy, and therefore in summer it is so burnt up with heat as no man can in a manner travel by day, but by night. It is no less distempered and uneasy than Povilla, Arragon, or Estremadura. From May unto October, they have great and in a manner continual showers, especially in the Afternoon, which they want in the other six months. In some places there grows certain trees whereof one may ●t●nd in stead of many; for they are so great as six men are scarce able to 〈◊〉 them. There are some trees of so strange and delicate a nature, as a man cannot touch any one of their branches, but it withers presently. In those places where this 〈◊〉 hath any river or br●ok●, or any kind of water, it is as fertile as any man can desire, such is that part which extends itself from the port of Succours unto ●ondura and Granado, the which for the abundance of all things carries the name of the Rich Coast. About five and thirty miles from Leon, there is a Vulcan or fiery hill 〈◊〉 flames may he seen ●erie far in the night. Some writ, That the hole out of which 〈…〉, in 250 yard's d●●pe: A greedy Friar thinking that this burning substance 〈…〉 gold, caused a long chain o● iron and a Kettle to be made, and let it down into 〈…〉 vault, hoping to draw forth gold, but the fire consumed his instrument, and had 〈…〉 burnt him and his companions with the irruption. This province is as much annoyed with parrots, as ours is with crows and rooks, they fly in great flocks, and would 〈…〉 unless they kept it. The wealth of Nicaragua consists for the most part in a lake, 〈◊〉 they say is ●00 miles long: it comes within 12 miles of the South sea, and yet her waters fall into the North sea, which is far off. Many hold that cutting the said Channel, and making another from the lake unto the South sea, they should open a happy Navigation from the West unto the East. Others say, that they should make a channel from the gulf of Vraba to that of saint Michael, which is 70 and five miles. Others make a project in the river of Crocodiles, which takes his spring from Ciag●●●, and falls into the sea near to Number de Dios: others will have it in the river which goes from the True Cross to Tecoantepec. But it seems that God doth not like of such discourses, for that king Nicanor could never finish the channel which he had projected from the Caspian to the Euxin sea: nor the kings of Egypt (the undertakers of admirable works) the channel from Nile unto the Read sea, & from the Read sea unto the Mediterranean: nor all the power of the Romans could never open that interualle of five miles which is betwixt the Ionian sea, and jonia going into Morea: I leave the difficulties and great charges of such an enterprise. We must add hereunto that employing the people of the country in this work, they should lose those few which remain. The Negroes of Angola and Guinee do scarce suffice for the mines of gold and silver. Moreover such a channel would make the navigation so easy from Peru and new Spain to the Molucques, Philippines, China, and to all that Archipellagus, as they would soon leave the painful navigation which the Portugals make, coasting along Africa, beyond the Cape of Good Hope, and every man running towards the West, would abandon the South, which should remain a prey to Pirates.   

¶ The Manners.  
THe Inhabitants of Nicaragua are of a good stature, their complexion inclines more to white than to an olive colour. Before they were converted to the Christian faith, they had a certain form of justice: a thief was adjudged to be his slave whom he had rob, until he had made him satisfaction. There was no punishment ordained for him that should kill the Cacique or Prince, for that they said such a thing could not happen.   

¶ Golden Cast●lle.  
I Will here begin the Southrens Peninsula. This country extends from Number de Dio● and Panama, unto the gulfs of Vraba and saint Michael. The most famous place●, and of greatest concourse are Number de Dios and Panama, where of the one stands upon the North sea, and the other upon the South, with two notable ports, for that all the traffic which is made betwixt Spain and Peru, must of necessity pass there.   

¶ The Quality.  
THe air is not good neither at Panama nor at Number de Dios; but if we make comparison of these two places, we shall found Number de Dios worse than Panama, for 〈◊〉 it is wholly infected; by reason whereof they do commonly call it the Spaniards 〈◊〉. The king of Spain seeking to remedy it, ordained in the year 1584. that they 〈◊〉 transport the town of Number de Dios unto a place that was lower, where the air 〈◊〉 ●●asonably good, and that they should give it the name of Saint Philip. 〈…〉 also in an unwholesome air, and the heat is insupportable: it is in the eight 〈…〉 elevation towards the South. And to speak generally the truth of all this 〈…〉 is little inhabited, both by reason of the bad air which proceeds from many 〈…〉, as also by the bad government of them which first discovered it, who 〈…〉 ●●ny men to their ends, as they have done in other places. Finally, wheat doth 〈◊〉 ripen there, but maise grows abundantly, and the sea yields much fish as well as the 〈◊〉 wherein there do also engender monstrous huge crocodiles, for that there are 〈◊〉 five and twenty foot long. The river of Ciagra comes within five leagues 〈…〉, and by it they transport their merchandise which comes from Spain, the which is afterwards carried by land to Panama: they travel from hence to Peru, in janu●ri●, February, March, and also in August and September, but not so commodiously. The martiners (going out of the port of Panama) discover the Islands of Pearls. I may not pass over with silence that our plants and seeds, which become better in many parts of new Spain and Per●, diminish both in bounty and greatness at Number de Dios and Panama, so as coleworts and lettices being sown the third time, do in a manner change their kinds and become nothing worth.   

¶ The Riches.  
ALl the merchandise which is transported from Peru into Spain, or from Spain into 〈◊〉, comes into these countries; for what commodities soever they carry from Peru into Spain they must be unladen at Panama, and so carried by land to Number de Dios▪ 〈◊〉 they are ship● again to be transported into Spain: and whatsoever is 〈…〉 Spain, i● must first be unladen at Number de Dios to be conducted by 〈…〉 and then shipped again for Peru.   

¶ The New Realm of Granado.  
Upon the South of Cumana, and the neighbour countries in the new realm of Granado, whereof the chief towns are saint Foye (an Archbishop's seat, and a court of justice) than Tungia, Velez, the Trinity, Muscoli●a, Palma, Toque, Mariquite, Bague, Victoria, our lady of Remedies, Pampelona, Merida, and saint Christopher; we see a Cape advance into the sea, almost of a triangular form with a Basis joining to the firm land: the Western Angle is called the point of Arania; and the Eastern, the point of Salines, betwixt both, is that which is called the Three points.   

¶ The Quality and Riches.  
THis new realm of Granado is for the most part full of pleasing valleys, which bear much fruit: it is wonderful strong of situation by reason of the rocky mountains which ●n●iron it, and therefore they have very narrow passages. In some places they make salt of pal●e trees and of urine. Near unto Tungie there are mines of gold and emeralds, and ●e●re unto the Cape of the Three Points, they found store of pearls: they consume many men i● the fishing of them; for that the sea water (whereas the oysters in which pea●●●●o grow, and are tied to rocks) is exceeding cold, and sometimes the fishermen must continued a quarter of an hour under water and hold their breaths: wherefore their masters suffer them to eat little, and keep them from women, and the meat they eat is very dry. The pearls grow in the fish of oysters, and it seldom happens that they found two tha● are like by reason whereof the Latins have called them Vniones. The price is much aba●ed, by reason of the great quantity which they of the New World have s●nt into Europe: for in the fleet of the year 1587. there came for the king of Spain seventeen marks, besides three chests; and for private men, one thousand two hundred sixty and four marks, and seven small sacks of pearl by the ounce. In former times they took much in the Island of Cubaque; but they hold that the oysters have been consumed by the perpetual fishing, or whither that being terrified with the noise of ar●●●● they have changed their place of being, or that they have abandoned the enterp●●● 〈◊〉 ●●●son of an Earthquake which did ruin a good part of the town, where there 〈…〉 course of people▪ it 〈…〉 abundance as there was wont to be 〈…〉 ●●meraldss, the price is 〈◊〉 fallen, by reason of the great store they draw here, and 〈…〉 about Mante, and at Po●●ueil.   

¶ Brasil.  
THis Province was discovered by chance, by Peter Aluares Cabral in the year 1501, it gins at the river of Maragnon, and extends unto that of Plata or of silver, with uncertain bounds towards the West. According to the computation of some, that which con●●●es the crown of Portugal in those parts, runs one thousand five hundred miles from North to South; above five hundred miles from East to West; and almost three thousand miles along the coast: but the Portugals hold but one thousand four hundred. The chief places of Brasil are these which follow: On this side the Cape of Saint Augustine, is Pariba, which is also called the City of Snow, and then Parnabuco, a good town: The Island of S. Alexis, which is not inhabited, but is somewhat commodious for Seafaring men: Then follows the Cape of S. Augustine, which hath eight degrees and a half of height of the Southern Pole; and this part is nearer unto Africa than any of the New world, for they hold that it is not above a thousand miles from the one unto another. The fleets which go from Portugal to the Indies come thither to stay for a wind, and to know their course, and for that they cannot sometimes pass, they return back again. Then you may see S. Christopher, and the mouth of the river of S. Francis, and after that S. Saviour, or the Bay of all Saints: This town is feared upon a port, or rather a gulf, which is three leagues broad at the mouth, and is thirty in compass, whereas whales do enter and sport themselves at pleasure. Here the Bishop remains, and the Governor of the province. Fourscore miles from thence stands Igleos, or S. George; and in the seven and twentieth degree and a half is Puerto Seguro, or the safe port, famous, for that Aluares Cabral arrived there, when as driven by the winds he discovered Brasil. Certain rocks which have the form of a wall, and against which the waves do break, cover it. After which they discover the river of the Holy Ghost, and Baya Her●osa, and Cape froid, or the cold Cape, which is in a manner an Island, it hath two hundred and eighty miles in circuit, and is in the two and twentieth degree and a half. Afterwards they come to Santos, and to Paratininga, which lies within the country, and th●se ●●●ess are reasonably good. Betwixt S. Sebastian and S. Vincent stands Buenabrigo, which is under the Tropic of Capricorn, and the line drawn by Alexander the sixt. But the last Colony of Portugals in these parts, is it of S. Vincent, and for that it is a remo●e place, they condemn such thither as have deserved the galleys, or some such like punishment: This place was ruined by the English, on S. Stephen's day, in the year 1591., but since it hath been repaired and made better. In the eight and twentieth degree stands Cape de Patos, so called of a great number of birds which are black and without feathers, having the bill of a Raven.   

¶ The Quality of the Country.  
THis country of Brasil is so called of a read wood which grows there abundantly, the which they transport into Europe for the use of dying: but by the first discoverer it 〈◊〉 the land of the holy Cross, for that he had erected a Cross there. This 〈◊〉 good and wholesome, by reason of the hills and valleys, and the pleasing winds 〈…〉 there: yet for that it is something moist, it is more favourable to old than you● 〈◊〉 ●onss. Along the coast two hours before noon there are certain fresh winds which 〈◊〉 from the South, the which doth much good to the inhabitants. At Sea they 〈…〉 ●●●rly winds which reign half the year, and they of the North the other 〈…〉 ●●●son whereof the navigation is in a manner equally divided. They do 〈…〉 ●●●ously from Lisbon to Brasil in September, October, and unto March; 〈…〉 by divers ways at all seasons. The country is full of mountains, rivers, 〈…〉▪ distinguished into plains and hills, always pleasant and green, with many 〈…〉 ●●arie●ie of creatures which are unknown to us of Europe. Among the plants, 〈…〉 Co●iba, whose bark being cut casts forth a balm; the which even the bea●● know, for finding themselves bitten with serpents, and other beasts, they have recourse unto this remedy; so as many of these plants are in a manner without bark. The Cedar is also an ordinary tree there (as also in new Spain, and at Barlovent) and there a●e many other kinds of incorruptible wood: They make boats of the bark of a tree, able to contain five and tw●ntie persons, or more. The cucumbers and melons of Europe grow exceeding fai●e and good there. Among the beasts, there is the Talusie, which the Spaniard● 〈…〉, of the bigness of a hog, all covered in a manner with scales; out of the which he puts forth and pulls back his head like the Tortoise. The Cerigons have two purses under their bellies, where they carry their young ones, and hide them when the●●●e in any dau●ger, and that necessity doth press them: They do also found of these beas●● in the Islands of the Molucques. There is a deformed kind of beast as big as a fo●, which the Por●ugals' all Paresse, it is so slow of pace, as it will scarce go a stones cast in four●h 〈…〉 blows, nor ●awning, 'cause him to mend his pace. The 〈…〉 but his nails are exceeding long: He ●eeds of ants, and 〈…〉 ●ith his nails, he thrusts in his tongue, and draws it forth full: 〈…〉; and so thick with hair, as he hides his whole body under it. The 〈◊〉 called Ants have something resembling to ●●less, but they are not so big: they have the neither lip like unto a Trumpet, round ears, and a short ●aile: they rest in the day, and feed in the night. The Haute or Gay is a little beast, like unto a Cat, which was never seen to eat or drink. The diversity of birds and fishes both in the sea and fresh waters is incredible. In the country near unto S. Sebastian, where doth neither grow nor ripen altogether, for when as one ear doth grain, another doth bloom, and when as one grows yellow, another is green. Before I leave my discourse of the quality of Brasil, I will tell you that of la●e years, about the Bay of all Saints, one slew a monster of a huge greatness, and horrible aspect: it had the face of an Ape, the feet of a Lion, and all the rest of a man, the necks yellow, and sparkling eyes, and to speak in a word, it was so hideous, as the soldier which flew it with his piece, fell down dead.   

¶ The Manners.  
ALthough the air ●e delicate, and the country pleasing, yet it cannot be spoken how brutish and barbarous the people be. The greatest part of them live with cut knowledge of learning, religion, or law, neither do they acknowledge any princes. When they go to the war, the Brasiliens follow him only whom they hold to be most valiant. They do generally go naked; the richer ●ort, or the noble, were garments made of birds feathers of divers colours, which cover them from the navel unto the knee. The men shave the for part of their heads unto the crown. They eat all kind of beasts, Apes; Lizards, Serpents, and Rats. They make their bread of a● admirable fashion: They have an herb as big as Purcelaine, whose root is venomous being eaten raw, and not prepared it kills them suddenly: they take the said root, and beaten it speedily, and then press it, that there may no part of this mortal juice remain in it; they dry it afterwards in the Sun, and beaten i● again, and then make meal of it, and afterwards bread, which is not so toothsome as wholesome. They do also make a drink of the same meal, like unto beer, with the which being drunk, they grow more subtle and malicious than of custom. They are much given to soothsaying, and are accounted very great sorcerers. They love no labour, but affect idleness, sports, feasts, and dancing. They undertake 〈◊〉 not to extend their limits, but for honour, when as they think that their neighbours 〈◊〉 ●ronged them. They 〈◊〉 them they take in war, and make solemn feasts. They punish 〈…〉 but murder. In their language they use not the letters F. L. and R. They build 〈◊〉 ●●●sess of wood, and cover them with the lea●eses of trees. Many families live together 〈◊〉 one ●oofe; and for fear of 〈◊〉 beasts they s●eepe in the air in nets. They live with 〈…〉 of the future time, and almost in common. They swim so well; as they remain sometimes whole hours under the water▪ with their eyes open. They do easily endure toil and 〈◊〉; and on the other side, they spend whole nights in gluttony and excessive drinking▪ When as the women are delivered of child, they presently go about their household business, and the husbands keep their beds, and have broths made them, and are visited by their neighbours, and finally, they do all things that women in that case are accustomed to do. Near unto Igleos there are a people which fight against the Aymures, who are more like beasts than men; for that they open the wombs of women with child, and pull out poor infants whom they lay upon the coals in the presence of the mothers, and eat half raw; an usual thing among them of Popian. Near unto the river of S. Sebastian there are men twelve foot high, which most commonly eat raw flesh.   

¶ The Riches.  
Out of Brasil they draw great riches at this day, which consist in cottons which are very fine, and excellent sugars, and there is not any thing transported into Europe that is more beneficial to the owners. There have been some years whenas the sugar which was brought from Brasil to Portugal hath exceeded the quantity of a hundred and fifty thousand arobes. The Portugals are much given to this traffic, and have built divers places where to boil and refine their sugars: and they entertain a great number of slaves which are brought from Guinee and Congo.   

¶ Chile.  
Coming out of the Straight they coast Chile, which is so called of a principal valley: it gins from the South going towards the North, at the height of five and twenty degrees and a half, and extends unto the seven and twentieth degree: but from the East unto the West it is not above a hundred miles, having the sea of the one side, and the great Cordeliere on the other: it is bounded in on the South side by Chica, the river of Plata on the East, Charcas and Callao on the North, and the South sea on the West. They call it Chile of the nipping cold, for so that word doth signify. In the thirtieth degree is the famous valley of Arauco, which defended itself for many years with great fury, and maintained her liberty. The Spaniards have divers Colonies here, as S. james upon the river of Parais in the valley of Mapoco: the Conception, in the little valley of Penco, with a port: the Confines, in the valley of Angola: Valdivia, near unto a port, where there is a great lake: the Imperial, one of the best colonies of this country, which before the war of Araugues had three hundred thousand men of service, and Valdivia had a hundred thousand. It was called Imperial, for that whenas the Spaniards entered into this province, they found eagles with two heads made of wood set upon their doors and houses. There is also Villerich upon the side of a little lake, near unto two places, which at certain times cast forth fire and ashes. There is Chilo and Chilan, which was built in the year 1581., and Cochimbo in the territory of Se●●●●●. In the year 1562 there was such a strange earthquake in that province as it overthrew mountains, stopped the passages of rivers, ruined Arequipa one of their fairest towns, and that of the Conception, and made the sea to go out of her bounds: they 〈◊〉 it did ruin three hundred leagues along the coast: it renewed again in the year 157● 〈◊〉 overthrew the town of Valdivia. The metropolitan town is saint James.   

¶ The Quality.  
〈…〉 ●●ince is held to be like unto the countries of Europe, for that it is without 〈…〉 ●●●●ning Zone: it yields store of come and very good wines, and they have all 〈…〉 that we see in Spain. There is this difference betwixt us and them of 〈…〉 whenas we have Summer, they have Winter, and so contrariwise. There is 〈…〉 of gold good pastures, many troops of oxen and sheep, with good store of 〈…〉 the country is not well peopled by reason of their wars with them of the 〈…〉, mortal enemies to the Spaniard. The rivers of this country in the ●●y time run very swiftly, but in the night they are very still, as if the cold and ice had sta●ed them; for the air of this country is so piercing cold, as men passing through the deserts have lost some of their members without feeling, or else have fallen down suddenly dead.   

¶ The Manners.  
THe Inhabitants are very tall, active, and full of courage: for their arms they use bows and arrows. They go attired in the cases of wild beasts, and in Seals skins.   

¶ Peru.  
FRom the town of Plata unto Pasto this province extends, or else from the confines of Chile unto the limits of Popayan, betwixt the South sea and the Andes. But to understand the disposition thereof, you must know that Peru is divided into three parts, differing in situation, form, quality, and nature, and those be plains, mountains, and andes: for that along the sea, the land is plain and low, but with many valleys: this plain is five hundred leagues long, and but ten or fifteen broad. Towards the East, there are two chains of mountains, the one in view of the other, which beginning as they say, at the straight of Magellan, run betwixt Panama and Nombre de Dios unto the firm land: that which is towards the West is called Sierra, which in Spanish signifies a mountain: that upon the East is called And, or Cordeliere, and their breadth is not above twenty leagues; so as Peru in plain and mountain is not above forty leagues broad. There are about fifty valleys in Peru, whereof the principal are Xauxa, which is fourteen leagues long and five broad; Chica, Andaguaila, and jucas.   

¶ The Quality.  
IT is an admirable thing that in so small a distance as is found in the breadth of Peru, which is not much above forty leagues, and seeing that there is no difference of elevation, it doth neither rain, snow, not thunder in the plains: and in the mean time upon the Sierra, the seasons have their course as in Europe, where it rains from the month of September until April; and upon the Andes it rains in a manner all Winter. It hath been observed that whenas the Inhabitants go from the plains to the mountains, they feel much pain in the stomach and head, as they do commonly at sea which have not been, accustomed unto it: the which some attribute to the subtleness of the air and to the great winds; others to the diversity, for that in the plains the air is hot, gross and moist, and on the mountains cold, dry, and subtle: upon the plains it is always one, for that there never blows any but Southerly winds; but upon the mountains it is divers and of different fashions: there it doth neither rain nor snow, and here it doth both; so as it is no wonder if the complexion of man doth feel of this diversity of the air, and suffers some a●●eration. The plains being never watered with any rain remain barren, full of sand, and bear no fruit; the which they found only in valleys, through the which, rivers (which comes from the mountains and fall into the sea) do pass: and these valleys which are in number about fifty, are very carefully manured, and well inhabited, by reason of the said rivers which water them. One river is most commonly seven ●●●eight leagues distant from another; and sometimes more, sometimes less. The tillage 〈◊〉 valleys is not above a league of either side distant from the rivers; and although it 〈…〉 upon the plains, yet in 〈◊〉 (which gins in October and continues till Apri●● 〈◊〉 sky is full of certain 〈…〉, from which falls a certain thin humour which 〈◊〉 ●●arce wet the dust, and yet it is of great importance for the ripening and bringing of 〈◊〉 to perfection which is ●owen: and near unto Lima these mists only without any other 〈◊〉 ●o make some countries to ●●orish, the which by this means are 〈◊〉 of good pastures. ●here are also some parts of the plains, where there is not any 〈◊〉 o●●●uers, yet we ●ee abundance of come to grow, and all sorts of fruit, either for the humidity which the rivers put forth, or by the means of rivers which are lost in the sand, or by the moistness which comes from the sea. The Sierra abounds in pastures and forests, whereas they feed an infinite number of Vicugnes, which are like goats, and Guanacoes, and Pacos, which is a kind of Indian sheep, the which they use to bear their burdens. Upon the Andes there are great store of apes and monkeys of divers sorts, as also of parrots. There is also great abundance of a herb called Coca, much esteemed in Peru, whereof there is such store sent every year to Potosi, as it is valued at five hundred thousand crowns. The best part of Peru consists in valleys which bear great quantity of maiz and wheat. Their common feeding at Peru is of maiz, the which notwithstanding doth not grow well in cold countries, as is a part of the country of Pasto, and all Collao, but in stead of maiz they have other nourishing roots.   

¶ The Manners.  
ALl the people of Peru, are distinguished chiefly into three sorts of persons, whereof every one contains many other people under them, which differ in names: These people are different, and their languages are distinct. They were accustomed to make war one against another, before that they came under the power of Ginacave: but when as by his victory all cause of contention was taken away, the chief amongst them, and the people, gave themselves to the language of Cusco for pleasure, whereas before, they did justice only to every man in this language, the which they did not practise but in pleading: so as he which can speak the language of Cusco, may easily pass throughout all the province. The women wear a garment of wool down to their heels, and the men a shirt to the small of their legs, and a cloak upon it. And although they wear one kind of garment throughout all the province, yet that of the head is much different, for that every one according to the custom of his country wears bands, some of one colour, some of divers: and there is scarce any one but differs from the rest in that which he wears upon his head. Finally, the inhabitants of these countries, are full of simplicity, yet notwithstanding his manner of rudeness, they that are near the Equator are great dissemblers; they conceal their thoughts, and murmur betwixt their teeth, never discovering their conceptions freely. They do not differ much in their manner of living, from the jews. They are subject to love men, and for this cause do little esteem women, for that they do not only make them serve as slaves, but they do also beaten them cruelly upon any small matter. They that remain near unto the Equator are only covered to the navel with a very fine shirt, leaving the other members bore, yea the privy parts. They wear bracelets of stone upon their arms, & they make holes in their cheeks and lips, in which they put Turquoises and Emeralds. The entries of their Temples towards the East, were only shut with a curtain of wool, and within their Temples there are two idols which have the resemblance of he goats, before the which they burn a kind of wood which gives a wonderful good scent. Among the Caraces, there hath been seen upon their doors images of men with a Deacons stole about their necks. The Pazaons' do with wonderful art and care preserve the bodies of men and children that be dead, from corruption. They did commonly worship Serpents in their Temples, and besides this every man had his private gods, according to the faculty and trade which he did use. They were very ignorant of letters, and also of painting, which they of Mexico used instead of Letters. They have used memorial made of cords of wool, which they call Qu●●●▪ whereas making knots of divers colours, they did signify divers things, and ●xpresse their minds. Every province hath his notaries, which are called Quipocamayos, who give the people to understand any thing which hath passed long before, by the mea●● of these strings and colours. Their arms are a sword, a pike, an iron nail, a 〈◊〉 of silver with the edge of gold. They know how to advance, to keep their ranks, to ●●ecour their men, and they do● not fear death, so as they leave a good fame behind 〈◊〉 or ●ind means to get some recompense from their captains. The pretext of their 〈◊〉 ●efore the coming of the Spaniards, was, that at the Deluge the world was saved in their Lakes, and that they only had the true religion, and should teach it to others. Their chief god was the Viracoca, that is to say, the Universal Creator, and after him the Sun. The Ingua Pacacuti, who invented the greatest part of their superstitions, having assigned rents for the Temples of their gods, appointed none for Viracuca, saying, That he had no need, for that he was the Creator of all things. Among other remarkable things which they brought into those countries where they conquered, one was, that they ●●u●ded the land into three parts: the one did belong to religion, and their gods: the second was for the Ingua or King, who therewith did entertain his person, court, kinsmen, barons, and garrisons, and this part was the greatest: the third part was for the people: yet no man had any thing in particular, but by special grace from the Ingua, neither was it hereditary. These lands of the commonalties were distributed yearly, assigning to every one so much land as was needful for the entertainment of his family: so as this portion was sometimes greater and sometimes less, for the which they paid no tax. They were bound in stead of a tax to manure the lands of their gods and Ingua, 〈◊〉 to lay the first-fruits into great storehouses appointed to that use, from whence they drew provision for the people in time of dearth. They did the like of beasts, the which they divided into three parts as well as their lands. Wherein (in my opinion) they have much exceeded Lycurgus in the distribution of lands, and the Romans in their law Agraria. And for that it never rains in P●ru, the inhabitants care little for houses, and the Spaniards themselves cover not their houses but with certain mats. Yet the king of Peru made many great buildings, and among others the Tambes, which were like great Magazines or Storehouses, wherein they did put their victuals, arms, and other provisions for war. These buildings were set upon the high ways, in such fort as the one was not above three or four leagues distant from the other. The kings of this country have made two ways five hundred leagues long, the one went by the plains, and the other by the mountains: works in truth ●hich for their greatness and profit are to be preferred before those that were most admirable in Egypt or Rome: For upon the mountains they were forced to raise up i● a thousand places, and to fill up deep valleys: they did cut rocks, underprop them that were ruinous, ●ake even places that were uneasy, support precipices, and upon the pl●ine● t● vanquish so many difficulties, as sand is accustomed to bring with it, in an enterprise of that nature. In many places they had goodly gardens, and trees which gave great delight and profit to passengers.   

¶ The Riches.  
THey draw abundance of gold and silver out of Peru, besides other merchandise: and of all the riches which comes from America into Europe, Peru doth commonly furnish two third parts, and New Spain the other: but New Spain hath richer merchandise, the which together with the Islands among other things doth yield great store of cochenille, cotton, sugar and pearls: but among the treasures of Peru there are two very admirable; the one is the silver mine of Potosi, the which was discovered in the year 1545, from which they have drawn, and do draw, so great quantity of silver as the fift part which belongs unto the king hath amounted in forty years to a hundred and eleven millions of Pezoes', every Pezoe being worth thirteen Rials of Spain, and one fourth part, and yet there is above a third part which pays no fift. They refine this ●●●er in 52 engines made upon a river which is near unto it, and in two and twen●●●hich are in the valley of Tarapie, besides divers others which they turn with horses. 〈…〉 draw out of this country a good quantity of gold. The other treasure consists in th● 〈◊〉 of Guancavelque, whereas they found much quicksilver. They were discovered in 〈◊〉 year 1567., out of which the king draws clearly every year about four hundred tho●●●nd Pezoes'. Before I leave Peru, I hold it convenient to discourse something of her principal towns and provinces.   

AREQVIPA, LIMA, TRUGILLO, and others.  
FIrst of all appears Tarapata, with a port, in the one and twentieth degree; then Arica, and the mouth of the river and port of Quilca: and within the country the pleasing and delightful town of Arequipa, which being seated at the foot of a mountain which doth ●●●t forth fire, doth always enjoy a temperate and subtle air, and a soil which is fre●●●lorishing. The silver of Plata and Potosi comes to this port, and there is shipped for 〈◊〉: thither comes much victuals and merchandise which goes to Cusco. There is moreover the porr of Hacari, which is reasonably well frequented, the point of saint Nicholas, Sangalle, and Collan of Lima. Lima which is also called the town of Kings afore that it was begun on twelfth day in the year 1530● is situated upon a great river two leagues from the sea, where the port is called Collao, of an Island which is right against it, and it is one hundred leagues from the town of Arequipa: it is built with much art, for that all the chief streets answer unto the market place, and there is scarce any house without water, which comes from the river: the air is temperate, and they found it somewhat colder than ordinary during the four months of Europa's Summer. It stands in the twelfth degree and one third part. The Archbishop and Viceroy remain there, and there is also a seat or court of justice, and this is the place for all the traffic. of the realm. They do number within the town of Lima twelve thousand Negro slaves, and four and twenty thousand Spanish women, whereby we may easily guess of the rest.  
Passing on, they discover the port of Gaure, where there is great store of salt, and that of Casnia abounding in wood and victuals: then Santa, and Quanape, from whence they come to Trugillo, which is two good leagues from the sea. This town is seated in the seventh degree and two third parts in the valley of Chimo, upon the banks of a goodly river. Then follows the point of Aguille in the sixt degree, and Payta, a town of great traffic: Tumbes in the third degree, saint Helen in the second, and the Cape of saint Laurence in the first, and near unto it, is the old port, and S. james: last of all, the Cape of Paffao under the Equinoctial, which doth bound Peru on that side. Upon the right hand fifteen leagues within the land is the town of saint Michael, the first Colony which the Spaniards planted in those parts. But before I go out of the plain●● of Peru, I think it fit to speak of one or two things which are very strange. Mala is a place fifteen leagues from Lima, where there is a figtree to be seen, of the which, that part which turns towards the South, brings forth fruit when it is Som●er upon the mountains, and the other which looks towards the sea, brings foruh fruit when it is Summer in the plain, which seasons are contrary. In the valley of Chilca it never rains, neither is there any river, and yet there is abundance of Maiz, by this invention; they take upon that shore pilchards, and such like fish, than they make certain holes in the ●●●und, whereas they sow their maiz, putting a grain in the head of one of these fishes, the which doth multiply beyond imagination.   

COLLAO, and others.  
BU● the riches and power of Peru, consists in provinces which are within the land, 〈◊〉 the first is Collao: seated whereas the two chains of Mountains or Cordeli●rss ●●●●e named enlarge themselves one from another. The Southern bound is a place ca●led Caracol, and the Northern Ayavire. The chief town of this province is 〈◊〉 of ●●●e; but the best peopled of the Originaries is Cuiquito, a great and 〈…〉, and immediately subject unto the king. There are under this jurisdiction, juli, C●i●ane, Acos, Pomata, Cepita, Quaqui, Tiaguanaco, and others. At Tiaguanaco they ●●e the tu●●e● of certain great buildings: they hold them to be very ancient, and made ●●en of great power; for it cannot be conceived how they could remove stones 〈…〉 long, f●fteene broad, and six thick, without engines of iron. In this part of Peru i● the lake of Taquicaca thirty leagues long, and fifteen broad, having fourscore in circuit, and above fourscore yard's ●e●pe: it receives ●ens or twelve great rivers, with many other waters, which fall into another lake called Augola, or Paria, which is without any bottom, wher● it looseth itself, as jordan doth in the dead sea, or Volgua in the Caspian.   

¶ The Quality.  
Although ai●●●e●o ●old there, asmaize doth not willingly grow; yet it is one of the 〈◊〉 country's, and b●st peopled in Peru: & thereby we may conjecture how much more●●e ●●●●rie of the air doth import for multiplication and the entertainment of the lif● of man, than the ●bovindance of victuals. In stead of maize there grows (besides other thin●●●●ertaine roo●●ss which they of the country call Papes, which have a taste like unto 〈…〉 they ●i● them in the sun● & ●keepe then for Winter. They have much 〈◊〉, of p●o●lly●●, ●●●tess, which is a certain beast like unto a sheep, but greater, and ●●●ed lik●●●●m●l, but without any bunch: these beasts serve to carry their burdens, which are sometimes one hundred and fifty pounds' weight, and they serve also to plough their lands: their wool is very good to make cloth, and the flesh is wholesome and of a● good taste. Tiquicaca doth produce a kind of ●eed which is good for many uses, it is called Totore, and serves to make houses and barks, and meat for swine, and in the same lake there is an infinite number of mallards and other soul .   

¶ Chiarque.  
THen follows the province of the Chiarques, rich for the treasures which are found ●●●re, which are drawn out of the min●● of ●●●co (which are in the territory of Pla●●) and Potosi: the chief ●owne of ●h●s' province i● Chiarque. Near unto Potosi, there 〈◊〉 a little mountain called Guayna ●o●osi, ●hat i● 〈◊〉 say, Little Potosi, at the foot whereof begins the town of tw● league's circuit, where there is the greatest concourse of people & traffic that is in Peru: the Spaniards which inhabit there are about four thousand, an● they of the country m●ke fourscore thousand: I do not number them whom the greediness of gain, or the curiosity to see, brings from far countries, nor those miserable wretches which make their ordinary abode in the bowels of this mountain, which are so many as they would make a good town.   

¶ The Quality and Riches.  
WE may easily conceive the riches of this country, seeing that the Precedent Guasco assigned in his territory 100 thousand crowns of rent to Peter of Hiniosa, besides lesser assignations, and there were some of fifty and fourscore thousand. The mountain of Porco hath mines of gold which cannot be drawn dry; and there are many others out of which they do not draw what they may, for that the natural inhabitants do neglect it, and the country is too cold for the Negroes. That which hath also much diminished this great access to Porco, is the great treasures of Potosi, which is a mountain i● the two & twentieth degree of ●eight, like unto a sugarloaf, having half a league in ●●●uit: it contains 4 veins of silver, which are throughout at the lest a foot broad, and 〈◊〉 most not above six; of these, one, which is called Centena, hath four and twenti● 〈◊〉 and that which is called the rich vein hath seventy and eight: they do labour in these 〈◊〉 above two hundred sadomes deep by the light of candles; and they that work in th●● spend whole months and neve● see sun. They go down and ascend by ladders made of raw hides, above eight hundred steps with their burdens upon their ba●keses, and cand●●● in their hands: the toil of these miserable wretches cannot be expressed: many fall down again by reason that their heads grow dizzy, and many others 〈◊〉 themselves down through despair; if any one falls he draws with him the rest of the company. These mines were discovered for the king of Spain, in the year 1445, a●d have ye●lded him an infinite treasure, whereof I have formerly treated. The silver which is d●●wne forth is afterwards purged i●●eventie four engines of water, and thirty, th●t ●o●●●●ll horses. In the valley of Tarapaia there is a Lake of hot water, which is so▪ rou●● 〈◊〉 ●● seems to have been made with the compass: and it hath this particulati●●● 〈…〉 ●ever swell● with the spring which boils continually in the midst, nor 〈◊〉 for the great channel which they draw from it.   

¶ Cus●●●  
THe town of Cusco follows, being in the seventeenth degree towards the South: ●t is environed with mountains. There is a Castle built with so great stones, as it seems rather a work of Giants, than of ordinary men, especially for that those people had no beasts to draw, nor the use of irons. This town was the seat of the Ingua, or king of Peru, and the chief of the Empire, in the which the●e was not any other that did merit the name of a Town, either for gre●●nesse or policy. It had great streets, and strait, and ho● says bui●● of ston●ss joined together with wonderful art: but their ordinary houses were of wood covered with straw. There was to be seen in the town of Cusco the rich Temple of the Sun, and the king's Palace, where there was an infinite quantity of gold and silver. There was a great void place from the which they had drawn four ways to the four parts of the Empire. The king of Peru, to people and honour this Town, ordained that every Cacique should build a palace ●here, and should sand his children to be bred up there: and to show the greatness of their Empire, and the divers nations that were subject unto them, they would ●h●●, every man should go attired after his country fashion, and carry a certain 〈…〉 ●pon his head: which was a very stately invention. This town was new built in the year of our Lord God one thousand five hundred forty three, by Francis Piz●rre. It hath in it about fifty thousand inhabitants, and within the compass of twelve leagues, there are two hundred thousand.   

¶ The Quality.  
THe to●ne of Cusco hath a territory full of pleasant and rich valleys as those be of And●g●ay●a, Xaquisane, Bilcas, and Sucay: This last hath so good and temperate a●●●re, and 〈◊〉 situation so pleasing, as it cannot be worthily expressed: by reason where-of it is full of ●●●tely houses of Spaniards, and great villages well peopled. Our first-fruits grow a● well ●●●ereas in Spain. At Cusco they eat ripe grapes all the year. There is al●o great sto●e of oxen, sheep, and horses, which they entertain there, and they mul●●● as w●ll as in Europe.   

¶ Cassamalca, and others.  
THi● place which is upon the East of Lima, is the chief of a Noble province, and is ●●●ous for the rout and taking of Attabalipa, king of Peru, which happened in the year● 〈◊〉, of whose ransom the vanquishers did enrich themselves more than ever any so●l●ierss did, and yet they had but a part of it: for one hundred and fifty souldi●●● had ●●o hundred fifty two thousand pound weight of silver, and a million and 〈◊〉 ●●●dred twenty six thousand crowns in gold. The town of Cassimalca is at this day of small importance, but the territory is one of the best of Peru. The towns of Plata, Lima, and Cusco, are the greatest and richest, as well in jurisdiction as revenues, of those which the Spaniards have built at Peru: But Potosi although it be no 〈◊〉, yields nothing in number of people to Lima, nor likewise in wealth. The other 〈…〉 so great: yet we may not pass over with silence Guamanga, 〈◊〉 Fro●●●a, Loxa, and S. james of Guajachel. Guamanga is almost in the midst 〈◊〉 L●m● and Cul●o and 〈◊〉 valley of Xa●xa and the Andes. Quaila 〈◊〉 is of the 〈◊〉 of L●●●, ●●d this, of Cusco) is th●e●cobe leagues from 〈◊〉, and 〈…〉 since insheathe o● Bilca, fifteen leagues from 〈◊〉; 〈…〉 Empire, ●or that they do 〈…〉 was begun in they 〈…〉 and earth, the 〈…〉 with tiles, and there are many fair and high 〈◊〉 to be ●ee●e. Th●● follo●●●eon of Guanuco, built 〈◊〉 the same time in a wholesome place, whose soil is very good: this town hath unde● is the countries of Conchua, Guayla● Tamara, and Bombom. After which they enter into Cacapoye, whose chief town is Frontera, which doth also command the 〈…〉 are ●he w●●● 〈…〉 o● any of the New 〈…〉 L●xa, 〈…〉 was Alp●●nso of Nercadille, in 〈…〉 called Z●●i●) 〈◊〉 bank● of the 〈◊〉 of Ca●amayo● 〈…〉 which 〈◊〉 through 〈◊〉 ●●●ri●o●ie, which make it pleasing 〈…〉 The fields a●d full of maize, and ●f ou● c●rne, ●he●r orchards 〈…〉 o●●●r first-fruits, and garden's sol of 〈…〉 with a● 〈◊〉 numbe● of 〈…〉 neighbour 〈…〉.   

¶ Qui●●.  
IT is now ●iche ●o enter●●to the Province of Quiro, which is one ●undred miles broad, and two hundred long, seated under ●he Equator, ●nd y●● m●●● cold than h●●. T●e town of S●int F●ancis, built 〈◊〉 the yeared of our ●o●d 1534 b●●d the chief of 〈…〉 a ●ow p●ace among 〈…〉 seven leagues from the 〈…〉 ●he North, 〈◊〉 leagues from the ●ld p●●● eighty ●rom Saint james, and ●●●●●ny from Saint Mi●hael, 〈◊〉 L●x● on●●●●●red and thirty, and from Lima and 〈◊〉 three ●●nd●ed.   

¶ The Q●●●●●ie.  
Summer gins there in April, and continues until November. The inhabitants (which are of a mean stature) are good for tillage, and know well how to govern their ca●te●●, and there is not any country at Peru whe●●●he first-fruits and beasts of Eu●ope profit be●●e●, especially in regard of first-fruits, su●●rss, and oranges. Their goats have three yea sometimes five kids at a time. Besides ●he ordinary mines, they ha●e found one of Quicksilver, of a yellow colour, which smells like Brimstone when they put it in the fi●e. They found there very great Canes full of waters Among tho●e places which cast forth f●●e ●pon the ●op of these mountains, there is one very admirable, for that it casts forth such abundance of ashes, as they do sometime cover the country two hundred miles round about, and it thrusts forth so much fire, as it is seen above three hundred miles, and the noise of it exceeds that of thunder. The town of S. Francis hath upon the East part a Country called Canelle of the Cinnamon, but this Cinnamon differs ●rom the ordinary: the tree hath branches and leaves like 〈◊〉 a Bay, but greater, and the fruit is like unto an Acome, the bark and lease smell 〈◊〉: this fruit is of a tawny colour, inclining to black, greater and more hollow 〈◊〉 acorn: it is hot and cordial; s● as they use it as a remedy for the pains of 〈◊〉 stomach, and belly, and th●y carry it ●o Quito as other merchandise: they tak● 〈…〉 with some liquour. In ●he y●a●● 1587. this country was much ruined wi●h ●n ●●●quake.   

¶ Saint Croix of the Mount.  
〈◊〉 A●ing described Peru, it re●ts that following ●he ●●act of some Spanish Captains, 〈◊〉 we 〈◊〉 into the heart of this Pen●●ula, and take a view of that which hath been  
discovered unto this present: and that which hath made me resolve to discourse thereon, is the town of Saint Croix of the Mount, which the Spaniards hold. Betwixt the rivers of Orillagno and Plata we see (in the seventeenth degree Southward) a mountain which is a branch of the Andes, which extends to the stra●t of Magellan, and hath the top always covered with snow and ice. Having past the confines of the ●erigans, they d●soe●d into a country which hath been discovered within these thirty years, where ●here is not any one stone neither upon the land nor within the water of the bigness of a nut. Towards the North upon a little mountain, the Spaniards have built the town of Saint Croix of the mount, seventeen degrees from the Equinoctial, and ●oure hundred miles from Plata. There is one hundred and sixty ●ousess of Spaniards, among w●ich there are sixty commanders.   

¶ The Quality.  
THe plain country is subject to the inundation of rive●●. The ants to the end the waters do not spoil their harvest make (especially at Vapai) little rampires about a cubit high, & twelve or fifteen foot in circuit, where they preserve their grain, and of these they make many. Thither do the passengers retire themselves whenas the waters surprise them. The river of Vapai doth rise and fall as the Nile, and runs with a slow course, like to the river of Saone in France. There are many beasts differing from ours: one is very like unto a hog, but that he feeds upon herbs, and sleeps in the water like unto a fish. There are certain vipers which are a fathom long, and as big as a Spanish pike, which the Spania●ds' call sonailles; they have certain rise upon the tail of the biguesse of a nut, the which are hollow and joined one unto another like unto the joints of a man's fingers, some hold that one of them grows every year: these beasts are so venomous, as whosoever is bitten he dies presently: but they cannot see three yards from them, and ●he noise of their knots, or rather bells, may be heard twenty yards off: there are some of them also in Brasil. The Tocca is a bird as big as a crow, but his breast is white, and his beak i● of the colour of gold, the which is proportionable to the rest of his body. There a●e ●ery many oftriges, for the soldiers (marching through the country) do many times found heaps of fifty eggs or more together, which serve them for provision, for that one egg will suffice many soldiers. The country yields abundance of cotton, rice, maize, and diver● first-fruits: but it bears neither wheat nor wine, the which they bring from Peru, and a pipe of wine is commonly sold there for one hundred crowns: but they of the courtrie make a drink of maize and honey. They want no lakes which are full of fish: but Saint Croi● hath a little river which is very strange, it is but two fathom broad and very shallow, i●●uns not above a league, for that it looseth itself suddenly in the sand; and yet it doth furnish the town with water, and all kinds of good fish, in such abundance, as they may ●ake them with a pail, or with their hands: and this fishing continues from th●●nd of February unto the end of May; the rest of the year they see little.   

¶ The Manners.  
TH●●● are divers barbarous people in this country, and among others the Cerigans, 〈◊〉 the Viracans, who are at continual war, or else fight against the Spaniards, whose passage they seek to hinder all they can. Don Francis of Toledo drew together the forces of Peru to subdue them, but in vain: they eat man's flesh as we do mutton. The To●es their neighbours carry their enemies (whom they have taken in war) upon their shoulders, and go shaking them whilst they march. The Varays say that they are all ●●uall among themselves; but greater than their neighbours, whom they contemn, 〈◊〉 sort as they demanded of a preacher, Whether they would baptizm them with the 〈◊〉 wa●●● they did others, if so be that they become Christians. They have no certain 〈◊〉 of 〈◊〉. They practise their it sons to arms from their infancies, and their arms 〈…〉 a club, or abattell axe: they give them their captives in prey, and recompense him that hath slain any one by some extraordinary blow: they encourage ●●em to be furious, giving them the names of Tigers, Lions, and such like beasts. Some 〈◊〉 these people (to se●me more terrible) paint their bodies, and when it is new Moon or full, they say ●ha● th●y wound their bodies with daggers of bone to accustom themselves to th● accidents of wa●. Th●y know not what the●t means, neither do they cell any thing. Th●● follow dead 〈◊〉 to their graves with tears, and receive their friends in like manner 〈◊〉 from far● lamenting the miseries which they have suffered; so as they have teat●● 〈◊〉 commandment. The Originaries about saint Croix manure the land, and pay 〈…〉 the Spani●●ds' two pounds of cotton spun, for every head: for their 〈◊〉 se●ues i●●tead of mone●, as cacao doth in new Spain, and coco in Peru: yea more, these people live long and are healthy: they take delight in hunting and catching of birds: they eat roasted ants, the tails of crocodiles, grasshoppers, and vipers having taken away the head and liver. They go all naked except the women, who wear some lea●e or bark▪ or a narrow girdle of cotton, and that after marriage. But the 〈◊〉 ha●● brought into the town the apparel which they use in Peru. When it is cold (although the country be hot by nature, and not subject to any cold winds) either they go not ●ut of their lodging, or else they carry a firebrand in their hands to w●●me their stomaches. Their heads are shaven bore of either side, leaving a tust of hair in the midst: some shave b●● one half, e●ther on the right side, or on the jeft; and most of them round about, suffering the hair to grow in the midst: they say that they have received this custom from one Paic●me, by reason whereof they called the first religious man that went thither to preach the gospel. P●ic●me. Whenas the women are delivered of child the husband's go● to bed, & doth as we have written of them of Brasil. They cannot reckon but to sour, & ●o signify ●i●e they show the hand, for ten, both hands, and for twenty, t●●● say my hands and my feet. When as the husband goes abroad for any time, he 〈…〉 many sticks in the house as he means to stay days 〈◊〉, and ●a●riess as mansmith h●●, taking away one every day, and the woman (or he ●hat remains at home) another, and ●fter this manner they reckon the days of absence. B●yond S. Croix 〈◊〉 the ●●st, are ●he people called Garays, that is to say, warriors; who te●m● all ot●e●● Tap●●is● that i● to say, slaves: yet they do much esteem the Spania●ds● and say they are d●s●●●ded from them. They never forget an injury. They eat m●ns' fl●stss, of all ●●her nation's but their own. They build high and spacious houses, whereas many ●●mil●ess li●e together, every one apart, yet without any partition. They pierce the unde● lip and h●ng something at it, which they think is very handsome. They have no fo●●● of ●ustice. Murders are not punished but by the kinsmen of him that is slain. Their Caciques have no charge but to be leaders in war. They do not suffer the Spaniards to ent●r ar●●● in●● any of their places (whereof one hath at the lest f●ue hundred f●milleses) or i● they 〈◊〉 armed, it is in so small a number as they shall have no cause to fear them: and they reproach their neighbours with their command. A hundred and twenty miles from thence remain the Chiquites, subjects to the Spaniards. It is a remarkable thing that the Varays language extends itself unto Brasil; and Paraguay; unto the country of the Garays and their neighbours, which is a great sign that the said people have been masters over all those countries: For as with the Latin t●●gue, the Arabian, and the Sclavonian, they may in a manners travel throughout all 〈◊〉 world, so with the V●rays tongue, that of Cusco and of Mexico, they may in a 〈◊〉 over all the New world.   

¶ Tuc●●●.  
THe r●● 〈◊〉 Tucuma extends for the space of two hundred leagues betwixt Chile, Brasil, Para●● and S. Croix. The Spaniards which went so far in the enterprise o● Peru, planted 〈◊〉 colonies, that is to say, Salta, S●e●o, S. Michael, Cordova, and S. 〈◊〉▪ S●l●● is one hu●d●ed thirty and six miles from T●lina, which is the last place of 〈◊〉 and ●he voyage is troublesome, by reason of the want of water: It stands in a valley which is eighty four miles long, and at lest thirty broad. Near unto it there is another valley which they call Calchiaqui, which runs from North to South thirty leagues, and is full of rivers, and courageous people. The Spaniards have fought with them ma●● years in vain; in the end one john Perez reduced the Prince of this valley by friendship to the obedience of the king of Spain, he making himself a Christian: but b●i●g ●fterwards discontented at the bad usage of Perez, he revolted with the whole va●l●y, ●nd so continued seven and twenty years. In the end john Ramirez with one hun●red Spanish foot, five hundred horse, and three hundred archers of Peru, made an end of this enterprise. Steco is the chief of fifty places. Saint james stands one hundred and fifty miles from Steco, the Bishop, and Governor of the Province, make their a●ode there. Cordova is in the same situation that Spain is, yet the air is colder ●● winter, and more temperate in summer: It is sixty leagues from Chile, two hundred and forty from S. james, and as much from S. Foy of Pa●aguay.   

¶ The Quality.  
THe cou●●●ie is generally plain, and the air more inclining to heat than cold. It rains much, and the rivers do easily overflow the fields, and the winds are so viole●● as they turn up trees by the root, and force the inhabitants to hide themselves unde●g●udn●. The valley of Salta is full of waters, which abound with fish. The air is very temperate, ●nd the soil exceeding good, where they feed much cattle: so as there wants nothin●●ut people. The territory of S●eco abounds in cotton, come, fruit, and cattle. 〈◊〉 ●●alme of Tucuma the country is so plain and so commodious as they may easily ●●●ell in caroche for the space of two thousand mi●eses.   

¶ Paraga●is.  
TH● P●●aguais devil upon the confines of Tucuma, along the river whereof they take 〈◊〉 name. To pass this ri●er, which is very great and spacious, it seems that nature ●●th fitly fu●●ished them with a certain kind of trees which they call Zaines: they a●e great and not high, ●nd have the root and the top but small, and the body big: the hart of it is ●ender, and th● bark very tough; so as they may easily make them hollow: and of them they make boats of one piece, able to contain many. This country was first discovered by the North sea, by Sebastian Gabot, and by divers Spanish Captains: and then by the way of Peru, by Diego Roias', and others. The chief town is Vraye Foy, o● the True fait●: moreover, there are the towns of the A●●umption, Saint Anne, Bovair, Saint Esplo●, and Saint Saviour.   

¶ Hispaniola.  
THis Island is called by them of the country Hayti and Quisquaia, and by the Spaniards Hispaniola, and S. Dominico, by reason of the chief town which they have built there. It is in cicuit three hundred and fifty leagues, or one thousand four hundred 〈◊〉. It is ●●ue hundred miles long, but the breadth is divers, being in the largest place ab●●●●●ree hundred miles. The midst of the Island is about nineteen degrees from th● 〈◊〉 or Northward, and the form is long from East to West. The chief town is that of 〈◊〉 Dominico from which the whole Island takes her name. There is a Court a●d ●eat 〈◊〉 with a Precedent: and there also remains the Archbishop. There are s●ne famous mockeries in this town. The other towns are S. john of Megruana, the Port of Plata, Port Royal, Cavana, Xaragua, and some others which have not been b●il●● by the Spaniards.   

¶ The Quality.  
THe air is u●●ie well te●●●●ed, being neither too hot nor too cold: yet upon the tun of some ●●gh mockest the cold is very sharp. The trees bear leaves continually, fo● the old 〈◊〉 but the ●ew bud for●h presently. All ●●eess, first-fruits, and herbs which are brought out 〈◊〉 Spai●e grow there and increase wonderfully, but they found by expe●ience that whe●●●omes better i● hill●● places. This country hath many havens & rivers, bu● tha● which makes it more delightful and commodious for the inhabitants, is the wate● of four 〈◊〉 ri●erss, which coming f●om the tops of high mountains, which are a●out the mi●des● of the Island, run divers ways, for that juna b●nds towards the 〈◊〉▪ Atti●●n●● towards the West, jacchie towards the North, and Naibus towards ●h● South: ●o as the ●●lan● 〈◊〉 proportionably divided into four. There is to be seen in 〈◊〉 ●●land a cave under a high mountain towards the East, not above five hundred 〈◊〉 from the ●e●, whose entry is like unto the portale of a goodly palace; there they do 〈◊〉 t●e noise of violent streams which run swiftly in hollow concavities for a great ●●ace and the noise is so great, as it makes him that approacheth almo●● dease for a time● 〈◊〉 these waters join together in a grea● lake f●ll of dangerous shelves. Moreover there is another great lake which the indians call Haguey gabon, and our men ●he Caspian sea: This lake having received a great number of ●iverss from all parts, looseth i● self in a gulf; so as these spongious rocks receive th● sea water by certain con●●itss and caves under ground, for that they f●nd store of se● fish there, ●nd th● water is ●●●t. In the midst of this lake is the Island of Guarizanta u●●● f●t for ●ishing: the ●●her lakes of this Island, although they b● s●ss●e, yet are they sal●, There is also the lake of Magnano well known by reason of the good water: there is great abundance of salt, for they draw 〈◊〉 of the mountains like crystal. Besides all these lakes, there is a great river whose ●●●erss are salt, notwithstanding that many small rivers of fresh water do fall into it. This ●●●and doth also 〈◊〉 ●old, and ●hey say that the Cab●nie● mountains have mines so 〈◊〉 of gold, as 〈…〉 ●here is great abundance of sugar, cassia, ginger, ma●●●ke, the wo●d 〈…〉 on. Before the coming of the Spaniards there were 〈◊〉 ●hree kinds 〈…〉: but now they have many ●ame beasts, so as they transport an in●i●●● number o●●i●es from thence into Spai●es' there is Azure also.   

¶ The Manners  
THe In●ab●●●●●● are naturally slothful and idle, they go all naked, and live only of their fishing. Before that they had received our religion, they did believe that there was a first mover of all things; but otherwise they were full of infinite errors. Since that they brought sugar canes thither, they have made mills and built shops; so as the inhabitants at this day have great traffic, and by that means grow rich.   

¶ Cuba o● Ferd●nand.  
●VPon the Wes● of Hispaniola this Island li●● and that of I●maica lies upon the South 〈◊〉 of it: it runs th●ee hundred leagues ●rom ●as● to Wes● and the greatest breadth is 〈◊〉 five leagues, but 〈◊〉 many places it is not ●wen●ie br●●d. There are six towns, 〈◊〉 the chief is that of Saint ●amess, well known by ●●●son of the ri●er and port: 〈…〉 that the other towns are not 〈◊〉 well peopled, 〈◊〉 Havana, which is most 〈…〉 all the Island. The town of sai●● james is the Bishop's seat.   

¶ The Quality.  
●Bout this Island they ●●nd many dangerous shelves, for that towards the North there 〈◊〉 great turning of water, and upon the South part it is full of little rocks. This region is hilly and full of forests and rivers, and it hath many lakes of fresh water, and also of salt. Moreover there are mines of gold in the mountains and the gravel in rivers is ●lmo●● a●● gold. There is a valley fifteen miles from Saint james so dou●●ed with great bowls ●● stone, as they seem to ●ave be●ne set for pleasure, and yet they are natural. Nee●● unto the Prince's port there is a spring which doth cast forth pitch continually. The●e are many serpents in this Island.   

¶ The Manner's.  
BEfore the discovery of this Island, the Inhabitants t●oke delight to ●ame serpe●●●hey we●● naked as in Hispaniola. Th● people contented themselves ●ith that which n●●ure brought ●orth, and they lived all in common.   

¶ 〈◊〉.  
AT this day, this Island which they ●all Saint james is situated betwixt the se●enteenth and eighteenth degree of ●●titude: on the East it hath Hispaniola, on ●h● North Cub●, on the South the Islands of ●●in● Bernard and of Cha●th●na, and u●on the West the land of juck 〈◊〉 or Fon●ure: it is leftie leagues long, and about fi●● and twenty bro●d, and it ●●th i● circuit o●●●●●d●ed and fifty: It contains two towns, 〈◊〉▪ ville and Outsight: Se●ille is the ●hiefe, in which is the Abbey church, whereof Pete● M●●tir Ang●●●● Milanois w●● prelate. D●●●ue son to Colombu●●●bdued ●●bdued this Island, and ●ade them ●●●●t●ie to the crown of Spain in the year 1509.   

¶ The Quality and Riches.  
THe ai●e i● good, and the country ●e●till, feeding great numbers of cattle, by reason of 〈◊〉 waters and pastures, having many goodly ●ountainess which refresh them. T●ey 〈…〉 are mines of gold. They do ●●so gather a great quantity of cotton and ●●▪ ●●●. Th●●● are many good ri●erss and lakes which abound with fish.   

¶ The Manners.  
THe ●●●●le in their manner of living are like to them of Hisponiola and Cuba, and yet some ●ay that they of jamaica have been more cruel.   

¶ The Islands of the Cannibals o● C●ribes.  
AL● thos● which stretch out in a double rank from the East to the South of Hispaniola in vie● of the firm land, they call the Islands of Cannibals. The greatest part is 〈…〉, but among those that are peopled, the chiefest is the Island of Saint john, 〈…〉 of the country call Boriquen, and it lies ne●re to Hispaniola upon the East: it is 〈◊〉 hundred miles long, and seventy broad, and it abounds in corn, fruit, cattle, and 〈◊〉 also in gold, and there they found very good Gayac. The chief town is Saint john, 〈◊〉 there is a very good port: next to this Island, Cubaga is ●amous for the ●bou●●●●●● of pearl they found there. The inhabitants of all those Islands are brown, 〈…〉 hair they are cruel and eat man's flesh, thei● arrows are poisoned, they 〈…〉 of one p●●ce, which they call Canoes to go to sea in.    

A DISCOURSE IN GENERAL OF ●HE NEW WORLD.  

¶ The Forces.  
●he Estates of the king of Spai●● at the New world are so great and powerful, as they need not to fear any enemy. The Spaniards have good places in every 〈…〉 seized upon the mouths of rivers, of sea ports, of 〈◊〉 of impo●●●●●●, & in a word of all places fit to command countries, ei●her abounding in victuals or rich in mines, or fit to keep warlike people & ●ownss of conse●●en●● in awe▪ towards the South, they have not any enemy that can annoyed them: towards the Nor●h, they h●ue received some ●osse ●y the English, who have lyen upon that 〈◊〉 to surprise their fleets, and to sack their sea towns. The greatest loss they have 〈…〉, whenas si● Francis D●ake sacked the town of Saint Dominico in 〈◊〉, & Ca●thagena upon the firmeland. But this attempt of the English made the 〈…〉 to provide for the safety of these Provinces, which seem to be 〈◊〉 towa●●●he Nor●h by na●u●e; ●irst by a great number of Islands which serve as a 〈…〉 d●●en●e fo● New Spain, and ●ortifie it with many shelves which cause di●ers c●●●entss, and among others with one current which is wonderful swift, whi●h 〈…〉 the g●lfe of Paria (where they have called it the Dragon's mouth) then passing betwixt jucatan and Cuba, returns back betwixt Cuba and the point of Florida, with such violence as a ship with all her sails cannot pass. This current together with the diversity of winds, and other dangers at sea, will always amaze them that shall have no port of retreat. Moreover the king of Spain (making use of this benefit of nature) hath 〈◊〉 a fort of import●n●e to ●● built in an Island near to the True Cross, a town 〈◊〉 upon the ban●● o● Mexi●o, ●nd another ●● Havana in the Island of Cuba right against 〈◊〉 the first 〈◊〉 from 〈…〉 to avoid the current, and the second of means to mak● us●●f i●●oreou●r ●● hath caused an excellent good fort to be built at Saint Dominico, a town which seems to be made for to command that sea, by reason of the commodity of the situation. A●d to conclude, as the situation of Italy seems to have been made by nature to command the Mediterranean sea, so that of Spain seem●● to b●●ramed to ●ule over the Oc●an; and experience teacheth, that the Spaniards are of a complexion f●t to endure all climates and countries.   

¶ The Civil● Government of the New W●rld.  
IN all the New World th●re are too Viceroys, the one of New Spain, who makes his abode in ●he c●●●e of ●exico; and the other o● Peru, who hath his residence at Lima. Of the●● two 〈◊〉 P●●u ha●h gr●●t●st autho●i●ie; for that besides the greatness of provinces which are subject unto ●is government, he may of late years dispose of com●●●ndarieses that are voided: the which the Viceroy of New Spain may not do: but this is ●●●e to be d●s●●ed for ●h● neighbourhood of Spain, for the beauty of the city of Mex●●●, and the ci●ili●i● of the pro●i●●e.  
I●stice is wh●●●y ●●●●ged by sovereign courts, whereof there be five in New 〈…〉 Me●ico, Saint D●●●●ico, Gua●imala, Guadalajara; and Panama: Peru hath also 〈◊〉 ●hat is to say, at 〈◊〉 Imperial of Chil●, at Plata, Quinto, and at S. Foy in the N●w realm. The Spaniards and Indians have recourse equally to these seats of justi●e, fro●●he which no man may appeal. The Spaniards (except the Marquis of Vallee, and some others) have lands or people in fee; but this holds not, but during his life to whom it is given (and they be commonly given to conquerors) and to their eldest sons, 〈◊〉 ●●eir wives sonne●, if they have not any. These Lords exact from their subjects about 〈◊〉 ●rowness for every fire, and in recompense they are bound to provide men that may instruct the people in the Christian faith, and to serve in their Churches. The Spaniards live most commonly separated from the Indians, for that they devil for the most part in towns, which they have built, the which are all environed with walls of a square for●ie, wi●●●reat market places and strait streets: whereas the Indians keep in the suburbs of ●he said towns, or in their ancient boroughs, where they have a care of their cattle, traffic, and mines. When as the Commanders heir, or his that holds land in fee, is dead, his subjects return unto the king; by reason whereof the lands and most impo●●●●●. Commaunderies belong to the crown of Spain: and it is a thing worthy observation that the Commanders die most commonly poor, and seldom doth any one attain to the age of sixty years. They have often attempted to obtain these commanderies in perpetuity, and to this end have offered great sums of money to Charles the fift, and to Philip the second: but, for that these kings did fear that those conquerors might eat the people to the bone and oppress them, or else that these conquerors might o●e day revolt, they would never give care unto this demand.   

¶ The Ecclesiastical government.  
AT the New world there are four Archbishoprics, one at S. Dominico, another at Mexico, the third at Lima, and the fourth at S. Foy in the New realm. The first hath three Bishops under him, that is, Port Rico, Cuba, and jamaica. The second hath ten Bishops under him, that is to say, they of Tlascala in the town of Angels, of Guayata, of Mechovacan, of Salisco▪ of jucatan, of Gipe, of Fondures, of Guatimala, of Nicaragua, and of th● True Cross. The third hath nine Bishoprics, that is, of Cusco, of Plata, of Qui●o, of Popayan, of Panama, of Tucuma, of Paraguay, of the Imperial, and of the Conception. The Archbishop of S. Foy hath under him the Bishops of Carthagena, Sancta Marta, and Margareta. There are at the New world five sorts of religious men, that is, of S. Francis, S. Dominick, S. Austin, de la Merced, and jesuits; and besides these, some Carmelits which go bore footed, and there are in all about five thousand religious m●n. There are also divers Cloisters of Nuns. The Cures are for the most part ●● th● h●●dss of the four first religions, and they of S. Francis have more than all the rest. The jesuits have no Cures, as they say, but in the land of julie. The Curate makes his abode in the most commodious place of his jurisdiction, which is most commonly very great: from thence he sends his substitutes into o●her places, sometimes to say Mass, and sometimes to teach the Christian doctrine; and for that the number of Priests is small, the Pope hath given liberty to say two Masses in one day, in places that lie far off: and the Curate is no● only bound to instruct the people in the faith and Christian manners, but he must also teach the children to read, writ, and sing, and he must teach his parishi owers to sow corn, plant fruit trees, build houses, and live together; so as these people who receive spiritual and temporal goods from these religious men, do love and ●u●●●nce them much. The commanders, and the king in his land, give an honest entertainment to the Curate, both for himself, and the service of the Church. The king gives ●o ●eri● Bishopric at the lest two thousand crowns rend, but they grow soon rich. The Bishop of Mexico hath four and twenty thousand crowns rend, he of Lima four and thickie, the Bishop of Cusco hath 70, he of Mechovacan twenty, Plata seventeen, and Quit● eighteen. The Indians are not admitted to the Communion but after long proof; 〈◊〉 with more difficulty in Peru than at Mexico; and they do seldom admit ●h●m to 〈◊〉 orders, by reason of their inclination to drunkenness. They do not commonly su●●●● them to study Philosophy, and much less Divinity. There are two 〈◊〉 a● the New world, the one at Lima, and the other at Mexico. There are also two 〈◊〉 in the same towns. By this diligence they have made easy the conversion 〈…〉 of the Indians, both in Peru and New Spain: and in the year 1584., 〈…〉 of Lima held a Provincial Synod, where it was ordained, That they 〈…〉 ●orme to instruct the Indians in the Christian faith, to the end that all 〈…〉 and by that means prevent many errors.   

Of the knowledge which the people of the New world have of God.  
THese nations (though barbarous) list up their eyes to heaven in adversity and danger, and hold, that it is his dwelling place that governs all things. But it belongs not, but to the children of light to know that this sovereign Lord is God alone. This natural instinct, and this knowledge of God, is more or less clear in the Gentiles, as they do more or less participate of reason, and of moral virtues. Among the people of the New world, the Chichimeques of New Spain, and certain people of Brasil were most barbarous: these leading a savage and brutish life, without commanders, without laws, without any form of civility, or policy, show not in their actions any discourse of reason, but what they need for their entertainment; Sense in them doth darken the understanding, and passions blind the judgement: they do not elevat their thoughts above the earth, and they do not think but of things that are present. So the neighbours to Brasil have not any knowledge of God, nor of religion. But for that man cannot subsist without a support, it is necessary that he which doth not rely upon God, should make himself subject, if not to false gods, at the lest to southsaying, and such like vanities; and after this manner these Brasilians (although they do neither worship God not Idols) are as it were tyrannized by soothsayers and co●sening Mountebanks, and govern themselves by the prediction of future things. The people of S. Croix of the Mount, although they had no Idols, yet they worshipped the Devil, not to obtain any good from him, but to avoid some evil. They talk and treat with him, and present unto him divers things, they pour forth their drink to his honour, and drink with grea● ceremonies, not daring to touch the first-fruits of the earth until they have offered the first unto him. But there is not any thing wherein they submit themselves more unto him, than in their hun●ing and fishing, which are the ar●● and exercises wherewith they entertain themselves. The Varays, their neighbour's, being in a manner mad, at a certain time of the yea●e, 〈◊〉 furiously into woods and ●olitarie places, and with certain leaps and brutish howl, call upon one Candi●e, of whom they tell divers follies, they go with this name in their mouths, through Precipices and forests, from whence they can hardly retire themselves; they tread upon burning coals, and snakes, and have no harm. They have knowledge also of seven sorts of spirit's, and do reverence them for fear of being beaten or slain, and they are also much given to southsaying. They carry their arrows to soothsayers, and according to their judgements, they either hold them for good and happy, and so keep them, or for bad and unfortunate, and so cast them away: but coming to those people which are a little more civil, they of Cusco, and th● inhabitants of Peru, confessed a Creator of the Universe, and a sovereign Prince, whom they called Viracoca, and Pacacamac, that is to say, Creator of heaven and earth, and they did worship him in lifting up their eyes to heaven. But they had no word answerable to the name of God, and even at this day, they cannot say God, but in using the Spanish word. These things make it easy to persuade them that there is a sovereign God, but not to let them know that there is not any other. Yet they exceed the ancient Greeks in understanding, and in a certain shadow of religion; for that although they place a sovereign God, with a great number of others, yet they do not attribute adulteries, and other detestable vices, to their Viracoca, as the Greeks did to their jupiter; but contrariwise they ascribe unto ●im, high and marvelous things, by reason whereof they do also call him Vsapu, that is 〈…〉, Admirable. Next to the Viracoca, they of Peru did worship the stars; and for that 〈◊〉 them, there is not any whose virtue is more manifest than that of the Sun, they give 〈◊〉 ●he second place, and the third to the god of Rain● and of things which are engendered ●● th● air, but principally to the god of Thunder, for the terror he gives to me●. They did bele●ue that there were in Heaven all kinds of beasts, of whom depended the ●eneration and increase of troops, and other beasts of their kind; and therefore they ●id believe that every kind of beast had a star which did rule over it, the which they did ●orship, to the end that if it were a tame beast it should preserve it, and make it prospero; and if it were venomous or wild, it should keep them, and defend them from it. The Varays (with great howl and strange motions of the body) did worship the New Moon, and when it increased they cut their arms in many places, to the end that they might shoot strait, being their chief exercise: & they make incisions upon their thighs and ●eg●, that they may run more swiftly, which done, they cast on them the ashes of those beasts which they hold to be swift: and in like manner the women cut their faces, thighs, and arms, than they paint them with blue which will never out. The Chianes, neighbour people to Saint Croix of the Mount, divide the year into twelve months, over which they make twelve stars to rule, the which they worship, making certain sacrifices unto them, especially to those that rule during the time of harvest; they invoke them and entreat them to be propitious and favourable unto them: they do also superstitiously observe the singing of birds, and it cannot be spoken how much they abhor the shrieking of an owl; whenas they hear any one, the old men come forth with their arms, and conjure them to be gone and not to hurt them; in the mean time the young men and women keep within doors, lest that this bird should presage some disaster unto them. But they of Peru (to return from whence we came) did attribute a divinity to the earth and sea, under the names of Pacacuma, and Mamacoca, and likewise to the Rainbow, and to every thing that had any greatness or wonder in it; to trees, to the tops of mountains, to rivers, to huge rocks, to bears, to snakes, to tigers, to the end they receive no hurt from them. In their voyages they did cast and offer their old shoes, and such like things, upon the mountains, rocks, and in the high ways, to the end that they should give them force & passage. They pulled the hair of their eyebrows, & offered them to ●he Sun, to the Mountains, to the Winds, & to other things whereof they did stan● in fear. The Guacavilques made offerings to their gods of the teeth which they pu●●ed 〈◊〉. In Cusco they did great honour unto a fox which they kept i● their Guaca or Temple. At Manta (which is in the country of Port-Vieil) they did worship an Emerald of extraordinary greatness and beauty, recommending themselves unto it in their sic●●esse, and made divers offerings unto it. At Cassamalca they held for gods certain stones of the bigness of an egg, and some bigger: they were very superstitious to foun●ain●● and running waters, and did wash themselves divers times in them, to recover th●ir health.  
In the province of Cinaloa, which is beyond New Spain, they hold that there is a Creato● and Governor of the world, but they did not extend his government and providence to man, lest he should restrain his free will: they did burn their dead men without any ceremony, or cast them into a pit which was six hundred yards deep. They of M●chovacan had some knowledge of the beginning of the world, of the framing of man of the slime of the earth, and of the deluge (this last was common to them of Peru and Brasil) but with a thousand follies: they did believe that the gods above made the celestial things, and they below the terrestial; and they appointed a mother to all the god●, as the Grecians made Cybilla. Every art and trade had a peculiar god among t●em; and they did think that these gods had been men of merit, who appeared to them of the country after their death, with divers other practices of the devil.   

Of the Indians Idolatries towards the deceased.  
THey of Peru did carefully preserve the bodies of their deceased kings, which were kept●● Cusco, every one in his chapel, whereof some had remained above two hundr●d 〈◊〉: every one of these left all his treasurers for the entertainment of the chapel ●●ere he would be interred, and of those which should be appointed to attend and 〈…〉 one of them caused his image of stone to be made in his life time, the which 〈…〉 honour as himself, both whilst he lived, and after his death. In time of war and 〈…〉 ●hey carried these images to obtain victory, and rain, and they made divers 〈…〉 ●●to them. It was a thing generally practised in Mechovacan, Peru, and the 〈…〉 country's, at the death of the Inguas and others, to kill their best beloved wives and servants, or to bury them quick, to the end they should not want people to serve them: after divers songs and dances they slew them, and these miserable wretches hold themselves happy to be so entreated. Some of the familiars or household servants to the Ingua, and the Lords of the realm (for that they might not lie in the tomb) made certain holes in those places whereas the dead body had been accustomed to paste their time, having a conceit that the king passing that way, would carry them to another life for his service. At th● funeral of the Ingua they did sacrifice young children unto him, and did paint his face with the blood, drawing a line from one ear unto the other: they used other ceremonies at the death of any of the common soft. They did set much meat upon the grave, and did put gold, silver, and other precious things, in the mouth, bosom, and ha●dss of the deceased, giving them new clotheses, to the end they might be furnished for the other life; for they did believe ●hat the souls of dead men went wandering up and down, and were subject to hunger, thirst, cold and heat: and therefore they did celebrated the end of the year, and did carry thither divers sorts of meat, and stuffs to clo●● them john de la Tour a (captain to Gons●luo Pizarro) drew out of a tomb the value of fifty thousand crowns in stuffs, which had been put there to that end. In Mechovacan, for that they believed that men did live in the other world as in this, dying they made provision not only of victuals and apparel, but also of other things belonging to those exercises which they were wont to use.   

Of their Idolatry to Images.  
THey of Peru are no less foolish about Idols of stone and wood; and for that they were moved to worship th● devils for the fear of ●arme which they did, or might do them, they did figure them in terrible shapes. The devil spoke in many of these Images, and made answer to their Priests.  
The Me●icans (besides their Images) did also worship living Idols. They took a prisoner (and sometimes more) whom they thought fit for the sacrifice; they did attire him and trim him up like unto the Idol, to the which they would sacrifice, and they gave him the same name: during the time of this representation, which continued many days, and sometimes whole months, they did worship him, and did him as much honour as to the Idol itself, and in the me●ne space he passed the time merrily, and made good cheer; when he went through the streets, the people came flocking to do him honour, offering divers things unto him; they brought children and sick persons before him, that he might ●lesse them, and cure them; they suffered him to do any thing at his pleasure, only by day he was guarded by ten or twelve men or more, and by night he was shut up in a ●●ge● when the time of this come die was expired, and that he was grown fat, they stew him for the sacrifice, and made a solemn feast among them.   

Of their G●uco●ss, & Temple's.  
THere was in Peru some Guacoes that were common to all the realm, and others that were private to every province. There were three of greatest fame, the one four leagues from Lima, the which was called Pacacama, whose ruins at this day doth show ●he greatness thereof: the devil spoke in this place, and made answers to their Priests, 〈◊〉 most commonly wen● in the night to consult the Oracle, having their backs turned to 〈…〉, the● they bowe●●h●i● 〈◊〉, using a vill●●ous gesture; so much doth the devil 〈◊〉 in filthiness: ●hey 〈◊〉 counsel● of h●m, and he commonly answered with a 〈◊〉 ●nd piercing ●iss●ng, or wit● 〈…〉. The other Guaco was in Cusco, where 〈◊〉 a● had p●t all the gods and goddesses of the nations that were subject unto them, engages of their subjection ●nd fidelity, and every Idol was entertained b● the province, 〈◊〉 a wonderful charge. Among othe●ss, the●e was the image of the 〈◊〉, of massy gold 〈◊〉 with such art towards the E●st, as when the Sun rising did 〈◊〉 upon it, there w●s s●ch a light, by ●eason of ●he reverberation of his beams, as it doubled the light of the day. The third Guaco was in the Island of Titicaca, dedicated to the Sun, for that they said their country having been long without any light, the Sun appeared suddenly in this Island, and gave them day and light, by reason whereof the Ingua buil● a stately Guaco there. But the Mexicans exceeded them of Peru much in greatness of Temples and ceremonies: there was one of the Idol Vitzilpuitzli, with so great a Cloister about it, as eighteen thousand persons assembled there during their feast, to dance; and this Temple was environed with a wall, made of great stones in form of serpents: there were four doors turned to the four parts of the world; and there was a way paved above six miles long, which answered to either of them. They did ascend unto the Temple by a stair of thirty steps, being thirty fathom broad. Betwixt the stair and the Temple there was a little square place which was thirty foot broad, with a row of trees and poles going cross from the one unto the other, whereon did hung the heads of such as were sacrificed. There were within the town eight other temples of the same form, but not so great.   

Of Priests, and religious persons.  
THe priests at Mexico were divided into little, greater, and greatest of all, and these were called Popes. Their perpetual exercise was to cast incense upon their Idols; the which they did at the rising, or setting of the Sun, at noon day, or at midnight. They did sacrifice in their temples every one according to his degree. Besides the priests, there were monasteries of women; in Peru there was at lest one in every province, in which there remained two sorts of women; for some of them were young virgins, and the other women of a ripe age, who were called Mamacones, and these did command and instruct the others. There was in every monastery a governor, who commanded, and had power to make choice of such young virgins as he thought worthy of this place, for their beauty and grace, and these must be under the age of eight years. The virgins having l●●●ned the ceremonies of their superstition, and divers things for the use of life, they were sent u●to the Court, having exceeded the age of fourteen years, whereas some remained to se●ue in the Guacoes with perpetual virginity, and some were reserved for the ordinary s●crifiseses which th●y made of virgins, and for the extraordinary which were made for the occurrents of the Ingua: and another part of them were given in marriage to the Inguas kinsmen and captains, or kept for himself. If any of them were found unchaste, they did 〈◊〉 bury her alive, or put her to death with cruel torments.  
The Mexicans had also a kind of religious women, whose profession continued but a year, ●●d they remained in the Cloister of the Temple, or in certain houses, and they were call●d Th● daughters of penance. They did not exceed the age of thirteen years; they lived shut up with chastity; they swept the Temple, and prepared the meat which was set b●fore the Idol, the which his ministers did eat. They did rise at midnight to pray, and fo● penance they did cut the tops of their ears with certain little knives, and laid the blo●d upon their cheeks. They took it for a sign of unchastiti● in these virgins, if the rat● did gna● any th●●g in their Guacoes, or came into them, and then they made a curious 〈◊〉 ●hich of ●hem had offended. Right against these virgins, there was a Convent of young men of eighteen years of age, whom they called religious men: These carried certain shaven crowns like unto our Monks, wearing the rest of their hair upon their shoulders: they lived in poverty, chastity, and obedience: they did serve the priests in the Guaco. There were also lesser or inferior Monks appointed for manual services, & base offices ●●ey went four or six together, with so great modesty, as they durst not lift up thei● 〈◊〉; especially where there were women: they sought for alms in the ●owne, and if 〈…〉 them not, they went into the fields and took what they could found, neither 〈◊〉 owners hinder them, or offer them any violence; and this liberty was given 〈◊〉, ●●r ●hat they lived poorly and of alms: at midnight they drew blood from ●hei● 〈…〉 this life they continued during the whole year. But let us now speak of the 〈…〉 given incense to the Idol about midnight, they did assemble altogether 〈◊〉, wh●re being set in order they did stab themselves into the log, and rub ●hei● temples with blood, after which they did stick the instruments which they had imploy●●● to this effect in certain bag● of straw, to the end that all men might see them, and know 〈◊〉 sharp penance they did undergo for the people. They did fast four or five days before their Idol feasts. They observed chastity with so great rigour, as many of them did slit their genitories for that they would not break it, and did many other things to make themselves unable. They drunk not any thing that might provoke them to lust.   

Of Sacrifices.  
THey did sacrifice whatsoever they had good or goodly, to their gods; gold, silver, ●orne, wax, and beasts. In Peru they did commonly sacrifice 100 sheep a month, but of divers colour's, and with different ceremonies. They did sacrifice every day unto the sun a sheep tha● was sho●●, the which they burned being in a read shirt. They pulled off their eye browe● and offered them ●o the Sun. But there is nothing so horrible as the sacrifices of men, which they used in Peru, but more at Mexico. In Peru they did sacrifice children from the age of four years unto ten, and especially for the prosperity of the Ingua in his enterprises of war: and upon the day of his coronation they did sacrifice two hundred young children. They did also sacrifice a good number of those virgins which they drew out of monasteries, for the Inguas service. Whe● he was grievously sick, some man of quality, or some sorcerer (where of there were many) telling him that he was past hope of recovery, they did sacrifice his son to Viracoca, or to the Sun, beseeching him that he would rest satisfied therewith.  
But the Mexicans did not sacrifice any but such as they took in war; and to the end they might have a great number, they did not care to subdue Tlascalla, a great town near unto them. The man●●r how they in●rea●ed these wretches was after this sort: First ●hey made them knelt in order before the door of the Temple, than went the Priest rou●● about them with the Idol in his hands, and showing it to every one, he said, Behold thy god▪ afterwards they were led to the place where they should be sacrificed: ●hen there appeared six of 〈◊〉 Priests appointed for this ministery, with so strange a behaviour as they 〈◊〉 rather Devils than men; two of them took the wretched sacrifice by 〈◊〉 feet, and two others by the arms, and a 〈◊〉 hold him by the throat; thus they laid him upon a stone of a pyramidal form, whose point was very sharp; then the sovereign priest did open hi● b●est with a knife, and pulled out his heart, which he did first show unto the sun, offering unto hi● this heat and smoke, than he cast it at the Idols face; then kicking the body, i●●olled down the stairs, whereas they that had taken him in the 〈◊〉 divided him, and made a solemn feast. The neighbour nations did the like in imitation of the Mexicans▪ In some feasts they used another kind of sacrifice: They took a slave (and 〈…〉) whom they ●lead; then some one of them covered himself with his 〈…〉, he went through the town, whereas every man was bound to gi●e 〈◊〉 something▪ ●his comedy, or rather tragedy, continued until the ●kin did 〈◊〉 upon ●is 〈◊〉. Sometimes they did tie a slave unto a wheel of stone, giving him ●●●●rd and unargued: he that would sacrifice him entered the field presently ●fter, with ●he same 〈◊〉 if the slave suffered himself to be vanquished, he was instantly sacrificed, but if he did vanquish, he was set free, and held for a great Captain.   

How the Devil had counterfeited some Sacraments of the Church.  
〈…〉, and ●lement Alexandri●u● teach us, That the Devil to take from us the 〈…〉 of the incarnation of jesu● Christ, saigned many years before, 〈…〉 by ●he 〈◊〉 of Po●tss, as for example, That Bacchus was twice 〈…〉 and another of jupiter▪ to blemish the divinity and humanity of 〈…〉 was borne of Pallas a virgin: that Hercules went 〈…〉 with such like iventions, to the end that men should 〈…〉 of our Lady, nor the descent of Christ into hell; 〈…〉 oth●● di●i●e wor●e●  
At the New world he hath not made use of Poets to this effect, but he himself hath impudently counterfeited the sacraments of the church, especially that of the Eucharist. For at Cusco the religious men of the Sun made certain cakes with the meal of maize and the blood of white sheep, which they did sacrifice that day, giving a morsel to every stranger that came at that time to the court, as a sacrament of confederation and union with the Ingua; and they, receiving this present with great honour, protested that they would neither think nor do any thing against the Sun nor against the Ingua; a●d that this meat should remain in their bowels as a testimony of the fidelity and affection which they had unto the Sun and the Ingua. This ceremony was done twice in the year, in September and December: and they sent of these morsels to all the Guacoes of the province, to have them distributed to the people.  
But that which the Mexicans did was more remarkable. Two days before the feast of Vitzilpuitzli, the religious men of that Temple made an Idol of roasted maize, and the seed of an herb which they call Blite, mingled with honey, of the bigness of that of wood which was in the Temple: afterwards they set it upon a form, and carried it with great speed through the fields, all the people following in procession, and then they returned to the Temple: after which, the virgins came attired in white, with garlands of flowers and certain pieces of past like unto great bones, who delivered them to young men that laid them at the Idols feet: they termed these pieces, the flesh and bones of Vitzilpuitzli: afterwards appeared the priests and ministers of the Temple in their ornaments, with garlands upon their heads, and after them their gods and goddesses; who going about these pieces of past, sang and danced: and by this means they remained consecrated, and were from that time held for the Idols flesh and bones: 
This hathsome resemblance to the opinion of the Papists touching the Eucharist.  afterwards they performed the sacrifices of captives, and then they stripped the Idol, doing with these pieces as with other consecrated pasts, distributing them to the people, who received them with great reverence, saying that they did eat the flesh and bones of their God.  
The devil had also counterfeited Confession, which the Papists make a sacrament: for that in Peru there were Priests appointed to hear confessions, in form of great and less p●nitencierss, and in cases partly common and partly reserved to superiors. They held it a great offence to conceal any sin in confession, and if the Confessor discovered i● not (for the which they used enchantments) they did beaten the penitent grievously upon the shoulders until he had confessed himself. They went to confession in adversity, for th●t they thought their sins were the cause of it, and all the people confessed themselves, whenas the Ingua was sick. The sins which they confessed were all actual, and especially, ●●orther, theft, adultery, want of reverence to the Temples and to festival days, ill speech of the Ingua, and their obedience to him. The Ingua confessed his sins ●ot to any Priest's, but unto the Sun, to the end he should tell them to Viracoca, then going into a running brook, he spoke these words: I have confessed my sins unto the Sun, thou river ●●●ie them into the sea where they may remain for ever drowned.  
They 〈◊〉 ●●so sergeant the mystery of the holy Trinity, for that they did worship three Images of the Sun, naming one Sun the Father, another the Son, and the ●●●d the Brother. And in like manner they had three statues of Chuchille, which was ●he ●od of Thunder, and they gave them the same names of Father, Son, and Brother.  
T●e people of Saint Croix du Mont have some causes which hinder marriage, and dis●●l●● that which is contracted, and some wherein they cannot be separated although i●●e unlawful.   

Of the dispositions of the New World to receive the Gospel.  
GOd disposed the people of New Spain, Peru, and other countries, to so strange 〈◊〉 by divers means: First, as to make easy the preaching of the Gospel, he 〈◊〉 the world under the Emperor Augustus, so he ordained that the Gospel should 〈…〉 other world, when as the Empires of the Ingua at Peru, and the Mexicans 〈…〉 we●e come unto their height. And to show how much the large bounds of an Empire serves for the advancement of the Gospel, I say first of all, that under a great Monarch we do commonly see peace and rest to flourish, and peace doth open the Ports of realms, and the gates of towns for the commerce and communication of people, and by consequence for the propagation of the word of God. Peace makes learning, virtue, civility, policy, good manners, and arts to flourish, fit things to make a man more mild, and the Empire of one alone more capable to maintain this peace: Whereas many Princes breed disunion, from whence grows war, shedding of blood, with the ruin of towns and people, and of virtue, faith, and religion. The greatness of an Empire ●ring● this good with it, for the preaching of the Gospel, for that one language is common to many people, and is far dispersed; the Conqueror's language extending itself with his dominion.  
At the New World the Mexican tongue extended itself for the space of one thousand leagues and that of Cusco had no less bounds: for the kings of Mexico and Peru h●● no less care to extend their language, than their Empires; and although they used i● these two realms many languages, and much different among themselves, yet that of Mexico is eloquent and rich, and common to all New Spain, and that of Cusco to Pe●● as among us the Latin, and among the Turks, the Sclavonian in Europe, and the Arabian in Asia: so as it is sufficient for them that preach the word of God to learn one language, to pass through a country three thousand miles long, whereas otherwise they should have need of fifteen or twenty languages. Besides the foresaid two languages, there are some others which are well understood in many countries, as the Gorgotoque, and the Chanoise; but there is none more universal than the Varayque: this is spoken in all Paraguay and Brasil; the Icatins understand it, and many other people, almost from the straight of Magellan unto saint Maria.  
The third benefit which doth grow thereby, is that the greatness of the Empire draws into one place people that are far scattered & dispersed, for you must understand that in New Spain and Peru, the people before they were subdued by them of Mexico and Cusco, lived like beasts, without commander, without law, and without community; every man planted himself where he thought best, and lived there with his family: so they of Florida, some of the Chichimeques, they of Brasil, and the Varays live at this day: they do often change their dwellings, and they remain one day in one place, and the next in another: wherefore if they be not first drawn to live together, and to stay their dwellings, they cannot be instructed in the word of God. The kings of Mexico and Cusco did free the preachers of God's word of this trouble, for to the end they might the more easily rule the people which they had conquered, they would have them live together, and to this end they built towns and villages.  
Finally, the greatness of an Estate and rule makes the people more civil, and courts do quicken their wits, and ripen their judgements, and the diversity of conversation makes a man more politic and wise. The people of P●ru in the beginning lived in the mountains naked, rude, and brutish, eating that which the earth brought forth, yea and man's flesh. Under the Empire of the Ingua, they did learn diver● arts, with civility: they did till and manure the ground, they did sow and reap their corn and roots: they had care of mines of gold, silver, and brass: they did feed great troops of catttell, they did shear them, and made coverlets and cloth of the wool, wherewith they did not only co●●r, but also adorn themselves: and besides this, they did build palaces and houses of ●●●ortance, and also Temples. They had some form of justice and reason, and some 〈◊〉 of laws and ordinances, but otherwise always full of brutishness, cruelty, confusion 〈◊〉 disorder: under a great Monarch, the people grow civil, and practise humanity, th● Superiors learn to govern, and the subjects to obey and to put in execution that which commanded. Wherefore civilly being brought into the Estates of great Princes at America, did serve much to bring in the Gospel, for that it disposed the people to mildness, which is required in the life of a Christian, and without doubt, ex●●tience doth plainly show us the truth thereof, for that the word of God hath more 〈◊〉 in one day in New Spain and Peru, than it hath done in many years at Brasil, Florida, Chichimeca, the Andes, and other countries, where it hath not found the like dispositions: For although they were capable of Christian doctrine, yet would it be difficult to maintain them long in good estate, by reason of their perpetual rolling up and down, and the uncertainty of their abode. It is certain that the people of Brasil do 〈◊〉 continued long in the faith, if they be not near unto the Portugals: for being far 〈…〉, they return suddenly to their vomit, either by a natural inclination, or by the ●●●●●●sation of others. And for this cause the religious men which have this charge, do ●●●●commonly think them fit for baptism, unless it be in some great sickness, or when they are very old; for that then the passions which strive in them are more quiet, by reason of the weakness of nature, and do less darken reason and understanding; and besides they keep them from all dangerous company. The like may be said of the Chichimecans, and such like nations.   

Of some other dispositions.  
THe foresaid reasons made easy the conversion of America, as it were outwardly; but let us speak of more lively and important dispositions.  
The first was the yoke of kings, and the insupportable burden of the people: For the Ingua of Peru, and the king of Mexico did so charge their subjects, as they seemed rather beasts than men; and these princes would not be honoured like men, but as Gods. We may well guess at their burdens by that which follows. The new king did not inherit any of his predecessors goods or treasure, but was forced to make a new house, and to furnish himself with gold, silver, clotheses, and such like, without employing the means of the deceased, which were all appointed for the entertainment of the Guacoe, chapel, and house of the king deceased, who was presently put among the number of the gods. They erected statues unto him, and ordained sacrifices, and his house was employed from generation to generation in ceremonies, and other things invented to his honour: so as the subjects were continually tro●●led to gather up gold, and to dig in the mines, to make cloth, and to heap up treasure, being in no sort eased by that which had been formerly gathered together.  
Besides, the people of Peru, under the Inguas, did sometimes build Tambes, and sometimes they made mountains even, and they filled up valleys to make ways. Those Tambes were certain storehouses made in divers parts of the realm, where they put their m●●●●tion for war, and victuals for the Inguas Court. Among other ways there were two made with the hand, which extended above one thousand five hundred miles in length; the one went by the mountain, and the other by the plain. We may judge of the toil of these ways by the roughness of rocks, and the depth of the sand in the plains, and yet they must vanquish these difficulties, with many others, without the use of y●on instruments, and without carts or any beasts of burden, only with the force of ●●eir arms. It is much more easy to imagine what a toil it was to cut great rocks, to transport them from one place unto another, to lodge them and to join them together, without any help of iron, than to express it in words. It was yet a more insupportable thing for them of Peru, to give their children to be sacrificed, for the recovery and fo●●he success of the Inguas enterprises, and to be forced to bury themselves with their deceased king, and the Caciques. When as Guaynacapa died, he had a thousand person● of his household slain and buried with him, to serve him in the other world. The same ●ing having received some displeasure of a certain people which inhabit betwixt Quito and Pasto, caused twenty thousand to be slain, and to be thrown into a lake, w●ich fo● this cause was called Ajaquarcoca, that is to say, a sea of blood.  
The reason which moved them of Peru to bury their families and riches with them, 〈◊〉 (●● they say) for that in their opinions they did sometimes see them that were dead ●o walk in those places which they had most loved, having the same apparel they had 〈◊〉 with them, and being accompanied with their families: by reason whereof 〈◊〉 themselves that in the other life they had need of service, gold, silver, and 〈…〉 furnished them the best they could.  
The yoke of the kings of New Spain was nothing more easy. Motezuma, who was the last, ordained, That none of the common people should look him in the face upon pain of death. When he went any journey, both he and his Barons were carried upon a scaffold at pleasure, and the rest went here and there: He had divers palaces, some for pleasure, others for mourning and affairs, according to occurrents: he had a great house with divers par●itionss, full of beasts, fishes, and fowls of all-sorts, and for sea fish he had pools of salt water, and for the others little lakes of fresh waters, with inestimable service: so as the greatest part of his estate was employed for his pleasures. For this reason those people were so ready to receive the law of jesus Christ, hoping to have some case, and they that were most oppressed, much more than the rest.  
What shall we say now of the insupportable yoke of the Devil? We have formerly discoursed of the religion of Mexico, and of the sacrifices which they made of men, whom they flew with so great cruelty, as it seemed the Devil did not so much seek the death of these poor wretches, as their torments in death: but I will not bear to speak of one thing which is remarkable. The Idol Priests when as they saw a fit occasion, went unto the king and princes, telling them their gods died for hunger, and that they should remember them: then the Princes sent Ambassadors one unto another, and gave advice of the necessity wherein their gods were; inviting them for this cause to make levies of men to go to battle, to the end they might have wherewithal to feed their Idols. So they marched in order to the place appointed, and joined battle: having no other design but to take as many prisoners as they could, to be sacrificed. In Mexico the king could not be crowned bef●re he had made some enterprise, and brought back a great number of sacrifices. The Mexicans were so oppressed by the cruelty of their Devils, and the multitude of sacrifices which they desired, as they could no more endure it, yet knew they not how to avoid it, if the light of the law of jesus Christ (full of mildness) had not been offered unto them: the which they received with great willingness and joy. They of Mechovacan hearing of the same of the Gos●ell, sent Ambassadors presently to Fernand Cortes, who had some few days before made himself master of Mexico, entreating him to sand them his Law, and masters to expound it, for that they were resolved to quit their own, as insupportable and wicked. joseph Acosta reports, That the Spaniards on a time standing to behold the tragedy of those cruel sacrifices, a young man whose heart they had pulled out, being cast down the stairs of the Temple, said unto the Spaniards, My masters they have slain me: the which bred a great horror and compassion in them.   

Of some dispositions proceeding from the malice of the Devil.  
THe Devil, maugre himself, did in some sort dispose these Infidel's to the Faith, for that the wisdom of God is so high and profound, as it makes use of evil for good, and turns unto his own glory; the means wherewith the Devil seeks to darken his holy name. The greatest mysteries of the Christian faith, are those of the Trinity, the Incarnation, and the Eucharist, the which do surpass all light of reason, all human discourse, yea, and the intelligence of Angels. But the Devil, seeking by his pride herein to cross the majesty of God, disposed the New world to the truth by his deceits. The hardest and most austere points of Christian discipline to the sense of man, are, Confession of sins, and Repentance: for that the Devil exacted of these miserable wretches, greater austerities, than jesus Christ enjoins to penitent sinners: the which is not strange, for that the Devil is the tormentor of mankind, and jesus Christ the physician, yea, the father. The kings of New Spain, when as they took the crown and possession of the realm, did sacrifice the blood which they drew with great pain, from their arms and ears, to their Idols: for the Devil sells nothing but for the price of blood. He did also enure those poor people to poverty, chastity, obedience, and religion, as we have formerly showed: which made that the councils of the Gospel did not seem altogether strange unto them.   

Of some predictions of the future preaching of the Faith.  
GOd meaning to dispose mankind for the coming of jesus Christ, not only gave prophets unto the jews, but also Sybilles' to the Gentiles; who did so plainly foretell the coming of the eternal Word into the world, his life, and death, as their works did not seem predictions of future things, but narrations of some events past: by reason whereof, Christians were forbidden (during the persecutions) to read Sibyl's verses: our Saviour hath not left the New world without the like help. There was in the Island of Hispaniola a king, whose name was Guarionex, who demanded of one of his Chemes (for so they called their Idols) what should happen unto his people after his death; and the Cheme answered, That within few years there should come into that Island men which should be appareled, and wear long beards, who should destroy the Idols, with the ancient religion of the country, and all their ceremonies.  
In the country which confines with the river of Plata a little before the coming of the Spaniards, there was one Oriquara, much esteemed among those nations for his good life, who inspired (as it is likely) by the holy spirit, ran up and down those countries, foretelling the coming of certain men, who should teach a new religion, exhorting every man to receive it, and to leave the plurality of wives: and to the end that this his doctrine should be the better imprinted in their minds, he put it into certain verses, which they sing at this day.  
In Acuzamilan Island ne●re unto jucatan, they found a cross some two fathoms high, to the which they of the country had recourse, as to a celestial and divine thing, especially in the time of great drought, to obtain rain for that which they had sown.  
In Mechovacan there was a priest of great authority and reputation among those people, who foretold them, that within a short time the Truth should be revealed unto them: he lead a Christian life (as some reported that had known him, and especially one that had served him) for he did celebrated the Nativity of the resurrection of jesus Christ, and to perform it with more devotion, he withdrew himself some days before from all affairs. With these and such like works, he had purchased unto himself so great a reputation of holiness, and doctrine, as his words were held for Oracles: so as many which had conversed with him, having heard the preachers of the Gospel, said that in their opinions they did not hear any new thing. And they were no sooner advertised of the coming and progress of Fernand Cortes in New Spain, but the king of Mechovacan went unto him with all the flower of his realm, and made himself vassal to the Emperor: he required to be baptized, and obtained from Cortes men to instruct his people in the Christian faith.  
Moreover all the people of Peru and New Spain, did firmly believe the immortality of the soul, and the pains of the wicked, and the reward of the good. Some among them (namely them of Chicora) held, That after death the souls did purge themselves in certain cold places, and past afterwards into pleasing countries, where they did lead a happy and a contented life. They had knowledge (but very obscure, and full of a thousand fables and dreams) of the general Deluge, and of the Resurrection of the dead, by reason whereof in Peru, whenas the Spaniards seeking the treasures which were buried with their Princes, and destroying the tombs, scattered the bones of the dead; they of the country were much grieved, and entreated them not to offer so great an outrage to the souls of their ancestors, for that they believed, that in dispersing these bones they should ●inder their resurrection.   

Of divers prodigies, and subjects, which made the entry of the Gospel easy.  
THe Spaniards entered Peru and New Spain with good means to extend, both their Estate, & the kingdom of God: for in New Spain the people of Tlascalla (which was the● a mighty town and well peopled) were at war with the Mexicans; and to fortify themselves, they entered into league with Fernand Cortes, who with the aid of the Tlascallans prevailed in his enterprise, and subdued the realm of Mexico, both to jesus Christ and to the Emperor, whose captain he was. But they had seen strange prodigies and accidents, which made way for the passage of the Gospel, with the wonderful amazement of king Motezuma. In the town of Cholola they did worship a famous Idol, which they called Quezalcoail: he told them plainly that there came strangers to conquer and possess these realms. At Tescusco their gods foretold, that many calamities did hung over the head of Motezama, and all the Mexican Empire; the Magicians foretold the same: whereat Motezuma was in such a rage, as he caused them to be put in prison; and for that they escaped easily and fled away, he slew their wives and children, his fury was so great. Then bending all his cogitations how to pacify the wrath of his gods, he commanded that they should bring a goodly great stone into the city, whereon to make his sacrifices: but notwithstanding that there were many assembled to that end, and that they did their best endeavours, yet could they not move it; and whilst they laboured about it, they heard a voice which seemed to come out of the stone, and said unto them, That they laboured in vain, for it was impossible to remove it: which being understood, Motezuma commanded that they should sacrifice where the stone had stayed: they say that at that time there came forth a voice to this purpose; Have I not told you that you laboured in vain? and to the end you may be the better assured, I will suffer myself to be drawn some little space, then will I stay again, and you shall not move me: the which happened, for it fell in the end into a channel of water, and was afterwards found in his first place.  
There did also appear in the firmament a great flame like unto a Pyramid, which they saw about midnight, then at the Sun rising, and at noonday; and this spectacle continued a year. They did see in the day time running from the East unto the West, a Comet, like unto a very long tail of a beast with three heads: the Temple burned, and there was no light seen neither within nor without, nor any thunder heard, nor any lightning seen in the air, and although that multitudes of men ran to quench this fire, yet could they not do it: the fire did seem to come out of the very walls, and it increased by casting on water, until all was consumed. The lake began suddenly without any apparent cause to boil with such violence, as the near buildings fell to the ground. There were lamentable voices heard, as of a woman in labour and in great extremity; which voice spoke these words, Alas my children, the time of your ruin is come, whether shall I lead you that you perish not quite? There were divers monsters seen with two heads, which being carried before the king vanished away. The fishers of the lake took a bird in bigness and colour like unto a Crane, but of a form which had never been seen, the which they presented unto the king, who was much amazed.  
This beast had upon the top of the head a certain crest like unto a looking glass: which Motezuma beholding, he saw the firmament and stars at noon day, whereat he was much astonished; then viewing it again, he saw armed men come from the East, who fought furiously, and made a strange slaughter of those that encountered them: whereat being much troubled, he assembled his Divines, who were also much distracted and could give him no reason for it, whereupon the bird vanished away. At the same time there came unto Motezuma a peasant who was generally held to be an honest true dealing man, who said unto him, that as he was sowing his field, an Eagle of extraordinary greatness took him up suddenly and did him no harm, but carried him into a cave, where he heard one say: Most mighty Lord I have brought thee him, whom thou commaundedst me; then without sight of any man ●e heard a voice which directed itself unto him with these words, Dost thou know that man which lies upon the ground? and then looking down he saw a man in a sound sleep having royal habiliments, flowers, and a perfume which burned by him, according to the manner of the country: The peasant taking courage, answered, Mighty Lord, this seems to be our great king Motez●ma: Thou sayest true (replied one) behold how sound he sleeps, and yet there are strange accidents and great miseries which hung over his head; it is now time that he receive punishment for so many offences which he hath committed against God; take this coal of perfume which burns in his hand, and set it to his nose, and thou shalt see that he hath no feeling: and for that the Peasant durst not well approach, the voice said again unto him, Fear not any thing, for I am much greater than he, and will keep thee from harm: then resuming courage, he took the coal and set it to Motezumas nose, who had no feeling: Now, said the voice, for that thou seest how sound he sleeps, go and awake him, and report to him all that hath past. And at the same instant, the Eagle took the peasant and raising him up into the air, he carried him to the place where he first took him.  
Besides these things, you must understand, the Mexicans had an opinion that in former times a certain great Prince, whom they called Topilchin, had abandoned them, and that he should return again to comfort the●. The news of the coming of Cortes upon the Eastern coast of New Spain, being come unto them, they did all believe that their great friend and lord Topilchin was returned according to his promise: They therefore sent five Ambassadors unto Cortes, who were men of quality, with many rich presents: th●se men being come to the Spaniards, told them, That they knew well that their lord Topilchin was returned with them, and that his servant Motezuma had sent them to visit him, and to kiss his hands. Cortes making use of this good occasion, feigned himself to be Topilchin, and accepted the presents and compliment: He could not wish a fit means and opportunity to bring the Gospel and the name of Christ into this realm. But it seems that God would not have the truth of his Gospel brought in by any counterseiting, and that the sins of these people, especially the Idolatry, the cruelty of sacrifices, and the pride of Motezuma, opposed themselves to so peaceable a manner of change in these estates: hence grew so many revolts, bloody battles, ruin of towns, and loss of men of either side.  
The Spaniards in like manner entered Peru with as favourable an occasion. Gu●ynacapa, Ingua of Peru, had two sons, Guacar, and Attahualpa (whom others call Attabalipa) of which Guacar or Guascar was the lawful successor to his father, and as such took possession of the realm: but his brother made war against him, and took him: whereat his subjects being wonderfully discontent, and having not power sufficient to deliver him, they made (according as they had been accustomed in necessities) a great and solemn sacrifice to Viracoca, beseeching him, that seeing they were not able to free the Ingua their lord, he would sand men from heaven to set him at liberty. Living thus in great hope, they heard news, That certain strangers being come by sea into Peru, had put Attabalipa to rout at Cassimalca, and had taken him prisoner: so as imagining that these men (this was Francis Pizarro and his companions) were come thither, by reason of the great sacrifice which they had made to Viracoca, they called them Viracoques; a name which remains unto the Spaniard to this day, as to men descended from heaven, and sent by God. Wherefore, as God opened a passage for the Spaniards at New Spain, by the discord of the king of Mexico, and the commonweal of Tlascalla, and by so many prodigies, as happened during the reign of Motezuma: so he made them a way into Peru by the discord which was betwixt the sons of Guaynacapa, and by the success of their sacrifice; by reason whereof the Spaniards were held the children of God, and men descended from heaven.   

Of the Ordinance or Decree of Pope Alexander the sixt.  
Alexander the sixt hearing of the discovery of so many new lands, and seeing that the Spaniards made show to have a will to extend religion, as much as their estate; he first of all bound the kings of Spain and Portugal, to have a special care to the conversion of those nations; and afterwards, to encourage them all he could to so good and generous a work, and to take away all occasion of debate betwixt these two kings, he divided the enterprises of these two nations, by that famous line of partition: and to prevent all kinds of pretensions of other princes, who had not been engaged in the charge nor pain, he forbade them all in general to enter within the said bounds. But Alexander had no more authority to dispose of the New world, nor to give unto them the kingdoms which had neither been discovered nor conquered, than his successors have had sense to a●rogate unto themselves power to depose lawful kings and princes from their crowns and estates.   

What made the conversion of the Indians easy.  
THere was never country whereas the Gospel did sooner flourish than at the New world, for that whole countries were converted, and one Friar of the order of Saint Francis baptized in many years about fourteen hundred thousand in New Spain: and some writ, That there were ten millions christened in five or six years, others say, but eight. The soldiers did help much in this sudden progtesse of the faith; for that although there be none more unfit to bring in piety and religion than soldiers, and that in the ●oyse of arms the voice of civil laws is not heard, and much less of the gospel, (which is full of mildness) and holiness, yet the liberty and nsolencie of soldiers did much assist the preachers for the ruining of the Idols and Temples in New Spain, and Peru. Our nature is such, as it cannot subsist without religion, nor without a place where to exercise it; so as if she hath no knowledge of the true religion, she abandons herself to superstitions; and if she wants holy places made with the hand, she seeks God upon mountains, or in caves. The Indians being wonderfully given to the adoration of their gods, both by nature and custom, remaining now without Idols, and without Guacoes, for that the fury of soldiers and the violence of war had broken down and ruined all; they went easily to Churches, and did accommodate themselves to the religion whereunto they were invited by Christian preachers, and the rather for that it was much more mild than their old Idolatry: for as a stream finding the ordinary passage stopped, turns easily his course to that place whereas they have made a new channel; so man not able to perform his accustomed voyage, makes one like to it, or that approacheth near: and the Indians having no more their Idols, nor their accustomed places of devotion, did easily change the way of their loss to that of health, idolatry to piety, and the bondage of Satan to the service of God. Some politicians dispute, Wither he that makes new conquests should make such changes suddenly, as the Spaniards did at Peru and Mexico? or, Wither he should do it by degrees, like unto the Roman Emperors? But this question may be easily resolved, for that whereas a conquest is made with a great advantage of fortune, by means whereof they surmount all difficulties, in that case they may take away all lets at one instant; or else when they have not forces sufficient, and whereas there wants power, they must use art, and win that by opportunity and time which they could not effect by force. The Turk, for that he executes his enterprises with great advantage, having once obtained a victory, and made himself master of a town or realm, he suddenly gives it what form he pleaseth, and roots out the princes and men that are great either by prerogative of blood, or by greatness of authority; he deprives the people both of goods and liberty, converts towns into villages, palaces into cottages, Churches into Mosques or stables; and to be short, he makes himself absolute master of their goods and persons. But Christian princes, for that they do not execute their enterprises with so great forces, follow another course, which requires more time and policy. But returning from whence we parted, the Indians having neither Idols nor temples whereunto they should fly in their necessities, according to their custom, they came easily to the Christian churches which they had before their eyes, and without any great difficulty embraced the faith which was preached unto them. The Guacoes of Peru we●er●ined by the fury of the soldiers, and rage of wars; and the most famous of these Gua●●●● were those of Pacacama, four leagues from the town of Kings, whereas the devil ma●● answer to that which was demanded of him. There was another at Cusco, whereas they saw (as in a Pantheon) all the gods of the provinces and nations conquered by the Inguas, as hostages of their fidelity: There was in the same town above four hundred other Gua●●●●. But in New Spain, the ruin of Idols, and of their houses, proceeded not so much from the custom of war (whose property is to waste and destroy) as from the wisdom and zeal of Fernand Cortes which conquered it, who commanded his Captains and Lieutenants to ruin all the Idols and Temples: so as the Indians not able to go where they had been accustomed to do evil, were easily drawn to those places where they might do good.   

¶ Of hindrances in the conversion of the Indians.  
Having showed the means whereby our Lord advanced the faith and preaching of his word in America, it is fit to speak something of that which was opposite to this advancement. One thing which did much hinder this spiritual plantation at the New World, was the bad opinion which they had in the beginning of the capacity of those people, for that partly, for their poverty they were contemned, and partly for their rudeness of behaviour they were ranked with beasts of burden, especially by the soldiers, who were accustomed to do all things with violence, and to make use of all pretextes (be they never so vain, weak, and impertinent) yea there were some amongst them which had no desire to see the Indians converted, lest they should be bound to entreat them more mildly after they had received baptism. But the greatest let of their conversion proceeded from the Spaniards themselves, first from their Priests and Friars, who did not seek to win them by doctrine and good example, as Christ and his Apostles had taught them, being dissolute themselves in their lives and conversation, and given to all vices and disorders: neither did they instruct them in the faith, or take knowledge of their lives, but forced them to be baptized, as some of their own orders and profession have written, to their shame and reproach: whose manner of preaching was to sand forth a proclamation enjoining all men upon pain of confiscation of life, lands, liberty, goods and all, to acknowledge God, the Pope, and the King of Spain, of whom they had never heard. These with many other detestable courses of churchmen, made a Franciscan Friar to exclaim openly, That there was neither Priest, Monk, nor Bishop good at the Indies, whose ends were only gain. The second let was, by reason of the avarice of commanders, and cruelty of the soldiers, which were most horrible and inhuman, whereof many of their own nation have written large treatises: these courses caused the Indians to conceive an implacable hatred against the faith, being incensed at the Spaniards cruelties. It seemed that this manner of proceeding against these miserable wretches was justifiable, by reason of the detestable vices and sins wherein they were plunged, especially for their Sodomy, Idolatry, and eating of men: and the matter proceeded so far, as for the said three vices the Caribes or Cannibals were given for slaves; and this edict was extended (by the advice of friar Thomas of Ortis and some others) to all the rest, in the time of the Emperor Charles the fift in the year 1525, by reason whereof the insolent soldiers (who naturally have no measure) seeing themselves favoured by the covetousness of their Superiors, and counseled therein by religious persons, grew more outrageous, and burst forth like a furious torrent which swells with a sudden rain and snow. Covetousness is by nature unreasonable and cruel, neither human, nor divine laws can restrain it, not not the fear of death, nor of Hell itself: What shall she then do to soldiers, to whose discretion they have abandoned a feeble multitude? and what shall they do in those places whereas being far from their Prince, they see themselves masters of all things? To conclude, the country was in a manner unpeopled by the barbarous and butcherly cruelty of the Spaniards, and by the servile works whereunto they forced them, for many poor Indians perished in the mines of C●bao, in the fishing ●●r pearl at Cubaqua, and Tiraquei, and in the seeking of Emeralds at Saint Martha, and in other works of the country. Many found these things unworthy, and it was a great burden of conscience to some men of understanding, so as some did writ to the Emperor Charles touching this subject, and others being come to court, did treat with him and his council of the Indies.  
The Emperor who was both judicious and religious, hearing of these inconveniences and disorders in his Estates, and how badly they entreated them of the country, desiring to remedy it, and to discharge his conscience, he propounded the matter in counsel, where there assisted men that were excellent in piety and doctrine; by whose adulce he decreed in the year 1543, that no man should presume to employ any Indians in their mines, to fish for pearl, nor to bear any burdens, but in cases of necessity, and then they should pay them for their pains: that the tributes which the Indians were to pay unto Spaniards should be taxed, and that all they of the country which should be freed by the death of Spaniards, who were then their Masters, should remain immediately subject to the crown of Spain, and that neither Bishops, convents, nor Hospitals should have any Vassals in America: with these ordinances and some others, the business was reduced unto those terms, as the Spaniards were all without Vassals, which was the cause of a war which followed, and of an open rebellion, whereof Pizarro was the head, in which the rebels flew Blasco Nugnez de Vela, Viceroy of Peru: to pacify these disorders, the Emperor sent the Licentiat Gasca to Peru, a man very circumspect and wise, who furmounted force by his dexterity, and fury by policy; he defeated the rebels in battle, and pacified all things by the taking and death of Pizarro: since which time, matters of religion and government have been better managed.   

¶ Of the diversity of barbarous people, and of the manner of preaching the Gospel.  
WRiters give the name of barbarous to people whose manners stray from reason, and from the common kind of living; if this definition were true, the name of barbarous (touching the second part) would agreed more sitly to the Grecians and Latins, than to other nations: for if we shall call that manner of living common which most men lead, and if we shall call them barbarous which stray from it, seeing that the Grecians and Latins have lived otherwise than the rest, they should rather be termed barbarous: Let us therefore say that they are to be held barbarous, whose manners and customs stray extraordinarily from perfect reason; which happens either by fierceness of courage, by ignorance, or by rudeness of manners: Fierceness is a kind of brutishness which hath four degrees: the first, is of them that have not any knowledge of Divinity, or religion; and these are of many sorts, for that some live without any God, and yet give themselves to enchantments and sorceries; and it is a strange thing, that they, which neither know a God in heaven, nor upon earth, yet submit themselves to sorcerers and enchanters: wherein they are like unto certain horses, which being terrible by nature, not fearing either iron or fire, will yet be resty, and start at the noise of a cart or some such like thing: such are the Chichimeques, and they of Brasil: the second sort▪ is of those which have some form of religion, or rather superstition, but without any ground or probability, being more like to fables and dreams than to discourses of reason: such were the people of Hispaniola, and such are at this day the inhabitants of the Islands of Solomon: the third, is of those which worship divers gods and idols, and yet do not acknowledge one Sovereign Prince and Creator: the fourth, is of those which hold the Creator of the world to be the Sovereign, but not the only God, as they of Cusco: They of the first and second kind have no form of ceremonies, or else they have them without solemnity: they of the third and fourth have them lawful, firm and solemn, as the Mexicans, and they of Cusco.  
The second degree of brutishness consists in feeding, and this is after two sorts: some are brutish, for that they sow not, nor have any care of tillage, but eat, like beasts, that wh●ch the earth doth produce of itself. And for that our complexion is according unto ou● breeding, it follows of necessity, that a savage breeding will have a savage nature and disposition▪ Others are brutish, for that they feed upon man's flesh, either indifferently or only of their enemies taken in war, as they of Popayan and of Mexico: In the country of Popayan they did plant before their houses the heads of such as they had ●●uoured upon great canes, for a show of their cruelty and horrible brutishness: in ●●●er places having eaten their enemies, they did fill their skins with ashes, and did hung them on their walls: they did trim their faces with wax, putting a lance or an arrow in their hands, which was a horrible spectacle, and this was their tapistry. In some places they persuaded themselves that they would cha●e the Spaniards out of the country through ●unger; but victuals not only failing the Spaniards, but themselves by this neglec●●he eating of man's flesh hath been brought in of late years among them of Ara●●●▪ where it had never been. But there is nothing more prodigious than that of ●he valley of Not, upon the confines of Popayan: The Caciques of those places went in to the enemy's country to hunt for women, bringing away as many as they could; they kept them only to have children, whom they devoured being twelve or thirteen years old. In the valley of Guaca they married their prisoners to their kinswomen, 〈◊〉 the end they might have children to eat, and afterwards they did eat their slaves when they were no more able to engender.  
The third degree of brutishness consists in nakedness, which is of many kinds. For some having no feeling of honesty (which was the first reason which moved Adam to cover himself) do not hide their privy parts; others cover them in some sort, but for the ●est they go naked; others are clothed only from the navel unto the knees. Some although they show their nakedness in all or in part (for that they use not any garmenes) yet they paint their bodies of divers colours to make themselves fair or terrible, and they carry stones of little or no value fastened to their lips, nose, and ears, as they of Brasil do. Some are altogether covered, but with the skins of wild beasts or of Seals; the which notwithstanding doth not argue so much brutishness as rudeness of the people.  
The fourth sort consists in the habitation, which is divers. The most barbarous have no other dwelling but in caves or hollow trees, and in that which defends them from the wind, cold, and rain, without any industry. They pass the day whereas they found meat, and sleep whereas night surpriseth them. They have a certain kind of policy; for having no certain abode touching the place, yet have they it settled concerning the form; so live the Tartarians upon their chariots covered with felt, and the Arabians in their Adivares: the first attain to the perfection of policy, who not only have certain abodes touching the form, but also for the place; and the others live in towns, villages, or houses dispersed. Betwixt these three kinds of habitation, there is this difference, that the first seek their food whereas necessity and occasion doth lead them; the second lead camels with them, or some other kind of beast, of whom their lives depend, who change their abode according to the commodity of pastures which they seek; the last being stayed touching their abode in one place, draw all their victuals and necessary commodities thither. Among the Arabians, some live in the open field in their Adivares, and these retain the name of Arabians: the others live in towns, and they are called Moors. In like manner some Tartarians live in fields, and others in towns, as they of Zaquetay; and yet both the Arabians and Tartarians which camp after this manner, hold themselves more noble than the rest. The fift sort of brutishness consists in government. For some being altogether barbarous, live without any laws or commander, either in peace or wa●re; some others have neither laws nor commanders in time of peace, but only in occasions of war: others have in peace and war, and these govern themselves in form of a commonweal, as Tlascalla, and Chiololla; or by way of a monarchy, which comes by election, as it did in New Spain; or by succession, as in Peru: They are barbarous which govern themselves according to the two first sorts. And undoubtedly we must confess that at the New world the first inhabitants were in the beginning without any form of government, but by little and little some men more capable than the rest, persuaded their countrymen to live together, and to build themselves lodgings, first of the bows of trees, then of great wood, and in the end of earth and stone. From this mutual communication grew laws, & arts, which are the ornaments of man's life. Touching nourishment, the first art was breeding of cattle, the which was much used and esteemed in Peru, whereas they made great account of the increase of their troops: They did not sacrifice any female beasts, neither did they 〈◊〉 ●hem, or take them in their hunting: and if they found any cattle that were scabbed ●r sick, they buried them quick, lest they should infect the rest. The art of spinning, weaving, and making of cloth to cloth and adorn themselves withal, was as it were a branch springing from the art of governing their troops. Tillage came afterwards, and first that which hath care of corn, than they busied themselves about fruit and trees. In the end followed architecture and the building of houses, first of wood, then of earth, and last of all, of stone and marble, whereof they of Cu●co and Mexico had knowledge, but the last more than the first: and although both the one and the other made exc●llent buildings both for greatness and state, yet could they not make any vaults; notwithstanding they had wit and art sufficient to make admirable bridges, of a very we●●e substance, to pass over great and deep rivers, for they make them of a certain kind of reed, which they call Totora, and also of straw, the which (for that it is light) ●●●●es not: they c●st upon these bridges much reed and such like matter, and fastening them ●o either side of the river, both men and cattle pass over safely. There is one of these bridges, being three hundred foot long, upon the channel of the Lake of Cucuy●●, which is without bottom. Traffic is a companion to husbandry, by means whereof we do interchange our commodities one with another: the greatest traffic which they have discovered at the New world hath been that of Salt, Cacao, and Cinnamon, other arts and industries sprung up afterwards by degrees. The last are learning and sciences, especially speculative, as the first-fruits o● peace, safety, idleness, and abundance: and therefore human sciences flourish in peaceable towns, and among men which live at their ease; and the speculative are refined in religious houses and cloisters: for these require attention, and are nothing pleasing nor popular, as eloquence, poetry, and such like.  
Hereby we may comprehend that barbarousness carries with it an incapacity of celestial things, for two reasons, that is to say, by reason of brutishness, and stupidity: The first reigned in Chichimeque, Brasil, and among the Caribes; and the latter in the Islands of Barlovent and Solomon, in the valleys of Peru and other places: wherefore religion is not to be governed after one manner in all places. They must proceed with the Cannibals and others which devour man's flesh indifferently, as with the enemies of mankind, or madmen; they must first make them capable of reason and humanity, and then instruct them in virtue, and the Christian faith. Neither is it impertinent to use force and arms, to the end that they might know that they are men, and then teach them the Gospel. Aristotle saith, That such men should be taken as beasts, and tamed by force. The neighbours to these people are those which abstain from man's flesh, but yet go naked without any shame, for that there is not any thing that doth more distinguish a man from a beast than shamefastness, for the which Adam covered himself, first with fig leaves, and then clothed himself with skins. Yet it is not lawful to use violence and the sword to these men; but rather a restraint, neither must they teach them Christian doctrine, before they learn bashfulness and honesty. Others have no need of force or violence to retire them from barbarism, but rather conduct and direction; for that they are not wild and brutish like unto Wolves and Tigers, but simple and dull like unto sheep, and beasts of burden, and these have more need of threats, ●han of blows, and of fear, than of force, for that fawn and flatteries prevail little with them. But for that neither the one nor the other persever in the faith once received under their natural prince, and for that both Princes and subjects return cas●ly 〈◊〉 idolatry; it is needful that they be under the government of a Christian Prince, which may have a care to maintain both the people and their lords in their duties and in the faith: for that as God giving the form to natural things, doth presently furnish them with those things which shall follow; so giving unto his deputies and ministers the precept to teach the truth to every creature, he doth also give them the authority to use fit means to make easy the conversion and preservation of such as are converted. And herein I found no cause of doubt or scruple, so as they exclude ambition and covetousness from this care.  
The conversion of the New World began by arms and victories, and was followed by preaching; and now it must be continued, in adding unto the preaching the authority of magistrates and government. The Apostles did purchase authority to the Gospel by the greatness of miracles, with the which they did confounded the arrogancy of the je●●s, and the haughtiness of the Gentiles, for that the jews were accustomed to see prodigies, and things above the course of heaven, and the force of nature. Contrariwise 〈◊〉 Grecians were puffed up with an opinion of their learning and wisdom: and therefore for that it was not fit for the messengers of jesus Christ to encounter them with affected words and eloquent discourses, or that the world's conversion should be attributed to human reason and policy; the Apostles did convict them by miracles, and works impossible to the force of man, by means whereof they made them see, That the God which they preached was above Nature, and by consequence much above their wisdom: and yet they found some difficulty to believe that jesus Christ crucified and dead, was he by whose virtue they did all those miracles; for that the cross was a scandal unto the jews, and held as a folly by the Grecians. But at the New World, for that there were neither jews which might remember Moses, and the miracles which God ●ad done by his means, nor Grecians who esteemed not any thing but what was above their knowledge; being inhabited by people that were either brutish or dull, there was not any need of miracles, but of human help, with the which these people might be brought to the use of reason; for that having attained thereunto, they did speedily embrace the truth, the which was simply propounded unto them by their preachers, or by the masters of the Christian doctrine; for that the light of the Gospel is so sweet and pleasing of itself, and the yoke of jesus Christ so light, as it hath no need of miracles to make men desire it: neither was there ever country whereas the gospel was more speedily received at the first, than at the New World, of which sudden conversion there were many reasons; but the chief was the bad estate wherein the inhabitants were, and the bounty of the law of God. Their Idolatry was not full of sensuality, as that of the Gentiles, or of prosperity, and worldly delights, like unto the law of Mahomet, which might draw and flatter them: and on the other side they sought no miracles like the jews, or the subtlety of Philosophy as the Grecians, who contemned all the world, but they were simple without arrogancy or presumption, and they did not much love their Idols whose service was painful, nor their sacrifices which cost them their blood and lives; and for this cause they were ready to receive a better law: and there cannot be a better than that which jesus Christ hath given us. Moreover the duller they were of understanding, the more they admired heaven, and heavenly things, and whatsoever was propounded unto them of the greatness, power, and majesty of God, and of the mercy, sweetness, and passion of jesus Christ; for that the more things did pass their capacity and understanding, the more they seemed answerable to the greatness of God, and the infinite bounty of jesus Christ.   

¶ Of the difficulties they found in the conversion of the Americans.  
WE must not think that the conversion of the New World passed without many great difficulties, and that these roses had no thorns: the first difficulty was the ignorance of the tongue, for that there being not any thing which requires a greater facility to express the conception, and the grace of a language, than the mysteries of our holy faith. The preaching was begun in America by men which understood not their auditor's language, neither was understood by them; wherefore they were constrained to use certain interpreters or truchmen, who understanding not well what was said unto them, delivered one thing for another, and in stead of Catholic doctrine sowed errors among the assistants; so as it was a great trouble for the one to deliver their conceptio●ss, and to hear others by a third person, in all which things they lost much time. This divider increased by another which was of no less importance, for that in their proceed they used no certain and common form: there being no superior who had ●h● c●●e & authority to prescribe an order for so many things, and in such different country's. Another difficulty grew by the want of workmen fit for such an important enterprise as the conversion of America; there was a great harvest and few labourers, and they which employed themselves understood not, nor were understood; from these two difficulties proceeded divers defects in the conversion of the Indians; the one was ignorance, in which the Neophites or new Christians remained, and their little understanding of matters necessary to salvation; for that being baptized without instruction, they had scarce any other thing of a Christian but baptism, and they required it rather to content their Cac●iqueses, or the Spaniards, and to do that which they saw others do, than for any firm resolution. The first religious men which employed themselves, took so gr●at a pleasure to multiply the number of the faithful, as they cared for no more, being partly moved thereunto by the consolation which the conversion of souls brings with it, and partly for the impossibility there was to attend the instruction of so many persons; so as they held it better to leave them without catechising, than without baptism. We read that of those twelve Friars of the order of S. Francis there was not any one but had baptized at the lest one hundred thousand persons in New Spain, and one of them baptised four hundred thousand: how then could they instruct so great a multitude of m●n that were rude and savage, in the doctrine of jesus Christ, especially, they but yet learning the Mexican tongue. But the worst of all is that in so small a number of teachers, th●●e were & are yet many which have been employed in so great a ministery, which are ignorant, careless, and of a bad life. In the province of Paraguay in the year 1587., there was a priest who had charge of a very great country, this man used no other diligence towards them that came to be baptized▪ but only asked them if they would have the name of Peter or john▪ and at this day in New Spain, where there are bishops and a great number of religious men, one Curate hath under his charge fifty, yea seventy villages, and forty miles in circuit or more. The people therefore continued as much inclined to their ancient superstition and idolatry as before, for that having no knowledge of divine things, they did not elevat their spirits more than ordinary, and lived with many wives or concubines: the other defect which they found in the conversion of the Indians was for that these first Fathers baptized these Indians not one by one, but by hund●edss and thousands, it fell out therefore that of many which ran to baptism, some were in doubt whether they were baptized or not: moreover, every one of them having above one wife▪ some of them continued after baptism in their first estate: but the greatest part of them knew not what they should retain or leave, and the preachers themselves were also in doubt.   

Of the Remedies of the foresaid defects.  
THe first which employed himself to amend and better the condition of the New Christians at America, was the Marquis of Vallee: for besides the good order which he did set in New Spain for matters of civil government, he procured also in the year 1524 the celebration of a provincial Synod, at the which there assisted five Priests, nineteen Monks or Friars, and six Lay men, of the which the said Marquis (who was of the house of Cortes) was one, and Friar Martin of Valencia the Pope's Vicar: there they made clear the point of the Indians marriages, that is to say, with which wife they s●ould remain; and it was resolved, that for as much as the form of their contract of ●arriage was not known, nor what stile they followed in that case, they should for that ●i●e retain which of them they would, and dismiss the rest. But there was not any one whi●● did more assist the zeal of the New Christians in New Spain, than Vasco of Quiroga th● first Bishop of Mechovacan, who made very good ordinances, & put in practice profitable institutions, both concerning the spiritual and temporal affairs of the Indians, whose memory doth live unto this day; so as there is not any thing which those people do preach with more affection, than the virtues of that Prelate: he took away the plurality of wives, abolished idolatry and superstition, and procured that such as had ●ot yet received baptism should be first catechised & instructed; and he did wonderfully increase the service of God, the holiness of Churches, and the reverence unto sacred things. He obtained this, in procuring to have the Churches well built, to have good revenues, & to be furnished of all that was necessary for the celebration of divine service, and the administration of the sacraments. But he made himself chiefly famous for his chariti●●owardss the poor and needy; whereof there were worthy marks to be seen throughout the realm of Mechovacan; for that there is not any borough or village how litterer poor soever, where there is not a lodging for pilgrims, and an hospital for diseased ●●rsonss. And for the entertainment of those places which have no certain reveoves, there are certain companies appointed, whose change is to provide and serve the sick●, and to give them all things that shall be necessary. Every one of these (which are di●i●●d by countries) serves his week. The time of the country being come, all go forth with their families, and carry whatsoever the sick shall need for that week. Every country hath a man into whose hands they deliver whatsoever hath been prepared for the sick, as wine, meat, napkins, vessel, and such like, and he disposeth of all according to the necessity of the diseased. He that hath the charge of all, doth advertise them seven days before, of the week they ar● to serve. In this time the men of the country make great provision of wood, both great a●d small, the which they seek six mile's 〈◊〉 or more, and in the mean time their wive● make provision of corn a●d other necessaries. The time being come, every man brings unto the Hospital what he hath prepared, some wood, some bread, some flesh; and there are some which do govern the sick persons; for as soon as they understand that any one is fallen sick, they of the company go presently unto him, they carry him to the Church to be confessed, and from thence unto the Hospital, where he is attended day and night with great care, and a charity worthy of commendation: these customs brought in by this Bishop continued unto this day. They have no less care of the service of God, and the ornament of Churches; for they think if all should go to ruin, yet should they ne●er abandon the Church: They employ much money to buy images, and ornaments for the Altar, and although they be poor, and lead a miserable and painful life, yet in that which concerns the ornament of sacred places, and the celebration of feasts, they spare not their goods, nor labour; and they deprive themselves of necessary things, to the end that the service of God may be performed worthily, and with majesty. They unfurnish their houses of their movables, to furnish the Church, and they spare bread out of their own mouths (as a man would say) to feed their curate, and when as money fails them, they supply that want with their labour. That which was very important also to repair those defects, which happened in the first conversion of the Indians, was the multitude of religious men, and the foundation of convents, of the orders of S. Francis, S. Dominicke, S. Augustine, and de la Merced, to whom they have since added the jesuits, and some Carmelites, the Cathedral and Collegiall Churches, Universities, Seminaries, provincial councils, Catechisms printed, and visitations made by the Bishop.   

¶ An estimate of all that the king of Spain receives out of all his countries.  
BEfore we enter into this discourse, it shall be fit to instruct the Reader touching the money or coin wherewith the Spaniards make their accounts. You must therefore understand that always in Spain they accounted by Maravedis, or ducats, and not in any other kind of money, notwithstanding that they have croisadoes, pistols, and royals both of eight and four, but their most usual accounting is by Maravedis, which kind of coin being very small, doth easily amount to millions, and yet the sum is of no great value: as for example, a million of Maravedis, or Quento (as the Spaniards call it) is worth two thousand six hundred seventy three ducats, eight royals, twenty and six M●●avedis. Four and thirty Maravedis make a royal or six pence, eleven royals make a 〈◊〉, and twelve a French crown.   

A treaty of all the rents, and revenues, which the king of Spain hath in all his realms, and at the Indies, which consist in Alcavales, and Thirds, Subsidies, Imposts, Customs, Duties for salt, and other revenues contained in his finances of Spain, with a declaration of the Alcavales.  

Alcavala what it is.  THe king of Spain exacts the tenth penny of all goods, lands, houses, merchandises, or whatsoever el●e, atsuch times as they are sold, and this tenth is called Alcavala. In like manner artisans and workmen, and such as keep shops and fell any thing oftheir handy work or industry, or else in those places whereas they sell fish, in the butcheries, and taverns, they are bound to pay the tenth part of all that they sell. Fo● this cause many towns, and their members, compound with the king, and pay him a centaine sum without any further charge, and they themselves gather ●p ●hese Alca●●l●ss in their jurisdictions; which accord is called Encabeçamiento. Moreover the king's receivers remain in the Metropolitan towns and provinces, where they look to the payment of the Alcavales, and give an account. Besides, they have the charge of certain recompenses ordained to some by the king of Spain, and in like manner of other debts and assignations, whereof they do afterwards give an account to the sovereign Chamber of the accounts. But to the end that you may know the quality of thirds, you must understand, that Popes in former times have granted to the kings of Spain the third penny of the revenues of the Clergy, to aid them in their wars against the Moors, and to defend the Catholic religion. The same receivers receive the thirds with the Alcavales, and they are in like manner rent out to towns. The king of Spain hath sold some Alcavales, and given others in recompense, whereof we will make mention.  
The salt, that is to say, the places from whence the king of Spain draws salt, are rent yearly for 
93 (Quentoes) or millions of maravedis.  The tenths of the sea, of merchandise which comes from foreign parts into Biscai, and the provinces of Guipuscoa, and of the four Maritime valleys of the mountains, pay for all the mercandise which is carried by land into Castille, unto the houses appointed to that end in the towns of Victoria, Horduna, and Valmoscede, the sum of 
70 mill. of marau.  The tenths of the sea which pass by the realm of Leon, and by the ports of Sanabre, and Villa Franca yield yearly 
1 mill. of marau.  The tenths of the principality of Asturia, passing by the Town of Ouiedo yield 
375000 marau.  The revenues of the government of the town of Bilbao, for merchandise which come from foreign parts 
490500 marau.  The city of Burgos, with the jurisdiction, pays yearly for the Alcavales, thirds, and rents 
17 mill. 129880 marau.  The bailiwick of Burgos, which they term Bureba, pays yearly 
2 millions 646 marau.  The mountains of Oca yield yearly 
34000 marau.  The bailiwick of the province of Rioja 
3 mill. 757000 marau.  The bailiwick of Ebro pays 
2 mill. 34000 marau.  The jurisdiction on the other side of Ebro yields 
1 mill. 402000 marau.  The city of Victoria pays yearly unto the king 
269000 marau.  The province of Guipuscoa pays yearly for the Alcavales and thirds 
1 million 181000 marau.  The mines o● iron which are in the said province yield 
150000 marau.  The seven Bayliwickes' of the mountains of old Castille 
942000 marau.  The valley of Mena in the same mountains of Castille 
228000 marau.  The province of Logrono 
7 millions 746000 marau.  The town of janquas, and the territory, pays 
541000 marau.  The city of S. Dominico de la Calçada pays yearly 
4 mil. 812000 Marau.  The bailiwicke of the town of Diego 
1 million, 545000 Maravedis.  The bailiwicke of Cancrone de Munno pays 
4 millions, 612000 Marau.  The bailiwicke of Castro Xeris 
8 millions, 485000 Maravedis.  The bailiwicke of Ceriato 
1 million, 968000 Maravedis.  The bailiwicke of Monson 
2 millions, 276000 Maravedis.  The city of Palence, and the province of Campo pays yearly for the Alcavales and thirds 
16 millions, 940000 Maravedis.  The town of carrion pays 
4 millions, 948000 Maravedis.  T●e jurisdiction of carrion pays 
2 millions, 910000 Maravedis.  The places of Peter Aluares of Vega 
655000 Maravedis.  The town of Sahagun is rent for 
2 millions, 125000 Maravedis.  The bailiwicke of Pernia pays 
178000 Maravedis.  The bailiwicke of Campo in the mountains 
1 million, 730000 Maravedis.  The valley of Miranda in the mountains 
557000 Maravedis.  The four Towns called of the coast▪ that is to say, S. Ander●, Laredo, Castro of Vrdi●ales, and S. Vincent, pay yearly 
3 millions, and 345000 Maravedis.  The principality of Asturia, and the town of Ouiedo 
12 mil. 345000 Mara.  The city of Lugo in the realm of Gallicia, with the Bishopric, pays yearly 
4 mil. 137000 maravedis.  The city of Mondonedo in the realm of Gallicia 
1 million, and 132000 Maravedis.  The city of Orense, and the jurisdiction 
6 millions, and 58000 Maravedis.  The city of Saint james or Compostella, with the Archbishop's territory, pays 
18 millions 212000 Maravedis.  The city of Tuy, and the Bishop's jurisdiction in Gallicia 
5 mil. 827000 Maravedis.  The town of Pontferado in Gallicia 
1 million, 975000 Maravedis.  The city of Leon with the jurisdiction and Bishopric 
6 mil. 350000 Marau.  The town of Sardagne 
1 million, and 13000 Marau.  The city of Astorga and Bishopric in the realm of Leon pay 
2 mil. 455000 Marau.  The villages or places called Cavadiaz of the Abbey of Leon and Astorga are rent at 
797000 Marau.  The Barrios or parishes about Salas within the principality of Asturia pay yearly 
231000 Maravedis.  The city of Zamora with the jurisdiction 
15 mil. 525000 Marau.  The city of Toro and the jurisdiction 
11 mil. 112000 Marau.  The town of Vrena pays for the thirds, the tenths, or Alcavala belonging to the duke of Osso●na 
62000 Marau.  The town of Garena pays yearly 
2 mil. 335000 Marau.  The town of Barasil de la Coma 
250000 Marau.  The city of Salamanca and the jurisdiction 
24 mil. 345000 Marau.  The city of Rodrigo and the jurisdicton 
14 mil. 345000 Marau.  The jurisdicton of Trigueros 
417000 Marau.  The town of Ol●illo 
47000 Marau.  The town of Tordesillas and the territory 
2 mil. and 600000 Marau.  The town of Valladolid and the jurisdiction 
29 mil. 730000 Marau.  The town of Tordehumos pays 
827000 Marau.  The town of Medina del Campo and the jurisdiction pays yearly 
31 millions, and 149000 Marau.  The town of Olmedo, and the territory 
2 mil. 149000. Marau.  T●e town of Nava, and the seven churches pays for the thirds 
333000 Maravedis, for t●at the tenths belong unto Don Francis de Fonseca.  〈◊〉 town of Madrigal 
682000. Marau.  〈◊〉 ●●wne of Arivalo with her jurisdiction 
5 mil. 310000 Marau.  〈…〉 of Auila, and the jurisdiction 
19 mil. 35000 Marau.  The city of Segovia, and the jurisdiction 
12 mil. 470000 marau.  The town of Aranda of Duero, with her jurisdiction 
3 mil. 350000 marau.  The town of Roa pays yearly 
1 mil. 515000 marau.  The town of Gomiel of Yzan (where the tenths belong unto the Duke of Ossouna) pays yearly for the thirds▪ 
154000 marau.  The town of Sepulueda with the territory 
3 millions, 54000 marau.  The city of Soria with the jurisdiction 
10 millions, 282000 marau.  The city and Bishopric of Osma, with the jurisdiction 
4 millions.  The town of Agreda and Caracena 
2 millions, 83000 marau.  The town of Molina and the jurisdiction 
5 millions, 792000 maravedis.  The city of Ciguença and the jurisdiction 
3 millions, 662000 maravedis.  The town of Cuenca and her jurisdiction pays 
24 millions, 645000 maravedis.  The town of Hue●e with the territory 
17 millions, 916000 maravedis.  The town of Villarejo de F●entes 
2 millions, 517000 maravedis.  The province called the Marquisat of Villena, that is to say, the towns of Timihillha, Abasette, Roda, Saint Clement, and the town of Villena, with the jurisdiction pays yearly 
31 millions, 503000 maravedis.  The town of Beaumond, whose Al●avaleses belong unto the Marquis of Villena pays only for the thirds 
476000 maravedis.  The city of Murcia and the jurisdiction 
14 mil. 820000 marau.  The town of Lorca, and her jurisdiction 
5 millions.  The city of Carthagena and her jurisdiction 
2 millions.  The town of Alcarras, with the jurisdiction 
16 millions, 984000 maravedis.  The town of Segura de la Sierra with the mountains thereabout, and territory belonging to the master of Saint james 
11 millions, 91000 maravedis.  Villa Nova de los Infants, with her province called el Campo de Moryel, belonging to the knights of Saint james 
8 millions, 664000 maravedis.  Ocagna and the province called Castille, belonging also to the knights of Saint james pays 
23 millions.  The city of Guadalajara with the jurisdiction pays 
11 millions, 64000 marau.  The town of Prox and Poso pay yearly 
160000 maravedis.  The town of Almonacid, and the province of Sorite, which belong to the knights of Saint james 
1 million, 188000 maravedis.  The towns of Vzeda, Talamanca, and Tardelaguna, with the territory which belongs to the Archbishop ●f Toledo 
18 millions 250000 maravedis.  The town of Yepas 
423000 maravedis.  Alcala of Henarez and the jurisdiction, with the town of Brivega, which are the Archbishops of Toledo, pay 
16 millions, 250000 maravedis.  The town of Madrid, with her territory 
23 million, 250000 maravedis.  The county of Puno in Rostro, yields 
1 million, 262000 maravedis.  The towns of Cubas, and Grinon, where the Alcavales belong to the house of Mendoza, pay unto the king for the thirds 
117000 maravedis.  The town of Gualapagar, where the tenths belong unto the Duke of Infantasgo, pay for the thirds 
160000 maravedis.  The town of Illescas, and the territory, pays 
2 milllions, 297000 maravedis.  T●e city of Toledo with the members, pay yearly 
37 millions.  T●e revenues of the mountai●●, which are paid by the masters of the flocks of sheep, which go to feed in Estremadura, yield 
19 millions, 503000 maravedis.  The villages of the Priories of Saint john 
7 millions, 55000 maravedis.  The town of Almagro, with the province which is called el Campo de Calatrava pays 
7 millions, 120000 maravedis.  Moreover the Alcavales for green corn which is sold there for horse meat, yield unto the king 
3 millions, 438000 maravedis.  The town of Ciudad Real pays yearly 
4 millions, 150000 maravedis.  The villages lying in the country called the Archdeaconship of Talavera de la Roina pay 
14 millions, 326000 marau.  The city of Plaisance, and the villages which belong to the Archdeacon, pay yearly 
18 millions, 475000 marau.  The tow●e of Truxillo, and the territory, yields 
12 millions, 224000 marau.  The town of Carceres, with the jurisdiction, pays 
7 millions, 850000 marau.  The city of Badajos, with the jurisdiction and province, pays 
9 mill. 972000 marau.  The town of Alcantara, with her territory, which belong unto the knights of Alcantara, pays yearly 
9 millions, 403000 marau.  The tenths of the green corn which is sold for the feeding of horses of price, in the month of March, yields unto the king 
3 millions, 481000 marau.  The province of serve, or Serene, belonging to the knights of Alcantara 
7. mill. 570000 marau.  The city of Merida, with the territory, in the province of Leon 
21 millions, 234000 marau.  The town of Fuente el Maestro in the same province 
6 mill. 973000 marau. 
All these belong to the knights of S. James.   The town of Guadancanal, with her territory, pays yearly 
3 mill. 305000 marau.  The town of Xeres of Badajos, with the territory, yields 
7 mill. 100000 marau.  The city of Sevill, with the lands, and jurisdiction, yields 
182 mill. 387000 marau.  All the rent of the signory of Sevill yields 
2▪ millions.  The towns of Palma and Gelues, under their Earls, pay 
235000 marau.  The towns of Tevar and Ardales', where the tenths belong to the Marquis of Ardales', pay yearly for the thirds 
23●000 marau.  The town of Lerena, and the territory, and the province of Leon, under the knights of S. james, yields 
3 millions, 325000 marau.  The revenues of Cadiz, which they call Almadraves, that is to say, the fishing of Tonnie amounts to 
3 millions, 35000 marau.  The city of Cadiz pays yearly 
8 millions, 452000 marau.  The town of Gibraltar pays only thirds, and is exempted from all the rest, and these thirds come to 
1 million, 500000 marau.  The town of Xerez de la Frontera, with the jurisdiction, pays yearly 
21 millions, 50000 marau.  The town of Carmona yields unto the king 
9 millions, 450000 marau.  The towns of Lora and Setafilla pay 
680000 marau.  The town of Ecija, with the suburbs, 
15 millions, 500000 marau.  The city of Cordova, with the territory, yields yearly 
48 mill. 995000 marau.  The places called Realengoes of Cordova 
17 millions, 316000 marau.  The town of Anduxar, and the territory, 
4 millions, 800000 marau.  The city of Vbeda, and her jurisdiction, 
11 millions, 346000 marau.  The city of Ba●ca pays yearly 
17 millions, 316000 marau.  The town of Quexado yields unto the king 
1 million, 415000 marau.  The Ad●lantad or Lieutenant ship of Caçorla yields yearly 
6 mill. 885000 marau.  The county of S. Stephen pays unto the king 
1 million, 340000 marau.  The town of Martos, and the territory which belongs to the knights of Calatrava, of the members of Andaluzia, yields yearly 
11 millions, 436000 marau.  The city of juen, with the territory, pays 
15 millions, 909000 marau.  The city of Granado, with the territory, yields 
42 millions, 910000 marau.  The silk of the realm of Granado, before the expulsion of the Moors, was wor●h, 42 millions but now it yields unto the king but 
22 millions.  The tent called Guelayabizes, in the realm of Granado, is worth 
2 millions, 750000 marau.  The ●ow●ess of Loxa, and Alhama, in the realm of Granado, pay 
3 millions, 650000 marau.  The ●●●ne of Baca, in Granado, yields yearly 
10 milllions, 626000 marau.  The city of Guadix, in the realm of Granado, and the mountains thereabout, pay by the year 
6 millions, 395000 marau.  The city of Almerie, in the realm of Granado yields 
3 millions, 80000 marau.  The towns of Almunecar, Mutril, and Salobrena, pay yearly 
2 mill. 643000 marau.  The city of Malaga yields unto the king 
16 millions, 269000 marau.  Velez Malaga, in the realm of Granado, pays yearly 
16 millions, 519000 marau.  The town of Pulchena pays unto the king 
410000 marau.  The city of Ronda, with the jurisdiction, yields 
5 millions, 334000 marau.  The Island of Canary yields yearly 
4 millions, 850000 marau.  The Island of Teneriffe yields yearly 
3 millions.  The Island of Palma yields yearly 
2 millions.  The tax which is yearly due throughout the realms of Spain is worth 
104 millions, 305000 maravedis: And this tax is divided among the people throughout all the provinces and towns, for that the noblemen which are Feudataries and knights are exempt: they are seized according to their estates.  The tols or customs by land of the realms of Valencia, Arragon, and Navarre, which are to be paid for all things that are carried by land in the said realms, as well for the entry, as for the going forth, yield unto the king of Spain 
49 mill. 35000 marau.  The dry ports or passages within the country, as well at the coming in, as going forth, which pass betwixt the realms of Portugal and Castille, pay yearly for the tenths of such things as are brought in, or carried forth 
34 millions, 155000 marau.  The wools which are transported yearly out of Spain into other countries, yield for every sack (which doth commonly weigh 10 Arobes, and the Arobe weighs 25 pound) 2 ducats, so as it be of the country wool, for strangers pay 4 ducats: and in all it yields yearly to the king of Spain 
53 millions, 586000 marau.  The Almoxarif, or great custom of Sevill, which the city doth farm of the king of Spain, yields yearly in rent 
154 millions, 309000 maravedis: They do so call the tenths of all the merchandise which comes from the Low-countrieses, France, England, Portugal, Italy, and other pla●●●▪  The Almoxarif, or custom of the Spanish or West Indies, which the city of Sevill hath rent, whereas all the merchandise received into the ships at Sevill●, and is to be transported thither, pays the twentieth part, and being carried to the Indies, they are forced to give another twentieth part, all which amounts to 
67 millions.  The revenues which the king of Spain draws from the money of Spain, that is to say, from every mark of silver, or six ducats of silver (whereas they coin money) a Royal▪ and this is called El S●ndreaxo de l● Aloneda, or the right of the mint; and the mint at Sevill yields as much as all the rest: the which yields unto the king of Spain yearly 
22 millions.  The king of Spain dot● farm out to the Foukers of Ausbourg, and to other Bankers, the masterships of S●i●t james, Calatrava, and Alcantara; which are only the customs and tenths of wh●●●, wi●e, oil, and other things which the masters were wont to enjoy, not comprehending therei●●he A●●avaleses a●d thirds, as hath been said: which rent doth yield unto the king yearly 
98 millions.  The power of these masters 〈◊〉 ●ont to be great, and extended into many provinces, but now this charge is of less esteem, since that the kings of Spain have taken upon them the masterships▪ who by little and little draw away all the revenues. Moreover, ●he king of Spain le●●●o f●rme the feeding and pastures of the said masteries and commanderies, and it doth yield hi● yearly 
37 millions.  T●●●ing of Spain doth rend out the mines of quicksilver, of Almedan, of Sierra Morena, in the field of Calatrava, and ●●ceives for● 
73 millions.  Th● Croisado, or Pope's Bulls, all charges deducted, yield unto the king of Spain yearly 
200 millions.  That which they call subsidy, which the Clergy gives out of their revenues taxed upo● their benefices, to make war against Infidels and others, yields yearly 
65 millions.  Moreover, all the Bishops and Churches of Spain give unto the king for the making of war against Infidels, 
one hundred and one millions. This revenue is called El Excus●do, and is wont to be granted to the king of Spain by the Pope's Bull, whereby it is lawful for him to take the tenths of the wheat, millet, wine, oil, and other first-fruits belonging to the Clergy and Churches; and the Clergy gives this sum unto the king, all charges deducted.  The mines of Guadalcanal in Estremadura upon Sierra Morena did sometimes yield 
187 millions of maravedis: but being at this day much decayed, it cannot be taxed.  All the lands of Spain pay yearly unto the king a certain imposition which they call, Exercise for the Slaves and Galleys, and this makes the sum of 
7 mil. 750000 mara.  The revenue called Moneda Forera, for the which every fire whatsoever it be, is constrained to pay 7 maravedis yearly unto the king of Spain, and this doth make by the year 
6 mill. and 656000 maravedis.  That which comes unto the king yearly from the West Indies, amounteth unto the sum of 
300 millions.  The realm of Navarre yields yearly unto the king 
35 mil. 500000 maravedis.  The realm of Valencia, Arragon, and Cartalognia give unto the king, besides other tributes 
75 millions of maravedis.  The Islands of Sardinia, Maiorca, and Minorca, yield 
no profit unto the king of Spain, for that the revenues of these places are consumed in the guard of them, and besides they are not very rich.  The realm of Sicily brings yearly unto the king of Spain 
375 millions▪  The realm of Naples, with the countries of Povillia and Calabria yield yearly unto the king 
450 millions of maravedis.  The Duchy of Milan yealds 
300 millions of maravedis.  Bourgondie and Flanders were wont to yield unto the king of Spain 700 millions, but now they are no more his, being given in dowry to the Infanta Isabel Clara Eugenia, whenas she martried with Albertus who was before a Cardinal. 
   The farm or revenue of playing-cardes which are sold in Spain, and pay unto the king for every pair six pence, yields 
20 millions.  The Serges or Rash of Florence which is brought into Spain, and pay unto the king for every piece six ducats, yields yearly 
10 millions.   
Such was the revenue of the king of Spain in the year 1578 before that he was king of Portugal: 
The total sum of the king of Spain's revenues.  by reason whereof we will set the revenues of the crown of Portugal apart. All these revenues and sums of maravedis being reduced into ducats of Spain, amount unto the sum of 13 millions, and 48000 ducats, every ducat being worth eleven roialls of Spain, and five shillings six pence of our English money.  
The realms comprehended under the name of Spain, but more properly of Castille, are these which follow, Leon, Arragon, Castille, Navarre, Granado, Toledo, Valencia, Sevill, Cordova, Murcia, jaen, Gallicia, Gibraltar, and Cattalognia.  
The realms, provinces, and cities which assemble at the Eastes of Spain are, the realms of Leon, Sevill, Toledo, Granado, Cordova, Murcia, and jaen: the cities of Burgos, Salamanca, Segovia, Soria, Auila, Cuenca, Toro, Zamora, and Guadalajara, all which are bishoprics. Of those which have no Bishops, or are not walled in, there are but two admitted to the Estates, and which have voices, that is to say, Madrid and Valladolid. The other realms, as Arragon, Navarre, Valencia, and Cattalognia have their Viceroys and Governors apart, which command with the king's council like to the Viceroy of Scicile and Naples, and the Governor of Milan.  
In Spain they use the words of city and town distinctly, and make a great difference betwixt the one and the other: for the cities in Spain are those which serve for government to others, and which have greater pre-eminencies and prerogatives, and therefore they comprehend Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, and other governments. There are citie● which enjoy this title by a special privilege, although they be not great: and there is great difference betwixt a city and a town, as well in authority as in other freedoms and immunities.  
In cities, there are commonly governors, whom the Romans called Praetors, or governors of cities or provinces: and so one city hath many towns and villages which are subject unto it, so as the towns are members to cities, for that the towns are subject unto cities, and villages unto towns; seeing that in Spain whenas there falls out any mutiny or revolt in a province, the towns, and country people submit themselves to the defence of cities, in all accidents that may happen.  
To make a town a city, they must have more regard unto the antiquity, than to the greatness, for that there are many small cities, and very great towns, such are, Medina del Campo, a very great town, Saint Foy, a very little city, Madrid, where the king doth sometimes keep his court, a very great town, Orihuela, a little city, Carceres, a great town, Alicanta, a little city, Saintiren, Abrantes, Ceroval, and Olivensa, great towns in Portugal without any titles of city: there are also many small cities, as Guadix, Baesa, Carthagena, and others.   

¶ The Revenues of the crown of Portugal.  
THe ordinary revenues of the crown of Portugal do every year pass a million and 100000 ducats: the revenues of the knights of Portugal, whereof the king is at this day great master, and to whom belong the Islands of Açores, Madera, Cape Verd, Saint Thomas, and of the Province, yield yearly 200000 ducats: the revenues of the mine which belongs unto the knights called of Christ, amounts yearly to 100000 ducats: the revenues of spices and other things which comes from the East Indies, yield yearly 600000 ducats, that is to say, eighteen tun of gold. You must understand that this is drawn from the customs and imposts of merchandise; for the other revenues and first-fruits of the earth are easily consumed in the guard and defence thereof: wherefore the whole revenues of the crown of Portugal, and of the countries which are subject unto it, amounts to two millions of ducats.  

¶ The wages and pensions of the officers, gentlemen, and other servants of the king of Spain's household and court.  
THe great master of the household, or lord Steward, hath for his yearly fee 3000 ducats.  
Four other masters of the household, either of which hath 1500 ducats a year.  
One and thirty gentlemen servants, the which have eight roialls a day a piece for their expenses. 
E●ery royal is six pe●ce sta●lin●.   
Four and twenty gentlemen of the king's house, either of which have six roialls a day.  
Ten gentlemen of the chamber, and to every one twelve roialls a day.  
Ten assistants or gums of the chamber, and to every one six roialls a day.  
Three keepers of the wardrobe, who have charge of the apparel and other movables, to either of them six roialls a day.  
Four keepers of the jewels, to the first, eleven roialls a day, and to the rest four.  
Five pantler's, and to either four roialls a day.  
Four butler's, to the first, four roialls a day, and to the rest two.  
Four officers of the kitchen who have the charge of salt meats, and to the two first, four roialls a day a piece, and to the others two roialls.  
Three officers of the larder, to the first, four roialls, and to the others two.  
To the master cook, and his first assistant, four roialls a day a piece, and to another two.  
To the two boys of the kitchen a royal a day a piece.  
To the cook of the first master of the household, three roialls a day.  
To the porter of the kitchen and his assistant, two roialls a day a piece.  
To the master feather-maker for himself, his assistants, and four boys, four hundred ducats a year wages.  
To the kings chief tapestrie-man, four royals a day, and to five assistants of the tapestry, two royally a day a piece.  
To the master locksmith, three royals a day, and to either of his two servants, two royals.  
To two physicians of the king's chamber, & to the physician for the household, three hundred ducats a year a piece.  
To the chirurgeon, and to two barbers of the body, four royals a day a piece, ●nd to the assistant to the barbers, three royals a day.  
To two apothecary's, three royals a day a piece, and to their assistant, two royals a day.  
To the tailor, hosier, shoemaker, embroidered, and skinner, fifty ducats a year a piece.  
To the goldsmith, seampster, and launderer, forty ducats a year a piece.  
To two porters of the palace, four royals a day a piece.  
To two ushers of the chamber, four royals a day a piece.  
To seven porters of the hall and chamber, three royals a day a piece.  
There are threescore and seven grooms of the chamber, 
Every five soul● is s●● penc●.  every one of which hath twenty thousand maravedis yearly for his wages, the which makes fifty three ducats, twenty sou, and four deniers.  
There are also ●w●lue porter's, which are called of the Cadenas, who are always at the palace gate, who have four and twenty ●ho●●and maravedis for their yearly wages; which makes threescore and nine ducats, nine sou.   

¶ Offices.  
TO the lieutenant of the master of the household is given one hundred thousand mara●●di●● year for his wages, which are two hundred sixty seven ducats, four royals, and twelve maravedis.  
〈◊〉 him 〈◊〉 ke●pe● the accounts, and provides for the charges of huntsmen, and to the ●ead clerk, th● like yearly wages.  
To him tha●●a●ri●s the king's crossbow, twenty thousand maravedis a year, which are fifty thr●●●uckatss, six and twenty maravedis.  
To the chirurgeon of the household, twenty five thousand maravedis, which make th●ees●or● 〈◊〉 ducats, forty six sou and a half.  
To the drawer of gold, fifteen thousand maravedis, which are forty ducats, one sou, and a half.  
To the glover, twelve thousand maravedis, which are thirty two ducats, four sou, ●●d a halfa.  
To the te●●i● court keeper, eleven thousand mara●ediss, which comes to twenty nine ducats, twelve sou.  
To ●●e fourbusher and crosbowmaker, six thousand maravedis a piece.  
To the muletors or moil keepers of the king's house, that is, to the master and his six assistants, three hundred thousand maravedis a year, which make eight hundred and 〈…〉▪ seven sou, and six deniers.  
To the chi●●●●●eep●r, and his eight assistants, five hundred thirty four ducats, forty one sou, and a half.   

¶ Guards of the king's body in his palace. The Bourgondian guard.  
TO the captain of the archers of the king's guard, a thousand ducats a year.  
To ●he lieutenant of the company, five hundred ducats a year.  
T● the 〈◊〉 bearer, four hundred ducats a year.  
〈…〉 arthur's all gentlemen Bourgo●●● 〈◊〉 by nation, four royals a day a piece.  
〈…〉 tr●●peter as much.  
To 〈◊〉 chaplain three royals a day.   

¶ Guard of the Germane.  
TO the captain of the german guard, a thousand ducats a year.  
To the lieutenant, three hundred ducats.  
To the sergeant of the guard, two hundred ducats.  
To the phife, threescore ducats a year.  
To two drums a ●●ndred and thirty ducats a year a piece.  
To a hundred Germane of the footguard, two royals a day a piece.  
To the chaplain two royals a day.  
To the chirurgeon ten thousand maravedis a year.   

¶ Guard of the Spaniards.  
T● the captain of the footguard, a thousand ducats a year.  
To the the lieutenant, five hundred ducats a year.  
To the sergeant, two hundred ducats.  
To two drums, a hundred and thirty ducats a piece.  
To the phife, threescore ducats.  
To four captains or corporals of squadrons, three royals a day a piece.  
To a hundred Spaniards, two royals a day a piece.  
To a chaplain two royals a day.  
To a chirurgeon, one royal a day.  
To a physician four royals a day.   

¶ Guard on horseback.  
To three score Spaniards of the guard on horseback, three royals a day a piece.  
To two trumpeters, three royals a day a piece.  
Ten harbingers every one of which hath fifty thousand mar●uedis a year wages, the which is paid wheresoever the king keeps his court, be it at Mad●i●, or elsewhere, and this amounts to a hundred thirty three ducats, thirty so●ens m●ravedis.  
Forty harbingers of ways, to every one thirty thousand maravedis a year.  
Three hundred gentlemen in ordinary of the king's house ●uerie one of which hath forty thousand maravedis a year wages: for they that serve by quarter have but four. score ducats.   

¶ Gentlemen of the chamber:  
TO the captain of the gentlemen that are in ordinary, three hundred thousand maravedis a year, which make eight hundred and three ducats and half a royal.  
To his lieutenant, one hundred and fifty thousand maravedis.  
To the ensign bearer, a hu●dred thousand maravedis, which make two hundred sixty seven ducats, two royals and five maravedis.  
To two trumpeters of the said company, four royals a day a piece.  
To a hundred gentlemen at arms of the guard, six royals a day a piece, and twelve when as his majesty doth ma●ch to the wars, or goes to any public feast or sport.  
To the chaplain of the company, two royals a day.  
To the paymaster, four royals a day.   

¶ Ha●tsmen.  
THese are very famous in Spain, being all gentlemen and knights; they are fifty in number, whereof twenty serve to keep a guard in the Queen's chamber, & in the Infantas: the which is a very auncie●●● privilege; for which cause the Spaniards call them Monteros de Garda: they come all ●ut of the mountains of Bourgos, and every one hath eighty ducats a year wages  
Nineteen pages and a governor, with two thousand ducats a year.  
To the governors assistant or deputy, one hundred ducats.  
To a chaplain, fourscore ducats.  
To the page's schoolmaster, two hundred ducats.  
To their cook, threescore ducats.  
To the musicans which teach the pages to dance and play, eighty ducats a year.  
To the master that teacheth them to vault, forty ducats.  
To him that teacheth them their weapons, fifty ducats.   

¶ His majesties Chapel.  
TO the deane of the chapel, two thousand ducats a year.  
To the head Almoner, one thousand ducats a year.  
To the clerk of the closet, four roialls a day.  
To four chaplains of the habit of saint james, one hundred and thirty thousan● maravedis a year to either of them, which makes 347 ducats six roialls and 18 mara.  
To two chaplains of the order of Alcantara, and to two other chaplains of the order of Calatrava, the like pay.  
To four and twenty chaplains which serve in the chapel, fifty thousand maravedis a year a piece, which come to 133 ducats 38 foulz.  
To the chief keeper of the vestry, 150000 maravedis, which make four hundred ducats, fifty eight sou, nine deniers.  
To four assistants to the keeper of the vestry, and to two others which serve in the said chapel, three roialls a day a piece.  
To the Subalmoner, fifteen thousand maravedis, which are forty ducats, one sou, nine deniers.   

¶ musicans.  
TO the master of the music, 267 ducats, four roialls, and five maravedis.  
To the master of the chapel, fifty thousand maravedis.  
To twelve choristers, one hundred and fifty thousand maravedis, which makes one hundred thirty three ducats, eight sou, and it is paid unto the master of the said children of the chapel.  
To five and forty singing men of the chapel, four roialls a day a piece.  
To a physician that sings the base, the like sum.  
To him that teacheth the children latin, to the organist, and to him that marks the notes, four roialls a day a piece.  
To the harbinger, forty thousand maraved. which makes 106 ducats, 50 sou, 2 deniers.  
To the keeper of the vestry, and to the keeper of the chapel, thirty thousand maravedis a piece.  
To him that tunes the organs and other instruments, fifty thousand maravedis, which are worth one hundred thirty and three crowns, thirty and eight sou.  
To two blowers of the organs, fifteen thousand maravedis.  
To six violons and two cornets, sour roialls a day a piece.  
To fo●●ie chaplains which serve not in court, forty thousand maravedis a piece, which make one hundred and six ducats, fifty sou, nine deniers.   

¶ The kings Quirrie or Stable.  
TO the master of the horse, two thousand ducats a year.  
To other five quirries, one hundred thousand maravedis a year a piece.  
To four riders, the same pay, that is 267 ducats, four roialls, five deniers.  
●●●oure mace bears, or sergeants at arms, one hundred thousand maravedis a piece.  
〈◊〉 the kings at arms, fifty thousand maravedis a piece.  
〈…〉 ●●rbinger of the stable, fifty ●ho●●and maravedis.  
〈…〉 three assistants, thirty thousan●●●●avedis.  
〈◊〉 six messengers of the stable, twenty thousand maravedis a piece.  
〈◊〉 the fourbusher of the stable and his assistant, sixty thousand maravedis a piece.  
To the chief groom of the stable, fifty thousand maravedis.  
To four 〈…〉 ●housand maravedis a piece.  
To four 〈…〉 the horses, fifteen thousand maravedis a piece.  
To him 〈…〉 the Quirrie, fifty thousand maravedis.  
To th●ee 〈◊〉 twenty thousand maravedis a piece.  
To 〈…〉 the charge of saddles and bridles, and to his assistant, twenty thousand 〈…〉 a piece.  
To the coachmaker, and him 〈◊〉 furnish them, twenty thousand maravedis a piece  
To the 〈◊〉 ●eathermake●, and 〈◊〉, fifteen thousand maravedis a piece.  
〈…〉 thousand maravedis.  
〈…〉 thousand maravedis a piece.  
〈…〉 one thousand maravedis.  
〈…〉 and his assistant, thirty thousand maravedis a piece.  
To the master of the caroches, and to his deputy that keeps account of them, twenty 〈◊〉 thousand maravedis a piece.  
To him that hath the charge to carry the king's arqebus and to his assistant, forty and five thousand maravedis.  
To fourscore grooms of the stable, two roialls and a half a piece.  
The king hath twenty and four caroches, and every coachman hath four roialls a day.  
Six litters, and in every one two moiles, and two servants, which have three royals a day.  
●he●● are ●ix wagons for the 〈◊〉 of the s●●ble, to either of which belong two boys, 〈◊〉 have three roialls a day for their charges.  
〈◊〉 master of the moiles hath 〈…〉 ducats a year, and his deputy hath one hundred ducats.  
There 〈◊〉 fifty 〈…〉 boy, who hath three royals a day to spend.  
The maker of the 〈…〉 thousand maravedis a year.  
〈…〉 hath 〈…〉 who besides their apparel and shoes, have three 〈…〉 day to 〈…〉  
They that march 〈…〉 after his majesties train, have the same entertainment.  
To eighteen 〈…〉 a day a piece.  
To twelve trump●●●●, the same pay.  
〈…〉 maravedis a year a piece.  
The king's cons●●●● hath for his yearly fee, three hundred thousand maravedis, which are 〈…〉.   

¶ Huntsmen and Falconers.  
TO the 〈…〉 o● chief huntsman, for him and for his under officers, two hundred and 〈…〉 maravedis a year.  
To his lieutenant for himself and other two huntsmen, 110 thousand maravedis.  
〈…〉 one hundred and ten thousand marau.  
〈◊〉 other assistant and 〈…〉, ●ightie thousand maravedis.  
〈…〉 ●●ther assistants, and three other huntsmen, sixty and six thousand maravedis.  
T● 〈…〉 in the 〈…〉 a piece.  
To 〈…〉 the carpenters 〈…〉, twenty thousand maravedis.  
To 〈…〉, one 〈…〉.  
To his 〈…〉 gray●●●●nds that are under his charge, sixty 〈…〉  
〈…〉, 50000 thousand marau.  
〈…〉 which 〈…〉 thirty thousand marau. a piece.  
〈◊〉 four other boys which have the charge of grayhounds, thirty thousand 〈…〉.  
To 〈◊〉 that feed the grayhounds and bloudhounds, twenty thousand marau. a piece.  
To 〈◊〉 keepers, twenty four thousand maravedis a piece.       

The Estate of the Duke of Lorraine  

DISCOURSE OF THE ESTATE OF THE DUKE OF LORRAINE  

The Contents.  
1●or●aine sometimes called Austrasia: the beginning of the word Lorraine, the li●●tss, and the chief rivers which run through the country. 2. The chief towns 〈◊〉 Lorraine. 3. The Earldoms. 4. The Seigneuries. 5. The fertility, and abundance in wine, baths, saltpits, divers metals, azur-stone, fish, carp of three 〈…〉 cassidonies of admirable greatness, looking glasses, and other works of glass. 〈…〉 and disposition of them of Lorraine, participating of the French and Germane. 〈…〉 the inhabitants consisting in the traffic of azur-stones, pearls, looking glasses, and 〈…〉, linen cloth, mines of silver, and salt. 8. Revenue of the Duke of Lorraine, 〈…〉, and whereunto it amounts yearly. 9 The forts of Lorraine, the neighbours 〈…〉. ●0. A Catalogue of the Dukes which have commanded in Lorraine. 11. Genealogic of the house of Lorraine.   

●ewis the Gentle had four sons, who having made war against their father, shared his estates and principalities betwixt them; so as Lothaire his eldest son had for his part the Empire, Italy, Gaul Narbonnoise, and all the countries which were afterwards comprehended under the name of Lorraine: Lewis had Germany: Charles had France from the river of Mouse unto the Ocean Sea: and Pepin had Aquitaine. Lothaire (besides his son Lewis, who succeeded 〈…〉 had another Lothaire, who remained king of Lorraine. This country 〈…〉 man's called Lotar-Rijck, or Let reych, or Lotharij regnum, in Latin, was 〈…〉 the word Lotharingi●, by corruption, and they of the country call it 〈…〉 make it more short. They hold that the bounds of Lorraine were in former 〈…〉 and that it was called Austrasia, and divided into the higher and lower, and 〈…〉 betwixt the rivers of Rhein, Eschaut, and Mouse; and by this means the 〈…〉 divers names at this day, and is subject to divers princes; and the higher 〈…〉 of Lorraine.  
〈…〉 for bounds upon the East Alsati●, and that which is called by a particular 〈…〉, upon the South Bourgondie, towards the West Champagne, and 〈…〉 the Forest of Ardenne, and presently after, it meets with 〈…〉 of Luxembourg, Treves, and others which, in former times were 〈…〉 This country is watered by the rivers of Mouse, Moselle, Sare, Voloy, 〈…〉, S●ll●y Hide, and others. Moselle, and Sare, pass away for the most 〈…〉 it wholly. Moselle hath his spring in the mountain of Vogese, near 〈…〉 spring of the river of Saon●, a little above the borough which they call Buffan; 〈…〉 ●●uing passed by the towns of Estraye, Remiremont, Espinal, Charms, and Bayon, 〈◊〉 directly to Tou●, then to 〈◊〉, and through the country of M●ssin, and from shreves it falls into the 〈…〉 L●cius' Verus had a design, in the time of the Emperor Nero to join the ●ivers of Moselle and Saone together by a channel, to the end 〈…〉 out of Italy by sea, then being carried by the Rhosne; 〈…〉 the Moselle, then into the Rhein, and 〈…〉 of passage being taken away, they might pass 〈…〉 the North, as ●Cor●●lius T●ci●us saith. The river of Meurte, 〈…〉 other 〈◊〉 draws by little and little near unto Moselle in a plain 〈…〉 many meadows, and doth accompany it for a good space, there being but a small distance of ground between the two channels but in the end, near unto Conde, 〈…〉 right 〈…〉 itself with Moselle, which doth also receive the 〈…〉  
〈…〉 is Nancy, the Duke's ordinary abode; it is not great, 〈…〉 is pleasing and commodious, and the Duke's palace is reasonably fair: 〈…〉 to ●● seen the Church of S. George, wherein is the tomb of Charles the Hardy, Duke of Bourgondie, slain in battle by the Suiffes and Lorrainers, in the year 1477: There are in the same Church of S. George certain tombs of Dukes of Lorraine without any inscription: there are of the like manner in other Churches; for they have no particular place appointed for that effect. The better part of the last Dukes is at saint Francis, which is on the other side of the Palace: there is to be seen the stately tomb of Rene, who vanquished Charles of Bourgondie; and there are also intened Duke An●●onie, and Francis his son, and Cl●●de of Valois, wife to Charles, and daughter to king 〈◊〉 the second. The 〈◊〉 of M●●ite passed by the walls of Nancy, near unto the 〈…〉 the place whereas the 〈…〉 our gondie died, by a little river which he 〈…〉 past, for a 〈…〉 there was a cross of stone set up, with an 〈…〉 in French upon a plate of 〈◊〉. A little above it; at the place whereas they say 〈◊〉 battle was 〈…〉 which they call the Bourgondians, with a 〈◊〉 yard, 〈…〉 there are French verses g●●●en in memory of this battle.  
Next unto Nancy they place Saint Nicholas, the which is very well peopled for the 〈…〉 the relics of Saint Ni●ho●●●, 〈◊〉 this place is so augmented 〈…〉 as it may well be termed one of the best towns of Lorraine, if it were 〈…〉 well 〈◊〉, and the streets so 〈◊〉 and it is so well peopled 〈…〉 and work 〈◊〉 of all sorts.  
A 〈…〉, three leagues off 〈…〉 little farther of Bayon 〈…〉 from thence is Po●t a 〈◊〉 on, famous for the 〈…〉 then Ch●●meses, Cha●●enoy, M●●anges, and Vauconleur, whereas 〈…〉 under Bres●e, Dompaire, Denure, 〈…〉, Mugs●a●, Ma●chain▪ ●ille, E●pyna●● 〈…〉, and 〈◊〉 leagues from Nancy are Vaig●y, 〈…〉.  
The Ear●● 〈…〉 are Va●●●m●nt, which is ●ive small leagues from Nancy; 〈…〉 from Mets towards the 〈◊〉 the which was 〈…〉 the Chancery of Lorraine; Rich court near unto 〈…〉 which they call 〈◊〉 lake, from whence doth 〈◊〉 which doth mingle 〈…〉 the town of Ros●e●eses; Remiremont 〈…〉 most Southern 〈…〉 into Moselle.  
〈…〉 where there is 〈…〉 from Nancy, S. 〈…〉 we must join the 〈…〉 chastell● The chief, town● is Bar le Duke, so called to distinguish it from Bar upon Seine, & Bar upon Aube. ●he 〈◊〉 towns are la Motte, Ligny, and Arq, there are some others, but they deserve not 〈◊〉 mentioned. This Duchy (comprehending Barrois) is four days journey long 〈…〉 unto Darne, and th●ee from Bar le Duke unto Biche.  

¶ The Quality.  
〈…〉 that Lorraine joins close, and is intermixed with mountains and forests, 〈…〉 is not any need of other provinces, yielding wheat and wine sufficient for 〈…〉 provision: they breed divers sorts of cattle. There are many pools and lakes 〈…〉 with fish, and baths which should be much esteemed, and salt pits whose 〈◊〉 reasonable good: it yields divers metals, as silver, copper, iron, tin, lead, neither 〈◊〉 want pearls, which they do fish at the foot of the mountain Vogese, otherwise 〈◊〉 the mount of Faucilles: they do also found storres which the inhabitants call Azure, 〈◊〉: they have also matter whereof they make looking glasses and other works of 〈◊〉, the like whereof are not to be found in other provinces of Europe: there are cassi 〈◊〉 of an 〈◊〉 able greatness, so as they make fair cups of some pieces: more 〈◊〉 they breed very good horses in Lorraine, whereof many do equal them of Turkey ●● Naples. The river of Moselle hath great store of Salmon, perches, tenches, and other 〈◊〉. Among other things, there is a lake four●teen leagues in compass, where they found carp three foot long, which have a wonderful pleasing taste.   

¶ The Manners.  
〈…〉 it may seem that I have comprehended the manners of them of Lorraine, 〈…〉 of France, yet it shall not be●●●● to speak something thereof in 〈…〉 are mingled touching their manner scanned to speak more plainly, they 〈…〉 of the French, and something of the Germaneiss they have part of the 〈…〉 and 〈◊〉; but they have not 〈◊〉 good a grace in their behaviour, and 〈…〉 more rude their conversation, having 〈◊〉 of carriage which would 〈…〉 of: in the court of ●rance, nor among 〈…〉 which live far from 〈…〉 they could never defend themselves 〈◊〉 from the contagion of 〈…〉 neighbourhoody whom they do also imita● for the most pa●● in their free 〈…〉 come good soldiers out of Lorraine, and I have see●e ●●●upess which have 〈…〉. The people are of free disposition, and 〈…〉 in many 〈…〉: if any one will seem to be 〈…〉 will 〈…〉 but shallow ●or they have no such politic heads, although there be, 〈…〉 〈…〉 as in other country's 〈…〉 〈…〉 noble; whereof some live 〈…〉 〈…〉 to the French. Above all the duke of Lorrai●e 〈…〉 〈…〉 in every thing in which (for that in 〈◊〉) 〈…〉 〈…〉 amongst 〈…〉 there 〈…〉 〈…〉 the duke's 〈◊〉 and 〈…〉 〈…〉 of his perfection 〈◊〉 that the good parts 〈…〉 〈…〉 which they have 〈…〉 and which they 〈…〉 〈…〉 whereas courtiesie 〈…〉 〈…〉 express them, or with judge of them aid 〈…〉   

¶ The 〈◊〉.  
AT this day the in 〈…〉 great commodity of the Az●ie stones which they found in Lorraine, and of the pearls which they fish at the foot of the mountain of Vogese: they do also make much money of a centaine matter of substance which they have to make ●ooking glass', and other glass works, as also of their Cassidonie stones, which 〈…〉 and 〈◊〉 to make e●es●ellss or cups. The horses of Lorraine do also 〈…〉 masters, who ●●ll many of them. The Lorrainers do also 〈…〉 cloth and their works, which they transport and cell 〈…〉 and 〈…〉 and the mines of silver are beneficial to this  
〈…〉 of his country five hundred thousand crowns 〈…〉 which yields him two hundred thousand crowns 〈…〉 of the lake which hath fourteen leagues in circuit (as we have said) 〈…〉 twenty thousand 〈◊〉, or two thousand pounds star●ing and the rest 〈…〉 from wood, come, meadowed, 〈◊〉 of silver, and such like. The people are 〈…〉, so as they live in peace and grow daily more rich.   

¶ The Forces.  
THe chief sort of Lorraine is the town of Nancy, which they began to augment and fortify after a royal manner in the year 1587., for that the duke fearing that the Germane who passed then into France with a great army, which in show would make allto 〈…〉 ruin● hi●●owne 〈…〉, he walled the suburbs about, enlarged 〈…〉 of the 〈…〉 defeat with such speed as he thought it 〈…〉 the discretion of that 〈…〉 the duke h●th since 〈◊〉 the work, so as 〈…〉 There is in Nancy an 〈…〉 with 〈◊〉 sword both Europe. Bar le Duke 〈…〉 the high and the low ●owne: there are some 〈…〉, bu● they are 〈◊〉. This prince may assure 〈…〉 and want no courage; 〈…〉 peopled as it is, and furnished 〈…〉 should assault him: but 〈…〉 very good corresponde●●● 〈◊〉 the german princes,  
〈…〉 with him, nor any subject 〈…〉, he hath also the States of 〈…〉, but they waver, and stand 〈…〉 with his neighbours, 〈…〉 for the king of Spain, 〈…〉 he hath no pretension that may 〈…〉 to be 〈…〉, 〈◊〉 the one, nor the other 〈…〉 which he hath contracted 〈…〉 of Bourbon 〈…〉, who died in the year 〈…〉: so as the support of 〈…〉 from 〈…〉 princes his 〈…〉 for the preservation of their own Estates than to 〈…〉 and small Estate would make the duke to live always 〈…〉, seeing that he exceeds them in means, 〈…〉 and 〈◊〉 territory.    

THE DUKE'S OF LORRAINE.  
LOrraine in former times had kings, who commanded a far greater country than that which we see at this day under the duke's power and jurisdiction: as for the succession of these dukes, i● hath been often interrupted. The first that was made duke was called Charles, and the second was Otho, ●hose time Lorraine was separated from Alsacia, and Alsacia was made a Langrafat:  
〈◊〉 Otho died about the year 1020, he had for his successor.  
godfrey his son, who died in the year 1070, his successor was  
godfrey the Crookeba●ke, who was slain in the year 1076.  
Then the Emperor Henry the fourth gave this duchy to his son Conrade, but it 〈◊〉 afterwards restored to the house of Godfrey, that is, to his nephew by his sister, which 〈◊〉 Godfrey of Billon, king of jerusalem.  
Baldwin his brother succeeded in the realm and duchy, and after him the third brother called Eustache; yet some say that after Baldwin, Henry of Limbourg held the duchy by force, and was the seventh duke in the year 1106.  
After that the Emperor Henry the fift gave that duchy to William Earl of Louvain, who had for successor  
Theodori●ke his son.  
Thiba●d son to Theodoricke, to whom succeeded  
Fred●ri●ke, under whom the country of Brabant was divided from Lorraine.  
After Frederi●ke, one Matthew was duke, who left after him his son called Simon, and ●●oth●● 〈◊〉 named Frederick, who died in the year of Grace 1239, this had for his 〈◊〉.  
Matthew his son, than  
Frederick son to Matthew, and after Frederick,  
Thiba●d his son, who died in the year 1311.  
Frederick, son to Thibaud.  
Rao●l, son to Frederick, who died in the year 1346.  
john, son to Raoul, who married Sophia, daughter to Ebernard earl of Wertemberg, and died in the year 1382, he was buried at Nancy, and left for his successor  
Charles his son, who had one only daughter married to Renè king of Sicily, son to Lewis duke of Anjou: this was duke of Lorraine in the right of his wife: He left one son called john, and a daughter whose name was Yoland, who was wife unto Frederick of Vaudemont.  
john succeeded Renè his father, and left after him  
Nicholas his son, who died without heirs in the year 1464.  
Then Lorraine came into the hands of Frederick son to Anthony earl of Vaudemont, 〈◊〉 reason of his wife Yoland, daughter to Renè king of Sicily: ●his man restored 〈◊〉 duchy to the power of them of the house of Billon, and from him are descended all ●●●m which have the domination of the house of Lorraine, whereof I will seek to set down the Genealogy.  
frederick of Vaudemont had for successor  
〈◊〉 duke of Lorraine, and earl of Vaudemont, who having been expelled his estate, ●●●les duke of Bourgondie, recovered it again with the help and assistance of the 〈◊〉 kill his enemy in a battle which was given near unto Nancy. This prince 〈…〉 away his first wife, who was daughter to the earl of tankerville, being barren, ●ried Philip daughter to Ad●lfo of 〈◊〉▪ duke of Gueldres; he died in the year 〈◊〉, and left  

Anthony duke of Calab●●●, Lorraine, and Bar, Marquis of Po●● 〈◊〉 Moun●●on, earl of Vande●●● and Aspremont, who died in the year 〈…〉 

〈◊〉 duke of Calabria 〈…〉, he died in the 〈◊〉 1●46; havi 〈…〉 Christian 〈…〉. 

Charles duke of Calabria, Lorraine, and Bar, 〈◊〉 who married Cl●ude of Valois, daughter to Henry the second, the French king, who left 

〈◊〉 duke of Calabria, Lor●aine, Bar, etc.  
Charles Cardi●●● of Lorraine, 〈◊〉 of Mets, and the 〈◊〉 of Vaudemont.      
Ni●hol. of Lorrique 〈◊〉, duke of Me●cu●t, who among other children had Loysa wife to king Henry the third, a fair and virtuous princess.    
claud of Lorraine, duke of Guise and Aumale, the most famous prince of his time for war, who married Antoni●●to of Bourbon, daughter to Francis duke of Vendosme. 

Francis duke of Guise, who was slain before Orleans by Foltrot in the year 1563, his wife was Anne, daughter to Hercules of Est, duke of Ferrara. 

Henry duke of Guise, father to him that now lives  
Lewis Cardinal of Guise  
Charles Duke of Mayenne.    
Marry married first to the Duke of Longueville, & afterwards to james the fift king of Scotland.  
claud duke of Aumale, the Marquis of Elbeuf, the Cardinals of Lorraine, and Guise, & the great prior of France.        

The Estate of the Low Countries.  

DISCOURSE OF THE STATE OF THE LOW COUNTRIES NOW IN THE POSSESSION OF THE ARCHDUKE ALBERT OF AUSTRIA.  

The Contents.  
1. WHy the Low Countries were so called. 2. The situation and limits, circuit and greatness. 3. The most famous rivers of the Low Countries, their springs and courses. 4. Division of the country into seventeen Provinces, and how many towns and villages are in every Province. 5. How they have been united under one Lord, and reduced under the dominion of Spain. 6. Donaation of the Netherlands, made by Philip the second, King of Spain, to the Infanta his daughter in favour of her marriage with the Archduke Albert. 7. How the Archduke▪ ●arke possession of the Low Countries by virtue of a procuration from his future spouse the Infants of ●●aine. 8. The countries which are at this day under the Archdukes, and the descripti●● of 〈◊〉 towns, beginning with Flaunders. 9 Description of the country of Artois, and of the 〈◊〉 of most note. 10. Of Cambresis and the limits. 11. Of Haynault. 12. Of Nama●. 13. Of Luxembourg. 14. Of Brabant. 15. The Low countries fit to breed cattle. 16. The sea of the Low countries, with their commodities, and discommodities. 17. The forests 〈◊〉 namely of the forest of Ardenne. 18. Disposition of the inhabitants of the Low country's: 〈◊〉 how they love liberty. 19 Excellent painters in the Low countries: and who was the first that mingled colours with oil. 20. The prince's revenues, whereunto they may 〈◊〉. 21. His forces consisting in forts, and an army entertained in his garrisons. 22. The form of government of the Low countries: of the princes three councils, and by what allows the said councils govern themselves: of the commissioners sent into Provinces, and how 〈◊〉 assemble the Estates. 23. Of the religion of the Low countries, and of the united 〈◊〉. 24. Archbishops and Bishops in the Low countries. 25. A catalogue of the Lords 〈…〉 of Fla●nders, their reign and death. 26. Articles of the trucé made in the year 〈…〉 betwixt the Archdukes and the Estates of the united Provinces.   

ALthough that the affairs of this Estate have been heretofore many times very intricat & much confused, by reason of the divers possesses: sors which have enjoyed these Provinces, sometimes distinctly and sometimes altogether: yet I hope to make all plain, and to writ it orderly and without obscurity. For having first set down in general the limits, and circuit of all these countries, how they were divided into seventeen Provinces, how, and by whom they were 〈…〉 one Lord, and when, and by what means they came unto the house of 〈…〉 will afterwards come to set down in particular, that which is at this present 〈◊〉 the command of the most famous princes the Archdukes Albert of Austria, and ●●●bella Clara Eugenia sister to Philip the third, now king of Spain, and by what means 〈◊〉 came to the possession of the said countries: and on the other side I will represent that which the Estates of the united provinces do now hold. If I shall not herein content the most curious as the lea●t, I may oppose the difficulty of the enterprise, and the pain I 〈…〉 them; relating that which I have seen myself, being in the 〈…〉 by the discourse of others  
And to begin, base or low Germany is so called, for that the manners, language, and 〈…〉 differ not much from the other Germans. The name of Low is given it, for that this country is nearer to the sea, than the rest of Germany, and also 〈…〉 of the higher, their fields are more flat and lie lower: they of the country 〈…〉 language Nederlant: they do also call it Flanders in a manner throughout all 〈…〉 for all, either for the power or beauty of that country in 〈…〉 reason of the great traffic and ancient Fairs of Bruges, whither 〈◊〉 were wont to come from all parts; or for that this country being nearer unto 〈◊〉, Spain, Italy, and England, the name was better known and more divulged than the rest.  
But leaving this curiosity, which I hold superfluous, as all others that are of the like nature: the Low Countries hath for her bounds upon the North side, the Ocean; towards the South, Lorraine and Champagne; upon the East, the rivers of Mouse and Rhein; and to the West, the sea, and that part of Artois which joins with Picardy. All this country hath in circuit according unto Guicchar din, a thousand Italian miles, or three hundred and for●ie leagues of Flaunders; and it contains seven degrees and a half of longitude, that is to say, from the two and twentieth degree and a half unto the thirtieth: But as for the latitude, it comprehends five degrees, that is to say, from the eight and fortieth 〈◊〉 and a half, unto the three and fiftieth and a half: by reason whereof, the Low Country is set betwixt the midst of the seventh Climate, and the beginning of the 〈◊〉; and in this space the difference of the longest day in Summer is three quarters of 〈◊〉 hou●e: for in the midst of the seventh climate the longest day is but sixteen ●ouress, and ●n the beginning of the 〈◊〉 is sixteen hours and three quarters. And this country contains all the parallels, which are betwixt the sixteenth and the one and twentieth.  
The principal rivers of these provinces are the Rhein, M●use, Escaud, and Ems: the les●er are Moselle, A●, Sambre, De●e, Demere, Nothe, Ruer, Berckel, Niers, Scarpe, Dentre, Hayne and others: the greatest is the Rhein, whereof we will speak in our discourse of Germany. As for the Mouse it comes from Mount Vaugez, not far from the springs of Seine and Ma●●ne and running towards the North it passeth by Saint Thibaud, where it gins to be navigable from thence it runs to Verdun, Moson and Mezieres; and then ●urning towards the North-east, it passeth by Charlemont, Bovines, Dinan, and Namur; and there receiving Sambre, it goes to Stochem, Ruremond, and Ventlo, where turning towards the West it runs by the towns of Cuick, Grave, Rau●●●in, and Meghen: then receiving a part of Rhein at the town of Herwede, and giving also of her waters, she mingles with the Wale: and then presently these two rivers retaining their own names, divide themselves and run apart to Lavestein, where they compass in the Island of Bornwell 〈◊〉 and then the yanees again and change their names for that of Merou; so passing of 〈◊〉 his manner to Wo●●●●●m and Gorko●●, they grow very great at Dordrecht, where 〈…〉 the Island of 〈◊〉, the Mouse takes her own name again, and keeping 〈…〉 Rotterdam and Vlaer dingue, she falls into the sea near unto Briel 〈…〉 violence, as for a long space the wa●erss continued f●esh.  
As 〈…〉 it comes out of Ve●●●●●dois near unto the Abbey of Saint Mar●●●, than 〈◊〉 betwixt Capelet and Beaurevoi●, it goes to Cambray: running 〈◊〉 then 〈…〉 country of Hayna●lt, it baths the town of Valenciennes; 〈◊〉 ●rowing 〈…〉 received the 〈◊〉 of Hayne, it passeth by Conde, then 〈…〉 by Scarape, it runs by Saint Amand, and from thence turning towards 〈…〉 it passeth by Tournay, Audenard, and Gand, where it receives the rivers of 〈…〉 some other waters: from thence it turns serpent-wise to Denremonde, 〈…〉 the river of Denre, it passeth to Rupelmonde, and there receives the river 〈◊〉, and soon after Deal: being thus grown great, it goes and washeth the 〈…〉, and makes a good and safeport for shipping; then running on and 〈◊〉 ●elfe into two branches, it divides Brabant and Flanders from Zealand, for that 〈◊〉 on the left hand towards the South, it follows the banks of Flanders, & taking 〈◊〉 name, is called the Hont, and from thence runs into the Western sea by 〈◊〉, and Walachrie; and on the right hand, having left the confines of Brabant, 〈◊〉 her course, and keeping the old channel, she falls into the Ocean by the banks 〈◊〉 the Island of Escaud. To conclude, this river flows up as far as Gand, which is 〈◊〉 thirty miles, accounting the crooked turnings. As for the rest, I refer the 〈◊〉 to the reading of Geographers, with whom (in my opinion) I have been too 〈◊〉.  
The Low-countaies contrines seventeen Provinces, that is to say, four duchies, Bra●●nt, Limbourg, Luxembourg, and Gueldres: eight earldoms, Holland, Zealand, Flan●●rss, Artois, Haynault, Namur, Zutphen, and the Marquisat of the sacred Empire: and 〈◊〉 seigneuries or lordships, that is, Macklin, Vtrecht, Friesland, Oueryssel, and 〈◊〉 . They are called seventeen Provinces, for that they have given 17 titles to princes; and there can be given no other reason of this appellation, although there be more provinces. They are not all called to their general assemblies, neither do they give their vo●●●ss, nor contribute according to this order in general impositions: for the Marquisat o● 〈◊〉 sacred Empire of Antuerpe is not numbered among the provinces: The duchy of ●●mbourg, with Walkenbourg and Dalem, go under Brabant: Tournay and 〈◊〉 with Lis●e, Dovay, and Orchies, are not commonly named among the 〈◊〉 ●●●●●ncess, and yet they both contribute, either as a province, and so do Valen●●●●●●● 〈◊〉 trente. This country, about the year 1550, in the time of the Emper●●● 〈…〉, did grant unto the Emperor, according to his demand, the sum 〈…〉 a month, the which they called Noventale. Limbourg, Luxenbourg, 
Every Florin is two shillings  〈◊〉 and Grouningue, were not taxed for this imposition, being frontier countries, 〈…〉 impoverished; so as there were none but these thirteen provinces and towns 〈…〉 ●●●●●ibute, that is to say, Brabant, Flanders, Artois, Haynault, Valenciennes, 〈…〉 duchies, Holland, Zealand, Namur, Tournay, Tournesis, Macklin, & Vtrecht; yet 〈…〉 that the others are not excluded in their convocations and general 〈◊〉.  
They 〈◊〉 ●umbred in this country of the Netherlands, above two hundred walled 〈◊〉 and one hundred and fifty places which had the jurisdiction and privilege of a 〈…〉 above six thousand villages: but during their late long wars, they have been 〈…〉. Yet to content the curious reader, I will set down the number in general, 〈◊〉 ●ay see how many towns and villages are in every province.  

How many Towns and Villages are in every Province of the Low Countries.  
〈…〉 B●A●ANY Towns. 26. Villages. 700. LYXEMBOURG 23. 1169. L●MBOURG 5. 123. G●●LDRE 24. 300. In the eight Earldoms HOLEAND, Towns. 23. Villages. 400. ZEALAND, 10. 101. FLANDERS, 35. 1178. ARTOIS, 12. 754. HAYNAULT, 24. 950. NAMUR, 4. 184. ZUTPHEN.     THE MARQVISAT.     In the fi●e Lo● 〈◊〉 VTRECHT, towns. 5. Villages. 70. FRIS●LAND, 11. 345. OVERYSSEL, 11. 101. GROUNINGVE, 1. 145. MACKLIN, 1. 9  
〈◊〉 the birth of Christ, the Romans and julius Caesar comprehended this country under Gaul Belgike, so called, for that the inhabitants being haughty and hardy ●ould not endure the loss of their liberty, customs, and privileges: so as by the report of Caesar, they were the most valiant people of all Gaul: They had then divers names, and they were called Germane, Bataves, Frisons, Aduatices, Menapiens, Atrebates, Neruins, Morins, etc. The Germane are at this day the Allemans'. The Bataves are the Hollanders, and part of Gueldres: the Frisons are they of Friesland: the Aduatices they of Antuerp: the Menapiens part of Gueldres, and part of Cleves: the Atrebates they of Arras, and thereabout: The Neruins they of Tourney: the Morins they of Flanders, etc.  
The country being divided into provinces, they have received certain lords as 〈◊〉, but with certain conditions, having a care they should not grow too mighty, ●east they should be brought into subjection: and therefore they loved them best when ●hey were but young. These provinces living thus in peace with their lords, and banding together in 〈◊〉 of necessity, they did many times perform great deeds of arms, as well against the Romans as other nations, yea against the Turks and Sarrasins, whereof they made good proof under the conduct of Godfrey of Boüillon, and other kings of Jerusalem, as also under Bal●win earl of Flanders, who won the empire of Constantinople: and in many such like enterprises, as may be seen in their Chronicles and Histories, so as they have been always much esteemed and feared. Finally, it is a nation of whom that famous Historiographer Cor●●tius Tacitus hath written as followeth, The Gauls did fight for their liberty, the Germane for booty, but the Hollanders for glory and honour. And therefore the Roman Emperors made choice of them for their guards, holding them to be faithful and ●ore valiant tha● all the people of the world.  
Although that all these provinces of the Low Countries have been herertofore divers sovereignties under different princes; yet in the end, they have been reduced under four dukes of Bourgo●die, then under the Archdukes of Austria, and in the end, under one Lord, that is to say, under the Emperor Charles the fift, and his son Philip king of Spain: it will be fit to make a brief repetition, how, when, and by what manner they have been reduced under these last, and that it may remain for a perpetual memory, that the Spaniards are come to the government of these Low Countries, not to govern them as their own subjects, that is to say, as being subject to their laws, but as a free people, observing their own laws and privileges.  
〈…〉 being in his father's right earl of Flanders, Nevers, Rethel, Salines, Antuerpe 〈◊〉 Macklin; and by his mother, earl of Bourgondie & Artois; had one only daughter, called Marguerite, whom he had by his wife Marguerite daughter to john 3 duke of Brabant: the daughter was married at Gand, in the year 1369, to Philip of Valois, surnamed the Hardy, who was at that time duke of Bourgondie, and the youngest son of ●●hn the French king: of them was borne john, called, Without fear, earl of Flanders, Bourgondie, Artois etc. This john of valois in the year 1415 married with Marguerite daughter to the Earl of Haynalt, Holland, Zealand, and Frieseland, and was murdered at Montereau in France, by the Dolphin's instigation, in the year 1419, the nineteenth of September, being eight and forty years old, and having reigned fifteenth his only son, Philip the Good, succeeded in his place at the age of three and twenty years, being duke of Bourgondie, Earl of Flaunders, Artois and Bourgondie, Palatine, Marquis of the sacred Empire, and Lord of Salines and Macklin. Moreover in the year 1429, by the death of Dideric Earl of Namur, he succeeded in the said Earldom of Namur, having first bought it; and by the death of Philip duke of Brabant, who died without children, he had in the year 1430 the Duchies of Lorraine, Brabant, and Limbourg; and also by the decease of jacoba or jaqueline countess of Holland etc. his niece, he had in the year 1436, the Earldoms of Haynault, Holland, Zealand, and Frieseland; in the year 1443 his aunt gave him the Duchy of Luxembourg, first as tutor, and then as lord. He was the first of the house of Bourgondie that did institut the order of the Golden Fleece a● Bruges in Flaunders, whenas he married Isabella of Portugal: he died at Bruges in the year 1467, being twenty and seven years old, having reigned eight and forty years. He left for heir to all these countries one only son, whose name was Charles of valois or the Warrior, who succeeded his father in the government, being 34 years old: he bought the duchy of Gueldres and the county of Zu●phen of Arnold of Egmond for nine and twenty thousand crowns, and a yearly pension, who dying confirmed the same sale by his testament, making duke Charles his heir, and disinberiting his sonn● Adolph, for that he had rebelled against him, and detained him long in cruel captivity: this duke took possession of the country of Gueldres, in the year 1473, he sought to unite all the provinces of the Netherlands into a realm, promising to that end to give his only daughter in marriage to Maxmilian son to the Emperor Frederick the third, the which he would have called the realm of Bourgondie, for that Bourgondie had been a realm in former times: but for that every province was sovereign, and had distinct privileges, rights, and revenues, yea different weights and measures, they would never yield teherto unless their prince's power had been limited; so as this design took no success. This brave warrior was slain before Nancy, in the year 1477 the fift of january, being betrayed by an Italian Earl called Campobasso, who served him, at the instigation of Lewis the eleventh, having first lost three battles to the Swiffes, and Lorrainers: he was 44 years old, and left one only daughter called Mary of valois, being eighteen years old, who married with Maxmilian of Austria; who recovered that from the French king, which he had taken from his wife: he restored the order of the Golden Fleece, which had been much neglected: they had two children, one son called Philip, and Marguerite their daughter. Marry of Bourgondie, the fift year of her marriage, fell from a horse and died with that fall. Maxmilian governed these countries for a time in favour of his son Philip, but with no good intent; for he sought to alienat and separate from the Low Countries, the provinces of Brabant, Haynault, Holland, and Friesland, to give them to his father Fredricke the Emperor, doing many things in prejudice of those countries. In the year 1492, his son Philip was acknowledged for prince throughout all the Neitherlands, and was confirmed hereditary lord thereof. In the year 1496 he married the lady joane of Spain in the town of Liar in Brabant; so as the Low Countries being before united together by many marriages, are in the end come by this marriage to the house of Spain: and although they seem to have attained thereby a perfect prosperity, yet by this means they are fallen into a long and tedious war, yea into civil wars and combustions, to the great ruin and prejudice of the said countries. So by this means the seventeen provinces were made subject to the government of the king of Spain.  
Philip the second, king of Spain, finding his strength to decay, and his health to impair, desirous to make a final conclusion of the resolution which he had taken to give his eldest daughter Donna Isabel in marriage to the Archduke Albert his nephew (notwithstanding that he enjoyed great ecclesiastical dignities, and especially that rich archbishopric of Toledo) caused prince Philip his only son, being about twenty years 〈◊〉 come into his presence in the town of Madrid the sixt of May, being accompanied by Don Gomes of Auila, marquis of Vellada, governor and chief steward to the 〈◊〉 Prince Philip; Don Christopher de Mora earl of Castel-Rodrigo, great commander 〈◊〉 Alcantara; Don john of Idiaques, great commander of Leon, all three councillors of State; and master Nicholas Damant knight, councillor precedent and chancellor of Brabant; with Lalo secretary for the Low Countries, and no more. Whereas the conclusion of the session and transaction of the Low Countries made by the king unto his said daughter was read, signed, past, and sealed, being in the French tongue as followeth.  
Philip by the grace of God etc. To all present, or to come, that shall see or read these letters, greeting. As we have found it fit, as well for the general good of Christendom as of our Low Countries, no longer to defer the marriage of our most dear and well-beloved eldest daughter the Infanta Isabel Clara Eugenia: and the more inclining thereunto for the preservation of our House, as for certain other good respects: in consideration also of the good affection which we bear unto our most dear and well-beloved brother, cousin and nephew the Archduke Albert, governor and captain general for us in our Low Countries and Bourgondie, having taken notice of his person, and choosing him for future husband to our eldest daughter; as well with the consent of our holy father the Pope, who hath thereupon granted his dispensation, as also having imparted it to the most high, most excellent, and most mighty prince our dear and well-beloved brother, cousin, and nephew Rodolph, the second of that name, Emperor of the Romans, and also to our most dear & well-beloved good sister the Empress his mother. Which considered, and to the end that our said daughter may (as it is fit) have means according to her graces, virtues and merits; yea and for our parts to make known the great love and affection which we have always borne to our said Low Countries, and Bourgondie: We have resolved to transport and give to our said daughter (in favour of the said marriage) our Low Countries, and all that depends thereon, in manner and form as shall be hereafter specified: and that by the means and intervention, will, and consent of our most dear and well-beloved good and only son and heir prince Philip, according to the advertisements which have been given by us, and our said son, unto the chief lords and knights of our Order, Consuls, and Estates of our said Low Countries, being under our obedience, and also to them of our country and county of Bourgondie: who have testified and made known by their answer, the joy and content which they had of this our favourable resolution, the which they confess to be necessary for the good of our said Low Countries. And this is the true means to attain to a good peace and union, to be freed from that painful war wherewith they have been afflicted for so many years, which peace and rest we have always wished them: considering also (the which is notorious to the world) that the greatest happiness that may come unto a country, is to see itself governed by the eye and presence of their natural lord and prince. God is a witness of the care and pain we have often had, that we could not do that in person which we would willingly have desired, if the affairs of great importance of our realms of Spain, had not tied us to continued, and make our residence there, and not to absent ourselves, as we are yet bound at this present. And although that by the age of the prince our son, it seems that it would be more fit and convenient now then at our first voyage; yet the will and pleasure of the good God hath been such, having given us so many realms and provinces, in which there never want affairs of great importance, by reason whereof his presence is also necessary here: whereupon we have found it expedient to take this good resolution, for that we would not abandon our Low Countries to those inconveniences, wherein they have been formerly; adding thereunto the reasons of a portion which we are to give unto our daughter the Infanta according to her merits, and the greatness of her birth: transferring them unto her in particular, for that after our said son the prince (whom God preserve many years, making him to prospero in his service) our said eldest daughter is the first and next of blood: and that with the consent of our said son, she may be presently admitted thereunto; having chosen these means upon hope that thereby our said Low Countries shall recover their former glory and prosperity, which they were wont to enjoy.  
We therefore make it known, that desiring to put in effect that which we have so maturely resolved; hearing the voluntary consent which our said son the prince hath so freely given for his part, and knowing the submissions whereunto our said countries have conformed themselves according to our intention: We have resolved to give and transport unto our said daughter the Infanta, in advancement of the said marriage, all our said Low Countries, and Bourgondie, in manner and form, and with the conditions hereafter mentioned.  
1 The first condition is, and not otherwise, That the said Infanta our daughter shall join in marriage with the Archduke Albert, considering the dispensation which hath been granted by our holy father the Pope to that end: and that by way of donation, or gift, she receive our said Low Countries, and county of Bourgondie. And in case the said marriage shall be hindered by any occasion whatsoever, this present donation or session shall be voided and take no effect: in which case we do presently revoke it, and make it voided.  
2 Item, upon condition, and not otherwise, That the children and successors of the same marriage, be they males or females lawfully begotten, and not unlawful, although 〈◊〉 were by a subsequent marriage, the elder praeceding the younger, and the male the female; shall from hand to hand be heirs in the same degree of all the said provinces jointly, without any division, or distraction, or dismembering thereof: declaring that the eldest son, or daughter, after the death of the father, shall be preferred before the uncles, or any other of the collateral line.  
3 Item, upon condition, and not otherwise, That in case (which God forbidden) there be neither son nor daughter of this marriage; or that they die after the death of the Archduke Albert, or of our daughter the Infanta, the said donation, session, and transport, shall be voided and of no force: In which case if our said daughter the Infanta shall remain a widow, her lawful portion by the fatherside, and the donation by the mother-side, such as may be fitting and belonging to her, shall follow; besides that which we, or our son the prince, for the love we bear unto her, shall give her. And if the said Archduke Albert (our good cousin) shall survive the said Infanta, he shall remain governor of the said Low Countries, for, and in the name of the Prince Proprietary to whom they shall be devolved.  
4 Item, upon condition, and not otherwise, That all the descendants of this marriage, males and females failing, so as not any one should remain of them that are called to these estates, in that case they shall all return unto the king of Spain, which shall be descended from us; and according to this donation and session, in that case we make him presently donatorie, as being given unto him.  
5 Item, upon condition, and not otherwise, That our said daughter the Infanta, nor any other called to the said succession, shall not for any cause whatsoever divide, or dismember the said countries, neither give, not exchange, without our consent, and of those which shall be our heirs and successors in these realms.  
6 Item, upon condition, and not otherwise, That whosoever shallbe princess or lady of the said Low Countries, shall marry with the king of Spain, or with the prince his son, who shall be then living, with a former dispensation, if need shall require: and if then they shall have no will nor power to consumat the said marriage, in that case the said lady shall not take any other husband, nor meddle with any donation, without our advice and consent, and of our heirs and successors in our said realms of Spain, which shall be ●●●ed from us: and in case of contravention, all that hath been given and granted shall return, as if this donation, session, and transport, had never been made.  
7 Item, upon condition, and not otherwise, That all and every prince and lord of the said countries shall be bound to marry their sons and daughters by our advise and ●●●sent, and of those that shall be our heirs and successors kings of Spain.  
8 Item, upon condition, and not otherwise, That neither our said daughter the Inf●●●● nor her husband, nor any of their successors, to whom the said countries shall fall, 〈◊〉 any sort negotiate or traffic to the East or West Indies, nor sand any ships upon any colour or pretext whatsoever, upon pain of forfeiture of the said countries, in case of contravention: And if any subjects of the said countries shall presume to go contrary to this defence, the lords of the said countries shall punish them by confiscation of goods, and other grievous punishments, yea by death.  
9 Item, upon condition, and not otherwise, That if the said Archduke Albert (our good cousin) shall survive our daughter the Infanta, leaving either sons or daughters, he shall have the government of that son or daughter, with the government of their estates, as if our said daughter the Infanta were yet living. And moreover, our said cousin the Archduke shall enjoy all the said countries during his life, entertaining the said children according to their qualities, giving unto the eldest son, or daughter, the duchy of Luxembourg, and the county of Chiny, which they should enjoy during their father's life: after whose death that child shall have all, as heir general: being here expressly declared, that this clause of Enjoying it during life, shall be only understood in favour of our said good cousin the Archduke Albert, without drawing it into consequence, to the end that none of his successors may urge any example, nor pretend any right in the like case.  
10 Item, upon condition, and not otherwise, as being the principal and greatest bond of all others, That all the children and descendants of the said marriage, shall follow the holy religion which doth now shine in them, and shall live and die in our holy Catholic faith, as the holy Church of Rome doth teach; and that before they take possession of the said Low Countries, they shall take the oath which followeth. And in case (which God forbidden) that any of the said descendants shall decline from the said religion, and fall into heresy, after that our holy father the Pope hath so pronounced them, they shall be deprived of the administration, possession, and propriety of the said provinces, and their vassals and subjects freed from th●ir obedience; but they shall receive the next Catholic kinsman of the same descent, who shall succeed him that is thus strayed from the faith, being reputed for a dead man.  
Ego ●uro ad Sancta Dei Euangeliaquod semper ad extremum vitae meae spiritum sacrosancta● fidem Catholicam, quam tenet, docet, & praedicat, Sancta Catholica, & Apostolica Ecclesia Romana (Communium Ecclesiarum matter & magistra) constantèr profitebor, & fidelitèr firmiterque credam, & veracitèr tencho: atque eam à meis subditis teneri, doceri, & praedicari (quantum in meerit) curabo. Sic me Deus adiwet, & haec Sancta Dei evangelia.  
11 Item, upon condition, and for the greater assurance and confirmation of the peace, love, and corespondencie, which should be betwixt the king and his realms, Our descendants and successors, and the princes and lords of those countries, our successors also and descendants, every one of them that in future times shall come unto the possession and command of the said Low Countries, and Bourgondie, shall approve and ratify, whatsoever is contained in this Article.  
12 And for that our intention and will is, that the said conditions shall take full effect, We do give, grant, quit, transport, and renounce, in the best manner and form that may be by law, and that no incompatabilitie shall prejudice that which is compatible, necessary, and profitable to the said Infanta, Isabel Clara Eugenia, our most dear and and well-beloved eldest daughter, all our Low Countries, and every province thereof, with the countries and county of Bourgondie, comprehending therein that of Caralois, the duchies, principalities, marquisats, and forts, which are in our Low Countries, and Bourgondie, together with all the regaliites, fees, homages, rights of patronage, re●●ss, revenues, demeans, confiscations, and fines, with all sorts of jurisdictions, rights, and actions, which we might pretend by reason of our Low Countries and Bourgondie; as also all preeminences, prerogatives, privileges, exemptions, guards, protections, liberties, appeals, and all other kind of sovereignty whatsoever, or howsoever they may belong unto us, either by patrimony or otherwise, upon what title soever; to have full possession, as we have enjoyed them, without exception: upon condition notwithstanding that they shall inviolably observe all and every the conditions above mentioned, and the pragmatique made by the deceased, of immortal memory, the Emperor my lord and father, who passed into glory in November 1549, touching the union of the said Low Countries, and not consenting to any division or dismembering thereof, for any cause whatsoever.  
13 And it is our intention, as we do hereby declare & expressly ordain, That in regard of this donation, session, and transport, our said daughter the Infanta, and her future husband the Archduke Albert, shall be bound to pay and discharge all debts, obligations, and contracts made by us, or in our name, or by his deceased imperial majesty, upon the patrimony and demeans of the said Low Countries, and the county of Bourgondie: and they shall be in like manner bound to discharge all rents, pensions for life, and all other gifts, recompenses, and rewards, which his said imperial majesty, we, or our predecessors have given, assigned, and granted to any persons whatsoever.  
And so we do make, created, and name by these presents our said daughter the Infanta, princess and lady of the said Low Countries, and county of Bourgondie and Charalois.  
Moreover we do grant unto our said daughter, That besides the particular titles of every of the said provinces of the Low Countries, and the county of Bourgondie, she may writ and entitle herself Duchess of Bourgondie, notwithstanding that we have reser●●rued (so long as we shall please) for us, and for the prince our son, the said title of Duke of Bourgondie, with all the rights that may belong thereunto, together with the sovereignty of our order of the Golden Fleece, whereof we retain a power to dispose hereafter, as we shall think fit: we do therefore consent, agreed, and give full absolute and irrevocable power to our said daughter the Infanta, of our own private authority, without any further request or consent, either by herself, or by her deputies sent to her future husband, to take full and absolute possession, of all the said Low Countries, county of Bourgondie and Charalois: and to this end, to assemble the general Estates of the said countries, or the particular Estates of every province, or observe any other course that shall be thought fit for this donation, session, and transport: to signify it, and to take the oath due to the Estates and subjects of the said countries, and to require the investiture of every piece and signory where it shall be needful: as also to receive an oath from them, to bind them to all that, whereunto they were reciprocally bound by precedent oaths. And until that our daughter shall take, or cause to be taken in her name the real possession of the said Low Countries and county of Bourgondie, and Charolois, after the same manner that is set down by these patents, We do constitute ourselves possessors thereof, in the name and behalf of our said daughter.  
In witness whereof, We will and ordain that the said Letters Patents shall be delivered unto her: consenting and giving full power to our daughter the Infanta, to retain, admit, and place in the said Low Countries and Bourgondie, Governors, judges, and justices, as well for the preservation and defence thereof, as for the administration of justice and policy, and for the receipt of the revenues, or otherwise: and also to do every thing that a true princess and lady of the propriety of the said countries, may by law, and according to the cuostmes do, and as we have and might have done; always observing the conditions above mentioned: to which effect we have quit, absolved, and discharged, and do quit, absolve, and discharge, by these presents, all Bishops, Abbots, Prelates, and other Churchmen, Dukes, Princes, marquesses, Earls, Barons, Governors, Heads and Captains of Countries, Towns, Courts, Precedents, Councillors, Chancellor▪ accountants, and other justices, Captains, men of war, and Soldiers of forts and 〈◊〉, their Lieutenants, Knights, Esquires, and Vassals, Magistrates, Bourgesses, Inhabitants of good towns, borroughes, freedoms, and villages, and all and every the subjects of our said Low Countries, and county of Bourgondie, and Charolois, of the oath of fidelity, homage, promise and bond which they own unto us as their natural 〈◊〉, and sovereign lord. We will, ordain, and expressly command, that they shall 〈◊〉 and accept the said Infanta our daughter for their true princess and lady; and 〈◊〉 the oath of fealty, homage, promise, and bond, according to the accustomed man 〈◊〉 the nature of the countries, places, fees, and seigneuries: and moreover, that threlfall do unto her and her future husband, all honour, reverence, affection, obedience, fidelity, and service, as good and loyal subjects are bound to their lawful prince and natural lord; as unto this day they have done unto us. And supplying all and every defect and obmission, as well in law as fact, which might have been omitted in this present donation, session, and transport, and which might well have been inserted: of our own motion, certain knowledge, and full and absolute regal power, We have and do derogate to all laws, constitutions, and customs, which may contradict these presents; for such is our pleasure. And to the end that whatsoever hath been spoken, may be for ever firm and stable; We have signed these presents with our hand, & set too our great seal: commanding that it shall be registered in all and every of our privy councils, and chamber of accounts. Given in our town of Madrid, in our realm of Castille, the sixt of May 1598., of our realms of Naples and jerusalem the five and fortieth, of Castille, Arragon, Sicily, and others the four and fortieth, and of Portugal the nineteenth. Signed, Philip. And underneath, By the king. A Laloo.  
This resignation of the Low Countries, was ratified also by the letters patents of prince Philip the third of that name, now king of Spain, as followeth.  
Philip by the grace of God, prince, son and only heir of the realms, countries, and seigneuries of king Philip the second of that name, my lord and father: to all present and ●o come, greeting. Whereas my said lord and father hath taken a resolution to marry the lady Infanta Isabel Clara Eugenia our most dear and well-beloved good sister, to the Archduke Albert our good uncle and cousin; and that thereupon his Catholic majesty hath resolved, with our consent, being moved thereunto, for certain great reasons, and respects of the common good, yea for the general quiet of Christendom, and the particular peace of the Low Countries; to the end that our said sister may be advanced according to her quality and great merits; to give unto her the said Low Countries, and county of Bourgondie, in the same manner and form as it hath been past; as it appears by the letters patents which my said lord and father hath caused to be dispatched, signed with his hand, and sealed with his great seal.  
We make it known, That having particularly understood every point thereof, considering the public good which may thereby redound to Christendom, and for the singular love which we own u●to our good sister the Infanta, in regard of her graces and great merits; We commend, allow, and by these presents hold it good, notwithstanding any prejudice which may hereafter grow thereby unto us, or to our successors: and for the same reasons. We consent, and are content by these presents, that the said Low Countries, and the county of Bourgondie and Charolois, shall be given and transported unto our good sister▪ the Infanta, as my said lord and father hath done. And to the end it may subsist the better, for the greater assurance, and strengthening of that which his majesty hath decreed in favour, and for the advancement of our good sister; We dispose and ordain, as f●r ●s it is needful by these presents, in her favour, and in the same form and manner, of our own free will, without any force, constraint, falsehood, deceit, or any other respect, nor fatherly reverence, fear, error, nor any persuasion, our will and intention being, that the said countries shall belong unto our sister the Infanta Isabel Clara Eugenia, and to her successors, according to the disposition of the king my lord and father: and to the end it may take full effect, and remain for ever firm and stable, We have, and do renounce by these presents, in favour of our said sister, for us and our successors, all benefits, which we or they may by law pretend to contradict, or frustrate these presents: 〈◊〉 it by the law, De restitutione in integrum; to the which we have, and do hereby re 〈◊〉. For our resolute, and determinat will is, that nothing whatsoever shall be of 〈…〉 this donation, session, and transport which hath been made of the said Low Countries.  
Whereupon● We have given our faith, & sworn upon the holy evangel, which We have touched with our hand, to keep, observe, maintain, and accomplish, and to cause to be kept, observed, maintained, and punctually accomplished, all that hath been said, without any excuse or exception made by us, or any of ours: the which We promise' in 〈◊〉 word of a prince: and that We will give all aid and assistance, for the effecting and accomplishing of that which hath been said: being as We have declared our sincere and determinat will. In witness whereof, We have caused these present letters patents to be made, the which We have signed with our own hand, and caused it to be signed by the secretary of State to the king my Lord and father, for the affairs of the Low Countries and Bourgondie: and caused it to be sealed with the great seal of his majesties arms, hanging upon laces of gold. There being present as witnesses D. Gomes de Auila, Marquis of Velada, our governor and high steward of our household: D. Christopher de Mora, earl of castle Rodrigo, great commander of Alcantara, gentleman of his majesties chamber, and butler to our person: D. john of Idiaques, great commander of Leon, all three Councillors of State, and master Nicholas Amant knight also, and Councillor of State, keeper of his majesties seals for the affairs of the Low Countries, and Bourgondie, and Chancellor of the duchy of Brabant. Given in the town of Mad●id, in the realm of Castille, the sixt of May 1598. Signed Philip. And underneath, By commandment from my Lord the prince. A Laloo.  
These two letters patents of Resignation from the king, and agreation from the prince, were both sealed with one seal in read wax, and laces of gold.  
These instruments being thus read, signed, and sealed, autentically, the prince of Spain arose, and went and kissed his father's hands, thanking him for the love he bore unto his sister: then addressing himself unto his said sister, he did congratulat the good which she had received that day: who rising, went and kissed the king her father's hands, humbly thanking him for his bounty; as also, she gave thanks unto the prince her brother. Whereupon the assembly being dismissed, the rest of the day, and night, was spent joyfully in Court, and had been more, if the king's indisposition (who began to grow weak) had not hindered it.  
Two days after, which was the eighth of May, the Empress (who was the king's sister, and mother to the Archduke Albert) came to court, being accompanied by the Ambassador of the Emperor her son, by the Marquis of Velada, D. Christopher de Mora, D. john Idiaques, and others, whereas the marriage treated of, was confirmed: the Infanta binding herself by oath, in the hands of the said Empress, to marry the Archduke Albert of Austria, according to his majesties good pleasure: Whereupon, the said lady Empress bound herself reciprocally, that the said Archduke her son should take her to wife, by virtue of a special procuration which he had sent her. Then the Infanta advanced to kiss the empress hand, who was her aunt (and future mother in law) but she would not suffer her, embracing her very kindly. In the end, after many courtesies, and amiable compliments, the empress beginning to retire herself, the Infanta kneeled down, and would have kissed her hand again, but she drew it back, and raising her up, kissed her cheek, and so they parted.  
All this being thus past, the Infanta sent a procuration in quality of princess of the Low Countries, to the Archduke her future husband, as followeth.  
Isabel Clara Eugenia by the grace of God Infanta of all the realms of Spain, duchess of Bourgondie, Lothier, Brabant, Limbourg, and Luxembourg, Countess of Flanders, Artois, Bourgondie, Palatine, and of Hainault, Holland, Zealand, Namur, and Zurphin, marquess of the sacred Empire, lady of Friesland, Salins, & Macklin, of the country and city of Vtrecht, of Oueryssel, and Grouningue: To all to whom these presents shall come greeting. Whereas, as well for the general good of Christendom, as for the Low Countries in particular, and for other good considerations, it hath pleased the king my lord and father for the advancement of our future marriage, by a dispensation from our holy father the Pope, with our most dear and well-beloved cousin the Archduke A●●ert, with the liking, consent, and assistance of the high and mighty prince our most dear and well-beloved good brother, to give, make session, and transport unto us all the Low Countries, and Bourgondie, according to the letters patents which have been disp●●●●ed, and signed respectively by them, the sixt of this month of May: with other our 〈◊〉 patents touching the acceptance of the said donation and transport: To the end that 〈◊〉 said Low Countries and Bourgondie may be held and enjoyed by us, our heirs and successors in manner and form, and according to the conditions comprehended in the said letters patents: by the which his said majesty hath granted unto us full power and irrevocable, of our own private authority, not being bound to require any other consent, to take and receive, by ourself, or by procuration to our future spouse the Archduke Albert, the full and absolute possession of all the Low Countries, and county of Bourgondie and Charolois: Wherefore, according to the tenor of the said letters patents, We make it known, that for the former reasons, and to follow his majesties will and pleasure from point to point, yea to advance that which may be requisite before our departure towards the said Countries.  
We have upon our own knowledge and absolute power, given full authority, and irrevocable commission, as well general as special, to our future spouse the Archduke Albert, in our name and behalf, by himself or other his substitutes, wheresoever he shall think it requisite by virtue hereof, at once, or at divers times, to do all things, as well in our name and behalf, as in the behalf of the Low Countries, and county of Bourgondie and Charolois in general, or by the Estates in every particular Province, which shall be held necessarieto be done: To take, accept, or retain in our name, the full and real possession of all the said Countries, and every Province thereof, and of all that depends: The same to enjoy fully and peaceably, without any contradiction, let, or molestation.  
To those ends causing the Estates of the said Countries to assemble, be it in general, or particular, and to take the accustomed oaths in our name: And moreover, to have that done by our future spouse the Archduke Albert, which We ourselves being in person might do, notwithstanding there be something which might require a special warrant, the which is not expressed in the said letters: promising in the word of a princess, and upon our honour, to have for agreeable, firm, and stable for ever, and to observe, and cause to be observed and inviolably kept, whatsoever hath been done by the said Archduke Albert our future husband, or by his substitutes, by virtue of the said letters, and in regard of the real and full possession of the said Low Countries and Bourgondie, after that manner and form that is mentioned in the said letters patents of donation, session, and transport: whereunto We refer ourselves, not doing no● suffering any thing to be done to the contrary, directly nor indirectly in any sort whatsoever: for such is our pleasure. In witness whereof, We have signed these presents with our own hand, and caused it to be signed by the secretary of my Lord and father for the affairs of the Low Countries and Bourgondie, and sealed with his majesties seal of arms, hanging in strings of gold. Given in Madrid, in the realm of Castille, the thirtieth of May, in the year 1598. Signed Isabel. And upon the fold, By commandment from my lady the Infanta. A. Lalo●.  
The acts and dispatches of the donation of the Low Countries, made by the king of Spain to the Infanta his daughter, in favour of her marriage with the Archduke Albert of Austria, who was yet a Cardinal, being come to Brussels; The said Cardinal caused them to be published by copies, together with the agreation of the prince of Spain, the procuration of the said Infanta, and letters sealed up from the king, and the prince his son, the which were sent unto the governors, and Consuls of all the Provinces which were yet under the government and house of Spain, commanding them to sand their deputies to the town of brussels, where the Estates being assembled, the said Cardinal Archduke, in the name of the said lady, and by virtue of his procuration, was accepted, and an oath taken upon certain conditions: the contents whereof follow.  
The first article contained the agreation or the approbation of the transport and donation of the countries, and of the princess marriage which the said Cardinal. 2. The second, after what manner she should be received, and the oath taken. 3. That his highness should make the consummation of their marriage appear within three months. 4. That the king should give an act, that the tweluth article contained in the said transport, should not be prejudicial to the Low Countries. 5. That they should take away all contributions, foraging of soldiers and other charges: and that from thence forth her highness should be contented with her demeans. 6. That foreign soldiers should remain under the kings pay, who should be employed in field upon the enemy's frontiers. 7. All german soldiers should be entertained and paid as far as might be, and that the surplusage should be paid by the king. 8. That all offices and governments of provinces, towns, and forts should be (within one year) delivered into the hands of the noblemen and others that were borne in the country. 9 All extraordinary councillors should be reduced to their accustomed number: that the great council of Macklin, and that of Brabant, with the council of State, should consist of men borne in the country. 10. That all provinces, countries, and towns should be maintained in their ancient privileges, rights, and liberties. 11. That his highness should bind himself to return into the Low Countries by the month of May next ensuing. 12. That her highness should appoint in his absence a governor in the said Low Countries, which should be of her blood, and should be bound to swear by oath, all that the king hath sworn. 13. That it should be lawful for the general Estates, by the intervention of his highness to treat with them of Holland and Zealand touching a peace. 14. And for that the countries are furnished with noblemen that are borne there, they shall depute three to go into Spain with his highness, and to thank the king. 15. That his highness should be bound to entertain all above mentioned; and at his return with the In●●●ta to take the accustomed oath in all the Provinces. 16. That all governors, captains, and men of war should not attempt any new thing, during his highness absence. 17. That his highness, at his return, should be bound to assemble the general Estates, to the end they might labour in the reformation and settling of the affairs of the Low Countries.  
Matters being thus past, and the said Cardinal Archduke sufficiently acknowledged, and accepted for their future prince, according to the promises of marriage betwixt him and the Infanta, meaning to uncardinall himself, and to enter into the consummation of the said marriage, according to the Pope's grant; he went to Hault (a little town of Brabant, three leagues from Brussels, commonly called our Lady of Hault) where he laid his Hat and cardinals habit upon the great altar, the which he offered to our Lady. This done, he began to prepare for his voyage, and for the government of the country: whereunto during his absence he named his cousin, a Cardinal also, Andrew of Austria son to the Archduke Ferdinand, who was brother to the Emperor Maxmilian, and therefore cousin german to Albert, joining with him the council of State, appointing Francisco de Mendoza, Admiral of Arragon to be General, and Count Herman Vanden Bergh Marshal of the army, with other commanders and officers, to put in execution during his absence, the resolution which had been taken at Brussels, touching the Frontiers of Germany.  
To keep him company, and for the accomplish men: of the articles, there were deputed Philip of Nassau prince of Orange etc. (to whom his sister the Countess of Hohenloe sent a good sum of money to perform his voyage, of the revenues of his demeans in Holland and Zealand) the earl of Barlaimont, and the earl of Sores, noblemen borne in the country, with many ladies and gentlewomen, among others the countess of Mansfeldt widow to the earl, and dowager to the earls of Henin and Hoochstraten; and many other noblemen and gentlemen of the Low Countries, desirous to see Spain, with the triumphs and magnisicence of the prince of Spain, and of the said Archduke and Infanta.  
The said Archduke before his departure had written to the general Estates of the united provinces of Holland etc. containing in substance, That he went to martie with the Infanta, with whom he should have the Low Countries in dowry: That the greatest part of the provinces had received him, and acknowledged him for their lord and prince, That he desired nothing more, than to settle a good peace in the Low Countries; and therefore they should conform themselves with them of Brabant and Flaunders, hearken to a general peace, and acknowledge him for their prince and lord, whereunto he had authority from the general Estates of his provinces. There were also letters from the prince of Orange, to prince Maurice his brother; from the duke of Arschot, and from the marquis of Haurell, exhorting them to peace: To all which letters, there was not any answer made, neither by the Estates, nor by prince Maurice: but there being brought unto the Estates assembled, certain letters which had been intercepted in France and England, by the which the king of Spain gave a lesson unto the said Cardinal Archduke, quite contrary to those goodly offers and promises which he had made to the Estates of the united provinces; the Estates, nobility, and towns in general resolved not to hearken to any peace or truce, but to bear the burden of the war to the extremity, and to attend such an end, as it should please God to sand them, rather than to abandon the country, and to admit their enemies to the government thereof: hereupon they appointed a great number of deputies of towns, in thei● colleges and general Estates, sending many of their chief men ambassadors to the queen of England, to move her to continued the war with them, against the Spaniards: Their names were, john Van Duyvenuoorde knight, signior of Vuarmont and Vuoude, etc. john Van Oldembarnevelt, signior of Tempel, first Councillor and Advocate of the Estates, keeper of the seal of Holland, and West-Friseland: john Vanden Vuerke, Councillor and Pensioner of the town of Middelbourg: john Van Hottinga Esquire, Councillor and deputy in the general estates: and Andrew Hessels, first Councillor of the Council of Brabant, remaining at the Hague, for that which depends upon the united Provinces: Who being come into England, having had audience of her majesty, were sent to treat with the lords of her Council of all matters whereof she had summoned them, and for the which they had been moved to come unto her in the name of the Estates: so as in the end having given her majesty contentment, all matters were agreed upon, the sixt of August 1598.; according to which accord and firm deliberation of the Estates, to maintain themselves by arms against the king of Spain, and the Archduke Albert; her majesty resolved also for her part to continued the war: the which could not be so hurtful to her, as to the Spaniard, for many reasons which would be tedious to relate. At the same time, a peace being concluded betwixt the French king and the Spaniard, the signior of Buzenual, ambassador for the French king with the general Estates of the united provinces, was sent back into Holland by the king his master to continued his charge, who propounded unto the Estates many excuses and reasons, which had moved the king to make a peace with the Spaniard, assuring them that he would be no enemy, nor contrary to their government, but as much as he could (the peace excepted) favour them, and would continued in their alliance, with promise to repay the money wherewith they had assisted his majesty during his wars.  
Thus the Estates of the united provinces, and prince Maurice, being assured of these two mighty allies, the French, and the English, prepared for war against the Archduke, the which war they continued with variable success of either part, until in the end they came unto a truce, in the year 1609: the which we will set down truly, for the reader's content, in the end of the discourse which we will make of the general Estates of the united provinces of the Low Countries.  
Having treated of all the Low Countries in general, and summarily how all these provinces were reduced and made subject to one lord, and finally how the Archduke holds them at this present: It follows next in order, that we speak particularly of the provinces which he enjoys, and which yield him obedience, that is to say, the countries of Brabant, Limbourg, Luxembourg, Flanders, Artois, Haynault, Namur, Lisle, Dovay, Archiers, Tournay, and Tournesis, Macklin, Valenciennes, Cambray, with a part of the country of Gueldres, and the signory of Linguen, except a part of Brabant, and Flanders, which the general Estates of the united Provinces hold yet.  
Flanders at this day hath for her limits, upon the South side Artois, with Haynault, and a part of Picardy; upon the East Haynault and Brabant; upon the North Brabant with the Hont, or the mouth of the river Escaut, which divides Flaunders from Zealand; and upon the West the Germane or rather English seas: It is in length from the Escaut against Antuerpe unto Fosse neuf thirty miles, and it is in breadth twenty miles. There are thirty walled towns in Flanders, that is to say, Gand, Bruges, Ypre, Lisle, Doüay, Tour●ay, Courtray, Audenarde, Alost, Hulst, Tenermond, Birste●, Nieuport, Sluice, Donkerk, Gravelin, Bourbourg, Dam, Dixmude, Fourne, Ardembourg, Gerarmont, Orchies, Lanoy, Axelle, and ostend. Besides these towns there are open boroughs, which yield nothing unto good towns, neither in regard of their privileges, nor their stately buildings, nor yet in respect of multitudes of inhabitants. There are in all 1154 villages, so as, when the Spaniards came into that country with Philip the second, king of Spain, deceased, they thought that Flanders was but one town. But during the wars for these forty years, Flanders hath had more cause to complain than any other, having been spoiled by a seditious multitude, and all their towns besieged, taken, and sacked, except Gravelin, & some other small things not worth the mentioning. Many towns and great villages have been made heaps of stones, so as in this province there have been more towns, villages, castles, and cloisters ruined, than in any other; whereby the country is more than half unpeopled, for that the inhabitants are retired, and dispersed in a manner throughout all the world. The Archdukes hold all Flanders, except the towns of Sluice, Axele, and Terneuse, all the Island of Catsant, Bieruliedt, Ardembourg, with some other places and sorts. Finally, if Flanders were at peace, she would soon recover her former beauty.  
The first town of Flanders is Gand, the which is four miles from the sea, and is watered by the rivers of Escaut, Lise, Live, and Moere. Moreover, there is a channel made by hand, which is also capable of great vessels, and it is incredible what wealth this town receives by these rivers and channels. It is ten miles from Antuerp, and as much from Brussels, Macklin, and Middelbourg: It hath seven Italian miles in circuit. There are twenty six Islands, ninety eight bridges, four great water-mils, one hundred windmills, with an infinite number of others. It is the place where the emperor Charles the fift was born. Bruges is seated in a plain, three miles from the sea: It hath four miles and a half circuit within the walls, and is the most pleasing town of Flanders: There are sixty Churches, whereof the chief is that of S. Dovatian, the which was sometimes dedicated to our Lady, and was built by Lideric the first earl of Flanders, in the year 1121. This town hath been so rich, as queen joane (wife to Philip the Fair) being there, in the year 1301, and having seen the pomp of the women, she was first amazed, and then complained that she was not queen alone: yet amidst this abundance of all things, it hath neither port nor river. There is a channel made by art, which they call Reye, the which being dispersed through the town, runs into the sea, near unto Sluice: but for that it was not capable of any great vessels, they have made another higher, and have divided it from the sea with banks. Ipre was built in the year 960: they say the foundation of this town is of lead, by reason of the great number of pipes of lead, by the which the water is diversely distributed throughout the town. Sluice is a sea town, which hath a goodly great port, able to contain five hundred ships. Right against it is the Island of Cassant. Ostend stands near unto the sea, and is famous, for that it endured a siege which the Archduke laid before it, the space of three years and some months, with great loss of men of either side. Nieuport is a sea town, three miles from Ostend. Donkerke hath a little port, the which is capable of few ships. I omit the other towns of Flanders, for that it would be endless: but before I pass unto the other parts of the Low Countries, I will only say, That of these towns above named, the Estates hold that of Sluice, and the Island of Cassant, which is a great curb unto the whole country.  
The country of Artois is near unto Picardy, with the which it confines. The bounds at this day are, upon the North Flanders, from the which it is divided by the river of Lise; upon the West and South Picardy; and upon the East Flaunders Gauloise, and Cambresis. The chief town is Arras, besides the which they number twelve towns, and 754 villages. The chief are Saint Omer, Bethune, Bapaume, Hedin, Renty, and Lillers. But to speak something of Arras, it is a very great town, divided by a wall into two parts, whereof the one belongs unto the Bishop, and is called the City; the other 〈◊〉 the Prince, and is called the Town. It is but little, yet fair and pleasing. There is 〈◊〉 seen our Lady's Church, whereas they preserve Manna (the which they affirm 〈◊〉 like wool in the time of S. jerosme, as he himself writes in his Epistles) and a candle, which they say they had in old time from heaven. The town is great, and hath goodly streets, and a market place which is exceeding great. There is to be seen the Abbey of S. Vaz, the which hath above twenty thousand ducats of yearly rent. All the houses have caves or sellers paved, to the end the inhabitants may retire themselves thither in time of siege, out of the danger of the cannon: it is very well peopled, and full of artificers of all trades. S. Omer is a reasonable fair town, in which is the Abbey of S. Betin, with a Church and an admirable Convent, having great revenues. The greatest part of writers hold, that Port Iccius (whereof ancient Authors make mention) was at S. Omer: the which seems to be verified by the banks and causeis wherewith the place is environed, for that the sea came thither. Near unto it is a lake which contains certain little Islands, full of grass and shrubs, the which they draw with a cord, which they tie unto it, and by this means carry these Islands where they please, with the cattle that feed in them, a thing which is no less true than wonderful. This country hath no cause to complain of wars, unless it be by reason of the impositions.  
Cambresis, which hath for the chief town Cambray, confines with the foresaid province. The Bishop, who is a prince of the empire, is sovereign lord, but the Spaniards are the masters. Henry the fift gave it in protection to Robert of Jerusalem, earl of Flaunders, to whose successors it was confirmed by the emperor Frederick, in the year 1164. In the end it put itself under the protection of Maxmilian of Austria, king of the Romans, by whom it was left at liberty: it remained a long time neuter, during the wars which were betwixt the houses of France and Bourgondie, until that Charles the fift built a citadel there: since, the duke of Alencon, brother to the deceased king Henry the third, made himself master of it: but it was afterwards yielded to the Spaniards, the inhabitants giving up the town for want of victuals. The town is fair, great, and stately, as well for the public as private buildings, & for the great number of people that inhabit there.  
Haynault is twenty leagues long, and 16 broad: It is so called of the river of Hayne, which passeth through the midst of the country: her bounds are towards the North, Brabant and Flanders; upon the South, Champagne and Picardy; upon the East, the county of Namur, and the country of Liege and Brabant; and upon the West, Flanders with Artois. They do number 24 walled towns, the most famous of which are Mons and Valenciennes. Mons stands upon a little hill, & hath goodly buildings, with many springs, and a little river called Trulle, passing through it. Among other things which are remarkable in this town, there is an order and chapter of Chanonesses or religious women, very considerable: the founder was Valdrude duchess of Lorraine, who gave them good rents: These religious women (which should be daughters of noblemen, and gentlemen of note) remain near unto the Church, and attend the service thereof: In the morning they go attired like Nuns, and in the afternoon like secular women, and may marry at their pleasures: they have an Abbess which governs them. There is a Chapter of the like order, but richer, at Ni●elle, and another at Mabevil. Valencienne was (as they say) built by the emperor Valentinian; it stands in a pleasant valley: The river of Escaut, and the little river of Ronelle enter into it, and make divers small Islands, and a current which passeth under the houses, which is not only commodious for private men, but doth also give them means to fortify the town, for that they may drown some part round about it: there are two fair Churches, the one of our Lady which is very ancient, and the other of S. john: there is a palace which is called the Earl's hall, the which is very great; and the Townhouse yields not to any in beauty: near unto it is a clock which, besides the hours, shows the course of the moon, planets, months and seasons. The other places of note are Quesnoy, Landercy, A●enes, Mariembourg, Philippeville, Beaumond and Bins.  
As for Namur, it is the chief town of a very good county: It is situated upon the river of Meu●e, betwixt two mountains: The river of Sambre passeth through it, and joins with-Meuse: It is not great, but a good fair town, and it hath under it three walled towns, whereof Bovines is the greatest, Charlemont the strongest, and Valencourt the last. Besides, there are one hundred eighty two villages: they have endured much, but at this present they are in good estate.  
The duchy of Luxembourg contains three and twenty towns, and almost one thousand and two hundred villages: it lies in a manner all within the forest of Ardenne, which by little and little hath been cut down and tilled. This duchy takes her name of the principal town which is great, but not well peopled, by reason of the ruins which it hath undergone, with the whole province, during the wars betwixt the houses of France and Austria: for the town was taken and sacked in the year 1542, then recovered and sacked again: in a manner all the places of importance ran the like fortune, as Arlon, Thionuille, Moment, Danuilliers, Yuois, all which places were held impregnable. This country hath been best preserved of all the provinces of the Low Countries in these last troubles; for it hath not been in any sort ruined, only the armies have passed that way.  
Brabant hath for bounds upon the North, the Ocean sea, upon the East the river of Mouse on the South the Bishopric of Liege, and the country of Namur, and upon the West the last place is Nivelle. This country contains those places whereas Caesar did lodge the Aduatices and Ambivarites: it is two and twenty leagues long, and twenty broad, and fourscore in circuit: it contains six and twenty walled towns, eighteen that have privileges; and seven hundred villages. There are four principal towns, that is to say, Lowain, Brussels, Antuerp, and Bosleduc. Lowain is in a fair situation, and hath four miles in circuit about the walls; but it contains meadows, vines, and great gardens, which give it a great grace by reason of the mountains and valleys. There is one of the best universities of Europe, whose founder was john duke of Brabant in the year 1426, but it hath been much enriched with pensions for public readers, by Philip the second king of Spain. Brussels (whose circuit is not much less than that of Lowain) is seated partly upon a plain, and partly upon the descent of a hill; it is the ordinary abode of the Archduke: the town is full of fair palaces, and goodly houses, amongst the which, is the palace royal, with a park that is very delightful. Antuerpe is so fair a town, as there are few in Europe that can equal it: it is seated upon the river of Escaut, which brings ships with all kinds of merchandise from the sea, which is seventeen leagues off: there are many goodly buildings, but the chief are our lady's Church, the Bourse, the Statehouse, and that of the Easterlings: before therevolt of the Low Countries, it was a place of great traffic, and of such importance, as there was more business dispatched in one month, than is at Venice in two years: it hath now in a manner lost all the traffic of the sea, having their enemies at their gates; so as it is no more that flourishing town, whereof in former times they made so great accowt. Bosleduc is seated upon the little river of Deese, two leagues from the Mouse: it is a fair, great, and rich town. As for Macklin, which is a sovereign town, and a signory, it hath been twice taken, and so spoiled, as not any town thereabouts hath been more: it stands upon the river of Deal, which is great of itself, and swells more by reason of the flowing of the sea, which passeth a league beyond the town: this river having many branches, maketh divers little Islands, and is very commodious for the town. Without the town there is a great monastery, in which are above one thousand and five hundred ●unss, or rather maidens which may marry. Amongthe other places of any ●●portance, they put Nivelle. There are also some Estates beyond the river of Mouse, which belong unto Brabant, that is to say, the duchy of Limbourg, and Valkembourg, Dalem, Rode, and Carpen, all towns with command and jurisdiction. The Archduke enjoys all the towns at this day, except Berghen-op-Zoom, Breda, Steenberghen, Willem-stadt, Grave, and some forts, all which are under the government of the Estates of the united provinces. This country hath endured so much, during forty years wars, both by the enemy, and by their own soldiers, mutining often for want of pay, and so oppressing the country, a● it is a wonder how it hath subsisted.   

¶ The Quality.  
TO speak in general of the quality of the Low Countries, the air is very moist, and yet very wholesome for the inhabitants of the country: Summer is very pleasing with a temperate heat: they are not scorched as in many other countries, flies and dorres do not annoyed them with their buzzing and stinging: it is not subject to Earthquakes; but the Winter is long and windy: any wind that comes from the East causeth frost. The country is in many places sandy: it abounds in wheat, barley, rye, flax, and hemp: it doth also bring forth all kinds of fruit in great abundance, as apples, pears, plums, cherries, mulberries, peaches, nuts, meddlers, and in some places chestnuts: there are not any mines of silver, of note. As for trees they do much please the sight, being thick set in order, and laden with fruit, and there are many which serve for building, and for firing: there are of all sorts which are very great and high; but there are few bay trees or of cypress. There is a certain tree which they call Linden, whose lease is almost like unto an Elm, but they grow higher and faster, for in sixteen or eighteen years they grow as big as a man: they use them somewhat for building, but more to make coals. Betwixt the bark and the wood, they found a certain string like unto hemp, whereof they are accustomed to make roaps; but there are many beasts which like not the leaves, notwithstanding that they be tender: there are also many ewe trees, whereof they make good bows: there is a certain poison made of the juice, with the which Caesar saith that Cati●ulcus died. There is also another kind of tree, which the inhabitants call Abeelen, and it is like unto a white Poplar tree. There are great store of them in Brabant, and they use them chiefly at brussels for divers occasions. Moreover they of the Low Countries may commend their soil, to be fit for cattle, for that there are few places where their oxen, sheep, and horses do multiply faster, and prospero better. First they have great and mighty horses fit for war: then oxen which are sometimes so great and fat, as they weigh one thousand and two hundred weight. Guicchardin writes of an ox which was given to the earl of Hocstrat at Macklin, weighing one thousand five hundred twenty and eight pounds, and therefore he caused this beast to be drawn in his palace. As for cows, they have always their dugs so great and so full, as it is almost incredible what milk they give: for it is most certain that in some places of Holland a cow will yield in Summer nine or ten pints at a meal, and they do commonly milk them thrice a day.  
There is store of fallow dear, stags, goats, wild boars, coneys, hares, and great numbers of herons, partridges, pheasants, turtle-doves, quails, thrushes, storks, geese, and mallards: there is also abundance of tame foul, and store of salmon, lampreyes, aloses, mullets, and much other good fish which comes from the sea, into the river of Mouse, drawn thither by the sweetness of the water: and it is a thing worthy admiration, that these fishes being taken in the sea, are little esteemed, but within the fresh water they are very fat, and of a good taste: the same river doth also bear trout and lampreyes, whereof some are great and excellent, others less and delicate.  
Moreover the se● (with her flowing into the river of Escaut) brings sturgeons, salmon, great lamprecht▪ mullets, soles, crafish, and many other sorts of delicate fish, where they live and breed, for that the water is fit for them. In two or three months, in the spring time, they take such abundance of small fish, besides the great, as many people live of them. Moreover this river without any help of the sea, doth continually breed many kinds of fish, whereof the chief are pike, barbles, tenches, and carp which many times weigh twenty pound: there are also some oysters found in the mouth of this river, but they come from the sea. The peasants joining many waters together with the help of these rivers, make channels with great industry, which run certain leagues, and are capable of great ships; so as there is scarce any place but hath a passage unto it by water: yet this country wants springs, except it be in hilly places.  
We must now speak of the sea of this country. Without doubt when it is troubled it is very dangerous, for that many times it drowns great fields, yea whole countries, as we may see near unto Zealand: but the inhabitants at this day have made so many banks and defences, as they are in a manner free from danger. It is most commonly tormented at the new moon, and when it is full betwixt the two Equinoxes, when (according to Cornelius Tacitus) the sea doth swell wonderfully. There are two effects of the flowing of the sea, the one is commodious, the other troublesome: the one keeps the sea from corrupting, and makes way for them that sail; the other is discommodious by reason of the inundation and violence. But having spoken of the discommodities which the sea brings to these countries, it is fit to say something of the commodities which it gives them when it is quiet. Without the sea it were impossible they should feed half their people: for thereby these countries are as it were a public marketplace for all Europe, and it brings unto them a wonderful profit by the herring and fish of all sorts which the inhabitants take, for they not only serve for daintiness to the rich, but also for nourishment to the poor, and they vent such store into all the parts of Europe, as it yields them a great revenue.  
Finally, the Low Country is plain and even, and there are few mountains, unless it b● in the countries of Luxembourg, Namur, and Haynault, where there are more than in all the rest. It hath forest sufficient for the ornament of the country, for service, and for hunting. The forest of Ardenne, in the time of Caesar, was the greatest of Gaul, and passing through the midst of the country of Treves, it extended itself from the Rhine, unto the countries of Tournay and Rheims, so as it was about five hundred thousand paces long: but at this day it hath lost much of her greatness, so as that which remains is often cut up, and tilled by the inhabitants, who give other names to all those places. The greatest part, and least interrupted, is from Thionuille, near unto Liege, for the space of thirty miles. The forest of Mormau which is in Haynault, gins at Quesnoy, and runs Southward toward Vermandois. The forest of Saint Amant is also in Haynault, and gins near unto S. Amant, and goes toward the East unto Valencienne, being very broad and thick. There are also the woods of Feign, Soigne, Marlaigne, and some others, but I will not trouble the reader with their descriptions. I will now come to examine in particular the quality of those countries which are under the Archdukes.   

¶ The Quality.  
AS for Artois it is rich in wheat, whereof they sand great store into Flanders and Brabant, where there commonly grows none, so as for the most part, the inhabitants eat Rye bread. There grows no wine, yet some hold that the country is fit to bear it, and that the negligence of them that devil there, is rather the cause of this defect, than the situation. The air is good, wholesome, and clear.  
The country of Haynault enjoys a sweet and temperate air, and the soil is fertile, and bears great store of wheat. There are many meadows, pastures, orchards, and other things necessary for the life of man. There are also mines of iron and lead, and quarries of divers sorts of marble, and also of a certain kind of flint which the Liegeois call Howl. These flints feed the fire like unto coals, and they use to make fire of it mingled with a little wood.  
The county of Namur is hilly, but pleasing, and of a wholesome and temperate air. The soil yields all things necessary for man. There are also mines of iron and lead, and quarries whereas they cut stones of all sorts, especially of marble inclining to black, much like unto jasper. And it is not long since they began to dig that kind of flint stone, which they burn. There are rivers which abound in fish, and goodly springs and fountains, as also forests where there is great store of wild beasts of all sorts.  
The country of Luxembourg although it be hilly yet is it good and fertile, and enio●●● a pleasing air. There is one part which yields much corn and wine, and another which doth recompense this want with abundance of Deer, and other wild beasts. T●●●● are mines also near unto Manderscheid in the seigneuries of Keyle, Crovenberg, and ●●ide, towards the town of Hellental.  
Brabant is in a very good air, and ha●h a fertile plain which bears good store of corn, yet that which they call Die Kempen, or the Champion, is somewhat barren by reason of the sand, and yet it yields some first-fruits, and is not altogether unprofitable.  
Flanders hath a wonderful temperate air. The soil is fertile, especially towards the sea, and France: There are goodly pastures, the which we may easily guess for that the neighbour countries are accustomed to sand many colts thither to feed. Moreover, they breed up many tame cattle whose taste is exceeding pleasant, and they have an infinite number of Deer and wild beasts. They want no herons, pheasants, partridges, peacocks, and storckes.   

¶ The Manners of the Ancient.  
CAesar tells us, that the Belges, which be those of the Low Countries (among whom he also comprehended the Picards) were wonderful valiant and resolute, for that they were far from the civility and courtesy of other Provinces, and that merchants did not much frequent amongst them, nor bring those things which makes men's courages effeminate: and also, for that they were near unto the Germane who dwelled beyond the river of Rhein, with whom they were in continual war. We may judge of their valour, and the great desire they had to defend their liberty, in that they sought to retire themselves from the rule and obedience of the Romans, yea in Caesar's time. The Neruiens, which are they of Tournay, would never suffer any merchants to bring them wine or any other thing to sell. And to speak something in particular, the inhabitants of the county of Flanders, were so given to arms, and so active, as they could never live in peace: yea in former times they have run with their arms into Syria, to the Holie-land, and to Jerusalem. This people have for a long time given themselves to traffic, and have been very successful, and in like manner they have showed themselves painful to manure the country, and to make it better.   

¶ The Manners at this day.  
THe Flemings are most commonly great, but some think that in old time they were much bigger; the which Caesar doth attribute chiefly to the liberty of their lives, and their custom not to do any thing against their wills. They are fair, quiet, not choleric, nor ambitious, open, ready to all things, industrious, painful, and faithful, capable of all arts and sciences, and rather given to wine than to women. They are reasonable civil, according to the country, and so pleasant as they are sometimes insupportable. They are light of belief, by reason whereof they are easily deceived. There is not any nation more suspicious, nor more obstinate. They are great talkers, and do soon forget the courtesies and favours which they have received, and in like manner the wrongs which have been done them. They do not much love other nations, and they daily invent some new thing. As for music, they have made it perfect, for that there is not any nation more inclined to this art. They are valiant enough at land, but more on foot than otherwise, for they are bad horsemen, and do seldom come to join with the enemy: but we must confess that at sea they are invincible; they understand the art of navigation perfectly. They learn many languages, and traffic cunningly; and they make great store of silks, sarges, and linen cloth of divers sorts, and above all tapestry hanging, whereof they make great account, and the which they not only sand into all Europe, but also to the Indies, and into Africa. Most commonly they make Rye bread, and drink beer more usually than wine, the which is brought from France and Spain. They go well and handsomely attired. Their houses are continually kept more neatly than in any place of Europe, and their chambers do so shine, as it is pleasant to behold. They build in a manner generally of one fashion, and their houses are so made as they seem to have but one owner, they take such delight in towns to have houses of an equal height.  
The women are fair, but there are no great numbers of such, and besides, for the most part this beauty fadeth before they are thirty years old, and then they grow wrinkled and foul: they are quick and hardy, and converse freely among men: The greatest blemish is, that they love wine, yea young maidens will not refuse to drink, and sometimes more than is fit, which causeth effects of love: yet it is most certain that there are fewer women which live loosely in this country, than in some other where they are not so much subject to drinking: notwithstanding this their custom, the women governs the●● houses discreetly, and many times they traffic and contract with one another like merchant's: they affect much to go attired after the French fashion, they go alone in the streets, and to places near the town with little or no company, and yet they are not suspected: and for that their husbands do many times leave unto them the managing of all their affairs, they grow proud, imperious, and insupportable.  
The princes, lords, and all others of what condition soever, give unto the eldest of the house, the name of his father, although he be living, and in the flower of his age: and gentlemen do always prefer their eldest daughter before the rest, although that all have the like dowry; so as they give the younger to men to whom they would refuse the elder, whom they reserve for a better fortune: and they have this particularity, that they do easily contract marriage with a stranger, if occasion be offered: they hold it base and unseemly that young men should marry old women, and old men young maids, a base or mean man a gentlewoman, the master his maid, and the mistress her man. There is not any Nation that excels so much in painting. john Eikius (who was of this country) did first show the manner how to mingle colours with oil. They are accustomed upon that Saint's day whose name they carry, and during Shrovetide, to feast their kinsfolks and friends, and to entertain them bountifully; for above all things they love banquets, and to make good cheer.   

¶ The Riches.  
THe Flemings are rich by means of the sea, and the ordinary traffic which they use. The trades whereunto they apply themselves bring them a thousand commodities, and the sale of their silks, sarges, and tapistry work, which are so much desired, brings them in great sums of money.  
It is in a manner incredible what profit they make of porpeses and salmon, which they do salt and barrel up, and what abundance of herring and barreled cod they sand forth yearly, for the which they return great sums of money from the Germane, English, French, Spaniards, and Italians.  
The ordinary revenues which the prince drew from the Low Countries (whenas they were all under one lord) did amount to above three millions of gold yearly, besides the uncertain subsidies, and confiscations whereof he had the third, unless it be in cases of high treason. At this day the Archdukes revenues are not so great, since that divers of his Estates have been dismembered, and that which he hath will not in any sort defray the charges of his court, and entertain his troops.   

¶ The Forces.  
THe Archduke may boldly say that he hath good towns, not only able to make a long defence, but in a manner impregnable: for you shall hardly found a stronger place than the citadel of Antuerp, the which is held to be one of the best fortified in Europe, according to the rules of this age. Bosleduc which is also in Brabant, is a place of good importance. Then upon the sea is Gravelin, two leagues from Calais, furnished with great store of ordnance, & exceeding strong. Near unto it is Donkerke, the which (〈◊〉 the strength of the walls) hath very resolute inhabitants: there is also in the 〈◊〉 power upon the same coast the strong town of Ostend, the which did so much 〈…〉, during a siege of three years and a half.  
〈…〉 the country of Artois, there is the town of Arras, the which is strong and able 〈◊〉 a gre●● resistance. Terovanne might be well defended and endure a long siege: Hedin is of no less importance, yea it is better fortified, and is upon the frontiers of ●rance: in Haynault Mons is strong, and so is Valencienne; in this town there is an arsenal furnished with all sorts of munition and arms, to maintain a long war. Phillippeville and Mariembourg are two very strong places, upon the frontier of France. Namur hath a good fort which is very defensible: and to end in a word, all the Archdukes country is full of good places, so as he that shall assail him shall found work enough. As for the men, the inhabitants of towns are valiant, whereof they have in former times given good proof. But besides his natural subjects, this prince doth always entertain an army consisting of Spaniards, Italians, English, Germans, and other nations, and this army (before the truce) during Winter lay in garrison, and about the mid spring went to field, and was employed at the siege of some towns. Now many of these troops have been casht, so as their numbers are not so great: that which remains, is entertained in divers places upon the frontiers.   

¶ The Government.  
THe forms of government are, the general, which the prince hath over all; and the particular, which every one of these Estates doth use, according to their privileges and customs.  
The prince hath three councils, whereof the first is called the council of State; the second, the privy council; and the third, that of the finances or treasure. The council of Estate hath a precedent, and very many councillors, for that they call more or less according to occurrents. In this council they treat of all matters belonging to the State, as of peace and war, of ambassadors, intelligences, & advices from abroad and within the State; and to this the most important affairs of other councils are referred.  
In the Privy council there are twelve doctors chosen by the prince, and there is a precedent, whereas they treat of all questions in law, for that it hath a pre-eminence over all the other councils, and this consents to privileges, gives pardons, and remissions, and makes laws, statutes, and edicts; and to it also doth belong the knowledge of judgement, of controversies, and questions for the limits of countries, and for the chief of the signory. In matters which are difficult and of great weight, they confer with the council of State, as that doth with this when as there happens any matters of justice.  
In the council of the Finances, there are three chief men of the country, who are called heads and overseers of the exchequer, there is a treasurer, a receiver, and other inferior officers. This council doth manage all the princes revenues, and the taxes which are paid him: there they make the impositions and payments in all occurrents both of peace and war.  
There is a Chamber of accounts, which is as it were a member of the council of the finances, and seven masters of accounts, with other inferior officers: there they go to make their accounts, and to receive their acquittances (at the end of the term) that do manage the prince's money in Brabant, and the countries adjoining, and in the duchy of Luxembourg; and notwithstanding that there be other Chambers in the country, besides the abovenamed, which doth reside at Brussels, with the three councils, yet all the Chambers are accustomed to give their accounts to the council of the Treasure, as to their sovereign magistrate.  
Besides the said magistrates, there is in most of the said Estates a particular governor, to whom (as to a lieutenant) matters are referred, especially for the war.  
The prince hath also in the greatest part of his Estates a council in his name, the which in Brabant is called the Chancery, and at Macklin; in other places it is called the Parliament. In this council there are sometimes twelve, sometimes sixteen, and sometimes eighteen councillors, with a precedent, into the which the prince's advocate is admitted, the procurator for the treasure, and some other inferior officers, all which in a manner have wages from the prince: and the authority of these magistrates is great both in civil and criminal causes, and thither they may call not only all private persons, but even the prince himself, if any one pretend any thing against him in justice. To these jurisdictions all appellations go from the other magistrates of this private estate, and in three of them, as in Brabant, Macklin, and Haynault, they judge definitively: In all the said councils they are governed by the common laws, if the municipal privileges or commandments (for so they call the prince's resolutions) be not opposite. Besides the foresaid officers, the prince sends commissioners yearly into the chiefest parts of his estate, to examine particularly the entries and exportations of every place; and in Brabant, where the prince hath (by a private grant from the Pope) authority over sacred things, the Commissaries visit Churches, Monasteries, and Hospitals.  
When as the prince is to treat with the Estates, either touching new laws which he means to make, or for new subsidies which he would have, or for any other occurrents, he assembles them after this manner: He commands by his letters all the Estates to meet, at a certain time appointed, in a certain place, the which is commonly in the town of Brussels.  
In all the towns, counties, and principal places by ancient pre-eminence, they know who should go to the assembly, and how many they are, who in deed are many: in this assembly there are three orders of persons.  
The first order is the Clergy, the second the Nobility, and the third the chief towns of the estate. Every one of these hath power to bind his commonalty, but never to conclude but with express condition, that all the other Estates shall come and do the like. In these assemblies the proposition is made in a great hall, in the prince's presence, by a precedent, or some one of the Councillors of state, where they seek with words and strong reasons to persuade what they intent. The propositions being heard, the Estates take time to make their answer, and then every man doth judiciously examine in particular what hath been propounded, and they give their answer in writing, the which not being pleasing unto the prince, the business is not ended, but they labour to draw them unto it: but if it cannot be effected, the prince must have patience, and refer it to a better opportunity.  
Notwithstanding that the principal government, and all the most substantial pre-eminences of the signory be in the prince's person, yet all the towns and places adjacent have a particular administration, and a great liberty, with their laws, customs, and privileges.  
These laws, customs, and privileges have a great difference, for that the said countries have been enjoyed for many ages by divers princes, and they have often been in quarrel with mortal and deadly hatred; yea they differ in weights, measures, and manners, and (which is of very great importance) they differ in language, which is so incompatible a thing, as the Emperor Charles the fift, having often propounded by what means he might draw these estates into one body, and give them the name and form of a realm, he could never found the way: but with all this diversity, they do all agreed in the qualities of members which make one body, for that the estate of all the towns and places hath one particular government, which doth not differ in any other thing but in the number of them that deal in the government, and this grows, for that one place is bigger than an other.  
The private government of every great town consists of four members: we will call the first the new signory, and this comprehends all the great and lesser magistrates which are in charge: the second is the old signory, which comprehends all those that have had any charge of importance: the third is called the Bourgesie, which consists of as many captains as there are streets in the town. Antuerpe hath six and twenty: the fourth member embraceth all the heads of Trades, called Deans, which are also divers in number, according to the towns. Antuerpe hath fifty four, and of all these four members the particular government is framed. The example hereof shall be the government of the town of Antuerpe, from which the rest differ very little or nothing at all, unless it be in regard of the number.  
The manner to frame the particular government in the town of Antuerpe is thus, The signory presents nine gentlemen, and nine others are named by the captains of the streets, which are in all eighteen; to these they add the signory which is then in authority, the which may make the like number of 18, which are in all thirty six, and these aspire to the future signory. All these names are sent unto the prince, who chooseth out eighteen, and these are called Schemats (which is to say, Senators) who have authority to choose two Burgomaster's, which are as much as two Consuls, whereof the one treats with the prince, or with the Estates, touching the affairs of his country; and the other remains in the town, and hath care of government, giving audience to the Burghers and strangers: so as the magistrate of the town of Antuerpe consists of eighteen Schemats and a Bourgomaister, who hath great authority both in civil and criminal causes. But for the execution of justice, the prince hath two lieutenants, one for the criminal, whom they call Sculter; the other for civil causes, called Amman; which places the prince doth give, and these go before all others. The office of the Scultet is to 'cause malefactors to be apprehended, demanding justice of the sovereign magistar, and afterwards to execute the sentences which shall be given. The office of the Amman is to hear civil causes, and to require the seigneurs to dispatch and do justice, and to give sentence at their charge that pled.  
The same sovereign magistrate doth choose without any intervention of the prince, or his commissioners, certain inferior magistrates, and among others two Treasurers, which be gentlemen of the people's nomination; and one Receiver, of the people, named by the gentlemen: and these officers receive and disburse the public money by the ordinance of the said sovereign magistrate; who doth also created the Councillors of the people, which are twelve in number, all out of the number of the Deans of Trades, as mariners, bakers, gardiner's, smiths, and such like. And in the signory of Macklyn the magistracy is equally divided; for that of the twelve Senators or Shemats, there are six gentlemen, and six of the Deans of Trades, and the most honourable are the fishmongers, butchers, bakers, gardiner's, and brewers.  
These Plebeian Councillors go unto the Council as well as the gentlemen, they hear suitors petitions, and give their advice, sometimes seditiously, when as they treat of disbursing any money which should come into the hands of the gentlemen; for that this sort of men are not capable to proceed with gravity and moderation in the degree of superiority; so as the insufficiency, insolency, and instability of the people, and the perpetual jealousy which these popular Councillors (who are powerful by reason of the great number of men which follow them) entertain against the gentlemen, have caused many dangerous revolts at sundry times, under all their princes: for that of thirty six which have ruled since Lewis of Ha●lembec, the first earl of Flanders, all have felt some rebellion, except three only.  
Of these good towns there are some which have good store of public revenues, and among the rest, Antuerpe hath two hundred and fifty thousand crowns yearly rent: but both this and others were much indebted in the year 1556, and we must believe that by reason of the continual wars, they are more at this day, especially for that they have wanted the industry of arts and merchandise, the chief foundation of all the Estates of Flanders. And Antuerpe alone looseth much yearly, for that the troubles have altered their traffic.  
The authority of lords which have castles, lands, and other jurisdictions is very much limited, for that they cannot oppress their vassals in any sort, nor accept voluntary presents from them without the express consent of the prince: but these lords leaving unto the people the government according unto their laws and customs, enjoy the titles and revenues with all modesty. It is true there are some lords which have certain particular jurisdictions, in such sort absolute, as they do not acknowledge any other superior but God only.  
The Clergy is very mighty and rich throughout all the whole country, so as to stay their increase of wealth, lest they should grow more powerful, Charles the fift made a law prohibiting all Clergy men to buy any land without licence expressly granted from the prince; and in subsidies which are paid him, the Clergy pays his apart; and the conventions which the prince of this country hath with the Pope, are in a manner like unto those of France, for he names, and the Pope confirms the Prelates, and no rescription is put in execution without the prince's pleasure: moreover they cannot (by any commission from the Pope) draw his subjects out of the State for any cause whatsoever, but he must depute commissioners unto the place, for any matter that is in question. The extraordinary titles which the prince of these Estates hath, are, Chanoine of Saint Seruais, and Abbot of Saint Gertrude, which is a famous Monastery of nuns: He is also called Vicar perpetual of the Empire, in all Friesland unto the country which is called Bethmarie upon the confines of Denmark; the which is a pre-eminence obtained by Maximilian of the Emperor Frederick his father, as well for himself as his successors.   

¶ The Religion.  
THroughout all the Archdukes Estates in general, they have no other exercise but of the Romish religion, yet there are few towns (especially of those that were in former times revolted) where there are not many Protestants, but they dare not make open profession thereof, seeing themselves restrained, and ready to be punished, if it be known. They that are earnest Papists hold that it is impossible to make them altar their religion, and that the neighbourhood of the Protestants make them more zealous.   

¶ Archbishops and Bishops in the Low Countries.  
AS for the Estate of the Clergy throughout all the Low Countries in general, it consists of three Archbishops, and fifteen Bishops: that is, the Archbishop of Cambray hath under him, the bishoprics of Arras, Tournay, S. Omer, and Namur.  
The archbishopric of Macklin hath under it the Bishops of Antuerpe, Gand, Bruges, Bosleduc, Ipre, and Ruremonde.  
The Archbishop of Vtrecht hath under him the Bishops of Harlem in Holland, Deventer in Guelderland, Middleborough in Zealand, Lewardin and Groningue in Frizeland.  
The archbishopric of Cambray was erected by Pope Paul the fourth, in the year● 1562, for before it was but a Bishopric, and the first Bishop was called Saint Diogene, a Graecian borne, he was consecrated Bishop at Arras, by the Archbishop of Reims, in the year 390, and ever since the two bishoprics were united under one Bishop until the year 1094, in which year they were divided: and the Bishopric of Cambray comprehends under her jurisdiction the towns of Cambray, Mons, Condee, At the, Quesnoy, Landrecy, Auesnes, Bins, Beaumond, burn, Soignes, Maubege, Chimay, and in a manner all the country of Henault, Cambresis, and some small part of Artois, a part of the towns of Valenciennes and Tournay.  
The Clergy of Arras (after they had long pursued this separation) in the end obtained of Pop● Vrban the eleventh, a particular Bishop, in the year 1094. The Bishop hath under his ●urisdiction the towns of Arras, Dovay, Bethune, Bapaulme, Lens, Armentieres, Bouchain, la Bassee, a part of Valenciennes, with many borroughes and villages.  
The Bishopric of Tournay was erected in the year 480, and some time after it was joined to the Bishopric of Noyon, and continued six hundred years united under one Bishop ●●as in the year 1123, the separation was granted by the Bishop of Noyon, who 〈◊〉 the Bishopric of Tournay. Saint Barnard was an earnest suitor unto the Pope for this separation.  
The Bishopric of Saint Omer was erected, for that the town of Terovenne being razed by the Emperor Charles the fift, in the year 1553: the revenues of the Bisho 〈◊〉 of Terovenne were divided into three, one part went to the Bishopric of Boul 〈◊〉 France, another part to the Bishopric of Saint Omer for Artois, and the third to the Bishopric of Ipre for Flaunders: wherefore the Collegiall Church of S. Omer was erected into a Cathedral in the year 1559, having under it ten towns, that is, Saint Omer, air, Hesdin, Gravelin, etc. with many villages as well in Artois as in Flanders.  
In the year 1559 the Collegiall Church of Saint Rombaut at Macklin was made a Metropolitan; besides the bishoprics that are under it, there were assigned seventeen towns, Macklin, Lou●ain, Brussels, Tillemont, Land, Dist, Arscot, etc. with many villages.  
The Collegiall Church of our Lady at Antuerpe was erected to a Cathedral in the year 1559, with episcopal jurisdiction over seven towns, that is to say, Antuerpe, Liere, Berghes, etc. and many villages.  
The Collegiall Church of Saint john in the town of Gand was made a Bishopric, in the year 1559, and it hath under it four towns, Gand, Andevarde, etc. with many villages.  
The Collegiall Church of Saint john the Evangelist at Boisleduc was changed to a Cathedral in the year 1559, having under it ten towns, Boisleduc, Helmont, Bomel, etc. with many villages.  
The Collegiall Church of Saint Donat at Bruges in the year 1559, was made a Cathedral, comprehending under it nine towns, Bruges, Scluse, Ardembourg, etc. with many villages.  
The Monastery of the regular Chanoins in the church of Saint Martin at Ipte was in the year 1559, made a Cathedral Church of the secular Chanoins, containing under that episcopal jurisdiction ten towns, Ipre, Dunkirk, Bergue, Furnes, etc. with many borroughes and villages.  
The Collegiall Church built in honour of the holy Ghost at Ruremonde was in the year 1559 changed to a Cathedral, with episcopal jurisdiction, having under it ten towns, Ruremonde, Nimeguen, Zutphen, Vennelo, etc. and many villages.  
The Bishopric of Vtrecht was erected by Pope Sergius in the year 690, & it was made a Metropolitan in the year 156●, it hath under it the five Bishoprics above mentioned: as for the particular limits of the Bishopric of Vtrecht, it contains all the territory of Vtrecht, and a part of Holland and Guelderland, with the seigneuries of Buren, Culembourg, Vianen, etc. in the which are comprehended thirty towns, with many villages.  
The Parochial Church of Saint Bavon in Harlem, was made a Cathedral in the year 1559, having under that jurisdiction twelve towns in Holland, and many villages.  
The Collegiall Church of S. Lebuin at Deventer, was made a Cathedral in the year 1559, having under it five and twenty towns, and many villages.  
The Co●legiall Church of S Peter at Middlebourough, was in the year 1559 changed to a Cathedral, under whose jurisdiction are ten towns, with many villages.  
The Parochial Church of S. Vit at Lewarden; was made a Cathedral in the year 1559, having under it ten towns and many villages.  
The Parochial Church of S. Martin at Groningue, was in the year 1559 changed to a Cathedral, containing under the jurisdiction all the territory of the town which is very great, and the Islands of Rollinghe and Borehin.  
At this day that the Estates of the united Provinces hold the Bishopric of Vtrecht, and other churches, they have with the change of religion confounded the order which the church of Rome had established there.   

¶ The Lords and Earls of ●launderss.  
L●●eritke called the Buck, was made the first Forester of the country of Flaunders, in the year of Christ 621, by Dagobert king of France, for him and his successors: he governed the country two and fifty years, and died ninety and two years old, in the year 692.  
Anthonse second son to Lydericke, succeeded his father to the government of Flanders in the year 692. At that time the Goths, Vandals, Huns, and such other barbarous nations, spoiled the Champion country without any resistance, of the said Forester, who ●●tired himself into France with his people.  
Bouchart, the third son to Lyderic, called the Buck, by the death of Anthony his brother, was deprived of the estate of Forester of Flanders, by Theodoric king of France, yet he granted him the signory of Halibeck. The country of Flanders was again ruined by the Huns, Goths, Vandals, and other nations, so as the greatest part of Flanders remained desolate and not inhabited, about a hundred years.  
Estorede or Estoreist, son to Bouchart, was by the decease of his father and mother prince of Lowayn, lord of Halebeck, and Forester of Flanders, he died in the year of our Lord 792.  
Lyderick, prince of Buck, son to Estorede, having married a noble lady of Germany called Flandrina, of whom the country took the name, was made great Forester by Charles the Great, to cleanse the ways and country from thieves and robbers; wherein he behaved himself valiantly, for the which he was invested the first earl of Halebecke: he governed this country as a virtuous prince four and forty years, under Charlemain and Lewis the Gentle, his son, kings of France, and died in the year 836: he was a good Christian, and drew unto him many Bishops, Pastors, Preachers, and learned men to convert the pagan, which remained there in great numbers.  
Inguelran or Inguerrant, son to Lyderick the second, succeeded his father in the government of Flanders, and the county of Halibeck, in the year 836; he lived under Lewis the Gentle, and Charles the Bald, kings of France, to whom he did homage for his lands and seigneuries: he did re-edify many towns, castles, and houses, which had been ruined; he died in the year 852, having governed sixteen years.  
Odoacre or Audacre, son to Inguerrant, succeeded his father in the government of Flanders, in the year 852, and ruled eleven years; he also caused many towns to be repaired, and did wall about Gand, he died in the year 863.  
Bandovin, surnamed Arm of iron, son to the said Odoacre, so called by reason of his valour and worthy exploits: He carried away by force the fair judith, widow to Edward king of England, and daughter to Charles the Bald, emperor and king of France, so as for a time he could not come into grace with the emperor, who in the end was pacified, and made him the first earl of Flanders, giving him in dower all the country of Flanders; yet reserving unto himself and to his successors the sovereignty of the said country: having governed the province five and twenty years as Forester, and fifteen as earl; he died in the town of Arras, in the year 877, or as some say 879.  
Baudovin, the Bald, son to the other Baudovin, was second earl of Flanders, he obtained many victories against the Danes and Normans, he died in the year 919, and lies at Saint Peter near Gand.  
Arnould the old, surnamed the Great, eldest son to Baudovin the Bald, was third earl of Flanders, in the year 919; he had great wars against the house of Normandy, having caused duke William, called Long sword, to be slain: being ninety two years old, he died in the year 964, and is interred at S. Peter's by Gand.  
Baudovin the young, third of that name, and fourth earl of Flanders, become by a voluntary transport of his father (being his only son) earl of Flanders: having governed three years, he died in the year 967, and lies at S. Bertin.  
Arnold the Young, second of that name, the only son to Baudovin the Young, fift ealre of Flanders, took the government in the year 968, who died of a burning fever at Gand, the thirteenth of March 988, and lies at S. Peter's near Gand.  
Baudovin, with the fair Beard, fourth of that name, sixt earl of Flanders, eldest son to Arnold the Young: in the beginning of his government he had war against the emperor Henry the second; he was valiant, and therefore the emperor loved him, and gave him Walachrie, and the Islands of Zealand, for him and his heirs, whereby there grew long wars betwixt the Flemings and the Hollanders: having governed the country six and forty years he died in the year of our Lord 1035: He is buried at Saint Peter by Gand.  
B●●dovin, fift of that name, called the Gentle, or of I'Isle, only son to Baudovin with the fair Beard, was the seventh Earl of Flanders: he had in his time war against the emperor Henry the third, and having governed the country three and thirty years, he died in the year 1067, and is interred at S. Peter's.  
Baudovin, sixt of that name, called of Mons, surnamed also the Peaceable, the eight earl of Flanders, was son to Baudovin the fift; he never wore arms nor sword, his government was very peaceable, and died in the year 1070.  
Arnold the Simple, third of that name, ninth earl of Flanders, eldest son to Baudovin of Mons; he was much troubled by his uncle Robert the Frison, who under colour to be Tutor to his nephews, deprived them of their succession. He did hazard two battles against his uncle, and was slain in the last, in the year 1072.  
Robert, first of that name, surnamed the Frison, tenth earl of Flanders, younger son to earl Baudovin the fift. After the death of Arnold the Simple, slain in battle, and his brother Baudovin, with his mother Rithilde, being fled into Haynault, he took the said earldom without any resistance; he died in the year 1077.  
Robert the young Frison, surnamed of jerusalem, eleventh earl of Flanders, son to Robert the first, succeeded in the year 1077; he crossed himself to go against the Infidels: going into France to the Coronation of king Lewis, passing the bridge of Needle near unto Meaux, his horse stumbling fell upon him, so as the third day after, he died in the year 1111, and is buried at S. Vast by Arras.  
Baudovin, seventh of that name, twelfth earl of Flanders, succeeded in the year 1111; he was a good justicer, and died in the year 1119, having before his death and by his will made his heir Charles of Denmark, his cousin, son to Canutus' king of Denmark; he lies at S. Bertin.  
Charles, first of that name, surnamed the Good, thirteenth earl of Flanders, was, before the death of his cousin Baudovin, instituted his heir, and took the government in the year 1119; he deserved the name of Good, for his virtues and holy life: he banished the jews out of Flanders, and died without heirs, in the year 1127; he lies buried at S. Christopher's at Bruges.  
William of Normandy, fourteenth earl of Flanders, sole heir of Normandy, but deprived of the duchy by his uncle Henry king of England, was instituted in the said earldom by Lewis the Gross, king of France, in the year 1128. At his entrance he carried himself modestly: but thinking himself assured, he become cruel and a tyrant, which was his ruin. For in his place, the Nobility and Estates of Flanders did choose Thierry earl of Elsaoe, son to Thierry of Elsace and Gertrude of Flanders, daughter to Robert the first; the which he seeking to hinder by arms, was slain at the siege of Alost, in the year 1129, he lies at S. Bertin.  
Thierry of Elsace, fifteenth earl of Flaunders, was, by the Prelates, Nobles, and People, received to the earldom: He was a very politic prince, valiant, and discreet: He made four voyages to the Holie-land, and before the fourth, he invested his eldest son Philip in the country of Flaunders, and being returned, he left him the government, and retired himself into the monastery of Watene, which he had founded: he died sixty nine years old, in the year of our Redemption 1168, and lies buried at Watene.  
Philip of Elsace, eldest son to Thierry, surnamed the Great, by the session of his father was sixteenth earl of Flanders, and was a prudent prince: He made two voyages into Syria, to secure the king of jerusalem his cousin: and died in his last voyage before Air, and was by the commandment of his wife buried at Cleruault: he died without heirs, having governed Flanders about two and twenty years.  
B●udovin, eighth of that name, earl of Haynault and Namur, seventeenth earl of Flanders, by his wife Marguerite of Elsace, sister to Philip of Elsace. succeeded by the death of his brother in law, in the year of our Lord God 1192: He was descended in direct line from Baudovin, second son to Baudovin of Mons, expelled by Robert the Frison his uncle. He had war against Thierry of Beures, earl of Alost, against ●enrie earl of Namur, and against the earl of Nevers; he died in year 1195, and lies at Mons in Haynault, in the Church of S. Vaudru.  
Baudovin called of Constantinople the ninth of that name, eighteenth Earl of Flanders, succeeded in this county in the year 1194, and in the Earldom of Haynault; and so the said county of Flanders returned to the right and lawful heir, which had been unjustly detained from them by Robert the Frison and his successors, since the year 1072, that the said Robert (at the battle of cassel) defeated Arnold the right heir, and Earl of Flanders, and chased away Baudovin afterwards Earl of Haynault, brother to the said Arnold, until this year 1194: he was chosen Emperor of Constantinople, and in the year 1205 he was taken by the king of Bulgaria and sent into Turkey. He lies in Grece.  
Ferdinand of Portugal, son to Sancho king of Portugal, the nineteenth Earl of Flanders by his wife the Lady jone countess and heir of the said country, eldest daughter to Count Baudovin the ninth of that name: he had sharp war against Philip Augustus the French king, and was taken at the battle of Bovines, and carried prisoner to the Lowre in Paris, where he remained twelve years: finally being set at liberty he died soon after, in the year 1232. He lies at Margiettes.  
Thomas, youngest son to Thomas Earl of Savoy, was also in the right of his wise jone, the twentieth Earl of Flanders for a time, and died without heirs.  
jone Countess of Flanders and Haynault (eldest daughter to Baudovin of Constantinople) succeeded in the government of the said counties in the year 1195 (being then but seven years old) under the government of her uncle Philip Earl of Namur, until that she married Ferdinand of Portugal: she died in the year 1243, and lies at Margiettes by her first husband.  
Marguerite, second daughter to Baudovin the ninth, succeeded, by the death of the Lady jone her sister, in the countries of Flanders and Haynault, being widow to her second and last husband. Being under the gardainship of Buchard or Boschard of Auennes, son to james of Auennes, issued from a noble and ancient house in Haynault, Pronost, and Chanoine of Saint Peter at Lisse, her kinsman; he blinded with the beauty of his pupil, suborned her (being young) and won her to yield unto his lust, by whom he had two sons: after which she married William of Bourbon, Lord of Dampier●e, and of S. Desire, brother to Archambault Lord of Bourbon, by whom also she had three sons and one daughter, whom she preferred (before the two first that were unlawful) to the succession of the county of Flanders, holding the two first for bastards, the which bred her great trouble: she did settle the children of Dampierre her heirs, and died in the year ●279. She lies at Flines.  
William of Dampierre, eldest son to William of Dampierre, and the Lady Marguerite Countess of Flanders, by an accord of transaction made with john of Auesnes Earl of Haynaut his base brother, obtained the title of Earl of Flanders, and was the one and twentieth Earl. He crossed himself and went into the East with king Lewis; in his lost voyage he was taken prisoner by the Turks or Sarrafins, for the which he paid a great ransom: being returned, he died soon after in the year 1251: he lies at Flines, having governed his countries three years, he died without heirs.  
Guy of Dampierre, second son to William of Bourbon Lord of Dampierre, and of Ma●guerite Countess of Flanders, was the two and twentieth Earl of Flanders. He was a wife and virtuous prince, but he trusted his friends too much, for the which he smarted. He died a prisoner at Compiegne (being above eighty years old) in the year 1304, he was buried at Flines, having governed four and fifty years.  
Robert the third of that name, surnamed of Bethunes, for that before he was Earl, he was Lord of Bethunes: he was the three and twentieth earl of Flanders, a virtuous & hardy prince: he resigned to the French king the towns of Lisle and Dovay: he went into Scicile with Charles king of Scicile, and duke of Anjou his father in law, against the bastard Manfroy, whom he flew with his own hand: he killed jolente of Bourgondie his second wife, with the bridle of his horse, for that she had poisoned Charles his son by his first wife: he died in the year 1322, in the town of Ipre, being four score and two years old, and lies in Saint Martins at Ipre.  
Lewis of Nevers called of Cressy, for that he was slain at the Battle of Cressy, the only son to Lewis earl of Nevers and of the countess of Rethel, succeeded his father and mother in the counties of Nevers and Rethel; and also in the county of Flanders, to Robert of Bethunes his grandfather by the father's side, in the year 1322, notwithstanding that Robert called of Cassel, his uncle, would have seized upon the county of Flanders: he died in the year 1346.  
Lewis called Malain or of Male, for that he was borne at Male in the county of Flanders, the only son to Lewis of Nevers, called of Cressy, succeeded in the year 1346 in the counties of Flanders, Rethel, and Nevers, and by the decease of his great grandmother by the mother's side, in the earldoms of Arras and Bourgondie: a valiant and warlike prince, but too full of revenge: having ruled eight and thirty years, he was slain by the duke of Berry upon some controversy that grew betwixt them for the county of Bourgondie: he died in the year 1383, and lies in S. Picot at Lisle.  
Philip of France surnamed the hardy was fourth son to john of Valois the French king, and brother to Charles the fift, by whose gift he was duke of Bourgondie, and afterwards by the marriage of Marguerite (the only daughter and heir general to Count Lewis Malain) was the six and twentieth earl of Flanders, duke of Brabant, earl of Artois and Bourgondie, & lord of Salines and Macklin: he had great authority in France, for that he was a very wise prince, and died at Hault in the year 1404, he lies at Dijon in Bourgondie.  
john duke of Bourgondie eldest son to Philip duke of Bourgondie and of Marguerite heir and countess of Flanders, etc. succeeded in the duchy of Bourgondie, counties of Flanders, Artois, and Bourgondie, and seigneuries of Salines, and Macklin, in the year 1404, he was a man of a small stature, but of a great courage; he punished the Liegeois: he was slain upon the bridge at Montreau in the year 1419: he governed his countries fifteen year, and was interred in the monastery of the Cartusiens by Dijon in Bourgondie.  
Philip called the Good, for his admirable virtues, was the only son to john duke of Bourgondie, and the eight and twentieth earl of Flanders, of Artois, Bourgondie, Palatin, lord of Salines, and Macklin. He made a league with the English, the better to be revenged of his father's death, the which caused great wars in France: he punished the rebels in Gand, and subdued the Ligeois; he ruined Dinant, joining to his house the duchies of Brabant, Luxembourg, and Limbourg, and the earldoms of Holland, Zealand, Haynault, and Namur (the house of Bourgondie being then in the height of greatness and authority) he instituted the order of the Golden Fleece, in the year 1419: he died (being seventy and two years old) in the year 1477, in the town of Bruges, and lies at Dijon.  
Charles called in his youth earl of Charolois, the only lawful son to duke Philip the Good, succeeded his father in the earldom of Flanders, and was the nine and twentieth earl, and heir general of the house of Bourgondie: a very hardy and warlike prince, who in his father's life time led a great army before Paris. He punished the Liegeois, who had rebelled against their Bishop his cousin: in the end of his days he lost three battles, the first at Morat in Suisserland, the second at Granson, and the third at Nancy in Lorraine, where he lost his life, in the year 1476. He lies at Bruges in our Lady's church.  
Maximilian surnamed Hart of Steel, Archduke of Austria, son to the Emperor Frederick the third, married (without the privity of king Lewis the eleventh) the lady Mary, the only daughter and heir of the house of Bourgondie: he was taken prisoner at Bruges by the Flemings, and detained by the space of nine months, but they released him, fearing his father who marched with a great power to relieve him: he died in the year 1519, and lies at Neustat in Germany.  
Philip eldest son to the Archduke Maximilian who was Emperor of Germany, succeeded in all the duchies, earldoms, and other seigneuries left by the death of his mother, in the year 1482, being then very young, under the government of his father: ●uring which time the county of Flanders suffered much. This prince being but young, was of a good understanding, and died in his youth in Spain, not without suspicion of poison, in the year of our Lord God 1505, (his father being yet living) and lies at Granado.  
Charles the fift, emperor of Germany, king of Spain, eldest son to Philip Archduke of Austria, duke of Bourgondie, and earl of Flanders, etc. succeeded his father in the year 1505, in all the lands and seigneuries left by the death of his said father: a prince worthy of memory: he performed many memorable acts too long to recite; and died in Spain in the year 1558. He lies at Granado.  
Philip, only son to the emperor Charles the fift, was borne the one and twentieth of May, in the year 1527: He was invested during the life of the Emperor his father in all the duchies, earldoms, and other seigneuries of the Low Countries, being two and twenty years old, which was in the year 1549, and after his father's death was king of Spain, etc. He sent divers governors into the Low Countries, under the which he hath had great civil wars, as well for religion, as for the privileges of the provinces: so as some of them have withdrawn themselves from his obedience, being united under pretext of their privileges, and for religion. Finally, finding his life declining, in the year 1598., he gave his eldest daughter Isabel Clara Eugenia in marriage to the Archduke Albert of Austria his nephew, and in favour of the marriage he gave them all the Low Countries in general, with the county of Bourgondie, and died the thirteenth of September, in the year 1598., being seventy two years old.  
Albert Archduke of Austria and Isabel Clara Eugenia, according to the donation, took possession of the Low Countries, which remained under the obedience of Philip the second, father to the said Isabel, and with the consent of Philip the third, king of Spain etc. They sought by mildness to unite all the provinces of the Low Countries under their obedience, but not able to effect it, they used force: but after nine years war, they resolved to make a peace at what price soever, sending to the Estates to that end: wherein the French king and the king of England employed themselves. In the end a truce was made with them after the same manner as it is set down in the end of the discourse of the general Estates of the united Provinces; by which means he doth quietly enjoy the provinces and towns above mentioned.     

OF THE GENERAL ESTATES OF THE UNITED PROVINCES OF THE LOW COUNTRIES, AND WHAT THEY HOLD.  

The Contents.  
1A Catalogue and description of the lands and countries which the united Estates of the Low Countries hold. 2. Situation of the Island of Zealand, and others that lie near unto it: their confines and circuit. 3. Description: of Holland, and the chief towns, among others of Amsterdam. 4. Of the duchy of Gueldres, and her towns. 5. Of the country of Oueryssel. 6. Vtrecht. 7. East and West Eriseland. 8. Groningue. 9 Quality of the air of the Island of Holland, Zealand, etc. their good pastures, and the often earthquakes in the Island of Holland: Of the humour and disposition of the people of those Islands, 〈◊〉 of Vtrecht, Friesland, and other provinces: and of the tall stature of the Hollanders. 10. ●ichess of the united Estates of the Low Countries, growing by traffic at Sea, pastures, and ●●hing in Holland, pastures and wheat in Zealand and horses in Friesland. 11. The forts and places of defence which the united Provinces hold. 12. The government and policy of this Common weal both at land and sea: their manner of assembling the Estates: How matters are propounded and resolved by the seven Provinces: Of the Council of State of the said Provinces: Of how many persons, and what gentlemen it did consist in the year 1600. 13. Of the Estates of the Province of Holland, their manner of assembling, and what towns of the Province are called unto it: and the chief points for the which they are commonly called. Of the great Council and Chambers of accounts, & money of the said province. 14. Of the Estates of the county of Zealand, and of what towns it doth consist. 15. Of the principality and estate of Vtrecht, with the members. 16. Of the estate and signory of Friesland, divided into three quarters: Of the form and place where they hold their assembly. 17. Of the estate of Oueryssel, consisting of three jurisdictions. 18. Of the estate and government of the town of Grovingue, and the Ommelands, or country jurisdictions, divided into three parts. 19 Of the religion of the united Pro●●●eses, and what sects are crept in amongst them. 20. Articles of truce concluded in the year 1609, betwixt the Archdukes, and the general Estates of the united Provinces. 21. Genealogy of the Earls of Holland, Zealand, and Lords of Friesland.   

FOr as much as that part which they commonly call at this day the general Estates of the united Provinces of the Low Countries, is a kind of Commonweal, and that the king of Spain and Archdukes have treated with them as with sovereigns; I have thought it fit to set ●owne at large what I could learn, either by mine own experience, or by instructions from others, of this Commonweal. I will first number the countries which they hold, than I will continued the description. They do hold at this day the Provinces of Zealand, Holland, Friesland, Vtrecht, Grovingue, and the country thereabouts, Oueryssel, Drent, the country of Zu●phen, and three parts of the country of Gueldres, with some parcels of Brabant and Flanders, all which countries did heretofore contribute to the wars.  
The Island of Zealand with the neighbour Islands lie betwixt the mouths of the rivers of Mouse and Escaut, and have for their bounds upon the North part, Holland; upon the East, Brabant; on the South, Flanders; and upon the West, the English sea. The Islands of Zealand are seven in number; whereof there are three beyond the mouths of the river of Escaut, towards Brabant and the East; and for this cause are called the East Islands, and those be Scaled, Doveland, and Tolen: and four on this side the Escaut towards the West, and they are Walcheten, Zuytueland, Nortbeveland, and Vuolf●rdijck. Scaled is the greatest Island of those that are beyond the river of Escaut, which they of the country call Tlandruan Sschowen: it is now about seven miles in circuit, and in former times it hath been greater, and only distinguished from Nort●eveland by a little strait. The chief towns are Zir●zee and Browershave. They hold that Zirczee is the most ancient town of all those of Zealand: it was built in the year 1349 by one Siri●gue: It hath been long in great esteem by reason of the Port, and the great concourse of Merchants, but since that the haven hath been choked up with sand, it is neither so rich nor so much esteemed. Browershave hath scarce any inhabitants but fishermen, which live by the sea. Dwelande hath four miles in circuit; there are none but villages in it: In the year 1530, it was overflown by the sea, but being well fortified with banks, and laid dry, this loss was soon recovered. Tolen lies next unto B●aba●●, and is divided from it by a little strait. There is the little town of Tolen, and not far fro● it, the pleasant place of S. Martin's Dijck. On this side of the Escaut towards the East the chief Island is Walkeren, which lies on the East towards Brabant, on the South is Flanders; Holland on the North, and England on the West: it is the chief of all Zealand, and all men in a manner call it Zealand, and of a thousand strangers which come into this country, it may be there is scarce one that goes away with the knowledge of the 〈◊〉 name: it hath ten miles in circuit. The chief towns are Middlebourg, Flessingue, Armude or Armue, and Vere or Camphor, and there are many villages: Middleborough is a fair town, in which there are goodly buildings, especially the townhouse, which they do beautify daily: the streets and market places are very spacious: the place whereas the Bourgesses and Merchants assemble every morning (built like a cloister) is wonderful pleasant, and the haven is very safe and commodious: this is the chief of all the towns of Zealand, and one of the best frequented with merchants of all the Low Countries. Flessingue is a good town, it was engaged by the Estates to Elizabeth queen of England deceased, and likewise Briele, for certain sums of money which she lent them: in the which the king of England hath an English governor and a garrison entertained at this day. Armue hath a good port, but the town is little and poor; about three years and a half since they did bind passengers to go and embark at Armue to pass into Holland, to the end they might restore the town to her former beauty by this passage; for many hold that in former times it was a good town.  
Zuydbevelande is of a good bigness, it looks towards the banks of Brabant and Flanders, but of late years it hath been so overflown, as it is less by the half: The town of Romersualle seems to be torn from it, the which is environed with the sea, and doth not subsist but by the trade of salt: there the earls of Zealand were accustomed to take the oath. On the West part of this Island is the town of Go upon a mouth of the Escaut, which they call Scenge: this town is more pleasant than great, and it is alone in this Island.  
Nortbevelande (with the town of Cortchene, and many villages) was drowned with an inundation which happened in the year 1532, but they recovered it by little and little. Vuolferdijcke is a little Island, in the which there are but two villages. And to take all Zealand together, it hath ten towns, and one hundred villages, or some few more. This province having endured much, all her towns having been either forced by famine or siege, the banks of the country broken, so as they passed with boats into the land; they have in the end freed themselves from those miseries, and flourish again in traffic, people, and shipping, according to their devise, Luctor & emer go.  
Holland hath for bounds upon the West, the British sea; upon the North, the Cim brick; on the East, a straight which discovers Friesland; upon the Southeast, the country of overissel; and towards the South, that of Vtrecht: it is sixty miles in circuit; the breadth is very small, for that they hold that a traveler standing in the midst of the country, may go unto the extremity in three hours, and there are some places where it is but a mile or less from the midst unto the sea, or to a gulf of the sea.  
The towns are Dordrect, otherwise Dort, Delst, Leyden, Harlem, Amsterdam, Goude, Naerden, Mude, Wesop, Edam, Parmerende, Alcmen, Enkuysen, Horn, Rotterdam, etc. Dort is the chief town of all Holland; it is rather long than broad, and hath 2 very long streets, besides many little ones, which are exceeding ●aire: there is a very fair church the which is converted to a temple, whereas the Protestants do preach, and there is also an hospital for soldiers that are maimed or hurt in the State's service, or are sick; where they are attended & served as carefully as they can desire. Harlem is a great town and well built, where there is to be seen the greatest church in Holland; it stands near unto the market place. Leyden is situated upon that place which Ptolomee and Pli●ie call the midst of the mouth of Rhin. Amsterdam is at this day one of the best towns of Europe, and built upon piles like unto Venice: about two hundred and eighty years since, Giselbert of Amstell fortified it, and made good rampires, gates, and towns; but all being burnt through the envy of her neighbours, she began to be walled about in the year 1482: it is now inhabited by all sorts of Nations, and hath gotten all the traffic and reputation from Antuerpe: you shall not only see dwelling there Italians, Spaniards, Portugals, English, Scottish, French, Polonians, Danes, sweden, Norwegians, Livonia●●, and Germane, but also Americans, East and West Indians, and Moors, Goude st●●ds upon the river of Yss●ll, it is a ●aire and a rich town. Besides the towns which I formerly named, there is the Hage or hay, whereas the general of the army, and the ch●●●● of the Estates remain. Th●s' prou●●ce in the beginning of the wars, was more ruined than any other: her towns have been besieged, taken, burnt, etc. but in the end, through war it is come to rest, increasing in prosperity and great wealth, augmenting some part of her towns, yea when they had their enemies upon their frontier; so as the people are multiplied in such sort, and there is such abundance of shipping, as there is not any country in the world at this day like unto it: they sail throughout all the world, and flourish in trade of merchandise, the which will easily appear if we consider the town of Amsterdam, Rotterdam, Enchusen and others.  
Geldres is a province where in old time the Sicambrians did inhabit, and under that name were also comprehended they of Cleves, Monts, Mark, and juliers: some hold it took the name of Geldres of Gelduba, a town standing in old time upon the Rhin, whereof Tacitus makes mention, but at this day there is no memory thereof. Munster holds, that the first lords of this country (who then and long after carried no greater title than that of Advocates) were two brethren issued from the French, Winchard and Leopold du Pont, who built a castle called Pont Gelder, which castle hath long retained the name of Pont, and is joined to the town of Geldre, which hath given name to the whole province. It hath for limits upon the North, the country of Friesland; upon the northwest, a gulf of the german sea, commonly called the Zuyderzee; upon the South, the river of Mouse divides it from Brabant; to the Southeast is the duchy of juliers; upon the East, it is divided from the duchy of Cleves by the river of Wahal at the Island of Sgravenweerdt, whereas colonel Schenck built his sconce; and towards the West, is Holland, and the signory of Vtrecht.  
The duchy of Geldres and county of Zurphen contains the towns of Arnhem, Zurphen, Nymegen, and Ruremond, which are the four chief of the whole country, and make the four quarters of these two provinces, and are seated upon four divers rivers, and subject to four several Bishops. There are in this province Venlo upon the Mouse, Geldre, Stralen, Erckelens, and Wachkendoncke, in the Champion country, Hatten upon Issel, Elbruch and Harderwicke upon the Zuyderzee, Wageningen upon the Rhin, Tyel and Bomel upon the Wahal: there are many other towns which in old time have been walled, but they had been spoiled, and in these last wars utterly ruined, the which be Keppell, Burch, Ghendt, Battemburch, Montfort, Each, and others, the which do still enjoy the ancient privileges of towns.  
Arnhem was in old time called Arnacum, it is a good town and spacious, seated upon the right bank of the river of Rhin, half a league from the which is Fossa Drusiana, now called yssel Dort; whereas Drusus to keep his soldiers from idleness, caused them to dig a channel, which drew the water out of the Rhin into the river of yssel. This town of Arnhem is the chief of the valley, which is one of the four quarters of the duchy of Gelder's; under which town are the towns of Hattem, Harderwijck, Elbruch, and Wageningen, with many villages and castles, with their jurisdictions, subject to the justice of the Drossart of that quarter, the which is environed by the Zuyderzee, the rivers of Rhin and Yssel. Touching the spirituality, the town of Ar●hem before the troubles, was subject to the Bishop of Vtrecht: in this town in old time the dukes of Geldres made their residence, and were interred.  
Nymeg●n is a free town and a fee of the Empire: some writ that it was built by Magus king of Gaul, and was called Noviomagum; it stands upon the river of Wahal. hessel the son of the king of the Cattlres ●avoured this town, being borne there, and did enlarge it, so as the lower part of the town is yet called Hesselmarckt: the castle is very ancient, and stands yet upon the top of a little hill overlooking the town, the which some say was built by Caesar, to command the country thereabouts. This town makes a quarter, and under it are comprehended the towns of Bomel and Tiel, which are walled, and Ghendt which lies open, yet hath it the privileges of a town. This town was engaged by William king of the Romans, earl of Holland etc. to the earl of Geldres, for one and twenty thousand marks of silver, upon condition that he should redeem it at a certain time, or else he should enjoy the town with the jurisdiction as his own inheritance; the which the Emperor Rodulphus did afterwards confirm, neither was the money ever repaid, and this town retains the jurisdiction and prerogative to coin money, as an imperial town.  
Ru●●●ond is a good town, strong, and pleasing, seated upon the river of Mouse, joining to the mouth of that of Ruoer: It is the chief town of one of the four quarters of G●e●●eses, under whose jurisdiction are comprehended the towns of Venlo, Gelder, Str●●●●, Wachtendonck, and Erckelans, all walled and strong.  
Z●●phen is a county of itself, and numbered for one of the seventeen Provinces. This townestands upon the right bank of the river of issel: It was united by marriage unto the duchy of Gueldres, and makes one of the four quarter. The towns and jurisdictions which are subject unto the said county, are Doesbourg, Doecum, Broukhorst, Lochom, Groll, Bredevoerd, Keppel, Bourg, Gand, Sherenbourg, which are, or have been walled towns, besides many good villages.  
The county or country of Oueryssel was in former times under the principality of the Bishops of Vtrecht, and called the High diocese: but the emperor Charles 5 having obtained the temporalty of both dioceses from the bishop, he made two provinces, the 〈◊〉 of Vtrecht, and the other of Oueryssel, the which are numbered among the 17 provinces, and are now subject to the united Estates. This country is so called, for that it li●s beyond the river of issel. It hath upon the North side Friesland, and a part of the country of Groningue; upon the South the county of Zutphen; to the East Westphalia; and upon the West the Zuyderzee. It is watered by the rivers of issel, Vidre, Regge, Dan noire, and Wahal. The whole province is divided into three great bailiwicks, that is, of Salandt (so called of the old Saliens:) Tuent, and Vollenhoven, which is in the midst of the other two. Salandt contains under it many good towns, among the which there are three imperial Hans towns, Deventer, Campen, and Swoble: The lesser tow●●ss are Hasselt, Covoerden, Genemuiden, Ommen, Hardenbourg, Wison, and Graff●o●st. Tuent hath the towns of Oldenzeel, O●marson, Enschede, Ghoor, Dyepen●am, Delden, Risen, and Almeloo. The quarter of Vollenhoven, hath a town of that name, with a castle, where the Bishop of Vtrecht had a palace: and the town of Steen●icke.  
The country and signory of Vtrecht was in old time belonging unto a prince, and particular p●ela●, who had both the spiritual and temporal jurisdiction, the which was give●●y the kings of France, unto S. Wildeb●ord the first Bishop, who was an Englishman: and this estate did consist of two dioceses, the one called the lower, which is the pro●●●ce of Vtrecht; and the other the high diocese, which is the country of Ouerys●el, as I have said: But He●rie of Bavaria, Bishop of Vtrecht, being expelled out of the town by ●is own subjects, and oppressed by the duke of Gueldres, about the year 1527, resigned all his right and in●●rest to the temporal jurisdictions of the countries of V●●●●t and overissel, to the emperor Charles the fift, who restored him to the possession of his spiritual dignity. This country of Vtrecht hath for bounds towards the Nor●h Holland and upon the West Guelderland. The chief towns are Vtrecht, called in old time A●●onia, or Antonina, and since Traiectum, for that it was a passage where as impost was paid for merchandise which was transported from one side unto another, and it retains that name unto this day. It stands upon the head of the Rhein, the which passed directly there, before it was forced, some eight hundred years since, to fall into the 〈◊〉 Le●c●. I● is a great and pleasant town, and the ordinary abode of many gentlem●●. There are ●●re ou●● Amersford, Rhenen, Montfort, and Wickter-Duirsted, in 〈◊〉 a strong and rich town, with above sixty boroughs and villages. In these late 〈◊〉 of Vtrech● hath been mo●e a●●oyed by ●he duke of Alba, and received 〈…〉 other; 〈◊〉 ●ince it hath been in great danger by reason of their inte 〈…〉 ●eing uni●●d ●●th the other provinces, it doth by little and little 〈…〉 and prosperity, increasing daily in traffic. 〈…〉 of prince Er●so, who came and planted himself there, 〈…〉 ●●rist, ●ith his two brethren: some writ that they 〈…〉 of the Macedonian an●●ie, and had served Alexander in his conquests of Asia, after whose death they came with certain ships into those parts, and there settled their abode, and gave it the elder brother's name, the which it holds unto this day. It is bounded upon the North and West by the Ocean, on the South it hath Oueryssel, and to the East the river of Ems which divides it from Westphalia. The most ancient town was Staveren, and the chief of all the country. It had a prerogative from the kings of Denmark, That in passing the Sound, their ships should go and come first before all others, and be presently dispatched by the Collectors of the imposts, whereas others should attend their turn: but since the haven hath been stopped up by the sand of the sea, so as their trade is decayed. But at this day Lewarden is the chief town of the province, seated in a pleasant country full of goodly meadows, and in the midst of Friesland: under the Grittenie or bailiwick of this town there are seventeen good villages, and this town is in the quarter of Ostergoe, of which Dockum is the second. There are also in Friesland the towns of Franiker, Bolswaerdt, Harlingen, Snecke, Sloten, Ilst, Worcum, Hindelopen, and these are in the second quarter called Westergoe: the third quarter of Friesland is called the Seven forests, but now they are converted to pasture and tillage; it consists of eight bayliwickes, in which are five and twenty bourroughs and villages. East Friesland hath the town of Emden upon the river of Ems, & Aurich, which is environed with forests. The Archdukes hold a little town in this country called Linguen, and Oldenzeel in overissel near unto it, where there are good sorts and garrisons.  
The town of Groningue and the Ommelands (which are country jurisdictions consisting of many good boroughs and villages) lie betwixt the rivers of Ems and Lanwers, and make one of the seventeen Provinces. The town of Groningue hath been besieged and forced, and the country about it much spoiled; but now they are in a more quiet estate yet they are subject to contributions which they pay to the garrisons of Linguen and Oldenzeel; so as the villages cannot well recover their former estate. Finally, the country of Friesland hath been much subject to the violence and insolences of war, and they have always carried themselves valiantly, and contributed freely to the charges of the war with the united Estates. There is in this province the town of Dam, which is of good traffic, but it hath been of late years demanteled, and fortified again, ye● now it lies open: an● there is also Delsziel a great and mighty fort, in form of a town, it stands upon the Dullart, and is like in time to be a town of good traffic, under the subjection of them of Groningue.  
The united Provinces of the Low Countries are all at this day in better estate than the other Provinces, for that they have the sea free and open, great store of shipping, the Ocean towards the North, and some rivers at commandment, people in great abundance, which have come thither from other provinces, upon hope of traffic and gain, and to have liberty of religion without molestation, yea for navigation, for the which the country is very commodious, and is much increased by the war (a paradox which seems strange, and contrary both to nature and reason) and wonderfully flourishing, as appears by their forts, enlarging of towns, and sumptuous buildings.  

¶ The Quali●●●.  
THe air of Zealand is not very good, and is ●●sse wholesome than that of the neighbour provinces, especially in Summer, by reason of the marshes, and pools, whose waters do putrify and stink, and the vapours infect the ●ire that is near unto them; or else for that the country hath ●oo few trees: yet it hath this benefit, that it is not subject to the plague, nor other contagious diseases. The soil is fat and of great yielding, and there they reap wheat which is whiter and more weighty than in any other country. They have store of Bay trees, which grow very great, and great abundance of herbs, both physical and of a good taste, fit to eat. There are also good pastures, not only within the banks, but also upon the sea shore, where you may see thousands of cattles seeding. There is great plenty of all sorts of fruit, fair, and ripe, except grapes, which cannot come to any maturity; so as there are not any vines but upon arbours, where as the grapes do sooner rot than ripe.  
As for Holland, the ground doth sometimes shake under their wagons and horses; and there happened an accident which made it appear that the ground is hollow, for that a cow, being fallen into a hole, was found dead in the sea three days after: Moreover, a part of Holland is called Waterland, that is, a country of Waters. It is divided by many pools and marshes, and by many channels artificially drawn from these rivers and from the sea. And although it were in former times full of woods and forests, yet at this day there are few trees, by reason of the great humidity. The air is sweet & whole some, notwithstanding this moisture, by reason of the good winds which reign there, and the great multitudes of people which inhabit this province. The land is so low, as that the sea is higher than it in many places, and for this cause there are dikes and banks of all sides. This country yields little wheat, and small store of fruit or flax: but there are excellent pastures, where they breed and feed good store of cattle, especially kine and horses.  
The country of overissel is for the most part plain and fertile, among other things it bears good wheat. The country of Gueldres abounds chiefly in corn, and it hath very good pastures; so as they sand very lean cattle out of Denmark to be fatted there.  
As for Vtrecht towards Viana and Arnham, there is nothing but sand, but in other places the soil is good, and is more tilled and sown than that of Holland, for that it is not so low nor so moist.  
Friesland is a flat country and morish: there are many meadows whereas they feed great store of cattle: they have a kind of soil whereon they make turses, which burn like coal, but they are grey, and keep fire well with a little wood. They sow little corn, for that the country is so low, especially towards the sea, the which from the beginning of Autumn until the spring is in a manner all covered with water, so as the towns and villages in places which stand high, are environed with good banks and defences; but by their pastures and turfs, the inhabitants have corn, wine, and wood, from other places. But the better to understand what turfs are, you must know that it is a kind of earth which they found in fat and moorish grounds, the which is so dried with the sun, as it is fit to receive and entertain fire; and there are many sorts, according to the quality of the country: they dig them five and twenty or thirty foot deep: they cut them into pieces, and set them to dry in the wind and sun, that they may come to perfection, and then they presently take fire when they come near it, they give a great heat, and the coal last longer than that of wood. In the year 1567. a great field of turfs being set on fire, there was so great a flame and smoke, as it seemed the whole country had been on fire. They do also burn in Friesland cow dung dried. They breed very great oxen, yea the greatest in Europe, and many goodly horses.  
East Friesland abounds in horses, tame beasts of all sorts, and store of game for hunting. There is abundance of corn and pulses, and good store of salt.   

¶ The Manners.  
THe inhabitants of Zealand have good wits, they are forecasting and subtle, of a mean stature, notwithstanding that the Annals report that William the Good Earl of Holland did carry with him unto the marriage of Charles the Fair, a Zelander of huge stature, in regard of whom many tall men seemed but dwarves, and so strong as he could list up with either hand a hogshead of beer, and they writ that he could carry a beam which eight men could not li●t. They are very expert in navigation: and very neat in their houses, so as their wooden implements are like unto looking-glasses. They are very careful of their affairs, and very skilful in trade of merchandise. As for their diet they are like unto the rest of the Low Countries.  
The people of Holland exceed all the other Nations of Europe in stature, and as for the women they are commonly fair, but their beauty doth not last, neither is it so pleasing as that of the women of England. The Hollanders are civil, but in their drink. The towns are very well governed. They retain still their ancient courage, and are haughty and proud, like a people which live in a rich country, and of great traffic; they make no account of the force and power of neighbour princes.  
As for the inhabitants of Guelderland and Zu●phen, they were the last which in Caesar's time came under the power of the Romans, and the first which freed themselves in the declining of the Empire.  
In Vtrecht you have a great number of civil gentlemen. The gentle women go all attired after the French fashion, unless they carry a huque, which is a black vale which covers their faces and bodies: there are not any in all the country so handsome as the inhabitants of this town, and the Hage.  
As for the Frisons, they are many in number, and some hold them to be very valiant, but I found no reason to settle this impression, they go on like other men when they are commanded; but they show no such heat of courage: they are so proud, as they are altogether insupportable: most of them are given to merchandise. They hate adultery much, and love liberty.   

¶ The Riches.  
THe Estates must needs be very rich, by reason of their great traffic by sea, and the multitude of merchants which come from all parts: for besides the profits which many private men of the said Estates get by them, there is not any commodity that comes into Holland, but pays a great imposition and custom, which they have imposed upon all things that come into their havens. As for Holland, their wealth consists in pastures, where they do feed an infinite number of horses, oxen, and kine, which yield so much milk, 
After the French account it is 300 thousand pounds starling.  as they hold that the butter and cheese of Holland is yearly worth above a million of gold, whereof besides their own provision, they do yearly sand great store into England, German, France, and Spain. They do also make great commodity of red Madder, which they call Meedecrappe, the which they use to keep cloth from staining. They make great revenues of their fishing, but especially of their voyages they make at sea, whereas they sometimes bring home ships of great price: and it is almost incredible to believe what great ships this country hath, both for war and trade. So as Holland (having neither vines, flax, wood, and but little corn) abounds in wine, wheat, and linen cloth, which brings great commodity to the inhabitants, as also the thread, edges, and bone lace which they make there. They do also cell their horses at a good rate, which yields them good profit.  
Zealand hath also store of Meedecrap, which they sand into all Europe, and return great profit, as also of Coriander seed. Their pastures are also very profitable, feeding great store of cattle, whereby their owners grow rich: these cattle are not only greater than any other, but of a most delicate taste, by reason of the grass that hath a property to feed them better than any other. And that which makes Zealand rich, is the great concourse of merchants which come to Middlebourg, and the customs and impositions which they raise of all merchandise that comes thither. They have an excellent art to boil bay salt, which they bring from countries which lie Westward, the which they put into great coppers, and by boiling make it as white as snow. They put salt water unto the bay salt of Spain or France, and refine it with a greater increase, the which they sand into all the parts of Europe. Moreover they make a benefit of the traffic of their wheat, which is the best that can be seen. As for Friesland, they sand their horses into all Europe; they are fit to carry an armed man, and for great burdens: finally, they make their profit as other countries do which the Estates hold, but there is nothing extraordinary that merits any longer discourse of their riches: I will only say that their tow●eses do witness that they want no commodities, and the long wars which they have sustained, show, that they are mighty and rich, notwithstanding that they have borrowed from the queen of England, and other princes, who had an interest in their preservation.   

¶ The Forces.  
IT is scarce credible without sight, what the strength is of those countries which the Estates hold; for that, first of all, Zealand is environed by the sea, and besides, all approaches are so well fortified, as it is impossible to found any easy landing to enter into the country, without the consent of the inhabitants. You have the town of Flessingue which the sea doth beaten upon on three parts, and is well furnished with artillery to frustrate the attempts of a great army. This only town was the cause that all the rest of the Low Countries (which be free) took arms, and freed themselves from the Spaniards yoke: so as their inhabitants which have framed this common weal, have treated with the king of Spain and the Archduke as sovereigns, and have been so acknowledged in this last treaty. Middlebourg is also a place of good consideration: but the fort of Ramekens is of great importance, and it may be not inferior to any. Coming afterwards into Holland, you have Dort or Dordrect, which is very strong, and environed with water. Rotterdam is a town of good defence, and so is Gorkom. As for Vtrecht, it is a fair town, fortified with ten good bulwarks well flanked.  
In Guelderland there is Nimeguen, a town that is strong both by art and situation. Arnham is one of their best places. Zurphen is of good importance, but not so desensible as the other. As for the country of Oueryssel, you have Deventer, which is strong and well furnished with all things necessary to make a long defence. And in Friesland Groningue is a place which will not be easily forced.  
I should never make an end if I should set down in particular all the strong places which are in this country, as the Tolus, or Skinks Sconce, which is almost impregnable, built betwixt the wall and the Yssel; and in like manner S. Andrews fort, Tiel, and Briele, which are able to withstand the greatest armies. It shall suffice to say, that this country is so well fortified on all sides, as an army that would win it foot by foot, were it very strong, and always in field, should advance very little in a long time. We must also consider, that the Estates have means to drown the whole country (if they see themselves brought unto despair) by the breaking of their banks, especially in Holland. Moreover, they do always entertain many companies of soldiers, both upon the frontier, and within the country. And as for the sea, I do not think there is any nation in the world so strong, nor so able to make a great attempt. To conclude, all things favour them in regard of force, as we have plainly seen in the long war which they have maintained against the king of Spain: who seeing that he could not prevail, and that it was a continual wasting of men and money, hath been forced in the end to make a truce with them, and to grant them most of their demands.   

¶ The Government.  
ALl the affairs of State of the united Provinces of the Low Countries, as well for the war, both by sea and land, and of that which depends, the alliances and leagues which they have with kings, princes, and foreign potentates, for the levies of money which must be made, as well for war, as for affairs of State, and generally of all that concerns the good and quiet of the united Provinces, are directed and governed by the general Estates of the said Provinces, whereof the assembly is made of the chief colleges of the Nobility, Magistrates, and Superintendants of towns, in every quarter and province respectively.  
The particular Estates of every province do yearly choose and depute so many persons as they shall think good, to whom they give full power and authority to advise and resolve with the deputies of all the other Provinces, of every point which shall be propounded, and of all other things which may be represented, as shall be thought fitting for the good and service of the State. In which assembly of the said general Estates, matters are propounded, debated, and resolved on the behalf of every Province respectively, and not by voices. So as at this day the resolutions are taken in the said assembly in the behalf of the seven Provinces, whereof the first is the duchy of Gueldres and county of Zutphen (notwithstanding that Zutphen be a Province by itself, besides the seventeen Provinces of the Low Countries) the second is the province of Holland and West-Friseland, the third Zealand, the fourth Vtrecht, the fift Friesland, the sixt Oueryssel, the seventh Groningue and the Ommelands. To the said assembly of the general Estates come (being summoned) the governors of every province respectively, and the Council of estate, to help to advise and to resolve of all matters which shall be propounded.  
In the Council of State of the said united Provinces, they give every man his opinion, the Councillors whereof are appointed by the general Estates (upon the election and presentation which is made by every province) to whom they take an oath of fidelity according to the instructions which are made: the which Council of Estate was made in the year 1600, of all the governors of provinces, and of prince Henry Frederic of Nassau, master George Gilpin Agent for the king of great Brittany. For the duchy of Gueldres the seigneuries of Oyen and Bryenem. The seigneur of mateness for the Nobility, Buren of Dordrect and Boulens of Amsterdam for Holland and West-Friseland, Fernand aleman for Zealand, Foocke for Vtrecht, Kaminga and Frans jansen for Friesland, Itterson for Oueryssel, and Rengers for Groningue and the Ommelandes, with their secretaries Christian Hu●genss, and Zuylen.  
The Estates of every province hold their rights, privileges, and customs, which they have of old time enjoyed, governing the affairs of the province, as well by themselves, as by their colleagues and officers which they appoint, as well for matters of State, and that which depends thereon, as for war, the treasure, justice, and other things, in a manner after one order.  
As for example, in Holland and West Friesland, the Estates of the province have always been represented by the barons, knights, gentlemen, and by the good towns, wherein the Clergy was never taken to be a member: which noblemen and gentlemen of note are called to the said assembly, not only to give their opinions and help to resolve upon the points propounded, but also upon all occurrents concerning the good, peace, tranquility, and assurance of the province: the which being thus assembled, confer and resolve of all matters with the Advocate of the country, as the first in the said assembly of Estates, who receives their opinions, and delivers them openly. To the said assembly are commonly called the chief towns of the province, that is to say, Dordrect, Harlem, Delff, Leyden, Amsterdam, Goude, Rotterdam, Gorcom, Schiedam, Schoonho●en, Briel, Alcmar, Horn, Enchuysen, Edam, Monyckendam, Medemblyck, and Purmerende: and when there falls out any matter of great importance, as at the reception of a new prince, to treat a peace, or to undertake a new war, they are also accustomed to call the other towns of the said province, which follow, Vuoerdem, Oudewater, Gheertruydemberg, Heusden, Naerden, Vu●esp, and Muyden: and no others, for that they belong unto private lords, or else they are not towns fashioned as these be. The said towns sand their deputies in a competent number, with ample commission and full power in the same form as we have said of the nobility.  
The convocation of the said noblemen, gentlemen, and towns of Holland, and the principal points for the which it is made, is managed by the Advocate of the country, and by the Councillors appointed in the said estates: which Advocate makes the proposition, and the opinions of the said noblemen and gentlemen being put into form, he delivers them with pregnant reason. Which done, he demands in order the opinions of the towns, and in case there be variety and diversity of opinions, he labours to reconcile them, concluding according unto the plurality of voices, according unto the which the resolutions are taken.  
The chief points why they hold the said assembly, are touching war, by sea and land, for the contributions of money for the reformation of all abuses that may happen, for the quiet & tranquility of the country, to ●ntertaine an union and concord throughout all the towns of the province, and generally for all that concerns the Estates of the country, religion, justice, policy, means of foreign contributions, revenues, clergy goods, and all to the greatest ease and profit of the province. The said assembly is commonly held at the Hague, which is an open place, in the midst of the country, five or six times a year, unless necessity of affairs require it extraordinarily, or in some other place: and for the execution and entertainment of the resolutions tak●n by the said Estates in their assembly, there is a commission given to one of the said nobles, to the Advocate of the country, and to one of every chief town.  
The said deputed councillors have not only the charge for the entertaining of re solutions taken in the assembly of the Estates, but also of all things concerning the good of the Province, the quiet and union of quarters, members, and towns, having the knowledge and determining of all matters of controversies touching the contributions of the country, and of that which follows; together with all matters of confiscation, by reason of the war, of all troubles, tumults, ●editionss, perturbation of the public quiet, treasons, counterfeiting of money, and of all other matters concerning the public, in which they judge by decree.  
In matters of ordinary justice as well betwixt the inhabitants of the country as strangers, the precedents and they of the great council have supreme authority in the said countries, who judge soveraignely and by decree; from whose sentences there is no appeal, but a revision or proposition of error: for the which there is appointed (by the said Estates jointly with the precedents and councillors) certain revisitors in a competent number.  
The governor, precedent, and councillors of the provincial court of the said provinces, have the knowledge and managing of many matters concerning the government of the country, in cases of civil and criminal justice, as also of causes which come by appeal from inferior towns and villages. They make their acts and commissions in the name of the said governor, precedent, and council: but they do justice in the right of the sovereignty of the said province. For the administration of the revenues there is a chamber of the masters, auditors, and registers of accounts.  
And although that the Hague be an open place, two miles distant from the North sea, yet it is the most pleasant abode of all the seventeen Provinces, exceeding them in wealth, goodly palaces, fair buildings, pleasant places, and a great number of gentlemen: there are above two thousand fair houses, and they build daily, yea whole streets. There is the court of the prince or governor of Holland, Zealand, and West Friesland, which is at this day prince Maurice of Nassau etc. as also the general Estates of the united Provinces hold their assemblies there; and the Estates of Holland, and their deputies, the ordinary councillors, the precedents, and they of the great council, they of the provincial council, with the Chamber of accounts.  
Besides all these councils, there is also a council of Brabant for the towns and villages belonging to the jurisdiction of the duchy of Brabant, which are under the obedidience of the general Estates of the united provinces; whereas all matters proceeding from the duchy are determined, under the authority, and by commission from the said general Estates, in the same manner and form as hath been always used in the chancery, council, and feodal court of Brabant: to the end that by this means every one may be maintained in his accustomed privileges.  
In the government of the towns and the united provinces, and namely in the province of Holland, and West-Friseland, they observe their ancient rights, privileges, statutes, and customs, where for the most part there is a Baili●e of Escove●, who is chosen by the greatest part of the said Estates, as their officer. There also are Bourgmaisters, Sheriffs, Treasurers, Masters of the buildings, Masters of orphans, Council and Woetschapen, who are chosen out of the chiefest bourgesses.  
The bourgmaisters and sheriffs are yearly renewed, according to the denomination of double the number made by the vuoetschapen, and chosen by the governor of the province, or (in his absence) by the precedent and them of the provincial council, although though that in some towns the election of bourgmaisters is absolute, and in some the sheriffs are appointed by the officer in the name of the said Estates. The number of bourgmaisters is according to the custom of towns; as in Dordrect one, and in some, four; who labour most in politic affairs, for the good government of the town, for the revenues thereof, and for the quiet and peace of the inhabitants.  
The sheriffs in most towns are seven in number, who have the knowledge and determining of all matters both civil and criminal. The treasurers, masters of works, and masters of orphans are in most towns yearly created by the bourgmaister: the treasurers have the receipt of the towns revenue, whereof they give an account: the masters of the works have the oversight of the public buildings: the masters of the orphans have the superintendency and care of pupils goods, to the end they may be governed with good security: the vuoetschapens (who are sworn in council) serve in some towns continually during their lives: they are created out of the best bourgesses of the town; they and the bourgmaisters representing the whole body of the town, advise and resolve upon all things that are propounded unto them, as well for the general good of the country, as for the town in particular.  
In regard of money that is coined throughout all the united provinces of the Low Countries, there are three generals, who being called by the said general Estates, come whether soever they be sent for to advise, touching matters of mint.  
The said county of Holland and West Friesland have two mints, the one is ancient and more privileged, for Holland, in the town of Dort; the other for West-Friseland, in the town of Horn.  
The Estates of the county of Zealand consist of the nobility, and the towns of the Islands of Walchrens, Schowen, Suytbeveland, Tolen, Nortbeveland (newly recovered from the sea) Duyveland, Wolphaerts-d●ke, and Philips-land. They hold their general assemblies at Middlebourg, whereas most commonly the college of their deputies do remain, who assemble daily to treat, dispose, and determine of all matters concerning the State.  
The said county of Zealand hath drawn unto itself, the Chamber of accounts touching the revenues, & generally of all receipts belonging to that Estate, the which in former times was managed jointly with that of Holland and West-Friseland at the Hague: But now the said Chamber for the county of Zealand is settled in the court of Middlebourg. Zealand hath also a mint in the said court, the which is subject to the generals of the mint.  
The appellations in civil causes of all the towns, places of justice, and bayliwickes of Zealand, repair to the provincial council at the Hague; except they of Middlebourg, who by privilege may appeal either to the provincial council, or to the great council: but offenders are executed without appeal by the chief justices, every one in his own jurisdiction. As for their policy and religion, they govern themselves as they do generally throughout all the united provinces, their confederates.  
The principality and Estate of Vtrecht consists at this day of three members, that is to say, the Clergy of five colleges of cannons, the Nobility, & Towns: the Clergy who are first, consist of the cathedral seat of Saint Martin, Saint Saviour, Saint john, and Saint Marie, which are indifferently chosen of the deputies, which are at this present in the college of the said Estates: the Nobility stands for the second member: for the third member, the bourgmaisters and deputies of towns of the said principality and State. There is also a provincial council, from the which there is no appellation, yet in case of religion, they may bring it before the Estates of the province. The Chamber of accounts is overseen by the college of the said Estates. The said principality hath also a particular mint, as it hath always had, & it is subject to the generals of the mint. The policy and religion is maintained as in all other the united provinces their confederates. There is also in the said principality four marshals, either of which at this day hath his quarter.  
The estate and lordship of Friesland is divided into three quarters (which in their language they call Gouën) that is to say, Oostergoë, Westergoë, and the Seven forests. But at this day (according to the government of the present time) the towns make the fourth quarter or member of the estate. Oostergoe consists at this present of eleven bayliwickes, which they call Gritenies: Westergoe of eight bailiwicks: and the Seven forests of ten. The Goë or quarter of towns, doth at this day make the fourth me●ber in the assembly of the Estates of the Province. The said towns were heretofore affected unto the Goë, in the which they were situated, either of the Oostergoe, Westergoe, or the Forest: which towns are eleven in number, whereof the eight which be wal●ed are very strong, that is to say, Leewaerden, Bolswaert, Dockum, Frau●ken, Harlingen, Sneek, Staveren, Sloten; and three others which in old time had the privileges of towns granted them, and they are not walled, these be Is't, Worchum, and Hindelopen: of which four quarters all Friesland consists. The Estates of this province have always been represented by the gentlemen, and the richest proprietaries, as well of the towns as of the Champion countries. But now at the summons of the governor, and the deputies of the Estates, they call unto the general assemblies certain gentlemen, and rich freeholders of the Champion countries, and of every town, to be sufficient deputies, according to the letters of estate which a●e sent unto them: the which letters are directed to the Grietmen or Bailiffs, and to the Bourgmaisters of towns respectively. Every one of which in his jurisdiction and town, for his part, calls together the gentlemen and chief of the country, and the Sheriffs, Counsels, and jurats in every town, who having heard the causes of this commission, they then choose and depute in every bailiwick and town two personages, to whom commission and authority is given to appear at the said general assembly, there to resolve upon those affairs for the which they are sent for, and upon all other occurrents which may fall out. Every bayli●icke doth commonly sand two deputies, one of the nobility, and another of the best yeomen of the countries, and every town (especially those that are walled) sand one of their Council, and one of their jurats from among the commons, without any respect or degree of gentry; as also in some places of the seven Forests they depute not any gentlemen, for the want they have of them, but commonly they sand their richest yeomen, with the contentment of the gentlemen of other quarters. The said assembly and general convocation, is commonly held once or twice a year in the town of Leewae●den (now the chief of the country, and situated in the centre thereof) unless some extraordinary affairs, or the necessity of the time, requires otherwise. These deputies have knowledge and determine of all matters, concerning the contribution of the province, confiscations, clergy goods, banks and sluices, and finally, of all the administration of politic affairs, of war, and the treasure. The Receivers are bound every year to come and give up their accounts before the chamber of accounts, over which there are yearly four men appointed, that is, one of every quarter. The said Estates have also their particular Mint in the town of Leewaerden, the which is subject unto the generals. The Bailiffs with the assessors in their bayliwickes over the Champion country; and the Burgomaster's, Sheriffs, and Council of towns do only judge in civil causes: They give their sentences in the name of the sovereign segneurie of Friesland, from the which they may appeal to the provincial court, and not to the College of the deputies of the Estates. The provincial court consists of the Governor, Precedents, and Councillors, to whom only belongs the knowledge and deciding of civil and criminal causes. But the bailiffs and magistrates of towns must sand offenders with their information to the said court, where their process is made by the proctor general according to the quality of their offence: they have their residence also at Lecwaerden. The Estates of the said province have of late years erected an University at Franicker. As for religion it is managed as in other countries.  
The estate of Oueryssel, carries that name for that it lies beyond the river of Yssel. All the province is divided into three goodly jurisdictions, the first is Saland, the second Tuent, and the third (which is in the midst of both) Vollenhoven. Saland hath many towns contained in it, that is to say, Deventer, Campen, Zwol, and others. Tuent hath the town of Oldenzeel, Otmarsum, and others. Voolenhoven hath a town and 〈◊〉 of the same name, at this day, ruined by the last wars (whereas in old time the bishops of Vtrecht kept their court) with the town of Steenwick, and others. The soveraingnitie of this province did in old time belong to the bishops of Vtrecht: but since being come with the signory of Vtrecht, to the emperor Charles the fist, and to Phi●●● his son, upon condition that they should maintain them in their privileges; they have upon breach thereof withdrawn themselves with the other united provinces, from the obedience of the said king Philip. The said province hath never acknowledged but two members in her government, that is to say, the Nobility, out of which the governors are chosen, and the three Imperial towns, Deventer, Campen, and Zwo●● by the which two members, all difficulties which do arise in this estate are decided, and whatsoever is decreed by them, according to the constitutions of the country, remains firm and stable. And as the Nobility in pre-eminence yields not to any, no more do the Towns, unless it be in their order and degree; whereof Deventer is the first, Campen the second, and Zwol the third: every one of which towns doth judge definitively, and hath a prerogative to coin money. The assembly of the Estates of the said province, aswell general as particular, is made diversly, according to their ancient customs and pre-eminencies, sometimes in one place, sometimes in another, the deputies changing often. Touching religion they govern themselves generally, as in other the united Provinces of the Low Countries.  
As for the estate and government of the town of Groningue, and of the Ommelands (the which are country jurisdictions, consisting in many villages of the territory of this province) you must understand, that the said town, and Ommelands, lying betwixt the rivers of Ems and Lauris, make one signory and province, the which is numbered among the seventeen Provinces of the Low Countries. It is indifferently represented and governed by the common accord of the Estates thereof: so as all the rights of demeans, which in old time the prince was wont to have, as Lord of the town and province, are now managed and governed by the common advice of the said Estates, and also the treasure, revenues, contributions, and clergy goods, as well within the town, as within the old Bailiwickes' of Goorrecht, and the Ommelands: which Estates, together with their deputies, do commonly hold their assemblies in the said town of Groeningue. The government of the town belongs only to the magistrate thereof, which consists in four Bourgmaisters, and twelve Councillors, who deal as well in matters of justice, as of policy, and they judge definitively: but those things which concern the privilege and good of the town, must be communicated to the magistrate of the porr, and to four and twenty jurats. The two old Bayliwickes' and the Goorrecht are subject to the jurisdiction of the town, whereas they of the Council do yearly appoint Drossarts, and Amptmen, or Bailiffs (which is all one in effect) from whose judgement they might appeal before the said Council, who judge definitively. The one half of the said Council and jurats are every year discharged, and their places filled up again, that is to say, the governor names five persons, among four and twenty jurats, which five choose eight Councillors out of the whole town. The eight new Councillors, with the other eight which remained, choose four Bourgmaisters. Moreover, the said governor doth name out of the number of the said four and twenty jurats, five other persons, the which doth choose twelve from among the commons of the town, to fill up the place of the other twelve that were dismissed; so as the twelve new jurats, and the twelve old which did remain, choose amongst them three speakers, who during that year carry the word for all the said jurats. The said town hath many goodly privileges, amongst others it speaks first at the Estates of the province. There is also a mint.  
The Ommelands are divided into three quarters, that is to say, Fivelingo, Hunsingo, and the West quarter; having every one their rights, written in divers seigneuries, as seats of justice, the which they call Gritenies or Bayliwickes'.   

¶ The Religion.  
IN all the countries which the Estates hold they suffer no excercise of the Romish religion; so as all the churches are converted into temples, whereas the ministers of the Protestants religion, say their prayers, and preach, and celebrat the sacraments. If they do found any which exercise the Romish religion in secret, being taken, they are punished by fines, the which happens daily in Vtrecht: there are few other towns under the Estates which are not for the most part peopled with Protestants.  
If any one be desirous to know when the Protestants religion entered first into these countries, I will do the best I can to satisfy them, as briefly as I may. About the year 1521, whenas Martin Luther first began to preach against the Pope and his doctrine, the Emperor Charles the fift did for the advancement of the Romish religion, and to root Luther's doctrine out of the Netherlands (where it did much increase, and had taken good footing) sand forth rigorous proclamations generally against all sects and kinds of religion, yet they were grounded upon a pretence of punishing the wicked practices and actions of sectaries and heretics, as against men living without all rule, order, or law, as they inferred. By virtue of these proclamations, during the Emperor's time, many were put to death for small causes; and to keep them from multiplying, the Emperor thought it good, to have the Inquisition brought in, after the manner of Spain (the which is the most cruel and damnable invention that can be practised, for that they make Innocents and Catholics themselves to rot in prison) hearing that the Lutherans and Protestants were much augmented. But the provinces opposing against this rigorous and cruel proceeding, procured Marie Queen of Hongarie then Regent, to go in person to the Emperor her brother, in the year 1550, being at an assembly of the princes of Germany at Ausbourg; where she acquainted him with the estate of the country, and procured a kind of moderation of the edicts touching religion, and that the Inquisition should not proceed. After his death, king Philip his son finding that the number of them that made profession of the Protestants religion increased daily in the Netherlands, notwithstanding all the rigorous edicts, whereby he sought to ruin them: he commanded, there should be certain inquisitors of the faith chosen, who should have a care, that not any one should read or keep in his house any book mentioned in the edict, containing a catalogue of all the forbidden books; and that no man should dispute of the Romish religion, nor contradict it, in any sort: and the better to strengthen the Inquisition, they procured Pope Paul the fourth to erect fourteen new bishoprics in the Low Countries.  
The Provinces fearing that this new erection of Bishops was but a device to bring in the Inquisition, opposed themselves, and sent their deputies into Spain to have them disannulled, the which the Clergy did in like manner, but they could by no suit be freed from the fear of these new Bishops (which were so many Inquisitors) so as the people grew bitter against the Clergy, and fell from their doctrine to the reformed religion; so as the more they persecuted them, the more constant they were in their religion, and the more they increased.  
In the year 1565 the king of Spain made his pleasure then known plainly by his letters to the duchess of Parma governess of the Netherlands, and what he would have observed touching religion: first, That the edicts made by the Emperor and himself should be put in execution: secondly, That the Inquisitors should be favoured in the exercise of their charge, for the good of religion, and that the Inquisition should be put in practice: thirdly, That she should assist the new Bishops, and 'cause the decrees of the council of Treat to be observed: with which she acquainted the provincial Counsels and the Noblemen; wherewith all sorts of people were much distempered, fearing the troubles which would ensue by reason of the new Bishop's Inquisition, bloody edicts, and council of Trent. Whereupon the nobles made a donfederacie, and presented petitions unto the governess, the which the Provinces of Brabant and Flanders did in like manner, against the Inquisition: they also sent their deputies unto the king, to the like effect; but all their suit having no success, being fed with many delays, the base sort fell to beating down of the images in Antuerpe, where they committed many insolences: the like they did at Bosleduc, Valenciennes, Gand, Audenarde, Brussels, Vtrecht, Amsterdam, and other places, whereas they spoilt their churches, beaten down their images, and expelled the religious men. They of Brussels made instance to have liberty for their ministers to preach, the which they did without any permission throughout all the countries of Bruges, Gande, Ipre, Audenarde, and Antuerpe, whether the Lutherans and Protestants retired themselves. Valenciennes not only received the Protestant ministers, but also to show a full liberty of conscience, retired itself from the obedience of the king of Spain, and Tournay did the like. A certain minister presuming to preach in the town of Nimeguen, the inhabitants having taken arms, deposed five Senators from their dignity, suspecting them to be of the religion, and put as many Papists in their place, then having expelled the minister, they burned the pulpit wherein he preached, in the market place.  
In the year 1566, Marguerite of Austria, duchess of Parma, the Governess, having dissolved the union of the noblemen (who we●e dispersed and retired to their houses upon her letters of assurance) began to arm, making diligent search, and punishing all such as had assisted at the breaking down of images: she also made an edict forbidding expressly the preaching, and all exercises of religion, as well public as private; commanding generally, that the edicts concerning it, and the Inquisition should be put in execution, according to the king's letters. She pacified Friesland, by the means of the earl of Aremberg, and recovered Tournay, and Valenciennes, by the lord of Noircarmes, who broke his faith, after the composition, causing many soldiers, ministers, and rich merchants, to be put to death. The earl of Megue reduced Vtrecht to the king of Spain's obedience.  
The baron of Brederode, and other of the chief confederates, seeing that all tended to the ruin of their country, and the rooting out of the Nobility, sent unto the Regent to crave leave to come to court, and to acquaint her with the wrong which was done them, contrary to the assurance which she had given them; but she would not allow of their coming: whereupon they sent petitions unto her, the which contained, That for as much as they saw the destruction of the Netherlands to be at hand, and that force was used daily against them, contrary to all promises, they desired to know, if it were her pleasure, that the contract made with them should be observed, and the preaching, and exercise of religion allowed, as they had in her name assured the people etc. To whom she made a proud answer.  
After all these complaints and answers, the Governess propounded a new oath to all governors of provinces, knights of the order, and other noblemen, and councillors of State; by the which among other things, they did swear to be faithful to the king, and with all their means to maintain and defend the Romish religion, to root out all new religion, and doctrine, and to punish all breakers of images, and robbers of churches, which oath was taken by many of the nobility; but the prince of Orange, and the earl Hcoch straten, refused it, saying, That the oath of their order, and of their governments was sufficient, finding themselves much grieved that the duchess should doubt of their loyalties. The like answer was made by the lord of Brederode. After this oath, the duchess caused all them that had carried arms, broken images, or spoiled churches, to be apprehended and excuted. They expelled the ministers out of Antuerpe, and their places of preaching were beaten down, so as the Protestants generally, throughout all the Netherlands, were pursued with all rigour, apprehended, and executed, if they were but of the Consistory, or had borne any charge in the reformed Church.  
In the mean time the duke of Alba arrived with an army to be Governor of the Low Countries: at his first entrance he puts in prison the earls of Egmont and Horn, besides many others, and cut off their heads, saying, that they had savoured the rebels. The prince of Orange before his entrance, having tried the inconstancy of some of the nobles, and of the people, and seeing the miserable estate of the country, retired himself into his county of Nassau, advising the other confederate noblemen to do the like, for their safety. The king sent a commission to apprehended the Prince of Orange, whereunto he made his answer. The Inquisition of Spain concluded certain articles against the Netherlands, the which were confirmed by the king. The prince of Orange gathered together a great army, presuming upon the affection of the Flemings: But the duke of Alba forced him to leave the country, his brother Lewis having been defeated in Friesland. It seemed that all had been reduced to a good estate by the means of this victory, when as the duke by the death of the earls of Egmont, and Horn, and of some other noblemen, had lost the love of the nobility: and seeking also, in the year of our Lord 1570, to exact with all rigour the tenth, twentieth, and hundredth penny, he made himself odious unto the people, which gave subject to the revolts which happened. The prince of Orange, and his followers, invited by the inhabitants of some towns, and assuring himself of the discontentment of others, surprised Flushing, Briele, and in a manner all Z●land, except Middlebourg, and all Holland, except Amsterdam (for that the duke having never made war by sea, did little esteem the sea coast, but sought only to fortify himself within the country) with Mons, Ruremonde, Macklin, Amesfort, Zwol, Campen, Zutphen, and other places of importance: whereas the Protestants used the Papists very roughly. The duke of Alba fainting not, gathered an army together, and besieged Mons; which the prince of Orange came to relieve with an army out of Germany, but not able to effect it, he sends it away, and retires into Holland. After which, the duke recovers Zutphen, and Macklin, then going to besiege Harlem, which yielded in the year 1573▪ the Protestants laid siege to Middlebourg, the chief town of Zealand. The year following, Lewis of Requesens was sent to succeed the duke in his government, who sought to relieve Middlebourg with a fleet by sea: but they were defeated, and the town yielded by composition. After which, the Commander besieged Zirixee, which yielded in the year 1577: the loss of which place was very prejudicial to the prince of Orange, having in a manner nothing left but the Island of Walcheren, wherein stand Flushing and Middlebourg. But for that there was thirty months pay or more due unto the Spaniards, they passed unto the firm land, where mutining, they fortified themselves in the town of Alost, bringing the affairs of their king into worse estate than ever. For many bruits being dispersed of their revolt, the Estates made a general union, and proclaimed war against the Spaniards. They put Count Ernest of Mansfield, and the lord of Barlemont, with some other of the Council, in prison, for that they seemed to adhere unto the Spaniard, and were suspected unto them of the country. The castles of Gand and Vtrecht were besieged, and both taken. The prince of Orange was called ba●ke, and there was a league made betwixt the Catholics and Protestants. They drew together fifty three thousand foot, and sixteen thousand horse, and in the same army they said Mass, and preached after the Protestants manner. By this mean, the Protestants returned to Antuerpe, and recovered some Churches: but the mutined Spaniards that were in Alost, and other old soldiers, being drawn into the castle of Antuerpe, forced the town and spoiled it, making a great slaughter of soldiers and townsmen: the like they did to Mastricke.  
At the same time, D. john of Austria came out of Spain to be governor of the Low Countries, and applying himself to the necessity of the time, he first made a suspension of arms, and afterwards (being unfurnished of me● and money, and the States furnished of all things at commandment) he concluded a peace, with the Estates of the Low Countries, called by the name a perpetual Decree, and the Spaniards left the country. But yet D. john gave them new causes of jealousy and distrust, filling his court with strangers, enemies to the country, and the public quiet, most part Spaniards and Italians, putting from him those of the country that were not of that humour, contrary to the Edict and Accord: whereby they did conceive that his intent was to entertain the seeds of hatred and factions among the noblemen, and in the end (when occasion should serve) bandy one against another, and by that means ruin them all. He sought to draw the general Estates into war against Holland, and Zealand, who being resolved to hold the pacification made at Gand, would refer the decision of all controversies, to lawful conference, and to attend a general convocation of the Estates: whereupon he held them as disobedient, and rebels to the king. After which he began to discover himself, and seized upon the castle of Namur, pretending a conspiracy against his person, which (as he said) was the cause of his retreat. After all this, the prince of Orange came to Antuerpe, being sent for by the general Estates, to assist them with his advice and counsel, who provided for their defence against D. john of Austria, proclaiming him and his adherents to be enemies to the king, and all his Netherlands.  
The year after, one party camped before Denremonde, and the other before Namur, whereas D. john had assembled his troops. But the States being forced to raise the siege from before Denremonde, and being defeated at Namur, they lost Lowain, Diest, Arscot, and many other places. But in the mean time, the prince of Orange had by a long siege won Amsterdam. And the Estates had drawn down the Archduke Mathias of Austria, with the vain title of a Governor, and after him the duke of Alencon out of of France, and duke Casimir out of Germany, with hope of some great conquest. The monks and jesuits, which refused to hold D. john for an enemy to the State, were expelled Antuerpe, and certain other towns. They of S. Omer and Gravelin maintained themselves in the obedience of the king of Spain.  
The Archduke Mathias, the prince of Orange, the Council of Estate, and the general Estates, devised a religious peace (as they called it) in Antuerp, for all towns and provinces that desired the same: whereby they had liberty of conscience, and might freely enjoy the exercise of both their religions, without any trouble or molestation. Duke Casimir was called by the Gantois to their aid, from whom he received one hundred and fifty thousand florins. They refused to admit of the Romish religion, within their town and territory: whereupon the prince of Orange coming thither in person, in the end persuaded them to admit of the exercise thereof, upon certain conditions and articles, so as all things were reconciled at Gand: but afterwards finding the malcontents untractable to any agreement, they did stir up the Commons again, against the Clergy, where they committed great insolences.  
The Provinces of Artois and Haynault, with the towns of Dovay, Lisle, Orchies, and others, disjoin themselves from the general Estates, and make their reconciliation with the prince of Parma, being in his camp before Mastrich, who by the death of D. john of Austria, was governor in the Low Countries. In Friesland the earl of Renemberg, seized upon Groningue, and admits of the Protestants religion. They of Vtrecht, being united with them of Holland and Zealand, abolished the exercise of the Romish religion in their town and territory. In the mean time, the duke of Parma had taken the town of Mastrich by force, and the earl of Renembourg changing his opinion, reduced Groningue under the obedience of the king of Spain. King Philip sent forth an Edict of prosctiption against the prince of Orange, promising great rewards to him that could kill him, whereunto the prince made an apology.  
The general Estates of the united Provinces of Gelderland, Holland, Zealand, Zutphen, Friesland, ouerissel, and Groningue, having declared prince Philip of Austria, the second of that name king of Spain, fallen from the signory of the said Provinces, by mason of his extraordinary and violent government, contrary to their privileges and freedoms; by him solemnly sworn: they took upon them all the government of the politic Estate, and of the religion of the said Provinces, in the year 1581., and by an edict they absolved the subjects from their oaths, and made them take a new oath for the preservation of their country, and obedience to the said Estates. And the better to maintain them, they called back the duke of Anjou, brother to the French king (who was then returned into France) at his entrance they created him duke of Brabant, and received him with great solemnity into Antuerpe, whereas all the vassals, and subjects of the said duchy did him homage, and swore fealty unto him: and he was afterwards invested earl of Flanders. But this title lasted not long, for having a design to make himself master of Antuerp, & to draw in his army, and having attempted it, the inhabitants took an alarum and fell to arms, repulsing the French, & putting them to the sword, in which attempt there was near three thousand French men slain. A little before, the prince of Orange had been shot with a pistol at Antuerpe, by a young boy, and was sore wounded in the mouth: Finally, on the tenth of julie, in the year 1584., he was shine at Delf, by one balthasar Gerard, borne at Ville-Franch, in the Franch county of Bourgondie. The duke of Parma remaining master of the field, recovered partly by force, and partly by ●iege or treaty, the towns of Audenarde, Ipre, Denremonde, Viluorde, Gand, Bruges, Nimeguen, Macklin, and Brussels, and by a long and painful siege, in the end he forced Antuerpe to present him her keys, and Sluice in like manner.  
The people of Holland and Zealand (being amazed at this favourable success) had recourse unto the queen of England for succour, and put themselves under her protection, delivering into the hands of the English, Flushing, and some other places of importance. Being under the protection of English, they took Steenwicke, Nimeguen, Deventer, Zutphen, and many other places of consequence: but the queen seeing the army of Spain approaching near unto England, and the divisions which were betwixt the Estates, and the earl of Leicester (Lieutenant general to the said queen, Protectrix of the general Estates of the united Provinces of the Netherlands) she called the earl of leicester home into England, who delivered the said government general into the hands of the general Estates, from whom he had formerly received it, under the authority of the queen of England: & so the factions and partialities which had happened betwixt the towns and subjects of the said countries, by this means were suppressed.  
The general Estates having thus recovered their first sovereign authority, did in like manner settle prince Maurice of Nassau in the governments of Holland, Zealand, and Vtrecht, and in the Admiralty and office of captain general of all their forces; to which offices they have since added the government of the duchy of Guelderland, county of Zurphen, and country of overissel, the which he hath held unto this day, and under whom (since the year 1588.) they have had diverse and variable success, as well for the taking of towns, as fight of battles (the which are too long here to relate) as well against the prince of Parma, as the Archdukes of Austria. To conclude, these countries having been in combustions, and civil wars, since the year 1566, unto the year 1609, the articles of a truce, and cessation of arms were concluded and agreed upon in Antuerpe the ninth of April, in the said year, for the term of twelve years. For to recite at length the beginning and progress of this treaty, that is to say, how the Archdukes did s●eke a peace of prince Maurice of Nassau, by the signior of Ʋander Ho●st and by the m●●rend father john Ney, general of the Order of Saint Francis, and other deputies, what propositions and reasons they used, as well unto the general Estates and his Excellency, as to other persons, to move and persuade them thereunto, with the answers of the general Estates, and then what passed on either part, the articles which were delivered of both sides, with the reasons and difficulties which followed, and all that depends thereon, would be too long and tedious to relate: We will only set down (as we have said) the articles concluded by the deputies of either part, according as they caused them to be printed in the year 1609.  
The most excellent princes, the Archduke Albert and Isabel Clara Eugenia, having caused a truce and cessation of arms to be made the sour and twentieth day of April, in the year 1607, for eight months, with the honourable Lords, the general Estates of the 〈◊〉 Provinces of the Low countries, in quality and holding them as Estates, Provi●●● and free countries, over whom they had no pretence: which truce must of necessity be ratified with the like declaration made by the Catholic king, for as much as might concern him, and that the said ratification and declaration should be delivered into the hands of the Estates of the united Provinces of the Low Countries, three more 〈◊〉 after the said truce, the which was performed by letters patents the eighteenth of September, in the same year: and moreover there was a special procuration given to 〈◊〉 Archdukes, bearing date the tenth of januarie 1608, to do (as well in his name, 〈◊〉 ●●eir own) whatsoever they should think fit and convenient, to attain unto a good peace, or a truce for many years. According to this procuration, the Archdukes by their letters of commission of the seven and twentieth of the said month, had named and deputed Commissioners to treat in the same name and quality as hath been said, and agreed that the said truce should be prolonged and continued at divers times, and on the twentieth of May, unto the end of the year 1608: and being often assembled with the deputies of the Estates of the united Provinces, who had also a procuration and commission from them, dated on the fist of February the same year: but they could not agreed touching a peace, by reason of many great difficulties which fell out amongst them. Upon this occasion the Ambassadors of the most Christian French king, of the king of great Britain, of the princes & palatins of Brandebourg, marquis of Ausbach, and Landt-grave of Hessen, being sent thither, by their Lords, Kings, & Princes, to help to advance so good and worthy a work (seeing the deputies ready to departed, and to break off all their treaty) propounded a truce for many years, upon certain conditions set down in writing, and given by them unto either party, requiring and admonishing them to conform themselves. And for that many other difficulties did arise concerning this matter propounded, therefore these noblemen following, met on the ninth of April 1609, Ambrose Spinola, marquis of Benaffro, knight of the order of the Golden Fleece, of the Council of Estate and war, to his Catholic majesty, Master of the Camp, and General of his armies, etc. john Richardot knight, signior of Barli, of the Council of Estate, and first Precedent of the privy council to their highnesses etc. john de M●ncicidor of the council of war, and Secretary to his Catholic majesty; the reverend father john Ney, general of the order of Saint Francis; and Lewis Verreyken knight, Audiencier and first Secretary unto their highnesses: by virtue of letters of procuration from the said Archdukes of the one part, to treat (as well in their name, as in the name of the said Catholic king) with William Lewis earl of Nassau, Catzenellenboge, Vianden, Dietz, and signior of Bi●●ten, Governor and Captain general of Friesland, of the town of Groningue, and of the Ommelandes and Drenthe, etc. the signior of Walraven, lord of Brederode and Vianen, Castellan of Vtrecht, signior of Ameyde, Cloetingue etc. Cornelius of Gentleman, Signior of Loenen, and Meynerswycke, Castellan and justice of the Empire, and of the town of Nimiguen: john of Oldenbarnevelt, Knight, Signior of Tempel, Rondenris, etc. Advocate and Keeper of the great Seal, of the Charters, and Registers of Holland and East-Friseland: james of Maldere, Knight, Signior of Heyes etc. the first, and representing the Nobles in the assembly of the Estates, and in the council of the county of Zealand: Gerard of Revesse, Signior of Ʋander Aa, Stref-kerke, Nieuleckerlandt, etc. Gellius Hillama Doctor of the laws, and Councillor in the Council of Friesland: john Sloeth Signior of Sallicke, Drossart of the country of Vollenho, and Castellan of the signory of Cuinder: and Abel Coenders of Helpen, Signior of Faen and Cantes, in the names of the Estates of the united Provinces, also by virtue of their letters of procuration, and commission on the other part, who by the mediation and advice of Peter jeannin Knight, Baron of Chagny and Montheu, Councillor to the most Christian king in his Council of Estate, and his Ambassador extraordinary with the said Lords the Estates, and Elie of La Place, Knight, Signior of Russy, Castellan of Machaut, Councillor in the said Council of Estate, and Gentleman in ordinary of the king's Chamber, Bailiff and Captain of Vitry le Francois, and his Ambassador Leaguer, with the general Estates of the Low Countries; Sir Richard Spencer Knight, Gentleman in ordinary of the Privie-chamber to the king of great Britain, and his Ambassador extraordinary, with the general Estates of the Low Countries; and Sir Ralphe Win●oud Knight, Ambassador in ordinary, and Councillor of State in the said united Provinces. All which agreed after the manner and form that followeth.  
First, the said Lords Archdukes declare, as well in their own names, as of the said king. That they are content to treat with the said Lords, the general Estates of the united Provinces, in quality, and holding them for free Countries, Provinces, and Estates, over whom they pretend not any thing: and to make with them a truce in the same names and qualities, as they have done by these presents, upon such conditions, as are hereafter written and declared.  
2 That the said truce shall be good, firm, loyal, and inviolable for the term of twelve years, during the which, there shall be a cessation of all acts of hostility, in what sort soever, betwixt the said Lords, the King, Archdukes, and general Estates, as well by sea, and other waters, as by land, in all their realms, countries, lands, and seigneuries, and for all their subjects and inhabitants, of what quality and condition soever they be, without a●y exception of place or person.  
3 Every one shall hold and enjoy effectually, the countries, towns, places, lands, and seigneuries which he doth hold and possess at this present, and shall not be troubled nor di●quited in any sort whatsoever, during the said truce: wherein shall be comprehended the burroughss, villages, hamlets, and Champion countries which depend thereon.  
4 The subjects and inhabitants of the countries of the said Lords, the King, Archdukes, and Estates, shall have all good correspondency, and friendship together, during the said truce, without any feeling or revenge of the wrongs and losses which they have received heretofore: and they may also frequent, and remain in the countries of the one and the other, and there use their traffic and commerce with all assurance, as well by sea and other waters, as by land; the which notwithstanding the said king means should be restrained, and limited to the realms, countries, lands, and seigneuries, which he holds and enjoys in Europe, and other places and seas, whereas the subjects of kings and princes, which are his friends and allies, have the said traffic by consent. And in regard of the places, towns, ports, and havens, which he holds without the said limits, the said Lords the Estates, nor their subjects, shall not use any trade or traffic thither, without the express permission of the said king. Yet they may trade, if they think good, into the countries of all other princes, potentates, and people, that will permit them, yea without the said limits, wherein the said king his officers, and subjects' which depend of him, shall not give any let or disturbance upon this occasion, to the said princes, potentates, & people, which have, or shall suffer them to trade, nor in like manner to them, nor to any private person, with whom they have, or shall use the said traffic.  
5 And for that it is necessary, that there should be a long time prefixed, to advertise them that are without the said limits, with forces and ships, to desist from all acts of hostility, it hath been agreed. That the truce shall not begin there, but a year hence: It is notwithstanding understood, That if they may be sooner advertised of the truce, the hostility shall cease: But if after the said time of one year, any hostility shall be committed, the damage shall be repaired presently without any delay.  
6 The subjects and inhabitants of the countries of the said King, Archdukes, and Estates, trafficking in the country's one of another, shall not be bound to pay greater customs and impositions than their own subjects, and those of their friends and allies, which shall be least charged.  
7 And the subjects, and inhabitants of the said Estates, shall have the same assurance and liberty, in the countries of the said king, and Archdukes, which hath been granted to the subjects of the king of great Britain, by the last treaty of peace and secret articles, made with the Constable of Castille.  
8 In like manner the merchandise, masters of ships, pilots, mariners, their ships, goods, wares, and other commodities belonging unto them, shall not be arrested, nor seazed●●, by virtue of any general, or particular warrant, or commission, nor for any cause what soever, of war or otherwise, neither yet under pretext, that they will employ them for the preservation or defence of the country. Yet they mean not to comprehend herein those that are arrested and seized on by the ordinary course of justice, by reason of debts, bonds, and vaileable contracts of those, upon whom the said seizures have been made, wherein they shall proceed, as is accustomed by law and re●●●.  
● And in regard of the commerce of the Low Countries, and of the customs and imporous, which shall be raised of their commodities: if it be hereafter sound that they exceed, and are prejudicial; upon the first requisition, that shall be made of either part, Commissioners shall be deputed to rule and moderate them by a common consent, i● it may be: neither shall it be any breach of truce, in case they cannot agreed.  
10 I● any sentences or judgements have been given, betwixt persons of divers parties not defended, be it either in civil or criminal causes, they shall not be put in execution against the parties so condemned, nor against their goods during the said truce.  
11 There shall be no letters of Mark, or Reprisals, granted during the said time, unless it be with knowledge of the cause, and in cases allowable by the imperial laws and constitutions, and according unto the order established by them.  
12 They shall not approach, enter, nor stay in the ports, havens, and roads, of one another country, with any such number of ships and soldiers as may give cause of suspicion, without the leave and permission of them to whom the said ports, ha●●enss, and roads do belong, unless they be driven in by tempests, or forced to do it by necessity, and to avoid some danger at sea.  
13 They whose goods have been seized on, and forfeited, by reason of the wars, or their heirs, having just cause, shall enjoy the said goods, during the said truce, and shall take possession of their own private authority, by virtue of this present treaty, and not be forced to have recourse unto justice: notwithstanding all incorporations to the treasure, engagement, gifts, treaties, accords, & transactions, or any renuntiations which have been made in the said transactions, to exclude them, to whom the said goods shall belong, yet with this charge, that they shall not dipose of them, neither yet change, nor diminish them, during the time of their possession, unless they have first obtained leave of the said Lords Archdukes, or Estates.  
14 The which also shall take place, to the benefit of the heirs of the deceased Lord the Prince of Orange, namely to the rights which they have to the saltpits in the county of Bourgondie, which shallbe restored unto them, with the woods which depend thereon. And as for the suit of Chastel-belin, begun during the life of the deceased prince of Orange, in the court at Macklin, against the Catholic king's proctor general, the said Archdukes promise' faithfully, That they shall have justice done them within one year, after that they have begun their pursuit, without any delay, and with all justice and sincerity.  
15 If the Fisq or Treasurer, hath caused any goods confiscated to be sold of either part, they to whom they shall belong, by virtue of this present treaty, shall be bound to content themselves with the interest of the price, by reason of the sixteenth penny, to be paid yearly during the truce, by the care of such as enjoy the said goods, otherwise it shall be lawful for them to go unto the land and inheritance that is sold.  
16 But if the said sales had been made by the course of justice, for the good and lawful debts of those, to whom the said goods were wont to belong, it shall be lawful for them, or their heirs, having just cause, to redeem them, paying the price within one year, to be reckoned from the day of this present treaty, after which they shallbe no more received; and the said redemption being thus made by them, they may dispose thereof at their pleasure, neither shall they have need to obtain any other permission.  
17 It is not meant notwithstanding, that this redeeming shall be allowed for houses situated in towns, sold upon this occasion, for the great prejudice and notable loss which the pourchaser should receive, by reason of the reparations, and alterations, which they may have made in the said houses, the clearing whereof would be long and difficult.  
18 And as for reparations, and bettering made in other houses, and places which are sold, where this redeeming is allowed, if they be pretended, the ordinary judges shall do right, upon knowledge of the cause, the land remaining liable for the sum whereunto the reparation shall amount: yet shall it not be lawful for the said buyers, to use any right of retention, to be paid and satisfied.  
19 If any fortifications, and public works have been made of either part, with permission and authority of the superiors, in places subject to restitution by this present treaty, the proprietaries thereof shall be bound to content themselves with the estimation which shall be made by the ordinary judges, as well of the said places, as of the jurisdiction which they had there, unless the parties agreed by consent.  
20 As for the lands of churches, colleges, and other religious places lying within the united Provinces, the which were members depending upon churches, benefices, and colleges which are under the Archdukes obedience; that which hath been sold since the first day of januarie 1607 shall be restored unto them, and they shall enter into it by their own private authority, without any minister of justice, to enjoy it during the truce, and not to dispose thereof, as hath been formerly said: but as for those which have been sold before the said time, or given in payment by the Estates of any of the Provinces, the rent of the price shall be paid them yearly, after the rate of the sixteenth penny, by the Province which hath made the said sale, or given the said lands in payment, so as they may be well assured: the like shall be done and observed by the said Archdukes.  
21 They to whom any lands confiscated, are to be restored, shall not be bound to pay the arrearages of rents, charges, and duties, especially affected and assigned upon the said lands, for the time which they have not enjoyed them, and if they be molested of either part, they shall be sent away quit, and absolved.  
22 They shall not pretend also for any lands sold or granted, any thing but the remainders, or arrearages whereunto they are bound that are in possession, by the treaties hereupon made, with the interest of the entry money, if any have been given, also after the rate of the sixteenth penny, as before.  
23 judgements given for lands, and rights confiscated, with parties that have acknowledged the judges, and have been lawfully defended, shall hold, and the parties condemned shall not be allowed to contradict them, unless it be by ordinary courses.  
24 The said Archdukes shall every one for their parts appoint Officers and Magistrates for the administration of justice and policy, in towns and places of strength, the which by this present treaty must be restored unto the proprietaries, to enjoy them during the truce.  
25 Movables forfeited, and first-fruits which are fallen before the conclusion of this present treaty, shall not be subject to restitution.  
26 Moving actions which have been referred by the said Archdukes or Estates to the benefit of private debtors, before the first day of januarie 1607 shall be extinct of either part.  
27 The time which hath run during the war, beginning from the year 1567. unto this present, shall not be reckoned to induce prescription betwixt those that were of contrary parties.  
28 They which have retired themselves into a neuter country during the war, shall also enjoy the benefit of this truce, and may remain where they please, or return to their ancient houses, there to devil with all assurance, observing the laws of the coun tries: neither shall their goods be seized on, nor they deprived of the enjoying of them, by reason of their abode in any place wheresoever.  
29 There shall not any new forts be built, during the said truce, within the Low Countries, of eitherpart.  
30 The Lords of the house of Nassau, shall not be pursued, nor molested (during the said truce) in their persons or goods, either for the debts contracted by the deceased prince of Orange, from the year 1567. unto his death, or for the arrearages due since the feisure of the lands that were charged.  
31 If there be any contravention made of the truce by any private persons, without the commandment of the said King, Archdukes, or Estates, the damage shall be repaired upon the same place where the contravention hath been made, if they be surprised, or else at the place of their abiding, and shall not be elsewhere pursued, either in their bodies or goods, in any sort whatsoever; and it shall not be lawful for them to come to 〈◊〉, or to break the truce, upon this occasion, but in case of open denial of justice, it shall be lawful for them to relieve themselves according to custom, either by letters of mark, or reprisal.  
32 All exheredations, and dispositions made in hatred of the war, are declared voided, and as if they had notbeene.  
33 The subjects and inhabitants of the said Archdukes and Estates, of what quality and condition soever, are declared capable to succeed one an other, as well by testament, as ab intestato, according to the custom of the place; and if any successions did heretofore fall unto any of them, they shall be maintained and enjoy them.  
34 All prisoners taken in wa● shall be the delivered on either side, without paying any ransom.  
35 And to the end that this present treaty may be the better observed, the said King, Archdukes, and Estates, do promise respectively to employ their forces and means, every one by himself, to have all the passages free, and the seas, and navigable rivers secured against the incursions and spoils of mutins, pirates, and thieves, and if they can apprehended them, to 'cause them to be punished with all rigour.  
36 They promise' moreover, not to do any thing in prejudice of this present treaty, nor suffer to be done directly, or indirectly, and if it were done, to 'cause it to be repaired without any difficulty or delay: and for the observation of all abovementioned, the said King, and Archdukes bind themselves and their successors respectivelie, and for the validity of the said bond renounce all laws, customs, or any thing whatsoever to the contrary.  
37 This present treaty shall be ratified and confirmed by the said King, Archdukes, and Estates, and delivered from the one unto the other in good and due form, within four days: and as for the ratification of the said king, the said Archdukes have promised, and shall be bound to deliver it within three months in good and due form, to the end that the said Lords the Estates, their subjects and inhabitants may effectually enjoy the first-fruits of this present treaty, with all security.  
38 The said treaty shall be proclaimed where it doth belong, presently after the ratification made by the said Lords, Archdukes, and Estates, all acts of hostility ceasing.  
Thus it was made and concluded, in the town and city of Antuerpe, the ninth of April, in the year 1609, and signed by my Lords the Ambassadors to the most Christian king, and to the king of great Britain, as mediators; and by the deputies of my Lords, the Archdukes, and Estates, and it was subscribed.  
P. jeannin, Elie de la Place, Ric, Spencer, Ralph Windewood, Ambrose Spinola, Fr. john Ney, le Pres. Richardot, Io. de Mancicidor, L. Verreycken, William Lewis Earl of Nassau, W. Brederoda, Cornelius de Gentleman, john de Oldenbarnevelt, I de Malder●, G. de Renesse, G. Hillama, I Sloeth, A●. Coenders.  
And for that they found afterwards some difficulty and obscurity in the precedent articles, the deputies of the Archdukes, and of the united Provinces of the Low Countries, made this declaration, and augmentation following, whereof the tenor was as it is here set down. The general Estates of the united Provinces of the Low Countries, To all those to whom these presents shall come, Greeting. We make it known, that having viewed and examined the points and articles which have been concluded the seventh of this present month of januarie here at the Hage, betwixt the deputies of the most excellent Archdukes Albert of Austria, and Isabel Clara Eugenia, and Ours, by virtue of the procurations given respectively to the said deputies, touching some difficulties and ambiguities proceeding from the treaty of truce, have agreed the ninth of April 1609 in the town of Antuerpe, betwixt the said Archdukes and Us of the one part, and propounded on the other part by the officers and subjects respectively, and taken to be duly considered of, for the augmenting and more ample declaration of the points and articles whereof the contents do follow; for that in the treaty of truce made the ninth of April in the year of our Lord 1609, in the town of Antuerpe, betwixt the Commissioners and deputies of my Lords the Archdukes of Austria, etc. and those of the general estates of the united Provinces of the Low Countries, some difficulties and ambiguities have been propounded of either part by the officers and subjects, and taken into consideration, for the increase and more ample declaration of the said Articles: in the end it hath been held fit for the deputies of either part to confer of these difficulties, and to make some agreement concerning the same. The deputies having met and conferred many times together, according unto their Procurations and Commissions of either side, in the end they having agreed upon the points and articles which follow. For the doing whereof, there were assembled the seventh of januarie, in the year 1610, at the Hague in Holland, Balthasar of Robiano, Treasurer general of the revenues and finances of the said Lords the Archdukes, Lewis Verreycken Knight, Seigneur of ham, Councillor of the Council of war, Audiencer and first Secretary to their Highnesses, and john Baptista Maes, Councillor and Advocate fiscal of the Council of Brabant for the Archdukes, Henry of Brienen the elder, Seigneur of Synderen, john Oldenbarnevels Knight, Seigneur of Tempel, Ronderies, etc. Advocate, and Keeper of the great Seal of the Charters and Registers of Holland and East-Friseland, james of Maldere, Knight, ●●igneur of Hayes, etc. the first, and representing the Nobility at the Estates, and in the Council of the Country of Zealand, justus of Rysembourg, Seigneur of Rysembourg, first Bourgmaister of the town of Vtrecht, Tinco of Ornama, justice of Scooterland, Ernest of Itterson, Drossart of Twent, and Abel Coendres of Helpen, Seigneur of Faen and Cantes, on the behalf of the general Estates of the united Provinces.  
1 First, That the Inhabitants of the united Provinces of the Low Countries, coming into the Countries and Provinces under the Archdukes obedience, shall have, and enjoy (governing themselves according to the said treaty) the same liberty that the subjects of the king of great Britain have: and to the end that Articles which concern it shall be sent unto all governors, magistrates, and officers, and they of the united Provinces of the Low Countries may, throughout all their Highness' obedience, employ such Advocates, Proctors, Notaries, Solicitors, and executors, as they shall think good, who (being required) shall be appointed by the ordinary judges.  
2 That first of all their Highnesses shall provide and appoint fit and honourable places to bury the bodies of such of the Estates subjects as shall die in any place under their highness obedience.  
3 The said Lords the Archdukes, & the Estates may not receive, without their limits of ●ither part, goods, passing either by water or by land, entering or going forth.  
4 The subjects of the said Archdukes, and Estates, shall reciprocally enjoy in the country's one of another, their ancient freedoms and rights of customs, the which they did quietly enjoy before the war.  
5 The frequentation, conversation, and commerce betwixt the subjects respectively shall not be hindered, and all lets shall be taken away.  
6 All lands and rights which (according to the treaty) have been restored, or aught to be restored to the old Proprietaries, or to their heirs, or to any one that hath action, may be sold by the same Proprietaries, without any necessity to sue for a particular consent, notwithstanding the thirteenth Article of the said treaty, where it is otherwise said, except the propriety of rents, which shallbe acknowledged by the Treasurer of the place where the lands are sold, as also the actions and rent, being under the Treasurer's charge respectively.  
7 All lands concealed, or rights, movables or immovables, rents, actions, debts, or any other thing which hath not been seized by the Treasurer upon good certificate, before the ninth of April, in the year 1609, the Proprietaries and their heirs, or they that pretend action, may enjoy it, withal the first-fruits, revenues, and profits, freely, and at their own disposition; and the concealors, nor their heirs shall not be in any sort mo●●●●d, in regard thereof, by the Treasure of either part; but the Proprietaries, their heirs, a●● they that pretend action, shall have, touching the matter, law against every one, as if i● 〈◊〉 their proper good.  
8 The trees which have been cut since the last day of januarie, in the yea●e 1609, and at the day of the conclusion of the said treaty were remaining upon the ground, and in like manner those that were sold the same day and not cut, shall remain unto the Proprietary, notwithstanding the sale, neither shall they be bound to pay any thing.  
9 The first-fruits, hire of houses, farms, and revenues of seigneuries, lands, tenths, fishing, rents, and other revenues of lands, which (according to the treaty) have been restored, or aught to be, falling due after the ninth of April, in the year 1609, shall be paid for the whole year unto the Proprietaries, their heirs, or to them that pretend any action.  
10 For lands sold, or rends discharged, or the chief stock levied by the Treasurer of either part, they shall give letters to the Proprietaries, their heirs, or to them that pretend action, the which shall serve them as a declaratory proof, conformable to the treaty, with assignation of a yearly payment to be made by the Receiver in those Provinces where they have been sold, or redeemed, which shall be named after the first public sale, or otherwise, as it shall be fit: and the rent of the first year being due, it shall be paid on the ninth of April, in the year 1610.  
11 The hire of lands confiscated (although they have been set for many years) shall expire with the year 1609, according to the custom of those places where the lands and goods lie, and the said hire or rent falling due after the ninth of April (as hath been said) shall be paid unto the Proprietaries: but withal, it is agreed, That if he which enjoys the said land hath bestowed any cost for matters concerning Harvest which doth ensue, that the said expenses (according to the custom, or discretion of the judge of the place where the lands do lie) shall be paid by the Proprietary to him that hath held them.  
12 The sales made of lands confiscated, or registered, since the conclusion of the said treaty, shall be held voided, and in like manner those which had been made before, against the Accord made with certain towns in particular.  
13 Satisfaction shall be made unto the Proprietary, for lands or goods employed in fortifications, public works, or Hospitals, according to the nineteenth Article of the treaty.  
14 The houses of private men which have been restored, or aught to be, according to the said treaty, shall not be charged with garrisons, or otherwise, more than the other subjects which are of the same condition.  
15 If they make difficulty in any place to restore the lands and rights which are to be restored, the judge of the said place shall take order that restitution may presently be made, and shall therein use the shortest course, without any pretext that the tax hath not been, paid, or otherwise, contrary to the contents of the thirteenth Article of the treaty, whereby the restitution may be delayed.  
16 And where it shall be found that all the lands of any one of either party have been confiscated, or registered in such sort, as he had not any means left whereby to pay the rents and interests of his debts, made during the confiscation or annotation, he shall not only be free from all charges and rents, according to the said treaty, but also from the general and personal charge of rents and interests due in the said time.  
17 It is meant, that under exheredation made in hatred of war, are also comprehended exheredations made by reason of any thing proceeding from war, or that depends of it.  
18 Not man of either party, may be hindered, directly or indirectly, changing the place of his abode, if he pay the rights which he aught to pay, and all lets and hindrances since the conclusion of the treaty shall be really taken away.  
19 Under the restitution of lands and rights granted by the treaty, is also understood the lands and rights lying in the Countries of Bourgondie and Charolois, and that which, according to the treaty, hath not been yet restored, shall of every side be faithfully and speedily restored to the Proprietaries, their heirs, or them that pretend any action.  
20 The said Lords the Archdukes, and the Estates, promise' to accomplish, and cause to be accomplished, all and ●uerie the said points faithfully; whereunto they bind themselves according to the bond contained in the principal treaty, and in such sort as if these points also had been mentioned.  
21 Finally, it hath been agreed that all and every of the points and articles of the treaty of the ninth of April last passed, whereof there hath not been any alteration expressly made, nor a more ample declaration, shall remain in force, without any prejudice, or interest, & that whatsoever hath been herein treated, or propounded, either by word or writing, or urged of either part, shall not tend, or be interpreted to help or hinder any one, directly or indirectly: but as well the said Archdukes, and the general and particular Estates, as also all princes, earls, barons, towns, colleges, knights, gentlemen, bourgesses, and other inhabitants of provinces respectively, of what quality or condition soever, shall remain in their rights, according to the tenor of the said treaty: and my said Lords, the Archdukes, and the Estates, shall within on month next ensuing confirms this treaty, and shall deliver their letters of agreation one unto another in due form.  
Thus agreed and concluded at the Hage in Holland, the day, month, and year above named. In witness whereof these presents were confirmed and signed by the deputies of either part, B. de Robiano. Verreycken. I.B. Masius. Hen. Van Brienen de Alst, I de Oldenbarnevelt. I de Maldere. justus de Rysenbourg. T.O. Oennama. Ernest de Ittersum. Ab. Coenders. After mature deliberation we have accepted, allowed, confirmed, and ratified, and do accept, allow, confirm, and ratify, by these presents, the same points and articles, promising faithfully to observe them, and to 'cause them to be observed in every point, as if we ourselves had treated and promised them, and never to do any thing contrary, nor suffer to be done, directly, nor indirectly, in any sort whatsoever, binding therefore all our lands, and of our successors. In witness whereof, we have caused these presents to be sealed with our great seal, and to be signed by our Register in our assembly at the Hage, the nine and twentieth of januarie, in the year 1610. Signed underneath I Masius Vt.  
And lower, By the commandment of my said Lords the general Estates, signed, C. Aerssen.  
Now that the general Estates of the united Provinces of the Low Countries make one body of a common weal, since that they have shaken off the yoke of Spain, and have distracted themselves from other Provinces, with whom they were governed under one prince; I have thought it fit, as I have set down in the discourse of the Archdukes Estates, the Earls of Flanders; in like manner to propound and set down in this place the Lords and Earls of the chief united Provinces, that is to say, of Holland, Zealand, and Friesland: for you shall plainly see by the succession of the Lords, what was the govermment of the countries which they held, before they took the form of a Commonweal, and how from all antiquity they had distinct Lords and Earls, until in the end under Philip the first of that name, they began to be united to the other Provinces of the Low Countries.   

¶ The Earls of Holland, Zealand, and Lords of Friesland.  
THe country of Holland was erected to an Earldom in the year of Christ 863. Charles the Bald, king of France, for the commendable verrues of Th●erry of Aquitaine, gave him all the country of Holland with a portion of Friesland: and afterwards in the year 868 on the thirteenth of April, Zealand was given him by Lewis king of Germany, at the request of Emme wife to king Lewis.  
Thierry the second by the death of his father Count Thierry of Aquitaine, was second Earl of Holland, and Zealand, and Lord of Fris●land.  
Arnold in the year 988 after the death of Count Thierry the second his father, succeeded in the countries of Holland, Zealand, and Friesland. This Arnold obtained of the Emperor Otho the third, to hold his counties of Holland and Zealand, and the Estates of Fr●●●land, barely in fee of the Empire, and no more of the crown of France, as he had done unto that day. The said earl Arnold was slain in a battle against the Frisons the eighteenth of October 993, having governed Holland and Zealand.  
Thierry the third of that name, after the death of his father Arnold, was the fourth Earl of Holland and Zealand, and Lord of Friesland.  
Thierry the fourth of that name, after the death of Thierry his father, was the fift Earl of Holland and Zealand, and Lord of Friesland: he was never married, and died the fifteenth of May 1108, having governed his countries nine years.  
Floris the first of that name, was before Earl of East-Friseland, who after the death of his brother Thierry the fourth, who was the fi●t Earl, was made Earl of Holland, Zealand, etc. who having governed his countries fourteen years, was put to rout in battle with two thousand and six hundred of his subjects, near unto Heusden, in the which he was slain.  
Gertrude widow, mother and Governess to young Count Thierry, son to Floris, governed the country one year.  
Robert called the Frison, married Gertrude, widow to Count Floris, with the consent of all the Nobility, and the Estates of Holland and Zealand, who also made him Curator of young Count Thierry son to Floris.  
Godfrey the Crooked, Duke of Lorraine, was ninth Earl of Holland, and Zealand, and Lord of Friesland, by usurpation.  
Thierry the fift of that name, tenth Earl of Holland, and Friesland, son to Count Floris, after the death of Godfrey the Crooked, recovered his patrimonial rights, and entered into Holland, from the which he had been so long expelled, and there was generally received with great joy and magnificence, and acknowledged for their Earl and natural Lord; so as falling sick, he died in the year 1092, the fifteenth Calendss of julie, after that his mother Gertrude, from the decease of her husband, had governed two years, Robert the Frison his fatherin law eight years, Godfrey the Crooked four years, William Bishop of Vtrecht one year, and he himself fifteen years, making in all thirty years from the death of his father.  
Floris called the Fat, the second of that name, and the eleventh Earl of Holland, and Zealand, and Lord of Friesland, son to Count Thierry the fift, who having governed his countries peaceably for the space of one and thirty years, died in the year 1133 the sixt of March.  
Thierry the sixt of that name, son to Floris, was the twelfth Earl of Holland, and Zealand, and Lord of Friesland, having governed his country forty years, he died in the year 1163. He had great wars against the Frisons, and his other neighbours.  
Floris the third of that name, after the death of Thierry his father, was the thirteenth Earl of Holland, and Zealand, and Lord of Friesland. He had much trouble in his time, and died in the voyage of Palestina, having governed his provinces twenty and seven years.  
Thierry seventh of that name, after the death of Count Floris his father, was fourteenth Earl of Holland, and Zealand, and Lord of Friesland: Having ruled his countries in great and continual wars thirteen years, he died in the year 1203.  
Ade, the only daughter of Thierry the seventh, succeeded her father, and was Countess the fifteenth, but she ruled but one year, and died without children.  
William, the first of that name, the sixteenth Earl of Holland, and Zealand, and Lord of Friesland, being before Earl of East-Friseland, brother to Thierry seventh of that name, hau●●● been expelled by the Nobility of Holland, he made all Holland and Zealand subject, and died after he had governed the said countries nine years, in the year 1223.  
Floris the fourth of that name, by the dea● of Count William his father, was seventeenth Earl of Holland, and Zealand, and Lord of Friesland, who after he had governed his country's with great honour twelve years, died at Clermont, and left one son called William being only six years old.  
William the second that name, after the death of his father, was the eighteenth Earl of Holland, and Zealand, being six years old, he was governed by his uncle Otto Bishop of Vtrecht, and after the death of the Emperor Frederic, he was chosen king of Romans, and was proclaimed Emperor by Pope Innocent, in the town of Lion, four years after his election, who died in the year 1255, after that he had governed his countries of Holla●● and Zealand one and twenty years, and the Empire seven years.  
SATURN'S fift of that name, after the death of William his father, being only half a year old, was nineteenth earl of Holland and Zealand, and lord of Friesland, who died after 〈◊〉 had governed his countries, by himself, and his tutors, 42 years.  
john, first of that name, twentieth earl of Holland and Zealand, etc. succeeded his father, and died without children, the fourth of the Calendss of November, in the year 1300, in whom failed the race of the Earls, issued from the direct line of the Dukes of Aquitaine, which since Thierry the first had continued four hundred thirty and seven years: and by his death these countries fell to the earl of Haynault, who descended by the mother-side from the Earls of Holland.  
john, earl of Haynault, second of that name, was one and twentieth earl of Holland, and Zealand, and lord of West-Friseland: He was son to john of Auesnes and to 〈◊〉 lady Alix, sister to king William earl of Holland, etc. and so son to the great aunt 〈◊〉 ●his last earl john the first.  
William, third of that name, before earl of Oosternant, by the death of his father, was the two and twentieth earl of Holland and Zealand, and lord of Friesland, added to his county of Haynault. For his good life, he was called the Good, and died the ninth of june, in the year of our Lord 1337, having governed his Provinces peaceably, for the space of three and thirty years.  
William, fourth of that name, and three and twentieth earl of Holland and Zealand, and lord of Friesland, and earl of Haynault, after the death of his father William, called the Good; he was slain in an encounter against the Frisons, and died without children, the four and twentieth of September 1346.  
M●●gaerite the empress, wife to the emperor Lewis of Bavaria, the four and twentieth, ruling in Holland and Zealand, etc. sister to Count William the fourth, was in the same year 1346 honourably received, and acknowledged Lady and Princess of the said countries, and having received the homages and fealties, she did greatly augment their liberties and privileges.  
William of Bavaria, fift of that name, eldest son to the Emperor Lewis of Bavaria and to the Lady Marguerite, was the five and twentieth earl of Holland and Zealand, lord of Friesland, and earl of Haynault.  
Alb●rt of Bavaria, brother to William of Bavaria, first of that name, was six and twentieth ●arle of Holland and Zealand, lord of Friesland, and earl of Haynault.  
William of Bavaria, sixt of that name, after the death of his father Albert of Bavaria, was seven and twentieth earl of Holland and Zealand, lord of Friesland, and also earl of Haynault.  
jaqueline of Bavaria, only daughter and heir to William of Bavaria, sixt of that name, succeeded after the death of her father, in all his ●eigneuriess and earldoms, being about seve●teene years old: and in the same year 1417 she was received, and took possession of hi● hereditary countries, of Holland, Zealand, and Friesland, as she had done before in Ha●nault. And yet to the prejudice of the said jacqueline, john of Bavaria terming him●●●fe Tutor of Holland, obtained also from the Emperor Sigismond, uncle to his wi●e●●● counties of Holland and Zealand, and signory of Friesland, in fealty and homage▪ 〈◊〉 being fallen to the Empire by the death of Count William of Bavaria, his brot●e●▪ father to the Lady jacqueline, being dead without heir male. He died at the Hague 〈◊〉 Holland, on Twelfth day, in the year of our Lord 1429, having governed the coun ●r●●●●f Holland, Zealand, and Friesland, in quality of Auoüe, or Governor, about six 〈◊〉: during the which time, the countries were always in war, but in the end, he 〈…〉 peace, in the year 1429, on the nineteenth of julie, with jacqueline of Bavaria, 〈◊〉 the death of her uncle john, enjoyed all her seigneuries. She was married four 〈◊〉 was forced (to recover her last husband, who was a prisoner in the hands of P●ilip duke of Bourgondie, at that time Governor of Holland etc.) to transport all her ●eigneuriess in general, to the said duke of Bourgondie, dying without children. After which transport, within short time she died, having been lady, and true heir, of the countries of Holland and Zealand, and lordship of Friesland, with great troubles and afflictions (which grew by the ambition of the duke of Bourgondie) the space of nineteen years. She lies at the Hague, having lived but six and thirty years.  
Philip, first of that name, earl of Holland and Zealand, and lord of Friesland, son to john duke of Bourgondie, by resignation of the lady jacqueline, the last Countess of Holland, of the house of Bavaria, who died without heirs. He being heir, as well by the father side, as the mother side, succeeded in the said countries. Thus he was duke of Bourgondie, Brabant, and Limbourg, earl of Flanders, Artois, Bourgondie, Haynault, Holland, Zealand, and Namur, lord of Friesland, Salins, and Macklin, Marquis of the sacred Empire. A while after he did purchase (having first conquered it by arms, in the name of the widow to the deceased duke) the duchy of Luxembourg. He was borne on Saint Peter's day, in the year of our Lord 1359; his mother was the lady Marguerite of Bavaria, sister to Count William, father to the Countess jacqueline, and the lady Marguerite of Bourgondie, mother to the said Countess, was sister to john duke of Bourgondie, and therefore aunt by the fatherside to the said duke Philip: so as by the fatherside, and the mother-side, the said countries fell unto him without any difficulty. He was a valiant and courageous prince, and feared of his enemies. He was of a tall stature, fair of countenance, and subject to choler, yet a lover of peace, and surnamed the Good, but wonderful ambitious of greatness, the which he showed by his bad dealing with his cousin jacqueline Countess of Haynault. He died the fift of june, in the year of our Lord God 1467, being seventy three years old, having governed the countries of Holland, Zealand, Hay●ault, Friesland, and others, as well in quality of Earl and Lord, as of Curator, about forty years.  
Charles, called the Warlike, the only son of the good duke Philip, borne at Dijon, in the year 1434, by the death of his father, succeeded in the duchy of Bourgondie, Brabant, Limbourg, and Luxembourg, in the counties of Bourgondie, Artois, Flanders, Haynault, Holland, Zealand, and Namur, the seigneuries of Friesland, Salins, and Macklin, and in the Marquisat of the sacred Empire. He did purchase, or had in mortgage from Sigismond of Austria, the county of Ferretta, in the country of Alsatia, near unto Basil in Suisserland. He required the emperor Frederick to make Bourgondie a Realm, the which he refused. He was slain at the battle of Nancy, in the year of our Lord God 1476.  
Marry, daughter and only heir to Charles called the Warlike, was duchess of Bourgondie, etc. and succeeded in all the said Provinces, after the death of her father, being but eighteen years old, and under the guard and government of the duke of Cleves, and the lord of Ravesteyn his brother.  
Maxmilian, Archduke of Austria, son to the Emperor Frederic, being about the age of twenty years, married with Marie, duchess of Bourgondie, etc. and was, in the right of his wife, duke of Bourgondie, etc. and earl of Holland, Zealand, etc. which countries he governed twelve years, or thereabouts. He died in the year of our Lord 1519, and lies at Nieustad in Germany.  
Philip, ●●ond of that name, earl of Holland and Zealand, and lord of Friesland, only son to the Archduke Maxmilian of Austria, afterwards Emperor, and of Mar●e duchess of Bourgondie, etc. daughter to duke Charles the Warlike, was borne at Burges the twentieth day of june, in the year of our Redemption 1478. He was about four years old when his mother died: After whose death, the Archduke, king of Romans, his father, governed his countries in quality of Regent, or Curator, with great troubles, by reason of the factions which reigned, as well in Holland as in Flanders, unto the year 1494, when as the Archduke Maxmilian, king of the Romans, by death of h●s' father, was crowned Emperor.  
Prince Philip his son, being then sixteen years old, was called Archduke of Austria, duke of Bourgondie, Lothier, Brabant, Styer, Carinthia, Limbourg, Luxembourg, and gelders, earl of Hasbourg, Flanders, Artois, Bourgondie, Ferrette, Kyburch, palatine of Haynault, Holland, Zealand, Namur, Zutphen, marquis of the sacred Empire, and of B●rou, La●dtgrave of Elsathen, lord of Windsmark, of Portenau, of Salins, and Mackli●. He died in Spain being young, his father yet living, in the year 1505, and lie● at Granado.  
Charles, second of that name, five and thirtieth earl of Holland and Zealand, and lord of Friesland, eldest son to Philip of Austria, was borne at Gand, the four and twentieth of February, in the year 1500. After the death of his father, he did succeed in all his duchies, earldoms, and seigneuries, having governed his countries about four and forty years: he resigned the Low Countries in the year 1549, unto his son Philip, and died in Spain in the year 1558. He lies at Granado.  
Philip of Austria, the six and thirtieth Earl of Holland, Zealand, etc. only son to the Emperor Charles, who in his life time caused him to come out of Spain into the Low Countries, to make him (if he could) succeed as well in the Empire, as in his other realms of Spain, Naples, and Sicily, as of the Netherlands, and other Provinces, whereof the Emperor dispossessed himself in his life time, and his son took possession of the Low countries, and received the oath of fidelity of the Noblemen, and of all the deputies of Provinces and chief towns. The Lady Marguerite of Austria, base daughter to the Emperor Charles the fift, wife to Octavia Far●eze Duke of Parma and Plaisance, having been preferred (by the advise of the Cardinal of Granuelle) before all the Princes of Austria, the Prince of Orange, and the Earl of Egmont, to govern the Low Countries in the king's absence; being come to Brussels, whereas the king had called an assembly of the Estates of the Low Countries, he appointed her Governess general of all the seventeen Provinces, in the year 1559, to the end that she might have the chief managing of all the government of the said countries: the which caused great division betwixt the Noblemen, and others of the Council of State of the Low Countries, under whom also there were great combustions for religion in the said Countries; which divisions and troubles, were the cause that in the year 1581., the provinces of Holland Zealand, and Friesland, united themselves, and altogether have framed a kind of Commonweal, which they called, Estates, who at this day govern the said Provinces.      

The Commonweal of Geneva  

THE COMMONWEAL OF GENEVA.  

The Contents.  
1ANtiquitie of the town of Geneva, and the situation. 2. Wherein the soil abounds, the first-fruits which grow in the country, and the goodness of the air. 3. The Genevois gross by nature, and not very courteous to strangers. 4. Wherein the little ●ealth of this Commonweal consists. 5. Geneu● a strong town, and well guarded: of the Ar●e●all, and of the sorts which are in that country. 6. Forts of Saint Catherine, and others, ●ased by Henry the Great, the French king. 7. Of the Earls of Geneva. Why the Dukes of Sa●●y pretend that Geneva doth belong unto them. When and how they came to hold the iurisdicti 〈◊〉 the said Earldom. 8. A sovereign court of Geneva consisting of five and twenty Sena 〈◊〉 and what be the laws and statutes of this Commonweal. 9 How the Cal●anisteses promise 〈◊〉 was brought in, and settled in the town of Geneva.   

THe town of Geneva comprehended within Savoy, is very ancient, for that Caesar himself makes mention thereof in the first book of the Gauls wars, assuring that there was a bridge passing over the Rhosne, the which in his time was under the power of the Swisses. The situation of this town is pleasant, and of that side whereas the Rhosne comes out of that great Lake, which in old time they called Lake Leman, it is low, but since it hath been raised upon a little hill. There is at Geneva as it were two towns, through the which the river of Rhosne doth pass, whereon there is a bridge which joins them together: the great town is towards the South, and the lesser to the North; which the Germans call Gens.  

¶ The Qalitie.  
THe soil near unto Geneva is fruitful, for it yields corn, wine, turnips, and other roots, melons, all sorts of pulses, barley, oats, and hay: the ordinary first-fruits are nuts, apples, pears of many kinds, cherries of divers sorts, mulberries both black and white, chestnuts, and almonds: but there grow few figs. The air is good and wholesome, and Winter is not so cold and nipping as in Germany, nor Summer so tedious and hot as in many places of Dauphine. Within the lake of Geneva they take very goodly fish of an excellent taste, especially salmon-trouts which they carry to Lion and other places, and whereof they make very great account, as of the most delicate meat that can be eaten.   

¶ The Manners.  
THe inhabitants of Geneva are somewhat gross in their manners and conversation, but they have good wits, and can manage their business well: they have no great desire to see strangers with their town, especially if they have any doubt that they are Catholics; they exact of them in their Inns as much as may be. They are grown somewhat familiar with the French, since that the king was in Savoy, and that demanding his right with his sword in his hand, he preserved them from many dangers which might have fallen upon them, especially by Saint Catherines sort which was razed. The women seem to be more chaste than in any place of the world, and yet some of them will make love in secret: they do in general make show to be grave and stayed. The men of quality which use to speak French, speak it as ill as may be, and the common people speak Savoyard: they do all go modestly attired, neither is it their custom to have any excess in apparel, as in other places, which if they should their revenues would be much decayed before the end of the year.   

¶ The Riches.  
IT is most certain that the inhabitants of Geneva are not very rich, and it is as much as they can do to entertain themselves with some toil in an honest liberty: and were not the great pains they take in printing of books of all sorts, and in inventing and making of silks, this Commonweal would soon be poor and ruined: they do also use a good means to maintain themselves by their temperance, for that sparing is very much practised there, and it is in a manner their greatest revenue. They do sand into other parts good cheeses, fat capons, and gold thread very well wrought.   

¶ The Force.  
THe town of Geneva is well fortified, and furnished with artillery, and all kind of munition for war: they do daily keep a good guard, and when any stranger comes into the town, they have an eye unto his actions, and observe whatsoever he doth. If any one presume to walk upon the walls and to view them, they will not only fetch him down presently, but he shall be committed to prison, and drawn into question for his life. There is an Arsenal near unto the court, which is stored with all sorts of arms, and furnish●●●ith all things that are necessity to endure a long siege. There are and have 〈◊〉 fo● in this county, and amongst others that of Saint Catherine▪ in the 〈◊〉 Duke of Savoy had his ordinance to batter Geneva; but it was taken by that 〈◊〉 Henry the fourth, in the year of our Lord God 1600, and razed: The other, 〈◊〉 had been built right against it by them of Geneva, was also bea●en down and ●●●i●ie all matters▪ The third, called Ripaille, came into the power of them of Geneva, by the means of the French, in the year of our Redemption 1589, and was 〈◊〉; and so was a forth, when it was also taken by the Genevois. There are some ●owe●ss amongst which they call one the Mistress Tower, which defends Geneva to 〈◊〉 the Lake, and Savoy: Another is called the Tower of the Island, or of Caesar, which is situated upon the top of the Island, to defend the bridge, which did sometimes belong unto the Swisses. And seeing that we have spoken of the preparations which the Duke of Savoy had made to besiege it, I think it very fit to show why the ●●kes of Savoy pretend that Geneva doth belong unto them.  
The Bishops of Geneva were most commonly in quarrel with the Earls for the go●●●nement of the town. But to make it short, after the death of a certain Bishop ●●●●ed Humbert, his successor went unto the Emperor Frederick the first, and obtained of him that he should be sole Prince of Geneva, and not subject to any one in temporal things, but to the Emperor, and withal, that he should remain free from all tribu●eses. But after the Bishop's return to Geneva, he was still disquieted in his government, un●●● that the Earl, called William, did incur an imperial proscription or banishment, by reason of his rebellion, and was deprived of the see which he held of the Bishop. The war having continued long, and the forces both of the Town and Bishop being ●uth decreased, the Genevois called in an Earl of Morie●me, who was afterwards ●arle of Savoy. But there was also much where betwixt them, so as this Earl held many small Towns, Villages, and Castles, which did belong to them of Geneva, and drew near unto the Town. And not contenting himself with that he had usurped under the title of an homage not done, he required satisfaction of all that he had disbursed for the charges of those wars. But the Bishop having answered him, That he should rest satisfied with that which he had given him by right of fee, there grew many new quarrels: so as most of the people seating that this Earl of Savoy would be incens●●, and make a peace with their common enemy to their prejudice, they granted that he should hold within the town all that the Earl of Geneva had formerly enjoyed, and that by way of engagement. But for that, being entered, he entreated the Genevo●● tyranously, some Chanoins, and citizens, conspiring against him, called home their Earl, who coming with a small army, was vanquished by the Savoiards who held the town, and then they entered into the conspirators houses, taking, and defcating all they could. This discord continued until that the Earls of Geneva failed, and were extinct, after which the princes of Savoy drew unto them the jurisdiction of the said Earls. Finally, Amé prince of Savoy being discontented to see himself under a Bishop, obtained from the Emperor Charles the fourth to be Vicar of the Empire in all his Country; meaning, that by this title, the Bishop of Geneva, with his jurisdi 〈◊〉 should be subject unto him. But the Bishop opposed himself courageously against the 〈◊〉, whereby he preserved his authority, and the people's liberty, until the time of 〈◊〉 the eighth, nephew to the first Amés, who was the first duke of Savoy, and afterwards Pope, called Felix. He obtained from Pope Martin the temporal jurisdiction of Geneva: but he could not enjoy this donation which had been made unto him, no more th●n his successors.   

¶ The Government.  
THere is a Court at Geneva whereas five and twenty Senators assemble every day, for the affairs of the Common weal. But it is noted that they do not very good justice at Geneva to a stranger who demands any thing of a town dweller, so as they all departed discontented when as they have any business of this nature. If any one desires to understand the Laws and Statutes of this Commonweal, there is a Book newly printed at Geneva, which may content the curious. The town is governed by a counsel of two hundred, called the Great Council, out of which the five and twenty Senators are chosen; and of these there are four men elected, called Sindicks, who h●u●●h● government of the whole estate, unless it be in some cases wherein the whole Commonweal is inter●essed, as in making of peace and war, in offensive and 〈…〉, etc. They are judged by the civil law, and there is no ap 〈◊〉, but to the Council of two hundred.   

¶ The Religion.  
THey of Geneva make profession of the Protestants religion, and they have not any exercise of the Mass or Popery, but their town is a retreat to all such as are opposite to the Pope of Rome, and a Seminary of Ministers, which go from thence into other countries. Every man knows how that this town was sometimes the seat of Bishops, but about the year of our Lord 1539, they banished the Mass, and embraced the Gospel, wherein they were instructed and confirmed by Calvin, and other good Ministers, the which it is not now possible to altar, but by the ruin of the whole town. The Ministers have a Consistory, unto the which they may call public offenders, and such as give cause of scandal, and there reprove them: If the crime be great, and the pa●tie obstinate, they forbidden him the Communion; if notwithstanding he persist, they may excommunicate him. But the Ministers cannot call any before them into their Consistory, but by the authority of a Sindicke, who must assist them, otherwise they have no power to summon any man. They have their maintenance out of the common treasure, and deal with no tithes.      

The Commonweal of the Suisse.  

THE COMMONWEAL OR THE CANTONS AND LEAGVES OF THE SVISSES.  

The Contents.  
1THe description of S●isserland. 2. Of the Grisons country, and the limits. 3. Of the Valaisiens. 4. Division of the Swisses into thirteen Cantons. 5. Of the Canton of the Vry, called Toreau in Caesar's time, from whence it took the name. 6. Vry, a village divided into ten commonalties, and first of Suitz. 7. Of Vaderual. 8. Of Lucerne, and what places are under the jurisdiction of this Canton. 9 Of Zurich. 10. Of Zugh. 11. Of the country of Glaris. 12. Of Bearne, when it was built: of the towns and dependences. 13. Of the Canton of Fribourg. 14. Of the country of Schasuse, and whence it took the name. 15. Of the country of Appenzel, why it was so called and divided into twelve commonalties. 16. Of the Valaisiens divided into high and low, into free, and subject, and of their commonalties. 17. Of the Canton of the Grisons divided into three leagues. 18. Of the fertility of Suisserland, and wherein it abounds, and what the country of Zurich and other Cantons do bring forth. 19 Of the nature and manners of the ancient Swisses, and of their valour in war in Caesar's time. 20. Of the disposition of the Swisses at this day, and of their inclination to arms and wine. 21. Barrenness of Suisserland except pastures. 22. Situation of the countries of Suisser land naturally strong, by reason of the Alpes which serve as rampires and desences. 23. Commonweal of Swisses consisting of three parts: and how many Cantons every part contains. 24. When and how the Swisses cantoned themselves, and framed their Commonweal. 25. Of the league of three Cantons made at Bare● in the year 1325, and what it contained. 26. Of an other league of four Cantons of L●cer●● Vry, etc. and the articles. 27. An assembly made at Saint Galliard betwixt the foresaid Cantons having the force of a law and league. 28. The league of Zurich, with the four Cantons, and the articles. 29. The league of Zugh with the five Cantons. 30. The league of Gl●●is. 31. The league of Berne with the three Cantons. 32. The hereditary league made betwixt the Emperor Maximilian, Charles duke of Austria, and the Swisses. 33. The union of the three leagues of the Grisons with the Cantons. 34. Conclusion and articles of the common right with the Lords and countries of the Valaisiens. 35. League of Saint Galliard and the form. 36. The last peace made with them of Zurich, on Saint Octavians day in the year 1531. 37. Peace of Berne in the year 1537, and the articles. 38. The means which the most famous Commonweals, both ancient and modern have held, to enlarge their Estates. 39 Of two 〈◊〉 councils, established in the towns of Zurich and Basil, and of how many persons they consist. 40. Of the general diet and assemblies of the Swisses. 41. Of the diversity of their religion.   

WE are now to treat of many Estates, which are as it were united into one body by the means of their confederation and good intelligence, the which they have maintained long, no man attempting to invade this Nation, or if he hath, his design hath not taken effect: and in truth the Swisses are at this day so united as any prince that should resolve to dissolve their alliance, using to that end all possible art, should never see it effected. But to come unto the point and according to our order consider the whole limits of the country, I say that Suisserland is a Province of Germany, which hath for her bounds upon the East, the Grisons, Constance, and a part of Suabe; towards the West, Valais, and the county of Bourgondie; upon the South, the Estate of Milan near unto Como; and upon the North, a part of Alsatia, for that they put Basil in the Swisses country, being one of the thirteen Cantons, and yet it stands in Alsatia. There are moreover the three leagues of the Grisons country, which in former times were called High Selesia, the which are allied to the Swisses: then the abbey and town of Saint Galliard, Mulhauson, and Rotwil.  
The Grisons country hath for limits on the East the county of Tirol, upon the West, the Swisses, upon the South the state of Milan and the country of Bergamo, and towards the North, the king of Romans country: and they have much of their jurisdiction which lies intermixed with them.  
Moreover they do reckon the seven Wards or tenths of the Valaisiens called sometimes Sedunois, who devil upon the river of Rhosne, and confine upon the East with the Swisses, upon the West with Savoy, upon the South with the great Lake and Piedmont, and upon the North with the Lake of Geneva and a part of Suisserland. All these confederate countries are divided into three parts, that is to say, Swisses, Grisons, and Valaisiens.  
The Swisses are afterwards distinguished (leaving the most ancient divisions, as Ergovies, Turgovie, Vetland, and such like) into thirteen Cantons, the which are Vry, Zuitz, Vnderual, Lucerne, Zurich, Zugh, Glaris, Bern, Basil, Fribourg, Soleurre, Schafusen, and Appenzal.  
The first Canton, which is that of Vry, hath not any town, but the principal place and that which is head of the rest is Artolf, an open place about an Italian mile from Lucerne: the jurisdiction of this country extends beyond the mountain of Saint Gotard. They say that it was called Toreau, in the time of julius Caesar, and that the name came from thence, for that they of Sibental do at this day call Bulls, Vry; and this country hath for arms a Bull's head in a field Sinople. The inhabitants say that they are descended from a race of pagan called Gets and Vres, who were afterward made Christians. Having often changed their Lords, this part falling in the end from the Germans, returned to Zurich, at such time as the Empire was transported into Germany, and that all the countries which had been sometimes under the Roman Empire, recovered their liberty, beginning to govern themselves under form of a Commonweal, acknowledging no other Superior than the Roman Empire; as we may see by the privileges which were granted them by Rodolfe of Ausbourg king of Romans, and by other Emperors, and they were never subject (as some will have it) to the house of Austria, for that the Empire being in this house, they obaied the Emperor newly elected, but not the successors of this house. This village of Vry is divided into ten parts or commonalties, which they call Gnossammen.  
As for Zuitz, it is a town seated upon the banks of the Lake of Lucerne, upon the right hand coming from Artolf to Lucerne, and this town doth impart her name to the whole country of the Swisses. This town was built by some which came out of the realm of Suecia, which we call Sueden, to seek a new dwelling. They have given the name of this town to the whole country, either that they did first fight for their liberty in the country of Suitz, or for that they of Suitz were first of all exposed to the spoils and incursions of them of Austria, and were the strongest of those three Cantons which entered into league, so as this name passed to all their allies.  
Vnderuald lies beneath it upon the East, and is divided into the higher and lower: The ●●●est of Kernovald passeth by the midst of it, and yet all the country is called V●deruald.  
Lucerne takes the name of the place where it is situated, the which in old time was called Lucerne, by reason of a Tower in which they did set a light all night. The beginning of this abode was a monastery, the which was built by one Vincard, in the year of our Lord 840. It hath been built near unto the Monastery, and partly by reason thereof. There is within the town itself, a river called Russi, which comes out of the great lake of that town, as the Rhine doth at Constance from the lake of that town, and as the ri●er of Lindmar flows at Zurich from the lake of Zurich. From this lake they go to the three towns of Vry, Suitz, and Vnderuald, at the foot of a very high mountain, called P●ats' hill. The places of the jurisdiction of Lucerne, are Vuiken, and Sempach, Vuillis●●u, the valley of Entlibouch, Rotembourg, or Rot, Habspurg, Berone, Chelampt, Me●i●chevanden, Ebicone, Horbe, and Krient.  
The town of Zurich is ancient, and seated in a pleasant place, at the end of the great lake, into the which the river of Lindmar doth enter near unto Glaris. This lake divides the town into two parts, whereof the one is called the great Town, and the other the less, the which notwithstanding are joined together by three fair bridges. This town hath under it the government of Kybourg, and Grinou, Audelfingen, Grifensee, Eglisow, Regensperg, Vadesuillane, Vuadischovil, and Louffen, Vinterhur, and Steine, the which are two towns subject to them of Zurich.  
Zugh is a town whereof a small country takes his name. This country confines upon the North with that of Suits, and the town is situated upon a little lake. This town hath under it the town of Champ, the villages of Andre, Hunelbererg, Quacheville, Steinhuse, and S. Vuolfang.  
As for the country of Glaris, it is a valley near to the river of Lindmar. It is not very big, and about three Germane leagues long: It is so called of the chief town of the country, which is Glaris. This country is environed of three parts, with very high ●ountainess, and confines upon the South, and East, with the Grisons, and upon the West with the countries of Vry and Suits. The earldom of Hambur is in this country, and the barony of Humberg, and Ringenberg. Glaris commands over the county of Verdenberg, which the magistrates of the country bought for their Commonweal in the year of our Redemption 1517.  
Be●●e was built by Bertold, fourth duke of Zeringen, and earl of Verlande, who gave ●● the name of a Bear, which he took a hunting, the which in the Germane Tongue is called Bern. This town is in a manner an Island, the which the river of Are doth make, ●●●●ning it of three parts, and at the end of it there is a bridge of stone. Of that side of the town which looks towards the South, this river passeth in a valley from West to East, and then returning, it goes towards the West again, within a cannon shot. If there were ● channel or trench made upon the straight or Isthmus, Berne should be an Island. Upon the South and North parts it is very high above the river which runs below, and 〈◊〉 the East part, there is an easy ascent to go unto the highest part of the town. Berne 〈◊〉 it the town of Lozanne, which hath a strange situation, containing two opp●●●●il●, and a valley in the midst of them. It hath also the valley of Hasly, the town of ●●●●ersewen, the high and lo●er valley of Simme, Frutengen, Sane, Aelen, Thun, L●●●e●, Signaw, Drachselwald, Brandis, Sicomisovald, Burgdorff, Biereneck, Land 〈◊〉 A●berg, Nidow, Erlach, Vuangen, Arovangen, Arburg, Biberstein, Schenken 〈◊〉 Len●burg, and then the free towns of Zoffingen, Arau, and Bruck.  
〈◊〉 i● seated upon a mountain supported with steep rocks, and on the other 〈◊〉 is in a valley close to the mountains, which are not very rough, and about the ●●●●tainess, in the lower part of the town, there passeth a river, which is not very big. The seat of justice stands upon a hanging rock. The mountains support the walls, but upon the East part there are no buildings except Towers and Forts. Wheresoever they go through the town, they must ascend or descend.  
Soleurre, which in old time was but a castle, is at this day grown to be a town of good command, and hath under it both land and men. It is seated in a plain, and is the place whereas Saint Vrse of the Legion of Thebains suffered martyrdom, with sixty six of his companions.  
The country of Schaffuse lies upon the frontiers of Germany, near unto the river of Rhyne, and the black forest. This country takes his name of the chief town, whose walls are washed upon the South side by the Rind: behind towards the North there is a little mountain, and within the town, there are many goodly fountains. Near unto this place is the town of Bade.  
The country of Appentzel, so called of a village of that name, is divided into twelve commonalties, which the Swisses call Roden. There are six commonalties under the parish of Appentzel, and the other six are under the rest of the parishes. They contain in all eight parishes, that is, Appentzel, Gays, Vrneschen, Trogen, Tuffen, Herisgow, Hune, Dwyl, and the parish of Fosse. The commonalties without, are Herisow, Hunduil, Trogen, Vrneschen, Gays, and Tuffen, and those within, are Appentzel, Schwendy, Brulisow, Gouts, Vuinckelbach, and Haslem.  
The Valaisiens are divided into high and low. These devil at Chablais, near unto Saint Maurice, and the others in a valley which gins at the mountain of Fourche, and goes towards the river of Rhosne, from East to West, three journeys from Saint Maurice, with divers valleys of either side. It is enclosed with high mountains, for the space of five miles and more, the which are so narrow in some places, as it doth scarce give passage for the river of Rhosne, as we may see at Saint Maurice, whereas the mountains are so near one unto another, as they pass upon a bridge made of one arch. The Valaisiens are also divided into free men, and subjects. The free men are distinguished into seven commonalties, that is to say, Zion, Sierue, Leuque, Baronnie, Vespach, Brigue, and Gomese. The subjects are divided into two bayliwickes, that is to say, Saint Maurice, and Mont Olon: the river of Morge parts them. Zion the chief town of Valais is seated upon two mountains. The river of Rhosne, which passeth near it, riseth at the foot of the mountain of Fourche, joining to that of Saint Gotard; it runs through the valley, and then falls into the lake Leman, which extends from Chablais unto Geneva, for the space of eight leagues. Chablais confines with the country of Fossigny.  
The Grisons devil Southward of the Swisses, betwixt La guard, Ade, the county of Tirol, and the river of Tesin. They are divided into three Cantons, whereof the one is called Grise, the other of the house of God, and the third the Commonalties. Grise contains the valley of Mesolce, and Calanquen, with the lands of Rogoret and Musoc, and seven other valleys beyond the Alpes, by the which pass the rivers of Rhyne, and Glener. The Canton of the house of God contains Coire, which they of the country call Chur: this is a reasonable fair town, and the river of Lascar passeth by it. The neighbour country is also under this Canton, the which in former time was subject to the Bishop and Church of Coire. And moreover, it doth enjoy the valley of Agnedine, above and beneath, and Bregaille, which make near five and twenty commonalties. The third Canton confines with Tirol. They place Valtelline under the Grisons, the which hath many castles and good places, and about one hundred thousand souls. The chief places and Bormie, Sundry, Tiran, Morbegne, and Posclave. Valtelline confines with the valley of Chiavenne, in which the town of Poor stands. Both these were usurped by the Grisons, upon the Visconts, dukes of Milan, as many other valleys were by the Swisses, with the towns of Brisacq, Locame, Bellinzone, and Luguam. Yet some writ that Maximilian Sforce, duke of Milan, made an alliance with the Swisses, and gave unto the Cantons, Lugano, Lucarne, Mendrise, and the valley of Madia; and to the Grisons their consederats, the valley of Tellina or Volturena.  

¶ The Quality.  
SWiss●●land contains many mountains and valleys, whereof the last are somewhat 〈◊〉, although the first be craggy and rough, yet their tops are as green and as 〈◊〉 as the fairest fields; wherefore they seed great store of cattle there. The country abounds in wild beasts and tame of all sorts, and therefore they have great store of bu●●er and cheese. As for the air it is good and wholesome, and the inhabitants have been 〈◊〉 industrious to manure the land, as it not only yields all things necessary for the life of man but also for delight: it brings forth wheat in abundance, and yet in many places they should sow in vain if they did not first burn the ground; but the labour and industry of the inhabitants hath prevented this inconvenience. There are many places where there grows so good wine, as it doth far exceed that of the Rhin, both in taste & strength. We must add hereunto the goodly meadows, whereas they feed great troops of cattle: this country doth also breed great store of bears, stags, fallow dear, wild goats, ●uncess, wild boars, and other beasts which they of the country hunt, neither do they want great store of wild soul.  
But to the end we may come to every Canton in particular, the country about Zurich is very fruitful, and yields great store of wine and wheat: yet the wine is most commonly sharp, and doth not come to any perfect maturity, by reason of the nearness of the Alpes; but being kept long it doth ripen, and grows more pleasing. The Lake of Zurich doth breed great store of fish.  
The soil about Basil is good, and yields abundance of good wine and wheat; so as the inhabitants relieve their neighbours with their commodities in the time of dearth and necessity: there are also in this country goodly pastures. The country of Berne bears wine and wheat sufficient: and as for that of Fribourg it doth produce all things necessary, except wine, which they fetch from other places.  
As for the country which lies alongst the Lake Leman, the inhabitants complaint of the heat of Summer, and the sharpness of Winter; and yet the Lake, and the river of Rhosne do seldom freeze, neither is Summer so violent as in the neighbour countries that are in France: The soil is sit and easy to be manured, and is very fruitful: for they gather abundance of wine, corn, all sort of pulses, hay, oats, and barley, their ordinary first-fruits are nuts, apples, pears of many sorts, cherries both sweet and sour, mulberries white and black, chestnuts, and almonds, but figs grow very rarely: they want neither wild●●●e, fish, nor venison.  
They of Lucerne have in a manner more commodity from the Lake which is near them than from the land, and yet there are goodly meadows and pastures fit for the b●eeding of cattle: this country is not so hilly and rough as the rest. As for the countries of Vry, Suitz, & Vnderuald, they yield sufficient wherewith to feed the inhabitants  
In the country of Glaris there is great store of butter, cheese, and cattle. In the straits of the mountains they sow little corn, neither do they plant any store of vines: there 〈◊〉 great orchards of fruit, and goodly meadows: they bring wine and wheat from other places. The Lakes furnish the country with fish, and the mountains with venison; and they have also store of wild foul.  
〈◊〉 the country of Valais, the tops of the mountains are always white, but bene●●● in the valle is they are green and pleasant; so as this country doth bring forth ple●●●●lly (if they will take any pains to plant them) pomegranates, figs, & oranges, and it abounds in corn, wine, saffron, butter, and cheese. There breed divers beasts in the 〈◊〉, and amongst others a wild buck, which is like unto a stag in bigness, and 〈◊〉 like a goat, his horns are like unto a sallow dear, he will get up into any place, 〈◊〉 he may but stay his foot, he leaps from precipice to precipice with wonderful 〈◊〉 ●●gillitie, he lives upon the top of the mountains, whereas the ye is exceeding 〈◊〉 whenas the cold ceaseth his sight fails him. There are in these mountains valle●● of ice which have been long congealed, so as it cannot be distinguished from crystal: and in some places it is so deep, as it sometimes makes admirable ●reachess and overtures of three hundred foot thick and more. There the huntsmen hung their venison, to the end it may keep the longer by reason of the violent cold. There are veins of ●iluer 〈…〉 precipides, and some of lead, copper, crystal, and agaticke. In the 〈…〉 they discovered in the year 1544 a fountain of salt●: there are 〈…〉 of many kinds, and baths which are exceeding wholesome: there is also ●●ind of 〈◊〉 which burn coming near the fire.  
A●●●●● the country of the Grisons although it be hilly for the most part, yet there are 〈…〉 valleys which bring forth sufficient of all things that are necessary for the 〈…〉 man.   

¶ The Manners of the Ancients.  
THe Swisses have always been valiant and good soldiers as we may see by the opposition which they made against Caesar, who fearing them whenas they demanded passage to●●crosse the Roman Province, and to go into Xaintonge, there to settle their abode, he caused a wall to be made to hinder the execution of their design, remembering that this people had vanquished the Consul L. Cassius, and defeated the Roman army. They did not care much to manure their ground, so as they found not sufficient in their country to maint●ine them, for want of husbandry, not through any defect of the so●le, the which at this day they have made yielding, and profitable in all places. It is also most certain that in Caesar's time they were divided into Cantons, as they are at this day, but they had but four, whereof the chief was that of Zurich. They were the Swisses that first defeated the Romans, and they were also the first that repent it. We may judge of their resolution and the confidence they had in their forces, for that they burned 〈◊〉 houses and left all things desolate whenas they resolved to seek a new dwelling: but this was an act full of inconsideration and barbarism. As for their quickness of wit ●● was not great, yet in Caesar's time they found letters written in Greek in their camp, and tables which contained the number of them which came out of their houses, and who were to bear arms, neither had they forgotten the number of their women and children, which amounted to three hundred three score eight thousand persons. This may show that they were not so barbarous as they were held, and that they were given to study the Greek as well as the Gauls. As touching their vulgar tongue, there are many learned men hold that is was rather private to the country, than of Germany, and that it hath been corrupted since that strangers came from divers places and usurped Gaul. If I should produce all that descend the one, and maintain the contrary, I should trouble the reader as much as myself; it sufficeth to sand the courious to them that have made whole discourses, who having laboured much to prove the one and the other, have in the end prevailed in a manner as much as if they had written nothing, like unto those which seek hidden reasons to fortify their conjectures.  
We must not doubt but that these people for the most part have followed the manners of the Gauls, of whose number they were for a long time held: but afterwards it was filled with multitudes of Cimbrians, who being forced to abandon the country by an inaundation of the sea, overran Germany, and held a part of Gaul Belgic: but this country not being able to maintain them, they came unto the river of Rhosne, & demanded lands of the Romans, who having refused them, one part passed into Italy, where they were defeated by the Roman army: and the other which stayed on this side the mountains, remained in Suisserland in the countries of Suitz and Vry.  
Some others writ that, in the time of Sigishert king of Sueden, these Northern people did so abound, as part of them were constrained to seek new countries. These having past the Rhin defeated the Gauls; whereat other countries being amazed, sent ambassadors unto them, of whom they demanded no other thing, but that they would suffer them to live and till their land, without any prejudice to others: by reason whereof the Swisses suffered them to devil in the inner part of the country, which is full of mountains and lakes, where they tilled the land and made it fertile. Since, Histories report, That near unto the Germane Ocean there dwelled three kind of people, called Saxons, Angles, and Vietes. The Angles, with part of the Vietes, went into great Britain, at this day called England, and there planted their seat. The other part of the Vietes went into Suis●erland, and stayed there, and they were called Suithes. In the end, these people took the manners of all these nations; so as they made a mixture, whereof we cannot speak but by conjectures, full of vanity and confusion.   

¶ The Manners at this day.  
IT seems that nature hath fashioned the Swisses to arms, and necessity hath forced them to apply their minds seriously unto it: The country, which is full of rocks and mountains, rough, and hard to manure, and in old time desert and savage for the most part, doth not only harden the inhabitants to endure all toil and labour, but also makes them more strong and vigorous, and consequently more fit for war. They are ●one (as a man would say) all soldiers, and there is not any Suisse, being grown to age and disposition of body, but you shall see in him the marks of a soldier. They are commanded throughout all Suisserland to have arms, according to their means, and there are certain prizes propounded in public for them that shoot best with the arqebus, not only in town, but also in villages. All their other expenses, whatsoever they be, savour of war, they are so naturally inclined to arms. At certain times of the year, the chief magistrates make general musters of all their men in arms, as if they were to go against the enemy, although there be no bruit of war: and these musters are sometimes made at the dedication of Temples, and sometimes in fairs, and in many places when as the subjects take the oath unto a governor that is newly sent into a bailiwick. The Swisses practise swimming more than any other nation: being idle, they spend their time in hunting, through the high mountains and rocks, which are in a manner inaccessible, after wild goats, bucks, bears, wolves, boars, and such like, and they hold it a great honour, having taken any of these beasts, to fasten their heads at the entry of their gates, and the signory doth sometimes reward him that hath taken them. The Swisses which be professed soldiers, are commonly well furnished with arms in their houses: and sometimes the towns do furnish them out of their storehouses with arms, the which are the arqebus, the pike, the halberd, and the two-hand-sword: they are much given to wars, and observe good order; they love the corselet and pike, with a long sword and a dagger, and they also serve with a arqebus. They are of mean stature but strong. The country, which is not very fruitful, is the cause why they give themselves to live of their industry. They spend little in clotheses, or in their feeding, unless it be in bread and wine, as for the rest, they content themselves with what they have, & do not regard what they want, yet they have good store of flesh, butter, and cheese: they desire to have a stove, where they may defend themselves from the cold. They have small store of movables in their houses, and are rude in their conversations, and in a manner voided of all civility.  
They are much given to drinking, wherein they spend whole days and nights, and they are grown to that excess, as before they will dispatch any business, or contract any friendship, they will drink extremely: and they that drink most, or are drunk, are held freer and honester men than they that refuse it; yea they will quarrel if any refuse to drink with them. Yet we must confess that they are witty, and well advised, seeing they have been able to maintain themselves so long in liberty, and to live peaceably among themselves, notwithstanding that they differ in religion. Moreover, they carry themselves in such sort, as the greatest princes of Europe seek their alliance, and entertain them with great yearly pensions.  
Inregard of learning, notwithstanding that they have good Universities, yet are they ●●so much given to study as in other Countries, but their chief profession is arms. T●● have had learned men, and have at this day, but the number is very small, and I speak only of that which is generally practised in the country. Also, to speak the truth, they have no excellent wits, but savour something of the roughness of the mountains: yet when they study or meditate of any thing, they conceive it well, although it be with much pain. There are few that live out of the country, but the● still retain something of the behaviour of the country, and they seem to affect it in their apparel and other things: yet they that have lived out of Suisserland, grow politic, and are harder to cirumvent than other people which are held more subtle. In former times the Colleges of Saint Galliard and Coire among the Grisons were very famous, but of late years they are much decayed. Pope Pius (called before Aeneas Syl●ius) erected an university at Basil, from whence have come many learned men, as their writings do witness. There are public Schools at Zuriche and Berne: and there is one also at Lausanne, built by the signory of Berne. There are fair Printing-houses at Basil, Zurich, and Geneva; the which hath a perpetual and strict league with them of Berne. Moreover, the Swisses are lovers of virtue, especially of justice, the which maintains peace. Their laws are grounded upon great equity and justice, like unto other Commonweals, whereas crimes and offences are severely punished without respect of persons. They make their alliances with all integrity and fidelity, seeking that every one may enjoy his own quietly, and that all violence may be banished. The Swisses are Protectors of the oppressed, and many strangers have had recourse unto them, and have made them arbitrators of their controversies. They have been always recommended for hospitality, and have been charitable towards the poor.   

¶ The Riches.  
WE must not speak of Suisserland, as of a rich country, and abounding in all things, for that the situation doth hinder it, but it is rather to be much esteemed for that it is able to nourish all the inhabitants. If they did live there as they do in many other countries whereas all things abound, they should soon be brought to extreme misery and poverty: But their great sparing is a good revenue, and withal the money which they draw from neighbour princes, keeps them from those wants which they should endure, if they paid not dear for their alliance; I must confess that many times they own them great arrearages, but in the end they are paid after some sort: and and the very children, who have no knowledge of that which is given them, are entertained by foreign princes, who seek by all means to draw this nation unto them, and then to keep them. But to speak something of the profit which they make in the country, for that I have made some mention thereof, describing the quality, I will only say, That they do sometimes make much money of the feeding of their cattle, and of their pastures. They cell so great abundance of wheat at Zurich, as it is almost incredible. Basil hath also a great concourse of Merchants, and the river of Rhyne is very commodious: they carry many printed books out of this town into all other parts of Europe, for the which the Merchants receive great sums of money. Lucerne is a passage for all merchandise which they carry from the Franche County, and other neighbour countries, into Italy, and for those which they bring out of Italy into other countries; for that it is the way from Italy to pass by Mont Saint Gotard, and the merchandise of Italy descend by the lake, and the river of Russee into the Rind, and then into the Sea. But all their wealth is not to be much regarded.   

¶ The Forces.  
THe Swisses country is so enclosed of all sides with the Alpes, the people so valiant, and so obstinate to defend their liberty, and they that have attempted against this nation, have had such ill success, as there is not any prince in Europe that would undertake to make war against them, and to make himself master of those places which they ●●●bit. Moreover, they should reap so little benefit by this country, having taken it, as they that should dare to attempt it would always fly that enterprise as indiscreet, the which would breed them more loss than contentment. They do also maintain themselves so united, as it would be hard to force them, and to obtain an absolute victory. They have some towns and strong places, which want no kind of necessary provision and ●unition for war: they are able to maintain long sieges, and to endure all hardness and discommodity: but they are not fit to besiege a place, nor to go unto a breach. I● any one should attempt to force them in their own country, without doubt they would raise an army, and if it were possible give him battle, as they have often done to their advantage; and every man should fear to speed ill in his designs, seeing that in the beginning, whenas they were not united and in league together, handfuls of men have vanquished great armies: what may they not expect or rather fear of a whole nation which knows not what flying means, but are resolved rather to die than to show themselves cowards. All these Cantons together are able to make fifty or sixty thousand foot: whereof the thirteen Cantons of Swisses leaving their towns and forts well furnished, are able to sand forth sixteen or seventeen thousand foot: the three Cantons of the Grisons are able to sand forth ten thousand foot: the Valaisiens can sand forth about six thousand foot; and the Abbot of Saint Galliard, four thousand. But for that they differ in religion, they are all very wary how they sand great numbers of soldiers out of their countries to serve a foreign prince, fearing lest the contrary party should make some attempt against them; yet they live in good peace among themselves, and are so strictly allied, as they are very well able to defend their country; but they are not fit to make any attempt for the foresaid reason, neither have they any public revenues, able to entertain ten thousand foot for three months space. These people live with as great liberty and assurance, as any nation whatsoever: they are no friends to the house of Austria, by the reason of the old quarrels and war which they have had with the house of Haspourg their predecessors: and for the outrages received, and the battles fought with the house of Bourgondie; and last of all, by reason of the spoils committed by the duke of Savoy.  
All these people observe this custom, in giving their footmen to him that demands them: They first of all choose in every commonalty the soldiers and captains which are demanded, having still a principal care to leave their places furnished with men of fashion, and the commonalties stand bound to pay these men, in case that he that entertains them doth not content them: after this choice, the commonalties suffer them 〈◊〉 they have chosen to advance their standards: neither may any one of the community (of the which that standard is) carry arms against them, upon pa●ne of death, and confiscation of all their goods: and these standards are divers and many in number.  
First the thirteen Cantons of Swisses, the Grisons, Valaisiens, & Abbot of Saint Galliard, have altogether one standard general, the which may not be advanced, if in the army which is raised, there be not soldiers and captains chosen throughoutall the cou●●●●unaltieses of the said places, for that they must all consent together; the which doth seldom happen, for that it is not the custom of the said commonalties to sand forth their men together. This is called the general standard of the league. When it is advanced, there is not any soldier subject to the commonalties, that may bear arms against it, without incurring the confiscation of goods and loss of life; and the Arms of all the c●●●naltieses of the leagues are painted in it. Besides this general standard, the 〈◊〉 Cantons of Swisses have one amongst them, with the Arms of all together; and th●●●ay not be advanced but with the consent of the thirteen Cantons, as hath been said, 〈◊〉 Suisse may go to battle against this standard. There is also a particular standard 〈◊〉 the three Cantons of Suitz, Vry, and Vnderuald, which is given by these three casualties as the rest, and no soldier of those commonalties may go against it. The 〈◊〉 the Valaisiens, and the Abbot of Saint Galliard have either of them a standard, the 〈◊〉 ●re not given but to such soldiers as they have chosen, neither may any of their 〈◊〉 take arms against them: so as by reason of this custom observed by these 〈◊〉▪ it is a hard matter for a prince to levy any soldiers or captains of this Nation, if they be not chosen by their commonalties, and have their standards delivered unto th●m as I have said. Pope julio for the succours he received from the Swisses against the French, gave them the title of defenders of the Church: he enriched their standards with certain images, and publicly gave to the whole nation of the Swisses two great standards, which they call Paner, and also a sword and a cap for marks of liberty. As for their enrolling of soldiers, if they make war within the country, all that are able to bear arms, furnish themselves, and run to secure it, as to a general fire which all must quench: and in time of peace, every Canton hath certain captains, ensigns, and men chosen, which must be ready for all events. They are forbidden upon pain of death to abandon their ranks or troops, until that the enemy be in rout: and then whenas their captains have given them leave to spoil, all the booty is brought in common and distributed among them. The Cantons having made war together, do also divide the public spoils by equal portions, as artillery, castles, and countries conquered, tolles, and other revenues. The soldiers are extraordinarily recompensed which have done any brave exploits in war above their companions. The battalion of Swisses is much esteemed, consisting of pikes crossed, resembling a hedgehog.   

¶ The Government.  
WE are now come to the principal piece of the Swisses Estate, which is their gonernment, every Canton having their distinct officers and magistrates for the government of the said Canton. The chief magistrate of every town and commonalty is commonly called Aman, he is chosen by the people's suffrages, and continues three years in his place; who although he be the chief among them, yet doth he differ little from them in his habit, only he hath some more attendance: next unto the Aman, is the officer of justice, who is like unto the Chancellor, and the second person of that State: next unto him are certain Councillors, men of experience in affairs of princes: then comes the Chamberlain who hath the charge of the munition and public treasure: and next to him are four Deputies, who are greater in authority than the Councillors, and may do many things in the absence of the Aman, if the Chancellor be present: these with the Aman make a Council of fifteen, which govern the State both in peace and war, and are ever present at the hearing and deciding of all causes that arise in the jurisdiction of their Canton.  
These in effect manage all the affairs of the Commonalty: they are confirmed from year to year by the people, and yet they continued in their offices three years, as the Aman doth. They appoint captains and governors of places, and for the deciding of petty matters they allow of ten persons chosen out of the meaner sort; but the parties contending may appeal to these fifteen, above whom there is no other judge nor appeal. The party condemned is severely punished, neither will they suffer any of their subjects to appeal out of the country, but to the great council, which is a great offence and sharply punished. There is no place in the world where laws are observed with less partiality; for they are never altered according to the inconstant humour of the people, nor violated, without due punishment.  
In matters of importance which concern the general estate of all the Cantons, they appoint a general Diet, which is to be held in one of the cities which they think most co●uenient, whereunto every Canton sends two or three ambassadors or deputies, whereas they consult and treat of all ma●terss touching peace and war, or any thing that concerns the general good of their whole Estates, and they give audience and answers to ambassadors of foreign princes: where all things being debated at large, they conclude according to the plurality of voices. For these many years their general Diet hath been kept at Bade in Ergovia, which is one of the five Cantons, whereof the Signior of Zurich are the chief. But let us examine every Canton in particular the country of the Swisses is divided into four parts, which they call Gou●●of a Germane word which signifies country: these four parts are Zurichgovu, Vuis●●purgergovu, Argovu, & Turgovu. And this Commonweal is composed of three parts: In the first are the thirteen Cantons, which the Germane call Ort; these have alone that power among all the allies, that they deliberate of all matters which belong to the Commonweal in their public assemblies, and give their voices, and do participate of all commodities and discommodities of the alliance. In the second part, they do reckon the Abbot and Town of S. Galliard, the Grisons, Valaisiens, Rotweil, Mulhusen, and Biel. In the third they put those pl●●●●●ich are come into the power of this Commonweal, either by free will, or by force, as Turgow, which was reduced under the Swisses dominion, in the year 1460; Bade (not the Marquisat which lies in another place) subdued in the year 1415, and subject to the eight first Cantons; Rhegust conquered in the year 1513, and governed by the thirteen Cantons; Sarungans sold in the year 1483 by George earl of Vuerdenb●●g to the seven first Cantons; The free Provinces taken in the year 1415, acknowledging the authority of the seven first Cantons. Lugan, Locarne, Mendre●e, and the valley of Madia, are come under the Swisses jurisdiction by the liberality of Maximilian Francis Sforce duke of Milan, who gave these unto them in the year: 1513 These places o●ey all the Cantons, except Appenzel. Bilitone and Bellinzone obey the three first Cantons.  
But to understand after what manner the Swisses have thus cantoned themselves, and have framed a commonweal so much redoubted and scared: After many changes of command, the countries of Vry, Sui●z, and Vnderuald, came in the end to acknowledge no other superior but the Roman Empire, as we may see by the privileges which were granted unto them by Rodolphe of Ausbourg, king of Romans, who reigned in the year 1201, and by other Emperors his successors: neither were these people ever subject, as some affirm, to the house of Austria, but the Empire being in this house, they only obeyed the Emperor being chosen, and not his successors of the house of Austria.  
These valleys being then in liberty, the Emperor sent them Germane governors, who not meddling with the government of the Commonweal, should do justice to the people: whereof some of these governors were expelled, and others slain for their insolences; for that many times they used many strange outrages against the people, as the governor of Vnderuald did, commanding that one of them should be put into a yo●● with oxen, the which he refusing to undergo, he commanded that he should be dra●●e unto it by force, but the man ran suddenly away, whereat the governor was in such a rage, as he caused his father's eyes to be pulled out that had so escaped.  
The●e happened another in the said valley, whereas the governor pressing a woman in the ●●●ence of her husband, to prepare him a hot bath, and to enter into it with him; thibetian having delayed the time until her husband's return, the governor being ful● 〈◊〉; slew her with a hatcher.  
moreover, the governor of Suitz and Vry, pust up with vanity and pride, planted a ●●affe 〈◊〉 the which he set his hat, commanding, That all which passed by, should do honour unto it: there was one William Zenocia, who refused to do it; whereupon he called him be●●●● him, and commanded him to take an apple from off his sons head with his Cross bow: the father refused to do it for many days, but in the end (not being able 〈◊〉 he obeyed, and (by the help of God) struck the apple from his sons head, 〈◊〉 hurting him● and for that he had brought two arrows, the governor demande●●● 〈◊〉 to what end ●e had brought the other: to whom Zenocia answered, That in case ●e 〈◊〉 his son with the first, he was resolved to shoot the second at himself: the 〈◊〉 having heard these words, caused him to be taken, and having put him into a 〈…〉 carry him unto a Palace of his, betwixt Vry and Bruch, he escaped, and flying 〈◊〉 the mountains which are about the Lake, he prepared himself for revenge. 〈◊〉 people of these three valleys, being incensed at these outrages and many others, 〈…〉 their governor, and so freed themselves, and then the Emperor sent them 〈…〉 judges, which should be of their own signory.  
〈◊〉 growing a division in the Empire, in the year of our Lord 1314, for that some 〈◊〉 ●ectorss had chosen Lewis duke of Bavaria for Emperor, and the rest, Frederick Archduke of Austria, they contended for the Empire: These valleys refusing to acknowledge Frederic for Emperor, for that he had sewest voices, he made war against them, and sent Leopold his son to invade the country of Suitz, assuring himself that Lewis should not be able to relieve them. Leopold entering with a good army into the country of Suitz, which is environed of all sides with water and mountains, and being come to Marguten, he was defeated by the men of the three valleys of Suitz, Vry, and Vnderuald: whereof the narrowness of the country was partly the cause, and the season also, for that there was much ice in the ways, so as the horses could do no service in this battle, and the Swisses casting stones only from the mountains did so amaze them, as they did willingly leap into the lake.  
At the same time (by the commandment of Frederic) they were invaded by the Earl of Stambourg, who remained at Veldane, near unto Vnderuald, but the Swisses coming thither, would not suffer them to pass a place called la Bouche. All these things they did without the assistance of any foreign forces: Having maintained this war for the space of two whole years, they resolved, for their greater safety and quiet, to unite themselves together, making a league, which was called, of the three Cantons, as followeth.   

¶ The league of the three Cantons of Vry, Suitz, and Vnderuald.  
IN the name of God, etc. For as much as the memory of man is weak, and doth soon forget the success of affairs; and for that it is very profitable and necessary that those things which bring peace, rest, profit, and honour, should be set down in writing.  
For this cause, we the countrymen of Vry, Suitz, and Vnderuald, make it known to all that shall read or hear these presents, that to provide for and prevent the difficulties and inconveniences of times, and the better to remain in peace and concord amongst ourselves, and to the end we may the better defend ourselves, and maintain our bodies and goods, we have tied ourselves by a perpetual and firm oath one unto another, and by this oath we do promise to counsel and assist one another with our persons and goods both within and without the country, against all that shall wrong, or attempt to wrong any one of us, either in his body or goods, so as it may be pre●udiciall to any one of us, to whom we are to give all the aid we can, causing the wrong and loss to be repaired either by accord or by some other means.  
Secondly, we have ordained amongst us of this league, That not any of our countries or Cantons, and much less any private man, shall make himself lord, nor receive any lord, without the consent and counsel of the rest; but every one both male and female shallbe obedient to his true lord or signory, in all due and honest services: but not to any lords that shall seek to take any of our countries by arms, and force us to any unjust thing, in which case they shall not do any service whilst they are in discord with us.  
We have also agreed, That not any of our Cantons, nor allies, shall aid any stranger without the advice of the other Cantons and allies.  
None of the confederates shall treat with the said strangers without the knowledge and consent of the rest, whilst that the Cantons are not subject. If it happen that any one betray one of the Cantons, & deliver it into the hands of another, or shall not observe whatsoever here is written, he shall be held for a traitor, and a man without faith, and his person shall be delivered into the hands of the Cantons, and his goods shall be confiscate.  
Moreover, we have agreed, That not any of us shall support or receive any judge which buys his office for money or any other thing, but he shall be of the country.  
If there grow any quarrel or war betwixt the confederates, the best and wisest shall pacify this discord, and end the quarrel by accord: and if one of the parties be obstinate and refuse, than the rest of the confederates shall assist the other at his charge that doth contradict. If any one of the allies do kill another, he shall lose his life, unless he can prove (the which is allowed him to do) that he had committed this murder for the defence of his person: and if the murderer sly, he that lodgeth him or defendeth him in the country shall be banished, and shall not return into the country but by a common consent of the Cantons.  
If it also happen that any one of the allies shall set fire of another's house, he shall be for ever banished, and he that shall lodge him or assist him shall be bound to pay the damages of the party interessed and complaining.  
No man shall distrain another but for assurance, the which he cannot do without the permission of his judge: and every man shall be obedient to his judge, and shall present himself before him when it is needful. If any opposeth himself against his judge, and is disobedient, or shall prejudice any one of the allies by his disobedience, than they of the league shall force him to make reparation.  
Wherefore, to the end that this present league and capitulation, and all the causes therein contained may remain firm, and in force forever: We the countrymen of Vry, Suitz, and Vnderuald have set our seals to this present, made at Baren, in the year 1325 the first Tuesday after S. Nicholas Feast. In the same year all their privileges were confirmed by the foresaid Emperor Lewis.  
The dissensions of the Empire being pacified, some other countries moved by the bad usage of their governors, and drawn by the sweetness of liberty, entered into league with the said three Cantons: Lucerne entered first in the year 1332, than Zurich in the year 1351, and in the year 1352 Zugh, Glaris, and others. The contract of the four Cantons was after this manner.   

¶ The League of the four Cantons of Lucerne, Vry, Suitz, and Vnderuald.  
WE the Senate, Councillors, and Citizens of the town of Lucerne, and we the countrymen of Vry, Suitz, and Vnderuald, do make known to all that shall read or hear these presents; That to the end we may defend our persons with less difficulty, we have reciprocally promised to aid and council one another, in all the matters here under written, and in all others that shall be honest and reasonable, we of Lucerne, Vry, Suitz, and Vnderuald have excepted the Emperor our Lord, and the Roman Empire, and that whereunto we are bound in his behalf, as we have been accustomed in all antiquity: and moreover we the said of Lucerne have reserved our town, the Councillors, and all their Estates, with the good customs towards the citizens and strangers, as they have been observed by our ancestors.  
We the said do also reserve in ourselves a particularity in our bounds and limits according to our statutes and good customs, as our predecessors have formerly done: and we the citizens of Lucerne shall content ourselves with such rights, towards the three Cantons, as hath been formerly said.  
We the said citizens of Vry, Suitz, and Vnderuald shall rest satisfied of the citizens of Lucerne, as before: but if it shall happen (which God forbidden) that any one of us, either within orwithout, shall wrong or prejudice another; then the party offended shall upon his faith consider if this prejudice was done wrong fully unto him, and then the said party shall advise the other, and both with the town of Lucerne shall assist him against whomsoever, with their persons and goods.  
We the citizens shall at our own charge aid the said Cantons: and contrary wise, we the said Cantons shall at our own change assist the citizens of Lucerne, all which shall be done faithfully and without contradiction.  
If by chance there shall grow any controversy among us, in that case they shall choose the most discreet and best advised, who shall friendly reconcile all our controversies, and in case that the one party shall contradict this accord, the other allies shall assist the other at his charge that disobeyeth.  
If there shall happen any disorders betwixt the three Cantons, and that the two were agreed, in that case we the said citizens of Lucerne shall help to reconcile the third unto the other two, if we the said citizens of Lucerne do know and found any thing which shall seem better unto us for the two Cantons.  
We have also agreed that we the said citizens, and for the abovenamed countrymen of Vry, Suitz, and Vnderuald, and likewise the abovenamed for the citizens of Lucerne, may be warrant one for another, and that no one of us shall enter into league or capitulation with any one either within or without, without the knowledge and consent of the rest of the allies.  
None of the allies shall distrain another but for rent, the which shall not be done but after sentence given.  
Whosoever of the allies shall contest against a sentence given, or shall disobey, if this disobedience be prejudicial to any of the allies, he shall be forced to make reparation of the damage.  
If any of the allies shall commit an offence for the which he shall be banished out of his jurisdiction, so as this banishment be signified unto the other jurisdictions, with letters patents, & the seal of the country or of Lucerne, he shall also be banished from the rest, and if any one doth assist him, or give him meat, being known, he shall undergo the like punishment, but he shall not incur death.  
And moreover we have jointly resolved that if any one of the allies shall not observe all the articles abouementioned, and every one of them, he shall be held for a man which hath broken his faith and word: and to the end these things may be inviolably observed by all and every one of us, as it hath been concluded, we the said senate, council, and citizens of Lucerne, have with our common seal, and of every particular Canton, caused these presents to be sealed, in testimony of all things abovewritten. Made and passed the first Saturday before Saint Martin in the year 1332.   

¶ An Assembly made at Saint Galliard, betwixt the four Cantons, which hath the force of a law and league.  
WE the Senate, and Council of a Hundred, which they call the great Council of Lucerne, and we the Amans, Council, Countrymen, and all the Commonalties of the three Cantons of Vry, Suitz, and Vnderuald, above and beneath Silue, are fallen into question betwixt us the three Cantons, and the other party; for that according to the tenor of the article of our league, which speaks of Will and Accord, be they made or treated of, or a law, suit, or sentence: that as many men, as we the said of Lucerne, shall put into any garrison, or employ in any business, we the abovenamed three Cantons shall be bound to put as many of every particular Canton. The which we (I say of Lucerne) have thought very unfitting, dishonest, and unjust, and these words having not been well explained in the perpetual league, for that there was no mention made of these aides, have for this cause in this present diet, by a common consent, willingly agreed, that in regard of this article, we of Lucerne shall place as many persons, as the said Cantons of Vry, Suitz, and Vnderuald, and all three together shall yield to all questions and businesses that shall happen, ●and no party shall be more or less than the other. In like manner if there should ever happen any controversy betwixt us the three Cantons, and that it were needful to expound the tenor of this perpetual league, in regard of these words Will, Accord, and Written, these controversies shall be ended with equal aid, as hath been said.  
And if such disorders or controversies should grow betwixt us of Lucerne, and any one of the Cantons, they shall be ended with equal aid as before. And to the end the said things may last perpetually, we have confirmed them by an oath, and have bound as well ourselves as our successors to observe them inviolably, and to that end we have sealed them with the seal of Lucerne, and of the three Cantons of our countries, and have caused four to be dispatched with the same words and the same seal, one for us, another for Vry, the third for Suitz, and the fourth for Vnde●uald, all of one form. Made the Wednesday before Palm Sunday, in the year 1481.   

¶ The league of Zurich with the four Cantons.  
WE the Bourgmaisters, Councillors, and common citizens of the towns of Vry, Suitz, and Vnderuald, make known unto all, etc. That with good Council, and mature deliberation, in regard of a good peace and defence of our goods and persons, and of all our towns and countries, and for the general good, have assembled together, and sworn before God and his Saints, as well for ourselves, as our successors, whom we will have to be perpetually comprehended in our league, especially to have and observe an everlasting confederation, which hath been, and shall for ever be firm and stable.  
And for that things that are inconstant, are subject to forgetfulness, and all things in this world change; for this cause, we the said Towns and Commonalties, give this perpetual faith and testimony one unto another, by letters and writings; so as we will be ready to secure one another without any contradiction, as well with our goods as persons, against any one that shall seek to wrong any one that is comprehended in this league, in his person, goods, or honour, be it present, or to come, within the limits above written.  
First of all, whereas Are doth rise, which is called Grialel, and from thence downward, and those of Berne, whereas Are falls into the Rind, and from thence unto that part where it riseth, and from that bridge by the Grisons, to the Fort called Reingembourg, beyond S. Gotard, unto the mountain of Platier, and from thence unto Torsel, and Crinisel, whereas Are or Arole hath his spring.  
But if within these bounds there were any one comprehended in this league, that were damnified in any sort, either in his goods or person, than the Council and Commonalty of the town or country where he hath received wrong, shall take knowledge thereof: And when as this Council or Commonalty, or the greatest part of the town or country which hath received the wrong, hath considered what succour shall be needful for this business, they shall advertise the other towns and countries comprehended in this league.  
And when this advertisement shall be made, they must advertise by a Post, or by letters from the Council, or the Commonalty of this town or country, the councils of the three Cantons, without any intermission, to the end they may give advice unto the towns of that whereof they have been faithfully advertised: And they shall suddenly prepare themselves withal that shall be needful to assist them that have been damnified: And no one of us of the said Cantons shall treat in any sort with any of this present league, nor do any thing in word or deed, whereby these succours may be stayed or hindered: And every town or country shall make ready these succours at their own charge without any question.  
If it should happen that any one comprehended in this league should receive any wrong, which requires present help, then must we all presently secure him, in such sort as the wrong may be repaired or revenged without any delay.  
But if the matter were of such importance as it should require an assembly of a Diet, and that in the mean time if one of the towns comprehended in this league should need succours, they must suddenly go unto the Diet, at the house of God, in the Abbey of S. Marry, & advise what shallbe most fit to relieve them speedily that have sent unto them.  
If any one were besieged, they should entertain them that did aid them, or that they have received for their succours, and these charges shall be in regard of raising the siege.  
If any one without just cause should do wrong unto another comprehended in this league, and that this man shall devil out of the foresaid bounds, when as they have complained of him that hath done the wrong, or granted any letters of reprisal, and he shall fall into the hands of our consederats, they shall distrain and sequester such a person, and them that shall aid him, and their goods, and force him to make speedy reparation of the damages.  
If it should happen that we the above named of Zurich, should have any controversy with our above named allies of Lucerne, Vry, Suitz, and Vnderuald, or with any one in particular (the which God forbidden) we shall come for that cause to the Diet of the house of God in the town of Lucerne, the three Cantons altogether, or else one in particular which hath this controversy with us of Zurich: there they shall choose two discreet men, and we two others, and these four shall swear before God and his Saints, to dispatch this business presently, either by accord, or by justice, and that which shall be concluded by these four, or by the greatest part, shall be observed by both parties without any intermission.  
But if it did happen that these four which should be chosen to such a business were equally divided, or that some question were grown among them, then shall they upon the faith which they have sworn, choose a man out of our league, which shall be held indifferent, and not to incline to the one or the other. And as for him, whom they have voluntarily chosen, they of that town or country shall command him to attend this business with those four, and endeavour upon his faith to end it speedily. And in regard of money which is due, every one shall pursue it by law in the town or country whereas the defender dwells, whereas they shall presently judge and dispatch those affairs.  
None of those that are comprehended in this league shall be arrested or sequestered one for another, unless the surety which the creditor hath accepted be not allowed: having also agreed that no confederate comprehended in this league shall be distrained for another in any sort.  
If any person comprehended in this league should for any offence be banished out of this jurisdiction, and that notice were given thereof by the seal of such a country to another jurisdiction, he shall be also banished out of the same Commonalty: and he that shall then lodge him, or give him meat, if it be known, shall incur the like punishment, but he shall not be in danger of his life.  
We have also reserved for ourselves together, or for any one of our towns or countries in particular, that would ally themselves with any Lords or Citizens, that they cannot conveniently do it, but this league of the one with the other shall be perpetual, firm, and stable, and they shall keep all the things declared in this present writing.  
We have also concluded and declared, That if any one would molest the Seigneur Ralph Bruiren Knight, who is at this present Bourgmaister, and the Councillors of this town in their judgements, and the laws which they have made, being comprehended in this league: When as we the abovenamed of Lucerne, Vry, Suitz, and Vnderuald, shall be only advertised by a Bourgmaister, or a Councillor of Zurich, then upon our own faith we shall be ready to aid them, in such sort as the Bourgmaister, Councillors, and Tribunes shall enjoy their power, laws, and judgements.  
We the said of Zurich, Lucerne, Vry, Suitz, and Vnderuald, have reserved unto ourselves in this league our Lord the King, and the sacred Empire, and that whereunto we are bound by all antiquity and good custom.  
And moreover, we of Zurich have reserved our confederations, leagues, and approabbations which we have made before this league.  
And we of Lucerne, Vry, Suitz, and Vnderuald, have reserved the leagues and unions which we have together, the which shall go before this.  
After this, they must understand that we have plainly concluded in regard of those which are of this league, that they remain in their full liberties, rights, and customs, as they have done unto this day, in such sort notwithstanding, as no man shall molest or hinder another.  
It is also particularly concluded, to the end that this league may be always firm, that ten years hence, about the month of May, before or after, without any delay, as the said three towns have ordained, we shall 'cause this league and union to be renewed by words, writings, and oaths, and that all things necessary shall be done, and all they that shall exceed the age of ten years shall swear to observe this league, and all the Articles therein contained, without any contradiction.  
But if it should happen that all things were not done precisely within the time prefixed, and that they should prolong the business upon some consideration, it should bring no prejudice to this league, seeing it is plainly concluded that it shall remain firm and stable for ever, with all the points and present articles.  
In like manner with good and mature consideration we have reserved, that if for our good by a common consent, either now, or hereafter we shall do or say otherwise than we have done or written in this league, we may do all this one with another, for that we who are comprehended in this league will always take council together, and resolve upon that which shall be held most profitable.  
And to the end that all that is written by us at this present, and shall be hereafter, as well by us, as by our successors, may remain firm and stable forever; we the said towns and countries of Zurich, Lucerne, Vry, Suits, and Vnderuald, have caused our seals to be set to these presents, at Zurich, the first day of May in the year 1351.  
Zugh entered into league with the said Cantons in the year 1352, as followeth.   

¶ The League of Zugh, with the five Cantons.  
WE the Bourgmaisters, Councillors, citizens, and Commonalty of the town of Zurich, Councillors, citizens, and Councillors of Lucerne, the Amans, Council, and common citizens of Zugh, and all that bear office: the Amans, Councillors, and Countrymen of the three Cantons of Vry, Suitz, and Vnderuald, make known unto all, etc.  
The articles contained all that was concluded betwixt Zurich, and the four Cantons, giving the same confines; and this league was all one with the other, there was only Zugh added. It was concluded at Lucerne in the year 1352, the first Wednesday after Saint john Baptist.  
Glaris allied itself with the other confederates in the year 1357, as followeth.   

¶ The League of Glaris.  
WE the Bourgmaisters, Councillors, and common Citizens of Zurich, the Amans and Commons of the countries of Vry, Suitz, Vnderuald, & Glaris, make known etc. as in the precedent.  
And we the said of Zurich, Vry, Suitz, and Vnderuald in regard of a good and particular friendship, do give leave unto them of Glaris to ally themselves at their pleasure with our confederates of Berne, Lucerne, and Zugh, or with any one of them in particular; upon condition notwithstanding, that this league shall precede the other, and shall be perpetual: and we the said of Glaris shall not ally ourselves with any, be he Lord or other, without the consent and leave of our said confederates, of Zurich, Vry, Suitz, and Vnderuald. In witness whereof, as in the other letters, putting Glaris etc. Given the Monday in Whitsun week 1357.   

¶ The League of Berne, with the three Cantons.  
WE the Senate, councillors, and the two hundred Citizens, Commons of the town of Berne in Heucheland, and we the Amans, and Commons, conntrimen of Vry, Suitz, and Vnderuald, make known etc. It contains the same in words and form that the league of Zurich with the four Cantons: but the place of diet is Riembolt.  
We the said of Berne may advertise the said three Cantons against them that would annoyed us and our citizens, or them that are under our protection, and are properly ours, and none others, and against such they shall be bound to aid us, and in all those cases we the said three Cantons shall sand our succours by the Brunigh unto Vnderswen, and they of Berne shall give pay unto all our men that we shall sand armed unto them, for the time that they shall retain them in their service, wherewith we shall rest contented, and that our men shall leave their service at Vnderswen: And if we of Berne shall sand our men to secure the said three Cantons, or any one of them in particular, the same article shall be observed unto Vnderswen. And if it did happen that they should be generally besieged, than we of Berne shall sand unto them at our own charge.  
And if there should fall out any war which should concern all, and that we the said of Berne, or the three Cantons should go against the enemies & annoyed them in any place, for all this, none that shall be comprehended in the league shall reckon any charges to the other.  
If we of Berne do invade our neighbour's country above, than the three Cantons shall be bound to assail the enemy, and for this faction we shall not reckon any charges one unto another: and contrariwise if we the said three Cantons shall invade, they shall observe the same article.  
We the said of Berne have bound ourselves, that if they of Zurich, and Lucerne have need of aid, and require it of the said three Cantons their allies, whenas we shall be advertised by the three Cantons, we are bound to sand our succours speedily at our own charge, who shall go as far as the rest.  
And if they of Lucerne and Zurich should not sand succours, together with them of the three Cantons, to assist us of Berne, we shall not pay any thing to them of Zurich and Lucerne: and if it should at any time happen that we of Berne, and we the said three Cantons should sand our men to secure one another, we have concluded, that if one part should go and annoyed the enemy &c as in the second article.  
If any one comprehended in this league shall have any complaint, or demand against an●ther, he shall go unto the Diet as before: and the Elector shall choose a man out of his country or town, who shall be indifferent, and they of his party shall entreat him to embrace this business faithfully, and then the parties contending, shall either of them ch●se two for his part, and these five shall speedily dispatch the business, either by Accord or justice, without any contradiction. The rest is as in the other articles.  
If any one comprehended in this league be in possession of any thing, no man shall take it from him without reason, but every one shall aid and defend him in the country.  
After all these leagues and alliances, the Swisses had great wars by reason of the great league of Suabe, which was made against them and their liberty: and on the other side the better to resist and make head against their enemies, they made a perpetual league with the Grisons; and about that time Lewis the twelfth (who desired to recover the duchy of Milan, which he pretended to be his right) sought the friendship and alliance of the Swisses, who have always fought so valiantly for their liberty, as they have forced their enemies to come to composition, and to seek a peace upon condition, that they should enjoy their full liberty, and should be confirmed in all the places which they had formerly taken from them of Austria, and that the jurisdiction of Turgow in criminal causes, which they of Constance had enjoyed, should be given them: they had war with the Grisons against john jagues' of Medicis, lord of Muse, to maintain the liberty of the country. A while after the peace made betwixt the Cantons, and the house of Austria, Vlrich duke of Wittenberg made a league for twelve years with the Commonweal of the Swisses: and the Emperor Maximilian renewed the hereditary alliance made before with duke Sigismond, wherein the house of Bourgondie was included in the year 1517, as followeth.   

¶ An Hereditary League made betwixt the Emperor Maximilian, and Charles Archduke of Austria, and the Swisses.  
WE Maximilian by the grace of God, Emperor of Romans, always August●s, king of Germany, Hungary, Dalmatia, and Croacia, Archduke of Austria, Bourgondie, Brabant, Count Palatine, etc. for us, that is to say, in our own proper name, and also as Protector, and in the name of the most famous Charles, Archduke of Austria, and duke of Bourgondie and Brabant, Prince of Spain, earl of Flanders and Tiroi, etc. of the one part, and we of the league of the Swisses, that is to say, of Zurich, Berne, Lucerne, Vry, Suitz, and Vnderuald, above and beneath Silue, Zugh with the officers without, Glaris, Basil, F●●bourg, with the Abbey and Town of Saint Galliard, and the country of Appensel on the other part, confess, publish, and do make manifest to every one by the tenor of these presents, That We Maximilian, elect Emperor of Romans, upon our bounty and special grace, and by duty, are ready (as it is fit) to govern all our subjects, and those that be of the sacred Empire, in peace, tranquility, and concord, especially out hereditary and faithful subjects, of what degree or condition soever they be, to increase their goods, and to fore▪ see that hereafter they receive no harm; having to that end graciously considered of the commodity of our noble houses of Austria and Bourgondie, being neighbours unto the said league of Swisses, and may much avail them, notwithstanding that it hath been courteously done by our uncle Sigismond of Austria, as having had a perpetual union by our dear brother Lewis the French king, for himself and the said Swisses, the said letters were given at Macklin the tenth of june, in the year 1474, and in form of an hereditary union.  
Of that which was made at Zurich the Monday before Saint Galliard in the year of our Lord God 1477, with accord, That the Swisses should be subject, and show themselves faithful, and full of love, and be good neighbours to the said Emperor of Romans, as it is fitting, and to the said houses of Austria and Bourgondie, and that for the honour of Almighty God.  
We Emperor Maximilian, as Archduke of Austria, by reason of the countries which are come unto us by the death of our said uncle Sigismond, and for the appurtenances thereof, as Protector of our dear and well-beloved Charles Prince of Spain, by reason of his county of Bourgondie, with good and mature counsel, true knowledge, and full deliberation have ordained the perpetual union of king Lewis, and the following hereditary unions one with another, as followeth.  
First, we the said parties, and in like manner all our heirs and successors, subjects, and countrymen, and all they that shall descend of us, may and aught for ever hereafter have part in the said union, with true defences and promises, and all other things that may Assist them, by every of our Principalities, Earldoms, Seigneuries, Towns, Countries, and limits, and they shall have right to buy, and to trust one another, without danger or prejudice of enterprises, and they shall be assured in their persons and goods, and they may also treat and deal in all places without any let, burden, or innovation of any of our ordinances in any sort whatsoever, and without any fraud or prejudice.  
In like manner, we the said Emperor, and Charles, ordain, That none of our successors or subjects shall do any thing in general or particular against the general league, nor shall do wrong to any of the consederats, whereby any war may grow.  
Also we of the common league of the Swisses ordain, That we, and our successors, as well those that are ours at this present, or shall hereafter any way belong unto us, both men, towns, and castles, with all our subjects, shall not do any wrong, nor commit any scandal whereby any war may grow with the gracious Emperor, and the Archduke Charles, their heirs, successors, and subjects, comprehended in this league, or others that shall be their adherents in general or particular.  
And to the end that this commendable conclusion and union betwixt us the said parties, and our successors, and subjects, may continued with greater intelligence, we have declared, That if it should happen within any short time, that We the Emperor in our countries comprehended in this union, and We Charles Archduke in our county of Bourgondie, should be assaulted, or our heirs and successors, That we the said Swisses shall have a faithful regard unto the Emperor and to his, to the end they may not be unjustly molested.  
And for a better peace and tranquility, we the said parties have specially consented That We the Emperor Maximilian, and Charles the Archduke, with our countries and subjects comprehended in this perpetual union, with all those that hereafter shall be united and belong unto them, shall not do any thing that may breed war, and we the said Swisses shall do the like.  
They that in general or particular, at this present or hereafter, shall have need of protection and defence, and which are, or shall be hereafter united, and belong unto us the Archduke of Austria, and to our principalities, towns, and jurisdictions comprehended in this league; or those which in the same form, at this present, or hereafter, in general or particular, are, or shall be, united, or belong to us Swisses, and which shall have any complaint, suit, action, or pretension, if the parties may with reason be reconciled, the plaintise may require his adverse party to come unto reason, and to that end the defendant shall present himself without any delay before the Bishops of Constance and Basil, present, and to come, unless the laws do otherwise ordain, and this business shall be ended within three months: after it is begun and if the party doth not appear nor obey, than their sentence shall be put in execution without any appeal, or request, unless he doth make it appear that he was hindered by some urgent and necessary let, or otherwise.  
The controversies for hereditary fees, immovable goods, violences, small debts, and such like, shallbe pleaded after the form following: these fees shallbe pleaded before the lord of the fee, and according to the right of inheritance: and other causes shall be tried in those places where the goods are, and where the violence hath been done, unless that he which had done the violence had retired himself out of the said jurisdiction, and meant to fly, than every man may seek further for justice against him that flies: other suits and controversies shall be pleaded before the ordinary judges of those places whereas the defenders devil, and whatsoever shall be adjudged reasonable in the said causes, shall be observed by all the parties without any delay, appeal, or request.  
And to the end that hereafter every man may be preserved from violence, it hath been concluded, That before they enter into law, according to the ordinance, that either party shall give security, that (losing his cause) he shall make satisfaction of the damage.  
The parties which shall pled, shall bind themselves by writing unto the judges which shall be chosen to end the suit, not to conceive any bad opinion: as it was concluded by the most Christian French king Lewis, in the perpetual Intelligence, and in the Hereditary union made by our uncle the Archduke Sigismond, where the eight Cantons of Zurich, Berne, Lucerne, Vry, Suitz, Vnderuald, Zugh, and Glaris, are comprehended.  
But we the said towns of Basil, Fribourg, Schaffeusen, with the said eight Cantons of the said league, and also we the Abbot, with the Abbey and Town of Saint Galliard, and the Country of Appentzel, with other Towns, Castles, Countries, and places are of late come with the said twelve Cantons, and the countries adjoining, etc. as before.  
And We the Emperor Maximilian, and Charles the Archduke etc. do accept into this perpetual union, as before, the said Cantons of Basil, Fribourg, Soleurre, and Schaffeusen, with the Abbey and Town of S. Galliard, like unto the other above named Cantons.  
And to the end that in the said place all discord may be taken away, it hath been concluded, That of all sides, all dishonest words and deeds shall cease, and whosoever shall infringe it, shall be condemned according to the manner of his speech, without any favour.  
In like manner, every ten year, either of the parties shall 'cause this present union to be read, the better to understand what must be observed.  
And also we the said parties have reserved in this union the holy See, and the sacred Empire, with all others to whom we are bound. We have also reserved, That the league, union, and intelligence, civil law, and right of parties, and this our hereditary union, declaration, renewing, with all benefits, shall, both in general and particular, by us the said parties, and by our heirs, successors, subjects, etc. be for ever hereafter inviolably observed without any fraud.  
And hereupon, by special grace, we have consented, We the Emperor for us, and as Protector to Charles the Archduke, for the increase of love, to give yearly unto every one of the said Cantons of Swisses two hundred florins of the Rhin, to be paid in the town of Zurich on the day of the holy cross in May; and to the Abbot of S. Galliard, and to the country of Appentzel, one hundred florins every year to either of them, until that the said Archduke Charles shall enter into possession of his hereditary Estates.  
And We the Emperor will, that the said Charles being come to the age of maturity, shall confirms this present union with an oath, etc.  
In witness of these presents, sealed with the seal of us the Emperor and the Archduke Charles, and the heirs and successors of us two, we bind ourselves inviolably to observe all the articles and points of the league, and to that end we have set our seals and sworn, etc.  
Given at Buda in Hongarie the seventh of February 1517, of our Empire the fifteenth, and of our reign of Hongarie the one and twentieth.  
The three Cantons of the Grisons entered into league first with the seven Cantons of Zurich, Lucerne, Vry, Suitz, Vnderuald, Zugh, and Glaris, upon the conditions above mentioned, and it was concluded in the year 1393. But afterwards there growing great controversies betwixt the said Grisons and the county of Tirol, in the year 1471, for their greater assurance they allied themselves again with all the Cantons of the Swisses, with the French king, and some other princes: and these Cantons do enjoy the valley of Voltolina in Italy.  
The Grisons were in former time called Rhetiens and Canines: for Bello Nesus having passed into Italy, with a great number of Gauls, about one hundred eighty seven years before the coming of Christ, he ceased upon a great part of Tuscanie and expelled the inhabitants, who under the conduct of Rhetus came to devil in the steep and craggy mountains of the Alpes, where are the two springs of Rhin and Tesin, building certain castles for their abode in the mountains and valleys, and called the country by the name of their Leader. In time they multiplied, and extended their limits unto the Lake of Constance; and in Italy, they enjoyed Como, Verona, and Trent.  
In the year of our Salvation 357, the Emperor Constantine before he would make war against the Germans, led his army into Rhetia, and stayed in the plain at the entering of the mountains about a mile from the Rhin; and this part took the name of Curia, of that stay: and the army being parted, they began to build a town, called in their language Chur, and by the Italians Coira. The Bishop of this town with his college, united themselves and made the first league for their defence against strangers, and this was in the year 1419: by their example the Abbot of Zizatis, the Earl of Mavan, and the Baron of Bezuns, made also league, and it is called Grise: and in the end all they that devil in the valley of Segovia allied themselves, and were called the ten jurisdictions, but afterwards they were all three united, and made one body.  
The Valaisiens entered into league with some of the Swisses in the year 1517. All this country of the Valaisiens hath for their Prince and Lord both for spiritual and temporal, the Bishop of Zion, by a grant from Charlemagne, and confirmed by other Emperors unto this day: and this bishop is chosen by the Chanoins of Zion, and by certain deputies of the seven Commonalties, to whom they do afterwards give a judge for civil causes, who is called Captain; and every two year at Christmas, the Bishop's deputies and the commonalties choose a new captain. In the year 1528 the league was renewed by the Bishop, the Chapter, and the seven commonalties of valois, with Vry, Suitz, Vnderuald, Lucerne, Zurich, Fribourg, and Soleurre: and in the year 1475 they had allied themselves with Berne.  
Besides the thirteen Cantons of the Swisses, the Grisons, and the Valaisiens, there was another league and perpetual alliance made by the Abbot and town of Saint Galliard with the Cantons of Zurich, Lucerne, Suitz, and Glaris, in the year 1454, notwithstanding that Saint Galliard is a feudatory to the Empire. This town is not far from the Lake of Constance, and is above the said town of Constance towards the Grisons in a rough valley: the Abbots of that place obtained many great privileges from Emperors and Kings, whereby they enlarged their jurisdictions, so as they affected the name of Princes, and were more given to arms, than to a monastic life, and they did often make war against their neighbours, especially against Appentzel, seeking to make them pay unreasonable charges; but they were often defeated during the space of seven years: since which, they made this league with the Swisses.  
Mulheuson is a country in Savoy near unto the river, not far from Basil, and it belongs unto the Empire, the which made a perpetual league with all the Cantons of the Swisses in the year 1515.  
Rotwil is seated upon the river of Necar in Suabe, it is a town well fortified, the country is people with a warlike nation, which were the remainders of the Cimbrians defeated by the Romans. This Rotwil is an Imperial town, the which being molested by Edward duke of Vittenbergh, was forced to make a league with the Swisses, the which was afterwards confirmed and sworn in the year 1519.  
Bade stands upon the river of Limante in Ergovia, upon a plain in the which there are an infinite number of hot baths, both public and private. There the confederate allies do celebrat their Diets: it was sometimes an Earldom, and came under the power of the Swisses, in the time of the Emperor Sigismond, and they ruined the castle.  
There hath been in our times certain wars betwixt these two confederates, by reason of religion: but they were afterwards reconciled, as may be seen by these accords under written.   

¶ The last peace made with them of Zurich, on Saint Octavians day, in the year 1531.  
WE Captains, Bannerals, Councillors of war and peace, and Commonalties of the five Cantons of Lucerne, Vry, Suitz, Vnderuald, and Zugh of the one part, and we of Zurich, Berne, Basil, and Schaffeuse on the other, all things laid aside, are come to a true and brotherly peace together etc. This peace contains certain articles of religion, and some that are private, etc.  
First that the five Cantons shall remain in the Romish religion, with their adherents,  
That they of Zurich etc. shall continued Protestant's.  
That they shall not contemn one another, by reason of their belief.  
That it shall be in force as the other leagues.  
That they shall set at liberty all prisoners taken in this present war, paying reasonably.  
That all controversies, growing betwixt us during this present war and before, shall be made voided.   

¶ The peace of Berne in the year 1537.  
THis peace was concluded by the mediation of the French king, there being a war betwixt the said five Cantons and the rest, by reason of religion, for that they followed the Romish Church: where it was concluded that every one should believe as he thought good: and first of all, that from the Protestants opinion they might turn Papists, or continued in the faith wherein they were.  
Brengard, Maligier, and Frimon, and either of them reserves his friends & adherents.  
They shall not contemn one another by reason of their bele●fe.  
Both parties shall return under the form of the sworn leagues.  
They of Berne shall pay unto the five Cantons five thousand crowns of the Sun, for the damages done to many churches.  
The prisoners shall first pay their charges.  
In regard of this present peace, all controversies growing before shall be abolished, and never more called in question.  
These are the treaties that were made among the people, where by the reader may be in a manner fully instructed after what manner they are governed.  
This people are divided into nineteen members, whereof there is one entire body made, and these members are the thirteen Cantons, the Grisons, the Valaisiens, S. Galliard, Mulhuson, and Rotwil. Whereupon we must observe, that all Common weals whereof there is any memory, have held three courses to enlarge their estates.  
The first was that which the Spartains and Athenians did observe, who after they had conquered any cities, made them presently subject, but being not able to undergo so great a burden, they ruined them: for it is hard to hold places subject, by force, which have been accustomed to be free; and this course is more unprofitable than any other.  
The other means was held before that the Roman Empire grew great, by the Tuscans, who had twelve towns, among the which were Fiezoli, Arezzo, and Volterra; and there was a league of many Commonweals, among the which there was no difference of authority, but they made those places which they conquered companions of their power.  
The third course was held by the Romans, who did associate unto them many Commonweals, which did live under the same law, yet the Romans reserved unto themselves the sole authority of command. This manner was held the best, as doth appear by the effects. After this, we may put that of the Tuscans with the which they held the Empire of Tuscaine, and a great part of Lombardy, and did continued long free, and in peace, until that a greater power suppressed theirs.  
Their manner is observed at this day by the Swisses, and their confederates, who make all one Commonweal divided into many, amongst the which there is no distinction of degrees, having expelled all their lords who had any jurisdiction in their estate, and there is not amongst them any other superiors, but such as are magistrates; all the rest are equal, notwithstanding that there are some which are much esteemed among the rest for their wisdom and judgement, and among them, they do also much esteem gentry, as they do at Argentine, whereas no man may be admitted to be a magistrate, or to have any dignity in the town, if he do not prove himself a gentleman by fource descents.  
But to speak something more than hath been said of their government, you shall understand, That they do choose out of every company an equal number of persons, when there is question to go to any public Council.  
There are two public Counsels in the town of Zurich, and Basil, which are of great authority, that is to say, the Great Council, when as many assemble in the name of all the people; and these do not meet but for the most important and weighty ●ffairess of the Commonweal: and the Lesser, which governs the Commonweal daily, and takes knowledge of the controversies of the Citizens. At Zurich the Great Council consists of two hundred, and at Basil of two hundred forty four: The Lesser Council of Zurich is of fifty men; and that of Basil of sixty four, for they put twelve of every Company to the Great Council: but at Zurich they choose eighteen from among the Nobles. They of Zurich give three men out of every Tribe for the Lesser Council, and they of Basil four. They add thereunto two Consuls, which are chief of the public Council in every town. Moreover, they have at Basil two Tribunes, whom they call Heads with the Consuls. Besides, at Zurich, the Company of Gentlemen sends six men to the Petty Council, whereas the other Company sand but three, and the other six are chosen out of what Company or Tribe it pleaieth the Magistrate. The Petty Council is divided into old and new.  
They call them the old Senate, which have left their office for the space of half a year: notwithstanding that these assemble when as they hold a Council, yet are they not always called, and there are some things done only by the new Senat. At Basil, the great Council is divided after the same manner, and the petty Council assembles commonly thrice, or four times a week. Every Senate hath for head a Consul, whom they call Bourgmaister, that is to say, Master of the Citizens, who is chosen by the great Council. They that have greatest authority next unto the Consuls, are the Tribune's, wh●● they of Zurich call Oberistemeister, and they of Basil Zunff●emeister. There are three at Zurich, and two at Basil. And thus much touching the government of these two towns.  
Let us return now to the general government. The Swisses Commonweal in general, is mixed of an Aristocratical and Popular government, for that among all these people, whereon the whole Commonweal of the Swisses is compounded, there are some whose government belongs merely to a Democraty, where in a manner all things are done by the people's Suffrages, as in those Cantons which have no towns, that is, Vry, Suitz, Vnderuald, Glaris, and Appentzel: and Zugh also, although it be a town. The rest are governed by Magistrates or chief men, as the towns of Zurich, Berne, Lucerne, Basil, Fribourg, Soleurre, and Schaffouze: but for that the sovereignty belongs unto the people, who choose these head Magistrates, these Commonweals consist of two sorts of government, whereof some are more Aristocratical, and some more democratical or popular. All these Cantons live in form of a Common weal, for that altogether make one body, and being divided they are members; yet every Canton hath a head taken out of the chief Town or Borough: For every one makes his private assembly, but when they treat of any thing of great importance, they hold a general Diet in one of the towns appointed by them, to the which two or three of the chief men of every Canton comes. In their consultations they agreed well, neither hath one town more authority than another. If it happen that war be made for all the Cantons, every one pays his part for the charges of this war, and that which is conquered is common to them all. But if two or three Cantons get any thing by arms, the conquest doth not belong to the rest, but to them only that have made it. And although it hath seemed in some actions that they should participate, yet could they not do it, for that the French king did adjudge (being required by them in the like difficulty) that a private conquest did belong to private men. And for this cause when as a Canton would make a private war, they levy men in their own jurisdiction. But if they be to raise an army (as for example the French king) of twenty five thousand foot, they strike up the drum, and all the Cantons sand what men they will, and then the Captains choosing 25000 out, or 35000, or 40000, they sand back the rest to their houses: and every Canton hath his Standard.  
This Commonweal of the Swisses, hath no common Magistrates, unless we shall put in this number, the Bailises and Governors which are sent forth here and there, not by the Council of the Commonweal, but by every Canton in particular. Their general Assembly or Council is not always equal in number, for that sometimes besides the Cantons, their other allies and confederates, especially the Ambassadors of Saint Galliard and Mulhouse, of the Grisons, & Valaisiens assemble; and than it is called the greatest Council, the which is not often held, but when as they treat of peace or war, or of other affairs which belong equally to all the confederates. And most commonly there are none but the Ambassadors of the thirteen Cantons which meet for the affairs of the Common weal (as hath been said) every one having a deliberative voice: and two or more Ambassadors being sent from one Canton, they have but one voice, for that their voices are gathered according to the Cantons, and not according to the number of Ambassadors and Deputies. Yet all the Cantons do not always sand their Ambassadors to all assemblies; as when there is question of bailiwickes, governed by the seven or eight first Cantons, or of other things which depend thereon; then only seven or eight Ambassadors meet, which give their voices. But touching the bailiwickes of Italy, belonging to the twelve first Cantons, their twelve Ambassadors assemble. There are at this time particular assemblies, by reason of the difference of religion; so as the five Cantons of Lucerne, Vry, Suitz, Vnderuald, and Zugh, which hold the Romish religion, assemble oftener than the other Cantons, and have as it were a Council a part: and for this cause when they speak of the five petty Cantons, they mean the abovenamed, and not the five first in league: as in their general Council of all the Cantons they take knowledge of laws and customs; yet every Canton hath his particular laws and customs, the which remain firm and inviolable. If they sand any Ambassadors out of the country to compound any controversies, to contract a league, to congratulat any prince, or to persuade or dissuade any thing, to demand any thing, or to denounce war, or if within the country they are to negotiate with any Canton or Town; the council determines what is to be done, whether it be sit to sand Ambassadors from all the Cantons, or from some of them. Whenas they are to contract any league or alliance, all the Cantons sand Ambassadors, but in many other affairs they name four or five Cantons which sand Ambassadors in the name of all the rest. This Council resolves of the answers which they are to make to the Ambassadors of Kings, Princes, and Commonweals: they have charge to provide for the Provinces belonging to the Cantons, that they may be duly governed: if there be any difficult suit in any of the Cantons, it is referred to the Council; but if the council of the bailiff seem unjust to either party, he may appeal to the Council of Suisserland. The Governors and Bailises are bound to give an account unto the Council, of the tolles, revenues, and fines. The annual revenues of Bailiwickes' are distributed by equal portions among the Cantons to whom the bailiwickes do belong. To conclude, the council takes knowledge of all that concemes the government of the Provinces belonging to the Cantons; they 'cause governors to give up their accounts; they give audience to any that will accuse them, and punish them if they have deserved, or depriving them, they sand unto the Canton which had given them the charge, to appoint others. The Canton of Zurich (which is the first in rank) hath power at all times to assemble the Council, & to demand advice of it: at this day their custom is to hold their general Council at Bade, but they are not tied unto it by any law or decree. The Catholic Cantons assemble often at Lucerne, sometimes at Beckenried in the territory of Vry, or ●t Brumen, which belongs to them of Zuits. Every year about the midst of june, they hold their general Council at Bade, whereas the bailiff and Governors of Provinces give an account of their charges before the Council, and they also attend to end the suits of Provinces: and at the same time the Ambassadors of the twelve first Cantons meet at Lugano, and make the four bailiffs of the Provinces of Italy give an account: then they judge of causes of appeal, so as they may appeal from them to the Council of Bade. The Council or Parliament assemble, either by an order from the Cantons, or to finish that which was left undone at the precedent Diet; for causes of importance are not always ended at the first assembly, either for that they do not seem unto the Senators and Councillors to be of merit, or for that they have not full power: wherefore by a common consent they appoint another day; and in the mean time the Ambassadors demand advice of the Signior of their Canton, to know how they shall govern themselves. And sometimes for a matter of consequence which doth suddenly happen, the Canton of Zurich, or some other, will appoint a Diet, if it be any matter which concerns the whole Commonweal.  
The day before that a Council or Parliament is appointed to be held, the Ambassador of the Canton of Zurich sends the Lieutenant of Bade into all the Inns to know what Ambassadors are come: and this Lieutenant salutes them, and receives them honourably in the name of the whole Commonweal, and the next day he calls them to come unto the townhouse. If the Ambassadors of all the Cantons become, they are called, and they treat of matters concerning all the Cantons in general. But if at the day appointed they of the new Cantons, as of Basil, Schaffuse, Soleurre, or of Fribourg be, not yet arrived, as it doth often happen, seven or eight of the first Cantons assemble, and treat only of that which concerns themselves. The Ambassadors being all set in council according to the order and number of the Cantons, he of Zurich hath the first place, who salutes all the rest: then having made a short speech and excuse, according to their custom, he declares what the Ambassadors had in charge at the last Diet to consult of at their next meeting, the which is most commonly called to that end; and if there be any thing happened since, he doth also propound it: after which he adds what his Masters had given him in charge to say touching the point which was then in question. The other Ambassadors do the like in their ranks, and deliver what their superiors had commanded them to say. All the Ambassadors having delivered their Commissions, and what they had in charge to say, the Governor or Bailise of Bade, of what Canton soever he be, demands the advice of every Councillor in order, touching that which hath been propounded; first of that of Zurich, and then of the rest in their ranks: having all spoken, the Bailise reckons their voices according to the number of the Cantons, and not by Councillors, for that one Canton doth sometimes sand two Ambassadors, who may assist in Council, and give their opinions, but they have but one voice, as hath been formerly said.  
They observe the like order in private causes, but they that have any causes to pled at such Diets, first demand audience of the Ambassador of Zurich, who appoints them a day, and enters their names into the Roll, and they appear before the Council, where they either pled their causes themselves, or by their Advocates, whom they b●ing with them, not according unto the civil law, or by the opinion of Lawyers, but with equity, and according to the laws and customs of the people: but the judges and Officers of every Canton judge of all controversies betwixt the subjects.  
Moreover there are judges of public suits, which are controversies which happen betwixt two or many Cantons, or of certain private men against one Canton, wherein the confederates are of the same condition with the Cantons: for the decision of which controversies, either of the parties doth choose two judges, who absolved of the oath which they own unto their Canton, promise' to judge according unto right and equity. The Cantons have several places of meeting, whether they sand their Ambassadors and Arbitrators to decide their controversies: when the voices of these judges are equal, they choose a fift judge or Arbitrator, whom they call Ein Obmann; this judge gives no sentence, but doth only approve one of those which the Arbritrators have pronounced.  
To speak something more particularly of the Commonweals of the thirteen Cantons, they may be referred unto three forms; for as there are three names of sovereign Magistrates among the Cantons, they have also so many forms of Commonweals, not only differing in name, but also in matter and substance. In some of the Cantons the chief of the Council are called Amans, as at Vry, Suitz, Vnderuald, Zugh, Glaris, & Appentzel, whereas the sovereignty belongs to the people. The Common weals of Berne Lucerne, Fribourg, and Saleurre are governed by a form of aristocraty: but the towns built by certain princes, or that have been subject unto them, are governed by the Auoyer, whom they call Schulthesz, who is the chief of the Council; the other towns of the Cantons are divided by certain companies, out of which, by their own election, are chosen the Lords of the Council, and the soveraign● Magistrate & head of this Council is by them called Bourgmaister; and after this manner the Commonweals of Zurich, Basil, and Schaffouse are governed, whereas they have (as I have said before) two public councils, which have the principal authority, and in every one of these towns there are two Consuls or Bourgmaisters who be the heads and Precedents of these councils.  
But omitting the manner of the election of these Councillors and Consuls, for brovities' sake, and of many other inferior offices, and courts of justice in the said towns: you shall understand, That in these Common weals, bastards are deprived of all honours and dignities, neither is it lawful for them to come to Council, nor unto their Courts of justice. He that hath not been a dweller ten years within the town of Zurich, cannot be chosen of the public Council. They that are borne out of Suisserland, cannot be of the petty Council at Schaffouse: but if they have been Bourgeffes twenty year, they may be admitted into the Great Council, and into the number of the judges. Their public estates and offices are of divers sorts, in these Commonweals, and more in number according as the towns are peopled. The highest degree next unto the Bourgmaisters and heads of Companies, are the Purse-bearers, and Treasures, having charge of the public treasure.  
The other Cantons, and Commonweals, are governed in like manner, by two several councils, but their electors are divers, and the heads of their councils have divers names, for in some they are called Auoyers, and in others Ammans.  
The Abbot, and Abbey of S. Galliard, holds the first place among the consederats of the thirteen Cantons: The Abbots of S. Galliard, have great revenues, and are princes of the empire: They are lords of the country of Turgow, and Wile, where they have a great territory well peopled, the which is divided into certain Chastelenies, and Provostships, whither the Abbot doth sand his Provost: He hath also his Ammans, and other officers, with two several councils, so as the form of government of Saint Galliard differs little from that of the Cantons.  
As for the Grisons, they govern themselves popularly in their several leagues, which be three, in every of which, they do yearly choose a sovereign magistrate whom many do call Amman, who, with the assessors, doth execute justice: There is a great Provost of all the first league, which is called Grise, he is chosen in the general assembly of all the Commonalties, and is Precedent at the meetings and judgements of all the league. The assemblies of this league, are held in the village of Trumb. The second league is called of the house of God, or of Cade: the town of Coire is the chief of this league and Commonalty, the which hath a Commonweal a part, in a manner like to that of Zurich, and others, governed after the same manner. Every Commonalty (whereof there be eleven) hath his Ammans, Podestats, and Ministraux (as they call them) with their laws and customs, under the which they maintain themselves in liberty. The third league is called the Ten jurisdictions. Taffaas is the first of the ten Commonalties, whereof eight do acknowledge the Archduke of Austria for sovereign, who appoints a governor there, yet he is chosen from among the Grisons unto this day: this governor is Precedent in criminal causes, and doth manage and maintain the Archdukes rights; yet every jurisdiction hath his particular privileges and customs. The ten jurisdictions allied themselves together, in the year 1436, upon condition that they should assist and aid one another in all things that were just and reasonable against their enemies, with other conditions: The year following, they made a perpetual alliance with the other two leagues; and so the three leagues were united as it were into one body. So there are three leagues of the Grisons which have fifty Commonalties, and make but one Commonweal.  
The Council of the leagues, is called the assemblies of the Ambassadors of every Commonalty of the Grisons; whither some Commonalties sand two Ambassadors, and others but one. If the Council be ordinary, the Grise league sends eight and twenty Ambassadors or Councillors; that of Cade three & twenty; and that of the jurisdictions fourteen. The Council general of the whole nation doth sometimes assemble, but it is seldom. The Council of the Grisons is almost like unto that of the Swisses.  
The country of Valais is divided into high and low: High Valais hath seven jurisdictions or Commonalties, which have thirty parishes: Base Valais hath six Commonalties, and four and twenty Parishes: The higher commands the lower, and sends them governors to judge of causes, and to manage affairs of State. The Bishop of Zion, called Earl and Governor of Valais, is (as I have formerly noted) Prince of the country; he is chosen by suffrages of the Chapter of Zion, and of the seven Commonalties of high Valais: The next dignity unto the Bishop, is the Captain or Bailiff of the the whole country, whose charge continues two years, and he doth judge of civil causes; he is chosen by the Bishop, and the Ambassadors of the Commonalties. Every Commonalty hath his magistrate, which some call Mayor, other Chastelain: He doth judge of all suits, yea and of crimes, with some Councillors of the Commonalty: They have Ammans also, which are sovereign Magistrates in certain Cantons of the Swisses; but they of Valais are inferior judges to the Majors.  
There are other Commonweals and people governed in common by the Cantons of Swisses, whose chief officers are chosen by the general Council at Bade, or by those Cantons to whom they do particularly belong, and their government is like unto that of the Swisses.   

¶ The Religion.  
OF the thirteen Cantons there are some which are wholly Catholics, others are mixed, and some are altogether Protestants. The Catholics are Suitz, Vry, Vnderuald, Lucerne, and Zugh, which join one unto another; Fribourg, and Soleurre, are divided from the five, and among themselves, for Soleurre is for the most part Catholic, and Fribourg Protestant, and so are Zurich, Berne, Basil, and Schaffuse; the mixed are Glaris, and Appentzel: these two being betwixt the Catholic and Protestant Cantons, participate of both their qualities. It is true that the chief of Appentzel, and the greatest part of the people are Catholics. The first Canton which received the Protestants religion, was that of Zurich: they say it grew by reason of a certain discontentment, for want of pay, which the inhabitants pretended to be due unto them, from Pope julius the second: Whereunto they were incited by Zuinglius, so as in the year of our Lord 1526, they did abolish the Mass throughout all the country, and did bring in the Communion. And this profession of the Gospel extended itself to the Cantons of Fribourg and Basil, so as on the six and twentieth of januarie, in the year of our Redemption 1528 at Berne, after a long disputation before the Senate, they overthrew their Images, and rooted out the Mass.  
As for the Grisons, they of the league called Grise, are for the most part Catholics, and the rest in a manner all Protestants, which follow Zuinglius doctrine: yet they say the Romish service at Chur, and at Fustemberg, whereas the Bishop is bound to remain half the year, and at Roffun, a fee belonging to the Archdukes of Austria. In the valley of Agnadine, and in the Pregalia, which belongs unto the league of the House of God, and in many places of the eight countries, there are villages wherea● there hath not been any Mass said for many years. Posclave, a place of the league of the House of God, is divided into Protestants and Papists; but the one have a minister continually, whereas the Papist have had no Priest for some years. It is lawful for every one among the Grisons to live as he shall think good, and to follow what religion he please, yet many times the Protestants insult over the Papists, for, notwithstanding that they are served by Ministers of any nation, yet will they not suffer the Papist to have any Priest that are strangers, and they of the country, that do their duties, are subject to outrages.      

The Estates of the Duke of Savoy.  

❧ THE ESTATES OF THE DUKE OF SAVOY.  

The Contents.  
1COnfines and limits of the Duke of Savoys country, divided into two Estates, Piedmont and Savoy. 2. Description of the duchy of Savoy in particular, with the Earldoms and Baronies. 3. Description of Piedmont, and the chief towns. 4. Of Turin, the chief town of Piedmont, famous for the abode of the Dukes of Savoy, the university for all sciencies, and a stately park newly made. 5. Of the Marquisat of Saluzes, and the most important places. 6. Of the chief places of Piedmont which are walled in, besides Episcopal towns. 7. Of the Marquisat of Cheve. 8. Of the county of Nizzes, divided into four vicarships, or vicegerents, with the towns and places. 9 Fertility of the towns of Savoy and Piedmont, with their lakes and chief rivers. 10. Quarries of marble newly discovered. 11. The humour and disposition of the Savoyards and Piedmontois. 12. Riches of Piedmont in mines of gold and silver, in traffic of iron, cattle and cloth of Pignerolle. 13. A computation of the revenues of the Duke of Savoy. 14. Of the Duke of Savotes forces, his forts and places of defence, his alliances and confederations. 15. The pretensions of the Duke of Savoy to other Estates. 16. The government of the duchy of Savoy: of the Senate of Savoy, and of that of Piedmont. 17. A catalogue of the Dukes of Savoy, which have ruled unto this day.   

ALl the countries which are under the power of the Duke of Savoy, being taken together, confines upon the East with the Estate of Milan and Montferrat, upon the West with Bresse and the Franche county, and towards the South with Provence, Dauphine, & lower with the territory of Genoa and the county of Nizzes, which is watered by the Mediterranean sea: finally, they confine upon the North with the Cantons of Swisses, of Berne, and Fribourg. But to the end I may be understood more plainly, I will divide all into two parts, therein following nature, for that the mountains have divided this Estate into Savoy and Piedmont.  
The duchy of Savoy hath for bounds upon the West, the two rivers of Rhin and Rhosne; and towards the North, from the lands of the Swisses jurisdiction, and Mont jura, to the river of Genoa, and the river of Var which divides France from Italy: on the otherside the country of Savoy confines with the new Lands which were given to the French king in exchange for the Marquisat of Saluzes, and goes unto Lozanne, and other places which are upon the lake Leman, the which were sometimes under the duke of Savoys jurisdiction.  
They do accounted the Earldom and country of Maurienne, with the Marquisat of Suse, for parts of Savoie. The county of Maurienne extends unto the river of Arch, where stands the town of Saint john of Maurienne, where lies interred Humbert the first, who received the county of Maurienne, & the duchy of Savoy, from the Emperor Henry the third. The country of Tarantaise lies environed by the Alpes, and the rivers of Arch and Are, which mingles itself with Arch near unto Chamois: the chief town ●f this country is Moustier in Tarantaise, where lies buried Humbert the second Earl of Maurienne, who added Tarantaise to his lands. There is moreour the signory of ●ossigny (in the which Ripaille stands) a very very pleasing place, and very famous, f●r that Amedee the eight, the first duke of Savoy, having given over his Estates, made profession of a Monastic life, and being there, was chosen Pope by the Clergy, being assembled at the Council of Basil, in the year 1440. There is also the duchy of Chablais, and the baronies of Raud & Gaz. The chief town of Savoy is Chambary, which stands among the mountains, and is reasonably well built: the others are Nizze, Saint john of Maurienne, Moustier, Tonon, Montmelian, and some others.  
Piedmont, not comprehending the country of Nizzes, intends itself from the river of Cesia unto Dauphine, betwixt the Alpss, Montferrat, and the Estates of Milan and Genoa: it hath for bounds upon the East the river of Po, upon the South the mountains of Genoa, upon the West the Alpes towards Gaul, and upon the North the river of Doria: some give it for limits toward the East the river of Cesia, upon the West the mountains of tend and Corre, on the South the Marquisat of Montferrat, and towards the North the French Alpes. The chief town of Piedmond is Turin, the other towns are Vercel, Astella, juree, Host, Mondevi, Fossan, Saluzze, and Carmagnole; whereof Astella, and juree were Colonies of the Romans as well as Turin. Astella & Vercel are of great circuit, & reasonably well built, especially Astella, which may be compared to the most stately towns of Lombardy for the greatness of her Palaces. Vercel a most ancient town is the chief of the Lybicke people, which are betwixt the rivers of Cesia and Doria: there it was whereas Leo the ninth did celibrat a general Council against Berengarius. juree (which writers at this day call Lamporeggio, and which the Ancients have named Eporedia) is the chief town of the Salassiens, at this day called Canavois: it is at the entry of the valley of Ost, upon the river of Doria, in so commodious a situation, as Berengarius, and after him Ardovin, who were Marquises, had the courage to aspire to make themselves kings of Italy. Host (built by Augustus) is at the mouth of the Alpes which were called Greeke, and Penine, and at this day the great and lesser Mont Saint Bernard: by the greater, they pass into the country of Valais, and by the lesser into Tarantaise: this town is the chief of a valley which hath taken her name of it. There are at this day many goodly antiquities to be seen, and amongst others a very fair Bow.  
Turin is at this day very famous for the residence of the Dukes of Savoy, & for the university which is there: it was in former times bigger than it is now, but the French holding it, cut off some part, that they might make it more strong: it is situated near unto the river of Po, in a very important place for Italy; by reason whereof the Romans brought a Colony thither, and Augustus did honour it with the Gate, which they call at this day, the Gate of the Palace: and the Lombard's did establish the seat of one of their four dukes there. The duke of Savoy hath caused a park to be made there, the which is five or six miles in circuit, and it is in one of the most pleasing situations in Europe. This park is environed by the rivers of Po, Doria, and Stir: it is full of woods, little lakes, fountains, and all sorts of game, which the duke hath drawn thither: and round about Turin, there are so many villages and houses of pleasure, as they seem to be another Turin. Mondevi (which some think was built by the Emperor Conrade) is seated upon a little hill, with great suburbs round about it: but the greatest are at the foot of the said hill upon the river of Elle, the which (two miles off) falls into that of Tanare: it is better peopled than any other town of Piedmont. Among the rest of the suburbs, there is that of Viq, from whence a new devotion which they have to our Lady hath taken the name, to the which the duke of Savoy hath built a Church, and in it a Chapel, whereas he hath ordained that the dukes of Savoy shall be interred. Fossan is seated upon a little hill upon the river of Stir, in the midst of a field: among the other buildings there is a castle reasonably pleasant.  
The town of Saluzze stands near unto the Alpes, and is the chief of the Marquisat, which is called by the same name, whereas the river of Po hath her spring: this town is reasonably big, it hath a great castle, where there are places to lodge in Winter, and others to remain in Summer. The most important places of this Marquisat, are Dronere, and Carmagnole. There is also Ravel, and Doglian, by the which most of the traffic doth pass which is made betwixt Piedmont and the river of Genoa: then Verzol, Mante, and Pagny, with the rich Abbey of Staffarde. This Marquisat, with some lands of Provence, which lie on that side of the Alpes, were united unto Piedmont in the year● of our Redemption 1600, and the duke of Savoy gave in exchange to the French king, to whom it did belong, the county of Bresse, with other lands thereabouts, the which is of greater extent than the Marquisat of Saluzzes.  
But in Piedmont, besides the Cities or Episcopal towns, there are about two hundred and fifty places walled, whereof there are many which yield nothing to many towns which are held good, as Biele, Quires, Cune, Suse, Auiglane, Rivole, Pinarol, Moncalier, Carignan, Raconis, Queyras, Bené, Villefranche, Vigon, Pancalier, Busque, Bargé, javenne, Savillan, and Cheve. Biele, and Pinarol, are in a manner after the same form, divided into hill and plain: But the town of Biele hath a great circuit, and fair buildings, among the which they do much esteem the convents of Saint Jerome, S. Dominic, and Saint Sebastian. At Pinarol there is a castle. Quires was honoured by Frederic Barbarousse with the title of Great Town: and so it is in deed, for the goodly Churches, fair convents, and Houses, and for many noble Families, and rich Merchants which remain there. Cuni is situated betwixt the rivers of Stir and guess. Suse was in former times a big town, and of great importance; but since that it was sacked and burnt by the Emperor Frederic Barbarousse, it could never come to that greatness: yet it stands in a very important situation, for that there are two ways which part, and go by the Alpes, the one tends by Essilles to Bria●çon, and the other by Mont Senis to Lyon. Auiglane is a good town, rich, and of traffic; it hath a castle seated high upon a little mountain, where there is a spring of running water. Rivolee vaunts of the birth of the duke of Savoy that now lives, who makes a stately building there. Moncalier is a reasonable big town; and Carignan is famous for the castle, and for the long siege which they did once endure: There are many noble families in it, who, among other things, have founded a Monastery of Nuns, the which must be all gentlewomen. Queyras is pleasing for the streets, which are both straight and large: and Bené is strong of situation. They do esteem Raconis for the Palace, and the Fish ponds: and Busque, for the title of one of the seven Marquisats of the descendants of Aleran. Savillan is famous for the beauty of the Marketplace, and of the Monastery of Saint Benet, but the situation is such, as the Emperor Charles the fist, passing that way in his voyáge to Provence, said, That he had never seen any country more ●it to entertain an army: And duke Philibert Emanuel found this place so much to his liking, as he had a desire to settle his abode there, and to make Savillan the head town of the province.  
Cheve is the chief town of a goodly Marquisat, which contains six and twenty places: It embraceth (among other things) the river of Tanare, upon the which stands the said town of Cheve, and Binasque, Garesse, and Ormee, ●il●●ene miles from the which the said river springs out of a great fountain. They pass out of the estate of Cheve into that of Mare, and Oneille. After which they found Mulazan, a place of passage, and having past the Pox, they come into Quiuse, a country fit for a Summer's dwelling; then the Trinity, and Montee; then Grain, the chief of a valley; and after that Chental, sometimes fortified by the Marshal of Bellegarde. Polenze, where stood the ancient Polence, Genole, Carai, and betwixt More and Veraité, Cavalemor, Casalgrasso, Cavallion, Castagnol, and Russie: then betwixt the rivers of Gilbe and Po, Morete, a see of importance, Scarnafis, L●gnasque, Irasque, Villar. Betwixt Po and Pele, Tardey, Staffarde, Caver, Garsillane, Villar de Bobbi. A little on the side stands Lucerne, the chief town of a county, and of a great valley, which contains above twenty thousand souls, beyond the which is peruse, with her valley. Afterwhich, betwixt the river of Pele and Quisole, stand Scalengue, Cercenase, Vir●é, Piobes, and Vinovo, with a very stately Palace belonging to the lords of Rou●re, Lombrias●, Cumiane, Piozas●, Orbazan: and betwixt the rivers of Sangon and Dore, Arpignan, Colegne, and Monesterol. Then come they to the valley of Stoure, and then to Lanz, with her little valley, and lower is the pleasant country of Chirié. Afterwards they enter into the valley of Pont, in the which stand Cornié, and Valpergue. Somewhat lower, they discover the rich Abbey of Saint Benign. There are many castles betwixt Orque, and Quiusele; and in the end is the strong place of Chivas: then (having past the river of Door) they come to Baucie, Masin County, Cilian, Creschentin a very pleasant castle, Stropian, Saint German, Sancie, famous for the unfortunate siege of the duke of Alba; and a little above it Candle, a place containing about seven hundred families: Andarne, of above one thousand three hundred households; and so is Dioglie: Mos is of seven hundred fires; and Gattinare, a town built by the Lords of the house of Arbore, who afterwards took the surname, and have been masters thereof for some ages. During the wars which were betwixt the Emperor Frederic, and the Popes, these Lords retired themselves from the subjection of the Empire, and lived after that manner, till (fearing the ambition and power of the dukes of Milan) they cast themselves into the arms of Amés the first, duke of Savoy. Beyond the river of Po, they discover Brabant, in the which are above seven hundred Families, Caramagne, Somerive, Cerisoles, famous for the defeat of the Marquis of Guast by the duke of Anguien. Then may you see Villastellon, Poerin, Villeneufue, a strong place, Canuelle, and Cortemille, divided into two parts by the river of Bormie. After which there are to be seen an infinite number of castles belonging to the county of Astella; and above it Coconas a county, which hath of late years been made subject to the house of Savoy, by the means of duke Charles.  
The county of Nizzes is two and twenty leagues long, and eleven broad, betwixt the river of Var (beyond the which notwithstanding, there are some places belonging to this county) Dauphiné, Piedmont, and the river of Genoa. This county is divided into four Vicarships or Vicegerents, whereof the chief towns are Nizze, Poget, Barcelonette, and Sospelle, to the which we may add Saint Stephens with her valley, although it bear not the name of Vicegerent, yet it is governed apart. And in these Vicegerencies, they do reckon above thirty walled towns, besides many others which are not. The most famous of these places is Villefranche, for the commodity of the Port, called by the Ancients, Port Hercules Monaca. Next is Ease, and farther off, Zobia, the place whereas the Emperor Pertinax was borne, and where are yet to be seen the Trophies of the Emperor Augustus. The other places most remarkable of this county, are Contes, Peille, Saourge, which hath a strong castle, Brique, which contains about four or five hundred Families, Lantusque, a reasonable good place, and the chief of a valley, as S. Dalmace is of the plain; Boglie, the chief Town of a rich County: Poget confines with Provence: Barcelonette the country of Cardinal Hugues, the chief of a valley, and a place of good traffic: Sospelle is a goodly place, well built, where, among other things, there is a fountain of delicate water, which they have brought from the neighbour mountains. But to speak something in particular of Nizzes, it is a fair town, strong, and well peopled; the houses are five and six stories high, and the streets very straight, especially that which goes from the foot of the mountain, unto the Ports of S. Aloy. The county of tend joins to that of Nizzes, and this county extends to the confines of Cune. They may pass four ways out of Provence into the County of Nizzes, by the mountain of Corue which leads to Tend, by that of Fencstre to Saint Martin, by that of Arnonne upon Vaudere, and by Argenti●re, which goes to Barcelonette.  

¶ The Quality.  
SAuoy hath great store of corn in the valleys, and much pasture in the mountains: and in some places it bears very good wine, as at Montmelian, and Morienne. There are also some lakes that abound with fish: but the most famous are they of Nicy, Bourget, and Geneva. It contains many great mountains, so as he that will travel through this country, shall daily discover new things, for that sometimes he shall see the passages open, and grow large, and sometime the mountains grow narrow, sometimes they are high, sometimes low, sometimes they advance themselves, and then they retire against, sometimes they lead thee into a plain, and by and by they shut thee up into a valley: It hath nothing in it that is particular or remarckable. The air is reasonable wholesome: but there are certain waters which make their throats to swell that drink of them, and this swelling is called by them of the country, Goytre, that is to say, a great throat.  
As for Piedmont, it is watered by the rivers of Po, Tanare, Stoure, Door, and about 28 other rivers great & small, & with divers channels, whereof there are 8 in the territory of Cune. They hold that there is no part of Italy more pleasing, more abounding in corn, wine, first-fruits, venison, cattle, cheese, chestnuts, hemp, flax, & minerals. The country about Astella is watered by rivers, shadowed by woods, raised by pleasing hills: it hath goodly plains, & brings forth store of excellent first-fruits, especially melons, which are the best that can be eaten. At Vercel, they eat the whitest bread, and the fattest capons that can be seen. Pliny makes mention of some mines of gold in the country about Vercel, whereof there are some marks yet to be seen towards Ponderan. Near to Lamporeggio is great store of hemp. The valley of Ost is of two days journey, on the left hand it is full of corn, and on the right planted with excellent vines, whereof the best are those of Calogne. A quarter of a mile from Turin on the banks of Po is a mountain which doth rise & fall, advance and retire in divers places so fitly, as it hath water in all places: it bears hay, first-fruits of all sorts, and very good wine. The territory about Mondevi is of a great circuit: there grows excellent wine on the side of the hill, great store of grain in the plain, and an infinite number of chestnuts on the mountain.  
They have discovered goodly quarries of marble, & among others one of white marble, with little veins which are like to metal. The country about Fossan abounds in wheat, whereof the harvest doth yearly amount to about 50000 charges or horseload; and for that it is overflowed by the means of great waters, it abounds in good pastures, and so by consequence in flesh. The marquisat of Salusses hath a very temperate air, by reason whereof, they have in their orchards all kinds of first-fruits. Doglian and Pagny bear good wines. About Pignerol there are such goodly vines, as whosoever sees them, may think that they are able to furnish others with wine. Near unto Cune there are so many channels of water, as the territory is made exceeding fertile, although it be light, and stony by nature: it abounds in chestnut trees, among which they sow wheat, so as the inhabitants gather from one place two nourishments for life: neither doth this country want vines or meadows. The country about Suise yields store of wine, Auiglane hath a soil distinguished into little hills, valley, plains, & into two lakes. Rivoli may vaunt to have a good air, & a pleasant soil. Montcalier is famous for the exceliencieof her wines, and so is Revillasq which is near unto it, and the places of Gaz, Saint Mor, and Saint Rafael. Bené enjoyeth a very wholesome and temperate air. The soils of Vigon, P●nc●li●r and Villefranche are exceeding fat. The Marquisat of Cheve abounds in chest●●●ss and 〈◊〉, a●d in some places they make much wine, especially at Prior, where they are very good. T●e valleys of Marre, and Oneille, are so well manured as they seem gardens, and there is such store of fruit, & especially so good oil, as the bounty cannot be spoken, and the quantity is so great as Piedmont hath not any need of oil from strangers. They have excellent wines at Gatanare.  
In regard of the county of Nizzes, although the country be for the ●ost part rough and full of mountains, yet it is so well manured, as they have not any need of their neighbours, except Nizze which wants wheat: there run through the mountains of this country about twelve rivers, which abound with trout. The country near unto Contes yields great store of oil, and abundance of chestnuts: and that about Peille abounds in wine, corn, and oil, the which is much esteemed for the bounty. Saourge, hath the like qualities. Brique yields abundance of white wine, corn, and excellent honey: there they found also great store of partridges, and pheasants: they do also gather much ●●nna, turpentine, agarie, and excellent simples: there runs a river through that valley called Levence, which comes out of a fountain, the which in a short space grows great, then diminisheth, and in the end is quite lost. The soil about Boglie yields much co●ne and pulses, but it wants wine and oil; yet about Sospelle there is wine, corn, olives, cattle, and chestnuts. But Nizze which abounds in other things, hath neither come nor flesh for half the year; by reason whereof they provide wheat from Provence, and flesh from Piedmont.   

¶ The Manners.  
ALthough it seems that the Savoyards should savour of the manners of them of Dauphine, or of the Piedmontois their neighbours, and that the inhabitants of Piedmont should be reserved for a general description of the manners of Italy, yet it shall not be unfit to speak something of the one and the other. The Savoyards are naturally so simple and dull, that although they lose it by their conversation with other Natitions, yet they retain something in their language and outward show, and there is such difference betwixt the Dauphinois and the Savoyards, as is easy to distinguish them at the first sight. Most of the common people believe that the Duke of Savoy is the first prince of the world, and there are not any people so gross and rude in all things; and their simplicity was very great before the last wars: but without doubt the gentlemen are of a pleasing conversation, as civil as their neighbours, and affecting all virtue and good exercise; so as there may be seen daily in Chambery as much good company, and as well appointed, as in many of the best towns in France. The people are not warlike, and few of another nation are able to make a great number of them fly. As for the gentlemen, they want no courage, but many of them want dexterity to fight on horseback.  
The Piedmontois are good soldiers, and apt to learning, open, round, and free, civil enough, and courteous to strangers. They of Vercel make profession of nobility and greatness, and desire to be esteemed of their neighbours. The inhabitants of Turin have few words, they are high minded, sudden, and make procession of nobility: there reigns yet amongst them the factions of the Guelses and Gibellins, which are extinct in all the rest of the province. They of Biele are subtle headed, active, and careful in their affairs, neither will they be easily deceived in their contracts. The inhabitants of Quires and Cune are very industrious and valiant, whereof they have made prose in three great sieges. Bené hath inhabitants fit for arms and learning. Barge is famous for the great number of mills and shops whereas they make great store of arms, the which the inhabitants can use upon any occasion. The people of Nizzes are cunning, civil, and neat, and fit as well for traffic as arms. Finally, touching the general, there are many goodsouldiers among the people, and few which give themselves to mechanic arts, the which they little esteem, contenting themselves with food and clothing, and imitating therein the gentlemen, using no trade of merchandise, notwithstanding the commodity which the river of Po doth offer them, to traffic with them of the duchy of Milan, and with the Venetians: but they do not much regard it, suffering strangers to get great wealth by linen cloth, hemp, wool, and silk; so as we may say, that whatsoever the merchant's gain, they receive it in gift from the Piedmontois, who might get it if they would; but they have no other thing in recommendation, but to live well, and make good cheer: yea the handicrafts men are accustomed to far well, so as they use to consume all they get in good cheer▪ The duke is much discontented to see them so careless, and offers them means to trade in merchandise, and to gain, causing channels to be made, and using all art to quicken them. The Piedmontois want industry, but they recompense this defect by their obedience to their prince, and their manner of living simply, and without reproach: for they are mild & courteous, partly by a natural instinct, and partly also for fear of justice, so as they live lovingly together, and there are few murders committed.   

¶ The Riches.  
SAuoy makes little money of any thing they sand to foreign countries: but Piedmont hath many commodities, wherewith it doth furnish others; so as they may thereby reap a great yearly revenue: it did well appear how much the country did abound in all things, during the wars betwixt France and Spain; for that the armies continued there for the space of three and twenty years, with great garrisons of either side, and yet they never had any want of victuals: and the riches of Piedmont is well known, in that it did contribute to the duke of Savoy during the last wars of France (in the heat whereof Monsieur Lesdeguieres drew the war into Piedmont) eleven millions of crowns extraordinary, in few years, besides the lodging of soldiers. They sand forth corn, cattle, much hemp, store of rice, cheese, wine, paper, fustian, and raw silks. It contains about fifty Earldoms, and fifteen Marquisats, with a great number of other Lordships which do not yield to the best, besides twenty rich Abbeys, with many good Benefices. There is not any exceedingly rich, for that the wealth is distributed in such fort, as every man in a manner hath a share: yet there are gentlemen of four, six, eight, twelve, and fifteen thousand crowns a year rend. And that which shows their wealth is, that the country is generally so inhabited, as a Knight of Piedmont being asked by a Venetian gentleman, what Piedmont was, he answered fitly, That it was a Town which had three hundred miles in circuit. There is in the valley of Ost, mines of gold and silver. They of Salusses make traffic of iron and cattle with them of Provence, and there are very rich Merchants in this Marquisat. They do also carry cloth from Pignerol, which is very good. They of Barge and javenne make great traffic of Arms which they make: and they of javenne do also make much money of their hides and linen cloth. At Mos they also make much cloth which they transport into foreign Countries. The County of Nizzes sends forth oil, wine, first-fruits of all sorts, pulses, linen cloth, store of thread which they cell to the Cattelans, paper, course cloth of many kinds, saltfish, some little honey which is excellent, Fir Trees for the Masts of Ships and Galleys, the which they conduct by the valley unto the Sea, and they are sometimes sold to the Genevois for one hundred crowns a piece. And to be short, this Country makes such use of traffic, as betwixt Genoa, and Marseille, there is not any town that trade's more, nor that hath more money; and it is as it were the Storehouse of all the woollen cloth which comes from Languedoc, and of the silk which they bring from Genoa. But to speak truth, the country is naturally poor, and sometimes they found not all things necessary for money: so as when the duke of Savoys Court continues there but two months, they are driven to great want; but for that the men of that Country have active spirits, they get great wealth by traffic. Some have calculated the revenues of the Duke of Savoy, the which they accounted after this manner.  
The custom of salt, fifty thousand crowns yearly.  
The toll of Suse, twenty four thousand crowns by the year.  
The foreign Imposition, eighteen thousand crowns yearly.  
The other customs comprehending the toll of Villefranche, five and twenty thousand crowns by the year.  
The ancient Ordinary, with the bailiwick, seventy thousand crowns yearly.  
The ordinary taxes in Piedmont, with the change of salt beyond the Mountains, reduced to an ordinary and perpetual toll, two hundred sixty three thousand crowns by the year.  
Consiscations of goods, condemnations, increase of tolls, composition of Mortmains, which are men that cannot dispose of their estates, unless they compound with the Prince; the tribute of jews and such like, fifty thousand crowns. So as they have made the Duke of Savoys revenues to be but five hundred thousand crowns a year. But it appears plainly by the eleven millions of extraordinary, which he hath drawn in few years out of his Country of Piedmont, and by the sums which he drawn out of Savoy, that his revenue is above a million of crowns a year, and that he is a prince which will not want money, when he shall desire to have a good sum from his subjects, and yet they shall not be overcharged.   

¶ The Forces.  
THere are in Savoy some places of strength, whereof the chief is Montmelian, whose castle hath been always held impregnable, until that of late years Henry the Great, the French king, took it. It was somewhat commanded, so as they might easily discover them that were within the place: And the Governor was much amazed, hearing himself to be saluted early in the morning with the cannon, from that place whither they had carried it with great diligence. Some say that the duke of Savoy hath caused that place of command to be cut away, and that this castle is not now subject to any command. It is wonderful strong, and of importance, being near the Frontier. There is also the places of Constans, Charbonnires, and the Annonciado, near unto Romilly: but all these sorts are of small import. That of Saint Katherine was good, but it was ruined in the year of our Lord 1600.  
As for Piedmont, there is a Citadel which hath five Bastions, it is so fair and great as you shall hardly found any one to equal it. And omitting the great number of instruments of war that are in it, it shall be fit to speak something of an admirable well or pit which is in the midst of it, whereas five hundred horses, yea a thousand or more may go and drink together, without any hindrance one unto another, either in going down or coming up. The duke doth commonly entertain for the guard of this Citadel three hundred soldiers, or more, well paid. Besides this garrison, he hath fifty soldiers at Canas, one hundred at Cune, at Villefranche forty, and in many other places which are not immediately frontier towns, as at Quires, Fossan, Bentes, Villefranche of Piedmont, and at Suerne in the valley of Angrogne. He also entertains some soldiers at Cahors and Suse, for that the power of his neighbours requires it. Iures or Lamporeggio hath a castle flanked with four good Towers, and is set in one of the best situations that can be desired. The valley of Ost is so strong, by reason of the narrow entries and the uneasy passages, and for the multitude of people that inhabit there, as what stranger soever hath made himself master of the neighbour country, durst never attempt it. Salusse hath a good Castle; but Carmagnole is in a manner impregnable, where there is great store of cannon, munition, and victuals. Pignerol hath a castle of importance, which doth command all the neighbour valleys. Auiglane hath a castle which in former times, under Duke Charles, endured a long battery. Briquiras stands in one of the best situations that can be seen, but it is not fortified, as it were fit. Centalis reasonably well fortified: and Civas is a place which they hold among the best. There are garrisons also at Baid and at Monquiet, two places which are reasonably strong and good.  
As for the County of Nizzes, the roughness of the Country is the cause that there are many places exceeding strong, and many passages so narrow as ten men may make head against ten thousand, as is that which they call the Pace of the Virgin. They have added to this natural strength, that of certain Castles, which may be held impregnable, by reason of the places where they stand, among the which is that of Saourge. Poget, which is upon the frontier of Provence, is a reasonable good place, whereas the Duke of Savoy entertains a Garrison. Villefranche stands below, and is not very big; but the Fort may be held impregnable, for that it is cut out of the rock, and all that is required in fortification hath been very curiously observed; there are commonly one hundred soldiers at the lest in pay, which be strangers. As for the Town of Nizzes, we may say that it is no Fort, but an assembly of Forts. First the Town is enclosed with a good and strong wall, flanked with good Bastians'. There is a Mountain in form of a Cavalier, the which is about the third part of a mile in circuit, and is very steep of every side. In old time the noblest part of the Town was there, with the Cathedral Church, the Bishop's Palace, a Monastery of Virgins, and a little Fort, which they call at this day the Donjon. They say that Charles of Bourbon passing out of Italy into Spain, and having well observed this place, used these words to them that were about him, Behold a situation, whereof they know not the importance. The Patron of the galley in which he was, dwelling at Nizzes, observed his words, and informed duke Charles; who having more carefully considered of the situation, ordained, that it should be fortified, and made it so defensible in few years as it endured the assaults of Barbarousse, in the year 1543, who presented himself before it with near two hundred sail, and battered it furiously. If this fort could not then be taken, being unfinished, what shall it be at this present being so fortified, that having well balanced the natural situation, and that which hath been added by art, together with the country wherein it is situated, betwixt Italy and France, one hundred and twenty miles from Genoa, and one hundred and thirty from Marseille; they may rightly say, that it is rather the first, than the second place of Italy, and as it were her bulwark. Among other things, there is a Well, which Mucedorus of justinopolis, who remained sometime at Nizzes, had been accustomed to number among the miracles of the world, the which they made after this manner. They imagining that there would want nothing for a fort of so great importance, but a spring which might never fail, a german Engineer promised duke Charles to found one; who having seen water to come forth in many places at the foot of the mountain, and especially a fountain which ran down into the sea, he thought that in digging deep into the rock, he might come unto these springs: and settling himself to work with this imagination, he laboured for certain months, but being come low enough, and finding no water, he fled to Venice, despairing of his enterprise: the which the duke Charles understanding, he called him back to Nizze, and encouraged him to continued his design, the which was accomplished with a happy success.  
On the highest part of the fort stands the dungeon, divided from the rest by a wall; and throughout all the place there are little rise which may be so sortified, as the whole place may be defended by degrees. To the fortification of duke Charles, duke Philibert Emanuel added that which they call the Citadel, with the which he embraced the place, whereas the Turks being camped, had planted their battery. The duke of Savoy doth commonly entertain in this place a garrison of four hundred soldiers, and a sufficient number of canoneers of great experience.  
Betwixt Nizze and Ville franche is the fort of S. Alban, the which is in a manner equally distant from the one and the other of these two towns. And for that places serve for no purpose in a country, if they be not furnished with good men, the duke of Savoy doth commonly entertain good garrisons of soldiers in Savoy and Piedmont, and he hath the inhabitants of Piedmont, which are for the most given to arms.  
It shall be convenient to speak something touching that which he may fear, and whereon he may be assured. First according to the outward appearance, he hath no cause of fear towards Milan, by reason of the strict alliance which is betwixt him and the king of Spain. And notwithstanding that this king doth see plainly that his highness doth not affect him so well as he hath done, for some reasons that are better concealed than spoken, and that this coldness hath been the cause why he hath put the Spanish garrisons out of his forts, and will not (as they say) receive any more pension from Spain; yet we must not persuade ourselves that his brother in law will break quite with him, especially for that one of the apparent reasons of this change is, for that they do not perform the promise which was made unto him marrying the Ifanta of Spain, which was, to deliver into his hands the duchy of Milan: and that which will always keep back the king of Spain, will be the consideration of the passage for his soldiers, in case that wars should be revived again with the united provinces of the Low Countries; for that if he were in bad terms with the Duke, it were impossible for him to found a passage. He is tied in friendship to the Princes of Germany, for that he holds it would be always profitable unto him. But he is especially in good terms with the Princes of Saxony, for that he is descended from their house. He hath also good intelligence with the Swisses, and especially with the Catholic Cantons, by reason of their traffic of come which he doth allow them, and is necessary for them. This good intelligence with the Swisses will always be a great support unto the duke, as we may judge by things past: for whiles that Charles his grandfather had alliance with the Swisses, he lived peaceably in his Estate; but whenas he had broken with them, not paying them their promised pensions, and so by consequence caring little for their friendship, at the coming of king Francis he suddenly lost his Estate of Savoy, the which was not only not defended by them, but was for the most part taken by them, saying, That they would pay themselves for their old debts.  
He might fear the allies of them of Geneva, whose open and sworn enemy he is: but they will not put themselves to field so lightly against this duke, as we may see by the attempts which he hath made against Geneva: and as for this town, it is too weak to make any enterprise, and it will be sufficient, if it shall be able to keep and defend itself from being taken.  
As for the duke of Mantova, the marriage of the children of these two dukes, will keep them hereafter (as we may judge) in good terms, and league, notwithstanding the ancient quarrel for the Marquisat of Montferrat which hath ceased by this marriage: but the late death of the young prince of Montova, hath revived this quarrel, whereupon both these dukes are fallen to arms, he of Savoy having seized upon some places in the Marquisat.  
As for the French king, since the exchange of the Marquisat of Salusses with Bresse, and other lands adjoining, they speak of nothing but friendship betwixt the king and his highness, and especially since the duke was distasted of the Spaniards: yea they expect daily a subject of stricter friendship betwixt these two princes.   

¶ The pretensions of the duke of Savoy.  
FOr that it may be sometimes profitable to understand the rights which the duke of Savoy hath to other Estates, I have thought it fit to set them down in few words.  
First he hath pretensions to Geneva by many good reasons, since that the Genevois retired themselves from the obedience of this duke, in the year 1535, as every man knoweth.  
The first reason is, that they found declarations of Emperors, wherein it is specified, That although the Bishops of Geneva were lords spiritual and temporal, and termed themselves princes of the Empire, yet they should acknowledge the duke of Savoy & his successors, for Superior, and swear fealty unto them; as they found in acts made by the said Bishops unto the year 1530, at what time they did coin money at Geneva, with the names and forms of the dukes of Savoy.  
Moreover they did always observe until that time, that the dukes of Savoy might pardon any crime whatsoever at their pleasures: and neither the Bishop nor commonalty might in cases which came to their knowledge pronounce sentence, and execute it, before they had first acquainted the duke's magistrates therewith, to the end they might see if it were just, and needful to be published, or else pardon him that was accused of any crime.  
They of Geneva had in the year 1519 made a league with them of Fribourg, and the duke contradicting it, they had arbitrary judges, who gave sentence in his favour; by the which it was said that the league was voided without his consent▪ and all the other Cantons made their declarations against Fribourg, who would have maintained this league, the which was dissolved by this means.  
But to omit many others, it shall suffice for the cleared of this title, to say that duke Charles, grandfather to this man, went often to Geneva with the lady Beatrix his wife, at which time they presented the keys of the town unto him, and made many other demonstrations unto him which are acustomed to be done to sovereign princes.  
He pretends the Marquisat of Montferrat for three reasons: the first for that it was promised in dowry to a duke of Savoy, in case that the masculine line of the Pal●ologueses (whose house is extinct) should fail: the second, for that they promised him for this dowry one hundred thousand crowns, the which were never paid, and the condition was, That in case that it were not paid by a time prefixed, they should give him Montferrat: the third, for that the Marquis of Montferrat being in war with the duke of Milan (who took his Marquisat) the duke of Savoy at that time with an army which hackneyed and maintained at his own charge, restored him to his estate, by reason whereof 〈◊〉 ●●rquis, in acknowledgement of so great a favour, made himself his perpetual feud●●●ie. But this Process being handled before the Emperor Charles the fift, he broke 〈◊〉 condition, which was, That the issue male of the house of Paleologues failing, the Marquisat should come unto the house of Savoy; neither had he any regard unto the other two causes of pretension, for that the duchess of Montova was daughter unto the l●st Marquis, saying, That seeing she was his daughter, she should also be his heir.  
He hath also a pretension to Achaia, for that Philip of Savoy, son to Thomas the third, married a daughter to the Prince of Achaia, called jambe; and by the means of ●his marriage, he made war against the Despot of Greece and his subjects, who being vanquished, left him absolute Master of his Country: He had one son called jambe, 〈◊〉 was Prince of Achaia, and he had Amedee for his son, who succeeded in the third 〈◊〉 and dying without issue male, had for successor Lewis his brother, who had no 〈◊〉: And a Queen of Sicily, pretending that the fee was fallen unto her, yielded ●●●ghtss to the great Master of Rhodes, after which the Turk seized thereon.   

¶ The Government.  
THere is a Governor in Savoy, who makes his ordinary residence at Chambery. The Senate of Savoy also remains there, which serves for the whole country on this side the mountains, with administration of civil and criminal matters, and affairs o● 〈◊〉, which concern Savoy. Yet they do not trouble themselves much with this last point, for that the duke of Savoy will manage them for the most part himself: by rea●●● whereof the Senators take knowledge of no more than shall please the duke.  
These is also in Piedmont another Senate, like unto that of Savoy, the which doth judge of all civil and criminal causes, and is continually much busied, for that every place or castle of that estate hath a judge, who is appointed by the Duke, or by the feudatory of the place: and the first knowledge of every cause goes unto this judge, the second to the Senate, and the third to the duke, who refers it afterwards to his Council of State.  
The head and precedent of this Senate, and of that of Savoy is the high Chancellor, who serves for both Provinces, and upon him doth the greatest part of the government depend: yea if he were more active he might be termed a second duke. But for that he 〈◊〉 embrace so many businesses, the duke employs many others, that is to say, Councillors, Masters of requests, and Martial men.   

¶ The Dukes of Savoy.  
THey are descended from the house of Saxony, and especially from the stem of the Emperor Otho the second: and this race continued under the title of Earls, near four hundred years, until that Amés was created duke by the Emperor Sigismond, at the Council of Constance. But to the end that we may take this House from the first begi●●●ng, you must understand, that when as Raoul, and Boatswain, reigned in Bourgondie, and 〈…〉 the third held the Empire, Berold or Berauld issued from the house of Saxony, and by consequence a near kinsman to the Emperor, being without land, or at the le●●● having not so much as he desired, was invested by the Emperor in the lands of Savoy, and the valleys and parts of Piedmont: And Boatswain and Raoul, kings of Bourgondie, consented to this imperial donation; so as it was not by the sword that Berold made himself earl of Savoy, as some would affirm.  
This Berold had for his successor Humbert, surnamed White Hands, who held the 〈◊〉 of Savoy in the year of Christ 1000, and was the first earl of Maurienne. He married Adheleide the only daughter of the Marquis of Suse, whereby this Marquisat came unto the house of Savoy.  
Of this Humbert came Amés, the first of that name, earl of Maurienne, who was also the first earl of Savoy, yet others attribute this to Amé the second. He married joane of Bourgondie, by whom he had two sons, that is to say, Humbert and Amé. In his time Berenger, Archdeacon of Angiers, spread his opinion.  
Humbert the second was successor to Amés the first. He married Laurence, daughter to the earl of Venice, and he conquered the country of Tarantaise, than he went the voyage of the Holy Land with the other Christian Princes who crossed themselves for this conquest. Adheleide, daughter to this earl, was married to Lewis the Gross, king of France, of which marriage came Lewis the Young. And at this time began the order of the Carthusian Monks.  
Amé the second succeeded Humbert the second, who having assisted the Emperor Henry the fourth, when as he went to receive the Crown at Rome, was in recompense thereof invested in the county of Savoy, and his country made a fee of the Empire. Amés had war against the earl of Geneva, for that he had promised to marry his daughter, and did not perform it, but took to wife Guigonne, daughter to the earl of Albon. Amés went also to the Holy Land, and died in the realm of Cypress, in the year of our Lord God 1154, in the time of the Emperor Frederick Barbarousse, and of Lewis the Young, king of France.  
Humbert, the third of that name, his son, and second earl of Savoy, succeeded him: he married Mahaut, daughter to Tierry earl of Flanders; and afterwards Anne, daughter to a Germane earl; and to his third wife he took Parnelle, daughter to the earl of Bourgondie, and widow to the duke of Austria, by whom he had one son called Thomas. Then he made the voyage to jerusalem, with Philip Augustus' king of France, in the year of our Redemption 1188.  
Thomas remained very young, and was brought up by the earl of Bourgondie, his uncle by the mother-side: He married Beatrix, daughter to Guy earl of Geneva, in despite of her father, and forced him in the end to take the oath of fealty, and to hold his earldom of Geneva in homage of the house of Savoy. This Earl Thomas made the voyage against the Albigeois, who had withdrawn themselves from the obedience of the Church of Rome. Of this Earl Thomas came many children, whose names I will set down, to give knowledge of the Genealogies.  
First he had of the said Beatrix, Amé the third of that name, who first of all married the daughter of the Dauphine of Viennois; but she dying without children, he took to wife Cecile, daughter to Raymond earl of Saint giles. The second son of the said Thomas was Humbert, who died in the war which the great master of pruss had against the Infidels, in the year of our Lord 1235. Thomas was the third son of earl Thomas, who married joane Countess of Flanders, daughter to Baldwin Emperor of Constantinople, as the Annalles of Savoy say: But the Chronicles of Flanders and France speak little of this Thomas, nor of his marriage with the daughter of Flanders: but after the death of Ferrand of Portugal, and of this Thomas there came no issue by his fi●st wife. But having taken to his second wife a Lady of the house of Ficsco of Genoa, he had Amés who was afterwards earl of Savoy. William of Savoy, was the fourth son of Thomas Earl of Savoy; he become a Churchman, and followed Pope Innocent the fourth, who made him Bishop of Valencia. The fift son was called Amés, who being a Leper, retired himself to Solitariness. Peter of Savoy was the sixt, who afterwards commanded over the country of Savoy. Boniface was the seventh, who following the Church, the Pope gave him the Archbishopric of Canturburie in England. The eight was Philip, a valiant man, who also was earl of Savoy. The daughters were Beatrix, wife to Raymond earl of Proditor- vence: one of whose daughters was wife to Charles, brother to Saint Lewis, who was afterwards king of Naples and Sicily: and the other was Marguerite, married into Germany.  
Boniface succeeded Amés the third, who being more hardy than wise, and giving battle to the Marquis of Montferrat, was vanquished and taken, so as he died in prison for grief, having no children, for that he had never been married. Peter brother to the deceased Boniface succeeded in the State, notwithstanding that Amés the third had left a daughter, called Constance: but in Savoy the daughters are excluded from the inherita●●●▪ This Earl conquered the countries of Val d' Ost, and Chablais.  
●●●er being dead without children, Philip of Savoy his brother came unto the succes●●●●▪ He was before of the Church, and had great spiritual livings: but leaving it all he married Alix Countess Palatine of Bourgondie, and was afterwards possessor of his brother's Estates, the which he did not long enjoy, for he died of a dropsy, having no ●●iress of his body.  
Amé the fourth his nephew succeeded him, being son to Thomas, he had married a niece to Pope Innocent the fourth: this man was surnamed the Great, by reason of his valour, and goodly stature. He married Sybille countess of Basge, and lady of Bresse, and 〈◊〉 marriage, these two pieces were united to the house of Savoy. He had war against t●●●auphine of Viennois, and the earl of Geneva his ancient enemy, and was chosen 〈◊〉 of the Empire, by the Emperor Henry of Luxembourg: after which he died in the year of Grace 1323, going to avignon to visit the Pope.  
●●●ard eldest son to Count Amé succeeded his father, and was more bountiful than wa● 〈◊〉, whereby he did wonderfully oppress his subjects. He married the duke of Bourgondies daughter, by whom he had one daughter called Marguerite, whom he married to john of Britain, son to Arthur earl of Richmond, and died without issue male.  
Amés his brother the fift of that name succeeded him, depriving his niece of the inheritance, according to the ancient law and custom of Savoy. He married Yoland daughter to the marquis of Montferrat, issued from the race of Paleologues, and had one son called Amés, as himself, and one daughter married to Galeas earl of Vertuz, and afterwards duke of Milan: he had also another son, but he died young.  
SATURN'S the sixt his son succeeded him, & by reason of his infancy, he was pupil to Willi●● of Baume. This earl having gotten the prize at a tournee which was made the first day of May, was called the green Knight. Amés married the lady Bonne sister to Lewis d●ke of Bourbon. This earl instituted the first order of the Annonciado; they do wear for their badge the image of our Lady saluted by the Angel. Afterwards he made a voyage into Greece to secure his cousin the Emperor Alexis. Before his death he married his son to the duke of berries daughter, than he made a voyage to Naples with the duke of Anjou, and there died old, being famous for his virtues and valour, in the year 1383.  
Amé the seventh succeeded his father, and to him  
Amé the eight, who was created duke of Savoy by the Emperor Sigismond at the council of Constance, than he resigned his Estates unto his son, and was afterwards made Pope besides his son Lewis, he had a daughter called Mary, who was married to the prince of Milan, of the race of the Viscontes: but for that she had an apostume in her thigh, her husband did never accompany with her, and by this means he had no heirs: and he being dead she become a Nun in a monastery which she had built, imitating therein the devotion of duke Amés his father.  
Amé the ninth of that name who was troubled with the falling sickness, and endured it with much patience: he was brother to the abovenamed duke Lewis, and married Charl●tte the only daughter of john king of Cypress; but he could not enjoy the realm, by reason of the opposition of john the bastard, who was supported by the Sultan of Egypt. In the end Amé married Yoland daughter to Charles the seventh, the French king, by whom he had four sons, and as many daughters.  
Philibert son to Amés the ninth succeeded him.  
Charles his brother came to succeed him in his Estates, and married Blanch marquis of Mo●t●errat, by whom he had john Charles, who was also called Amés, he died young, and left for successor.  
Philibert his uncle, who married Marguerit daughter to the duke of Bourbon.  
Philibert the second succeeded him: he was son in law to the Emperor Maximilian, and lived not long, leaving for successor  
Charles his brother, who married the daughter of Emanuel king of Portugal, and sister to the wife of the Emperor Charles the fift, and of this marriage came Charles who died very young in Spain, and Philibert in his father's life time was received prince of Piedmont.  
Philibert Emanuel succeeded Charles the third, he was expelled his Estates by king Francis the first, and then restored by the means of a marriage which was made betwixt him and Marguerite, daughter to the said king Francis.  
He had for his successor Charles Emanuel duke of Savoy, who lives at this present, and hath had many children by Catherine daughter to Philip the second, king of Spain.      

The Estate of the Church of Rome.  

❧ OF THE ESTATE OF THE CHURCH OF ROME.  

The Contents.  
1. THe limits and bounds of the Pope's Estate: his countries and chief towns. And of the absolute power which he pretends over many realms. 2. Description of the city of Rome, the ordinary seat of the Popes, and of the Antiquities, and first of the bridge of Saint Ange. 3. Of the Island Tiberine. Of the Pyramids, Colombes of admirable height, Thermes and Stoves, Antoniennes and others, Sepultures of Emperors, Theatres, Arches, Temples, and Porches. 4. The circuit of old Rome fifty miles, at this day sixteen. 5. Of the gates of Rome, divided in old time into fourteen regions, and at this day into thirteen, and what are the names, as well ancient as modern. 6. The ways and mountains which are comprehended within the circuit. 7. Taken and spotled seven times, and by what Nations. 8. A particular description of the Pope's countries and estates, and first of Latium, or Campania of Rome. 9 Of the Patrimony of Saint Peter. 10. Of Vmbria and Sabina, and their chief towns. 11. Of the Marquisat of Ancona. 12. Of Romania and the chief city Ravenna, the seat of the Exarques of the Emperors of Constantinople. Of the beginning of the Exarcat, and when it ended. 13. Of the Estate of Ferrara, the length, breadth, and confines. 14. Of the county of Venisse, the towns and walled places, among the which avignon. 15. fertility of Italy, and the bounty of the soil of Campania, Vmbria, Ferrara, and namely of the fields and meadows of Terny, which are mowed four times a year. Of the territory of Rietti, whereas the grass cut in the day grows as much the night following. 16. Baths of all sorts at Tivoli, and in other places. Mines of Alum at Stolf, the Salt pits of Ostia, etc. Flax of faience, Woad of Bologne, Manna of Saint Laurence in Campania, Wine of Sesene, faience, etc. 17. Of other things wherewith the Estate of the Church of Rome abounds. 18. Of the defects, and first of the unwholesome air of the Campania of Rome. 19 Romans in old time inclined to arms and learning, and their admiral frugality. Women and maidens forbidden to drink wine. Of their ceremonies of marriage, and of their libels of repudiation. 20. Of their Obsequys and funerals. 21. Of Crowns, Triumphs, and Ovations. 22. Of the solemn feasts of the ancient Romans, etc. 23. Manners of the Romans at this day mixed, by reason of the great frequentation of strangers. 24. Revenues of the Pope, wherein it consists. 25. An exact Calcul of the Pope's revenues and expenses. 26. What the Pope gives to Cardinals, and what he spends in other things. 27. What his Holiness gives unto his Noncios. 28. What he gives yearly to his guards, captains, and men at arms. 29. Of the Forces of the Estate of the Church; wherein they consist. 30. Of the fortification of Rome, made at divers times. 31. Of the Sea forces of the Church. 32. Why the people fail in many parts of Italy. 33. Of the government of the ancient Romans. Of the Senate instituted by Romulus, what it was before 〈…〉 the Monarchy: and of their Magistrates. 34. Of the Pope's government, and first of the ●●●dge of Cardinals, and their Consistory. 35. Of the great Penitencier, and his 〈◊〉 36. Of the Court of Rome, with the two Audiences. 37. Of the Chancery and 〈◊〉 38. Of the Apostolic Chamber, to what end it was erected. 39 Of the Praetor or 〈◊〉 of the Campidoglio, and his substitutes. 40. Of the Pope's Vicar over Priests, and of twelve 〈◊〉 of causes in the sacred Palace. 41. Of the creation of Popes, and assembly of Cardinals. ●●▪ Of the superstitious religion of the ancient Romans. Of their Augurs, and manner of di●●●●●g, and the institution of all their Priests. 43. A Catalogue and succession of the Pope's 〈◊〉 this day. 44. Of the institution of the three orders of Cardinals, and their titles.   

THis Estate (not comprehending Beneuent nor avignon) is at this day greater than it was ever, since that Ferrara, Comachio, and Romagnola, were added unto it. It is above three hundred miles long, and near a hundred broad. It contains the Countries of Ferrara, Bolognia, Romagna, the Marquisat of Ancona, Vmbria, Sabina Perugia, with a part of Tuscany, the Patrimony, Rome, Latium or Campania of Rome. And in this continent▪ they do number above fifty bishoprics, and near a million and a half of persons. There is one town of the first rank of Italy, which is Rome; one of the second, which is Bologne; and many of the third and fourth, the which are Ferrara, Peruse, Ascoli, Ancona, Forli ●●uenna, Farm, Viterbe. There is in this Estate one of the four Duchies instituted b● the Lombard's, which is that of Spoletum. There is the greatest part of the Exarcat of Ravenna; then one of the Marquisats of Italy, which is Ancona. This Estate exte●●s from one Sea unto another: It hath upon the Tyrrene or Tuscan Sea the Port of 〈◊〉 Vecchia, and upon the Adriatic that of Ancona and Commachia, and the mouths of Po, and with little charge they might make a Port at Terracina, and at Neptun. That country which going out of Rome bends towards the realm of Naples, is called the Campania of Rome, and in like manner that which is on the other side towards Florence is called the Patrimony; the Marquisat of Ancona is towards the realm of Naples; and Romagna towards Ferrara, with the which Bolgnia doth also confine, and Vmbria lies in the midst. Besides those towns which we have already named, this Estate comprehends those of Rimini, Cesene, faience, Imola, Macerata, Camerin, Spolerum, Norcia, Rieti, Terni, Narni, Oruieto, Assisi, Foligno, Todi, with about thirty others. Besides all this, it comprehends the County of Venisse, or of avignon; and the town of Beneuent in the realm of Naples. As for their temporal jurisdiction, the Pope pretends to be Sovereign of the realms of Naples and Sicily, of the duchies of Urbin, Parma, and Messeran, and in former times they have unjustly challenged homage for England and Ireland. But before I proceed, in my opinion it will be fit (for the contentment of the curious) to describe the City of Rome, the chief of that Estate, and the ordinary abode of Popes, and to make mention of her Antiquities, which some may desire: for that there are many which would be glad to be fully instructed of this Mistress City of the world.  
To satisfy this desire, I will begin by the bridge of Saint Angelo, which the Ancients called Pons Elius. When you are upon the bridge, look down, and you shall see within the river of Tybre some remainders of the triumphal bridge, by the which all the triumphs did in old time pass, going to the Capital. Turning upon the right hand you see the Castle, the which was properly the Sepulture of the Emperor Adrian, upon the top whereof, there was a vessel or bowl of brass guilt of an admirable greatness, the which stands at this day uncovered in the midst of Saint Peter Court. But before you part from Saint Peter, you may see Belueder, where there are many goodly Statues in the privy Garden, and especially that renowned Laocoon, after the Modelle whereof, that which is in the Gardens at Fontainebleau was made. And in Saint Peter's place, is the Obeliske, which was sometimes behind the Church, and was brought thither with great charge by Sixtus the fift.  
After this you must come behind to the Port of the holy Ghost, and being without it, you shall see on high, upon the right hand, a certain little Church called S. Onofrie, from which place unto S. Peter Monitorio, you see the little Hill which the Ancients called janiculum, one of the seven Mountains of Rome, and the little Hill which is before S. Peter called Vatican, is also one of the seven Mountains. Looking from Saint Onofrie, unto Saint Peter Monitorio downward, you shall descover the place where was the Circus or place for games of julius Caesar, the which was very long and broad, as may be seen going upon the Mountain before the Port of S. Peter Monitorio.  
Going thus straight on by the street which bends towards Ripa, you come unto Saint Marie in Trastevere, or beyond the river of Tybre, where there is at this day the Church to be seen which the Ancients called Tiberna meritoria, for that when as the soldiers came maimed from the wars, they were entertained there all the rest of their lives. And before the great Altar the place is to be seen, where (as they say) did spring a fountain of oil at the birth of our Saviour, and did run abundantly a whole day.  
Going still towards Ripa, whereas they cell wine, there are many goodly Gardens, Houses, and Churches to be seen, in the same place whereas in old time the Romans Arsenal or Storehouse for arms did stand, the greatness whereof may well be conceived by the marks which yet remain. And upon the left hand also is an Island which the Ancients called Tyberine, wherein now are the Churches of S. Bartholomew, and S. john, in the which remain the Fat benfratellis. There were two Temples in this Island, the one of jupiter Licaonia, the other of Esculapius, whose figure was brought thither in form of a Serpent. This Island hath the form of a Ship, wide in the midst, and some quarter of a mile long, and narrow at either end. There are two bridges to come into it, the one was called Pons Fabricius by the Ancients, for that Lucius Fabricius caused it to be made, and it is now called the bridge of the four Heads. The other bridge which joins the Island to the river of Trastevere is called Saint Bartholomews, of the Church which stands in the Island dedicated to that Apostle. It was in old time called Sextius, and Esquilinus.  
After this, passing from the other side of the said Island, you go always towards Trastevere, by a street which they found at the foot of the bridge of the said Island, and going on straight, you come unto a new bridge, the which is called at this day Saint Marie Egiptiaca, of a Church thereby dedicated to that Saint, and the Ancients called it Pons Senatorius At the foot of this bridge, you found a ruined Palace, the which according to the common opinion, was Pilat's Palace. But the judicious say, That this was the Palace of Nicholas Renze, or of the Vrsins, as doth appear at this day upon one of the gates in two verses. Right against it is to be seen an ancient Temple of the Moon, and of the other side, that which was dedicated to the Sun. Having past them, you discover a great piece of white Marble, the which is round, and within it like unto a man's face, the which they commonly call the Mouth of truth, leaning against the Church of S. Marry in Cosmedin, called the Greek School, whereas S. Augustine did read. After that, you come to the foot of Mont Auentin, near unto which are to be seen the ruins of a bridge in the river the which in old time was called Sublicius, the which Horatius C●cles defended against all the power of the Tuscans, who had defeated the Romans, and pursued them to enter the City, but he stayed them by his valour, until the bridge was broken down behind them, and then he leapt into the river, and saved himself by his skill in swimming.  
Going under the said Mountain near the river of Tybre towards S. Paul, you may see vines upon the right hand towards the river, in the which the Romans had one hundred and forty Storehouses, the which were very great, as appears by the ruins of those that are in the Vineyard of julio Caesarin. Having past this, you go still towards S. Paul, and found a very goodly meadow, where as the Romans made their Olympic games, and in this meadow you see the mount called Testaceus made of broken pots; for that they say the Potters dwelled near unto it, and cast their broken pots and vessels upon that place.  
Looking towards the gate of Saint Paul, you shall see a very ancient Pyramede shut 〈…〉 wall, the which they say was the sepulture of Sextius: and taking the way upon th●●●ft hand of Saint Paul's gate it leads you to S. Gregory, where passing Mont Auen●●●●ou see great ruins of buildings, and in this way there is a little river whereas the ●●●ens do commotly, wash beneath Saint Gregory; and here you must observe it well, for that you are in that great Circus whereas they were wont to run with their coaches, and to make their naval battles for pleasure. There are also three ranks of high pil●●●● to be seen one upon another, the which they call Septizonium Severi, or the seven 〈◊〉 or girdles of Severus.  
A little above it, are the Thermes or Stoves of Anthony, the which are wonderful to behold: and on the other side, near to Saint Balbina is to be seen the Churchyard of 〈◊〉 and of Basil; but all is ruined. Going afterwards to the Church of Saint Sixtus 〈◊〉 strait way which goes to Saint Sebastian, you enter on the left hand into a little 〈◊〉 which leads to Saint Stephen the Round, or Rotundo, the which was in old time th'temple of Faunus: and afterwards you shall see certain high walls the which they say 〈◊〉 been part of the Aqueducts which went to the Capitol, and in this place is Mont ●elius, which they pass unto S. john de Lateran, where you shall see the ancient building beautified by the New, which was made by Sixtus the fift. Then you take your way to the holy Cross in jerusalem, where before the Church door, you found a place in which was Venus' Temple, whereas the courtesans of that time were wont yearly to celebrat their Feast on the twentieth of August: and some say that the Theatre which is in the Church of the holy Cross, was that of Statilius Taurns, the which was great and fair as may be easily conjectured.  
After this you must return towards old Rome, and take the way of Port Maior, which go●● to Saint Marie Maior, so passing strait on, you shall found the Trophies of Marius, which are exceeding fair.  
Coming afterwards towards Rome, you pass by Galiens Arch, the which is now called the Arch of S. Vite, and it is yet entire, where were tied the keys of Tivoli underneath near unto the Inn. And thus you have viewed one quarter of the city.  
To observe the other part of Rome, you must begin whereas you see behind the Church a great part of Augustus' Sepulture, the which with the wood did extend unto the Church of S. Marie del Popolo, and the Spire which lay in that street hath been transported to S. Marry Mayor to be set up there.  
The port which they now call deal Popolo, or of the People, and which was called by the Ancients Flaminia, or Flumentana, is joined to the Church del Popolo: this hath been enlarged and beautified much by Pope Pius the fourth, who hath also repaired the way Flaminia, but you may consider it better whenas you shall go to the great vineyard of julio the third. Now you must return back towards the Trinity, under the which was that great Circus of Augustus: and in the place whereas stands the Trinity Church, going unto Mont Cavallo, were (as they say) the goodly gardens of Sallust. Going afterwards towards Mont quirinal, which at this day they call Mont Cavallo, under the Cardinal of Ferrares vineyard, are to be seen c●rtaine ancient grots or caves, near unto the which the Romans made their Florall games; and many courtesans and lose women lived in those caves; and upon the place which may yet be seen, in the said cardinals vienyard there was an altar dedicated to Apollo.  
Afterwards you enter into a little street which goes up to Mont Cavallo, being there you shall see two horses of marble, sent out of Egypt to Nero, whose palace is near unto it: and on the other side is the Church which they say was sometimes the temple of the Sun; but it is not true, for that it appears unto this day, that there was a secret way made upon very goodly pillars, which came from his palace, unto a place called Oratorium Neronis or Nero's Oratory, where there is a great part of the Church yet standing. Afterwards you must take the right hand way to the Baths of Dioclesian, and on the left hand, where are the vines of the Cardinal of Ferrara, began the Stoves of the Emperor Constantine which did reach unto Saint Susanna: and on the other side of these Stoves was the Senate of Matrons poor Widows and Orphans, where before the Romans did enter, they did visit the Altar of Apollo, which was right against this place.  
Then they come to the Stoves of Dioclesian, the which are such, as it seems the like cannot be built, and some say there are caves under them, whereof the one goes to the capitol, the other to S. Sebastian, and the third under Tiber to the Vatican.  
After which, you shall see the street called Pia, the which was made so strait, long, and broad, by Pope Pius the fourth whose name it carries: there may you also see that admirable and pleasant vineyard of the Cardinal of Ferrara, as also that of Pope Sixtus the fift, with goodly buildings: and near unto it is the vineyard of the Cardinal of Carpy, full of antic and modern things, which are very rare: and upon the same way are many others which are fair, but not to be compared to the three former. At the end of this goodly street, there is a port answerable unto it, the which was made by Pius the fourth, whose name also it carries.  
From thence you may go unto Saint Agnes, by the way called Nomentana, where you shall see a little ancient Temple very fair, the which they say had been dedicated unto Bacchus, and in like manner there is a tomb of Porphirie the greatest and fairest that can be seen. But returning to Dioclesian's Stoves, which were dedicated by Pope Pius the fourth, to the honour of the Virgin Mary; you must take the way which goes to saint Mary Maior, & you shall found under that Church in the valley, a Church which they call Saint Potentienna, the which in old time was the Stove called Novatien: and upon the top of the mountain whereas now stands the Monastery of Saint Laurence in Valisperne, were the Olympic Stoves, which did reach from one side unto the other: and whereas the Church of Saint Mary Maior stands, the same was in old time the Temple of Isis, which the Romans had in great veneration; and whereas the Chapel of S. Luke was (near unto Saint Mary's Church down to the bottom) they did behold the wood conscrated to juno the great goddess of the Romans, the which is at this day incorporated to the vineyard of Pope Sixtus.  
Above it in the vineyard of S. Anthony was that rich and admirable temple of Diana, whereas the Romans made their sacrifices with great charge: on the other side whereas now stands the Church of S. Martin, was in old time the Temple of Mars, whom they held for the god of war. Having past the said Church, you come unto a street which doth lead directly to S. Peter in Vincula, or in bonds: but leaving this street, and taking the first lane you shall found, you shall see an admirable house which the Emperor Titus made for his high priest.  
Having seen this, you must descend by the first street, among the vines which leads to S. Clement, a convent of religious men: then coming to that admirable TheatreVespasian , called the Coliseus, you shall see a wondeful structure and mass of stones, for that ninety thousand persons might sit and see these sights at ease.  
Having passed unto the other side you shall see Constantins' Arch, which is yet worth the viewing: and near unto it in the garden of the Monks of Saint Mary the New, you shall see some remainders of the Temple of the god Serapis. And going on you shall pass Vespasians Arch, which they did erect for him whenas he returned in triumph from jerusalem. Farther on, you shall see the Temple of Peace in a manner ruined: and right against it Mont Palatin, which they call at this day the great Palace, where there is a goodly vine of the Farneses'.  
Near unto this place was the Temple of Romulus, the which is converted into the Church of S. Cosmo and Damian; and joining unto it is the Temple of Marcus Aurelius, and of Faustina his wife, daughter to Antonius Pius, whose Palace is behind the said Temple. Right against it, there was a goodly Temple dedicated to the godddesse Venus, the which is now converted into a Church called Saint Maria Laberatrice dalle pene ●wordS; Inferno, or which delivers from the pains of hell. The three pillars which are seen in the midst of the field of Oxen, were, as they say, a bridge which went from the capitol to the great Palace, and they say that the Lake of Curtius was in this place.  
In the Church whereas you see a brazen door near to the Arch of Septimius, was (as they affirm) the Temple of Saturn, in the which the treasure of the people of Rome was kept; but it is now called S. Adrian.  
The Arch whereof I spoke, was made by Lucius Septimius Severus, and is very fair. In a corner of the street you shall see a statue leaning, which they call Marforio. On the other side of the Arch, where there are three pillars to be seen, was the Temple of Concord: then are you come unto the capitol, at the foot whereof was the Temple of jupiter, the which was never re-edified since the capitol was burnt. There was also near unto this Temple, that of Ceres, and upon this place is to be seen at this day a Brazen man on horseback, the which is the Emperor Marcus Aurelius. From this place you may view the greatest part of all Rome, in a goodly prospective. But from thence you mustturne a little backward, to the foot of the backside of the capitol, where you shall found certain deep Cisterns made by the Romans to keep their salt and corn, and these places were in old time called Horrea or Storehouses.  
From thence you pass near to S. Marry of Consolation, and not far from thence you see the Arch of beeves: and you may also see the Theatre of Marcellus, which is now the Palace of the Savelli, and in this Theatre was the Temple of Piety. Near unto it, going towards the Fishmarket, were the Porches of Octavia, sister to Augustus, but there are scarce any marks now remaining. And at the entry of S. Ange, are the Porches of Septimius Severus. Going afterwards unto Campo di Fior, or the field of Flowers, you found the Palace of Vrsins, the which was in old time the Theatre of Pompey, whose porch was behind. Near unto it is the goodly palace of Capi di Ferro, or Heads of iron, and beyond it is that of the Farneses', made with admirable Architecture, and full of goodly Antiquities.  
But to finish this Survey of Rome, we must begin the third time at the field of Mars, or to speak better, at the place called Colonne, where you shall see the Pillar of Antonius Pius one hundred seventy seven foot high, with a stair case within it, made like a Snail, where there are one hundred and forty steps, and six and fifty windows. Having seen this, you must go to the place called Charre, and turn upon the right hand being at the Spicery, the which descends unto the Vestal Virgins, a Temple in old time much esteemed by the Romans, and now full of Orphans. Then must you return by the same street, and go always right on towards S. Mark, until you come unto a place called Macello de Corui, where you shall see Traian's Pillar, the which is one hundred twenty and three foot high, and hath a stair within it of 155 steps, and five and forty windows.  
Then returning back, you see the Church of Minerva, which in old time carried the same name, but it was afterwards ruined, with another goodly building. But I had forgotten, that if you desire to see rare things as well for carving as painting, being upon Mont Citorio, you must ask for the house of jerosme Garimbert, where you may see many rare things.  
Not far from thence on the other side, is the Pantheon, at this day called Rotundo, a goodly ancient place built by Marcus Agrippa, and behind it whereas they cell Tables of wood, were sometimes the stoves of Agrippa. Behind S. Eustache were the stoves of Nero, which are partly in our Lady's palace: you shall see goodly remainders thereabouts. There is now a palace built by the Abbot Vento.  
Having past our Lady's place, you enter into that of Navone, whereas every Wednesday there is a Market kept; but the Romans made it for their plays and shows.  
At the foot of this place, under the great palace of the Vrsins, is the Image of Pasquin: And these be all the Antiquities which are to be seen in Rome, the which I have described unto you as well as I could: but before I leave it I will add something more.  
Rome contained in Romulus' time Mont Capitolin and the Palatin, with the valleys which are in the midst, & with three ports; the first was called Trigonia, for the triangle it made near to the foot of Mont Palantin; the second Pandana, for that it was continually open, and it was also called Libra, for the commodity of the entry; the third Carmentale, of Carmenta, mother to evander, who dwelled there, and it was called Scelerata, or Wretched, for the death of the 300 Fabiens which went out at that gate, and were all slain in one day near unto the river of Aron. But by the ruin of the town of Alba, and the peace betwixt the Sabins and the Romans, they began to augment the circuit of their town, compassing in seven Mountains, as we found it at this day: so as in the time of the Emperor Claudius there were six hundred and thirty towers, and 22000 porches. And as for the circuit of the walls, some Authors writ, That it was of fifty miles, others of two and thirty, some of eight and twenty: but at this day, with the Trastevere, and the suburbs of S. Peter, Rome hath but fifteen miles about, and some say but fourteen or thirteen, measuring it from Port to Port.  
As for the Ports, there is a difference among Authors, as well in regard of the number, as the names: for some say thirty, and others 24: but at this day there are but 18 open, which shut up the seven hills: and the whole City is divided into seven Regions.  
The chief port is that of del Popolo, called in old time Flumentana, for that it was near unto the river of Tiber: it was also called Flaminia, because that via Flaminia passed by it.  
Pinciana, so called of Pinciano the Senator; it was also in old time called Collatina, of Collatia, a castle not far from Rome.  
The port Salaria, so called of the Salt which was brought from the Sabins to Rome: It had also the name of Quirinale, being near unto that Hill, and also Agonale: the Gauls entered by this port when they sacked Rome.  
The port of S. Agnes, it was called in old time Viminalis, as some hold of the Temple of jupiter Vimineo: it was also called Figulense, for that the Potters dwelled without the gate; and Numentana.  
The port of S. Laurence, sometimes called Tyburtina, and also Taurina, by reason of a Bull's head which is yet to be seen upon the forefront towards the East.  
The port of Major, called by the Ancients Labicana, Prenestina, and Nevia, of a wood of that name near unto it.  
The port of S. john, called Celimontana of Mont Celio, Septimia, and Asinaria.  
Port Latina, so called for that it was the way to Latium, and doth still retain the name; it was sometimes called Florentina.  
The port of S. Sebastian, it is so called for that they go that way to S. Sebastian's Church without the City: it was also called Appia, of Appius the Censor, who made the way Appia out at this gate; Fontinale, of the abundance of fountains; and Capena, of a town of that name, whereunto they went by this gate. The Horatij being conquerors entered by this gate.  
The Port of S. Paul, it is the last of this side the river of Tiber, it was in old time called Tergemina. By this gate the Horatij went forth to fight with the Curiatij, whom they vanquished.  
Beyond the river of Tiber is the Port de Ripa, called by the Ancients Portuense, for that by it they went to the Roman Port, built by Claudius.  
The port of S. Pancratia, called in old time Aurelia, of the Emperor Aurelius, or as some say, of the way Aurelia.  
Septimiana, so called of Septimius the Emperor, and repaired by Pope Alexander the sixt, and it was also called Fontinale.  
Port Torrione, built by Pope Nicholas the fift, it was otherwise called Posterula.  
The port of Pertusa, that of the holy Ghost, that of Belueder, and that of Cenello, sometimes called Anea.  
As for the chief ways, there were nine and twenty, and every gate had his: but the most famous were first, the Appian way, which Appius Claudius the Censor caused to be paved from S. Sebastian's gate to Capova: Traian continued it to Brindes, and it was called the Queen of Ways, for that in a manner all the triumphs passed that way.  
The Flaminian way which Ca●us Flaminius (being Consul) caused to be paved from 〈…〉 del Popolo unto Rimini, and it was also called the Broad way, for that it went into the capitol.  
〈◊〉 was paved by Lepidus and Flaminius (Consuls) unto Bolognia. 〈◊〉 began above the Collisee, and went to the Church of S. Luce in Orfee. 〈◊〉 ●●cred way, began near unto the Arch of Constantine, & went unto that of Titus, 〈…〉 place of Rome, called Forum, unto the Capitol.  
〈◊〉 New way, went by the great Palace unto the Septizone, and so unto Antony's 〈◊〉.  
〈◊〉 Triumphal way went from the Vatican unto the capitol, Vespasian repaired it, 〈◊〉 may see by an inscription of marble which is in the capitol, before the Palace of 〈◊〉 Conseruators.  
〈◊〉 Vitellian way, went from Mount janiculum unto the sea. 〈◊〉 Strait way, was to the field of Mars.  
〈◊〉 was built upon seven hills, the first and most famous was Mont, Capitoli●, or ●●●ian, and Saturnien, at this day called Campidoglio, or capitol, upon the which 〈◊〉 were sixty Temples, chapels, or houses consecrated to the gods; and the most 〈◊〉 of these Temples was that of jupiter, into the which they that came in triumph 〈◊〉 when it was ended, to give thanks for the victory which they had gotten. Mont 〈◊〉, at this day called Palace Maior, or the great Palace: it is disinhabited and full of 〈◊〉 ●nd hath a mile in circuit. Romulus began the town there, for that he was bred up 〈◊〉 place: and Heliogabalus caused it to be paved with Porphirie.  
〈◊〉 Auentin, or Querquetulan which hath above two miles in circuit, is that whereon 〈◊〉 ●●rch of saint Sabina stands.  
〈◊〉 Celio is that whereon are the Churches of saint john and saint Paul, unto saint 〈◊〉 Latran.  
〈◊〉 Esquilin, or Cespien, where are the Churches of saint Mary Maior, and saint 〈◊〉 Vincula.  
〈◊〉 Viminal, whereon stand the Churches of saint Laurence, and saint Potentienne. 〈◊〉 Quirinal or Agonia, called at this day Mont Cavallo: these are the seven hills 〈◊〉 Rome stands on this side Tiber. Beyond the river or in Trastevere is  
〈◊〉 janiculum, whereon saint Peter Montorio stands, and that of Pincia, on which is the Trinity Church.  
There are also other small hills, as the Vatican, whereon stands saint Peter's Church 〈◊〉 Pope's Palace, the Citorie sometimes called the Citatorie, for that they did cite 〈◊〉 the ●●bess thither when they did assemble to make new Magistrates. That of the Hortule●●●●ule Gardens, whereas Mont Pincia gins at the port Salaria, and goes unto that 〈◊〉 Popolo, and it was from this hill, that they which did affect and labour for any offices, descended into the field of Mars to demand them of the people.  
A● for the Regions, Rome had in former times fourteen, but there are at this day but ●hirteene: that of the Monts which hath for their arms three mountains: that of Co●●●●, which hath a pillar: that of Trejo, three swords: S. Eustache, hath a Saviour betwixt two horns: that of Pont, hath a bridge: that of Regola, hath a stag: that of Ripa, 〈◊〉 a wheel: Trastevere, a Lion's head: Campidoglio, a Dragon's head: Parion, a 〈◊〉: Pigna, a vessel: Campo Marzo, or the Region of the field of Mars, hath for 〈◊〉 Ensign the Moon: and S. Ange, an Angel.  
This town hath been seven times taken by divers nations: three hundred sixty and 〈◊〉 years after it was built, it was taken by the Gauls Se●onois, under their captain 〈◊〉: the second, eight hundred years after it was taken by the Visigots: four and 〈◊〉 years after, the Vandals entered: and eighteen years after them the Erules: then 〈◊〉 years after, the Ostrogothes forced it: twelve years after, Totila made himself Ma●●●er thereof: and last of all in the year 1527, on the sixt of May, it was taken by the 〈◊〉 of the Emperor Charles the fift, being led by the duke of Bourbon. But notwith●●●●●ng that it hath been so often ruined, and that they have torn in pieces those rare antiquities with all those proud buildings, yet if you look unto the statlinesse of Palaces, Churches, and other buildings, the beauty of the streets, and the greatness of the city, it will still show itself to be Rome.  
Let us now see the rest of the state of the Church, seeing that we have taken a survey of the chief city.  
Latium or Campania of Rome is divided into old and new: the old extends itself from the mouth of Tiber, unto the mountain of Circel, for the space of fifty miles: the new, from Mont Circel to the river of Garillian entering into the realm of Naples. In old time this country was very well inhabited, and full of great and famous towns, which received their greatness by the neighbourhood of Rome, and were afterwards renowned by the courses & spoils of the Barbarians. Rome stands in Latium. The other places are, Ostia, Ardea, Neptun, raised out of the ruins of Anze, Terracina; and within the country Prenestina, Tivoli, Anagnia, Fresolone, Veruli, Alatri, Bauco, and Segna. At this day, this country is divided into three parts, that is to say Latium, Campania of Rome, & Maremma, which is the sea coast. The Estate of the Church ends at Terracina, against the which is Gayette the key of the realm of Naples.  
The Patrimony of Saint Peter jest unto the Church of Rome, by the countess Mathilda in the time of Pope Pescal in the year 1100, stretcheth from the river of Pesche which falls into the sea, on this side Mont Argent●rius, and from Saint Quirice unto Cepetan. Betwixt the rivers of Quiane and Tiber is the lake of Trasymenum, and beyond it is Peruse, a famous town: and betwixt the river of Fiore and Tiber stands Pitiglian, Aquapendente, Oruiete (famous for the situation, for a Well, and the Cathedral Church) Belsene with her lake, Montefiascon, Bagnaree, Castro, Nepe, Viterbe famous for the long residence of Popes whilst they were molested by the Senators of Rome; Orte, Gallese, Civita Castellana; and towards the sea, Cornette, Toscanelle, Civita Vecchia, Porto, Braccian upon the lake of Sabbatin, Roncillon, Sutri, Martinan where was the town of the Veiens.  
Having past the Tiber, you enter into Vmbria, which goes at this day under the name of the duchy of Spoletum, and is for the most part shadowed with the Apennine hills, by reason whereof it is called Vmbria. The chief towns are Borgo of S. Sepulchro, cite de Castello, Augubio, Todi (all upon the river of Tiber) Terni, Spoletum, Norcia, Foligno, Assisi, Nocera, Camerin, and Amelia.  
Sabina is a country compassed in on either side by the Apennin: it is narrow, and long from Tiber unto Lamentana. Others bond it betwixt the river of Negro and the Appennin, and betwixt Tiber and Teveron which parts the Sabins from the Equicoles'. The chief places are Riete, Narni, Otricoli, Magliane, Farce, and Palumbare.  
The Marquisat of Ancona extends itself betwixt the Apennin and the sea, from Tronee unto Fevilla, or Foglia, and contains many good places, amongst which Fabrian is very famous, with eleven Archbishoprics and Bishoprics. Among these towns that of greatest traffic is Ancona, the most powerful is Farm, the strongest la Rocca, the fairest Ascoli, the fattest jesi, the most ancient Osma, the most favoured Macera●a, for that the Governor of the province remains there, and Rota, but that which is esteemed most holy is Loretta.  
Romagna stretcheth from Foglia, unto Panare, and from the Apennin unto the river of Po. The chief towns are Rimini, Cesena, faience, Ravenna, Forli, Imola, Sarsina, Ceruia, and Bertinora. Six miles from faience, is Brisiguelle, the chief of the valley of Lamon, the which is ten miles long, and six broad, having sixteen thousand Inhabitants. The noblest of all these towns is Ravenna, whereas some Emperors made their abode, and then the Exarques or Governors for the Emperors of Constantinople. And for that Histories make often mention of the Exarcat, I think it fit to speak something of the beginning, progress, and end thereof. The Exarcat began after that Narses, Captain to justinian and justin Emperors, had expelled the Goths out of Italy: and the first Exarque (which is as much to say as a Sovereign Magistrate) was ●●●gon, who making his abode at Ravenna, as the kings of Goths had done, changed 〈◊〉 manner of government throughout the Provinces, putting a Captain into eve●●●● 〈◊〉 of importance; the like did he at Rome, displacing the Senate and Consuls. The 〈◊〉 was then of great power, but the Empire being afterwards much ruined by the 〈…〉, it was extinct. The Exarcat contained Ravenna, Sarcina, Class, Forli, and 〈◊〉 ●●●opoli, which towns made one Estate, and they called it Pentapoli: and with●●● Estate, it contained Bolonia, Reggium, Modena, Parma, Plaisance, with other 〈…〉 betwixt the Appennin Hills and the Po. It ended in the year 751, whenas 〈…〉 of the Lombard's, took Ravenna; so as it continued one hundred eighty 〈◊〉. And it is a thing worthy of consideration, that the Roman Emperors, espe●●●● notorious, than the Exarques, and last of all the kings of the Goths, held Ravenna 〈◊〉 all the towns of Italy, worthy of their abode.  
〈◊〉 insolency of the Exarques towards the Pope, was the cause that the Archbishop 〈◊〉 revolted also against the Pope, in the time of Emerald: this rebellion conti●●● 〈◊〉 the time of Pope Donne, as others say of Agaton, whenas the Archbishop Theo●●●●●●ting ●●●ting himself ill entreated by his Clergy, submitted his Church unto the Pope. 〈◊〉 province (whereof we now treat) was first called Flaminia, but Charles the Great, 〈◊〉 guish the name of the Exarcat, and to make the people more affectionate to the 〈◊〉 Rome, called it Romagna.  
〈◊〉 estate of Ferrara is great and commodious, for that comprehending Modena, 〈…〉 been lately dismembered, it is in length from the adriatic sea unto the 〈◊〉 about one hundred and sixty miles, and it hath in breadth about fifty, from 〈…〉 Magnavaca are nine miles, from Magnavaca to Yolane eighteen miles, 〈…〉 to Gorre eighteen miles, and from Gorre to the Venetian confines six miles. 〈…〉 side in Lombardie, it is from S. Ambrose, a place of the Boulonois coun●●● 〈◊〉 unto Castelfranco five miles, from Modena to Reggium fifteen miles, from 〈…〉 Bersel fifteen miles. It is broader in some places, and in others narrower. 〈…〉 of Ferrara confines with those of Ravenna and Bolognia. This estate con●●● 〈◊〉 with the Venetians by the Poliselle. The county of Mirande confines with 〈…〉 a castle belonging to Ferrara. The duke of Mantova confines with Stellata. 〈◊〉 ●●●ata and Reggium, which be mighty towns, there is Comachio in the mari●●● 〈◊〉 adriatic sea, and many other castles in Romagna, Graffignane in Tuscanie, 〈…〉 Carpi, a place of importance, seated in the heart of this Estate. This place was 〈…〉 the Emperor Charles the fift to duke Alphonso, for that pa●t which was fallen 〈◊〉 Empire by the rebellion of Marck Pij the Lord thereof, and this duke obtained 〈…〉 Marck, giving him the signory of Saxole in exchange: but Lionel de Pij 〈…〉 yield his part for any reasonable price or exchange, was expelled out of that 〈…〉 held by this duke, with the Emperor's permission, who then did lay in deposito 〈◊〉 ●●ice thereof one hundred thousand crowns into the Banque of Venice, the 〈◊〉 ●●●●el would never accept. The town of Ferrara hath in circuit six or seven miles, 〈…〉 goodly streets, honourable palaces, and a good number of Churches and Mona●●● 〈◊〉 with a castle where the dukes did usually abide. There is also an University, for the 〈◊〉 of students in all arts and sciences.  
〈◊〉 county of Venisse belongs unto the Pope, and they do number in it four 〈◊〉 is to say, avignon, Ca●pentras, Cavaillon, and Veson, the which are bathed by 〈◊〉 of Rhosne, Durance, and Sorgue. Moreover, there are eighty places that are 〈◊〉 avignon was bought by Clement the sixt, of Queen joane, daughter to Robert 〈…〉, in the year of our Redemption 1352, but the county of Venisse was consis●●● 〈◊〉 say) by the Apostasy of Count Raymond of Tolosa. The said town of Auig●●● 〈◊〉 ●hose beginning there is no certainty, hath in a manner all this of the number of 〈…〉 seven Parishes, seven Hospitals, seven convents of religious men, and seven of 〈◊〉, seven Colleges, and seven Gates. This Town did win great reputation by 〈◊〉 ●●●●ence which the Popes made there for the space of seventy years, from Clement 〈◊〉 unto Gregory the eleventh.  

¶ The Quality.  
THe Campagnia of Rome hath a very good soil which yields much, and is watered by many rivers, notwithstanding that there be some places which are rough and stony, yet are they not desert and unfruitful, but fit for pastures, and full of woods. Vmbria is a country very well inhabited, and yields much, for there are some writ, That a part of the Province is so fertile, as (omitting to speak of the rest) their cattles have two young ones at every time. The rest of this Estate is for the most part distinquished into plains and little hills, which are very fruitful. All the territory of Ferra●a displays itself into goodly plains, as also a good part of that of Bolognia, of Forli, of Ravenna, and Romagna.  
Cornelius Tacitus commends the fertility of Italy, in the fields of Rieti, and Terni. Pl●nie writes, That the meadows of the territory of Terni (which they may overflow) weremowed four times a year, and those which could not be watered, thrice. But the bounty of this country may well be known by the greatness of their Turnup's, and Cabadges. Pliny writes of the territory of Rieti, That grass being cut in the day, it grows so fast in the night, as the morning following a pole lying upon the ground will be all covered. The plain which stretcheth from Spella unto Spolerum, and is eighteen● miles long, and four broad, is full of come and fruit; and that which extends from Peruse unto Assize and Tondi, and the fields of Viterbe, and of Rome, are no less fertile. After which, that part of Bolognia which draws near to the Appennin, and all Romagna, are distinguished into little hills, plains, and some valleys. The Marquisat, and the other parts of the Church's Estate, are so well situated, as we may say, That this country contends wherein it excels most, either for fertility or pleasure.  
But the territories of Rimini, of Fano, of Ascoli (especially from the mouth of Tronto, unto that of Asone) of Fermo, Peruse, & of Cornet, are exceeding delicate. They abound generally in come, wine, and oil, and sand forth great store, especially of wine and oil. There are many Lakes, amongst which is that of Peruse, fuller of fish than any of the Lakes of Italy; that of Bolsene, Brassian of Vic, of Piediluco, of Subiago, of Foglian, and the little Lakes of Bassanel, of Monterose, of Baccan, of S. Praxeda, of castle Gondolfe, and of Neme. The two principal rivers of Italy pass by this Estate in their greatest breadth, that is to say, the Po and Tiber. And besides these, there are many others, for that Tiber alone receives seven and twenty torrents or rivers.  
There are baths of all sorts, at Tivoli, Lamentana, Stiglian, Vicarel, Anticola, Viterbo, Potrette, and at Scarpette. There is a rich Mine of Alum at Stolse, store of Salt pans at Ostia, Ceruia, and Comachio, where is the greatest fishing for Eels that is in Italy. There grows excellent Flax and abundance at faience and Lugo; Hemp at Cento, Butrio, Pieve, and about Peruse. There is Woad in the territory of Bolognia, of Castel-Bolonois, and of Forli. There comes also Manna at S. Laurence, a place in Campagnia.  
I will not dilate much upon the wines, but it shall suffice to say, That all Romagna, Vmbria, the Patrimony, Sabina, and the Campagnia of Rome, bear as good wines as can be drunk: and it were superfluous to make mention here of the wines of Cesene, faience, Rimini, Oruiete, Todi, Montesiascon, Abban, and of many others. Neither will I speak of the Grapes of Amelia, S. Gemini, and Narny.  
What shall I say of other things, wherewith this Estate abounds? It doth breed Oxen which are great and strong, especially Romagna, and Campagnia, and the flesh both of thei●veales and beeves is excellent sweet in taste, as also their swine's flesh, especially that of the Mountains. They have great store of Venison, especially in the Campagnia of Rome, towards Sermoneta, Terracina, and Neptun, whereas they found wonderful huge wild Boars.  
The Campagnia of Rome hath races of horses, which yield little to them of the realm of Naples. They want no Forests also, where there is great store of Acorns, and much good wood for building, and for many other necessary uses.  
In many places they have quarries of good stone for buildings, among which those of 〈…〉 (which they dig out and cut with great facility) carry the price: and they do 〈…〉 resist the weather, but they grow better and more firm with age.  
〈◊〉 Marquisat of Ancona hath plains and valleys which are rich in oil, corn, and 〈…〉 county of Venisse is also very pleasing, and yields much unto the owners, 〈…〉 of wines, the which are nothing inferior in strength and abundance of first-fruits, 〈…〉 as good as can be found in any other place; the which may be seen in Auig●●● 〈◊〉 ●her first-fruits come from all parts, which are exceeding fair and good.  
〈◊〉 ●eeing we have sufficiently made known the good qualities of the Estate of the 〈…〉 it shall not be unfit in my opinion to observe the defects, to the end they may be 〈◊〉 and prevented: you must therefore understand, that there are six qualities re●●● 〈◊〉 the perfection of an Estate, that is to say, bounty of the air, abundance of wa●●●●●●●ge, traffic of merchandise, safety, and above all, store of inhabitants, for thereon 〈◊〉 the greatest part of the rest.  
〈◊〉 or the air, we must confess that the Estate of the Church is somewhat incom●●●● and annoyed; for that the part towards the sea, all the country of Cornet, and 〈◊〉 Campagnia of Rome, hath a troublesome and an unwholesome air; the which 〈◊〉 from the forests, which cover the greatest part of the country along the sea 〈◊〉 the marshes: the which cannot be prevented but by cutting down the woods 〈◊〉 the land fit for tillage, and drying up the marrishes, but especially in making 〈◊〉 ●●●dingss for habitation. For the territory of Rome and Campagnia, are in a man●●● 〈◊〉 any inhabitants, the Peasants growing sick, not only by reason of the bad 〈…〉 of the ground, whereon they sleep: and in like manner for the heat of the 〈◊〉 the coldness of the Moon; against which inconveniences they have no o●●● 〈◊〉, nor remedy, but by their buildings, which may defend themform the bad 〈…〉 of the air, and the Southernlie winds. And although that it be a difficult 〈◊〉 it more easy than it seems, if princes were as willingly drawn to make en●●● 〈◊〉 the good of posterity, as they are to those whereas they hope to reap a pre●●● 〈◊〉. For why should not Anze, Ardea, Citta-Launia, and Asture, be healthful at 〈◊〉 seeing the air was not unwholesome in former times?  
〈◊〉 ●●●●ish of Pontin (where in old time there were four and twenty towns) was 〈◊〉 for the most part and made labourable by Cethegus, and then by Theodoric king of 〈…〉, but afterwards the fields were overflown again. Sixtus the fift had the same 〈◊〉 a little before his death, employing not his treasure, but his authority, and by 〈◊〉 the territory of Sezza and Piperne were much enlarged; and the air of Ter●●●● much bettered, and in many places they have made many goodly ponds. There 〈◊〉 other thing for this effect, but a continuation of labour and charge, with the 〈◊〉 may keep clean the channel of the river of Aufente, and the other 〈◊〉 ●●●reas the water being gathered together runs towards the sea. And for that this ●●●●●tion of charge cannot be supported by private men, being only capable for them 〈…〉 great wealth; thereby it happens that the thing having been hitherto in the hands 〈…〉 persons, who dying, or wanting means, it hath not taken effect. The event 〈…〉 good, if they did charge the people of Rome, or some other near communal●●● 〈◊〉 ●ere rich, or some religion which had great means, as that of S. Benedict, with th●●●●●ke.  
〈◊〉 country of Ferrara hath need of the like help: for in like manner they must 〈…〉 passage to the waters of Aufente, to the end they do not drown the terri●●● 〈◊〉 Terracina, and those that are near: also it is necessary to make deeper the chan●●● 〈◊〉 river of Po, which passeth beneath Ferrara, & to reduce it to the former estate, 〈…〉 it may not drown the country. The charge must not divert them from this 〈◊〉, for that besides that no honourable action can be undertaken without expense, 〈…〉 reason doth allow that a merchant should run into great charge to make his 〈◊〉 a prince should forbear to better his Estate, for fear of expense: for that a ●rince without disbursing any thing of his own, might bring this enterprise to a good ●nd, by his only authority, and the charge of private persons, or else of commonalties.  
I say the like of the spacious fields of the territory of Ravenna, of Bagnacavallo, of Lugo, and of Bolognia, the which are drowned by the river of Paduse. Hercules the first Duke of Ferrera dried up Samartina, Hippolytus, Piatois, the Ravode, and the Lambert's Pogge.  
Alpho●so the second, duke of Ferrara leaving the profitable, for the pleasing, employed at Mesola, the time and labour, which the commonalties were bound to give for the containing of the river of Po within her bed, and to assure the fields from the inundations of this flood; he caused them to toil in the making of causies, digging of ditches, planting of woods and such like, which were appointed to keep and maintain the banks of Po, upon pretext that it was not necessary. In the mean time the river did eat the banks, and carried away the causies; and many of the countrymen died at Mesola by reason of the bad air: wherefore the country being deprived of the labour, yea & of the countrymen themselves, it could not resist the violence of the river Po, the which having made irreparable breaches in many places, it hath done more harm to the territories of Ferrara and Comachio, than can be valued: the which had not happened if Alphonso had employed that diligence about the river of Po, which he used at Mesola. It may be that Alphonso being out of hope, that the duchy of Ferrara should remain in the house of Est, cared not to leave it annoyed, and damnified in so many places: yet I wonder that foreseeing this, he did not rather attempt to beautify Modena, or Reggium, than to bestow such cost at Mesola.  
But as for running waters, whereon tillage, and the fertility of the land doth partly depend, although the Estate of the Church hath no want of rivers nor lakes, yet the territory of Rome might be much bettered, bringing the river of Teveron into the town, the which Sixtus the fift had projected. And it is said of Claudius the Emperor, that he brought the little river of Anien to Rome, with a new channel of stone, and divided it into many goodly lakes: and by the means of this river, besides the good which this water would do unto the land, and the commodities it would bring to the inhabitants, besides the facility it would add to the conduct of victuals and other things, and besides the profit it would bring to gardens, and to traffic, it would also make the air better and more healthful, as well for the freshness which the running water doth cause, as for the change of the air which it doth make: for among other reasons of the bad air, which makes the country near unto Rome inhabitable, they say, that the soil being made like unto waves, the air being kept in, betwixt the one and the other for want of agitation and passage, comes to be corrupted, like unto a dead water; and the running water of Teveron would prevent this mischief.  
After all this, the commodity of wa●er; and places should invite men to build palaces, mills, storehouses, and such like, and to plant ochards and woods upon the banks of the river; and all this would serve to make the air more wholesome, or less offensive, preserve the labourer and husbandman, and fill the land with first-fruits: this should be accompanied with another benefit of great importance, for that drawing the river of Teveron beyond S. Paul, the inundation of Tiber (which hath been so prejudicial to the city of Rome) should not be half so offensive, for that it should want both the ordinary, and extraordinary water of the said Teveron, the which is not so little, but that it doth raise Tiber some faddomes.  
We have no cause to fear that drawing Teveron under S. Paul, the water of Tiber would lose her bounty, the which proceeds from the Sulphurous waters which are brought into it, by Teveron, from the fields of Tivoli; for as physic cannot help the indisposition of one member, but it shall hurt another: in like manner in civil affairs, we cannot provide so safely, that if an action be beneficial to one part, it shall not be prejudicial to another; but it sufficeth of two mischiefs to avoid the greatest. We must add hereunto that the waters of Tivoli (drawn down by Teveron) are not necessary for the bounty of the water of Tiber, for that those which it brings are sufficient: 〈…〉 of Noire, or Near; besides, her waters whose colour doth plainly show how 〈…〉 they are, bring many other waters of divers virtues, the which we see spring 〈…〉 Na●●y in many places.  
〈◊〉 ●●clude this discourse, I say that the country about Rome, within thirty mile's 〈…〉 is very fertile, and doth yield abundance of corn and cattle, as it would 〈…〉, if the inhabitants, especially strangers, for their health, or rather for dain●●● 〈…〉 not more pleased with the wines which come from Corsegue, from the river 〈…〉 and from France. But this country which is so fertile, is in a manner desolate, 〈…〉 inhabitants, and for this cause, there goes yearly from divers places, espe●●● 〈◊〉 of Lombardie, at the lest forty thousand labourers, to manure their grounds, 〈…〉 in their harvest, and when all is done, they that are living, return to their 〈…〉 some corn; for that the greatest part of them do commonly die, by reason 〈◊〉 ●olent heat of the Sun, or of the winds which come from the Sea, the which are 〈…〉 pestilent, for that they bring with them abundance of vapours from the 〈◊〉 by which they pass, not being hindered at this day by the woods, all which 〈◊〉 offensive: but much less in the city of Rome than in other places. So as 〈◊〉 gentry which did contain an infinite number of persons, remains now empty and 〈◊〉 ●nd the plain which they call Romagna, from Port Hercules beyond Terracina, 〈◊〉 out one hundred and fifty miles long, hath not above eight thousand inhabi●●● 〈◊〉.   

¶ The Manners of the Ancients.  
〈…〉 ●ans were borne to war, and did much affect it, making little account (in 〈◊〉 ●●nning) of learning: but in the end, having somewhat extended their Em●●●● 〈◊〉 at their ease, the greatest and richest amongst them embraced the scien●●● 〈◊〉 themselves wonderfully to learning. Yea they that led armies were very 〈…〉 it was not a thing unworthy of a commander, and of a great family, to have 〈…〉; but contrariwise, young men of the greatest houses of Rome, pleaded 〈…〉 before the Senate, and gave themselves to the knowledge of their laws, 〈◊〉 ●●●ence; and to speak in a word, they sought to be perfect in all sciences, seeing 〈…〉 tied one to another. In the beginning they were very sober, they conten●●● 〈◊〉 with very little, and contemned great wealth; so as there had been some 〈…〉 of the city, as Valerius Publicola, whom they were forced to bury at the pub●●● 〈◊〉: Others busied themselves to seethe Turnup's in their little cottages, having 〈◊〉 ●●●●ded armies: another held the plough when they came to tell him that he was 〈◊〉 ●●●ator: and another, after he had been General of an army, demanded leave 〈…〉 to take order for the tillage of two or three acres of land, and for other pet●●● 〈◊〉 of his house. But having had the spoils of many provinces, and having tasted 〈…〉 of strangers, they did so savour it, as excess, and dissoluteness, crept in 〈…〉 in such sort, as they did exceed all the nations of the world. Moreover, ava●●● 〈◊〉 desire to get at what rate soever, did so possess them, as they made no difficultly 〈◊〉 thousand exactions in their provinces, and to lend at unreasonable interest; 〈◊〉 end, to banish and murder their fellow citizens, that they might enjoy their 〈…〉 ●hey that had the greatest reputation to be wisest, were most covetous, as we 〈…〉 Seneca, who had four or five hundred thousand crowns in England alone, for 〈…〉 he got great interests. In the beginning they had no care but of the greatness 〈◊〉 Commonweal, but afterwards they were carried away with desire of their private 〈…〉 which, all things declined, and the ambition of the citizens of Rome over●●● 〈◊〉 Commonweal, and reduced it under the command of one alone. They took 〈…〉 to see blood spilled in those places which were appointed to that end, where●● 〈◊〉, Thracians or Myrmillons, and the Retiares did fight with all violence to 〈◊〉 ●●●entment to the people. Lions and other wild beasts were not spared to please 〈◊〉 ●●●ple, who were so accustomed, and did so affect these spectacles, as he that would 〈◊〉 loves, had need of no other thing but to make a great preparation of sword-players, beasts, commedians, tumblers, and such like: and whosoever had most, was best liked of the people. Moreover, the greatest were always accustomed to present unto the people so many measures of corn, and of so much wine by the head, and to make a largesse of pieces of silver, which they called Missillia. The father's coming out of the town, or not having go out of their lodgings, kissed their daughters, to found if they had drunk any wine, which they held to be very dishonest among the Romans. They did not suffer their children to eat out of their houses, neither did they allow them to speak unreverently▪ 〈◊〉 they sent them into Tuscany, to Athens, and Rhodes, to learn the arts and 〈◊〉▪ These children did never show themselves in public, until they were ten years old and then they went to be enrolled in the Tribes. Then they showed themselves 〈◊〉 the age of seventeen years, whenas they left the Pretext or garment of childhood and took the Virile rob, and having taken it, every young man went con●●● 〈◊〉 an old, doing him much honour; and whenas the Senate did assemble, these young men did accompany unto the Court some one of the Senators, their kinsmen or 〈◊〉 to their fathers, and did attend him until he came forth, and conduct him to his lodging. As for their marriages, they were accustomed to adorn the wife which went to be married, after this manner: first they gave her a key in her hand, they put upon her 〈◊〉 a dart which had slain a fencer, they put a girdle about her made of sheep will, which the husband did afterwards undo upon the bed: she did carry upon her head under her vail, which was called Flammeum, a garland of Verueine mixed with other herbs, and they did make her sit upon a sheep's skin: and when she went to found her husband, she was accompanied by three children, which should have both father and mother: one of them carried a torch burning before her, made of White thorn (for that these ceremonies were done in the night) and the other two went of either side. They did also ●et before her a distaff covered with flax, with a spindle full of thread, and afterwards they made her touch both fire and water. They did not light above five torches at the marriage, which the Aediles were wont to kindle. They used three kinds of separation in marriage: The first was called Repudium, whence comes our word to Repudiat; and they used this manner whenas the man left his wife without her consent, and the first that used it was Car●illius, a hundred years after that Rome was built, for that his wife bore him no children. C. Sulpitius repudiated his wife, for that she had been out of the house in her hair, and had no vail upon her head. Q. Antistius left his wife, for that he had seen her talk secretly with a woman that was a libertine. P. Sempronius did the like, for that his wife had go to the public shows without his privity: and Caesar put away his wife for the jealousy he had of Clodius, who was found attired like a woman at the feast which Pompey had celebrated to the honour of the good Goddess. The second manner was called Divorce, and this kind of separation was by the consent of both parties. The third was called Separation, and it was done at the Prince's pleasure.  
The ancient Romans did use them that were dead after two manners, and they had two kinds of obsequies: The first was, to cover the dead with earth, and to bury them as we do: the other, to burn their bodies; but this manner did not continued long, and the first Senator they burned after his death was Silla. Numa Pompilius was the inventor of obsequies, and he instituted a high Priest who had the charge. The first honour they did to famous men at their funerals, was to praise them with an oration, as Caesar, being but twelve years old, commended his grandfather; and Tiberius, at the age of nine years, praised his father. The second was to make Sword-players to fight: Marcus, and Decius, sons to junius Brutus, were the first that did practise this, in honour of their father. The third was to make a stately feast. The fourth to give meat to all the people: the first which did distribute, were those which had the charge of the funeral of P. Licinius, a citizen of Rome, who was held to be very rich. They did also strew certain flowers and perfumes upon the Tomb, as the people of Rome did at the funerals of Scipio. They did also s●t up in their Temples and public places certain ornaments, as Scutcheons, Crowns, ●●d such like: and they that could not be interred with all this pomp, for that the charge 〈◊〉 very great, were buried in the evening by certain men who had that charge, being ●espilons, and they sent him that was dead to burying attired in white: his nearest 〈◊〉 did close his eyes, and soon after they did open the chamber to let all the fami●● 〈◊〉 with the neighbours, and three or four of them did call him thrice by his name 〈…〉 voice, after which they did wash him with hot water: the heir did sweep 〈…〉 house with a certain broom appointed to that use, and they did set branches 〈…〉 over the door. If he that was dead were a man of any authority, the citizens 〈…〉 to the funeral, by a man that had that charge. Whenas a widow died ha●●● 〈◊〉 but one husband, they carried her to her grave with a crown of Chastity up●●● 〈◊〉.  
〈…〉 were accustomed to give crowns unto soldiers in recompense of their valour: 〈◊〉 ●●phall was of bay which they gave unto the General or Captain: the Obsi●●● was of grass, which they gave unto him that did free a town from siege, and the 〈…〉 received it was Sicinius Dentatus: the Civique was of oak, which they gave 〈…〉 that had delivered a citizen from danger. The Mural was given by the Gene●●●● to the soldier that had first scaled the enemy's town wall: they gave one called 〈…〉, to him that did first ●nter the enemy's camp, or his trenches: the Naval was 〈…〉 that first entered the enemy's ship, and all these three crowns were of gold: the 〈◊〉 was made like unto the battlements of a town: the Castrensis like unto a Palisadoed the Naval like unto a spur of a galley. The oval was of myrtle, and they 〈◊〉 to him that had vanquished the enemy without loss: and the first was made of 〈◊〉 corn and given to Romulus. The Armilles were certain little circles or plates 〈◊〉 silver, which the soldiers did wear upon the left arm near unto the shoul●●●●●●●ament. They did grant triumphs to Dictator's, Consuls, and Praetors, which 〈…〉 above five thousand enemies, and which did subdue towns and provinces 〈◊〉 Roman Empire. The ovation was a kind of triumph, which they did grant 〈◊〉 ●●nerall of an army who had vanquished the enemy without loss, and he en●●●● 〈◊〉 on foot, having the Senate after him, but he was not followed by his army: 〈…〉 triumphed after this manner, was Posthumus Tubertus the Consul, who tri●●● 〈◊〉 the Sabins: the first which did triumph, was Romulus, and they do number 〈◊〉 ●●●dred and twenty men which have entered Rome in triumph: the first which 〈◊〉 the enemy subdued to Rome, was Cincin●atus. They which did triumph were 〈◊〉 ●●ariot with two wheels, drawn by horses or other beasts, being followed by 〈◊〉 crowned with bay, who being come unto the capitol and alighted, they 〈◊〉 jupiter's Temple, to give him thanks for their victory, and having sacrificed a 〈…〉, they returned to their houses.  
〈◊〉 ●●cient Romans did in honour of janus celebrat the Agonales the ninth of 〈◊〉 third of April they made their Florall games, in memory of Flora a courtesan 〈◊〉 ●●●oved of Pompey, who made the people of Rome heir of all her goods, and her 〈…〉 that place, which they now call Campo di Fior, or the field of Flowers. These 〈…〉 in old time performed under the vineyard of Cardinal Ferrara, at the foot of 〈…〉 in all, now called Mont Cavallo. The sixt of the same month, in memory of 〈…〉 obtained against the Latins, the Knights went stately attired, carrying olive 〈…〉 in their right hands, from the Temple of Mars (which was upon the Appian 〈…〉 mile's from Rome) unto that of Castor and Pollux. The nine and twentieth 〈◊〉 they did celebrat the Lustres, at what time they did show forth their Trumpets, 〈◊〉 and other Ensigns, and Instruments of war: they were also accustomed to have 〈…〉 which they called Trajan's, Sceniques, Capitolins, Apollinaires, Seculiers, Ro●●● 〈◊〉 ●●ebeiens, Circenses, and others.  
〈…〉 infinite if I should undertake to discourse at large of all that may be spoken of 〈…〉: it shall suffice to have said this little, sending the curious to them that have 〈◊〉 books expressly of this matter. Let us therefore leave these ancient manners, 〈◊〉 unto the modern.   

¶ The Manners of this time.  
THe Romans of this time retain many things of the Ancient, as the gra●itie, which seems to be borne with them, the magnificence, and a certain greatness of courage particular to this nation, who know how to govern it with more discretion than the 〈◊〉 with their affected gravity. Finally Rome is in a mannerfull of strangers, which come from all parts of Europe; so as we may say that the manner of all these Nations are practised there, and therefore we can set down little in particular, the manners of the one and the other are so different. We must only say that it is a city, whereas they live with great ar●, and whereas they bear much respect unto the poorest that are capable to attain to any greatness; for that in this place they have seen so many wonders of fortune, as there is not any one so miserable, but he may be happy, being of the condition and capacity required; so as they fear to incense the meanest, lest having one day ●e●●es to revenge it, they should seek it. But to speak of them of the country, they a●e like to all other Italians, full of deceit, they do not easily forget injuries, they live wretchedly in their houses, but they are prodigal when they are to make any outward expense: the gentlemen there are courteous, affable, and very civil, fit for arms, and to command in war: but the common people of the Campagnia of Rome, are very gross, rude, and savage, but they are full of courage and strong, as well as the Ancient. They of the Marquilat of Ancona are of a fierce disposition, and therefore they are fit for war: they are tude in their conversation, and give themselves to husbandtie, not caring much for merchandise, it may be for that their country hath no navigable rivers, nor goodly plains, nor any other port but that of Ancona, which is not so good, as they make it, for that it is all filled up, and is not very safe. In Italy, they call them of Ferrara subtle, them of Bolognia wild and uncractable, them of faience co●ragious, them of Ostia importune, and them of Rome cruel and valiant. The Romans bring unto the war perseverance, the Ferrarois' artillery, and they of Viterbe spurs: they say also that they of Ancona are wretched, they of Ri●●i●i great eaters of geese, and they of Peruse eaters of fish, and delicate, and moreover that they dissemble their●splene when they have received any wrong: but the Ferrarois' s●eke revenge obstinately, like unto the Romans, who are more cruel than any other. As for their reception of strangers, the Ferrarois are rude, and they of Spoletur● gross, and in all things close. Touching the women, they say that the women of Pe●use are very neat and handsome, they of Beneuent rude, they of Bolognia somewhat glorious, they of Cesena catching and subject to take, the Romans grave, the Ferra●●●es greedy, and they of Rave●●a courteous. To end this discourse, all the Italians in general are so full of jealousy, as they keep their wives continually locked up in their houses, as in prisons, not suffering any man to see them, not not their most private friends, if it be not by an extraordinary favour, and with so many to observe them, and to watch their actions, that although the women had a will to make love, yet were it impossible for them to effect their desire, but with incredible art and extreme pain: they are very false hearted, and having once done them any wrong, there is no hope ever to be reconciled, as in other countries, for they will keep this hatred in their breasts whilst they live, and will continually study of revenge, yea many will make show to have forgotten the in●urie, to the end they may with more commodity take revenge: but the best is, never to trust them whom you have once discontented, for in the end if they can, they will 〈◊〉 you know, how 〈◊〉 it is unto them.   

¶ The Riches.  
THe 〈◊〉 of the Church abounds so in corn, and in all commodities, as it shall hardly fall into any want through defect of the soil, for that all the provinces being ●divided into plains and mountains, the year must be very unseasonable if all parts fail at 〈◊〉 and also there is such store of corn, wine, and oil, as it doth furnish other country's 〈◊〉 ●hereof Tuscanie, Genoa, Venice, and Sclavonia are witnesses. Wherefore death 〈◊〉 by their transportations, the which it is hard to prevent, for that they wholly 〈◊〉 on the disposition of the prince. But there may be abundance in some one 〈◊〉 yet they shall have no means to enjoy it, by reason of the multitudes of Ban●●●ished men, who commita thousand villainies, with an infinite number of spoils ●●herss: to which inconvenience it seems that the estate of the Church is partisubiect. And in truth many places of this estate lie waist, many fields are not maland many people are in miserable estate, by reason of the infinite spoils which ●●●eves commit. This might be remedied by being in good accord with the 〈◊〉 taking away the commodities of the woods and retreats of such people, and by 〈◊〉 the ways broader: By this means Augustus thought to prevent the murders ●●●efss which were committed throughout all Italy. If they seek to hold the field, 〈◊〉 first needful to keep them from joining together, and if they make a head, to ●ome means to make them jealous and distrustful one of another; and for conclu●●● follow the course and proceeding of Sixtus the fift, and of Clement the eight, who 〈◊〉 a manner rooted out the whole race.  
●●●nagnia makes salt which they carry into other Countries. 
A Sestier of wheat weighs 240 pounds: Some writ it is twelve bushels.  The Marquisat doth ●●earess vent one hundred thousand Sestiers of wheat, unto the Venetians, and great ●●●oyle. The Patrimony and the Campagnia of Rome have many times assisted 〈◊〉 with corn, and sometimes the realm of Naples.  
〈◊〉 the city of Rome there are some Princes and Barons which have fifty, and a ●●thousand crowns a year rend, and some more; but they are generally rather 〈◊〉 rich, the which must of necessity follow, where there is not any proper art 〈◊〉 which the people may entertain themselves, for that in a manner all things which 〈◊〉 brought from other countries, and especially their woollen cloth, and silks 〈◊〉, Lucca, Florence, Genoa, and Naples. It is also very remarkable to observe 〈◊〉 which is brought to Rome, from all parts of Christendom, partly for the 〈◊〉 strangers which remain there, and partly also for the expeditions which are 〈◊〉 and particularly for the bulls of benefices, and partly also for the investiture of ●●●landss, or for profit, or ambition.  
〈◊〉 traffic, we cannot deny but the Estate of the Church sails in this respect, 〈◊〉 the revenues of the Prince's lands are not proportionable to the greatness of 〈◊〉. But to make it of greater traffic, there are two things required. The one is to 〈◊〉 arts, especially that of silk and wool, which are of so great importance as 〈◊〉 most part) depends the greatness of Venice, Milan, Naples, and Genoa, 〈◊〉 people entertain themselves, and for the most part grow rich.  
〈◊〉 easy thing to plant Mulberry trees about Rome, and other towns of the 〈◊〉 they have done in the territories of Verona, Vincentia, and Milan. The soil 〈◊〉 and as fertile as any other. If the order of the Humbled, in the beginning of religion, were able to bring in the art of Wool to Florence, and into other places, 〈◊〉 it be difficult for the Pope's authority, and for a people that would employ 〈◊〉 or why might not these arts which flourish so in other towns, be transpor●●ome, Ancona, Ascoli, and Ravenna? The other thing is, the commodity of 〈◊〉 for the which it is necessary to cleanse and accommodat the ports of 〈◊〉, and Ancona, to draw the traffic of the West unto the first, and that of the East 〈◊〉 last, and they must also draw Merchants thither by goodly privileges and 〈◊〉 and entertain them kindly: wherein they must not be sparing, for that the 〈◊〉 of estates, and the riches of princes consists for the most part in the great access ●●urse of Merchants.  
〈◊〉 the Pope's revenues, they consist in the custom of Rome, and other tolls upon 〈◊〉 and ●o●sess, in the imposition of meal and salt at Rome, in the custom of oil and 〈◊〉 the estate of the Church, and in the custom of cattles in the Patrimony, in the 〈◊〉 of the Tolfe, the Controller general of the Posts, crimes at Rome, in the three 〈◊〉 paid by the Clergy, imposed by Paul the third for once, but afterwards made perpetual; in the three years aid paid by the religious of Italy, which are not of the ●●gging orders; in the collections of Spain, Portugal, and Italy; in the rents of S. Peter paid by the realm of Naples, and the duchies of Urbin, Parma, Placentia, and others; in the datary, which is the Dispatcher of the Pope's Bulls: and moreover, in the ordinary revenues of the 〈◊〉 of Rome, of the Marquisat, the Patrimony, Campagnia, Vmbria, Ferrara, Cameri●, Peruse, Bolognia, Beneuent, and of many villages, and other small revenues.  
I do not put into this account the profit of legations, and governments retained (as I h●ue sai●) by the Pope: For that it may be equalled with the pensions which he give●●n●o diverse Cardinals that be poor. I do not also reckon the Annates, and first f●●i●● of benefices, and pensions for the expedition of Bulls, for that they come not to 〈◊〉 Chamber, but are affected to divers officers. Many of these revenues have been crenated by divers Popes, and yet at this day they yield about a million and a half of c●o●neses.  
These Alienations have been made under divers names, either of Offices, or of Monts. The offices are in a manner all the Ordinaries of the Court, and many other Ordinaries are added, the which have this condition, That they are void by death, or that when as he that holds them is made a Cardinal, and then the Chamber sells them again: and they make account that this profit doth yield 500000 crowns.  
The Monts are of two natures, either void by death, and these yield twelve in the hundred by the year; or else they pass unto their h●ireses, and they yield seven, or seven and a half, the which the Chamber pays yearly.  
Besides this, there are many charges upon the revenues, as the government of Rome, and the Provinces, and that which is given to the officers of the people of Rome. Moreover, the expenses of the household, of the guard of Swisses, and light horse, of the guard of the Castle S. Ange, Ostia, Civi●●-vecchia, Ter●acina, and Oruiete, of the Singingmen, and many other expenses of the Chapel, of Trumpets, pensions of di●●●s Officers, Noncios, Po●●●, Alms, and gifts. But notwithstanding all these things, ●od the gre●●●●easure which Pope Pi●● the fift employed in many buildings, yet he managed his estate so thrivingly, as in five years that he was Pope he laid up four millions of gold in the Ca●●ell of S. Ange. For the Pope hath always means to raise money speedily, by two ways especially, the one in creating of Cardinals, if not openly for money, yet at the lest by reason of the Benefices and Offices which shall be void: the other by opening his hand a little, allowing of Resignations, and giving other graces, as hath been accustomed. But for the doing of this, the Pope must apply his conscience to his affairs: and therefore Sixtus the fourth said, That he would never want sil●er whilst he had a hand and a pen: And in truth, Pius the fourth did draw from the orders of religious men only four hundred thousand crowns, and might have had a million, if he would (as some advised him) have admitted of the Resignations of Benefices, with this clause. That if he to whom it was resigned, died, it should return to the Resignor: and for the composition of Offices. Paul the third entered into league with the Venetians and the Emperor against the Turk, for the sixt part of the charge; and he sent to succour Charles the fift, twelve thousand foot and five hundred horse entertained, and yet he advanced his house to that greatness wherein we now see it. Pius the fift sent four thousand foot, and one thousand horse, to Charles the ninth the French 〈◊〉.  
〈◊〉 ●o let the Reader see more plainly the Pope's revenues, and expenses, I have thought it 〈◊〉 to set down a particular estate, such as I could collect.  

The customs of Rome have been usually rent out to him that would give most, for nine years, that is to say, after the rate of five and thirty thousand crowns, or ●●ereabou●ss, a year; and in deducting all the Regalities, with the Augmentation, the ●●ceiptss which are used, the wines of Ambassadors, and religious places which are free, 〈◊〉 others that are privileged, there will remain at the disposition of the Chamber 〈◊〉 time 17000 crowns.  
〈◊〉 custom of salt in Rome let out commonly for seven years to him that will give 〈◊〉 and deducting all regalities, and charges, there remains yearly for the 〈◊〉 8960 crowns.  
composition of two carlins for the grinding of corn in Rome, was erected by 〈◊〉 the third, and afterwards it was augmented unto the sum of 21333 crowns,  
〈◊〉 rate of seven and a half for the hundred, and afterwards they were reduced to 〈◊〉 Pius the fift, and assigned to the Masters of the building, and the whole revenue 〈◊〉 of the managing is given to the people of Rome, with the oversight of one of 〈◊〉 of the Chamber) amounts to 16000 crowns.  
〈◊〉 do let out the custom of the Quatrin upon flesh at Rome, after the rate of 〈◊〉 in the hundred 20000 crowns.  
composition of four julios upon the tun granted to the people of Rome 3000 crow.  
●●impost of a Quatrin upon every pound of flesh in the Estate of the Church, 〈◊〉 Rome, Bolognia, Camerin, and Beneuent, is let out commonly for 60000 crowns  
〈◊〉: but by reason of the expenses and regalities there remains not yearly unto the ●●●ber above 5000 crowns.  
〈◊〉 mastership of the posts at Rome, and throughout all the Estate of the Church, ●●ed for 5000 crowns, but deducting all charges and recompenses, there remains 〈◊〉 Chamber 2000 crowns.  
〈◊〉 lights of Tolfe were sometimes let for 64500 crowns a year, whereof they ●●00 crowns to the makers of alum, and the rest to divers others, with the rights ●●●aister of the Chamber, so as there remains nothing for the Chamber. ●●●●osition of candles is let yearly at 3000 crowns.  
〈◊〉 of S. Peter comes yearly to 31000 crowns, and they demand it every year 〈◊〉 Peter's day 31000 crowns.  
〈◊〉 Clergy compounding for their spoils, pay yearly to St. Peter 2160 crowns.  
●●●quarter of religious Monks, amounts yearly to 30662 crowns, whereof they 〈◊〉 crowns to Mont Navinall of the Monks, the which they extinguish, and the 〈◊〉 15702 to Mont Pie, so as there remains nothing for the Chamber. 〈◊〉 Triennall subsidy of the Marquisat, amounts to 60000 crowns of gold, after ●●●ulios to the crown; whereof they leave 400 crowns for the building of 〈◊〉 crowns for the walls of Fane, and 1160 crowns for the walls of Civita 〈◊〉 to Mont Cosere, sold unto the Seigneur john George Cesarin, and 25 crowns for treasurer's wages, and they pay yearly 4000 crowns unto the depositary; so as in 〈◊〉 of the year there remains unto the Chamber 4958 crowns.  
●●Triennall subsidy of Rome amounts to 40304 crowns, whereof they deduct 〈◊〉 privileges, and 223 crowns are left to the Treasurer of the Province for the ●●●guard, whereof he makes account, and other 5400 crowns to the College of 〈◊〉 of the Chamber for the three which be added, and 203 crowns to the Treasurer ●●●llects this subsidy, for his wages, and the carrying of money to Rome; so as there 〈◊〉 clear unto the Chamber 29758 crowns.  
Triennal subsidy of Vmbria & Peruse 39701 crowns after 11 julios to the crown, 〈◊〉 of they deduct for lands that are privileged 741 crowns, and they pay yearly to ●●easurer of Peruse 9485 crowns, to supply the payments of the Treasury: but 〈◊〉 ●●all have hereafter, and they have at this day the greatest part: and 290 crowns 〈◊〉, and the carrying of money, and they have been accustomed to leave 200 〈◊〉 a year more for wages; so as there remains to the Chamber 29076 crowns.  
〈◊〉 Triennal subsidy of the Campagnia of Rome, with the maritime places, comes 〈◊〉 1565 crowns: the lands being taxed at 2048 crowns.  
〈◊〉 which were set in the year 1551 by the Pope at 1755 crowns of gold, and in the 〈◊〉 1571, by Pope Pius, at 15553 crowns, and deducting 770 crowns which they did 〈◊〉 for the impossibility of the exemptions, and 120 crowns for the Collectors 〈◊〉 transportation of money, there remains 14643 crowns of gold, whereof there 〈◊〉 ●n money unto the Chamber about 13632 crowns.  
The tax of horses in the Marquisat amounts to 77221 crowns, and they are assigned to the Treasurer of the Province, so as the revenue which enters into the said Treasury is yearly 77221 crowns.  
The tax of horses of the Patrimony comes to 978 crowns, and was given in assignation to the farmer of the customs of the Patrimony, and they collect 978 crowns.  
The tax of the horses of Romagna amounts to 5027 crowns, where of some part is paid for the recompense of the mills of Ravenna, and part to the College of Mont Pate, not voided; so as there comes yearly unto the Chamber, which they draw out of the Treasury of Ravenna, but 800 crowns.  
Tyvoli pa●eses for yearly rent 200 crowns, the which was sometimes given to the deceased Cardinal of Ferrara, and at this day is paid to the depositary 200 crowns.  
The augmentation of the triennall subsidy of the Marquisat, amounts to 10134 c●●●neses, after twelve julios to the crown: they deduct 202 crowns for the charges, and twenty for the Collector, and for the carrying of money; so as there remains for the Chamber 9912 crowns.  
The augmentation of the province of Romagna comes to 6512 crowns of gold, 〈◊〉 deduct 114 crowns for the lands which pay less for the subsidy of three years, and 70 crowns for the Collectors wages, and the carrying of money, there remains for the Chamber 6325 crowns.  
The augmentation of the province of the Patrimony is 2423 crowns: they deduct 305 crowns for those lands which pays no subsidy, and 100 crowns for the Collector, and carrying of money; there remains 2018 crowns.  
The Treasurorship of the Marquisat, with the tax of horses of this province is commonly rent at 6215 crowns.  
The Treasutorship of Romagna is let at 3597 crowns, at ten julios to the crown, and for the government of that province, and the Prerogatives of the Signior of the Apostolic Chamber, and to the Pope's depositary 1270 crowns.  
The Treasurer of Romagna receives for the Triennall subsidy 2720 crowns, and 2000 crowns for the Legates Estate, and 3360 crowns for the guard, and 2220 crowns for the Bol; whereof they deduct 1700 crowns for the Vice-legates entertainment, and 1068 crowns for the guard. There remains to the Chamber 7548 crowns.  
The Custom and Treasurorship of the Patrimony is let for 66377 crowns: but for that there are many prerogatives and disbursements, there remains little for the Chamber.  
The Treasurorship of Camerin is rent at 24500 crowns for nine year: but by reason of many payments there remains little for the Chamber.  
The Treasurorship of Peruse and Vmbria, with the taxes of horses of the said province, is commonly let for 20300 crowns, but by reason of the great regalities and payments there remains little for the Chamber.  
The Treasurorship of Ascoli is rent for five years at 6354 crowns, but by reason of many regalities and payments, there remains little for the Chamber.  
The Treasurorship of Campagnia yields 10000 crowns, but by reason of divers payments, there remains nothing.  
The Treasurorship of Norcia held by Nicholas Spinelli, having advanced money to the Chamber, and to keep the account of the revenues of the commonalty, yields no account unto the Chamber.  
The Treasurorship of Cascia was sold in April 1572 to joseph jeronim● of Foligni, who g●ue 500 crowns of gold unto the Chamber, and he yields no account.  
The Treasurorship of Beneuent pays 454 crowns to them of the Chamber, 728 crowns for wages and divers charges, 768 crowns to the Governor, and 50 crowns to him that holds the place● therefore there remains little to the Chamber.  
The impost of Spoletum hath been let for 4260 crowns yearly, whereof they pay 〈◊〉 crowns to the Treasurer of Peruse, and 1260 to the Governor of Spol●tum; so as 〈◊〉 remains for the Chamber 2219 crowns.  
The custom of Ancona is farmed to the College of Mont Pie for 3500 crowns a 〈◊〉 assigned to the College: And moreover, the transportation of 1000 Charges 〈◊〉, which not being levied, pays unto the Chamber 1000 crowns a year, and I ●●wnes for the Prerogatives of the Master of the Chamber, 3500 crowns.  
〈◊〉 custom of Amaragis, of Civita Nova, is let yearly for 13000 crowns, whereof 〈◊〉 to the Apostolic Secretaries 117, and to the Nuns of Viterbe 173 crowns: 〈◊〉 remains for the Chamber 12710 crowns.  
〈◊〉 a●me of Biede is 1030 crowns, the which they pay unto the depositary. 〈◊〉 Casal of Magrotte did yield yearly to the Chamber 9240 crowns, and was sold 〈◊〉 Paul the fourth to the Hospital of the Holy Ghost. 〈◊〉 custom of the Quatrin upon every pound of flesh, at Bolognia, amounts yearly 〈◊〉 8 crowns, assigned to the Mount of Augmentation at Bolognia 6038 crowns.  
〈◊〉 Triennall Subsidy at Bolognia for 9900 crowns, was assigned to the Mount of ●●●●●entation. Some hold that it doth amount to 50000 crowns yearly, all the offi●●● their assignments there.  
●●●rent of Riete was sometimes engaged to john Baptista of Serene, for 400 crowns,  
〈◊〉, the son of Peter Paul Mignanel did enjoy it. It yields yearly the sum 〈◊〉 816 crowns.  
〈◊〉 last passages were accustomed to be let yearly for 250 crowns, but they were 〈◊〉 to Francis Fontaine, and afterwards held by jerosme Ceoli. 〈◊〉 Minutes of the Chancery yield yearly 10000 crowns, and are in a manner all 〈…〉 his Holiness officers, and household servants.  
〈◊〉 fit of the Mount of the Religion brings unto the Chamber 16338 crowns.  
〈◊〉 let times the toll of wine was rent at Bolognia at 600 crowns.  
●●●onsignation of Fane for crimes was assigned to the Treasurer of the Marquisat, 〈◊〉 remained nothing but the transportations, the which doth amount yearly 〈◊〉 100 crowns.  
〈◊〉 of Seiches, did in former times pay yearly 140 crowns.  
〈…〉 of making of Alum doth come yearly to 200 crowns.  
〈…〉 of Salt of Sclavonia yields yearly 750 crowns.  
〈◊〉 profits of Mont Pie, which should be extinguished, they draw by the year 〈◊〉 of 2350 crowns.  
〈◊〉 rest of the Mont of avignon, they make yearly 616 crowns.    

¶ The Revenues of the See which are uncertain.  
〈◊〉 two first years of Pope Sixtus did yield 
13000 crowns.  〈…〉 say that the collection of Spain, one year with another, amounts unto the 〈◊〉 of 
44000 crowns.  That of Portugal amounts one year with another to 
22000 crowns.  〈◊〉 of Italy, one year with another 
12000 crowns.  〈…〉 transportation of corn, out of Patrimony, the Marquisat, and Romagna, 〈◊〉 one year with another, come to 
30000 crowns.  〈◊〉 rests of the Mont vacable have yielded one year with another 
1000 crowns.  〈◊〉 profits of Monts which are vacable comes yearly to about 
7500 crowns.  enlarging of Ecclesiastical livings comes yearly to 
3500 crowns.  〈◊〉 depositary or Consignation of Bolognia, yeeds yearly about 
4000 crowns:  〈…〉 remains within the town. 
   〈◊〉 Dat●rie, or Dispatcher of the Pope's Bulls, yields yearly. 
68250 crowns.    

¶ What the Pope gives to Cardinals, and what he spends in other things.  
〈◊〉 yearly in pensions and fees to Cardinals, to some more, to some less, the 〈◊〉 of 
1310 crowns.  There is commonly given to his Holiness high Steward for his yearly expense, the sum of 
6000 crowns.  Moore to him for aid of Court, 
12000 crowns.  For the renewing of the Cupboard twice a year, 
200 crowns.  For the apparel of the household at Christmas, 
1720 crowns.  For the apparel of the Grooms of the stable twice a year, at S. john Baptista, and at Christmas, 
1350 crowns.  For the charges of his Holiness office of Secretary yearly, 
332 crowns.  To a Clerk under the Secretary yearly, 
180 crowns.  All the Singingmen of his Holiness Chapel, have for their yearly wages the sum of 
4656 crowns.  To the Apothecary for the wax of the Chapel, which he doth furnish for the Pope's ●se, 
1500 crowns.  For the wax at Candlemas, 
1500 crowns.  For the Green Cloth, 
240 crowns.  For the charges on Thursday before Easter, 
250 crowns.  For the Olive branches, 
270 crowns.  For the rose of gold which he gives, 
240 crowns.  For the Sword, Girdle, and Hat, embroidered with pearl, 
380 crowns.  For a Canopy of cloth of gold, for Christ, and the Virgin Marie, with the fashion, the sum of 
3000 crowns.  For the tents on Corpus Christi day, with all the preparation, 
250 crowns.  Wages of esquires and Grooms of the Chamber by the month, 
20 crowns.  To them that keep the Records monthly, 
25 crowns.    

¶ What he gives to his Noncios.  
TO his Noncio which is with the Emperor, every month, 
230 crowns.  To the Noncio that is in France monthly, 
145 crowns.  To his Noncio which is at Venice monthly, 
230 crowns.  To his Noncio in Savoy by the month, 
115 crowns.  To his Noncio with the duke of Tuscanie, 
57 crowns.  To his Noncio in Germany by the month, 
115 crowns.  To his Noncio in Poland by the month, 
230 crowns.  To his Noncio with the Princes of Germany, 
130 crowns.  To his Noncio at Naples. 
   To his Noncio in Spain. 
     

¶ The Pope's Guards.  
To the Captain general of his Holiness guards, yearly the sum of 
2400 crowns.  To his Lieutenant by the year, 
639 crowns.  To his guard of men at arms, and light horse, 
10077 crowns.  To the Swisses by the year, 
10932 crowns.  To the Swisses for their apparel, 
2600 crowns.  Moore to them for their caps and feathers, 
200 crowns.  〈◊〉 their lesser and greater ensigns, 
1000 crowns.  In horses to give at Christmas, and other times, 
2000 crowns.  For th● hire of horses for the Swisses, when his Holiness goes out of Rome, the sum of 
250 crowns.    

¶ The Forces.  
〈◊〉 for soldiers, the general opinion is, That the best soldiers of all Italy are in the 〈◊〉 ate of the Church, and they make account that the Marquisat and Romagna are 〈…〉 twenty and five thousand men fit to bear arms, and it may be the 〈…〉 Campagnia as many. And without doubt, there is no question but a Pope ●●ccompanied with some others, may with his means and forces, do good and 〈…〉 he pleaseth, especially in Italy, where he hath so great a share, whereof we 〈…〉 ●ant of examples, which teach us that Popes with less forces than they have 〈…〉 maintained their authority against the mightiest princes; that they deposed 〈…〉 and Kings, and changed Estates at their pleasures: yea we know what Pope 〈…〉 could do in the time of our fathers, who drew the French king to pass the 〈…〉 to put all Italy into combustion.  
〈…〉 tenth, and Clement the seventh settled the greatness of their houses by many 〈…〉 they made alone, and accompanied with others; and Clement after that he had 〈◊〉 some crosses and misfortunes grew greater than he was before. Paul the third 〈◊〉 the dignity of the Church, and the quiet of Italy, betwixt two mighty 〈◊〉 more by his authority, than by arms: he made war against the Turk, and left his 〈◊〉 in that greatness we now see it. julio the third taking arms in Italy, brought all ●●●●●usion: and Paul the fourth spent many millions of gold, and left a remarkable ex●●●●●hich may grow by the ill governed designs of a Pope. Wherefore as the 〈◊〉 accustomed to sacrifice to some gods for the obtaining of good, & to others reharm; so it hath been held wisdom to be always in good terms with Popes, 〈◊〉 ●ood or otherwise: for as the favours which well affected Popes may do, are 〈◊〉 in war and peace; so the harms which we may receive from ill disposed ●●●nemies, are very dangerous, and he that hath a will to trouble others shall ●●●men to thrust them on.  
〈◊〉 reason, all the princes of Christendom both great and small, either moved 〈◊〉 or with some other considerations, have humbled themselves unto the Popes, ●●●nerall, were they never so great, have sought to make them their friends, or 〈◊〉 not to be opposite unto them. But to return to the people which are under the 〈◊〉, having showed what numbers may be drawn out of two or three 〈◊〉 war, we must consider the quality of these men.  
〈…〉 is full of warlike men, and for this cause fit to keep an enemy fro● 〈◊〉 to make him repent it, if he shall landlord.  
〈…〉 are the Latins and Romans, the subduers of the world, and they of 〈◊〉 of whose valour, we will say no other thing, but that by their means Italy was 〈…〉 the barbarous nations which did tyrannize it, and recovered her first glory. 〈…〉 earl of Cuni, having gathered together twelve thousand fight men, 〈…〉 called the company of S. George, he pursued in such sort the foreign nations 〈◊〉 ●●ged Italy, as he expelled them all, & restored the discipline of war in such sort, 〈…〉 before was ill understood by the Italians, as they did not hold him a captain 〈…〉 not marched and fought under his command.  
〈◊〉 of the Marquisat were the first which began the social war, the which the 〈…〉 held to be one of the most dangerous they ever had. There you see the Vmbrians, 〈◊〉 adistance Hannibal felt, after that he had vanquished the Romans at the Lake of 〈◊〉, not being able to make himself master of Spoletum; whereby he found 〈…〉 it would be to subdue Rome, seeing that after so great a victory, he had 〈…〉 town in vain.  
〈◊〉 excellency of captains is no less, than the valour of soldiers, in the Estate of 〈…〉: for there are many families able to furnish all the princes and 〈…〉 Europe with captains: so as it is no wonder if in the war of Ferrara, happily 〈◊〉 short time, there were near twenty thousand foot, and two thousand horse 〈…〉 arms, all out of this Estate, almost in one month, the which few other 〈◊〉 ●●ope could have done.  
〈…〉 the situation, this Estate lies betwixt the Adriatic and the Tyrrhene sea, and is 〈…〉 the midst of Italy; wherefore as it is secured from the spoils of the 〈…〉 it lies 〈◊〉 to trouble Italy, or to keep it in peace.  
There is not any port capable of a great fleet, and the Roman coast is much subject to tempest's, like unto that of the Marquisat and Romagna; so as he cannot be assaulted by sea, neither with great forces, nor without danger. We must add hereunto that the part which lies upon the Tuscan sea is unhealthful; the which alone were sufficient to encounter and defeat an enemy.  
Moreover the Marquisat and Romagna have for a rampire and bastion, on this side Sclavonia, and on the other the two Siciles: the which doth sufficiently appear, for that the Turke● never durst approach it, notwithstanding that they have much desired it: and by land there are not any confines which he should fear, for he exceeds Tuscanie in forces, and doth not yield to the realm of Naples: for notwithstanding that this realm be gre●er, richer, and better peopled than the Estate of the Church, yet is it nothing inferiors in many things.  
First, being long and narrow there is much more difficulty to unite her forces: besides it ●● a country of conquest, so as the prince cannot use the service of those people with the ●like assurance, as if they were his natural subjects, for that he is forced to maintain great ●●risonss, wherein the king of Spain doth in a manner spend all the revenues. But the Pope is natural Lord of this Estate, for the preservation whereof he shall not be enforced (in regard of his subjects) to spend any thing: I leave the authority which religion gives unto ●he Pope, and the interest which other princes have in the preservation of the Church's estate, whose fall would be their loss; and I also forbear to show with what readiness foreign princes would undertake the protection of the Church, either for glory, or for some reason of State. And therefore we did see Gregory the seventh, and Alexander the third, make head against princes which had the forces of the Empire (being then more powerful than they are at this day) united to the two Siciles.  
What shall I say of the sorts of Oruiette, Citecastellana, Castro, paliano, of the castle of Spoletum, Peruse, Ancona, Forli, Bertinor, the town and citadel of Ferrara: and in like manner we may say that Vmbria by reason of the strait passages, and the ●●ughnesse of the situation, is nothing but a fort.  
This Estate might be fully assured, either by fortifying it with places of strength, as ●he Venetians do●, or with soldiers as the Turk, or with the one and the other, as the French king, and he of Spain use to do.  
As for forts (I speak in hereditary Estates, and not of conquest, and gotten by force and violence) it is questionable, Whether it be better to fortify the frontiers, or the heart of an Estate or both together? Whereupon I say, that of chief towns, some are like unto the heart, as well for their situation, as for their office: for that they are in the midst of Estates, as Lisbon, Prague, London, Florence, Paris, and Madrid, by reason of the office, for that with their riches they give strength to the other members: some are like unto the heart touching the office, and to the head in regard of the situation, for that they are not in the midst of the Estate, but upon some extremity, as Naples, Palermo, Messina, or Genova, which is seated in the midst of the river or province, in regard of the length, but upon an extremity in respect of the breadth.  
Chief capital towns which are in the midst of Estates, should rather be safe than strong, and the safety consists to be far from danger: this is obtained by the fortification of frontiers and passages. For the fortification of a chief town seated in the heart of an Estate, doth first of all make them faint hearted that devil in the rest of the country, ●nd doth also blemish the prince's authority and reputation, as if distrusting to be able to 〈◊〉 land de●end the rest, he should seek to save himself in the heart of his Estate: for th● 〈◊〉 as the natural heat retires itself from the feet, legs, and other remote parts un●o the 〈◊〉, there is little hope of the patient's health● so whenas a prince doth fortify the town of his abode, and the midst of his Estate, it seems that he is without courage, or means to defend his frontiers. Moreover, saving the extremities, he shall preserve the midst, but not contrariwise: and therefore the midst must employ itself for 〈◊〉 own good to fortify the extremities; the which cannot be done if you do fortify 〈◊〉 ●iddest, for that it will be necessary to put into the fortification and supplying of this 〈◊〉, that which should be fit for the extremities, that is to say, victuals, artillery, 〈…〉 ●●●es, and soldiers. And for that the chief cities are commonly great, they 〈◊〉 great expense and provision, as there will be no means remaining to fortify 〈…〉 for the frontiers. This hath been tried by the duke of Mantova in the 〈…〉 Casal. And by this means (in my opinion) I have answered that which 〈…〉 that we may fortify the extremities and the midst altogether.  
●●●●lude, the end of all frontiers and extremities is to keep the enemy out of the 〈…〉 the middle part must have a special care to furnish the extremities; as we see 〈…〉 that hath life and soul, the office of the hands is to keep it from dangers, and 〈…〉 heart to furnish vigour and force to the hands. Besides, a chief City shall ●●●●ave better means to secure the extremities not being fortified; but also will 〈…〉 care, being forced to lodge all her hope in the safety and defence of the 〈◊〉 ●herefore I conclude, that such a town is fit to keep the enemies far off, 〈◊〉 ●●●mish the frontier with all her forces, not being fortified, than with part of the 〈…〉, being put in defence. All which is spoken of Estates that are somewhat great: 〈◊〉 small ones, whose extremities are in a manner joined to the heart, the 〈…〉 midst is very necessary.  
●he chief cities being seated otherwise, and which are more like unto the head 〈◊〉 heart, not being safe, for that they are near unto some extremity, ●●●●●fied. Wherefore, as nature doth assure the heads of some beasts, not only with 〈◊〉 but also with homes; so the reason of State and war doth not only environ 〈…〉 with walls, but doth also fortify them with citadels.  
〈…〉 say, That towns seated in the centre of an Estate, do as much resemble the 〈…〉 heart, for they do impart to places which are about them, not only spirit, 〈◊〉 caper to the heart, but also judgement and conduct, which belongs unto the 〈◊〉 fore, in fortifying the one, it cannot be denied in the other. It is not hard 〈…〉 difficulty: For first of all, the head in beasts serves both for head and 〈…〉 head, for that it contains the brains; and for hands, for that this beast useth 〈…〉▪ And there are some beasts which do it with the mouth, and to this effect 〈…〉 long and great, as the Dog, the Wolf, the Lion, Fish, and Fowl: some 〈…〉 ●heir horns, as the Bull, the Stag, and the Bugle: others offend with 〈…〉 which are extraordinarily long, as the Boar, and the Elephant, who hath 〈…〉 or snout, for that the office of the head is not to fight, but to foresee 〈◊〉 ●●●●ment wherewith it is endowed, and it is the hand which must repulse all 〈…〉 blows, and prevent dangers. Wherefore the head of beasts is not 〈…〉 head, but as the hand. Moreover, the government of the State, doth not 〈…〉 ●he place, but of the Prince and Magistrate, who remains sometimes in one 〈…〉 ●●●etimes in another.  
〈…〉 caused the Pope to remain sometimes at Viterbe, sometimes at Oruiette, at 〈…〉 Anagnia, at Rieti, in avignon, and Ferrara. But as for the giving vigour to 〈…〉, it depends upon the heart of the Estate; by the greatness of the revenues, 〈…〉 of munition and victuals, multitude of men, and commodity of situation: 〈…〉 cannot be transported from one place unto another.  
●ome is not in the midst of the Estate of the Church, for that it is far from 〈…〉 and Ferrara, and near unto the frontier of Abruzzo, and yet it is not upon 〈…〉, or near unto an enemy: and therefore it is not fit that it should be 〈◊〉 ●●●●●fied, nor altogether weak and neglected, but as we see it, with the borough, 〈◊〉 ●●●●●●●ed, and the rest rather walled than well rampired: for if it were 〈…〉, it would 'cause the disorders and inconveniences whereof we have spoken; 〈…〉 the Estate, consume the enemy, and give time to secure, it shall suffice, the 〈…〉 hand Castle be fortified.  
〈…〉 speak something of that which they have done at divers times, touching the 〈…〉 of Rome: Belli●●●●●● repaired the ruined walls, but with a far lesser circuit. ●●●llss being afterwards overthrown, Ad●tan the first re-edified them, and 〈◊〉 ●●●rth, to keep the Sarrazins from entering into Rome, coming up the river, he built ●●●teene Towers about the City, whereof there were two very necessary, that is, one upon either side of the river of Tibet. He compassed in the Vatican with a wall, which he called by his name Le●nina. Nicholas the third did wall in Belueder. Paul the third began to wall in the Borough, with a design, That Rome being very solitary towards the East, and the wall far from the places inhabited, and for that cause not to be well fortified o● that side, not to be defended with few men, the people might have there at the le●●● some refuge for a time. Pius the fourth did finish this fortification, and 〈◊〉 Castle. There remains then to have the frontiers fortified.  
The Church confines with the realm of Naples in all places crossing Italy from one Sea unto another: the Perusin, and the Patrimony, confine with the great Duke; the Countries of Ferrara and Bolognia with the duke of Mantua. Moreover, the interest of Princes will not allow a league and union among them against the Church, for that it is more expedient for them all to maintain her in her greatness, than by her fall any prince should grow greater, being already mighty of himself: For as the Pope is universal F●●●●er, as they say; so it seems that the Estate of the Church, is an Estate from the which all should attend succours, as the Venetians have often had against the Turk, the Knights of Malta in their necessities, and the Emperor Charles in the war of Saxo●ie, for that all these have been relieved with men and money from Popes. I do not speak of the Emperor Ferdinand, or of Maximilian, or of Rodolfe which last reigned, or of the Prince of Transiluania, which have all received succours of horse and foot against the Turk, with great sums of money from Clement the seventh, Paul the third, Pius the third, Pius the fift, and Clement the eight. Wherefore (in my opinion) it doth more import the Pope to maintain himself in the reputation of a common father, and not to break with any one, than to fortify his places: for that as by this means he doth assure all the neighbour Princes to his Estate; so they will all secure him, and strive to serve and succour him. But if he shall fortify any place, let it be in the remotest parts, which are those of Ferrara and Bolognia. As for Ferrara, it is so strong, as the Church cannot receive any loss on that side. The country of Bolognia is weak, for that the City is not strong, not well fortified, by reason of some places which command it. So as to assure the State of that side, the best course will be to fortify Castelfranc, the which for that it stands in a plain, and not subject to any command, is capable of any fortification; and for that it is in a fruitful country, and hath Bolognia for neighbour, and inte●essed in her defence, for her own good, it may be easily furnished and supplied. Pius the fift began the fortification of Castelfranco, but he gave it over at the first, by reason of the bruit of the war of Cypress. With these two keys of Ferrara, and Castelfranco, the Estate of the Church should be secured from all storms which may happen on the other side of the Alpes and Lombardie. Towards the realm of Naples, the length of the frontier would require many sort●. Wherefore, towards the Marquisat, they may fortify Transone, Osside, and Ascoli; but Ascoli being a good town, strong of situation, and of people, and situated beyond the river of Tront in the enemy's country, were able to trouble them in their own Estate, as the true reason of war doth require. Towards Sabina, it will suffice to have Rieti, a reasonable good town, and in a good country, the which must not be abandoned to the enemy. Towards Campagnia, although it would be a matter of importance to fortify Terracina, Frusinon, Firentin, Segni, and Anagnia, yet 〈◊〉 hold that it would suffice to make Frusinon and Anagnia defensible, ruining all the ●●●ller forts which are nearer to Rome, to the end the enemy should not lodge there and 〈◊〉 them strong. Towards Tuscanie, the Church hath the towns of Castello, Peruse, 〈◊〉 Castro, and Viterbe, which for the most part are of good strength. But to speak the truth▪ the state of the Church, being in most danger towards Tuscanie, not in regard of the forces of that duke, but for the passage he may give unto the enemy, as they 〈◊〉 unto Charles the eight, the French king, and to Charles duke of Bourbon, it shall be sit 〈◊〉 the Pope shall always endeavour to have the duke of Tuscanie for friend, so as he 〈◊〉 be a defence for him against strangers. 〈◊〉 must now speak of the Tuscan sea: and doubtless it is fit that the Pope have 〈◊〉 galleys well appointed, as well to assure the sea and navigation, as for a certain 〈…〉 and reputation; for that it would seem an unworthy thing to abandon this 〈…〉 the which the Church hath so many places: & it seems that a prince which doth 〈…〉 his sea forces to them at land cannot be held powerful: but the galleys might 〈…〉 in command to some order of knights, to whom they might give the Island 〈…〉 for their abode. But to know of what sort this order should be instituted: the 〈…〉 of the great duke Cosmo doth show it, the manner whereof would be tedious to 〈…〉 were fit that the chief of the order should remain at Ponze with the galleys; 〈◊〉 ●hat the galleyslaves and the other people, whom the bad air consumes at 〈◊〉 would be more healthful there, and more lusty; and also that by their aid 〈◊〉 which is eighteen miles in circuit, and hath near unto it Palmaivole which hath 〈◊〉 and januco six, with three other smaller Islands, all fertile (the which in Strahos 〈…〉 full of inhabitants) should be secured from pirates, and manured. And they 〈◊〉 also draw some profit from this sea, which abounds in fish, & especially pilchards. 〈…〉 the galleys should be in a fit place to discover the sea, and more commodious 〈◊〉 pirates, which should go towards the land to get some booty, or in their return. 〈◊〉 is not any thing whereof they should have more care, than to preserve and 〈…〉 the inhabitants of the State, for thereon doth the greatness of all 〈…〉.  
●●●upon I think it fit to discourse of the reason why in many parts of Italy the 〈…〉 their inhabitants fail, that we may prevent it in the Estate whereof we speak. 〈…〉 fail partly by natural causes, as the plague, and partly also by causes which 〈◊〉 natural and human, as famine (for that it doth seldom happen that nature 〈◊〉 earth, without the concourse and covetousness of men) and partly by causes 〈◊〉 merely human, as war, thefts, spoils, and such like. Men decay also for that 〈…〉 pay from foreign princes, and go to serve in their wars; and in this point 〈…〉 any Estate that smarts more than the Church, for that it is as a common field, 〈…〉 every one hath his designs, and whose forces they all employ. Men decay 〈…〉 the prince overchargeth his countries with taxes and impositions, by reason 〈…〉 the people not able to maintain themselves, marry not, or else they leave the 〈…〉: or if any marry, and make their abode there, they have no means to entertain 〈…〉, much less to breed up their children, by reason whereof the high ways are 〈◊〉 ●●ggerss. Men decay also in those places whereas the prince not only takes away 〈…〉 substance, but also shuts up the money which he draws from them; for 〈…〉 away their silver by impositions, he doth also deprive them of their lives, in 〈…〉 them all means of getting, to pay those impositions: but he doth worse, 〈◊〉 only deprives his subjects of all means to get, but will also have the gain 〈◊〉 using traffic. War and enterprises a far of which consume many, for that 〈…〉; the which the Spaniards found in their enterprises of America, and have tried 〈…〉 of Flanders, and the Portugals in their voyages to this East Indies: the Turks 〈…〉 trial of the like in their wars of Persia, and in like manner in those of 〈…〉 that makes a people miserable and ● country desert, is gluttony, and pomp, 〈…〉 the cause that they which should be able to feed ten persons with their 〈…〉 are scarce able to maintain one, and that labouring in vain and superfluous things, 〈…〉 the profitable and necessary. The people also decay if the profits first 〈…〉 many, come into the hands of few: the which happened to Italy under the 〈…〉 by reason whereof Pli●ie saith, That it was without inhabitants, for the 〈…〉 few men's wealth.   

¶ The Government of the ancient Romans.  
〈…〉 the Romans government hath been so good, as in a manner all their 〈…〉 succeeded happily, I thought I should give content unto the Reader, if I did 〈◊〉 a brief description of the ancient government of those who made themselves ●●●refull to all that were known unto them, as well for their wisdom, and admirable conduct, as for their valour. I will therefore begin with the Senate, of whom depended all the government of affairs, and I will show how it was before the Monarchy, and what after.  
The order of Senators was instituted by Romulus, who considering that his town was fortified with able and active young men, and that it was of noless importance to strengthen it with council, he made choice of a hundred of the chief citizens at that time, whom he called Fathers by honour, and Senators in regard of their age; and they that were afterwards borne of these fathers, were called Pat●ieij. Tullus Hostilius made this order more perfect after that he had ruined Alba, and carried the inhabitants to Rome: for he received then among the Senators, the Tullij, the Seruily, the Quintij, the Gregantij, and the Clodij: but when the kings were expelled, Brutus the Consul seeing the Senate ●●stitute of good men, would have the chief of the Order of Knights made Senators, and called them Patres Cons●ripti, that is to say, joined with the fathers. These Senators ●ooke upon them so great authority, as they governed all the affairs of the commonweal; so as neither the Kings, Consuls, nor Dictator's, nor any other Magistrate, did any thing, but what was first resolved in the Senate; and Tarquin the Proud having done many things without the authority of the Senate, was called Tyrant, & in the end lost his Estate. I found there were three orders of Senators; for that some were called Patricij, others Pedarij, and the third Conscripti: we have spoken of the Patricij, and Conscripti; but as for the Pedarij they were so called for many reasons: some say that they might not speak their opinions in the Senate, but did consent to others, or, Pedibus ire in sententiam aliorum: others affirm, that many Senators being in office, they went to the Senate in Litters or Coaches, and that the rest who were no Magistrates went on foot, and for this cause were called Pedarij. Varro saith that there were certain knights who having executed the greatest offices of magistracy, being not yet comprehended in the Senate by the Censors, could not deliver their opinions in the Senate, but only assist there, and assent with the opinions of others. But to set down the order of giving their opinions in the Senate, I f●sd th●● in the beginning they were accustomed to suffer him to give his opinion first, who had been appointed head of the Senate by the Censors. Sometimes also they that were chosen Consuls began. Tully in his discourse de Senectute saith, that in old time they gave this pre-eminence to the most ancient: yet they say that he which was entreated by the Consul, should speak his opinion first, according to a custom which had been brought in, bo●●● might not entreat any one that was not of the Consular order. Aulus Oc●●ius faith, that Varto writes of those that might assemble the Senate, and name a Dictator, a Cons●ll, a Praetor, a Tribune of the people, and the Perfect of the town: he adds the Tribunes of the war, who had been Proconsulls, the Dec●mvi●i or ten men, who had then 〈◊〉 power and the two men created to order the Commonweal: he saith 〈◊〉 he doth not remember whether the Perfect of the city of the Latins had this authority, for that he was no Senator, no● gave his opinion in the Senat. Varro saith, that the Perfect of the city might assemble the Senate, and the Tribune of the people might do the 〈◊〉, before the Law Atinius, although he were no Senator: but they hold that in regard of the place whereas they mig●● assemble the Senate, it could not be but where the Augurs di● appoint●, which was by them called Temple. And the Senate being assembled in the court of ●●stilia, of Pomp●y, and afterwards in that of julia, which were ●●●phane places, the Augurs ordained that they should be made Temples, that accor●●●● to the custom of the●● predecessors, the deliberations might pass. As for the time 〈◊〉 assembly, the same author saith that it was of no force if it were made before the Sun rising, or after the setting; and moreover, that the Censor should appoint the time to deliberate. As for the age of Senators, since that which happened to Papirius Pretext●tus, it was ordained that no man under the age of five & twenty years should remain within the Senate, as we read in plutarch in the life of Pompey. Varro faith also that he that 〈◊〉 enter into the Sen●●, should first sacrifice; and that their resolutions were after 〈…〉, either by dispute, or if the ●●tter were doubtful, by every man's opinion, ●h●y set a fine upon every one that came not unto the Senate whenas it assembled. 〈◊〉 ●osthumess that were borne after their father's death, were notwithstanding called 〈…〉 the Senat. But they that were conceived and borne after that their fathers had 〈…〉 put out of the Senate, were not held for Senators children: and contrariwise, if 〈◊〉 ●ere conceived before this accident. But if the children conceived of a father which 〈…〉 put out of the Senate, he dying, they came after his death into the power of 〈◊〉 grandfather a Senator, they were of the Senat.  
〈…〉 the Tribunes of the light horse, Romulus did first institute them whenas he 〈…〉 hundred Knights, the which he employed in all the necessities of the 〈…〉 and called them Ramnesiens, Tatiens, and Luceres.  
〈…〉 creation of Questors is most ancient, for they were ordained in a manner before 〈…〉 Magistrates; for it is certain that Tullus Hostilius created them: and whereas 〈…〉 that Romulus had two Questors, it is not certain. They say they were called 〈…〉 for that they were to exact the public money, and had the charge of the 〈…〉, and that one part of these officers went throughout the Provinces to 〈…〉 money due for customs; and the other part had the charge to read in the Senate 〈…〉 which came from all parts. We read, the Questors did sometimes examine 〈…〉; and Varro affirms, that they were called Questors of the question or torture 〈…〉 ●hey ordained should be given to malefactors. Their manner was to choose 〈…〉 well from among the people, as out of the Patricij. And for that the Consuls 〈…〉 ●ot condemn a citizen of Rome to death without commission from the people, 〈…〉, That the Questors should have the charge of capital causes: and these 〈…〉 Questors' of murders.  
〈…〉 now look into the beginning of the Duumviri, or two men, we must bring 〈…〉 the time of king Tullus Hostilius who ordained them, whenas Horatius 〈…〉 of the Curiatij, had slain his sister. This king seeing that every man 〈…〉 ●im to die, he appointed these two men to be judges of the fact, who 〈…〉 but he appealed from their sentence, and was absolved by the people. This was 〈…〉 of the two men, to whom they added a third, and for that they had the 〈…〉 of capital crimes, they had also the government of the prisons of malefactors: 〈…〉 Livius saith, That this Magistrate was employed in the condemnation of Caius 〈…〉 Capitolinus: and they also did punish all them that were found to be of Cattelins' 〈◊〉.  
〈◊〉 the Perfect or Governor of the City, his jurisdiction extended throughout 〈…〉: he took knowledge of all crimes that were committed: he gave audience to· 〈…〉 fled unto the Statues and complained of their Masters. He had also power 〈…〉 as also those which accused any woman to have committed adultery with her 〈◊〉 Tutors and Curators appeared also before him for all matters which concerned 〈…〉, and they took knowledge of the ingratitude of freemen to their Masters. 〈◊〉 charge of all things that were ●old, that the prices might be reasonable. He sent 〈…〉 all parts, to give him intelligence what was done. Finally, his creation having 〈…〉 long, his jurisdiction was given to the Praetor of the Feries, or feasts, until that 〈◊〉 began to created him again.  
〈◊〉 most ancient Authors affirm, That the Consul's power was instituted in 〈…〉 the kings: for the kings being expelled, they found two men which had the like 〈…〉 but limited in regard of the time, for that it continued but a year. They had 〈…〉 or Sergeants, and all other marks which the kings were wont to have. And for 〈…〉 should counsel that which was profitable for the Commonweal, they were 〈…〉 Consul's. The first Consuls after the expulsion of the kings, were Lucius junius Bru●●, and Tarquin Collatinus. Brutus' agreed with his companion, That but one of them at 〈◊〉 should march with the royal ensigns, to the end that the people, seeing them 〈◊〉 with these marks, should not complain that they had gotten two kings for one. 〈…〉 were twelve Lictors which carried rods with Axes, and went before the 〈◊〉 Valerius the Consul was Author of a law, by the which it was lawful to appeal from all Magistrates; and then the Consular authority began to be less than the Regal. In old time the Consuls were chosen from among the Senators; but in the end, the Romans being tired with the seditions of the Tribunes, they suffered one of the Consuls to be chosen from among the people. The first Consul of this order was Lucius Sequatius.  
The Dictator's authority was so great, as there was no appeal from his sentence, and he had sovereign jurisdiction over the people of Rome. They were not accustomed to created a Dictator, but upon some occasion which did threaten ruin to the city. In the beginning they might not choose a Dictator which was not a Patricius; yet in the wars which the Romans had against the Falisques, they did choose from among the people C. Marius Rutilius to be Dictator. The first Dictator at Rome was Titus Largius. This office (by reason of his power) might not be held above six months: but under the name of this office, Lucius Scylla, and julius Cesar, made themselves masters of Rome, and sought by that means to avoid the odious name of Tyrants.  
The Master of the horse had jurisdiction over all the soldiers: The first was called Spurius Cassius, who was created by T. Largius the first Dictator. Finally, the office of Magister Equitum was the same with the Dictator, that the Praefectus Praetorio was with Caesar.  
The occasion of creating Tribunes, was the division of the people with the Senate: So as when the people were retired to the sacred Hill, they pacified them, promising, That there should be Magistrates of the people; to whom they gave then two Tribunes, that is, A. Virginius, and T. Vetusius. Then there happening another separation, they added three more; and afterwards five: so as the Romans had ten Tribunes, whose authority grew so great, as whatsoever the Senate had concluded, was good, if the Tribunes did allow of it. They stood at the entry of the place where the Senate did assemble, who acquainted the Senate with what they had decreed, to allow thereof, or to add, or take away what they should think profitable for the Commonweal, and for a sign of their Confirmation, they should add unto the writing the letter T. The greatest importance of the institution of Tribunes, was, That they interposed themselves at intercessions, that no violence might be done by other Magistrates: and the lesser was, That they presented laws unto the people, which they called Plebescita, in the which the authority of the Senate was not required. They did also assign Provinces to them that went to govern them in the place of Consuls, as we read in Plutarch in the life of Cat●. They did also observe, That if all the Tribunes were agreed except one, he alone might contradict and cross all the rest.  
In the war of the Eques, the Consuls Albus Posthumius, and Sp. Furius created T. Quintius their Proconsul or Lieutenant: since which time there have been Proconsul's, which have had all the marks of Consuls, only they had but six Lictors, whenas they used their jurisdiction committed by the Consuls, yet soon after they began to have a private authority: for the bounds of the Empire being large, it was decreed, That they that left to be Consuls, should begin to be Proconsul's, and so they should govern the Provinces of the Empire, dividing them among them by chance. The Proconsul had no jurisdiction out of the Province that was fallen unto him, although it were voluntary, as to make men free, and to adopt. If he carried his wife with him into the Province, he might punish her if she committed any offence. He might not buy any thing but victuals within the Province. He might not determine any causes which required examination, but whereas it required no such diligence, as when there were question of the obedience of children to their parents, and such like, he might judge summarily. He might also give commandment to whip Libertines that were ingrateful to their masters.  
The Proconsulls were accustomed (by reason of the multitude of their affairs) to sand Legates into their Provinces, who did exercise jurisdiction, not of their own authority, but as deputies to the Proconsul, who could not substitute them before he came into the Province. If the Legates found any matter of importance which required the 〈…〉 of the judge, the Legates were to refer that to the Proconsul, for that they had 〈◊〉 authority, either to beaten or to put to death; yet they might give a judge to them that 〈…〉 and tutors to pupils.  
〈◊〉 diles of the people, ordained that they should make the public feasts, 〈◊〉 must spend according to their dignity and patrimony. Pedian saith that 〈…〉 been made Aedile, and having at his own charge caused a very rich theatre 〈◊〉 built, would have therein a chariot with certain elephants, besides the stately 〈◊〉 which he caused to be made. The Aediles had the charge to see every Roman set in 〈…〉 to keep the order of his dignity: if the buyer were deceived by the seller, in 〈…〉 sick beast for a found, he had recourse unto the Aedile, who had charge of the 〈◊〉 ditches, aqueducts, and buildings.  
〈◊〉 Perfect of wheat had the charge to provide corn from all parts, and command 〈◊〉 had more than would serve his own turn, to cell it, setting a reasonable price. 〈◊〉 people of Rome were often relieved by this Magistrate, whenas they were in want. 〈◊〉 his business of corn grew to be of such authority, as all persons which in other 〈…〉 not allowed to accuse, were admitted in this, as whores, and such like.  
〈◊〉 Tribunes Military, whom they took indifferently from the people or Senate, were 〈◊〉 twenty in number, sometimes more, and sometimes less; but in the 〈◊〉 created only three, which were A. Sempronius Amacinus, L. Attilius, and 〈◊〉, and they came from being Consuls to be Military Tribunes with Consular 〈◊〉 then as M. Genucius, and P. Horatius left their consulships: and this Magistrate had 〈…〉 with the Consuls, only the name is changed, and the people deal in it. 〈…〉, although in the beginning they were of small authority, yet it grew so 〈…〉 thereon depended the manners and discipline of the Romans, the government 〈…〉, the jurisdiction of private men, and the tolles of public places 〈…〉 the Romans. They took out of the Senate such as they held unworthy, and 〈…〉 they thought good: they took horse and arms from soldiers that were 〈◊〉 ●nd they that delighted in perfumes and rich apparel were noted by them with 〈◊〉 of infamy, and put out of the army. In the beginning when as one Censor 〈◊〉 held that the other would serve for both: but it was decreed that one Censor 〈…〉, the other should leave his office, and they should create two new: the reason 〈◊〉 that at such time as the Gauls took Rome, one of the Censors being dead, they 〈◊〉 ●●●stitute another in his place, the which afterwards they held for a bad presage. The 〈…〉 had also power to limit usury.  
〈◊〉 of the city had authority to make new laws, and to disannul old, and in 〈◊〉 whatsoever he ordained was called Lex honoraria. They granted unto the praetors 〈◊〉 signs, and in a manner all consular Ornaments. This Praetor of the city did ride 〈◊〉 in white.  
〈…〉 end there being a concourse of all nations to Rome, they created a Praetor, which 〈…〉 Peregrinus, who heard the causes of strangers: and in the end the number 〈◊〉 ●reat, as there were sometimes eighteen Praetors. But after they had taken 〈…〉, Spain, and the province of Narbo●a, they created as many Praetors as there 〈◊〉 provinces taken, to the end that some of them should take knowledge of the affairs 〈◊〉, and the rest of the business of the provinces. Afterwards Scylla added the 〈…〉 torture, as for counterfeiters, parricides, and poisoners, and he created four 〈…〉 ordained two Praetors, and two Aediles, who had the charge of corn, and they 〈…〉 Cereaux, of the name of Ceres. Augustus afterwards made sixteen Praetors, 〈…〉 added two, whereof Tiberius took away one, and Nerua added another.  
〈…〉 the Tribunes of the light horse were with the kings, or the Masters of the horse 〈…〉 Dictator, such were the Prefecti Pretorij with the Emperors: for these holding 〈…〉 place unto them, and being to correct the public discipline, their authority 〈◊〉 great, as whereas in the beginning they did appeal from the Perfect, this appeal 〈…〉 away by the prince, who thought that such as had attained to that dignity by 〈◊〉, should judge as himself. These Prefects had a privilege, that Minors against whom they had given sentence could have no remedy, whereas they might have had, being condemned by other Magistrates.  
Augustus' thinking that the preservation of the public did not belong to any but himself, ordained seven troops of soldiers in such places of the city as had most need, to the end they might speedily relieve such places as should be set on fire: and the order was such as one troop or company did keep two regions of the city, and the Tribunes were the heads of these troops, and the Perfect of the guards had the command of them all; he took knowledge of causes concerning fire, and thefts, if the crime were not so great, as it was needful to deliver the party into the hands of the Perfect of the city: besides, the Perfect did watch a good part of the night, and went armed throughout the city, warning every man to have a care of fire, and to keep water in their houses.  
It remains that we speak of Caesar's Procurator, who was judge betwixt Caesar and the people. This Magistrate had ample authority, so as whatsoever he did manage for the Emperor, was of as great force as if the Emperor himself had done it. But if this Procurator did alienat any thing of the Emperors as his own, it was not therefore held that the Emperor had alienated it, which might not be done without the Emperor's consent. Finally if he treated of sale or of donation, he did nothing that was of force, for that his office was not to alienat the Emperor lands, but to manage his affairs diligently. And whenas a slave of Caesar's was made heir by testament, he ordained that he should succeed in this inheritance, which came directly to the Emperor, for that the slave gets all to his master. But if Caesar were heir, and his Procurator did enter into the inheritance, he did thereby put the Emperor in possession. This Magistrate had no power to banish.  
The name of Precedent is general, for that the Proconsul's, the Legates of Caesar, and all that governed provinces (so as they were Senators) were called Precedents.   

¶ The Government at this day.  
THe Pope's authority disperseth itself into so many members, as they of his court grow commonly old before they understand this government; the which I will endeavour to relate as briefly as I can. There is first the College of Cardinals, whereof the Pope is head: and of these the number hath not been certain in our time, although we found that in fo●mertimeses there were but twelve, after the example of the Apostles. These Cardinals were accustomed in old time to go unto the Popetwice a week, but affairs of importance increasing in our time, they assemble but once, and their assembly is commonly called the Consistory. There they appoint them that are chosen Bishops and Archbishops, or made Patriarches when the seats are voided, whose election doth not belong to a chapter, a town, a province, a king, or to any other persons: for in that case they are chosen by the Pope, and by this Senate to whom this reservation belongs by a privilege from all the Popes, and this reservation hath been accustomed to extend itself to certain Monasteries which are found taxedin the book of the Chamber, and which they give in charge to men that are capable, and therefore they call them consistorial Monasteries, for that none but the Consistory disposeth of them. Finally here they treat of all things which belong unto the faith and religion, to the peace of Christia●●, and to preservation of the temporal estate of the Church. Here the Provinces, the Regulars, and Kings, have their Proctors, whose charge is to propound the elections, and other causes of their provinces to the Senate: and he that propounds is accustomed in ●l●ctionss to hear them that oppose, if there be any, and to seek our many things that are required in his person whom they are to choose for the Church that is voided, and which belong unto the said Church: this is also done by the means of witnesses (which search they do commonly call process) and all these things are set down in writing in the Senate, and he delivers the senates answer to them that attend, signing and sealing with the se●le of the Apostolic See the answer, the which is presented by them that attend 〈◊〉 Vicechancellor, who makes another certificate in his name, by the which he doth 〈◊〉 all the officers which are to make the dispatches, making a repetition of the 〈◊〉 business. After this report, the Petitioners sue to have a brief, conformable to 〈…〉 ●●port, that is to say, it shall be first done by them that make the abridgements, and 〈◊〉 written by the Clerks, then dispatched by others, by the Chancery, or 〈◊〉 ●hamber, and sometimes extraordinarily by the Secretary: and when all is done, 〈◊〉 the seal of lead.  
〈◊〉 great Penitencier, in that which belongs to his absolution, doth exercise the 〈◊〉 which hath been committed unto him by the Pope, by many Vicars and 〈◊〉 which they call Penitenciers, who are divided throughout all the greatest 〈◊〉 of Rome, as S. Peter, S. john de Lateran, and S. Marie Maior. But he grants no 〈◊〉 for the observation of human laws, but in some cases: and he himself by a 〈◊〉 Commission from the Pope, hears suitors, then having known their demands, 〈◊〉 be any reason why the Petitioner should be heard, and that which he requires 〈…〉 accustomed to be granted by the Pope, he writes by authority of his office, 〈◊〉 virtue of his general Commission from the Pope's mouth; and assures in his 〈◊〉 ●hat by virtue of his Commission, he writes from the Pope's mouth: writing always 〈…〉 of these manners, Fiat informa, Fiat de speciali, Fiat de expresso, and by these 〈◊〉 of speaking, he lets them that tax understand the importance of the Request; 〈◊〉 ●he writing of the Penitencier doth vary in form, so the taxes of the payments are 〈…〉 the officers. And the multitude of human laws, both of the Pope, of 〈…〉 of Monasteries, is so great at this day, as men being in some sort bound, and 〈…〉 ancient liberty, fly with great humility to the Penitentier, who marks 〈…〉 the Suppliants demand; then they dispatch the Bulls under his name 〈…〉 And for that many times he doth not writ back precisely, requiring some 〈…〉 of the Suppliant, he appoints judges by his writing, who shall take 〈…〉 fact, and herein he puts others in his place. This office hath for the greater 〈…〉 of them which come for expeditions, four and twenty men to defend 〈…〉 these are called Proctors of the Penitentiary. He gives Dispensations to marry 〈…〉 degrees prohibited, as also he admits the Legitimation of bastards. He 〈…〉 the lack of members in any that will receive Orders, or hold Benefices, as also 〈…〉 ●any. He absolues for murders in Forobosco conscienty, and in regard of Clerks, 〈◊〉 Courts, with a retention of Benefices, and dispensation for the rest. He doth the 〈…〉, perjury, change of vows, and dispenseth with the Regulars of any 〈…〉 for their rules. Moreover, he gives indlugences to places and persons, and 〈◊〉 Commissions in form of law, as upon the nullity of some marriage, and such 〈…〉  
〈…〉 every day demand the signing of such things from the Pope as proceed 〈…〉 the bounty, as the grants of Benefices, and other things, the which are also 〈…〉 committed to the great Penitentier, and also matters of justice touching the 〈…〉 all parts of the world; and in like manner those which concern the 〈…〉 of the Church of Rome, and in all other places, so as they come either by 〈…〉 person which is of the Church, or by the permission of Princes, or by consent 〈…〉, to the Court of Rome. The Pope, for the more easy dispatch ofsutors, 〈…〉 two Audiences for all these things, in the one of which they demand 〈…〉 grace, and in the other those of justice; so as th●y are diversely called, that is to 〈◊〉 the Signature of grace, and the Signature of justice. The Pope appoints over these 〈…〉 certain Lawyers; and to the Signature of Grace, all the Cardinals which 〈…〉 the law: and it is seldom that they depute any Prelates which are not 〈…〉 they call Referendaries) to that of Grace or justice. These have charge to 〈…〉 the contents of all petitions, and if they be things usual to be granted, they set 〈…〉 to the end of the petition, signifying thereby unto the Pope, or unto the 〈…〉 must sign it, that the thing which they demand may be granted. But if 〈…〉 requires any thing which may prejudice another, they do not grant it 〈…〉 calling the third person: and if the matter be important or doubtful, the 〈…〉 doth impart it to the rest in the Audience, and the suitor doth not obtain it unless they all agreed in the Signature. Wherefore the Pope hath appointed a Cardinal over the two Signatures, who doth usually grant small matters, and also those which are of weight, if they be accustomed to be granted. The Referendaries of the Signature of Grace, do usually reject those petitions which contain matter belonging unto justice, as if the Pope took it ill they should do that which belongs properly to his charge. The Signature hath one certain day in the week, whenas the Referendaries assemble: by reason whereof they which pled are accustomed to go the day before with their Advocates unto the Referendaries, and sometimes pled their cause (though seldom) before them. On the day appointed, it is the Referendaries charge briefly to report the Petitioners requests, and the matter having been debated among these judges, he that is Precedent gives sentence according to the plurality of voices, and the Referendaries do never propound a petition again which hath been rejected, or at the lest they do it very seldom. The Pope doth in a manner always subscribe with these words, Placet P. whenas they treat of matters of justice: but when there is a question of grace, he writes, Fiat ut petitur P. And this P. signifies the Pope's name, as Paul; but if he hath another name, as julio, he writes I and so of the rest. And if the Pope subscribes at any time, not at any one's suit, but of his own motion, he doth not set down, Vt petitur, but adds in the end, Motu proprio. But the Cardinal of the Signature of Grace, writes always after one form, Concessum in praesentia D. N. Papae; then he sets to his name, and yet he doth not subscribe in the Pope's presence, but it is lawful for him to do it by his general Commission. As for the form of writing in cases of justice, the Cardinal (who hath the charge) subscribes whenas they writ to the judges of the Court of Rome, Placet D. N. Papae; and adds his name: and if the business be directed to the judges of Provinces, he sets, Concessum in praesentia D. N. Papae; then the Cardinal adds his name, and sometimes he writes, Placet prout de iure, Placet arbitrio judicis, Concessum arbitrio, etc. And you must understand, that writings of justice which are sent to judges of Provinces, come not unto the Regent's hands, but are presently referred unto the datary, like unto those of Grace, where he sets the day of the date; then he writes them into the Register, and then they deliver them unto the Petitioners, or to their Solicitors, in that form that they must be dispatched. For the expedition whereof, there are three means; when it is a matter of justice, by the Chancery, and by the office of Contradicts, under Lead, or by the Secretary in form of a Brief, Sub Annulo piscatoris: but if it he a matter of grace, he is dispatched by the said Chancery, or by the Chamber, and sometimes extraordinarily by the Secretary.  
The office of the Chancery hath a Cardinal to oversee it, who is called Vicechancellor. His dignity (according to the opinion of them of the Pope's Court) gives him the first rank of all the said Court. He, by reason of his office, is Precedent in the dispatch of all matters Ecclesiastical which go throughout the world, and likewise over them that dispatch them, which are very many, as Abreviators of the Parc (whose charge is to dictate the letters of the suitors petition, and what they dictate is by them called Minute) Clerks, under Abreviators, Solicitors, they that have the office of the leaden Seal, and Registers. All these have a hand in the dispatch of letters. There are other officers which we must found out when there are any dispatches to be made touching the payment of rents, and these are the Clerks of the Chancery, the Chamberlains, and others.  
The Audience of the Apostolic Chamber was first erected, the better to dispatch business, and to that end the Pope had choice of six Prelates of his household, whom they call Clerks of the Chamber. These were Councillors of the household to the Pope, who treated with them in private of all matters which did concern him, as of the government of the City of Rome, and of all the temporal Estate, and the account of the treasure. There the Pope did choose the Magistrates, by reason whereof they at this day take the oath for their offices before the Chamberlains. There they made the contracts for public matters which concerned the Pope, and where they are accustomed to dispatch letters of benefices in a manner like unto the Chancery, whenas Suitors choose this for 〈◊〉 shortest way, or else in regard of the matter which is in question, or else for that the 〈◊〉 cannot be dispatched by the Chancery, but requires the Pope's express com●●●●●ement. In this place they did condemn malefactors to Ecclesiastical 〈…〉 temporal, according to the quality of the person, or of the crime, and they did 〈◊〉 many other things. But the affairs of Rome are so multiplied, as the 〈…〉 this burden by little and little, comes seldom into this Audience, except it be 〈…〉 which doth import his revenues, or doth concern some bad expedition of 〈…〉 Pope doth sometimes dispatch the foresaid matters by himself, without the 〈◊〉 of his Chamber, and in the execution he calls for the Secretaries of his 〈◊〉.  
〈◊〉 Chamberlain is accustomed by the advice of seven Clerks, and sometimes of 〈◊〉 private motion, to writ in form of law to the judges, as of all profane 〈…〉 belong to Magistrates in the temporal Estate of the Church, and without it, 〈◊〉 payment of the tenths, first-fruits, benefices, spoils of priests that be dead, and other 〈◊〉 which concern the Apostolic Chamber: and he writes ●uery day as if he had 〈◊〉 foundement from the Popes own mouth, and his writings are called letters of the 〈◊〉 ●●ber, the expedition whereof are made after two sorts, for either they are made up 〈◊〉, or else they are open without the Chamberlains seal.  
〈◊〉 Treasurer hath the custody of all the money that enters into the Chamber, and 〈…〉 is to receive it, keep it, and spend it where need is. Sometime this money is 〈…〉 the hands of some great merchant, who receives it by commission from the 〈◊〉, and makes payments, & he is called the Guardian. The Auditor of the 〈…〉 charge of Spiritual matters, and is followed by the Governor who doth 〈…〉, and is the executioner of the secular arm, decides of truces, 〈…〉 complaints of vassals against their lords, although they be capital, within 〈…〉 of Rome. He hath authority over all the officers of the city, and takes care 〈◊〉 quiet of the city and court of Rome. If thou wilt read the chapter of Sixtus the 〈…〉 of julio the second, thou shalt see at large the authority of this Governor.  
〈◊〉 Precedent of the Apostolic Chamber receives the account of all those that 〈◊〉 to deal with money of the Chamber within the city of Rome, or within 〈…〉, and makes his account in the Audience of the Chamber.  
〈◊〉 for that they treat sometimes in the Audience of the Chamber, of matters 〈◊〉 Treasurer and private persons, it hath been ordained that private men should 〈◊〉 Advocate in this Audience, at the public charge, for the defence of poor men's 〈◊〉 against the Advocates of the Treasure.  
〈◊〉 is another Advocate which defends the Treasurer as well in the Audience, as 〈◊〉, before the other judges in the courts of Rome, where it is needful to answer 〈…〉 law; and he is of the consistorial Order.  
The Proctor of the Fis● or Treasurer, defends all fiscal matters in the Audience, and 〈…〉 any other judges in the court of Rome: and fiscal matters are those whereas they 〈…〉 the public liberty, or of the public treasure. This office is very necessary and 〈…〉 authority in the court of Rome. This Proctor out of the Audience takes 〈…〉 the secret causes, sees them at his pleasure, and gives his advice, although he 〈◊〉 of the judges: he is admitted in public Consistories, and may require that 〈…〉 a public instrument made by one of the Protonotaries for a perpetual 〈◊〉 ●hingss done publicly.  
〈◊〉 Commissary of the apostolic Chamber doth execute the affairs of the 〈…〉 the judges are not to deal: he hath charge of exactions, ambassages, 〈…〉, and other things which belong unto the Chamber.  
〈◊〉 last of all those of the Apostolic Chamber, is he which defends the ●ightss and 〈◊〉 assigned to Cardinals, or any thing else that concerns the said Cardinals. The 〈◊〉 of the judges of the court of Rome being very great, and there being many in 〈◊〉 doth many times fall out, that by reason of the great employment of judges, ●●ometimes of purpose, matters are protracted longer than the quality of causes, and the troublesome abiding in prison doth require: wherefore the Cardinals do every month visit them as sovereign judges. Yet they that have place in Audience of the Chamber do not assemble for these visits: but he that is Lieutenant to the Chamberlain, and in a manner always one of the said Clerks, and with them all the officers of the Chamber, except the Treasurer & the Precedent. All these at a certain day go and sit for a time in some public place, in the prisons of the city, where the prisoners are called before them in order, and heard if they will: and they deliver the prisoners they hear, or moderate their punishment, and sometimes when they are altogether unable to pay, they admit them to a simple session of their goods, and so set them out of prison.  
Near unto the two last prisons, that is to say, of the court of Savelle, and of the tower of None, there are inferior judges, who take their names of these two places. The appellation from the judge of the tower of None goes unto the governors court, and that of the court of Savelle to the Auditor of the Chamber, who decides the causes for the which they appeal: although the Governor meddles with the appellation of the court of Savelle, yet they belong unto the Auditor. The courtesans and common women of the city pay a certain tribute yearly unto this judge, and this is so ancient, as the contrary not appearing, they force them that refuse to pay it.  
Besides the ordinary court, there is another sort of Roman citizens, to whom the Pope hath given a Praetor, whom they call Senator: he remains in the capitol, and doth justice to the citizens of Rome by ordinary authority. He hath three lieutenants or Substitutes two whereof which preside at private judgements, are called Collateral: these are different in dignity, for the one is called the first, another the second, and the third the judge of crimes: and if they appeal from any one of them, there is a private judge in the capitol for all these appellations; if his sentence be conformable to the first, there is no more appeal. There are also certain Seats, whereas all trades (which are marked in little tables under a porch, where they read the trades) c●use their Consuls, which are trades men, who do right unto their companions touching their art, and they that hold themselves wronged go and propound their griefs unto the Conseruator of the city, who remains in the capitol. This jurisdiction was confirmed by Pope julio the second, Leo the tenth, and Paul the third.  
There are afterwards a kind of persons, which are the priests to whom the Pope gives a vicar of his He, in Rome and in all his diocese hath the same authority that the Pope, whose Vicar he is, and Ordinary, for that there are priests under his jurisdiction: he prescribes to penitents the mark of their penance, confers the sacraments of the Church, and by the law of the diocese makes an assembly, or holds a congregation, and visits the Churches and regular Monasteries, if they have no privilege which doth free them: he may also inquire, correct, punish, take away, and give benefices. By virtue of an Indult or Pardon granted by the Pope, his Vicar's jurisdiction extends to all lay men and strangers, who for any fraternity, abode, or service to Hospitals or Monasteries, seem to follow the religion; and also over all the jews of the city, widows, pupils, & poor Christians, as if they were in the bosom of the Church. And by the same Indult his authority extends to causes whereas they treat not of the propriety, but of rents and pensions, and also of that which concerns farms, fields, vines, and rents: but in matters concerning the propriety, he may not judge above sixty ducats of gold of the Chamber, and in these causes his authority extends forty miles from Rome. He hath four Notaries or public Registers under him, and two Substitutes, the one which takes knowledge of private and civil matters, the other of public and criminal.  
The Pope hath twelve Chaplains, or Auditors of causes of the sacred palace, to whom he gives power to hear them a part that pled, and upon their report the Pope gives sentence.  
At Rome every man is in a short space accepted for a citizen, and may easily participate of the first honours of this city, where they may better than in any other city, hope for a recompense of their industry and wit, and in the end aspire by his fortune and virtue to the greatest dignities of the Church. 〈◊〉 ●opess have been accustomed to give the Legations of Provinces which are un●●● power, and the government of the chief towns, to their own kinsmen as ●●●gie men, as Secular, or to those that are their creatures. It is the manner which 〈◊〉 Italy; and at avignon they have a Legate or Vice Legat, who is a Governor, 〈◊〉 charge of Ecclesiastical matters, and of those that concern justice: And more●●●re is a General which is a Knight; he hath the charge of all the soldiers 〈◊〉 garrison within the county of Venisse, and of all that concerns arms. 〈◊〉 ●ope assumeth power to confer Benefices in the countries of other Princes, al●●● be somewhat restrained, by reason of the grants of certain Popes to divers 〈◊〉 and Princes. Yet such as receive not benefices from him, must have his confir●●● and have their Bulls from the Court of Rome: and moreover also, pay the 〈◊〉.  
〈◊〉 it ●it in this place to give an account as well of the institution and manner of 〈◊〉 the Pope, as of the considerations of Cardinals. Yet the creation of Pope's 〈◊〉 very divers. It was given to the Clergy of Rome, to whom the people of 〈◊〉 oyned in the creation. But after three hundred fifty and one years, the Empe●●●●erposed their authority, for that the Pope's being chosen did for a time receive confirmation from them, first paying a certain quantity of silver, and then with●●●●ayment. For a time they did also for bear to be crowned without the presence ●●●ent of their Ambassadors; and in the end, with the consent of Pope's them●●● thought by this means to bridle the insolency of the people of Rome) all ●●●tie of creating the Pope, was transported to the Emperors, who held it 〈◊〉 when the Popes would have taken it from them, they could not without ●●●der and schism, which did for a long time trouble all Christendom: and in ●●●ime, some Popes named their Successors, who were afterwards confirmed ●●●gie. But in the end, the Pope's authority being the stronger, the Emperor 〈◊〉 being wholly excluded, the Cardinals had the election, with some of the 〈◊〉 Clergy, until Alexander the third at the Council of Lateran held in the 〈◊〉 our Lord God 1259, where there were two hundred and eighty Bishops, 〈◊〉 That he was lawful Pope that should be chosen by two third parts of the Car●●● were present; and this custom hath continued unto this day, but that in the 〈◊〉 Redempton 1417, at the Council of Constance, Martin the fist was cho●●●●old the schism at that time: but Gregory the tenth ordained first, at the Coun●●●, the Conclave, which hath from time to time been reform, and reduced 〈◊〉 see it at this day.  
cardinal's assemble to choose a Pope after one of these three manners, either by 〈◊〉 or by Adoration, or by Scrutin and Billets, by the which they gave their 〈◊〉 they favoured. It sufficeth then to understand, that all the authority to 〈◊〉 consists in the Cardinals; and that they are the chief members of the 〈◊〉 as it were the head, whom they assist, being his Councillors and Coadiu●●● privileges have been given them by divers Popes, and especially by Paul 〈◊〉 and some others have granted them the moiety of the revenues of the ho●●● in regard thereof, at this present they enjoy half the Annates of Benefices 〈◊〉 dispatched by the Consistory. There were wont to be but fifty and three in all, 〈◊〉 ●●●se and decrease at the Pope's pleasure, and Pius the fourth had at one time 〈◊〉  
〈◊〉 discourse upon the Pope's next successor, are accustomed to consider the 〈◊〉, for that a time of peace requires one thing, and that of troubles ano●●● 〈◊〉 all things are out of order, they must seek to have some one to stay 〈◊〉 moreover, they must take another course when after a great servitude they 〈◊〉 liberty, and they must also observe the wills of princes, every one of 〈◊〉 to have his friend Pope: but above all they consider the private affecti●●● 〈◊〉, for that it seems in the election of a Pope they lose the remem●●● 〈◊〉 all the rest. We see notwithstanding that age imports much, as well in regard of them that aspire to the Popedom, as for that many do get by the change of Popes. Then they look into the bounty, for that men are not commonly so wicked, as they suppress all natural desire of good things. But the chief bounty they seek in Cardinals, is that which profits others, as justice, affability, courtesy, and an inclination to communicate his greatness to others: and for this cause it seems that they have no will to make him Pope that hath many great kinsmen and friends, who may be a cause to interrupt and divert him from this courtesy, and other parts which I have noted: and every Cardinal not only seeks to make him Pope whom he loves, but him that is bound to love him. But notwithstanding that they observe all these things, yet it is impossible to make a firm and certain conjecture who shall be Pope, for that the affairs of Rome waver continually; a discontentment, a new promotion of Cardinals, or the lest accident which shall happen, puts all into confusion. Moreover, it hath been commonly observed, that they change their humours whenas they come into the Conclave; yea many times the Cardinals being suddenly transported, either with fear or some other passion, yield to that which they dreamt not of. Whenas they foresee the danger of any one that may be Pope, they do easily help it, and agreed together. But for that they cannot use the like diligence in all, whenas they are surprised, and that they propound one who had not been thought on, having no time to take any resolution, they run on like men without judgement, as if every one feared to be the last. Notwithstanding it doth often happen that he which was least expected, comes to be Pope. Wherefore they may well divine, but they have no certain conjecture who shall be Pope.   

¶ The Religion of the Ancient Romans.  
AMong all the gods esteemed by the Romans, Pan Lyceus (named by many Faunus) and sylvanus, holds the first rank, and to him they dedicated the Lupercales, and that the Luperces did sacrifice. Some say that this Sacrifice came from evander a fugitive king of Arcadia, who came unto that place whereas since the fortress of Rome was made.  
The Shepherds who had this god for their head, did sacrifice unto him naked, with their faces covered, and certain girdles in their hands. Some refer the beginning of this Sacrifice to an accident which happened to Faunus whenas he sought the love of jola wife to Hercules. But others say, That Romulus sacrificing to Pan, naked, by reason of the heat, was advertised that certain thieves carried away his flock, so as he followed them naked as he was, and took them: so as in memory thereof he would have the Priests which should perform this sacrifice, naked. The special devotion which they had to this god, and to these priests, was, for that the women which could not be delivered, nor conceive with child, had recourse to the Luperques; and having been beaten with certain little whips died in goat's blood, they were delivered, or did presently conceive. They did solemnise the feast unto this god, on the eighteenth of januarie, as ovid reports.  
Then were the Potitiens, and the Pinariens, families so called, who were ordained to sacrifice to Hercules. The Potitiens, instructed by evander, did for a long time govern this sacrifice, until that this charge being given to public slaves, the family of the Potitiens came to sail; the which happened by the means of Appius Claudius their enemy: and the Romans did believe that for a punishment he fell blind.  
The Ar●a●x or Aruales, brethren, gave council to the people of Rome, to the end their fields might bring forth come. Romulus was the inventor of this religion, and they were called Ar●a●x, for that Aru●● signifies a field. They were twelve in number, and they gave them with the order of Priesthood a Crown of the ●aress of corn, with certain white bands. About the same time, the art and religion of the Augurs came to Rome, out of Tuscanie, where the inhabitants were very skilful in the art of divining after this manner. He that should divine by means of the Augur, went up into a fort, or upon some open place, and did there sit upon a stone towards the South, holding in his 〈◊〉 a ●rooked rod called Lituë. Then having beheld the city and the fields round about 〈◊〉 unto the gods, he divided the regions from the East unto the West, leaving the ●●●nd upon the South, and the left upon the North, and observing (without any 〈◊〉 ●●●aking) the farthest place he could see, holding his rod in the left hand, and lay●●● right hand upon his head to whom he would presage any thing, saying, OH father 〈◊〉 it be agreed that such a one shall enjoy such a thing, give some apparent sign, 〈◊〉 I have performed my charge: and then he told what tokens he would have jupi●●● and if they did succeed the Augur was good. In time this art was much estee●●●●ome, so as the number of the Augurs increased as well as their authority, and 〈◊〉 ●●●ted a College of Augurs, who in the beginning were but three.  
Pompilius king of the Romans was the first that ordained the Flamen Dial, for ●●●ore, the kings did execute the office of high priests. Numa considering that in ●●●imess kings might rather be like to Ramulus than himself, and be more affected to ●●●n religion, he ordained four priests, whom he called Flamines, who should ●●●ally attend the service of the gods: and these priests were dedicated to many ●●●at is to say, one to jupiter, whom they called Dial, two to Mars, and one to Quiri●●● Romulus. The other Flamines dedicated to any other gods than to jupiter, carried 〈◊〉 of the gods to whom they were vowed. And Numa would have jupiter's Flamen 〈◊〉 honourable robe, and have a seat of Y●ory, the which in those days they did ●●●nt but to the greatest Magistrates. He alone had a little white hat, and he did ride. 〈◊〉 not swear, nor carry the fire of his sacrifice into any place that was not sa●●●●●y one did enter girt into his Temple, he must ungirt himself, and cast it away. 〈◊〉 knot about him. If an offendor whom they led to whipping fell down upon 〈◊〉 ●efore him, it had been a sin to whip him that day. He that was not of a free 〈◊〉 could not cut the hair of this priest. He might not touch a goat, nor ivy, 〈◊〉 any raw flesh. His bed's feet must be defiled with dy●t, and no man might lie 〈◊〉. The parings of the Dial's nails, and the clippings of hair, were hidden in ●●●nd under a flint stone. It was not lawful for him to go into the air without a 〈◊〉 high priests did ordain the like when he was in any covered place. He might ●●●ch an● dow mixed with leucine, nor put off his shirt but in some covered place, to 〈◊〉 should not be naked under heaven, as under the eye of jupiter: and no man 〈◊〉 with him when he dined, but the king which did sacrifice. He never came into 〈◊〉 where there was a dead body. Varro saith, that the ancients had as many 〈◊〉, as the Dial, the Martial, the Quirinal, the Vulcanien, the Falagre: and as 〈◊〉 Bishops, Archbishops, and Cardinals, they had their Flamen, their first Fla●●●●im that was above all the rest.  
●he Vestal virgins which kept their sacred fire, it is so well known as I will say 〈◊〉 but if this fire went out they were beaten with rods by the high priests. There 〈◊〉 put into this Temple but virgins, whose parents must be of a free 〈…〉 took them from the age of six years to ten at the most. The ten first years they 〈◊〉 the form of sacrifices, they spent as much time in sacrificing, and the ten last ●●●●●ey did instruct the young virgins which were newly taken; which thirty years 〈◊〉, they might marry: but they that did marry were unfortunate. The people of 〈◊〉 honour them wonderfully. And besides the fire whereof I have spoken, they ●●●●●pe the Palladium, or 〈◊〉 tue of Minerva, and other sacred things of the Romans. 〈◊〉 when they were taken in Adultery they were put to death after this manner: They 〈◊〉 ●●graded, & carried on a co●●in bound, with their faces covered, with g●e●t silence 〈◊〉 town (which was that day all in mourning) unto the Port Sala●●a, near to 〈◊〉 there was a place called the Scelerat or wicked field, in the which there was 〈◊〉 which had a little hole for the entry, & two little windows; in the one ●hey 〈◊〉 burning lamp, and in the other water, milk, and honey: being come unto the 〈◊〉 the high priest said certain prayers, having his hands always lift up to heaven, then ●●●nt this Vestal into the tomb by the little hole, and in the mean time the people 〈◊〉 away their faces: then having taken away the ladder and covered the place with a stone, as if it had been a Sepulchre, the people cast earth upon it, and continued all that day in mourning.  
The Saliens were dedicated by Numa to Mars, being twelve in number, than Hostilius added twelve more. They were called Salines for their leaping in their sacrifices. They did wear certain painted cassocks, & upon their breasts a piece enriched with gold, silver, and precious stones.  
In the beginning there were four high priests taken from among the Senators: afterwards the people obtained that they should have as many chosen of their order. These had a head whom they called the most high Priest, who knew with what and when they should sacrifice, and had the care how to gather money for the charge of the service of their gods. They say that the high Priest had a table by the which he knew the Eclipse of the Moon and Sun.  
The Fecial priest did preside at the public faith given unto people: and they did hold, that a war which had not been first denounced by the Fecial, was not just. When they made a peace, the Fecial demanded of the General of the army, if he commanded him to make a peace with the enemy; the which he having affirmed, he said, o such a one, I demand grass of thee; whereunto the General answered, that he should take it; which having taken, he demanded if he made him messenger to the people and Senate of Rome? the General answered, That he did, so as in doing it neither he nor the people of Rome might be deceived. Then they made a peace, with prayers to jupiter, that if the Romans did infringe the conditions of the accord, he would strike them as he did a hog, and so much the more, for that he was much more mighty. But when he proclaimed war, he did after this manner: The Fecial carried a dart half burnt, and grass, unto their confines against whom he denounced war, where in the presence of three aged men, he said, That the enemies had failed in that which they had done against the people of Rome, and that for this cause he and the Romans had denounced war against them: and having spoken this, he cast his dart into their land, to the end they might see that they made war justly against them.  
The two men of the sacraments, had the charge to read the sacred books, and Sybill●s verses, and to interpret them. They were also chief in the ceremonies which were made to Apollo: and if there were any monster borne, or any prodigy did happen, they sought to pacefi● the gods with their sacrifices.  
The seven men of the Epulons, were contained in a kind of priesthood, of the which there are few that have written. Plivie before he made an oration, and fearing them that were there to hear him, faith, The Consuls were in the midst, and next, one of the seven men of the Epulons: and it is said that they accept the excuses of the daughter of the Augurs, of the ten sacred men, of the Flamens, and the seven men of the Epulons. I should speak of their ornaments, vessels, sacrifices, and instruments, but I will forbear, for it would be tedious.    

A chronology, And brief description of the succession, life, and death of Popes, from the beginning, unto Paul the fift 〈◊〉 Raiguing: together with their Decrees, councils, and Schisms.  
●or that in discoursing of the government of the Estate of the Church, I have also spoken of religion, and of matters which concern the Church: I will now for●●●●●, and come unto the Catalogue of Popes, unto Paul the fist, who holds the holy See, and the sovereign dignity of the Church at this day: with a collection of the Decre●● during their lives, and the times of general councils: then will I set down the Cardinals which are at this day, the better to satisfy the curious Reader.  
S. Peter, first Pastor or Bishop of the Catholic Church, according to the opinion of the Papists.  
Number of Popes. 1 Year of Christ. 34 SIMON PETER CEPHAS, borne at Bethsaida in Galilee, an Apostle of JESUS CHRIST, first Bishop of Christians (as the Papists suggest) governed the Church of Jerusalem five years, that of Antioch seven, and lastly (as they writ) that of Rome four and twenty years, five months, and twelve days.  
Number of Popes. 2 Year of Christ. 57 LINUS a Tuscan, second Bishop or Pope of Rome, and coadjutor to S. Peter, having written the deeds of S. Peter, yea his combats with that detestable Simon the Enchanter. He was beheaded by the command of Saturnius the Consul, who held him for a Sorcerer, for that he had driven a devil out of the body of his daughter. He was so renowned for his Holiness, as he raised up the dead in divers places, going forth of the city to preach the word of God. He held the See eleven years, three months, and twelve days.  
Number of Popes. 3 Year of Christ. 68 CLEMENT a Roman, ordained seven Notaries (which at this day they call Protonotaries) for the seven Quarters or Regions of Rome, to the end they might writ the History of Martyrs: and having converted many to the Christian faith by his piety and doctrine, he suffered Martyrdom under the Emperor Traian, having been Bishop nine years, four months, and six and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 4 Year of Christ. 77 CLETUS a Roman, was called to the Episcopal dignity against his will: Ha●ing created many Priests in the city of Rome, and as a learned man and full of pie●●● augmented the estate of God's Church, he was made a Martyr under the Empe●●●r Domitian, and was buried in the Vatican, having held the See six years, five months, and two days.  
Number of Popes. 5 Year of Christ. 84 ANACLETUS a Graecian borne at Athens, ordained, That Prelates and Clerks should cut their beards, and their hair: That they should assemble twice a year 〈◊〉 the affairs of the Church: That every Bishop should be received by three others: That Clerks should be admitted to sacred orders publicly, not privately; and that all the faithful should communicate after the consecration, else they should be rejected from the company of the faithful, as Infidels. By this means the Christian Religion increased wonderfully. In the Apostles time, they did communicate daily. He died, having been Bishop twelve years, two months, and ten days.  
The See was vacant seven days.  
Number of Popes. 6 Year of Christ. 96 EVARISTUS ordained, there should be seven Deacons chosen in every city to assist the Bishop in preaching: to the end they should not charge him that he 〈◊〉 preached ill, he distributed the Parishes or Cures to Priests. He commanded ●●●riagess to be publicly solemnised in the Church, with the Priest's blessing otherwise they should be held unlawful and incestuous: That a Bishop should not leave his Church during his life, no more than a wife her husband. He died under the emperor Traian, having reigned thirteen years, and five months.  
The See was void nineteen days.  
Number of Popes. 7 Year of Christ. 107 ALEXANDER a Roman, a man of so holy a life, as many Roman Senators received the Christian Religion by reason of his great piety. He suffered Martyrdom under Adrian; and being demanded why he did not answer, For that (said he) in the time of prayer, a Christian man speaks with God. He died, having held the place seven years, five months, and nineteen days.  
The See was vacant fifteen days.  
Number of Popes. 8 Year of Christ. 116 SIXTUS a Roman, suffered Martyrdom nine years, ten months, and ten days after he had been Bishop.  
The See was void two days.  
Number of Popes. 9 Year of Christ. 127 TELESPHORUS a Graecian, instituted the Lent as some writ. He suffered Martyrdom, and was buried in the Vatican, having been Bishop ten years, eight months, and five and twenty days.  
The See was vacant seven days.  
Number of Popes. 10 Year of Christ. 138 HYGINE a Graecian borne at Athens, ordained, That at the lest one Godfather or Godmother should present the infant at the Font: That materials dedicated for the building of Temples should not be transferred to profane uses: That no Metropolitan should condemn any Bishop of his Province, without the advice of the other Bishops of the same Province. He died the fourth year.  
The See was vacant three days.  
Number of Popes. 11 Year of Christ. 142 PIUS of Aquilea, ordained, That they should celebrat Easter on the Sunday, and some ceremonies for the ornament of Baptism and the Communion: That the Romans should not take the vail before the age of five and twenty years: That Priests which did swear should be deposed, and Laymen excommunicated. He did also impose penance upon negligent Priests, or that did handle the holy Sacraments unreverently. He consecrated the first Temple of Rome, the which was dedicated to S. Prudentiane, the Temples of Christians having been in former times in ●idden and obscure caves. He held the place eleven years, five months, and seven and twenty days.  
The See was void thirteen days.  
Number of Popes. 12 Year of Christ. 154 ANICETUS a Syrian born, renewed the decree of Anacletas, That Clarks should wear no beards: That no Bishop might be consecrated Metropolitan of the Province with a less number than three. He suffered Martyrdom having been Bishop nine years, eight months, and four and twenty days.  
The See was void seventeen days.  
Number of Popes. 13 Year of Christ. 163 CONCORDIUS SOTER of Fundi, renewed & confirmed the ordinance of the Eucharist, and touching the Sacerdorall blessing in marriage, and the consent of parents, for the great abuses which were committed in those times. Gratian reports, that he ordained, That no man should keep an oath which he had made to do ill. He died, having held the place seven years, eleven months, and eighteen days.  
The See was void one and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 14 Year of Christ. 171 ABUNDIUS ELEUTHERUS a Graecian borne, sent into great Brittany at the king's request, Fugati●ss and Damian●ss, men of piety and religion: by whom the king and his people were baptised. He did ordain that no man should abstain from any kind of meat for superstitions sake: and that no man being absent, and not convicted, should be condemned for any crime. Having augmented the Catholic Religion by his good example, and left peace unto the Church dispersed in a manner over all the earth, he died, having reigned fifteen years, and eighteen days.  
The See was vacant five days.  
Number of Popes. 15 Year of Christ. 186 VICTOR an African, ordained, That if any one being ready to receive the holy Communion, and persuaded to pardon his enemy, refused to be reconciled, he should be deprived of that holy mystery. He also confirmed the ordinance of Pius touching the celebration of Easter upon the Sunday, contrary to the customs of the Churches of Asia, whom he excommunicated: for the which he was reprehended by Ireneus. He suffered Martyrdom, having been Bishop twelve years, one month, and eight and twenty days.  
The See was void twelve days.  
Number of Popes. 16 Year of Christ. 198 ABUNDIUS ZEFIRINUS a Roman, ordained, That every one having attained to the age of twelve or thirteen years, should at the lest at Easter receive the holy Communion: That the Ch●●●●●, being in the beginning of wood, should be made of glass; which Decree was afterwards abolished, and it was ordained that they should be of gold, silver, or 〈◊〉: That no Bishop might be judge over his Archbishop or Metropolitan, nor of his Primate or Patriarch. He died, having held the place twenty years, and fifteen days.  
The See was void six days.  
Number of Popes. 17 Year of Christ. 218 DOMITIUS CALISTUS a Roman, built a Church and a Churchyard at Rome, where remain the Relics of many holy Martyrs. He instituted the four Ember weeks: some attribute unto him the decree of celibate of priests; but Poli●●re in his ●i●t book, and fourth chapter writes, that they could not altogether take ●arriage from the priests of the West (for the Grecians, and they of the East do mar●●●) until the time of Gregory the seventh, in the year 1074. He was made a Martyr having reigned five years, one month, and thirteen days.  
The See was voided six days.  
Number of Popes. 18 Year of Christ. 223 VRBAIN a Roman, under whom the Church of Rome began to have lands and inheritances, which should be common, and distributed to feed Churchmen, the poor, and protonotaries which did writ the acts of Martyrs. Damasus doth attribute unto him the decree for the making of vessel of silver or tin: whereupon Boniface Bishop of Mentz said, that in old time, priests of gold used chalices of wood: But now priests of wood use chalices of silver. He drew many unto the faith by his holy life, and suffered Martyrdom having been Bishop seven years, seven months, and five days.  
The See was vacant three and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 19 Year of Christ. 231 CALPURNIUS PONTIANUS a Roman, having endured many torments, died, in exile, in the Island of Sardinia, five years, five months, and two days after his coming to the place. Some say, that in his time there were at Rome fifteen ●●●estss called Cardinals, tha●●s to say, chief men, to bury the dead, and to baptizm ●●ung children, and other fifteen who had the chief charge of the health of souls: 〈◊〉 Polidore and Damasus say, that Pope Marcel was the author of these Cardinals, in 〈◊〉 year 1302.  
The See was voided one day.  
Number of Popes. 20 Year of Christ. 236 ANTHEROS a Graecian, ordained that the deeds of Martyrs should be written, 〈◊〉 suffered any Clergy man to change his Church with another, so as it were done 〈◊〉 the health of souls and public good, and not for their private profit: he decreed that it should not be lawful for any one to be Pope, unless he were first a Bishop. He suffered martyrdom, having held the place five years, one month, and fourteen days.  
The place was voided six days.  
Number of Popes. 21 Year of Christ. 239 FABIAN a Roman, chosen miraculously, baptised Philip father and son, the first Christian Emperors, and accepted their treasures: he ordained again touching the history of Martyrs: he did forbidden to take a wife in the fist degree of consanguinity, and would that every Christian should communicate thrice a year, that is to say, at the Feasts of Easter, Whitsunday, and the birth of our Saviour. He was made a Martyr, chiefly in hatred of the Treasures which he had received from the Emperor: having reigned thirteen years and eleven months.  
The See was voided six days.  
Number of Popes. 22 Year of Christ. 252 CORNELIUS a Roman, was very learned, and did writ many Epistles: there were two Antipopes: he made many ordinances, as may be seen in Gratian, and being accused of high treason, for that he had written to S. Cyprian, was whipped and put to death under the Emperor Decius, having held the place two years, two months, and three days.  
The See was voided two months and five days.  
SCHISM I  
Number of Popes. 23 Year of Christ. *** NOVATIAN a Roman, and an heretical priest, saying that such as had once fallen from the faith, should be no more received into the Church, notwithstanding their repentance: he was the first schismatic, hypocrite, and covetous man which affected the place of Bishop. He kindled the fire of division & discord, making himself Antipope, with the help of Novatus, a priest of Carthage, as S. Cyprian doth witness writing to Cornelius, who condemned him for a heretic in two counsels held at Rome. Nicostratus was an other Antipope in Africa.  
Number of Popes. 23 Year of Christ. 253 LUCIUS a Roman, ordained that every Bishop should be accompanied by two priests, and three Archdeacon's, to be witnesses of his good conversation: and that Bishops should be thirty years old: yet Gratian attributes this decree to Zozimus. He was made a Martyr having lived in the place one year, three months, and thirteen days.  
The See was vacant one month, and five days.  
Number of Popes. 24 Year of Christ. 255 LUCIUS STEPHEN a Roman, was the first that brought sacerdotal habits into use; priests in former times contenting themselves to be attired with piety, religion, and holiness, studying more to put off the old man, and vice, than to adorn themselves with new & rich ornaments. He was Martyred one year, three months, and thirteen days after he came to be Bishop.  
The See was vacant one month and twelve days.  
Number of Popes. 25 Year of Christ. 257 SIXTUS the second an Athenian, having taught the Gospel throughout all Spain, was chosen Pope: he ordained that Churches should be built towards the East: he had a desire to confute the Sabellians, Cerinthians, and Nepotian heretics. He suffered Martyrdom having held the chair one year, ten months, and three and twenty days.  
The See was vacant eleven months and fifteen days.  
Number of Popes. 26 Year of Christ. 260 DENIS a Graecian, being placed in the See of Rome to be Pope, and being chosen, he first of all both at Rome & in other places, distributed the Temples, Churchyards, Parishes, and Bishop●ickeses, commanding every one to content himself with his limits, there to feed the flock which should be committed unto him. He suffered death ten years, five months, and five days after his coming into the place.  
The See was voided five days.  
Number of Popes. 27 Year of Christ. 271 FELIX a Roman, ordained that they should every day celebrat the memory of Martyrs, and no where but in holy places; that once a year they should observe the dedication of Churches. He suffered Martyrdom having been Bishop three years, and five months.  
The See was vacant five days.  
Number of Popes. 28 Year of Christ. 275 EUTICHIEN a Tuscan of Luna, having written certain Epistles and Decrees, and buried three hundred forty and two Martyrs with his own hand, he himself was made a Martyr, having held the place eight years, six months, and four and twenty days.  
The See was vacant eight days.  
Number of Popes. 29 Year of Christ. 283 CAIUS of Sallone in Dalmatia, of the family of Dioclesian, suffered Martyrdom, having held the chair twelve years, four months, and six days.  
The See was voided two months, and eight days.  
Number of Popes. 30 Year of Christ. 296 MARCELLIN a Roman, being possessed with the fear of torments, honoured Idols, but afterwards he acknowledged his fault in open Synod, assembled at Sinuesse, and did penance: yea afterwards he came and reprehended the Emperor Dioclesian, and did willingly suffer Martyrdom, having reigned seven years, nine months, and six and twenty days.  
The See was vacant twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 31 Year of Christ. 304 MARCEL a Roman, limited the quarters and titles divided by Euariste, and reduced them to five and twenty: he was made a Martyr, having been Bishop five years, six months, and one and twenty days.  
The See was vacant twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 32 Year of Christ. 310 EUSEBIUS a physician of Greece, made many ordinances: he was martyred, having held the place one year, seven months, and five and twenty days.  
The See was voided seven days.  
Number of Popes. 33 Year of Christ. 311 MILTIADES an African, he did forbidden fasting upon Sunday and Thursday: for that the pagan did celebrat the solemnities of their Saturnian gods. He died, having held the place three years, and two months.  
The See was vacant seventeen days.  
Number of Popes. 34 Year of Christ. -- 5 SILVESTER a Roman, he changed the Pagan names of days: But his greatest work was the conversion of the Roman Emperor Constantin (as som● w●ite) to the Catholic faith, who afterwards caused the tyrannous persecutions against the Christians to cease. He died, having been Bishop twenty years, two months, four days.  
The See was vacant fifteen days.  
THE FIRST GENERAL COUNCIL.  
Year of Christ. 317 THe first general Council was held at Nice, by the commandment of Constantin the Great, by three hundred and eighteen Bishops from all parts of the world, to pacify the Estate of the Church, troubled chiefly by the detestable heresy of Arrius, where he was condemned: and it was concluded, That the son of God was Homoousion, that is to say, consubstantial to the father, according to the Symbol of our Creed.  
Number of Popes. 35 Year of Christ. 336 MARC a Roman, having ordained that the Symbol made at the Council of Nice, Credo in unum Deum, etc. should be sung by the Clergy and people after the preaching of the Gospel; he died within eight months, and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 36 Year of Christ. 336 JULIO a Roman, being returned from exile whither he had been sent by Constantius an Arrian, son to Constantin: he died, having held the place fourteen years, five months, and sixteen days.  
The See was vacant five and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 37 Year of Christ. 351 LIBERIUS a Roman, being banished for that he had resisted the Arrians, by the 〈◊〉 promises of the Emperor Constantius an Arrian (according to the opinion of some) he consented to adhere unto them, to his great infamy: yet in the end reclaiming himself, he died a Catholic, having held the Chair fifteen years, four months, and seventeen days.  
The See was void six days.  
SCHISM II  
Number of Popes. 38 Year of Christ. 355 FELIX the second a Roman, was (according unto some) the eight and thirtieth Pope, but others number him not, for that he did precide in the absence of Liberius. Onuphrius holds him for the second Schismatic: he was martyred by the Arrians, having held the place ten years, three months, and eleven days.  
Number of Popes. 38 Year of Christ. 355 DAMASUS a Spaniard, he writ the lives of Popes by the council of saint▪ Jerome: He caused to be said in the Latin Church after the end of the Psalms, Gloria Patri, etc. composed by Flamianus Antiochenus; the Symbol of Constantinople, and the Confiteor. The ordinance for the singing of Psalms by turns, comes from him and S. Ambrose. He died, having been Bishop eighteen years, two months, and ten days.  
The See was vacant seventeen days.  
SCHISM III  
Year of Christ. 366 VRSIN a Roman, he was Competitor to Damasus after the death of Liberius and Felix: and then began the third Schism, whenas the ambition of honours began to seize upon the hearts of the Prelates of the Church.  
THE SECOND GENERAL COUNCIL.  
Year of Christ. 381 A General Council was held at Constantinople, of one hundred and fifty Bishops, under Gracian and Theodosius, emperors, for the heresy of Macedonius Bishop of Constantinople and of Euroxe, denying the Holy Ghost to be God, where they were condemned.  
Number of Popes. 39 Year of Christ. 384 SYRICIUS a Roman, he did forbidden the Clergy to marry, and (as some writ) did ordain that no man which had had two wives, might be received into the Priesthood. The Bourgondians for fear of Hwa made themselves Christians. He died, having been Bishop thirty years, one month, and five and twenty days.  
The See was vacant a month, and fifteen days.  
Number of Popes. 40 Year of Christ. 398 ANASTATIUS a Roman, ordained, That when they should sing the Gospel, every man should stand up, to the end they might hear it with more reverence: That such as were defective or maimed of any limb be should not be admitted into the Clergy. He died four years, and one and twenty days af●er his election.  
The See was vacant ten days.  
Number of Popes. 41 Year of Christ. 402 INNOCENT of Albania or Scotland died, having reigned fifteen years, two months, and one and twenty days.  
The See was vacant two and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 42 Year of Christ. 416 ZOZIMUS a Graecian, a very learned man & of a holy life: He did prohibit bondmen to be admitted into the order of Priesthood; much less (saith Platina) bastards and wicked men. He died two years, four months, and seven days after his election.  
The See was vacant nine days.  
Number of Popes. 43 Year of Christ. 419 BONIFACE a Roman, it is h● which changed the eves of Saints to fastings. He was expelled Rome by reason of Eulalius, by the Emperor Honorius, son to Theodosiu●; who repealed him again. He died, having held the place four years, nine months, and eight and twenty days.  
The See was vacant nine days.  
SCHISM four  
Year of Christ. 419 EULALIUS a Roman, during he Schism against Boniface was chosen by a part of the Clergy, and was put out of Rome with Boniface: He died within three months, and seven days after he had been chosen.  
Number of Popes. 44 Year of Christ. 423 CELESTIN a Roman, ordained, That Priests should be expert in the Eccles●asticall Cannons. He died, having held the Chair eight years, five months, and three days.  
The See was void a month, and eleven days.  
THE THIRD GENERAL SYNOD OR COUNCIL.  
Year of Christ. 430 A General Council was held at Ephesus, under Theodosius the second, of two hundred Bishops, against the Heretics, Pelages, and Nestorius, Bishops of Constantinople, who denied the divinity of jesus Christ.  
Number of Popes. 45 Year of Christ. 432 SIXTUS the third a Roman, having distributed all his goods unto the poor, he died, having reigned seven years, and eleven months.  
The See was u●yd one month, and eleven days.  
Number of Popes. 46 Year of Christ. 440 LEO the Great, so called by reason of his great doctrine; he ordained or renewed the Rogations and Processions, which they call Litanies. His Litanies are the lesser, and Gregory the Great instituted the greater, having made many Decrees. He did forbidden the singing of hallelujah, and Gloria in excelsis Deo, in the time of Lent: he died, having been Bishop twenty years, eleven months, and two days. The See being void seven days. Before this Pope, the See of Rome did number their years from the passion of Christ.  
THE FOURTH GENERAL SYNOD.  
Year of Christ. 452 THe general Council of Calcedoine, under the Emperor Martian, of two hundred twenty five Bishops, against the heresy of Eutiches a Priest of Constantinople, confounding the two natures of jesus Christ.  
Number of Popes. 47 Year of Christ. 461 HILARIUS of Sardinia, a learned man, he did forbidden any man to choose his successor to any Ecclesiastical charge. He died six years, three months, and ten days after his election.  
The See was void ten days.  
Number of Popes. 48 Year of Christ. 467 SIMPLICIUS of Tivoli ordained (as some writ) That no Clergy man should acknowledge any of the laity in the possession of a benefice. He died having held the chair fifteen years, six months, and three and twenty days.  
The See was vacant six days.  
Number of Popes. 49 Year of Christ. 483 FELIX the third a Roman, ordained that Churches should be consecrated only by Bishops. He died having been Bishop eight years, eleven months, and s●uenteene days.  
The See was voided five days.  
Number of Popes. 50 Year of Christ. 492 GELASIUS an African, ordained that the sacred orders should not be administered but four times a year, and on the Saturday: he composed Hymns, Collects, answers, and made other ordinances, being learned. He died having held the place four years, eight months, and nineteen days.  
The See was vacant five days.  
Number of Popes. 51 Year of Christ. 496 ANASTASIUS the second, a Roman, he is reputed an heretic infamous by some, and favouring the Nestorians; yet as it is recorded by some, he excommunicated the Emperor Anastasius as an Eutichen. He died miserably, having emptied his bowels like unto Arrius, two years, eleven months, and four and twenty days after his election.  
The See was voided two days.  
Number of Popes. 52 Year of Christ. 498 CELIUS SYMMACHUS of Sardinia, was Pope, notwithstanding the election of one called Laurence, and of another called P. Alton, so by them began the fift Schism: for Theoderic king of the Goths, who then held Italy, hearing that the seditious Clergy of Rome would depose Symmachus, he sent this Alton to hold the See, and to chase away the other two: yet Symmachus being purged of the crimes which were objected against him, was restored, and died having held the place fifteen years, seven months, and eight and twenty days.  
The See was vacant two days.  
SCHISM V.  
Year of Christ. 513 LAURENCE a Roman, during the Schism against Symmachus died the first year.  
Number of Popes. 53 Year of Christ. 514 CELIUS HORMISDA of Fresselona a city in Campagnia, seeing many Monks at Rome obstinate in the heresy of Eutiches, he caused them to be banished the city. He did great alms deeds, condemned the heresy of the Manicheens which sprang up again, and caused their books to be burned. He died having held the place nine years, nine months, and seventeen days.  
The See was voided five days.  
Number of Popes. 54 Year of Christ. 523 JOHN of Tuscan, being sent in Embassage by king Theodoric an Arrian, to the Emperor justin at Constantinople, to restore the Arrians to their liberty, and having obtained it, notwithstanding being suspected by Theodorick, he was imprisoned by him, where he died in great want, two years, nine months, and six days after his election.  
The See was voided one month and seven and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 55 Year of Christ. 526 FELIX the fourth, a Samien, built the Church at S. Cosmo at Rome, and repaired some others. He died having held the place four years, two months, and eighteen days.  
The See was vacant three days.  
Number of Popes. 56 Year of Christ. 530 BONIFACE the second a Roman, was allowed by all men after the death of Dioscores: and died two years, and two days after his election.  
The See was voided three months and five days.  
SCHISM VI.  
DIOSCORES a Roman, being chosen by some, during the Schism, against Boniface, died soon after.  
Number of Popes. 57 Year of Christ. 531 JOHN the second, surnamed Mercury, having received a confession of the Faith from the Emperor justinian, signed with his own hand, with a goodly present, died having held the place two years, four months, and six days.  
The See was voided six days.  
Number of Popes. 58 Year of Christ. 534 RUSTICUS AGAPITUS a Roman, he caused justinian to leave the heresy of Eutiches, with the which he had been seduced by Anthemius a Bishop of Constantinople: then he died having held the place a year, and nineteen days.  
The See was voided six months, and twenty and five days.  
Number of Popes. 59 Year of Christ. 535 CELIUS SILVERIUS of Fresselona in Campania, refusing to restore Anthemius the heretic to his Bishopric of Constantinople, by the commandment of the Empress, was falsely condemned to have sought to deliver Rome unto the Goths, and was banished into the Island of Pontus, where he died of poverty, one year, five months, and two days after his election.  
The See was vacant five days.  
SCHISM VII.  
Number of Popes. 60 Year of Christ. 537 VIGILIUS a Roman, created during the Schism against silverius an ambitious man, and who had been the cause of the expulsion of silverius, obtained the Papal dignity by force, and through the favour of Theodora wi●e to the Emperor justinian: who afterwards caused him to be drawn out of Rome, with the consent of the Romans who hated him mortally, and carried to Constantinople, where he received many outrages & indignities, being led through the town with a halter about his neck, ●nd in the e●d banished, for that he would not restore Anthemius the heretic to his Bishopric of Constantinople, according to a bad promise he had made to Theodora, whereof he repent him. He died having held the place seventeen years, six months, and nine and twenty days.  
The See was voided one month, and five days.  
THE FIFT GENERAL COUNCIL.  
Year of Christ. 553 A General council was held at Constantinople the second time, of one hundred sixty and five Bishops, against Anthemius Bishop of Constantinople, and Theodore an eloquent man, who said that the virgin Mary had brought forth a man only, and not man and God: where it was concluded that she was Theotocos, the mother of God.  
Number of Popes. 61 Year of Christ. 555 P●LAGIUS a Roman, ordained that heretics and schismatics should be punished by the temporal sword; and that none should be admitted to Ecclesiastical orders by ambition and gifts. He died having been Bishop five years, ten months, and eight and twenty days.  
The See was voided four months and five days.  
Number of Popes. 62 Year of Christ. 561 JOHN the third a Roman, having finished the reparations of certain Churches, and enlarged the Churchyards of Martyrs, died twelve years, eleven months, and six and twenty days after his election.  
The See was voided ten months and sixteen days.  
Number of Popes. 63 Year of Christ. 575 BENEDICT or BENNET a Roman, affected the poor much, and seeing Italy ruined by the Lombard's wars, who began to possess the country, at the instigation of Narses, who was incensed against the Empress Sophia, it being also afflicted by famine and pestilence, died having held the place four years, one month, and nine and twenty days.  
The See was voided four months.  
Number of Popes. 64 Year of Christ. 579 PELAGIUS the second, a Roman, chosen without the consent of the Emperor, for that Rome was besieged by the Lombard's, having made of his father's house an hospital for the poor, transported the Patriarchship of Aquilea to Grada, making it Metropolitan of the province of Venise, died of the plague, having held the place ten years, two months, and ten days.  
The See was vacant six months and five and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 65 Year of Christ. 590 GREGORY the Great, was chosen by the Clergy, and all the people, with the consent of the emperor Maurice: He invented many ceremonies and prayers, the particularities whereof you may read in Platina. Some attribute to him the abstinency from flesh in Lent, but others hold it is much more ancient, & that he only added the four days from Wednesday to Sunday to make up the number of forty. He died, having held the Chair thirteen years, six months, and ten days.  
The See was vacant five months, and seventeen days.  
Number of Popes. 66 Year of Christ. 604 SABINIAN a Tuscan, whose beginning is unknown, and with reason: for he was wicked, and unworthy of his Estate, a detractor of his predecessors virtues, saying, That he had wasted the goods of the Church, having been liberal to the poor: he had a will to burn his books. Having ordained burning Lamps in the Church, and Bells, and that the hours should strike. He died one year, five months, and four days after his election.  
The See was void eleven months, and six and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 67 Year of Christ. 607 BONIFACE the third a Roman, having obtained the Primacy over all the Churches, from the Emperor Phocas, ordained, in a Council of seventy two Bishops, thirty Priests, and three Deacons, That the Bishop should be chosen by the Clergy, and the people: and that all they which should come unto the dignity by gifts and favours, should be excommunicated. This was a holy ordinance, but much neglected to the ruin of many. He died within eight months, and three and twenty days after his coming to the Chair.  
The See was void ten months, and three days.  
Number of Popes. 68 Year of Christ. 608 BONIFACE the fourth, of Valeria ●n Provence, obtained of the emperor the Pantheon of all the feigned gods, and did dedicated it to the honour of the Virgin Marie, and of all the Martyrs Than was the Feast of Al-Saints instituted, the twel●th of May. Having made a Monastery of his house, and given leave to Monks to preach, baptise, and confess, he died, six years, eight months, and eleven days after his election.  
The See was vacant four months, and three and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 69 Year of Christ. 615 THEODAT a Roman, a man of holy life, caused the Council of Auxerre to be celebrated, in which the new years gifts which were given the first day of the year were forbidden, to the end they should not seem to imitate the pagan. He died, having held the place three years, ten months, and seven and twenty days.  
The See was void one month, and six and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 70 Year of Christ. 619 BONIFACE the fift a Neopolitain, a very mild man, ordained first of all the Popes, That Churches should be Sanctuaries for all fugitives, except sacralegious persons, and such as were excommunicate. He died, having been Bishop three years, ten months, and nine days.  
The See was void thirteen days.  
Number of Popes. 71 Year of Christ. 622 HONORIUS was liberal to the poor: He beautified S. Peter's Church with gold, silver, and goodly Tables. Afterwards he died, having held the Chair twelve years, eleven months, and seven days.  
The See w●ss void one year, seven months, and eighteen days.  
Number of Popes. 72 Year of Christ. 637 SEVERIN a Roman, was liberal to the poor: He had a care to repair the Churches, and to increase the revenues thereof. Dagobert of France had the like zeal at the same time, who caused the Church of S. Denis to be built, enriching it wonderfully, yea with the relics and spoils of other Churches. This Pope died within one year, two months, and four days.  
The See was vacant one month, and two and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 73 Year of Christ. 638 JOHN the fourth of Dalmatia, redeemed many Dalmatians and Istrians, detayn●d captives by the Sarrazins: then died within one year, nine months, and eighteen days.  
The See was void one month, and fourteen days.  
Number of Popes. 74 Year of Christ. 640 THEODORIC borne at Jerusalem, son to Theodor Bishop of Jerusalem, was liberal to the poor. The election was of force, being made by the Clergy and people, and confirmed by the Exarcke, as lieutenant to the emperor. He died, having been Bishop six years, five months, and eighteen days.  
The See was vacant four months, and one ●ay.  
Number of Popes. 75 Year of Christ. 647 MARTIN an Italian, assembled a Council at Rome of one hundred and fifty Bishops, against Pyrrhus, Sergius, and Cyrus, being absent, and Paul who was present, patriarchs of Constantinople, Heretics, Monothelites, denying two wills in jesus Christ. By the commandment of the emperor Constantin the third, an heretic, he was banished unto a city of Pontus, where (having endured many miseries) he ended his days, having held the Chair six years, one month, and eight and twenty days.  
The See was void eight months, and eight and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 76 Year of Christ. 654 EUGENIUS a Roman, ordained, That the houses of Priests & Bishops should be built near unto Churches, with Prisons to punish the crimes of Clergy men. He died two years, nine months, and fourteen days after his election.  
The See was void one year, and seventeen days.  
Number of Popes. 77 Year of Christ. 657 VITALIANUS a Roman, ordained singing in the Church of Rome, to the which he did accord Organs, the which had not been used in divine service: and being wholly given to defend the Christian Religion against Heretics, he died within three years, five months, and nine and twenty days.  
The See was vacant two months, and fourteen days.  
Number of Popes. 78 Year of Christ. 672 DEODAT a Roman Monk, cured a Leper in kissing him, as some writ: h● was a religious man, affable, and liberal to the poor, and strangers. He died, having held the Chair four years, two months, and fifteen days.  
The See was void four months, and six days.  
Number of Popes. 79 Year of Christ. 676 DONNIUS a Roman, caused the porch of S. Peter's Church to be paved with marble: and by his integrity he subjecteth the Church of Ravenna to that of Rome, the which pretended to be head of itself. He died two years, five months, and ten days after his election.  
The See was void two months, and eight and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 80 Year of Christ. 680 AGATHON a Sicilian Monk, was of so good a disposition, as never man that came unto him went away sad or discontent, but joyful and comforted. He died within two years, and seven months.  
The See was vacant seven months.  
THE SIXT GENERAL COUNCIL.  
A General Council was held at Constantinople of two hundred eighty nine Bishops, against the Monothelites, who denied two wills and natures in jesus Christ. The Patriarch of Constantinople forsook his heresy; but Machaire of Antioch would not leave it, and was therefore deposed from his Bishopric. Marriage to the Priest's of Greece was allowed there, but not to the Western Church.  
Number of Popes. 81 Year of Christ. 682 LEO the second, a Sicilian, a very learned man in the Greek and Latin tongues, and a good physician, who reduced the singing into better music. He loved the poor, exhorting all by words, and example, to piety, justice, humanity, and other virtues; having ordained that they should give the Pixe at the Mass. He died within ten months, and nineteen days.  
The See was vacant one year, one month, and one and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 82 Year of Christ. 684 BENNET the second, a Roman, was of so holy a conversation, as in favour of him the Emperor Constantine the fourth allowed the election of Popes to be sufficient, being made by the Clergy, and people of Rome, without the authority and confirmation of the Emperor: the which was not long observed. He died ten months, and seven and twenty days after his election.  
The See was vacant two months, and nine days.  
Number of Popes. 83 Year of Christ. 685 JO●N the fift, a Syrian, a learned and virtuous man: he was consecrated like unto his predecessor, by the Bishops of Ostia, Portance, and Velitercia, the which he ordained should afterwards be observed, as the custom is yet. He died within one year, and nine days.  
The See was voided two months eighteen days.  
SCHISM VII.  
Year of Christ. 686 PETER an Archpriest of Rome, was chosen by the Clergy, and held the sea for certain days. Theodore a priest of Rome being chosen by the Roman army, held the chair for certain days against Peter, and these two were the Authors of the seventh Schismfoure, both which being expelled, Conon was created.  
Number of Popes. 84 CONON a Roman, surnamed Angel, for his holy life, doctrine, and beauty, was chosen Pope, after a great contention against Peter and Theodore. He died within eleven months.  
The See was vacant two months and five and twenty days.  
SCHISM VIII.  
THEODORE a priest of Rome, a rich man, who had corrupted the soldiers with money, held the See for certain days.  
PASCHAL an Archdeacon, being convicted of art magic during the Schism of Theodore, had also the cheer for certain days, but in the end both being expelled, Sergius was created.  
Number of Popes. 85 Year of Christ. 687 SERGIUS a Syrian, a man of a holy life: he died thirteen years, eight months, and thirteen days after his creation.  
The See was voided one month and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 86 Year of Christ. 701 JOHN the sixt, a Graecian, he was very careful to repair Churches and Altars, and to redeem captives with the treasure of the Church. He died having held the chair three years, two months, and fourteen days.  
The See was vacant one month and eighteen days.  
Number of Popes. 87 Year of Christ. 705 JOHN the seventh a Graecian, an eloquent man, having caused many Churches to be repaired, and to be enriched with pictures and statues, died two years, seven months, and seventeen days after his election.  
The See was not voided at all.  
Number of Popes. 88 Year of Christ. 707 SISINUS or ZOFIMUS a Syrian, a man of great sanctity, died suddenly, being much tormented with the gout in his feet. He had a great desire not to omit that which did belong unto a true Bishop. He lived in the place but twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 89 CONSTANTIN a Syrian, was beloved of all men, especially of the poor: this Pope being at Constantinople, the Emperor justinian the second kissed his feet in sign of honour; and so that custom was brought in by this Emperor, the which continues unto this day. He was the first of all the Popes which did oppo●e himself boldly against the Emperor Philip Bardanes, who would have taken away images. He died having held the chair eight years, one month, and twenty days.  
The See was vacant one month and ten days.  
Number of Popes. 90 Year of Christ. 716 GREGORY the second a Roman, sent Boniface a learned Monk into Germany to preach the Gospel, where he converted many: he excommunicated the Emperor Leo surnamed Iconomachus, for that he attempted to take away images. So the Emperors proceeding was the cause of the increase of the Roman See: for then Rome, and in a manner all Italy, retired themselves from the Emperor's obedience. The Exarchat seized, being held by the Lombard's: and from that time the princes of France were called to secure the Popes, who were by them (as Protectors) defended and enriched. He died having held the place fourteen years, ten months, and two and twenty days.  
The See was voided one month and five days.  
Number of Popes. 91 Year of Christ. 731 GREGORI● the third, a Syrian, a learned man in the Greek & Latin tongues, being besieged within Rome by the king of the Lombard's, and having no support from the Emperor, he retired himself into France to Charles Martel from whom he obtained what he desired. He died ten years, eight months, and four and twenty days after his creation.  
The See was voided two days.  
Number of Popes. 92 Year of Christ. 742 ZACHARIE a Graecian, a man endued with many virtues: he pacified Italy being then much troubled, and approved the election of Pepin to be king of France, in the place of Childericke, who was forced to become a Monk, and freed the French from the oath of allegiance which they had made to him. He died ten years, three months, and fifteen days after he came to the place.  
The See was voided eight days.  
Number of Popes. 93 Year of Christ. 752 STEPHEN the second, a Roman, whom many omit, for that he lived but four days.  
The See was vacant one day.  
Number of Popes. 94 Year of Christ. 752 STEPHEN the third called the second, a wife & virtuous man, and so generally beloved, that he was carried by some upon their shoulders unto S. john de Latran; whereupon the Pope's use to be carried at this day. He came into France, and obtained succours from Pepin against the king of the Lombard's, with great presents, that is to say, the signory of Ravenna, of a great extent, the which in former times did belong unto the emperors Lieutenants: having anointed Pepin king of France, he died having been Pope five years, and nine and twenty days.  
The See was vacant two and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 95 Year of Christ. 757 PAUL a Roman, brother to Stephen, a man very pitiful to the poor, sick, and prisoners, whom he did visit alone in the night. He was created Pope, notwithstanding the election made by some of Theophylactes. Paul died, a great defender of widows, orphans, and poor people, having held the place ten years, and one month.  
The See was voided one year, seven months, and seven days.  
SCHISM IX.  
Year of Christ. 757 THEOPHYLACTES a Roman, an Archdeacon, was chosen by some during the Schism against Paul, and held the See certain months.  
SCHISM X.  
CONSTANTIN of Nepeses a Layman, was created by the laity by force, and against the Canons: he held the See one year, one month, ten days.  
PHILIP a Roman Monk, during the Schism was created by the laity against Constantin, and held it five days, but both being expelled, they created Stephen.  
Number of Popes. 96 Year of Christ. 786 STEPHEN the fourth called the third, a Sicilian Monk, was chosen Pope against the election of Constantin and Philip both Antipopes. Stephen having in a Council at Latran revoked the ordinances of Constantin the Antipope, and disannulled the seventh Council at Constantinople, called by the Emperor Constantin the fift (some say Leo the third his father) for that which concerned images; died three years, five months, and seven and twenty days after his election.  
The See was voided nine days.  
Number of Popes. 97 Year of Christ. 789 ADRIAN a Roman, one of the most famous of all his predecessors in bounty, learning, & sanctity of life, called Charlemaigne king of France to secure him against Didier king of the Lombard's, who lost his realm in a Council of one hundred fifty and three Bishops, which Segebert calls general. He gave to Charlemain power to choose the Pope, and other Prelates, and ordained that his Bulls should be sealed in lead. He died having been Pope seven years, ten months, and seventeen days.  
The See was not voided at all.  
THE SEVENTH COUNCIL.  
Year of Christ. 789 A Council held at Nicee of three hundred and fifty Bishops, for the restitution of images, and a formeto honour them: but this was opposed by the Council of Frankfort.  
Number of Popes. 98 Year of Christ. 796 LEO the third, a Roman, a learned man, loving the poor given to preach, and affecting learned men, was beaten almost to death, and put in prison by two Roman Priests, from the which he escaped, and came into France to Charlemain who restored him to his dignity, having purged himself by oath. After that he had crowned Charles the emperor, he died, having been Pope twenty years, five months, and eighteen days.  
The See was void twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 99 Year of Christ. 816 STEPHEN the fift, called the fourth, a Roman, a noble man, and learned: He came into France to excuse himself touching his election, without the consent of the emperor Lewis the Gentle, whom he crowned at Rheims; then returning to Rome, he died six months, and three and twenty days after his election.  
The See was void two days.  
Number of Popes. 100 Year of Christ. 817 PASCAL a Roman Monk, being chosen without the authority of the Emperor Lewis the Gentle, excused himself by letters and embassages: Then the emperor did quit this goodly Prerogative and right of election, reserving only that the new Pope should renew amity by embassages, presently after his election. He died, having been Pope seven years, three months, and seventeen days.  
The See was void four days.  
Number of Popes. 101 Year of Christ. 824 EUGENIUS the second, a Roman, liberal to the poor, and learned, was chosen Pope, notwithstanding the election of one Zinzius. He died three years, six months, four and twenty days after his election.  
The See was vacant two days.  
SCHISM XI.  
Year of Christ. 824 ZINZINUS a Roman, created during the Schism against Eugenius, held the See cert●ine days.  
Number of Popes. 102 Year of Christ. 827 VALENTIN a Roman, an eloquent man, and of good life; he died within one month, and ten days.  
The See was vacant three days.  
Number of Popes. 103 Year of Christ. 828 GREGORY the fourth, a Roman, gave Council to king Lewis the Gentle, to hold the Feast of all Saints in France and Germany, upon the first day of November. He lived Pope sixteen years.  
The See was void fift●ene days.  
Number of Popes. 104 Year of Christ. 844 SERGIUS the second, a Roman, a good man, called before Swine's snout, changed his name, and was the first (according to the common opinion) which gave occasion to his successors to change their names a● their election. He died the third year.  
The See was not void.  
Number of Popes. 105 Year of Christ. 847 LEO the forth, a Roman and a Monk, was a very good man: he resisted the Sarrazins coming with a great army against the Neopolitans and Romans: and having first called upon God, and then given leave to go against the enemies, his men returned victors. He died eight years, three months, and six days after his election.  
The See was vacant six days.  
AN ADVERTISEMENT.  
Some Historians, yea of great authority, set in this place joan the seventh or eighth, a Germane or English woman under the habit of a man, being a woman, studied in such sort as she was advanced to be Pope, and ruled two years, and certain months, at the end whereof (being w●th child) ●●e was delivered in a public Procession, and died. Martinus Polo●u●, Platina, Volateranus, Philip, Berg. Nau●lerus, and others.  
Number of Popes. 106 Year of Christ. 855 BENEDICT the third, a Roman, was chosen against his will, weeping when he received h●s charge, and taking God to witness, That he was not capable: yet he was a very good man, visited the sick, fed the poor, comforted the comfortless, and defended the widows and orphans. He was deposed, and in the mean time Anastasius usurped the See. Afterwards he was restored, and died, having been Pope two years, eight months, and sixteen days.  
SCHISM XII.  
Year of Christ. 855 ANASTASIUS the third, a Roman, created during the Schism against Benedict, held the place for certain days, and was the Author of the twelfth Schism.  
Number of Popes. 107 Year of Christ. 858 NICHOLAS the Great, a Roman: he made many Decrees, and among others, That no man should assist at the Mass of a Priest base borne: That baptism should not be reiterated, although it were administered by a Pagan or jew, so as it were in the name of the Father, the Son, and the Holy Ghost. He died, having held the Chair nine years, six months, and twenty days.  
The See was vacant seven days.  
Number of Popes. 108 Year of Christ. 867 ADRIAN the second, a Roman, was chosen Pope without the attending of the emperors Ambassadors: He was a good man, and learned, liberal to the poor, and humble to all men, yea washing the Bishop's feet. He died, four years, eleven months, and twelve days after his election.  
The See was void two days.  
THE EIGHT GENERAL COUNCIL.  
Year of Christ. 869 A General Council was held the fourth time at Constantinople, by 300 or 383 Bishops, against Photinus' Bishop of Constantinople, who was rejected and excommunicated, and Ignatius (unjustly deprived) was restored.  
Number of Popes. 109 Year of Christ. 872 JOHN the eight, a Roman (for we will leave joane) a learned man, came into France, having escaped out of prison at Rome: He crowned three Emperors in four years, Charles the Bald at Rome, Lewis the Stuttering, in a Council held at Troy's, and Charles the Gross after his return to Rome, the which never happened to any Pope. He died, having held the place ten years, and two days.  
The See was void three days.  
Number of Popes. 110 Year of Christ. 882 MARTIN the second came to be Pope by bad practices, and died within one year, and one month.  
The See was void two days.  
Number of Popes. 111 Year of Christ. 884 ADRIAN the third, a Roman, ordained, after Nicholas, That no Emperor should deal any more with the election of the Pope, but that it should be free unto the Clergy. He died after his election one year, three months, and nineteen days.  
The See was void three days.  
Number of Popes. 112 Year of Christ. 885 STEPHEN the sixt, called the fift, a Roman: he took delight in the holiness of some men, especially of one called Ber●rdus Bishop of Poitiers. He held the place six ye●reses, and nine days.  
The See was void five days.  
Number of Popes. 113 Year of Christ. 891 FORMO●US, a Roman, was chosen Pope: he held the See four years, six months, and eighteen days, and then was deprived, and afterwards was restored by corruption.  
The See was void five months, and two days.  
SCHISM XIII.  
SERG●US the third, a Roman, created during the Schism against Formosus, held the See for a certain time, which Schism was cruel and scandalous, and lasted long.  
Number of Popes. 114 Year of Christ. 895 BONIFACE the sixt, was put to death within 25 days after his election: He did nothing worthy of no●e in so short a time, no more than his six successors, for during their lives, the one did persecute another unworthily.  
The See was void five days.  
Number of Popes. 115 Year of Christ. 896 STEPHEN the seventh, called the sixt, a Roman, caused the decrees o● F●●mosus to be broken; he unburied his body, and cut off two of his fingers, and th●n inter read him among the laity. In the end repenting him of his villainous acts he become a Monk, having held the See one year, two months, and nineteen days.  
The See was vacant three days.  
Number of Popes. 116 Year of Christ. 897 ROMAN borne at Rome, did approve the acts of Formosus, disannulling those of Stephen: he was Pope four months, and three and twenty days.  
The See was voided one day.  
Number of Popes. 117 Year of Christ. 897 THEODORE the second, a Roman, a seditious man, who by the just judgement of God, died twenty days after his election. Platina saith, that in those days men came unto Ecclesiastical dignities by corruption, and not by virtue, as in former times.  
The See was voided one day.  
Number of Popes. 118 Year of Christ. 897 JOHN the ninth, a Roman and a Monk, flying to Ravenna, disannulled the acts of St●phen, and ●atefied the decrees of Formosus in the presence of the Emperor, and of king Charles the Simple. He died having held the place one year, and fifteen days.  
The See was voided one day.  
Number of Popes. 119 Year of Christ. 898 BENNET the fourth, a Roman, he was not worthy of memory, for the great troubles which were raised by his predecessors. He died having been Pope one year, six months, and fifteen days.  
The See was vacant six days.  
Number of Popes. 120 Year of Christ. 902 LEO the fift, having held the See forty days, was imprisoned in a Monastery, and then forced by his successor to become a Monk. He died of grief, seeing himself so ill entreated by him whom he had bread up and advanced.  
The See was not void at all.  
SCHISM XIIII.  
Number of Popes. 121 Year of Christ. 902 CHRISTOPHER, a Roman, during the Schism against Leo, having so wickedly made himself Pope, as we have said, lost it within seven months after. He was put in prison, and died poorly.  
The See was not voided.  
Number of Popes. 122 Year of Christ. 902 SERGIUS the third, a Roman, caused his predecessor to be put in prison: he commanded the body of Formosus the one hundred & thirteenth Pope, to whom he had been a Competitor, to be taken out of the grave, and his head to be cu● off as if he had been alive. He died having held the place seven years, three months, and sixteen days.  
The See was voided five days.  
Number of Popes. 123 Year of Christ. 910 ANASTASIUS the third, a Roma●e, having carried himself honestly, and done no act worthy of reprehension, died, having been Pope two years, one month, and two and twenty days.  
The See was voided two days.  
Number of Popes. 124 Year of Christ. 912 LANDUS SA●INUS a man of small esteem, died after two years, six months, and two and twenty days.  
The S●e was vacant six and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 125 Year of Christ. 913 JOHN the tenth, a Roman, given more to arms than to piety and religion, expelled the Sarrazins out of Calabria, with the help of Albert Marquis of Tuscan; and for that he did attribute unto himself all the glory of this victory, he was slain by the soldiers; having been Pope fifteen years, two months, and fifte●ne days.  
The See was voided one day.  
Number of Popes. 126 Year of Christ. 928 LEO the sixt, a Roman, having carried himself honestly, according to the corruption of that age, died within six months, and fifteen days after his election.  
The See was voided one day.  
Number of Popes. 127 Year of Christ. 928 STEPHEN the eight, called the seventh, a Roman, a modest & religious man. He died having been Pope two years, one month, and fifteen days.  
The See was voided two days.  
Number of Popes. 128 Year of Christ. 930 JOHN the eleventh, a Roman, having done nothing worthy of memory, died having held the place four years, eleven months, and fifteen days.  
The See was voided one day.  
Number of Popes. 129 Year of Christ. 935 LEO the seventh, a Roman, did nothing worthy of memory. The he●●ie of the Anthropomorphites (who said that God had a corporal form) renewed at this time. Otho the first, was the first Emperor which gave the oath of fidelity to this Pope, whom he freed out of prison, where he had been put by the Romans: and Leo confirmed unto him the power to choose the Popes. He died after three years, six months, and ten days.  
The See was voided one month.  
Number of Popes. 130 Year of Christ. 939 STEPHEN the ninth, called the eight, he came not out of his house by reason of the scars he had in his face, of wounds which he had received in a fedition. He died having been pope three years, four months, and fifteen days.  
The See was voided ten days.  
Number of Popes. 131 Year of Christ. 942 MARTIN the third, a Roman, a quiet man; he repaired Churches, and fed the poor. He died within three years, six months, and fourteen days after his election  
The See was vacant three days.  
Number of Popes. 132 Year of Christ. 946 AGAPETUS the third, a Roman, a man of a good life, and a lover of peace, he died having held the chair nine years, seven months, and ten days.  
The See was voided twelve days.  
Number of Popes. 133 Year of Christ. 956 JOHN the twelf●h, a Roman, he was one of the first that changed his name, he was wicked, licentious, and cruel; & coming to that dignity by h●● father's greatness he held it unworthily eight years, four months, and one day, having cut off a cardinals nose, and another's hand, for that he had written unto the Emperor Otho the first, what a scandal the church did suffer by his detestable life.  
The See was not voided.  
Number of Popes. 134 Year of Christ. 963 LEO the eight, a Roman (after that john the twelfth had been deposed for his wicked life, in a council held at Rome, almost of all the Bishops of Italy) was substituted by Otho the Great, defender of the Church, and a very religious prince: and he held the See one year, six months, and seventeen days. Presently after the departure of Otho, john the twelfth was called home again by the seditious and inconstant Romans, and Leo expelled, who retired himself to the Emperor to avoid a greater Schism. john being thus restored, held the See three months, and eight and twenty days, at the end whereof being taken in adultery, he was slain by the woman's husband.  
LEO the eight was restored by Otho, and held the See eight months, and two and twenty days: and Bennet the fist was banished and degraded by Otho, after that he had besieged, and taken the town. Leo seeking to prevent the malice of the Romans, who proceeded in the election by corruption and practices, ordained in open Senate, That no man should be made Pope without the consent of the Emperor, And he restored the donation made unto the Church by justin.  
The See was voided six months and one day.  
SCHISM XU.  
Year of Christ. 964 BENNET the fift a Roman, created during the Schism against Leo, held the place certain days.  
Number of Popes. 135 Year of Christ. 665 JOHN the thirteenth, a Roman, a Bishop's son, held the seat six years, eleven months, and five days. The seditious Romans being accustomed to reject their Bishop, caused him to be put in prison by Peter their Provost, and then banished, but nearing that Otho the first came against them with a great army, they called him back again. This Provost was delivered over to the hangman, who stripped him, and set him upon an ass with his face turned, and his hands bound under the tail and so was led through the city, after which he was sent into exile, and his adherents punished.  
The See was void thirteen days.  
Number of Popes. 136 Year of Christ. 972 DONNUS the second, a Roman, he was so modest, as he endured all indignities of the Romans, and died within three months of his election.  
The See was not voided at all.  
Number of Popes. 137 Year of Christ. 972 BENNET the fift, called the sixt, having held the See one year, & six months, was imprisoned by Cinthius a Roman citizen, where he was strangled: others say, he died of hunger, for which injury there was no justice done. Platina wonders at the change of things, for that now the Sovereign Bishops of Rome have a greater power.  
The See was void one year, and ten days.  
Number of Popes. 138 Year of Christ. 974 BONIFACE the seventh, enjoyed his dignity but one month, and twelve days.  
The See was void twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 139 Year of Christ. 975 BENNET the sixt, called the seventh, having endeavoured like a good man, and a lover of peace, to persuade the Germane and Italians to make choice of a good Emperor, the Commonweal being much afflicted. He held the See nine years, one month, and ten days.  
The See was void three days.  
SCHISM XVI.  
Year of Christ. 975 THe sixteenth Schism was betwixt Boniface the seventh, Bennet the sixt, and john the fourteenth.  
Number of Popes. 140 Year of Christ. 984 JOHN the fourteenth, a Roman, was put in prison, either for his wicked life, or by the kinsfolks of Boniface the seventh, his enemies, to whom he had been competitor, where he died of hunger.  
The See was not void at all.  
Year of Christ. 985 BONIFACE the seventh, a Roman, entered the Chair by unlawful means, and by the same means fell from it, having stolen the treasures of S. Peter, he fled to Constantinople, from whence he returned, hearing that john the fourteenth was chosen Pope, whom he put in prison, and (as some writ) he caused his eyes to be put out: and he died of hunger. He governed the Church the second time, four months, and six days.  
The See was vacant ten days.  
Number of Popes. 141 Year of Christ. 985 JOHN the fifteenth, was hated of all men, for that he distributed the goods of the Church to his kinsfolks and friends (whereof at this day there is too much imittation.) He died of hunger being a prisoner, and then in great want by the will of God, having been Pope nine years, six months, and ten days.  
The See was voided one day.  
Number of Popes. 142 Year of Christ. 995 JOHN the sixteenth, a Roman, a wife and valiant Pope: he held the See four months.  
The See was void six days.  
Number of Popes. 143 Year of Christ. 995 GREGORY the fift, a Saxon, cousin to the Emperor Otho the third, having been forced to retire himself into Germany, by the practices of Crescentius the Consul, who had caused john the seventeenth to be chosen Antipope. The Consul was hanged by the people, and the Antipope was deprived both of dignity and life, having first lost his eyes. This, with other causes recited by Platina, gave way to the seven Electors of the Empire, the which was confirmed by Gregory, in a Council held at Rome. He held the See two years, eight months, and three days.  
The See was void eight months, and ten days.  
SCHISM XVII.  
Year of Christ. 997 JOHN the seventeenth, a Graecian, created during the Schism, a wicked and detestable man (whom many put in the number of Popes) held the Chair ten months before that Gregory was restored. They put out the eyes, and cut off the nose and cares of Crescentius, and afterwards hanged him, being first murdered by the people, as Platina reports.  
Number of Popes. 144 Year of Christ. 998 SYLVESTER the second, a Monk, borne in Aquitaine, leaving his Abbey for the desire he had to learning, went to Sevill in Spain, held then by the Sarrazins, where he studied, so as he was Schoolmaster to Robert the French king, and to the Emperor Otho: after which, he was Archbishop of Rheims, and then of Ravenna, and in the end Pope. Some writ, that he came to this dignity by magic, which he had studied in Spain. He was before called Gilbert or Gerbert: and died, four years, six months, and twelve days after his election.  
The See was void fine and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 145 Year of Christ. 1003 JOHN the seventeenth, a Roman, confirmed the Feast of All-Soules, by the council of Odile Abbot of Clugny, who had been amazed at the noise he had heard about Mount Aetna, which grew by reason of the blustering and raging waves of the Sea, and the vomiting forth of fire in the Mountain. Berno writes, That he was also given to the study of negromancy. He died within four months, and five and twenty days.  
The See was void nineteen days.  
Number of Popes. 146 Year of Christ. 1003 JOHN the eighteenth, a Roman, was chosen Pope: he was wholly given to idleness, and did nothing worthy of note. He governed the See five years, and eight months.  
The See was voydone month.  
Number of Popes. 147 Year of Christ. 1009 SERGIUS the fourth, a Roman, a discreet man, liberal to the poor, and gracious to all, governed the See wisely two years, two months, and nineteen days. Volat. Platina, and Genebrard, wonder how this Pope could be so honest a man; considering the great troubles and combustions which had been in the lawful succession of Sovereign Bishops, as in old time in the Synagogue under the Antiochi.  
The See was vacant eight days.  
Number of Popes. 148 Year of Christ. 1012 BENNET the seventh, called the eight, being rejected by the Romans, after the death of Henry the second, was restored, having agreed with his enemies: he held the See eleven years, three months, and one and twenty days. They report that he was seen by a Bishop after his death, riding upon a black horse, entreating him to give his money which was hidden, unto the poor, saying, That what he had given did profit him nothing, being gotten by rapine, and that he was grievously tormented. Platina.  
The See was void two days.  
Number of Popes. 149 Year of Christ. 1024 JOHN the nineteenth, brother unto Bennet, according unto Platina, having long made war against the Romans, and having not taken any Ecclesiastical orders, being supported by the Emperor Conrade, was chosen Pope, which place he held eight years, eight months, and nine days.  
The See was void two days.  
Number of Popes. 150 Year of Christ. 10-2. BENNET the eight, called the ninth, surnamed Tuscalan, being of a villainous life, was twice dejected by the Romans, and the other two which follow, chosen. He held the See twelve years, four months, & ten days. He appeared in a monstrous shape after his death, saying, That he had lived without law or reason. Plat. Berg.  
SCHISM XVIII.  
Year of Christ. 124- SYLVESTER the third, a Roman, during the Schism was chosen, and Bennet depoted: but being found more unworthy than Bennet, he was expelled, having held the place but one month, and Bennet restored. Ambition and corruption (too ordinary a thing amongst them) are of more force than a Christian life, to attain unto dignities, a lamentable thing saith Platina.  
Year of Christ. 1045 JOHN the twentieth, a Roman, created also during the Schism of Bennet and Silvester, held the See one year, and twelve days. This Schism growing by these three Popes was the cause of great mischiefs. Plat.  
Number of Popes. 151 Year of Christ. 1045 GREGORY the sixt, a Roman, having had the Popedom by resignation from Bennet, or rather by sale, was forced by the Emperor Henry the third, to leave it within one year, seven months, and twenty days.  
A council was held at Sutrin near unto Rome in the presence of the Emperor Henry, where these three Popes were deposed, and the election given again to the Emperor, and to his successors, to avoid Schisms. Herm. Gontr. in his Chronicle.  
Number of Popes. 152 Year of Christ. 1047 CLEMENT the second, a Saxon, was imprisoned by Damasus the second his successor, in the ninth month, according unto Platina: but Onufrius faith, that Damasus was a good man.  
Number of Popes. 153 Year of Christ. 1048 DAMASUS the second, of Bavaria, made himself Pope without any election, but he died within three and twenty days, and so escaped punishment for his faults. Plat.  
The See was voided six months and three days.  
Number of Popes. 154 Year of Christ. 1049 LEO the ninth, a German, a man of a noble family, of good life and great learning, loving the poor and strangers, so as his palace was open to all men. They say that our Saviour appeared to him like unto a poor man, whom he lodged in his own bed, and then he vanished away. He died five years, two months, and eight and twenty days after his election.  
The See was voided eleven months and four and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 155 Year of Christ. 1055 VICTOR the second, of Bavaria, was chosen, not willingly, but to please the Emperor, choosing a German. He died within two years, two months, and sixteen days.  
The See was voided four days.  
Number of Popes. 156 Year of Christ. 1057 STEPHEN the tenth, called the eleventh, a Monk of Lorraine, drew the Church of Milan under the obeidence of that of Rome, having been two hundred years head of itself. He died within seven months and eight and twenty days.  
The See was vacant six days.  
Year of Christ. 1058 BENNET the ninth called the tenth, a Roman, having not entered into the dignity by the door, but by force and violence, continued only nine months, and ten days, and then was deposed.  
Number of Popes. 157 Year of Christ. 1059 NICHOLAS the second, of Savoy, a man of a good life, held the See two years, three months, and five and twenty days.  
A Council held at Rome by Pope Nicholas, and one hundred and eighteen Bishops: where it was ordained, That the Pope's election should belong unto the Cardinals, Bishops, and Priests (yet the rest of the clergy and people should allow of ●.) choosing some one of their College, although he were not honoured with the title of Cardinal.  
The See was voided three months.  
Number of Popes. 158 Year of Christ. 1061 ALEXANDER the second, a Milanese, a learned man, chosen in his absence for the same of his virtues, and the first after that decree of elections: yet some of the Bishops favouring the Emperor and not allowing it, made chose of Candole a very rich and powerful Bishop, and so raised the nineteenth Schisine. There was a sharp encounter, but Alexander had the victory. He was Pope eleven years, six months, and five days.  
SCHISM XIX.  
Year of Christ. 1061 HONORIUS the second, chosen during the Schism against Alexander, called before Candole, a Bishop: he held the See, and was Antipope five years, and then was deposed.  
Number of Popes. 159 GREGORY the seventh, of Sienna, a Monk of Clugnie, before called Hildebrand, excommunicated Henry 4, for that he sought to meddle with the election● and conferring of Bishoprics: he caused Rodulphus duke of Suevia to be made Emperor, who was vanquished by Henry: he was thrice imprisoned, first by Cynth●● son to the Provost of Rome, and afterwards by the Emperor, from whence he escaped by the help of the Romans, and of Mathilda countess of Mantova, and of Guischard the Norman, prince of Poville, who led him to Salerna, where he died having been Pope twelve years, one month, and three days. The quarrel for investitures, betwixt the Popes and Emperors, was the cause of great mischiefs. Mart. Pol.  
The See was voided one year.  
SCHISM XX.  
Year of Christ. 1080 CLEMENT the third, was chosen in a Council held at Bressia, by the persuasion of the Emperor Henry the fourth, and Gregory deposed, who held the See in Schism one and twenty years against Gregory and his successors.  
Number of Popes. 160 Year of Christ. 1086 VICTOR the third, a Monk of Beneuent, sought to execute the decrees of his predecessor, against the Emperor Henry the fourth, and died within one year, three months, and four days after his election.  
The See was voided five months and three and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 161 Year of Christ. 1088 VRBAN the second, a French man, and a Monk, sought to reform the manners of the Clergy, being a virtuous and learned man: and seeing that he was not safe in Italy, making no account of Mathilda countess of Mantova, who had drawn Gregory the seventh out of prison, and left her lands unto the Church, now called the patrimony of S. Peter, he came into France, where he forced king Philip the first to take his wife again, leaving her with whom he had lived in adultery. He died having held the place eleven years, four months, and eighteen days. Some writ that he was a turbulent man, and therefore they called him Turbanus, and that he had been a household servant and disciple to Pope Gregory the seventh, who was given to all devilish arts. Benno.  
The See was voided fourteen days.  
Number of Popes. 162 Year of Christ. 1099 paschal the second, a Tuscan Monk, was chosen against his will, being attired in a scarlet cloak, with a crown upon his head, and girt with a girdle, at the which did hung seven keys, and as many seals, signifying a power to shut and open, and mounted upon a white horse was led unto the place of Latran. He came into France, to reform the Clergy in a Council held at Trois, where he forbade the Clergy to marry, for the which he chased away many Prelates and Priests. Being returned to Rome, he reduced by arms many towns under his obedience: he confirmed the excommunication against Henry the fourth, Emperor, and persuaded his son to take upon him the government of the Empire, by whom he was imprisoned; having kissed the Pope's feet, he was forced to yield unto him the investiture of bishoprics, and abbeys that were vacant: which power he afterwards left, fearing to lose the Empire. In the end he died, having been Pope eighteen years, five months, and nine days.  
The See was vacant three days.  
Year of Christ. 1101 ALBERT of Atella, created during the Schism, after the death of Clement the third, held the chair against paschal, two years and four months.  
Year of Christ. 1102 THEODORIC a Roman, did also during this Schism hold the See three months, and fifteen days.  
Year of Christ. 1102 SILVESTER the third, a Roman, during the Schism (after Theodoric) did also hold the See against Pascal the second.  
The See was voided two days.  
Number of Popes. 163 Year of Christ. 1118 GELASIUS the second, borne at Gaiette, was beaten and imprisoned (not withstanding that he was a Monk, and of a good life) by one called Cinthius a Roman of great power, but he was presently set at liberty by the people. Having excommunicated the Emperor Henry the fist, and Gregory the eight his Antipope, fearing the emperors forces, he fled into France, where he died, a year and five and twenty days after his election.  
The See was vacant two days.  
SCHISM XXI.  
Year of Christ. 1118 GREGORY the eight, a Spaniard, otherwise called Burdin, was created during the Schism against Gelasius the second, and held the See three years.  
Number of Popes. 164 Year of Christ. 1119 CALIXTUS the second, a Bourgondian, son or brother to the duke of Bourgondie, being created Pope in France, went to Rome, against the Antipope, who being taken, was set upon an Ass with his face backward, holding the tail in his hand for a bridle, and then was put in prison, where he died. Calixtus maintained the See against the other Pope, and the Emperor Henry the fift, who resigned his right of the investiture and collation of Benefices, the which had been the cause of great combustions. He held the See five years, ten months, and thirteen days.  
The See was voided one day.  
A GENERAL COUNCIL.  
Year of Christ. 1123 A General Council was held at Lateran in Rome, by nine hundred and seventeen Bishops, against the Sarrazins and Turks.  
Number of Popes. 165 Year of Christ. 1124 HONORIUS the second, of Bolognia, a man of base condition, yet learned, advanced more through the ambition of some, than by the consent of good men: he ruled five years, two months, and three days.  
The See was void one day.  
SCHISM XXII.  
CELESTIN the second, a Roman, chosen by some Cardinals, caused a Schism against Honorius the second.  
Number of Popes. 166 Year of Christ. 1130 INNOCENT the second, attempted war against Roger the Norman, who called himself king of Naples, by whom he was vanquished in battle, and was put in prison, from whence escaping, he came into France, where he held two councils, one at Rheims, and another at Clermont, and having obtained succours from king Lewis the Gross, and from the Emperor Lothaire, he returned into Italy, and held the See thirteen years, seven months, and eight days.  
The See was void one month, and one day.  
SCHISM. XXIII.  
Year of Christ. 1130 ANACLETUS the second, a Roman, was chosen by the Romans during the imprisonment of Innocent the second, and was Antipope, who stole away the treasure and relics to pay his soldiers, and having been the cause of this Schism against Innocent the second, died of grief in the eight year.  
The See was vacant certain days.  
Year of Christ. 1138 VICTOR the fourth, a Roman, was created after the death of Anacletus, during the schism against Innocent the second; the which he held five years.  
A GENERAL COUNCIL.  
Year of Christ. 1139 A General Council was held at Lateran, by one thousand Fathers, for the right of the Clergy, and against the Antipopes.  
Number of Popes. 167 Year of Christ. 1143 CELESTIN the second, a Tuscan, died within five months, and five days after his election, for grief, by reason of the discord which was betwixt him and the people, who sought to advance one of the Patritij. He had been chosen without the consent of the people, who now are excluded from that prerogative by Innocent the second, and that power reduced to the Cardinals alone. Onuphr.  
The See was void twelve days.  
Number of Popes. 168 Year of Christ. 1144 LUCIUS the second, a Roman, having been hurt with stones by the people of Rome, seeking to take from them certain officers by force, died within eleven months, and four days.  
The See was void one day.  
Number of Popes. 169 Year of Christ. 1145 EUGENIUS the third, borne at Pisa, a Monk of a holy life, Disciple to S. Bernard: he was chased out of Rome for that he would not confirm certain Consuls or rather Senators: he fled into France, where he persuaded king Lewis the Young, and Richard king of England, to make the third voyage to the Holie-land, and then returned to Rome, where he died, having been Pope eight years, four months, and twelve days.  
The See was vacant one day.  
Number of Popes. 170 Year of Christ. 1153 ANASTASIUS the fourth, a Roman: he was liberal to the poor, and died within one year, four months, and fourteen days. At that time there was a general famine over all Europe.  
The See was void one day.  
Number of Popes. 171 Year of Christ. 1154 ADRIAN, the fourth, an English Monk, having converted the people of Norway to the faith, was made Pope: he excommunicated Frederic the first, for that he had resisted him, seeking to join Lombardie to the See of Rome. He died within four years, eight months, and eight and twenty days.  
The See was void three days.  
Number of Popes. 172 Year of Christ. 1159 ALEXANDER the third, of Sienna, a very learned man: He expelled three Antipopes, and had great wars against the Emperor Frederic the first, whom he excommunicated; who seeking to be absolved, and being upon his knees before him, Alexander trod him under his feet, and commanded them to sing, Super Aspidem, & Basiliscum, etc. to whom the Emperor answered, Non tibi, sed Petro; and the Pope replied, Et mihi, & Petro. Volater. This Pope held the Chair one and twenty years, eleven months, and three and twenty days.  
The See was void one day.  
SCHISM. XXIIII.  
Year of Christ. 1159 VICTOR the fourth, created during the Schism against Alexander the third, was Antipope four years, and seven months.  
Year of Christ. 1164 PASCAL the third, of Cresme, was, during the Schism, created Antipope, and held it five years.  
Year of Christ. 1169 CALIXTUS the third, of Hongarie, was chosen Antipope during the schism, and held the Chair seven years, and five months.  
A GENERAL COUNCIL.  
Year of Christ. 1180 A General Council was held at Lateran (as Genebrard writes) of three hundred Bishops, as well of the East as West, for the reformation of manners: wherein, the doctrine of the Vaudois was condemned. It was also decreed, That in the Pope's election, two third parts, concurring in their Suffrages, should suffice to avoid all future schism.  
Number of Popes. 173 Year of Christ. 1181 LUCIUS the third, knowing that the Christians of the Holie-land were afflicted for their sins, persuaded the emperor Frederic, king Philip Augustus, and the king of England, to make the fourth voyage to the Holie-land. He died, five years, two months, and eight and twenty days after his election.  
The See was not voided at all.  
Number of Popes. 174 Year of Christ. 1185 VRBAN the third, a Milanese, being advertised of the taking of Jerusalem, by Saladin, soldan of Egypt, having been held by nine Christian kings for the space of 88 years, died for grief, having held the Chair 1 year, 10 months, 25 days.  
The See was void one day.  
Number of Popes. 175 Year of Christ. 1187 GREGORY the eight, of Beneuent, having been very careful to ha●●●n away the soldiers, for the recovery of the holy Land, died within one month, and seven and twenty days.  
The See was voided ten days.  
Number of Popes. 176 Year of Christ. 1188 CLEMENT the third, a Roman, a learned man, and of a holy life, solicited all Christian princes to advance their enterprise for the recovery of the holy Land, and died within three years, two months, and sixteen days after his election.  
The See was voided three days.  
Number of Popes. 177 Year of Christ. 1191 CELESTIN the third, a Roman, did secretly curse the realm of France, for that Philip Augustus had put away his first wife, the which he took again, leaving the second. He dispensed with a Nun, sister to the king of Sicily, to marry with the Emperor Henry the fourth, and died, having been Pope six years, nine months, and eleven days.  
The See was not void at all.  
Number of Popes. 178 Year of Christ. 1198 INNOCENT the third, reputed a learned man, as it appears by his decretal Epistles, held the See eighteen years, six months, and nine days.  
A GENERAL COUNCIL AT LATRAN.  
Year of Christ. 1215 A General Council was held at S. john de Latran, of one thousand two hundred eighty and five Prelates, and Ambassadors to Emperors and Kings, against the errors of the Abbot joachim, and others. Plat. Tom. of councils.  
Number of Popes. 179 Year of Christ. 1216 HONORIUS the third, a Roman, having crowned the Emperor Frederic the second, excommunicated him for that he had rebelled against the See of Rome: he confirmed the orders of begging Friars, and took from the Carmelites the particoloured habit of white and yellow: he ordained that the ho●●shold be carried to sick persons with reverence. He died, having been Pope ten years, and eight months.  
The See was vacant one day.  
Number of Popes. 180 Year of Christ. 1227 GREGORY the ninth, borne at Anagnia, kinsman to Innocent●h● ●h● third, caused the decretals to be gathered together by Raymond Barch his chaplain: he forbade the reading of the civil law at Paris: he excommunicated the Emperor Frederic the second, delaying his voyage to the holy Land, the which he afterward accomplished and took jerusalem. He died having reigned fourteen years, and five months.  
The See was voided one month and one day.  
Number of Popes. 181 Year of Christ. 1241 CELESTIN the fourth, borne at Anagnia, a good and learned man. He died seventeen days after his election.  
The See was voided one year eight months and fifteen days, by reason that the Cardinals were detained prisoners by the Emperor Frederic the second.  
Number of Popes. 182 Year of Christ. 1243 INNOCENT the fourth, a Genevois, having deprived the Emperor Frederic the second of the Empire, for that he had rebelled against the holy See: he ordained that the Cardinals should ride on horseback, and wear read hats, to signify that they were ready to shed their blood for the defence of the Church. Thus the Cardinal was the supreme order and dignity among the Clergy: and this increase of honour was the decay of the Church. He died having written upon the Decretals and authentics, and a book of the imperial and pontifical jurisdiction against P. de vives, who attributed all to the Emperor. He held the place eleven years, five months, and fourteen days.  
The See was vacant thirteen days.  
A GENERAL COUNCIL.  
Year of Christ. 1245 A General Council was held at Lion in France, against Frederic the Emperor, whereas many feasts were instituted, and S. Lewis king of France declared the head of the fift expedition to the holy Landlord  
Number of Popes. 183 Year of Christ. 1254 ALEXANDER the fourth, borne at Agnania, a learned man, and liberal to the poor: he retired the Hermits of S. Augustin out of woods, and brought them into towns, commanded them to preach and confess: he condemned the book of William of S. Amour, a doctor of Paris, who had written against the begging Friars: and died six years, five months, and five days after his election.  
Number of Popes. 184 Year of Christ. 1261 VRBAN the fourth, borne at Trois in Champagne, a shoemakers son, Patriarch of jerusalem, was chosen Pope, the Cardinals not agreeing to choose one of their College. Having instituted the feast of the holy sacrament, he crowned Charles duke of Anjou brother to S. Lewis, king of Sicily, and died having been Pope three years, two months, and four days.  
Number of Popes. 185 Year of Christ. 1265 CLEMENT the fourth, a French man, a learned man of great piety and holiness, and very discreet in the distribution of the goods of the Church, having no respect to advance his own children, or nephews (for he had been married) from one of which he took two benefices, he having three: he laboured to reconcile Christian princes, and died having held the place three years, nine months, and five and twenty days.  
The See was voided two years six months and nine days.  
Number of Popes. 186 Year of Christ. 1271 GREGORY the tenth, borne at Placentia in Lombardie, being an Archdeacon in the holy Land, was chosen Pope. The Cardinals having been divided two years and more, gave occasion to one of them being in the Conclave to say skoffingly, Let us uncover the house, for the Holy Ghost cannot descend and pass through so many coverings. Having made goodly ordinances touching the election in a general Council held at Lions, among others that the Cardinals should not departed the conclave before the election were finished: he died, having been Pope four years, four months, and ten days.  
The See was voided ten days.  
A GENERAL COUNCIL AT LYON.  
Year of Christ. 1274 A Second general Council was held at Lion, whereas the Greek Church made an union with the Latin, which was the fourth time: but this accord continued not long, no more than the rest, Niceph. Greg. who said that Michael Palaologus Emperor of Greece came thither in person.  
Number of Popes. 187 Year of Christ. 1275 INNOCENT the fift, a Bourgondian, Provincial of the jacobins in France, Doctor in divinity, Archbishop of Lion, Cardinal of Ostia, and great Penitentiary to the Pope: he revoked the decree of his predecessor touching the election, before he went out of the Conclave, and died five months, and two days.  
The See was vacant nine days.  
Number of Popes. 188 Year of Christ. 1276 ADRIAN the fift, a Genevois, revoked also the order of Gregory the tenth, touching the election before he went out of the Conclave, and died after one month, and seven days.  
The See was voided five and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 189 Year of Christ. 1276 JOHN the twentieth, called the one and twentieth, borne in Portugal, making profession of physic, but not fit for such a dignity, of a Cardinal and Bishop of Tusculum he was created Pope, which place he held eight months, and eight days.  
The See was vacant six months and four days.  
Number of Popes. 190 Year of Christ. 1277 NICHOLAS the third, of the house of Vrsins in Rome, a man of understanding and of a great spirit: he took from Charles king of Sicily the office of Senator: he persuaded Peter king of Atragon to pretend an interest to the realm of Sicily, which was the cause of the Sicilian Evensong, so bloody for the French: he expelled Notaries & Petefoggers out of Rome, saying that they lived of the blood of the poor: he brought Flaminia with the town of Bolonia, and the Exarcat of Ravenna (which had been long subject to the Emperor) under the power of the Romish See; and seeking to make a nephew of his, king of Lombardie, and another of Tuscan: he died having been Pope two years, eight months, and nine and twenty days.  
The See was voided six months.  
Number of Popes. 191 Year of Christ. 1281 MARTIN the second, called the fourth, of Tours: he restored Charles to the office of Senator, excommunicated the Emperor of Greece, and the king of Arragon, depriving him of his realm, and giving it to Charles brother to Philip the Fair. In the end he died after four years, one month, and seven days. Some writ that he was of so holy a life that sick men received health coming to his Sepulchre.  
The See was vacant four days.  
Number of Popes. 192 Year of Christ. 1285 HONORIUS the fourth, a Roman, a man of good life: He confirmed the excommunication made by his predecessor against Peter of Arragon, and died within two years, and two days.  
The See was void ten months, and eighteen days.  
Number of Popes. 193 Year of Christ. 1288 NIHOLAS the fourth, of Lombardie, of the order of the friars Mynors, a learned man, and discreet in the distribution of Benefices, and the goods of the Church: He died, having held the place four years one month, and fourteen days.  
The See was vacant two years, three months, and two days.  
Number of Popes. 194 Year of Christ. 1294 CELESTIN the fift, an Hermit, and Author of the order of the Celestins, after much bribery and corruption among the Cardinals, was, by the favour of Charles the second, king of Naples, chosen Pope. Afterwards, by his simplicity, suffering himself to be circumvented by his successor, having cunningly told him in the night, That he should leave his dignity of Pope, for that he had decreed, that Cardinals should ride upon Asses, in imitation of our Saviour (a most holy ordinance, and prodigiously overthrown, as Genebrard faith.) He left the Papacy, and retiring himself to the deserts, was taken by Boniface his successor, and put in prison, where he died for want, five months, and seven days after his election.  
The See was void ten days.  
Number of Popes. 195 Year of Christ. 1294 BONIFACE the eight, a cunning, subtle, ingrateful, cruel, and arrogant man, of whom it is said, That he entered the dignity of Pope like a Fox, deceiving the good man Celestin, speaking unto him through a Reed, as if it had been an Angel, and by a hole made in his chamber: he reigned as a Lion, saying, That he had power to give and take away kingdoms; and to show his pretended authority, he excommunicated the French king, and gave his realm to the Emperor Albert: he died like a dog, having unworthily held that dignity eight years, nine months, and eighteen days. He ordained the year of jubilee once in a hundred years: and was the first which gave Indulgences. In this miserable time, the Emperor of the Turks took his beginning in Ottoman.  
The See was vacant ten days.  
Number of Popes. 196 Year of Christ. 1303 BENNET the ninth, called the tenth, a jacobin of a poor family, his father being a Shepherd, but being afterwards made Cardinal of Ostia, he was chosen Pope. Some writ, that he was a holy man, and peaceable: others say, that he was of a subtle spirit. Having absolved king Philip the Fair from the excommunication of his predecessor, and two Cardinals of the house of the Colonre● he died (as some thought) poisoned by an Abbess, who presented him with ●iggess. He held the place eight months and six days.  
The place was vacant ten months, and seven and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 197 Year of Christ. 1305 CLEMENT the fift, of Bourdeaux, and Archbishop of that place, chosen in his absence, and confirmed at Lions by the Cardinals, transported the Roman See to avignon, to avoid the seditions of Italy. They caused him to publish the constitutions called by his name, Clementins. He obtained avignon (whereas the Popes See remained 72 years) and the county of Nice, of Lewis king of Naples, in recompense of the tribute due to the Church of Rome. He excommunicated the Venetians usurping the city of Ferrara, being of the Patrimony of the Church. In the end he died, having been Pope 8 years, 10 months, 16 days.  
The See was void one year, three months, and seventeen days.  
A GENERAL COUNCIL HELD AT VIENNA.  
Year of Christ. 1311 A General Council was celebrated at Vienna in D●uphine, of three hundred Bishops; whereas the Fratricels, Beguins, who would choose a third order of S. Francis, of the which one Dulcinus was the chief, were condemned for Heretics, as the Templars were in like manner. There it was also decreed, That the Hebrew, Chalde, Arabic, and Greek Tongues should be publicly taught in the Universities.  
Number of Popes. 198 Year of Christ. 1316 JOHN the one and twentieth, called the two and twentieth, of Cahors, a learned man, was chosen after long contention among the Cardinals. He excommunicated the emperor Lewis the fourth, by reason whereof he gave him an Antipope. This Pope fell into some errors, which he retracted, being admonished by the Divines of Paris. He was Pope 18 years, 3 months, 28 days.  
The See was vacant sixteen days.  
SCHISM. XXV.  
Year of Christ. 1327 NICHOLAS the fift, a Franciscan Friar, was Antipope, against john the one and twentieth, by the persuasion of Lewis the fourth, emperor. He died a prisoner in avignon, having craved pardon of john, whose Image he had caused to be burnt as an Heretic, having been Pope 3 years, 3 months, 14 days.  
Number of Popes. 199 Year of Christ. 1334 BENNET the tenth, called the eleventh, a Monk of Tolouse, of the order of Cisteaux, a learned man, and severe, distributing the goods of the Church equally, without respect of kindred, saying, That the Pope had no kinsmen. He hated the emperor Lewis, no less than his predecessor john▪ He reform the order of Cisteaux, and Benardins, building them a College at P●ris. He died, having held the See seven years, four months, and six days.  
The See was void eleven days.  
Number of Popes. 200 Year of Christ. 1334 CLEMENT the sixt, a Monk of Lymosin: He was Archbishop of Rhone, and made Cardinal by Bennet: he was held a learned man, and liberal to all, yet he was an enemy to the Emperor Lewis, and ratified the excommunication of Bennet and john the two and twentieth: he abridged the jubilee to fifty years. He sought to reconcile Philip of Valois (the French king) and Edward king of England. He died, having been Pope ten years, and seven months. I du Tillet saith, That in those times Benefices were sold, and all was subject to money.  
Year of Christ. 1350 CLEMENT the sixt did celebrat the second jubilee, in the year 1350.  
The See was void eleven days.  
Number of Popes. 201 Year of Christ. 1152 INNOCENT the sixt, a Lymosin, he was first an Advocate of the civil Law, than Bishop of Clermont, and afterwards, Cardinal of Ostia. He gave Benefices to capable men, and constrained all Prelates, and beneficed men, to retire unto their charges, and to reside there. He cut off the superfluous expenses of his house, causing the Cardinals to do the like, saying, That the Clergy should be a precedent to all others to imitate. He died, hau●ng held the place nine years, eight months, and six and twenty days.  
The S●e was vacant one month, and fifteen days.  
Number of Popes. 202 Year of Christ. 13-2. VR●AN the fi●t, a Monk of Lymoges, Abbot of S. Victor near Marseille, and as some writ son to an English physician, called William: he was a great doctor of the Cannon Law, and being absent in a certain Embassage was chosen Pope. He was very earnest to resist the Turk, against whom he ca●sed a croisado to be preached: he went to Rome to pacify some troubles in Italy, and in his return died at Marseille, having been Pope eight years, two months, and three and twenty days.  
The See was vo●d t●n da●eses.  
Number of Popes. 203 Year of Christ. 1-7-▪ GRIGORIE the eleventh, a Lymosin, son to the Earl of ●eausort, a man o● a peaceable spirit: seeing so great dissensions in Italy, and some towns revol●●● from his obedience, he returned to Rome, and transported his See thither again, without the privity of the French; the which he did by the advice of his scholmaster Baldus. He was Pope seven years, two months, and seven and twenty days.  
The See was vacant twelve days.  
Number of Popes. 204 Year of Christ. 1378 VREAN the sixt, a Neapolitan, Archbishop of Bari, and no Cardinal, was created Pope at the pursuit of the Romans, he being absent: he was a cunning, seditious, and revengeful man, not seeking the peace of Christendom, as his duty required, but striving to revenge the injuries which his Cardinals, and joane queen of Sicily had done him, which was the cause of the six and twentieth Schism: and ha●ing caused five Cardinals to be drowned, he died, having held the See eleven years, six months, and five days.  
VRBAN the sixt, did celebrated the third jubilee.  
The See was voided nineteen days.  
SCHISM XXVI.  
Year of Christ. 1378 CLEMENT the seventh, was chosen Pope by the Cardinals: he held his See at avignon, and was acknowledged for lawful Pope by the French, Spaniards, and English. This was the cruellest and most scandalous Schism of all, and continued about fifty years. He held the place fifteen years, eleven months, and eighteen days against urban and his successors.  
The See was voided fifteen days.  
Number of Popes. 205 Year of Christ. 1389 BONIFACE the ninth, a Neapolitan, endowed with great virtues for his age, being but thirty years old but pleasing to his kinsfolks: he abused indulgences, and sold them good cheap. They attribute to him the invention of Annates, that is to say, that he would have the first years revenues of all benefices. He had for Antipope Peter de Luna a Spaniard, called Bennet the thirteenth, he held the See fourteen years, and eleven months.  
Year of Christ. 1390 BONIFACE did celebrat the fourth jubilee, in the year 1390.  
The See was voided fifteen days.  
Year of Christ. 1394 BENNET the thirteenth, a Spaniard, called before Peter de Luna, after Clement the seventh. He held the See at avignon during the Schism against Boniface the ninth, and his successors, he was a learned man, and died in the thirtieth year.  
Number of Popes. 206 Year of Christ. 1406 INNOCENT the seventh, borne at Sulmo, having put many Romans to death, who entreated him to free the Church from Schisms and war, was forced to fly, then having made an accord with them, he returned, and died within two years, and five and twenty days.  
The See was vacant three and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 207 Year of Christ. 1406 GREGORY the twelfth, a Venetian, Patri●rch of Constantinople and Cardinal, was chosen Pope, having promised at his election to give over his Papa●l●●g ●itie if Bennet sitting at Au●gnon should do the like, but they ●●fusing, they w●●e both deposed by the Council held at Pisa, and would not obey. He was Pope eight years, seven months, and five days.  
A COUNCIL HELD AT PISA.  
Year of Christ. 1409 A Council was held at Pisa of many Prelates, whereas Gregory the twelfth, and Bennet the thirteenth were deposed, and Alexander the fi●t chosen i● their places, but they would not obey the Council; so as there were three Popes for one.  
Number of Popes. 208 Year of Christ. 1409 ALEXANDER the fift, borne in the Island of Crete, a Monk, Archbishop of Milan, and Cardinal was chosen Pope by the Council, he was held to be ●●arn●d, but as Platina saith, he was bold, cruel, and more martial than his quality required: he deprived Ladislaus king of Naples, of his realm, for that he h●ld Ostia and other places belonging to the Church of Rome, and gave it to Lewis duke of Anjou brother to Charles the fift: his prodigality was so great, as he was wont to say that he had been a rich Bishop, a poor Cardinal, and a begging Pope. He died within t●n months, and eight days.  
The See was voided thirteen days.  
Number of Popes. 209 Year of Christ. 1410 JOHN the two and twentieth, called the three and twentieth, a Neapolitan, came unto the Popedom by force and not by a free and Canonical election: a very politic man in affairs, but so depraved both in life and doctrine, as he was cited to the Council of Constance, imprisoned, and deposed, having dishonoured the See five years, and fifteen days.  
The See was vacant two years, five months, and ten days.  
A GENERAL COUNCIL AT CONSTANCE.  
Year of Christ. 1415 A General Council was held at Constance, by the care of the Emperor Sigismond, where he assisted with four patriarchs, nine and twenty Cardinals, seven and forty Archbishops, six hundred and five Bishops, and sixty and four Abbots and Doctors; in the which three Popes were deposed: john the three and twentieth, remaining at Bolonia, Gregory the twelf●h at Rome, and Bennet the thirteenth in Spain; and Martin called the fift, was chosen in their place by a general consent, and so the six and twentieth schism ended. There it was decreed that the Council was above the Pope. To this Council came john Hus, and Jerome of Prague, under the Emperors' safe conduct, where constantly maintaining their doctrine grounded upon the word of God, they were condemned, and afterwards burnt.  
Number of Popes. 210 Year of Christ. 1417 MARTIN the third, called the fift, a Roman Cardinal, of the house of Collonnies, was chosen by three and thirty Cardinals at the Council of Constance: he confirmed the decree of the Council, that the Pope should be subject, & tha● there should be a Council called every ten years. He died having been Pope thirteen years, three months, and ten days.  
The See was voided eleven days.  
Year of Christ. 1424 CLEMENT the eight, a Spaniard, during the schism after Bennet the thirteenth, was chosen by certain Spanish Cardinals, or Anticardinalls, and held the See as Antipope four years.  
Number of Popes. 211 Year of Christ. 1431 EUGENIUS the fourth, a Venetian, of the order of the Celestins, he was a Cardinal and Priest of the title of S. Clement: in ●he beginning he was of a good life, but bad council made him to pervert all, provoking the Romans to arms, so as he was forced to fly in a Monks weed, being chased away with stones. He held ●he See fifteen years, eleven months, and one and twenty days.  
The See was vacant eleven days.  
A GENERAL COUNCIL AT basil  
A General Council was held at basil for reformation of the Church, and against the doctrine o● john Hus and the Annates, the substance whereof is contained in a pragmatic sanction, published in a Council which the French Church held at Bourges: there Eugenius the fourth was depo●ed, and ●medius an hermit, before duke of Savoy, was chosen and called Felix the fourth: he was supported by the Emperor. This was the 27 schism, so as part of Christendom followed one Pope, part of it another, and some obeyed neither the one nor the other.  
A GENERAL COUNCIL AT FLORENCE.  
Year of Christ. 1439 A General Council was held at Florence (the Grecians call it the eight Synod) whereas the Emperor of the East assisted with many Prelates, Greeks and Latin●, where all agreed in unity of faith for the last time, yea the Armenians & Indian's.  
SCHISM XXVII.  
Year of Christ. 1439 FELIX, being chosen by the Council of Basil, held the See nine years, and five months.  
Number of Popes. 212 Year of Christ. 1447 NICHOLAS the fift, a Genevois of mean parentage, Cardinal of Bolog●ia: He was learned, and a lover of learned men, and so modest as he held himself unworthy of so great a dignity. He spent much to make libraries: to whom Amedee of Savoy, or Felix the fourth, did quit the See to suppress the Schism, remaining a Cardinal, and Apostolic Legate, in his countries of Savoy. He was Pope eight years, and nineteen days.  
The See was void fourteen days.  
Year of Christ. 1450 NICHOLAS the fift, celebrated the fift jubilee, in the year of our Lord 1450.  
Number of Popes. 213 Year of Christ. 1455 CALIXTUS the third, a Spaniard, of the house of Borgia. Soon after his being Pope, he proclaimed war against the Turk, as he had vowed before he came unto it, the which was held admirable. Having instituted the Feast of the Transfiguration, he died, three years, and four months after his election.  
The See was vacant twelve days.  
Number of Popes. 214 Year of Christ. 1458 PIUS the second, of Sienna, called before Aeneas Silvius, a very learned man, having been Secretary to the Emperor Frederic the third, ●ent in embassage to many Princes, and Secretary to the Council of Basil, was in the ●nd chosen Pope. He was opposite to Lewis the eleventh, for that by the advice of his Court of Parliament, he would not obey him, and abolish the Pragmatic Sanction, concluded at the Council of Basil, the which he himself approu●d by two learned books written before he was Pope. It may be he grew ambitious, and changed his manners with his name. He held the See five years, eleven months, and seven and twenty days.  
The See was void sixteen days.  
There was a Council of the French Church held at Orleans, by reason of the Pragmatic Sanction, which Pope Piu● the second would have abolished as heretical: Against the which, the Court of Parliament at Paris, and the Universities, opposed. This assembly was also against the Annates, by the which the Court of Rome draws infinite summe● of money out of France, Duar. l. 5. c. 11. sets down at large the other Popes which did oppugn this Pragmatic Sanction.  
Number of Popes. 215 Year of Christ. 1464 PAUL the second, a Venetian, nephew ●o Eugen●us the fourth, and Cardinal of S. Mark, a man of a goodly representation, but ●n enemy to learning: He was proud, increasing his majesty by arms, & avarice, conferring Ecclesiastical livings to his own profit, at what time all things were sold at Rome. He exceeded all his predecessors in pomp and show, enriching his My●er with Diamonds, Sapphires, Emeralds, Pearls, and other stones of great price, and would be seen after that manner, augmenting also the pomp of Cardinals with a scarlet gown, and a hood. He reduced the jubilee to five and twenty years. He disannulled the Abbreviatures instituted by his predecessor, and died, having held the See six years, ten months, and six and twenty days.  
The See was void four days.  
Number of Popes. 216 Year of Christ. 1471 SIXTUS the fourth, a Genevois, General of the Franciscans, and Cardinal of S. Sixtus, succeeded Paul: he was held learned. To take away all occasions of jealousy and envy betwixt the four orders of begging Friar's, he made them all equal in privileges. He had many good parts, but he loved his kindred too much, as many have done, abusing greatly the goods of the Church. He was Pope thirteen years, and four days. Sixtus the fourth, celebrated the sixt jubilee, in the year of our Lord God 1475.  
The See was void sixteen days.  
Number of Popes. 217 Year of Christ. 1484 INNOCENT the eight, a Genevois of a mean family, a Priest, and Cardinal of S. Sicilia: he was taxed of avarice. He augmented the number of Secretaries, and Promoters, like unto Pius the second, and Sixtus the fourth. He was the first of all the Popes which advanced his bastards to honours and wealth after an unaccustomed manner. He held the See seven years, ten months, and seven and twenty days.  
The See was void one month, and sixteen days.  
Number of Popes. 218 Year of Christ. 1491 ALEXANDER the sixt, a Spaniard, called before Roderic Borgia, a man endowed with six great vices which cannot be spoken without horror. He practised to be Pope by all Devilish arts, and was chosen by the corruption of many Cardinals, whom he oppressed afterward. He sought by all means to heap up treasure, to satisfy his lustful desires, especially to advance his four bastards, the one of which was Caesar Valentin Borgia, whom he made a Cardinal, & was afterwards duke of Valentinois in Dauphine, for whom he troubled all Italy by the rest. He made Rome a receptacle of thieves. Finally, there was nothing (how holy soever) but he sold, as you may read in the Authors of his time; and Thannasarius hath left these verses written in Latin.  
Alexander's sells all, the holy Keys he sold,  
Both miters, Altars, and the Cross of gold:  
He bought it all; who can him then deny,  
That to retail which he so dear did buy?  
He caused the tongue and hands of Antonius Mancinellus to be cut off, for that he had written an eloquent Oration against his villainous and lewd life. He died of poison which he had prepared for others, having held the See eleven years, and eight months.  
ALEXANDER the sixt, did celebrat the seventh jubilee, in the year 1500.  
The See was void one month, and three days.  
Number of Popes. 219 Year of Christ. 1503 PIUS the third, of Sienna, nephew to Pope Pius the second, was chosen by the Cardinals after great strife and contention. He was a great enemy to the French, for that he had taken a great part of the kingdom of Naples. He had a will to reform the Church, to celebrat a Council, and to raise a great army against the Turk, but he died within six and twenty days after his election.  
The See was vacant four and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 220 Year of Christ. 1503 JULIO the second, a Genevois, nephew to Sixtus the fourth, and Cardinal of S. Peter at Vincula, was chosen Pope. He was a man of a quick spirit, and subtle, and more fit f●r arms than learning. He recovered Bolognia, and many towns from the Venetians, namely, Imola, Servia, Ravenna, and others, with the help of the French. Afterwards, he solicited the Emperor Maximilian, and Henry king of England, to make war●e against them, to expel them out of Italy, having defeated his army, with th● Spaniards and Venetians, in battle at Ravenna. He excommunicated the French, and gave the realm to the first Conqueror, as he had done the realm of Nava●re, which was unjustly invaded by the king of Castille, and taken from john of Albret. He held the See nine years, five months, and one and twenty days.  
The See was vacant eight and twenty days.  
A SYNOD HELD AT TOVRS.  
A national Council of the French Church was held at Tours, by all the Bishops, and most of the Doctors of France, against Pope julio the second: and another at Pisa, Milan, and Lion, by the authority of Maximilian the emperor, and of king Lewis the twelfth, against the same Pope, defending his right by others.  
A GENERAL COUNCIL AT LATERAN.  
Year of Christ. 1512 A General Council begun at Lateran by the commandment of julio, and afterwards hindered by him, but it was continued by Leo the tenth, and ended in the year 1517, for the reformation of the Church, and war against the Pope.  
Year of Christ. 1513 LEO the tenth, a Florentine, of the house of Medicis, was made Pope at the age of twenty years: he was learned, eloquent, and liberal, loving learned and virtuous men; yet he loved his pleasures too much, and his own good nature was often abused by such as were enemies to rest & quiet: he deprived the duke of Vrbain of his dukedom, and gave it to Laurence de Medicis his nephew, father to Katherine ●e Medicis the French queen: having published remission of sins to all such as gave money to make war against the Turks, he abrogated the pragmatic sanction, not without some tumul: and murmur of the whole Clergy of France. He died ●ith joy, hearing that the French were expelled out of Milan, having been Pope eight years, eight months, and twenty days.  
The See was voided two months and seven days.  
Number of Popes. 222 Year of Christ. 1522 ADRIAN the sixt, borne at Vtrecht in Holland, of mean parentage, a Doctor of Divinity, and schoolmaster to the Emperor Charles the fift: he was a learned man, and lived discreetly without any great expense or pomp, neither did he con●er benefices rashly: yet was he not pleasing unto the Romans, notwithstanding his many good parts. He held the See one year, eight months, and nine days.  
The See was vacant two months and four days.  
Number of Popes. 223 Year of Christ. 1523 CLEMENT the seventh, a Florentine of the house of Medicis, cousin german to Leo the 10: some say that he was his son or his base brother. He was a man of a great spirit, cunning, subtle, and politic. He held the party of Francis the French ●ing, against the Emperor Charles the fift, and treated the marriage of Katherine his ●eece, with Henry then duke of Orleans: he besieged Florence the town of his ●●th, for some indignities which the Florentines had done to them of his house, and ●●ter a year he took it by composition (wherein he is not condemned to have been 〈◊〉 rigorous against his country) making Alexander his nephew the first duke, who exempting to force chaste ladies, received his reward, and was slain by his own kinsmen. He held the See ten years, ten months, and seven days.  
CLEMENT the seventh, celebrated the eight jubilee, in the year 1582.  
The See was voided seventeen days.  
Number of Popes. 224 Year of Christ. 1534 PAUL the third, a Roman, of the house of Farnese: some writ that he was endowed with many virtues, a lover of peace, seeking always to reconcile the French king and the Emperor: but he oppressed his subjects with tributes, and loved his kindred more than was fit, making his base son Peter Lewis duke of Parma and Plas●nti●, the which was the cause of his death, being miserably slain by the nobility ●●d the people, whom he would force to live in Plasentia and leave the fields. Some writ that this Paul was a Magician, a murderer, and an incestuous person. He was Pope five years, and eight and twenty days.  
The See was voided two months and nine and twenty days.  
THE COUNCIL OF TRENT.  
Year of Christ. 1542 THe Council held at Trent, began in the year 1542, then transferred to Bolonia 1546, continued at Trent 1551, for the space of eight months, and ended in the same place, 1563, 1564, as it was pretended, against heresies, abuses, and the corruption of manners of all Christians, but in truth, to oppress the Gospel, and the professors thereof:  
Number of Popes. 225 Year of Christ. 1550 JULIO the third called before john Maria de Monte, having been Precedent in the Council of Trent and Bolonia, was chosen Pope: he changed his manners with his name, for after he was Pope he gave himself to war, gormandise, and voluptuousness, yea scoffing at his own dignity. He held the See five years, one month, and sixteen days.  
JULIO the third, celebrated the ninth jubilee, in the year 1550.  
The See was voided seventeen days.  
Number of Popes. 226 Year of Christ. 1555 marcel the second, a Tuscan, Cardinal of the holy Cross, a man o● base condition, yet in his youth held to be learned, and was modest in his life and conversation before he came to that dignity. He died one & twenty days after his election: some say of poison, others of the yellow jaundice.  
The See was voided two and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 227 Year of Christ. 1555 PAUL the fourth, a Neopolitan, of the noble family of the C●raffis, an austere man, and in show very zealous to reform the abuses of the Clergy, detesting averice, rejecting the resignation of Benefices in any man's favour, and dispensations: finally being in show borne to restore the Church; but some writ that he used great exactions and tyrannies, and was the cause of great wars; so as after his death the people of Rome used his image with great indignity, cutting off the head, and right hand, and casting it into Tiber, as they would have done his body if it had not been guarded, and they defaced the arms of his house. He was Pope four years, two months, and seven and twenty days.  
The See was voided four months and seven days.  
Number of Popes. 228 Year of Christ. 1560 PIUS the fourth, a Milanese, a great enemy to them that used simony, or that had many benefices, and to such as kept them for other men, whom he excommunicated and declared subject to restitution, as well they that held them, as thos● for whom they were kept, the which his successor confirmed. He held the See five years, eleven months, and fifteen days.  
The See was voided nine and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 229 Year of Christ. 1566 PIUS the fift, a jacobin Monk of Alexandria in Lombardie, was first a Cardinal, and afterwards chosen Pope. He was a great persecutor of them that were opposite to the Romish Church. He was miraculously chosen, the Cardinals having no thought of his election. He persuaded a league of many Christian princes against the Turk, of whom they won a great battle at Lepanto, in the year 1571, in the which there were delivered 2000 Christian slaves, and 25000 Turks slain, there were many prisoners, and 180 Galleys taken, sunk, or burnt. Being much tormented with the stone in the bladder, they writ that he cried out, Lord increase my pain, but give me patience. He died having been Pope six years, three months, and sixteen days.  
The See was voided eleven days.  
Number of Popes. 230 Year of Christ. 1572 GREGORY the thirteenth, a gentleman of Bolognia and a Doctor of the Common Law: he was violent against them that truly professed the Gospel, and was a favourer of many treacherous practices against the queen of England: he reform the Calendar, which had been often attempted by his predecessors. In the end he died having been Pope twelve years, and seven and twenty days.  
Year of Christ. 1575. GREGORI● the thirteenth, did celebrat the tenth jubilee, in the year 1575.  
The See was vacant thirteen days.  
Number of Popes. 231 Year of Christ. 1585. SIXTU● the fift, called before Felix Perret, Cardinal of Montalto, a Tuscan, whose father was a Swineherd. He held the See five years, four months, and three days.  
The See was void eighteen days.  
Number of Popes. 232 Year of Christ. 1590. VRBAN the seventh, a Roman, held the See but thirteen days.  
The See wa● void two months, and nine days.  
Number of Popes. 233 Year of Christ. 1590. GREGORY the fourteenth, a Milanois, of the family of the Sfondrati, before Bishop of Cremona. He was Pope but ten months, and ten days.  
The See was void thirtee●e days.  
Number of Popes. 234 Year of Christ. 1591. INNOCENT the ninth, a Bolonois, before Cardinal of the four crowns: He held the See two months, and one day; and was poisoned (as they say) for that he favoured the Spaniards design too much against the French.  
The See was void one month.  
Number of Popes. 235 Year of Christ. 1592. CLEMENT the eight, a Florentin, called before Hippolit●s Aldobrandini, Cardinal of S. Pancratio, great Penitentier. Falling sick of a Catarrh, he died the third of March, in the year 1601, having been Pope thirteen years, one month, and four days.  
Year of Christ. 1600 CLEMENT the eight, celebrated the eleventh jubilee, in the year 1600.  
The See was vacant eight and twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 236 Year of Christ. 1605 LEO the eleventh, a Florentin, son to Octavio, of the noble family of the Medicis, was chosen with a wonderful applause of the whole College of Cardinals, and the people of Rome made as great demonstration of joy for this election; but it continued not long, for he died within seven days of a fever, to the great grief of all men.  
The See was void twenty days.  
Number of Popes. 237 Year of Christ. 1605 PAUL the fift, a Roman, of the family of the Bourgesis of Sienna, but borne at Rome of a Roman woman, his father coming thither to devil. He now holds the See.  
Having set down the number of the Sovereign Bishops, it seems very fit in like manner to specify the order, names, and titles of Cardinals which are living at this day, seeing they have the chief charge in the See of Rome. Wherein the Reader shall be advertised, That all Cardinals are divided into three orders, that is to say, of Bishops, Priests, and Deacons, not that the Cardinal's Priests be no Bishops, or that the Deacons be not Priest's and Bishop's, but for that their first institution was such, some to carry the titles of Bishops, others of Priests, and some of Deacons: So as the Cardinals of S●urdis, and of Rochfoucaut, ●hereof the one is Archbishop of Bourdeaux, and the other of Clermont, and yet they have but the title of Priests: As also, the Cardinals of S. Flore, and Perriti, are Priests, and yet they are called but Deacons. For which reason they are here set down, according to their ranks and titles, and not according to the time of their creation. And to the end that the change of one language into another should breed no difficulty to know them by their names and titles, they are left as they are commonly called.  

CARDINAL BISHOPS.  
1 FRANCIS of the title of Bishop of Ostia, Deane of the holy College, Cardinal of joyeuse, Protector of France, and Archbishop of Rouën, a Frenchman, created by Pope Gregory the thirteenth, the ninth of December, in the year 1583.  
2 Anthony Maria, of the title of Bishop of Porto, Cardinal Gal●o, Bishop Dosme of la mark, created the seventeenth of September 1586, by Sixtus the fift.  
3 Anthony of the title of Bishop of Sabina, Cardinal Saulius, a Genevois, created the eighteenth of December 1587., by Sixtus the fift.  
4 Evangelist Palot of the title of Bishop of Tusculum, Cardinal Cosevein, Archpriest of S. Peter of Cardarola of la mark, created the eighteenth of December 1587., by Sixtus the fift.  
5 Friar Gregory Petrochin of the order of the Hermits of S. Augustin of the title of Bishop of Preneste, Cardinal of Montelparo of la mark, created the twentieth of December 1589, by Sixtus the fift.  
6 Paul Sfondrati of the title of Bishop of Albe, Cardinal of S. Cecile, Precedent of the Signatures of Grace, a Milanese, created the eighteenth of December 1590., by Gregory the fourteenth.   

cardinals PRIESTS.  
7 Peter, of the title of the most holy Trinity, Montepinci, Cardinal of Gondij, Prior of the cardinals Priests, a Florentin, created the eighteenth of December 1587., by Sixtus the fift.  
8 Bennet, of the title of S. Laurence in Lucina, Cardinal justinian, a Genevois, created the seventeenth of December 1586, by Sixtus the fift.  
9 Francis Maria des Marques of Mont S. ●●rie, of the title of Mount S. Maria in Transtevere, Cardinal of Monte, created the fourteenth of December 1588., by Sixtus the fift.  
10 Frederic, of the title of S. Marry of the Angels in Thermis, Cardinal Borromea, Archbishop of Milan, created 18 of December 1487, by Sixtus the fift.  
11 Octavio, of the title of S. praxedes, Cardinal Aquaviua, Archbishop of Naples, a Neapolitan, created the sixt of March 1591., by Gregory 13.  
12 Flaminius, of the title of S. Marry of Peace, Cardinal Plat●o, a Milanois, created the sixt of March 1591., by Gregory the fourteenth.  
13 Peter, of the title of S. john, and S. Paul, Cardinal Aldobrandin, Chamberlain to the holy Church of Rome, Archbishop of Ravenna, Precedent of the Briefs signed, & Protector of Savoy, created the twelfth of Septemb. 1593., by Clement the eight.  
14 Octavio, of the title of S. Sabina, Cardinal Bandin, a Florentin, created 15 of june 1596, by Clement the eight.  
15 Friar Anne of Scars, of the title of S. Susanna, of the order of S. Bennet, Cardinal of Giury, a Frenchman, created by Clement 8, the fift of june 1596.  
16 Laurence, of the title of S. Laurence. In Pane & Perna, Cardinal Blanchet, a Bullonois, created the fift of june 1596, by Clement the eight.  
17 Bartholomew, of the title of S. Peter in Vincula, Cardinal Coesio, Archbishop of Compse, created the fift of june 1596, by Clement the eight.  
18 Francis of the title of S. Marry de Populo, Cardinal Mantican Vtinens of Frioul, created the fift of june 1596, by Clement the ●●ght.  
19 Pompee, of the title of S. Balbina, Cardinal Arigon, a Roman, created the fift of june 1596, by Clement the eight.  
20 Boniface, of the title of S. Prisca, Cardinal Bevilacqua, Bishop of Coruiana Ferrarois, created the third of March 1599, by Clement the eight.  
21 B●rnard, of the title of S. Anastatius, Cardinal Roias' of Sandoval, Archbishop of Toledo, a Spaniard, created 33 of March 1599, by Clement 8.  
22 D●minic, of the title of S. Peter in Monteaureo, Cardinal Tuscan de R●ggio, created the third of March ●599, by Clement the eight.  
23 Francis, of the title of S. Silvester, Cardinal Dietrichstein, Bishop of ulme, Prince of the sacred Empire, and Protector of the realms and estates of his imperial majesty, a Germane, created in the year 1599, by Clement the eight.  
24 Robert, of the title of S. Maria in Via, Cardinal Bellarmin Politian, created the third of March 1599, by Clement the eight.  
25 Francis, of the title of S. Marcel, Cardinal Sourdis, Archbishop of Bourdeaux, a Frenchman, created the third of March 1599, by Clement the eight.  
26 Dominic, of the title of the twelve Apostles, Cardinal Gymniasius de Castro, a Boullonois, created the ninth of june 1604, by Clement the eight.  
27 Philip, of the title of Sancta Maria super Mincruam, Cardinal Spinelli, Bishop of Auerzo, a Neapolitan, created 9 of june 1604, by Clement 8.  
28 Anthony, of the title of S. Croix, in jerusalem, Cardinal Zapata, a Spaniard, created 9 of june 1604, by Clement 8.  
29 Charles of the title of S. Thomas in Parione, Cardinal Madriati, Bishop of trent, a Germane, created the ninth of june 1604, by Clement the eight.  
30 Charles, of the title of S. Clement, Cardinal of Contes, Bishop of Ancona, a Roman, created the ninth of june 1604, by Clement the eight.  
31 james Davy, of the title of S. Agnes in Agone, Cardinal of Peron, a Frenchman, created the ninth of june 1604, by Clement the eight.  
32 john Dauphin, of the title of S. Marck, Bishop of Vicenze, and called Cardinal of Vicenze, a Ven●tian, created the ninth of june 1604, by Cleme●t 8.  
33 james of the title of S. Stephen in Monte Coelio, Cardinal Synesius, Bishop of Civita Vecc●ia de la mark, created 9 of june 1604, by Clement 8.  
34 Erminius of the title of S. Maria Transpontina, Cardinal de Valentibus de Tri●io, created the ninth of june 1604, by Clement the eight.  
35 Ferdinand Taberna, of the title of S. E●scbius, Cardinal of S. Eusebius, a Milanese, created the ninth of june 1604, by Clement the eight.  
36 S●ipio, of the title of S Crisogono, Card●●●l Barghese Archpriest of the Church ●●ateran, Legate of avignon, a Roman, ●●●ated the eighteenth of july 1605, by 〈◊〉 the fift.  
37 Horatio Cardinal Spinosa Legate of Fer●●●, Archbishop of Genova, created the eleventh of September 1606, by Paul 5.  
38 Maffee of the title of S. Onuphrio, Car●●nall Barbario, Bishop of Spoletum, Legat in Bolognia, a Florentine, created ●he eleventh of September 1606, by ●aul the fift.  
3● ●●hn Garzius of the four holy crowns, cardinal Millin, Vicar to the Pope, a ●●mane, created the eleventh of Sep●ember 1606, by Paul the fift.  
40 Boniface of the title of S. Pudentiana, Cardinal Caietan, Legat of Romagna, Bishop of Caftan, a Roman, created the eleventh of September 1606, by Paul the fift.  
41 M●rcell of the title of S. Quirice & juli●●, Cardinal Lantes, Bishop of Todi, a Roman, created the eleventh of September 1606, by Paul the fift.  
42 Francis Forgas Cardinal, Archbishop of Strigonia, Chancellor, and Lieutenant of the realm of Hongarie, created the tenth of December 1607, by Paul the fift.  
43 Francis, of the title of S. Calixtus, Cardinal of Rochfoucaut, Bishop of Clermont, a Frenchman, created the tenth of December 1607, by Paul the fift.  
44 Michael Ange Tonti, of the title of S. Barthol●mew in Insula, Cardinal Nazar●●, Acrchpriest of S. Maria Maior of Armini, created the four and twentieth of November 1608, by Paul the fift.  
45 Fabr●tio, of the title of S. Augustin, Cardinal Verall, a Roman created the four and twentieth of November 1608, by Paul the fift.  
46 john Baptista, of the title of S. Sixtus, Cardinal Lenius, Bishop of Ferrara, a Roman, created the four and twentieth of November 1508, by Paul the fift.  
47 Decius, Archbishop of Damas', & Nuncio for the apostolic See in Spain, Cardinal Carrafe, created the seven and t●entieth of August 1611, by Paul 5.  
48 Dominicke of the title of S. Martin in Montibu●, Archbishop of Nazaret, Cardinal Rivarola a Genevois, created the seven and twentieth of August 1611, by Paul the fift.  
49 Metellus Bigus of the title of S. Alexis, Bishop and Cardinal of Suane, a Siennese, created the seventeenth of August 1611, by Paul the fift.  
50 john Bishop of Beziers, Councillor to the most Christian king, and chief Almoner to the queen Regent, Cardinal Bonsi a Florentine, created the seventeenth of August 1611, by Paul the fift.  
51 Philip Bishop of Aquin, Vice-Legat at avignon, Cardinal Filonard a Roman, created 17 of August 1611, by Paul the fift.  
52 Peter Paul of the title of S. Nerrea and and S. Achilea, Auditor General of the Apostolic Chamber, Cardinal Crescence a Roman, created 17 of August 1611, by Paul the fift.  
43 james of the title of S. George, Treasurer General of the Apostolic See, Cardinal Serra a Genevois, created the seventeenth of August 1611, by Paul the fift.  
54 Friar Augustin, General of the order of the preaching Friars, of the title of S. Maria de Ara Coeli, Cardinal Galamin of Brisequelle, created the seventeenth of August 1611, by P●●l the f●f●.  
55 Horatio of the title of S. Saviour in Lauro, Auditor of the Rot●, Cardinal Lancelot a Roman, created the sevent●●nth of August 1611, by Paul the fi●t.  
56 Gaspard Chanoin of the Church of Toledo, Cardinal Borsa● Spaniard, created the seventeenth of August ●611, by Paul the fift.  
57 Friar Felix Centin, Proc●●● General of the Friar Minors Conuentu●●s▪ of the title of S. Jerome of S●lavonia, Cardinal Asenlan, created the seventeenth of August 1611, by Paul the fi●t.   

cardinals DEACONS.  
58 Francis of S. Flora, of the title of S. Maria in Via Lata, Cardinal Sforcia, the first Deacon, a Roman, created the 12 of December 1583, by Gregory the thirteenth.  
59 Alexander Peretti, of the title of S. Laurence, in Damaso, Cardinal Montalto Vice chancellor of the Church of Rome, Protector of the realm of Polonia, a Roman, created the thirteenth of March 1585., by Sixtus the fift.  
60 Odoart of S. Eustace, Cardinal Farnese, Legat of the Patrimony, Protector of the realms of Arragon, England, and Sueden, a Roman, created the sixt of March 1591., by Gregory the fourteenth.  
61 Andrew of S. Ange in foro piscium, Cardinal Pepretti of Montalto, created the 5 of june 1596, by Clement the eight.  
62 Alexander of S. Marry the New, Cardinal of Est, a Ferrarois, created the third of March 1599, by Clement 8.  
63 john Baptista of S. Marry in Cosmedia, Cardinal of Ti, a Florentine, created the third of March 1599, by Clement 8.  
64 john of S. Adrian, Cardinal of Auria, a Genevois, created the ninth of june 1604, by Clement the eight.  
65 Charles Emanuel of S. Nicholas in Carcere juliano, Cardinal Pie a Ferrarois, created the ninth of june 1604, by Clement the eight.  
66 Maurice Emanuel Cardinal of Savoy, son to the most excellent Duke of Savoy, created the tenth of December 1607, by Paul the fift.  
67 Ferdinand of the title of S. Marry in Dominica, Cardinal Gonsague, Prior of Barlette, son to the most excellent Duke of Mantova, created the 10 of December 1607, by Paul the fift.  
68 Lewis of the title of S. Agathe, Cardinal Caponi a Florentine, created the four and twentieth of November 1608, by Paul the fift.   
So as there are in all sixty and eight Cardinals, of the which there are six Bishops, one and fifty priests, and eleven Deacons.  

By Gregory 13.  Bishops 
1.  Deacons 
1.   

By Sixtus 5.  Bishops 
4.  Priests 
4.  Deacons 
1.   

By Gregory 14.  Bishops 
1.  Priests 
2.  Deacons 
1.   

By Clement 8.  Priests 
23.  Deacons 
5.   

By Paul 5.  Priests 
22.  Deacons 
3.   
After which denumeration, it is not thought superfluous nor impertinent, to make a repetition of them, according to their ranks, and the office whereunto they are appointed, by which means the reader shallbe fully satisfied, of all that depends of this college.  

The se●en Cardinals which are Bishops.  
THe Bishop Cardinal of Ostia doth consecrated and install the Pope, and therefore doth march next after his holiness.  
The Bishop Cardinal Porticese.  
The Bishop Cardinal of Albe.  
The Bishop of Pilastre or Cardinal Prenestin.  
The Bishop Cardinal Tuscula●.  
The Bishop Cardinal of Sabin.  
The Bishop Cardinal of S. Rufina.   
These assist the Pope on Sundays, and Festival days in the Church of S. john de Latran, whenas he doth celebrated divine service.  

The Cardinals which are Priests.  
These serve at S. Peter's.  
The Cardinals of the title of S. Marry beyond Tiber.  
The Cardinal of the title of S. Chrysogon.  
The Cardinal of S. Cecile.  
The Cardinal of S. Anastasius.  
The Cardinal of S. Laurence in Damas.  
Th● Cardinal of S. Maurice.  
T●● Cardinal of the title of S. Martin des Monts.   
●hese serve in the Church of S. Paul.  

The Cardinal of the title of S. Sabina.  
The Cardinal of the title of S. Priscus.  
The Cardinal of the title of S. Balbinus.  
The Cardinal of the title of S. Nerea, and Achillea.  
The Cardinal of S. Sixtus.  
The Cardinal of S. marcel.  
T●e Cardinal of S. S●sanna.   
●●●se Priests Cardinals which follow, serve in the Church of S. Marry the Great.  

〈◊〉 Cardinal of the title of the twelve Apostles.  
〈◊〉 Cardinal of the title of S. Eusebius.  
T●● Cardinal of the title of S. Potentiana.  
T●● Cardinal of S. Peter, and S. Marcelin.  
T●● Cardinal of S. Clement.  
The Cardinal of S. Vital.   
●●●se Priests Cardinals which follow, are in the Basilique S. Laurence.  

Th● Cardinal of S. Praxeda.  
Th● Cardinal of S. Peter at Vincula.  
Th● Cardinal of S. Laurence in Lucina.  
T●● Cardinal of Sancta Croix in Jerusalem.  
The Cardinal of S. Stephen on Mont Celio.  
The Cardinal of S. john, and S. Paul.  
The Cardinal of the four holy Crowns.   
T●ere are after these sixteen Cardinals Deacons, that is to say: 

T●● Cardinal of S. Marry in Dominica Archdeacon.  
Th● Cardinal of S. Luce of the Seven seats.  
The Cardinal of S. Marry the New.  
The Cardinal of S. Cosmo, and S. Damian.  
The Cardinal of S. Adrian.  
The Cardinal of S. Gregory.  
The Cardinal of S. Marry in the Greek School.  
The Cardinal of Sancta Maria in Porticu.  
The Cardinal of S. Nicholas in the Tusculan Prison.  
The Cardinal of S. Ange.  
The Cardinal of S. Eustace.  
The Cardinal of S. Marry the Egyptian.  
The Cardinal of S. Marry in the Broad-way.  
The Cardinal of S. Agathe.  
The Cardinal of S. Luce among the Images.  
The Cardinal of S. Quirice.    
The Cardinals which are Bishops sit near unto the Pope when he doth celebrat Fe●●i●all days: The cardinals Priests assist him when he saith Mass: and the Deacons ●●ire him, and serve him at the Altar.     

The Estate of the great Duke of Tuscanie.  

❧ THE ESTATE OF FLORENCE.  

The Contents.  
1THe situation of the State of Florence, composed of three bodies of a Commonwealth reduced into one 2. A description of the cities of that State, and first of the city of Florence, the great circuit, and pleasant situation thereof; her palaces and stately buildings: of Pr●toline, of Pogio, and other houses of pleasure. 3. Of the city of Pisa, the antiquity thereof, and other things worthy observation. 4. Of Pistoya, a city in times past troubled with the factions of the Donats and Cerchis, called the Black and White. 5. Of the State of Syena, and the Towns thereunto belonging. 6. The State of Florence commended for the Trebian Wines, the Melons of the country of Pisa, and pasture grounds of Pistoya: the mines of Alabaster, Azure, Vitriol, and other Minerals: Fountains of Salt waters, whereof they make Salt. 7. The subtlety, crafty wit, and great frugality of the Florentines; great lovers of liberty. The inhabitants of Syena, liberal, magnificent, and courteous; they of Prato sacrilegious; and they of Pistoya, given to bloodshed and murder. 8. The fertility of the country of Syena, and riches of the Florentines in the traffic of Silks and Wools, Serges, and Cloth of gold. 9 The Clergy of the State of Florence, possessing five hundred thousand crowns of yearly rent. 10. The revenues of the great Duke, what sums they amount unto. 11. The strength of the great Duke's Estate, consisting in the situation of the Mountains upon the Frontiers, and the Fortresses of Syena, Florence, and Pisa. 12. What number of horsemen he enteraineth. 13. His forces by sea. 14. The order of the knights of S. Stephano, instituted by duke Cosmo. 15. Of the Alliances and Intelligences of the Great duke with neighbouring princes. 16. Of the administration of justice, and election of the magistrates of this State. 17. Of the Archbishops and Bishops that be in Tuscanie. 18. The Genealogy of the D●kes of Florence.   

THe Dukes of Florence, having united the Estates of three Commonwealths in one, namely of Florence, Pisa, and Syena, possess at this day the Province of Tuscanie, that is to say, the greatest, the noblest, and the goodliest part. I will not trouble myself to relate all the civil wars, and frequent changes of the government, both because that discourse would be long and tedious, and also a thing superfluous to set that down here, which is contained in Histories. But tying myself only to the State of things present, I say, That like as nature hath endowed this province with all the privileges which favourably she vouchsafeth unto others, so would she have it no whit inferior in situation to any; placing it as in the midst, or to speak better, in the navel of Italy, compassing it about on three sides, with very high mountains, and on the fourth (which is towards the sea, and champain country of Rome) where nature is wanting, art hath supplied; for all the State of Syena is full of Fortresses, as we shall show in his place.  
This prince hath in his State sixte●ne cities, that is to say, eight in the State of Flo●●nce, which are Florence, Pisa, Pistoya, Volterra, Arezzo, Bourgo of S. Sepulchro, Co●●●a, and Montepulciano. In the State of Sienna are eight, which are Sienna, Montalci●●●● rosset, Soana, Piença, Massa, Chiusi, and Colle.  
〈◊〉 city of Florence is six miles in circuit, and containeth more than ninety thou●●●● habitants. It standeth in a plain environed which with mountains, and seated up●● 〈◊〉 river Arno, which passeth through the midst of the city, which is joined to●●●●er by four fair● bridges of stone: it is also paved with square stone, the streets are ●ong and large, and always clean, and it hath very fair places, and in them divers statu●ss; in a word, it is one of the most delectable cities that a man can see, so as the Italia●● name it Florence the Fair. Moreover, the great duke's palace is one of the most ●●●●ly and goodliest buildings of Europe: it occupieth the place of more than fi●tie houses, which were wont to stand there, and in the body of the same, is the hall for representing of comedies: it is capable to lodge a great number of strangers, as Princes, Ambassadors, and others, for whom it is appointed; so as the palace (which did belong 〈◊〉 the Pitti) is not inferior to any in Italy, and surpasseth many palaces of the kings ●●●●ope, both for the greatness of the building, for architecture, and for ornament; 〈◊〉 for the beauty of the gardens, fountains, statues, and other things. This buil●●●●●as in times passed unadui●edly undertaken by a gentleman named Luke of the house 〈◊〉 ●ittis, who erected all the fore part of the same, but having impoverished himself t●●●●by, was constrained to cell it to duke Cosmo: he was afterwards put to death for matte●● o● State. There are divers other stately palaces, as that of the Medici, the Storzzi, ●nd ●t●erss. Among other sigularities of this city, the Cathedral Church is much comm●●●ed for the excellency of workmanship, the steeple whereof is both for stuff and ●●●●ure very rare, and without this Church it is paved all with marble. There is also a 〈◊〉 Library in S. Laurence Church, built and replenished with excellent books by the Medici, in the which are many rare manuscripts. To be short, Charles Archduke of ●●●●ria said as he passed through Florence, That it was a city which should not be seen 〈◊〉 on Festival days. Besides this palace, the great duke hath another out of the city call●d Pratoline, where (besides other singularties) are such rare water wo●kes, as it is nor in●●●iour to that of Tivoli, and truly, it is a place of great State. He hath also other houses o● pleasure, whereof one is called Pogge, ten miles off, and the other C●stro, or Castello both of great beauty, both for seat and building, and the ornaments of fountains, and other things; so as goodlier places cannot be desired.  
●●●●erra standeth on the top of a hill: the walls whereof are made of squared stone, almo●● six foot of length, and joined together very nea●ly without mo●●er: it hath five fair gates, and at every gate a very fair fountain: the walls sufficiently manifest the antiquity thereof, in like manner do the sepulchres, the Epitathes in Hetru●cane letter●, the most ancient statues of marble, and many other things.  
Pisa is placed by the ancients among the maritime towns of Tuscanie, and so ancient as there be very few authors among the most ancient which have not made mention thereof in their histories. It is seated between the two rivers of Arno and Lesaro, which now is name● Serchie, and these rivers in the time of Strabo were joined together a● Pisa, and extended themselves so large, and with so great violence, that it was impossible to discern any thing from one bank unto the other. But at this present Serchia passes to Luca, and is very far from Arno. This city is very great, divided by the river, and joined together with two bridges, others writ but one: the walls thereof are very high, and of marble in some places, but most brick. There is a Church which hath gates of ●●asse, and close by it a steeple built with exquisite and artificial cunning: for without, it rangeth in such sort, that it seemeth as if it would fall down instantly, and within it is upright, even, and level. The font for baptism is one of the rarest pieces that may be ●eene; but the Churchyard much more admirable, being enclosed with walls, and porches, and taketh up a very great ground, the earth whereof consumeth the deadbodies ●●●oure and twenty hours. These four things are builded without and within of exquisite stones, and are in one and the same street, not all together, nor yet far distant one from another. In time past it was of so great power, as it contended against the Venetians and Genoese. It waxed great by the spoils done by the Sarrazins to them of Genoa, in the year 933: for many withdrew themselves thither, as into a place of safety. At length it was ruinated by an overthrow of their army given by the Genoese near the Island of Giglio; for since, it hath remained so weak, that it was no more able to resist any, but was constrained to yield her neck under the yoke of the Florentines, from whom having revolted at the coming of Charles the eight the French king, and being again fifteen years after subdued, the city remained in a manner desert: for the citizens thereof impatient of the government of the Florentines, passed into Sardinia, Sicily, and other places to inhabit.  
But the great duke Cosmo did his best endeavour to repeople it, erecting an University, and building a goodly palace for the abode of the knights of S. Stephano, giving many priviuiledges to the inhabitants; notwithstanding it is at this day so ill built and inhabited, as some hold there are not above fourteen thousand persons, and yet it is not much less in circuit than Flor●nce.  
Pistoya is seated at the foot of the Apennine; but it is ruinated with dissensions, wherein it did also engage Florence, and almost all Tuscanie. For two young men of good families being grown to words, and so to blows, & the one of them having been very lightly hurt, the father of the other (for to appease the quarrel that might arise thereof) sent his son to ask the young man forgiveness that was hurt: but a clean contrary effect ensued; for the father of him that was hurt, having caused this young man to be taken by his servants, made his hand be cut off over a horse-manger, and sending him back said unto him, go and tell thy father, that wounds are not cured with words, but with the sword. For this cause a cruel war was kindled between these two families, whereof the one was called White, and the other Black: they drew into their two factions the rest of the city, which was often seen gored with the blood of her citizens.  
The Florentines, in stead of putting to death the heads of these two factions, brought them (as it were into banishment) within their city, where the Donats having taken upon them the protection of the Black, and the Cerchi of the White; Florence was wholly divided into white & Black, which disquieted the same a very long time. Arezzo having by her long dissensions almost ruined herself, was sold by Lewis the first, of Anjou, for forty thousand florins of gold to the Florentines, in like manner as Cortona was sold unto them within a while after by king Ladislaus. There are besides, other good places in the State of Florence, as Prato, Presche, S. Miniat, Empoli, S. Geminian, Fiquene, Pietra-santa, Barga, and upon the sea coast Livorne, and further of Plombin, three miles thence.  
The State of Florence boundeth upon Sienna, an ancient city, which having been a Colony of the Romans, subjecteth unto it in the end a great part of the country. There happened a mortal war between this city and Florence, after that the Guelphs and Gibelins, two fatal factions, grew up in Italy. This is a fair city, and strong of situation; but which hath lost, together with her liberty, many of her people and much of her splendour: it is five miles in compass, and containeth about twenty thousand souls, and is distant from Florence but three and thirty miles. The towns of the State of Sienna are Pienza, Montalcino, Quinsi, Saona, Massa, Piença, & Grosset, with six and twenty other places walled about, but slenderly peopled.  

¶ The Quality.  
FLorence is seated in a plain, girded about with mountains, and distinguished with little hills, and there is not any country tilled with more diligence, curiosity, and care. In a small plot of ground they gather wine, oil, co●ne, pulse, and first-fruits, in abundance, and the villages stand as thick there, as may be possible. There are very excellent wines, ●mong which, that which they call Trebian is the best, and may be preferred in sweetness before malmsey.  
The country of Pisa is very fit for corn, and so fertile, that it is able to nourish all Tus●●●i●. Notwithstanding since the loss of their liberty, the husbandmen have been 〈◊〉 to manure the fields, as the inhabitants have failed in the city. The wines of thi● 〈◊〉 are not much esteemed. As for other first-fruits, it bringeth them forth 〈◊〉 ●●ood, but the melons there are most excellent. The sea is near it, and therefore i● 〈◊〉 place fit for traffic of Merchandise. The air there is unwholesome and daunge●●●●●specially to strangers. It is thought the corruption of the air grows for that the ●●●●●rie is not inhabited.  
The country about Pistoya is mountainous, but there are exceeding good pasture ●●●●ds. Volterra hath a soil richer in mines than in first-fruits: for there is found veins 〈◊〉 blaster, of Azure, Vitriol, and other minerals; and there be fountains of salt wa●●●●●ere of they make very good salt, and in great abundance: as also, at Grossetta in ●●●●remma, which bring great profit to the Duke's coffers.  
〈◊〉 river of Chiene runneth through the territory of Arezzo: It is full of mud, and 〈◊〉 hurtful to them that devil near it. True it is, that they labour daily to dry up 〈◊〉 marshes, and to stop the course of the waters. At the foot of the Apennin, you 〈◊〉 country of Mugelle, crossed over by the river of Syeva, which is pleasant, and 〈◊〉 great store of first-fruits: and between Arno and the country of Arezzo, you have 〈◊〉 ●ne, which is rich in corn, wine, and cattle. But Valdarne aboundeth greatly in 〈◊〉 Chianti in wines, and Mugelle in first-fruits.  
〈◊〉 fields about Syena, are employed to pasture, and feed many beeves, Bufles, and 〈◊〉. They yield also good store of wheat, wine, and oil, and abound in all sorts of 〈◊〉 ●ut to speak in general of corn, Tuscanie doth not yield sufficient to feed the ●●●●●tss, but their wants are often supplied from Sicily, and other countries.   

¶ Their Manners.  
〈◊〉 humours of the Tuscans appear best in the Florentines; for they have subtle hewits, are very frugal, exceeding cunning, & circumspect, diligent, industrious, fit for ●●●ort of arts, both of war and peace. They know how to lay hold of the best oppor●●●●ie; to stand upon their advantage, and not to let any thing be lost, or slip from them. 〈◊〉 have defended their liberty to the uttermost; but by the too great subt●ltie of their 〈◊〉 they have lived in perpetual discords, which have in the end ruined them: for as the ●●ing of Thucydides is most true, That such men as be somewhat blunt of wit, do b●●● govern a Commonwealth, than they that be of too subtle a spirit. They are 〈◊〉 in trade of merchandise, and have not their like in raising of buildings. They wea●e their apparel modest and grave, and surpass all the Tuscans in civility, and fair ●p●ech.  
The inhabitants of Syena differ very much from the humour of the Florentines: for the Florentines are niggardly, and retired; and they of Syena liberal, and courteous to strangers: the first are very careful to provide for the time to come, and are very hard to forgo any thing; the other tractable, and living as it were from hand to mouth: those ●re attentively careful of their affairs, and can dissemble; these are simple, and by their countenance show their hearts: they again, mind nothing but their merchandise and g●●●; and these are content with their revenues, and with the first-fruits which their Farms do y●eld them.  
Moreover, the Italians attribute certain qualities to the inhabitants of the Cities of th●● State, which I will not let pass in silence. They term the Florentines slow, gorgeous and sumptuous, especially when they have strangers, as none is more prodigal than the ●iggard. They call them also crafty in the trade of Merchandise. The citizens of Sy●●● are called slow in councils and determinations, and fortunate in war (but they 〈◊〉 now justly lost that name, since they were so unfortunate as to lose their liberty; 〈◊〉 the Italians may with good reason take from them this title and Epithit) bountiful towards their guests, and their enemies, and resolute in pursuing the revenge of wrongs done unto ●hem. They of Prato commit sacrilege in time of war. The men of Pistoya love to shed blood, wear poignards in the wars, and are excellent in warding of their enemy's blows. They of Arezzo entertain their guests simply, and almost with their ordinary fair; and these of Pisa are inconstant in their councils and resolutions. They say that the women of Syena are fair, they of Florence delicate, of Pistoya gentle, and of Arezzo niggardly and covetous.   

¶ The Riches.  
THough the State of Florence want wheat, being otherwise very fruitful in wine, flesh, and other necessaries; yet that of Syena, by reason of the fertility of the country, which is nothing inferior to that of Apulia, not only supplieth the necessity of Florence, but also doth sometimes relieve Genoa, Luca, and other neighbouring places, through the fruitfulness of the country, and industry of the inhabitants; for this Province imparteth many things unto strangers, having little need of any thing from others. For this cause the riches of private persons is worthy of consideration, which proceedeth both from their industry, and from their revenues. As the riches of the revenues and rents are commonly great in a fat and fertile country, where they receive great profit with little labour; and where the country is less fertile, we see arts and merchandise to flourish: and hence it cometh, that in the State of Syena, the inhabitants are rich in rents, and few merchants: and in that of Florence, the inhabitants are much richer by means of their industry. This city is full of artificers of all sorts, which make with great diligence, and very workmanly, great store of Sarges of all sorts, Silks, and Cloth of gold, and silver nothing inferior to them of Flaunders. It aboundeth principally with those that exercise the art of Silk and Wool, which are set on work by the gentlemen and rich men of the city to their profit, and the commodity of all the people, and these works are distributed not only to this State, but to all Italy, and to a part of the rest of Europe, and some of them are transported as far as the Indies, and they that carry Serges thither, gain fifty in the hundred: some years there are made at Florence two millions of serges, which is a very admirable thing. These riches of the citizens of Florence have been known greater in the time of their liberty, in many wars, and public expenses, and in the great number of sumptuous places builded with royal cost by private persons within the city, but much more without, as may be seen in the plain, and on the sides of the mountains which are round about.  
The Clergy is rich by reason of many bishoprics, Abbeys, Provostships, most rich Hospitals, and a great number of Monasteries, and all this amounteth (as is thought) to the sum of five hundred thousand crowns of yearly rent. This riches of private persons augmenteth the Prince's treasure, because the riches of private persons is nothing else but the treasure of the Sovereign, divided into many purses, especially when he hath power to use the same, as this Prince easily doth by means of the charges and impositions imposed in this city. Contracts of marriage pay eight in the hundred; contracts of bargain and sail of lands and houses pay likewise the same sum; hire of houses pay the tenth part; They that have any s●●tss in law and pled, pay a certain imposition, which they call Sportola, before they begin their suit; There is a custom also of six pence in every two ducats upon all cattle that is bought and sold, and as often as they are bought and sold; Whenas they weigh any flesh, it pays a Quatrin in the pound, the which doth amount to three pence in the stone of our money. To conclude, there is not any thing carried out of Florence, or made within it, but hath an imposition. Moreover, the prince in his necessity makes use of the money of private men with very great case, after this manner. When he had need of a hundred or two hundred ●housand crowns, he made a list of all such as had ready money, the which were well known unto the prince, as they are at this day. Among these they made a division, assigning to every one the portion which he should disburse, more or l●sse, according to the quanti●●e of his means: the which did never exceed five thousand ducats. This seazement being made, they give notice to every one to pay his part by a certain time, and no man doth pass that day, as well for fear of punishment, as for that he would not lose the prince's fa●or. Every one having delivered in what was laid upon him, they assigned as much credit upon the tax of the whole State, as there was money lent, so as within the time of eig●●●nd twenty months (for this tax was levied within that time) they were satisfied th●● money: and after this manner, the prince did suddenly make use of private men's 〈◊〉 in his necessity, the which was no great prejudice unto them. But the great duke 〈◊〉 ●his day doth not use these courses, but lives upon his impositions, which are excee●ing great, there being neither salt, fish, flesh, bread, nor any thing sold within his Estate bu● pays a custom, yea men, women, lodging chambers, and Inns are subject unto a tol, th● which make his revenues to be very great.  
The duke's revenues are esteemed by some to be a million and a half of ducats, saying that he draws out of the city of Florence alone six hundred thousand ducats yere●●●●om Sienna one hundred & fifty thousand ducats, and from the customs of Livorne 〈◊〉 hundred and thirty thousand ducats, of the tolle of millstones throughout his 〈◊〉 Estate, except Sienna, one hundred and sixty thousand ducats: of salt, mines of 〈◊〉 ●nd silver, in a manner the like sum. Moreover he gets much by exchange, 〈◊〉 continually great store of money upon the bank. He doth also reap great profit 〈…〉 galleons for the transportation of merchandise, and by his galleys, which are compounded by Monsieur de Beauregard a French gentleman, who hath made great prizes of 〈◊〉 ●earess when he hath been at sea. Some are of opinion that the dukes yearly reve●●●●●oth not amount to above 1100 thousand ducats, setting down in particular how it is rai●●d, and what every chief town doth yield. Some hold that the deceased great 〈◊〉 ●●nd about ten millions of gold in his predecessors coffers, and to the value of two 〈◊〉 of jewels: and it is credible that he hath much augmented this sum.   

¶ The Forces.  
WE may say that the Estate of this prince is of iron, for that besides the natural strength of the Mountains, which doth environ it of three parts, in form like ●●to a wall, it hath a good number of forts which are in the East of Sienna, seated on that ●●de: among these they do number five cities well fortified; the which are, Sienna, the which is exceeding strong both by nature and art, having a good fort standing upo● the North-west part of the town; Montalcino in like manner is very strong both by scitua●●●●nd industry; but Quinsi, Grossetto, and Soane have many defects which may be objected. Besides the towns, there are also in this Estate divers Forts of good con●●deration, as Radico●ani, Montfalcon, Lucignan Monterison, and others which have de●e●tss both in form and quantity, being very little, and by consequence of small retreat, and ●ble to receive few men for defence. In the ●state of Florence all the towns from Montepulciano upward are well fortified, and especially Florence, whose walls although they be not all new, after the modern fashion, yet hath it two good Forts, the one is call●d S. Miniat seated upon a hill which commands the town, the other is the new Castle in a plain, made in the time of liberty. These Forts (built especially to keep the people in awe) may serve at need for some defence against strangers: but to offend they ●a●e defects in their form, and they are also but little. The great duke entertains for●ie soldiers for the guard of S. Miniat, and one hundred in the Castle, in Pisa he hath fif●ie, in Sienna five and twenty, and in Livorno two hundred and twenty. In this Estate of Florence and Pisa there are other Forts, as Empoli, Prato, Castrocaro in Romagna, and S●sso: all which like unto the rest have defects both in their form and spaciousness. As for Livorno, it is built of late years, & better fortified after the Modern manner. Touching the men of war which the great duke doth raise in his Estate, he hath great numbers o●●oot enrolled and mustered, which some hold amount to thirty and six thousand, or 〈◊〉; but others who have exactly examined the proportion of the whole, by a p●r●, ●o ●●●●●nke that there can be above fifteen or sixteen thousand of these trained bands. These men are apt to arms and discipline, being proper to this Province, the wh●ch hath in old time, and doth yet breed very good soldiers: the prince doth 'cause them to be practised and trained with great care, there being many good captains employed to that end: besides, every man doth practise to shoot in his piece, as well for his own private pleasure, as in regard of the prize which the prince propounds. These trained soldiers are not only drawn out of the country, but also out of towns; only Florence is fr●ed, it may be for that the prince doth not hold it fit and convenient to arm these people, who have not yet forgotten their former liberty, and therefore they are not suffered to have any arms in their houses, nor to wear any weapons, unless he be a knight, a soldier, an officer, or hath special leave. No man is freed from this inrollement but priests and scholars, and there are great punishments inflicted upon them that carry arms in the city, or in the duke's Estate, unless they be such as I have formerly named. These soldiers (besides many other privileges and exemptions which are granted unto them) cannot be imprisoned for debt: and these privileges being inviolably observed, is the cause that many good old soldiers coming from the wars of Flanders, France, and the East, do voluntarily 'cause themselves to be enrolled in those bands; so as, both for number and quality, we may say that it is the goodliest troop of Italy.  
Every soldier is tied to pay for his arms, which are given him for his use, and must keep them clean and in good order for all necessities without any charge to the prince. The great duke may upon every occasion draw all this company of soldiers to Florence within six or eight days warning at the most, both for that Florence is almost in the midst of Tuscanie, as the centre, and equally neighbouring all the parts thereof, as also for the good order he sets therein, disposing every thing with great facility.  
Furthermore, he hath caused a good number of Pioners to be enrolled, whom he useth also in time of peace, making them to labour in fortifications, and causing them to turn the course of rivers, and to make the lands better.  
As for horsemen, this prince entertaineth ordinarily one hundred men at arms, to whom he giveth in time of peace seven crowns the month, and in time of war the ordinary of the bank. Besides these, the maintaineth four hundred light-horsemen at three crowns the month in time of peace, and in time of war, as the ordinaries of the bank: all these horsemen are of his own subjects, and besides their pay, they have many re all & personal immunities; so as there are of them some reasonable companies. And in case there goes forth of Algiers any strong fleet of pirates, he trusts not wholly to the garrisons of the towers (which the duke hath for that effect in divers places, answering one another by signals) but the towers secure the horsemen, and the horsemen the towers: besides the companies abovesaid, he maintaineth a good troop of horses. These are the ordinary forces, but as for the extraordinary, he may have a far greater number, for that the State is populous, and replenished with great numbers of people, as I have said, and hath as many strangers as he can entertain in his pay, observing the custom of other princes.  
As touching the sea forces, duke Cosmo had in times passed very great care of them, knowing how necessary and important they were, and that a prince cannot be called Great, except he be powerful at sea. Being therefore moved with these reasons, and solicited by his own thoughts, which always aspired unto greatness, he procured and obtained by the authority of Charles the fift, the resignation of the Isle of E●be, from the Lord of Plombin, who was Lord and Master thereof, both for that he could not defend it from pirates that had ruined it, and for that it might by means of the slender defence thereof, fall into the power of the Turks, and so by reason of the situation it would be much prejudicial and hurtful to all Italy: yet he left all the revenues to the Lord of Plombin, and under his government all the villages and open places. This Island hath a haven called Porto Ferrario, capable to receive any great fleet that shall come thither; and as a place commodious, we may see arrive there all sorts of vessels, going to the Western parts, or coming, and which passing after to Livorne, unlade their merchandise to the great benefit of this prince: so that if this Island were in the hands of one that had good store of galleys, with courage and will to assail, he might easily, in 〈◊〉 the coasts about Barbary, and under Provence, Genoa, and Tuscanie, make himsel●● in such sort master of those seas, as not any one should pass but such as he wo●●●●●rmit. The great Duke hath in this Island a little place named Cosmopoli, of 〈◊〉 ●●smo. There is for defence upon the mouth of the haven two castles seated upon the 〈…〉 of two mountains, which are esteemed to be exceeding strong, and in a manner impregnable, by reason both of art and situation. He hath within the same many ca●●●●●, and all sort of munitions. The great Duke hath his Arsenal at Pisa, because that ●●●●●●ie aboundeth in wood, hemp, and other matters for to make and furnish many galleys, by means whereof, the inhabitants of that place in times past did so much enlarge th●●●●●me and State. Now, they work very little in this Arsenal, and do rather repair th●● make new galleys. Besides this, there is another in the Isle of Elbe, where he keepeth 〈◊〉 galleasses, and the men that work there, are for the most part brought up to it, or ba●●●●ed, or alured by wages. He hath twelve armed galleys, five galliass, and two galleons; one of them is great and able to contain many men, the other is little and well 〈◊〉. And since the time that he sent them so far to sea, under the conduct of the 〈◊〉 of Beauregard, he increaseth this number as much as he can, and maintaineth 〈…〉 are already made, in good plight. The galleasses which go with oars, he fur●●●●●●● with slaves and condemned persons, and will not employ freemen, lest it should 〈◊〉 ●●●●●diciall to his State: and of these men, the prince sent eight hundred into Africa, 〈…〉 emperors army, to the enterprise of Pignon de Velez, and the greatest part of them died, as it commonly fareth with fresh water soldiers, with which he is able to 〈◊〉 a good number of galleys, whensoever he pleaseth to use them. For men of command, he useth the service of Frenchmen, Sicilians, Corsicans, and Greeks, and among 〈◊〉, many subjects of the Commonwealth of Venice. He keepeth for the galleys the like quantity of skiffes, or a few more than the signory of Venice, but fewer canons. He ●●useth his biscuit to be made at Livorn, where he hath ovens for to bake forty thousand a day. He keepeth also in that place good store of cordage and anchors, and all mane● of things fit to accommodat and ●urnish ships withal, to the end they may more freely come to this port.  
Duke Cosmo, desirous to maintain the sea discipline, and to give more reputation to his affairs, instituted an order of Knights, called the Knight of S. Stephano, and obtained of Pope Pius the fourth and fift many privileges, and among others, That they might have two hundred crowns pension of the goods of the Church, with liberty to marry, but they are tied to serve in his armies at sea, and also they are not capable of any co●●●●nd, until they have served three years together in the galleys. And to give the greater reputation to this order, this Duke instituted himself great Master of the same. As for instruments of war, the great Duke is sufficiently stored, for he hath about an hundred and fifty field-pieces in the castle of Florence, and his other places are as well furnished, principally in the Isle of Elbe. He hath in the same fortress of Florence good munition of powder, bullets, and victuals, as wheat, millet, powdered flesh, vinegar, cheese, and the like. The great Duke hath for the guard of his person an hundred men, and in his stables about one hundred and fifty horses of his own breeding, among which are many Neapolitan Coursers, but more Gennets, and to be brief, horses of all sorts.  
He endeavoureth greatly to maintain himself in the Pope's friendship, for that his State can no way be more easily annoyed and endangered, than on that side next the Pope, for the mountains which compass Tuscanie on all the sides, saving that which bordereth upon the See of Rome (as we have said) make the entrance and passages difficult for armies, and principally for artillery, and if the enemy were entered into it, yet could be not live there without the aid of the State of the Church, because that all the rest of the country, excepting that, is no less barren than difficult: by reason whereof, if the enemy came with few forces, he would not be able to offend the great Duke, and 〈…〉 came with a great army, he could not maintain himself there, for that in Tusca●ie they strictly observe this order, to bring in time of peace (that it may be the less difficult to them in time of war) the greatest quantity of victuals they possibly can, into the cities and strong places, leaving the Champion country almost empty and unfurnished, to the which they give so much as sufficeth for their daily sustentation. ●ut on the Pope's side, besides that by reason of the plain, and largeness of the confines of the Church's territories, the enemy might have much easier access, he might also have a far greater commodity of victuals that would come to him through this State, as well from the same, as from out of Lombardie, by the way of Bononia: and the experience hereof is most manifest, seeing that the city of Florence hath never been in great danger, but by the way of the Church's territories, and particularly by means of two Popes of the house of Med●cis, namely first of Leo, and after of Clement, who wholly subdued Florence unto that Family. On the contrary, the great Duke receiveth great good by this friendship, both for the reputation of his State and affairs, which he augmenteth by this union, and because of the helps and commodities he hath thereby, doing good to many of his servants with the riches of the Church. Being then moved with these considerations, and warned by those former events, he will ever labour to have such a Pope to be chosen as is some way obliged unto him, and for this cause he striveth ordinarily to win the friendship of many Cardinals in divers sorts, and especially them that are in some estimation. But this amity is no less profitable to the Romish See, by reason of the safety and reputation it receiveth from the union of a Prince so near a neighbour, and so powerful, and for that the two States are almost but one and the same: so that their interests being common, and reciprocal, we must believe that this union aught carefully to be preserved.  
As for the king of Spain, the great Duke having now married his sister in law, it must be thought he hath with him very good correspondency, and it is also held that he supporteth the Spaniards, and hath knit a strict league with his brother in law. Yet it is not (after the opinion of many men of judgement) wholly to break off with France, because the Queen is too near allied unto him, and hath always given him great testimonies of her love and friendship. But it might so be, that the soliciting of his wife, or rather of some others, ill affected towards the French, might withdraw him from the amity which his father bore to the French King and Queen. Moreover, he seethe that the French are far from his State, and that the king of Spain is near unto him, by means of Milan, and the realm of Naples; so that this alliance and commodity might draw him wholly to embrace that party. Which the French king did ever very little respect, for that he is a prince that cannot hurt them in any sort.  
As touching the Genoese, they had no good intelligence with the late Duke, by reason of the Spaniards: but since that this Duke hath made an alliance with the king of Spain, we need not doubt but that this Commonwealth is wholly at his devotion, and yields him all the testimonies of love it can. Notwithstanding that the pretence of Corsica, as belonging to the State of Pisa, might hinder this amity.  
As for the Duke of Savoy, though outwardly there are seen nothing but offices of amity and respect to pass between them, yet forasmuch as the one envieth the riches, force, and good hap of the other; and the other, the nobleness, reputation, and riches of the first, it is sufficiently known that whereas great jealousy reigneth, there cannot be any desire of the greatness, and advancement of the competitor.  
This prince is in good amity with the duke of Mantoüa, by reason of parentage, and it is assuredly believed, that they run one course for their preservation: yet it is not known, whether the alliance lately made in Savoy, will in time withdraw the amity of the duke of Mant●üa, for some considerations, which is better to conceal than express. As for the duke of Urbin, by reason that he holdeth him inferior to him in greatness and strength, there falls out often times grudge, such as the limits of jurisdictions do commonly breed.  
Lastly, the citizens of Luca are in the midst of the great duke's State, enclosed on all sides within the same, having scarcity of victuals and all things necessary: and because they cannot have them but from the great duke, or by means of the passage of such things through his Estate, this prince may bring them in subjection without striking blow: yet he doth it not, no more than his predecessors have done, and perhaps will not do it, both because this commonweal being under the protection of the Emperor and Imperial chamber, he cannot do it without greatly offending him, and also by reason of the profit he receiveth, perhaps greater by their liberty, than if that commonweal were wholly subject unto him, because he is assured he may use it at his pleasure whensoever he needeth, and shall be aided with their means, by way of borrowing and otherwise, and also with their men, according to their power. Contrariwise if he would make himself master thereof, he might be assured that these men, accustomed to liberty (which they extremely love) and full of vain glory, and richer in ready money and movables, than in possessions, forsaking their country would leave the city destitute of inhabitants; and by that means the great duke should loose the commodity which now he receiveth by it.   

¶ The Government.  
NOw must I discourse of the administration of justice, of the distribution of magistrates, and of all the forms and manner of virtuous and well ordered living in this city. As touching the first part of government, which is of managing of affairs of state, though it consist all in the princes will, yet this duke taketh council of some that are near about him, and principally of Don john de Medicis, for that he is young, and hath no great experience in affairs. There are no councillors of state; so as we cannot say that the council hath censured any thing, but that it is the prince's pleasure: and so the resolutions which are made, are more secret and more assured.  
As touching the second part, which consisteth in judgements, it is performed by the same magistrates that decided matters in time of liberty, as well for civil as crimill causes: for civil processes of suits are determined by a certain number of Doctors of the Rota, like as at Rome and Bononia; and the criminal causes as asoretime: the place of Confalonner being given to one, who changing his name is called Lieutenant. There we see ordinary councillors, the magistrate of eight, and all other magistrates of towns, and Podestaries (except the governors of the principal city, which are sent thither by the prince, as in like manner the captains of Forts) as they were wont to be in time of the commonweal: and they are first drawn out of three boxes, distinguishing all into three ranks, according to the conditions of men, and putting all the names of the nobility into a box by themselves, whence they are after drawn.  
Out of the first box they draw the magistrates of greatest importance, out of the second, the middle sort, and the inferior out of the third: and when they have drawn five gentlemen for each magistrate, he which hath most voices in the council is chosen. These boxes are renewed every fist year, and he that would pass from a lesser magistracy to a greater, must do it at those times. These elections are authorised by the prince, which reserveth to himself power to confirm them all.  
True it is, that he seldom troubles himself with matters pertaining to the magistrates, but he hath a secretary of the criminal, who takes knowledge of all the most important crimes in question, and makes report thereof unto the prince, who gives direction before they give sentence: the which he doth to the end that magistrates knowing that their acts are known, and often examined by the prince, may have the more care to administer justice duly, for fear of insamie and punishment: and he doth it also for to have an absolute sovereignty in all things. He maintaineth this kind of government, for that seeing he must use persons which administer justice, he will with this little shadow of ancient liberty satisfy in part the desire of the citizens, for that they have in some sort the commodity to content their ambition, by means of the profit they reap by honours and public charges.  
This is also observed at Sienna, and for the same respect; for there is to be seen the ancient magistrates and councils, with the authority of the palace and signory, and in a word the relics and shadows of the commonweal that was in former times, and the great duke entertaineth there a general governor, which immediately representeth the prince with sovereign authority, who hath an eye to all things, and nothing is done without his privity, not not without the prince's knowledge, in matters of importance. We see then by this representation the whole government of these cities, as famous now for their nobleness, as they were in times past happy by their liberty. Now for as much as the glorious splendour which princes have accustomed to live in, is that which most representeth their majesty, the great duke maintaineth a court, or house worthy of observation, which surpasseth (to say truly) the bounds of a duke, and yet reacheth not to the magnificence of a king: He hath a good number of gentlemen, divided into two orders, the one attendeth his person, the other the household, with a great number of officers and servants. Moreover he hath in his service about three score gentlemen's and noblemen's sons, whom he causeth to be brought up with great care, and to be instructed in all manner of exercises: yet as some writ there are few tables kept in this prince's court.   

¶ Their Religion.  
All the inhabitants of this State are Romish Catholics, but they of Sienna are more devout, and more affected to religion. Moreover there is in Tuscanie three Archbishoprickes, namely of Florence, of Sienna, and of Pisa: that of Pisa hath under it the bishoprics of Massana, and Civita, besides the other bishoprics which are in Corsica: the archbishopric of Sienna hath under it the bishoprics of Soana Quinsi, and Grosset: under the Archbishop of Florence are the Bishops of Nepe, Castello, Montfalcon, Viterbe, Volterra, Fiesola, Zarzane, Sutri, Ortane, Cornet, Arezzo, Pienza, Pistoya, Been, Cortona, Castro, Perusa, Luca, and Luna.   

A GENEALOGY OF THE DUKE'S OF FLORENCE.  
COsmo de Medicis was the first that laid the foundations of the glory of that great family, and was named by public decree, the Father of his country. He governed the Florentines very fortunately, and was the refuge of the gallantest men of that age, both for learning and arms. He died in the year 1464, after he had lived seventy and five years, two months, and twenty days. Fortune was so favourable unto him, as he was esteemed the happiest and richest prince of his age.  
Peter de Medicis imitator of his father, behaved himself in the government of the commonweal more like a private citizen, than a Prince. He died in the year 1472.  
Laurence de Medicis, surnamed the Great prince of Florence, governed the commonweal with his brother julian, called Prince of the youth, or younger sort; which julian behaved himself in the government as his father and grandfather had done. He died in the year 1492, and his brother Laurence was slain by the Paccians, in the year of Christ 1478.  
Peter de Medicis, prince of Florence, degenerating from his father, was expelled from the government, and died in the year 1503. julian de Medicis, surnamed the Magnificent, his brother, was also deposed, and died in the year 1516.  
Cosmo de Medicis, son to Peter, was slain for making loveto married women.  
Laurence de Medicis, brother to Cosmo, having been driven away with his father, was made Duke of Urbin by Pope Leo the tenth, his uncle by the father's side, and died in the year 1519.  
From Laurence de Medicis issued Katherine de Medicis, wife to He●rie the second the French king, which died in the year of our Lord God 1589. Thus went this branch, which ended in the bastard Alexander de Medicis, who was slain in adultery, after he had received of Charles the fist (his father in law) the title of Prince, togetherwith the signory.  
But to come to him that now reigneth great Duke, we must take him from another line.  
Cosmo de Medicis, surnamed Father of the country, had a brother named Laurence, a citizen of Florence, whose son was Peter, who lived as a private man without any dig●i●ie.  
Peter had two sons, Laurence de Medicis, and john, who were banished by Peter son of Cosmo duke of Florence.  
Laurence had a base son by a Concubine, called julio de Medicis, who was Pope, by the name of Clement the seventh.  
john, brother to this Laurence, had issue john de Medicis, named at his baptism Lewis, a valiant and excellent Captain, who died in the year of our Lord God 1526.  
Cosmo de Medicis his son, at the age of eighteen years, substitute to his cousin  
Alexander in the principality of Florence, wisely governed the Commonwealth.  
This same, of duke of Florence, was the first that was made Great duke of Tuscanie, by Pope Pius the fift, in the year of our Redemption 1569; and these words were written in his Crown by the Pope's commandment, PIUS V PONT. MAX. OB EXIMIAM DILECTIONEM, ET CATHOLICAe RELIGIONIS ZELUM, PRAeCIPWMQVE, IVSTITIAe STUDIUM DONAVIT. He died in the year 1574. His children were  
Francis de Medicis, second great duke of Tuscanie, who died in the year 1587. He married first jane of Austria, daughter to Charles the fift, and afterwards Blanche a Venetian, who lived not above five hours after her husband. This Prince had (among other children) the most illustrious Princess Marie de Medicis, who at this day is Queen of France.  
Ferdinand the brother of Francis, having given over his cardinals Hat, was the third great duke of Tuscanie. He married Christina daughter to Charles duke of Lorraine. He died not long since, leaving for successor his son  
Cosmo de Medicis, who hath married Marie of Austria.      

The Estate of the Duke of Urbino.  

❧ THE ESTATE OF THE DUKE OF URBIN.  

The Contents.  
1 THe confines and compass of the Duke of Urbin's Estate, and the towns which he doth possess. 2. The territory fertile in corn, wine, oil, figs, etc. but the air unwholesome, especially about Pezaure and Fossombrone. 3. The Riches consisting in the wines of Pezaure, and dry figs: and what be the revenues of this Prince. 4. His forces of men and forts. 5. A Catalogue of the Dukes of Urbin, which have commanded unto this day.   

THe territory of this duke, lies part in Vmbria, and part in the Marquisat: he hath seven Towns, and above three hundred Castles. The towns are Urbin, Eugubie, Cagli, and Fossombrone; and these belong to the duchy of Urbin: then S. Leon (which is the chief town of the county of Montfeltre) Senegallia, and Pezaure. The length of this estate is about threescore miles, and the breadth about five and thirty. It confines, yea it is intermixed with the State of the Church (whereof the said duke is a feudatory) and with the duke of Florence country. He pays yearly for a rent and acknowledgement for the whole Estate which he enjoys, the sum of 2240 crowns.  
V●bin is one of the most ancient towns of Italy, of the which Pliny and Tacitus make mention. In the time of Conradin, the last duke of Suabe, it was subdued by the Earls of Montfeltre, whose successors increasing in power, in process of time had also Eugubie. This town is fair, and well built, and the duke makes his ordinary abode there. Pisaure hath also as fair houses as any town in Italy; and Fossombrone, called by the Ancients Forum Sempronijs, is also very well peopled.  

¶ The Quality.  
The territory about the city of Urbin is exceeding good, and generally fertile, yielding as good first-fruits as can be desired. The country about Pisaure hath a bad air, but the soil is exceeding good, and yields abundance of fruit, especially of figs, and excellent wines, and Fossombrone also, although the air be very unwholesome, yet the soil abounds with wheat, and all sorts of grain; and moreover, in wine, oil, and divers first-fruits, which are very pleasing in taste: and to speak in a word, this Estate is fertile, and hath plenty of all things necessary for the life of man.   

¶ The iches.  
A Good part of this Estate lies upon the shore of the adriatic sea, and is very commodious, and of great profit, by reason of many things which may be brought thither from all parts. They carry their wines of Pisaure to Venice, for the which the inhabitants receive much money, and also for their dried figes, which they cell to the Venetians, Bolonians, and to other places.  
The revenues of this prince, in possessions, rents, & customs, is about 100000 crowns yearly, yet if he would charge his people, he might draw a greater sum from them: but imitating the example of his predecessors, his chief care is to preserve the love of his people, and therefore is content to leave them in these terms, and to live with less money; where by he is master of his subjects hearts, who would willingly employ their li●eses and goods for his service, the which they have made manifest at their last prince's marriage, every town striving to show his particular affection to the prince and princess, to honour their entry into Pisaure, and to other places. This duke reaps no greater profit of any thing, than of corn, throughout the towns that are subject to him; for that there not only comes corn into the town of Sen●gallia out of the duke's Estate, but also out of the territory of the Church, the which is brought secretly thither out of the Pope's Estate, in great abundance, without his privity.   

¶ The Forces.  
THis duke is much to be esteemed, first for that he may draw out of his Estate above one thousand and two hundred good soldiers, which have been trained up in war, and who would readily follow their prince, if any good occasion were offered: secondly, for that although he doth not enjoy any great revenues, yet he is the master of his subjects hearts, who would employ all for his service. As for places of strength, the town of Urbin is of good defence: but Pisaure (whereas the duke doth commonly remain in Winter) is a strong town, and hath a very good castle. This town standeth upon the adriatic shore, and is about two miles in compass, and is fortified after the modern fashion; which fortification was begun by duke Francis Maria, and was continued and made perfect by his son Guy Vbalde that now lives, who entertains a good garrison of soldiers, with store of artillery, munition, and other things necessary for the defence of a town. He hath in his palace a hall full of goodly arms, near unto the which in another chamber, he hath arms for six hundred men, to the which they may go by a secret passage to the dukes own chamber. Moreover there are some other good places for the bigness, in this prince's Estate   

¶ The Dukes of Urbin.  
FRederic of Montfeltre, for his excellent virtues, was in his youth adopted for son by Guy Antony Vbaldini, signior of Urbin, who having lived many years without children, made his account that Frederick should be the heir of his Estate; by reason whereof, Frederick being like to succeed him in his signory, had great means, using himself courteously, and making show of those goodly parts which were in him, to win the love and affections of all the people. Guy Bald Antony had in his declining age one son, who was called Odo Antony, so as Frederic remained excluded from this signory, and yet the people's affection was nothing diminished, his virtues having purchased their loves. Odo Antony, after his father's death, ●uling very insolently, and licentiously, was slain by certain conspirators, being very young, and left no heirs behind him. Some writ that seeking to satisfy his lust with a gentlewoman of a noble house, he was slain by the people, and dragged ignominiously through the streets.  
Frederic Vbaldini, after the death of Odo Antony, was called to the government, by a general consent of all the people; and he had not only this Estate in see from the 〈◊〉 but also he was created the first duke of Urbin. There is much written of the ver●●● 〈◊〉 exce 〈…〉 f duke Frederic, among other things, that he was wise, eloquent, 〈◊〉 ver of le 〈◊〉 fortunate in war, respected in peace, honoured of the princes of Italy, and beloved dearly of his own people. He did beautify Urbin with go●d●●e buildings, and especially with that sumptuous palace, whereas he built a stately l●br●tie, replenished with so great a number of rare books, covered and garnished with gold, silver, and silk, as it was an admirable thing to behold, before that Caesar Borgia made himself master of Urbin; which books were disperse here and there, in the time of the said Caesar Borgia, and so that worthy work was ruined. He purchased Fossombrone for thirteen thousand florins of gold, of Galcazzo Malatesta, and died general for the Venetians, against Hercules of Este, duke of Ferrata. After his death he left for heir  
Guy bald his son, who notwithstanding that he married, being in his younger years much given to war, continued full of the gout, and without hope to have any children. This prince, not able to attend any other thing, by reason of his indisposition, had a design to have a goodly court, and full of virtuous men, and rare in all professions. so as using courtesy to all men of merit, as well as Elizabeth of Gonzague, his wife, yea one striving to exceed another in the entertainment of virtuous men, he drew together so great a number of such worthy persons, as the like hath not been seen in the court of any prince, yea he gave the form and model of a well ordered court, to other princes. He tried the frowns of fortune, for notwithstanding that he was general to P●pe Alexander the sixt, against the Ursini, whose army was defeated, and he taken prisoner; yet afterwards being betrayed by Caesar Borgia, son to Pope Alexander, he was in danger to be taken prisoner by him. Returning afterwards into his Estate, and hearing that Paulo Ursini the duke of Gravina, Vitellozzi, and Leu●●otti of Fermo, had been surprised at Senegallia by the said Caesar, he was forced to fly: but after the death of Pope Alexander he returned, and was very joyfully received of his people. After which he lived quietly, and in the end passed to a better life, being much lamented by his subjects, having first adopted  
Francis Maria de la Rovera, who was sister's son to Guy bald, his father was captain of Rome, and lord of Senegallia: he was nephew to Pope Sixtus, and base brother to Pope julio. This Francis gave h●mselfe to the exercise of arms, wherein he grew so excellent, as he deserved to be called the light and beauty of Italy. He had many honourable charges in the war: he was captain general for the commonweal of Ven●●●, and a little before his death, he was also made general by land, of the league which was betwixt Pope Paul the third, the Emperor Charles the fist, and the signory of Venice. Besides the duchy of Urbin, the county of Montfeltre, and the town of Senegallia, which was enoied by his father, he had also from the Pope, in recompense of much money which was due unto him from the Church, and for many good services done unto the holy See, the town of Pesate or Pisaure, which was wont to be held by the Ssorces. During the life of Pope julio the second, Franc●s Maria lived peaceably in his Estate, not charging his people, but caring only to purchase their loves, the which princes should esteem much more than any treasure. But Leo having succeeded Pope julio, he had great crosses and troubles, for that the Pope in a short time deprived him of his Estate, and gave it to Laurence de Medicis who was father to Katherine de Medicis the French queen. But having with the loss of his Estate, lost neither ●he greatness of his courage, his valour, military judgement, nor the love of his people, he dared with four thousand Spaniards (who followed him willingly in regard of his valour, being poor of money, and wanting all other things) to encounter so great a power as that of the Pope, for there 〈◊〉 rye of his Estate; and having made a great slaughter of his enemies, he recou●red all his country in a short time, except the town of Pisare: but finding himself in extre●me necessity of all things, and fearing some ●reason in his army, he returned vic●●ous to Urbin, where he was joyfully received by his subjects, whom he governed 〈◊〉 and peaceably the rest of his days, dying in the year 1538, and was lamented of them as if he had been their father, brother, or son. He had by Leonora Gongaza, his wife, two sons, Guy bald who succeeded him, and the Cardinal: and three daughters, whereof the one was wife to the duke of one of the greatest Princes of the realm of Naples; the second was married to the Lord Alphonso of Este; and the third was wife to the Marquis of Massa.  
Guy bald, son to Francis, was the fourth Duke of Urbin, for notwithstanding that Laurence de Medicis did call himself for a time duke of Urbin, yet being not of this line, he is not numbered among the dukes.  
Guy had two wives, the first was julia Varena, duchess of Camerin, which duchy he enjoyed during the life of his father Francis Maria, for notwithstanding that Pope Paul the third pretended that it was fallen in lapse to the Church, by the death of the Duke, without heirs male, yet he had some fear to make war against so valiant a Prince, who prepared to defend himself resolutely: but Francis Maria being dead, and leaving this duke but young, the Pope did soon make himself master thereof, and gave it in fee to Peter Lewis his son, but soon after he exchanged this Estate with Parma and P●●isance, with the consent of all the Cardinals.  
This duke took to his second wife Victoria Farnese, a fair, wife, and virtuous Princess, and much beloved of the duke her husband. He had six children, whereof two daughters were base, who were honourably married, one lawful daughter by the duchess of Camerin, who was first married to Frederic Borromeo, nephew to Pope Pius the fourth, and afterwards to the duke of Gravina, a Prince much esteemed in the realm of Naples, of the Family of the Ursini. By his last wife Victoria, he had two daughters, (whereof the eldest was married to the prince of Bisignan, who was one of the greatest of the realm of Naples, of the house of the Sanseverins, who hath above one hundred thousand crowns a year rend;) and one son, which is,  
Francis Maria, called by his grandfathers name, a Prince of an excellent spirit, and given to all exercises of the body.      

The Estate of the Duke of Mantova.  

❧ THE ESATE OF THE DUKE OF MANTOVA.  

The Contents.  
1WHat the Duke of Mantova doth possess at this day. 2. Antiquity of the city of Mantova, and how it was built before Troy 3 Enjoyed by divers Lords, and in the end reduced under the command of the Gonzagues. 4. Situation of the Town of Mantova: the stately buildings, and the Palace of Marmirol. 5. Of the Marquisat of Montferrat, sometimes held by the Paleologues: when, and by whom Mantova was made a Duchy. 6. The country of Montferrat very fr●●tfull: A fountain of hot and physical water at A●que. 7. Mantovans, lovers of the H●brew tongue more than any other nat●●n: simple in their apparel: and of the bold and froward disposition of their wi●eses. 8. The revenues of the duke of Mantova, and what he draws yearly from hi● Estate. 9 His Forts, and Cavalle●ie. 10. Of the Senate of Mantova: and of the government of Montferrat. 11. A list of the Du●eses of M●ntova.   

THe duke of Mantova holds no small Estate in Italy, and may be ranked next to the great duke of Tuscanie. He doth possess all ●hat was in old time belonging to the duke of Tuscanie: and moreover, he holds that of the Marquisat of Montferrat, which is greater than the said Estate of Mantova.  
As for the city of Montova, which is in Lombardie, beyond the river of Po, it is very ancient, being built six hundred and seventy years before the city of Rome, and s●xtie years before the Trojan war. This city was in old time the head of twelve Colonies of the Het●uriens, but according unto other Authors which are of good authority, Manta the Prophetess, daughter to Tyresia the Theban, was the foundress thereof. Some writ, that Ocno son to Tiberino king of the Tuscans, and of the said Manta, finding Tuscanie to be overcharged with people, past the Appeni● Hills, and the river of Po, with a great army, to seek new dwellings, where he built divers towns, amongst which was Mantova, the which he called by his mother's name, and settled the government, like unto that of Tuscanie, making it the regal city of all those places, for that it was rich and noble of ancient families, as coming from the Thebans and the king of the Tuscans. Afterwards, it was subdued, and held by the Gauls, who came down into Italy by the persuasion of Arrange king of Chiusi, to be revenged of Lucomone, who had ravished his wife: who entering into this country expelled the Tuscans, and forced them with their Captain R●tius to retire into the mountains, which they called Retia, by their captains name, and is now the Grisons country.  
The Gauls held these countries of Mantova and Tuscanie, giving the names of Cispadana, and Transpadana; and by some, the inhabitants of these places were called Cenomanes. Afterwards the Gauls were expelled from these places by the Rom●neses, whom they obeyed during the majesty and greatness of the Empire of Rome the which falling, they were subdued by the Goths, and then by the Lombard's: who being chased out of Italy by the Emperor Charles the Great, it was again brought under the subjection of the Emperors: but their power and authority declining, by means of the divisions and quarrels betwixt the successors of Charles the Great, the towns of Italy sought to emancipate themselves, and live at liberty, and Mantova did the like, until that the Emperor Otho the second, did invest Theodebald or Tedald Earl of Canosse, giving him this town, and the jurisdiction, for the good services which he had done him. Boniface his son succeeded him, who dying without issue male, Beatrix his wife took upon her the government, and after her, that noble countess Matilda, who was dispossessed of her Estate by the Emperor Henry the 3, who returning into Germany, left Mantova at liberty. But it could not continued so, for being straightly besieged by the said countess, they were forced to yield, in the year 1114, after four and twenty years liberty. But this lady dying the year after, the race of Tedald sailed, and Mantova recovered her liberty again, yet under the protection of the sacred Empire.  
About the year 1200 Sordelle or Sordet, Vicont of Goite, made himself master of Mantova, a wise and valiant man, who finding that this cousin Ezzelin of Padova, a most cruel tyrant, aspired to the signory of that city, resisted him valiantly with arms. After his death, they did choose two out of the body of the nobility, which were as Tribunes of the people, and these were Pinamonte of the Bonacolsi, and Otonello of the Ze●●●b●lli, a good and a wise man, whom Pinamonte caused to be stain to make himself tyrant of the city, the which he did, and so continued eighteen years with great favour of the people; who aspiring to greater matters died in the year 1289.  
B●rdelono Bonacolsi succeeded him, a man deprived of all virtue, insolent, without judgement, ignorant, arrogant, base minded etc. but he continued but one year in his tyranny, being expelled, and banished with his brother Thomas by the people, and by Bottigella Bonacolsi, a man of a great courage; so as Bardelono died at Padova in banishment. The State remained afterwards in the hands of Bottigella, a hardy, a valiant, and virtuous man, who governed it with great love of all men, but dying about the year 1308, his brother Passarino a man of a great courage, succeeded him: who not content with the signory of Mantova, subdued many castles, with the city of Modena, which did belong to Francischino Pico de la Mirandola, but he was afterwards slain in the midst of the marketplace, by Lewis of Gonzaga, or by the soldiers which were led by his sons Guido and Feltrino: who taking Francis the son of Passarino with his children, and Butrino his brother, he sent them to Nicholo Pico the son of Francis, who slew them cruelly, to revenge his father's death, whom Passarino had slain. Thus the tyrannic of the Bon●colsi ended in Mantova, and Lewis of Gonzaga, the son of Guy, took upon him the government of the commonweal with great applause of the people. It was an ancient and noble family in Mantova, and some writ that they had their beginning from a german, at such time as the Lombard's did reign in Italy: in which family the government of Mantova hath continued to this day.  
The city of Mantova is seated near to the Lake Benac, from the which doth flow the river of Mincia, which doth run unto Mantova, and there making a Lake doth environ the city, and doth fortify the situation, then passing on it falls into the river of Po. The town is great, fair, pleasing, and full of stately palaces, inhabited by many persons of quality, among the which there is one beautified with divers pictures by Andrew M●ntegna that excellent painter, where are to be seen seven great tables, in the which is drawn the order of Caesar's triumph, made with such great art and judgement, as it may well be termed the maisterpeece of most excellent painters. There are many other rare things worthy of admiration to be seen in that city, the which for brevities sake I omit. Fi●e miles or thereabouts from Mantova, going upon the high way (the which is planted of either side with trees) stands Marmirol, which is a royal palace, built with very great charge, and able to lodge any prince whatsoever, who cannot but admire the stateliness of this building. There are to be seen at this Palace, many goodly fountains made with great art, lakes full of all sorts of fish, gardens which are exceeding pleasant; and finally, all sorts of first-fruits. There are some other places in this Estate, but take away Mantova, the rest are of small moment.  
As for the Marquisat of Montferrat, it hath the river of Tanaro on the left hand, and the river of Po on the right. This country is a continued mountain very pleasant and fruitful, yielding all that is necessary for the life of man, and it is very well inhabited, beginning about a days journey from the Alpss, and is divided from a plain, which lies betwixt the Alpss and the said hills. It is one of the seven Marquisats, erected by the Emperor Otho the 2, who gave one to either of the sons of Aleran of Saxony, in whose family this Marquisat continued, till that the issue male ●ailing, it was transported to Andronic Paleologue Emperor of Constantinople, having married Yoland daughter to Boniface Marquis of Montferrat, who sent Theodorus his eldest son thither, and he governed that Estate wisely and courteously: and so the Marquisat continued in the family of the P●leol●gueses, until the death of George in the year 1534: after which there being many pretendants for the said Marquisat, the Emperor Charles the fift hearing the reasons and allegations of all parts, in the end adjudged it to Frederic of Gonzaga, who had married the sister of Boniface of Montferrat, and made him the first duke of Mantova. The duke of Mantova hath in this country three good towns, that is to say, Casal S. Vasques, built by Sixtu● the fourth, in the year 1474, the which is well built, and peopled with many ancient families, and among others, of the Earls of S. George and B●●ndrate: it suffered great loss in the year 1530, being sacked by the soldiers of the Emperor Charles, for that the citizens refused the government of Frederick Gonzaga: There is also Alba, which Pliny calls Pompeia, the which is greater than cassal: and Aique the which is a good town. There is also the towns of Villa Nova, Balzole, Trine, palais, Biance, Libourne, which belong unto the duke of Mantova: and near unto Po, is Ponte di Stura, so called of the river Stura. There is a strong Castle, whether Lodovic Sforza duke of Milan was carried, being betrayed by the Swisses, and sold unto the French near unto Novara. Being in this Castle with one servant, at night, sighing, he said, OH inconstant fortune, where am I? yesterday I commanded above twenty thousand men, and now I have scarce one servant, and am a prisoner. And to be short, they hold that the duke doth possess above sixty and five towns, besides an infinite number of villages.  

¶ The Quality.  
THe country about Mantova is reasonably good, and yields all sorts of first-fruits, being well manured. It is a pleasant thing to see the way, going from Mantova to Marmirol. As for the Marquisat of Montferrat, the country is uneven, but very fruitful, yielding all things necessary: it lies near unto the Alpes, divided only by a plain, as I have formerly said. The soil is so good, as there is nothing unmanured. There are fountains, and hot springs, and some say, that the grass gowes in the midst of the boiling waters. The territory about cassal is divided into plains, and little hills, which yield great store of wheat, wines, and other first-fruits of the Earth. The air of the town of Alba is unwholesome, yet the soil is good and fertile, being watered by the river of Tanare. The town of Aique is famous by reason of her fountains of physical water.   

¶ The Manners.  
THe Italians hold them of Mantova to be more inclined to the Hebrew tongue than any other, as they say, the Calabrians are unto the Greek. They hold also that they of Mantova are base in the entertainment of their friends, and childish in their apparel, showing no manly gravity, and that they exact all they can from strangers. As for the women, they say, they are bold and froward. They of Montferrat participate of the humour of the Piedmontois; so as having described them in the duke of Savoys Estate, it were superfluous now to make a repetition.   

¶ The Riches.  
TH● duke of Mantovas' country is able to entertain the owners, but not to draw any 〈◊〉 store of money from other Provinces; so as the inhabitants may well live of th●●●●ich the land doth yield them, but not to make any great traffic, or to grow ri●● their commodities which they sell. They hold that the duke of Mantova hath in ●●●ely revenues, above five hundred thousand crowns, and might have more, if he did not entreat his subjects with as much mildness as can be desired.   

¶ The Forces.  
THe city of Mantova is exceeding strong, as well by reason of the situation, as for the fortifications which have been made: besides the which it hath this in particular, 〈◊〉 there is no passage unto it, but by bridges, which makes the accesle more difficult for 〈◊〉 that should attempt against it. As for Cassal, the walls are exceeding strong, as 〈◊〉 been made by the ancient Marquises of Montferrat, who made their abode 〈◊〉 ●nd built a very strong castle. But in the year of Christ 1590., Vincent Gonzaga, 〈◊〉 Mantova and Montferrat, built another Fort, held impregnable, the which they commonly called Citadelle. Besides this, the duke hath a good Fort at S. Saviour, and courche best places that can be seen at Pont Stir. There are many other places, but to 〈◊〉 them would be too tedious. They hold, that the Cavallerie of Mantova are the best ●●●●lie, at the lest, the Italians themselves give them this honour.   

¶ The Government.  
Th'duke of Mantova hath in his chief city a Senate, who doth judge of all matters 〈◊〉 belongs to justice, definitively: and in Montferrat there is a Governor, who re●●●es in the town of Cassal, which is a seat of justice for all the Marquisat of Montant.   

The Lords, marquesses, and Dukes of Mantova.  
L●●is Gonzaga, took upon him the government of Mantova, about the year 1328. 〈◊〉 was a virtuous, bountiful, and valiant man, and did many worthy things. He had thre●●●aveses successively, by the first he had Guydo, Philippino, and Feltrino, and by the second, Conrade, Albert, and Frederic, and as many by the third, who was of the house of Ma●●●●●●, and those were Azzo, james, and john. He died in the year 1360, on the fifteenth of 〈◊〉, being ninety years old. 〈◊〉 his son succeeded him in the State: He was a quiet, modest, and religious 〈◊〉, and died in the year 1369. He had three sons, Vgulin, Francis, and Lodovie. The two younger killed the elder, during their father's life time, for that he governed the State. Afterwards Francis died without children before the father, and then succeeded.  
●●●ovic, or Lewis the second, who having governed the State twelve years, he died in the year 1382, leaving one son called  
Francis, being but thirteen years old. He did manage arms with great judgement and commendation, and maintained his Estate against the force of john Galeazze Viscont, 〈◊〉 duke of Milan. They writ, that he was wise, of great authority, learned in Histo●●● a lover of learned men, and virtuous, an admirer of the praises of the Ancients, sweet ●●conuersation, pleasant, liberal, and honourable in entertainment. He died one and forty years old, on the eight of March, in the year 1407.  
john Francisco his son, being but twelve years old succeeded him, who on the two and twentieth day of September, in the year 1433, was by the Emperor Sigismond created Marquis of Mantova, upon a Tribunal in the Marketplace of S. Peter in Mantova. Afterwards he gave him for his arms an Eagle sables in a field Argent, with a cross Gules. He married that virtuous, religious, and wise lady Paula Malosesta, whom the writers of those times have much commended for her great virtues. Being four and fifty years old, after many worthy works, he died, on the three and twentieth of September, in the year 1444, dividing his Estate betwixt four sons.  
Lodovic his son succeeded in the Estate of Mantova, being two and thirty years old: he had great contention with a younger brother called Charles, and vanquished him. And having lived sixty years with great love and commendation, he ●ied in the year 1478. He was very courteous, affable, and bountiful, and (for a martial man) eloquent, and religious. He made many worthy works within the city, and began the Church of S. Sebastian, and in like manner the sumptuous Temple of S. Andrew. He received the Emperor Frederic the third, and the king of Denmark with great state. He left five sons, giving to the four youngest portions.  
Frederic his eldest son succeeded him, and was the third Marquis of Mantova: he was a wise and discreet man, both in war and peace. His subjects loved him much, for that he was liberal, and would lend them money without any profit, if he found them fit for traffic; for above all things he hatedydlenesse. To virtuous men he was mild, bountiful, and courteous, and honourable to strangers. He died in the year 1484 leaving three sons by Marguerite, daughter to the duke of Bavaria, that is, Francis, Sigismond (who was Cardinal) and john.  
Francis came unto this State, being but eighteen years old: he was of a reverend, amiable, and grave aspect: he was much given to arms, and martial discipline, which purchased him great reputation with Princes, not only in Italy, but also with the emperor Maximilian, with Lewis the twelfth the French king, and with the signory of Venice. He had three sons, and as many daugters, by Isabel, daughter to Hercules of Este, duke of Ferrara: and he died in the year 1519, to whom succeeded his son  
Frederic, being eighteen years and ten months old: he was nothing unlike his father in profession of arms: so as he was made General of the Church's army, by Pope Leo the tenth, being yet very young; and in like manner for the florentines, wherein he showed great valour and judgement. He received the Emperor Charles the fift with great state, who had received the imperial crown at Bolognia, by whom he was made duke of Mantova, in the year 1530: the year after, he took to wife Marguerit, daughter to William Paleologue, Marquis of Montferrat, and had the said Marquisat in dowry, the which the duke of Savoy pretends to belong unto him, and hath of late sought to recover it by arms. He died in the year 1540, leaving three sons and one daughter, and the duchess with child of the fourth son. He was about forty years old.  
Francis his eldest son, being about six years old, came to succeed his father, and to be duke. The Estate of Mantova was governed by the authority of Cardinal Hercules of Este, his uncle, a man of great judgement and learning. Soon after his marriage with Katherine, daughter to the Emperor Ferdinand, he fell into the river of Minel, and being drawn forth, a fever seized upon him, whereof he died soon after, in the year 1550.  
William succeeded his brother Francis in the Estates of Mantova, and Montferrat, which was made a duchy by the Emperor Maximilian the second, in the year 1573, and the said William died in the year 1587.  
Vincent succeeded his father William in the Estates of Mantova, and Montferrat.      

The Estate of the Duke of Modena  

THE ESTATE OF THE DUKE OF MODENA.  

The Contents.  
Reason's why the Pope pretends the duchy of Ferrara to belong unto the holy See. 2. Ferrara yielded unto the Pope by Don Caesar of Es●e: and what the treaty and accord was betwixt his Holiness and the said Don Caesar, before he left the town 3. Modena, a town sometimes commanded by the Romans, than 〈◊〉 by the Goths, Huns, and Lombard's: when, and how is was re-edified. 4. Commanded ●●●rss Lords. 5. Of Reggium, and the divers Lords of it, before it came into the possession of 〈◊〉 Caesar of Este. 6. The soil of Modena and Reggium, situated in a good air, abounding ●●●ne, beans, and wine. 7. citizens of Modena and Reggium, subtle witted, and loving 〈◊〉.   

ALphonso, duke of Ferrara, dying without any issue male lawfully begotten, left only one base son, that was legitimated, called Don Caesar of Este, who presently took possession of Ferrara, & all his father's Estates: but the Pope pretending the city of Ferrara to be a fee of the Church, and that it was fallen unto him for want of issue male lawfully begotten of the said duke, levied an army to dispossess him: but Don Caesar sending to pled his title and right, 〈◊〉 Pope debated it in such sort, as he thrust Don Caesar of Este out of Ferrara, for many ●●●sonss, by the which he pretended that the duchy of Ferrara did belong unto the holy See.  
First he said, that the confession, and declaration of the people of Ferrara (who did accept and advow him for their true Lord) should serve for a sufficient proof: secondly, that he had the acknowledgements of all the dukes of the house of Este: and thirdly, an infinal number of bulls and investitures granted from Popes, beginning at Pope Innocent the third. Moreover, he did allege, that the Popes had often recovered Ferrara, by way of right, and by arms, out of the hands of divers that would have seized thereon. Besides this, that many Emperors had declared, that the city of Ferrara did belong unto the holy See; as the Emperor Charles, son to Charles the Great, which was in the time of Pope paschal the first, who confirmed the donation which Pepin had made, and named Ferrara of the holy See: then Otho the first, in the donation which he made to Pope john the second, confirmed the said donation, the which was also confirmed at the Council of Lion, with all the privileges.  
As for the people, he said, that in the time of Gregory the ninth, they made (at the ringing of a bell) in an open assembly, a procurator or deputy called Bonin, to perform his obedience unto the Pope, and the Pope granted him certain revenues: that in the ●●me of Pope Urbin the fourth, Honorius the fourth, and of Boniface the eight, the said people did acknowledge the holy See, paying a certain rent unto it: that in the time of Pope Clement the fift, which was in the year 1301, the fift year of his reign, the said people did acknowledge the holy See, and the Pope sent thither a Lieutenant and Go●●●nour, he made laws, appointed the manner of government, and created many 〈◊〉 and the people performed an infinite number of acts, in acknowledgement of the ho●●● See.  
And for that in the time of Gregory the ninth, they of the house of Este began to govern for the Pope, therefore he said, that the said Lords of Este, not only had always governed for the holy See, but also had acknowledged it for sovereign Lord of this town; and that the first, which was Azon of Este, had been established governor there by Pope Gregory the eleventh: that afterwards in the time of Gregory the eleventh, in the year of grace 1372, the first year which he gave the investiture to the said Lords of Este, holding Cardinal Peter at Ferrara for Legat, he sent him an investiture, in the persons of Nicholas and Albert, children to the said Azon, during their lives, paying a rent of four thousand ducats; commanding the said Legate, not to give the said investiture, if they did not formerly promise' with oath to yield up the said town, after the time of the investiture expired, without retaining any thing whereby it should be bettered, or any other expenses, and with this proviso, That they should first of all acknowledge and declare that the said town did belong unto the holy See, as they did in the year 1372, on the fifteenth of May.  
That the said Lords of Este had always obtained a new investiture, for the prolongation of their first grant, since Boniface the ninth who confirmed the said investiture unto them: and to be short, that Alexander the sixt having made an alliance with the said Lords of Este, in the year 1501, confirming all the investitures, beginning since Sixtus the fourth, he granted them a new investiture unto the third generation, reducing the rent to one thousand crowns, for that they had been at great charges in bettering and beautifying the town: that Leo the tenth, in the beginning of his Popedom, restored the duke unto his Estate, which he held before the deprivation of julio, and that afterwards the said Leo, by reason of Modena, and Reggium, deprived and excommunicated the said duke, who was absolved and restored by Adri●n the sixt, upon certain conditions, which have been always observed, That the duke should not make any salt at Comachio, but only the holy See: that Clement the seventh, for that the duke had entered into Reggium, during the vacancy of the holy See, did excommunicate him, calling Christian princes to his aid, for the recovery of Ferrara, but for that the duke made many goodly offers unto the Pope, it took no effect, and his peace was made.  
Paul the third invested the said duke, as well for himself, as for the descendants of Alphonso, granting him the duchy of Ferrara, with the appurtenances, and the customs which his predecessors did justly exact, and he did also invest him in all the rights which the holy See pretended in all other places held by the duke, that is to say, in Modena and Reggium, and they agreed, that in case of devolution, the line being extinct, they should cite the duke's successors by contradiction, if there were no procurator at Rome, the which had then happened. And for that they did affirm that the investiture of Paul the third was for the direct line of Alphonso, grandfather to the deceased duke, to whom they said Don Caesar. was son: whereunto the Pope answered, that the said investiture was for the direct masculine line, that was legitimat, and that the said Don Caesar being base, could not be comprehended.  
And to show that he was base borne, they did publish a genealogy of the house of Este, made & printed by Jerome Folet, and dedicated to the deceased duke Alphonso, where he did show that the father of Don Caesar who was called Alphonso, was not borne of Laura Eustoica, and of the duke Alphonso, setting down the wife which he had, and not placing this for his wife, and that it did not appear that he was legitimat by any subsequent marriage, the which if he should prove, yet the words of Paul the third, were not to be understood, but only of lawful children, and not of those that were made legitimate.  
As for that which they might pretend, that there had been a duke base borne, and that therefore the nature of the ●ee passed indifferently: the Pope answered, that for so many years, there was never found but one Precedent, and that one act was not sufficient to infer a custom. Moreover he said, that the said act did not prove a custom, but the contrary, for that this bastard which was admitted to the said duchy, was therein expressly made able by the Pope; so as it did appear, that without this making able, such persons were of themselves incapable; besides, there was the Bull of Pope Pius the fift, ●●●ch made bastards unable to hold any fee of the Church.  
He said also, that they were not to have any regard to the pretensions, of meliorations preparations, which (he said) had been done in the said duchy, and did amount to ma●●●●llionss, for that besides the Bull of Pope Pius the fift, where it was said, that it 〈◊〉 not be retained for any reparations and expenses: they should hold for many 〈◊〉 that they were no debts; first, for that it was a special convention and renunci●●●ade by the said dukes, in the time of Gregory the eleventh, for that they promised ●●●eld up the fee, the masculine line being extinct, and might not demand any thing af●●● said reparations and charges, by taxes upon their vassals, and upon the benefices 〈◊〉 duchy, and by consequence, they could not pretend any thing of that side, seeing ●●ese reparations had been done with the money granted by the holy See, and ●●●●ed from her vassals: and moreover, there being an agreement by the which it was 〈◊〉 that they might not build without the permission of the holy See, they could not ●●●●●tend any thing in that regard.  
〈◊〉 as for that which D. Caesar did urge, that the nomination of the duchy did belong 〈◊〉 people, by the which he pretended to be named; the Pope answered, That the 〈◊〉 had no right, according unto a declaration which they had made in the time of 〈◊〉 the fift; and that it ceased, in case there were any, by reason of so many 〈◊〉 by Popes. That if there were any investiture made by Gregory the ninth, which 〈…〉, that he did invest him duke for that he was pleasing unto the people, yet was 〈◊〉 ●ot any nomination of the people, but the people said, That they made him duke, for 〈◊〉 ●he was comprehended in the investiture of john the two and twentieth.  
〈◊〉 ●nd, the Pope by his reasons, and with an army which he had raised, forced D. 〈◊〉 depart out of Ferrara, and to remain duke of Modena and Reggium; and the 〈◊〉 of the accord made betwixt his Holiness and him, were as followeth:  
〈◊〉 D. Caesar should carry away all that he had, by the month of januarie.  
〈…〉 he should renounce and quit the title of duke of Ferrara, and of earl of Rovigo.  
●●at D. Caesar being go out of Ferrara, and the jurisdiction thereof, should no more 〈◊〉 into Ferrara, nor within the limits.  
●hat the artillery should be divided betwixt the Pope and D. Caesar, and that the Pope 〈◊〉 choose first.  
That within the space of three years, D. Caesar should cell all that he had in Ferrara, or 〈◊〉 the territories thereof, else it should be all held for confiscate.  
〈◊〉 as for all the dignities, which he, or any of his, should obtain hereafter, they should acknowledge it from the holy See.  
Modena, which was in old time called Mutina, was a very ancient town, standing up●● Vi● Emilia: Some hold, that it was built by the ancient Tuscans, among many others, 〈◊〉 past the Apennin Hills to seek new dwellings: but the Gauls coming into Ita●●● become masters thereof, and of many other places in that country. After some time, 〈◊〉 were expelled, and it was made a Colony of the Romans and new inhabitants car●●ed thither. This town suffered great miseries, being in the Romans hands, especially ●●enas Marc Anthony besieged Decius Brutus: After which, it was somewhat repaired, but not fortified as before, to the end it should not serve for a retreat for mutinous and ●e●●●●ous men. Being afterwards quite ruined by the Goths, and Lombard's, it was re-edify or rather new built, in a place somewhat distant from the old town, after th● 〈◊〉 Charles the Great, having subdued the Lombard's, and secured Italy from the invasion of the Barbarians, and made his son Pepin king of Italy, the Italians seeing themselves assured of their goods, and that they enjoyed their liberty by the means of the ●●uless; they which were issued from the ancient citizens of Modena, being retired into places of safety, met all together in the Church of S. Giminiano's, standing upon Via Cl●u●●● where they took council, whither they should restore their ruined country, or 〈◊〉 greater town in some other place. After long debate, every man speaking his 〈◊〉 in the end it seemed so difficult unto them all, as they were ready to departed without any conclusion: Then stepped up Anthellano of Magnoni, a wise man and of a great spirit, who loved his country much, saying, That if they loved their country, as they made show, they would not grieve to spend what they had, yea their own lives for it; and therefore he thought it fit, that in any case they should begin to build it, for that it would not prove so difficult a matter as they thought, if they would follow his advice, which was that every gentlemen and rich citizen should take the charge to build a city gate, at his own cost and of his friends: and to the end it might be the more speedily built, he thought it fit, that presently there should be a palisado made about the place in the which they should build their new city, and that the countrymen should dig a ditch, and of the earth which should be cast out of it, they should make a rampire along the palisado, whereby the place might be secured until the walls were built. Anthellano was heard willingly, and his council accepted by all the citizens, with great applause, and so they began the building of their new city. The first gate called Salicetti, was built by the noble family of the Boschetti, with their friends, drawing the Palisado unto S. Peter's gate, the which was built by the Freddi and their friends: the port of Saragosse by the family of the Gazzons, and their adherents: and that of Rodecoca by the Gorzans: the Sasfoli, with their friends, built the gate which is called Bazzovaria: the Savinians, with their adherents, built the gate of the New citi●: and that of Ganacette, was built by the Manfredi, Pedochi, and Pandelli: The gate called Albretti was built by the Pies and Papazzons: and they of the family of Rodea, with their friends, built the port of S. john. After this manner, they began their new city, a little distant from the old town, about the which, by little and little (with a happy success) they made a wall, so as the citizens might devil securely: and as the people increased, so did their buildings, but this happened long after the reign of Charles the Great, if we shall believe Volateran, who saith, that it was in the year of Grace 1100. This city grew to be in great reputation among the people of Italy, and they maintained themselves in liberty a good time, under the protection of the empire, yet in the end it become subject unto Opizzes, son to Reynold of Este, Marquis of Ferrara, to whom it was delivered by Guy of Guidone, Bishop of Modena, Legat to Pope Benedict the eleventh, the Pope consenting thereunto in regard of a tribute of ten thousand crowns, which the new Lord should pay unto the holy See: and this was concluded in the year of our Lord God 1304. But the emperor Henry the seventh allowing of nothing that the Popes did, and usurping the rights and lands of the Church which were belonging to the Patrimony thereof, made Francis Pi● of Mirandula his lieutenant at Modena, reserving notwithstanding the sovereignty to himself. This Pi● was expelled by the Guelphs, and Passerin, Butrton, and Bonacolsi, lords of Mantova, seized thereon, and held it quietly until the year of Grace 1327, when as their own insupportable tyranny, rather than any conspiracy of the citizens, expelled them. In the year of our Redemption 1331, Manfredi of Picinino was made Vicar or Governor of Modena, with his cousin Guido, by john king of Bohemia, who was no sooner out of Italy, but they delivered over Modena to the right lord Obizze, second Marquis of Ferrara, reserving Carpi, and S. Felice, with some other Articles. In the year of Christ 1339, Obizzes was invested by the Legate of Pope Benedict the twelfth, and made Vicar, or Vicegerent perpetual of this town: the which the house of Ferrara did enjoy until the year 1510, whenas Pope julio the second took it from him, and gave it to the emperor Maximilian the first, who engaged it to Pope Leo the tenth for forty thousand crowns. But afterwards Pope Clement the seventh, being besieged by the army of the emperor Charles the fift, Alphonso of Este, the third duke of Ferrara, embracing this occasion, recovered his own, and entered into the possession of Modena, the which Pope julio had taken from him, and so it hath continued unto this day under the house of Este. It was well fortified by Hercules' duke of Ferrara. It is very well peopled, and there are many noble families, amongst which is the noble house of the Rangoni.  
Reggium, which some hold was a Colony of Lepidus. It was called Reggium Lepid●, to distinguish it from Reggium jul●, in Calabria. Some writ, that it was ruined whenas the Goths being incensed against Stilicon, spoiled Italy, and that in the year 1314, the children of those which remained of this ruin, compassed this town about with a wall. Sometime they governed themselves in liberty, according to the customs of the other cities of Italy, and sometimes they were governed by others. Their popular government ●●●●ing, the Earls of Canosse did first of all usurp this Estate, in the year 1286, but 〈◊〉 were expelled the third year after their usurpation, by some of the chief of 〈◊〉, with the help of the Bolonians, and so they returned to their first Estate; but 〈◊〉 to maintain themselves, they gave the town (in the year 1292) to Obizze of 〈◊〉, the first of that name, Marquis of Ferrara: but in the year 1326, the citizens gave the town unto the Church of Rome, to the which they yielded obedience two years, du●●ng the which, the Pope had two governors slain by the people, for that they carried the●selueses indiscreetly. In the year 1331, it was under the government of john king o●●●hemia, but two years after, the said king being go, the Fogliani entered the city, 〈◊〉 ●●ew all they could found of the family of the Manfredi, and made themselves masters thereof: but fearing they should not be able to maintain their tyranny, they sold the 〈◊〉 Mastin de la Scala Lord of Verona; yet before he could enter and take possessival of Gonzaga came, and made himself Master thereof, who built a citadel near 〈◊〉 ●he port of S. Nazare. In the year 1359 Feltrin Gonzaga took upon him the ●●●●●ment against the liking of his brother the Lord of Mantova, who being incen●●●●gainst him, canceled him out of the family of the Gonzagas, and deprived 〈◊〉 all the honours and privileges due unto the house of Gonzaga: and he not able to 〈◊〉 his brother's forces, sold it for sixty thousand ducats to Barnaby Visconte Lord of 〈◊〉, in the year 1370, and so it remained under the government of the Visconte, unt● the death of john Galliazze the first duke of Milan, which was in the year 1402, 〈◊〉 many tyrants made themselves Lords of divers cities of Italy, where amongst the●● Ortobon took Parma, having slain the Rossi, and made himself prince of 〈◊〉 the which he held unto the year 1409, whenas he was slain by Sforce Cotignole, by the ●●●suasion of Nicholas the second, of the house of Este, and Marquis of Ferrara, who 〈◊〉 upon him the government, left it for an inheritance to the house of the Estes, to ●●●n it remained subject, until the year 1512, whenas Pope julio the second took it 〈◊〉 Alphonso duke of Ferrara, and made it subject unto the Church until the year 1523, ●●●●as Pope Adrian the sixt dying, Alphonso duke of Ferrara went with forces, and 〈◊〉 Reggium, the which the citizens being out of hope of succours yielded unto him, s●nce which time, the successors of Alphonso have enjoyed it quietly. These two towns 〈◊〉 to Don Caesar of Este, who enjoys them at this present with the title of duke.  

¶ The Quality.  
THe territory about Modena abounds with corn, beans, and other things necessary for the life of man, and above all it bears excellent wine. And as for Reggium 〈◊〉 soil is exceeding fertile, and yields great store of wheat, barley, beans, and all other land of corn, and white wines which are nothing inferior to any in Italy. The air about this town is good, and wholesome, and little subject to diseases,   

¶ The Manners.  
THe citizens of Modena have always showed themselves very desirous of liberty, and have often exposed their lives to maintain it, and they of Reggium have done 〈◊〉. There have come many excellent personages out of Modena both for arms ●●●●●taining. The Italians say, that they of Modena are subtle, quick in their councils, and ●asie to pacify when they are wronged, and long in the entertainment of their 〈◊〉 they say also that their women are of a mild disposition, and nothing froward. As for them of Reggium, they are affable, subtle, of good wits, & fit for any thing 〈…〉 shall be employed: and finally they have loved liberty as much as any people in 〈◊〉 and have preserved it as well as they could, as hath appeared by the toil they ha●●●●had which have sought to make it subject.   

¶ The Riches, Forces, and Government.  
THese two towns, and their territories, are reasonably rich, but we cannot speak much of the revenues of the new prince. As for the Forts, these two towns are strong, but Reggium more than Modena, by reason of a good citadel which it hath: and this new duke entertains a garrison in ei●her town. As for the government, it is yet so new, as there can be nothing certainly spoken thereof, so as it is better to pass it over with silence until some better occasion.      

The Commonweal of Lucca.  

THE COMMONWEAL OF LUCCA.  

The Contents.  
1THe beginning of the name of the town of Lucca. 2. The situation, circuit, and confines. 3. A cross of gold of great value in the Church of S. Croix, engaged by the Pis●nss to them of Lucca. 4. The town of Lucca governed by the Goths, by the Emperors of Constantinople, and by many other Lords. 5. The soil very fruitful, and in a good a●re. 6. Inhabitants of Lucca quick witted, courteous by nature, loving liberty, and their ●●●g●age sweet and pure. 7. Their riches consisting in silver and traffic in silk. 8. The commonweal of Lucca weak, and of small resistance. 9 Of the Council of L●cca, consisting of three sorts of persons: of the Gonfalonier, the chief of the common weal, and of his election by the Assorters. Of the Commander of the signory, and of his authority. 10. Of the three Secretary's, and of their power and jurisdiction. 11. Of the co●●cel of the Colloque, consisting of 18. citizens. 12. Of 6men appointed to oversee the treasure. 13. Of the Rota consisting of three Doctors strangers. 14. Of the court of merchants composed of nine men, and the office called the Abundance. 15.. Of the commissaries appointed over men of war 16. Of the councils of the Descoles', and what their charge is 17. Of the office of lodging, composed of eight persons, who have the care of strangers. 18.. Of the guard of the palace.   

LVcca is a very good city, situated in Tuscanie, so called of Lucumon king of the Tuscans. Strabo writes, that the city of Lucca is near unto the mountains of Luna, and at this day the country is called Lunagiana. But to speak of our times, I say that Lucca hath about three miles in circuit: it stands in a plain not far from certain little hills, upon the river of Seruie: it is environed with good walls, which some say were built by Desiderius king of the Lombard's. They have goodly buildings, and the citizens are noble, wise, and discreet: who with their wit have long maintained themselves in liberty, notwithstanding that they have been often troubled by their neighbours. Towards the North, it confines wi●h Carfagnana, a good valley, and full of warlike people, and apt to arms. Of all the other three parts, it is environed by the great duke of Tuscanie.  
The chief Church is called S. Croix, in which Church there is a cross of gold, which the Pisans did engage to them of Lucca, upon condition to redeem it, which they have not yet done. Some hold that it is worth fifteen thousand crowns.  
This city hath had divers masters; it was held by the Goths, and taken from them by N●●fe●eses, lieutenant to the Emperor justini●n, and so continued under the Emperors of Constantinople: whose power declining, Boniface become master thereof, who had married Beatrix, daughter to the emperor Henry, of whom came Matilda, who was afterwards wife to Godfrey, after whose death she remained heir of a great Estate, and especially of this city. In the time of Pope Honorius the fourth, the citizens recovered their 〈◊〉 of the Emperor Rodolphus for one thousand two hundred florins. After some 〈◊〉 Vguccione of Fagiola become master of the city, who was afterwards expelled by 〈◊〉 people, with Neri his grandchild: and after him Castruccio Castracani (who had been imprisoned by him) took upon him the government: and so in an instant he was expelled, and the other which was a prisoner, was made Lord This man was much beloved ●n ●his worth by Galleazze Viscont, and by Azon his son, lord of Milan. He was an ●●●mie to the florentines whilst he lived: and having defeated their army, he besieged ●●●rence in such sort, as if sickness and death had not prevented him, without doubt he 〈◊〉 subdued it: He had also seized upon Pisa and Pistoya. He left two sons, who were ●●pelled out of Lucca by Lewis of Bavaria. Soon after, Lucca was sold by a Germane ●●rison, which Lewis had left there to Gerrard Spinola a Genevois, and afterwards recommended to Peter Rosso, by john king of Bohemia, and consigned by Rosso to Mastin de la 〈◊〉 lord of Verona: who sold it to the florentines, which held it nine months. In the 〈◊〉 time, the Pisans pretending to have a greater right than the florentines, by the concession made unto them, by the emperor Henry, besieged it, but in the end they made an accord. Afterwards, the emperor Charles the fourth, passing into Italy, and coming to Lucca, at his departure he left a French Cardinal for his Vicar, or Vicege●●●●●ho after his departure sold the Luccois their liberty for five and twenty thousand 〈◊〉 of gold. Having thus obtained their liberty, they presently ruined the Castle 〈◊〉 Castruccio.  
〈◊〉 Luccois preserved the liberty which they had gotten, until the year 1400, when 〈◊〉 Guinisi, one of their citizens, made himself Lord thereof, and did govern it 〈…〉 with great felicity. Having gathered together a great treasure of gold, silver, 〈◊〉 precious stones, and having many goodly sons, and finding him●elfe in great glo●●●, and in the height of fortune, and being in great reputation with all the princes of ●●lie, seeming not only to him●elfe, but to all others, to be happy in this life, and thinking his Estate to be glorious, firm, & stable, behold fortune presently turns her wheel, a●d makes him a miserable spectacle and a memorable example to all ●ens: For he was tak●● with his five sons, by the people (for that he favoured the florentines, their 〈◊〉 and sent to Philip Viscont duke of Milan, who put them into a dark and obscure 〈◊〉 where they ended their days miserably, in the year of Christ 1430, and so in an 〈◊〉 he lost the honour, riches, signory, and glory which he had gotten in so many years, with his sons and life. The Guinisi being expelled, the city f●ll again into ●ombustionss: but in the end, they recovered and settled their liberty, ●he which they eni●●●ith great peace and quietness unto this day. This city hath brought forth many worthy and famous men, and it was the first of all the towns of Tuscanie, whi●h received the Christian faith.  

¶ The Quality.  
THe territory of Lucca is of small extent, but the soil is good, and yields much unto the owners. The air is good and wholesome, and not much subject to diseases.   

¶ The Manners.  
THe men are naturally courteous, modest, and very bountiful, they proceed with great freedom in their affairs, ●hey are subtle witted, and prospero well in all arts wherein ●hey employ themselves. They love their liberty exceedingly, wherefore some hold, 〈◊〉 they would employ all their Estate to preserve it. All the citizens are in a manner 〈◊〉 to merchandise. The Italians say, that the Luccois in matter of learning and knowledge, do wonderfully affect the study of divinity; that they are kind in the reception of their guests, and faithful unto them; that they are mild in wrongs received, and apt to pardon; and that in their traffic they have their word and faith in great recommendation: and moreover, that their women are most commonly chaste. The Luccois language is held in Tuscanie to be pleasant and pure, for that it hath not those harsh accents, which are in a manner common to all the towns of this province.   

¶ The Riches.  
THere are rich families, for that the men of this town use great traffic, and have correspondency throughout all the Estates of Christendom, and elsewhere, but their chief traffic is in silk, for the which they have great reputation among all Christians, and in the time of Castruccio Castracani, who made himself Lord of the town, many families did abandon it, for that they would not obey a tyrant: They that retired themselves carried with them the art of silk, with much other wealth, into divers parts of Italy, and and they also carried to Florence the art of making of cloth of gold, wherein they excel. This Common weal is not rich, having but a small jurisdiction, but there are many private men exceeding rich, and all their wealth consists in ready money.   

¶ The Forces.  
THe city of Lucca is strong by situation, environed with good walls, and well furnished with artillery and munition, containing four and twenty thousand persons within the circuit thereof; but notwithstanding all this, or that the Goths, who were within it, had endured a six months siege, which was laid before it by N●rfes' General to the Emperor justinian, yet it is thought that it were not able to make any great resistance against the great duke of Tuscanie, if he would undertake to make himself master thereof, unless they were assisted by some other. But they hold, that he draws more profit and commodity, leaving it thus free, than if it were subject unto him.   

¶ The Government.  
THe ground and foundation of this Commonwealth, as of all others, is the council, for thereon doth depend, and from it doth proceed all other magistrates which are members of this body. This Council doth manage all the affairs of State and to be short, it is the master of this Commonweal. It is composed of three sorts of persons; for there are some of the Council which are ordinary, and they remain a year in their charges, some others are limited at pleasure, and are not ordinary, and some others are subrogated in the place of such as die, and they continued a just year in their charges. Finally, the number of this Council is of one hundred and sixty citizens, and most commonly they are one hundred and twenty.  
The city of Lucca is divided into three parts, which they call Tiercieroes; the one is of S. Saviour, the other of S. Paulin, and the other of S. Martin. The Council doth choose the signory out of the said three parts, or Tiercieroes, that is to say, they created three men for every third part of Tiercie●o●, which in all make nine: besides the which, they choose a Gonfalonier, who is the chief of the Commonwealth, and he is chosen one year out of the Tiercieroes of S. Saviour, the second out of that of S. Paulin, and the third out of S. Martin, and so they change successively according to the said order. These ten are chosen every third year, and all, except the Gonfalonier, are called Ancients. The election is made after this manner: they created three men, called Assortitori, one out of every third: These men have charge to number the suffrages and voices of such as are chosen, and after that the Council hath chosen a certain number of ●ens, they choose the Gonfalonier, and do always name such a one, as they hold most cap●ple. When the said election is made, the assortitori remain in a place apart, and r●ckon thei● suffrages until they come unto a certain number, which is one hundred and eighty: and moreover they do not publish them that are subrogated, nor the Suffrages in council, but it is only known to the Assortitori. And to the end there may be no deceit in 〈◊〉 they have for assistants two principal religious men, one of the order of S. Domineered ●●d another of S. Franci●: these Assortitori have authority to assign what time the 〈◊〉 shall serve, as to appoint one for one month, and another for another month: 〈◊〉 being done by them, who are the chief men of Lucca, they keep it secret, and 〈◊〉 oath not to reveal any thing.  
〈◊〉 that the Assortitori be chosen, they created the signory, whose charge is to hear matters of justice, and to take notice of petitions, and pardons which are demanded. They which are of this body remain continually in the palace, and may not departed, upon 〈◊〉 of death: the State defraies them. Out of the whole body of the abovenamed 〈◊〉 they choose one, who hath the title of Commander, and the other nine have it by 〈◊〉 alternatively: this charge continues three days only, during the which he hath 〈◊〉 and authority to command all the rest, yea the Gonfallonier himself▪ It is true 〈◊〉 all petitions directed unto the signory, are presented unto the Commander, and 〈◊〉 ●ay if he please, present them unto the signors; yet he cannot dispatch any affairs 〈…〉 the authority of the signory. If the commander propounds his request 〈◊〉 signory, and that it be allowed by two thirds, the Gonfallonier delivers it 〈◊〉 unto the council. The authority of the signory extends to strangers, but not 〈…〉: and it propounds every thing, but cannot conclude any thing.  
〈◊〉 office of Secretaries, which are three in number, are very important. These have 〈◊〉 authority in matters which concern offences done unto the majesty of the 〈…〉, and in this regard they are absolute, and above the Gonfallonier. But before 〈◊〉 any thing, they must make their reasons known unto the great council: and 〈◊〉 it happeneth that the case so requiring, they put in execution and give their 〈◊〉 unto the council, after the thing is done, either for that they could not suddenly 〈◊〉 the whole counsel, or for that the matter required a speedy execution.  
Council of the Colloque is composed of eighteen citizens, the which are 〈◊〉 the council. These men in case the signors be doubtful in any matter, and will ●●easily resolve, they assemble, and consult of that which is to be propounded unto the ●●●cell, and having made their discourses among themselves, they conclude with the ●●●●●urie, if it shall be propounded unto the counsel or not.  
The six men have charge of the expenses, and public revenues, and dispose of all 〈◊〉 which concern the treasure, and they are as it were governors of the revenues. 〈◊〉 have a Chamberlain, who doth put their resolutions in execution, and all these 〈◊〉 by the great council.  
The Rota, which is ordinary in many towns of Italy, consists of three doctor's stran●●●, which must come fiftiemiles from Lucca: they change them alternatively, and at 〈◊〉 of every six months, one of them is made Podestate, the second is judge for crystal causes, and the third for civil; and he that is Podestate hath first been judge cri●●●all, and the Pod●state when he leaves his place, enters into that of judge criminal; 〈…〉 every one of them, is Podestate, judge criminal, and judge civil, in his turn. If 〈◊〉 Podestate hath by chance a citizen in his hands, he doth only frame his process, and 〈◊〉 ●owne his opinion touching that which the offender hath deserved, and then they 〈◊〉 of force go unto the council, which doth allow, or disallow, or doth moderate the 〈◊〉 or sentence of the Podestate, who in this case enters into the council. As for 〈…〉, the Podestate may execute his sentence absolutely without any formality. And 〈◊〉, these three do also treat of all civil causes.  
〈◊〉 court of merchants is composed of nine men, whereof they choose three out of every Tierciero or third. They have for judge, a doctor that is a stranger, who is their Assess, or Assistant: they judge of all matters which concern merchandise and traffic, 〈…〉 great authority in those causes.  
〈◊〉 have also another office which they call of the Abundance, it consists of nine 〈◊〉 ●hich are chosen like unto the rest, three out of every third. These men have charge to see that the city may be well furnished with corn, and they hear all matters wh●ch concern that business.  
They that have the office of munition, have charge to see that there be provision of corn, for three whole years. They do often visit the magazines and storehouses where they keep their munition, and they refresh it, and renew it, as it is spent.  
And for that within the jurisdiction of Lucca, they have appointed certain companies of men, fit to carry arms in any necessity of war, there are six commissioners which have authority over the said troops; and all matters which shall happen touching that regard, pass through their hands, and they give sentence.  
There are also three Precedents which have charge of the health of the said city. They have a care that the victuals be good and sweet, that the streets be made clean, and the filth carried away, and that the inhabitants use all care and diligence to preserve the town from the plague, and from all other such like accidents which may come unto it; and for that in a manner in all towns, there are many persons who living idly and wickedly seek their living by all lewd and vicious means, and do most commonly practise all things contrary to the good rules of a politic and civil life: for this cause the Luccois have a council which they call of Discoles', that is to say, of men of a lewd life, vagabonds of bad example and wicked in their action. This council assembles one day in the holy week, where it is lawful for all them that enter into the said council to put into a box (which is prepared for that effect) little tickets, wherein they writ that disordered and lewd fellow which they know, or else they writ not any thing in these tickets; and if it chance one name be found in many of them, he is then brought in question for a Discole, to the great council, where if two third parts give their suffrages against him, he is banished: and the sentence is, that he shall remain three year fifty miles off from the town and jurisdiction: if he do not obey during the said three years, but returns contrary to his banishment, he looseth his life. As soon as they have given their voices against this vagabond, before that the council breaks up, they proclaim him for a Discole by the found of a trumpet, at the four corners of the market place: and he that is thus banished, must of force be go the same night. The three years being expired, and this banished man being returned into the city, if he do not amend, his banishment is renewed with the like order. And in truth this hath some resemblance unto the Ostracism which the Athenians used; but there is this difference, that at Athens they did banish for ten years, them only whose greatness and power was suspected unto the people.  
There is also the office of Lodging, consisting of eight persons, whose charge is to observe the behaviour of strangers that come into the town, and to take knowledge of their business; and the hosts are bound to give in writing, unto these officers, ●he names of such as come unto Lucca and lodge in their houses, if they be not of the city. If by chance any man doth lie, telling one thing for another, they give him the strappado to draw out the truth: and if he knows any one within the town, and names him to these officers, they inquire carefully of him whom they suspect, and if they found him an honest man they let him go.  
The signory doth make choice of one hundred soldiers which be strangers borne at the lest fifty miles from Lucca, for the guard of the palace. Out of this hundred they draw captains, and corronells. They are charged upon pain of death, not to come near the walls when it is night, neither alone nor accompanied, but to remain at their guard. As for the walls they are guarded by the artisens' and townsmen, who have wife and children, and these have three crowns a month pay. There are townsmen set to guard the gates, and every port hath two citizens for commissaries, whereof the one remains from the opening of the gate in the morning until noon and then departs, and the other succeeds him, who stays till the gate be shut.      

The Commonweal of Genova.  

THE COMMONWEAL OF GENOVA.  

The Contents.  
1DEscription and division of Liguria, and of the country of Genova; with the chief towns thereof. 2. Situation of the city of Genova, and the circuit; with their power at Sea. 3. The change of many Lords, governed by Earls, then by Dukes. 4. Of the town of Savona. 5. Of the Island of Corsica, the bigness, circuit, and 〈◊〉: the parts, with the towns and castles. 6. Liguria and the country of Genova, hilly, 〈◊〉 of Precipices, abounding in Olive Lemon and Orange Trees. 7. The Island of Corsica 〈◊〉 in Honey, Wax, Rossen, Oil, Figs, Box, Alum, Crystal, and Coral. 8. Of the 〈◊〉 ●f Petra Pola, whose waters are hot, sulphury, and physical. 9 Of the wild Hens of the 〈◊〉 Gallinaria. 10. Ligurians in old time great pirates, and the brutish behaviour of them 〈…〉 The Genevois and Ligurians at this day quick witted and subtle, proud, factious, and 〈◊〉 traffic. 11. The inhabitants of Corsica savage, and full of revenge. 12. The revenues 〈…〉 of Genova, and wherein it consists. 13. What places of strength belong to the 〈…〉 ●enova, and the galleys which they entertain at Sea. 14. The form of their governe●●●●●f the Council of four hundred, and of the Petty Council of one hundred gentlemen. Of the election of the Duke, the chief of the State, his ornaments and authority. 16. Of the 〈◊〉 Governors, and of their office. 17. Of the Podestate for strangers, and his jurisdiction. 〈◊〉 the sovereign Sindi●ss, and their power. 19 Of the Rota, whereas they treat of civil 〈◊〉 20. Of the authority and office of Consuls. 21. Of the beginning of the office of S. 〈◊〉, and the great privileges. 22. Of the Protectors of the office of S. George: and the 〈…〉 them. 23 Of the office of four and forty, and the cause of their creation. 24. Of the ●●chbishopricke of Genova, and the Bishops that are his Suffragans.   

LIguria lies betwixt the rivers of Var and Magra, and hath upon the West part for bounds the Alpes, which divide Provence from Italy; upon the East Tuscanie; upon the South the Ligustick Sea, which extends about one hundred and sixty miles; and upon the North the Appennin Hills, and a great part of Lombardie of this side the river of Po. It is properly called Liguria, beyond Po, to distinguish it from Liguria, on this side Po, which is Montferrat. At 〈◊〉, they call it the river or coast of Genova, of the name of the first town of Ligu●●●. Th● river, coast, or country of Genova it is divided into East and West, having in the 〈◊〉 of it Genova for the chief and Metropolitan city. The East part, is that which 〈◊〉 from Port de Luna unto Genova, and the Western part, is that which doth 〈◊〉 from Genova unto Monaco. The places of most importance of this country, 〈◊〉 ●hich are to be regarded, besides Nizzes, and Villefranche (which belongs to the 〈◊〉 of Savoy, and Monaco to the king of Spain, the which he bought of late years 〈◊〉 ●he lord which enjoyed it, as some say, for one hundred thousand crowns) there is 〈…〉 a good town, Arbengue, Cure, Final, a famous marquisat, so called of the 〈…〉 of the air, Nola with a reasonable good port, and Savona: and near unto 〈…〉 Appenin Hills begin to rise, and extending themselves along the Sea unto the town of Bobbia gins to bend towards the North, and dividing Italy through the midst, it goes to the tow●e of Ascoliin Povillia. There it divides itself into two 〈◊〉 or branches, the one end● with the mountain of S. Ange, in old time called Gargane; and the other makes two branches, near unto Venose, whereof the one runs into the land of Bari, and the other into the country of Calabri●. But returning unto the Seacoast we found Genova, the chief town of Liguria, the which commands over most part of this country, as also of the Island of Gallinaria, which is near unto it, with the Island of Corsica.  
Genova is a very ancient town, built (as some say) by Giano Genio Prisco king of Italy, and from him took the name: others writ by janus the son of Saturn, and by others, the which I leave as uncertain. It was subject to the Romans, and was rui●ed by Mago the son of Hannibal the Carthaginian, and repaired again by Lucretius Surius, by commandment of the Senat. It was in good esteem two hundred and ninety years before the coming of Christ, as doth appear by a Table of Brass, which was found of late in the valley of Pozzenere, and is set in S. Laurence Church, where it is written in ancient letters, That under the Consulship of Lucius Cecilius, and of Quintus Manutius, the Senate of Rome sent judges to decide the suit, which was depending betwixt the Victures and the Genevois, by reason of the neighbour valleys: and for that the execution of the sentence, and the freeing of prisoners which were detained, should be made at Genova; it may be conceived that in those days it was in some estimation.  
This noble city of Genova, stands upon the shore of the Ligusticke Sea, having aspatious and goodly port, which being opposite to Africa looks towards the South, as the town doth also, having on the back of it the North. Part of it stands upon the declining of a hill, and part in a plain, and betwixt two valleys, being six miles in circuit. There are a great number of inhabitants and stately Palaces, especially along the Sea shore, so as there can be nothing more pleasant and beautiful to behold: and this is the reason why they call it Genova the proud. Round about this city there are goodly gardens and pleasant villages. In some places there are palaces and houses better built and set forth than in Genova itself, as at Albano, Bisagni, Misagno, Marasi, Maltade, Balchena, Castelletto, Carbonaro, Minuta, Montegallo, with an infinite number of others.  
This town hath been always in reputation, and held for one of the keys of Italy, by reason of the situation. It hath in former times been very powerful at sea, so as her citizens have won famous victories, and have extended the bounds of their dominions unto the river of Don or Tanais: for they conquered the town of Theodosia, which they now call Caffa, in the Taurique Chersonese; and moreover they made subject to their power, the Islands of Cypress, Lesbos, and Chio, with the town of Pera in Thrace. They were in the beginning subject to the Romans (as I have said) until the year of grace 600, or as some writ 660, whenas Rotares king of the Lombard's took it, and spoilt it: afterwards, it was recovered by Charlemaigne, who had taken Desideriu● king of the Lombard's at Pavia, and then they were subject to Pepin son to Charlema●gne, who was made king of Italy, and to his descendants, by whom they were governed for the space of one hundred years, appointing governors, whom they called Earls. And whenas the Sarrazins entered into the Island of Corsica and took possession thereof, Ademar Governor, or Earl of Genova, armed forth a fleet of galleys and other warlike vessels, and went to secure them of this Island; who meeting with the Sarrazins fleet at Sea, encountered it valiantly, and defeated it, though he himself was slain. Yet notwithstanding the Genevois seized upon the Island, and carried away thirteen of the enemy's ships to Genova: since which time Corsica hath been always subject to this Estate. Matters succeeded well until the year 935, which was a very unfortunate year for this city, for that (Bereng●rius the third usurping the name of the Roman Empire, and Stephen the seventh, being Pope of Rome) the Sarrazins being confederate with the Carthagenians, and coming into Italy, they took and sacked Genova, where having slain many cruelly, in the end they carried away all the young children they could found, and past into Africa, leaving the city wholly abandoned and without inhabitants. But 〈◊〉 Andrew Dandolo who was then duke of Venice writes) within a short time, all the said ●●i●drens were brought back again: since which time it hath increased much, as well ●● people as in goodly buildings, and in po●er at Sea, where they commanded for a 〈…〉, keeping pi●atss from thieving at their pleasure. After Charlemaigne and his 〈◊〉, they endured much by the tyranny of their own citizens, and were sometimes 〈◊〉 to receive strangers to be their Lords, and by their civil dissensions they lost all 〈…〉 which they had at sea. This city hath been diversly governed, first by four 〈◊〉 created by the people, for one year, and then by six: and in the year 130 they 〈…〉 three Consuls, and fourteen men for civil affairs. In the year 1142, the 〈◊〉 made choice of ten Consuls to govern the common weal for a year. 〈◊〉 they created a Praetor, who with the Consuls should have a care of the city, the 〈◊〉 was in the time of Frederic B●rbarossa, who commanded them to make this choice, 〈◊〉 the other cities of Italy. In the year 1257, there was a captain of the people cho●●●●nd made a companion to the Praetor, the which continued six years; after which 〈◊〉 ●ave all the authority unto the Praetor. Thus they continued with divers changes, 〈◊〉 ●he year 1318, whenas the people gave themselves to Pope john the two and 〈◊〉 ●nd to Robert king of Naples, by whom they were governed unto the year 1335, 〈…〉 which time (the hatred and factions grown betwixt the citizens) the families of 〈…〉, and Dorij, were expelled the city: and so their civil discords increasing, the 〈◊〉 thought it fit to created a new magistrate, who might be perpetual, to see by this 〈◊〉 if they might pacify the combustions of the city, an● preserve it: whereupon 〈◊〉 ●ade choice of Simon Bocca Negra, and named him duke, in the year 1339, which 〈◊〉 continued with many mutinies and alterations of the subjects, until that 〈…〉 of the Guelphs and Gibellins began, so as the Guelphs were forced to 〈…〉 aid from Charles the seventh the French king, who sent a French governor unto 〈…〉 he behaving himself insolently thirteen years, and going to Milan, thinking 〈…〉 at his return to Genova, he was shut out of the gates and lost his government 〈…〉 1403. After which the citizens d●d choose john Maria Viseon●a duke of Milan, 〈…〉 Protector, who sent Theodor Paleologo marquis of Mon●ferrat, to be his Lieutenant, who governed the city four years: but john Maria being slain, the citizens 〈◊〉 duke: within six years after they called Philip Maria Anglo duke of Milan, to be 〈◊〉 Protector, under whose protection they lived fifteen years, with great 〈…〉 in the end the citizens disdaining that he had so honourably received Alphonso 〈…〉 Arragon and Naples, with the noblemen and barons their prisoners, and 〈…〉 them at liberty without their privity, they gathered together, & created eight 〈◊〉 of the liberty: who within a while after being dismissed, they made a duke, 〈…〉 1436. In the year 1450, Peter of Campo Fregoso being duke, and ●is 〈◊〉 unpleasing to the citizens, they forced him to fly, by the favour of Charl●●●he ●he 〈◊〉 king, under whose protection the city remained, until the year 1461, whenas 〈…〉 having expelled the French, made choice of a new duke: but the French king 〈◊〉 incensed, sent an army to Genova, which forced them to return under his 〈◊〉 Yet afterwards they took arms against the French, seeking to take Castelletto, 〈◊〉 ●he French had fortified for king Charles, but finding themselves too weak, they 〈…〉 aid from Francis Sforce duke of Milan, who sent them good succours, by which 〈◊〉 expelled the French. Whereupon the Genevois to show themselves thankful to 〈◊〉 sent four and twenty Ambassadors to Milan, to present him the sceptre, 〈◊〉 ●eyess, and seal of the city, and cho● him for their Lord in the year 1464, the 〈…〉 and his successors enjoyed fourteen years. Then the citizens taking arms 〈…〉 john Galeazzo, they recovered Castellette, and expelled the garrison, creating a 〈…〉 But in the year 1488, the citizens scent an Embassage to Milan to the said duke 〈…〉, and did present unto him the standard of S. George, the keys of the city, 〈…〉 seal, swearing obedience & fealty unto him: after whi●h the duke created john 〈◊〉 Adorno governor of Genova: and so the Genevois remained subject to the 〈◊〉 G●leazzo, and to Lodovi● Sforce eleven years, until the coming of Lewis the twelfth, the French king, who expelled Lodovic Sforce out of the duchy of Milan, in the year 1499: and then the Genevois gave themselves to the French king, whom they obeyed eight years. In the year 1507, the people taking arms, and expelling the nobility, created a duke, called Paulo de Novi, a dier of cloth, an ancient, and an honest man, who although he refused much to accept of this office, yet they forced him to undergo it, and so they rebelled from the French king; to whom all the nobility went to crave aid, that they might return into their country.  
The French king came to Genova with a great army, and forced the people to obedience, restoring the gentlemen, and cutting off the head of P●ulo their duke: and to the end he might keep Genova under obedience, he caused a fort to be built upon the port, calling it Lady Briglia, saying, that he would so bridle that untamed horse, as hereafter he should not kick against his rider; yet within few years after, it was ruined by the citizens. In the year 1512, the French being expelled Italy, by the means of Pope julio the second, and the Venetians; the Genevois recovering their liberty, created john Fregosa duke of Genova, yet afterwards Lewis the French king sending an army into Italy, it returned under his obedience, but continued not long, the French being defeated at Novara. In the year 1513, Octavio Fregosa was made duke of Genova, with the consent of the people. At the coming of Francis the French king in the year 1515, he gave over his office, and made an accord with king Francis, and remained governor of the city, in the king's name, and so continued seven years, until the year 1522, whenas the French being expelled Italy, Prospero Colonna, General of the league made betwixt Pope Leo the tenth, the Emperor Charles the fift, and the Florentines, came and took Genova with the governor Octavio Fregosa, giving the town in sack unto the soldiers for three days. After all this, in the year 1527, Francis the French king being in league with Pope Clement the seventh, the Venetians, Florentines, and others, to expel the Emperor's forces out of Italy, the king sending Monsieur de Lantrecht with forty thousand men by land, and Andrew Doria with a fleet by sea, they besieged Genova, & forced it to submit itself under the French kings obedience, who presently sent Theodor Triaulze to be governor. The next year the citizens scent an honourable Embassage to the king, entreating him that he would be pleased, that the city might enjoy her ancient liberty, the which being granted, they made choice of eight citizens, with a duke to govern the city, since which time they have enjoyed their liberty. And thus I have briefly related unto you, the several and tumultuous governments of this city.  
Savone is also an ancient town in Liguria, the which (according unto some) was i● old time called Sabatia or Sabate. It is one thousand five hundred paces in circuit, and hath stately buildings. It hath been under the power of divers lords, as the Genevois, Visconts, and the Sforces dukes of Milan, and also of the French, and of themselves; but now they obey the Genevois. There are come three Popes out of this town, that is, Gregory the seventh, julio the second, and Sixtus the fourth.  
Passing the river which they call of the East, behind it lies Capo de Monte, Porto Fino, and Ripalle with his gulf, and beyond it Chivari, Sestri, and Levanto, which are reasonable good places. Next there is a little gulf, which is nothing but a port, with the places of Portovenere and Spetie, and beyond it Lerice. They do also hold Heresane, which is a strong place frontiring upon the florentines: and of this place depends the city of Vingtimille and Piene, with many villages, castles, and Boroughs. Corsica is the lest of three Islands which join upon Italy, whereof the two others are Sicily and Sardinia. The Greeks did call it Cymos, or Cyrne, of a s●nne of Hercules, and some have held, it was that which ovid calleth Teraphne. It hath for bound● upon the West and North the Ligusticke Sea, upon the East the Tyrrhene and Ionian Seas, and upon the South the strait of Sea which is betwixt it and Sardina: For it hath upon the North the Cape of Corpse, and looks towards Portovenere, from the which it is sixty miles, and not one hundred and twenty, as some have written, it is from Sardinia sixty stades (as Strabo writes) which make seven miles and a half: others say, a german league, which may be go in an hour. Leander sets ten Italian miles, and others nineteen the which cannot be. But Mercator, who hath made a more exact computation than any other, sets but six miles. Strabo makes this Island to be one hundred and sixty miles long, but without doubt, it is but 120. Pliny hath made it sixty miles broad; and Strabo seventy, the which is true. The circuit (according unto Pliny) is three hundred twenty two miles, and according unto some, three hundred and five, and to others three hundred and ninety, but the truth is, it is just three hundred twenty and five miles. It is in the fift climate, and doth hold the twelfth and thirteenth parallels, and the longest day in Summer is scarce fifteen hours.  
This Island was first held by the Tyrrheniens or Tuscains, then by the Carthagenians from whom it was taken by the Romans, who enjoyed it until they were expelled by the Sa●●azinss; and they were dispossessed by the Genevois, and these by the Pisans, and in the end they were under the Pope's obedience: but last of all, they returned under the subjection of the Genevois, whom they now obey.  
This Island is divided at this day into four parts, that is to say, the exterior part, and the inward part, the country that is on this side the mountains, and that which lies beyond the mountains. That part which looks to the Sun rising, is called the interior part, and that which is opposite, the exterior. That part which is nearest unto Italy, is called of this side the mountains; and that which looks towards Sardinia beyond the mountains. Yet the inhabitants call one another on this side, or beyond the mountains, according to their dwellings.  
Pliny saith, That there were three and thirty towns in this Island, the which hath also been ●oted by Martian Capella.. But Strabo writes, That they were no towns, but castles, and doth number only four towns in his time, amongst the which there were two colonies; the one called Mariana, of Marius; and the other Aueria, sent by Scylla. But at this day, there is in a manner but one town, called La dirty, near unto the Sea, the which is but a small one: upon the farthest part of Corsica, which looks towards Sardinia, there is a castle called Boniface, sometimes named the port of Siracusa, where there is a good haven. Some years since, the Gen●uois sent a colony of their own nation to inhabit there, who built a little town near unto Boniface, upon a port of the sea, which they call Portovecchio, that is to say, the old Port, about half a days journey from Boniface. As for Aleria it is three Germane leagues or thereabouts from dirty: but it is ruined at this day, and is inhabited only by shepherds. The bishopric hath been transported to dirty: as for Ajazze, notwithstanding that the Corsicans do make some esteem of it, yet it is no great matter. This Island having been held for a time by the French, was restored again to the Genevois by the peace made in the year 1559, betwixt the French king of Spain.  

¶ The Quality.  
THe country of Liguria is for the most part rough and hilly, whereas there is nothing in a manner to be seen, but rocks and precipices, which leave very straight and narrow passages near unto the sea, and as Strabo saith, it was in old time very bar●en, and had nothing worth the relating, but that within (where there is nothing in a manner but hills, forests, and precip●ceses) there were very huge trees, as there are at this day, which they employed to make shipping, with the which they did rob and spoil to the straight of Gibraltar. But now the land is better manured, yielding great store of very good wine, for in the country which is near unto the town of Tabia, they make wine, which yields nothing to the malmsie of Candie, the which they call wine of Apian; there is also in Liguria great store of oil, so as some years it yields 20000 barrels. Near unto the town of S. Remie there is great store of Citrone trees, Oranges, Palms, Lemons, & other fruit trees. All that is near Andoria is full of vines. Finally, the whole country of Liguria is very pleasant, by reason of the Citrons, Olives, Oranges, & other trees, which they have planted. But all the grace and beauty of the river of Genova is gathered together, and compact in a little place near unto the town, which they call Nerui: for this place hath the best and the most temperate air that can be desired, such variety of flowers, as it is impossible to see any thing that is more delightful, and such diversity of first-fruits, as it seems an earthly paradise, so as this place knows no other season but the Spring and the Autumn, which do never abandon it. The only want of this country, is corn and flesh, yet that little which they have is exceeding good.  
As for Corsica, it is at this day full of Forests, even in the heart of the country, so as it is not very fit for tillage, and bears little wheat, or any other grain, but in some places whereas the country is bore, and fattened with certain rivers and waters: yet the soil doth yield very good first-fruits, with excellent and delicate wines. This Island abounds in honey, wax, rossen, and in like manner oil and figs. There grows great store of box, as Pliny and Diodorus writ, and there are also many venomous trees, from which if the bees suck any thing, they make their honey very bitter. It breeds strong horses, and full of courage, and very great hounds, as also a kind of Ram, which Pliny calls Musmo, and the inhabitants Muffolt, the which hath hair like a goat, in stead of wool. They do also found Alum, and mines of iron in the county of Niobe. There are Salt-pits in like manner, which they commonly call Reya, near unto the port of S. Florent. And near unto Niobe, there are deep valleys, the which are continually covered with snow, under the which they say, there is much Crystal. They found Coral in the Sea betwixt Corsica and Sardinia, near unto S. Boniface.  
There are also hot sulphury waters, which they commonly call the baths of Pietra Pola, the which are good for scabs, and for sinews that be shrunk, and in other places there are many waters both hot and cold, medicinable for divers diseases. The three chief rivers are Galum, Liamon, and Tavignan, whose currents fall directly into the Sea.  
In the Island of Gallinaria, there are many hens, the which are not much unlike ours, yet they are of a certain savage kind, for that they never lay their eggs, nor hatch their chickens in houses, but only in woods.   

¶ The Manners of the Ancient.  
THe inhabitants of Liguria, were in old time held to be great Pirates at Sea, by which means they went and sought for all things which they needed: and moreover, they were wont to exchange the timber of their great trees, for oil, wine, and other necessaries, for most part of the time they lived of milk and sheeps flesh, and of a drink made with water and barley. Some Authors have held, that this nation was descended from certain Grecians; at the lest, it is the opinion of Strabo: but Thucydides thinks, that they are come from the Sicilians. Flores makes mention of the Ligurians, who hide themselves in holes and caves of the mountains, as the Ossubes, Deciat and Buriat, say the like. This country hath in old time bred many great Captains.  
As for the Corsicans, Strabo saith, That whenas the Roman Captains made any roads into this Island, bringing great numbers of slaves to Rome, they did admire these Barbarians, who were altogether savage, and were more like beasts than men: for either they did seek and hunt after death by all possible means, or else they tired their masters with their impatience and little wit, who were grieved to have so employed their money, although they cost very little.   

¶ The Manners at this day.  
AT this day, the Genevois and Ligurians have shaken off all their brutishness, whereunto they were given, and are grown very industrious, quick witted, and subtle, the which they show in their affairs, and in the great traffic which they use, whereas they manage their business so well, as the greatest part of them are rich. They oppose themselves willingly to great dangers, for gain, and make greater ships than any other that go to sea. They have good knowledge to manage the affairs of their Commonweal exceeding well, and yet they are haughty and very factious, still desiring innovasions: so as one coming to tell king Francis, that the Genevois would give themselves unto him, he answered suddenly, that he would none of them, and that he gave them unto all the devils, their resolutios were so inconstant. They are for the most part tall, & of a pleasing aspect. They live in their private houses miserably; but when there is question or any charge of show, they are sumptuous, or rather excessive. They have many good soldiers, and good captains among them, as we may observe in the house of Doria, & in the marquis Sp●●●l●, one of the most confident, vigilant, and most advised commanders of our time. They are also valiant at Sea, and understand traffic exceeding well.  
As for the Corsicanes, they are nothing so civil nor nea● as the Italians; they are wonderful cruel, and retain that still which Caesar did writ of them in that regard: but they are good soldiers, and very courageous; and whenas this nation should have no other great captain but the Marshal of Ornano (as in effect it is all the honour of this nation) yet shall it be for ever glorious in this consideration. Finally, they are so full of revenge, as the Italians have a common proverb which saith, That they must never trust a Corsicane, neither alive nor dead, for that as soon as any one is slain, presently all his kinsmen meet to kill him, if it be possible, that slew him: and notwithstanding that they make some accord, yet there is no great trust in it, for that he may be surprised when he dreams lest of it; so as the best course is to look well to himself, and not to make any strict league of amity with reconciled enemies. When the Corsicanes come into a strange country, they are careful ●o help one another, and they say that they are of good houses, and of quality, & yet for the most part when they come out of their Island they are rude, and very ill appareled, notwithstanding they seek to furnish themselves as well as may be, before they show themselves. Some are much bettered, conversing with other nations, as in effect, I have seen some very civil; but the number of them is very small. There are few of them that affect learning, or that have been bred up unto it, yet they admire it in others. But before I make an end of this part, I think it fit to set down what they commonly say in Italy of the Genevois: they say, that they are ignorant in matters of council, and that they entreat their guests modestly, but they take no great delight to entertain them: that they live of lettices: that they are very neat in their apparel: and as touching the trade of merchandise, they say, that they are wonderful patient, and that they have always been pirates, base, miserable, envious, and greedy: and as for the women of Genova, they hold them to be very lascivious.   

¶ The Riches.  
THey carry great store of citrons, oranges, lemons, and oil, from the river or country of Genova into all the parts of Italy and other provinces, which yield great profit to the Genevois. The Corsicanes carry wine to Rome, where it is much esteemed, for the which they receive great sums of money. Finally, the Genevois are wholly given to exchange, and to a certain kind of gain, the which is profitable to private men, but nothing beneficial to the common weal: for the ordinary revenue of the town, is not above thirty thousand crowns, the which they raise upon every fire, as a kind of rent. As for the revenue of the commonweal, it consists in customs, imposts, and other rights, and it is employed in the expenses of the palace, for that the other towns of the signory pay the wages of their officers and guards. And this revenue, which may amount to four hundred thousand crowns, is engaged and assigned to the Mount of S. George, which doth govern it discreetly, and divides unto those that have an interest in the Mount, and it makes a stock for the necessities of the commonweal. They draw so great wealth from Spain, as there is not any city in Italy whereas private men are so rich. Many have had for payment, or for assurance of the credit which they have given, important Estates, both in Spain and the realm of Naples. We may easily guess at the wealth of the Genevois, by the disbursements of the money which the marquis Spinola hath made, wherewith he hath paid the army in the Low Countries: for it is well known, that his mother hath go often unto the exchange, demanding to whom her son was indebted, to the end she might pay it, notwithstanding that the sums were very great, as may be easily conjectured. The king of Spain is so indebted to the Genevois, as they say, that in the year 1600 they did reckon upon the place, that this king aught them eighteen millions. We may then easily guess whereunto this sum is now come, if they have continued their accounts according to the course of the place.  
As for the commonweal, it cannot be said what they do draw clearly from those countries which they hold; and many think that it is not rich, & that if there happen any extraordinary affairs, private men desirous to maintain it, would supply her wants, for that they have little, or no public treasure at Genova, having no treasury full of gold and silver, as that of Venice. That which makes them less careful thereof, is the assurance which they have of the king of Spain's protection, who is in effect their master, and draws from them good sums in his necessity, the which he will repay when the humour takes him, for otherwise they shall never get it.   

¶ The Forces:  
THe signory of Genova cannot be said to be very strong in Italy, in regard of places: for as for their chief town, it hath good walls, and store of ordnance, but yet not able to make any long resistance. But it holds itself to be strong, as I have said, being under the protection of the king of Spain. As for Corsica, they make account of dirty as of a strong place, and also of Ajazze, and of the Castle of S. Boniface. This signory doth commonly entertain certain companies of Corsicans within Genova, for the guard of the city, and in Corsica, Genevois, who are put into garrison in the best places. And besides that, there are certain companies of light horse, who run along the coast to hinder the surprises and spoils of the Turks, who notwithstanding do often carry away many people to Alger, or to some other places in Africa: so as we must make no great account of the Genevois forces but at sea, where they are yet sufficiently strong, having their support, the which might fail them, if he himself were engaged in any great action. They do commonly entertain four gall is for the guard of the river of Genova: moreover by their ancient ordinances, they should always have five and twenty galleys in the arsenal, ready to be armed upon any occasion. There are within the signory ten thousand valiant men ready to arm at any need, and upon the two rivers many expert mariners.   

¶ The Government.  
THe State of Genova having been much tormented by their factions and partialities, and always in arms, the families expelling one another, and sometimes the noblemen being masters, and sometimes the people, one party favouring the Adorns, and another the Fregoses: in the end they recovered the liberty which they now enjoy: for Genova being under the subjection of the French, and Andrew Doria quitting the service of king Francis, whose Admiral he was, freed himself and his country from servitude in the year 1528, wherein he showed a noble resolution: for that having means to seize upon this Estate, and being entreated, and as it were forced by his friends, who had power to command him, he did choose rather to leave it at liberty, with as much glory to future ages, as any one could merit that had been so rare a precedent. For the which the Genevois did worthily erect a statue unto him for a perpetual glory and memory of this fact.  
The city with this new reformation took the form of government, which they now hold. They made a description of all the rich families, as well noble as popular, which had six houses open in the city of Genova, & the account being made, they found eight and twenty of this sort. All the rest which were of any note, but had not six houses open, were joined to the number of eight and twenty families: so as the government remained in the hands of the eight and twenty families, with the title of Gentlemen, excluding the rest of the people, yet giving liberty that they might yearly add ten unto this body, which might be made gentlemen, either for their wealth or virtue. The chief families are these: the Centurioni, Lomelini, Spinoli, Doria, Palla●icini, Cibi, justiniani, Ternari, Sauli, Ar●●ri, Marini, Catanei, Seluaggi, Negri, Grilli, Promontori, Imperiali, Negroni, Vsodamar, Pi●●lli, Calui, Frenchi, Itaboni, Freschi, etc.  
Of the whole body of these families they made a Council of four hundred persons yearly, who with the duke and the governors have the rule of the Commonweal. This Counsel chooseth the duke and the eight governors, and these governors have charge of the State during two years. This Council treats of affairs of importance, and that which concerns the good of the signory, and the duke with the governors are particularly called the signory: but if they be to treat of any matters which be not of so great importance, & yet of some consideration, the signory useth a Petty Council, which consists of one hundred gentlemen chosen by the signory, and these are taken out of the body of four hundred.  
The duke is the head of the Common weal, and hath the titles and honours due unto him. It is an ancient dignity in this city, and he that is created continues in this Estate two years, and dwells in the public palace, during the time of his principality, and hath for his guard five hundred Germane, representing herein the form of an absolute Prince. When he is chosen duke, he is attired two days together with his ducal ornaments, after which he carries all the time of his magistracy another habit, but yet of crimson velvet or satin, and sometimes of purple his authority is very great, for that he alone may propound any thing to the Council or Senat, the which no other Senator may do: by reason whereof, whosoever will propound a law, or any other thing, to the Commonweal, he must of force inform the duke, and pass through his hands.  
The manner of choosing the duke is thus: The third of januarie the Senate assembles with the Petty Council, without the presence of the precedent duke, for that having ended the time of two years, he returns the first of januarie unto his house, and there remains as a private person, and Procurator of the Commonweal for his life. The Petty Council with the Senate choose eight and twenty gentlemen, one out of every family, who are called unto the Palace as soon as they are chosen, and then are shut up into a place apart: These with the Senators (who by reason of their age, or for the contumacy of the family, are incapable to be dukes) choose eighteen men amongst them, one of a family, who make election with the other eight and twenty, the which being called and shut up with the said Senators, give their suffrages, who shall be propounded unto the Great Council for duke. But you must observe, that they cannot propound unto the Great Council above four persons, and it is necessary that in the election of these, two third parts of the eight and twenty must agreed among themselves, with the party of the Senators: And this action being e●ded, before they departed they choose other eight and twenty, one out of every family, who return and give their voices with them touching the foresaid four, and they may take the two third parts for their election, and put one or more in the place of them that are not allowed, so as they be of the Senat. This being done, the Council assembles, and they propound the four men that are chosen by the electors, and he that hath most balots or suffrages remains duke.  
There are eight governors which sit upon the same form with the duke, as his Councillors. Their office continues two year, and they with the duke have the name of the signory. They govern the Commonweal, and yet alone they cannot resolve of any thing which concerns the public interest, or is of great importance, but they must of force assemble the great Council. These governors are chosen two at a time every six months. Their election is made after this manner: They assemble the Petty Council with the Senate and duke; these make choice of eight and twenty, one of a family, who being chosen with the Senate and duke, do sometimes propound twelve, sometimes fourteen unto the great Council, who by the plurality of their voices make choice of one of them at a time. The next day they observe the like order, to make choice of the second, that is to say, the Petty Council choose other eight and twenty, and these eight and twenty perform the rest, as hath been said.  
Every one of the said eight governors, after the time that his office is expired remains protector of S. George for two years: so as in the College of procurators, you shall always see the eight which have governed the Commonweal, and all these enter into the Senate with the duke and the eight governors, deliberating of matters of importance; and these governors have the charge of all the Estate, and two of them remain in the Palace with the duke, and the other six in their houses, and they are changed alternatively, two every three months. Of the Procurators there are some for life, and these have been dukes; and some are only for two years, that is to say, they that have been governors: These have the charge of the public affairs, touching the revenues, and such like matters: and they are men of great esteem and good reputation.  
All the said magistrates attend only the government of the Commonweal: as for matters of justice and judgement, speaking first of crimes, they have commonly a potestate, who is a stranger and a Doctor, to whom they give good entertainment. This Potestate remains in a palace near unto the duke, he takes knowledge and gives judgement upon all crimes: but he cannot execute his sentence, if it doth inflict death, without the consent of the Senat. There are moreover two other strange Doctors, whereof the one is called judge of the malefices or crimes, and the other fiscal: and with the aid of these two judges, the Potestat draws the process of offenders, and doth such like things. Besides, the Potestat hath his lieutenant, who hath care of civil causes which concern only the execution.  
There is an office of seven men, called Extraordinary, who represent in a manner the Prince's person, for that it is employed in the conduct of the Common weal. Their charge is, to prolong and cut off suits, and to give tutors to Pupils; and if it happen that the kinsmen be at suit among themselves, or that a poor man pleads against a rich, they do commonly appoint what magistrates they think good to hear them that pled. Their office continues six months, and is of great dignity.  
There is also a magistrate of five men, called Sovereign Syndics, whose authority is to censure both the duke and governors, when their charge is expired. They do the like with the other magistrates of the Commonweal and they have authority to punish the duke and governors if they found they have erred, whose time of government being expired, there is a proclamation made by order from the Syndics, that if any man will say any thing against the duke, or the governors, he shall come before them; and for this cause, the duke and governors remain eight days subject to the Syndication, which being passed, they either punish them if they found they have offended, or else they give them an attestation of their innocency, with the which afterwards they make them Procurators, the which they cannot be without this ●●tent or certificate. Moreover, they call before them many magistrates of the Commonweal: and finally, the greatness of this offices is such, as the Commonweal made choice of prince Andrew Doria, forone of their first Syndics: and they have their place with the Senate, and in the palace near unto the duke.  
And for that we have formerly spoken of criminal matters, we will now say something of civil. You must therefore understand, that the Commonweal doth give wages unto five Doctor's strangers every two year, and this body of five is called the Rota. These Doctors take knowledge of civil causes, and remain in the duke's Palace, and all matters are pleaded before them, according to the ordinary course of the imperial laws, and the judicial order, ordained by the city, which lives after the ancient manner.  
As for the matters which concern arts, there are Censors, who provide that all sellers, and all such as live upon their trades, shall have just weights and measures, according unto the laws; and they also provide for their heads, who are called Consuls, and chosen among the tradesmen. These Consuls have authority in matters which concern their arts and trades; and among other consuls, they of the trade of silk, have great power over their men; so as they have authority to give the Strappado, to banish, and to sand unto the galleys, and to appoint other punishments for such as shall offend.  
There are forty captains in the city of Genova, chosen from among the gentlemen, who are changed every year. Every one of these hath one hundred men under his charge, which in all make four thousand, and these the commonweal doth employ upon any occasion; for they guard the city when there is any doubt, and when the signory goes abroad, these forty captains attend on them, being all attired in velvet, which is the ornament of the signory. Moreover all the men of the city and suburbs, which are fit to carry arms, are enrolled, from the age of twenty years, unto sixty, and ranked under captains, being bound to be ready with their arms, when occasion requires. The commonweal hath continually a general who hath the oversight of arms, to employ them upon all occurrents, and in time of war.  
The office and magistrate of S. George (noble amongst all others in this city) was instituted in the year 1407: it hath for a long time preserved this commonweal, which having no natural riches, for that the quality of the country will not bear it, hath notwithstanding had men of subtle wits, and great judgements, to found a form and means to have money for the enterprises and necessities of this commonweal. Wherefore in times past, they that governed the public affairs, took money from private persons, sometimes willingly, and sometimes by constraint. It is true that in respect of the money which private men disbursed, the public men gave them for profit, seven, eight, nine, and ten in the hundred, according to the diversity of times, to the end that such men should receive no loss for this service which they did unto the commonweal. And to incite them to lend more willingly, they gave them assurance for their money upon the public revenues, selling (as for example) to some the rights and jurisdictions of the customs of grain, to some others the impost of wine and such like, and this contract betwixt the public & the private, was called among them Compera or Purchase, as if private men had bought (for Comprar signifies to buy) the rights of the commonweal, and it was ordained that whosoever should lend one hundred pounds, should be said to have a place in the Compera, and he that should lend two hundred, two, and so the rest; so as these purchases did multiply greatly, and there were some which were called purchases of the Chapter, some others of S. Paul, and others of the Sun, and every one of these was governed particularly by divers citizens, who had the charge to pay the money due unto lender's justly, and to keep the accounts betwixt them and the common weal. But by reason of the great number of purchases made even by foreign nations, and the multitude of governors, there followed much confusion; so as the signory resolved that all purchases should be reduced to one, called the purchase of S. George, and that it should be governed yearly by citizens, who should provide and give order that reason should be done unto lender's, and hence grew the beginning of the office of S. George.  
And for that they knew that the said office governed the foresaid matters with wisdom & justice, & that the commonweal was full of affairs, the number of places increased greatly; so as the commonweal alienating her rents, the charge of this office grew daily greater, making divers places & commonalties subject to their government. By reason whereof this office obtained many privileges, first of the signory, then of many Popes, Emperors, & Lords which have commanded the city of Genova: so as the office of S. George, although that it depends of the public, and of the signory of Genova, and of them which govern the palace, yet is it not subject unto the signory; but all they that are admitted to the signory, or to the government of the town, swear to preserve the privileges of the magistrate of S. George, and to maintain it. And for that naturally things have weak beginnings, the which in time grow perfect; this magistrate is better ordered and governed now, than it was in the beginning. It doth not pay a certain sum unto lender's, in regard of the profit and interest, but more or less, according to the proportion of his revenues, and the occasions which he hath to lay out, and disburse for the preservation of things which concern his charge, & as the customs and other revenues assigned unto lender's, do profit.  
Moreover, it hath gotten a great command, with many goodly revenues, the which it had not in the beginning. Since which they have made new laws and orders; so as it is much more powerful, touching the expedition of causes, the punishment of offenders, and the manner of governing the people which are subject unto it. And he that shall duly consider all things, shall see that by reason of this magistrate the body of the city contains in a manner two commonalties, the one great, and the other less: the great is governed by the palace, and comprehends the whole city: the less is governed by the Mount of S. George only, touching the foresaid matters, and contains all the lender's. The great is subject to changes and alterations, and hath been many times violently governed: but the less hath always been free, firm and under her citizens.  
There are eight governors which they call protectors over this office, or Mount of S. George: they continued a year in their charge, and there are 4 of them chosen every six months out of the whole number of lender's, be they of the country, or strangers, yet unto a certain sum, and they are made after this manner: They draw eighty men out of the number of the creditors by lots, who being assembled, as soon as they have been drawn, they put the said eighty again into a box, of the which they draw four and thirty by lots, the which being shut up together, may not departed before they have chosen the eight protectors, and he that is chosen must have sixteen ballots or voices before he pass.  
In the year 1444 they created another office of eight men, which they call the office of forty and four by reason of the year in which it was created. The cause of the creation of these eight men was, for that the office was so increased in the space of eight and thirty years; as the eight protectors could not end and determine the business which fell out in one year, by reason where●eof they had a remainder of profits and revenues in divers sorts, wherefore, to the end they might settle some order for these remainders, which are in effect the substance and riches of the office, the creditors thought it necessary to created certain men who should have the charge of the said matters, having a care that all might be for the profit of the magistrate of S. George, and giving order that all might be managed secretly, to take away all occasion from tyrannous Lords of doing ill: and after this sort they made the eight citizens, of the which they change two yearly, and their charge is to gather together, and to govern that which remains yearly of the revenues which the eight protectors have managed.  
This Magistrate, or Mont of S. George is Lord of the Island of Corsica, whither they sand yearly a Governor, a Lieutenant, a judge, and other officers. The like they do in Heresana, which is a place strong of castles and Forts frontiring upon the Florentines, and at Vingtimille a very ancient city, and to many villages, castles, and boroughs, and also to Tierze and Piene, whither also they sand captains, precedents, and officers. This Mont of S. George is very rich in treasure, arms, and council, and hath never failed to relieve the commonweal in her necessity.  
This hath been the estate and government of this city ever since that prince Andrew Doria freed it from the subjection of the French in the year 1528, as hath been said. But since they have been in danger to fall into a new servitude, at the lest into great combustions: for in the year 154● (some writ 49) john Augustin Earl of Flisco, a young man, bold, and eloquent, sought to make himself perpetual duke of Genova, and it subject to the French. Upon the fift of januarie the said year, he had seized upon a port, and had defeated & spoiled the sea army of prince Doria, and stain john Doria his nephew: and thus being in his conceit a victor, seeking to leap from one galley to another being armed, and in the night, he fell into the sea and was drowned, and so his ambitious design went to smoke, and the city remained in peace under the protection of the Emperor Charles the fift.  
In the year 1574 there fell out a new tumult and combustion in the commonweal; for being molested with their accustomed civil dissensions, the city was that year divided into two factions of old and new; the old being the chief cause of this trouble, who, not content to have the greatest part of the government, hated the new, and disdained (notwithstanding that the new, both for antiquity of nobility, and for their merits, were every way equal) that they should be allied unto them. The which did much discontent Matthew Senaregue, a citizen of great authority, and at that time Chancellor, and chief Secretary of the State, and chief of the faction of the new; who by his singular wisdom did often lay before them, both in their public and private councils, how unfit and unseemly it was to live in one city divided into factions and partialities, showing by good and lively reasons, how much better it were for every one in particular, and more profitable for the Commonweal in general, to live and converse together equally, and to be of one will. But Senaregue being not able to persuade the faction of the old to this conformity, nor to divert them from their obstinacy: they estranged themselves the more from the company of the new, and were so incensed against him, as he was many times in danger of his life: and their hatred was the greater, for that he had in a manner the whole government of the State. But Senaregue opposing himself with great judgement against all their pernicious designs, moved chiefly with a generous disdain, he employed himself in such sort, as the party of the new, having taken the charge of the government, expelled in a manner all the old and forced them to retire out of the country, seeking to take arms against the new. This combustion might well have ruined the Commonweal, if Senaregue foreseeing the great danger, and preferring the public good before all private affection, how just soever, had not by his authority suppressed the power of his faction: drawing the emperor, the king of Spain, but especially Pope Gregory, to deal in those affairs, so as his Holiness doing what he could possibly to pacify the dissensions of the city. In the end, the fury of arms ceased. Senaregue having therein showed an admirable integrity and judgement: who by a general consent being sent ambassador to Rome, preserved the greatness and reputation of his party, pacifying wisely the two factions, which were mighty, and able not only to have ruined their own country, but to have filled all Italy with combustions, war, and confusions, whereof his Holiness did give a most honourable testimony, writing the actions of Senare gue to the duke and Procurators of the Commonweal of Genova.   

¶ The Religion, and matters of the Church.  
THe Genevois, and Corsicans, are all Romish Catholics. Genova is an archbishopric, which hath under it the Bishoprics of Luna, now called Sarazana, of Bobia, Aprum or Brunac, of Metene or Maran, of Accia or Amprun, of Noli, and Albengue, and in Corsica the Bishopric of Nebia.  
In Corsica there are the bishoprics of Mariana, Nebia, Ajasse, Aleria, and Civita, whereof some are under the archbishopric of Piza.      

The Commonweal of Venice.  

THE COMMONWEAL OF VENICE.  

The Contents.  
1DEscription of the city of Venice. 2. The number of the Castles, Towns, and Estates subject to the signory of Venice. 3. Bressia. 4. Verona. 5. Bergamo, Vicence, cream, etc. 6. Friuli and her Towns, among others, A●uilea built by the Romans. 7. Istria, and the chief towns of this Peninsula. 8. Corcyria, now calied Corfo●: The situation of these Islands, and the confines: The length and breadth: and when it was made subject to the Venetians. 9 Cephalonia, the circuit, towns, and ports. 10. Zante, the situation and circuit. 11. The Island of Crete, the length, breadth, circuit, and situation: the ports, rivers, and mountains: containing in old time a hundred towns, for the which it was called by the Ancients, Hecatompolis. 12. Bounty of the air of the Marquisat of Trevise, and the chiefer●uerss. Verona abounding in oil, wine, fruit, and fine wool. Olives of Bergamo. Excellent wines of Friuli. Physical herbs of Istria. 13. Corsou, abounding in honey, wax, oil, salt pits, oranges, lemons: and the fountains of Cardachie. 14. Cand●e, abounding in malmsey, milk, honte, cypress: infected with Phalanges, which are venomous Spiders. 15. Description of a beast in Candie called Bove-estain, like unto the Stag in swiftness: and how it is taken. 16. Fishers the first inhabitants of Venice, and Rivalto. 17. Venetians of a grave disposition, and lovers of liberty. 18. They of Crete in old time held the best Archers of the world. Inventors of the Pyrricke dance, continued among the Peasants unto this day. Their laws practised throughout all Greece. 19 Of the grave humour of the Venetians of this age, their great judgement in affairs, their industry in arts, magnificent, politic, and greedy: The Veron●is, studious and faithful: The Padovans inconstant: The Vicentins revengeful: and the Candio●s liars. 20. Of the revenues of the Commonweal of Venice, and what it may amount unto yearly. 21. Extraordinary means of exa●tionss, to entertain armies, and to relieve the State. 22. Of certain means to get money for the signory. 23. Of the Forts which are in all the Venetians Estate. 24. Of the Cernides, which are soldiers appointed for the defence of their Forts. 25. What their horse and foot be. 26. Of their sea forces, and galleys at sea: Of the admirable arsenal of Venice, and of the great number of galleys, canon, and workmen which labour ther● continually. 27. Government of this signory, and first of the duke and his power. 28. Of the Council of ten, and the Senate which they call the Pregadi, and whereon they treat. 29. The Commonweal of Venice paralelled with the Roman State. 30. The defects and imperfections of this signory. 31. Religion of the Greeks: Shismetickes tolerated in the Island of Corfou and Ca●●●●. 32. A catalogue of the dukes of Venice, their lives and most remarkable actions.   

THe Commonweal of Venice, for the greatness, nobility, riches, goodly palaces, situation, and other good parts, is admirable among all the towns of Europe; the situation thereof being so commond●ous for all things, as it may be held rather a divine than a human work. And although that many Commonweals have exceeded it in greatness of empire, in multitudes of people and in State, yet the●e was never any town so strangely situated, nor so securely.  
The city of Venice is built in the most inward part of the gulf of the adriatic sea, in the midst of the lakes of salt water, having the said adriatic sea upon the East, which runs in length five hundred and fifty miles. Betwixt the sea & the said lakes there is a hawk or causey, which they call Lido, made by nature, to defend the Islands which lie i●●his lake against the fury of the sea: this causey is five and thirty miles long, and be●● like a bow, being open in five places, some say seven, as well for the passage of ships adickes, as to keep the lakes full of water. The entry is not free but for small barks, Ih●● of burden are forced to lie at anchor until they may be brought in by skilful pilo●● who know the passages, which change daily. In the midst of these lakes (made as well by many rivers which are near, as by the sea water which enters continually by those ports) was that noble city of Venice built, where there were sixty little Islands one ne●●e unto another, divided by the water. The first beginning thereof was in the time of ●●●tila, who coming into Italy with a great army, spoiled all the towns of the firm land, so as the ancient Venetians, Padovans, and others, searing the fury of those barbarous Huns, retired themselves with their wives and families into those Islands, wherea● the Padovans began to build them dwelling at Rivoalto; and this was the first found●●on of the city of Venice, which first beginning some write was about the four hundon and fiftieth year of our salvation: since which time it hath been augmented and g●●●ne to that greatness which we see at this day: neither hath it for the space of one t●o●sand and two hundred years endured any violence or force of war; the which hath not happened to any other town or city, notwithstanding that the wealth and riches thereof might invite barbarous nations to seek the spoil of it.  
T●● Venetians do hold in Lombardie and in the Marquisat, besides Venice, six towns whi●h are great, rich, and very populous, besides many goodly places and castles. The towns are Bergamo, Crema, Bressia, Verona, Vicenze, & Padova: the other places are Bassan, Castelfranc in the marquisat, and others which I omit to avoid tediousness. Towards the North, they are masters in a manner of all Friuli and Istria, which is the last pro●●nce of Italy of that side. They do command almost all the shore and Island of Dalmatia, and Sclavonia, where there are some good towns, as Zara and Catarro.  
They do also enjoy in the mouth of the adriatic sea, the Island of Corfou, and the Islands of Cefalonia, Zante, Cerigo, and Lucerigo: and in the Archipelago the Island of Zarra; and beyond these Islands that of Candie: and these are all the Estates which are subject to the signory of Venice.  
Beessia is the second town of Lombardie, it is very ancient, and built as some writ by the Cenomannie, who descending into Gaul expelled the ancient Tuscans. It hath had many Lords, and about the year 1421 it was made subject to Philip Maria Viscont duke of Milan, unto whom they yielded upon certain conditions: but the citizens being oppressed by him, they gave themselves to the signory of Venice, under whom they have continued unto this day. It is very populous, and the jurisdiction is great, good, and fertile, yielding all kinds of corn, wine, and all first-fruits: they have also mines of iron and copper which yields them great profit. There are in this jurisdiction many good places and valleys of importance. Among the places subject to this Estate, they give the prize to Asola, and Salo upon the lake of guard; among the valleys to Valmonica, which is fifty miles long and full of Inhabitants: it contains also the lakes of Iseeand Idre.  
Verona is a great town and very pleasing, beautified with goodly buildings, and inhabited by civil people. Among which buildings is the ancient and stately Cathedral Church of S. Anastatius, and that great Amphitheatre built by L. V Flaminius. The territory is fruitful, and yields corn, wine, oil, and other first-fruits with abundance of fine wool. There is no great difference betwixt Verona and Padova touching the ●ircuit of their walls, but Verona hath twice as many people as Padova, and for this cause the Venetians are very careful to entertain the university of Padova for the procession of all arts, to the end it may be the better inhabited.  
Bergamo, Vicence, Cr●ma, and Treviso differ little touching the number of inhabitants, and are equal to Modena which hath a particular Duke: but Vicence hath a great territory, that of cream is but small, and Bergamo is of a reasonable great extent.  
Friuli lies betwixt the river of Livence, Istria, the Alpes, and the Gulf of Venice: it gins with the Alpes, which decreasing by little and little ends in goodly plains. In this country is the river of Livence, the which for that it is too near the sea, falling from the Alpes hath no time to stay her violent course. Upon this river are the Castles of Contean, Sacile, and Lamotte. Upon the river of Lemon which passeth also through the country are the towns of Concord, and Port Gruare. Upon that of Tagliamento, are the places of Latisare, and Spilimbergue; and not far off S. Daniel and Osoppe. Upon the river of Natison is the town of Cividal d' Austria which is good and rich: then upon the river of Lisonce the towns of Gradisca, and Goritia, places subject to the princes of Austria: next it is the mouth of Timave, and beyond it Trieste, a town which gives the name unto the next gulf. The chief of Friuli was Aquilea, a great town, as the remainders do yet witness: it was built in that place by the Romans to keep the passage of the Alpss (which are not so sleep there as in other places) against the Barbarians, enemies to the quiet of Italy: It was razed by Attila, so as this let being taken away, the Herules, Huns, and Lombard's past at their ease, and of late days the Turks. At this day Aquilea seems rather a village than any thing else: yet it retains still the Patriarches Church, famous for the memory of S. Mark, and for the power of the ancient Patriarches which have remained there. This seat was transported to Grada by reason of the frequent incursions of the Barbarians under Pope Pelagius. But the Venetians having many years after obtained a bishop, the dignity of Patriarch was in the end transported from the Church of Grada to Venice under Pope Nicholas, and Aquilea enjoyed the title: but for that the air of the town is unwholesome, the government of Friuli and of all that belongs unto it was reduced to Vdena, a town which hath five miles in circuit, and contains about sixteen thousand souls.  
Istria gins at the river of Risan or Formion, and extends unto S. Vit, or as some others writ unto Arsia, which is about two hundred miles. The best towns of this Peninsula are situated upon little Islands, as Raulgno and justinopoli: the rest are Pican, Vmague, Citanova, Patenze, and Pola which in the time of Strabo was the bounds of Italy. The Venetians who desire to people it, give unto them that will go and inhabit there, a certain quantity of land, with divers exemptions and freedoms. In the midst of the country there are not any places of importance.  
Corcyria (a famous Island by the records of the ancients) is that which at this day they call Corfou, lying in the jonicke sea or gulf of Venice, looking towards Calabria in Italy, and being near to Epirus or Albania towards the North, it being not above an Italian mile from the land on that side which lies near to thtown of Butrinte: whereas this Island is sixty Italian miles from the town of Otranto which is opposite unto it. This Island hath been subject to all them that have commanded at sea, until the year of our Lord 1382, whenas they of Corfou seeing themselves exposed to the injuries of all the world, gave themselves unto the Venetians, who have defended them many times against the fury of the Turks, and have so fortified that Island, as it seems impossible to be taken. It is much more long than broad, and it is made like unto a half Moon or semicircle, having two points, whereof the one which looks towards the East is called the Cape of Leuchim, near unto the which, and in the same situation in the gulf, is another point called Cape Blank; the other looks towards the North and is called S. Catherins', at the which is the port of Cassope; and the third which is in the midst of the Island, is the point of S. Sydere, whereas the town of Corfou stands; not far from the which is S. Nicholas point, having right against it the Island of S. Vite, and that of Candilonissi. The length of the Island is from the point of Leuchim to the port of Cassope, being four and fifty Italian miles: the breadth is to be taken from the Castle of S. Ange, which is about four and twenty miles: it hath in circuit about eighty miles, yet some in former times have given it three hundred. It is divided into four quarters, which the Venetians call bayliwickes or governments, whereof the first which lies towards the East is called Leuchim, that of the West Laguire, the third is the bailiwick of the midst, and the fourth carries the name or title of Loros. The town of Corfou is the chief of this Island, and of others adjacent which are subject to the Venetians command. There is also in the Island of Corfou another town, which they now call Pagiopoli, or Palopoli. The port of the town of Corfou is very great, and able to receive many ships. There are also the ports of Cassope, S. Sydere, Timon, Guni, Spile, and Euripe; but those of Sydere and Timon are dangerous to come into. In this Island in old time lived Al●●ous king of the Pheacians, and Nausicas his daughter, who enjoyed those goodly gardens where of Homer speaks.  
Cephalonia hath a hundred Italian miles in circuit, and it lies not far from the continent of Albania, towards Acarnanio; upon the East lies the Island of Ithacus, now called Val de Compare; upon the South that of Zante; upon the West Sicily; and towards the North the country of Epyrus. This Island had in former times four towns, of which there are no marks remaining. At this day there is the port of Guiscard, and in it the town of Petilia, or Polaqui. There is also the towns of Sydre and Vardan, and the port of Sydre looks towards the South.  
Zante, sometimes called Zacynthum, lies right against the gulf of Corinthe, now called Lepante, having some sixty miles in circuit.  
The Island of Creta or of Gandie, hath in length from East to West about 60 French leagues, and not above 16 leagues in breadth: It is about 120 leagues in circuit, going about by sea. Upon the West it hath the adriatic sea; to the North that which carries the name of the Cretishe sea; to the South the Lybick; and to the East the Carpathie●, as Ptolomey describes it. It was famous in old time, for that it had a hundred towns, and therefore the Greek poet called it Hecatompolis. The situation is more Easterly than that of the country of Morea, lying betwixt the countries of Attica, and that of Cyrene in Africa, being but two days journey by sea from either province. At this day, according to Belonus, there are but three towns of note in this Island, that is, Candie, in old time Matium, the chief of this Island, whereof it takes the name; then Canea, sometimes Cidon; and Rhetynno. It hath a port which is not very commodious, but those of Canea and Candie are very safe. In this Island are the rivers of Melipotame, Scasin, Cladile, Epicidome, Giffo, & Divotro, towards the North; Populiar towards the West; and Lymens' to the South. The mountains of note are Ida, called by the inhabitants Philoriti; Luci, which Pliny calls Cadussi, & at this day Madure; and Dicte, which they call Sethie. This Island seems to be made to command all Greece for that it lies not far from Peloponesus, and may command all the sea towards Greece. It was sold to the Venetians by the Marquis of Montferrat in the year 1194.  

¶ The Quality.  
THe Marquisat of Treviso hath a good air, and temperate, the fields are pleasing, and yield good store of wheat and other grain, and of all sorts of fruit, but it abounds chiefly in wine. They found some metals, and they have good store of cattle. The chief rivers of this country are Piae, brent, Bacgilio, Tesin, Add, Oglio, and Adige. The valley of Valdemonica is full of mines of iron. As for Verona, the air is very wholesome, the soil is in many places barren, and there is never any abundance of wheat: but it yields great store of oil, and excellent wine, and first-fruits of all sorts: and there is also abundance of fine wool. Near unto it is the lake of Benac, full of all kinds of fish. There is a very high mountain above the town, famous for the herbs which grow there. Near unto the town of Bergamo, the country is rough and stony, and barren towards the North, by reason of the mountains, but in other places there wants not any thing that is necessary for the nourishment of man, yet there grows no wine by reason of the coldness. But in the neighbour valleys, subject to this town, they have great store of olives, and in some places reasonable good wine, but no great store. About Crema there is good store of corn, wine, and first-fruits, excellent waters, and abundance of fish. The territory of Treviso is pleasing, fat, and fertile. As for Friuli, it yields excellent wine, and plenty, but no store of wheat, or any other thing: it is subject to the great change of air, 〈◊〉 winds. Istria is hilly, but not rough, and abounds in wine, oil, wheat and 〈◊〉: Among other mountains, there is one which they call the Great, with a goo●y fountain upon the top of it, whereas they found the best physical simples that can be desired; for which cause, the physicians of foreign countries go to gather them, or to observe them. Pole hath a bad air, like unto the greatest part of Istria: towards the sea they make great store of salt, and they have abundance of fish in the sea, by reason of the many Islands and gulfs.  
The Island of Corfou is hilly, and the country stony towards the South: but there are also more rivers and brooks than in other places, as Penize, Mesongi, Euripe, and Potami: towards the North it is plain, there is only one mountain which runs into the sea, upon the top whereof is Castle-novo. There is a fountain near to P●lopoli, called Cardachie, which hath so plentiful a spring, as it doth not only furnish them of Corsou (whose water is gross and unwholesome, and therefore they fetch it in barks) but the galleys and great ships come also to water there. Near unto the same place are the goodliest saltpits of all the country, from whence they of the country draw salt to pay their impost to the signory of Venice. But upon the straight of the gulf of this Promontory of Pagiopoli, near unto a place called Negrotalassi, is a little gulse, in the which is as it were a great keep of the best fish in the Mediterranean sea: and moreover, during winter there is abundance of wildfowl. It bears great store of Orange and Lemon trees, with such like. Corfou abounds also in honey and wax. The wine that grows there is good and plentiful, but above all they commend the oil of Corfou, by reason of the singular bounty: Finally this Island doth yield sufficient of corn and fruit. They have neither Wolves nor Bears to offend their flocks; but they have store of other beasts good to eat, which the inhabitants use to hunt.  
In the Island of Cephalonia, there is neither river, brook, nor fountain of fresh water, so as when their tame cattle would drink, they gape both evening and morning to receive the dew. Some writ, and among others Herodotus, that in the Island of Zante there were fountains which with the water did vomit forth pitch in great abundance. There is scarce any thing else that is worthy the noting.  
The Island of Candie although it be hilly, yet it hath many valleys that are fruitful, and yield much, for that they are watered with many fountains, brooks, and rivers. Moreover, there is abundance of excellent wine which they of the country ●●ll Malmsie. They have store of milk and honey, and sufficient of flesh: so as t●e Ancients did willingly call it the Happy Island. There grows the goodliest Cypress trees that can be seen, and all other kinds of timber fit for the building of ships, the which yields great profit to the signory of Venice. There is not any hurtful or venomous beasts, except Phalanges, which are like unto Spiders, but in Candie they are not dangerous.  
It abounds also in wild goats, fallow Deer, and Ysards or Chamois, but there are few wild Boars unless it be about Canea. There are also Boucks-estaine, called by the Latins Ibex; they have long horns like unto a wild goat, and are not much bigger, yet they have as much flesh as a Stag, the hair is fallow and short, but they carry a great black beard. Sometimes they take them when they are very little, to breed them up among their troops of goats, and to have of the race, as well for the beauty, as for the taste of the flesh. His horns are very great, in respect of the body; but he is so nimble as he outruns any Stag, neither can the dogs follow him by the sent, for that he will wind the huntsmen above a hundred paces off, so as when they would take him they tie tame goats upon the passages of the mountain, where the Bove-estaine smelling them, he goes unto them, and staying there, the huntsmen have opportunity to strike him: but if the wound be not mortal, although the dart be poisoned and remains in his body, yet he cures himself eating the herb which the Simplists call Dictamum, the which is good against poison, as Dioscorides saith, for that the only sent of it kills Serpents and other venomous beasts.   

¶ The Manners of the Ancients.  
THe first that lived about Venice (according to the opinion of some) were fishermen, who lived only of such fish as they could take. Afterwards they began to build some houses, especially at Rivalto; and this town began to flourish by the ruin of the towns of Aquilea, Concord, Alcina, Padova, Mont Oppiterge, Heraclea, Aquilin, Grada, Cap●eola, and Laureota, at the coming of Attila in the year 456, or as others writ 450, and the inhabitants have retained the divers humours and manners of all these places. Finally, the citizens of Venice have been always grave and desirous by all means to preserve their liberty.  
As for the other places of the marquisat of Treviso and Friuli they have embraced them that have been masters, but especially the factions which have reigned throughout Italy.  
The Island of Candie did flourish in former times, whenas her king did hold all Greece in awe. The Cretois were held the best archers in the world: they invented the Pytricke dance in the time of their king Cydon. They were all armed whenas they danced; and it 〈◊〉 been so continued in this Island, as the Peasants dance on holy days in the hottest time of Summer, not caring for any shadow, and with their arms, that is to say, a how, a sheaf of arrows, & a sword, as if without it they could have no good grace in dancing. The most famous nations among the Grecians have taken their laws from the Candiots, as Plato doth witness, especially the Lacedæmonians took their practice from them. They had one which did enjoin that all their children should be bred up in public, to the end that the poor having the like breeding to the rich, they should have no cause to envy them; and it was also ordained by the laws, that to enure their children not to fear any thing, but to bear all things with patience, they should be accustomed to arms; and to make them contemn heat, cold, hunger, and thirst, they should carry a bow and arrows in dancing, and their apparel should be fit for war. All the Candiots were forced to marry being of age, and then they were dismissed from the company of young men. They did not presently conduct their wives home to their houses, but they attended until they were able to manage the affairs of a household, and kinsfolks married indifferently one with another. There was a law, that if the brother did marry his sister he should make her a dowry of half his patrimony. To ravish a maid was more esteemed than if he had obtained his desire with her free consent. In the end the Candiots leaving their ancient discipline become pirates, having been always powerful at sea, and had carried themselves so valiantly, as they had vanquished them of Attica, and led armies fortunately into Sicily.   

¶ The Manners at this day.  
THe Venetians show a great gravity in their actions, but they are very severe where they command, yea sometimes with excess: they speak little being at the table, and they are no good horsemen, for that they live in a city where this exercise is little practised, for that the chiefest voyages & cumbats of the Venetian gentlemen are by sea. Their spirits are not (most commonly) so active as the rest of the Italians: but they have great judgements, and prevail whenas they give themselves to any science: within this city there are many excellent and rare men in all arts and sciences. They suffer jews and Grecians to live there in their religion without any molestation. To conclude, they say that the Venetians are stately, crafty, and greedy; the Veronois studious, and faithful; they of Padova fiery, and they of Vicence desirous of revenge. Moreover they say that the Venetians bring silver to the war, they of Treviso swords, that the Bressans are fit to make trenches, the Venetians to furnish an army to sea, they of Padova to manage horses, and they of Bergamo to lay ambushes. They say also touching the women, that they of Crema are deceitful, they of Vicence constant, they of Venice insolent, and carry themselves like princesses, they of Verona gracious, they of Bressia diligent, they of Treviso jealous, and they of Bergamo subtle, and that there are many men which speak ill. Padova hath good soldiers, Vicence many Earls, and Bressia inhabitants which are not charitable to the poor. They of Friuli are fiery, sudden, always watchful, and wonderful industrious, having an active spirit, and very subtle. The inhabitants of Istria are neither long lived, nor of great courage.  
The inhabitants of Candie are by nature apt and ready to do evil: the ancients gave them the title of liars: they are subtle and covetous, and do hardly endure labour, neither do they learn any art or science perfectly. It is true that at this day, as Belonus saith, they do practise from their youth (according to their ancient custom) to shoot, wherein they excel even the Turks themselves; and they are active and valiant at sea as much as they have been in former times.   

¶ The Riches.  
THe signory of Venice doth draw yearly in time of peace from the Estates which are subject unto it, two millions of gold, after the manner that followeth. They receive from the towns of Italy eight hundred thousand crowns, of which Bergamo and Bressia pay above three hundred thousand. They draw out of Venice seven hundred thousand crowns, of divers imposts and customs, for that of wine alone is rent at a hundred and thirty thousand crowns yearly. They raise money also of divers tenths and taxes imposed upon the gentlemen and citizens. And the other five hundred thousand riseth of the salt which is made upon those places which are along the sea, and of the customs, imposts, and aids which the sea towns pay unto the signory. And some say that they did draw five hundred thousand crowns from the realm of Cypress, which some hold they levy of their subjects by another means.  
These be the revenues of this commonweal, which is subject to the accidents of other Estates of Christendom, that is to say, they consume in a manner all this money in their ordinary charges, for the entertaining of soldiers, armies at sea, in the fortification of towns and castles, and in the fees of magistrates and officers of the city: by reason whereof some think they have nothing remaining, and if they had it should go towards the payment of their old debts which they have run into: so as they conclude that their ordinary revenues are all spent, or the greatest part, in their ordinary charges during the time of peace. But we do not therefore think that this commonweal is not powerful, for that princes and commonalties which ha●● most means to make money extraordinarily, have greatest power: but this Estate hath sufficient means, and it may levy more with less fear and danger, than other Christian princes can do of their subjects. For whenas any war falls upon this signory, or that they are forced to arm extraordinarily, although they have no war, as when the Turk levies some great army, they have recourse unto extraordinary means which are many and divers, and yet they may be reduced unto three.  
The first, is to raise the tenths which are already imposed upon gentlemen and bourgesses, who have lands and revenues, and this is done by augmenting the number, that is, whereas they paid before but once a year, to make them to pay twice or thrice, according to the will of the Senate: & in like manner whenas they double the taxes, which the signory causeth merchants to pay according to the value of their merchandise, which is almost the tenth part of their gain, and these things are also paid by the gentlemen and richest citizens. We may also include herein another tax which the people pay whenas they arm extraordinarily: for that in all their armies they are bound to entertain a certain number of men.  
Whenas then they have recourse unto this first means, they do it easily, for that all pay it willingly, and do freely assist their country. But if this su●t●ceth not, they fly unto the second, which, is that gentlemen serve for a certain time in their offices without any fee: and moreover they ordain the chief honours which are accustomed to be given to gentlemen best deserving, shall be sold; but not in perpetuity, not to him that will give most, for rather than to give it to an unworthy person, they will bestow it upon him that offers lest, for that he is of greater valour and more merit: by the like means in the war which the Christian princes made against the Venetians in the league of Cambray, they did raise above five hundred thousand crowns.  
Another means to make money is also practised by this Commonweal, the which they call Depost or pledge of the Council, whenas for money they declare young men that are under age, capable to come into the Council, and to obtain offices.  
The third means to draw money, is whenas the Commonweal upon some great necessity is forced to borrow of private men, the which if they may not have willingly, they will force them unto it, selling the citizens goods and lands, if necessity requires: the which being put in practice, breeds no tumult as among other people, nor any general mutiny. As for example, if the Senate had resolved that the third part of all citizens goods should be sold, of which sale there should be a sum made, and the Commonweal should acknowledge herself debtor to these private men, to whom (according to the decree of the Senate) she did bind herself to repay the money after the war was ended, and so much by the year, that is to say, two for the hundred, and so they pay it in thirty ye●reses; and after this manner the Commonweal doth pay her old debts, the which is called profit of the old Mount; or else she pays five for the hundred yearly, and this is called the new Mount, and the Mount of Subsidy. And these interests are paid by the Commonweal for debts which are not so old as the first, or else she pays more, & binds herself to pay the principal in a short time, and this is called the newest Mount, when it hath been paid: and all debts which are paid in five and twenty or thirty years, when as they have no war (the which they avoid all they can) are easily satisfied.  
They have also been accustomed to take money upon exchange, and to give eight in the hundred to them that would lend, and this was only for eighteen years. Moreover they have made many Lotteries of lands belonging to the public, where they have drawn by blanks publicly in the presence of the chief Senators.  
These are the means which the signory hath used to levy money in their former wares, and whereof they may yet make use at their pleasures. They may also increase their customs of merchandise as the Senate shall decree.  
To conclude, the State of Venice hath means to levy money without any discontent of the gentlemen, citizens, or people: for in their great necessities, the prince, & many gentlemen, and bourgesses, have freely gruen great store of treasure to the Commonweal; and some have given their wives jewels, considering that the Commonweal being afflicted had more need of help than their wives had of ornaments. And no● only private men of Venice have given money to the Commonweal, but also the towns which are subject unto her, have relieved her with great sums of money, besides the taxes where with they are charged. The reason is, for that they love the mild government of this Commonweal, and also their justice which is inviolably observed, as well to poor as rich. And therefore they have rightly said in Venice, That it imports not whither the public have any great store of treasure, so as private men be rich, as they are; for that (as we have said) the Commonweal may easily make use of their goods.  
We must therefore conclude, that it is no easy thing to know what treasure the city of Venice hath in her coffers. Let us now see what the forces of this Commonweal are, seeing we have discoursed at large of her wealth.   

¶ The Forces:  
THis signory hath for her chief end, not to be wronged, and to carry herself as she may have no subject of sear: For this cause she hath and doth make many forts for the safety of this Estate. And as for these forts (speaking in general) there is no prince that hath any more important and perfect, for that they have great and good rampires, with deep and spacious diches: and there are some Towers exceeding strong, as Treviso, Lignago, and Crema; some others are so great in circuit, as they cannot be besieged but by a royal army as Padova, and Verona: others have their citadels and sorts which command them in such sort, as they may easily be relieved; as we see at Bressia, Bergamo, and Verona, which hath two castles, the one upon the other. The castles of the Marquisat reduced into sorts are Orcinoves, Assola in the territory of Bressia, Pesquiera, and Li●nago, but above all, we must admire Nova Palma, of a round form, with nine Bastians', whose streets answer directly unto a place which is in the midst of the town, which they hold impregnable. They have also in Lombardie the Polesine of Rovigue, where there are many places which are made defensible. In Friuli there is not any strong castle but that of Marran, seated amongst pools and marshes near unto the sea, but exceeding strong, for that it is in a manner divided from the firm land except of one side, which may be easily defended by few men. There is also the castle of O●●ppe upon a very high mountain, which hinders the passage of any army into Italy, and by any other they cannot bring the canon. As for the town Vdena, it is not very strong for that the ground is not fit to be fortified. In Istria, they have no good place, but the cape of Istria. Upon the snore and Islands of Dalmatia and Sclavonia, there are some towns with forts, as Zara, and Catarro: but the towns of Dalmatia have not any need of fortification, for that they cannot march into the country with any army by land, but to make incursions of small importance, and the reason is, for that the mountains are rough, and the passages very narrow.  
In the Island of Corfou there is an excellent fort, which is as it were the key or port to enter into the gulf, so as with small forces they may hinder the entry of the greatest army.  
In the Island of Candie, the town whereof this Island takes the name, and Canea, are exceeding strong, both by art and situation: but Rethymo and Scitia cannot be termed strong but in regard of their situation: and in the to●ne of Candie, there is a good arsenal of galleys.  
For the defence of these towns and forts, this signory doth make use of their own subjects: and in Lombardie they train up about five and twenty thousand men, which they call Cernides, for that of all the jurisdictions and countries which are subject to this State, those are chosen which are held most fit to bear arms; and these are all footmen, of whom they make divers private musters: but for the most part these are peasants which are not very fit to fight in an open field, not to keep their ranks. And therefore the signory whenas they will raise a complete army to go to field, they do entertain them that devil in those towns which are subject unto them, and also strangers who are no less valiant than the rest. The Italian footmen are courageous, active, and fit for skirmishes, or to give an assault: yet their order is not so strong and good as the Germane, by reason whereof this signory hath in former times had, as well of their own subjects as of strangers, about fifteen or twenty thousand men. And for the foresaid reasons they do give pay unto certain Cantons of the Swisses and Grisons, so as their footmen of their armies of all sorts may amount to five and thirty thousand men, more or less, according to the necessity of their affairs: the rest of the footmen are employed for the guard of towns, and the service of their galleys. The footmen have three crowns for their entertainment every five and forty days: when they are employed, and in great necessities, they rise to five crowns a month.  
As for their horsemen, the signory doth entertain as well for their guard, as reputation, six hundred men at arms well chosen: every one of which was accustomed to have three horse, but at this day they keep but two, which must be fair and beautiful: every one of these hath for his yearly entertainment one hundred and twenty ducats, and they are for the most part gentlemen of the towns of Lombardie, which are subject to this State: and although they have no race of horses, yet may this number be augmented to a thousand or fifteen hundred.  
This State in like manner was accustomed to entertain in Lombardie, about one thou●and light horse, but they have left off to make this superfluous expense, for that they might always easily furnish themselves with good numbers, or they might employ the Stradiots of Dalmatia and other places, who are fit to cut off the enemy's victuals, and to charge an army in the rear. These men are very expert and ready, and if they be broken they will easily join again together, and recover their ranks. They may draw out of Dalmatia and other Islands about three thousands of these soldiers, and near as many light horse out of the towns of Italy. In their armies at firm land this seigneury doth for the most part use a stranger for their General, & therefore they have many times entertained absolute Lords, as Marquises and Dukes, whom they pay and recompense bountifully for their pains: for they cannot endure to have any of their signory to be a chief commander. And if they know that any gentleman of Venice affects the war, and follows the court of other princes, they call him presently home to his house, desiring rather in their wars at land to have a stranger for their General than one of their own State, and to employ an army of strangers, rather than their own subjects: but yet they are accustomed to sand with their General (as it were companions) two gentlemen of their commonweal, men famous for their merits, with the title of Providitori or general Pourueiers without whose consent the General may not fight nor undertake any action of importance. And although it may seem to breed many inconveniencies to see a Pourueier command a General, a citizen strangers, and one that understands nothing in war, him that hath been bred up in it; yet by this means they avoid other dangers which are of no less importance, wherinto the commonweal hath fallen whenas they have employed their own subjects and forces.  
To treat of their warlike preparation for the sea, as of the thing which is of greatest importance, I will speak first of the beginning, to the end it may be the better understood: I say therefore that it is no other thing but that admirable Arsenal of Venice, the which is not only very great, but also the fairest and the best furnished with all war like necessaries that is this day in the world. It stands in a corner of the city, & so near unto the sea, as it doth not seem to be divided but to be a part of it; the which makes it to seem greater in the opinion of such as do behold it. It is environed with good walls, but without any rampires, for that it cannot be battered; and we may say, that it stands in an Island, for that it is compassed about with a channel, the which we may otherwise call the fort of Venice.  
There are many times two hundred galleys in this Arsenal, besides others at sea, the which have been accustomed to be forty in number: and there are also twenty great galleys, the which in regard of the lesser may be called men at arms, for that they are neither so light nor so fit to row as the rest: but they work a greater effect in a sea fight having a good wind, and they are able to charge one hundred small galleys: they make their armies invincible, being of greater service than ships of war, for that besides their fails, they may use their oars. There is in this Arsenal so many means to arm an infinite number of men, as it is an admirable thing to ●ce, and there is such abundance of ordnance, not only sufficient for so many galleys, with offensive and defensive arms for the soldiers and mariners, but also there is such store of all other things, as this Arsenal might furnish private ships, forts, and armies at land whenas necessity requires.  
As for timber to make new galleys there is great abundance, not so much for the quantity and greatness of the woods which the signory hath near unto the sea, as for the care they have throughout all this Estate to preserve their oaks, the which are easily transported to Venice by sea, and by the rivers which fall into the sea near unto this city.  
But to speak in a word what may be conceived of the arsenal, I say that in the whole world the like is not to be found, nor better furnished with good workmen, which are to the number of three hundred, who labour continually and with such diligence as it is admirable, so as there hath been seen in less than ten days thirty galleys fully armed and made ready to fight, and we may conjecture that in a short time they are able to arm them all. They employ much money in this Arsenal, in the which they make none but great and small galleys, with some brigantins, for that private men having great ships, the commonweal makes not any, but may use them when they have n●ed. They want no men to row in their galleys, for that all their sea towns, and those of the firm Land with the city of Venice do furnish what they want, and as for soldiers, they employ those men which they call Cernides. The Captains and Commanders of galleys are for the most part gentlemen of Venice, whose number is very great; so as every galley besides the Commander hath two Venetian gentlemen to exercise them in the discipline of the sea. They have no want of any thing but biscuit, especially when it is dear: yet they make good provision, having many great storehouses, in the which they keep abundance of wheat, and other corn, and also of biscuit.  
For the guard and safety of the gulf of Venice, and the Islands of the Ionian sea, they entertain continually an army of five and thirty or forty galleys with a Providitor or Pourueior, and a Captain of the gulf; and this doth cost the State yearly five thousand ducats, accounting the biscuit. These galleys not only secure the sea from pirates, but are also a means to breed up many gentlemen in their armies at sea, although they have no war of any great importance: and moreover this doth purchase great reputation unto the signory.  
Whensoever the Turk arms, they do in like manner increase the number of their galleys, and then they make a General of their army, whose name is so much esteemed by the Turks, as they dare not come near the gulf, much less the city of Venice. But notwithstanding that this guard be strong, yet is it not able to secure all vessels which sail through this gulf, for that the lesser which keep near unto the coast of Dalmatia are spoiled by a certain kind of pirates called Vscoques, who retire to Segne and Flew, places belonging to the house of Austria: and these men come with certain armed banks and molest the smaller ships in such sort as the signory is forced to entertain a captain at sea with five galliots, who hath no other charge but to root out this race; and although the expense be great, yet the profit is not small to punish a number of thieves.  
It is no difficult thing to conceive what number of ships and galleys the segneurie may set forth, for that wanting neither timber, arms, men nor money, they may arm what they please: and although for a long time there hath not been seen at sea above one hundred galleys, and few ships, yet be that will look into former times, shall found that two or three hundred years since, the signory had not so great forces; and yet they did arm two hundred ships or galleys for the conquest of the holy Land, and as many for that of Constantinople, whenas the Venetians went thither with the French.  
Wherefore if necessity did press the Venetians, we must think that at this day whenas they abound more in wealth, and are more mighty in subjects, having also an arsenal better furnished than ever; they are not only able to set forth the like number of vessels, but also to exceed it; and if they do it not, the reason is for that they would not hazard so many in one action: and although they be inferior to the Turks in number, yet are they not in power, and it is most certain that if they were set upon by the Turks galleys, they would not fear to fight with them, and for this cause the Turks durft never charge them.   

¶ The Government.  
LEt us come now to discourse of the order by the which this goodly signory hath been so long time governed, and how it hath continued longer than any other which hath come to our knowledge; and after what manner it hath preserved itself, amidst such wars and combustions, so as it seems her subjects, in resp●●t of others, enjoy a golden age, living in tranquility and peace, and increasing daily in prosperity and wealth: the which I hold doth proceed chiefly from the will of God, who hath a particular care of this commonweal, and moreover we cannot deny but it grows by a well ordered government instituted by wise men, who in former ages might have been held for moral Philosophers. Although this commonweal be governed by gentlemen, and not by the people, yet can we not say that it is a government of many, nor of few; and although it hath a prince or duke, that it is the government of one alone: but it is composed of all the three kinds of governments, out of which they have made one that is perfect.  
This Commonweal hath one head, who represents the Majesty of the empire in his robes, his gravity, and reputation, and he is called Duke or Captain; by whom it seems all the rest are led, to see his attire, and the outward carriage of an absolute prince: of whose election we will speak hereafter, and of his power.  
For the government and preservation of this flourishing Estate, 
Great Council.  they have made a great Council, which doth consist of an assembly of all the gentlemen of Venice, so as every one which hath past the age of five and twenty years, may enter into this Council, and give his voice, but he must first prove his age by the oath of his father or mother (if they be alive) or else by his nearest kinsmen; and he must also prove by the testimony of two witnesses that he is borne a gentleman. They have also a law by the which those gentlemen that have past the age of twenty years may be admitted to come into the Council, being allowed by the suffrages of the prince and Senat. The number of gentlemen that may lawfully enter into this Council, is about two thousand five hundred. But for that many are continually employed abroad for the service of the State, and some being busied about other affairs, there do never assemble above one thousand six hundred, and these meet once every week, that is to say, on the Sunday morning, and upon every feast day in the morning, whereas they choose the magistrates, and distribute the governments of the Commonweal with a wonderful order. I will for bear to set down the manner of their sitting in Council, and of the election of magistrates by lots, fearing to be tootedious, and it may be not pleasing; I will only make mention of the Counsels and chief officers of this State.  
One of the chief members of the Commonweal is the Council of the Pregadi, for that in it they treat and determine of all matters of greatest importance. 
Pregadi.  They are so called (according to the opinion of some) for that they were in old time assembled by the public officers, and as it were entreated by them to come and give their advice touching the affairs of the Commonweal. The Council of the Pregadi consists of one hundred and twenty, besides the which, there are others which may enter into this Council, and give their voices, as the Duke, the Six Councillors, the Council of Ten, the Auogadori, and all the Procurators of S. Mark, with divers other officers, who having past the time of their charge, may enter presently into the Council of the Pregadi, and enjoy the same privileges. There are other inferior magistrates which may enter into this Council, yet they have no voices, but this honour is done them to understand the affairs of the Commonweal, to make them to be the more esteemed.  
They have been accustomed during the necessities of the Commonweal, to grant a privilege to enter into the Council of the Pregadi, to such as had assisted the Commonweal with a certain sum of money, the law prefixing a certain time how long they should enjoy this honour, but they could not give their voices. This Council cannot determine nor conclude of any business, unless there be four Councillors present, and that there be sixty in the whole number which give their suffrages.  
Next to the Council of the Pregadi, is the College, 
The College.  which is the third member of the Commonweal, and of great reputation. This College doth chiefly consist of three magistrates, which are the great Sages or wisemen, the Sages of the firm land, and the Sages of the sea, and it contains sixteen gentlemen; the great Sages are six in number, and either of the other two five. Moreover, it is composed of the signory, that is to say of the Prince, of the six Councillors, and three heads or Precedents of the forty. The Sages of the sea have charge of those matters which belong unto the sea, both for peace, war, and other affairs. The Sages of the firm land treat of matters of the land belonging to war, or peace; and their chief charge is, to see what numbers of soldiers are entertained by the Commonweal. The grand Sages have a care both of the one and the other, and their chief charge is of war and peace, with other matters of the like consequence. The College assembles every morning two hours after Sun rising. And you must understand, that whensoever we say the College, it is meant by the assembly of the aforesaid three magistrates, with the Duke, Councillors, and the three precedents of the forty; whereas they read all letters received since their last assembly, give audience to Ambassadors, if any demand it, and dispatch all matters belonging to the three Magistrates.  

The Duke.  The supreme magistrate of the city is called Duke: his authority in the beginning was great, but it hath been since moderated. And to the end every thing may be plainly understood, whenas the Duke is dead, the six Councillors, with the three Precedents of the forty, enter the palace, whereas the eldest Councillor carries himself as Vice Duke: and for this cause he doth manage certain business which belongs unto the Duke's office. All dispatches sent by this signory, are written in the name of the Governors: who never go out of the palace, until that a new Duke be created. The palace gates are shut, and a little guard set at the wicket, more for an ancient custom than for any necessary occasion, for that the city is no more troubled for the death of the prince, than it would be for any private gentleman. It is true, that the magistrates assemble not to do justice until there be a new Duke created: the which the law hath ordained, for that the gentlemen being busied about this creation, have no leisure to attend affairs. They 'cause the dead body of the Duke, being attired in his ducal robes, to be brought into a low chamber, called the Hall of Pioveghi: whereas it remains three days, and there are twenty gentlemen attired in scarlet appointed to attend it, when it is brought down into the Hall, and there they sit about it during the said three days. After which his funerals are made, with that pomp and magnificence that is requisite for so great a dignity. The day after, the great Council assembles, whereas the great Chancellor gives them to understand, that before they begin the creation of a future Duke, they should choose the five Correctors, and three Inquisitors. The office of the Inquisitor is to examine the life and actions of the deceased duke, and to search if he hath observed the laws: and finding that he hath e●red in any thing, they are bound to accuse him: and all the punishment which he had deserved, must fall upon his heirs; but they are only pecuniary fines. The office of the Correctors is to consider if it be needful to bring in any new law, to be observed by the new prince, or correct any error which hath been discovered in the government of the last Duke. After all this, they proceed to the election of a new Duke, the manner whereof I omit for brevities sake.  

Six Councillors.  The supreme marks of the Venetian empire, are settled in the Duke's person, for that he seems to be absolute lord in the Commonweal. But notwithstanding that he enjoyeth this great dignity, yet hath he not full power in any thing: for that he may not determine of any thing without the presence of his Councillors, which are six, and they are always chosen of the most honourable gentlemen of the city, according to the greatness and dignity of the place. These six Councillors sit with the Duke and dispatch all affairs, especially private and particular, as to give audience, to read public letters, grant privileges, and such like: in which the Duke cannot do any thing without the presence of four Councillors. And when the duke is not with them, they may dispatch affairs, as they shall think good.  

Council of Ten.  The Council of Ten is a member of the Commonweal, of very great importance, whose authority is like unto that of the Pregadi, over the whole city, for that it may treat of all affairs of State, and is not subject to any greater power. It is true, that they do not practise this authority but in cases of great importance, which were impossible to prevent by other means: as to determine of a war, to conclude a peace, to manage a business secretly, and such like: the which if they were treated of in the assembly▪ and afterwards consulted of in the Council of the Pregadi (as they aught to be) happily they should not be managed with such secrecy and speed as the time required. When as they are to deliberate of any great matter which concerns the State of the whole city, the Council of Ten, with the Prince, and his six Councillors assemble only: and this is simply called the Council of Ten.  

Procurator of S. Mark.  The office of Procurator of S. Mark is of great reputation; for that this dignity like unto the dukes continues for life, and ●ever ends but with death. There was n●uer any gentleman of reputation in this city but had this dignity, and but few dukes since this magistrate was erected, but was first a Procurator. In old time there was but one Procurator instituted to have the charge of the Temple of S. Mark, and of the treasures thereof: afterwards Sebastian Ziant having at his death left great foundations to the Church, there was another created for the managing of that which he had left, and so from time to time they have been augmented, so as in the year 1423 they came to the number of nine, whereof three had the charge of S. Marks Church, and of the treasures: three had the care of such goods as were left by them that dwelled of the one side of Canal-grande, and the other three had the like charge of the goods which were left on the other side of Canal-grande. But in the year 1509 the commonweal was forced to created fix more, and to grant this honour to such as did lend a certain sum of money. They have also authority to force heirs to perform the will of the dead. They wear ducal ornaments, and go before all magistrates.  
The Auogadori, or Tribunes of the commons, are places of great importance, 
Auogador●.  and numbered among the chief. The authority of this magistrate is great, for that it is necessary in all consultations there be at the lest one of the Auogadori, whereof there be three: they have the care and charge to see the laws and privileges observed. There are infinite other officers and magistrates in the city of Venice, the which to avoid tediousness I forbear to describe in particular, referring the curious reader to them that have written whole volumes of this subject.  
We may hereby obseru● that the signory of Venice is merely Aristocratical, distributing the chief honours, dignities, and offices to the gentlemen of Venice; and the lesser which have no power, unto the common people: & yet to content them, the signory hath left them the office of Chancellor, which is one of the worthiest and most honourable within the city, being also continued for life: and moreover they have the offices of Secretaries of Estate, which is also very honourable.  
The duke although he seems to be a prince, yet is he nothing but the first gentleman of Venice, and hath but the conclusion, when there is question of voices in what body or college soever he be. At Venice, the decrees of magistrates bind every one in particular, for the jurisdicton of every magistrate: but the college or council of ten is above particular magistrates, and the senate is above the ten; and the great council (which is the assembly of all the gentlemen of Venice that are of age) holds the sovereignty above the senate; so as if the ten be divided, they call the council of the sages, which make two and thirty, and if they cannot agreed, they assemble the senate: but if the matter concerns high points of majesty, the great council meets. By these three colleges or bodies, all their laws and statutes are made: and ordinary affairs of Estate are dispatched by the seven, which they call the signory.  
Finally there is a wonderful equality worthy of much commendation in this city, whereas they respect neither poor not rich, gentlemans nor common people, who (as I have said) have some share in this commonweal, enjoying many offices which are very beneficial unto them; whereby the people are very much affected unto the nobility, and show themselves very humble, and the gentlemen are their protector●, favouring them in all their necessity's, and advancing them to honours, whereof they are ca●●ble. This signory hath gr●at regard to poverty, for the which they provide by all good means, whereby they make poor miserable wretches, I will not say subject but sl●●eses to them; for that the commonweal doth spend much money to keep down the price of bread, and other things necessary for the life of man. It is therefore no wonder, if the people do willingly and without grudging bear all the burdens during the necessities of the commonweal.  
The people of other towns subject unto this Estate, are in like manner very faithful; for that he which goes to govern them, hath no other end but to do justice to every man, and to assist the towns which are under his charge; for in doing so, at his return he obtains greater honours, but if he govern himself otherwise, he is punished, and no more employed: there is another reason why these people love the Venetian government, for that they are not charged with insupportable customs and imposts, as some miserable towns are by tyrants.  
If we shall compare this commonweal with others which have gone before it (yet not speaking of their greatness and forces, but only of their manner and form of government and good laws) we shall found how much it doth in this point exceed all others: for that we may say those have been governed by men that were greedy of spoil and blood, and this hath been guided by the creator of all things, and found out and framed by Philosophers, with a perfect composition. I cannot found a better example and argument hereof, than the commonweal of Rome, which having in a manner made subject all the world, yet could not maintain her own liberty above seven hundred years: whereas this being environed by so many powerful enemies which have still sought her ruin, having not any neighbour prince for a faithful friend, hath been able for the space of one thousand and two hundred years and more to maintain her liberty, yea and to resist the huge and fearful forces of the great Turk, and in former times of all Christian princes. I know not (to speak the truth) what power is able at this day to vanquish and ruin it, if that discord (the only means to undermine it) creeps not into this commonweal; but there are many grave and wise councillors which watch continually to prevent it: and although it seems to some that for the great wickedness which is committed daily within the city of Venice, she cannot long avoid her total ruin and subversion, yet others know that besides the magistrate who doth his best endeavour to reform all disorders, there are many devout persons whose prayers would stay this desolation.  
Seeing that we have related the perfections of this commonweal, it shall not be impertinent to set down her defects in particular, although they be of no great moment.  
The first (and it may be the greatest) is that they hold so great a country and so populous (for the feeding whereof they have need of victuals from other nations) that if they had not the sea open by the which they bring great store of grain to Venice, their countries should be in continual want of bread, which would be very troublesome to their subjects. For this only reason they do so much esteem a peace with the Turk, whereby there is much corn brought to Venice from countries that are subject unto him, and for this reason also they do so much respect the king of Spain, who doth oftentimes give them leave to transport grain from Sicily and Povillia.  
The second defect is, that they employ none but Italian footmen, although it be certain that they have lost much of their ancient reputation, the which hath happened by the diversity of fight; so as in their battalions they are much inferior to the Swisses and Germans: wherefore this commonweal should have good numbers of Swisses and Germans in their armies, by which means their footmen should be better esteemed.  
The third is, that they make not any one of their subjects, but a stranger General of their army, whereby they subject themselves to the discretion of another. Moreover they are forced to spend much upon their forts, for that men finding daily new devices to assail, it is necessary to change them from time to time; wherein they have many times been at great charge, the which hath much hindered the happiness of this commonweal.  
But these defects are not all past remedy, and for this cause those wise Senators have a continual care to prevent all inconveniences, and have no other design but to preserve the State in peace and liberty. Without doubt they are not like to have any troubles and combustions among themselves, for they never suffer any private quarrel to grow among them, but they presently pacify it, either by love, or by the authority of the sovereign council of ten. Moreover there is not any citizen or gentleman that doth attain to any such reputation, degree, or wealth, as he may hope to make himself a tyrant, but they live lovingly together in great peace and concord.   

¶ The Religion.  
THe Venetians are firm Romish Catholics, as all their subjects be which remain 〈◊〉 Italy: but the inhabitants of the Island of Corfou follow the religion of the G●●●●n schismatics, wherein this commonweal doth not impeach them, fearing lest this people should grow into a mutiny, and be weary of their command, and so invite their enemies to attempt something, and yet the signory hath kerbed them by a fort and a garrison which it entertains there, so as they that would raise any troubles or combustion, should hardly effect their designs. They are after the like manner in Candie, ●hereas the people do wonderfully hate the name and religion of the Latins: It is true that some of them are affected to the Romish Church, and are freed from schism, wherein the rest persist.   

¶ The Dukes and Princes of the Commonweal of Venice: and the most remarkable things which passed during either of their governments.  
1. PAULUS ANAFESTUS was the first prince of the people, chosen in Heraclea, in the year 697, a man of singular justice. He swore in the hands of Christopher Patriarch of Grada, to govern according to the laws, and to have no regard but to the public good. He pacified their differences with Luitprand king of the Lombard's, and made a league with king Aripert. He forced the Equilins, who had rebelled, to obedience, as well by his authority, as by arms, and increased their revenues. He governed twenty years, six months, and eight days.  
2. MARCEL TEGALIAN, of the same place of Heraclea, was chosen to succeed him, by the common consent of the people. He was devout, affable, & modest, but not so careful of the government as his predecessor. The Patriarchship of Grada was transferred to Aquilea in his time, by Luitprand, and there growing great wars, by reason of the two Bishops, he meddled not, but died, having been duke nine years, and one and twenty days.  
3. HORTEE HIPPATE, surnamed Vrse, a nobleman of Heraclea, purchased great reputation by his worthy exploits. Paul the Exarke or governor of Ravenna had recourse unto him, the Graecian army being defeated, and siege laid before Ravenna, by Luitprand. He recovered Ravenna, took the king's nephew prisoner, s●ew the duke of Vincence, and restored the Exarke to his rights. He suppressed them of Aquilea, who troubled the public quiet, and he encouraged the youth to arms. He was slain by reason of the dissensions of the jesulains, having been prince eleven years, and five months.  
After the death of this third duke, in the year 737, they made an assembly, in the which it was decreed and concluded, That they should not choose any duke for six years, and that they should created a master of the soldiers which should be annual: the which continued five years, for in the year 742, they proceeded to the election of a duke, since which t●me the Commonweal of Venice hath always had dukes unto this day. The first which was chosen in this office, ●as Dominic Leon; the second Felix Cornicula; the third Theodat son to Vrse, 〈…〉 f●om banishment, and was continued the year after, but he died before his time expired; the four●h julian Cepare, who was subrogated in his place; the fift was Ciane Fabritiatie, who had his eyes p●t out, an● was dismissed.  
4. THEODAT HIPRATE son to Vrse, was declared duke, five years after the death of his father: during the which, the people were governed by a master of the soldiers, who leaving Heraclea, came to Malamocco. There he was first created, and limited the confines with As●olfo king of the Lombard's. He was slain by Galla a citizen of Malamocco, in the thirteenth year of his principality.  
5. GALLA of Malamocco, a wicked and seditious man, carrying himself as protector of the public liberty, was created in the place of Theodat: but his wickedness being discovered, and that he sought to make himself absolute lord, which was the re●●●● why he had slain Theodat, the people put out his eyes, and within one year took from him the government which he had usurped.  
6. DOMINICO MONEGARIA of Malamocco, was set in the place of G●lia. The people to restrain the duke's authority, made choice of two Tribunes yearly: but he being a bold & an insolent man, sought to tyrannize over the people, who being incensed, put out his eyes, the fist year of his principality.  
7. MAURICE GALBAIA, a gentleman of Heraclea, was chosen to this dignity for his wisdom, justice, and wealth. He made his son duke with him, and they governed together. In his time, the Church of Grada being molested, he sent an ambassador to Pope Stephen to reconcile the difference. The Bishopric of S. Peter of Castel-olivolo was erected, and he died, having governed three and twenty years.  
8. JOHN GALBAIA having been duke nine years with his father, governed the commonweal alone nine years. After which time he made Maurice his son companion of his principality: but both of them being of bad life, and insupportable, for that they had slain john Patriarch of Grada, casting him from the top of a high Tower, Fortunatu●'s, the Patriarches successor, made a conspiracy against them, whereupon a new duke was chosen, whereat they being amazed, the father fled into France, and the son to Mantova in the sixteenth year.  
9 OBELERIUS, being chosen prince by them of the intelligence of Fortunatus, took his brother Beaten for companion, and Valentine their third brother was also associated by them unto this dignity. It is to be noted, that of these three, Beatrice is put in the rank of dukes, in the Council hall at Venice, for that Obelerius had persuaded Pepin king of Italy to make war against the Venetians, and that Beatrice had defended the Commonweal, having reigned five years.  
10. ANGE PARTITIATIUS, having carried himself valiantly in the war against Pepin, was chosen duke, the people being retired to Rialto. He was founder of the duke's palace, in the place where that now stands which was built since. The division of the empire being made in his time, the Venetians were left at liberty. The city was divided into Sestiers, or parts. The Pregadi, and the Forty for criminal causes was instituted. He governed eighteen years.  
11. JUSTINIAN PARTITIATIUS, having been associated in the dignity, by his father, was after his death confirmed by the people. He called home john his brother from Constantinople, and took him for companion. He augmented the people's authority, and relieved Michael emperor of Constantinople, against the Sarrazins The body of S. Mark was in his time brought from Alexandria, and taken for their protector; and the Church which is at this day, was consecrated to his honour. He died the second year.  
12. JOHN PARTITIATIUS, brother to justinian, remained in the dignity, and did much augment the Church of S. Mark, which he caused to be served by a good number of priests, establishing the Primicerio. He caused the head of Obelerius to be cut off, whom he had besieged in the Island of Curtia: He ruined Malamocco, the people having rebelled, and held Obelerius party. He made war against the Narantins, whom he subdued. In the end, there was a conspiracy made against him, and being surprised by his enemy's, near unto S. Peter's Church, going to hear Mass, they stripped him of his ducal ornaments, and confined him to Grada, having shaven his beard, the eight year of his principality, where he become a Monk, and died.  
13. PETER TRADONIC of Pola having carried himself to the people's content in the war against Pepin, was chosen duke. He did associate john his son, and they gave succours to the Emperor of Constantinople, who caused Theodosius Patritius to entreat them. He was made Protospataire of the Empire, to whose succour he sent sixty galleys. Lewis the second granted him many privileges: and in the end he was slain by a sedition, the seven and twentieth year.  
14. VRSE PARTITIATIUS having pacified the sedition, was made duke. The Turks having spoiled Dalmatia even unto Grada, were defeated by him, and john his son who was his associate. The Emperor Basilius honoured him much for this action, and made him Protospataire of the Empire. He governed seventeen years.  
15. JOHN PARTITIATIUS son to Vrse, having been confirmed in his dignity, took and burnt Comachio, and spoiled Ravenna to be revenged of the earl of Coma●hia, who had taken his brother Badoaire prisoner, and wounded him to the death. Growing sickly, he caused the Church of S. Cornelius, and S. Cyprian to be built at Malamocco, and having governed five years and six months, he renounced the dignity.  
16. PETER CANDIAN was chosen after the voluntary demission of his predecessor: he was valiant and expert in arms, yet very devout. He went in person with ten galleys against the Narantins': fight valiantly against them, in his second enterprise he was slai●. He governed but five months.  
DOMINICKE TRIBUN is put in the rank of dukes by some, others that have not so curiously looked into the history have omitted him, having been duke but three months and thirteen days. There is nothing memorable in his time but a certain privilege granted to Chioggia.  
17. PETER surnamed Tribun, son to Dominic being chosen duke, obtained of Guyon emperor and king of Italy, a confirmation of the ancient privileges. The barbarous H●●s came into Italy and burned Heraclea, Cape d'Arger, and Chioggia. This prince defeated them with much honour: and this was the third time that strangers would have usurped this Estate. He governed four and twenty years.  
18. VRSE BADOAIRE was called Partitiatius, and was the first which changed his name. He sent Peter his son to Constantinople, who was made Protospataire. In the year 920 he obtained of Radolph emperor and king of Italy, the confirmation of the ancient authority of the Venetians to coin money. He gave himself wholly to pieti●, and in the twentieth year he renounced the dignity to become a Monk, and lived religiously.  
19 PETER CANDIAN the second, was a valiant man, and made war against Lanterio marquis of Istria, who hindered the Venetians traffic, whom he subdued, and conquered the people of Capo d'Istria. He vanquished Albert son to Berengarius the emperor, who having seized upon Ravenna, stopped the passage of the Venetian ships. In his time the maidens that were apt for marriage were stolen away by the Triestains, and recovered again. He governed seven years.  
20. PETER BADOAIRE son to Vrse was redeemed by him from the slavonians. He did rule but two years and seven months, always in peace, which he made show to love much. The Emperor Berengarius did him many favours for his merits.  
21. PETER CANDIAN the third, son to the second Candian, did associate his son Peter to the dignity: he armed three and thirty vessels twice against the Narantins': at the second time he made a peace with them. His son being blamed by him for his bad behaviour, revolted against him and the commonweal. The people would have slain him, but he was sent into exile, where joining with Guyon son to Berengarius, annoyed the commonweal, the which did much trouble his father; so as he died in the fifteenth year.  
22. PETER CANDIAN the fourth, being called from banishment (notwithstanding that the people had taken an oath never to receive him) was made prince with great applause. He wrought so with Pope john the twelfth, as the ●●●hop of Grada was made Patriarch, and Metropolitan of all the Venetian Estate, and of Istria. The Emperor Otho granted him many honourable privileges. He ruined Vderze, and was slain● in a sedition of the people, having governed twenty years.  
23. PETER VRSEOLA was a very devout man, and chosen by the people against his will. He went often disguised to visit the poor and hospitals: he pacefied the dissensions of the Venetians with them of C●po d'Istria, who yielded themselves tributaries. He went with Beato Romualdo of Ravenna to live a religious life: having governed two years, two months, and twenty days.  
24. VITAL CANDIAN son to Peter the third, made a league with the Emperor Otho. He fell sick in the beginning of his charge; so as having made a vow to become a Monk if he recovered his health, he performed it, having governed a year or thereabouts.  
25 TRIEUNE MEME was very rich, but no man of State. In his time there were great dissensions betwixt the families of the Morosins and Caloprins, by reason whereof there were great murders committed. He held the Morosins' faction, which made the rest retire to Verona, to the Emperor Otho. He gave the Island of S. George to the Abbot Morosin, and renounced the principality the twelfth year, to become a Monk.  
26 PETER VRSEOLA the second, was a politic man, who dealt so with the Emperors Basilius and Alexius, as the Venetians were freed from customs. Otho the Emperor being at Verona did him the honour, among other things, to christian his son. He was the first that did enlarge their confines by sea, getting many places in Istria and Dalmatia. Having finished the church and palace he died, the eighteenth year of his principality.  
27 OTHO VRSEOLA having governed a while with Peter his father, was confirmed in the dignity at the age of eighteen years: he won such reputation, as Geisca king of Hongarie gave him a sister of his to wife. He vanquished them of Istria which had rebelled, and went in person into Dalmatia to the enterprise against Cresmur. In the end they that envied his glory conspired against him, who having shaven off his beard, he was confined into Greece the seventeenth year.  
28 PETER CENTRANIC or BARBOLAN succeeded Otho: but not able to pacify the dissensions, as well for the mutinies of the citizens, as of their neighbours, was forced to quit the dignity, and to become a Monk. Orso Patriarch of Grado, brother to Otho, who was retired to Constantinople, was constituted attending his return. He continued about a year in the palace, and left the principality, hearing news of Otho's death. Dominic Vrseola sought to usurp the dignity, but he was expelled by the people the next day, and died at Ravenna.  
29 DOMINIC FLABENIC was chosen during his exile by the faction of those who had expelled Dominic Vrseola: in his time in the year 1040 there was a National council called touching ecclesiastical orders. He brought the State in jealousy of the family of the Vrseoli, and sought to supplant it. He governed ten years, four months, and twelve days.  
30 DOMINIC CONTAREN was very pleasing unto the people: He pacified Dalmatia, which had been much afflicted by the rebellion of Zara: he favoured the Normans against Robert king of Povillia. The discord which was betwixt the Commonweal, and Pepo patriarch of Aquilea was pacified by him. He caused the monastery of S. Nicholas upon Lido to be built, and died in the eight and twentieth year.  
31 DOMINIC SILVI● going to the funeral of his predecessor, was in the midst there of saluted duke by the acclamations of the people, and purchased such reputation, as Nicephor●● emperor of Constantinople gave him his sister in marriage. By her persuasion he made war against the abovenamed Robert, and at the first won an honourable victory, seizing upon Duras. The second time he fought 〈◊〉 much disadvantage, whereby his credit was blemished. He first of all 〈◊〉 the Church of S. Mark with marble, and caused it to be wrought after t●●●osaicke fashion: He died the thirteenth year.  
32 VITALIS FALE● 〈◊〉 being made duke, did presently obtain of the emperor Alexius the soveraigue of Dalmatia, and Croatia, Henry, successor to the empire, did him great 〈◊〉, and being come upon devotion to Venice, he christened his daughter. The 〈…〉 Proprio was instituted in his time, and the work of S. Marks Church 〈◊〉. He governed twelve years.  
33 VITALIS MICHAELI, by his valour at sea did much extend the limits of the commonweal. He made war in the East by the persuasion of Pope Urbin the second, to conquer the Holy land, with other Christian Princes. The Island of Smirne, Suria, and Hie●●●alem were taken from the Insidels. He died the sixt year.  
34 ORD●LAFIUS FAL●RIYSS, son to Vitalis, assisted king Baldwin against the ●●●idelss in the conquest of the Holy land, and they had such success, as they divided the 〈◊〉 betwixt them, throughout all the realm of India. In the eight year of his 〈◊〉, Malamocco was in a manner all burnt and drowned, which made them to 〈◊〉 Bishops See to Chioggia. He went in person to the war against Zara, which 〈◊〉, and having won the victory, he returned the second time, where he died 〈◊〉, the fifteenth year of his principality.  
●OMINIC MICHAELI, being made duke, for his great reputation and merits, 〈◊〉 (by the means of Pope Calixtus) to secure the Christians in the Holy land, with 〈◊〉 ●undred sail, causing the Infidels to raise the siege from before joppa. He took 〈◊〉 which he gave to Vanmond Patriarch of Jerusalem. Emanuel the emperor made 〈◊〉 against him, from whom he took Chio, Rhodes, Samos, Metellin, and Istre. He 〈◊〉 the principality the thirteenth year.  
●ETER POLANUS, son in law to Michaeli, was a very wise man, so as he 〈◊〉 chosen Arbitrator betwixt Conrade and Emanuel, emperors. He made war against 〈◊〉 of Pisa and Pidova, whom he vanquished. He did arm against the duke of 〈◊〉 ●avour of the foresaid Emanuel, from whom he recovered many possessions taken 〈◊〉 ●he empire. Somesay, that it was his son which won those battles, and that he 〈◊〉 being fallen sick, returned, and died the eighteenth year.  
●OMINIC MOROSINI cleansed the gulf of certain Pirates of Ancona, whose 〈◊〉 Guiscard was taken and hanged. He besieged Pola, the which he took, with 〈◊〉, which towns had rebelled in Istria. He made a league with William king of 〈◊〉 from whom he obtained many exemptions for the traffic of merchants. Zara 〈◊〉 Metropolitan at his instance, and he caused Dominic the ninth his son to 〈◊〉 earl. He beautified the city of Venice with buildings, and began the Tower 〈…〉. He died, seven years, and five months after his election,  
〈◊〉 MICHAELI the second, subdued the Tarentins, who had rebelled the 〈◊〉: he committed Vlricke patriarch of Aquilea to prison, with twelve Chanoins. 〈◊〉 hundred days he put one hundred galleys and twenty ships to sea, against the 〈◊〉 Emanuel. The family of the justiniani, was in his time reduced to one only, 〈◊〉 was ● Monk, whom he drew out of a Monastery, by the Pope's consent, and gave 〈◊〉 his daughter in marriage. There happened a great plague in his time, whereof the 〈◊〉 imputing the fault unto him, he was wounded, and died, having governed 〈◊〉 years, and seven and twenty days.  
●EBASTIAN ZIANI was the first that was chosen by ten electors. In his time 〈◊〉 was a great Schism in the Church, by reason of the emperor Frederic Barbarousse, 〈…〉 Alexander the third abandon the holy See, Octavian having been made 〈◊〉 Alexander retired to Venice, where having served long in the Monastery of the 〈◊〉, he was in the end known and taken forth by the Prince and signory. 〈◊〉 made war against the Venetians upon this occasion. Octavian his son was 〈◊〉 who was the means of a reconciliation, that his father came to Venice to kiss the 〈◊〉 feet: In requital whereof, he obtained many privileges, and died in the fift 〈◊〉 of his government.  
AURIA MARIPIERE was the first duke that was chosen by the forty which 〈◊〉 ●reated to that end, after the death of Ziani. They gave him six councillors to 〈…〉 his resolutions. He conquered Zara, which had rebelled the fourth time: He 〈◊〉 succours to the Christians against the Sarrazins, which had usurped the Holy land 〈◊〉 eight years after that Baldwin had delivered it. Ptolemaide was recovered, and 〈…〉 successor to Emanuel the emperor, delivered many Venetian merchants. 〈◊〉 ●●nounced the principality the fourteenth year, to become a religious man.  
HE●RIE DANDULO was also chosen by the forty. They of Zara were again 〈…〉, and Pola subdued. In his time Constantinople was taken, with the empire 〈◊〉 ●ast, wherein he assisted the French Princes and Barons. He died the thirteenth 〈◊〉▪ being General of all the Christian armies.  
●●TER ZIANI son to Sebastian was made duke some time after the death of Dandulo, the Correctors being then instituted. In his time there came Ambassadors from Athens, and Achaia, to submit themselves to the obedience of the Commonweal. Candie was peopled by a Colony of Venetian gentlemen. He married Constance, daughter to Tancred king of Sicily. In the end, he renounced the principality, having governed four and twenty years.  
43. JAMES TEPULI was made duke by lot, in concurrence of Renieri Candolo, who had as many voices as he. Candie rebelled, and the seditious were punished. Zara, which had shaken off the yoke, was made subject again. There was war against the Fetrarois, and against Ezzelin, who had seized upon Padova. In the end, he quit the principality the twentieth year, and died soon after.  
44. MARIN MOROSINI, was made duke by the forty, by reason of the precedent concurrence. In his time there was another Colony of gentlemen sent into Candie, who built Canea. He made war against Ezzelin that besieged Mantova: who through rage and despite flew twelve thousand Padovans which he had in his army. He died the fourth year of his principality.  
45. RENIERI ZENO being Podesta at Firma, was chosen duke, and sent for with four galleys. Under him the Commonweal obtained a famous victory against them of Genova; but the joy was short, for that Michael Paleologus expelled the French and the Venetians out of Constantinople, being assisted by the Genevo is forces, fifty eight years after the taking of the city. They of Genova were defeated again: and having governed sixteen years he died.  
46. LAURENCE TEPULI was made duke, in remembrance of the victory which he won of the Genevois at tire. He made a noble alliance for two of his sons, with two strange ladies, the which was afterwards forbidden by a law. Ceruia made it ●e●fe subject to the Commonweal, and the Bolonians were defeated. He governed seven years and five and twenty days.  
47. JAMES CONTARIN at the age of eighty years, of Procurator of S. Mark was made duke. The law against bastards was published, and they excluded from all public charges. There grew certain rebellions in Istria, and by them of Genova, which were pacified. In the end, for his great age, he renounced the dignity, by the advice of the Senate, having governed four years, and six months.  
48. DANDULO was chosen, being absent. The city in his time was much afflicted with waters, and earthquakes. He made war in Istria against the Patriarch of Aquilea, and the Earl of Goritia. At the instance of Pope Nicholas he did secure the Archbishop of Tripoli with five and twenty galleys. He died the seventh month after the eight year of his government.  
49. PETER GRADONIC, a valiant man, freed the Commonweal from two great dangers, the one by reason of a great disgrace which happened in a battle against them of Genova, and the other for the conspiracy of Baiamonte, whom he suppressed being in arms upon S. Marks place. It was ordained, that the gentlemen should have the government, and the Council of Ten was instituted. Having governed two and twenty years and nine months, he died.  
50. MARIN GEORGE was so good as they surnamed him the Holy. Venice was always excommunicated in his time, by reason of the taking of Ferrara. Zara rebelled the sixt time, and they had much trouble to bring them to their duties. He built the monastery of S. Dominic, and died eighty one years old, having governed ten months and ten days.  
51. JOHN SOURANCE had the honour to recover Zara, and other places, distracted in his predecessors time. Negropent was recovered, and war was made against them of Genova. The excommunication was taken away at Venice, by the means of Francis Dandulo, who cast himself at the Pope's feet with an iron chain about his neck. The number of the Procurators of S. Mark was augmented unto six. He governed sixteen years, and six months.  
52. FRANCIS DANDULO, who had so much humbled himself for his country, was ●●●●nced to the highest dignity. They of Pola and Valese submitted themselves to the ●●●●nweale, the which bred a war against the Patriarch of Aquilea. Padova was ta●● 〈◊〉 Albert Scaliger, and Treviso with the country remained to the commonweal. 〈…〉 into league with the Christian princes against the Turk, and in his time there 〈…〉 threescore Ambassadors at Venice. He governed ten years, and ten months.  
●●●ARTOLOMEW GRADONIC, Procurator of S. Mark, was made duke being 〈◊〉 and six years old, by the c●ssion of Andrew Dandulo. In his time happened (as 〈◊〉 ●eleeve) that great miracle of S. Mark, S. George, and S. Nicholas, who delivered Ve●●●om a great and imminent inundation. Candie rebelled, and the rebels were se●●●● punished. There fell a great dearth in the city, which bred a discontentment in the 〈◊〉. And he died the fourth year.  
●● ANDREW DANDULO who had quit the place to Gradonic, caused the dearth to 〈◊〉 having sent for corn into Sicily. He obtained of the king of Babylon free traffic 〈◊〉 ●●gypt. Zara rebelled the seventh time, and was suppressed. A war was made against 〈◊〉 of Genova, and the city was afflicted with two great accidents, the one an Earth●●●● and the other the plague. He governed twelve years wanting some months.  
●● MARIN FALERIUS was chosen being Ambassador at Rome. Having received 〈◊〉 from certain private men, the which not being revenged, according to his de●●●● resolved, being fourscore years old, to make himself absolute Lord The con●●●● being discovered by Nicholas Lion, he had his head cut off in the palace: and it 〈◊〉 ●reed that in the place of his Portrait should be written, This is the place of Ma●●●●rius, who for his heinous offence lost his head. He was duke ten months.  
●●●●HN GRADONIC surnamed Naso, had an excellent wit & a bad face. The war 〈◊〉 ●ewed against the Genevois, which ended with a peace. He had war also against 〈◊〉 of Hongarie for Dalmatia. Treviso was besieged in his time, and he went thi●●●●●erson. He governed one year, three months, and fourteen days.  
●●●●HN DAUPHIN was chosen duke, being in Treviso for defence thereof against 〈◊〉 of Hongarie. The Senate sent to demand free passage for him, which being re●●●●, he sallied forth with two hundred horse in spite of the enemy, whither the Se●●●●ame to receive him: within a short time he ended this war, and recovered Conilian, 〈◊〉, and Asola. He made a peace for the sovereignty of Dalmatia, and died the 〈◊〉 fortieth year of his age, having governed four years, two months, and eleven 〈◊〉.  
●●●●AURENCE CELSE upon a false bruit of a victory against the Genevois, was 〈◊〉 luke in concurrence of Peter Gradonic, Leonard Dandulo, and Mark Cornaro. Candie 〈◊〉 and they had great difficulty to recover it, whereupon they made a Tourney, 〈◊〉 public feast upon S. Marks place. He died two days after the fourth year of his ●●●palitie.  
●● MARK CORNARO a very learned and a wise man, sent into Candie, which had 〈◊〉, where there grew cruel wars, the Pope giving full indulgence to them that 〈◊〉 go. The rebels being severely punished, the commonweal presented a certain ●●●ber of galleys to Pope Urbin the fist. He governed two years, five months, and 〈◊〉 and twenty days.  
●●. ANDREW CONTARIN fled into the country of Padova for fear of being ●●●sen duke, as presaging the ruin which should happen in his time to the Commonweal. First there was a war made by them of Trieste, and afterwards by Carrara, for the 〈◊〉 of Padova, the which was such as Chioggia being taken, the city of Venice was 〈◊〉 extreme danger: but in the end he went in person against the enemies, defeated 〈◊〉 and recovered Chioggia. He died having governed fifteen years, four months, 〈◊〉 fifteen days.  
●●. MICHAEL MORESINI, was a man full of all wisdom and learning. Some 〈◊〉 in his time the Island of Tenedos was taken, and not in his predecessors. There 〈◊〉 divers laws made, and among others, it was ordained that murderers which were 〈◊〉 should afterwards lose their heads. He ruled but four months, and five days, and died seventy and four years old.  
62. ANTHONY VENIERI, a rigorous obseruor of justice, causing his own son to be banished, for that he had lightly offended the family of a gentleman of Venice. He made a league with Galeazze Visconte, against Carara, from whom he took Padova. He succoured the Emperor Emanuel against the Turk, and did aid Sigismond king of Hongarie, who came afterwards to the Empire. S. Marks place and that of Realte were much beautified in his time. He died having ruled eighteen years wanting one month, and three days.  
63. MICHAEL STENO had the dignity of Procurator of S. Mark, with that of duke. There was a famous battle won against the Genevois: Carara was vanquished the last time, and Padova and Verona taken. They of Vincentia yielded to the commonweal, to free themselves from his tyranny. Ladislaus king of Hongarie in like manner jest Zara. He died having governed thirteen years, and three days.  
64. THOMAS MOCENIGO was first of all General of the gulf. He embraced peace to the end the citizens might traffic. Vd●na came under the obedience of this State, with the country of Friuli, by the means of the Seigniours of Savorgnani, who were made gentlemen of Venice. The Florintins' had succours given them against the duke of Milan. He ruled ten years, and three months.  
65. FRANCIS FOSCARIN did much suppress the duke of Milan, who began to seize upon the liberty of Italy: Brescia, Bergamo, & other towns of Lombardie were gotten among which were Loda and Parma, and Ravenna in Romagna: he had great success at sea, and in Morea. The Senate did secure the Emperor Paleologus against the Turks, who usurped Constantinople in the year 1453. He was chosen Arbitrator by the duke of Milan, in certain controversies of neighbourhood. The king of Datia was made a gentleman of Venice. Then the duke for his great weakness was dismissed, having governed four and thirty year, and six months.  
66. PASCHAL MALIFIERE being Procurator of S. Mark, was chosen duke in the place of Foscarin, who died two days after his dismission. There was a law made that from that time no duke should be deposed. In his time printing was brought into Venice. The Arsenal was much enlarged, and he entertained the people in peace, during four years, six months, and five days that he governed.  
67. CHRISTOPHER MO●O was also of a Procurator of S. Mark made duke He entertained peace for a time, but in the second year of his government, the Turk grown proud by the taking of Constantinople, declared wa● against the Venetians. They made a league with Pope Pius the second, and the duke of Bourgondie, but the Pope dying they were left alone and maintained the wars twenty years. He died having reigned nine years, and six months.  
68 NICHOLAS TRONI was fortunate, for in his time the affairs of the commonweal succeeded well against the Turk. Peter Mocenigo General in the Archipelago, having joined with the Pope, the king of Naples, & them of Rhodes, drew together eighty and five galleys, and took Satalia, a city of Panfilia. He made also a league with the king of Persia against the Turk. james king of Cypress coming to Venice married K●therine Cornara the adopted daughter of S. Mark. He governed one year, eight months, and five days.  
69. NICHOLAS MARCEL Procurator of S. Mark, after certain laws made by the Correctors, was chosen duke. In his time there was a conspiracy in Cypress, to make the realm fall into the hands of Ferdinand king of Naples. Peter Mocenigo went thither with a great army, pacified all, and punished the rebels severely. Scutarie was besieged by the Turk, and valiantly defended by Antonio Loredano. This duke governed one year, four months, and seventeen days.  
70. PETER MOCENIGO was chosen duke in remembrance of his brave exploits. Lepanto was besieged in his time by the Turks, and valiantly defended by Antonio Lore●●●●. They carried their arms against the Island of Stalamene, and the said Loredano his valour to defend it. The daughter of king Ferdinand came to Venice with the Cardinal her brother, where they were royally entertained. This prince caused a certain coin to h● made which he called by his name, and he governed but one year, two months, and nine days.  
71. ANDREW VENDRAMINE, was unfortunate in his government, for the Ven●●● army was twice put to rout by the Turks: once near unto Croya in Albania; 〈◊〉 ●he second time in the country of Friuli. In his person he had this happiness, That 〈◊〉 of a goodly stature, he had a most beautiful wife, and goodly children, whom he ●●ed by marriages to the best Families. He governed one year, and eight months.  
72. JOHN MOCENIGO, brother to Peter Mocenigo, having continued the war against the Turk, in the end he made a peace with him, upon condition, that he should 〈◊〉 Scutari and Stipula to have liberty of traffic, and that they might keep a bailiff 〈◊〉 constantinople. He made war against Ferdinand king of Naples, at the request of 〈◊〉 Sixtus the fourth, which was the cause of the long war of the league. In the end, ●●●●ce was made, the Commonweal having gotten Rovigo and Polesan. The city was 〈◊〉 deformed by fire and plague; and this prince died having governed seven years, 〈◊〉 six months.  
73. MARK BARBADIC (the plague being ceased) repaired the palace which the 〈◊〉 burnt. He had a maxim different from all other Princes, to know how to par●●●●d forget the private injuries which had been done him, and to revenge them se●●● which had been committed against the State. The great Turk sent a particular ●●●●ssadour unto him, to congratulat his election. He governed but nine months.  
74. AUGUSTINE BARBADIC opposed himself against Charles the eight the 〈◊〉 king, whenas he made war against the house of Arragon, for the realm of 〈◊〉 which he conquered. The Turk took Lepante, Modene, and Corone, from the Commonweal. The realm of Cypress was under the protection of the Senate, and 〈◊〉 Katherine brought to Venice. The office of Health was created by reason of 〈◊〉. The duke governed fifteen years and one and twenty days.  
75. LEONARD LOREDAN endured a cruel war against the greates Princes of 〈◊〉, a league being made at Cambray betwixt the emperor Maximilian, the French 〈◊〉 him of Naples, the dukes of Savoy, Ferrara and Mantova, persuaded thereunto by 〈◊〉 julio the second. All the Venetians Estate upon the firm land was taken, except 〈◊〉, but in the end it was recovered. He lived in the principality nineteen years, eight months, and twenty days.  
76. ANTHONY GRIMANI, being General in a famous overthrow, was thereup●●ut from his charge of Procurator of S. Mark, and confined to Cherses. He broke his punishment, and retired to Rome to the Cardinal his son, where he did so many ●ood offices, as he was not only restored to his dignity of Procurator, but also made duke being eighty two years old. He governed but one year, ten months, and two days.  
77. ANDREW GRITTI carrying away the greatest part of the glory for the recovery of Padova, was in great esteem. He prevailed so with the French king, where he was a prisoner, as his majesty allied himself with the Commonweal, and that Verona and Brescia were recovered. He carried himself with great liking of the Senate during the wars betwixt the emperor Charles the fift, and Francis the first, and also against Soli●●●. He governed fifteen years, seven months, and eight days.  
78. PETER LAUD continued the defence of the commonweal against the Turk, with whom in the end he made a peace, the which he maintained and enjoyed during the 〈◊〉 betwixt the abovenamed Charles and Francis. He governed six years, and eight ●●yess.  
79. FRANCIS DONAT, making use of the peace, beautified the city with many ●oodly buildings, and among others, with that of the Palace. He sent to secure the emp●●our against certain rebels in Germany. The princes of Guise being come to Ve●●●● in his time, were royally entertained there, according to their dignity. He governed se●● years, and six months.  
80. MARK● ANTHONY TREVISAN, a man wholly given to devotion, had a care to have the Commonweal flourish in riches, and good manners, he laboured by his good example, that vice should not creep in as it doth by too long a peace. He governed one year, lacking three days.  
81. FRANCIS VIVIER could so govern the Commonweal, as notwithstanding that in his time the Turk made war against Povillia, and the French king in Tuscanie, yet the Queen of Poland was royally entertained at Venice. He governed two years, one month, and twenty days.  
82. LAURENCE PRIOLI was solicited by the Pope to make war against the emperor, but being a friend to the Commonweal he would not offend him, and did mediate a peace. In his time a peace was made betwixt France and Spain. Charles the fift died. This prince governed three years, eleven months, and eight days.  
83. JEROSME PRIOLI, brother to the precedent duke, enjoyed great honours which Pope Pius the fourth did unto the Commonweal, whom he favoured much, hea●ing her ambassadors in the place of audience for kings. In his time the Council of Trent was concluded, whether he sent for ambassadors Nicholas de Ponte, and Matthew Dandolo. The Commonweal did christian the duke of Savoys son, borne of Margueri●e of France. He died, having governed eight years, two months, and four days.  
84. PETER LOREDAN, for the concurrence of two others, was chosen beyond all men's hope, or his own. The Arsenal was burnt in his time, and there was a great dearth of all things. Selim, successor to Soliman, thereupon took an occasion to break with the Commonweal, from whom he demanded the realm of Cypress, and made war upon this subject. He governed four years, five months, and eight days.  
85. LEWIS MOCENIGO, the war being kindled against the Turk, lost the realm of Cypress, Nicosya having been taken, and Famagosta yielded. The Commonweal made a league with Pope Pius the fift, and Philip king of Spain, so as their forces being joined together, they obtained a famous victory of the Turks, in the year 1571. Some two years after, Henry the third, the French king, passed by Venice, where he was royally entertained and feasted. This prince died, having reigned seven years.  
86. SEBASTIAN VENIERI was chosen by a common consent, with so great applause, as certain Turks came to kiss his feet. There were five Correctors of the laws created, for the ordering of palace businesses. The city was freed from a cruel plague, after a vow made to build up the Redeemers Church. The palace was set on fire, and received much harm. This prince did not govern a whole year  
87. NICHOLAS DE PONT was created duke, he was very learned in all arts, whereof he had made public profession in Venice. He passed through all the honours wherewith the Commonweal may gratify her citizens. The Seminary of S. Mark was instituted by him. Gertaine princes of jappon being arrived at Venice, were received with great favour. He caused the bridge of Canareggio to be built; and governed seven years, nine months, and thirteen days.  
88 paschal CIGOGNE, procurator of S. Mark, was chosen as he was at Church hearing Mass. In his time there was great wars betwixt France and Spain for Piedmont: and betwixt the emperor and the Turk for Hongarie. He caused the town of Palma to be built upon the confines of Friuli, and a new fort in the Island of Cesalonia. He had the honour of that admirable bridge of Realte, which he caused to be built: and he governed about ten years.  
89. MARIN GRIMANI, Procurator of S. Mark, was so pleasing unto the people, as on the day of his election they made extraordinary signs of joy, the which were continued for many days after. The second year of his principality, he caused the duchess his wife to be crowned in triumph, to whom Pope Clement the eight sent a Rose of gold. In his time there was great joy for the peace concluded betwixt the French king, and the king of Spain. The Pope coming to Ferrara, which did belong unto the Church, Cardinal Aldobrandin passing to Venice, was most honourably entertained there, with other Cardinals. There was so great a swelling of water in the fift year of his principality, as the Gondoles and Barks went upon S. Marks place, as in the lake. He 〈◊〉 to the great grief of all the people, having governed ten years, and eight mo●●●●.  
90. ●●ONARD DONATI having for his merits, singular wisdom, and dexterity in the 〈◊〉 of affairs, passed through all the honours which the commonweal may give 〈◊〉 whom she finds faithful, was set in the place of Grimani the tenth of janua●●●. He had been sent Ambassador to Constantinople, towards Mahomet, newly 〈◊〉 the Empire of the East, to perform the accustomed compliments in name of 〈◊〉 commonweal. He is so practised in affairs, and hath so happy a memory in a soul 〈◊〉 to be religiously zealous to the common good, as the Senate refers more to him, 〈◊〉 ●hey have done to any of his predecessors. The Senate hath been excommunicated 〈◊〉 time by Pope Paul the fift, for certain pretensions of the holy See, and it may be 〈◊〉 ●hat he carried himself like an immovable rock for the defence of the State against 〈◊〉 lightning's: so as two of the principal pillars of Christendom threatened ruin, had 〈◊〉 most Christian Henry the fourth, the French king, embraced these two pillars, 〈◊〉 them up, to set them strait, by the means of his Ambassadors, who have 〈◊〉 a triumphant arch to the immortality of his glory. This prince who enjoys ●●●ppinesse of peace, doth continually acknowledge the love and particular affecti●●●ich he bears unto France.      

The Commonweal of Ragouse.  

THE COMMONWEAL OF RAGOUS.  

The Contents.  
RAgouse in old time called Epidaurum, and of the situation of Epidaurum where they did worship Esculapius. 2. Beginning of the word Sclavonia, the bigness, length, breadth, climate, and the chief towns. 3. Ragouse a town of Sclavonia, tributary to the Turk. Her situation and Islands. 4. The soil bearing ●●●ue, first-fruits, fat fish, trees laden with oysters which they gather every three years. 5. Gra●●● Island full of gardens, of orange trees, lemons, and Pomegranates. Langoste another Island ●●●●ng in olives, and grapes, and famous for the fishing of sparts. 6. The ancient inhabi●●● Ragouse, barbarous and cruel by nature, and inclining to the humour of the Scythians, 〈◊〉 thence they are descended. 7. Custom of them of Ragouse to go with half their heads 〈◊〉 contrary to the Hongarians. Lovers of equality. The manner of their apparel, and the 〈◊〉 which are most in price. 8. Of their marriages and alliances, limited by the law to 〈◊〉 ●●ousand ducats. 9 Of their language and instruction in learning both divine and ●u●●●● 10. Riches of the Ragousens consisting in traffic. 11. Their small forces. 12. The ●●●●●ment of Ragouse conformable to that of Venice: and first of the great Council. 13. Of 〈◊〉 degado, annual magistrates and their jurisdiction. 14. Of the petty Council, the charge 〈◊〉 continuance of this magistrate. 15. Of the election of the Rector, chief of all the Coun●●●. Of the five Pouruaiers. 17. Of six Consuls instituted for civil causes in the first 〈◊〉. 18. Of the five criminal judges. 19 Of the Officers upon the art of wool. 20. Of 〈◊〉 of thirty appointed for causes of appeal. 21. Of five men called Pourue●orss, or 〈◊〉 of the health, and their authority. 22. Of the Officers appointed for customs. 〈◊〉 the Chamberlains. 24. Of three Treasurers appointed for the custody of the public 〈◊〉, and of Orphan's money. 25. Of the Officers of the armory. 26. Other Officers 〈◊〉 for the sale of wheat and wine, and for the reparation of the ways. 27. Of the six Cap●●● of the night. 28. Of the Notary, or Secretary. 29. Of the chancellors. 30. Of the 〈◊〉 Captains and Earls sent unto governments, without the town of Ragouse. 31. Of the 〈◊〉 Procurators' of the Cathedral Church of Ragouse.   

BEfore I engage myself farther in this discourse, I desire to take from them that shall read this work, all confusion by the equivocation of names, which might make them err in the very beginning. For seeing that we have undertaken to speak of Ragouse, which in old time was called Epidaurum, and that there were other towns of the same name, it is fit to show which this is, and not to confounded it indiscrectly with the rest. You must therefore understand, that along the sea betwixt. Venice and Corinth, there are three Epidauri, whereof the first lies upon the gulf of Venice, and is that which we now call Ragouse: the other is in the country of Laconia, in the gulf of Napoli, this town is now called Maluasia: and the third town of Epidaurum, is that in the gulf of Engia, or Sinus Saronicus, which they call Cheronese or Piguiade: and in this last they did worship Esculapius.  
But to come unto that whereof we mean to make mention, it is situated in Sclavonia, ●hich is the ancient Dalmatia, & which took the last name from the Sclavons, who in the time of the Emperor justinian the first, being come out of Sarmatia, past the river of Danubius, and then a part of them fell upon Macedon, and the other upon Thrace. Afterwards in the time of the Emperor Maurice who died in the year 602, and of Phocas his successor, they made themselves masters of Dalmatia. It is true that at this day the name of Sclavonia extends from the river of Arse unto that of Drin, being in length from one river to another about four hundred and eighty miles, and in breadth from the mountains of Croatia unto the sea, about one hundred and twenty. It lies betwixt the midst of the first Climate, near unto the thirteenth Parallel, and the midst of the sixt, whereas the longest day in Summer is but fifteen hours and a half; the most Easterly Meridian passeth the six and fortieth degree, and the most Westerly the six and thirtieth. Finally, the sea which is betwixt Italy and the end of Sclavonia, is called the adriatic, and runs for the space of six hundred miles; the greatest breadth is of two hundred miles, & the lest of one hundred and fifty, and that at the mouth of sixty: but the rest which doth wash Albania and Macedon, is called the Ionian sea. One part of this country obeys the signory of Venice, another the Archdukes of Austira, and the rest the Turk. The chief towns are Flamona, Segne, Hone, Zara (for the which the Venetians and Hongarians have continual war) Sebenic, and Spalata. But the best town of all Sclavonia is Ragouse, which maintains itself in liberty, paying fourteen thousand zequins unto the Turk, and spending as much more in presents, and lodging of Turks. This commonweal hath a small territory upon the firm land, but it hath under it certain small Islands which are reasonably good, lying betwixt Curzole, and the gulf of Ca●taro.  
The ancient town of Epidaurum was in the same place, which at this day they call old Ragouse. But the Goths having seized upon Italy, & by the same means of a great part of Sclavonia, and amongst others of Epidaurum, razed it quite: by reason whereof the inhabitants who knew not whither to retire themselves, began to build new Ragouse as we see it at this day, of the ruins of the old town. This town is very well inhabited, and in an excellent situation upon the sea: it is full of fountains and fresh water, which have been drawn thither from the neighbour mountains to the great benefit of them of the country. It hath a little port made by art, which is reasonably commodious of the one side, and there is a very high steep mountain, at the foot whereof the town is built. They possess about their town a very small territory, but they have under their obedience divers little pleasant. Islands, among others that of Langoste, whose form is like unto an Amphitheatre.  

¶ The Quality.  
THe soil is by nature barren; but the Ragousans bestow so much labour and industry to make it good, as it yields them oil, wine and excellent first-fruits. There is a ●●●taine valley whereas in winter there gathers together such abundance of wa●e●, as it 〈◊〉 lake, the which doth nourish fish which grows so fat, as they fry it without any oy●●. In the spring time the waters drying up, they sow corn in the same place, the 〈◊〉 grows abundantly, so as one place yields them fish and corn in one year. More●●●●●●ey use divers industries by sea, and among others they make their ●reess bring them 〈◊〉: for they bend down the bows of their trees, and stay them under the water 〈◊〉 ●●oness; so as in two year there are so may oysters fastened to these branches, as it ●●●●ge to see: then the third year they are in a manner good to eat.  
〈◊〉 ●pon the sea is the Island of Gravosa, which is a very pleasant place, and full of gar●●● of Orange trees, Lemons, and Pomegran●tss. The chief rivers are Save, and Drau●●● Island of Languste is environed round about with very high mountains, in which 〈◊〉 Ragousans farms, and in the midst there is a goodly plain, which yields great 〈◊〉 of Olives and Grapes. Near unto it, they have a good fishing for Sprats.   

¶ The Manners of the Ancient.  
He Inhabitants of this country were in old time cruel and barbarous, and were con●●●inually given to piracy. Florus writes of them, That in the first war against the ●●●haginianss, in the time of Queen Teure, they were not content to rob and spoil, 〈◊〉 ●●ey did practise all kind of wickedness. They were the Sclavons which cut off the 〈◊〉 of the Roman ambassadors, and burned them which governed their ships: And 〈◊〉 which did increase the Romans disgrace, was, That these people were then governed ●●●man: For Procopius faith also, That the Sclavons (a people of Scythia) did enter 〈◊〉 into these countries in the time of justinian, and in the end stayed there; so as ●●●●cient Inhabitants did partly embrace the manners of these strangers newly come. 〈◊〉 ●i●ius calls this nation Fierce, and given to spoil at sea: and therefore the Romans 〈◊〉 always Legions in this country, as well for other occasions, as to bridle the 〈◊〉 ●●mour of this people.   

¶ The Manners at this day.  
hay of Ragouse let their hair grow from the middle part of the head upward, and 〈◊〉 shave the rest, quite contrary to the manner of the Hongarians. The women wear 〈◊〉 long hair, and they make it black by art. All live equally, without any great ●●●oniess, for that they use no such reverences as we do, neither do they put off their ●●●ut salute one another simply, either by word, or by some action which discovers 〈◊〉 intention. They love equality exceedingly, so as they have a law, by the which no 〈◊〉 may be bishop of Ragouse, to the end, that not any one amongst them shall have ●ny greater pre-eminence in their Commonweal, than that which is allowed them by 〈◊〉 laws.  
They go diversly attired; for the younger sort fashion themselves after the Florentin ●●●ner, others carry cloaks, and the most ancient great sleeves, like unto the Senators of ●enice, and it is forbidden for any man to wear garments of silk, except the Rector of 〈◊〉 Commonweal, the Doctors, and Knights. In Summer, when it is very hot, they 〈◊〉 cassocks of single taffeta. There is the like restraint for women's apparel, for that 〈◊〉 may not wear any thing but cloth during their lives, but when a maiden marries, it ●●●full for her to wear silk during a whole month. There is also something betwixt ●●●ens, which shows the difference of their qualities; for on festival days, the gentlewomen are accustomed to wear a hood of cloth, lined with read sandal, which they are ●●und to wear after they are married. Moreover, they wear tawny, red, or blue cloth, 〈◊〉 they are allowed to have sleeves of silk at their pleasure.  
As for marriages, they are accustomed to ally themselves only to persons of their 〈◊〉 condition, that is to say, gentlemen with gentlewomen, and a gentleman may not 〈◊〉 Bourgesse or a stranger, to the end he bring not into his race a blood that is less 〈◊〉, corrupting his ancient gentry; whereby the families are so decreased, as there are not above four and twenty that govern, for that the houses sailing (as all things do) and the gentlemen not allying themselves with any citizens or strangers, these houses are in time grown to a small number.  
It is true, that if a gentleman for any private respect, or commodity, take a wise which is not of the country, he may do it, so as she be a gentlewoman of that country which lies betwixt Zara and Cattaro, and not otherwise: but whosoever takes a stranger to wife (as we have said) he must have at the lest the worth of one thousand ducats of gold for the dowry of this wife; but yet it is not much observed. And whereas marriages are limited by the law to one thousand ducats of gold; yet at this day they exceed it more, so as some father will give three, four, five, and six thousand ducats, yea more, according to his means, and the quality of his daughter. They pay the marriage money before the future husband see his wife, and then whenas the contract is written, and all other ceremonies performed, he goes to her house to see her: For it is their custom, not to court a woman before they have married her, according to the order prescribed by the Romish Church.  
As for their language, all the young men most commonly understand the Italian, which they call Franc: but amongst themselves they only use the Sclavon Tongue. Many of them are given to learning, & therefore the Commonweal of Ragouse doth commonly entertain a Reader with great sees, who reads unto young men, having three or four Regent's. They do also draw yearly a good Preacher unto them, who preacheth only unto men, for that he speaks Italian, and the women understand not the language.  
Besides these physicians for the soul, the Commonweal doth entertain men for the health of the body, that is to say, two Physicians and two Chirurgeons, with great wages: these men are bound to visit all sick persons, without any see, especially the poor, and to do whatsoever is necessary, according to their profession, for the health of the citizens.   

¶ The Riches.  
IT is not the country about Ragouse that makes them rich, for that it is scarce able to maintain them, notwithstanding that they live very sparingly. Their greatest wealth grows by their great traffic; for that they have many good ships with the which they go into divers parts, and get much by their trade. They reap a great benefit, for that in regard of the 14000 Zequins which they give yearly unto the Turk, they are free and exempt from all impositions and customs throughout all the great Turk's empire. But we may not therefore conclude, that this Commonweal is very rich, for that without the Turks support, it had been often in prey to many, especially to the Venetians, and it would be much troubled if it were to make any great expense to entertain soldiers for any long time.   

¶ The Forces.  
THe want of great commodities is the cause why they of Ragouse can have no great forces, and if they subsist, it is by reason of the support whereof I have spoken. Their town is reasonably well fortified; but besides that it is at the foot of a mountain which commands it, it cannot long endure a great siege. As for the soldiers, they entertain few, having only one hundred Hongarians for their guard, with a Captain: but the Commonweal doth rather employ these for execution of affairs, than for any other necessary thing; for that these men respect no persons, and for this cause do all that is commanded them, and are very faithful, like unto the Swisses, whom Princes do use for the guard of their persons. They have also the castle of S. Laurence without the town, which is reasonably good, and the new fort towards the port, which is on the East side. 〈◊〉 all these things are of no great consideration, only good to resist them that will not b●●●●tinat at an enterprise.   

¶ The Government.  
RAgouse hath not been always a commonweal, for that it hath obaied divers lords a● divers times, sometimes Grecians, sometimes Albanians. But since it hath imbraids kind of government, they have been in some reputation. The Ragousans whennes sought to reduce the town to a commonweal, they followed for the most part th●●rder of the State of Venice. Being thus resolved, they first instituted a great Coun●●●, knowing that it was the foundation of a commonweal, & as it were the f●rme basis o● groundwork of their city. All gentlemen of the city enter into this Council, having attained to the age of twenty years, and they are admitted, proving their gentry. In this Council they created all the magistrates of the city, the which are such as I will sea-gown.  
There are first the Pregadi, which should be commonly sixty, all gentlemen: but it seldom happens that this magistrate hath a number complete. There may be many gentle●●n of one family; for that as I have said, the families in time are reduced into a small ●●●ber. These have charge of the affairs of the commonweal, and do also judge of 〈◊〉 causes, by appeal, under three hundred ducats: they also judge of criminal cau●●●●hich are of importance in regard of the persons, as if any gentleman be accused, or 〈◊〉 committed any crime. They continued a year in this charge, and they are changed they are voided, for that they are not all created at one instant, but one after another as t●ey end; and they may be reconfirmed.  
The petty Council (so called in regard of the great) is the council of the Rector, which is composed of eleven persons, all of divers families; who assist the Rector, or head of t●●s' commonweal. They receive and hear the petitions and demands of stran●●● and of private men, the letters, the ambassadors, and such like; and are as it were a ●●and which presents unto other magistrates the things which come before them, and whi●● go afterwards according to their quality to offices appointed for such matters. And these in regard of those things which are presented unto them, decide some, and ●●●ort the rest unto the Pregadi. They continued but one year in this charge, and go 〈◊〉 altogether, and the other eleven which are created by the great Council, enter altogether into this new office with the new Rector, the first day of januarie.  
This Rector who is the head of all the councils, is chosen in the great Council by three kinds of election, as they do in all other offices; & of these elections of all offices, the one is made by way of scrutiny (the which I have expounded, speaking of the elec●●● of Popes) by three Councillors of the Rector, and the two others are made by lot. The Rector remaineth but one month in charge, and he is bound during that month to live in the palace. He wears the habit of a duke, that is to say, a rob with open sleeves, and different from others, by reason of his authority. They give seven ducats a month for his entertainment, and no more. It is true when he is one of the Pregadi, in regard of appellations he hath a ducat every day to assist.  
This Rector assembles with the Councillors upon working days after dinner, and also upon holy days, upon some occasions. He commonly gives the morning to the Pregadi, or to the great Council, according to occurrents. But if the Rector be not there, the most ancient Councillor enters into his place, yet they dispatch not any thing without his presence. They give this Rector a Lieutenant, who hath jurisdiction in matters which do not exceed three ducats of gold, and he is his Lieutenant for civil matters ●nly, and for no other and: the Councillors cannot be chosen Rectors the year that they 〈◊〉 in their magistracy.  
Next there are five Pourueiors, who are men of fifty years old and upwards, and ●●st be of divers families. They have authority to 'cause all expeditions made by any Magistrate whatsoever, to be received, and they must be present whenas the councils ●●●emble. These may be made Rectors during their magistracy, and are so commonly. They are of the chief of the town, of great authority, and in a manner always of the council.  
After these are the six Consuls which hear civil causes, in the first instance, for any sum whatsoever. They are most commonly men of great authority, and which enter into council with the Pregadi, and they do often frame the process of such things as they judge. The parties are not accustomed to make allegations, as they do in many places: but these Consuls hearing the matter in question, determine what justice requires, and draw from every cause two ducats in the hundred. They cannot be Rectors for the space of two years, lest they should altar their proceed in civil causes, and to the end the people might have means to be soon dispatched in their suits, for that they do continually attend them.  
There are also five criminal judges, and expeditions go from them according to the judgements which they make. It it true that gentlemen are excepted, for that in criminal causes they go before the Pregadi, and they that have fees of the commonweal answer before the petty Counsel. And there are sometimes other causes which these five do not judge, for that the Pregadi do think it fit to take knowledge thereof. These judges, for that they are not commonly much employed, are made Rectors, as the Pourueiors be.  
There are moreover three officers upon the art of wool, these do commonly hear the differences that grow betwixt men which exercise that trade. They enter into the number of the Pregadi, and may also be made Rectors.  
This commonweal hath also a College of thirty, into the which there may enter many persons of one family. They take knowledge of appellations unto the sum of three hundred ducats, and every one of them hath three ducats a year for their wages, the which is done for that all the officers of the town are finable if they do not attend their charges; for otherwise they would not accept them, for that they are of small profit. When any office falls voided, it is supplied by one of them that is in some other office. As for this college it hath charge of no other things but to take knowledge of appellations, as I have said. And as for the Pregadi, if any dies, they supply his place by one of the Pourueior●, or of this College.  
It hath also five men which have a care of health, whose charge is to look unto the health of the city, and therefore they are called Pourueiors of the health. Their authority is great, for that they may punish them that offend, and that do infringe the orders of this office, and they are very like unto the Pourueiors of health at Venice: and they may be Rectors during the time of their charge.  
There are four men created for their customs, who have care of matters belonging to that office, and demand the money which is due for customs, and do all things that belong unto that business.  
There are also two Chamberlains who receive the money that is laid up in their coffers, yet they have not the managing of the public treasure, and their money is employed in some occurrents of the commonweal, and at the pleasure of those that have the charge thereof.  
They have three Treasurers, who are commonly men of great authority, as well for their wealth, as for their good life. These have the public treasure in their hands, and moreover orphans money which is left in Guard with them. They remain five years in this office, and may be made Rectors, and most commonly the Rectors have been Treasurers.  
There are in like manner justices, who have a care that all things may be well ordered concerning victuals, and look that the weights and measures and other instruments of merchants & trades men be just, according to the laws: and in their office the arts which are subject unto them are marked.  
And for that they have a little Arsenal in their town according to their forces, they have a Magistracy called the Officers of the army: these have care of this Arsenal, and provide for the munitions both by sea and land. They are young men who have surveyors or overseers of greater experience over them, and they are made from time to time, according as occasions are offered.  
Moreover, they bring wheat to Ragouse from other places, the which is done at the public charge. There are therefore two officers which have charge thereof, and cell this ●ome for the Commonweal.  
The revenues of them of Ragouse consist for the most part in wine, and therefore they 〈◊〉 erected three officers upon the counterbands, & these men have charge to dispatch 〈◊〉 whenas they are made for wine, and there is a great punishment ordained for 〈◊〉 that shall infringe them, for that the law prohibits the bringing in of any forbidden wines.  
There are some also which have the care of the city streets, and of public places, c●●sing the ways, market-places, and such like to be repaired, according to necessity, ●● these are young men, for that they are no offices of any great importance.  
There are also six Captains of the night, who one after another have the guard of the 〈◊〉 in the night time, with the Hongarians, who are about one hundred, with their Captains, and they obey these, who open and shut the gates of the city. They remain 〈◊〉 months in this charge, and they observe this order, that they which shut the city 〈◊〉 at night, do not open them in the morning, for that they change them at 〈◊〉.  
●hey have a Secretary whom they call Notary, who is present in all their secret af●●●● There is also another who hath the same title, but he takes knowledge of secrets 〈◊〉 import the Commonweal. And these two Secretaries serve to writ letters upon 〈◊〉 currents, and they also execute the office of public Notaries.  
●●●ides the abovenamed, there are three Chancellors, who serve the Consuls, and in 〈◊〉 cause's, and they make instruments: There is one also under the judge criminal, 〈◊〉 like office.  
●●●rie night they sand a Captain to the castle of S. Laurence, which is without the 〈◊〉 and he hath no entertainment, but is forced to do it. They do also sand 〈◊〉 the New Fort, and these go by order, and they are commonly young men: but 〈◊〉 any one hath passed forty years, he is f●eed from this subjection.  
The Captains and Earls, which go into governments abroad throughout the 〈◊〉 of this Commonweal, are all created by the great Council, and some of them 〈◊〉 in charge seven months, and others twelve.   

¶ The Religion.  
THese people are all Romanists. The city hath a Bishop, who doth make his ordinary abode there. There are three Procurators or Overseers of the Cathedral Church, ●ho have care of the chief Church, and the government of the relics which are ●●ere, for that there are very many which are enriched with gold, silver, and precious ●●oness. These procurators continued in their charge during their lives, & may be Rectors, 〈◊〉 e●ter into other magistracies, as of Councillors, Treasurers, and other officers.      

The Estate of the Empire  

❧ A DISCOURSE OF THE EMPEROR'S ESTATES.  

The Contents.  
1EXtent and greatness of the ancient Roman Empire: Her declining and great weakening, by civil wars; by the translation of the seat from Rome to Constantinople; and by the division which the Emperor Constantine made unto his children, dividing it into three parts. 2. Division of the Empire into East and West: and what the partition was in charlemagne time. 3. A general description of Germany, the circuit, bounds, and provinces, and first of Alsatia, and the chief towns. 4 Of Wittenberg, the towns and castles. 5. Franconia, vulgarly Frankenland, subject to five Princes: the limits and good towns, Spire, Worms, Mayence, or Ments, Francfort, etc. 6. Of Suevia: and of the realm of Bohemia, commonly called Behaim, the length and confines of these two Estates, the rivers and chief towns. 7. Mora●ia, the rivers, counties, Seigneuries, and the chief town, Olmus. 8. Ba●aria, or Bayern, high and low, the chief towns. 9 Austria, or Oesterreich: the confines and rivers. 10. The county of Tirol 11. Stiria or Steirmarck, the Earldoms, and chief towns. 12. Carinthia or Kaerndten, and the best towns. 13. The two Carnioles, with the chief towns. 14. Westphalia: the limits and towns. 15. The duchy of Cleves, and her best towns. 16. The country of juliers. 17. The Lantgraviat of Hessen. 18. Turinge. 19 The ancient Saxony, high and low: her earldoms and towns. 20. The Marquisat of Brandebourg, divided into two Marches. 21. The Earldom of Man●field. 22. Lusatia. 23. Silesia. 24. Misnia or Meyssen. 25. Liege. 26. The archbishopric of Treves. 27. Holsatia. 28. Besanson. 29. Under what climate Germany lies: the air troublesome and sharp in winter: abounding with all sorts of corn and pulses: mines of Silver, Copper, Iron, Led, and Gold: Fountains and mines of Salt: Vines, Safron, and Fir Trees. 30. A particular observation what every province in Germany doth yield, and first of Alsatia abounding in wheat, wine, and pastures. 31. Allemandes, why in old time called Germane; having no use of gold, silver, nor of swords. What their arms were, and their manner of fight. Election of their kings, and heads of armies: their women martial and courageous: their sacrifices of me● to Mercury. Observation of the New Moon in their enterprises: their assemblies in arms: their exercises out of war, and in time of peace: their apparel. Chastity of their w●m●n: punishment of adultery, and murder. Their banquets and feasts, where they did treat of aff●●r●ss both of peace and war. Exercise of their youth in arms. Their year divided into three seasons. 32. A particular observation of the manners of some people of Germany. 33. Of the Saxo●ss, divided into four Estates. Given to the superstition of Idols, and to the adoration of trees, fountains, forests, and high grown woods. 34. Of the art of divining, which they ●s●d. 35. Manner of living, and the laws of them of Suabe, or Suevia. 36. Of them of B●u●ria. 37. The Germane at this day divided into four Estates and what their manners are in general, their kind of living, their apparel and exercises. 38. Particularities of every province ●n their l●●eses, and of their manner of living, apparel, and disposition of body and mind. 39 Riches of Ger●●●ie, in mines of Silver, and other metals: Fountains, and pits of Salt-water, traffic, 〈◊〉 ●●rkes of divers arts, Fairs of Francsort: revenues of towns, and secular princes. 40. Of 〈◊〉 emperor's revenues. ●1. What forces the Emperor Charles the fift, and Maximilian the 〈◊〉 drawn out of Germany, whenas they armed against the Turk. 42. Number of 〈…〉 the Emperor may draw to field, and of the german foot and horse. 43. Their sea 〈…〉 allies. 44. Of two things which the Empire wants. 45. Wh●n, and by whom, the 〈◊〉 being hereditary, was made elective. 46. Of the three members of the Empire, whereof 〈◊〉 Electors make the first. 47. Of the second member of Princes and Noblemen. 48. Of 〈…〉 member of the Empire consisting of free towns. 49. Of the councils of the Circles, 〈◊〉 ●h●t end they were instituted. 50. Institution and erection of the Imperial Chamber 〈◊〉 51. Of the charges and dignities of the Empire reduced to the number of four. 〈◊〉 What their sit be at the Diet, and of the order that is kept in general Processions. 〈◊〉 Of the three councils which are at Diets, and of what persons every Council is composed. 〈◊〉 Of the Germans religion, and of the beginning and progress of the profession of Luther, ●●●●lius, and others in that country: and of the Estate wherein it stands at this day. 55. In 〈◊〉 Estate the Romish religion is in Germany, and what religion the seven Metropolitans hold. 〈◊〉 A list and catalogue of the Emperors of the West, their lives, reign, and death.   

THe Roman Empire, which under Traian did extend from the Spanish sea, beyond the river of Tigris, and from the Atlantic Ocean unto the gulf of Persia, and from Mont Atlas, unto the forest of Caledonia, and touched the river of Elbis, passing that of Danubius, began first to decline by means of the civil wars of Galba, Otho, and Vitellius, in whose time the army which was in great Britain, passed to the firm Land; and Holland, with the neighbour 〈◊〉 revolted, and in a short space (the frontiers being unfurnished with soldiers) 〈…〉 past the river of Danubius, and the Alains the Caspian ports, the 〈…〉 power and reputation, the Goths ouer-ran Misia and Macedonia, and the 〈◊〉 into Gaul.  
〈◊〉 did afterwards restore the Empire to her ancient beauty, for that he 〈◊〉 broils, suppressed tyrants, bridled the Barbarians, and stayed the Nations 〈◊〉 enemies to the Roman name, forcing them to live in quiet. Yet he did two 〈◊〉 which did somewhat weaken this Monarchy: the one was, that he transported the 〈◊〉 ●f the Empire from Rome to Constantinople, by means whereof he left the city 〈◊〉 naked, and the Empire weak; being most certain, that as plants which ar● 〈…〉 into a soil which differs much both in climate and quality, retain very little 〈…〉 natural virtue; even so human things, and especially great Seigneories 〈◊〉 Command's, lose much of their force, by great changes and alterations. This was 〈◊〉 subject and reason why the Senate of Rome would never consent, that the people 〈◊〉 leave the city of Rome for that of Veies, which was much fairer, and more 〈◊〉, not not after that Rome had been ruined by the Gauls. The other thing was, 〈◊〉 he divided the Empire into three parts, to distribute it to his children, the which 〈◊〉 in the year of grace 341; so as of one great and mighty Estate, he made three, 〈◊〉 remarkable decrease both of authority and forces, and his sons making war one 〈◊〉 another, did so consume themselves, as the Empire was in a manner like unto a 〈◊〉 without blood: and although it was sometimes united under one prince, yet from 〈◊〉 ●●me it was so easily drawn into factions, as it was often seen divided into two; so 〈◊〉 East had one Empire, and the West another; until that Odoacre king of the 〈◊〉, coming into Italy with a mighty army, forced Augustulus to quit the Empire 〈…〉 West through despair, the which happened in the year of grace 466, for that the 〈◊〉 had already past the river of Danubius, Alaric king of the Vandals had taken 〈◊〉, and the same Vandals had seized upon Andalusia, and afterwards upon 〈◊〉, the Alains held Portugal, the Goths the greatest part of Spain, the English 〈◊〉 Britain, the Bourgondians Provence, the Francons Gaul, and the Huns 〈◊〉 (at this day Hongarie.)  
The Emperor justinian did some what restore this Estate, for that by the means of his captains he expelled the Vandals from Africa, and the Goths out of Italy in the year 556, but this lasted not long; for that in the year 613 the arms and sect of Mahomet began to afflict both the Empires, which in a short time were oppressed by the Saracens, who made themselves in a manner absolute masters of the one side, of Syria, Egypt, and the Archipelagus, and on the other side, of Africa, Sicily and Spain: who also in the year 735, seized upon Narbona, avignon, Tolouse, and the neighbour countries: so as by little and little the Empire of the West was quite ruined, and that of the East grown so weak, as the city of Constantinople could hardly defend itself against the Mahometans, much less give any aid to them of the West. The which Leo the third having well considered (besides that the Emperors of Greece did nourish impieties and heresies) heresolued to give the Empire of the West to Charlemaigne king of France, the which happened in the year of our salvation 800.  
The Empire of the West was then divided from that of the East after this manner, so as the Grecians had for their part all Eastward, from Naples and Siponte with Sicily; Beneuent remained to the Lombard's; the Venetians, as neuters, remained free, and the rest was left to Charlemaigne. Blondus saith, that this division was first allowed by the Empress Irenea, and afterwards confirmed by the Emperor Nicephorus. Some say that by this means Pope Leo transported the Empire to the Germane, for that Charles was a Germane by blood and nation, as all the Francs which came into Gaul were of Franconia, a Province of Germany.  
The Empire remained by this means, so divided, as it could never be afterwards united, notwithstanding that Emanuel Comnenes hearing of the deprivation of Frederic the first, made great offers to Pope Alexander the third: so as this disunion began by the transport of the Imperial seat from Rome to Constantinople, and came unto the height of it in the creation of Charlemaigne, who remained possessor of that which had been assigned unto him by the Pope. Since the Empire was reduced into narrow and strait bounds having nothing remaining, but Germany, and a part of Italy, for that the Pope did peaceably enjoy a great country in Italy, and the Venetians (who were in a manner betwixt both the Empires) lived in absolute liberty with all their Estate, not depending upon any one, and the realms of Naples and Sicily (which the Normans had taken from the Grecians) were become fees of the Church, first under the Antipope Clement, and then under Nicholas the second, and his successors, who allowed (in regard of the public good) of what the Antipope had done; and Lombardie, and Tuscanie (partly through the disobedience of Henry the fourth and fift, and of Frederick the first and second Emperors, towards Popes, and partly by reason of the mutinous humour of the people) did still put the Emperors to more pain and charge, than they brought them aid or profit. Wherefore Rodolphus not only neglected to go into Italy (for that the crosses and misfortunes of his predecessors had amazed him) but he also sold the people their liberty at an easy rate: for they of Lucca paid but ten thousand crowns, not the Florentines above six. Thus the Empire losing her force and reputation in Italy, there remained scarce any other thing than the name. The Visconts at Milan and some others in other places seized upon what they could, bearing no more honour or respect unto the Emperor, than to demand the investiture. Yea Francis Ssorce having conquered the Estate of Milan by arms, cared not to obtain the investiture, thinking that he could maintain himself in the possession of this Estate, by the same means which he had gotten it. To conclude, the Empire at this day is wholly reduced to Germany, yea and in many places the Emperor's authority is in a manner extinct.  
But to come unto the description, we must speak generally of this country, whose confines are in question. The most Ancient have bounded Germany within the rivers of Rhin and Danubius, the sea, the river of Don, or Tanacis, and the Euxin sea. They that came after, as Strabo, Ptolemy, Pomponiu● Mela, Pliny, and others, as well Grecians as Latins, contain it betwixt the rivers of Rhin and Vistula, Tacit●s saith, that the Ger●anss are rather divided from the Sarmatians and Daciens, by a mutual fear and by the mountains, than by the river of Vistula. At this day they give unto Germanic 〈◊〉 those provinces whose inhabitants use the german tongue; so as it contains (be●o●d the limits of Ptolomee, or Danubius, Rhetia, or the Grisons) high Hongarie, a●● a part of S●lavonia, unto the country of Trent.  
The Germans have held beyond the Rhin, the towns of Constance, Ausbourg, S●●usbourg, Worms, Mentz, Conflans, Bonne, Cologne, and many other places unnethe sea. They also comprehend the Swisses at this day among the Germans, and in like manner the Prussians who dwell beyond the river of Vistula: so as Germany should extend beyond the Rhin unto Picardy and Bourgondie upon the West, and unto the Alpes towards the South, upon the East it should contain Prussia beyond Vistula, and towards the North it should be bounded in by the sea.  
But omitting what I have spoken elsewhere of Low Germany, discoursing of the Low Countries, and also of Suisserland, speaking of that Commonweal, and passing also under silence the Estates which acknowledge not the Emperor; I will begin first 〈◊〉 Alsatia, or the country of Elsas, which doth frontier upon the Swisses. This province ●● divided into hgh and low: the high is a Lantgraviat, and contains Suntgoye, and ●●●goye. All this country comprehends a great number of towns, boroughs, and 〈◊〉 and is very well peopled. The chief towns are Rubeaquum, which was built by 〈◊〉 Romans, now called Rufach, and Schlestatt, or Selestad in high Alsatia, Fribourg in ●●isgoye, and Argentine or Strasbourg in high Alsatia: this place is exceeding strong, where there is to be seen an admirable tower, being five hundred seventy and four geometrical paces high.  
The country of Vittemberg, or Wittenberg, confines upon the East and South with a part of Suaube, upon the North with Franconia, and towards the West with the Pala●inat of Rhin. The river of Neccar passeth through the midst of this country. There are in this province many towns and castles, with an infinite number of villages. The chief town is Stutgarde: the next of no●● are Tubinge (where there is an university) and Wittemberge, which gives name unto the whole province.  
Franconia, otherwise called East France, and vulgarly Frankenland, hath for bounds towards the South Suaube, and Bavaria, upon the West the river of Rhin, upon the East Bohemia, and the country of Turinge, and towards the North the country of Hasse, and Turinge above mentioned. The chief towns are Herbipolis, commonly called Wirtzbourg, whose Bishop calls himself duke of Franconia, not of the whole country, but of the greatest part: next is Bamberg a fair town. This province is subject u●to five princes, that is, to the Bishops of Wertzbourg, Bamberg, and Mentz, to the Butgrave of Noremberg, and to the Count Palatin of the Rhin.  
Not far from Franconia, near to the river of Rhin, is the town of Spire, in the which is the Imperial Chamber: then Worms, which is famous by reason of the Diets, and assemblies: after which is Mayence commonly called Mentz, whose Archbishop is an Elector of the Empire. This town is strong, as well by reason of the situation, as for the walls, and inhabitants: it stands upon the rivers of Rhin and Mein. Francfort upon Mein infamous by reason of the fairs which are held there twice a year, and for that the Emperor is chosen there.  
Suevia, or Suaube is the highest part of all Germany: it hath for bounds upon the East part, Bohemia, towards the North Franconia, upon the West Alsatia and the river of Rhin, and to the South Bavaria, and the Alpes. The spring or head of the river of Danubius is in this country: it was sometimes a realm, afterwards it become a duchy, & is now under divers princes, but not any one doth carry the title of duke of this country: yet the duke of Wittenberg holds the best part. The chief towns are Ausbourg, sea●ed upon the river of Lich, the which is as rich as any one in Germany. Vlme is upon the ri●er of Danubius, which is not so great, yet is it very rich, and of great traffic: and N●●linge standing in a goodly plain, and is three miles in circuit. There is also divers 〈◊〉 Imperial towns which they call free.  
Th● Emperor who reigns at this day doth also hold the realm of Bohemia, commonly called Behaim, which lies within the limits of Germany. This realm hath for confines towards the East, Moravia, and a part of Selesia, upon the South Austria, and Bavaria, to the West the country of Noremberg, and upon the North Saxony and Misnia: the forest of Hercynia doth environ it round about. It is round in form, and they pass the Diameter in three days journey: others say that it is thirty and six Bohemian leagues long. The rivers which run through this realm are Albis (which the Bohemians call Labe) Multavia, commonly called Vltaune, and in the german tongue Vuolda, and besides these the river of Egra, Sassave, Gisera, Miso, and Vatto, which fall into Labe. Prague called in old time Bubien, and Marobude, is the chief city, and is divided into three parts, that is to say, old Prague, the New, and the Little, which is divided from the two others by the river of Vltawe.  
Moravia, sometimes Marcomania, and in the vulgar tongue Me●herens, takes his name from the river of Morave: it is divided from Hongarie and Poland upon the East, from Bohemia towards the West, and from Selesia on the North, by mountains, forests, or rivers: but it is plain towards Austria, which confines it toward the South. The rivers are Morave, Noire, Suitte, Taize, Igle, Have, and Suarte. There are two Earldoms in Moravia, with certain other seigneuries. The chief town is Olmuz, which the Bohemians call Holomats': the next which follows is called Prunne, and in the german tongue Brin, and in the Bohemian Bruno.  
Bavaria, commonly called Bayerne, contains the country which in old time the Narisses did hold, which at this day they call Nordaow, and is separated from the rest by the river of Danubius; and it doth in like manner embrace the countries of the Noricians, and Vindelicians, commonly called Licatians, or Lechrains. This country hath for bounds on the North part Franconia, to the West Suabe, towards the South the Alpss, and upon the East part Austria, and Bohemia. There are two Bavaries, the higher, and lower: high Bavaria lies on this side the river of Danubius towards the Alpes, and the South. The chief towns are Mo●achie, commonly called Munchen, upon the banks of the river Iser (whereas the duke makes his ordinary residence) Ingolstad, a famous university, Fressing an Episcopal town: and generally throughout the whole country, there are thirty and four reasonable good towns.  
Base Bavaria lies beyond the river of Danubius, and contains thirty and four towns, forty and six boroughs, with many castles and villages. This part is called Nortgoy: the chief town is Noremberg, which is eight miles in circuit, and hath in it many fair and stately buildings, and is compassed in with two walls: the other chief towns are Ratisbonna, called in their vulgar tongue Regenspurg, in old time Augusta Tiberia, and before Artobriga: Passaw, upon the mouth of the river of Inn, which falls into Danubius: Lanshut upon Iser, and Saltzbourg an archbishopric upon the river of Saltz.  
Austria, commonly called Oesterreich, or Austorlich, or else Osterland, that is to say, the East country, was in old time called high Pannonia: it hath for confines upon the East Hongarie, upon the South the mountains of Stiria, which run from the Alpes into Hongarie, and beyond it, upon the West Bavaria, and to the North the river of Teye and Moravia. The rivers of Austria, are Danubius, which runs through the midst of it, Onase, Traune, Erlaf, Traise, Ipsia, Melice, Marchie, Teye, and Leythe. Austria is an Archduchie, whose chief city is Vienne, in old time called Flaviana, or juliobona, it is fair, rich, well peopled, and hath a good university.  
The county of Tirol lies betwixt the rivers of Thesin and Oenone or Inn, and the Alpes, and it hath taken the name from the little town of Tirol. This country was in old time a part of Rhetia: it confines upon the North with Bavaria, upon the South with Lombardie, towards the East with the Marquisat of Treviso and Friuli, & on the West wi●h Suisserland. The chief towns are Inspurg, the abode of the Lord of the Province, and the place for the Chamber, and Parliament of the country of Austria; then Brixen upon Ice, and after that Trent, a town famous by reason of the Council that was held there in the year 1546, under Pope Paul 3: in it there is a very fair Castle. In this county is also the town of Maran upon the river of Thesin, and those of Bolzan, and Hale.  
Stiria, called in old time Valeria, and by the vulgar people Steirmarck, is a little country which confines upon the North part with Austria, upon the West with Carinthia, on the South part with Croatia, and Sclavonia, and upon the East with Hongarie. It was made a duchy by the Emperor Frederic Barbar●usse. There are many Earldoms in this country, and among others that of Vuarasdin upon the river of Draw, and that of I●bnan upon Mure. The chief towns are Celia or Cilte, Fruch, and Greezie, which 〈◊〉 a very strong Castle looking towards Austria, and in like manner the town of Sepian.  
Carinthia, commonly called Kaernd●en, confines upon the West and South with Friuli, and Carniola, and towards the East and North with Stiria. The best towns are Vuoltkmarch and Villac, both standing upon the river of Draw, Marchburg, Clagensfu●●, in old time Claudia, a town well fortified: but S. Veit is the chief town of the Province.  
There are two Carnioles, the one is called the Dry, and in the vulgar tongue Vnder●rain. The princes of Austria hold many towns there, and amongst others Gorice, seated upon the banks of the river of Sonte: the other Carniola is called Oderkrain, and lies among the stony mountains of Noritia. The chief town is Lubiana, which the Ger●ans call Laubach.  
The country of Westphalia is taken by some for the true and ancient Saxony: the limits are, upon the East the river of Viser, upon the North Friesland, and the Centrie of Vtrecht, to the West the Rhin, and towards the South the mountains of Hessen, called by Ptolomee Obnobies. The chief towns are Munster, Dusseldorp, Wesal, Oldenbourg, Osnabourg, Mind, and Herworde. A good part of this country is subject to the Bishop of Cologne, a town seated upon the Rhin, with a double wall and double ditch, having eighty and four towers, and nineteen parishes.  
The duchy of Cleves lies of either side of the Rhin betwixt Cologne and the Low Country of Vtrecht. The Lordship of Ravistein is joined to the duchy of Cleves: the chief towns are Cleves, Wesel, Reez upon the Rhin, Ringlebourg, Kernendonck, Duy●bourg, and some others.  
The country of juliers, or of Guelich, hath taken his name of the chief town, the which is strong, and yet it was taken of late years by the Marquis of Brandebourg, and the duke of Neufbourg. This country, and that of Cleves, are now in question by many who pretend to have right.  
The country, or Lantgraviat of Hessen confines upon the East with Turinge, upon the South with Franconia, upon the West with Westphalia, and towards the North with the Duke of Brunswie, the Bishop of Mind, and some other Lords. The chief towns are Marpourg, where there is a good university, Cassel, where the Landgrave remains, and then Bubac and Asfeld. There are some Earldoms under this Landgrave, whereof the chief is that of Waldeck.  
The country of Turinge hath upon the East the river of Sal, upon the North the forest of Hercynia, upon the West the river of Vuer, and on the South the forest of Turinge, which they call Thuringerwaldt. This country is a Lantgraviat, the which hath not above twelve german leagues in length or breadth; and yet it contains twelve Earldoms, and as many Abbeys, one hundred forty and four towns, and as many boroughs, besides two thousand villages, & two hundred and fifty castles. The chief towns are Erfourt, seated upon the river of Gere, and one of the greatest of Germany, the next are Weymar upon Ilin, and Isenach upon Nesse, where there is a good university.  
The Palatinat lies betwixt Franconia, Alsatia, the country of Witt●mberg, Lorraine, and some part of Luxembourg. This country besides many boroughs, villages, and castles, contains eight and forty towns, whereof Heidelberg is the chief in the which the Prince Elector Palatin makes his ordinary residence. The situation of it is pleasant standing at the foot of the hills, from whence the river of Neccar doth flow, & pass by it. The country about Heidelberg is fruitful of all things. In the year 1346 Robert the elder prince Palatin was the founder of a famous university, in the which in process of time there have flourished many learned men: and the same Robert (being king of the Romans, and Emperor) did also build a goodly church there, dedicated to the holy Ghost, where he was interred. Besides Heidelberg there are in this country the towns of Alzea, Neostade, Mosbach, and Bretta, which are of some note. The prince Palatin is the chief of the secular Electors, and the first prince of the Empire, but he is neither so powerful, nor so rich as the duke of Saxony.  
The ancient Saxony, or Sachscen contained sometimes Westphalia, the ancient March, Misnia, Lusatia, Mansfeld, and some other countries: for that it did embrace all that was betwixt the rivers of Rhin, and Elb, the Germane sea, and the river of Leydore unto Hessen and the Frontiers of Turinge: so as Brunswie was as it were in the Centre of this country, but now they divide Saxony into high and low. The chief town of high Saxony is Wittenberg upon the rivere of Elb. Some put Torge in this high Saxony, but it is fit to place it in the country of Misnia.  
The chief town of base Saxony is Alba, near unto the which is the town of Mansfeld, the chief of an Earldom. The counties of Lawembourg, Mekelembourg, & Lunembourg are also contained under base Saxony, with the countries of Holsace, Stormar, & Dithmarsie. Above Saxony towards the North, stands Magdebourg upon the river of Elb, the which is strong both by situation and art, whose Archbishop ●arries the name of Primate of Germany; & yet the Archbishops of Mentz, Treves, and Cologne, who are Electors, nor the Archbishop of Saltzbourg, yield nothing unto him.  
The Marquisat of Brandebourg is upon the East of New Saxony, and is divided into two parts, that is to say, the old Marquisat which is watered by the river of Spree, whose chief town is Brandebourg, upon the river of Havel: but the chief town of the new Marquisat is Francfort upon Odere. There is also Berlin, whereas the Marquis remains, who is one of the Electors of the Empire, and is to be held for one of the mightiest princes of Germany, for that besides these two Marquisats he enjoys certain towns and counties in the countries of Lusatia, and Selesia: and they hold that his Estate is sixty german leagues long, in which they do number fifty and five towns, and sixty and four boroughs.  
The county of Mansfeld is a part of old Saxony, and hath for confines upon the East the river of Sal, with the archbishopric of Magdebourg, and the diocese of Mersebourg; upon the South Turinge; and upon the West the counties of Swar●zembourg, of Stolbourg, and some other petty seigneuries that are neighbours. There are under this county four other Earls, that is to say, Arnster, Vutpre, Vuethin, and Quemfurt, besides the Palatinat of Saxony, and some other principalities. The chief towns are Mansfeld, near unto the which is Leimbach, than Eiszleben and Vuypre.  
Lusatia lies betwixt the rivers of Elb and Audera, and the mountains of Bohemia: it is divided into high and low, and both belong unto Saxony. It it watered by the river of Nesse. The chief town is Gorlitz, next unto the which is Zittaw upon Nesse.  
Selesia, commonly called Schleste, is bounded towards the South by Moravia, and the forest Hercynia; upon the West by Lusatia, & a part of Bohemia; & towards the North and the East by Polonia. It is two hundred thousand paces long, and eighty thousand broad. There are many universities in this country. The chief town is Vratislania, commonly called Breslaw, where there is a Bishopric and an University, another of the best towns is Nissa, or Neysse, which is also a Bishopric. There are fifteen duchies in this province, whereof six have been divided to three ancient families, and the rest are fallen to the king of Bohemia.  
The country of Misnia, commonly called Meyssen, hath upon the East part Lusatia, upon the South Bohemia, upon the North the Marquisat of Saxony, and towards the West Turinge. There are in this province many cities and castles. The chief town is Misnia, the which hath an exceeding strong castle; next of greatest note is Dresden the prince's abode (and these two stand upon the river of Elb) and Lipse, where there is a good university: they do also put Torge, but some others place these two last in Saxony, confounding Misnia with the country of Saxony. But to return to Dresden, it is a town of great note, for that the duke of Saxony doth commonly keep his court there: yet is it not above an English mile and a half in compass, but the situation is very pleasant, the fortification strong, and the buildings fair, being most of stone; so as it is not held inferior to any town of Germany. In it is a famous stable able to contain one hund●ed twenty and eight horses, and an armory which doth exceed most in Christendom: some writ that it is able to arm seventy thousand men, whereof there are ten or twelve thousand complete for horsemen. There is great store of canons and other ordnance, with all necessary furniture and munition. There is a bridge upon the river of Elb of an admirable length and breadth.  
The Duchy and Bishopric of Liege hath upon the North and West Brabant, upon the East the river of Mouse, with the duchy of Lembourg, and upon the South the county of Namur. This Bishopric doth contain the duchy of Boüillon, the Marquisat of Franchemont, the county of Borchlon, or of Loot, and the county of Hasbania, whose chief town is Borkunorm, besides many baronies and abbeys. There are moreover four and twenty towns, besides those which are of the diocese of Vtrecht, whereof the principal town is that of Liege, seated in a pleasant valley, and near unto the Mouse.  
The archbishopric of Treves, commonly called Trier, is bounded upon the North by the county of Nassau, the duchy of Monts, and the Bishopric of Cologne, upon the East by Ringovia, and the country of Hessen, upon the South by the country of Westrich, and the duchy of Deux Ponts, and upon the West by the duchy of Luxembourg. There are in this diocese of Treves four Earldoms with certain baronies and other seigneures. Finally the chief town of this country is Treves, the which is one of the most ancient of the world: there is also the ancient town of Conflans.  
Holsatia, commonly called Holstein, hath for bounds upon the East the river of Bilene, upon the West Dithmarsia, upon the South Elb, & upon the North the river of Eidore, which of that side, is upon the frontier of Denmark. But I will forbear to speak any more of Holsatia, for that it belongs to the king of Denmark, to the which we reserve a particular discourse.  
There is also Besançon in the county of Bourgondie: it is an imperial town, and was sometime called Chrysopolis. The river of Doux passeth through the midst of it, and goes in a manner round about it, unless it be on that side by the which they go to Dole.  

¶ The Quality.  
GErmanie is under the sixt, seventh, and eight climate, betwixt the seven and fortieth, and five and fiftieth degree of latitude, and the four and twentieth, and six and fortieth of longitude. The longest day in Summer in the Parallel towards the South is of fifteen hours and a half, and upon that side which lies nearest unto the North, of seventeen and a quarter. Although that Cornelius Ta●●●us writes that the air is troublesome, and Seneca, that it is always Winter, yet it enjoyeth 〈◊〉 air that is reasonably mild and temperate, but somewhat cold, yet it makes them healthful 〈◊〉 strong. The soil bears wheat, barley, rye, oats, and all kinds of grain, and pulse in abundance: the fields are fertile, and the meadows bear abundance of grass. There is also in Germany many mines of silver, copper, iron, lead, and other metals; yea and of gold in some places. There are also very good fountains, and mines of salt. Pliny writes that in the ancient Germany they found crystal, onyx, topazes, and other stones. There are very fair gardens, and orchards, whose sight is very pleasing in Summer and Autumn.  
They have so manured this country, as there is little remaining of the forest H●rcinia, notwithstanding that it contains sixty days journey, and there is not any but the black forest, that of Othon, and those of Bohemia, but is employed: yet these are not so fearful as in former times, being full of villages, and monasteries. There is also great s●●●e of vines, especially right against the black forest along the river of Rhin, and also upon the banks of Neccar, and Mein. But of that side where it confines with high Honga●ie, it not only bears excellent wine, but also saffron which is good; there is also great store of fruit trees: but that part which stretcheth towards the sea, and the river of Vist●la●●lesse fertile, and yet in those places it bears abundance of wheat. Finally, in high Germany there are few moors, or troublesome mountains, for that those which be there are very fertile, yea the Alpes whose tops are always covered with snow, have at the bottom excellent pastures. The mountains of the black forest are full of fir trees, from the which they draw great store of pitch, yea and the extremities of these mountains bear very good wine. This province feeds no silk worms, neither doth it bear any olive trees.  
But let us come to the particularties of every province, having considered of all Germany in general.  
Alsatia doth bear abundance of wheat, especially in the plain, where there are excellent first-fruits. The mountains and little hills bear good wine, and the pastures are also very good upon the mountains, and in the valleys.  
The soil of the country of Wittenberg is partly rough, and will bear no wine, but there are excellent pastures, and some part of it is stony and full of sand, but fit to bear first-fruits, and some part also is champain and apt for tillage. There are also rivers, lakes, and pools full of fish.  
Franconia is part of it plain, and part hilly. And although the soil be not fat in some places, but full of sand, yet doth it bear good store of wheat and pulses, as also onions, turnips, and cabbages greater than in any other province. The country is also covered with fruit trees, and there is great store of meadow, wherewith they do feed much cattle of all sorts: and in many places there grows very good wine, especially near unto Wirtzbourg. There are many forests where they have store of game. Near unto Bamberg grows abundance of liquorice.  
Suaube hath some part of it plain, and the rest hilly. But it is fertile and well manured in all places, unless it be where there are lakes, forests, and mountains. There is great store of game, both for hawking and hunting, abundance of wheat, and great numbers of cattle. There are also many rivers which come from all parts and fall into the Rhin. All the country is very wholesome, and in the mountains they found iron, silver, and other metals.  
Bohemia abounds in barley and wheat, but it wants olive trees, and hath few vines, which bear not much, by reason of the Northerly winds whereunto it is subject, the which doth seldom suffer the grapes to come to maturity. It brings forth much saffron, whose colour, juice, and smell is very pleasing. It abounds so in silver, as there is scarce any other thing to be seen in the veins which they found out: these mines are in the territory of Cromlaw, and in like manner in those of Budvueisz and Kuttemberg. They have also very good gold in some places, with tin, lead, copper, and iron, wherewith this country abounds: but especially there are very good mines of iron ne●re unto the town of Beram. They do also found C●rboncleses and Amethistes in this country.  
Moravia hath for the most 〈◊〉 a fat soil, and by consequence apt for corn, and the little hills are also fit for ●●●ess, which agreed better with this soil than with that of Bohemia: all is so 〈◊〉 manured, and so full of people that give themselves to tillage, as there is 〈…〉 place left to feed their cattle. john Dubrave hath written that they found Insens 〈◊〉 Myrrh in this country, not that falls from any tree, but which is drawn out of the ground, and it is only found in one place, which they call Gradesque.  
The high country of Bavaria is in a manner full of mountains and forests and watered with lakes and forcible streams, and for this cause fit for pasture, and for the planting of fruit trees which yield abundance of fruit: but their champain fields bear good store of wheat.  
The low country of Bavaria abounds in wheat, cattle, fish, foul, wild beasts, and other things necessary for the life of man. This country doth breed great store of ●wine by means of their acorns and crabs. There are also in this country many fountains or salt: but for the most part they want wine. There is also found great store of copper and iron.  
The country of Austria is plain, and lies open to the Northern winds. It brings forth good store of wheat, wine, and other first-fruits. The air is very wholesome, and they found abundance of silver.  
As for the country of Tyrol it abounds in mines of silver, copper, and latin. The mountains of this country are very high, always covered with snow, and abound with wild beasts.  
Stiria is a country altogether hilly, except upon the East parts, where there are goodly plains. In it are excellent mines of iron and silver.  
As for Carinthia, there are valleys and little hills which yield store of come. It hath also very many lakes and rivers.  
Westphalia is fit to feed cattle than to bear come: there are forests in some places. The soil is unfit for vines: but there are divers first-fruits, as apples, nuts, and acorns, wherewith they feed great store of swine. There is also store of metals in the territory of Cologne.  
The duchy of Cleves doth enjoy a sweet and temperate air, and the soil doth yield great store of wheat. There are good pastures, and reasonable good rivers which do water it.  
As for the country of juliers it yields abundance of wheat, & a kind of grass which dyer's make use of. There is much tame cattle, especially very good horses.  
The country of Hessen yields abundance of all things necessary for the life of man, except wine, whereof notwithstanding, it is not altogether unfurnished, for that there grows some near unto the river of Rhin. There is great store of cattle. The soil of Waldec bears much corn and wine, it is watered with many rivers, and rich in mines, from whence they draw gold, silver, copper, quicksilver, iron, lead, salt, and alumne.  
The Palatinat wants not any thing that is necessary for man's use, upon the hills there grows excellent wine, especially about Baccharac, the which is much commended above most of the wines in Germany, and there grow also upon these hill's abundance of chestnuts; at the foot of the hills there are goodly orchards, and in the plains abundance of wheat, barley, and other grain. The woods and hills are full of wild beasts, especially of stags, and the countrymen feed many goats and kids there. The river of Neccar runs through this country in which they take great store of fish, especially of barbles. There go many boats laden with wood out of this river into Rhin, and serve all the towns upon that river from Spire to Bins. There lies a great plain betwixt Worms, Heidelberg, Neostade, and Oppenheim, the which is wonderful fruitful of wine and wheat, but no place abounds more than about the town of Alzea.  
Turinge yields good store of corn, and a kind of herb which the Latins call Isatade, which serves for the use of dyer's.  
In Saxony they have great store of metals, and there are goodly rivers which have abundance of fish, and besides all this the inhabitants found many other great commodities.  
In the country of Mansfeld they have great store of metals, and flint stones which are easy to break, the which being heat yield copper, with good store of silver. There is also in this country a salt lake, in the which if the fishermen cast their nets too deep, they are burnt, as if they had been in the fire.  
Lusatia yields wheat and all other kind of grain in abundance, like unto Silesia, which hath also a great number of pools for fish.  
Misnia yields good store of wheat, wine, and honey, and doth feed much cattle. In this country also they found mines of gold. The country of Liege is pleasant, and exceeding fertile: it hath many goodly rivers full of fish, and in like manner great forests full of dear and other wild beasts, and also mountains and valleys which yield plenty of wine and first-fruits: there are also mines of iron and coals which they call Lilanthraces'. They do in like manner found much saltpetre, and excellent waters and baths for the curing of divers diseases, amongst the which is that of Tongres, whereof Pliny and some others make mention.  
As for the country of Treves, it is uneven, for that in some places there are rough and barren mountains which bear nothing but oats, and in some parts there are hills which be green and fertile, and are well planted with vines: but the country is much more yielding towards the rivers of Rhin and Moselle. This country is watered with many rivers, torrents, & small brooks which fall into Moselle, and then discharge themselves into the Rhin. By reason of these many rivers and waters, the inhabitants are abundantly furnished with fish. The forests of this country are full of stags, and other wild beasts. There are in this country two lakes of an admirable depth, whereof the one is called ulme, and the other Laiche, in this last ●hey found stones which be green, yellow, and read, and in a manner as fair as Emeralds, Hyacynthes, and Rubies. There is also generally in this country mines of copper, lead, silver, and iron, and in like manner waters fit and wholesome for sick persons.   

¶ The Manners of the Ancients.  
THe Allemans', called sometimes Germane, by reason of their force, according unto some, for that this word Germany signifies all masculine and strong; and according unto Strabo, for that they did imitate them in behaviour, and were as it were like unto them in disposition, and in the greatness of their bodies and their complexions: so as the Romans' gave them this name of Germane, as if they had been known to be brethren to the Gauls, for that the Latin calleth them Germains which are brethren, and issued from one venture. The Allemans' I say have always been held very valiant and courageous. Before they entered into battle, they did sing a hymn to the honour of Hercules who they said, had been sometimes in their country, and they used numbers and measures, though without any proportion in their singing, the which was invented to amaze the enemy. They were sudden in their affairs and marched with great precipitation. They were unfit for travel, and could not long endure the discommodities which follow war, especially thirst and heat.  
In old time they had no use of gold or silver, and they made as little account of silver plate, which was given unto captains, or presented unto their princes, unless it were of earth: gold and silver hath since been known and esteemed by them, only in regard of traffic and commerce. There was as little use in old time of swords, but they rather used long staves, boar-spears, or pikes with a little iron at the end, fit arms to encounter an enemy, were it to charge him a far off, or to join and come to handy strokes: their horsemen carried lances and targets, and the footmen did cast many darts when they came to join battle: they did either fight naked, or else they did use a certain short cassock; and there was no diversity of habits to distinguish the companies, they did only paint their targets diversly, to the end they might be known. There were few that used corslets nor cuirasses, or that did arm their heads with any head piece. They had no great care of the beauty and swiftness of their horses, nor to make them curvet, but they were only contented to have them pass a strait carreire. He that had lost his target fight, was so hated & detested, as he was not admitted neither to their sacrifices, counsels, nor public assemblies, which caused many that would not survive this infamy to advance their own deaths.  
Their king was chosen out of the body of the nobility, and had no power to do all things after his own fancy, not to use every thing absolutely at his pleasure. They did choose for heads of their armies such as exceeded the rest in virtue, and knew better how to execute, than to command. It was not lawful for any one to beaten or to kill another, except the priest only, to the end that they might believe that it was God only that did punish offenders.  
They did commonly carry unto the war certain tables, which did represent their Gods, and to this end they drew them out of temples built in forests. When they went to the war, they would have their nearest kinsmen, and those things which were dearest unto them not far off, to the end, that in the presence of their friends they might either vanquish gloriously, or dye with honour & commedation: when they were wounded they retired themselves to their mothers and wives, who were not so dainty but they would dress their wounds, visit them, and prepare them meat, and encourage them to fight valiantly. We also found in writing, that the Germane (being in a manner defeated) have often repulsed their enemies by the encouragement of their wives, to whose spirits they did attribute a certain foresight and holiness, by reason whereof they did not reject their counsel, nor contemn their advice in their assemblies.  
They had certain days on the which they did sacrifice men to Mercury, but they offered none but beasts to Mars and Hercules. They did also use lots and divination in matters of small importance, the resolutions of affairs depended upon the heads of cities, but in those things that were of consequence, they did assemble the whole body of the city to determine thereof. They did not begin any enterprise but during the new Moon, and when it was full, and they did not accounted by the days, but made their computation by nights. They came armed to their assemblies, and when they would show that they did concur in opinion with any one they did only shake their pikes, which was the most honourable sign of their approbation, but if the proposition did displease them, they showed it by some great murmuring.  
They that fled from the war, or betrayed their friends were hanged at the first tree where they were found, and cowards, and such as had no force were cast into the mire and covered with dirt, or else they were cast headlong into moors with a hardle upon them to the end they should not come forth; as if they had been of opinion that they should publicly punish an offence, and yet cover and hide the infamy of the fact.  
It was not lawful for the magistrate to do any thing either in private or in public without his arms. They were very curious to be well followed, for that they which had the gallantest troops of youth in their trains were honoured above the rest. It was infamous for a soldier to survive his commander being slain in war, unless he died after that he had won the victory. The prince did fight to vanquish, and they that followed him sought for his preservation and defence. They did lightly undertake a war, and without any necessity, being able to live without fight; so as they held it a baseness to provide for any thing necessary by labour, if they might get it by force and fight.  
When they were not in war, the most valiant and worthiest among them had no other care but to sleep, eat, and drink, leaving the charge of their families and husbandry to thei● wives; wherein also the old men were employed. Their ordinary abode was in villages and hamlets, where their houses were separated.  
Their attire was a cassock made close before with a buckle or a lace, and for want thereof with thorns. The rich did differ in habit from the poor, not for that they were larger, but more strait, and so fitted to the body, as it seemed to be glued to the members which it covered: and the apparel both of men and women was a like.  
The Germane among all the Eastern and Northern Nations have from the beginning contented themselves with one wife, although there were some that did marry many The wife did not bring a dowry to her husband, but the husband gave it unto his wife: they did not care to adorn their wives, or to spend their estates in buying of jewels, and movables, but they gave them a paere of oxen ready yoked, a horse with bridle & furniture, a target, a pike, and a sword. It was an admirable thing to see the modesty and continency of their wives, being in a manner never seen at public places or feasts; so it was seldom heard of among so populous a nation that there was any adulteress: and if it happened that any woman were convicted of this crime, first they did cut of her hair, than her husband brought her naked into the open place before her kinsfolks, depriving her of the rights of his house, after which she was whipped throughout the village: there was no means not hope of any reconciliation, when as a woman had once forgotten herself after that manner.  
It was not lawful among them to mock at one another's vices, for that they thought this custom was fit to corrupt good manners, than to reform the bad.  
Young men began late to have the acquaintance and company of women, and by this means their youth were more lusty and active: neither did they much hasten the marriage of their daughters, to the end that both parties might be more fit and able for generation. A murder committed, was recompensed by a certain price, and a number of cattle, and the murderer agreeing did make satisfaction to all his family that had been slain. They took great delight to entertain and lodge strangers, and it was a great error among them to refuse his house and table to such as came. They were accustomed to give presents mutually one unto another, without reproaching any thing; for that they did not hold themselves beholding in any sort one unto another, for any thing they had received.  
They spent whole days and nights in making good cheer, so as they held dunkennesse for no vice: and after their drinking there was nothing seen but quarrels; & there was a murder sooner committed, than an injurious word spoken. They treated of affairs both of peace and war in their banquets, and in old time they were not cunning, but delivered their conceptions plainly and simply. The day after they had consulted, they did retract what they had formerly resolved, to the end they might deliberate the second time, likeunto men that knew not how to dissemble, standing upon the second deliberation, and thinking that they could not err, having so well consulted upon a business. Their drink was made of barley, and like unto wine: but they that lived near unto rivers had wine which was brought them from foreign countries. For their meat they had wild apples, meal newly ground, and quailed milk.  
They taught their youth to pass cunningly through ranks of pikes, and naked swords, to the end they might be more expert in battle. They were so given to play, as having lost their goods, they would engage and cell their liberties; so as he that lost remained slave unto the other: and althought that the loser were young and strong, yet he suffered himself to be bound, and sold like a beast in the market.  
They divided the year into three seasons, that is to say, into Winter, the Spring time, and Summer, like men that knew not Autumn, for that they had neither wine, nor first-fruits to gather in that season.  
Their tears were soon passed at the death of any one, but their grief continued long graven in their souls. It was the office of women to weep and lament, and for men only to have a remembrance of the dead.  
But to speak in particular of the manners of some people of Germany, the Saxons were great pirates at sea, as Appollinarius doth teach us. Before they left the country which they had spoiled, their custom was to take the tenth of all their prisoners, whom they murdered with an execrable ceremony: they thought that by this means they were discharged towards their gods, in sacrificing those whom they had taken in war.  
They did seldom suffer their neighbours in peace, but they lived quietly among themselves, and the lords provided with great courtesy for all things that were necessary for their citizens. They were wonderful curious of the preservation of the families and races of their ancient nobility, and would not much acquaint themselves with strangers, nor ally themselves to their inferiors.  
This people was generally divided into four Estates, that is to say, the nobility, free men, men that had been enfranchised, and slaves; and it was forbidden by their law, for any one to quit his rank in contracting marriage: wherefore a nobleman, or a gentleman was bound to marry a wife of his own condition, and so of the rest, and if any one did infringe this ordinance, he was in question of his life. They had good laws for the punishment of offences; as if a murder had been committed, they had a regard unto the condition of him that had been slain, and it was seldom punished with death, unless it had been done in some temple, and then there was no remission: yea whosoever laid an ambush, and sought opportunity to commit a murder, although he did not execute his bad design, yet was he banished and condemned in great fines.  
These was punished with greater rigour, for he that had stolen but three sou of their ancient kind of money was called in question of his life: and in like manner they that did rob and use violence did pass the rigour of the same sentence. As for inheritances, no man could deprive his lawful heir, or him that had right unto the succession, to give it to ●●other, unless it were unto the church, or to make the king his heir.  
The Saxons were in old time given to the superstition of Idols, and did worship 〈◊〉 that were very green and full of leaves, and laden with branches, and in like manner ●●●re fountains. They had also the body of a great tree set into the ground in an open place which they call Irminsual, which signifies an universal pillar, as if it had supported all things: this tree was beaten down by Charles the Great when as he subdued the Saxons, and transported them into Flanders and Brabant, to the end they should not revolt any more in their country. They did also worship Mercury, to whom they did sac●●●ice (like unto the other almains) upon certain days those whom they had taken in war. They held it nothing fit for the majesty of their gods to be shut up in temples, on that they should make any image to represent them, thinking it impossible for man to comprehend that which is of a divine majesty. They did dedicat high grown woods, and the thickest and obscurest forests to their gods, and there they disputed of the greatest secrets of nature with much honour and reverence. This people was also given to o●●●ue the flying, eating, and entrails of birds, that by this means they might divine of future things.  
In old time they divined after this manner: They that would know any thing took little sticks or rods of certain fruit trees which they cut in pieces, and marked them after diverse manners, and with divers colours, spreading them without any form or order upon some garment that was white & clean. If the consultaton concerned the public, t●● priest did preside, and if it were for any private cause, the father of the family, or master of the household where it was practised, having made his prayer unto the gods, with his eyes lift upon high, he did lift up these rods thus spread, thrice, and as the mar●●esturned, he foretold the happy or unfo●tunat event of the business; and if the marks did forbidden the enterprise, they deferred it until another time: but if it did allow of it, these lots must also foretell the event.  
They also bred up white horses in their woods and forests at the public charge, and they had a care that they should not be used: they were harnesed to a chariot appointed to that end, the which was accompanied by the priest and king, or by the head of the city or province, who did observe the neighing and noise of these horses; so as there was not any kind of divination, whereunto they gave more faith and credit than to this, for as much as they did esteem these beasts as the ministers of the gods, as who knew their secrets. They had also another kind of lots or hazard by the which they did conjecture the event of their wars of greatest importance: for they did force every one of their captives taken in war (and that were of the nation against whom they did contend) to fight with any of theirs they should choose, and he that had the upperhand did serve as a prediction of the future victory.  
As for them of Suaube or Suevia, Caesar faith in his Commentaries, that it was a great people much given to arms, yea more than all the rest of the Germane: that they had a hundred boroughs and cantons, whereof every one did furnish yearly one thousand warlike soldiers, who went forth of their country to invade their neighbours, and in the mean time, they that remained at home laboured as well to feed themselves, as to defray their charges that went to the wars, and that these which remained went at the end of the year, whenas the rest returned home to refresh themselves. He saith also that no man had any land or field in particular, and that it was not lawful for them to stay and devil above a year in a place, that they fed little upon bread, but upon milk and ●esh, and were altogether given to hunting, in like manner that they were not accustomed from their infancies to any duties, nor subject to the rigour of any discipline. They were so hardened to labour, as notwithstanding they dwelled in a very cold country, yet had they no other garments but skins, and those were so short and strait, as the greatest part of their bodies were bore: and they also bathed themselves often in rivers.  
They suffered merchants to come into their country, more to cell the pillage which they had gotten during the war, than for any desire they had of that which came from foreign countries. They took no delight to be well mounted, like unto the Gauls; for they contented themselves with such horses as they bred in their country, and they did enure them so well to labour, as they made them fit for their service. They did often leave their horses to fight on foot, having taught them to stand still in one place. They held nothing more base than to use saddles; so as although they saw great numbers of men, whose horses had saddles, yet they feared not to charge and affaile them. They would not suffer any wine to be brought into their country, saying that it made them but ●ost and effeminate. They held it a great honour to have much ground lying near them waste, being a sign that there were many people which could not withstand their force, so as near joining to the Suevians there were six hundred thousand paces of ground not manured.  
Tacitus saith that they did shorten their hair with tying and wreathing it upon their heads, & that the princes carried their hair better comed and trimmed than the rest. At a certain time of the year they sent deputies out of every quarter of Germany, & there they did massacre and sacrifice a man in a place that was thick covered with trees. It was not lawful for any man to set footing into this place but with his hands bound, to the end he should acknowledge that he was less than the gods, and if by chance any one fell to the ground he might not rise again, but be dragged forth. This foolish superstition tended to acknowledge from whence they had their beginning, & the place where their god reigned. One part of the Suevians did sacrifice also to the goddess Isis. Finally the Romans having drawn the Suevians to their obedience and friendship, they always did them this honour to put them before in their armies, & to give them the point in battles rather than to any other nation.  
They of Bavaria (who descended from the Boiens (according to Polybeus) dwelled in hamlets built without any walls, or enclosure, and the ground was their bed with a little straw. They lived of flesh, and were wholly given to war and labour, living very sparingly, and making no account of arts and sciences. Their wealth consisted in gold and cattle, which things might be easily transported if they should be forced to change their dwellings. Every man sought to get as many friends as he could, and he that had most men at his devotion was most esteemed and feared.   

¶ The Manners at this day.  
AT this day the Germane are divided into four Estates and kinds of people. The first is of the Clergy, which comprehends all Churchmen both secular and regular, or religious orders. These have great revenues, and are much honoured of all the rest, if they be learned, and of good life: for the people do easily contemn prelates and ministers of the Church if they be ignorant and dissolute: the religious men carry habits befitting their condition: the priests which are not monks have long black gowns, their caps are of wool very hollow, and not pointed, and come down unto their ears. When as they go in the street they carry a hood upon their shoulders which is of silk or wool, and they wear pantofles: the greatest part of them are given to idleness, and care little for learning, but only to drink, play, and make good cheer.  
The second Estate is of the nobility, which comprehends the princes, earls, barons, knights, and gentlemen. The princes are more esteemed than the rest, not so much for their greatness, or the antiquity of their families, but for that they are more mighty than the rest, as having more land, seigneuries, and revenues. But it is strange to see the princes, earls, barons, and their like, obey their Emperor upon the first command, as his subjects and liege men, when as the meanest gentlemen say that they are free from this subjection, and go not to the wars unless they be paid, and yet they call the emperor their prince, and due so acknowledge him. All the nobility and gentry would think they should do themselves great wrong, if they should use the trade of merchandise, or practise any mechanic art, and they think it would be a great dishonour unto them to take any base woman to wife, that were not of their quality. They contemn the company and conversation of Bourgesses of towns, and for this reason they build castles and ●ortss in the country, whereas they live at liberty with their families. Some of them frequent the courts of Princes, and follow them to the wars, others live close at home upon their revenues.  
All the gentlemen take delight in hunting, and say, that this exercise belongs only to them, and that they have the grant and privileges of princes. If any passenger, or any one of the third Estate is convicted to have hunted, especially hares, hinds, fallow dear, wild goats, and stags, in any place whatsoever, they put out his eyes for a punishment of the fact; and in some others he looseth his life: yet it is lawful for any man wehunt such beasts as are hurtful. Finally, the nobility make good cheer, & are stately appareled. Both men and women have their garments of silk of all colours, & wear many chains of gold and goodly jewels.  
When as they go abroad they are followed by a great troop of their domestic ser●●●tss, and march with such a granitie, as they are easily distinguished from the people. If they go any thing far, it is on horseback, for that they hold it a dishonour to go on foot, and say, that it is a sign of a strange misery, and poverty, and yet if they want any necessaries, they hold it no shame to take it by force and violence. If they have received any wrong, they do seldom appeal to justice, but seek their revenge by way of arms; s● as spoiling and burning their enemy's country, they force them that have done the wrong to make them a sufficient reparation. They are proud, full of disquietness, covetous, and hold the poor peasant in a strange servitude.  
Thethird Estate contains the citizens, and Bourgesses of towns, whereof some are immediately subject to the Empire, without acknowledging any other lord: others besides the Emperor have princes, or are subject to the Clergy. The citizens of towns line ingreat love and concord, they carry themselves honestly, and traffic together both in public and private, and oftentimes they feast one another. They seldom deceive one another, and have very few controversies. At what time, or in what place soever they meet, they salute one another courteously, and with much honour. They are all plainly attired, and live sparingly on the week days, but upon fesgtifall days they are somewhat more liberal. They that labour make four meals a day, and the men that work not have but two.  
The ordinary apparel of the men is of wool, and that of the women of linen cloth, and sometimes of wool, but of divers colours. They love to be in the French fashion. They attire themselves in black at the funerals of their kinsfolks, and they mourn thirty days, during which time they 'cause prayers to be said thrice for the deceased, that is, on the day of the Interment, on the seventh day, and on the thirtieth. This nation is much devoted to the service of God, so as there is not any Artisan whatsoever, but he prays before he gins his work.  
They entertain young men, who for to study have voluntarily banished themselves out of their countries and wander throughout the world, whereof sometimes there are so many in one town, as it is a wonder how they are able to maintain them. The citizens lodge them for the honour of God, than they go begging their bread and singing from door to door, where they are relieved with abundance. joining to every parish Church there is a house which belongs to the public, whereas they read the liberal arts, and these poor men, with the children of the town and others, are taught there by learned men, who have stipends to that end.  
The buildings of rich men are of stone, lime, and sand, the poor have their lodgings low, and made of wood and earth. Both the one and the other cover their houses with tile or slate. In the country of Saxony, and in many other places they cover them with laths.  
The last rank and Estate is of Peasants, and the country people, who manure the land, and whose condition is miserable. They remain far●e one from another, every one with his family, living poorly and wretchedly. Their bread is black, and for the most part of oats. As for their meat, they have beans and pease; and their drink is pure water or beer. Their habit is a cassock of linen cloth, a pair of high shoes, and a poor felt hat. These people are always without rest, unhandsome, and slovenly, in their household. They carry what they have to sell to the neighbour towns, be it fruit, cattle, or any other thing, and with the money they buy such things as they need, for that they have few or no attisans dwelling among them in their villages. Upon festival days they meet after noon under some tree in a public place, whereas they talk of their affairs: After this, the youngmen fall a dancing by some flute, and the elder men go to the ●averne to drink carouse. The men never go to any public place without some arms, to use if need be. They make many journeys for the service of their lords, tilling their land, sowing and reaping their come, carrying it into the barn, cutting down their woods, and serving their masons when they build. Finally, there is no servitude but the lords say the people are bound unto.  
But having spoken in general of the manners of the Germane, let us look into the particularities which are observed in many Provinces. The Saxons are such great drinkers, as they that attend them can hardly furnish them that drink: and therefore they set a great pot upon the table, whereas every man takes what he likes, and by this means they drink exceedingly. They are so given to drunkenness, as they in a manner force every man to drink; and this life they continued day and night: he that drinks best is not only commended for his beastly humour, but is crowned with a Crown of Roses, or other flowers and herbs, or hath some toy given him for the prize of his victory. Their manner of drinking is spread over all Germany. Whilst they are seasting, if any one pass by them, be it the master of the lodging or any other, every man that hath a glass full riseth and drinks unto him, which is as much to say, as he must drink to them. They hold him for their enemy that being often invited to drink, doth not pledge them: so as this contempt is many times revenged with some murder.  
The Saxons meat is hard, ill dressed, and of gross digestion, as Lard, Sausiges, and Andovilles, or Chitterlings dried in the smoke, raw Onions, and salt Butter: and in some places they seethe the meat on Sunday which they eat all the week after. As for their Infants they do not feed them with pap, but they give them solid meats well chawed by the mother, or nurse, by reason whereof, the Saxons being accustomed to this feeding, are stronger than the rest, and endure all discommodities with more patience. They have a particular language; but as for their apparel they differ not much from the rest of the Germane.  
The W●stphaliens are witty and good warriors, but vicious and cunning.  
The Francons or Franconians differ neither in proportion of body not in manner of habit from the rest of the Germane. They endure much labour, and both men and women are given to dress and trim their vines, so as not any one lives idle. These people being priest with poverty cell their wine, and drink water, for that they contemn beer. They are insolent, proud by nature, having a good opinion of themselves, and contemn all other nations, yea they speak so ill of others, as strangers that frequent among them will hardly discover the place of their birth, unless they be very forward of speech. They that endure their arrogancy with patience are welcome, and having once tried them after this troublesome manner, they receive them often for their allies. and give them their daughters and kinswomen in marriage. They are very devou●, and yet much given to blasphemy and theft, whereof the one seems goodly unto them, and the other lawful.  
Fi●● w●●kes before Christmas every Thursday, the children, both boys and girls, go knocking at every door, and singing songs, which contain the near Nativity of Christ, and by the which they wish unto the whole company a good year: for which office many give them Pears, Apples, and Nuts, and some give them silver.  
Upon Christmas day, they set the representation of an infant newly borne, upon the 〈◊〉 about the which the children leap and dance, and the old folks sing; upon New years day the kinsfolks and friends salute one another, and shake hands, wishing a 〈◊〉 New year. They spend the day together in good cheer, and according to the an●●● custom of their ancestors, they sand presents one unto another.  
●●on Twelfth day every house makes a cake of fine white fluore, honey, pepper, and 〈◊〉, and then they created a king as followeth. The mistress of the house is she that 〈◊〉 the cake, into the which when she kneads it, she puts a small piece of silver, than 〈◊〉 it upon the hearth, she cuts it into as many pieces as there are persons in the house, 〈◊〉 gives to every one his part: yet there are certain pieces assigned, first one to Christ, 〈◊〉 to the Virgin Marie, and last to the three wise men that came to worship him; and 〈◊〉 ●hese parts are given to the poor: he that hath that part wherein the piece of silver ●●●ainess, is saluted as king, set in a chair, and raised up thrice by the whole company 〈◊〉 great cries of joy. The king being thus raised up on high, hath a piece of chalk in ●and, with the which he makes so many crosses upon the top of the plancher of the ●●●mber where they meet. During the twelve days of Christmas, there is not any house ●ranconia but is perfumed with incense, or some other sweet sent, to prevent 〈◊〉.  
●t Shrovetide the Franconians run up and down the streets attired like devils, or 〈◊〉, striking without discretion such as pass by with little gabs filled with sand. Upon 〈◊〉 wednesday in many places, all the boys of the parish meet together, who taking all 〈◊〉 maidens which have most frequented dancing that year, and yoking them like 〈◊〉 unto a chariot, upon the which there is a minstrel set, who plays upon some in●●●ent, in this manner they conduct them to the first water which they found.  
●●ing the Rogation week many parishes meet together, and the young girls and 〈◊〉 ●arch before in procession with garlands of flowers upon their heads, and staves 〈◊〉 sallow in their hands. The priests of every church are very attentive to hear parishioners sing, & they that have sung best have (according to their sentence, and 〈◊〉 custom) certain measures of wine given them to quench their thirst.  
〈◊〉 Whitsonholidays, their manner is both in Franconia and almost through●●● Germany, for them that have horses, or can borrow any, to meet together, setting ●●●est al●o on horseback, who carries the holy sacrament; and in this manner they go ●●●the precincts of their territory, singing hymns and songs, and praying unto God ●●● would preserve the first-fruits of the Earth.  
〈◊〉 S. Urbans day, they that trim the vines set forth a table in some public place, ●over it with a fair cloth, and with leaves, herbs, and sweet smelling flowers, whereaway set the image of S. Vrban. If the day be fair and bright, they drink freely, and 〈◊〉 in the honour of his name: but if it rain, or the weather be close, they cast dirt 〈◊〉 this saint, and defile the cloth and whatsoever is upon the table, with stinking 〈◊〉 for that they think their vines which are then in flower, will bear, or not, accor●●●● as the day is fair or foul.  
〈◊〉 S. john Baptist's day, both men and women go dancing about a bonfire, and 〈◊〉 garlands of verve in and other herbs, and they carry great nosegays of flowers, 〈◊〉 they call Esperons, and they look upon the fire through these flowers, thinking 〈◊〉 they shall have no diseases in their eyes that year. They that will departed before the 〈◊〉 quenched, cast in first certain herbs wherewith they are girt, using these, or such 〈◊〉 words, Let all my misfortunes part, and be devoured in this fire. At the same time 〈◊〉 have pots of Earth full of holes, which the young maidens cover with roses and 〈◊〉 flowers, than they put a candle burning into them, which they set upon tops of 〈◊〉 to serve as lamb pes.  
●●llagess, the young men which are to marry, carry young fir trees, and cut off all 〈◊〉 branches downward, beautifying the top of the tree with looking-glasses, pieces of 〈◊〉 scutcheons, and other things that glister, the which they plant in the ground, and 〈◊〉 during the Summer.  
Autumn when as their grapes are ripe, it is not lawful for any man to begin his 〈◊〉 without his leave to whom the tithe doth belong, and all they that have vines 〈◊〉 quarter, must begin their vintage together, and bring the lords right into the valley, for that which grows upon the hills. They that will make their vintage later than the rest, must not only have permission to do it, but they must also bring the lords tithe unto the press. Vintage being ended, for that at Wirtzbourg there are young men appointed to control them that pay, these young men make torches of straw, which they kindle, and so enter by night into the town singing with this light, thinking that with this ceremony they purge and burn Autumn.  
The Franco●●●ss do celebrat the feasts of S. Martin, and S. Nicholas, the one at the table in drinking hard: the other at church in praying: then every man tastes of his wine, and at Wirtzbourg, and in other places they give somewhat to the poor. They 'cause two furious boars to fight within a toil, to the end they may tear one another in peece●●●nd being both fore wounded, and overthrown, the people have a part, and the rest 〈◊〉 distributed to the magistrates. Upon S. Nicholas day the children which go to school ●hose three amongst them, one of which is the bishop, and the other are his deacons. This bishop made at pleasure, is that day conducted to the church by the whole troop of scholars, being attired in his pontifical robes, with the which he doth assist at divine f●●n●●e, at the end whereof, he and his deacons go singing from door to door to get money, and they deny that this is an alms, but a charitable succour due to the bishop. They teach their children to fast the eve of this Saint, and therefore in the night when they sleep, they put some piece of silver in their shoes, telling them that it proceeds from the saints bounty, so as some fast with such eagerness, as they are forced to make them eat to preserve their health.  
As for them of Suevia, the richest and of mostnote among them are in a manner all given to merchandise, and make a common purse to that end, and every man knows what sum he shall adventure: with which money they not only buy silks and spices, but all other small mercery wares, as spoons, points, looking glasses, & puppets, and they also buy wine and corn to keep, the which they cell again for the double of that it 〈◊〉. They have letters of commission from princes, by the which all men are forbidden to buy wine or corn in any other places, but whereas they have their storehouses. True it is that they do not use this traffic themselves, but they have their factors who give ●hem ●n accounted.  
As for them of meaner quality, their greatest trade is to make linen cloth, to the which they are so given, as in many places you shall not only see women and maidens at the distaff, but also men and boys spinning among them. They make a certain cloth of lin●en mixed with cotton which they call Pargath, and another all of linen, called in their language Golfch.  
The Suevia●● are much given to incontinency, and the women are as tractable as men can desire, and both the one and the other begin this lewd life soon, and leave it late: and therefore there is a common proverb, That the country of Suaube alone is able to furnish all Germany with strumpets, Franconia with rogues and beggars, 〈◊〉 with heretics, Bavaria with the eves, Westphalia with perjurers and false witnesses, and the Marquisat of the Rhin with gluttons.  
As for them of Bavaria, they are so slovenly, rude, and brutish, as if they be compared with the rest of the Germans, they may justly be termed barbarous. But the vices wherewith they are mostinfected, are discourtesy and theft. They attire themselves most commonly in blue, and do rather wear boots and buskins, than stockings. The most devout 〈◊〉 them go often in pilgrimage in great troops, especially to Aix la Chapelle.  
Austria hath princes which carry the title of Archduke, and whenas any one comes unto this 〈◊〉, they use a strange ceremony: for not far from the town of S. Vite, in a great and deep valley, there are the ruins of a town to be seen, but the name is not 〈◊〉: near unto these ruins in a goodly meadow there is a great marble stone set, 〈◊〉 the top of which they set a peasant, to whom this right falls by succession: this man 〈…〉 cow big with calf near unto him on the right hand, and on the left a lean 〈…〉 mare, and about him an infinite number of peasants and other people.  
After which the duke comes being accompanied with a great troop of his nobility, 〈◊〉 whom they carry his ducal ornaments, and all his train are in great pomp: 〈◊〉 prince is plainly attired, wearing the habit of a Peasant, with the cap and shoes, ●●●●epheards' hook; so as one would rather take him for a man of that condition 〈◊〉 a prince. He that fits upon the stone, seeing the Archduke come, cries out in the ●●●●●nian Tongue, What is he that marcheth so proudly? To whom the multitude ●●●derstands by, answers, It is the Lord of all the country. Then the Peasant demands 〈◊〉 would be just in his judgement; if he desires the good of the country; if he be of a 〈◊〉 condition, and of a noble extraction; if he deserves this dignity; if he will keep 〈◊〉 commandments of God like a good Catholic, and defend the Church: whereat 〈◊〉 ●●all cry, yea: and then he that sits upon the stone saith, By what means can he take ●●●●om this place? Then the Steward to the new Prince answers, This place shall be 〈◊〉 ●●●med from you with the price of sixty pieces of silver; these beasts shall be yours, 〈◊〉 ●hose garments which the duke wears: and moreover, you, and your family, shall 〈◊〉 from all Taxes, Imposts, and Subsidies. After this, the Peasant strikes the duke 〈◊〉 upon the check, advising him to be an upright judge; which done, he goes 〈◊〉 from his seat, takes his spoils, and retires himself: then the duke goes up unto 〈◊〉, and drawing forth his sword, he turns himself round about, and promiseth 〈◊〉 the people all the duty of a good Prince, and of an upright judge. Some hold, 〈◊〉 do also bring him water in a Peasants hat, and that he drinks thereof for an 〈◊〉 of his future sobriety. From thence they go unto a Church near unto the place, 〈◊〉 to the Virgin Marie, where the duke assists with all his troop at divine 〈…〉 ceremonies being ended, the Prince casting off his rustic habit, he puts on 〈…〉, and feasts with his nobility. After dinner, they return unto the meadow, 〈…〉 ●he duke hears the complaints of every man, and doth justice unto all, 〈…〉 ●ealtie and homage of all his vassals and subjects. The Peasants have this 〈…〉 the duke in his dignity, for that they were the first which received the 〈…〉 that country.  
〈◊〉 have a strange kind of proceeding against thieves, especially towards that 〈…〉 the town of Klagen stands. If any man be suspected of theft, they hung him 〈…〉 and than they make his process; if he be found innocent, he is taken down ●●●●ed, and his funerals are made at the public charge; but if he be judged 〈◊〉 suffer him to hung until he fall in pieces.  
●●●●tire of the Carinthiens is of wool, but not died, and they do commonly wear 〈…〉 speak the Sclavon Tongue. But the Stirians are gross and rude, and have all 〈◊〉 swellings under their throat, as it hinders their speech: yet they do imitate 〈◊〉 in their behaviour and attire, and also in their speech, except it be those 〈…〉 along the river of Draw, who use the Sclavon Tongue. As for them of 〈◊〉 speak no Germane but Sclavon: yet there are many which at this day speak 〈◊〉 tongue, especially in preaching. This people were never tied in general by 〈◊〉 which drew them unto virtue, but their will serves them for a law. They are 〈◊〉 ●●●●ge breasted, and have their hair white; they are ambitious, glorious, 〈…〉 contemn others, and in all other things do not much differ from the 〈◊〉  
●●●conclude, the Germane make profession to be very loyal, and to speak the truth, 〈◊〉 ●●●●ther borne to simplicity than to subtlety, the which they know not how to 〈◊〉 of themselves: but in a strange country, they are the more fit to deceive others, 〈◊〉 they are not much disinherited; and we may say, that chastity is more 〈…〉 kept in this country. Drunkenness is no vice amongst them, yea, they say, that 〈…〉 deceitful men have brought in an abstinence from wine, to the end they 〈◊〉 not, discover their bad conceptions, having drunk hard.   

¶ The Riches.  
GErmanie must needs be rich, seeing there are so many goodly mines of silver, and of all kinds of metals, yea and of gold more than in any other country of Europe; and besides it is fertile in many places, and much given to the trade of merchandise, for that the Germane are more careful of traffic than any other nation, and give 〈◊〉 to divers arts and trades, so as they make wonderful and rare works. Moreover, ●● is naturally furnished with many great and navigable rivers, whereby all victuals and merchandise are transported easily from one place to another. And nature hath been so bountiful unto them as in places far from the sea, it gives them fountains and pits of Salt-water, the which they boil, and make thereof excellent good salt.  
They make money of their Saltpits, and of their Wines, which they transport into other countries. Their Fairs are of good consideration, especially those of Franckfort, 〈◊〉 he● merchants come from all parts of Europe, yea and sometimes out of Africa and Asia.  
A●●atia makes great commodity of her mines of silver, copper, and lead: Franconia of wine and liqu●ris where with they lad great wagons, and transport it into foreign countries: Moravia of Incense and Myrrh: Bavaria of fat swine, which they sand into divers pa●tss of Europe, and in like manner other cattle, wheat, and salt, where of they have many fountains and also great store of iron and copper, which they sand weekley to the river of Danow from whence it is dispersed into divers parts of Europe: As for Austria, they docalso make great sums of money of their silver mines, and in like manner in the country of Tyrol which a bounds also in copper.  
The country of 〈…〉 great commodity of an herb or grass which they call 〈◊〉 for Dyers 〈◊〉 of H●ssen lends forth much Wool, and in like sort Gold, Silver, Copper, Quicksilver, Iron, Led, Salt, and Alumne in great abundance. Turingia doth also make great commodity of that herb for dying; and Misnia of their mines of gold. Finally to speak● generally of Germany, it doth not yield in riches to any other Province of Europe. But to come to particulars, you must understand that the revenues of town ●● and secular Princes are much increased, by means of usurpation of Church goods and charges imposed upon the people.  
As for the Emperors revenues, first the free towns which are sixty in number, and were sometimes ●i●●tie six, are bound to contribute the two first parts of that which is resolue● on in their diets and assemblies: but among these, there are some which they call Imperial for that they pay a certain rent unto the Emperor, which amounts in all to ●ift●●ne thousand Florin●, or one thousand five hundred pounds of our starling money. These towns have all good 〈◊〉 the which do much exceed their expenses: and it is thought that the Empire hath in all above seven millions of rent; the which is a matter of 〈◊〉 small moment, for the people not being charged, as in Italy, give, besides the ordinary, very great subsidies unto their Princes, whenas necessity requires.  
The Empire is bound at the lest, by custom, to entertain (whenas the Emperor goes to Rome to receive the crown) twenty thousand foot, and four thousand horse for eight months; and this is called the aid of Rome, whereof the Emperor may put a good p●rt into his purse. Sometimes also they grant unto the Empire expeditions against heretics, sometimes against the Turk, by virtue whereof he hath levied at one time four hundred thousand Florins. 
Female 〈◊〉 pounds 〈◊〉  Finally, the Emperor hath better means than many persuade themselves, for that he draws only out of Alsatia, Suanbe, and the Grisons country, whereas the house of Austria hath fourteen Commonalties (under her jurisdiction) about two millions and half of Florins in ordinary rent, and as much in extraordinary.   

¶ The Forces.  
〈◊〉 we proceed any farther, it shall be good to consider what forces former 〈◊〉 ●●●rorss have drawn out of Germany, seeing it is in a manner solely from thence that 〈◊〉 ●ay have them. Charles the fift had about ninety thousand foot, & thirty thousand 〈◊〉 whenas he went to Vienne against the Turk, of the which there were many 〈◊〉 and Italians. Maxmilian the second, had near one hundred thousand foot, and 〈◊〉 thousand horse, at javarin against the Turks, and yet there was not any want or 〈◊〉 of victuals. When as the Emperor Charles the fift made war against the 〈◊〉 there were in both armies (which held the field for certain months) about one 〈◊〉 and fifty thousand men.  
The forces of Germany are in truth very great, both for that they have abundance 〈◊〉 ●ctuallss, and also for that the means are easy to unite these forces by their rivers: as 〈◊〉, some think that the Empire may draw to field two hundred thousand 〈◊〉 whereof we have seen the experience by that which we have said, and also in other ●●●●sionss: for since the year 1560, they have in a manner made war continually both ●●●ance and in the Low Countries, with good numbers of Germans, whereof they 〈◊〉 often made great levies both of foot and horse. At one instant there came into 〈◊〉 be under the duke of Deux Ponts twelve thousand foot, & eight thousand Reistres 〈◊〉 ●●em of the religion; and on the other side, there were five thousand Germane horse 〈◊〉 the duke of Aumale, and two thousand under the Earl of Mansfeld for the 〈…〉: and William of Nassau prince of Orange, had upon the frontiers of Flaunders 〈◊〉 ●●●nce eight thousand horse, and ten thousand foot of the same nation, and the duke 〈◊〉 three thousand. I forbear to speak of the number of Germane which entered 〈…〉 Low Countries under the command of duke Casimier, and into France also in 〈…〉 1587., and many times since. Finally, wheresoever they make war in Europe, 〈…〉 ●●●waies many Germane, in which number I do not put the Flemings, who have 〈…〉 made armies of eighty thousand men; not the Swisses, who according to the 〈…〉 of some, are able to draw together one hundred and twenty thousand foot for 〈◊〉 ●owne defence, and who have sometimes sent forth thirty thousand, as they did 〈…〉 they were drawn into arms to defend the Estate of Milan against king Francis 〈…〉  
〈◊〉 ●●●●●ning to our discourse, the best german footmen come out of the country's 〈◊〉, Suevia, and Westphalia; and their best horsemen out of that of Brunswick, 〈◊〉 especially from Cleves and Franconia. They handle a two-hand sword, a pike, and a 〈◊〉 ●peare, better than a arqebus: they are good men in battles & in the open field, 〈…〉 to break, as to withstand the enemy's shock: wherein their order and discipline 〈…〉 in a manner natural unto them) doth much help them, and their kind of march 〈…〉 grave and slow, and the defensive arms which they use. But they must have a 〈◊〉 ●under of some other nation, who can tell how to employ that which is good in 〈…〉 for it hath been seldom seen that they have done any thing worthy of their 〈◊〉 ●●●●●ent glory, under the leading of a Germane general. They are not fit for assaults, for 〈◊〉 they are commonly heavy, and laden with fat. They are rather constant than hardy, 〈◊〉 f●r●ous than valiant; for that they never attempt any thing, wherein they show 〈◊〉 courage: and whenas they are victors, they kill all they encounter, without any 〈◊〉 of age or sex, if the war continued, and they are besieged, they yield soon: if 〈…〉 ●ampe, they have not the patience to attend the victory in temporising, if their 〈◊〉 ●●●tempt succeeds not, they are amazed and undertake no more: if they be once 〈…〉 put to flight, they never make head again, and most commonly when the armies 〈…〉 most ready to join they cry out and mutiny for gelt.  
〈◊〉 ●heir armies are of great charge, and very troublesome, for that they carry their 〈◊〉 to war, and consume so much victuals, as it is difficult to lead them, and impossible to maintain them, being most certain, that no good can be expected without victuals. Their horses are rather strong than courageous; and for that of ten which they bring unto the war, eight of them come from the plough and cart, they do no good service to their masters, and become faint hearted in seeing their own blood, contrary to the greets, which grow then ●o●t courageous. To conclude, the german foot in their kind are better than the horse.  
Their forees at se● 〈◊〉 a●e no● les●e than those at land, although they be not so much employed, for tha● 〈◊〉 are towns, whereof some have one hundred, others a hundred and fifty shi●ss by means whereof they are able to make head against the forces of the kings of Denmark and Sueden. Germany is so powerful with all her forces, as being uni●●ed ●he needs not fear any enemy. We must join unto these forces in their necessity the succours of the princes of Italy, of Savoy; and of Lorraine: for these princes ha●●e never failed the Emperor at need; for in the war of Segeth, Emanuel duke of 〈◊〉 sent unto the Emperor six hundred Harquebuziers on horseback, Cosmo duke of Florence entertained three thousand foot, Alphonso the second, duke of Ferrara went in 〈◊〉 with one thousand and five hundred horse so well appointed, as there were not better in the whole army; William duke of Mantova went also with gallant troops: and 〈◊〉 like manner Henry of Lorraine, duke of Guise led three hundred gentlemen: so as with those troops which Pope Pius the fift did add, Maxmilian the second (to whom the Empire, in a diet held at Ausbourg in the year 1566, had granted forty thousand foot, and eight thousand horse for eight months, and twenty thousand foot, and four thousand horse for the three years following) had under his colours, besides his garrisons, one hundred thousand foot, and thirty five thousand horse.  
But there are two things which want in the Empire, whereof the one, is the Union of the resolutions, and the other, the Readiness of their forces. Their resolutions are divided as well by reason of the jealousy which the free towns have of the princes, as for the difference of religions, which makes them to distrust one another; for that besides the 〈◊〉 con●ention betwixt Papists and Protestants, there are divers professions whose 〈◊〉 all hatred in great, as Lutherans, Caluinists, Anabaptists, and such like: by reason whereof they come coldly to altars or general assemblies, and being there, they employ w●●re time in matters which concern religion than state.  
They do also want Readiness, being a difficult thing to assemble a diet or parliament, without the which they cannot do any thing, and they must have three months respite after the first summons and notice thereof: being then assembled, they lose much time by reason of the diversity and contrariety of opinions; and when any thing is concluded, it is slowly put in execution, although the war requires speed, and that opportunities are lost in an instant.  
There is also another inconvenience, which is, that when as they have resolved to give a certain number of men unto the Emperor, and for a certain time, they never come together; for that when as some march unto the enterprise, others return home to their houses having finished their term, and it may be some are not yet in field; so as the Emperor can never make any certain account of the succours which are promised him: whereof the Emperor Charles the fift made good proof, meaning to pass into Italy, contrary to the will of the French and Venetians. The commonalties of Germany in a diet held at Constance had promised him great numbers of foot, and three thousand horse, and yet ●e could ne●er draw above five thousand men together, so as his enterprise proved vain. In like manner ●●●se free towns had promised unto the Emperor Maxi●il●●● the second, an army of ●●●r●eene thousand men to make head against the Swisses who had invaded his Estate and Suevia, and yet he could never have half of them together, for when as the soldiers of one ●●●●munaltie came, others returned unto their houses; so as the Emperor being out of 〈◊〉 to prevail, was forced to make an accord with the Swisses, to whom he gave the town of Basil. But Maximilian thought to 〈◊〉 this inconvenience, whereof he made trial in the enterprise of Segeth, causing 〈…〉 ●●ue these succours in money, not in men, for that he thought with money to make as many men to march as he should need, or at the lest the best part of them. But it is a folly to think to unite Germany, or to effect any matter of importance, whilst th●●●hese opinions shall hold them so divided.  
〈◊〉 conclude, we must not think (notwithstanding all these defects) that the 〈◊〉 weak, as some ignorant of the affairs of the world would make men believe: 〈◊〉 hath a great country, and much people, great store of victuals, and sufficient coiffure to underdake any enterprise. But all his loss grows by the Turks neighbourhood, who confines from the Carpathien mountains, unto the Adriatic sea, and is able 〈◊〉 only to weaken, but also to waste and consume greater forces than the Emperors. 〈◊〉 it is well seen that all Princes which are neighbours to the Turk by land, waist 〈◊〉 treasure whilst they are in peace with him, by reason of the great charge they are ●●●ed to undergo in fortifications, and entertainment of garrisons: and their expenses 〈◊〉 greater during the wars, for the Turk hath so great forces, and so ready upon all ●●●asionss, as he is better armed in time of peace, than most other princes are in time of ●●●re; so as they which confine upon him, must be always in Alarm, and fear so powerful an enemy. Before that the Emperor resigned the realm of Hongarie to the 〈◊〉 duke Mathias his brother, who is now both king and emperor, he entertained 〈◊〉 twenty thousand men upon the frontiers, and moreover spent much in fortification●● and other things.   

¶ The Government.  
〈◊〉 Pope Gregory the fift which instituted the Seven Electors: And although that 〈◊〉 the Great by the Pope's decree transferred the election of the empire to the 〈◊〉 Germany, yet this took no place until his race was extinct; for during the 〈◊〉 thereof, the sun succeeded the father in the Empire. But the decree of 〈◊〉 fift which did exclude all right of succession, referred the free election of the 〈…〉 Prince's, in the year of Grace 1002. The reason which invited the Pope to 〈◊〉 the empire elective, which had continued hereditary in the house of Charles the ●●●eat, was, for that Otho the third had not any children: but the reasons were divers; 〈◊〉 ●irst of all the empire being grown weak, the Pope and Emperor thought to raise 〈◊〉 ●●●tifie it by the means of that person which should be chosen, without regard of 〈◊〉: after which, they would suppress the dissensions which did grow by the 〈◊〉 of Electors.  
〈◊〉 Emperor than is the chief and head of the empire, and hath under him three 〈◊〉 ●●●erss, in the assembly whereof they consult and resolve of all matters concerning the 〈…〉 of the empire.  

The first of these members is that of the seven Electors, which are 

〈◊〉 Archbishop of Mentz, Lord Chancellor of the empire in Germany, who hath  
〈◊〉 Chancery all the records of the Diets or Parliaments.  
〈◊〉 Archbishop of Treves, Lord Chancellor of the empire in France.  
The Archbishop of Cologne, Lord Chancellor of the empire in Italy.  
The king of Bohemia the chief Cupbearer of the empire.  
The Count Palatin of the Rind chief Carver, or rather Lord Steward of the 〈◊〉.  
〈◊〉 duke of Saxony Lord Martial, and judge of the Court, who carries the sword 〈◊〉 the emperor.  
〈◊〉 Marquis of Brandibourg Lord Chamberlain of the Empire.  
〈…〉 have full and absolute power to choose the emperor, to the end that no man may 〈…〉 himself the imperial dignity as hereditary. 〈◊〉     

〈◊〉 second member is of Noblemen, as well Ecclesiastical as Secular, which be 〈◊〉 Archbishop of Magdebourg, Sal●zbourg, Besancon, and Breme.  

The Bishops of  
B●●berg.  
Wui●zpurg.  
〈◊〉.  
Sp●●●●.  
So●●●●●org.  
〈◊〉  
〈◊〉  
Co●●●●tz.  
●●●●ildesheim.  
Paderborn.  
Chp●.  
Halbe●stat.  
Fe●●●ens.  
M●●●●ster.  
O●●●bourg.  
Pass●uil.  
Frising●n.  
Kempse.  
Gurck or Goritz.  
Seckaw.  
Hana●de.  
Basil.  
Satin or Wallis.  
Regensbourg.  
M●●●●ens.  
Nau●●●ourg.  
Mi●●ens.  
Lubeck.  
V●●ecli●.  
Camin.  
Swe●in.  
Genena.  
Ca●●●ay.  
Verdu●.  
Losanne.  
Metz.  
Toul.  
Luyck.  
Trent.  
Brixen.  
Mersbourg.  
Labach.  
Vierina.  
Brandenbourg.  
Ratzenbourg.  
Schleswick.  
Ha●elbourg.   

The Princes and Noblemen which are See●l●rss.  
The duke of Bau●●i●●  
〈◊〉 Archduke of Austria.  
The duke of Saxony.  
The Palatin of Bavaria.  
The duke of juliers, Cleves, and Berck.  
The Marquis of Brandenbourg.  
The duke of Brunswick.  
The duke of Lunembourg.  
The duke of Pomerania.  
The duke of Mekelbourg.  
The duke of Lawembourg.  
The duke of Holsten.  
The duke of Lorraine.  
The Landgrave of Hessen.  
The Duke of Wittenberg.  
The duke of Zweybrug.  
The Duke and Earl of Spanheim.  
The Marquis of Bade.  
The Landgrave of Luchtemberg.  
The Prince of Anhalt.  
The Earl of Hennenberg.  
The Burgave of Hessen.   

Princes that be of the Clergy,  
The Prince and Abbot of Fuld.  
The Prince and Abbot of Hiersfeldt.  
The Prince and Abbot of Kempten.  
The Prince and Abbot of Reichenaw.  
The Prince and Provost of Wissemburg.  
The Prince and Abbot of S. Gal.  
The Prince and Abbot of Salifeldt.  
The Prince and Provost of Elwangel.  
The Master of the order of the Teutons.  
The Master of the order of the Knight of S. john.   

The Abbeys of  
Waingarten.  
Solmansweiler.  
Kreutzlingen.  
Murpach.  
Walkenriedt.  
Schuttern.  
Weissenow or Minderaw.  
S. Blaise.  
Maulprun.  
The Prince and Abbot of Corbey.   

The Abbeys of  
Schussenriedt.  
Bir●e●sha●sen.  
Stei●●● Rhin.  
Scafhausen.  
Kempeseck.  
Waldsachsen.  
Finsideln.  
Rockembourg.  
Ochsenhausen.  
The Provost of Selts.   

The Abbeys of  
S. Gilgen of Noremberg.  
Nuembourg.  
S. Maximin near unto Treves.  
Heveldshausen.  
S. john in Curtel.  
Gengenbach.  
Konigsbrun.  
Rodt or Roden.  
Markthal.  
Rockenhausen.  
S. Peter in Schwartzwald.  
The Provost of Odenheim.  
The Prince and Abbey of Stable.   

The Abbeys of  
S. D●●●.  
Be●●●●●sen.  
●●●●●gen.  
●●●●●●ngen.  
〈◊〉  
●●●enbourg.  
〈◊〉  
〈◊〉.  
S●●●● in Thurtal.  
●●●●hausen of Cons●a●ce  
〈◊〉  
●●●●●aim.  
●●●imeram of Ra●isbonna  
allegory of Munster  
●●●herode.  
●●●meille of Munster  
●●●den.  
●●●perg.  
〈◊〉  
〈◊〉  
〈◊〉  
〈◊〉   

The Provost of  
〈◊〉  
〈◊〉 gasden.   

Abbesses or Nunneries of  
●●●●●bourg.  
〈◊〉  
●●●●nster of Regensburg  
〈◊〉 Munster of Regens.  
K●●●●gen.  
〈◊〉.  
〈◊〉 Gemrode.  
warschaw.  
●●●●munster.  
●●●●p●ch.  
●●●●enzel.  
●●●dt.  
〈◊〉 of  
〈◊〉 of Coblentz.  
〈◊〉 of Elsas.  
〈◊〉 of Osterich.  
〈◊〉 of Inder Etsch.   

The E●led●●eses of  
●●●●enstin.  
●●●chberg.  
●●●●staig.  
〈◊〉  
〈◊〉  
●●●●berg.  
Zimmeren.  
Otingen.  
Sultz.  
Hohen Zollern.  
castle.  
Vertheim.  
Reineck.  
Hohenloe.  
Erpach.  
Leiningen.  
Falckstein.  
Hanau.  
Luchstemberg.  
Nassaw, Breda, & Dillemburg.  
Wisbaden and Iltztain.  
S●lbnulden.  
Walde purge.  
Nassau in Weilpurg.  
Beil stain.  
Konigstein and Epstein.  
Eisenberg the high.  
Eisenberg the low.  
Mersen.  
Budenghen.  
Wirnemberg.  
Solms.  
Atsenberg.   

The Earldoms of the Rhin.  
Horn.  
sayn.  
Wintzlingen.  
Rhin.  
Bistch.  
Salm.  
Weldentz.  
Dengen.  
Rappin.  
Hardech.  
Hohenstein.  
Wolkenstein.  
Schaumburg and Giengen.  
Dieremburg & in Someraw.  
Mansfelt.  
Stolberg.  
Buchlingen.  
Barbey and Mullingen.  
Gleichen.  
Schwartzemburg.  
Suemberg.  
Jude, lord of Ruech.  
Bless.  
Plawen.  
Weda and Ringelberg.  
Olnbrug.  
Locbenstain.  
Regenstain.  
Westfriesland.  
Eastfriesland.  
Vanderlippe, or of Lip.  
Oldemburg.  
Hose.  
Delmenhorst.  
Westemburg.  
Munzemburg.  
Lemgow.  
Waldeck.  
Diepholt.  
Steinfort.  
Benthem.  
Brunchorst.  
Witgenstein.  
Spigelberg.  
Biversdorff.  
Teckelnbourg.  
Dortmund.  
Windorff.  
Rippershoden.  
Hagen, or of lafoy Hay.  
Hoonfels.  
Leisenek.  
Bergen.  
Mandercheid.  
Reiferscheidt.  
Egmont and Isselstein.  
Tubinge.  
Blankenberg or Blammont:  
Kirchingen or Krehanges.   

The Barons of  
Gundelfingen.  
Geroltzeck.  
Ober Hewn.  
Rapolestain.  
Saffen.  
Sonneberg.  
Winenberg or Wanneberg.  
Degenberg.  
Obersulzberg.  
Tautenberg.   

The Lords or Signors of  
Tussen.  
Stutgart.  
justingen.  
Schenlingen.  
Rapoltskirchen.  
Hohen Rechperg.  
Berletzick.  
Hohen Konigsperg.  
Hohenfeldt & Tipoltskirch.  
Braides.  
Reichelsperg.  
Limburg.  
Kunsech.  
Kunseckerberg.  
Geraw.  
Reichensten.  
Muntzenburg.  
Lostenstein.  
Ridberg.  
Ringen.  
Somirisse.  
Bergen and Waelhem.  
Wildenfels or Widerfels.  
Haber or Haver.  
Senster.  
Roggendorff.  
Alendorff.  
Kunigfuckerberg.  
Morspurg and befor'rt.  
Brandenstein and Ranss.  
Wolfstein:  
Permont.  
Fronsbek.  
Flackenstein.  
Witten.    

The third member of the Emperor is that of the free towns, which are  

Aixla Chapelle in the country of juliers.  
Antuerpe in the duchy of Brabant.  
Ausbourg in the country of Suabe.  
Basil in Suisserland. now cantons, and  
Berne in Suisserland. not contributary.  
Byberach in Suabe.  
Boppert upon the Rhin.  
Boichorn.  
Campen in Ouerissel.  
Cologne upon the Rhin.  
Colmar in Alsatia.  
Constance in Suabe.  
Deventer in Ouerissel.  
Dortmodt in Westphalia. (***)  
Dunkelspoel in Suabe.  
Duyren in juliers.  
Ever in Bermewout.  
Erfort in Turinge.  
Estingen in Suabe.  
Francfort upon Meyn.  
Francfort upon Oder.  
Fridberch in Wederewaure.  
Friburch in Brisgawre.  
Gheylhuysen in Wedewave.  
Ghinghen in Suabe.  
Gottinghen in Saxony.  
Groningue in Friesland.  
Gemunde in Suabe.  
Hagenau in Alsatia. (***)  
Halle in Suabe.  
Halle in Turinge.  
Helpron in Suabe upon Neckar.  
Hambrough in Eastland.  
Heyde●●●elt.  
Isnen.  
Ingelsheim above Rhincau.  
K●●●stouren.  
Key●●●s-berch.  
Key●●●uterne in Westrick. (***)  
Kem●●●● Suabe.  
Kuyr in Suitz.  
Landaun near to Spire.  
Lindaw in Suabe.  
Lubeck in Saxony.  
Lucerne in Suisserland.  
Lunebourg in Saxony.  
Meydenbourg in Saxony.  
Men●minghen in Suabe.  
Metz in Lorraine, now belonging to France.  
Mentz upon the Rhin.  
Mulhuysen in Turinge.  
Mulhuysen in Sugovia.  
Noorthuysen in Turinge.  
Nuremberg.  
Nymeghen in Guelderland.  
Norlige in Suabe.  
Oderheim upon the Rhin.  
Oppenhen upon th● Rhin. (***)  
Pollendorp.  
Poppinghen in Suabe.  
Ravensbourg.  
Regensbourg in Bavaria.  
Rottenbourg upon Tuber.  
Rosem or Rosheim.  
Rotevil in Suabe.  
Ruylinge in Suabe.  
S. Galliard in Suisserland.  
Sleystadt in Alsatia.  
Spyers upon the Rhin.  
Swymfort in Franconia.  
Strasbourg.  
Treves upon Mosella.  
Werlinghen in Suabe.  
Weerd upon the river of Danou.  
Vlme in Suabe.  
Vange in Suabe.  
Wesel upon the Rhin.  
Wesel in Cleveland.  
Wetzelaer in Hessia (***)  
Wile in Suabe.  
Wimpsen upon Neckar.  
Wy●●heym in Franconia.  
W●●nbourg.  
Worms upon the Rhin.  
Zurich in Suisserland.  
Zwol in Ouerissel.   
●●sides this order of Three members, to prevent all divisions in the empire, and to maintain Germany in a general peace, the Provinces of the empire have been divi●●● into certain governments, which they call Circles, in the which there are private councils appointed by the empire. They did first institute Six Circles at Ausbourg, ●● the year of our Lord God 1500, whereunto there were four added at Nurembourg, in the year of our Redemption 1522. They do choose in every Circle a Governor, oerther Precedent of their Council, he is a Prince, an Earl, a Baron, or some gentle●●● of great note, to whom they give six Councillors which are of the same body, 〈◊〉 men, honourable, and judicious.  

〈◊〉 first Circle is that of Franconia.  
〈◊〉 second of Bavaria.  
〈◊〉 third of Austria.  
〈◊〉 fourth of Suabe.  
〈◊〉 fift of the Rhine.  
The sixt of the Electors of the Rhine.  
The 7 of base Germany, or Westphalia.  
The eight of high Saxony.  
The ninth of base Saxony.  
The tenth of Bourgondie.   
●esides these councils or Circles, to the end that they might resolve with good 〈◊〉 of matters of great importance, they have instituted the imperial Chamber at 〈◊〉 ●here of the chief or sovereign judge is a Prince, or at the lest an Earl or 〈◊〉 ●●ron, if they found any that is capable of this charge. They have given them six 〈◊〉 that is, two Earls or Barons, two Lawyers, and two Knights, whom the 〈◊〉 place by reason of the lands he holds hereditary in the empire. Every Elector 〈◊〉 so appoint one, and every Circle two; and all these Assistants, or Councillors, 〈◊〉 Lawyers and half Knights.  
Touching that which we have spoken of the members of the empire, Munster saith, 〈◊〉 ●●●a●ter the seven Electors, they ordained four Dukes, four Marquises, four 〈◊〉 four Bourgraves, four Earls, four Barons, four Knights, four Towns, ●●●re Villages, and four Peasants. And yet the emperors have since created at divers 〈◊〉 other Dukes, and new Earls; and moreover they have made many Earl's Dukes: 〈◊〉 in succession of time, many dukedoms are extinct, as those of Suabe, Limbourg, Z●●●●en, Voitland, and some others.   

The Charges and Dignities reduced to the number of Four.  

The four Dukes.  
brunswick.  
●a●aria.  
Suabe.  
Lorraine.   

The four chief Marshals.  
●●●●●pen●heim.  
〈◊〉.  
〈◊〉  
〈◊〉.   

The four Landgraves.  
Turingia.  
Hessen.  
Luchtemberg.  
Alsatia.   

The four Bourgraves.  
Meidenbourg.  
Neurenberg.  
Reneck.  
Stronbourg.   

The four Earldoms chief in the war.  
Flanders.  
Tirol.  
Aldenbourg.  
Ferrara.   

The four chief Abbeys.  
Fuld.  
Kempten.  
Wissembourg.  
Murbach.   

The four Burroughs of the Empire.  
Aldembourg.  
Meidenbourg.  
Rottembourg.  
Meckelbourg.   

The four Knights.  
Andlaw.  
Meldengen.  
Strondeck.  
Fronberg.   

The four Metropolitan Cities.  
Ausbourg.  
Aix la Chapelle.  
Metz.  
Lubeck.   

The four Villages.  
Bamberg.  
Vlme.  
Hag●ena●.  
Selestad.   

The four Rustics.  
Cologne.  
Ratisbone.  
Constance.  
Saltzbourg.   

The four Marquises.  
Misnia.  
Brandebourg.  
Moravia.  
Bade.   

The four Earls.  
Cleves.  
Schwartzembourg.  
Cilia, or Gretz.  
Savoy.   

The four Lords of Italy.  
Milan.  
Escala.  
Padova.  
Mirandola:   

The four mountains.  
Munerberg.  
Friberg.  
Heidelberg.  
Nurenberg.   

The four Barons.  
Limbourg in Franconia.  
Thusis and Raconie Lord of Tockembourg.  
Westerbourg.  
Aldenwaden.   

The four possessions of the Empire.  
Ingelheim.  
Altdorff.  
Liechtenaw.  
Denckrendorff.   

The four Hantsm●n.  
Hurn.  
Vrach.  
Schombourg.  
Metsth near to Coures.   

The four hereditary offices of Suabe.  
The Carver of Walpourg.  
The Cupbearer of Radach.  
The Marshal of Moredorf.  
The Chamberlain of Kemnat.   

The four servants.  
Waldeck.  
Hirten of Fulchen.  
Amsperg.  
Rabnaw.   
Yet many of these dignities are changed, and quite extinct by the death of such as held them.   

Their Sittings at Diets should be after this manner:  
When as the Emperor is in his seat▪ the Archbishop of Treves must sit right against him; the Archbishop of Mentz hath his place upon the right hand, and the Archbishop of Cologne upon the left. The king of Bohemia whenas this realm did not belong unto the Emperor, was upon the right hand of the Archbishop of Mentz, and next unto him the Count Palatin of the Rind; and upon the left hand of the Archbishop of Cologne sat the duke of Saxony, and by him the Marquis of Brandebourg.  
When as they go in any public Procession, they are to observe this order:  
The Archbishop of Treves goes before the Emperor, and the other two of either side of him, and then the king of Bohemia follows presently after.  
The Archduke of Austria, as a prince of the Empire, hath no place among the secular Princes, by reason of the difference for presedence, but among the Clergy, who go before. In a Diet held at Ausbourg, in the year 1548, all the Provinces of Bourgondie were put under the protection of the Empire, and the prince of these countries had a place particularly assigned among the Clergy, and yet in a diet held since at Ratisbonne ●●●ing of Spain sen● not any man to supply his place.  
The duke of Lorraine was wont to be held for a prince of the Empire, but now this ●●●past into France.  
〈◊〉 free cities of the Empire (which acknowledge no other lord but the Emperor) ●●●h their own laws, and have all in a manner a mixed and popular Estate; yet in 〈◊〉 them (among which is Nuremberg) the chief men govern. The form of 〈◊〉 in these free cities was not in the beginning of any great esteem, whenas by 〈◊〉 favour they purchased their liberty of Emperors, or from the princes that ru●●●● them.  
〈◊〉 man can be called Emperor unless he be first crowned by the Pope: but he may ●●●ke upon him the title of Caesar, or king of the Romans, or king of Germany, if he 〈◊〉 been chosen by the Electors. The Emperor doth not command absolutely in Ger●●●●, but doth govern it by the means of diets or parliaments; by reason whereof 〈◊〉 more or less powerful, according unto that which he doth obtain in those diets, ●●●ting, or giving way to contradictions, and causing himself to be loved and feared 〈◊〉 together.  
●he three Estates come unto the parliament, and of these are framed three councils. 〈◊〉 Electors enter into the first, and whenas the king of Bohemia is not Emperor, he ●●●es not to the diet, but is absent from their consultations, and is rather an Arbitrator ●●●an Elector; for that if their voices be equally divided, that is to say, three of the one 〈◊〉 and three of the other, he to whom he gives his voice is chosen.  
〈◊〉 second council consists of all the other princes as well ecclesiastical as secular, in●●● which there enters two for all the rest, and two others for all the Earls and Ba●●● the Empire. The third council is composed of the free towns.  
●●●mperor, or king of Romans propounds unto all these what he thinks good, and ●●●cell retires itself to consult what they shall resolve upon these matters which ●●●unded. But as for the towns, although that they may give their opinion by chancel, yet have they no voice in deliberations. The council of the Electors ●●eir opinions last, and is most esteemed.  
〈◊〉 of Germany is at this day much perverted, so as if the Emperor doth call ●●●liament, the princes will not come in person, but sand their agents, to whom 〈◊〉 no authority to resolve or conclude of any thing, unless they be formerly ad●●● whereof they will treat, and for this reason they dispatch little.  
●●●hing the particular government of towns, and their manner of justice, you shall ●●●and (as I have formerly said) that there are some towns immediately subject to the ●●●or, and acknowledge no other lord: and some other, besides the duty they own 〈◊〉 Empire are also subject to princes and other noblemen, either ecclesiastical or 〈◊〉 ●ut as for those which depend solely of the Empire, they have goodly priviled●●●mptionss, and prerogatives, for that they are governed according to the laws ●●●●ncess of imperial towns, under the charge and conduct of certain magistrates 〈◊〉 be chosen for the administration of justice and managing of the government. 〈◊〉 year they choose one among the bourgesses of a town, who in the distribution ●●●e, is as it were the head thereof, and may be called precedent: he with certain ●●●ncellorss or assistants chosen by the people, doth hear and judge of all civil or cri●●● causes within the jurisdiction of the town. In civil causes, he that is condem●●● 〈◊〉 appeal from their sentence unto the imperial chamber: but in criminal causes 〈◊〉 no appeal from them, the which may seem very strange, for that these judges ●●●imed, nor have not read the laws (the which were very necessary in such oc●●●) but they care not so as they judge according to the laws and customs of the 〈◊〉 of every town, and the jurisdiction thereof. There are twelve of these judges 〈…〉 every town, and also in some bourroughes, men without reproach, upright, 〈◊〉 commendable for the sincerity of their lives, according to the testimony of all 〈◊〉 although they have never studied the law; for that the people in this case do 〈◊〉 respect honesty, experience, and practise, than knowledge without virtue. These 〈◊〉 ●re bound to administer justice, and yet they receive no fees, nor have any recompense for their pains, but honour, whenas they have discharged themselves well, and have not preferred their own private interest before the public good. They have certain hours appointed to hear contendants, and to do justice, and before they en●●● into their places they take an oath and swear that they shall exercise their charges uprightly, and according to equity and reason, not accepting the magistracy to abuse it, but for the advancement of the commonweal, and with an intent to judge according to their consciences, which would torment them if they should judge contrary to justice and equity: so as the people (grounding upon this sincere promise, and solemn oath) in tim●ss past were not accustomed to appeal from their decrees & definitive sentences: but now that judges begin to grow corrupted, inclining to that party which gives most, they appeal often, and before judges that are more corrupted than the first.  
As we have formerly said, they choose judges also in certain boroughs, but not in all▪ for in most of them they establish certain men, whom they call bourgomaisters, who derue as judges and Arbitrators to end all such controversies as may grow betwixt the labourers and peasants, and they have also charge of the affairs of the village, but yet they deal not with the policy and administration of justice, which belongs to the lords, or to their officers.    

¶ The Religion.  
GEermanie is much divided touching matters of religion: some are Papists, some Lutherans, and others Caluinists. About the year 1517, Pope Leo the tenth having sent forth his pardons and indulgences to heap up treasure; Luther having been an Augustine Fryat began to exclaim against the dissolution and excess which reigned in the Clergy, saying that the revenues of the Church were employed in pomp, vanities, and matters of worse practice: and withal, he did writ sundry books both against the Mass, and the superstitions of the Church of Rome, and also against the disordered life of the Pope, and his Clergy, so as in a short time his doctrine was embraced and followed by divers princes and free towns of Germany. In the end the Emperor Charles●he ●he fist was forced under pretext of keeping the public peace, to sign a decree, & to allow of the free exercise of the confession of Ausbourg throughout all Germany, until that by a general Council, or by some other means, they might settle some order touching matters of religion; and in the year 1552 in a diet held at Posse, all Protestants were forbidden to molest the Catholics, and especially priests in the exercise of their religion: and in the year 1555, in a diet at Ausbourg, they gave liberty to all the Princes and Estates of the Empire to follow the Popish religion, or the opinion of Luther, and to pass from the one unto the other, with a condition that a secular prince should not by this change lose his Estate, nor receive any blemish in his reputation, but the ecclesiastical should lose his dignity, and they to whom it did belong should presently choose another which was a Catholic.  
But let us see in what Estate Germany stands at this day touching Religion. It seems in our time that the Protestants religion is much advanced, and very strong, for that the princes that be Caluinists and Lutherans get the possession of bishoprics and Abbeys, and leave them as a part of their inheritance to their successors, seeking to plant their opinion wheresoever they have power and authority: yet in most towns there are some churches and marks of Popish religion, as at Mind (although they be all in a manner Protestant's) there are Catholic Chanoins, and in the great Church they sing Mass. At V●me, Strausbourg, Nubourg, and in the Estates of Brandebourg, Saxony, and Brunswick, there are many religious houses of Nuns; yet in some places they are forbidden to admit any new, the which sometimes they cannot do for want of a Popish Bishop, or of some one which hath that charge  
To return to the purpose, they of the Palati●ar of Rhin, have been divers times for●●d to change their opinions, as it hath pleased their Earl. Augustus' duke of Saxony was 〈◊〉 and protector of the profession of Luther, & Christian his son after his father's 〈◊〉 ●rought Caluinisme into Saxony, who being dead, duke Frederick expelled it 〈◊〉 and restored Luther's doctrine.  
〈◊〉 of the princes of Germany follow the profession of Calvin or Luther. They that 〈◊〉 Luther are the Marquis of Brandebourg, the Dukes of Saxony, Brunswick, and ●●●berg, the Earls of Mans●eld, and the free towns which confine with the ●e● 〈◊〉 Calvin is followed by the Counts Palatins of Rhin, by them of Strasburg, ●●most of the sea towns.  
●peak● generally, the nobility is more fallen from the Romish religion than any 〈◊〉, the rich than the poor, and the towns more than the villages, and yet the free 〈◊〉 are more earnest than the villages. And it is a thing worthy observation, that of ●●●ly free towns which are in Germany, there came unto a diet (which was held of 〈◊〉 years for the Catholics) but three small towns of Suabe, that is Camonde, ●●●heelspille, and Vberlinque, whereas the princes of Austria, the dukes of Bavaria, ●leves (who is now extinct) with Philip of Bade, and the Lantgra●e of Leutem 〈◊〉 have constantly continued in the Romish profession, and there hath returned unto ●●●in Count Vlric of Elprestein, with james Marquis of Bade, and some others: To con●●●●e, all the free cities are fallen from the Church of Rome, except those three which inshave named: yet there are some Catholics at Neurembourg, Frankford, V●me, ●●x la Chapelle, and in some other places.  
But to show in what estate the Romish religion now stands in Germany, you must ●●●ue the Cathedral Churches, for that the authority of Bishops and Chapters hath ●●●e most part maintained their religion. Germany hath seven Metropolitans, which ●●●agdebourg, Treves, Mentz, Cologne, Saltzbourg, Bezançon, and Prague. The ●●●●hop of Magdebourg, with the Churches of Masbourg, Masberg, Nanbourg, ●●●ourg, Brandebourg, Lubech, Severine, Sebourg, Celuth, and Racenbourg (to ●●●h that of Misnia, which was exempt, hath been added) is not only fallen from ●●●ish religion, but is also under the power of Lutheran Princes, who dispose as ●●●wne inheritance.  
●●●hbishopricke of Treves is the freest of all Germany, for that not only with●●● 〈◊〉, but throughout all the diocese they do not allow of any but the Romish 〈◊〉 and the reason for the most part is, for that this town had never any Bishop ●●●as a Catholic, and most commonly very zealous.  
●●e Archbishop of Cologne hath with great difficulty maintained the Romish reli●●●● and would never admit the exercise of any other profession. In the year 1543, 〈◊〉 having discovered that the Archbishop Herman had an intent to bring the 〈◊〉 religion into the town, and into his whole diocese, having to that end caused 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 to come from Lipsic, and Martin Bucer; the Senate and Chapter oppo●●●selueses, and wrought so, as in the year 1549, Herm●n was deposed by the Pope's 〈◊〉 and Adolfe chosen in his place▪ yet could he not prevent it, but that some 〈◊〉 whereof this archbishopric hath seventeen) have received the Gospel, 〈◊〉 place under this archbishopric the Churches of Liege, Munster, Osnobourg, 〈◊〉.  
As for Liege, the Romish religion hath continued to this day, and in like manner ●●●●●ghout all the diocese, which is very great.  
〈◊〉 hath been much afflicted with Anabaptists, but these being extinct, the 〈◊〉 hath returned to her former estate.  
〈◊〉 Church of Osnobourg hath been greatly molested: for Luther's opinion began 〈◊〉 footing there in the year of our Lord 1521. And although tharten years after ●●●●●terss were expelled, yet they were received again, and supported by the 〈…〉 and Bishops. Since the year 1574, unto the year 1586, Henry of Saxony usur●●● of this Church, and that of Breme.  
●ss for Mind, there is no marks of the Romish religion, but a part of the Chapter, and 〈◊〉 celebration of the Mass.  
Touching the archbishopric of Mentz, the Protestants are dispersed throughout 〈…〉 part of the diocese, yea in the great town of E●ford; whereas both the gentle●●● of Archbishop seek to free themselves from Councillors that are Lutherans: 〈◊〉 the jesuits, who have care of the universality, assist them much. They have in ●●e diocese two others Colleges, one at Cons●anss, and another at Helegenstad. 〈◊〉 the frontiers of Italy, Near to Helegenstad is a place called Molius, where of 〈◊〉 years the Luther●●● have published a kind of prayer against the Turk, the Pope, ●nd the 〈◊〉. Although they be in a manner all Lutherans in the town of Erford, 〈…〉 maintained it with some others, and the Senate (which is opposite 〈…〉 made a proclamation, that no man should presume to molest the Ca●●● 〈◊〉 during their preaching or divine service, and by the emperors commaunde●●● the ●●●●●ranss have bee●● forced to restore a Church which they had taken from 〈◊〉 Catholics. The Church of Strasbourg is of great reputation in Germany, for that 〈◊〉 the Cha●oinss must be of noble families: but they are in a manner all Caluinists. ●●●berg ●●●ided in to two parts, as well as the diocese, where there are a good num●●● of Catholics.  
〈◊〉 Spi●e, the Lutherans do far exceed the Papists. The Chanoins of the Ca●●●●● Church being desirous to preserve that little which remains, have instituted a ●●● Semi●●●● of twelve young men, by whose means, and of the College of jesuits, they hope to fortify their party.  
The inhabitants of Worms withdrew themselves first from their Bishop, touching the temporal ●●risdiction and afterwards for the spiritual; and the profession of Luther●●yerie ●●yerie free among them, yet the Clergy are for the most part Catholics. They of H●●bi●o●●●ane in a manner all Papists, by reason of the great care which their Bishop's 〈…〉 expel all other opinions. In the diocese of Ausbourg they are for the most 〈◊〉 lutherans, for that there are commonly in the City fifteen Ministers which 〈◊〉. But there are two things which support the Romish religion; the one is, the ●●●●cie of the Senate in that opinion; the other is a College of jesuits which the ●●●●ess have built there. Moreover, there are more Papists than others at Ginsbourg, 〈◊〉 and Almangavie, and divers convents of religious women. As for Hyestad, 〈…〉 have no publ●●● exercise of their religion. In the diocese of Hildesie 〈◊〉 are many Lutherans, but the Clergy of the Cathedral Church have always maintained themselves.  
Coming to the archbishopric of Saltzbourg, it is most certain that this town hath in a maner● one but P●pi●ts. But at Rati●bona, which is subject unto it, they make p●●●●que pro●ession of L●thers' doctrine, and there are few Papists, except the Clergy, who 〈…〉 favour of the duke of Bavaria.  
Bohemia 〈…〉 part follows the opinion of john Husse, who was burnt at the Council of 〈◊〉 with jer●●e of Prague, in the year 1417, contrary to the passport and warrant which was given the● by the Emperor Sigismond: but some writ, that th●● country is much infected with Anabaptists and Pica●dss, and so are the countries of M●●a●i● and Silesia: the late● took the beginning and name from one called Picard, who brought the heresy of the Adamits out of Flaunders into the country of Bohemia.  
As for Austria, in the town of Vienne, they are for the most part Papists: at the le●●● wise the Ministers do not preach publicly. And to conclude, in all the provinces and towns of Germany, they are divided touching religion. The country of Tyro● which is subject to the house of A●stria, is most devoted to the Romish religion. 〈◊〉 is for the country of 〈◊〉, they are all Papists.    

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE Emperors of the West, beginning at julius Caesar the Founder of this Empire, and continewing unto Mathias the second, now reigning.  
1. JULIUS CESAR was Founder of the Roman Monarchy, and yet he took upon him the name of perpetual Dictator, and not of Emperor. He lived fifty six years, and reigned three years and seven months after the end of his wars. He was ●●●eby Brutus, Cas●●us, and other conspirators, in the year of the world 3886, which was ●en hundred and eight years after the building of Rome, and in the 184 olympiad, ●●d before the birth of our Saviour Christ 47.  
2. OCTAVIUS AUGUSTUS, called also Caesar, nephew to julius, succeeded him, and ●●●ke the name of Emperor, which signifies chief of the army, and made the title of ●bsolute command over all those countries which obeyed the Romans. He lived plenty and five years lacking five and twenty days, and reigned fifty and six years, ●●oning the twelve with Anthony and Lepidus in the Triumuirat. He died in the year 〈◊〉 the world 3943, after the building of Rome 765, and in the 198 olympiad, and in the year of Grace 14.  
3. TIBERIUS, son in law to Augustus by Livia, and adopted by him in the year of the World 2940, after the foundation of Rome 762, and in the seventeenth year of C●●●●as chosen Emperor. He had the Empire twenty and three years: by nature he untroublesome, a mocker, base, cruel, and malicious. In the fifteenth year of his reign 〈◊〉 Saviour Christ being thirty years old was baptized by S. john. The eighteenth year of 〈◊〉 Empire he was crucified. In the nineteenth year S. Paul went to Damascus, and 〈◊〉 converted to the Faith. He lived seventy and eight years, and reigned three and ●●●ntie.  
4. CAIUS CALIGU●A petty nephew to Tiberius, borne of Germanicus son to 〈◊〉, who was brother to Tiberius, in the year of the world 4001, of the foundation of 〈◊〉 789, and in the year of grace 39 This was a horrible monster, cruel, and insup●●iable, who plunged himself into all villainies and disorders, and had the company of ●●●ree sisters. He lived eight and twenty years, and reigned three years, ten months, 〈◊〉 days.  
CLAUDIUS, nephew to Tiberius, and son to Drusius, succeeded in the year of the World 4005, of the foundation of Rome 793, and in the year of Grace 43, be●●● fifty years old, he came unto the empire by corruption, promising three hundred 〈◊〉 fifty crowns to every soldier. He had profited well in learning, having had T●tus' 〈◊〉 for his Schoolmaster. He was poisoned by his wife, being sixty four years old, 〈◊〉 had reigned fourteen years.  
NERO, son in law to Claudius, and adopted by the policy of Agrippina, in the 〈◊〉 of the World 4019, of the foundation of Rome 807, and in the year of Grace 57, 〈◊〉 seventeen years old, was created Emperor by the soldiers, to whom he pro●●●ed as much as Claudius had given them. He caused his mother Octavia to be slain, 〈◊〉 Poppe●, and his two wives, Seneca his Schoolmaster, and many others. The Christi●●● were under him cruelly murdered. He thrust himself through with a sword, ha●●●g lived two and thirty years, and reigned almost fourteen. The Family of the Cae●●●●●yled ●●yled in him.  
SERGIUS GALBA, of the house of the Sulpitij, was chosen by the Legions of ●●yne, and then confimed by the Senat. He was a good Prince, but by the practices of 〈◊〉 he was slain in the Marketplace of Rome, and his head was carried to Otho. He 〈◊〉 seventy and three years, and reigned but seven months, and seven days.  
●●ILVIUS OTHO (as soon as the soldiers had slain Galba) obtained the Empire by his death, he was a villainous monster, and companion to Nero in his lechery and dissoluteness, shameless, impudent, and ambitious: but being vanquished by Vitellius, he ●●abbed himself with his dagger, having reigned only four months, and lived fifty and eight years.  
9 AURIUS VIT●LLIUS a glutton, cruel, lustful, and bloody, having caused many Roman gentlemen to be slain, the soldiers murdered him, and cast his carcase into the river of Tiber. He lived fifty and seven years, and reigned but eight months.  
10. FL. V●SPASIAN, of the family of the Flaviens, after the great disorders and cruelties committed under Caligula, Claudiüs, Nero, Otho, and Vitellius was saluted Emperor during the lives of his predecessors: he reform the provinces, legions, armies, 〈◊〉, and justice: he sent his son Titus to besiege jerusalem the fourteenth of April, 〈◊〉 the second year of his Empire, and in the year of Grace 72. He died of a flux, being 〈◊〉 and nine years old, three months, and seven days: and he reigned ten years.  
11. TITUS VESPASIAN succeeded his father in the year of the World 4043, of ●●●foundation of Rome 831, and in the year of Grace 81. He was called the Delights 〈◊〉 mankind, by reason of his justice and bounty; he pardoned his brother Domitian, who had practised his death: being surprised with a sever he died, at the age of thirty and nine years, five months, and five and twenty days, having reigned two years, two months, and two days.  
12. DOMITIAN succeeded his brother in the year of the World 4045, of the foundation of Rome 833, and in the year of Grace 83. He did not resemble his father nor brother, being cruel, cunning, distrustful, suspicious, treacherous, base, greedy, and a porsecutor of the Christians. Under him was the second persecution, accounting that of Nero for the first: he appointed one hour every day to catch flies, and therefore he was called the h●●ter of flies. He was incestuous and lecherous, for the which he lost his life, in the five and fortieth year of his age and the fifteenth of his Empire.  
13. N●●VA being ●ery old was chosen Emperor in the year of the World 4061, of the foundation of Rome 849, & in the year of Grace 99 He was a good prince, and a just, and restored the goods and offices which Domitian had wrongfully taken away. He c●●sed the persecutions against the Christians to cease, he did abolish public plays, he adopted Trau●an borne in Spain for his son, and he left the Empire more flourishing than all the rest. He died being seventy and one years old, having reigned one year, and four months.  
14. VLP. TRAIAN entered into the Empire whenas Ner●a sent him the decree of his adoption unto Cologne, being two and forty years old, in the year of the World 4062, of the foundation of Rome 850, and in the year of Grace 100 He was wise, a good justicer, well advised in war, valiant, and fortunate in execution; by a decree of the Senate he was called the Good Prince. He caused libraries to be built, and did often hear Plut●rch. Going to suppress the jews he died, being sixty and four years old, and having reigned nineteen years, six months, and fifteen days.  
15. ADRIAN in the year of the World 4080, of the foundation of Rome 868, and in the year of Grace 118, came unto the Empire. He was adopted by Traian, but he did writ unto the Senate that he would not accept of the Empire unless they commanded him. He was wise, and well practised in affairs, learned and well spoken, sometimes mild, and sometimes cruel. He did visit the provinces of the Roman Empire more than all former Emperors had done. His life was in the end of his days so odious as he required them to kill him: he lived seventy and two years, and five months, and reigned one and twenty years, and eleven months, his bones were interred in the Castle of S. Ange at Rome.  
16. ANTONIUS' PIUS was Emperor in the year of the World 4102, of the foundation of Rome 889, and in the year of Grace 139. He married Adrian's daughter, and ●●s adopted by him. He was a man of a goodly stature and full of wit, eloquence, and ●●●●●●ie. He was the only prince that was free from the blood of his subjects: he did 〈◊〉 respect the authority of the Sena●, and appointed good pensions for the professors of Philosophy and other sciences: he caused the imposts upon the limits of the empire to be taken away, and he was accustomed often to say, That he had rather save 〈◊〉 of one subject, than to kill one thousand enemies. Wherefore the Senate called 〈◊〉 Father of their country. He died being seventy years old, having reigned three ●●●●ventie. His body was interred in Adrian's Sepulchre.  
ANTONIUS' VERUS, son in law to the other Antonin, succeeded him in the ●●●ire. In the beginning he joined unto him his brother Lucius Verus, and then the em●●●e was governed by two Emperors, having equal power. But this Antonin was good, 〈◊〉, modest, bountiful to learned men, and fortunate in war. There was under him a execution begun against the Christians, the which ceased, he having obtained a battle ●●●he means of a legion of Christians, after the which he did abolish all Edicts made ●●●st the Christians. He survived Lucius Verus eight years▪ and died being sixty one ●●●ress old, and was Emperor eighteen years.  
LUCIUS VERUS, having been associated in the empire by Marck Antonin his ●●●ther, for the ●●●all time of his reign, is not named amongst the good or bad Prin●●. He reigned with Antonin eleven years, and died being forty and two years 〈◊〉: he was laid in Adrian's Tomb.  
COMMODUS succeeded his father Marck Antoninus Verus in the year of the ●●●ld 4143, of the foundation of Rome 931, and in the year of Grace 182. The Ro●●● Monarchy was in her flourishing estate, from julius Caesar unto Marck Antonin, but ●●●●●wards it was tossed with continual seditions, and civil wars. Commodus at the age of 〈◊〉 years being in a hot house, upon a sudden dislike caused the master thereof 〈◊〉 into a burning furnace, a presage of his future cruelty. He did drink most ●●●●●nly all night, and did wallow in all kind of execrable vices, with three hundred ●●●●●biness, and as many young boys; he framed his life like unto that of Caligula. He 〈◊〉 Infant Lucilia his sister miserably, and did ravish the rest. He was slain by 〈◊〉 his Concubine, and by Letus great Provost of the Empire. His body was by ●●●●maundement of the Senate cast into Tiber, having reigned thirteen years.  
PERTINAY succeeded Commodus in the year of the World 4156, of the foundation of Rome 940, and in the year of Grace 194. His father was a bondman infran●●●d, and had been a Schoolmaster, than a soldier, and in the end advanced in such 〈◊〉 he governed the provinces of Rhetia, Norica, Misia, and Dasia. And for that he 〈◊〉 Roman, the murderers of Commodus did choose him Emperor, but seeking to re●●● the Pretorien soldiers, he was hated, and therefore slain by them; who carried ●●●ad upon a lance to the camp of julian his successor: He was sixty years old, 〈◊〉 ●●igned but six months.  
JULIAN, for that in so corrupted an age great men had no authority, the soldiers were exceeding bold and insolent. Sulpitian Provost of Rome, and Digius julian 〈◊〉 so shameless, as to traffic at what price they might have the Empire: Sulpitian●●omised ●●omised to every praetorian soldier five hundred crowns, and julian promised six hundred twenty five, and so he was chosen Emperor; he was a glutton, a player at dice, and 〈◊〉 not his promise with the soldiers: whereupon they began to hate him, and he grew 〈◊〉 ●●●●hearted, covetous, and base, as he was slain by an unknown soldier, and was em●●rour but seven months, and fourteen days.  
PESCENIUS NIGER governor of Syria was saluted Emperor by the soul●●●●● that were in Syria, but Severus who had been chosen by the Senate went against Ni●●● with whom he fought thrice. In the third battle Pescentus Niger and his wife were ●●●e, and Se●erus remained sole Emperor. The goods of Pescenius were all confiscate, 〈◊〉 his race extinct.  
SEU●●US succeeded julian in the year of the World 4157, of the foundation of Rome 945, and in the year of Grace 195. He was honourably received by the Senate ●●d soldiers, and proclaimed Emperor. Being come unto the Capitol, he degraded 〈◊〉 soldiers which had slain Pertinax, and banished them the empire. He did also put 〈◊〉 to death, who had been the author of the murders of Commodus and Pertinax: He vanquished Pescenius Niger in Syria: He made a voyage into England, where he died at York. He was very valiant, and dying, he left as much co●e to the people of Rome as would serve them seven years. He lived sixty five years, nine months, and five and twenty days: and reigned eighteen years.  
24. CLAUDIUS ALBINUS made himself Emperor in France. Severus having defeated Pescenius, returned to Rome to make war against Albinus, whom he had associated with him in the empire: but Albinus become treacherous, practising the death of Severus, the which made him to lead a great army against Albinus, who commanded in France as an Emperor of the Romans, and gave him battle near unto the city of Lion, where Albinus was defeated and taken, and led half dead unto Severus, who caused his head to be cut off, and his body to be cast into the river, and the whole family and friends of Albinus to be rooted out: which done, Severus was Emperor alone.  
25. ANTONIN BASSIAN CARACALLA, son to Severus, was Emperor in the year of the World 4175, of Rome 963, and in the year of Grace 203. He was an incestuous and cruel monster: He slew his brother Geta with his own hands, hanging about the neck of his mother julia, and crying out, OH mother they kill me; so as she was all covered with her sons blood, and wounded in the hand: yet afterwards she married with her son in law Bassian. He caused many Roman Senators to be put to death, and among others Papinian, Provost of the city. In the end he was slain at the instigation of Macrine, great Provost of the empire, by a soldier called Martial, whose brother he had put to death. His body was sent to julia his mother in law and wife, who seeing it, fell upon it, and suffered herself to be slain: such was the end of the incestuous. He lived forty three years, and reigned six.  
26. ANTONINUS GETA, in the life of the Emperor Se●erus his father, was associated by him in the empire, being his youngest son. This young prince made show to be heir of his father's virtues: but the Emperor Bassian conspired his death, and to attain unto it, he watched when he might found him alone, who being on a time in the Chamber of his mother julia, second wife to the Emperor Severus, he flew him. This execrable murder did purchase Bass●an many enemies.  
27. MACRIN great Provost of the empire, was created Emperor by the army which was in Assyria, in the year of the World 4182, of Rome 970, and in the year of Grace 220. He had been a bondman enfranchised, and a Notary in the time of Commodus. He made his son Diadumenus Emperor in the beginning of his empire. He gave himself to play, and began to be hated of the soldiers, by reason of his miserable and froward disposition. He was cruel, and an inventor of new torments. He caused two soldiers (for that they had ravished their hostess) to be sowed together in a bullocks hide, leaving their heads out, to the end they might speak one unto another, until that vermin, stench, and other torments had killed them. He was slain in Antioch, having reigned fourteen months.  
28. VARUS HELIOGABALUS, son to Bassian (as some thought) was Emperor by the practices of his grandmother Maea, in the year of the World 4184, of Rome 972, and in the year of Grace 222. He did associate his cousin Alexander in the empire. He brought his mother into the Senate, and made her to give her voice as a Senator: There she published many laws which were called Matrimonial. He abandoned himself to all abominable dissolutions, and exceeded Nero and Caligula in villainy: he semeed a monster rather than a man, and did ravish the vestal virgins: he caused his privy parts to be cut off, thinking to be as a woman, and married himself as a woman, and did cohabit with as a woman. Finally, being come to the height of all his villainies, he was slain with his mother, being hidden in a privy. His body was cast upon a dunghill, by the conspiracy of the soldiers, being seventeen years old, and ha●●●g reigned two years and eight months.  
●●● ALEXANDER SEVERUS was by the consent of the Praetorian soldiers and 〈◊〉 made Emperor, in the year of the World 4187, of the foundation of Rome 975, and in the year of Grace 225, being yet very young, he governed the Empire by ●●●ncell of V●pian. The most severe act he ever did, was the death of Thurin●s 〈◊〉 ●hom he caused to be smoked to death, for that he did not justice, but took money 〈◊〉 parties. He made an edict, the which he would have inviolably observed, where 〈◊〉 other things there was, Do not unto another what thou wouldst not have done unto 〈◊〉. He began to be hated by reason of his severity, and was slain in Gaul by the ●●●erss at the persuasion of Maximin. He lived but nine and thirty years, three 〈◊〉 and seven days, and reigned thirteen years.  
●●● MAXIMIN (borne of a base family in Thrace, and of barbarous parents) was 〈◊〉 Emperor by the soldiers without the consent of the Senate, in the year of the World 〈◊〉 of Rome 988, and in the year of Grace 238: he also made his son Maximin 〈◊〉. By his first trade he was a shepherd in Thrace: he came to Rome in the time of ●●●us, and being exceeding strong and active of body, he did run as swiftly as Se●er●● 〈◊〉, whereupon he was made an archer: under Bassian he had the charge of one 〈◊〉 foot. Being Emperor he grew exceeding cruel and proud, so as the Senate declared 〈◊〉 an enemy to the Empire, by reason of his wickedness: he caused all the servants of ●●●●edecessorss Alexander to be cruelly put to death: so as the soldiers understanding 〈◊〉 will of the Senate, they cut the throats of Maimin and his son sleeping at noon day 〈◊〉 tent, the father being three s●ore years old, and his son nineteen, having reigned 〈◊〉 years.  
●●● GORDIAN the elder was against his will with his son thrust into the imperial 〈◊〉 ●eing three score years old, to free the people from the tyranny of Maximin▪ 〈◊〉 Gordian his son was slain by the means of Cappellus, and the good Emperor ●●●o much the fury of his enemies, hung himself for that he would not fall alive 〈◊〉 hands. He reigned but five months, and was lamented of all good men, he was 〈◊〉 ●●nter, a carver, and learned.  
●●●●LENUS MAXIMUS, the son of a locksmith, for his great deeds of arms 〈◊〉 all the dignities that could be desired: he grew so haughty and proud as he used ●●●tiess against the Romans, which made the soldiers to hate him, and to 〈…〉 him and Balbin●●, and fell to ●●ti●e in the palace, from which being 〈◊〉 dragged them to their tents, and there flew them, having reigned two years.  
●●●●●LIU● BALBINUS was chosen Emperor with P●pienus, to suppress the ●●●●nesse of Maximin. He was a Spaniard and learned, and did pace●ie the seditions ●●●d grow daily in Rome, by his eloquence and knowledge: but fortune did so ●ma●●● his prince, as the two Gordians being slain in Africa, the people of Rome aspired 〈◊〉 G●rdian, wishing that Balbinus and Maximus would have resigned their 〈◊〉 him. By the hatred of the soldiers and people of Rome they were slain, and 〈◊〉 Empire but two years.  
●●●●●●IAN the second, being but sixteen years old began to govern the 〈…〉 of the World 4203, of the foundation of Rome 991, and of our 〈◊〉 after that Maximin and his son had been murdered at the siege of 〈…〉 and Balbi●us slain at Rome. He was a lover of justice, honest, peaceable, 〈◊〉 ●●loved, and more respected of his subjects than any other prince. Finally there ●●d nothing in him but age; whereupon an Arabian called Philip made him odious men of was, showing them how young their Emperor was, so as he suborned nine 〈◊〉 soldiers, who slew this good prince being two and twenty years old, and 〈…〉 six.  
●●● 〈◊〉 HOSTI●IANUS was created Emperor by the Senate at Rome, to 〈…〉 of the commonweal, having received news of the death of the 〈◊〉, which troubled them much. Hostilianus was a brave prince, but being f●ll 〈◊〉 he died soon after.  
●●● 〈◊〉 the Arabian having caused Gordian to be slain, came unto the Empire 〈◊〉 year of the World 4209, of the foundation of Rome 997, and in the year of 〈…〉 He came to Rome the second year of his Empire the caused the secular games to be celebrated (which they did never use to do but in the beginning of an age) the first day of May in the 1000 year of the foundation of Rome. At these games, a great part of Rome was burnt, by reason of the great number of torches which were light in the night. We read that he was the first Christian Emperor, and in hatred thereof, Deciu●'s his lieutenant in Illiria revolted, and was called Emperor. He resolved to go against Deci●s', leaving his son at Rome, but the Praetorian soldiers cut his throat; which being understood by Philip's army, the soldiers slew him also at Verona. He reigned five years.  
37. DECIUS was chosen Emperor in the year of the world 4214, of Rome 1002, and of Grace 252. He was a Hongarian of a noble family, and was advanced with the consent of the Senate: his son Decius was also called Emperor: he did persecute the Christians very cruelly causing Pope Fabian to be put to death at Rome, Alexander at jerusalem, and Babias' with his three sons in Antioch. In divers places there was nothing heard but the sighs of poor Christians who were forced to live in deserts among bruit and savage beasts. He did fight twice against the Goths, and in the last, both he and his son was slain, the father being fifty years old. They reigned both but two years, and six months.  
38. Q. HERENNIUS HETRUSCUS is not put among the Emperors by some writers, yet his portrait is found in the book of Hubert Gollatius, and that he was son to Decius.  
39 VIBIUS GALLUS HOSTILIANUS succeeded in the Empire after the death of Decius, having been chosen by the Legion which was preserved in the Scythian wars; and then he found access unto the Senate, who gave their consents to call him Augustus, and so saluted him; having obtained the Empire more by fraud than virtue, being fit for a distaff than a sword, which was the cause of great combustions.  
40. VOLUSIAN, all troubles being pacified by the wisdom and valour of Aemilian, and peace being settled in the Empire, the Emperor Gall●s returned to Rome, and made his son Volusian companion in the Empire, and commanded that he should be called C●sar: their reign had been very short (for that they were found to be exceeding vicious) if a horrible plague had not happened, the which continued ten years, and was general. In the mean time Ae●ilian was chosen Emperor by the soldiers; whereupon Gallus and Volusian, the father and the son prepared a great army to go and fight with him, where there was a bloody battle, and the father and the son were defeated, and slain upon the place, and so Aemilian seized upon the Empire, and made open wars against the friends of Gallus, putting them to death wheresoever he found them. Gallus reigned but two years, and eight months, and Volusian two years.  
41. AEMILIAN after the defeat of the father and the son in Mauritania, was Emperor: he was of a poor family, but by reason of the victories which he had obtained in many places, grew so presumptuous, and promised himself such success, as he presumed to writ unto the Senate that within few days he would free Thrace, Mesopotamia, and Armenia from the oppression of his enemies: but he was deceived, for he received present news that Appius soldiers had chosen another Emperor to expel him. But the commanders considering the greatness of the new Emperor and the race of Aemilian, they consented unto his death, and he was slain by the soldiers in the fortieth year of his age, and having reigned three years.  
42. LICINIUS VALERIANUS in the year of the World 4218, of Rome 1060, and of Grace 256, being old, was chosen Emperor by the army which was in Bava●ia: he was of the family of the Cornelians at Rome, and was beloved of the Senate for his virtue and valour, and received Emperor by the consent of the Senate and of all the other armies. In the beginning he showed himself mild unto Christians, but afterwards a Magician of Egypt persuaded him to persecute them, and to sacrifice men unto Idols, but it continued not long, for going to make war against the Persians, he was descated and taken prisoner: Saporez king of Persia used Valerians back as a foot stool when he went to horseback, and in the end he caused him to be flayed quick. He held the Empire but two years.  
43. GALLIEN after the taking of his father was called Emperor in the year, of the World 4223, of Rome 1011, and of our Redemption 261. He carried himself like unto Nero, the plague of mankind, and the basest and most cruel that ever lived: being given wholly to his pleasures, and not caring to redeem his father; which made him to be hated of the soldiers. In his time there were thirty of his Lieutenants which were saluted Emperors in their several armies, all tyrants, most of which slew one another: the which did much weaken the empire, & he himself having lost many battles against Posthumus, was slain by a Sclavonian. He reigned fifteen years. In the History of Gallien there is the first mention of the French, which had assisted the Romans in their wars.  
44. SALONIN VALERIAN reigned during the captivity of Vaelerian his father, with his brother Gallien: but he was (contrary to his brother) a good, wife, modest, sober, bountiful, and learned Prince: the Senate did much esteem him, but the hatred which the people bore unto his vicious brother Gallien, made them cold in their affections to him, so as being with his brother in the battle against Posthumus, they were pursued unto Milan, whereas the French put them to the sword, and their bodies were buried in the same place.  
45. LABIENUS POSTHUMUS (the Roman State being in a manner ruined) was chosen Emperor by the Gauls: Gallien and Valerien brethren, disliking a companion, marched towards France to fight with Posthumus, who having defeated them, made himself master of all Gaul, and had already made it a realm: but one of the Captains called Lollianus, slew Posthumus and his son, whom the father had associated with him in the empire, and caused to be proclaimed Augustus by the French.  
46. FLAVIUS CLAUDIUS was chosen Emperor by the army which was near unto Milan; and the Senate confirmed this election, in the year of the World 4233, of Rome 1021, and of Grace 271. The words which were recited in the Senate are these: OH Emperor Claudius, thou art our brother, thou art our father, thou art our friend, thou art a good Senator, thou art a true Prince: Whereby we may conceive what a worthy person he was: he expelled the Goths, and cut them in pieces: he chased the tyrant Aur●olus out of the Commonweal, and died, having reigned two years.  
47. AURELIUS QVINTILLIUS, brother to the Emperor Claudius, was chosen by the Senate for the merit of his brother's virtues: but he was very fearful and timorous, and loved a private life. Wherefore the soldiers knowing his humour, made choice of Aurelian in the army. Which quintilius hearing, he fell into a melancholic and desperate humour, causing himself to be let blood in the foot, being in the water, to the end that death might not be very painful unto him. He died seven and twenty days after his election.  
48. AURELIAN was chosen emperor by the soldiers, in the year of the World 4235, of Rome 1023, and of Grace 273. He was a valiant man, and of great experience in the wars: He defeated the Marcomanes and Suevians. Italy being pacified, be entered into Rome, where he suppressed all mutinies & tumults, and put to death the factious. He led his army against Zenobia, a Queen of great courage; whom he took, and led in triumph to Rome. He led his army into Suabe, from whence he expelled the Bohemians: and meaning to go into the East, the soldiers slew him near unto Byzantium. He reigned five years, and six months.  
49. TACITUS, in the year of the World 4241, of Rome 1029, and of Grace 279, was for his virtues declared Emperor, by a decree of the Senate, to whom the armies of the empire had left the charge. He was taken and chosen out of the body of the Senate, and advanced to the imperial Throne. Then the Commonweal of Rome used their judgement in the election of emperors. He died of a fever in the city of Ta●sis, six months and twenty days after his election.  
50. ANNIUS FLORIANUS, after the death of his brother Tacitus, seized upon the empire: but for that he was a prince of a bad constitution both of mind and body, the soldiers did choose Probus: which Florian seeing, he caused himself to be let blood in the foot, holding it in warm water, whereof he died, the second month after his election.  
51. VALERIUS PROBUS, in the year of the World 4242, of Rome 1030, and of Grace 280, was by the voice of the army which was in Tarsis, the consent of the Senate, and of all the armies of the empire, chosen emperor. Presently after his election, he drew all the armies of the East into Gaul, where he vanquished the French and Germane; he suppressed the Goths in Asia, and cleansed Cilicia from thieves. Near unto Syrmium, he priest the soldiers to labour in the draining of certain waterish and morish places: but they mutined against him and slew him, having reigned six years.  
52. CARUS, borne at Narbona, great Provost of the empire, was created in the year of the World 4248, of Rome 1036, and of Grace 286. He did associate his two sons Numerian and Carin with him: He made war against the Persians, who were revolted, and made them subject to the empire. He gave battle to the Sarmatians, of whom he slew 1600, and took 20000 prisoners, with great spoils. He undertook the conquest of Ctesiphont; but being come to the river of Tigris, there fell so great and fearful a storm, with such violent lightning and thunder, as this good emperor was slain, having reigned two years.  
53. NUMERIANUS succeeded in the empire by the death of his father: he was one of the most accomplished princes of his time, learned, a good Orator, and a valiant knight, having been with his father in the Persian wars. This Prince governing the army alone, being very sick and comfortless for the death of his father, Aper his father in law, great Provost of the empire, watched an opportunity to kill him, who being thus sick, caused himself to be carried in a Litter, to the which Aper coming, he made a show that he would comfort him, but he slew him miserably, and then he shut the Litter without any discovery. He reigned but two years.  
54. CARINUS during these things remained in Gaul, living with all pleasure and content, the which ended with the lamentable death of his father and brother; he seized upon the West empire of Gaul: the which bred great and bloody wars. He may justly be called the plague and poison of mankind, & the most abominable that heaven did ●uffer to be borne. This monster married nine wives, whom he caused to be delivered before their times, when they were big with child. Dioclesian being chosen at Rome reigned peaceably. Carinus marched with a mighty army against him, where there were divers battles given; but in the end, that of Carinus was defeated, and himself slain upon the field, having reigned two years.  
55. DIOCLESIAN, a valiant and wise prince, was chosen emperor in the year of the World 4250, of Rome 1038, and of our Salvation 288. He made Maximian his companion in the empire; and for that it was needful to have many heads, they named also two more. Dioclesian named Valerius Maximin, and Maximin named Flavius Constantius, father to Constantine the Great. The emperors Dioclesian and Maximian met together at Nicomedia, to the end they might ruin the Christians. They made an edict that all men of what place soever should sacrifice unto the gods, upon pain of death. This persecution continued ten years; and it was observed, that in one month they put to death seventeen thousand persons. Dioclesian and Maximian did of their own free wills leave the empire in one day: and soon after, Dioclesian drunk poison, and killed himself, having reigned five and twenty years.  
56. VALERIUS MAXIMIN being associated in the empire, was a cruel, furious, and brutish man: he pacified a great insurrection of Peasants which were revolted: he went into Africa, where he ended great enterprises: he defeated the Gentians and erected an immortal Trophy of his worthy victory. He gave over the Imperial Sceptre, having reigned twenty years, to return unto the private estate of his former condition.  
57 CONSTANS, a mild and virtuous prince, being called to the government of the empire, divided it with Valerius Maximin, and had for his part Gaul, Spain, Italy, and Dauphine, the which he governed peaceably. He passed into Asia, and vanquished the Persians, and died in England having been Emperor four years.  
58. VALERIUS MAXIMIN being associated in the Empire with Constance had for his part Illiria in Greece, and in the East. He was a shepherds son, but cruel, bloody, barbarous, valiant, and hardy, which procured him great victories and conquests. He did choose with him for Emperors Maximin and Severus, and reserved unto himself the countries of Illiria, whether he retired himself with his wife. He was surprised with a grievous disease, and seeing that he could not be cured, he slew himself.  
59 MAXIMIN the second was made Emperor, and had for his portion the Eastern province: he did associate Licinius who was a valiant man, whereof he repent himself, but too late. He was valiant and active, and did win many battles against the Persians, and other barbarous nations of the East. He did persecute the poor Christians, of whom he made a cruel butchery. God did punish him with a cruel disease, which seized upon his privy parts, with so horrible a stench, as no man could come near him, and seeing that his infirmity continued, he slew himself, having reigned sixteen years with his companions, and two years alone.  
60. SEVERUS (associated to the Empire with Valerius Maximin) was a good prince, and a valiant. He had cruel and bloody wars against Maxentius, who did so practise with the Praetorian soldiers, as he was chosen Emperor without any contradiction of the Senate: Severus having lost the battle fled shamefully, and was taken at Ravenna, where he was murdered cruelly.  
61. MAXENTIUS came unto the Empire by cunning and fraud, causing himself to be chosen by the Praetorian soldiers, & confirmed by the Senate: he was turbulent, crafty, furious, cruel, and wicked; so as Severus who had been chosen Emperor by all Italy and Africa, was defeated and murdered by him: the which Constantin hearing being then in Gaul, he passed into Italy to take revenge, and gave battle to Maxentius, in the which he was defeated by Constantin near unto the Miluian bridge, having reigned seven years a cruel and vicious tyrant.  
62. LICINIUS successor to Maximin, whom he had associated in the Empire, was of base parentage, ignorant, brutish, and hating learning: he persecuted the Christians cruelly, by reason whereof Constantin the Great made sharp wars against him, and having vanquished him he was slain by his own men, being seventy years old, and having reigned fourteen: he had married Constantia sister to Constantin the Great, by whom he had one son called Licinius the young, whom Constantin created Emperor.  
63. MARTINIAN was chosen Emperor by Licinius, whenas Constantin made war against him: he was inconstant, yet valiant; he raised an army to succour Licinius against Constantin, but he was defeated and put to rout: he hated the Christians much. He ended his days miserably, having lived forty years, and reigned two.  
64. CONSTANTIN the Great, being in France, was sent for by the Senate to expel Maxentius; but he was doubtful whether he should lead his forces or not: but God did let him see a cross in heaven of the colour of fire, with these words, In hoc signo vinces: the which made him resolve to march towards Rome, where he vanquished Maxentius, and drowned him afterwards in the river of Tiber: so as after the defeat of Maxentius, Constantin and Licinius were Emperors together, in the year of the World 4272, of Rome 1060, and of Grace 210, that is to say, Constantin in the West, and Licinius in the East. They lived peaceably about five years; but Licinius discovering his hatred against the Christians, and persecuting them with all violence, they retired themselves to Constantin, who levied an army, and with his son Crispus gave battle to Licinius near unto Andrinopolis, where he slew him, and so Constantin was Emperor alone, who reform all things both touching religion, and justice. The six and twentieth year of his Empire, they began to build the walls of Byzantium, which was by him called Constantinople, whether he did transport the seat of the Empire. He lived sixty and six years, and reigned thirty years, ten months, and eleven days. Before his death he had resolved to be baptized in the river of jordan.  
65. CRISPUS eldest son to Constantin the Great, after the death of Licinius was associated in the Empire by his father; he was learned, and instructed in the arts by Lactantius Firmianus. He was in the war against Licinius, but he lived not long. Some say that Fausta his mother in law, Constantins' second wife, priest him to have his company; but seeing the foulness of the fact, he absented himself, and she seeing herself refused, went unto the Emperor her husband to whom she complained with hypocritical tears that Crispus his son had sought to dishonour her: which Constantin hearing, and giving credit to his wives words, commanded suddenly that they should kill him, the which was presently done. Some writ that the Emperor caused Fausta his wife to be slain, having discovered the truth of the fact.  
66. CONSANTIN the second, in the year of the World 4303, of Rome 1090, and of our salvation 341, with his two brethren, all three sons to Constantin the Great, succeeded their father, who by his testament had divided the Empire, that is, to Constantin (who was the eldest) France, Spain, the Alpes, & England; Constance had Italy, Africa, Greece, and Illiria; Constantius the youngest had the East, and was sole Emperor: but the eldest was more proud and glorius than the other two, and not content with his portion, made wars against his brother Constance to take away Italy, where being with his army, he was defeated near unto Aquilea, and trodden under the horse feet, whereof he died, being five and twenty years old, and having reigned three years.  
67. CONSTANCE by the death of Constantin, had his portion augmented with all his brother's countries. He was twenty years old when he defeated his brother. In the beginning he was just and valiant, but an Arrian, and a great perscuter of Christians that were not of his opinion, committing many cruelties: by reason whereof they made Magnentius Emperor at Ausbourg, who slew Constance sleeping in his bed: his death is memorable, for that he himself had preserved this Magnentius in Sclavonia, when the soldiers would have slain him, and covered him with his robe. He reigned thirty years.  
68 CONSTANTIUS or CONSTANCE, the youngest of the three sons of Constantin the Great, led an army of 60 thousand men against this murderer Magnentius, who came to encounter him in Sclavonia with 30 thousand soldiers, as well French as Germane: Constantius won the the battle, and Magnentius fled to Lion where after that he had slain his friends whom he distruhed, he slew himself. Constantius remained sole Emperor, and had great war both against the French and Germane. He made julian his cousin Emperor to encounter them whilst that he made war against the Sarmatians and Persians. He died of a fever in Silicia, being one and forty years old, and having reigned four and twenty years.  
69. MAGNENTIUS having slain his master Constance, seized upon the Empire, which he held not long, being put to flight, and his army defeated. He reigned three years, and six months.  
70. JULIAN the Apostate, who before had been companion to Constantius for the space of six years, in the year of Grace 365, remained sole Emperor a year, and seven months. Being young, the Bishop of Nicomedia instructed him in the Christian religion, whereof he made profession and read publicly in the Church. He went secretly to hear the Sophister Libanius, who infected him with the opinions of I●mblicus Maximus a Pagan Philosopher, from which time he disdained the Christian doctrine, and followed the opinions of the pagan. He become a sworn enemy to Christians. Seeing himself sole Emperor, he did sacrifice men: he sent forth edicts against Christians, and did open the idols temples, prohibiting to give any offices to Christians: he would not suffer their children to be received into the Rhetoric schools, and did writ against the Christians, persuading the jews to re-edify their Estate. Finally he died miserably being thirty years old.  
71. JOVIAN, or JOVINIAN was Emperor in the year of the World 4329, of Rome 1117, and of Grace 367. He was a good and religious prince. He made a peace with the Persians, and returned into Asia, he pacified many people, and settled quietness in the Churches, he called back them that had been banished for religion, and commanded that the Churches should have their revenues restored, which julian had taken from them, causing the Idols Temples to be shut up, and died having reigned only eight months.  
72. VALENTINIAN succeeded him in the year of the World 4330, of Rome 111S, and of our Salvation 368: he was of Hungary. In the time of julian he had been deprived of his estates and offices, for that he had been a Christian. He was a good prince, and a wise. He caused his brother Valens to come out of Hungary, and made him Emperor with him, and some time after, his son ●ratian. Valentinian left the East unto his brother, and marched himself into Gaul, where he defeated the Germane and Saxons. He punished them severely that sold by false weights and measures, causing their hands to be cut off. He died of a fever in Hongarie, being fifty five years old, and having reigned eleven years, eight months, and twenty days.  
73. VALENS, who had been Emperor with his brother, survived him three years: He was ignorant and cruel, who notwithstanding his brother's admonitions, was an Arrian. He entreated the Christians very cruelly. He made war against Procopius, who affected the empire, but his soldiers delivered him unto Valens, and he put him to death. He went against the Goths near Andrionopolis, where he was wounded, and carried into a cottage, whereon the enemies set fire, and burned him alive, having reigned thirteen years, and five months.  
74. GRATIAN, and VALENTINIAN the second, sons to Valentinian the first, were Emperors together, in the year of the World 4344, of Rome 1132, and of our Redemption 382 Gratian made Theodosius partner of the empire, with whom he reigned four years, having commanded eight years before with his father, and three with his uncle Valens. He was learned, a Poet, and one of the best Orators of his time. After the death of Valens, he called home all the Christian Bishops, and expelled the heretics, commanding all the Churches with one common consent to hold the Nice●e Creed. He returned into France, whereas he did more esteem the Germane soldiers than the Romans: so as the governor of Lions cut his throat, being two and thirty years old.  
75. MAXIMUS, a wicked and cruel man, having murdered the emperor Gratian his ma●ster, who suffered himself to be governed by him, seized upon the empire, and defeated the emperor Valentinian the second, brother to Gratian, in battle, whom he forced to fly into the East to Theodosius: but he levying a mighty army, came and defeated Maximus, whom he took and put to death, having reigned but one year.  
76. VALENTINIAN the second, by the help of Theodosius, returned into France, the which he governed seven years as Emperor: but Eugenius his Secretary, and Colonel Arbogastus, a Goth by nation, corrupted the Grooms of Valentinians Chamber with money; so as being at Vienna in Dauphine, they strangled him with a cord. Eugenius caused himself to be called Emperor, and was taken and carried to Theodosius, at whose feet he cast himself; but the soldiers cut him in pe●ceses, and Arbogastus slew himself.  
77. THEODOSIUS, in the year of the World 4345, of Rome 1133, and of our Salvation 383, a Spaniard, and of a noble family, was the last Emperor both of the East & West. Having vanquished Maximus, and put him to death, he returned to Rome, whereas he did shut up the Temples of their Idols, and did wholly extinguish the sacrifices of the pagan, and their Bachanales, which had continued until the time of Valens. He restored the Christian religion, with all good laws and justice: but news coming unto him that Valentinian had been strangled, and that Eugenius, and Arbogastus marched with a great army towards the Alpes, and had protested that they would restore the sacrifices of the pagan. Wherefore Theodosius resolved to go and encounter them causing the name of Christ to be drawn in all his ensigns and standards, for that one night being in prayer, and slumbering, one appeared unto him & persuaded him to go against his enemies, whom he defeated and cut in pieces. He died at Milan the seventeenth of September, in the sixty and five year of his age, having reigned seventeen years.  
78. ARCADIUS, after the death of his father Theodosius, succeeded with his brother Honorius in the empire: Arcadius was in the East, in the year of the World 4362, of Rome 1150, and of Grace 400: he was a courteous Prince, and a good Catholic. His father had left him Rufin to be his Tutor, thinking that he would be faithful, but Rufin being a French man borne, propounded to make himself Emperor, for he drew in Alaric king of the Goths to terrify Arcadius, but his treason being discovered, he was slain by the Italian soldiers. He lived thirteen years after the death of his father.  
79. HONORIUS, son to Theodosius, and brother to Arcadius, was emperor of the West, and had Stilicon for his Tutor. In the eleventh year of his empire, and in the year of Grace 409, Redegise came into Italy with an army of 200000 Goths, the which was quite defeated by Stilicon, and Redegise taken and strangled. After this victory Honorius grew conceited that Stilicon affected the empire: whereupon he caused him to be slain with his son Eucherius. Alaric, king of the Goths, came to Rome, and took it after two years siege, the first day of April, in the sixteenth year of the empire of Honorius, and in the year of Grace 414. He reigned sixteen years.  
80. THEODOSIUS the second, son to Arcadius, being nine years old, succeeded his father, in the year of the World 4374, of Rome 1166, and of our Salvation 412, and in the 15 year of the empire of Honorius: His Tutor was called Anthemius, by whose wisdom he was instructed in the fear of God, and the public affairs well governed. He made a peace with the Goths, and employed them against the Huns and Persians; and in the end he made a peace with them. He reconciled the Churches, and called a Council in the town of Ephesus, against Nestorius; after which he died at Constantinople, having reigned forty two years, and lived one and fifty.  
81. VALENTINIAN the third was associated in the empire by Theodosius the second, after the death of Honorius, in the year of the World 4392, of Rome 1180, of our Salvation 430, and in the ninth year of the empire of Theodosius the second. He was the last Emperor of the West until Charlemaigne. He was an adulterer, a magician, and a murderer of great captains which had done him service. Boniface his lieutenant in Africa was defeated by the Vandals, so as they seized upon Carthage in the 34 year of the empire of Theodosius the second, and the 17 of Valentinian the third. He reigned 30 years.  
82. MARTIAN, lieutenant to Theodosius the second, succeeded his master, and was Emperor of the East, in the year of the World 4416, of Rome 1214, and of our Redemption 454. He was wise, valiant, and fearing God: and to pacify the troubles of the Church, he concluded a peace with the Persians, & with the Vandals in Africa. Having reigned six years, he died at Constantinople.  
You must observe, that after the death of Valentinian, the Roman Empire was much dismembered and torn in pieces: for the French held a great part of Germany and Gaul; the Ostrogothes, Hongarie; the Westgothes, Spain; the Vandals, Africa; and many called themselves Caesar in Italy; so as in the space of twenty years there were nine Emperors which reigned, and succeeded one another, and slew one another, the last was called Augustulus. This diminutive name of Augustus gave some occasion to say, that the empire of Augustus should perish in Italy: for one called Odoacre of Rugia, during these horrible confusions entered into Italy, and spoiled it during the space of fourteen years, in the year of Christ 465, Leon the Great living at Constantinople. He took Rome, and caused himself to be called King of Rome and Italy, and went up in triumph to the capitol, where he made himself to be crowned. He abandoned Rome, with many other neighbour towns, to blood, murder and spoil. He gave the third part of his lands to the soldiers, and committed infinite villainies. They ruled in Italy until the reign of justinian.  
83. LEO the Great, of Thrace, was chosen emperor at Constantinople, in the year of the World 4423, of Rome 1221, and of our Redemption 461, by a general consent of the Senate and soldiers, and was afterwards crowned by the Patriarch Anatoli●s. He was a good prince, and fearing God: he reigned seventeen years.  
84. ZENO being son in law and lieutenant of the army to Leo, in the year of the World 4441, of Rome 1239, and of Grace 479, was made Emperor by his son, for that Leo the Great had by his last will named Leo the second son to Zeno, but Leo the second dying, he made his father Emperor, who sent Theodoric king of the Goths into Italy as his lieutenant against Odoacre, who was vanquished and slain by Theodoric. During his reign, Constantinople was in a manner all burnt by an accident of fire, and in it there were consumed above 120000 volumes of good manuscripts, which was a great loss. Zeno was very cruel, miserable, and a drunkard, who wallowing in his drukennesse and full of wine, the Empress his wife caused him to be buried quick, having reigned seventeen years.  
85. ANASTASIUS was in the year of of the World 4456, of Rome 1244, and of Grace 494, made Emperor by the favour of Zenos wife: he won the love of the people by abolishing a certain annual tribute. He suppressed divers seditions, and made a peace with the Persians. He did openly profess the heresy of Eutiches, expelling Euphemius, who had crowned him, out of Constantinople, than he caused Macedonius his successor to be slain, and did much harm unto the Church. His reign was very fatal unto Christians, being eighty and seven years old, lightning and thunder fell upon him and consumed him to ashes, having reigned twenty and seven years.  
86. JUSTIN the son of a shepherd of Thrace in the year of the World 4483, of Rome 1271, and of Grace 521, being for his valour made captain of Anastasius guards, and respected by the soldiers, received certain money from Amantius to win the soldiers, and to buy their voices for Theocretian his friend: but justin practised them for himself, who with the consent of the Senate, and of the soldiers was received Emperor. Amantius and Theocretian sought to be revenged, the which justin descovering, he put them to death. He was a good Catholic, banished the Arrians, and did much for the Churches of the East. Being old, he created justinian his nephew Emperor in his life time in the presence of Epiphani●● patriarch of Constantinople, and of the Senate, which Epiphanius did crown justinian his wife, and justin died the eleventh year of his Empire, having left justin whom he had adopted for son.  
87. JUSTINIAN who had been companion to justin the space of four months, remained sole Emperor in the year of the World 4490, of Rome 1278, and of Grace 528. He sent Bellissarius his lieutenant against the Persians, whom he suppressed and pacified. He was also sent into Africa, whereas Carthage yielded, and Gilimer king of the Vandals was taken, and this was the last king of the Vandals; so as Africa was again made subject to the Empire. Bellissarius was also sent into Italy, where in five years he recovered all the towns which were held by the Goths, especially Rome in the eleventh year of the reign of justinian, and in the year of Grace 537, and then returned to Constantinople: but Totila raised the power of the Goths again in Italy, and Narses was sent thither, who expelled them happily, but he drew in the Lombard's. In the time of justininan there was a collection made of laws, and it was afterwards called the civil law. A Counsel was held at Constantinople, and order set down for the restraining of the incursions of the Barbarians. He reigned thirty and eight years.  
88 JUSTIN the second, grandchild to justinian, was created Emperor in the year of World 4528, of Rome 1317, and of our Redemption 566. He did moderate imposts and usury: but by reason of his infirmity he could not manage the affairs. Martin his lieutenant made war during four years against the Persians, and under his reign was the beginning of the Exarques or six governors at Ravenna, and of the Lombard's reign in Italy. He governed eleven years.  
89. TIBERIUS the second, was sole Emperor in the year of the World 4539, of Rome 1327, and of Grace 576, & both he and his wife were crowned by the Patriarch Eutiches. He continued constant in the Catholic Church, and did many alms deeds for the interting of poor families, causing justice to duly executed. He sent Maurice of Capadocia against the Persians, who defeated them, & recovered Mesopotamia: at his return Tiberius gave him Constautin his daughter to wife, and appointed him Emperor in the presence of the army, and so died having reigned seven years.  
90. MAURICE of Capadocia succeeded his father in law, in the year of Rome 1333, and of Grace 584. He was crowned by a Patriarch called the Faster. Caignan king of Hongarie took Syrme a town of the Empire, and won a battle against Maurice, in which battle he took twelve thousand Romans prisoners: but there fell a plague in Caignans army, which slew seven of his sons in one day, whereupon he retired, sending Maurice word that if he paid a crown for every prisoner, he would sand them back, the which Maurice refused; whereat Caignan being incensed, he caused the heads of all the twelve thousand prisoners to be cut off: upon this occasion, and for his other baseness, the soldiers mutined, and thought to have slain him with stones upon Christmas day, as he entered into the Church. In the end the troops which lay upon the river of Danow advanced Phocas, and saluted him Emperor, who caused Maurice to be slain, and all his family. He was sixty and three years old, and had reigned twenty years.  
91. PHOCAS was Emperor in the year of the World 4566, of Rome 1355, and of Grace 604. He was a Thracian borne, and of base parentage: having been crowned in the suburbs of Constantinople by the Patriarch Cyriacus, after the death of Maurice, he put his friends to death. He was cruel, wicked, dissolute, aravisher of men's wives, a murderer of innocents, an exacter and spoiler of provinces, a drunkard, and a lecher: and whilst that he abandoned himself to these vices, Caignan king of Hongarie, and the Persians spoilt the Empire: for Cosroes king of Persia seized upon jerusalem, and took Syria. He slew ninety thousand Christians, and carried away the true Cross whereon our Saviour had been crucified, by reason whereof Phocas was hated of the people. Priscus son in law to Phocas joined with Heraclius governor of Africa, and with one Photius, whose wife Phocas had ravished, th●se three arrived at one instant at Constantinople with their armies, and seized upon Phocas: the soldiers cut off his arms, legs, and privy parts, after which they cut off his head, having reigned eight years.  
92. HERACLIUS son to Heraclius governor of Africa, after the execution of Phocas, was chosen Emperor by the consent of the Senate and armies, in the year of the World 4573, and of our redemption 612. He was crowned by Pope Sergius, and the same day he married Fabra Eudoxia, who was also crowned. He made a peace with Caignan king of the Huns, and sent also to make an accord with Cosroes king of Persia; who made awswere that he would not lay aside arms, until that the Persian gods were generally adored, and that he would root out the service of the Christians God: wherewith Heraclius was not daunted, but relied upon God, and led his army into Syria near unto Arot. Cosroes had retired himself into his country, & was punished for his pride by a notable means chosen of God. Cosrces' named Mardassez his younger son to be his successor, Syroes who was the eldest took his father Cosroes and cut his throat, having first slain his brother Mardassez, making himself king by this means; and to be the more assured, he made a peace with Heraclius, and set the prisoners at liberty, among which was Zacherie Patriarch of jerusalem, restoring the true Crosse. Under this Emperor began that detestable sect and religion of Mahomet. He reigned one and thirty years.  
93. CONSTANTIN the third, son to Heraclius was made Emperor by the Senate, in the year of the World 4605, of Rome 1396, and of Grace 644. He was very unfortunate in the war against the Saracens: he slew his brother Theodosius, and put good men to death, who blamed him for adhering to the errors of the Monotholites. By his commandment Theodorus Calioppa (Exarque or governor of Ravenna) took Pope Martin by treason, & sent him prisoner to Constantinople, from whence Constantin banished him to the Taurike Chersonese, where he died soon after of hunger. Constantin went into Italy against the Lombard's, where he was defeated, and afterwards made a truce with them, where having spoiled Rome he came into Sicily where he was strangled, washing himself in a bath. He reigned seven and twenty years.  
94. CONSTANTIN the fourth, his father did associate him in the Empire, in the year of the World 4605, of Rome 1423, and of our redemption 670, whenas the Sar●azins' army at sea approached near unto Constantinople, and was repulsed In the end they were forced to make a peace with the Goths for thirty years. The Emperor called the sixt Council at Constantinople against the Monotholites, and having pacified the empire of the East, touching matters concerning the Church, he died peaceably, having reigned seventeen years.  
95. JUSTINIAN the second, son to Constantine the fourth, was made Emperor by his father, in the year of the World 4649, of Rome 1440, and of our Salvation 687; a cruel and bloody man. He had two flatterers which were the cause of his ruin: the one was Theodosius a Moine, who was in such credit as justinian called him General or great Master; the other was Stephen, Chaplain to the Emperor. These two Mignons entreated the captains of the empire roughly, among others Leontius, whom they kept two years in prison: but having escaped, he made himself Emperor, with the help of the Patriarch, and cut off justinian's nose, and sent him into exile into an Island, whereas he caused these two Mignons to be drawn by the feet through the town, and afterwards burnt. Tiberius' the third of Apsimare returning out of Africa, from whence he had been expelled by the Sarrazins with his army, not daring to come near Leontius, was saluted Emperor by this army, but being taken by Leontius, he cut off his nose, and kept him prisoner. And justinian recovering his estate by the means of the king of Bulgaria, he caused Leontius and Tiber●us' of Apsimare to be drawn through the streets, then setting his foot upon their necks, he caused their eyes to be pulled out, and their heads to be struck off, and Heraclius (brother to Tiberius) to be hanged. This done, the soldiers on the other side did choose Philippicus Bardanes emperor, who marched towards Constantinople: he caused justinian and his son to be drawn from an Altar, and to be slain by his commandment. He reigned ten years before his exile, and six after his return; thus were three emperors slain in a short time.  
96. LEONTIUS or LEO was a Priest and Senator of Constantinople; he conspired with certain factious people to expel the Emperor justinian, the which he effected; for entering with his seditious troop into the palace, he sent him into exile, as hath been said, and caused himself to be saluted Augustus: he continued Emperor but three years.  
97. TIBERIUS the third, of Apsimare, usurped the empire upon Leontius, and caused him to be taken, having cut off his nose, he kept him prisoner. During these combustions, banished justinian went unto his uncle the king of Bulgaria, now called Hungary, by whose means he entered into Constantinople, and caused Tiberius' Apsimare, and Leohtius (who was a prisoner) to be taken, and having caused them to be dragged by horses through the streets in view of all the world, until they were in a manner torn in pieces, he cut off their heads, Tiberius having reigned seven years.  
98. PHILIPPICUS BARDANES commanded justinian's army at Sea, and was chosen Emperor by the said army, after which he came to Constantinople, whereas he caused justinian, and his son Tiberius, to be slain. Philippicus being in quiet possession of the empire, he disannulled the decrees of the sixt Council, by the persuasion of a Monk whom he favoured, for that he had foretold him that he should be Emperor, by the Augur which he saw of an Eagle shadowing the head of the said Philippicus when he slept. By his commandment all Images were beaten down, and cast out of the Churches, the which did much discontent Anastatius the second, who by his impatiency and great rashness, with his consorts, put out Philippicus eyes, and expelled him the empire, having reigned two years. He was Protector of the Monotholites, and other great heresies.  
99 ANASTATIUS the second, a very learned man, in the year of the World 4667, of Rome 1468, and of our Salvation 715, was chosen emperor: and for that he loved the peace of the Church, he suppressed all the enemies of the sixt Council. He levied a great army, and sent it against the Barbarians and Arabians: but his captains were treacherous and disloyal, for turning back, they fell upon the Emperor, and assailed him with the same arms which he had prepared for another. In this furious encounter, Constantinople was taken and sacked, and Anastatius deposed and confined into a monastery, having reigned one year and three months.  
100 THEODOSIUS the third, having been the author of the sedition and sack of Constantinople by the soldiers, and of the spoiling of Anastasius of the empire, caused himself to be called emperor: He was of Constantinople, and of base parentage, but of a great spirit: but some writ, that he was forced to accept of the government of the empire. In the beginning he caused Images to be restored in Churches; by his virtue and good government he purchased the love and obedience of his people, yet Leo Isaurus his mortal enemy made cruel war against him, wherewith the people were much afflicted: but Theodosius being tired with these civil wars, resolved voluntarily to leave the empire, and having reigned two years, he become a Monk.  
101. LEO the third, called before Isaurus Conon, being in the army against the Saracens, and hearing that Theodosius was chosen Emperor, returned out of Nicomedia, having taken the son of Theodosius, he compounded so with the father as he quit the empire. After which, he took an oath of the captains and soldiers, in the year of the World 4670, of Rome 1471, and of Grace 718. In the second year of his empire, the Saracens besieged Constantinople; but they were chased away, and their ships burnt: after which he made war against Images, and commanded by an Edict, that they should be cast out of Churches: for this cause he was called Iconomach, which is to say, an enemy of Images. He reigned four and twenty years.  
102. CONSTANTINE the fift, surnamed Copronyme, for that when he was baptized he bewrayed the font. He was crowned during the life of his father Leo Isaurus, by the Patriarch German, in the year of the World 4704, of Rome 1495, and of Grace 742. He was much more vehement than his father to cast Images out of Churches: whereupon one Artabardus was chosen Emperor, with the consent of the Patriarch, and of the Nobility: but Copronymus, at the end of two years defeated Artabardus in battle, and having taken him, he caused his eyes, with his two sons, and the Patriarches, to be put out; he caused him to be whipped, and set upon an Ass with his face to the tail, the which he held in his hand, and so was led through the streets. He was a magician, and a man given to all vices. He reigned five and thirty years.  
103. CONSTANTINE the sixt, in the year of the World 4744, of Rome 1535, and of Christ 782, son to Leo, and Irene, being twenty years old, sought to manage the affairs of the empire alone, and to this effect he dismissed certain of his mother's servants: but she with her confederates solicited the army to swear that they should not acknowledge Constantine for Emperor, but the army of Armenia detesting it, took an oath unto the son, and so the other armies followed this example; yet for all this the treason was not suppressed: for Constantine having reigned seven years, his mother (taking an occasion, for that he had left his wife, and put her into a monastery, to take another) sent certain soldiers to take her son prisoner, who being in their hands, they put out his eyes, whereof he died within few days after of melancholy, and Irene reigned three years after her son, and her son fifteen years.  

¶ At this time the Empire was divided into two, which was in the year of Grace 801. But we will leave the Emperors of the East, and will begin with the Emperors of the West.  
104. CHARLEMAIGNE, after the death of Constantine the sixt, was called into Italy against the Lombard's, whom he expelled Italy, and conquered by force of arms the city of Rome, with the towns of Ravenna and Milan, with all the forts of Povillia, and Campagnia. He gave peace unto the Church, which had been oppressed two hundred years by the Lombard's; so as he was declared Emperor of the Romans by Pope Leo, to the great joy and content of all the people. Seeing his death to draw near, he declared his son Lewis emperor and king of the Romans, and he made his nephew Bernard king of Italy; and soon after he died, being seventy two years old, in the year of Grace 814, having reigned Emperor fourteen years.  
105. LEWIS, surnamed the Gentle, the only son of Charlemaigne, after the death of his father was crowned at Aix: he was hated by the princes of the empire, by reason of his cruelty against Bernard, his kinsfolks, and allies. He made Lothaire his eldest son king of Bavaria, Pepin king of Aquitaine, and kept the youngest with him, giving him the title of King of Italy, the which moved Bernard son to Pepin king of Italy to take arms against the emperor: but his coming into Italy terrified Bernard and his allies, and made them fly; but in the end, he yielded himself unto the emperor, who carried him prisoner to Aix. He put out his eyes, and then thrust him into a monastery in the year 818; and in Bernard's place he made his son Lothaire king of Italy and emperor. His sons conspired against him, & forced their father to yield unto them, and to become a Monk at Soisson: but the rest of Lewis his children had within a while after some compassion of their father, and restored him to the imperial dignity. Thus was Lewis restored within a year, and pardoned his children who had sought it. At the return of this voyage Lewis died, being sixty four years old, having reigned seven and twenty years. He was interred at Mets.  
106. LOTHAIRE succeeded after the death of his father: he kindled a bloody war against the brethren, the which did so weaken the French, as they were in a manner ruined. Writers say that in the first battle there were above one hundred thousand men slain; but the noblemen of the Empire reconciled them in such sort, as the realms of Lewis the Gentle were divided into four parts: Lewis had Germany, Charles was king of France, Lothaire had the Empire and Italy, with the countries which lie betwixt the rivers of Rhin and Moselle, Metz, and Treves; and Pepin son to Pepin, had Aquitaine. This transaction was published in the year of Grace 843. A while after Lothaire did voluntarily give over the Empire, and become a monk in the monastery of Brume in the year of Grace 855, where he died the year following, having reigned fifteen years.  
107. LEWIS the second, eldest son to Lothaire, went into Italy to expel the Saracens; but the plague fell into his army, and he was forced to leave the country of Beneuent in guard to Adagise a Lombard, prince of Salerne, who in the emperors absence took the Grecians part, and drew almost all Italy into revolt. Lewis having received these news, returned into Italy to punish these traitors: having recovered the towns which were revolted, he forced Adagise to fly, and did execute his companions. Having pacified Italy, he died at Milan, in the year 874, having reigned nineteen years. He was learned, wise, religious, and quick in giving council.  
108. CHARLES the Bald, son to Lewis the Gentle, hearing of the death of Lewis, having no children, raised an army, passed into Italy, to take the Empire from the Germane, & came to Rome, where he was declared Emperor the five & twentieth day of December in the year of Grace 875. He died at Mantova, and some thought that a Physician, a jew by Nation called Sedechias, his familiar friend, had poisoned him. He died in the year of the World 4840, and of Grace 878, having been king of France six and thirty years, and Emperor two.  
109. CHARLES the Gross, son to Lewis surnamed Germanicus, heir of the realm of Italy by Car●oman, and of Germany by reason of Lewis, after that Pope john had declared him Emperor, he happily expelled the Sarrazins out of Italy, than he returned into Germany, and governed France in quality of tutor to Charles the Simple. Finally he was hated and contemned of his subjects, by reason of his infirmities, having his mind also as diseased as his body. They made him renounce his Empire, and Arnold was set in his place. He died soon after in a poor village of Suabe the thirteenth of januarie in the year of the World 4850, and of Grace 888.  
110. ARNOLD base son to Carloman being Emperor, Italy was full of tumults and sedi●ionss. Berengarias and a duke of Spoletum, contended who should be king of Italy. Arnold (being busied in war against the slavonians of Moravia) could not go into Italy before he had subdued those people, the which having done, he passed into Italy, where he pacified the troubles which were at Rome, and was by Pope Formosus (whom he cau●ed to come) declared Emperor, the tenth year after he had taken upon him the government of the Empire. Finally having taken Spoletum by force, he came to besiege the castle of Cavarin, in the which was the wife of Guy, who being a cunning woman, seeing there was no means to resist, she corrupted one of the Emperor's household servants, who gave him a poisoned cup, whereof Arnold died the nine and twentieth of November in the year of the World 4802, and of Grace 900, having been Emperor twelve years.  
111. LEWIS the third, having been created Emperor after the death of his father Arnold, governed the Empire for a time with the aid and assistance of Otho duke of Saxony, and of Otho Archbishop of Mentz his tutors. The civil discords which had begun in his father's life time increased much. Italy and Germany were full of divisions and civil wars. The Hongarians being gathered together, spoiled the limits of Bavaria, and the Emperor Lewis went to encounter them with all his forces, & gave them battle, the which continued from the ninth of August unto the twelft, but in the end he was defeated and put to rout, where he lost the bravest of the nobility of Germany. The Hongarians being victors got the country, until that Lewis purchased a peace at a dear rate, whereupon he died with grief. He fell sick and died the twelfth of januarie in the year of the World 4873, of Grace 911, and of his Empire the twelfth.  
112. HENRY surnamed the Oyseluer, or Keeper of birds, was chosen to the Empire in the year of Grace 919, and laboured what he could to pacify the civil wars, and to settle a peace in Germany, the which he did. He made war against the slavonians whom he vanquished in battle: which done he turned his forces against the Danes, whom he defeated in many encounters: after which, he went into Bohemia, and took Prague, the chief city of the country, making Bohemia tributary to the Empire. In the mean time the Hongarians returned into Germany, but Henry went to meet them, and gave them battle, where they lost above forty thousand men, the rest he expelled out of Germany. After this great victory he prepared himself to go into Italy, but he was surprised with an apoplexy, which turned to a palsy, and having appointed his son Otho Emperor, he died, being sixty years old, having reigned eighteen years, and after the birth of Christ 937.  
113. OTHO the second, succeeded his father Henry: he was surnamed the Great, by reason of his brave exploits, having pacified Germany with other sorraine realms, and settled the Empire. He was crowned at Aix by Hildeberg Bishop of Mentz, in the year of Grace 939, after which he passed into Italy, whereas he restored Pope john the third, and caused his son Otho to be declared Emperor: after his return into Germany, he was surprised with an apoplexy, whereof he died in the year of Grace 974, and the 37 of his reign.  
114. OTHO the third, succeeded his father in the year of Grace 975. The beginning of his Empire was fortunate, but the end was not answerable: having settled an order for the Estate of Germany, he levied a great army to go against the Grecians and Sarrazins, to whom he gave battle, in which he was defeated, and put to rout: the Emperor casting away his arms fled towards the gulf of Tarent●m and Rosana, where he leapt into the sea to sane himself by swimming; but he was taken by the enemy's ships, and being unknown paid his ransom unto the mariners. Otho having lost his army, and in a manner all his Empire, gathered together the small remainder of his forces and then renewed the wars, in the which he cut in pieces all the garrisons of Sarrazins, for the which he was surnamed the Passport of Sarrazins. He died of a flux the eight of December in the year of Grace 983, and of the World 4945, and in the tenth-yere of his Empire. He was interred at Rome.  
115. OTHO the fourth was declared Emperor. At his entrance he settled a peace in Germany, and laboured to pacify the seditions of Italy▪ Crescentius having usurped the Consul's power at Rome, expelled the Pope out of his seat. The Emperor went thither with an army, who staying at Ravenna, had news of the Pope's death; whereupon he presently appointed his cousin Bruno son to Otho for his successor, who was called Grego●i● the fi●t. He sent him before to Rome and followed, after, where being received, he pardoned Crescentius, and causing himself to be declared Emperor by the Pope, he resolved to return into Germany: but he was scarce out of Rome whenas Crescentius of his own private authority expelled Pope Gregory, and made one called john of Plaisance Pope. The Emperor hearing of these news, returned to Rome, where he entered the city and took Crescentius, whom he caused to be set upon an ass with his face to the tail, and so to be led through the streets, then having suffered a thousand indignities, he caused him to be hanged with twelve of his companions at the city gate. The Emperor having settled Gregory, made a decree with the Pope's consent, who did confirm and publish it; that from thence forth the Germans should have all right and power to choose the Roman Emperor, and it should not be lawful for the Pope to proclaim any prince Emperor, but him whom the princes of Germany had chosen: whereat the Romans did mutiny, for that they had taken from them all power to give their voices in the election of emperors. Otho returned again to Rome, where he fell in love with Crescentius widow, but she seeing that the emperor prepared to go into Germany, and would not marry her, poisoned him for spite. He died the twentieth of October, in the year of Grace 1001, having reigned nineteen years.  
116. HENRY the second, surnamed the Holy, came unto the empire a year after the death of Otho: He prevailed against those which had opposed themselves against his election: he subdued the Henetians who had rejected the Christian religion; and having settled an order for the affairs of Germany, he levied an army to go into Italy for three reasons: the first was, to confirm the empire to the Germane: the second, to subdue the Marquis of Androvin, whom the Bishops and Nobility of Italy had made emperor at Milan: the third was, to make head against the Sarrazins and Grecians, being entered into Italy. He won two battles against Andrevin, who was vanquished and slain. In this war Henry was taken, who having deceived his keepers, cast himself over a wall, but he put his thigh out of joint, for the which he was afterwards called the Limping. Finally, he died the thirteenth of julie, in the year of Grace 1024, and of the World 4986, in the 24 year of his Empire.  
117. CONRADE, the Salic, was chosen Emperor: He passed into Italy to keep them in awe that would tend to any revolt: he confirmed the possession of the empire given unto the Germane, and caused himself to be declared emperor. Before he went out of Germany, he appointed his son Henry to be emperor: being returned, he died suddenly, the fourth of june, in the year of our Redemption 1039, and of the World 5001, having been Emperor fifteen years. He lies buried at Spire.  
118. HENRY, surnamed the Black, succeeded his father. In the beginning he was engaged in two important wars; the one against the Bohemians, who refused to pay the yearly tribute which they aught; but Henry vanquished them, and forced them to return under the obedience of the empire; the other was, to restore Peter king of Hongarie, who had been expelled by Otho, the chief of the Bohemians. Henry marched into Hongarie, where he defeated Otho near unto javerin; who being taken, he was brought unto the king, who caused his head to be cut off the fourth of julie 1044. During these wars, Italy, and the city of Rome were troubled by Benedict the ninth, Silvester the third, and Gregory the sixt, all three contesting who should be Pope. The Emperor went into Italy, where (by the advice of a Council assembled by his Imperial authority) these three Popes were deposed, and Clement the second chosen in their place: and having been declared emperor by the Pope, he returned with his army into Germany, where he was scarce arrived, before the Pope died of poison; and after him another Pope called Damasus, who lived but three and twenty days: the emperor advanced another Pope called Leo the ninth, and he followed the emperor into Germany, who within a while after sent Leo back into Italy, the which was full of seditions. The emperor returned again, but before he went out of Germany, he caused his son (being but four years old) to be crowned Emperor at Aix. He continued a year in Italy, where he pacified all things. At his return, he raised an army against the slavonians, the which was wholly defeated. The Emperor being much discontented, fell sick and died, seeking to swallow a piece of bread that was too big, the fift of October, in the year of Christ 1056. He was Emperor seventeen years, and lived forty, and was buried at Spire.  
119. HENRY the fourth, began to be Emperor at the age of seven years: during his youth he had bloody civil wars, and was forced to set hand to work at the age of fourteen years. Germany was full of combustions and civil wars: he vanquished Otho duke of Bavaria. Pope Gregory the seventh did excommunicate him at the pursuit of the Saxons, sending a Bull by the which Henry was put out of the Church; and he sent a crown of gold to Raoul duke of Suabe, commanding the Bishops of Germany to leave Henry's party, and to adhere to Raoul, who accepted the name of Emperor, and was crowned at Mentz. There were nine battles betwixt Henry and the Saxons: but Raoul was defeated, and wounded to death, for his right hand was cut off. Before he died they brought him his hand, then directing his speech unto the bishops which were about him, Behold (said he) the hand which hath taken the oath, and promised the faith which I have falsified by your treachery to the Emperor, whereof you shall give an account before God. The Emperor having fought sixty two battles against his enemies, was deprived of his Imperial dignity by his own son: and raising an army to be revenged of this outrage, he died at Liege, being fifty six years old, the seventh of August, in the year 1106, having reigned fifty years.  
120. HENRY the fift succeeded: at his entrance he vanquished Henry duke of Lorraine, and Robert earl of Flanders, and forced them to swear fealty unto him. He led an army to Rome, and in the year 1111, was declared Emperor by Pope paschal, and the ancient privileges of the empire were confirmed by a public proclamation. The Emperor was scarce out of Rome, whenas the Pope disannulled all those decrees, and retracted his promise, persuading the Saxons to levy a great army, who gave battle unto the Emperor, the eleventh of januarie, in the year 1115, in the which he was defeated. The Emperor returned again into Italy, but seeing himself tormented by the Pope's practices, and the many seditions of his subjects, transported with rage and fury, caring no more for his country; and being importuned by the Bishops, who entreated him to quit some part of his right, he granted unto the Pope what he demanded, the which was published at Worms, the five and twentieth day of januarie, in the year 1122. Having pacified high Germany, he went to Vtrecht to settle a peace in that country, where he fell sick, and died the five and twentieth of julie, in the year of our Redemption 1125, and of the World 5087, having reigned two and twenty years.  
121. LOTHAIRE the second, of Saxony, invaded the empire in despite of the Germane Princes. He had for competitor Conrade, who was sister's son to Henry the fift: but S. Bernard reconciled these Princes, and Lothaire enjoyed the empire. The Emperor went twice into Italy, where he pacified all troubles. He erected an University for the study of the laws, and the ornament of the country. Returning into Germany he was surprised with sickness, whereof he died upon the way, the sixt of December 1138, and of the World 5100, having reigned eleven years.  
122. CONRADE the second, after the death of Lothaire, was chosen Emperor by the Estates, held at Mentz. He vanquished Henry the Proud, duke of Saxony and Bavaria, who contended for the empire. Guelphe his brother put himself into the town of Weinsberg, who after a long siege, being oppressed with famine, was forced to yield, and the spoil of the town was given unto the soldiers. The women besought the emperor to give them leave to departed with what they could carry away, who granted their request, thinking they would not carry any thing but their greatest wealth; but they took their husbands upon their backs, and their children in their arms, and went forth after this manner. The Emperor seeing the love of these women, made them a banquet and pardoned them. Afterwards he went into Asia with king Lewis, whereas he gave battle unto the Turk, near unto the river of Meandre, and made such a slaughter as this river become read, like blood, and was filled with dead carcases. Having by this victory chased away the enemy, the way was open to go unto Jerusalem. The Emperor returned into Germany, having been four years in the said voyage: he died at ●●amberg, the fifteenth of February 1150, having reigned fifteen years.  
123. FREDERICK surnamed Barbarousse, was chosen by the testament of Conrade: he accepted the Empire, and came to Rome, whereas Pope Adrian the fourth crowned him the eight & twentieth of june, and then he returned into Germany. Italy revolted against the Emperor, whether he went and gave them battle, in the which there were twelve thousand Romans slain upon the place; then he besieged, and took Rome. Pope Alexander excommunicated the Emperor, who came to Venice, and there he cast himself at the Pope's feet; who setting his foot upon the Emperor's neck, said, Super Aspidem & Basiliscum ambulabis: to whom the Emperor answered, Non tibi sed Petro, and the Pope replied, Et mihi & Petro. The Emperor having obtained absolution, and pacified Italy, returned into Germany: then he prepared himself for the war of Asia, where he won three battles against the Turks near to Iconia, and put them to rout. Sal●din fled out of Asia, and Frederick pursuing his victories conquered Silicia, and cut in pieces the Sarrazins army, expelling Saladins troops out of the lesser Armenia. The Emperor being oppressed with heat, went into a river to bathe himself, where he was drowned the tenth of june 1189, having reigned seven and thirty years.  
124. HENRY the sixt, succeeded his father Frederick in the year of Grace 1190, with the consent of the princes of the Empire. He married Constance daughter to Roger king of Sicily, who brought the realm of Sicily unto her husband for a dowry. Henry past into Italy, where he was crowned by Pope Celestin. By the Pope's persuasion he sent a goodly army into Asia, being accompanied with the greatest noblemen and princes of the Empire: but the sudden death of Henry broke off the course of their enterprises. He went into Sicily to arm certain galleys to follow the army: but being at Messina, he was poisoned by his wife, who hated him for his adulteries. He died in the year of the World 5160, and of Grace 1198. He reigned seven year, leaving his son Frederick but five years old, under the government of his brother Philip.  
125. PHILIP the second, son to Barbarousse, was chosen Emperor. He had great wars, most part of the princes adhering unto him: but the Pope, and some other princes opposed themselves against him, who having promised the crown to Otho son to Henry the fift, he excommunicated Philip, the which was the cause of great wars betwixt Otho and Philip; but in the end Philip enjoyed the Empire. Then the Pope sent two Cardinals to absolve Philip, reconciling him unto Otho by the means of a marriage with his daughter. All matters being thus agreed, the Emperor being at Bamberg to take physic, he caused all that were in his chamber to departed, remaining alone with Henry Truchefs, with whom he passed the time: hereupon Otho of Witelsbach surnamed the Young, making noshow of discontent, entered into the chamber, and wounded the Emperor in the throat with his dagger, whereof he died the two and twentieth of june in the year of Grace 1208, and of the World 5170, having reigned ten years. The Empress seeing her husband slain after this manner, died of grief.  
126. OTHO the fift, had the Empire after the death of Philip, but he enjoyed it not long; for he was deprived by the Pope's sentence, who had advanced him. He was crowned at Rome by Pope Innocent the third; but having gotten the possession of Romagna, Ancona, and Povillia, the Pope excommunicated him; and the Bishop of Mentz published the excommunication in Germany, which was the cause of great civil wars. Otho seeing himself assailed by many enemies, and that the princes had chosen Frederick the second, Emperor, he retired into Brabant, where having lost a battle against Frederick, and seeing himself abandoned by his people, he willingly quit the Empire, the third year of his government.  
127. FREDERICK, was crowned at Aix, Otho having quit the Empire in the year of Grace 1213. He made an alliance with Philip the French king: having pacified Germany, they propounded unto him the war of Asia, the which he promised. He parted from Brunswick with his army to go to this enterprise, the eleventh of August 1228. Being joined to the Christians army at Ptolomaide, he made a truce for two years with the Sultan which was very beneficial; for he recovered the possession of the realm of jerusalem, and the Christian prisoners were set at liberty without ransom: and having set led a good order in Palestina, he returned into Italy, whereas the Pope excommunicated him, which was the cause of great troubles: but finding that his friends and good fortune failed him, he retired into Sicily, and was poisoned upon the way, dying in the castle of Poville, the third of December 1250, being four and fifty years old, and having reigned two and thirty.  
After the decease of Frederick, there were Schisms in the Empire until the time of Rod●lphus, so as most historians which have written the lives of Emperors, take all that time for an interraigne or vacancy of the Empire; not holding them for Emperors which follow, until Radulphus, for that they were chosen by divers factions during the civil wars, and were never crowned at Rome: werefore we will not accounted them for Emperors, but will only make mention of them according to their order.  
CONRADE son to Frederick the second, was created king of Romans his father being living, and was poisoned by Manfred his base brother in the year of Grace 1254.  
HENRY Lanpgrau of Turinge, was chosen king of Romans in hatred of Frederick, and of Conrade his son, and died being wounded with an arrow before ulme in the same year that he was chosen king of Romans.  
WILLIAM Ea●le of Holland was chosen king of Romans, and allowed by Pope Alexander; who hoping to go to Rome to be crowned, died in the ninth year of his reign, and of Grace 1255.  
RICHARD brother to the king of England, was also chosen king of Romans by Conrade Archbishop of Cologne, and Lewis Count Palatin of the Rhin, and died in januarie the sixt year of his reign 1257.  
ALPHONSO king of Castille was also chosen king of Romans by the Archbishop of Treves, and the Marquis of Brndebourg, in the year 1257, in januarie, the electors being divided.  
128. RODULPHUS, or RALPH of Haspourg being four and fifty years old, was solemnly chosen in the town of Francfort by the electors of the Empire the first of October 1273, and was crowned with great solemnity. He resolved to suppress all seditions, tumults, thefts, and wars in Germany: and to this end he caused his troops to march against the Marquis of Bade, and the confederates of Suabe, forcing them to demand a peace. Then he went into Austria against Ottacrus king of Bohemia, and vanquished him in two battles, he being slain in the second, the six and twentieth of August 1278. He commanded seventy castles and strong forts to be razed, which served as retraits for thieves, and did cause nine and twenty of their chief leaders to be executed. He came not into Italy, yet he continued in good terms with the Pope; so as by his wisdom, judgement, virtue, and felicity, he quenched the civil wars, and was the cause that Germany was restored, having been long in combustion. Being old he died the fifteenth of julie, in the year of Grace 1591., and of the World 5253, having reigned nineteen years. He lies buried at Spire.  
129. ADOLPHE of Nassau was chosen Emperor the first of May 1292, at Francfort by an imperial diet. At his first entrance, he went and served the king of England who had wars against the French king, in regard of a hundred thousand crowns, for which cause the princes of the Empire did no more esteem him, but scorned him openly. Finally, Albert of Austria being invested in the Empire went to field: Adolph came to meet him, and they encountered near unto Spire, whereas a battle was given the second of july 1298, in the which Adolph was slain by the hand of Albert, as he did rise having been overthrown, having reigned eight years.  
130. ALBERT son to Radulphus duke of Austria, was received to the government of the Empire by the seven Electors, who all with one consent proclaimed him Emperor the five and twentieth of july, where there was so great a concourse of people, as the duke of Saxony was smothered. Albert came not into Italy, yet he appointed governors there, and entreated Pope Boniface the eight to proclaim him Emperor, the which he did, and withal, the Pope gave him the realm of France, for that he had excommunicated Philip the Fair. Albert made no war out of Germany, but against divers noblemen and princes within the country, upon divers occasions. He was slain near unto the Rhine by his own nephew, from whom he had taken the duchy of Su●be, as from a prodigal, being accompanied by certain Barons, the first of May, in the year of Grace 1308, and of the World 5270, having reigned ten years.  
131. HENRY the seventh, earl of Luxembourg, was chosen by the Electors at Francfort, the first of November, & confirmed by the Pope, upon condition, that he should pacify Italy within two years. Italy, which had not seen an emperor in sixty years, was bathed with her own blood, and was exhausted of her treasure by Tyrants, who held her in servitude after a strange manner; so as she implored aid from the emperor. He led his army into Italy, all the towns put themselves under his protection, and he caused himself to be crowned at Milan. The Guelphs and Gibelins were in combustion; the emperor favoured the Gibelins, and vanquished the Guelphs, causing terrible executions to be done. After this, he went to Rome, whereas he was declared Emperor, the first of August 1312. He besieged the Florentines, who being in despair, suborned a jacobin Monk, who poisoned the emperor at Beneuent, in giving him the holy Sacrament: Thus this great prince died on S. Bartholomews' day, the four and twentieth of August 1313, having reigned six years. He lies at Pisa.  
132. FREDERIC the third, of Austria, was chosen Emperor, and Lewis of Bavaria was also chosen; Lewis was crowned at Aix, and Frederic with a less train was crowned at Bonna by the Archbishop of Cologne: Germany was presently divided into two factions, and this kindled a cruel civil war, the which continued eight years: there was a truce made, and they sought to pacify these controversies; but upn saint Michel's day, in the year 1323, Frederic was defeated and taken prisoner, and put into a castle standing upon the river of Nabe: he was afterwards set at liberty, upon condition, that he should carry the title of Emperor, with Lewis, during his life, but not to challenge the rights & power of the empire. He was poisoned with a love drink, in the year 1330, the 13 of januarie.  
133. LEWIS the fourth, after the death of Frederic, remained sole Emperor he went into Italy, where he caused himself and his wife to be crowned: he had great contention with Pope john the 22, who was then resident at avignon; so as this Pope excommunicated him, and caused Charles son to the king of Bohemia to be chosen. Lewis caused an Edict of Abolishion to be made touching those which had followed the party of Frederic, by which means he reconciled the Germane princes unto him. He caused an Imperial Diet to be held at Strasbourg, whereas he made known the cause why the Pope had excommunicated him, and that he would submit himself unto a Council. The Pope commanded all the German and Italian Princes to quit Lewis party; so as he could not be absolved, the which was the cause of great troubles. He died a year after the election of Charles, the eleventh of October, in the year of Grace 1347, and of the World 5309, having governed the empire three and thirty years.  
134. CHARLES the fourth, was chosen Emperor during the life of Lewis, but after his death the Electors rejected him, and made choice of G●ntier earl of Schuartzembourg in Tutinge, the second of February, in the year 1349, but he lived not long, for Charles corrupted his physician, so as on a time Gontier being ill disposed, in stead of a potion, was poisoned by him; who doubting thereof, forced the physician to drink the rest, and saw him fall down dead before him, but Gontier lived not long after. He lies in S. Bartholomews' Church in Francfort. Charles remaining sole Emperor passed into Italy, in the year 1354, where he received the Crown of Iron at Milan: then he went to Rome, where he was declared Emperor: being returned to Meta, he held a great Imperial Diet, whereas that famous Edict of Charles was made, called the Golden Bull. He solicited the Electors to have his son appointed Emperor, the which was done in the year 1376: for Wenceslaus was crowned Emperor, and married joane Countess of Holland and Zealand, daughter to the duke of Bavaria. The Emperor being joyful to have advanced his son to the greatest dignity in Christendom, died at Prague, the seven and twentieth of May 1375, having reigned thirty years.  
135. WENCESLAUS, being fifteen years old and six days, after his election, was crowned emperor. This prince had a deformed countenance, and did more resemble a Baboon than a Prince: he was dull, base, lascivious, cruel, and bloody: he had a bad grace, and his body was fit for nothing, but for gluttony, lechery, and drunkenness: he was suspicious, and cruel, kill men at his table, and in his chamber, with his own hand. In the end, his subjects took him prisoner, and kept him in a hole four months, from whence he escaped. All the Electors deposed him from his Imperial dignity two and twenty years after the death of his father. He died at Prague being seven and fifty years old: during his reign Artillery was invented by a Monk.  
136. ROBERT, Count Palatin of the Rhine (after that Wenceslaus had been dejected from the empire) was chosen emperor, a Prince of an active spirit, wise, and valiant in war: he was crowned at Cologne by the Archbishop of the same place: after which, he passed into Italy to cross the designs of Galeus, duke of Milan; but he lost a battle, and so retired into Germany, leaving the Italians to kill one another. Having pacified Germany, he died in peace, the eighteenth of May 1410, and in the year of the World 5372, having reigned ten years.  
137. SIGISMOND, king of Hungary and Bohemia, was chosen Emperor, who presently thought to pacify the troubles of Christendom, and to unite all princes to renew the war against the Turk. There were at that time three Popes, Benedict the third at avignon, john the three and twentieth at Bolognia, and Gregory the twelfth at Riminy. Sigismond pursued a Council to remedy these mischiefs, and made a speedy journey into Italy, France, Spain, and England: he wrought so with all kings and princes, as they yielded to have a Council held at Constance, whether came some Christian kings and princes, and the emperors of Greece and Trebisond were there also in person. The emperor returned into Italy, where, on the three and twentieth of December 1431, he made his entry into Milan, and having received the Crown of Iron, he took his way towards Rome, where he was crowned upon Whitsunday, the two and twentieth of May: From thence he retired into Hungary, but he had a horrible civil war in Bohemia, by reason of the death of john Hus, who was burnt at the Council of Constance, contrary to the passport which the emperor had given them. In the end he fell sick, and died at Zuonne, in the year of the World 5376, and of our Salvation 1437, having been Emperor seven and twenty years, king of Hungary one and fifty, and king of Bohemia seventeen, being seventy one years old: he was an excellent prince, but unfortunate both in wife and war.  
138. ALBERT of Austria, son in law to Sigismond, succeeded him in the empire, and in the two realms of Hungary and Bohemia, in the year 1438. He had some war in Bohemia, but it was soon quenched; and the year following, he was surprised with a flux, having eaten mealons too greedily: he died in Hungary the seven and twentieth of October 1439. This sudden death was the cause of new troubles.  
139. FREDERIC the fourth, of Austria, was chosen Emperor the tenth of March 1440: he took away the Schism which happened in the Church touching the Council of Basil: he went to Rome: he married Elinor, daughter to Edward king of Portugal: he was declared king of Lombardie, and two days after he was acknowledged emperor of the Romans, in the year 1442. Hearing that Germany was in great combustions, he made haste to return, but he soon pacified all. In the end, he died of a flux, being very old, having reigned three and fifty years. At this time, some writ, that the art of Printing was invented in Germany, and that the first Books were printed at Mentz, and in the year 1440, the city of Constantinople was taken by the Turk.  
140. MAXIMILIAN, son to Frederic, came unto the empire the sixt of February 1486. He was a great lover of learned men, and gave new life to all good arts and sciences in Germany, being almost dead: he had great wars both within and without the empire: he had bloody wars in Italy, wherein he was nothing fortunate, and in Sicily against Charles the eight the French king. He was also in war against the Swisses. Finally, he held the last imperial Diet in a great assembly of the princes of the empire, in the town of Ausbourg, whereas they did treat of a war against the Turk. For Selim had rooted out the Mamelus, and caused the last Sultan of Egypt to be ha●ged. He died of a flux the twelfth of januarie 1519, being nine and fifty years old, one month, and twenty days, having reigned two and thirty years, and eleven months.  
141. CHARLES the fift, king of Spain, was chosen Emperor by the Electors the eighteenth of june 1520. He took arms against the great king Francis his competitor in the Empire, and made a league with the Pope and king of England. He sent the duke of Bourbon into Italy, to succour Anthony de Leave who was besieged in Pavia; they gave battle unto the French, whereas king Francis and the chief commanders were taken prisoners. He married Elinor his sister to the French king, having paid two millions of gold for his ransom. He returned into Germany, and resolved to go and meet with the Turk at Vienna, and to give him battle, but the Turk fled away with great loss. The Protestant princes of Germany made war against him, whom he put to rout. He pacified Germany, made a league with julio the third, to drive the French out of Italy. He levied a mighty army in Germany, and came and besieged Metz, whereas he found that his good fortune began to fail him. His son having married Marie queen of England, he gave him the realm of Naples, and finding himself much tormented with the gout, he renounced all his Estates, and left the Empire to his brother Ferdinand in the year 1555. Being afterwards at brussels, he caused all the noblemen to take an oath to obey his son Philip, and so returned into Spain, where he died the one and twentieth of September 1558, being seven and fifty years old, eight months, and one and twenty days, having reigned eight and thirty years Emperor, and four and forty king of Spain.  
142. FERDINAND of Austria, brother to Charles the fift, was proclaimed king of Romans in the city of Cologne the fift of januarie 1531, and was crowned at Aix the eleventh of the same month, notwithstanding the protestation of nullity made by the Elector of Saxony being a Protestant. This controversiie continued some years, but it was ended. Now we must come to the election of Ferdinand to be Emperor. In the year 1558, the Electors assembled after their accustomed manner, and did choose Ferdinand Emperor, who sent Guzman his Ambassador to Rome to acquaint the Pope with his election. In the year 1559 he held an imperial Diet at Francfort, where they treated of peace and religion. In the year 1561 the Protestant princes of Germany assembled at Newremberg, whether came two Legates from Pope Pius to exhort and entreat them to assist at the Council of Trent, where the should have audience, presenting the Pope's letters unto the princes. In November 1562, the Emperor, Eelectors, and other princes assembled to choose a new king of Romans, whereas Maxmilian son to the Emperor Ferdinand, crowned not long before king of Bohemia, was chosen Emperor & crowned king with great pomp and solemnities, the five and twentieth of julie 1564. Ferdinand died at Vienne in Austria being sixty years old, nine months, and some days, having been Emperor alone seven years. He lies at Prague. He had fifteen children by Anne queen of Hongarie.  
143. Maxmilian the second, son to Ferdinand of Austria, was chosen Emperor soon after his father's death. He held his first Diet at Ausbourg, whereas they did treat especially of a war against the Turk, and the Vaivode of Transiluania, and what forces they should employ for the defence of the realm of Hongarie against the Turk an hereditary enemy to Christians. The Emperor demanded of the Estates of Germany forty thousand foot, and eight thousand horse to make head against the Turk, who was already entered into Hongarie. This year 1566, Soliman Emperor of the Turks came into Hongarie with an army of sixty thousand foot, and great numbers of horse; he first past the river of Danou, and then the Drove, upon the which he caused a bridge to be built to pass his army: this bridge was finished in fourteen days, being long, and two and forty fathom broad: it was made with exceeding great diligence, upon boats tied and chained together with admirable art. He besieged Segeth a little town in Hongarie, before the which he died of a bloody fliz. In the mean time Mahomet concealing the death of Soliman took the town by assault: the loss whereof was great as well for the death of the Earl of Serim, as of other brave soldiers which died in that place, and also for the loss of a hundred pieces of ordnance which were taken within that town. Again at the instance of the Emperor, the Archbishop of Mentz appointed an imperial diet at Fulden, to consult of the means how to maintain a good peace in Germany. Finally he sought to join the realm of Polonia unto his house, the better to fortify the Empire, and to resist the violent attempts of the Turk. He was married nine and twenty years, and had by his wife sixteen children. He died the twelfth of October 1576, having reigned twelve years.  
144. RODOLPHUS the second, eldest son to Maxmilian, came unto the Empire by the death of his father, and succeeded in the realms of Bohemia and Hongarie, being five and twenty years old. He hath had often wars in Hongarie against the Turk, with variable success of either side. In the end there was a truce made the twelfth of November 1605, betwixt the Emperor and the great Turk, the which continues unto this day. Since there have happened terrible changes in Transiluania and Hongarie, as well in the Estate, as in religion; so as in the year 1608, he was forced to quit unto the Archduke Mathias, his brother, the realm of Hongarie, and all the Archduchie of Austria without any reservation. He died without children the tenth of February 1612, having reigned five and thirty years, four months, being sixty years old.  
145. MATHIAS brother to Rodolphus succeeded him in the Empire, and was chosen king of Romans at Francfort, the thirteenth of june, in the year 1612. I will briefly set down the form and ceremonies of his election and coronation, and what passed most remarkable.  

Contents of the Golden Bull.  Because we have formerly made mention of that memorable edict called the Golden Bull, made by the Emperor Charles the fourth, in the year 1356, touching the election of the Emperor, it shall not be impertinent to set down the chief heads thereof, before we describe the manner of this last Emperor's election. The Emperor being dead, the Archbishop of Mentz doth presently advertise the other electors, and appoint a day, that within three months they or their ambassadors may meet at Francfort, with full authority to choose a new Emperor: and if Mentz neglect it, the rest of the electors may meet within the same time, none of them having above two hundred horse in his train when he enters into the town, whereof fifty may be armed. If any one doth not come, nor sand his ambassador, or goes away before the business be ended, he looseth his right of election for that time. The magistrate of Francfort shall be faithful to the electors; and during their assembly, they shall not suffer any to come into the town but the electors and their trains. Being all met, the ceremony shall be performed in S. Bartholomews' Church, where every one shall swear, the Archbishop of Mentz beginning first, that they shall not do any thing in that business for any promise or reward: after which they shall proceed unto the action, neither shall they departed from thence before the Emperor be created. And if the election be deferred above thirty days, they shall have no meat allowed them but bread and water. He that is chosen by the greater part shall have the place, as if it had been by their general consents. The Emperor being chosen after this manner, he shall first of all confirm all privileges belonging to the electors, and whatsoever shall belong unto their dignities, honours, liberties, and immunities. Besides it is decreed, That one shall give safe passage to another through his territories; what order they shall observe in their sit; how their voices are to be taken; what office every one shall hold whenas the Emperor doth any thing, or dines publicly. That during the vacancy of the empire, the Count Palatin shall have the chief command in Suevia, Franconia, and upon the river of Rhine; and the duke of Saxony in those places which use the Saxon law; That an Elector dying, his eldest son, or his brother, shall succeed him; If an Elector be not eighteen years old, his next ●insman shall supply the place of Elector, until he come of years; That the Electors shall meet every year touching the affairs of the Commonweal; That the seat of the election shall be at Francfort, and his first Inauguration at Aixla Chapelle, or Aquisgrane; That the Electors sons in their youth should learn the Italian, Latin, and Sclavon Tongues, to the end they may be able to confer with many nations. The Emperor shall ratify these laws prescribed by the Electors, that is, He shall defend the Christian Commonweal, with the Bishop & Church of Rome, whose Advocate he shallbe: he shall administer justice equally, & seek peace: he shall not only confirm the laws of the empire, especially that which is called the golden Bullaker, but also amplify them, with their advice, where need requires: he shall appoint a Senate or Council in the empire, chosen of Germane, who shall govern the Commonweal: he shall not diminish the rights, privileges, and dignities of the Princes and orders of the empire: That it shall be lawful for the Electors, when it is needful, to meet, and to confer of matters concerning the Commonweal: That he shall not any way hinder their assembly, nor take it in ill part: That he shall dissolve all leagues made by the commons or nobility, against the Princes, and forbidden them by a law: That he shall make no league or contract with strangers touching the affairs of the empire, without the consent of the seven Electors: he shall not cell nor pawn the revenues of the empire, nor in any sort diminish them; and whatsoever is held by other nations, and withdrawn from the empire, he shall recover upon the first occasion: provided always, that there be no fraud used to them that have either privilege or right: If either he, or any of his house, doth hold any thing unlawfully that belongs unto the empire, they shall restore it, being required by the Electors: he shall entertain peace and friendship with other kings, neither shall he undertake any war, either within or without the empire, for matters concerning the empire, without the consent of the States, especially of the Electors: he shall bring no strange soldiers into Germany, but with their consents: If the empire be invaded, he may then use any auxilia●ie forces: he shall not call a Diet, nor demand any tribute without the consent of the electors: he shall not hold any Assembly without the bounds of the empire: he shall appoint Germane, and no strangers, for the managing of public affairs, and they to be chosen out of the Nobility: That all letters shall be written in the Latin or Germane Tongue: That he shall not call any one into question out of the limits of the empire. And for that many things are done at Rome, contrary to the contracts made in former times with bishops, he shall labour with the Pope, that no wrong be done to the privileges and liberties of the empire: he shall confer with the Electors, how the Monopolies of Merchants, which are very pernicious for Germany, may be suppressed, and being once resolved, he shall put it in execution: he shall impose no toll nor tax without the consent of the Electors; neither shall he by his letters of Commendation, impair the revenues of those Electors which are upon the Rhine: If he have an action against any one, he shall try it by law, and not use any force to them that submit themselves to a lawful trial: he shall not proscribe any man without showing cause, but shall follow the course of law: he shall not give the lands of the empire that shall be voided to any, but apply them to the public Patrimony: If he shall get any other province, with the help of the Estates, he shall join it to the empire: If he shall recover any thing that belongs to the public with his own forces, he shall restore it to the Commonweal: he shall confirm whatsoever the Palatin or the duke of Saxony shall do, during the vacancy of the empire: he shall not practise any thing whereby the dignity of the empire may be made hereditary to his house, but shall leave it free unto the Electors to make their choice, according to the law of Charles the fourth, and the Pope's decree; and whatsoever shall be done contrary to the tenor hereof, shall be void.   

¶ Arrival of the Electors of the Sacred Empire in the Town of Francfort upon Main, deputed for this election.  
ON Sunday, the tenth of May 1612, arrived the most reverend father in God, and most noble prince and lord john Schweick●ard, Archbishop of Mentz, and the most reverend father in God, and most noble prince and lord Ferdinand Archbishop of Cologne, respectively high chancellors of the Empire for Germany and Italy, and Electors. In like manner also the most noble princes and lords john Count Palatin of the Rhine, duke of Bavaria, administrator and tutor of the elector Palatin, and the most noble prince and lord john George duke of Saxony, juliers, Cleves, and Berg, high marshal of the sacred Empire, and elector, at that time vicar's of the holy Empire, every one in his place, set down by the golden Bull.  
On Monday following, the eleventh of May, there arrived in the town of Francfort the most reverend father in God, and the most noble Prince and Lord Loth●ire, Archbishop of Treves, high Chancellor of the sacred empire in France, and in the realm of Arles, and Elector: as also, the same night the Ambassador of the most noble prince and lord john Sigismond, Marquis of Brandebourg, high Chamberlain of the sacred Empire, and Elector, duke of Prussia, juliers, Cleves, Berg, Stetin, etc.  
On Wednesday, being the thirteenth of May, arrived the most famous and mighty prince and lord Mathias the second, king of Hungary, and Bohemia, etc. Archduke of Austria, duke of Bourgondie, Stiria, Keruten, Crain, and Vurtemberg, Marquis of Moravaia, Earl of Habspurg, Tyrol, etc. with a great and gallant train, well appointed, in the which were a hundred Harquebuziers on horseback: All which Electors and Ambassadors were honourably entertained in the town of Francfort, by the horsemen which had been levied by the town, whereof the most part were Bourgesses.   

¶ The order and sitting of the Electors, Noblemen, and Ambassadors in the Council held in the Rommer, or Townhouse.  
THe Electors of the sacred Empire, of Mentz, Treves, Cologne, and Administrator of the Elector Palatin, the duke of Saxony, and the Ambassador of Brandebourg, being arrived (as hath been said) on the twelfth of May, they held a Council in the Rommer, or Townhouse, in a Hall appointed to that end. There was in this Hall seven seats covered with black velvet, and cushions of the same, set in order one by another near unto the window, in the which the said Electors did sit, with the Administrator and Ambassador, that is to say (to begin at the right hand) fi●st the Palatin, than the king of Bohemia in quality of Elector; and after his said majesty, the Elector of Mentz, than he of Treves, he of Cologne, he of Saxony, and last of all he of Brandebourg. Before them was a long Table, at the which did sit the chancellors and Secretaries of the said Electors, and upon seats round about were their chief Councillors.  
Among divers things that were propounded, whereof the point of the oath was one, the which (according to the tenor of the golden Bull) the Inhabitants of the town are bound to swear. Wherefore the Electors required it both of the Senate, citizens, and soul dyer's that were entertained by the town; and to that end they appointed Saturday, the sixteenth of May, with express commandment to avoid the town of all such as did not belong to some of the Electors: whereof the Magistrate gave notice to the Inhabitants the Friday before, by the sound of a drum, and a public Proclamation.   

¶ The form of the oath which the Magistrate, Senate, and Soldiers of Francfort, swear unto the Electors of the sacred Empire.  
ON Saturday following, which was the sixteenth of May, before dinner, the Electors, with Adrian Gans, Lord of Putlitz, Ambassador for the Elector of Brandebourg, being set in chairs of black velvet (after the former order) in a great Hall within the Town house, having a scaffold raised a foot high; the magistrate of Francfort fi●st of all took the said oath in the same form as it was propounded unto them by Francis Philip E●ust, Chancellor to the Elector of Mentz, and after this manner: That before all things the Magistrate of Francfort should with all fidelity promise and swear to the most reu●rend Prince and Lord john Schweickhard, Archbishop of Mentz, and Elector, etc. presenting himself in his own name, and in the name of other Lords electors, together with the administrator of the elector Pala●in, and the ambassador of the elector of Brandebourg, faithfully to maintain with all care and foresight all and every one of the electors, as well against the surprises one of another, in case there should happen any discontent amongst them; as also against all injuries which may be done unto them, or to any of those which are in their train at Francfort to the number of two hundred horse, upon pain of such punishments as are intimated by the golden Bull: and during the time of the election not to suffer any person of what estate or quality soever to enter into the town of Francfort, except their messengers and men of command: and in like manner to put all such out of the town without d●lay, as having gotten in during the entry of the princes or afterwards, upon such punishments as are mentioned in the golden Bull.  
Presently after this, the Senate promised and swore it publicly in the presence of many assistants, according to that form of oath which had been propounded by the elector of Mentz, Chancellor: which done the administrator of the elector Palatin, and the ambassador to the marquis of Brandebourg did arise from their seats to go unto the window which looks towards the market place, whereas they saw the inhabitants, who according to the advice which was given them the day before, were there assembled to take the same oath. And at the same instant the soldiers which had been drawn from all the quarters of the town into a place called the Ramhoff, and afterwards led in good order before the townehouse, having cast themselves into a round, took the same oath which was propounded unto them in view of the electors. The days following the electors at divers times, and in a manner daily returne● to their sessions and consultations, as they had done before, and in the s●me place. And in the end they appointed the third of june for the day of the election, the which was observed as followeth.  
On Tuesday the second of june before noon, the magistrate of the town of Francfort made a new proclamation, commanding all strangers that were not comprehended in the train of some one of the electors, or not bound by oath unto the Senate, presently to departed the town: and after noon all the town gates were shut up.   

¶ Ceremonies observed in the royal election which was made in S. Bartholomews' Church: the elector all ornaments: the order and rank which the electors hold going to the said Church, and the oath which they take at the altar before they enter into the conclave of the election.  
ON Wednesday the third of june 1612, the Royal election was made: and first of all the inhabitants were armed, and drawn into divers parts of the t●wne, especially they that were placed in two ranks from the Rommer unto S. Bartholomews' Church were gallantly appointed. Then did the Magistrate cause a grea● bell to be ru●g half an hour, the which they call the alarm bell. After seven of the clock the electors came unto the town house one horseback in great pomp, where having sta●ed ●bout half an hour to put on their electoral robes in divers chambers, they came all forth into the great hall of the Council. About eight of the clock they went to horseback, and marched in the order that follows towards S. Bartholomews' Church. First there marched a great number of Councillors, Noblemen, and others belonging to the Electors: then followed on horseback john Philip of Hohenecke, and Melchior signior or lord of Eltz, marshals to the Electors of Mentz and Treves, either of them carrying in his hand a sword in a golden scabbard: after them followed the most reverend fath●rs in God and princes john Schweickbard Archbishop of Mentz, and Lothaire Archbishop of Treves, attired in their electoral robes, which were of scarlet furred, and garnished without with white ermines, and a mitre of the same colour furred: after those did ride the marshals of the Archbishop of Cologne, and of the realm of Bohemia; he of Cologne carrying in his hand a sword with a golden scabbard; and the marshal of Bohemia another in a scabbard of crimson velvet: immediately after him followed the most reverend, and most generous prince and lord Ferdinand Archbishop of Cologne on the right hand, and his royal majesty as king of Bohemia, and in quality of elector on the left, wearing the like ornaments and bonnets unto the two former electors, but his royal majesty wore upon his cap the crown of Bohemia: after him marched Pleickhard of Helmstet marshal of the Palatinat, and Maxmilian of Pappenheim marshal of the sacred Empire, either of them carrying in his hand a sword in a golden scabbard, and after followed on horseback the most illustrious princes and lords, john Palatin of the Rhin, administrator to the elector Palatin, on the right hand; john George duke of Saxony, juliers, Cleves, and Berg etc. elector, in the midst; and Adam Gans signior of Putlitz, as ambassador to the elector of Brandebourg, on the left hand; of the which the two electors of the Palatinat, and Saxony had also robes of crimson velvet furred, and garnished without with Ermines, and bonnets like unto the electors of the clergy: but the ambassador of Brandebourg was attired in black after an ordinary manner, neither was there any sword carried before him, for that the elector of Brandebourg was not there present in person. And in this order having passed betwixt the two ranks of Burghers which were well appointed, and being come to S. Bartholmews, which is a great Church built in form of a cross, and beautified with a goodly high tower towards the North, they alighted, and entered into the temple, where at their arrival the electors trumpets (whereof there were a good number) being placed upon a scaffold made to that purpose, began altogether to sound, and the drums under them to beaten; the which they continued until that the electors were all entered into the quire, which was richly hung with goodly tapistry of gold and silk, and the electors seats covered with black velvet, and cushions of the same, except the king of Bohemia's, which was very richly furnished with cloth of gold. Every one of the electors having taken the seat which was prepared for him, that is to say, the electors of Mentz, Bohemia, and of the Palatinat, on the right hand of the quire. In the midst (whereas the chanter is accustomed to sit) he of Treves, and on the left hand, he of Cologne, and Saxony, with the ambassador of the elector of Brandebourg. Some of their chief Councillors and of the Clergy being come in, the marshal of Pappenheim did shut the door. Soon● after they began to play on the organs, and to sing Veni sancte spiritus, which the musicians ended being in a gallery over the quire.  
Then the Suffragan of Mentz began to say mass; but the Palatin, the duke of Saxony, and the ambassador of Brandebourg (who have not been accustomed to assist at those ceremonies) retired themselves with their people into the conclave of the election, which joins unto the quire upon the right hand, where they stayed until the ma●le was ended, and then they returned to their places. Having s●ng, and ended the hymn of Veni sancte spiritus, the electors with the ambassador of Brandebourg came before the altar, whether every one of them was led by his marshal, carrying a sword in the scabbard, except the aforesaid ambassador of Brandebourg; and there by virtue of the Golden Bull, they took the oath after this manner: Every one of them ascended to the highest step of the altar, where turning towards the assistants, the elector of Mentz being betwixt two, put them in mind of the causes of their assembly, and that it was to take the oath set down by the Bull, the which was to be done before the election. Whereupon he himself performed it f●●st in the hands of the elector of Treves; then having required it, and read it unto the other electors, after the same manner they did all swear, the ecclesiastics laying their hands upon their breasts, and the seculars upon the Gospel. The elector of Mentz required also that two notaries should set it down in writing and take an act, and that they should make one or more instruments: whereupon there were some that presented themselves, and all the nobility with the other assistants were required to be witnesses.  
The oath being taken, the electors returned to their seats, after which (having ended the Anthem of Veni Sancte spiritus, with other collects which depend thereon) they entered into the imperial Chapel, or conclave of the election, which place is narrow and long, joining to the quire towards the South, having an altar adorned with rich tapistry, wrought with gold and silk: and there they began to proceed to the election of a king of Romans, and future Emperor. They had also prepared for the young prince Palatin a place hung with cloth of gold, and in like manner for the queen, and the ladies of her train, upon the top of the vault of the Temple, right against the quire at the middle window, from whence they might commodiously see what was done both within and without the quire.  
The Electors having been some time together in the cappel or Conclave of the election, having in the mean time often called in their chief Councillors and Notaries, and sent them out again: in the end, having agreed upon the election, and the Proclamation being made in the Chapel of the election, they came forth, all having continued about half an hour: first of all there came forth the Elector of Mentz, than he of Cologne and of Treves, who led betwixt them his royal majesty of Hungary and Bohemia, as chosen king of the Romans; then followed the Palatin, Saxony, and Brandebourg: and then the Trumpets and Clairons began to found, and the drums to beaten, which made the Church to echo again; and all the Bells did ring, and the great ordnance of the town was shot off in sign of joy. In the mean time, his Majesty was led towards the high Altar in the Choir, where he did kneel down upon the highest step, but the Electors stood of either side of him: then they began to sing, Adiutorium nostrum in nomine Domini; and the Psalm, In virtute tua laetabitur Rex, etc. with other▪ Prayers fit for the action, and in favour of the king newly chosen: which being ended, the Electors did set the king upon the Altar, and they did sing, Te Deum laudamus, from one end unto the other, in three kinds of music, upon the Organs, with voices, and lastly, by the Kings and Electors Trumpets and Clairons.   

¶ A Theatre or Scaffold erected before the Choir, for the King of Romans newly chosen, and for the Seven Electors.  
THis done, they opened a door upon the right hand of the Choir, and raised his royal Majesty above the Altar, and the Electors, with the Ambassador of Brandebourg, conducted him towards a Theatre or Scaffold, built without before the Choir, covered of all sides with rich Tapestry, upon which Theatre there were also seven Chairs covered with black velvet for the Electors: besides the which, there was one raised a degree higher than the rest and covered with cloth of gold, upon the which the king newly chosen did sit: but the Electors ●ate every man in his rank, that is, the Elector of Mentz, and the Administrator Palatin on the right hand; the Elector of Cologne he of Saxony, and the Ambassador, on the left; and Treves in the midst: the Administrator h●ld in his hand the Apple, or Golden Ball of the empire, Saxony the Sword, and the Ambassador of Brandebourg the Sceptre. Whilst the Electors took their places, the Trumpets did sound, and drums did beaten, which done, a Proclamation was made by the reverend George Foicderic G●e●ffencloe de B●lraeht, great Provost of Mentz and Worms, in a manner in these words:   

¶ Proclamation and publication of the Election.  
THat whereas by the death of the most illustrious and most mighty prince and lord Rodulphus the second, Emperor of the Romans, of most happy memory, the sacred empire was void; the most reverend, most noble, and generous princes and lords the Electors, and Ambassador there present, had (as it was convenient, and according to the tenor of the Imperial laws, made to that end) mutually agreed of the election & choice of another head, to the honour and glory of the Almighty, to the profit and peace of the empire, and to the increase of Christianity: and that they did then name and declare the most illustrious and most mighty prince and lord Mathias the second, King of Hungary and Bohemia, etc. Archduke of Austria, our most loving lord, and did choose him, in the name of the Almighty, for King of Romans, and future Emperor. This mutual election was published in the behalf of the Electors, and their deputies, to the end that every man might do the honour and duty which he aught unto his royal Majesty newly elected.  
After this publication, the trumpets and drums began to sound for joy, and in the mean time the Electors, with his royal Majesty, rose from their chairs, and went down the scaffold; first of all he of Treves, than the three secular Electors, with the Ambassador of Brandebourg altogether, that is, the Palatin with the Ball of the empire, upon the right hand, Saxony with the sword in the midst, and Brandebourg with the sceptre upon the left, his royal Majesty followed, and a little distance off, Mentz upon the right hand, and Cologne on the left. Thus they went out of the Church, and took horse before the great door, conducting his Majesty in the former order unto his palace, which they call the great Braunfels. Before them there marched first of all his majesties officers, than they of the Elector of Saxony, and after them, all the officers of the other Electors, as also, his majesties drums and trumpets, who filled the streets with their noise: Lastly, after the Electors chief Councillors, followed the Electors themselves, with his Majesty, in order as hath been said. Thus, by the grace of God, this royal election was happily performed, and Mathias the second, King of Hungary and Bohemia, was by a mutual consent of the Electors, and the happy applause of all men, chosen for King of Romans, and head of the sacred empire.  
Although the election were finished as hath been set down, yet the Electors continued their Assemblies every morning in the Townhouse, there to consult and to resolve upon matters of importance concerning the empire: the rest of the time was spent in mutual embracings, feasts, and banquets, which were often made, and very sumptuous with great preparation, as well by the Prince's Electors, as by other Princes, Earls, and Noblemen, who presently after the election came flocking into the town. After these banquets they spent the time in all noble exercises, as running at the ring, and managing of horses, until the time of the Emperor's coronation, for the which they made great preparation, and it was happily performed on Sunday the fourteenth of june. In the mean time, on Thursday, the eleventh of june, being Corpus Christi day, they made a Procession from S. Bartholomews' Church unto the Convent of the preaching Friars, where his Majesty, with the Ecclesiastical Electors, and many others of high and low degree, assisted in great numbers.      


OF THE REALM OF HONGARIE.  

The Contents.  
1. WHat Provinces and Countries Are contained under Hongarie, and from whence it takes the name. 2. The bounds of this realm, and climate. 3. Division of Hongarie into two parts, and whence comes the name of Buda, the chief town of the realm, the goodly, and strong situation thereof. 4. Description of other chief● towns, amongst the which is Stridon where S. Jerome was borne, and jemarin commonly called Rab. 5. Of the wheat of Hongarie changing every third year to a better kind. Of the Sulphurous wines of a strong sent, and making men suddenly drunk. 6. Description of rivers, lakes, and fountains of hot physical waters, and the most famous mountains of the country. 7. Of the mineral salt of Maromarusia, and the miraculous waters turning wood into stone: other waters which boiling transform their element into stone: others which run in Winter, and freeze in Summer, and others which mollify iron like dirt. 8. Of the coppermines of Meusole: and of the gulf in the county of Zoile, which hath such a deadly sent as it kills birds that fly over it. 9 Hongarie inhabited at divers times by divers barbarous Nations, as Pannoniens, Goths, Huns, and Scythians. 10. Of the disposition of the nine Circles which in old time did environ the country, and the watchword which was given from one Circle unto another. 11. Hongarians in old time savage, seditious, and revenge full; at this day civil, and given to the exercises of arms. 12. Their manner of living, and apparel: of their marriages and funerals. Hongarians accustomed to wear long moustaches and shaven beards. 13. Their wealth consisting in cattle, and abundance of victuals, and of the small forces of this realm. 14. Of two chief magistrates of Hongarie, whereof the Palatin is the first; and of the kings other officers. 15. Of the combat which they grant in causes that are hard to decide. 16. Of successions, whereof the males only are capable. 17. Diversity of sects of religion which reign in Hongarie. 18. Of the number of Archbishops and Bishops which are in this Estate. 19 A Catalogue of the kings of Hongarie, their reign, and death. 20. Relation of the troubles which happened in the year 1605, for matters of religion, and for the charges and dignities of arms. 21. Articles of the peace made for Hongarie, with Botscay in September 1606. 22. Conference at Debrita betwixt the Ambassadors and Deputies of the Emperor and Archbishop Mathias: and of that which was concluded for the deciding of their controversies. 23. Ceremonies observed in Hongarie at the reception and coronation of king Mathias.   

Sing that this Estate hath been always divided from the Empire, it is not impertinent to make a particular discourse thereof, to the end we may know the country which king Mathias had under his power, being but king of Hongarie. It doth therefore contain at this day all base Pannonia, called the second Proconsularie, all the country of the jazygiens' Metanastes, which Ptolemy contains betwixt the rivers of Danou and Tibisce, and the mountains of Sarmatia, and it doth also embrace that part of Dacia, which they call Transiluania, the which notwithstanding, hath his Vayvodes, and obeys not this new prince. It hath taken this name from the Huns or Hongres, a people of Scythia which have dwelled there, and which came out of juhre, or jugre, a country of Scythia lying upon the northwest, the which is now tributary to the duke of Muscovia.  
This realm hath for bounds upon the South, the river of Save, which divides it from Croatia and Servia, and they are in that part of Sclavonia which looks toward the adriatic sea▪ upon the North Polonia and Russia, divided by the mountain of Catpatia: upon the West Austria, sometimes the chief poruince of high Hongarie, with Moravia and Stiria: and upon the East the river of Tibisce, called at this day Tisce, or Patisce. But if we will comprehend Transiluania in this realm, it shall have for limit upon the East, the two Valachies, that is to say, the Sousaspina and Moldavia, divided by the river of Alute, called at this day Oli by the Hongarians, and Ali by the Germane.  
Transiluania (which is comprehended by some within the realm of Hongarie) is called by the Saxons Sevenburgen, or septem Castra, for that they had built seven Castles there. It is environed round about with high hills and woods, as with walls, so as the passages into it are very difficult, by certain rivers and brooks, among which there is the river of Alutha, where there is a strong Castle built, called Roteth, to defend the passage; and upon the river of Mariscus is another fort called Brosch. The chief towns are Hermanstade, Corona or Cronstat, Schlesbourg, Medowiza, Nosa, Clausenbourg, Millenbach, Weissenbourg: but the chief town is Cibinium or Hermanstade, seated in a moorish place, so as the access unto it is very difficult. The country is populus, and the hills are rich in gold mines; neither do they want silver, copper, iron, nor fault. They have store of wine, but not so good as Hongarie, and plenty of corn and cattle. It breeds wild horses which are exceeding swift, whose manes hung down to the ground. There be also wild bulls, and ure oxen as they call them. Towards the North there is a province whose people are called Siculi, they are very warlike, and there is no difference of degrees among them, but they do all hold themselves equal, being subject to no prince. They have three places which they call seats, that is, Kisdy, Orbay, and Scepsy, in these places they meet if there be any thing that concerns the commonweal, where they speak the Hongarian tongue.  
They place this realm in the midst of the sixt and seventh climates, so as it comprehends the sixteenth and seventeenth parallels, and the longest day in Summer is above fifteen hours and a half unto sixteen.  
Hongarie is divided into two parts, whereof the one is called, on this side the river of Danou, and the other beyond it, and the river of Tisefeu runs through the last. The chief city of the realm is Buda, the which (as they say) carries the name of Attilas' brother, or else they draw it from the Budins a people of Scythia, of whom Heroditus makes mention: Appian, Irenicus, and Althamera take it for Curte mentioned by Ptolemy, others for Aquincum, whereof the same author speaks, and Autonin: the vulgar people call it Offen. If we will consider the situation of this town, which is partly hilly, and well fortified, we shall found that there is not any more pleasant nor stronger in all Hongarie It was taken by Soliman Emperor of the Turks, the twentieth of August 1526. The other towns are Bosonia, commonly called Preszbourg, a good town, whereas the river of Lext dividing high Hongarie from the lower, falls into the river of Danou: this town is ancient, and hath a pleasant situation, with a good air, and exceeds many towns in Hongarie in beauty; in the suburbs upon the top of a high mountain there is a cas●●● which is exceeding strong. We see also in Hongarie, Belgrada, called by the ancients Taurunum, vulgarly Albagreque, and in the Germane tongue Grieches Weissenbourg, the which was taken by Soliman in the year of Grace 1520. Next along the river of Danou stands-Singidum taken also by the Turk. In the midst of the way betwixt the●● two towns is the valley of Maxons, whereas john Huniades won a famous victory of Mahomet Emperor of the Turks, in the year 1456. Going up the river th●r● are man● places which the Turks have taken from the Christians, as the town of V●●pe in th● year 1543, that of Quinque Esglises upon the river of Drove t●ken the same y●are. 〈◊〉 town of Zigeth taken in the year 1566. There is also in this realm the town of ●●●gonia upon the river of Danou, commonly called Gran, sometimes an Archbishopric but now made a prey to the Turks. Albaregale, otherwise called Stulw●y●●nbourg, a place appointed for the interment and coronation of the kings of Hongarie, and it was taken by the Turk, in the year of our Salvation 1543. Near unto the ●ame country is Stridon, whereas S. Jerome was borne, and in like manner the strong town of Comora, which the Turks have so often attempted in vain, standing in an Island of the ●ame name. There is also javerin, commonly called Rab, a town seated upon the river of Danou, the which seems impregnable, and yet was first taken by the Turk, and afterwards recovered by the industry of Monsieur de Vaubecourt, a French gentlemen. I pass over in silence the other towns, as of small note. Near unto javerin, upon the banks of the river of Danow, towards the East, are to be seen some remainders of marks of Traian's bridge, built upon that river in Moesia, an admirable and memorable work, consisting of twenty Arches, of square stone, the which were one hundred and fifty foot high, besides the foundation, and sixty foot broad, and they are seventy foot one from another. It is a thing to be admired by what means, force, or art, they could build these several pillars in this deep and violent stream, and lay the foundations of so great a burden, the bottom of the river being very muddy, and there being no means to turn the course of the water. The Arches about the water were ruined by the commandment of Adrian the Emperor, but the Piles stand still, for a testimony to posterity; that there was nothing impossible to the power and wealth of the Roman empire.  

¶ The Quality.  
THe realm of Hongarie is by nature provided for of all things, for that there grows all sorts of grain, and divers first-fruits in abundance, for the soil is so fertile, as the wheat changeth every third year to a better kind, and there are in this country certain kinds of wheat which differs from ours, and the soil brings ●orth corn in a manner without tillage. It doth also yield divers sorts of wines which are very wholesome, and so excellent, as some of them yield nothing to them of Candie. That which grows near to the town of Sirmia is held the best, but that which grows in the county of Pissill, ●ath a troublesome taste, and doth soon distemper, by reason of the hot and sulphuric waters. The country abounds so in oxen and sheep as it is admirable. There is also great store of Hares, fallow Deer, Goats, Stags, Wildboares, Wolves, beats, and such like beasts. In like manner, there are divers sorts of birds, especially of Gos●aukeses, Partridges, and Pheasants. Moreover, there are many veins of gold, silver, copper, steel, and iron: and they not only found gold in mines, but also in the sand of rivers. There is also some little store of tin and lead.  
Finally, there is scarce any country that hath more and greater, rivers than Hongarie; nor more navigable or better replenished with fish. There are the rivers of Danou, (sometimes called Ister) Save, Drove, and Ti●●e, whereof the three first are common to some other provinces, but Tisefeu belongs only u●to Hongarie; for it riseth in M●r●musia; under the high tops of the mountains of Carpathia, and it abounds more in fish than all the other rivers of Hongarie; for there they found great store of Sturgeons, Pikes, (which sometimes have livers half an ●ll long), Carp, and other fish. There are also other ●isterss, besides the abovenamed, in which th●re are great store of Trout, Salmon, Perches, Lampreys, Barbels, and other fish and they do also found gold among the sand. 〈◊〉 There are great mountaine●, whereof the most famous is that of Z●rchual, called in old time by the Grecians Carpathia, by reason of the fruit and benefit of the mines: the second is that of Matran near unto Agria, the which is covered with vines: and the third and greatest of all is Erdell.  
I● like manner there are many lakes in Hongarie, whereof the chi●●e is that of Bolaton, called by the Germane Plathe, the which hath forty Italian miles in length, and eight Hongarian leagues in breath. This country abounds in mineral ●alt at M●●omarusia, and other places, the which they cut like unto a stone: and there is a ●●untaine whose water falling upon the ground grows hard, and turns into a stone. There ar● also baths and physical waters, especially about Buda. There are hot waters, whose fish being taken forth and put into cold, dies presently. The waters of the county of Liptove near unto the village of S. john, are good against scabs. In the territory of Zepus there are waters whereas wood is turned into stone: and near unto S. Martin's Church, in the same place, there is a water which seems to boil, the which turns into stone, both above and under the ground, and this stone is almost like unto the Pumeise. Near unto the same place, there are waters which flow in winter, and freeze in summer, so as they are accustomed to go thither to seek for ice.  
In the county of Zolie, there is a gulf or breach in the ground, which casts forth such a deadly stink, as it kills the birds that fly over it. Near unto the town of Smolnice in the mountains, there is a certain water which falls into ditches whereas iron in a short time grows as soft as dirt, and if they melt it, makes very good copper. Near unto the town of Bistrick, called in the Germane tongue Mensole, there are very rich mines of brass, the which they now call Royal, out of the which comes a certain green water, whereof they make jolder for gold.   

¶ The Manner of the Ancients.  
HOngarie was for a long time a retreat for many strange nations: for it was first inhabited by the Panonians and Peonians, then upon the declining of the Roman empire, by the Goths, who were expelled by the Hun●. The Lombard's followed them, and held it two and forty years: then the Huns succeeded them under their king Attila, who enriched this country with the spoils of other nations. But Charlemagne vanquished them, and took from them a great treasure which they had gathered together, at Buda. Lastly, in the year of Grace 900, in the time of the Emperor Arnold, the Hongres coming out of Scythia, ●el upon this country, who joining with the remainders of the Huns, spoiled all Germany; but in the end, they were somewhat suppressed by a defeat which was given them by the Emperor Otho, near unto Ausbourg, in the year of our Redemption 954.  
In old time, the inhabitants of this country had environed it about with nine circles, which the Germane call Hagues, whereof every one was so made of beech, oak, or fir, as it contained twenty foot in breadth, and as much in height. All the places thus environed were filled with chalk that was very glutinous, or with very hard stones, and the top of the rampires were covered with great flags of earth full of grass, and at the corners of these rampires they had planted little trees, which being dispersed here and there, did represent trees and grass which grew all along those forts. It was twenty german leagues from one circle unto another; and within them were boroughs, villages, and hamlets, disposed in such sort, as th●y might hear the voice of a man from the one unto the other. The gates were low and narrow, and set out of the way, to the end they might with more ease and more covertly go ●orth to rob and spoil. And one circle gave notice unto another of what happened, or what they intended, by the sound of trumpets.  
Procopi●s doth distinguish the Huns, calling some White, and the others Nomads: he speaks of the white after this manner, The Huns Euthalites do not lead a pastoral life, like unto the other Huns, but keep themselves very neatly, and are the fairest among the Huns. These never made any roads into the Romans territories, and are not of a savage aspect like unto the rest. They have a king which commands them: and he is most happy among them that hath most friends, who are most commonly at his table, and are partakers of his cre●●●, p●ise, and fortune. The P●onians had not any towns, as Appi●n Alexand●i●●● writes, but lived in hamlets according to their families; neither did they use any ordinary course of judgement, ●●●re being not any prince that did command o● rule over them.  
The inhabitants of Hongarie were in old time h●ld to be savage, stirring, soditious, 〈◊〉, covetous, desirous of revenge, and no ●●●●ndss to strangers.   

¶ The Manners at this day.  
〈◊〉 Hongarians at this day are of a mild disposition, and reasonably civil. They love 〈◊〉, and will not do any thing unless they practise arms: neither are they much 〈…〉 arts and trads, nor to traffic, but they are exceeding strong. Their manners 〈◊〉 ar●●rally rude; and they are more disposed to war than peace. They contemn ease 〈◊〉 pleasure, and live not in towns but as strangers, with a design to be soon go. 〈◊〉 men lodge their delights in their gardens and baths, and care not for their buildings but to be at large: the rest live in cabins and little lodgings ill made: They sleep 〈◊〉 any bed until they be married, but lie upon the ground, or upon hay, an ordinary 〈◊〉 to most of the neighbour Nations.  
Their garments are long and stately. They give not any dowry unto women when 〈◊〉 marry but a suit of new clothes. The women's garments are strait and covers them 〈◊〉 the neck. They wear upon their gowns long cloaks, and they cover their heads ●●th veils of silk or linen cloth, and hide all but their eyes and nose; and most of them ●●are pearls and precious stones. Moreover both men and women wear buskins up to 〈◊〉 calf of the leg. They mourn a whole year for their kinsfolks and friends 〈◊〉 and sometimes two years. They shave their beards, and leave nothing but the movables, the which are sometimes very long. They have a particular language which approacheth near unto the Bohemians: and they have also a particular form of letters; y●t they most commonly use the Roman characters. They are u●ry, proud and haughty, 〈◊〉 in war, and better soldiers on horseback than on foot. They are very obedient to ●●●●●ce and his lieutenants.   

¶ The Riches, and Forces.  
NOtwithstanding that Hongarie sends into Italy and Germany, great store of oxen 〈◊〉 sheep, whereof the number is almost incredible; and that some report that solve one hath a hundred beasts in his pasture, and never sees them until they be tripled; 〈◊〉 they hold that this province is able to feed all Europe with flesh: and notwitstan●●●● that there is great store of silver, copper, iron, and steel, yea and of gold, and that ●●●●●ds much vitriall into divers parts of the world, the which is well sold; yet can we 〈◊〉 say that this realm is very rich, and that it yields sufficient to entertain itself with 〈◊〉 that grow there, the which are her principal wealth. There is nothing that hath 〈◊〉 nor subsist more, or hath maintained her armies, than the abundance of victuals which are found there. It is true that since the Turks become masters of a great part of 〈◊〉 country, the land is not so well manured, and doth not yield so plentifully as it hath 〈◊〉 former times: yet that which the Christians hold is well entertained, and able to 〈◊〉 many people, although that the wars which have continued long have much unpeopled it. But the new king Mathias being now come unto the Empire, may well preserve that which remains in Hongarie, if during this calm he provide for all occurrents of war. It is very probable that if the Turks should fall upon this country, it would hardly withstand them without the forces of the Empire: for all the power of this realm is not able to make head against the Ottomans, their riches and means being small, and not able to make any great levies, for that the country is not rich of itself, and they want seaports and traffic, whereby countries have means to get money, and to grow rich, and moreover the Turks hold the best part. It is true that the Hongarians are good soul●●erss, but the Turks also are not to be contemned, who exceed them in number, and are not inferior unto them in valour.   

¶ The Government.  
He king of Hongarie governs his realm by the means of two magistrates, whereof the upper part of Hongarie is divided into there Magistrates. The first governs the realm in the king's name. They accounted in this rank the Palatin of the realm, who is next unto the king, and judgeth the king himself if he be accused: he is chosen by them of the country, and his office is not hereditary. There is also the judge of the court, who is one of the ordinary judges of the realm. Then the perpetual Chancellor, which is the Archbishop of Strigonia, primate of the realm, who is called the chief Secretary: his charge is to a●●oint the king when he is chosen, and to seal all patents and privileges. There is also the master of the court, who must of necessity follow the king, and is his geerest Councillor. Moreover the master of the royal Tavernies, as they call him, wh● hath charge of mines and saltpits, and doth judge of causes which concern the king's revenues in towns, boroughs, and castles.  
The second magistrate is appointed for matters of justice, and this magistrate comprehends three officers of very great authority, that is, the Vice Palatin of the realm, the Personal judge of the presence, who holds the king's place in judgements, and is above all other judges, and the Vice judge of the court. The lesser officers are those, who are rather executioners of judgement, than magistrates, that is to say, two Protonotaries of the personal judge, one of the Vice Palatin, and one of the Vice judge of the court. All these are called masters, and have joined unto them the Archbishop of Strigonias' secretary, who is called fiscal, twelve Assistants, and certain sworn notaries.  
Besides all these, there are the king's officers, as the Treasurer, the high Chamberlain, and other Chamberlains, the lord Steward of the king's house, and other masters of the household, the chief Cupbearer, gentlemen servants, Ushers, and many other inferior Officers.  
Since that the house of Austria came to possess this crown of Hongarie, they have made their government more absolute, and the people more servile, having lost much of their former liberty: for in the ancient government, whenas their kings meant to undertake a war, to conclude a peace, or to altar any thing in the government of the commonweal; their manner was to assemble the Barons, Bishops, and Gentlemen at a certain place, where by the consent of the greater part their kings had power to confirm, abrogat, or to make laws, to denounce war, conclude peace, and to charge their lands with impositions according to their necessities: which assembly is still in use, but the freedom thereof is much perverted; these being nothing at this day propounded to the assembly by the new governors, but a contribution of money to resist the Turk when he theatens any invasion; to which demand, the Estates give their resolution at a certain day.  
They judge according to the written law, but they have another kind of deciding of controversies which happen amongst them: for if the matter be difficult to end, they ordain that it shall be tried by combat betwixt the parties, the which is performed in the presence of the king, or of his lieutenant: the victory is adjudged to the stronger, and he is held victorious that doth so amaze his enemy at his first approach, as he retires coming into the field, or being entered is so pursued, as he is forced to abandon the place that is limited unto them. They that fight on horseback charge fi●st with their lances, and then they fall to the sword; and as for those that fight on foot, they have their privy parts covered, and all the rest of their body naked.  
Only the males inherit in Hongarie, and if they die without sons, the daughters do not succeed but the king, to whom the lands of the deceased fall by escheat.   

¶ The Religion.  
BEsides the sect of Ma●omet, which is much dispersed in this realm by reason of those places which the Turks hold, it is most certain that there are many opinions and heresies: for not only there are those opinions which are in Germany, but also the heresy of Arri●● hath got footing there, and Atheism hath also crept in. It is a thing worthy of consideration, that the towns subject unto the Turk are little infected with heresy, & contrariwise, those which the Christians hold are full: the reason is, for that the T●rke doth not easily endure that they should altar any thing in his Estates, how little so●●er, neither dare heretics be so insolent among those Barbarians, as among Christians ●or fear of being impaled.  
●●●ngarie hath two Archbishoprics, and seventeen Bishoprics: The Archbishop●●●●re, Strigonia, and Colasse, the first hath under it six Bishoprics, and the last eight; 〈◊〉 rest acknowledge the Archbishop of Spalatre. The Bishoprics subject to Strigonia 〈◊〉, Agria, where there are no Turks, but the town and diocese are full of opinions: 〈◊〉 of javerin (a third part of the diocese is under the Turk,) Nitrie, whereas the Bishop and Chapter remains, having little of the diocese free: that of Quinque Ecclesia, ●●●●hat of Vaccia (both wholly subject to the Turk,) that of Vesperin, which was lost 〈◊〉 the taking of the town; for as for the diocese it was before in the Turks hands. The metropolitan, which is Strigonia, was taken, with most part of the diocese, in the year 〈◊〉 and the Chapter retired to Tirnavia, where it remains; and the Church is gover●●● by an Administrator, which the Church hath appointed. The archbishopric of molasse is wholly under the Turk, with all the Bishoprics that are subject unto it, ex●●pt that of Transiluania (which is a thing out of our discourse) and that of Zagabria, ●●ose Bishop (which lives within the towns) hath a thousand florins, or one hundred ●●●ndss starling of yearly rents; but the diocese is under the Turk. The Archbishop 〈◊〉 Spalatre hath three Bishoprics under him, that is to say, that of Segne, inhabited by t●e Vsocques, with eight or ten Priests at the most; that of Mosdruch, whereof part ●●●der the Turk, and part under the Earl of Sdrin; and that of Ticin, wholly under the Tu●ke. Cardinal George Drascovit, to help his country, obtained of the Emperor Ra●●●●s a part of the revenues of the Provostship of Turrochia, for the institution of a Se●●●● of Hongarian youth in the town of Vienna, whereas they do willingly embrace 〈◊〉 ●●ristian doctrine, and the ceremonies of the Church,   

¶ The Kings of Hongarie.  
THe first Christian king of Hongarie was Geyza, who having caused himself to be christened, would have the Christian faith protest throughout his realm, and was therein assisted by the Germane.  
stephen his son, who was put in the number of Saints, was king of Hongarie, in the 〈◊〉 of Grace 997: He married the sister of the Emperor S. Henry, called Gizele, and 〈◊〉 among other children S. Emery, who died young before his father.  
〈◊〉, nephew to Stephen by his sister, succeeded him, and made himself 〈◊〉 his lose life. He was expelled the realm by the Hongarians, who advanced in his place the brother in law of S. Stephen.  
Al●●, who governed the realm more insolently than Peter, and made himself o● ious by hi● pride. He was slain in war the third year of his reign, and afterwards Peter was repealed, who governed more like a Tyrant than a King, using great cruelty against Priests, profaning the Churches, and spoiling them. He was in the end taken, and his ●●ess put out, the second year after his restoration to the realm, and he died the same 〈◊〉.  
Andrew, cousin to S. Stephen, was made king in the year 1007. He restored the Christian religion in Hongarie, and re-edified the Churches which had been ruined: t●en seeing himself old, he appointed his son Solomon to be king.  
●●la, brother to Andrew, made war against him, and won a victory, after whose ●●ath he went to Albaregale, where he caused himself to be crowned. This Bela had a 〈◊〉 in the third year of his reign, and bruised all his body, whereof he died soon after, 〈◊〉 the realm to Solomon his nephew.  
Sal●mon, after the death of Bela, was restored to the realm in the year 1063, by the 〈◊〉 of He●rie the fourth, who had given him his si●ter in marriage.  
〈◊〉 expelled Sal●mon out of the realm, and was proclaimed King at Albaregale: ●●●●●wards, being willing to resign the realm to Solomon, he died the third year of his ra●g●e, and then the Hongarians would not accept of Solomon, who died in an Hermitage whither he had retired himself, having attempted many means to recover his realm.  
●●dissaus, a good; holy, and just man, and who contained himself in perpetual chastity, was chosen King by a general consent, notwithstanding that he refused it: After many victori●● he died, in the year of Grace 1095, and of his reign the nineteenth, having appointed palmo his younger son to succeed him in the realm.  
Al●●, did qui● the realm to Coloman his elder brother; but afterwards these brethren fell to de●ate, and the Hongarians being loath to endure an intestine war betwixt the brethren, ordained that they should enter combat, and that the Victor should be King. ●●●●nan re●●sed the combat; for that he was crook backed, lame, and pourblind. In the end, he put out the eyes of Alme, and of his nephew, and would have gelt Bela his nephew, to the end he might have no issue. But the executioner fearing the wrath of God, and 〈◊〉 the realm should remain without heirs, pulled away the stones of a little d●gge, and carrying them unto him, satisfied him with this fraud. Coloman died of a troublesome disease, in the year 1114, and of his reign the one and twentieth.  
Stephen his son was king, not being yet eight years old, and in the mean time another governed the realm in his name. He reigned eighteen years; and for that he had no children; he adopted his cousin-german Bela, the son of Alme, and declared him King by his testament.  
Bela, notwithstanding that he was blind, governed the realm in peace: he died of the dropsy, in the year of Grace 1141, and of his reign the ninth.  
Geysa his son reigned after him, and died in the year 116●.  
Stephen, eldest son to G●ysa, was his successor in the realm, and died in the year of our Redemption 1173.  
Bela, brother to Stephen.  
Emeric his elder brother, reigned eight years, and died in the year of Grace 1200.  
Ladislaus his son reigned but six months.  
Andrew, brother to Emetic, succeeded his nephew Ladislaus, and died in the year 1235, having reigned four and thirty years.  
Bela, eldest son to Andrew, reigned six years, and died in the year 1275.  
Stephen his son succeeded him, and died in the third year of his reign.  
Ladislau●, son to Stephen, surnamed Chune, was slain in the year 1299, having reigned about fourteen years.  
Andrew, son to Stephen, reigned eleven years, and died in the year 1301.  
After the death of Andrew, some did choose Wenceslaus king of Bohemia, and others Otto duke of Bavaria, who was shamefully expelled by the Hongarians, after that he had mad● his entry with great pomp.  
Charles, son to Charles Martel king of Sicily, whom some call Carolobert, was chosen King of Hongarie, in the year 1310.  
Lewis his eldest son, being yet young, was made king: he made great war against the Neopolitans, and won many victories of the Italians. He died, being six and fifty years old, in the year of Grace 1382, having left his realm in the hands of his sister Marie, whom he married to Sigismond, son to the Emperor Charles.  
Marry governed the realm for a time under the command, and by the counsel of Nicholas de Gare, for that she was yet very young. But in the end, the Hongarians sent the Bishop of Sagabria into Apulia, to Charles the son of Andrew, to persuade him to come into Hongarie to be King. He came▪ and king Sigismond having a little before solemnly married Marie, who was then of full age, fled to his brother Wenceslaus. But Charles was slain in the year 1585., by the practices of Marie, and of her mother, and of Nicholas de G●re. In the end, Elizabeth the Queen's mother was drowned by Hornsch a friend to Charles, and the young Queen was led prisoner into Croatia, and put into 〈◊〉 keeping. Sigismond levied a great army, he took Hornach, and caused him to be dragged up and down at a horse tail, then to be pinched with hot pincers, and in the end quartered. It was this Sigismond who having levied a great army in the year 1396 (●n ●he which there were French succours) was defeated with a notable loss by Bajazet Emperor of the Turks, near unto Nicopolis. Some hold that in this battle there 〈◊〉 ●wentie thousand Christians, and sixty thousand Turks slain. This King and Em●●●● together died in the year of Grace 1437, in the seuentieth year of his age, of montaigne of Hongarie the fifteenth, of his reign of the Romans the seven and twentieth, ●●●ohemia the seventeenth, and of his Empire the fift.  
Albert duke of Austria son in law to Sigismond, was at one instant created king of ●●ongarie, and Emperor of Romans. He died of a flux having eaten too much of a me●●●● in the year 1439.  
●adislauses brother to Casimir king of Poland, was called to be king. He came into Hon●●●●, and was so received. King Albert's widow had a son after her husband's death, ●●ed Ladislaus: she wrought so with some princes, as he was anointed and solemnly ●●wned at Albaregale upon a Whit sunday, being not yet four months old. In the end ●●ey that followed the party of Vladislaus were the stronger. This king was slain at the ●●taile of Varne, whereas the Christians were miserably defeated by Amurath Empe●●● of the Turks.  
Ladislaus was created king after the death of Vladislaus. But for that the Emperor Fre●●cke refused to give him unto them, H●niades was chosen governor of Hongarie, who ●●●red with forces into Austria, and committed great spoils. After many debates Ladi●●● was brought to Vienna, and received with great honour by the Bohemians and Hon●●●●s in the year of Grace 1458. Ladislaus was made sure to Magdeleine, daughter to 〈◊〉 the French king; but as they made preparation for his marriage, he died in a man●●●●●●denly, having languished but six and thirty hours. He was nineteen years old.  
〈◊〉 Cor●i●us son to Huniades was chosen king of Hongarie, at the age of eigh●●●●●ereses. And notwithstanding that the Emperor Frederick had been chosen at the 〈◊〉 time, yet he made an agreement with Mathias, who was crowned by the hands of 〈◊〉 the sixt year of his reign, and of Grace 1464. He died without any children, 〈◊〉 ●●igned seven and thirty years.  
SATURN'S son to Casimire king of Poland, whom the Bohemians had received for 〈…〉, was also chosen king of Hongarie after the death of Mathias.  
SATURN'S succeeded his father Vladislaus in the realm of Hongarie, and died in battle 〈◊〉 the Turks in the year 1526.  
●●●dinand of Austria, Emperor, succeeded him, and made war against the Turks in 〈◊〉 for the space of eight and thirty years.  
maximilian of Austria Emperor.  
●●●●bus the second, Emperor, having held the realm of Hongarie a long time, resig●●●●●●●er to his brother Mathias of Austria, who is at this day Emperor and governs 〈◊〉.   

〈◊〉 A brief recital of the controversies happened in the said realm, since the peace made with the Turk in the year 1605, unto this day, for the knowledge both of the government and the religion of this Estate.  
〈◊〉 controversies which happened in Hongarie, as well for religion, as for the char●●● 〈◊〉 and dignities in armies, were the cause of great mischiefs: for Botscay Isthan duke 〈…〉 revolted against the Emperor in high Hongarie and Transiluania, having 〈…〉 many noblemen to his party, upon the assurance which the Turk gave him. 〈…〉 ●●scay went to field with great numbers of the Heiducques, which are horsemen, 〈◊〉 himself prince of Transiluania, and heir to Battorie, making a declaration 〈◊〉 the emperor's lieutenants, which were four; who joined their troops together 〈◊〉 we●● against Botscay: both armies met, and the Hongarians both foot and horse 〈◊〉 unto Botscay; the fight continued six hours, whereas Bellio●use fled, and the ●●●●●aness and Silesians were cut in pieces. Pets and Pallas L●ppay were taken prisoner's by Botscay, who sent Pets with certain ensigns to Herdar Bascha, to show his ●ff●c●ion unto the Turk, and Pallas L●ppay remained lieutenant to Botscay: they published a declaration that they took arms for their liberty and consciences, and to hinden the persecutions of the Gospel▪ so as the Clergy and jesuits were forced to fly to Vienna. They of Cassovia revolted, and thrust the Priests and Clergy out of their towns, and become Protestants, according to the confession of Ausbourg. Baste lieutenant to the Emperor published a general pardon in his name, but it prevailed not. He besieged Cassovia in vain, there being a garrison within it of six thousand men, so as he raised his siege, and in his return he took Epper and other places, upon condition to suffer them to live in their religion, according to the confession of Ausbourg: but being pursued by Botscay, 〈◊〉 thirty wagons laden with silver & cloth which came from Vienna. This army of 〈◊〉 amazed the neighbour places, and the Germane soldiers and other strangers were 〈◊〉 pieces. ●aste persuades Botscay by his letters to hearken to a peace, and to draw the 〈…〉 to their obedience: Botscay answers that he is content, upon condi●●●● that h● should enjoy the principality of Transiluania, and be the Emperor's lieutenant in Hongarie, that the French and Vallons should departed the country, that the soldiers should be paid, that the Protestants religion should not be molested, that Bellie●use 〈◊〉 had in the cause of the troubles, should be delivered into his hands, to do justice of him, that the Emperor should come in person to the Estates at Ponson, & that the Germane should not go out of their garrisons to steal. Bas●e seeing these demands made no ●●●were: all Transiluania obeys Bots●ay, he receives certain money from the Turk, where with he pays his soldiers, and calls the Estates of Hongarie to a general assembly the last of April. The Earls of H●●in, Nadaste, and Bude, who had ●ought with the Turk, ●ell to Botscays party, having an army of twenty five thousand men, so as Transiluania, Moldavia, and Val●ch● 〈◊〉 Botscay, which made the Archduke Mathias, in the Emperor's name, to seeked peace with conditions very beneficial to Botscay; and to this end he sent Heleas H●●●, who conf●r●ed with the Emperor's Commissioner, who let him understand, that his master would never refuse a peace, granting him that which he had formerly demanded, and 〈…〉 that in the Senate of Hongarie there should not be any Bishop but he that should be Chancellor; that no man should be forced in his religion, that the Bishops should be gentlemen and borne in the country, and that whatsoever was passed should be abolished of either side. During these conferrences the wa● continued, but ●he Turk having intelligence of these treaties for an accord betwixt the Emperor and Botscay, he sent his great Vezir into Hongarie, to treat of a peace 〈◊〉 with the Emperor. Botscay sends to the great Vezir, who was come to ●uda, & demands 〈…〉 him of the propositions made for the peace of Hongarie, being 〈◊〉 to break 〈◊〉 pro●●●e which he had made to the great Turk, which was not to make a peace with the Emperor before he had given him advice, and that he should maintain the Turks in their camp. The Vezir desired nothing more than a peace, and it 〈…〉 Botscay should 〈…〉 part to Vienna, to ma●● the peace of Ho●garie betw●●● the Emperor and him; and that the Emperor and the Vezir should depute men of quality to agreed upon some truce, and 〈◊〉 their con●rou ●siess, and that they should meet about Komo●ra, ●h● which was effected after a war of fifteen years. The treaty of peace for Hongarie being made with Botscay in September 100L at Vie●●a, i● contained 〈◊〉 where of these be the contents.  
First, That they should 〈◊〉 in liberty of conscience throughout all Hungry, namely the Catholics, Lutherans, and Ca●●ri●●●, and ●here should be none but those thre● religions. Secondly, That the Archduke mathias should be lieutenant general for the Emperor throughout all Ho●garie, and 〈◊〉 all ●hingss should remain in the Estate it was at ●hat present. Thirdly, That B●●s●●y should r●maine Prince of Transiluania, Earl of Si●●●●●, and Palatin of high Hongarie, and for want of heiresmales, all should return unto 〈◊〉 Emperor, and his daughters should be married according to their quality at the Emper●●●harge. Fourthly, That from ●hence forth the Palatin, and the general Treasurers should be chosen by the Estates of the country: Sixtly, That a general pardon should 〈◊〉 published, to the end that all matters might be forgotten of either part. There was 〈◊〉 made at Vienna, and in all other places for this happy peace. But Botscay did not 〈◊〉 enjoy it: for after all his toils, thinking to reap the benefit of this peace, his C●●●●cellor poisoned him to get his Estates, the which having discovered, he caused him 〈…〉, and having confessed it, he cut off his head. Notwithstanding all remedies 〈◊〉 Antidotes, Botscay died at Cassovia the thirteenth of December, but before his 〈◊〉, he called an assembly of the Estates, whom he persuaded to obey the emperor, 〈◊〉 do him good and loyal service, and to ●ive in peace one with another.  
This peace of Hongarie being made and signed at Vienna, the Archduke Mathias 〈◊〉 ●o deputies well accompanied to meet with the deputies of the Vizier, where they ●●●●onclude what places should be comprehended in the truce: And to the end they ●●●ght be in more safety near unto Komorra, the Ambassadors of Botscay retired themselves from the said assembly, some seven French leagues, to the end they might be arbi●●torss of such controversies as might arise. In the end, upon the sixt of October, the de●●●ies parted from Vienna, under the conduct of Colonia Budian, and his troops, there ●●ing with them, the two Bassa's of Buda, who were prisoners at Vienna, the one called ●●●man, and the other Aly, and they carried with them six wagons, in the which were ●●●otie thousand Florins, a goodly cloak, and certain pla●e, which they should pre●●●● unto the great Turk. The Bassa of Buda mounting up the rive● of Danou with ●●●re and twenty ships, arrived also, and so did the deputies of Botscay, to give conclusi●● to this peace, so much desired. All these deputies, after many meetings, in the end ●●●●uded upon fifteen Articles, the which they signed, whereof these are the con●e●●●.  
〈◊〉 every one should return into his possessions, re-edify his houses and castles, and 〈◊〉 in the same estate that he was in before the war.  
That the Emperor should be called Father, and the Turk Son, and these should 〈◊〉 titles which they should give one unto another by their Ambassadors: and writing respectively, they should use the word of Emperor, and not of King.  
That the Tartarians should be comprehended in this peace, with a prohibition unto 〈◊〉, not to commit any spoil in the emperors countries, nor in Hongarie.  
That the realms, lands, and seigneuries of the house of Austria should be comprehended in this peace.  
That all acts of Hostility should cease, and transgressions be punished by exemplary ju●●●.  
●hat it should not be lawful for either part to surprise any fort, town, house, nor any 〈◊〉, nor to sand any Spy into Hongarie.  
〈◊〉 the treaty of peace made with Botscay should be truly observed.  
That merchants might traffic freely, and pass through the limits of the country, and that there should be held four or five Fairs every year in such places as should ●●enamed to that end.  
That the Bassa of Buda, the Governor of javerin, and he of Sclavonia, should have authority to pacify all factions and divisions that might arise, and if they were of importance, the Emperor and the Turk should be mediators.  
That all prisoners should be set at liberty according to their quality.  
That the Archduke Mathias should sand an Ambassador with a present unto the Vi●●●, as also the Vizier Amurath should sand unto the Archduke Mathias and the Empe●●● should sand a present of two hundred thousand florins unto the great Turk.  
That the great Turk should sand one unto him of the like value.  
That this peace should remain firm and stable for twenty years betwixt their Majesty's, their children, or successors, and they should every three year sand ambassadors one unto another with exquisite presents.  
●●at it should be lawful for them of either part to pursue their debts, and they should 〈◊〉 all privileges and freedoms as before the war.  
That Vactia should remain unto the Emperor, and Gran unto the Turk.  
The Bassa of Buda treated the Christians with great magnificence and pomp, giving ●o every one of them goodly presents. There was great joy at Constantinople, and in 〈◊〉 emperors countries, ●or this peace.  
The death of B●●scay happening afterwards, it caused divers alterations in these Provinces; and the peace was all observed in Hongarie, by reason of the roads which were made by the Imp●riallss, and others. To prevent these disorders, there was an assembly called of the noblemen of Honga●ie, and Transiluania, who desired that their King should rema●● within the country, to the end that his presence might suppress all these new combustions, and they made a protestation in the Cathedral Church of Presbourg, t●at having attended the Archduke Mathias seven weeks in vain, after the day assig●●● for the States, they would return home to them that sent them. The noblemen 〈◊〉 high Hongarie made another assembly at Cassovia, the fourteenth of October, where it was re●olued, not to divide Hongarie from Transiluania. The Heyducques being discontented, notwithstanding these assemblies, did not forbear their spoiling: they 〈◊〉 divers castles, and declared themselves friends to the Turks, and enemies to the Germane and Walloons. The Archduke Mathias comes to Presbourg, whereas the Estates of Hongarie were held the fifteenth of januarie, with one hundred wagons, and two hundred horse. The Bishop of javerin, and all the noblemen were there to receive him. The Cardinal Archbishop of Gran arrived also, and Helias Hasky came with twelve wagons, in which were many deputies of high Hongarie, the Parliament began the three and twentieth of january 1608, the Cardinal and the Clergy would have moderated the peace made at Vienna with Botscay, but Helias Hasky, with the deputies of high Hongarie, opposed themselves, showing that this assembly was only called to suppress the Heyducques. The Archdukes deputies propounded unto the assembly an offensive and defensive league: there was some dissension betwixt the Clergy and Politicians (for so they called the noblemen' of high Hongarie) but all being pacified, they met in Heli Haskyes house, where it was concluded, that they should not altar any thing of the peace made at Vienna, and that the said league should be made betwixt the Estates and the country. As for the discontented Heyducques, Helias Hasky and Turso took upon them the charge to go unto them, to reduce them unto their duties, or to proclaim war against them. The Archduke Mathias returns to Vienna, where he called a new assembly of the Estates, acquainting them with what had been done at Presbourg, and with what difficulty he had kept the noblemen of Hongarie from falling from the empire, entreating them to make ready certain money, if the rebellious Heyducques did not lay down arms. The Archduke Mathias aspired to be King of Hongarie, and to attain unto his designs, he resolved to settle a peace in the country, as well with the Heyducques which were mutined, as with the Turk. And to this end, Heli●s Hasky and Turso, who had the charge to treat with them, prevailed so as they drew fifteen companies of horse unto their pay, so as in an instant there was a dissension among them, and their whole army was disperse. The Archduke Mathias assembled a● army upon the confines of Moravia; whereof the Emperor being advertised, he sent the Cardinal Districhstein to the Archduke, being at Vienna, who brought him the ratification of that which had past as well with the Turk, as with the Lords of Hongarie; his Majesty desiring that the offensive and defensive league made at Presbourg should be broken, whereunto the Archduke would not yield. The Cardinal understanding the Archdukes mind, advertised the Emperor, who entered into fear and distrust of his brother, and gives him occasion to provide for his safety. He causeth the Estates of Bohemia to assemble at Prague, commands all the towns to take arms, levies soldiers, whom he holds near unto his person, and writes unto the Electors, Princes, and Estates of the empire, to secure him.  
Whilst the Emperor is thus in alarm, the Archduke parts from Vienna, and comes 〈◊〉 Mo●avia to the town of Cmaym, where was the Rendez vous; his army consisting of ●●●ntie thousand old soldiers, as well horse as foot, eight and twenty pieces of ordnance, and a great number of noblemen which were come unto him, he writes his letter to the Estates of Bohemia, inioining them to sand two deputies of every town to Craslaw, to hear from his own mouth the cause of his taking arms. The Cardinal ●●●ent back again by the Emperor to the Archduke to hear his complaints, and 〈◊〉 Pope's Nuncio, with the ambassadors of divers princes came unto him: but being ●●●die entered into the country of Bohemia, the ambassadors of Saxony and Brandebourg came unto him, entreating him to yield unto a truce for eight days and not to pro●●ed, the which they could not obtain. He went and camped before Prague with eight thousand of his men, commanding Colonits' to follow him with the b●●ie of the army, which arrived there the seventeenth of May. The Emperor having two enemies to encounter, his brother without the walls of the town, and the Estates within the town, 〈◊〉 much troubled, for the deputies being of divers religions, every one made demands 〈◊〉 his advantage; so as he was forced to yield to all their demands, except that which concerned religion. The Emperor went in person to the assembly to ratify the articles, ●here having made a speech to the Estates, they did swear to employ their lives and ●oodss for his majesty.  
After many voyages, and a passport granted by the Emperor and the Estates, the Archdukes Ambassadors entered into Prague the six and twentieth of May. Count The●●in the chief of the embassage was brought into the assembly, where he saluted them 〈◊〉 the Archdukes name, and delivered his demands, the which being imparted unto the Emperor, he had for answer, That it should be fit to appoint some men of quality to confer together, and that the conference should be made at D●brita; the which was yielded unto, and there they concluded as followeth.  
〈◊〉 he should 'cause the crown of Hongarie to be delivered to the Archduke, re●●●● the realm unto him, and discharge the Hongarians of their oath, who should 〈◊〉 him for their king. That the Emperor should 'cause a Diet to be held, to levy a con●●●●ion for the payment of the soldiers upon the frontiers. That within two months 〈◊〉 the titles, ensigns, and privileges of the realm of Hongarie should be delivered to the Archduke: and that the Emperor should resign the Archduchie unto him, without reserving any right unto himself or his sons. That the peace should be ratified betwixt the lords of Hongarie and the Turk, with his majesties consent: and that the Emperor ●●ng without any son, the Archduke should succeed him in the realm of Bohemia: a●● if he had sons, he should be their tutor during the minority with the Estates of the said realm. The Archduke should promise' unto the Estates (in case that the realm o●●ohemia falls unto him by succession) to take the oath of all their privileges; or in 〈◊〉 that he be chosen king, as the kings are accustomed to do, and that the Archduke should put in his titles, appointed king of Bohemia, and that he should also have the administration of Moravia. That the Archduke should be acknowledged in the temporality of the Bishopric of Esmuts, the which is subject to the realm of Bohemia. That Silesia by the Archdukes intercession should enjoy the privileges which the Emperor ●ad granted them. That the Estates of Bohemia should not contribute to the war, but what they have been accustomed to do for the frontiers of Hongarie against the Turk: and that the Emperor should carry in his titles the names of all the provinces which he ●ath given to the Archduke: and by the same means the Archduke should renounce the county of tyrol, and yield it unto the Emperor: and the Archduke should 'cause a yearly contribution to be made at the assembly of the Estates, and that there should be 〈◊〉 question, nor exception taken of any thing that hath passed of either part.  
The contents of seventeen articles having been read, concluded, and assigned of ●●ther part, the crown of Hongarie and all the marks of royalty were delivered unto ●he Archduke, that is to say, the Sword of king Stephen, the Golden Ball, the Buskins and antic Robe, and the royal Sceptre, the which were sent unto the camp by the Emperor; whereas the Archduke caused his army to be put in battle to receive it, going ●●rth himself with a great number of noblemen: all the ordnance was shot off thrice, 〈◊〉 the soldiers discharged their pieces as often. After all these things, the siege was raised from Prague, having divided his army into three parts to retire to Vienna.  
King Mathias coming to Vienna, the inhabitants went forth to meet him the fourteenth of july, and made him an entry, as to their sovereign Lord At the same time there arrived at Vienna an ambassador from the Turk sent by the Bassa of Buda, for a confirmation of the peace with the king, and with presents: having had audience, he returned with ratification of that which he demanded, after which there was an en bassador sent by the king to Constantinople with rich presents.  
King Mathias parted from Vienna, and came to Presbourg the two and twenti●th of October, where he was received in great pomp by the noblemen of Hongarie, there being above ten thousand men at arms. On the sixt of November they presented unto him the articles conformable to the edict of pacification made in the year 1606, whereof these be the contents.  
First, that the exercise of the Protestants religion should be free throughout all the realm, yea and in that where he than was, and should ch●s● his seat. That no German governor should be installed in any place in Hongarie, and that in all the frontier towns lying upon the Turk there should be governors that were borne in the country. That the crown of Hongarie should be kept by secular men. That before all things there should be a Palatin chosen. That the king should make his residence in the country, and in absence the Palatin should have all power with the Senators, and that whatsoever they did, the king should confirm. That the offices of the kingdom should not be ●old, nor given to any that was not borne within the country. That the Jesuits who had planted themselves within the realm, and the Clergy should not bear such sway as they had done. That the revenues of the crown should not be paid but at Presbourg, and that sorraine coin should be minted. That after the Palatins death until the election of another, the Precedent of the court in every Province should govern.  
These articles were presented unto the king, and after some qualifications which the king required, Helias Hasky was chosen Palatin, & Mathias proclaimed king of Hongarie the fourteenth of the said month, and was anointed & crowned in S. Martin's church on the nineteenth day, and these were the ceremonies.  
The crown was brought upon a royal chariot from the Castle unto the Church with ten ensigns, it being in a little coffer covered with cloth of gold, and then put into the vestry: four of the chief Senators were at the four corners of the chariot, and the other Senators and chief Noblemen followed it. The king being attired after the Hongaria● manner, mounted upon a horse with a rich caparison, and accompanied by his brother the Archduke, and many noblemen of divers Nations, came unto the said Church; where having stayed a little in the vestry, two Bishops came to conduct him before the Altar, but before him there marched ten noblemen who carried the ten ensigns, and five others who carried as followeth: The first carried the Cross, the second the Pix, the third the royal Sword, the fourth the Sceptre, and the fift which was Helias Hasky, the Crown: Cardinal Fortgas● did the office, being assisted by many Bishops and Prelates who anointed the king in the beginning of Masle, and set the crown upon his head during the Gospel, all the people cried with one voice, God save the king of Hongarie: Mass being ended, the king took the royal Sword, which Colonita Marshal of Hongarie held, and laid it thrice upon the Clergy in form of a Cross; then he received the communion by the hands of the said Cardinal. After Mass they cast a largesse of gold and silver unto the people: which done the king entered by a gallery from S. Martin's Church unto another called the Deschausses, where after they had read the Gospel unto him, he made two and twenty knights: then being attired in his royal ornaments and the crown upon his head, he went to horse, and issued forth by S. M●chaells' gate, where he came unto a pillar covered with cloth, where he took an oath unto the H●ngarians, and they unto him: then he took his horse, & was brought unto a ba●ke of earth, which he leapt thrice over, and then he flourished his sword thrice in the air in 〈◊〉 of a Cross: which done, he returned unto the castle where the feast was prepared. After ●his coronation he was forced to deprive t●e Germane of the dignities, charges, 〈◊〉 and offices, which they h●ld in Hongarie, having pacified the country, and reduced under his crown that which the Christians held there, he returned to Vienna, to suppress the troubles which were grown for religion. Finally, Mathias, in seven months, caused himself to be crowned King of Hongarie, and to be acknowledged Archduke of Austria, and Marquis of Moravia, the which he enjoyeth at this day.      


❧ A DISCOURSE OF THE ESTATE OF THE KING OF POLAND.  

The Contents.  
1THe beginning and Etymology of the name of Poland, the greatness, and the Provinces of this Realm. 2. Division of Poland into high and low, and their chief towns. 3. Description of Cracovia, the chief city of base Poland: the neighbour places and duchies. 4. Of Livonia, and her chief towns. 5. Lituania, her bounds, chief City, Duchies, and Palatinats. 6. Samogitia, her length, and confines. 7. Mas●●ia, the Etymology, and beginning of the name of this Province, with her chief towns. 8. Vol●i●ia, her situation, and provinces. 9 Podolia, her limits, and chief city. 10. Russia, the Etymology of the name, her bounds, country, and chief town. 11. Podlassia, when and by whom united to Poland; her chief towns. 12. Pomerania, her confines, compass, chief towns, and Islands. 13. Prussia, her bounds, length, and chief rivers, when reauced into a secular principality, divided in old time into twelve Dukedoms, but now into two Countries; her chief town Mariembourg. 14. With what things Poland doth abound; and the incredible number of beeves wherewith their forests are replenished: Of mines of Azure, Led, Tron, Copper, and Salt. 15. The Polonians descended from the Selaves: their ceremonies at the naming of their children: what gods they did generally worship. 16. Fire, Wood, and Serpents, worshipped in old time by the Lituanians: with whom the Priests did consult in time of sickness: their sacrifice of a Cock; their feasts, and their ceremonies at their obsequies and funerals. 17. The manner of living of the Polonians at this day, the ●orme of their Characters in writing, and of the use of the Latin tongue, common to towns and villages: The nobility haughty and proud by nature; their fashion of apparel and arms. 18. Their riches in all sorts of Grain, Honte, Wax, Flax, Hemp, cattle, and namely the Salt of Olcen, and Velisques, Azure, mines of Iron, Amber, Furs of Sables, and other beasts. 19 Of the revenues of the King of Poland, what it comes to yearly: and of the riches of the nobility. 20. The forces of Poland, wherein they consist: Of the great number of their horsemen, of the carriage of their artillery, and other munition of war: Of the strong places of this realm, of their ships, galleys, and other sea forces. 21. Their neighbours as well enemies as friends, and their mighty allies. 22. Their form of government, and modern policy, more like unto a Commonweal than a Realm: Of their earthly Nuncios or messengers, their authority in assemblies and public consultations of this State: Of the authority of their King, and of the Nobility. 23. Of the discord among the orders of Senators and Knights: Of noble Families, and of Provinces. 24. Of two members which make the whole Estate of Poland: and of the number of Archbishops, and Bishops, Palatins, Marshals, and other dignities of this Realm. 25. Of the opinion of Lutherans and others brought into Prussia, and into the whole Estate of Poland by Merchants, and by Albert of Brandebourg: and what provinces do still hold the Ro●is● religion. 26. A Genealogy of the Dukes and Kings of Poland.   

POland, or Polania, is so called by reason of the plains, which in the country language are called Poles, and it hath also the name of the Realm of the Lechites, of Lechus the first king which did inhabit Poland, who settled his abode at Gnesne, about the year of Grace 550. This realm is greater at this day than it was ever, by reason of Lituania, and Livonia, which have been added to this Estate. It extends to the rivers of Note, and Orb, which divides it from Marchia, and to Odera, which doth in a manner separate it from Silesia; and unto Beresina and Nieper, which divide it from Muscovia, and from the baltic sea to the river of Mester, which divides it from Moldavia; and it extends also to the Carpathian hills, which lie betwixt it and Hongarie: so as from the confines of Silesia, unto the frontiers of Muscovia, betwixt the West & East, it doth contain almost 120 Germane leagues, and as much from the extremities of Livonia, unto the frontiers of Hongarie. And for that it is in a manner of a round form, it is much bigger than many conceive it to be. It contains a good number of great provinces, which be the high and low Polonia, Masovia, Prussia, Podolia, Russia, Volhinia, Livonia, and Lituania. Poland was found in a manner desert: Prussia, and part of Pomerania, Podolia, Volhinia, Masovia, and Livonia, have been conquered by arms, and Lituania (to the which Samogithia and part of Russia did first belong) had been the ancient patrimony of the house of the jagellons; for in the year 1386, jagellon, sometimes duke of Lituania, married the princess Ediege, who only remained of the royal house of Poland, and was made King upon three conditions: That he should become a Christian: That he should draw all his subjects to embrace the Christian faith and That he should unite his Estate to the crown of Poland. The two first conditions were performed, but not the third, until our days, whenas the house of jagellon came to fail: for their kings being loathe to deprive themselves of a patrimonial Estate, and whereof they were absolute Lords, nor to subject it to the election of the Polonians, still deferred the accomplishment thereof, under pretext, that they feared the Lituanians would revolt, and that by this means they should lose that which did belong unto them: but seeing on the one side, that the princes of their blood began to fail (for that the males ended with Sigismond Augustus, King of Poland) and on the other side, fearing the power of the Muscovites, they have been forced to unite it unto this crown.  
As for Livonia, it did in old time belong unto the Teuton Knights, who had a great master: but being deprived of a great part of their Estate, by the great duke of Muscovie, in the year 1558, for matter of religion; they recommended themselves to Sigismond, king of Poland, who took them into his protection. True it is, that this province was not freed from the Muscovites command, but by king Stephen, in the year 1582.  
But having spoken of all these provinces in general, let us say something in particular; Poland is divided into high and low; high Poland, which is also called the North part, is divided almost equally by the river of wart; and base Poland, which they call the Southern, is watered by the river of Vistula. High Poland, which hath for neighbours the Saxons and the Prutheniens, hath received this name of High or Great, for that (as we have said) Lechus, first Founder of the Polonians, planted his seat there, building the town of Gnesne. This province contains these principal towns, which h●ue others less in their jurisdictions, that is to say, Posnania, the Metropolitan town, which hath under it Rosceim, Medzyrzeczu, Ostresow, Vuschaw, Sremk, Prenecz, and Rogozno: Calais, which hath under it, Gnesne, Pyzadry, Vuarte, Naklo, Land, Konin, Slupeza, and Kolo: Siradia, which hath been taken for a great Duchy, and did belong unto the second son of the Kings of Poland; it hath these towns under it, Orlwia, Piatek, Bresinia, Karnazeu, Inoulodz, Biechou, and others: Cujavia, or Vladislavia, which hath under it Bidgoste: Breast, which hath under it Radzaciou, Crusphicie, and Kowalou: Ravam, which hath subject unto it Sochaczovia, Gostimin, and Gambin: Ploczko, which hath under it the towns of Bisko, Ruchzyayas, Siegres, Srenko, Milawe, Plonsko, and Radzanou: Dobrinia, to which are subject the towns of Slonck, Ripin, and Gorzno.  
As for base Poland, since that the royal seat was transported to Cracovia, it hath been preferred before the other; and it hath three principal towns, that is, Cracovia or Cracou, Sandomire, and jublin, whereof either of them hath many other towns under it.  
Cracovia or Cracou, is the chief town of base Poland; and as Petrus Appianus saith, it is the same which Ptolemy calleth Carodumun: but leaving those controversies, I say that in this town is the Castle or Palace of the kings of Poland, in the which they are crowned and interred; by reason whereof it is the most renowned place of the whole realm: there is also in this town a goodly university. The longest day of Summer is of sixteen hours and one eighth part. There are these three towns joining to Cracovia, Clepardie, Stradomie, and Casimire: and this town hath under it those of Bicz, Vuoynicz, Sandecz, Lelovian, Kzyaz, and Proszovice. There are also two duchies in the jurisdiction of Cracovia, the one of Zaton, and the other of Oswiecine. Sandomire hath under it the towns of Checiny, Korczin, Vuislicie, Pilsne, Opozno, Poloviec, Zawichost, Zarnou, and Malegost. jublin hath under it the towns of Vrzendu, Lulou, Parcou, and Casimire.  
Livonia is a very great province, which hath in length near unto the Baltic sea about one hundred twenty and five german leagues, and in breadeth at lest forty. It hath for bounds upon the East R●ssia subject to the Muscovites, from the which it is divided by the river of Nerve, and the lake of Beibas: upon the South Samogithia, towards the West the Baltic sea, and towards the North Finland, separated by the gulf of Fintuque, or of Finland. The chief town of Livonia is called Rige or Rig, seated near unto the mouth of the river of Duine: and the other chief towns are Rivalie, commonly called Rewell, and by the Russians Roliwe, the which hath a great and goodly port in the gulf of the Baltike sea, Derpt or Derbten, and according unto the Russians juryowgorod●, built near unto the banks of the river of Bec, betwixt two lakes in the midst of the province. The other great towns having goodly castles, besides the above named, are vend, or Wendem, in the midst of the country, Velin, Pe●novie, Volmaria or Walmer, Wesembourg, Vitesten, and Narua. This country for the most part obeys the king of Poland; but there are some few places which acknowledge the Muscovite and the king of Denmark; and some other obey the king of Sueden, as Rewel and narve, with some other small towns.  
Lituania, which is of a great extent, lies near unto the Muscovite, & hath for bounds upon the East a part of Russia, the which doth acknowledge the great Knez; towards the West, Podlasia, Masovia, and Poland; turning a little towards the North, Prusia; upon the North, Livonia, and Samogithia; and to the South, Podolia, and Volhinia. This province contains many duchies and countries, and is divided into certain Palatinats like unto Poland: as the Palatina●ss of Vilne, Troc, Minsce. Nou●grod, Breast, Kiovia, and others which may be taken for countries; yet there are few towns, but many villages. The chief town of Lituania is Vilne, the which is as great as Cracovia, with all her suburbs. They also accounted of Novogrod, the which hath seven german leagues in circuit: but it is under the great duke of Muscovia, and was taken by the Muscovites in the year 1477. The chief river of Lituania, is that of Neper (called Borysth●neses by Ptolemy) which coming out of Muscovia, and running beneath Chiovie, falls into the Pontic sea.  
Samogithia lies near to Lituania, and is fifty miles long. It hath for confines upon the North, Livonia; upon the West, the Baltike or german sea, which is properly called the Baltike gulf, and this sea doth border it, turning a little towards the North; and Prussia is also near unto it. There are no remarkable towns, but many small ones, with villages, the which belong as well unto the king as to private gentlem●n, but their houses are generally ill built.  
Masovia is a province of great circuit, joining to Poland, and carries the name of one Mass who was duke, but being wholly defeated by Cazimire duke of Poland, in the year 1045, he fled into Prussia, where having endured many afflictions in the end he hung himself. It confines upon the East, with Lituania; upon the West, with Poland; upon the North, with Prussia, and upon the North, with Russia and Poland. This province had sometimes a particular prince, and was appointed for the king of Poland's second son: but john and Stanislaus the only heirs of this Estate, dying young, in the year 1526, this duchy returned to the crown of Poland.  
Marschovia is the the chief town of this province, and hath under it the towns of Czirko, Egrod, Zekrozin, Cziechanow, Czerniensk, Poltowosk, Rosan, Varka, Blonic, Zarsin, Gadziek, Prasni, and Loraza. This province was strangely spoiled and ruined by Mendog duke of Lituania in the year 1246, and 1260.  
Volhinia lies betwixt Lituania, Podolia, and Russia: it did belong to the duke of Lituania, but now it is united to the crown of Poland. They divide it into three provinces, Leuczko, Volodomere, and Ryzemenec, which are also the names of the three principal towns, the which have many others under them.  
Podolia hath for limits upon the South Moldavia, near unto the river of tire, now called Nijester; upon the East, great desert plains, not inhabited unto the marshes of Meotides, or the sea of Zabaques. There is nothing to be seen in all this country, but a few scattered towns, by reason of the incursions of the Tartarians. The chief town is Camienec, in a manner divinely built among precipices, and so strong, as the Tartarians, Null, and Turks have been often repulsed with great loss. There is also the town of Lembourg, famous for the salt meats which they sand into many parts.  
Russia, which they also call Roxolania or Ruthenia, and was in old time (according to the opinion of some) called Rosseia, which is as much to say, as a scattered Nation, for that these people did hold all Sarmatia in Europe, and part of that of Asia, and did extend their colonies from the Frozen sea unto the Mediterranean, and Adriatic gulf, and from the great sea unto the Baltike: so as all the people which use the Sclavonian tongue, and follow the religion and ceremonies of the Grecians, are commonly called Russians or Rutheniens. I mean not to discourse here of all Russia, whereof the greatest part obeys the great Knez, but only of that which they call the black, and according unto some, the Read or the Southern. Russia the black hath towards the South, the mountains of Sarmatia, which are also called Carpath●an; and Ta●reses; upon the East, Volhinia, Podolia, and Moldavia; upon the North, Lituania, and upon the West, Poland. This Russia contains the countries and towns of Lempurg, Halicia, Belze, Chelmo, and P●emistia, the which have many others under them. The chief town of the whole province is Lempourg, whereas the Archduke hath his seat.  
Podlassia (a great province) hath upon the West, Masovia, and upon the East it joins to Lituania. It was sometimes under the dominion the Lituanians, but in the year 1569 it was united to the crown of Poland, by Sigismond king of Poland, great duke of Lituania: in it are the towns of Byelsko, Bransko, Suras, and Tykolzin, whereas they keep the king's treasure: there is also Knyssin, where there is a royal palace, with a great park full of divers kinds of beasts, and goodly channels and ponds full of fish. You may also see the towns of Narew, Vasilkou, and Augustou, a very strong town, built by king Sigismond Augustus.  
Pomerania confines with the Baltike sea, & extends itself with a long tract of country from the extremities of Holsatia unto the frontiers of Livonia. It is called Pomerania, or the province of Pomeran, which is to say Maritime in the Sclavonian tongue. The first inhabitants called it the country of Pamorci, and the inhabitants themselves were called Sidines. Th●re are forty towns environed with sea and ditches, besides others, with many castles and monasteries. The chief towns are seated near unto the sea shore, and there are very few within the country: the shore is so well fortified by nature and art, as it fears not any rage of the sea, and is very commodious for shipping.  
Her towns which are within the country, are Stetin, the chief of the whole countire, which gives the name unto a duchy, Neugarde, Lemburg, Stargard, Bergrade, Camenez, Publin, Grisembourg, where there is an university built in the year 1546, Sundr, Puck, Revucall, Lovembourg, Hechel, Stralsunde, a pleasant town and of good traffic, with many others. In former times there was a goodly town called julinum ●ow Voltin, at this day ruined: but above all there is the town of Gedan, Dantz, o● D●●tzic, which is about five miles from the sea; some place this town in Prussia. There are near unto this country of Pomerania three Islands, Rugen, in which they number five towns, Vfedam, or usedom hath three, and Volin, but one.  
Prussia, which some others call Borussia, Prutenia, Vlmigavia, and Hulmigeria, hath for bounds upon the North, the Baltike sea; Lituania and Samogithia upon the East; the country of Pomeran upon the West, and Poland with Masovia upon the So●th. The length from North to South contains fifty eight Poland leagues, from the town of Torunia, which is upon the frontier of Masovia, unto the castle of Memule: and the breadth is fifty leagues. Her chief rivers are, Vistula, Nemen, or Cronon, Nogat, Elbing, Vusere, Passaria, Alle, Pregel, Ossa, Drebnicz, Lique, and Lavia.  
This province was sometimes under the Teuton Knights: but after the year 1419, the country and town of Prussia offered their obedience to Casimir King of Poland, and revolted from the Knights: and afterwards, in the year 14●0, Prussia refused to obey these Knights, and subjecteth itself to the King of Poland, and the soldiers of the order which were in garrison, sold Mariembourg, with many other towns and castles, in the year 1457, for 476000 florins. Yet the Knights refusing to swear unto the king of Poland, in the year 1498, they made war with variable success; until that Prussia was reduced under a secular Prince, which was Albert Marquis of Brandebourg, the foore and thirtieth and last great master, who was made Knight of the order, and secular prince at Cracovia, by Sigismond King of Poland, having taking a solemn oath unto him, & the said king gave him all the lands of Pr●ssia, to hold them of him as his liegeman.  
Prussia was in former times divided into twelve duchies or provinces, in the year 573, by Venedus their prince, according to the number of his children, to either of which he assigned a province which carried his Lord's name. These provinces or duchies are, Sudavia, which was wholly spoiled by the Teuton Knights; Sambia, at this day called Szamland, Natangia, Nadravia, Bartonia, Galinde, Varmie, or Wermelande, Hogkerlande, Culme, Poemsania, and Michlovia. Every one of these provinces contains ●any towns, built at several times by the Teuton Knights: for that after the Christian religion was planted in this country, the Knights built seventy two castles, and sixty two chief towns, whose number is now much increased; so as at this day there is not any province in Poland where there are so many towns, nor such goodly castles.  
Prussia is now divided into two countries, the one belonging unto the duke, the other unto the king. The duke hath his seat at Montroyall, which the inhabitants call Cumisberg, a sea town, where there is an university built by Albert the fir●t duke, who beg●n by the means of the king of Polonia, to enjoy all the lands of these countries, as vassal to the crown of Poland. Mariembourg is the chief town of that part of Prussia which the king doth particularly enjoy, besides that which he hath yielded unto the duke. This town is rich, well peopled, and strong, having a castle well furnished and fortified, seated upon the river of Nogat, which is an arm of Vistula or Vuixell, six miles from the town of Dantzic towards the East. A little above this town, the river of Vistula divides itself into two arms, and makes an Island, which is excellent for the fertility of the soil, and the great number of villages and houses. Some do also place the town of Dantzic in Prussia, the which is much esteemed for the port, shipping, and storehouses, with abundance of all sorts of merchandise which are brought thither by sea from the West and Northern parts, and also by land, and by the river of Vistula, which runs through the midst of it.  

¶ The Quality.  
POland is a plain champain country, covered with many forests, but having few mountains within it: the climate of this country is cold, by reason whereof they have neither olives nor vines: but it abounds in all other things which the earth is accustomed to bring forth: for there grows great store of wheat, barley, and all other kind of grain; so as other remote country's taste of her fertility. It abounds also in cattles of all sorts, and in fish. True it is, that for the greatness thereof it is not well manured, ●or that there are divers great forests, in which there are many wild beasts. There is also abundance of fowl, with great store of fruit, butter, and wax. And as for honey, there is such plenty, as they want places for their bees: for all the trees and woods are black with their swarms.  
They have no mines of gold nor silver, but in the territory of Cracovia, whereas they say there is no silver, as at Sandomire, whereas they have also found one of Azure: but this country yields lead, iron, and perfect copper, and there is great store of salt, especially that of the Mine, which is excellent. In Poland the longest day in Summer doth not exceed sixteente hours, and forty minutes.  
Livonia is a country full of marshes, plain for the most part, and without mountains. There are many rivers which water it, and yet there is much ground untilled, notwithstanding that it is capable to bear any thing: for it yields wheat, and all sorts of fruit in so great abundance, as they sand a good part into foreign countries. This country abounds also in beasts, both tame and wild, especially in horses which are very sure. There is also great store of wax, honey, and pitch: It bears no olives nor vines. There are many lakes, whereof the chief is called Beybas, being five and forty miles long, and abounds in divers sorts of fish.  
Lituania is for the most part full of Moors and Forests, and therefore not very accessible. There are very great lakes, the which in some places are like unto Seas. There are also many navigable rivers, the which are more frequented in Winter than in Summer, for that the pools and marshes being frozen, the way is more easy. The air is nothing temperate, but troublesome and exceeding cold. The beasts which breed there are small: and besides those which are in Germany, they have Bugles, or wild Oxen, rain Dear, and wild Horses. This country doth also yield abundance of wheat, but it is seldom ripe. There grows no vines, and they want salt, which comes from other countries. They have great store of Sable skins, and Ermines, and abundance of pitch, honey, and wax. At Vilne, the longest day in Summer is seventeen hours, and one eighth part, and throughout the whole province, it is not less than sixteen hours, and one sixt part: yet upon the extremities, towards the North, the longest day in Summer is almost eighteen hours.  
As for Samogithia, it is exceeding cold, and in a manner continually frozen. There are great store of forests, whereas they found abundance of honey, the which is better, more delicate, whiter, and hath less wax mingled with it, than in any other place.  
Masovia, is for the most part full of woods, whereas they found great store of Bugles, and wild Bulls.  
Volhinia, yields abundance of all sorts of grain and fruit, and it hath many forests, in which they found great store of wild beasts, and there are pools which abound in fish: It hath much good pasture, and store of honey.  
As for Podolia, it is exceeding fertile, so as for one they are accustomed to reap a hundred, and in breaking up the ground a little, and sowing it with wheat, it bears three years together: neither have they need to sow their ground every year, but only if they shake the corn a little when they reap it, that which falls, serves as seed for the following year. Their meadows carry abundance of hay, the which grows so high, as they can scarce see the heads of their cattle above the grass, yea in three days it will cover a r●dd as it lies: yet the land is hard and stony, so as they must have at lest six pair of oxen to till it, the which is very troublesome, both to the cattle, and to those that lead them. There is in this country great troops of oxen and sheep, and abundance of wild beasts, with store of honey. It abounds also in salt and horses.  
South Russia is exceeding fertile, and abounds in horses, oxen, sheep, sables, & foxes. There is such store of bees, as they not only hide their honey in hives and hollow trees, but also in rocks and caves under ground. There grow no vines: there are store of rivers which water it, and many pools which have plenty of fish. They say that in the territory of Chelme, the branches of Pine trees being cut and left upon the ground two or three years, grow hard, and are turned into stone. There is also great store of white ch●●ke.  
The country of Pomeran is plain, and hath very few mountains. It is generally fertile, and is watered with many rivers. The fields are well manured, and there are many navigable rivers. It doth abound so in tame cattle, wheat, butter, honey, wax, and such like, as it doth furnish other countries with these commodities. The inhabitants of this country gather amber, which the flowing of the sea doth cast upon the shore, but not so plentifully, as in Prussia.  
Prussia yields abundance of all things, and is much more happy than all the countries which lie near it. For it is pleasant and profitable of all sides, by reason of the great number of ports it hath upon the Baltic sea, and of divers g●lfeses of the sea. The air is mild and temperate; so as you may see great store of cattle of all sorts. The land yields abundance of wheat, the which doth much exceed that of Poland & Lituania in bounty. This country abounds with honey like unto all the Northern regions, and the bees make their honey in hollow trees. There are great forests, and thick, full of mighty wild beasts, among which they number the bugles, rain dear, and horses. Moreover there are many rivers, pools, and lakes which abound in fish. The inhabitants do also found amber above the Baltike sea, which the inhabitants call Burstin, it is cast upon the shore by the waves of the sea and tempests.   

¶ The Manners of the Ancients.  
AS the Polonians are said to be descended from the Sclaves, so have they for a long time retained their manners; so as in discovering the one, we should soon come to the knowledge of the other. But to speak something thereof whenas they meant to give a name to any one of their children, the which they did not until they were great. They conducted him to the temple of their gods, and did cut off his first hair, which they offered as a pledge of the service which he should do unto them. To this end they called the kinsfolks and friends to rejoice, and they did sacrifice a hog, and water mixed with honey, made as we do metheglin. The gods which they did worship were jessan, that is to say jupiter, Ladon, which was Pluto, Niam, Diana, Marzim, Mars, Ziztl●a, Ceres, and Zie●ane, which was Venus, having the like opinion of these gods, to other nations, and they did sacrifice in like manner as the Greeks and Romans, solemnising their feasts with banquets, dancing, singing, and all kinds of sports. And Dlugosse the historian writs, that this kind of rejoicing continued unto his time, which was some years after that the Polonians had received the Christian religion, yea at this day the Lituanians dance and rejoice. They do often repeat the word Ladon in their dancing, with clapping of their hands, as Dlugosse saith; for god, Zivie, which signifies that vital force of the air which gives vigour to things that have life. They did also worship the god or goddess Pogode, which was the clearness and temperateness of the air.  
As for the Lituanians, they had in old time for their gods, fire, wood, and serpents, which they did nourish in their houses, as their household gods, and did offer them sacrifices. They did worship the holy fire▪ and did entertain it in such sort, as it went never out: and the sacrificers and ministers of their temples did always feed it, to the end it might not be quenched. When any one was sick, his friends went to these sacrificers, and demanded if he were in danger of death, or should recover. These sacrificers came by night unto the fire, and the next day they gave answer to their demand, saying, th●t they had seen the shadow of the sick man near unto the fire. There were some others in the country which did worship the Sun and woods, and the higher a tree was, the more honour they did it. They were in old time so poor, and of such small reputation with the Russians, as the lords and princes of Kinia could draw nothing from them in sign of subjection but rags, cork, and other base things. I had forgotten to say that they did offer cocks unto their serpents, and did feed them with milk. They had solemn feasts every year after harvest towards the month of September, and when they came from the war, they did burn for a sacrifice the spoils which they had taken from their adversaries, and one of their enemies did serve for an oblation. Whenas any one of them died, they did burn his best movables with his body, and his fairest bones, offering milk and honey upon his tomb. Before they received the Christian faith, there were none but gentlemen that used cloth or shoes, for the common people were covered with linen cloth, and the skins of wild beasts.  
As for the Samogithians, it is not long since that they were ignorant of gold, silver, copper, iron, and wine. Among them it was lawful for a man to have many wives, and for the son to marry his mother in law after his father's death, and the brother his sister in law. This people had fire for their greatest god, the which they held sacred, and which was never out, but was kept upon a high mountain, by their sacrificator. They had forests which they did worship as Saints, and as the abiding places of their gods, and they were fallen into such folly, as they thought that these forests, and the beasts which did live in them were Saints, and that whatsoever did enter was reputed for holy. They had in these woods harths separated one from another for their houses and families, upon the which they burned the bodies of their bests friends, with their horses, saddles, and harness, and their best apparel. Near unto these harths, they did set stools made of cork, upon the which they did leave meat made of meal in form of cheses, and they did pour beer upon the fire: wherein they were so abused, as they did believe that the souls of their dead friends (whose bodies they had burnt) came in the night, and took their reflection there. If any one offered any violence to the forests, or to the birds or beasts that were in them, his hands and feet grew crooked by a devilish art.  
They of Livonia were for a long time barbarous and uncivil, and given to the worshipping of gods, almost like unto the former. The simplicity of this people was so great, as having priest honey, they did cast away the wax, as a superfluity and ordure. They had commonly in their mouths this word of jehu, whereof they of that time knew the explication.  
The Prussians were in old time very cruel and barbarous, and great drinkers, taking most delight in mare's milk, before they knew the use of Metheglin. They had liberty to marry as many wives as they lift, and they held them in subjection like unto servants. When they were tired with labour, or with over much drinking, their baths and stoves did help to refresh them, yea in the extremity of Winter, they were accustomed to bathe themselves in cold water. They did inter the dead with their richest movables, arms, and horses, and to them that died in battle, they did sacrifice some one of their enemies which they had taken. They did worship the Fire, the Sun, Moon, Beasts, Serpents, and many other things. They were very charitable to the needy, and went forth to secure them that were in danger at sea, or to help such as were pursued by pirates. They made no esteem of gold nor silver; and they had store of excellent furs, which they gave for other garments of wool.   

¶ The Manners at this day.  
THe Polonians at this day differ much from the rudeness and cruelty of the ancient Sarmatians. They are wise and discreet in their actions, and very courteous to strangers, except the common people, who draw & exact from them all they can. They drink willingly, like unto other Northern nations, but the use of wine is very rare, and they ●ave not the skill to plant vines. They make a certain drink with corn and other things, which they call beer, & it is like to ours. The characters which they use in writing are composed partly of the Greek, and partly of their country: and the men and women attire themselves in a manner like unto the Grecians. The Polonians abhor theft and robbing, and the country is so safe in that respect, as in Winter you shall see a man alone go a great journey in a little waggon draw by one or two horses. The men are very industrious, and have the knowledge of many tongues, especially of the Latin, the which they use as commonly both in towns and villages, as their vulgar tongue, and it is familiar both to rich and poor. The gentlemen love to be stately in their attire and arms. They are valiant by nature, and although their enemies have an advantage in regard of n●mber, yet they will attend them, yea and charge them. The gentlemen which are not newly raised, do not easily endure any wrong done unto them by noblemen, but seek to have reason and satisfaction, gathering together as many of their kinsfolks and friends as possibly they can. Finally, to speak generally of the Polonians, they are rather prodigal than liberal, for that they do nothing but make feasts, and their delight is to entertain many persons, and to feed a great number of servants.  
As for the Lituanians, passing through the country in Winter, they govern themselves by the North Star, as others do at Sea. They have no use of money. The women of this country have friends by their husband's sufferance and leave, whom they enjoy in their sports of love when they please, and yet if a married man had a Mistress, he should be blamed. Among them marriages are nothing sure, for they break them easily, and quit one another by a common consent, marrying and remarrying as often as the humour takes them. Wine is not much in use, and their bread is very black, for that the corn is not well sifted and bolted. Their troops furnish them with drink, for that they have abundance of milk, which they use in stead of wine. They speak the Sclavonian tongue like unto the Polonians. Whenas the Lituanians have war against any one, they go rather with a great preparation of furniture, than well appointed to fight. Their forces also slip away presently; and if they be forced to pursue, they presently sand home unto their houses what they hold most precious and dear, and so follow their General more by force than for any desire they have to serve him, and to fight. This doth appear plainly, for that great men which are bound to serve the king with a certain number of men, redeem this servitude and subjection with a great sum of money, and this is so ordinary a thing amongst them, as it is no blemish nor aspersion, for that the Generals and Colonels will 'cause a proclamation to be made by the sound of a Trumpet, throughout the army, that if any have a desire to retire themselves, they may do it bringing their money, and that they shall have leave. They are so licentiously dispensed withal to do any thing, as this excess of liberty makes them to abuse the condition wherein they live. They wear long garments, like unto the Tartarians, but they carry a Lance and a Target after the manner of the Hongarians. They have good horses, but they are all guelt, and never shod. They govern them at their pleasures with a small snaffle, never using any bit which is troublesome or rough.  
The people are miserable, and held in great captivity, for that great men when they pass through the country accompanied with many footmen, enter into Peasants houses, and take away what they please, yea and many times beaten them cruelly. It is not lawful for a farmer to come empty handed before his Landlord; and as for others, besides their rent, they are bound to give them weekly three or four days work. If their C●●ats' wife be dead, or if he marries, or hath a ch●ld borne, they are bound to give him a certain sum of money, for this consideration only, that he hears them in confession all the year long. If any one hath committed a crime worthy of death he must hung himself, as soon as the prince's commandment is signified unto him, ●lse he is beaten and tormented cruelly before they put him to death.  
The Livonians are much given to gluttony and drunkenness, and this dissolution and excess is practised more in rich men's houses than in any other place. He that can bear most wine, and continued longest at the table eating, is welcome; but in the end, he hath for his reward, scabs, gout, bloody flix, dropsy, or some such like disease. Some gentlemen are liberal to these gluttons and drunkards, and in the mean time to entertain this liberality, they ransom the Peasants; so as whatsoever these poor men can get with much sweat and pain, the other spend in excess and disorder. The Peasants are in a manner all slaves, and when any one not able to endure ●unger, whipping, nor the great tyranny of his lord, goes away, if the gentlemen overtake him, they cut off his foot, to the end he shall fly away no more. These poor slaves are fed with such sharp meat, as even swine in a manner would disdain to taste of that which they eat. They wear shoes made of bark, whereof a pair costs but three deniers. Instead of singing, they 
A Fa●thing a●d something m●●e.  howl like Wolves, and they have continually, as in old time, the word Ichu in their mouths. When they are demanded what they mean by this word jehu, they answer, that they know not; but they do therein follow the custom of their predecessors. Finally, these poor men live like beasts, and are entreated in a manner like beasts. Whenas they go to bury any one, they turn round about him, drinking carouse, and they invite him to drink, pouring his part upon him. And when they put him into the grave, they set by him a hatchet, wine, and meat, and a little money for his voyage; and whilst that they were subject to the Teuton Knights, they said unto their dead, Go unto the other world, where thou shalt have power and command over the Teutons, as they have had over thee in this world. As for marriages, if any one will marry a wife, he must ravish her often. The inhabitants of Livonia are of divers nations, for there are Livonians, Curons, and Letiens, which have divers languages: yet in towns and castles they speak for the most part the Germane tongue.  
They hold that the ●omens of the town of Rig in Livonia, are gallant and stately, and contemn them that come from any other country. They should be well married if they were not called Ladies. They are not given to do any thing, but live continually in idleand delights. In stead of spinning, or doing some other work fit for women, they have coaches and wagons in which they go abroad in Winter, and little boats in Summer to sport themselves upon the water.  
The Samogitians are of a goodly stature, but uncivil, rude, and barbarous. They are bold and apt to war. They wear corselets, and use pertu●sanss, like unto our men, but somewhat shorter. Their horses are little, and yet they toil them infinitely. They break up the ground be it never so hard, with a wooden share, like unto the Muscovites. One of their governors desiring to ease them, caused shares of iron to be brought, but it falling out for two or three years together that the earth did yield but little, for that the air was very intemperate, this gross and dull headed people began to mutiny, and to say, That this scarcity fell upon them for that they made them to plough with iron, contrary to the custom, the which made their land unfruitful: so as the Governor was forced (to avoid sedition) to suffer them to plough at their own pleasures. And for that the people are so gross, the devil doth amaze them often with strange illusions.  
They marry many wives, and without any consideration of blood, nor parcentage, for that the son after the death of the father marries his mother in law, and the brother makes no conscience to take his sister in law to wife. They use no coin, and build their houses very low, covering them with straw and dirt, and making the roof of it like unto a bark or a galley, upon the top whereof they make a window which gives light unto the whole house. They have always fire burning, as well to dress their meat, as by reason of the cold, the which is so vehement, as their rivers are frozen in a manner all the year long. They make the hearth in the midst of the house, to the end that the good man being set, may in warming of himself have an eye over his household and troops; for that both men and beasts lie all under one roof, without any separation.  
The richest and men of greatest power in stead of cups of silver, or gilt, have some which are made of bugles horns. They use no stoves or hothouses, like unto their neighbours. They are naturally inclined to divination, charms, and sorceries, and to the observation of Auguries. They do all in a manner eat very black bread, which is little worth. Most commonly they drink nothing but water, and they do seldom use Beer or Metheglin. As for their apparel and language, they differ little from the Lituaniens.  
The Masovians differ not from the Polonians in regard of their manners and apparel, and they use the same language, only they add certain whistlings, which makes them to differ a little: but they are exceeding valiant. The Volhinians also are full of courage, but their language and manners are like unto the Russians.  
The Southern Russians are strong and valiant: in war they use the bow, and a pike of twelve foot long. They do strangely hate the name of King. The Polonians have colonies in a manner throughout all this Russia, and almost all the Knights and chief of the country are Polonians.  
The inhabitants of Pomeran have kept their language and manners from the Vandals, until they received the Christian faith, at which time they learned the Saxon tongue, which they speak at this day.  
The Prussians, especially the nobility, descend from the Germane, and retain much of their nature. They build higher than the Polonians, and their customs continued longer than those of others. They have also more art and industry, and much more policy than others; for that to speak the truth the Germane do much exceed all other Northern Regions, either in arts, or in the government of towns.   

¶ The Riches.  
THe wealth of the Polonians consists in abundance of grain of all sorts, whereof the country is so plentiful, as in the year 1590., and 91, it did not only relieve the neighbour countries, but also the river of Genova, Rome, and Tuscanie, notwithstanding that their neighbours were in great want of victuals. They do also make much money of their honey, wax, flax, hemp, beeves. sheep, horses, and bugles. But their greatest commodity grows by the saltpits of Ocen, which were found out in the year 1252, and also by them of Vilisgue in the territory of Cracovia, and in divers other parts of Russia, whereas they seethe the water drawn out of deep pits. Some writ that in those hollow caves far under ground they shall sometime hear voices like dogs, cocks, and other beasts, which they hold for a presage of some imminent mischief. This salt is drawn partly out of mines, and partly out of fountains: so as they draw a great quantity out of the earth, but they also (as I have said) make much by decoction.  
They do in like manner make great commodity of their Azure, and of their mines of iron, whereof they have store in the woody countries: copper, lead mixed with silver in some places of the jurisdiction of Cracovia, and upon the limits of Silesia; quicksilver at Tustan in Russia. At Biezze, and in the mountain country they draw Vitriol, the which being boiled turns green, and into a stony substance: they have in some places marble and alabaster. In the Baltike sea, near to Dantzic and Montroy all towns of Prussia, they gather amber upon the shore, where some men going naked into the sea, draw it forth with little nets, and of this they make a great commodity. It is at the first soft, but coming into the air it grows hard, and they fashion it as they please: there is both yellow and white, but the white is most esteemed. Some writ that if it be burnt venomous things will die with the sent thereof. And they may also make some commodity of their mines of sulphur.  
To conclude, take away the port of Dantzic, you shall not found any other place of traffic which is of great importance. For as for that which is drawn from other ports of Prussia and Livonia, it doth not enrich the realm with silver, neither will it pay for the silks and cloth which is brought thither out of Flanders and England; nor for the wine, sugar, first-fruits, and spice which they bring out of Spain and Portugal, nor the malmsey of Candie, which is sold for sixty crowns a pipe and more. But to speak something of Dantzic, they hold for certain that there is sold and exchanged every day, a thousand charges of wheat and rye, besides wood, pitch, tar, fl●x, hemp, and beer, with infinite other commodities.  
To return to our discourse, the Polonians sell great store of furs, and skins of divers beasts, as sables, and foxes, which are very dear. But to conclude, the whole country having no great traffic, except the town of Dantzic, and there being no great trade in any other towns, nor the people of the country very industrious; moreover the Polonians being of that nature as they love to make good cheer (especially the gentlemen) and to spend disorderly in feasts and apparel, so as they consume more than their revenues will bear, for they eat more spice than any other nation, and their wine, silks, and most of their cloth comes from foreign parts; the country must of necessity be poor of gold and silver; for that no realm can be rich, unless there goes forth great store of merchandise, and little comes in, to the end that the exportation may bring in money, and the entry 'cause them to disburse little. Hence grows the wealth of the realm of Naples, and of the Estate of Milan, whereof the one sends forth great store of corn, wine, oil, silks, safron, first-fruits, horses, and other things, by means whereof they draw great sums of money from strangers: and the other doth furnish many countries with corn, rice, cloth, iron works, and all kinds of merchandise, and receives little from others. If the realm of Naples (we may say the like of Sicily) had as many artificers, and men of industry, as it hath first-fruits and benefits of nature, there were few countries to be compared unto it.  
But to return to Polonia, the revenues are not so small as some esteem them. For first of all the king's revenues, which they draw chiefly from the mines of salt and silver, amount yearly to six hundred thousand crowns. It is true that king Sigismond Augustus did engage some part, and king Henry a year before his departure (meaning to bind the nobility unto him) did alienate for above three hundred thousand collars of rent. But their kings may much augment their revenues by the death of such as are in possession, annexing unto the crown those goods which they were wont to give unto private men. The king may spare the greatest part of this revenue, for that he is defrayed with his whole court in Lituania, and also in some part of Polonia, whilst he remains in these provinces. The king's revenues should be much greater, if he were not so bountiful to his Palatins and Chastelains, to whom he commonly gives two third parts, & sometimes more of all the rights & duties of their governments. But in necessities of war, and in enterprises of importance, after the resolution of the Estates, they charge the people with great taxes, the which is paid upon the land, or upon the imposts of beer, which amounts unto such a sum, as by the means of this money king Stephen maintained a war against the duke of Muscovie for the space of three years.  
As for the nobility, their wealth is commonly well divided betwixt the noblemen and gentlemen, for there is not any one much richer than another, and the greatest hath not above five and twenty thousand crowns in yearly revenues. We must except out of this number the duke of Curland, and Cunisberg: who although they acknowledge the king of Poland to be their Superior, and they his Feudataries: yet are they no lively members of the realm, for that they have no place in their Diets & Assemblies, nor any part in the king's election, or in the government of the realm; neither do they pass as noblemen of the country, but as strangers, as they are indeed, for that the duke of Cu●land is of the house of Denmark, and he of Cunisberg of the house of Brandebourg: for all Prussia did sometimes belong unto the Teuton knights, who had a particular great master; but not able to resist the forces of Poland, they submitted themselves as Feudataries to king Casimire. In the end the great mastership falling into the hands of Albert of Brand●bourg, he become a Lutheran, and of great master, duke of Prussia.   

¶ The Forces.  
THe Forces of this realm consist in victuals, silver, footmen, horsemen, arms, and munition of war. We have formerly spoken sufficiently of victuals and silver, let us now come to the rest: The nobility are bound to serve the king at their own charge, for the defence of this Estate. These serve on horseback, armed, some like unto our men at arms, some with lighter arms, and some after the manner of the Tartarians. These last are called Cosaques, whose trade is to spoil▪ sack, and ruin every thing; and all go unto the war richly appareled, with cassocks embroidered with gold, silver, and divers coloured silks, with many f●atherss, eagles wings, skins of leopards and bears, and with many ensigns of divers fashions and colours, and many other ornaments fit to make their own men admire them, or to make them seem terrible to their enemies. They have horses of a mean stature, but much more quick, ready, and courageous than they of Germany. They hold that Poland at need is able to make one hundred thousand horse, and Li●uania seventy thousand, of which number there might be a hundred thousand horses of service. It is true that the horses of Poland are much better than those of Li●uania.  
They do so much esteem their great numbers of horsemen, as contemning all the forces of other princes, they have had little care to make any forts. They believe that armies led through Champion countries against an enemy, should fight with more courage for their country, wives, children, liberty, and for their whole estate. They make profession, never to turn their backs to the enemy, what accident soever happens.  
Sigismond Augustus, King of Poland, did often attempt to have the Estates resolve upon the fortification of Crac●uia, by reason of the emperors neighbourhood; but he could never persuade them to that which he desired; both for that they would not give their king's means to become absolute masters, by reason of their garrisons, as also, for that they say, they have courage and force sufficient to defend the realm. They have no footmen, for that all the people of the realm are divided into merchants and artisans which devil in towns, or labourers and peasants which live in villages, being subject, as we have formerly said: so as the gentlemen only are armed, and they are not accustomed to fight on foot. But whenas they have any need of footmen, they entertain Germane and Hongarians: so as king Stephen in his enterprise of Liu●nia, had about 16000 foot of these two nations, and above 40000 horse of his own realm in his army.  
As for the conduct of artillery and pioners, they employ Tartarians, and the Peasants of the country. This realm is reasonably well furnished with artillery and munition of war; both for that the nobility have much ordnance in their castles and private houses, as also, for that Poland being so near to Germany, which yields abundance of metal, and which hath many masters for the casting of artillery, and the making of all things that belongs to arms, it can in no sort want, and it abounds the more, for that it hath so few places of strength: yet it is not without some places of importance, and which are of good consideration, as the forts of Lempourg, and Camenez in South Russia: the castle of Cracovia in base Poland, Polosque upon the frontiers of Muscovia, and Marienbourg, with some other places which are in Prussia and Livonia, and which have been fortified, not by the Polonians, but by the Teuton Knights, who were masters thereof.  
The forces of Poland, whereof we have made mention, are such both for number and quality, as there are few realms in Europe, I will not say that surmounts them, but that equals them. These forces want nothing but promptitude and speed: for there are four conditions requisite for any estate whatsoever, that is, That their forces consist of their own subjects, and not borrowed, or hired from others, That they have good numbers, valiant, and quick in execution: That they be their own, for that they cannot confidently trust a stranger, That they have numbers, to the end that if any sinister accident happen, they may have new supplies to prevent a greater danger, That they be valiant, for that numbers without valour avail nothing, and many times they hurt more than help, That they be quick and active, to the end they may with more ease and speed be drawn together, and led where need requires. The Polonians want the last of these four qualities: for the celerity of an army depends chiefly▪ upon two things, that is to say, of the authority of the prince, and to have speedy means to raise money. In Poland the king cannot resolve nor undertake a war, nor impose any taxes for the levying of money without the consent of their Diets and Assemblies. The Diets, where they must assemble many men, are like unto great Engines consisting of many pieces, the which advance little in long time: and in matters of war, we must hold those Princes to be soon ready which may resolve of themselves, and have money at commandment: otherwise when they must assemble, or dispose the Estates to the resolution of that which they have propounded, and then exact and levy money, they spend so much time in these businesses, as there remains little for the enterprise, and the occasion is in the mean time lost. Moreover, in Poland the noblemen and gentlemen spend so much going to the Diets, and remaining there, as they have little money left to entertain them afterwards in an army.  
Yet it may be they would resolve more speedily if there were question of the defence, and preservation of the estate, for that the fear of loss and consideration of danger makes every man diligent. But in my opinion they would be very show and irresolute, if they should consult of the enterprise of any conquest; for that the hope of good doth not move us so forcibly, as the fear and apprehension of evil: yet we have seen that the Muscovite took from Sigismond the first, the Estate of Poland and Smolen●ue, and yet he showed no apprehension nor feeling worthy of so great a King, and so powerful a realm. And the same Muscovite invaded Livonia, which had put itself under the protection of Sigismond, and found no resistance. But we must confess, that the forces of Poland, which are great, valiant, and depend not of any one, will always show themselves ready and resolute if the king have credit and authority among them.  
We have an example hereof in the person of Stephen Battorie, in whose time Poland not only maintained itself in reputation to be able to resist any foreign forces, but also to make conquest of importance upon powerful enemies. But for that we have spoken of speed and expedition, which is a matter wondefully importing the forces of an Estate, i● shall not be from the purpose to add the causes of this expedition and speed. The chief are (as we have said) the authority of the prince, which gives it motion, and the assurance of ready money which maintains it; for that we have seen mighty armies, which have consumed the time vainly, for that their Generals were slow; and we have also seen very important victories, which have profited nothing for want of money, without the which, the soldier will not march. The quality of soldiers is also of great importance: for we cannot deny but the Germane and Bohemian footmen want speed and agility, the which is proper to the French, Italian, and Spaniard, not for that they are more active of their persons; but for that they content themselves with less, being in arms. If they want wine, they faint not, neither are they discouraged if they have no flesh, & they do more willingly endure the toils and discommodities of war.  
Moreover, the quality of horses doth much import; for that the Flanders horses do much exceed them of Friesland and Germany, and the Hongarians them of Poland: the Genets of Spain exceed the horses of Turkey, and the Barbarian horses are swifter than the rest. As for the Coursers of Naples, they are not so swift as the Gennets, but they will endure travail much better, and they are reasonably swift. Experience hath taught us that the german horsemen are not fit to give chase to an enemy, nor to fly from them, for that they are too heavy: whereas if the Null, Hongarians, polacks, Turks, and Moors of Barbary have put any one to rout, he cannot escape them, and if any one hath disordered t●em, he cannot follow them: for that sometimes they are behind their enemy's backs, and suddenly they are go far from them.  
As for Sea fights, ships of burden have no great agility, for that they cannot stir, nor turn without wind: great Galleasses move somewhat better, but not much; only the common galleys are good for this purpose. Wherefore we have seen that Christian navies consisting for the most part of ships, have many times lost a good part of Summer, which is the only season to do an exploit; whereas the Turks fleets were soon made ready. But there is nothing that makes the Turks more active and speedy than their kind of living, contenting themselves with little; for that wine and such delights do more trouble our armies than the Turks whole provision doth theirs: so as it is no wonder if when they go to any enterprise, they are so well provided of canons, bullets, powder, and all kind of munition; for that by land they lad their wagons with th●se things, and their galleys at sea, and not with wine and other delights: and to conclude, they go to the war to fight, and not to drink drunk.  
But to return to our purpose, the polacks confine with the Suedens, who have some places in Livonia, and with the Marquis of Brand●bourg, and the Emperor, being king of Bohemia: and it is now about 100 years that the kings of Poland have not had any war with these princes; yea the lawful king of Sueden being king of Poland, he cannot make war against himself, and doth only demand a part of his realm, detained from him by his uncle Charles. Moreover, this prince having married a daughter of the hou●e of Austria, may live in peace with the Emperor. And as for the princes of Germany, 〈◊〉 forces are so equally balanced, that the Germane fear not that the 〈◊〉 will force their towns, which are well fortified, and furnished with all things necessary, knowing that they want footmen, and the Polonians in like do not fear the Germane in open field.  
On the other side the Polacks confine with the Muscovites the Precop of Tartary, and the Turk. As for the Muscovite, I have spoken waht is fit in the discourse of Mascovia. In regard of the Precop of Tartary of the Taurique Chersonese, he may draw to field about fifty thousand horse, and many more with the help of the other Tartarians his friends, as he did in the year 1569, whenas at the instigation of the Turk he led eithtie thousand horses against the Muscovites, and when he burned the town of Moscow in the year 1561, but he cannot continued long in any enterprise of importance, & his trade is rather to pick, steal, and murder, than to make a well disciplined war, or to fight a battle; so as he is more hurtful than dangerous. His people did much infested Podolia and Volhinia. They have often consulted how to prevent their incursions, and it hath been propounded to fortify certain Islands of Borysthenes, which the Tartarians pass to enter into the Estates of Polonia, and there to entertain certain armed vessels, and yet this thing could never be put in execution.  
The great Turk is very near to Poland, making himself master of Valachia, which was sometimes feudatorie to the crown of Poland, according unto certain contentious which passed betwixt Alexander Palatin of Valachia, and Lad●slaus king of Poland in the year 1403: and also in the year 1432, betwixt Elias Palatin, and Ladislaus the third, this province made fifty thousand horses, and did abound in all commodities; but the wars have made it in a manner desert, so as they can hardly levy five and twenty thousand horse. But I have spoken sufficiently in my discourse of the Turks Empire of the advantages or disadvantages which may be found betwixt these two princes, to the which I will refer the reader.   

¶ The Government.  
POland hath always been governed as a Monarchy, and they carried only the name of prince, until that the Emperor Otho gave the royal diadem and honour unto Boleslaus surnamed Chobre, soon after that he had received the Christian faith, about the year of Grace 1100. This honour did not pass the fourth king: for after another Boleslaus, the princes of Poland abstained from the name of king for above two hundred years. Premisle took upon him that title again about two hundred and sixty years since, and so it hath continued unto this day. In the beginning the prince's authority was more free, not being subject to any laws, and having absolute power not only of their Estates, but also of life and death. Since that the Christian religion hath been generally received, it began to be moderated, first by the holy admonitions of Bishops and Clergy men, whose authority was great among those people, being then rude & without knowledge of learning: and then by the merits and services of the nobility employing themselves in war which was often attempted against them, for the defence of the crown. And whenas good and religious princes would show their piety towards God, they gave many honours and preferments to the Priests and Ministers of sacred things; and using their advice in time of peace, and the valour of many gentlemen and soldiers in time of war, they gave them many liberties, and did quit much of their rights, the which their successors have continued. So as rightly considering the government of Poland at this day, it may rather seem a common weal, than a royalty: for the kings regal power i● so limited, as he doth not challenge much right and power over his subjects of the military order, that is to say, of the nobility, nor over their Estates, neither hath he any over the Clergy. He may not undertake any war without the advice of the Senate, nor treat any alliance or accord, nor impose subsidies, or taxes, nor alienat any thing of his demeans, nor do any thing of importance which belongs to the commonweal; for the nobility hath great authority in Diets and councils. They choose the king, and give him what authority they please: and the power of the nobility doth daily increase; for that in respect of the king's election they neither have law, rule, nor form to do it, neither in writing nor by tradition. They only know that the Archbishop of Gnes●e hath sovereign authority during the vacancy of the realm, and doth appoint Diets and preside in the Senate, and doth proclaim the new king, and that he with the Archbishop of Leunpurg in Russia, and their Suffragans being thirteen in number, and the Palatins in number eighteen, and the great Chastelains who are thirty (before that king Stephen had instituted new Bishops, Palatins, and Chastelains in Livonia whenas he conquered it) and some small number of other persons, enter into this election. The earthly messengers have also a certain authority: they call certain men so, which are as it were agents of jurisdictions or circles of the nobility, which are held throughout the provinces, especially in those provinces which are governed by States. These at the time of their Diet meet in a certain place near unto the Senate; there they choose two Marshals, by whose means they signify their desire unto the Senate: and of late days they have gotten so great reputation and authority, as they seem to be the authors and heads of all the public resolutions of the realm, and some have desired rather to be Nuncios or Messengers than Senators. All these together do more and more restrain the power of their princes, as often as they proceed to any new election. But although the crown of Poland depends of the free election of the nobility, yet do we not read that they have ever deprived the royal blood of the succession, to transport the realm to any other family, but once, whenas having deposed Ladislaus (who was afterwards restored) they made choice of Wenceslaus of Bohemia: yea they have always carried honour and respect to the king's children, as in old time to Edige whom they married to king jagelon, and in our time to Anne married to king Stephen. And it is well known that Sigismond the third, obtained the crown of Poland, especially for that he was son to Katherine, sister to Sigismond Augustus, and to the said Anne. But although the king's authority, as we have said, depends of others in that which concerns the election; yet is it absolute in many things after that he is chosen. He appoints the diets, and prescribs what time and place he pleaseth. He chooseth the secular Councillors, and names the Bishops who shall afterwards remain Councillors, without any other formality. He is absolute Master of the revenues of the crown, and Lord immediately of his subjects (but he hath no right over the nobility) and doth absolutely execute the resolutions made in Diets. He is sovereign judge of the nobility in criminal causes, and he hath means to do good to whom he pleaseth. Finally, he hath as much power and authority, as he hath policy and wit.  
The new king of Poland being chosen, he is required to take an oath, That he shall reign according to the laws and statutes of his ancestors, that he shall maintain the rights and privileges of every order, and shall not diminish any thing of the revenues and limits of the realm; yea he shall endeavour to recover that which others have lost: and in like manner all the whole Senate doth promise' to obey him. In former times their kings were anointed and crowned in the Cathedral Church of Gnesne, but now in that of Cracovia, by the Archbishop of Gnesne, & two other Bishops. Being anointed betwixt his shoulders with a sacred oil before the altar, where he receives the communion with a great reverence, having the crown upon his head, the sceptre in his right hand, and a golden ball in the left; then they set him upon a throne prepared to that end: all things being duly performed, they conduct him thus crowned to his royal palace. The next day they lead him with the like pomp on horseback, having the crown upon his head, to the palace, or parliament of the town, and the chief Councillors of the secular order carry before him the sceptre, the golden ball, and the sword, and he is set upon a high throne. The Senators take their seats a little lower about him: then the king rising from his seat doth thrust forth the sword unto the four parts of the world, and being set down again, he makes knights, touching them with the sword: after which the Magistrates of towns swear him fealty and homage, and promise' obedience. Which ceremonies performed, they return to the king's palace with the like pomp, and the time is spent in feasts, and banquets. The queen's coronation doth not much differ from the kings, and it is performed in the king's presence, and he requiring it for her: but they do not swear obedience unto her, neither hath she any power or jurisdiction given her.  
The nobility of Poland, as it appeareth by that which we have formerly said, live in very great liberty. They do what they please, and the king's decrees (as they themselves say) last but three days, and they carry themselves unto him as if they were his brethren. And as the king governs his subjects, which are immediately his, with absolute authority: so do they dispose immediately of their vassals, over whom every one hath more than a regal power, so as they entreat them like slaves: for the vassals of the Clergy and nobility are not bound to serve the king, but in the reparation and fortification of castles and places of strength, and in building of new forts, by the decree of the Senate: yet of late days they have been forced to manure the prince's land, and to contribute certain subventions of corn; to the end, that under the protection of Governors, they may be freed from the violence and injury of wicked persons.  
The kings of Poland, to fortify their empire, have done one thing which is very remarkable, for as the Romans augmented their forces in communicating the freedom of Rome, and the rights of the country of Latium, to the inhabitants of towns and provinces conquered: even so they have much enlarged, united and fortified their Estate, giving privileges to the nobility of Poland in provinces, conquered either by force of arms, or by any other means, and in equalling their nobility to that of Poland. In this manner king Ladislaus united Russia and Podolia to Poland, Sigismond the first Pruss●a, Sigismond Augustus Lituania, and Stephen Livonia: wherein they showed themselves to be very judicious and discreet, for that the honours being alike, and commodities equal, men grow more united in necessities and dangers.  
The things worthy consideration, touching the government, are, That the diversity of sects which are within the realm of Poland, breeds perpetual hatred & jars among those people; and they not only creep into provinces, towns, and families, but they also grow betwixt the father and the son, the husband and the wife.  
Moreover, the discord of dependences is great in this realm, for that this crown being subject to election, many live in hope, and seek to bind the Polonians unto them by divers means, and especially by reason of their travels, for that the youth of this realm, desiring to see other countries, come into other Estates, where they are much made of by the Princes; and these young gentlemen returning into Poland, are bound by the courtesies which they have received, to become Partisans to those princes who have so obliged them: and they cannot make any show of this partiality, but in the election of a new king, whereas one hath as much power as another: by which means there grows a division of hearts and minds, which breeds no disorder during the king's life, for that t●●s nation is very faithful unto their prince; but it may be that these differences & open profession of favour and affection, will make them secretly to grow jealous and distrustful one of another.  
There is another difference, which is that of the orders of the realm, that is to say, of the order of Senators, and that of Knights: for the understanding whereof, you must know, that although their principal intention be always to maintain their common liberty, which is equal to all the nobility, yet the necessity of government hath brought in a custom, that they which are found worthy of any command, are most esteemed, and have greater power than the rest: and therefore the sup●rior dignity is reduced to two degrees, that is to say, the Palatinat, and the Chastelleine; for that kings in former times did by little and little call these men to public consultations, notwithstanding that they had absolute power to do all things of themselves, to command, dispose, recompense, and punish, of their own motions. Since they have ordained, that these dignities should make the body of a Senate, without the which, the king cannot consult nor determine of public affairs. The rest of the nobility are in a manner infinite in number by reason of the greatness of this realm: and to the end that every one of them▪ whenas necessity requires to make new ordinances and laws, may interpose his authority and consent; every Palatin, the king requiring it, calls together all the nobility of his Palatinat into some private town, where having propounded unto them the matters whereon they are to treat, and their will being known, according to the desire of the chiefest of them, they choose four or six out of the whole company which are called earthly Nuncios or messengers, who meet with the deputies of other provinces, in a place appointed by the king, whereas the general Estates are to be held, and these deputies being united, make one body, the which they call the order of Knights, less in dignity than the first, but equal in authority; and therefore they do commonly contradict the Senators. The cause of this discord grows for that the Senators have always a desire to please the king, and to second his will, as they that are recompensed by the king himself: And the order of Knights have no regard but of the public good, and they hold that if they do not resist, they cannot maintain their liberty, nor prevent the dangers of tyranny: so as they oppose themselves all they can against the other order.  
The other discord is that of noble families, amongst whom there is little good intelligence, and in case they should come to the election of any one of these houses, whenas during the vacancy of the realm, there might grow great disorders, according to the power and means of the parties.  
The last discord is that of Provinces, as Lituania, Russia, & Livonia, for that the gentlemen of these Provinces do hardly endure (their country being greater) to be governed and subject to the Polonians. But there were good means to remedy all these things, according to the example of king Stephen, who sought in the general Estates to reconcile the points of religion, and to settle a form in future elections, to the end that the factions of the nobility might be suppressed, and by this means prevent many disorders which might grow by these discords and private passions. As for the controversies which grew betwixt the Senators and Knights, he sought by all means to reconcile them. He pacefied the dissensions of the nobility, showing himself equally to all, and calling them indifferently to the dignities of the Senate, distributing as a recompense the public revenues, being severe to them that were factious and seditious, and finally making himself Protector of all good and quiet persons of what condition soever. As for the controversies of provinces, they must imitate him who suppressed them with much art, having chosen for his abode the town of Grodme, situated upon the frontiers of Lituania and Polonia, by reason whereof he seemed to be equally affected both to the one and the other, and that he sought to content both parties.  
To relate more particularly of those things which concern the government of this realm, you must understand that there are two members which make the politic Estate. The first is that of the Ecclesticall Princes, that is to say, of two Archbishops, whereof the first is he of Gnesne, Primate of the realm, and Legat borne to the Pope throughout all Sarmatia, who hath authority to crown their kings: the other is he of Lempourg in South Russia. There are also of this number divers bishops, all which in a manner are great Princes, as the Bishop of Cracovia in base Poland, he of Posnan in the higher; he of Ploco in Massovia, he of Chelme in Volhinia, he of Presmil in Russia, he of Camenes in Podolia, he of Kiovia, and many others.  
The other member is of the secular noblemen, which are the Palatins, Chastelains, High-marshals, Vnder-marshals, chancellors, Vice-Chauncellors, Colonels, Vicecaptaines, and others. But next unto the Ecclesiastical Princes; the Chastelain of Cracovia hath the first place near unto the king, and is followed by the Pilatins of Cracovia, and Vilne. Among the Palatins there are some chief Chastelains mingled; and after them the other Chastelains both great and small, hold their places.  
The Palatins of the whole realm of Pollonia (who are as it were Governors of provinces) are those of Cracovia, of Sandomir, and Lublin in base Poland: of Posnan, Calis, Sirad, Lancicie, Vladislavia, Breast, Rau, and Ploc in high Poland: the Palatin general of Masovia, he of Droic, General of Russia, he of Belzen, Palatin General of Podolia, he of Volhinia in Lituania, he of Tron, he of Minsce, he of Kiovia, he of Misczislavia, he of Vitebscie, and he of Poloie. Moreover, they of Culme, Mariembourg, and Pomerania. In the whole realm there are about sixty Chastelains, and two high marshals in Poland, and as many in Lituania. There is the like number of marshals in either of these two Provinces, and they have divers names: for the one are called Earthly, and the other of the court. There are also two Chancellors, and as many Vice-Chauncellors, who have two seals, and go after the Marshals. There are two Generals of armies, whereof the one is in Poland, and the other in Lituania: and there are also forty Colonel's in base Poland, thirty in the higher, and twelve in Masovia, who are at the king's choice.  
The king calls the Senators to Council by the grooms of his chamber, or by his letters missive if they be far off; and he doth use this means to assemble the States: for in regard of the great distance of places they do not assemble often unless it be for some great occasion or solemnity, as to assist at the marriage of the prince, or of his children, or at the oath of some duke allied unto the prince. But the king consults according to the necessity of affairs with such as are present and near unto his majesty: if there happen not something that is difficult of great importance, for the determination whereof it shall be needful to have the presence, counsel, and advice of many Senators: at what time they have the advice of them that be absent, by letters unto the king, especially of the chiefest of the Council. The Secretaries are also admitted unto th' Senate having taken the oath, but as hearers only, for they have neither place nor voice in the Senat. The number of them is uncertain being at the prince's discretion, and they are admitted by him as well out of the ecclesiastical as secular Estates, and one of them hath the honour and name of chief Secretary. There are also two Referendaries which may enter into the Senate like unto the Secretaries. It hath not been usual to admit the sons of the chief Secretaries into the Senate, whereas they may hear what passeth in public councils like unto the Secretaries. These Councillors do also serve the prince and the commonweal whenas need requires, in the city for judgements, and abroad for embassages: and besides their charge of Senators, and care of the commonweal, they have certain offices assigned them according to the diversity of magistrates, and honours.  
Having formerly made mention of certain chief officers of the Estate of Poland, 
Office of Palatins.  it shall not be impertinent to speak something of their places and offices, and first of the Palatin, who is so called, in imitation of the Romans, who under their Emperors did much esteem and honour the Count Palatins. His charge is in the war to be leader of the forces of his province or government: and in time of peace his office is to appoint the assembly of the nobility within his jurisdiction, to preside in them, and in judgements, and to set a price upon all commodities that are sold, and to have care of weights and measures, unless it be during the assembly of the Estates, or in time of war.  
The Chastelains are as it were lieutenants to Palatins, and leaders of the nobility, every one under his Palatin. 
Chastelain.  They are called Chastelains in regard of the castles or towns which are assigned unto them, not that they have any jurisdiction in them, but only the charge of war, as we have said; and many have also annual revenues. The Chastelain of Cracovia alone, besides the name and revenues, is nothing common with the rest: but he hath the honour free without any charge, except that which is common to all the Senators; and he hath precedence before all others. It is not lawful neither for the Palatin, nor Chastelain to be in any province, in the which he hath not some land or inheritance.  
The Marshal of the realm is master of the king's court, 
Martial of the realm.  and administrator of the public Council, to whom it belongs to assemble the Council, by the commandment of the king, or primate. They impose silence and give audience, they have power to speak their opinions, to give entrance to foreign ambassadors, and to exclude them out of the Council which have no place there, to pronounce the king's ordinances in cases of infamy and crime, to moderate public pomps, to entertain strangers of account, to pacify and suppress tumults and seditions, not only about the Senate and in public, but also in the prince's house, to punish crimes committed in the king's court, or at the assemblies of the Estates: he hath also power in assemblies of Estates, and in the king's train to give lodgings, and to set a price of merchandise, whereby he reaps some tribute or profit. The Marshal hath jurisdiction over such as follow the court, and over the officers of the king's house, and may punish them: and therefore in public assemblies, or whenas the king goes forth in public, he carries before him a Sceptre of wood.  

Chancellor and viceChauncellor.  The Chancellor and Vicechancellor are distinct names but of equal power. They have the superintendancie and oversight of all letters patents, and writings which come from the prince, or go unto the prince, and in like manner which come from the Senate, and go unto the Senat. They have the king's seals in their custody, the Chancellor hath the great seal, and the Vicechauncellor the less, and their authority is so great as they may sign many things without the prince's advice, and reject that which they see contrary to the laws, notwithstanding the king's express commandment to the contrary. They make answers in the king's name, and propound unto the Senate of what matters they are to consult. Finally they set down in writing, divulge & publish the decrees of the Senate, and the ordinances of the king, & of public assemblies. They take knowledge of private complaints and causes coming from subalternal judges. They have command over the Secretaries, Scribes, Registers, Priests, and singing men of the court, yea and over ecclesiastical ceremonies, especially, he that is of the ecclesiastical order: for one of them must of necessity be of the Clergy, and the other of the laity; but in old time they were both of the Church.  

Treasurer.  The Treasurer shows his charge by his name, he keeps the king's treasure with the marks and ornaments of the realm, which are, the crown, the ball, and the sceptre; he governs the plate, stuff, and revenues, writings, and public monuments: all receivers, and such as disburse the prince's money must yield an account unto him. He is master of the mint and pays all wages to soldiers, courtiers, and the king's officers, and is not bound to yield any account but to the king.  
There are two heads and leaders of the army, which they put in the number of magistrates, and officers of the realm, whereof the one is called General and chief captain of the army, the other Marshal or Captain of the Campe. The first commands in all matters of war next unto the prince, and is his lieutenant. He leads the army, appoints the place where they shall camp, and orders the battle: he gives the sign when they shall fight and retire: he hath the care of victuals in the camp, and sets the prices, & doth punish malefactors. The captain or marshal of the camp is as it were his lieutenant, and is appointed by the king: he hath charge over Sentinels and watches, and doth command the mercenary soldiers, especially in the generals absence: yet neither of these hath any place in the Senate, neither are they perpetual, and in old time they were not called magistrates or officers of the realm. There are many other inferior offices which I omit for brevities sake.   

¶ The Religion.  
IN the beginning of the opinion of john Hus, it began also to disperse itself thoughout the countries that were subject to the crown of Poland: but king Ladislaus assisted by the noblemen and Bishops of the realm opposed himself violently against it. For this king refused the crown which the Bohemians offered him, and by this means stopped the passage of that opinion, out of Bohemia into Poland, and they made a decree in a general Diet, That whosoever did favour that opinion in any sort whatsoever, should be punished without exception. But for that in the beginning of Luther's doctrine, young men went to study at Lipsic, and Wittenberg, partly to learn the german tongue with their other studies, and partly for curiosity, they returned home to their houses either altogether Lutherans, or less affected to Papistry: so as Sigismoud who then reigned did forbidden young men to go and study in those places. This prohibition did somewhat stay the course thereof, for that partly by reason of the liberty of the Polonian gentlemen, and partly by the neighbourhood of countries infected with that opinion, and in like manner by means of the commerce of the Baltic sea, that doctrine got footing in this realm, yea some renewed the heresies of Arrius and Ebion.  
The first which received the doctrine of Luther and some others were they of Prussia, for that the merchants brought it with their commodities out of Germany, and dispersed it partly with their books, and afterwards the ministers and schoolmasters advanced it more: so as in the year 1525, the people of Dantzic, desirous of novelties, and thrust on by them of Luther's opinion, deposed the old Senate, and created a new of unworthy men, they made a Notary, Consul, profaned the Churches, carried away the ornaments, and did a thousand indignities to the priests and religious persons. And notwithstanding that the king went thither and did in some sort pacify the town, yet the Papists lost their churches, and the Mass was in a ma ner quite banished: so as there remains at this day in Dantzic but one convent of the order of S. Dominicke, who have free exercises, and one monastery of religious women within the town, and another without. Of late years they have given entrance to certain jesuits, who have not any college, but only preach, and do their other exercises; and these have conver●●d many.  
But to return to the progress of Luther's doctrine, & of other sects in Prussia: the disorders whereof I have spoken were followed by the falling off of Albert of Brandebourg, who by the persuasion of Henry and George his brethren become a Lutheran, and of great master of the Teuton knights of Prussia, made himself duke of a good part of that province. The people of his country did presently embrace the opinion of their duke, and afterwards it entered into that part of Prussia which is subject to the king of Poland, where it had extended itself farther, if the Bishops had not opposed themselves. In Prussia which is subject to the duke, besides the opinion of Luther and others, the Anabaptiss have got some footing, especially at Cunisbergue; and there are some which follow the opinion of Osiander.  
As for Livonia, in the time of the Emperor Frederick the first, certain preachers passed into that country, and profited much; among others, there was one Mainard of Lubec, who for this cause was consecrated Bishop of Livonia by the Archbishop of Breme. He had for successor Bertold Abbot of Cisteaux, who entering into fight against the enemies of his profession was slain. For this cause they brought the order of the knights of the sword into Livonia, to defend the preachers & their doctrine by arms. This order growing weak, in the end united itself by the Pope's authority with the Teuton knights, and in stead of knights of the sword, they were called knights of the cross, and after that time the great masters of Livonia began to acknowledge the great master of Prussia for superior; the which continued unto the time of Albert of Brandebourg, who freed them for a certain sum of money, in the year of our Redemption 1513. There were at that time five bishoprics in Livonia, that is to say, Derpt, Asilia, Oefelia, Curland, and Rivaille, with the archbishopric of Rig. In the year of our Salvation 1528, the great master and the knights did openly embrace the opinion of Luther, the which had by little & little crept into Livonia, as it had done formerly into Prussia: yet all the Bishops continued constant for a time. In the year of Grace 1557, the Knights made war against the Archbishop of Rig, being of the house of Brandebourg, for that he would not adhere unto their opinion, and took him prisoner; but fearing Sigismond king of Poland, who had taken arms in his favour, they set him at liberty, and restored him to his former estate: After whose death, Rig fell into the power of the Polonians. Soon after, the order of Crosse-cariers ended, by the death of William of Furstenberg: but before that this order was extinct, these knights were assailed by the duke of Muscovia, and being dispossessed of the greatest part of their Estates, they put themselves under the protection of Sigismond king of Poland, who notwithstanding gave them small succours. In the mean time the Muscovite took the town of Derpt, and most part of the rest, and transporting the Livonians into other places, planted colonies of Muscovites there. On the other side, john king of Sueden, having taken arms against the Muscovite, scised upon Rivaille, Nerve, and some other places of that province, and Magne brother to the king of Denmark, made himself master of Oeselie, and Curland, in which is the Bishopric of Find. In the end, Stephen king of Poland made war against john, great Duke of Muscovie, and forced him to yield Livonia unto him, to avoid a greater inconvenience.  
There are in this province six sorts of people, that is to say, Estons, Germane▪ Suedens, Danes, Muscovites, and Polonians. The Estons are originaries of the country, and they have a particular language. Amid so many charges (for that they have been sometimes under the Knights, sometimes under the Suedens, both which were of contrary opinions, & sometimes under the Muscovite, who is a Schismatic) they have without any spiritual aid preserved their old religion. It is not credible how much they honour Priests: they carry them salt, candles, and new first-fruits, to the end they may bless them: They have Churches built long since in the country, the which they frequent with great devotion, and make great account of holy water. Every one takes an Apostle for his Protector. They used confession, but it is in a manner quite forgotten, they have been so long without Priests. The like we may say of many other their Popish ceremonies and Sacraments. Finally, they are so ignorant of the ceremonies of Christian religion, as you may scarce found any one in a village that can make the sign of the Cross, or say his Paternoster, and it is difficult to help them therein, by reason of the difference of their language.  
The Germane devil in cities which they have built for the most part. Rig is the Metropolitan of Livonia, where there were no remainders of popery, but one monastery of religious women, in the which there were two Nuns in the year of our Redemption 1587., (whereof one was a hundred years old, and the other little less) until that king Stephen had built a College for jesuits, who were expelled by the persuasion of the Ministers, in the year of our Salvation 1587. And as they talked of bringing them back again, the death of king Stephen made frustrate that design: but they were restored in the year of Grace 1591., by the authority of king Sigismond and the Estates of the realm. Those places which are held by the kings of Sueden and Denmark, have small remainders of the Romish religion, and they are wholly deprived of the exercise thereof.  
As for those towns where the Polonians have planted themselves, they have laboured, and do daily, to reduce them to the Romish Church. To which end, they have a College of jesuits at Derpt, a town almost equal unto Rig, and upon the frontiers of Muscovia. And to conclude the discourse of this country, king Sigismond made an edict in the year of Christ 1589, by the which he did forbidden the Ministers of Luther's doctrine to preach in Livonia.  
As for Poland, the opinions of Luther and Calvin have been in a manner generally received, especially by the nobility of the country: King Sigismond Augustus seemed to favour them, and gave them great liberty; but Henry his successor, and after him Stephen Battorie opposed themselves.  
As for the Lituanians, they were in old time subject to the Muscovites: but Bartic great Can of Tartary, having in a manner vanquished the Russians, they of Lituania, whereof Erdizuil was then prince withdrew themselves from under their command. Afterwards Mindoch, great Duke of Lituania, become a Christian, and was honoured with the title of a King by Pope Innocent the third, but he returned soon to Idolatry. Finally, in the year 1386, the fourteenth of February, jagellon, great duke of Lituania, received the Christian faith, and was baptized, and having married the Infanta of Poland, he caused all his subjects of Lituania to be baptized. But by reason of the little care they have had to instruct them since, the greatness of the country, the mixture of the Russians (who, besides heresy and schism, have a thousand strange superstitions) and by reason also of the disturbance of the Lutherans; and other opinions of their time, the inhabitants have not been confirmed in the faith: for in Lituania and Samogithia, which is one of her dependences, they discover in many places many heads of Idolatry. In some places they do worship a domestic god, whom they call Distipan, that is to say, Lord of the Smoke, or of the Chimney; and they do offer unto him a couple of pullets, and make great feasts to his honour. Four miles from Vilne, in a village of the kings, called Lovanaschi, they do at this day worship Serpents.  
The Samogithians do yet in many places nourish certain black serpents which have four feet, and they behold them going forth and returning back again with great superstition; and if any disaster happen unto them, they impute it to the little honour they have done unto these serpents. They do also bear great honour to fire, lightning, woods, to the Sun, to the Moon, and to trees which are very high, or that are remarkable for their age. In many places of Lituania they do sacrifice fat sows to the goddess Tellus, or the Earth, and divers beasts to the god Ziemienni. There are also some Mahometans, since that Vitolde prince of Lituania began in the year 1399 a hoard of Tarta●ians, and ledged it upon the river of Vache two miles from Vilne, suffering them to live after the Mahometan manner; and there are also some in other places. The Zuingliens many years since built a college at Vilne with great charge, and there instructed all the youth of Lituania: but at this day it is in a manner desert by means of the jesuits, to whose schools (for the reputation of their doctrine) all in general sand their children, and th●re are daily many men of account converted. The authority and great zeal of the house of Radivil doth help much in Lituania to advance the Romish religion.  
As for the South Russians, the nobility for the most part follows the Church of Rome (notwithstanding that there be some which are otherwise affected) and the people acknowledge the authority of the Patriarch of Constantinople, and follow the errors of the Grecians. At this present in all Russia, comprehending also Lituania, they do number but five Romish or Latin bishoprics, that is to say, Vilne, Samogithia, Kiovia, janou●, and Luceoria with the archbishopric of Leunpurg: but the Russians have two Archbishoprickes, one of Vilne, and the other of Leunpurg (this last carries the title of Metropolitan) and six bishoprics, that is, Polosque, Volodemire, Luceoria, Pinsce, Kiovia, and Presmil. There is also at Leunpurg an Archbishop or Patriarch of the Armenians, for that many of that nation traffic in this town, & at Camenis and there abouts. Volhinia (which is comprehended under Russia as well as Podolia) is the abode of the duke of Ostrogoye, who hath under him above four thousand Feudataries. He is the chief of them that live after the Greek manner.  
To conclude, the provinces subject to the crown of Poland, which are near unto the Baltic sea (the which are Prussia and Livonia) participate much with the opinions of Germany: those which cofine with Silesia, Moravia, and Hongarie are infected with the heresies of their neighbours: but they that advance towards the South and East follow for the most part the errors of the Grecians, and are not free from the opinions of these times.  
But to the end you may the more easily judge of the number of schismatics, I will set down two examples. Luc●orta a town of Volhinia contains about a thousand families, whereof there are one hundred and seven of Romish Catholics, and the other are Russians, Grecians, and some Armenians. In the town of Poloce which king Stephen won from the Muscovites, the Grecians have seven Churches, and the Latins but one, and that hath continued many years without a priest. There are many in base Poland which follow late opinions, yet the number of Papists is much greater. As for high Poland it is less infected, which grows chiefly by the care of the Archbishops of Gnesne, to whose jurisdiction it doth in a manner belong. They are almost all Papists at Polosque, and Vladislavia, but especially in Massovia, where you shall scarce found any one that makes public profession of any other religion.   

¶ A GENEALOGY OF THE DUKE'S AND KING'S OF POLAND.  
LEch was the first which had command over the Polacks, but the histories of Poland do not set down at what time he obtained this principality.  
After his death his children, and his children's children did rule according to their degrees of age. Their deeds and the times of their governments, are not noted in histories.  
The race of Lech being wholly extinct, the princes and chief noblemen resolved in the beginning to choose and establish some prince over them: but in the end they were all of opinion to live at liberty, so as they made choice of twelve Vavoides or Palatins to administer justice to all men and to govern the State. Long after the Polonians being weary of the government of Palatins, for that they rather affected their own private profit, than the public good, would have a prince to govern them, and made choice of Gracebus, who lived at the foot of the Sarmatick hills, near unto the river of Vistula. It was he that built Gracchovia.  
He left for his successor Gracchus his eldest son. They hold that it was four hundred years before the birth of our Saviour. This Gracchus eldest son to the first, having taken possession of Poland, was slain by his brother, for which fratricide he grew odious and detestable to all men; who seeing himself thus hated died of grief. Then the inhabitants of Gracchovia received Vande their sister for their princess. They say that she did sacrifice herself unto the gods for a great victory which she obtained against the Teutons, casting herself from the top of a bridge into the river of Vistula.  
The posterity of Gracchus failing, the people mad a new choice of twelve men to govern the country: but they fell into dissension, and in the mean time the enemy entered Poland by force, and spoilt it, the governors making no resistance. The people seeing this, they did choose for their Sovereign prince a valiant man, well experienced in war, and very discreet, called Pre●islaus, to whom they gave the name of Lesko, by reason of his great policy. He was the fist governor after Lech the first of that name. After his death they made a young man duke, who was called Lesko the second.  
He left his son Lesko the third for his successor, who reigned very wisely, and had one lawful son called Popyel, and twenty bastards. He left the principality to Popyel, and to either of the rest a province.  
The children of Lesko the third.  

Popyel, lawful.  
Boleslaus.  
Casimire.  
Vladislaus.  
Vratislaus.  
Oddo.  
Beruin.  
Pribislaus.  
Premislaus.  
jaxa.  
Semian.  
Semovite.  
Semonislaus.  
Bogdale.  
Spitzigure.  
Spitzmere.  
Sbignee.  
Sobeslaus.  
Vissimire.  
Czessimire.  
Vislaus.   
Popyel being installed disliked the mountains of Gracchovia, and trasported his seat to Gnesne which stands in the plain: afterwards this place displeased him, so as he made choice of a new abode among the lakes, and there built the town of Cruicnize, the which he made the seat of his principality. In the end he was eaten with rats.  
After the death of Popyel, the Polonians did choose for their duke a countryman called Pyast, who made honey: he was a man of a small stature but very strong.  
Semovite son to Pyast succeeded him, and did much extend the limits of the realm. He left one son very young, called  
Lesko, which was in the time of the Emperor Arnold, and of Michael Emperor of Greece.  
Lemom●slamus his son succeeded him, and afterwards left the principality to his son.  
Miesko, who reigned in the year of Grace 963. Some call him Mietzlaus: he made himself a Christian at the instance of Boleslaus king of Bohemia, whose daughter he married called Dambro●ke.  
●●●●slauses his son succeeded him, and in the year of Grace 984 married judith daughter to Geysa of Hongarie. He was created king by the Emperor Otho, and crowned in the year 1001, for before all his Estate was but a duchy, and the princes were called dukes and governors. He died in the year 1014.  
●ietzko, or Mietzlaus his son succeeded him. He did nothing but by the Council o● 〈◊〉 wife, and was wholly given to all sorts of pleasures: for this cause the people 〈◊〉 his father had subdued, retired themselves from his obedience, namely, the Bohe●●● and Moravians: yet he kept the Russians (who also would have revolted) under his ●●●●ction.  
●●●simire his son, after that he had been a Monk at Clugny, was made king, and left 〈◊〉 Cloister by the Pope's permission, upon condition that every head of a family in the realm of Poland (except gentlemen) should pay a penny every year to S. Peter's successors. He was crowned at Gnesne in the year of Grace 1041, and died in the year 1058.  
●oleslauses his eldest son was crowned king the same year 1058. He gave himself to ●● disorder and dissoluteness, and being reprehended by Stanislaus Bishop of Craccho●●, who did excommunicate him seeing him obdurate in his sin, he slew him with one ●ow of a sword. The Pope hearing it, took the crown from the realm of Poland, and ●●solued all the subjects from their obedience to the king, who soon after fell mad in hungary, whether he had retired himself, and died.  
●ladislauses his brother succeeded him, in the year of our Redemption 1082, but he ●s not crowned, notwithstanding that he was called King, for that the Bishops feared disobey the Pope. Finally, finding himself to be oppressed with old age, he divided his ●●me to his two sons: he gave the better part to his lawful son, called Boleslaus; and ●●●ignee his bastard, Massovia, high Poland, Pomeran, and Prussia: he died in the ye●● of our Salvation 1102.  
〈◊〉 realm of Poland being thus divided, Sbignee made war against his brother Bo●●●●● who did easily vanquish him, and brought all that under his subjection which 〈◊〉 held: so as this miserable man was forced to cast himself at his brother's feet, and 〈◊〉 a grant of him to remain duke of Massovia. In the end, seeing his brother to 〈◊〉 rebellious, he caused him to be slain. After many brave exploits, having lost a 〈◊〉, he died, as they say of grief, in the year 1139.  
●●●●slauses his eldest son, to whom he had given for his part, the lands of Gracchovia, Stra●●ia, Lancicia, Slese, Pomerand, and the sovereignty of the realm, was chosen sovereign prince, according to his testament: but not content with his portion (which was ●●●●ght part of the realm) he commanded them all not to obey his brethren, and raised 〈◊〉 against them: but they entered into Gracchovia, and won the castle, forcing him to●● out of Poland, and to fly into Germany to Conrade king of Romans.  
●●●slauses, called the Crespe or Curled, his brother, by the consent of his other brethren, 〈◊〉 chief noblemen of the realm, was made sovereign lord of the country, after ●●●●●ght of Vladislaus, in the year of Grace 1146. He died in the year 1173, and made 〈◊〉 to the benefit of his only son Lesko.  
●●●●zlauses, uncle to Lesko, and brother to Casimir, was chosen for sovereign duke of 〈◊〉 Poland, & duke of Pomerand, whereunto they added Gracchovia, with the whole ●●●●nce: but for that he become a tyrant, they set Casimir his younger brother in his place, 〈◊〉 died suddenly in the year 1192, having taken a certain drink.  
●esko, eldest son to Casimir, surnamed the Fair, succeeded him, Mietzlaus being discontented therewith, wrought so with Helen mother to Lesko, as he being very old, re●●●●ed the possession of the monarchy, and of Gracchovia. But afterwards going into 〈◊〉 Poland, Lesko was again put into the castle of Gracchovia: yet Mietzlaus was 〈◊〉 restored to the sovereignty thereof in the year 1202. But he died soon after, 〈◊〉 the signory to Lesko, who died in the year 1227.  
●●leslauses, the chaste, succeeded his father Lesko, and died in the year 1274 having 〈◊〉 years. Wherein we must observe that Conrade, who had carried himself as tutor 〈◊〉 children of Lesko▪ governed from the year 1227 unto 1243.  
●●●●rie, the Bearded, was successor to Boleslaus the Chast.  
〈◊〉, the Black, came after him, and died in the year 1287.  
Doleslaus, duke of Masovia, was chosen after him, but he was deposed.  
Henry, surnamed the Wise, succeeded him, and died in the year of Christ 1290.  
Henry, son to Boleslaus, duke of Legnits, was his successor, and after his death his two dukedoms were divided to two dukes: that of Gracchovia fell to Premislaus, and Vladislaus Locketec● had the duchy of Sandomiria.  
The Polonians considering that it was more expedient for them to have but one Prince, whom they might all acknowledge, did, in the year 1295, in the month of june, make choice of Premislaus the second for their king, and he was anointed and crowned in the Church of Gnesne: but he was within a short time slain through the hatred of the great men of the realm, being 38 years old, having reigned only 7 months, & 11 days. 〈…〉, son to Casimire, was afterwards chosen king: but by reason of his dissoluteness, he was deposed in the year 1300, and they did choose  
Venceflous, king of Bohemia, who was crowned at Gnesne, and died in the year 1305. 〈◊〉 Lochteck found means afterwards to make himself duke of Gracchovia, or 〈◊〉 but some Polonians in the mean time did choose for their prince Henry 〈◊〉 of Gragon●a; and those were they of high Poland, Posnan, and Calisia: but Lotchteck had always the victory against his Competitor Henry, and was accepted for Sovereign by all the other Polonians. This Lochte●k obtained the royal crown from the Pope, the which he took in the Church of Gracehovia, in the year 1320. He died in the year of our Redemption 1333.  
Casimire his son succeeded him, and reigned forty years.  
L●wis, King of Hongarie, Ca●simires sister's son, was chosen King of Poland, & crowned in the year 1370. He governed the realm twelve years.  
〈◊〉 or Edige the youngest of the two daughters of Lewis, was crowned Queen of Poland, and the Polonians gave her power to govern the realm until that she were married unto some Prince, in the end, jagellon, great duke of Lituania, being yet an Idolater, married 〈◊〉, upon condition, that he should become a Christian, and unite the du●●●● of 〈◊〉 to the crown of Poland.  
jagellon, great duke of Lituania, was king of Poland by means of his marriage with 〈◊〉, in the year 1386, and at his baptism he was called Vladislaus. He died in the year of our Salvation 1434.  
Vladislaus his son succeeded him: he reigned ten years, and died being one and mont●● years old.  
〈◊〉 his brother, great duke of Lituania, was called to the crown of Poland, in the year 1445, and died in the year of our Redemption 1492.  
john Albert, eldest son to Casimire, succeeded him, and died in the year 1501.  
After the death of john Albert, the Polonians did choose Alexander his brother, who died at Vilnein a voyage against the Tartarians, being five and forty years old.  
Sigismond, the youngest of all Casimires children, was chosen king of Poland, in the year 〈◊〉. He died in the year 1549.  
Sigismond Augustus, his son, succeeded his father the same year, and died in the year of Christ 1573.  
Henry of Valois was called to the crown of Poland, in the year 1573, and parted out 〈◊〉 about the midst of October to go thither: but Charles the ninth, the French 〈…〉 dead, he left Poland, to come and reign in his own native 〈◊〉 in the year 1574.  
〈…〉, of the house of the Princes of Transiluania, succeeded him, and made long 〈…〉 others, with very happy success. He died in the year 1687.  
〈…〉 son to the King of Sueden, and of Anne Queen of Poland, succeeded him the 〈…〉 against his uncle duke Charles, sometimes with loss, sometimes with advantage. This war keeps the Polonians 〈◊〉 their armies against the Turk, or the Muscovite.      


❧ A DISCOURSE OF THE ESTATE OF THE KING OF DENMARK.  

The Contents.  
WHat Islands and countries the realm of Denmark contains: the bounds and principal parts, whereof the first is called Inia, or jutland, an ancient habitation of the Cimbrians: the limits, length, and breadth. 2. Of four great Bishoprics contained in julia, and what governments, cities, and castles are under every Bi●●●cke. 3. Of the huge rock of Skarring klint, and of the fearful Angle of julia, and the 〈◊〉 of the duchies of Schleszwich and Holsatia, lying in South jutia. The beginning of 〈◊〉 two names, their towns and castles. 4. Of Scania, a province in old time divided into 〈◊〉, the governments, towns, and castles, and of the admirable clock of Land represen●●●● the motions of the Stars and Spheres of heaven. 5. Of the Island of Selande, the 〈◊〉, breadth towns, and castles. 6. Of the Island of Fionia, or Fuynen, divided into four 〈◊〉 governments, the situation and limits, with the principal towns and castles con●●● within it. 7. Of Norway, and the bounds, castles, governments, and towns. 8. Of 〈◊〉 of Island, divided into four parts: the bishoprics, and Monasteries. 9 Of the 〈◊〉 the air, and fertility of the province of Denmark: of their good pastures, and 〈◊〉: of the fields, yielding every three years interchangeably fish and corn: mines of 〈◊〉 silver, lead, and copper: of the fishing of cod. 10. A fountain whose smoke trans●●●●● that which it toucheth into stone. 11. Of venomous fishes exceeding long. 12. Of the 〈◊〉 of Island covered with snow, and vomiting forth flames and fire at the foot of them. Of the beginning of the Cimbrians, and the descent of that nation into Italy. 14. Of 〈◊〉 complexion and disposition both of body and mind of the people of Denmark, their 〈◊〉 and manner of living and apparel. 15. Their wealth in the traffic of cattle, 〈◊〉 horses, cloth of Watman, soulpher, and salt butter. 16. Of the revenues of the king of 〈◊〉 and wherein it consists. 17. What number of ships he is able to arm. 18. How ma●●rementss (called Herets) there are in Denmark. Of the form and ceremonies observed at ●●●nation of their kings. 19 Of the five orders which are in Denmark, and of the chief 〈◊〉 and offices of this realm. 20. Of the government and particular policy of every 〈◊〉. 21. The doctrine of Luther, when and by whom it was brought into this realm. 〈◊〉 Catalogue of the kings which have reigned in Denmark.   

THe realm of Denmark contains a great tract of land and sea, with many Islands, that is to say, the Cimbrique Chersonese) at this day called jutia) Ditmarsia, Scania, Halland, and all the Islands which lie within the gulf of Codan, betwixt jutia and Scania: and this realm hath under its subjection, all the navigations of Norway, the which is now united to this crown. They do also place in it the duchy of Holsatia, and the Island of Island.  
denmark is only united in two places to the firm land. It is bounded upon the 〈◊〉 the german sea, upon the East by the Baltic, towards the North by Norway, Sueden; and upon the South, Holsatia and Pomeran. The whole country of 〈…〉 consists of many parts, whereof the chief are jutia, Fionia, Seland, and 〈…〉 the Islands which he near unto these parts.  
〈◊〉, commonly called 〈◊〉 land, which some hold to be Gothia, the ancient abode of 〈◊〉 Cimbrians, is 〈…〉 C●mbrique Chersonese by Historians, & Historiographers; and it is divided into South and North. It hath for bounds upon the South, the river of Eyder, and is about eighty miles long, running from the river of Elb towards the North. The greatest breadth is not abou● twenty miles. The Northern part extending itself towards Norway, ends near unto Scage, a town of great note amongst mariners, by reason of the ●●atss which they found neerre unto it. The greatest breadth of this country is near unto Alebourg, for that the gulf of Limford passing by it, and running through lutia towards the West, and (except a small space) dividing the jurisdiction of Wen●●●●● from the rest, doth in a manner make an Island of all this country, and extending itself in the end by a large channel, and making many Islands with her branches, doth distinguish and limit many Provinces with her course. The jutia is divided into four 〈◊〉 bishoprics that is to say, Rip, Arrhus, Aalbourg, and Wibourg.  
The bishopric of Rip contains thirty governments, seven Cities, and ten royal 〈◊〉. Queen D●rothi●, widow to Chrillierne the third, erected an University at Koldinge, at her own charge. The diocese of Arrhus contains one and thirty Governments, seven Cities, and five Castles. The town of Arrhus is famous by reason of the Port which makes the great Cape of Hellenis, extending itself for the space of two miles, from the castle of Cahoe, by the country of Molls, unto the high mountain of Elle●●sbae●gh. This diocese hath under it the Islands of Samsoe, Hielm, Zuen, Hiarnoe, Gemo, (it may be Hilgenes) and many others. The bishopric of Vandalia, of 〈◊〉 or of Burglavia, comprehends thirteen Governments, and six Cities. The parts 〈…〉 are, Wensyssel, Mandheret, Thyland, and Morsoe, Wensyssel, or Vensilia, 〈◊〉 to say, the Land or Seat of the Vandals, contains six governments, three 〈◊〉, and one Castle. Mount Alberg is to be seen in this country, whereas they 〈◊〉 certain marks and remainders of ancient Giants. The neighbour Islands are 〈◊〉, Nertzhoim, Ty●●●olm, and others. There is a wonderful huge rock to 〈◊〉 in Hanher●t, the which is called Skarringklint. This country hath under it 〈◊〉 of Oland and O●eholm, four governments, one Town called Thyrstad, 〈…〉 Christei●●e● ● founded an University, and the castle of Orunme. It hath under it the 〈◊〉 of Ha●sholm, Ostholm, jegen, Cisland, Egholm, Bodum, and Morsee, three governments, one City called Nicapia, and the castle of Lundslod, which hath near unto it an Island ca●●ed Age●oe. The diocese of Wibourg embraceth sixteen governments, three Cities, and as many Castles. Near unto the Peninsula of Wenslie, where it ends in a point, is the Angle of I●tia, very dangerous and fearful to Seafaring men: such is all the Western shore of I●tia, so as they that will pass by Sea to Norway, or into the East country, are forced to go far about to fly that coast.  
South jutia, called Nordalbinge, comprehends the two dukedoms of Schleswick, 〈◊〉 Ho●●atia▪ The dukedom of Schleswick takes his name of the chief town. This 〈◊〉 was in old time called the Dukedom of jutia, which waldemar, great grandchild to Abel king of Denmark, received first in see of King Henry, about the year of our 〈…〉 The general government of these two dukedoms belongs unto 〈…〉 Adolph duke of Holsatia, interchangeably one after 〈…〉 of Sch●eswick He●debui or Heideba, saying, That a 〈◊〉 of Denmark called 〈…〉 it that name. This town is very commodious 〈…〉 for that it hath a good 〈◊〉. Near unto this place is the fort or castle of 〈◊〉, where there is so great a 〈◊〉 house, as some years there have passed 50000 〈◊〉 of Denmark into Germany, wh●●h have paid toll. In this dukedom is the 〈◊〉 of Flensbo●rg, 〈◊〉 among very high mountains, and upon the shore of the 〈…〉 Sea, whe●● there is a port so co●●●●dious, so deep, and so safe, as in a manner 〈…〉 may 〈◊〉 and vulade their ships close to their houses. There are also in 〈…〉, the towns of Hussena, and Haderslebia. The Princes, Lords, and 〈◊〉 many houses and castles.  
〈◊〉, which takes his name of the abundance of wood which is there, (the which 〈◊〉 Holt in the Germane tongue) hath for bounds towards the East, the river of 〈◊〉 the West, the river of Store; towards the South, Elbe; and upon the North, 〈◊〉. It is divided into four parts, which be, Ditmarsia, Holsatia, Stormaria, and 〈◊〉. The chief towns of Holsatia are, Segeberg, which is in Wagria, four miles 〈…〉; Itzohoa, which hath a goodly situation; Store, which is compassed about 〈◊〉 goodly navigable river; Chilonia, commonly called Kile, the which hath a good 〈◊〉 whether merchants come from Germany, Livonia, Denmark, and Sueden. There 〈◊〉 the towns of Crempe & Reinholdbourg; and in Ditmarsia, Meldorp, Heininkste, ●●●ell●kste, and in Stomaria Hambourg upon Elb.  
〈◊〉 is a great province of the realm of Denmark, joining unto Sueden. Some call ●●●●danavia, instead of Scondania, that is to say, pleasant Dania, or the pleasant coun●●● Denmark; others call it Scania, some Sconingie, and vulgarly Sconen. This 〈◊〉 is compassed round about with the Sea, but of one side, where there is an arm of 〈◊〉 which runs towards the North, and then it bends to the East, where it joins 〈◊〉 Sueden; but betwixt them there are great forests and rough rocks, by the which ●●●doe hardly pass out of Scania into Gothia, which is a part of Sueden, so as it is sleasie to go by Sea. This province in old time was divided into two dukedoms, 〈◊〉 to say, the one of Holland, and the other of Blekinge, and now it contains three ●●●entie governments, and five and twenty Towns. The chief town is Land, 〈◊〉 the Archbishop of the realm makes his residence. There is also the town of ●●●●ge or Ellebogen, the chief of all the country, by reason of their fairs and 〈◊〉 in Holland stands the castle of Warbourg, built upon the top of a very high 〈◊〉. The Islands near unto Scania are those of Landoe, Hannoe, Bornholm, a ●●●land divided into four governments, and containing three Towns, and one 〈◊〉 ●o●land, where is the ancient town of Wisby, sometimes of great traffic, 〈◊〉 day it is neither so well peopled, nor so rich. Near unto the strait which is 〈◊〉 Sound, is a royal castle called Cronebourg, where there is a garrison lying 〈◊〉 farthest part of the Island of Selande. Frederic the second king of Denmark, ●he foundations thereof in the Sea with very great expense, and now this building 〈…〉 nothing can shake it. There is an admirable clock in the town of Land, 〈◊〉 great art, where there is to be seen the motions of the Sun and Moon, 〈◊〉 like things, and whensoever the hour strikes, two horsemen encounter one 〈◊〉 who give so many blows as the great bell which hangs in the Tower sounds 〈◊〉 ●here are many other singularities in this clock, as the three Kings or wise men 〈◊〉 to worship jesus Christ in the Virgin's arms, whenas the hour strikes. But 〈◊〉 make a full description it might be very tedious.  
〈◊〉 and of Selande, or Sialand, is the greatest of all those of Denmark. It is about 〈◊〉 journey long, and almost as broad. It comprehends fifteen Towns, and by all Castles. Among the towns they do reckon Haffnie or Copenhagen, 〈◊〉 town of all Denmark, great, and rich, having a very commodious and safe 〈◊〉 reason of the nearness of the Island of Amagger. Above Copenhagen is 〈◊〉 near unto the castle of Cronebourg, whereof I have made mention, and on 〈◊〉 of the sea is the castle of Helsinbourg, with a town of the same name. 〈◊〉 whereas Selande and Scania approach so near together with their Capes, 〈…〉 a small space of Sea, called the Sound. There all ships which sail 〈◊〉 are forced to pass, and to pay toll unto the king of Denmark. And for 〈…〉 of either side, whenas necessity requires, the king may so stop this 〈…〉 ships as he may keep any army from passing. Oftentimes there arrive 〈…〉 of ships, yea three hundred in one day, from divers parts of Europe. 〈…〉 in this country, sometimes a Bishopric, where are to be seen 〈…〉 King's and Dukes: but now it is poor and unpeopled. Selande hath under i● the Islands of Amagria, Huen, or Vueen, Moenesland, in which is the town of ●●●goe, and many others.  
●onia, commonly called Euynen, holds the first rank among the Islands of the gulf of Codan, next unto Seland. She takes her name of her beauty, for, that it is wonderful pleasant, as well by reason of the situation, as for that it yields: and it is separated from Denmark by so final a strait, called Middelfar Sundt, as it seems to join unto it. Upon the West part it looks towards jutia; and upon the East, Selande; and some hold that it is in the midst of all the realm of Denmake. It is 12000 paces long, and four broad. The chief town is Ottersche, seated in the midst of the Island. Fiona is divided into four and twenty governments, sixteen Towns, and six royal Castles. The other towns about Ottersche (which is as it were their centre) are in a manner equally ●●●ant, and so built upon the Sea shore, as they traffic commodiously, not only into the baltic Sea, but also to Sueden, Norway, Russia, Flanders, and Germany. Among these towns, they make mention of Nibourch, Sienbourch, Faborch, Assens, Bogens, Middlefar, and Ketteminde. The chief castles are, Neubourg, Magenschow, Hinsga●●●, Eschebourg, and the Court of Rugard. They have in this Island many villages, and gentlemen's houses. There are two goodly Churches in the town of Ottensche or Otteriche; the one dedicated to S. Canut, the other to S. Francis.  
The Islands comprehended under Fionia, are ninety in number, lying towards the South, and for the most part habitable. The chief are Langeland, Lawlande, Falstria, Are, Alfe, Tosinge, and Aroe. That of Langeland is seven Germane leagues long. In it is the town of Rudkeping, and the royal castle of Tranekere, with many villages, parishes, and gentlemen's houses. Falstria is four Germane leagues long, and contains the towns of Stubecopen, and Nicopen. Aria, half a league distant from Elysia, hath three parishes, and some gentlemen's houses, with the town and castle of Koping. Both it and Elysia belong unto the dukedom of Slesuic. Elysia, or also, or Alsen, having two leagues in length, is not far from the dukedom of Sleswic, bending towards the gulf of Flenbourg, and is divided from the first land of the English by the same gulf. There is in the Island of Alsen● the town of Sundebourg, with a castle of the same name: then Norhoch, Osserholm, Die Holle, and Gammelgard. It hath thirteen parishes well peopled, which are able upon any occasion to furnish a good number of soul●●erss.  
Tassinge or Tossinge, a chief Island among many others, near unto Swinebourg, a town of Fionia, is a league long. From the town of Assens in this island, it is two leagues unto jutia: and from Nibourg in Seland, four leagues by the baltic sea, the which is many times very dangerous.  
Aroe, lying at the entry of the duchy of Sleswic, whereas they pass into Fionia, by the gulf of Arse to the town of Ascens, contains four villages peopled. Near unto it they reckon the Islands of Romso, Endelo, Ebelo, Boko, Brando, Zoroe, Aggernis, Hellenis, jordo, Bi●kolm, and others. There is also the Island of Huene, whereas there is to be seen the castle of Vranibourg, full of mathematical instruments, very admirable, and sure. There is also the Island of Malmogie, little, but very good, where sometimes were the castles of Synderbourg, Nordbourg, Karhecidia, and Hamera, but at this day there is nothing but the ruins and foundations to be seen.  
Norway, which is subject to the king of Denmark, hath for bounds upon the South, Denmark; upon the West, the Ocean Sea; upon the East, Sueden; and to the North, Lapland, from the which it is divided by very high craggy mountains, the which are always covered with snow. Norway was in old time a flourishing realm, whose power extended far, but at this day it is subject unto the Danes. They do reckon five royal castles, and seven principal governments, whereof the first towards the South is Ba●●●s. The towns subject unto it are, Marstrand, seated in a Peninsula, than Koengeef, Congel, and Oddewold, or Odwad. The second castle is at Aggerhuse, which hath un●●● the towns of Accloye, the Episcopal seat, than Tonsberg, or Koningsberg, 〈◊〉 Salt●bourg, and Schin, or Schon, and the great and lesser Hamaria. The third castle i● Bergerhuse, under which are the towns of Berg and Staffanger. Berg or Bergue 〈…〉 of the greatest traffic, and a storehouse of corn for all Norway, whereas 〈◊〉 governor and Bishop remain. There is also a very commodious and safe port: 〈…〉 castle is that of Nidrosia, vulgarly called Trundtheim, and in old time 〈◊〉 sometimes the Metropolitan of all Norway, but now reduced to a borough. The 〈◊〉 is Wardhus, the which is no ways fortified, but is only appointed for the go●●● of that country to live in during the Summer season.  
〈◊〉 which some take for Thule (& are therein contradicted by Saxon the Grammarian, 〈◊〉, Milius, iovius, and Percer) is situated, not under the first Meridian, as some 〈◊〉 served, but eight degrees beyond it. It is in length one hundred Germane leagues, 〈◊〉 which some have added four and forty more, and the breadth is sixty and five 〈◊〉 leagues. It hath been subject to the kings of Denmark since the year of 〈◊〉 1260, and is divided into four parts: they call the Eastern part, Aust, 〈◊〉, the Western Westfiordung, the Northern part Nortlendingafiordung, 〈◊〉 Southern Suidlendingafiordung. They have no towns, in stead whereof they 〈◊〉 mountains. This Island hath two bishoprics, Holam which hath under it the ●●●●steriess of Pingora, Remested, Modur, and Munkeniere; and that of Scalholt, 〈◊〉 hath under it the monasteries of Videy, Pirnebar, Kirckebar, and Sckirde. Some ●hat this Island is twenty days journey long.  

¶ The Quality.  
Northern jutia yields great store of wheat, rye, barley, and such like: it abounds 〈◊〉 in pasture in some parts, whereas they feed great store of oxen and kine, where●●●●● drive great numbers into foreign provinces, especially into Germany, whither 〈◊〉 yearly near one hundred and fifty thousand. They do also breed goodly 〈◊〉, whereof they transport good numbers into other countries. They take great 〈◊〉 fish in this sea, especially of herring. The inhabitants of this country are very 〈◊〉 Rheums, and Catharres, to the Squinance, and Pluresies.  
〈◊〉 South jutia, the duchy of Sleswic abounds in cattle, and that of Holsatia is full 〈◊〉 and forests, there are many great oaks, but generally beech trees, with the ●●●reof they do fat their swine, whereof they have great numbers. Their fields do changeably every three year yield great store of fish and come: for during three 〈◊〉 they till and sow their ground, and reap the corn: then three years following 〈◊〉 their pools overflow them to the end that the fish may feed upon the grass, and 〈◊〉 be made fat wit the mud which the water brings. They have neither vines nor 〈◊〉 in this country; but there is great store of wild beasts, and also many horses. 〈◊〉 many rivers which water this country, whereof the chief is Eidere: there 〈◊〉 others, but most of them may rather be termed brooks than rivers. On that side 〈◊〉 Baltic sea doth wash Holsatia, & the dukedom of Sleswic, it makes goodly 〈◊〉 which are very commodious for merchants; and in some parts they take great 〈◊〉 fish, especially of salmon. The country is plain and hath few mountains.  
〈…〉 doth not yield to any country for the bounty of the air, goodness of the ●●●moditie of ports, and riches of the sea, in the fishing of the lakes and rivers, in 〈◊〉, and in mines of gold, silver, copper, and lead.  
〈◊〉 Island of Gotland abounds with wheat, butter, cheese, and divers kinds of beasts. 〈◊〉 also goodly fir trees, and fair stones sit for building. Seland yields all kind 〈◊〉 in abundance.  
〈◊〉 hath a good soil, and very fruitful; for it yields abundance, especially of 〈…〉, and yet they never lay any compass upon their ground: and therefore 〈…〉 hath written that the entry into towns is very noisome, by reason of the dung 〈◊〉 they cast forth, they having no use thereof to soil their land: it doth also feed an 〈◊〉 number of oxen, kine, and horses. There are many forests in this Island, in which 〈◊〉 many goats, stags, hares, and foxes. The neighbour sea doth furnish it with great 〈◊〉 fish.  
The Island of Lawland yields so much wheat, and such abundance of small nuts, as i●●ss almost incredible: and that of Falstria doth also bear much wheat, and doth furnish her neighbours. That of Alfen is full of forests, replenished with stags, and many other beasts both fallow and black. There doth also grow abundance of rye, and they found good store of fish both in the sea and fresh waters. Their pastures are good, and therefore they feed great numbers of cattle. Malmogia is neither barren nor unprofitable in any part: it yields store of grain and abundance of first-fruits, and it breeds many horses, dear, hares, coneys, and partridges. It is very commodious for fishing. There is a little forest of hazel trees, whose nuts are never eaten with worms: and this soil doth not endure any badgers▪ and notwithstanding that the Island be little, yet there are many small brooks and fountains of fresh water; and amongst others there is one fountain which never freezeth, the which is very rare in those countries.  
In Norwa●e the air is very calm, so as the sea doth not freeze, and the snow continues not long. But the soil is not very fertile, and doth hardly serve to feed the inhabitants. It abounds in small cattle, and hath many wild beasts: amongst others they found whi●e bears which are of an extraordinary bigness: and in like manner, bevers. Finally the coast of Norway which lies upon the West hath many whales, against who●e fury the mariners use Castorium steeped, which is a present remedy; for that as soon as they cast it into the sea, these monsters hide themselves in the bottom of the water. In this sea they take great store of cod, which they call stockfish. They take it chiefly in januarie, for that it dries then soon by reason of the extremity of the cold.  
As for Island it is exceeding cold, and the land for the most part unmanured, especially towards the North, by reason of the Northern winds which blow with such vehemency, as it suffers not any thing to grow. It is frozen continually for the space of eight months: and yet in many places it is full of heat and fire under ground; the which by the Antiperistasis of the cold, which stops the pores of the earth, and takes from it the liberty of respiration, increaseth and kindles within the bowels of the earth. The land is not fit to receive any feed, neither doth it bear any wheat: but they hold an opinion that it yields such abundance of grass, as i● they do not sometimes keep their cattle from feeding, they are in danger to surfeit and die with fullness. jonas confesseth that there are not in this country any beasts of labour but horses and oxen; and the oxen and kine are without horns, but the sheep are not so. They have many little dogs, white falcons, and white ravens, the which are enemies unto the lambs and swine, and trouble them much. There are also bears, and white hares, and eagles which have white tails, the which Pl●●ie calls Pyga●geses. There is little wood throughout all the Island, whereas they fierce fi●d any thing but juniper trees.  
In many parts of this Island there are baths, and fountains of hotewater, and there is much wa●er which hath sulphur upon the top when it gins to grow cold. Towards the West there is a great lake whose exhalation and smoke transformers all into stone that it toucheth, or that is cast into it▪ of the which they writ one thing more admirable, which is, that a staff being planted within the ground, within less than two days you shall found the end which sticks in the ground converted into iron, that which is in the ●ater changed into stone, and that which remains in the air retains his own nature: whereof one writes that he made twice experience; but putting that end into the fire 〈…〉, to try if it would melt, it burned like unto coal. There is another 〈…〉 being drunk, kills, as if they had taken poison. Near unto the sea, in a place which they call Turlockshaven, there are two fountains of divers qualities, the 〈◊〉 and the other hot, the which they draw into one place by channels, and being ●ingled make very excellent hath 〈…〉 unto it there is another which casts forth a 〈◊〉 of the ●ast of wheat, wherewith they do easily cure the pox, whereunto they are 〈◊〉 subject. There is also a rock, no●●ar from the haven of Hanefordt, where there is 〈◊〉 like 〈…〉, but so 〈◊〉 deep a● it is not possible to see the water. If 〈…〉 it fall during half an hours space or more, as if 〈…〉 of copper, and presently the water mounts up unto the pits brin●e, yet 〈…〉: and after the like space that they had cast the stone, it falls again. This 〈…〉 very clear, yet no man durst ever taste of it, or touch it. In the midst of this 〈…〉 is a lake which casts forth so venomous a fume and smoke, as it kills the birds 〈…〉 it.  
〈…〉 the sea that lies near unto this Island, it doth furnish the inhabitants with great 〈◊〉. I should be very tedious if I should name them in particular; and 〈…〉 only speak of some few. There is a fish called Nahual, the which doth kill 〈◊〉 being eaten. It hath a tooth in the forehead, or forepart of the head, the which 〈◊〉 cubits long: some have sold it for Unicorns horn: and they hold it good 〈◊〉 poison. This monster is forty ells long. The Roider, another kind of fish, is one 〈◊〉 and thirty ells long, and hath no teeth. The meat is good and pleasant to eat, 〈◊〉 fat doth cure many infirmities. The Whale (which they call of Brittany) is 〈◊〉 long, and hath no teeth, but the tongue is seven ells long. There is also 〈◊〉 of Whale, which is seldom seen, the which is rather like unto an Island than 〈◊〉 There is also the Staurusualur, like in some ●ort unto a Thornebacke, but infinitely 〈◊〉 unto an Island, which overtur●es ships with his wings. They also found sea oxen 〈◊〉 colour, and many others.  
●●●re are three very high mountains in Island, whose tops are always covered with 〈◊〉 and at the foot they burn continually. The first is called Hecle or Heila; the se●●●●deda Croix; and the third Helge, that is to say, Holy. Near unto that of Hecle 〈◊〉 which is not far from the sea, there are mines of sulphur. This mountain 〈◊〉 continually, but no man knows with what fire, nor of what substance, yet it 〈◊〉 should be sulphur for that there is abundance in this Island. This mountain 〈◊〉 thunder, and sometimes it casts forth fire, sometimes flaming water, then black 〈◊〉 pumice stones in so great abundance, as it darkens the Sun, and makes the ●●●bitable within six miles round about. Sometimes when these tempests are past, 〈◊〉 is calm, the which happens when as the Western wind blows: some des●●●● desirous to search out the cause of this fire, fall oftentimes into those breaches 〈◊〉 the which are so covered with ashes, as they cannot see them. And if they cast 〈◊〉 into these caves, they are cast up again with a great bruit and noise: by 〈◊〉 they of the country say, That this place is the prison whereas damned souls 〈◊〉. And in truth there are strange things seen, and many Islanders, especi●●●●●hose that fish near unto this mountain, will tell the day when as a battle is 〈…〉 they know not the place: for (as they say) they see devils which go and 〈◊〉 souls with them. Every year, the ice which hath lyen continually 〈…〉 together, melting in the beginning of julie, there comes a great aboun●●●● 〈◊〉 the shore near unto Mount Heila, the which makes so great noise, as the 〈…〉 of the country say, that they be the cries and complaints of damned souls, 〈…〉 been tormented in the flame, or put into pieces of ice which float up and 〈◊〉 for the space of three months about this mountain. The mountain of Helge 〈◊〉 ●ame nature. There is moreover a gulf or a breach, whereas they see many 〈◊〉 and apparitions.   

¶ The Manners of the Ancients.  
〈…〉 this country was in old time the abode of the Cimbrians, it shall be fit to 〈…〉 something of that which the Ancients have taught us concerning his nation. 〈…〉 fell upon Italy one hundred and five years before the birth of Christ. 〈…〉 could not withstand their first attempt, nor Manilius the second, nor yet Cep●o the 〈◊〉 these were defeated, and put to flight, and Italy had been lost i● Marius had not 〈◊〉. These Cimbrians are come from the Cimmerians, who being entered far into 〈◊〉 being expelled by the Scythians, and bending st●ll towards the West, passed into 〈◊〉, and then into the Cimbrick Chersonese. Plutarch reports in the life of Marius, 〈…〉 said, that as often as the Cimbrians took arms (the which they did not always, but whenas the commodity of the season and time did suffer them) they did set upon the neighbour countries, calling the people that were in the army by one common na●e Celtoscythians: others say, that the Cimmerians, who have been always known unto the Grecians, were not many in number, but certain seditious people chased away by the Scythians, who past the fens of Meodites into Asia, under the conduct of Lygda●e, and that the most valiant stayed near unto the sea shore, and began to inhabit a country full of woods, which did reach unto the forest of Hercinia. Festus saith, That this word of Cimbrians doth signify in the Gauls language, thieves or Robbers.   

¶ The Manners at this time.  
THe Inhabitants of these Northern countries of jutia are cold and dry, of a good stature, fair of face, of a good colour, pleasant, suspicious, crafty, and provident in their affairs. They are most commonly healthful, but they are proud, and love their own, and esteem whatsoever they do. They eat and drink much and digest it well, and therefore they live long. They are very severe in their manners, and by reason of the great heat which they have inwardly, they are very subject to quarrels, and run rashly into dangers. They love voyages and hunting, and they do obstinately defend their opinions, and yet they are inclined to justice. They do easily learn all languages, and they love learning, and do religiously observe the contracts which they have made. They have many children, and their wives are delivered with difficulty. They are fair, discreet, and covetous, and know how to govern their household. Achilles Gassarus saith, That it was in this country whereas a Monk first invented Artillery. The inhabitants of Norway are simple, they love strangers, and entertain them well: There are not any thieves or pirates among them, at the lest the number is very small.  
The Islanders, when they first began to inhabit this Island, did not busy themselves to build any towns or villages, but every man planted himself where he thought it most pleasant, some upon hills, others in valleys, some in forests, and some near unto the Sea shore, building their houses of timber and flags, and making the windows in the roof. They lodge all under one roof, with their oxen and horses. They live very simply, and seek for no more than what nature gives unto man. Their mountains serve them for towns, and their fountains for delights. It is true, that since strangers have frequented this Island, by reason of fishing, they have brought many vices thither with their foreign merchandise. They put into verses the memorable deeds of their ancestors, or grave them in rocks. They live for the most part of fish, the which they dry, and then make meal of it, and so use it for their bread: but the men of note, and such as are more dainty, eat biscuit. In old time, water was their drink, and the richer sort drank milk●; but at this day, they know how to mingle it with corn, which is brought from other parts, and they hate to drink water alone. They of Lubec, Hamborowe, and Rostoch, who frequent this Island, carry meal, bread, beer, wine, English cloth, linen cloth, iron, steel, gold, silver, ribbons for the women, and wood for building and shipping. There are three sorts of men in this Island of whom they make account; for the base sort (having no means to have boats to fish) serve the richer. The first kind is of those which they call Zochmaders, that is to say, men of justice, for that in their language, Zoch signifies Right or justice. There are many of this kind which administer justice, and yet there are only twelve every year in charge, and all the people of the Island obey their judgements. But under these, who are as it were Sovereigns, there are five in every province who have charge thereof. These are chosen by the people out of the most ho●est amongst them, and every man may attain unto it, unless he hath been ●axed for some crime, or grown so poor as he is not able to entertain his family without 〈◊〉, for than they are refused, the first for the scandal, and the others for fear lest he 〈◊〉 be a charge to the Commonweal.  
●●other kind is of those which they call Bouden: and these are as it were nobles who 〈…〉 keep a● many fishermen and servants as they have boats and troops. 〈…〉 kind is of the Clergy, whereof there are very many amongst them, and these 〈…〉 from all imposts and customs which others pay. Many Islanders are excee●●●● proud for that they are very strong. There is no distinction of apparel betwixt 〈…〉 and women, neither is it easy to know one from another. The women are 〈…〉, but they know not how to attire themselves. They are generally given to 〈…〉, & have familiar spirits which do them service; and they only are held hap●●● 〈◊〉 fishing, which are called up in the night by the devil to go to fish: and notwithstanding any endeo●r of their ministers to purge them from this impiety, yet it is so 〈…〉 in their souls as they cannot leave it, such power hath Satan over them. It is 〈…〉 matter for them with the help of the devil to cell you a favourable wind, as 〈◊〉 been often tried by experience, and singing, to stay ships when they are under full 〈◊〉, and to free them when they are stayed, the devil having taught them a remedy 〈…〉 excrements and filthy ointments wherewith they do rub the prow and 〈…〉 of the ship, causing the spirits to fly away that stay it. They are not given to 〈…〉, having no ground fit for tillage, and they live only of butter, without salt, milk, 〈…〉, and fish, which serves them for a kind of bread, being ground into powder with 〈◊〉. They use neither physic nor physicians, yet they live so long, as many of them 〈…〉 been one hundred and fifty years old, or more. The greatest part of them nei●●● seenor eat any bread, and if at any time they buy wheat or meal from them that 〈…〉 them, they mingle it with milk, and keep it long for the delights of the 〈…〉 which they call Drabbel in their language. The Germane which traffic in 〈…〉 a certain place in the haven of Haffne●ordt, where under Tents they fell 〈…〉 shoes, cloaks, looking-glasses, knives, and such other merchandise of small 〈…〉 They come not unto the port, but they bring with them maidens fit to marry, 〈…〉 the merchants if they have any wives, and if they answer no, than they 〈…〉 night with them for bread, biscuit, or some other thing of small price: 〈…〉 father's lend their daughters to these merchants for a month, or for all the time 〈…〉 in this Island.  
〈…〉 all night under one roof, as I have said, they piss in one pot, and in the 〈…〉 their mouths, teeth, and hands, for many reasons, for that they say it 〈…〉, makes them strong, supples the sinews and hands, and keeps the 〈…〉. In Winter before and after the Solstice, whenas the Sun declines, 〈…〉 Sagitarius, and Capricorn, and also in januarie, they have no day, nor any 〈…〉 what comes from the Moon and Stars, until the month of February. It is in 〈…〉 about the Solstice of Summer during the months of May, jun●, and 〈…〉 Sun being always over their horizon, when they ha●e not any night in their 〈…〉 February whenas the days begin to be long, they begin to fish, and take 〈…〉, as it is almost incredible; for as soon as the fish (which for three 〈…〉 have seen no light) discover the hook and bait, they run all unto it, and 〈…〉 taken. Whenas they have taken the fish they pull out the bones and garbage, 〈…〉 they make oil, and lay the rest upon heaps, leaving it in the air which is so 〈…〉 with the wind and Sun only which hardens it, they are of better taste and will 〈…〉 than if they were salted: they use their flesh after the same manner, and keep 〈…〉 having hung it in the wind, for they have no use of salt.   

¶ The Riches.  
〈…〉 North sends into Germany great store of cattle, as I have said, and 〈…〉, cheese, tallow, and hides, as also many horses, the which they transport 〈…〉 country's, and they are much esteemed for their bounty. They do also 〈…〉 of their fish, and especially of herrings which the inhabitants take. 〈…〉 many horses into other provinces. They of Fionia make great 〈…〉 of their wheat which they sand abroad, but especially of their ●ie 〈…〉 also sand into Germany and other places many horses and oxen. Scania vents great great store of fish, silver, copper, and lead; and Gothland sells much wheat, cheese, butter, skins, fi● trees to make ship masts, and also much lime.  
Norway receives much money for a kind of fish which they call Berg, the which is very delicate, and is carried far by merchants which traffic there. They make no less profit of the cod which is taken, and in like manner of many goodly skins which they found there, of butter, tallow, hides, the fat of whales, of tar, and of rasters, masts, and boards.  
The merchants do much enrich the islanders, for that they bring from this island cloth commonly called watman; great heaps of sulphur, dried fish, butter, tallow, wool, many white falcons, skins, horses, and such like. They have such abundance of fish, as they make great heaps and leave them in the open air. They have also such store of butter, as they fill cases of forty foot long, and five deep, besides their ordinary vessels.  
As for the riches of the king of Denmark they consist in great numbers of cattle, and fish of the Chersonese, and the neighbour Islands, where there is such abundance, as the herrings alone do amount almost to an incredible sum: and there is such store of other kinds of fish, as they sail with difficulty through this straight, the which is full of retraits fit and pleasing to these beasts. He doth also make great profit of cod which is sent into divers parts. But that which yields them greatest profit, is the strait which lies betwixt Elsinore and Elsingbourg, the which is called the Sound; for that the passage is so narrow, as no ship can pass without permission of the guards, which the king entertains there; so as all ships which pass must of necessity pay a good custom to the king of Denmark. We may easily conjecture whereunto this custom may amount, by the multitude of ships of Holland, Zealand, France, England, Scotland, Norway, and the Baltic sea, which pass continually by this straight, whereas the people have need of the wines of the Rhin, France, and Spain; sugar and spices of Portugal, and the neighbour countries; and of the first-fruits of Andalusia: and in like manner those countries have need of honey, wax, skin's, and of the corn of Prussia, Livonia, and the neighbour countries. Yet there are many which hold that the king of Denmark can have no great treasure, both for that there is not any important commodity within his realms but fish, neither is there any town of great traffic which may draw money unto it, and entertain the commerce There remains then nothing but the custom of passages, and the profit of certain mines in Scania, with the horses and cattle of jutia, and the wood and fish of Norway and the Islands. The town of Vardus doth also yield some profit unto the king; for that of late years the English have begun to make voyages betwixt Norway and Groenland, and some others pass to Colmigraf, and som● to Chilchene near to S. Nicholas. They traffic there with the Russians, and bring back tallow, wax, honey, and flax. The Scottishmen and French practice the like. Almost in the midst of this gulf is the Island and town of Vardus, well fortified by Frederi● the second. The merchants pay at this place a custom for their merchandise.   

¶ The Forces.  
THe wars which the Danes have had against them of Sueden show sufficiently what number of men the king of Denmark may commonly raise, and after what manner they carry themselves in the wars which they undertake. But to discourse particularly of that which this prince may do by land, it hath not been yet well discovered, for that he hath not performed any enterprise of importance, but against the Di●ma●siens, who having been subdued by king Valdemar, and afterwards revolted, were after sundry accidents which happened since the year 1500, unto the year 1559, wholly subdued by Hen●y the second, king of Denmark: but they had before defeated john son to Christiern the first. As for his power by sea, we may easily conjecture by the armies which they have sent forth, for that Christiern the second, at the request of Henry the second▪ the French king, sent a navy of a hundred sail into Scotland against the English, in which were ten thousand soldiers. In my opinion (having so great a country lying upon the sea, and so many ports in Denmark, Scania, and Norway, and so great a numb●● o● Islands both within and without the Baltic s●a, he may draw together a great 〈◊〉 so as he have money; but I have formerly showed that he cannot have much. As 〈◊〉 forts of his country, they are reasonably well furnished of all sides, whereby he is the 〈◊〉 secured.   

¶ The Government.  
ALl Denmark is divided into one hundred eighty and four governments, which they call Haere●ss, and they have so many governors who are learned in the laws of the realm. The king is rather chosen by the nobility and chief of the realm than successive. They crown their kings at Ha●nie in our Lady's Church before the altar: the Senators of the realm conduct them thither, and they carry before him a Sword, a Bowl, and a Crown: these things are not carried by any particular families, but men are employed in this charge according to their merits. After this the king is forced to swear, to observe the articles which are propounded unto him, which have been in use for some time, and to defend the Christian religion, and the rights and customs of the realm. The Bishop of Roeschilde doth afterwards anoint him, and the crown is set upon his head by Senators, who then take the oath of allegiance if they have not done it before his coronation: which done the king makes certain gentlemen knights laying the sword upon them. The Senators and chief of the realm have always had free autho●itie to choose their kings, and have yet: but they have in a manner always set the king's eldest son upon the royal Throne, unless there hath been sufficient cause to divert th●●. They have not suffered the realm to be divided, but when they have been forced by ci●●le wars.  
There are five orders in all Denmark.  
The first order is of the king's house.  
The second is of the nobility. But you must understand, that among these nobles there are neither Earls nor Barons, but all must●prove their gentry by a long continuance of their ancestors. They carry plain shields, and they hold it a blemish to their Nobility to change them or to make them greater. There are yet some remaining of those families, which did assist at the treaty made betwixt Charlemaigne and Hemming king of Denmark, as the Vrens and some others. These enjoy their lands, with jurisdiction to execute malefactors, and they have power to hunt upon their own lands like unto the Earls of Germany.  
All the goods, movable and immovable, left by the father and mother, are equally divided among the brethrens, and the sisters are also by an especial privilege admitted to have their parts, yet the brother hath two parts, and the sister one, and the brethren have the castles by the right of eldership, but the eldest brothers portion is no bigger than the rest.  
They choose the Senators of the realm out of this order of the Nobility, which doth seldom exceed the number of eight & twenty. The realm entertains them, and every one hath a castle during the time of his office, and he pays not any thing to the king for that which he holds: but in time both of peace and war every one is bound to entertain a certain number of horsemen, and to have them ready whensoever the king shall call them, at his own charge. If they sand any Ambassadors out of the realm, the king defrays them, and gives them where withal to live honourably. The king doth also give entertainment to other gentlemen, whether they live in Court or not; for he hath certain lands which the Danes call Verlehninge, that is to say, Gratuities, the which he bestows upon them that merit, either for their lives or for years. These men are bound to entertain some horsemen, and to pay a certain sum unto the king; yet they retain some part of the profit for their services.  
There is also a law in Denmark by the which the king is prohibited to buy any lands of the Nobility, lest it should 'cause some sedition betwixt the king and the chief of the realm: yet the king may exchange lands with them; but the noblemen may not buy any lands of the Peasants which are the king's vassals: for some Peasants have hereditary lands, which are in a manner free.  
There is in Denmark a Lord Steward like unto him in France, whose residence is most commonly at Hafnia, as the King's Lieutenant. There is also a Marshal, who in the time both of peace and war hath a care of that which concerns the wa●re. The Admerall causeth ships to be made and repaired, and disposeth every year of that which is necessary for the sea. He hath under him a Vice-Admerall, and in every ship there is a Captain who is of a Knight's race. There is also the Chancellor of the realm, before whom they do appeal from all the Provinces and Islands, and from him unto the King.  
All the provinces are divided into Haerets or Dioceses, which comprehend many parishes. They which go to law, debate their causes first there, then is it lawful for them to appeal unto the judge of the province, and from him unto the Chancellor, and last of all unto the King and Senators, who give a definitive sentence.  
The Danes have a written law, drawn into form by Valdemar the first, and by the Bishops and Senators of Denmark. If the first judges give an unjust sentence, they are condemned to lose half their goods for a fine, whereof the King hath one moiety, and the party interessed the other. The Chancellor, who most commonly doth follow the Court, hath seven or eight noblemen Secretaries for assistants, and the king himself doth treat of all affairs. I● there happens any matter of importance, the king causeth the Council to assemble. It is not lawful for the king to impose any tax upon the realm, nor upon the vassals of noblemen, without the consent of the Senators, and the chief of the realm. There is a general superintendant or Overseer of the treasure, who receives all the revenues of the realm, and all the customs both by sea and land: he hears the accounts, controls them, & gives quittances to them that bring in money. He hath two deputies of the nobility, and many of the people, & for this he hath good entertainment.  
The third order is that of the Clergy, in the which there are seven bishops: the Archbishop of Land, and the Bishops of Roschilde, Ottensche, Rip, Wibourg, Arrhus, and Slesuic, and this order doth also comprehend the Chanoins. These have the tithes of the realm, the which notwithstanding are diversly distributed in divers provinces. The Bishops receive one moiety for the tenths, and the King hath the other, yet the Chanoins and ministers have a portion both from the one & the other. The nomination of Bishops and other Prelates have always belonged to the Kings of Denmark, as we may see by an answer made by Voldemar the first King, who writ unto the Pope, which demanded some such matter of him: We have received the realm from our subjects, life from our parents, and religion from the Church of Rome, the which if thou dost require again, I sand it thee by these presents.  
Christian the third ordained, That Clergy men should not cell any thing without the kings express leave.  
The fourth order is of Bourgesses and merchants, which live in towns and boroughs. These have particular privileges which they enjoy, and have their private fields & forests limited▪ Of these, as of the countriemens' children, they choose Bishops, Chanoins, Ministers, and Senators of towns, Secretaries for castles and forts, Governors and Captains of ships, and there are some also appointed for tolls. These judge of petty causes, and most commonly they have one of the nobility to be their Precedent.  
The fift order is of Peasants, which are of two sorts: the first are called Freibunden, that is to●ay, Free-labourers: these have hereditary lands, and pay some tribute yearly. They give themselves also to the tr●de of mercandise and fishing: they are not subject to any services, neither do they pay any taxes but with the consent of the Senators & the King's Council. The other have no hereditary lands, but farm them of the King, of Noblemen, and of the Clergy, and are bound to do many services for their Lords, according to the conventions they have made with the owners of the land.  
And for that all the nobles are equal in this realm, not any one bearing the title of Duke, Earl, or Baron, there is no man so rich as he dares oppose himself against the King's blo●d, for that the father's inheritance is always divided amongst the sons and daughters. The knights hold the first rank in Denmark, and the king gives not this order but to men of great merits.  
There is a Council at Wibourg, whereas all civil causes are decided almost throughout the year, and there they determine of controversies for lands, inheritances, and such like, and in like manner of all crimes.  
The towns of the duchy of Slesuic enjoy the privileges of those of Denmark, and their inhabitants use the same law. The subjects may appeal from any magistrate whatsoever unto the Senators, and no farther.  
The order of Senators doth often consist of 24 men which be of the order of knights, and to them they add a Chancellor general, & 2 Doctors in the name of either prince.  
They of Holsatia had in ●ormer times eight and forty men which had the oversight of the whole countries, and the appellations of all the parishes went before them: but ●ince they were subdued and divided into two parts, they did choose in either of them twelve men with a governor, who most commonly is a doctor of the law. All these have good entertainment from their princes, and they add unto them a Secretary and a Precedent out of the body of the nobility of Holsatia. He that is for the king is most commonly Governor of Steinbourg, and he whom the duke appoints as Governor of Gottorpe. But it is lawful for the subjects to appeal unto the Senators of the two dukedoms of Slesuic, and Holsatia, and no farther. In old time they had a written law, the which is somewhat changed and reform according to the common law. Holsatia hath four orders, that is to say, the Nobility, Clergy, Bourgesses, and labourers, which are of two sorts, as in Denmark. The nobles hold their lands with high and low justice, and have liberty to hunt. These lands are for the most part hereditary and not subject to any service: there are also some which are feudal. There are not above four and twenty stems of noble families, but there are many houses which are descended from either of them, as the Ranzoviens hold above one hundred and fifty castles, and much lands. There are in a manner as many families of the Aleseldes and Powisches. The causes of the nobility are judged by the Senate in either duchy. It is lawful, in giving sufficient caution, to appeal from the senates sentence unto the imperial Chamber. The bourgesses have particular privileges, and are governed by the civil law, or that of Lubec. The subjects may appeal from the decrees of the Senates of towns, to cities appointed to that end, and it is also lawful to appeal from them unto the Senators of Holsa●ia, and so to the imperial Chamber, giving caution. The controversies of peasants are pleaded in the open field by their advocates: they are debated in the presence of some noblemen of the country with the governors, and two assistants which are witnesses: having heard the demands and answers of either part, they 'cause the whole assembly of peasants to retire, then having duly considered of the matter in controversy, they call back the contendants, and pronounce their sentence.  
As for Island there are two Bishops, who are as governors, the one of the Northern part, and the other of the Southern, and either of them hath a public school joining to his house, where he is bound to entertain at his own charge four and twenty children, and to 'cause them to be instructed. The author of the public treasure (who had been in this Island as he affirms) writes, that in the midst of the country there is a place which is very delightful, like unto a paradise in the spring, whereas sometimes there was a burning mountain like unto that of Heila; but the fire having consumed all that ●ed it, it is now like a plain, being rampired round about naturally with rocks which have remained after this great fire, having left a little entry only for one man to pass. In this place there are two great cataracts or downfalls of water, there falling two great streams from the top of the rocks and lose themselves under ground with a great noise.  
Thither every year on the nine and twentieth of june, all they do ●ome that have any suits and controversies, for that they have no other place nor time for the doing of justice. When they are entered the lieutenant's guards appoints them places, from whence they may not departed without the lieutenant's leave: having at his entry caused the letters patents of his commission to be read, he lets the assistants understand how well the king is affected unto them, then assuring them of his love, to the end they may not fear to acquaint him with their controversies, he retires into his tent.  
The sermon being done, every one of the Zokmaders (being twelve in number) sitting upon the ground, opens his book, in the which the laws & customs of the Island are written in their language; then having heard the accusation and defence, they search their books, for the decision of the cause, whereupon they confer together and pronounce the judgement: if the suit be of importance, they come and demand the lieutenant's advice, to do him honour, but yet he hath no power to judge. All their suits are for theft, adultery, or murder: they that are condemned to die have their heads cut off with an axe, others are marked in the forehead with a hot iron the which is a great infamy among them, for that they are reputed rogues and villains, and some are beaten with rods: he writs that he saw the father and the son prisoners for theft, and found to be common stealers of cattle: the father was forced to whip his son, and afterwards they cut off his head.   

¶ The Religion.  
CHristierne the second, king of Denmark, having given passage to the doctrine of Luther into Suedeland, was also the cause that it was dispersed over all Denmark: for being returned from his voyage of Sueden, he discovered himself within a short time to be a Lutheran. But soon after he was taken by his own subjects, and expelled the realm with his wife and three children in the year 1523. He remained long in Low Germany under the shadow and protection of the Emperor Charles the fift, his brother in law. In the year 1532, having made ready an army at sea, he sailed towards Denmark. But being first bea●en with a furious tempest, in the which many of his ships and men were sunk, and being afterwards defeated by his enemy's, he fell into the hands of Christian his successor, and died in prison. Christian who succeeded him, being allied to Gostave king of Sueden (both which married the sisters of john duke of Saxony, a favourer of Luther) gave himself wholly to root out the Romish religion within his realms: the which he easily effected, committing all the Bishops within his Estates to prison, where they died. And it is observed that of all the Bishops of Denmark, Norway, Island, Sueden, and Gothland, there was not any one that did abjure his religion, neither for promises, imprisonment, nor any other hard usage. The people of Denmark, Norway, and other country's subject to this crown being without pastors, and under a king that was a Lutheran, it was no hard matter to make them change their religion by the means of joac●im Pomeran a minister of Luther's profession. Christian had for successor Frederick, a Lutheran, who they writ was given to gluttony, and died of excess upon a Good Friday. Under him the Danes were more confirmed in Luther's doctrine. He that reigns at this day doth also maintain the same doctrine very earnestly throughout his dominions.    

¶ THE KINGS OF DENMARK.  
LOng before the coming of Christ, Dan who gave his name to the whole country was lord of Denmark, and had two sons Humble and Loather. Humble succeeded his father, and was expelled by Loather.  
Schiold, his son succeeded afterwards.  
Gran was his successor, and died in the war which he had against  
Su●bdager king of Norway, who married the king of Denmark's daughter by force, and conquered this realm.  
Froton, his son.  
Haldan the son of Froton, he murdered Roen and Scatz his brethren.  
Helgon by the death of Roen his brother was absolute lord of Denmark.  
Rolfo his son succeeded him; he was slain, and the realm made subject to A●●●l● king of Sueden: and Hoth●er brother to Atisle was king of both realms.  
Roric, son to Atisle.  
Wiclet. (⸪)  
Wermond, his son.  
Vfo, son to Wermond, who made the country of Saxony tributory; and of dull, simple, and faint hearted, he become wise, discreet, and valiant, and of stuttering, well spoken.  
Dan, his son. (***)  
Huclet.  
Froton the second. (⸪)  
Dan the third.  
Fridleve.  
Froton the third, his son, who, they hold, lived at such time as Christ came into the World.  
Hiarne.  
Fridleve the second.  
Froton the fourth. (***)  
Ingel.  
Olaue:  
Harald the first. (⸪)  
Froton the fift.  
Haldan the second.  
Harald the second, who was vanquished by Eric or Henry King of Sueden, who brought Denmark under his obedience; but Haldan recovered it & Sueden in like manner. Vnguin was then King of Gothland, and Haldan did substitute him Governor of Denmark after him.  
Vnguin had for successors  
Sivald the first.  
Sigar. (***)  
Sivald the second.  
Haldan the third.  
Harald the third, who made war seven years in Sueden, and died there.  
Ol●, son to Sivard king of Norway, and nephew to Harald by his sister.  
Emond.  
Sivard or Sivald the third.  
B●t●lus, his brother.  
jameric, son to Sivald. (⸪)  
Brother, his son.  
Si●ar● the fourth, whose race was unknown.  
Bior, son to Sivard, succeeded his father.  
Harald the fourth.  
Germo, his son.  
Gotric, or Godfrey, who was in the time of the Emperor Charlemaigne. He was a virtuous man, given to war, and very bountiful.  
Olaue, his son.  
Humming, son to Olaue.  
Sivard, son to the daughter of Gotric, and of the king of Norway.  
Regnier, son to Sivard, who was hasti●, and given to lust.  
Sivard.  
Eric, or Henry, who was baptized with his brother Harald at Mentz.  
Eric, son to Sivard, nephew to Regnier, who remained in a manner alone of the blood royal: he having persecuted the Christians in his youth, died a Christian, having been converted by the instructions of Anscher, Archbishop of Hambourg.  
Canutus' his son reigned after him, and died without any show of a Christian.  
Froton.  
Gormo.  
Harald: these three were good Christians.  
Gormo the third succeeded him, and did persecute the Christian religion.  
Harald, son to Gormo, a Christian.  
Suevo, or Sueno Otton, his son, who usurped the realm in his father's life time; then he left the Christian faith, and was afterwards converted, being expelled his realm, whether he returned after the death of Eric, king of Sueden, who had made himself master thereof.  
Canutus, son to Sueno Otton, surnamed the Great, for that he brought five kingdoms under his obedience, that is to say, Sueden, Norway, England, Denmark, and Normandy. The Emperor Henry the third married his daughter Gunilde.  
Canutus the third, who died, having reigned two years, leaving no children.  
Magnus, son to Olaue King of Norway.  
Suevo, or Sueno, nephew to Canutus the Great, by his sister.  
Harald, his son, who died having reigned two years.  
Nicholas, son to Sueno, succeeded in his place, and was slain by his subjects.  
Eric succeeded him, and was also slain.  
Eric, son to Aquin, nephew to Eric the Great, who become a Monk, and therefore the realm fell to Suevo, nephew to Eric the Great.  
Waldemar, about the year 1161.  
Canutus, his son.  
Waldemar, his brother, who died in the year 1242, having reigned forty years, often victorious, and often vanquished.  
Eric, his elder brother, succeeded him, and was slain by his brother Abel.  
Abel succeeded in the realm, but he was slain by the Peasants in Friesland.  
Christopher, his brother.  
Eric, his son, who died in the year of Grace 1286, and was slain by his household servants.  
Eric, his eldest son, succeeded him, and died in the year 1321, having reigned five and thirty years.  
Christopher, brother to Eric, died in the year 1333.  
Valdemar, his son, succeeded him: he was expelled the realm, then restored, and chased away again, and re-established. He died in the year 1375.  
Marguerite, the only daughter of Valdemar, having married Aquin, king of Norway, was Queen of the realms of Denmark and Norway: she vanquished Albert duke of Mekelbourg, who had been called by them of Sueden to reign over them, and by this means she was also masters of Sueden.  
Eric, duke of Pomeran, adopted by Marguerite, was chosen King, in the year 1411, but he retired himself afterwards into Pomeran, in the year 1438.  
Christopher, duke of Bavaria, was after him chosen King of Denmark, in the year 1439, and died in the year 1448.  
Christien, or in the Danes language Christian, earl of Aldenbourg, was chosen king of Denmark and Norway, after the death of Christopher. He died in the royal castle of Coppenhagen, in the year of Grace 1481, having reigned four and thirty years.  
john, his son, succeeded in the realm.  
Christian the second, son to john, made long war against them of Sueden, and in the end was expelled himself out of the realm of Denmark, by reason of his tyranny: and seeking to recover his realm, he was taken by Christian his uncle, and put into prison at Sundebourg in Holsatia, where he died.  
Frederic, duke of Holfatia, uncle to Christian, was after his death king of Denmark.  
Christian the third, eldest son to Frederic.  
Christian the fourth, who reigns this present year 1614   

¶ OF GROENLAND.  
GRoenland is an Island not hitherto much discovered, lying in the Hyperborean sea, betwixt the degrees of sixty six and seventy seven. It was first discovered by Nicholas Zeno a Venetian, in the year 1380. It is called Groenland by Antiphrases, for that it is never green, by reason of the sharpness of Winter, being continually covered with snow, but in june, july, and August; so as notwithstanding they are always covered with furs and skins, yet they feel no heat: but in their houses they have round pieces of timber which they roll up and down to warm themselves withal.  
The inhabitants live of wild foul and fish, whereof they have great abundance, and there are many white bears, white foxes, and hares. There is in this Island a monastery of the order of S. Dominicke, dedicated unto S. Thomas, near unto the which there is a burning fountain, which is conveyed by pipes of stone unto the Monks sells, the which doth warm them as if they were in stoves, and boiles their meat as if they had fire. And they writ that not far from this monastery there is a mountain like unto that of Heila in Island, or Aetna in Sicily, which doth cast forth fire and pumice stones like sparkles: the walls of this monastery are built of these stones, the which being quenched or mortified with the water of that fountain, doth make a glutinous substance the which doth serve them for lime, and is durable for many years. The gardens and orchards about this monastery are watered with this fountain, which make them very pleasant and green. The current of this fountain runs like a river unto the haven of the said Cloister, the which is reasonably broad, and there it mingles itself with the sea water, and doth so heat it as the sea freezeth not within the haven, the which draws such abundance of fish thither by reason of the warmth, as not only they of the monastery are furnished, but also all the islanders.  
Some writ that there are Pigmees in this island, having the perfect shape of a man, that they have hair unto their nails, and the men have beards unto their knees, but they have no reason, and that in steed of speech they do hisle like geese: that they are brutish like beasts, and live continually in darkness.  
The inhabitants of this island which live upon the sea shore, have some knowledge of the Gospel, but they that live within the land, have no light of the truth, but are wholly given to incantations and magic art.     


❧ A DISCOURSE OF THE ESTATE OF THE KING OF SVEDEN.  

The Contents.  
1. THe great circuit of the realm of Sueden, the chief provinces, and bounds. 2. Description of Gothland, the limits and best places. 3. Of Finland, and her towns. 4. Of Boddia or Bothnia. 5. Of Lapland, the greatness and bounds. 6. Another division of Sueden into eleven provinces, containing eleven Dukedoms, and twelve Earldoms. 7. Another partition of this realm into seven bishoprics, and how many parishes every Bishopric contains. 8. Sueden fertile in hou●e, silver, copper, lead, steel, and fishof all sorts: rough and hilly in many places: the air temperate, pure and wholesome. 9 A particular description of those things which every province doth yield. 10. Of the valour of the ancient inhabitants of Sueden, their customs and laws, their gods, and divers kinds of sacrifices: their arms and manner of fight. 11. The strong constitution of body and good wits of the modern Suedens: the simplicity of their manners: the divers kinds of bread and meat which they use: their manner of apparel, dwellings and buildings 12. Their riches consisting in abundance of victuals, mines of lead, copper, and silver. 13. Of the king's ordinary and extraordinary revenues, and how many tons of gold come yearly into his coffers. 14. Of the sould●erss of Sueden, and what companies of foot and ho●se are commonly entertained in every province. 15. Of the naval forces of this Estate, and what ships the king may arm in time of war. 16. The number of the chief forts of this realm his allies, and confining adversaries. 17. Of the Viscounts, Laments, Lansmans', and other judges and Offcers appointed for the administration of justice in every province. 18. Of the laws ordained against usury, adultery, and murder. 19 Of the officers which have charge of the king's revenues and treasure. 20. Sects of Luther and Calvin, how brought into Sueden. 21. A Catalogue of the kings which have reigned unto this day.   

THe affairs of Sueden are in that estate, as the uncle usurps and detains from his nephew the realm which did lawfully belong unto him; so as duke Charles hath made himself king of one part of this monarchy; and Sigismond king of Poland, the right heir of Sueden, hath conquered another part by arms, and doth daily contend for the rest. But howsoever the State stands, I will represent this realm as if it were in the power of his lawful lord.  
To come unto the point, the realm of Sueden comprehends the duchy of Finland, Gothland, Boddia or Bothnia, a part of the country of Lapland, Scricfinia, and a part of Corelia, with the islands called Alandes, and some others of small esteem. We may easily conjecture by the number of degrees, under which divers provinces of the realm of Sueden are situated, that the country is great; for that from Stocholme which is in the sixtieth degree, and is the abode of the kings of Sueden, unto Lapland only, they do reckon above a thousand Italian miles; & from the limits of Denmark unto Stocholme (the which is in regard of the length, about the midst of the realm) it w●ll make twenty great days journey on horseback: and they that have go both the length and breadth of Sueden, hold it greater than all Italy and France together, and much more, adding Lapland, and the duchy of Finland.  
The country of Sueden hath for bounds upon the West, Norway; to the North, Lapland, and Bothnia; upon the East, Finland, divided by the gulf of Bothnia, and Li●o●ia, separated also by the sea; & towards the South, Gothland. There are many dukedoms and Seigneuries in this province, as the duchy of Angermania on the frontiers of Lapland, than those of Midelphat, or Midelpad, jentia, Dalecarlia, Vermelande, Dalia, Helsinge, Gestricia, Fieringe, Caperdalia, that is to say, the valley of Latona, and Ouplandie, or Vplande. The chief and royal city is Holme, which the inhabitants call Stocholme, and the Russians Stecolne; the which is strong both by nature and art, for it is situated in marshes like unto Venice. There is also the town of Vpsale, where there is an University, and Nicopia a sea town.  
Gothia, which signifies in the Germane tongue a good Land, hath for limits upon the East, the Ocean; towards the West, the mountains of Norway, and a part of the realm of Denmark, which they call Scania; to the North, Sueden; and upon the South, the Ocean. The best towns of Gothia, are Lodusia, where there is a good port: Waldbourg, which town hath a castle: Calmur, a great town, with a good port: and many others, whereof some carry the title of duchies.  
Finland is bounded in upon the East, South, and West, by the Sea, and divided from Mascovie by the gulf of Finlande, and by the river of Polme: but upon the North, lies West-Bothnia, and Corelia. The Russians call this country Chainskasenila. The be●●●wneses are Abo, situated in the country of Vplande, and Wibourg in the remotest part of the country.  
Boddia, or Bothnia, is divided into East and West, according unto Magin, but as other ●ite, into North and South.  
Lapland extends itself from the frontiers of Sueden unto the Northern sea. There i● the marish of Lule, three hundred miles long. We must observe, that they which lie most Easterly, pay tribute unto the Muscovite, and are called Dikiloppes, that is to say, Wild Lappons: but they that devil towards the West obey the King of Sueden, and inhabit the country which they call Scricfinia.  
Corelia, or Carelia, according unto john the Great, is beyond the gulf of Finlande, and extends unto the frozen Sea. their longest day in Summer is of twenty hours and a half. Hexholin, or Kexholin, is the chief town.  
The King of Sueden doth also hold in Livonia, Rivaille, narve, Pernovia, and some others. Moreover, he hath the islands Alandes, in which are the towns of Vames, Vibourg, and Castrolme.  
There are some which make another division of Sueden, that is to say, into eleven provinces, which contain eleven dukedoms, and twelve earldoms: the duke domes are Upland, West-Gothia called Westrogothia; East-Gothia, called Ostrogothia, Smoladia, Vesmania, Dalakarlie, the great duchy of Finland, in which are comprehended those of Satagonde, Carelia, and Tavastia. The earldoms are Heslinge, Angermania, Gestrice, Midelpadia, East & West Bothnia, Vlande, Verinlande, Nuice, duly, & that of the island of Vlande, the which notwithstanding doth belong to Finlande.  
Another division is into Bishoprics, which in old time were seven in number, comprehending the archbishopric of Vpsale, whose Prelate is Primate and Metropolitan of all these realms. To these the Bishopric of Vibourg in Finlande was added, but without the Pope's authority and confirmation: the others are those of Lincopia, Vetros, called Aroscience, Scare, Imperiale, called Stregnia, Vexime, and Abe, called Aboon, in Finlande. In the Diocese of Vpsale there are one hundred seventy one parishes, and this diocese extends unto Lapland, and comprehends Finmarche, in which there are very great parishes. The diocese of Lincopia hath two hundred twenty six parishes: That of Vexime two hundred and ten: that of Scare as many as Lincopia: that of Stregnia one hundred parishes: and that of Abe hath five hundred parishes, the which for the most part are very well peopled: so as in Finland there are some which contain a thousand families, some eight hundred, others five hundred, and some less. The number of these parishes is as I have said, besides those of many towns, which may amount to a good number. These parishes are dispersed in forests, and other places that are more open, whereas the commodity to have store of timber to build houses, and to be defended from the Northern wind, doth willingly stay them, where they keep in their houses troops of cattle, and have all arts necessary for man's life: and this is the reason why there are not so great towns, nor so well peopled, as in other countries.  

¶ The Quality.  
SVeden is the most fertile province of all those of the North, and bears great store of grain: there is also much honey, silver, copper, lead, steel, and iron, especially n●ere unto Salbourg they found pure silver, the which is not mixed with any other metal. It abounds wonderfully in fish of all sorts both in lakes, sea, & rivers: yet in many places it is rough, hilly, moist, and moorish; which parts yield less corn & fruit than the rest. All the shore towards Livonia is full of pointed rocks, which make this coast inaccessible, and whereas the wolves do pass whenas the sea is frozen, and there grow blind by the extremity of cold, as some affirm. There are very great plains, where not withstanding the cold there grow many fit trees, pine trees, and oaks: and yet they do commonly sow corn among these trees. The country wants no rivers; but for the most part they carry no boats, either for that they are hindered by trees which fall into them, or by great rocks, or else their channels are not well made to help them in their passage, and also for that they are frozen many months in the year.  
The air is commonly pure, and by consequence all Sueden is very healthful, neither is the air so sharp nor so insupportable, nor the cold so violent, as some persuade themselves that have not made trial thereof: yet in some places (where there are moors and waters which settle by negligence or otherwise) they feel the air heavy, and have great mists and moisture which distemper the brain. They live most commonly long, especially upon the mountains, and other places which are more exposed to the Northern winds; so as there are many which attain to the age of one hundred and thirty, or one hundred and forty years, the which would be ordinary among them if they did not shorten their lives by excess in eating and drinking both in Sueden, Gothland, and Finland, yea and in the king's court, whereas you shall scarce found two physicians or apothecary's. In these countries they take great store of Bugles which are exceeding great.  
Gothland abounds in corn, cattle, and horses, in sea fish, and of fresh water, in lead, iron, and silver. It hath more pasture than the other Northern countries: they found much latten, and near unto the town of Tragualle very good iron.  
Finland is more pleasing than the province which they particularly call Sueden, it exceeds it in bounty, and yields more corn, for that it is for the most part plain, and is not so hilly nor so moorish. Bothnia is not very fruitful, but in the one and the other they found many beasts which have excellent skins, and in like manner abundance of fish. Lapland yeeles no corn: there are many white bears, and store of hermines. In steed of horses they have rain dear, which are as big as a mule, and the hair like an ass, they have horns like a stag, but they are shorter and have not so many branches. These beasts carry not their burdens upon their backs, but draw little carts so lightly and so swiftly as in a day & a night they will pass one hundred and fifty miles. In the Solstice of Winter, when as the Sun enters into Capricorn, they have night three months together, with little light, which continues few hours.   

The manners of the Ancients.  
THe Goths in old time came out of Sueden, and the neighbour country's, and have given sufficient testimony of the disposition of all the nations of the Peninsula of Scandia or Scandimavia, were Suedens. The Goths then have showed sufficiently that they of this country were valiant, & could not spend their days in idleness, for that great numbers of them have go out of these countries, and have ruled long in many parts of Europe, yea they have held Italy for many years. They were cruel, but not so barbarous as some would make them, as we may see by their conduct whenas they seized upon any country, and by their ordinary actions, especially by an epistle of Sidonius Appolinarius, who describes the doings of Theodoric. Their laws do likewise teach us sufficiently, that this nation was reasonably civil and well governed, but that other people flattering themselves, and hating these new conquerors, were not pleased with any of their actions, but blamed them in all things they might. Some have held that they had a law among them, by the which no man might be chosen king unless he were fat or corpulent. These Goths have always hated the Danes mortally, which did inhabit the Cimbricke Chersonese. They hold that their characters, which they call Gothike, are very ancient, and therefore that this nation had joined arms to learning. Their wives went to the war, and did fight like unto the men. They did put the deeds of their ancestors into verse and did sing them.  
They did worship the god Thore, as the most powerful of all the gods, who had a crown upon his head, a sceptre in his hand, and twelve crowns about him. They hold that it was the same that others called jupiter, for that these Northern people did religiously abstain from work on Thursday, which was jupiter's day; the which is likely, for that at this day in Suethland they call lightning, and thunder, and such like things, the noise of Thoron. This god had one of either side called Othin and Frigga. Othin did represent Mars being all armed, and the Goths did believe that he did assist them in their wars and yet they dedicated Wednesday unto him, the which is Mercury's day: they did sacrifice unto him such as they took in the war. Frigga was the goddess of beauty, grace, and love, and did rule (according to their opinion) at marriages, and at all kind of pleasures. They dedicated Friday or Venus day unto her, and at this day in Sueden they call certain stars, the distaff and spindle of Frigga, by an ancient tradition. They gave unto this goddess a bow and a sword, for that in these countries the women were borne to war, and did fight as I have said like men. Besides these three divinities, they had many others. They did worship one called Methotim who had been a great Magician, and had ordained many particular ceremonies for the service of their gods. Fro, Satrape of the gods, was also lodged among them, and worshipped near to Vpsale: they did offer black sacrifices, and had every year plays in the night in his honour. They did worship H●llere, who was a great warrior, and so great a Magician as he used a bone covered with characters in steed of a ship to pass the sea. They added unto these Vagnost & Hadinge, and Rostiolph of Finland, for that he foretold many things. Among these they put Rostare, who took such delight in man's blood, as they vowed unto him the souls of those against whom they made war. There were yet many others whom the they held children of great Thoron, or of Othin.  
The Goths observed in their sacrifices the number of Nine, considering (it may be after the Pithagorian manner) that this uneven number of three times three should be preferred before all others: and it may be Zamolxis and some other Philosophers had taught it them. And notwithstanding that they did every day yield some honour unto their gods, yet they did honour them more solemnly every month, sacrificing unto them nine days together nine sundry sorts of beasts, adding thereunto human sacrifices. And as for the man that should be sacrificed, he was plunged a live into a ●ountaine that was by, and if he died they held it for a good sign, and the priests drawing him forth did hung him in a forest which they held to be holy, and they did believe that he was transported among the gods. They did hold the immortality of the soul, and that it w●nt into a more pleasing place, whereas a certain god called Bleixe did rule; to whom they s●nt a messenger in a bark with seven oars, commanding him to demand of this god that whereof they had need. They were so affected to the service of their gods, as whenas they heard any noise in the air they shot off their arrows, making show that they would secure their gods, who they thought were then assailed by some others. Moreover they had hammers of brass, with the which they made a great noise, and did imitate the thunder.  
They had also a custom when as they went to fight, to sacrifice horses, and to carry the heads of them before their armies, and after their victories they did also sacrifice unto their gods, and made plays in their honour. Their arms were a bow and a sling. And this is all in a manner that can be said of the manners of the ancient Goths, and of those of the realm of Sueden. We might make some relation here of the manners of the Herules, Vandals, and Lombard's which are come out of Scandia: but it is sufficient to have spoken of those which the Goths and Suedens have followed, according unto the report of john the Great Archbishop of Vpsale.   

¶ The Manners at this day.  
THe Suedens are naturally strong, active, and valiant both on foot, horseback, and at sea. They entertain strangers with much courtesy, and exchange with them their fish, rich furs, wild beasts skins, butter, tallow, and metals.  
They use two divers languages in all the country's subject to the crown of Sueden, that is to say, the Sueden tongue, which they speak in all the provinces of Sueden, Gothland, Northway, and Denmark: wherein we may observe that the Saxon tongue approacheth near unto the Sueden in many words, as the Dutch & the English. Then there is the Finland language, which they not only use in the great duchy of Finland (except in one province, whereas they practise the Sueden tongue) but also in a good part of the country about Rivaillia a town of Livonia: and the men of quality understand and speak the german tongue. The people of Sueden are not only apt to learn manuel arts and trades, but also speculative sciences, and the tongues, among the which, they that hold any rank in the country, and that are qualified, do most commonly learn the Germane or Latin tongues, or both together, and whenas they learn any other, they have not such difficulty in the pronunciation, as the Germans have in the Italian or Latino.  
Their manners are commonly simple, and such as may befit men which having not seen the greatness of the world, nor any thing that may incite their minds to ambition, live without any great desire of honour or of other things, being content with their natural food: and for this cause they have no care to till any greater quantity of ground than what is necessary for them, for if they would cut down many great and unprofitable forests, they should reap abundance of corn, the which being sown in May is ready to be reaped in August, by reason of the great heat and force of the Sun, which is in a manner always upon the earth. But notwithstanding that this ancient simplicity reigns yet in many, yet since the coming of foreign soldiers, that is to say, of Germane, English, Scottishmen, and others, they have lost much of their inclination, having augmented their natural distrust: and their Inns are not open without paying, as they have been accustomed. It is true that passengers spend very little, for that the Suedens have not been accustomed to demand any thing for lodging or victuals, and most commonly they that traveled did lodge with the Curates, which is a sign of the hospitality which was practised whenas the Romish religion did reign. They were not wont to have any thieves and robbers, and if there be any, it is since that a great number of vagabonds have crept into the country by reason of the wars. They use many baths or hot houses, especially in towns whither people of either sex go commonly.  
The women are modest and wise, and abstain from drunkenness. Their food is most commonly of corn of two sorts: they sow the one in May, and the other in November. They reap tie in August which is very common, and make divers sorts of bread, that is to say, of come that is pure, and corn that is mixed. Their barley is good, and for this cause they employ a good part of their wheat to make beer, which is their ordinary drink, yet the richer sort have others, as the wines of Rhin, Spain, and France, and Meade, or Braggot, and Aquavite. Some poor people in the time of dearth eat bread made of the barks of pine trees and fir, which being of a hot quality help as they say the stomach, and they not only live with it but grow strong.  
They have abundance of flesh, whereof they salted the greatest part, as beeves, hogs, geese, and such like. They seldom eat any veal. They use fresh fish both salted and smoked, and so me that is not salted during the extremity of the cold, and in like manner feasants and partridges, whose flesh is harder than that of more temperature countries. They should have abundance of pulses, & of all sorts, if they did bestow any pain and care, but they use little, but ordinary and common pease, or others which are like unto ciches which are round and white, and some few beans. They use butter and cheese at the beginning and ending of their repasts. Most commonly they care little for fruit, notwithstanding that they have great store of pears, plums, cherries, and strawberries. And although that herbs grow there three or four months in the year, yet they little regard them, except they be coleworts, which they powder and keep for Winter.  
The apparel of the common people is plain and fashioned in a manner like unto that of the people of Lombardie; yet they wear caps and other garments of skins, but it is very simple. The women in towns (and especially at Stokolme) wear upon their gowns along cloak of black cloth, with many pleats. The gentlemen are attired after the Germane fashion, & some in court after the Italian, but most commonly like the French. When they travel the peasants carry for their arms a hatchet in stead of a sword, the gentlemen and their servants with their swords carry short harquebuses or pistols.  
Their houses (except the churches which are of stone) are of wood, but much better built than those which are in the plains of Polonia: yet there are towns which have houses of stone. They do not ordinarily use stones, but chimneys, which after the wood abluent may be shut up with a plate of iron, which they may thrust in and draw forth at 〈◊〉 pleasure, except in some places where there are marshes.  
The Lapponians are small of stature, but very active. They handle their bow exceeding well, and wear straight garments. In Winter they carry whole seal skins or of bears, the which they tie upon the top of the head, and leave no place open but for the sight: which hath given occasion to some to writ that they are all hairy. They ●emaine in low cabins which are covered with barks of trees, or with flages of earth: some others say that they live under tents after the manner of the Tarta●ians. They are wonderfully given to hunting and fishing, and by this means they entertain themselves, and furnish their neighbours with part of their fish. They do not join their boats together with nails, but with sinews and hooks. They have a particular language which is very difficult ●o strangers. They are great sorcerers, and rai●e winds, clouds, and tempests, and do many strange things. They have neither bread nor salt, but live upon fish and wild beasts. They are of an amorous and lascivious disposition, and remain little in one place. They are very savage and suspicious, flying the company of strangers, and hiding themselves when they see any. They exchange their skins for other merchandise. Now they begin to be more familiar by reason of the frequentation of strangers.   

¶ The Riches.  
THe wealth of this realm consists in abundance of victuals, which is very great: for they have much grain, flesh, and fish, both fresh, salted, and dried in the smoke; so as there is seldom any beggars seen, and passengers were in old time, and are yet in mamy places lodged in a manner for nothing. But their chief treasure riseth from mines of lead, brass, silver, and some little gold: and there is such store of the first metals, as some hold there is not any country in Europe that doth therein exceed the realm of Sueden. They discover these mines in all places, and yet the peasants conceal them all they can, for that they would not carry such wood as is necessary for that service, nor labour therein as they are bound. They draw very pure silver out of the country of the Vestrors, & if they of the province were not such enemies to the industry of strangers, their riches should be much greater, for that the Suedens neither know how to spare their wo●d, nor are expert in the digging of their mines, the which they are loathe any should discover. The reason why they fly strangers proceeds not from any hatred they bear them, but of fear to be deceived by them, for that they are very simple in their manners and actions, and are little troubled with ambition and covetousness.  
As for the king's revenues, there are four kinds of things which make the body of his ordinary revenues, since that this realm hath left the Romish religion. His revenues than grow from the first-fruits of clergy lands, from mines, taxes, and the tenths of corn, and other victuals, as also of skins, and finally from imposts and customs.  
I have said since that the Suedens have withdrawn themselves from the Romish religion, for before the Archbishop of Vpsale, and the other six bishoprics, with many monasteries, enjoyed great possessions, from whence they received good revenues. But the ministers have persuaded the kings to seize both upon their lands & goods, assigning far less revenues unto the Bishops: whereby in the beginning they gathered together a great treasure, the which falling into the hands of king Henry, was soon wasted by reason of the wars.  
The mines yield silver, whereof they make the dollars of Sueden, the which are much esteemed for their bounty: & for that they found little gold, they coin few crowns. Besides the dollars there are quarter dollars and half quarters, and a kind of coin called rosques, and half rosques, which signifies round money, whereof a dolor makes two and thirty. Notwithstanding that they have abundance of copper, yet they make no coin of this metal, unless they mixed a little in their rosques.  
They did also not many years since found a certain mine of salt, but it soon decayed, as some think by the negligence of such as should have had care thereof.  
The king hath the tenth of all the mines whereas they wo●ke not at his charge, and for this cause he pays his men with copper and other metals: and if the peasants did not hide the veins of divers mines which are daily discovered, and there were store of good and diligent masters, it is thought that the profit which they should draw, would amount to a great sum.  
Besides all this, the king hath throughout this realm the tax and tenth of wheat, rye, barley, butter, fish, oxen, skins, and such like, the sum whereof is not well known, notwithstanding there is a certain account kept in the royal Chamber and Treasury. But whatsoever it be, he not only entertains his officers and army at sea, but also his land forces, and the officers of his realm and court.  
When the king is to make any war for the defence of his realm, or else doth sand any troops abroad, he gives notice thereof to the provinces, who furnish them with such victuals as are necessary. Yet there is this difference in the contribution, that the nobility nor their subjects do not-commonly contribute; but whenas they make a general contribution for the war with the consent of the nobles, their subjects are accustomed to pay half as much, as they aught to do which are immediately subject to the king.  
The people are in like manner bound to contribute for the dowry of every one of the king's daughters when she marries, and the sum of this contribution hath been for a long time one hundred thousand dollars, besides the plate, & the movables of her house.  
The revenue of skins is sometimes great, sometimes little, according as the snow is great or little, for the more snow they have, the more beasts they are accustomed to take.  
From the most Northern parts of Lapland, the king draws the greatest part of skins, and his majesty to understand the truth sends a commissioner yearly thither, who useth such diligence to know how many beasts they have taken, as the king cannot be deceived. The skins which are laid a part and chosen for the king are distributed in his court to his kinsmen and friends, and for recompense to merchants, who have given or aught to give commodities for the use of his court. The king hath no other tribute of these Lapponians, for that they busy themselves in no other thing but hunting of beasts, the which they do afterwards exchange for necessary things: yet there are some which work with the needle, and make goodly works, which show that they are ingenious.  
There are not in a manner any tolls, customs, or impositions but those of sea ports. It is true that the king hath been accustomed to take of them of the country which do not contribute victuals, according to the proportion of their wealth, of some five dollars, of some six, and of some eight or more yearly, and whenas the king doth reward any one, he is accustomed to grant him a certain number of peasants, as subjects and tributaries, to so me more and to some less, according to their merits.  
In the year 1578, it was thought that they did lay up yearly into the king's treasure (deducting the extraordinary charges and expenses) about six or seven ●unss of gold, whereof every one is taken for one hundred thousand German dollars. Yet the sorts alone of Ri●aillia and Vibourg, which are upon the frontries' of the Muscovites Estates, cost yearly one hundred thousand dollars. Many men of judgement hold that the king's revenues should be far greater if the disposition of the time were fit, and he had store of artisans and workmen, for that his majesty having many ships which for the most part might make long voyages, they think that he might sand into other country's great store of goodly trees and other stuff for shipping, with much come, and bring back salt for the use of his country and other necessary things which foreign merchants cell for double the price that it is worth, whereas they might have it at a far easier rate.  
In like manner they should draw much more from their mines if they did employ strangers, as well for the sparing of wood (as I have said) as for other things. Yet of brass alone which they draw only in two or three mines, the kings tenth in the year 1578 did amount to five hundred squipons and more, which makes thirty thousand dollars. It is true that they draw nine times more copper, but this goes to the benefit of such as found the mines in their ground, or else to the payment of them that draw it. But if the king would satisfy them by any means, he may retain to himself all the copper and brass which they draw out of the mines: and for this cause there is a superintendent whom they call Faue, who is as it were the king's factor or general deputy.   

¶ The Forces.  
EVery povince hath both footmen and horsemen ordinarily entertained. In the realms of Sueden and Gothland they do reckon about two and thirty ensigns of foot, which they call vexilles, which is a name as we may conjecture, that hath been drawn from the Romans by some Northern people who returned to their houses after divers conquests. Every vexille or ensign doth commonly contain five or six and sometimes ●e●●n hundred men, which number is almost in a manner conformable to that of a Roman cohort. These are ready in all the king's necessities to march where need shall require, and they are in a manner all harquebuziers. There are few pikemen among them: for that the multitude and thickness of woods would not suffer them to carry and handle their pik●ss: and for the same reason the horsemen use no lances, but petronells or pistols like unto the reisters.  
These soldiers are borne in the country, as being acustomed to meats which will keep, they do not care for dainties, nor for diversity of dishes: moreover every one of these makes his own shoes, apparel, stocks of harquebusses, & other necessary things which keeps them from idleness, sin, and mutinies, wherewith armies are commonly troubled being full of idle and unprofitable people which do overcharge a country. There have been sentinels seen in the castle of Stokolme, which have watched with great patience during the extremity of cold, and have not been relieved almost in a whole night, which in Winter doth last about eighteen hours.  
Every company of foot hath his captain, his lieutenant, and ensign. The captain (●●en in the time of war whenas they did fight in the country against the king of Denmark, or the Muscovite) had not above one garment yearly, with forty dollars of entertainment, and an exemption as well for himself, as for some small number of others from the tribute which they pay ordinarily to the king. The soldier enjoys no exemption, but during the time of war, or that they are in any distrust, and therefore in arms; and in old time he had no other pay monthly but five parts of a dollar As they march the harbingers make their lodgings in divers houses; but whenas they are altogether, and march in battle or camp, the king gives them victuals, and doth no● accounted it upon their pay, and if any be taken prisoners, the king is accustomed to redeem them and to pay their ransoms, and if any one looseth his horse in fight, the king is bound to give him another.  
Every company of horse (which is less in number than the foot) hath in like manner a captain, a lieutenant, and a corne●, and they are accustomed to give unto a horseman but twenty dollars a year, and a garment, with the exemptions and conditions formerly mentioned: yet the commanders of companies, and ●otherss of most note, received as many pays as they had servants, if they followed them on horseback.  
There are eleven companies of horse commonly in Sueden and Gothland, and two in Finland; yet if the king desires to have a greater number, he may easily raise them, if he have money.  
In Finland there are two companies, the one of simple soldiers, the other of gentlemen: and the reason why he hath so few men in so great a country, is, for that he is forced to draw the greatest part of his mariners, and men that serve in his armies at sea from thence, as other provinces which are more towards the North do, which either for that they are full of mountains and barren, as Angermania, or else for that they want horses, as Dalecarlia, are subject to furnish the sea army with a good number of mariners.  
In Smoland, Westrogothia, and Ostrogothia, there are some companies of horse gentlemen, and Westrogothia abounds with gentlemen more than any other, and no man may be a captain of foot or horse, if he be not a gentleman. Theirhorses are somewhat less than those of Friesland, but strong, and enured to labour, and to eat little.  
Their order is to take a view or muster yearly of all these companies, and the king doth advertise the Seneshalls of the day and place when it shall be done: they do not always keep one day or the same place, neither is it known long before, nor the same men do not always take the musters, to the end they shall not practise any revolt.  
Moreover in the king's court, the gentlemen served in such sort, as there were always of the whole court three hundred and five horsemen with their arms, but the councillors and some other noblemen were exempt. It is true that they gave unto gentlemen which did serve in this manner (in regard of their servants) some entertainment by the month, and for every servant on horseback they gave at the lest five dollars a month.  
The king being in peace had commonly fifty ships of war under the charge of an Admiral. In the year 1578 seven of these ships were good galleons, the rest did carry about fifty cast pieces of all sorts. The king doth always know where to have six thousand mariners, reckoning among them such as row, and the officers of ships, and he may have many more, for that all the tract of the Finland sea, which is above four hundred miles long; that of the Bothnicke sea which is almost twice as much: the coast of the realm of Sueden, with some islands, do continually 'cause the people of these countries to go to sea, and by consequence to grow hardy, and to have experience.  
In the war which john the third, king of Sueden had with the king of Denmark before their accord was made at Stetrin, the Sueden brought seventy good ships, besides many other good vessels, and besides the troops of horse which he had at land, he had eighteen thousand men in his ships, who when it was needful landed to fight; for that in those countries they are accustomed in winter to fight upon the ice, as well for the facility of passing of lakes and rivers that are frozen, as for to carry their victuals more easily; and in Summer they fight at sea.  
The means to entertain so great a number of mariners costs the king much, but out of ●he tribute which the provinces pay him he doth distribute unto them flesh, fish, butter, rye, and barley, for the greatest part of their pay; which is the reason why the king may sand divers ships of war yearly to sea with a small charge, for that he gives his mariners and workmen victuals in steed of money, where with they are much better satisfied, as men whose simplicity hath not been yet corrupted by strangers, and who having not many objects to divert them from their natural dipositions, are content to have their necessities supplied. Moreover the king hath many goodly forests and woods, and great mines of iron, copper, and brass, wherewith some churches are covered; so as king john the third, said that a war which did cost the king of Spain a million, did not stand him in a hundred thousand dollars.  
The great number of these mines is the cause why they have so much ordnance in these countries, as well in forts, as to arm their ships. In the castle of Stokolme alone there have been numbered four hundred pieces, some double cannons, some culverins, and some less, whereby we may conjecture what a number there may be throughout the realm.  
The sea army is most commonly in time of peace divided into divers parts of these realms. The greatest ships lie in the port of Stokolme, where they are safe without anchor, for that from the main sea unto Stokolme they sail about forty Italian miles among rocks. They do ordinarily number in this port whenas the ice is melted, and that ships come from foreign parts, two or three hundred sails.  
The kings other ships are in some ports of Sueden, but there are many more in them of Finland, to make head again the Muscovite, and to keep them from bringing any thing out of Germany or other places to help him against the king of Sueden, and therefore his majesty doth not suffer any ships to pass without his licence in writing, and signed with his own hand, the which they have been accustomed to call letters of passage, and this permission hath been sometimes bought for one hundred dollars and more by them of Lubec and others.  
There were wont to be many forts in these countries: but by divers accidents of war, and through sundry jealousies and other occasions, many of them have been ruined: yet since the war which Sigismond king of Poland, and lawful heir of Sueden made against his uncle Charles the Usurper of that which did belong unto him, they have made a great number.  
The principal which are at this day in being, are those which follow. Towards the Western sea at Elsbourg a place near unto Venus' lake, there is the fort of Elfelsbourg, and not far from thence two others, whereof the one is called Goltbourg, that is to say, a castle of gold, and the other Croneberg. Towards the Baltic sea, six leagues from Scania, a province of the realm of Denmark, is the castle of Calmas, and in Ostrogothia the castle of Vassena. There is the fort of Borlzolomia in the island of Vlande, than those of Scechorgue, Nicopia, Gripselmia, and the castle of Vpsale: there are also the castles of Stocolme and Ourbou, the which are eleven miles distant. These be the forts of note in the realm of Sueden.  
As for those of Finland, there is one in the town of Abe, another farther off called Elsingofors, and one at Tavastia called jaffausthaaus, which signifies the house of Tavast: it is yet called Hislet, that is to say, New Castle. There is one also at Vibourg a town near to Muscovie.  
There is also in Livonia the fort of Ri●alia, and also that of Ennuespel.  
The king of Sueden confines upon the West with the king of Denmark, and towards the East with the Muscovite. The Suedens have received much loss by the Danes, for that among others, Christian the second besieged Stocolme, and forced it to yield, using great cruelty against the inhabitants, and filling it with blood and dead carcases. Their hatred grows from the pretensions which the king of Denmark hath to Sueden: but the means to annoyed it in this sort, is by reason of the commodity, places, and ports, especially of the island of Gothland, which is a member of Gothia: by reason whereof the Suedens pretend that it doth of right belong unto them. But after that Gustave had recovered the realm, and that Henry and john his sons had governed it one after another; notwithstanding that there were great wars betwixt the Danes and Gustave, yet this realm hath still maintained itself, and the town of Lubec, which is very powerful in those seas, sometimes assisting one party, and sometimes another, doth so balance the forces of these two kings, as it keeps them both from growing too great, lest they should be presently drawn into danger.  
The Suedens make war against the Muscovite with more advantage; for that Finland which confines with Russia, by the reason of lakes and marshes whereof it is full, hath a troublesome and dangerous entry, and it hath often happened that the enemy's armies have been lost in the frozen waters. Moreover the Suedens are accustomed to keep most part of their ships in those seas, where they have the fort of Vibourg, which is very well furnished. There are also upon the confines of the great duke of Muscovie, narve, and Rivaille (whereof we have spoken) and some other places, by means whereof they bridle them, and we may with reason hold those forts good which are maintained in an others country, for that they defend their own country, and annoyed their enemies: and they defend their own the better the farther off they be; for whilst that the enemy strives to take them, his own country is quiet, and by this means he spares both his men and money, and makes necessary provisions to relieve them. Moreover they annoyed the enemy the more for that they lie near him. But the forts which are in a princes own country, do but only defend his own, and that with great disadvantage, for that whensoever they are assaulted, the neighbour countries must needs receive much spoil, and his own Estate shall be full of troubles and combustions, and exposed in prey unto the enemy. But to return unto the king of Sueden, he hath as much advantage over the Muscovite for the defence of his Estates, as sea forces joined to them of the firm Land may give against a prince which hath no forces at sea.   

¶ The Government.  
TO discourse of the government of Sueden, you must understand that the affairs of this realm being in peace, it is governed by a king, who having been heretofore elective, was made hereditary in the time of Gustave.  
The king hath commonly twelve Councillors, and besides these many other officers, for that this realm is not only divided (as I have said) into provinces, duchies, and counties; but also▪ every province is divided into territories and jurisdictons, which comprehend certain parishes, some more some less, and every one of them hath a Lansman or Consul. After this, every territory hath a Viscount, which is like unto a Podesta● in Italy.  
There are other officers above the viscounts, which are like unto the Seneschalls of France, called by the Suedens, Laments, as sovereign judges: so as they appeal from the viscounts to these Laments, and from the Laments to the king's Council, and from this Council to the king himself. These Laments do visit a part of their jurisdiction yearly, until that having ended their whole visitation they begin again: and as this doth help them to a perfect knowledge of the Estate of their affairs, and to order all things presently, so doth it bring ease unto the people; for that they exact the tribute of parishes which they visit in one year, and do not charge the rest.  
The territories were in former times divided in such sort, as to every hundred families which dwelled out of towns they did appoint a Governor or inferior judge, who at a certain time of the year (although he makes not his abode among them) goes to administer justice unto them: and the king according to the valour and merit of men doth sometimes give unto one of these judges two hundred families. All these charges are given unto men who are either noble by birth, or that merit such offices for their wisdom and judgement.  
The Lansman or Consul of every parish is commonly chosen from among the peasants themselves, and in occurrents he hath recourse unto the Viscount. Among other things this Lansman is bound to come unto the place whereas the king makes his residence, whenas he sends for the deputies of any provinces, to the end he may hear what he is to do, and this happens commonly once a year. He is also bound to see that passengers be directed to their lodgings, and that they be furnished with horses or sleds in time of ice and snow: these sleds are little wagons without wheels.  
The viscounts have little entertainment, for they receive of the king's receivers, who are dispersed throughout the whole realm, a garment yearly and forty dollars for a man: yet they have exemptions, pre●entss, and such like.  
Smoland alone (which confines with the realm of Denmark, and is a large province) hath about two and fifty Vicounties, in the which are the most valiant men of Sueden, and sometimes it hath mutined with thirty thousand men able to bear arms.  
As for Stokolme, you must understand that the town itself makes four Consuls for the politic government thereof; and these continued in their offices during their lives. Two of them command successively over the rest every year, and all four (notwithstanding that they are assisted by some whom they call Senators, and yet are Bourgesses) assemble and determine of matters of policy: yet they distribute among them certain particular charges, as of buildings, to judge causes, and to publish new laws; the which is not done without the intervention of the Lieutenant of the castle of Stokolme, and this Lieutenant is above the Consuls, and in matters of consequence the king's Councillors which are at court take notice of causes. The number of Senators which assist the four Consuls is of twelve, whose office continues for life, unless they be deposed for some crime, or that they sue to be discharged for some other reasons.  
The laws which they generally use are ancient, and since the time of S. Henry king of Sueden, they have continued in this realm unto this day, except the ecclesiastical laws, which notwithhanding remain incorporated with the rest; and whenas Cardinal Raymond went into these Northern countries, they added one article which they call ecclesiastical, wherein it is declared, That the children of priests or monks should be held in the same degree with them that are borne in adultery.  
The laws of Sueden make no particular mention of any usury, but in case that a debtor should be priest by many creditors to pay that he oweth; and if any one of the creditors had lent money unto a debtor with any contract of interest, he looseth his right to demand the debt: and they have been accustomed not only to punish the usurer, but also him that meddles with such people. And for that in these realms they are accustomed to lend freely, this vice is not frequent but at Stokolme, whither many have brought this corruption with many others out of Germany.  
The adulterer is punished with death, and it is without all remission if a married man offends with a married woman; for that he is then delivered into the husband's power to ●e punished: but if he be not married, he is condemned for the first offence in a great pecuniary fine; but it seldom happens that he escapes without the loss of his head if he ta●en the second time.  
H● that bea●s another pays five dollars for a fine, and if he cut off any part, as a finger o● a●y other member, he pays the double, but if he be maimed of any member, they give him a full recompense: if he hurt any other upon the head, or upon the breast, and he that is wounded dies within the end of the year, he that hath hurt him is condemned to die as a murderer. The bodies of such as have been slain (if the offendor be not present) are not buried until that he be executed; and yet sometimes many weeks are spent before they can do execution.  
They impose a penalty upon the judge, who being required twice to give a difinitive sentence, defers it, and by this means suits are not procted in length. This proceeds from an ancient law, by the which they are forbidden to have any proctor or advocate, so as every one propounds his own cause before the judge: but if it be a widow, a pusill, ● mad man, or a fool, the nearest kinsman follows the cause, and if he be not present▪ the Senate appoints a tutor, and the business is soon dispatched. It is true that a ●●dge is excused for some circumstances when as he finds reason why he should not pronounce sentence so soon.  
As for officers appointed over the king's revenues, there is first a Commissary who signs the mandates of all that which is assigned for pensions or wages to every officer: and notwithstanding that the Commissary general doth not meddle with the money, by reason whereof his heirs are not liable to any accounts, yet they pay not any wages or pension without his hand. This general Commissary hath a Treasurer under him, who receives the king's money, keeps it, puts it into the treasury, and keeps the account. With this Treasurer there are ten Chamberlains or Masters of account who keep the registers of all the king's revenues, and th●se assemble with the Treasurer according ●o occurrents, and give up their account yearly before the Commissary general, and in the presence also of some of the king's Councillors: and the Treasurer hath in every province divers Exactors who bring the taxes unto him, and all that belongs unto the king, the which is afterwards put into the treasury.   

¶ The Religion.  
KIng ●●stau● being solicited by Olaus, Peter Nenicius a Lutheranand by one Laurence Andrew Archdeacon of Strenge, but fallen from the Romish religion, brought the doctrine of Luther into Sueden, for the desire he had to appropriate unto himself ●he goods of the Church, at his new coming unto the crown; so as he seized upon wha● he pleased, and made a law, by the which it was ordained that Bishops should not enjoy any thing but what pleased the king: He put the universities of his realms into ●he hands of the Lutherans, forbidding all men to go to study without the realm, but ●t Witemberg, and in some other universities which favoured Luther's doctrine: and causing the ancient libraries to be burnt, he made the bible to be translated into the vulgar tongue; so as he abolished the Romish religion in his Estates, and advanced Luther's doctrine all he could. Yet the profession of Calvin was received in those countries which were subject to Charles third son to king Gustave, being duke of Vermelande, Sudermania, and Nericia. Henry son to Gustave, and his next successor, did not oppose himself. john his brother who succeeded him, a man of good understanding was of another opinion, and did read the books of the ancient fathers, but fearing some revolt, and ●i● brother Charles, durst not discover himself openly. Yet the conversation of his wife K●t●er●n●, daughter to Sigismond king of Poland, made him to observe many Catholic epitomes; for he kept Lent; he abstained from flesh on Fridays, he preserved the monastery of Vassene, he did much honour to S. Brigit, bestowing a shrine of silver upon her, as also of the bones of S. Henry king of Sueden; the which he caused to be carried by Romish priests into the church of Vpsale, he did often tax the Lutheran ministers and C●luinistss, as he said, of ignorance. He re-edified the churches which they had beaten down, and repaired altars. He sent first an Ambassador to P●us the fourth, and afterwards to Gregory the thirteenth: he suffered the queen to have free exercise of the Romish religion, & to breed up their son Sigismond after the same manner, who is now king of Poland, and lawful heir of Sueden. Yea the queen obtained certain jesuits for the assistance of the people, who were in credit until her death, which happened in the year 1583. But soon after they were expelled the realm, so as there are few remaining of the Romish religion. And at this day that Charles uncle to Sigismond usurp●s his nephew's realm of Sueden, he hath wholly advanced Caluins doctrine, the which he follows; so as the inhabitants of the provinces which acknowledge him, are in a manner all Caluanists, yet there are many Lutherans remaining.   

¶ THE KINGS OF SVEDEN.  
IOhn Olaus the Great, makes a great Catalogue of the kings of Sueden whose names would be●edious. It shall suffice then to be begin with others, by Sichtr●●g; who was ●ing of Sueden long before the birth of Christ, and was slain by Gran king of Denmark, who brought this realm under his obedience. But S●●bger king of Norway vanquished Gran, & was king of Norway, Sueden, and Denmark.  
Hasmond his son succeeded him in the realms of Sueden and Norway.  
Vffoo was successor to Hasmond.  
H●ndin reigned after him, then Hunding.  
Regnier son to Hunding.  
H●tbrod son to Regnier, under whom the realm of Sueden was made subject to the Danes.  
Atisle and Hothier his sons recovered their father's realm paying a certain tribute which they aught to pay. But Rolpho king of Denmark vanquished. At●sle, and brought Sueden under his obedience. Then H●artuar borne in Sueden, did purchase such ●avour with this king, as he granted him the country of Sueden with the title of a duchy, upon condition to pay a certain tribute; and to make him more faithful, he gave him his sister in marriage. In the end Hiartuar cut off Rolp●os' head, and the Danes stew Hiartuar. Then Hothier brother to Atisle got possession of the realm, and brought Denmark under his obedience; but he was expelled by Baldeer.  
Leaving here for a season in which the Suedens did nothing that was memorable, I will come unto Augustus' time, whenas Abric was king of Sueden.  
Eric his murderer succeeded him in the time of our saviour Christ.  
Haldan son to Eric reigned after him, and was slain.  
Sivard his son succeed him.  
After him Eric, son to his daughter and to Froton king of Denmark, reigned in Sueden, he was slain in war, and had for successor  
Haldan, who not caring to have any children, gave the realm to  
Vnguin, who left unto his son Sivald the two realms of Denmark and Sueden.  
Regnaud was king after Sivald, then  
Aluier, who was one of the greatest lords of Sueden.  
I●go eldest son to Aluier.  
Ingel brother to Al●●er.  
Rugo son to Ingel succeeded being yet a child. He had for successor  
Gotax, who was slain in war by the Danes.  
I●rmeric was after him king of Denmark and Sueden, about the year of Grace 380.  
Here I must make a great leap for want of good and true histories, passing from jarmeric unto Frotton, who held the realm of Sueden whenas Lewis son to Charlemaigne was Emperor. He was slain by the women of Norway.  
Herot or Gerot.  
Sort, who was vanquished by Regnier king of Denmark, and left the realm to Biorn son to this Regnier, who had for successor  
Wichsert his brother.  
Eri● the third son to Regnier.  
Ostene slew him, and succeeded in the realm. But the brethren of Eric revenged his death, and expelled Ostene, and the realm fell to Strubior son to king Biorn.  
Eric son to Olaue nephew to Regnier expelled Eric, and become king of Sueden.  
Eric his son succeeded him, and was the first of the kings of Sueden, which publicly received the Christian religion; he was at his baptism called James. This happened in the year of Grace 1000, in the time of the Emperor Henry.  
Esmond base brother to james a Christian only in name, succeeded him.  
Stinkel a good king, and a good Christian. He abolished the idol which the people did worship in the town of Vpsale, and died about the year 1100.  
Afterwards there were two Henry's or Erics who contended long for the realm, and in the end slew one another.  
Halstene son to Stinkel reigned after their death: but he was soon expelled by the mutiny of the people.  
Anaximandre was then chosen king: but for that he would not quit the rigour of religion, he was expelled, and Aquin put in his place.  
Magnus' son to Nicholas king of Denmark succeeded him.  
Suerco.  
Charles his son.  
Eric reigned after Charles, and lived unto the year 1249.  
Birgier.  
Valdemar succeeded Birgier, who being in a voyage to the Holie-land, his brother Magnus seized upon the realm, and never restored it during his life.  
Birgier was his successor, who associated his son Magnus in the realm, and for that his brethren had bred him much trouble, he caused their heads to be cut off at a banquet. This fact incensed the princes and noblemen of the country against him, who expelled him with his wife, causing the head of his son Magnus to be cut off: and then they made  
Magnus the son of Eric King, whose head Birgier had caused to be cut off. He added Norway to the realm of Sueden, and died in the year 1326.  
Magnus, his son, succeeded him in these two realms. He was in the end deposed.  
Albert, son to the duke of Meckelbourg, was seated in the place of Magnus the se●enth. He was taken with his son Eric by Marguerite wife to Aquin the son of Magnus, and detained seven years a prisoner, and then Marguerite become Queen of Sueden, Norway, and Denmark.  
Eric, duke of Pomerania, adoptive son to Marguerite, succeeded her in these three realms, but he was in the end forced to quit all, and to retire into Prussia.  
Christopher, prince Palatin, and duke of Bavaria, nephew to this Eric by his sister, was chosen King of the three realms, by the common consent of all the chiefest noblemen of the three countries.  
After the death of Christopher, the Suedens desired to have a King apart, who should be of their nation, and they did choose Charles Canutus, who was of no great extraction. Having reigned almost seven years, he began to found that he had made himself odious to all men, and therefore having put the treasury of the realm in a safe place, he retired himself by sea to Dantzic. Then the noblemen of the realm called in Christian to be their King. This Christian had been chosen King of Denmark and Norway, and by this means these three realms were subject again to one prince. The Suedens made war long against him, for that he had not kept the conventions which had been agreed upon at his reception, which was in the year 1469, so as in the end he was chased out of Sueden, where he had only two forts remaining: and in the mean time Charles, who had been King, died.  
john, son to Christian, having made long war against Sueden, brought this realm under his obedience: but he was chased away, and departed secretly.  
Christian, son to john, continued the wars which his father had begun, with great courage, and laboured to make himself King of Sueden: but when he saw they repulsed him, and defended themselves valiantly, he sought politicly to divide them, soliciting chiefly one called Gustave, who titled himself Archbishop of Vp●ale. He, in the year 1517, won many, and made them resolve to deliver the realm into the hands of Christian. After some wars, Gustave was dispossessed of his archbishopric, and then Christian came with a great army, but in the end, being put to the worst, he made a truce with them of Sueden to departed the realm. Afterwards he returned, and laid siege to Stokolme, where being entered by composition, he caused the Senators and citizens to be cruelly murdered.  
Gustave, son to Eric, who had been Archbishop of Vpsale, having escaped out of Denmark, whether he had been carried among other hostages, whom King Christian had gotten by policy from them of Stokolme, began to declare himself protector of the country, and the fourth year after the war began, he attired himself like a poor man, and went throughout the country to show his misery unto the people. In the end, he expelled the Danes, and was crowned King of Sueden.  
Eric, or Henry his son, succeeded him, who for his bad government was put in prison by his subjects, and died there.  
john, his brother, and son to Gustave, reigned after him. He was a learned prince, and of a good judgement.  
Sigismond, son to john, hath succeeded him, but he doth not enjoy the realm of Sueden quietly, whereof he doth only possess a part, debating the rest against his uncle duke Charles who usurps it, incensing them of the country against him being a Catholic, and they following the doctrine of Luther and Calvin.      


❧ A DISCOURSE OF THE ESTATE OF THE GREAT DUKE OR EMPEROR OF MUSCOVIE  

The Contents.  
1. THe circuit and limits of the country of Musco●ie. 2. In what parallel and climate this Empire is situated. 3. Description of the provinces, and of Moskuu● or Mosko the chief city of the Empire. 4. Of the duchy of Valodimer. 5. Of the duchy of base No●ograde. 6. Of the province of Rhezan and her towns. 7. Of the province and town of Smolenske. 8. Of the country of Mosaiski: the length and breadth, and by whom it was conquered from Poland. 9 Of the duchy of Roskove. 10. Of the the country of Tu●er, and the renowned town of Twerde. 11. Of the province of Pleskonia, the bigness, and the chief town of Plesko●u 12. Of Novograde the great. 13. Of the country of Volsoke, and the situation. 14. Of the province of Biolysero, Volokde, and jaroslave. 15. Of the province of Du●ine. 16. Of Susdali, and Vuiathka, a province taken from the Tart●rians. 17. Of Permia, Petzore, jugaria, Obdore, and other country's subject to the Musco●ite. 18. The sterility of the soil recompensed by the multitude of beasts, as Elkes, Bugles, Bears, Stags, Wolves, Hares, Bees, abundance of flax, hemp, and the bounty of the air. 19 Description of the most famous rivers and lakes of Muscovie, and the beginning and spring of Borysthenes discovered in our time, and unknown to the ancient. 20. A particular observation of the fertility and barrenness of every province, and of the Riphcan, or Hyperborean mountains of an admirable height. 21. T●e strange custom of the ancient Muscovites in the election of their prince, and the usage of their wives. 22. Their strong constitution of body, their apparel, arms, and manner of fight when they fly: their meat, and ordinary drink, their barbarousness, treachery, subtility, looseness, and venal justice. 23. A more particular description of the manners and customs of every country. 24. Their riches in the skins of Elkes, Stags, Bears, Wolves, and Sables: in flax, hemp, honey, and wax. 25. Riches of the king, and what his revenues be. 26. A notable relation of the stately entertainment of Permisten Ambassador to the Emperor by the Muscovite. 27. The strength of the Muscovites country in marisbes and rivers: in the thickness of woods serving as rampires, and making the entry difficult; and of the great numbers of horse. 28. What numbers of horse this realm may draw to field. 29. Of the mighty neighbour enemies which confine with this Estate, and first of the Precop prince of the Tartarians. 30. Of two other neighbour enemies, the kings of Sueden and Poland. 31. Of the great dukes sovereign authority in his Estate, and by what means he maintains it. 32. At what time the Christian religion was brought in, and what their ceremonies be in the celebration of the Mass. 33. Of the circumcision and religion of the Morduois, li●ing according to the law of nature.   

WHen as in our common discourses we make mention of any duke, it seems that his Estates are of a small extent, for that we commonly see, that such as at this day have this title, either among us, or with our neighbours, enjoy but small provinces, and do soon found the bounds of their command and signory. But he of whom we mean now to speak, is a duke of greater power than all the rest which we know in Europe: For not only his countries are equal in greatness to them of many great kings, but doth also exceed them in such sort, as he that will compare their principalities with this, shall found that they give law but to asmal pa●ch of ground in regard of that which doth acknowledge the great Duke or Knez of Muscovie: and therefore his subjects being sufficiently informed of the countries which yield him obedience, term him Caesar or Emperor, and yield him as much honour as ever was done to any prince. And if we truly consider what his Empire contains, we shall found that he deserves a higher stile than that which they commonly give him, in steed of the name of king, which they have found to be very odious to the Muscovites.  
Let us now search it to the bottom, and see how far his limits do extend, and whither he be so powerful as I have said in the entry of this discourse. I say then that all the Muscovites Empire doth at this day contain all Russia, excepting Polonia and Lituania, which are also comprehended under the same name of Russia.  
These Estates are part in Europe and part in Asia, and this separation is made by the river of Tanais, otherwise called Don, the which is the common bound of Asia and Europe. They are confined upon the North by the frozen sea, as also upon the East, bending towards the South by the Tartarians; upon the South side they have Lituania, and their nearest neighbours upon the West are they of Liffland or Livonia, and in like manner Finland, countries divided by the river of Polne, and belonging to the king of Sueden. All these Estates draw their general name from a country lying in the midst of Russia the White, which extends towards the North and East, and is particularly called Muscovie. We must note that the part of Russia which obeys the great Knez is called White Russia, and that which doth acknowledge the king of Poland Black Russia; yet the king of Poland doth hold something in the White.  
This Empire is situated betwixt the nineteenth parallel in two and fifty degrees of latitude or elevation of the pole, and the three and fortieth parallel which is sixty and six degrees from the Equator: or else expounding it after another manner, it lies betwixt the midst of the eight climate, and the midst of the twentieth, and is comprehended betwixt the Tropic of Cancer, and the Arctike circle: so as they observe a very great difference in the quantity of the longest day in Summer. For in the most Southern parallel of Muscovie, the longest day is but sixteen hours and a half, whereas in the most Northern parallel of the same Empire, the longest day is of two and twenty hours and a half; the which doth sufficiently show how great a distance it is from one frontier unto another. For to take every degree for thirty French leagues as they do commonly, we shall found that it contains in breadth only from South to North four hundred and twenty leagues, and in length twice as much, yea more: or to speak according unto some Italians, this Empire hath in length three thousand miles, and in breadth one thousand and five hundred.  
The particular province of Muscovie alone contains from East to West about six hundred leagues, and the chief city of the Empire is in this province, the which they call Muskwa, or Mosko, of the name of a river which runs near unto it. The castle of the great Knez is in the midst of this city, betwixt the rivers of Mosko and Heglima, which comes and joins with Mosko beneath this castle, the which is so great as it may be taken for a good town: it is fortified with 17 towers, and there bastions, and there the great duke makes his ordinaryaboad, being attended on by five and twenty thousand men. The city hath neither good ditch nor wall, nor any rampire to defend it; and the houses are for the most part of wood: it is great, but very miry, and in it are about 41500 houses. There are many other places to be seen, but they stand dispersed, and much scattered, and in the midst of great plains. The longest day of Summer in the town of Mosko is near eighteen hours.  
The other provinces are the duchy of Volodimer, where there is to be seen a great town of the same name, built of wood, and distant from Musko towards the East, about six and thirty Polonian leagues.  
There is moreover, the duchy of Base Novograd, where is also to be seen a town carrying the same name, built of wood, & lying from Mosko about one hundred leagues of Polonia.  
Moreover, the province of Rezan lies betwixt the rivers of Oque and Don, whereof the great duke carries the title; and besides this, there is the duchy of Vorotina, as also, the province of Severe, which is very great: it contains many towns, among the which they do number for the most famous those of Starodub, Potiwle, and Czernigow.  
The province of Smolenko is situated upon the river of Neper, or Deneper, called Borysthenes by Ptolomee. This country was taken by Basilius' duke of Muscovie, from the King of Poland, who was the Protector. The chief town is also called Smolenko: it is reasonable great, and is distant from Mosko about eighty Polonian leagues.  
The country of Mosaiski hath in length about three hundred and fifty Italian miles, and as much in breadth. It was taken by john duke of Muscovie, predecessor to Basilius, from Alexander King of Poland. Biele, or Bielski, is in like manner a principality, or province of Russia, having a town and castle of the same name upon the river of Opske. This place is sixty Germane leagues from Mosko, and six and thirty from Smolenko▪  
The duchy of Roschove hath a town of the same name, with a castle of wood, and is from Mosko, towards the West, about three and twenty leagues. The town stands upon the famous river of Volga.  
The country of 'Twere, or Otwer, one of the greatest of Russia, both a town called Twerde, the which is greater and more stately than that of Mosko, from the which it is distant six and thirty leagues.  
The province of Plescovia, or Pleskonia, hath in length three hundred and thirty Italian miles, and is not so broad by a third part. The chief town is Pleskow, great and powerful, and walled about, which the other towns of Muscovie want.  
Novograd the Great, is the greatest duchy of all Russia, and takes his name from the great and rich town of Novogrod, which exceeds all those that lie towards the North, notwithstanding that most part of the houses are made of wood: this town is about two hundred miles from the Baltic Sea, one hundred and twenty from Mosko, towards the southwest, six and thirty from Pleskow, and forty from Iwanowgrod.  
The country of Volske, or Votske, is seated betwixt the West and North, and upon the left hand it hath the castle of Iwanowgrod. The province of Corelle is from Novogrod sixty Polonian leagues towards the North: it extends unto the frozen sea, and their longest day in Summer is twenty hours and a half, during the which the Sun doth shine, so as they have not at that season any dark night.  
The province of Bieleiezioro, or Biolysero, having a town also so called, takes his name from the White Lake, near unto the which it lies, and in the which there is a fort to be ●eene, which they hold impregnable, whereas the great duke doth commonly lodge his treasure, and whether he retires himself in time of necessity whenas his enemies press him. This country is a hundred leagues both from Mosko and Novogrod the Great. Volokde is also a province, wherein there is a place exceeding strong, whereas the great Knez doth sometimes lay part of his treasure. The duchy of jaroslave, with a town and castle of the same name, upon the river of Volga, is six and forty leagues from Mosko. They do also put the principality of Rostow near unto Novogrod the Great.  
The province of Dwine, drawing the name from the river that waters it, was sometimes of the jurisdiction of Novogrod: and the river hath received her name from the concourse of the rivers of juch, and Suchane; for that Dwine, in the Ruthenian tongue, signifies two. Notwithstanding that this country be one hundred leagues broad, yet hath it no other place, but the castle of Colmogor, that of Pinegue, and the town of Dwine, seated in the midst of the province. There are good store of villages, but they stand scattering one from another, by reason of the barrenness of the country. The Sun shines there in the solstice of Summer, whenas it comes into the tropic of Cancer, one and twenty hours and a half, so as night there, is like unto the break of day: but whenas the Sun is in the solstice of Winter, it remains over the country about two hours and a half.  
They place the province of Susdali, with a town and castle of the same name, betwixt Rostow and Volodimer. The town of Susdali hath an Episcopal See, and was sometimes fair and well peopled, whenas the dukes of Muscovie kept their courts at Volodimer: but at this day it is in a manner desert, by reason of the continual incursions of the Tartarians. The province of Vuiathka, beyond the river of Camme, is distant from Mosko about one hundred and fifty leagues: it did in former times obey the Tartarians, but it was taken from them by Basilius the great duke of Muscovie.  
Permia is a very great province, distant two hundred and fifty leagues from Mosko, and hath a town of the same name upon the river of Vischore, or Vistore. The longest day in Summer is of eighteen hours. The country of jugre, or juhre, or jugaria, lieth towards the North Sea, and it is from thence that the Hongarians coming in former times, seized upon Panonia, the which they called of their name jugaria, Hongarie. The province of Petzore is very long, bending from the East and North unto the frozen Sea. The inhabitants of this province have their longest day of two and twenty hours.  
The Muscovite hath also under his empire the Czeremisses, which are under Novogrod, as the Nordues near to Volga are under base Novogrod. There are also other countries lying towards the North, which acknowledge the great Knez, as that of Obdore, Condore, Culomorie, and Lappia, and in like manner certain Hordes of Tarta●ianss, as the Hord of Casan, the town of Astracham, or Citracham, with the Hordes of Nohaicois, and some others.  

¶ The Quality of the Country.  
TO discourse in general of all this country, it is full of marshes, miry, moist, and nothing fertile, by reason that the air is rough and untemperate, and the fields are full of sand, and the soil not good: so as the corn doth seldom ripen, by reason that the Winter is long, and the cold very sharp: wherefore, they dry their sheaves in stoves: yet they have store of wheat, and grass. Their land bears no vines, nor olive trees, cherries, nor walnuts: they have small nuts, and some other kinds of first-fruits, but their taste is not very pleasing. The high country is full of woods and great forests, where the trees are very high and thick, and these woods are part of the forest of Hercynia. They found in them great numbers of Elkes, B●gleses, B●a●eses, Stags, and Wolves, but especially of Hares. Their sheep are much less than ours. They have great store of bees, which live not only in hives which they make expressly for them, but they also fill hollow trees in the forest with their honey; yea in such sort, as a Muscovite called Demetrius being sent to Rome in embassage, reported, That a countryman of his knowledge, and his neighbour, had slipped down into a great hollow tree to seek for honey, and that being at the bottom, he was up to the breast in honey, and continued two days in that estate, living only of honey, until that seeing a bear which came to eat of this honey, and had gotten down, he laid hold of him, and so terrified him with his cries, as he made him to leap forth, and so drew him out with him, having fast hold of the bears legs. Horned beasts are for the most part without horns. The country yields abundance of flax and hemp, which they transport into many parts of Europe, to make cords. There are not ●ny veins of gold, silver, or other metal in this country, except iron. There is store of pasture, and by consequence great abundance of cattle and flesh.  
The air of Muscovie is so good, as it were a wonder to see it infected with the plague: yet they have a burning fever which doth so torment them, lying in their heads & bowels, as they die within few days. The land opens and gapes by reason of the great cold, as it doth in our countries after a great heat & drought. Yet sometimes it is hot in the country, for in the year 1527, the heat of Summer was so violent, as the wheat yea and forests were burnt, as Sigismond doth writ.  
There are many goodly rivers, among which there are divers very famous, as well by reason of the navigation, as for their greatness, and for the abundance of fish which is in them. The chief which rise and have their springs in the country itself, or else do water it, are Borysthenes, called vulgarly Dnieper, Deneper or Neper, and Nester or Denester whose spring was unknown to Herodotus; but discovered in our time near to Dniepetk a village in Muscovie in the forest of Wolkonzki. This river running towards the South, and passing first by the town of Smolenko, then by Kiovia, and some other towns, being grown great with many other waters, falls into the Euxine sea, among others it receives the river of D●sna, called by the ancients Hipani, but in such sort, as it being most clear of itself, and Desna muddy, it is not troubled with it. Turante now called Duina, as Heberstein Rubo affirms, comes out of the lake of Duina, near unto the spring of Neper in the same forest, and falls into the Baltic sea. Rha now called Volga and Edil, is another river in Muscovie, which draws her name from a lake so called, which is five and twenty leagues from Musco, bending towards Lituania. This river hath an infinite course, for that rising as I have said, and turning up and down, in the end it passeth near unto the town of Astracham, and falleth into the Caspian sea with seventy mouths: the navigation whereof doth enrich Muscovie with gold, silver, silks, and tapistry, and by it they carry away in exchange rich furs. The river of Tanais or of Don comes not out of the Riphean mountains, as some have thought, but out of a great lake which is within a forest near unto the river of Tuelle. This river with her course divides Europe from Asia, and coming out of Muscovie, having run a great tract, it turns back towards the South, and makes the marshes which they call Meotides, and are at this day called of Temerinde. This river hath store of fish, and goodly banks covered with grass, and fruit trees, whereas they also found roots of a pleasing taste. Herberstein saith, that this river doth swell so in Autumn, as it is able to bear great ships full fraught. The river of Ocque hath her spring in the province of Misceneke, and makes all the land which it waters fertile: it abounds in fish, which they esteem more than all the rest of Muscovie. There are moreover many lakes, whereof some are exceeding great: for besides the lake of Volga, of Duina, and others, from whence the rivers of Muscovie take their springs, there is the lake of Imen which the Rutheniens call Ilmer, above Novogrod the great, the which is twelve Germane leagues long, and eight broad.  
But to describe more particularly the quality of these countries, it is most certain that in the province of Volodimer, the land is so good & so fertile, as a measure of come being sown doth many times yield twenty, yea sometime five and twenty measures. It is true that the soil of Rhezan is much more fertile, and yields more than all the rest that are under the Muscovite, for they say that one grain of corn doth many times bring forth six ears, yea more; the stalks grow so thick, as a horse can hardly pass through them, nor the quails fly, or get out of them but with much difficulty. In this province there is great store of honey, fish, foul, and in like manner plenty of ermines and bevers; and their first-fruits are better than in any country of Muscovie: it is in this country whereas they found the spring of the river of Don.  
As for the country of Severe, it abounds in all things, notwithstanding that there be great champain deserts, and near unto Branki a very great wood. The forests are full of ermines and sables. Touching the duchy of Smolenko, there are many thick forests, from whence they carry a great number of sundry skins. But if we shall observe the province of Volsque, we shall found one thing strange, for they hold it for certain that the beasts which are brought thither, of what hair or colour soever they be, grow all white having made any stay there. As for the province of Bieleieziore, it is in a manner full of woods, and marshes. In regard of that of Vstyug, there is little corn, but much flesh and fish: there are great numbers of beasts of all sorts, and by consequence many rich skins, except sables, the which are neither fair, nor many in number. The country of Rostoau hath a fertile soil, and abounds in salt and fish.  
The province of Dwina is reasonably fertile, and it is plentifully furnished with fish and great store of beasts. Upon the sea coast of this country there are many white bears which live most commonly in the sea, as they of the country report. That of Vivatke is barren and moorish; but there is great plenty of honey, fish, and wild beasts. In the province of Permia there is no corn, but in recompense they have great store of stags and other beasts.  
In the province of Petzore there are great mountains and wonderful high rocks, the which the ancients called Riphean or Hyperboreans, the which continually are covered with snow. They are so high as some have been seventeen days going up, and yet could not come to the top. There is not any corn in this country, but many wild beasts.   

¶ The Manners of the ancient inhabitants.  
THey which in old time lived in the city of Moscow, had a custom which the succession of the great duke hath quite abolished. There was a square stone in the midst of the m●rket place & if any one could get up unto it and not be overthrown, he obtained the principality of the town. The inhabitants did strive one against another with great yehemencie to get up to this stone, and to hinder them that sought ot mount. Many have reported that the Muscovites wives did sometimes weep, and complain bitterly of their husbands, if they did not beaten them often, believing that they did not love them, for that they showed no effects of jealousy: so as even they that were most tender over their wives, were forced to beaten them once or twice a week, to please them and to give them some assurance of their love, and by this means all jars were ended.   

¶ The Manners at this day.  
THe Muscovites are for the most part strong and swift. They are of a mean stature, but square in the shoulders: they do commonly wear long beards, and very long garments without any plaits, the which hung down unto their heels, having very strait slecues, after the manner of the Hongarians, & they are commonly white, or of an azure colour: they wear buskins to the calf of the leg, which are for the most part read, the which are high at the heel, and set with nails of iron. They have a good custom, that every man wears garments according to his condition, and according to the great dukes ordinances, who hath prescribed what every man shall wear. They have for their arms a quiver full of arrows, a bow, a hatchet, a partuisan, long knives, and gloves many times double garnished with lead, the which they did sometimes use in Greece. The footmen also carry lances: they are armed with long corslets, and wear headpieces and moryons; they serve upon geldings which are little and lightly furnished. They ride with short stirrups on a jennet, and shoot their arrows flying with wonderful dexterity. Whenas they begin to fly, they have no hope but in their flight, and being overtaken by their enemies, they make no defence, neither are they ever seen to beg their lives, not any good usage, not to make any entreaty. Moreover they live but miserably, having for their drink nothing but water beer, or mead, it being forbidden them to drink any liquor that may make them drunk, but twice or thrice in the year. They are oppressed with a heavy and insupportable tyranny, for that the noble men and peers of the realm are subject to the great duke, who disposeth of them as of slaves, and the people are tyrannized by the nobility. They have a certain natural inclination which doth m●●ue them to ra●e one at another with reproachful words, and also to accuse one another be it rightfully or without cause. They have this cunning or villainy in them, secretly to transport into another man's house, and to hide that which is theirs, to the end, that having made a search, they may have them condemned in whose lodging the things are found. They are so barbarous and treacherous, as there is not any plainness or sincerity to be found among them; and their natural disposition is so bad, as you shall never see any firm love or friendship among them, yea they keep no faith with them to whom they have promised it, neither have they any respect of parentage or alliance. They are as subtle and deceitful as can be, and in all their bargains they have still some trick and double understanding, with the which they seek to abuse one another, and to found means to break their contracts, and to interpret them after their own fancies: and it is a thing so common among them, and so well known, as they finding themselves blemished with this vice, feign themselves to be no Muscovites, whenas they are to deal with any strangers, or would traffic with them. justice (as a man may say) is sold by the sound of the drum to him that offers most, and will pay dearest for it, and this wickedness is practised in a manner publicly, and the poor have no access to the prince, but only to his Councillors, and that with very great difficulty; and that which is more strange, poor men, and such as are unknown, can hardly have access to ordinary gentlemen, which are not of the greatest note in the province; and gentlemen show themselves very seldom, to the end they may purchase greater authority, and be more respected, suffering themselves to be seldom seen by the people.  
The women do commonly carry store of pearls and precious stones, especially they want not to hung at their ears. She that hath married the second time, shall be held to be chaste enough: but if she come unto the third marriage, she is held for to be unchaste: the like opinion they have of men. The people for the most part are wonderfully given to whoredom and drunkenness: they are very careful of the sick: they labour with horses: whereas in former times they had no kind of money coined, now they use some: they speak the Sclavonian tongue, but so mixed with other languages, and so corrupt, as the slavonians and Muscovites understand not one another. The great duke suffers not his subjects to go out of his country, by reason whereof, the Muscovites knowing no other world but their own country, and believing that there is not any prince so powerful as theirs, are wonderful arrogant, and full of insupportable pride. They have not among them any Physicians or Apothecaries.  
But to speak something in particular of certain provinces of Muscovie, they of the country of Rhezan are held valiant, and borne to war, and they of Sever fight also with great courage, by reason of their continual wars with the Tartarians. They of Novograda the Great, were in former times very courteous; but they are now much corrupted, and have left that good disposition by the conversation they have had with the Muscovites. They of Volsque have a particular language, which differs not much from that of the Prussians. The inhabitants of the country of Permia use no bread, but live of the flesh of stags and other beasts: they have a particular language and characters also which differ from them of Russia: they use dogs and great stags in stead of horses to carry their burdens, and to draw their wagons. They of jugre or jugaria speak the Hongarian tongue: and the inhabitants of the province of Petzore are very simple, and have a particular language: they never eat any bread. The Czeremissois live in great forests, and have not any houses. They use a language differing from the rest: they are very swift, and exceeding good archers. They carry their bows continually in their hands, and love them in such sort, as they never give their children which are grown to any stature any thing to eat until they have hit a white which they set up before them. They live for the most part of honey, and the flesh of wild beasts; they eat bread seldom, and make their garments of skins. The Morduois are in every thing like unto the Czeremissois, only they live in houses, and have a particular language.   

¶ The Riches.  
THe Muscovites have great store of skin● of Elkes, Stags, Bears, Wolves, & Sables, which they cell dear unto the merchants of Europe, as also flax and hemp which they hold to be exceeding good. And they have great store of corn which they sand towards the Caspian and Euxin Seas, besides iron, wax, tallow, wood, asnes, honey, and the other commodities above mentioned, whereof they cell abundance to strangers. They have a port called S. Nicholas, which is of great traffic, whether the English trade much, and to some other parts of the great Duke's dominions. But for all this, we must not think that this country is of great traffic, as well for that the inhabitants are not very industrious, and that the country whereas arts, trades, & works do not flourish, cannot be of great traffic, nor sought unto by strangers; as also, for that it is not lawful for the Muscovites to go out of their prince's dominions: by reason whereof, they are ignorant of matters belonging to the Sea. They do only exchange that which the country yields, that is to say, pitch, honey, wax, skin's, and other commodities, for cloth and such like, which the Armenians bring to Astracan upon the Caspian sea, or of Bachu, and the English to S. Nicholas upon the gulf of Granu●c.  
As for the king's riches, we may easily conjecture that they are great, seeing that he is Lord and absolute master of all things; he makes use of the labour of his subjects, and taketh what part of their goods he pleaseth. He takes unto himself the decrest and most precious skins which are found in his countries, and makes his own share: he doth the like of all kind of fish. He sells the skins, or gives them; and as for fish they dry it in the wind, and keep it for the provision of his sorts. No man may cell any thing in the market, before that be bought which the prince hath sent. The places of greatest traffic from whence he draws the greatest part of his revenues, are Astracan, which is upon the Caspian Sea, whether they bring their merchandise from Persia and Armenia: and S. Nicholas upon the gulf of Granuic, whether come the ships from England and Holland, laden with copper and other merchandise, which they carry from thence to Vologde.  
Whenas the Ambassadors of the great Knez return into Muscovie, he takes from them the presents which they have received from princes, giving them some matter of small value in exchange, and sometimes nothing at all. To conclude, he draws unto himself all that he finds good in his Estates. By reason whereof, they hold that he hath great store of treasure in the forts of Mosko, jeroslavia, and the White Lake; the which hath some show of truth, for the great Duke john carried away in a manner all the Chalices, relics, crosses, and silver, out of Livonia: and it is not lawful to carry any money out of his countries, unless it be to redeem slaves, or to pay the ransom of such as are taken by the enemies in war. It is true, that by the loss of Livonia (yielded by the great Duke to Stephen King of Poland, in the year of our Redemption 1582) he hath been deprived of the richest part of the traffic of the Baltic Sea, and of the best country he had. Yet notwithstanding the great Duke is exceeding rich, as well for the reasons above mentioned, as for other commodities which do accrue unto him: for he hath certain Magazines of salt towards Livonia, the which yield him yearly a million of gold, and is a great prejudice unto France, the which for a long time did vent salt into these countries. They do also sand store of corn and other commodities into Sueden, Denmark, and the neighbour countries, whereby they raise great s●mmeses of money.  
But to represent in some sort the greatness and riches of this prince, I hold it not unfitting to set down in few words what Philip Pernisten Ambassador for the Emperor with the great Duke of Muscovie, reports of the entertainment he received from him, and of his magnificence. He saith, That the great Duke did carry a Crown which was richer than the Popes, the French Kings, the King of Spain's, or the Emperor, and that it was of an inestimable value: His robe was all set with Diamonds, Rubies, Emeralds, and other stones as big as hazel nuts, so as Pernisten was amazed how he could carry so great a burden. His eldest son was attired like himself. They were served at their meat by a hundred gentlemen or thereabouts, all which carried so many dishes of gold unto the table, setting them they took away upon a great cupboard one upon ane another, not caring for the meat that was in them. He sent unto Pernisten whenas he departed from his court three hundred and twenty sable skins, every one of which was valued in Vienne at twenty pounds sterling, and entertained him at his own charge during all the time he remained in his country. He saith also that whenas the great Knez did feast him, there was in the antechamber or Stove such abundance of chargers, bowls, and such like of gold and silver, as thirty wagons had not been able to carry all this vessel, and yet this was not his chiefest plate, but only that of the castle where he dined. He must of necessity have great store of silver, for that one of these dukes after the taking and sack of Horcograde carried away three hundred wagons laden with money with an infinite quantity of gold and silver He hath infinite means to draw money, for that he alone doth deal with all sorts of merchandise throughout the realm, and spends not one penny upon any occasion; and all such as he sends into any of his countries defraie themselves. In like manner he gives not any thing to his soldiers, but going to the war, and returning from it, he pays to every one three pence, the which he will have observed, to the end he may know what numbers go unto the war, and what return. And this is all that can briefly be spoken of the riches of this great prince; let us now come unto his forces.   

¶ The Forces.  
IT is most certain that the incursions of the Tartarians Precopites, and Nogays (who are never quiet, not suffer their neighbours to live at rest, but carry away whole provinces, whom they cell unto the Turks and others) are the cause that Muscovie is much unpeopled. Moreover the enterprises made by the great dukes into far countries, have much decreased the number of the people of Muscovie. There is nothing doth more show the wisdom of a prince than his discretion in knowing what enterprise is profitable for his Estates, and what design is prejudicial, and his judgement not to suffer himself to be carried away with any shows of greatness, which transport him beyond the bounds of safety, and draw him into dangerous extremities. For he that weakens his Estate of men an means, without hope of greatness, is like unto him that should ruin the foundation of his house to raise the walls or to make the covering: and it is well known that the first Principle of an Estate is to preserve itself, and the conquests which are made with the diminution of her forcoes is contrary to this Maxim, which should be carefully observed.  
Conpuests are like unto grafts which should better the condition of an Estate, and not impair it: for as they grafted either to better savage trees, or to make some plant bear fruit which carries none: so enterprises should be made in such sort as they may bring commodity or wealth; otherwise they are but a charge and vexation, & are fit to consume and rulne, than to increase and assure an Estate. Such are most commonly the wars which are made to conquer countries, which have no communication with ours but are far off, or that have need of greater forces than ours to be preserved. For it is most certain that all enterprises should be grounded upon three heads, whereof the one is the right and interest which he hath to that which he pretends to conquer; the second, the facility to vanquish; and the third, the fruit of the victory: so as wars which are undertaken without hope of fruit are mere follies.  
The great dukes of Muscovie in truth have far extended the bounds of their dominions, but for all this they have nothing augmented their forces. And we may say that none of them have attempted farther, nor spent more treasure than the great duke john, who took the realms of Calan upon Volgue, & of Astracan upon the Caspian sea, and subdued a great part of Livonia; but many of his men perished in these voyages, in battles and in assaults, or by the enemy's hand, sickness, hunger, or their continual toil: and after the conquest he was forced to entertain great garrisons in his sorts, or to plant colonies there. By reason whereof the men being employed far from their houses, either to get or to keep that which is gotten, the women remain at home like widows without hope of issue: so the heart was left unfurnished of blood, which was drawn to the extremities. For being afterwards assaulted by Stephen king of Poland, he had not forces sufficient to defend the country of Livonia, and so many other important places which were taken from him; so he was forced to quit all Livonia unto the Polonians.  
The greatest part of the Muscovites buildings being of ioists joined together and earth in the midst; they do also for the most part make towers of ioists, the which are so strong as they bear all kind of ordnance how great and weighty soever. Some dispute what forts are best, either those which are built of stone and lime, or those that are made only of wood and earth, and so allege in favour of the last, that they are sooner made and with less charge, and are of better use against batteries, and if they be easily ruined, they are also repaired in a short time, and that they may be fitted with more facility for divers manners of defences. Yet it is most certain that fortifications of stone are to be preferred, for that there being many means to offend a fort, that is to say, by the cannon, mine, fap, and fire, it may be a wall is less able to resist ordnance than earth, but it is much better than earth against the rest.  
The strength of the country consists partly in the multitude of marshes and rivers, and partly in the thickness of woods; and the Muscovites have been accustomed to suffer the countries which lie near unto the enemy to be desert and waist, to the end there may grow great woods (the which doth happen infallablie, by reason of the humidity of the ground) and that it may serve as a rampire to their towns. This hath much troubled the Polonians, for that to make them a way into their enemy's country, they have been forced to cut down great woods, and to lose much time.  
There are also some forts built, part of stone and part of earth, but without any flankers, or art of fortification, as those of Mosko, Novogrod, Plescovia, Porkovia, Staricia, Slobode of Alexandria, and Smolenko. But the walls of any place of strength are commonly made of great beams, the which they plant in such sort, as they leave a space in the midst which they fill up with earth very artificially, leaving certain holes for their harquibuziers, and this kind of defence is reasonable good against artillery, but not to resist fire, as I have said.  
The subjects of the great Knez serve their prince in the wars in such sort, as they seem rather fearful of punishment if they do not well, than to have any courage or valour. They obey their captains readily upon the first command, & endure all discommodities patiently, neither caring for cold nor rain, they suffer hunger better than any people in the world, and content themselves with little. Wherefore some are of opinion that they are fit to defend a fort, than to fight in open field; for that patience is required in the first, but they must have courage and resolution for the other. Contrariwise the Polonians are much fit to encounter an enemy in open field: wherefore the great duke Charles knowing the baseness of his people in skirmishes and battles, and the resolution and courage of the Polonians, said that his men had need of a spur to prick them forward against their enemies, and the Polonians of a bridle to keep them back.  
The chief forces of this prince consist in horsemen, but it is hard to say what numbers of horse he may draw to field. I will not believe that he can draw together three hundred thousand horse, as some do affirm, for that his country is desert, and not manured in many places, there being scarce any one village from Casan to Astracan, they being two days journey one from another: and in the war which Stephen king of Poland made against the Muscovites, notwithstanding that he had not above sixty thousand horse and foot in his army, the great duke could never draw so many men together, as he could make head against them in open field, or hinder the taking of Polosque, Vilchiluque, and some other places, or divert him from the siege of Plescovia. And in the year 1560, the prince of the Tartarians came with an army of eighty thousand horse into the heart of the Muscovites Empire, and burned the city of Mosko, the ordinary abode of the great dukes. But they which say that the great duke of Muscovie may draw together three hundred thousand horse, and the king of Poland two hundred thousand, do rather make an estimate of horses than men: for if there be great numbers of horse in Muscovie, it is well known they are not all good, not fit for war, that every one hath not means to mount and arm himself, and that some want silver, others force, and some courage: and admit they had in Muscovie so many thousands of horse and men, yet were it not possible to draw them all into one place, either for that the prince hath not treasure sufficient to do it, or for that he is not able to make so great a provision of necessary victuals; for that in Muscovie they must have three hundred thousand horses of burden for two hundred thousand soldiers, besides victuallers, artizens, merchants, and grooms; to entertain, which they must draw all Muscovie into one place, & if this were done, they should see most of their beasts and men to fail from one part unto another. But admit it were possible to unite and join all these together, yet were it not fit, if they will regard the good of an Estate; for that by this means they should unfurnish the frontiers of their garrisons, and the provinces of their strength and support, as also the towns of magistrates, and the fields of labourers. So as notwithstanding that a prince may make one hundred and fifty thousand horse out of his Estates, it shall be sufficient if he draw together a third part when he is engaged in any important war. Some more temperate, have written that the Muscovite may draw together one hundred and fifty thousand horse whenas he is forced to defend himself against any one that assails: him and that john the third, great Duke of Muscovie, led unto the enterprise of Astracan one hundred and twenty thousand horse, and twenty thousand foot. The same Duke did also invade Livonia against Alexander King of Poland, with three great armies, and retained another upon the frontier.  
The great Duke john added unto his horsemen certain thousands of Harquebuziers, among which there were many strangers which did him great service in defence of his country. This Prince every two year caused a muster to be made throughout all his Provinces, of such as were fit for the war, where he did enroll all gentlemen's sons, with the number of their servants, and what horses they were able to bring. Their horsemen (especially the rich) use corslets and head-pieces made of fine plates, which come out of Persia, and they serve also with the Lance. Others wear caslockes of cotton, the which are so doubled and so quilted, as no arrow can pierce them: and some of these do carry bows, and others Harquebusses, and all wear swords and daggers. This Prince doth also use Germane for the war, and Italians for his fortification.  
He confines with the Precop, Prince of the Tartarians of the Taurique Chersonese; with the Circassiens of the five Mountains (these inhabit a country which is eight days journey long, and are governed by seven Heads or Commanders, after the manner of the Swisses;) with the Tartarians, Nogayes; with the King of Sueden, and the Polonians. He receives much loss from the Precop, without any hope of revenge: for that the Precop is allied unto the Turk, who furnishes him with Harquebusses and artillery; and moreover, he hath in his Estate many strong towns, with good garrisons of Turks; so as it were a dangerous enterprise to assault him: and moreover, it is very easy for the Precop to make incursions into the great Duke's countries, as he hath often done, and as he doth into that of the King of Poland. If the great Duke hath subdued the Tartarians of Casan and Astracan, it was by means of the Artillery, which those people wanted. Among other things, he carried against them of Casan certain engines made as followeth: they tied unto the axle trees of certain Carts, a great and broad table with many holes, by the which his soldiers discharged their muskets and harquebusses, and in this manner wounding their enemies who had nothing but arrows, and receiving no hurt themselves, it was easy for the great Duke to vanquish these Ta●tarians, and to make them subject. But the Precop hath the use of Harquebusses, and moreover the love and protection of the great Turk, who to open himself a way into Muscovie, or into the Caspian Sea, hath tried of late years to draw a channel from the river of Don unto that of Volga, wherein he hath showed more judgement and courage than hath been commonly seen in Turks: but his men were defeated by the Muscovites, assisted therein by the Tartarians, who feared by this means to fall wholly under the Turks dominion, if this enterprise had succeeded; and not only they defeated the army which was upon the river of Don, and took a good part of them that were in it, but also put to rout that at land, in which they did number eighty thousand Tartarians, and twenty thousand Turks, among which were three thousand janissaries. The Circassiens live as we have said after the manner of the Swisses; not caring to make any conquests; but they serve for pay sometimes under the Turk, sometimes with the Sophy, and sometimes with the Muscovite, and they lie so far off, as they have no cause to fear his forces.  
The Tartarians Nogays are more to be feared by reason of the suddenness of their furious incursions, than for any means they have to gather forces together for any great enterprise, and not many years since, having entered into the Muscovites country, they were pacified and returned home by reason of certain presents which were given them. These Tartarians being (like to the Arabians) given to thieving and murder, it is more easy to stay them in giving them something, than in fight with them.  
Moreover, who so should undertake to make war against them, should enter into a great charge without any hope of gain, for that they have neither town nor place of strength by the taking and possession whereof they may be kept in awe. To stay whose incursions, the great Duke entertains great troops of horse at Citracan, Caffan, and Viatique, as he doth also at Gulugan, near to the river of Don, to make head against the Precopites.  
The Muscovite confines with the King of Sueden towards Finland; the Sueden against whom the Muscovite hath made long war, hath lost the forts of Serenesque, and the great and lesser Pernavia in Livonia, with some other places, whilst that Stephen king of Poland molested him.  
The King of Sueden holds at the end of the gulf of Finland the fort of Vibourg, where he entertains a good garrison to make head against the Muscovites. He doth also keep in this Sea, and in the ports thereof, a good part of his ships of war, as well to cross all the designs of the great Duke, as to hinder the Germane from carrying any arms or munition. The advantage of this Sea army hath made the King of Sueden stronger than the Muscovite in those places whereas these Sea forces may come: and by this means he hath taken many places from his enemy upon the coast of Livonia, and thereabouts: but it seems that the great Duke hath always had the advantage in those places whereas his horsemen may fight in any good numbers, that is to say, upon open plains: yet they cannot much annoyed one another, by reason of the roughness of the mountains, the cold, ice, and snow.  
We must now speak of the King of Poland, who hath a country better inhabited, and more civil than the great Duke; but not of so great an extent. There is also this difference betwixt these two Princes, that the Muscovites are more obedient to their Duke, and the Polonians more hardy and courageous: the first are fit to resist, and the second to assail; those seem borne to defend their forts, and these to fight in open field; those are more united, and these more resolute in factions and enterprises; those fear hunger and all discommodities less, and these the sword and death: but the one and the other are such as the courage and conduct of their Prince doth make them: for we know well that the great Duke Basilius took the duchy of Smolenko and Polosko, and conquered a very great country in Livonia. And on the other side, Stephen King of Poland took Polosko, with many other places of importance from the great duke john, son to Basilius.   

¶ The Government.  
IT is most certain that the great duke of Muscovie disposeth as absolutely of his subjects as any prince in the world, as you may observe in many places of this discourse, for that he hath power both of life and goods, and is so feared, as when he hath commanded any thing, there is no contradiction, neither dare any man frame a complaint. Wherefore Meh●●●●isir●●● to the great Turk said, that the Muscovite and the Turk al●●● among all other princes ●●●●e absolute masters of their goods; wherefore 〈…〉 the enterprise of Steph●● king of Poland very difficult. The great duke useth an in●●●●d●ble care and 〈◊〉 to maintain himself in this authority. For first of all it is not ●●●full for any of his subjects to go out of his Estates without leave, upon pain of death. And for this cause there are none of his people that make any voyages by sea, nay they ●●re not, nor may not speak unto an Ambassador, nor use a strange physician in their ●●●●nesse, unless they have leave so to do●. He seeks also to make himself full of majesty by the pomp and stárelinesse of his garments, for joining in a manner the gravity of a prelate with his ●egall state: he carries upon his head a Mi●er set with goodly pearls and rich stones, and if he wears it not, he holds it before him in his Throne, and doth often change to show his greatness and riches. He holds in his left hand a kind of Cross, which is very rich: he wears along robe like unto the Pope, whenas he goes to the Chapel, with his hands full of rings of great price. He holds in his right hand the image of Christ, and upon the top of his ●haire stands that of the Virgin Mary. In his chamber, & in the withdrawing chamber attend men with robes of cloth of gold down unto the foot. To the end that no man may know more than himself, he hath not any ●●●●less for learning, but to read and writ, whereas they read nothing but the Gospel, and the life of so●●d Saint, or some Homily of S. john Chrisostome, or of some other. If any one seems to have a desire 〈◊〉 proceed further in the sciences, he should be presently suspected to have some bad d●●●●igh●, and his attempt should not be unpunished: the which the great duke causeth to be observed, to the end that none of his shall be more l●●●●ed than himself. Hence it grows that the Secretaries and high Chancellor never 〈◊〉 not make answer to the Ambassadors of for fa●●● princes, but what the great duke d●●● dictate. They never name the great K●●zin any affairs they treat of, but they all rise up with great honour and r●●●●●nc●● the like is done at the table whenas he invites 〈◊〉 one to drink, or makes him partaker of his dish, and in many other such like occasions. They do also teach them from their infancy to speak and make account of their prince as of a God. God alone (say they) and the great Lord knows this: our great Lord knoweth all: all health and all the commodities we have come from our great L●●d. Thus the subjects instructed to this honour, and seeing such greatness and majesty in their prince, and knowing no other reverence, obey him not as subjects but as slaves, and respect him not as their prince, but as a God. There are not any noblemen of title in Muscovie, as we see among us dukes and barons, and if he grants to any one the possession of some place, it goes not to his heirs unless he confirms it: and notwithstanding that he hath given this signory, yet the peasants and countrymen pay p●●r● of their first-fruits, and perform their days works unto him. To conclude, all depends of the will of the great duke, and the richer a man is, the more he is bound unto him. To prevent all conspiracies, he transports whole families from one place unto anoth●●● and sends men unto garrisons far from their houses, and as it were to banishment.   

¶ The Religion.  
THe Russians and Muscovites received the Christian religion from the Grecians in the year of Grace 987, or as some say 942. They were before given to the worship of false gods, whom they left with such resolution, as they have ever since persisted in the religion which they have received, yet notwithstanding they have added in succession of time many superstitions. They say that they and the Grecians alone are true Christians, and that the Romans and other Christians have fallen from the Primitive Church, and do not adhere to the seven holy Synods. They use the Sclavonian tongue, like to the Polonians ●nd Lituanians, and celebrated their Mass and ceremonies in the same language, adding certain songs with the Epistle and Gospel in Greek. They hate the jews deadly, and will not suffer them to live among them. They hold it a great offence to kill a calf and to eat the flesh of it. Pernisten reports that when he was Ambassador there for the Emperor, all the Muscovites seemed to have a great desire to see Rome, and to visit the places where as they heard so many Saints had suffered martyrdom and been buried: but their greatest desire was to see our Lady of Loretto. They bear great honour to S. Nicholas, whose body they keep carefully and with great reverence. They are much more ceremonious in matters of religion than the Romanists; for that they never pass before a Monastery, a Church, or a Cross (whereof the streets are full) but they alight from their horses and kneel down, which the footmen also do, making the sign of the Cross, and saying these words following, Miloy Hospodi, Miloy Hospodi, Miloy Hospodi, Lord have mercy upon us. The same Pernisten saith, That whenas they that were sent unto him to keep him company, came near unto any Church whereas they said Mass, it was not possible to make them pass on, until they had heard it, but falling upon their knees, they did beaten the ground often with their forehead, especially at the elevation of the Sacrament. They dare not enter into a Church, but remain without (whenas they have been with a woman) until they be bathed and washed. Whenas they celebrat Mass they are attired like Romish Priests: but one of their Masses continues twice as long as that of the Romanists, and they say it in the vulgar tongue. There are always two or three Deacons present, which sing continually, Miloy Hospodi, and hallelujah, and all the assistants sing with him, making oftentimes the sign of the Crosse. They use candles of wax, images, and other things like unto the Romanists, and especially holy water, and holy salt. At the end of Mass, the Priests divide certain little loaves that are hallowed, and distribute them unto the people, the which they receive and carry home with great reverence, seeking to give some small portion to every one of their family.  
In Monasteries they always say a Mass at the break of day, at the which men only assist, and many through great devotion remain all night in the Church with the Monks, who successively sing and praise God without ceasing. They are also very devout in their affairs; for they never go out of their lodging, nor enter in, but they bow themselves thrice before a crucifix or the Virgin Marie, which they keep with some light in their chambers, and they make the sign of the Cross, saying thrice Miloy Hospodi. This ceremony being done, they begin to speak to them that are near them. They do the like at the table whenas they take their repast.  
Processions are also very frequent there, and notwithstanding that it is exceeding cold, yet they go far. Baptism is esteemed, & administered by them, as by the Romanists, only they say, Let the infant be baptized in this fountain, in the name of the Father, etc. Pennance is also practised by the Confessor and the Penitent, who stands upright in the midst of the Church, and never fits. Satisfaction is also frequent, as in the Primative Church, and rigorous amongst them. They communicate, and go yearly to receive the holy Sacrament, the which is consecrated for sick persons upon holy Thursday only, and kept in the Church with great reverence under the kind of bread only, whereof they break a piece with a silver spoon, and dissolve it in warm water, and then give it to the sick, worshipping it devoutly; so as they differ not much herein from the Papists, only they use leavened bread after the manner of the Grecians.  
They honour the Saints much, and call upon them to pray unto God for them, and they bear a particular honour to S. Nicholas their patron, as I have said. His image is in the town of Massovia, and the prince doth every morning (in the place where it is) 'cause a great quantity of bread, flesh, and other things to be offered, the which is afterwards distributed to the ministers of the Church, who do their office, and sing continually, praying unto God for the prosperity of this great prince; who doth also entertain another Monastery, near that where the image of S. Nicholas is, called the holy Trinity, where there are continually two hundred religious men, in whose Church S. Ignatius is buried, who as they say, doth often miracles, for that God would make this Saint glorious among his enemies. The religious men are all of the order of S. Basil and live very exemplarily like unto hermits. And no man can pass two or three leagues but he shall found a monastery.  
It is lawful for Priests to marry once, but if their wives die they must live a single life, and marry no more. They deny purgatory, and yet in their Masses and prayers they pray unto God for the faithful deceased, that his divine Majesty would pardon the pains which they have deserved, and receive them into the heavenly kingdom.  
One of their greatest errors is, that they hold that it is not lawful to celebrat any other councils but the first seven: and as they embrace those wholly, so they refuse all others that have followed; and hence grows their discord with the See of Rome.  
They have their Metropolitan, of whom the Clergy and all the Bishops depend. They attribute as much to him as the Papists do unto the Pope. This Metropolitan should depend (as they say) of the Patriarch of Constantinople; but it is certain there is little intelligence betwixt them, for that the Patriarch is of the Turks country, and the other of the Muscovites, who are naturally great enemies. This Metropolitan doth every year celebrata Synod, whether all the Bishops and other Prelates come, who have a pastoral staff carried before them, as the Pope's Legates have the Cross, and every one is accompanied with certain religious men and servants. There is not any Bishop made but he is a religious man; so as they that are in monasteries endeavour to live well to obtain this dignity. The great Prince determines not of any thing of importance without the advice of the Metropolitan. They fast Lent very strictly, eating nothing that is boiled, unless they be forced thereunto by reason of their weakness; and their fast continues a week longer than ours. During all the time of Aduent they do the like, calling it S. Philip's fast.  
As for the Prince, he observes carefully and strictly all the ceremonies belonging to religion, and all that it commands: for being at the table, as often as they change a dish, or give him drink, he makes many signs of the cross. He fails not at any fast, and beats the ground with his forehead through devotion like unto the rest.  
The Morduois, who live upon the frontiers of Muscovie, use circumcision like unto the Turks and jews. They worship no Idols like unto the pagan, neither are they baptized as the Christians. They live according to the law of nature, and worship one only God, creator of the whole world. They go seldom to field, and when they are there, they eat and drink together, and offer unto God the first of all they are to eat and drink, casting it against heaven. They do the like of any thing they gather.      


❧ A DISCOURSE OF THE EMPIRE OF THE GREAT CHAM OF TARTARY.  

The Contents.  
1. THe contents and extension of the great Cham of Tartary, the bounds, and climate. 2. The situation and circuit of Cambalu, the chief city. 3. The constilation of the air of those countries, their abundance in Rice, Wheat, Silk, Rhubarbe, & Musk; in Camels and Horses; in stones which burn like wood; in Pheasants and other birds. 4. Of the terrible lightning, thunder, and winds, wherewith these countries are infested. 5. Description of the Lake of Caniclu, full of Pearls, and of the other rivers of this Empire, 6. Valour and manner of living of the Scythians, ancestors to the Tartarians: Their barbarous custom to drink in skulls, and to wear the skins of their enemies. 7. Their chief gods, their sacrifices, and their bloody ceremonies in contracting alliances, and at the funerals of their Kings, where they did sacrifice the servants and officers of the Crown. 8. Another ceremony observed at the interment of private persons. 9 Of the painting which the Scythian women used; of the Scythians oath, and of their laws. 10. Of the beginning of the Empire of the Tartarians, and how they were freed from the dominion of their neighbours, by a Marshal called Canguist. 11. A description of the nature, manners, custom, laws, meat and drink, apparel, exercises, and kind of living of the Tartarians; their arms, and manner of fight in war: their ceremonies at the funerals of their Kings. 12. Their riches in the traffic of Rice, Wool, Silk, Hemp, Rhubarbe, Musk, Chaml●t●, Ginger, Cinnamon, Cloves, Gold, Sand taken out of rivers, Coral, with mines of Gold and Azure. 13. Their money made of the barks of Trees, and Cockell-shells. 14. Their forces consisting in the strong situation, and greatness of Provinces, in towns, and in men of war, camping out of Towns. 15. The names of the Emperors of Tartary graven in letters of gold, and set upon the Temples of their chief Towns: their absolute power of life and death over their subjects. 16. Laws and military orders established by Canguist their first Emperor. 17. Ceremonies observed at the crowning of a new Prince. 18. Of the seal which the great Cham doth use in his Patents, and of his rigorous justice. 19 Of two councils, of War, and State, and their jurisdiction, and of the power and authority of Astr●l●gians in those countries. 20. Of the punishment of thieves and malefactors. 21. Explanation of the word Hordes. 22. Of the Tartarians religion composed of Mahometism, Paganism, and Christianisme: their gods, the form of their prayers, and their belief touching the immortality of the soul. 23. The beginning and descent of the Tartarian jews. 24. Of the error of the Tartarians that be Christians, following the heresy of Nestorius. 25. A Genealogy of the Emperors of Tartary.   

THey that have carefully observed and calculated like good Geographers the contents of the Empire of this great prince, which yields not to any other in greatness of countries, but to the king of Spain, whom he doth also exceed, for that his lands are united, and have all some bond which ties them together, whereas those of the Spaniard lie scattered and wonderfully divided; such I say as have carefully observed the contents of the countries which this Monarch holds, have found that it was near two millions, and two hundred thousand Italian miles square.  
This great Empire called by the inhabitants Mongul, which draws the name of Tartary from the river of Bohemian-tartar, which doth water a great part of it, hath for bounds on the East, the great realm of China, the sea of Cin, & the straight of Anian; on the West, the mountains of Imaus which shuts it up on that side, except certain hordes of Tartarians which are on this side that mountain, and acknowledge the great Cham; towards the South lies Indostan, the river of Ganges, and that of Ox, now called Abiam, and also on the highest part is the realm of China; and upon the North, the frozen sea, whose shore is so cold (by reason of the nearness of the Pole) as all that country is unknown, and held by us to be desert and unhabited. Finally, this prince commands all the country which by the ancients was called Scythia, beyond mount Imaus, the which now they call Altay, and the region of Seres, which at this day hath the name of Catay. Or according unto some who seem more judicious, his Empire extends from the desert of Lordship of the one side, and the lake of Kytay of the other, unto a wall drawn betwixt the three and fortieth and five and fortieth degree, from the town of Ochioy situated betwixt two mountains, unto another mountain which ends with the sea, and divides the Tartarians from them of China, and from the Scythian Ocean, unto the frontiers of Tipure, and the neighbour countries. This tract comprehends many great realms and provinces of a long extension, beautified with a great number of good towns.  
The chief city of this Empire is called Cambula, which some will have to be in former times called Issedon Serica, built of a square form, situated upon the river of Polisangi, and having in circuit about four and twenty Italian miles, with twelve ports, every one of which hath his suburbs, whereas strangers and merchants remain. This city is in the midst of the province of Catay, and as it were the centre of all the countries round about.  
Besides the great and rich kingdom of Catay, there are many other goodly realms, as those of Tangut, Camul, Tenduc, Tainfur, Thebet, and the town and province of Caindo, of all which countries, I cannot make any curious description, for that there is not any man found that hath had full knowledge thereof, or hath imparted it to others.  

¶ The Quality.  
THey hold that the country of Catay abounds in rice, wheat, and such like things, notwithstanding that the air be cold. There is also great store of gold, silk, rhubarbe, musk, and great numbers of beasts; and to conclude in a word, they have all things necessary not only to live, but also to entertain life with delight. They have great numbers of camels, and such abundance of horses, as some have written that the great Cham did feed ten thousand white mares, whose milk he did drink. They do not writ that they gather much wine there, for it is certain that the province of Catay yields not any. They found also stones which burn, whereof they make their fire, as they do of turfs in the Low countries, and we of Newcastle coal. The air is not very temperate, and the thunder and lightning is so terrible and strange there in Summer as men die in a manner for fear when they hear it. It is sometimes extremely hot and presently after very cold, and much snow doth fall. The winds are sometimes so strong and violent, as they stay horsemen or overthrow them, they overturn trees and pull them up by the roots; and in a word they do much harm. It rains never in Winter, and seldom doth there any water fall in Summer, the which is so small, as it doth scarce wet the ground. There is great store of foul in this country, especially of pheasants, and such like.  
There are many lakes, to number which would be tedious, yet I will set down the names of some for the reader's content. In the province of Caniclu, there is a lake in which they found such abundance of pearl, as they will presently be of no value if it were lawful for every man to carry away what he lift. But they are forbidden to fish for pearl without the permission of the great Cham. They found also in the same lake great store of fish. There is another which abounds as much with fish in the province of Caraim, being one hundred miles in circuit. These countries are watered by many rivers, among which that of Polisange is very famous: it dischargeth itself into the sea, and by it many vessels do mount laden with merchandise. There is also the river of Coromoran which falls into the sea, and is so deep and broad, as there is not any bridge to pass over it. The river of Quianfu half a mile broad is as deep and abundant of fish. There is also that of Quiam, which Paulus Venetus holds to be the greatest in the world: for he writes that in some places it is ten miles broad, in some eight, and in some six. It is a hundred days journey long. But to specify something, we must set down what could be learned of the particularities of some provinces.  
There grows much rhubarbe in the realm of Tangut, the which is transported throughout the world. In the realm of Tenduc they found very rich mines of gold and azure. The realm of Tainfur is better manured, and abounds in vines. The country of Thebet is moorish, full of forests, and wild beasts, and abounds in coral. They found also there great store of musk, cinnamon, and other spices.  
This is all that can be said of the quality of these countries, both in the general and particular: let us now observe the manner of living of the ancient inhabitants, to come afterwards to those which are practised among them, and to the qualities and humours which they have in our time.   

¶ The Manners of the Ancients.  
THose which we call at this day Tartarians, were all comprehended under the name of Scythians, whereof some lived on this side, and others beyond mount Imaus. The Scythians in the beginning had no great continent of country, but in succession of time, and by their valour, they grew so great, as having subjecteth many provinces, and vanquished divers nations, they made a very great Empire, and become famous and renowned throughout the whole world. They were never subdued, and seldom had been assaulted to be made subject to the Empire of any other. They forced Darius to fly with a great part of his army, and defeated Cyrus with all his forces being led by a woman. Alexander the Great lost both soldiers and commanders, whom he had se●t thither, and had no better success than the rest. The Scythians had heard speak of the Romans name, but they never tried their forces, nor were made subject to the yoke of their command. These people lived according unto nature, and used no law. They hated theft, as those which did not shut up their troops within enclosures, or walled places, but kept them in the open field. They had no use of gold nor silver. Milk and honey was their food. They armed themselves against the cold with the skins of wild beasts, knowing not how to make garments of wool. When as the ancient Scythians had taken a man in war, they were bound to carry unto their king the heads of all such as they had slain, if they would have any part of the spoil: otherwise they might not demand any thing. They used this manner in cutting their enemy's heads, they made a round incision about the ears, & drawing forth the skull, they did shake out that which was in it, & in like manner slay off the skin, as they did that of the whole body, the which they tanned like an ox's hide, where with they attired themselves, and made rains for their horses, or else used them as napkins at their meat, and the more of these services they had, the more they were esteemed among them. Some also did cut off the right hands of their enemies, and having flayed them with their nails, they covered the tops of their quivers therewith: and others having flayed a whole man, they stretched out the skin upon a board, and carried it in for a show upon their horses. As for the heads whereof I have made mention, after they had flayed them, and covered them without with a piece of an ox's skin, they did gilled them within if they were rich, making cups to drink in, and giving them to strangers of note that came to see them, descoursing of their valour unto them.  
Every one of their princes did give wine once a year to such soldiers as had slain any of their enemies, and they that had not killed any, nor done some memorable exploit, were put apart without any honour, which was an insupportable infamy amongst them: whereas he that had slain many, was presented with two cups of wine; for they carried so many goblets for a show.  
Their chief deities were the goddess Vesta, who commanded over all, and then jupiter, or Tellus, or the Earth, who they held to be jupiter's spouse, and these were the gods whom they honoured and sought to make favourable unto them. Besides these, they did worship Apollo, Venus, Mars, & Hercules, yet they did not erect any Temples or Altars unto them, except to Mars, to whom they did sacrifice the hundred prisoner that, were taken in war. To the rest they▪ did sacrifice beasts, and especially horses. As for swine, they did so little esteem them, as they would not suffer one to be kept among their troops.  
Whenas their king did condemn any one to death, the punishment was not restrained to him alone, but it was extended to all his issue male.  
Whenas the Scythians contracted alliance with any one, they took a great goblet in which was earth, whereon they did pour wine mingled with the blood of both parties, with the which they did besprinkle the points of their swords, their axes, arrows, and darts: then having made a great oath with long and terrible imprecations against them that should break this league, they did all drink of the wine of this goblet, and not only the principal parties, but also all the chiefest men that assisted as companions to them that made the league.  
When their King died, they made a very deep hole of a square form, then taking the body they bowelled it, and put in the place thereof sweet odoriferous powders, with the seeds of smallage and Anis, which done, they sowed up the body, and laid it upon a chariot, sending it from nation to nation, every one doing it honour and service, and in the mean time the courtiers and servants of the king's house did slit their ears, and cut their hair in sign of heaviness, and they did lance their arms, and pinch their noses, even to the effusion of blood, and they did pierce their left hands with an arrow: the body having passed throughout all the countries of the jurisdiction of the deceased, they left it in the most remote province of his empire. There the sepulchre being made, and the body being put into a coffin, and laid into the grave, they did set lances and long staves about it, with rods upon the top of them, and also certain garments. Moreover, they did put into the voided place of the coffin, one of the King's Concubines, whom he loved best in his life time. He must also of necessity have some officers to accompany him, and to serve him in the other world: and therefore they did strangle near unto the tomb a Chamberlain, a Cook, a Butler, a Sergeant, and a Mulet-keeper; all which had for the carrying of their baggage but one horse which was slain with them, and at the same time they were buried with their prince, and with him his plate, and richest movables.  
They had this custom, that at the end of the year they did the like service, with the loss of the lives of his best servants and officers, who are all natural Scythians, free, and of noble race, and such as it pleased the King to choose, for that no slave was admitted to his service. They did also choose fifty of the later sort, with the like number of horses which they strangled, taking out their bowels, and then sowed up their bellies; after which, they covered them with their cloaks, and tied them about the tomb covered with a vault, they being on horseback, and set in such sort, as a far off they did seem a troop of horsemen, appointed for the guard of the deceased King: such were the ceremonies and funerals of Kings, whenas they were interred.  
They had a particular kind of burying for private persons, for that any one being dead, his people laid him upon a chariot, and carried him to his kinsfolks and friends, very one of them making a feast in the place of his abode to the kinsmen of the deceased, and to the rest that accompanied the body. They carried it up and down for the space of forty days, at the end whereof they did set up three pieces of timber equally declining, and upon it they laid a tent of wool very artificially, than they did cast into a vessel made like unto a bark, and set upon the tomb next unto the rent, the most glistering stones they could found: this is all that can be spoken of their manner of burying the dead; let us now come unto the rest.  
The men never washed themselves, but the women rubbed their naked bodies against some sharp and rough stone, having then poured water upon them, and their flesh being swell by this means, they rubbed their bodies with the wood of Cypress, Cedar, and Incense, and they did also use certain ointments for the face made of the like drugs, by means whereof they smelled sweet, then having the day following taken away these plasters, they seemed more beautiful and pleasing. These people did not swear but by the royal Throne, and if any one did forswear himself, or take a false oath, if he were convicted by the Enchanters, who made proof thereof by rods of willow, he presently lost his head, and his goods were forfeited to them that had proved his perjury.  
They of Catay, whom they called the Seres, lived lovingly and quietly together, and yet notwithstanding this mildness, they fled the company and conversation of other men; so as they would not traffic by word with any stranger: but if they would make any bargain, and cell their commodities, or buy others, the stranger was forced to pass the river, upon the banks whereof either of them laid his merchandise; and then the Seres set the price of all things in looking on them, and the stranger did of necessity pay what they demanded.  
An adulterous man or woman and a thief were never called in question, and they say that in old time there was never any murder committed among them, for that they did more fear to be found disobedient to their laws, than of the threats and constellations, or of the predictions of those which cast their nativities, and told them their fortunes.  
No man amongst them touched his wife when she was with child, or had her monthly flux. There was not any one among them that did eat any polluted beast. They made no sacrifices, and every man was judge of himself, following naturally that which was reasonable.  
The Tartarians, which acknowledge the great Cham at this day, were in old time subject to their neighbours, and paid them tribute, they were so base and dejected; and yet they were governed by Lords and Captains, who had the sovereign government of affairs: but in the end, they shaked off this yoke by the means of an old man, Martial of his Estate, who said, he had seen a vision of a Knight armed in white, & mounted upon a horse of the same colour, who having called him by his name, said these words unto him, Canguiste, (for so was the name of this Marshal) it is the will of the immortal God, that thou freest this people from the subjection of their neighbours, and that th●● be●st governor and King of the Tartarians, who shall make others subject, as they are now tributary to their neighbours: This was the cause that the Tartarians (being desirous to see themselves free, and to command others) made choice of this Canguiste for their King, who was the first prince of this people: this happened in the year of our Lord 1187. This Canguiste, called Chinghie by some others, was a wise man, and of a good life, and was the first which sought to root out idolatry from among the Tartarians, forbidding by an edict when he was made King, the adoration of Idols, enjoining them to worship one God only, by whose means he thought to have gotten so great a dignity. In the end, Canguiste seeing himself strong, failed not suddenly to invade the Scythians his neighbours, on either side of Mount Imaus, and made them his subjects and tributaries, and the Tartarians more hardy and feared, whereas before they were only shepherds.   

¶ The Manners of the Tartarians at this day.  
THe Tartarians are of a mean stature, and have very broad breasts and shoulders; they have great goggle eyes, and thick eyebrows: they are broad faced, and have thin beards with great mustachoes: they commonly shave the back part of their heads and let the other grow long, which they tie behind their ears: not only the Tartarians are shaven after this manner, but also such as go to remain in their country. They are good horsemen, very light and active, but bad footmen. No man goes on foot, but all are mounted either on horses, or else on oxen when they travel, how mean soever they be. They hold it for an honourable thing when their horses wear little bells about their necks which have clear sounds. There are great criers even when they talk familiarly together, and whenas they sing a man would say they were wolves that howled, and all of them when they sing shake their hands. Whenas they drink, they never leave till they be drunk, and glory in this beastliness. There are many among them which have neither towns nor villages for their ordinary abode, but remain in the fields under tents. In Winter they live in plains, but in Summer they devil on mountains seeking the best pastures. For the most part they have no bread, nor kned any, neither have they any tablecloths or napkins. These people contemn all the rest of the world, and think that there is not any one so worthy of honour as their prince, neither will they suffer one to call upon any other man. They call all Christians dogs and idolaters: they use Magic 〈◊〉, and are given to the interpretation of dreams, and have Magicians which be interpreters of their idle fancies, and which go unto idols to hear their oracles and explicatio●●. They are so covetous of wealth, as when any one hath seen a thing that he desire●●, he takes it away by force, if he may not have it with the owner's consent, so as he be 〈◊〉 Tartarian; and every man thinks that it is lawful by their king's laws. Whenas the Tartarians found any one upon the way which carries not the king's letters or passport, they 〈◊〉 upon him, and keep him as their slave. They lend money to such as have need, but upon great usury. They never give any alms to beggars: but they have one thing commendable, that if any one arrive whenas they dine or sup, he may eat and drink with them; for in steed of giving him leave to departed, they invite him courteously, and give him willingly what they have. They are very slovenly in their eating and drinking, for as they neither have cloth nor napkins, so they never wash their hands. They use no herbs, pease, nor beans, but their only food is the flesh of all sorts of beasts, yea of dogs, and cats, and great rats. Some among them have a custom, whenas they have taken any one of their enemies to roast him, to show the desire they have of revenge; when this is done, they assemble commonly in great numbers, and devour the body like famished wolves: but before they roast him, they receive the blood and put it into cups, and so drink it. For their ordinare drink, they use mares milk. They hold it a great ●●●e to suffer any of their meat, or their drink to be lost; and therefore they cast not any bones to dogs or cats before they have taken out the marrow. Moreover they are so mi●erable and base, as they never eat any beast that is found, but stay until it be lame or sick, or so old as it doth but languish. They content themselves with little: they drink two or three cups in the morning, and after that they sometimes pass a whole day without meat or drink. There is s●arce any of them either men or women that hath above one garment. The men in steed of caps or hats wear mitres which are not very deep, 〈◊〉 before, and having a long tail behind: and to keep them fast that the wind beaten them not off, they tie them with ribbons under their chins. Married women use an attire of their heads made in form of a pannier made of oziers', a foot and a half long, enriched with silk and peacocks feathers, and with it they wear pearls, stones, and ornaments of gold, and as for the rest of the body, they are attired according to their means, and the richer sort wear silk or scarlet. Their robes are made after this manner: the slit is on the left side, by the which they attire and disrobe themselves, and they have four or five buttons which shut it up: the garments they wear in Summer are commonly black, and those in Winter, or in a rainy, season are white, and they go not beneath the knee. The Tartarians wear garments of furs, the which they use commonly contrary to other people: for to make show of the bounty of the hair, they wear the fur outward, and the skin next to their bodies. They are veery good archers, good horsemen, and well practised in war: they carry their wives and children with them, and sometimes set images of men upon horses, to the end their army may seem greater to their enemies, by which means they amaze them the more. They are not ashamed to fly when as necessity doth press them, and that it is likely they shall be beaten in resisting. They fight by troops, and fly also by troops; and when as the enemy pursues them, they have their arrows always ready to shoot: but if they see themselves pursued by small troops they put themselves in order, renew the fight, and make their way with the multitude of their arrows, wounding their enemies, and their horses of all sides, and in the end they obtain the victory when they were held vanquished. Whenas they mean to invade any country, they divide their army, and assail it of all sides, to the end they shall not come to encounter them, nor any of the inhabitants escape, and by this means they are most commonly conquerors. They use the victory with insolency; for they spare not any they have taken, neither women, nor children, old, nor young, but kill all indifferently, except workmen whom they keep to do their works. When they mean to kill them, they distribute them to captains, who assign ten or more to every servant to kill them, according to the number of prisoners, and all are suddenly slain like beasts with an axe, or hatchet, to the end that others may be terrified by this example. They take one of a thousand, and hung him on a pole with his head downward, in the midst of the rest that have been slain; so as he seems to admonish his companions and to hear them speak. There are many among the Tartarians which come unto the dead bodies lying upon the ground, and suck up the blood which comes out of their wounds being yet fresh. They never keep any faith or word they have promised, by which means they practise great cruelty against such as have yielded unto them. They are the most given to lasciviousness and whoredom of any men in the world, for notwithstanding they may have as many wives as they are able to keep, and that no degree of consanguinity and blood doth hinder them from marrying together, unless it be with the mother, daughter, or sister, yet they are execrably given to that horrible sin of Sodomy. They hold not any one for a wife until she hath borne children, neither doth he receive any dowry for her until that time; so as he may repudiat her that is found barren, and take another in her place. If any one be surprised in adultery he is punished by the law, be it man or woman. Every woman hath her lodging, her household & family a part, and all live very chastened. When the men return from the war, they drive their cattle to the field, and keep them, and spend their time in hunting, and they also practise wrestling. The women have charge of all the rest, and care of those things which concern meat, drink, and apparel. This people is much given to superstitions: it is not lawful for any one to piss in public places, and if it happen that he shall do it wilfully, he shall be slain without remission: but if necessity forceth him, there is a pavilion, wherein if any piss, they purge it, and all that is within it after this manner: They make two fires, in the which they fix two pikes, and tie a cord which runs from the top of the one unto the other, and then they 'cause all things which they mean to purify to pass betwixt these pikes as through a gate. There are also two women, one of the one side, and the other of another who cast water upon them, mumbling certain charms and sorceries.  
No stranger is admitted into the king's presence, of what dignity soever he be, or any affairs of importance that he hath, unless he be first purged. He that enters the pavilion whereas the king, or any prince, or great nobleman makes his ordinary abode, is instantly put to death. There are many other things which they hold for irremissible faults: but if there be question to kill or wound a man, to invade another man's lands, to take away another man's goods contrary to all right, and to contemn the commandment of God, they hold it nothing, and do it without any scruple. Whenas any one is sick or near death, they fix a pike or halberd with a black pennon or flag, near unto the place where he lies sick, to the end that such as pass by may not enter. Being dead all his family assembles, and they carry his body out of the pavilion into a place which he had formerly chosen; then having made a deep and large hole, they set up a little tent in it, and a table furnished with meat, and they cast the body of the deceased into it, attired in his richest garments, and then all together cover it with earth. They do also bury with him a mare and a horse, with a caparison. The richer sort in their life time choose one of their slaves, whom they mark with a hot iron, and cause to be buried with them, to the end he may serve him in the other world. After this, the friends of the deceased take another horse, which they kill, and then eat. The wives of the deceased burn his bones for a purgation of his soul. For a conclusion of their manner of living, I will say that their best drinks are of Rice and spices, which make them more drunk than wine. They do also love sour milk like unto the Arabians, and milk distilled & passed through 〈◊〉 Alymbeck, the which hath great force to make them drunk; and also they do accommodate their mare's milk in such sort, as it is like to white wine, and pleasing in taste. They abstain wholly from swine's flesh. And for that they are vagabonds, and stay little in any place, they guide themselves in their voyages by the North star, and as men which live commonly in the fields, they have great knowledge of the planets and stars. There are few artisans among them, neither is there any use of money, but with merchants, for that the rest exchange one thing for another. Their horses are commonly gelt, and little, but strong: they call them Bachmat, & they furnish them of saddles, with stirrups of wood, and very light bridles: and they use whips in stead of spurs. If it happen they be overthrown, disarmed, and grievously wounded, their custom is to defend themselves with their feet and hands, yea and with their teeth, until the last gasp. They do easily endure labour, and want of victuals, and they are little given to delights.  
Their Kings are buried on Mount Altay, called by Hayton the Armenian, the mountain of Belgian; and whenas they carry the body to be interred, they that accompany it, kill all them they meet upon the way, saying, Go and serve our King in the other life; and for proof hereof, Marcus Polus reports, That whenas Mongu Cha● was carried to be interred, which was at such time as Polus was in Tartary, his soldiers which did accompany the body, slew for this cause above ten thousand men which passed by the way. The inhabitants of the province of Camul, are given to plays and dancings, and receive strangers courteously, yea they will prostitute their own wives unto them.   

¶ The Riches.  
I Should want judgement to think that the Tartarians, who have made so many incursions into Europe and Asia, and have carried away such great spoils out of Muscovie and other parts, especially from China, which they have long enjoyed; I say it were a great folly to think that they are not rich at this day, seeing it is sufficiently known that these people, having at the taking of so many provinces carried away the most precious things they could found, have since maintained themselves so well in their country, as no man hath wrested from them that whereof they were once seized; so as they have kept all still: This may easily persuade any man that the Tartarians are very rich. And that which doth moreover preserve this Estate, is the situation of their country, very commodious for the commerce and traffic of one town with another. The reason is partly for that the country is plain, and hath great lakes (among which there is that of Cazaie, whose water is salt, and those of Gujam, Dangu, Xandu, and Catacora) and partly also for the greatness of rivers which run through these country. That which doth also make them rich, is the diversity of merchandise which grow there; for this country abounds generally in Rice, Wool, Silk, Hemp, Rhubarbe, Musk, and excellent Chamlets made of Camel's hair. But Polus writes, that the country of Caindu doth also yield Ginger, Cinnamon, and Cloves; the which notwithstanding is somewhat doubtful. There are also some rivers which have gold mixed with their sand.  
The money which they use is not all of one sort, for that in Cataya they employ a certain kind of black money which is made of a thin skin which they found betwixt the bark and the body of trees, and which being beaten and mixed with a certain g●ue, is marked with the seal of the great Cham; and in the realm of Cajacan and Corazan, they use certain Cockle shells. The prince draws unto himself all the gold and silver of his country▪ and causing it to be molten, he keeps it in certain strong forts, and neve● useth it; so as it is thought this Emperor hath inestimable treasures: with the like art Prester jan, who causeth grains of salt and pepper to go for currant money, hath very great riches. And for that the city of Cambalu is in the midst of the great province of Cataya, they bring thither from the East Indies, from China, and other countries, much rich merchandise, and among others, precious stones, pearls, silk, spices, and such like. As for Rhubarbe which is spent in the country, they draw it out of the realm of Tangut, which is under the dominion of the great Cham. In the province of Tenduc, there are very rich mines of gold and azure, which yield great profit to the inhabitants: and they of the country of Thebet enrich themselves by Coral, wherewith it abounds, as also by Musk, Cinnamon, and other spices, which yield no small profit. To conclude, there are few Principalities, where they have better means to enrich themselves, and all the discommdities that are in this empire, falls upon them which live towards the North, who have want of many things necessary for the life of man, whereof their neighbours, subject to the same prince, have abundance.   

¶ The Forces.  
THey that will carefully consider of the forces of this great Emperor, may easily judge that they consist, first in the situation of his countries, which we have formerly showed to be exceeding strong, in his large territories, and in the greatness of towns, as of Sucuir, and of Campion, built and fortified after our manner, of Ergimul, Corazam, Thebet, and Caindu, all chief towns of so many realms; and also in the abundance of victuals which they yield, and in the greatness of his revenues: for that among other things, he exacts the tenth of wool, silk, hemp, corn, and cattle, and he is absolute lord of all that the Tartarians enjoy: but his chiefest forces consist in his men of war, whom he entertains continually in arms. These live in field some four miles from every town, and besides the pay which they receive from the Prince, they do also make much profit of a great number of cattle which belong unto them, and of their milk and wool. If by chance the great Cham hath need to levy a great army, he takes what number shall be necessary out of these men which lie dispersed in the provinces, after the manner of the Roman Legions. The Tartarians do not commonly fight on foot, except the Vachens, who are not under the empire of the great Cham. Their chief arms are bows and arrows, the which they use (as we have said) as well when they fly, as when they charge. They carry little with them when they go to the war, but their chiefest baggage consists of tents of felt, under which they retire themselves when it rains. They live for the most part of milk, which they dry in the Sun, having first drawn forth the butter; and whenas necessity doth press them, they live of the blood which they draw from their horses. They do seldom join battle with their enemies, but charge them sometimes in front, sometimes in flank, shooting their arrows continually after the manner of the Parthians. They that carry themselves valiantly, have goodly recompenses, and are advanced to the greatest dignities; they are honoured with exquisite presents, and have goodly privileges.  
This Emperor doth commonly entertain twelve thousand horsemen for the guard of his person, and it is thought that he may draw more horse together than any Prince whatsoever; so as his forces have two remarkable qualities: the one is, that he hath many men, as we may conceive by the greatness of his countries, the which must needs be well inhabited, for that in the most part there is abundance of all things necessary: the other is, that all his men of war are in arms, and ready to march upon the first command, for that they are continually well paid, the which is a matter of great importanc●: 〈◊〉 as they do more esteem the disposition and agility of a soldier than his force, so they accounted much more of armies which are ready to march where they are commanded, and have not much baggage to hinder them, than those which consist of great numbers: but Princes which have them both great and ready to put to field, must of necessity be held for powerful and very strong: for these are like unto Eagles, Tigers, or Lions, which are held as princes of other beasts, for that they have disposition and agility joined to the force of the body; so as with these two parts they get the victory over others. They say that the Tartarians cannot serve with a target, and that there are few of them that use lances or long swords: those they wear are made like unto the Turkish Cimetaries, pointed, and very sharp, and of the length of a man's arm, to the end they may strike them that come too near them. He among them is held most valiant, that knwes best to obey his Captain.   

¶ The Government.  
THis Emperor whom the Turks call Vlucam, that is say, great prince, and the Muscovites Czar Cata●ski, which is Caesar of Cataya, whose name they set in a read table in letters of gold upon the temples of their chief towns, calling him the son of God, the shadow of God, and the soul of God. He is so obeyed in all the provinces which are subject unto him, as they receive his words for rigorous and inviolable laws. This absolute power came from Canguiste, who being chosen Emperor of the Tartarians, and desiring to try if they would be ready to obey his will, he commanded seven princes, who before had governed all these people, to kill their children with their own hands: and notwithstanding that the fathers found this commandment very rough and hard, yet whether they feared the fury of the people who held this king as a divine thing, or that religion moved them, for that they believed that God had given a beginning to this Empire, and that they should contemn God in disobeying the king's commandment, they set hand to work, and cut the throats of their own children: so as since, that time the life and death of the Tartarians depends of the princes will, whom they so respect, as they do not any thing that may contradict his intentions. This Canguiste or Chingis ordained that they which were of age to bear arms, should come at a certain day to the place where he should appoint, and there he did set down an order for his troops after this manner, That Disseigners or Commanders of ten should obey Captains of hundreds, and these should be subject to Commanders of thousands, and the last should also yield obedience to the Colonels of every regiment. He also ordained that if any of the Tartarians, or their slaves, should found a man, a woman, a horse, or any other thing without the prince's passport, he might seize thereon, and hold it as his own, and justly gotten. The exactions, imposts, and customs are so great, as we do not read that any other nation was ever so charged.  
As for the coronation of their kings, whether they reign by hereditary succession, as the eldest sons of Emperor does, or that they attain unto this dignity for want of heirs capable to govern this Empire; some have said that the princes of their seven tribes or generations being attired in white, which is the colour they do also use when they mourn (as they of japon do) 'cause the new prince to sit upon a black felt spread upon the ground, willing him to look upon the Sun, and to acknowledge the immortal God, the which if he do, he shall receive from him in heaven a far greater recompense than upon earth, else he shall have nothing left him, but that black felt to lie on in the fields, and that with much difficulty; and that he shall pass his life with a thousand discommodities and miseries. They also report that after this they crown him, and that the greatest Peers come and kiss his feet, and swear fealty unto him, giving him infinite rich presents; and that when this is done, they writ his name in letters of gold, and set it upon the temples of the chief cities of the Empire: others say that when they are to crown a new Emperor, the princes and noblemen Tartarians being followed by the people which come from all parts of the Empire, meet upon a plain appointed to that end, and whereas that ceremony is commonly performed. There, he to whom the Empire doth fall is set upon a throne of gold, before whom, all in general do prostrate themselves, and with a loud voice say unto him these words: We pray thee, will, and command thee, to have power over us: whereunto the new prince answers; If you will that I obey you in this, I must of necessity do it: in the mean time prepare yourselves to do all that I shall command you, to come when I shall call you, to go where it shall please me to sand you, and to leave the whole Estate of the Empire in my hands to dispose thereof as I shall think good. The Tartarians having consented thereunto, the Emperor faith more: Wherefore the words of my mouth shall he unto you hereafter, a sword, and shall take revenge of rebels. The people clap their hands at these words, signifying thereby that they do accept the condition. Which done the princes draw him out of his royal throne, and set him on the ground upon a Felt, and say unto him as we have formerly mentioned: Look up and acknowled God, and withal, behold the place whereon thou art now set: if thou dost govern thy Estate well, all things shall succeed to thy hearts desire: but if thou dost not govern they people as it is fit, assure thyself thou shalt be so spoiled of all greatness and riches, that this Felt which is now thy seat, will not be left thee to do thee service. Having spoken this, they give him the best beloved of his wives, and raising them both up with the Felt, they proclaim them Emperor and Empress of Tartary, and instantly the great men of the Empire, and the deputies of provinces which are under his obedience, bring him presents, in sign of acknowledgement. They do also bring unto the same place the rich movables of the deceased king, whereof the king distributes part unto the greatest noblemen of the country, and keeps the rest for his own service; then all the ceremonies being ended, every man retires into his own province.  
This Emperor hath all in his own power, and not one of his subjects dare say that he hath any thing in propriety. It is not lawful for any man to devil in any place but where he is assigned by the Emperor, who doth also appoint Governors, Generals of armies, and Colonels, & they choose Captains, & they the members of their companies, and these of the rest to make their troops complete. The seal which the great Cham useth in his patents bears these words: God in heaven, Chuichuch Cham upon earth: the Emperor is the force of God and men. This prince doth never speak unto foreign Ambassadors, and will not suffer them to be presented unto him, if they, and their presents (for it is a forfeit to come before this great prince empty handed) be not purified by women appointed to that end. Then he answers by an interpreter, and whilst that this third person speaks, the strangers of what condition soever they be must kneel, & be attentive that this interpreter omit not one word which the prince hath spoken: for it is not lawful for any man to altar one word of the Emperors, or to fail in the execution of his will. This prince maintains justice with extreamerigour, for that offenders having been whipped for the first crime they have committed, they are sawn a sunder in the midst for the second, whatsoever the offence be: wherein they seem to follow the opinion which the Stoics had of the equality of offences.  
He hath two councils, the one of war, being twelve men wife and of great experience; the other of state, of as many men, of great judgement, and full of knowledge of state affairs. These manage all the government, and have the charge to punish offenders and wicked persons, and to recompense men of merit: and these men use no less diligence to reward good services done unto the Emperor as well in time of peace as war, as to punish such as do i'll, or that have carried themselves basely in any action. And without doubt the good government of an Estate doth so consist in these things, that is to say, in punishment and reward, as we may rightly say that by their means only the greatest part of barbarous princes maintain their states and greatness. And for example, the Turk, the Xerif, the Mogor, and the Sophy, govern themselves after this manner. They do not observe this in war, for that they ground their rule and command upon force, and do not care for peace nor rest, but only for victory and greatness: so as having this end only, they use no moderation, neither in the punishment of cowards, nor in rewarding the valiant and courageous. There was never commonweal whereas they propounded such goodly rewards for valiant men, as among these Barbarians. But they propound much more among the Turks, than in any other place: for that the Tartarians, Arabians, and Persians, make some esteem of nobility; but the Turks ruin all noble families, and esteem nothing but valour and hardiness, committing their whole Empire into the hands of such as are issued from base houses; so as they have made it known that they are capable of some great fortune: the which was also practised among the Mamelus. But to return to the Tartarians government, it seems that among them they make great account of Astrologers, and that they do in a manner govern all things in this country. Paul writes that there were in his time in the city of Cambula about five thousand: and that Cublai Chamlet having learned of them that this city should one day revolt, he caused another to be built called Taidu, the which is very near. Finally, if any one hath stolen any thing of small value, for the which he deserves not death, he is beaten seven times with a cudgel, and receives seventeen, or seven and twenty, or else seven and forty blows, according to the quality of the offence: and in this kind of punishment they may give one hundred blows, adding always ten. There are some which die, being beaten after this manner. If any one hath stolen a horse or some matter of price, for the which it seems he deserves death, they kill him with the sword, and if he will redeem his life, he may, paying nine times the value of the thing that was stolen. But before we pass over this discourse of the government, for I mean to speak of certain Hordes which obey the great Cham, I think it fit to expound this word which may happily trouble some readers, and being understood, may content them that are most curious: Horde is an assembly of many men gathered together after the manner of a Commonweal, but distributed in such sort, as in matter of war there are Dezeniers, which obey Captains of hundreds, and these superior Commanders, as hath been formely spoken. Among these Hordes, there are some which obey particular Dukes, others which obey the Muscovite, and are his tributaries, and some which are subject to the Emperor, of whom we make mention in this place.   

¶ The Religion.  
THe Tartarians which obey the great Cham, are not all of one religion, but differ in belief, for that some follow the false doctrine of Mahomet, which was received into those countries, about the year of our Redemption 1246. They obey the Pentateuque of Moses, and observe the things commanded by the ancient Law, and they cry daily, jahi Illo Illoloth, there is but one God. Among them of Catay there are some Mahometans, but many more Idolaters, whose belief is thus. They hold there are two gods, one of heaven, and another of earth: of the first (to whom they cast Incense every day) they demand nothing but health, and understanding: and of the other, abundance of fruit, store of cattle, and such like. They say also, that the last hath a wife and children, and hath a care of their cattle, corn, and other affairs: and whensoever they eat, they rub the mouth of the Idol with the fattest of the flesh, and of the wife and children, (for they have many little images in their houses) and afterwards cast the broth of the flesh to the spirits without the house. They keep their god of heaven in a high place, and that of the earth, beneath. They believe that our souls are immortal, but they pass from one body to another, and are lodged better or worse, according to their precedent actions; wherein they follow the Metempsychoses of Pythagoras. They honour also the Sun, Moon, and the four Elements, and do sacrifice unto them. They call the Pope and all Christians Dzinthis, which signifies pagan; and Chaur, that is to say, Infidels, Dogs, and Idolaters: the which hath happened since that they were invited by Pope Innocent the fourth to receive the Christian faith. They were persuaded by the Mahometans to follow the religion of the Koran, as the most pure, saying, that it taught the adoration of one god only, whereas that of the Christians was full of Idols: and moreover, that theirs was active, and did allow any thing to a free man, putting arms into his hand, whereas that of Christ was only fit for effeminate persons, and for such has desired rest. They make their Idols of felt, or of some kind of silk, and they do them great reverence. They do not solemnize one day more than another, and do not fast nor abstain in one season more than in another, as the Mahometans do, but the days and seasons pass with them after one manner. As for the Tartarian jews, they are descended from the ten Tribes of Israel, transported by the commandment of Salmanazar King of Assiria, into the country of Arsareth, in the time of king Oseas. Writers differ concerning the country of Arsareth, and speak diversly: Some will have it to be the country of Colchos, called at this day Mingrelie, for that Herodotus writes, that they of Colchos used circumcision. But the greatest part hold that Arsareth is the province of Belgian, from whence the jews went under the name of Tartarians, in the year of our Salvation 1200, under the great Ching is, Founder of the empire of Catay, and therefore they had retained circumcision, and some other things of the law of Moses, so as they easily become Mahometans. But notwithstanding they are in a manner all Idolaters in Catay. Besides the Mahometans, whereof we have spoken, there are some jews and Christians but few in number.  
As for the Christians, their religion is much changed and corrupted, as the effect doth show, for that seeing their Parents old, to the end they may dispatch them out of the world, they feed them with fat more than is fit, so as after it they do but languish: and being dead they burn their bodies, and gather up the ashes carefully, the which they keep as a precious thing, putting it upon their meat whenas they take their repast. Moreover they have followed the heresy of Nestorius, which hath extended itself unto the town of Campion, and is yet held by some which remain at Tangut, Sucuir, at Cambalu, and in other towns of this empire. These Nestorians notwithstanding that they speak many languages, according to the countries where they are, yet they celebrat their office in the Chaldean tongue. Their errors that they hold are, That the nature of man in jesus Christ is without a person, and therefore defective: and for this cause they put Christ in two persons. They do not call the Virgin Marie the mother of God, for that they say the name of God comprehends the Father, the Son, and the Holy Ghost, and then she should be mother of all three divine persons: yet now they confess that she is mother of God the Son. They hold for Saints, Nestorius, Theodore of Mapsuestie, Diodore of Tarse, and Paul of Samosates, and they condemn S. Cyrillus Alexandrinus. They say that it is one thing to be God the Word, and another to be Christ. They have not the first Council of Ephesus, nor the following. Their Patriarches are not chosen, but come to it by succession from father to son. They first created him great Archbishop, then without any other ceremony he succeeds the Patriarch which dies. In the year of our Redemption 1119, Prester-Iean, who commanded in the province of Hatay, or (as some say) in that of Tenduc (the inhabitants of the country call him joane) received this Nestorian heresy, but he was ruined by the great Chingis or Canguist king of the Tartarians, in the year of our Lord God 1162, forty years after he had received this error: yet he continued Lord of a small estate, which was recommended unto the great Cham by certain religious men of the order of S. Dominicke, by the commandment of Innocent the fourth. And they found at this day, in the countries which are subject to this Emperor, many Christians, which notwithstanding follow this condemned sect. And some English men which have been in those countries, report, that the Archbishop of Cambalu crowns the great Cham when he comes to succeed in the empire.    

¶ A GENEALOGY OF THE EMPERORS OF TARTARY.  
IT were needful to have other relations than those which have come to light, or be nearer the countries whereof we treat, to set down all the emperors one after another that have reigned there unto this day. But for that we could not attain to any perfect knowledge thereof, we must content ourselves with that which we could learn from them that have discoursed most of the succession of these princes. Paulus Venetus holds this order naming the Emperors that have reigned in Cataya: First of all he sets Canguist, or Chingis, or Cinchis: secondly, Chuy: thirdly, Barchim, than Allau, and after him Mongu, and last of all Cublay, in whose court Paul remained some time. But Hayton the Armenian gives them the names which follow. He names first Changy Cham, than Hoccora Chamlet, after him Gino Chamlet, and after these Mange Cham, and then Cobila Chamlet, who built the town of jons in Cataya, which they hold to be the same that Cambalu. We must follow in this list of Emperors Tamor Chamlet, who reigned in Cataya in the time of Hayton in the year 1308. Among the rest Hoccara Chamlet had many children, the eldest whereof was called Gino Chamlet, who succeeded his father in the Empire of Cataya; and jochy his brother came into the Western parts, and seized upon the countries of Persia, Turquestan, and some other provinces; and another brother called Baydo conquered the Northern countries, and taking the way of Europe, came into Hongarie, and begat Tamerlan he that spoilt the Western provinces of Asia, and some of Europe. Gino Chamlet died young in the East, and the nearest unto him called Mango was made Emperor, who assailed a certain island in the East, whose inhabitants had rebelled: but they dived secretly into the water, and made holes in the keel of the ship wherein Mango was, so as he and all that were in it perished. Then his brother Cobila, called Cublay by Paul, was created Emperor, and made profession of the Christian religion, but his successors have not maintained it. He that hath made the abridgement of the Atlas of Gerard M●rcator describes this genealogy after another manner: He agrees with the rest touching the first, and calls him Changy Chan, or Cham, saying that it is the same that Paulus Venetus calls Cinchis, who lived about the year of Grace 1202. The Tartarians before his reign lived brutishly without laws or civility, neither had they any reputation among the Scythians or other nations, but paid tribute to their neighbours of the cattle which they had. This Changi extended his Empire in a short time from China unto the Caspian sea. He had for son jochu Chamlet, who begat Zain Chamlet the third Emperor, called by some others Bathi: This was he that spoilt Russia, Polonia, Silesia, Moravia, and Hongarie. The fourth Emperor, son to Bathi, was Temir Cutlu, whom our histories call Tamerlan, who overran all Asia, entered into Egypt, took Bajazet Emperor of the Turks, and led him bound in chains of gold over all Asia. The fift Emperor, son to Temir Cutlu was Temir Gzar, who they say was slain fight valiantly against the knights of Prussia. The sixt issued from Temir Gzar, was Macmetczar, who had for successor Armetczar, and he begat Sziachmet the eight Emperor of the Tartarians.     


❧ A DISCOURSE OF THE ESTATE OF THE KING OF CHINA.  

The Contents.  
1. Dlivers' appellations of the realm of China, as well ancient as modern. 2. The circuit and how many leagues it contains. 3. A division of this realm into fifteen provinces. The number of the towns and cities which are in every province: Their situation and form of buildings, and their high ways paved and made plain even unto the mountains. 4. Description of the wall which divides China from the Tartarians containing five hundred leagues. 5. Of the royal palace of the monarchs of China. 6. Of the complexion and humour of the inhabitants. Admirable fertility of the land, which bears three or four times a year. Fruits of divers sorts which it yields, honey, sugar, melons, plums, oranges of three kinds. Abundance of silk, flax, hemp, cotton, corn, rivers, trees, musk, beasts, and fish of all sorts, physical herb, mines of gold, silver, and other metals, with rich pearls. 7. The Chinois industrious, active, laborious, and naturally inclined to make good cheer, and to be well appareled; the form of their faces, and the height of their bodies. 8. Their manner to make musk in China. 9 The fashion and colour of the garments of gentlemen and common people; of men and women, and of their hair and painting. 10. Custom of the women of China to wear strait shoes, and why. 11. Great industry of the Chinois in the art of carving and painting, and to make chariots to go with sails. 12. What merchandise they commonly cell to strangers. 13. How Porcelaine vessel is made in that country. 14. Of the dowry, marriage, nuptial feasts, and polygamy of the people of China, and their laws touching successions. 15. Their strange custom by the which they are forced within a certain time to marry, or to enter into religion. 16. Of the marriage of their kings, and of their children, and of the solemn feasts which they celebrat. 17. Ceremonies observed at funerals, obsequies, and funeral feasts of the Chinois. 18. Their drink made of the herb Chia in steed of wine, and what meat they prepare for their feasts and sol●mne banquets. 19 Of the invention of their artillery, and of their characters or hiroglyphicalletters and strange kind of writing, drawing their lines from the top of the page unto the bottom. 20. What their horses and caroches be in their journeys, and what ships and provision th●y have at sea. 21. Of their fishing with sea ravens and divedoppers. 22. Of the respective requests presented to the Loytia: and their strange behaviour in their visits and companies. 23. Riches of China in mines of gold, silver, and other metals, pearls, Porcelaine vessel, rich ●urss, fl●x, wool, cotton, silk, sugar, honey, rhubarbe, camphire, vermilion, woad, and musk. 24. The king's revenues, and what tribute he raiseth upon all kinds of merchandise. 25. What his forces be, his men of war, and the discipline which he holds; and first of the Council of war appointed in every province. 26. Of his foot and horse, and of their furniture and arms, and manner of fight. 27. Of his naval forces. 28. A particular relation of the soldiers entertained in every province. 29. Of the universities of China, and the visitors appointed by ●●e ●ing: and of the solemn promotions which are made every three year to the degree ●f L●ytias. 30. The oath which they take before the visitors which are to receive the degree of L●ytias 31. Of the Council of twelve Auditors, erected in the town of Taybin. 32. Of the vi●●●●yeses and Governors of provinces called Common, Insuanto. 33. Of other particular officers, as the Tompo, Quinchay, and other judges, and their manner of proceeding in the administration of justice. 34. Of the punishments which they use against offenders. 35. Their l●weses touching travelers and beggars. 36. Of the idolatry of the Chinois, and what Idols they worship their sacrifices to the devil, and their belief touching heaven and celestial things. 37. A description of many kinds of Lotteries which they use. 38. Their opinion touching the creation of the world, which they say was built by their Tain, a deity lodged in heaven. 39 Their belief touching the estate of the soul departed out of the body: and their manner of praying for the dead. 40. Of their Monasteries, and of four orders of religion, either of which hath a General called Tricon. 41. A Genealogy of the Kings of China.   

THis great realm of Sinois, whereof Ptolemy knew the name, but was ignorant of the power, is the same which Marcus Paulus calls the Province of Mangi, and which we term commonly China, not knowing what foundation the first Authors had to move them to impose this name, unless it happened by corruption of the word, and that of Sina, they have made China, changing one letter into two, and that custom and continuance hath had this advantage over antiquity to make it pass thus changed with our times.  
They that are neighbours to this Estate call it commonly by the name of Sangley, but the Chinois (according to Magin and Mercator) give it that of Tame, or else (according to the Author of the general History of China) that of Taybinco, which signifies nothing but a realm, and the inhabitants call themselves Tang●s. This country lies most Eastward of all Asia, having for neighbour upon the East pa●t the Ocean Sea, the Islands of Corea, and the Islands of japon: on the South part the Ocean Sea, and partly the realm of Cochinchina: upon the West the Bramas or Brachmanes, and a part of Tartary: and upon the North Tartary only, from the which this realm is divided by mountains, and for want of them by walls. It extends itself in a manner from the tropic of Cancer unto the three and fiftieth degree of latitude, and contains in its length all the Meridiens, comprehended betwixt the one hundred and thirtieth, and the one hundred and sixtieth degree. But to understand more exactly the extension and greatness thereof, we will relate what the Chinois themselves have written, and what hath been found in their books.  
This realm contains in circuit (as they writ) 69516 Diez, which is a kind of measure they use, and these Diez reduced to the computation of Spain, make almost three thousand leagues of circuit, and one thousand eight hundred leagues in length. They have found in the same book from whence this computation was drawn, that the Chinois have only three measures to survey withal, which they call in their language, Lij, Pu, & Icham, which is in a manner as much as if we should say a Stade, which consists of one hundred twenty and five paces, a league, and a journey. The measure which they call Lij, comprehends as much space as may be assigned to a voice which a man thrusts forth with all his force, in a calm season, and upon a fair plain. Ten of these Lijs make a Pu, which is a great Spanish league: and ten Pus make a whole journey, called by them Icham, which comes to ten great leagues. According to this account, they found that this realm contains the leagues above mentioned. It is true, that by the computation of some other books, they have found more leagues: but Martin of Herrada, Provincial of the Augustine's at the Philippines, and a most excellent Geometrician, and Cosmographer, hath seen and found that those which we have followed are true, & that this country had three thousand leagues in circuit, and one thousand eight hundred in length, beginning at the province of Olam, which bends most towards the South, and lies nearest to Malaca.  
This realm is divided into fifteen provinces, whereof either of them hath more continent than the greatest realm we know in Europe. Some of these provinces carry the name of the chief city whereas the Governors, Precedents, and viceroys remain. Among these Provinces there are two, the one called Paguya, or Pasquia, and the other Tolanchia, which are governed by the King in person, and by his Council, for that this Prince doth always remain in one of these two, the which are the greatest of his whole Estate, and the best peopled. But this is not the only subject that hath drawn him to live there continually, but rather the neighbourhood of the Tartarians, with whom the Chinois are in continual war. And to the end the king of China may more easily prevent all dangers and inconveniences which may happen on that side, and by the same means annoyed his enemy with more commodity, he hath lodged his Court there, and ●ade it his abode.  
The fifteen Provinces are called Pasquia, Canton, Foquien, Olam, Sincay, Susuam, Tolanchia, Cansay, Oquiam, Aucheo, Honam, Xanton, Quicheu, Chequeam, and Saxij, or Sancij. All these, but especially the ten which lie near upon the Sea shore, are all in a manner divided by goodly rivers of fresh water, which are deep and navigable: upon the banks whereof there are many good towns, which may not only be numbered, but also named, for that the Chinois are so curious, as they set down in their books even the names of the houses of pleasure, which the noblemen and the Loytias do hold. But it shall suffice to set down the number of the cities and towns which are in every province, and to be brief herein, lest I should tier the Reader.  
The province of Paquia (whereas the King and his Council do commonly remain) contains seven and forty cities, and 150 towns. The Province of Canton contains six and thirty cities, and one hundred and ninety towns: that of Foquien, three and thirty cities, and one hundred and ninety towns: that of Olam, ninety cities, and one hundred and thirty towns: that of Cinsay, eight and thirty cities, and one hundred twenty four towns: Susuan, four and forty cities, and one hundred and fifty towns: Tolanchia, one and fifty cities, and one hundred twenty three towns: Cansay, four and twenty cities, and one hundred and twelve towns: Oquiam, ninetee●ne cities, and seventy four towns: Aucheo, five and twenty cities, and nine and twenty towns: Honam, twenty cities, and one hundred and two towns: Xanton, seven and thirty cities, and seventy eight towns: Quicheu, five and forty cities, and one hundred and thirteen towns: Chequeam, nine and thirty cities, and ninety five towns: Saxij or Sancijs, two and forty cities, and one hundred and five towns. The Chinois do use to end the name of Cities with this syllable Furio, which is as much to say as City, as Taybinfu, Cantonfu: and the name of Towns, by that of Cheu.  
Among these great numbers of towns and cities, there are almost two hundred of note, the which for the most part are built upon rivers which bear boats, and are environed with large and deep ditches, and walls of free stone, from the foot unto the highest part, and upon the top it is brick, which is made of the same stuff they use for the porcelain vessel, the which is so well cemented together, and grows so hard in a short time, as they are not able to disjoin the bricks with any pickax or hammer. The walls are so thick, as four men at the lest may march in front, yea in some places six, besides the watchtowers, galleries, and secret walks, whether the governors go for pleasure: the Parapet both within and without being so spacious and free, as six horsemen may ride together. For the commodity of batteries and defences there are Towers and Bulwarks one near unto another, the which have sentinels fitly placed, with casemats accordingly. They found that some of these walls have stood above two thousand years, without any show of rift or breach, so careful are the overseers and controllers of public buildings to repair them in time. Every town of note is built after this manner: There are two great broad streets, and straight, divided like a Cross, and as long as the eye of a man can well discern, the which end at four gates equally distant, all garnished with y●on, and stately built, the sight whereof is wonderfully pleasing. These two cross streets are cut off by other smaller streets, and enriched with public and private buildings, which serve to distinguish places and turnings: on either side of these streets are porches, which advance and serve to keep passengers (besides the shops of artizens) from rain and other discommodities of the air.  
Moreover there are to be seen great and goodly arches of polished stone built by the governors, with divers inscriptions, before they retired themselves out of towns, having served the time which the king had prescribed them. In the most commodious and frequent places of every town are to be seen the stately buildings and lodgings of governors, with their goodly gardens, orchards, fountains, and little rivers which do artificially water them for the pleasure of these lords, who also have their bird cages, parks, warrens, and woods, so as there is not any governors palace but may well be compared unto a town. The houses of private men near unto the sea are low, and upon the firm land they have divers stories, & they are painted without, or overcast with white, which shines, and is exceeding neat.  
They have at the entry a spacious porch and open, garnished with cupboards artificially made, which they fill with idols: after which there is to be seen ponds full of fish, and gardens upon the tops of houses. The stones of their buildings are carefully polished, and so plastered as a man would say they are gilded. The covering is polished after the same manner, and cymented so artificially as no rain can hurt it: and these coverings continued above one hundred years, the gutters being made of marble ingeniously wrought. Before the doors of their houses they have trees which be thick and green, set in order and by compass, and so pleasant to behold, as any eye were it never so weary and weak would soon be recreated. Besides that many of these towns are crossed through by great rivers, there are also some which have the the commodity of channel●s, to give entry to merchants ships, where they lad and unlade their commodities, as we see at Vtrecht and other towns of the Low Countries: and there are causie● sit to go by land, besides the bridges of stone which are both in towns, and in many places abroad.  
As for those rivers which swell and rise so as they cannot plant any piles, or build any arches, they make bridges of boats. Without the towns, especially upon the sea coast, there are suburbs very well built with goodly great streets, in which are taverns and inns for merchants strangers, and in these places besides the delightful drinks according to the custom of the country, they found all kinds of meat both ready dressed and raw.  
As for smaller towns and boroughs whereof some consist of three thousand families, with villages which are very near one unto another; there are so many, as the number is not known. They are for the most part pleasantly seated, and well furnished with water and wood, and their fields are full of houses of rich labourers, which are very high. All their houses have commonly three doors, one in the midst which is great, and one of either side which are lesser, and proportionablly made according to their manner of building.  
We must confess that there are excellent architects in this realm, and if the workmen be good, their materials be the best in the world; for that as I have formerly said, there is a kind of white earth whereof they make paving rile or brick, the which is so strong as they must have good hammers, and use great force to break them. In every chief city the king hath a lodging where the governor remains, the which is always stately. They have the best paved ways of any country that is discovered, the which are so plain and even as they have great high ways cut out and paved with square stones even unto the mountains; so as by the saying of them that have seen it, it is one of the most commodious and remarkable works of all the realm. In the town of Fucheo there is a tower before the lodging of the kings general Treasurer, the which exceeds (according to the testimony of them that have seen it) all the buildings of the Romans, being set upon forty pillars, whereof every one is but one piece, and they are so big as they do amaze them that behold it.  
But for that we have formerly spoken of the wall which divides China from the Tartarians, I think it fit to discourse here more particularly thereof, to satisfy s●●h ●s desire to be informed at large. This wall which is five hundred leagues long, and 〈◊〉 at the town of Ochioy, which stands betwixt two very high mountain's, and ●xt●●dss from West to East, was made by a king called Tzintzon, to defend China from the ●artarians. Yet you must understand that of these five hundred leagues which this wall contains, there are four hundred which are enclosed by very high mountains: as for the other hundred which lay open betwixt these mountains, this king causeth walls to be made of strong free stone, the which are seven fathom broad from the foot to the top. This wall gins towards the sea in the province of Canton, and passeth by that of Paquia and Can●ay, and ends in that of Susuan. This king meaning to make this admirable work, took the third part of the inhabitants of his realm, who died in a manner all in this toil, either by reason of the tediousness of the way, or for the change of air, and yet every province went to that part which lay nearest unto it. But this proud work made the whole realm to revolt, and they slew the king having reigned forty years, with a son of his also called Agntzi.  
Let us now come to the king's abode, to end the description of that which is found most remarkable in this realm. He remains most commonly in the province of Paquia in the city of Taibin or Suntien (which some write is the same they called Quinsay) either as we have said by reason of the Tartarians to whom it lies near, or it may be rather for that the air of this province is more healthful and pleasant than any of the rest, as we may judge by the word of Suntien which is as much to say in their language, as a ecclesiastical city. This city is so great, as a man on horseback may use good speed to ride from one port unto another in a day: wherein they do not comprehend the suburbs, the which are in a manner as great in compass as the city. It is so peopled as the Chinois assure that if it were needful to make a levy for any urgent occasion, they might draw together two hundred thousand men armed, whereof one hundred thousand should be on horseback.  
At the entry of this city towards the East stands the king's palace which is great and stately, where he commonly remains: yet he hath two others, the one in the midst of the city, and the other towards the West. This first palace is so great, and so full of singularities, as it would require four whole days to view it at leisure, as some report. First it is environed with seven walls built in such sort as betwixt the space of every one of them, they may easily lodge ten thousand soldiers which be ordinarily in guard in the king's lodging. Within this palace there seventy and nine stately halls built with admirable art, where there are to be seen a great number of women who serve the king in the places of pages and gentlemen. But the principal pieces of this palace are sour goodly halls, whereas the king gives audience to Ambassadors which come from foreign countries, and in like manner to the lords and chief men of his Estates whenas he holds his court; the which doth seldom happen for that he doth not show himself much unto his people out of his lodging, and in a manner is never seen but through a glass.  
The first of these halls is made of metal which is cast with great curiosity, having a great number of goodly figures. The second hath the floor made of silver of great value. The third is of pure gold perfectly well enameled. The fourth is of such price, and there is such abundance of riches, as it doth far exceed the other three, for that it represents the power and means of this great king, and for this cause they call it in their language the Hall of the king's treasure, assuring that it well deserves this name, for that it contains the greatest treasure that any king can have: besides this treasure, there are many jewels of inestimable value, and a chair wherein the king sits in majesty, made of marble set with many precious stones, and such rich carbonckles, as in the darkest night they shine as if there were many candle's light in the hall. The walls thereof are of divers stones of great price, artificially wrought, and to comprehend in a word all that is said of this hall, it is sufficient to know that it is the goodliest and rarest piece that can be seen in all the realm, and that it contains whatsoever is rare and rich.  

¶ The Quality.  
WE have seen the extent of this great kingdom, we have set down the number of the cities and towns, and observed the stateliness of their buildngs let us now examine if the country deserves so great expenses, and if it be able to suppl●● the excessive charge of these buildings. To begin then, you must understand that the temperature of the countries which are subject to this mighty Monarch is very divers, by reason they lie all in a manner running from South to North, and have so great a tract of country, as notwithstanding that the Island of Aynan which is near to this realm be beyond the nineteenth degree of height or latitude, yet there are some Provinces well known which are above fifty degrees distant from the Aequator, as we have formerly said in the description of this realm. We may easily judge of the distance there is betwixt the two remotest parts of the realm, by the great difference of the inhabitants colours and complexion: for the Portugals which have traded commonly at Canton with the Chinois (for that this town is somewhat near to Macao, whereas the said Portugals have long inhabited) report, that they see in them that traffic, faces of different colours.  
They that are borne in the province of Canton, and upon all that coast, are black like unto them of Fez in Africa, for that this country is in the same parallel with Barbary. But they of other provinces within the land, are for the most part white, yet some more than others the nearer they advance unto the cold country: for there are some which have complexions like unto Spaniards, and others which are white, and in a manner resemble the Germane, being flaxen haired, and of a sanguine complexion. Finally, we cannot say in general that this great realm is either hot or cold, for that it lies within the temperate Zone, and extends towards the same climate that Italy: whereby we may easily judge of her fertility, the which without doubt is the greatest in the world, notwithstanding that some will compare Perou and new Spain unto it.  
It is most certain that the land doth bear fruit three or four times a year, and that which doth also show the bounty of the air, is, that the country swarms with children, the which are very beautiful in their youth. But to specify something, this country brings forth all manner of green things, and great store of divers first-fruits like unto those that grow in Spain, besides many others which are not known here, for that they differ from ours, and all these first-fruits (as they say) are exceeding good. There are three kinds of Oranges, one so sweet as they pass sugar in sweetness, others which are not so sweet, and the third, which have a kind of sharpness, very pleasant to the taste.  
There is also a kind of plums which they call Lechias, which have a wonderful pleasing taste; and moreover, they have this property, that they never fill one, neither do they hurt the stomach though they eat many of them. There grows abundance of melons, which are very big, and wondered savoury, and a kind of Apples of a brown colour, the which are big, and of a very good taste. There is great store of sugar throughout the realm, the which is so good cheap as one hundred weight of the finest and whitest, when it is at the dearest, is sold for six royals, or three shillings starling.  
There is great abundance of honey, so as it is very good cheap, and of wax also, wherewith they may lad whole ships, yea fleets. They have much silk, and exceeding good. There grows great sto●e of flax, wherewith the common people do usually clothe themselves; and they have hemp wherewith they use to caulke their ships, and to make ropes and cables. Upon their hard and dry grounds, notwithstanding that they be stony, yet they gather much cotton, and sow barley, rye, oats, & divers other kinds of grain, all which yield a plentiful increase. Upon their moist and watery grounds (whereof there is great store, by reason of the abundance of rivers which are in this realm) th●y sow rice, which is the common food of this nation, and they reap such store, as in a time of most dearth, a Hanega (which is a kind of measure containing about two bushels of ours) is worth but six pence, and the land doth commonly bear this grain, & all others, three or four times a year, as I have formerly said. In the high countries which are not fit for tillage, they have goodly ranks of Pine trees, which bear great pine apples very savoury, & chestnut trees: and besides these trees, they sow Maiz, or Turkey wheat, as we call it, which is the food and ordinary bread of the Indians of Mexico and Perou, with much Panic, or Indian oatmeal, for that they will not lose a span of ground. All the Champion country is very pleasing to behold, & brings forth odoriferous flowers of all sorts. Moreover, it is beautified with goodly ranks of trees, which do commonly border the rivers and brooks.  
The Loytias have a custom to plant great and thick forests, whereas they breed up many wild Boars, dears, Coneys, Hares, and divers other beasts, of whose skins they make very good furs, especially of Ma●tinss and Sables, of which they have great numbers. There is abundance of Musk, which comes from a kind of little beast that eats nothing but an odoriferous root called Camarue, of the bigness of a man's finger. Moreover, there is great store of oxen, and kine, which are of so small value, as a good one is sold for less than a crown and a half; and also bugles which are not half the price; and a whole dear is sold for twelve pence, or thereabouts; and there are many ●wine whose flesh is as wholesome and sweet as the mutton in France, or Spain. There is great abundance of goats, and such multitude of foul which breeds in lakes and rivers, as they consume daily in small towns many thousands, being Ducks for the most part: and it hath been particularly observed, that at Canton, which is none of the greatest towns, they do every day eat twelve thousand. There are many Hens, and Capons, so as two pound weight of this flesh, without feathers, and ready dressed, is commonly sold for less than a half penny, and in like manner the rest. There are also many physical herbs, and great store of excellent Rhubarbe, and of the root called China, of the name of the country, and such abundance of nutmegs, as they may fraught great fleets therewith, the which are so good cheap, as four hundred are worth but six pence, and six pound of Cloves three pence. It is a wonder to see the fish of all sorts, not only upon the sea coast, but also in the remo●est provinces of the realm, by reason of the goodly rivers which are in all these countries. Moreover, there are many mines of gold, silver, and other metals. They have also infinite store of pearl throughout the whol● realm, the which for the most part are not very round. Let us now come to examine the manners and humours of these people, who enjoy all these commodities and delights, and have nothing to counterpoise them but their great earthquakes, which doth sometimes ruin whole towns.   

¶ The Manners.  
IT is a strange thing in this great realm, that instead of seeing many idle people which content themselves with what the earth brings forth, they are for the most part good husbands, who help the fertility of the land by their pain and industry, the which is such, as they spare neither mountains, valleys, banks of rivers, sea shore, nor any place whatsoever, so as they sow and plant whatsoever they think the soil will bear. They do the more willingly endure this labour, for that every man doth enjoy his own peaceably, neither do they endure any idle persons or vagabonds, but such are reputed infamous, and rigorously punished. Moreover, they are invited to this labour, for that they are forbidden to go out of the realm, and therefore by consequence they must manure their ground if they will live well; the Chinois being also naturally inclined to make good cheer, and to be always well appareled, and to have their houses well accommodated, which makes them to be good husbands, and to labour in that which they enjoy. They do not measure any kind of merchandise, not not linen cloth, but fell all things by weight, wherein there can be no deceit: yet they do sometimes deceive strangers which traffic with them, especially in Musk, which is made after this manner: They beaten their Musk Cats, which are little beasts (as we have said) and bruise them with blows, so as they kill them, than they put them into a place whereas they soon putrify, but first of all they bind up those parts by the which the blood may issue, letting the bones which are broken very small to lie steeping in it; then when they think it is sufficiently putrefied, they cut them in pieces, with the skin, and make little bags thereof, which the Portugals (who buy them) called Papos: and this is the best and finest Musk which is brought from the Indies, but subject to deceit, for that they use to hide little pieces of lead, or some other thing, in those bags to make them weigh the more.  
The inhabitants of China are all of a good disposition of body, lusty, and active of their persons, but somewhat big. They have commonly broad faces, little eyes, fat noses, and have no beards, but some few hairs upon either side of the chin. It is true that there are some which have great round eyes, the beard well fashioned, and a pleasing aspect or countenance; but the number of these is small in regard of the rest: and some think that these men came from some strange country in old time, & did mingle with the Chinoi● when it was lawful for them to go out of the realm. They do all suffer the nails of their left hand to grow very long, and wear them of their right hand short. They have also long hai●e whereof they are very curious, and this manner of wearing long hair and long nails is not without superstition, for they say, they shall be taken up into heaven by their long hair and great nails. They do wreath it upon their heads with a crule of gold very artificially, or else with pins which are also of gold.  
The garments which the nobility and men of account do wear are of silk of divers colours, the which in that country hath an excellent gloss or lustre. The common people and poorer sort attire themselves in another kind of silk of less value, or else in linen cloth, serge, or cotton. This garment is light and fit according to the quality of the country, which for the most part is temperate, neither can they bear any weighter stuffs; and as for woollen cloth there is not any made in the whole realm. They wear long cassocks made after the old manner, having great skirts plighted very small, having a pocket on the left side, and great sleeves: upon these cassocks they wear great gowns made after our manner, but the sleeves are larger.  
The princes of the blood, or they that are advanced to dignity differ in apparel from ordinary knights, for that the princes wear their cassocks embroidered with gold and silver about the waist, whereas others have but their skirts garnished with gold. They use breeches artificially wrought with backe-stich, and they wear very delicate buskins and shoes of velvet. During Winter, although the climate be not very cold, yet they have their cassocks and gowns furred, especially with sables, whereof they wear many about their necks. They that are not married differ from the rest, for that they wear their hair upon their foreheads and have higher hats. The women adorn themselves curiously, and attire themselves after a manner which doth much resemble the Spanish. They carry many jewels of gold and rich stones, and do wear short cassocks with large sleeves which come but to the waist. They wear satin striped with gold, linen cloth, or silk, and the poorest wear razed velvet and serge. They have fair hair, whereof they are very curious, and bind it about their heads with a broad ribon of silk garnished with pearl and stone. They use painting, and hold it for a great grace to have little feet, and for this cause from their infancies they bind up their feet hard, which they endure patiently, for that they that have the lest feet are held the properest women. But this custom comes not only from their curiosity, but also from the jealousy of men who have brought it in, to the end that they shall not be●ble to go but with pain, and that going slowly and with a bad grace, they should have no great desire to go out of their houses: and this custom is so ancient and received in that country, as it hath in a manner the force of a law; so as that mother which should break it in the breading of their daughters should incur the note of infamy and be punished. Moreover they are very honest and retired, so as they are never seen at a window nor door; and if the husband invites any one to dinner, the wife never shows herself, nor sits at the table, unless he that is invited be some kinsman or especial friend: if any one go to visit her father, mother, or some one of her kinsfolks, she is always carried in a chair by four men, the which is environed with lattices made of gold thread, silver, or silk very close, so as they cannot be seen, yet may they see any that pass by; and moreover they are accompanied by a great number of servants. There is seldom any woman of account seen in the streets, so as it seems there are scarce any in all their towns.  
They are wonderful ingenious, they use carving, and are great painters of leaves, birds, and beasts, as we may see by the beds & tables which are brought out of that realm. In the plain country they use a kind of wagons with fails which are driven with t●e wind. The Hollanders have tried to make the like for pleasure, but they have not continued, neither have they made any great speed like unto the rest. They are cunning and well practised in buying and selling, so as in matter of traffic they will divide a hair. The merchants (whereof there are many in every town) set up a table at their doors, wherein are written the commodities which they have to cell: and those which they commonly cell are tinsells and, cloth of gold, with divers sorts of silk of excellent colours: Others which are not so rich cell sarges, pieces of cotton, linen cloth, and sustian of all colours. They that keep drugs make the like show of what they have. There are other shops of porcelaine of divers sorts, as read, green, gilt, and of a pale colour, the which are so good cheap, as you shall buy fifty pieces for two shillings. They are made of a kind of earth which they break in pieces and steep, pouring it into pools which are walled about, & paved with free stone: having dissolved it well in the water, they make the finest vessel of the fattest of the earth which swims about: and as for the rest the more it goes to the bottom the grosser and thicker it is: They give it what form they please, & then gilled it and put it into any colour, the which is never lost, and then they bake it in an oven.  
Some hold that the Porcelaine vessel is made of eggeshells broken, and kept one hundred years in the ground, or else of the shells of sea snails, the which they steep and lay in the ground to be refined for the like time, as one Edward Barbosa hath written. But if that were true, there should not be such great store of Porcelaine in China, neither should they transport so much into Portugal, Perou, New Spain, and other parts of the world. The finest is made in the province of Saxij, and never goes out of the realm, for that it is all employed for the service of the king and governors, and it is so beautiful to behold, as it seems to be Crystal. The artisans and tradesmen remain in certain streets where there dwells not any one that is not of the same trade; so as seeing of what occupation the first man of the street is, they may easily know that all the men of that street are of the same faculty.  
They of this realm are careful above all things to give portions to their children, before they can be corrupted; and this care is the cause that there are fewer vices in this realm than in many others. Herein they use so great diligence as many times the children being yet very young, yea & sometimes before they are borne, the fathers are agreed to marry them, and set down in writing the conventions and contracts of marriage. The custom of the country is that the husband indowes the woman that he means to marry. When the time of the consummation of the marriage is come, the father of the maid makes a great feast in his house, inviting his son in laws father and mother, kinsfolk and friends, and the day after, the bridegrooms father or his nearest kinsman doth the like. After the feast the husband gives the dowry to his wife in the presence of them all, and she gives it to her father or mother if they be living, for the pains they have taken in her education. Hence it comes that in this realm he is held richest that hath most daughters. And as for that which is given unto the daughter, the father may use it, if he have need; and when he dies all remains unto his daughter, to the end she may leave it to her children, or dispose otherwise at her pleasure. The men may take as many wives as they can maintain, so as they be not their sisters or cousin germans; and if any one marries within these two degrees of consanguinity he is grievously punished. They hold the first of these wives for their lawful spouse, and the rest for friends: They live with the first, and keep the rest in divers lodgings, or if they be merchants and men of traffic they dispose them in those places whereas they use to trade, and these wives are as servants in regard of the first. The father dying, the eldest son succeeds in the greatest part of the estate of the first wife, and the other brethren divide the rest equally among them, whether they be sons to the first wife or of others. If there be no son by the first wife, the first that is borne of any one of the rest carries away the greatest part of the succession, and by this means they seldom die without heirs of their lawful spouse, or by their other wives.  
They say that in the provinces which lie near to Tartary, they have a very strange custom, which is, that the Viceroys or Governors prescribe a certain time to men and women, within the which they are bound to marry, or become religious. This time being come, all that mean to marry, repair (at a certain day) to a town appointed to that end, in ●uerie province: being arrived there, they go and present themselves before twelve men of the chiefest, and most ancient, whom the king hath appoined to that end, and th●se take the names of the men and women, and inform themselves of their qualities, and what estates they have to endow the wives they mean to marry. After this, they look upon the list of men and women which present themselves, and if they found more men than women, or otherwise, they cast lots, and leave them which remain to be first married the year after. Six of the twelve above mentioned make three ranks of men, putting in the first, the richest, without any respect of proportion or beauty; in the second, them that are of mean wealth; and in the last, the poor: Whilst that these six make the division of men, the other six do the like of women, placing in the one the fairest; in the second, those which are not so beautiful; and in the third, the foul. This being done, they give the fair unto the rich, who pay a certain sum of money whereunto they are taxed by the judges, than they give unto them that are not so rich, the others which are not so fair, for whom they give not any thing; and last of all, they give the fouler sort unto the poor, withal that which the rich had given for the beautiful, the which is equally divided amongst them. The marriages being ended, they make great feasts in certain houses, which the king hath in ●uerie town, the which are furnished to that end, with many beds, cupboards, and other things necessary for household, to the end that the married people may take what they need during the feast, then after fifty days every one retires to his house. But this is to be understood of the common people, and 〈◊〉 of the nobility and men of quality, who are not bound to obey this ordinance, but marry at their pleasures.  
As for the king of China, when he is married, he makes choice of thirty Concubines of the best quality of all the realm, who remain in his palace during his life, and he being dead, and his funeral ended, his successor attires these thirty women sumptuously, than he causeth them to be set upon a stately scaffold, in one of those goodly halls whereof we have spoken: being there, they have their faces covered, so as they cannot be known. Being there placed, there comes thirty Knights of the principal of the realm, whom the deceased king hath named in his will, and these go according to their antiquity or according to the nomination which the king had made, and then either of them takes one of those women by the hand, and carries her covered as he finds her until he comes to his house, whereas he keeps her as his wife, by means whereof he hath great gifts yearly ●o ●elpe to defray his charges. In old time, whenas the kings of China did marry their children, or any of their blood, they made a solemn feast in their palace to the which they invited all the knights and the chief noblemen of the Court, commanding them to 〈◊〉 all their children with them; the which they did willingly, yea in such so●t as every one did strive to have his train more gorgeous than the rest. The feast being ended, every one of the princes went unto the place whereas the ladies were set in rank according to their ages, and did choose her for wife that was most pleasing unto him; & the princess's 〈◊〉 he like of Knights: but this custom is no more observed, for that both princes and knights marry th●●r kinswomen, unless it be in the first or second degree.  
As for funerals, and ceremonies which concern the dead, they observe them after this manner: whenas any one dies, they wash his body instantly, and attire him in the best apparel he had in his life time, the which are perfumed, and smell exceeding well. Being thus clothed, they set him in the best chair he had, and then his children, and wife, or else the father, mother, and brethren, come near to the dead body, & having kneeled before 〈◊〉, everse one goes his way mourning. Then there comes in order all the kinsmen & friends of the deceased, and in the end his servants, if he had any. This ceremony being done, they put him in a coffin made of some odoriferous wood, the which is well closed up for fear of some bad scent, and then presently they set it upon two forms, or upon a Table in a Chamber hung with the richest Tapestry that they can possibly get, than they cover it with a sheet which hangs unto the ground, upon the which they set the image of the deceased, very artificially made. In a chamber right before that whereas the dead body lies, or else in the entry, they set a table with candles burning thereon, the which is covered with bread, and many sorts of first-fruits, and they keep it in this manner above 15 days, during the which, every night the Priests and religious men come, who sing prayers, offer sacrifices, & do other Pagan ceremonies: for they bring many paineted papers, & burn them in the presence of the dead, & they lay before him many others, that hung at little cords, which are set there to that end, and they do often remove these papers, and make great cries, by means whereof they s●y they sand the soul of the deceased to heaven. After fifteen days (during which the tables are always covered with store of meat, which serves for to feed their Priests, and the kinsfolks and friends which come to visit the deceased) they take the coffin where the body lies, and carry it into the fields, being followed by all his kinsfolks and friends, with a great number of priests, and many candles burning. They bury him commonly upon a little hill, in Sepulchers which belong unto them, and which are particularly dedicated to this end, all which are made of free stone. They presently plant a Pine tree near unto the Sepulchre, the which is never cut; and if it chance to fall, they leave it there until time hath consumed it, holding it for a sacred thing. They that follow the Convoy, go in order in manner of a procession, carrying musicans and players of instruments with them, who sing and play continually until the body be laid in the tomb: and they hold that funeral for most honourable, where there are most priests and minstrels. They sing by the sound of their instruments many prayers which they make unto their Idols, and last of all they burn many papers upon the Sepulchre, whereon are painted slaves, horses of gold, silver, and silk, with many other things which they say the dead shall enjoy in another life. They rejoice much, and make feasts, laying it into the grave, holding for certain that the Angels and Saints which are in heaven make the like feast to the deceased. The kinsfolks are all this time covered with mourning cassocks made of a gross wool, pitched against the flesh, and girt with cords. They have also at that time upon their heads great bonners of the same wool, made with great verges like unto a hat, coming down unto their eyes. They wear this mourning habit for their father or mother a year or two, and if the son be a Governor, he retires himself most commonly with the King's permission, leaving his charge. They that are not so near allied, attire themselves for certain months in linen cloth died, and in like manner the other kinsfolks and friends; but it is only until the deceased be buried. This is all that can be said touching their interments.  
Notwithstanding that their hills abound with vines, yet they make no wine of their grapes, as they do in these parts: but they are accustomed to preserve their grapes for winter. In stead whereof, they draw a juice of very good taste, from an herb called Chia, the which they drink hot like to them of jappon. This drink doth purge them from phlegm, cures the heaviness of the head, and pain in the eyes; and after this manner they live long, and are seldom sick. To prevent in some sort the vehement heat of Summer, they help themselves in this manner: they make certain little caves very deep in the ground, from whence they give air into all parts of their houses, little or much as they shall think good, with wonderful art.  
They reckon their years by twelve Moons, so as eve●●e three years they add one luna●ie month unto their year: and they begin the year at the new Moon of March. Then they make a solemn rejoicing, and also upon the day of their birth, which they celebrat in their houses, sending stately presents one unto another. They make very sumptuous feasts, and by night represent Comedies and Tragedies, in which pleasure no cost is wanting: these be Poesies composed at pleasure, or ancient Histories. Then they bring in Tumblers, jugglers, Players of interludes, and doers of feats of activity. The walls of houses, and the gates, are covered with green, with Roses, and with rich Tapestry, the streets are perfumed, and strewed with sweet flowers. Then there is nothing to be seen but lamps and torches, the trees, arbours, & windows, seem to be on fire: all the streets echo again with the noise of instruments, flutes, and voices intermixed. This is the order of their feasts: every one that is invited hath h●s table, or if they sit two at one table, that is the most: this table is of a shining wood, like to H●bain, whereon are the figures of wild beasts, with certain fillets of gold or silver, interlaced very artificially, a work particular to the Chinois.  
This goodly inlaying serves them for a table cloth, and the table is trimmed with deckings of silk, which hung down unto the ground. The guests are set in chairs with backs, having cushions to rest them on: being set after this manner, they bring first of all baskets, covered with garlands of flowers, and full of fruit upon the sides, and in the midst lies the meat. Notwithstanding that the Chinois have abundance of foul, venison, and shellfish, yea and all other exquisite meats, yet the dish which they most esteem is swine's flesh. They are so delicate, as they hold it grossness to handle their meat with their fingers. They use bodkins, or little forks of gold and silver, to take up their meat when it is cut small, and to put it into their mouths, not touching it with their hands. They drink divers times together, in little goblets, to quench their thirst, and invite them that eat with them, with many ceremonies, to pledge them: in the mean time, their servants attend, and take away with great silence, and good order. The men eat apart, and the women by themselves in some private chamber, of whom their husbands are exceeding jealous. As for their salutations, the common people observe this order; they shut the left hand, and cover it with the right, than they lift them often unto their breasts, and fi●●ing their words to their countenances, they make show that they love their friend, whom they salute with passion. The richer sort, and men of account, make a low reverence, stretching out, and bending their arms like a bow, then crossing their fingers together, they strive, with many words of compliment, to exceed one another in courtesy. They have been so industrious, as they have made their forges in such sort as they need not the help of any man to blow the bellows; for they have invented a certain kind of pipes, which receive the air from certain hollow places, in such manner as they never want wind.  
They have an invention in the making of artillery, to cast some which may be taken in pieces, and easily carried by men or beasts of burden to any place they desire. They use long leaves of exceeding fine paper to writ on, drawing their lines not from the left hand to the right like to the Grecians, Latins, and other people of Europe; nor from the right unto the left like to the Hebrues, Turks, Arabians & others; but from the top of the page to the bottom. Their letters are like to the Hieroglyphikes of the Egyptians, every one signifies a word, and sometimes periods, yea whole sentences: so as the Chinois who are far distant one from another by reason of the great extension of so many provinces, and have divers languages, understand what is contained in their printed books. Besides the language which is common to the people, and particular to every province, the learned sort of men have a speech which is proper unto them: they call it the Mandarin tongue (for Mandarins are Magistrates in China) and this language is familiar to Courtiers, Secretaries, Lawyers, judges, and Magistrates.  
In their journeys besides horses of divers sorts, they use litters, and caroches drawn by horses, or else chariots for the wind, whereof we have formerly spoken. They breed up birds very carefully whom they reach to speak and to leap after divers sorts, and they trim them fantastically, besides their natural colours. Their sea preparations are in a manner incredible: they have great vessels called jones, which go only with fails: some of them are furnished for the war having both in the poop and prow high castles: others are lower, and serves only for the transportation of merchandise and matters of burden. They have also other vessels called Lantes, Bancons, and Longs. Every Lante is rowed with twelve great oars, six of either side, having to every oar four or six men. The Bancon hath but half so many. As for the Longs, they have some resemblance to the Galleys of Europe, but they are of no use but in rivers. There are other vessels which serve only for the delight of rich men when they have a desire to go along the shore, having the poops, chambers, and windows latticed, and the galleries all garnished and covered with gold and silver, and they have gardens of pleasure up on the top of their vessels, almost in despite of the sea.  
They calke and trim their ships with a certain stuff which is very good to keep them from worm eating, and to kill the beasts which pierce into the wood. To empty a leak they set a pump within near unto the orelop or hatches, the which hath many small vessels so artificially made, as the first which comes, removing his feet easily one after another, draws all dry in a short space. There are multitudes of families which ●ive in boats upon rivers: some-trafficke there, others play the cooks and feed passengers, and some use their trades and occupations: and to conclude, there wants nothing necessary for the life of man in these floating houses, so as they found as many commodities there, as in towns seated on the firm land. Many in these boats feed store of foul, especially great troops of ducks, the which is easy for them to do, for that in steed of setting the female upon eggs to brood them, they keep them in warm places which make them disclose as many young ones as they list. Night being come, they shut up the foul in their boats, and at the break of day they let them feed in the fields which are full of rice, where to the great ease of the countrymen they live upon herbs which hurts the rice that is sown: at nigh at the found of a bell or drum they return all flying into their boats. The small barks and boats furnish them that devil upon the firm land with store of fish both from the sea and fresh waters, after this manner: In the spring whenas the snow and rain hath made the rivers to swell, and that the sea fish comes up by troops into the mouths of fresh waters to spawn more at ease, there come down many men from the neighbour countries, being drawn by the gain they make of fishing, with nets. The fishers of the fresh water do at that time buy great store of sea fish for a small price, the which they keep in leaps covered with parchment that is pitched, and changing the water often, and giving their fish some thing to eat they transport them far into the firm land, and put them into ponds, pools, and town ditches, whereas they fish them out to furnish the tables of rich men all the year. They have one pretty trick to take them, among the rest: they breed up sea ravens or divedoppers, the which are very great and tame, and are acustomed to live on fish: about whose necks they tie a string somewhat lose, so as they may devour a fish, but not swallow it down. Then they let go these ravens which plunge with wondered dexterity into the bottom of those ponds where they take the fish, and so return to the place from whence they went, and there they take the prey from them. The Magistrates spend much of their time in these sports. The like hath been seen at Fontainebleau done by cormorants which were governed by the Englishmen, whereat the court of France took great delight.  
There are many Chinois given to study, but few apply themselves to Physic, Philosophy, or Astrology. They keep their promise as far as the necessity of commerce, and the opinion they have to enrich themselves with the prejudice of another will allow. Strangers are suspect and odious unto them, neither will they lodge them, or frequent with them. If they be priest with debts, they fell their children to free themselves, or elsethey make some infamous and detestable brokeage. Finally, they esteem nothing but their own inventions, whereof they brag with much babbling, saying that they have two eyes, and that they of Europe have but one, and all other are blind.  
Whenas any one of base condition goes to speak to a Loytia, he kneels down presently when he comes into the hall whereas the Loytia is, bowing his head and eyes to the ground, and after this manner he goes upon his knees until he comes into the midst of the hall, where he stays and makes his request with a very humble voice, or else delivers it in writing; then having received his answer, he returns recoiling always upon his knees until he be out, and never turns his back unto the Loyti●. If any of the people meet any of the chief of the country, or that are noble or in dignity, in the street, they stand presently still, and attend in the same place bending down their heads with great silence until they be passed, and if any one should fail herein he should be instantly cruelly beaten. Whenas they go to visit one another, he that is usited comes forth into the street, accompanying him that came to see him. They have also one cus●●●e which is very strange: if by chance any one of the country or town comes to see them, and if when he knocks at their doors, or finds them in the street whom he goes to visit, not well appointed; although he speak unto them, and be their nearest kinsman, or of long acquaintance, yet they make no answer, nor make any show, nor seem to see them or know them, but turn their backs and go home to their houses▪ whereas they presently put on their best apparel; then they go forth again to receive him that comes to s●e them with as good a countenance as if they had not seen them before, n●r committed this foolery. They give great entertainment to their guests, presenting them instantly with a collation of divers first-fruits and comfitures, and making them drink a kind of liquor which is generally used throughout the realm, and is made of certain physichall herbs sit to comfort the heart. This ceremony is also observed among neighbours when they visit one another. But if it happen that any one meets with one that is of another place and whom he knows, or any of the same town whom he hath not seen of late, he presently demands of him if he hath drunk and eat, and if he answer no, he than leads him to the next tavern where he entertains him royally; the which they have good means to do in that country, for that in the market places, streets, and suburbs of every town they have many taverns whereas they make great cheer for little cost, for that victuals abound there, and are very good cheap: but if he answers that he hath already drunk and eat, he than leads him to certain shops full of comfitures and such like dainties, where he gives him a banquet very bountifully. They also use great respect unto women, as well to strangers as of the country, of what quality and condition soever they be, especially to married women; holding it for a thing worthy of blame to use any dishonest speech unto them, or not to salute them and to give them place when they pass in the street.   

¶ The Riches.  
WE may confidently believe that this country is one of the richest, or to speak truly, the richest in the world; for that all things abound there in such sort, as besides the provision of the Chinois, they have wherewithal to furnish both their neighbours, and remote countries. The Sea coast, which runs of a great length, hath many good ports, and commodious havens, for the receiving and sending forth of all sorts of merchandise. The inhabitants draw out of divers mines, great store of gold, silver, and other metals. They carry out of China, much pearl, porcelaine vessel, rich furs, flax, wool, cotton, silk, and all sorts of stuff, as also, much sugar, honey, wax, rhubarbe, camphire, vermilion, woad for Dyer's, and Musk, whereof they have abundance. As for the revenues of the king of China, some hold that they do amount to one hundred and twenty millions of gold yearly, which is so great a sum, as that great and sparing Emperor Vespasian never gathered so much together in his whole life. I know there are many doubt hereof, but it hath been well averred, that out of the only town of Canton, which is none of the richest or of greatest note upon the Sea coast, the king receives yearly one hundred and eighty thousand crowns of the impost of salt, and in another small town near unto it, above one hundred thousand crowns yearly of the tenths of Rice only. We have no reason then to doubt that there enters not yearly into the king's coffers wonderful heaps of gold and silver, if we consider the spaciousness of so many provinces, the great number of people, the contributions for every head, the customs for merchandise, the tenths of all sorts of fruit, the revenue of mines, with other aids, taxes, imposts, and subventions. But the better to inform the Reader, it shall be fit to specify every thing in particular.  
For the effecting werereof, we must see what number of tributaries there be in every province, whereof the king's officers keep a register for the levying of the taxes and impositions; and withal we must observe, that there are as many men which pay nothing, as do pay; for that not any of the Loytians and officers of justice are taxed, neither are the soldiers both at sea and land, all which are exempt. Coming then unto the point, I say with them that have undertaken to writ and have known it in the country, or learned it by some assured relations, that in the province of Paquia, the king h●th two millions seven hundred and four thousand men which pay him tribute: in the pr●u●●e of Canton, three millions six hundred thousand: that of Foquien, two millions f●●r●e hundred seven thousand: that of Olam, hath two millions two hundred and forty ●housand: that of Cinsay, three millions three hundred and eighty thousand: that of Sulu●●, two millions fifty thousand: that of Tolanchia, in which province the king remaine●, six millions ninety thousand: in that of Cansay, two millions three hundred and five thousand: that of Oquiam, three millions eight hundred thousand: that of Au●he●, two millions eight hundred and four thousand: that of Honan, a million two hundred thousand: that of Xanton, a million nine hundred forty four thousand: that of Chequeam, two millions two hundred forty four thousand: and that of Sancijs, which is the lest of the fifteen provinces, a million six hundred seventy two thousand and five hundred.  
The ordinary tribute which is due for every one that hath a fire and dwelling, is of two Mases by the year, which is a kind of money in value as much as twelve pence of our English money: and although this tribute be very small, and that the Loytias, who make a good part of the realm, nor the governors, officers, captains, nor soldiers, pay not any thing; yet the multitude of people is so great, as only that which is given for the expense of the king's person, and his palace, with that which the rights of customs, ports, and other rents may amount unto, not accounting what is paid to Morrepayes, garrisons, and other soldiers of the realm, nor what is employed in the reparation of town walls, nor in the charges of armies, both by sea and land, with the entertainments of governors and officers of justice, all which enter not into this account: there remains of ordinary revenues unto the king what I shall set down in this place, the which 〈◊〉 been drawn out of the books and registers of his accounts: yet the Chinois say, it is much less than is paid him at this day, and that this account was made in old time.  
In fine gold, from seventeen to two and twenty carats, they give him four millions two hundred fifty six thousand nine hundred Tahes, whereof every one is worth ten royals, and four and twenty maravedis of Castille, which in our money is about five shillings four pence half penny. In fine silver, three millions one hundred fifty three thousand two hundred and nineteen Tahes. The pearls (whereof the country doth generally abound, although they be not very round) are commonly worth unto him two millions six hundred and thirty thousand Tahes. In Musk and Amber, a million and five and thirty thousand Tahes: and in Porcelain, ninety thousand Tahes. Moreover, the king hath much land throughout his realm, which he hath given to his subjects, upon condition, to give him part of that which they reap, or that grows thereon; and for this reason they pay him that which followeth:  
In Rice, which is the ordinary food of the realm, and of the neighbour countries, sixty millions, one hundred seventy one thousand eight hundred thirty two measures: in Barley, twenty nine millions, three hundred ninety one thousand nine hundred eighty two measures: in Wheat, thirty three millions, one hundred and twenty thousand two hundred measures: in Salt, twenty five millions, three hundred and forty thousand four hundred measures, which he gathers out of his Salt-pits, and whereof he reaper's great revenue yearly: in a kind of corn called Maiz, twenty millions, two hundred and fifty thousand measures: in Millet, twenty four thousand measures: in Panic, or Indian oats, fourteen millions, and two hundred thousand measures: then in other grai●, and divers pulses, forty millions, and two hundred thousand measures: in pee●●●●f silk of fourteen ells long, two hundred and five thousand five hundred and nin●tie pieces: in Silk made up in bundles, five hundred and forty thousand pound weight: in Cottons three hundred thousand pound: coverings wrought in colours, eight hundred thousand four hundred: Chimantes of raw silk, every one weighing tw●l●e pounds and a half, three hundred eighty thousand: coverings of cotton, of f●●r●●●●●e else a piece, six hundred seventy and eight thousand eight hundred and seventy: Chimantes of cotton, three hundred and four thousand six hundred forty and eight. All these things are levied by the king of China, who imploieth part of it for the expense of his house, which is very great, and the other is reserved in his treasury, in the which they assure there are many millions; which cannot otherwise be, seeing his revenues are so great.   

¶ The Forces.  
HE that would not judge of the forces of the king of China by the great multitudes of men which are in his dominions should want understanding; being well known that this force contains in itself all the rest. But to speak some thing in particular, the forces of the king of China are fit to preserve than to increase. We may also see that his design is to maintain and defend that which he hath, not seeking to extend himself any farther; whereof the wall upon the frontiers of Tartary is a sufficient testimony. And truly he hath reason to content himself with that which he holds, seeing that the greatest princes of the earth do envy him. Moreover if he should undertake any conquest it would not succeed, for that notwithstanding he hath great numbers of meant, yet are they for the most part fainthearted cowards, as well by reason of the delights wherein they live, as of their subjection, and the form of government which makes them exceeding fearful. But to the end we may see in particular after what manner this king preserves himself, it shall be fit to consider of his preparations and m●n of war, and the order which he holds in his Estates to prevent all inconveniences. For although at this present, and of late years the king of China hath lived in peace and without war, at the lest of any importance, yet he is so careful to provide for all events, as if he had many wars in hand, and great enemies to assail him.  
Notwithstanding that he hath in every province a Council of war, and in like manner a captain general, and many men entertained, so as in an instant he may levy great armies both by sea and land, according to the occasions which shall be offered: yet he also maintains captains and soldiers for the defence of every town where they keep watch and ward, go the round, and set sentinels by night, as if the enemies were at their gates. These companies being in guard, suffer none to enter nor go forth without permission from the judge of the town, and the gates are open and shut by appointment from these captains, who sand it daily written upon a board blanched over with plaster, and signed with their hands. In these ports they hold all the force and defence of their towns, and they plant their artillery there. Whenas they shut the gates at night, they glue a paper upon the joints thereof, the which they seal with a signer which the Governor or l●dge of the town wears upon his finger, and to this end he goes in person, or else sends some one thither that is very trusty: and they may not open them in the morning until the seal be viewed, and that they are assured it is in the same estate they left it. So as if any one have a desire to go out of the town or to make a journey in haste, he goes forth in the evening before the gates be shut, and lodgeth in the suburbs; else it is impossible for him to departed early, for that they never open before Sunrising.  
They set sentinels by night, and change them at their hours, and there are some which always go the round with a good number of soldiers. And the better to keep the towns in peace, it is not lawful for them to bear any offensive or defensive arms, unless they be soldiers whom the king entertains, neither may they have any in their houses, or carry them in the fields. Besides all this, the king hath in the town of Taybin, otherwise called Suntien, and in like manner in the neighbour towns, a great army of foot and horse, the which he employs for all accidents that may happen in those places, and also for the guard, safety, and majesty of his person.  
The soldiers of this realm are of two sorts: the one are borne in those towns where they are set in guard, and they are called Cum, in their language: they succeed in these places from father to son, and if any chance to die without heirs, the king 〈…〉 others in their places. Every one hath his name written on a battlement of 〈…〉 ther he is bound to go if the enemy comes against the town. The other soul● 〈◊〉 strangers, and entertained by the month or by the year, and these are they wh●●● 〈◊〉 commonly stand sentinel, and do attend the captains: moreover they are subject to march wheresoever they are commanded, and they are called in their language Po●.  
Every troop of a thousand men hath a Captain and an Ensign cannoneer, and every company of a hundred hath in like manner a Captain and an Ensign bearer which depend of the other: wherefore to know the number of men which are in a great army, it is only needful to reckon the Ensigns of a thousand men which are very well known. Every Captain as well of a hundred as of a thousand men hath a house built up●● the wall, and his name written thereon, in which place he must remain during the wars. The Captains do every month as well in the time of peace as war, train their soldiers, and teach them to manage the arms which they use with dexterity, the which are commonly harquebusses, pikes, targets, swords, poles with iron heads, and others made like an half Moon, battle axes, daggers, and corslets.  
The horsemen have four swords hanging at their saddles, and fight with two at once with great dexterity. They are accustomed to enter into battle being environed with many of their household servants on foot, who are furnished and armed as well as possible they can. These horsemen are politic and expert in matters of war as well as the footmen, and have many stratagems. They use great engines of fire, and especially certain boxes of fire full of points of iron and long arrows made of gun powder, wherewith they do much annoyed their enemies. The horsemen fight with bows, arrows, and lances, and with two swords as we have said, and some do also carry haquebuzes. They do not manage their horses well, for that they put an iron only in the mouth, which serves for a bit, and for to stay them; they govern them with a rain, using cries, and whips which they bear. Their saddles are ill made, and they are all in a manner lightly armed, and bad horsemen.  
As for the sea, the king useth the like care that he doth upon the land, and doth commonly entertain a great number of fleets with their Generals and Captains who do carefully keep the coasts of all his dominions. They pay their soldiers exceeding well, and they that behave themselves well are rewarded according to their merits. Whenas the Chinois take any prisoner in the wars, they are not accustomed to kill him, but they only make him to serve a Mortpay upon the frontiers which are most remote from his country, in which place he is entertained by the king like unto the rest. These 〈◊〉 do all wear read caps to distinguish them from others: and as for the rest of their garments they differ not from the Chinois: and they that are condemned for any crime to serve upon the frontiers, do also wear read caps.  
It remains now to treat in particular of the men of war which all the realm in general, and every province by itself doth entertain. There is as I have said in the chief town of every province a Council of war, consisting of four Councillors and a Precedent, whose charge is to have care for the defence and preservation of that province. They are called among them, Captains, and they provide for all officers, and all munition of war which they sand to those places where need requires. And tooth end nothing may be wanting in this case, they of the Council of the treasure have commandment to deliver unto them whatsoever they shall demand without any delay. The number of men of war that were in every province in the year 1577, whenas F. Martin Her●●e was in this realm (which was in a time of peace) was as followeth.  
In the province of Paguia, whereas the king lives most commonly, there were two millions, one hundred and fifty thousand foot, and four hundred thousand horsemen: in that of Canton, one hundred and twenty thousand foot, and forty thous●nd ho●se: in that of Foquien fifty eight thousand and nine hundred foot, and two thousand and four hundred horse: in that of Olam, seventy six thousand foot, and twenty five thousand and five hundred horse: in that of Cinsay, eighty thousand and three hundred 〈◊〉 and few or no horse at all, for that the province is full of mountains: in that of Oquiam, one hundred twenty thousand and six hundred foot, and no horse for the same reason: in that of Susuan, eighty six thousand foot, and thirty four thousand five hundred horse: in that of Tolanchia, which confines with the Tartarians, two millions eight hundred thousand foot, and two hundred and ninety thousand horse which are the best of the whole realm, and most esteemed, for that they are bred up in arms, which they did often practise when they had ordinary wars against the Tartarians: in that of Cansay, fifty thousand foot, and twenty thousand two hundred and fifty horsemen: in that of Honan, forty four thousand foot, and eighteen thousand nine hundred horse: in that of Quicheu, forty eight thousand seven hundred foot, and fifteen thousand three hundred horsemen: in that of Chequeam, thirty four thousand foot, and thirteen thousand horsemen: and in that of Sancijs, forty thousand foot, and six thousand horsemen only. According unto this computation, we see that these 15 Provinces contain five millions eight hundred forty six thousand five hundred footmen, and nine hundred forty eight thousand three hundred and fifty horsemen. Their horses are fit to make long journeys, but small for the most part; yet (some say) in the heart of the realm they have greater which are very good.  
Upon the frontiers of the realm there are very small forts, but towards Tartary they have their wall whereof we have made mention, which is a safe rampire for the whole realm. If there be any bruit of war on that side, the guards have no sooner made a sign, but they run from the boroughs and villages thereabouts unto their forts, until the Generals and Captains come with their army. To conclude, this realm is so well guarded of all sides, both by sea and land, as whosoever should have any design to invade it, should undertake a work which should breed him discontentment, according to human reason. We must now see who be neighbours to the king of China, the better to judge who may annoyed him. There is not any prince by land whose power he should fear, except the great Cham of Tartary: but by sea he confines with them of japon, and the Spaniards: As for japon it is diversly distant from China. They accounted sixty leagues from Goat, an island of japon, unto the town of Liampo, and two hundred ninety seven unto the town of Canton. The japonois do ordinarily annoyed them of China, running along their coast, and sometimes spoiling the country where they land, and to conclude, they do more trouble the Chinois by their incursions, thefts, and murders, than by open war, for that japon being divided into many Islands and Principalities, which for the most part disagree, they cannot go against them of China, but in small numbers: yet they are more courageous and warlike than the Chinois: on the other side, this realm confines with the Philippines held by the Spaniards, which are suspected in this country, and not without cause, for that the Philippines are so situated, as they may give much annoyance to the Chinois. They have also the like consideration of the Portugalls, who are in like manner subjects to the king of Spain: yet the king of China, in regard of traffic, hath suffered them to stay in the little Island of Macao, whereas they have planted a Colony, but very weak, for that they are wholly subject to the will of the Chinois, who distrusting them for the friendship and intelligence which they have with the Spaniards of the Philippines, restrain them daily of the liberty of traffic, and seek to make them retire to the Indies of their own accord.   

¶ The Government.  
ALl these great Provinces which we have formerly described, are under the dominion of one only king (and the Chinois are not acquainted with the names of Earl, Marquis, or Duke) there being no other to whom they pay impost or toll. The king gives all offices, and nobility itself, and he is not only honoured as a King, but adored in a manner as God. This is apparent, for that in every Province they have the King's Portrait made of gold, the which is always covered with a vail, but at every new Moon, at which time the magistrates go & kneel before it as if it were the king himself, the which doth wonderfully daunt the courage of those people, and makes them rather slaves than subjects to their prince.  
They have laws written for above two thousand years, which continued in the same estate they were in the beginning, as the Chinois affirm. And for that the study of this law is the gate whereby they enter into honours and public charges, many study it seriously, and do nothing but dispute among themselves of politic affairs, and of the means how to govern the Estate well: and when occasion is offered, they are curious to learn of strangers which come into their Ports. The king entertains professors in a manner in all his towns. They choose infants in Schools, and young men well advanced, whom they sand unto the University, where there are men which have a great care over them, and if they found any Scholars that are disordered or slothful, they are content for the first time to admonish and reprehend them; the second time, they punish them; and the third, they expel them ignominiously; and on the other side, they commend and encourage them that do their duties. Moreover, the Visitors appointed by the king do evarie third year make a public visitation of the Universities, whereas they make solemn promotions.  
Whenas any Visitor hath ended his visitation of the province, he causeth a public proclamation to be made, whereby he ordains, That all the Scholars which will take the degree of Loytia (which is as much as that of Doctor amongst us, although the word of Loytia signifies in their language a Knight) should come unto the chief Town: being there all assembled at the time appointed, and presenting themselves before the Visitor, they make a list of them all, and appoint what day they shall be examined. The day being come, the Visitor invites all the Loytias of learning, which are in the town; and the feast being ended, they altogether examine them with much rigour, ask many questions of the Scholars, especially concerning the laws and ordinances of the realm, by the which they must be judged and governed. If he finds any that are learned, and moreover, knows they are virtuous, he puts them in a list, and appoints them a day when they shall receive the degree: the which they use to give with great ceremonies, and before many persons, in whose presence the Visitor gives them, in the King's name, the marks and ensigns of this degree, with the name and title of Loytias; and these marks are, a girdle garnished with gold or silver, & a hat which hath two tippets hanging behind. And although that all the Loytias (as well they that attain unto it by learning, as others which have it by arms, or by the king's special grace) have the same name and title of Loytias, yet are they not of like credit and authority: for they of the Council royal, with Governors, Viceroys, and Visitors, are Loytias by examen, and Captains, Generals, and Treasurers, are by the King's grace, in recompense of some services: the later have no greater freedoms or nobility, and have no more honour than the other Loytias, of which number there are many in every town. There are also others of great esteem, which are put in the second degree, and these be they which attain unto the dignity by arms, being made by Generals, who have power from the king, they having made proof of their persons in the presence of witnesses worthy of credit. Besides the title, they give unto these, means to entertain themselves honourably, and with profit, and this makes all soldiers strive to do well, to receive this reward. As for their manner of leading the Graduate through the town, it is thus:  
On the day appointed to give the degree, all the Loytias assemble again together with the Visitor in the King's hall, where they made the examination, being all in good order, and in their best apparel, they come in that should receive the degree, being in their hose and doublets, every one having before him a godfather, with the ornaments which he is to give his godson; which marks or ornaments every one demands with great humility, of the Visitor, kneeling upon his knee. Whereupon the Visitor causeth them to take an oath after this manner: That in all offices and charges whereunto they shall be advanced, they shall carry themselves uprightly, doing justice equally to all men, and receive no presents: and that they shall be faithful unto the King, and never consent to any treason against him, with many other things whereon they stay long. The oath being taken, the Visitor speaking unto them in the king's person, puts on them the foresaid marks and ensigns, and at the same time he embraceth them, being followed therein by the other Loytias that are present. After all this, they go out of the hall in order, and then they ring the bells of the town, which are great and many throughout the realm; and at the same instant they shoot off their ordnance, which done, they lead these new graduates through the town (being well accompanied) after this manner. Before, there go a good number of soldiers with drums, trumpets, and other instruments; and after them follow many mace bearers; then follow the Loytias on horseback, or in covered chairs, all in rank: after march the godfathers, & behind them the new graduates in their hose and doublets, mounted on goodly white horses, with rich comparisons of cloth of gold, either of them carrying a livery of tapistry upon his shoulder, and on his head a hat which hath two pendents behind like a bishop's mitre. Upon this hat there are two nosegays of gold or silver gilt, made like unto a branch of palm. Before every one of them they carry six pillars of wood, which are borne by 4 men, betwixt the which there is a piece of satin spread abroad, on which there is written in letters of gold the trial which hath been made of the graduate, together with the title which they give him for this cause, & his arms, with many other things which I omit, for that I would not be sotedious as they are in this ceremony, which continues eight hours. From that day the new Loytias are capable of all offices, and to hold any government whatsoever; for the attaining whereof, he goes presently to court, & in his journey is honoured of all men, and lodged in the king's houses, which are in every place for them of his quality. Being come to court he goes and doth his duty to the precedents & auditors of the king's Council, either of them promising to prefer him when occasion is offered, & from that time he is put in the register of the Council, still courting the auditors to be advanced to some place.  
The king hath in the city of Tabin a council composed of 12 auditors or councillors, with a precedent, choice men, & well experienced in affairs. To be of this Council, they must not only be well learned in moral and natural philosophy, and well seen in the laws of the land, but it is also requisite they be Astrologers, and judicious in prognostications, for that (say they) whosoever shall be of this sovereign Council (by which all the fifteen provinces are governed) must know how to prognosticate of times, and of future things, to the end they may provide for the ensuing necessities of the realm. These twelve auditors do commonly sit in council in the king's palace, where there is a hall richly appointed with thirteen seats, six be of gold, & six of silver; but the thirteenth is richer than the rest, for that it is enriched with many precious stones of great value. This seat is in the midst of the twelve, under a cloth of estate of cloth of gold, whereon are embroidered the king's arms, which are serpents woven with gold thread. There the Precedent sits if the king be not in council himself. If he be there, the precedent sits then in the first seat on the right hand, which six are of gold. Every one hath his rank by antiquity according to the which they succeed one another in these seats. When as one seat is voided, the auditors and precedent go to a new election, and if he that hath most voices be absent, and governs some province, they sand for him; but if he be present, they conduct him unto the king, to whom they give a reason for the election they have made, and then he may confirm him if he please, or disavow him. If he be confirmed by the king, he presently takes an oath in a manner like unto that whereof we have made mention. This oath being taken, they conduct him to the seat that is voided upon the left hand, and put him in possession with great solemnity. Not any one but the precedent of this council speaks unto the king when need requires: or if he fall sick, the most ancient auditor of the golden seats. In this council they know monthly what passeth throughout the realm, being worthy of knowledge; whereof they never fail, for that the governors of provinces have express commandment to sand in writing whatsoever happens in every province, whither it be matter of war, of s●ate, of treasure, or any other thing: the which they perform so carefully, as notwithstanding that a province be 500 leagues distant from the court, yet the post sails not to come at the day appointed, for that they which arrive first attend the last until the day assigned to give in the advertisements, and they that are far off, having a desire their post should come as soon as the rest, sand many and enjoin them to make such speed as they encounter one another. These advertisements being viewed by the council, and a summary discourse taken of all by the precedent, he makes report unto the king, and if there be any thing that requires redress, he and ●●s council give order presently for it, & if there be any one appointed to be sent in com●●ssion for that business, he goes so secretly as he is at the place to make enquiry before that any man knows any thing of the business, or of the town where it is executed. Although these officers have great authority, and that the realm be of a great extent, yet there is neither viceroy, governor, nor judge whatsoever can put a man to death by justice, unless the king with his council confirm the sentence, except it be in a time of war when it is lawful for the general of an army or his lieutenant to execute a soldier which hath committed any crime, without advertising the king or his council thereof, taking only the advise of the king's treasurer, & of the camp master, both which are men of great authority, and must concur in opinion; otherwise they may not execute any.  
The provinces of Paquia, & Tolanchia are governed by the king's great council, by the ministery of officers which are sent thither; and the 13 other provinces have every one a vice roy or governor, whom they call Insuanto, who make his abode in the chief town. And although officers and men of justice within the realm are generally called Loytias, yet every one of them hath a particular name according to the office which he bears.  
The viceroy, who is the sovereign magistrate in every province, and who represents the king's person, is called Common. The second in dignity who is governor of the whole province, is called Insuanto. The corrector who remains in e●ery town where there is neither viceroy nor governor, is named Tutan, which corrector goes to treat of the affairs of importance of every town with the Insuanto, & he confers with the Common, whose charge is to sand a post to the king and his council, as we have said. The third is called Ponchasi, and is as it were precedent of the council of the Finances, having auditors or concellors, with many officers under him, as sergeants who serve to levy the king's revenues in every province, which revenue is carried by the Ponchasi to the Tutan, having paid the wages with the ordinary and extra ordinary charges of the king's officers which are in the province. The fift is the Anchasi, who is the precedent of civil and criminal justice, & decides with his officers all suits of controversies that come before him by appeal from other judges of the province. The six is the Aytao, who is puruciour geneneral, & precedent of the council of war; his charge is to levy men when need requires, and to prepare shipping and munition for their armi●s both by sea and land, and for the ordinary garrisons of town and frontier places: he hath also power to examine strangers which come into his province, and to know of them whence they are, and why they come, with such like, he gives advice thereof unto the viceroy. Either of these six hath ten auditors of his council which be choice men, and assist him in the expedition of affairs.  
When as they are in the hall where they hold the council (which is in the viceroy's lodging) in which there is also a particular hall for every council, five of them sit on the right hand of the precedent, and the other five on the left. They of the right hand are more ancient and differ from the rest, for they wear rich girdles garnished with gold, and hats of a pale colour, whereas the others have girdles of silver, and blue hats. As well auditors as precedents carry upon their breasts and shoulders the king's arms embroidered in gold upon their gowns, without the which they cannot do any public act; and if they should attempt it, they should not only be disobeyed, but also severely punished in the time of algenerall visitation. Besides these judges above mentioned, there are others inferior and subalternal, which be the Cautoc, who is the great standard bea●er●; 〈◊〉 Pochin which is the second treasurer; the Pochinsi who keeps the king's sca●e; the Autzatzi, which is as it were the Mayor or Provost of the town. There are 〈◊〉 three which are like unto the Alcades, Provosts, or judges of the court of Spain, called in their language Huitay, Tzia, and Tontay, who give audience in their 〈◊〉 once a week, and when the hour comes to open the gate, they discharge ●ou●e in all pieces of ordnance, to give notice to all men that they are going to their seats, whereas they bear all that will demand justice. If they found any one that hath offended, they sand him with a Sergeant (for every one of these judges hath ten or twelve) unto the ordinary judges of the town (who are called Zompau) and are distributed into quarters with a writing, wherein is set down the punishment which he must undergo which hath committed the offence. Every one of these ordinary judges hath a thousand inhabitants under his charge▪ and their jurisdiction extends not out of their quarter, neither may any one be judge in that quarter where his house stands. Every one of them goes by night about his quarter, and takes order that men be quiet in their houses, and that they put out their lights in due season, to avoid the danger of fire, whereunto they are often subject, for that their houses are close, and near one unto another, having the top made of wood like unto those of Biscay. If he finds any at an unseasonble hour that hath light burning, he is severely punished. They appeal from these unto the Provosts or judges of the Court, but not from the rest; and this appeal goes unto the Visitor general, who repairs the errors committed by them all, and for this cause he is called in their language Hondin, that is to say, a repairer of evil.  
Besides these, there are also other private officers, as the Tompo, who hath the care of victuals, and sets the tax; the Tibuc, who apprehends and punisheth vagabonds and idle persons; the Quinchy, who is like to the great Provost; and the Chomcan, who is the overseer of the prison; of which officer they make great account, by reason of the prerogative he hath to speak standing unto the judges, after that he hath kneeled down at his coming in; for all others speak unto them kneeling. Above all these officers, there is one which is called Quinchay, that is to say, in their language, Seal of gold, who never departs from the Court but for some very important affairs, concerning the peace and tranquility of the whole realm. He hath a special care that the Viceroy, Governor, or Auditor be not borne in that place whether he is sent in charge, to prevent the dangers and inconveniences which may happen by the friendship of kinsfolks, or hatred of enemies, which would hinder the course of justice. The king gives sufficient wages unto them all, for that it is forbidden, upon great penalties (to them that sue) to give any presents unto their judges, and also for the judges to take any thing. And whenas the great Council sends them, they are enjoined not to suffer any suitor or solicitor to come and visit them in their lodgings, nor to pronounce any judicial act but in open Court, and their officers being present, the which is done after this manner: The judge being set, the ushers go to the entry of the hall, and name with a loud voice the person that comes for justice, and they also del●uer what he demands. The suppliant enters, and presently falls upon his knees a good distance from the judge, where he propounds with a loud voice what he demands, as the ushers had done before, or else he delivers it in writing. If his demand be in writing, one of the registers receives it, and reads it before the judge, who having heard it, doth presently decree what he holds to be just, marking the demand with his own hand with read ink, and commanding that which he will have done. The judges are bound by the king to give audience tasting, & it is a custom to inviolable, as he that should infringe it should be punished. By these proceed, it is impossible for an officer to be corrupted, but some one of his companions in office shall know it.  
If any one fails in that which concerns his charge, they presently put a little flag into his hand, and make him to hold it kneeling, until that the audience doth rise, and then the judge commands the executioner (who is there present) to beaten him, who gives him as many blows as the offence seems to deserve; and this is not infamous among them, for that it is an ordinary thing.  
In all suits, as well civil as criminal, the judges proceed always by writing, and make their acts, and examine the witnesses publicly in the presence of officers, lest they should use some subtlety and falsehood, ask them some questions which are not pertinent nor necessary, or writing that which they depose not. They examine every witness particularly, and if they be contrary in their depositions, they confront them all, and examine them until they come for to deb●te it together, to the end, that by the reasons which they deliver, truth may be the better known: and whenas they cannot wrist it out plainly by this means, they put them to the rack, to make them speak the truth, unless they be men of quality, whom they hold to speak truly, giving credit to their words without any torture. In matters of great importance, and which concern great personages, the judges do not trust their registers to writ the informations, but they writ all the acts with their own hands: and their diligence is the cause that seldom any complain that they have been wronged by their judges. The judges number all the houses that are in their jurisdictions, and put them by ten in tables, which are hung at every house which makes the last of ten; wherein are written the names of the ten masters of those households, with an ordinance, by the which they are enjoined, that as soon as any of them shall do any thing to the prejudice of the Commonweal, or of their neighbours, they shall presently declare it unto the justice, to the end, that his punishment may serve for an amendment to him, and an example to others: and whosoever shall fail to make this declaration, he shall be forced to undergo the punishment which the other had deserved.  
Whenas any one of these ten will change his street, or go to devil in some other town, or undertake a long journey, he is bound to ring a little bell, or a copper basin, throughout his quarter, ten days before he goes, and to advertise his neighbours of his intent, and of the place whether he goes, to the end, that if he owes any money, or they have lent him any thing, they may demand it before his departure. And if any one go away, and hath not used this diligence, the judges compel the rest of the ten (whose names are in the table) to pay his debt, for that they had not given notice of his departure, and advertised his creditors, and the justice.  
As for such as own, and will not pay, the debt being verified, they have execution against their goods, and if they have not wherewithal to satisfy, they are put in prison, giving them a certain time to pay it, and if they pay it not within that time, or satisfy their creditors, they are whipped gently for the first time, and then they have a second term limited unto them, within the which if they do not satisfy, they are whipped more sharply than at the first, after which they prescrible a longer time, which if they do not keep, they are most cruelly beaten: for this reason, every man is careful to pay what he owes, or to sue unto his friends to help to free him, or else he gives himself unto his creditor to be his slave, for fear of this torment. These judges use two kinds of torture, they give one unto the feet, and the other unto the hands: and neither the one not the other are never given them but when there are so many presumptions, as they may serve for a sufficient proof. The sovereign judges assist whenas they give these tortures, the which is seldom, for that offenders confess the truth before they are brought unto it. As for prisons, they are very straight and cruel. And although that every one of these judges is but three years in charge, and must give an account of all that he hath done during the time, before certain judges that are deputed, whom they call Chaenes, yet the prince doth sand every year into all the provinces, visitors, called Leuchiz, who are known to be good justicers, and men of an upright life. These visitors make inquiry in every place, yet they discover not themselves, and they inform themselves secretly of the wrongs the judges do in the province, and if these found that the judges have erred, they may punish them, or suspend them for a time, or deprive them of their offices: and to conclude they may do what they shall think fit, so as they presume not to give sentence of death against any one, for that no magistrate may do it before he knows the king's pleasure. These visitors have also power sometimes to recompense them whom they found to have behaved themselves well in their charges, yea to give them places, and more honourable advancements: so as rewards and punishments being certain, ●ue●e man strives to do well, which makes it one of the best ordered countries in the world.  
The punishments which they use are to hung, burn, and empale, yet none are burnt but such as have been traitors to the king. Adulterers are all condemned to die, and they that suffer them, or consent unto them are punished exemplarily, with pains invented to that effect.  
All men are forbidden upon pain of death to begin, or make war in any place without express leave from the king and his council; and also that no man undertake a voyage by sea without the like leave: and there is a law, that no man shall go to traffic but in giving caution to return within the time limited, upon pain of banishment and loss of his freedom: and in like manner, that no stranger shall enter into the realm either by land or sea, without leave from the king, or the governors of the ports and other places where he shall arrive, and that the governors shall not suffer him without great consideration, having first advertised the king.  
At this day the governors of ports dispense sometimes with their going forth, notwithstanding this law, having certain presents given them by the merchants, to whom they give leave secretly to go and traffic secretly in the provinces and Islands that lie near, as at the Philippines and other places, yea there were three merchants of China which went to Mexico in the year 1585. Yet they never have this leave before they put in caution to return home within a year.  
The judges and Governors do also suffer strangers for gifts to enter into their ports, and to buy and to cell their commodities, giving them this leave upon condition that they shall not go up and down their towns, not stay to observe any thing that is secret. They give this leave in writing upon a plastered board, the which strangers set up on the prow of their ships whenas they come into any port, to the end the guards of that place may do them no wrong, but suffer them to buy and cell, in paying the rights due unto the king. There is a Register in every port appointed by the Governor, who sets down in writing the day and hour when any ship doth enter, with an order how he must lad according to their entry into the port. So as although you shall sometimes see two thousand vessels great and small in one port, yet they have their ladings with as little bruit as if there were but one.  
Their poor beg not in the streets, nor at their temples whereas they pray unto their idols, and there is a law by the which they are forbidden to beg, and all others are enjoined not to give them any thing that ask, but to declare them unto the judge of the poor, who is always one of the chief of every place, and hath no other care but to provide for the necessities of the poor, not contradicting the law. This judge makes a public proclamation the first day that he enters into office, that any man or woman that hath a child so decayed, as it is not able to work, they shall come and bring in his name to him, to the end he may provide for that which shall be necessary, according to the king's ordinance, which is, that the child being brought, having first seen his imperfections, if he be held capable to exercise any art or office, they appoint the father a time in the which he is bound to put him to a trad, and to make him to learn that for the which the judge thinks he is fit. If the child be so ill as it is not fit for any thing, the judge commands the father that he shall keep it in his house during life, if he have wherewithal; but if he have no means, or if it hath no father, he sends it to the nearest and richest kinsman, and for want of him he enioines all the kinsfolks to contribute towards the breeding it up, and to give something to him that keeps the infant. If it hath no kinsfolks, or they be so poor, as they are not able to keep the child; the king than breeds it up at his own charge, and keeps it in the hospitals which he hath in every town of his realm, where they also put old and needy m●n, who have spent their youth in the war for the service of the king and country. Not poor may go out of the precincts of the hospital without the permission of the judge, or of the Overseer that is under him, and this is never granted but for some necessary voyage that they would make. These poor old men breed up within these hospitals, hens, pigs, and many other beasts, which they use as well for recreation as profit. The judge doth often visit the Administrator or Ouerseet, and is also visited by another which comes expressly from court to visit the hospitals of the province. Blind people in this country are not held fit to be kept by the king or by their kinsfolks, for that they either make them to labour in their mills to grinned wheat or rice, or else they blow the bellows in smith's forges, or do some other work whereas the ●ight is not required. And if it be a maiden that is blind, when she is great she becomes a strumpet, and these young women have a mother among them which dresseth them, and is one of those that hath left the trade, for that she is old and unprofitable. All these lascivious women lodge in the suburbs of towns, and they are strictly enjoined to continued there, and not to go out of their doors whilst they use that trade.  
Poor widows which are in necessity may cell their children to relieve them, & therefore there are many rich merchants which traffic much therein, buying young virgins whom they breed up very carefully, teaching them to sing, to play of instruments, and such like: then when they are come to the state of women, they lead them to certain houses appointed for strumpets. The first day that they put a maiden to this trade, before they prostitute her in a public place they lead her before a judge whom the king entertains in every town to have the charge of such women. This judge receives her and installs her with his own hand in this public place, and from that day he that bred her up hath no more jurisdiction over her, but comes every month unto the judge to receive that which hath been taxed by him, and moreover he is paid for all the time that he kept her, and satisfied the money which he gave for her when he bought her, and for her teaching. There are blind women, and others which give all that remains (whenas their foster father is paid) unto their judge, & he keeps it faithfully, and gives an account yearly unto the Visitors; then when they grow old he delivers it unto them with his own hand, measuring it in such sort as they may have no necessity: and if it so happens, they give them wages to maintain them, to the end they may dress the blind women, or else they put them into the hospital which the king entertains for such as have no means to live.  
As for little boys whose mothers do also cell them for need, they put them to a trade, and when they have learned it, they are to serve him that breeds them up for a certain time; after which they are bound to give them their liberties, and moreover to seek them wives, to marry them, and to settle them in some place where they may get their living, whereunto they are constrained by the course of justice, if they will not do it willingly. On the other side young men are bound for an acknowledgement of the benefit they have received, to go unto them that have bred them up the first day of every year, and some other days with certain presents.  
In the buying of commodities they use no money coined, but to prevent all deceit, they buy and cell by the weight of silver clipped, and to that end they carry a pair of shears in their bosoms with a pair of balance in a case of wood. If there be any question of greater weight, they have scales in their houses with weights having the king's mark: they coin no money, but pieces of copper of a farthing value pierced through and tied together, which serves to supply silver that is weighed, or else to buy small commodities. Usurers (a plague to a commonweal) being surprised in their villainies, are among other punishments condemned in great fines. It is only lawful for lame men, impotent, and blind men, among the meaner sort to lend money to interest for their relief.   

¶ The Religion.  
THey are all idolaters in China, except some whom the jesuits have converted, and these are very few in number. To describe the Idols which they worship, they have one of a strange form, to the which they do greatest honour. They paint it with a body, out of whose shoulders come three heads which look one upon another, which signify (as they say) that all three have but one will, which make some think that in former times they had some knowledge of the Christian religion. There is also (as some affirm) certain pictures of the fashion and with the markers of the twelve Apostles: but when as any one demands of them of the country what manner of men these twelve Apostles were, they answer that they were great Philosophers which lived virtuously, and therefore they were made Angels in heaven. They have also the picture of an exceeding fair woman, holding a child in her arms, where of they said she was delivered being a virgin, and that she had been daughter to a great king.  
They believe that heaven is the creator of all visible and invisible things, and ma●ke it by the first character of their Alphabet, and say, that heaven hath a Governor for things above, which they call Laocon Tzautey, that is to say in their language, the Governor of the great god; and they worship this as the greatest next unto the Sun. They hold that this Governor was not created, but hath been from the beginning, and that he hath no body, but is a spirit. They say also, that there is another spirit of the same nature, which they call Cansay, to whom he hath given the charge of things upon earth, and who hath the life and death of men in his hands. This Cansay hath three subjects under him, which be also spirits, and assist him in his government: Their names are Tanquam, Teiquam, and Tzuiquam, and either of them hath distinct power: Tanquam hath the charge of rain, and to provide water for the earth: Teiquam is he by whom men are borne, and who hath charge of war, corn, and first-fruits: Tzuiquam hath the government of the Sea, and of such as go by Sea. They offer sacrifices unto them, and demand of them those things which are in their power. They also make many vows unto them, and promise' them plays and interludes, which they represent before these Idols.  
They do also hold a great number of men for Saints, which have exceeded others in valour, knowledge, or industry, or that have led an austere life, and in like manner those which have lived without doing wrong to any man, whom they call in their language Pausaos, that is to say, very happy. They do sacrifice also unto the devil, although they know that he is wicked and reprobate, to the end (say they) that he do them no harm in their persons or goods. They have moreover such a number of other Idols, as to avoid tediousness I will only make choice of three, which they honour exceedingly.  
The first of these Saints or Idols was called Sichia, which comes out of the realm of Trantheyco, that lies towards the West. This was the inventor of the religious men and women which are in the realm, who live in common without marrying, and are perpetually kept in. And for that Sichia did wear no hair, they that follow him have none also.  
They have moreover, a Goddess or Saint, called Quanina, who was daughter to king Tzonton, that had three daughters, whereof he married two, and intending also to marry Quanina, she would not, saying, That she had made a vow to heaven to live always in chastity. The father was much discontented, and for despite put her into a place in manner of a Monastery, causing her to carry water and wood, and to make clean a great garden which he had. The Chinois report, that Apes came unto her to help her, that the Saints of heaven drew water for her, that birds made clean the garden with their bills, and that great beasts came from the mountains to bring her wood; the which the king her father knowing, and conceiving that she did it by enchantment, he caused the place to be set on fire, wherein she was: she seeing that they burned this place for her occasion, would have put into her mouth a great silver pin wherewith the fastened her hair, but instantly there fell a great inundation of water which quenched the fire. Then she fled away, and went to hide herself in a mountain, whereas she did great penance, and lived very religiously; and the father was eaten with leprosy and worms, which no physic could help, by reason of the sin which he had committed. His daughter hearing of his infirmity, by a spirit of divination, came unto him to cure him, who when he knew her, craved pardon of her, and worshipped her. At the same instant, the daughter seeing that her father would worship her again, sought to hinder it, but not able to do it, a Saint (as they writ) stepped before her, to let him know that the adoration was done unto him, and not unto her; and then suddenly she retired to her solitary life, whereas she died religiously. They hold her for a great Saint, and pray her to obtain pardon for them from heaven, where as they believe she is.  
They do also hold one for a Saint called Neoma, borne at Cochi, in the province of Oquiam. They say she was daughter to one of the chief of the country, and that refusing to be married, she fled into an Island right against Ingoa, whereas she died, having led a very austere life, and doing many fal●e miracles. They that travel by Sea, carry her Idol upon the poop of their ships, and call upon it commonly, offering sacrifices unto it.  
They use a kind of lot whenas they undertake any thing, after this manner: they have two little pieces of wood, made like unto two nutshells, round of the one side, and flat on the other, being tied together with a thread. These they cast before their Idols, but fi●st of all they speak unto their false gods with great ceremonies, and very mild words, entreating them to give them a good lot, promising (if it falls out well) to offer unto them meat, or some goodly ornament, or some other thing of price. When this is done, they cast these two pieces of wood, & if they chance to fall so as the flat is upward, or that the one is flat, and the other round, they hold it for a bad sign, and blame their Idols, railing at them, and calling them dogs, villains, infamous, and such like. Having poured forth these outrages, they begin to flatter them again, craving pardon for what was past, and promising them more presents if the lot falls out well: and then they proceed as they had done before. Whenas the thing which they demand is of importance, and the time long before the good lot comes, they go unto the Idols, cast them down, and tread them under their feet, or plunge them into the water, or else they bring them unto the fire, and suffer them to burn a little, and sometimes they beaten them, and whip them, until the two pieces of wood fall as they desire, that is to lay, the round upward. This lot succeeding as they desire, they s●ng certain songs and praises unto their Idols, offering unto them the head of a sodden dog, which they hold to be the most exquisite meat of all others. Of any thing which they offer, they always take away the tip of the beak, and the talons of birds, and the groin of the hog, with certain grains of Rice, besprinkling their offering with drops of wine, laying it in a platter upon the Altar, and they eat the rest in the same place, in the presence of their Idols.  
They use also another kind of lot, casting many little sticks into a vessel, upon every one of which there is a letter written: these being mingled well together, a young child puts his hand into the vessel, and draws out one, then looking what letter it hath, they take a book, and seeking out that leaf which gins with this letter, they interpret that which they found in this leaf, for that thing which moved them to make the lot.  
They have also this custom, to have recourse unto the devil whenas any affliction falls upon them. They call upon him after this manner: a man lies flat upon the ground, his face downwards, and another gins to read in a book, and to sing, than some of the assistants answer him, and the rest make a noise with little bells, and drums; then soon after, the man that lies upon the ground gins to make strange faces, and to use horrible gestures, which shows that the devil is already entered into his body. Then they demand of him whatsoever they desire to know, and he answers them often in a doubtful sense, and whenas the devil will not answer by words, they draw it from him by letters after this manner: They spread a read mantle upon the ground, and lay a certain quantity of Rice upon it scattered equally, then instantly they set a man upon it which cannot writ, with a staff in his hand, and the assistants begin to sing and sound, as in the other invocation whereof we have made mention: soon after, the devil enters into the body of him that holds the staff, and he gins to writ therewith upon the Rice, and the assistants copy the letters which he frames, then joining them altogether, they found the answer which they demand, but most commonly with a lie.  
They hold, that heaven, earth, and water, were joined together from the beginning, and that a certain man which is in heaven, called Tayn, by his great knowledge divided the earth from heaven, and that heaven remained in the upper part, the earth descending down, according to her natural inclination. This Tayn created a man of nothing, whom they call Panson, and a woman named Pansona. This Panson, by the power which Tayn gave him, did also created another man of nothing, which was called Tanhom, with thirteen others, all brethren. Tanhom was a man of great knowledge, so as he gave names to all things created, and understood, by the doctrine of Tayn, the virtue of all things, and the means to apply them to the body to our all diseases. This Tanhom, and his brethren, had many children, namely, Teyencom the greatest had twelve, and the eldest of all called Tuhucom had nine, and the rest also had many. They believe that the rac●ss of these men have continued ninety thousand years, and that at the end of this term all men failed, for that Tayn would be revenged of some wrong they had done him, and also envying for that besides his instructions they understood in a manner as much as himself, and did not acknowledge him for superior, as they had promised when as he did inspi●e this knowledge into them. After this it happened that heaven fell, and suddenly Tayn came to raise it again and created another man upon earth called Lotzitza●, with two horns out of which came a sweet savour, whereby many men and women were borne. In the end this Lotzitzan vanished away, leaving many men and women in the world, from whom are issued all those that are now living. They say that the first that was borne of this Lotzitzan was called Azalan, who lived nine hundred years. Presently after his death heaven created a man called Atzion, making his mother called Lutin to be with child with the head of a lion which was in heaven. He was borne in the town of Truchin in the province of Canton, and lived eight hundred years. After him came Vsao, and then there were many people in the world who did eat nothing but raw things. This Vsao taught them to make little cottages with trees, to defend themselves from wild beasts which did annoyed them much, and he instructed them also how to make garments.  
After this came one called Huntzuy, who was the inventor of fire, and taught how they should make it, and after what manner they should roast and boil meat, and how they should cell and exchange one thing for another. They say that after him a certain woman called Hautzabon had a child whose name was Ocheutey, who invented many things, and ordained marriages. They affirm that he came miraculously from heaven for the good of the earth, for that his mother going upon the way found the track of a man, and setting her foot thereon was environed with lightning which came from heaven, and was instantly conceived with child. This Ocheutey had a son called Ezomlon who invented physic, astrology, and divination, and taught them how to manure the land. They report that he did eat seven kinds of gonimous herbs, which did him no harm, and that he lived four hundred years. He had a son called Vitey, who reduced Chinato a realm. And this is all they believe of the creation and progress of the world.  
They do all in general believe the immortality of the soul, and in like manner the reward or punishment it must have in another life, according to the corks it hath done in the company of the body. They hold also that the soul hath had her beginning from heaven, which hath given her an immortal being, and that having lived according to the laws of the country, being in the body, and hath done no harm nor wrong to any man, it shall be taken up into heaven, where it shall live eternally in great joy, and become an Angel; and that soul which hath lived ●ll shall go in the company of devils into obscure prisons, where it shall suffer torments that shall never end. They confess that there is a place whereas the souls which shall be Angels, purge themselves from all the evil which hath polluted them whilst they were in mortal bodies; and that the good which the kinsfolks and friend's do, help much to advance this purgation.  
Whenas they will pray for the dead, one of them who is l●ke unto a priest or sacrificer, carries a little drum, and one of the novises a kind of clapper, and another a bell, and they make an altar whereon they set such as they hold for Saints and Advocates for the dead, and they instantly perfume them with Storax, Incense, and other sweet smells. After this they prepare five or six tables covered with much meat, for the dead, and for the Saints, and presently at the sound of the drum clapper & bells, they begin to sing certain canticles about the choir, and the young novises go often unto the altar to offer certain orisons written in paper. They spend in a manner the whole night in these ceremonies and such like, after which they all begin to eat the meat which is upon the tables.  
As for the common people, they believe that the souls which live ill before they go to hell (which place they think should not be settled until the world takes end) are sent for their misdeeds into the bodies of Bugles and other beasts; and they that have lived well into the bodies of kings and noblemen, whereas they remain in great joy.  
There are in all their towns and boroughs many places made like unto monasteries, whereas there are many men and women which live together in cloisters, like to the religious men in Europe.  
There are only four orders of religious people, whereof either hath a General, who remain commonly in the town of Suntien: this General is called Tri●on in their language, and provides a Provincial in every province, who visits all the convents, correcting all them that he finds have erred in their rule and manner of living. This Provincial doth also provide a man in every convent who is like unto a Prior or Guardian, whom all are bound to obey. The General holds the place which is given him during his life, unless they found he hath committed any errors for the which he deserves to be deprived. He is not chosen by the religious men in their Chapters, but the King or his Council names him. He goes attired in silk of the colour of his order, that is to say, in black, a pale colour, white, or brown, which be the four colours of these religions; and he never goes out of his lodging but in a chair of marble or of gold carried by four or six men attired in the same habit. The religious men beg in the streets, singing and making a noise with little clappers and certain other instruments. They have all their beards and heads shaven: they eat in common, and their ordinary habit is of serge. When they pray, they speak to heaven, which they hold to be God, and to one whom they call Sinquian, saying, that he invented this manner of life, and that he is a Saint.  
By the laws of the realm the eldest son of a family can be no religious man, and the reason is, for that the eldest son is bound to feed his father and mother in their old age. They offer both in the morning and evening to their idols incense, benjoin, the wood of aloes, and other things which smell well, with certain kinds of pastes that are very sweet. When they put any vessel to sea, these religious men go to do their sacrifices in the poop, whereas the Chinois have their Orators, and there they present paper painted with divers figures, the which they tear in pieces before their Idols, singing songs, and sounding their clappers, and then they do reverence unto the devil, and keep him painted in their ships, to the end that he may do them no harm. This being done they eat and drink their fills in the same place, and by this means they suppose that the ship is sancti●●ed, and that all that go in her shall have good fortune.    

¶ THE GENEALOGY OF THE KINGS OF CHINA.  
FOr that Vitey was he, who (as we have said) reduced China into a realm, we will begin with him and come unto the king that reigns at this day. Vitey was then the first king of China, and they report of him among other things that he was as high as seven measures of China, which is esteemed to be about four ells and two thirds. Moreover they say that he was six spans broad between the shoulders, and that he was as valiant in mind as great in body. He had a captain called Lincheon, who besides his valour and force was also exceeding wise; so as he made subject to king Vitey all that great continent of country, and made him ●earefull to all the world. They hold that this king invented the fashion of their garments, the dying of silks, and the making of ships, and in like manner the saw to cut wood. Above all, they say that he was a great architect, and that he made a great number of stately buildings. He invented also the muller of silk which they use in that country, and was the first which brought in the use to wear gold, pearl, and precious stones, and garments of cloth of gold, silver, and silk. He distributed all the inhabitants of his realm into cities, towns, and villages, and ordained all the trades and offices, commanding that no man should deal in any other trade but that of his father, without special leave from the king or the governors of the realm. He did put all that were of one trade into a street by themselves, and he ordained also that no woman should live idly, but labour either in her husband's trade, or at the lest spin or work with the needle, and this law was so general, as it was observed by his own wife.  
This king had four wives, by whom he had five and twenty children, and he reigned one hundred years: from whom, unto the king that made the great wall, there were one hundred and sixteen kings, all of the line of this Vitey, who reigned two th●usand two hundred fifty seven years. I will forbear to name them, lest I should be two tedious, but I will rest satisfied to set them down only which seem necessary, to declare the succession ●f the crown, since the one hundred and sixt●ene kings, whereof we have made mention, unto him that reigns at this present.  
The last king of the race of Vitey was called Tzintzon, and this was he that made that great wall, seeing himself assailed in many places by the Tartarians. In the end (for that in this work there died great numbers of men) he grew hateful to all his subjects, so as they conspired to kill him, and did at the length perfect it, having ragined forty years; in like manner they did with a son of his, called Agntzi, who was heir to the realm. This Tzintzon being dead, and his son also, they took one for their king who was called Anchosau, a man of great spirit, and full of valour, who reigned twelve years.  
Futey, his son, succeeded him, who reigned seven years, and died young.  
After his death, his mother (who was of the blood royal) came to reign, and governed the realm to the content of all men for the space of eighteen years: and for that she had no heirs male, a son which her husband Anchosau had by another wife succeeded h●r. This king reigned three and twenty years, and had for successor  
Cuntey, his son, who reigned sixteen years, and eight months.  
Huntey, son to Cuntey reigned after him two and fifty years, and left for his successor  
Chantey, his son, who reigned thirteen years.  
Ochantey, his son, succeeded him, & reigned five & twenty years, & three months.  
Cantey, son to Ochantey, reigned sixteen years, and two months.  
Tzentzey, his son, ra●gned six and twenty years, and four months.  
Anthey, son to Tzentzey, reigned but six years.  
Pintatey, son to Anthey, reigned five years.  
Tz●ntzumy, brother to Pintatey, succeeded him, for that he was not married when he died: and he reigned only three years, and seven months.  
Huyhannon, brother also to the two others, succeeded him, and reigned six years.  
Cubum, son to Huyhannon, reigned two and thirty years.  
Benthey, son to Cubum, reigned two and thirty years.  
Vnthey, his son, reigned thirteen years.  
Othey succeeded him, and reigned seventeen years, and five months.  
Yanthey, son to Othey, reigned but eight months.  
Antey, his son, held the crown nineteen years.  
Tantey, his son, died soon after his father, having swayed the sceptre but three months.  
Chitey, his brother, reigned but a year.  
Quantey, their brother, succeeded them, and was king one and twenty years.  
Linthey, his son, reigned two and twenty years.  
Yanthey, son to Linthey, reigned one and thirty years. He was a man of a weak capacity, so as his subjects hated him; and a nephew of his, called Laupy, rebelled against him, being assisted by two Knights that were brethren, valiant men, who were then in Court, whereof the one was called Quathey, and the othey Trunthey, who sought to make Laupy King. The uncle knew it, but he was so faint hearted, and ill assisted, as he neither could nor durst prevent it: which was the cause of many factions within the realm, there rising four tyrants, whose names were Cincoan, Sosoc, Guansian, and Guanfer. Laupy made war against them, under a colour to favour and assist his uncle; and having continued the war for a time, in the end he made a peace with Cincoan, taking a daughter of his to wife, and presently made war against the other three tyrants, with the help of his father in law.  
This realm was then divided into three parts, whereof the one, and the chief, followed Laupy after the death of his uncle, and the other Sosoc, the third Cincoan, father in law to Laupy. And the realm continued thus for some time, until that  
Cuithey, son to Laupy, came to reign after his father; against whom a Tyrant, called Chimbutey, rebelled, but he slew him, and he was so valiant as he united the whole realm, having been divided one and forty years, he reigned afterwards alone 25 years.  
Fontey, his son, reigned after him seventeen years. And to be short, there were fifteen kings of this line, who reigned one hundred seventy six years.  
Quiontey was the last of these kings, against whom did rise the Tyrant Tzobu. Of this man's blood there were eight kings, who reigned sixty two years: Against the last, called Sutey, did rise one Cotey, of whose race there were five kings, who reigned four and twenty years.  
The last, called Othey, was slain by one Diana, and there were five kings of his line, who reigned one and thirty years: Against the last of this house, did rise one Tzuy, and there were three kings of his race, who reigned seven and thirty years.  
Tonco revolted against the last, who governed the realm well, there were one & twenty kings of his family, who reigned two hundred ninety four years.  
The last, being called Troncon, married one who had been his father's wife, a wonderful fair woman, whose name was Bausa, drawing her out of a monastery whereinto she had retired herself to be a religious woman. In the end, this wife caused him to be slain, and then she governed the realm alone forty years. Their Histories say, that this woman was wonderful dissolute, and that having abandoned herself to the noblemen of the realm, she married a man of base condition, that she might more freely follow her own appetites: but b●fore she married▪ she caused all the male children of her first husband to be slain, to the end a nephew of hers might succeed unto the crown. They of the realm, knowing her intention, and incensed at her base course of life, sent to seek out a son of her husbands, who (although he were a bastard) was by a common consent chosen king: his name was Tautzom, who caused severe justice to be done of this wicked woman. There were seven kings of his race, who reigned 120 years.  
The last was Coucham, against whom rebelled one called Diana, who seized upon the realm, and there were two kings of his line, who reigned eighteen years.  
Outon revolted against the last of these, and there were three kings of his house, who reigned but fifteen years.  
Outsim did rise against the last of these three, and left after him two successors of his line, who reigned only nine years, and three months.  
Tozo revolted against the last, and he, and his son, reigned but four years.  
Anchiu had war against the son of Tozo, and slew him, and then succeeded him in the realm: He and two others of his family reigned ten years.  
Zaitzon, of the line of Vitey the first king, revolted against the last of the race of Achiu, and flew him. There were seventeen kings of the descendants of this Zaitzon, who reigned all in peace for the space of three hundred and twenty years.  
The last of this line was called Tepim, against whom the great Cham of Tartary, called Vzou, invaded China, and made himself master thereof; so as nine Tartarian kings reigned there during ninety three years.  
Tzinzoum, the last of the nine, was so wicked, as he was the cause that the realm was reunited, and that all did secretly rise to make one called Hombu their king, a man of great valour, of the line of the ancient kings, who gathering together great forces, in the end expelled the Tartarians out of the realm.  
There have been twelve kings of the family of this Hombu, accounting him that reigns at this present: the eleven precedent reigned two hundred years. He that sways the sceptre at this day, is called Bonog, and succeeded to the crown by the death of his elder brother, who died with the fall of a horse. They hold him to be a man of a good disposition, full of judgement, and a great justicer. He is married to a cousin of his own, and hath a son by her.     


❧ A DISCOURSE OF THE KING OF JAPON.  

The Contents.  
THe length, breadth, greatness, and confines of japon, divided into three members; and how many realms or seigneuries either of them contains. 2. Description of the ancient Estate of this country governed at that time by one prince alone called Vo, or Dair. 3. Of Meaco the chief town of japon: Os●ac●●e, Bungo, and other famous cities, their situation, and greatness. 4. Bounty of the air of this realm, abounding in rice, metals, gold, high cedars which are exceeding big; and in beasts and foul. Of two admirable mountains, whereof one passeth the clouds, and the other burns continually, and vomits forth flames of fire. 5. Of the subtlety of wit, and disposition of body of the japonois: the manner of their hair, of their meat, drink, and sleep: the colour of their faces, their language, and the letters wherewith they writ: their arms, and their Academy to instruct youth. 6. Their wealth in the traffic of rice, pearls, gold, and precious stones. 7. Of the king's revenue. 8. Of the sea forces, and government of this Estate; and first of the frequent change of princes, and governors of provinces. 9 Of the three principal magistrates, Zazo, Vco, Cubacama, and of the five orders into which the people are divided. 10. Of the punishment of offenders. 11. Of the impiety of the japanois, denying the providencie of God, and the immortality of the soul: and of their priests called Bonzes, divided into eleven different sects. 12. Of their temples, and of their gods Fotoques and Cames; and the ordinary apparition of the devil in divers forms: and what policy he useth to make himself to be worshipped. 13. Their ceremonies in funeral pomps. 14. Of the jesuits of japon, and the conversion of the people to the Christian faith by Xavier and others of that company.   

IApon or japan, in old time called Chrise, and according to Marcus Paulus Zipangry, is a body composed of many Islands, separated by small gulfs, straits, and turnings of the sea, & this mass of islands extends from the one and thirtieth degree of altitude unto the nine and thirtieth. The length of all this country is near two hundred leagues: the breadth is not equal, for in some places it is not above ten leagues, and at the most thirty. These Islands towards the East look to New Spain, upon the North to the Tartarians and other unknown and savage people; on the West lies China, and to the South certain unknown lands, with a great space of sea betwixt them. They contain sixty and six petty realms, and are divided into three principal members, whereof the first and called chief japon, contains fifty three seigneuries or realms; the mightiest of them are those of Meaco and Amagunce. The king of Meaco hath under him four and twenty or six and twenty realms; and he of Amagunce twelve or thirteen: the second member is called Ximo, and contains nine realms, whereof the chief are those of Bungo and Figen: the third member is that of Xicoum, which contains four realms or seigneuries.  
The most famous of all these principalities is that of Coquina, in which stands the famous town of Meaco. In former times all japon was subject to one prince, who was called Vo or Dair, until that one of these Monarches abandoning himself too much to his delights, was despised by the governors of his provinces, and especially by the Cubes, who were the two chief families (whereof the one ruined the other) so as these two seized upon what they could and dispossessed the Dair. Ambition did so puff them up, as sometimes one, sometimes another revolting, they seized upon some parts of the country, under the name of jacatis, which is to lay, kings. Yet they left unto the Dair the name of universal Lord of japon, but without any jurisdiction, power, or command; and it is with great difficulty that the princes (who have their Estates near unto Meaco) furnish him with victuals and apparel; so as this Dair is no more but the shadow of the ancient Monarch of japon. But in stead of the Dair, for these five hundred years, he that hath made himself lord of Coquina, and is called prince of Tenze (in which are five realms about the city of Meaco) styles himself sovereign monarch of japon; such as were Nubunanga, and after him Faxiba, one of his chief captains, who subdued at the lest fifty realms, and such is Taicosama or Taico at this day.  
The chief city of japon is Meaco, which hath had in circuit one and twenty miles; but now it is less by a third part, by reason of their civil wars. There the sovereign magistrates of japon remain, consisting of three men. Next is the town of Ossacaye, the which is great and powerful, and as some hold the richest of the East. There are many merchants that live in this town, whereof those that have but indifferent estates, are at the lest worth thirty thousand crowns, and they of the richer sort possess incredible sums. Bongo is the chief town of that province, which they call Combodassi. All princes are interred in this town, or at the lest if they lay their bodies in any other place, they sand one of their teeth thither.  
They do also esteem in these Islands the town of Fiongo eighteen leagues from Meaco. This town was ruined for the most part, in the time of Nobunanga, and in the year 1596, a great part was overthrown with an Earthquake, and soon aftter it was burnt as some hold opinion. They do also place Amangasaquy, a town which is fair by situation, five leagues from the sea, and right against Sacaia, and in like manner those of Vosuquin, Funay, Tozam, and many others.  

¶ The Quality.  
THe air of this country is very healthful, although it be much subject to cold and snow, being hilly and barren. They gather rice in September, and in some places wheat in the month of May. The inhabitants draw divers metals out of the earth, and Marcus Paulus the Venetian saith, that in this country there is such abundance of gold, as in his time the king's palace was covered with plates of gold, as we may see the Churches in France and other countries covered with lead. There are many trees like unto ours, and in some places the cedars are so tall and great, as carpenters make pillars for their temples, and masts for any ship whatsoever. Their meadows and fields are full of troops of oxen and horses, yea and in their forests they have wolves, hares, wild boars, and stags: there are also many wild ducks, turtle-doves, quails, and hens. They have neither butter, nor oil made of olives, but only such as they draw from whales. They have tame beasts in these country, like unto ours. Among all these mountains which are in these Islands, there are two of special note, whereof the one doth pass the clouds, and is called Figenoiama: the other burns continually and casts forth flames.   

¶ The Manners.  
THe japonois are for the most part subtle, cunning, witty, of good understanding apt, to learn, and have good memories. They reproach no man for his poverty, and they detest slandering, theft, swearing, & all kinds of game of hazard. They hold it for a glory to be of a goodly stature. They are for the most part vigorous and strong, and able to bear arms until they be sixty years old. They have thin beards, and as for their hair some of them pull them away b●fore, and others behind, and the peasants and meaner sort of people have half the head bald. The nobility and gentry leave few hairs behind, and if any one toucheth them that are jest, they hold it for a great offence. They cover the planchers of their chamber with mats puffed up like unto mattresses, and very clean. They are as neat as the Chinois; using two little sticks when they eat, so artificially, as they suffer nothing to fall, neither have they any need of napkins to wipe their fingers.  
They feed and ●eepe upon these mats, and put off their shoes when they go to meat, lest they should pollute them. The poorer sort, especially upon the Sea coast, live of herbs, rice, and fish; but the rich make great chee●e, and treat themselves delicately: whenas they feast any one, they change the table, having no cloth upon it, and it is of Cedar, or Pine tree, about a foot high. Their comfitures, or sweet meats, are made in the form of a Pyramid, and covered with gold, and they have little branches of Cypress to give them grace. Oftentimes the fowls which they bring unto the table have their bills and feet gilded. They are rather of an olive colour than white. They do patiently endure any pain, and are desirous of glory. They can endure no wrong, but will dissemble the desire of revenge; and therefore they are held to be treacherous. There are some among them which smother their children as they are borne, to avoid the pain of breeding them up. They have but one language, but so mingled with divers words, as it seems to be many languages rather than one: Their characters do not only signify letters, but whole words. Their arms are harquebusses, swords, dagger's, and other light weapons. They go most commonly bareheaded; and whenas they mourn they wear white. They have for a delicious drink, water mixed with a certain precious powder, which they call Chie: some also drink wine, which they buy from strangers. They love venison much better than the flesh of tame beasts. They have a School or Academy in the town of Banoum, whereas the Bonzes teach: There is also, among others, a Seminary of jesuits at Bungo, whereas the japonois teach the Portugals; and they of Europe, them of japon. They use printing like unto us.   

¶ The Riches.  
THey have great traffic of many things at japon, for that besides the Rice which they cell to strangers, and wherewith they fraught many ships, they found also great store of pearl, which are round and great, but red, yet as much, or more, esteemed than the white. There is also abundance of gold, and precious stones; so as these two things make this realm rich.  
As for the king, besides the duty which the other kings own him, to give him presents, & to serve him both in war and peace, he hath two millions of gold for his yearly rent, of Rice, which is gathered out of the possessions which he hath reserved to himself; whereby we may conjecture what the rest of his revenues may amount unto, whereof there hath been no computation yet.   

¶ The Forces, and Government.  
WE may also easily conjecture what the forces of this prince are, for that Faxiba, who governed before him that reigns at this present, had a design, after that he had made himself master of all japon, whereas he conquered 50 realms, & had a great army to pass to the conquest of China; and to this end, he caused wood to be cut for 2000 vessels to pass his army. Moreover, the japonois are exceeding valiant; so as a small troop of them will defeat a good army of the Chinois.  
The government of japon differs much from that of our countries of Europe, for that the power and greatness of this prince doth not consist in the ordinary revenues, or in the love of this people, but in authority and command: for that as soon as he hath gotten any Provinces or States, he divides them to his confident friends, upon condition, that they shall serve him at their own charge, as well in peace as war, with a certain number of men. They distribute their Estates to their confident friends, to have them more ready to do them service; so as all the lands of japon, as well public as private, depend upon few persons, and these few of one alone, which is the lord of Tenze, who gives and takes away in an instant what he pleaseth: he doth raise, and cast down; enrich, and impoverish princes: and whenas he takes an Estate from any one, they change all the nobility and soldiers of that country, there remaining none but artisans and labouring men. This form of government is the cause of perpetual revolutions; first, for that the Dair (who although he hath not any power nor command is notwithstanding much esteemed among this people) makes the lords of Tenze, and other princes, to seem all tyrants, usurpers of another man's right, destroyers of the Monarchy, and enemies to the greatness of japon; the which takes from them the respect and love of the people: Hence it grows that they easily take arms, and that one hopes to raise himself easily by the ruin of his companion.  
Moreover, for that the princes change daily, they cannot be respected by the people as their natural lords, and these princes, having no assurance of the continuance of their authority, do not effect one estate more than another: but hoping to attain a better with the like facility they got the first, they put it in hazard: and sometimes alone, sometimes in the company of others, they pursue divers enterprises, and by this means hold all these Islands in perpetual war. But Faxiba, for that he would be more absolute, did often use to transport the princes from one country to another, to the end the lords being expelled out of their commands, and placed amongst strange subjects, they should remain weak, and without means to reuoult against him: and to the end they should be less able to rebel, he divided the Realms and Estates; so as every lord had no great Estate, and for that this country was narrow, they wanted no subject of discords and war.  
Moreover, he would that all these changes, as well they that were best preferred, as others that had the worst portions, should go and do him reverence and homage, and give him rich presents yearly: by means whereof he drew unto himself the greatest part of the riches of japon. Moreover, he employed the people in the building of divers admirable Palaces, stately Churches, good Forts, and fair Towns; and he had at his subjects charge above one hundred thousand workmen daily who were all employed in these works. He had a design in the building of a Temple ro employ all the iron of japon, for he commanded that all the merchants and common people should bring their arms into a certain place, to be employed in the building of this Temple; so as at one instant he disarmed the people, and did works that were admirable.  
Leaving this discourse, I desire to make known by what people this realm is governed: first of all, there are three men at Meaco, which are the chief magistrates of all this Estate. They have sovereign authority, and dispose of all things. The first (who is as it were the chief bishop, and is called ZaZo) hath the charge of sacred things among them: the second, called Vco, hath the command of dignities and honours: the third, whose name is Cubacama, disposeth of peace and war.  
This people is divided into five orders, whereof of the first is of those that have any authority or command: and these are all called Tones by a common name; and yet there are other degrees of dignity amongst them, as amongst us, those of Kings, Dukes, Marquises, and Earls: the other order is of those who have the charge of sacrifices, and divine service, & these have their heads and chins shaven, making profession to live without women, and they are divided into many sects: but they are all by one general name called Bonzes: the third is of Bourgesses, and the rest of the nobility: the fourth contains Artisans and Seafaring men: and the last is of Labourers.  
All offenders are punished with death, or at the lest they are banished, how favourable soever the judges be. They are in a manner all put to death by the sword: yet in some places when they take any thieves, their manner is to lead them up and down in a cart, to the end all the world may see them, and then to hung them.   

¶ The Religion.  
THe people of japon are given to all sorts of impiety, and hold such strange opinions as no man of judgement but would be amazed. They have the Bonzes for the priests and doctors of their law, and these are divided into eleven different and contrary sects, yet they all agreed in denying the providence of God, and the immortality of the soul. But they do not communicate the secrets of their impiety but to noble men, for that they treat with the common people of the pains of hell, and of the other life. They have stately lodgings, and live for the most part in common. They may not marry no more than the religious women, who go diversly appareled. They have many universities, whereof the most famous is that of Frenojama, nine miles from the town of Meaco. Some eight hundred years since a king of japon did build in this place three thousand and eight hundred temples, with their convents of Bonzes dispersed in divers valleys, and to the end they might with more ease attend their studies, he built to villages at the foot of the mountain of Frenojama, which should furnish them with all things necessary. This university grew to be in such reputation, as they gave not the chief command thereof but to the king's son, or his nearest kinsmen, for that the Bonzes of this place did enjoy in a manner a third part of the revenues of the realm of Vome, and governed that of Meaco with authority. After this (matters beginning to decline) all these temples were reduced to eight hundred, and the Bonzes left their studies to follow arms: so as in the year 1535, after many murders and thefts, they entered into the town of Meaco, and burned the greatest part. Afterwards the Bonzes having done some displeasure to Nobunanga in the year 1551, he assailed their mountain, slew many of them; and ruined four hundred temples.  
The gods most esteemed in japon, are the Fotoques and the Cames, whereof the first were put in the number of the gods, by reason of their great doctrine and austereness of life: the second for their goodly exploits and singular inventions. These were for the most part Priests and Bonzes: these, princes and great personages; by reason whereof they demand of the Fotoques goods of the other world, and of the Cam●s earthly blessings. But the idolatry of the japonois states not there, for that some adore the Sun and the Stars; others worship the heavens, and some others give a divinity to stags and wild beasts. Near to Meaco, there is a temple dedicated to one whom they hold to be the god of learning and knowledge. The devil useth great art, and force to 'cause himself to be adored by these miserable wretches in the form of divers beasts. He enters into the bodies of these infidels and torments them cruelly; and whenas they demand what he is, he answers that he is the king of oxen, or some other beast, threatening that he will not departed from thence unless they build him a temple; and if they keep not promise' with him he returns and afflicts the patiented until that all be accomplished. They have also the god of hell with a fearful aspect, having near unto him two spirits or little devils, the one of which writes the sins of men, and the other reads them. The walls of the temple are all covered with figures of the pains which the devils inflict upon the damned. The devil showeth himself unto these people after divers manners, and he gues them to understand that all good and bad success depends of him according to the honour which they do him. He was accustomed to present himself in one place after this manner. He that was very desirous of good hap in the other life, went up unto a hill where he attended until the devil had showed himself unto him: after this the spirit appeared unto him in certain solitary places until he had cast him down some precipice where he died. This deceit was discovered by a young man after this sort: A young man not able to retire his father from this superstition, resolved to follow him secretly with his bow in his hand, to see the success. The devil came in a certain shining resemblance, and whilst that the old man lying prostrate on the ground did worship him, the son bent his bow suddenly and shot a fox through in steed of the devil. After this, following the tract and blood of this fox, he came unto the precipice whereof we have spoken, where he found many bones of dead men. By this means he freed his father from death, and the rest from deceit. We must add unto this folly, that of the funeral of the dead which they perform with great pomp and ceremony. For the japonois who are desirous of honour bestow infinite cost upon the funerals of the dead, and the Bonzes gather together much wealth by this means. They whose heirs cannot defray this charge are buried secretly in the night, or else they cast them upon the dunghill. They which are most devoted to Amid, which is one of their chief gods, when as they are weary of living any longer, they put themselves into a cave which is so close as it hath no breathing place but by a little reed or cane: there they remain without meat, still calling upon Amid until death. In places near the sea they go of themselves to death after this manner: They gather together much silver by begging, and having put it into their scrips or wallets, they preach publicly unto the people, and declare that they have an intent to pass unto another life to see Amid: the which is commended of all men, who are amazed to see so great devotion. Then they provide a scythe to cut up the brambles and bushes which are in the way, after which they enter into a new bark, having their necks, arms, backs, thighs, and feet laden with flint stones: then when they are in full sea, they leap into the water where they are drowned. Besides the Fotoques, Cames, and Amid, they do worship the god Xaque, which is one of their principal Dietles. There is a sect among them called jensuans, who believe nothing but what they see or touch.  
There are among these Idolaters a good number of Christians, which are more zealous than we; so as notwithstanding that the kings of Tenze had put many of them to death, and caused them to endure great torments and afflictions; yet there are many which would never abandon the religion which they had embraced. Father Xavier and Turian, jesuits, have laboured long there & and converted many souls, for that in Amanguce they did number two thousand Christians in the year 1556, and at Funie as many. In the year 1559, the number of Neophites or new Convertites was one hundred and thirty at Firande. In the year 1562, two that were brothers in law to to the king of Cangoxima were baptized with their wives. In the year 1563, Sumitancle king of Omure made himself a Christian, and was called Bartholomew; then the prince of Simabara did the like; and in the country of Imori they baptised five thousand persons. Within the circuit of fifty miles about Meaco, they built fifty Churches, whereof the chief were at Imori, Ay, Tochi, Save, and Cabinoqui, a town in the country of Arima, whereas the jesuits had a house and four hundred and fifty Neophites, in the year 1563. In the mean time the faith extended in self in the little Island of Amacuse in Fondo, and at Xiqui, a castle near to Amacuse. In the year 1569, the king of Bongo become a Christian, and was called Francis, and the king of Arima was baptized and called Protaise; so as at that time there were in those countries about one hundred and forty thousand Christians, and above two hundred Churches. There were one hundred and thirteen jesuits, whereof there were forty priests, and seventy and three laymen, of the which there were forty and seven of japon, and the rest of Europe. There were also converted afterwards forty thousand of the subjects of Just and Vacandono. In the year 1587., there were converted about six thousand persons, and the year following almost as many. The king of Bugen, and the successor of the realms of Cicungo and Cicuge, and the lords of the Islands of Ojan, Gomotto, Genzure, and Xiqui (which is a part of the island of Amacuse) did the like. This was the estate of the Christian religion at japon, unto the year 1590. Since, there have been great wars, and great persecutions against the Christians, even under Taicosama, who reigns at this present: yet the faith doth still flourish and extends itself in many places.      


❧ A DISCOURSE OF THE ESTATE OF THE KING OF BRAMA, OR OF PEGV.  

The Contents.  
1. NOtable conquests made by a Lieutenant of Pegu, being revolted against his lord. 2. Whence it grows that they levy so easily in those countries of Africa, and in the East, such huge armies: and what means they have to entertain them. 3. An army of twelve hundred thousand and Aethiopians put to rout by Paul Dias, a Captain of Portugal. 4. What realms the king of Pegu doth at this day enjoy: The situation and greatness of this State, and the chief Ports. 5. Description of the realm of Siam; the situation and circuit, with the provinces and chief towns. 6. Of Muantay. 7. Of Camboie. 8. Of Cam●●e, Syncampure, Quedoe, ave, and Verme. 9 Pegu abounding in Rice, little Horses, Elephants, Parrots, Civet Cats, Canes as big as a hogshead, Rhubies, Gum, Pepper, Benjamin, Musk, Aloes, Gold, Tigers, and Lions. 10. The disposition of them of Pegu, given to women, and delights, to music, and the sciences. 11. Barbarous manners of the inhabitants of Camboye, whereas the women cast themselves into their husband's funeral fire, and the noblemen into that of their prince. 12. Garments of cotton serving them of Ta●massery for arms; their targuets of the ●arkess of trees, their drink of water with sugar, and their beds of cotton. 13. Solemn funerals of sacrificers, and their ceremonies. 14. Their richeses in the traffic of Rice, Horses, Elephants, Gold, Silver, Gum, Musk, Precious stones, Butter, Oil, and Pepper. 15. Of the King's g●●● consisting of 6000 men, and 30000 Elephants: Of the Timars, and the good number of s●●ldierss which are in the realm of Pegu. 16. Of the lands of that country, held all in fee of the King for life, and not in perpetuity; and of the punishments ordained for murderers, and debttors. 17. Of the religion of this country, and what their belief is of the Divinity: Of the two spirits which they attribute to man: Of the image of the father of men, fifty paces long, set up in their Temples among others; their priests, and sacrifices. 18. What opinion they hold of the creation and continuance of the world: what gods they worship, and of the condition and place of souls when they are separated from the body. 19 Of the convents of their Priests, having their heads and beards shaven, some having rents, and others living upon alms.   

BEfore we enter into this discourse, you must understand that some realms of the Brames, or Eracmanes, did in former times obey the king of Pegu, along the river, and towards the lake of Chyamay, where he kept his lieutenants. About sixty years since, a lieutenant which he had in the realm of Tangut, relying upon the men which followed him, and in the authority which he had gotten by his deeds of arms, revolted against this king, and took t●is ●ealme from him, kill the chief men, and taking also the towns and realms of Prom, Melintay, Calam, Bacam, Myrandu, and Avarice, countries inhabited by the Brames, which tend towards the North, and they have in length above one hundred and 〈◊〉 leagues.  
He attempted also to make himself master of Siam, and came in view of Odie the chief town of the realm of Muantay; but he prevailed little. He went to this enterprise with three hundred thousand men, and spent 3 months to make his way through craggy mountains, great forests, & inaccessible places, where he lost one hundred and twenty thousand men, and carried away two hundred thousand of the country of Siam, prisoners. After his return, having recovered his former estate, he assailed the realm of Pegu, and conquered it: after which, in the year of our Redemption 1567., he returned to the enterprise of Siam, & vanquished the king, who killed himself with poison: but his children were prisoners; so as he conquered a good part of this realm. He, with his successors, is called by our modern writers, king of Brama, or (according unto some others) of Barm, for that his greatness began by the conquest of the countries of the Brames. But the Portugals, giving him the name of the most noble and best known part of his conquests, call him King of Pegu. He hath since attempted often to make himself master of the town of Odie, and came to this enterprise with a million of men. And to the end it may not seem fabulous (for that we have written the like in other places) it shall not be from the purpose to show the reason why, in those quarters, and in some others, they draw to field such great armies.  
I say then first, that they make war either upon the frontiers, or in countries far off, and that he which hath not great revenues, and store of treasure, shall never be able to continued a war long, nor with great armies: for as the members of man's body cannot move, nor continued their motion without synews; so armies cannot be raised, nor led, where need requires, nor yet kept together at any enterprise, without ready money; which doth entertain them, and refresh them in due season, and which draws after them armies, munition, victuals, and other things necessary for the life of man, and the managing of armies. And for that the revenues of princes (as also, the means of subjects from whence they are drawn) are limited; and that if for a year or two be draws much money out of his country, he will suddenly grow poor, and be soon exhausted of gold and silver; so as a war cannot be undertaken far off, nor continued long, unless it be by such princes as have great treasures in store, or at the lest mines that fail not: being certain that treasures, how great soever, would soon have and end; forasmuch as that which is gathered together in time of peace by degrees, is suddenly spent in time of war, so as one year consumes many. Wherefore a Portugal Captain said with reason to D. Sebastian king of Portugal, whenas he consulted upon the enterprise of Barbary, that he had need of three torrents for this war, the one of victuals, the other of men, and the third of money; and another said, that to make war he must have money without end. But if all war require a great charge, that which is made a far off demands as it were an infinite treasure.  
The great Turk hath made trial hereof in the war of Persia, whereas so powerful a prince hath consumed his treasure in such sort, as he was forced to embase his gold and silver, and to make the price double, suffering falsehood in his coins, with a thousand such like things, for the which the janissaries have often mutined, and run like mad m●n up and down the city of Constantinople, burning and spoiling a great part. And without doubt money is so necessary a thing for a prince that undertakes any war, as I●hn jaques Tri●●lce, a very famous Captain, whenas one demanded of him what things were necessary for the war, said, That he must have always three things ready, the first was money, the second money, and the third money. That which I say, must be understood when a prince draws the charges of the war from his own countries, for that sometimes it happens that an army entertains itself as it marcheth by her own conquests, and that the pursuit of an enterprise gives force and means to continued it: so the Huns, Vandals, Goths, and Arabians, Alexander the Great, and in the time of our grandfathers, great Tamburlaine entertained very great armies for a long time out of their countries, for that entering into provinces whereas they scarc● found any one that made head against them, they sact towns and countries, and entertained themselves with the spoils. The like hath happened to the Portugals at the East Indies, and to the Castillians at the West, and more to these than to the others; for that there was never nation, which without any expense of their own hath made so great conquests as the Spaniards have done both in New Spain and Perou. But this is not so easy now as in former times, neither can it be so well practised in Europe, as in Asia and Africa, by reason of the great number of sorts, able to stay a mighty enemy many months, yea years, and in the end to tyre him; whereof the Turks made trial at Zighet, a little castle in Hongarie, which Solyman came to besiege in the year 1566, with three hundred and fifty thousand men, and in the end took it, but with such loss of his men, as of so great an army he carried not back a third part: and the Portugals, who in the beginning of the enterprise of the Indies, made famous conquests with few men, and in a short time, could not pass on, since that those people have been furnished with artillery and engenners, and that they have built forts. The like hath happened to the Spaniards at the New World, for that since their first victories, they have found in New Spain the Chichimeques, and at Perou the Pilcossons, Cirguans, and Cuques, and for these many years they could never get a foot of ground in the valley of Arauca, and of Tucapell in the country of Chile, whereas those people (seeing that the Spaniards died being wounded with their arrows, and other arms) did not esteem them immortal and the children of heaven, as they had done before; and by experience and practise they did no more f●●re their horses nor their harquebusses.  
But if they make not war far from their own countries, it is no difficult thing to raise great armies in a short time: and to leave all ancient examples, we read that they of Gant in Flaunders have sometimes opposed themselves against the power of the French king with four score thousand fight men, for that their country was good and well peopled, and the war being upon their frontiers, or within their province, every man did 〈◊〉 unto it with provision to feed them certain days. But they could not continued long in this estate, for that both provision and money did fail them, and they were forced to r●●●ne some to the plongh, and others to their shops, from whence they had their main●●●ce. In like manner the Scottish men, who for want of silver have never performed any enterprise of importance out of the Island, in the necessities of their countries have 〈◊〉 drawn together a great number of men in an instant, and have therewith assailed 〈◊〉 enemies, or defended their frontiers, as the Romans did, who for the space of some years whilst they fought against the people that were neighbours to Rome, made war at their charge: for they went forth being furnished with victuals for a day or two, and ended the war by combat in few hours; but the tediousness of the enterprise of Veies forced the Senate to give pay unto soldiers. But it is much more easy in Africa and in the East, than in Europe, to levy armies for near enterprises, without any great charge; and the reasons are many: First for that these countries do universally abound more in all things necessary for the life of man: secondly, the Southern people, and those of the East content themselves for the most part with less than we; they are sparing in their eating and drinking, and more simple; for that they of Europe do not only consume in their diet and drink that which would suffice to maintain them, but also to arm them against the cold: whereas the others desire only nourishment without daintiness. W●●e which among us is of greater charge than bread, is not in use among them, & their waters are much better than ours. The art of cookery is not so curious as with us, and they are not so careful to give any delicate taste unto their meats. The Turks make their 〈◊〉 with rice and mutton, and the garments of them of the East are of much less cha●ge than ours. They go half naked to the wars, and cover nothing but their privy parts; so as they have not so many artisans and tradesmen as we have: and their whole ch●●ge for the most part is nothing but a piece of bumbasin, which covers them from the ●●●ell unto the knee.  
It appears then by these reasons that they may with more ease entertain one hund●●d thousand soldiers, than we in Europe can do forty thousand. We must add hereunto that the carriage of ordnance, munition, and other things thereunto belonging is of an inestimable charge, whereof most of the nations of the East are exempt, especially such as have not had to deal with Arabians and Portugals, and which live in the heart of the country far from the sea. It is also a thing of no small consideration, that this people go unto the wars without any defensive arms, as corslets, headpieces, shirts of mail, and such like, wherein we spend much; and moreover they are not carried from place to place without charge, wherein we differ much from the Romans, who carried their own arms whenas they went to the war; and many times victuals also for tenor twelve days.  
These nations having such advantages of the bounty of the air, and of the facility to feed, cloth, and arm themselves, it is easy for them at need to draw far greater armies together than we can do, who have need of many things which are unknown to them. Wherefore we read of very great effects done by armies of Assyrians, and of Aethiopians, of Belus, Ninus, Semiramis, of Cambyses, of Cyrus, of Darius, and of Sesostris, and of latter times by the Arabians, Tartarians, and Mogores: but to omit far fetched examples, yea to purchase credit of things past, by the success of things present, that which happened in Angola in the year 1584. is very famous.  
Angola is a rich province in the West part of Aethiopia, near to the realm of Congo. Paul Diaz a Portugal Captain encountered in this country the second day of February an army of 1200 thousand Aethiopians, which the king of Angola opposed against him, yet he did break them and put them to flight. It is true that great armies last little, and are more like to torrents than rivers: for that they may be well drawn together, but not entertained any longer than that doth last which they carry with them: so as they are dispersed in few days, and do soon abandon the enterprise; for that they carry nothing that may draw after them merchants and victuallers with things necessary for the maintenance of life, or for the use of war. Moreover, to supply the necessities of a million of soldiers, they must have another million of men, carts, beasts of burden, horseboyes, merchants, and victuallers to follow them, and whole rivers will not be able to furnish such a multitude with water, nor the fields with corn; so as it must of necessity ruin itself and come to nothing. These kings of the East which levied extraordinary armies, and led them into far countries, knowing the truth of what we have spoken, made first of all great provision of money, victuals, munition, and all other things necessary. Among others Xerxes who drew to field the greatest army that was ever written of, made his preparation seven years before.  
But to return to the king of Brama, of late years he took the ports of Martabana and Tarnasser, then turning his armies sometimes towards the North, and sometimes to the West, he annoyed the princes of Caor and Tipure, and made himself master of the realm of Macin, and Aracan, having led to this enterprise three hundred thousand men, and forty thousand Elephants.  
This king possesseth at this day the realms of Pegu, Tangu, Prom, Melintay, Calam, Bacam, Mirandu, ave, and Brama, which lie towards the North, than the realms of Siam, and the ports of Martabana, and Tarnasser, and also the realms of Aracan and Macin. The realm of Pegu lies in form of a half Moon, betwixt the mountains inhabited by the Brames and jangomes, and extends along the sea from the town of Rei which stands upon the coast in the fourteenth degree and one third, unto Sedoc, which is in the seventeenth degree also upon the coast, the space of ninety leagues, and contains almost as much in breadth within the country. Others say that the realm of Pegu runs three hundred miles upon the shore near to the Western bank of the gulf of Bengala, and they take this space from the town of Tavay unto the Cape of Nigraes'. The river of Pegu runs through the midst of the country, and gives her name unto the whole realm. The chief ports are Pegu upon the river of the same name, Tavay, Martabana, and Losmin.  
The realm of Siam, which they also call of Sorneo is very great, and extends as well upon the East part as West, unto the sea. It lies betwixt the country of Couchinchina, and the realm of Term, in regard of that which lies within the land; and as for the coast, it extends from the town of Campae unto that of Tavay, and this makes about five hundred leagues. It is true, that the Moors and Arabians have usurped almost two hundred, and hold the towns of Patane, Paam, jor, and Pere; and the Portugals h●●e seized upon the towns of Malaca. This realm comprehends certain particular kingdoms, that is to say, that of Siam, first called Chaumua, then that of Muantay (in which is the town of Odie) and those of Brame, Caipumo, Chaneram, Camboye, and Campae; and moreover, jangome, Curtay, and Lancaam, which three realms are inhabited by the Lays. The chief towns of all this realm are Siam, Odie, Cambaye, Campae, Sincapure, Malaca, and Quedoe.  
Siam is a very great town, and fit for traffic; standing upon the bank of the broad and deep river of Menam, in which there are great numbers of inhabitants, for that besides them which are borne in the country, they make an estimate of near thirty thousand families of merchants, which be moors. Odie, the chief town of the realm of ●●●antay, is greater than Siam, for that they number in it near four hundred thousand ●●●sess. This town is built after the manner of Venice, so as they may pass through ●●●tie street in boats, whereof they say there are two hundred thousand.  
Camboye stands upon the banks of the river of Menon, which coming out of China, before it dischargeth itself into the Indian Sea, receives many other rivers, & near 〈◊〉 the mouth makes a lake, which hath about two hundred miles in circuit. This town 〈◊〉 chief of the realm of Camboye.  
●ampae is a sea town which gives the name unto the whole country. That of Sinecure lies in the remotest Southern part of this country upon a cape, which some take 〈◊〉 great Promontory whereas Ptolomee sets the town of Zabe; but Magni thinks ●● father Ptolomees Palure, from whence they go that will pass by sea into Chryse, or to 〈◊〉. As for the town of Malaca, I have described it in the discourse of the king of 〈◊〉. Quedoe is a famous town by reason of the pepper which grows in that ●●●lorie.  
〈◊〉 was a rich kingdom of the Brames or Bracmanes, before that the king of Brame 〈◊〉 thereon. The chief town is ave, standing upon a river of the same name. The 〈◊〉 realm of Verme is near unto that of Bengala, and hath not any Sea port. As for 〈◊〉 Aracham, it is situated upon the North of the realm of Bengala, near to the 〈◊〉 of Chabery The chief town, which gives her name unto this realm, stands upon 〈◊〉, and is fine and forty miles from the Sea.  

¶ The Quality.  
T●e ●oile of the realm of Pegu is wonderful fertile, and fit to bear wheat. They 〈◊〉 most commonly gather an incredible quantity of Rice, by reason of the river of 〈◊〉, which running through the realm, doth sometimes swell in such sort, as it 〈◊〉 a great part of the land. This country doth also breed many beasts, amongst the 〈◊〉 there are an infinite company of little horses, which are good and fit to bear, and 〈◊〉 Elephants which they take in certain high mountains, and keep for the use of 〈◊〉. There are also Parrots, which speak better, and are fairer than in any place else. 〈◊〉 found great numbers of Civet Cats; and there grow Canes as big as a 〈◊〉 ●he country doth also yield many Rubies; and they have much Lacca, which some hold to be the gum of certain trees, and others say, they gather it upon the leaves 〈…〉 Manna.  
〈◊〉 country of Siam is plain, but environed with mountains, full of grass, 〈◊〉, and fertile; abounding in Rice, Corn, and other things necessary for life. It 〈◊〉 store of Pepper, Benjoyn, Gold, Silver, Tin, and other metals. There is 〈◊〉 of Musk, and great numbers of Horses and Elephants. In this country is the 〈◊〉 Chyancay, out of which run the rivers of ave, Caipuno, Menam, Menon, and 〈◊〉, which water many Provinces, and make their lands fat, as Nile doth in Egypt. Towards the East, upon the frontier of Cauchinchina, there are great forests, in which there live many Tigers, Lions, and other wild beasts.  
The country of Cambaya abounds in Rice, Flesh, and Fish, as also in Horses, and Elephants, and it yields some little gold. The realm of Campae hath plenty of gold, and of all things necessary for the life of man. There is growing in their mountains the best Aloes that can be seen, the which all the nations of the East esteem no less than silluer. The realm of ave hath store of Gurnet's and Rubies, which they gather in the mountains. They feed a certain kind of beast which bears musk, and in like manner great store of Elephants and Horses; and the land abounds in all things necessary for the life of man.   

The Manners of the Ancients.  
Lest I should distaste the Reader with importune repetitions, I will refer him (touching this point) to the discourse of the realm of Narsinga, where he may first see in general the ancient manners of the Indians, and in particular, those of any country which are now subject to the king of Barm.   

¶ The Manners at this day.  
THe inhabitant of the realm of Pegu are of a mean stature, and rather fat than slender. They are nimble and strong, and yet not fit for the wars. They go all naked, only they hide their privy parts. They cover their heads with a white cloth, which is fashioned like unto a Mitre. They are wonderfully given to the love of women, and for their sakes they wear little bells of gold and silver hanging at their members, to the end they may make a noise whenas they go in the streets. Some jews hold, that the mines of Ophir (mentioned in the Scripture) were in Sumatra; and some others, in this realm; and that they of Pegu have drawn their beginning from certain Jews who were confined thither by Solomon. But the foolish Peguins say, that they came of a dog, and a woman of China, who remained in this country after a shipwreck. They are given to all sorts of pleasure, and to a thousand strange and ridiculous superstitions. They of the realm of Siam plunge themselves in delights: they love women passionately, and are very subject to gourmandise. They affect music, and take great delight in it. Thy practice no mechanic arts, but have many slaves which they employ to that end; yet they are given to tillage. They have public Schools whereas they teach their laws and their religion in the vulgar tongue: and as for sciences, they teach them in another language very different from the common. They hold themselves to be very noble, and make profession of honour. They are stately in their apparel. The kings of Siam were in old time bound, at their coming unto the crown, to begin some Temple, the which they did adorn with high Pyramids, and many Idols.  
The inhabitants of the realm of Cambaye are exceeding valiant, and given to navigation and traffic, yet their manners are very barbarous, for they think that both men and beasts are of one condition. Their women cast themselves into the fire, where they burn after the death of their husbands: and their kings being dead, not only their wives, but also some noblemen, did cast themselves voluntary into the fire, whereas the bodies of their princes burnt. They of Campae use much wood of Aloes, as well in their baths, as in the funerals of the chief men of the province.  
The inhabitants of Tarnassery arm themselves with garments made thick with cotton, short swords, and round bucklers made of the barks of trees, living of all kinds of beasts, except kine. They eat upon the ground, without cloth or napkin, and have for their drink, water with sugar. Their beds are raised high, and made of cotton, and their garments are also of cotton or of silk; they till their grounds as we do, and live almost after the same manner. But they have a custom, not to deflower their wives, nor touch them, before that some white man (be it a Christian or Mahometan) hath given the first touch, and from that time if the husbands found them in fault, it is lawful for them to kill them.  
Whenas the sacrificing priests chance to die, they burn their bodies, and make a solemn sacrifice unto the devil, and the ashes being gathered together, they put them into vines or great vessels stopped very close, which they bury under ground, and whilst the body burns they cast into the fire much aloes, myrrh, benjamin, coral, incense, sandal, and other sweet and aromatical drugs; and in the mean time the trumpets and flutes sound. During this solemnity there are twenty or thirty men disguised like devils, as they paint them, which go about the fire dancing and leaping for joy, and as it were a●●uring the world of the rest of the deceased; whose wife is all alone near unto the place, bearing her breast, weeping and sighing, and crying out with great shows of heaviness, and all this is done about midnight. Fifteen days after, the wife invites all the kinsmen and nearest friends of the deceased, and makes them a great feast in the same place where her husband had been burnt, where she is decked in her robes and jewels which his kinsmen bring thither; and making a deep hole they fill it with dry and aromatical woods, environing it about with reeds like unto a hedge, and they cover this place with a piece of silk, to the end the hole may not be perceived. After the feast many minstrels play on their instruments about this hole, after which they sacrifice unto the devil, which being ended, the wife comes like a frantic woman, and dancing and leaping towards this hole being all on fire, she recommends herself unto the pray●● of such as are disguised like devils, to the end that Satan may receive her into his ●●mpanie, and make her voyage safe and easy. These words being ended she runs towards the pit, and wrapping herself in the piece of silk, leaps into the flame, and 〈◊〉 suddenly the kinsfolks cast wood and rosin upon her, to the end that these 〈◊〉 matters may soon consume her. If the wife should forget this duty towards her 〈◊〉 and, she should be for ever dishonoured. Yet you must understand that this custom is 〈◊〉 observed by great ladies, and that the greatest of the country assist commonly at 〈◊〉 ceremonies. The inhabitants of Verme are black and go all naked, only they 〈◊〉 their privy parts with cloth made of cotton.   

¶ The Riches.  
THe wealth of these realms may well be conceived by their fertility. For the country being plain and watered with many great and goodly rivers which fatten the 〈◊〉, as Nilus doth in Egypt, it cannot be spoken how all things abound there. They 〈◊〉 a great commodity from their rice, horses, and elephants, and from their gold, 〈◊〉, and tin. The merchants come thither from all parts, and carry from Pegu (as foresaid) much rice, gum, benjamin, musk, precious stones, silver, butter, oil, ●●●nionss, and such like things to eat. They draw out of those ports forty ships, yea 〈◊〉, laden with rice for Sumatra.  
The realm of Siam sends forth pepper, musk, benjoin, gold, silver, and tin, and 〈◊〉 an infinite number of horses, and elephants. That of Camboie yields some little 〈◊〉 and doth furnish strangers with many horses and elephants. The realm of Cam●●● reaps small profit but from the wood of aloes. Quedoe is renowned by reason of the pepper which is exceeding good, and for this cause it is sought after by merchant st●●●gerss which come into those parts. In the realm of ave there are many merchants of precious stories, especially of rubies, and garnets: they cell also some store of musk, and many horses and elephants. By these things we may judge that the king of Bra●●, who hath countries furnished with so many things which are sought for from all 〈◊〉, hath great store of treasure.   

¶ The Forces.  
NO man can doubt but the king of Brama is a mighty monarch, seeing that the king of Siam alone, whom he hath dispossessed of his realm (which is not above a fourth or fift part of his Estate) had commonly six thousand men for his guard, and thirty thousand elephants, whereof three thousand were fit for the war; the which should be much esteemed by reason of the great expense of these beasts. He had as it were Timars throughout his realm, and by this means twenty thousand horse, and two hundred and fifty thousand foot always ready to follow him to the war, without any charge unto the realm: and if he would have drawn greater forces together they might have amounted to a million of men, for that the realm is very great, and the tow●eses and provinces exceeding well peopled: seeing that the town of Vdie the chief of the realm of Siam may sand forth fifty thousand men. We may hereby conceive how powerful this prince is, seeing that he abounds not only in victuals and all kind of wealth, but also in men.   

¶ The Government.  
THe king of these countries is absolute lord of all the lands within his Estates, and rends them to labourers for certain sums of money, or else he gives them to the great men of his realm for their entertainment, and for a certain time, or else for their lives; but never in perpetuity, to dispose and leave them to their children as a right of inheritance. They give also unto principal men towns and lands with jurisdiction for a time, or for their lives, with a condition that they shall come to serve them in all occasions of war with so many foot, horse, or elephants. The king of Pegu hath been wont among other soldiers of his guard, to have a thousand Christians in whom he trusted, and who did manage all the affairs of his court. They hold that this prince doth charge them with strange imposts.  
Among them of Tarnasser, murder is punished with death without any remission. Debtors are condemned to satisfy, if the creditor shows the schedule; for that they writ in parchment, as we do, whereas they of Ca●icut writ on the barks of trees. If a stranger dies without heirs the king succeeds him, for that no man may make a will, the king te●ming himself lord of all.   

¶ The Religion.  
They of Siam, who are held the authors in a manner of all the superstitions of those countries, hold God for the creator of heaven and earth, and for him that shall recompense the good, and punish the wicked. They believe that man hath two spirits about him, whereof the one guides him to good and keeps him, and the other tempts him and afflicts him. They build divers sumptuous temples, and set up many statues of men which they hold are go to heaven for their good life. Among others there is one of the father of men, as they say, which is fifteen paces long. They have an opinion that he was sent from heaven, and that of him were borne certain men, who endured grievous and troublesome torments for the love of God.  
The priests which are much honoured in this country are attired in yellow cloth (for that all that is yellow, for the resemblance it hath with the Sun and gold, is dedicated to God) & no women may enter into their houses, whereas these priests feed not any hens for that they are females. It ●s so great an offence among them to drink wine, as they stone those priests that are convicted to have drunk any. They fast often, but especially at a certain time whenas all the people run to their temples, and to their sermons. They ●ay their service at certain hours, some by day and some by night. They hold that the world had a beginning, and shall continued eight thousand years, whereof six are already past. They say also that the world shall end by fire, and that then they shall see open in heaven seven eyes of the Sun, which shall d●ie up rivers, and the sea, and burn the earth, and that there shall remain among the ashes two eggs, from whence shall come a man and a woman which shall renew the world, and then there shall be no more sea with salt water, but pleasing lakes, pools, brooks, and rivers, which shall water the whole earth in such sort as it shall abound in all good things without the labour of man.  
They have an infinite number of Idols, and among other things they worship the four elements, and every man at his death makes choice of the manner of his funerals, according to the element which he hath worshipped, they that have adored the earth are buried, and they that have borne any honour to fire are burnt: they that have reverenced the air, are hung, to the end they may be devoured by birds; and they that have had any particular veneration to the water, are drowned.  
In Pegu, the wiser sort make innumerable worlds successively one after another, and an infinite number of gods, yet not all together, but more or less to every world. They attribute five to that wherein we are, and say that there are four already past. They believe that the world shall end by fire, and that it renews continually with his proper gods. They put also certain men in the number of their gods, but with condition, that they shall pass before into fish, beasts, and birds of all sorts. They hold that there are three places appointed after this life, that is to say, one of torments, another of delights, and the third of satisfaction, or abbrogating, which they call Miba. They hold, that the souls remain so long in the two first places, and return so often into this world, as in the end they are worthy to be admitted into Miba. From these principles spring so many vanities and superstitions, and such foolish ceremonies and opinions, as any man of judgement may sooner conceive them than know how to express them. They do also worship certain lumps of earth, and chalk gilded over, made like unto the Pyramids of Egypt, the which they call Varelles, and they are so high, as the lest of them is of forty fathom. The greatest is in the town of Degum, the which is of such a height as they may discover the greatest part of the realm. Upon the top of it, there are certain pieces of iron, with a ball and head of brass, environed with little bells, where they hung the jewels and other things which they offer unto them: they worship these Varelles as their gods, and make them high, to signify their greatness, as they say.  
They have convents of priests near unto the Temples of their Idols, being above three hundred for every place. They have the head & the chin shaven, and wear long gowns with sleeves hanging to the ground. They never converse with any women, and seldom with men: yet they receive all strangers courteously: Some of these convents live of their revenues, and other of alms. They have also houses appointed for women that will retire themselves: and certain lodgings for the keeping of their Idols, which they put there for devotion; there is one of them in which they say there is above one hundred and twenty thousand. They fast thirty days every year, and eat nothing until night. They hold that in the other life a thefee shall be slave to him from whom he hath stolen any thing; and they believe that it is a sin to kill any thing that hath life. By reason whereof, the king doth often command through devotion that they should not fish, nor kill any thing that lives, but it is little observed by reason of the covetousness of officers who suffer themselves to be easily corrupted for money.      


❧ A DISCOURSE OF THE GREAT MOGOR.  

The Contents.  
1. OF the great extension of the empire of the great Mogor, which contains seven and forty realms; and of the establishment of two new Princes in this Estate. 2. Description of the realms which he possesseth, and first of that of Cambaya: the length, bounds, and the most remarkable places. 3. Of the realm of Bengala. 4. Of Sanque. 5. Of Dely. 6. Of the beginning and spring of Inder, the chief river of the realm of Cambaya: and of the fruitfulness of the country in Wheat, Rice, Wax, Sugar, Incens, Fruits, Spices, Cotton, Silk, Elephants, Dromadaries, Horses, Precious stones, and great Canes. 7. Of the rich armies of the ancient inhabitants; their free conjunction, and shameless acquaintance with women in public, and the cruel custom to massacre their parents being old. 8. Of the barbaroushesse of this nation, eating the bodies of their parents deceased. 9 What their gods and sacrifices were. 10. Of the disposition of this people, their colour, constitution of body's apparel, marriages, and witchcrafts. 11. Their riches in the traffic of Cottons, Silk, Spices, and Precious stones, and of the king's treasures of Gold and Silver. 12. Their forces in the great numbers of Horse, Brass ordnance, Elephants of burden, and arms. 13. The number of horse, foot, and Elephants, which the great Mogor may at need draw to field. 14. A discourse of the lets, proceed, and increase of this empire. 15. Of three sects of religion among this people: Paganism, Mahometism, and judaisme.   

THe empire of this prince embraceth the greatest part of that which is contained betwixt Mount Caucasus, at this day called Dallenguer, or Naugrocot, and the Sea; and betwixt the rivers of Ganges, and Indus, or Inder. He possesseth many realms (which some number to be seven and forty;) yet the Nissamaluc, and the Idalcan, which are two princes in a manner newly erected, hold a great part in this country, which they call Decan, the which hath in length upon the Sea coast only two hundred and fifty miles. The one of these princes, that is the Nissamaluc, makes his residence in the town of Danager; and the Idalcan in that of Visapore, yet the chief town of the realm is Bider, next unto which, they accounted that of Decan, which hath given the name unto the whole country. I speak this to give some knowledge of these two princes near unto the Mogor, seeing that we cannot give any particular discourse of them. But to return to the great Mogor, the chief realms which he holds, are those of Cambaya, Dely, Sangue, Mandro, and Bengala, besides many others; and the town of his abode is called Dely, of which the whole realm takes his name.  
The realm of Cambaya, which is also called Guzarate, hath in length upon the sea coast five hundred miles, from the river of Bate, which dischargeth itself into the sea near unto the town of Caul, unto the country of Circam in Persia, and on the other side it joins to the realm of Dulcinde and Mandao: So as it hath for bounds upon the East, the country of Mandao; upon the West, the Nautaces or Gedrosiens; towards the North, the realms of Sangue and Dulcinde; and to the South, the Ocean, and the frontiers of the realm of Decan. This realm is of a very great extension, and full of towns, boroughs, villages, and inhabitants; so as they do number sixty thousand places peopled. The towns that are most remarkable and of note along the sea coast, are those of Daman, Bandore, Curate, Ravel, and Bazuin, whereof the two first have been sometime ruined by the Portugals: but in the heart of the country they found Madabar, or Amodabar; Cambaya which hath imparted her name unto the whole realm, and is one of the goodliest towns of those parts, containing near one hundred and thirty thousand families, & therefore they call it the Cairo of the Indies; Campanel which is the ancient abode of the kings of the country, situated upon the top of a high mountain, and environed with seven walls: then follows the town of Tanae, & some others, among which is Diu held by the Portugals, and Daman, whereof we have formerly made mention.  
The realm of Bengala is also very great, and contains many towns as well Maritime as others, and runs along the coast one hundred and twenty leagues, and as much into the land. The great Mogor hath made himself master of this country of late years. The town of Gouro was the abode of the kings of this realm, and that of Bengala, which hath given the name to the whole province is numbered amongst the fairest and greatest towns of all the Indies.  
The realm of Sangue, called by some others Citor, hath the chief town of the same name, the which (according to Maffeus') is situated in a place of advantage, having twelve miles in circuit, and many goodly houses as well public or private, and is fortified with very strong bastions, and enclosed with good walls. This country was in a manner in our time subject to a woman called Crementina, who was as courageous as fair, and ha●ing revolted against king Badurius, to whom she paid a certain tribute, she was dispossessed of the town of Citor, where she had fortified herself with thirty thousa●d foot, and two thousand horse: but since, the great Mogor hath made himself master of the greatest part. They realm of Delly is situated betwixt the realms of Decan and Narsingua, Orixe, and Cambaya: but it is divided from that of Cambaya 〈◊〉 the mountains. It was in former times inhabited by valiant women, or Amazons, whereof there are yet some remaining, which ride on horseback like men. There was a Mahometan king which reigned lately in this country, whose wife did march commonly with a troop of two thousand women on horseback. But in the end this realm is fallen into the hands of the great Mogor, who now enjoys it: this great prince remains in the town of Delly, the chief of the realm.  

¶ The Quality.  
THe realm of Cambaya is watered by many rivers, whereof the chief is that of Indus, which passeth through the midst of the country. This river comes from Mont Caucasus, called at this day Naugrocot, and having run a long tract of about nine hundred miles, goes and dischargeth itself into the Ocean by two great mouths or passages. The country abounds in wheat, rice, sugar, incense, first-fruits of all sorts, and spices, and there is such store of cotton and silk, as they do sometimes fraught forty or fifty ships to transport it to other places. They found also in this country great numbers of horses, elephanss, and dromedaries, which some call Abades, the which are twice as big as bulls, having upon their snouts a little horn, and the hide is so hard, as no man can pierce it with a thrust: within the mountains they found the Onyx stone, commonly called Cornalina, and many Diamonds and Calcedonies: and this country abounds also in storax that is liquid.  
The realm of Bengala is watered by the river of Chaberis, to the which some give the name of Guenge at this day, holding it to be the ancient Ganges, and yet they make mention of another river near unto this, the which flowing from the mountain of Gates dischargeth it ●elfe into the gulf of Bengala, not far from the mouth of Chaberis. This country yields abundance of all things necessary for the life of man; for that it bears great store of rice, wheat, sugar, very good ginger, and long pepper. Moreover there is not any country that hath more cotton and silk; and as for flesh and fish, it is impossible to found greater plenty in any country: and that which exceeds all, this country enjoys so sweet and temperate an air, as it draws people thither from all parts. There are certain trees called Moses, which bear so sweet and pleasant a fruit, as the jews and Mahometans which live there, believe that it is the same fruit which made Adam to sin. There are also canes of that bigness, as they serve for barrels and such like vessels, and hardly can a man fathom one of them.  
The country of Dely, besides the commodities which we have found in other realms, abounds in horses, elephants, and dromedaries.   

¶ The Manners of the ancient.  
FOr that the great Mogor, and they that with him have seized upon this part of the Indies, are come from Zaghetay; so as this prince vaunts himself to be issued from the race of Tamerlan, and that the Massagetes have inhabited this country; it shall not be unfitting to speak something of the ancient manners of this people.  
They enriched their sword girdles, headpieces, and pouldrons of their harness with gold, and moreover the poitrels of their horse and other furniturne were covered with pure gold, whereof they also made their bits, as Strabo writes. The ends of their lances were of brass, wherewith they did also trim their quivers, they having no use of iron nor silver. Every one of them took a wife, with whom they did accompany in public and without all shame. If any one of them desired to have to do with his wife, he had no respect who beheld him, but only hung his quiver upon the chariot and so went and enjoyed her in the very view of all men.  
This people had a custom, that whenas any one grew very old, his kins folks, and allies gathered together and slew him, with certain sheep to bear him company, causing the flesh both of man and sheep to be indifferently boiled together, and then they made their feast, and held his death for the most happy that could be. They did not eat them that died of any languishing infirmity, but buried them, lamenting their misfortunes who had not attained to that happiness to be eaten by their kinsfolks and allies. They did never sow any thing for the nourishment of life, for that they contented themselves with their troops, and with the fish which their rivers did yield, and they did use milk in stead of drink.  
Among all their gods they did chiefly worship the Sun, in whose honour they did offer up horses, as if they had an especial care to sacrifice the most courageous of all beasts to the goodliest Star.   

¶ The Manners at this day.  
THe inhabitants of Cambaya give themselves for the most part to merchandise, and are unprofitable for the wars. They are of an olive colour, and go all naked, only they cover their privities. As for their head, they wear over it a mantle, & as it were a hat of a purple colour. They eat no flesh, but live of rice, milk, barley, and other things without life. They comb their beards curiously, and plait down their hair like unto women. The women never marry but with one man, and the men in like manner, and they live very chastened being in their widowhoods. They are great sorcerers, and take upon them to foretell things to come. They were accustomed whenas they had a particular prince, to come in the morning some on horseback, and others upon elephants before the king's palace to salute him, sounding many trumpets and cornets, and they used the like ceremony whenas the king sat down to meat.  
The realm of Bengala is inhabited by many sorts of nations, by reason of the temperature and bounty of the air, and riches of the country. The Originaries are for the most part white, subtle of wit, of a mild and courteous disposition, and they understand well the things wherein they deal: yet it is true, they are somewhat deceitful. They are given to traffic, and understand the trade of merchandise: they go not naked, as for the most part all other Indians do, but they cover themselves with a shirt which is reasonable white, and hangs down unto their feet, upon the which they have other garments of silk. They wear Turbans like unto the Turk. Their kings in former times were commonly chosen from among the slaves of Abyssins', whereof the Court was in a manner full. They are delicate and stately as well in their diet as apparel. They are ignorant in regard of the sciences, as well as the people of Cambaya: It is true that some have affirmed that there are some few among them which have some little knowledge in Philosophy, Astrology, and Physic. They say that the inhabitants of the country ●eare great honour unto the river of Ganges, and they never go upon it but with great 〈◊〉, believing confidently whenas they wash themselves in this river, the water thereof 〈◊〉 away all the sins where with they are polluted. But the avarice of their prince's 〈◊〉 been so great, as they may not bathe themselves in this river unless they pay a cer●●●● sum unto the king.   

¶ The Riches.  
BEsides that which I have spoken of cotton and silks, whereof there is such abundance in this country, as they do oftentimes lad forty or fifty ships to transport 〈◊〉 merchandise into remote countries, and besides the spices and precious stones which 〈◊〉 inhabitants cell to strangers, by the which we may easily conjecture of the riches of 〈◊〉 realm, I will say only in a word, that to be the better assured of the great treasures 〈◊〉 may be in these countries, and especially of that which the king enjoys, we must ●●●sider (without any further discourse) what Maffeus' reports of Badurius, who enjoyed 〈◊〉 the realm of Cambaya. He saith (among other things) that whenas he went to 〈◊〉 in the year of our Redemption 1536, to fight against the great Mogor, who came to secure the king of Mandao, he brought with him five hundred tuns of gold and sil●●● to pay his army; and having been twice defeated, and lost whatsoever was in his a●●ie, he sent to Solyman Emperor of the Tu●●●● for succours, and withal he sent a present which was valued at six hundred thousand crowns: but repenting himself that he 〈◊〉 ●ought unto this prince who could give him no speedy assistance, he attempted to 〈◊〉 the love of his neighbours the Portugals, not only in suffering them to build a 〈◊〉 in the Island of Diu, but also by rare and exquisite presents: whereby we may con●●●ue what be the riches of the great Mogor, seeing that he not only enjoys the greatest part of Badurius conquest, but also a great number of other provinces, most of which y●●ld nothing to that of Cambaya.   

¶ The Forces.  
Having set down what the riches of this prince may be, we must come unto his forces, and having consideration in like manner of Badurius army, which did consist of a● infinite number of soldiers; for that they number one hundred and fifty thousand ho●se, whereof there were thirty five thousand barbed, and withal he had five hundred thousand foot: Moreover, there was so great an equipage, and so much munition, as the report of Maffeus' seems incredible, if we shall confer those forces with those of the kings of Europe. He had withal two thousand pieces of brass ordnance, among which there were four great basilisks, every one of which were drawn by a hundred pair 〈◊〉 oxen, five hundred carts with powder and shot, and two hundred Elephants armed: 〈◊〉 making the like conclusion as we have done in regard of the riches, we must contesse, that seeing the great Mogor is lord of so many other countries, besides that of Badurius, he may levy armies whose number alone were able to strike terror into all his neighbours, if they were not furnished with many men as well as himself, proportionable to the lands which they hold. And without doubt it is no difficult thing for them to draw many men to field, having need of so little, be it either to feed them, or to arm them; and in like manner they may supply themselves with infinite store of munition and engines for the war; for that they carry no other thing with them but what is necessary for the wars. Abundance of wine, diversity of meats, and such like, which cannot be carried without great charge, and much trouble, is not respected among them: they have no care but for that which concerns war, as copper, iron, steel, and tin, to make pieces, and other instruments of war; iron and lead to make bulle●ss; and iron and steel for swords, with oxen and elephants to draw their ordnance. All these princes are tyrants, so as to assure and increase their Estates, they oppress the people, and put all into the hands of their soldiers, to the end they may be more faithful unto them. But the Mahometan princes do not commit their towns of strength, nor enterprises of importance, but to their slaves, who many times reuoult and seize upon their masters Estates, and to maintain themselves in possession, they abandon the people to spoil: for the power of a prince must of necessity be supported either by the love of his subjects, or by some others; for that he that is feared of all men, cannot long subsist. And for that tyrants cannot promise' unto themselves the love of the people, whom they entreat, not as subjects, but as slaves; they must of force put all confidence in their soldiers, and win them by fair promises: so the Turk relies upon his janissaries, who know no other master, not nor father; and to purchase their love, and to be supported by them, he gives them liberty to do any thing. Even so, many princes of Malabar hold the people as beasts, and ground their power upon the Naires. The kings of Ormus, Cambaye, Decan, and Acen, make account of slaves; & for that they lay the foundation of their greatness in their soldiers, be they free, or slaves, natural borne, or strangers, of necessity among them war must be the end of all things, and they must not spare their treasure to furnish themselves with soldiers and munition.  
But to return to our great Mogor, they say, that he may draw to field almost in an instant three hundred thousand horse, fifty thousand elephants, and almost an infinite number of foot.  
But some one will object, seeing this prince is so powerful, why doth he not make himself master of the rest of the Indies, and of the East? To whom I answer, that there are many things which hinder him: the one is, that as the spirit and art of man cannot produce a perpetual motion, an effect proper to God and Nature; so can they not give a continual course to human enterprises: for although that great empires be not infested with foreign forces, yet they sink under their own weight, and ruin themselves. Moreover, whenas power increaseth, there wants agility, and although the forces be greater, yet are they not very fit, I will not say to make incursions, but to move. These forces move but slowly, and it is well known how much celerity and speed doth import in war. Great conquests bring with them a care to keep and assure them, the which will require time. In the mean time, the neighbours fortify themselves, and provide for their safeties, and the facility of vanquishing flies away with the occasion.  
Moreover, he that hath vanquished his enemies, doth most commonly fear his companions, and they that have been sharers in his victory; who to assure himself of them, must break off his enterprises, and make a retreat sooner than he desired, or aught. And besides, victories make Captains insolent, and soldiers mutinous and disobedient, and if the one desire to march on, the others will not follow them, as it happened to Alexander and Lucullus. We must not pass over with silence, that great enterprises which succeed enrich private men, but most commonly they leave the prince without treasure, the which keeps armies well united, and makes them more prompt for actions of war. We must also confess, that a great army (like to that of Badurius) by the ruin of those countries through which it doth pass and stay, doth also deprive itself of all maintenance: wherefore although the enemy defeat it not, yet it is consumed by famine, the which is most commonly accompanied with the plague. And for this reason there can be no better resolution taken against great armies, than to temporise, and to stand upon defence, being most certain that they cannot long continued in that estate, but must be dispersed either for want of pay, or of victuals, or through the infection of the air, or by diseases.  
And that which doth also hinder the proceed of the Mogor, is the nature of places: for Mount Caucasus runs through these countries with a thousand branches, whereof some bound in other realms; and others not content therewith environ them round about, and is unto them as a wall: some stop up the passages, others make them difficult and uneasy; and these difficulties are greater unto the Mogor than they would be to any other, for that his chiefest force consists in horsemen: so that as he is powerful in a champain country, he cannot advance with any speed where there are mountains and hills; the which we may easily conjecture by the Resbutes, who having fortified themselves in the mountains of Cambaya, have no fear of the prince. These Resbutes are the remainders of the idolatrous nobility of this country, who whenas the Mahometans first seized thereon, retired into the mountains which lie betwixt the towns of Cambaya and Diu, & there maintain their liberty by arms, making often great spoils in the plain. There are moreover some barren countries, and which want water, as that of Dulcinde upon the confines of Cambay; so as it is impossible to march thither with any great armies.  
We must add hereunto the great loss of time which potent princes make in their voyages; for that most commonly Summer is spent before they come to the place appointed; and when they are there, their horses are half dead, and their soldiers decayed both in number and strength: then comes Winter which is opposite to the agressor, and favourable to him that defends; for he that invades must of necessity keep the field, and endure all the discommodities of the weather, whilst the others lie in houses, and want not any necessaries: wherefore all princes that have projected great enterprises, for that the difficulties are great to lead great armies from one country unto another, have been forced to transport their men by sea, or upon rivers, as Germanicus did in the Germane war.  
The Mogor hath no kind of sea forces, both for that he wants ports, and also for that he hath the Portugals to neighbours, who stop up all the gulf of Cambaya with two important forts, which be Daman and Diu.  
The last reason which stays the Mogor, hath been the power of them with whom he confines, which keep him from extending his dominions towards the East: for he hath for neighbour the king of Barm, who yields nothing unto him in power and forces, seeing that the enjoys so many realms and estates, and hath under him so many warlike nations, and brings such great numbers to field, as he fears not any opposite power. If the Mogor hath extended his Empire betwixt Ganges and Indus, the other hath augmented his no less betwixt Ganges and the realm of Siam. And to conclude, their fortifications are such at this day, as a small place of war is able to weaken and tyre the power of a great kingdom; so as by this a●t few men resist many, and consume the forces and treasure of them that assail them.   

¶ The Religion.  
THe wretched sect of Mahomet is so dispersed in Europe, Africa, and Asia, as the greatest realms of the two latter parts of the world are infected with this error. Among others which follow the law of this false Prophet, the Mogors Empire is for the most part Mahometan. There are also many idolaters, of whom we spoke in our discourse of the king of Narsingue, to the which I refer the reader, to avoid repetitions. There are also many jews, who are given to the trade of merchandise, and some Christians Abyssins', whom traffic and the desire of gain draws into this country.      


A DISCOURSE OF THE KING OF CALICUT.  

The Contents.  
1. THe length and breadth of the realm of Calicut, and a description of the chief town, and the manner of their buildings. 2. The soil abounding in pepper, and what kind of tree bears this spice: the time and manner how they plant it, and gather it. 3. Of ginger, aloes, and other first-fruits which this country yields, with the manner how to gather it. 4. A description of the beasts and birds which this country breeds, and among others the Sarau, which hath a better voice than the parrot. 5. Of apes and monkeys; and of a wonderful tree which bears dates or nuts, of which they make ropes, cloth like unto satin, wine, sugar, and oil. 6. Of two kinds of serpents in this country, whereof the one is not venomous. 7. Of the king of Calicuts' marriage, who never takes a wife until she be deflowered by the chief of their priests. 8. Of the five orders of the realm, and how every Estate lives; especially the nobility & merchants. 9 Their manner of writing upon the leaves of palm trees with pens of iron. 10. Their wealth in the traffic of pepper, ginger, cinnamon, cloves, nutmegs, mace, musk, pearl, cod of spikenard and mirabolans incens, aloes, camphier, and cassia. 11. Their forces in footmen, and armies at sea: their arms and manner of fight. 12. What forces the king may bring as well to fi●●d, as to sea. 13. The succession of the crown of Calicut transferred to the king's sister's children, and why: and how the creditor, pursues his debtor in this country. 14. Of the abominable idolatry of them of Calicut, worshipping the devil with a mitre, in an oratory full of figures of devils. 15. Of the sacrifices which the Bramins offer unto the devil. 16. A general pardon celebrated every year by the Bramins, and granted unto the people in a certain temple of the province.   

THe chief realm of the country of Malabar is that of Calicut, although it runs but five and twenty leagues a long the sea. The king of this country is powerful and renowned, and exceeds all the rest of those countries▪ in dignity: they call him Zamorin, which is as much to say as Emperor, according to the commaundemen of Pereimall king of all Malabar, who having divided his Estate into many parts, whenas he meant to go to Meque, there to end his days, he left the name of Zamarin to this king of Calicut. This realm is but five and twenty leagues long, and ten broad. The chief town which gives name unto the whole realm is situated upon the sea, and is three miles long: it hath no walls, and contains about six thousand houses standing a good distance one from another. It hath a mile in length beyond the port called Capocate. The houses of this town are built low and of small price, for that they found water before they have digded five foot; so as they cannot lay any deep foundations. Merchant's houses are valued at twenty crowns or there abouts; but those of the common sort are not sold for above ten. The height of these houses doth equal a man on horseback.  

¶ The Quality.  
THe soil of Calicut yields pepper, whereof they gather some within the town. The stalk of it is weak, and hath need of some prop or supporter to hold it up like unto the vine. It resembles ivy, which as it grows creeps on, and when it can come to any tree near unto it, it embraceth it, and ties itself unto it. This tree, or rather shrub, hath many branches which are two or three spans long. The leaves are like unto the apple trees of Assyria, but they are greater and thicker, and have small cross veins. In every plant there are six branches hanging down a foot long: and they are in colour like unto grapes which are not ripe. They gather it in October and November, being somewhat green, the which they dry in the Sun upon mats or coverings made of reeds, and in three days it grows black as it is brought into these parts. Finally, they neither cut it nor manure it in any sort, for that the soil brings it forth without any labour. Pli●●● saith, that the shrubs of pepper are like unto our juniper, and that some in his time maintained, that they did not grow but about Mount Caucasus, which is directly opposite against the Sun: but at this day we found the contrary by the navigation of the Portugals.  
●he country of Calicut doth also bear ginger, which is a kind of root that lies not 〈◊〉 three or four spans in the ground like unto reeds. Whenas they draw out the g●●ger, they leave one betwixt two knots, and they cover the root or seed with th●●arth, and the year after, they gather the fruit, that is to say, ginger. In plain countr●●● they have a fruit like unto the Myrobolan, but in those soils which be read, they gath●● all sorts of them. They have also some other first-fruits and shrubs, a● jaceres, Ambe, ●●●ocapel, Comolangue, and divers others which are unknown to us, amongst which 〈◊〉 have a taste like unto small peaches, others to damask prunes▪ some to figs, and 〈◊〉 to melons. There grows Aloes, which is a gum they gather from a shrubbed 〈◊〉 which hath but one root like unto a staff planted in the ground. It hath the body 〈◊〉 and read, the scent strong, and the taste bi●ter.  
Calicut they found many beasts as Lions, Bears, Stags, Goats, Wolves, Oxen, 〈◊〉 Elephants, and others, yet they say that not any one of these beasts breed there, bu● are brought from other places. As for birds, there are parrots, some green, some 〈◊〉 others of divers colours: whereof there are such numbers as they are forced to 〈◊〉 in the fields to keep their Rice, lest they should devour it. They make a wonderful noise▪ and are sold for little. There is another kind of bird called Sarau, which are somewhat less than parrots, but they sing more sweetly. Flowers are always in their vigour and the trees green during the whole year, by reason that the air is sweet and temperate and it seems always to be a spring.  
This country hath also store of Apes and Monkeys, which do much annoy husband●●●● especially the poorer sort, for that they run up the trees which are like unto nut●●●● and spoil the liquor whereof the Indians make their drink, and overthrow the ves●●●● wherein they receive it: for they have a kind of tree which excels all others in boun●●●● bears Dates like unto the Palm; it yields wood for the fire, they gather nuts 〈…〉 of a good ●ast▪ they make ropes; and draw from it fine cloth, wine, sugar, and 〈◊〉 and the first first-fruits, which this tree bears, are nuts, like unto dates, from which they 〈…〉 first film and cast it into the fire. There is another tree which is not much unlike 〈…〉 bears Cotton, and Cypress, or Cobweb lawn: of these leaves they make 〈…〉 stuff in a m●ner like unto Satin or Taffeta, than they spin the sides, and make 〈…〉; and under the later bark, there is a nu● as big as one's little finger. Finally, 〈…〉 water with the nut, & as the nut grows▪ so the water increaseth; yea in such 〈…〉 the nut is come to perfection, the inner part is full of water, the which is 〈…〉 differs not much from Poo●e-water, whereof they make very fat oil. 〈…〉 and ●●●ning they make a● incision in the body of this tree, and draw from 〈…〉 liquor▪ which serves them as sweet wines.  
〈…〉 of this country are very high ●or the most part, & almost as big as swine, 〈◊〉 they have four feet which are four cubits long, and they breed and live in moorish places. The inhabitants say, that these serpents have no poison. There are others whose poison is so deadly, as if they have once drawn blood from any one, he dies suddenly. There are some as big as aspikes, and others much bigger, who kill a man if they once bite him, of which kind there are very many.   

¶ The Manners.  
Whernas' the king marries a wife, his manner is not to lie with her, until she be deflowered by the most honourable of all the priests, & the king gives him five hundred crowns for this goodly exploit. Whenas he takes his refection, he lies upon the ground without covering or ●apestrie, and hath priests about him, who assist at his dinner and supper, & come not within four paces of him, but give ear to the king's words with great reverence.  
Next unto the king, the priests are held most honourable, & after them the Naires, who are held in the like esteem there, as gentlemen be in these countries: they wear swords, bucklers, pikes, or halberds, when they go abroad. The third order is of artisans & tradesmen. The fourth of fishermen. The fift, of them that gather pepper, wine, and nuts: and the last, of such as sow and reap Rice, and these are not much esteemed by the gentlemen and priests. The king and queen wear no stately garments, & the inhabitants of towns are in a manner naked, having only a thin cloth made of cotton to hide their privy parts. Whenas the king goes forth to hunt, or for any other cause, the priests keep the queen. The gentlemen and merchants live after this manner: if any friends be married, many times they change wives to make their friendship more firm: and as for the children, he that is the father must keep them. There are some others which live after another manner, for that one wife marries seven husbands, and they lie with her one after another, and if it happen she be with child, she gives it to which of the seven she please, and he may not refuse it. They lie upon the ground when they eat, and use the leaves of trees in stead of spoons. They that follow the king, wear upon their heads, bands of silk died in scarlet. All suffer their hair to grow; but after the ●ings' death his subjects cut their hair and beards, in sign of mourning, some after one sort, others after another.  
The women are not given to do any thing, but to deck themselves, to seem more pleasing; so as when they go abroad, although they be naked, yet are they laden with gold and precious stones hanging at their ears, necks, legs, arms, and upon their breasts.  
They writ upon the leaves of palm trees with pens of iron, without any ink.   

¶ The Riches.  
THe great traffic which they have in Calicut, makes the country exceeding rich, for that they not only venture their pepper and ginger to merchant strangers, but they also make them to take in spices there which come from other places: for they bring cinnamon thither from an island called Zeylon, fifty Germane leagues beyond Calicut, towards the East; and pepper from Comnucol, which is twelve leagues beyond Calicut: they have cloves from Meluze, which is some leagues distant from Calicut; nutmegs, and mace; from the Mol●queses; musk from Pegu; pearls from the island of Ormus, cod or husks of Nard, Mirabolans of Cambaya; Incens of Arabia; Aloes and Camphir of Lyvi, or China, being fifty leagues distant from Calicut; long pepper of Sumatra; and Brasil from Darnasser, or Turnasser. Caliout doth also sand forth Cassia, which grows in that territory. All these kinds of merchandise which they carry from this town, which is in a manner the common trade of Arabian merchants which traffic into the East, is the cause that it is grown one of the richest places of the Indies, the which may well appear by the riches of the prince, of whose revenues we have no certain relation. Thus much only we can say, that the traffic of spices which they have there, is of such consequence, as it not only makes the princes rich by the means of their imposts and customs; but also doth so enrich the merchants, as some of them may in wealth equal some dukes in Europe, and kings in Africa.   

¶ The Forces.  
IN the province of Malabar they make not war continually on horseback, not so much for that the country breeds no horse (seeing that they bring them great numbers out of Persia and Arabia) but for that the country will not bear it. For as in Sueden their footmen use no pikes, nor their horsemen lances, by reason of the woods which hinder the use of them: even so in Malabar they do not commonly use horses, by reason that the country is strait, and crossed in very many places with rivers, arms of the sea, and moors. Wherefore their forces must consist of footmen, and in armies at sea. The footmen of this country are very well ordered and disciplined.  
First the soldiers are all gentlemen, and are called Naires. These being seven years old are sent as it were to the school of war, whereas certain men excellent in that art, stretch their sinews and joints, anointing them often with the oil of Sesame, by which means they get an admirable disposition of nimbleness, so as they will turn their joints and members which way they please, as if they had no bones. After which they do exercise them continually in the managing of arms, and for that they think no man can grow excellent in many things, they give themselves to one kind of weapon as they found themselves disposed. Their arms in former time were the pike, the bow, the sword and the buckler; but since that the Portugals came into that country, they have learned the art of casting the ordnance, and making of harquebusses, and to handle them, yea and to make all things that are necessary to the use of them; so as their powder is much better than ours. They go naked to the wars, except the navel, and use neither headpiece, nor corslets: hence it comes that they are so active in combats, and in all military affairs. They present themselves suddenly to the enemy, and retire in an instant like unto falcons. When they think they are farthest off, they are at their enemy's backs; so as it is hard to fly from them, or to follow them; for they are so swift on foot, as the Parthians were on horseback. If it be needful to join and s●ght (which they do not but upon necessity, or some great occasion) they strike most commonly with the point. They carry certain plates of brass, or silver tied to the handle of their swords, and the noise thereof serves them as a trumpet or drum, to encourage them to fight.  
There is among the Naires a rank of soldiers, which they call Amoques, who with great execrations (to the which they submit themselves with their families and posteriors) make profession to revenge the wrongs done to their companions. But if any one k●●he king, they run with such fury to revenge, as the greatest dangers cannot stay them: by reason whereof as the number of the Amoques is great or small, so the kings at the Indies are held more or less powerful. That which doth augment the courage of the Naires, and make them not to regard dangers, is, for that they have no particular 〈◊〉. For many ages since, a prince of those countries brought in the community of women. We must also add hereunto the great liberty, or rather arrogancy of these ●●●●●●os, for that it is not lawful for the people to approach near unto them, which if they do, they are ill entreated. These Naires sand their servants before to the corners of streets, ●●● advertise the people of their coming, and to make them give way. If it be true, that ●●●●anissariess grow more valiant in war by reason of the liberty which is given them du●●●g peace: the Naires who suffer themselves not to be looked on by men of base condition should become more courageous; for which consideration they do not commonly 〈◊〉 in towns, but abroad, having their houses ditched about with thick hedges and ●●●dss, and such intricat ways, as they seem to be Laberynths.  
If anyone desires to know what forces the king of Calicut may bring to field, it may ●●●eare by the enterprises which he hath made against the Portugals, for in the year 1503 ●●●drew together sixty thousand fight men, against Edward Pacheco general for SATURN'S king of Portugal, who at that time defended the king and realm of Cochin, conti●●●●ng in this enterprise the space of five months, in the which he had two hundred ships of war. In the year 1529 he besieged the fort which the Portugals had made at Calicut, and continued the war all the Winter, and notwithstand that the Portugals showed great valour in the defence of this place, yet they ruined it of themselves, considering the power of this king. In like manner in the year 1560 he besieged the fort of Chiael with ninety thousand men, the which he took, forcing the Portugals which were within it to yield.  
As for sea forces, he hath showed his power many times: for that being master of many ports which are much frequented, when he lists he arms a great number of vessels. It is true that at this day, all the sea forces of the Indies are much inferior both in regard of ships and soldiers, to those of the Portugals, to whom the use of defensive arms gives a great advantage both at sea and land. For doubtless it is hard, but a naked man should fear iron, and he that is covered with good arms should be more hardy than one that is disarmed. Wherefore we see that those people which use no defensive arms in war, make rather profession of agility than of force, and to fight in flying than in a joined battle, trusting more to their great numbers, than to their valour.   

¶ The Government.  
WHenas the king is dead, his children succeed not, but his sister's son remains prince of Calicut, for that (as they say) it is the Bramin, and not the king which had the queen's maidenhead; and withal, that there is continually one of these priests with the queen to keep her company. They use this kind of justice, that if any one hath slain a man, he is impaled alive, and afterwards hanged: but if he hath but hurt him, he is discharged in paying a fine unto the prince.  
As for debts, the creditor seeing that his debtor doth but satisfy him with words, he retires the contract, and taking the green bark of some tree, he pursues the debtor, and having overtaken him, he binds him with this bark, conjuring him in the behalf of the Bramins and the king, not to remove out of the place until he hath satisfied him. He that is thus conjured stirs not out of the place until he hath paid; for if he made any offer to fly, he should be put to death without remission.   

¶ The Religion.  
THey of Calicut believe one God, creator of heaven and earth, and the first cause of all that is in the world: but they make him idle, and say that to resthim self, he hath given the government of the world to the devil, whom they hold to be celestial, to the end that he might be judge of the earth, and punish, or recompense men according to their actions and merits. They call this devil Deume, or the god Tameran.  
The king of Calicut hath an Oratory in his palace full of figures of devils, as fearful as we paint them in these parts, and not much bigger than medals: but in the midst of this chapel, there is a throne of brass, on the which there is set a devil of the same substance, having upon his head a mitre, like unto the Popes. There are three great horns upon this mitre, and on the forehead of this idol, four. He hath a gaping throat, with four great, long, and very sharp teeth of either side, a deformed nose made like a hawks bill, glistering eyes, and hideous, with a furious and fearful countenance: the fingers are made like hooks, and the toes like unto a cocks spurs. This devil holds the soul of a man in his throat, and another in his hand to do the like.  
The sacrificators whom they call Bramins are bound every morning to wash this monster with rose water, and other sweet liquors, pouring forth before him many aromatical smells. Whenas they cast incens they prostrate themselves, and they do sacrifice sometimes in the week to this idol. Their sacrifice is made after this manner: They have a table made like unto an altar, being a foot and a half high, two foot broad, and about three long, spreading upon it all sorts of flowers, and sweet powders. After this they have a vessel of silver full of cocks blood, the which they set upon burning coals, with many arromaticall things for Incens: then taking the Censor, they environ the Altar, and perfume it; and whilst this is doing, there is a little silver bell which rings continually. Then they cut the throat of a cock, which is appointed for the sacrifice, with a silver knife, with the which they flourish a certain time. Whilst that the Priest doth the sacrifice, he hath his feet and arms enriched with pieces of silver, which make a sound like unto bells, and withal, he hath a jewel which hangs about his neck down his stomach, and this is a mark to distinguish the Bramins from the rest of the people. The sacrifice being ended, he takes wheat in either hand, & goes backward out of the temple, holding his eyes still fixed upon the Idol, until that he came near unto a tree, which is without the circuit thereof, and then he scatters the corn which he had in his hands, the which he lays upon his head, then returning into the Oratory, he takes away the ornament of the Altar. The king never eats, before that some one of these Bramins hath go and offered some meat unto the devil, and presently, as soon as he hath dined, these Priests gather up the remainder, and glue it unto crows. Neither the king, nor the chief of the town, dare eat any flesh without permission from the Bramins, whereas other men may eat any indifferently, except it be cows flesh.  
It will not forget a general pardon which they have yearly in December, which draws the people from all the countries and neighbour provinces to come and visit a Temple of their Idol, the which is built in the midst of a lake, where there is to be seen two goodly ranks of pillars, and a great lamp made like unto a ship full of oil, to give light 〈◊〉 about. This Temple is great, and environed of all sides with trees, and no man may enter into this Temple, before he hath washed himself in the lake: Whenas any enter into this place, the Bramins do besprinkle them with the oil of the lamp, than they go and present themselves to the sacrifice, and having worshipped, and prayed unto the devil, every man retires. In the meantime, the Bramins promise' them general pardon of their faults: and for the space of three days, this place is as it were a Sanctuary, and free retreat for all men; so as no man dare wrong another, nor take revenge of their enemy, not not pursue an offend or by justice.      


❧ A DISCOURSE OF THE KING OF NARSINGE.  

The Contents.  
1. THe situation of the country of Narsinge, the length, and chief towns, Narsinge, and Bisnagar. 2. Of the province of Canara, or Concan, and the chief Sea. towns. 3. Of the fertility of the country, abounding in Corn, Sugar, Ginger, and other spices, Silk, Cotton, Figs, and Nuts. 4. Manners and behaviour of this people, and generally of all the Indians, divided into trichomanes, descended from Abraham, and●of the German's; according to the division of Onef●●nites, and Strabo. 5. Of the Hioboles; or Gymnos●● his●●s, ●earing garments made of the barbs of trees, or of linen cloth that is not combustible: their austerity of lafe, and abstinence from ●ine and women: their exercises to maintain their strength of body and mind; their doctrines philosophy, and subtle discourses with kings of divine and human things, of the motions of the heavens, and secrets of nature. 6. Of the Germane, given ●as he speculation of man's body, to the c●re of diseases, and to divination, and negromancy. 7. Of the orders and Estates whereof the Indian people consist, that is to s●y, Labourers exempt from the wa●●res● Pastors or Shepherds living in the fields in Tents; Handicraftsmen making instruments for war, and other works; Soldiers, Magistrates, and Councillors. 8. The apparel of the Indians at this day, and what the king wears going to the war. 9 Of the king's great revenues, amounting yearly to twelve millions of gold. 10. Wherein his forces consist; what horse and foot he hath; his arms and munition for war. 11. Of the Idolatry of them of Narsinge, worshipping the Devil, and dedicating Temples unto him. 12. Of two kinds of sects, governing the religion of this people, called Baneane, and Bramins: their doctrine, and austereness of life; and the Deities which they adore.   

THis Prince is one of the mightiest monarchs betwixt the rivers of Indus and Ganges, being master of a great country, which lies betwixt the Cape of Comorin, and that of Guadaverin, and betwixt the mountains of Gate, and the gulf of Bengala, and it hath in length two hundred leagues, or six hundred miles: some say, that this realm contains; as much ground as can be go in six months, There are two royal towns, that is, Narsinge, and Bisnagar, called by some Besenagal, the which hath three walls, and is famous for traffic. By reason of these two great towns, they call this prince sometimes king of Narsinge, and sometimes of Bisnagar. The town of Tamasser belongs to this realm, as some say, but it is held by the king of Barm. There are in this realm two Sea-townes inhabited by Christians, that is, Coromandel, or Colmander, and Malipur, which the Portugals hold.  
The king of Narsinge doth also enjoy the province of Canara, otherwise called Concan, the which is in some sort a part of the realm of Decan. The chief Sea-townes of this province, are Onor, Batticale, Magindre, and Mangalor. But the Portugals have seized upon the town of Onor, and that of Barticale is tributary unto them. The king of Travancor, which is in the province of Malabar, is in like manner subject to the king of Narsinge.  

¶ The Quality.  
THis realm abounds in all things, and there wants not any thing necessary for the life of man. For there is great store of corn, sugar, ginger, and other spices, and there is not any country in the world that abounds more in silk and cotton. The territory of Bis●●gar is very fruitful, and there is near unto it very pleasant forests. The province of Canara yields rice, sugar, figs, and nuts, but it bears neither wheat, barley, nor pulses. The soil of Travancall is lean, and not very fit for corn or first-fruits.   

¶ The Manners of the ancient.  
FOr that many of the ancient manners of them of Narsinge may be referred to the other Indians, I have reserved this place to make a full discourse, which may show their actions in general. The Indians did hate theft above all things, and had no laws written, for that they had no use of letters, but did learn by rote one of another. They drink wine only whenas they made any sacrifice, and their ordinary drink was compounded of barley and rice, wherewith they made their pottages. They did not pled one against another, neither had they any law amongst them, which made mention of the keeping of any thing: they had no need of witnesses, nor of bills, of seals or writings, for that one did believe another's simple word. They left their houses empty without guard, which were all signs of the bounty and innocency of this people. Moreover they lived alone, anh had no set hours, for their diet, but did eat when they had an appetite. They did 'cause their bodies to be often rubbed, the which they did polish with h●beve. They were not stately in making of tombs for the dead, but contrariwise they showed themselves supersfluous in their apparel; for they did wear much gold and precious stones. They had also for an ornament a fine linen cloth, wherewith they covered their faces for fear of Sun burning, doing what they could to preserve themselves fair. Truth was held among them for a great virtue, and old men were not esteemed if they were not discreet. They might have many wives, and they bought them of their parents for a pair of oxen. They did choose some for their service, others to have children ●●, and some for their pleasure, and they did not force them to live chastened, but they ●ight prostitute themselves at their pleasures. They did not sacrifice, not cast incens upon the altars with garlands of flowers upon their heads, like unto other nations, neither did they cut the throats of beasts that were sacrificed, but did smother them in their bl●●d. They did cut off the ends of the fingers of false witnesses, and he that had cut off, ●●●●imed the member of any one, he did not only endure the like pain, but he lost the hand which had committed the offence. But he that did put out the eye, or cut off the hand of an artisan, did lose his head without remission.  
Women slaves did keep and serve the king; and the army did live out of towns under tents. If a women slew the king seeing him drunk, she did marry his successor, and the children did lawfully succeed the father. It was not lawful for the king to sleep in the day time, and in the night he often changed his lodging, fearing surprises. When he was not in war, he came often out of his house to hear causes, and to do them justice, and if during the time he was rubbed, he was to hear any one, he admitted the parties, and gave them their answer. He came also forth to sacrifice, and to hunt, whereas a great troop of soldiers ran after the beast. The place whereas the king took this delight, was compassed in with ropes, and the guard of his body attended without. If in the meantime any one entered into the king's tents to disport himself with any of the ladies of his train, he lost his life,  
Whenas the king marched through the country, he had little bells and drums which were carried before him, and if he entered into any park which was enclosed, to hunt, he had still near about his person three or four women armed: but if he did run in the open plain, he was mounted upon an elephant, and he had about him many women, some upon chariots, and others upon elephants, or horses, and these women did handle all kind of arms exceeding well.  
The Indians did worship jupiter, the rain, and the river of Ganges, and those whom they call the gods of every country. Whenas their kings did wash their hair, every man did solemnize that day as a great feast, and they made great and rich presents one unto another. In old time these people were divided into seven orders and degrees, whereof the first were the Sages or Philosophers, Gymnosophists, & Brachmanes, who were honoured more than all the rest. These were free from all labour, and did not serve any, neither did they command any, but only received from every one in particular what was fit for the sacrifices of their gods: they had the care of the dead, as being held dear unto the gods, and which knew what was done in helt. These Sages foretold them in the beginning of the year, of droughts, winds, rain, diseases, and such like, which should happen; the knowledge whereof was profitable unto them, for that the king and his subjects did seek to avoid those misfortunes that did threaten them: but if any one of these Philosophers did foretell an untruth, he was enjoined to perpetual silence. The Gymnosophists went all naked, as their name doth show, and lived in desert and solitary places, whereas they disputed of natural causes, and did in a manner continually behold the Sun. These men were so patiented, as they would stand a whole day barefooted in the burning sand. Among these Sages, were also the Brachmans', who desired nothing but what nature required, and did live of that which the earth did willingly bring forth. They hold that these men were descended from the children of Abraham●'s concubines, who sent them into the East, as we read in the holy writ, where it is said that they carried certain gifts from him. These gifts of Abraham, besides gold and clotheses are the arts and sciences; especially Astrology, and natural Magic, wherein they have not only excelled, but also are at this day very skilful, if we shall believe the Portugals, who speak of their own knowledge. Strabo, following Onesirites, divides them into Brachmanes, and Germane. The Brachmanes did put in practise the knowledge which they had received from their ancestors, and did admit to the study of Philosophy the Germane who were strangers and not of the race of the Sages.  
The most honoured of all were the Hyoboles, or Gymnosophists, who were not covered but with the bark of a tree, or with a fine linen cloth, the which was not washed with water, but put into the fire to cleanse when it was fowl, and yet was not consumed. They drank no wine, neither did they marry, or had any knowledge of women, until they had led this life for the space of seven and thirty years. They discoursed subtly with kings of a commonweal, of divinity, and human things, of the course and motion of the heavens, and of the secrets of nature. They did fortify their bodies with so great exercise, and by the same means they gave such vigour unto their spirits, as they made them immutable in their conversations and judgements. All their Philosophy tended only to have a good death, and a good life. Appolonius Thianeus went unto them with much toil, to hear jarque their prince discourse of nature, of the motion of the heavens and of the change of days.  
They blamed victorious Alexander for that not being content with his own realm, he did trouble all the East with his army. Behold what Strabo saith, who is followed by Pliny in his natural history. They have greatly enriched moral knowledge as may appear by the words of Apuleius. I admire those who know not how to plant a vine, to till the ground, or to grafted a tree, to tame a horse or a bull, or to shear a sheep, yet give themselves to wisdom; neither do I commend any thing they do, so much as the hatred they seem to bear to idleness. For when the cloth is laid before they bring any meat, all the young men come thither from divers places and offices. Then the masters examine them what good they have done since the break of day unto that hour, to whom one of them answers, that he hath been chosen arbitrator to end a controversy betwixt two men, and that he hath made them good friends: another saith, that he hath obeyed his parents, who have commanded him something: another that he hath found something of himself, or that he hath learned of another, or such like thing. He that hath not employed himself in any thing, and cannot give an account of that which he hath done, is sent away without his dinner.  
The Germane care and study was to know man's body, they kept themselves covered, they lived of rice, & meal; and in curing of diseases, among all other medicaments, they did command unctions and cataplasms. Some among them were given to divinations and enchantments, they practised negromancy, and they went wandering from town to town, and from place to place.  
The Premmes were enemies to all these, and had no delight but to reprehend others; and these Premmes were divided into Montagnars, Gymnetes, and Civils.  
The second rank was of Labourers, who exceeding all the rest in number, were freed from going to the war. The enemy never spoiled them, but every man suffered them to live in peace, as thinking them to be borne for the good and profit of all the world. By this means, they saw abundance of all things in this country, and these men lived in the fields with their wives and children, paying the king his tribute.  
The third order was of all sorts of Pastors and shepherds, which did not live in towns nor boroughs, but in tents in the fields, whereas they lived of hunting, and did set snares and gins for beasts, by which means they did preserve the corn from the destroying of beasts, which swarm in those countries, and do much annoyed the first-fruits and seed.  
The Artisans held the fourth rank, and some made arms and instruments for war; others tools for labourers, and other instruments that were profitable and necessary, whereof they had use. These men were not only exempt from tributes and subsidies, but they also gave them corn out of the king's garners.  
The fift order was of Soldiers, which not withstanding were the second in number. These by a continual exercise made themselves apt for war, and how great soever the number were, their horses and elephants, fit for the war, were fed at the prince's ●●●rge.  
The sixt rank was of the Magistrates, who taking care of all things that did pass, advertised the king, to the end he might provide for it.  
The seventh and last order contained all those that did preside in public Counsels, ●●● which were few in number, but famous for their wisdom and nobility. Out of this number, they did choose the king's Councillors, and those that had the managing of great affairs, and did judge of all differences. They did also choose from among these, the captains and governors of provinces.  
There were noblemen also appointed to see there should be no wrong done unto strangers; and whenas any one fell sick, they had a care to secure him, and if he died, they caused him to be buried, delivering his money and merchandise to those that said they were his nearest kinsmen. The judges of every place had power to punish such as were convicted of any crime.  
Towards the South Sea, and Malaca, there were shepherds which lived of raw flesh, and they were called Pades, whose manner of life was; that when any one of them (were it man or woman) fell sick, they that were nearest allied unto him, slew him, saying, that if he did languish long, he would 'cause a corruption of their flesh by his sickness, and having slain him they did eat him, and after that manner they used to deal with old people.  
In some parts there were people that did kill neither man nor beast, neither did they 〈◊〉 nor build, nor live in any house, feeding only upon herbs: and for that they had certain grain like unto millet, which did grow of itself, and without any industry, they gathered it, and boiling it, made use of it for their living.  
As soon as any one among them fell sick, he retired himself into the desert, and whether he lived or died, no man had any regard, either to cure him of his sickness, or, being dead, to minister funeral rights unto him.   

¶ The Manners at this day.  
THe richest men of this country wear a short jacket or cassock, & upon their heads turbans of divers colours, like unto the Turks. The common people do only cover their privy parts, and the rest of the body is naked. When the king will go unto the war, he takes a rob of cotton, and upon this rob he carries a cloak, covered and enriched with little plates of gold: in stead of embroidery, he hath round about it rich stones of all sorts. His horse is valued at a great price by reason of his furniture which is all covered with rich stones. The people of this realm eat no bread, but live of rice, flesh, fish, and nuts which this country yields.  
As for them of Coromandel, if it chanceth that any year passeth without rain, they fall into such extremity, as they are forced to cell their children for a royal, or six pence: the which is ordinary throughout all the Indies, whereas the fathers cell their children for a small price, and many cell themselves.  
The princes desire much to have noblemen and gentlemen to be their slaves, who many times are husbands to their daughters, and heirs to their masters Estates.   

¶ The Riches.  
THey hold it for certain that the king of Narsinge hath twelve millions of gold of yearly rent, and that he spares three, or at lest two and a half every year. He employs the rest in the entertainment of his house, and men of war. Moreover, he hath two hundred captains, to whom he distributes the lands of his Estates, upon condition that they shall entertain so many horses, elephants, and footmen: and these revenues are so great, as there are some captains which have a million of gold yearly. The which must not seem incredible, 〈◊〉 that in this country, as in the greatest part of the East, all the lands, mines, forests, and the wa●●● of some rivers, are the princes: so as no man may wash himself with the water of Ganges, which runs through the realm of Bengala, nor with that of Gangue which flows through the country of Orixe, without paying a certain sum to the kings of these two countries, and the king of Narsinge doth buy the water of these two rivers, and causeth it to be brought far to bathe himself therein, and to purge himself superstitiously. The king then being master of the fountains of his Estates, and there remaining nothing unto the people but their arms and labour; it is likely, seeing that the king divides all his lands between himself and his captains, that he retains one third part for himself, and that his captains have the other two third parts; so as of necessity some of them must needs reap great sums of money thereby.   

¶ The Forces.  
SOme hold, that the king of Narsinge entertains continually forty thousand Naires, who are as gentlemen appointed for the wars, and always paid: and moreover, twenty thousand horse, whereof some are Persians, and the rest Arabians; and two hundred elephants. But whenas he is forced to go to the war, he draws to field a far greater number of men and elephants, for that some have written that his army hath held the space of thirty miles. john de Barros doth show us sufficiently what forces may be drawn out of this realm, describing the army which Chesnarae king of Narsinge led against the Idalcan in the enterprise of Rachiol. He saith, that the army was divided into many members under their captains. In the forward, did march Camaraique with a thousand horse, seventeen elephants, and thirty thousand foot: Tierabitara, with twenty thousand horse, twenty elephants, and fifty thousand foot: then Tamanapaique, with three thousand five hundred horse, thirty elephants, and sixty thousand foot: Hidapi●aique followed after, and led five thousand horse fifty elephants, and one hundred thousand foot: Condomare had six thousand h●rse, sixty elephants, and one hundred and twenty thousand foot: Comore led two thousand and five hundred horse, forty elephants, and eighty thousand foot: Gendraye one thousand horse, ten elephants, and thirty thousand foot: after him there marched two eunuches of the king's house, with one thousand horse, fifteen elephants, and forty thousand foot: the page of Betel led two hundred horse, twenty elephants, and fifteen thousand soldiers: Comarbeque had charge of four hundred horse, twenty elephants, and eight thousand foot: the king came after with his guard, in which were six thousand horse, three hundred elephants, and forty thousand foot, and of either side did march the governor of the town of Bengapor, with divers captains, under whose ensigns were four thousand and two hundred horse, five and twenty elephants, and sixty thousand foot: besides all these men there were two thousand horse, and one hundred thousand foot divided into small bands, who as scours discovered the country on either side before and behind, with such order as in an instant they knew any thing that happened. With these there went twelve thousand carriers of water, and twenty thousand whores, besides horse boys, merchants, handycraftsmen, laundresses whom they call Mamates, oxen, and beasts of burden without number. The multitude of these men did appear at the passage of a river, for that the water which came at first to the mid thigh was not able to water them that ca●● last. The king before he went to this enterprise did sacrifice in nine days two thousand thirty and six beasts, the flesh whereof was given to the poor in honour of the 〈◊〉 to the which they did sacrifice. These people were clad in cotton the which was so firm and strong, as it would resist any lance as well as a brestplat of iron, and their hor●● and elephants were covered after the same manner. Every elephant had his castle, in 〈◊〉 were four armed men: and they carried certain swords in their mouths the which did cut any thing that was before them.  
The footmen were divided into archers, pikemen, and others which carried swords 〈◊〉 targets: and for that the last carried targets which were able to cover a whole man, 〈◊〉 had no other defensive arms. I will not pass over in silence that in this war with 〈◊〉 jadalcan, the king of Narsinge having received a great rout, he took courage, and 〈◊〉 words worthy of a great prince: which were, That he had rather the jadalcan should brag he had slain him than vanquished him; whereupon he advanced, giving ●●●●age to his people, and defeated his enemy. Among other things in this defeat ●●●re were taken four thousand Arabian horses, one hundred elephants, four hundred 〈◊〉 canons, besides smaller pieces, and an infinite number of oxen, bugles, tents, and 〈◊〉. There were forty Portugals with the Idalcan in this war, and twenty with the king of Narsinge. In our time there were two captains which revolted against this king, wh●●e of the one is called Virapanai, and remains at Nagapatan, and the other called Venca●●●● hath made himself master of the places near unto Malipur.  
The king of Narsinge to have his captains ready upon all occasions, doth every year cause certain musters to be made, whither they are bound to come. He deprives them of their charges that brings fewer men than they aught, or are not well appointed.   

¶ The Religion.  
THe people of Narsinge do first of all believe in one God, the Lord of all the world, then in devils the authors of all evil, whom they honour more than the creator of all things, building many stately Temples or Pagodes unto them with good rents. In ●●me of these Temples there are men which have charge of the service of the idol, and in some others women which make love, who prostitute their bodies to get something to entertain this service and they breed up many young maidens for the same trade.  
There are so many in this country, and throughout the Indies, as in a manner two so●t● of people govern their detestable religion, and the simple consciences of these ●oore people. These be the Baneanes, and the Bramanes or Bramins. As for the Baneanes, whose number is great in this country, although they differ in sects, yet they all agreed, not to kill any living thing, nor to eat of that which hath been slain. They observe this so strictly, as they redeem birds which have been taken, and set them at liberty. They eat neither turnips nor garlic, and they use no wine nor vinegar, nor yet nymph nor ortaque, two kinds of drinks at the Indies. They macerat themselves with much fasting, taking only at night a little milk with sugar, and the most superstitious among them remain sometimes twenty days together without any meat. They give water with sugar ●o birds and ants: and in Cambaya they have made an hospital where they have care to cure diseased birds. There are some of them which seeing death approaching, bequeath part of their goods to certain persons, to the end they may go into deserts and solitaire places, and present water unto passengers to quench their thirst. They wear about their necks a flint of the bigness of an egg for their god, having certain lines drawn through the midst. They keep their candles in lanthomes to the end that butterflies may not burn themselves. They many times call others of their ●●ct, but more austere than themselves, that they may draw out the louse which they have at their backs, the which they take and feed.  
They marry but once, and when they die their wives are buried with them. They do not inter other men, but burn them, and the women in like manner. Widows which will not cast themselves into the fire, are held infamous, as if they had been convicted of adultery. The Banianes wear garments like to the ancient Brachmanes, and they believe that souls pass from one body to another. As for the Bramans or Bramins, they are much more esteemed than the Banianes, & are divided into two sects; for that some marry and remain in towns, and these retain the name of Bramans; the others never marry, and are called joques. These have no rents, but live in great austerity and upon alms: they go up and down the Indies like pilgrims, and abstain from all carnal pleasures for a certain time, after which they become Abduts, that is to say, exempt from all laws, and as it were uncapable of sin: then they plunge themselves in all beastliness and villainy, and take all the pleasures they can imagine. They have a commander who disposeth of a great revenue, and distributes it: at certain times he sends forth many joques to preach their folly up and down. The Brahmins' worship one called Parabramme, and his three sons, in whose honour they wear three strings tied to their necks. They put among the gods not only men that have done any valiant exploits, but also beasts, and they build stately and costly temples unto them. They worship apes and elephants, but much more oxen and kine. The reason why they so much esteem oxen and kine, is for that they think dead men's souls pass into these beasts rather than into any other. So as when the king creates the Naires, who are as it were knights, he gives them charge to defend the Bramins and kine. They among the Bramins which live in maritime places, called Cuncamme, eat all kind of beasts, except beef and swine's flesh. They have certain books and prophets, by means whereof they ground their superstition. They hold that God is black, thinking this colour the goodliest of all others; by reason whereof their idols are black and oily, and so deformed, as they terrify them that behold them. They persuade the people that their idols are great eaters, and therefore they 'cause them to bring much money and meat; so as by this lying they get wherewithal to make good cheer, for that the credulous people do offer twice a day unto their idols, and these Bramins eat it. There are some among them that are skilful in Astrology, but they have all more malice than learning. They have commonly many wives, and know the ten commandments of the law, and their explication, they force them whom they receive into their discipline to swear never to reveal the mysteries which they shall learn. The first thing they enjoin them is never to publish that they must worship one God creator of heaven and earth. They have a certain strange language, as we the Latin, and they teach Magic and enchantments in their schools. Their Doctors attend the divine service on Sunday, praying unto God the creator of heaven and earth, and repeating these words often: I worship thee OH God with thy grace and succours eternally. They suffer their hair to grow almost from their infancies, and they hold it sacrilege to take meat from the hands of a Christian.      


❧ A DISCOURSE OF THE ESTATE OF THE SOPHI OF PERSIA  

The Contents.  
1. THe beginning of the Sophi of Persia, and of the planting and progress of Mahomet's law. 2. Situation, limits, and confines of the realm of Persia. 3. Description of the provinces contained in this State: and first of Media, divided into the Higher, and Atropatia; and of their chief towns. 4. Of Assyria. 5. Susi●●●, and the bounds. 6. Mesopotamia. 7. Panchaia, her bounds, and the royal town of Sirrah. 8. P●rthia, and the principal towns. 9 Hyrcania, the limits, and situation of the chief town of Hyrean. 10 Margiana, and the limits. 11. Bactria, the bounds, and chief town Bactra. 12. Paropamisse, and the limits. 13. Arta, and the principal rivers. 14. Of the province of ●ra●giana, and the bounds. 15. Gedrosia. 16. Carmania, divided into two, whereof the one is ●●lled Desert: their bigness, and chief towns. 17. A more modern relation of the chiefest 〈◊〉, and which have continued longest under the dominion of Persia. 18. Of the province now called Parc. 19 Of Hierak. 20. Of Kachon. 21. Aderbaion. 22. Gueylon. 23. Korason. 24. Ker●●●, 25. Maurenahar. 26. Vzbek. 27. A description of the fertility of one part of the pro●●●eses of this realm, and the barrenness and drought of the other part. 28. Abundance in this country of Bitumen, and Naphte, Amomum, called by some Ethiopia Pepper, Cotton, Dates, 〈◊〉, Figs, Trees distilling Honey, Wine, bunches of Grapes two cubits long, precious stones, Emeralds, jacinths, Chrysolites, Sapphires black and yellow, spikenard, Myrrh, wild beasts, as Tigers, Panthers, and Leopards. 29. The custom and manner of living of the ancient Persians, and f●st of the dwelling of their kings in mountains, and what tribute they did raise of their people▪ 30. Of the celebration of their marriages; plurality of wives allowed: of the exercise and breeding of their youth, and the manner of their arms and apparel. 31. Ceremonies at their obsequys; of their sacrifices, and the Deities which they did worship. 32. Of the valour of the anc●●●t Parthians, and the simplicity of their manners and apparel: their arms and kind of fight: their ordinary meat, and barbarous custom touching the burying of the dead, first to expose the bodies to dogs and birds, and then to bury the bones. 33. Of the effeminate disposition of the Medians; their alliances made with effusion of blood: their bread made of the meal of Almonds: and their drink composed of roots. 34. Apparel of the ancient Assyrians, and their custom to carry a Ring and a Sceptre. 35. The law and custom of Assyria, to expose the fai●e●● virgins to sale, and to marry the foulest with the money. 36. Another custom to set sick persons in public places, to receive council and help from such as had been troubled with the 〈◊〉 infirmities. 37. Of the anointing of their dead bodies with honey, and of their funerals, like 〈◊〉 those of Egypt. 38. Carnal conjunction of the Assyrian Ladies with strangers, in honour of the goddess Venus. 39 Of the Mages, Assyrians, called Chaldeans, in like honour to the Gymnosophists, and Priests of Egypt: what their doctrine was touching the Divinity; moral, and natural things. 40. Custom of the Carmaniens to go to the war, and to fight upon Asses; and not to marry, until they have made a feast with some head of their enemies slain in battle. 41. People of sixty years old in Margiana, knocked on the head by the custom of the country, and their bodies eaten by their kinsfolks. 42. Civility, and courteous disposition of the modern Persians, given to sciences, to traffic and to mechanic arts; courting Ladies, and sumptuous in their apparel, using at this present the Arabian tongue. 43. Their riches consisting in cloth of gold and silk, and also, in the traffic of pearls and precious stones. 44. What the revenues of this Persian Prince be. 45. What his forces, foot, and Persian discipline, and what number of horse he may draw to field. 46. What mighty enemies he confines with. 47. The government of the realm of Persia, differing from that of the Turks. 48. Of the four principal sects of Mahomet's religion, and which of the four is followed by the Persians at this day. 49. Of the jews, and Christian Melchites, Nestorians, and Armenians, dwelling in Persia. 50. An abridgement of the Chronicle of the kings of Persia, according to the Historiographer Mirkond.   

THe Sophy's empire is at this day numbered among the mightiest monarchies of all the East; and although it were for a time suppressed by the Sarrazins, and also by the Tartarians, who brought it very low, and first under Chingis, then by Tamerlan, or Tamberlan; yet it hath recovered her ancient glory almost in ourage, by the valour of Ishmael. sophy, of whose beginning it shall be fit to discourse in this place, for that it doth much import to the knowledge of the Estate of the realm of Persia.  
You must therefore understand, that Mahomet (the Author of that cursed sect, which reigns at this day in so many places) having purchased great reputation among the Arabians, by his new doctrine, took to his second wife Aisse, daughter to one called Bubac, or Abubacer, a man of great authority, and exceeding rich; and through the favour of this Bubac, and of Omar, and Ottomar, his kinsmen, he gathered together a great number of Arabians, and under colour of religion conquered many of the neighbour countries. In the mean time, he gave in marriage to Ally, his cousin, his daughter Fatima, borne of his last wife, and dying, being sixty three years old, he left him his Estate, and the superiority of all his sect, with the name of Calise. But Bubac being discontented, that Mahomet (who had made himself great by his favour) had preferred Alley before him, who was yet but a young man; he expelled him out of this Estate, being assisted by Omar, and Ottomar, who desired rather to have this than the other for Calise, for that he was of their blood, his age also giving them hope of a speedy succession, as it happened. Bubac had these two for his successors one after another; whereof Omar was slain by a slave, and Ottomar in a sedition; so as the charge of Calise returned to Ally, but he did not enjoy it quietly, for that many, under colour that he had given consent to the death of Ottomar his master, made war against him, and in the end slew him in the town of Cusa, which stands near to the river of Euphrates beneath Bagder, and therefore it is called Massadall, that is to say, the house of Ally, for that he was interred there. After his death, they of Cusa declared Ocen, the son of Fatina, Calise, who was also deposed, and poisoned by Mavia, who made himself absolute Calife, and had for successor jasil his son. Ocen left twelve sons, one of which was called Mahomet Mahadin, whom the Mahometans hold is not yet dead; so as they expect him, saying, that he shall come to convert all the world: and for this cause, at Massadal, where (in their opinions) this conversion should begin, there is always a horse ready, which they bring unto the Mosque with great solemnity. By reason of the controversies which Ally had with Bubac, Omar, Ottomar, and Mavia, there hath been since great contentions, for that the Persians hold, that Ally was, by the testament of Mahomet, declared true Calife; and the Arabians favour the three first. Matters being thus irresolute, about the year 1369, the Mahometans, or Moors, finding themselves without a Calife (for these ended, in the year 1255, with Mustacen Mumbila, who was slain by Allacu king of the Tartarians) there did rise in Persia one called Sophy, who said, that he was issued from the blood of Ally, by his nephew Muse Cercin, who was one of the twelve sons of Ocen, in memory of whom he changed the fashion of his turban, adding twelve points unto it, and brought his sect into credit and reputation. He had for successor Guinne his son, and to him succeeded his son Aidar who married the daughter of Assembec a mighty prince in Assyria, and Persia, but newly established: but his son called jacob Bec caused him to be slain, fearing the credit and authority of Aidar; then he gave the two sons of Aidar, the one called Ishmael, the other Solyman, to Amanzar his captain, commanding him to imprison them at Zalque or Zaligue, a strong castle seated in the mountains; but Amanzar detesting the cruelty of his master caused them to be bred up in his own house with his children, and falling dangerously sick, fearing lest some disaster should come unto them, he gave them two hundred crowns and horses, advising them to go unto their mother. Ishmael the eldest being come unto her house resolved presently to revenge his father's death, and after some enterprises happily executed, he took upon him the title of Protector of the deeds of Ally or Haly, from whom he descended: having made his Turban higher, he sent Ambassadors to all the princes of the East, exhorting them to receive his badge with his sect: by this means, and by the good success of his enterprises he made himself fearful to all the East: he slew Ocen, who termed himself king of Persia, with ten of his brethren, so as not any one remained but Morabec, who went to crave aid from Selim the first of that name, Emperor of the Turks. He vanquished in battle near unto the lake of Van or Vay, Sabacan king of the Tartarians of Zacatay, and meaning to pursue the victory, and to pass the river of Abbian with his army, he was diverted by an Astrologian, to whom he gave great credit, who told him that he saw good success for his passage, but no such disposition for his return. He left unto his successor a powerful Estate, which contains many great countries; all which did acknowledge him for sovereign, although they were not immediately under his crown, as the realms of Macram, Patani, Guadel, and Ormus which is now tributary to the Portugals. The Georgians did also obey him, or at the lest made war under him: but as this day the Sophy's Empire hath not such large extended bounds, but is limited after this manner.  
It lies betwixt the Turks Empire, the Tartarians of Zatacay, the realm of Cambaya, the Caspian Sea, or that of Bachu, and the Persian Gulf. So as upon the East it is divided from the Indies, and the realm of Cambaya by the deserts and mountains; and confines upon the North partly with the Tartarians near unto the river of Oxus or Abiam, and partly with the river of Bachu: upon the West with the Turks, near unto the river of Tigris, and the lake of Gioco: and on the South it hath for bounds the Persian Gulf. This continent of country is very great, and comprehends about eight and thirty degrees from East to West, for the most easterly Meridian is in the one hundred and twentieth degree, and the most Westerly passeth by the four score and second degree of the Equator. It doth also contain about twenty degrees from South to North, that is to say, from the three and twentieth degree unto the three and fortieth.  
The realm of Persia contains the provinces of Media, Assyria, Sufu, Mesopotamia, Persia, Parthia, Hyrcania, Margiana, Bactria, Paropamissa, Aria, Drangiana, Gedrofia, and Carmania: and although the Turk hath won some of them, yet the Sophi hath at this day recovered the greatest part.  
Media is at this day called Seruan, and confines upon the East with Hyrcania, and Parthia: upon the West, with high Armenia, and Assyria: towards the South with the particular province of Persia: and to the North, with the Caspian sea. This country was in former times the most powerful of all Asia, and was divided into high Media and Atropatia.  
High Media contains at this day the country which is about the city of Tavis, which some believe to be Ecbatane, at the lest Ortelius and Minador are of this opinion: whereas Paulus iovius holds that this should be Terua, and Niger Tigranoama, but falsely, according to the opinion of learned Migin. This town is situated at the foot of the mountain of Oronte, and some eight days journey from the sea of Bacu: it is in circuit about sixteen miles, but not compassed about with any walls. There were in it about two hundred thousand inhabitants before that Amurath took it in the year one thousand five hundred eighty and five: but since it is much d●c●yed as some hold. This in former times was the royal seat of the Sophies, before that Tamas transported it to the town of Tasbin, which is the last abode of these kings, and lies more southerly than Tauris. There is also in high Media, the town of Turcoman betwixt Tauris and Casbin, and the towns of Saru, Sultania, and Nassivan, which according to the opinion of some is the ancient Nasuana, or Artaxata. There is also the town of Ardoville, in the which have reigned Guinet, Sederdin, and some other authors of the Sophy's Sect. They do also make some account of Marant at the end of Media, and Sancazin, a place near unto Tauris famous for the war which hath been betwixt Amurath Emperor of the Turks, and the Sophi of Persia. And although that the Turks have held a part of this country somewhat long, yet may we well attribute it at this day to the king of Persia, for that he hath in a manner recovered all of late years from the Turk.  
Atropatia is the most Northerly part of Media, near to the sea of Bacu, and it is divided from Armenia by the river of Canac: the chief town is Sumaquie, and it is seated betwixt Derbent and Eree. There is also the towns of Sechi, which is upon the frontiers of Gurgestan; javat, on the confines of high Media; and Eres, the which in former times was famous by reason of the great store of silk which comes from thence.  
Assyria (which Niger calls Adrise, Girana Azemie, Pinet Mosul, Mercator Saith, and Castaldus Arzerum, and some also give it the name of Cussestan) lies betwixt high Armenia upon the North, Mesopotamia on the West, Susiana upon the South, there being mountains betwixt them, and the country of Media upon the East. It was in old time in reputation by reason of the Empire that was settled there, and of the city of Ninive seated near unto the river of Tigris, the which was greater than Babylon. In former times it contained the provinces of Arapad●it, Adiaben, & of Sittacen, which some at this day call Botan, Sarca, and Rabia.  
Susiana, or the province of Suses, which Niger calls Chus, and Mercator Cusistan, hath for bounds upon the North, Assyria: upon the West, Babylon near to the river of Tigris: on the East, a part of Persia: and to the South; the Persian gulf. It hath taken this name of Susiana, of the famous city of Suses, which Niger doth now call Chus, and some others sister: it is built upon the river of Enele, which is now called Tirtir, and hath fifteen miles in circuit, being of a long form.  
Mesopotamia, called in the Scripture Aram, or Charam, and at this day Diarbech, according to Mercator; but it is only a part of Azemia, whereof Assyria makes the rest, as Belon affirms: it is situated betwixt the two famous rivers of Euphrates, and Tigris, and hath for bounds towards the North, High Armenia, near to Mount Taurus; towards the West, Syria, joining to the river of Euphrates; upon the East, Assyria, divided by Tigris; and upon the South, Arabia the Desert. The chief towns are Orfe, which hath seven miles in circuit, and is famous by the death of Crassus: Caramit, that is to say in the Turkish language, a Black town, the which in old time was called Amida, and is in the country which they call Alech, and the chief of all Mesopotamia, the which was taken by Selim Emperor of the Turks: Merdin, the seat of the Patriarch of the Chaldeans: and Mosus, the seat of the Patriarch of the Nestorians, whose authority extends to Cataya, and the Indies.  
The particular province of Persia, was in old time called Panchaia, of the name of king Panch●e, afterwards the Grecians gave it the name of Cephene, and then it took that of Persia, by reason of Persius who was transported out of Greece into Asia: but now it is called Frasi, or Frasistan according to Mercator, yet some hold it to be Azemia, & Cedrens lays it in the country of Chorasan. It hath for bounds on the North, Media; to the West, Susiana; to the East, Caramania; & on the South, the Persian gulf, which takes his name of this province, and runs along it for the space of six hundred thousand paces. The chief town is Sirrah, which in old time was called Persepolis, as some affirm, or Cytopolis, according unto others, and it was the abode of the wife Kings of the East. At this day it is one of the beautifullest towns of the East, having twenty miles in circuit, comprehending the suburbs; it is seated upon the river of Bindimir, and contains sixty thousand houses.  
Parthia, called at this day by Niger, Charassen, taking his name from the town of Charas, but (according to Mercator) it is called Arach, or (by Alphonso Hadrian) jex. It hath for confines upon the East, the province of Aria; to the South, Carmania the Desert; upon the West, the Medians; and to the North, Hyrcania. The chief towns are Castan, which is very rich, Sembran, Teracan, Amadan, Imammadulasar, Malam, Massiat, Sasuar, Coran, Culbat, Cut, Ciem, Turbat, Tursis, and others. But the chief city is Hispaham, which some say was the ancient Hecatompylis, & it is so great and so beautiful, as the Persians term it half a World.  
Hyrcania, is called by some Barbarians, as Niger affirms, Girgiam, or Corcam, but he saith, that it is called Mesandre towards the towns of Stranue, and Errit. Minado writes, that all Hyrcania is called Mesandre, but Erythreus calls it Hyrach. Maria Angiolesse gives it the name of strove; and Mercator, of Diargument. The limits are upon the West, Media; upon the East, Margiana; to the South, Parthia, Mount Coron being in the midst; and the Sea of Bachu upon the North. The chief town of this province is called Hircan, the which is very strong by situation: the Scythians call it Charizat, as Pinet affirms: the other towns are Bestan, Mesandran, and some others.  
Margiana is called Tremigan by Pinet, and Niger holds that it is a part of Tartary of Zacatay: but Castaldus, and some others, call it jeselbas': It hath for bounds upon the East, Bactria; to the West, Hyrcania; to the North, the river of Oxus; and upon the South, a part of Aria. The chief city of Margiana, is Antioch, to the which some at this day give the name of Ind●oy. In this country they place the marshes of Oxiane, which they now call the lake of Barbacamber, or of Maru.  
Bactria carries at this day the name of Batter, according to Ramusius: but Castaldus and others call it Charassan; and Niger will have it a part of Tartary of Zacaray. It hath for bounds upon the East and North, Sogdia, near to the river of Oxus; and upon the West, Margiania, joining to the mountains; and towards the South, the province of Aria, the mountain of Paropamisse being in the midst. In old time there were goodly towns in this country, whereof some were built, and others ruined by Alexander. But the royal town was Bactria, which took the name from a river which is at this day called Bochara, as Niger writes, and is yet the chief of the country, in which Auicenna the physician, and Zoroaster, were borne. Some others say, that Istigias is the chief town of this province, the which is not all under the Sophy's command.  
The country of Paropamisse, so called for that it is fashioned like an Island, being watered in a manner round about with rivers, is called Dache by Niger; but Minadoc gives it the name of Candahar; and others, of Sablestan. It hath for bounds towards the North, a part of Bactria, near to the mountain of Paropamisse; to the East, Aria; to the South, Aracosia; and towards the West, the Indies. Candahar is the chie●e town of this country.  
Aria (to the which Niger gives the same name, and others, that of Eri) is called by Castaldus, Corsan; and by Mercator, Se●nere, lies betwixt Margiana, and ●actria, upon the North; on the West it hath Parthia, and Carmania the Desert; upon the South, Drangiana; and to the East, the country of Paropamisse. There are in this country three principal rivers, Aria, Tonelet, and Arapen. There is also the marish of A●en, called at this day the lake of Burg●an. The chief town is Eri, the which hath in circuit 13000 paces.  
The Province of Drangiana is now called Sigestan, according to Mercator, and many others; but Niger saith, that Aracosia, with Drangiana, is called Sigestan: Some say, that they call this the realm of Cabul, the which is upon the frontier of the Sophy's kingdom towards the West, and that it hath a particular king, which is a Mahometan. The bounds are upon the North and West, Aria, under the mountain of Bagoe; towards the South, a part of Gedrosia; and to the East, Aracosia. This province is divided by the river of Drangie, which the new makers of maps call Ilment: this country is so enclosed with mountains, as the river doth scarce found any passage.  
Gedrosia carries at this day the name of Charman, as Niger affirms, and Circan, according to Castaldus: Mercator calls it Gest; and Girava, and Molet, give it the name of Guzarate: but it is most certain, that Guzarate is the realm of Camboye. It hath for limits towards the North, Drangiana, and Aracosia; upon the West, Carmania; and towards the East, a part of the Indies, or the realm of Camboye; and upon the South, the Indian Sea.  
Carmania, at this Charman, is divided into two, according unto Ptolemy; one part is called Desert; and the other is comprehended under the sole name of Carmania; and it is termed by some others the High country: Some do at this day call it Dulcinde, or Carmania the Desert, in which there are no towns, but only some few scattered villages. The limits are upon the North, Parthia; to the West, a part of the province of Persia; towards the South, the other Carmania; and towards the East, Aria.  
The other Carmania lies betwixt Gedrosia the Desert, a part of Persia, and the Indian Sea, and is called High or Great, to distinguish it from the Desert. All this province extends itself near unto the Sea two hundred leagues; but there is not any good port, nor safe coming for ships, by reason of the rocks and sands. The chief city of the country is Chirman. Some at this day divide Carmania into two parts, whereof the one is called Dulcinde, which lies most Eastward, upon the frontiers of Camboye, and contains the realms of Macran, Eracan, Guadel, and Patan, which were in old time tributaries to the kings of Persia, and all this country is ill inhabited. The other part of Carmania lies more Westerly, the which hath more commodious Ports, and many towns.  
Thus I have succinctly set down what I could found among Authors, and the relations of some that have traveled those countries: but it seems that Teixiere (of whom we shall hereafter speak more particularly) hath distinguished it better, calling every thing by his proper name, whereby they may more plainly observe the places where the most famous actions have past, the which shall be seen in the summary of the History following this small relation: for as he was very curious to observe any thing that was rare where he passed, so did he study to have a perfect knowledge of the affairs and situation of this realm, having a design one day to writ an Abridgement of the History, as he hath done. He therefore entitles this petty discourse which he hath written upon this subject:  

¶ A brief relation of the chief Provinces, and which have continued longest under the Pesians command.  
PErsia (saith he) which they that are borne in the country call Parc or Agem, whereupon the inhabitants are commonly called Pary or Agemy, being one of the greatest monarchies, and the most famous and best peopled in the world, cannot be discovered, nor have any certain bounds given unto it, for the variety that is found in that king's dominions, the realms and provinces whereof have been sometime very great, and sometimes of a small extension, whereof I will briefly set down those which have longest continued under that government, and which have changed lest, and of the principal people in like manner, to serve as a light to that which hath been written, leaving the situation to the professors of cosmography.  
Parc. This province is none of the greatest of the realm, having the great and noble town of Seyraz for the chief: it abounds in Corn, Flesh, and Fruits, having great store of rose water and cordovan skins, of which things they make great traffic with all the realms subject unto Persia: they do also make certain stuffs of the silk that grows thereabouts. That which next unto it, is of most reputation, is the town of Lar or Lara, as the Portugals call it, of which the Laris have take their name, it is a kind of coin made of very fine silver, the which is well known and very currant throughout all the Estate. This is the head of a realm, whereas they make the best bows for shooting that are in all Persia. In this town in the month of September in the year 1593., there was so great an earthquake, as besides one thousand and two hundred houses that were overthrown, the greatest part of the walls were ruined, with many cisterns, (for they have no other water in those parts but that which comes from the rain) and it slew three thousand persons. There is also in this province of P●rc, Tarom, jaharom, Kazron, and Lastam, which bears the Ingo (which is the Assase●ida) S●ahabanon, the inhabitants whereof are all bald: Nereij, whose lands abound in vennes of iron, and fine azure: they do make exceeding good arms there, and other curious things. Paçah, and Daraguerd famous by reason of their first-fruits both green and dry, whereof they have abundance, and of rose water. Besides these there are also divers others which are of less esteem.  
Hienak, it is another province of Persia, great and important, the which hath for her metropolitan, Lusphaon, a city well peopled, which was sometimes the seat of the kings of Persia. There is great traffic, being well f●r●ished of all things necessary. The places and towns of most note in this province are, Yazd, the which is famous, not for the greatness, but for that it is very pleasant and delightful, and for the rich Persian tapistry that is made there, being the best in the world. There is also store of silk, and excellent rosewater.  
Kachon is famous for the great abundance of silks of all sorts which they have there. The soil is very fertile in all kinds of first-fruits, among which they make great account of the quinces of Kachon, as very excellent. There is also Kom, Saoah, Kazuin a famous city, being at this present the court of the kings of Persia since the last loss of Tabris, Amedon, Nuhaoand, jargazin, Damaoand, Taharon, Rey Charear, whereas they gather great store of Manna, but none of the purest; and many other places of less reputation.  
Aderbajon, or Azarbajon As for this province it is very great, the chief city whereof is that famous Tabr●ss the court of the kings of Persia, before it fell into the Turks power: they found in it abundance of many rare things, being moreover very well furnished with all things necessary. It hath great traffic with Russia, Polonia, Muscovia, Circassia, Gurgestam, and with all the provinces of Persia▪ ●t yields silver in some places, store of alum, and madder or woad, which the inhabitants call Calang●ss There is also in this province, Seyrnan, Nakthoan, Hordobat, Ardavel or Hardevil, H●lkhan, and many others.  
Gueylon or Guylan. This other province is under the power of the Persian, and is of a great extension, containing many large and rich countries: it doth coast along the Caspian sea, which hath taken her name of this province; for the Persians call it Duriah Gueyluny, that is to say, the sea of Gueylon: it is divided to five governments, the chief cities whereof are Rach, Laion, Gaechkar, Langar, Kanou, Kudam; and as for Gueylon they do commonly call it Eudsafe●, that is to say, white India, by reason that the land is pleasant and fertile: it confines with Musco●i●, which the Persians call Mosew.   

These towns following are upon the shore, and near unto the Caspian sea.  
Mazandaron, Strabat, Bos●am, Sabzabah, Nichabur (whence the Turks are come) and others, all which in old time were the heads of realms and provinces, but now they are reduced under the private governments of Persia: all which cities are very well peopled.  
Karason. The Portugals do commonly call it Corasou, it is another province subject to the realm of Persia, in the which there is much people and many towns of great reputation: the first is Meched, a great and populous town, in the which the kings of Persia, and since Sehaeh Ishmael Sophi, have been buried. There is also the town of Thun, which abounds with fine silk: Tabas which is very well peopled: Kahera fertile in safron: Hrey whereas they gather good store of excellent Manna, the walls of which town are bathed with the fresh river of Habra: Marwo, Herat, and others in great number. They draw out of this province great store of Persian tapistry, of assafedita, and other things, and it abounds in all things necessary for the life of man: it was always subject to the kings of Persia, but part of it is now under the command of the Vsbeques, who seeing the Persians busy in war against the Turks, entered the country, and seized upon many places in this province.  
Kermon. This province lies betwixt Persia and Karason, the chief whereof is called by the same name: it is populous, but not very ancient: it yields store of rose-water, Persian tapestries, and tutia, which is good against worms.   

There are also many other provinces in Persia.  
Sagistam, Tubarstam, Kable●tam, Nim, Ruz, Sphahar, Sistam, Curdestum, Lorestam, and many others which are not so famous, the which to avoid tediousness are not here mentioned.  
The whole country of Persia, or at the lest the greatest part is very well furnished with wheat, flesh, and first-fruits both green and dry, as well such as we have in Europe, as others, the which are sold good cheap: the people are white and fair, and of a gentle disposition, and their garments are in a manner like to the Turks. They follow the sect of Morth Aly, which differs in some articles from that of Mahomet. They fight for the most part on horseback with a lance and target, bows and arrows, a sword or scimitar, shirts of meal, and battle axes. They are strong in war, and endure much. The Persians are all given to the reading of books, whereof they make great account. They apply themselves much to poesy, wherein there have been very excellent men, who have left good works. They are of an amorous complexion, and have the knowledge of all speculative arts and sciences, and the professors thereof handle them with much curiosity and subtlety: their common law contains no more volumes but that of the sect whereof they make profession, committing the administration of justice to men of reputation. The men are very jealous, and the women not very chaste. To conclude, Persia is one of the nearest monarchies of the world, and is not to be esteemed among the lest.  
There comes commonly from all the parts of Persia to Harmus or Ormus, great Caravans to traffic with the Portugals, and with many Christians, Gentiles, and Moors which remain there, to whom they vent their commodities, that is to say, gold, silver, silks both raw and wrought, satin stripped with gold, Persian tapestries, horses, woad, alum, rhubarbe, rose-water, & divers other merchandise; and in exchange they take garments and fine caps, cloves, cinnamon, agnus castus, cardamome, ginger, mace, nutmegs, sugar, tin, sandal, brasell wood, porcelain of China, musk, amber, the wood of aloes, fine stones, seed pearl, indigo, (a colour which they use in steed of woad) azure, and many other things. The Persians have not any navigation but that of the Caspian sea, and some which go unto the Indies make their voyage by Ormus in Portugal ships, or in others with their permission.  
All the inhabitants of Persia are moors Chyays, who make the better part, or pagan Gaoryazdie, which worship the fire, who although they be many in number, yet are they few in regard of the rest. There are some jews which live in their liberty throughout all the provinces of Persia, of which there are eight or ten families. There are also good numbers of Christians, Armenians, and Nestorians.  
Maurenahar. So they call the country which is beyond the river of Gerum which divides it from Karason, in which are Korrazin, and Gazuetien, then follows Turquestam, Vsbek, Tatur, Ketao, Kotan, and others almost without number, the which are both rich and warlike.  
Vsbek: this is a very great province, and hath been always subject to Persia, but now it is not only separated, but also makes war against it, and hath u●●●ped some of the lands that were subject unto it. This province is very great, and contains many people, and cities of reputation. The Metropolitan is Balk, there is also Samarkand, the country of Teymurlangh, Damarkand, Bokara, the country of Boaly or Auicenne, Kachghar, Achkhar, from whence comes the good Rhubarbe, and many other things.  
The inhabitants are warlike, they fight on horseback, with bows and arrows, a lance, sword, target, and shirt of male, always flying; yet they have much increased their command in our days, amongst others, they have conquered the realm of Kandar, the king whereof, some fifty years since, seeking to fortify himself, made himself vassal to the great Mogor, who although he be very powerful, yet could he not restore him to his realm. The Vsbekes have no king that comes to the crown by inheritance, but whenas their commander dies, they choose another. These people are well limmed, and strong, and they speak in the nose like unto the Chinois, whom they resemble much in their actions and pronunciation. This is all that Teixiere reports, which serves as an introduction to his History, speaking of all these people, and the names being changed, and agreeing not with the ancient, the Reader may be much troubled in reading this discourse, especially whenas the affairs of Persia were in their greatest confusion.   

¶ The Quality.  
IN this long tract of country they found great difference touching the quality of the soil, for that in some places it is exceeding fertile, as near unto the Persian gulf, by reason of the many rivers that do water it, and in like manner towards the Caspian sea, as well for the commodity of rivers, as also for that the air is more temperate, and the winds cool. The rest is subject to drought, and unfurnished with waters, and there are many deserts, and rough mountains. Moreover, there is not any common river, neither are they very navigable, yet the country abounds in metals and stones. But we must examine all the parts of this empire, and consider the quality of every province.  
As for the country of Media, it is for the most part hilly, and cold, especially towards the North, by reason whereof there grows little corn, and they have scarce any thing but fruit trees, and wild beasts; for corn grows but slowly, and they feed no tame cattle: but that part which lies towards the South, abounds in wheat, wine, and tame beasts. High Media enjoys a good air near to Tauris, although the winds blow hard, and it be somewhat cold. The soil about this town is fertile in all things. As for Atropatia, it is very fertile, by reason of the rivers of Araxe, and of Cire, which water it: and in old time there was great store of silks.  
Assyria is a plain country, abounding in rivers, and exceeding fertile. As for Susiana, towards the Persian gulf, it is very Moorish: it is exceeding hot, by reason of certain high mountains which lie upon the North part, and keep away those winds. It yields store of wheat, and abundance of barley, yet there are some places full of Bitumen, whereas plants grow difficultly, and the waters favour of Bitumen, and engender a pain in the bowels; by reason whereof the men live little. There is also store of Naphte, which they dig near to the town of Suse. In this country they have many dangerous serpents, the which do much harm to men.  
Mesopotamia is wonderful fertile in some parts, and fit for the breeding of cattle; but in some others it is subject to such heat, as many beasts cannot endure it by reason of the extremity. There are few fountains in these places, and the inhabitants are so subtle and malicious as they hide them. It is ba● traveling in winter in this country, by reason of the mire, out of which a man can hardly draw his feet. There are also in this province great deserts, and many places of great circuit, whereas they found nothing but sand, without any fruit: yet the gather Amomum there, which is a sweet smelling drug. There is also store of Naphte, or liquid Bitumen. The soil about the town of Caramic is black, and exceeding fertile: and that of the town of Merdin, doth abound in cotton.  
As for the province of Persia, it is of divers qualities; for that the most Northerly part, is hilly and cold, and not fit for first-fruits. They found Emeralds, but they are not very clear. The middle part of this country is plain, and furnished with many rivers and lakes, and yields abundance of all things. But that part which lies near to the South, and bends towards the Persian gulf, is hot, windy, and moorish, and bears no fruit, but Dates of Palm trees.  
In regard of Parthia, it is full of woods, and environed with very high mountains, and although it be subject to great heat, yet it bears all things, especially great trees, but it hath no Olives. It is watered by a great number of streams.  
Hyrcania is plain and fertile; for it yields abundance of wheat, wine, figs, and first-fruits, and it doth bear trees, from which doth distil honey, and they make much silk, That part which lies towards the North, is full of great forest, where there are many great Oaks, Pines, and Fir trees; and there is great store of wild beasts, as Tigers, Panthers, and Leopards: but that part which lies near to the Sea of Bachu, is always full of grass and flowers, by reason of the humidity of the fresh water which comes out of the rocks.  
Margiana is for the most part desert, and full of sand, except that part which is watered by the rivers of Marge, and Aria, for there it is exceeding fertile. The desert part is now called the Desert of Bigul: but that which is manured, was sometime called the Margien field, being in circuit one hundred and ninety thousand paces. Antiochus Sother (as Niger affirms) did environ it with a wall: but they draw many stocks of vines from this place, the which are so great, as sometimes two men cannot fathom them. These stocks do sometimes carry bunches of grapes two cubits long, and the nature of the soil, and the air of this place is such, as there are no vines to be seen in any other place, and that which is more admirable, this countries is of all sides environed with mountains, and in a manner all sand.  
Bactria is of divers natures, for that some part is manured, and another part desert. That part which is manured, lies near to the river of Ox, and brings forth wheat, and such like things. There is reasonable good pasture, and many waters, and it bears in a manner all kind of trees, except Olives. As for the desert part, there is nothing to be seen but sand, and travelers pass, as in a Sea, governing themselves by the Stars, for that most commonly there is no tract, by reason of the motion of the sand, especially when a Westerly wind blows, the which doth so stir up the sand, as travelers are sometimes covered therewith, and die. Moreover, this country yields metals, and some precious stones, as Emeralds, jacynthes, and Chrysolites, and it is watered by many rivers, all which falls into Oxis.  
The province of Aria is subject to great heat, and environed with deserts, forests, and mountains: yet there are some Champion fields which bear first-fruits, near unto the mountains, which defend them from the heat of the Sun. In these fields (besides other first-fruits) there grows good wine, which will last ninety years. They gather also a drug like unto Myrrh, and they found black sapphire, and some inclining to yellow.  
Gedrosia is for the most part desert, and full of sand. It hath great want of water, notwithstanding that it hath rain in Summer, and it is subject to the heat of the Sun, by reason whereof it is barren, yet it yields Nard and Myrrh.  
Caramania, the Desert, is also barren, and subject to great heat, and as for the higher, the maritime parts are desert, and without trees, only they found some Palm trees, and bushes: but the midst of the country is reasonable good, and bears much fruit, and good wine.   

¶ The Manners of the Ancients.  
THe Persian kings caused their palaces to be built upon mountains, whereas they kept their treasure, and the money which they levied of their subjects for taxes and tributes, as a testimony of their sparing, and good husbandry. They did exact their customs, tributes, and ●olless diversely, taking silver for the traffic that was made by sea, but for that which passed by land they contented themselves with those things whereof the country did yield abundance, as wool, drugs, and such like, yea and cattle. How great soever the king were among the Persians, yet dared he not put any man to death if he had committed but one simple crime, and no Persian might use any severity against his household servant. Every man married many wives to have issue, and yet it was lawful for them to have a great number of concubines. So the kings propounded a price, or recompense to them that could get most children in one year, the which being borne were never represented unto their fathers until they were five years old; for the law of that country would that they should be bred up delicately during that time in the company of women: the reason whereof was, that if during that time any child should die, the father having never seen it should not be so much grieved. They did celebrat their marriage's in the Spring about the Equinoctial. The first night the husband did not eat any ●hing at supper but an apple, or some little of the marrow of a camel, and then went ●nd lay by his wife.  
The youth of Persia from the fift year of their age unto four and twentieth did ●earne to ride, vault, and cast a dart and shoot, but above all things, to speak truly. For ●he young men had for their masters and governors the wisest, and most virtuous, so●er, and continent men that might be chosen, who taught them, and read unto them histories, and honest morals, the praises of the gods, and songs which contained the deeds of famous and valiant men, sometime singing them, and sometimes reciting them as a lesson. Children gathered together to hear this by the sound of a little bell, in a place appointed to that end, and there they required an account of that which the children had heard: they made them very nimble in running, choosing some infant of a great house for their captain, and the field wherein they did run must contain at the lest thirty stades, whereof every one is one hundred twenty and five paces. And to harden them against heat and cold, they did practise them to swim over torrents, and violent streams, labouring continually without intermission, and being careful to keep their garments very clean, and their arms without rust. Their daintiest first-fruits were the grages of Terebinthe, which is the tree that carrieth rosin, and acorns, and wild apples, and their ordinary meat, having run, sweat, and laboured in their long exercise, was very hard bread, and of a bad taste, garden cressis, with a grain of salt flesh, either boiled or roasted, and clear water for their drink.  
Whenas they went a hunting, they followed their prey on horseback with darts, and well steeled javelins, and many arrows, and they used to cast stones with slings. Their ordinary exercise before noon was to plant and grafted trees, to pull up roots, and to busy themselves in their gardens, and to manure their grounds, or to forge, temper, and trim their arms; and others busied themselves to weave cloth, or to make nets for hunting and fishing. Their children are richly decked, and bred up so delicately during their infancy, as it was not lawful to carry them forth a hunting.  
They had a certain stone called Pyrope of great estimation among them, the which they would not suffer to touch a dead body for anything, so much they did esteem it, and they did not carry fire unto funerals, to the end it should not seem they did slightly regard him, whom they had in so great reverence. From the age of twenty unto fifty they followed arms not knowing what it was to pled, or to trade in merchandise. They used little bucklers made like a Lozenge, & besides a bow and quiver, they carried a sword and a dagger going to war, & a pointed bonnet; they had upon their breast a corselet made of scales very strongly. The princes did wear breeches and a jerkin with sleeves coming to their knees and lined with white, and on the out side it was painted, or died of divers colours. In Summer they went attired in purple, and in Winter diversly, according to their own fancies. The people did wear a double habit, which came unto the midst of their thighs, and upon their heads a great wreath of linen cloth, almost like unto their turbans at this day. Their beds and cups to drink in were enriched with gold. They consulted of their affairs fasting; but they never resolved before the had drunk freely, thinking that matters were better debated whenas the stomach and brain were a little heat with wine, and that fasting made them faint, and without force.  
They that were of acquaintance, and equal in fortune, age, and greatness, embraced when they met, and kissed one another's mouth. They that were somewhat inferior unto them, they kissed them upon the cheek: but such as were of base condition passing before any man of account, they made him a great reverence. They buried the bodies of the deceased being anointed with wax, except them of their Mages, whom they left without burial to be devoured of dogs. They had a beastly and villainous custom from all antiquity, for the sons to have the company and to lie with their own mothers. They held it a great offence to spit before their kings, and they said that the Grecians were detestable, for that they maintained the gods were come from men. They held it a base thing to be indebted, but above all things to speak an untruth. They did allow fathers which fell into want, to ease and relieve themselves by prostituting and abandoning their daughters.  
They did hold that the heaven was jupiter, and they did worship the Sun, which was called Mithra according unto some, above any other Deity: they did also worship the Moon, Venus, Fire, Earth, Water, and Wine: but they used no Statue nor Altar, neither had they any temple, but did sacrifice upon some hill or high place, to the end that every man might see it, and that the thing might be nearer to heaven. They brought the beast that was sacrificed to the Altar, having a crown, but with many curls, which being cut in pieces (the priest doing that office) every man carried his part unto his house, reserving nothing for their gods; for that their opinion was, that the gods required only the soul of the thing sacrificed: yet some among them were accustomed to burn the bowels, according to the manner of the Grecians and other nations in their sacrifices.  
Whenas they did sacrifice to the fire, it was of dry wood taking away the bark, and casting upon it fat that is nearest to the bone, and then pouring oil thereon. They did never blow the fire with their mouths, but with a fan; and if any one did presume to blow, or to cast any dead carcase or beastly thing into it, they did put him to death without remission.  
There was not any one among them that did wash himself in a river, nor piss in it, or cast any dead thing into it; yea it was forbidden to spit into a river. Finally they did honour water after this manner: whenas they came near unto any lake, river, or fountain, they made a pit in which they did cut the throat of the beast that was to be sacrificed, having a care that the blood should not run to the near water, which would have polluted all that ceremony; and the flesh of the beast thus slain, was laid by the priest upon myrrh and bay, and burnt with small piles of wood, using certain imprecations and cursings, during the which they did mingle milk, honey, and oil, with their sacrifice. These cursings were not against the water or fire, but rather against the earth, and they continued them a good space, holding in the mean time a bundle of small rods of myrrh. He that disobeyed the king, his head and arms being cut off, was left in the fields and deprived of burial.  
As for the Parthians who have been held to be very valiant before that wealth made them proud, they went very grossly attired, and had a habit particular to their nation: but being grown powerful, their garments were rich and full of gold and precious stones, or exceeding white, wherein they did imitat the superfluity of the Medians.  
As for martial discipline, their soldiers and men at arms were no men of a free condition, but chosen from among their slaves, and therefore it was not lawful for any one to make free a bondman, so as the number increased daily, and their forces become greater. They kept them carefully, and bred them up like to their own children, teaching them to shoot, and to manage horses, to the end they might serve in war; so as the king marching to war was always powerful in horses ready for all events. Whenas the king of Persia took arms against Marc Anthony, among fifty thousand horse which he had in his army, there were not above eight hundred of free condition, all the rest being slaves. They knew not how to fight hand to hand, nor in a joined battle, and much less how to force a town by assault. Their manner of fight was to run their horses at random, or in flying, and sometimes dissembling their flight, to the end they might fall upon their enemies if they were in disorder: they used no trumpets like unto our Cavallerie, but drums, as our footmen do,  
In old time, this people did so little esteem gold and silver, as they did not use it, but for the ornament of their arms. As for their private kind of living, they were very subject to their pleasures; wherefore plurality of wives was allowed among them, but they were so jealous of their reputations, as only death did purge the fault of adultery. And to the end they might not fall into such inconveniences, the husbands never suffered their wives (I will not say to come to feasts, among men) but in their presence. Some have written that the Parthians which could have no issue, brought their wives to such as they held to be their good friends, to the end they might have children by their means.  
They lived only of beasts which they took by hunting, and they did traffic, and parley together on horseback. The difference of estates and conditions among the Parthians in old time was remarkable in this, that gentlemen and free merchants went up and down the country on horseback, and slaves on foot like unto Lackeiss. The dead were not much honoured among them; for that their bodies were left upon the ground to feed dogs and birds, and whenas they had eaten all the flesh, they buried their bones carefully.  
They were devout, and given to the service of their gods, but proud, seditious, cunning, deceitful, and wilful; holding that cruelty and violence was a virtue in men, and mildness and courtesy in women: wherefore they were never at rest, but either they made war among themselves, or did infested their neighbours. They were very secret in their affairs, and of few words, and if they did obey their kings and magistrates, it was rather for fear of punishment than for any inclination they had thereunto.  
The Medians have always been held to be soft and effeminate, but they were good horsemen, and expert in shooting, and they did bear great honour unto their princes. They did wear a Tyare or round Bonnet like a Turban, and robes with sleeves. The kings of this nation had a privilege to have many wives, but in the end every man usurped the like liberty; there was only this difference, that the king might marry as many as he pleased, whereas others might have but seven: And the women also hold it a great shame if any one of them were contented with one husband, and they thought that it caused barrenness, if at the lest every woman had not above four for her recreation.  
This people made alliances in imitation of the Greeks, & they did sometimes wound themselves in their arms and shoulders, from whence came abundance of blood, for a testimony and assurance of the faith which they had sworn. And for that upon the most Northerly part of this country it is barren, they dried Almonds whereof they made meal and bread for their nourishment, adding Apples thereunto, the which they did knead, making lamps thereof for their use. Their drink was made of certain roots, and they did eat the flesh of wild beasts, little esteeming those that were tame.  
The Assyrians in old time did wear two robes, whereof the one was long, coming down to their heels, and another short upon it; both which were of linen cloth, and upon them they had a rob that was exceeding white, wearing shoes like unto the Thebans. They let their hair grow, and did wear high pointed caps like unto the miters of the ancient Persians, and they never went out of their houses, but they were perfumed with musk. Every one of them had a ring which served him for a seal, and he carried a Sceptre in his hand, upon the which was drawn a flower, or some fruit, or such like; for it was held an unseemly thing among them to come forth in public, without a Sceptre, and some figure to adorn it.  
As for the laws which the people used, one was, that virgins which were apt to be married should be brought every year to the Marketplace, and set publicly to sale to them that would marry them, and first of all they brought forth the fairest, to see who would give most. But such as were not so commendable for their beauty as they might invite men to give money for them, or those that were so foul, as no man would receive them, although they might have them for nothing, were married with the money which had been given for the fair. Herodotus holds, that the ancient Venetians which lived upon the coast of Illitia used the like custom.  
It was also ordained, that whenas any one fell sick, he should demand council of him that had been troubled with the like infirmity, and should endeavour to follow the order which the other had observed for the recovery of his health: and this was practised in the beginning, when they had no knowledge of physicians. Some others writ, that they carried their sick persons to the Marketplace, and that the law commanded that all they that had been sick of the like disease, should come unto the patiented to tell him by what means they had recovered their health.  
The bodies of their dead were anointed with honey, and their obsequies and funerals were performed after the same manner as among the Egyptians. The men of Assyria being in bed with their wives, they durst not touch one another before they had washed themselves with clean water.  
The ancient custom of some ladies of Assyria, was to have the carnal knowledge of some stranger, in honour of the goddess Venus: and whenas they would do it, they went to the Temples of this goddess in a great troop, with crowns upon their heads, & richly appareled, to present themselves, and to seem more pleasing unto men. Every stranger that would enjoy any one, beheld her that liked him best, than he laid upon her knees what sum of money he thought good; and she was bound to follow him a little from the Temple, whereas they had carnal knowledge one of another, and the price of this impudicitie and uncleanness was employed for the service of the Temple. There were among the Assyrians certain houses and families that lived only of fish, which they dried in the Sun, and beaten in a mortar, and of this meal being kept they made cakes, which they used as bread.  
There were in Assyria, Mages or wisemen, surnamed Chaldeans, who were in estimation like unto the Priests and Divines of Egypt, having the charge of sacred things, of Temples, and sacrifices, spending their whole lives in the study and contemplation of Philosophy, and practising the knowledge of the stars, to understand by the course thereof the events of things below, seeking to profit all men, and to free them from dangers and discommodities, and giving in a manner a certain reason for any thing.  
These wise men (Chaldeans) went not out of their own country to study these sciences, like unto the Grecians; but every man learned them from his parents, holding them from them as by succession, and the children were instructed in their houses, to the end that by this ordinary care they might profit the better. Their knowledge was not grounded upon doubts & opinions like unto that of the Grecians, but they did persist constantly in those things which they had once learned, whereas the others had divers opinions touching the principles and causes of every thing. The Chaldeans held it for truth and certain, that the world had not been created; and they did maintain, that it was without beginning, and should never end: that the disposition of the Universe was governed by the divine providence: that celestial bodies did not move of themselves, nor yet by hazard and accident; but that there was some divine virtue which did move them, and caused their influence. They did attribute great force to planets, & namely to that which the Astrologians call Saturn; and they hold that the Sun was the most pleasing planet, giving it more power than the rest: yet in their divinations, they depended more upon the aspects of Mars, Venus, Mercury, and jupiter, for that those (as having a course which is proper unto them) gave knowledge of future things, as if they had been messengers and interpreters of the will of the gods. These Chaldeans did also foretell what should happen by the blowing of the winds, the force of rain, the heat of Summer, the apparition of comets, eclipse of Sun and Moon, and by earthquakes, and such like. Moreover, they did imagine that there were other stars subject unto the first, saying that some went wandering, and had their course by our Hemisphere, and the others went to visit the rest of the Globe underneath us.  
They did feign twelve principal gods, to either of which they gave a place in the Zodiac, and assigned him a month. Out of the Zodiac they did number four and twenty stars, whereof there were tw●lue that looked towards the North, and the other twelve to the South: they believed that those which appeared were for the service of the living, and the others were for the service of the dead, and did give them light under the earth. They made a ridiculous computation of years, numbering three and forty thousand years from their most ancient remembrance unto the coming of Alexander into B●bylon: yet some excuse them, saying that they were lunary years.  
The inhabitants of Caramania in old time did use asses in war, for that they wanted horses, and they did sacrifice an ass to Mars. No man did marry a wife among them until he had cut off the head of some enemy, the which was brought unto the king, who caused it to be set up in his palace, mincing the tongue, the which he mingled with bread and tasted thereof, and then gave it to him that brought it, and to his familiars to eat. He that bade brought most heads was more esteemed than the rest.  
As for them of Margiana, Strabo writes that in his time when as any one came to the age of seventy years, they did put him to death for a final offence, and his nearest kinsfolks did afterwards eat his body. As for old women they smothered them, and then buried them. If any one died before seventy years, he was not eaten but buried.   

¶ The Manners at this day.  
THe Persians at this day to speak in general are the mildest & most courteous people in the world, and it is most certain that they are more liberal than any other. Their manners are not barbarous like unto those of the Turks, Indians, and Scythians their neighbours; but they are wonderful courteous: they are given to observe an excellent policy in their country, and they contemn not learning. There are many among them which are very skilful in physic and Astrology, and others which affect poesy, wherein they profit so well, as their inventions, and manner of speaking is not only commendable, but also to be admired: whereof a Persian Poem coming to Rome to the hands of a French Cardinal, very judcious in all things, causing it to be expounded, gives sufficient testimony.  
They are also given to traffic, and to mechanic arts, and make great store of silks. The brethren, sisters, and other kinsfolks entertain a strict love betwixt them, and they make great account of nobility: wherein they are contrary to the Turks, who contemn it, and esteem none but those that are commendable for their actions. There are among them many famous men, which are come from ancient races, and have continued rich for a long time: and finally, they are much to be preferred before the Turks, both in regard of their nobility, civility, and quickness of wit. Moreover they are exceeding courteous to strangers, and give them good reception, entreating them as well as possibly they can, according to the manner of their country; but they are very subject to jealousy: by reason whereof the women may not show themselves to strangers; yet in all other things they give them all the contentments they desire, and do in a manner worship them, contrary to the Turks, who hold their wives to be as slaves unto them. The women of this country are exceeding fair, and they are so well set forth (to give more grace to this beauty) as there can nothing seem more pleasing.  
The Persians yield as much to their passions as any people in the world, and plunge themselves in all sorts of pleasures, cherishing the sport of love above all things. Their apparel is stately, and most commonly perfumed, and they wear precious stones. They are subject to this villainy, that although they marry many wives, yet they love young boys, and pursue them as eagerly or rather more than women: wherein they imitate the Turks, and moreover they have detestable places appointed for those pleasures, whereas they keep young boys to that end. Their language is very pleasing, and is practised in many courts of the Eastern princes. In former times they had private characters, the which are scarce found at this day but upon ancient mountains: but since the time that they received the cursed sect of Mahomet, they have also used the Arabian tongue.  
They are called Ayames, or Azamies, by reason of Assyria which carries the name of Az●mia, as some think. They have also the name of Persians by reason of the province of Presia, which is the chief of the realm; and Cheselbas', for that they wear a read cap; and they are by many called Sophiens, being under the dominion of the Sophi.   

¶ The Riches.  
THey make such abundance of silks in Persia, as the inhabitants of the country have not only sufficient for themselves, but they also cell much to other nations which lie far from Persia, for they carry it into all the countries of the East, yea into Syria. They do in like manner make great sale and traffic of pearl, and precious stones. That which makes the country of Persia rich is the commodity of the sea, by means whereof they come from many parts to fetch what they desire. But to come to particulars, in the province of Persia they found emeralds, which merchants buy at an easy rate, for that they are not very clear. This province doth also impart of her silks to many others, like to Hyrcania, or the country of Diargument.  
Bactria yields metals and some precious stones, as emeralds, jacinths, and chrysolites, whereof the inhabitants make great profit. In the province of Aria they gather a certain drug like unto myrrh, which the persians cell to strangers at a good rate, with their black and yellow sapphire. The town of Chirmain in Carmania is famous by reason of the great store of cloth of gold and silver which the inhabitants make and vent.  
Let us now come to the revenues which this king may have, having seen wherein the riches of this people consists. Certainly, it is not yet well known to what sum the revenues of this prince may amount, for that they who have been there, expressly to search out the means of this Monarch, do not all concur in one opinion: for some give him three millions of gold in rent, and others five millions. Notwithstanding there are two things which may easily show that this prince must of force be very rich: the one is that Tammas Sophi of Persia, who reigned of late years, ordained that they should levy no custom of any thing that entered into his dominions, or went forth; and this custom did amount to 90000 tomen, that is to say (for that a toman makes 20 French crowns) a million 800000 crowns: the which undoubtedly he had not done if his revenues had not been otherwise great, which invited him to ease strangers, and his subjects which dealt in traffic after this manner: the other reason is, that all the Estates of Persia are divided by the Persians into seven provinces, or to speak more properly, generalities, whereof that of Isp●an yields seven hundred thousand crowns, and that of Syras as much; and yet they are not the richest, for that the provinces of Corassan and Diargument exceed them much, whereof the one abounds in metals and Turkish stones, and the other in silks.  
But if any one demands whence he draws his revenues, seeing he hath dispossessed himself of the customs which might rise by the importation and exportation of merchandise: I will answer him that he draws it from the lands of his dominions, from the tenths of first-fruits, from the profit of mines, and from shops, for that whosoever will set up a shop or storehouse of any thing, is bound to pay a certain sum yearly unto the king. He receives also much of particular presents, and of the gifts of commonalties, and confiscations, and such like, bring him in great sums of money, besides the tribute of princes subject to his crown, as that of Lar, and some others.   

¶ The Forces.  
THe forces of this kingdom consist more in valour than in number of men. There are three sorts of soldiers, the one is of such as the king entertains continually near him: the other is of Timariot, for that there are a great number of horsemen who in 〈◊〉 of pay have lands assigned unto them for their entertainment, after the manner of the Turks: the third kind is of strangers, which they draw into the country for pay, either from Gurgistan or Tartary. But speaking of the two first who are properly of the realm, and belong ●●to the king, both the one and the other fight on horseback, for that whenas arms are in the hands of the nobility, there are most commonly few that 〈◊〉 on foot: and hence it grows also that the Persians are without Sea forces: so as ●●●withstanding that they have the Sea of Bachu on the one side, and the Persian 〈◊〉 on the other side, yet have they never employed any armies by Sea in either of 〈◊〉.  
●nd although the sea of Bachu be eight hundred miles long, and six hundred broad, 〈◊〉 they have no shipping there, neither are there seen any ships in those parts but Por●●●ss, who coasting along the Persian gulf, make themselves masters thereof, by means 〈◊〉 fleets which they keep commonly in the island of Ormus.  
And although the country abounds in metals and in excellent tempers, especially 〈◊〉 province of Corasan, yet they have no great use of artillery, and they are less pra-●●●● in fortifications, or to batter, besiege, keep, and defend a town; for that all these ●●●gss are proper to footmen, whereas it belongs to horsemen to fight in plain field, in 〈◊〉 the Persians without doubt are able to work great effects.  
moreover, the Persian discipline hath another important defect, which is the want of 〈◊〉 and this division proceeds from two causes: the one is the greatness of princes, 〈◊〉 is commonly accompanied with pride and wilfulness: the other is the difficulty ●●●duct and of voyages, and this defect grows by the want of waters and navigable 〈◊〉 for the rivers of Persia are such as they are not portable, or if they be, it is so little 〈◊〉 are of small service. All these rivers run either to the Persian gulf, or to the 〈◊〉 Sea, leaving the heart of the country without water, so as they are of little use 〈◊〉 the forces of Persia, and to draw them together, for that the middle part of the 〈◊〉 remains dry, and hath not any river that is common in a manner to the whole 〈◊〉 as the river of Loire to France, Po to Lombardie, Vistula to Poland, and Sheld ●●●ders. Moreover, there are many mountains and deserts which cross and di●●●e country: by reason whereof this country is very like unto Spain, where 〈◊〉 are no rivers of great traffic, but upon the extremities, and where there are 〈◊〉 ●ountainess, and much country desert, by reason of the drought. Yet nature ●●ing to help their traffic for the commodity of man's life, hath furnished Persia 〈◊〉 places whereas they want navigable rivers, with camels which are very fit for 〈◊〉, for that they bear more than a horse, and endure their labour longer: for a 〈◊〉 will bear a burden of a thousand weight, and continued his journey forty days 〈◊〉, or more; for that he is to pass through dry countries, such as Lybia, Arabia, ●●sia, he doth commonly drink but once in five days, and at need he will conti●●●en, yea and ten days without drink: and as for meat, being freed from his bur●●●● satisfied if he eat a little grass, or the bows of trees; so as there is no beast ●●●●res more toil nor is oflesse charge: by reason whereof he is fit for the dry ●●●●riess of Asia and Africa, whereas the men want both water and victuals; so as ca●● ●●●ing no great need for themselves, may carry great store for their masters. There ●●●ee sorts: the one are small, and serve only to carry men: those of meaner stature 〈◊〉 two bunches, and they are good to carry burdens: the greatest are those which 〈◊〉 thousand weight.  
〈◊〉 for the number of horsemen which the king of Persia may bring to field, it hath been seen in the wars which have passed betwixt Ishmael and Selim the first of that name, 〈◊〉 also betwixt the same Ishmael and Solyman, and betwixt Codobande and Amarath the third, for that none of these kings did draw together above 30000 horse against the Turk, but they were armed in such sort, as they did never fear the encounter of a far greater army. The richer sort arm themselves like to our men at arms: and the others (who make two third parts) content themselves with head pieces, shirts of mail, and targets, and they sometimes use bows, sometimes lances.  
The Sophi confines upon the East, with the Mogores; towards the North, with the Tartarians, and Zagatay; upon the West, he hath the Turks country which doth frontier him for a long space; and upon the South, he hath the realm of Ormus, sometimes tributary to the Sophies, and at this present belonging to the king of Spain.  
He hath not much to do with the Mogores, for that as France and Spain cannot offend one another by reason of the straight passages, and the situation of the frontiers which are tough and troublesome, which make the conduct of victuals, and entertainment of armies difficult: even so, betwixt the confines of the Indies and Cambaya, held by the Mogores, and the Persians, there are mountains and deserts, which will not suffer those princes to invade one another, at the lest with any great armies; especially for that their horsemen (wherein their chiefest forces consist) cannot march through such narrow straits, and uneasy passages, yet they fight upon the frontiers of Cabul and Sablestan, whereof some princes of the Mogores have made themselves masters.  
The Sophi confines not immediately with the great Cham, for that there is betwixt them two, first certain princes, than a great desert, and it seems that the river of Ox, or Abian, hath been always ordained to serve as bound unto his Empire. This river rising in the country of Sablestan, under the mountain of Dalanguer, after a long course (during the which it increaseth much by reason of many rivers which fall into it) in the end it dischargeth itself into the Sea of Bachu, & divides the Sophi from Zagatai upon the North part. The Sophi never durst pass this river, and Saba king of Zagatai having past it, was defeated by Is●ael in a great battle. Cyrus' king of Persia caused a bridge to be made upon this river, by the which he passed a great army to go against Tomyris Queen of Scythia, who cut him in pieces with his people.  
The Sophi confines with the great Turk upon all the Western part of his empire, that is to say, from the sea of Bachu to the gulf of Saure, which is for the space almost of fifteen degrees: and in truth he hath no such dangerous enemy, nor that keeps him more in awe; for that as often as the Turk hath entered his country, he hath always lost something, unless were of late years, that the Sophi hath chased the Turks, and won some famous victories. The reason why the Sophi hath had these losses, was his manner of making war; for that relying upon the number and valour of his horsemen, and in his artillery and munition of war, he made no account of forts, but ruined them he took, and did little esteem those which he kept, thinking that he that employs his forces i● defence of places cannot be strong in field. But since, being forced by necessity, they have fortified much, and have made good forts upon passages that were fit to that purpose, and they have built citadels in towns of importance, furnishing them with ordinance, soldiers, and all other things necessary.  
As for the Portugals of Ormus, he hath no quarrel with them, for that he hath no sea forces, without the which he cannot recover this realm: and also the Portugals have no meane● to ●ake conquest ●●rre within the land. And the Sophi Tammas being once persuaded to the enterprise of the realm of Ormus, he demanded what did grow in this Island; if there were come, grapes, first-fruits, or such like▪ and hearing that the soil of this country was barren, and that all these things wanted, but that the traffic of merchandise which made this realm rich, might bring him great commodities; he mocked at it, saying, That he had given his people ninety thousand Tomen of the like nature, which 〈◊〉 yearly into his coffers.   

¶ The Government.  
WE must confess that the Persians are governed more politickely than all the other Mahometans whereof we have knowledge, and that the royal power and ●●●●●gative is better ordered among them than in any other realm of their sect. For it 〈◊〉 known that in a manner all the other king's root out the nobility, and serve them●●●●●● with slaves, yea they put their brethren to death, or pull out their eyes. But the no●●●●●●● is much esteemed among the Persians. The kings entreat their brethren graciously, and have commonly under them, princes who are rich and powerful: the which is not observed among the Turks, who can by no means endure the nobility in any place, and do not suffer any one to remain prince or lord of any country; but contrariwise as 〈◊〉 as they are the stronger, they remove their natural masters, and supply their pla●●● with men of base condition, who shall be no lords but only governors that may be ●●●oved at pleasure. To conclude, it is most certain that this realm is ordered with such policy, as their government doth not yield to any of our Monarchies of Europe, as 〈◊〉 say, which have been there, and which have observed their manner of living: but 〈◊〉 misery hath always been such, that no man hath related in particular the manner of 〈◊〉 government; so as this defect will be the cause that we cannot discourse but in gene●●●nd not specify any thing in particular.   

¶ The Religion.  
AFter the death of Mahomet the author of that cursed sect, which at this day hath so great a course in the world, ali, Abubequer, Ormar, and Odman his kinsmen, did every 〈◊〉 writ for himself; for that there was not any one of them but did pretend himself ●●●rue successor. This contention was the spring of four principal sects: Ally was author ●hat which they call Imemia, and was followed by the Persians, Indians, by many ●●ianss, and by the Gelbins of Africa. As for the other sects, I have referred it to the ●●●on of the Turks religion, where I have resolved to speak amply, and at large. The 〈◊〉 have more reason than the rest, and have purchased reputation touching their 〈◊〉 a manner in our age, as we have formerly said, by the valour of Ishmael Sophi, who ●●ing himself to be of the race of Ally, brought his sect into credit, and denounced 〈◊〉 against his neighbours that would not accept thereof. He did wear a read Turban 〈◊〉 twelve points, in remembrance of the twelve sons of Ocen the son of Ally, ●●●maunding that all they that followed it should wear the like. Many nations follo●●● him and his sect, especially all they that devil betwixt the rivers of Euphrates, and 〈◊〉, the Caspian sea, & the Persian gulf; so as since, all these people have settled them●●●●●● in this opinion.  
●here are also in the Sophy's Empire some jews, whose predecessors remained in 〈◊〉, whenas Esdras and Nehemias' led back the rest into the Holy land, and those 〈◊〉 stayed in this country, as Origen saith, made choice of a head of the house of Da●●, and called him the chief of the banished: then they built a town upon the banks 〈◊〉 ●●phrates, and named it Neardea, which is as much to say, as a flood of sciences. ●●●re are in Corasan a province of Persia, Melchites, who retain all the errors which 〈◊〉 in old time condemned by the Grecians at the Council of Florence, and these 〈◊〉 the Patriarch of Antioch.  
Moreover there are Nestorians brought into Persia, as Paulus Diaconus affirms, by the 〈◊〉 ●●lice of Cosroe king of Persia, who thinking to do a despite to the Emperor Hera●●●, for that he had been defeated by him, ruined all the Christian Churches that were 〈◊〉 ●is dominions, and having chased away the Catholics, he planted Nestorians, who 〈◊〉 now mixed among the Assyrians, Mesopotamians, Medians, and Parthians.  
There are also many Christians Armenians, who have passed into Persia for fear of the 〈◊〉 forces & cruelty; and these have two patriarchs, whereof the one who is acknowledge knowledged as superior in high Armenia, remains in the monastery of Ecmeazin near unto the town of Eruan in Persia: the other who is obeyed in base Armen jam lives in the town of Sister in Caramania. But we forbear to speak of their belief till the discourse of the religions which are found in the great Turk's country. This is all that can be said of the Persians religions, who are such mortal enemies to the Turks, as although they both acknowledge Mahomet for the first author of their sects, yet they hate these Barbarians no less than we do: and it is thought that if Christian princes had made more account of the Embassage which the Sophi sent into Europe of late years, than they did, there had been some hope that this prince by little and little might have been drawn to the Christian faith.      


❧ A DISCOURSE OF THE KINGS OF PERSIA, ACCORDING TO THE WRITE BOTH OF GREEK AND LALINE AUTHORS.  

The Contents.  
1. A chronicle abridged of the kings of Persia according to the Bible, Philo, and other authors. 2. Another chronicle abridged according to Herodotus, Xenophon, justin, and others, much more ample than the former. 3. Cyrus' ruins the Monarchy of the Medians, and settles that of the Persians. 4. Histori● of Daniel cast into the lions den, and why the jews had leave to build their temple. Cyrus conquers Lydia, and takes Croesus their king: he makes war against the Scythians, by whom he was defeated and slain 5. His Eloge; he was first of all called King of Kings. He brought unto the Persians the use of long rob and Thyare, as some hold. 6. Cambyses conquereth Egypt, kills his brother Smerdes; his sacrileges and cruelties, and finally his death. 7. Smerdes one of the Mages or wisemen causeth himself to be acknowledged king, and how he was discovered. 8. How Darius Histaspes came unto the crown of Persia, his orders and conquests, he restored the sovereign priesthood among the jews: the great army he prepared against Greece if death had not prevented him. 9 Xerxes' declared successor to his father, for that he was borne when his father was king, and his other brethren, before; he punisheth the Egyptians severely having revolted; his powerful army both by sea and land to ruin Greece, his defeat and death. 10. Pretensions of Artahan, his wickedness discovered, and his punishment. 11. Artaxerxes takes revenge of the death of his father Xerxes, he sends an army of three hundred thousand men against the Egyptians; he sends back Esdras to jerusalem, and doth him many favours; the Egyptians shake off the Persians yoke: Cyrus the son of Darius put in prison, and the reason, and when Darius the bastard died. 12. Cyrus' escapes out of prison; the perfections of this prince, and his death: Artaxerxes Mnemon lo●es peac●, and seeks to reconcile the Grecians among themselves. 13. The jews being at discord, Darius Occhus sends Bagose against them, who imposeth a tribute: beginning of the jews Abramis: revolt of Artabasus, and his death, whereby the countries of Egypt, Phenicia, and Cypress return under the command of the Persians: Darius and his children poisoned by Bagoas. 14. Darius' dispossessed of his Empire by Alexander the Great, and at what time. 15. When and how the realm of Persia recovered her ancient beauty. Beginning of Artaxare, and his greatness; he looseth a bartaile against the Emperor Alexander Mameus; he was well see●e in the knowledge of Mages. 16. Saporus conquereth a part of Mesopotamia, and many ●●●●ess from the Romans; he looseth a battle against the Emperor Gordian, and wins another against Valerian, where he took this Emperor prisoner. Odenall king of the Palmerenians defe●tss Saporus in a great battle, which stayed the course of his conquests. 17. Vardanes makes a peace with the Emperor Probus, Carus recovers Mesopotamia from the Persians. 18. Narseus a man of great attempts, vanquished by Maximilian in a famous battle, which ruined the Persians affairs. 19 Misdates' crowned from his mother's womb. Saporus, a great enemy to Christians, obtains eight victories against the Emperor Constance: but he was vanquished in Armenia by Arsaces: he defeats the army of julian the Apostotat, and makes a peace with the Emperor jovin●an. 20. Controversy for the succession of the crown of Persia, betwixt the sons of Saporus: cruelties of Artaxerxes. 21. Is digertes, tutor to the young Emperor Theodosiu●, and the good offices which he did to his people. In the beginning he persecuted the Christians, but in the end he was pacified by the persuasion of Antiochus, Governor to the young Christian Emperor his son, who was possessed with a devil, recovered by the prayers of the good Bishop Math●nte. 22. War betwixt Perosus and the Euthalites; the beginning of this people: ●●rosus doth homage, and swears fealty to the king of Euthalites, his falsehood which cost him his 〈◊〉 23. Valens becomes tributary to the Euhalites; Cavadus shakes off the yoke: the cruelty of this ●●●nce, & his strange ordinance to make women common. 24. The regents of Persia should be of the 〈◊〉 royal; the Council of Gusanascade against Cavades, the delivery of this prince by the means of his wife, and of Se●sè; he retires to the Emperor Anastasius, he is relieved by the king of the ●●thalitess, and recovers the possession of his realm, whereof he disposeth before his death: why he grew mild to Christians. 25. Cosroe given to learning, and honours learned men; he made ●●re against the Emperor justinian, with whom he was forced to make a peace, called a peace without end, but he broke it presently, and being often defeated by Belisarius, he died of grief. 26. War of Hormisda against the Romans; the great defeat of Hormisda by the Emperor Ty●●riu●'s, and another given him by Philipicus a Roman Captain: he looseth Nisibin, and a part of M●sopotamia, with the town of Arsemene; he makes the Turks his tributaries and d●sposeth 〈◊〉 realm: his execrable cruelty against his father's wife and children, whom he beats to death 〈◊〉 a cudgel. 27. Conspiracy against Cosroe, who saves himself, having called upon the God 〈◊〉 Christians, and is restored to his realm: Narses revolts against the Emperor Phocus, 〈◊〉 by Cosroe. 28. All Mesopotamia and Syria conquered by Cosroe, with Palestina, Armenia, ●●●docia, Galatia, and Paphlagonia, the towns of Edesse, Capesse, Caesarea, the town of Dam●ss, 〈◊〉 the holy city of Jerusalem, carrying the holy Cross into Persia; he is in the end defeated 〈◊〉 Emperor Heraclius: his son caused to die in prison: Siroe delivers all the Christians were captives in Persia. 29. Of the kings of Persia; the Mahometans expelled by the Tarta●●●: Tamerlan makes himself lord of the greatest part of the East: Vsun Chassan descended 〈◊〉 Tamerlan. 30. Vsun Chassan marries the daughter of the Emperor of Trebisonde, and 〈◊〉 his daughter to Secaidar; the holy life of the wife of Vsun Chassan, the wars of this prince ●●●inst Mahomet Emperor of the Turks; he is defeated by them, and his son Zognel stain: ●●●●uolt of Vguely Mehemec against his father, retiring himself to the Turks; the policy of 〈◊〉 Chassan to free himself of his son. 31. The tragical History of the death of jacub Patis●●● his wife, and son: Secaidar takes arms against his prince. 32. Defeat and death of Sacaei●●● the breeding up of Ishmael Sophi, his first enterprise, the bad order of Alumut king of Persie; 〈◊〉 the battle betwixt him and the Sophi, who wins the victory, and takes Tauris: his great ●●●eltie against his own mother. 33. Ishmael wears a read Turban, whence comes the name of ●●●bas● the victory of Ishmael against Marat Can; he conquers Diarbet, his policies to make 〈◊〉 the chief Lords of the country; he wins the best part of Sydulia, and kills the king with his 〈◊〉 hand: another defeat of Murat Can: the Tartarians make war against the Sophi, and 〈◊〉 Sumac●ia, with the city of Darbanc: the love of the soldiers to Ishmael: what devise he cau●●● to be set upon his coin: Selim Emperor of the Turks makes war against Ishmael, and the 〈◊〉 of the hatred of these two princes, the battle of Zaldarane lost by the Sophi, and Tauris 〈◊〉 by Selim. 34. The revolt of Vlama a Persian against Tamas or Thamas: the conquests of 〈◊〉 upon the Persians, who makes himself master of Assyria and Mesopotamia; he takes Bagadet, and ●●oyles Tauris twice: his army defeated by Deliment a Persian Captain. 35. The poli●● of Ism●el causeth him to lo●se both realm and life. The conquest of Amurath, Emperor of the Turks upon Mahamet called the blind. Defeat of the Turks by Abas king of Persia, who 〈◊〉 Ambassadors to the Emperor Rad●lph●s.   

¶ A CHRONICLE OF THE KINGS OF PERSIA, ACCORDING TO THE HOLY BIBLE, PHILO, AND OTHER AUTHORS.  
Sing that treating of other nations we have hitherto observed this order, not only to describe the situation of provinces, manners, and religion of people; their forces, wealth, and whatsoever was rare; but also to treat summarily of the princes which have commanded there, of their wars and conquests, of their increase, changes, and downfalls: It seems I should wrong the Persian nation, who have sometimes h●ld the monarchy of the world, and command at this present such warlike and powerful nations; to pass over with silence their worthiest actions, and the names of the princes which have governed there as far (although their signory have often changed from family to family) as obscure antiquity, and the diversity of opinions of the most ancient and modern Authors upon that subject will permit.  
Among the Moderns, there is a Portugal, called Teixiere, who having read a Persian History, written by one called Turik Mirkond, a Persian borne, hath made an abridgement, by the which he seems to have plainly set down the succession of these great princes, from the beginning of this monarchy unto this day: but it is with such discordance from all that which other Authors that have go before them have written, as it is a 〈◊〉 thing to reconcile them; and ●e● it may be it is not unprobable to believe that he hath come nearer unto the truth▪ and if he doth contradict in some things, as well that which is written in the holy Bible, as elsewhere, it is rather by reason of the change of names which every nation would turn into his own language, than of persons, or of the actions which have passed during the time, at the lest contained in holy writ; for as for others they do often differ. Yet to content the minds of such as give more credit to the chronology and Genealogy of these princes, written by antiquity: I have held it more convenient first to make a succinct description, as it hath been hitherto observed; and then to add the relations of Teixiere, to the end that every man may the better judge what credit is to be given to the one or the other, yet reserving to myself to add thereunto according to occurrents, not to contradict Teixieres' Author, but for some notable actions which happily have been omitted, especially against the Turks.  
And for that Philo and Metastbenes (ancient Authors) differ in opinion from the Grecians, and yet agreed with that which is found in the ho●●e Bible; it shall be very convenient to set down here what they say, which is, That Cyrus having conquered the realm of Media from Astyages, he left the said kingdom unto his uncle Darius, with whose aid he took Babylon▪ and transported the Assyrian monarchy to the Persians. Two years after, the said Darius returned into Media, and Cyrus reigned alone in Babylon, who afterwards having attempted to make war against the Scythians, he left his son Cambyses king in his absence, according to the custom of the Persians, which was, to appoint a king that was nearest in blood to him that was king, whenas he went to make war against any foreign nation; which might be the reason why these Authors do not put Cambyses in the successive order of the Monarches; neither do they speak of the two brethren 〈◊〉 who usurped the empire fraudulently▪ as shall be elsewhere spoken, and continued 〈◊〉 months, Darius' son to Hystasp●ss, having been chosen king. Xerxes' son to Dar●●s●●●eeded ●●●eeded him, but they put him not in the number of the monarches, for that going presently to make war against the Grecians, he left the realm to Darius Longuemain 〈◊〉 son: but the Greek histories have not omitted to place Xerxes and Cambyses in 〈◊〉 successive order of the said monarchs: the which is the cause that they number 〈◊〉 years in the said Monarchy, that is to say, two hundred twenty and six; and these, 〈◊〉 hundred ninety and one, after this manner.  
Cyrus' with Darius his uncle reigned two years.  
Cyrus' alone reigned two and twenty years.  
Darius' son to Histaspes being chosen king, surnamed Artaxerxes Assuerus, reigned twenty years.  
Darius Artaxerxes Longuemain seven and thirty years,  
Darius Nothus nineteen years.  
●●taxerxes Mnemon five and fifty years.  
●●rius-O●hus six and twenty years.  
passeres four years.  
Darius' the last Monarch (defeated by Alexander the Great who transported the Monarchy to the Grecians) six years.   

¶ Another abridgement of a Chronicle, according to the Greek and Latin authors.  
●O set down the opinions of Herodotus, Xenophon, justine, Agathie, Procepius, and many others which have written of this nation, some in passing, & others of set purpose; 〈◊〉 be fit to hear joseph speak of their beginning. Sem, saith he, the son of Noah 〈◊〉 sons who enjoyed Asia, from the river of Euphrates to the Indian Ocean: for uncleft of his blood the Elyacaites, from whom the Persians are descended. But as for ●●rsian appellation, it is not of so long continuance; for they were afterwards called ●●●ie●ss, of a king bearing that name; than Cepheniens, and Arteens, and in the end 〈◊〉 of Perseus the jonne of jupiter and Andromeda, as Herodotus doth witness; but 〈◊〉 the succession of Perseus, it is not found written: for presently the country of 〈◊〉 was made subject to the Monarchy of Assyria, under the which it continued un●●●t. Sardanapalus was expelled his seat, and slain by Arbaces the first prince of the ●●●●anss, and by Belochphul king of Babylon: the Monarchy of the Medians comprehen●● the Persians, Bactrians, and Hyrcanians, the last whereof that governed was Astia●●● who lost his kingdom by the persuasion of Harpagus, who was incensed against the 〈◊〉 that he had slain his son, & made him to eat his flesh. This Harpagus seeking some 〈◊〉 of revenge, sent to Cyrus, grandchild to Astyages (who was then in Persia with his 〈◊〉 ●iving a private life) that if he would revenge his injury and his own (his grand●●● having sought to kill him) he had means to give him such an entry into the realm 〈◊〉 as he might easily make himself Monarch, and free the Persians from serui●●●. The which Cyrus understanding, he wrought so with his countrymen as they re●●●, and shaked off the Medians yoke, refusing them tribute and obedience. 〈…〉 of these news, sent for Cyrus to come and give an account of his rebellion; 〈◊〉 the prince answered, that he would come sooner than Astyages should desire 〈◊〉 the which put the king into arms, and not regarding the wrong which he had 〈◊〉 ●●to Harpagus, he gave him the charge of the whole army, to his own ruin; for 〈◊〉 to fight, all the greatest men of the kingdom having intelligence with 〈◊〉 ●nto Cyrus' party, and the rest who knew nothing fled, being abandoned by their 〈◊〉, whereupon followed the rout of Astyages army, who was forced to fly; ●●●atning to put Cyrus to death. And going afterwards to his wise men and divines 〈◊〉 the event of his affairs, all advised him not to prosecut his nephew any further, 〈◊〉 suffer him to enjoy the good fortune which the Destinies had put into his hands: ●●●nking that they which gave him this council, had been partisans to his enemy, 〈◊〉 them to be hanged, and then gathered together what forces he could, and 〈◊〉 himself to battle, as he had done the other time, but not at so easy a rate, for his troops being defeated, he was taken prisoner by Cyrus, who stripped him of his Monarchy, ye● he put him not to death, but would have him command over the Hyrcanians: for the Empire of Astyages extended thither ● and towards the West, it came (except the Assyrians, Syrians, and jew 〈◊〉 the river Halys, and to Capadocia, the rest belonging to the king of Lydia.  

¶ The reign of Cyrus and Ciaxare, or Darius.  
Cyrus' having thus vanquished his grandfather, began to reign with his uncle Ciax●re, otherwise called Darius, son to Astyages, as some writ, but he should rather have been his brother, for Zonares makes him very old, and yet Astyages when he was defeated by Cyrus which was the same year, was himself at the battle which he lost. It was this Ciaxare which caused Daniel to be cast into the lions den; for as there was ●●reatielousie betwixt these two princes, by reason of the great honour which every man 〈◊〉 Cyrus for his valour: Darius Courtiers took occasion hereupon to be revenged of Daniel, persuading him to make an Edict, by the which during thirty days not any one of the realm should present any petition to any prince, lord, or king whatsoever, no not unto any god, but to him alone; for by this means, say they, they should stay the subjects from having recourse unto Cyrus, as they had in all their affairs, presenting their petitions unto him as to their sovereign king, who notwithstanding should have no cause of jealousy or discontent by this Edict; for that, faith Zonares, they should not except the high gods. These two princes having reigned two years together, Cyrus began to reign alone by the death of Ciaxares, who had before spoiled Assyria, and defeated the Assyrian Monarch: but he being allied to many great princes of Arabia, Syria, and Lydia, they committed infinite spoils in Media, which made Cyrus resolve to abate this Babylonian glory; so as after many routs and defeats which he gave them, he came and laid siege to the proud and ancient city of Babylon, the which he took by assault: after which conquest he received the jews into grace, giving them leave to re-edify the temple, to serve God after their law, and to pray for him and his realm: so as then they began to build the temple, and to enclose the city of jerusalem, the which happened in year of the world 3427, and in the sixtieth olympiad: Serui●s' Tullius reigned at Rome.   

¶ The reign of Cyrus alone.  
THe Medians being thus subdued, and the Assyrians ruined, Cyrus to be revenged of the Lydian, who was the mightiest prince of Asia, passed the mountain of Taur, or Corthestan, or Aman, or the black mountain, and sending his great friend Harpagus into the lesser Asia to subdue it, he joined with him against Croesus, vanquished him in battle, took him prisoner, and was ready to have him burnt, had he not remembered the saying of Solon to this Lydian king: That no man should hold himself happy before his death; the history whereof is common. In the ruin of the realm of Lydia was comprehended all Asia, from Hellespont unto Corthestan, the which obeyed Croesus, yet the Graecian jonians of Asia lived in liberty, and were only allied unto the Lydian, yet they were forced to come under the Persians yoke, and to acknowledge him for their sovereign; so as Cyrus commanded at that time from the Egean sea, and the Propontides, unto the East Indies: but as ambition is insatiable; and not content with any greatness, he resolved to subject the Scythians, who had committed great spoils in Asia; so as he marched with his army towards that part of Scythia, which lies beyond the river of Araxis, and also beyond the Bactrians and Hyrcanians, into the country of the Mas●agetss and Issedons, who are now called Tartarians, or the country of Samureund. Cyrus' having encountered no prince able to make head against him, knowing there was none but a woman that commanded these Scythians and Massagets, whom they called To●●● he sent to demand her in marriage, not that he cared for her, but to have means 〈◊〉 upon her realm. But she understanding the Persians designs, forbade him the entry into her country, arming what forces she could to make head against Cyrus, ma●ing her only son General of her army, who not acquainted with the stratagems of 〈◊〉 was surprised; for Cyrus making show to fly, left his camp full of wine & victuals, where these poor Massageres entering, (not accustomed to such dainties) feasted and drunk in such sort, as they fell a sleep in their drunkenness: but this was their last sleep, for Cyrus lying in ambush, came and cut some of them in pieces, and took the rest prito●●nerss. Spagarpise, son to Tomyris, and General of the army, was among the caprives. The queen advertised of her sons disaster, sent a Harold to Cyrus for his delivery, admonishing him to go out of her country, or else she would give him his fill of war. In the mean time, Spagarpise besought Cyrus to let him be unbound; the which he did in courtesy, and then this prince seeing himself at liberty, and having a sword by his side detesting his misfortune to be a captive, slew himself before the king. Tomyris being refused by Cyrus, came to fight with him, with the rest of her forces, and although the Persians' and Medians did fight valiantly, yet they were in the end vanquished, and most 〈◊〉 of them cut in pieces, and among the dead was also the great Cyrus, for that he had 〈◊〉 too much in his good fortune, and not taken example by the calimities of king's 〈◊〉 mighty than himself, whom he had ruined and deprived of their Estates. Tomyris●●ing ●●ing of his death, caused his body to be presently sought for, which being found, she ●●●ff his head, and put it into a vessel full of blood, saying unto it in mockery, Glut thy 〈◊〉 with blood in thy death, whereof thou wert so insatiable in thy life time: such was 〈◊〉 end of great Cyrus. The Persians carried his body to Pasagarde, where his tomb was 〈◊〉. This Pasagarde was in old time the seat of the kings of Persia: Alexander the 〈◊〉 was also there, after he had burnt Persepolis: and it was there whereas the Priests ●●●nnoint their kings.  
As for Cyrus, he was a courteous, bountiful, virtuous, and gentle prince, loving that 〈◊〉 was worthy to be respected, reasonably just, and upright, valiant in combats, and 〈◊〉 of the greatest undertakers of the earth: his ordinary abode when he was not with●●●ne by war, was in the cities of Suze, and Ecbarane, or Babylon: It was he (as it 〈◊〉) that was first called the King of Kings, for they found it in the inscription of his 〈◊〉, by the report of Strabo, which title was continued unto his successors, as we 〈◊〉 see in Esdras, the first Book, the seventh Chapter, and in the mixed Epistles of Hypo●●●, in that which Artaxerxes did writ to Poetus. It was Cyrus also that brought in use ●●ong rob of the kings of Persia, which was a garment (according to Procopius of gold purple diversified with many figures of beasts and fowls. Moreover, they had a 〈◊〉, and sometimes a cloak of purple: yet they said that this cloak was rather a kind 〈◊〉, having sleeves hanging unto the hand. It is not certain whether he or Artax●●● began to wear a Tyare, but whosoever it was it is very ancient. Cyrus' in the end 〈◊〉 son for successor, whom he had by his wife Cassandana, daughter to Pharnaspes 〈◊〉 he loved in such sort, as he did not only wear a mourning weed himself, but ●●ould have his subjects do the like) after he had reigned nine and twenty years, the 〈◊〉 happened about the year of the World 1435.   

¶ Cambyses, second Monarch of the Persians.  
CAmbises was more cruel than valiant, and as insolent, proud, and an enemy to ver●●●tue, as his father had been mild and affable, and endowed with goodly parts 〈◊〉 of a great king: he was also without piety, and contemned all religion, hindered the 〈◊〉 from building their Temple in Jerusalem, forbidding to furnish them with any materials, as they had done before by the commandment of Cyrus. The first expedi●●● this king made was against Amasis' king of Egypt, whose daughter he demanded in ●●●riage, being persuaded thereunto by his physician, who was an Egyptian, and ene●●to king Amasis, for he knew well that Amasis would be much afflicted to give his daughter and refusing her, it would be impossible for him to escape the Persians han is. Ama●●●●ho ●ho dreamt not of this intended treason, neither yet considered whom he sent, was so ill advised, as in stead of sending his daughter to Cyrus, he put in her place a goodly princess called Niretis, daughter to Apires an Egyptian king, whom Amasis had put to death: This lady being in Persia, whenas the king saluted her, he called her the daughter of Amasis: You are deceived sir (quoth she) I am the daughter of a more honest man than Amasis, that is, of king Apyres, whom Amasis had caused to be treacherously slain, and hath seized upon this realm. This did help much to incense Cambyses, seeing himself mocked by Amasis: so as having just occasion to revenge his father in laws death, and to recover his wives inheritance, he passed into Egypt by the means of king Arabe, and defeated Amasis, and his son Phammeneus: Being come to Memphis, he caused king Amasis, being dead, to be taken out of his tomb, and to be whipped, as if he had had some feeling, and not content therewith, he cast him into the fire, although it were contrary to the Persians religion, who at that time did worship the fire: then he resolved to go against the king of Aethiopia, but he was forced to give over his enterprise, & to return into Egypt, where he ruined the Temples of Apis, and flew the sacred Ox which the Egyptians did worship, hurting it on the thigh: he had also sent a great troop of soldiers to ruin the Temple of Amon in Lybia, but they were driven back by rain, storms, lighting, and tempests, so as they returned without doing any thing. But although these were but false gods, yet was he rigorously punished, for first of all he become in a manner furious, putting to death his nearest kinsmen and decrest friends, and among others his brother Smerdis, having dreamt that Smerdis was set in the royal throne, and that he touched the stars of heaven. This moved him to sand Prexaspes (one of the Mages, and his most confident friend) into Persia, to kill Smerdis, the which he effected. Then he made the licentious law of marrying his own sister, a matter never before practised among the Persians: whereupon having consulted with his judges, they told him that there was no law which allowed of that acquaintance, yet there was another law which dispensed with the kings to do what they thought good, preserving thereby their heads if they had spoken any thing contrary to this tyrants will, who having married two of his own sisters, slew the youngest for that she had wept for her brother Smerdis, lately slain. He was much given to wine, and was in a manner daily drunk, and yet wine was hurtful unto him, for that he was subject to the falling-sickness: during his drunkenness, he demanded of Prexaspes, who had slain Smerdis? what opinion the Persians had of him? whereto the other answered, That it was very good, only they found it strange that he distempered himself with excessive drinking; wherewith Cambyses growing into collar, caused the son of Prexaspes to be brought, and shooting at him, he hit him full upon the stomach, saying, That if he had not touched his heart, they might justly call him drunkard, and the child being opened, they found that the arrow had passed through the midst of his heart: the father seeing it, was forced to commend him that had deprived him of his heir: from which time, he caused the bravest of his train to be murdered upon the lest conceit, whom afterwards he called for, not remembering that he had put them to death. But Cambyses did suddenly receive the reward of all his villainies; for going into Egypt, he had news that the Mages had revolted, and seized upon the realm of Persia; especially Pazisite, in whom he relied most; and Smerdis, brother to Pazisite: This did trouble him much, as well for the treason of this Mage, as to remember that he had put his brother wrongfully to death: but being ready to march against the rebels, going to horseback, his sword slipped out, and run in his thigh, in the same place where he had stroke Apis, wherewith the bone being perished, it grew to a gangrene, whereof he died near to Ecbatane, according to the oracle which had been given him; having been monarch of the Persians seven years, and five months, leaving no children that could succeed him, for the women are not admitted to the succession in Persia.   

¶ The reign of Smerdis the Mage.  
NO man did believe that Cambyses had caused his brother to be slain, although before his death he had declared it, for they had a conceit that he spoke it, to the end 〈…〉 should take revenge for that he had usurped the crown, and withal, Prex●●● 〈◊〉 had slain him bursts or confess it: so as all the noblemen by a general 〈…〉 Smerdis for king, believing him to be the son of Cyrus. The Mage being 〈…〉 unto the Empire, to settle himself there, and to win the hearts of all men, 〈◊〉 throughout all the provinces an abatement of the taxes and impositions which 〈◊〉 to belevied among the people, whereby he purchased their loves, so as all 〈◊〉 ●●iectss were a● his commandment, except the Persians: for Smerdis, assuring him●●● if he came forth in view he should be known, never showed himself in 〈◊〉 as they began to suspect that this was the Mage; to be fully satisfied whereof 〈◊〉 succeeded after this manner: Otan son to Pharnaspes one of the greatest lords of 〈◊〉 came unto a daughter of his called Phedyna, who had attended upon Cambyses, 〈◊〉 did then serve the Mage as his concubine: Otan demanded of her with whom she 〈◊〉, but she could not resolve him, for that she had never seen Smerdis the son of, 〈◊〉 afterwards she sent him word that none of his women did speak together in her●●●panie, for the king had separated them one from another; this did the more con● 〈◊〉 the Persians opinion that it was the Mage, and to make it more manifest, he willed daughter to feel if he had any ears, for that he knew the Mage Smerdis had his cut. ●y the commandment of Cyrus: the daughter having obeyed, and finding the king 〈◊〉 without ears, advertised her father, who discovered the whole business to 〈◊〉 and Gobria the chief among the Persians: these three won three others unto 〈◊〉, which were Intaphernes, Megabyses, and Hidarnes, Darius being come from his go●●ent of Susa, was also associated in this conspiracy, saying that he was certain 〈◊〉 Smerdis the son of Cambyses was dead; so as these seven noblemen managed their 〈◊〉 rises so happily, as the Mages were cut in pieces, and Prexaspes the murderer of 〈◊〉 the son of Cyrus, cast himself headlong from the top of the royal palace, 〈◊〉 first declared the truth, and incensed all the world against the Mages, who reigned 〈◊〉 eight months: so as the race of Cyrus continued not long among the Persians, 〈◊〉 third heir did not enjoy his conquests.   

¶ Darius son to Histaspes, the fourth Monarch of the Persians.  
〈◊〉 the death of the Mages they were forced to go to an election, and for that the ●●●en noblemen abovenamed were equal in greatness, they resolved at the 〈◊〉 go all forth into the field, and that his horse which should first neigh should give 〈◊〉 own unto his master: the which happening to Darius by the policy of the mai●●● his horse, he was held worthy to command the Monarchy of the Persians. He ●oone to Histaspes one of the greatest of Persia whom Cyrus would have put to death 〈◊〉 dreamt that he had taken the crown away for his children. Having the reputa●●● be one of the most valiant men of the realm, all the people of Asia did yield him ●●arie obedience, except the Arabians, who althought they had been subdued by Cy●●● Cambyses, yet could they never draw them to be tributaries. This Darius married the 〈◊〉 daughters of Cyrus, as well to honour his house, as to make the Persians more affected 〈◊〉 then having pacified all matters in his Empire in the fourth year of his reign; he 〈◊〉 ●ave to the jews to re-edify the temple, & to build the walls of jerusalem, 〈◊〉 them with gold, silver, metals, and victuals, commanding them to pray unto 〈◊〉 his health, & for the establishment of his crown. This prince is called Assuerus 〈◊〉 holy scripture, and for him is written the History of Hester or Hadassa, by whose 〈◊〉 the jews were preserved from the conspiracy of Hamon, and advanced to honour 〈◊〉 prince's house. The first order which this prince did set down throughout his whole 〈◊〉, was to divide it into 19 governments or provinces, which he called Satrapies, on 〈◊〉 he imposed taxes and imposts for the entertainment of his house, and charges of 〈◊〉 war: and he appointed a governor over every satrapy, which made the Persians to 〈◊〉 it ana●ice, and not forefight, saying, That Cyrus had been a father to the people, ●●●ses a lord and tyrant, & that Darius was a merchant. Matters being thus ordered, he want to make war against the Babylonians who had revolted, being resolved to endure 〈◊〉 rather than to yield, but Zopirus the some of Megabyses one of the seven princes which had slain the Mage●, having caused his nose and ears to be slit, and his ha●re to be ignominiously out, 〈◊〉, and yielded himself to the Babylonians, feigning that Darius had done him that indignity, who not being ignorant of the quality and greatness of 〈…〉 did easily belee●ve what he said: and having brought him into their city, 〈…〉, where in the beginning he did wonders against 〈…〉 of the inhabitants, who by this are admiring his valour, did so 〈…〉, as they delivered the keys of the city into his hands. Zoprius 〈…〉 he desired, wrought so as he brought in his prince, who having punished the 〈…〉 for their revolt, he gave the city with the dependences to Zopi●●●, and would that for his sake it should be free from all subsidies. This war being 〈◊〉 ended, Darius' meaning to take revenge as well of the death of Cyrus, as of the 〈◊〉 of the Persians by the Scythians, resolved to make war against this nation; but 〈◊〉 not the way which Cyrus had done towards the East, but by the Hellespont, 〈◊〉 passing into Thrace by a bridge, he joined the Bosphorus and straight of Byzantium 〈◊〉 called Constantinople, and entering into Europe, he marched towards the Muscovites and other Scythians, keeping along the Euxine Sea, and the rivers of Bory●●●e●eses and Dunowe: but seeing that the Scythians did but vex his army, and would never come unto a general combat; and had slain many of his men by divers surprises; ●earing also lest they should break the bridges which were on the river of Danow, and stop him from returning home, he gave over his enterprise, having lost four score and ten thousand 〈◊〉, the which seemed nothing, for they held that there were nor less in this army than seven hundred thousand fight men: at this time he subdued Macedon, Thrace, and other provinces, under the conduct of Megabises the son of Zopirus, who was head of a part of his forces, invading these provinces, chiefly, for that Amintas king of Macedon had put to death the Ambassadors which he had sent unto him; and at the same time he sent Amasis against the Africans, for that they had surprised certain of his ships, and slain Arcesilaus the General, who was king of Cyrenea a country which is near unto Egypt, but his death was revenged by this Amasis in the taking of this town of Barce, the which is in the West of Africa. Soon after Otan (whom Darius had left Governor of Thrace) took the towns of B●●ntium and Chalcedon, with the Islands of Lesbos, Andros, and Imbros: and for that the jonians were revolted against Darius, being persuaded by Aristagoras their lord, who had been moved thereunto by Histices the Milesien; he caused his forces to march against them, and then the Athenians making themselves a party went to besiege the city of Sardis in Lydia, the which they took and burnt. This bred a long and cruel war betwixt them, for Darius having sent Artaphernes against them, he came to battle with the Grecians, jonians, and Milesiens, vanquished them, and took the city of Miletum, and many others of Asia, which he made tributaries; and in like manner, most of the Islands were subdued by Mardonius General of his army at sea, who vanquished Macedonia agine; and although he had lost 20000 men in a great tempest at sea, yet he entered Thrace, beaten the Thracians, took their towns, & made them subject 〈◊〉 the Persian Empire; so as Darius was at that time the mightiest prince of all them that had swayed the Monarchy before him.  
Darius did at that time restore the sovereign priesthood among the jews, doing them all the 〈◊〉 he could, in regard of his wife Heste●: and as the Cariens a people of the ●esser Asia, near to Cilicia, now called Caramania, would have interrupted the course of his prospe●●tieses, he armed against them, and vanquished them, as he did the Eretriens: but in requital, the Athenians more favoured by heaven than assisted by their forces, under conduct of their captain Mil●iades defeated his army in the fields of Marathon, M●rdonius 〈◊〉 General of the Persian troops: this made Darius resolve to raise so great an army, 〈◊〉 ●ould be able to ruin all Greece, in the preparation whereof he spent three years: 〈…〉 to march, he had intelligence of the revolt of Egypt; yet having a greater desire to be revenged of the affront which he had received, he held on his way against the Grecians, only death stayed the course of his designs, for falling sick in his journey, he died in the 36 year of his reign, of the World 3498, & in the 73 Olympiad.   

¶ Xerxes, fift Monarch of the Persians.  
Darius' having ended his days, he left a great contention among his children for the succession of the realm: for Ariamenes, or (according unto others) Artabazanes, be●●● the eldest of all his sons, said, That according unto the custom of the Persians, which gives the right to the elder to be presumptive heir, the crown did belong ●nto him; he was son to Gabrias daughter. On the other side, Xerxes (the son of ●●ssa, the daughter of Cyrus) although he were the youngest of them all, said, That the ●●●erss were not sons to the king, but of a private man: the controversy was decided by 〈◊〉 sentence of the Estates of the country; That all the rest were sons to Darius, but ●●●xess was borne the son of a king: this right of eldership hath always been preferred in the royal races of the kings of Persia; only Cosroe was preferred before his bro●●●r Cabada, being the elder, for that he was deformed.  
As soon as Xerxes was in quiet possession of the realm, he went against the Aegypt●●'s, whom having subdued, he entreated them with more rigour than Darius had done, 〈◊〉 gave them for Governor Achmenes, his brother by the father, who was afterwards 〈◊〉 by Inares the African, and king of Lybia. Egypt being pacified, he continued his ●●hers' design against Greece, having been four years to make his preparation, be●●●s that which Darius had done, so as he exceeded the forces of all the kings that had ●●ene before him, his army amounting to the number of a million of men; and the place 〈◊〉 the Randezuous was in the town of Sardis. But as he persuaded himself not only 〈◊〉 subdue men, but also to stay the violent waves of the Sea, causing Hellespont to be ●●●ipt, for that it gave not a free passage to his army; he saw himself defeated by a hand●●● of men, first at Salamina, by the Athenians, under the conduct of Themistocles, and ●●wards at Platea, under that of Aristides, so as he did nothing of note in this expedi●●● but spoil the country where he passed, make a bridge upon the Sea, and burn the cl●●● of Athens. Afterwards, having gathered together as great forces as the former, with 〈◊〉 of six hundred sail, or three hundred and fifty, as others writ, under the conduct 〈◊〉 thraustes, and a mighty army at land, under that of Phearandates, both the one and 〈◊〉 other army were defeated near to the river of Eurymedon, by the valour and good tournement of Cymon the Athenien. This did so abate the pride and presumption of 〈◊〉, as he was forced to retire home into his country, and to make that mo●able ●rea●●● peace with the Grecians, by the which he did promise & swear, That from thence●●● his army should not approach near unto Greece, than the carrere of a horse; and 〈◊〉 his galleys, and ships of war, should not sail beyond the Islands of Chelidonia, and 〈◊〉. Soon after he was slain, being a sleep, by Artabanus, contemning him by ●ea●●● of his misfortunes, having a certain hope to make himself king; but he fel● into the 〈◊〉 ●hich he had prepared. Thus died Xerxes, who had made all the nations of the earth ●●●emble by his powerful armies, the which wrought no effects worthy of so great provisions, having reigned one and twenty years.  
●●●t●banus, having thus treacherously murdered this prince, addresseth himself to 〈◊〉 youngest of the king's sons called Artaxerxes, telling him that Darius, his eldest 〈◊〉, had slain the king his father, entreating him to join with him, before that Da●●● should get possession of the realm, and prevent him in revenging so cruel a mur●●. The which Artaxerxes understanding, moved with a just disdain, arms, and 〈◊〉 followed, he surpriseth his poor brother, who had no such thought, and slew him. ●●●banus having dispatched him whom he most of all feared, fortified himself, together with his children, and entering into the Palace, fell upon Artaxerxes, whom he woun●●● but not mortally, so as the prince escaping at that time by flight, gathered together 〈◊〉 forces, and, with the greatest speed he could, came against the traitor, whom he cut in pieces, remaining by this means in quiet poss ession of his realm: Artabanus having held the royal throne but seven months only, which end the last year of the Persians.   

¶ Artaxerxes, sixt Monarch of the Persians.  
As soon as Artaxerxes was set in the royalty, he pursued all them cruelly that had consented, ●●●●ich had any hand in the conspiracy made against his father Xerxes, changing or 〈◊〉 the governors of the Satrapies, in whom he did not trust, and ordering his 〈◊〉 in such sort, as all the world commended the wisdom of this young 〈…〉 u●●o whom Themistocles the Athenian fled, being expelled by the envy of his 〈…〉 citizens, and was honourably entertained by this great Monarch. In the mean 〈◊〉 the Egyptians seeing (in their opinions) the Persians affairs well shaken, revolted, and made a king, chase away the Governors, judges, Treasurers, Receivors, and other ●●●cerss that were in Egypt for the Persian, and they allied themselves to the Athenians, the more to terrify the king of Persia who sending Acamenes, son to Darius, with three hund●ed thousand fight men, had news suddenly that the Athenians had defeated his whole army: He sought to incense the Lacedæmonians against the Athenians, but not able to effect it, he sent three hundred thousand men more against the Egyptians, under the command of two excellent Captains, Megabizes, and Artabazes, who after ma●● encounters, assaults, and sieges of towns, forced the Egyptians to renounce the alliance of the Athenians, and in the end agreed with the Athenians, that they should suffer them to departed quietly out of the province, so as they meddled not with the affairs of the king of Persia in Egypt, and then he died, having reigned four and forty years. He was a good prince, and embraced peace, using great courtesy to the jews, sending Esdras to Jerusalem for the se●ling of their policy, advancement of the Temple, and the revenues appointed for the entertainment and sacrifices thereof.   

¶ Xerxes, the second of that name.  
ARtaxerxes left at his death two sons, the eldest was called Xerxes, the second of that name, who reigned but two months.   

¶ Sogdian.  
THe other was called Sogdian, who reigned eight months, neither of which did any thing worthy of memory, wherefore they are not commonly put in the rank of kings, but I have herein followed E●sebi●●, who hath comprehended them in this number in his Chronicle.   

¶ Darius, surnamed the Bastard, the s●uenth, or (according unto others) the ninth Monarch of Persia.  
AFter the death of the abovenamed princes, Darius (called the Bastard) came unto the ●● empire, under whom the Egyptians freed themselves, and there reigned one over them called Say't. The Lacedæmonians allied themselves to Darius, and the Medians revol●●●g were subdued by him, and forced to come and acknowledge him for their lord. This king had two sons by Parisatides his wife, the eldest called Artaxerxes, and the younger 〈◊〉 this 〈…〉, vali●●● courteous, and well-beloved of all men, whom the king made Sat●pe of Lydia and ●o●●ia, commanding him to aid the Lacedæmonians against their enemy's: but h●● insolence against some noblemen of the blood (who had not saluted 〈◊〉 ●fter ● royal manner, that is to say, with their hands close in their gown sleeves, 〈◊〉 them to death upon this occasion) was the cause that his father, being sick, sent 〈◊〉 him to come and give ●n account of this offence, and to be punished according to the 〈◊〉 t of the Sages, whereunto Cyrus obeying, he left Lysa●der the Lacedaemonian 〈…〉, who, with other Grecians, did serve him afterwards against his brother: 〈…〉 he was advertised of his father's death, yet notwithstanding he was 〈…〉, who kept him prisoner; and Darius the Bastard died in the year 3562, the same year that Athens was taken and burnt by the Lacedæmonians, and Dennis the ●●●tant expelled out of Sicily, which year was held remarkable for three things: the death of a great king, the deposing of another, and the ruin of the most famous city of ●●●●ce. And Darius reigned nineteen years.   

¶ Artaxerxes, the second of that name, the eight Monarch of Persia.  
Artaxerxes, the second of that name, succeeded his father, and was surnamed Mnemon: 〈◊〉 he kept his brother Cyrus in prison, and sought his ruin; the young prince who 〈◊〉 no less, wrought so, as he forced the prison, and fled into Greece, where he ga●●●●ed forces together, and was followed by the Grecians and jonians, for that he had 〈◊〉 bred up among them: without doubt if he had not been unfortunate in the be●●●ing, and that his great courage and valour had not drawn him on so far in the 〈◊〉, he had chased his brother from his seat: for he had the favour of his mother, was 〈◊〉 of the Persians, and beloved of all the world. But being wounded in the head in 〈◊〉 fight, this poor prince died in the flower of his age, having reduced his brother to 〈◊〉 Estate, as he knew not well what course to take.  
This king did love peace and rest, and having pacified the troubles which were raised 〈◊〉 brother, he had no other care but to reconcile the Grecians, the which he effected, 〈◊〉 to his predecessors, who sought all means to divide them: whereupon the 〈◊〉 sent a great and solemn Embassage unto them, of the which Pelopidas was 〈◊〉 ●s Plutarch reports, being honoured above all the rest. This prince having reigned▪ 〈◊〉 thirty years died, leaving for heir and successor Darius Artaxerxes.   

¶ Darius Artaxerxes surnamed Occhus, the ninth Monarch of the Persians.  
〈◊〉 beginning of this monarchs reign was against the jews, who being grown 〈◊〉 ●o factions for the high priesthood, there was one among them called john, which ●●●●sus his brother, being high priest, in the temple: but God would not suffer this 〈◊〉 unpunished; for the people lost their liberty, and the temple was polluted by the 〈◊〉 of Bagosus who punished the offendor, and imposed the tax of seven years upon ●●●●wess. Not long after, Occhus taking a certain town from them, he banished the in●●●●tss, and transported them near unto the Caspian sea, Eusebius calls them 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 observe at this day something of their jewish religion. Against this Darius 〈◊〉 ●●uolted one of his chief captains and satrapes called Artabasus, who made head 〈◊〉 ●gainst the king's lieutenants, being supported by the forces of the neighbour 〈◊〉 in the end he lost his life, and the king recovered the countries of Egypt, Cy●●●●d Phenicia, and took the city of Sydon by treason; causing him to be slain that ●●●yed it. In the end having reigned six and twenty years, he was poisoned (with 〈…〉 one excepted) by Bagoas the eunuch, and Arsames having escaped this poi●●●ned in his father's place: but his reign was not long; for in the fourth year the 〈◊〉 as poisoned him with all the blood royal, and yet he could not seize upon the 〈◊〉 which fell to Coloman a great nobleman of Persia, who caused himself to be 〈…〉 the fourth of that name. This Bagoas thinking to poison him as he had done 〈◊〉 king forced him to drink the poison himself, and so he was punished for 〈◊〉 ●●eriess.   

¶ Darius the fourth of that name, and last Monarch of Persia.  
〈◊〉 being thus revenged of Bagoas came unto the Empire, where he continued not 〈◊〉, for having reigned six years, Alexander the Great made war against him, 〈◊〉 him of Empire and life, and ruined the Monarchy of the Persians, in the year 〈…〉 3635, in the one hundred and twentieth Olympiad, and two hundred twenty and eight years after that Cyrus had taken it from the Medians, the which is no great thing if we shall look into that of the Assyrians, who continued so many ages; but it was not so powerful as that of the Persians.   

¶ The realm of Persia returning to her first beauty, when, and how.  
THe Monarchy of the Persians being thus overthrown remained subject, and as it were buried in that of the Macedonians, the which continued for the space of two hundred ninety and three years: but yet they commanded not long in Persia: for after the death of Alexander the Great, the Macedonian lords making war one against another, who should be sovereign amongst them, one Arsaces a gentleman of Parthia (others say a Bactrian, for whose sake all the kings of Parthia called themselves Arsacides) making use of this division, fell on Andiagorus the Persian, to whom Alexander gave the government of Parthia, whom he dispossessed of that country, and made himself sovereign, refusing to be subject to any Macedonian prince, the which happened in year of the world 3717, the one hundred three & thirtieth Olimpiad. So as the Grecians power decaying in the East, the Parthians before unknown and without force made themselves Monarches of the East, the which continued two hundred years, unto the time of Artabanus the last king of the Parthians, who was deprived both of Monarchy and life by Artaxare, or Artaxerxes a Persian borne, but issued from base parentage, whose beginning is reported after this manner: That his mother was married to one called Pavec, a man of base and vild condition, as being a currier by trade, who notwithstanding being skilful in divinations, and foreseeing as it is said by his knowledged what should befall, it happened on a time that a gentleman called Sanna, passing through the territory of the Cadusiens, came and lodged at this Pavecs' house which was very mean; who seeing by his art that his guest should be the head of a great and noble family, he was at the first very sorrowful that he had neither sister, daughter, nor any other woman of his blood in his house to have the company of Sanna, and to have children by him, which might be allied unto him: in the end seeing there was no other means to attain unto this happiness, laying a side all other considerations, at length he exposed his wife to lie with him, hoping by this means to change his state and fortune. Of this unlawful conjunction came Artaxare, of whom we speak, who was bred up in his supposed father's house: but the young man having purchased great honours by his valour; both of them contended whose he should be, Pavec saying that he was his son, and Sanna that he had begot him: but in the end it was concluded that he should be called the son of Pavec, and issued from the seed of Sanna. Such was the beginning of this king (As Agathius writes) who suddenly made himself king of all Asia, the which happened in the year of our Lord 228, Vrhin the first being then Bishop of Rome, and Alexander the son of Mamea holding the Empire, against whom the Persian had war, forcing the Romans to retire, who had passed unto the Medians country; yet there is great likelihood that he did only defeat some running Captain of the Emperors, and that Alexander having given battle to the Persian with all his forces, defeated him, for that he always remained in Syri● and Mesopotamia, attending the cure of his army, the Persian not daring to assault him, the which he would have done, if he had been victor in the first encounter, the which doth prove sufficiently that the Persians had not the better; and so we may accord Lampridus with Herodian.  
This Artaxerxes died having reigned fifteen years, he was very skilful in the knowledge and ceremonies of the Mages, and Philosophers among the Persians; so as this kind of people grew to be in greater credit, and more insolent than ever: for they had never ●●●●ined to such an unrestrained liberty, as when as this man their companion reigned, 〈◊〉 was nothing well done without their authority.   

¶ S●porus, the first of that name, second king of Persia.  
S●dporus, first of that name, and second in rank of this new race of the kings in Persia, who came unto the crown, in the year of Grace 243, Antherus holding the See at ●●ome, and Gordian the empire, which had great wars against this king, who making his 〈◊〉 of the discord that was betwixt the Senate, and the two Maximins, seized upon the ●●●test part of Mesopotamia, and Syria; so as the young Emperor Gordian was forced ●●●arme against him, wherein he was so fortunate, as he vanquished him, taking from him 〈◊〉 towns which he had usurped of the empire, the which Gordian himself declared 〈◊〉 Epistle which he did writ unto the Senat. But Gordian having been slain by the 〈◊〉 Philip, whom they say to be the first of the empire that made war against 〈◊〉 Christian faith, Saporus continued his course (for Philip remained not long in the em●●●● being a tyrant and persecutor of the name of Christians) and fell upon Syria, Cilicia, 〈◊〉 ●apadocia, against whom Valerian going, thinking to terrify him by his presence, 〈◊〉 won so glorious a victory, as having defeated the Roman legions, he took the emperor Valerian, and led him prisoner into Persia, where he died a miserable servitude; 〈◊〉 which had never yet happened to the Roman empire, to see their sovereign, cap●●● yet Odenat, king of the Palmireniens, holding the empire of the East, opposed him●●●● against the attempts of Saporus, and coming to battle, the Persian was vanqui●●● and pursued into Assyria; Odenat took the Persians baggage, and his concubines; 〈◊〉 if this Palmirenien had not opposed himself against the Persian, the empire of 〈◊〉 had been ruined. From that time he kept himself quiet in his country, and ha●●●● reigned one and thirty years, he left this world, and had for successor Ormisdates.   

¶ Ormisdates, the third king of Persia.  
●●misdatess reigned but one year; and we do not read of any remarkable matter that 〈◊〉 achieved by him.   

¶ Vardanes, the fourth king of Persia.  
●●●daness was successor to Ormisdates, but there is no more found by him than by 〈◊〉 other, for the Persians continued for a long time quiet; yet, as Vopiseus saith, they 〈◊〉 ●●●assadourss and presents to the Roman Emperor.   

¶ Vardanes, second of that name, fift king of the Persians.  
jordans the first, succeeded Vardanes the second, and the fift in rank of the king's ●●●sia, whom some call Narseus: he had wars against the emperor Probus; but ●●●dea peace, the Persian enjoying some of those towns which he had conquered; 〈◊〉 Probus did, for that he could not contain his soldiers in their duties, but he 〈◊〉 afterwards slain, and Vardanes had good opportunity to conquer in the East, 〈◊〉 ●●borne at Narbonna, with his sons Carinus and Numerianus, having made him 〈…〉, had not withstood him, who recovered Mesopotamia from Vardanes, 〈◊〉 into Assyria, and had done more if death had not prevented him. Vardanes 〈◊〉 ●●●teene years.   

¶ Vardanes, the third of that name, sixt king of the Persians.  
〈◊〉, third of that name, who lived but four months, after whom Narseus 〈◊〉 unto the crown.   

¶ Narseus, the seventh king of the Persians.  
THis was a man of great enterprises, who grieving that the Romans should hold certain land in Asia, which he thought to be of the ancient patrimony of the Persians, meant to have his revenge, and therefore he went against Armenia and Mesopotamia, which he made to waver by his arms: but he was repulsed by Galerius Maximian the first time that he came to battle: but at the second encounter, which was betwixt Carra & Callinicus, going rashly with small forces to charge a mighty army, he was chased and beaten, retiring himself towards Dioclesian, by whom he was so ill entertained, as they say he followed him far on foot, being attired in purple, and yet the emperor would not suffer them to stay his chariot to speak with him: this made him suddenly to levy great forces in Illyria, and Misia, and marching towards the East, he encountered Narseus, Aseub, Dormisde, and Saporus, in Armenia the Less, with whom he did fight with most fortunate success, and with no less council than force and valour, for that he himself being followed by two or three horsemen, performed the part of a spy, and went to visit the enemy's camp, which having vanquished, he chased Narseus, took his baggage, made spoil of his treasure, and had for prisoners his wives, sisters, and children, carrying away an infinite number of the nobility of Persia, with unvaluable wealth, forcing king Narseus to retire himself, flying into the most solitary defarts of his realm, for which so great a victory (returning into Mesopotamia, whereas Dioclesian was with forces to second him) he was lovingly received, and with the honour that is due to them that triumph, carrying the wives, sisters, and children of Narseus, into Italy, who were led before his chariot whenas he entered triumphing into Rome. Thus Narseus, who aspired to the empire of all Asia, lost both that which he had conquered, and five of his own provinces beyond Tigris, the which fell into the Romans power. After this great disaster, the Persians affairs declined much, and Narseus lived not long after, but died the same year after his defeat, and the seventh year of his reign.   

¶ Misdates, the eight king of Persia.  
Misdates, his son, succeeded him, who was the eight king of Persia, and lived in the time of Constantine the Great, he was (by the commandment of his father) crowned in his mother's womb, a thing never read of in any other, that the fruit not yet come to light, should carry the crown of a realm. He died, having reigned seven years, and nine months, in the year of our Lord God 310, Marcel sitting at Rome, and Maximian Galerins, and Constantine the Great, holding the empire, having done nothing that was memorable.   

¶ Sapor●s the second, and the ninth king of Persia.  
SAporus, the son of Misdates, being come to age fit to command, he recovered all that which his predecessors had lost beyond the river of Tigris, in Assyria, and Mesopotamia, and in the year of our Redemption 336, whenas the Christians began to appear in his country, being solicited by the Mages and sacrificing priests, of whose will all that family of Artaxexes depended much, being come from a man of the same vocation, he began to persecute the Christian faith furiously, putting to death the holy Bishop simeon, with one hundred good and faithful men in one day, and his own governor: He began first by exactions and subsidies, and in the end by banishments, and punishments, until that Constantin the Great entreated him by his letters not to use the friends of the Emperor of Rome after that 〈◊〉. After the death of Constantin, Sa●●●●● began to persecute the Christians more than before, as you may read in the Ecclesiarch History; so as the pooresolitarie people which lived in the woods and deserts of A●y●●●●nd Mesopotamia, felt the fury of this tyrant, who made himself Lord of the 〈◊〉 countries, and therefore the war was revived betwixt him, and the children ●● Constantin, in the which the Romans got nothing but blows, as Eutropius the Roman 〈◊〉 writes, saying, Constance was very unfortunate, for he suffered great afflctions by 〈◊〉, who took divers towns from him, and besieged others; they cut many 〈…〉 armies in pieces: and finally, he never had any battle against Saporus, wherein 〈◊〉 Barbarian had not the victory, unless it were near unto the city of Syngare, where 〈◊〉 the better, the furious rage of the soldiers depriving him of that felicity, but 〈◊〉 abate the pride of his adversary at that time. Pomponius Letus writes more 〈◊〉, saying, Constance did never any thing in the East that succeeded happily; for that 〈◊〉 enemy had always the better: in the eleventh year of his reign he had the victory, 〈◊〉 it was lost again by the rashness of his soldiers near to Syngare: so Constance ha●●● been eight times vanquished, in this battle the victory being for him, it remained 〈◊〉 enemy, not without great loss; for that Syngare was lost with Bizabde and 〈◊〉. After this battle, Saporus fell upon the Armenians, and went to besiege the city 〈◊〉 ●isibis, but the Massagetes assailed him, and he went to encounter them, yet did not 〈◊〉 the siege; and in the mean time Constance sent unto him for a peace, the which he 〈◊〉. After this Saporus made war against the Armenians, but he found that fortune 〈◊〉 always follow him, for Arsates vanquished him, and made him retire into Per●●●● this Armenian war was of no great charge; yet it caused great ruin to the Ro●●●●●●pire: for julian the Apostate thinking to speed better against Saporus than his antecessor, went thither with his forces; but he was slain there, and his army put to 〈◊〉 for that he fought against him that had God for his protector, although an Infidel: 〈◊〉 used him to punish this Apostate, the most disloyal and wicked man upon the earth, 〈◊〉 was slain the second year of his Empire, and of Grace 267, and in the eight and 〈◊〉 care of the reign of Saporus king of Persia. The death of this Emperor, and the 〈◊〉 of the Romans did not puff up Saporus, having considered the infinite number of 〈◊〉 and the multitude of elephants which had been slain, a thing which had never 〈◊〉, and seeing the Romans also ready to renew the war, having so valiant a 〈◊〉 ●nder as jovinian, he stayed and yielded to a peace; the which although it were 〈◊〉 beneficial to the Romans, yet was it necessary, considering the loss they had 〈◊〉 from the Persian; and that having Sapor●ss in Front, and others revolting, it had 〈◊〉 ●●●sie to shake the greatness of the Empire: yet Amianus doth much condemn 〈◊〉, as proceeding from a saint and effeminate heart, and accusing jovinian as a 〈◊〉 and of no resolution: but we must pardon him, for that he transports himself 〈◊〉 ●ctions, and doth hardly commend any one but his julian the Apostate, whom he 〈◊〉 ●●owed to the wars.   

¶ Artaxerxes, the tenth king of Persia.  
〈◊〉 being seventy years old, and having reigned as much as he had lived, 〈◊〉 year of Grace 379, leaving his son Artaxerxes heir and successor to the 〈◊〉 but not of his good fortune: for Saporus having had many wives, had by the 〈◊〉 thy three sons, Ormisda, Adarnasse, and Narses: and by another which was 〈◊〉 parentage, yet excellent in beauty, he had Artaxerxes. As for Ormisda he held 〈◊〉 party, which transferred the right of eldership to Adarnasse, who aught to 〈◊〉 ●●ed to the crown: but his father finding his disposition to be too cruel, he 〈◊〉 yield to make him his successor. For as the Mesopotamians had presented 〈…〉 of cammells skins, enriched with gold and other imbroiderie, he gave it to 〈◊〉 ●●●●misse, ask him if this present were not very pleasing; whereunto he an●●●● if he were king he should take more delight to see a pavilion made of the 〈◊〉; so as this answer (with many cruel actions of this prince) made him to 〈…〉 succession; for his father having assembled the council, it was concluded by a 〈◊〉 consent that Artaxerxes should command and succeed after his father, but 〈◊〉 no more happy in him, for his father being dead he presently put his brother Adarnasse to death; he put out the eyes of Narses, and committed Ormisda to prison, beginning his reign with infinite cruelties and tyrannies; so as it is not strange, if he carried himself so rigorously with the Christians, seeing he spared not his own blood. Ormis●● being a prisoner, his mother wife and sister went to see him, with the king's permission, who gave him a file, with the which he broke his fetters and fled, retiring himself to the Emperor Constantin the Great to whom he did worthy services.  
Artaxerxes then enjoyed the peace which his father had sworn with the Romans, and held the provinces which he had left him, having no war with any man, and having reigned eleven years, he died, leaving Saporus his son for his successor.   

¶ Saporus, the second of that name, the eleventh king of Persia.  
SAporus, the second of that name, son to Artaxerxes, reigned five years, but he did not anything worthy of memory.   

¶ Varanes, the twelfth king of Persia.  
VAranes succeeded Saporus: he kept the peace with the Romans faithfully, seeing the good fortune which did accompany them: he held the realm of Persia after that Theodosius the Great came unto the Empire, and under the reign of his sons Honorius and Arcadius: having governed ten years he died.   

¶ Isdigertes, the thirteenth king of Persia.  
ISdigertes came unto the crown in the year of Grace 406, Innocent the first holding the See at Rome: this was he in whom Arcadius had such confidence, as he made him tutor to his young son Theodosius as well to bridle them that were mutinous, as to keep his son from troubles in the East: and whenas they brought him this will made by Arcadius, he received it with great joy maintaining the peace with the Romans which his father and grandfather had sworn with great equity and fidelity: and morever he sent a governor for the young prince, called Antiochus, an excellent man, wise, virtuous, and worthy of such a charge, whom he made protector of the Empire, and defender of his pupiles rights; the which he sent to the Sena● in this manner, as Paulus Diaconus reports: Arcadius being dead, and having chosen me tutor to his son, I sand a man fit to bold my place: let no man then presume to attempt against the infant, lest an intolerable war be the ruin of the Romans And to the end there should be no doubt of his intentions, he renewed the league betwixt the Persians and Grecians, and Antiochus did writ often to Isdigertes, for the good and support of the Christians; so as the Christian faith was much propagated in Persia, wherein good Marunthe Bishop of Mesopotamia laboured much: for before the king did persecute them cruelly, being thrust on rather by the Mages, and sacrificing priests of their gods, than by his own natural instinct and malice. It was in this persecution that Auda a Bishop of a holy life did indiscreetly beaten down the temple of fire worshipped by the Persians, and the king commanding him to re-edify it, he chose rather to die, than to do it: wherein he was more to be commended than in pulling i● down, for that in seeking to do well he had been the cause of so much ill: yet, as hath been said, this persecution ceased during the reign of this king, who would not only satisfy the Emperor, but also the good Bishop Marunthes: for that as Paulus Diaconus writes, he had cured ●●r●ness the king's son, being possessed with a devil. But Socrates in his ecclesiastical history reports, that the reason was, for that Isdigertes being subject to a great pain in his head, which the Mages could not cure, Marunthes with the sign of a cross only eased him, and he was never more troubled with it, for which cause the king gave liberty to this good Bishop to build as many churches as he pleased in his Estates: 〈…〉 it is likely he had become a Christian, if the Mages who had great power in the country, had not opposed themselves. He died in the year of Grace 427, having reigned 〈…〉 twenty years, leaving his son Var●nes heir of the crown.   

¶ 〈◊〉, the second if that name, the fourteenth king of Persia.  
〈◊〉, the second of that name, being come to the crown of Persia, showed him 〈◊〉 as severie a persecuter of the Christians as his father had been favourable. 〈◊〉 whose decease, he proclaimed war against the Emperor Theodosius the 〈◊〉 surnamed the Young; with whom joining i● battle, he● was vanquished, and had 〈◊〉 him with more violence, but that he had a care of the Christians which were in 〈◊〉 fearing lest the tyrant should persecute them more? He had begun his persecuti●● the princes and noblemen which had received the faith, whom he dispossessed of 〈◊〉 estates, and reduced them to such extremity, as they were forced to keep camels, 〈◊〉 exercise some base trade; then seeing them so constant in the faith, he put them to 〈◊〉 marvellest death, that the Mages (who were his ordinary Councillors) could in●ent? 〈◊〉 his last defeat which he received by Theodosia's, made the persecution to cease: for the ●●●etor having more regard to the good of the Christians, than to his own advantage, 〈◊〉 Helyon Patricius, and Antolius (Praetor of the East) into Persia, to demand a peace of 〈◊〉, who accepted of the condition, promising to perform the emperors will, and 〈◊〉 that time the persecution ceased. He reigned twenty years, and died in the 〈◊〉 of our Redemption 447, Leo the first being Bishop of Rome; and then Theodo●●●ade war against the Vandals.   

¶ Varanes, the third of that name, the fifteenth king of Persia.  
●●raness, the third of that name, being priest with the same necessity that had made 〈◊〉 father to accounted of a peace, contained himself in quiet, and always conti●●●he peace which his father had obtained: He died, having reigned seventeen 〈◊〉 and four months.   

¶ Peros●s, the sixteenth king of Persia.  
SATURN'S succeeded in the realm, he was a great warrior, hardy, and of a great courage, 〈◊〉 more through rashness than any good counsel, perished in an enterprise against 〈◊〉 ●●alitess, not so much by his enemy's force, as by his own indiscretion and folly: ●●●●reas he should have stood upon his guard, marching through his enemy's coun●●● presumption was such, relying upon his own forces, as they had means to 〈◊〉, when he least expected them, perishing thus with his whole army, having won 〈◊〉 nor reputation; thus much Agathias writes: but Procopius calls these Nepta●●●aliteses, and saith thus: Perosus king of Persia fell into controversy for the limits 〈◊〉 country with the Huns Euthalites, whom they call Albes, against whom he went ●●●ghtie army.  
〈◊〉 ●Euthalites are of the race of the Huns, and yet they are no neighbours unto 〈◊〉 join unto the Persians towards the North: their chief city is called Gonza, 〈◊〉 frontiers of Persia: they have often contended with their neighbours for the 〈◊〉 of the country, and they are not Nomades (that is to say, shepherds) like unto 〈◊〉 of the Huns; neither did they ever enter into the territory of the Romans to 〈◊〉 against them, unless it were in the company of the Persians. They are (saith 〈◊〉 fair complexion, neat, and have no furious aspect, like unto the rest, neither do 〈◊〉 their brutishness, having some policy among them: for the Euthalites obey 〈◊〉 and sole monarch, and they live civilely and politicly, using reason and 〈◊〉 their neighbours, like unto all civil nations. They are esteemed most happy, 〈◊〉, that have twenty friends or more, with whom they do usually eat, having 〈◊〉 and signory common together, and they have a custom, when any one 〈◊〉 dies, to carry him to the ground. Then he adds, that Perosus seeing himself cooped up in such sort, as it was impossible to ●scape, the king of the Euthalites sent him word, that there was no other means to free himself from the danger, but to come and do him homage, and to swear 〈◊〉 to the custom of his country) that the Persians should never make war against the Euthalites. Perosus having asked council of his Mages, they answered him, That as for the oath he might do at his discretion, but touching the adoration, reverence, and homage, which the king of the Euthalites demanded, that it was impossible, for that the Persians might not worship any other thing than the Sun. But they gave him this council; that in the morning; at the break of day, he should go unto the Euthalite, and that turning, towards the Sun rising, ●e should do him reu●●ence, and worship the Sun; by which means, he should escape the danger, preserve ●his honour, and in no sort violate the customs of Persia.  
Thus Perosus escaped a● that time, but he was as disloyal in the keeping of his promise, as he had been inconsiderate and rashy in his carriage: for he was no sooner returned into his country, but he gathered an army together to march against the Euthalites, having left Cavades his son to govern in his absence: It was at this time that he was slain, with his other sons, all his nobility, and the most valiant men among the Persians, having reigned twenty years, in the year of Grace 484, Simplicius being Bishop at Rome, and Leo holding the empire of the Grecians, carrying also the title of Emperor of Rome.   

¶ Valent, the seventeenth king of Persia.  
THis man was brother to the deceased king, who governed the realm after the death of his brother, for that Cavades was very young, but he was but the shadow of a king, and did nothing worthy of memory: for to speak the truth, the Euthalites governed rather than he, to whom he made himself tributary, by reason of his quiet disposition, and nothing fit to manage affairs so confused as the Persians: but this continued not long, for he died, having reigned four years, and paid two years tribute.   

¶ Cavades, the eighteenth king of Persia.  
VAlent being dead, Cavades, son to Perosus, came unto the crown: at his entrance he found the Persians much tyrannised by the Euthalites, but as he was a warlike prince, and could not live in quiet, not though he had peace with all men; he presently took arms against his enemies, beginning with the Euthalites, and vanquished them, shaking off the yoke of their command: He also made war against the Romans, and other people his neighbours, of whom he won many victories. He was naturally cruel, and so choleric, as it was impossible to pacify him being moved: he was of such a troublesome disposition, as he could not settle himself, but cause some disorders either with others, or with his subjects, and in his own Estates: so as he took delight to change the ancient laws and ordinances of the Persians, and to make new: whereof one was unworthy of a great king, and had in a manner ruined his Estate, by the which he would that all women should be common: for all the Estates of his country found it so unfitting, and against reason, as both nobility and people revolted generally against him, took him, and put him in prison, having reigned eleven years.   

¶ Blaze, or Lamase, nineteenth king of Persia.  
CAuades, being a prisoner, and having no heirs male to hold his place, the Persians assembled together for the election of a king, and did choose Blaze, brother to the deceased king Perosus; for (according to their custom) it was not lawful to make any regent of the realm, unless he were of the blood royal. Being chosen king, he presently propounded, in Council, what should be done with Cavades: the people would by no means he should be put to death, although they were of divers opinions and council: For Gusanescades who was Chanarange, that is to say, Governor of the country, seeing the Council so irresolute, drew forth a little knife a finger long, and proportionably big, the which the Persians do usually carry to pair their nails, and showing it to the rest, he spoke unto them, saying, this little knife is sufficient to do that which twenty thousand men could not afterwards effect, declaring thereby the mischiefs that Cavades would do if he once escaped out of their hands; but all his persuasions could not win the Persians to put their king to death: yet they consented that this prince who was cruel and undiscreet should be kept in perpetual prison, and Blaze, Lamase, or Zambase (for they give him all these names) began then to reign, a just man, courteous, and very affable, under whom the Persians did hope to live happily: but Cavades made them to change their opinion, by the means of a friend of his called Seoses, who dwelled near the prison.  
This man devising day and night by what means he might free his prince, sought all opportunities to speak unto them; and for that Cavades wife was suffered to visit him, and to supply him with all things that were necessary: Seoses let him understand by her that if he could found means to get forth, he had horses, and all other things ready to conduct him where he would, appointing him a place where all things should be in readiness. This was suddenly put in execution; for the lady being in the prison, disrobed herself, and took her husbands, and he being attired like unto a woman went easily forth, and with Seoses and the troops the which he had gathered together, fled unto the king of the Euthalites, who gave him his daughter in marriage. Others say that he went to the Emperor Anastasius: but there is small probability that this Christian Emperor would give his daughter to this Infidel who had many wives: being more likely, as some others say, that it was the daughter of the king of the Euthalites, whom he married then; for that the Persians had put her to death that preferred her husband's liberty before her own content, and had put her life in hazard to draw him out of fernitude. Wherein the Persians did show their spleen against this prince, seeing they did not pardon conjugal love, which they should rather have reverenced, than revenged in this princess.  
Cavades then with the forces of the king of the Euthalites marched against the Persians, who coming against him, he put them suddenly to flight, and then went into the country and satrapy of this Gusanascades, who had given council to put him to death, disappointing him of his charge of Charanange or Governor, and puitting in his place Adergunibade: then coming to the royal palace he seized thereon without any great difficulty, putting Blaze and Gusanascades to death: after which he made his great friend Scoses who had freed him from prison, Adrastadaram Selane which was an officer having the command over all his forces, like in a manner to the Constable in France. This Soeses was the first and last which ever had any such office conferred upon him in Persia.   

¶ Cavades escaping out of prison, recovered his realm of Persia.  
CAuades having thus recovered his realm, and grown wise by the frowns of fortune, he governed afterwards more modestly than he had done before. He aught great sums of money to the kings of the Euthalites, which made him sand to the Emperor Anastasius to borrow; but being refused, it served him for a pretext to make war against him: so as the Persians fell upon Armenia, and committed an infinite number of spoils, taking the city of Amida, and meaning to pass further, they were stayed by the Euthalites who made war against them. This was the cause that Amida was recovered by the Romans, who as Procopius writes, corrupted the Governor which Cau●deses had left in the city. In the mean time Cavades seeing himself old, and fearing ●ome change in the State of Persia after his death, he resolved to dispose of his successor: and having three sons, he sought to give the realm to the youngest which was called Cosroè, for that the eldest whose name was Cavades was not pleasing unto ●im; and the second, who was called Bazè, having but one eye might not come unto the crown, for that the law of Persia excluded all them that were lame or wanted any member: but the third was more acceptable unto him, and the rather, for that he had him by his own sister which was called Abenedes; and this in the end he obtained by his practices. From that time he began to persecute the Christians, causing the hamstrings of some to be cut, who notwithstanding were able to walk: but besieging a certain Castle of the Indians, which was called Azubdabar, and not able to force it, in the end he took it by the prayers of the Christians, in the which he found an inestimable treasure. For this cause he did not only forbear to be cruel unto them, but did also suffer any one that would to be baptized, causing all persecutions to cease. He had war against the Emperor justine, the which continued not long, for there was a peace presently made, and Cavades put to death all the Manicheens he could found in his realm, for that they had sought to make his son king, he being yet healthful, and full of life, he having reigned after his delivery out of prison thirty years, and eleven before, he left it peaceably to Cosroè, for that the eldest of his sons had been slain with the Manicheens, having conspired against his father. Cavades died in the year of Grace five hundred thirty and two, Boniface the second sitting at Rome, and justinian holding the Empire.   

¶ Cofroè, the twentieth king of Persia.  
COsroè came to the Monarchy of the Persians after his father, of whose praises Agathius speaks in this sort. This king saith he, was not only praised, and admired of the Persians, who extol him beyond reason, but also many among the Romans make him studious, and a friend to learning, and that he attained to the perfect knowledge of our Philosophy, turning many Greek books into the Persian tongue; and there are some which make him so good a Platonist, as Thimeus did not exceed him: but Agathius having propounded this, saith freely, that this was impossible in a barbarous man being borne and bred up among courtiers that were soft, effeminate, ignorant, and flatterers; so as learned men could not have leisure so to instruct this prince. But the reason of this opinion was the multitude of learned men that did frequent this court, every man wondering that a great king, powerful, and very barbarous, should so love the sciences, and esteem them that made profession thereof: yet Agathius commends him above Cyrus and Xerxes.  
As for actions of war, having had some quarrel against the Emperor justinian, who had surmounted the Goths, the most fierce, proud, and powerful nation of the earth; and made head against the Vandals, and other people coming out of the North, with whom notwithstanding he was forced to make a peace for a hundred and ten years, the which was called the peace without end. But Cosroè could not keep it, for within three years he broke it, and invaded Calicia and Syria, taking the great city of Antioch: but Belisarius going against him, made him retire, and vanquished him, as he had done in the first war.  
After this defeat he retired into Persia: but he continued not long before he came into the territories of the Empire, as one that aspired to more than the Persian Diadem, and he fell upon Comagena, sometimes called Eufratisia: but Belisarius disappointed his designs, and defeated him. This war was very long, for it continued four and thirty years, during the time of the emperors justinian, and justine, until that Martin, cousin to the Emperor justine, came against the Barbarians, and gave them battle in a place which was called Sagarthe, where he vanquished them. This year Cosroè died, having reigned two and forty years, having always been in action against the Romans. Agathius saith that he died of grief in the royal city of Seleucia, for that Maurice who being General of the Emperor justins' army in the East, had by chance made an incursion upon the confines of the Arpians, who were neighbours to a village whereas Cosroè was at the same time remaining, and passing the river of Z●rma, put all to fire and sword: which he (who had not been accustomed to be so braved in his presence) took so grievously, as they were forced to carry him from ●henc● 〈◊〉 ●eleucia, where he died. This happened in the year of our Lord, 74, john the third b●ing Bishop of Rome, justine the Young holding the empire, and Clothaire, of the blood of Clovis, reigning in France.   

¶ Hormisda, the one and twentieth king of Persia.  
HOrmisda, the son of Cosroè, being come unto the crown after his father's death, hoping to speed better against the Romans, he invaded the lands of the empire, sending Armiardanes his General, who having made some incursions, returned to his house rich in spoils, carrying with him an infinite number of prisoners; but he was repulsed the second time that he came to field, for Tiberius' being come unto the empire after justine the Young, he sent his ambassadors to Hormisda to offer him peace. But the Persian grown proud by his happy success, would not hear of any composition: the which did much incense Tiberius, and was the cause that he levied a mighty army, with many flying camps to assail the Persian of all sides. Hormisda was go in the mean time to spoil Armenia, where, in the end, the two armies mee●ing, there was a bloody battle, but at last the Babylonians turning their backs, they were the cause that the Persian was wholly defeated, where he lost his pavilion, baggage, elephants, and whatsoever was rich. And in regard of the confusion which was in this battle, Hormisda made a law, by the which the kings of Persia were forbidden to hazard their persons in any fight, lest they should miscarry. After this defeat, Hormisda armed again, but Tiberius' having sent two valorous commanders against him, Maurice, and Narsetes, the Persians were so well beaten, as they took from them that which before they held, and what they had conquered in the times of justinian, and justine: yet Hormisda seeking to deface this blemish by some generous action, laboured to pursue a revenge of the wrongs which he had received, but all was in vain; for he did but increase his loss, for that Philippicus, lieutenant to the emperor, took from him Nisibin a city of Mesopotamia, and entered far into the realm of Persia, from whence he carried a great prey which he brought safely into Media. And two years a●ter, Mauricius holding the empire, the same Philippicus invaded Persia, & spoiling it as he ●ast, he struck a great terror into the whole country, having taken the city of Arcemenes, and vanquished the Persians in battle, wherein they were confident to have the victory, for that the Mages had to assured them: but the event did bely their false predictions, for they received a great check. To conclude, all the time of Hormisdas reign, he was but once fortunate in battle against the Romans; for which defeat, the emperor Mauricius deposed Philippicus from his charge of General of the army, and put Commentiel, who was Governor of the East in his place. At the same time, Hormisda made the Turks his tributaries, receiving them into pay to march against the Romans: but this could not prevent the defeat and flight of Bara General of the Persian army, whereas most of his soldiers were cut in pieces. This was the cause that Hormisda deposed him from his charge, but he not able to endure that indignity, revolted against the king, making such a conspiracy, as in the end Hormisda was deprived of his seat, imprisoned and affronted by Bin●oeses, whom this ●●ng ●ad kep● in prison, and that Besta his brother had delivered by the conspiracy of the ●●●d Bara: ●o as Cosroè, son to Hormisda, was set in his father's place, notwithstanding all the protestations or persuasions that this poor captive king could make, who laid before them the good which he had done unto the Persians, to have defended them against the power of the Romans; that he had often exposed his life for their preservation, & that he had newly made the Turks their tributaries: but all this could not altar the resolution of his mutinous subjects. He increated them moreover, that seeing they had so wilfully resolved to depose him from the crown, not to give him Cosroè for successor; that he had another son fit to reign, a mild man, and of a quiet disposition, whereas this was naturally cruel and ambitious. But this did advance his total ruin: for Cosroè seeing his father opposite unto him, embraced the present fortune that was offered him, causing himself to be crowned king of Persia, in the year of Christ 589, and the factious taking poor Hormisda, his wife, and other son, showed a most horrible cruelty upon the mother and infant, causing them to be sawn asunder like a piece of wood, in the sight of Hormisda, who was forced to behold this pitiful spectacle, and to see his wife and best beloved son butchered after so strange and cruel a manner; then they put out his eyes, and condemned him to a perpetual prison, whereas Cosroè entreated him mildly for a time: but the father not able to forbear to accuse his ambition, treason, and felony, in the end, this detestable son caused his father to be so beaten with a cudgel, as the poor prince died.   

¶ Cosroè, the second of that name, the two and twentieth king of Persia.  
THis execrable parricide being thus settled in the throne of the kings of Persia, by the blood and life of his own father, the Persians found the fact so strange, as there was not any one among them but resolved to take revenge, finding by experience that this king was such a one, as his father had described him, that is to say, ambitious, cruel, and without pity: so as they who had before revolted against the deceased, and had been the cause of his ruin, were the same that conspired against him whom they themselves had advanced, revenging after this manner the blood of Hormisda, of whose death they had been the cause. For the same Bara, or Varame, not able to endure such impiety and wicked●●esse, made a new conspiracy against Cosroè, who hearing that Bara marched against him with the forces of his realm, he went to encounter him with another army, which was not to be contemned, and they met in a plain near unto the river of Zabe: but Cosroè seeing that his soldiers fled daily to the enemy's camp, and that they laid ambushes to kill him; he first of all slew many of his army whom he disinherited: wherea● the whole camp being moved, and taking arms, he fled suddenly to Corcese, with his wives, three sons, and some of the nobility of Persia that would accompany him, and (as he himself confessed afterwards) he came unto that place miraculously, having prayed in his heart, and called upon the God of the Christians, as his Saviour, and surest guide. In the end, he came and cast himself into the hands of the Emperor Mauricius, in whom he found what he could expect: for he assisted him with such great forces, as he put his enemy ●o rout, in which, besides the infinite numbers that were slain, Narses General of the Roman army, took 6000 natural Persians, which he gave to Cosroè: and as for the Turks, he sent them to Constantinople to the emperor. The History of these Turks is remarkable, who being sent to the Christian Emperor, were all marked in the forehead with an iron and black ink, in which mark there was a cross: the emperor inquired of them why they used this figure, seeing they did not honour it, nor him that had suffered death thereon: they answered, That some time before there had been a strange plague in the Persians country, so as few escaped, but there being certain Christians among them, they taught them to carry the sign of the cross after that manner, and that without doubt they should see the plague to cease, the which they did, and presently they felt the ●ffectss of their delivery, and this was the reason why they did carry the marks of their health and preservation. After this victory, Cosroè being restored to his throne, he did no more trust the Persians, but retained 1000 Christians about his person, whom Narses gave him, of the most resolute soldiers of his troops. And thus the necessity of Cosr●● ended the wars betwixt the Romans and Persians, the which had continued 16 years, until that Phocas (having slain Mauricius) seized tyrannously upon the empire, in the year 604. Gregory, surnamed the Great, being Bishop of Rome, for then Narses, who had served Mauricius, and done worthy services unto the empire, seeing it now in the hands of this tyrant, revolted, and seized upon the city of Edessa in Mesopotamia. The which Ph●●● understanding, he commanded German, Governor of the East, to besiege it: but Narses had recourse unto Cosroè, whom he had settled in his throne, entreating h●m to secure him in this distress, and to gather what forces he could together to invade the territory of the Romans. Cosroè finding himself beholding unto Narses, sent presently all his forces, which gave battle to German, who was defeated, and hurt in the shoulder, of w●ich wound he died within few days. Cosroè had also another victory against the Romans, in the which he caused as many Christians heads to be cut off, as ●ell into his hands: the which Phocas hearing, he found means to draws Narses unto him, promising by oath not to do him any harm: but being come, he caused him to be burnt alive.  
In the mean time Cosroe made himself master of all Mesopotamia and Syria, carrying away a great number of Prisoners, there being not any one to make resistance, the affairs of the Empire were in such bad terms. The year after, Cosroe invaded the Romans territories again, and seized upon Palestina, Phenicia, and the provinces of Armenia, Capadocia, Galatia, and Paphlagonia, and in the end he came to Calcedonia, spoiling, burning, and carrying away men, women, children, and cattle. The tyranny of Phocas, and the despite of Narses, was the cause of this great loss to Christendom, he desiring rather to see a Barbarian to ruin all, than his enemy to enjoy the Empire at liberty.  
After the death of Phocas, Heraclius holding the Empire, and Boniface the fourth sitting at Rome. Cosroe alured with the conquest of the Christians lands went again to field, in the year of our Lord 613, and came into Syria, where he took the cities of Edessa, and Capessa, and marched as far as Antioch, whereas the Romans coming to make head against him, were broken, and put to flight, and the slaugher was so great, as few Romans escaped their enemy's sword: then Cosroe continuing his conquests, took the city of Caesaria in Capadocia, and at the same time the Sarrazins began to make incursions into the country of Syria, in which province Cosroe took the city of Damas', and carried an infinite number of people into captivity. This made the Emperor Heraclius to writ unto him, entreating him to forbear the effusion of so much blood, and receiving a tribute from the provinces which he held, to yield unto a peace. But the Persian who aspired to the Monarchy would not yield unto it, but came unto the holy city of jerusalem in the year 615, the which he took, and Zacharie the Patriarch was led prisoner into Persia, and the ornaments of the temple, jewels, and riches of holy places carried away, especially the holy Cross whereon jesus Christ our Saviour suffered death for the redemption of mankind. After this Cosroe become so feared, as Egypt, Alexandria, and Lybia, even to Aethyopia obeyed him: he conquered also many towns in Asia; so as many began to doubt that he would carry the Monarchy of the world.  
This did so move Heraclius, as making a peace with the Hanares or Henares, and with the Huns, he went against the Persians being succoured by the Sarrazins, and coming to battle, he defeated them, taking fifty thousand prisoners, the which he afterwards let go without ransom: but Sarbora General of the Persian army, using the natural infidelity of Barbarians, sent upon the Christians again: upon this occasion Heraclius went to arms, & recovered all the countries usurped by the Persians, even to Media: he got the holy Cross again, and carried it back to jerusalem. In the end Cosroe having reigned thirty and nine years, died miserably, being slain by his own son, who cast him into prison with an iron chain about his neck, feeding him with bread and water, and reproaching him that he had put many to death by that kind of punishment, receiving thus by his own son the punishment of the cruelty which he had practised against his father.   

¶ Syroe, the three and twentieth king of Persia.  
SYroe having thus miserably slain his father, came unto the crown of Persia: but his reign was not long, for it continued but one year, during the which he set at liberty all the Christians that were then captives in Persia, and sent back the Patriarch of jerusalem, with the ornaments and jewels of the Church safe into the country of Palestina.   

¶ Adhesir, the four and twentieth king of Persia.  
AFter the death of Syroe, Adhesir his son reigned, but he held the Dyadem but seven months, for that Sarbara slew him and seized upon the realm, which he had long affected.   

¶ Sarbara, the five and twentieth king of Persia.  
SArbara did not long enjoy the thing which he had so much desired: for having reigned six months, his subjects slew him, for that he was not of the blood royal.   

¶ Bornan, the six and twentieth king of Persia.  
THe Persians being thus rid of Sarbara, they did choose in his place Bornan the son of Cosroe, who enjoyed the crown but seven months.   

¶ Hormisda, the second of that name, seven and twentieth king of Persia.  
HOrmisda, the second of that name succeeded him, and was the last of the Persian kings of the race of Artaxare, from whom the Sarrazins and Mahometans conquered the country of Persia, in the year of Grace 634, and 413, after that Artaxare took the Monarchy from the Parthians, having slain Artaban their sovereign.   

¶ Of the kings of Persia that were Mahometans.  
TO writ the genealogy, and succession of the Arabians, which have held Persia whenas the Mahometan religion was planted in those parts, it is so confused, & set down so disorderly, as the reader shall hardly gather any instruction, those ages having not encountered such diligent writers, as have observed a particular order like unto Agathius. Leaving matters then in their obscurity, this abridgement not suffering me to dilate upon this subject, as it were fit, it shall suffice to say that the Arabians having held this province long, the Turks came and dispossessed them upon their first invasion: who passing on, entered into the lesser Asia, where afterwards they erected the Monarchy which we see at this day, from whom came those Noradins, & Saladins, who afterwards annoyed the Christians so much in the holy land: but these were expelled both out of their country of Turquestan, and out of Persia by the Tartarians. With the change of races came also that of State, and the names of provinces: for Zacatay brother to the great Cham of Tartary, having taken the countries called in old time Margiana, Sogdia, and Bactria, they were termed the realm of Zacatay, as it is at this present. After this Ocatacham usurping the realms of Media, Parthia, and Persia, he would have all this called Azamie, whence it comes that the Persians are called Azemiens.  
This race of Tartarians reigned in Persia since the year 1260, until that Tamerlan made himself master of the greatest part of the East, having vanquished Bajazet Emperor of the Turks. For from the children of Tamerlan, are issued the kings of Persia, which have reigned unto the Sophi, whose reign was of no long continuance: for Tamberlan died in the year of Grace 1403, and the Sophi seized upon the realm of Persia about the year 1478. So as that great Vsunchassan who maintained war so long against the Turks, was son to Tamerlan, or to one of his sons: but howsoever the countries of Zacatay have continued without wars, under the command of the kings of Persia, after that Vsunchassan, had expelled one called jausa, who they said was of the ancient race of the Sarrazins.   

¶ Vsunchassan, or Assambey king of Persia.  
VSunchassan being in quiet possession of his realm, allied himself with the emperor of Trebisond, marrying Despinacaton, whom this Christian Emperor gave him in marriage to have support against Mahomet, the second of that name, Emperor of the Turks, who made war against him. This lady had leave from Vsunchassan to live with liberty of conscience, and to have the exercise of her religion, having commonly with her certain Priests which did celebrat divine service. She had by Vsunchassan one son, and three daughters, the first whereof was married to Sechaidar, father to Sophy, and the other two lived with their mother, whenas she retired herself with her husband's leave, to live solitarily in a town of Assyria, called Iscartibiert, where she continued long, with her daughters, at the king's charge, who caused her to be richly furnished with all things necessary until her death, and being dead, she was interred in the city of Amida, in S. George's Church, whereas her tomb is yet to be seen. Vsunchassan had war against the Turk, both for the Emperor of Trebisonde his father in law, and for that the Persian pretended a right to the country of Sylicia, now called Caramania, which the Turk said was his. As he lost Caramania, the Turk making himself master thereof, so could he not rel●eve the poor Emperor of Trebisonde, whom Mahomet vanquished, and made himself lord of his countries, as he had done of those of Caraman, not but that the Persians are as valiant as the Turks, but for that the use of artillery was not known to them, and the Turk having abundance, he amazed them, and disordered them with the storm thereof. This made Assambey entreat the Venetians to make war against the Turk, and that for his part he would assail him; and whereas the Turks had put him to rou● with their artillery, they should do well to secure him, to the end that with equal forces they might affronted their enemy.  
The Turk, in the mean time, levied great forces to invade the Persian, and to make war against him, for that he had relieved Pirohomat king of Caramania, and having past Palestina, and Syria, he crossed the river of Fraat, and came to the lake of Argis, or Gelucalat, and took the city of Arsingan, for that it was not strong nor desensible. Into those quarters came Vsunchassan, with his forces, to encounter him, having his three sons with him, the first being called Calul, the second Vgurlimehemeht, and the third Zainel; and his army consisted of divers nations, as Persians, Parthians, Albanois, Georgiens', and Tartarians; yet Vsunchassan seeing the order which the Turks held in camping, he was much amazed, and having been long silent, in the end he spoke these words, Baycabexem Nederi●dir, which signifies, OH son of a whore, what a Sea is this? for he said that the Turks host was like unto a Sea: then seeing the Turks begin to pass, he sent a squadron of his soldiers to stop the passage, and there began a furious skirmish, whereas many were slain of either side: but the Turks loss was greatest, by reason that the Persians might easily relieve one another, the which the Turks could not do, of whom many were drowned, not knowing the ford. In the end, they were put to rout, and Vs●nchassan made a pitiful slaughter; but night approaching, they sounded a retreat, yet Usunchass●n had the victory, for that he lost few of his men, either by the sword, or by the violence of the water, neither was there any one taken prisoner, whereas the Turks lost twelve thousand, among the which there were many men of mark: for this cause, Mahom●t durst not pass any farther into the countries of the king of Persia, seeing the difficulty so great to vanquish, by reason of the rivers, deserts, and mountains, which he must pass. The Turks retiring, the Persians took courage, and, passing the river, went indiscreetly to charge the Turks: but this fury lasted not long, for Vsunchassan flying upon an Arabian horse, gave an occasion to the rest to do the like; and in this disorder, Zainel his son was slain. It is true, that the Persians did fight seven or eight hours, and had made head longer if Vsunchassen, fearing that Mustapha, Mahomet's son, would have compassed him in with his troops, had not fled (as hath been said;) which was the cause of the death of his son, and of ten thousand of his soldiers, and the loss of the city of Caratsar, which was the chief of the country, subject to the government of Zainel the son of Vsanchassan, who was slain in the foresaid battle. After the which, in the year of our Redemption 474, whenas the Persian king was resolved to change the air (according to the custom of those countries) whereas, in regard of the heat, they are forced to change their pasture twice or thrice a year, being near to the city of Soltania, he had news that Vgurlimehemet had revolted against him, and had taken the city of Syras: whereupon the father levying his army, went presently to punish his sons folly: bu● Ugurlimehemet hearing that his father came against him, would not attend him, but ●aking his wife, children, movables, and jewels, he fled towards the Turk, sending some of his people to Bajazet, second of that name, for a safe conduct; but he presently advertised Mahomet his father, who commanded that a passport should be given him, but he forbade his son to go out of the city of Amasia to meet with the Persian, whom he desired should be honoured, yet would he have him have a care to prevent all fraud and deceit. Vgurlimehemet doubted of this distrust, and therefore he sent his wife and children before as hostages: then he arrived with some three hundred horse, and B●iazet received him very courteously, and feasted him with great magnificence. After this, the Persians son went to Mahomet the Turk, who gave him better reception than his son had done, and promised to make him king of Persia, and to ruin Vsunchassan, who was his mortal enemy. He then gave him forces, and Vgurlemehemet marching towards his country with his Turkish troops, he was no sooner come to Syras, but he made incursions upon his father's territories: Vsunchassan sent certain troops of soldiers to make head against him, but not in such numbers, as he seemed to regard much what his son had attempted, but these were policies, the sooner to entrap him, for he caused a bruit to be dispersed, that he was much troubled for the revolt of this his son, and that he had lost him in that manner, and they did also feign that he was very sick, and the better to settle a belief, he kept his Chamber for a time, and no man came unto him but such as he trusted much: so as the news came to Constantinople, that Vsunchassan was very sick of melancholy, for that his son had so abandoned him. This bruit of his sickness increasing daily, some of his most confident servants gave it out that he was dead, sending letters to Vgurlimehemet, that he should come and take possession of the crown, before that some one of his brethren did prevent him, & to the end he should not doubt of the fraud, they did celebrat the king's obsequies throughout the country, the which gave more assurance to Vgurlimehemet, who had received threescore messages which had been sent him to go unto Tauris, where he was received and conducted to the Palace, in which he found his father healthy, and without any in●●rmitie, who caused him to be taken and put to death without any regard that he was his son, and he whom of right he should have appointed his successor to the crown.  
After the death of this poor rebellious prince, Vsunchassan raised a great army, in the year of our Redemption 1477, making show to go against the Turk, but it was to assail the king of the Georgians, sometimes called Iberia, for that the Georgians had refused to secure him, whenas he went against the Turk. But that king, and a neighbour of his, laboured to make an accord, by the means of a sum of money which they gave him, and so retaining a fort which is upon the passages, called Tiffis, he retired to Tauris, where he died, in the year of our Lord God 1478, leaving four sons, whereof three were by one mother, and the fourth by Despinacaton, Princess of Trebizonde, who, being about the age of one and twenty years, was strangled by the conspiracy of his brethren, who would not endure that the son of a Christian, and it may be he himself savouring of his mother's profession, should have any command in Persia.   

¶ jacub Patischa, second king of Persia, of the race of Vsun Chassan.  
THe second son of Vsun Chassan, whose name was jacub Patischa, made an accord, with his third brother called Mango, whereupon the eldest was forced to fly, so as jacub made himself king, in the year of our Salvation 1479. He had war against the soldan of Egypt, who sent his Mammeluches into Assyria, in the year 1482, where, after long wars, divers battles, skirmishes, and surprises, the Persians had the victory, and repulsed the Egyptians, chase them out of Assyria, and Mesopotamia, into which they were entered: this happened in the year of Grace 1487. This jacub Pat●scha, who usurped the signory of Persia, took to wife the daughter of the Lord of S●mmut●a, who was the cause of his ruin, for she being exceedingly licentious, fell in love with a gentleman of her husband's train, and for that her friend was no small companion, she sought all means to kill her husband, and to bring him to bring him to the crown, whom she saw to be one of the nearest to succeed him. Thus having intelligence with her adulterer, they did mix a subtle and dangerous poison: then making an odoriferous bath after the manner of the Persians. jacub came thither with his son, being seven or eight years old, and entering into the bath continued long there; then coming to the palace of ladies, she who knew that her husband's custom was to drink coming out of the bath, met him, and presented him this deadly potion in a cup of gold, with a more cheerful countenance than of custom: yet the traitoress had not so good a colour, which made the miserable prince to suspect something, and therefore he would have his wife to take the essay, the which she durst not refuse, but drunk of it, than the king took it, and gave also to the poor infant: this mixture was so violent in operation, as by midnight they were all three dead; the which caused a great amazement and confusion in the whole court, seeing their princes so suddenly dead; so as it bred great troubles throughout all the realm of Persia, the which was made a prey, and divided among the strongest: for they that were of the blood of Vsun Cassan usurped the seigneuries that lay fittest for them.   

¶ julaver, the third king of Persia of this line.  
Ivlaver, kinsman to the deceased king succeeded, for the other brother was dead without heirs: he reigned three years, and did nothing worthy of of memory.   

¶ Baysingir, the fourth king of Persia of this line.  
TO julaver succeeded Basingir, he who had conspired the death of jacub with his adulterous wife: he reigned but two years.   

¶ Rustan, fift king of Persia, of this line.  
AFter him came one called Rustan, a young nobleman about twenty years old, and he reigned seven years: it was against him that the Sophy's father made war. He wa● called Secaidar, and had (as hath been said) married the eldest daughter of Vsun Cassan, being head of the sect, which they have since called Sophies, that is to say, of those which did not receive the Alcoran, but according to the interpretation of Haly, Mahomet's son in law, who had made a new sect in Mahomet's doctrine.  
Under this Secaidar there were many dispersed here and there, which followed his opinion, and did reverence him as a holy man; who living at Ardevil, a city seared not far from the lake of Vasthan, preached his doctrine unto the people, and drew an infinite number to follow him. He had six children, three sons, and as many daughters, and was a deadly enemy to the Christians: the Mahometans thinking to make their perfection appear, the more they hated the Christians. He made many incursions upon the Circassiens, who seeing themselves thus priest by the great power of the Sophians, had recourse to the king of Persia, which was then called Alam●t.   

¶ Alamut, the sixt king of Persia, of this line.  
THis Alamut had succeeded Rustan, and was then at Tauris, whenas they brought him news that Secaidar had seized upon the town of Derbent, standing upon the Caspian sea, and serving as a passage and defence to go from one country to another, b●ing but a straight. This made Alamut sand an army against the Sophians, who prepared themselves to battle, and joining, (notwithstanding all the resistance they could make, having slain above four thousand Persians) yet in the end they lost the battle: S●●●idar being s●aine, his head was cut off, and cast unto the dogs; the rest of the Sophians were put to rout, and most of them cut in pieces, and the hatred they bore them was so great, as wheresoever they found any one, it was impossible to save his life.  
The children of Seca●dar being advertised of this news fled, the one into Anatolia, another to Alep, and the third into an Island called Armining, lying upon the lake of Va●tham, or Gelucalat. This was called Ishmael being thirteen or fourteen years old, exceeding fair, grave, and yet courteous, whose face promised some great matters to come. The Armenian priest who took this infant into his custody, was a great Astrologian, and skilful in judgements, who was the more careful to bring him up, for that he knew by his art that this infant should one day attain to some great, command: he therefore kept him secret, for that they sought for him in all places to kill him. This priest laboured to instruct him in the Christian law, wherein it may be he had prevailed something, if ambition had not been of more force in this young prince's heart, than piety: but he who had other intentions demanded leave of his master and governor, whom he h●ld as a father, respecting also the Island of Armining during his life, and showing himself favourable to Christians. Departing from Armining he went to Chilan, where he remained with a goldsmith, a great friend of the Sophian sect, and an affectionate servant to the house of Secaidar: from thence he did often writ to his friends at Ardevil, with whom practising thus by letters and secret messages, in the end thinking they had disposed well of their affairs, they resolved to revenge both the death of their prophet Secaidar, & the defeat and slaughter of the Sophians at Derbent by the soldiers of Alamut.  
The first enterprise which Ishmael undertook, was against the castle Maumutaga standing upon the Caspian Sea, the which he took by surprise, for that they dreamt not of him, neither were there any forces in the place, nor the guards careful to keep the gates. This castle did serve them as a retreat, having made their incursions, as being in a place impregnable, and having good means to be furnished with victuals by sea, for that all ships touched there which passed along the Caspian sea. Ismaells good fortune was such, as in a borough standing under the castle, he found an inestimable treasure with the which he began to win the hearts of men, to make levies of soldiers, to sand presents to great men, and to use all the policy that they are accustomed to do which aspire to the usurpation of Empires, forgetting nothing that might serve for the advancement of his cause: so as he who before at the taking of the castle had but two hundred men, was in an instant followed by five or six thousand Sophians, with the which he began boldly to invade the territories of Alamut and to win part of his country, pretending the crown to be due unto him, as issued from the daughter of Assambey, and that he which reigned was not as he said of the blood royal of Persia.  
Alamut seeing the impossibility to force Maumutaga, would not sand any army to besiege it: moreover he had a conceit that the Sophi would proceed no further, but content himself with that piece; and in the mean time holding him in suspense, and making no show to assail him, he would not stand upon his guard, & so in time he should have means to entrap him, and to punish him once for all. But he made his reckoning without his host; for Ishmael having gathered together a mighty army, went to besiege the city of Sumachia, which was great and rich, lying betwixt Armenia, and Media. nor far from the Caspian sea. Sermanglogli king thereof seeing himself too weak to make head against the Sophians, left the cit●e, and fled to the castle of Calistan, which place was impregnable: and Ishmael took Sumachia, and made a pitiful slaughter of the inhabitants, where he enriched himself, and the soldiers of his army; so as he drew them to him by his bounty and courtesy: and it was bruited over all Asia, that Ishmael was the most wise, valiant, courteous, and bountiful prince in the world; which made many become Sophians, only to be partakers of the spoils and conquests of this prince.  
In the mean time Alamut seeing the happy success of his enemy, gathered his forces together, and the Sophi for his part did not omit any thing, but sent unto the kings of Iberia or Georgiana, who were three; the first was called Scenderbey, the second Gargarambey, and the third Mirzambey, to demand succours, making great promises to free the Christians throughout all Persia (for the Georgians make profession of the Christian religion) propounding also to enrich all such as should serve him.  
Either of these princes sent him three thousand Knights, and six thousand Iberians▪ all valiant and hardy warriors, and the best soldiers that are in all the East, who coming to Ishmael at Sumachia were courteously received ●y him, giving them great presents of the riches which he had gotten at Sumachia. Alamut, who was then about sixteen years old, and Ishmael nineteen, hea●ing of the great preparation of his enemy, came to Tauris, and from thence marched towards Sumachia, with a resolution to fight with him; and Ishmael in like manner went to meet with him, having only, as they say, sixteen or twenty thousand men: but all choice men and good soldiers. These two young and courageous princes met betwixt Tauris and Sumachia, where there being a great rive● ser●ing as a bar to either of them, the Sophy found out a ford the which he passed in the night unknown to his enemy, and at the break of day came and charged Alamuts army with such fury, as before his men were scarce awake, Ishmael had cut the greatest part in pieces; so as Alamut saved himself with difficulty in Tauris, with some small troop that followed him: for all the rest were put to the sword by Ishmael, who having rested his army four days, he marched towards Tauris, where he entered without any resistance, for that the city is not able to make head against an army, having no walls, neither were the people very fit for the wars. Ishmael used great cruelty against all the race of jacub, of the which he left not any one alive, but caused the wombs of women with child to be opened, and the fruit to be drawn forth and murdered; and not content to flesh himself upon the living, he made war against the dead▪ for having caused the body of jacub, and other noblemen to be sought out, but especially of those which had been at the battle of Derbent, whereas Secaider his father was slain, he made their bodies to be publicly burnt on the Market place: and to show how much he was pleased with the effusion of blo●d, he commanded that three hundred common strumpets should be brought before him, causing their heads to be cut off. The like he did to four hundred men that were of king Alamuts train: neither is it known for what reason he caused all the dogs that were found in Tauris, to be slain. And to heap up the measure of his wickedness and cruelty, he put to death his own mother, who (as it hath been said) was of the family of Vsunchassan: but the Sophy detested her, for that, being young, after the death of Secaidar, she ●●d married again to a great lord of Persia, one of those which had been in the battle of Derbent: for thereby he conceived that she hated her first husband, and all that were issued from him, and therefore she had married this man, to the end that his children might come unto the crown, and deprive them of the first bed: but what reason soever moved him to commit this parricide, he always showed himself to be one of the most cruel Princes that ever bore crown; and thus ended the royal Line of the descendants of Vsunchassan.    

THE LINE OF THE SOPHIANS.  

¶ Ishmael Sophi, first king of Persia of this Line.  
ISmael being thus settled in the possession of this realm, continued his victories and rigour against them that would resist him, making many of the chief of the nobility come to do him homage, and to kiss his hand, taking the Caselbas' or Turban with a read tippet, which is the proper mark of the Sophians, as making profession of his sect; yet in their hearts they were of a contrary opinion: so as there were few in Persia that refused the Caselbas', fearing his force and fury. Whilst that Ishmael remained at Tauris, feasting with his captains, behold Muratchan Sultan of Bagadeth, issued from the blood of Assambey, came to make war against him, the which did much trouble Ishmael, yet he fainted not, but gathered his forces together, animating and encouraging his soldiers: M●ratchan did the like, and all the duties of a good and valiant commander, so as the combat continued a whole day, with such animosity, & so great slaughter of either part, as they hold that since Darius, there hath not been the like battle given in Persia, yet Ishmael had the victory and honour, the other being forced to fly to Babylon. This victory happened about the year of our Redemption 1499, Ishmael being not yet full nineteen years old.  
After this, Ishmael resolved to reduce the province of Diarbek, or Mesopotamia, the which he knew had always been under the sovereignty of the kings of Persia, and was then under the command of many private men, among others, of Sultan Cal●b lord of Azanchise, who being advertised of Ismaels' designs, came of his own motion, without any Summons, there by to bind him to entreat him the better; he kissed his hand, took the Gaselbas', and promised to be his faithful subject and servant: the which Ishmael took in so part, a●he confirmed him in his Estate, & gave him his sister in marriage. He showed great courtesy to certain Turks come out of Anatolia, who offered him their service, and took the Caselbas'▪ heir of which was called Vstagial● Momutbeg, to whom the Sophi gave the government of Diarbek, except the cities of Aranchef and Amida, which he left to his brother Sultan Calib, who having exceeded the bounds which were prescribed him by the Sophi, as the bruit went, he had commandment given him to leave those cities to Vstagialu, who had notice given him, that although Calib were brother in law to the king, yet his majesties meaning was, that he should have the superintendancie of the province; whereupon Calib refusing to obey this commandment, for that the Curds (of whose nation he was) submitted themselves very unwillingly to the Sophians, was pursued by Vstagialu (whom the Sophi had also honoured with the marriage of another of his sisters) taking from him the greatest part of his signory, and all by the practices of the Sophi, who did it of purpose to ruin all the natural princes of the country, which might make head against him, being assured that strangers advanced by him should have no means to resist him long. The country of Diarbek being thus reduced under his obedience, he presently aspired to that of the Aliduliens (a people of the lesser Armenia, who had usurped certain lands during the life of jacub) levying great forces in the year of our Salvation 1510, Vstagialu, whom he had sent before, being not able to prevail, he came himself in person, having raised a greater power than of custom, or was needful to ruin them with whom he had to do; but he only feared lest the Turk or the Egyptian should undertake the defence of them whom he meant to punish: he therefore sent to either of them, entreating them not to meddle with the affairs of the Aliduliens, and protesting that he would not attempt any thing against these two princes: Having this assurance, he invaded the country of the Aliduliens, the which he conquered for the most part, kill some of the king's children, and making a great slaughter of the people; but in the end he was forced to retire by reason of the great and vehement cold of this country: in his retreat, he took the town of Casiria, or Coesaria, which was defended by Carbey son to the Alidulien king, notwithstanding that this Prince was well accompanied, and the place well furnished with all things necessary, in the which having taken this young prince, he took a delight to cut off his head with his own hand; as he did presently after to his predecessor Alamut, who being betrayed by Amubey, in whom he did wholly trust, being brought before Ishmael, he slew him presently with his own hand.  
He was of a disposition so impatient of all rest, as having ended the Alidulien war, and seeing that Muratchan Sultan of Babylon (of whom we have formerly spoken) might quarrel with him for his crown; he resolved to ruin him, and took for a subject, that after the death of Alamut he had got possession of the great city of Syras, the chief and Metropolitan of Persia, terming himself to be the nearest of the blood royal descended from Vsunchassan: both these princes had great numbers of men; but Ishmael had the most valiant; and Muratchan made his subjects to follow him rather by force, than for any good will they had to march under his command, remembering that in former times Muratchan had fought against the Sophi near unto Tauris with thirty thousand men, whereof scarce any one escaped. This constraint of his men gave him small hope of victory, wherefore he sent to Ishmael, entreating him to receive him for his vasfall; but Ishmael caused the heads of his messengers to be cut off, saying, That if Muratchan had any desire to acknowledge him for Lord, he would have come hinse●fe in person to present his service, and not have sent others; the which being understood by Mur●tchan, and fearing lest he should be entreated like unto king Alamut, he stole out of his camp, and taking three thousand choice men, whom he held most faithful, he fled to Alep, but being come unto the river of Euphrates, he caused the bridges to be broken down, which fell out well for him: for the Sophi causing him to be pursued with twice as great a troop; he had no sooner passed the river but he saw the Sophians at his back, who by this means returned without any effect, and Muratchen saved himself in Alep, where with king Aliduli, he was entertained at the charge of the soldan of Egypt.  
The Sophy's affairs prospering after this manner, he began to be feared of his neighbours, so as the Cham of Tartary who was called jeselbas', for that they wear a green Turban, desiring to divert the course of his prosperity, came and invaded the country of Corasan, and took many fair towns upon the Caspian Sea, as Eyè Stravi (whereas they make excellent silks) Amixandaran, and Sare, the which drew the Sophi unto the frontiers to stop the Tartarians passage as he did: but the Tartarian sought to surprise him, feigning to go visit the Sepulchre of his Prophet Mahomet, and to go the pilgrimage of Mecque: but the Persian would not hear of it. After this Sermandali king of Seruan, which is the country of Media, having broken the accord made betwixt him and Ishmael; the Sophi assailed him, ruined his country, and took from him his signory: from thence he passed into Carabac, where he made choice of two captains, the one called Dalabey, the other Beyrabey, to whom he gave the charge of the conquest of Sumachia, the which they took without any resistance, and the Castle of Calastan was also taken, with all the forces, which are from Mount Taurus unto the remotest part of the Caspian sea, and to the city of Derbe●t; so as all the lords of this country took the Caselb●● and did homage to the Sophi.  
Moreover he was in such reputation amongst his own people, as his soldiers did in a manner adore him, having such confidence in him, as they went unto the war for his service without any defensive arms, and fight bore breasted, they cried Schiac Schi●●▪ which signifies in the Persian tongue, God, God: as it were calling him to witness of their loves and affections. The name of Sch●ach was first given unto the Sophi: for in his titles at this day they call him Sch●ach Ishmael, and on his coins, he had caused these words to be graven on the one side, Illahe Illallaha Muhammeduis sesul allahe, that is, there are no Gods but one only God, and Mahomet is the messenger of God; and on the other side were these words, Ishmael halife, hillahe, that is to say, Ishmael is the Vicar of God. If any one would pray well, he used no other terms, saith Leonclavius, but Schiach accomplish thy desire, and be favourable to thy enterprises. He also changed the form of p●ayerss which Mahomet had instituted, and made others very different: and thus for the lo●e of him the Persians fell in hatred with the followers of Mahomet, so as he who had committed such cruelties, and put his own mother to death, who was an Heretic in 〈◊〉 own law, and had filled his country with fire and blood, was yet held as a God of his subjects, and he suffered himself to be so called; so easily is the mind of man transported with presumption, and so gross is our apprehension of divinity, to attribute it ●o ●uch base and imperfect things. Behold briefly the beginning of the Sophians, and how they attained to the greatness which they enjoy at this day.  
But having ended this war, he fell presently into another: for the house of the Ottomans having been long an enemy, not only to the Sophians, but also to the fa●●llieses of Vsun Cassan, and their predecessors, who only represent at this day the party of 〈◊〉 whose descendants did in former times retire themselves into Persia, they h●●ing been always mortal enemies to the Turkish monarchs, whose hatred increased the more, for that these had seized upon their signory: to this old quarrel there 〈◊〉 two new occasions offered to draw these two young princes into arms, the one 〈◊〉 Selim which was Emperor of the Turks, and the other Ishmael new king of Per●●●, both of them being ambitious, valiant, undertakers, cruel, and very fortunate in their enterprises. That which should entertain their wills, and purchase mo●e love, was the cause of their war, for Ishmael having sent Ambassadors to Sel●m to congratulate his joyful coming to the crown, he sent him no other present, but a great Lyon. Selim who conceived that this Hieroglyphic would tax him of cruelty, grew into great choler against the Ambassador, so as, notwithstanding any excuse, that which his king had done, was only to present to a great and royal courage the beast that was more courageous and royal than all others: he could not satisfy him, so as he sent back again the Ambassador without any honour, to whom (being in his lodging) he sent certain great dogs which had bloody mouths to carry with him into Persia, commanding that without any delay this Ambassador should retire home unto his master, and that he should be accompanied until that he were out of the Ottomans territories.  
The Ambassador being returned to his master, he put Ishmael into so great a fury, as he swore to be revenged, the which he did hope to work by the means of Amurath Zelebi, nephew to Selim, who after the death of his father Achmet, had been forced to fl●e into Persia: this was he whom the Sophi armed against the Turks; so as he first of all invaded his uncles country, who being then forced to defend himself, he presently led a great army into Persia, whenas Ishmael lest dreamt of him, not thinking his enemy could have used such expedition; so as being ill informed of their designs, he was go to make war against the Coraxeans, a people which inhabited upon the sea of Hytcania: whenas they assured him that the Turks were entered into his country, it made him to post back again, for his enemies were come near unto Tauris. In the end was given that famous battle of Zalderana, whereas the Turks had the victory, after it had been long disputed, and Ishmael was forced to save himself in a moorish fen, losing the greatest part of his army, and all his baggage: this battle was given in the year 1513. After which Selim took the city of Tauris, the which having preserved for a time, he afterwards spoiled, and carried away a great number of the inhabitants to Constantinople. In his retreat, Ishmael fell upon the rearward, and defeated many of his men, having the spoil of all the baggage. In the end Ishmael having reigned twenty years, passed to an other life, in the year 1525, having left four sons with an ample signory, to the which he had given a very happy beginning.   

¶ Schah or Xa Thamas, or Tachmas, the second king of Persia, of the family of the Sophians.  
X A Thamas eldest son to Ishmael, came unto the crown of Persia af●er his father's death: having had in a manner during all the time of his reign some wars with the Turks, a nobleman of the country called Vlama, had been one of the chief causes of the war, being revolted against his king and fallen unto the Turks party; so as Soliman who reigned then over them, entered with a mighty army into Persia, took and spoiled the city of Tauris, and built a fort there, which the Persians took afterwards with great slaughter of the Turks: yet this did not stay the course of Soliman's victories, but he made himself master of all Assyria and Mesopotamia, and particularly of Bagadet which was the chief of the country, where he was crowned king of Persia by the Calife of that place, where having stayed some time, he returned back the second time to Tauris, forcing Thamas to fly: at this time the Turks made a wonderful spoil, carrying away all that was rare and good, and setting fire upon all the neighbour places: but Del●ment a Persian captain had his revenge, who taking his advantage cut them in pieces, and put Vlama to flight: this defeat happened the thirteenth of October in the year 1536, Delyment returning full of glory and honour to his king. Although the Turks had spoiled all these provinces, yet some have written, that of near 500 thousand souls which past the river of Euphrates, there returned not above eighty thousand able men.  
Afterwards Bajazet, the son of Solyman, fled unto the Persians, who for a time made use of this occasion with advantage, but in the end Solyman fearing that this war might grow tedious, and that in his old age he might receive some disgrace, practised so with T●chmass, as he persuaded him to kill him, who had fled unto him for refuge, betraying in this manner his guest for money. He reigned 53 years, and died in the year 1576, lea●ing two sons, Schaeh Ishmael, and Mehemet the Blind.   

¶ Schaeh Ishmael, the third king of Persia of the Sophians Line.  
Ishmael, eldest son to Tachmas, succeeded his father in the crown of Persia, but his reign was not long, for he died within a year and ten months after, having done nothing worthy of memory. This history is reported by some after another manner: That the youngest of Tachmas children, called Cardar, seized upon the realm, who having put his brethren in prison, seeing himself assured of the realm, be showed himself so faint hearted, as the great men of the realm began to contemn him, and in the end to hate him; so as they mu●thered him, and drew his brother Ishmael out of prison, setting him in the royal throne, who finding himself not very safe, by the late example of his brother's death, seeking to make an exact trial of the love of his subjects, he hide himself in his palace, and did manage his design so secretly, as having caused his death to be published, it was easily believed, especially by his enemies, who thereupon were bold to discover their most secret thoughts, being assured (as they thought) that they should receive no disgrace, he being dead; but the spies which had been set to discover the words and actions of all men, advertised Ishmael faithfully, who coming out of his grave like a body newly risen, appeared to his enemies, not like a ghost, but like a prince justly incensed; but he carried himself therein so cruelly, as he filled all with murders, which bred new troubles, and unexpected confusions among his subjects, the which increased by the publication of his new law, which he would have embraced at Casbin, putting them to death that would not follow it. His cruelties were the cause of a great conspira●ie which was made by the Sultan's, that is to say, by the greatest men of the country, which came to that pass, as his own sister (called Perca) who had intelligence with the Sultan's, slew him: the which did wholly confounded this empire, so as in show Persia did run to ruin, there being nothing able to resist the lest attempts of her enemies. This weakness and confusion of State increasing daily, they advanced Codabande to the royal throne, being a man ignorant of the affairs of State and war, and diseased in his eyes, which hath made some ●ay, that he was blind, fearful, and inconsiderate in his actions, and that which did most i●port, not esteemed by the Sultan's: so as in regard of these things, this realm which in s●●me●times had been so much feared, began to be contemned of her neighbours, & of them that were a far off.   

¶ Schach Mahamed, called the Blind, the fourth king of Persia, of the race of the Sophians.  
AFter all these revolutions which happened (as you have heard) under Ishmael, Mahamed the Blind came unto the crown, who being such (as I have said) it caused Amur●th, emperor of the Turks, to make many enterprises against Persia, sending thither one of his Bassa's, called Mustapha, who took the fort of Eres, with the towns of Sumachia, & Dennenopi, and made himself master of all Seruan, yet the Persians recovered a part of it: All the reign of this prince, which continued but six years, was spent in the taking and recovering of places, and in certain defeats which were given of either side.   

¶ Scach Abas, the fif● king of Persia, of the race of the Sophians.  
THis prince began to manage the affairs during his father's life time, & afterwards being come to the empire, he recovered Tauris from the Turks, & freed a good part of Persia, with many defeats of either side: yet he made a truce with them, but it was only to take breath: for some time after, especially under Achmat, emperor of the Turks, which reigns at this present, it was renewed more bloody than before: he sent certain ambassadors as well to the emperor Radolphus, as to the Archduke of Austria, to cross the conclusion of a peace which was then treated of betwixt the Christians and the Turks, to the end he might more easily defeat his enemy: but the affairs of Christendom were so confused, and their forces so weak, as the emperor was forced to yield to that which was most necessary: but as for the Persian, he continued the war, and was in the same terms in the year 1609, having already reigned 33 years. This is all that can be found of the kings of Persia, as well in ancient as modern Authors; Let us now see a Catalogue of them, for the ease of the Reader, distinguishing them according to divers races.  

THE MONARCHES OF PERSIA.  
The year of the World.   The years of the reign. The Months.   1 Cyrus, and Ciaxre, or Darius. 2.   3427. 1. Cyrus' alone. 2.     2. Cambyses, in him ended the race of Cyrus. 7. 5.   3 Smerdis the Mage. 0. 8. 3463. 4. Darius, son to Histaspes. 36.     5. Xerxes. 21.     6. Artaxerxes. 44.   7. Xerxes, second of that name. 0. 2●   8. Sogdian. 0. 8.   9 Darius' the Bastard. 19     10. Artaxerxes. 36.     11. Darius Artaxerxes, surnamed Occhus. 4.     12. Darius, the fourth of that name. 6.     

THE LINE OF THE ARTAXARIDES.  
The year of Grace.   The year of the reign. The Months.   1 Artaxare or Artaxerxes. 15. 228. 2. Saporus. 0.     3 Hormisdates. 1.     4. Vardanes. 0.     5. Vardanes, second of that name. 16.     6. Vardanes the third. 0. 4.     7. N●rseus. 7.     8. Misdates. 7. 9   9 Saporus. 70.     10. Artaxerxes. 11.     11. Saporus the second. 5.   12. Varannes'. 10.     13. Idegertes. 21.     14. Varannes' the second. 20.     15. Varannes' the third. 17.     16. Perosus. 20.     17. Valent. 4.     18. Cavades. 11.     19 Bl●se or Lamase. 2.     20. Cavades again. 44.     21. Hormisda. 15.     22. Cosroè. 39     23. Siroè. 1.     24. Adhesir. 0. 7.     25. Sarbara. 0. 6.   The years of grace.   The years of reign. Months. 26. Bornan 0. 7. 634. 27. Hormisda 4.   

THE LINE OF VSUN CASSAN OR ASSAMBEY.  
1403. 1. Vsun Cassan 11. 6.   2. jacub Patischa 12. 10.   3. julaver 3.     4. Baysingir 2.     5. Rustan. 7.     6. Alamut and Murat 3     

THE LINE OF THE SOPHIES.  
1495. 1. Ishmael Sophi 20:     2. Schach Tachmas 53.     3 Schach Ishmael 1 10.   4. Scbach Mahamed the blind 7.   V●to the year 1609. 5. Schach Abas. 33.      

The Preface.  
THis History abridged of the Persians, is so full of memorable actions, as if they should be set down in particular, according to the Method which hath been held throughout the whole book, it would rather make a relation than an abridgement: and this long repetition would rather be tedious and unpleasant, tha● profitable to the reader, who will sooner have perused this small abridgement, the reading whereof is so succinct, as it must needs give him content. It shall suffice then to say for his better satisfaction, that this Chronicle abridged of the kings of Persia, divides itself into many families: the first beginning at Kaiumar as the son of Aram, the son of Sem, the son of No, unto Alexander the Great for the space almost of one thousand years. After Alexander there was a vacancy of seventy years, and then the Persians having recovered their dominion, one of the descendants of Darab entered into this interrupted possession, the which continued above three hundred years: so as this first family of Ka●umaras the first king of Persia lasted above one thousand and three hundred years. The last king of this race was lazdegerd, who was dispossessed by the Arabians and Califs of Bagadet, which are distinguished into three families: the first of Homar, which continued but seventeen years: the second was that of Ben Humya, which lasted about ninety years: after came that of Ben Abas, whose successor held it six hundred and twelve years, or thereabouts: but the last Calises had only the name; e●ery province being governed by a king which 〈◊〉 Arabian: but they were in the end expelled by the Tartarians, under their leader Ching is Ch●m, who dispossessed Almostacen, the eight and fiftieth and last Calife, by the victorious arms of Ola Kukan a Tartarian, one of his captains, who put the Calife to death. The Mogoles or Tartarians of the race Ching is Chamcommanded ninety and seven years, or thereabouts. After them came the descendants of Teymurlang, who governed not one alone, but many at one time, which make this family more obscure in this History, for the space of two hundred years: the last of them called Mirzah Ab●bacar was expelled and slain by Kara Issuff Turkoman; Persia being then d●uided into two parts, of Kara Kyonlu, and Ak●yonlu: that of Kara Kyonlu commanded first in Persia, but they continued but sixty and three years for they were chased from thei● seat by the Akuyonlu, who had for their head Ozun Acembeck, but this family continued but s●●re and thirty years, having been expelled by the Sophies, who had for chief Cha Ishmael Sophi, who began to conquer Persia in the year 1501, whose descendants have reigned above one ●●●dred years, unto this day.  
Having succinctly described Persia, and the kings which have commanded there since they began to sway the Monarchy under Cyrus their first king, unto this present, as it hath been written by ancient and modern authors: it shall be now fit to show the order and succession as it is found in their Annals written by the Persians themselves, and compiled by Carick Mircond, as it was promised in the beginning of this short abridgement.  
He saith, that in the province of Azerbajon or Aderbajon, as it is now called, the chief whereof is that rich and famous city of Tauris or Tebris, one of the best peopled in all the East. The inhabitants of this province seeing the divisions which grew daily among them, for that they had not any one which did command soveraignely, by a common consent they made choice of a king called Kayumarras, who in the beginning excused himself all he could, holding himself too weak for so great a charge: yet he was so importuned by their entreaties in general, as in the end he consented to the election they had made of his person; and then transporting himself to a public place, they that were deputed to that end, attired him in the presence of all the people with robes different from the common sort, and for a mark of royalty they did put upon his head a kind of little hood, which they call Tage, the which is as much among them as a crown with us: and in sign of obedience and subjection they all kissed his hand, which custom is yet observed in those countries. This Kayumarras, as Mircond reports, was the son of Aram, the son of Sem, the son of No, whom the Persians call Adam Assany, that is to say, second Adam; for that as soon as he was created king he would be called Adam: hence grew the error among the Persians in the time of Paganism, who held that their first king had been Adam the first father of all mankind.  

¶ Kayumarras, the first king of Persia.  
THis king as he was the first that commanded in Persia, so was he the first that settled any order and policy, causing justice to reign among them, whom he defended valiantly against their enemies, leaving his realm peaceable to his posterity, having reigned forty years.  
Kayumarras had one son called Nacek, given to a solitary life, and to the contemplation of natural things, who retired himself with his wife into the province of Damaoand, after called Aderbajon, and now Hyerak: and as this prince was of a good understanding, his father went sometimes to usit him in his life time, whenas he had any breathing from his important affairs: but it is not known why not how he was found dead in his poor retreat, having received many wounds, and yet neither his wife nor any of his people could discover who had done the deed. After that he had been mourned for by his family, and his body burned according to the customs of those times, every man being desirous to know who had committed so wicked an act; they found in the end that they were certain thieves of the neighbour countries: whereof Kayumarras being advertised, he gathered together all his forces, and went to encounter them in the country of Mecharek, where he got a victory against them in the province of Ta●rastam, where after that he had slain a great number, he carried many captives to his house, who served him afterwards for the building of the city of Balk, the which he founded, as he did those of Stahhar (where he kept his court) Ardavel, Kabulstan, Komuz, Macron, Nachibem (which is Ninive) Geryon, Sagiston, and Goms, all which were subject to the demeans of Persia: he was also the founder of divers others in several provinces, as shall be said according to occurrents. That of Balk was in the province of Vsbek, well peopled, rich, and warlike, as all be of that country.   

¶ Siamek, second king of Persia.  
NAchek having at his death left his wife with child, within a certain time she was delivered of a son called Siamek, whom his grandfather caused to be bred up, and instructed according to the laws of the country; then being come to the age of discretion, with the consent of the people, he declared him his successor. And in the end, renouncing the government, he resigned it into the hands of Siamek, who within few days after invaded the enemy's country, and having encountered their army, he gave them battle, where he had the victory: but he bought it dear, for having received a mortal wound, he was carried presently to his tent, where he died, leaving his wife with child, whom he conjured dying, That if she were delivered of a son, he should take revenge of his enemies; and with those words he ended his life: so as the realm returned to Kayumarras, who instantly went against his enemies, which were entered into Persia, vanquished them, and carried many captives away, among the which there were many which had been the cause of the deaths of the abovenamed Princes. They ascribe unto this Kayumarras the invention of most of the arms which they use in those quarters, and especially their capatisons for horses.   

¶ Ouchangh, the third king of Persia.  
AFter the death of Kayumarras, Ouchangh, the son of Siamek, entered into the possession of the realm, who governed it to all men's content: Having levied an army, his enemies being entered into a province, which is near unto Damoand, he gave them battle, where he was wounded with a stone whereof he died, leaving one son after him, who was called Thamures, having reigned fifty years.   

¶ Thamures Diuband, the fourth king of Persia.  
OVchangh being dead, Thamures his son succeeded him, who was surnamed Diuband, that is to say in the Persian tongue, a Tamer of the devil, by reason of the notable victories which he obtained against the Persians enemies, whom they hated as the devil. And for that his subjects had endured much during the former war, he freed them of all imposts for three years; and as he was as great a lover of peace, as inclined to arms, desiring to leave his realm better ordered than he had found it, he made many goodly ordinances for the quiet thereof. It was he that first created in Persia a Vizier, or Wazir, which some by corruption called Guazil, who is the chief and sovereign magistrate next unto the prince. He also appointed garrisons upon the frontiers of Ardebajon, which is one of the principal provinces of Persia, and doth most import. The victories and good government of this prince made many lords his neighbours to come and submit themselves under his command. But after all these prosperities, there fell a great plague in the country, whereof many men and great store of cattle died: from the which Thamures could not be freed, but died in the province of Vzbek, in the town of Balk, having reigned thirty years.   

¶ jambxed, the fift king of Persia.  
IAambxed succeeded Thamures Diuband in the realm; some say he was son to the deceased, others affirm he was his brother, and some his cousin: a man of great wisdom and understanding, and no less valiant, having added to his dominions seven great provinces, all which were governed by their laws and customs, doing many wor●hie deeds to maintain them in peace, and to free them from contagious diseases, whereunto they were subject, by the council of two famous physicians, which did flourish in those times, one of which was called Faelasuf Rabon, and the other Facychagorres: and remembering how much they had been afflicted with necessity in the time of ●ham●●●ss, desiring to provide for the future, he made many goodly storehouses, in the which he put all sorts of provision to serve in time of necessity. He invented coats of arms, and daggers, and they attribute to him the first making of jewels of gold, and to have set p●●●●ous stones. He also caused stuffs of coloured silks to be made, whereof he ware his ●obess: He much delighted in Aromatical things, and of a pleasing scent, the which he caused to be brought out of remote countries to his great charge. Moreover, they hold that he first brought the use of wine into Persia, the which notwithstanding he used so●erly; whereof they report a History of a s●ave of his whom he loved much for her great bea●tie, who being tormented with a great pain in her head, and the prince doing what possibly might be to cure her, and yet she finding no remedy nor ease; despairing to recover her health, she hide herself secretly in the place whereas the wine was kept, being preserved in that country as a treasure; whereof she drunk a good quantity: After some hours, finding herself eased of her great pain, she returned to drink more than before; the which having done, and finding herself fully cured, she presently discovered unto the king what had passed, who admiring the force of this liquor, did esteem it much better than he had done before.  
This prince did reside most commonly in the province and city of Sagistam; and the better to discover what past throughout his provinces, and to give order of all things necessary, he built the city of Scyraz, which is the chief of the realm which they properly call Persia. The city of Scyraz being built, jambxed made his ordinary abode there, where he began to treat of the government, and of matters, which until that t●me had been confused, and without order: giving to wise men the care and government of all, he would that men of war should have a distinct jurisdiction from others, and that labourers, and such as did till the land should not meddle with any other thing. He did also set down an order for mechan●ique arts, applying them to the use and profit of all men: so as every man rested himself contented with his trade as much as was p●ssible.  
Moreover, he made good laws, and did procure the good of his people: so as in his time Persia did enjoy peace health, and riches, but this prosperity was soon turned into affliction and misery: for jambxed seeing these countries so flourishing, and attributing all to his own knowledge and good government, was so deprived of understanding, as he caused himself to be worshipped as a god, causing inscriptions to be set in all the public places of his Estates, that upon pain of death every man should worship him: but he continued not long unpunished for this impiety, for in the country of Sagistam there did rise against him a famous captain called Ahad, his own kinsman: who gathering together a great army gave the conduct thereof to a cousin of his called Zoahk, who came near to Scyraz, where he found jambxed that came to encounter him with another mighty army, where giving battle, Zoahk had the victory, and jambxed was taken prisoner, and carried to his enemy, who caused him to b● murdered in his presence. He l●ft one son but three years old, called Frayhdun, the which he had by a wife called Framak, who hide her ●elfe with her son, so as she could not be found. It is not written how long this Prince did reign.   

¶ Zoahk, tyrant of Persia.  
THe tyrant Zoahk having caused his king to be murdered, seized upon the realm. He was cousin to jambxed, descending from Kayumarras, and son to Hel●an, a man of great note, who was directly descended from the kings of Arabia. This Zoah● was much given to the study of natural things, wherein he become excellent, and yet he was of a bad disposition, having a deformed face, a terrible aspect, and was hated of all men: having reigned sometime, he fell into a disease which the physicians could never c●r●, so as despairing ever to recover his health, being moved by a devilish illusion, and following the council and advice of a sorcerer, he persuaded himself that there was no me●●ss to be cured of his grief, but in rubbing himself with man's boold; so as he began a pitiful butchery of all ages and sexes, making a great deluge in the city of Scyraz: the which the wisest of his Council seeing, they went unto him to dissuade him from this inhuman remedy, persuading him to use sheep in steed of men, showing by many reasons that it was more proper for his health; to whom he affirmed that there were two snakes which did continually gnaw his bowels, having continued many years in this Martyrdom, during which, they say that one night he dreamt that three men bound him, one of the which slew him, striking him on the head with a mace; the other two taking from him the girdle wherewith he was girt, tied him by the feet therewith, and transported him into the territory of Amaoand.  
Zoahk having dreamt this, like a man distracted, caused all the wise men of his country to be sent for, who told him that it did signify he should be deprived both of realm and life; for among the Persians, the girdle is a mark of honour and dignity, which they had taken from him. He feared his misfortune should fall upon him by Frayhdun the son of jambxed: which made him to seek curiously for him, but his mother Framak had concealed him; where at Zoahk being much incensed, discharged his choler upon Asp●●● father to Framak, and flew him. The mother who fearing she should not be always able to keep her son so secretly but he should be discovered, gave him to a Neatheard to keep: the which Zoahk understanding, he came himself unto the Neatheard: but he had prevented him, and hidden the infant under a little tub which he had expressly made; so as Zoahk not finding him, he revenged himself upon his kine, whereof he slew a great number.  
In the city of Hispaon the chief of the province of Hyerak in Persia, which had sometimes been the seat of kings, there was a man of importance and valour, called K●oh, and surnamed Angar, which in the Persian tongue signifies Yronmonger or Smith, whose two sons Zoahk had slain, being come to the age of men, and of great reputation. This man thirsting after revenge, made a conspiracy with many others that hated Zoahk, and having gathered together great forces, he took many cities in Persia, which he did overrun & committed great spoils; the armies of Zoahk encountering him many times, but he was always victor; so as encouraged by this good success, he increased his army, and marched towards Amaoand whereas Zoahk kept his court, and upon the way he took the town of Hrey, in old time the chief of a realm, and presently after, that of Karason. This town of Hrey is yet famous, as well for the greatness thereof, as for the rare things which are found there, among others Manna, the which is more perfect and pure than in any other place, whereof they transport a great quantity to Ormus or Harmus, and from thence throughout all the East. Kaoh Angar having thus seized upon Hrey, he gathered all the people and his soldiers about him, letting them understand, that the reason which had moved him to this enterprise, was only a zeal of his country's liberty, thinking himself bound to do his best endeavours to free it before he departed this life, referring unto the gods after his victory to give the government of the realm to whom they pleased: then they all cried out with one voice that they did acknowledge him for king and lord, and that to him only the realm did belong for his valour: but he excusing himself said, that he would never lay such a blemish upon his family and honour, as to have the name of a tyrant: but they had Frayhdun the son of jambxed whom he desired they should acknowledge and obey as their king. This being granted by the whole assembly, they spoke of nothing but to go and fight with Zoahk, who came against them, where there was a great and bloody battle given, the which Zoahk lost, who being taken was carried before Frayhdun, where he was slain being stroke upon the head with a club: then having undone his girdle they bond his feet, and dragged him into the territory of Amaoand, as he had dreamt. The Persians make great account of the knowledge of this prince in natural things, and of his long life; yet they writ not how long he reigned. The resemblance of the name hath made many think that this Zoahk was Zoroaster that great and famous Magician.   

¶ Frayhdun, the seventh king of Persia.  
FRrayhdun having gotten the victory of Zoahk, he came, by his death, to the government of the realm, and having brought all things under his obedience, he made Kaoh General of his armies, giving him a good entertainment, & sent him towards the country of Magareb which lies upon the West: and to Garchacef his kinsman another good appointment, sending him to Macharek which is in the Eastrne parts. Kaoh was twenty years in his enterprise, during the which he reduced under the obedience of Frayhdun many provinces and realms, at the end whereof he was countermanded by Frayhdun who made him lord of Hisfaon and Aderbajon, where he was joyfully received by the natural inhabitants, whom he governed ten years with much content both to the king and people: at the end whereof he died. This was the cause of great sorrow and heaviness in Frayhdun, who suffered his kinsfolks to enjoy his possessions: and in regard of his sons he caused them to remain in court, honouring them much, and giving them great advancements. As for himself he married one of the daughters of Zoahk, whom he had put to death. He had formerly one son called Irege, by a great Persian lady; afterwards he had two others by this last wife, the one called Salm, and the other Tur, who were of as bad an inclination as their grandfather Zoahk. As for Irege, he was exceeding courteous, and therefore beloved, followed, & respected of all men: the which gave great contentment to his father, who affected him above the rest. Persia did then flourish in great peace, and Frayhdun seeing himself burdened with years and infirmities, desiring to dispose of his affairs before his death called together the greatest men of his realm to understand their wills touching him whom they desired should be his successor: all which with one consent demanded Irege. This did nothing displease Frayhdun, who to take away all subjects of discontent from the others, gave unto Salm the lands of Megareb, which lie upon the West; and to Tur, those of Mecharek which lie towards the East; and to Irege, he left Persia, and Mesopotamia, with the title of king, to the end his brethren should acknowledge him: and s●tting down the bounds of either's jurisdiction, he sent the two youngest into their provinces, either of them with an army for the defence thereof.  
As for Tur, he built a town, which he called by his name Turon, of the which the realm and region was afterwards called Turquestan, as it is yet at this day. This town is situated near unto the Caspian sea towards the East, and in the country which they call Mo●re-nahar. Here was the beginning of the Turks, from whence they came, and from thence they have invaded all these countries which they now enjoy: so as it is not from the Teucres, Trojans, or Thracians that they are descended, but from Tur, the son of Frayhdun, who gave to that country the name of Turquestan, that is to say, the province or region of Tur. Salm and Tur having their portions, they were much discontented to see themselves brought under the subjection of their brother, who they said was a bastard; so as they began to make several enterpises: then having imparted their designs one unto another by letters, they gathered their forces together, and came into the province of Aderbajon, from whence they did writ to Frayhdun their father, complaining that he had preferred their base brother, and given him the sovereign authority: that if he would deprive him, they would return in peace, if not, they should be forced to defend their right.  
Frayhdun did presently advertise Irege, commanding him without any delay to prepare himself to march against them: but Irege desiring to end this business by s●me milder course, propounded to his father to go unto them, who blamed him very sharply, and would not consent unto it. But Irege who desired peace, and the case of the r●●●me, taking with him the wisest and most discreet men of his court, went unto them to ●●nfer with them, without the privity of his father. These two brethren who de●i●ed ●●thing more, seized presently upon his person, and cut off his head, which they sent 〈◊〉 their father, who hearing of this lamentable accident tare his garments, and 〈◊〉 signs of wonderful grief. Irege left a son called Manucher, whom Frayhdun seated in his father's place. This young prince made war against Salm and Tur, and vanquished them in battle: and they to save themselves, lay hidden among the dead bodies, but being diligently sought for and found, they were brought before Manucher, who being on horseback, cut off Turs' head at a blow; whereat Salm was so amazed, as he fell suddenly dead at his feet. Thus died these two brethren, with above twelve thousand of their army that were slain, or taken prisoners. At that time, Frayhdun was blind and very sickly, to whom victorious Manucher went, and for that the good old man could not see him, he demanded which was he; to whom the other answered, I am your grandchild Manucher, the revenger of the blood of Irege murdered by Salm and Tur. The which Frayhdun understanding, he received him in his open arms, with all shows of love and joy, and taking from his head the tire of gold which he did wear, he set it upon his grandchilds', as a confirmation of the royalty which he had given him, & appointed him for Wazir Some, the son of Narimon, a wise man, and very valiant. Having performed this act, he died soon after. Frayhdun was a good king, wise, and a friend to all good men, very valiant, and bountiful. They report many worthy things of him, the which cannot be related in this brief abridgement. In the computations of times which the Persians make, they say that this Frayhdun was in the time of Abraham.   

¶ Manucher, the eight king of Persia.  
BY the death of Frayhdun, Manucher, the son of Irege, began to govern his realms alone: And as they were great and spacious, he was forced to sand Some Narimon, his Wazir, towards the Eastern parts. Being in his government, he had a son borne, which from his mother's womb was all covered with hair that was long and white. Some Narimon being troubled and amazed at this strange accident, caused him to be called Zal. This came unto the king's ears, who did writ unto the father to sand this young infant that he might see him: the which having done, the king consulted with all the wise men, of this novelty, who all assured him that this infant should be very valiant in arms, and faithful to his prince. Whereupon the king would have him brought up in Court, until he were able to assist his father, having an intent to make him governor of the country of Nim Rues, that is to say, the country of the South, which was the retreat of Zal. Afterwards, recreating himself on a time when he was at rest in his house, he had a desire to go out of his limits, and to enter into the government of Kabuscam, which was a dependency of his fathers; in which he had placed for Governor a Captain of his own making, called Merabah, who understanding of his coming, went to receive him with rich presents, and to have the honour to kiss his hand; bringing him presently unto his house, never ceasing to commend (before his wife and daughter called Rudabah, who was exceeding beautiful) the virtues and valour of Zal. This did so please the virgin, as without sight, she fell in love with this young man, yet not knowing by what means to discover her passion unto him. In the end, she resolved to sand some of her women slaves before the tent of Zal, making show to gather flowers: so as passing that way, he might have occasion to demand whose they were; these women having wittily performed what they had in charge, they met with Zal, who having demanded what they were, they answered, That they did belong to Rudabah the daughter of Merabah, whose beauty and perfection they described so particularly unto him, as he was no less surprised with the love of her, than she had been with him. This business was managed so discreetly of either side, as in the end they found means to see one another, where they plighted their faiths, with a promise of marriage. Which being done, Zal went from Merabah, and returned to Nim Rues, where he grew so melancholic, and full of perturbations, for the absence of her whom he loved, as not able any longer to endure it, he resolved to go unto her father, and to discover his passion, entreating him that they might go unto the king, to crave leave of his majesty to allow of this marriage: the father not able to resist his request, they went to Court, where, in the beginning, the king seemed difficult to yield unto this marriage: yet being vanquished in the end by their opportunities, he gave way unto it, so as returning afterwards to Kabulstam, they did celeb●at the nuptials of Zal, and Rudabah, who soon after had a son called R●stam, of whom there shall be often mention made; this history being reported upon his occasion.  
Manucher having governed his realm fifty years, there did rise against him, in the country of Turquestam, a captain called Afraciab, the son of Panchangh king of Turquestam, upon pretext to revenge the death of Tur. This man having gathered all his forces together, raised a mighty army, with the which he entered into Persia. Manucher understood it, but he made so little account, as having provided badly for his affairs, he was forced to fight with great disadvantage, leaving the victory to his enemy, and to retire himself in great haste to the fort of Amel, whither the victor pursued him, and besieged the place. Afraciab sought all means to draw him to yield it upon some composition. But this prince being obstinate in resistance, the other was also resolute to force it, and to become master of the place: yet his soldiers were not of that mind, for seeing winter drew near, they resolved to leave all, and return into their country. Wherefore Afraciab being advertised, fearing some worse disgrace, he thought it better to treat of a peace, than to make a shameful retreat. Some were deputed of either part to that end: so as a peace was concluded, upon condition, that the famous river of jehun should remain as a bound betwixt Persia and Turquestam.  
A peace being thus concluded, and Afraciab retired with his army, Manucher went out of his fort towards the royal city of Sigestam, where he than kept his Court. But Afraciab was scarce go out of Persia, whenas Manucher did all he could to levy a great and mighty army, to march against him: whereof the other being advertised, and having not yet dismissed his troops, he fell upon Persia, where he committed great spoils: but Manucher more provident than he had been, having his army ready, charged his enemies with such fury, as he defeated them, carrying away a great number of captives. This purchased him peace in the remainder of his reign, which was very long, for they hold that he reigned not less than twenty years, leaving one son called Naudar, to whom he gave many good and wise admonitions before his death, touching the government of this realm.   

¶ Naudar, the ninth king of Persia.  
THe news of the death of Manucher, & of the new coming of Naudar to the crown, being carried into Turquestam, Pachangh, king of that province, called his sons unto him, persuading them not to lose the occasion upon this change of a prince not yet well settled. Afraciab was he that gave the first consent, as having more experience of the affairs of Persia than his brethren: so as setting his hand to work, he levied an army (as they say) of four hundred thousand foot and horse, with the which he marched directly to Sagistam: Naudar being advertised hereof, sent presently for Some Narimon, father to Zal, who governed Kabulstam, t●at without any regard of his great age he should come unto him, as he did, with goodly troops. Being together, they consulted what was best to be done: Some went against Afraciab, but not able to endure the toil by reason of his great age, he fell sick, and died: the which gave very great contentment to Afraciab.  
Naudar, who thought to follow Some with the rest of the army, marching towards Masandaron, he encountered his enemies unlooked for. Having made a stand, and the two armies being one against another, a soldier of the Turks stepped forth and offered combat to any Persian: against whom went one called Kobad, grandchild to Kaoah Angar, of whom mention hath been made in the life of Frayhdun. Kobad had the advantage, who slew Basmon, and having disarmed him, retired to his lodging. The Turks enduring this disgrace impatiently, gathered all their troops together, and invested Naudars army, giving him battle, during the which there fell so great a rain, as they were forced to separate themselves, the sky was so dark. In this separation, Naudar found that he was not able to resist the forces of Afraciab; which made him to sand for two of his sons to come to his succours, whereof the one was called Thus, and the other Gostam, being accompanied by Caren brother to Kobad, who was come out of Sagestan, from whence he had drawn all his family and treasure, and had transported them to Albors Kuh (this is a certain country whereas the Persian pagan were wont to worship the fire).  
Afraciab understood the resolution of Naudar, which made him to sand a captain of his called Karahhon, who meeting with these two brethren, fought with them. Caren was slain upon the place, and the chief of his troops escaped as they could. In the mean time Afraciab did fight the second time against Naudar, and vanquished him with the loss of many Persians, and a great number of captives, of which Naudar was one, all which Afraciab would have had cut in pieces, if Agarires his brother had not dissuaded him from it, causing the captains to be carried unto a fort. This famous victory obtained by Afraciab gave him assurance to sand an army of thirty thousand men unto Sagestan, whereas Naudars court remained, which town did presently yield. The news of this victory being spread over all the provinces of Persia, came unto the place whereas Merabeb father in law to Zal remained, who presently prepared a rich present and sent it to Afraciab, letting him understandand that he descended from the family of Zoahk, whose kinsman he was: so as not able to avoid it, he had been forced to yield obedience to the king of Persia: but seeing that he had now the honour to belong unto him, he would more willingly yield him all service and obedience, and pay him as much or more than he had done to others. On the other side he did secretly and speedily advertise his son in law Zal of what was passed: the which he understanding, made a speedy levy of men, before that any thing was known or suspected, and seized upon Sagestan. This did much trouble Afraciab, and put him in such a rage as he caused the head of Naudar to be cut off, having reigned seven years.   

¶ Afraciab, tenth king of Persia.  
AFraciab having thus seized upon Persia, he advertised his father Pachangh king of Turquestan thereof, and how fortunate his affairs had succeeded: after which he carried himself so tyranously towards his peopled, as all the Persians conspired against him, demanding Agarires, to whom they did writ, entreating him to assist them: who made answer unto them, that they should call Zal to their succours, and first begin the wars: the which they did in the spring following, and Zal who was then at Sagestan, gave order for all that was necessary for the war, sending Ghechuad a captain of great reputation towards Tabrastam, to practise something in those countries. These things could not be managed so secretly, but they came to the knowledge of Afraciab, who being assured of all that past, and of their intelligences, and that his brother Agarires held the Persians party, sent to kill him: and Zal to revenge his death (which he apprehended with much impatiency) persuaded the Persians openly to wars against the Turks, who being gathered together from all parts, went and presented battle to their enemies, the which continued a whole day, with great slaughter of either part; night dividing them, and no man knowing who had the advantage. After this they retired home and continued their skirmishes six months together, in which encounters there were many men lost. Then happened a great dearth and famine, after which followed a contagious sickness, which infected both their camps; so as they were forced to seek a peace, which was not unpleasing to Afraciab, who was contented to retire himself to Turon, leaving Persia after that he had held it twelve years.   

¶ Bazab, eleventh king of Persia.  
AFraciab having thus left the realm, the Persians gave the government to Bazab, who was of the blood royal, the which he accepted: but being already eighty years old, he took for companion a cousin of his, called Garchasef. Moreover Bazab remembering the miseries and afflictions wherein the Persians had lived during the forepast wars, he endeavoured what he could to maintain peace, as he did during his life, which was short; quitting freely unto his subjects his royal rights, to the end they might recover themselves of their former losses. And for the commodity of Persia, he drew two rivers into the country, although their heads were very far off; the one he called Habin, and the other Razhabin. He never had treasure, neither would he have any: & if he received any sum of money, he divided it among his captains and soldiers. But he was a great glutton, and given to eating and drinking, inventing many kinds of sauces and broths: this is that which Mirk●nd saith was most remarkable in him.   

¶ Kaykobad, the twelfth king of Persia.  
BY the death of Bazab, Kaykobad nephew to Naudar came unto the crown, and made Rostan the son of Zal his General: being accompanied by Ghechuad, Kaharen, and many other captains, they put themselves in ambush before Afraciab, who came against them with a great army; so as he was defeated, and the Persians got the victory. Rostan did such deeds of arms, as he forced Afraciab to demand a truce for two days, being then in great fear, the which was granted him, upon condition to treat of a peace, the which his subjects did allow of, sending to Kaykobad to accept thereof: but the Persians would not yield thereunto; so as the came to a second battle, in the which Afraciab was vanquished, having fought more obstinately than before. Being in the heat of the fight, Rostan demanded which was Afraciab, whom when he saw, he ran furiously at him, being strong and active, overthrew him, and tied his feet with a cord, which was the manner of Persia, and is used at this day, to carry a cord with them to draw water out of the cisterns, which are common in those countries, and so he dragged him after his horse, and left him among the dead: but Afraciab was cunning, and found means to unlose himself, putting another in his place, and so escaped without descoverie. Rostan being joyful, carried these good news to the king, thinking there was no more to do, but to fetch away Afraciab, the which he offered to do: but seeing the deceit, he was ashamed, and craved pardon, swearing that he would not be deceived the second time. As for Afraciab, he went into Turquestan, from whence he sent an Ambassador to Kaykobad, to demand a peace, the which was granted unto him. This being done, Kaykobad having divided his treasure among his soldiers, retired into his country, where he administered justice, doing the office of a good prince during his life. He lost his sight long after, and his indisposition increased daily: he died in Isfaon the chief city of Kyerak, where he held his court, leaving in his place his son Kaykaus, having reigned one hundred years.   

¶ Kaykaus, or Solomon, the thirteenth king of Persia.  
THe occasion of precedent quarrels had given assurance to a Persian captain to make practices in the town and province of Masandaron, at the coming of this new king to the crown. This made Kaykaus levy a mighty army, and to besiege it. The town was strong and well furnished with men and good bastions for the defence thereof. This made Kaykaus devise some stratagem, seeing that force was not able to prevail. He therefore made show to want provision, and found means to have some intelligence with the besieged, whom he won by the excessive price he gave them for their commodities, which they sold without consideration: who having unfurnished themselves of a great quantity, they found soon by experience, that for want thereof ●hey should be forced to yield unto Kaykaus; the which he otherwise held impossible. This town of Masandaron is one of the most famous in those quarters, beyond the country of Gueylon; joining on the North to the Caspian sea. The natural inhabitants of 〈◊〉 ●●tion are strong and warlike, and are numbered among the subjects of the king of 〈◊〉.  
M●●●●daron being thus conquered, Kaykaus visiting his countries, entered into Arabia, betwixt the which, and Persia, there is a straight of the Sea called the Persian gulf; against whom came an Arabian king called Zaulzogar, with his whole army, to fight with 〈◊〉, in which the Arabian was vanquished, and fled (leaving his country) into a fort, whereon he much relied, and where he than kept his family, and a daughter that was rare ●● beauty. There were some treaties which ended with a peace, upon condition, that Zaul●●gar should give his daughter Sodaba in marriage to Kaykaus, whom a brother of hers did ●●ing unto him with a thousand fair slaves, and so the nuptials were celebrated to the general content of all men.  
Whilst these things passed in Arabia, Afraciab entered into the Persians country with an ●●mie, where he committed great spoils: yet he was repulsed and beaten, so as he was forced to retire. As for Kaykaus, having disposed of all things necessary in the realm of Am●n, and in the best part of the lands which he held in that country, he returned into ●●rsia with his wife Sodaba, where being arrived, he gave to Rostan the government of ●●gestam and Kabulstam, with many other gifts, honours, and advauncements. This ●●nce, before he went into Arabia, had one son called Syavex, to whom Rostan had ●●●ed much service and affection; being virtuous and beloved of all men for his mildness and courtesy: This did not much please Sodaba, who propounded unto herself ●●ring him into disgrace with the king; feigning therefore to love him, she acquainted 〈◊〉 with her desire; but this young prince detesting her allurements, avoided it all he ●●uld: Malicious Sodaba, desiring to effect her design, on a time whenas the king was ●●●anely accompanied, she came running into his presence with her hair lose, wee●●●g, beating her breast, and complaining that Syavex would was forced her: Where●●● they presently laid hold on him, and put him into a dark prison; but the mat●●● having been strictly examined, he was declared innocent, and the king sent 〈◊〉 her to have her burnt, but her entreaties, together with the love which he bore her, 〈◊〉 the execution.  
〈◊〉 hath been said, that Afraciab returning along the banks of jehun, went against 〈◊〉 city of Balk, the chief of the province of Vzbec, against the which Kaykaus sent his 〈◊〉 Syavex, with twelve thousand horse, and as many foot, commanding him to 〈◊〉 by Sagistan, and to join with Rostan, and with all the forces he could draw together Syavex departed from Isfaon, where his father's Court remained, and came to Sa●●●● whereas Rostan gave him a reception worthy of his greatness; and they began ●●●nsult what way they should take to march against the enemy. Being upon their 〈◊〉, they came within two leagues of the enemy, and going to discover which way 〈◊〉 might charge him, they were assured that Afraciab would give them battle with●●● 〈◊〉 nights, in the which he was put to rout; whereat he was so amazed, as he resol●●● embrace a peace, and to free himself from that continual care, employing in this ●●●●iation a cousin of his called Garceves, who managed the business so well, as 〈◊〉 , and they of the Council, yielded thereunto, whereof they advertised king 〈◊〉, whereat he was very much discontented, sending away his uncle Thus, the 〈◊〉 of Naudar, with sharp letters to Syavex, commanding him to follow Afraciab●●●soever ●●●soeuer he went, and to give him battle, and if he found him not, to spoil the 〈◊〉 Thus: And as for Rostan, by reason of his old age, he have him leave to retire 〈◊〉.  
〈◊〉, to accomplish his father's command, and the accord made with Afraciab, 〈◊〉 hi● army to march to Thus, and he himself went to Afraciab. This man had 〈◊〉 camp a Captain called Pyrond Vaysa, with whom Syavex had some familiar 〈◊〉 ●●taince and friendship, who no sooner saw him a coming, but went with great 〈…〉 Afraciab, who being advertised of his coming, went far to meet him, 〈◊〉 ●●ought him to his own Tent, giving him a seat equal to his own; and more●●●, to show how much he esteemed him, he married him to a daughter of his cal●●● ●●anguys. This marriage did not please Garceves, brother to Afraciab, nor the 〈◊〉 of his Court, who held it a disgrace unto them: so as they conspired to 〈◊〉 Sya●ex, whereof being advertised, he imparted it to his wife Franguys, who was with child, entreating her if it so fell out, and that she were delivered of a son, she should put it into the hands of some Persian. Within few days after, the conspirators put their design in execution, and murdered him, meaning to do the like unto his wife, whereby they should kill the infant which she said was in her womb: but Pyrond Vaysa defended her. Being afterwards delivered of a son, whom they called Kaykozrrao, whom the said Pyrond caused to be kept secretly in the camp, until that Guyu, the son of Gudarz, carried him afterwards into Persia, where they were much troubled for the death of Sya●ex, and especially the father, who desiring to revenge the death of his son, gave a powerful army unto Rostam, with express commandment to give battle to Afraciab, the which he did, and defeated him, kill Garceves his brother: so as Rostam going on like a conqueror, he had news that Chaydah, the son of Afraciab, came to encounter him with another army. Rostam (in whose company was Frayborz, son to king Kaykaus, and brother to the deceased Syavex) renewed the fight with more animosity than before, and knowing Chaydah, he charged him with his lance, and overthrew him dead upon the place; whereupon, the rest of the Turks were put to flight. Rostam pursuing his victory, entered into Turon, the place of Afraciabs' Court, and the chief of Turquestan, which the Persians spoiled and sacked, carrying away all the treasure and wealth of the inhabitants. Franguis, wife to Syavex, was then in this town, whom Rostam entreated to show him her son; whereof she excused herself, saying, That she knew not where he was: so as Rostam returned into Persia, to whom the king did much honour, and gave great presents, and then sent him into his government.  
King Kaykaus desired much to have his grandchild Kaykozrrao, the son of Syavex and Franguis, who were then at Teuton, for which cause he sent into Turquestan, Guyu, the son of Gudarz, a nobleman of Persia, of great sufficiency, to manage this business, wherein he carried himself so discreetly as he entered into Turon, and saw Franguis, and little Kaykozrrao, whom he persuaded to abandon that country, and to come into Persia, the which they did, being accompanied only by the said Guyu, and Pyrond Vaysa helping them on the way until they were arrived at the king of Persias Court, where they were received according to their qualities. After some time, king Kaykaus seeing many virtues and perfections to shine in his grandchild Kaykozrrao, made him General of his armies, giving great recompenses to Guyu for his services. This caused a great alteration in the king's Court, betwixt Thus (uncle to Kaykaus, in regard of Frayborz another son to Kaykaus) and Kaykozrrao: for Thus endured with great impatience; that the descendants of so cruel a race, and so great an enemy unto Persia, should be preferred before them that were borne in the country; so as the whole Court was divided into two factions, one for Frayborz, and the other for Kaykozrrao, to whom Guyu had joined to assist him. These divisions were contrary to the king's intention, for the preventing whereof he did as followeth:  
At that instant, one Bahaman governed the town of Ardavel, who made incursions into Persia, and did much annoyed it: Kaykaus made two camps equal in numbers of men and forces, giving one to either of these pretendants, and telling them that he which should first vanquish the enemy, should also precede his companion in greatness and dignity: wherewith they were both content. Frayborz parted first, and did not any thing worthy of memory: but Kaykozrrao did fight against Bahaman, vanquished him, and subdued the city of Ardavel, and returning to court, he was declared heir of the realm, and Guyu his captain general. And as for Kaykaus, he retired himself to a solitary life, having reigned (as they say) one hundred and fifty years.  
This town of Ardavel, or Ardavil, is in Persia, in the province of Ardebajon, some few days journey distant from Tabris or Taubris, no less great than famous, for that it was the country of Cheque Aydar, father to Cheque or Cha Ishmael Sophi, whose descendants reign at this day.   

Kaykozrrao, fourteenth king of Persia.  
KAykozrrao being thus come unto the Monarchy, as well by his own valour and good fortune, as by the particular affection of his grandfather: at his first entrance unto the crown, to give his subjects a taste that they had made no bad choice of him, he reformed justice, which was wholly depraved and corrupted during the forepast wars, seeking to repair every man's losses and ruins, by his bounty and mildness. Then he assembled his Estates, to whom he propounded a war he pretended against the Turks, in revenge of his father's death, the which all men allowed of, and offered to follow him; ●o as he sent Frayborz his father's brother, and Thus his great uncle, the son of Naudar, with thirty thousand horse to invade the country of Turquestan. Kaykozrrao had a son called Syavex, who taking in bad part that his father made war against his grandfather, ●● if he had received some great wrong, retired to Turon: Pyrond Vaysa who (as hath ●eene said) was come into Persia with Guyu, whenas he conducted Kaykozrrao, with his mother Franguys, and had married there, having had one son whom they called Freud, ●ho being come to age returned into Turquestan. The king loved this young man, as 〈◊〉 own son; so as when he sent Frayborz into Turquestan, hearing that Ferud had the ●●ard of a castle, he gave special charge to his captains to turn from it: but they being ●●●ced to march that way, and coming near it, Ferud sallied forth, and fought with them; but he was slain upon the place; the which the king of Persia understanding, he ●as wonderfully grieved, and being told that Thus was the cause thereof, he caused him to come to court, and put him in prison. Frayborz and Gudarz continued the wars against the Turk, where they had bad success, for that Pyrond Vaysa vanquished them with a ●reat slaughter of the Pesians, among which there were seventy knights all of the fami●●● of Gudarz, who with Frayborz retired into Persia. The king was not daunted at this ●●●grace, but sent Gudarz again with another army; and with him Thus, who was retur●●● into favour: they parted then to go to Turon, but before they were out of the ●●●ndss of Persia, they encountered their enemies, who spoilt all that was before them, 〈◊〉 whom they did fight, but the others resisted them with such fury, as the Persians ●●re forced to retire into the town of Damaon, where they did environ them of all 〈◊〉 taking from them all the passages.  
At the fame of this siege, two neighbour kings to Turquestan came with their seve●●● armies to secure the Turks, the one was called Hhakon, and the other Changal: this 〈◊〉 much trouble the Persians, holding themselves abandoned of all succours: but Kay●●●rrao being advertised of the misery whereunto they were reduced, sent presently to 〈◊〉, commanding him to march thither with all possible speed, the which he did, ●●king no stay until he came unto the enemy. The Persians hearing of his coming; ●●●ceived such joy, as they all kissed the ground, in sign of thanks, and joining with them, 〈◊〉 went to fight with their enemies with such courage and valour, as the greatest part 〈◊〉 ●hem were slain upon the place, and amongst others Hhakon one of their allied kings. ●●●kozrrao was not satisfied with this defeat, but sent four other armies into divers pla●●● to ruin Turquestan, the chief which was led by Gudarz going against Balk, who 〈◊〉 to encounter with Pyrond Vaysa, he who had the best of the four armies which Afra●●●● had sent against the Persians, who had the honour of the victory by the death of Py●●●● Vaysa, whose head was sent to Kaykozrrao, the which he beheld with much grief and ●●●content, for the breeding he had received from him. They say that in this war there 〈◊〉 slain and taken above one hundred thousand Turks, and eleven of their chief ●●●●ainss, Kaykozrrao gave great rewards to all such as had done good service in these 〈◊〉, giving unto Frayborz the country of Kyché or Kaché, and Macron, realms which 〈◊〉 towards Goadel at the entry of the Persian gulf.  
Afraciab having repaired his army entered again with a son of his into the coun●●●● of Kaorrazin upon the confines of Turon, whereas then lay the Persian army, who vanquished the Turks, slew Afraciabs' son, & forced him to retire with his family into a fort, whereas not holding himself very safe, but meaning to go to some other place, he fell into the hands of Kaykozrrao with his wife and daughters, who had been taken some time before, and entreated with much honour and respect. Within few months after, Afrraciab was taken himself and slain; making an end by his death of this long and tedious war; the which being thus ended, Kaykozrrao in imitation of kings his predecessors had a desire to retire himself from court, and from the government of affairs: who having no son, he did substitute in his place Lorasph nephew to a brother of Kaykaus (against which some of the greatest opposed themselves) & then soon after he died, having first restored all the lands and goods which his predecessors had taken from their subjects, and paid all their debts. He favoured the poor, did justice equally to all men, and contented the men of war which he had employed. He never undertook any important action without good and mature deliberation.  
In the time of Kaykozrrao, there were in Persia two famous Philosophers, the one called Horez, the other Lokmon: of this last there are some workers found among the Persians, which show that he was of a great spirit: among others they have a book of comparisons and examples very like to those of Aesop; there is also great likelihood that they spoke of him, whenas reporting his life they say that being a great Philosopher, he had been a slave, very faithful, and gracious, and that he died condemned: one thing makes it doubtful, for that they assure he was a jew. They have a proverb among them, which saith, It is not needful to teach Lokmon, to show the deep knowledge of this man.   

¶ Lorasph, the fifteenth king of Persia.  
KAykozrrao having left no issue male, the crown fell into the hands of Lorasph, according to the election which he had made before his death. This man as hath been said, was nephew to the brother of king Kaykaus, and the nearest in succession to Kaykozrrao: but for that he was known to be severe and cruel, his advancement was opposed by the greatest men of the realm, and especially by Zal the father of Rostan; yet he carried it from them all, and was declared king: after which he went out of Isfaon, and did visit his countries, as far as Balk, sending Gudars with an army against Mesopotamia, Syria, and Palestina, who in a short time brought all the country of Babylon under his subjection, and of Dymeskychan, which is that of Damas', than he marched against Beyt Almokadas, that is say, jerusalem, (for in the Arabian tongue Beyt signifies a house, and Almokadas, saints) the king whereof yielded upon condition to pay a tribute, for the assurance of which accord, he gave many great personages in hostage, whom Gudars caused to be slain within few days after, having been assured that the jews would rebel against his king, and that they were drawn together with an intent to make war against him; whereupon Gudars having gathered his forces together returned against jerusalem, the which he forced: at the taking whereof, the Persians used great cruelties against the jews, carrying a great number of captives into Persia, whether Gudars retired after many other victories. King Lorasph had two sons, the eldest was called Gustasph, and the youngest Zarir: Gustasph was proud and high minded, but withal very warlike, who having disposed some of his friends to certain innovations which he desired, he prevailed so, ●s they rebelled with him against his father, meaning to expel him the realm: many of these followed him in the beginning: but the father having gathered together the greatest forces he could, pursued him, losing no time nor opportunity; so as he forced him to fly out of the realm, finding his forces unable to resist his fathers, or to keep him in the country; so as he escaped alone and ill appointed, and past into Turquestan, where being arrived by a certain accident, he married the king's daughter of that country, being unknown, the which happened after this manner.  
It was an ancient custom in Turquestan, that whenas the king would marry a daughter, he drew together all the people that were then in Court into an open field, ●uerie man being appointed the best he could: they all being set in order, the lady that was to be married was led in by the king her father, and in the other hand she held an ●●ple of gold of the bigness of an orange, insicht with precious stones: then being set whereas she might take good view of this assembly, and having beheld and observed them one after another, in the end finding some one that liked her, she went and gave him this apple, and he was held inviolable for her husband. It happened that whenas Gustasph came unto the Court, the king had an intent to marry one of his daughters, whom this new come guest had a desire upon courtesy to see: but it happened that he so pleased this princess, as she gave him the apple, whereat the king was much discontented, for that he knew not Gustasph, and the great men that were there present made many complaints, as if all order had been subverted, so as to avoid the like inconvenience, they made a law by the which it should not be lawful for the king's daughters to be married to any other but to men of their quality and merit. This king had two other daugh●●●● exceeding fair, who were demanded by the sons of a neighbour king, to whom ●e promised them, upon condition, they should reduce under his power two of the grea●●●● noblemen of his country, who had been the cause of many mischiefs: the enter●●●● seemed difficult unto them; but hearing of the valour of Gastasph, they found means 〈◊〉 make him undertake this charge by the persuasion of his friends: Wherefore making ●●ew to go a hunting, with a train fit for his design, he carried himself so politique●●●● this enterprise, as he took them, and delivered them into the power of his two bre●●ens that were with him, who went and presented them unto the king, who much com●●nded this martial exploit, and gave them his two daughters. Within few days af●●●, the king having appointed a tilting, Gustasph carried himself so gallantly, as the king ●●●mended him much; to whom he answered, That he no reason to wonder if he had ●●aved himself well in tilting with a Reed, seeing he had cleansed the country of them 〈◊〉 troubled it; the which the king understanding, and being fully informed how all 〈◊〉 had passed, he remained much more satisfied.  
●●●tasph in the mean time knowing how much his father disliked him, for that he had 〈◊〉 to his enemies, and that he sought means to be revenged, thinking of the great 〈◊〉 which had been betwixt his father and him, and what reason he had to dislike of inessence, being yet ignorant in what place he was lost, he resolved to make war 〈◊〉 him, and with this desire he persuaded his father in law to refuse the tribute which 〈◊〉 him for his country, the which the Turk did unwillingly, sending an Embassa●●● unto him to denounce war. This news did much amaze king Lorasph, who 〈◊〉 of the principal cause which had moved the Turkish king to revolt, and finding the ●●●●ssadours' reason too weak for so important a business, he discovered in the end 〈◊〉 stranger, a man of valour, who by an unexpected adventure had married this king's ●●●ghter, was the cause of all this mischief. This made the Persian king to inform him●●●●● more particularly what this stranger was, and in the end found that it was his son 〈◊〉, whereof being well assured, he sent an Ambassador to his younger son 〈◊〉 ●other to Gustasph, to the end that they should go unto him, and persuade him to 〈◊〉 and take possession of the realm: Gustasph being advertised of this dispatch, went 〈◊〉 court to meet with them, before that his father in law had any knowledge thereof; 〈◊〉 had conference with his brother Zarir, he received the tire which his father sent 〈◊〉, and put it on his head, after which he was presently proclaimed king of Persia by 〈◊〉 whole assembly: which being done, he caused his father in law to be called, who 〈◊〉 come, and seeing him in that Estate, was much amazed, thinking it had been some 〈◊〉 to dispossess him of his realm; but hearing how all things had passed, he imbra●●●●im often with great joy. Gustasph having taken leave of his father in law, returned 〈◊〉 Persia, carrying with him his wife Katabun (for so the king's daughter was called 〈◊〉 had given him the apple) and a great train, with camels laden with great riches: 〈◊〉 his father received him with demonstrations of great love, the which increased 〈◊〉 by the services which he did him afterwards. In the end, the father having spent 〈◊〉 years with his children, being tired with the managing of affairs, retired himself 〈◊〉 Court to spend the remainder of his days in a solitary life, where he died so●●e after; giving unto his son good and necessary advice for the government of his Estate. He was called Lorasph Balkah, for that he remained the most part of his time at Balk.   

¶ Gustasph, the sixteenth king of Persia.  
WHenas Lorasph retired himself from Court, he left his son Gustasph, or Gustasef, to command the realm, who was a valiant prince in war, and a wise in peace: he was much given to the idolatry and worship of fire, in which superstition he was so zealous, as he made war against them that would not follow his opinion, as he did to Ariasph, or Ariaseph, king of Turon, for that he had reprehended him in a letter, having been commanded by him to follow the sect of Zarducht, which was that of fire: This superstition began first in the province of Aderbaion, or Azarbajon, that is to say, of fire; and he that was the first inventor of this sect was called Zarducht, that is to say, a friend of fire. Gustasph growing into choler, for the little respect which Ariasph did show him in his reprehensive letters, went to field, being accompanied by his brother Zarir, and Sphand●ar his son, with the greatest forces he could draw together, who marching directly towards Turon, gave battle to Ariasph, whom he vanquished, kill his sons and brethren, and without any longer stay he went against Turon, which he took and spoiled, and from thence returned into Persia: at his arrival he caused his son Sphandiar to be put in prison, in a fort called Guerdkuh, in the country of Rudbar, for some jealousy he had of him. Whilst these things passed in Persia, Ariasph having levied a a new army, entered the country, and took Balk, which he sacked, carrying away some of Gustasphs daughters, captives; and not content therewith, he marched into the country with such speed, as Gustasph, having not the assurance to attend him alone, called his Council, and resolved to set his son Sphandiar at liberty, and to give him the charge of this war; the which he refused to accept, or to go out of prison: yet in the end (at the entreaty of his brother jamasph, and upon his father's promise to leave him the realm if he returned victor) he went to field with a good army, and marched against Ariasph, to whom he gave battle, and won the victory, and so returned into Persia, whom his father went presently to meet, making all shows of love; yet he told him that this victory was not much to be regarded whilst his sisters remained captives in his enemy's hands: whereat Sphandiar being ashamed, and not to fail of his duty, he made choice of four and twenty thousand men out of the whole army, of the which there were twelve thousand foot, and twelve thousand horse, and being accompanied by his younger brother Buchutan, he pursued his enemy: but they resolved upon the way to separate themselves, which they did at three partings or ways which went all to Turon, giving the greatest to Buchutan his brother, where there were large meadows, and the way more easy: giving him charge that being come unto a place called Paruindez, he should lie close with his troops in ambush, lest he should be discovered by them of Turon; and that whenas night came, it being the custom of that town to make great fires, he should charge home with all fury.  
As for Sphandiar, taking with him some company, they went by another way attired like merchants to Aphtkon, that is to say, seven kings, or seven lords, having carried with him many jewels and stones of great price (for it was the custom of Persians going to the war, to carry all their wealth with them) which way was much shorter than that of Buchutan: so as Sphandiar, with his companions, came to Turon within seven or eight days, presenting himself in the habit of a merchant before Ariasph, with the jewels which he brought, carrying himself in such sort in his enterprise, as he was lodged in the king's palace: being advertised that his brother was come to the Rendezvous, he craved leave to make the king and his courtiers a banquet the day following, the which he had a meaning should be performed in a field near unto the town; so as by reason of this feast, he made many fires near unto the walls. Buchutan, who was very watchful, discovered them presently, and then falling out of his ambush, he seized upon all the passages, and entered the town with great fury, where he made a great slaughter, and sacked it, reserving nothing for himself of the whole spoil but a throne of gold, enriched with fine stones of great beauty, with a white elephant. This being done, he freed his two sisters, whom Sphandiar delivered to his brother Buchutan to conduct into Persia; he himself going towards the Indian sea to force certain nations to follow the superstitious opinion of fire, from whence he returned into Persia, where he was kindly received by his father: but in steed of the realm which he had promised him, he caused him to undertake many great and dangerous enterprises, the which he executed with his honour. In the end his father would have him seek out Rostan, who had retired himself to Siston, and came not unto him in the beginning of his reign. Sphandiar went, but against his will, only to obey his father, to whom he said that it was not the accomplishment of his promise, and that he did ill requited the services which Rostan had done him: yet he went to Sistan, carrying with him a son of his called Bahaman, who going before his ●●ther, saw Rostan a far off descending down a hill, to whom he went, telling him what that troop was which he saw coming a far off, whereat Rostan was much amazed, yet●●oing to kiss the hands of Sphandiar, he told him that the cause of his coming was on●● to draw him to his father's court: to whom the other answered, that his age should ●ow free him from such services, and that in case of necessity they should found him altwies ready. Sphandiar insisted to the contrary, so as in these disputes they grew to bit●●● words, and defied on another, falling presently to arms: as for Sphandiar, he was held ●ne of the hardiest knights of Persia, and had reduced his adversary to such terms, as 〈◊〉 did but ward his blows; yet as extreme necessity doth breed new courage and force, ●●charged Sphandiar in such sort, as he gave him a mortal wound, whereof he died priestly, recommending his son Bahama to Rostan before his death, and his body to his ●●●ther Buchutan, who carried it into Persia, where it had a funeral pomp worthy of 〈◊〉 greatness: his father Gustaspph was much grieved, thinking to attempt nothing after 〈◊〉 death, yet the king of Turquestan coming to invade his country of Persia, he was ●●●ed to raise a new army, with the which he vanquished his enemy, and so returned 〈◊〉, whither he sent for his grandchild Bahaman, who was then at Siston, to whom he ●●●●●ed his realm, and retired himself to a place called Ghozghzar, there to spend the ●●●inder of his days in a solitary life: this place was a house of pleasure, the which for 〈◊〉 excellent architecture, they of the country said, that it was the work of Solyman Ben●● that is to say, Solomon the son of David, thirty miles distant from Scyras. Gustasph 〈◊〉 the city of Asuartah, the which he called Herbant, and within few years after died, 〈◊〉 reigned one hundred and twenty years.   

¶ Bahaman Daraz Dast, the seventeenth king of Persia.  
●●●er the retreat of Gustasph, Bakaman his grandchild succeeded him, who was surna●●●ed Daraz Dast, that is to say, long hand: they do also call him Ardchir, which is the ●●●ordinarie name they give him in the Chronicles of Persia, the which was upon this ●●●●on: his mother being with child, an ginger came to see his grandfather Gu●●● and his father Sphandiar, whom after he had saluted, addressing himself to Sphandi●●●●d ●●d presenting him with a little basket, he said it was to put in the son which should 〈◊〉 of him, the which being uncovered they found nothing in it, but a vessel full of 〈◊〉 a little meal, telling th●m that his small means would afford no better present: 〈◊〉 princes were very well satisfied with the discourse of this wise man, and took so 〈◊〉 delight in his present, as they gave name unto their son of the things which he 〈◊〉 offered: for Ard, in the Persian tongue is meal, and Chir, milk; these two names 〈◊〉 joined together, make Ard●hir, which is the same the Greeks and Latins call Artax●●● and of him many of his successors would be called Ardchir.  
〈◊〉 prince was of a good constitution, having the right arm and hand longer than 〈◊〉: he was endowed with all the good parts that can be desired in a prince, and 〈◊〉 others, he was so jealous of the commonweal, as when he sent any officers to visit his realm, he put some among them in whom he had great trust, to serve as witnesses of their actions, to the end he might reward such as behaved themselves well in their charges, and punish others that carried themselves ill. A year after he came to the crown he held an assembly of his Estates, to whom he declared his intentions particularly, entreating them to tell him publicly and without fear, what they found defective in him, to the end he might avoid it, and that if he did any thing unworthy of a king, they should depose him, being more willing to obey, whereby some good might come unto the public, than to govern without order, and to the prejudice of the realm. All commended his zeal much, and with great acclamations prayed the Gods to give him a long and happy life: then having granted some things necessary for their particular, he dismissed them.  
Ardchir caused many buildings which had been ruined to be re-edified, and gave order for the government of the realm; which done, he studied how he might be revenged for the death of Sphandiar his father, which caused him to levy a great army, with which he marched towards Siston, being upon the way, he was advertised that Rostan was dead, and that Framarz his son came against him with great troops, who presented him battle, the which was very bloody; but Ardchir had the victory which cost the life of many of his men: Framarz was slain in the fight, and Zel his grandfather being yet living was taken prisoner, after which battle Ardchir returned victorious to Persia, bringing Siston and Kabul under his obedience. He made war by his captains in Syria and Palestina, subjecting many people to his Empire, carrying many Jews captives into Persia. He had one son called Sasan, which was a great Philosopher and ginger, who to follow his studies more freely, left the court and all greatness, pretending not the realm after the death of his father, whereat all the subjects did generally grieve. He left his wife Homay with child of a son, whereof she was delivered after his death. In his time Hippocrates did flourish (whom the Persians call Bokorat) and Democrites, whose writings they have, with the works of Plato, whom they call Aphlatum, of Socrates, whom they call So●●●at, and of Aristotle, whom they term Arasto, or Arastatalis, and those also of Galen. They make great account of many Greek authors, and it is the manner of the Persians to esteem learned men, whose company they affect, making use of their authorities, conceptions, and scentences: king Ardc●ir was wont to say, that a prince's palace should never have the gates shut.  
But for that R●stan hath been a famous parsonage in this history, it shall be fit to understand the cause of his death, the which happened after this manner: Rostan had one brother called Chagad, to whom he had given charge to visit his provinces, and to receive the rents and tributes which were due unto him: going to Kabul to this end he fell in love with the governors daughter, who was exceeding fair, and demanded her of her father; who seeing the brother of Rostan to be in love with his daughter, refused him, until he had promised to free him from the subjection of Rostan his brother, and to kill him; this being agreed upon, Chagad returned to Siston, where having some conferences with his brother, he made many complaints of the Governor of Kabul, that he had contemned him, and entreated him ill. Rostan being full of choler blamed his brother of little courage, and caused soldiers to be levied of all parts to punish this Governor. Chagad did ●is best to cross this resolution, telling him that ●is presence alone was sufficient to draw him to reason: Rostan was well pleased with this advice, and went with his brother, a subject of his called Za●ada, and some few servants of his towards Kabul, whereof Chagad gave secret intelligence unto his father in law. The Governor of Kabul came forth in show to receive him, and having laid many of his men in ambush; being come to Rostan, he craved pardon, as one that repent him of the errors he had committed, and Rostan having pardoned him, he of Kabul desired him to rest himself in a house of pleasure of his, whether he conducted him, so as they came into certain ditches which he had made of purpose, being covered with bows, into one of which Rostan fell with his 〈◊〉 who seeing plain●ly that he was, deceived by the wickedness of his guides, and that 〈◊〉 mischief was without remedy or hope, having poured forth a thousand injurious speeches against him, he entreated him to give him a bow and arrows to defend h●mselfe against wild beasts, to the end they should not tear him in pieces living. They allowed of his saying, and furnished him with his desire: but whenas Rostan had them in his hand, he did put two arrows into his bow, shooting them with such force, as notwithstading his brother and his father in law had before them the body of a tree which was ●●ere unto them, yet he shot them both through, and slew them. It is an ordinary thing ●●ong the Persians, to shoot two or three arrows at one time, which makes this of Ro●● to seem less strange; and in this manner they died with him that had practised his ●●ath; for he died also with the rest, but the history doth not tell after what manner. As ●or Kabul (whereof mention hath been made, to the end we may inform the Reader particularly) it is a realm sometimes subject unto Persia, and lies upon the confines of ●ndia. In old time, they spent three whole months going from Kabul to Lahor, which at this day the Court of the great king of Mogul; and the centre of all that which is ●alled India, whereas at this day they finish this journey in twenty or five and twenty ●●yess, the reason was, partly, for that they were forced to make a great circuit in regard 〈◊〉 the multitude of thieves.   

¶ Homay, Queen of Persia, and put in the rank of kings, the eighteenth.  
OH return now to the history, after the death of Ardchir, the government of the 〈◊〉 realm continued in Homay his wife, who (as hath been said) was with child, and at 〈◊〉 end of five months, delivered of a son, who was ezceeding fair: whereupon (ac●●ing to the custom) they presently called Astrologers, to know his Horascope, and 〈◊〉 should befall this royal infant; who answered, That he should be the cause of great ●●●●●iess and ruins to his realms, so as many were of opinion he should be put to death: 〈◊〉 ●ender affection of the mother could not yield to the death of her son, but she 〈◊〉 him to be put in a little cradle, and then closed up in a coffer of wood, in the which 〈◊〉 put many precious stones of great value, to the end, that if any poor man found 〈◊〉 might help to feed him, and breed him up: with which things she committed 〈◊〉 the river of of jehun, the current whereof had soon carried it far from thence, 〈◊〉 coming near the banks, it encountered with a poor man that was washing of 〈◊〉, both for himself and others: (the Orientalls call these men Maynatos) who see●●●● little coffer to floor upon the water, being amazed at the novelty of the thing, 〈◊〉 opening the coffer to see what was within it, he found a little child, at whose beauty 〈◊〉 much amazed, but much more whenas he beheld the treasure that was within it, 〈◊〉 made the launderer think that he came of some noble family: carrying him then ●●●ence, with all that was with him, he brought him home to his wife, and bred him 〈◊〉 much care, calling him Darab, framing his name of the little coffer wherein he ●●●osed, and of the water whereon he had been exposed: for Dane in the Persian 〈◊〉 signifies a table of wood; and Ab, water: Within few years, Darab grown able 〈◊〉 something, the launderer (who desired to have him instructed according to the 〈◊〉 would have had him learn some trade, but Darabs inclination could not be drawn 〈◊〉 the estate of his fortune could not make him lose the feeling of his extraction: 〈◊〉 his supposed father sufficient testimonies that he should be unwillingly drawn ●●●o●e things, and that he was more inclined to arms than any other vocation: where●●●●●he launderer knowing his humour, bought him arms, and furnished him in the ●●●●●ner he could, giving him some small provision to live by, and sending him to 〈◊〉 ●ome preferment by war. At that time, Queen Homay was in war with the na●●●● R●mestan, against whom she meant to sand a mighty army; there Darab enrolled 〈◊〉, and past his first apprenticeship, the Persians of this army had battle with their 〈◊〉, in which Darab did such strange deeds of arms, as it held all his companions 〈◊〉 ●●azement, who talked of nothing but of his exploits. The affairs of Rumestan 〈◊〉 pacified, the General came to give an account of all things unto Homay, where (among other things) he made mention of a soldier that was newly come into the army, whom he could not cease to commend, which made the Queen desirous to have him brought before her, of whom she inquired what name he had, and whose son he was; to whom he answered that his name was Darab, and that he did not acknowledge any other father and mother than a launderer and his wife, telling the cause of his name, and how he had been found, as he had understood from them: By this discourse, the Queen came to know that he was her son, whereof being assured, she delivered the realm into his hands, the which she had held two and thirty years. She built the town of Gerbatkon, and set up a thousand Pyramids in Persia of a strange achitecture, the which Alexander did afterwards cause to be ruined.   

¶ Darab Kebar, the nineteenth king of Persia.  
DArab, the son of Homay, being come to the crown of Persia, entered into the government with the general content and joy of all his subjects, for the great opinion they had of him, the which was not in vain; for he exceeded all his predecessors in bounty and wisdom, yea them that were held for good princes, so as he was not only beloved of all his subject, but also of neighbour kings, except Phaylacus king of Yunon, (this is he whom we call Philip king of Macedon, father to Alexander the Great) who (grown proud by the victories which he had gotten in Greece) refused to pay the tribute which his predecessors had long before paid to the kings of Persia; for which cause he took arms against Darab, who made war against him, first by his Captains, and afterwards in person, in the which Phaylacus was vanquished, and forced to retire himself into a fort, whereas Darab besieged him: yet there was a peace concluded betwixt them, upon condition, that Phaylacus, and his descendants, should pay forty thousand Pesans of gold yearly unto Darab and his successors: and to make this treaty inviolable, Darab demanded of Phaylacus a daughter of his, who was held for one of the goodliest princesses of her time, the which was performed: but she lived not long with Darab, who put her away for that she had an unsavoury breath. About this time, Kari●ah (the wife of Phaylacus) was with child, (not by her husband, as some say) and delivered of a son called Ascand●r, or Alexander. Darab, afer this war, returned into Persia, and died soon after, leaving his realm to his son Darab, having reigned four years.   

¶ Darab Seguer, or Kuchek, the twentieth king of Persia.  
DArab, surnamed the Little, the second of that name, and son to the first Darab, after the death of his father, came unto the realm: he was of a bad disposition, without courtesy, disloyal, and of a fierce aspect: so as for his bad qualities he was as much hated of strangers, as of his own people, as his father had been beloved; and he did so purchase the disgrace of his subjects, as they conspired against him, and resolved to deliver him into the hands of Ascandar or Alexander, the son of Philip, to whom all the Vuazirs or Lords did writ, with a general consent, that he should speedily come into Persia, with all the forces he could raise, promising him all assistance, and giving him council to begin the war with some colour, to refuse the tribute of forty thousand Pesans of gold, whereunto his father had bound him.  
Ascandar, who was by nature warlike, seeing an offer so conformable to his desire, lost not the occasion, but followed the counsel which they gave him, and refused the tribute. Darab, seeing that his subject would shake off the yoke, sent to demand it by an Ambassador, to whom Alexander answered, That they which paid the tribute, were dead. Darab dispatched a second embassage unto him, by the which he sent him a little sheephooj, a bag full of sand, and a cupboard of plate. There are divers opinions am●●● the Persian writers what these things did signify: but the most common is, that by the first he would say he was a boy without judgement or consideration: by the second he did signify the great number of people he had in his kingdoms; and by the ●●st, the great abundance of gold and silver which he did enjoy: all which together did show that it was a great rashness for him (being so mean a companion) to oppose ●●●selfe against so mighty a Monarch: (for it was a custom of them of the East, to make themselves to be understood rather by figures and comparisons, than by any long discourse.)  
Ascander received this Embassage, being in field with an army, not great in number, but all choice men, and of great experience in martial affairs; who making an allusion of all that which Darab had sent unto him, he converted it to his advantage for ●he good success of his designs, and continuing his resolution, he entered into Asia without any great resistance. Being in Egypt, he built a town and called it by his ●wne name Alexandria, being in a port very commodious for his affairs; the which twne hath been famous throughout the whole world: he also took Mecera, which 〈◊〉 the great Cairo, the which hath always been the chief of Egypt, as their authors ●●ue left by tradition, it is that which the Latins call Memphis, the Hebrews Mesrrahen, 〈◊〉 since, the Arabians, Persians, and Turks by corruption of the language call it Mes●●●a, being but a mile distant from her first situation: there happened the fortune of chaste ●●seph, and there the Prophet Moses was borne, and exposed upon the river of Nile, ●hich doth bathe the walls of this city: and as for the name of Cairo (which is that we 〈◊〉 it at this present) Mircond in the fourth part of his history by the report of Teixeres 〈◊〉 the relation which he hath made of the Califs of Cairo, after sundry and variable success, he saith, That Messera (for so it was then called) came into the power of a king ●●lled Mohez, who sent from Damas' a slave of his, a great Captain and Conqueror ●hose name was jawarkaden to govern this city which was then under his power, for 〈◊〉 safety whereof, he caused a fort to be built near unto it, the which he called Kayrch, ●onour of one of his Lords wives, who had that name, and in succession of time this 〈◊〉 building increased in such sort, as the name of Mecera was in a manner forgotten, 〈◊〉 it is no more known in Europe, but by the name of Kayrch or Cairo, the letter 〈◊〉 little changed.  
Alexander passed from thence to Armenia, where he received a letter from Darab, 〈◊〉 which he exhorted him not to hazard a battle, sometimes persuading him as 〈◊〉 had been careful of his good, and sometimes using threats. Alexander answered 〈◊〉 That realms and empires were not held but of God, who gave them and took 〈◊〉 away at his pleasure: and having dispatched his Ambassadors, he continued his 〈◊〉 into the province of Aderbajon, where he encountered one of Darabs captains 〈◊〉 kept it, and vanquished him, and from thence he entered into the province of Guey●●●●▪ This Gueylon was sometimes a great realm, but now reduced to a province and ●●●ded into five governments: the Persians call it Gueylon or Guylon; but the natural inhabitants do call it Endsafet, that is to say, white India, for that it is very cheerful and ●●●ant in comparison of India itself: it contains the port and entry of many realms, 〈◊〉 which they have great traffic, as Kefah port, and that chief city of the Tartarized the river of Astrakam: the people of Muscovie have many other navigable ri●●● which flow into it.  
〈◊〉 to return again to Alexander, leaving the country of Gueylon, he went into 〈◊〉 Nacudunia, and coming against the chief city, he caused it to be burnt down 〈◊〉 the very foundation: from thence he entered into persia, whereas Durab came ●●●nst him with a mighty army, betwixt whom there was a great and bloody bat●●● in which battle Ascander had the victory, and Durab fled from his camp, lea●●●g the greatest part of his soldiers dead upon the place, and all his Treasure, ●●●●uess, and Daughters captives, and in the power of Alexander. Many of Darabs soul●●● followed him in this fight, whereof a good number were drowned at the pas●●●● of a river, the which being frozen, many passed before to try the ford, and having 〈◊〉 it good, Darab past, and then all the rest of his people followed, whereof many 〈◊〉 ●edrowned.  
Dara● being in a place of safety, he sent Embassors to Ascandar or Alexander, promising him that if he would restore him his wives and daughters, & return to Greece, he would discharge him of the tribute which he did own, and free him of the arrearages ●hat were due: and during this treaty, he sent other Ambassadors to the kings of Machar●k and India his vassals and friends, who knowing the state of his affairs sent him Tuccours; so as he drew together a greater army than the first.  
As for Alexander, he mocked at Darabs conditions, and offered him battle again, where he had the victory, forcing Darab to retire into a fort, whereas some of his own subjects gave him many wounds with a dagger, and leaving him almost dead, retired themselves to Alexander's camp, who being advertised of their treason, went with great sp●●d whereas Darab lay, where finding him ready to leave his life, being much grieved 〈…〉 him in that estate, he poured forth many tears, lifting up his eyes to heaven, which ●e ●ooke for witness of his innocency in that action: Darab answered him with thanks, tha● he did believe it, entreating him to punish and take revenge of those traitors, to ●a●●ie his daughter Ruchanch, and not to suffer his realms to fall into the hands of strangers. Alexander promised to accomplish all: then Darab having made many grievous complaints of the misery of man's life, and of the inconstancy of temporal goods (which 〈◊〉 describes very amply) died, having reigned fourteen years.     

THE MONARCHY OF THE MACEDONIANS.  

Ascander or Alexander, the one and twentieth king of Persia.  
AScander or Sacander, so called by the Persians, Arabians, and Turks, and by another name Zulkarnheh, which is the same we call Alexander, came not only to the Empire of Persia, but also to that of Greece, India, Tartary, and a great part o● the world. The Arabians speaking of Persia, divide it into two provinces, both which they call Hierakhen, the one half for the Metropolitan city Isphaon, & that is called Hie●●kagemy, which is the Hierak of Persia: the other, Babylon or Bagadet, which makes a part of Arabia, and contains Egypt, and other provinces: this is called Hierakaraby, but when as they say Hierakhen, they mean both provinces together.  
All Persian authors say that Alexander was not the son of Phaylacus or Philip, but that a vassal of his called Kolùs fell in love with his wife, who thought that the means to enjoy her with more liberty, was to kill king Philip, the which he put in execution soon after: Alexander understanding this, being accompanied by one called Barakus his chief captain, found out the traitor Kolus and slew him with his own hand. After which he went to Philip breathing out his last where after many complaints Philip knowing his death to approach, took Alexander, and set him in the midst of all the noble men that were present; requiring them to receive him for king, and to yield him obedience: after which he delivered him into the hands of Aristotle, to be instructed by him, the which he performed with great care: he taught him also what he should do for the well governing of his subjects, and then he died.  
Alexander having conquered Persia after the death of Darab, married his daughter R●●b●●ch, the which doth signify light, like unto a candle which burns. He delivered the realm of Persia into the hands of a kinsman of Darabs, and divided all his monarchy into four score and ten governments, the which he gave unto so many captains. He caused three books to be translated out of the Persian into the Greek tongue, the one was called Teb, the which treated of Physic; the other Noiun, of Astrology, and the Mathematics: (Noiun signifies stars in the Persian tongue) and the other of Philosophy. He built upon the river of jehum, a town called Maruoh or Karacon, otherwise 〈◊〉 & that of Samarkand in Vsbek. Then having settled the affairs of Persia, he went to 〈◊〉 the East; where having past many rough and dangerous passages he came to India. ●ut all this hath been written at large by many authors, which makes me forbear to relate the history more particularly. After all his great conquests, he died in Babylon, being six and thirty years old, and having reigned seventeen years. He commanded 〈◊〉 too and twenty great provinces in three parts of the world, whereof the kings of 〈◊〉 did still accompany him. The Persians admire the life of this prince, and have 〈◊〉 many books of his brave exploits, as well in prose as rhyme, full of excellent con●●●tionss and sentences, the which Mircond sets down at large.   

¶ AN INTERREGNE OR VACANCY OF PERSIA.  
〈◊〉 or the death of Alexander, the affairs fell into confusion touching the government: so 〈◊〉 Persia had a vacancy, which continued seventy two years, during the which it was gover●●●● by V●azirss or Satrapes, until it returned under the power of the descendants of precedent ●●ngss, which continued as followeth:  
The Persians are commanded again by them of their own nation.   

¶ Chapur, the two and twentieth king of Persia.  
●He seventy two years of vacancy being past, after the death of Alexander, the Persians made a king over them called Chapur, kinsman to Darab, whom Mircond calls his 〈◊〉, after the common manner of speaking of the Persians and Arabians, who call all 〈◊〉 kinsmen, brethren, a custom which is observed in the holy scriptures. During the 〈◊〉 of Chapur there passed nothing that was memorable, whereof they have made any ●●●tion, and yet he reigned (as they say) sixty years.   

¶ Ardchir Babakhon, the three and twentieth king of Persia.  
〈◊〉 king Chapur succeeded Ardchir B●bakhon, which in the Persian tongue is the same ●hat Abumalek, that is to say, Father and Lord, or Father King. He was a good prince, ●●gouerned the country to the content of all men, according to the opinion of the 〈◊〉. This king reigned whenas our Saviour Christ was upon the earth: whereunto objections might be made which would be too long for this little discourse: We ●ot that during the time of Ardchir he had any wars, this king having past the fif●●●eses of his reign in peace.   

¶ Chapur Zabel Ketaf, the four and twentieth king of Persia.  
R●chir left two sons to succeed him in the realm of Persia, the eldest was called C●●pur, and another younger: And for that they were very young, they were com●●●● to the government of one of their uncles called Ardchir, the son of Hormos', whom 〈◊〉 of the chief of the realm would acknowledge for king, and many Persian wri●●●● him in that rank: yet Mircond saith, that he refused it, and that he governed the 〈◊〉 with great wisdom in the midst of many practices and conspiracies; after some 〈◊〉, when he saw it fit and convenient, he settled Chapur Zabel Ketaf in the government, who swayed that sceptre whilst he lived, with great satisfaction to all men, being 〈◊〉 with wisdom and virtue, the which never wants some that envy it; for Cha●●●●●eeping ●●eeping one night in the field where his pavilions were set up: no man can say who 〈◊〉 into his Tent and strangled him; but so it is, at their going forth they cut the cords 〈◊〉 supported his Tent, and so let it fall: They had by chance made choice of a bluste●●●● and rainy night, to the end it might be said that some gust of wind had overthrown 〈◊〉, and killed the king, who died after this manner, and yet the conspiracy could not 〈◊〉 discovered. All Persia lamented the death of this prince, by reason of his bounty: he 〈◊〉 sixty years.   

¶ Baharon Kermoncha, the five and twentieth king of Persia.  
IT hath been formerly said, that Chapur Zabel Ketaf had a younger brother: his name was Baharon, whom his brother had made governor of Kermon, and therefore he had the surname of Kermon●ha, as if one should say, king of Kermon, the which is a great province, and one of the chief of Persia; in the which is the country of Karachon, famous in the East, for the commodities which are drawn from thence. Speaking of Chiraz, it hath been observed 〈◊〉 they drew from thence great store of rosewater, as they do also from Yazd, the which is made by infusion and decoction: the like done in Kermon & Dusgon, Rose 〈◊〉 is called by two names in the Persian tongue; some call it Gulap, and others 〈◊〉 ●ul, which is as much to say, as the sweet of Roses, a very proper name to show that it is made by distillation, whereof they make great store yearly in Kermon, the which is transported into all parts of the East.  
In three parts of Persia they make tapestries, which they call Persian, after the name of the country, and in Persia they call them Kalichey; the richest and most esteemed are made in the province of Yazd, & they are so excellent, that some are valued at a thousand ducats: the second in bounty, are those of the realm of Kermon: and the third, of Ka●●son. In Kermon they have Tutia, the which is only found in that place, and in the Persian tongue they call it Tutiah: in a Canton of this province, some six and thirty miles distant from the town, they make it after this manner: They take the earth of that country, & mingle it with pure water, then taking certain flaggie turfs, they bake it in ovens like unto earthen pots, and being well baked, they polish it, and clarify it until it come to the form of Tutia, than they put it into chests, and sand to vent it at Ormus. Herein doctor Garcia was ill informed, who in diologues which he hath made of Indian simples, saith, That Tutia is made of the ashes of a certain tree called Gunè. It is true, that in Persia there is fruit called Gaon, of the form and bigness of a cherry stone, covered with a little skin that is green and yellow, which the Naturalists use in many things as we do the kernel of the Pine apple: but this hath a contrary effect to Tutia, which is made in Kermon, in which place they do also found another thing no less profitable than the precedent, that is, Lauronne, or Garderobe, very good against worms, which they call in the Persian tongue Dramnah Kermony, and the word which we use of Kermez is drawn from that of Kermon: for Kermez is the singular, and Kermon the plural, and of this Kermez, that is to say, of the grain, there are worms made of the same name: and of this Kermez, the physicians make their confection, which they call after the same manner.  
But to return to Baharon, he was of a sound constitution, and of great judgement and wisdom, which made him to reign with the general content of all his subjects, whom he governed eleven years, at the end whereof there fell a great sedition in court, the which was of such importance, as Bahaman was forced to go in person to pacify. All things being quieted, one of his subjects, who desired but some opportunity to do him a mischief, shot an arrow at him from out of the press, the which passed through his body, and slew him upon the place, to the great grief of all the subjects of his realm, who lived in peace under his command.   

¶ Yarzd Girded, the six and twentieth king of Persia.  
THe Persians having lamented the death of Baharon, made choice of Yarzd Girded his son. Before his coming to the crown he was much beloved and respected of all men, taking delight to be affable and courteous to every man. But whenas he saw himself king, he changed his good inclination into arrogancy, cruelty, and covetousness, showing himself the more implacable, whenas he was entreated with tears to show mercy. He was wont to say, There was no hope of compassion in three things, that is to say, in fire, the sea, and in an incensed king. He was married, but he had great jars and dislikes with his wife, for tha● having had many children, she could never bring up any one of them: but amidst his discontents, she was with child, and delivered of a son whom they called Baharon, who having lived more than the rest, which not continued above a mo●eths, by the advice of his physicians, he sent him from court into a certain country o● Arabia, and delivered him into the hand of a king his vassal, called Neamanben Amara●●●keiss, a man of great trust, who brought up that little infant in that good air, instru●●●g him in the doctrine which was conformable to the religion whereof he made pro●●●ion: being come to the age of discretion, Neaman died, leaving in his place a son ●alled Manzar, as valiant and faithful as his father, who had reigned fifteen years. In 〈◊〉 mean time Yarzd Girded governed his realm with the general dislike of all his sub●●●●ss, for his tyrannies and cruelties, wherein he persisted to his end, the which was like 〈◊〉 his life; for in a time taking view of a horse of great price, the which did much de●●●● him, the beast without any apparent occasion, struck him twice with his hinder feet, ●ith such violence, as he died suddenly, and never spoke, having reigned two and twen●●● years and five months. Although his death was not much lamented, yet did it 〈◊〉 great dissensions among the nobility, for some would choose one after their own ●●●ciess, and others desired to have the custom of the realm maintained. But they 〈◊〉 that Ba●aron would imitate his father in his perverse and bad dispositions, saying that 〈◊〉 should give the realm to some one that might deserve it by his virtue. So as they 〈◊〉 were of this party being the stronger, prevailed against them that would have cho●●● the son of the deceased king, and gave the realm to one called Kezere Khozrrao his ●●ere kinsman, who besides the good parts that were in him, had gotten the realm with ●●ny fair promises.  
Baharon, who was in Arabia, hearing of his father's death, and in like manner of the innovations that were in Persia, he imparted it to Manzar the son of Neaman, in treating 〈◊〉 to assist him in the recovery of his realm which of right did belong unto him, and ●●ch Kezere Khozrrao did usurp unjustly. Manzar yielded willingly to his request, and 〈◊〉 him ten thousand horse, with the which he began to march, than he himself follo●●● after with thirty thousand men more; all which together made an army of forty ●●●●sand, which being entered into the country, the Persians were much troubled; so as 〈◊〉 of the chief went and joined with him: yet Kezere Khozrrao went to meet him with ●●ghtie army. Many were much grieved to see the civil war; so as before they came 〈◊〉, they laboured to compound the quarrel, treating in such sort, as Baharon was 〈◊〉, and obeyed for king; and the first that did acknowledge him was Kezere Khozr●● whom many Persian writers put in the number of their kings.   

¶ Baharon Gur, seven and twenty king of Persia.  
●●haron being thus settled in the possession of the realm, the first thing he did at the 〈◊〉 ●●stance of Manzar, was to pardon all in general that had passed during the civil wars, 〈◊〉 ●hat soever had been attempted against him. After this he laboured to settle justice 〈◊〉 policy, beautifying his realm with public buildings, repairing the old that were fal●●● decay during the wars, and building new. And as for Manzar who had bred him 〈◊〉 and had been the cause of the recovery of his realm, he sent him many rich pre●●●● with great and kind thanks, keeping a son of his in his court until he grew 〈◊〉.  
〈◊〉 prince carried himself so wisely and mildly towards his subjects, and showed such 〈◊〉, as he was beloved and esteemed of them all; and they blessed heaven which 〈◊〉 done him so great a favour, to be come into the world under so good a prince, and 〈◊〉 so full of felicity: for he had settled so good an order for all things, and had so ●●●shed the frontiers with strong garrisons, and wise governors, as they did long en●●● very happy peace, during the which, the Persians had no thoughts but of their ●●●●uress, wherein they took such a habit (especially the vulgar sort) as every man ●●●ght arms would be unprofitable, for the continuance of this security.  
〈◊〉 in the midst of thy calm, and whenas they thought to enjoy their tranquility 〈◊〉 greater assurance, news came, that Hhakhon Chini king of the Tartarians, seeeing the 〈◊〉 wherein the Persians had gotten a habit, and assuring himself that he should surprise them in the midst of their delights, levied an army of two hundred and fifty thousand men, and invaded the provinces of Persia which lay nearest unto him, where he committed great spoils. This did strangely amaze all the barons and chief lords of the country, seeing no forces ready to make head against the violence of so powerful an enemy: whereupon they came to Baharon their king, representing unto him the present necessity, who answered them very coldly, as if he had not much regarded what they said: and thereupon he commanded to prepare all things necessary for his hunting. He had commonly in his court seven kings his vassals, whom he let understand that hewould 〈◊〉 them accompany him in those sports. These made themselves ready with a reasonable train, and he himself took but three hundred of the best men of his guard. And thus they went altogether to field with falcons, grayhounds, and all kinds of interments for hunting.  
The kings and chief lords among the Persians have been always given to hunting, in which exercise they spend much, holding it for a mark of greatness. For this cause Baharon was surnamed Gur; which word hath a double signification, and in this place signifies a wild ass. His subjects gave him this surname, for that he was much given ●o hunt that beast. It doth also signify a pit, wherein they bury dead bodies: so as after the death of Baharon, Poets which sing his praises, say that he took great delight in this ●ind of chase. And whereas Gur signifies a pit, it agrees well with their ordinary kind of hunting in Persia. They teach their falcons, and other kind of hawks in such sort, as they master this great and furious beast: for the hawks falling betwixt his horns pick at his eyes, and trouble him in such sort, as he is forced to stand still; and in the mean time the huntsmen come and kill him. Besides their grayhounds and other dogs, which are exceeding good and swift throughout all the East, they hunt with tame ounces and leopards, the which they drag after them in carts, and private men carry them upon their horses. These beasts they arm with plaits of iron, lest they should be torn in pieces with their nails. That kind of chase which they most esteem, is of a kind of beast they call Gazal, which hath a body like unto our roe bucks, having strait horns, sharp, and wreathed, great eyes and are exceeding swift. They have also a kind of wild rams.  
In India they do often hunt one wild beast with another: for they keep many tame in their houses, which are instructed for that sport, the which they lead in leases like grayhounds, and carry them with them a hunting, letting them slip whenas they found their game. But these tame beasts going to feed in meadows, and meeting with any that is wild of the same kind, they rub one another's horns in sign of love; and to this horn there is a cord fastened in such sort, as when the tame one retires, the other is taken in the snare. But in the province of Zeylan, they have a strange invention to take the elephant after this manner: they sand into the forresta woman whom they call Aleah, with a Cornaca, which is an Indian that can speak unto, and govern the elephant, whom he ties artificially to the belly of the Aleah, then putting himself betwixt them, he speaks flattering and wanton words to provoke him, and when the Indian finds that he is sufficiently moved, he bids the woman return, and then the elephant followeth her home, and for ever after grows very tame.  
As for the chase of tigers, whereof they have great numbers in the East, they of the Island of Zeylan hunt them after this manner: A man arms his left arm unto the elbow with strong plates well steeled, and in his right hand he holds a sharp pointed dagger, then leaping against the beast, he gives him many stabs, and so kills him. There are many men exceeding active, and expert in this exercise: yet some lose their lives in the practice; for the tigers of the East are exceeding great, and very cruel. The Nayres of this country which be the pagan of Malabar, hold it a great honour to kill tigers. Teixieres, who hath made this observation, and traveled over all the East, holds that this beast in respect of others, is very slow, although he be cruel: but he saith that experience doth ●●ch, that what beast soever hath any scent of him, escaps easily, for that he cannot 〈◊〉 ●im: so as his ordinary hunting is after men, for that they cannot run so fast as beas● being pursued: and this is the true reason saith Teixieres, why they do rather sollow low men, and not for any desire of their blood, nor for that their flesh is more delicate, and yet it might make them more eager, having once devoured any. The same Author reports, That in Malaca, upon the river of Parannaque, in the year of our Redemption ●●00, a Tiger did fight with a Crocodile, and that the like happened upon the river of ●●●ma.  
And to the end we may omit nothing worthy of note, which hath been curiously ●●●erued by this Author; (it depending also in some sort of hunting) he saith, That in 〈◊〉 realm of Champa (which is betwixt Camboya and Cochin China, upon the South 〈◊〉 of India, throughout all the coast of Mardel) there are certain sparrows somewhat 〈◊〉 to swallows, which at a certain time of the year enter into heat, during the which, ●●ere comes out of their bills a slaver and glutinous humour, with the which (being ●ight by provident nature) they go to the rocks and precipices, making their nests 〈◊〉 wonderful art, building one upon another until they come unto a place that is 〈◊〉 dry; and they build their nests somewhat like to a spoon raised up on either side, 〈◊〉 the which they lay their eggs, and discover their young ones. These nests built after 〈◊〉 manner, are gathered together and sold; the Chinois pay for every quintal fifty 〈◊〉, which is about five hundred ducats: They eat them, for that they say they are 〈◊〉 wholesome for the brain and stomach: and some Portugals which have tasted ●●ereof, affirm that they have found much ease. But his digression hath been over long ●or this small discourse, the which notwithstanding I did not hold fit to pass over with ●ence, as curious things to content the Reader.  
But to return to Baharon, (being accompanied as we have said) he fell to his sport of ●●nting, holding a contrary course to Karason whereas the enemy lay, having left in his 〈◊〉 for governor a kinsman of his called Narsy, whom some among the Persians put in 〈◊〉 rank of kings: he, with the chief noblemen of the realm, being persuaded that Baharon was fled, sent Ambassadors to Hakhon Chiny, to treat a peace with him, and to free ●●●seluess in some sort from the dangers wherein they were. Hakhon accepted the of●●●nd being assured of Baharons' flight, he desisted from his first fury, and neglected his ●●●dss. In the mean time, Baharon took his way to Aderbazon and Armenia, having 〈◊〉 with him his guards, and some two thousand horse men of whom he had made 〈◊〉 for their valour: with these small forces he marched by secret byways, still 〈◊〉 of his enemy; and hearing that he was near him, he sent three spies by three 〈◊〉 ways, to observe the situation of his camp, and their numbers: these men being 〈◊〉, and he particularly informed, and that they lived securely, and without guard: 〈◊〉 loathe to lose any time, he divided his small troop, which consisted but of four ●●●sand, (yet all men of action) into four companies; and taking the opportunity of a 〈◊〉 night, he went with his trumpets and drums to charge the enemy in four 〈◊〉 with such fury, as being all divided, and not able to make head in such a great ●●●fusion and darkness, they disbanded, and were soon put to flight. As for Baharon, ●●●ent to the pavilion of Hakhon, who began to arm; but giving him no time, he 〈◊〉 and cut off his head; then following him that fled, he pursued them to the river of 〈◊〉, putting many to the sword. Many writ this diversly, but this is held to be the 〈◊〉 report. Thus ended the war of Hakhon Chiny, king of the Tartarians: And SATURN'S ●aving pacified all things in those quarters, returned into Persia, full of honour and 〈◊〉 riches, to the great admiration of all his subjects, who received him with much joy 〈◊〉 content. Afterwards, Baharon had a desire to see the country of India: the which 〈◊〉, being accompanied by some few of his subjects, leaving the government again 〈◊〉 (who is a gain accounted by some for king of Persia:) going thus through the ●●●tie, he termed himself to be Vazir to the king of Persia, and that for some discontent he had retired himself. Being there, he served the greatest king in those quar●●●ss, for whom he did many great and worthy exploits, and by whose means the king ●●●ayned great victories against his enemies; so as finding himself much bound unto 〈◊〉, in requital of his great services, he gave him his only daughter to wife. Baharon 〈◊〉 married, and seeing no further cause of fear, discovered himself to his father in law, to whom this news was not very pleasing, fearing it would breed some innovation in his country: for Baharon having purchased great reputation by his valour, he feared, that being known, his subjects would affect him the more. But he had another design, and the better to assure him, he took his wife, offering him certain lands of Persia, which confined upon his country, and so returned into his realm, where having rested himself some time, he sent a C●●t●ine of his with a goodly army to invade the lands of Rumeston, that is to say of the Roman empire, where he took many places without any resistance. Baharon himself went with an army into Arabia, and invaded the country subject to the 〈◊〉 of Hamon: There is a difference betwixt Hyamon and Hamon, which are 〈◊〉 in Arabia, near unto the realm of Sabaah, whereas that lady was Queen 〈◊〉 came to Jerusalem to see Solomon, the countries being near, and the way short 〈◊〉 frequented: for she was not of the country of the Abyssins', or of Aethiopia, as some 〈◊〉 held, which are remote countries. Baharon, having in his conquests gotten great ●●●toriess, pursuing the enemies in the night, fell by chance into a pool or moor, where he was smothered and lost: the which was unknown to his subjects, by reason of the ●ight; whereof being advertised in the morning, they went to seek him with great speed, but it was too late. Such was the end of Baharon Gur, having reigned three and twenty years, leaving for successor a son called Yazd Girded.   

¶ Yazd Girded, eight and twentieth king of Persia.  
AFter the death of Baharon, Yazd Ger● being come unto the crown, he made Narsy his kinsman governor of the realm, as sometime his father had done: so as he was the third time governor, and is again numbered among the kings of Persia. This Yazd Girded was a great lover of justice, wherein he was so strict, as no respect could make him fail in the execution; in regard whereof, he was much respected of his subjects during his life. In the fourteenth year of his reign he levied an army against the king of Rumeston, but they came not to battle, by reason of an accord made betwixt them upon certain conditions.  
Yazd Girded had two sons, the eldest called Pheruz, and the younger Hormoz, whom the father loved more than the other, and desired to leave him the realm after his death: for this cause he sent Pheruz to govern the province of Nimrus, to the end, that by his absence he might not dispute the succession with the other, and the people might affect him more: Then, having reigned eighteen years, he died, leaving Hormoz for king. They called him Yazd Girded Sepabd●xt, that is to say, a friend to soldiers.   

¶ Hormoz, the nine and twentieth king of Persia.  
HOrmoz was received for king after the death of his father, by a general consent of all the people, whereof they repent soon after: for Hormoz being naturally wicked, he had dissembled his bad inclination, until he came unto the crown: so as the first love of his subjects was converted into hatred. This being known to Pheruz his elder brother, from whom the father had unjustly taken the realm, he contemned not the occasion, but made use thereof, and by the favour of his friends, especially of the king of Abtelah, to whom Pheruz bound himself to quit the lands of Termed, which lie at the entric of Karason, betwixt his country and Nimrus, upon condition, that he should assist him with thirty thousand horse, as he did: so as Pherus, with some other troops which he gathered together, entered into Persia, whereof Hormoz being advertised, he went against him, and offered him battle: but the army was defeated, and put to rout, and himself taken prisoner. Some days after, Pheraz put him to death, as shall be said, having been ●ing but one year. He was surnamed Farzand, that is to say, Son.   

¶ Pheruz, the thirtieth king of Persia.  
PHeruz having thus seized upon the realm, and studying for all things necessary for the well governing thereof, he grew somewhat jealous of his brother Hormoz, who lived 〈◊〉 and had certain practices with some of his subjects, especially with three brethren, 〈◊〉 familiar friends; whereof being fully informed, he caused all their heads to be cut off. 〈◊〉 beginning of this prince's reign was very remarkable, by reason of the great ●●ought that continued seven years together in Persia, in such sort, as the fountains 〈◊〉 dried up; yea, and some affirm the famous rivers of jehun and Degilah, which is ●●●ris: so as much people and cattle died for hunger and want. The fields were covered 〈◊〉 birds that fell from the air for want of water, and the earth was barren, and yielded 〈◊〉 fruit. Pheruz had a sensible feeling of this general calamity, and did what possibly he ●●●ld to help it, but the affliction was so great, as neither his travail nor his bounty 〈◊〉 able to prevent it. And seeing all providence and care was fruitless, he drew toge●●●a great multitude of people of all sexes and ages, with the which he went into the 〈◊〉, doing penance, and imploring the divine mercy: wherein they continued madaies until that it reigned; so as the earth began to fructify, and beasts to profit and ●●●iplie.  
After this, certain people came to Pheruz to complain that the king of Abtelah had ●●●led their lands. This was he to whom Pheruz had restored the lands of Tcrmed, for ●●●ccourss of thirty thousand men which he had given him for the recovery of 〈◊〉 Athio and Tornamire writ, that this king of Abtelah was called Euthalitas, and that 〈◊〉 died in his ditches, whom they call Peruzas: the which is not strange, for that in 〈◊〉 Arabian and Persian writing, there is a certain affinity between P. and F. and also 〈◊〉 pronunciation: and as for the word Euthalitas, it is the same that the Persians call ●●●lah, the one and the other signifying water of gold. This nation lies upon the North ●●rsia. Pheruz being advertised of these spoils, prepared to make war against him: 〈◊〉 which was soon known to Gox Nawaz (for so this king of Abtelah was called) that 〈◊〉, a good player of instruments, whereat he was much amazed: for he was neither ●●●rant of the power of the king of Persia, nor of the great courage of Pheruz. But a 〈◊〉 of his, knowing in what perplexity his prince was, offered to free him of this encumbrance; so as after his death he would remember the service which he did him, and 〈◊〉 his wife and children. This being promised with all the assurances that the words ●●●rince may give, being reduced unto that extremity; the Wazir retired 〈◊〉 and having caused his hands, feet, and nose to be cut off, he caused himself being 〈◊〉 maimed to be laid in a wood, where he knew that Pheruz and his army must of 〈◊〉 pass. He was found in this manner by the scouts of the army, who took him 〈◊〉 thence, and carried him to Pheruz camp: who being amazed at this cruelty, de●●●ded of him who had so ill entreated him: to whom the other answered with words compassion, that he was the Wazir of Gox Nawaz king of Abtelah, who preparing ●●●elfe to make war against the king of Persia, and seeking (according to the duty of ●●●arge) to divert him from the danger whereinto he did rashly run, for that his en●●●se did seem too difficult to have any good success, he had taken his sincere 〈◊〉 affection in so bad part, as in steed of acknowledging his words to be true, he had 〈◊〉 him to be dismembered as he might see, and to be cast into those woods, to the end 〈◊〉 having neither feet nor hands, he should have no means to defend himself against 〈◊〉 beasts that might tear him in pieces. Pheruz detesting the cruelty of this prince, 〈◊〉 holding all for truth that he had reported, comforted him, giving him hope that 〈◊〉 in a short time he would take revenge for so wicked an act, and of all other villainies 〈◊〉 this prince had committed. After many thanks given by the other, Pheruz mea●●● to continued his intended course, the Wazir making show to have a great desire of ●●●nge, told him that if he would follow his directions, he would conduct him a shor●way, by which the enemy should not discover him, Pheruz commanded presently that he should be put in the head of the army, and that they should follow him. This man led them so cunningly, as in the end the best part of the army perished for want of drink, the which they could not prevent; and the small remainder with Pheruz having escaped this danger, fell into the hands of Gox Nau●az, who entreating them with all clemency, set them at liberty upon certain conditions, whereof the one was, That Pheruz should bind himself never to make war against him, neither by himself nor any other; whereunto he agreed to have his liberty.  
Pheruz was no sooner returned into Persia, but he made a great levy of men, to go against Gox Nawaz, notwithstanding that his subjects sought by all means possible to divert him: but their reasons and entreaties were all fruitless; so as he sent for a kinsman of his, who was governor of Sistom, called Sufarah, whom some put twice in the rank of the kings of Persia: once in this place, and another time before; to whom he gave the government of his realm and of his two sons, whereof the one was called Belax, and the other Kobad, prescribing him an order what to do concerning the government. He led with him a daughter of his that was of rare beauty: being come near to Abtelah Gox Nawaz went against him to stop his passage, yet sending unto him to require him to observe that which was concluded betwixt them: whereunto Pheruz lent a deaf ear. Gox Nawaz had caused many deep ditches full of water to be made upon the way, the which were covered so artificially, as no man could discern them: and seeing Phe●●z wilfully bend to war●e, he made a show of flying, the which gave more courage to Pheruz soldiers to pursue him, who as it were assured of all danger without any discovery of those places by the which they were to pass, they run rashly into these ditches where they were all drowned with, Pheruz having reigned six and twenty years.  
Sufarah, who had remained governor in Persia, being assured of this loss, levied a mighty army with great speed, and began to march towards Abtelah forcing the king to demand a peace, on condition to yield up the captives and spoils, with the daughter of Pheruz, the which Gox Nawaz performed with much grief, for that he loved her dearly. This being done, Sufarah returned into Persia, whereof he made Belax the eldest son of Pheruz king. As for Kobad the younger, who pretended the crown, finding himself wronged and disgraced by Sufarah, he went to serve the king of Turquestan.   

¶ Belax, the one and thirtieth king of Persia.  
AFter this manner Belax obtained the quiet possession of the crown of Persia: and as for Kobad concealing the secret of his intentions, he continued his way to Turquestan, being accompanied by Bezarmeher the son of Sufarah his great friend, who was married, and had his house an family in Nichabur. He entreated Kobad to do him so much honour as to pass that way, to the end he might receive him in his house, and moderate his discontents by his good reception: wherein, at length he prevailed. This Bezarmeher had one daughter called Zarmeher, which was exceeding fair: Kobad having seen her, grew passionate in love; the which Bezarmeher perceiving, and being the thing he most desired, he offered him his daughter, wherewith the prince was much content, and took her to wife, of whom in time they had one son, whom some call Anuchiron, and others Nauchiruan.  
Kobad having continued there some days after his marriage, he left his wife in his father's house, and continued his way to Turquestan, where being arrived, he presently put himself into the service of Hhak●on Chiny, who at that time governed this realm, with whom he continued four years, at the end whereof he demanded a good army of Hhakhon, in recompense of his services, with the which he marched into Persia against his brother Belax the king thereof, who governed it to the great content of all men. Kobed went to see his wife in Nichabur, where having dispotted himself with her and his son whom he had not yet seen, going on his journey, he had news that Belax his brother was dead, having reigned but five years.  
As for Nichabur it was a province subject to the king of Persia, lying betwixt Karazon, Vsbek, and Tartary, a great country, and full of deserts and sands, the which (as some affirm for truth) do boil continually. It was in this province, that Tamerlan, or Teym●rlangh, caused four hundred thousand persons to dye in one day, (as the Histories of Persia report.) In Nichabur grow the stones which they call Turquestes, so called for that this province confines with Turquestan, and there are no precious stones found in Persia, but in this place, except the Bezoar stone, which is the most perfect, the which grows in Persia: this name of stone is called in the Persian tongue Sangh; and in the Arabian, Ager. But as for the Bezoar stone, the Persians call it by excellency Pazahar, that is to say, an antidote or remedy against poison: for Zahar is a general name for all poison. In a certain strait of Persia, called Sthabanon, of a city which bears the same name, there is a town called Lara, three days journey from the way, in whose fields there is a great abundance of a certain kind of plant very like unto that of Safron, whereon the sheep of that quarter do feed, in whose stomach there breeds a certain stone the which in bounty and virtue is preferred before all others; so as Scach Abbess, at this present king of Persia, esteems them so much, as those which exceed a certain weight belong to him. The natural cause of this effect is their feeding, for the sneepe being transported into another soil, yield no such stones. The inhabitants of this province have no hair upon their head, the which a servant of Scach Abbas having observed, he demanded of him in recompense of his services, that every person of his realm that was bald should pay him a Cherafin, which is a piece of coin of the value of a ducat, which demand being held ridiculous, he granted: but he who knew the secret, put it in practice, and grew exceeding rich in a short time. As for the Bezoar stones of America, they are of no such value.   

¶ Kobad, the two and thirtieth king of Persia.  
THe news of Belax death was the cause that Kobad entered more quietly into the possession of the realm of Persia than he expected, his brother having left no son to succeed him: so as many went to meet him, and to receive him with as great demonstrations of love as he could desire of his subjects. The realm was in the mean time governed by Sufarah, who for his great bounty, & wisdom, was generally beloved, except of Kobad, who was much discontented to see him in this great authority, desiring to ruin him, and to make him away, the which he resolved to put in execution by the means of a hardy and valiant knight which was in his Court, to whom (having discovered his intention) he made him consent to the death of Sufarah, whom, within few days after, he went to visit, where (descoursing of divers matters) they fell to words, and in the end to arms, so as Xamo slew him.  
About the tenth year of the reign of Kobad there did rise up in Persia a man called Mezdahk, which came out of the country of Sthahar, who sought to erect up a new sect touching the veneration of fire, finding out new follies and superstitions. They called him a Prophet, and he did feign that the fire spoke unto him, and did reveal many high and great matters, the which he made the vulgar people to believe, with some other in●entionss which heused. He allowed community in goods, wives, children, and all other things: he did prohibit the kill of any living creature, propounding many other absurd things unto the people. Many which had not yet found out the falsehood of his doctrine, followed him to live dissolutely and in liberty, among which was king Kobad, who commended him much; and they that followed him, honoured him greatly, esteeming him as a holy man. The chief and wisest men of the realm, who considered the danger that might ensue, and how much the king was deceived, entreated him to put him to death, or to banish him: but having made many requests, and seeing nothing could prevail, they deposed him of the realm, and put him into prison, investing one called ja●asp his near kinsman, who is numbered by some among the kings of Persia. Kobad being restrained, the Persians sought to put Mezdahk to death, but they could not effect it, by reason of the great multitude that followed him, standing still upon his guard; yet in the end they made him away, as you shall hear. Kobad had a sister exceeding fair, with whom (being passionately in love) he married, having a dispensation from Mesdahk, who was not veriescrupulous. She seeing her brother and husband a prisoner, being bound by such strict bands to affect him more than ordinary, sought all possible means to free him: In the end, she bethought herself of one which in her opinion might effect her design: she attired herself therefore in her richest robes and most precious jewels to give more lustre to her natural beauty, and then she went into the prison where Kobad was, where, with presents and promises (which were not very lawful) she had such power over them that kept him, as they suffered her to sleep that night with him, the which being passed, she caused his bed to be emptied, whereinto he was put, and so carried him to his house. In the mean time she entertained the guards, to give Kobad time to retire himself, the which he did so secretly, and with such speed, as it was not discovered before he was in a place of safety. Being thus gotten out of Persia, he went into the realm of Abtelah, hoping to draw some succours from the king, the which he obtained not presently: yet after some years, assisting him with thittie thousand horse, having drawn some other forces together, he entered into Persia: This bred a great combustion amongst them of the country, whether they should receive him as an enemy, or peaceably, as their king. In the end, they concluded to receive him with all submission, and the first that did acknowledge him, and subject himself under his command, was jamasp, to whom they had committed the government: whereupon, Kobad requited their obedience by a general pardon for all offences past. He employed the remainder of his reign to reform his realm. He was very curious to build the cities of Bardah, and Guania, and to people others. He died of sickness, having reigned three and forty years.   

¶ Kesere Anuxiron, the three and thirtieth king of Persia.  
KEsere Anuxiron or Nauchiruan (for they call him by either name) the son of Kobad and of Zarmeher his wife, succeeded in the realm: he was endowed with many excellent virtues, for the which he was much respected and honoured, as well by his subjects as strangers: having given order for the necessary reformation of Estates, the first act he did, was to condemn Mezdahk and his followers to death, the which was executed with such rigour, as in a short time they were all extinct, although the number were in a manner infinite, freeing Persia of this pernicious sect. And to the end he might govern his realms with less toil to his person, he divided them all into four governments, the which he committed unto men of great loyalty and trust, and who were allied unto his majesty. The first of these governors had the provinces of Karazon, Sagistam, Kermon, and Maurenahar: the second, Isphaon, Kom, Aderbajon, and Armenia: the third, had Farc or Parc, which is Persia and Ahwa: and the fourth, Hierak, the which is about Babylon, and the countries of Rumestam, which is Greece. Having thus ordered all things, he levied a great army, with the which he conquered Tacharstar, Zabulstam, Ka bulstam, jaganyan, and Abtelah: but being in this enterprise, Hakhon Chini, king of the Tartarians, invaded his country, and took from him Barchach, Ferana, Kaich, Nesaf, Samarkand, and Bokara. This Samarkand is a town of great strength in the country of Maurenahar, whereas Tamerlan was borne, who was a famous and renowned prince throughout the world, borne of noble parents, and not descended from a herdsman or a thief, as some have held, but from the blood of Chinguis Chamlet, king of the Tartarians, of whom we will hereafter speak: being come unto the realm, not for his beauty, for he had but one hand, was lame and blind of one eye, but for his great valour in arms, he made himself master of a great part of the habitable earth; he showing himself mild and courteous to such as yielded unto him, and most cruel to them that made resistance. They did call him by his own name Teimur, and he was surnamed Langh, that is, limping; whence grew the corruption of the name which, we give him of Tamberlan. The Persians call him commonly Sahaybkharon, that is to say, a ruler of fortune. There is a particular book written of his life in the Persian tongue, in an elegant stile.  
After his death he left many sons, who divided his Estates, and at this day, the great king of Mogol is one of them, whom the Persians hold to be one of the greatest monarchs which are in the whole world, called Gelaladinakbar, and that he is descended from him in the eight degree of the direct line. The names of these great monarchs, according unto the opinion of the Persians, are, he of the Turks, of the Persians, of the Tartarians, of China, and of Mogul, whose dominions extend from the river of Ganges, unto the realm of Makron, or the Persian gulf: in which tract of country are contained many great kingdoms, and rich provinces. He is a Pagan, but differing from the rest, for that he follows no Sect, pretending to have one private to himself: he causeth himself to be honoured as a God, and hath always secretaries about him to writ his words, and actions. The ordinary guard of his body are six kings his vassals, who live continually in his court. There are many things worthy of observation in this province, which would be tedious to relate.  
As for Bokara, it is a town in the province of Vsbek, whereas Avicen was borne, whom the Persians call Boaly; he was very learned in Physic, of whose writings they make great account; and they call him commonly Chequereis, Boaly Sina, or Eben Sina, that is to say, the lord Boaly, the son of Sina: he was nobly borne, but not prince of Vsbek, neither yet of Cordova, nor a Spaniard. He did writ many things which are to be seen at this day, and especially, a volume containing twenty books of Music, and he compiled all his works in the Arabian tongue, rather than in the Persian, for that this tongue is more general and eloquent: they held that he was ill conceited of the law of Maho●et. As for Physicians, this is to be observed in Persia, that all Physicians keep shops, selling drugs and physic to such as have need of them; they call them Mulah, that is to say, Master. But to return to Kesere Anuchiron, knowing the entry of Hakon Chiny into his country, he sent his son Hormoz against him, with the greatest forces he could raise, who used such diligence, as he came soon near unto the enemy, to whom he gave so many assaults and skirmishes, and used such stratagems, as having received great loss, being full of fear and amazement, he retired into his country, abandoning all that he had conquered; so as Hormoz returned to Persia with much honour. The Tartarian war being thus ended, Kesere had presently advertisement that Kaled Beniulas Guasanij a captain to the king of Rumestan, had invaded the country of Manzar, king of Arabia his vassal, where he committed great spoils, and put many of his subjects to the sword; whereof Kesere made complaint to the king of Rumestan, demanding restitution, and to have Kaled punished, whereof the Greek Emperor (which is the same that Rumestan) made small account: the which Kesere understanding, he levied a great army, and entered into the territories of Rumestan by Mesopotamia, which they call Zazirat, and took Dara Medineyraha Kanserin, and so passing into Syria, he took Antioch, and other places; so as he forced the Graecian Emperor to demand peace, the which he granted, paying him a yearly tribute, in regard whereof he restored unto him the countries of Chan, Zazirat, Heyaz, Hyaman, Thaef, Bargre, and Homan, all belonging to the Empire, the which he had subdued in this war. Kesere had some years before married a Christian woman for her great beauty, who was much persecuted by this king that was a Pagan, seeking to force her to renounce her religion, wherein she continued constant. Kesere Anuchiron had a son by her called Nuchzad, who having sucks the mother's religion with his milk, notwithstanding all his father's threats, would not forsake it, whereat the king being much incensed, caused him to be put in a dark and straight prison, and to be entreated as one of the basest of the people, neither could the constant patience and perseverance of this young prince move him to pity. At that time the people of the country of Chan, which is Syria, revolted against Anuchiron; so as he was forced to go in person, whereas he fell grievously sick, being thought in Persia that he could not escape: this coming to the knowledge of Nuchzad, who was yet a prisoner, he found out means to free himself, and having gathered together all the Christians that were then in the realm (whose number was not small) having also drawn unto his part a great number of soldiers, and (that which did most import) he had seized upon his father's treasure, the which he divided liberally among his people, placing new captains upon the frontiers and forts of the realm, and displacing such as his father had left, who having present advice of all these innovations, sent Rambarzin a very famous Captain whom he had left at Hierahk, that with all possible speed he should jevie men, and cross the designs of Nuchzad, giving him charge that he should not kill him, but seek to take him alive, and to put him in safe custody, yet worthy of his quality.  
Nuchzad had a Captain called Chamaz Rumy, who presented battle to Rambarzin; so as in the beginning the victory seemed to incline unto his side: but the valour of Rambarzin (who thrust himself into the midst of his troops, fight more courageously than any one) was the cause that by his example they renewed the fight with more fury than before; whereupon he put the enemy to flight, in the which Nuchzad was wounded upon the stomach with an arrow, his arms being not able to resist; so as within few days after, he died, and could not be recovered, to the great grief of Rambarzin, who caused him to be interred with that pomp and ceremony which was used amongst the Christians. In the mean time Kesere having recovered his health, and pacified the troubles of Cham, returned into Persia, whereas he prevented many practices against his Estate; and then he went to make war in India, and Selandyne or Seylan, the which is that we call Taprobana, where he made a peace with the king of that Island, paying him a certain tribute; so as this Anuchiron commanded over the provinces of Maurenahar, Karazon, Darband, Hhezrran, Hyamama, Tabarstan, Geryon, part of India, Kermon, Parsi, the which is Persia, Aderbajon, Hyerakhen, jazirat, Homan, to Hyaman in Arabia, and over many other countries to Magareb in Rumestan.  
In the time of this king, there was brought out of India into Persia two famous books of Philosophy, the one called Kelilah, and the other Vuademana, with a chess board, which the Indians sent unto the Persians, meaning to represent unto them the inconstancy and mutability of human things, and of man's life, which is a continual warfare, and therefore they should govern themselves wisely. Mirkond saith, that for answer the Persians sent them a pair of tables, letting them understand that as wisdom was very necessary in this life, so must they be somewhat assisted by hazard, as they might see by that game. Both these nations are much given to these two games, and are very expert, especially at chess; and it is a remarkable thing that they observe the same names: for they call the kings Scha, which hath the same signification that king; and the queen Vazir, which is he that hath the supreme dignity, he that the Spaniard calls Delfils, they call F●l, that is to say, an elephant which serves in their Eastern wars; the knight, Asp or Faratz, which is all one; and the Pawn, Peada, that is to say, a soldier on foot, that which we call Check, they term Scha, that is, to advise the king, and whereas we say Mate, they say Schamat, which in their language signifieth the king is dead: and as for the name of chess, they call it Schatranke, as if they should say, a sport or entertainment for a king: some hold that this game was invented in Babylon. As for Kesere Anuchiron, he was very wise, and favoured all wise and virtuous men in his country: he had many sons, but Hormoz was best bred among them, and the father did affect him more than all the rest; so as he caused him to be declared his successor before his death, the which happened the eight and fortieth year of his reign, recommending unto him peace, concord, and the love of his subjects. Mirkond hath made a relation of the virtues, wisdom, & great courage of this king, adding, that in his time Persia did flourish in all kinds of prosperity: he was surnamed Adel, that is to say, the justicer, by reason of his great integrity in the administration thereof.   

¶ Hormoz, the four and thirtieth king of Persia.  
THings which are most desired after are not always the best nor most profitable. Hormoz as you have heard, was held for a good prince; but he changed his disposition as soon as he had gotten the reins of command into his hands. He was issued from a daughter of the king of Tartary; who when he saw himself to be in the quiet possession of his realm, made it appear that he was a very cruel, vicious, and tyrannous prince: and to the end no man should contradict him in his le●d and bad course of life, he put to death all the great men of his realms, depriving all the officers of justice; and holding it an unseemly thing, that there should be any other judge in his realm, but only himself; and he carried himself so cruelly unto all men, as it is constantly maintained, that in the twelve first years of his reign, he put to death thirteen thousand persons of great account, besides an infinite number of others, of whom mention is not made; so as many to fly this plague exiled themselves voluntarily from their country.  
The Emperor of Constantinople (being advertised of the carriage of this prince, and how all things passed in Persia) would not lose so good an opportunity, but sought to recover these provinces which the predecessors of Hormoz had usurped of the Roman Empire, and taking arms, he surprised the Persians, and entered into the country of Naciben before he was discovered. This Naciben, according to the tradition of the Persians, is Ninive, the which they, and the Arabians at this day call Mosul in Diarbek, or Karamite, the which they hold for certain, saying that the Pehhanber did preach there, for so they term him whom the Arabians call Naby, and we a Prophet, and they say that he was swallowed up by a Whale: if this be true, Ninive was never wholly destroyed, seeing that it flourisheth at this day. The Christian Emperor having entered the country of Naciben, sent word to Hormoz, that if he would restore that which did belong unto the Roman Empire, he would retire back again without any spoil: but the Persian making no pleasing answer, he passed on, ruining all Armenia and Aderbajon, sending two captains (whereof the one was called Abas Awal, and the other Homer Azarek) with good troops of soldiers, to spoil the country of Babylon. At that time Chabacha Hhakhon Chiny uncle to Hormoz, and brother to his mother, seeing his nephews distress, levied a great army, the which they say did consist of four hundred thousand men, not to secure his nephew, but to seize upon his lands, as he did; for passing over the river of jehun, he entered into the country of Karazon. Then did Hormoz found his own error, having put the chief men of his country to death, there being few to oppose against his enemies: and in this confusion of mind, having called them of his Council, it was resolved to quit unto the Emperor of Rumestan the lands which he demanded, that having some assurance from him, they might convert all their forces against the Tartarians, as they did: for king Hormoz having gathered together all his troops, he gave the charge to a Persian Captain, who was accounted for one of the most valiant at that day in all the Eastern countries, called Baharon Chuby, who was governor of the frontiers of Armenia: being come to court, and having received his commandment from the prince, he marched presently with his army against the Tartarians, having with him only twelve thousand soldiers, but they were men of great experience, with the which he durst boldly charge that great and mighty army of Chabacha, and with such succease, as the Tartarian king was slain with a great part of his army, and many of them were taken prisoners. Chabacha being dead, the Tartarians advanced his son, who continued the war with the like disgrace: for the Persians were always victors, and especially in a great battle, whereas the Tartarians where wholly defeated, and the spoil was so great, as Baharon Chuby did sand by a son of his unto king Hormoz twelve hundred and fifty cammells, the which were laden with gold and silver, with much rich movables: but the worthy exploits of this brave and valiant man, were ill rewarded, for they ●hat were in this prince's court, envying his glory and prosperity, slandering him in such sort with Hormoz, as growing jealous that he had some enterprise against his Estate, at his return, he gave him a prison for his welcome: but Baharon was so sensible of this ingratitude, as having found means to escape, he entered into practice with Kozrra● Paruez eldest son to Hormoz, giving him means to rebel against his father, who presently coined money with his name and arms, styling himself king of Persia. He had two uncles by his mother, who served him for supports, the one was called Ban●u●ye, and the other was called Bostan. King Hormoz hearing of all his conspiracies, sought by all means possible to stop the course of his proceed, the which the others understanding, and finding themselves to be too weak to resist him, they fled. Kozrr●o retired into Armenia, and from thence they went unto Aderbajon; and as for the two brethren of Hormoz, they were put in prison: but finding means to escape, they gathered together new forces, and surprised Hormoz, whenas he lest thought of them; so as he fell into their power: but they did not entreat him after the like manner, for they put out his eyes. Kozrrao being advertised of all these troubles, returned into Persia, where he was received for king, and seeing himself settled in his Estate, he went and craved pardon of his father, the which he granted, so as he would take revenge of his two uncles, who had deprived him of his fight.  
Persia being thus in combustion, Baharon Chuby who had been the chief motive of these divisions, the which in show he had attemped to revenge an injury, converted his revenge into ambition, aspiring unto the crown of Persia; so as with a powerful a●mie, he did overrun the country of Persia, and committed great spoils: against whom Kozrrao Paraez coming unto battle, he was vanquished, and forced to fly unto Constantinople; with his two uncles the which did accompany him, who gave him counsel to take away all pretex●ss from his enemies, and to put his father to death; for in so doing, there was no more fear: but they seeing that the love of a father had more power over this prince, than the desire of reign, feigned an occasion to retire themselves, and leaving Paruez there, they went whereas Hormoz remained, whom they strangled with a bowstring: such was the end worthy of the life and cruelty of this prince.  
As for Kozrrao Paruez, who as we have said had retired himself unto the Grecians, he married the emperors daughter, who assisted him with one hundred thousand men to recover his country, sending with him a son of his the which was called Ben Athus, in recompense whereof, Kozrrao Paruez gave him a great piece of the holy cross, the which his father Hormoz had in his custody. Kozrrao being upon the way with this goodly army, encountered his enemy Baharon in Persia (who by many is put among the number of kings) and both armies being in battle one against another, there came out of Baharons' camp three captains, who defied the bravest of the adverse part; Kozrrao seeing the bravery of these men, caused himself to be armed, and went out of his camp to fight with them against the will of his brother in law, who dissuaded him to the contrary, in which combat he carried himself so valiantly, as he vanquished all thr●e one after another; the which the soldiers of Baharon admiring, they abandoned their captain, and went to Korzraos party; so as Baharon was forced to fly into Turquestan, and to leave Persia: after which he went to serve Hhakhon Chiny, where he died soon after.   

¶ Kozrrao Paruez, the five and thirtieth king of Persia.  
KOzrrao Paruez being thus freed from all troubles and in quiet possession of the realm of Persia, he performed that which he had promised to his father, committing to prison his uncles Boston and Banduhye, who had put him to death, whom he punished very severely. In the fourteenth year of the government of this prince, the Grecians revolted against their Emperor, whom they did kill, with his son Ben Athus who had accompanied Kozrrao, as hath been said, in his recovery of Persia, his younger brother escaped with much difficulty, who retired himself to Paruez by whom he was received, and entreated with much honour, giving him good troops l●d by valiant captains, for the recovering of his Estate, who going out of Persi●, enured into Syria and Palestina, marching towards Constantinople, committing great spo●le●▪ and carrying away many prisoners with them. The Grecians after the death of their Emperor, had chosen in his place one called A●col, or Heraclius, a man of great wisdom and valour, who hearing of the Persians coming, marched against them, and gave them battle, in which he vanquished them, and s●ew sixteen thousand Persians upon the place; but the greatest part of their army turned their backs, and fled into their country.  
About the thirtieth year of the reign of Kozrrao, there did rise at Medina in Arabia, that false and pernicious Prophet Mahomet, who writ to many princes and lords of those countries, entreating them as it were from God, to hear and follow his doctrine: among others he did writ to Kozrrao, who was so far from assenting to him, as he gave him 1000 curses: yet his accursed sect increased in Arabia and other neighbour provinces. But to return to Kozrrao, the Graecian war being ended, he lived in peace; and being in his town of Madahem, he dreamt that he was in a city environed with strong walls, having eleven towers, all which were ruined to the foundations successively one after another; so as the city was without any fortifications: being awake, and much troubled at his dream, he sent for the Divines and Astrologers, demanding the signification thereof: whereof one among the rest answered, that the eleven towers did signify eleven kings, which should govern Persia, after which that Monarchy should have an end. Korzrrao to prevent this prediction and ruin, thought that this alteration might grow by the discord of his children: wherefore he caused them to be taken, forbidding them to frequent or speak with any man, not not with their own wives. Among all his children, there was one called Ch●rear, who of all his wives loved one whose name was Cherin for her great beauty: this word Cherin in the Persian tongue signifies sweet, and it is found in a book of that language, entitled Kozrrao Cherin, which a prince of that country (not he whose life we now describe, but another of less quality) hath compounded in elegant verse, whereof the Persians make great account, as being full of gallant conceptions, wherein they are great artists. Charear remembering his Cherin, and being strangely distempered with the loss of his dearest sight (as love never wants invention) he found means to free himself of this grief, feigning himself to be sick, and that of necessity he must be let blood: whereupon Cherin by the advice which he had given her, disguised herself in the habit of a surgeon, and came unto him into the prison, where having remained some time with her husband, she retired himself; but she was conceived of a son whom she called Yasdgerd, who was bred up in the house of king Kozrrao his grandfather without his privity, unto the age of five years, the which being made known unto him, he commanded that the child should be put to death, wherein he showed himself to be so resolute, as nothing could altar his determination. The which the mother understanding, she went unto him, and prevailed so by her prayers and entreaties, as he was not put to death, but carried into some desert or solitary place, and there exposed to the mercy of wild beasts (the which is related in this place for the understanding of that which shall be spoked hereafter) so as the credit which Kozrrao gave unto this wizard made him suspicious, covetous, fearful, proud, and hated of all his subjects, of whom he put many to death without any other reason but his own fancy; among the which there was one called Neaman, nephew to Manzar, who had done him great services.  
Kozrrao Paruez had reigned eight and thirty years in Persia, whenas his subjects no longer able to endure his cruelty and tyrannies, by a common consent deposed him of the crown, delivering it into the hands of a captain, in whom they had great confidence, and they settled his son called Kobal Chyruyhe in the royal throne: this happened in the ninth year of the Egyra, according to the account of the Mahometans, and in the year of Grace 631. This Kozrrao Paruez is he whom we call Kosdroez.   

¶ Kobal Chyruyhe, the six and thirtieth king of Persia.  
THe Persians thought that this change had somewhat eased their affections, and that they should receive all good usage from this prince; but they had soon cause to repent it, for that seeing himself confirmed in the Royalty, the first act he did, was to kill his father being a prisoner, the which did soon purchase him▪ the general hat●●d of all his subjects; for notwithstanding that this prince was hated for his bad conditions, yet was not there any one that would pollute his hands with the blood of his prince: but within few days after his election, one called Merehe Hormoz (son to one Mordomcha whom Paruez had commanded to be slain) offered himself to Kobal to commit this parricide, who entering into the prison whereas Kozrrao remained, without any other respect or compliment, he used these terms: It is justice to kill him that hath slain my father, wherewithal he cut off his head. Returning unto Kobal who was much satisfied with the deed, he demanded of him how he had proceeded in this action; who expecting some great reward, told him the words which he had used cutting off his father's head: to whom Kobal answered presently, that is was reasonable to kill him that had slain his father. But not satisfied to have made away him that had given him life, he wrought so with his Waz●rss and Governors, as he slew his fifteen brethren the which was suddenly effected. After this there fell a great plague upon Persia, with the which it was much afflicted; so as upon the subject of these calamities, the two sisters of Kobad (whereof the eldest was called Turon Dokt, and the younger Azarmy Dokt) took occasion to reprehend him, telling him that his sins and impieties (having put his father and brethren to death) were the cause of all those miseries, the which the Gods had sent them, threatening him yet with worse, and therefore he should repent him of the crimes which he had committed, and amend his future life, as well for the fear of God, as for the shame of men. Such words spoke his sisters unto him, the which wrought such an impression of the villainies which he had committed, as the violence of his grief and passion cast him into a great sickness, whereof he died within three days, having reigned but eight months: he left a son which succeeded him in the realm.   

¶ Ardchir Chyruyhe, the seven and thirtieth king of Persia.  
AFter the death of Kobad, the Persians did presently settle Ardchir Chyruyhe his only son in the royal throne, being yet but seven years old. But a kinsman of his called Charear or Gher Khan, who was then governor of the province of Again, hearing of the death of Kobad, and knowing how young his successor was, thought it a fit opportunity to effect his designs: whereupon he gathered together all the forces he could, and came to court, where he slew the young king, with many that thought to defend him: and then being favoured by the soldiers, especially by such as he had brought with him, he declared himself king of Persia, young Ardchir having carried the title of king but fifty days.   

¶ Charear a tyrant, the eight and thirtieth king of Persia.  
CHarear having thus seized upon Persia by the death of Ardchir, and of such as opposed themselves: he did what he could to win the hearts of the noblem●n of the realm, trying all possible means, but he could not prevail. There were at that time in court three brethren of a noble family, and very valiant, who grieving to see this man reign, could not endure a tyrant should command over them: so as being of one will, they resolved to kill him: whereupon going to horseback on a time at his palace gate, they overthrew him, and slew him with their daggers, being favoured by the people who desired his death, having reigned but one year, some say but forty days.   

¶ joon Chir, the nine and thirtieth king of Persia.  
THe Persians being thus freed from the tyranny of Charear, gave the realm to joon Chir (this word signifies a fair Lion, or a young Lion) kinsman to the deceased king; he was cousin to Baharon Chuby, who made war against Kozrrao Paruez. He gave great hopes of a generous prince, if death had not prevented his intentions, depriving him both of life and kingdom at one instant, the which he enjoyed but one year.   

¶ Turon Dokt, the fortieth queen of Persia.  
TO joon Chir succeeded in the realm of Persia Turon Dokt, daughter to Kozrrao Paruez, the eldest of the two which had blamed Kobad their brother: this name of Turon is the proper name of a woman, and Dokt signifies a damsel or virgin: she was very wise and of good government, settling her realms in peace, and punishing such as were seditious severely: she reform justice, and re-edified many public buildings which had been ruined by injury of time: she made one of the three brethren which had killed the tyrant Charear, supreme Vuazir of all her realms, and made a strict league with the king of Rumestan, that is to say, the emperor of Constantinople: but whenas her subjects began to reap the benefit of her government, death took her from them, having governed but six months, and six days.   

¶ jasancedah, the one and fortieth king of Persia.  
AFter the death of Turon Dokt, the Persians made choice of jasancedah, at whose election there was great dispute, but in the end he was admitted: some writ, that whenas they did set the Tagè upon his head, the which we call a crown, he said, that it was too weighty, and that he would none of it: some say, that it was to show the burden and weight of governments: others affirm, that it was for mere ignorance, which opinion is more probable, for that the Persians being ill satisfied with his person, deposed him as ignominiously, as they had chosen him rashly, having reigned but six days.   

¶ Azarmy Dokt, the two and fortieth queen of Persia.  
IAsancedah being thus deposed from the Persian crown, they gave the government to Azarmy Dokt, second daughter to king Kozrrao Paruez, and younger sister to Turon Dokt, endowed with singular beauty, and of great understanding. At that time, there was governor of the province of Karason, and ever since the reign of Paruez, a renounced captain called Ferrok Hormoz, who, alured by the fame of Azarmys beauty, came to Court, as if he had been forced to leave his province for some special affairs of the realm, leaving a son of his in his place to govern, having an intent to court the queen, and to make love unto her, the which he did with such importunity and incivility, as she was forced for her honour's sake to make him away, causing him to be put to death: the which being made known unto his son called juego, who was in Karason, he grew into s●ch fury, as having speedily levied an army, he came suddenly to Court, where he mu●●hered the queen cruelly, having no regard to her prayers and complaints. She reigned but six months.   

¶ Kesere, son to jasancedah, the three and fortieth king of Persia.  
TO Azarmy Dokt succeeded Keserè, son to jasancedah, who (as we have formerly said) had been deposed for his insufficiency: but the son being no more capable, nor of a better life and government than his father, he gave occasion unto his subjects, by reason of his follies and indiscretions, to kill him, having reigned but one year.   

¶ Ferrogzad, the four and fortieth king of Persia.  
SPeaking of the reign of Kobad Kyruyhe, it was said that he slew his fifteen brethren, the which stroke such a fear and terror into all the rest of his kindred, as every man desiring to fly the fury of this prince, saved himself where he could; but after his death, some returned into Persia, among the which was Ferrogzad, the son of Kozrrao, and nephew to Kozrrao Paruez, whose quality being well known, he was made king, giving great hope to be a very good prince, if he had lived longer, but he died within a month being poisoned by his slave.   

¶ jazdgerd, the five and fortieth and last king of the Persians of their own nation.  
IN the life of Kozrao Paruez it hath been observed, that whenas Charear his son was a prisoner, seeking to hinder the prediction of his dream, he had by his wife Cherin a son called jazdgerd, which being afterwards known unto his grandfather, he had caused him to be opposed to wild beasts in a forest, where having remained some time, certain herdsmen passing by took him up, and being moved with pity, gave him breeding, not knowing what he was: but as time discovers all things, this young infant coming to age, found means to know his beginning, by the knowledge whereof being carried to higher things than the place did bear, where he had been bred, he went from thence, and came to the king of Persias Court, where he carried himself so discreetly, as in the end he was acknowledged for what he was: so as afterwards they made him king of Persia, where (having governed well for the space of nineteen years) a great multitude of Turks came from Turquestan, and entered into Persia by Nahaoand, making a great spoil where they passed; so as they forced jazdgerd to retire into the country of Ka●ason, where he had another advertisement that the Arabian captains of Mahomet's sect were entered into his country by another by-way; who (preparing to march against them, heard that they were near him, and came to encounter him: whereupon, he rereturned to Karason, where he died suddenly, having reigned twenty years. He was the last of the Persians descending from Kayumarraz, in whom ended the Persian monarchy, which passed unto the Califs successors to Mahamet, who first planted their seat in Kufa, and afterwards in Bagaded, as shall be said.    

¶ The kings of Persia since that the Arabians began first to command there unto our days, according to the Persian Historiographer Mirkond.  

ALl things are found so confused at this new change of the lords of Persia, as it is hard to give any beginning to a true and sinsere relation: yet the Historiographer Mirkond, having somewhat explained the chronology, the Reader may found a course of kings continued also in this family of the Kalives, and other Arabian princes which have governed Persia, as he hath done in that of Kayumarraz.  
He saith then, That Mahomet, the false Prophet, having commanded over many nations for the space often years, at his death he left his Estate much confused, by reason of the divisions which grew amongst his chief captains: but after many great disputes, the sovereignty fell into the hands of Abubakar, who was the first that caused himself to be called Calife, a title which his successors would afterwards hold: for as these tyrants would ground their empire upon a show of religion, so they covered their ambition and avarice with godly names of holiness and piety: As this, amongst others, which signifies given to God; yet it hath an encounter contrary to their intention, for their meaning was, that they were given of God for the saving of the people, and they were sent as a scourge for their punishment. This Abubakar continued the conquests of his predecessor; but his time was short, for he governed but two years and a half.  

¶ Homar, the second Calife, and first king of Persia, after that the Arabians had conquered it.  
AFter the death of Abubakar, the Mahometans sceptre fell into the hands of Homar, who having hold it ten years and a half, seeing his enterprises to succeed in all things, and being advertised how much Persia was infested by the Turks, he thought he should give a great increase to his command, if he should invade it, as he did in the time of jazdgerd, as hath been said, the which succeeded so happily by the sudden death of the king of Persia, as he made himself absolute lord of that realm, with more speed and facility than he could imagine, settling for himself, and his successors, Califs, his royal seat at Bagaded▪ He died a year after, about the year of Grace 655, and of the Egyra, or years of Mahomet, 33.   

¶ Osman or Otman, the third Calife.  
OTman succeeded Homar, of whom our Historian writes nothing but that he reigned eleven years and a half; for the Mahometan wars, and the fury of their arms were rather turned against Europe than Asia, the which was in a manner all at their devotion.   

¶ Aly, the fourth Calife.  
MAhomet the false Prophet, after his death, left a cousin German, who was also his son in law, called Aly, and by the Persians, Morts Aly, who came unto the Mahometan crown after Otman, whose followers tell of his great conquests and speak wonders of his valour, the which are more ridiculous than true. This was he that began the first divorce in the Mahometans sect, the which hath continued unto the Sophies, who say they are descended from him; and they have been always enemies to the Eunis, who hold one belief with the Turks. He reigned but four years and a half, being treacherously slain by a servant of his in the city of Cufa in Arabia. His Sectaries say, that finding him dead, they washed his body, and embalm it according to their custom, than they laid it upon a camel (for they say he had so ordained before his death) suffering it to go at will, following it continually, until after many turnings, it stayed in a desert of Arabia near unto Cufa, where they did erect a very stately sepulchre, to the which his followers in time bringing many gifts and offerings, they built a very sumptuous and fair Mosque, of rare architecture: but devotion growing cold in process of time, and their accustomed presents and offerings failing therewith, this building hath also lost much of the lustre, a good part of it being fallen to ruin.   

¶ Acem, the fift Calife.  
THe death of Aly bred great dissension among the Arabians for the succession, for that some would have Acem, son to Aly, succeed his father: others would have Mawia, the son of Safion, son to Harb, of the race of Ben Humya; yet after much dispute, they did choose Acem, Calife, who enjoyed it but six months.   

¶ Mawia, the sixt Calife.  
Mawia came in the end to be Calife, after the death of his competitor, in the year of Grace 662, and of the Egyra 41, the which he enjoyed twenty years, during the which, he did not any thing touching Persia worthy of memory. During the time of his contention with his predecessor (for he had been well served and assisted by a great and famous Captain called Abdalazyad, to whom for recompense Mawia gave the city of Basora, which is near unto the rivers of Tigris & Euphrates, about the place where they join together, and so fall into the Persian gulf. Mawia died in the year of our Redemption 682, and of the Egyra 61.   

¶ Yhezid, the seventh Calife.  
YHezid, son to Mawia, succeeded his father in the Califat and signory of Persia, whereof he had no sooner taken possession, but Ocem, son to Aly, nephew to Mahomet, and brother to Acem, made war against him, and gave him battle in the plains of Kalbelah, where there is at this day a town called Mechet Ocem, built in this desert for the devotion of his sepulchre. Upon the death of Ocem, an Arabian Captain called Abdalazuber took arms against Yhezid, upon colour to revenge the death of Ocem, and made cruel wars against him for the space of three years that he governed, after whose death he entered into all the provinces of his empire, spoiling Arabia, Persia, Aderbajon, Karason, and others: then falling upon Egypt, he took his way by Mecque a city of Arabia, where there is one of the most famous ports of the read sea. Yhezid died in the year of Grace 685, and of the Egyra 64.   

¶ Mawia, the second of that name, and the eight Calife.  
Mawia the second, nephew to the first Mawia, and son to the deceased Yhezid, was installed in his father's throne presently after his death, but his great cowardice and insufficiency were the cause that he was presently deprived, having reigned but one and forty days: which deposition bred a great confusion in the whole Estate of Persia, every one of the greatest noblemen aspiring to the principality: but in the end, the party of Maruan, son to Akam Ebenhumya, a kinsman to the Calife who formerly had been deposed, prevailed against the rest, by the support and favour of Abdalaz●ad, to whom (as we have formerly ●ayd) Mawia the first had given the city of Basora.   

¶ Maruan, the ninth Calife.  
MAruan, kinsman to Mawia, and of the same race, came to be Calife at the age of eighty years, where he was not received so peaceably, but he was forced to raise a great army to make head against the Arabians of Mecque, who would not acknowledge him for their Lord, seeking to establish the descendants of Aly in the empire: for they held them that were not of his race, for tyrants. To this end they were gathered together from all parts, having chosen a commander over them, called Soleymon Ben Moncaeb, and came against Cufa, which was then a famous city in Arabia, and the chief of the Califs empire, but at this day it is wholly ruined: It was destroyed by them who committed a great slaughter of all that were of the race of Ben Humya, of the which Maruan was, who being advertised of his enemies march and design, went to the town of Orfa in Mesopotamia to encounter them, it is called by another name Raha, and was in old time the town of Vr, whereas the Chaldeans would have burnt the Patriarch Abraham, for that he did worship the true God, they being Idolaters. In this place Maruan gave his enemy's battle, where he was victor, having slain Soleymon their General.  
Ater this great victory, Maruan returned home triumphing, but it cost him dear, for his wife (who was allied to Soleyman) desiring to revenge his death, and the rest of her kinsfolks and friends, which had been slain in the battle, strangled him in the night as he slept. Thus he died, being eighty one years old, in the year of Grace 686, and of the Egyra 65, having reigned one year.   

¶ Abdelmalek, the tenth Calife.  
THe victory obtained by Maruan, gave an easy entry to his son Abdelmalek to the royal throne, where he lived not long in quiet, for a Captain of the Chiahis, which hold the party of Aly, called Moktar Eben Ebiabe● Zakafy, accompanied by another called Ebrahem Achtar, drew together great troops of soldiers, and came and spoiled the countries of Aderbajon, Diarbek, Awas, and other provinces of Persia and Mesopotamia, making cruel wars where they passed, putting all to the sword that were of the adverse party. Against these, Abdelmalek levied an army of seventy thousand men, and went first against Abdalaziad, whom he defeated in battle, and also slew, having been Lord of Basora one and forty years: then he gave the government of jazirey, which is Mesopotamia, to Abraham Malek, and he made Mazaeb Benzober, brother to Abdela Zober, governor of Basora: After which, he made war against Moktar, whom he defeated, and slew in an encounter. Not long after, the Calife Abdelmalek levied another mighty army against Masaebzober, whom he vanquished, recovering the lands which he had held in Persia. From thence he went to Damaz, where he sent Os●asgè, or Asiasgè, against Abdalazobar, who had revolted, and fortified himself in Mecque, who was also vanquished and slain, like to the other rebels: after whose death Abd●lmalek enjoyed his Estates in peace, giving to Osiasgè, in recompense of his services, the government of Ayerakhen, and of Karason. After this, Abdelmalek did build a great and populous city called Vuacet, that is to say, midst, for that it is situated betwixt two rivers, and in the midst of Mesopotamia, whereof there remains nothing but the ruins. Abdelmalek, having reigned one and twenty years, and one month, died in the year of our Redemption 706, and of the Egyra 86, leaving four sons, O●lid, Soleym●n, Yhezid, and Ochon.   

¶ Oelid, the eleventh Calife.  
AFter the death of Abdelmalek, Oelid succeeded to the crown. He exceeded all his predecessors in power and wealth, extending his empire by the means of Captains, among the which one called Koteybah Eben Moselem, conquered Karason as far as Turquestan, with all the country of Maurenahar and Koarrazm. On the other side, Moseleima Ben Abdel Malek entered the territories of the Graecian empire with a mighty army towards Constantinople, conquering many places, and binding the Emperor to pay him a certain tribute. If Oelid made himselve fearful, and in a manner invincible by his great deeds of arms, he took no less content to make public buildings in many places, among the which the most famous was the Mosque at Damaz, the which he caused to be built with admirable art and architecture, besides the sumptuousness.  
About that time, Osiasgè died in Karason, whom Oelid had sent to govern that country, being but five and forty years old, who (they say) was so cruel, as in that country he put to death above a hundred thousand persons, during the time of his government, besides an infinite number of others which had been slain during the wars. He left thirty thousand slaves captives of divers nations, which is an argument of his great power. At the end of the same year, which was in the year of our Redemption 715, and of the Egyra 95, Oelid died, being also five and forty years old, having reigned nine years, and eight months.   

¶ Soleyman, the twelfth Calife.  
SOleyman, son to Abdelmalek, and brother to Oelid, succeeded him. As Persia was not yet wholly reduced under the Califs obedience, so there were still some innovations and subjects of war, sometimes in one province, sometimes in another. Among others, there were two that were not yet subdued, Geryon, and Tarbestan, against the which he sent Vezid Eben Mahalep, a brave Captain, with a sufficient army to conquer them, who made them subject in the time of Soleyman, by the council of jafar Barmaki his Vuazir, where he made an order for the value of coins: which unto that time had been very confused, to the prejudice of the people; and soon after, he died at Damas', of a pain which he had in his side, having reigned two years and a half.   

¶ Homar, the thirteenth Calife.  
TO Soleyman succeeded Hamar or Homar, son to Abdala Aziz, the son of Marwan, and elder brother to the deceased Calife: some say, he came unto it voluntarily; others say, by force, notwithstanding the opposition of his other brethren. Some also affirm, that Soleyman, before his death, seated him in the empire: but by what means soever it were, it is most certain he succeeded him. This Moor was verle jealous and superstitious of his sect. It was then in the year of Grace 718, and the 98 of the Egyra, whenas the descendants of Abas, uncle to Mahomet, did rise against Homar, and made war against him, pretending that the Califat did by right belong unto them, especially one Aly Eben Abas, who sent many embassages to divers princes, persuading them to shake off Homars yoke, and to acknowledge him, in regard of his just title, which gave him the empire. But during these treaties, Ochon (son to Abdelmalek, and brother to Soleyman) poisoned Homar, so as he died, being forty years old, having reigned two years, and five months. This happened in the year of our redemption 720, and of the Egyra 101.   

¶ Yezid, the second of that name, the fourteenth Calife.  
THe death of Homar gave the empire to Yezid the third, son to Abdel Malek. In the beginning of his reign, one Aben Mocelem Karasony revolted by the persuasion of Aly Ben Abas, and they two made war against Yezid for the space of two years, at the end whereof, this Calife died, having done nothing worthy of memory, in the year of Grace 724, and of the Egyra 105, having reigned four years, and eight months.   

¶ Ochon, the second of that name, and the fifteenth Calife.  
OChon, he who had poisoned Homar, being brother to the deceased Yezid, came in his rank to be Calife, during whose time there were some combustions in Persia, in the which Nacer Sayar, and Yucef Eben Homar el Sacafy, two captains of great reputation, did him notable services: He recompensed them with good governments, giving to Sayar the countries of Karason; and to Yucef Eben Homar, those of Hyeraken. The rest of this Califs reign, being nineteen years and eight months, Persia lived in peace until his death, which happened in the year of Gra●e 743, and of the Egyra 124.   

Oelid, the second of that name, and the sixteeneth Calife.  
AFter the death of Ocem, Oelid the son of Yezid was chosen Calife. He had great wars against them of the family of Abas, among the which Abdalah Ben Abas, one of the chief pretendants was slain, by whose death he thought he should be much fortified in his Empire: and the better to assure himself, he caused two sons of the deceased Abdala to be acknowledged his successors in his government, thinking by this means to pacify them of that family, one of the which was called Ehrahem el Safa: But all his foresight prevailed little, for he was so cruel, and of so bad a disposition as he purchased the general hatred of all his subjects, and especially of the soldiers, who slew him, having enjoyed his Empire but fourteen months.   

Yezid, the third of that name and the seventeenth Calife.  
YEzid the son of Oelid, commonly called Yezid Nekhes (for that he had taken away what his ancestors had given) succeeded to the realm at the age of forty years▪ the which he enjoyed but six months, at the end whereof he died in Damas.   

Ebrahem, the eighteenth Calife.  
EBrahem succeeded his brother Yezid, who having held the Sceptre but two months the greatest of his subjects seeing his little industry carried themselves insolently towards him, and among others, one called Marwan, who was of the same family, revolted against him, took him, and put him in prison, where he detained him three months, at the end whereof he put him death.   

Marwan, second of that name, and the nineteenth Calife.  
Marwan having seized violently upon the realm, the affairs were in great confusion, the Moors disagreeing among themselves. The province of Karason was then governed by Nacer Sayer, who taking arms against Malab, who had the government of the realm of Kermon: this war was very bloody, and cruel. Moreover in Marwo, they of the family of Abas fell to arms, against whom they of Karason and Kermon joined themselves to resist their fury, and coming to battle, they of Abas faction vanquished them, and slew above a hundred thousand men of the troops of Kermon, especially of the family of Ben Humia. As for them of Karason, such as remained at this conflict fled to Sawa. They had taken one Abu Mocelem for their captain, who upon colour of this defeat, and not content with his charge, aspiring to greater matters, sent Katabey Eben Echabib with a great army to seize upon the country of Hierak, as he did, from whence he went to a place called Cufa in Arabia, where he met with Marwan, who came from Vuacet to encounter him; the which they did at Night, near unto the river of Euphrates, where without any delay they joined battle, in which encounter the soldiers of Marwans army charged their enemies with such fury, as they forced them to retire to the river to save themselves by swymming in the which Katabey was drowned without the privity of his soldiers, who taking courage, thinking their General had been among them, returned to the charge with such resolution, as they defeated Marwans army. This happened about the break of day, whenas the victors finding their General to be wanting, they presently made choice of Acem his son to command over them, who without any delay pursued his enemies, which fled to Kufa, and finding Safa in their way, who was of the family of Abas, one of the two whom Oelid had caused to be acknowledged for Prince, as hath been said, they declared him Calife against his will; yet seeing himself to have the command in his hands, he sent three of his uncles, Safa, Abdula, and Abdsamet, with great forces against the son of Marwan, who having gathered all his troops together came to encounter them again near to the river of Euphrates, where he gave them battle, in the which he was vanquished, and forced to fly to Mecera or Cairo in Egypt, where he was taken, and put to death in the y●are of our Salvation 751, and of the Egyra 132 having reigned five years, with whom there died above fourscore persons of the family of Ben Humia: They also did break open the sepulchers of such as were already dead, and burned their bones, not pardoning any of that line, except one called by the name of Hamarben Abdala Azis, to whom for his wonderful great bounty, all his enemies by a general consent gave him life and liberty, such force hath virtue, even among mortal enemies. Thus the Empire of them of the family of Ben Humia ended in the son of Marwaen, to pass unto that of Ben Abas, who held the Empire long.     

¶ OF THE KINGS OF PERSIA OF THE LINE OF BEN ABAS.  

Safa, the twentieth Calife.  
Saf● the son of Abdala, the son of Aly, the son of Abdula, the son of Abas, being thus rid of his enemy, settled himself in the realm, where seeing himself peaceable, and without competitor, he sent his two uncles, the one called Abdula, to govern Surya, Egypt, and Africa, which were under his obedience; and the other called Daud, that is to say David, he sent to Medina, and to Mecque. He sent Safa to Vuacet to his brother Abuiafar to pacify those countries which were all in combustion: From thence he caused him to go to Karason, one of the most famous Provinces of Persia, for the greatness and wealth, the chief city whereof is called Mechad, whereas Ishmael Sophi, and his successors are interred. This city is fortified with three hundred towers, every one being a Musket shot distant from the other. The country is very fertile, and the people white and warlike, observing the Persian customs, betwixt this province of Karason, and that of Turquestan and Vzbek runs that famous river of jehun: & that which lies beyond those countries is called by the Persians Maurenahar, that is to say, beyond the river which is towards the North. This shall serve for the better understanding of things when we shall speak of any of these provinces: For as it hath been said, this country of Karason had been userped by Abusalem, who seeing Abuiafar the Califs brother to come against him, not only yielded him obedience, but did also put himself into his hands, serving and assisting him with much fidelity, the which is the more remarkable both in regard of those times, and the humour of that nation, which was naturally treacherous and inconstant. Safa had for Vuazir one ●alled Abuzalemah a man of great sufficiency, whom he affected much for his good services: yet having discovered that he treated with certain persons, and conspired against his life, he put him to death, and gave the charge to Kaleb Barmaqui, who carried himself very discreetly: In the end Safa having reigned four years and nine months, he died, in the year of Grade 755, and of the Egyra 136.   

Abuiasar the one and twentieth Calif.  
ABuiafar brother to the deceased Calife was no sooner come unto the crown, but he had advertisement that Abusalem governor of Karason, (who as we have said had used such respect unto him, whenas during his brother's life he had been to visit his povince) meant to revolt; but this Prince found means to draw him into his presence, where he caused him to be presently slain, by whose death the affairs of Persia were more peaceable. But it was not so in Arabia, whereas they of Mekay Basora had revolted, against whom he sent his captains with sufficient forces to draw them to obedience, as they did, yet not without the loss of much blood. In the year of Grace 763; and of the Egyra 1●5. Abuiafar at the end of this war meant to visit his realm, and parting from Cufa, he crossed through Mesopotamia, and coming to the banks of the river of Tigris, he found the situation, bounty of the soil, and commodity of the place so pleasing unto him, for the visiting of his provinces, as he built a great city, the which by reason of many pleasant and delightful gardens which are in that country, the people called Bagadad of Baga a Persian word, which signifies a garden, then having reigned three and twenty years, he died upon the way to Mecque, in the desert of Byrmaymum, that is to say, the Pits of Maymum, so called of his name that caused them to be digged, in the year of our Lord God 777, and of the Egyra 159.   

Mahady Bila, the two and twentieth Calife.  
A Buiafar after his death left one son behind him called Mahady Bila, who came unto the Califat, and governed the Empire four year peaceably, without any great alteration, at the end whereof a Captain of his called by the name Akemben Ocem (who aforetime had been Secretary unto Abusalem, governor of Karason, whom Abuiafar had put to death) revolted against his Prince, making those provinces partakers of his rebellion. This man had but one eye, and was of a terrible aspect who not only sought to be acknowledged for king, but he would be worshipped as a God: And to the end they should bear the like sepect unto him, he covered his face with a vail, saying, that men were unwortie to see his face. And as such monsters never want followers, in regard of the liberties and infolencies which they allow them, many subjecteth themselves to this impious and wicked man, either for fear or ignorance, the people being all naturally inclined to insolences: so as a great number of provinces received him for king.  
Mahady the Calife being advertised of all these practices, sent a mighty army against him, whereof the gave the charge to one called Monsaeb, who marching with all possible speed, came into Karason, the which the kinsmen and nearest partisans of Akem understanding, seeing their forces too weak to resist so great a power, they poisoned him to save their own lives, thinking by his death to draw somd better commodities from the Persian Captain, giving it out, that he was ascended up to heaven: But Monsaeb having subdued all those countries, seeing that he could not get his enemy neither daed nor alive, took severe punishment of all his kinsfolks and followers, causing as many to be burnt as he could get, whereof the number was not small. All this happened in the year of Grace 786, and of the Egyra 169, in which year Mahady Bila died; being three and forty years old, having been Calife ten years and one month.   

Elady Bila Musa, the three and twentieth Calife.  
TO Mahady succeeded Elida Baly Musa, but his time was short, to the great discontentement of all his subjects, for that he was a very affable Prince, and of a good disposition: but neither his cheerful humour, nor his pleasant disposition could warrant him from death, having reigned but one year and three months, in the year of Grace 787, and of the Egyra 170.   

Arachid Bila Harun, the four and twentieth Calife.  
ARachid, second son to Mahady, by his brother's death succeeded to the Empire: He had for Vuazir Hyahya Kaled Bermaky, a very wise man in matterts of government. This Prince in the year of Grace eight hundred and four, and of the Egyra one hundred eighty seven, sent to massacre the Berameques, who were of a very noble family, and his Vuazirs being jealous that they would attempt something against him; three years after, the Grecians made war against him; but sending an army against them, he forced the Emperor to seek a peace, and to buy it with a great sum of money. This war being ended, he had an other from Maurenahar, whereas one called Rash Eben Nacer of Samarkand had titled himself King, against whom Arachid would go in person: But death surprised him upon the way, depriving him of life at Thus, the chief town of a province of that name, having held the Empire three and twenty years, this happened in the year of our Redemption eight hundred and ten, and of the Egyra one hundred ninety three. This Prince had four sons, that is to say, Maimed Hammi, to whom he gave all that he held in Alep, and thereabouts, towards the West: Mahamun, to whom he gave Persia, and Karason, with all the lands depending: and to the third called Kacem, he gave the government of the provinces of Aderbajon and Dyarbek: as for the fourth called Matacon, for that he loved him not, he left him no portion, yet in the end his was not the lest.   

Mahamed Amin, the fine and twentieth Calife.  
ARachid Harun had appointed Mahamed Amin to be his successor in the Califat, wherein being installed he was very much discontented in mind to see his Empire so divided, and his part so small; so as with this conceit the first thing he did was to study by what means he might dispossess some one of them; whereupon he levied a mighty army, commanding the leaders thereof to enter into Persia. Mahamun to whom, as we have said the father had given that country, not holding himself safe, his brother Amin being in arms, stood upon his guard, & seeing the storm ready to fall upon him, he levied a mighty army, whereof he gave the charge to a certain Vuazir of his called by the name of Taher Ben Ocem, who went presently to charge the enemies, to whom he gave battle and vanquished them, pursuing them unto Bagader, where he entered by force, and took the Calife Mahamed Amin, whom he carried away with him and slew upon the way, having held the Empire four years and seven months, in the year of Grace 814, and of the Egyra 198.   

Mahamun Ben Arun, the six and twentieth Calife.  
MAhamun Ben Arun brother to the deceased, whom the Vuazir Taher had put to death, succeeded in the Califat. He made Fazele Ben Saleh his chief Vuazir, a wise man, & of great understanding in matters of government: And as the affairs of his Empire were then quiet, he spent much to have all the books of Philosophy, the Mathematics, Astrology, and Physic, which he could recover, to be translated out of the Graecian, Syrian, and Arabian tongues: But this peace lasted not long in Persia; for one called Babek Coramdin revolted in Aderbajon, against whom he sent certain troops: but the war continued some time; yet in the end they agreed in the year of Grace 821, and of the Egyra 205. In this year Mahamun sent Taher Zulemin to govern the country of Karason, but he soon repent him; for he understood that he aspired to greater matters than the government, and practised certain innovations: For which cause he sent Hamed Abichaled to frustrate his enterprises; but all was presently pacified, by the death of Taber. Notwithstanding all the practices of the deceased, yet the Calife gave the government to a son of his called Talahe Ben Taher: But the deceased Taher had an other son called Abdula, whom the father had sent to make war against the Vsbeques, for that they would not receive his sect, who returning victorious, found his father dead, and his brother in possession of the government. This was troublsome unto him; but his brother with the Califs consent, took him for companion in the government, and so all things were in quiet, and continued so the rest of Mahamuns' life, who died in the year of Grace 826, and of the Egyra 210 having reigned twelve years, and seven months.   

Abu Ezach Matacon, the seven and twentieth Calife.  
AFter the death of these two, in the end he came unto the Empire whom the father had so much contemned, as he left him not any portion in his Inheritance: For he was son to Harun, and brother to the deceased. At his coming to the crown he built a town within three miles of Bagadet towards the North, upon the river of Tigris, calling it Samarrah, the which did flourish for a time, but it hath since so declined, as there is nothing at this day remaining but ruins. At the death of Mahamun, Babec Coram, who had the government of Aderbajon, had twice revolted: but at the last Matacon sent so great an army against him, as he was defeated and taken prisoner, whose hands and feet this Prince caused to be cut off, and then to be hanged. Yet there were some combustions in the country of Karason, by reason of the Province of Sistom, which is in base Karason and Kermon towards the Persian gulf, and is joining of the one side, to Persia, to the government whereof Sistom is subject, & on the other side to the realm of Macron near unto the country of India: For at that time there did rise a man in this province of Sistom, who being accompanied by all such as would follow him, seized upon the better part thereof: and for that it depended upon the jurisdiction of Karason, Talahe, who commanded there at that time, armed speedily and went to encounter Amzah, (for so the rebel was called who continued his conquest) fought with him, and won the victory; from whence he returned to Karason, where he fell sick presently after, and died, in the year of our Redemption 829, and of the Egyra 213, leaving in his place Aly Ben Talahe his son, against whom the neighbour Princes made a long and tedious war, until that in the end Aly was slain in an encounter; yet the war ended not, but seemed rather to be more and more inflamed by his death. During all these broils in Karason, Matacon made war against the Emperor of Greece, of whom he won many victories, after which he died being forty eight years old, in the year of our Salvation 833, and of the Egyra 217 having reigned eight years. After his death he left behind him eight sons, and eight daughters, with eight thousand slaves: He had taken eight cities, the chief of eight realms, whereof he had put to death eight kings: they also found eight millions of gold in his coffers, all which numbers of eight are very remarkable, he was a great warrior, yet affable, bountiful, and beloved of all men, especially of the soldiers.   

Vuacek, the eight and twentieth Calife.  
Wacek succeeded his father Matacon, of which Calife there is nothing found memorable. This only past in Karason: After the death of Aly Ben Talabe his uncle, Abdula Ben Taher succeeded him in the government of the realm of Karason, in whose time (not withstanding that the soil of this country is very fertile, and yields abundantly) there happened a terrible, and general famine, by reason of a great and mighty drought, which continued in a manner for the space of three years, whereby the whole country was almost unpeopled: But afterwards there fell great store of rain which made the land as fertile as before, so as every man returned again to his own house. In this reunion the Persians and Moors gathered together to make war against the Gentiles, which were yet in that country, and of the same nation; yet they do vulgarly call them Mayusi, and they do worship the Fire, whereof there are great numbers at this day in Persia: at which time they made a great and terrible massacre of them, and them Abdula Taher died in Karason, to whom succeeded Tahen Ben Abdula his son, being confirmed by the Calife Vuacek, who died two years after, having reigned five years and nine months, in the year of Grace 838, and of the Egyra 222 leaving jafar his brother to succeed him.   

Almoto Vuakel Bila jafar, the nine and twentieth Calife.  
ALmoto-Vuakel Bila jafar succeeded his brother Vuacek, during whose reign the descendants of Aly did rise, for that he sought all means to hinder their pilgrimages to his Sepulchre, which is in Mecha Ocem, in the deserts of Kilbelah, as hath been said, and the better to effect it, he caused the banks of Euphrates to be broken in many places, that drowning the fields round about, he might with little trouble stop their passage by the great plain of this desert: In the time of this Calife Taher Ben Abdula died in Karason, leaving his government to his son Mahamet, who gave unto an uncle of his being his father's brother, the lands of Tabarstan to live on, the which he enjoyed but little, as shall be said, as for the Calife Vuakel, he had one son called Montacer, so desirous to reign, as his ambition made him so impious and unnatural, as he caused his father to be slain by his slaves, having reigned twelve years, in the year of Grace 850 and of the Egira 234.   

Montacer Bila the thirtieth Calife.  
THis execrable Parricide came thus unto the empire; but his joy was short, for at the end of six months a great sickness deprived him both of life and that which he had so much desired.   

Abul Abas Hamed, the one and thirtieth Calife.  
ABul Abas Hamed son to Mahamed the son of Matacon, as nearest kinsman to the deceased, succeeded himin the Califat: But having commanded five years, and nine months with small satisfaction to his subjects, his soldiers took him, and cast him into a strait prison, where they suffered him to famish. At that time the affairs of Persia were in some confusion, for that in the province of Taberstan, which as we have said, had been given by Taher to his uncle Soleymon, there did rise one called Acem Ben Zeyd Alanuy, that is to say, sent of God, who seized upon the country of Taberstan, forcing Soleymon to fly to Bagadet, where he was very courteously entertained by the Calife which then reigned called Mostahhin, who did him much honour. In the mean time Acem Ben Zeyd having placed good garrisons throughout all the provinces which he had conquered, entered into Persia, where he committed great spoils, taking Deylon, Gueylon, Habar, Zenion, and Casuin: The which happened in the year 856, and of the Egira 240.   

Mostahhin, the two and thirtieth Calife.  
THe soldiers having thus famished their king, there was great controversy among the Moors for the creation of an other, but in the end they agreed all in the Election of Mostahhin kinsman of the deceased Calife, whom they installed in their Royal Throne, the which he enjoyed very little, for in the end of sixteen months, falling sick, he died, in the year of Grace 858, and of the Egira 242.   

Almatez Bila, the three and thirtieth Calife.  
ALmatez Bila being come unto the Empire, he presently sent a very great army against Acem Ben Zeyd, under the command of a captain called Mesa Ben Buka, who entering into Persia fought with his enemies and had the victory, recovering by this means the royal city of Charear, Casuin, Habar, and Zenion, forcing Dahe Alawy brother to Acem Ben Zeyd, to retire to Taberstan, where he died: So as Acem was constrained to sand his other brother in his place, called Mahamed Eben Zeyd. Matters passing after this sort in Persia, the Califs soldiers being all discontented and weary of him, caused him to die after this manner: They came into a Stove whereas he was bathing himself, and forced him to drink a pot full of cold water, whereof he died suddenly, having reigned three years and a half, in the year of Grace 865, and of the Egira 246.   

Motady Bila, the four and thirtieth Calife.  
AFter the death of Almatez they did choose Motady Bila for Calife, but he enjoyed his Empire eleven months only, at the end whereof the soldiers slew him, in the year of our Redemption 863, and of the Egira 247.   

Almat Hamed Bila, the five and thirtieth Calife.  
ALmat Hamed Bila Hamed Eben Emoto Vuakel was made Calife after the death of Motady, who to assure himself of his kinsfolks and friends, whom he feared more than any other, found means to give them divers charges, and to sand them by the country of Hyaman and Medina into Arabia. And for that throughout the whole history, there is often mention made of Medina, it shall be fit to advertise that this word is a common name, which signifies some people: Wherefore they have been accustomed to add an other word unto it, as in Spain, they say, Medina Celi, Medina Sidonia, or Medina deal Campo, which are words that come from the Moors. In like manner by excellency, the Persians, and Arabians call the town of the Sepulchre of their false Prophet Mahomet, Medina el Naby: that is to say, people of the Prophet: And when as in pilgrimage to his Sepulchre, although they say, they go to Mecque, yet it is to Medina el Naby, for these towns are not one, Medina being within the land, and four days distant from Mecque or Mokah, which is a maritime town standing upon the read sea, whether the Moors vessels do commonly come, which sail out at that sea into the East: But for that they which come from the Eastern parts disimbarke at Mecque, they say they come from Mecque, as they also do which come from the Western parts, for that having accomplished their vows, and pilgrimages at Medina, they pass to Mecque to buy divers commodities which come thither from the East: and for that this town stands upon the shore of the read sea, as hath been said, and is more frequented than any of that coast, the Portugalls call it the straight of Mecque, and after this manner you may understand Medina or Mecque, which is in that sea, and not upon the Persian Gulf, as some would maintain.  
Returning now to the affairs of Persia, which were at that time in great confusion, it happened that a new Captain called Yacub Leys revolted in the country of Siston, who in the beginning had not many of his party, but fortune so favoured him as with his small troops he took the chief town of the province, and of the same name, and from thence entered into the country of Karason with very fortunate success, marching as far as Harat in the country of Maurenahar, whereas Mahamed Ben Taher had planted a garson, with the which Yacub Leys did fight and won the town, the which gave him assurance to go and charge Mahamed Ben Taher, who was governor of Karason, but being advertised of his coming, he abandoned his company and fled to Nichabur. On the other side Acem Ben Zeid Alawy continued still his conquests, and seized upon the country of Geryon, by whom Mahamed was stopped in his passage; so as seeing himself without hope of remedy, gathering together what forces he could; he resolved to defend himself against Yacub Leys, and to fight with him, as he did, but he was vanquished: who leaving him a rich spoil, with the lands of Siston and Karason, and to Acem Ben Zeyd Alawy, those of Geryon, unto Rey Charear, he fled being accompanied by few men to Nichabur, whether he was pursued by Yacub Leys, who encountered with Abdula Saleh Vuazir to Taher, who talking together, Abdula demanded of him by what authority he made this war, for that if it were in the Califs name they should not make any resistance against him: But Yacub drawing his sword, answered: This is it that gives me power and authority. And when as Taher sought to draw him unto him upon good assurance, and that Yacub would not yield unto it, they fought again, in which battle Taher fell into the hands of Yacub, who put him to death, being the last of that name which held that government. He was of a more royal disposition & endued with greater virtues th●n all his ancestors: But for that the deeds of Leys were worthy of admiration, in whose life there are seen many notable encounters and accidents, it may happilly seem sitting to relate in more fully, and at length, for that the knowledge thereof avails much for the history.  
In the province of Siston did livean officer of the kings, who was as we would say among us a maker of kettles, called Leys, who had thee sons Yacub, Hamar, and Aly among the which Yacub learned his father's art, and being a young stripling, who went up and down the country to earn some small matter to feed his father and himself, he still reserved something to spend with his companions and friends, either in making good cheer, or in his sports, wasting what he could get by any means possible, after this manner, which kind of life he continued until he came unto the age of discretion, and after that time he left off his childish sports, and with the rest of his companions fell to actions of moment: So as Yacub having bound them unto him by his liberality, which hath a great power to move men, he found them fully resolved to follow him, whom he armed after the best manner that he could, and began to keep the high ways using still his natural liberality to these his companions, by whom he was called Captain: having withal compassion of the miserable which fell into his hands, taking from them only a part of what they dad. At that time Taher Ben Abdula, of whom we have formerly spoken, was governor in Karason, to whom they repaired that had been thus rob, telling him that one called Salekh Ben Asar had drawn into his company Yacub Leys, and that he entertained him, and given him the title of Captain; That being entered into the country of Sistom, they had taken the town and spoiled it. This made Taher Ben Abdula sand his forces against them, who made them to abandon Sistom. Soon after Taher Abdula died, leaving his son Mahamed Ben Taher in his place, who being entered into the possession of his government, an other Captain called Dram Ben Nacer drawing Leys unto his party, made an other incursion into the same province, and seized thereon: But Dram desiring to pursue his enterprise, left the government of Sistom to Leys. Taher being advertised of all these intelligences, forced Dram Ben Nacer to come to battle, in which he took him, and sent him prisoner to Bagader, whereas the Calife caused him to be put into close prison, and kept him there long.  
In the mean time Yacub Leys losing no occasion, seeing himself freed from the bond which he had to Dram, made himself lord of Sistom, governing himself in such sort as the love of his followers did daily increase: so as he fortified the town, and put good garrisons therein, and in all parts of the province for the defence thereof; and then he began to make incursions into the country of Karason, in the year of our Redemption 763, and of the Egyra 253 with a great army, subjecting all where he passed under his power. After which he took Herat and Fuchangh, and coming to Kerman he took it, expelling the garrisons of the province, which had been placed there by the governor of Sci●as, which town he besieged, the which not able to defend itself against his forces, yielded, whereas the soldiers made a great spoil, of all which he reserved nothing to himself but twenty Faulkons which did belong unto the Lord of Sciras, whereoften were white, and ten of divers colours, and some four hundred and fifty weight of pure musk, which things he sent unto the Calife of Bagadet, offering him his service, with all that he held, having then disposed of all things which he thought fit and necessary, he returned to Sistom. But in the year of our Salvation 872, and of the Egyra 257 hearing that there were some alterations in Sciras he posted thither, to settle all things in good order. The Calife was not well pleased with these proceed of Yacub Leys: So as, notwithstanding all the offers which he had made, he sent him word that he should presently departed out of Sciras, and all the lands of Persia, and that he should not presume to enter into them, contenting himself with that which he had tyranously usurped. Leys finding himself unable to resist so great a power as the Califs, made no other answer, but obeyed, and left Persia, going from thence to Balte in Maurenahar, from whence he marched to Kabul, a country which lies betwixt Karas●n and India, the which he subdued; then he took his way by Herat, and came to Nichabur, where he fought with Mahamed Ben Taher, and then going to Karason, he passed by Taberstam, and stayed at Sary, whereas Acem Ben Zey Alawy of (whom mention hath been made) came to encounter Leys with a goodly army, and fought with him, but he was vanquished, and forced to fly to Delmon, Delymon, or Delos, for they call this town by all these names, and it is situated in the province of Gueylon. Leys having pulled this thorn out of his foot, pursued his enemy to Amal: Winter was then well advanced, and those countries are commonly exceeding cold. Moreover there fell great store of snow, and terrible tempests, which forced him at that time to give over his design, with the loss of forty thousand men which perished by the tediousness of the weather.  
The Calife hearing of this disaster, and desirous to embrace the best occasion he could to diminish the forces of Leys, sent with all speed into those countries that were subject to Leys, persuading them that governed for him to revolt, and to obey him no more: But the contrary succeeded to that which the Calife pretended, for that Mahamed Ben Vuacel Tamimy a Captain of the Arabians (whereof there were at that time good numbers in Persia) made an enterprise against the garrisons which the Calife had at that time in cities and forts, whereof he slew some, and made the rest revolt: in the mean time one called Muca Ben Bugan, Lord of Bacora, Hawas, and Hiamema, countries of Arabia, and near unto Persia, being advertised of these cumbustions, levied a goodly army, and gave the command thereof to Abderramon Ben Mosseh who marched presently againg Maha Ben Vuasel Tamimy, with whom he joined battle, but he was vanquished by him and taken. In the mean time Leys stepped not, but during these revolts stood upon his guard, being ready to do some great exploit when he should find any good opportunity, who taking his time entered into Persia so fitly, as he made himself sovereign, putting all them to death that might have any pre●ence, then finding himself strong enough to pass on further, he marched towards Bagader.  
The Calife was presently advertised of the design of Leys to whom he did writ, with an intent to divert him, entreating him not to proceed any farther, and granting him freely whatsoever he held: to whom he made answer, that a desire to see him, made him come to Bagadet, that nothing should make him desist from his design. The Calife seeing this his resolution, levied an army in great haste, giving the charge thereof to a brother of his, who marched against Leys, with an intent to fight with him: but he had another design, for he dislodged in the night, and went towards Bagadet by unfrequented ways, leaving the Califs brother very much troubled, not knowing what course he should take to follow him. Yacub Leys advanced with all speed, fortifying his army in all places as he passed: He was come to the midst of his journey, when as he was surprised with the colic, the which put him to exceeding great pain: whereupon the Physicians being called together, they were of opinion to give him a clyster, the which he would not take, saying, that death would not be so troublesome unto him as his disease and sickensse was grievous and painful. Being in the extremity of his pain an embassage came unto him from the Calife, persuading him to desist from his intended journey; whereupon sitting up as well as he could, and taking in his right hand a naked sword, & in the left hand a kind of bread which the Persians called Gerda, or Apa, and garlic; he answered the Ambassadors: Tell the Calife your master, that if I die of this accident, death shall end our contentions, and if I live this Sword shall pacify all; but if I lose the game, without any further pretension of Kingdoms, I will content myself to live in some remote place, with this bread and garlic, and with this answer he dismissed them: But they were no sooner returned home to Bagadet but they had presently news that he was dead of that disease which we have formerly spoken of, in the year of our Redemption eight hundred eighty two, & of the Egyra two hundred sixty eight, having commanded eleven years in Persia: He was very valiant, wise, bountiful, affable, and a strict justicer; they did kill daily for the use of his kitchen twenty Sheep, five Oxen, and many Fowl, all which after his repast (the which was very sober) he caused to be given to the poor and such as had need. After his death, they found not any thing of value in his rent, but the arms which he used, a piece of Persian Tapestry, and a pillow whereon he rested; he left not any children, so as his brother succeeded him.  
Yacub Leys being dead, and his brother Hamer Ben Leys being heir to his conquests, he thought it best to be in good terms and friendship with the Calife: Whereupon, he presently sent unto him promising to yield him obedience, and entreating him to receive him into grace and favour, the which the Calife did so much esteem, as he not only confirmed him in the possession of Persia, Karason, and all the countries which his brother had conquered; but he also gave him the investiture of Hierak, the chief city whereof is Hisphaon, making him Chena of Bagadet, which is the sovereign magistrate of justice next unto the Calife, which charge he gave with the Califs permission to Abdula Ben Taher, and from thence he passed with his army to Casuin, and so to the city of Rey, leaving for governor at Scyras one called Mahamed Ben Leys which was his kinsman, who seeing the other absent declared himself king, but Hamer Ben Leys returned presently from his intended journey, against him, the which Mahamed understanding he fled, leaving behind him a very rich spoil, the which Hamer sent afterwards for a great present to the Calife; to whom many came with complaints of great insolences, and tyrrannies which Hamer Ben Leys had used, whereupon he made a public Edict, by the which he deprived him of the lands which he had given him, and gathered forces from all parts, he gave the charge thereof to Said Ben Mochaled who went against him with his forces and vanquished him. Hamer had one in his company called Dram, who had been a long time prisoner at Bagadet, who seeing this bad success fled from the camp: Hamer did the like with a small train, having afterwards recovered new forces, and gathered together the remainder of his defeated army, he made a new attempt to enter into Scyras; but Mousek brother to the Calife, being advertised of his intended design, put himself in great haste into the town, the which Hamer understanding, and altogether despairing to recover it, he returned to Kermon to visit the Lands of Siston, and from thence past to Karason. At this time the Calife Almat Hamed Bila died, having reigned three and twenty years, in the year of Grace 893, and of the Egyra 279.   

Matazed Bila Hamed, the six and thirtieth Calife●  
MAtazed Bila Hamed succeeded his father Almat Hamed in the Califat: He was wise and valiant, yet very sensual. Hamar Leys having (as hath been said) lost all hope to recover Scyras, passed into Karason, whereas one of the governors of that province called Rafeahy Ben Arsuma, having rebelled against the Calife, followed the party of Mahamed Ben Z●yd Alawy, against whom Hamer Ben Leys, with the permission of the Calife, caused his army to march, vanquished him, and took him prisoner, and having put him to death, he sent his head to the Calife, who did much esteem his service, for that Rafeahy had greatly troubled those provinces, so as to recompense Hamer, he made a new gift of Karason, Maurenahar, Parcy, Kermor, & Siston, commanding that his name should be written in their public Ensigns, to the end that his obedience and loyalty might be known to all men: This happened in the year of grace 898, and of the Egyra 284 In acknowledgement of all these favours, Hamer Ben Leys sent for a present unto the Calife, a great mass of coin, many vessels of gold and silver, store of amber, musk, ●yvet, with man rich robes of cloth of gold.  
The country of Maurenahar had been long in peace, and in a manner shaked off the Persian yoke, being at that time commanded by Ishmael Ben Hamed, against whom Hamer Ben Leys levied an army of soldiers, and marched against him, who attended him near to the river of Gehun, which divides the country of Maurenahar and Karason, where after many and variable encounters, Hamer was vanquished and taken by Ishmael, who as they say was assisted with money from the Calife, being glad to be rid of Hamer, yet he entreated him well, having swo●ne that he should maintain an inviolable peace and friendship betwixt them, and that he should never make war against him neither by himself nor any other; which done he carried him with him to Maurenahar, whereof he advertised the Calife, and of the whole success of the business, who did writ unto him to sand him to Bagader, the which Ishmael performed; being in the Califs power he caused him to be slain, having been king three and twenty years, he had but one eye, and was exc●eding choleric. Before this, Ishmael in the year of our Salvation eight hundred ninety four, and of the Egyra two hundred and eighty went out of Maurenahar into Turquestan, where having obtained many victories against the Turks, in the end he took the king of Turquestan in battle, with his father, wife, and ten thousand men: some writ that the spoil of this victory was so great, as every of Ismaells soldiers had for his share a thousand deniers of gold, all which did make about one thousand and five hundred ducats. Having obtained this victory he came unto Samarkand, and from thence he marched against Hamer Leys, with an army of threescore and ten thousand men, whom he vanquished as hath been said, and for this cause the Calife Matazed gave him the title of king of Maurenahar, Karason, Scyras, Siston, and Kermon.  
This being done, Ishmael understood that Mahamed Ben Zeyd Alawy spoiled the country of Taberstan, whereupon he did writ unto him to desist, and in the mean time prepared a mighty army, the which he sent against him under the command of Mahamed Ben Aren Somony, who vanquished him; so as he brought under the power of Ismall, the countries of Geryon and Taberstan, of which provinces he had the government, under the authority of Ishmael. This happened in the year our Redemption nine hundred and one, and of the Egyra two hundred eighty and seven. The Calife Matazed Bila dying within two years after having reigned nine years and nine months.   

Moktafy Bila, the seven and thirtieth Calif.  
MOktafy Bila son to Matazed succeeded his father, in whose time many companies of Arabians, spoiled the country of Arabia, robbing passengers, and hindering the pilgrimage to Mecca and into Persia. Taher Ben Hamed Ben Hamer Leys, who in his grandfathers place had been made king of of Siston, entered Persia at the same time with a mighty army, with an intent to make himself master thereof, having defeated the garrisons, and reduced all under his obedience: After which he passed to Awas, the governor of which province was called Abdula, who presently demanded succours from Ishmael, king of Maurenahar, who did writ to Taher Leys, entreating him to desist from his enterprise, whereunto either for love or fear he agreed, so as Ishmael would obtain from the Calife that he should enjoy the lands which he and his father had conquered, and that he should confirm him in the possession thereof, whereunto the Calife consented willingly for the love of Ishmael, and Taher having news of this donation returned to Scyras, the which happened in the year of Grace nine hundred and seven, and of the Egyra two hundred ninety and three in which year the Calife died, of weakness by reason of his excess, having reigned about four years.   

Moktader Bila, the eight and thirtieth Calife.  
MOktafy having left no children, they gave the place of Salife to his brother M●●tader, under whose reign Mahamed Ben Arun Somony, (who as hath been said had vanquished and slain Ben Zeyd Alawy, and having recovered the countries of Geryon and Taberstan, whereof Ishmael had given him the government, rebelled, and having levied an army by means of the intelligence which he had with the inhabitants of the town of Rey, he seized thereon, whereof Ishmael being advertised he went against him, but the other fled speedily, yet he pursued him to Casuin, Zenian, and Taberstan, which povinces he reduced under his obedience, yet he could not take Ben Arun; so as having placed necessary garrisons for the defence of the country, he passed the second time into Turquestan, conquering many new countries, and new realms, whereas he took an inestimable booty, with the which he returned to Maurenahar, in the year of our Redemption 909, and of the Egyra 295 leaving his son Hamed in the realm to whom the Calife confirmed his governments with many prerogatives: For the Califs being held as sovereign both of spiritual and temporal matters, they were not thought to hold their signiories and commands with any just title without their confirmation. In the mean time Taher enjoyed Scyras, and other lands which the Calife had granted unto him, who going a hunting in the country of Siston, Sanghery a slave to Leys the son of Aly his uncle, seized suddenly upon Scyras, and Taher coming to dispossess him, Sanghery gave him battle, & in the same encounter Taher was quite vanquished & taken prisoner, with a brother of his and sent to Bagadet, having reigned full six years, and to enjoy his conquest with more security he also took one of the sons of L●yss called Aly with his brother Madet, and sent them to Bagadet, the which happened in the year of our Salvation 914, and of the Egyra 300.  
In the mean time Hamer the son of Yacub, grandchild to L●yss, seeing the country of Siston revolted and all in combustion, invaded it with an army, and subdued it in nine months, putting to death many of the seditious, but he died soon after leaving in his place Kalef Ben Hamed his elder brother, who de●●●ing to go in pilgrimage to Mecca, left a kinsman of his called Taher Benocem for governor, but he seeing him absent revolted presently, and seized upon his country, so as the other returning from his pilgrimage he found all the gates shut against him, so as he was forced to go to Boka●a in Maurenahar to demand succours of Mansur, who gave him goodly forces, with the which he recovered his country of Siston, Taher being ●led.  
Kalef seeing himself thus restored to the quiet possession of his realm sent back the troops which Mansur had given him, the which Taher understanding he came again to Siston, and conquered it again the second time, so as Kalef was forced to have recourse again to Mansur, who gave him a new army, and as he approached near unto Siston he had news upon the way that Taher was dead, and that his son Oc●m had succeeded him who being advertised of the coming of Kalef into the province of Siston, he retired himself into a fort, whereas Kalef besieged him so straightly, as being deprived of all hope and reduced to extremity, he begged the favour of Mansur to obtain some grace of Kalef, who did writ unto him that for his respect he gave liberty to Ocem and his people, with means to retire themselves to Bokara, where he would give them lands to live on. All these realms were tributary to Mansur; but Kalef seeing himself in quiet possession of his own, forgetting his forepast miseries, and succours which he had drawn from Mansur, he made no great regard to pay the tribute that he aught him and had been demanded; whereupon Mansur levied a mighty a●mie whereof he gave the command to the said Ocem to match against Kalef, who not standing upon his guard was forced to retire himself into a fort, the which by nature and art was held impregnable, so as he besieged it seven years, but seeing him unable to force it, Mansur sent another captain called Aboaly Ben Seniur, who joined with Ocem all the forces he could draw together: The arrival of this captain made Kalef to leave his fort which was called Darek, the which he delivered to Mansurs army, who restored him afterwards to his realm: such was the unconstant and variable fortune of this Prince, to be often expelled and restored again: but the most sensible disgrace, was the revolt of a son of his called Tahar, who expelled him his realm; and seeing no means to re-enter, nor to satisfy the ingratitude of this child, he feigned himself to be sick, causing it to be published abroad that he was brought to the extremity, and that he desired to see his son before his death, and to discover certain treasures unto him, his fatherly love binding him to prefer him before any other, and not to rely upon his servants; this ill advised and covetous young man, being advertised of his father's will, and thinking to enjoy this great treasure, came unto Kalef; who at his arrival embraced him, and for his welcome, slew him with his own hands, and so re-entered into the possession of his realm, the which he lost afterwards twice, and recovered it again: and in the end, he died, leaving a son of his called Abu Afes.  
Hamed, the son of Ishmael, who by the death of his father was come into the possession of the realm with the consent of the Calif Moktader, visited his country, and coming into Samarkand, he took the Governor thereof, whose name was Ezach, being his uncle, and put him in prison, suspecting that he had an inclination to revolt: yet soon after, he restored him to his former liberty, and gave him withal the government of the province. Tabarstan had revolted twice, but he always had his revenge, and punished the rebels according to their demerit: He also took Siston, in the year of our Redemption 900, and of the Egyra 298: and in the year following, he gave the government of Nichabur to Mansur the eldest son of Ezach. In the year of our Salvation 914, and of the Egyra 301▪ being a hunting, news came unto him that the province of Tabarstan had revolted the third time: whereupon, retiring into his tent very much discontented, he was slain by his own slaves whilst he slept; and his body was interred in Bokara, having reigned six years and four months: he was a prince of great courage, and full of magnanimity, but wonderful choleric, and subject to his pleasure: He left one son not above the age of ten years, whose name was Nacere Benhamet, whom one called Hamet Benhamet Leys, Governor of Bokara, took upon his shoulders, and being followed by a great multitude, crying through the city, that it was the king, he caused him to be so acknowledged: but in the mean time, the young prince seeing himself carried after that manner, wept bitterly, demanding of them that were about him, if they would kill him as they had done his father: but every man assured him, and freed him from that fear.  
In the mean time, Ezach, uncle to the deceased king, remained at Samarkand, who hearing of his nephew's death, and the greenness of his sons years, le●yed a great army to seize upon that Estate: Nacere, whom otherwise they call Amir say, was advised to sand a captain against him, whose name was Hamuyhe, who defeated Ezach twice, and in the last he was forced to fly before him to Samarkand, where he had left for Governor, a son of his called by the name of Alyas or Elyas, who abandoned the city, and fled away: so as Ezach by this means being nearly pursued by Hamuyhe, he was forced to yield himself at his discretion, who sent him immediately to Bokara, whereas Nacere put him in prison, in which he died. This death was the cause that Mansur, his son, who was at that time Governor of Nichabur, took arms against Nacere, and joined with Ocem Ben Aly, one of Naceres Captains, who had revolted by reason of some discontents. Hamuyhe prepared to go against him, but upon the way he understood that Mansur was dead, yet Ocem Ben Aly continued the wa●re, the which was of no long continuance, for that in the first battle he was defeated, taken prisoner, and sent to Bokara. At the same time, Nacere had sent a Governor to Kara●on, called by name Hamet Ben Sal, who being revolted, and in arms with the whole province, levied troops, and seized upon Geryon and Mar●●o. Hamuyhe went also to fight with him, whom he vanquished and sent to Bokara, where he died in prison: This happened in the year of our Salvation 914, and of the Egyra 301, at what time the Calife Moktader died, having held the empire seven years.   

¶ jafar Ben Matazed, the nine and thirtieth Calife.  
AFter the death of Moktader, they gave the dignity of Calife to jafar Ben Metazed his brother, who enjoyed no greater peace than his predecessor had formerly done: for in the province of Tabarstan did rise one called Leylahe Ben Neaman, who committed some spoils in the neighbour provinces, with happy success. Nacere was forced to sand an army against him, and to give him battle, in the which Leylahe was vanquished, after which victory his soldiers seeing themselves unfortunate in arms, they began to watch the highways, and to rob the passengers: Whereupon, Naceres subjects gathered together, and cut them in pieces, taking from them what they had stolen: they also seized upon Leylahe, and cut off his head. At the same time there was another rebel in the town of Rey, against whom Nacere went and recovered the town, leaving therein a captain called Syntur, with a strong garrison, and then went to Maurenahar: This was in the year of our Redemption 926, and of the Egyra 313, whenas one called Azfar Ben Scyruyhe made a new combustion in Persia upon this occasion.  
A Persian called Abusuia being very poor, yet of a great and noble family, as one that was descended from the ancient kings of Persia, had three sons, the one was called Emaududualeh Aly, Acem, and Akmet: This man dreamt upon a time, that there came fire out of his privy parts that did inflame a great part of the country, then dividing itself into three parts, it continued so very long. Being then full of amazement, he went to impart his dream to an ginger, who told him that it did signify he should command great provinces, in the which his three sons should afterwards succeed him. At that time Makon Ben Kakt was lord of Tabarstan, into whose service Abusuia put himself, with his three sons, under the command of Azfar Ben Scyruyhe, and Mardawege Benzad, with Vuasmaguir his brother. It fell out in the end, that Azfar rebelled against Makon, making war against him for the space of a whole year together, at the end whereof Makon died. After whose death, Azfar seized upon Rostandade, Rey, Casuin, Habar, Zenion, Taromin, and Amedon; committing great spoils in all those parts, so as Nacera was forced to march against him with a great army, where, after many and variable encounters, they agreed, upon condition, that Azfar should enjoy a good part of that which he had conquered. During the absence of Nicera, there fell out some combustions within his country, but all things were presently pacified by his presence, yet there was still war in some one of these provinces during his reign.  
During these proceed in Persia, there did rise great troops in Arabia, who entered into Mecca Medina, the which they spoiled of great riches, which the superstitious devotions of the Moors had offered in that place, taking away a stone which was held by them all in great reverence, carrying it to Cufa, of which stone the Moors tell strange tales, among others, that Adam had brought it out of the earthly Paradise, whenas he was expelled, and that afterwards it came into the power of Ishmael, the first son of Abraham, and in succession of time was brought to Mecca or Medina. They say also, that by nature it is exceeding white, but if it be handled by sinners, it grows very black, so as it was like unto a touchstone for sins: but all this being ridiculous, we will return to the Calife jafor, who having reigned twenty years, died in the year of Grace 933, and of the Egyra 320, having been much respected by his soldiers during his reign.   

¶ Kaherbila Mahamet, the fortieth Calife.  
I Afer being dead, the soldiers gave the empire to his brother Kaherbila Mahamet Ben Mathazed; but they did not suffer him to enjoy it long, for at the end of eighteen months, they put out his eyes, in the year of Grace 935, and of the Egyra 322, giving the government to Razibila.   

THe Razibila Mahamed, the one and fortieth Calife.  
THe soldiers having thus chosen Razibila Mahamed, son to the Calife Moktader, he made Eben Mokale his Vuazir, whose hand within few month after he caused to be cut off, and to be hung upon a gibbet, for that he had written a letter in his name of small importance without his privity. It was the custom in those times for the Califs themselves to preach the law unto the people, but he ordained that the Vuazirs should do it. Razibila reigned four years, and died in the year of Grace 939, and of the Egyra 326.   

Mouktafy Byla Ebrahem, the two and fortieth Calife.  
MOuktafy Byla Ebrahem, son to Moctader, was created Calife after the death of his brother Razy, in whose time there was a great famine in Bagadet, the which was followed by a great plague, whereby a great part of that country was unpeopled, and as for Mouktafy, the soldiers put out his eyes, in the year of our Redemption 943, and of the Eygra 330, having reigned but four years, yet he lived two and forty years after he was blind, but he enjoyed not the empire, the which they had given ●nto his son.   

¶ Mostachfy Abdela, the two and fortieth king of Persia, and the three and fortieth Calife.  
IN the place of Mouktafy Byla, the soldiers advanced his son Mostachfy Abdela, under whose reign Macera, having made an accord with Azf●r, fell sick of a Tisike, which the Persians call Cel. This prince (as hath been said) had great wars during his reign, being eight and thirty years, and died in the year of Grace 944, and of the Egyra 331. He was a very affable and bountiful prince; during his life he had caused his eldest son Ishmael to be declared prince, and his presumptive heir, but he dying before his father, the younger brother, called Nueben, succeeded in his place.  
As for Abus●ia, and his sons, who fought for Azfar, this was their success; Azfar having made an accord with Nacere, he sent Emaudu Daulè Aly, the eldest of Abusutas sons, with his two brethren, and a great number of soldiers, against Hisphaon the chief city of Hierak, where, at that time, Mozafar Ben Yacut was Governor, who finding himself unable to encounter them, left the place, and fled to Scyras, where his father Yacut governed, then joining together, they went to fight with the enemy, but upon the way they encountered Mardawege, whom they vanquished, so as he was forced to fly, & to call unto his succour Emaudu Daulè Aly, and his two brethren, being at Lorestam, against whom Yacut advanced with his army, causing his footmen to march before with this stratagem; he had given them certain pots or bottles full of wildfire, and matches light in them, the which they should cast against their enemies, as they did; but the wind being contrary, the fire did not annoyed the enemy, but burned themselves, and Yacuts' horsemen advancing, it did so terrify there horses, as they ran away: Emaudu Daulè pursued them, who in this rout took many rich spoils, with store of gold and silver, the which increased the courage and power of Aly and his followers, with whom he entered into Persia, the which he made subject without any great effusion of blood, going afterwards to lay siege to Scyras the chief city, the sack whereof, by reason of the nobility and reputation of that town, he redeemed from the soldiers with his own money.  
Emaudu Daulè, having rested sometimes in the house of Yacut, he began to be careful for the payment of the soldiers, being without money, and seeing their insolency to be great, and that they would mutiny if they were delayed, being very pensive, he laid him down upon a bed, studying what course to take, where, lifting up his eyes, he espied an ugly snake at a hole, the which did often put forth her head, and drew it back again, Aly being amazed thereat, commanded that they should presently break up the top of the house, which was fla●, (as they be all in Persia) and kill this snake, the which was presently done, and the snake killed, with some others that were with her: but in doing this, they discovered a great treasure which Yacut had hidden there, the which was sufficient to pay the soldiers. Soon after, there happened another accident to Emaudu Daulè, the which was both pleasant and profitable; having an intent to make some apparel, he caused a tailor to be brought unto him, who being before him, in stead of a measure he called for a cudgel, the tailor (who had served Yacut) thinking it had been to beaten him, besought him to pardon him, and that without any force he would confess the truth, which was, that he had seventeen coffers in his house, the which Yacut had given him in guard; Aly was very joyful of this good encounter, and having sent for the coffers, they were found ●ul of cloth of gold, and all sorts of silk of great value, whereof the tailor had his share.  
Matte●ss passing thus in Persia, Nue, the son of Nacera, by the death of his father had succeeded in the government of Maurenahar, Rarason, Nichabur; and other neighbour countries. Hamuyhe, that famous captain, (of whom mention hath been made) had some discontentment against Nue, and seeing him now seated in the royal throne, and seeking to revenge the injury he had received, had retired himself secretly out of his country: but Nue writ such gracious letters unto him, and gave him such assurance, as Hamuyhe returned, to whom Nue gave the government of Samerkand. After this, Nue made war in many places by his captains, yet always with unfortunate success: but his fortune meant to make trial of himself; for having made one called Aboaly Governor of the town of Rey, and having some subject of discontent against him, he sent Abraham Ben Siniur to be his successor: whereas Aboaly being discontent, he rebelled against Nue, who went in person to suppress him, but he was twice vanquished, and the other came to Bokara, where he entered, and would have burnt and razed the town, if he had not been entreated to spare it. But Nue having recovered what he had lost, took a cruel and exemplary punishment of such as had revolted; so as many left him and went unto his enemy. Emaudu Daulè was then in the town of Scyras, to whom news came that Mardawege (under whom he served) had been slain by his slaves being in a bath. Upon this advice, he sent with all speed his brother Rokna Daulè Acem, to Hierach, and Rey, whereof he seized, conferring with Aboaly, who was very much discontented with Nue. This man obtained from the Calife of Persia the investiture of Karason, the which being once granted, Aboaly delayed no time, but went immediately to take possession. Within few days after, Nue died of melancholy, (as they say) leaving one son called Abdul Malek.  
Emaudu Daulè having sent his brother Rokna Daulè Acem, as hath been said, to conquer Hierach; he also sent his other brother Mohayze Daulè Achmet against Kermon, the which he subdued, where having put good garrisons, he went against Bagadet, the which yielded by force, where he took the Calife Mostachfy Abdala, whose eyes he caused to be pulled out, having reigned four years, and four months, the which happened in the year of our Redemption 947, and of the Egyra 334.   

¶ Motyah Byla Fazele, the four and fortieth Calife.  
MOayze Daulè Achmet having thus put out the eyes of the Calife Mostachfy, he seated in his place Motyah Byla Fazele, the son of Moktader: At this time, they found the stone whereof mention hath been made, which the Arabians had carried to Cufa, but it was brought back again ●o Mecque, giving as much gold for it as it weighed: This was in the year of Grace 949, and of the Egyra 337, whenas Emaudu Daulè Aly fell sick, he called for his nephew Azudu Daulè, son to his brother Rokna Daulè Acem, whom he left At his place, for he died presently after.  
At the same time there died also many princes, as Vuax Maguir going a hunting, for a boar running betwixt his horse legs, he fell upon him and slew him. Mohayze Daulè Achmet died also in Bagadet, Acem Ben Feruzan in Taberstan, Kafur Hach●dy in Cairo, and the emperor in Constantinople, Aboaly Ben Mahamed Aly in Bokara, and in Damas', Seyf Daulè in the year of our Redemption nine hundred fifty seven, and of the Egyra three hundred forty five.  
Throughout all Karason, Koestam, and many other provinces of Persia, there was a great and general plague: And moreover, there was the greatest confusion that had neither seen before that day, for that every man was offended, and every man feared, neither was any man in safety during this general combustion which continued some years. In the year of Grace 962, and of the Egyra 350, Abdul Malek, the son of Nue, running at tilt (the which is very usual among the Persians) fell from his horse, and died, having reigned seven years, and six months, in whose place succeeded Mansur his brother: in his life time he had for Vuazir one called Albataquin, who opposed himself with all his means against the election of Mansur, but Mansur prevailed, and Albataquin, being accompanied with three thousand soldiers, fled to Gazmin, after whom Mansur sent fifteen thousand soldiers, who fought with him upon the confines of Balk, and were defeated: he sent also the second time, but they were no more fortunate than the rest; so as Mansur seeing his good success, turned his arms against Hy●rah, and the town of Rey: Rokna Daulè Acem, who enjoyed it, went presently to field, sending his son with goodly troops to make incursion into the country of Karason to divert Mansur the General of the army. Rokna Daulè Acem was called Chamguir, who being dead of sickness, they gave his charge to Abul Ocem. This man seeing either prince disposed to peace, a treaty was begun, and in the end concluded, upon condition, that Rokna Daulè should pay a yearly tribute of 50000 deniers of gold, which make two and twenty hundred thousand ducats; and for the better assurance of this accord, Mansur took to wife the niece of Rokna Daulè, daughter to one of his brethren: the which happened in the year of our Salvation 975, and of the Egyra 363, at what time the Calife Motyah Byla died of a palsy, having reigned nine and twenty years, and left the government two months before to his son Tahaya Abdel Charim. As for Mansur, he died two years after, in the year of Grace 977, and of the Egyra 395, having reigned fifteen years, leaving his son Nue to succeed him.   

¶ Tayaha Abdel Carim, the five and fortieth Calife.  
TAyaha Abdel Carim, the son of Motyah, came thus to be Calife by the death of his father (as hath been said;) during whose reign, or rather shadow of his royalty, (for the Califs began then to be lords in name only) many memorable things happened in Persia. Two years after his being Calife, Rokna Daulè died, declaring his son Azu du Daulè, king of Hyerak, who much augmented his dominion. As for Nue Ben Mansur, who had succeeded his father in that of Maurenahar: he found work enough to exercise himself; for notwithstanding that Albataquin (whom he had cause to fear) were dead; yet Kabus, the son of Camguir, (a captain to his father Mansur) revolted, and took the provinces of Geryon and Tabarstan.  
At the same time also, there were great controversies betwixt Azudu Daulè and Fako●o Daulè, against whom Azudu Daulè levied an army, and forced Fakoro to fly into the province of Kabus, who entertained him with much courtesy and respect, offering him his person, and whatsoever he had else to serve him. Azudu Daulè, being sorry of this acquaintance, marched against them, vanquished them, and recovered Geryon and Tabarstan; so as Kabus and Fakor● Daulè were forced to have recourse to Nue Ben Mansur, who giving them succours, they returned against Azudu Daulè, and recovering Geryon, they forced him to retire into a fort, the which they besieged, but the siege having continued two months, the besieged finding their munition to fail, got intelligence with one of their captains, to whom they gave a good sum of money, so as he would be at their devotion, and having concluded what to do, they took a time whenas the besiegers lest expected them, and made a sally upon this treacherous captains quarter, who presently fled with such troops as were under his command, the which amazed the rest of the army which fled, by which means the place was freed from siege. Nue, who was then in Nichabur, hearing of the disgrace of his allies, gave charge to Abul Ocem his Vazir, to levy an army, and to march against Azudu Daulè; but he finding himself too weak, forbore to fight, and Fakoro Daulè dying afterwards, his brother came to be lord of all his countries.  
At that time died Abul Ocem, Vazir to Nue, whose death is remarkable: for seeking to have the company of a slave of his whom he loved exceedingly; being with her, he died suddenly, the which bred a general amazement, by reason of the strangeness of the accident. He left two sons, the one called Boaly, who succeeded him in the government of Karason and Nichabur, the other Faech, whom Nue made Vazir of Hyerak: these two brethren, through envy and jealousy, fell to arms, and made war one against another. But Boaly, having been more diligent than his brother, marched first against him to Bokara, who fled to Marno, where he gathered all his forces together: the which Nue understanding, he sent Innabac and Bakturun, two of his captains, to force Boaly to come to reason. These, according to his commandment, pursued him, and defeated him, forcing him to fly to Balk, and from thence to Tremed, from whence he writ to Bokrakham, king of Turquestan, persuading him to make war against Nue.  
During these dissensions, Aboaly Ben Ocem writ to Nue, demanding, in recompense of his famous service done unto him and his ancestors, the supreme government of all the countries of Maurenahar, and Karason, the which Nue granted without any difficulty, upon condition, that he should hold them as his vassal: but Aboaly seeing himself in possession of these countries, carried himself as a tyrant, and being often persuaded to be more temperate, he not only made them no answer to that which was propounded, but prepared himself secretly to rebel, and writing letters to Bokrakhan king of Turquestan, he persuaded him that they two together might invade the countries of Nue, and divide what they should get betwixt them. The king of Turquestan liked so well of this proposition, as he presently went with an army to field; and Aboaly did the like, so they began both to make great spoils in the country of Nue, who was also in arms, giving the charge of his army to Innabak, who had vanquished Faech, and presented battle to the rest, wherein he was vanquished, and sent prisoner into Turquestan.  
Nue hearing of this loss, and seeing himself reduced to extremity, seeking to make friends of his enemies, reconciled himself to Faech, drawing him to his devotion with all the courtesy and compliments he could devise; so as he sent him for the defence of Samarkand, where being arrived, he understood that Bokrakhan came against him: so as he abandoned the place, and wen to Bokara in despigh: of Nue, protesting that he had done him much wrong. This treason made Nue to faint, who finding no means to make head against so powerful an enemy, abandoned his realm. Bokrakham, in the mean time seized upon Samarkand, and from thence went to Bokara, whereas Faech joined with him, whom Bokrakham sent with an army against Balk, and the countries depending thereon. In the mean time Nue passed the river of Gehun as secretly as he could, and lay about Hamulchet, whither many of his subjects that sought him came unto him by divers ways; so as the number increasing daily, they began to make the body of an army, and Nue was in some hope of better success: and to try all means he writ to Aboaly, laying before him the favours and preferments he had received from him, promising him greater if he would return to his service: but Aboaly fed him with counterfeit and dissembling hopes, seeking by what means he might kill him.  
In the mean time Bokra●ham fell sick, and finding no amendment, by the advice of his physicians, he returned into Turquestan, hoping to recover his health better in his own country, but his infirmity increasing daily, he died by the way; the which they of Bokara understanding, they sallied forth upon his army, the which being without a head, was defeated, of whom their enemies made a great slaughter, and a rich booty of their spoils. Nue embracing this occasion returned into his realm, where he was received with a general consent.  
Aboaly seeing the king of Turquestan to be dead, he resolved to revenge himself by the power of Nue, the which Faech his brother understanding, although he were his capital enemy, he sought to divert him from this resolution, as he did: they two concluded together to make war against Nue, who before all these broils, had sent a captain of his called Sabutaquin, into India to make new conquests, and was then returned rich, and victorious, having purchased the reputation of a rare man, and of great experience in arms. Nue gave the charge of this war to him, and having made the greatest levy of soldiers he could, with such as he had under his command, he sent him to Gaznehen a famous country in Karason. Aboaly knowing the preparation they made against him, and desiring to prevent his enemies by some good success, he sought the friendship of Fakoro Daulè, whom he won with rich presents which he sent him. In the meantime, Nue and Sabutaquin went out of Nichabur, seeking Aboaly, being accompanied by the governors of Balk, Geryon, and Guergestam. As for Aboaly, he had received certain companies of old soldiers which Fakoro Daulè had sent him, to whom Darab Kabus had joined with a mighty army, and so going out of Hyerak, both armies camped one against another, where they stayed not long before they came to battle. Aboaly disposed of his army after this manner: He gave the right wing to Faech, and to a brother of his called Abalkacem Ben Samur the left, putting himself in the midst.  
As for that of Nue, the points of his battle were given to his best captains, but Amir Sabutaquin, and Seyfa Daulè were in the midst: the two armies being thus fronted, every man showed his valour, but News soldiers behaved themselves in such sort, as they forced the wings of Aboalys battle to turn their bakes, the which gave such courage unto their enemies, as they charged the rest with the whole body of their army so furiously, as they made them to break their ranks, and in the end to fly.  
In this conflict, Darab Kabus quitting the party of Aboaly, joined with Nue, the which was a great help for the defeating of this army, whereof part was cut in pieces, and the rest retired as they could by Nichabur. The victory thus gotten, and the spoils which were very great divided, Nue made Mahamud the son of Amir Sabutaquin his general at his father's request. As for Nue he went to Bokara, Sabutaquin to Gaznehem, and Mahamud to Nichabur: and as for the brothers of Aboaly and Faech, they went to Geryon, which was under the command of Fakoro Daulè, who entertained them with much kindness: but they carried themselves so ill in all things, as they continued not long in savour, which Aboaly perceiving, forgetting the benefits he had received from Fakoro, he ●ought means to kill him: whereunto Faech would not consent, but dissuaded him all he could from this design, advising him rather to fall upon Nichabur, and to surprise it before that the other had discovered their design; whereof notwithstanding being suspicious, he sent to demand succours of the king, and of his father: but before they came, these two had sought with him, vanquished him, and chased him out of the province: the which Sabutaquin understanding, he levied troops with all speed possible, and went from Siston to come to Nichabur, where he encountered Aboaly at Thus, and fought with him; being in the heat of the fight, Mahamud arrived with with a fresh army, who charging the enemy behind, made a terrible slaughter, taking in a manner all that were left alive prisoners. As for the two brethren, they got with great difficulty into Cala●, a place wonderful strong, and being accompanied from thence with some of the remainders of their defeat, they passed to Maravo, where being, they sought to get a pardon from Nue, who granted it to Aboaly, upon condition that he should not departed out of Geriana without his express leave; whereunto he agreed, contrary to the will of Faech who retired himself to ●echkan king of Turquestan, who ha●●ucceded Bokrakham.  
There was one called Abu Abdula governor of Koarrazm, who was enemy to Aboaly: he giving a sudden assault to Geriana, carried him away prisoner. The governor of Geriana, who had him in guard by the commandment of king Nue gathered his forces together, and went to Kat, whereas he of Koarrazm remained, took him prisoner, and freed Aboaly; and being returned into his province, he put the governor of Koa●razm in prison. As for Aboaly he entreated him very courteously, feasting him daily. One day among the rest, having drunk freely, Mahamud who was governor of Geriana, caused the governor of Koarrazm to be taken out of prison, and his head to be cut off: which done, he writ the whole discourse to Nue, craving pardon for Aboaly; who made answer that he had long since pardoned him, charging him to sand him, for that he had some matters of importance to impart unto him: Mahamud sent him, but at his coming to Bokara, Nue committed him close prisoner, where he died. As for Faech his brother, who was retired to Ilechkam, he persuaded him to make war against Nue, who being advertised of all their designs, sent to Sabutaquin to advance with his troops betwixt Rehx and Necaf, commanding also his son Mahamud who was at Nichabur, to join with his father with all the forces he could raise; so as both being together, they made a mighty army: the which the king of Turquestan understanding, fearing the danger, he treated an accord, the which Nue did not refuse, by whose means they gave the government of Sama●kand to Faech. By means of this peace, all troubles were pacified, in the year of Grace 996, and of the Egira 385; Nue remaining in the peace until his death, which happened two years after, having reigned two and twenty years, and leaving for successor his son Abul Here Mansur.  
Matters passing thus in Vsbek, Maurenahar, and Karason; the base country of Persia was not without combustions, for that the Daules, of whom mention hath been made, (whom we have purposely omitted to avoid confusion by the multiplicity of affairs, and the better to explain this narration) continuing their broils, afflicted it much, for that Azuda Daulè succeeding in the realm, sent Abul Favares his son to Ker, to keep a governor of his who had revolted, in awe, whom he vanquished. At that time Moezedu Daulè king of Bagadet, and brother to Azudu, died, whom Baktear his son succeeded, to whom the father gave charge before his death in all things to follow the counsel of his uncle, and of those prudent Wazirs which he left him: but he did otherwise than he had charge, for he gave occasion to Sabutaquin and Albutaquin to enter into his country with great troops of Turks, who being come to Wacet, did much perplex him. Baktear demanded succours of Azudu, who came with all speed, fought with the Turks, and put them to rout, pursuing them to Bagadet, where they were besieged by Baktear. Having done wonders for their defence, being forced by necessity, they left the city, and went with the C●life to Tecrit, a town in Diarbek upon the banks of the river of Tigris: so as the city fell into the hands of Baktear, who caused the Calife to return and consigned it unto him. Azudu Daulè was much troubled thereat; so as he seized upon his nephew, and put him in prison, yet he set him soon after at liberty.  
Matters being thus ended, Azudu Daulè caused his army to march against Hierak in Arabia, and Baktear seeing him absent, entered presently into his country, and committed great spoils: the which his uncle understanding at his return, Baktear was forced to retire himself to Mosul, a great city in Diarbek (which many hold to be Nineve) the which was then governed by one called Abusaleb, who came and joined with Ba●t●●r, with an army of twenty thousand men, and encountering Azudu Daulè at Te●rit, he vanquished them. Abusaleb fled, and Baktear was taken, whose head his uncle caused to be cut off, being six and thirty years old, having held the realm eleven years, and certain months. After this, the country of Mosul seeming very pleasant to Azudu Daulè, he stayed there, adding divers other lands unto it, in the year of Grace 980, and of the Egyra 368, sending to re-edify Bagadet, the which was in a manner ruinated by the former wars. He discharged the people of divers tributes which they had formerly paid, and caused many pits to be opened upon the high ways, and showed himself favourable to the Sages of his Sect, to Philosophers, to Physicians, and Poets whom he knew to excel others, and giving leave unto the Christians that were in his countries, to build Churches, bearing part of the charge. In the year of Grace 982, and of the Egyra 371, he caused a goodly hospital to be built at Badaget, the which he endowed with great revenues; and another at Scyras nothing inferior to the other: then having done many things worthy the memory of a good prince, he fell sick of a kind of lunacy, which they call Sara, and died in the year of Grace 983, and of the Egyra 372, having reigned four and thirty years: he left three sons, Scerfa Daulè, Scams Daulè, otherwise called Abul Ganiar Marsabane, and the third, Bahao Daulè. The two first divided the lands betwixt them, yet were not content. Scerfa Daulè went into Persia, and Scams Daulè, to Badaget, whom Scerfa took in an interview they had together; but he died soon after in the year of Grace 990, and of the Egyra 379. Hereupon they drew his brother Scams' Daule or Abul Ganiar Marsabane out of prison, and set him in his place. This man did associate his younger brother Bahao Daule in the government; but having some jars they fell to arms, and Scams Daule made war against him with one Boaly Ben Hostad Hormoz, pursuing him with all rigour: but whenas he had lest hope of any succours, news came unto him that the soldiers having demanded a pay of Scams Daule, and being refused, they mutined; so as having taken a fort by Scaladoe, in the which were four sons, and certain kinsfolks of Baktear, they drew them from thence, and having joined with certain other troops, they gave an assault to Scyras, whereas Scams Daule remained, who presently fled; but they followed him, and took him at Dudmon, two leagues from the city, whither they brought him back, and put him to death with his mother, having been king nine years, and eight months; in the year of Grace 991, and of the Egira 380: Bahao Daule succeeded without any opposition. At that time Fakoro Daule (as hath been said) was king of Geryon, who made war against one called Saha●d Hebad, being richer in money than men, whom he vanquished, and become lord of all his treasure: then having ended this war, and many others which were of no small continuance; going (in the year of Grace 989, and of the Egyra 378) to Tabarak a fort of his; being one a day at dinner, he fed so freely of salt beef, and did presently eat such abundance of grapes, as it caused him to have a great pain in his stomach, whereof he died within few hours after, being little lamented, by reason of the tyrannies he used in his life-time.  
At the news of this death, there was such a confusion and mutiny in the town, as they had no time to bury him, until the extreme stench of this dead body, forced them to enter●e it. He had three sons, of the eldest whereof, and his mother Suyda, mention shall be hereafter made. Bahao Daule having succeeded in the realm, he took Boaly for his general and leader of his armies, having made war for his brother. He gave him charge to chase the sons of Baktear out of Persia; the eldest of which called A●u Nacere, went to Kermon with certain troops, surprising the governor in such sort, as he forced him to abandon the country, whereon he seized. Bahao Daule sent Mousek against him, who defeated him; and as he fled, a servant of his stepped before him, and thrust him through the body with his sword, of which death he had been foretold. Moufek put trusty governors into all places; and being well pleased with his victory, he returned to the king, who received him with much honour: but being slandered by his enemies, he was taken the same day, and soon after put to death. Bahao Daule, the first year of his reign, deposed the Calife Tayha Abdelcarim Ben Mutia, having enjoyed the dignity seventeen years, and two months. Such was then the Estate of this principality, which being accustomed to command others, was then commanded by all men. Boaly d●ed also in Badaget in the year of Grace 1012, and of the Egyra 401. Bahao Daule died a year after, having lived two and forty years, nine months, and reigned four and twenty.   

¶ Kader Bila Hamed, the six and fortieth Cal●fe.  
ALthough the Califs affairs were then reduced to that Estate, as these princes had nothing left but the name, and that their command was rather after their manner of spiritual things, they having no authority, but what the princes which then reigned gave them, having even lost that shadow of temporal jurisdiction which they had preserved unto the time of the Daules, of whom we have made mention: yet for that all began by them, and that Mirkond and Teix●ereses do still put them in the rank of princes, this personal succession serving always as a more certain rule to avoid confusion: we have followed the same order, considering the great confusions and alterations which have been in Persia during this age, whereby the trace of their chronology is often lost; yet of these Califs we still found the name B●hao Daule having deposed the Calife Tayha Abdelcarim, he gave his place to Kader Bila Hamed, the son of Ezach, the son of Moktader: under whose name matters passed after this manner,  
Fakoro Daule king of Geryon, being dead by his excess & surfer, his son Maiudu Daule succeeded him, who was proclaimed king although he were but three years old. His mother Sayda governed for him, being a woman of great understanding and judgement, to maintain this realm in peace and prosperity, du●ing the minority of her son. But being grown great, he would dispose of the realm after his own fantasy, and place governors at his pleasure, without the advice or council of his mother, where with being discontented, she retired herself into the fort of Tabarak. Her son had made one Aboaly his Vazir, against her will, who fearing that she would go out of the realm, was the cause of great trouble, having set guards upon the way to stay her. ●ut all this could not prevent the princess's departure, who went to Kusest●m, whereof Badre Acem Nuyhe was governor, who seeing her, and being informed how matters had passed with her son, he levied great forces, which they two led, going to encounter Matudu Daule, the son of Sayda, and his Vazir Aboaly, whom they vanquished, and took p●isonerss: Matudu Daule being in the town of Rey; so as the realm was again under the command of Sayda, who governed with great wisdom and judgement.  
At that time Mamud Gasney reigned in Karason and Maur●nahar, who having made proof of his victorious arms in all the neighbour countries, sent Ambassadors to Sayda, demanding that there should be no money currant in her realm, but his, and that whatsoever should be coined, should have his name and arms, giving her to understand that if she did otherwise, he should have cause of discontent. She made him answer with a manly resolution, that if her husband lived, she would much fear his threats, for that they being both men, they might encounter: but being a widow, she was certain he would not so much embase his generous courage, as to wrong her: with which answer he was at that time pacified. Within few days after, she pardoned her son Maiudu Daule, but she gave him not the absolute government of the realm, giving unto the second, called Scams Daule the government of Amadon, and the third, whose name was Abuiafar, she put into Hisphaon; so as this queen preserved their realm in peace and prosperity until her death, the which happened in the year of Grace 1030, and of the Egira 420. After which their followed great troubles, for that the Sultan Maimed Gozney caused his army to march against Hierak, and being come to Mazandazon, Manucher the son of Kabus, nephew to Vuax Maguir (of whom mention hath been made) holding his Estate uncertain, being in this company, left the camp, and returned into his country without the leave of Mamud: but fearing lest the other should be offended, he sought to pacify him with many great and rich presents which he sent him, much apparel for his soldiers, and four hundred thousand deniers of gold coined, which make about six hundred thousand ducats: but for that we have long forborn to speak any thing of Karason, it shall be fit to return to that discourse, and to see what hath been done there, during these alterations in other countries.  
As it hath been said, by the death of Nue, his son Abul Hares Mansur succeeded him in the realm, who had for his captain general, one called Baktuzun, against whom Abul Ilechkan king of Turquestan made war, as he had done against his father, and being come to Samarkand, Faech who was governor thereof, submitted himself unto him, who with sufficient forces for his design, went against Bokara whereas Mansur remained, who abandoning the city, fled, and passed to the other side of the river of Ammuye, Faech entered the town, assuring the inhabitants that he came not to wrong the king, but to do him service, and to secure him; so as he made the king to return, who being assured of Faeches intentions, he gave him the charge of Baktusun, and to Baktusun he gave the government of Karason.  
At that time Sabutaquin died, which was the subject of new troubles betwixt Mamud and Imaell his children; so as Ishmael was forced to fly. After this, Mamud seized upon Karason, whereof he was governor, having taken it from Baktusun, to whom the king had given it; whereof he complained to his prince by letters, beseeching him to interpose his authority, and restore him to his government: the which was effected, and they gave in recompense to Mamud the government of Balk, Termed, and Herat: where with Mamud being discontented, he levied men, with whom he marched against Nixabur, whereas the king remained, who not standing upon his guards was forced to fly, doubting the strength of that place. But Mamud fearing the name of a rebel, proceeded no farther in this new combustion. There came one of king Mansurs subjects unto him call Maktusun; so as this prince seeing himself supported, returned from his flight. This man complained to Faech, that the king had not entreated him with the honour he expected: Faech embracing this occasion opened his heart unto him, discovering upon what terms he stood with Mansur, and how ill he was affected unto him; so as these two agreeing together, they conspired against their king, and they gave such order for their enterprise, as at a banquet they put out his eyes, making king in his place a young brother of his called Abdel Malek; he having reigned but a year and 7 months. Mamud hearing of this accident, levied all his forces, to go against the traitors, who being surprised, were forced to fly, Maktusun to Nichabur, the king with Faech towards Bokara, and Abul Kacem Siniur to Keostam; whereby Mamud remained lord of Karason, against whom the rest did arm, who being joined together, were ready to give him battle, but the sudden death of Faech stayed the event. Ilechkan king of Turon or Turquestan, being advertised of these broils, levied a mighty army, with the which he marched to Bokara, from whence he sent word to king Abdel Malek, that he desired to secure him, and that he was come to that end; the which the young prince believing lightly, he sent the best of his captains to thank him, whom he presently committed to prison: the which did so amaze Abbel Malek, as he sought some place where to retire himself, and in the mean time he did hide himself as secretly as he could. But Ilechkan being come into town, he set guards in the high ways, at the ports, and upon the walls; and then he made a search in the town, whereas he found Abdel Malek, who was taken thence, and sent to V●kand, whereas he died in prison: his subjects advanced a young brother of his, who reigned very little. This happened in the year of Grace 1000, and of the Egyra 389. Ilechkan seeing himself in possession of Bokara, took king Abul Hares Mansur and put out his eyes: the like he did to his two brethren Abu Ebrahem Montecer, and Abuyacub, all sons to Nue, and to his two uncles Abu Zacharie, and Abu Salechk, with others of the royal blood, putting them all into several prisons, where he had women slaves to serve them, among the which there was one which did much affect Abu Ebrahem Montecer and desiring to free him, she covered him with her garment, and being thus disguised, she drew him from thence into a friend's house of hers, where he was hidden for a time, but in the end they let him go, then retiring himself from Bokara, he went to Koarrazm, where he had soon made a levy of soldiers, the which he sent against Bokara under the leading of a captain called Arsalon Balu, who fight with Taquin a captain to Ilechkan, vanquished him, and took him prisoner: with many other knights of his company.  
As for Arsalon Balu, he ruined all the country unto the lesser Cantarey, against whom came Taquin Kham governor of Samarkand for Ilechkan who was also defeated. After this Montecer came to Bokara, where he was received with much joy, and being joined to Arsalon Balu, they passed the river of Gehun, and came to Nichabur. Amir Nacer the son of Mamud, who was governor, abandoning the country, we●t to Herat, where his father remained, who understanding that they were entered into his country, drew his men to field against Montecer, who not daring to attend him, retired to Esf●rahen, in the country of Rabus, who sent unto him presents of inestimable value, if we shall believe Mirkond; for he saith, that he sent him ten horses, with their furniture and comparisons of gold, thirty with their furniture of silver, and thirty which were but of silk, thirty camels laden with fine Persian tapistry, with many other pieces of great price, many robes of rich cloth of gold, with a great sum of money, sending also certain gifts to all his captains▪ Cabus' was desirous he should aid him when he came to the town of Rey, whither he would sand him good succours, with his two sons Darab and Manucher to help him to take it. Yet having afterwards changed their minds, being passed from Rey to Damion, Darab and Manucher returned to their father Kabus. This happened in the year of Grace 1002, and of the Egyra 391.  
At the same time Mamud sent a captain called Altuntax, with his son Amir Nace●, to recover Nichabur, and Montecer sent against them Abul Kacem and Arsalon Balu, who lost the battle. Nacer was at Nichabur, and Montecer fled to Iburd, whither Nacer followed him; but Montecer took his way towards Geryon, the which Kabus understanding, being discontented with the bad proceed of Montecer towards him, he laid two thousand men upon the passage to stop his entry into his country▪ ●o as Montecer was forced to take another way, where, upon a light occasion he caused Arsalon Balu to be slain, the which did purchase him the hatred of all his people. Afterwards the war continued betwixt Nacer and him with variable success, until that Montecer was wholly defeated in battle, whereas Nacer won the victory, and the other lost the best part of his men: then flying with some few that did accompany him, he fell into the hands of the Turcomans: these are shepherds which feed their flocks in divers plains, and make their retreats in cabins, who knowing him, entreated him with much courtesy for the love they did bear his father. Of these he suddenly gathered together a great number, with the which he passed into Maurenahar. Ilechkan came against him; but the Turcomans surprising him suddenly in the night, slew a great number of his soldiers, and put him to flight, taking the best part of the spoil. They returned to their cabins, and Montecer past the river of Gehun; but for that it was in Winter and night (the which are exceeding cold in that country) it was impossible for him to pass it without boat or bridge. The Turcomans who had assisted him, being sorry for the spoils which they had le●t him, prepared themselves to set upon him, and to take it from him. But coming to the river, at the break of day, they found it thawed; so as they could not follow Montecer, who found means to retire himself free from them. All this happened in the year of Grace 1004, and of the Egyra 393.  
At that time there was one called Abuiafar, a man of base condition, who of a r●bber by the high way, was grown to that power, as he commanded the whole country: Montecer demanded some succours of him, but in steed of gratifying him, he opposed himself against his proceed; so as they were forced to come to battle, where Montecer vanquished him, and going to Iburd, he had another encounter with Abu Nacer governor of the province, which was very bloody and cruel, for that it was in the night, whereas Abu Nacer was slain during the fight: in the mean time Montecer had no place of refuge, and going along the river to seek a passage, he met with the Xena or Governor of Bokara, where he lost the best part of his men; so as with such as could follow him, he retired to Da●band, where being assisted by the governor of Samarkand, and some noblemen Turks, which lived in the city, and by some choice troops, he gave an assault to Bokara, and took it: the whith Ilechkan understanding, he went to encounter him, and fought with him; but he was vanquished, with whose spoils, the soldiers of Montecer grew rich. This happened in the year of Grace 1005, and of the Egyra 394: Ilechkan having repaired his army, came again to charge Montecer, at such time whenas the soldiers which had assisted him, were retired, and that a captain of his was go to Ilechkan with five thousand soldiers: this was the cause of his rout; for having no power to resist his enemy, he fled, and came to the river of Gehun, the which not able to wade through, and wanting victuals, he was forced with his company to stay the night there, and to feed upon the flesh of beasts that were already dead. After this, he went by unknown ways, fearing to encounter his enemy, and came to Koestam, where being pursued, and being hated of all men, for the divers and variable changes and crosses of fortune, the which he had endured, he came in a manner alone to Bokara, for that his followers which were most discontented, had go to Soleymon and Safy captains to Ilechkan. The Governor of Bokara promised to assist him, but knowing that these two lay in ambush, he put him out of the town. Mamud who was then lord of Karason, had rent certain lands to one called Ebenbayg an Arabian captain, into whose jurisdiction Montecer retired, & hide himself in a poor cottage, but another called Maruyh hearing it, he came in the night with certain Arabians, found him out, and slew him. Thus Montecer ended his troublesome life, in the year of Grace 1006, and of the Egyra 395: for whose death Mamud or Mahamud (although he were his enemy) was much grieved, causing Maruyh to be put to death with cruel torments.  
Kabus Ben Vuax Maquir had enjoyed certain lands in the country of Karason quietly eighteen years. He was descended from the ancient kings of Persia, and had not been an actor in the above mentioned confusions: for being very wise and rich, he so managed his affairs, as he did bind them unto him who for their ambition and power would not spare any man. As for Amir Sabutaquin, having gotten the victory of Aboaly in Karason, he came to Bokara, where he made a strict league of friendship with Kabus, and desired to do him some service. At that time Fakoro Daule was lord of Geryon, as hath been said, whom Sabutaquin sought to oppress, and to bring Kabus into that government: for the effecting whereof, he demanded ten thousand soldiers of Ilechkan, the which being joined to his own troops, made a great army, the Rendezvous whereof was at Balk, whereas, whilst Sabutaquin attended his troops, death surprised him: Fakoro Daule died also, in whose place succeeded Maiudu Daule his son, under the government of Sayda his mother, as hath been said: Abul Kacem remained at Kumes, who after the death of Sabutaquin went to Kabus, with whom he made an accord that they should invade the lands of the deceased Fakoro Daule, and enjoy them both together, and so they brought their armies unto the field, making entry into this country by divers ways: Kabus put himself into Nichabur, from whence he sent a captain called Sfabed Charear, who being met by Marzabah uncle to the deceased, having an army in the province of Geryon, for the defence thereof, he fought with him, and put him to rout: by the means of this victory, he brought a great part of this province under the obedience of Kabus: and in that of Tabarstam, they held Amal a place of importance, for the recovery whereof Aken Feruzan coming with a good army, they within the town went out against him with Sfabed Charear, and gave him battle, the which he lost, being taken prisoner with above twenty of his captains.  
This good success gave still more hope to Kabus, and made him aspire to greater matters: who to lose no time, came to Geryon, where he was proclaimed king, in the year 1011, and of the Egyra 400. He had afterwards some encounters with his enemies, but all succeeded fortunately for him, so as in the end, he commanded over all Gueylon, which are provinces of a great extent, of the which he made his son Manucher governor, sending great presents to Maimed, to the end he might fortify himself in his new Estate by this acknowledgement.  
Kabus had a great respect to justice, & did administer it with such rigour, that whereas before he was much honoured of his people, he was now hated of them, imputing it to his cruelty; so as not able to endure him any longer, being one day in his camp, they entered his tent to kill him, but he escaped their hands, yet not without great difficulty, and got to Bostam: but they converted their rage against his tent, spoiling all that was within it, being of no small value; seeking to set Manucher his son in his place; upon condition that he should not revenge that which they had done, nor aid his father against them. But he refused the realm, unless his father would consent thereunto, preferring the respect of a father, before a royal crown; so as some of them went unto the father, who much commending the obedience of his son, would not suffer him to remain in his service, as he desired, but made him return, giving him the realm freely, and all that did belong unto him, whereof Manucher took possession, with the general applause of all men, and Kabus retired himself into the fort of Kakek, there to spend the residue of his days, whereas they of Geryon, fearing that whilst he lived he would be offensive unto them, found means to kill him, Manucher not knowing who were the actors thereof: but wh●n he understood it, he punished them severely.  
Manucher the son of Kabus otherwise called Malech Almaly, seeing himself king of those countries, which his father had gotten in Geryon and Gueylon (in the which Maiudu Daule held a good part) he sent his Ambassadors to the Sultan Mamud, to dec●are himself his vassal, and to offer him a tribute of 50000 deniers of gold, which are about 60000 ducats, and Mamud gave him a daughter of his to wife, but within few days after his marriage Manucher died, his brother Darab remaining in his place.  
Darab the son of Kabus, and brother to Manucher, was a great actor (as hath been said) in the controversies betwixt Nue and Boaly, whose party he followed, & afterwards that of Nue, by whose death his father invading the realm of Geryon, he served him, whom he sent with troops to Tarbarstam, for the guard of those lands which he held in that province, but having been accused of some crimes in his government, he purged himself before his father: yet this accusation did so discontent him, as he resolved to retire himself to Mamud, who entertained him honourably; yet by his own bad carriage, in the end he fell into disgrace, which he finding, he left him, and went to Schachar king of Gurgestam, who at the entreaty of Mamud, dismissed him: in the end, he succeeded his brother, but his time was short.  
Mirkond reports in this place the valiant exploits of Sabutaquin in India, which were too long to relate. There had been many controversies, as hath been said, betwixt Mamud and Ishmael his brother, after the death of their father, the which were ended by arms, to the prejudice of Ishmael, who had been forced to fly: and Mamud seeing himself at rest, in regard thereof, had made a peace, and contracted friendship with Ilechkan, for the desire which he had to go to the conquest of India, as his father had done, where he obtained great and famous victories, and brought away rich spoils. Ilechkan envying his good fortune, and without any respect to the faith which he had given him, entered into his country, and sent jafar Taquin his kinsman against Balk.  
Arsalon Balu held then the government of Herat for Mamud, and of all the Gaznehen, which are very great provinces: this man opposed himself against the attempts of Il●chkan and jafar Taquin. Mamud was soon advertised of the treachery of his ally; so as leaving his conquests of India, h● returned speedily for the defence of his own country, giving such order for his affairs, by the means of Arsalon Balu a captain of very great experience, as he first defeated Ebu Abdala an Arabian captain, who led Taquins' army, which in the end was wholly overthrown and put to flight: he cut in pieces the greatest part of his soldiers, the rest escaped by the river of Gehun, which they passed with their general, who lost in this battle many of his kinsmen, and left a brother of his prisoner.  
This defeat touched Ilechkan very near, for he saw it impossible for him to resist the force and good fortune of his enemy: this caused him to make a league with Kaderkham king of Ketao Kotan, which we call Catay, to the end he should secure him in this war, and stop the course of Mamuds victories, who made a great levy as well in Catay, as in Turquestan and Maurenahar, and joining with the forces of Ilechkan, they passed the river of Gehun together.  
The news of this great preparation was soon brought to Mamud, being at Tabarstam, who went speedily to Balk, where he gathered together a great army of Turks, Calanges, Gazneys, and Aueganys, and marching against his enemies, he gave them battle, in which, they of Ilechkans' side in the beginning had the advantage, which Mamud seeing, despairing in a manner of the victory, he mounted upon an elephant, which he thrust with great fury into the midst of his enemies, of whom he overthrew many, notwithstanding any resistance they could make, the elephant being in choler: this gave great courage to Mamuds soldiers; for seeing their prince in such danger, they did what they could to free him, and so got the victory, putting their enemies to flight. They hold that this was one of the most bloody battles which had been given in that age, which happened in the year of Grace 1008, and of the Egyra 397.  
This victory did purchase such peace to Mamud, as no man could hinder his design, which was yearly either by himself or his captains, to make a voyage to the Indies, to convert those people to his sect: which the king of the country perceiving, especially one called Bal, he found means, as well by his own forces, as by his allies, to levy a mighty army, and came to encounter Mamud, with whom he did fight a whole day, but Mamud got the victory of the Indians, where he had a rich spoil, taking forty elephants for the war: the rest retired to a fort which was held impregnable, for that it stood in the midst of a great lake, into which they had drawn all their treasure, and the riches of their Pagodes, or houses of their Idols, which was inestimable: but the building being weak, Mamud found means to enter it. There was in this fort (as Mirkond writeth) seven millions of drams of gold, 700 ingots of gold, weighing 2800 marks, with store of pealre and precious stones, and many other rich pieces of great value, putting all into a house where they kept this treasure. Mamud having taken this great prize, returned to Gaznehen, leaving that which he had conquered to confident persons. This happened in the year of Grace 1011, and of the Egyra 400. He had another battle against the Gaores, which be they of Guzarate, and whereas one called Mahamed Ben Sury a captain of the Vaneanes would have taken their quarrel in hand, he was defeated, and a son of his taken prisoner, who died upon the way, having poisoned himself.  
At that time there was a great famine in the country of Karason, so as men and women did eat on another, without any respect of sex, age, or condition.  
After the great battle above mentioned, Ilechkan had retired himself to Maurenahar, where hearing that Togan Kam his brother, who had been with him in that battle, would fall to Mamud, he took arms against him; but Mamud arriving, they agreed. These troubles thus pacified, Mamud went against Bagadet, which he besieged; so as the Calife Kader Bila being within it, was forced to yield himself, and to content him with five millions of drams, every dragma being six pence of our money, by means of which sum, he left him in peace, and retired into Persia.  
In the time of Nue the son of Mansur, Chachar Abu Nacer, son to Abu Mahamed had his father's government, which he had given him, coming to f●ll age, and had retired himself to a private life, whenas Aboal● a rebel to Nue, armed against Chachar, & dispossessed him of his country, whom Amir Sabutaquin father to Mamud, took into his service: and his lands coming afterwards to his hands, he restored them again. Abu Nacer came afterwards to serve Mamud, who recompensed him with a confirmation of the realm, and other rich presents. Yet Mamud desiring to return into India, & having a will to lead him with him, he excused himself from this journey: which Mamud then dissembled, but being returned, he sent Altuntax against him; & Abu Mahamed the father of Nacer, he sent to Bagadet, but he deprived his son of the realm, who (flying into a fort) was taken, and put to the rack, to make him confess where he had hidden the great treasure whi●●●e had: and being afterwards carried before Mamud, he caused him to be whipped, & com●itto close prison: then calling the father from Bagadet, he gave him the price of all th●t which he had formerly held in Gurges●am and Gaznehen, giving him many other preferments, to the end he might have means to live honourably about him, ●nto the 〈◊〉 1016, and of the Egyra 406, when he died.  
〈◊〉 ●hingss thus pacified, Mamud returned again into India, where he won many 〈◊〉▪ and brought home rich spoils. At that time Mamun governed the country of 〈…〉, who died soon 〈◊〉▪ leaving his son Aboaly to succeed him: he married a 〈◊〉 to Mamud, who loved him much; so as he passed the small time he lived in peace, 〈◊〉 whose ●eath his 〈…〉 called Mamun Ben Mamun came to the succession of the realm, who 〈…〉 within few days after, not without suspicion of poison, which one Neala●● 〈…〉 of his, was suspected to have given him. One of his sons was 〈…〉. But Mamud being much grieved for the death of Mamun, resolved 〈…〉; wherefore he levied an army, causing it to march to Koarrazm: 〈…〉 charged him suddenly one morning, striking a great amazement into the 〈…〉 so as the victory was very doubtful, yet in the end it turned to Mamud, 〈…〉 being forced to fly, seeking to pass a river, he fell in quarrel with the 〈…〉 th● boat 〈◊〉 knowing him, dissembled it, until that having given a watchword 〈…〉 they bound ●is hands, and carried him to Mamud, who in the 〈…〉 to pardon him: but he talked with him so boldly, and with such little 〈…〉 as he caused him to be hanged, giving the government of Koarrazm to 〈…〉 we●t again into India, where he had a famous victory against Gulkand a 〈…〉 who▪ ●eeing himself vanquished with the loss of fiutie thousand men, fearing 〈◊〉 a wife which he loved dearly for her great beauty, should fall into his enemy's 〈◊〉 he flew her, and himself presently after.  
After this Mamud made another voyage into India, where he vanquished two kings, 〈◊〉 and jand●bal, from whence he brought rich spoils: then returning to Gaznehen, because a stately Mosque or Temple to be built, as a thanks giving for his victories: and from thence he entered into Persia, where he took the town of Rey, and that of Hisphaon in Hyenas▪ the which did belong to Maiudu Daule, the government of which he gave to M●sud his son▪ than having been sick two years, he died in the year 1031, and of the Egyra 〈◊〉. Two days before his death, he caused his chiefest treasure to be brought before him, which seeing, he poured forth many tears without speaking any word; so as it is not known upon what consideration: but for that he commanded they should keep it carefully, it was conceived that his heaviness grew for that he might no longer enjoy it. Being ready to die, he caused the youngest of his sons to be brought to him, thinking that he would prove very factious, whom he entreated to pass his word, that after his death he would live lovingly with his brethren, and would respect and obey the elder as reason required: the other answered, that he should not trouble himself in that regard, and that he would govern himself with them, as he had done with his.  
Matters passing thus in Karason, Maurenahar, and Vsbek, the affairs of Persia were in no less cofusion: for Magidu Daule being king of Geryon, he governed himself carelessly, and without judgement. Mamud, a most ambitious prince, being loathe to lose so good an occasion, sent a mighty army against him, led by one of his best captains, to whom Magidu Daule yielded without blows, imagining that having not offended Mamud, he would not deprive him of his realm: but he was deceived; for being a prisoner with his son Abuzef, Mamud had no sooner intelligence that he was in the town of Rey, but he caused the treasure of Magidu to be brought to him, where there was a million of deniers of gold, which do almost make a million & a half of crowns, 15000 deniers of gold in jewels, and great store of plate both of gold and silver, with other pieces of great price, and then he caused Magidu Daule to be brought before him, of whom he demanded if he had ever read Chanoma, which is the Chronicle of their kings, to whom he answered 〈◊〉; then he asked him if he could play at chess, the other answered yea. Have you never ●ead then, said Mamud, that two kings did hold one realm together, or have you not ●●ene at chess two kings in one place? whereunto Magidu Daule answered no: Mamud 〈◊〉 ●hen blame him sharply for his ignorance and carelessness, and then he sent him with 〈◊〉 and a Wazir to Gaznehen, where Mamud had a goodly library, which he cause● 〈◊〉 brought to Karason, where he had left his son Masud for king.  
〈◊〉 were also great broils among the Daules, as well in Persia, as in Kermon, especially betwixt Albufavares and Gelala, brethren to Sulton Daule, who had succeeded his father Baodaule; but in the end they agreed in the year 1019, and of the Egyra 309. In Di●rb●k reigned Acen Ben Baoda●le, therwise called Mocharaf Daule, who had intelligence ●ith one of the chief captains of Sulton Daule the which being discovered, it was hard ●o prevent, but by arms: after many encounters, they agreed, upon condition that Mo●haraf Daule should govern the province of Hierak of Arabia, and Sulton Daule should ●ave Awaz and Persia: but Sulton Daule being returned home, levied a greater army ●han before, under the command of Eben Salak, whom he sent against Mocharaf, but he was vanquished, and besieged in a fort, whither he had retired himself, and in the end forced by necessity to yield to his enemy, to have his life saved; the which did so puff 〈◊〉 Mocharaf, as he caused himself to be called king of kings. This was in the year 1021, ●nd of the Egyra 411: and in the year after, he put out the eyes of Eben Salak. The same ●eare Gelala Daule was made king of Bagadet, who had for Wazir Abugaleb, whom the soldiers murdered, for that he paid them with words. There was afterwards a new ac●ord made betwixt Mocharaf Daule and Sulton Daule, by the means of Sultons' son, 〈◊〉 condition that Mocharaf should enjoy Hierak of Arabia, and Persia, and Sulton, Kir●on, who died two years after, in the year of Grace 1023, and of the Egyra 413. After his death Abu Mokarram one of his chief Captains sent his son Abulganiar with forces to Awaz: but the Turks or Turcomans the which remained in Persia, called Abulfavares brother to Sulton who was in Kirmon, and brought him into Scy●as, before he began to march; the which Abulganiar understanding, he raised a new ar●ie which he sent against Scyras; which made his competitor to retire to Kirmon: but ●he country was nothing more quiet, for some demanded peace, others would have ●ar made against Abulfavares, and the king having no money, was forced to go to Noa●●ndian, wanting experience (by reason of his youth) to avoid so many crosses; whereupon they that were of Abulfavares faction made him return to Scyras, and proclaimed 〈◊〉 king; and they of the party of Abul Ganiar did so animate him, as he did arm against 〈◊〉 uncle, where after variable events, in the end he forced him to abandon Scyras the se●●nd time, where the other entered, and was again declared king.  
In the year 1026, and of the Egyra 416, Mocharaf Daule died at Bagadet, aged three 〈◊〉 twenty years, and three months, having reigned five years, and five and twenty 〈◊〉: after his death they sent for Basora Gelala Daule to succeed him, who coming not 〈◊〉 such speed as is required in the like affairs, they gave the government to another; ●●ereof Gelala seeking revenge, he came against Bagadet, whom the Calife Kader sought 〈◊〉 pacify with reasons and entreaties; but all this could not keep him from fight, to ●●lala● loss, who was defeated and forced to fly to Basora, having lost the best part of his 〈◊〉 and a rich booty. The year following, the Turks came in great troops to Bagasse which they took, spoiled, and fired, the which they did assure themselves against the libyans which remained in that country: this made the inhabitants to call Gelala to 〈◊〉 succours, whom they proclaimed king of Bagadet, where entering, he went to the strifes house to kiss his foot, who received him courteously, in the year of Grace 1029, 〈◊〉 of the Egyra 419: but in the mean time, the Turks which he had brought with 〈◊〉 demanded their pay, and Gelala having no money, they committed great insolen●●●specially in the house of Aboaly Ben Mekula Wazir to Gelala, which they spoilt, car●●● away all that was within it, which was of no small value, and they did shut Gelala 〈◊〉 house, not suffering him to come forth, unless the Calife would be come answerable that they should be paid, as he did; for the effecting whereof, he sold many pieces 〈◊〉 great value. It was at the same time whenas Mamud Gaznay sought to seize upon Per●●● whereof Abul Ganiar advertised his uncle Gelala Daule, that they might join together, and resist their common enemy; but the other, in steed of marching against Ma●●● went and spoiled Awaz which did belong unto his cousin, from whence he drew a 〈◊〉 sum of money.  
●he dissensions were as great at Basora betwixt the Turks, and them of Dialema, 〈◊〉 one favouring Malek Azir son to Abu Mansur, and nephew to Gelala Daule, whom they of Dialema would not receive, but during their discords Abul Ganiar embracing th●●●casion to his advantage, seized upon Basora, and from thence he went to Wacet; so 〈◊〉 ●is kinsman's goods came into his power, the which Gelala sought to hinder by all means possible: but the soldiers would not march for him before they had their pay; so as for want of money, he demanded some as it were by way of loan, of the richest men in Bagadet, the which did purchase him the hatred of all men. In the mean time, Abulfau●r●e● who reigned in Kermon, seeing the affairs thus confused in Persia, levied an army to 〈◊〉 his profit thereby: but he died upon the way; so as the great men of Kermon 〈◊〉 one common consent called in Abul Ganiar, to whom they gave the government▪ and so he was declared king of Persia and Kermon: then without loss of any 〈◊〉 he came with a good army against Bagadet; but Gelala Daule met him and gave him 〈◊〉, ●he which Abul Ganiar lost, and was forced to retire to Awaz, and Gelala leaving 〈◊〉 garrisons at Wacet for the guard thereof, he returned to Bagadet in the year 103●, and of the Egyra 422, in which year the Calife Kader died, having held the seat one and forty years, and four months, in whose place they did set Kahem or Alkahem Bea●●●yla Abuiafar Abdula his son.   

¶ Kahem or Alkahem Beamaryla Abuiafar Abdula, the seven and fortieth Calife.  
THe time of Kahem or Alkahem the son of Kader was not more peaceable than the rest: and beginning with Karason, we have formerly spoken of the death of Mamud, whom Mahamed his son succeeded. He had a brother to whom his father in his life time had given the government of Hisphaon; who no sooner heard of his father's death, but he armed against his brother: he commanded over his subjects with such rigour, as all hated him, and seeing him absent, they revolted; but Mamud returned speedily, and invested the town, the which he took, and punished the rebels: after w●ich he continued his enterprise against Karason; but before he came there, he writ to his brother Mahamed, assuring him that his coming was only to serve him, for that the countries which he enjoyed were more than sufficient to make him live happily. Mahamed who was not well pleased with this visit, sent him word that he desired to be excused, and that he should return, the which did much discontent Masud; so as he declared himself an open enemy to Mahamed, whom they did advise to reconcile himself, the which he would not hearken to, but sent against his brother a captain called Issuf Sabutaquin, and he himself followed with the greatest forces he could raise; but he stayed a month at Tanganabat, where he passed the Ramedon of Mahometan Len●in the end Masud environed ●im, and by the treason of Issuf, and the villainy of Amir Aly (one of Mahameds' chief men) he was taken and delivered to Masud, who rewarded the traitors as they had deserved: for he cast Issuf laden with irons into a dungeon, and caused Amir Aly to be hanged, and as for his brother Mahamed, he put out his eyes, remaining after this manner master of the realms of Karason and Gazneken, besides the province of Hierak, which his father had given him, the which happened in the year of Grace 1032, and of the Egyra 422. After this he sent Altuntax governor of Koarrazm against Aly Taquin, who held Samarkand and Bokara, betwixt whom there was a battle, where Altuntax had the worst in the beginning, by reason of a stratagem which Taquin used; yet in end he had the victory, but it cost him dear: for he lost many of his men, and his own life, who seeing his end draw near, caused his people to make an accord with the enemy, lest they should fall into some danger, being without a head.  
In the year of Grace 1034, and of the Egyra 424, the country of Gibal, and the 〈…〉 w●●e of Rey, revolted against Masud, the like did the garrisons which his father had l●●t in India; but in recompense thereof, he subdued Geryon and Tabarstan: And where●●●● his absence two captains (Turks) the one called Togotel or Togozelbek, and jak●●●●●●alinquis, did rise against him, at his return he subdued them, and then he made a 〈…〉 India; but the Turks being but scattered, and not defeated, they made ●●ad ag●●ne by reason of his absence, and subdued many towns in Karason, forcing ●l●on Daulè Ben Kakuya, and Abusale, to go out of their governments, for which cause M●sud came presently to Geryon, and hearing in his passage that a robber by high ways ●ad retired himself into a fort, with a hundred of his companions, he caused them to ●ome unto him, upon his safe conduct and assurance: but when they were before him, he ●●nt them to be hanged, saying, That such people should be punished in any sort whatsoever, and so continuing his way, they made many complaints unto him of Nurse Taquin, governor of Balk, but he could hardly satisfy their demand, for that it was W●ter, and there had fallen abundance of rain; yet going on his way, he had news that Daud 〈◊〉 Turkish Captain brought great forces to succour Balk, in favour of Nurse Taquin; so as Masud fearing to be compassed in, went to encounter Daud, the which Nurse Taquin understanding, he pursued him, and charged his men in the rear, whereas he slew many, and carried away a great booty. Masud being thus ill entreated, continued his course ●gainst Daud, who vanquished him, and forced him to fly to Gazneken, where he put ●●ny Turks to death which were his soldiers, having fought but faintly in the bat●●le which he had against Daud Sailuk; then, having sent his son Maod●d to Balk, with ●●●cer Hamed his V●azir, and a good number of soldiers, he went towards India, carrying his blind brother, and his children, with him: coming to a passage of the river of ●●nd, (which the Persians call Pang, the which is that of Indus) he went over with his troops, leaving his blind brother, with his treasure, on the other side, in the guard of a captain called Nustaquin, who embracing this occasion, divided the treasure among his ●●●ldierss, and proclaimed the blind man king, who refused it: but in the end he yielded, for that they had otherwise threatened to kill him; after which, they passed the river with 〈◊〉, and fell upon Masuds men, who made no great resistance, expecting no such charge; 〈◊〉 Masud was taken, of whom they demanded no other satisfaction, but that he ●●uld content himself to live in peace in some convenient place; the which he accepted, and demanded the fort of Kobrakebir, the which was granted, with a good guard. issued, at his departure, entreated his brother to sand him some money to defray his ●●rney, but Mahamed (who was very covetous) commanded they should give him five ●●●dred Dragmes, which make about twelve pounds ten shillings starling, whereat Ma●●● was much grieved; but he that brought the money, gave him of his own one thou●●●d five hundred deniers of gold, which are about two thousand ducats, the which was ●●●●rwards well paid.  
〈◊〉 for the blind king, seeing himself unfit to govern, by reason of his blindness, he 〈◊〉 his realm to his son Hamed, who by the counsel of a son of Issuf, and of 〈◊〉 Aly Kachoand (whose fathers Masud had put to death, to revenge the blind king) 〈◊〉 secretly to Kobrakebir, and s●ue Masud, having been king ten years. He was very 〈◊〉, and bountiful; who having (as hath been said) sent his son Maodud to Balk: 〈◊〉 ●earing of his father's disgrace, and of the return of Mahamed from India, attended 〈◊〉 at the passage of Gazneken, where he took them at such an advantage, as he van●●●ed them, and took prisoners Mahamed, his son Hamed, and others that were there; 〈◊〉 to death Nustaquin, and the two councillors of the death of Masud, with many 〈◊〉 blood royal, except one Abderrhayn, son to the blind king, whose life he saved 〈◊〉 his occasion: Masud being a prisoner, Abderramon found him with a crown upon 〈◊〉, the which in contempt he cast to the ground; Abder Rhayn finding this deed 〈◊〉 ●●range, and taking it up, set it upon his uncles head, with words of great comfort, 〈◊〉 act of piety coming to the knowledge of Maodud, in this occasion he requited 〈◊〉 with his life.  
Mao●ud having obtained this victory, he caused a sumptuous building to be made, 〈◊〉 they call Fall Habad, and in the language of Karason, the place of Adoganè. The 〈◊〉 of Masud bred great combustions in Persia and India, from whence Maodud feared 〈◊〉 that his brother Maiudud should return and trouble him: but he died upon the 〈◊〉 as Maurenahar, and the lands in India, came into the possession of Maodud: yet 〈◊〉 ●urkes Salinguis, which were at Maurenahar and Karason, would not acknowledge 〈◊〉 against whom he sent his army, in the year of our Redemption 1045, and of the Egyra 435, against the which Olob Arsalon, the son of jakarbek, opposed himself with goodly troops, fought with them, and had the victory: on the other side, great multitudes of Turks going out of Turquestan, spoiled the countries of Garmeer and Kandachar; but the garrisons of Maodud attended them at the passage, and made a great slaughter.  
At that time, the kings of India which were vassals to Maodud, rebelled, and having made a league among themselves, they came to besiege Lahor, which Maodud sent speedily to relieve: but the dissensions of these kings among themselves, was the cause that Maodud pacified all things easily, and m●de the rest return to their former obedience. Having ended this quarrel, he caused his army to march against the Turks Salinquis, wh●●eld Karason, but he died upon the way of the colic, in the year of our Salvation 1050, and of the Egyra 441. Although he had two sons, yet the soldiers would have Aly Ben Masud his brother succeed him, but he did not long enjoy his royalty; for a Wazir of Maoduds set Abdella Rachid at liberty, and proclaimed him king, supporting him in such sort, as the other was forced to quit the place.  
As for Bagadet, matters were still in confusion: for the people revolted again against G●●●●a Daulè, in contempt of whom they proclaimed Abulganiar king of Bagadet, and sent for him, but he excused himself, wherein he was happy: for the Turks agreed soon after with Gelala Daule: yet this reconciliation was not lasting; for they made a new spoil within the town, the which they fired to have more means to spoil, seeking to chase away Gelala, so as these broils continued all the year of Christ 1037, and of the Egyra 427, and th● next year after, when the cold was so extreme, as the river of Degile, which is Tigris, was frozen twelve days together, and there fell such abundance of snow about Bagadet, as it lay three spans deep, the which is worthy of admiration, considering the climate.  
Gelala continued for a time in good terms with the Turks, but in the year of Grace 1044, and of the Egyra 434, one of their captains called Ebrahem Nealy Salinqui, entered ●●to Persia, in the province of Hyerak, and took Amedon.  
T●●zelbek, another captain, took the town of Rey, and hereupon Gelala Daulè died, having reigned seventeen years. His son Abu Mansur was at Wacet, whom they sent ●●r, but the troubles were such, as he durst not abandon the country; so as they gave government to Abul Ganiar. Tokzelbek, in the mean time, spoiled all Persia with a victorious army: whereupon, Abul Ganiar made an alliance with him, and married his son to the daughter of Daud Salinqui, cousin to Tokzelbek, and in the year following, which was in the year of our Redemption 1049, and of the Egyra 440, he died in Kermon, leaving five sons; Abu Mansurfulad Sotun, Kozrrao Feruz, Abu Taher, Abusayd Aboaly, and Kay Kozrrao. Sotun, as the eldest, thought to succeed, but Kozrrao Feruz seized upon the realm, who changing his name, was called Malek Rhaym; so as there was great wars betwixt these two brethren, with variable success; in the end, Rhaym, with the help of Tokzelbek, took Scyras, and the better part of Persia, all being in combustion, and then he returned to Wacet.  
The troubles continued also in Bagadet, the which had lasted since the death of Gelala, by the means of the Calife of Damas', who was of the family of Ishmael, and sought to expel the Calife Kahem or Alkahem, out of Bagadet, whom he forced to quit the seat, and to fly to Tokzelbek, with whom he had some friendship: he entered into Bagadet, and put all to ●●re and sword, sparing neither quick nor dead; for he opened the sepulchers to see if there were not some thing hidden in them, and so restored him to his Califeship. In the mean time, Malek Rhaym came to Bagadet, who notwithstanding all his allegations, and that he was retired into the Califs house, yet he fell into the hands of Tokzelbek, who put him in prison, where he died: but this peace did not reconcile his 〈◊〉 brethren, Mansur, and Abusayd, so as in the end, the last, after many variable 〈◊〉, was taken by Mansur, who put him to death: the like he did to a Wazir of his, 〈…〉 served his deceased father, setting in his place Facel Ben Acen, who seeing 〈…〉 ●●●led in his charge, in requital took king Mansur, and put him prisoner in a Tower, where he ended his days.  
In Kermon there was a Turkish captain called Saliuquy, and otherwise Malek Kaoerd, ●ho hearing what Pazel had done against Mansur, levied a great army against him; so ●s the other was forced to fly, and to retire to Olob Arselom, with whom he got great aches, yet he was not in such safety, but was taken prisoner, with a son of his at Na●om of Molk, and they were put into the sort of Stahhar, where they died, in the year of our Redemption 1057, and of the Egyra 448. As for Aboaly Kay Kozrrao, the son ●●to Abul Ganiar, to whom the father had left his government, he did willingly resign it 〈◊〉 the hands of Olob Arsalom, who gave him the lands of Naoband, jun, and Aktak, ●●ere he spent the remainder of his days; Arsalom entreating him still with much cour●●●●●. He lived forty years after his brethren, and died in the year of our Salvation ●●●5, and of the Egyra 487, which was in the end of the Daulès government in 〈◊〉.  
As for Togotel or Tokzelbek, he pursued Abdella Rachid, who had retired himself into a 〈◊〉 of that strength, as seeing he could not win it by force, he wrought so by gifts, as he ●●●rupted the guards, so as Abdella Rachid was delivered unto him, with many of his kins●●n, whom he caused to be murdered, and then he declared himself king, marrying a 〈◊〉 of the deceased: but within few days after, being in a public place to receive the salutations which they are accustomed to make in those quarters, ten of the chief 〈◊〉 of the country, combyning together, came to do it, who being round about him, ●●●w their swords, and slew him. Soon after, Charkir, a captain which came from the ●●●diess, freed Ferrogozad out of prison, who was the son of Masud, and brother to Abdella ●●●hid, and made him king. Daud Saliuqui, of whom Ferrogozad had gotten the victory, ●●yed an army to go against Karason, against whom Saliuqui, king of Turquestan, sent ●●ny of his captains, who were vanquished: in the end, Olob Arsalom did fight with 〈◊〉, and defeated him, taking many Gazneys' prisoners, who were afterwards revenged ●he Turks that were prisoners in Gaznehen. Ferrogozad having governed six mo●●●●ss, died, leaving to succeed him his brother Kobrahem Ben Masud, at that time also di●●● ●ahem or Alkahem the Calife, in the year of our Lord God 1074, and of the Egyra 〈◊〉, having held the place four and forty years, and four months.   

¶ Almoktady Byla, the eight and fortieth Calife.  
●Fter the death of Kahem, Almoktady Byla was set in his place, in whose time there 〈◊〉 were many broils in Persia, but of small importance: and as for Karason, and the ●●●●trie of Maurenahar, Hebrahem, brother to Ferrogozad, who had succeeded him after ●eath, made an accord with the Turks, and having settled his realm in peace, he 〈◊〉 voyage into India, where he got great conquests, and took great spoils: but 〈◊〉, king of Turquestan, seeing Persia to enjoy a secure peace, thought the time fit 〈…〉 his profit, for the effecting whereof, he levied a great army, whereof Ebrahem 〈◊〉 advertised, he sent Ambassadors unto him, by whose means he was diverted 〈◊〉 his design, and for the better confirmation of their friendship, Ebrahem married 〈◊〉 Masud to the daughter of Malekcha, and then Ebrahem died, in the year of our 〈◊〉 1089, and of the Egyra 481. Six years after, the Calife Almoktady Byla died, 〈◊〉 year of our Lord God 1095, and of the Egyra 487, having governed nineteen 〈◊〉 and five months.   

¶ Almostazer Byla, the nine and fortieth Calife.  
●●●ostazer, the son of Almoktady, succeeded his father; in whose time Bagadet ha●●ng been ruined by the overflowing of the river of Tigris, the situation was 〈◊〉, and it was new built on the other side of the river towards the East, where it 〈◊〉, in a more commodious situation than the first, having had five and twenty 〈◊〉 since the first foundation laid by Abuiafar, and yet not one of them died in it, the which is worthy of consideration. As for Almostazer Byla, he lived in peace in a manner the whole time of his government, which was five and twenty years, and six months, at the end whereof he died, in the year of our Lord God 1129, and of the Egyra 512.   

¶ Almostarched Byla Fazele, the fiftieth Calife.  
TO this ●●●able Calife succeeded his son Almostarched, who was very courageous, 〈◊〉 inclined to war, the which he made against some princes of Persia, and having se●●ed upon some of the provinces of Masud Saliuqui king of Karason, they fought with variable success, but in the end Masud had the victory near unto Tabris, whereas Almostarched was defeated, and escaped by flight, yet he was presently after taken, and presented to Masud, who caused him to be slain, in the year of Grace 1136, and of the Egyra 529, having governed seventeen years, and two months.   

¶ Rached Byla, the one and fiftieth Calife.  
RAched Byla, son to Almostarched, came to be Calife after the death of his father, whereof desiring to be revenged, he levied all the forces he could, and went against Masud into Persia, whereof he conquered a great part, but being encountered by his enemy who gave him battle, he was vanquished, and fled to Isfaon, the chief town of Hierak in Persia, whereas Masud caused him to be slain, in the year of Grace 1139, and of the Egyra 532, after whose death Masud came to Bagadet, where he entered without any resistance.   

¶ Almoktafy Byla, the two and fiftieth Calife.  
MAsud being master of Bagadet in the place of Rached, he seated Almoktafy Byla, uncle to the deceased, and soon after Masud died in Persia, his captains contenting themselves with what they had in government: the which encouraged Almoktafy to levy a goodly army, & to go into Persia, where he recovered without any great resistance, that which Masud had usurped, the which having enjoyed the space of two and forty years, without any notable innovation, he died in the year of our Redemption 1161, and of the Egyra 555.   

¶ Almostanget Byla Issuf, the three and fiftieth Calife.  
TO the Calife Almoktafy succeeded his son Almostanget Byla Issuf, Masud dying in Persia (as hath been said) in his father's life time; Arsalon Chason, his eldest son, had succeeded him in Gaznehen, who being come unto the crown, caused all his brethren (which were many in number) to be taken, only one called Baharoncha escaped. They had two kinsmen, the one was Governor of Karason, called Saniar, and the other of Hierak in Persia, whose name was Mahamed: these two were brethren: Baharoncha retired himself to Saniar, who sought to reconcile him to Arsalon; but he refusing it, Saniar made war against him, and entered into Gaznehen, so as in the end Arsalon was vanquished: an aunt of his sought to reconcile them, but Saniar by the persuasion of Baroncha, returned to arms, and having gotten a second victory of Arsalon, he entered again into Gaznehen, whereas he had a very rich spoil: then having settled Baharoncha in possession of this country, he returned home. Arsalon seeing him absent, returned again into Gaznehen, forcing Baharoncha to fly, whom Saniar restored afterwards; and Arsalon flying away, he was taken and brought unto his brother, who caused him to be slain, having reigned three years, in the year 1119, and of the Egyra 512, Baharon remaining in quiet possession. He was a very good prince, courteous, and bountiful, loving learned men, himself being very learned; so as he writ some works in philosophy: yet his study made him not to lose his warlike disposition, so as he made some enterprises in India and Persia, where he died, in the year of Christ 1153, and of the Egyra 547, having reigned five and thirty years.  
Kozrrao his son succeeded him, but there falling out many combustions in this new royalty, and not holding himself satisfied in his country, he went into India to the province of Lahor, returning afterwards to Gaznehen: but finding his realm made subject to Saniar king of Karason, and that he was not able to oppose himself against his power, he returned to Lahor, where he died, in the year of our Redemption 1161, and for the Egyra 555, having reigned nine years. His son Kozrrao Malek succeeded him in Lahor, the chief of the realm of Molton in India: for as for Persia, all his realms were held by others; and to recover them it required a more warlike spirit & less vicious than his, which made him hateful to all men, and especially to soldiers. A part of the country of Gaznehen was held by one Sultan Guaya Cadin Mahamed Gaury, who made some incursions into India towards Lahor, the which he took, so as Kozrrao Malek returned into Gaznehen, where he died, in the year of our Salvation 1169, and of the Egyra 563, and in him the Sabutaquis ended. Three years after, the Calife Almostanger died, in the year of our Lord God 1172, and of the Egyra 566, having governed eleven years.   

¶ Almostanzy Benur Elah Acen, the four and fiftieth Calife.  
ALmostanzy Benur Elah was Calife after the death of his father: he was a good prince, bountiful, and beloved of his subjects: he governed nine years, and eight months, and died in the year of Grace 1180, and of the Egyra 575, there happening nothing memorable during his reign.   

¶ Nacer, or Nacere Ladin, the five and fiftieth Calife.  
ALmostanzy being dead, his son Nacer, or Nacere Ladin, came to be Calife, who held it seven and forty years, under whom Bagadet did greatly flourish. During 〈◊〉 government, they of Koarrazm came against the Saluiquiss, vanquished them, and ●●de them subject, and the Tartarians, under the leading of Chinguis Kam, seized upon 〈◊〉 countries of Turon, and Agem, putting all to fire and sword, at what time the Calife 〈◊〉 died, in the year of Christ 1226, and of the Egyra 622.   

¶ Alzaher or Altaher Byla Mahamed, the six and fiftieth Calife.  
THe son of Nacer called Alzaher or Altaher Byla Mahamed was made Calife in his father's place, the which he enjoyed but nine months, for he died in the year of our ●●●uation 1227, and of the Egyra 623.   

Almostancer Byla, the seven and fiftieth Calife.  
ALmostancer Byla Mansur succeeded his father Alzaher: he did so much esteem liberality, as having given away prodigally, he become poor. In his time Persia en●yed a profound peace: but the Mogoles or Tartarians having made their first entry, 〈◊〉 masters of some of the provinces, against whom the Calife Almostancer oppo●● himself, forcing them to quit the best part of that which they had gotten, and ha●●●g defeated them divers times, he died the seventeenth year of his government, in 〈◊〉 year of Grace 1244, and of the Egyra 640.   

¶ Almostacem Byla Abdula, the eight and fiftieth and last Calife of Bagadet.  
THe Tartarians having been vanquished (as you have heard) by Almostancer Byla, they had their revenge under the government of his son Almostacem, for Ol●kukan vanquished him, and slew him, having been Calife fifteen years, and six months: Th●● 〈◊〉 Califs of Bagadet ended in him, which town we call Babylon or Baldak, 〈◊〉 Tartarians seizing thereon, and on all Persia, there having been seven and thi●●● 〈◊〉 this family, who commanded about five hundred twenty and three years, of ●●om they had entreated particularly, for that in the Chronicle of Persia they are accounted for kings thereof, as well by Tavarich, as Mirkond. Almostacem died in the year o● our Redemption 1258, and of the Egyry 655.    

❧ OF THE MOGOLES OR TARTARIANS WHICH HAVE COMMANDED IN PERSIA.  

¶ Chinguis Can, first king of Persia of the Tartarians.  
CHinguis Can, who was the first of the Tartarians that showed his arms in Persia, was son to Sukih Badur, that is to say, the valiant, of whom this is the Genealogy: Badur was son to Partan Badur, son to Filkam, son to Thomanahkan, son to Baysongorkan, son to Kaduhkan, son to Tominkan, son to Bukahkan, son to Buza●●ar, who was the ninth in degree from Chinguis Can, who was borne in the year of Grace 1152, and of the Egyra 546. He lost his father whenas he was but thirteen years old, in whose youth there happened many enterprises and combustions, the which continued unto the year of our Redemption 1166, and of the Egyra 560, in which year Chinguis Can vanquished all lets, and them that contended with him for the realm, enjoying in the end whatsoever his father and ancestors had held. Before they called him Tamachin, but when he was settled in the realm (which was in the year of Christ 1207, and of the Egyra 602) he was called Chinguis Can, that is to say in their language, King of Kings: he was a mighty prince, reducing under his empire and obedience all the Hordes or families of the Tartarians, with the realms of Ketaokotan, Helan, Tangier, and others, the which having subdued in the year of Grace 1219, and of the Egyra 615, he went out of his confines with a very powerful army, and invaded the country of Maurenahar; against whom Mahomet Koarrazmcha opposed himself, but seeing his attempts to be of small force against so powerful and terrible an enemy, he abandoned the countries, and fled to Karason.  
Chinguis Can entered into Maurenahar, in the year of our Lord 1224, and of the Egyra 620, putting all to the sword that he found living in that country; the like he did at Balk, from whence he sent thirty thousand men to pursue Mahomet Koarramzcha, who fled always before him, but in the end he was overtaken at Abyskon, or in Gueylon, where they slew him, putting all his country to fire and sword; from thence he went against the town of Rey, in the which, and therebouts, they writ that the Mogoles or Tartarians slew six hundred thousand persons, yea some say 1600000, and in the provinces of Nichabur, besides women and young children, 1150000 men, yea some say 1600000, committing the like spoils during a whole year throughout all the provinces of Persia. Almostancher Byla Mansur Alzaher, at that time Calife of Bagadet, levied what forces he could to oppose against this storm, and to keep them out of his country, who being divided into divers provinces, he took them at such an advantage, as he forced them to leave Persia, and to retire into Maurenahar, in the year of Grace 1227, of the Egyra 623.  
By the death of Mahamet king of Koarrazm, his son seeing himself unable to resist the Tartarians, fled into India; he was called Sultan Gelaladin, whom the Mogoles pursued, and finding him near unto the river of Indus, they gave him battle, in the which he was vanquished, and forced to retire to Multon, a country situated in the inmost part of India. As for Chinguis Can, having thus made his way, and given the first entry into Persia, he returned to Ketaokotan, where he died, in the year of our Salvation 1228, and of the Egyra 624, being seventy eight years old: and being in peaceable possession of his realm, at the age of five and twenty years, he had five sons, whereof the eldest was called Tuchikhon, to whom the father gave the government of the realms of Dast, Kapechah Ross; Albugar, who died six months before his father; Chagataykon, who having the government of Maurenahar, Aygor, and Koarrazm, having possessed these realms ●nto the year 1241, and of the Egyra 638; the fourth was Oktaykahon, who succeeded his father; and the fift was Tulikhan, to whom the father gave certain provinces, with all his treasure: he died also, in the year of Christ 1232, and of the Egyra 628; so as of the five sons of Chingui Can, Oktaykahon only survived to enjoy this great succession: yet the other had some children, of whose succession we shall make mention hereafter. That which Mirkond reports, should not be passed over with silence, which is, That it was held for certain, that whenas Chinguis Can was borne, he had both his hands open, and in either of them a little blood, a certain prediction of his very great cruelty.   

¶ Oktaykahon, the second king of Persia of the Mogoles or Tartarians.  
OKtaykahon, the fourth son of Chinguis Can, succeeded him in the empire, in the year of our Redemption 1230, and of the Egyra 626: This prince was as good as 〈◊〉 father had been bad; and among his other good parts, he was very bountiful. Mermaid reports, That in gifts, and extraordinary recompenses in his life time, he spent six ●●ndred sixty six bolses (to speak after the Persian phrase) of thousands of Tomanis, ●●erie Toman being worth sixteen ducats; which amount in all to the sum of ten ●●llionss, six hundred fifty six thousand ducats. He had for Vuazir one called Gerbahhon ●●●yn, a great soldier, and very wise, whom he sent against Gelaladin, who had retired to ●●lton, who having gathered his forces together, went to encounter him, and to fight ●●th him, but he was vanquished, & slain in the battle, the family of them of Koarrazm●● ●● ending in him. After this, he turned his forces against Persia, and reduced it all under ●●● obedience, except Bagadet: Then, having reigned thirteen years, he died, being all ●●nt within, through his immoderate drinking of wine, in the year of our Lord God ●42, and of the Egyra 646. He left one son called Gayuk Khan, who, by reason of his ●●●age, was under the government of his mother, who governed this empire four ●●ress.   

¶ Gayuk Khan, the third king of Persia of the Tartarians.  
GAyuk Khan, son to Oktaykahon, began to reign in the year of our Lord God 1246, and of the Egyra 643. He gave great hope that he would be a good prince, being a ●●eat friend to justice, liberal, and no enemy to Christians, which purchased him the love ●● all men, but he reigned but one year, at the end whereof he died, in the year of our valuation 1247, and of the Egyra 644.   

¶ Manchukahon, the fourth king of Persia of the Tartarians.  
MAnchukahon, eldest son to Tuly Khan, fift son to Chinguis Khan, came unto the crown, his cousin having left no children; he was a good prince, valiant, liberal, and courteous. He much favoured the Moors, and yet was not opposite to the Christians, but he detested the jews, and persecuted them. He gave to Kablay Kahon his brother the lands of Ketao Kotan, who increased them much (: this prince built the famous city of Cambalu, at this day the court of the great Bohemian-tartar:) and to his other brother Vlah Kukhan he gave the lands of Persia; then having reigned thirty years, he died, in the year of Christ 1260, and of the Egyra 657.   

¶ Vlah Kukhan, the fift king of Persia of the Tartarians.  
VLah Kukhan, having had (as hath been said) the provinces of Persia in government, during his brother's life time, he presently set hand to work, and besieged Ismaelya, a place of importance, the which he carried, leaving not any one living that he found within it: from thence he went to Hyerak, the which he subdued, and the year following, he led his army against Bagadet, against whom there sallied forth Almostacem the Calife, who was vanquished and slain with his four sons, cutting all in pieces that he found, as well in Bagadet as thereabouts, so as (they say) he slew at the lest a million and six hundred thousand persons: then, in the year of Christ 1261, and of the Egyra 658, he went to besiege Alep, and Damas', the which he subdued, leaving Kaptukahon for Governor of those parts of Suria: then he returned into Persia, into the province of Aderbajon, to a place called Meragah near to Tabris, where he died, in the year of our Salvation 1266, and of the Egyra 663. Before his death, he divided his lands to his three sons; to the eldest, called Habkaikahon, he gave the realms of Hierak, Mazandaron, and Karason; to the second, whose name was Hyachemet, he gave Aron, which is Armenia, and Aderbajon; to Taudon, which was the third, he left the country of Dyarbek, & Rabyah, which is Mesopotamia: Moreover, he gave Bagadet to Atalmok jawiny, to repair it, as he did; and to another, called Mahynedin Paroaney, certain lands in Rumeston. At that time, there flourished in Persia a very excellent ginger, called Nacyradin Tuffy, who hath composed a book called Zych-el-Kony, of judgements and figures, very famous among the Persians.  
Besides these three sons above mentioned, Vlah Kukhan had two other sons, the one called Nycudar Oglan, and the other Targahekhan, to whom the father had left no portions, as being the youngest, but yet they had their parts, and the children of the other had also their shares.   

¶ Haybkaykhan, the sixt king of Persia of the Tartarians.  
HAybkaykhan, the son of Vlah Kukhan, succeeded his father in the signory of Persia. He had war with Borakhan, who drew a great army out of Chagatay, in the year of Christ 1271, and of the Egyra 668, against whom Haybkaykhan did fight, and vanquished him, forcing him to retire to Maurenahar. He was king seventeen years, at the end whereof he died in Amedon, in the year of Grace 1282, and of the Egyra 680, for that he had no children, they set his brother Nicudar Oglan in his place, who caused himself to be called Hamed Khan.   

¶ Hamed Khan, before Nicudar Oglan, the seventh king of Persia of the Tartarians.  
HAmed Khan, who was before called Nicudar Oglan, made himself a Moor, and changed his first name. He reigned only two years, and two months, at the end whereof he died, in the year of our Salvation 1383, and of the Egyra 683, so as the realm returned to the children of Haybkaykhan.   

¶ Argon-Khon, the eight king of Persia of the Tartarians.  
ARgon-Khon, eldest son to Haybkaykhan, came to the realm by his uncles death, the which he enjoyed seven years, and then died, in the year of Grace 1292, and of the Egyra 690, leaving the government to his brother Ganiatukhon.   

¶ Ganiatukhon, the ninth king of Persia of the Tartarians.  
Five months after the death of Argon, Ganiatukhon was advanced unto the crown. This prince was very liberal, & had many excellent parts, all which were blemished by his sensuality. Being very needy, he thought to bring the use of paper money into Persia, & into the provinces of Ketaokotan, but no man would yield unto it; and he that d●● most oppose himself was an uncle of his called Baydu Kon, who upon this subject ●ade war against him, and slew him in battle, having been king three years, in the ●●are of Christ 1295, and of the Egyra 693.   

¶ Badu Khan, the tenth king of Persia of the Tartarians.  
BAdu Khan, son to Turgahe, the son of Vlah Kukhan, uncle to the last king, having thus forcibly seized upon the realm, Gazun, the son of Argon Khon, came against him with a goodly army, consisting all of Moors, and they met at Badukhem, and at Nakchoan, where he was vanquished, and forced to fly; but he was taken by a Vuazir to Gazun, who brought him to Tabris, where he put him to death, in the year of Grace ●296, and of the Egyra 694, having held the realm but one year.   

¶ Gazun, the eleventh king of Persia of the Tartarians.  
GAzun, the son of Argon, the son of Haybkaykhon, the son of Vlah Kukhan, made himself king of Persia by the death of Badu, he was a great justicer: in the year of ●●rist 1298, and of the Egyra 696, they of Damas', & of some other places of Surya, ma●●●g a league with Bendokdar king of Egypt, revolted against him: but having led an ●●●ie against them, he vanquished them, and reduced them under his obedience, returning thus victorious to Kasuin in Persia, which was afterwards the court of kings: he died ●●●e, in the year of our Salvation 1305, and of the Egyra 703, having reigned eight or 〈◊〉 years: he was buried at Tabris in Zambgazun, in a sumptuous Temple which he 〈◊〉 caused to be built in his life time; and of all those of this line, there is only this tomb ●●nding at this day, the which hath been preserved from the injury of time.   

¶ Alyaptu, the twelfth king of Persia of the Tartarians.  
THe government of the realm fell into the hands of Alyaptu, brother to the deceased king, who having made himself a Moor, caused himself to be called Sulton Maha●●● Ben Argon: he was but three and twenty years old when he began to govern, and 〈◊〉 his court at Tabris: he was very severe in the execution of justice, by means where●● he kept his people in rest and content. He was the first that brought in a custom to 〈◊〉 a tribute of the children of Christians and jews, to frame them after his own fa●o●ss, and to use their service, in the year of Grace 1306, and of the Egyra 705. He built ●●● town of Sultania, and in the year following, he seized upon Gueylon, and Racht. 〈◊〉 armed against Chamlet, or Damas', which had revolted the second time, in the year of ●●●ce 1313, and of the Egyra 712, but having reduced them to reason, he returned into ●●●ia, and died in the town of Sultania, in the year of Christ 1317, and of the Egyra 〈◊〉, having been king twelve years, and nine months.   

¶ Abuzayd Bahederkon, the thirteenth king of Persia of the Tartarians.  
SVltan Abuzayd Bahederkon, the son of Alyaptu, inherited his father's realm at the age of twelve years: he had for his Vayzir one called Amir Chupon, who had a daughter exceeding fair that was married, of whom the king grew passionately in love; so as he demanded her of her father, who excused himself, and would not give her, saying, That her husband only had power over her: but Abuzayd full of choler, and transported with affection, took her by force, putting both father and husband (who sought to hinder him) to death, and he gave her the name of Kondekar, which is a royal title; she got such power over him, as in a short time he got the whole government of the realm into her hands, wherein she carried herself wisely and discreetly, and he in the mean time spent his life virtuously, giving himself to the reading of books, to the which he was much affected. He was of an active disposition and good understanding: most commonly he spent the Summer in Sultania, and the Winter in Bagadet, and having reigned nineteen years, he died in the year of Grace 1337, and of the Egyra 736, by his death the power of the Tartarians was divided in Persia, every man terming himself king of what he had in his government, and so it continued unto the coming of Teymurlang, which was about sixty three years.    

¶ TARTARIANS WHICH COMMANDED IN PERSIA OF THE DESCENDANTS OF TEYMURLANG.  

¶ Teymurlang, the first king of Persia of this line.  
TEymurlang, whom they commonly called Tamberlan, that is to say, Teymur the ●●●ping, was son to Buiankan, and the fourteenth successor to Chinguis Can, from whom he was descended: for he was not as some have affirmed, a thief, a moil keeper, or a shepherd, but a valiant soldier as his actions do show. He was borne in Samarkand, and followed arms as his predecessors had done: his fift grandfather, called Carachar Nuyon, went out of Tartary with Chinguis Can, at such time as the same king sent Chagatayhkhon, his second son, to govern the realms of Maurenahar, Ayg●r, and Koarrazm, where he was made his first Vuazir, in which dignity he and his continued unto Teymur, with other charges fit for his quality and his great extraction. In the time of Teymur, there reigned in Chagaty Soyorgat Mechkhom, under whom Teymur did serve, with the title of Vuazir and captain general; and Soyorgat dying, in the year of Grace 1370, and of the Egyra 7●1. Teymurlang was proclaimed king with the general consent of all men, then seeing himself settled in the realm, he went forth with an innumerable army, attempting nothing but it succeeded happily: so as in the ●pace of six and thirty years that he reigned, besides the realms which he possess; he conquered those of Maurenahar, Turquestan, Koarrazm, Karason, Sistom, Indu●●●m, Hyera●●ens, Pa●●, Kermon, Mazandaron, Aderbajon, and Kusistam, all which, and others; his children and captains, divided among them after his death. In the year of Grace 1388, and of the Egyra 789, Teymur being advertised of a certain rebellion which was made 〈…〉, the chief city of the province of Hierak in Persia, he went thither in person to suppress it, as he did, putting 60000 persons to the sword: Toktamechkhon was king of Kapechak by ●he favour of Teymur, who fought to rebel as others had done: but he got nothing but blows, for Teymur sent an army against him, the which forced him ●o abandon the realm, and to fly into Gurgestam. In the year of Grace 1402, and of 〈◊〉 Egyra 803, Teymur led a mighty army into Surya, took and ruined Alep and Damas', & defeated Sultan Farache king of Egypt in battle: from thence he returned against Bagadet, the which he also took, and from thence he went to Kabka near unto Tabris, where he wintered. The year following, having gathered together a greater army than before, he went into the plain of Angory, against the great Turk Bajazet, whom he fought with and vanquished, carrying him away prisoner, conquering an spoiling many of his countries: As for Bajazet he died a prisoner the year after. Whilst that Teymur was thus busied against the Turks, one called Kara Issuff gave a sudden assault to Bagadet, and forced Weyshelkony (to whom Teymur had given it) to abandon it: but being returned out of Rumestan, he sent his nephew Abubakar against Kara Issuf, who recovered the city, and restored it to Sulton Weys, as shall be said hereafter. Teymur passed afterwards to Ardivil, where he continued certain days, and in favour of Cheque Safy, released a great number of captives (as you shall hear hereafter;) then leaving Persia, he returned into Karason, from whence he went afterwards to Samarkand his own country, where he spent some months in feasts and great joy, contracting many marriages amongst the citizens. In the end, he went to Anzar, a country which depends of Catay, where he ended the remainder of his days, in the year of our Lord God 1405, and of the Egyra 807.  
Teymurlang had four sons, the eldest was called joon Guyr, who died a year before his father, leaving two sons, Mahamed Sulton, and Pyr Mahamed, whom Teymur ordained in his will that he should succeed him in his realms of Gaznehen and India, but Pyr Aly slew him. The second son of Teymur, called Hamar Cheque, was in his father's life time governor of Persia, but he died in the fort of Chormatu, which they call Kormawat in Lorestan; and the third son, called Miruncha, succeeded in the government of those lands which Vlah Kukhan held in Hyerakhen, and Aderbajon, unto Damas. He died, in the year of our Salvation 1408, and of the Egyra 810, by the hand of Kara Issuf Turcoman. The fourth son of Teymur, called Mirzahcharok, who had always accompanied the father, succeeded him in the empire.   

¶ Mirzahcharok, who was the second King of the descendants of Teymurlang.  
MIrzahcharok, the youngest of the four sons of Teymurlang, was in Karason when his father died at Anzar. Being come unto the empire, he found not his realm so peaceable as he expected: for they of Hyron and Turon would not acknowledge him ●or king, then having pacified all these broils, he led his army against Kara Issuf in Ader●ajon, who being armed with an intent to defend himself, died upon the way, leaving too sons, the one called Mirzah Scandar, and the other Mirzah jooncha, who came to ●●ght with Charok, but they were vanquished: yet afterwards he received Mirzah joon●●● into his service, and restored him to the realm of Aderbajon. After this Charok built ● town in Maurenahar, which they called by his name Charokya: Then, having raig●●● three and forty years, he died, in the year of Grace 1447, and of the Egyra 850. He ●ad five sons, to the eldest, called Mirzah Oleghbek, he gave the countries of Turque●●●n and Maurenahar: The second, Ebrahem Sultan, died before the father, in the year of ●race 1435, and of the Egyra 838, having governed Persia twenty years, and built ●●ny edefices worthy of memory. A year before the father's death, Baesfangor his ●●●●d son died: the fourth, called Mirzah Soyorgat Mechkhon, who governed the provinces of Gazna or Gaznehen, and of India, died in his father's life time: and the fift, called Mirzah Mahamed juguy, died also before Charok. Whenas Teymurlang died, they of Samarkand saluted a kinsman of his called Sulton Kalil for king, against whom there revolted a vassal of his called Kodahdad Hosceny, and took him, than he called to his succours ●●ama joon king of Magolstam or Tartary, and gave him entry into this province: but ●● being in possession, put Kodahdad Hosceny to death, rewarding him in that manner for ●●● treason, and gave another realm in exchange to Kalil, where he lived the remainder of his days content.   

¶ Mirzah Ologhbek, the third king of the descendants of Teymurlang.  
OLoghbek, who in the life of his father Charok was Governor of the countries of Turquestan and Maurenahar, came to Balk in the year of Grace 1448, and of the Egy●a 851, where he was advertised that in Herat, and Karason, Mirzah Alahdaolet his kinsman entitled himself king, he armed against him, and met him at Morgab, where he fought with him, and defeated him: the other being forced to fly to a brother of his called Mirzah Baber, in whose company he returned against Ologhbek, who leaving Herat, went to draw his forces together at Balk: but he found that a son of his called Mirzah Abdelatife had revolted against him, so as he was forced to give him battle, the which Ologhbek lost, with his life, and a sons of his that was with him called Mirzah Abdella Razis, having commanded one and forty years in those countries, and two years only after the death of his father, having the whole succession, being in the year of Christ 1450, and of the Egyra 853.   

¶ Mirzach Abdelatife, the fourth king of the descendants of Teymurlang.  
MIrzach Abdelitife being thus rid of his father and brother, got to himself the quiet possession of the realm of Persia: but he held it not long, for at the end of six months the soldiers flew him.   

¶ Mirzach Abdula, who was the fift King of the descendants of Teymurlang.  
MIrzach Abdelatife being justly rewarded for his particide, his brother Mirzach Abdula had the realm after his death, the which having enjoyed one year, Mirzah Sulton Abusayd, king of Karason, came and spoiled his country: against whom Abdula went, but he lost the battle, and his life, in the year of of our Salvation 1452, and of the Egyra 855.   

¶ Mirzach Sulton Abusayd, the sixt king of the descendants of Teymurlang.  
MIrzach Sulton Abusayd, the son of Mahamed, the son of Miromcha, the son of Teymur, having thus slain Abdula, seized upon the realm. There grew new wars betwixt Mirzach Ebrahem, and Mirzahcha Mahamud, against whom Mirzah jooncha went, from whom these two fled, and he took their countries: whereupon, they both armed against him, but they came not to fight, for they were reconciled, making a division of their governments. Presently after this accord, Mirzah Saniar, with Mirzah Aladaolet, and his son Mirzah Ebrahem, private princes, came to fight with Abusayd at Saraks, but he vanquished them, in which battle Saniar was slain, and the other two fled. At that time Abusayd held the realm of Badachon, Gaznehen, Kabul, Sistom, and Koarrazm. In the year of our Redemption 1468, and of the Egyra 872, Mirzach Asemhek Ben Alybek Ben Kara Otman flew Mirzah jooncha, by reason of whose death they called Abusayd to the government of Kermon, Hierak, and Aderbajon, Acembek being hidden, craned a peace of him by an Ambassador, but he would not yield unto it. Hereupon Acembek retired to Karabag (these are mountains about Tabris, and upon the way) seizing upon all the passages, distressing Abusayd in such sort for victuals, as despairing of all succours, he fled; but he was taken, and brought to Mirzah Yadigar Mahamed, who went in the company of Acembek, whom he flew, in the year of our Redemption 1469, and of the Egyra 873.   

¶ Mirzah Sulton Hamed, the seven king of the discendants of Teymurlang.  
ABusayd being thus slain, MirZah Sulton Hamed his son succeeded him in the realm of Maurenahar, the which he enjoyed eight and twenty years: at the end whereof he died, in the year of Grace 1495, and of the Egyra 899.   

¶ Mirzah Babor, the eight king of the descendants of Teymurlang.  
MIrzah Babor cousin to Hamed, and grandchild to Abusayd, succeeded in the realm of Maurenahar, by the death of his uncle, in the year of Grace 1500, and of the Egyra 904: but Ichaybekan came from Vsbek, and dispossessed him of his realm, where there was no more any king of the blood of Teymurlang: Mirzah Babor flying out of Maurenahar, went into Gaznehen, and from thence into India, where he made his abode: and having reigned in the one and in the other county eight and thirty years, he died, in the year of Grace 1532, and of the Egyra 937, leaving two sons, Homayon Mirzah, and Kamoran Mirzah, who were kings after the father: Homayon had the best provinces of India. He had a Wazir called Chyrkan, who revolted against him, forcing him to abandon his realms, and to fly into Persia, whereas then Chatamas reigned, who assisted him with twelve thousand choice men, under the command of a captain of his called Beyramkan, who leading Homayon with him, restored him to his realms, reducing all under his obedience, with the death of the rebel Chyrkan. Gelaladin Akbar the great Mogul was the son of this Homayon, who lived in the year 1609.   

¶ Mirzah Hiadigar, the ninth king of the descendants of Teymurlang.  
Mirzah Hiadigar the son of Mirzah Sulton Mahamed, the son of Mirzah Baesfangor or Baysangor, the son of Mirzah Charrok, the son of Teymurlang. Having in the year of the Egyra 873 (being accompanied by Acembek) slain Abusayd, as hath been spoken, he succoured him with an army, with the which he marched against Strabat. At that ●●ne there reigned in Karason Ocem Mirzah the son of Mansur, the son of Bahekara, the son of Hamar Cheque, who was the son of Teymur; who hearing of the design of Hiadigar, came in great haste to secure Strabat, and vanquished him, in the year of Grace 1470, and of the Egyra 874, who being thus defeated, returned to Acembek being at Tabris, who supplied him again with a great army, with the which he charged ●eem Mirzah, and put him to flight, forcing him to abandon the realm, and to go towards Faryab and Mayman near Balk. Hiadigar having thus gotten the government of the country, gave himself to pleasure, and to all sorts of vices; so as his negligence and illlenesse gave courage to Ocem to come and assail him by night, having with him but a thousand resolute soldiers, with the which he did so manage his enterprise, as he seized ●n his enemy, whom having in his power, he put to death; and in this manner recovered again the possession of his realm: this happened in the year of Grace 1471, and of the Egyra 875. In Hiadigar ended the race of Mirabel Charrok. And for that heretofore we have counted the year 1532, and yet the things which happened under this prince were done in the year 1571, as hath been said, and although we have set Hiadigar after Mirzah Babor; yet the reader shall be advertised that the provinces of Persia were then divided, and commanded by many kings at one time. And for that they have sometimes in their turns commanded the whole realm, they are not therefore all accounted kings, but of the whole country of Persia, at the lest of the provinces which depend there●on, one after another, and yet there is no confusion in the chronology, as you may easily observe.   

Mirzah Sultan Ocem, the tenth king of the descendants of Teymurlang.  
MIrzah Sultan Ocens the son of Mansur, the son of Bahekara, the son of Hamer Cheque, the son of Teymur, having thus recovered the realm which Hadigar had taken from him, he governed his people long in peace, the which he affected the more, for that he was a lover of justice. He beautified his realm with many stately buildings, among the which (and the most famous) was a Madrese, or Hospital to receive poor Pilgrim strangers; a work worthy of a great prince.  
In his time the Vsbekes came into Maurenahar, whereas they took some lands from the descendants of Teymurlang, who had enjoyed them unto that day, against whom Ocem meaning to oppose himself, levied an army to march against them, who being upon the way, died at Vuadekis, in the year of Grace 1506, and of the Egyra 911, having reigned four and thirty years, and been king of all Karason four months: he lived seventy years, whereof he was twenty continually sick of a palsy, and could not go to horseback. He had fourteen sons, of which two succeeded him.   

¶ Bahady, or Pedy Amazon, and Musafar Mirzach, the eleventh king of the descendants of Teymurlang.  
BAhady or Pedy Amazon, and Mansafar Mirzach, brethren, and sons to the deceased Ocem, reigned together after their father, against whom came Chaybek Vsbek: but they finding themselves unable to resist him, abandoned the country: Bahady Amazon went to Truchis, where having levied a small army, he went against Vsbek, by whom he was defeated, and forced to fly into Persia, to Cha Ishmael who reigned at that time, by whom he was courteously entertained, giving him the lands of Chambe Gazon in Tabris, whereof he lived, and moreover ten Serafs of gold by the day, for his diet; every Seraf of gold in Persia is worth eight Larines, and every Larine is twelve pence sterling, little more or less. Bahady remained in Tabris seven years, unto the year 1515, and of the Egyra 920, that Selim the Emperor of the Turks took the town of Tabris, and carried him with him to Constantinople, where he died of the plague, in the year of Grace 1518, and of the Egyra 923.   

¶ Mirzach Homar, the twelfth king of the descendants of Teymurlang.  
MIromcha, the third son of Teymurlang, had two sons, the one called Mirzach Homar, who succeeded him in the government of Aderbajon, and Abubakar in Bagadet: after the death of Teymur Homar declared himself king, and seizing upon his brother's country, took him in the town of Sultania: but this imprisoned prince having found means to corrupt some of his guards, he flew the rest that thought to hinder his passage out of prison; then he began to spoil Persia, from whence he drew good troops of soldiers, with which he came to charge his brother, whom he vanquished, and forced to fly into Karason, to his uncle Mirzach Charrok, who gave him Strabat and Masandaron, whereof he lived: but being of a turbulent and restless spirit, he made war against Charrok himself, who vanquished him; so as the other having no place of retreat, he fled to Morgab, and seeking to go from thence to Samarkand, he died upon the way, in the year 1406, and of the Egyra 809.   

¶ Mirzach Abubakar, the thirteenth king of the descendants of Teymurlang.  
Mirzach Abubakar son to Homar, brother to Mironcha, and grandchild to Teymur, remained by the death of his brother peaceable king in Tabris. He was a valiant captain; but unfortunate, for Karayssuf Turkimon, who had fled into Mecere in Egypt, fought with him twice near to the river of Euphrates; in the first he was defeated, and his brother slain, in the year of Grace 1407, and of the Egyra 810: after which, he went to Kernon, and from thence to Siston, where the year following, meaning to return against his enemy with a mighty army, he died upon the way: and in him ended the ●ace and successorus of Chinguis Khan, and of Teymur, Tartarians, who commanded in Persia, whereof▪ we shall speak more particularly hereafter.    

¶ OF THE DESCENDANTS OF KARAKVYONLV, THAT IS TO SAY, BLACK SHEEP, WHO COMMANDED IN PERSIA.  

Karayssuf, the first king of this family.  
KArayssuf Ben Kara Mahamet Turkimon went to serve Weys' Helkony Sultan of Badaget, who for the good services which he had done him, made him captain of the Turkimans, of that band which they call Karaquionla, that is to say, the Black sheep, to distinguish them from others whom they called White sheep, as shall be said hereafter. And this is to be observed that at the same time the factions of White and Black reigned in Italy, who as they were like in name, so did they work the same effects to them of Persia. Kara Mahamet father to Karayssuf, had been captain of that faction whilst he lived: which charge was devolved to his son after his death, who in requital of the favours which Sultan Weys had done him, gave an assault to his town of Bagader, and took it from him, the which had been given to Weys by Teymur, who as hath been said, was then in Rumestan against Bajazet: but being returned from his expedition, seeing the treason of Karayssuf, ●● sent his nephew Abubakar, who recovered that which he had taken, and restored Ba●●det to Sulton Weys' Helcony: but he enjoyed it little, for Mironcha forced him to leave it, ●●ling therein the same Abubakar his son. ●●arayssuf being thus defeated, not knowing where to found safe retreat, fled into Egypt, whereas the king caused him to be taken, and put in prison, in the which he continued until that news came of the death of Teymur, whereof Karayssuf being advertised, he sought means to escape, as he did, and taking his way towards Persia, he wrought so by his industry, that he gathered together an army, with the which he boldly went to encounter Abubakar. Helcony, in the mean time, who had been possessed of Bagadet, and who was watchful to encounter some good occasion, let not this slip; for whilst that ●bubakar went against Karayssuf, he seized upon Bagadet, at the same time whenas Abubakar and Karayssuf met at Nakchoan, whereas Abubakar was vanquished; so as Tabris 〈◊〉 into the hands of Karayssuf, and leaving it furnished with all things necessary to make ●●●lence, he marched against Kara Osman Bayandury, who held the country of Dyarbek, 〈◊〉 which he abandoned, and fled. Yssuf placed good garrisons therein, and so returned ●●●abris, where levying a new army, he marched against Helcony, whom he vanquished ●●●●taile, and having slain him, he seized upon the city in the year 1413, and of the 〈◊〉 1815. From thence he passed into Scyrnan, or Seruan, entering by the country of ●●gestam. He slew the king thereof (called Constantine) in battle, taking Cheque 〈◊〉 king of Seruan, whom he led prisoner to Tabris, but afterwards he redeemed 〈◊〉 with a great sum of money. Karayssuf did also win the towns of Sultania; 〈◊〉 and Taron: and in the year 1420, and of the Egyra 822, he went against Anteb 〈◊〉 of Surya, near to Alep: but Mirzach Charrok coming from Karason, he desisted 〈◊〉 his enterprise, and went to meet with his enemy: but before they encountered, Ka●●ssuf died in Oyon about Tabris, and having neither son, kinsman, nor any true friend 〈◊〉 him, (for tyrants have never any) the soldiers having spoiled his tent, left him without burial, having taken from him his shirt, and cut off his cares to have certain jewels that were hanged thereat; and thus he lay certain days in the open field, until being found by some that knew him, and pitying his misery, they took him from thence and buried him at Ergiss, having reigned fourteen years: he died in the year of Grace 1421, and of the Egyra 823. He had six sons, the eldest was called Pyr Budah Khan, who died before his father, the second Amir Scandar, the third Myrzach jooncha, the fourth Cha Mahamed (who had the government of Park, and held it three and twenty years, unto the year 1431, and of the Egyra 833, whenas Hamed Hamadany flew him,) the fift Amyr Apsal, who died in his father's life time, the sixt Abuzayd, who his brother Amyr Scandar had slain, as you shall presently hear.   

¶ Amyr Scandar, son to Karayssuf.  
AMyr Scandar, the second son to Karayssuf, succeeded his father, in the year of Grace 1422, and of the Egyra 822: who being come unto the crown, continued the war against Myrzah Charrok, by whom he was vanquished in Mesopotamia; so as he was forced to retire towards the river of Euphrates, and Charrok marched to Tabris, where they would not receive him, for the love and respect they bore to Scandar; so as Charrok holding his stay there fruitless, returned to Karason, and Scandar to Tabris, in the year 1426, and of the Egyra 828: whereas depriving Amyr Chamcadin king of Kala, both of life and kingdom, in the year 1428, and of the Egyra 830: he did the like to Sultan Hamed Curd governor of the province of Curdestam. In the year 1430, and of the Egyra 832, he took Sultania, chase away the garrisons of Myrzah Charrok, who hearing these bad news, came with his army against Scandar, and jooncha his brother, who encountered at Salmas near to Tabris, whereas Scandar lost the battle, & retired into Rumestam; yet Tabris fell not into the hands of Charrok, who being returned to Karason, and having repaired his army, he marched against the town of Key, the which he took: then being reconciled to jooncha the brother of Scandar, he gave him Tabris. He by virtue of this donation (the which the other never held) took arms against his brother, fought with him, and got the victory, forcing Scandar to retire into Kala Aleniak, whither jooncha pursued him, and sought to environ him: but a son of Scandars called Cha Kobad (who was then in disgrace with his father) flew him, in the year of Grace 1438, and of the Egyra 841. Scandar a little before his death had slain his brother Abusayd, for some jealousies he had of him.   

¶ jo●ncha, the third of them of Kara Kionlu which commanded in Persia.  
THe brother of jooncha being dead, he presently seized upon the realm, where seeing himself settled, he levied an army to go against the governor of Gurgestam, from whom he took that province: then making many enterprises upon the country of Persia, he reduced all under his obedience, chase away some garrisons which Myrzah Mamud son to Baysanger had placed there, he being at that time dead: this happened in the year 1433, and of the Egyra 856: and in the year 1458 he led his army to Karason, to make war against Myrzah Ebrahem soon to Aladaolet, whom he vanquished, in which battle AmyrZudaba Zagatay died. Sultan Abucayd reigned then at Balk, who went against jooncha, but he made an accord soon with him, being advertised that a son of his had revolted in Tabris, whither he returned speedily, and took him, causing him to be committed to close prison. This trouble was scarce ended, when he was advertised that another son of his called Pyr Budak, who governed Bagader, had rebelled; so as jooncha was forced to turn his arms against him, besieging him a whole year in Bagadet, which was in the year of Grace 1466, and of the Egyra 869: yet by the means of some men that were mediators, they were reconciled; which business being thus concluded, a brother of the rebels called Mahamedy flew him, without the father's privity, who returned to Tabris, where he commanded sovereignly, and in all Aderbajon, Hyerakhen of Parc, Kirmon, and a great part of Suria.  
In the year 1468, and of the Egyra 872, he had an intent to go against the governor of Diarbek, called Ozun Acembek, and caused his army to dislodge; but the Winter was so sharp, as he was forced to return, and to give over this expedition until the Spring, at what time he drew his army to field.  
It was the manner of jooncha (whether it were to make him sleep, or to divert him from other cares, or for that he was given to wine) to be drunkeeverie night, and to sleep long in the morning: and they knowing his custom, the army did still march, and he followed, having a guard of a thousand horse. This came to the knowledge of Ozun Acembek, who taking with him five thousand choice men, charged him at such a time, as he could not be relieved; so as his men being cut in pieces, himself was slain upon the place, and two of his sons taken prisoners; the eldest was called Mahamed Myrzah, whom Ozun caused to be slain, putting out the others eyes, whose name was Issuf Mirzah. Thus jooncha died, having reigned three and thirty years, and lived seventy. He was a bad prince, and the most voluptuous that reigned in those countries in his time.   

¶ Acen Haly, the fourth of them of Karakionlu, which commanded in Persia.  
ACen Aly, son to jooncha, inherited his father's realm after his death, and all his treasure which came into his hands, the which being very great, and he very indiscreet, he made a louie of two hundred thousand men, horse and foot, to whom he advanced a years pay, the which they having received, the greatest part of them went to Abusayd king of Karason, who marched presently against him, and put him to flight, and his misfortune was such, as he fell into the hands of Ozun Acembek, against whom he fought, but he was defeated, and slain: the line of the Karakyonlu ending thus in him, having commanded over Persia; the which happened in the year 1469, and of the Egyra 873.    

❧ THE FAMILY OF AKVYONLV, OR WHITE SHEEP, OTHERWISE CALLED BAYONDURYAH, WHICH HAVE COMMANDED IN PERSIA.  

¶ Ozun Acembek, the first of the line of the Akuyonlu.  
THe faction of the Karakuyonlu having thus taken end by the death of Acem Aly, the party of Akuyonlu got presently to the royalty, by the means of Ozun Acembek: he was son to Osmonbek the son of Cotoluk Bek, a Turkoman: and he was so valiant and generous, as he conquered in a manner the best part of Persia: they do commonly call him Vsun Casan. Osman or Otmonbek, grandfather to Acembek, held (as hath been said) the countries of Diarbek, the which Karayssuf had left him by his death, who after the second succession, came into Persia, in the the time of jooncha, whom having slain, as hath been said, he recovered his lands, and seized upon Tabris, and Ader●●jon; he slew Mirzah Sulton Abuzayd, who went from Karason to fight with him. ●●ncha having left two sons, as we have said, Acembek flew one of them, and put 〈◊〉 the others eyes, who retired himself to Scyras, where he was acknowledged by them ●ll, as their king or sovereign lord: but Acembek having led his army against the town, ●●oke it by force, putting blind Issuf to death: and from thence he passed into Kermen, the which he conquered with Bagadet; and having reduced under his obedience Hyera●●, Aderbajon, Park, Kermon, and other provinces of Persia, in the year 1472, and of 〈◊〉 Egyra 876, he went to fight with Sultan Mahamet king of Ruins, or of Turks, by whom Ozun Acembek was defeated in Arzenion, with the death of Zeynel B●k his son, who was governor of Casuin. Acembek being defeated, fled to Tabris, and the Tures returned to Constantinople. Soon after Ozun Acembek died in the year 1478, and of the Egyra 882; and at the same time died Ogorlu Mahamed the eldest of his seven sons: Sultan Calil was the second; Yacub Myrzah was the third: the fourth Mactah Myrzah: the fift Issuf Mirzah: the sixt Maksuk Bek, who slew Sultan Calil his brother: and the seventh Zeynel Bek, who died in the Turkish wars.   

¶ Sultan Calil, or Hhalil, the second king of Persia, of the family of the Akuyonlu.  
SVltan Calil or Hhalil was in possession of the realm, by reason of the death of his father Acembek, he sent his brother Yacub Bek to be governor of the country of Diarbek, and took are mes against Calil, or Morad Bek, against whom he fought, and put to flight, forcing him to retire into the fort of Feruz Kuh, in the which, there was a captain of Ocem Beks called Gelohy, who having received Morad Bek lovingly into his fort, sent him afterwards prisoner to Calil, who caused him to be slain in Karason, where he than was. At that time Yacub Bek brother to Calil, and governor of Diarbek, revolted, leading an army against Tabris, being accompanied by Maksud Bek his brother, who taking him on the sudden, defeated him, and Maksud slew him with his own hands, having reigned but six months.   

¶ Yacub Bek, the third king of Persia, of the family of the Akuyonlu.  
YAcub Bek, son to Ozun Acembek (having dispossessed and slain his brother) came unto the crown: but in the year 1482, and of the Egyra 886, a captain of his called Bayandur Bek made war against him, whom Yacub Bek vanquished, and slew in Savah near to Kom. The same year Sultan Mahamet the son of Sultan Murat, died at Constantinople, and there succeeded in the Empire, Sultan Barazet his son. At that time also Sultan Aydar of Ardovel, made war against them of Gurgestam, and taking the way to Scyruan, with an intent to seize upon that realm; Farrok Tacar king of Scyruan prevented him, and fortified himself by Yacub Bek, from whom he demanded succours, who sent him a good number of soldiers, under the leading of Soleymon Bek B●gen, a very famous captain, who encountering Aydar in Tabasaron, vanquished him, and slew him upon the field; taking two of his sons which were very young, whereof the eldest was called Aly Myrah, and the second Cham Ishmael, the which were put into the fort of Sterkfac, of whom mention shall be made hereafter. As for Yacub Bek, having reigned twelve years, he died in Rarabage, near to Tabris, in the year 1492, and of the Egyra 896.   

¶ Baysangor Mirzah, the fourth king of Persia, of the family of the Akuyonlu.  
BAsangor Myrzah son to Yacub Bek, came unto the crown by the death of his father; but for that he was but yet young, they gave him a captain (for governor) of his, called Zufy Calil Masulu: at his coming to the crown, there grew great factions, for that they of the part of Bayonduriah, pretended to make Mactah Myrzah uncle to the young king, and brother to his father king, and joining with him, they made war against Zufy Calil, who going to field, won a battle of them, in the which, Maciah was slain upon the place, and his nephew Kostan Bek, the son of Maksud his brother, was taken prisoner, and carried into the fort of Aleniak. At that time Soleymon Bigen came out of Dyarbek, who (as we have said) had vanquished and slain Cheque or Sultan Aydar, in favour of Farrok Yacar king of Sciruan, of whom Calil had the victory, and slew him at Woam.  
During these combustions, Sultan Bayondur taking some captains with him, gave an assault to Aleniak, whereas Rostan Bek was a prisoner, and ●etting him at liberty, proclaimed him king: these, with others which revolted, took presently their way to Tabris, to surprise Baysangor, who was forced to abandon the country with Calil, and to go to Diarbek, whither they were pursued by Rostan, sending his army against Calil, who was defeated and slain. As for Baysangor, he escaped, the realm remaining then in the possession of Rostan Bek. This happened in the year 1493, and of the Egyra 897.   

¶ Rostan Bek, the fift king of Persia, of the family of the Akuyonlu.  
BAysangor being thus put to flight, Rostan Bek the son of Madsud Bek began to enjoy the realm, who as soon as they entered into Tabris, he set at liberty Aly Myrzah or Aly Patcha, and Cha Ishmael the sons of Aydar, and putting an army to field, he took with him Aly Myrzah to pursue Basangor, who came to encounter them in Guania and Bardah, whereas he gave them battle, in which he was vanquished and slain fight.  
After this victory Rostan returned to Tabris, and Aly Mirzah with his permission retired to Ardivel his country, and the ancient abode of his father. Rostan Bek repent himself soon to have let him go, fearing that his presence, and the remembrance of his deceased father, would breed some innovations in that country: without any further consideration, he caused him to be followed, who neglecting his own safety, was soon overtaken & slain: his brother Cha Ishmael escaped as he could, and fled to Gueylon, where at that time Karkya Myrzah Aly reigned, to whom Rostan Bek sent his Ambassadors to entreat him to deliver Ishmael into his hands, but he would not do it: it was then in the year 1498, and of the Egyra 902, whenas Hagmet Bek the son of Ogorlu Mahamet & grandchild to Ozun Acembek, came with a goodly army which he levied in Diarbek, to fight with Kostan; the battle was given near to Tabris, in which Hagmet Bek had the victory, forcing Rostan to fly into Gurgestam, where he died the same year, having reigned five years, and six months.   

¶ Hegmet Bek, the sixth king of Persia, of the family of the Akuyonlu.  
THe death of Rostan Bek gave the realm peaceably to Hagmet Bek grandchild, as hath been said, to Ozun Acembek: he made Haybe Sulton governor of the realm of Kermon; ●nd to Kacem Bek Pernaque he gave the government of Persia: these 2 conspired against him, and made war, where, after some encounters, he lost a battle near to Hisphaon in ●yerak, in which he died; so as there reigned no more of the house of Ozun Acembek but three young grandchilds, that is to say, Sultan Morat the son of Yacub in Scyruan, Alu●●n Bek the son of Yssuf Bek in Aderbajon, and his brother Mahamed Mirzah in Yazd: these three divided betwixt them all the lands which they of the Akuyonlu held in Persia.   

¶ Alwan Bek, the seventh king of Persia, of the family of the Akuyonlu.  
DErnaque having thus dispossessed his benefactor, he caused Alwan Bek the son of Yssuf Bek, and grandchild to Ozun Acembek to be declared king, who with the help of ●●zybek Bayondur, and other his captains & kinsmen, came to Tabris, to join with Haybe ●●ton. Mahamed Mirzah brother to Alwan which was in Yazd, called himself king of His●haon or Hyerak, against whom Alwan caused his army to march, who without any longer stay, retired himself into the fort of Stha, whereof Ocem Quyah Gelohy was captain, who joining with Mahamed, they went against Alwan, who was then returned, who encountering them, there was a cruel battle given, which Alwan lost, and retired to Ta●●is, whither Mahamed followed him: Alwan went the second time against him; but he ●●s again put to rout. In this battle Haybe Sultan died, and as for Alwan he fled to Di●●●bek. During all these revolts, two brethren of Haybe Sultan did rise against Sultan Morad, ●ho was in Scyruan, whither leading great troops of soldiers, they went against Mahamed Myrzah, and met near to Hisphaon, whereas a battle was given, which Mahamed 〈◊〉, with his life, in the year of Grace 1500, and of the Egyra 905, having reigned but the year.   

¶ Sultan Morat, the eight king of Persia, of the family of the Akuyonlu.  
SVltan Morat the son of Y●c●b Bek had by the death of Mahamed Myrzah the realms of Parc and Hyerak, and Alu●an enjoyed the signory of Tabris and Aderbajon, but in the year 1501, and of the Egyra 906, they both levied soldiers, to usurp their companions right; so as drawing their men to field, they met at Cazuin, but they fought not by means of certain men, who made an accord, that either of them should hold that which he had. At that time Persia was full of robbing, violence, hunger, death, and mortality, with a general resolution. In the year 1502, and of the Egyra 907, Cha Ishmael the son of Cheque Aydar going out of Nakchoan, levied an army, & came against Tabris, whereas Alwan remained, who soon abandoned the country, and fled to Bagadet, and from thence passed to Diarbek, where he died soon after, in the year 1505, & of the Egira 910, so as Tabris came into the power of Cha Ishmael, who in the year 1513, and of the Egyra 918, took arms against Sultan Morat, who went out of Scyras, & came to fight with him in Amadon, but Morat lost the battle, and retired to Scyras, and from thence to Bagadet, whereof Barbiek was governor, who entertained him & took him to his protection: the year following, Ishmael came against them, who were forced to quit the country, and retired to Karamania, from thence Morat returned to Diarbek, where Kazelbach or Casselbas' slew him, in the year 1515, and of the Egyra 920; so as in him ended the government of the Akuyonlu in Persia.    

¶ OF THE DESCENDANTS OF CHINGVIS CAN WHICH COMMANDED IN VSBEK AND MAURENAHAR  

¶ Chaybek Khon, king of Maurenahar.  
Whilst that matters were managed in Persia, as hath been said, the descendants of Tuchykon the son of Chinguis Can commanded in Vsbek, and held all those lands, which are of a very great extent. In the year 1496, and of the Egyra 900, Chabek Khon the son of Budak Sulton parted from Vsbek with great forces, and came and spoiled the countries of Maurenahar and Karason, all which in a manner he held four years, unto the year 1500, and of the Egyra 904, when he was forced to quit them to the descendants of Teymurlang, and in the year 1508, and of the Egyra 913, Sultan Ocem Myrzah having met with Chaybek Khon towards Herat in Maurenahar, where he reigned; and being slain in the field, he gave his place to his son Pady Azamon Myrzah, who not able to make resistance, fled to Kandar, where having recovered some forces, he came to fight with Chayhek, who got the victory, forcing Pady to fly into Persia, and to make use of the favour of Cha Ishmael Sufy, who entreated him honourably: then in the year 1511, and of the Egyra 916, Cha Ishmael went against Chaybek, and they both met at Marwo, where they fought; but Chaybek Khon was vanquished, and died fight, having held his signory twelve years.   

¶ Kuchengy Khon, king of Maurenahar, of the descendants of Chinguis Can.  
KVchengy Khon remained in Maurenahar, in the place of Chabek, in the year 1513, and of the Egyra 918, Cha Ishmael sent a mighty army into Maurenahar, under the command of Nagemy Sony, who joined with Babor king of India, and then they came together to fight with the Vsbekes in Gagydaon; but they were vanquished, Nagemy Sony being slain upon the place; and as for Babor being wholly defeated, he was forced to retire into India: Kuchengy Khon meaning afterwards to have his revenge in the year 1530, and of the Egyra 935, entered with his army into Persia, in which Cham Thamas the son of Cham Ishmael then reigned, who opposed himself against his forces, fought with him, and won the victory; so as he of Vsbek retired vanquished into Maurenahar, from whence he came the second time into Marwo, with an intent to enter into Persia: but a peace was concluded betwixt them which stayed the passage of Kuchengy, and made him return into Maurenahar, where he died the same year, having reigned twenty years.   

¶ Abuzayd Khon, king of Maurenahar, of the descendants of Chinguis Can.  
ABuzayd Khon, the son of Kuchengy by the death of his father came unto the crown the which he held four years, at the end whereof he died, having done nothing memorable, in the year 1533, and of the Egyra 939.   

¶ Obeyed Khon king of Mau●enahar, of the descendants of Chinguis Can.  
Obeyed Khon, eldest brother to the deceased Abuzaid, son to Kuchengy Khon, brother to Cheybek, as soon as he was declared king, sent a mighty army into Karason, meaning to enter into Persia: but he was stayed by Cham Thamas, who forced him to quit the lands of Karason, and Cha Thamas being retired, he returned the second time, and spoiled them with his army; unto the year 1540, and of the Egyra 946, whenas he died, having reigned six years.   

¶ Abdula Khon, king of Maurenahar, of the descendants of Chinguis Can.  
ABdula Khon, the son of Kuchengy Khon, had the realm of Maurenahar, by the death of Obeyed Khon, where he continued but six months, at the end whereof, he died, in the year 1541, and of the Egyra 947.   

¶ Adelatife Khon, king of Maurenahar, of the descendants of Chinguis Can.  
A Delatise Khon, the son of Abdula Khon, succeeded in the realm, the which he held unto the end of the year 1542, and of the Egyra 948, the government of the descendants of Chinguis Can in Maurenahar ending in him.    

❧ THE BEGINNING OF SACHACH ISHMAEL SOPHY, AND OF THOSE WHICH ARE DESCENDED FROM HE, AND HAVE COMMANDED IN PERSIA UNTIL THIS DAY.  
COntinuing now with the kings of Persia, it shall be fit before we speak of the actions of Ishmael Sophy to treat of his beginning as briefly as we may: he was son to Cheque Aydar, the son of Sultan juneyd, the son of Cheque Ebrahem the son of Cheque Aly, the son of Cheque Mucha, the son of Cheque ●afy; and in the end, the thirteenth grandchild of the descendants of Morts Aly, cousin ●●d son in law to Mahomet. When Teymurlang returned into Persia after the defeat of Bajazet, he carried with him a great number of slaves, as well of Caramania, as of other nation's, whom he had resolved to put to death, and with this resolution, he entered into ●●devel, where he stayed some days: there was in this town one Cheque Safy, who was held by all men to be a holy man; so as he was generally honoured and respected: the fame of the virtue and good life of this man, came to the ears of Teymurlang, who was d●●●●ous to know him, & to have his friendship; so as he himself went often to his house to visit him, and meaning to go from Ardevell, he offered him whatsoever he would demand; Cheque Safy knowing the intention of Teymur, in regard of his prisoners, taking hold of the offer which this prince had made him, entreated him to pardon them: Teymur who desired to gratify him, did not only pardon them, but delivered them into his hands, to dispose at his pleasure. Cheque Safy received them, and furnished them all, as well as he could, with garments, and other things necessary, sending them free home to their houses, for the which not only the captives, but also the nations of whence they were, held themselves much bound to Safy, and in sign of requital of so great a favour, there past few days but he was visited with many gifts and presents, continuing still this acknowledgement to the descendants of Safy, even unto Sultan juneyd his thirteenth grandchild, or some of his sons, who lived in the time of jooncha the son of Chara Issuf, of whom there hath been mention made. This prince seeing the continual visitations which were made to juneyà, and the great number of men, both of foot and horseback, the which were commonly at his gate, with the great authority which he had; all which things together gave him subject to be jealous of him; so as he told him that he would not have him any more visited by so many men: wherewith juneyd holding himself to be very much wronged, went presently out of Ardevell, being accompanied by such as were devoted unto him, and took the way to Diarbek: Ozun Acembek, who was then king of this province, received him very courteously, and giving him to wife a sister of his the which was called Kadija Katun, by whom he had one son called Aydar. This juneyd had commonly about him certain light horsemen, the which did infested all the country of Gurgestam under the title of zealous of his sect, forcing all such as they took to receive it; and continuing their courses, it happened that entering into the realm of Trebrisonde, they slew the king, and seized upon the country, placing Aydar his son there who was with him. It chanced afterwards, that Acenibek s●ew jooncha, as hath bean said, whereupon Aydar went to Ardevel, where he married with a daughter to Acembek called Alemcha, who brought him Aly Patcha, and Ch● Ishmael, who was borne in the year 1488, and of the Egyra 892: he was called Sofy, for the reason that hath been spoken.  
The year following, Aydar being entered into the realm of Scyruan, Farrok Yassur king of that province, with the aid of Yacub Bek defeated his army, Aydar being slain upon the place, and his two sons Aly Patcha and Cham Ishmael taken prisoners, whom Sultan Rostan Bek did set at liberty: yet having afterwards caused Aly Patcha the eldest brother to be put to death, Cha Ishmael retired to Gueylon, where he continued for the space of six years, in the end, Persia being in combustion by the revolts of the Akuyonlu, he went to Arzenion, where having gathered together seven thousand men Caramanes, all Sophyens, of the families of Estayalu, Caml●●, Takaluh, Versaltu, Romlu, Zulkadurlu, Auchur, Kayar, Sufiah, Karayadak, and many others which followed him, in the year of Grace 1501, and of the Egyra 966, being yet but fourteen years old: he came into Scyruan, where he had a battle against Farrok Yassur, who had slain his father, got the victory of him, and made him lose his life; so as he put himself into the possession of this realm, and the year following he made war against Alwan in Nachoan, and forcing him to fly, Ishmael took Tabris: having obtained this victory, he instituted the Tage, the which is a Turban or read Hood, with twelve bands abou● it, the which he caused his followers to wear, in remembrance of the twelve sons of Oc●●, the son of Aly, held among them for Saints, and from whom he bragged he was descended, calling this new institution Cazel Back, that is to say, a Redhead. T●●● being done, he went to Arzenion, where he drew his forces together, to conquer the realm of Zulkadar: but in his absence Alwan came against Tabris, to the succour whereof, Ishmael went presently, and forced the other to fly to Bagadet, and from thence to Dyarbek, where he died two years after, in the year 1503, and of the Egyra 908. After his death, Ishmael having rested some time at Tabris, he led his army into Persia against Morad Bek, who was defeated by him, with the l●sse of ten thousand soldiers, in the year 1504, and of the Egyra 909, to whom he abandoned Persia and Kermon, which become subject to Ishmael, who went to spend the Winter at Kom, from whence he sent Eliasbek with an army against the town of Rey, whereas Ocembek Gelohay captain of Kalat Ferus Kuh (lying in ambush upon the way) presented him battle, which the other lost, with his life. Ishmael hearing of this defeat, went against Ocembek Gelohay, who retired to Feruz Kuh a fort, strong as well by nature as art, the which Ishmael understanding and seeing no means to take it, he cut off their water; so as the soldiers were forced to yield within a month after the beginning of the siege: which, although it were not long, yet there died in this war above thirty thousand men. This being pacified, Ishmael took his way towards Karason; but being go, a king called Mahamed Karrahy having certain troops with him, entered into the country of Yazd, and become miaster thereof: Ishmael came against him, who defended himself valiantly; yet in the end, he entered the town, and took Karrahy, whom Ishmael caused to be burnt, in the year 1506, and of the Egyra 911.  
From thence Ishmael went to Scyras, where he made an edict in form of prescription, by the which he commanded that all such as had carried arms in the battle where his father Aydar was slain, should die; so as this was the death of above thirty or forty thousand men. And whilst the Wintered at Taron, he was advertised that Sultan Ocem Myrzad king of Karason was dead, on whose country Chaybek Khon Vsbek seized, and the sons of the deceased retired to Ishmael, who presently went with his army, whereas he gave him battle, the which Chaybek Khon lost, with his life, and by this means Karason came into the power of Ishmael.  
In this year Ba●azet king of Rumy or Turkey died, and Sultan his son succeeded him at the Empire, and in the year 1514, Cha Thamas the son of Ishmael Sophy was borne. The year following Selim came with a powerful army to Arzenion, causing Ishmael to abandon Hisphaon, who came and encountered his enemy at Chalderon, where there ●as a great battle fought, the which Ishmael lost, and retired to Tabris, and from thence 〈◊〉 Gazin. Sultan Selim entered into Tabris, where he remained fifteen days; after which ●e went into Amasiah. This year the Caselbas' slew Sultan Morad in Diarb●k, and sent his head to Sophy: and the year following, Selim took Kemak, a place of great importance in Saladulia, and Zulkadel, and Alep in Suria; then in the year 1517, and of the ●gyra 922, he subdued Damas' and Egypt, and in the year following, Diarbek, and Mesopotamia: in the end he died in the year 1521, and of the Egyra 626, to whom succeeded his son Soleymon. As for Ishmael Sophy, having commanded over all Persia for the space of twenty years, he died in the year 1525, and of the Egyra 930, being eight and thirty years old. He was terrible in war, resolute, and without fear, more cruel and se●e●e than mild and courteous: he was wont to say, that as there was but one God in ●eaven, so there should be but one king upon the earth; whereunto he aspired with an ●●●a●iable ambition: he was so much esteemed, and respected of his people, as they held ●im▪ for a holy & religious man, and they which followed him, did sometimes attribute to him honours due to divinity, the which he seemed to reject; but it was but a feigned s●ew, for on a time, having obtained a famous victory, and of great importance, for the ●hich some called him Prophet, others Angel, and some God: he did not dissuade them, ●ut having made a great and deep pit, he cast his shoe into it, saying, that he that loved ●im best, would fetch it: he had scarce spoken the word, but many thousands cast themselves into it, whereas presently the earth fell upon them, and buried them all quick, suf●●●ing the punishment which their impiety had deserved. He had four sons, that is to 〈◊〉, Cha Thamas, Aleas or Elias Myrzah, the third Son Myrzah, and the fourth Bathon ●●rzah.  

¶ Cha Thamas, the second king of Persia, of the race of the Sophians.  
shah Thamas succeeded Ishmael Sophy his father: he had much war during his reign, which continued three and fifty years: the most important were against the Turks. He died in the year 1576, and of the Egyra 983, leaving two sons, Cha Ishmael, and Madamed the Blind.   

¶ Cha Ishmael, the third king of Persia, of the Sophy's race.  
shah Ishmael, eldest son to Cha Thamas, was king of Persia but a year, and ten months: at the end whereof, he died, leaving the realm to his brother Mahamed the Blind, in the year 1578, and of the Egyra 985.   

¶ Cha Mahamed, the fourth king of Persia, of the Sophy's race.  
ISmaell leaving no-childrens, his brother Mahamed second son to Cha Thamas succeeded him, who, although he were blind, yet he governed seven years: at the end whereof he died, in the year of Grace 1585., and of the Egyra 992, leaving Cham Abas his son for successor.   

¶ Cha Abas, the fift king of Persia.  
BY the death of Mahamed the Blind, Cha Abas took possession of the realm of Persia, the which he holds at this day: during his reign, he had much war, in the which he hath given many battles, the most famous whereof, were those of Gueylon, which had rebelled, reducing it under his obedience, not without manifest danger to him and his. He besieged Balk in Vsbek, the which he continued certain months; but in the end was forced to rise. He ruined the realm of Lar or Lara in Persia, and took the king, whom he put to death, by reason of the thefts and spoils which he did to the Caravans of merchants which past that way: be lef● Tabris to the Turks, the which they held since the time of Cha Thamas his great grandfather. Many memorable things have passed during the reign of this prince, especially, against the Turks, who have since lost Tauris, and most of the places which they held of the Persian: but the shortness of this abridgement will not allow of a mo●e ample narration: moreover, in so remote a country, matters cannot be discovered but with time, whereby the truth will appear.  

Kings which have commanded in Persia, until that th● Arabians entered the country, according to Mirkond: the general suppu●a●ion is in the margin. Where the letter G is added, it shows that they have been Governors; and yet some put them in the number of kings. The mark number, it shows includes the king under whom they have governed. Where there is no they doubt of the time of their reign: on the side we have set the years of Grace, and of the Egyra, wherein they have governed, as writers have observed.  
  The years. Months. Kay●m●rras 40. 0 Syamek. 0. 0 Ou●hangh. 50. 0 Thamur●s Diuband. 30. 0 jambched. 0. 0 Zo●hk. 0. 0 Fraydhun. 0. 0 Manucher. 120. 0 Naudar. 7. 0 Afraciab. 12. 0 Zaab or B●zad. 5. 0 Kay Kobad. 100 0 Kay Kaus. 150. 0 Kay Kozrao. 60. 0 Lorasph or Loraseph. 120. 0 Gustasph or Gustaseph. 120. 0 Bahaman Darast Dast or Ardchir. 112. 0 Aomay, a Queen. 30. 0 Darab. 12. 0 Darab. 14. 0 Schander or Aschander. 14. 0 An inter●egne or vacancy. 72. 0 Chapur. 60. 0 Ardchir Babakhon. 50. 0 Chapur Zabel Ketaf. G. 0. 0 Ardchir Furzand Hormoz. 0. 0 Chapur. 60. 0 Baharon Kermon Cham 15. 0 Yazdgerd. 22. 0 Kesere Kozrrao. 0. 0 Babaron Gur. 0. 0 Narsy or Narsa. G. 0. 0 Baharon Gur. 0. 0 Narsy. G. 0. 0 Baharon Gur. 23. 0 Yazd Girded. 0. 0 Narsy. G. 0. 0 Yazd Girded. 18. 0 Yazd Girded. 21. 0 Hormos' Farzand. 1. 0 Feruz. 0. 0 Sufara. G. 0. 0 Feruz. 0. 0 Sufara. G. 0. 0 Feruz. 26. 0 Belax. 5. 0 jamasp. G. 0. 0 Kobad. 43. 0 Kesere Anuchiron or Nauchiruan. 48. 0 Hormoz. 12: 0 Baharon Chuby. 0. 0 Khozrrao Paruez. 38. 0 Kobad Chyruyhe. 0. 8 Ardchir Chyruyhe. 0. 2 Charear. 1. 0 joon Chir. 1. 0 Turon Dokt, a Queen. 1. 4 jasanceda. 0. 0 Azarmy Dokt, a Queen. 0. 6 Kesere. 1. 0 Ferroghzad. 0. 1 Yazd Girded. 20. 0   

●HE CALLET OF BAGADET, WHICH COMMAU●●●● IN PERSIA SINCE THAT THE 〈◊〉 ENTERED INTO IT.  
〈◊〉 〈◊〉   The Years. The Months. SATURN'S 〈◊〉 Abubaker. 2. 0 ●●● ●●● Homar. 1. 0 ●●● ●●● Osman or Otman. 11. 6 ●●● ●●● Morts Aly. 4. 6 ●●● ●●● Acem. 0. 6 ●●● ●●●   

OF THE FAMILY OF BEN HUMIA.  
●●● 41. Mawya. 20. 0 ●●● 61. Yezid. 3. 0 ●●● 64. Mawya the second. 0. 1. month. 2. days. ●●● 66. Marwan. 1. 0 ●●● 67. Abdel Malek. 21. 1 ●●● 86. Oelid. 9 8 ●●● 96. Soleyman. 2. 6 ●●● 98. Hamar or Homer. 2. 5 ●●● ●●● Yezid the second. 4. 8 ●●● ●●● Ochon. 19 8 ●●● 124. Oelid the second. 1. 2 ●●● ●25. Yezid the third. 0. 6 ●●● 125. Ebrahem. 0. 2 ●●● 12●. Mar●nan the second. 5. 0   

OF THE FAMILY OF EBEN ABAS.  
●●● 13● Safa. 4. 9 7●●. 136. Abu jafar. 23. 0 777. 1●9. Mahady By●a● 10. 0 ●●● 169. Elady Byla M●sa. 1. 3 ●●● 17●. Arachid Bylo Harun. 23. 0 ●●● 193. Mahomed Amin. 4. 7 ●●● 1●8. Maham●n. 12. 7 ●●● ●●● 〈◊〉 Ezach Matacon. 8. 0 ●●● ●●● 〈◊〉 5. 9 ●●● 22●. 〈◊〉 W●k●l Byla jafar. 12. 6 ●●● 234. Monta●e●. 0. 6 ●●● 235. Abul Ab●● H●●ed. 5. 9   

¶ VACANCY OF CALIFS.  
●he years 〈◊〉 Grace. The years of the Egy●a. The Years. The Months. ●60. 243. Mostabhin. 1. 4 ●62. 247. Almatez Byla. 3. 6 ●65. 250. Motady Byla. 0. 11 ●66. 251. Almat Hamed Byla Hamed. 23. 0 ●●●. 279. Matazed Byla Hamed. 9 9 ●●●. 289. Moktafy Byla. 4. 0 ●●●. 293. Moktader Byla. 7. 0 ●●●. 301. jafar. 20. 0 ●●●. 320. Kaher Byla Mahamed. 1. 6 ●●●. 322. Razi Byla Mahamed. 4. 0 ●●●. 326. Moktafy Byla Ebrahem 11. 4. 0 ●●●. 330. Mostachfy Abdala. 4. 4 ●●●. 334. Mutya Byla Fazele. 29. 6 ●●7. 365. Tahya Abel Karim. 17. 2 ●013. 403. Kadar Byla Hamed. 21. 4 ●032. 422. Kahem or Alkahem Beamaryla Abu jafar Abdula. 44. 4 ●●74. 467. Almoktady Byla. 19 5 ●●●5. 487. Almostazer Byla. 25. 6 ●●●9. 512. Almostacherd Byla Fezele. 17. 2 ●●●6. 529. Rachet Byla. 2. 0 ●●●9. 531. Almoktafy Byla the third. 24 0 ●●●1S. 555. Almostanger Byla Issuff. 11. 0 ●●●2. 566. Almostanzy Benur Elah Acen. 9 8 ●●●0. 575. Nacer or Nacera Ladinla▪ 47. 0 ●●●6. 622. Alzaher or Altaher▪ Byla Mahamed. 0. 9 ●●●●. 623. Almostanzer▪ Byla Mansur. 7. 0 ●●●●. 640. Almostacem Byla Abdula. 15. 7   

●HE MOGOLES OR TARTAIANS' DESCENDING FROM CHINGVIS CAN, WHICH COMMANDED IN PERSIA.  
〈◊〉 602. Chinguis Can. 23. 0 〈◊〉 626. Otkay Khaon. 13. 0 〈◊〉 643. Gayuk Khaon. 1. 0 〈◊〉 644. Manchu Khaon. 13. 0 〈◊〉 657. Vlachu Khaon. 6. 0 〈◊〉 663. Haybkay Khaon. 17. 0 〈◊〉 680. Hamed Khan or Nichudar Oglan. 2. 2 〈◊〉 683. Argan Khon. 7. 0 〈◊〉 690. ●aniatu Khon. 3. 0 〈◊〉 693. 〈◊〉 1. 0 〈◊〉 694. 〈◊〉 Khan. 8. 0 1305. 703. 〈◊〉 Khan, who was afterwards called Sultan Hamed. 12. 9 1317. 〈◊〉 Sulton Abuzayd Bahader Khan. 19 0   

●HE MOGOLES OR TARTARIANS DESCENDING FROM TEYMURLANG, WHICH COMMANDED IN PERSIA.  
●●●●. 789. Teymurlang. 36. 0 ●405. 807. Mirzah Karrok. 43. 0 ●447. 850. Ologhbek. 2. 0 ●450. 853. Mizah Abdelatife. 0. 6 1451. 854. Mirzah Abdula. 1. 0 In Maurenahar. 1452. ●55. Mirzah Sulton Abusayd. 18. 0 1469. 873. Mirzah Sulton Hamad. 28. 4 1532. 91●. Mirzah Babor. 38. 0 In Karason. 1469. 873. Mirzah Hyadigar. 2. 0 1471. 875. Mirzah Sultan Ocen. 38. 4 1556. 911. Bahady or Pedy Azam●n, and Muzafa Mirzah, brethren together. 1. 0 In Aderbajon. 1406. 8●9. Mironcha. 1. 0 1407. 810. Mirzah Abubakar. 0. 0   

TUR KOMANS OF THE FAMILY OF THE AKVYONLUS WHICH COMMANDED IN PERSIA.  
1413. 815. Kara Iss●●. 14. 0 ●●21. 823. Amir Scanned. 16. 0 ●●●●. ●41. jooncha. 32. 0 ●●●●. 872. Acem Aly. 1. 0   

TURKOMANS OF THE FAMILY OF THE AKVYONLUS WHICH COMMANDED IN PERSIA.  
●he years 〈◊〉. The years of the Egyra.   The Years. The Months. ●●●●. 876. Ozun Acembek. 11: 0 ●●●8. 882. Sulton Kalil. 0. 6 ●●82. 886. Yacub Bek Buysang●r. 12. 10 ●●92. 896. Mirzah. 1. 0 ●●93. 897. Rostam Bek. 5. 6 ●●98. 902. Hagmet Bek. 1. 0 ●●99. 903. Alwan Bek. 1. 0 1000. 905. Morat Bek. 1. 0   

THE RACE OF THE SOPHY'S DESCENDING FROM ISHMAEL SOPHY, WHICH HAVE COMMANDED IN PERSIA.  
●●●5. 906. Cha Ishmael Sophy. 20. 0 ●●●5. 930. Cha Thamas. 53. 0 ●●●6. 983. Cha Ishmael. 1. 10 ●●●8. 985. Cha Mahamed the Blind. 7. 0 ●●●●. 992. Cha Abas. 33. 0       

The Estate of the Turk in Europe.  

A DISCOURSE OF THE TURKS ESTATES.  

The Contents.  
1. THe extension of the Turks empire described, and the countries that it compre●ends in the three parts of the world, Europe, Asia, and Africa. 2. A 〈…〉 kingdoms and provinces of Europe, subject to the 〈…〉 empire: and first, of Thrace, or Romania: why it was so called; the 〈…〉 thereof, under what degree of the Poles elevation it stands; with the 〈…〉 cities in the same. 3. A typographie and ample relation of the foundation, 〈◊〉 of the name, seat, magnificence, and special singularities of the city of Constantinople. 〈◊〉 fertility of Thrace, in corn and wine; the hills and mountains in the same, where silver 〈◊〉 are found: the several ri●erss, and amongst others, that of Hebre, which hath gold grains, 〈…〉 the s●●d and gravel thereof; with the Bosphor●●, which runs into thirty several ports; how the course thereof bends, and where it disgorgeth itself. 5. The rude and barbarous names of the ancient Tartarians, who were reform and made civil by Zamolxis, the Law-gi●er, whom they honoured as a god, and to whom they were wont to sacrifice men living. 6. Their custom of shooting arrows against the thunder, and mourning at the birth of their children; the sacrificing of their best esteemed and loved wives, upon the tombs of their husbands: Their 〈…〉 lusts, with the exposing of their daughters to him that offered most; and 〈…〉 of theft. 7. Of such deities as they adored: of the election of their kings: of the obsequys and funeral rites of the great Princes and Lords of the country, and with what manner of arms they used to fight in the ●arress. 8. Their modern manners, and customs of life in their eating ●nd drinking▪ in their habits, and marriages: their arrogancy, 〈…〉 and avarice▪ their 〈◊〉 hatred against the Christians, together with 〈…〉 9 What ceremonies they use upon those festival dates, 〈…〉. 10. Of the manners, conversation, and usu●●● 〈…〉 amongst the Turks. 11. A description of the 〈…〉 of height, and longitude thereof: and first, of ●acedonia, the situation and limits of the 〈◊〉▪ the six several provinces it comprehends; the 〈◊〉 mountains of Olympus, and Ossa, 〈◊〉 inhabited, and consecrated to the ancient 〈…〉 or Greek Monks▪ of the order of ●. ●as●●e; the four principal gulfs, the most re●●● 〈…〉 the most famous towns wit●●n the same. 12. Of Aepyrus, with the bounds, 〈…〉 towns thereof. 13. Of achaia, divided into nine regions or provinces, with 〈…〉 the same. 14. Of Peloponnesus, or Moreea, the situation, limits, and ●●ength of the the same; the principal rivers, provinces, or regions; the towns, and most renowned 〈◊〉 ●ountainss thereof. 15. Of the quality of the air, the fertility, and sterility of Greece, and first of 〈◊〉 Macedonia, which aboundeth in mines of gold, silver, and of the Asphalt stone: Thessaly, in horse: 〈◊〉 and Mount Oly●pus' in box and bay trees: Athos, in fruit trees, vines, and olives: and the valley 〈◊〉 of Tempe in mines of salt. 16. The sterility of the countries of Aepyrus, and Attica. 17. The 〈◊〉 fertility of Peloponnesus, the roughness & of the soil of Arcady, where a wine was made which 〈…〉 women to be fruitful, and men mad; and where the Ife grows, a tree whose very fruit and 〈…〉 are venomous, causing men to die which make any use of the same. 18. Of the natural 〈…〉 of the ancient inhabitants of Greece, and first of the Macedonian warriors, who were 〈…〉 addicted to sciences, and very sumptuous in their feasts and banquets: the Thessalians 〈◊〉 witful, great gluttons, whoremongers, and very warlike: but they of the valley of Tempe were 〈…〉 religious, loving sacrifices and public feasts, and so successively in order of the inclination 〈◊〉 manners of each particular people. 19 Of the wonderful oracle of Dodon, with the wood or 〈◊〉 ●rest adjacent thereunto: the antiquity of the people, called Dorians and Pelagians: the Cloli●●●●s' valour: and the Phocians rusticity and barbarism. 20. Of the Athenians subtlety of wit, 〈◊〉 of the people of Attica; their deities, solemn feasts, mysteries, and sacrifices. 21. Of the 〈◊〉 and noble courage of the Lacedemoniaus, their ceremonies in marriages, with other noble customs. 22. Of the barbarism which reigns at this day amongst the modern Greeks; ●heir language, which approacheth nearer to the ancient Greek, than either to the Italian o● 〈◊〉; their manner of eating and drinking together, with their usual habits, and other 〈…〉 23. What the ancient policy and government of Athens was; their beginning; the three order or Estates whereof their Commonweal consisted; and the laws which Solon the Law-●i●er 〈…〉 brought in amongst them. 24. Of the first institution of Tribes in Athens; of the election 〈…〉 magistrates which was made of three sorts: of the Senate of the Arcopagites, and of the rigour ●heir sentences and judgements: of the Nomothetes, and the difference betwixt them and the ●omophilactess: of the jurisdiction of the five hundred in civil causes and trials: of the 〈…〉 Iliaca, and Iliacis: of the Logists, Demarkes, Creostes, Sitofilaces, with other magistracies and ●●nitiess in very great number, established over sundry parts of that Commonweal. 25. Of the ●●cient policy of Sparta, and how it was governed by Lycurgus' laws: of their marriages; the ●●inging forth of their children, and their austere and barbarous custom in instructing and 〈…〉 them up to theft: of the manner of courting and making love to the Lacedaemonian maid● 〈◊〉 virgins: the instruction and breeding up of young men: of the virile age, and of their 〈…〉 exercises: what kind of money they used: of the military order and discipline of this ●●●monwealth: of their Infantry and cavalry; of their several arms, and how they used to 〈◊〉 and to encamp: of the authority of the king in their armies, and elsewhere: Finally, the 〈…〉 of their public feasts, and what proportion and allowance was made to the king in 〈…〉 ●olem●● and public feasts. 26. What religion the Greeks of this present age do profess. 〈…〉 all the Islands within the Archipelagus which are subject to the Turk, and what 〈…〉 possesseth in Sclavonia: their situation, circuit, and chief towns: the fertility of these 〈◊〉, and what other singularities there are: their manners, fashions, and customs of life, as ancient as modern. 28. Of the Isle of Cyprus, divided into four parts, with the situation; 〈◊〉 limits thereof: the natural disposition and manners, with the policy and religion of 〈…〉. 29. Of the Isle of Rhodes, the circuit, and situation; as also, of that famous 〈…〉 able Colossus of brass, which was sometimes erected in the town of Rhodes, being 〈…〉 in height. 30. A description of the countries of Bossina, Bulgaria, Servia, and 〈…〉 ●hat the Turk holds in Hungary: the names of the principal cities and towns, and 〈…〉 and private fashions the inhabitants of these countries do use. 31. Of the 〈…〉, Tunes, and Tre●●esen, lying in Africa. 32. Of Egypt, and the Trogloditick 〈…〉 thereunto: Further, an ample relation of the countries which the Turk enjoys, 〈◊〉 and in the conclusion, a discourse of the Turks in general, describing their manners, 〈…〉 go●er●ement: with a List or Catalogue of all the Emperors of Constantinople, both 〈…〉▪ since the division and separation grew of the Eastern, from the Western or 〈◊〉. 〈…〉, which was conferred upon Charlemain of France.   

THis mighty 〈…〉 who is become such a terror to all Christendom, 〈…〉 so many years and ages, and that hath 〈…〉 ambition and cruelty upon us, even till this 〈…〉 Persian war hath made him at a stand, 〈…〉 of his own subjects, which found him work 〈…〉 enough, yields but too plentiful a subject of a 〈…〉 to all Christian States upon whom he confines, seeing 〈…〉 means of raising a mighty and powerful army, by levying 〈…〉 & provinces which he holds in subjection, that they who 〈…〉 and no ways apprehensive of such inundations of men, might 〈…〉 be destitute of all judgement, and well worthy to suffer that scourge 〈…〉 due time they neither doubted nor feared, and against which they 〈…〉 with sufficient remedies and defence. And to the end that 〈…〉 perceive what countries he holds under his subjection and 〈…〉 and mighty he is of all sides, he having all his empire in a manner 〈◊〉 and joined together, I will first make a description thereof in the best manner 〈◊〉 then, after a special nomination of all those parts which are subject to him, I will 〈…〉 more particular relation and description of the kingdoms & provinces, 〈…〉 consider each, and observe each thing by itself. 〈…〉 empire in Europe extends all along the coasts of the Venetian gulf, from 〈…〉 frontiers, hemming in, in a certain fort, all the Archipelagus, the 〈◊〉 or Marmorean Sea, and a good part of Pontus Euxinus, or the great Sea, even to the city of Thedosia, now called Caffa, seated in Tauricus Chersonesus, otherwise 〈…〉 Gazaria or else Prucuply, according to Postels' opinion. Now 〈…〉 more inward within the bosom of the European continent, 〈…〉 to Constantinople; all this ground and territory 〈…〉 best part of high Hungary, Thrace, otherwise called Romeli, or 〈…〉 of Greece, that is, Macedonia, Epyrus or Albania, Acharia, 〈…〉 called Morea, with all the Islands of the Aegean sea, now named the 〈…〉 excepted some certain fortifications and places subject to the 〈…〉 part of 〈◊〉, or Sclavonia: and besides all this, the kingdoms of 〈…〉, and Bulgaria. The Turkish territory in Europe is limited on the 〈…〉 Euxine, or the great Sea, and with the Aegean Sea; 〈…〉 sea, and also with the Mediterranean Sea; on 〈…〉 Sea, and on the North, with a part of Hongarie, 〈…〉 Europe may come to 10000, and about 〈…〉 the superficies of this ground, 〈…〉 will amount to about three hundred 〈…〉 mile's.  
〈…〉 the town of Velez de Gomera, even to the 〈…〉 the king of Spain's subjection, and in 〈…〉 country lie the kingdoms of Algiers, of Tunes, and Tripoli in 〈…〉 that is, from Alexandria to the town of Siene, now called Asna, with 〈…〉 the town of Sues, in the Arabian gulf, even to the 〈…〉 commands in Africa, riseth to 1750 〈…〉 way, comes to 356160 miles.  
〈…〉 in many parts, being full of defart places, 〈…〉 that are not subject to the Turk, we may 〈…〉 the superficies of country, the moiety 〈…〉 way square.  
〈…〉 in the first table of this part of the 〈…〉 they call Turquie, and that part which 〈…〉 Asia, at this day 〈◊〉 by the name of Narolia; Phrygia, called 〈…〉 and 〈◊〉; Lycia, named vulgarly Briquia; Paphlagonia, ●alacia, Pamphilis, Cappadocia, Armenia the less, called Anudula, and Cilicia named ●●●ramania, all which countries are at this day comprehended in that part, which bears 〈◊〉 general name of Anatolia, whose proper countries and provinces have all changed ●●eir name but especially, the cities and towns. The circuit of this Peninsula of Asia the ●●●esse, or of Anatolia, reckoning it from Alexandretta to Trebesonda, called by Ptolemy Trapezus, come to two thousand and four hundred miles, or thereabout.  
〈◊〉 The Turk also holds a good part of that which Ptolemy refers to the third table of Asia, 〈…〉 and Tartarians possessing and retaining the rest; and this part is Armenia 〈◊〉 great, which the Turks usually call Turcomania.  
furthermore, he commands over that part which Ptolemy describes in his fourth table 〈◊〉, that is to say, the Isle of Cyprus, Syria (now called Soria) Palestina; Indea, 〈◊〉 with the Maritime parts of Soria; which being considered, from Firamide to 〈◊〉 riseth to about 430 miles: Arabia the stony, called at this day Baraab Mesopotamia 〈◊〉 Diarbech, Arabia the desert, and Babylonia or Bagdet, which was the habitation the ancient Chaldees.  
He enjoys also a part of that which Ptolemy refers to the fift table of Asia, which is ●●nia, called by the proper inhabitants Asmia. In leaving therefore Trebisonda, his do●nion stretcheth towards the North, even to that strait which the ancients called Bos●●orus Cimmerius, and the Italians term it Bocca di S. Giovanni, or the sea of the 〈◊〉 which joins with the Chersonesus, called Gazaria, on the North side, that is, even 〈◊〉, which it may be, is the same that Ptolemy calls Hermanassa, and these parts 〈◊〉 in shore or coastage, about 450 miles: then parting from Sues, which 〈◊〉 Ptolemy expresseth, by the name of Clismi Presidium, and enuyroning Arabia Feelix, 〈◊〉 happy, to the fall and discharge of the river of Tigris, or Tigil, into the sea, it con●●●es all along the sea shore, three thousand seven hundred and fifty miles in length.  
And so joining all these Maritime parts which the Turk holds in Asia, we found that it ●●●es to 7030 miles or thereabout in length, & the superfices of all that country, which ●●●raignes over in Asia amounts to 710640 miles every way square.  
But because in all this tract of country, a good part of it is desert and disinhabited, or 〈◊〉 they live not in subjection to the Turk, as in Arabia Foelix they do not; for this rea●●n I say, substracting for this main quantity, but a fourth part, which is of 177660 mile's ●●●are, there will remain 532980 miles every way square.  
●ll the Turks possessions in Asia are bordered on the East with the Persian gulf, or 〈◊〉 sea of Elcalif by the river of Tigris, called Tigil, & by a part of the coast of the 〈◊〉 sea, which otherwise is now called the sea of Baccu: on the West, with the gulf of ●●●bia, or the read sea, with the Archipelagus, or straight of Constantinople, & the Euxine 〈◊〉 on the North, with the Euxine sea, and a part of the Marish Meotis, otherwise 〈◊〉 the sea of Zabaques, and with a part of Sarmalia Asiaticke: on the South, with 〈◊〉 ●outh, or Indian Ocean, with the Mediterranean and Euxine seas.  
〈◊〉 as if we put all that together which the Turk commands on the sea coast within 〈◊〉 named three parts, we shall found that it all amounteth to eleven thousand two ●●●ed and four score miles, and the superfices of all his dominions in the above 〈◊〉 three parts, comes to a million two hundred three thousand two hundred and 〈◊〉 miles every way square.  

¶ Of Thrace or Romania.  
〈◊〉 the head city of the Romish Empire lies in Thrace, which men at this day call 〈◊〉 only Romeli, or Romania; I thought good to begin with this part: wherefore 〈◊〉 Romania is a province near to Pontus Euxinus, so called by reason the 〈…〉 thereof, which is Constantinople, was sometimes called new Rome. This 〈…〉 in like manner called Aria, pierce, Odrysa, Emonia, Bistonia, Crestonia, and 〈…〉 as also in Hebrew, Thyras, according to josephus his testimony. The inhabitants of 〈…〉, were sometimes Strimonians, Bards, Dolonges, Brigians, and Sythines.  
〈◊〉 bordered on the East, with the Euxine sea, which the Turks call Maurotolassa, 〈…〉 of Constantinople the Marmorean sea, and with Hellisp on't, or 〈…〉 on the 〈◊〉 limited with mount 〈◊〉, which the 〈…〉 of the 〈…〉 Conteg●azze, the Turks 〈…〉 the West, by Misia, and a part of Macedonia: 〈…〉 gins at the river of Strimon, called now 〈…〉, or 〈…〉, and according to some others, Rhendive, or 〈…〉 and with the coast, & shore 〈…〉 In length, and the breadth thereof, which is from 〈…〉 of Constantinople; is about seven days journey.  
〈…〉 degree of the poles elevation, and 〈…〉 the longest day in the year is but fifteen hours and a quarter 〈…〉 forty seven to thirty six degrees.  
〈…〉 places within this province are Abdera, which some 〈…〉 country, being now named 〈…〉 Sophian, and Astrizza, as many others affirm. Nicopolis, seated on 〈…〉 the side of a Hill, whose ruins are as admirable 〈…〉 whatsoever. There is also to be seen a very good 〈…〉 whole& entire, even to this day, and might also 〈…〉, if the Turks did not daily take up the stones of the degrees 〈…〉; and it is of a spherical form. There are also many other 〈…〉, as four very high & great pillars, which remain of the church 〈…〉 and moreover divers statues of marble. The town at this 〈…〉 well peopled.  
〈…〉 which the Turks call Endrem, is a greater town than either 〈…〉 but it is not walled about, and the buildings thereof are 〈…〉 the chief place & prerogative, next to Constantinople, 〈…〉 it having been here to 〈◊〉 the proper seat and residence of 〈…〉 was of Am●rath the first, in the year 1363.  
〈…〉 is even at this day indifferently well peopled. 〈…〉 of Propontides, is a port capable enough of small vessels, and it 〈…〉 Perinthe now called Heraclea, as it was also in former times) is 〈…〉 the bay of Malliac, or gulf of Zithon, it hath a goodly port, able to harbour 〈…〉 There was in former times an Amphitheatre of marble which 〈…〉 the shore of Pontus, now called Sisopolis.  
〈…〉 particularly observe Constantinople, being the capital 〈…〉 was first built by Pausably king of Sparta, in the year of the 〈…〉 the incarnation of our Lord, five hundred and seventy years, 〈…〉, or new Rome.  
This 〈…〉 unto Constantine's time, under whom it came to be called 〈…〉 This was first the seat of the Roman Emperors, when they 〈…〉 Rome: then of the Emperors of Greece, after the 〈…〉 and finally, after the last taking thereof, which fell out under Mahomet 〈…〉 of the Turks, in the year 1453, it was made choice of for the royal 〈…〉 of the Ottomans.  
〈…〉 is now very rich, wonderfully well peopled, and as it were the 〈…〉 and commerce of the Turkish Empire. The circuit of this 〈…〉 as many affirm; yea there are some which 〈…〉 compass. It is supposed there are 700000 〈…〉 within the same. The Turks call this city Stambul, or Stambolda: on 〈…〉 by the great sea: on the South, by the Archipelagus, and a 〈…〉 it hath on the East side, Asia, from which it is separated on 〈…〉 of two miles in breadth, which goes from one sea to the other, 〈…〉, that any ship how great soever, 〈…〉 the shore: 〈◊〉 in length about six miles.  
The seat of the whole city is so fair and pleasant & in so commodious and fit a place, it seems to have been naturally made to command, and to be the peculiar residence of some great prince. It is built upon the hanging of a little hill, almost in a triangular form 〈…〉 side thereof running along the port even to the Seraglio; the se●ond lies outright from this place to the castle, where prisoners are kept: being called the Seven 〈◊〉 and these two sides are environed with the Sea, the Seraglio making 〈…〉 The third side lies towards the firm land, compassed about with a 〈◊〉 wall, and certain towers, as also with a ditch without, which is of no great 〈◊〉 or moment. All this city yields wonderful contentment to the view, both by 〈◊〉 of this bountiful sight, as also for that there are seven little hills, upon each of 〈◊〉, you may discorne a goodly Mosque, or Turkish Temple, whereof we will speak 〈◊〉 hereafter.  
●he most magnificent place in all Constantinople, is the Seraglio, being the court or ●●●tation of the great Turk, seated on that head or point of the city which lies 〈◊〉 the Sea, being separated as it were from all the rest, and containing some miles in 〈◊〉 compass or circuit thereof. On the Sea side, you may see many little turrets and ●●leriess supported upon pillars of marble, where the grand Signior sometimes does 〈◊〉 created himself.  
When you are entered within the first court of the Seraglio; on the left hand you may 〈◊〉 certain structure, like to a Turkish Mosque, which in ancient time was some 〈…〉; but at this day the great Turk makes use thereof for a kind of arsenal, reserving and keeping therein great store of arms for the defence of his house and Court. 〈◊〉 somewhat above that, there is a little Tower, wherein are hewn out fifty or sixty ●●●dowss, where the great Turk's commandments are given out; and on the right 〈◊〉 thereof, you may see the Court kitchens.  
When you go out of this Court, you enter into another made like a cloister, with a ●●●rie round about it, supported upon pillras of marble, being covered with lead, in 〈◊〉 (on the left hand) you shall see a fountain, where the great Turk many times ●●●seth some of the greatest men's heads of his Court to be cut off.  
●rom thence you go into the Divant, which is a little chamber, and beyond that, is the ●●mber of the treasury.  
And so you have heard of all the particular places of note of the great Turk's 〈◊〉 which have come to our knowledge. Departing from hence, you may see a fair 〈◊〉, which is near at hand; this was in old time the Church of S. Sophia, built by 〈◊〉 the Emperor: but in his time it was far greater, with an Abbey adjoining 〈◊〉 unto, which extended far into that very place where now the Seraglio stands; 〈◊〉 the Turks coming to be masters of the city, did ruin it, leaving nothing 〈◊〉 the same but the Choir, which they reserved to make a Mosque. There are also 〈◊〉 many high and great collumnes, or pillars, whereof eight be of porphyry, 〈◊〉 of serpentine, and four of white marble: and above the same, a very beautiful ●●●lerie, paved with transparent marble, with many other little pillars of marble and 〈◊〉.  
longest the rest, there is one stone of marble, upon which the Turks believe and 〈◊〉 that our Lady did wash our saviours linen, and therefore they give it great 〈◊〉 and honour, for that they hold jesus Christ to have been a very great Prophet. 〈◊〉 of the Church is embellished with goodly old Mosaic work, made in the 〈◊〉 time.  
〈◊〉 your coming forth, you shall see many Cubees, which are places made all 〈◊〉 of Chapels, or covered like Domoes', or Cathedral Churches, all of 〈…〉 the great Turk's sons are interred.  
〈…〉 and chief Mosques, are those which are erected upon the Seven hills, 〈◊〉 say that of S. Sophia, whereof we have formerly made mention; that of Alliba●●●other of Sultan Bajazet, one of Sultan Solyman, that of Sultan Mahomet, that of 〈◊〉 Selimus, and another of Selimus the son of Solyman: but the fairest and most stately 〈…〉 a Mosque, is that of Sultan Solyman.  
〈…〉 hath four great gates, each of them adorned with a goodly fair 〈…〉 on marble, and at the four corners thereof there are also foureverie high 〈◊〉 but somewhat narrow 〈…〉, a gallery, which runs round about, and within 〈◊〉 made white, with 〈…〉 of marble.  
Before the 〈…〉 of the Mosque, there is a great court paved with marble, compassed 〈…〉 and some collumnes of the same stuff and matter, and in the midst 〈…〉 fair fountain, covered with lead, as also, the gallery and 〈◊〉.  
〈…〉 Mosque of Sultan Mahomet, there is a great place like unto an Hospital 〈…〉 stranges of any nation may enter freely, and lodge without any 〈◊〉 where he shall have honey, rice, bread, and water for three days together, and 〈…〉 to rest in. Some say there are above one thousand passengers of 〈…〉 entertained daily there.  
〈…〉 S. Sophia, you may discern the lodging of Lasuadar, from whence you 〈…〉 ground, and by water, the which is fresh and sweet, even into the 〈…〉.  
And not far from this place, you may behold an ancient Hippodrome, called by 〈…〉, containing about five hundred paces in length, and an hundred in 〈…〉 the midst whereof stands a Pyramid, gra●en all over with Hieroglyphical 〈◊〉, not altogether so high as that in Stada del Popolo at Rome. This was the place 〈◊〉 in old time they did run their horses, in form like a theatre.  
〈◊〉 little beyond this, there stands three serpents of copper, higher than two men, and 〈◊〉 fast together. The Turks say, that in former times, when three serpents 〈◊〉 them of the city, the people at last humbled themselves in prayers to heaven, and 〈◊〉 means being delivered from these devouring monsters, they left these forms cast 〈…〉 a memory thereof.  
〈…〉 in the same place, a very fair column of rustic work, the stones whereof are all joined together without lime, or mortar, and having within the same a pair of 〈◊〉 In this place the Turkish cavaliers exercise themselves on Fridays, and on other festival days called Beelan.  
Hard by this Hyppodrome you may see the Bisistam, which is like the palace of 〈◊〉 in this place, men fell all precious stones, rich gold-smith-workes, and all sorts of beautiful and stately ornaments, as clothe of silk, and also slaves, men, women, maids, and boys.  
In another street not far off, there is a great pillar of Porphitie to be seen, cross barred 〈…〉 parts, with circled hoops of iron; and on another side thereof, there is another pillar, called 〈◊〉, very high, being all of marble, graven and cut with the Images of many 〈…〉 s, like to that of S. Peter and S. Paul, which is at Rome. Within the 〈…〉 a stair case, which mounts up to the top, but they are all broken, so as were 〈◊〉 not for some links and bands of iron, which sustain the same, and hold it together, it would be in great danger of falling to the ground.  
From thence, men usually go to see a very fair open place, greater than that of the 〈◊〉 being peculiar for the janissaries, built round about with lodgings and 〈…〉 soldiers.  
〈…〉 come to an old Palace of Constantine's, which hath no great beauty in it, the best thing to be noted is, that it is seated in a very good air.  
There are also within the city two Christian Churches, one consecrated to S. SATURN'S, and the other to our Lady, surnamed of Constantinople, which is very little, but standing whole and entire: And thus I have related unto you the most remarkable things 〈◊〉 the city; so as now we must bend our discourse to the suburbs, and after that, to 〈◊〉 near adjacent places, that we may see and observe what is most beautiful, or 〈…〉.  
〈…〉 shall see, at the end of the c●tie, on the other side of the Port, near to the fresh waters, the Mosque of Aioug Sultan, wherein the great Turk, when he comes to the Empire, goes to receive his sword. And in another part, you may discern the quirries, with a certain garden, which belongs to the great Turk. A little before, close by the entry of the port, is the Arsenal, where there lies about the number of a hundred and fifty galleys on shore disarmed, and some sixty riding at anchor, all ready furnished, upon any sudden occasion: and somewhat beyond this, there is a place called Topana, where you may see a great number of dismounted canons, whereof some are turned and leveled against the port.  
I may not by any means omit to speak of a little Island of rock which is at the end of the channel, two miles within the black sea, being all desert, but yet very worthy of observation, for a goodly column of white marble erected on the top thereof, by Pompey the Great, after his discomfiting of Mithridates.  
As you return again towards Constantinople, there is to be seen upon the channel of the same sea, two towers, the one of this side, the other of the other side, which guard 〈◊〉 keep this mouth or entry. And in this place they use to imprison the knights of ●alta, and other Christians of quality, and calling, which are taken in the wars. It is 〈◊〉 thence to the city, some eighteen miles, and on both sides of the channel, you ●ay see a great many houses of pleasure, and sundry fair gardens: then right over the 〈◊〉, on Asia side, is Galata, called at this day Pera, lying between the Arsenal, and the place Topana, inhabited for the most part by free Christians, and Greeks; and both the one and the other have many churches, of which the fairest, and wherein our faith is preached, is that of S. Francis; the others are called S. Maries, S. john's, S. Anthony, S. Bene●ict, S. Peter, and S. Anne, all of them using the Roman worship, and ceremonies. About ●his place there are many houses, and villages, as Casanbacha, Besictar, and the residences 〈◊〉 the Ambassadors, both of France, England, and Venice.  
Somewhat further off, on the same side you may see a great village named Scutary, ●hich did belong to the Sultana, mother to Mahomet, who caused a very sumptuous mosque to be built there, together with a great and goodly house, where all passengers 〈◊〉 what religion soever may be lodged, and entertained for three days: the Turks call ●is place Caruaserat. And this is as much as I am able to deliver of the neighbour and adjacent parts to Constantinople.  
Near to this province, lies that Chersonesus surnamed of Thrace, but commonly S. ●●gess arms, where the town of Gallipoli stands, four days journey from Constan●●ople. This was the first place of Europe that Amurath the first took, in the year 1363. 〈◊〉 hath no walls, and the port thereof is not capable of any great shipping; and yet there 〈◊〉 bay or gulf, which may harbour many. This town is inhabited by Greeks, jews, 〈◊〉 Turks, and is a great passage from Europe into Asia.  
All that straight of sea, from Gallipoli, where Propontides ends, to the Archipelagus, is 〈◊〉 the Hellespont; where is the straight or channel of the castles, being a quarter of a 〈◊〉 breadth: here it is, where these two ancient castles of Sestos and Abydos stand 〈◊〉 owned by the love of Leander and Hero) called commonly the Dardanells, and by 〈◊〉 Turk's Bogozasser. Sestos is in this Chersonese, seated upon the hanging of a hill, in 〈◊〉 of a trefle. Abydos is in Anatolia.  
〈◊〉 for Propontides, it is the sea that is enclosed between the two straits, I mean that 〈…〉 or Constantinople, and that of Gallipolis, but at this day, it is called (as 〈◊〉 told you) the Marmorean sea.   

¶ The Quality, and nature of the soil.  
THe country is for the most part cold, and full of people: you may discover in the 〈◊〉 same, many goodly large plains, where they reap great store of corn, and all sorts 〈…〉, and beyond this, bending towards the sea side, there grows good wine. 〈◊〉 ●●mselfe commends this province for fertility, and seems highly to esteem the 〈◊〉 therein, for the substance, and weight of the same; as also the wines, for their goodness and strength. But within the country, and far from the sea side, Thrace is more cold, and therefore the less able to produce either corn or wine: it generally wants wood, and the large plains thereof are in some places separated, and cut off by little hills. They do here prepare, and accommodate alum in the village of Chapsylar, which in former times was a hamlet called Cypsele.  
The mountains of this province, are those of Hemur, and Rhodope, which is very rough, and always covered with snow; Orbele, and Pangee, which have at this day mines of silver, as heretofore they had; and then Messape, not far from the sea side, which is admirable for the roughness of the rocks.  
The rivers hereof are Heber, called at this day Marisa, according to Mercator, or Valisa, as Nicolas de Nicolai would have it: Nesse, called now Carason, according to Belon: Melas, now Gensui, and Strymon, which is the bound and limit of Macedonia.  
The river of Heber, as report goes, hath gold intermingled with the sand or gravel thereof, and it is so slow of course, as a man can hardly discern which way the stream runs: the water thereof is troubled, and thick, but sweet; and in Summer it is so cold, 〈◊〉 man would think it to be dissolved ice: but then in Winter, there descends such a fall of waters from the near mountains, as it grows more swift and violent, overflowing a great large meadow which in precedent ages was called Dorisca, where men erect no buildings, only in Summer they feed a number of horses: and there are also certain orchards, or gardens which bring forth great store of Summer first-fruits.  
The river of Heber receives into her stream the river Theara, which is the best water of all this country against any kind of disease or infirmity, and especially against scabs both of men and horse. It hath thirty and eight fountains or baths, part hot, part cold, which flow out of one and the self same rock. Darius' taking great delight in the pleasant taste of this clear water, erected a pillar near unto it, with an inscription thereon in Greek letters, in praise and commendation of the same.  
The river of Nesse, or Charason, descending from mount Hemur, is very flow of stream, and somewhat less than the Strymon, or Stromon, and yet it casts up much gravel and sand. We may here in like manner observe the lake of Biston or Bouron, which is maritime, and affords much good fish.  
The Thracian Bosphorus comprehends thirty good ports, part in Asia, and part in Europe, but more on Europe side, than on Asia. It changeth the stream and course, being exceeding swift, in seven places of special note, where beating upon some capes, and forelandes, the sea comes to be wonderfully enraged, and rough; so as they pass with great difficulty in divers straits towards the black sea, but by a violent haling of the boats along the shoreside, or else changing their course from one place to another.  
In the days of Copronymus the Emperor, all the Bosphorus, and a part of the great sea, was so frozen, as the ice was five and twenty cubits thick, & a great quantity of snow falling thereupon, the ice also was increased twenty cubits high above the face and superfices of the sea; so as men might travel, & go most securely on the same, and beasts; yea wagons and carts heavily laden, passed thereon out of Europe into Asia, and from Constantinople to the mouth and entry of the river of Danubius, as if it had been on dry land.  
Afterwards, in February, when the ice came to dissolve and melt, breaking out into many great flakes and pieces, which seemed like little Islands, full of many creatures, some dead, and some alive: the flakes of ice with the wind and stream, were driven forcibly on Constantinople side, where they overthrew many buildings of great moment and importance, that were built to the sea side ward.  
There is no part of the Mediterranean sea more abundant in all sort of fish, than the Bosphorus. In the beginning of Winter, there departed infinite schools of them from thence towards Propontides, and in the spring time they return to the black sea: the water is colder there in Winter than elsewhere, as also for that it is but low and shallow, the tempests do agitat, and toss up the waves thereof beyond measure: and this is the reason, why the fish, shunning cold as much as they can, and the fury of the winds, change their haunt, and in the Winter, retire into the Marmorean Sea; but then in the Spring ●ime again they return into the Bosphorus, because of the waters of this Sea, which is not so ●alt altogether as that of the other, by reason of the many fresh rivers, which disgorge and fall into the same: so as I cannot credibly inform you what quantity of fish is taken in the straight of the Bosphorus, especially at Constantinople, where women themselves, when they have nothing else to do, fis● out of their house windows: but above all other sorts, they take there great store of young Tonnies, which the Greeks call Pelomides.   

¶ The ancient manners and customs of the Thracians.  
THe inhabitants of Thrace were esteemed heretofore to be very harsh and rude in their manners, and they were many in number, as Herodotus said; if they had been governed by one prince alone, and being united, and of accord within themselves, it had been impossible to vanquish them, for they were the strongest men of all the world: but whithall he adds, that they were but weak, by reason of their great divisions and fashions. And although they could not agreed and love together, yet they had all the same manners and customs of life, except the Thracians, and those which dwelled above the Grestones.  
The Geteses were persuaded that they did never die, but in departing out of this world, they went to found out their god Zamolxis.  
This Zamolxis was one of Pythagoras' scholars, who being returned into his country, and perceiving that the Thracians lived barbarously, and in a manner after a brutish fashion, he gave them laws, teaching those of the country the use of them; afterwards also he printed in them this firm persuasion, that if they strictly observed them, when they left this world they should go to a place where they were to enjoy all manner of pleasure and contentment.  
When he had obtained some reputation of divinity amongst the Thracians, he estranged himself, and left them quite, no man knowing whether he went, but thus he left ●hem, with a very ardent desire to see him again.  
They ordinarily sent out one or another (on whomsoever the lot fell) to found him out, in a vessel with five oars on a side, to the end they might acquaint him with their necessities in the place where they should found him.  
They enjoined some certain man amongst them to hold three darts fixed firm on the ground, with the points upward, and then they commanded others to take this man with his feet and hands bound, and to hoist him on high, to the end he might fall upon the darts, and to be pierced through: of which, if he died at the same instant, they supposed their god to be propitious and favourable to them; but if he still continued alive, they would accuse this messenger to be but a wicked and impious man. If he were thus accused and blamed, they would presently sand another, informing him by this messenger of their peculiar supplications and desires.  
When it either thundered or lightened, the Thracians would shoot their arrows ●●ainst heaven, and threaten God, seeing they believed in no other god but their own Zamolxis.  
The Thracians practised the same customs: but at the birth or death of any one of their countrymen, they used a particular ceremony by themselves. When the infant was borne, all the parents sitting round about the same, lamented bitterly his coming into the world, ripping up all the miseries and afflictions whereunto he should be exposed, and thus deploring his condition as absolutely miserable and unhappy. But if to be ●y one amongst them did die, they would bury him with all joy and alacrity, highly re●oycing that by this means he was freed and quit from the disasters and crosses of this 〈◊〉.  
Many of those that inhabited beyond the Crestones, had many wives, and when any 〈◊〉 of them died, their wives would grow to a wonderful debate and strife, seeing each 〈◊〉 them would be very forward to affirm that she of all the rest was best beloved of her husband: a solemn assembly was made, and every ones reasons duly heard, than she that was adjudged decreliest beloved was laid on her husband's tomb, where her nearest kinsman cut off her head, and presently she was buried with her husband, and then all the rest esteemed themselves very unhappy and accursed, weeping, and lamenting for the judgement delivered in favour of the other, because they took themselves in this consideration to be greatly dishonoured.  
The other Thracians accustomed to cell their children, following the ancient manner and fashion of the country, and the fathers, mothers, or nearest kinsmen, never kept in or restrained their daughters or kinswomen, but suffered them to entertain loving embracements with any one they had best liking to.  
But then they had always a very special care of their wives chastity, whom they bought at a dear and high rate. They had certain marks and impressions on their foreheads, and they which had none were esteemed but base and common stuff.  
They were sold to the frankest chapman, and he that did rise to the highest price: and the fairest were first exposed to sale, and did carry home the price whereat they were set and taxed it but the soul were feign to buy those men with whom they would marry. The men and women made good cheer together, near to a fire side, casting the grains and seeds of certain herbs upon the embers; and so being intoxicated with the scent and some thereof, they took it for a solemn rejoicing to appear as it were drunk, having their senses by this means dulled and stupefied.  
They reputed it for an honourable course of life to be idle and do nothing, but to live of pillories and thefts; as on the contrary they that sowed and tilled the earth were contemned, and reputed for villains and base in the most abject degree.  
They commonly worshipped Mars, Bacchus, Diana, and Mercury, swearing always by the last, from whom they supposed themselves to be lineally descended.  
All the Thracians houses were very low built: their provisions and victuals were always at one point; and as for vines, they neither used nor planted them.  
When they were called to any election of a king, nobility swayed not therein above the rest of the vulgar people, but whosoever had most voices on his side, was preferred to the dignity before all others. The people always made choice of such an one whose manners and life was untainted, and his clemency very well approved and known, and also besides this, he must be well stricken in years. These circumstances were required in him that had no children, for if he had any, he was never chosen, how commendable or praise worthy soever he were in his actions, and if he begot any after his election, he was presently deprived of his dignity, so much the Thracians hated an hereditary succession in their realm.  
Although the king were very just and upright, yet would they not suffer him to do all things freely without control: so that a magistracy of forty were appointed him the which were as his assistants, to the end he might not be sole judge in criminal causes. And when he was found culpable in any thing, they condemned him presently to death, yet they showed this respect and honour towards him, that no man laid upon him any violent hands; but all sustenance being prohibited him by a public proclamation and consent, he was in the end constrained to die of hunger.  
They solemnised the obsequies of their great Lords and Princes after this manner: The corpse was carried into a public and open place, where for the space of three days, kill divers sorts of beasts for a sacrifice, they made exceeding great cheer; afterwards having lamented some time over the dead corpse, they either buried or burned it, burying the ashes in the earth, and erecting a tomb upon the same, where they devised many kinds of combats, amongst which the most common and ordinary was the Duel, betwixt man and man.  
The arms which they used when Darius made his expedition and enterprise (as Herod●●●● affirms) were these: They wore morrions on their heads made of fox's skins, and certain shirts, upon which they wore cassocks or gabberdines of divers fashions, and upon their legs they did wear buskins of kids skins, and besides this, they used darts, shields, and little poniards.  
They were very expert archers, whereof they affirmed themselves to be the inventors. They spoke the same language that the Scythians did. Pliny writes that all Thrace was sometimes divided into fifty hundreds, or quarters. And this is all I am able to deliver of the ancient customs and manners of the people of Thrace: now let us see and examine how they live in this our presentage.   

¶ The Manners and Fashions of this present time.  
THe modern inhabitants of this country, wear their hair very thick on the tops of their heads, they are wonderful strong, rude, furious, and full of cruelty. They love to drink as sound as any nation of the world; so as you shall never but see some or other continually drunk: and were it not for the express prohibition that Mahomet made for the Turks drinking of wine, out of doubt, many other dissolutions would be put in practice within this province. But because Thrace is inhabited by divers sorts of people, especially, Constantinople, as by Turks, jews, and Christians; so as in this respect, we cannot generally discourse of them all three, because they have different manners and customs, which distinguish them one from another, I will undertake every one of these three apart, that so we may best judge and consider what is in them most remarkable, and worthy of observation.  
The Turks are not grown so civil as many other nations in Europe, and their habits (I know not how) retain such an unseemly appearance, that one cannot behold them without a kind of disdain and contempt. For the linings come not to the uttermost skirts of their garments, and whatsoever they wear is so ill fashioned and cut out, as it seems there needs no great artificial tailor for the cutting and making them up, but only some simple fellow that can barely sow, how badly soever.  
There is none of them that eats sitting on a bench, chair, or stool, but they all take their repasts sitting cross legged on the ground, as tailors do ordinarily here within their shops, when they work many together upon a shop board. Their table cloth and table is ●or the most part of an ox hide, or of a stags not curried, but having still the hair upon 〈◊〉, made an cut in a round form, and being two foot and a half broad, with buckles and ●●ngss of iron, which serve to shut it, with certain thongs of leather even as you do a ●urse, which likewise they may as easily extend and spread, or transport from on place to ●nother easily. They use no napkins to wipe their mouths or hands withal.  
In what place soever they sit down, whither in their houses, or in their mosques, they ●●●red certain tapistry coverlets, or mats of reeds; and there are some places which they ●●ancher with board, as being otherwise either too low, or too foul. They never use any ●●llss, neither permit they those Christians that devil in their countries to use any.  
Both men and women wear their garments long and large, and open before, to the end ●hat in stooping, they may the better cover themselves, and hide the parts of shame from men, in doing their business. When they ease their bodies, they have a special care to turn their backs towards the South, because it is the part they look towards in making their prayers, and they would take it heinously, if any one should see them doing this office: so much afraid, and craefull they are (as before I have told you) of this part which men do naturally desire to hide.  
The Turks eat of gelt dear more than of any other meat, and that is the reason why so many good Turkish skins come over into our parts. They feed also upon mutton, and spend great numbers of kid and lamb, but little beef, and these meats are rather roasted than prepared in any other manner. Finally, they put all the flesh pell mel together into a ●reat platter, or rather if I may so say, into a great bowl, not having many several platters as we use to set each meat on the table by itself. But they never eat any swine's flesh, ●nd their sauces of greatest appetite are made of garlic and onions, wherein even their noblemen and princes take great content. Their ordinary bread is very brown, and the mason is, for that they put many seeds into it; so as it cannot be so well sifted and 〈◊〉 as it should be.  
But to come to other of their manners and kinds of life, there is not a nation in the world more arrogant, nor that more aspires to get the upper hand in all things than the Tu●ke, who scorns and despiseth all others. And this insolency grows in them from the many victories that these barbarians have obtained in all parts, and by reason of the wonderful largeness, and extent of their prince's dominions. They are exceedingly given to whoredom, & all kind of uncleanness, yea even to Sodomy itself, which they use publicly, and in the very galleys, where it is as common with them, as eating or dinking.  
They are as treacherous and disloyal as may be, and make no scruple of breaking their promises; so as this their infidelity hath been the ruin of many Christians, which trusting to their words, have often times yielded themselves into their hands, who afterwards were miserably massacred, or led into captivity. You must not suppose that the Turks make any great respect or accounted of Ambassadors, or that the laws of nations is of any high esteem amongst them, as it is amongst the Christians: for if the grand Turk grows in any forti●alous of an Ambassador, he presently puts him to death upon any small pretext or colour, yea, and the principal men of the court, if they own a grudge, or be discontented with any Christian Ambassador, they will not fail to lay snares to entrap him, and to brave him with insupportable affronts.  
This nation is not naturally inclined to learning, but only to arms, in which their obedience and assurance of Mahomet's paradise, and their opinion of destiny, are of more force than their courage and valour. And yet as for learning, they have amongst them some books, and certain doctors, but not for any human sciences, or Philosophy, but only for the explanation and instruction of Mahomet's doctrine, upon which subject infinite volumes have been compiled full of disputations and controversies. They do by nature so mortally hate and detest Christians, as they can no sooner name them, but they will term them dogs, as I saw with mine own eyes, being one day with a Chious, which belonged to the viceroy of Argier, with whom I was very familiar; for though he professed great love and kindness to me, and gave me as much respect, as the little humanity and courtesy of this nation can afford: yet when any occasion was offered but to discourse of Christians, he could not abstain from calling them dogs upon any speech, discovering by his words a kind of rancour and hatred against them.  
They are so covetous, as they make profit and gain of all things, and the reason why they heap up money with such greediness and care, is, because the great Turk gives no land nor possessions to the Turks, but for term of life; so as they which mean to leave any thing to their children, make all the ready money they possibly can, to the end they may have sufficient to maintain their estates without abating their show and condition: although commonly when fathers have done good service, and that the children show some generosity and courage, they are suffered to enjoy that which their fathers formerly held, expecting that with time and years they may likewise attain to their father's place and charge. I must needs also tell you thus much, that the Turks would never have endured the Christians to devil amongst them, or in their countries, whether they were religious or other, but that the hope of profit and gain, which they daily and yearly exact from them by tributes, invites them thereunto, and questionless the holy Sepulchre itself, which yet stands whole within the city of jerusalem, would long since have been ruined and beaten down, but that the Turks perceive how the Christians, drawn as it whereby the reverend respect of this sacred and venerable place, would come flocking thither in pilgrimages, and so bring in unspeakable sums of money. For they show manifestly what was the reason which made them suffer and tollerat this, for you never see people more greedy of spoil, or that more unjustly and unreasonably, do ransom such devout, but miserable Christians, as religiously affect this voyage, or be desirous to view and behold that place where our Redeemet was crucified, and put to death.  
The Turkish women are modest in their garments, and they are commonly so well fitted and made, as a man cannot behold any thing more modest and comely. The attire of their heads is sharp and pointed; and on the top there hangs down a veil so artificially lastened, that though one part of it hangs down, yet if they mean to go abroad or come into the company of men, they can suddenly cover their whole face, except the eyes; and besides this, they wear over their garments a fine white linen cloth, covering all the rest of their bodies in such sort as men can hardly know their own wives from others, when they are in company of many other women: Furthermore, they never come into the place where men are assembled together; and it is so rare a thing, and contrary to the common custom, to see a man publicly speak to a woman, as if you continued a whole year in their companies, in all this time you shall not almost see it once: for if you should see a man publicly discoursing with a woman, or walking with her into the fields, it would seem to be very strange and extraordinary.  
Married men never sport nor dally at all with their wives before others, as also they seldom use to talk or confer with them, for that the man doth ever retain the same severity and gravity towards his wife, who likewise fails not to bear herself very respectively and humbly on his behalf.  
Their great Lords and Princes which cannot be daily resident with their wives, leave them under the charge and keeping of certain eunuchs, who are so vigilant & watchful over them, as it is impossible any other should entertain them or enjoy their company besides their husbands, or come to those effects which might disgrace and dishonour them: for if they had a will, as many times they have without question, yet can they by no means effect or compass the same. And yet slaves, of whom they may dispose at their pleasure, and are not commonly suspected like other men, surmount many times this difficulty, and sooner make their masters cuckolds than any other. But then if they ●hould chance to be taken tardy, or accused of making love to their maistresses, they 〈◊〉 punished with such cruel and fearful torments, as it is able to strike an horror into ●●ose that do but only imagine and think of it.  
But to the end I may speak somewhat of that which the Turks ordinarily practise in Constantinople, you must conceive that on the festival days, which they call Beelan, ●heir gentlemen come ordinarily into the Hippodrome mounted on horseback, every 〈◊〉 holding a staff in his hand like unto a lance, zagaia, or dart, and so dividing themselves into divers troops, they throw these darts one against another. In some other ●●acess, the cavaliers galloping round about an highstake or pole, shoot with their bows ●gainst a turned bowl, which is set on the top of this pole or stake.  
In that place where the janissaries lodgings are, these kind of soldiers commonly use 〈◊〉 exercise the bow, the arquebus, and other such like arms.  
In all Constantinople they never use any wagons or carts, for they employ the Arme●nss as porters, to carry whatsoever is necessary or behoosfull, and these be Christians 〈◊〉 belief not much differing from that of the Greckes.  
You shall sometimes see Turks that be drunk, go through the streets of Constantinople with such insolency and arrogancy, as you can see no bad custom comparable to 〈◊〉 in any part of Europe that is Christian. During the rage and working of their wine, ●hey chance to meet with any Christian in the city, they presently fall upon him, and 〈◊〉 him a thousand outrages, and which is worse, I see there is no means to have ju●●● and to be revenged of these injuries; for that in this case he should be severely punished; so partial are the Turks to their countrymen being guilty, and so cruel to see stranger's punished, though innocent and harmless: not observing, that by allowing ●hiss law of liberty unto themselves, they by the same means frustrate the laws of common equity and justice. This one good quality the Turks have, that they are excee●●ng charitable, and great alms givers: but it is without any discretion or judgement, ●●eing they will give money as well for the entertainment of beasts, as of men.  
As for the Christians which live amongst the Turks, they are in a manner conformable to their fashions and manners, except those that live in a strange and foreign coun●● where every one lives after his particular manner and fashion; but for the most part 〈◊〉 of them use to go appareled after the Turkish manner, except they distinguish themselves by some attire on the head, a little differing from that of the Turks; I mean this by those that are not of their countries, or that come out of those provinces, where these ●●●iress are in use.  
The women of Persia go so handsomely or rather sumptuously attired, as in the chastest minds they excite some amorous cogitations, by reason of the glances they will many times reflect upon men for the kindling and inflaming of their hearts: and these franks do freely entertain all amorous allurements, and seem to live in the world for no other end but to please the wanton, who found matter of contentment enough in conversing with them, because their entertainments are free, and much more familiar than that of the Turkish women.  
The jews are only greedy and attentive of gain, applying themselves principally to merchandise, which they practise with that usury and deceit, as they appear to have absolutely set their consciences to sale, retaining no other study nor care, but how to become rich, an to live at their ease. Some there are amongst them that follow the practice of physic, in which they attain to that skill and judgement, as both princes and great Lords, together with other of the meaner sort of Turks, do willingly employ such persons.   

¶ Their Riches, Forces, Government, and Religion.  
FOr that we have undertaken in the end to discourse at large of all these things; we will refer the courteous Reader thither, who shall there see all things related at large in their proper place: and therefore I do purposely omit here this discourse, that I may the speedilyer come to the other provinces.   

¶ Greece.  
THis name Greece, is taken in divers senses amongst Authors: for truly and properly they term that province Greece, which Ptolemy calls Attica, in which the famous city of Athens stood: then, in the second place, extending this nomination further, they comprehend under the same, four provinces, which be, Macedonia, Epyrus, A●haia, and Peloponnesus, with other countries contained within these four; then after that, the Islands of the jonick and Aegean seas, and thus in common sense at this day we understand the nomination of Greece. Finally, we may so extend the signification of this word, as it may comprehend Thrace, a great part of the lesser Asia, or Anatolia, besides the above mentioned provinces, which the Greeks in former times possessed, and whither they anciently used to sand their colonies: and then moreover, that part of Italy which in old times was called great Greece, and now bears the name of high Calabria.  
But to take it as ordinary men understand the same, it is watered by three seas that beaten upon her coasts; on the West, by the jonick; by the Libick on the South; and by the Aegean on the Levant; as for the Septentrional part thereof, it is limited by the mountains, which separate Macedonia from Thrace, high Misia, and Dalmatia.  
This Greece, understood in the sense formerly mentioned (comprising therein also th● I●le of Candie, whereof we spoke in our discourse of the Venetian State) is enclosed within the parallel of 34 degrees high, which is the tenth where the longest day consists but of fourteen hours and a quarter, and the parallel of 43 degrees of latitude or elevarion, which is the fourteenth, where the longest day hath but fifteen hours and a quarter: so as in all this tract, the artificial day hath no greater diversity and difference than of an hour.  
As for the longitude, it is contained within the Meridian degree, and that of 55, or at lest wants but little thereof. The Venetians hold several pieces of territory in the same, but they are of so little importance, as they scarce deserve to be mentioned: so as we 〈◊〉 ascribe it all to the Turk, even as we use to allot all the provinces which are 〈◊〉 in their proper places, to the Emperor of Marrocus, notwithstanding that the Portugals have in their power the places of most moment, and greatest consequence, they remaining more secure in them, than those that maintain the other for the signory of Venice. But that we may enter into all particularities, let us consider Greece exactly according to the several parts thereof, making of the same an ample and sufficient description.  
Macedonia, according to Pliny, was anciently called Emathia, and Peonia, and then Emonia, as Titus Livius affirms: but Gerbell and Niger hold at this day, that it is called Albania; and yet Magins opinion is, that the same part of Macedonia which lies upon the jonicke sea, is only so called. The oriental part thereof, between the Strymonian bay, now called the gulf of Contesa, and the bay of Thermaca, now the gulf of Sal●nica, is called jamboli: and as for that part in the heart or midst it is also modernely known by the name of Macedonia.  
This country lies betwixt two great seas, that is to say, between the Aegean sea, or Archipelagus, where it makes two points or capes on the East part, and the jonike sea; ●n the West, between the rivers of Drilon, now Drino, or Lodrina, and Cylidnus, which ●ome falsely term Salnich; on the North, Macedonia is bounded by Dalmatia, high Misia, and a part of Thrace, separated by the rivers of Drylon, and Strimon; andon the South part, by Epyrus, properly called Albania, & Achaia Gerbele sets down six provinces in Macedonia, on that part, where it joins upon Greece, that is Emathia, Pieria, Pelagia, Estiota, Thessalia & Phitiotia among which, Thessalia, now called Comenolitari, in Castaldus' opinion, is the best. There lie in it the mountains of Olympus, now called La●ha, as Castaldus writes, which is exceeding high, seeing according to Pliny, it is more than ten stadia to the top thereof, and so taking eight stadia for a mile, it is more than a mile upright in height, and therefore the country inhabitants call the top thereof hea●●n, because no winds blow there, nor are of force. There is also Pelon, now Petras as ●●me will have it. This mountain is so high, as Dicearcus (as Pliny doth witness) having ●●●ueied the height thereof, found, that it was a thousand two hundred and fifty paces ●●gh. The mountain of Ossa, which Sophian calls Colonno, and Pinet, Ollira, is also in 〈◊〉 country, as also that of Pined, now called Mezzono, at the foot of which, the river ●●nea hath his source.  
You may here also behold mount Nymphea; but of all others, Athos is the most renowned and famous, which at this day is called the Holy mountain, or according to the ●●eekess which inhabit the same, Agios oros, importing the self same signification. It is ●●forme of a Chersonesus, there being a straight of one thousand and five hundred paces 〈◊〉; adjoining to the plain or valley: the circuit thereof, is seventy and five miles, 〈◊〉 in length, it contains three days journey of ground, being not above half a days ●●nty broad. They who travel by sea, ken the top thereof above thirty miles off. 〈◊〉 is that mountain, which a certain Architect would have cut into human shape and figure, in the days of Alexander the Great, who notwithstanding gave no great care to this his glorious and famous design. This mountain was heretofore consecrated ●o the Caloyers, the which were a kind of Greek Monks of the order of S. basil, 〈◊〉 had certain privileges and exemptions granted, which they also hold at this day, ●●that is, That no Greek nor Turk may inhabit there, if he be not a Greek Caloyer. ●●●●●ers' parts of this mountain, there remain yet about six thousand Caloyers, where ●hey had some four and twenty great and ancient monasteries enclosed with good and ●trongwallss: but two above all the rest are most famous and renowned, that of Vnto●edi, and that of Agias laura.  
Macedonia hath four principal gulfs on the coast of the Aegean sea, which are the ●●lfe of Contessa, the Syngitica, otherwise surnamed the gulf of the holy mount, the ●●roniaca, now called the gulf of Aiomama, and that of Thessalonica, or Salonica, be●●es the Pelagian bay, which is now called the gulf of Armenia.  
The most renowned rivers of Macedonia (besides that of Strimon or Stromon, vp●●●he frontiers of Thrace (are that of Axius, which some call Bardara, others Vardari, 〈◊〉 it is the fairest stream of all the rest, being a pleasant and sweet water, which flow●●● from mount Scandia, after a long course, falleth into the gulf of Salonica, and the ancients were wont to affirm, That the sheep which drunk of this water become black: there is also Erigonus, now called Vistritze according to Sophian, and Devodus according to Mercutor. This river issuing from the hills of Illiria, or Sclavonia, and running along by Peonia, and close by the towns of Heraclea, and Edese, vents itself into the Vardari.  
Alya●mon, now Pelecas, as Sophian writes; and Platamon, by Mercators' opinion, springs from the mountains Canaluys in Peonia, and separates Macedonia from Thrace: The banks thereof are much broken and ruinous; some suppose that he that would have white sheep, must 'cause them to drink of this water.  
The river of Penea, called now Salenpira, and Lycostoma by Sophians' relation, Pezin according to Thevets' opinion, and Azababa as Mercator writes, and some other writers, being enlarged by four rivers running into the same, voideth itself within the gulf of Thessalonica.  
There is also to be seen in Thessaly, that same famous place of pleasure and delight, which ancient writers called Tempe, which is five thousand paces long, and almost five hundred broad, being seated between the two mountains, Ossa, and Oylmpus, and it is watered in the midst and centre thereof, by the beautiful river of Penea, or Azababa.  
There is furthermore the Chersonesus of Patalena, to the extremity whereof you may see the Promontory Canestrea, now known by the name of Capo Canistro, and this place was in former times separated from the rest of Macedonia by a wall.  
The most famous towns of Macedonia were anciently Thessalonia, Pellis, Stragira, Appollonia, Dirrachium, and Aulon, all which are inhabited at this present. In Augustus' days, Thessalonica flourished above all the rest, and was the head city of all Macedonia, comprehending a great number of inhabitants, and being seated in a very good place, between the rivers of Chabris and Euchedorus. At this present it is called Salonica, this town is great and famous, and moreover, so rich and traffickeable, that it may well be compared to Naples in Italy: but that which is more remarkable than all the rest, there are many merchants which have all kind of Indian commodities and merchandise. It was for a while in the Venetians hands, but at last, Amurath the son of Mahomet took it from this commonweal. Not far from thence, you may see the village of Syderocapsis, as Belon says, which shows like a great town. It was heretofore called Christl●eses.  
Pella, now known by the name of jeniza, as Sophian writes, and Zuchria according to Niger, very famous for the breeding and bringing up of Philip, and Alexander the Great, his son, the which hath heretofore been very famous. Stagira, a town where that great Philosopher Aristotle was borne, it is situated near to mount Athos, upon the shore of the gulf Contesa, where many ruins thereof may yet be discerned. It is now called Stelar, as Niger affirms, but Libanova according to Sophian, as also Macra by Nicetas report. Appollonia was sometimes a very famous town, upon the river Euchedorus. Here it was where Caesar Augustus learned Greek: Niger calls it Ceres, and some others Piergo.  
Dy●rachium, which is likewise called Epidaumia, and which men commonly term at this day Durazzo, is a town situated on the coast of the jonicke sea. It is but weakly inhabited by reason of the evil air which ariseth out of the marshes that lie round about it. Bajazet took this town also from the venetians, in the year 1749. It is distant from Brindezi, in former times called Brundisium, a town of Puglia, within the kingdom of Naples: about on hundred miles. The town of Aulon, which hath also a port, lies upon the jonicke sea, being now called by the name of Valona: there is a strong castle, but the rest of the town is unwalled. This town is about sixty miles by sea distant from the firm land of Italy, that is from the towns of Hydronte or Otranto.  
Belon also accounts the town of Cavale to be in Macedonia, the which he unproperly supposeth to have been sometimes called Bucephale. He says it is very well peopled at this day (whereas heretofore it was naked of inhabitants) by reason of the commodity of a fountain head, whose channel Abrahin Bassa caused to be repaired environing the town at the same time with new walls, and building an hospital called Charbacara to entertain and relieve all sorts of travelers. Croy also is reckoned to be within this province, lying indeed within the same continent, not far from the river of Lysan, which Sophian takes for the ancient Antigonia; but it is thought he is much deceived, because Antigonia lay in the country of Epytus, upon the river of Celidaa, so as this seems more probably to be ●pycaria, as we may conjecture by the situation which Ptolemy ascribes to it. This town was straightly besieged by the Turks, as well before Scanderbag, or George Castriot, as after his revolt, but at last it came under their subjection, having endured a thousand miseries.  
Epyrus is a part of Albania, and the rest is comprehended in that part of Macedonia which lies towards the jonick Sea. Castaldus is of opinion, that Epyrus is now the country of janne; but the mere situation thereof gives evident testimony that the province of janne, so called of the town of janne, lies beyond Mount Pyndus in Thessaly. Richer, and Aeneas Silvius, or rather Pope Pyus the second, call it Epyrus La●tis: but this country is but a part of Epyrus. This province is bordered on the East by the river of Achelois, otherwise termed Aspri, according to Sophian, Cathochi, according to Nigers' opinion, and Aracheus by Castaldus and Mercators' consent; and also conformable to the supposition of many others, Aspropotamo: on the South, the Adriatic Sea: and on the West, the jonick, even to the river of Celidnus, or Pepylychnus, which Castaldus erroneously names Salnich; for that Salnich is rather that river of Lous, mentioned by Ptolemy: for Celidnus is a little river, near to the Port of Raguzi, betwixt Valona, and the Acroceraunian hills, called now Chimare: and upon the North, this province butts upon Macedonia  
It extends towards the Mediterranean Sea some two hundred and twenty thousand paces, between the rivers of Celidnus, and Achelois. This province was heretofore divided into Chaonia, which was properly called Epyrus, which bends towards the West, and Acarnania, which now is called the Duchy, or despotate or little Greece, and this part lies out towards the East as far as the river of Achelois.  
Gerbele (besides the above mentioned provinces) makes mention of Thesprotia, Amphilochia, and Ambracia; and Ptolemy, Cassiopea, Dolopia, and Almenia, all which lie between Chaonia, and Acarnania: Mercator divides Epyrus into old and new, calling that old Epyrus which was so styled by the Latins, and taking that part of Macedonia for the new which now is high Albania.  
The ports within this land, are Panormo, Onchesmus, Cassiope, commonly called Cassiopo, and Buthiro, where the town of Butrinte stands: but the gulf of Larte in former times called the bay of Ambracia is better than all the rest.  
The town of Ambracia was in former ages the capital town of the country, and where the kings of Epyrus held their royal residence: it is now called Larte, assuming this name from a river so called that runs near hand. Nicopolis was likewise heretofore a very good town, and well peopled: it hath now the name of Prevese. Augustus' the Emperor built the same in remembrance of the naval victory which he obtained against Marcus Antonius. Gerbele also accounts Actium one of Augustus' colonies amongst the towns of Acarnania: but the later maps decipher it by the name of Capo Figalo.  
Achaia, which Ptolemy calls Hellade, is now in the newer maps called Livadia. It is bounded on the North by Thessaly, near to the river of Sperchia, by the bay of Maluc, and Mount Octa: on the West, by the river Achelois: and on the East, ●inding a little towards the North, by the Aegean sea, and Myrtos, even to the promontory Suria, now called Cape de Colonni, because there remain some ruins of the columns or pillars of Neptune's Temple: then, on the South, it frontiers upon Peloponnesus, or Morea, the which is annexed unto it by an Isthmus or straight five miles broad about the midst thereof. In Authors, I found mention to be made of these nine regions, Doridis, Helladis, Etolia, the countries of the Locrentians, and Opuntians, Phocides, Beotia, Attica, and Megaris.  
Dorid lies near to Mount Parnassus, where the Doric tongue was spoken, which was esteemed very elegant and fluent above all the rest: Gerbele says that Helladis is environed with the other provinces, that is, by Phiotidis on the North: on the S●uth by Phocidis: on the East by Attica, and Beotia: and on the West by Dorid.  
Aetolia hath his proper scite between Mount Callidromus, and the jonick sea. There were sometimes many fair towns within this country, the principal of which was Calydon, which at this day lies ruined like all the rest.  
The Locrians, and Opuntians country, had Amphissa for their chief city, which is also specified in the newer maps by the same name, though Niger says that it is called Lam●ino. Naupactum is also held to be in this province, which others place in Aetolia, there where the Port of Lepanto is. The Turk took this town violently from the Venetians, at the same time when Durazzo in Macedonia, and Modona, heretofore Mothona, and Coron, were reduced under his subjection.  
The country of Phocidis is near to Mount Parnassus: the principal town thereof was Delphos, by reason of Apollo's Oracle, which invited multitudes of people to go thither for to understand what should befall them in their attempts and enterprises: and this was also the reason why so many persons sent continually thither such inestimable presents.  
Thebes was the principal town of Beotia, which lay between the rivers of Ismena and Asope, and now the ruins thereof is called Stibes or Thiva.  
Attica runs along the Sea side, towards which it beareth out with two capes or promontories, the one of which is named Sunia or Cape de Colonni, & the other Cynosura. The town of Athens was sometimes the head and chief of this province, at this day they term it Setines, it being but a borough, where stands a castle that was in former times the Temple of Minerva.  
The country of Megaris, which takes the name from he town Megara, lies close upon the straight. The most famous mountains of Achaia, were Parnassus, Cithaeron, Helicon, and Hymetta. Parnassus is all environed with forests, and hath two tops. Cithaeron is an high mountain, rough, and inaccessible near to the mountains of Megara, and Attica.  
The rivers of greatest fame in this country are Ismena, which Strabo calls Cnope, and then Asopia, and Euena.  
There are likewise many bays and gulfs, of which the most worthy of note lie on the South part towards Morea, I mean the bay Naupactum, or gulf of Lepanto, and the Corinthian bay. Then, towards the Aegean sea, there is the Pelasgick bay, now the gulf of Armira, and Maliac bay, now called the gulf of Ziton.  
The Peloponnesus was heretofore called Egialis, Apia, Argios, and Pelasgir, but commonly at this day men call it Morea: it is seated between the Aegean and jonick seas, being joined to Achaia but only by the Isthmus, which notwithstanding is so firm and solid, that it could never yet be divided, nor cut away: for many curious princes, as king Demetrius, julius Caesar, Caligula, Nero, and some other, had a great desire to separate it from all the rest of Greece, that so it might have been a shorter navigation out of the Adriatic to the Aegean Sea, & less dangerous, and so Peloponnesus would have been stronger and more secure: and therefore there hath been in other times a wall erected upon the Isthmus, from one end to the other of this neck of land, that thus Morea might be the more strong.  
This wall was called Hexamites, being about five miles in length. Amurath the Turkish Emperor overthrew it, and sacked in a manner all this Island: but in the year of our Redemption 1453 it was re-edified by the Venetian signory, who sent expressly 30000 men thither, to labour in this work, notwithstanding it was once more utterly ruined by the Turks. This Isthmus is called Corinthiaca, by reason the town of Corinthus was there built: It is questionless the worthiest neck of land in all Europe.  
Finally, Morea hath on the East, the Candian sea; on the West, the jovian or Adriatic; on the North, the Corinthian bay, which Strabo terms the Chrissian and Alcyonian seas; and Solphiem the gulf of Patras, and also the Saronick bay, called the gulf of Engia by Castaldus, and it is between these gulfs that this straight or Isthmus naturally runs out: and upon the South part, Peloponnesus, lies upon the Mediterranea sea.  
The length thereof from the Isthmus to Modon, is a hundred seventy and five miles, and the circuit thereof, about six hundred. It is very capable by reason of the form and proportion thereof, being almost round, for inform it resembles much a palm lease.  
The Arcadians, Cynurians, Dryopes, Lemnians, and Corinthians, have inhabited this country.  
This Peninsula is in a manner the rampire and bulwark of all Greece, being also at this day the best peopled part thereof. It was in ancient times very famous through the town of Myc●nas', and the commonweals and principalities of the Argives, Lacedæmonians, Sicyonians, Elians, Arcadians, Pelians, and Mestenians: but now the whole country is subject to the Turk, as likewise the rest of Greece, although it hath many times been valiantly maintained and defended by some despotes or princes of Greece, and also by the Venetian signory.  
The principal rivers in this country, are Asope, now A●bon, according to Thevet, Eneia, now Igliac, Alphea, now Rophea, or Orpheau, as Sophian, Niger, and Carbon affirm: if we may rely on the judgement of Italian navigators, above an hundred and forty small streams make their fall into this river.  
Panisa, which Niger calls Stromio, and Castaldus and Mercator Pirnaza; Eurotus, now Balisopotame, according to Sophian, Mercator, and some other men's opinions; and Iris as Niger affirms and Inachus, that men now call Planizze.  
The country of Corinth lies all along the Isthmus, and Corinthus was the head city thereof, which was eleven miles in circuit: this town was then very strong, by reason of a castle which was built upon the Ionian, and Aegean seas.  
The country of Argia is next to that of Corinthia, on the East part where the Cretan seas water the skirts of that province. Ortelius says, that at this present men call it Romania.  
The river of Inaca, or of Planizzes runs along thereby, and so disgorgeth into the Argolicke bay, or gulf of Naples, so called by reason of a coast town called Napoli, or Naples of Romania, and heretofore Nauplianavalis.  
The town of Argos was in ages past the most renowned seat within this province; it is so called also at this present time, being ●eated in a healthful and pleasant situation, which is watered with the river of Planizzes.  
The town of Epidauris stood likewise here, and it was the same which was so famous throughout the world for Aesculapius' temple, where so many sick persons received present help and cure.  
The country of Laconia which regards the South, is the goodliest province of all the rest, and extends towards the Promontories of Malia, & Tenazie, now called Capo Malio, and Capo Matapan, and it contains many spacious bay or gulfs, the longest of which is that called the Laconicke, but at this day the gulf of Colchina.  
The river of Eurotas, now called Vasilopotamo, passeth through the midst of this province, and so falls into the Laconicke bay.  
Lacedaemon was sometimes the chief and capital city of this province: it was also called Sparta, and at this present Misithra. There is moreover another town of Epidauris in the Argolicke bay, besides that which lies in the Varonicke. It is also at this time very well inhabited and peopled, and is called Maluasia.  
The Messenians country is enclosed between the Messenian bay, now the gulf of Coron, and the jonicke sea. It stretcheth out in length towards the South, and the Lybian sea. The principal town thereof was Messene's, which Castaldus calls Martagia, and some others Mocenigo, and Nisin.  
In this country stand the famous towns o● Methon, now Modon, the residence of a Turkish Saniack, and Coron, both which town●ss were taken by the Turks, from the Venetians: than you may see Pyla, now Navarino; Cyparissi, now Arcady, which gives the same name to the gulf also that runs hard by, being called the gulf of Arcady. Out of this province there bears a very difficult and dangerous cape called heretofore Coryphasis, and now cape Zunhio.  
Elides looks towards the West, and lies in the midst between Messenia, Achaia, and Arcadia.  
The best towns in it, are Elis, which some unfitly affirm to have the name at this day of Beluedere: Olimpia, now Lareganico, and Pisa, which many would have to be one and the same thing with Olimpia.  
The Promontory Chelonites belongs also to this province. It is called at this day Capo Tornese, by reason of a town of that name, which is hard by.  
There is another country of Peloponnesus, which properly is called Achaia, to distinguish it from that which is within the Graecian continent, being otherwise called helas. On the borders of the North, it is seated between the mountain of Stimphalia, and the bay of Corinthus. The principal town herein, was once Egyra, which stood on the hanging of a stony and craggy hill: but now it is ruined, and called Xilocastro.  
You may here likewise discern the town of Egia, called Vostizie or Bostisan by the moderns, but wholly razed by the Turks.  
You may likewise in this province see the town of Patras; and as for Dyma, it is now defaced, and called Chiarenza, communicating her name to the next cape, which heretofore was called the Promontory of Araxis.  
Here likewise is to be seen the Promontory of Rhia, and right over against it, that of Antirrhia, which are two forelands of Greece that hem in the bay of Corinth. This place is now called the straight of the castles of Lepanto, and the two capes are called the castles of Lepanto, vulgarly the Dardanells.  
The little country of Sycionia lies between that which is properly called Achaia, and the river of Asope. The chief town thereof was Sytion, now Basilika, as Sophian writes; but Mercator in his tables sets down Vasilicon, with a distinction from Sytion, in that he severally names and points them out.  
Arcadia, heretofore called Pelasgia, stands in the midst of Peloponnesus. The mountains of greatest name, were Cyllenus, Pholoa, Lycea, Menalis, and Par●henia. The principal city of this country was Megalopolis, now called Leontari, if we may believe Sophian; and Londario, if we shall give credit to some others.   

¶ The Quality and Property of the soil.  
AFter we have described this country as exactly as we can; so it may not be distasteful or tedious to the reader, we will now observe the nature and quality of all this province, which formerly we mentioned and described unto you.  
In times past, this province exceeded all others of Europe for temperature and goodness of air, and the soil thereof is very delightsome and pleasant, producing all sorts of first-fruits, and nourishing many herds of cattle: fish did abound and swarm in the seas and rivers thereof, and all plenty and wealth did as it were abound in this place, in that one might so easily arrive, & make approach thereunto, by reason of the abundance of gulfs, ports, Isles, demi Isles, as also so many navigable rivers. But look into the modern and present estate of all these provinces, to the end we may see whether it be answerable to that of former ages.  
Macedonia is fertile in every part or place, and environed with great mountains; that part which answers to the Ionian sea, is champain, but covered all over with thick forests.  
All that part which is called Albania, is great, but fertile and pleasant. Moreover it hath mines of gold and silver, and according to Aristotle's testimony, in old time they did found a kind of gold there, altogether unknown.  
The Asphalt stone is also found in divers mines and veins of the earth, near to the towns of Apollonia, and Aulon, or Valonna.  
Thessaly, or Comenolitari, is the best country in Macedonia, for it is a very fair and great plain compassed about with mountains of great name, and fruitful, and very pleasant and delightsome, whereas they breed horses which are much esteemed.  
Mount Olympus bears a mighty quantity of box and bay trees, and the common opinion is, that there are no wolves in all this mountain.  
Mount Ossa, Collono, or Ollira, is continually covered with snow, and there are great forests, but especially there are such numbers of Pine trees, that there very bows, when it blows stiff make a noise like to thunder. Mount Pyndus is also ordinarily subject to be covered with snow.  
As for Mount Athos, the top thereof is perpetually white, and the snow never melts nor dissolves. There is abundance of grass, many plants, and an infinite number of fruit trees. You shall see there also, great store of vines and Olive trees, and divers other fruit trees which are continually green, as Bays, wild Olives, and Myrtle trees.  
But the valley of Tempe is always exceeding delightsome: the Chersonese of Patalena was in times passed so fertile, that seven towns were maintained in it, but now it is all over grown with woods, and yields but few things. Near to Valona they dig great store of mineral salt, and the soil yields as good wine as in any other part of Europe.  
As for Epyrus, at this day it is much unpeopled, and the soil is but barren, and full of forests in many places: and yet in coming towards the Sea side it is reasonably fruitful. Many great four footed beasts are bred there, especially oxen, dogs, and likewise sheep: but there are no asses bred there. The Acroceraunian hills are much subject to lightning, and it is greatly feared by such that travel along that coast by sea, for when so ever they discern little small clouds to arise in the sky, in an instant great storms and tempests follow.  
To speak of Attica, the soil thereof is now but dry and barren: but whenas the country was inhabited and governed by the original people of the same, this natural defect was repaired by the industry and diligence of the country people, who wrought out of their soil much good necessary provisions for human life: the air is wonderful sweet and temperate, being there as good dwelling as in any other place a man can make choice of.  
The country of Persia is of a very moist and moorish soil, but fat and fertile: for it stands in the midst of mountains, from which many lakes, rivers, and fens take their springs, and the air is marvelous thick and gross.  
The province of Dorid hath a reasonable good air, and the soil would bring forth many things if it were but carefully manured: but now the Turks are masters thereof, all goes to havoc, and the greatest part of the land lies waste.  
As for the region of Megara, the ground is rough and stony. Mount Parnassus is covered all over with forests, and the tops thereof with snow. Mount Cithaeron bears box trees in abundance. But the mountain of Hymetta is one of the best soils, a man can behold with his eye, being apt to bring forth all kind of first-fruits. There is commonly great store of flowers, and a wonderful number of bees that come to suck of them, working out of them a kind of excellent honey, which is so much commended by Alexander Aphrodisius.  
Peloponnesus aboundeth in all things necessary for man's life, and may also serve for for delicacy and contentment: for there are many goodly plains, and hangings of hills, which bear all sorts of first-fruits: and therefore it is at this day the best peopled part of all Greece.  
The country of Licaonia is simply the most beautiful of all the other quarters of Morea: there are many arable fields, which are fertile, yet hard to be manured, because the soil thereof lies betwixt mountains, and so men meet with a certain roughness, by reason of the many hills which environ it. Pliny affirms, that the earth shakes very often in this province, which is a manifest testimony that here are many concavities and hollow parts.  
The promontory of Mallea is so dangerous, and the adjacent sea so wonderfully enraged and tossed with winds, as they which travel by Sea fetch a wheeling course abour, for if they should do otherwise, they might oftentimes be in great danger.  
As for the country of Arcadia, it is more rough and barren than any other part of Morea: it is likewise very cold, and subject to great fogs. Pliny says, that in this country they made a certain kind of wine which made women fruitful, and men stark mad; and the fruit and grain of the yew tree which were gathered in this country were so venomous, as whosoever did but sleep under the shade of this tree, or did eat of that mortiferous fruit, he forthwith died.   

¶ The ancient manners.  
Sing we have first begun with Macedonia in this our description of Greece, we must likewise in the first place consider the ancient manners and customs of her inhabitants.  
The Macedonians were always great warriors, even as we may easily conjecture by the great conquests they made under Philip, but much more under Alexander the great his son. If this realm therefore did produce many valiant and warlike men, learning and good letters, were also amongst them in no less esteem; which we may evidently conceive by those epithets which the learned (especially the Poets) ascribe to the Muses: for we shall found that the most famous and renowned places where they have constituted the habitation and abode of the Muses, are in Macedonia: for they were named Pimpleides of the fountain Pimplea: and Libetrides, of the town of Libetre, situated upon Mount Olympus. Moreover, Aristotle alone, who was borne in the town of Stagira in Macedonia, may be a sufficient warrant for what we aver, seeing there ne●er lived any man more accomplished in all sciences and knowledge.  
The Macedonians were wont to be very sumptuous in their feasts and banquets, as we may plainly see in Atheneus, when he makes mention of Carans nuptials, who was the first king of Macedonia, wherein every stranger at his departure received a piece of silver plate in free gift: and this was a very extraordinary matter in those days, when any slender bounty was held for a rare magnificence.  
As for the Thessalians, whom some place in this kingdom, ancient writers have generally observed that they were ever very deceitful, and never observed their oaths or promises. Furthermore, they were noted for the most dissolute people in all Greece, not only in their habits, but in feasts, and their only desire to live licentiously, and without having any neighbours that might tax or reprehend them; the cause that they were so inclined to receive the Persians into their country, whom they followed and imitated in all their delights and effeminacies: and therefore I say, they laboured by all means to bring them into Greece.  
They were likewise accused for wonderful gourmandise and gluttony, and held for men that would never be filled nor satisfied: then for whoredom, and they were esteemed to be so transported with this vice, as their excess in this behalf hath been universally blamed and reprehended with all possible bitterness by those that have written of their manners. And yet all these vices and corruptions did not hinder them from being valiant men, and such as they gave the Grecians to feel that their debauched and dissolute lives made them not so cowardly nor effeminate as they supposed: neither that their great belly cheer made them incapable and unfit to manage arms, yea and to beaten and vanquish those which thought themselves more hardy and brave than the rest.  
This the Peloponnesians made good trial of, when they fought against them in favour of the Athenians: but it was accompanied with this ill quality and disposition, that being not able to shake off their natural inconstancy, they basely betrayed their friends, and suffered the Athenians to be defeated by those of Lacedaemon, not without the note of infamy to the Thessalian cavalry, who were renowned above all the other horsemen of Greece.  
They that dwelled in the Elysian valley of Tempe, residing namely along the banks of the river Penea, made often assemblies, offered up sacrifices to the gods, and banqueted together all in a troop and company, when they had accomplished, and finished their foolish and ridiculous devotions: and because there was also some one or other, offering to to the gods, and sacrificing in this place: they who had occasion to travail along by this river, smelled continually passing good odours in going through this valley; and this was the reason why men so honoured this place, esteeming it to be peculiarly consecrated to the gods.  
In the town of Dyon, as Polybius relates, there were very fair schools, and colleges, which may plainly inform us, that they were studious of good letters. The Idol they most honoured in this town, was the image of Adonis, and this gives infallible testimony how much these citizens esteemed amorous dalliances.  
At Tricalis men worshipped Aesculapius, and there is to be seen a marvelous stately temple, erected to his honour and name, and within the temple an infinite number of tables, wherein were the names and portraits of such as had been delivered from divers infirmities, by this wicked fiend: God permitting the devil to work some kind of miracles within his own kingdom, and amongst those who were planted in a blind and superstitious belief of his power and virtue.  
As for Epyrus, men think that the Chaonians came in former times out of Thrace, and they were accounted the most barbarous people of all the rest. It is also said that the province of Chaonia was so called, because the inhabitants had ordinarily their mouths gaping, and half open.  
The Acarnanians wore continually long hair or locks, and would never in any wise poll or cut them. They were reputed good runners, and good drivers of chariots, upon which they then used to fight, and wherein they went to the Olympian games, as we may see in Pausanias, who sets forth an Acarnanian winning the prize, whose name was Polycles, and this not only in the games of Olympus, but also at the Pythian, Isthmian, and Nemean run. These people also were much commended for throwing out of a sling. And the Acarnanians were reputed discreet and wise, as these who had laid a good political foundation; so as some affirm that Aristotle made one hundred and fifty books, only upon the subject and argument of this people's laws and government; but these books were all lost, together with their state and policy.  
There was also at Epyrus the oracle of Dodon to be seen, to which they came from all parts. Herodotus writes upon this point, that the priests of Dodon affirmed how in old time there came two black pigeons out of Egypt, whereof one flew towards Africa, and the other made towards Epyrus, and how this last spoke in a human voice, and said, That they must consecrat an oracle in that place, and the same would declare unto them the will of the gods, even as afterwards it did. Moreover he adds that they were women, and that the Dodoneans by them received answer from their gods. The wood of Dodon gave occasion as report goes, that men in the beginning lived with acorns; because the Pelagians residing in this place, and using neither art, nor industry to sow corn, or make bread: they made use of the first-fruits on trees; and for that in this place they had more acorns than any other fruit, from them they drew their sustenance and nourishment.  
They of Ambracia had a Lioness for their goddess, whom they worshipped, for that when Periander the Corinthian did tyrannize in old time over this city: he was slain by a woman that he entertained, whose name was Lyonna; and so by her means the Ambracians were delivered from that tyrant's fury and cruelty. They were also very curious and excellent artisans, as Pliny tells us in his natural history, when he reports that Fului●● Flaccus a Roman general, having taken Ambracia, carried away with him the portraitures of the nine Muses, which there he found admirably well done by the hand of Zeuxis, a rare and excellent painter of that age.  
But now let us come to Achaia. Next the Pelasgians, the Dorians are esteemed the most ancient people of all Greece; so as Pliny is so bold to term all the rest which carries the name Greece, barbarous, except the jonians, Dorians, and the inhabitants of Aetolia▪ For the jonians and Dorians were the people which eternised their names more than all the other Grecians, and that conducted colonies into strange countries, as having once subdued a part of Asia, and given sufficient proof and trial of themselves in Sicilia.  
The Dorians sentsome of their citizens to Chalcedonia, a town upon the mouth or entry of the great sea, or Pontus Euxinus: they were ever addicted to the wars, valiant, and hardy, above all the rest of the Greeks: they had crests on the top of their burguenets and morrions, where they ware horse tails hanging down, the which they accommodated in such sort, as they might appear more terrible, and strike the greater amasements into their enemies in all encounters and conflicts.  
● To speak of the Opuntine Locrians, following Pausanias' intimations, the first inhabitants of their country being ignorant of the use of garments, they defended themselves against the cold with the raw hides and skins of such beasts as they had killed, even as at this day also the people nearest to the North do, and the hairy side they turned towards their skin, that so they might have more heat and comfort.  
These Locrians adored Minerva Zosteria, above all other deities, by reason of the belts and baudricks which they did wear, like to Minerva, fastening them at their shoulders like a scarf, and hanging their swords thereat, even as we may yet see in all the statues of soldiers and captains, as well greeks and Barbarians, as Romans. The same people were in ancient times highly recommended for their valour, being very well armed, as Pausanias says, he reporting that in the time of the Persian wars, the Locrians were heavily armed, and ware strong arms. He further adds, that Homer saith, that this people was in the war undertaken against the Troyans', with their bows and slings.  
The Actolians were also reputed for very valiant men; so as Pausanias says, that when the Gauls passed into Greece, under the conduct of Brennus, the Actolians were the first that made head against them: and so he commends them for the most valorous amongst all the Greeks at that time, he testifying that they had the most flourishing and lusty youth of all Greece. They used slings in the wars, and did better service with them, than with bows or arrows, as Eustathius likewise affirms upon Homer. Whenas they went to the war, their tied foot was coveted with some sandal or buskin, and the left was naked.  
Touching the Photentians, though writer's place mount Helicon in their country, where they say the Muses had their residence, as if this province had been the proper habitation of men of learning and knowledge, yet Strabo, following Ephorus opinion, affirms, that they were a rustical and gross people, utterly abhorring all learning and liberal sciences; which was the reason, that how valiant soever they were, yet could they never preserve and maintain that greatness and power which their general Epaminondus had gotten them; so as war was their only practice and exercise.  
But to the end we may further observe what their natural fury and heat was, the same is related of them, which we also read of the inhabitants of the Isles Baleares, that when they left their country, to navigate by sea, they went out all naked, carrying three slings about their necks, another tied to their flanks, and the third in their hand, and that they were expert in throwing of stones after this manner. They were held for a blockish and rude people, and dull witted. If any one among the Beotians were indebted, and satisfied not the same within a reasonable time, he was brought into the open market place, where being caused to sit down, he was hidden and covered with a dorser, every body laughing and flouting at him, & this served for a kind of penance and special note of infamy to them that were handled after this manner. But touching that which we have spoken of their little understanding and wit, it cannot yet be denied, but there have been men amongst them of very pregnant wits, seeing that Amrpion one of the most ancient Loricke Poets, came from thence, and then that great divine or Southsaier Amphiaraus, and besides these, the famous, and admirable Poet Pyndarus.  
Those of the country of Attica, were men of good understanding in marine matters, and in merchandise. In this country also it was, where men of learning and liberal arts were wont to swarm, all which coming out of Athens, were afterwards dispersed over all Greece, and other places. And this was the reason why some did writ, that Minerva planted and produced the Olive tree, giving her name unto the town of Athens, because the sweetness and abundance of the fruit of this tree holds a lively similitude with the flowing streams of eloquence, and the sweetness of learning and sciences. They were the first inventors of cloth, and the use of wool, they also taught the Greeks the commodity of corn and wine, and so informed them how to till the earth, and cast seed thereinto: whereas before they used nothing but wild first-fruits. Cecrops king of Athens was the first in those parts that instituted the conjunction of man and woman in lawful marriage: and therefore antiquity gave him two faces.  
Within the Temple of Minerva in Athens, there were certain veiled virgins which were consecrated to the observation and worship of this goddess, & which maintained a perpetual fire near to her statue, which they firmly believed was sent from heaven. This statue was in figure like a fair and goodly woman, wearing a robe which reached down to her heels, and upon her head a kind of Burguenet, and upon the top of the crest was seen the monster Sphinx engraven, and many griffons all over the Burguenet: Then, upon her breast, she ware Medusa's head, a lance in her hand, and at her feet her buckler, and a dragon which stood hard by her lance, as also some hold opinion, that she had an Owl upon the crest of her head piece, because this bird was specially consecrated to her. And therefore when as Demosthenes was sent into exile, he said, That Pallas took great pleasure in three deformed and unseemly creatures, in a dragon, in an owl, and in a multitude.  
The Athenians are also held to be inventors of oil, for that there were no olive trees to be found in all Greece, but only at Athens. It cannot be denied but that the Athenians were sometimes very valiant, seeing many important wars, undertaken both by sea and land, give an ample and sufficient testimony thereof.  
In the towns of Athens and Eleusis they did particularly worship Ceres, who had amongst them her solemn feast called the Thesmophories. During this solemnity (as Plutarch reports) the women abstained from all meat, and lay prostrate on the earth in imitation of the Egyptian sacrifices, and as we may read in Ovid, they continued nine days without the company of any men. Elianus doth witness, that during this feast the women laid a certain hear be called Hanea in their beds, both for that it drove away serpents, as also, that it qualified and assuaged the ardent flames of love, freeing them from being tormented with that violent passion.  
As for the mysteries of Eleusis, different from the Thesmophories, the publication of them was generally prohibited upon pain of death: and therefore, when Alcibiades was accused for discovering them, he was constrained voluntarily to betake himself to exile, for if he could have been found in Athens, question less he had been very severely punished. And therefore he was excommunicated (if it be lawful to use that phrase) by the decree and ordinance of all the sacrificing Priests, which was an occasion of his revolt against the Athenians, and of his raising a war against them. Now as the sacrifices were termed mystical, so the Ministers and Priests employed herein were nominated Mists. There were two sorts of mysteries, that is, the Great and the Lesser: the great or high mysteries were suddenly privileged, and no stranger was admitted into them, according to the institution of Eumolpes: so as Hercules once desiring to be admitted to the same, he could not obtain this suit before he was made a free denizen of that country, being adopted by an Athenian gentleman of that province called Pilea. These sacrifices were so full of superstitious abominations, that the devil no doubt perceiving if they came to be published, they would soon be abolished, he cunningly by visions expressly for bad all those that could writ, in no wise to reveal or discover them. Pausanias confesseth, that the goddess admonished him in a dream not to profane her mysteries in publishing or making them known to all the world.  
But that we may the better understand what can be further said touching this point, it will not be much impertinent to examine this matter a little farther. Hear therefore what Clement Alexandrinus speaks of these matters in his oration to the Gentiles: The infants of the earth, Baube, Disaulis, and Triptolemus, as also, Eumolpes, and Eubuleeus, dwelled in Eleusis: Triptolemus was a neatheard, and Eumolpes a shepherd, from whom came the Eumolpides, whose office was to proclaim and summon the feasts of Ceres: Baube once lodging the goddess in her house, presented to her of a kind of composed drink, the which she would not accept of, for that she was grieved and full of tears for the loss of her daughters: Baube taking this refusal in great disdain, and verily believing that this woman required no great observance or respect, for that she was but in very mean show and accoutrements, she shamelessly discovered her privy parts, and showed them to Ceres: she taking pleasure in this sight, took the cup and put it into her flasket; so as all the ceremony and solemnity of this feast consisted only in the representation of this foolery; seeing the words of devotion in these miseries, were nothing else, but I have feasted, I have drunk some of the broth, I have got some of the basket, and have put it into my flasket.  
And to the end we may more particularly specify all these fooleries, they used to bring two baskets, in one of which there were flowers, and in the other ears of corn, (the one signifying the Spring time, and the other Summer and Harvest) besides this, they brought thither the figure or representation of a woman's privity, by reason that this foolish Baube had showed her forepart to Ceres.  
And even as this woman used all the diligence possible in the pursuit and search of her daughter, so do they at this feast light an infinite number of lamps and torches, laying upon a chariot all such things as these Pannyerbearers worshipped: and in these panniers thus laid upon the chariot, there was nothing but spindle's and distaffs, wool ready carded, little cakes, an handful of salt, the figure of a dragon dedicated to Bacchus, pomegranates, and the heart of ivy, and also Poppy. These high mysteries of Eleusina were celebrated in the month of june, and the lesser solemnity in the month of November.  
The Opuntynes worshipped Hercules, in whose honour they every year celebrated a solemn feast, wherein they sacrificed to him a Goat, a Ram, and six Bulls. They also used another kind of sacrifice not so bloody, whereof Plutarch makes mention after this manner: What is he that the Opuntynes call Crithologus? this word signifies one that heaps up barley; for that the Grecians in their ancient sacrifices made use of this grain, and each of the citizens offered up of the first ears of barley: and hereupon it came that the Priest, whose office and function it was to take away these first first-fruits, was called Chrithologus. The Opuntynes had two sacrificers, one whose office was to sacrifice to the gods; and another to Demons and unclean spirits. And therefore to this purpose I may boldly assume, that the first Grecians, yea and some amongst the Romans, detested the effusion of blood in their sacrifices: so as the Opuntynes originally were contented with this simplicity, barley loaves, or cakes made of the same grain, with a little salt. They of Megara sacrificing to Terea, used in stead of barley little stones, as if their god had been of no understanding, being contented and satisfied with every small trifle: but the women Priests of Eleusina, which served before Propilea, durst not offer to their Idol any other barley cakes, but such as came out of the territory of Eleusis. Near to the city of Calydon is to be seen the Temple of Apollo Lathrea, and within the town, that of Diana, to whom they sacrificed after this manner: first they laid together about the Altar, whereon they meant to sacrifice, green wood, every piece of which was sixteen cubits long, and upon the hearth of the Altar, they laid a great deal of dry wood cut very small. When the day of the solemnity drew near, there were certain steps made of soft earth, to mount up unto to the Altar, then upon the day and hour they went in a magnificent and stately procession, where the she Priest, who must be a virgin, marched after the rest, set in a chariot drawn by two stags. The next day after the feast, the general sacrifice was made, in which they laid upon the Altar all kind of soul good to eat, and every kind of offerings or oblations, then wild boars, does, stags, and goats: some also laid on wolves, and little boars; others greater, and more valiant beasts: as also they then offered of their domestical first-fruits, when the fire was put too, they burned all these beasts to ashes, whereupon some flying away, they were to be brought back again for the consummation and accomplishment of the sacrifice.  
At Lepanto, or Naupactum, in former times they worshipped Neptune, and likewise Diana, as also Venus, in grots, and subterranean faults.  
There was also a temple dedicated to Aesculapius.  
The Orchomenians which lived in Phocides, were great warriors, and very strong in horse; so as the Thebans, were for a great time their tributaries, until Hercules was the means to free them from this servitude. They had also a temple devoted to the Graces.  
The Lebadians above all other, were ever more famous for their superstition, than for any other special respect; so as these Greeks were of that humour, as they supposed the best means to make them immortal, was to invent some strange adoration & ceremony.  
There was the den of Trophonia, into which none might descend before they were detained for a time in a lodging that stood at the entry of the den, (& this lodge was dedicated to Genia, or good Fortune) and while the party remained there, he must live chastened, washing him in hot baths, & he must sacrifice to Trophonia and her children; besides this to jupiter, surnamed the king, to Apollo, to Saturn, and to Ceres, whom they call Europa, and who, as they said, was nurse to Trophonia. The priest was to be present at the sacrificing of every beast, that so he might peruse & observe his entrails, and make known to the party descending, whether Trophonia were favourable or no.  
The same night that any one was to enter into the cave, he was to sacrifice a ram in the ditch, calling on the name of Agamedes, and whatsoever good fortune the precedent sacrifices prefaged, if the entrails of this ram were not correspondent to the same, nothing at all was obtained: but if they were alike, than they might descend with all security.  
The party that was to descend was first conducted to the river Hercynna, where the priests anointed him with oil, and two boys about thirteen years old, the sons of some Lebadian citizens, whom they termed Mercures, washed him in the water of that river. After this he was not suddenly conveyed the Oracle, but to the spring of this river, where he must drink of the water of Lethe, or oblivion, as they said, to the end he might not remember any thing he had before thought on. Then he tasted of another water which was called the water of memory, that he might remember whatsoever he should see within the grot or cave of this Oracle. Afterwards he beheld the statue, which no other might lawfully see but he that descended into the vault, where he made his prayers before the Idol, which when he had worshipped, he then went towards the Oracle, clad in a linen robe girt to him with little bonds, and wearing such pantofles on his feet as he put on in the same place. He that descended carried certain honey cakes, and when he had stayed there but a while he felt himself transported, as it were by the violence of some swift stream, which carried him away, & overtaked him with the swelling waves.  
They came out at the same place where they entered, and with their feet first. Then the priests received him, and set him on a seat called the seat of memory, not far from the entry, where they inquired of him, what he had heard or seen with in the grot.  
When this was done, they recommended him to their charge and care who were to look to him until he were come to himself. These conducted him to the lodge of Genia, or good Fortune, being yet so distracted & weak of sense, as he neither knew himself, nor the persons that attended him, & they which entered after this manner into the vault, left behind them a table, where all that which they had heard or seen, was to be graven, that there might remain some remembrance thereof to all posterity.  
The Cheroneans (above any other god) worshipped a royal Sceptre, saying that Vulcan had forged it for jupiter, & that he having given it to Mercury, he presented the same to Pelops, after which it came to Atreus, then to Thyestes, and last of all to Agamemnon. It is true, that they erected no temple to the same, but he only that was chosen priest (the same year, for the honour and ceremony of this ridiculous god) kept this Sceptre in his house, and offered daily sacrifices unto it, preparing a table whereon they set all kind of flesh and meat, as if it had been at a feast or solemnity.  
At Cheronea also (a town very famous for the death of Plutarch) they made certain odours of flowers incorporated together, as of roses, lilies, and orice; and this composition did ease many dolours: as also by the means of an ointment made of roses, they preserved their wooden statues from worm eating.  
Moreover, the Cheroneans had this custom, that when they sacrificed to Leucothea a marine goddess, and nurse to Bacchus, the Sexton stood at the gate of the temple with a whip in his hand, crying out with a loud voice that not any man, or woman slave that was an Etolian, should presume to enter into those holy places, while the sacrifices were celebrating.  
At Platea, was ordained for a perpetual memory of the famous victory obtained against the Persians, the feast of deliverance, and the image of jupiter Elutherius, or liberator, was erected in the place where the battle was fought, where the Grecians assembled every year, and practised all martial exercises, in honour of their Preseruor, and a high prize was assigned to such as were victors in their courses.  
They first worshipped at Orope, that Theban Amphiaraus, who was swallowed into the earth alive, and after the Oropians had defied him, all the Grecians yielded divine honours to this god, to whom they dedicated a temple, with triumphant sports and combats, that were commonly called the Amphiaraes'.  
They of Megara adored the idol of jupiter, where they placed the hours, and the destinies, as also they built a temple to the Night, which they honoured as a goddess. They worshipped likewise jupiter the Dusty, whose oratory had no roof, no more than that at Rome had, which was dedicated to the god Termes.  
Touching Morea, it is well known to the world how valiant the citizens of Corinth were, and how dearly they loved, and resolutely defended their liberty. They worshipped the goddess Venus, and Isis was there also adored in a wood where sacrifices were offered to him. They yielded in like manner divine honours to the Cyclopes, to whom the Corinthians erected a temple, and built an altar, upon which they sacrificed. Moreover, they had a subterranean cave or vault, dedicated to Palemon, where they constantly believed that he lay hid. In this place they took their oaths in all doubtful and ambiguous points, and who so ever was perjured, (saith Pausanias') whether he were Corinthian or stranger, he could not avoid a condign punishment for his perjury. But to return to Venus, who, as I told you, was there honoured, they might commit whoredom in her temple without fear of any punishment; and the custom of those times was such, as a thousand light strumpets were there maintained, which exposed themselves to all those that desired to have the use of their bodies.  
The Corinthians, although they were reputed for good warriors, yet were they so addicted to sensualities & pleasures, as their effeminacy was the occasion of a law published at Lacedaemon, importing that no stranger should be entertained into that government, or communicate with the Spartans', for that by that access and familiar acquaintance of strangers, Corinth was fallen into that corruption of manners.  
The Trizenians had a wood, and a temple consecrated to Hippolytus, where men sacrificed to him. There was not any maid among them ready to marry, which was not bound by the Trizenians laws to go and offer up tresses of her hair in this temple before her marriage: and Lucian goes a little further, saying, that those youths which were come to man's age, offered the first cutting of their beards.  
The Lacedæmonians were exceeding courageous & valiant, as it did plainly appear by the long respect and authority, which they held over all Greece. Neither were they given to any thing which might breed effeminacy or baseness, as we will give you to understand in a particular discourse of their policy and government. They held certain feasts termed Gymnopedies, or of naked children, which were the most solemn of all, where young men danced all naked in the honour of Apollo. They worshipped the destinies, to whom they erected a temple in the most apparent place of their city. There was in Sparta, a place called Ephaebus, where young men did offer to Mars a little dog, they supposing that this oblation was very pleasing to him, and this sacrifice they ever performed in the night. While these young men did attend their sacrifice, they caused wild boars to fight together, which they had made tame for that purpose, & then they fought in the place of public exercises: it oftentimes fell out that he whose boar had overcome the others, proved likewise victorious over the rest of his companions.  
The place where these young men fought, was compassed round about with water, like an Island, whereunto they went by two bridges, upon the one of which stood the effigies of Hercules, and on the other part, that of Lycurgus. They came thither in several bands and troops, whereof the one charged, and the other maintained the assault. In these conflicts they fought both with hand and foot, not sparing so much as the face, but employing their nails, yea and their very teeth in these encounters.  
They had a statue of Mars, which had setters on his legs, to the end (said they) that he should not run away from their city, and favour and protect their enemies. They were not much addicted to learning, and though they had amongst them a Temple of the Muses, this was only because they loved music, using to march to their encounters by sound of Flutes. They married rather for issue, and that they might have citizens to follow and profess arms, than for any care they had of religious chastity, and women were so respected and honoured amongst them, that their husbands would call them by the names of Lady and Mistress. Their virgins were exercised in running, fence, the practice of the iron bowl, in darting, and to the exercise of zagayes, and darting of lances, that thus growing to forget the ordinary delicacy and tenderness of their feminine natures, they might be the more strong, able, and apt to suffer and endure the pains and throbs of childbed.  
They practised themselves in these exercises all naked, like young boys, dancing and singing in certain solemnities before young men of their own age: and yet for all t●ey were thus naked and uncovered, yet could they not observe any lascivious or wanton gestures in them. From hence grew that same activeness and dexterity of the Lacedaemonian dames, who were better enured and acquainted with all labour and travel than any other women in Greece.  
Their daughters being ready to marry, they were ravished by those that should espouse them, and on the nuptial day, the espoused being conducted into the chamber of her spouse, they had their hair shaven off, then when the bridegroom came, they took off his girdle, and so he only was permitted to continued with her all night.  
Such old men as found themselves unable to get children, might assign over their wives to some virtuous and good young man to have line and issue, and although she grew with child by another's act, yet these children were fathered upon the husband, and they suffered herein no reproach or dishonour. They used to mock at other nations, who did couple, sometimes with money, otherwhiles by other means, their bitches and mates to good males of their own kind to have young ones, and yet their wives must be mewed up safely at home: as for them, were they strong or weak, they would not be destitute of issue.  
The women washed not their children with water, but wine performed this office, for that water dislolues and debilitats the members. They never swaddled their infants, nor kept them in cradles or clouts, but enured them to darkness and solitude: and this was the reason why many strangers sought to have nurses from Sparta, to nurse and bring up their children.  
The whole people were divided into three several ranks and orders: each order had their particular motto or saying: for in solemn feasts, the most ancient said singing, Heretofore we were both strong and young: then they that were in perfect years, and full of strength followed, saying, We are both fresh and young, ready to try our force: then last of all the children came, and said, We one day shall be lusty and strong like you. Plutarch makes mention, that even in his time the Lacedæmonians sung certain songs upon their flutes, when they marched onward to any battle or encounter. Now concerning this use of Flutes in fights, they were not brought in for the exciting or further encouragement of the combatants, but only that by the means of this sweet harmony, they might march with equal paces, and so present themselves before the enemy without any disorder and confusion. They loved brevity of speech exceedingly, so as the proverb of the Laconic or concise phrase is yet remembered amongst us.  
If I should here set down whatsoever might be spoken of the ancient manners and fashions of the Greeks, I should but annoyed and discontent the Reader in seeking to satisfy him: so as I think it fittest to omit the rest, seeing I have expressed the principal points, and let us now descend to their manners and customs which at this day have their habitation and natural seat in Greece.   

¶ The Manners of the present times.  
THe Grecians that now live, are reduced and brought under a most miserable servitude, except a few which are yet subject to the Venetian signory: for the Turk holds at this day the greatest part of Greece, as well on the sea as on the firm land; and those places that embrace the Venetian government are but Islands, as Corsu, Cephalonia, Zacyntha, Candie, and some others of no great consideration.  
They which are subject to the Venetians, live more peaceably for their religion and conscience (as Belon says) than the rest that obey the Turk: and if we do but duly observe them both, we shall found that they which live under the Venetians, lead a life after the manner of their lords and masters, as also, they that are engaged under the Turkish power and tyranny, live like their masters and governors, imitating them in their manners and fashions. But I must needs speak thus much, that barbarism doth so reign both in the one and the other, that a man cannot meet with a scholeman of their towns, and none amongst them take any care for the bringing up of their children, nor to give them the knowledge or understanding of learning.  
They also use one kind of language, drawn from the ancient Greek, corrupted, but some of them speak more eloquently and regularly than the rest: and yet their common words draw nearer to the ancient Greek language, than the Italian does to Latin.  
The inhabitants of those towns which are subject to the Venetians, speak Italian as perfectly as Greek: and so the like may be supposed of those that live under the Turks government: for they that are resident in good towns, speak indifferently Greeke or Turkish: but those that lead their lives in hamlets and villages, retain only the knowledge and understanding of the Greek tongue. They also still reserve the proper names of things, except it be in those places where other nations have often intruded and crept in, and this is more to be observed in coast towns than in any other seated further within the country: for they have practised so long with the Turkish and Italian tongues, as they have mixed with their language many words of both these nations which do frequent and converse with them. The Turks likewise borrow many words of the Greeks to express those things which they found in Greece, and that before they never knew nor heard of.  
And although the Greeks do not ever use the self same word in all provinces to express one and the self same thing, yet do they all draw near to the ancient words, but principally in those things which have their peculiar and proper nominations.  
The nobler and richer sort are appareled after their manner whom they acknowledge for superiors: but the common people both under the Venetian and Turkish governments, whether they inhabit in the Islands or on the firm land, retain none of their ancient manners and fashions. All they which now devil there, wear their hair very long, cutting the tuft upon their foreheads, and on the forepart of their heads. They wear double hats, and very thick. All of them possess for the most part but few movables, even as the Turks, nor lie upon featherbeds, but upon mattresses filled with flocks. They mingle not their wine with water, they drink carouses to the empty cup. But their women are never present, nor assist at their excess, neither do they feast with them: and generally they had rather eat fish, than flesh.  
The Macedonians, especially those that live in Albania, which we have placed in Macedonia, are rude, and like to the Scythians: they are very valiant, but principally in foot encounters. There are no men in the world more delighted in boothaling than they. These Albanois have a particular language by themselves, different both from the Turkish and Sclavonian.  
As for Epyrus, which is a part of Albania, the inhabitants in Summer go forth of their country in troops, by reason of the barrenness, and go into Macedonia, Romania, and Anatolia, labouring, and taking pains for the Turks, being hired to reap corn, and to winnow and cleanse the same. These return home again after Autumn, there to live during the Winter and the Spring time, with their wives and children. They have also a several language from the Greeks, of which notwithstanding they are not altogether ignorant.  
From this province it is, that the Aydones, Vscocques, Martelosses, and Morlaques come, which are men as swift of foot as may be, untamed, and apt to undergo any toil or pains, and as valiant and resolute as can be, who bend their minds to nothing else, but how to rob and steal in the mountains of Albania, and throughout all the kingdom of Bosnia, and in Dalmatia, where they also employ themselves, to scour up and down the rivers in little squises.   

¶ The ancient government of Athens.  
BEcause we mean to refer the full discourse of the riches, forces, and government of Greece to the general consideration of the Turks slate and greatness, which we have reserved for a shutting up and conclusion: and for that many who know how wisely the Athenian policy was planted and laid, may be desirous of this relation, as well as of the Lacedæmonians, I have thought good to relate the policy and government both of the one, and other, that so nothing may be wanting in this work, that justly may be esteemed and held essential and necessary.  
The city of Athens was heretofore highly reputed of, and governed by very sage and prudent men, who framed her commonweal. The foundation and beginning of this city, is attributed to Minerva: intimating hereby, how it was prudence and wisdom that first built it. Theseus was her restorer, but Solon was the man that conferred greatest good upon her, seeing he enacted such laws amongst the Athenians, that other nations disdained not to follow the same laws; yea, and when the Romans laid the foundation of their Estate, they sent Ambassadors to make suit for Solon's laws, advowing them by this action, for the most excellent institutions in the whole world: and behold the order of this commonweal.  
The Athenians, who took it for a great honour to be termed originaries of this country, and not descended from any other nation, nor coming from any other place, were distinguished by three special names: the first were called Eupatrides, that is to say, Nobles, being the same in Athens, that the Patricians were in Rome: the second, were the Geomores, that is to say, Rustic, so called, for that in ancient times, they obtained a part of the Attic territory, to manure and till the same: the third were all sorts of Artisans, that practised within the city all mechanical trades and mysteries: but this word Dimiourge, signifying an artisan, had likewise the same sense and meaning which our word Tollgatherer hath.  
They which excelled the rest in honour and in years, were called Demogerontes, as it were Senators, that received from the people sovereign authority and respect. The first name of Indigina was not given to the soil, in steed of the people, nor yet to the city, but only to those whose predecessors by a common and general consent had lead their lives in Athens, & could give apparent testimony, that they derived their original from no other place. These names and titles they retained, until other factious and seditions did arise, by means whereof divisions grew between the comm●● veal, and the people which continued until the time that Draco ordained Magistrates, 〈◊〉 caused the Athenians to establish an oligarchy, that is to say, a form of government consisting of few. Their names were Pedians, Diacrians, Parales, and Etimorians. The first sort, with their riches and wealth, as being the mightier, favoured the oligarchy. The Diacrians affected popular government, being much grieved that the more powerful sort should hold the greatest places and commands in the commonweal. The Parales backing sometimes one, and then another party, took ever that side they thought fittest for them, hindering thereby both there own, and also other men's liberty. But in the mean time, all injuries tell upon the miserable Etimorians, who were men but of small means; for they were constrained every year, to give the sixth part of their goods to the mightier sort. And by this means it came to pass, that the miserable citizens being stripped of all power and assistance, were enforced to yield, and to be subject to the will and disposition of the rich.  
But that we may the better understand the people of Athens, and what vigilancy and care the magistrates used, to retain it in duty and obedience, I think it fit and convenient to relate here that which Polybius mentioneth in his sixth book.  
The people of Athens saith he were like to a Pilot of some abandoned and driven ship: for even as the Pilot commands his ships or company, and they readily obey him, when they are reunited after some disorder, by reason of some furious tempest, or for fear of assailing enemies: but when his mariners are in security, they then grow to contemn their head; and each particular man follows his own private opinion; so as one sort will bear forward, and the other will enforce the master of the ship to put in with a port; so as I say▪ such debates may seem very strange, and to see some strike sail, and others strive to go on in their course, by reason of the oars or helm which are in their hands, whereby many times they run into eminent perils: even so falls it out with the people of Athens; for when their commonweal had surmounted many great dangers, both by the people's virtue, and by the noble merits of many renowned captains, and magistrates, at list it came to final and utter ruin, through occasions of no great weight or importance, splitting a sunder upon those rocks which were no ways to be feared. Here you see what Polybius says  
But to come to the mutinies of this seditious sort: these men were of such opposite humours, and contrary wills, as they could devise no other means, but to seek after a monarchy, or to constitut a head that might suppress or keep under so many discordant and jarring spirits. By general consent therefore of all, especially of the inferior people, Solon was called to the government, both for his integrity, and honesty, as also, in that he never had yielded his consent to any of those proceed which were attempted in prejudice of the people.  
Now though ingeniously he refused this dignity, yet would he not fail to secure and relieve the commonweal, being now in decaying and in a desperate estate; and therefore by his singular wisdom and counsel, he laboured to reform and re-establish it. And first of all, he thought it expedient to restore and set up those who had been overwhelmed by the power and authority of the great men; so as to this end he enacted a law, by which he disannulled and made voided all those obligations, and bonds which the poor had signed and passed to the rich, even to the submitting of their bodies to slavish servitude: and he decreed, that no man should usurp upon other men's liberties, for any other interests or respects how due and just soever. They to whom he communicated this law, before the promulgation thereof, were termed Creocopides, which is to say, cutters off of othermens' debts, the which they did to gratify those whom they knew to be desirous of such a law. There are some which affirm, that the men of mean condition, and poor quality, cleared their debts by another means, and therefore the value of all coin was raised; so as what before was worth seventy drachmas, was then raised to the rate of an hundred mines, and debts were paid at the value of the ancient rate.  
But both these things are no ways supportable the one without the other, for such cutting off of debts would have been as burdensome to creditors, as pleasing to the poorer sort: so as it would have been no means to extinguish the fire of those factions, but rather an occasion to increase it: for the augmentation and addition of these mines could not serve the poors turn for payment of their debts: but we must needs suppose that Solon performed both these points at the same time; my meaning is, he augmented and added to the rich, what by course of law they could never otherwise have recovered of the poor. And for that all Lawgivers aught to begin with themselves for a pattern and example, he frankly remitted six talents of gold of his own debt, which in French coin amounted to about forty or forty five thousand crowns.  
When matters hung upon the point of alteration and change, the law ordained could not please, for the rich stood out that they were hardly entreated, and the poor were put to labour and till the Attic soil; yet notwithstanding in time, and by reason of the general peace and accord that did grow from such a law, it was so approved and applauded by every one, as they gave it the title of Sisachtia, and laid it up amongst holy and sacred things.  
When the affairs were thus by little and little accommodated, he resolved like a good physician to prevent a second relapse into the former disorders and miseries, and therefore he made an estimate of all the people's goods, that so every one (according to his ability and means, being otherwise of good life and conversation) might enjoy honours and dignities in the Commonwealth, making herein no difference between the gentlemen and the common people, he having a special care, notwithstanding that such nobles as were then possessed of any magistracy, should not without their own liking be constrained to surrender their places.  
And so by this means he united those of eminent condition, with the others of poorer and base quality, & so much the rather, for that before none of the common people were permitted to execute any charge in the Commonwealth.  
Then he divided the people into four parts, by the invention of this tribute which they were to pay, and their names were Pentacosiomidymnes, Hippians, Zeftites, and Thites.  
The valour of the first men in dignity was rated at five hundred muys, every muys is about five quarters. This was the first and chiefest rate; and these were the principallest men in all Athens next to the Senators: the Pentacosiomidymnes charge was, when need required, to do that which was necessary for the Commonwealth.  
These were followed by those whom they rated at three hundred muys, and they were called Hippians, because they were able to keep horses, and in time of war they were bound to allow as much as would maintain a man and a horse in service for a whole year. The Zestites came next, who were valued at five hundred medimnes, that is to say, half mines, every mine is valued at two of our bushels.  
Aristotle makes mention of them in the institutions of Solon, whereof he speaks in his politics. Then the Thites, they were goldsmiths, dyers, and other such mechanical trades, and these paid but one crown to the Commonwealth, which was called Thitick. The later sort could never attain to any magistracy, while (through the poverty of their state) they continued in this mean degree.  
Solon having ordained matters in this sort, he made the Commonwealth whole and found again, which before was but in doubtful and declining estate: and to the end that these laws might be ratified with the greater approof and authority, they being imposed both upon the nobles and the people, he drew a liking from the first, promising them the continuance of tables and records, and from the other, by feeding them with hopes of a division of the Attic territory.  
And when they felt the true benefit and commodity, they were so pleased therewith, as they consecrated this law to immortality.  
Now you have heard how peace and accord was settled among the people, I hold it fit to look a little into the first beginning of Tribes. All nations and cities (as Titus ●uius says) were accustomed to draw their extractions from some famous men, or el●e from those whom fond antiquity hath put in the number of gods, and therefore many of them pretend, jupiter, Mars, Mercury, Pallas, Vulcan, and other such like monstrous deities to be their founders and protectors.  
The Athenians were of the number of those which did content themselves with one only nobility of stock, that is to say, with the protection of Pallas, but further they imposed many names and titles on divers parts of their people, whom they called Tribes: and these nominations were derived from the Eponomes, or Heroes, whose memorial yet continued amongst men, for they had their several statues erected, not so much for their own virtue and merits, as to the end others might imitate them, and strive also to become more worthy and excellent.  
There were at the first, four Tribes: one was called Cecropides, of old Cecrops: another Autochton, that is to say, indigenarie, or original: the third Actee: and the fourth Paralia. Cranaus making further search of these names, he constitutes four differences. One of these Tribes he names Cranaides of himself: another Attida: the third Diacrites: and the fourth Mezogena. Attida, of the name of the country; Diacrites, of a high place in Athens; and Mezogena of the part in the midst.  
The mother of Ericthonius, to cover her adultery, made show that he was jupiter's son, and this son sayning to give thanks to his father, removing all the ancient names, he imposed four upon the Athenians, drawn from those of the gods, so as one Tribe he called Diade, of jupiter's name; another Athenaides, from that of Minerva; the third Ephestiades, from Vulcan; and the fourth Possidonia, from Neptune, then subdividing each of these into three parts, the number did arise to twelve.  
These parts thus divided, did continued till Alemeons' time, which was about six hundred and sixty years: Then he, from an answer of Apollo's Oracle, nominated ten Tribes, in consideration of the princes of great reputation that reigned before him.  
Their names and several titles were, Cecropia, Erecta, Egea, Pandionia, Acamantes, Leontes, Eneides, Hippotoontes, Antioches, and Eantes, to which they add Antigonia, and Demetria, to make up the number twelve, and each of these was subdivided into three other parts: so that all together, they came to be in number six and thirty. In the prosecution of this our discourse, you shall plainly discern of what importance this ordination and establishment was. Now therefore that you know the people, and have justly numbered their several ranks and distributions, it is time we should come to discourse of their magistrates.  
Their magistrates therefore were chosen three manner of ways, that is, either by lot, by voice of the people, and by election for wealth and dignities sake. All magistrates elected for trials and judgements, were chosen by lot; and the Senate thus elected, was termed the Council of five hundred men: the people's voice took place in the choice of Captains, Camp-maisters, and Generals of armies.  
They who were chosen for nobility, dignity, and riches, were called Chorages, and assisted at public pomps and sacrifices, wherein they spent bountifully, and these were of the number of Ten. We see therefore that the Commonwealth was knit and united together by these three bands: for the judges defended the city, by equity and right, against the insolences and injuries of citizens, neighbours, and strangers: the soldiers maintained and augmented the extent of their dominion and territory: and religion held men's souls in purity and integrity. I will therefore treat of these several dignities in order, beginning first with the Areopagites.  
The Senate of Areopagites, for their strict and severe justice, was very famous, and of great note amongst all those of whom Histories have made mention. And as it was of great esteem and honour, so was the number of them not small, though uncertain, and this uncertainty proceeded from the nine Thesmothetes, of whom we will speak in their proper place: for when the time of their magistracy was expired, which continued for a year, and that they had yielded up an account of their employments to the Logistes; some were received amongst the Areopagites. They were to come before the Logists, whose magistracy was ordained for the common good, they delivered their names to some public officer, who was to make a solemn cry in these words: Who so ever can accuse such a one of any corruption or injustice, let him come, for now the term of his magistracy is expired. Upon this general cry, all accusers that could any ways inform against him, were admitted: and the severe censures of the Logists was the cause that few were found clearly innocent and irreprehensible, to augment the number of this order: for who so ever was accused of avarice, or any such offence, he was never received into this society. And for that there might be no partiality nor favour in these Syndications, men were examined and tried before the Senate and the people. The Thesmothetans therefore took away many every year; they left the number doubtful and uncertain. This institution was invented by Solon, with the severity of the Efetans, who were to the number of one and fifty, before Solon's government, and determined of capital and criminal offences; this being an employment which was discharged by the king's person before they were established: wherefore by these men's authority and reputation, Solon established a Senate of sovereign dignity in the commonweal, for they did not only judge and sentence matters criminal, but they did also determine of other things of far greater moment & importance. The magistrate of the Areopagites, was called by the Grecians, Adiadoxon, that is to say, perpetual, and full of care. And though they imposed public punishments upon all criminal offenders, yet the proper subject and use of their tribunals was to try poison, murders, wound, fires, ambushes, or treasons plotted against the commonweal, with many other such like.  
Their judgements were denounced in this manner: When the accused stood before them after the first interrogatories, accompanied with conjectures, testimonies, and pregnant proofs, they presently pronounced sentence without using any long delays, to cut off all prevention. It was not lawful for the Areopagites to be moved with any compassion. In their rigour & severity they resembled the Efetes, for that they punished the crime according to the proportion and quality of the offence.  
Orator's also were generally prohibited to persuade or move the judges to compassion. When the offendor was imprisoned, (as put the case it were for a murder committed) the parents, familiars, and friends of the dead man, were called upon by a public crier, with whose consent and agreement, the punishment was inflicted, and the sentence was ever conformable to the damage and prejudice received.  
But as the Areopagites were very careful and circumspect in denouncing these judgements, so it fell out but seldom, that they had charge to perform the same: for they fate only three days in a month, and never assembled but in very needful cases, and about trials of great importance. Lucian says, that the Areopagites were wont to judge in the night, and with great silence, to the end they might not be overreacht by their subtility, which spoke in the presence of many, as also that other men's pleas and trials might not be interrupted while they did attend and hearken. And questionless they practised this silence not without special reason because they were the more attentive to hear the offendor, neither did they discover the secrets of judgements, and they always set down their sentences in writing, that so they might never serve from their advice and counsel who were most learned and expert, or had more years, or else peradventure that they might readily make answer to any objection or calumniation made.  
Valerius the Great, avers how this Senate had the charge to know whatsoever any particular Athenian did, and how he lived: and furthermore they provided that men might take honest courses, and daily carried in mind, that they should yield an account of their living, and conversation. The same Senate likewise decreed, that good citizens might be adorned with a crown, preferring this custom, because they knew that honour and reward were the only spurs and instigations to virtue.  
Let us now come to the Nomothetes, which title comprehends many sorts of dignities, the which I will express before I proceed any further. I found in Suydas that there were three Nomothetes or Law givers in Athens▪ Draco was one, Solon another, and Aeschyles the third, not the Poet, but another borne in Athens.  
Besides this, the Athenians by the word Nomothete, understood a convocation or assembly of a thousand citizens, who had power and authority to see the laws observed, to peruse and renew, to change and accommodate them, even as they judged it most fit and necessary.  
These had authority to deliver unto the people whether any laws propounded did like them or not; and all motions or propositions were of no force, except the magistracy of the Nomothetes did sign and subscribe to the same.  
These also were assistant at the trials and judgements of cases of importance, and if the plaintiff or defendant obeyed not their sentence, they condemned him to three drachmas fine in presence of the Arcon. This is the opinion of Pollux: but Buda relates it more at large, and after what manner these laws were usually propounded. Mark his words:  
Demosthenes reports that Solon, among other things, ordained that when any law should be propounded to the people, it should first be recited by the Lawgiver, then set up in writing in some eminent place within the city much frequented by the people; and when the Secretary of State had given it to read to the assembly, to the end if any circumstance were amiss it might be reform, and that last of all it had been showed to the Nomothetes to be confirmed and approved by them, that then it should become a ratified law.  
The Nomothetes were different from the Nomophilactes or guardians of the laws; for the Nomothetes approbations were but vain and fruitless, except they were religiously observed and kept, & judgements given according to the purport and meaning of them: but this was the particular charge and prerogative of the Nomophylactes. Cicero describes their office and function in his third book of laws, in these words: The most diligent among the Grecians who created the Nomophylactes did not only observe the words and letters, but also the actions of men, reducing them under a law.  
The Nomophilactes were in the second rank of dignity, the chief of which order did wear a bonnet or cap of linen cloth, and although the Areopagites were sometimes careful to see the laws observed, yet this no ways abridged the authority of the Nomophilactes, seeing there is no impediment, but that an office may sometimes oversee and look into matters which do not properly belong to the place, when special times and occasions require.  
After these, there were the five hundred who took knowledge of civil causes, and of such criminal actions as fallen out amongst men. These were many times the Areopagites lieutenants, and the great number of them was the cause that in their society, no impiety or corruption could take place. And because so great a multitude assembled together in one place, could hardly execute that which was fit and convenient, they were distributed into ten parts, according to the number of the Tribes, and every fifty had special days allotted them to judge and give sentence, and there were five and thirty days, on which they discharged their due office and function. Now this number of days ten times multiplied, conformable to the Athenian computation, comes to accomplish the Lunary year, consisting of three hundred and fifty days: but our year of the Sun hath more than theirs by fifteen days and a quarter; and by reason of the superfluous number of these fifty, they elected ten, whom they called precedents, out of which seven were drawn by lot every week, and every day one of the Precedents sat upon matters that required expedition and dispatch, and in the evening the keys of the forts were brought to him that had been Precedent the day before.  
But we shall have occasion to speak more of this hereafter. When the term of these five hundred grew to be expired, the assembly or convocation of these was these called Prithania, and then as many suppose they looked to the provisions of corn, to recover money due to the public treasury, to provide that none might commence suits or actions out of order, and such like matters.  
The Pritani paid the judges with such sums of money as were collected upon the consignations of those that pleaded, and others that had performed any good service to the Commonwealth. They were so named, by reason of the place where they gave sentence, where such as had well deserved of the Commonwealth were maintained and kept. This order commonly had an eye to the Edicts, decrees, and laws, censuring such laws as were interpreted contrary to their true sense and meaning. And questionless the people, without this prevention, might easily have many times revolted, seeing they many times approve and seek after those things which are hurtful and prejudicial to themselves, if the wisdom and council of others did not prevent these inconveniences. These men had the charge of war and peace, of truces, of embassies, and edicts.  
Under these ordinances they were wont to subscribe in this form: Policles the prince: the sixt of julie, the judges of the Commonwealth being of the tribe of Pandion, Demostbenes Peatronian made the decree; and he that was there named, was Arcon, of whose office we will further treat in its proper place, and the tribe named was of the fifty men, who being drawn out of those five hundred, governed the Commonweal.  
For that the number of civil causes increased daily more and more, and the fifty were not sufficient to hear them, they took forty four arbitrators to assist them, part by lot, and part by election. But they were all to be above threescore years old, and men reputed of honest life and conversation: They were always in such places where the pleaders might found out a convenient number at an instant, and these carried themselves after this manner: the plaintiff and defendant made choice of such out of this number as they liked best, covenanting, that if they began to contest before them, they should before their departure finish and end the suit, and he that did not obey their sentence, was punished. They that were elected by lot, were not admitted to any examination of the cause, but only reported it to the Senate, that so they might determine and judge thereof. The Greeks, instead of ballots or lots of gold and silver, used white and black beans.  
The Zitietes, that is to say, Inquisitors, differed very little from the Dietetes, whose office (according to Pollux) was to inquire after those causes and controversies, whose nature and quality did not evidently appear, and so to deliver the sincere truth to the Senat. As for the elected arbitrators, if any of them committed a fault unworthy of his rank and place, either he was severely punished, or ignominiously expelled out of the society of others.  
All judgements and trials of sacred matters were heard before them, as before holy men. Pollux writes also, that they could not sit upon any cause which exceeded the value of ten Drachmas.  
Furthermore they had certain captains of galleys, called Trierarques, whose number Authors do not set down, for that as necessity required, the number was diminished or augmented: only thus much is known, that there were twelve deputed to this charge, who in times of peace were governors of the place where the ships lay moored. In time of war, they obeyed their Generals and Captains. The Trierarques had also charge to repair and trim up the galleys at their proper costs and charges, for the use of the commonweal.  
This magistracy was not imposed, but the charge thereof was committed to a certain number of citizens: but this office by little and little declining, Demosthenes reduced it to a better state, who made a law concerning them that should be elected to this charge, as in many places we may perceive, but more particularly in his oration against Aeschines: Behold you Athenians (saith he) what benefit and commodity I have brought unto you, in governing the Commonwealth? for seeing the want of all things which concerned provisions for the sea, & the citizens exempted from contributions, having paid little money, as also, they that took upon them the charge were but of weak estates, and that by this means the strength and force of your Commonwealth impaired, I made a law, whereby citizens were enjoined to pay, according to the general sessement, that which by law they aught, and the poor I have defended from the wrong and oppression which they suffered thereby; but a little after, he speaks of this matter much more perspicuously.  
By the first constitution of laws, they used to defray all together the charge of a galley, when the rich laid down but little, and the poor citizens were surcharged with overheavie taxations and payments. But by my law it was ordained, that every man's estate should be estimated, and that he which before did furnish but the tenth part of the charge of a galley, should now defray the charge of two in all: and therefore they would not before this be called Trierarques, but contributors.  
We read in Pollux, that there were eleven men termed Nomophylacts, and Eparques, that is to say, Precedents. The ten men, saith he, were chosen out of every Tribe, and the Chancellor made up the full number. These men's charge was to convict thieves, and to judge and punish those that remained in prisons, as well as other malefactors, who denying the fact before them, were sent before other judges, and if before the last they contest themselves guilty of the crime, the former judges imposed the punishment upon them. These eleven men were like to those in France which are called Provosts-marshalls. The place where they fate in judgement was called Nomophilachion, and it had one gate called Xeronion, through which malefactors were conducted to their executions. Suidas observes, that these Nomophylactes were different from the former, because they forced the judges to live according to the laws, and these only constrained the meaner people.  
As for the ten men, which were Precedents, though they should be ranked among the five hundred men, out of whom they were chosen, yet because I have followed the greater number in magistracies, and these were an order very remarkable and note worthy, I think good to make of them a particular and special relation.  
They therefore used to draw fifty men, out of the five hundred that were in the ten Tribes, and out of the fifty, ten, which governed the Commonwealth. But some one may peradventure demand of me how they could elect and choose one, whom his own virtue made illustrious and worthy. To the which I answer, that this might easily be: even as we see it happens among the Venetians, who first constitute electors by lot, which nominate the party's competitors, and then their names being put into a vessel or urine, the lots are drawn according to voices. I told you before, that after they had chosen fifty of this society, ten out of these were elected by lot, with dead voices, I mean with a plurality of beans. And thus we see that in these elections, there was a kind of commixtion in lot, yet no ways hereby cutting off the recompense of virtue, but judging sincerely according to the true rule thereof. Of these ten which were chosen, there were but seven that could obtain the office of presidency: and so the lots fell amongst these ten men, that the three which remained were no ways offended with this election. And because that he which was the chief magistrate amongst them, was called a Precedent, all of them had a share in the honour of this dignity, and there was a special care had, that none should be chosen to this place twice in one year, during which presidency, he had always about him the keys of the castle, those of the public treasury, and the broad seal of the Commonwealth; and whensoever the Pritanes summoned the Senate, they chose within the nine Tribes nine precedents, but out of that which was called Pritanensis, whereof the other precedent was head, they did not use to choose any other. After this, out of these nine, a successor was chosen, to whom the government of the Commonwealth was committed. In his audience, he had the charge that no testimony should be omitted, whereby the judge might be better informed and instructed.  
Harpocration saith this of the Epithets, speaking of the sentence denounced by Isea against Espagores: There are (saith he) two Epithets in Athens, one chosen by lot by the Pritani, and the other by the Proedres, whose office Aristotle declares.  
Hiperides observes, that every man which had the hearing and comprimitting of any affair, was called an Epithet. The Proedra was as it were the chief and head of the policy and government. Their office and dignity was very great, as in this discourse of Demostenes we may perceive.  
The eleventh day of the first month, after that the public crier had given notice that they should assemble to give up their voices, for approbation of the laws: first those which belonged to the Senate, then of the others touching the people, and thirdly, of such as were brought in by the nine men.  
That the first part of those who were to give up their voices, must be chosen out of their number, who as it seems were to ratify and confirm such laws as they enacted touching the Council, and the Senate: and the second of those, they thought fit to contradict and oppose.  
The second lottery of voices shall be prescribed; and if it so fall out that any laws are to be abrogated, which before were preferred, the Pritani (whose authority then comes in) shall sit the last day of the election with the Senate for this purpose, as also the Proedre shall judge and determine of the same point. Then they command out of what place the money shall be levied, which must be given to the Nomothetes, that they may the better govern and rule the commonweal. That the Nomothetes must be of their number that swore in Eliea. After the Eliea, if the Pritani have not constituted such a Senate as the laws prescribe, & if the Proedris do not govern justly, each of them to be condemned in a 1000 drachmas, which must be consecrated to the treasury of Pallas, and each of the Proedres gives four hundred to the same goddess, and they deliver their accusation into the office of the Tesmothetes. That examination be made, whether during their magistracy they own any thing to the public coffers: if they be convicted of any such crime, let the Tesmothetes imprison them, & refusing to do it, let them be subject to the note of infamy, & expelled out of the company of the Areopagites, as contemners of the government of laws. Before the Senate assembled to speak, he that would propound any laws should digest them in writing, in the office of Eponimes, to the end that according to the number, the people may have a time prescribed from the Nomothetes to examine them. And whosoever requires the introduction of a new law, shall not only prefer it once, but every day in the office of the Eponimes, until the Senate makes their solemn session and assembly. Let the Eponime choose out of all the number of the Athenians, five men that may have the charge to defend and protect the laws.  
We have spoken sufficiently of the laws: now we must express the form of their oaths, collected out of the same author; it was therefore performed in this manner.  
Neither tyrants, nor affectors of principality shall ever be assisted by my favour or support in the commonweal, & I will never take part with him that shall corrupt the people of Athens, or that shall ordain or wish the contaric. I will never permit that new tables be made, or a partition of other men's active debts, neither of the Attic territory. I will never repeal any banished man. I will permit him to be expelled the city, that shall not observe the laws and ordinances of the Athenian Senate and people, and I will not to my power permit any wrong or injury to be done to any man. I will never confirm any magistrate, to the end that he who hath not yielded a strict account of his magistracy past, may have another, either out of men in general, or out of those which are chosen by the Proedres with beans: and I will not permit any to discharge one and the self same magistracy twice in a year, neither two magistrates for one office, within the same term. I will not receive any bribe or recompense. After I have heard the accuser and defender, I will condemn him that in conscience I think worthy, without affection or exception of persons. I swear by jupiter, by Neptune, and by Ceres, let them destroy me, together with my family and children, if I do not observe the articles above mentioned. Thus you have heard Demosthenes words.  
Having spoken sufficiently of the ten men, and their office; it is now fit time to relate their assemblies and convocations, for giving up of voices and suffrages.  
Ilaque, or Iliasis was their highest Tribunal▪ before whom public causes were heard by a thousand or fifteen hundred citizens of greatest note and mark in the city. There were five hundred in one place, one thousand upon two benches, and fifteen hundred on three. Iliasestai signifies the same, as to admister justice in this place, and Iliasis imports, to assemble or congregate to judgements. Lysias useth these two words in one and the self same signification.  
The ballottes which they used for giving up of their voices, were of two sorts, one was whole and entire, the other pierced and hollow, and with these they used to absolve or condemn, to affirm or contradict. They had a vessel, by which they conveyed the voices or suffrages into two urns, one of which was of wood, and the other of copper. The Interpreter of Demosthenes oration for Timocrates is very different, for he says, that instead of stones they used black and white beans, to the end they might the better be distinguished; as also that one of the stones was whole, and the other hollow; where Chiamastetai signifies to choose a magistrate with beans: and therefore we read that Pythagoras advised men to refrain from beans, not so much because they are windy, but to intimate that he who would live peaceably, free from ambition, and no ways subject to the crosses of fortune, must not encumber himself with any magistracy, nor affect dignities, which were distributed and conferred by the means of beans.  
There were also ten Apodects that is to say, one for each Tribe: these were much like to those whom we do now call Collectors of taxes and subsidies. The charge and function of the Apodectes was, when he received letters from the commonweal (as the elected in France do, when they would exact or raise a sum upon a province for some important affairs of the king) they compelled all those people that were thus indebted unto the commonweal to pay according unto their means. The Antigreffier, or Controller, was present at the receipt of the money, & upon the receipt, every particular man's rate was recorded, and the distributions of other accounts were referred to the Logists.  
If after the account made, there remained any thing to pay, the officers paid it out of their own purses. But if any matter fell out (as many times there did) which was to be tried and pleaded, this contestation was before the nine men, and they promised to pay whatsoever should be adjudged, putting in sufficient pledge or caution.  
The Apodectes differed only in this point from these, in that they might only receive, but not constrain them. After these, the Treasurers were established: the captains of war: those that had the oversight of public hunt, than the receivers of presents, and others, whose charge was to look to many necessary works.  
After these were the Logists or masters of the accounts, to the number of ten, drawn out of the Tribes. All those that approached near to the accomplishment of their magistracy, were bound within the thirty days preceding this expiration, to give up an account of whatsoever matters had passed through their hands. Aristotle writes, that these differed from the Eutines, who had another kind of accounts.  
The Eutines sat with the nine princes, and took notice of all that was taken from the public, when any one came to the end of his magistracy.  
There was two Logists (says Pollux) in Athens, one that managed the affairs of the Senate, and another that discharged necessary negotiations out of the Senate, these were chosen by the Senate, to the end that they might view the accounts of all the managements of the commonweal.  
This office of Logists is plainly to be observed in the oration of Aeschines against Demosthenes and Ctesiphon. First the law commands, saith he, that the Senate of the Areopagites be enrolled by the Logists, being no ways exempt from yielding up unto them a just account of all their proceed, and there this oration affirms that the Logists were masters, and superuisors of this venerable Senate; and after these, that the five hundred likewise yielded an account of their magistracy: for the commonweal was so diffident of such as had not yielded a due account of their several employments, as those people were by no means permitted to go out of the town nor to have any power over their own goods, they could not consecrated any thing to the gods, nor enfranchise slaves, but all their goods and whole estate was engaged to the commonweal. Some may here say, that it stands with no reason, that he which hath neither disbursed, nor exacted any thing for the commonweal, should give an account. But I answer, that no man, whatsoever his offices have been, must be exempted from giving an account of his charge to the city & commonweal. Then a little after he adds: You aught, OH Demosthenes, to have divulged it by the voice of the public crier, according to the custom of the country, if any man would have accused him. Thus you see what Aeschines says.  
Questionless if there were the like law amongst us, theft should be prevented in collectors and others, especially if we did but entertain the complaints of such as could accuse and convict them. There were also Controllers or Antigraphes, which registered these accounts and examinations.  
Aeschines says, that these Antigraphes were first chosen by suffrages or voices, and they upon all commissions of the Pritani, were to declare unto the people the revenues of the Commonwealth.  
Suidus saith, that there was one Antigraphe belonging to the Senate, another constituted for public administrations. Furthermore (according to the same Author) there were three Secretaries, which recorded and kept the acts of the Senat.  
The Greeks say, that there was one in every tribe, which is very probable, because it is almost impossible that so weighty a burden of the Commonwealth, growing at first from popular sedition, should be supported by three Secretaries, seeing there were so many judges, and that they were distributed into so many several orders.  
Aeschynes makes a further addition, and says, that the Secretaries kept their names enrolled in books, who had not yielded an account to the Commonwealth of their public employments.  
The Athenians had also Demarkes or Tribunes of the people, but not absolutely such, and of that nature, as you shall perceive in considering their offices and duties.  
Many writ that there were ten heads or principals of the Tribunes. Pollux saith, that they succeeded in stead in the Naicraires, and that there was in every tribe twelve parts, every one of which was named a Nacraire, over which a Demarke commanded.  
The Nacraires were bound to furnish the Commonwealth in time of war, with two horses and a ship. There were therefore six score Nacraires, as many Demarkes, as many ships, and two hundred and forty horse raised by this means in time of war, besides those that were entertained out of the public coffers: first they took care of all things belonging to naval preparation▪ and therefore they were very burdensome to the poor, for that each of them paid according to the ground, houses, or merchandise that they possessed, or to the mystery and trade they exercised; and if they paid not, they might be engaged to the value of the sum that was due.  
To the end that the Demarkes might more easily recover money of the people with less oppression, they set down in writing, what ground every man held in the provinces, and Attic territory, barren or fruitful, and so exacted these payments according to their means, and the mysteries which they professed.  
When the Demarkes had received this money, their second office was to enrol the names of all such young men as were fit for their years to govern their own Estates, and inheritances, which did redound to the great benefit of the Commonwealth: for the younger sort, and such as wanted experience, were not permitted to enjoy and dispose of their estates, while they were in years apt to waste and consume the same. Moreover, when any question grew about any of their marriages, they had recourse to the book wherein every man's name was enrolled, and the day of his birth, and so by this means they were resolved of that doubt.  
The third benefit which accrued from this, was the election of apt and able men for the wars, the which custom being imitated by the Turks, is an occasion that they abound in soldiers, as lusty and sufficient men as may be.  
There were furthermore ten Ephtines or Creostes for to recover debts, and to straighten and make up accounts. These being elected by the nine principal men, in their country's most urgent necessities, augmented subsidies and taxes, and exacted whatsoever was due or imposed. To them the money was paid in, after accounts passed with the Logistes. They examined the accounts of inferior magistrates, and took notice of that which the magistrate had received, besides the pension ordained by the public Chamber. They further heard the causes of all embassies ended.  
There fate ordinarily with them a Secretary, or Notary, that informed them of every man's name, that so they might be charged according to their means. And when any process came before them which concerned public treasure, they carried the defendants before the higher judges, as also those that had wherewith to make satisfaction; whereof Isocrates makes mention towards the end of his Trapezitica. This register kept an inventory of all the corn which every one was to contribute and furnish, that so it might be stored up in the public garnier. They which unladed or housed this corn, were termed Sytiometres, they which kept it, Sitophylaces, and the place where it was thus reserved, was called the Barophylacium: They whose charge and office it was to see it carried and distributed over all the town, were called Sytones, or chief purveyors. To which purpose let me tell you, that the Romans had so great a care of that which concerned provision and victuals, as at the public charge they conveyed many rivers and channels from several parts into Nilus, by which, great quantities of corn might first be brought to Alexandria, and so finally to Rome, and they cut out rivers and channels with inestimable charge, with an express law enacted, condemning all such to death that should break down the banks of Nilus, which were the bounds of these channels. But let us now reture to the Syrons, who differed little from the Secretaries called Logographes, or writers of account, for they were constituted in stead of the Epygraphes.  
Because we have made mention of such men as were set down in writing within the journal registers, we will now discourse of that point somewhat more at large. Before they were capable of enjoying their estates and inheritances, they travailed up and down the neighbour provinces, labouring to learn the practice of arms, and then from the eighteenth, to the twentieth year of their age, they were called Periopoles, that is to say, wanderers or travelers about. They were also termed Episcopes (which is the name of our Bishops) that is to say, inquisitors or visitors of countries; not because any such charge was imposed upon them, but for that in time of need they found themselves by this means well instructed in all the several places and passages of those countries. After these two years expired, for a recompense as it were of their travail, they purchased the title of Lysiarchoes, for that now their inheritances were committed to them: and being thus enabled to govern and dispose of them, they took this form of oath: I will never be ashamed to bear arms, I will never abandon the captain under whose charge I am, I will fight for my country either alone or accompanied with other, I will go against any country whatsoever it shall be upon this occasion, I will consent to the equity of perpetual judgements, If any man obey not the laws, but seeks to abolish them, I will to my power, hinder and prevent him, I will ever reverence and obey the wisemen of my country.  
Besides these, there were also six men termed Lysiarches: these men whensoever the great Counsels were assembled, had authority to choose out thirty coadjutors, who marked all them with a read thread which were slack to give ear to the laws, or to come unto the Senate, procuring in such sort as they were condignly punished.  
The Tribunal of the Eliees, was supplied with the Tesmothetes, & the king commanded over all. He was fifty foot remote from the seat of the judges, to the end that the officers that were present might not permit any one to pass before he had taken his oath.  
There were nine principal men that could be elected by none but by this office, who after an oath taken that they were borne of an Athenian father and mother, and that their predecessors were inhabitants of the city of Athens; they were afterwards demanded of the judges whether they were indignearies of that place, or whether they took their beginning from some other people; then, whether jupiter Tutelaris was their god, and Apollo their founder. They were examined of their life past, and whether they had been beneficial to their parents, or not, whether they had ever borne arms for their country and the Altars, or not, and whether they had ever merited the honours conferred upon them: if they had truly performed all these points that were received, otherwise not.  
The Areopagites propounded to them all these interrogatories: having taken this first oath, they added: how they would perpetually obey the laws, that they would never demand a statue of gold how important service soever they had performed to the Commonwealth, that they would affect no private gain nor bribery in judgements. And when they had sworn to all this, they were conducted and led before the Senate into the Acropoli, which was a fortress of the Athenians, where they renewed the same oath and promises.  
When they were within the sort, though they were all called Arcontes, yet six of them specially were entitled Tesmothetes: and as for the others, one was called Arcon Eponime, the other King, and the third Polemarch, or master of the war.  
The Eponime governed the Bacchanals, and the feasts of Apollo, and of Diana. He decided controversies occurring betwixt man and wife, and others also growing between parents and kinsfolks: he condemned the wronger's of other men to some penalty, and all such as arrogantly had injured others. They took care of orphans, to whom they assigned honest men for their guardians and tutors, who were accustonmed to do justice in controversies between lawful and adopted heirs. These were called in Greek, Chiron Epitropis, that is to say, Protectors of widows, or else Orfanon Epitropis, tutors to orphans. They were careful of the preservation and safety of those widows, whom their husbands dying left with child. They took care of posthumior or after births, providing that widows might be exempted from all public charges.  
As for the king, his first charge was to see that Bacchus and Ceres sacrifices might be duly performed, according to ancient customs, with those that had the office & charge of public games. In all their public sports and solemnities, the Athenians had coadjutors, which did not only precide and govern in these feasts and sports, but further they disbursed much out of their own private purses, according to their means, only to have the name and honour of commanders and heads in these magnificences and solemnities: and these likewise propounded all rewards and recompenses, partly of their own, and partly from public allowance. Next to the sacrifices, the king determined all strifes and dissensions that grew amongst the Genetes, who were such as participated of the same family and generation: because the people of Athens being distributed into certain parts, which were named Files, that is to say, Tribes, which being also subdivided into three other parts, created the Triptes, who were also called Friars, every one of which likewise being divided into thirty parts, by reason their oaths, produced the nintieth part of the Athenians, whose fathers were called Genetes, who had the administration of sacred rites and ceremonies committed unto them. Harpocration reports also, That Iseus pleading in his oration for Appollodorus inheritance, calls them Genetes, of whom I now made mention. Besides this, they brought in criminal inditements, wherein the Areopagites decided of life and death, being the first that gave judgement conformable to the quality of the crime.  
Furthermore they determined of controversies touching senseless things, as of the annoying of high ways, the ruin of houses, and other such like offences.  
The third prince was the Polimarke, who did preside over the sacred rites and ceremonies of Diana, and Mars Aenialian, for that they believed these two deities had a peculiar intendancie and disposition of war. They had also the charge of all duels that were performed within the lists for their country's honour.  
There was in ancient times an excellent custom in Athens, That all they which died fight for their country, being recorded in a journal, were many times made mention of with public joy; so as their names were specified, and their brave deeds of arms, with a thousand praises, and then the young men made a conflict called epitaphical, or of the sepulchre, wherein they animated and encouraged one another to prefer the honour and good of the commonweal before their own lives.  
Besides all this, the Polimarkes' place was to look to the verses, and sonnets which were distributed to the young men, that they might sing them in public games. Furthermore, he convented those before the Areopagires, who had forsaken and abandoned their ranks in the wars, or fled away in the midst of dangers, requiring that they might be condemned: and to conclude, he had to do in the conduct of military affairs.  
Many writ that he kept every night the keys of the city gates, and had the charge of the said gates, as the Majors and chiefest have in the towns of France: and because the Polimarke was superintendent over martial affairs, I desire now to speak somewhat of captains.  
The Polimarkes were followed by two Hipparks, or colonels of the cavalry, to whom, as Aristotle says, not only the horsemen obeyed, but all the whole army besides, and these punished offenders, and all such as contemned their commanders and leaders.  
They were also to look that none fled from their ranks or files, or the captain whom he had once made choice of, without lawful cause or licence given, upon pain of death: that none offered violence or outrage to the people, with other such like matters, as soldiers ordinarily are forbidden and prohibited. These ranged the Centurions, Disiniers, or corporals of ten, and the common soldiers. There were besides in Athens ten philarkes or captains of Tribes.  
The Testmothetes used to choose the colonels of horse, as also their office was to procure that the judges might observe written decrees, & judge conformable to the laws: they might assemble the Senate at their pleasure: they were to denounce to the people whatsoever the Senate had resolved upon: they did set a penalty upon those magistrates heads which published laws, whereunto no general consent was given: as also it was their office and charge to punish false testimonies, to condemn those that accused unjustly, and to give due place unto each several judge according to their ranks and orders.  
At the councils of the Tribunal, where the king, (of whom we have spoken) the councillors, and the king's friends sat, when they were about to give sentence upon a trial criminal, if they could not found out the author of any offence, they broke off the indictment, and cast it into the water for a mark of punishment.  
In more solemn judgements the Paredres did assist, all which were to be men of singular good life, and spotless reputation; and therefore before they could sit down with the rest, they were to give an account of all their actions past, the first time before the five hundred Pritanes, the second, before the Areopagites, and then in the hearing of all such as would accuse them of any crime.  
The reason of this severe inquisition was, because matters of great danger and wondered importance, went through their hands, wherein sincere integrity and honesty was repuired. They oversaw all the Secretaries, and those that registered what the judges decreed, to the end nothing might be changed.  
Furthermore they had certain captains of colonies, which called out and sent forth those that were chosen to people and inhabit places, either in the ancient Athenian territory, or in others by them lately conquered: and these distributed the lands and possessions of the countries or cities, according as every man's lot fell out.  
There were also ten men named Tamies, who were guardians of the public treasure, and that in the Senator's absence took out of the common treasure what was behooveful and necessary for public use, especially to maintain the navy in good state, and all things belonging to sea service, whereupon, we have many times seen, that not only the preservation of Athens, but of all Greece hath many times solely depended.  
But they had a more particular care and respect to two vessels of wonderful greatness, the one of which was called Paralia, and the other Ammon; although some authors add unto the Paralia the Salaminia also.  
Besides all these above mentioned, when they came before the Senate for public supplications and suits, they used to wear an image of Pallas in gold, the ensigns of victories obtained in former times by their captains, and other ornaments of sacred things: this is alleged out of Harpocrations opinion.  
The Tamies have reduced to my memory the Ellinotamies, whose office was to keep and employ the money raised on that part of Greece which was under the Athenians jurisdiction and power, to the end those might bear themselves a like in sacred services, as these did in the Tribes. P●ll●x saith also, that they were accustomed to demand and gather together the money and revenues of the Islands. Greek authors give a reason of this title after this so●t: After the king of Persia had been vanquished at sea by the Athenians, this victorious people being careful to maintain and preserve their authority, commanded that all other parts of Greece should pay them tribute to defray the charges of the naval war, by means whereof their common enemy had been discomfited, because the greatest part of the charge was by them formerly defrayed, and therefore they named those deputed to raise and bring in these sums, Ellinotamies, that is to say, Guardians of all Greece.  
Unto these we may well add the Hellanodices, who had the command and oversight of all sacred things within the country's subject to the Athenians, even as the others had of preserving and keeping the public treasure. Wherefore they received all such money as was allotted for sacred uses, committing them afterwards to the Chorages, for the expense and disbursements of sacrifices, the which they were wont to do at sacrifices and solemn games of the city, they exacting these contributions at those times of the inhabitants and citizens of Athens.  
The Ginaiconomes did decree first of the ornaments of gentlewomen, and then of all other women, that so no woman might wear any thing unbeseeming her rank, but every one to be appareled and adorned conformable to her estate and means. These men constituted a pecuniary mulct or penalty against those that did otherwise, and the sentence was presently put in execution.  
There was also a certain law enacted, for going and passing along in the streets, by one of Philip's sons: This law decreed, that if any woman showed herself very immodest in her gate, she should be condemned in a thousand drachmacs fine. Pollux writes, that these officers were to the number of twenty.  
The Ginaicon omes were also accustomed to be overseers at feasts and banquets, and to take notice of the number of the invited. I do in this point hold with Atheneus, who says that the Ginaiconomes, with the Areopagites, observed what numbers of men came from each house, as well at nuptials as at sacrifices, because they did first eat excessively, and then would be drunk. But this Author does no ways agreed with Plato, touching the number of the guests invited; seeing he affirms, that there were but ten persons allowed at nuptials, that is to say, five men, and as many women; but he writes a matter acted and done: and this is a thing imagined, like to the rest of his Commonweal.  
Those which Authors term the Oinottes, that is to say, overseers of the wine, are by Plato in his Commonwealth called Mnamones: because (as I suppose) that amidst their carrouses, they put them in mind of the laws: for as the Ginaiconomes hindered women from exceeding the bounds of modesty in their habits and ornaments, and looked to the number of the invited, and to the manner of their diet; so these officers did impose laws touching the abuse of wine, so as if any one were justly condemned for exorbitant drinking, he was learned with his cost not to drink any more so in time to come.  
But these Oinottes were not men of any great reputation: there were also three which they termed Oftalmes, because by their advertisements they opened the eyes of their understandings, who by profound drinking had distempered themselves. The Symposiarkes differed from these men in nothing but in name only.  
There were also ten men which had the ca●e and charge of the palace, setting a price on things, that men might buy, not at the will and pleasure of the seller, but at an equal and reasonable price; and to the end also that men should not buy any thing of no worth and goodness, in stead of a good and merchantable commodity. They also had a care that no citizen hoardward up more corn or wine than was requisite for their own use, and his family's provision: and furthermore, they procured that all the corn which came into the city, above the necessary and convenient proportion for daily maintenance, should be laid up in public places, to the behoof of the Commonwealth: and there they sold it at a reasonable rate, yea though the want of provisions were marvelous great.  
The Episcopes, or Bishops, were those that took care of the affairs and proceed of provinces. They being ordained as arbitrators in all the provinces, inquiring after all matters, whereupon any process or suit might be commenced, after public offences, and the jurisdictions and immunities of places: if any would contest before them, they pronounced sentence, the which they must as duly obey, as if it had been decreed by the principal magistrate.  
The Lawyers affirm, that the Episcopes, or Bishops, were established over all things that were exposed to public sale. And from the diligence and industry which they used, to preserve and keep all things, the Christians gave the name and title of Bishop to the head of every diocese.   

¶ The ancient government of the Lacedæmonians.  
THe city of Sparta, otherwise called Lacedaemon, was renowned and famous for the glorious actions of many valiant and great captains, in these days whenas Greece flourished; and so much the rather, for that Lycurgus, ruling and governing it by his laws, was a principal cause that it continued many ages in authority and force: but when she began to contemn and despise them, she presently saw her own ruin and downfall. And for that I found the establishment of this Lawgiver to be worthy of observation, yea admirable and without parallel, I held myself bound to relate unto the Reader, first how, and then after what manner this Commonwealth was governed.  
Lycurgus followed not herein the opinion of others, but being rather of a contrary opinion and advise to many, he was a means that his country surmounted and excelled all others in worldly happiness. As for multiplication of children and progeny, there be some which nourish and feed these maids with a little, but dainty and delicate meats, which they think fit, to have issue: They either absolutely forbidden them wine, or make them drink it much tempered and qualified. But can we ever hope for any great fruit from women brought up in this manner? Lycurgus' thought it sufficient for women slaves only to make habiliments, and all sorts of needle works: and therefore observing how important a matter it was to have children of a woman of free and liberal condition, he principally ordained that women should exercise their bodies after the same manner as men did. After this, he instituted races, and combats, to be run and sought, both betwixt man and man, and woman and woman, because his opinion was, that the children of such parents would be very lusty and strong.  
Whenas men and women were married together, the husband was enjoined (as I observed in passing through the manners of the Greeks) to view, and departed from his wife in such sort that no man might see him: wherein Lycurgus had very good reason, for that he saw that by this means men enjoyed the pleasures of the marriage bed with more pleasure and delight, and also it kept them from growing sick and feeble, though otherwise they were lusty and strong, by thus abating the edge of their first heat and courage, and not losing the reinss thereto, but at such time whenas they were both even greedy of this contentment.  
Furthermore he ordained, that every one might not be permitted to marry at his own pleasure and will, and no man was to assume this state and condition, before he had attained to a mature and full age, because he supposed that this course would be of great avail and furtherance for fruitful and bodily vigour. And if it so fell out, that any old man match with a young woman (for that the people of those times were wont to reserve and keep their wives very strictly) it was ordained, that the old man should make choice of some lusty young youth, whose body and natural courage was able to afford better satisfaction, and bringing him home to his house, should commit his wife into his hands, that so she might bring forth children. And if no body could be found that had any liking or affection to his wife, and he still desired to have free children, he likewise ordained another law, which imported, that if he saw another woman that was more fruitful, by her husband's permission, he might have children by her.  
Many such like matters as these, are contained in Lycurgus' laws, for they allowed men to keep two wives, and that the fathers might seek out other brethren to the children borne of them, who were to have equal part in the house or family, but not in the means and inheritance: by these institutions, for the begetting of children, differing from any law or custom of the other Grecians, every one may easily perceive how it made the Lacedæmonians more excellent in stature and force than the rest of the Grecians.  
Now, having discoursed of the birth of infants, I will speak of the manner of their bringing up, as well amongst the Lacedæmonians, as the other Grecians: for they which inhabited in other parts of Greece, and especially, such as desired to educate and instruct their children nobly, as soon as they were capable of instructions, they were first committed to their learned slaves, and then presently after, they sent them to masters, to learn the sciences, music, and tricks that belonged to wrestling. They made their children's feet tender with shoes, they provided them of divers habits, and fed them according to the digestion and appetite of their stomaches. But in steed of these slavish Pedants, to whom every one in particular committed his children to be governed & taught, Lycurgus would have them to be brought up under the eye and conduct of one of those, out of whose society and company the greatest magistrates were elected, and because he instructed children, they termed him Piadonome. This man had authority to assemble their children, and to chastise such as he found doing of any thing knavishly or lewdly.  
Out of the number of these (grown to riper years) he elected some to carry rods, when there was need, and to whip the other children: and hereupon it came to pass that the children were ashamed of these corrections, easily obeying whatsoever they were enjoined and commanded.  
In steed of wearing nether-stocks, he ordained that they should go bear legged, for he foresaw, that by this practice they might more easily mount up or descend, and be swifter in their courses, without shoes or stockings, if they exercised their feet, than going covered in any other manner. And by reason of the great diversity of garments which was formerly brought in, he enacted they should accustom throughout the whole year to wear but one manner of habit, he judging that by this means they would be the more hardened to resist heat and cold.  
Furthermore, he commanded that men should be dietted in such sort, as they might not be crammed with more meat than they could well digest, enuring them to suffer many discommodities, because he knew those who were hardened and enabled to this kind of life, would be much more able to support, in time of need, long labour and toil without eating or drinking, and that moreover they should have less need of refresh, and should feed heartily upon any meat that were offered them: he further perceived well, that to preserve health, and augment the beauty of the stature, it was better to use such meats, as kept the body dry and nimble, than others that made it fat and fleshy. But to the end they might not be too much pressed with hunger, he would not that those which endured any necessity, should acquire the things they had need of with sloth and idleness, but he permitted them to steal, and get them by theft if they were in fear to die for famine; the which he did suffer, to the end that he that had no other means to come by it might purchase and get it by some kind of industry. Without doubt it is a eleere and evident case, that who minds to filch or steal any thing, he must at lest watch all night, and in the day time spare no cunning or subtlety, if he mean to compass that which he desires.  
We may therefore evidently perceive that he who would have children more active and nimble, touching things necessary for man's life, than courageous, he must bring them up after this manner.  
But some will say, why did he then decree to the contrary, that he who was taken in their should be sound beaten, if he held robbery and theft for so commendable a thing: to which I answer, that this was the same reason for which in other things that men teach and instruct, they yet punish him that doth them not in such manner and form as he aught: and therefore he would have those severely punished that were surprised in their thefts, because they gave testimony in this that they wanted wit and industry to steal  
His will also was, that they who were thus beaten should rob in a craggy and rough place, some great number of cheeses, infer●rig by this, that he which had suffered hardness and discommodity for a little time, is accustomed to rejoice long, when he hath any good fortune.  
We see also that in this, a man that is slow and delicate is no ways apt to use labour and diligence when need requires, but on the contrary he falls into many inconveniencies.  
If it happened that the Paidonome departed, to the end the children might not in this time be destitute of a master, he appointed the citizen that was present to command the children what so ever he thought good, and to punish them if they failed in any thing: by this means he procured, that children carried themselves with more respect, and lived with more fear and modesty; for both men and children fear no body more than their masters. And to the end, that when no body was near hand, there might be some one to look to the children, he ordained that he which was held more grave and stayed in all things than the rest, should govern them, and so by this means they were never without a master.  
It is now fit time that I should speak somewhat of the love of maidens, because this point also comes within the compass of discipline and instruction. The other Grecians, as namely the Beotians, accustomed their youths and maids generally to live and converse together: but there were some others which would not suffer young men in love to talk and confer with maidens: Lycurgus was of a contrary opinion; for if any young man were surprised with the love of a maid, having understood the excellency of his spirit and mind, he permitted them to come together, and reputed it for a very honestact and discipline.  
But if it were found that he was only sensually in love with the maids person, he ordained that he should abstain from this maid as strictly as the father refrains from the son, and one brother from another, in that which concerns Venus' pleasures and delights.  
We have sufficiently discoursed of the nurture and discipline of children, and every one may easily discern by himself with what discipline of the Grecians, their children become more obedient and honest, and finally, wherein it was that men showed themselves more continent in necessary things. For after that others which had attained unto the years of Adolescency, had left the schools of their youth and childhood, presently many of them had no masters nor governors, but did live in all freedom and liberty.  
But Lycurgus conceiving that young men were naturally of a lofty and proud spirit, joined with strange licentiousness, and a violent inclination to all sorts of pleasures, he then enjoined them to great labours and travels, devising how he might always keep them occupied and employed: whereunto he also added, that if any one refused to do that he was enjoined, he should never attain to any honourable place, and he ordained that not only public persons appointed to these governments, but also parents should look to their children, to the end that living without any fear within the city, they did not become vagabonds and insolents abroad.  
Furthermore being desirous to plant in them a certain natural modesty, he commanded that as they walked in the streets, they should hold their hands under their cloaks, not discoursing nor gaping round about, but casting their eyes downward. And certainly we see that the nature of man is more harsh and rough in that which concerns modesty, than that of women. And therefore in walking up and down, you could no more hear their tongues than if they had been made of a stone, nor ever see them turn their eyes of any side, no more than if they had been of brass.  
When they were at any banquet, they held it sufficient to answer to demands. His desire also was, that an especial care should be had touching the institution and government of young men, for he thought, if they become such men as they aught to be, there would undoubtedly redound a marvelous benefit to the Commonwealth.  
He therefore perceiving that all they which were naturally exercised in proofs and trials were heard with great attention, and the sport of wrestling beheld with much contentment: he thought good by this means to excite and encourage young men to the love of virtue, supposing that by this means they might attain to a great height of perfection and goodness. I will therefore acquaint you in what manner he inflamed them to the love of these trials.  
The Ephores chose out three of the most flourishing young men, called Hippagrites, to assemble the whole cavalry. Each of these made choice of an hundred men, declaclaring for what respect he preferred some to honour, and refused others. They that found themselves dishonoured, came to the combat, being opposed against the others that were preferred before them, and the one would narrowly look to the other, whether he did any thing that was base or dishonest.  
Hereupon grew a debate very profitable for the Commonwealth, where they showed what an honest man was to do, both parties endeavouring as far as was possible to show themselves truly stout, and valiant: and so when the Commonwealths occasions required, they presently assisted and defended her with emulation one of another who should be most forward. They were also constrained to have a special care of their health, for whensoever they met, they wrestled and fought at handy cuffs, so as they were eager and desirous to excel one another in all things.  
While they fought after this manner, every one that was present, or had any authority, might part them: and if there were any man which would not obey the, Paidonomi cited them to a trial and judgement before the Ephores, by whom they were severely punished, as they who had formerly ordained that no man should suffer himself to be transported with choler, whereby he might refuse to obey the laws.  
When they were come to more mature age, and risen to great magistracies, some Greeks, no ways regarding their bodily force, charged them with some warlike stratagem and enterprise. But Lycurgus made a law to this effect, that is was a commendable thing for men of those years to use hunting, if it were not at such times when any public administrations were hindered thereby, to the end they might also be able to support the travails of war as well as young men.  
Lycurgus' conceiving that the Lacedæmonians made feasts in their private houses, as the other Greeks did, and considering how much these customs tended unto vice, he drew them to eat in public, thinking that by this means they could not far exceed that they were permitted to do.  
Idle men do oftentimes many things unfitly and ill, and the rich do sometimes resemble herein those that are idle: hereupon it grew, that while they fate at the table, it never was wholly void, nor yet sumptuously furnished; for removing all such superfluous drinks as offended the body and spirit, he permitted every one to drink only when he was a thirst, knowing that it was a very healthful and pleasing thing to drink after this manner: for when they were thus assembled altogether, who durst be so hardy as to waste or consume his means, or distemper his body, by immoderate eating and drinking.  
In other towns, men of equal condition use to meet and frequent; and hereupon it falls out that they then have little shame or respect of themselves: but in Sparta, Lycurgus mixed the courage and force of youth with the experience and discipline of the ancient. And it is a thing that concerns the country's good to permit men to speak freely of that which they have honourably or virtuously performed in the city: and therefore you should never see any villainies committed, nor drunkenness, nor any dishonest act: To conclude, you should never hear so much as an immodest or reproachful speech: for eating thus publicly, there also grew this further good, that when they returned home to their houses, they were enjoined to walk, and take singular care that they were not overthrown or go with wine, as those that knew well that they could not continued in the place where they had supped: and that they must make use of the night, as well as of the day; for he that was yet under another man's protection and tutorship, might not so much as be seen in the night.  
This worthy parsonage likewise considering, how they that labour and travail after their repasts, come to be well complexioned and of a good colour, being lusty & strong, whereas others that live in idleness, grew diseased and unfound; he provided likewise for this inconvenience: and therefore ordained, that he who was the eldest in a troop, should look to others that they eat not excessively. And thus I think you can hardly found any that went beyond the Lacedæmonians in health and bodily force, because they lived in a perpetual exercise of all their members.  
Besides all these laws above mentioned, (whereas in other towns, and cities, every one was master of his own children, slaves, or coin) Lycurgus (desirous to procure that citizens, without offending one another, might enjoy a reciprocal good amongst themselves) did ordain, That every one might command his own, and another man's children, in all matters reasonable. And if any child that was beaten by another, complained to his father, he was blamed if he beaten him not again also; and they were persuaded that none would command children any thing that was vicious or bad. He decreed also the same thing touching slaves, as well those that were a man's own, as others, if they were urged to make use of them in any thing.  
His will was likewise, that hounds should be kennelled and kept together. They called therefore such as were unwieldy and unfit for hunting, and if any man were unwilling, he would readily sand out his dogs. The like service and use they made of horses: for if any man could not go on foot, or had no chariot, or were constrained to go any whether speedily, he took freely the first horse he found, and when he had done, he as thankfully restored him again. In all places, where they that came from hunting had need of refresh or victuals, he ordained, That those who had supped should leave meat ready dressed, and they which had need of refreshment should feed thereon, who after they had fully replenished themselves, left all the rest for some other uses. And thus the poorer sort communicating with them, they participated of those things that were there whensoever they had occasion or need.  
In other cities, every one is attentive according to the proportion of his ability, to gather together and lay up money, and therefore one applies himself to tillage, another to merchandise, another to navigation, and some live by arts and trades. But Lycurgus forbade all free men to touch any thing which tended to the heaping up of money, and only enacted, that they should employ themselves in those things that wrought and procured citizens liberty: for what need was there to heap up wealth and riches in a place where all things necessary were equally distributed.  
By this institution also he procured, that none desired money to take pleasure or delight therein. But which is more, they needed not so much as to think of gain and profit for the brave appareling of themselves, seeing they used no garments of any glorious show. They needed not to gather money to maintain expenses in company, for that he supposed men might better serve their friends turns with bodily travail than with charge and expense, as he which saw that the one proceeded from wit and industry, and the other from riches and wealth. Notwithstanding in all these proceed he would have no man enrich himself by another man's hurt and prejudice. He also coined a kind of money of ten mynas, which being once brought into the house, could not be hidden, neither from masters or servants, for in seeking to keep much secret, it required a large place, and a waggon to bear it: for there was often curious search made after gold and silver, and when they found any laid up, the possessor thereof was punished. Do you think there was any one to be found in a whole city that would labour to heap up gold or silver, where such an acquisition was more hurtful and prejudicial to the owner, than the use thereof was pleasing.  
By this we may plainly see that the Lacedæmonians were obedient to the magistrates and laws: and I think Lycurgus did never attempt to frame his commonweal so exactly without having first accorded all the gentlemen that were in Sparta, I make this conjecture, for that in other cities the mightier sort would not have men think that they fear the magistrates; but in Sparta the princes themselves, above others, observed and yielded to the magistrates, esteeming it a great glory to be humble & obsequious, and supposing that others herein would follow their example, the which questionless came to pass.  
But it is likely and probable that he constituted the authority and power of the Ephores, knowing how singular a benefit obedience was in the commonweal, during the times both of war and peace; for he thought that with the greater men the magistracy was discharged and executed, the more the citizens would be afraid to disobey.  
The Ephores therefore might punish whom they would, as also, the term of their office expired, deprive such of their places as executed any magistracy, put them in prison, convent them before the judgement seat, yea & draw them in hazard of their lives, if they were culpable. But they who had so high authority, permitted not such as were settled in any office to domineer at their pleasures, but rather as those that did oversee the Gymnicke combats, they forth with punished them that did any thing contrary to the laws.  
Above all others, I found that invention singular which Lycurgus practised, to make citizens obedient to laws: For he never published any laws to the people till he had been with the princes at Delphos, to know of the Oracle whether the city of Sparta should not continued prosperous in observing those laws which he had constituted: when the Oracle answered that they would be very profitable for the Lacedæmonians, he published them, judging that men would take it for a impious and wicked thing not to be subject to those laws which were confirmed by the Oracle of Apollo.  
Lycurgus was also admirable in one thing, which was, that he enjoined the Lacedæmonians to prefer an honourable death before an ignominious life: he therefore by these statutes and ordinances so wrought, that good men lived happily, & the wicked miserably; for in other towns, when any one grows vicious and corrupt, he only hath the name and fame so to be; but yet both good and bad converse and practise together in one and the self same place: but in Sparta, every one was ashamed to be in a vicious man's company, or to contend with him in wrestling. And oftentimes also when they met together to play with the ball, a vicious man was separated from the rest, nor entertained by one side nor other: and in all dances he had ever the inferior place, and in the open streets, every one shamed them as much as was possible, as also in public assemblies; and even amongst the youngest men of all he gave place to every body. But he made himself also admirable whenas he would have men incline themselves to virtue, even unto the extremest old age. For having limited and confined men's lives by the judgement and censure of this age, he ordained that old men should be bound to have a care of honesty, and bounty: and he ordained that the combat of life and death should remain in the old men's hands and arbitrement, he would have old age much more reverenced and esteemed than the force or vigour of youth. And questionless this age aught to be daily exercised in this combat above all other human respects, for although the encounters of wrestling be excellent, yet these are but bodily practices, whereas the combat of old age gives manifest testimony of a good spirit & courage. Now as the spirit and mind is more excellent than the body, so the actions of the spirit far pass those of the body why may we not then highly commend this law of Lycurgus, who perceiving that they who applied themselves but coldly to virtue, could never purchase their country any great honour, his will was, that at Sparta they should practise all virtues in public.  
Lycurgus also would have him no less punished, who manifestly showed that he affected not to be exceeding good: for he thought that they which stole any thing, did only wrong them from whom they had taken it; but he held opinion, that commonweals were betrayed by idle persons, and loiterers. And therefore it seems he had special reason to decree grievous punishments for all such sorts of men.  
Unto this he further added a necessary ornament of civil life: for he would that all those which had not failed in their duties, should have equal parts in the honours of the commonweal, taking no exception either to bodily debility, or want of means. But if any one showed himself sluggish and careless in his office, he would not have him so much as reckoned in the number of citizens.  
As for martial affairs, the Ephores were to give advice of the time when they should sand out their armies, as well to the horse, as to others heavily armed, and first to the foot men, then to mysteries and tradesmen. He likewise ordained that all engines necessary for the wars should be conveyed thither, either in chariots or otherwise, and thus they easily had watsoever was wanting.  
First he appointed the soldiers to wear a vermilion cassock, and a copper shield; because he knew this habiliment was properly fit for the wars; and no ways resembling woman's ornaments, because it was sooner made clean, and hardlier fouled than theirs: he permitted those also that were past their younger years, to wear long locks of hair, judging that by this means, they would appear to be greater and more fortunate.  
When all things were thus ordained, he distributed his foot and horse into six tribes: every one of these city tribes had a tribune, four ensign bearers, eight commanders of fifty, and sixteen heads of squadrons: but for that many are of opinion, that the Lacedæmonians military order was but confused and disorderly, I desire to let them understand, that they believe otherwise than they aught; for that in the Lacedaemonian discipline, we see that the chieftains were constituted, and every rank was fitted with all necessary preparations. And this institution is easy to conceive; so as whosoever can but distinguish one man from another, can never be deceived: for some had charge to conduct, & others commanded to follow. The time of advancing forward with the troop, was known by a watch word from the colonel of the regiment. The squadrons marched sometimes close together, & otherwhiles more at large; so as there was nothing difficult to learn. And though it came to pass that sometimes they were in disarray, yet can one hardly understand in what manner they encounter the enemy, except he be well very seen in Lycurgus' discipline.  
The Lacedæmonians also found those things to be easy in fight, which other people thought difficult; for when they advanced forward in file, the squadrons followed close in the rear, & if the enemies main battle came onward in the same order, they commanded the head of the squadron to place himself in front on the left hand, in form of a shield, standing firm in this equypage while the enemy's battalion were at a stand: but if the enemies in the mean time charged them in the rear, all the ranks turned head, that so the lustiest and strongest men might be ready to confront the enemy.  
When the prince marched in the left wing, they did not think he had the less honourable place, for when any went to environ them, they had this advantage, that they should not found the flanks naked, but well armed: and when it seemed necessary that the general of the army should have the right wing, making the point of the battle, they ranged their men in such a manner, that the general marched on the right wing, & the latter ranks on the left. And when the battle was to be charged by the enemies right wing, their only care was to turn all their ensigns in form of a galley, with a prow against the enemy: but if the enemy assailed them on the left flank, they would not endure it, but repelled them valiantly; and so the last squadron was ranged in form of a shield.  
As for their manner of encamping, Lycurgus judging the points or corners of a square camp altogether fruitless, he would have the Lacedæmonians to camp in a round form, unless they were not secure, by reason of some mountains. He appointed a corpse de guard both by day and night, & for such as attempted to fly out of the camp by night, he appointed that they should be noted by the scirites, whose office was to see that none forsook their ranks, as also they took care of strangers that came & went up and down. And whereas they ever marched with long weapons or darts, you must conceive they did this because they allowed no arms to their slaves: neither must you wonder though they stood no great distance one from another, nor from their arms, but eu●n as far as they might be no hindrance one to another, for this they did for their defence and safety. But now it is time to speak of the authority and honour which Lycurgus gave to the king in the army.  
First, the city maintained the king estate, and those of his train. He had for his guard such companions as did eat together, and with them the tribunes of the soldiers, to the end that being ever present, if need required, they might the better counsel and direct. These companions above mentioned, were three men of one and the same rank. These two officers together were so careful of all things necessary, as they attended nothing else but matters belonging to the wars.  
When the king meant to march forth with an army, he first sacrificed within the city to jupiter the conductor▪ and to the other Deities: and if he sacrificed any thing there, the Priest (who was called Pyrphorus, by reason of the fire he carried about him, which was taken from the Altar) marched before, even to the borders and confines of the country, where the king sacrificed again to jupiter, and to Minerva. The sacrifice being made to these two before named, they passed along the frontiers, and the perpetual fire taken from these sacrifices, marched before, and oblations of all kinds came after; to sacrifice when need required. The like they did also at break of day, seeking first to purchase the love of God. They assisted about the sacrifice, who had the charge and command of the army.  
There were present also two Ephores, which did nothing except the king called them; but rather observing what others did, they punished those that were in any fault. The sacrifices being once finished, the king called a Council, commanding what should be done.  
Whenas the king led his army forth, if there appeared no enemy to oppose himself, none marched before him but the Scirites, and such horsemen as they had sent before to discover. But if they thought to come to battle, the king choosing out the squadron of the first tribe, conducted it, wheeling about with it, while he was in the midst of the two tribes, and between two tribunes or Camp-maisters.  
Whenas they killed a goat in sight of the enemy, the laws ordained that all the trumpets should sound, and that no Lacedaemonian should be without a crown: and the same law enjoined them to keep their arms neat and clean. But Lycurgus willed that the king should appoint the time when they should encamp, and the place where the army should lodge.  
The authority of sending Ambassadors to treat of alliances, or to make a war, did also belong unto the king, whom they also repaired unto when any matter of weight was to be consulted of: and when any difference grew, the king referred it to the judges and arbitrators of debates: if it were a money matter, to the treasurers; and if for any boot or spoil, to those that were the sale-maisters.  
Lycurgus also assigned to the king, the gifts that were given towards public oblations and sacrifices; and after this, he constituted certain lands and freeholds for his maintenance, in such a proportion as he might not want any thing convenient or necessary, nor through superaboundance grow haughty and insolent. And to the end that the kings might eat in public, he appointed certain solemn feasts, and at supper he honoured them with a double portion, not that they should eat twice as much as the rest, but to the end they might give and bestow that which was superfluous, upon whomsoever they thought good. Furthermore, he allotted them two associates, whom they might make choice of at their pleasure, and these were called Pity's.  
He also gave them a pig at every farrow of a sow, to the end that if they needed the counsel and direction of the gods in any affair, they might have oblations and sacrifices at pleasure. Furthermore, he caused a pool to be made near unto their Palace, knowing how necessary it was for many considerations. All Magistrates rose from their seats to honour the king, except the Ephores. The king and the Ephores took an oath every month one before another, the Ephores in the behalf of the city, and the king for himself. The tenor of the king's oath was, That he should govern the city conformable to the laws; and that of the city, was to maintain and support by all means possible the royal estate and dignity. As for the honours which were done to the kings of Lacedaemon when they died, I will only say thus much, Lycurgus' laws did ordain, that they should be honoured not as men, but as demigods.   

¶ The Religion.  
FOr that in the discourse of the manners and customs of the Grecians, I made a sufficient relation of their ancient religion, when they were wholly addicted to Idolatry, now we will only speak of the religion they now hold and maintain. The Greeks have long time since withdrawn themselves from the Roman Church, and erected Patriarches, whom they acknowledge for their heads and spiritual governors. Finally, there are four Patriarches of the Greek Churches, one of Constantinople, another of Alexandria, one of Jerusalem, and another of Antioch, of whom we will speak peculiarly in their proper places: but they which live within the proper country and territory of Greece, acknowledge no other head but the Patriarch of Constantinople. Concerning their creation, we will refer it over to the particular discourse of the Musconites, which differ from them but in very few things.  
There are also many Caloyers, that is, Priests, or Greek Monks, which are dispersed all over Greece, where, paying tribute, every one is allowed the free use and exercise of his religion, but not without a thousand indignities done them by the Barbarians, who domineer and command with insupportable tyranny and cruelty.  
But to speak something hereof in particular, Mount Athos was heretofore ordained for the residence of the Caloyers of S. Basils' order, who had a privilege (as Belon writes) which they hold and keep even to this day, which was, that none might devil or abide there, except he were a Greek Caloyer. There are about six thousand Caloyers which devil in divers parts of this mountain, where they have amongst them about four and twenty Ancients, and very great Monasteries enclosed with strong walls, to resist an enemy or thieves, with whom notwithstanding they are not often troubled or wronged. Among the rest, there are two principal monasteries, one called Vntopedi, and another Agias Laura: in which many relics are to be seen, which they come and visit from all parts, as also, Temples stately built, and richly adorned. Finally, the Greeks make the same esteem of this mountain, as we do of Rome: where the Greekish ceremonies are religiously observed, and these Caloyers have purchased more reputation of sanctity, than any other throughout all Greece: yea the Turks themselves hold them in so much esteem, as they bestow great charities and alms deeds upon them. There is not any one amongst them that lives without doing some thing or other, or exercising some mechannicall art and trade: for in the morning they go all out of their monasteries, carrying with them their tools & implements, with the which they labour to maintain the whole family: Some work in the vines, others lordship trees, and another is a shipwright, so that in brief, every one is of some profession or other. They wear habits of small value, and are appareled after the manner of Hermits. They wear no shirts either of hemp or flax, but some made of wool, which they spin and sow themselves. They are not any ways given to the study of learning, yea there are many amongst them which can neither writ nor read. If any by chance pass over this mountain upon any occasion or business whatsoever, the Caloyers furnish him with victual, taking not any money for it at all.    

¶ THE ISLES OF THE ARCHIPELAGUS WHICH BELONG TO THE TURK, AND WHAT HE POSSESSETH IN SCLAVONIA.  

The Contents.  
IN this present discourse the author making a description of the Islands of the Archipelagus that are subject to the Turk, he first declares their names, as well ancient as modern; their situation and circuit, with their ports and towns. In the second place, he observes all rare and exquisite particularities to be seen in every country, beginning with the Island of Taxus or Tasse, abounding in white marble, pine, and fir trees, and in ancient times, in mines which yielded unto Philip king of Macedon every year four score talents: Samothrace, in honey, and dear: Lemnos, in flax, hemp, corn, pulses, wines, flesh, wool, figs, nuts, almonds, olives, and oysters called Gaideropedes, springs of hot water, terra sigillata, which is so medecinable against the plague, and all defluxions: Negrepont, ●ery famous for the straight and narrow sea it stands upon, the which ebbs five or six times a day, abounding in sheep without gall, in oils, wines, and quarries of marble, as also in the Amiant stone, which is made flax, whereof they make linen cloth, the which is made white in the fi●e. Melos, a famous Island for springs of sulphuroous waters; for olives, veins of silver, and quarries of marble, and for a certain place where the earth can never be voided, but being digged and removed, it presently fills again without any help of man's hand. There be also certain frogs which never will engender in the Island of Polyandra: then is there the calamity in Sifano, the white marble, lychnite, and sardix stones in Paros: the ophite, or load stone, and wasps whose sting is mortal, in Naxus: marble, and aloes in the Island of Lero: the wine Hippoc●on, Cypress, and Terebinth, in Coos: oranges, malmsey, & mastic in Chio: the agate stone, & excellent wine, in Lesbos: honey and dear in Samothracia. In the third place follows a description of the nature and manners both of the ancient and modern inhabitants of these Islands, the laws and customs of each country: the deities that they adore, their sacrifices and surerstitions, and what religion these countries profess at this present day.   

THe Aegean sea is a part of the Mediterranean sea, which seperats Greece and Europe on Asia side. Modern writers call it the Archipelagus, and the Turks, the White sea. The Islands of this sea are commonly by the ancients divided into the Cycladeses, and Sporares. They call the Cycladeses those that lie near one to another in form of a circle, and these are they we see about Delos, being to the number of fifty, as Isydorus reports; although some other writers allow but of twelve. The Sporades are those Islands so dispersed in the Aegean sea towards Candie, and the coast of Asia, lying here and there without any order. Now, as in the discourse of the firm land, we began first with Thrace, we will likewise make our entry into the description of these Islands by those that lie just opposite against this province.  
The Isle of Taxus or Thasse, which Ptolemy calls Thalassia, being anciently called Aeria, and Aethria, according to Eusebius, & Pliny, is near to Thrace, between the mouth of the river Nessus, and mount Athos: it is some forty miles in compass as Niger writes, or fifty as some others affirm. There is a town which carries likewise the name of Taxus, seated in a plain near to the great gulf towards the North, and the port thereof is some two miles from the firm land of Macedonia: on the South part, it hath two towns built on the hanging of a hill; for this part of the country is very mountainous.  
The Island of Samothracia is about ten miles from the firm land of Thrace, Pliny says, it was called heretofore Dardania, but now they name it Samandrachi. There are a number of ports in this Island, where, on the North side, lies a town seated upon an high mountain.  
The Island of Imbre, now Embre, as Sophian will have it, runs out in length North and South, being more long than broad: the circuit thereof is about thirty miles. It lies almost in the midst between the Thracian Chersonese, and the Island of Samothracia, being equally ten miles distant from the one and the other. There is also a town built at the foot of the mountains.  
The Isle of Lemnos anciently called Ophiusa, by reason of the multitude of serpents were found there, that killed almost all the inhabitants, as some affirm, was afterwards called by the name of Diospolis, by reason of two towns that were in it; but now it is vulgarly known by the name of Stalimena. It is not so large as long, lying East and West, containing in all above a hundred miles. There were in former times within this Isle two principal towns, one called Lemnos, and another Myrina: the last of which is now of no great fame, though it be not yet wholly ruined; and the reason hereof is, because it is nothing so well peopled as heretofore it was. It is seated upon a hill which hangs over into the sea, and hath a place whether the shade of mount Athos reacheth, in the Solstice, although it be above eighty and seven miles from the one place to the other, yea and the sun not ●eere going down: the other town is Hephestia, called now Cochina, quite ruined. For the rest, although the Island be of no great compass, yet hath it seventy five bourroghs or villages. Pliny says, that there was a Labyrinth in this Island like to those of Egypt and Candie, but Belon affirms, that there remains no sign nor testimony of any such thing.  
But the Island of Euboa, now termed Negrepont, exceeds all the other within this sea in greatness, and is as it were the Queen of the Archipelagus. It is separated from the Attic coast only by a little strait, and it almost equalleth all the coast of Attica, and Beotia, in length. It is some twenty miles broad, and the whole circuit thereof is three hundred sixty and five miles: heretofore men called it Macra, & Macris, Abantia, Chalcis, Chalcodontis, and Assopis, as Pliny reports: we do now commonly call it Wegrepont, and the Turks, Egribos, as Melius thinks. The ancients were of opinion, that this Island was sometimes joined to the firm land of Greece, and that it was cut off by an earthquake: the which we may the rather believe as well for the proximity thereof, as also for that it is yet much subject to be shaken with those earthquakes. The principal town was Chalcis, which is now called Negrepont, of the Islands name. It is seated on a plain, on that side where the sea is restrained within a narrow strait, being joined by a bridge, to the main. This town was taken by Mahomet the second, in the year 1451, with a great slaughter of the Christians, and now the Turks inhabit it pell-mell with them. There is also the town of Carysta, in former times called Chironia, and Egea. Here you may see the promontory of Caphara, famous for the many Graecian shipwrecks named Fygera by Niger, and Chimi by Sophian.  
Melos riseth high into the sea, right against Cape Malia, a foreland of Peloponnesus. It was heretofore named also Mimallides Siphne, Acyton, & Zephiria, being the roundest land of any other within the Mediterranean sea, and hath about twenty French leagues in circuit. There is a town built at the foot of a mountain, before which, you may see goodly fair field which stretcheth out to the sea side.  
Near to Melos, lies another little Island called heretofore Poligea, and at this instant Fauconiera, being now wholly desert, as the most part of the rest adjoining thereunto are: and towards the East, lies Cynusa, or Elchinusa, which the moderns term Polyno, having in it a town of the same name.  
After this, we may discover that which sometimes was called Phelocandra, being at this instant also named Policandra. Near to this Island lies that of Lagusa, now Chrestienna, and that of Sychin, sometimes Oenos, and now Sicandra; all of them being near of equal greatness, having towards the South, the Island Therasia, at this present Thera; that of Saturnia, otherwhiles called Callista, that is to say, very fair, renowned for the birth of the Poet Callimachus.  
Near to Therasia, towards the East, you shall discern Anaphe, which the moderns call Numphio, in the very midst of the sea, having a town seated in a rock, and at the foot thereof a river which watereth all the plain.  
Near to the same, riseth the little Island of jews, now Palma, where divers affirm, that the Poet Homer was heretofore interred. This Island hath a fair port, but it is ill inhabited by reason of the pirates that land there continually.  
The Island of Zia, heretofore Cea, is distant from the promontory Suria, or cape of Corquonnes, about ten leagues, being some thirteen in circuit. It is hollow on the North side, and shaped in form of a new Moon. It was also named Ceos, of a certain giant, the son of Titan, which first there inhabited. The port of this Island lies on the West part, and in former times it was also called Hydrusa.  
Not far from this Island, you may behold that of ●irmenia, which the Ancients called Scytia, and Oenos, being not much less than Zia; and than Zephena, which was called Seriphas, having a town of the same name towards the South, and a large field which extends itself to the Sea side. It is some thirty French leagues in circuit.  
Beneath the Island of Zerphena, that of Siphanolies, called in former times Siphas, or Syphan, Acis, and Meropia, very fair, and delightsome to behold. It is ten French leagues in compass, and hath a reasonable fair town built in the East part; and on the West side, you may see the gulf called Schinost; and on the South, the Port, where sometimes stood the chief town of all the Island.  
All the above mentioned islands, are for the most part of the number of the Cycladeses, which lie about the Island of Delos. But amongst them towards the East, you may also behold the Island of Paros, which retains still the ancient name: It was in other times called Demetriades, Zacynta, as also Zanta, Hyria, Heliessa, Cabarnis, and Minoc. It is fifty miles in circuit, which make about twenty leagues; stretching out in length from the West to the East, and in the midst thereof you may see a fair and large plain, with many goodly buildings, and an ancient Temple which stands yet whole and en●i●e. You may also see there Mount Campiese, which is very high, at the foot whereof lies a town, built with stones of a wonderful bigness. This mountain was called in former times Marphesia. The town of Paro lies on the West part, although the old town was seated on the Sea side, along the banks of the river Asopis. The port there●● is towards the North, near to a castle called Cephalo, and the port's name is Bon. The rest upon the North coast, is environed all with mountains. This Island came in●● the Venetians hands in the days of Henry the Emperor, brother to Baldovin earl of Flanders: but when Mahomet took in Negropout, he seized likewise on this Island.  
The Island of Nixia, heretofore Naxos, is twenty good French leagues in compass, and ha●● duke not long since, as also Candie had under the Venetian government; but ●elym, Soly●ans' father, took it from the Venetians. The town which commands all ●he rest of the country, and whereof the Island takes the name of Nixia, is seated towards the South, upon an high mountain, it was in former times called the Isle of Venus, Dia, and Dionysia, as also little Sicily, and Calipolis.  
Towards the East of Nixia, there lies the Island of Amurge, sometimes Brutora, being twenty leagues about, and hath three ports, whereof the one is named S. Anne, the 〈◊〉 Calors, and the third Catapla.  
Bending towards the coast of Asia the less, near to Amurgospolis, or Brutora, you s●all discover the island of Claros, at this present called Calamo, which is some ten leagues in compass, and hath in it many high mountains. You may there see the ruins of an ancient city, lying on the East side. A long this island runs a gulf which hath the name of Calamo, and a town of the same name. Somewhat above Claros, you may perceive the Island of Lero, now Lerte, being about eighteen miles in circuit. And there is also a c●●le on the side of the Levant; and on the South, the port of Lepida, where stood sometimes the chief and principal town of the Island, at the foot of a mount●●●●.  
Very near to these Islands stands Pathmos, now called Palmosa, whether S. john the 〈◊〉 was confined by the Emperor Domitian. And although both these Islands, and many other adjacent to the same, be of Asia side, yet I cannot but comprehend them with the Greek, both because they spoke the Greek language, and obeyed her Emperors, as also being more commodious for me to describe them now, lying so near hand, than if I should make an exact discovery of them, amongst the rest that belong to Europe; and notwithstanding any pain I should take, little benefit or ease would redound thereby to the Reader.  
This Island is not above seven or eight French leagues in compass, and is numbered among the Island Sporades, as well by the ancients, as by our modern writers. The Isle of Coos, now called Lango, is one of the last of all bending towards the East, along the coast of Asia. It extendeth from the North to the South, and contains in length about eighteen leagues. It was in former times first named Merops: the Turks usually call it Stancou. Towards the Levant you may see the principal town called Arangea, which hath a lake in the midst of it, that dries up in Summer. There are divers stately buildings in it all of marble. Moreover, without the city you may see the walls of a palace that did belong to that famous physician Hypocrates, who was borne in this Island, as also Apelles, that excellent painter. Furthermore, you may there behold the town of Coa, which the Turk calls by the name of Stancou, as also, they do the whole Island, which is not far distant from the lesser Asia, being right over against that of Cypress.  
About Lango you may see many little Islands of no great fame, as Hiali, Nisari, Chirava, Lesindra, Piscopia, Lira, Carchi, Limone, Lenita, and Zinara, of all which we will pass over the description, as being no ways fruitful or profitable.  
The Island of Samos retains still the ancient name, and is more famous than great, stretching out from the East unto the West, and having twenty leagues in the circuit thereof. After that the Carians abandoned it, they called it Dryusa, Antemusa, Melamphylis, Cyparissa, and Stephana, which is as much to say, as crowned. There was heretofore in it a very good town, the ruins of which do yet appear along the Sea side, there being a Port, and an Arsenal, which are very large and capalbe, with a very high causey.  
Mycone, one of the Cycladeses, towards the West, called now Mycolè, is some eight leagues in circuit. It hath a Port, with a Peer or Wharfe, and an Arsenal, being well inhabited, and having for confines towards the Levant, the Port and Bourough of S. Anne; towards the South, S. Stephens; and between the East and the North, the port of Panderma.  
Hard by lies the Isle of Giara, now called Stopodia, which is not very great, being environed with rocks. The Romans sent all those thither into exile that were condemned as worthy of death, as also the other desert Islands among the Cycladeses, serve to the fame end and purpose.  
Delos is the most renowned among all the Cycladeses, by reason of the oracle of Apol●o. At this day it is called Dile. It was sometimes named Ortygia, by reason of the many O●aileses that are there more than in other places. Men called it also in former times A●●etia, Lagia, Cerhe, Mydia, Cynetha, and Pyropila, as also, Cynthia, because of a mountain that is there. This Island was divided by means of a little channel into two parts, in the one of which you may see the great temple of Apollo, whereof some ruins and pieces do yet remain.  
Near to Dela appears the Island of Rhena, sometime Celadusa, and Arthemita, at this day it is called Deal, as well as the Isle Delos.  
Andro is also one of the Cycladeses, being at the lest twenty French leagues in compass: it was in ancient times named, as My●seles the Lesbian says, Ca●ron, Antandra, Laffia, Novagria, and Epaga. The town lies towards the East, and the fort is built upon a rock, and to enter into the same, you must pass over a draw bridge.  
The Isle of Chios is opposite to the Ionian Chersonesus, now called Smirna, there running betwixt them but one channel of water, some two leagues & a half in breadth, being hemmed in and environed round about with banks and shelves: it lies between the Isles of Mytelen and Samos, and was first called Ethalia: the circuit thereof is about thirty leagues: it extends in length from the North to the South, being divided into two parts, one named Apanomerea, which signifies the part above or on high, and Catomerea, which is to say, the lower quarter. It was taken by Solyman in the year 1566.  
Opposite to the country of Phrygia, which the Turks now call Sarcum, you may see the fair Island of Lesbos, at this day Mytelen, so called of the name of the principal town thereof, which heretofore was named Mytelene. It was in former times also termed Antissa, than Pelasgia, and afterwards Macarea, of the name of one of jupiter's sons, surnamed Cyrnaces: it also had the names of Emertha, Ethalasia, and Egyra, as Pliny testifies. The circuit thereof is about forty of our leagues.  
As for those places which belong to the Turk in Sclavonia, they do first upon the firm land reckon Castlenovo or Newcastle, seated on a low hill, near to the bay Rizonica, called now the gulf of Cataro. The Turks not long since took it from the Spaniards.  
The town of Scodra, which we commonly call Scuttari, was heretofore under the Venetian dominion, but now it is subject to the Turks. It is some eighteen miles distant from the sea, built upon a steep rock, there lying underneath it in the East side a lake one hundred and thirty miles about, and mountains environ it all round except on the North side.  
The Turk also possesseth there the little and dispeopled towns of Budua, Antivara, and Dulcigno, which Ptolemy calls Vlcinium, and some others Olchinium, the which were taken out of the Venetians hands by Selym the second, Emperor of the Turks.  

¶ The Nature and Quality of the country.  
AS for the Isle of Taffa, it abounds in white marble, whereof the Romans made great account: and on the mountains there also grows a marvelous company of pines, and fir trees: and by the mineral foam that lies on the tops of many small hills, we may perceive that heretofore it had many good mines, the which may easily be con●●ectured because they yielded every year to Philip king of Macedon four score ta●●uts.  
The Island of Samothracia is plentiful in honey and dear: and that of Lemnos is more fertile than ever it was, bearing flax, hemp, corn, all sorts of roots or hearbage, wine in abundance: there is also great quantity of flesh, of wool, and of many other things: but it wants wood, especially towards the East part, which is more dry: but that part which lies towards the West and the South, more moist and flourishing.  
The moist and humyd places, lying between the hill, bring forth figs, nuts, almonds, and some olives. There is never a river in this Island, but the inhabitants use much fish●ing at the sea side, where they found great store of fish, but especially the oysters, which are called Gaideropedes, that is to say, asses feet, being far different from ours. There ●re also springs of hot water, the which notwithstanding are nothing so hot as many ●●herss are.  
Men found in this Island, and no where else, the earth which we term sigillata, or sealed which is very good and medicinable, principally against the plague, and all fluxes. They make little lumps and masses thereof, which are sealed and marked with Turkish characters. They use great ceremony in digging it up, for they come on the sixt day of August only to open the pit where it is, and all the rest of the year it is not so much as lawful to look into it; as also the inhabitants are forbidden to transport it any where else upon pain of death. Prince's Ambassadors bring of it away with them many times when they come from Constantinople, and they think they offer a good present, when they give any quantity of it to men of high condition and calling.  
For Negropont, the sea is very swift within that straight, and as some say, there is ebb and flo●ld four, but as others affirm, six times every day; so as ships oftentimes that come undersaile with a good stiff gale of wind, make little way. Whenas Aristotle could not discover the cause and reason thereof, he died of grief.  
This Island in other respect, abounds with corn, herbage, or roots, wine, and oil, and there you may also see great store of trees, especially, such as are good and fit to build ships withal. Men say that the sheep of this Island have no galls, but I know not whether it be a fiction or true.  
Near to the town of Carista great quarriers of marble are found, as also the amiant stone, whereof thread may be may be made as of flax: they make a cloth hereof, which whitens, being cast into the fire, when it is foul.  
In the Island of Melo, they found many springs of sulphuroous waters, good for men's recovery and health. The soil of this Island is so fat and fertile, as heretofore they have sowed seeds and grain in it, which within forty days grew to their full height; at the end of which they reaped them. It abounds also in olive trees, and bears good vines. There are some veins of silver, and the best sulphur that can be found. There was here in former times excellent marble of divers colours, whereof Lucullus first brought of them to Rome. Men report of a certain place within this Island, that when you come to dig it, the earth presently increaseth, and the hollow places fill of themselves, without the help of any man's hand.  
The Isle of Policandra is barren and stony, being hard to till: and that of Sparta, or Serfena, brings forth frogs that never croak nor cry, and if you carry them any where else, as Pliny says, they make anoise as well as others.  
In the Island of Sifano, the calamity is found; but no man can tell where the mines of gold and silver are, for which it was in old time so renowned, seeing there is now no mark nor sign of any such matter.  
As for Paros, there hath been found much white marble that was called Lychnitis, because in the beginning they cut lamps out of it. Solinus says, that there grows in Paros a kind of stone which he calls Sardis, the which was more excellent than marble, and yet it could not be put in the number of precious stones. But Pliny (whose ape Solinus is) makes no mention of the sardis stone in the Isle of Paros. They say, that if a man cast any white thing into the sea, on that side where the Arsenal stands, it becomes presently black. The air of this Island is so good and clear, that the inhabitants thereof live long and are very old, having little feeling of the infirmities and discommodities that accompany old age.  
The Isle of Nixia or Naxus, hath yet great store of vines in it, as well as it had in times past. They found there a stone which the Greeks call ophitis, and we call it serpentine or craupadina, or toad stone, which grows not in quarries, but within the bowels of the earth. There is also great numbers of wasps, or rather of hornets, whose sting is mortal, as well as that of the Scorpion, if it be not cured speedily. You have there also many good veins of gold: but whether the inhabitants are not in dustrious enough to dig it, or that the Turk expressly prohibits it, no reckoning is made of them no more than in divers other parts of Greece.  
In the Isle of Lero, or Lerta, there is great abundance of marble, and the country is marvelous fertile. Men gather Aloes there, which our druggist's so much esteem, for the good it brings to men. That of Coos or Longo, abounds in first-fruits, and nourisheth a number of living creatures. They also gather very good grapes, which makes excellent wine, the best sort of which was anciently called Hippocoon, because the soil whereon it grew was named Hippon. There are also fair Cypress trees, Oaks, and Tcrebynthes, and (as Pline saith) there are likewise many silk worms bred. It hath a lake towards the West part, which is very prejudicial to the country, because the vapours and exhalations thereof are so infectious as they cannot possibly be endured: so that the Island is wholly desert on that part, and these vapours are more offensive in Summer than in any other season of the year.  
The Island of Samos bears no vines, though the neighbour countries about it are very full of them, but (as Strabo reports) all other things are there in abundance, yet some say that wheat prospers not very well, but Olives to their hearts desire. They report, there were once so many rats in the Isle of Nicola, as they drove away all the inhabitants.  
In the Isle of Chio they found great store of Orange trees, the juice of which first-fruits they press into hogsheads and pipes, and convey them to Constantinople, and other places, to mingle with their meats, & to make the same use of them, as they do here of verjuice. The trees that bring forth mastic are along the sea side, very little and low, but the leaf thereof is like to box or lentisk. They cut them thirteen times in a year near to the stock, to make the mastic distil, which issues forth like tears. They do also cut many other trees, which yield the turpentine, and they say it is found in no other place but there, and in the Indies, where the two kinds above mentioned do grow: you shall also see certain first-fruits growing upon very high trees, like beans in their husks, called in Italian Caroubis, and in Greek Ondorina, as also, other trees called Visques, that bring forth Glue, whose fruit is like to great capers. The Isle of Chio is also very much esteemed for the good maluesie it brings forth, the which notwithstanding is not so good as that of Candie. They brought in old time from Chio to Rome, frails of Raisins, even as now they carry them out of Provence to Paris, and all France over.  
The Isle of Lesbos, or of Mytelin, is of great fame, and the first-fruits that grow there are good in taste. The air likewise is good and heathfull. There are very many mountains, out of which heretofore they digged marble, which was not altogether so fair as that of Paros, as also the Agate stone, which is of great esteem and value.  
The wine of this Island is held for the best that grows in all Greece at this day; It feedeth also a number of good horse which are little, but strong, well set, and proportioned.  
They make much cheese there, and have corn in great abundance. They make two sorts of drugs which the Turks use in their pottage and broths: the one is called in the Turkish tongue Thrachana; and the other, Bouhort, which the Romans called aun●ently Crimnon, and Maza.  
There is in the Isle of Samothracia great store of honey, and abundance of fallow Deer. Concerning those places within Sclavonia, the discourse of Ragouse, and of that which the Venetians possess in this territory, may very well serve for the explanation of their nature and quality.   

¶ Their ancient Manners.  
IN the Island of Zia, or Cea, when old folks were weary of living, they willingly poisoned themselves, that so they might not be subject to the debilities and infirmities of ●ld decrepit age; and moreover, the magistrates also permitted every one to procure their own deaths. This custom was specially observed in the town of julier; for there was 〈◊〉 express law set down in these words: That they which could not live well, should 〈◊〉 at the lest die dishonestly: and they that exceeded the age of three score years, ●ould die with poison, that there might be the better store of victuals and provisions 〈◊〉 others. Elianus testifies as much, affirming, That they which were broken with age used to make a solemn sacrifice, during the which being crowned with flowers, they drunk the juice of h●mblocke, as finding themselves now at these years unable any ways to profit their country. The Poets hold, that this Island was sometimes inhabited by the Corinth●●● nymphs, and that therefore it was consecrated to them.  
The Island of Zerphena worshipped Apollo for their tut●larie god, who was there adorned with great reverence.  
Those of the Isle of Siph●a, or Siphano, were heretofore so mighty, as they dared to contest with the Lacedæmonians about the sovereignty of all Greece, whereby we may easily conceive that they were a courageous people, and full of great resolution.  
The inhabitants of Paros were sometimes accused of disloyalty, and to be no men of their words, because M●ltiades, General of the Athenians army, having subdued them, and they, having faithfully promised to be their subjects, they observed not their promise; and therefore it was said as in a common proverb: To do as they of Paros did; which was: to falsify their faith.  
Those of Nixia, or Naxus, were not very witty. Many ladies in former times retired into this Island, where (in memory of the wrong done to Ariadne, and detesting men's disloyalty) they lived in perpetual chastity.  
There was heretofore in the Isle of Cos a Temple dedicated to Aesculapius, because Hypocrates affirmed himself to have descended of his race. And people resorted thither, as they did to other Temples, to this imagined god, to receive cure of their infirmities.  
The Samiens carried a particular reverence to the goddess juno, whom they worshipped with many sorts of feasts and sacrifices. They made her statue, wherein she was represented as a maid that was to be married, because they held opinion that juno was born in this Island, where she was brought up during her virginity, being afterwards married to jupiter. They also dedicated unto her a wood, wherein they nourished peacocks brought from beyond the seas. In this Island they made in times past the fairest earthen vessels that could be seen.  
The Athenians did so honour and reverence the Isle of Delos (besides the Persians) as they removed all the tombs and carcases of dead men, which they sent to the Isle of Rhine near unto it; which should serve but as a Churchyard to Delos, being dedicated to this effect by Polycrates tyrant of Samos; whenas he had the full power and command of the Sea: and after this dedication made by the Athenians, they ordained a solemn feast every five years, to which all those of the lineage of the jonians assembled, where they exercised running, wrestling, and music, and the free cities did there solemnize public dances to the honour of Apollo. It was not lawful to keep any dog in this Island.  
The Chians have been heretofore very powerful by sea, being enfranchised, and having established as honourable a commonalty and republic as any of their other rich neighbours. But at last they were enforced to come under the Athenians government, afterwards they were subject to the Macedonians, then to the Romans, and last of all once more to the Grecians, which ruled in Constantinople. There were many worthy personages borne in the Isle of Mytelen. And it seems that this was a nursery as well of philosophers, as of those that followed more pleasing studies, and which required not such strained spirits. Theophrastus' came out of this place, and Pittacus, one of the Sages of Greece, and in like manner the Poet Alceus, as also Sapph the Poetess, whose verses are yet found to be so delightsome. It was also the country of the Orator Diophantes, and of Theophanes the Historiographer, and further, of Arion the great Poet and Harpe-player, as also of Te●pander that excellent Poet and physician.  
The Lesbians did in former times adore the god Ba●chus, because as Pausanias writes, the fishermen of Methymna, having drawn out of the Sea an head made of the wood of the Olive tree, and finding that it presaged some extraordinary and potential effects, though the form was very strange, and far differing from that of the Graecian gods, 〈◊〉 ●ent to demand of the Pythian oracle, what god, or else what Heros was represent●● by this head? and the answer was, That they should honour Bacchus, surnamed 〈◊〉.  
The Island of Samothrace was in ancient times very famous, by reason of the ceremonies of the gods which were there observed: for there was a school where men were instructed in all the rites and forms of those sacrifices, to be offered to every particular god.   

¶ The Manners of the present time.  
THough in all these Islands men live for the most part after the Greekish manner, yet it will not be altogether impertinent to declare some particularities of their manners and customs which inhabit their at this day.  
First you must conceive that there are a great many of thieves and pirates, which lie continually about these Islands; in so much, as the inhabitants are enforced to stand upon their guard, after this manner: There is not an hill top in all the Islands, where there stands not a watch or sentinel all the day long, to the end they may descry whether any pirates be upon the sea or not, for they can easily judge far off, whether they be pirates, or other ships. Now they have no sooner discovered any vessel of this quality; but they give fire to the beacon, and in the day time when the fire will not show far, they have matter and stuff about them which raiseth a mighty smoke: and if there be many ships in company, they give notice thereof in divers places, and then all the neighbour ports are advertised of the approach of this common plague, and seek to defend themselves.  
In the night, the fire is easy to be seen, and therefore at that time they use beacons, for they make as many fires as they discover ships, and passengers which pass that way, hold the sea clear whenas they see no signal made upon the mountain tops, and so on the contrary they term it troubled, whenas they do perceive any of these tokens.  
The Isle of Patmos, or Palmosa, is inhabited by Greek Christians, living in all liberty, by paying only a tribute to the Turk, and having ordinarily amongst them Turkish magistrates. The soil is tilled by the Christians, and there are a great number of Caloyers amongst them.  
The Islanders of Cos maintain a foolish superstition; for they affirm that a serpent was here seen of immeasurable greatness, which they ●old for a fairy, affirming that it was Hippocrates daughter, who is yet alive, as she who was in former ages a wonderful enchantress.  
The Turks devil only in the town of Stancou, not having one christian amongst them, no more than in any other place within this Island, except it be in two villages, which are within the Champion country, where some Greek Christians are suffered to inhabit.  
In the Island of Lesbos, there be Turks which devil in the town of Mytelin, or else some others professing the Mahometan religion; but the Grecians live in the country to plant and labour in the vines.  
In the Isle of Stalimena or Lemnos, all the Greeks apply themselves to bodily labour, and live there out of all fear of being oppressed or wronged, being freed from this inconvenience by the soldiers that guard the forts. There are also many Caloyers, as in all the other Islands within the Mediterranean sea.  
As for the Island of Chio, the Turks will not permit any Christian to lodge within the town, which is of the same name. Although the Bishop of the Franckes did not forbear to go and celebrated Mass in his diocese within the town, where there is also a certain place that harboureth poor Christians and passengers three days, and three nights, without costing them a●● thing.  
Near unto the town ditch one may see divers of their sepulchres, with great stones and inscriptions upon them.  
About fifteen miles from the town there are certain great farm houses, where fifty ●or threescore peasants lodge, who at some times of the year do nothing but feed partridges, and they have the art to take them three days after they are hatched.  
They are so well beaten and acquainted with their houses, as they suffer them all day long to range over the fields; and then to bring them in again in the evening, every one goes with a grain of wheat in his mouth, and lies down on the earth; then the Partridge being desirous to peck at this grain, every one comes into the peculiar owner's hands; and thus every one hath his own again, which makes them very common and cheap in this Island.     

❧ THE ISLAND OF CYPRUS.  

The Contents.  
THis discourse declares who were the first inhabitants of this Island, and the princes that commanded over it, before it was taken by Selym, and reduced under the Turkish subjection. The situation, circuit, breadth, length, in what climate, and under what parallel it lies: what capes and promontories it hath: and how it was heretofore divided into four parts, and now into twelve provinces. The principal towns, bouroughs, villages, and mountains in the same. Of the soil, abounding in all kind of first-fruits, but especially in citrons, oranges, lemons, black grapes, called Zibiles, dates, sugar taken out of canes, faffron, coryander seed, mastic trees, turpentine, coloquintida, rhubarb, scammony, mines of gold, chrisocolle, c●lcant, alum, iron, brass, precious stones, emeralds, diamonds, crystal, white coral, and read, and the amiant stone, whereof linen cloth is made that will not burn in the fire, but whitens therein, cotton, wool, and salt. What were the ancient laws, and customs of this country, where whoredom was openly permitted, and luxury reputed commendable: where they worshipped Venus, who was the goddess, patroness, and protectrix of this Island. What nations now inhabit this Island. What form of policy and government was there maintained during the Venetian dominion, and what that is by which the Turks command and govern, to whom at this present they are subject.   

THis Island which was in ancient times first inhabited, as men judge, by japhet, Noahes son, coming afterwards under the dominion of Greekish tyrants, when the Assyrian monarchy was extinguished fell at last into the Romans hands, and by their means, it obeyed the Ptolomees who were kings of Egypt, and then it returned again under the Roman power. After that, the Emperors of Constantinople possessed it for the space of eight hundred years. Then it lived under the government of the kings, of the family of Lusignan of France. After this it came under the Venetian subjection, in the year 1473, continuing in their hands unto the year 1570, whenas Selym the Turkish Emperor took it by force.  
This Island was called in former times Crypta, or Crypton, as Volaterranus writes, that is to say, subterranean, because it lies so low, that a man would think the waves of the sea did hide and cover it. It was also named Cerastis, for the great number of mountains therein, whose points or tops are sharp like horns: i● had also the names of Cethoine, then of Amathusia, according to Strabo, as likewise of Paphia, Salaminia, Macaria, or fortunate, of Achamantis, Asperia, Collinia, and Erosa.  
It is seated as Ptolemy relates, in the midst of the Issicke bay, commonly called the 〈◊〉 of Lajazza, being near to the Egyptian sea, and lying between the coasts of Cilicia, and Syria. On the South part, it butts upon the Egyptian sea, and that of Syria: on the Levant, it is beaten upon by the same Syrian sea, and the Issicke bay: upon the West it joins to the Sea of Pamphylia; and towards the North, it confines with that of Cilicia.  
That part which looks towards the East, lies from Syria or Suria, about one hundred miles, which passage may be well go in one night. That part which bends towards the South, is about three or four days sailing from Alexandria; and as much from the Island of Rhodes upon the West. It lies sixty miles from Cilicia, or Caramania.  
The length of this Island is from West to East, and sometimes it makes straits of land, which cut off the breadth. It lies in the beginning of the fourth climate, under the tenth parallel, according to modern writers, and the longest day in Summer is of fourteen hours and a half, or thereabouts. It comprehends three celestial degrees in the longitude. It hath in circuit (as Strabo writes) three thousand four hundred and twenty Stades, which (according to our computation) make four hundred twenty seven miles. Pliny saith, that it is three hundred seventy five miles about. Others affirm, that sailing about it by Sea, it hath five hundred miles, and that the length is two hundred miles, and the greatest breadth fifty or sixty. But there are some which give it five hundred and fifty miles in circuit, two hundred and twenty in length, and one hundred and thirty in breadth.  
Elbe hath many promontories or capes, as upon the West, the promontory Achamas, now called the cape of S. Pifane, or Epifane: The promontory Drepan, at this day trepan, or Melechia: and that of Zephira, now called Punta: Malota or Melonta, or the cape of Chelidonia: upon the South side is to be seen the promontory Phoeurie, called Cap Blanc: That of Curia, now called Capodellegatte: That of Dades, called at this day Cap. de Chiti: That of Throne, now named Cape de Pila: upon the East, lies the promontory Pedase, called at this day Capo de Griego, or Cape Grec: and upon the ●op of the Island, that of Clides, called now Cape S. Andrew: upon the North, lies the promontory Crommyon, now termed Cape of Cormachiti, or Cornachiette. To conclude, betwixt the Cape of Cormachiti, and that of S. Epifania, lies the Sea of Pamphylia, now named the gulf of Settalias, which in former times was very dangerous for the space of three hundred miles.  
Ptolemy teacheth us, that this Island was divided in former times into four parts, that is to say; into the Eastern part, which they gave to Salaminia; into the Western part, which Paphia comprehended; into the Southern part, which was Amathusia; ●nd into the Northern part, which was Lapathia. But at this day it is divided into twelve parts, which they commonly call countries, and those be Nicotia, Famagosta, Paphia, Audime, Limisse, Massota, Selina, Messaria, or Savori, Crusoc, Pentalia, Cerina, and Carpasla.  
Diodorus, Pliny, and Mela affirm, That it contained nine goodly kingdoms, and fifteen good towns, whereof some have been ruined by great earthquakes. The chief towns were Paphos, in the region of Paphia: it carries at this day the title of a town, ●nd is commonly called by the name of Bapho, as Niger writes: old Paphos, which was in the same province: Cythera, which gave name to the whole Island, and is no mo●e at this day; but in the place thereof is the town of Conuclia, which is one of the 〈◊〉 in that Island. There was also Curias, whereas now the town of Piscobia stands, which is also accounted one of the chiefest. There was also Amathus, which is now ruined. Moreover, the town of Ceraunia, now called by the name of Cerines', built by Cyrus●hen ●hen he had subdued the nine kings of the Island. This town (as Authors affirm) stands in the North part of the Island. But Nicosia (which was sometimes called Lettre, than Levocote, and the abode of kings) is seated in the plain of Massara. Thirty six miles from Nicosia, stands Famagosta, sometimes called Salamis, then tear●●ed Constantienna, a famous town. Some affirm, that Famagosta was in former ●●●mess called Tamasse, and others hold that it was one of the four towns which had 〈◊〉 common name of Arsinoè.  
Besides these towns, they did number about eight hundred and fifty villages or open bouroughs, yet putting in this number some ruined towns, which they commonly call Ca●aux, the which contains about one hundred and sixty thousand inhabitants. Many of these places may well be compared to good towns, as well for their bigness, as for the number of the people. The best are Lapitho, Siguri, S. john de Carpasse, Lescara, S. Constantin, Lim●ati, Silicu, Pellendria, Chillani, Colosse, Piscopia, Salines, Cowelia, Crimè, Arzos, Omodos', Crusoc, Solely, Marfou, and Lesque. All the Casaux, or Bouroughs, were divided into three parts, whereof the moiety did belong unto the king's treasury, and the rest partly to the Clergy, and partly to the Nobility.  
There are many mountains in this Island, but that of Olympus is the greatest: the Grecians call it Throhodos, and it hath eighteen leagues in circuit. There are to be seen many Monasteries of Greek Caloyers or Monks, of the order of S. Basile.  

¶ The Quality.  
ALl this Island in former times was so full of wood, as they could not manure it; and although the inhabitants had consumed a great part of this wood in refining and melting of metals, and making of ships; yet could they not easily lay the land bore, the wood grew so fast. In the end they ordained, that whosoever would cut up any trees, might lawfully do it; and that every man should enjoy, as his own inheritance, the fields which he had cleansed. Strabo saith, That the Island of Cypress in his time did not yield to any other, for that it bore abundance of wine and oil, and had wheat sufficient to feed the inhabitants. But at this day it is exceeding fertile, and abounds in all things necessary for the life of man: for, besides the great store of wheat, and other grain and first-fruits of the earth which it bears, it yields excellent wine, the which they may keep eighty years, and in this time, of black it becomes white; they are of a good and pleasing taste.  
They bring from Cypress that goodly great black grape or Raysin, which they commonly call Zibile; and they are accustomed to gather in this Island all kinds of fruit which grow in other places, especially, Lemons, Citrons, and Oranges, which excel all others in taste. It bears no Chestnuts, Services, nor Cherries: but there grows great store of Dates, and Sugar, the which they draw out of Canes; Safron, Coriander, and Mastic. And besides ordinary herbs, there are Egyptian beans, or Colocasies, and other herbs which are very pleasant in taste. There is honey which is excellent and white, and Sugar which is black, the which they do commonly call Melazo. This Island doth also yield many physical things, as Turpentine, Coloquintida, Rhubard, Scammonye, and such like; as also, an herb of the ashes whereof they make Sope. There is also divers mines of gold, Borax, Alum, Iron, Vitrial, and Latin; but it hath more Brass than any other thing. It doth also yield some precious stones, as the Emerald, Diamond, Crystal, white and read Coral, and the Amyant stone, whereof they make cloth which burns not, being cast into the fire, but purifies and becomes white. The inhabitants do also draw great profit from their cotton and wool, whereof they have great store, and of their Goat's hair, with which they make Chamlets. They draw store of salt from a Lake which lies not far from the Sea, the which is twelve miles in circuit, and into it there runs a little river which falls from Mount Olympus. They which remain in this Island, are much troubled with the heat, for that it is situated in the five and thirtieth degree, or thereabouts (as I take it) of the Northerly altitude, by reason whereof, the Sun is not far from them, when it enters into the tropic of Cancer: yet the Northern wind blows strongly in the Bourough of Cerines', and doth moderate this discommodity by the coolness which it doth cause in the extremity of the heat, and the air upon the mountains is very subtle. The air in this Island is most commonly unwholesome and unpleasing by reason of the Pools which casts forth very bad vapours. There are no rivers, but only torrents or violent streams, which growing dry, leave the inhabitants in great distress for water, which it may be is the greatest discommodity may happen to them of Cypress. They report that before the time of great Constantine, this Island was abandoned by the inhabitants for the space of six and thirty years, during the which, there was never any rain seen. There is but one port fit for the approach of ships, near to Famagosta. It is true that in former times there were many, but they are now filled up, by reason of the raging of the sea.   

¶ The Manners of the Ancient.  
THis Island in former times was in great reputation, for although that poets have feigned that Venus was borne of the scum of the sea; yet the common opinion was that she had her beginning in this Island of Cypress: and they believe that this goodly goddess of love was sometimes lady of this country; and that to cover her wantonness and incontinency, she ordained that the women might play the whores without any fear. Hence also grew the custom, that the maidens of Cypress, before they married, came upon certain days to the sea shore, to present themselves to the first stranger that would use them for money; and with this kind of gain they gathered together a certain sum to pay their dowries, and to satisfy the goddess Venus for the ravishing of their honours. Moreover the Cypriots had learned the cruel customs of the Barbarians of Asia; for that Teucer having taught them to sacrifice men, and to shed human blood in worshipping the devil under the name of jupiter, they continued it until that the Emperor Adrian abolished that custom.  
The kings of this Island did sometimes wear attires on their heads like to a Bishop's Mitre, and they had long robes like unto the kings of Persia, and as we see the Turks wear at this day: as for the rest, they lived after the Graecian manner. The inhabitants in old time were so rich and powerful, as they have sent colonies into divers places, and have long commanded over all the Mediterranean sea, and have built many towns in Spain.   

¶ The Manners at this day.  
THe inhabitants of this Island are civil, and live gloriously and daintily. They affect strangers, and entreat them with much courtesy. They are valiant, and borne to the war, exceeding strong and very active; but much subject to melancholy.  
They that remain in this Island are of divers nations, yet there are far more Grecians than other. The greatest part of these inhabitans came into this Island in the time of Constantine the Great, from Egypt, India, Syria, Cilicia, Cappadocia, Pamphylia, Thrace, and from many parts of Greece, after that the Island had been abandoned for want of water. But in regard of the gentlemen of Cypress, they are for the most part come out of France: for after the loss of the Holy Land, there were many Frenchmen which retired themselves into this Island with the king Guy of Lusignan, about the year 1193. But since that the Venetians become masters, not only the noblemen of Venice which remained in Cypress, were acknowledged for gentlemen of this Island: but also all the citizens of any towns belonging to the signory of Venice, become gentlemen Cypriots, having continued five years in the town of Nicosia.  
In this Island, as in all others, they are of mixed manners, for that some live after the Venetian fashion, having not forgotten their ancient manners: others which are Turks live after the Turkish fashion, and by little and little they all begin to frame themselves to their fashions which command over them.   

¶ The Government.  
ALl the Cypriots which remain without the towns, are divided into five divers conditions, that is to say, into Parices', Leissteres, Perpiaires, Albanois, and white Venetians. The condition of the Parisians was the most miserable, for that they were entreated like slaves: for in old time they paid a certain sum unto their masters yearly, and did endure other troublesome charges; for they aught two days journey weekly unto their lords, and they gave them the third part of all the first-fruits of the earth. These lords had all power over them; so as they might imprison them, banish them, beat, and torment them; yea they might do any thing but kill them: for the king only had that authority: but it was lawful for them to cell them, and to exchange them; and the Parices' might also redeem themselves for sixty crowns, or thereabouts: yet their lands remained Parices', that is to say, bound to their lords with the same condition. They that were enfranchised after this manner, were called Leissteres, that is to say, free, and their children were of the same condition that their fathers, except those that had been begotten before their enfranchisement, for they were held for Parices'. The Leissteres paid the fift or sixt part which they had gathered. Finally, they were forbidden to join in marriage with the Parices', for that the children which were borne of such marriages were held for Parices'.  
The Perpiaires are some among the Parices' which obtained liberty in the times of the kings of Cypress, with all their children and successors, upon condition to pay yearly fifteen perpirs, which are certain pieces of money of Constantinople: but their lands remained subject as before.  
The Albanois are certain people receiving pay, being in former times brought into this Island to guard it, and these begot children in Cypress, who received pay as well as they that bore arms, until that the Island was taken by the Turks.  
The white Venetians are certain inhabitants of the Island which were free, both they and their children, paying only unto the king, or to the commonweal of Venice a certain sum of money. This Island came to be subject to the Venetians, in the year of Grace 1473, and remained in this estate unto the year 1570, when it was taken by Solyman Emperor of the Turks. Touching the Turks government, we will treat thereof in the general discourse of his Empire.   

¶ The Religion.  
IN former time there were fourteen bishoprics in this Island, which were all Grecians: but they were reduced to four by Pope Innocent the third, in favour of Queen Aliz. He left the archbishopric of Nicosia double, the one Greek, and the other Latin: the Bishopric of Famagosta was also double: the Bishopric of Paphee was also double, and in like manner that of Lymissa. The Latin Bishoprics have their bourroughes and their tithes: but the Greek Bishops did exact yearly a certain sum of the Priests and Deacons which were subject unto him, after the manner of Greek Prelates of other provinces. The Greek Archbishops and Bishops did acknowledge the Latin Bishops for their superiors, yea in such sort as after that the Grecians had been chosen Bishops by the king's Council; they were confirmed by the Latin Bishops and when there was any suit before the Bishops, they did appeal from the Greek unto the Latins.  
The Greek Bishops did not remain in the abovementioned towns, but Pope Alexander the fourth assigned them other seats, as we may read in Somma Alexandrina, for the Greek Archbishop of Nicosia had his seat in the ancient town of Solia, and was called Bishop of Solia, and head of the Grecians of Nicosia: the Bishop of Paphee remained in the town of Arzos: he of Lymisse had Amathonte for his abode; but for that this town was not inhabited, he lived in Lescare: Finally, the Bishop of Famagosta made his residence at Carpasse; yet in time they are returned to the aforesaid towns, only the Bishop of Lymisse continues still at Lescare. We may not omit that the Latin Archbishop of Nicosia, who was called Archbishop of Cypress, did not acknowledge any Patriarch, but depended immediately of the Pope; by reason whereof, they called him Primate of the realm, and borne Legate of the Holy See. But you must understand that after this, under Pope Pius the fourth, the Signiors of Venice become Patrons of this archbishopric, and were woont·to choose four men, one of which was named Archbishop by the Pope.  
Besides the Greek and Latin Churches, there are other sects in this Island, as Armenians, Coftes, Maronites, Indians, Nestoriens, Georgiens', and jacobites, which were all expelled by Saladine, after the taking of Jerusalem, and either of these sects hath his Bishop.  
The Turks suffer every man to live with liberty of conscience, as in other countries where they rule, for that they demand nothing but the sovereignty, and the payment of the tribute which they exact yearly.     

❧ THE ISLAND OF RHODES.  

The Contents.  
RHodes is an Island, called in old time by divers names, and famous for the great Colosse of brass. What the situation is, and how many miles it contains. The famous city of Rhodes fortified with three walls, thirteen towers, and five castles: given in former times by the Emperor of Constantinople to the knights of S. john, and now held by the Turks. Very subject to the overflowing of waters. Abounding in pastures, Orange, Citron, and Olive trees. The ancient valour and power of these Islanders tried by the Grecians and Romans. Their laws touching public works and charges. Given to the study of sciences, liberal arts, Necromancy, and Sorcery. Sacrificing men to Saturn. The inhabitants of this Island at this present, being Turks, jews, and Christians Grecians, every man living according to his laws.   

THis Island was in old time called Ophinse, Asteria, Ethrea, Trinachia, Corimbia, Poeesse, Atabyria, than Macharia, and Colosse, by reason of the great Colosse that was to be seen there, and was numbered among the seven wonders of the world. It was all of brass, and the thumb of the hand was so big, as no man was able to embrace it with both his arms. The Egyptians did beaten it in pieces.  
This Island lies twenty miles from the main land of Asia, and contains about one hundred and forty, or (as some writ) one hundred thirty five miles. At this day there is a good town which is called Rhodes, of the name of the Island. It stands towards the Sun rising, and is partly situated upon the side of a hill, and part upon the Sea shore. There are three walls, thirteen high towers, five castles, and some other forts which make it in a manner impregnable. This town in former times was very famous, and much more than under the knights of S. john of Jerusalem, or at this day under the Turks: for after that the Christians were dispossessed of the Holy land, the whole island was given by the Emperor of Constantinople, to the knights of S. john of Jerusalem, in the year of our Redemption 1308. But in the year of our Lord God 1522, Solyman, emperor of the Turks, made himself master thereof, having taken the town by composition, which was, That the knights should departed the Island with their liberties, and that the inhabitants of the country should continued there still if they would. All the houses of the knights of the Rhodes are carefully preserved to this day by the Turk, with the arms, paintings, graving, and inscriptions.  

¶ The Quality.  
Near unto the town of Rhodes there is a plain, lying upon the North side (for the other is hilly) the which is stony and narrow; but it is of a reasonable length: and there are many valleys and little hills near unto the town, with store of vines and fruit trees, which grow there by art and industry of men, for that the place doth not naturally bear any.  
This Island hath been much subject to the overflowing of waters: but they have laboured to drain out the waters, and to dry up the Moors; so as the country hath been made fertile, and no more subject to such inundations, where with it hath been afflicted, especially three times: the last happened whenas king Antigones had vanquished Eumenes, at which time the whole Island was covered with water, and the inhabitants drowned. This happened not by any swelling of the Sea, but by continual storms of reign, which beginning with hail at the entrance of the Spring, were so violent, as bearing down many houses, and kill many persons, the town was in a manner ruined in those storms. But to speak something of the bounty of this Island in general, it obounds in pastures, and brings forth great store of Olive trees, Citrons, and Olives, and other trees which are continually green.   

¶ The manners of the Ancients.  
THe victories which the Romans have gotten by means of the naval armies of the Rhodians, and the courageous defence of the same Islanders against the Romans, before that they were made subject to their command, may sufficiently show how valiant these people were, and bred to arms. The Rhodians did also fight furiously against Cassius: but long before, they employed their forces diversly, sometimes for the Lacedæmonians against the Athenians, and sometimes for the later against the first, as they could practise their loves: for it was a free people, whose succours they did sue for, as they do at this day unto the Swisses. According to an ancient law the rich were bound to bear the charges of the poorer sort.  
There were men also appointed for public works, who did furnish victuals to them that laboured, and had a care that no necessaries should be wanting, especially in matters which concerned the Sea. Moreover, there were some secrets in their Arsenal, which was not lawful for any man to see, and if any one did presume to cast his eye thereon, or to enter, he was presently condemned to die. The town of Rhodes was much commended for the sciences and liberal arts which did flourish there, so as the Romans themselves sent their children thither to study. The Rhodians language was not so sweet as that of the country of Attica, and did more resemble the rudeness of their neighbour speech, than the much babbling of them of Attica.  
The inhabitants of this Island, although they were very civil, yet they did sacrifice (as Eusebius writes) a man every year unto Saturn. They were in the beginning great sorcerers, and so dangerous, as within the infusion of certain water charmed, they spoiled the seed of the earth, and did kill their cattle. They were great fencers, subtle Artisans, quick witted, and full of excellent inventions.   

¶ The Manners of this age.  
THe town is inhabited by Turks which live after the manner of their nation, and of the jews which are come out of Spain. But as for Christians, they may not live there in the night, for that the Turk suspects them, and fears some sedition or treason. In the day time it is lawful for them to continued in the town as long as they please, and no man takes exception. They that live in villages are for the most part Christians, Greeks, which trim their vines and gardens, and manure their grounds. These live for the most part like unto other Grecians.     

❧ BOSSINA, BULGARIA, SERVIA, RASCIA, AND THAT WHICH THE TURK HOLDS IN HUNGARY.  
BOssina, or Bosne is a country of Illiria, called Cardania by Orosus, and by others high Misia. It takes the name of the river Bosne, which falls into that of Save. This country is divided into two parts, whereof the one is called the realm of Bosne, and the other the duchy. It is situated betwixt the river of Danou and Sclavonia. The realm of Bosne did contain the Low Countries, and the chief place was Covadze, or jaieze, the which was situated upon the top of a hill betwixt two rivers, with an impregnable Castle. The Turk made himself master of this realm in the year 1464, and did 'cause the king of Bosne called Stephen, who was also Despot of Rascia and Servia to be flayed.  
The duchy of Bosne contained the High Country joining to Ragousa, and the duke was called duke of S. Saba, or of Herzegovina, or of the Black mountain. This duchy fell also into the hands of the Turks the same year 1464; so as all Bossina at this day is but one government. The abode of the B●glierbei is at Bagnialuca. There are also the towns of Poschegue, Clisso, Herzogovina, Lika, Sazeschne, Iswornike, Bisrem, and Alatschiachissar.  
Servia, which many men take for the ancient country of the Triballes, and High Misia, lies betwixt the realm of Bosne and Bulgaria. The chief town of Sernia was Senderovia, which some call Spenderobe, others Simandria, or Semendria, the Turks Semunder, and the Hungarians Zendrem. This place stands near to Belgrada upon the banks of Danou, or Danubius. It was taken by Amurath Emperor of the Turks in the year 1438. There is also Prisdens, whereas the Emperor justinian was borne. The other towns of note in this country are Vidina, called by the Turks Kyratow, seated near to Mount Argentarius, then Novograde, which is upon the frontiers of Servia, and which some do unfitly call the New Hill, or the Black Hill.  
Bulgaria, as if we should say, Volgaria, is so called of certain people which parting from the river of Volga, about the year 666, seized upon this country, which some hold was in old time Base Misia. It lies betwixt Servia, Romania, and the river of Danou. The chief town is Sophia, which Niger takes to be the town of Ptolomees Tibisque. It stands in a very commodious situation, and it is great and well peopled, but nothing strong. There is also Nicopolis, which the Turks call Nigebolis.  
Rascia lies betwixt the river of Terms and Danou. The chief town are Zarnovia, Crusoveccia, Covin, Novebarda, Severin, Calambes, Columbesta, and Bodon. This country had sometimes a particular Despot, who was dispossessed by Amurath.  
The Turk doth also hold in Bessarabia, which they hold to be one of the provinces of Moldavia, the towns of Kilem and Bermen, or Moncastre, whereas ● Sangiac remains, who is subject to the Beglierbey of Greece. These towns were taken by the Turk with the country, in the year 1485.  
As for Hongarie, the Turk holds Buda the royal town, the which was taken by the Turks in the year 1541, and soon after the towns of Strigonia, Albaregale, and Quinque Eglises. Belgrada also, or Alba Greka, was taken by them in the year 1521. And to conclude, for that we will treat more particularly elsewhere of the realm of Hongarie, king Mathias who was put in possession of the realm of Hongarie, holds nothing but that which lies towards the river of Danou, upon the frontiers of Polonia and Cassovia.  

¶ The Quality.  
THe realm of Bosne is full of rough mountains which yield little. All the advantage it hath, is, that it makes the country the more strong. There are also mines of silver, whereof they have great abundance. And they draw out of this country the best falcons that can be seen.  
Bulgaria, is for the most part full of mountains, and extends sometimes towards the river of Danou, and sometimes towards Romania: the middle part of the country is more stony and rough than the rest. And although that the lower parts have some plains and valleys, yet the greatest part is full of thickewoods', or else these plains are desert: here Ladslaus king of Poland consumed his army.  
Servia and Rascia are of the same quality: but Servia exceeds the rest in that it hath mines of gold, and is like to that of Bossina, in regard of those of silver. As for the country which the Turk holds in Hongarie, we will speak of the quality thereof, whenas we shall make particular mention of that realm.   

¶ The Manners.  
THe manners of these people are for the most part like unto those of the slavonians, which we have already described. They have little taste of the neighbourhood of the Polonians. These nations are in a manner all given to wine, very rude and gross. There is no great trust in their words, for that they break their faith upon any light occasion. They are borne to endure all kind of toil and labour, and are not easily tired with any thing: but there is nothing more troublesome than their conversation. They are full of courage but not of valour, for that their resolution grows rather from brutishness, than from any thing that may give a man the title of valiant.      

The Estate of the Turk in Africa.  

¶ THE REALMS OF ALGIERS, TUNES, AND TREMISEN IN AFRICA.  

The Contents.  
THe author having discoursed of the countries which the Turk holds in Europe, becomes to the description of those which he commands in Africa; and beginning by the realm of Tremisen, he shows the bounds, the length, and breadth, and the provinces which in old time it did contain. And having described the town of Algiers, and the realm, he comes to treat of the realm of Tunes, the which he divides into five provinces notes their extension, situation, and chief towns, and among others, he stays at the d●sc●●ption of Carthage, the most ancient of the realm of Tunes, in old time the chief of all A●ricke. Then coming to two other observations, of the fertility of these provinces, and the manner's and dispositions of their inhabitants. Touching the first, he writes, That there is abundance of Corn, Oil, Olives, Dates, and all kind of first-fruits in the most part, Goats, Oxen, and Horses. As for the manners and customs of this country, that the women wear long hair, and have a hoop of brass upon either thigh, and that in old time they were common, but new they live after the manner of the Turks, who command over them: They have always been subtle, treacherous, and disloyal; there being in these countries two kinds of sects or religions, which were, Christians and Mahometans, whereof the Author will speak hereafter more amply, treating of the Turks religion.   

THe realm of Tremisen, or Telensin, hath Mauritania, Tingitana, (in the which are comprehended the realms of Fez and Morroco) upon the West, divided by the river of Muluia: upon the East, that of Ampsaga: upon the South, lie the Numidians Getuliens: and upon the North part, lies the Mediterranean Sea, which looks towards the Island of Sardinia. johannes Leo, of Africa, comes very near unto Ptolemy in his description which he made of the realm of Telensin, whenas he saith, That it ends towards the West with the river Zha, and with that of Muluia: upon the West, it hath for bounds the great river, which some hold to be that which the Moderns call Magrada (which hath been known to the Ancients by the name of Bugrada:) upon the South, the deserts of Numidia: and towards the North, the Mediterranean Sea.  
This country was called Mauritania Caesaria, in the Romans time. It extends from East to West three hundred and eighty miles, but the breadth is not above five and twenty miles, that is to say, from the Mediterranean Sea, unto the deserts of Numidia; by reason whereof it is subject to the continual incursions and invasions of the Arabians which dwell in the Deserts: for this cause, the kings of this country have always sought the love and friendship of the Numidians in all degrees, and yet they could never satisfy them.  
This realm of Tremisen did, in ancient time, (as Authors affirm) comprehend four provinces, which carried the names of their chief and principal towns, that is to say, of Tremisen, Tenez, Bugia, and Algiers: but at this day there remains none but Tenez, and Tremisen. This last town had in former times sixteen or seventeen thousand households; but (first of all by reason of the wars of joseph king of Fez, who besieged it seveen years; then by the war which was made by the Emperor Charles the fift, who had taken it under his protection; and of the Turks, who in the end made themselves masters thereof; and in like manner by reason of the war betwixt the Serif and the Turk) it is much decayed.  
The town of Algiers was in former times under the realm of Tremisen; but, by reason of the insupportable charges it was at, it revolted, and gave itself to the king of Bugia. It did afterwards belong to the king of Spain, from whom Barbaroussa took it in the year of our Lord God 1515. Now it is reduced under the Turk, and is grown both rich and famous, being a retreat for an infinite company of Pirates which bring their prizes thither, for which reason the great Turk hath a Lieutenant remaining there. It stands upon the declining of certain hills, being three miles in circuit, and contains eighty thousand persons. A small Island makes the Port, the which is little, and subject to the Northern winds. The Turks have continually fortified this place, and made it in a manner impregnable. This town was in former times called Gefair; and the realm of Algiers extends unto Tercot, a town of four thousand families, and unto Guargale, which contains six thousand.  
The realm of Tunes comprehends all that which lies betwixt the great river, and the river of the country of Mesrat; so as it doth contain all the country which the Ancients did properly call Africa, or the lesser Africa, and in like manner the ancient Numidia. Some divide this realm into five parts, which be the province of Bugia, that of Constantine, the country of Tunes, that of Tripoli, and that of Ezzab.  
The province of Bugia gins at the great river, and extends unto the mountains of Constantine, near unto the Mediterranean Sea, the which is about one hundred and fifty miles, and the breadth is near forty miles. There are also some towns which are small, but well peopled, as Necaus upon the frontier of Numidia, and Chollo, near to the Mediterranean Sea. But Bugia is the chief town, which gives her name unto the whole country. It is very ancient, and was built by the Romans upon a high mountain near unto the Sea, Falzal, which some hold to be that which Ptolemy calls Thabuaque. Sabellicus takes it for Vzaeat; Sannutus for Salde; but Castaldus (upon whose judgement the most judicious rely) holds that it is Igilgili, for that the situation is very like unto it. In old time there were in this town goodly Temples, Colleges, and stately lodgings; and moreover, Hospitals, and Monasteries, after their manner; but the town was taken in the year of Grace 1508, by Peter of Navarre, since which time it hath continued without ornament or beauty.  
The country of Constantine lies betwixt the mountain of Constantine, upon the frontier of the country of Bugia, and the territory of Tunes, near to the river of Guadilbarbar: the chief town is Constantine, which Marmolius takes to be that which Ptolemy calls Culcue, putting it in new Numidia: yet Paulus iovius, with Oliver, who hath commented upon Mela, and some others, hold that it is rather Certain, the abode of king Massinissa, which Ptolemy calls julia: The town is environed with high and strong mountains, the which are very ancient. It is in a manner compassed about with very high rocks; they do now accounted in it about eight thousand families. There are many fair houses, and without the town there are to be seen a great number of goodly ancient buildings, amongst the which there is a triumphal arch, after the manner of the Romans. They do also place in this country the town of Bosne, otherwise called Hippona, built by the Romans, one hundred miles or thereabouts from the Sea, the which hath been famous by reason of S. Augustin, who was bishop of that place.  
The country of Tunes lies betwixt the river Guadilbarbar, which the Ancients have called the pool of Hipponita (in which is the length of the country of Constantine) and the river of Capes, which makes certain lakes, the which in former times was the marish of Tritonides. This country is famous by reason of the town of Tunes, the chief of the whole realm.  
There are many fair towns in this country, whereof the chief is that of Tunes, whereof we have made mention, called by Ptolemy, Themise or Thunise. In the beginning it was a small town, but after the ruin of Carthage, it began to be wonderfully well peopled and enriched: so that at this day it is held for the chief town of the whole country: for they number in it about ten thousand families, and it is near five miles in circuit. Goulette was seated near unto Tunes, upon the straight of a pool, near ten miles long, by the which they go to Tunes.  
Carthage, the most ancient town of this country, and sometime the chief of all Afrique, was built by the Phoenicians, as some hold, seventy two years before the city of Rome. Some say that it was two and twenty miles in circuit: it was in a manner environed of all sides by the Sea. There was in the midst of it a fort called Byrses, which contained little less than two thousand paces. This town was taken and burnt by Scipio, in the year of Grace 602, after the foundation of Rome; but having been afterwards re-edified by Caesar, who transported a Colony thither, it did afterwards flourish, and received much annoyance by the Vandals, Goths, and Sarrazins, and hath been so ill entreated, as there scarce remains a twentieth part of the town inhabited. There is but little of the wall standing, some aqueducts, and a small number of the ancient buildings. They say there are about five and twenty shops of merchants, and five hundred houses the which are low and ill built.  
Biserte, or Bensert, is a very ancient town, seated upon the Mediterranean Sea, and near to a river, which being small in the beginning, by little and little grows wonderful great. There is a goodly port of the sea, capable to receive great shipping. Some say that this town is all one with Utica, which held the first rank next unto Carthage, and grew very famous by the death of Cato. In this country, they do also reckon the great town of Cairoan, seated in a plain which is desert and sandy, and famous by reason of the study of the law, according to the laws of the land, and the superstition of the Arabians, the which are carefully observed there.  
The country of Tripoli gins at the river and gulf of Capes, and extends near unto the country of Mesrat, beyond the town of Tripoli. Some say that this province did extend itself in former times towards the North, before that is was drowned, by reason whereof, the inhabitants flying this inconveniency retired themselves towards the South. There are many towns in this province, whereof the chief is new Tripoli, which otherwise is called Tripoli of Barbary. This town hath gotten reputation in our time, by reason of the pirates which live there, and which annoy all the coasts of Italy: whereas in former times there was great access of merchants from Genoüa, Venice, Cicile, and other places.  
Ezzabe, the last province of the realm of Tunes, lies beyond that of Tripoli towards the East. It comprehends some towns which are of no great importance. The chief country of this province is called Mesrat, the which lies near to the Mediterranean sea, and about one hundred miles from Tripoli: and this country contains many towns and villages built as well in the plain as upon the mountains.  

¶ The Quality.  
IF we shall observe in general the realm of Tunes, we must confess that it is fertile enough, and fit to breed up much cattle, and to bear great numbers of trees, the which are commonly seen towards the South: for upon the East, it is not very fruitful, neither have they much water: but to examine every thing in particular, the country of Bugia is in some places pleasant and fruitful, for that it yields good store of grain and fruit▪ but in some other places, it is so barr●n, as there can be nothing seen more miserable. The soil about the town of Bugia is not fit for corn, but it yields excellent first-fruits. There are in this country wondered high and rough mountains, where there are many forests, and store of fountains, replenished with goats, oxen, and horses.  
In the country of Constantin there is store of oil and corn, with great plenty of butter, by reason of the troops of ca●tell which they feed. Near unto Bone, there is a very great plain, the which is forty miles long, and five and twenty broad, the which yields abundance of corn.  
In the province of Tunes near unto the chief town, and within four or five miles round about, there are plains full of olive trees: but they want wheat, and all other kind of grain, by reason that the inhabitants dare not manure the land that is about the town, for fear of the Arabians, who make daily incursions.  
The province of Tripoli yields great store of dates, and first-fruits of all sorts: but it is not fit to bear corn; yet they have good plenty of wheat. The province of Ezzab hath goodly plains, but nothing fit to bear wheat, nor any other grain: but in recompense thereof, there is abundance of olives, dates, and many other first-fruits.   

¶ The Manners of the ancient.  
THe women of this country did in●old time wear upon either thigh a hoop of brass, which is observed at this day in many places of Africa among the Moors, and they did wear their hair very long. They were in some places so uncivil, or to speak more properly, so nasty, as they did kill the louse they took with their teeth, and afterwards cast them to the ground. These were called Andrimachides, who lived among the Po●neses, and these did sand and prostitute their daughters being ready to marry, to their king, who deflowered her that best pleased him, and took say before the came unto her husband.  
They which lived near to the Marish Tritonides, did shave the forepart of their head, and did wear their hair long behind: on the other side, the Auses did suffer their hair to grow before, like as time is described. The virgins of this country do every year prepare a combat on the day of Minerva's feast, in honour of that goddess, and they did fight with stones and staves with great eagerness. They that died in this combat were held for corrupted virgins, and she that had carried herself valiantly in the fight, was always honoured by other virgins, who arm her with all pieces, especial, with a bourgognet made after the Corinthian manner, with a crest like unto our morrions, and setting her in a chariot, they did carry her in triumph along the lake of Tritonides.  
The people of this country did cohabite confusedly with women, and as for the children which were borne of such conjunctions, whenas they come to age, they were brought to the assembly of men, where they made choice of him they would remain with, and he was held for their father's and every three months they meet upon this occasion. They were held treacherous and disloyal, yea in such sort as it grew to a proverb, That whenas any one had fasified his faith, and broken his oath, it was sufficient to say that he was a Poenian. They were always subtle, whereof their captain Hannibal hath given sufficient testimony to the Romans: as for courage they wanted not any; but they were full of factions and envy: and this division, with the effeminatnesse which they learned at Capova, was the cause of Hanniballs total ruin.  
The king of Tremisen was not accustomed to speak to any but to the greatest persons of his court, who were afterwards dispatched according to his fancy. He had for his officers a Lieutenant General, who in time of war hath as great authority as the king: a chief Secretary, who did writ an answer in the king's name: a Treasurer, and another which did distribute the treasure according to the king's commandment and pleasure: the fift was the Captain of the port, or rather the lord Steward, who commanded the king's guard: and as for Chamberlains, although he had some, yet they did no service but when the king gave audience, for that in his chamber he was served only by slaves, and by his women and cunuches.   

¶ The Manners at this day.  
THe inhabitants of these countries live for the most part like unto them of the realms of Fez and Morrocco, of whom we have elsewhere made mention. True it is, they apply themselves something to live after the manner of the Turks, who command over them. The Arabians do also live like unto them of whom we have spoken, treating of the Empire of Morrocco.  
They that are borne in the country do not greatly love the Turks, who have authority over them, and if there should grow any combustions or troubles among them, they would be the first that should take arms against the usurpers of their provinces.  
The inhabitants of this country are of a good complexion, endure labour willingly, and grow most commonly to be old, if the end of their days be not advanced by some violent death. They are seldom sick, neither do they much fear it.  
They that live in the province of Bugia are rich, noble, and courteous, and as civil as any that live in the rest of Barbary. They have an ancient custom to paint a black cross upon their jawbones.  
The inhabitants of the country called particularly Tunes, are not very rich, especially the noblemen and gentlemen, who use no kind of traffic. Their manners are like unto those of other provinces; yet they are more studious and given to learning than others: and near unto Carthage they are exceeding proud, although they be of all men most miserable.  
Finally, all the country which lies near unto the sea is full of pirates, who do continually rob and spoil such as they encounter. There are many Christians which be all slaves, and especially in the town of Algiers, whereas they do reckon five and twenty thousand, who retain the humours and manners of the country where they were borne; but live at the discretion of such as have them in their powers.   

¶ The Riches.  
THese countries must needs be rich, seeing that Merchants come thither from all parts, except to Tripoli, which is an ordinary harbour for Pirates, by reason whereof the Venetians and Genevois, who were accustomed to come thither in regard of their traffic, fly from it now as dangerous.  
There are great numbers of merchants to be seen at Constantinople, who cell cloth, wool, oil, silk, linen cloth, and many other things. The Gencuois, and some others, go to Bona to make their traffic of corn and butter; and many of them also go to Tunes in regard of traffic, and in like manner the Venetians, and many merchants of other Nations.  
The town of Algiers hath two ports, the one at Sea, the other at land, whereof the entry yields near a million of gold. The feeding of cattle yields great benefit to the inhabitants of these countries, and the great number of slaves whom they force to labour, yields them an inestimable profit.   

¶ The Religion.  
ALl they that devil in these countries make open profession of Mahomet's law, whereof we will speak more at large in the end, when we shall treat in general of the Turks religion. And as for Christian slaves, they live there in their religion with infinite numbers of miseries, being more roughly used than in the countries of the emperor of Morroco.     

❧ EGYPT, AND THE COUNTRIES OF THE TROGLODYTES NEAR UNTO IT.  

The Contents.  
IN the country of Egypt there are many things as worthy of note as be in the world: but before the Author comes unto them, he sets down the situation of the country, and the divers names wherewith the Ancients have baptized Egypt. Whence the Egyptians have drawn their beginning. The extension of this province in length and breadth. The figure resembling a hand stretched out at length, under what climate, and in what parallel. The sever all divisions which the Ancients have made of these countries, and how in old time it was divided into high and low. The great number of towns, amounting to six and twenty thousand, of the reign of Amasis: the name of the most renowned, amongst which is Siren where there is a deep pit to beseene, in which they can see no shadow whenas t●e Sur●enderss into Cancer. Memphis, famous for the abode of the kings of Egypt, and the nearness of the Pyramids numbered among the seven wonders of the world. The city of Cairo, of a triangular form, the which hath within the circuit thereof a Tower, by the means whereof▪ they foresee the fertility, and future barrenness of all Egypt. Alexandria, a city built in form of a half Moon, where there are goodly Cisterns to be seen, and the ruins of the ancient palaces of Cleopatra, and of king Costa, father to S. Katherine. Two Obiliskes, or Spires, ten fathom high, with other singularities. Damietta, and others. The river of Nile admirable in her name, which in the letters carries the numbers of the days of the year, and famous for her seven mouths, which, overflowing Egypt, makes the land fertile: The spring whereof being unknown to the Ancients, hath been discovered in our time. Among the stately buildings of this realm, are the Sepulchers of their kings, the Obiliskes, the Sphinx, and the Pyramydes. Then follows the consideration of their riches, growing by the abundance of all sorts of grain, cotton, sugar, wines which keep long; Palm trees, Sycamores, Pomegranates, Oranges, the Tamaris, and the Alcana, which the Egyptians use for painting; Metals, the Ametiste, and other precious stones; the Eagle stone, which hath a virtue to discover thieves: and near unto Cairo grows the tree which bears balm. As for the nature and disposition of the Egyptians, and their subtlety of wit, it sufficeth to say, that antiquity hath attributed unto them the invention of sciences. Their women were capable to trade in merchandise, and to do all offices belonging to men; the which they did practise in old time. The rest of the Author's discourse is very notable touching the ancient form of the Egyptians Duels. Their manner of writing from the right hand to the left, and the two sorts of letters which is used, the one sacred, and the other common and profane. The garments of their Priests: their sacrifices, their meats, the feasts, at the end whereof was showed a dead body: the funeral pomps as well royal as particular. The deities which they worshipped under the figures of all sorts of beasts. Their disposition, and manner of living, and their religion at this day. Their laws and ancient customs made touching traffic and theft: and for the marriage of their priests. The authority of their kings, the order which they held to treat of affairs, and their ceremonies in sacrificing a bull unto their gods. Finally, is represented the state of the religion of Egypt at this day, and the manner of living of the Christians, called Cophites, or Christians; of the Girdle.   

SOme ancient Authors would have Egypt to be a distinct part of the world divided from Africa and Asia, betwixt the which they contain it. Others which take Nile for the true bound of Asia and Africa, put a part of this country in Asia, and the other in Africa. But Ptolemy, and many others who have taken the Arabian gulf, or the read sea for a more commodious bound of these two parts, have placed Egypt in Africa.  
It was sometimes called Aerya, Aetia, Potamia, Ogygia, Melambola, Hefestia, Miare, and also Aethiopia, by reason of the Aethiopians which lived there, as Stephen and Eustathius do witness. But the name of Egypt comes from one of their kings, brother to Danaus, or from the river of Nile, which was sometimes called Egypt: or from the people of Merseu, descending from the race of Cham, who according to the testimony of josephus, where called Egyptians. This country hath also received many names and Epytaphes from divers authors, for that Apolodorus calls it the region of the Melampodes, by reason of the great fertility; and according unto Plutarch in Osiris, they gave it the name of Shemia, in the sacred ceremonies of the Egyptians. And it may be, they spoke this word in steed of Shamea, as Ortelius hath wittily observed, by reason of Cham the son of Noah.  
In the sacred book of the Hebrues, this country was called Mesraim, as josephus doth witness, and Chus, if we shall believe Arias Montanus. Whereupon I will not omit to say that the Egyptians have drawn their beginning from Mesraim the son of Chus, who came from Cham the son of Noah. The Arabians call this country Mezre, and the inhabitants Chibit, of his name who first commanded in those quarters. The Turks call them Elchebits, as Pinet reports, or Elquibet, according to Marmolius.  
This province runs a great tract of country from South to North. It hath for bounds upon the West, the deserts of Barze, of Lybia, and Numidia, and the realm of Nubia; upon the South, the country of Bugia, and the river of Nile, as Leo Africanus affirms, for that in this place it winds about something from the West unto the East. But Pliny (who was followed by many in that respect) sets the end of Egypt upon that side near unto the town of Sienna, which they now call Asne. Others say, that upon the South side lie the Cataracts, which are very straight precipes, by the which the Nile falling with great abundance of waters, seems not to flow, but to pour down with a wonderful violence. It hath for bounds upon the East, the deserts of Arabia, which lies betwixt Egypt and the read sea, and all this country is desert, and without any water for the space of eight days journey: upon the North, it joins with our sea, which is called in that place the Egyptian sea, of the country to the which it joins. This shows sufficiently, that the Ancients have call●d that only Egypt, which is watered by the river of Nile, that is to say, the country which is environed with great deserts, beginning at those places which are near unto Sienna unto the Mediterranean sea. And that part which lies on either side of Nile, from Asne unto Alcaire or Cairo, is like unto a band stretched out at length, if you will except the turnings of the river, as Strabo writes, which are very many.  
This figure is made by certain mountains, near unto the which the river running strait an● restrained betwixt them, is never above five hundred stades broad, or about seven and thirty miles, neither doth it carry that breadth in all places: but some modern writers affirm that it is not above seven or eight miles broad, and that sometimes it is so restrained betwixt the mountains, as it carries not above four or five miles in breadth. But from Cairo or near unto it, this river divideth itself into two main branche●, and gives a triangular figure to Egypt, whereof the two sides are channels falling by two passages into the sea, that is to say, upon the right hand to the Pelusian mouth, or of Damietta, and on the left hand to the mouth of Canope, where the town of Rosetta now stands. The Basis of this triangle, is that coast of the Egyptian sea which lies betwixt the mouth of Damiette, and that of Rosetta, which runs in length about three hundred stades, or one hundred sixty and two Italian miles, as Strabo writes, or according unto some others of one hundred and seventy thousand paces: so as the most Northertherly part of Egypt, which they call base Egypt, hath the form of an Island, compassed in by the sea, and those two channels of Nile, and was comprehended under the name of Delta, by ancient Historiographers, Geographers, and Poets, for that it is very like unto this Greek letter.  
This Island hath in circuit, as Strabo doth writ, about three thousand stades, which make three hundred seventy and five Italian miles: yet the modern writers say, that this Delta contains about three hundred miles; for that from the town of Rosetta unto Damiette they accounted one hundred and forty miles, and every channel is seventy miles long. Ptolemy calls this the great Delta, the which he divides into the lesser, and the third, calling the lesser Delta, that which lies betwixt the rivers of Bubastes and Busiris; and the third, is that which is contained betwixt the rivers of Bubastes and Atribe. All in a manner take the length of Egypt, from the town of Asne, unto the Mediterranean sea; and this extent, according unto Pliny, is of five hundred eighty and five thousand paces; but some modern writers say, that it contains about five hundred thousand.  
Leo of Africa extends the length of this country beyond Asne, unto the great and ancient Asne, which is distant from the river of Nile about eighty miles towards the East, and to the South, upon the frontiers of the realm of Nubia, and the inhabitants of Bugia. The same author makes it four hundred and fifty Italian miles long: but for that he makes them longer than he should, it is fit according to the opinion, of some to add a fourth part; so as it would make about five hundred sixty and two ordinary miles.  
It is situated near to the Tropic of Cancer, bending towards the Arctic circle, betwixt the seventh & tenth parallel, especially under the second climate: by reason whereof the longest day in Summer is not above thirteen hours and a half, and in the most Northerly parts, it exceeds not fourteen hours. It lies betwixt the Meridean of Alexandria and Tenesse or Teneze, whereof the first passeth by the one hundred and sixtieth degree and a half, and the other near to the sixty three degree and one quarter. We found in authors divers divisions of this country, for that they which distinguish Asia from Africa by the river of Nile, divide this province into three parts, that is to say, into Egypt of Asia, otherwise called thebaid, and now Seid or Said; into Egypt of Africa, which is that part which lies towards the West; and into base Egypt contained towards the North in the division of Nile, under the form of Delta.  
Egypt was also divided in old time into high and low. They call that part high Egypt which is long and strait, and gins at the Cataracts beyond Sienna upon the frontiers of Aethyopia, and ends near unto Cairo. Base Egypt contains that which is enclosed betwixt the two channels of Nile, from Cairo unto the Mediterranean sea, under the form of the letter Delta, or of a Triangle.  
There are others who divide this province into high, middle, and base, the base they take from the frontiers of Aethiopia, and extend it only unto Antinoe, a town seated upon the Nile, which Leo Africanus calls Anthius; and it is the same with thebaid or the country of Sahid. For the middle Egypt, they take that part which is betwixt the town of Antibe, and the top of the great Delta, which is called Heptapolis and Heptanomia. Base Egypt is according to their opinions the part contained under the figure of Delta, and this was called by the Romans Amgustam-Nica, or Augustamia. I●stinian divides it in his new constitutions into the first and second.  
Finally, Leo Affricanus makes mention of the division of Egypt, which was made when the Mahometans become masters thereof. He divides it into three regions, that is to say, into that of Sahid, which is earthly, the which runs from the countries of Bugia, unto Cairo, and this is high Egypt: Into I●●ifia, which is in the West country of Nile, from Cairo unto Rosette; and into Bechria, or Merennua, which is upon the East part near unto the river of Nile.  
We must also understand, that Egypt was in former times divided by Alexander into divers governments; and that the Romans did afterwards practise the like. Herodotus makes mention of eighteen governments, or Nomes; Strabo nineteen; Ptolemy six and forty; Pliny about fifty; but Ort●lins hath gathered out of divers Authors about sixty six Nomes.  
As for the towns, some have written that in former times there were about six and twenty thousand, whenas Amasis reigned▪ and Diodorus saith, That in his time there were above three thousand. But Ortelius could never found but three hundred, notwithstanding all his care and diligence in this search: so as we must conceive that ancient writers comprehended these bouroughs and villages in this computation: yet we deny not but the Scyrian, Aethiopian, and Roman wars, have ruined many towns. But leaving this dispute, I say, that the most famous of Egypt, were Sienna and Thebes, which was also called Diospolis, Tentyra, Heliopolis, Memphis, Babylon, Alexandria, Pelusim, and some others.  
Sienna, now called Asne, is precisely under the tropic of Cancer. In this place (as Pliny doth witness) they made a very great pit, where th●re is no shadow to be seen whenas the Sun enters into Cancer. The town of Memphis, seated beyond the river of Nile towards the West, was in old time the abode of the princes of Egypt, and the Pyramids (whereof writers make so great mention) are not far from it. Cairo succeeded in the place of this ancient town, and was the ordinary abode of the Sultan's of Egypt. It is true, that many hold that the Cairo is in the same place where in old time Babylon stood: For Belon, who hath been in all those countries, seems to assure that the town, called Babylon by the Ancients, was a little above Cairo. And in truth there are many ruins to be seen, and the remainders of goodly and stately buildings in that place, the which is at this day a village, where there remain good numbers of Christians, Grecians, and Armenians, where there is a chapel to be seen, and a vault under ground, where they say that the blessed Virgin lay hidden with her son our Saviour, whenas she fled out of ju●ie.  
The town of Cairo is more long than broad, and of a triangular form. It is very great, and walled about, but not of all sides, for that the river of Nile borders the greatest part, which serves as a wall. Without the circuit of the walls, there are many buildings, and a fo●t which is in one of the corners like a rock whereas certain stairs were cut out, the abode whereof is wholesome and pleasant: for that, taking view from the windows, they might see the whole country of Egypt. Most of the houses are covered with double slate, by reason of the heat, and the doors are so low and narrow, as they are forced to stoop when they enter into them: yet the houses of great men have great gates, like unto those of Europe. There is in this town a certain Tower, by means whereof they know how fertile it shall be every year in Egypt, observing how much the river of Nile did rise: for there are divers marks by the which they do judge what the harvest will be: for whenas Nile comes to the highest hole, they have abundance of corn; and after this manner they judge of their harvest, according to the height of the water: yet the Baron of Beaweau, in his voyage saith, That it was in Mosque called Elchial, whereas they did measure how m●ch the river of Nile did rise by a pillar which was there; but Palernes in his peregrination saith, That they go and observe the height of this river, in an Island near unto Cairo, whereof we will make mention, speaking of the quality of Egypt.  
There is also within the city of Cairo, a place walled about called Basestan, whereas they cell much silver vessel, cloth of gold and silver, silks, and some rare spices. Multitudes of people flock thither continually, for that whatsoever is rare within the city, is to be seen there. Some report, That this city hath above eighteen miles in circuit, and above four and twenty thousand streets which are chained up every night. There are both within and without the city goodly gardens, the which, beside ordinary herbs, were replenished with canes of Cassia, Tamaris, Palm trees, Sycamores, Oranges, Citrons, and wild Lemons, and also with Canes of Sugar, and the hedges which are about these gardens are full of Chameleons. Above Materea, which is a goodly garden near unto Cairo, there is an Obeliske to be seen, greater than those which are at Alexandria, or that which is to be seen in the Hippodromo at Constantinople.  
As for the Pyramids of Egypt (as Belon reports) they stand in an eminent place, and begin to show themselves forty miles off. The Egyptians (as he saith) call these Pyramids, Pharaons'; and they seem more admirable to them that behold them near hand, than Authors have described them: for the antic works of the Romans, are matters of small moment, in regard of these wonderful masses of stone. They are to be seen in a very desert place, four miles from Cairo, and some three stones cast beyond the river of Nile. The greatest exceeds all the rest in beauty. It hath at the foot three hundred paces in square, which make one thousand two hundred in circuit, and the height thereof may be six hundred foot. The stones whereof it is made, are in a manner equal, three foot long, and two foot broad, and of the same thickness; and although the top seems to be made sharp, by reason of the altitude thereof, yet it is one and twenty foot square.  
The Baron of Beaweau (from whom I have drawn this relation) saith, That entering into it, he first descended some fifty paces, then mounting about forty, he went into an alley that was four foot broad, and five high, and some thirty paces long, the which had at the foot of it a little chamber, some eight paces square, but all ruined, and full of ordure; and returning by the same alley, he saw upon the right hand the mouth of a very great and deep Cistern, then mounting 68 steps, he entered into a very high chamber, garnished with marble, the which was forty foot long, and one and twenty broad, where there was to be seen a great hollow stone of Thebain marble, the which was three or four fingers thick, twelve spans long, and five broad. This stone is of such a substance, as striking thereon with another stone, it sounds as clear as a bell. This was the report of that knight, whereon I will rely, believing that a man of his quality will describe things as they are, and not falsify any thing.  
Belon saith, That it hath steps without, and three hundred twenty four paces upon either side. Moreover, from the basis or foot, unto the top, there are two hundred and fifty degrees, whereof every one is five foot high, reckoning nine inches to the foot. He saith, That the breadth is such, that a good archer being upon the top, and shooting an arrow into the air, it would fall upon the steps, and not pass the foundation. He reports, That the top is plain, and hath two paces in Dyameter, and that fifty men may easily stand thereon.  
I will not speak of the rest, for that were a superfluous curiosity: but I will only say, that, a little beneath the Pyramids, the great Colosse of Sphinx is to be seen, near unto the channel of Nile. I will omit the description, for that Pliny, Herodotus, and some others, have done it sufficiently.  
The town of Alexandria was in former times one of the chief cities of the world; for for that it yielded not unto Rome, in regard of the number of the inhabitants. It is seated (as the Baron of Beaweau reports) in a sandy country, and upon the Sea shore, built like a half Moon, more broad than long, and is divided into old and new. The first is three miles long, having within it (besides many rare things) two mountains of sand that are enclosed. Her ancient walls are yet standing, but within it is little inhabited. All the buildings are hollow, and vaulted underneath, and full of cisterns, the which are supported by pillars of marble, by reason of the necessity of water, for that they have no other but that which is brought from an arm of Nile, called Calis, by certain pipes to fill these cisterns once a year, which is the fifteenth day of August. There are very fair and great streets, in which there are many antiquities and ruins to be seen, among others the ruins of the palace of king Costs, father to S. Katherine, and near unto it six pillars of marble, the which are twenty spans about, and three fathoms high without the ground. There is also to be seen in a street, the place where S. Mark was beheaded, and a church where the Cofites keep the stone upon the which his head was cut off, and the pulpit wherein he preached. There is also a church dedicated to S. Katherine, where there is a square pillar to be seen, upon the which the head of this virgin was cut off.  
Near unto the walls of the port, there are two spires to be seen, almost a like, both graven with Hieroglyphical letters, whereas the one lies all along, and is almost covered with earth; and the other stands ten fathom high without the ground, and hath eleven foot in square. A little 'bove, is the place to be seen, where in old time stood Cleopatra's palace, where she had a gallery which advanced over the sea, as may be seen by the ruins.  
Without the town stands a pillar which Caesar caused to be erected in memory of Pompey's defeat, the which is of marble, and of a reasonable height: the basis and top are eighty foot, and it hath eight and twenty in circuit. As for the new town, it is somewhat more pleasant, seated in a plain, having upon the left hand the old port, the which is defended by a castle of the old town: but by reason of the difficulty, they do no more use it, but sometimes to lodge their galleys and foists.  
Upon the right hand is the new port, the which is nothing but an open road, subject to the Northern winds: but it is defended on either side by two castles, which they call Farilos, whereof the one stands upon a little Peninsula, and hath no other fresh water, but what is brought to it by the town cisterns: the other is right against it; so as all ships must of necessity pass within the shoot of these two castles, and without these two ports the town would be soon abandoned by reason of the bad air.  
The Island of Pharos, which they set right against Alexandria, is no more an Island, as in the time of Caesar and Ptolemy: for this place joins now to the firm land, and hath a castle very incommodious, for that that they are forced daily to carry water upon cammells, which they draw out of the cisterns of Alexandria. Half a days journey from Alexandria, stands Rosetta, a fair town, seated on the river of Nile, about eight miles from the sea. The houses are well built, and enriched with gilding and painting, rare things in those provinces.  
The town of Damietta is also very famous, and seated near to the Miditerranean sea. The ancients called it Pelusium, and it had also the name of Eliopolis, of the prince Elie or Aly who had environed it with three walls, Suidas calls it the key of Egypt: but Ortelius thinks that Pelusium is that which at this day we call Teneze. Besides these towns, there are also others of good note, as Michacle, which is almost as big as Cairo; and Fuca, or Fova, which next unto Cairo is bigger than any of the rest, and right against it, is the Island of Edibeb, which the river of Nile makes in that place. There are also a great number of towns and villages in Egypt, especially near to the river of Nile, which makes them pleasant, and yields them great profit.  
As for villages, if they be far from Nile, the inhabitants have built them in high places to avoid the overflowing of the water. Their houses are built of a thick fat slime or mire, the which is very binding; and their coverings are pointed, yet there are some which are made flat.  
As for the Troglodytes, they held the country which lies beyond the bank of the read sea, upon the right hand of Egypt. Polome calls them Arabians Ichthiophages: and Caftoldus saith that this country is now called Sci●fia; but it seems that the moderns call it Arabia Trogloditica.  
The chief places of this country are Grondal or Corandal, with a reasonable good port. Alcosser or Chozair, which some take for the ancient Berenice of Ptolemy. There the mountains open to give passage to the first-fruits which are brought out of the Abyssines country.  
There is also Suaquen which is the Ptolomais of Mela, according to the opinion of Ortelius. Pliny calls it Epytheras, and Ptolemy thereon. Near unto this town, there is a very good port. The Turk doth commonly entertain a Bassa there, who commands all the country.  
Near unto the read sea, and as it were in the head of the Arabian gulf, stands the town of Suez, which Peter Gilliez, and Belon take for Arsinoe, mentioned by Ptolemy. Zieglerius holds it to be Potidia, according to Strabo: but some others think that it is Hero, or the city of Heros, which did flourish exceedingly in the time of the Ptolomees, and of the Romans, by reason of the abundance of merchandise which was brought thither from the Indies, and Arabia, and transported from thence by Cairo and Alexandria to Egypt: but at this day it is of no great traffic, nor much peopled, by reason of the great difficulty of all things; and yet the Turk hath used all possible means to people it.  

¶ The Quality.  
AeGypt is only watered by the river of Nile, which makes the soil very fruitful. There have been many names given unto this river, for the which they give divers reasons: for Diodorus hath called it Aetoes, that is to say, Eagle, by reason of the swiftness of her course towards the Cataracts. It hath also been called Egypt, of a king of that country, who gave his name both to the realm and river. Festus saith that it was called Melus; and Eustathius and Plutarch, Mela: Cedrens and Epiphanius term it Chrysorrhoas, that is to say, flowing in gold; and Denis gives it the name of Sienna: it was also in old time called Syris, Triton, Diris, Astepe, and Astaboras. In holy writ it is called Sihor or Seor, that is to say, trouble, by reason of the slime and mud which it carries with it into Egypt; and it also gives it the name of Gehon, and of Phison.  
The Egyptians have called it Noym: the Abyssins', Tacui, according to Barius, or Abanhi, as Martian writes; the Africans, Nile; and they of the country, Taccasij, and Abanhi. There are divers opinions touching the spring of this river, and all are very uncertain. But at this day it is certainly known that it comes not from the mountains of the Moon, as Ptolemy assures, but from a very great lake called Zaire, the which is in high Aethiopia, betwixt the realm of Congo or Manicongo, and the country of Monimotapa or Benimotapa, under the eleventh degree, or the height of the Pole Antarctic and it is most certain, that this river flowing through many countries with sundry turnings serpent wise, make a great number of Islands, whereof the greatest is that of Meroe. But when it enters into Egypt, it runs betwixt the mountains which restrains it of either side, than it makes the Delta, having spread itself abroad by many straits and valleys: for as far as the mountains extend themselves, and are distant one from another; so much doth the river extend itself, or grows narrower, and makes the habitable country of a divers form, and then again it dilates itself over the champain fields, taking again her natural course.  
The river of Nile, whilst it runs along Egypt, is very like to the river of Po, especially from Ferrara unto the mouth of it; for they may easily pass both upon the one and the other with full sails both upward and downward.  
Ancient authors do not agreed touching the mouths of Nile: for some will have seven, as Mela, Strabo, Diodorus, and Herodotus: others nine, with Ptolemy, and Pliny eleven. But the Moderns assure that there are but three or four, as William of Tier, and Peter Belon, who report what they have seen, and in like manner some others: for it divides itself into four branches four miles from Cairo, whereof two make the two chief and navigable mouths, that is to say, the one Damietta, and the other of Rosetta: yet when it overflows, many brooks, into the which the river is divided, are navigable. But in another season great vessels cannot pass, by reason of the marshes and and sands, but they may only be waded through. Finally this river is wonderful fruitful, for that it breeds very excellent fish, and moreover beasts, and fearful monsters, as Horses, Sea-calues, Crocodiles and others, which do much harm to men. They say that there is no wind upon this river, and that the water is sweeter than any other in the world: It may be the reason is for that it is much inflamed with heat, and by that means not too thick, but more subtle, or else by reason of her long course; for they hold that there is not any river in the world that flows by so great a tract of land.  
Some report, that Nile written in Greek, expressing the number which every Letter is valued at, contains the whole number of the days of the year, after this manner: N. 50, E. 5, 1. 10, λ. 30, O. 70, σ. 200.  
The overflowing of Egypt gins about the seventeenth of june, at what time the river gins to rise, and continueth forty days together, and did fall during the like time. This happeneth whenas Aethiopia, which is above Egypt, hath greatest store of rain, especially in the farther mountains; and when this rain is past, the overflowing seizeth, and it retires itself. And in truth it is an admirabe thing to see the rising of this river, whenas all others fall, and to see it decrease whenas others begin to swell. During the time of her increase, unto the end of her fall, all the towns of Egypt are like unto Islands, for that they are situated upon high places, to the end that the overflowing of Nile should not annoyed them: so as no man can pass but by boat, or the art of swimming; and at this time in a manner all kind of wild beasts that come there are drowned, and such as can escape, save themselves by retiring unto hills: As for ●ame cattle, which they keep at that time in stables, they are fed by their masters, who hath made provision for the feeding of them. Finally, for that the rising of Nile hath been sometimes less, it may be conceived that in time it will be nothing, and that the banks will equal the height of the river.  
There are some which hold, (according to the testimony of Strabo) That Egypt was in former times drowned by the Sea, unto the marshes near unto Pelusium, and to the mountains of Cassia, and Serbonides; but by the means of Nile, which did continually bring slime and mud with her inundation, it become as we now see it. And the reason which confirms this opinion, is, that a great number of shells are found in the sand.  
The country of Egypt is plain, low, and without mountains; so as they cannot see far. The air is hot and offensive; so as to avoid the insupportable heat in Summer, and to have some fresh air and wind, the inhabitants are accustomed (as Leo Affricanus reports) to build very high Towers in all their towns, which have both above and below a door right against their houses; so as the wind comes both from below, and from the top: yet this province is not subject to the Southern winds, which are hottest, like unto the rest of Africa; but it is chiefly exposed to the Southern winds, the which are moist there, whereas in other countries they dry.  
The country is not subject to Earthquakes, not to rain, whereof they have not any need, for that the land is every year fattened with the overflowing of the river of Nile. And if it happens to rain, the which is very seldom, it causeth diseases, as Catharres, Fevers, swelling of the cods, and other sicknesses. Finally, the country is exceeding fertile, by reason of the overflowing of Nile; for want whereof, the dearth is very great. They have digged many pits, to the end that such towns as are far from Nile, in the midst of the province, should never be unfurnished of water, whenas the river ritires itself. Trogus makes mention, that the country of Egypt is so fertile, as there is not any one that yields so great abundance of all things necessary for the life of man. Therefore many of the Ancients have called Egypt, the Storehouse of the earth; and Pliny assures, that the greatness of the Roman empire could not long continued without the come and wealth of Egypt; for that the plenty or famine of the people of Rome depended upon the river of Nile. He saith also, That the country of Egypt doth so abound with herbs good to eat, as they may the more easily forbear corn. The riches of Egypt may sooner be admired, than valued, if we consider the magnificence and pride of the tombs and monuments of kings, the Labyrinths, the Obiliskes, the Pyramids, and the Sphynx, which were finished with an incredible charge.  
This province abounds with all sorts of grains, & pulses. It hath good pastures in every place, and abundance of Olive trees: yet high Egypt, or the country of Sahid, exceeds all the rest in abundance of pulses, and flax, and in store of cattles, hens, and geese. That part of base Egypt which lies towards the East, the which is called Errife, yields abundance of fruit, Barley, and Rice; and the Western part yields great store of cotton, and sugar. They go to their harvest in this country, in the beginning of April, and presently they thrash their corn, so as by the twentieth of May, there is not an ear to cut. The fields about Nile, for the most part (as Belon reports) are full of Rice, and Canes of Sugar. But beyond the banks of Nile, they have some difficulty to trim and entertain their gardens, for that they are forced, with certain vessels that their oxen carry, to bring water continually for the watering of them.  
Besides their herbs and corn, there is very good wine, and great abundance in divers places; for that near unto the Lake called Meotides, they gather excellent good wine, which keeps very long: but they have no great store of Oil, nor underwoods; and they have little other timber but Palm trees, which are not worth any thing for building. These Palm Trees grow wonderful high throughout all the country of Aegyt, and there hath been seen (as Belon makes mention) coming out of one body, twenty great trees separated. Besides these Palm trees, their gardens are replenished with Sycamores, Cassia, Pomegranates, Oranges, and Tamaris; whereof the greatest part grow exceeding high: but the Tamaris comes not but when it is sowed, and it grows as well in dry as moist ground, as for Sycamores, they are so green, as they exceed all other trees in greenness.  
They have also carefully maintained a shrub called Alcana, whereof there are underwoods': The leaves are of a yellow colour when they are dried, wherewith the women that live in the Turks country, die their hands and feet, and a part of their hair. There is also great store of sweet smelling flowers; for that Plime doth also give precious perfumes to Egypt, yet he affirms, That their flowers do not commonly smell very well, for that the air is full of fogs, by reason of the nearness of the river of Nile.  
Besides cruel and hurtful beasts, wherewith the country abounds, it doth breed a great number of tame cattle, as Bugles, Oxen, Camels, Horses, Asses, Sheep, and Goats; all which grow very great, by reason of the temperature of the air, the abundance of pasture, & sweetness of the seed, being watered by the river of Nile. Among other cattle, there are sheep, exceeding great and fat, which have thick tails hanging down to the ground, and their wool is black. And for that the country is very moorish in Winter, there breed many fowl, especially Storks, whereof the country is so full, as in some grassy places watered by the river of Nile, the fields are in a manner all covered. There breeds also in this country such abundance of frogs, as if the Storks did not devour them, there would be nothing else seen. There are many Chameleons, as Belon writes, the which are found among the shrubs, and live not of the wind, as many have written; yet they will continued a whole year together without eating any kind of sustenance.  
The hens do not use to hatch or discover their chickens in any part of Egypt, and therefore they use the heat of furnaces. Moreover, this country hath always abounded in metals, especially in those places which are near unto Aethiopia; and the Amethyste, with many other precious stones, grow there. They do also found great store of the Eagle stone, called Actites, near unto Alexandria, wherewith they may lad whole ships; and these stones have this special virtue, to 'cause thieves to be discovered and surprised, as Belon notes in his observations.  
The women of Egypt are very fruitful for the procreation of children, insomuch as many times they have three or four at a birth, and it hath been observed, that the children which were borne in that country, in the eighth month, are not in danger of death, as in other places.  
Near unto Cairo, and in a place called Materea, they found a tree which bears balm; and about Alexandria, they have a great number of a certain kind of goats which they call Gazelles; they have also many Pomegranates, Lemons, Oranges, Citrons, Figs, cherries, and other kinds of first-fruits which we have in these countries. They found also about Alexandria great store of pulses, rice and barley. It is true that this soil would be barren if the inhabitants were not very careful to manure it; and especially in those places which were far from the river of Nile, being forced to bring water with their oxen and by other means.  
The Island of Edibeb abounds in canes of sugar, sycamores, palm trees, all sorts of pulses, and rice. As for Arabia Trogloditica, it is a barren country, sandy, desert, and not manured, and also little inhabited, by reason that they recover water with great difficulty. And touching the town of Suez, there is not any water within two mile's compass round about: for they dig their water out of a certain pit the which is two miles distant from the town, the which they carry upon cammells, but it is somewhat bitter and salt.   

¶ The Manners of the ancient.  
THe Egyptians have been always very ingenious and witty; so as Macrobius calls Egypt the mother of arts; for that the inhabitants of this country have invented Geometry, Arithmetic, Physic, and other arts. They were first of all given to the observation of the stars, to negromancy, and Sorcery.  
They were the first of all which invented the names of twelve gods, and which did erect Altars, Idols, and Temples, and who set the figures of beasts in their statues: the which shows plainly, that undoubtedly they took their beginning from the Aethiopians, who first of all brought all these things into the world, as Diodorus Sicilus reports.  
The women of Egypt did in old time use the trade of merchandise, keep taverns, and did all offices belonging to men; whereas their husbands were idle, and kept their houses, and if there were any burdens to be borne, the men set them upon their heads, and the women upon their shoulders. The men sat down to make water, and the women on the other side stood right up; they went to do their business in their houses, and did feast it in the open streets.  
No woman of Egypt might be a priest in the Temple of any of their gods or goddesses. And as for the Egyptians they were never consecrated to any particular god, but to all together. They had a sovereign Bishop chosen from among the priests, who at his decease left his son to succeed him in his dignity and sovereign priesthood. The legitimate children, according to the law of the country, did not refuse to nourish their parents, whereunto they were not forced, whereas the women were constrained, if by chance they were unwilling thereunto.  
There have been many other people whose custom hath been in mourning and lamenting for the dead, to cover their heads with dirt, & to suffer their beards and hair to grow: but the Egyptians did paul their hair, and cut their beards, and did knead paste with their hands and feet, and some say that they first of all brought in circumcision among men. It is the opinion of ancient Greek authors, who were ignorant of the sacred history of the jews.  
They did writ from the right hand to the left, like unto the Hebrews, Arabians, Turks, and Persians. The women did carry but one single robe, and the men, as more delicate and effeminate, had two. They used also two kinds of letters, the one was sacred, and the other common and allowed to all men: but this latter was drawn from the Ethyopians. The priests were bound to shave all their body every three days, to the end they might not carry any filthiness into the temple and sacrifice. They did wear garments of linen cloth new washed, white and clean, saying, that they did cut the foreskin to be more neat, and that it was more seemly to be without filthiness, than in any other sort whatsoever. They had shoes made of a certain wood which they call papier.  
They did not sow any beans in Egypt, neither was it lawful for any one of them to eat any if by chance they were brought thither from any other country: yea the priests were forbidden to look on them, for that they held an opinion that this kind of pulse was impure. Their custom was to wash themselves daily in cold water, many times thrice a day, and twice in the night. The Egyptian sacrificers did never eat the heads of any beasts that had been sacrificed, but they did first curse them with strange execrations, and with cruel and abominable words, than they sold them to the first stranger that came, or if they found no merchant to buy them, than they cast them into the river of Nile.  
All the Egyptians did sacrifice oxen, bulls, and calves: but is was forbidden to sacrifice any kine or heifers; for that they were dedicated to the goddess Isis, to whom they bore a particular honour. They did live of dry bread and used beer, for that they had no wine growing: they did also eat fish sometimes raw, and sometimes dried in the Sun, or salted, and in their pickle. They did also eat foul raw and salted, and the richest among them did eat quails, and mallards, the which they held for their greatest dainties.  
Whenas they met at any feast, and the banquet ended, some brought in a dead body made of wood, or otherwise exceedingly well represented being about two fathoms long, which figure was showed to every one that assisted at the feast, saying, eat, and drink, and behold this; for having lived at thine ease, thou shalt be like unto him after thy death. Whenas young men met with any that were more advanced with age, they went out of the way to let them pass, and seeing them to come into any assembly, they did rise to give them place: and whenas they encountered in the streets, they saluted one another without any speech, stretching forth their hands, and bending down unto their knees. They did wear garments of linen cloth fringed at their sleeves, the which they called Calasires, casting white cloaks upon them to cover them: for they were forbidden to wear garments of wool whenas they entered into their temples, neither durst they bury them with any dead body.  
They were very sober, for they did never set any thing upon the table, but a piece of veal and a goose, and there was a certain measure of wine appointed for every one, to the end they should not fill their bellies more than were fit, nor drink until they were drunk.  
Their kings carried themselves so mildly unto their subjects, as they did win the hearts and love of all men; so as not only the priests, but all others were more careful of the preservation and the prosperity of their king, than of themselves, their wives, and children. Whenas the king died, it was a pitiful thing to see their general lamentation, tearing their garments, and shutting up their Temples, going neither to fairs nor markets, nor solemnising any feast, defiling their heads with dirt, for the space of two months, and twelve days, carrying a linen cloth bound about their arms, and in this manner twice a day there met two or three hundred men and women to renew their mournings and complaints, singing in verse the virtues and holy life of their king who was dead.  
During all this time, they did not eat any meat that was roasted, and they did abstain from wine, and from all kinds of dainty meats. They did not wash nor anoint themselves, neither did they lie in any bed, nor had the company of their wives, but during all this time they went and lamented very much for their king, as if their own children had been dead. During all this time, they prepared the funeral pomp, and the last day, the body was carried before the door, and to the entry of the Tomb or Sepuchre, where they did repeat an Abridgement or summary of the life and actions of the deceased king, and then it was lawful for every man to accuse him.  
The sacrificers did also assist in that place, and did commend the forepast life of him, whose body lay exposed to the view of the people; who allowed that which was commendable with clapping of their hands & great acclamations, rejecting with a troublesome noise, those things which displeased them in the discourse of his life. This hath often been the cause that many kings whom the people hated, and wose actions were distasteful unto them, hearing the discourse made, were deprived of the honour of their obsequies, and the pompo accustomed at the funerals of kings. And this fear caused many of them to live justly, for that they were assured the people would not fail to dishonour them, and deny their bodies these last offices.  
Finally, the Egyptians have been the most superstitious, or rather the most ridiculous of all the Idolaters, for that not content with the statues or images of men, they have worshipped beasts both alive and dead, as Cats, Dogs, Rats, Sparrow-hawkes, Goats, Wolves, Crocodiles, and a great number of other beasts. And they were so voided of shame to make public profession of this folly and beastliness, as contrariwise they held it worthy of praise and honour, whenas they practised this villainous Idolatry. They carried the figures and representations of these beasts about their towns and villages, showing them a far off as their preserving gods, which they should honour. Whenas any one of these gods of the Egyptians died, they put it into a fair linen cloth, salting it with great cries and lamentations, and beating their breasts strangely; then anointing it with the juice of Cedar, and other precious and arromaticall drugs, they interred it in a certain place appointed to that effect, to the end that the dead carcase should not suddenly dissolve. If any man did kill any one of these beasts, there was no means to save his life, for that the people flocking together, did murder him most cruelly, never expecting how justice would determine or censure of him: The fear which many had to be thus ill entreated, made them whenas they saw any one of these beasts dead, to fly far from it, deeply lamenting this loss, and making it known that it came not by any fault of his.  
The charge of feeding these beastly gods was given to men of quality, who carried themselves carefully, and entertained them with great charges, for that their food was a kind of delicate drink made of a certain grain, and broth composed of wheat flower, and they had also for these beasts, other meats made with milk, and besides that, they did set before them geese, both boiled and roasted, to satisfy them. They gave to them that lived, raw flesh, and birds taken with nets or otherwise, and to be short, they employed much money, and a great deal of toil, to entertain them.  
They were so foolish, as seeing these beasts to die, they wept, and mourned heavily, with shows of contrition, as if their children had been deceased, and they did inter them with much charge and state: so as in the time of Ptolemy, surnamed Lagus king of Egypt, an ox being dead at Memphys of mere age, he that had the charge to feed him, spent in his funerals a great sum of money which he had received for his feeding; and moreover, he borrowed of the king fifty talents of silver to furnish the charge of these ridiculous obsequies.  
As for the honours which they performed to dead men, the Egyptians did also exceed in that charge, for as soon as any one was dead, the friends and kinsfolks of the deceased coming together, covered their heads with dirt, and went about the town lamenting and weeping continually, until the body were interred. During this time, they never washed themselves as of custom, neither did they drink any wine, nor eat any delicate thing, and the apparel which they used, was of small value. Their interments were of three sorts or kinds, the one sumptuous, the second mean, and the third of small importance. In the first, they employed a talon of silver: in the second, twenty mines: and the third was performed with so little charge, as it deserves not to be spoken of. They that had the charge of funerals, as being borne and bred up to it from their youth, carried the rolls of their charges, to inquire of the parents of the deceased, how much they would spend, and when they had agreed upon the price, they delivered the body, to the end that the preparations of the obsequies might be made according to their agreement. First, the Register or Scribe, having laid the body upon the bore ground, did mark upon the hip, how far they should lance or cut the body upon the left side. He that had charge to make the incision, taking an Aethiopian stone, did lance the dead body, and then fled suddenly and speedily away, being followed by the assistants, who cursed him, and threw stones at him, as if he had committed some crime, for that they were of opinion that he which had thus opened the body of any man, had some secret hatred against the deceased. They that did embalm the body, were held amongst them for men of note and esteem, and might frequent the Temples, and converse with the sacrificing Priests. Whenas these were near unto the body, they did open all the bowels, except the heart, and the kidneys; and suddenly another washed that place with Phenetian wine, into the which they did put odoriferous things; then they did first anoint the body with the juice of Cedar, and then with divers arromaticall things for the space of a month, or more: and not content to have embalmed it after this sort, they made an infusion of Myrrh, Cinnamon, and other spices, as well to preserve the body long from corruption, as also to give it a good smell.  
The body being embalmed after this manner, they delivered it unto his kinsfolks, having first so placed every part and member of the body, even the eye brows, as it might be taken for a sleeping man. After this, they began the discourse of his life from his infancy, and related his pieties towards the gods, his knowledge, the innocency of his manners; then coming to his perfect age, his religion, his justice, his integrity, his continency, and his wisdom. Which done, they did call upon the infernal gods, entreating them to place the dead body in the rank of the happy. The people made answer to those prayers, much commending the dead, as he that enjoyed the happiness of fortune at souls. Every man did inter his dead body in his own Sepulchre: As for such as had no particular place, they put them in their houses in the strongest walls there was, setting the coffin right up, and walling it with masons work, to the end that the successors growing rich, and performing their duty in paying what was due for the deceased, they might have means to inter it honourably.  
Whenas they borrowed any money, they were accustomed to lay the bodies of their kinsfolks in pawn; and if they failed to redeem them, it was a great infamy unto them; and moreover, they themselves were deprived of burial.  
To conclude this discourse, the Egyptians held themselves to be all gentlemen, and were in former times very slothful, delicate, inconstant, bragger's, great talkers, and of little truth in their discourses. They were naturally proud, furious, and more fit for mutinies and innovasions than to execute any thing well. They were injurious, and nothing valiant, ignorant of the laws, and above all, could not endure the command of strangers. They were so subject to mutinies and seditions, and to suffer themselves to be transported, as they have raised great combustions for very light causes.   

¶ The manners at this day.  
THere are few remaining at this day of the right Egyptians, being reduced to a handful of Christians, and the rest following Mahomet's law, are mixed among the Africans, and the Arabians: for the ancient nobility of Egypt, who had retired themselves into maritime places, after that the Roman empire was transported into Greece, they went into the heart of the country, into the province of Sahid, or high Egypt, whenas the Mahometans invaded the country: yet there is not any nation that retains more some marks of their antiquity; for that they do at this day within their towns wear garments like unto those which ancient Authors have described. They that live in towns are of a colour inclining to white; but the country people are exceeding tanned and swart: for the most part they are good, full of freedom, and pleasant in their conversations. But the inhabitants of base Egypt exceed them of the higher part, in civility: for that part which is in the heart of the province, is not much frequented by strangers unless it be by a small number of Aethiopians: but in the other which runs along the Sea coast, there frequent many men from Europe, Barbary, and Assyria. They are pleasant above all other nations, and were always inclined to dancing and tumbling. They wear straight garments sowed together before, and which hung down to their heels, having very straight sleeves: yet in Summer, they wear a kind of cotton linen cloth of divers colours; and in Winter, of woollen cloth, whereof the ground is cotton: yet chants and rich burgesses make their garments most commonly of some cloth that comes out of Europe. Every man wears a turban upon his head, the which in their vulgar tongue they call Dulipan: and by this attire they distinguish men of divers sects in Egypt, as also in other countries which are under the great Turk's obedince. They do also use the ancient breeches of Egypt. The women never show themselves in public, but their faces are covered, as in all Turkey.  
Leo Africanus saith that they do often use for their meat new cheese and very salt, sour milk, and hardened after some sort, the which although they hold for one of their greatest dainties, yet strangers cannot endure the taste of it; and the greatest inconvenience is, for them that come amongst them, that they do most commonly mingle that sour milk with all their meat. They make their houses so low, as they seem fit for ducks than men; for that most commonly they do lie and feed under trees especially under palm trees, to the end they may refresh themselves with the wind that blows: for the Egyptians and Arabians above all the nations in the world take delight to lie abroad upon the ground in the night, having nothing but a gown to cover them.  
They are exceeding good swimmers, and become such by constraint: for that whenas the country is all covered with the water of the river of Nile, they are forced to pass from village to village to do their business, or else use small boats as many do. They of Alexandria, and many other towns of Egypt do naturally speak the Arabian tongue of Africa: but the Turks which are mingled amongst them do use a very different language.  
As for the Troglodytes, they are commonly rude, barbarous, and exceeding poor: but besides the originaries, there are many Mahometan Turks and Arabians which dwell in this province.   

¶ The ancient Government.  
ALI the country of Egypt was in old time divided into divers parts and governments, and either had a governor, who took care of all that was requisite for the managing of affairs. The revenue, demesnes, and tribute was divided into three parts or lots, whereof the first was for the sacrificers, who were wonderfully honoured among the people, both for that they were consecrated unto the gods, and had the charge of sacred things, as also for their singular learning, for the which many were advanced.  
They distributed this revenue unto the priests to be employed in sacrifices and ornaments of Temples, and to relieve such as were in necessity, and had need of some assistance. For the Egyptians did not forget any thing that might serve for the ceremonies of their gods, and they held it unfit to leave them without support and entertainment, who imparted knowledge unto them, and did assist them with counsel, for the profit and advantage of the commonweal: they were always called to counsel, and to the conclusion of their most important affairs; for that they did provide for things to come, and did foretell the future success, either by the means of Astrology, or by the inspection of the sacrifices which were offered: moreover being perfect in Histories, they related the deeds of the ancient, to the end their kings seeing them, might take advice and council of what they had to do.  
The Egyptians did not follow the custom of the Grecians, who would have but one man or one woman precide over sacred things: for that many had the same honour, and gave themselves to the service of the gods, leaving the same charge to their children by inheritance. These persons were freed from all taxes and subsidies, and were honoured above all others in the realm next unto the king.  
The other portion of the revenues of the realm was for the king, who employed it for the charges of the war, and entertainment of his house, and did distribute bountifully to men of valour and worth, giving to every man according to his merit: whereby the people were not burdened with any extraordinary tribute, for that the soldiers were entertained or recompensed with the third part of the revenues, the which was ordained, to the end they should the more willingly expose themselves to all dangers and hazards for the public good.  
Their common weal was also divided into three Estates, for the service and support of the whole body, that is to say, into labourers, shepherds, and artisans. The first having taken to farmeatan under rate the lands of the king, priests, or soldiers, employed themselves from their youth in tillage, wherein continually they spent the remainder of their days; whereby they proved the best husbandmen in the world, whether it were by nature, or that they had it by succession from their ancestors, or that long experience had made them so perfect.  
The shepherds busied themselves in no other thing but to govern their troops, as they had learned of their predecessors, spending the rest of their lives in that exercise.  
As for the artisans, without doubt mechanic arts were brought to perfection in Egypt, for that they meddled with no other thing but what the law did allow them, and what they had learned and received from their ancestors, and they were not admitted to the managing of public affairs: so as neither the troublesomeness of him under whom they had passed their apprenticeship, nor the ambition of honours, could hinder them from attaining to a perfect knowledge of that which they sought.  
Their judgements were not rashly given, but with great discretion, believing that good deeds were of great consequence for the public good. They held an opinion that the true means to root out wickedness, was to punish the wicked, support the afflicted, and to have pity of such as were reduced to any extremity and misery, and that contrariwise all was in confusion and disorder, if through favour or rewards they suffered faults which deserved death to be unpunished: for this cause in the cities of Memphis, Heliopolis, Ceres, Messer, and Thebes, they did choose men of good reputation to be their judges, whose decrees were as just as those of the Areopagites of Athens. These being created thirty in number, did choose him for Precedent and chief of the Council, whom they knew to be most virtuous and wise, & the assembly did put another Counsellor or Assistant in his place, to the end the number might be perfect. These were entertained with great charge, but above all, they gave a goodly estate to the Precedent, who did wear a chain of gold with a medaile enriched with stones, in the which was the image of truth, whereby they gave to understand that truth should guide the prince's heart in all his judgements.  
A decree being drawn upon any point, and the image of truth laid before, they brought the books of the laws, being eight in number, lest they should stray from justice in the case propounded: and the custom was, that whosoever did accuse any one of a crime, he should deliver it in writing, and set down in particular how it had been done, and how prejudicial he held the offence to be.  
They gave unto the accused a sufficient time to make answer to every one of the accusers articles, the which he did set down in writing before the judges; and then he denied the fact, or alleged reasons to justify himself, or did show that his offence did not deserve so great a punishment or fine as that which his accuser had propounded. The judges having heard both parties twice, and the matter being propounded in council, and all matters debated and concluded, the Precedent turning the image of truth towards the party which had most right, pronounced the sentence of that which was in question, and this was their ancient manner of pleading and giving judgement in Egypt.  
And for that we have spoken of the laws and ordinances in general, it shall not be unfit to examine in particular the ancient statutes of this people, to the end we may know how much they exceed all others in the well managing of affairs, and whether their order were not better and more profitable.  
First of all, he that did take an oath and forswear himself, was without remission put to death, as convicted of a double crime, for that he did not observe the respect which he aught unto the gods, and had broken his faith, which is a strict and great bond to entertain human society. He that seeing any passenger stripped and rob, and did not seek to aid him, or to hinder his death, or the loss of that which he carried if he might do it, was without remission put to death; and whenas he could not relieve him, he was bound to declare the fact, and the thieves names which had committed the crime, if he knew them; wherein if he failed, he was brought in question, and had a certain number of stripes, and was kept three days in prison without meat. He that accused any one falsely, being convicted of slander, suffered the like punishment which the accused should have done, if his deposition had been found true.  
The Egyptians were forced by the law to deliver their names in writing to the precedent, and also to declare unto him the course of their lives; and if any one were found false, or that he lived of some filthy gain, contrary to the laws, he was put to death by justice. If any one had wilfully slain a man of a free condition, or else a slave, without any just subject, without any delay he was put to death by the law, the which had no regard unto the condition of the murderer, but unto justice, to the end that men might be diverted from doing wrong one unto another, and that in punishing the murder committed in the person of a slave, the life of free men might be more secure.  
The lawgivers of the Egyptians had ordained no punishment against fathers that should kill their children; but they were only enjoined to remain continually three days and three nights by the dead body; and to the end they should not fail therein, they set men to guard them. They used this mild kind of judgement, for that they held it an unjust thing to make him lose his life that had given it unto his son, and they thought it a more reasonable thing to punish him by a just grief, and repentance of his rash choler, than by any other torment, which would be light unto him in regard of this sorrow, which would make his life troublesome and worse in death. But if any one were so unnatural as to kill his father, they had ordained a cruel punishment; for, after they had pricked and sliced him with bodkins, and pen-knives, and with sharp Canes, they caused him to be burnt alive, holding it (as indeed it is) for the most detestable and unhuman crime in the world, to deprive him of life, of whom he held his being, preservation, and originary breeding.  
Whenas any woman condemned to die was with child, they attended the time of her delivery, for that they held it a great injustice, if with this offendresse they should punish an innocent infant, as if they should put two persons to death for one fault. As for their laws and ordinances concerning wars, they were these: He that abandoned his rank in battle, or refused to obey his Captain, was held infamous, cassiered, and deprived of all honour and hope of reward, and he was forbidden ever to carry arms, or to return to his first exercise. This law invited men to do well, and to fear a note so shameful, and full of ignominy, more than horrid death.  
They that discovered any secrets unto the enemy, and practised with them, had by virtue of the law their tongues cut out; and whosoever did clip or sergeant any coin, change or spoil weights or measures, falsify signatures, and sergeant writings, or corrupt schedules, instruments, or public arts, had both his hands cut off, to the end that the member which had offended, might feel the punishment, and that others taking example thereby, might fear to commit the like error.  
The laws proceeded very rigorously against them that forgot themselves to women, for that he that forced a woman of a free condition, was gelt, and deprived of his privities; for that, in doing this wrong, he had committed three great and strange offences, that is to say, the outrage, the rape, and the corruption of another man's wife, and withal, had caused a confusion and mixture of bastards with legitimat and lawful children. He that was surprised in adultery, without violence, was condemned and doomed to have a thousand blows with rods, and the woman was censured to have her nose cut off, to the end that by the mutilation of that member, she might be punished in that part which is one of the goodliest ornaments of the face.  
As for laws and ordinances made touching traffic and commerce, they hold that Baccorides was the Author. These laws did infer, that if any one did deny the receipt of money which had been lent him without bill, the lender should be credited upon his simple oath; for that the Egyptian made great account of the solemnity of oaths, as of a holy and religious thing: And therefore, as they did hardly give credit to those that swore often, and upon every light and trivial occasion, so they were very careful that good men should not be often forced to sweere, lest they should lose the reputation of their wisdom.  
It was in like manner ordained, That it should not be held reasonable, to believe him, who had borrowed without bill, whenas he should swear in his own cause. The Lawgiver would not that usury, promised by writing, should equal the moiety of that which had been lent; and he ordained, That the payment should only be taken upon the debtor's goods, and that his person should not be arrested and put in prison, nor yet made a slave, for that they held it sufficient that his goods should be subject to the bond, and that the bodies of citizens were bound to the Commonweal, who would employ them both in the time of peace and war: for he held it an unfit thing, that soldiers, which did venture their lives for the preservation and good of their country, should be imprisoned for debt.  
The Egyptians had another law touching theft, which was, That whosoever had resolved to practise it, should 'cause himself to be enrolled in the Register of the sacrificing Priests, and carry the thing stolen unto him, as soon as ever the theft was committed; and on the other side, he that had lost any thing, must come and set down before the same judge, the day, and hour of his loss: by this means, thefts were easily discovered, and he that had lost, recovered his goods again, only the fourth part was allotted for the thief, to punish him that had been so careless to keep his own, for that the Lawgiver held that it was better to lose a part, than all the things which were pilfered or stolen.  
The Egyptian priests did marry one only wife: others had as many as they would or could maintain. At that time there was not any among them held a bastard, although he were begotten of some slave; for that they held the father to be the only Author of the generation, and the mother did serve but to receive the seed, and to give it nourishment, which was of no great charge, for that they fed their children with roots of reeds, and other things which they boiled upon the embers; or else they gave them certain herbs which grew in the marshes, the which they boiled or laid upon the coals, and sometimes they gave them raw. They made their children to go barefooted, and most commonly without garments; wherein they were favoured by the temperature of the air of that province. Finally, all the parents expense in the education of their children until they came to age, could not cost twenty Drachmas, or at the lest did not exceed that sum.  
The Priests instructed their children in learning, both sacred and profane, and especially Geometry, and Arithmetic: as for fencing and wrestling, they would not have them practise it, for that those exercises were too violent and dangerous, if they should therein exercise their bodies being yet so tender.  
They which traveled or went to the war, were entertained without any charge, if they fell sick, for that physicians had their wages from the Commonweal, and were bound by the law to have a care of sick persons and to cure them, following the ordinances, receipts, and writings of the Ancients of that art, who were in authority and reputation among them. If the physician, having followed the rules of the sacred Book, could not cure the sick person, he was not accused of his death; but if he recovered him by other remedies or medicaments, he was put to death without remission: for that they held, that the order to physic a sick person, which had been long before observed by physicians, and invented with much pain by the Ancients, was far better than any new receipts.  
As for the kings of Egypt, they did not abuse their power and authority so licentiously, as the princes of other nations, who had nothing but their own will (as a man may term it) for a law; for that they were forced in all things to govern themselves according to the laws and statutes of the country, as Diodorus writes in his second book. They that were of the king's train, and who served him commonly, were no slaves (were they strangers, or borne & bred up in their houses) but the children of gentlemen priests, who exceeded the age of twenty years, and should be more learned and better taught than all others, to the end the king might be invited, by the presence of his servants so full of virtue, not to do any thing that might be blame worthy, for that they assisted him day and night, and did observe his actions.  
There were certain hours appointed both by day and night, wherein the law allowed the king to treat of affairs; for that in the morning he received letters, petitions, and other memorials of that which was to be done, to the end that making answer to all, he might provide for every thing in due time, and according unto justice. This done, being accompanied by a troop of men that were of ripe age, and discreet, he washed his body, then being richly attired, he went to make his prayers to the gods, and to offer sacrifice in the temple, whither being come, having brought the beasts that were appointed for the sacrifice to the corner of the altar, the priest in the presence of the king, and all the people hearing him, wished him a long and happy life, so as he carried himself mildly and justly to his subjects. After his prayers, he began to discourse of the king's virtues, showing how much he honoured the gods, loved men, and was just, wise, chaste, true, magnanimous, and liberal. If any error were committed in the government, he purged and excused the king, laying it upon his officers, who had given him false instructions, and counseled him ill, contrary to the law and justice. This done, the priest exhorted the king to live well, and by this means to make himself pleasing unto the gods, and he counseled him to follow the advice of such as propounded virtue, and those exercises which made the life of man glorious.  
In the end, the king having sacrificed a bull unto his gods, the priests reading the memorable deeds and sayings of the most famous men, he exhorted the king to govern the people with all mildness and justice, after their example, and not to give himself to covetousness and to heap up treasures. His most private actions also, as to walk, wash, lie with his wife, and such like were limited according unto the law, the which he might in no sort exceed.   

¶ The Religion.  
AeGypt is peopled by Mahometans, Christians, and jews, in some small number. As for the Mahometans and jews, we will leave the discourse of their belief to another place; but to speak something of that of the Christians, they of Egypt are either strangers, or borne in the country. The strangers come thither by reason of traffic, especially in the towns of Alexandria and Cairo: for this realm being seated betwixt the read sea and the Mediterranean, sees both East and Westby reason of the great traffic, and is as it were a ladder by the which the wealth and treasures of the Indies, and the East pass into Anatolia, Africa, and Europe: by reason whereof there come thither not only Venetians, Florentines, and Ragousans in great numbers, but also French and English. The religious of S. Francis, who remain in jerusalem, employ their spiritual assistance, and go to administer the sacraments, and to preach the word of God to the Christians which traffic into Egypt.  
The Christians borne in Egypt, which have remained since the inundation of Barbarians, and the cruelty of the Sarrazins, Mammeluz, and Turks, do not exceed the number of fifty thousand persons, which devil dispersed here and there, especially in the towns of Cairo, Messia, Montfalut, Buque, and Elchiase, all situated upon the river of Nile. There are also many at Minia, in which territory there are divers monasteries; but the most famous of all Egypt are those of S. Antony, S. Paul, and of S. Machaire. The first is in the country of the Troglodytes, upon a mountain, whereas they say S. Anthony was beaten by devils: the second is not far from it, in the midst of the defarts: and the third is in the defarts of Boulacca, towards the West. This monastery is called Nitria, in the Histories of the holy fathers: the reason is, as I suppose, for that in this country the waters of Nile being made thick by the heat of the Sun in low grounds, turns into salt, and nitre. There hath been a stately convent upon the river of Nile, six miles from the town of Menfia, under the name of S. George. There hath been two hundred Monks in it, the which was a great commodity to passengers who were received there, and entreated very courteously: but all the Monks being dead of the plague, about one hundred and fifty years since, the place was abandoned.  
But to speak something of the quality of the Christians, they are called Cofires, and Christians of the girdle; for that although they be baptized like unto us, yet are they circumcised like unto the jews; so as it seems their belief doth not pass beneath the girdle: but that which is worse, for these thousand years they have followed the heresy of Eutiches, who admitted but one nature in jesus Christ; so as by the means of this heresy, they separate themselves from the union of the Church. The occasion of this Schism was the bad Council of Ephesus, assembled by Dyoscores for the defence of E●ticheses, who had been already condemned at the council of Calcedonia, by six hundred and thirty fathers assembled by the authority of Leo the first: and the Cofites fearing that they should maintain two Hipostases, to attribute two natures to Christ, became Eurichians, for that they would not fall in the error of Nestorius.  
They say Mass in the Chaldean tongue, saying often, hallelujah. They read the Gospel first in the Chaldean tongue, and then in the Arabian. Whenas the priest faith, Peace be with you, or peace be given you, the youngest amongst them goes and toucheth the hand of every one that assisteth at this Mass. After the consecration, they give a little piece of bread to every one of the assistants. They obey the Patriarch of Alexandria, and say that they have their faith from Prete jan.      

The Estate of the Turk in Asia.  

❧ THE COUNTRIES WHICH THE TURK HOLDS IN ASIA.  

The Contents.  
1HAuing described all the provinces and countries which the Turk holds in Europe and Africa, it is fit we should now see what he enjoyeth in Asia, before we enter into a distinct discourse, which the Author hath made of the Turks in general, describing their manners, riches, forces, government, and religion. He gins his description with Asia the Less, which is at this day called Anatolia, or High Turkey, the which contains many provinces; and he declares the bounds under what climate, in what parallel, and of what breadth the country is. 2. A particular description of the provinces of High Turkey, and first of Pontus and Bythinia, sometimes divided, their bounds, and chief towns. 3 Asia, her bounds, and chief towns. 4. Phrygia, high and low, where are yet to be seen the ruins of the great city of Troy. 5. Caria, Missia, jonia, Dorida, Lydia, and Lycia; their limits and towns. 6. Galacia, or Gaulegrecia, her bounds, and extent. 7. Pamphylia. 8. Capadocia. 9 Cilicia. 10. Base Armenia. 11. Turcomania. 12. Georgia. 13. Arabia, divided into Desert and Stony. 14. Arabia the Happy, her form and chief towns, amongst the which is Mecca, whereas Mahomet was borne. 15. Idumea. 16. Syria, divided into five provinces, of the which the first is Palestina. 17. Mesopotamia, or Diarbek. 18. The quality and bounty of the air and soil of the said provinces, and wherein they abound: first of all they are remarkable for the great and goodly rivers of Anatolia: The woods of Bythinia fit for shipping: The Synnadike stone like unto the Alabaster of Asia: The hot waters of Hyerapolis which turns to stone: The Adamant stone of Caria: The Vermilion of jonia: The golden sand of the rivers of Lydia, and the Saffron of Tmole. The three kinds of beasts of Mount chimera in Lycia the top whereof is full of Lions, the midst of Goats, and the lower part of Serpents. The Wines, Fruits, Metals, Silver, Copper, Iron, Alum, Crystal, jaspis, Onyx, Alabaster, Horses, and the Bees of Capadocia of two kinds. The Cedars of Mount Aman, and the forest of Myrtle trees in Cilicia, with the Wolves called Squilaques: The Dates, Manna, Coral, and the Amethyst stone of Arabia the Stony. The Palm trees, Nard, Cassia, Cinnamon, Myrrh, and the Incense of Arabia the Happy. The Roses, Melons, Citrons, Olive trees, Figs, Pomegranates, and vines carrying Grapes thrice a year in Palestina. The balm of Idumea. The Canes of Honey, and the sands of Belo, fit to make glass in Phenicia. 19 The Nature, Manners, Customs, and Laws of the ancient Arabians, Sabeans, Nabatheans, jews, and Cappad●cianss. 20. Description of the manner of living prescribed by Moses unto the jews, and their most remarkable laws. Of the departure of the children of Israel out of Egypt, and their passage into Indea, ill understood by the pagan. Of three kinds of Jews Pharisies, Saducees, and Esseniens. 21. A relation of the manners, disposition, and kind of living of the Turks, Arabians, jews, and other nations inhabiting the provinces of Asia: Their manner of habit, their meat, their arms, their lodging in Tents, under Palm trees, and in houses under ground 22. Their wealth, consisting in the traffic of Cotton, the Adamant stone, in mines of Copper, Chamlets, Iron, Alum, Crystal, jospis the Onyx stone, Alabaster; The tribute of Pilgrims to the Holy Sepulchre, and to Medina: Spices, precious stones, pearls, and In●nse, 23. The number of the forts and places of most importance of all the provinces of Asia subject to the Turk. 24. Of what religion and sects they be, which inhabit these countries: and first of the Christians, Latins, and Greeks, divided into many sects, that is to say, Melchites, Nestorians, Dioscoriens, Armeniens, jacobites, Maronites, and Costs; Their beginning, and their errors in the faith 25. A discourse of the Turks in general, containing an ample relation of their manners, riches, forces, government or policy, and religion. 26. The numbers of the Emperors of Constantinople, as well Chr●stians as Turks, since that the empire of the West was divided from that of the East, and given to Charlemaigne.   

THe great Turk holds all the country which is betwixt the Euxin or Great Sea; the Aegean Sea, or Archipelagus, the Mediterranean Sea, Egypt, the Arabian and Persian gulfs, the river of Tigris, the Caspian Sea, and the straight of land, or Isthmus, which is betwixt the Caspian Sea, and the Eoxin. We will now begin with the Lesser Asia, the which we take here for all the C●ertonese, or Peninsula, betwixt the Euxin Sea, and that of Cilicia and Pamphylia, which extends towards the Archipelagus, and is at this day called Anatolia, or high Turkey. It contains the provinces of Pontus and Bythinia, the province particularly called Asia, Lycia, Galacia, Pamphylia, Capadocia, Cilicia, and Base Armenia. It hath for confines or bounds upon the East, the river of Euphrates, which is now called Apherat or Frat: upon the South, it confines with the Mediterranean Sea, the which doth sometimes take the name of the Lycian Sea, sometimes of the Pamphylian, or sometimes of the Cilician or Caramanian, according to the countries by the which it passeth: upon the Western part, the Archipelagus of Greece: and towards the North, the Euxin Sea. It contains a great tract of country, for that it lies betwixt the six and thirtieth degree, and the one and twentieth, and the five and fortieth degree, that is to say, betwixt the midst of the fourth climate, and the eleventh parallel, and the midst of the sixt climate, and the fifteenth parallel, whereas the change of the longest day is but of an hour: for the longest day of that part which approacheth near unto the South, is but of fourteen hours and a half, and the remote part towards the North, fifteen hours and a half. The breadth of this country (as Pliny writes) is about two hundred thousand paces, that is to say, from the Isfike Bay, or gulf of Lajazze, unto Trebisonda, which is in the country of Pontus. Wherein he agreeth with Herodotus, who saith, That the Isthmus of Asia the Less, contains about five days journey of a man that traveleth well.  
Pontus, and Bythinia, were in old time two provinces divided by the river of Sanger, which passeth through the midst, but they were afterwards reduced into one province, the which is called at this day by the name of Bursia, as Girava writes, or Becsangial, according to Castaldus, and some others. This province is bounded upon the West, by the mouth of Pontus, by the Bosphorus of Thrace, and by a part of the Propontides: upon the North by a part of the Euxin Sea: on the South, by the province called particularly Asia, near to the river of Rhindace: and on the East, Galacia, near to Paphlagonia. In this province in old time were to be seen the famous towns of Chalcedonia, Nicomedia, Apamia, Prusia, Nicaea, and Heraclea of Pontus. Chalcedonia, a colony of them of Megara, hath been famous by reason of the fourth Council that was held there; but it is now ruined: yet some say, that it is standing right against Constantinople, and divided by a part of the Bosphorus, for the space of seven stades, and that it is now called Galata: others say, that at this day it hath the name of Scutare, the which is opposite to Constantinople.  
Nycomedia is an ancient town seated very pleasantly upon a little hill, and having many springs of waters; so as many Turks and Grecians inhabit there▪ although it be ruined. Prusia, at this day Bursia, or Burse, is a great town standing near to Mount Olympus. This was in former times the place where the Ottomans kept their court, before the taking of Constantinople. Nicaea, now called Nichia, according unto Niger, and Isnich as others affirm, was in old time the chief city of Bithynia: it is seated nerre to the lake of Isnich.  
The province called particularly Asia, now Sabrum, or Sarcum, hath for her bounds (according unto Ptolemy) upon the West, a part of the Propontides, Hellespont, and the Archipelagus: upon the South, the Rhodian sea, and a part of Lycia and Pamphylia: towards the East, Galicia: and upon the North, Pontus and Bithynia, with a part of the Propontides. It comprehends the countries of Phrygia, Caria, the two Missias, Eolia, jonia, Doryda, and Lydia.  
Phrygia is divided into high and low: the high lies towards the East, and base Phrygia upon the West, and this is called Hellespontica, and Troada: Castaldus saith, that they nowcall it Sarcum. High Phrygia hath at this day, as in former times, more villages than towns. In it they reckon the town of Mydaia, sometimes the abode of king Mydus near to the river of Sangar. Appamia, called also in former times Sibotis, was the greatest town in Phrygia.  
Base Phrygia or Troada is right against Mount Athos. The city of Troy stood in this country, where there is also to be seen Mount Ida, the which is now called Gargara. There are also the admirable ruins of the great city of Troy, that is to say, the ruinous buildings of some towers, and the foundations of some walls. Without the circuit of the city walls, upon the high ways, there are to be seen very great sepulchres of marble the which are of one piece. ●here are also the ruins of two Castles built of marble, and great ancient Colossuses lying upon the ground, and about the walls, gates almost whole, according to the report of Belon, who saith also that the rivers of Simois, Xante, and Scamandra are small brooks, which dry up in Summer, and have no great store of water in Winter. The city of Pergamon was also in Troada, and was the chief of that province, and the country of the Physician Galen. There they found out the use of parchment. There remains nothing at this day but certain ruins; yet they do still call this place Pergamon.  
Caria, lying betwixt jonia and Licia, had in former times for her chief city Halicarnassa, at this day called Messi. Tabu is a very good town of Caria. Near unto Halicarnassa, on the right hand, begins Mount Taurus. Some place Milet in this country; others attribute it to jonia.  
Missia is divided by Ptolemy into high and low. In old time there was a town in this country, the which was called Lampsaca, and it is seated upon the Hellespont right against Callipolis; butit hath been ruined, and the place where it stood is at this day called Aspico, as Niger writes, and according to Sophian, Lampsica. Abydos, now Aueo, was a colony of the Milesians. There is the straight of Hellespont, being but seven stades broad. This town continues to this day, and is seated in the midst of a moor, and well fortified, and her castle, with that of Seste, which is right against it are two keys of the Turks Empire: for from these two castles, they play with their canons upon all ships that come into Hellespont, or attempt to go forth without the Turks permission. There was also in former times to be seen the town of Adramisium, a colony of the Athenians, now called Landermitti. The river of Granica is in this country, the which Niger calls Lassara, whereas Alexander vanquished Darius' Lieutenants.  
The country of Eolia lies upon the coast of the Aegean sea, and the maritime towns are Myrina, Cuma, now Castri, and Focea, having two ports, at this day called Foglia Vecchia, or the old Leaf, the which in former times was two miles and a half in circuit, as Tytus Livius reports. jonia hath in length in a strait line forty miles, and two hundred along the coast, whereas the town of Ephesus stands, now called Figena or Fiena, according to Castaldus, but retaining the old names as Sophian writes. It is famous by reason of the Council which was held there, and of the Temple of Diana, numbering among the seven wonders of the world. Some place Miletum in this province.  
Dorida runs into the sea like a point, and contains the town of Guidos, famous by reason of Venus' statue: the place where it was, is called Capo Chio, or Crio. Some do also put Hallicarnasse in this country, which is now called Mesi, as we have said, according unto Sophian, and S. Peter's castle, as Nyger and Vadianus writes. It was in this city that Mausolus' king of Caria did reign, for whom Artemesia caused that stately tomb to be built.  
Lydia was also called Meonia. The chief town was Sardis, whereas Croesus made his abode. It was ruined by an Earthquake, and built again by Tiberius. Lycia was in old time called Milias', and Ogigia, as Stephanus writes. Gyrava affirms, that at this day they have given it the name of Brichia. And Castaldus ascribes unto it that of Aldinelli: but Thevet saith, that the Arabians call it Bensaacam: this province stretcheth to the sea which is called Lycian, by reason of the country; and it hath for bounds upon the West and North, Caria; upon the East, Pamphylia; and upon the South, it is limited by the Lycian sea, about two hundred thousand paces of Navigation. There were in former times sixty towns, whereof there were six and thirty standing in the time of S. Paul. The chief were Xanthe, Patara, Pinara, Olympe, Myrrah, and Lamyra: whereof the chief was Patara. There was also the town of Telmesa, near unto a Cape or Promontory of the same name. Ancient author's place here the mountain of Chimaera which burns in the night. The chief town at this day is Fisco, the which hath a very good port.  
Gallacia or Gallogrecia having taken that name from the Gauls, who mingled themselves with the people of Asia, in the time of Pyrrhus king of the Epyrotes, is at this day called Chiangara, according to Castaldus. It hath for bounds upon the West Bythinia and Phrygia: upon the East, Capadocia: upon the South, Pamphylia: and upon the North, the Euxin sea, whereas the shore runs two hundred and fifty thousand paces. The most famous town is Ancyra, commonly called Angoure, famous by reason of the chamlets both watered and others which are made there. In this province is the country of Paphlagonia, whereas Synope is seated upon a little hill of a Peninsula of the Euxin sea with a good port. There is also Amisis, a maritime town, now called Symiso.  
Pamphylia, which is called by Pliny Popsopia, carries at this day the name of Setilia, as Gyrana, and some others affirm. Thevet saith that the Arabians do call it, Zina; but Belon assures that they have given to this province, and to Cilicia, the name of Caramania, whereas the Turk hath seven Sangiacs remaining. It is frontired upon the East by Cilicia, and a part of Capadocia: upon the West, by Lycia, and a part of the province of Asia: upon the North, Gallacia: and to the South, the sea of Pamphylia, which is always raging. The coast is about one hundred and fifty thousand paces. Her towns are Perga, which is in the midst of the country upon the river of Cataracte, then Syda, and Aetalias, maritime towns. Aetalia which is the chief of the country, doth now bear the name of Satalia, and is the greatest and strongest of all the towns of that country, and communicats her name unto the gulf which is near unto it.  
Capadocia, or Leucositia, according unto Strabo, and some others (now Almasia, or Amasia, as Castaldus affirms, and Genech, according unto Thevet, otherwise it is called Toccatu Allelujen, as Spinet reports) extends unto the Euxin sea: and it is bounded in upon the West by Paphlagonia, a part of Pamphylia, and Gallacia: upon the South, by a part of Cilicia: upon the East, by the Antitaurus, a great mountain near to base Armenia, by the mountain of Moschia, and a part of the river of Euphrates: and on the North by the Euxin sea. Her rivers are Halis, now called Ottomagiuch, sometimes the limit of the realms of Croesus: then Iris, now called Casalmach, & Thermodon, now Pormon. Her best towns are Trebyzonde, called Machomach by the Barbarians, sometimes the seat of an Empire. Some make Amasia the chief of Paphlagonia; but Ptolemy & many others teach that it belongs to this province. This town retains the name unto this day, and imparts it unto the neighbour country. It is seated in a deep valley upon the river of Gazalmach. This was Strabos country, and at this day the Turk hath a Beglia●bey remaining there, who is called the B●gliarbey of Amasia and Cappadocia. Some put the town of Iconium in Cilicia; but (according to Ptoleme) it belongs to this country, and is called Conia, or Cogna, it stands near unto certain high mountains, and is watered by divers small rivers which flow from them. Her form is round, and the walls are ancient, and her Towers square. There are eight gates, and a good number of fair Mosques and Stoves.  
Cilicia, which josephus calls Tarses, is by the Hebrews termed Chalah. Niger holds, that at this day it is called Turcomania, and Finichia: but they which give it the name of Caramania, are to be followed; for Turcomania is no other thing but high Armenia.  
Caramania, who doth also comprehend some part of other provinces, besides Silicia, and especially Pamphylia: it hath for bounds upon the West, Pamphylia; upon the North, Mount Taurus; upon the East, Mount Aman, vulgarly called Monte Negro, or the Black mountain; and upon the South, the Sea of Cilicia, being about three hundred thousand paces sailing. The chief town was Hama, or Hamla, in old time Tarses, situated in a goodly valley, and watered by the river of Cydne. There is also the town of Adena, called by Ptolemy, Adana, the which is great, but lies open, and hath a castle with four square Towers. Belon saith, that in Cilicia, there is a town called Heraclea, the which is very great, situated near to Mount Taurus in a goody plain, and some three days journey from Adena, bending towards the North and West.  
Base Armenia carries the same name at this day, as Niger writes: but Girava gives it that of Anadule; Castaldus, Pegian, and some others call it Geneh. In the Book of Notices, it hath the name of Perme. Her bounds are upon the East, the river of Euphrates, by the which it is divided from Turcomania, or high Armenia; upon the West, Cappadocia; upon the Southern part, Cilicia, beyond Mount Taurus, and a part of Syria to Mount Aman; and upon the North part, Pontus, at which place they say it ends with an angle, which the river of Euphrates and Antitaurus make; but the Turk is not absolute master.  
To end the description of that which the Turk holds in Asia, let us now come to a part of high Armenia, comprehended under the name of Turcomania, which doth also embrace Georgia. This province confines upon the North with Colchida, called at this day Mingrelia; upon the West, with Euphrates, and Base Armenia; upon the East, with the rest of high Armenia, which is in Georgia; and upon the South, with Mesopotamia, now Diarbec, and with the nation of the Curds. Her mountains are Periandra, now Chielder; Antitaurus, at this day called the Black mountain, and some others. The chief town of the coutrie, is Esechia, which some hold to be that which remains of Artaxata. Near unto high Armenia, lies the country of Curdistan, according to the Persians and Turks, but the Armenians call it Keldan. Castaldus gives it the name of Gorden, and puts it in the province of high Armenia.  
Georgia, otherwise called Gurgestan, comprehends the ancient Iberia, with a part of high Armenia, and it may be of Atroparia. Upon the West, this province joins with Mingrelia, or Colchida; towards the North, lies Zemrie, in old time Albania; upon the East, the middle Atropatia, now called Seruan; and upon the South, that part of high Armenia which is called Seruan. These people have always maintained their liberty unto our time, joining sometimes with the Persians, and sometimes with the Turks, and there have been many Lords of the country: but it is now for the most part under the Turks dominion, who hath many good towns, and strong places, as Testa, Lori, Clisque, Gori, and Toman.  
All Arabia taken together is a very great and spacious province, the which is shut up betwixt two gulfs in the form of a Peninsula. These gulfs are the one of Arabia, otherwise called the Read sea, upon the West; and the other the Persian gulf, upon the East: upon the South it hath the Ocean; and upon the North part, Syria, and the famous river of Euphrates. This Peninsula of Arabia is divided into three parts, that is to say, into the Desert, the Stony, and the Happy.  
Arabia the Desert, called Aspre by Aristides, Base by Servius, and Hollow and Deep by Lucian, is called by the Hebrews, Cedar. The bounds are upon the East, the mountains of Babylon, and a part of the Persian gulf; upon the North, Mesopotamia, near to the river of Euphrates; upon the West, Syria, and Arabia the Stony; and upon the South, the Happy mountains.  
Arabia Petrea, or the Stony, joins to Syria upon the West and North; and confines with the Desert upon the East; and upon the South, it borders with Arabia the Happy. Pliny, Strabo, and Ptolemy, call it Nabathea; Tyrius gives it the name of the Second, and some others call it Base Arabia. But it hath the name of Petrea, of the town Petra, which is the chief of that province. This province is at this day called Barra, as Ziglerus writes; Bangaucal, according to Castaldus, and Battha Calha. Mount Sinai, so famous in the Holy Scripture, whereas the law was given unto Moses, is in this country. This mountain is very high and troublesome to ascend, and therefore they have cut stairs in the rock, to the end that Camels and other beasts might pass more easily. In this mountain there is a Convent of Christian Monks, called Maronites, which live after the Graecian manner: they are fifty in number, and receive Christian Pilgrims which go thither for devotion. There is also in this country, another famous mountain called Oreb, and now Orel, the which is not so high as that of Sinai. These two mountains are by Ptolemy called Melanes. The chief town of the country was called Petra, w●ich the Scripture calls Petra of the Desert, whereas the ways are very bad to go in. Many hold, that it is the same that Mecca, the place whereas Mahomet was borne: the which is not probable, but it seems rather to be that which the Maps call Petra of Est. And moreover, they hold that Mecca is in Arabia the Happy.  
Arabia the Happy joins to the other two in form of a Peninsula, betwixt the Arabian and Persian gulfs; and the navigation about this country is near three thousand five hundred and four miles. Solynus and some others call it Happy; and Virgil, Panchaia, but at this present it carries the name of Yaman, or Gyamen. The chief towns are Medina Tanalbi, Mecca, Ziden, Zibi, and Aden; besides others which are not come to our knowledge.  
Medina Tanalbi, that is to say, the City of the Prophet, is situated near to Arabia Petrea, and it is well peopled. Mahomet's coffin is there, near unto which there are continually about three thousand lamps burning. Mecca, in the which Mahomet was borne, is not far from the ancient Petra; yet it is not the same, but it may rather be the town of Mechara, mentioned by Ptolemy. This place is reasonably pleasant, but restrained betwixt mountains and deserts, and without any walls, having in it near six thousand families. There come yearly three Caravannes', which part from Cairo, Damas', and the Indies, and go to Mecca for devotion, in honour of Mahomet who was borne there, than they go to a place called Medina, whereas (they say) the coffin of this false Prophet remains.  
Ziden is a Sea town, forty miles distant from Mecca. It hath no walls, but the houses are reasonable fair. Zebeth, or Zibit, is a good town, and the chief of that part of Arabia. It stands in a plain, betwixt two mountains, and upon a river of the same name, half a days journey from the Read Sea. It was taken after Aden by the Turk, who sent a Begliarbey thither with great forces.  
Aden is a royal town, seated upon the borders of the Read Sea, near unto the straight of Babel Mandel: it is the fairest town of Arabia, and not only strong by situation, but also by art; where there are two Bostians, a good fort, and a port well defended. It contains about six thousand households, and is well peopled. The Turks took this town and the whole realm by policy, in the year of our Lord God 1538, and they lost their king.  
At this present time they have a Begliarbey there, with good troops of soldiers for the war.  
Leaving Arabia, they entered into Idumea, which gins at the lake of Sirbon, and extends towards the East unto India. This province contains Gaza, a most ancient town betwixt the which and Cairo, stands Cattia, then Ostrasina, Rhinocoruta, A●calon, and Azot.  
Syria, which is a very great province betwixt the river of Euphrates, Sil●cia, Arabia, and the Mediterranean sea, gins in the two and thirtieth degr●●e, and e●dss in the six and thirtieth. It is divided into five provinces, which be Palestina, Phenicia, Celosyria, Suria, and Comagena: Palestina, which lies betwixt the Mediterranean sea and Arabia, is divided into two parts by the river of jordan. The Tribe of Reuben, and half the Tribe of Manasses dwelled beyond this river, and the others on this side. This latter is subdivided into three parts, whereof the one is properly called judea, the other Samaria, and the third Galilee. judea lies betwixt the dead sea and the Mediterranean; jerusalem is the chief city. In this country jerico stands in a pleasant valley, about thirty miles long, and fifteen broad. Samaria took her name of the chief town which is at this day called Naplos. Galilee is divided into base and high: the base gins at the sea of Tiberiades, being five miles broad, and twelve long, Nazareth standeth almost in the Centre: the other gins at the lake of Samaconites, and extends unto mount Lybanus. In ancient time there was not any province proportionably so well peopled as Palestina: for being not above one hundred and sixty miles long, and sixty broad, (considering that the bounds of her length were Dan and Bersabe) in the muster which David caused to be made, they found a million and three hundred thousand men fit to bear arms, besides the Tribe of Benjamin: but now she is stripped of all her ornaments, except the beauty and bounty of the soi●e.  
jerusal●m, at the siege of which there died above a million of persons, and one hundred thousand taken prisoners, hath not at this day above five thousand inhabitants, and if the holiness of the pla●e did not continually draw a great number of Christians thither, this town would be of no fame. This province is crossed by the river of jordan, which rising at the foot of Mount Lybanus, from two fountains, whereof, the one is called jor, and the other Dan, passeth by two lakes, whereof the first is that of Gallile, and the other of Tyberiades, the which is the greater: finally, it falls into the dead sea, called by the Grecians the lake of Alphaltites.  
Phenicia lies all upon the sea right against judea. Her chief towns were tire and Sydon, at this day Say't and Sur. tire was an Island, but so near unto the firm land, as Alexander filled up the sea with earth whenas he besieged the town. The Prophet ezechiel speaks much of her greatness, wealth, and state. Sydon was in a manner equal to tire in beauty and power. Both were famous by reason of the dying of purple, which the Poets do sometimes call Tyrien, sometimes Sydonien. There are ●●arce any remainders to be seen at this day, no more than of joppa, or of Acre.  
Suria extends from tire unto the gulf of Lajazze, in which tract are contained the towns of ●arut, Tripoli, and To●●o●a, where of Barut and Tripol are places of great traffic, and in the midst of the country, Damas' and Laodicia. Damas' is a goodly town seated in a great valley: the houses are fairer within than without: the streets are narrow and crooked; but that which makes it pleasant, is the abundance of water which passeth by their houses, and waters their gardens at pleasure. There is an excellent castle built by a Florentine Mammelu, who grew very rich, and was governor of this town, which is the chief of this province.  
Celosyria, is properly the country betwixt Lybanon, and Antilybanon, from whence springs the river of Orontes now called Farfara, upon the banks whereof stands the famous city of Antioch, which is now a sepulchre of itself, and a heap of ruins, rather than any other thing. But the walls are yet standing, the which are very fair, and so built as three men may march about in front. There are a good number of towers, and a castle built upon the side of a hill Moreover there is to be seen the house whereas S. Peter kept, with a little place where he baptized many. At the mouth of the river of Orontes stands Seleucia Pieria, at this day Soldin.  
Camogena is that part of Syria, which follows the course of the river of Euphrates, unto the frontiers of Armenia. Aleppo is the chief town, and holds the third place among all the towns of the great Turk's Empire. It is built upon the river of Singa, and hath a channel of water under ground, from whence flow many fountains, both public and private. It embraceth four hills, upon the one of which stands a very strong castle: her suburbs are great; but there is no other building of importance, but the Mosques or Temples, and the storehouses for merchant strangers. We may easily conjecture of the great multitudes of people that are in it, for that in the year 1565 there died in that town and suburbs above one hundred and twenty thousand persons in three months.  
The Turk did also possess a part of Media, and the chief city Taurus: but some are of opinion, that the Sophi hath recovered of late years the greatest part: moreover he holds in a manner all Mesopotamia and Diarbecke; and he is master of a part of Assyria, whereas the city of Babylon stood, which was built by Semiramis, and he also is master of Chaldea, which is a portion of Assyria, in which is the town of Bagdet or Bagade● built upon the ruins of Babylon, by a Calife of the Mahometans. Some confounded it ancient Babylon, and maintain that it is the same. He hath Balze●e yet in his power, whereas he maintains a great garrison, and hath always certain galleys ready to make head against the Portugal.  
But for that we have made a description of all these countries, discoursing of the estates of the kings of Persia, and that the Sophy doth daily win something from the Turk, and recover his Estate by little and little; so as we cannot speak certainly of the lords of many of these countries, which change their masters daily; so as that which to day belongs unto one, may to morrow be conquered by another. I will therefore pass them over with silence, and speak of the quality of those provinces which we have described.  

¶ The Quality.  
NAtolia doth enjoy a sweet and temperate air, and her fields did yield abundance of grain, with store of good pastures for the feeding of cattle; and to be short, her inhabitants had all and more than was sufficient for the use of man. But now this country is not so fertile, nor so well manured: yet in those places which are near unto the sea it is more fertile; and as the land is better husbandred, so it yields more abundantly. The places which are within the heart of the country are for the most part great plains, whereas they sow wheat, barley, and cotton. It is watered by many rivers, whereof the principal are, Iris, Halis, Parthenius, now Dolap, and Sangar, which discharge themselves into the Euxin sea, than Ascagne, now Isnic, and Phyndace, at this day called Sindi, which fall into the Propontides. Moreover Scamandores, at this present called Symores, which runs into Hellespont, and after it Caique, or Giruasti, Hermes, or Sarabat, Caistre, which C●staldus calls Chaici, and Ortelius Chias, and the river Meander, which hath six hundred turnings, and is called Madres. All which rivers pay their tribute to the Archipelagus. There is also the river of Melas, now called Genssui, which runs into Euphrates, besides many others which discharge their waters into the Mediterranean sea.  
Bythinia yields much corn, and doth furnish the great Turk's court with meal, especially that which is near unto Bursa. This country doth so abound in wood and timber for the making of ships, as it seems galleys fall ready made into that sea, they are so soon finished. Near unto Nicaea they found good store of Orpiment or Arcenick.  
The particular province of Asia was in old time famous for the Sinnadicke stone, like in a manner to Alabaster, the which they carried to Rome to make pillars.  
In Troada the country near unto Troy is very lean and barren, and withal it wants water: ●ut the soil near unto Pergamon is very good and fruitful. There are also quarries of stone, whereas in former times they have found men which had hidden themselves during the wars, converted into stone. Strabo writes, that near to Hierapolis, there are hot waters which are easily converted into a kind of brittle stone: And there are other waters so fit for the dying of wool, as those dies which are made with herbs and roots, yield unto it.  
As for Caria, in former times they have much esteemed the soil near unto Magnesia, for that it did bear abundance of wheat, and near unto this city they do also found the Adamant stone, called by the Latins, Magnes. There are also mountains in Curia, whereas they dig a kind of white stone for building, the which shines much. This province hath been in former times much shaken with earthquakes.  
Touching Missia, some hold that the vines which are in the territory of Aspic, or Lampsic, yield abundance of grains. In jonia, they made Vermilion, of a kind of earth which they boiled, and in some places they gathered excellent wines.  
Lydia had in former times many rivers which fall from Mount Tmolus, which carried gold among the sand, and it did also yield silver; and moreover, the country was very fertile, and well manured. The mountain of Tmolus hath been much esteemed for the fertility thereof: And among other things, there are great store of vines, and abundance of Saffron.  
Lycia is very rough and troublesome by reason of Mount Taurus, which hath his beginning there. The top of Mount Chimaera, was in old time full of Lions, the midst with goats, by reason of the good pastures, and the foot with Serpents. This was the cause which made ●oetss to feign a beast called Chimaera, the which had the head and breast of a Lion, the belly of a Goat, and the tail of a Dragon. Earthquakes have done much harm in this country. In Pamphylia, and also in Cilicia, the Goats have their hair very soft and delicate, so as it is nothing inferior to silk in softness; and moreover, it hath this property, that it is as white as snow.  
Cappadocia abounds with all sorts of grain, wines, fruit, and also with Silver, Copper, Iron, Alum, Crystal, jaspis, Onyx, and Alabaster, which is not very saire: And this country doth breed great store of horses. The●e are others which say that this country is rough, and defective of many things necessary for the life of man. Pliny writes, that near unto the river of Thermodon, there are two kinds of Bees, whereof the one make their honey in trees, and the other under ground. The tops of Mount Argea are covered with snow, as well in Summer as in Winter. The soil near to Amasia, or Gazalmac, is waist and desert, and yet very fit for the breeding of cattles. Near unto Conia, there grows great plenty of vines, which yield as good wine as any place whatsoever.  
Cilicia is divided into two: one part is called Rough, which lies towards the West; and the other, Champion or Plain, upon the East. This hath goodly rivers, yields store of fruit, and all kind of commodities, and doth feed great numbers of horses. The greatest part of Cilicia is reasonably well manured, by reason of the commodity of rivers wherewith it is watered: yet the soil is full of clay, and wants wood, so as they are feign to fetch it from the mountains, the which are above two days journey from it, namely from that of Aman, where there grows very high Cedars, juniper, and divers other plants. There are many places in Cilicia, which are very pleasant, being ever full of green trees: but there are some places which are wild and barren, which are of a great extent, and not held by any; so as they may feed their swine there, of which they have great troops, as also of goats, whereof the inhabitants make great store of butter and cheese. Their goat's hair is also very soft, and as delicate as silk. There are whole forests of myrtle trees, which bear a whitefruit, and in like manner of Turpentine trees, and pine trees. The rivers of this country, are Pirama, now Malmistra, which arising out of the midst of a plain far beyond Mount Taurus, makes a noise like to thunder, the which is heard far off: And the river of Sidne, which flowing from Autitaurus, is cold, swift, and very clear: Pliny hath written that the water is good to cure the gout. They found also little Wolves there, which go in troops, the which the Grecians do vulgarly call Squilaques, the which are so thievish as they fear not to go in the night to them that sleep, and to steal from them whatsoever they found, as caps, shoes, and such like. Belon saith, That near to Heraclea, there is a goodly plain, which bears all kind of 〈◊〉 trees, and that they bread great numbers of horses.  
High Armenia is full of mountains and hills, yet there are valleys which yield great store of fruit. Some hold that this country is very fertile, and abouns in cattles; but it is very subject to snow, the which lies sometimes very deep. Georgia hath many mountains and forests; by reason whereof it is in a manner inaccessible for any enemy: yet it is fertile, and hath some plains, and pleasant valleys, watered by divers rivers, whereof the principal are Cry, and Araxis.  
Arabia the Desert, hath great Wildernesses, and yet there are many bouroughs and inhabitants, especially near to the river of Euphrates, and the mountains of Arabia the Happy; the other part towards the West, is full of land. Arabia Petrea, or the Stony, is held by the Ancients to be altogether barren; yet that which lies near to Syria, yields more than the rest. It is very desert, and wants many things necessary for the life of man: but the chief defect is wood and fresh water. There grow Palm trees which bear dates that are great, reddish, and tender, but they are not ve●ie moist. Manna falls in like manner there, and upon the coast there grows coral which is reasonably fair, but hollow within. They do also found the Amethyste stone in this country.  
Arabia the Happy is better manured and tilled than the two other, and is watered by many rivers, whereof some make lakes. It bears barley, and other grain, honey, vax, and divers first-fruits, as Apples, Pears, Citrons, and such like: and here they sow twice, as at the Indies. Moreover, this country yields Palm trees, Nard, Cassia Cinnamon, Mirth, and many odoriferous herbs, with abundance of Incense. They also found some metals, and divers stones, and near unto the shore they fish out goodly Pearls. This country doth breed very good horses, and sheep whose tails do sometimes weigh twenty pound. But to speak particularly, the soil near unto Medina is barren, and yields little, as also that above Mecca, whereas they found little water.  
Palestina is very pleasant, diversified with hills and goodly plains, and watered with many rivers. It rains often, and therefore the land is very fruitful; for it yields abundance of wheat, and other grains, and first-fruits. The Roses have an excellent smell, and there grows store of Rue, fennel, Sage, and other good herbs. There are also many Olive trees, Fig trees, and Pomegranates, and great numbers of Palm trees and vines: for although they prohibit the Turks to use wine, yet there is good store in this province, and they make their vintage thrice a year. It is true, that this country yields no Apples, Pears, Cherries, Nuts, and other first-fruits, which we have commonly in these parts, but they bring them from Damas. In this province there is a certain fruit which they keep all the year upon the tree, like unto great Citrons or Apples of Paradise. Moreover, there are excellent good Melons and Cucumbers, and such other like first-fruits. It did also yield balm, which it wants at this day; but it hath honey, and some wild Canes of Sugar.  
There is store of Goats, Hares, Partridges, Quails, and such like: but although I have noted it to be fertile, yet there are some places which are in a manner desert, by reason of the great numbers of Rats and Mice which are there; so as if certain fowls did not devour them, the inhabitants of the country should not be able to sow any thing that should yield increase. Along the banks of jordan there grow many willows, bushes, and sundry sorts of Canes.  
The lake of Samachonita is most commonly dry in the Summer time, in the which there grows little trees and shrubs, whereas Lions and other beasts hid themselves. The plains near adjacent unto the lake of Genezareth, are desert, by reason of a tree full of thorns, which grow there in such exceeding abundance, as they cannot sow any thing to prospero.  
The Dead Sea, which is five days journey long from North to South, & five leagues broad from East to West, and as some writ, seventy miles long, and nineteen broad, casts forth a great fume, and such fogs, as it makes all the land barren half a league about. This sea hath no fish, neither are there any soul seen near unto it, and if they cast any beast into it, it never sinks, but drives unto the shore, although the fee● bbound.  
Galilee is naturally fertile, and yields all sortsof trees, and is very well manured; yet the base country which lies beyond jordan is in some places stony and desert.  
Samaria is part hilly and part plain. The country is pleasant, fertile, and abounds with fountains and fresh waters. There are many gardens, and places full of olive trees, and all other things necessary for the life of man. The hills ne●re to Naplos are covered with fruit trees, and the olive trees are exceeding big, as Belon writes.  
As for judea, the country which is near to jerusalem is well manured, and bears store of apples, almonds, figs, and olives. The hilly places are replenished with fruit trees, and aromatical wild herbs, and where there are any rocks, they make steps with great care and industry; so as they plant vines, and other fruit trees, as olives, figs, and orange trees, which bear abundance of fruit.  
Near unto the town of Rama, the soil is good, but there are few inhabitants, by reason whereof the fields are not well ti●led, and the Grecians which live there sow wheat, barley, and some pulses, but there are few vines. The soil which is near to the town of Gaza is fertile, and abounds with olive trees figs, oranges, and vines. there grow also some palm trees, but the dates do seldom ripen, for that the country is somewhat cold.  
Idumea is exceeding fertile in those places which lie near unto the sea, and to judea; but barren upon the frontiers of Arabia, where there are many mountains: there grow many palm trees, and in former times they found balm there. They that have written, say that strangers cannot live there, by reason of the deserts, and for want of water: yet there are fountains, but they are hidden, and none but the inhabitants of the country know them.  
The soil of Phenicia near unto Sydon is fertile, and brings forth plenty of canes of honey. That about Acon, or Ptolomaida is also fruitful, where they have good pastures, store of vines, and many orchards, whereas they gather divers first-fruits. The river of Belo, which passeth near unto this town, is famous by reason of the sand which they use for the making of glass.  
The country about Emissa or Haman, hath plenty of waters, and yields all things necessary for the life of man, being full of fruit trees.   

¶ The Manners of the ancient.  
THe Arabians made no esteem of arts & sciences. They suffered their hair to grow; and as for their beards, some did shave them very near, and others not at all. He that was the most ancient among them had power over all the rest. They possessed all things in common by families, and they enjoyed their women in common; so as the first of them that entered into the house and had left his staff at the door, enjoyed the common woman first: and as for the night she spent it with the most ancient. In this sort they all held themselves brothers, and had the company of their mothers and sisters, so brutish they were.  
Adultery among them was punished with death, and he was held an adulterer which enjoyed a woman that was not his kinswoman. All that were borne in the family were held for lawful husbands. They had no care of dead bodies: and as for their d●ce●●ed kings, they sent them to be bur●ed in a dunghill. They kept their promise and f●ith very strictly; and when they would promise' any thing upon their faith, a third person interposed himself betwixt the two which contracted, and struck the palm or his hand, to the which he drew the longest fingers of the contractors, and having taken a 〈◊〉 of the hair of either of their garments, he dipped it in the blood of the palm of his hand, and cast it upon ●even stones prepared fi●st to that end in the m●ddest of both parties, and in doing so he called upon the God Denis●nd ●nd Urania: this done the mediator cau●●● one of one of them to promise', that he was bound by the accord to appea●e before a 〈◊〉 judge which he named unto him, whether that he which was bound were of the country or a stranger: and this was found an honest course, and was observed among them which contracted any new friendship or alliance. The cinnamon was gathered by the priests of their law, who before sacrificed certain beasts, and they made this collection betwixt Sun and Sun. He that had most authority among them divided the heaps of cinnamon with a hatche●, and they first reserved a bundle in honour of the Sun: they held an opinion, that if it were equally divided, it would take fire by the heat of the Sun beams, and burn of itself.  
There were some amongst the Arabians called Ophiophages, for that they lived only of serpent's. Some there were that used camels, as well to fight on, as to bear their burdens, and they lived of nothing but milk and flesh. There were others called D●●●ss, who applied themselves to manure and till the land. It is said of them, that they found among the clods of earth pieces of gold, round and big as a nut, and that they did se● precious stones in them, and made Carcanets, which they did hung about their arms and necks. They sold their gold to strangers, and to neighbour nations, and gave three pounds for one of copper, and two of silver for one of any other metal.  
Among the Sabians it did belong only to the king to judge of controversies. Their kings were chosen by the favour of the people, who gave this honour to them that were of some noble family, out of which they found that some kings had been formerly chosen. These kings did confidently believe that if they had go out of their royal palace, they should have been stoned, and therefore they never went out of the gate. They had beds and great chairs, whose feet were of massy silver, and the rest of their furniture was exceeding sumptuous. It was also said of them, that they had been always free from desire to take from another man by force and rapine.  
The Gareenesw, ho were other Arabians, had all their furnitures of gold and silver, and the entries of their houses, the walls, and coverings were of ivory. The Nabatheans were not so stately as the rest. He among them that had diminished his estate was noted with infamy. The Panchaiens used chariots in war, and they divided their realm into three parts: in the first rank they put the priests of their law: in the second, the labourers, and men of travel: and in the third, the soldiers, among whom were comprehended the shepherds. The priests decided all controversies, as well those that concerned private men, as the affairs of the commonweal, unless there were question to condemn any one to death.  
The labourers having gathered in the first-fruits of the earth, laid them in common, and they that were found the best labourers, were deputed to the number of ten at the request of the rest, and by the resolution of the priests, to distribute the first-fruits to every one.  
The labourers were bound to use diligence to bring in public those things which concerned the sacrifices, and other things which were distributed particularly by number and weight, and they had nothing private to themselves, but their houses and gardens. As for tributes and other things all was delivered unto the priests, who distributed equally to every man according to his necessity; and as for themselves they took a double share, with the consent of the two other estates. They used goodly apparel, for that their wools were much finer than any other. Both men and women did indifferently use guildings, and they did wear chains about their necks, and bracelets on their arms, and rings of gold at their ears, after the Persian manner, and they ware coloured shoes of a strange fashion.  
They suffered their soldiers to defend the country. Their priests lived in great pleasure, yet chastened. They did use long albes of very fine linen, and some did wear gowns of exceeding fine wool. Their head were covered with miters made of goldsmith's work, & they used all ornaments of gold like to women, except their ear rings. They did chiefly intent the service of their gods, whose deeds the yrecited in music in hymns.  
They bragged that they were descended from jupiter, saying that he came into their country, whenas conversing amongst men, he governed the Empire of the world.  
It was not lawful to transport their gold, silver, or other metals out of the country, no more than for their priests to go out of the temples and sacred places, so that he that was found in any other place, might lawfully be slain, and the murderer was not to be blamed. They did curiously keep those presents which had been in old time given unto their temples. The seat whereon the image of their god stood, was six cubits long, and four broad, and it was all of pure gold very curiously wrought. All the land round about the temple within two hundred stades, was reputed holy, and the revenue which grew thereby was applied to the service of their gods.  
The jews which did sometimes inhabit judea, Samaria, Galilee, and some other countries, received precepts for their course of living from Moses, to whom God prescribed what his people should do. I should be over tedious if I would make a repetition of all their laws; wherefore I will only set down the most remarkable, referring the Reader, touching the rest, to that which the holy Scripture, and josephus hath written.  
First of all, he ordained, That children in their youth should be instructed in the law, as in that which contained all good precepts and instructions: That he which blasphemed the name of God, should be hanged, and left unburied: That nothing that had been gotten by fornication, should be offered in the temple. He instituted in every town seven men, excellent in justice and wisdom, to whom he gave authority to judge of all controversies, calling two Levites unto them, and if there were any great difficulty, he would have it decided by the chief priest of the law. He would not have credit given to one witness alone, but ordained there should be two at the lest, & those without reproach. He would not have a woman admitted for a witness, no more than a man of servile condition. It was forbidden to gather the fruit of any tree but four years after it had been planted, and Moses commanded that they should then begin to pay the tithe. He would have them distribute some part of the first-fruits gathered (the tithe being paid) unto their nearest kinsfolks, and to strangers that were their guests, and that the rest should be his that had planted or sown it. He did forbidden them to hinder passengers, to enter into another man's ground, to gather the first-fruits, where of they had need for their present necessity. He did forbidden them to marry those maids who had publicly exposed themselves, or such as had been formerly married. He ordained, That an unchaste maid, which had been taken in marriage for a virgin, should be stoned, or burned alive. If any one had the company of a maiden which was betrothed to another, & that the fault was committed with both their consents, they were both put to death, and if the maiden were forced, he that had done the violence suffered the punishment. She that had been left a widow without children, the brother of her deceased husband was to marry her, to the end he might continued the race: the which if he did refuse, he was bound to show good reasons for his refusal before judges appointed to that end, who finding his causes just, did suffer him to marry elsewhere. Mourning for the dead, might not exceed thirty days. The son which spoke injurious words to his father or mother, was hanged without the town. It was enacted, That the enemies which should be stain in battle, should be interred. A creditor might not keep a poor debtors pawn above a day, and if the debtor was not able to satisfy, he was bound to serve his creditor until the debt was paid. If any one bought a slave of his own nation, he was to free him within six years. He that found any gold or silver, was to cry it publicly. Whosoever found any stray beast, was bound to carry it back to the troop, or to keep it until the owner came to fetch it. Who so was convicted to have offered poison to any one, was forced to take it himself. He that had caused another to lose an eye, had one of his own put out. If a bull had been the cause of the death of any man, it was beaten down with stones, and none might eat of the flesh. The son should not suffer in his body or goods for his father's offence, nor contrariwise. M●yses' did also ordain, That things taken by force from his people by foreign nations, or by any of the same nation, should first be demanded by Heralds, and in case of refusal, they should denounce war. If they were to besiege an enemy, it was not lawful to touch any fruit trees. All rebels were to be punished with death, and those enemies which did yield themselves voluntarily, should be tributaries. In time of war it was not lawful for women to manage arms which men did use. It was forbidden to eat the flesh of any beasts. Lepers, and such as had an issue of blood, were expelled out of towns. They in whose house any one was dead, were to absent themselves out of the town seven days. No woman which had been delivered of a male child, might enter into the Temple, until forty days after her delivery, and she that had brought forth a female, was to forbear eighty days. He that had disinherited the chastity of his wife, was to offer a cake of barley flower in the temple, and then present her at the doors of the temple; whereas the priest examineth her upon her oath, If she had been chaste? and after the oath taken, if she had forsworn herself, she presently had a dislocation, or an unknitting of her huckle bone, with a purrifaction of her belly, and this miserable woman died in this sort: If she had lived chastened, she was delivered of the fruit of her womb within ten months, without any pain and then the priest did wipe out her name which was written in parchment, and and gave her drink. All adulterers, incestuous persons, and Sodomites, were punished with death. Priests which had not their members whole and sound, were forbidden to approach near unto the Altar, and yet they were to be nourished of that which was offered in the temple. All lands held by the jews, was to lie still every seven years. All land which bore fruit of itself, was common once in fifty years, as well to them of the country, as to strangers; and this was called the year of jubilee. Creditors were then to give a longer time unto their debtors, or to acquit them of a part. Slaves were to be set at liberty, and lands sold at an under rate, were restored to them that sold them.  
The Israelites above all other people have been very religious, and given to ceremonies. In the beginning they used two kinds of sacrifices, whereof the first was called Holocaustum, and was made by the richer sort, wherein the beast that was sacrificed might not be above a year old. The priests did sprinkle the corner of the Altar with the blood of the beast sacrificed, and afterwards cut it in pieces, and burned it upon the Altar. The people of meaner condition, did sacrifice beasts of more age, and having poured the blood upon the Altar, they put the reins, the fat, and bowels, into the fire; the priests had the right thighs, and the rest was to be eaten by them that made the sacrifice within two days after. They that were poorer, were bound to offer a pair of Pigeons, or two Turtle doves, whereof the one was sacrificed, and the other belonged unto the priest. He that committed any crime by mischance, was to offer a sheep of a year old, or a goat. He that felt himself guilty of any secret crime, was to sacrifice a sheep. The priests entertained themselves in the temple with the flesh of all these beasts. We must observe, that in sacrifices, both public and private, they used a measure of flower to the sacrifice of a lamb; to a ram, a double measure; and to that of a bull, three measures. They had also a custom to sprinkle their sacrifices with oil. They sacrificed a lamb every day, once in the morning, and once at night. On the Sabbath day, they made a double sacrifice. The first day of every month, they did sacrifice two oxen, and seven lambs, a ram, and a goat, to purge sins. Also, they added two goats, whereof the one was put out of the temple, and served for the sins of the people; the other was carried into the suburbs, and burnt. In March, & in the beginning of their year, whenas the Moon was full, and the Sun passed by the sign of Aries, they made the sacrifice of the Paschallambe, for that they came out of Egypt at the same time. They did observe certain days of the Azimes, or unleavened bread, and during every one of these days, they burned in their sacrifices, two bulls, a ram, & seven lambs, with a goat. The second kind of sacrifice of the Azimes, was at the first coming of new first-fruits, and corn, which they presented in the temple, with a certain measure of oil, and a lamb for a Holocaust. Much more may be spoken of this subject, but it would require a whole volume: wherefore it shall suffice to have touched the principal points.  
Sacred and profane Authors agreed not touching the jews: for Cornelius Tacitus (who refers not the going of the children of Israel out of Egypt, and their passage to judea to the will of God) writes, That there happened a kind of scab at that time in Egypt, the which was very troublesome: so as king Bochoris was forced to demand a remedy of jupiter Hammon; to whom the oracle made answer, That he must purge his realm of the jews, who were unpleasing unto the gods, and sand them to live in some other place: the which he did, and in the end an infinite company of people infected with this scab, being drawn together in one place, one amongst them called Moses, prevailed so with them, as he persuaded them not to believe either in God or man, but in him only, and in this sort they took the first way which fortune offered them, and went by hazard; that during their travel, they had no trouble, but only thirst, wherewith they had perished, if they had not discovered a troop of wild asses, the which having fed, drew towards a rock, covered with a forest that was round about it, where having found water, they received from Moses' ceremonies quite contrary to those of other men. He saith also, that in the holiest places of their Temple, they did set up the image of an affe, by the which they had found the place where they quenched their thirst, and had been set in a good way to come into the country, where since they made their abode, and that they sacrificed a ram to mock at jupiter Hammon, and an ox in contempt of the Egyptians, who worshipped this beast under the name of the god Apis. He saith moreover, that the jews abstain from eating of swine's flesh, to avoid scabs and leprosy, whereunto this beast is subject, and that they forbear all work upon the seventh day, for that they were at rest upon that day, and for the same reason they pass the seventh year without doing any thing, and that some affirm it was in honour of Saturn, by reason of the hunger which they had endured. According to the same author, they did never banquet one with another: they lodged apart, and were inclined to whoredom. They first thing they, did was to contemn the gods. They were of opinion, that those which died in battle, or for any crime were eternal, and that all should go to heaven to or hell, according to the good or evil, which they had done.  
There were three sects among the jews, who had a different kind of living from the common sort. The first was of Pharasies', the second of Saducees, and the third of Esseniens. The Pharisies led an austere life in show, interpreting the law of Moses according to their own will. They carried papers upon their foreheads and left arms, wherein the ten commandments of the law were written. These papers were called Phylacteries. They also ware greater embroideries upon their gowns, and they sowed thorns in them, to the end their pricking might put them in mind of the commandments of the law. They did attribute all things to God, and predestination. It is true, they confess that the inclination of man did help them to do or contemn things that were just; yet that in all things man was led by destiny, the which they say did consist in the motion of the celestial bodies. They did never contradict the opinion of their ancients and masters. They did attend the judgement of God at the end of the world, and they did hold that the souls of men were incorruptible, and that only the souls of such as lived well, passed from one body into another, until the day of the resurrection, and that these of the wicked were sent into perpetual prison. The Saduces denied this destiny, saying that God knew all things, but it was in the disposition of man to do good or evil. As for the dead, they were of opinion, that after this life they felt neither joy nor torment. They denied the resurrection of the dead, believing that the soul perished with the body, neither did they think that there were any Angels. They received only the five books of Moses. They were very severe, and did confer little among themselves. The Esseniens lived altogether like unto Monks, and they did abstain from marriage, and from the company of women, not in detestation of marriage, or for any desire they had that mankind should perish, but only for fear of the lightness and incontinency of women, whom they hold to be faithless and unconstant to their husbands. Theybrought all their goods in common, and held it a dishonour to use ointments and stones; and contrariwise, they held it for an honourable thing to be careless of their persons, and that it was sufficient to have their white gowns. They did not speak of any worldly thing before the rising of the Sun, but they prayed unto God that the Sun might rise, and then every man set his hand to some work, until five of the clock, whenas they washed their bodies in water, and took their refection with great silence. It was held unlawful amongst them to swear, and they did accounted it as great and grievous a sin, as to foresweare themselves. They did not receive any into their sect, before he had been a probationer for the space of a year, and having received him, they made two years trial to know his manners: if they found him in sin, they chased him from their company, and enjoined him to eat nothing but herbs, and to do that penance unto the last moment of his life. When ten of them were sitting together, not any one of them durst speak any thing without the consent of the other nine. They did forbear to spit before them, or on the right hand; and they did observe the Sabbath so strictly, as they durst not do their necessary business, and whenas they did them, they carried with them a stake, with the which they made a hole in the ground, to the intent that they might hide it; so much they feared to do any thing that might be in contempt of the divine light. They lived long, by reason of their simple and and spare diet, eating for the most part nothing but the fruit of palm trees. They used no gold nor silver in coin: and they held him most happy that died for the zeal of justice. They said, that although the souls were created from the beginning, yet every one took his body in a certain time, and that those which went out of the bodies in an estate of mountie and innocency, went to live beyond the Ocean, in a certain place whereas they enjoyed all pleasures; whereas on the other side, those which left the bodies in a bad estate, went into places that were inhabitable by reason of the extremity of cold. Some amongst them did foretell things to come: and some also did marry, but they had the company of their wives seldom: and they said, that they took wives lest they should be an example to other men to suffer all the world to perish, if they should have altogether abstained.  
They of Cappadocia were of that disposition, as they could not live without kings, and they say, that in old time they were very wicked. It is said that the Amazons did live in this country near unto the river of Thermodon. In Dorida, jonia, and Eolia, there have been very rare and excellent men, who have written better than any other of Greece. The Phrygians were the first that invented Southsaying, the flute, and the instrument of three strings. In Lycia, the town of Telmese was famous by reason of Southsaying, and the interpretation of dreams. The Sicilians have been held great 〈◊〉. The Pheniciens invented letters and navigation, and had more commerce with foreign nations than any other people. The Idumeans were in old time barbarous, mutinous and seditious, and loved innovations.   

¶ The Manners at this day.  
IN Anatolia, the middle part of the country is inhabited by people which are of base condition. The natural Turks which do remain in all this country are more simple and rude than any other neither are they so cruel, as they which have left the Christian religion. There is not any nobility by race, but they are all equal, and are held by the Turks in manner of slaves. The country men are altogether idle and slothful, taking little pains to till and manure the ground, especially, they which are of the richer sort; and if their slaves did not the labour, the land would be soon desert and waist. Cappadocia is inhabited by Grecians, Turks, jews, Arabians, and Armenians. There are few people that remain in Cilicia, and such as do inhabit in that country, as Belon reporteth, are neither given to the taking of fish, nor to make voyages by sea, and they leave their land ill husbandred and manured, although it be very good, and ●●th many rivers to water it. In Idumea, the inhabitants of Catia use pigeons to sand advice to Cairo of that which passeth. They tie letters under their wings, and they never stay until they come to the pigeon house of the castle, whereas they found their companions. It is six days journey from one place unto another, and by desert countries.  
Palestina hath inhabitants in a manner of all nations, as of Arabians, Turks, jews, Grecians, Syrians, Armenians, Georgians, Nubiens, Abyssines, Indians, Egyptians, and some of other nations. Galilee is inhabited for the most part by Arabians, who are little and small of stature, and they carry a long doliman or coat, which h●ng● down to the calf of the leg, being made of goat's hair, white and black. They wear upon it a gown longer than the doliman, with sleeves which be long and wide, they have black caps, and pointed. In their wars, they use bows, swords, and dagger's.  
As for judea, there are many people of all nations which go to I●rusalem, and which devil there, and whosoever will enter into the Holy Sepulchre, must pay nine crowns. Pilgrims which come thither are received according to the religion whereof they make profession. The Latins are entertained by the religious of the order of S. Francis, who live without the town upon Mount Zion; the Grecians are received by the Caloyers which live within the city, near to the Holy Sepulchre, and the rest, as Abissins', Georgians, Armenians, Nestorians, Maronites, and others, lodge with them of their sect, whereof every one hath a particular chapel. The religious of the order of S. Francis, who are for the most part Italians, have been accustomed to created knights of the Holy Sepulchre, and their great masters give patents to Pilgrims, which are sent thither to certify that they have been there. Near unto Rama, there are none but Greeks, Turks, and Arabians, who are very careful to manure and trim their vines. The Idumeans are in a manner like to the Arabians, their neighbours, in behaviour.  
The Arabians are swart, witty, subtle, superstitious, given to traffic, desirous of revenge and troubles, loving innovations, and the change of affairs. They are all in a manner thieves, and do much annoyed travelers. They have more subtlety and industry than force; they fight without order, and trusting in their numbers, they charge their enemies on every side, until they have put them to rout. Whenas their enemies assail them, they are as soon dispersed, and do sometime fly very suddenly. They are wonderfully given to w●mens, and marry many, suffering not any one to go abroad but with their face covered. Many of them live under Palm trees, and in rocks, or in houses which are under ground. They go half naked, and wear cloaks and wide breeches. Their arms are a bow and arrows, with long darts. They that travel through Arabia the Desert, govern themselves by the stars, by reason of the sands, and it is not safe traveling these, unless one be well accompanied, in regard of the Arabian thieves, and withal, he must carry victuals with him for many days. The inhabitants of Arabia Petrea, live for the most part of Dates, the which is the best and the most wholesome meat they have. Upon the shore of the Read Sea, they do salt and dry great store of fish in the Sun, the which keeps long. In Arabia the Happy, there are many which apply themselves only to the keeping of cattles, and others give themselves to the trade of merchandise.  
Those that are right Arabians, lodge under Tents, and they that live in towns are called Moors, they live most commonly of cakes roasted upon the embers. Oil is one of their greatest delights. Their treasure consists in camels, in some horses, and in their arms, which they leave for an inheritance. They never shoe their horses, and use very light saddles. They have a great conceit of their nobility.  
The inhabitants of Turcomania are great thieves, who draw their beginning from the Tattarians, and spend their lives under Tents, keeping their flocks: yet there are some borne in the country which give themselves to tillage, and to mechannique arts. There is good repestrie, and chamlet, both watered and plain, made there.  
The Curds use the like manners. The Georgians are many in number, and exceeding valiant, especially they that live in the mountains. They are very strong, and have maintained their liberty unto our days among the Mahometans, but they have been forced in the end to yield unto the Turks.   

¶ The Riches.  
THe principal revenue of Anatolia, consists in Cotton, which grows there abundantly. Bythinia hath Opiment, which it imparts unto other nations. Caria makes a good revenue of the Adarnant stone which it sends forth. Galatia hath mines of copper, which yields them great profit yearly. The Pamphylians make great sums of money of their chamlets, which are the best that can be seen. The Capadocians are enriched by their silver, iron, alum, crystal, jaspis, onyx stone, and alabaster. The Cilicians make great store of Chamlets of Goat's hair, for the which they receive much money from strangers. They of judea reap much profit by Pilgrims which go every year to the Holy Supulchre. Phenicia is a country of great traffic, and much frequented: but Arabia the Happy exceeds them all in merchandise, and is exceeding rich, by reason of the spices, precious stones, and pea●leses, which the inhabitants cell to Merchant strangers which trade there: Among other things, it yields Incense sufficient for all the rest of the world. Mecca is a place of great traffic, whether many merchants come from Aethiopia, the Indies, and many other places: It is much enriched every year by reason of the Pilgrimages, as in li●e 〈◊〉 Medina. As for Aden it is a place of more traffic than any other, and exceeding rich, by reason of the abundance of commodities which are brought thither from the Indies, Aethiopia, and Persia, the which arefetcht from thence, and sold by the Merchants at a dear rate; for those people are very witty in matters of traffic.   

¶ The Forces.  
FIrst of all, the town of Bu●sia in Bythinia, whereas the Turkish emperors in former times made the● residence, is reasonably well fortified. In Caramania stands the town of Laranda, whose fort is much esteemed, as well for the situation, as for the workmanship and structure. Amasia is in Paphlagonia, where there is a strong castle built upon a hill, where the Turk entertains a good garrison. The city of Trebisonde in Cappadocia is not contemned, for that it is a place of good importance, and well fortified since the Turk held it. In the country of Ayaman in Arabia, there are three great towns which are exceeding strong, that is, Manta, Nazua, and Bala, with a great number of good castles. A den is strong, and hath good bastions, with an exceeding strong castle. The port is well fortified; and the Turk entertains a great garrison there. He hath also a Bassa at Zibit, with some thousands of soldiers.  
As for Syria, the castle of Damas' is exceeding good, and that of Antioch is not to be contemned. In Comagena, the town of Aleppo is of great importance, and the castle buil● on the side of a hill, makes it more strong. The rest that is to be seen in all these country's is of no great note or reckoning: and moreover, I should be very indiscreet to spend more time about it, seeing I have a design to discourse in general of the Turks forces.   

¶ The Religion.  
BEsides the Mahometans which remain in all these countries whereof we have made mention, there are many others of divers religions and sects, whereof we will here make some mention, yet leaving that which we have formerly spoken of: first of all there are Jews which are dispersed over all these countries; and as for Christians, there are some which obey the Church of Rome, and others which live divided. As for the first, besides the merchants of Venice, Ragouse, France, and other places, which traffic in great numbers to Tripoli, Damas', Aleppo, and to some other towns of Asia and Surya, and are assisted in spiritual things by the religious of the order of S. Francis, which devil in Jerusalem, and at Bethelem, they found few that live among the Armenians after the manner of the Latin Church. Alangiacana is a castle, two days journey from Tauris, the which hath five and twenty villages under her jurisdiction, that acknowledge the Romish Church, although they speak the Armenian tongue.  
The inhabitants of these places were converted by father Bartholomew of Bolonia, of the order of S. Dominick, who was made Bishop of Armenia, in the year of our Lord God 1337, under Pope john the twelfth. At that time (as we have said) there were five 〈◊〉 ●wentie villages; but at this day there are but twelve that persist in the obedience of the C●u●ch of Rome, and of the other thirteen. Some have submitted themselves to the Patriarch of High Armenia, and the others have been ruined during the wars which the Turks have had against the Persians: and these twelve villages of the Latins make about one thousand and two hundred families. They are assisted in spiritual matters by the religious of Saint Dominicke, under an Archbishop of the same order, who is made by their Chapter, and by the chief of the villages, and then confirmed by the Pope.  
It is not long since that the Latins had Churches at Bursia and Trebysonde: but for want of priests, the Churches, and Latin ceremonies have been lost: so as the religion of the Armenians, or that of the Grecians hath succeeded them.  
Let us now come to the other Christians, which are divided into three sects, that is to say, into Melchites, Nestorians and Dioscoriens. The Melchites have drawn this name from Melech, which is to say, king or prince, for that those have followed (as well in the faith, as in councils) the example of the Emperors of Constantinople, and of this sect, are all they which in Asia hold the religion of the Grecians, under the patriarchs of Constatinople, Alexandria, Antioch, and jerusalem, whereof he of Antioch remains not at Antioch, but at Damas. These four patriarchs are chosen by the Bishops of the country, and now they seek no confirmation from the Pope, as they did in former times; but they demand liberty to make their election from the Turks Bassa, and confirmation from the Turk himself, and they exercise their jurisdiction under this authority which is given them. The patriarchs choose and consecrated the Archbishops and Bishops which were subject unto them. It is true that some have recourse unto the Pope to receive confirmation from him. All these patriarchs, Melchites, and their Archbishops and Bishops are Monks of S. Basil, of which order there are many convents through out all the Levant: but the most famous are those of S. Sabe in jerusalem, of S. Katherine upon Mount Sinai, and of the holy mountain upon the Archipelagus. These Melchites retain all the errors which were in old time condemned by the Grecians at the Council of Florence, and it is thought their be more of this sect in the East, than of all the rest; for all Anatolia is full, and in like manner Suria, and it extends into Egypt, and beyond it into Corazzan, a province of Persia. They do also put the Georgians among the Melchites, who acknowledge under, one Metropolitan, the authority of the Patriarch of Constantinople. These call upon S. George, as their Advocate. There are some among them which have made themselves Mahometans.  
There are also Nestorians in this part which we have described, of whose errors we have spoken in the discourse of the Sophy's Estate. These Nestorians speak the Chaldean, Arabian, and the Turkish tongues, with that of Curdestan, according to the places whereas they live; but they celebrat divine service in the Chaldean tongue.  
Moreover there are Dioscoriens, which are divided into three sects, that is to say, Armeni●nss, jacobites, and Costs. The Armeniens give the title of Patriarch to many of their Prelates, made partly by the Turks favour, (for these farm the impositions and tributes which the Armenian houses pay unto the Turk) and are chosen by Coadjutors of the said patriarch, with the consent of the Bishops or people. But they give not the title of universal Patriarch but to two, where of the one is established over high Armenia, and the other over the lower. The first remains in the monastery of Ecmeazin, near unto the town of Eruan in Persia, and the latter in the town of Sister in Caramania, near unto Tarsis. This sect of Armenians is not much less than that of the Melchites: for the towns and provinces of the two Armenia's, of Cilicia, Bythinia, Surya, and Mesopotamia, are full of them; yea there are good numbers in Persia. Moreover there are an infinite number of Armenians in all the towns of the Ottomans Empire, where there is any traffic, as at Bursia, Angora, Trebisonde, Alexandria, Cairo, Constantinople, and Caffa. The reasons why they have so great liberty in all the Turks Estate, is (besides that they are witty and politic in trade) in regard of certain testimonies of affection, which their predecessors gave to Mahomet, who did recommend them passionately to his successors; so as they have enjoyed great privileges, by means whereof, they traffic freely with the Mahometans. The Armenians devil at Sister in Ad, at Matas, and thereabouts, at Tharsis, at Lajazze in Aleppo, and at D●randa. There are about twenty thousand families of them. They have eighteen monasteries, and four and twenty Bishops.  
There is to be seen at Sis, the palace, and ruins of the king of Armenia's castle, with two Churches which are near unto it, the one of S. saviours, which was the kings, and the other of S. Sophia, which did belong unto the patriarch. They have no other images but crosses of brass and iron, yet they have divers relics in shrines of silver. The patriarch was wound to take a maidin, which is the value of a penny, of every household: but the Turk hath taken this right from him; so as he now lives of offerings and alms: and to maintain himself more easy, he doth visit the province continually, and entertains 〈◊〉 family with amerciaments which he imposeth upon them that offend. The Armenians say service in their own language, although they speak many others, and 〈…〉 so use the Turkish tongue at Constantionople, as they can scarce say the Pater 〈◊〉 in the Armenian.  
Th●y have many errors which are common to them and to the Dioscoriens; but those which they have particular to themselves, are, that they consecrat with pure wine: they eat figs and milk, on the Saturday at night before Easter, and flesh every Friday, from Easter unto the Ascension. They celebrat the Annunciation of the Virgin the sixth of April, and the Nativity of our Lord, the sixth of januarie, the Purification, the fourteenth of February. They assure that jesus Christ was exempt from passions, and the necessities of human nature. They abstain during five Saturdays of the year to kill any flesh, and to buy any, in remembrance of the time when the Idolaters took their children, and sacrificed them to Idols. In their Mass for the dead they bless a lamb, and putting it under the priest's gown, they give it hallowed salt to eat, and then they carry it about the Church before they kill it, the Mass being done they eat it. By reason of these things, some call them Sabbatins, and julianists, and addicted to the ceremonies of the jews, and the heresy of julian the Apostate. Yet they think themselves to be conformable to the Roman Church, for that they alone, of all the Eastern sectaries, celebrat the sacrament with unleavened bread: and whereas they put no water in their wine, they say that the Latin Church used it in old time. They also make the sign of the Cross with two fingers, and not with one like unto the jacobites; and they make it first on the right side, and then on the left, contrary to the jacobites. They remember their first union with the Church of Rome, in the time of Pope Silvester, and of the Emperor Constantin.  
To come unto the jacobites, you must understand that Dioscores and Eutyches dissenting from the Council of Chalcedonia, had followers who divided themselves, as Leoncius writes, into twelve sects, among which, was that of the jacobites, so called of one jacob a Syrian, who lived in the time of Pelagius the second, and of the Emperor Mauricius. They comprehended under this name a part of the Chaldeans, which dwell in the towns and villages of Mesopotamia, Babylon, and Suria, to the number of one hundred and sixty thousand families, or thereabouts, and the principal are in Aleppo, at Caramit, and in Tur, a mountain of Mesopotamia.  
They were in former times subject to two patriarchs, whereof the one remained in the foresaid mountain of Tur, and the other in the monastery of Gifran, near to the town of Mordin, which stands upon so high a mountain, as they that live there (as the Turks say) never see any birds flying over their heads. But at this day, the jacobites have but one Patriarch, which is he of Gifran, who for his greater commodity lives at Caramit. This Patriarch hath under him a Metropolitan in jerusalem, and another at Musali, and Archbishops at Damas', Or●e, Saur, Caramit, and in Cypress; and he hath other Archbishops in the aforesaid provinces, with many monasteries of religious men of the order of S. Antony.  
The jacobites celebrat in the Chaldean tongue, and speak Arabian, Turkish, and Armenian. Besides their errors common with the Armenians, they have others. They make the sign of the Cross with the singer next unto their thumbs, to signify an unity of nature of will, and of operation in jesus Christ. They eat (contrary to the rule and general custom of the Christians of the East) milk and flesh on Wednesday, and Friday at night after Sun let, saying, That when the day is ended, the term of abstinence is past, and that the Thursday and Saturday are begun, and so they eat flesh all the year long but in Lent. Some Arabians, which remain in the same villages and places where the jacobites live, have united themselves unto them, and are called by the name of Xemsinir, that is to say, Solaires, for that among their other superstitions, they worship and adore the Sun.  
Some think that the Maronits' are a branch of the jacobites: for these two sects were in old time subject to the Patriarch of Antioch, the which is now in the hands of the Melchites, and remains at Damas': both use the Chaldean tongue, and the same Syrian characters. They had the same errors touching the unity, will, and operation of jesus▪ Christ: Both pretend the Patriarchship of Antioch, so as the Patriarches of the jacobites, leaving their proper name, take that of Ignatius, and they of the Maronits', that of Peter, and both call themselves Patriarches of Antioch. They derive the name of Maronits', either from Marona a village of Mount Lybanon, or from the Abbot Maron, or as it is generally held, from Maron the Arch heretic. It is the lest sect among all the Christians of the East, there being not above twelve thousand households, and most of them poor. They live in the villages of Mount Lybanon, and in the towns of Surya: yet this sect is most affected to the See of Rome, whereof it hath made profession these four hundred years; and Peter, Patriarch of the Maronits', sent Ambassadors to the Council of Latran, in the year of our Lord God 1515, Pope Gregory sent two jesuits unto them, who having caused a Synod to be called, whereas the Patriarch and his Bishops met, they brought them to a full profession of the Catholic faith: so as they burned their books, which were full of errors, and drew their religious men into two monasteries, being dispersed here and there, giving order that children might be instructed in the Christian religion.  
The Patriarch of the Maronits' is of the order of S. Anthony. He is chosen by the Bishops and religious men, and then confirmed by the Pope. His residence is at Tripoli of Surya. There are some convents of S. Anthony, and a small number of Bishops, who having no certain abode, are as it were his assistants. Among other Saints, they pray unto Maron; but they say that it is not that Arch-hereticke, but an Abbot of a very holy life. Among the Maronits' they found some which are called white, who not being baptized, call themselves Christians, and are confessed, and do communicate in secret, and yet in outward show they live like Mahometans.  
The Curds are for the most part jocobits and Nestorians, but with many other errors, and a wonderful ignorance of divine things. There are also many Mahometans among them.    

¶ A DISCOURSE OF THE TURKS IN GENERAL.  

¶ The manners at this day.  
THe Turks are partly Origina●ieses, and draw their beginning from the Scythians or Tartarians, and part of them descend from Christians Apostotats. They are for the most part broad faced, their members are well proportioned, and they are naturally big and strong. They do not suffer their hair to grow, but only their moustaches. They are but gross witted, slow, and idle, and slack in their affairs. They are nothing fit for labour. They are exceeding covetous, and love money above all the nations of the world: for justice is sold in Turkey (as a man would say) to him that offers most, and the Turks do no man a kindness without a fe●. They are humble among themselves, and obey their superiors strictly, keeping ●●at silence, and being very still before them. But they are insupportable, proud to strangers, infolent, bragger's, and so arrogant, as they think there▪ is not any nation in the world that may be compared to theirs. They show much vain glory and pride in the●● speech; they are deceitful, and never keep their words, but when it may be beneficial unto them. Moreover, they are idle, and given to gluttony and drunkenness; so as they will sometimes spend three whole days together in feasting, and they do willingly drink wine, yea with excess, notwithstanding that their law forbids it; for the ordinary drink of the better sort is water mixed with sugar, and damask Rose water, or 〈◊〉 the decoction of prunes, raisins, figs, pears, and other first-fruits, the which they use 〈◊〉 in Summer, with y●e, which they keep in Caves, to drink cool: but they that observe the law of the Koran strictly, drink no wine. They are much inclined to whoredom, and are for the most part Sodomites: the which they do usually practise in their galleys and ships, where they have always some that are forced to endure that accursed practice. They believe lightly, and are wonderfully superstitious, giving credit to dreams and divinations; and they hold that the destiny of every man, and the hour of hi● death is written on his forehead, and that no man can fly that hour: the which makes them run to rashly into dangers.  
The Turks haves permission to marry as many wives as they can entertain. After a Turkish woman is great with child, the husband toucheth her no more until she be delivered, but he lies with his ●lavess, out of the house where his wife remains. The Turks have a kind of marriage made at pleasure, which they call Kebin, the which is often practised by strangers, who being out of their country, make an agreement with certain women, whom they enjoy during their pleasure, and when they cast them off, they are bound to give them a certain sum of Aspres, and to keep the children. The judges, whom they call Cadis, forbidden this Kebin, especially amongst Christians, unless it be with an oath of marriage. A Turk having had the use of a Christian woman, is condemned to die, and in like manner the woman, unless she receive the law of Mahomet: the like is observed betwixt a Christian and a Turkish woman, if they have been found together. Divorce is allowed among them, in cases of incontinency and barrenness, whereof the judge deputed for those matters may take knowledge. Bondslaves which are bought, may also marry, but the children which are borne of that conjunction, remain slaves. The women go seldom out of their lodgings, and their faces are always covered. They are gorgeously attired, and wear much gold and precious stones; and they have also a custom to die their hair, hands, and feet, red; but especially their nails. They go to the stoves or hothouses twice a week, like unto the men.  
The Turks play neither at cards nor dice. They are charitable, and give great alms, not only to them of their own sect, but also to Christians, and to men of all professions: yea they show themselves charitable to beasts, for that they sometimes buy birds, and set them at liberty, as it were for charity sake. Their garments are long, and open before unto the foot, except the shirt, which they wear without their breeches, so as it is sometimes seen as they go. Their clothes are of fine wool, and silk, embroidered sometimes with pearl and precious stones. Their Turban is white; but they that term themselves kinsmen to Mahomet, wear it green. They never take off their Turban whenas they will salute any one, and do him honour; and with them the left hand is most honourable. They that are rich, and hold any rank among them, go most commonly on horseback. They are slovenly in their feeding, and have not those delights and dainties that are among us. They eat thrice a day, that is to say, at the break of day, at noon, and at night. They use not any table cloth, or napkins, and they sit not at the table upon stools, or in chairs, but on the ground, cross legged like unto Tailors, and in this manner they sit about a round table, which is very low.  
They eat all kind of flesh except it be swine's flesh, which is forbidden by their law. They feed most commonly upon rice, and the Turks of Asia do not willingly eat any fish, but they of Europe love it much better than flesh. They that are good observers of their law, as I have said, abstain from wine, and drink nothing but water, in which they use in Winter to quench a hot burning coal, lest it should offend them. Moreover, the Turks use the juice of poppy much, and there is not any one amongst them but takes it to make them the more hardy, and not to fear dangers. They sit down when they make water.  
Their houses are for the most part of timber and earth, and are little and and ill built, and they hold it for a great sin to build any houses that last above a man's life: yet they make fair Mosques or Temples, and goodly Hospitals to receive strangers when they pass, as also public baths, to the which they add fair fountains, not only for the commodity of men, but also of beasts; and to the end they may have places fit and convenient to wash themselves in, before they enter into the temples. Moreover, they are very curious to make aqueducts or conducts of water, and public bridges, and to pave high ways, all which things are very stately in Turkey.  
They always study how to have the advantage of their neighbours, and what they cannot get by force, they seek to obtain it by subtlety and treachery. If their enterprises succeed not happily, they are not ashamed to run away: yet they are reasonable good soldiers, and their best property is, they are careful to observe military discipline. They are very obedient to their commanders, enduring labour, and all discommodities patiently; and they content themselves with little meat, and that very course. The arms they use are lances, bows, battaile-axes, and swords, which they commonly call Scymeters, the which they most commonly enrich with gold and silver. They use great silence and modesty, not only whenas they camp or stay in any place, but also when they march: for although their numbers be great, yet they most commonly part from any place before day so silently, as few of the neighbours can discover them. They use no engines, guidons, or standards, but they have a lance, which hath certain tassels of divers colours on the top of it, by means whereof every man knows how to retire himself to his company: yet they have drums and mischiefs to encourage the soldiers.  
When the Turkish Emperor is in any war, the Turks which remain in towns pray for the soldiers which are in the camp, as well in their feasts, as in their assemblies at their temples. They also pray for them that are stain in any fight, and hold them happy to have ended their days after that manner, and not amidst the tears and sighs of their wives. They describe the victories of their ancestors, and sing them very willingly, believing that this doth avail much to encourage the soldiers, and to make them more resolute in all their enterprises.  
They use no kind of seal, either in the king's patents, or in any other letters, neither do they mark them with any figure. They have no bells, neither do they suffer the Christians which live in their country to have any. They put off their shoes whenas they enter into their mosquees, and take them again at their coming forth. Wheresoever they sit either in their houses or in their temples, they have tapistry coverlets, or mats, and there are some places which they 'cause to be planchered, for that they are too low, or else very dyrtie. They are not much given to contemplation, nor to learning: yet the Turkish women being married, and having issue, are very careful to breed up their children, and being of age to learn, they 'cause them to be instructed; for which there are goodly schools, whereas they read the laws published by their princes, in which the children are instructed, to the end they may serve in their mosquees, and be capable to govern the commonweal.  
As for the prince's children, they are-taught by an old doctor called Hogea, to read the Arabian and Turkish tongues, the which are very difficult; and being able to read them, they do so often repeat the Alcoran unto them, as they learn it all by hart, the which not only the prince's children, but others do also learn: and they that are apt for study, are instructed in the liberal sciences, especially in Astrology, Philosophy, and Poetry, but not in History, or Rhetoric, saying, that there is no credit to be given to Histories, and that during a prince's life, no man speaks truth of him, and that being dead, his memory is lost: and as for Rhetoric that it is not necessary, for that nature delivers her meaning in few words: and therefore the Turks have no advocates to breed delays in their suits, as it is general in most parts of Christendom. Whenas the child is come to the age of fourteen, being circumcised, he is put into a Serrail, there to be trained up in the exercise of arms, and to learn to ride, and he is carefully kept (I speak of the prince's son) lest some rogue or quean should corrupt and debosh him. Christian slaves are bred up by the prince in his Serrail, whom he calls his children, and they are made noble for their lives, but this title of nobility goes not to their issue. In those places they study, and are trained up in arms, as the women be to sow and embroider.  
The Emperor of the Turks hath a great number of them in divers Serrails, and many times there are above three hundred in that of Constantinople: the which number increaseth or decreaseth according to his wars; for that the fairest women that can be found are brought unto the Turk: of all these, the Sultania is lady and mistress, which is she whom the great Turk favours most, and having had issue by her, she is held for the first, and chiefest of all his women: the rest as they are in grace with the prince, are brought unto him to have his pleasure of them, and then they are sent back again: if happily they be with child, they are put into the number of the Sultanias, and much countenanced by the prince, who doth greatly augment their means and revenues. They that are not pleasing to the prince (for that they are not beautiful) learn to low, embroider, and to make divers excellent works, which certain old matrons teach them, being entertained to that end; and if any desire to learn to read and writ, they have eunuches among them to teach them. They are all very well bred and entertained, and are appareled in silk twice a year. Such as the prince hath had the use of, yet have no children by them, having learned qualities sit for great ladies, are given in marriage to the prince's slaves, which are advanced to dignities, and made governors of some countries or frontiers.  
The Turkish women are never seen in any assemblies of men, and they are strictly forbidden to go to market to buy or fell in any sort whatsoever: and in the great Mosque, they have a place separated from that of men, and so close, that no man may see them, or enter into them. It is a rare thing to see a man speak to a woman in public, once in a year. They that are married never dally with their wives in the presence of others, and the husbands hold their reputation and gravity with their wives, who on the other side honour them much.  
Great noblemen which cannot remain continually with their wives, leave them under the charge of certain eunuchs, who keep them in such sort, as it is impossible for them to do wrong unto their honours, or that any one should have their companies, but their husbands.  
The Turks do not circumcise their children the eight day after their birth, but when the infant is come to the age of knowledge, to make confession of his faith after this manner, lifting up his finger, he speaks these words, which are graven in their temples in the Arabian tongue: There is but one God, whose Prophet Mahomet is, one God, and equal Prophets. The circumcision being ended, they feast three days together, and then the circumcised is carried to a bath with great pomp, and the guests carry him back to the house, where they present him with gifts. Some give him apparel of silk, others silver vessel, some money, and some horses, according to the quality of the circumcised. The women give shirts, handkerchefs, and such like, and every one gives according to their will and means. The women are not circumcised, but only speak the foresaid words. If any Christian doth willingly confess Mahomet, and endure circumcision, the which doth often happen by reason of the insupportable yoke, and charge of tributes, they lead him throughout all the streets, and public places of the town, with great honour, and rejoicing of the people, by the sound of a drum, to whom they also give, and then he is free from the paying of any tribute: so as many Grecians and Albanoides, by reason of this gain and advantage, accept of circumcision.   

¶ The Riches.  
THe Turks empire comprehends countries that abound in all things: for there is not any country richer in wheat, and all other grain, than Egypt, Africa, Surya, and Asia; nor that is more plentiful of all other things, than Hungary, Greece, and Thrace. In all his countries, he hath towns whose wealth is inestimable, as Constantinople, Cairo, Aleppo, and many others. Constantinople is a city whether merchants come from all parts, and in a manner all the silver of the Turks empire is employed there. Aleppo is the greatest town of Surya, and as it were the centre and place whether all the traffic of Asia comes. Cairo is as it were the Store house, not only of the riches of Egypt, and of a good part of Africa, but also of the Indies, whose treasures being brought into these parts by the Read Sea, and afterwards upon camels, are distributed into countries which lie upon the Mediterranean Sea.  
As for the great Turk's revenues, some are of opinion, that he hath but eight millions of gold for his ordinary revenues; and they say, that although in appearance he should have much more, by reason of his great and large dominions, yet it proves otherwise; for that the Turks have no care but of arms, which (in all men's judgements) are fit to ruin and destroy, than to preserve and enrich a country: and moreover, the Turks, to entertain their armies, and to continued their enterprises begun, consume men in such abundant sort, as they scarce leave sufficient to manage their domestical and necessary affairs, by reason whereof, the subjects despairing ever to enjoy their wealth, not not necessary commodities which they might get by their labour and industry, employ not themselves to work, nor in traffic, no farther than bore necessity doth enforce and constrain them: for what avails it (say they) to sow that which another man must reap? or to reap that which another will waste and consume? for this cause, in the Turks Estate you shall see great forests, and whole countries lie waste. In these parts, dearth grows by reason of the multitude of people; but in Turkey it proceeds for want of men to labour and manure their land; for that the country men and peasants, for the most part, either dye in the voyages which they make, or else in carrying of victuals or other things necessary for their armies; for of ten thousand men which they draw from their houses to row in their galleys, scarce the fourth part returns home again, by reason of the discommodities, the change of air, and the great toil; and the rather, for that the Turks disarm their galleys every Winter; so as they that are employed to row, are never well accustomed to the Sea, nor to labour.  
Moreover, all traffic and commerce is in a manner in the hands of jews, and Christians of Europe, as Ragousans, Venetians, French, and English; and in so great a country, as they hold in Europe, they have no other towns of great traffic, than Constantinople, Caffa, Salonica, or Thessalonica: in Asia, Aleppo, Damas', Tripoli, and Aden: and in Africa, Cairo, Alexandria, and Algiers. To conclude in a word, all the mischief grows by the abandoning and dejecting of tillage, which is the chief ground of revenues; for it furnisheth matters to art, and art to merchandise, and whenas tillage fails, all goes to decay.  
But although the ordinary revenues be no greater, or more copious, than we have formerly said, (some writ that he hath fifteen millions of gold yearly, whereof five are put up in his coffers and the other ten employed for the entertainment of his Estate) yet doth he make great account of his extraordinary profits, and especially of confiscations, and presents: for the Bassa's, and other chief officers of that crown, which suck the blood of the Turks subjects, gather together inestimable treasures, which in the end fall for the most part into the great Turk's hands. Some hold, that Abrahim Bassa did carry out of that famous city of Cairo, the value of above six millions: Mehemet Visir had a greater sum: Occh●ali, besides his other wealth, had five thousand slaves: Selimus the seconds sister, called Sultana, had 2500 Chequines of rent every day, and she was so rich, as she began an aqueduct which should go from Cairo to Mecca, for the ease of pilgrims, which was an enterprise worthy of a great prince, and of an infinite charge. Moreover, the great Turk may easily found a subject to take away the goods and life of any one at his pleasure. After this, the presents amount to great sums; for there is not any Ambassador that may present himself before him without a present, and no man may hope for any office or dignity, or any thing of importance, but for money; neither doth any man return from his province where he hath been Governor, that dares present himself before the Turk empty handed: and it is well known, that they may not offer any thing of small price to the great Turk.  
The Vayvodes of Moldavia, Valachia, and Transiluania, maintain themselves in their principalities by means of their presents and gifts, and they of Valachia, and M●ldavia, change daily; for that they give these dignities to him that offers most; who, to be able to give that which they have promised, ruin the country, and consume the people. But notwithstanding all this, the Persian wars have emptied the Turks coffers, and wasted his treasures; for that on the one side, both at Constantinople, and throughout all his empire, the value of gold and silver was much augmented for a certain time, so as a crown was double the value it was accustomed to be, and their gold and silver much embased, so as it gave occasion to the janissaries to set fire of Constantinople, which did much terrify them all, yea the great Turk himself: And in Aleppo, they demanded a loan of sixty thousand crowns from the merchants. And this is all that can be said touching his riches: as for the Tymarets, I will reserve the discourse to that of his forces.   

¶ The Forces.  
THe forces of the great Turk consist in treasure, horsemen, footmen, fleets at Sea, and munition. As for his treasure, we have already spoken of it: But notwithstanding that we have said that his revenues are not so great as his large dominions might well require, yet he draws a profit from his Estate, which is of far greater importance than his revenues. This profit is nothing else but the great number of his Tymarets; for the Turkish Emperors make themselves immediate masters and lords of all the lands they get by arms, and leaving what they please to them of the country, (the which you must imagine is very little) they divide the rest into Tymarets, which are as it were commaunderies, the which they give unto soldiers, that have done them good services, upon condition, that they shall entertain so many horses always ready for the wars: And Georgieviz jerosolimitamus hath written, That there is not any Governor or Bassa that enjoyeth any province or town by right of inheritance, or can leave it to his children and successors after his death, without the prince's favour and consent: If any great man will have any certain possessions, it is lawful upon these conditions: They look very exactly and narrowly to the price and revenues of the said possessions: And the Turk doth also know how many soldiers may be fed and entertained of this yearly revenue, and then the Governor or Bassa is bound to have always this number of soldiers ready to march to the wars, whensoever they shall be commanded, else his head must answer it, and there is nothing but sickness that can excuse him from following the war. The prince may also deprive him of this benefit, otherwise he enjoys it during his life, and then the possession returns to the prince. After the death of thi● nobleman, if his successors will keep the accord, they are admitted, else others are enriched with his ●poyle●. This kind of proceeding hath been one of the best orders which they have observed for the good and preservation of the Turkish empire; for that if the soldiers were not interessed in the lands, by reason of the commodity and profit which they draw from thence, all had been ruined: for the Turks themselves are accustomed to say, That there growesno grass, whereas the great Turk's horse sets his foot. These Tymarets entertain about one hundred and fifty thousand horse, ready to march upon the first command, for the which the prince never disburseth a penny, and yet this number of horsemen can not be entertained for less than 14 millions of gold. By reason whereof, I wonder at some who making a comparison of the great Turk's revenues with those of other Christian princes, make no mention of so great a part of the Ottomans riches. In the war which the Turk made against the Persian, some twenty or thirty years since, he conquered so great a country, as he made four thousand Timarets. This erection of Timarets, and the choice of Azamoglians, or young lads, the which are Christians children, whom he causeth to be taken and trained up in arms, to make janissaries, are the two foundations of the Turkish Empire, and they seem to be instituted in imitation of the Romans: for the Roman Emperors employed their subjects for the war, whereof the Praetorian army which was always about the Emperor's person was composed: and Tacitus writes, that the choice they made of young men to that effect made the Flemings to revolt. In the same Roman Empire, there were Timarets given for life unto soldiers, in recompense of their services: Alexander Severus granted to the heirs of soldiers that they might enjoy those provisions, so as they went to the wars, and not otherwise. Constantin the Great gave unto his captains (which had well deserved) the lands which until that time had been only enjoyed for life: and in France the fees which were but for a certain time, are become perpetual under some of their kings, desiring to content such as might trouble their Estates.  
But to return to our discourse, this Turkish cavalry works two important effects, whereof the one is, that it doth so keep the Turks subjects in awe, as they cannot stir, but they are presently upon their backs; and for this cause they are divided throughout the whole Estate, and are under the command of the Begliarbies, and Sanghiacs in every province: the other effect is, that a part of this cavalry is always ready for any enterprise that shall happen: thus it serves as a garrison and support of the Estate, to suppress sedition, and as a chief sinew for the wars. Besides those, the Turk entertains a good number of horsemen about his person; whereof some are called Spahi, and these were Christian slaves, the which were bred up young in the princes Serrail, and growing great, showing themselves virtuous, ha●ing gotten that degree, which serves as a ladder to rise to greater dignities: these do commonly attend the prince, and are about his person wheresoever he doth go, and they are commonly to the number of 1300. The Caripices are held to be the choice and flower of all his horsemen, & they are in number eight hundred which march in battle always about the prince, to serve him as a guard. There is another sort of horsemen which are called Vlusages, and the Spaccoglans; that is to say, young men on horseback, being in number above three thousand, and these always march upon the right hand of the prince. They be m●n at arms of a good fashion, of whom the prince doth usually make choice, and they are also bred up young in the Serrail.  
The Salichtaires are in like manner horsemen, the which do amount unto the number of three thousand, or there abouts, and they do lodge always upon the left hand of the prince: they have their breeding like unto the Spahi, and there is no difference, but that the Spahi marcheth upon the right hand, and the other upon the left hand of the prince. And there is another sort of horsemen amongst them, which they call Olofages, amounting unto the number of two thousand or there abouts, which march upon the right and left hand of the prince. All these are as it were a nursery of the chief officers of that Empire; for out of these, they do most commonly choose their Bassa's, Begliarbeys, and Sangiacs. Moreover, besides these above mentioned, they do also reckon the Alcanzes, and such as come to serve the Turk from Tartary, Valachia, and M●ldavia.  
The other part of his forces is his infantry, which consists chiefly in janissaries, in whom are two things to be considered, the nation, and disposition in the managing of arms. As for the nation, they do not commonly receive into the roll of janissaries, any men of Asia, but all of Europe; for the Turks hold the first to be soft and saint hearted, as in effect they have been always more ready to fly, than fight. Contrariwise the people of Europe have always had the reputation of good soldiers, & of valiant. So as in the East, the Asiaticke soldiers under the Turk, carry the name of Turks, but the Europians are called Rumy, that is to say, Romans. As for the disposition, they sand every three years and fetch in Christians children, unless necessity force them (as in the Persian war) to make a quicker and more speedier choice: they make choice of such children as have, the greatest shows of magnanimity, agility, and courage, which are the three parts required in a soldier.  
These children are brought unto Constantinople, where they are visited by the Aga, and there they lose both their names, and the knowledge of their parents, yea and of their country. After this, some of them are sent into Anatolia, and some of them towards Bursia, Caramania, and other provinces, to dig and weed the ground, that they may the better accustom themselves to industry and labour, where learning the language, law, and vices of those with whom they do converse, they become Mahometans, before they have discretion to judge of any religion whatsoever. These children do remain in Anatolia, and in some other places, for the space of three or four whole years, without any charge unto the prince, being appareled and entertained by them for whom they do continually toil and labour: and then they are sent for back. Some of those are put into the great Turk's Serrails, the which are at Constantinople, and at Pera, and they which have the best faces, and the most active bodies are ordained and kept for the princes own peculiar service. When they come to have the name of Azamoglain, some of them are employed in gardens, others in buildings, and some other for household services, and such like.  
After a certain time the are called into the Serrail of the Azamoglain (for so they are called until they be janissaries) under their Governors and Masters, who do commonly teach and instruct them in divers manual and painful exercises, and with all they have bore feeding, and very mean clothing: they for the most part lie in great and spacious rooms, like unto those of religious men, having a light continually burning, and guards about them, without whose leave they may not go forth. Afterwards they learn the exercise of shooting both with a bow and hurquebuze, wherein growing perfect, they are made janissaries, or Spahis, whereof the one hath no less than five Aspres, nor above eight a day, and the Spahis have ten.  
Being janissaries, they are either sent unto the war, or put into garrisons, or else they remain at the port, the which is the great Turk's court; and these latter have for their dwelling three great and spacious places, the which are like unto religious houses, where they live, and are governed under their commanders. The younger do serve the ancient to make their provision, and dress their meat, and such like, using great respect and silence. They which are of one troop or squadron, eat together at one table, and sleep in certain long halls: if any of them happen to be out of his lodging all night, the night following he shall be well beaten with a cudgel, wherein he showeth so great patience and obedience, as after all this punishment, he kisseth his hand that hath corrected him. They have many privileges, and are respected notwithstanding their insolences, and feared of all men. In their voyages they spoilt and ruinated poor Christians houses, and they can have no revenge but only in words. When they buy any thing, they set what price they please: they cannot be judged but by the Aga, or Captain, and there is never any one of them punished with death, without great danger of a mutiny, so as they seldom put any to death by the course of justice, and they are executed very secretly. They have many presents given them, for that some are appointed to attend upon Ambassadors, and to serve them as a guard; others go with travelers of quality, and such like persons, who desire to pass safely through the Turks Estate. They have a great power in the prince's election, for no man can say it is done, until they allow of it, and every Emperor when he is newly received, gives them something, and increaseth their pay. The number of janissaries which live at Constantinople or thereabouts is 24 thousand, for in his whole Estates he hath a far greater number. Whenas any important war happens, part of the janissaries march under the command and leading of their Aga, or his Lieutenant. In our time they do degenerate from their ancient valour, first for that the Turks of Asia are made janissaries, whereas in former times they received none into this number but Christians of Europe: and secondly, for that they marry against their ancient custom, and without doubt their long abode in Constantinople, which is one of the delightfullest towns in the world, hath made them effeminate and insupportable.  
It is generally held that the sinews of the Turks forces consist in these janissaries; besides the which, there are other kinds of foot men, as the Acovizes, which is a forlorn hope, and receive no pay, but march before the army, and (when they see opportunity) have permission to ransack and spoil, conditionally, that that they give the fift part of their booty unto the prince. There is also another sort called Azapi, which be footmen of small effect, and serve rather with the pickax and the spade, than with the sword, and are fit to tire an enemy with their numbers, than to vanquish them with their valour. These are the last, which are accustomed to fill up ditches with their dead bodies, and to make a passage for the janissaries to mount up to their enemy's walls. To conclude, there is such order and discipline observed in all the Turks Estate, and the garrisons are so well maintained, as it is thought he may draw together above two hundred thousand men. Out of his janissaries there are chosen one hundred and fifty Solachi, which are the prince's footmen, either of them having fifteen or twenty Aspres a day, to spend; these run about the prince's person whensoever he goes abroad. When any of his janissaries grow old, or that upon any other occasion their service is not pleasing unto the prince, they are cassiered, and put out of the roll of janissaries, and are sent Assareri, that is to say guards of castles: And their commanders, being deposed for the like reasons, are sent to be captains of castles, with provision equal to the pay which they had before.  
Whenas the Emperor of the Turks, leaving Constantinople, goes to the wars, they carry two pavilions or tents for him, called Sartorlar, whereof, the same day that they set up the one, the other is planted whereas he shall march the next day. These pavilions are so great, as seeing them a far off, they seem a town, or some huge building. The prince's camp near unto it, and environ the emperor pavilions: and then the knights, who either a part, or three and three, or two and two, have their pavilions set up. The soldiers have also tents, for that by their discipline they may not lie abroad. Before the army march, they that make the way, laying of either side heaps of stone or of wood for a direction, so as they can hardly stray, not not in the night. The Turks march from midnight until noon the day following. The Emperor goes between two Bassa's, who talk unto him, and before them certain soldiers on horseback, which carry torches when the night is dark.  
Moreover, there are captains with battle axes to keep the press far off from the the Emperor, and withal, there are great numbers of guards and archers about the prince's person.  
The great Turks army is accompanied with an infinite number, both of soldiers without pay and of pioneers, and of other people necessary for the war, which serve to make passages, mines, and trenches, when need requires. This powerful army of men is obedient to their prince, and observes so good an order, as there is not any soldier, I will not say insolent, but in any sort unruly or disobedient, that is not punished with death, or at the lest wise so ill inteated, as he shall not be able to help himself. When the war is ended, all the soldiers present themselves before the commissary general of the wars, to see what number of soldiers have been slain, to the end their places may be presently supplied with others.  
But leaving any more to speak of their land forces, let us now come to their Sea provisions and fortitude: first of all, there is not any prince that hath greater commodity to make navies at sea than the Turk: for the forests of Albania, and Caramania, but above all, those of Nicomedia, and Trebizonde, are so great, so thick, and withal so full of Timber trees fit for the building of vessels of all sorts, as it seems that galleys fall ready made from these woods into the gulf of Nicomedia, and into the Black Sea. Neither have they any want of good shipwrights, for that covetousness hath drawn many Christian carpenters into his arsenal; so as the year after his great loss at Lepanto, he put an army to Sea, which had the courage to affronted the Christians. He hath also great numbers of men experienced in marine matters, by reason of the galleys which he keeps in guard at Metelin, Rhodes, Cypress, and Alexandria, and for the retreat he gives to pirates at Tunes, Bona, Bugia, and Algiers, from whence at need he draws commanders, and the chief of his mariners. We have seen what he could do by the armies which he hath had at Malta, the Cursolaries, Goulette, and Lepanto. Moreover, he hath great store of munition for the wars, and an infinite number of ordnance. He drew from Hungary, five thousand pieces, and won above five hundred in Cypress, and almost as many in Goulette. The Turks have pieces of ordnance which are so great, as the very wind of them (not speaking of the blow) shake walls. They have great provision of powder and bullets, as it appeared at Malta, whereas they discharged sixty thousand shot. At Famagosta, whereas they reckoned eighteen thousand; and at Goulette, where, in nine and thirty days, they did beaten down and made even, with the force of their canon, all the fortifications which the Christians had made in forty years. In those places whereas they cannot use any artillery, they employ the pickaxe, or they fill up the ditches with earth, and when all this will not serve, they heap them up with the soldiers bodies.  
The Turks have three things which amaze and terrify: an infinite number of men, good discipline, and store of munition. Multitude doth naturally breed confusion, by reason whereof, many times great armies have been vanquished by small numbers; but the multitude of Turkish armies keep so good order, as by this means it doth vanquish the lesser number of enemies: so as they surmount others, both in art and numbers, and their discipline is so good, as they yield not in that point to the Romans themselves. It consists in many things, that is to say, in the distribution of victuals, for that they live of a little bread, baked in the ashes, with Rice, and the powder of flesh dried in the Sun: As for wine, it is forbidden them, as it was to the Carthagenians. In the camp, every ten Turks have a commander, whom they obey without reply. There are no women seen in their armies. They observe a wonderful silence, and all those soldiers are governed by the beck of a hand, or any show of the countenance; so as sometimes they suffer prisoners to escape, rather than to make a noise. They punish quarrels and thefts very severely. Whenas they march, they dare not enter into any corn fields, or into vines. The valiant are assured of preferment, and cowards have punishment. They never lodge in towns, nor are suffered to enter. The Ottomans are always accustomed to have some war with their neighbours, to keep them in breath. But discipline is a matter of small moment, if it be nonfurnished with arms, and other things necessary for the wars; for that a naked giant, how strong and mighty so ever he be, may easily be vanquished by a child that is well armed: but the Turk marcheth to the wars with such great preparation of engines, and other necessary instruments, as it seems he makes account of no other thing, as may probably be seen by the ruins which he leaves in all the places that he assails.  
He confines with the Persian upon the East, where you must draw an imaginary line from Tauris unto Balzera. He makes war against the Sophi with advantage, by reason of his infantarie, which this king wants, and in like manner of his artillery and munition. If the Persians have at any time vanquished the Turk in the field, they have on the other side lost much of their country, until the time they began to recover themselves. Solyman took Mesopotamia, or Diarbeck, from them; Amurath, Media, and not only they themselves have sustained great loss, but also their friends; for that Selimus the first dispossessed the Mammelus of the empire of Egypt, and Surya: and Amurath the third did in a manner quite ruin and extirp the Georgians, who were confederates with the Sophi.  
He makes war against the Portugalls, who confine with him upon the South by means of the Read Sea with great disadvantage; for that all their quarrels must be decided by Naval forces: wherein the Portugalls have as much advantage over him, as the Indian Ocean hath of the Persian gulf, or the Read Sea: for as the Indies they have places, ports, and whole estates, and seigneuries, in which are found abundance of timber, victuals, and all preparations for the sea, neither do they want princes which assist them. Contrariwise, the Turk hath no other place of importance within the Persian gulf, but Belzera. The coast of Arabia (whereof he might make use) hath but four places, & those are but weak; and withal he can hardly arm so many vessels in that place, as in the read sea; for that the country is in a manner quite destitute of timber fit for shipping. Wherefore when he hath intended to arm upon the read sea, (the which he doth with more difficulty in the Persian gulf) he hath been forced to transport timber and other materials, from the ports of Bythinia and Caramania, by the river of Nile unto Cairo, from whence they carry it afterwards upon cammells to Suez, where he hath an arsenal. But as often as he hath attempted any thing against the Portugals, he hath reaped nothing but shame and loss, as it happened in the year 1538 at Diu, and in the year 1552 in the Island of Ormus, and in the year 1580 at Mombazze, whereas the Portugals took four galleys, and a galliot from the Turk, who thought to live in those seas by the favour of this king.  
He confines upon the South by the read sea with Pressed or Presbyter jan, or the great Neguz, and without doubt he hath an advantage over him, as well in regard of captains and soldiers, as of arms and munition: for it is most certain that this prince hath his country's unfurnished of strong towns, and his soldiers are without arms: by reason whereof, the prince of Barnagas, who was his lieutenant towards the read sea, lost all that coast, and was forced to pay a tribute unto the Turk to have a peace.  
He hath much more country in Africa than in Xerif, for that he enjoyeth all that lies betwixt the read sea, and Velez de la Gomera: yet that which the Xerif holds is more fertile, richer, better united, and stronger; but they make not war one against another, by reason of the neighbourhood of the king of Spain.  
We must now look unto the Christian princes which confine with him. The first is the king of Poland: we have seen what these two princes can do one against another in former enterprises. Of the one side, it seems the Turk doth esteem, and in a manner fear the Polonians, for that having many times been subject to make war against them, as under Henry king of Poland, during the war which john Vayvoda of Mold●uia had against the the Turks, whereas many Polonians fought against them, and under Sigismond the third, for the incursions of the Cosaques, and the stirs raised by john Siamoschi general of the realm: he did not seem to have any feeling thereof with his ordinary pride, nor sought revenge of the wrongs which he had endured.  
On the other side, the Polonians have not attempted any thing against the Turk since Ladislaus, nor they have not relieved the Moldavians, and Null their allies, and they have lost that which they held upon the Euxine sea; the which hath happened rather through want of courage in their kings, than in the nobility. Stephen Battori (although a valiant and courageous prince) held the enterprise very dangerous to encounter with the Turks, and yet discoursing with his familiars, he maintained that with thirty thousand foot, and the horsemen of his realm, he would undertake a war against him, whereof he had some design.  
The princes of Austria confine with the Turk, more than any other towards the North: for which cause they spend much in the garrisons of their sorts, whereas they entertain above twenty thousand men, part horsemen, part footmen, and with the succours of Germany joined to their particular forces, they are more careful to defend and ●●epe, than to recover their own, or to extend their limits: and Ferdinand attempted the enterprises of Buda, and of Possegue, with more courage than good fortune. It is true that the cause thereof did not proceed from the weakness of men, but for want of agility and address. My meaning is that this princes armies were great enough, and supplied with all things necessary; but they were composed of Germans and Bohemians, who are slow, and unfit to debate any thing against the Turks, which be nimble and active in military factions.  
The Venetians confine also with the Turk both by sea and land, for many hundreds of miles, and they maintain themselves against them in fortifying their places exceeding well, and furnishing them with come in time, by the means of their traffic, and they carry themselves valiantly in all occasions that are offered, as well for the good of their Estates, as of all Christendom.  
As for the king of Spain, who confines in like manner with him, there is no great difference betwixt his forces, and those of the Ottomans: for as for his treasure, we may easily judged by the discourse of this Monarch, that it yields nothing to the Turk, although they add● thereunto the value of his Timarets, accounting in like manner on the other side, those which are bound to serve the king at their own charge within his dominions. Moreover the cavalry which the Turk entertains by means of his Timarets are not so fearful for their valour, as for their numbers; for that these horsemen are grown faint and effeminate by reason of the villages and places which have been assigned unto them, and the desire to enrich themselves with the first-fruits of their lands, and to spare something, makes them rather to desire peace than war; so as they do unwillingly leave their houses, and go unto enterprises with more desire to return and enjoy their delights, than to fight. If a little spoil got by arms makes a soldier less desirous of war, what will the possession of much wealth do, being accompanied by a wife and children which he hath left at home?  
Moreover it is certain that this cavalry entertained by the means of Tymarets, hath rather been instituted to keep people subdued in awe, than to go to war against his enemies: for the Turks subjects obey him by force, and hate him exceedingly, as well by reason of his religion, as for his manner of government. The Arabians & Moors love him not for the diversity of their sects, and the Christians which make above two third parts of his Empire, detest him, both for his religion, and for his manner of command; so as the greatest part of his cavalry is employed at home, & cannot go abroad without danger to his Estar. Moreover his Empire is divided by so great a tract of country, and so dispersed here and there, as he can sand no great numbers to any enterprise, nor entertain his armies long without want and necessity, if he have no other aid but that of his Timarets.  
Experience of things past do show that their forces are equal, for that they oppose the f●ight of the Turks army before Malta, to the loss of the king of Spain's army in the Island of Zerbe, and the taking of Pinion de Velez to the loss of Goulette. These two princes have had hindrances a like, the one in Persia, and the other in the Low Countries, so as they could not make war one against another with any great forces. The foresaid wars have been wondered chargeable to these two princes, for that those countries lie far from them: but it hath cost the king of Spain more than the Turk, for that although Persia be far from Constantinople, from whence the greatest part of his forces go, yet it confines with Diarbecke. and some other of his Estates, by means where of, his army is easily supplied with money and victuals; whereas the Low Countries lie far divided from the kings other Estates. We might add other considerations hereunto, but the desire of brevity makes me to pass them over with silence.   

¶ The Government.  
THe government of the Ottomans is absolute, for that the great Turk is master in such sort of all that is within his Estates, as the inhabitants term themselves his slaves: and there is not any one that can say, he is master of the house where he dwells, nor of the lands which he tills, not nor of himself, except some families which were privileged by Mahomet the second, at Constantinople: and there is not any one in Turkey, how great soever, that can assure himself of the Estate wherein he lives, or of his own life, unless it be by special grace from the great Turk. He maintains this absolute power by two means, the one is, that he disarms his subjects, the other is, that he puts all things into the hands of such as have abjured the Christian religion, and have been brought by way of tithing from his Estates in their infancies. By these two means he enjoys two benefits, the one is, that he deprives his provinces of the flower of their men, for that he makes choice of the strongest children, and fittest for arms: the other is, that he arms and assures himself by this means.  
The first seat of the Turkish Emperors was at Bursia, or Prussia, a town in Bythinia, and since it was transported to Adrianopolis, and last of all, to Constantinople, where it now remains. This Emperor hath for his guard about four thousand janissaries, whose colonel is called Aga: And besides these, there are fifteen thousand horsemen which receive pay from the great Turk, and they are divided into Spahi, Vlosages, Cilistares, besides those horsemen which are under the Begliarbeys. All these are paid out of the Casne, or the great Turk's Exchequer; besides these, he hath many thousands of janissaries dispersed throughout his realm, the which are in like manner entertained. And their captains acknowledge no other superior than the great Turk. He hath also his Tymarets, of whom we have spoken in the discourse of this princes forces. All these obey the Sangiacs, and the Sangiacs the Begliarbeys.  
The Turks Court is vulgarly called Capi, that is to say, Port, where there are many offices, to number the which would be tedious. There are offices in the great Serrail for the prince's service, and these are executed by eunuchs, who have under them other men that be gelt. But before we proceed in the description of officers, we will speak something of their laws and judges.  
The Turks have for their laws the institutions and answers of wise men, serving as an interpretation to their Koran, which is their principal law: and these institutions and laws are contained in ten volumes, which treat of all things that belong to the civil conversation of men: And as affairs have multiplied, and gre● in a manner infinite, so princes have added new laws to provide for them. Some provinces and countries of Turkey are governed by customs, and enjoy certain immunities and privileges; and their wise judges supply many things which are not written. Among many judges and officers for the government of the realm, the prince makes choice of the wisest and worthiest person that can be found, being of a sincere life, according to their law, and he is called by the name or title of Mustee, that is to say, an interpreter of their Koran, and law, and he applies himself only to matters of religion and faith, and is as it were their high priest.  
The Turks make trial of the knowledge and sufficiency of their judges, before they elect or choose them, and to this end there are two Cadilesquiers Talismans', that is to say, Doctors of the law, and Examiner's, at Constantinople, or else wheresoever the prince remains: These examine the particular judges or Cadis of divers provinces subject to the Turk: the one doth choose and examine the judges of Europe or Greece, and is called Cadilesquer Romly, before whom the judge, after due and sufficient information of his life, study, and knowledge, swears upon the laws, that he will do right and justice to every man, submitting himself to yield an account of his charge to the said Cadilesquier, whensoever he shall be called.  
The other Cadilesquier is for Anatolia, and other provinces, who governs himself like unto the first, in regard of the judges of the country: and Selimus the first added a third for Egypt, Syria, Arabia, and Armenia. These Cadilesquiers are sovereign judges in all causes, and as it were Patriarches, before whom they do appeal; and they have authority over the other Caldis, which are particular judges of provinces. Their office is very honourable, and are much esteemed by the great Turk. They are called to the prince's Council, called Divan, with the Bassa's, to consult of matters of importance. Among the Bassa's, which in former times were but four, but now is augmented to the number of nine or more, there is one superior, called the Grand Visir, whom the Turks call Vizirazem, who is always about the prince's person, and not the rest; for that they are employed in charges, and commissions abroad, as in the government of the provinces, the leading of armies both by sea and land, and the guard of frontiers, or being employed in some other business, according to the will of the prince. All the affairs of the Turks Estate, pass by the hands of these Bassa's, but the head Visir or first Bassa hath power over the rest, and they are bound to give him an account of their employments: And as for himself, he hath no superior, but only the prince, he being the second person in the great Turks mighty monarchy, the which he governs with great authority and most commonly the Emperor takes council of him, and in his most important affairs.  
His charge is touching matters of justice to keep Court openly four days in the week that is Saturday, Sunday, Monday, and Tuesday; and this Court or Di●an is held whereas the prince remains: If he be at Constantinople, in the Serrail; if at the wars, in his pavilion near unto the prince: And to this Court or great Council, the other Bassa's ●oute, if they be with the prince; and the Cadilesquiers are also called if the business requires it: where first of all, matters of State are decided, and then the affairs of pr●u●● men. The Court or Council being risen, the superior Bassa, or Vizir, informs the prince truly of every particular proceeding, not daring to do otherwise; for that the prince hath a window joining to the Divan, by the which he may hear and see any thing, and not be discovered: And having declared the opinion of the Court unto him, he doth seldom impugn it, unless it be to moderate some rigorous sentence, or to make answer to an Ambassador. Whatsoever the prince hath said, is irrevocable, and it is presently enrolled by certain Registers of the Court.  
Next unto the Bassa in honour, follow the Begliarbeys, which are men of great authority and reputation and have places in Court next unto the Bassa's. They have the command and government of great countries, and armies, and have under their obedience divers Sangiacs, which be sent as Governors into provinces, whereas they remain during the prince's pleasure, who changeth them from one unto another. The office and charge of these Sangiacs, is to govern the Spahi, and Tymarets, to exercise them in arms and contain them in obedience. The Turks empire hath been governed before the Persian war by forty of these Begliarbeys, who had under them two hundred and seventy Sangiacs, since which time their number is much increased; of which number the Begliarbey of Greece, he of Anatolia, and the Demzt Begliarbey, or General of the Se● are the chief. Others restrain them to a far lesser number, setting them down as they follow here in order. The first of the Begliarbeys is he of Greece, in the which is contained all the countries that the Turk holds in Europe; yet some writ that he hath a Begliarbey in Hongarie, and another in Sclavonia. He of Greece hath under him above thirty Sangiacs: He hath more entertainment from the prince than any other, and his place is above all the rest.  
There are also six Begliarbeys in Asia, and one distinct from Egypt: the first of the six is called Begliarbey of Anatolia, which was called in old time Asia the Less. He governs Pontus, Bythinia, the province of Asia, Lydia, Caria, and Lycia, all which provinces are now called Anatolia. His place in Court is next to the Begliarbey of Greece, and he commands over twelve Sangiacs. The Begliarbey of Caramania, which was in old time Cilicia, and Pamphylia, hath under him seven Sangiacs.  
The Begliarbey of Aladule, which is a place betwixt Sutya, Caramania, and Tocca to which in former times was called Paphlagonia, and is a moiety of Asia the Less, hath the command of seven Sangiacs. Some say that this province of Aladule, whenas the prince was there, besides such as had entertainment, made thirty thousand men, which were bound to serve on horseback for the prince, without any pay, having only their charges and victuals of the countrymen.  
The Begliarbey of Amasia, and Toccato, which was Cappadocia, and Gallatia, hath under him four Sangiacs. The Begliarbey of Mesopotamia, or Dyarbeck, under whose government is the rest of Armenia the Less, and part of the Greater, whereof the other part belongs unto the Sophi, and to the Curdi, to the confines of Bagader, hath under his command, twelve Sangiacs or Governors of provinces.  
The Begliarbey of Damas', Surya, and judea, hath under him twelve Sangiacs. And the Begliarbey of Cairo, whose power and charge extends unto Amech, that is to say, to the Arabia's, the which are subject to the Turkish empire, and enjoyed by him, but they are not so obedient as the other countries of his Estate, yet Arabia the Happy is more subject than the other, and he hath under him sixteen Sangiacs.  
The Turk hath a Begliarbey of the sea, who is Admiral and Commander in all marine causes. This office hath been created of late years, for that in former times, the Sangiac of Galipoli was wont to be Admiral at sea, and barbarous was the first that had this charge. The Turk hath four Arsenals: the one is at Pera, the which hath one hundred thirty and three places, or lodgings for so many galleys: the second is at Galipoli of twenty lodgings, and the Admiral or General of the sea hath charge of these two, with some of his Sangiacs: the third is at Suez, near to the Read sea, where there are five and twenty lodgings: the last is at Balzera upon the Persian gulf, which contains fifteen galleys, and these two were under the Begliarbeys of Balzera or Cairo.  
As for his treasure, he hath two officers called Desterdari, the which many rightly be called governors of the revenues: the one hath the charge of the revenues which are raised in Europe, and the other in Anatolia. They are offices of great dignity, and they keep an account of the Casna, that is to say, the prince's treasure.  
The Turks have this custom, after they have once seized upon any province, to root out all the nobility, especially, such as are of the blood royal: and as for rich and mighty families, they transport them into other places, which are accustomed to their government. Yet they suffer every man to follow what religion he lists, and they force not any one to abjure his: but they do not suffer their subjects to fight, and go to war under any other prince.   

¶ The Religion.  
MAhomet the son of Abdala, an idolater, of the race of Ishmael, and of Hennina a jew, both of base condition, was borne in the year 562. Being grown to some years, the Arabians Scenites accustomed to make incursions, and to steal, took him, and sold him to a merchant of Persia, who finding him fit for traffic, affected him, and made so great account of him, as after his masters death, he married the widow. Being thus rich he raised his spirit to higher matters, and made use of the time being then fit for innovations. The Arabians were discontented with the Emperor Heraclius. The heresies of Arrius and Nestorius had miserably torn and dismembered the Church: the jews made a great number: the Sarrazins were powerful; and the Roman Empire was full of slaves. Mahomet seeing this opportunity, framed a law, in which every one had his share. He was assisted therein by two jews Apostates, and two heretics, whereof the one was called john a Nestorian, and the other Sergius of the Arrian sect. The chief end of this law, was to overthrow the divinity of jesus Christ, wickedly opposed by the jews and Arabians. First he persuaded his wife, and by her means his neighbours, that the Angel Gabriel spoke unto him, so as he imputed the falling sickness whereunto he was subject, to the brightness of this Angel which threw him to the ground: then he extended it, allowing all that was pleasing to the sense and flesh, and offering liberty to slaves which should receive this law. So as being pursued by the Masters of these slaves which had joined with him, and had revolted, he fled to Medina Tanalbi, where he remained some time. From this flight the Mahometans begin their Hera, or the numbering of their years. But there was nothing that did help more to extend the sect of Mahomet, than the multitude of his victories, who defeated the Persians, made himself master of Arabia, and chased the Romans out of Suria: and his successors did afterwards enlarge their Empire from the river of Euphrates, to the Atlantic sea: they held Spain, Sicily, and many other provinces, and almost with a continual course of victories they subdued or afflicted the East and West for three hundred years.  
But to return to the law of Mahomet, it maintains circumcision and the distinction of clean and unclean meats, to content the Jews: it denies the divinity of jesus Christ to please the Arrians, who were then powerful: it is full of fables, to content idolaters, and it gives liberty to the flesh wherein most men take delight.  
They confess one God, and honour jesus Christ, not as the son of God, but as a Prophet borne of Marie the Virgin; but they believe not that he died upon the Crosse. They do not honour images, and will not have any. Friday is their day of rest, as Sunday is ours. They observe a Lent of thirty days, which they call Ramadan, or Romodan, during the which they eat not any thing in the day time; but whenas night comes, all meats are indifferent, but swine's flesh, and in like manner they abstain from wine and women. After which they have their Easter, called Bayran, which continues three days, during which, they have all sorts of pleasures: but this feast falls not out always at one prefixed time; but it is sometimes in Summer, sometimes in Winter, sometimes the Spring, and sometives in Autumn, the which happens for that they accounted not the day according to the course of the Sun, but of the Moon: wherefore they do carefully observe the new Moon, and salute it, and wear the sign of the half Moon, as we do tha● of the Crosse.  
They are circumcised, after the manner of the jews, but not after the eight day, but after the eight year. They have no bells, but their priests go to the top of high towers, from whence they call the Turks with a loud voice, five times a day and night to come to prayers. The Mahometans will not be called Turks, for that this name in the Hebrew tongue signifies banished, but Musulmanss, that is to say, believing well.  
There are four sects, which are as it were four orders of religious men among the Turks, which differ in manner of living, habit, and ceremonies. These be the Torlaques, Deruis, Calendars, and Huguiemales, which be very wicked and vicious, and deceive the simple people. They converse with Christians without any scruple, eat and traffic with them freely, yea and sometimes they marry their daughters, and suffer them to live after their own law and religion. But they hate the jews exceedingly, and contemn them as the most vile people in the world, and they do not vouchsafe to eat with them or to marry their daughters, no a jew is not received into the number of the Mahometans until he hath been baptized a Christian.  
The Turks not only forbear to blaspheme the name of God, and Mahomet, but also that of jesus Christ, and the Virgin Marie, or of any of the Saints, and they punish blasphemers grievously, of what sect or condition soever.  
They assure themselves, that he that shall strictly observe the laws of their Mahomet shall enjoy eternal life, and a Paradise full of delights, which shall be a garden environed with two goodly rivers, seated under a clear heaven, and a very temperate air, where they shall have all the contents they can desire or wish for, that is to say, store of all kinds of exquisite meats, and fair wom●n, which shall serve them in vessels of gold and silver. They hold also that the Angels shall be their cupbearers, & bring them milk in cups of gold, and wine in bowls of silver. Contrariwise, they that shall break the laws of the Koran, are threatened with hell, and eternal death. Yet to mollify this fear, they have an opinion that he shall firmly believe in the Koran when he dies, how great a sinner soever he hath been, shall be saved without all doubt.   

¶ The Emperors of Constantinople, as well Christians, as Turks, since the Empire of the West was divided from that of the East, and given to Charlemaigne.  
COnstantin the sixt, son of Leo the fourth, was Emperor after his father, in the year of Grace 780. He reigned nine years, being very young, with his mother Irene, and both being persuaded by Therasius, Patriarch of Constantinople, caused a Council to be held of three hundred and fifty Bishops, by the which it was decreed, that images should be restored into Churches, the which Constantin the fift had taken away. Some time after, Constantin deprived his mother of the government of the empire, and pulled out the eyes, and cut out the tongue of Nicephorus, finding that he had a secret design to make himself Emperor. He also put Marie his wife, daughter to Charlemaigne into a Monastery, and then he took a Concubine by the advice of his mother, who desired to make her son hateful unto the people. Soon after, she caused his eyes to be pulled out, and cast him into prison, where he died, in the year 798. Then she reigned alone five years, or thereabouts. In her time Charlemaigne was crowned Emperor of the West, in the year of Christ 801.  
Nicephorus, a Patrician, usurped the empire from Irene, in the year of Grace 803. He was good in the beginning, but afterwards he grew wicked, and was slain fight against the Bulgarians.  
Stauratius, his son, was wounded in the same battle, and deposed from the empire three months after, by Michael Curopalata, who had married Procopia his sister, and they sent him to end his days in a Monastery.  
Michael Curopalata, called Rangaba, was Emperor in the year of our Lord God 811. He was faint hearted, and a very coward, so as in the first battle which he had against the Bulgarians, he fled, and become a Monk, refusing to hold the imperial dignity any longer.  
Leo, an Armenian, the fifth of that name, was made Emperor, in the year of our Redemption 813. He was before colonel of the horsemen to Michael Curopalata. He caused the genitoroes of Michael's sons to be cut off, and banished them. He would not restore the images which he had beaten down, and was slain in the Church during divine service, in the eight year of his empire. His wife was put into a monastery, and his children were hidden.  
Michael, the Stuttering, or Thrall, a wicked man, and murderer of Leo the fift, was emperor in the year 820. He died of a bloody flix.  
Theophilus, son to Michael the Stuttering, came unto the empire in the year of Christ 829. He was a good justicer, but he hated images, and punished such as worshipped them. He grew into an exceeding melancholy, by reason of his continual losses in battle, so as leaving his meat, and drinking nothing but water, he fell into a looseness of body, whereof he died.  
Theodora, after the decease of Theophilus her husband, as tutrix to her son Michael, governed the empire happily, in the year of Grace 842, and she restored the images of Saints to Churches. In the end, Michael being capable of the government, his mother become a Nun, and left him the government of the empire, in the year of our Redemption 856.  
Michael, the son of Theophilus, succeeded his father from his infancy. He made Basil of Macedon his companion in the empire, and was presently slain by this ingrateful wretch, having reigned eleven years, nine months, and five days, after the time his mother devoted herself a Nun, and in all, five and twenty years, ten months, and fourteen days.  
Basil of Macedon was received emperor in the year 867. He was slain by a stag which ran him into the belly with his brow anklers.  
Leo the sixt, surnamed the Philosopher, began to govern in the year of Christ 886. He went sometimes all alone in a disguised habit, in the night, to see if they kept a good guard: but once the soldiers beaten him, and carried him to prison, for the which he gave them money in recompense.  
Alexander, brother to Leo the sixt, succeeded him in the year of our Redemption 904. He was given to pleasure, and died of bleeding at his nose, and yard, having gormandised and played excessively at Tennis; for going hot to horseback, he broke a vain, whereof he died.  
Constantin the seventh, son to Leo the sixt, was at the age of seven years left by his father under the charge and government of his mother Zoa, and began to hold the empire after his uncle Alexander, in the year of Christ 906. He restored learning in Greece, and left unto his son a book treating of the affairs of the empire, which the Venetians keep as a great treasure. He reigned fourteen years with his mother Zoa, five and twenty with Roman Lecapen, who thought to chase him out of the empire, and about fifteen years alone, which was in all near fifty five years.  
Roman Lecapen did so trouble Constantin in the empire, as he was forced to make him his companion or partaker, in the year of our Lord God 920. He gave his daughter Helen in marriage to the said Constantin, and would have usurped the empire for himself, and his son Christopher: but he was taken in the wars which he had made against simeon the Duke of Bulgaria, by his sons Stephen and Constantin, who dispossessed him of the empire, and put him into a monastery: who seeking to do the like unto Constantin, they were taken and shut up themselves. Thus Constantin remained peaceable and sole emperor.  
Romain the Young, son to Constantin the seventh, was Emperor in the year 959, under the government of Nicephorus Phocas. He chased away his mother and sisters, who got their lining lewdly, and as for himself, being given to play and gluttony, he died of poison.  
Nicephorus Phocas was Emperor in the year of our Redemption 963. He recovered Cilicia, and the greatest part of Anatolia, from the Sarrazins, and presently after, he took Antioch by night: but for that he laid many impositions upon his people, by reason of the wars, and caused base money to be coined, and diminished the weight, he was hated of the subjects, and slain in the night sleeping in his chamber, by john Zimisces: Theophania the wife of Nicephorus gave entry unto the murderer, and to them that were with him.  
john Zimisces was Emperor in the year of Christ 969. He was valiant, and recovered all Bulgaria which the Roxolains held, after which he was poisoned. He made his companions in the empire, Basil and Constantin, brethren, sons to Romain, predecessors to Nicephorus Phocas.  
Basile the second, and Constantin the eight, were Emperors in the year of Grace 976, under whom all Bulgaria was made subject to the empire of Constantinople, having always before revolted. Constantin was companion in the empire with his brother Basile; and after his death was Emperor almost three years, and died wallowing in his delights.  
Roman Argyre, or Argyropiles, son in law to Constantin the eight, succeeded him, in the year of Christ 1034. He was drowned in a bath by the treason of his wife Zoa, and her adulterer.  
Michael Paphlagon, adulterer to Zoa, and who had smothered her husband Argyropiles in a bath, was by her made Emperor of Constantinople, in the year 1034. He had the falling sickness, foaming at the mouth. Being somewhat fair, he was beloved of Zoa, but he had no great understanding. In the end, he died of a dropsy.  
Michael Calaphas, adoptive son to Zoa, having sworn unto her that he would not hold the empire but from her, was made Emperor in the year of our Redemption 1042: Soon after, he practised against Zoa, saying, that she sought to poison him: whereupon, he put her into a Monastery, and cut off her hair. But the people mutining against him made Theodora, sister to Zoa, Empress: They drew Zoa out of the cloister, pursued Calaphat, and put out his eyes, together with his brothers.  
Zoa being drawn out of the Monastery, was restored to the government of the empire, with her sister Theodora. The same year that Michael Calaphat had reigned four months, Zoa being sixty years old, yet full of amorous passions, called Constantin Monomache from exile; and taking him to be her husband, she made him Emperor, these two women having scarce held the empire two months.  
Constantin the ninth, surnamed Monomache, being of the imperial race, was made emperor by his wife Zoa, in the year 1042. He was effeminate, and given to his pleasures, and kept a fair Concubine in stead of his wife; and yet he surmounted two great civil wars, and some others. Zoa died, being seventy years old, and he being full of the gout, and surprised with a pleurisy, died within few years after.  
Theodora sister to Zoa, they having jointly held the Empire about three months, she governed it all alone after the death of Monomache, in the year 1055, about two years. She managed the affairs, so well, as all was in quiet during her government. But for that infirmities oppressed her with age, by the persuasion of her servants, she made an old man called Michael, partaker of the Empire, and lived not long after.  
Michael the ancient was Emperor of Constantinople, with, and after Theodora. Having scarce reigned a year, Isaac Commenes deposed him; so as living a private life, he died soon after.  
Isaac Commenes was Emperor in the year 1058, having deprived Michael the Ancient. He was valiant, and of great courage, but arrogant, of a noble family, and diligent in his affairs. He was surprised with a pain in his side, being a hunting; so as despairing of his health, he become a Monk, and declared Constantin Ducas Emperor, with the consent of the Senate and people.  
Constantin Ducas the tenth of that name, came unto the Empire in the year 1060. He was devout, and a great justicer; but very covetous, and therefore hated of his subjects, and contemned of his enemies. He died being sixty years old, leaving his wife Eudoxia, and three of his sons, heirs of the Empire.  
Eudoxia and her sons held the Empire after Constantin Ducas. This woman might well have governed the State, if foreign wars had not troubled her. But for that strangers invaded the Empire of all sides, the opinion of such as held that a sufficient man should undertake the charge, prevailed: so as Eudoxia contrary to the promise made to her dying husband, having reigned seven months, and certain days, married again to Roman Diogenes, whereof she soon repent, being discontented at the arrogancy of this man, who would govern all.  
Roman Diogenes held the Empire of Constantinople in the year 1068. He was taken in war by the Turks and the Sultan Azan, who did him honour, and sent him back with presents, having concluded a peace with him. But in the mean time all was in combustion at Constantinople: Eudoxia was expelled, Diogenes deposed, and Michael of Constantin made Emperor, who put out the eyes of Diogenes, and then sent him into exile, in which estate he died, and was interred by his wife Eudoxia.  
Michael surnamed Parapinace, by reason of the great famine which was in his time, a man unfit for such a charge, was made Emperor, in the year 1071. Whilst that he busied himself to make verses under his master Psellus, the Turks invaded the Empire in many places, especially towards Asia. It was then thought fit to choose another Emperor, and Michael was put into a Monastery with his wife and son.  
Nycephorus Botaniat of the family of the Phocas, was chosen in the place of Michael Parapynace, in the year 1078. He was dejected by the Commenes, and put into a monastery, where he lived not long.  
Alexius Commenes, son to the Emperor Isaac, held the Empire in the year 1081. he sought to cross the French in the recovery of the Holy land, but in the end he was forced to promise' to furnish them with victuals, and other necessaries. He died of a languishing disease, being seventy years old.  
Caiolan, son to Alexius, held the Empire, in the year 1118. He died having hurt himself with a dart, the which he himself had poisoned, meaning to cast it at a wild boar,  
Manuel brother, or as some say, son to Caiolan, obtained the Empire in the year 1142. He was a very treacherous prince, and full of wickedness. He made war against the Turks, and having reigned near eight and thirty years, he lived a Monk, and died of sickness.  
Alexius, son to Manuel, came to the Empire in the year 1180, which he governed under Adronic his cousin german, who was his tutor, than his companion in the Empire, and in the end his murderer: for he caused his head secretly to be cut off, and his body to be cast into the sea, Alexius being then but fifteen years old.  
Andronic Commenes son to Isaac, held the Empire in the year one thousand one hundred eighty and three: William king of Sicily made war against him to revenge the death of Alexius, and being assailed of all sides, Isaac Ange came against him, vanquishe●●●m, expelled him the Empire, took him, and pulled out one of his eyes: he than 〈◊〉 him to be put upon a she ass backward, crowned him with garlic or leeks, and gave him the asses tail in his hand in steed of a sceptre: and in this sort, he caused him to be led through Constantinople, the people reviling him, casting dirt in his face, and bea●ng him with 〈…〉. Being thus bruised and broken, he died, and was hanged, and the women with hooks tare him in pieces.  
Isaac 〈◊〉 unto the Empire in the year 1185. His younger brother Alexius pulled 〈…〉, took away the Empire from him, and kept him in prison, until such tim● 〈…〉 the son of Isaac obtained succours from the French and Venetians, and fr●● 〈◊〉 ●●ther, who died soon after, having taken the air too boldly, after his long re●●●● in prison.  
〈◊〉 Ange brother to Isaac, was Emperor after him, in the year 1195. But in the end 〈◊〉 expelled, as hath been said by Alexius son to Isaac, by the help of Baldwin and the Venetians.  
Alexius the younger son to Isaac Ange, was restored to the imperial seat in the year 1204: but as he began to govern, Murzyphile issued from a base family, and advanced by him, slew him. This Murzyphile finding afterwards some resistance, fled away by night with his wife, whores, and treasure, and within short space after, he was brought back a prisoner out of Morea to Constantinople, where he died miserably. So as the city remained to the French, and Baldwin was the first Emperor of the French nation in the East.  
Baldwin Earl of Flaunders, was made Emperor in the year 1205. He recovered all that did belong unto the Empire of Constantinople, except Adrianopolis, the which was taken by Theodore son in law to Alexius the murderer, for the dowry of his wife, and this Adrianopolis was the seat of his Empire. And as the French besieged it, and were ready to take it, Baldwin was taken, and put to death, having ranged scarce a year.  
Henry, brother to Baldwin, was Emperor after him, in the year 1206. He left his daughter Yoland his heir, who was married to Peter of Auxerre.  
Peter of Courtenay, grandchild to Lewis the Gross, King of France, Earl of Auxetre, succeeded in the Empire, by the means of Yoland his wife, in the year 1216, whose head was cut off at a banquet by Theodore Lascares, who termed himself Emperor of Adrianopolis, and of Greece, having drawn him unto it under a colour of peace, and by a false oath. Some others writ that Lascares had laid ambushes in the forests of Thessalia, at a place called Tempe, and that he surprised Peter, carried him away, and caused him to die in captivity. His wife Yoland held the Empire two years, during his imprisonment.  
Robert, son to Peter, hearing news of his father's misfortune, went out of France and came to Constantinople, where he was received Emperor in the year 1220. He took to wife a young lady, promised to a gentleman of Bourgondie, who not able to endure that wrong, came into the palace, cut off his lady's nose, & cast her mother (who had made this new match) into the sea. The Emperor who went unto Rome to receive the crown, durst not say any thing, but returning with an intent to revenge it, he died of sickness in achaia.  
Baldwin the second, son to Robert, succeeded his father, in the year 1228. In the end Michael Paleologus entered the city by intelligence, Baldwin being then at the straight of Constantinople with a great army. At that time the Grecians recovered the Empire of Constantinople, which the French had held near sixty years.  
Michael Peleologus (to whom Theodore Lascares dying, left john Lascares his son in 〈◊〉, as a sheep unto the wolf) surprised Constantinople in the year 1259, having fi●●● expelled William king of Achaia, with the help of the Genevois, and usurped his realm. He came to the Council of Lions, whereas Pope Gregory and he become good friends, for which cause he was so hated of the Greecians, as after his death, he received no honour at his funerals: yet the empire continued in his house near two hundred years, and until the Turks took it.  
Andronic the second, eldest son to Paleologus, succeeded his father in the year of our Lord God 1283. He made his son Michael (whom some hold to be his son in law) companion or partaker in the empire, but he died in the year of our Redemption 1319 so as he then called another, named Andronic Constantin Despot, to have part of the empire, in the place of the forenamed Michael; whereat, Andronic, the son of Michael, being incensed, took arms against the Emperor his Grandfather, and vanquished him with the help of the Genevois, but the Venetians reinstared the old man. In the end, he died, being above seventy years old.  
Andronic the third, son to Michael, continued the wars six years together against his grandfather. They did often make a peace, by the means of their friends; but it held not, until the year of Grace 1332, whenas young Andronic entered by policy into Constantinople, where being entered, he did no harm unto his grandfather, but suffered him to reign with him during his life. After the death of his grandfather, he got the victory of his enemies: then, being about fifty years old, he was surprised with a fever, and a pain in his head, whereof he died within four days.  
john Cantacuzen was tutor to john Paleologus, and his companion in the empire, in the year of Grace 1341.  
john Paleologus, called also Caloian, succeeded his father in the year of our Salvation 1341. His tutor john Cantacuzen was expelled; but five years after, he made war against Paleologus, and his mother. He was the first which brought the Turks armed into Europe. In the end, Constantinople yielded unto him, and having it, he did no harm to any man, carrying himself only for companion of the empire to john, to whom he gave his daughter in marriage▪ After this, john Paleologus being banished, he made war, being assisted by the Turks, to whom he gave the first habitation in Europe, and he entered into Constantinople in the year of our Salvation 1357. Then Cantacuzen left the empire, and retired himself into a Monastery, and Matthew his son, seeking to be companion to Paleologus, was forced to desist. john Paleologus died in the year of Christ 1384, having reigned sixteen years with Cantacuzen, and seven and twenty alone, being in all three and forty years; and Andronic, his eldest son, who, notwithstanding is not put in the number of Emperors, held the empire three years.  
Manuel, the son of john Paleologus, came unto the empire, in the year of our Lord God 1387, and the most remarkable thing of his life, was, that he left seven sons, whereof the eldest, called john, succeeded in the empire.  
john, eldest son to Manuel, succeeded in the empire, in the year of our Salvation 1422. He was more addicted to peace than war; and being accompanied by all the princes and Prelates of Greece, he assisted at the Council of Ferrara, under the authority of Pope Eugenius the fourth, the which was afterwards transported to Florence. Then the two Churches, Greek, and Latin, were united. Being returned to Constantinople, he lived not long after, and died without any children, in the year of our redemption 1445.  
Constantine the eleventh, son to Manuel, after the death of his brother john, came unto the empire, in the year of Grace 1445. Being before king of Morea, he was called Dragon, for the cruelty he used against the Turks. But whenas Constantinople was taken by Mahomet the second, son to Amurath the second, retiring himself to the city gate to fly away, he was smothered in the press, the nine and twentieth of May, in the year of our Lord God 1453. His head was carried throughout the enemy's camp upa Lance. Thus Constantinople, raised and enriched by Constantine the son of Helen, under this Constantine the son of another Helen, was taken, and brought under the Turks subjection.  
Although it seems fit to follow with those Turkish Emperors which have succeeded him that first made himself master of Constantinople; yet, for that I discourse here of the empire of these princes, I have held it more convenient to set them all down in this place, and 〈◊〉 begin from the time that the Turks began to live under one monarch of the family of the Ottomans.  
Ottoman then, the son of Orthog●le, was Emperor of the Turks, in the year of our ●●●mption 1200. He was the first that received the glory of his nation, which had taken ●ierusalem, in the year of our Salvation 1008; but they had been vanquished by the Christians, under 〈◊〉 of Boulloin; so as they which remained, retired to Nicaea, after which, they had 〈…〉 of ●ame, until this, who made himself monarch, and holds the first 〈…〉 History. He subdued a great part of Bythinia, and took many 〈…〉 unto the Pontic Sea. But that which got him most honour, was, the taking of the town of Sy●a, sometimes called Sebastia. He died old, the first year of the 〈◊〉 of Philip of Valois.  
〈◊〉, the son of Ottoman, was Emperor of the Turks after his father, in the 〈◊〉 Christ 1328. He was more valiant than his father, bountiful, and of a good grace. He conquered the countries of Misia, Lycaonia, Phrygia, and Caria: he took 〈…〉, now called Bursia, the ancient abode of the kings of Bythinia, and there received a wound whereof he died, the first year of john the French king. He reigned two and twenty years.  
Sol●m●n, the son of Orcanes, reigned two years after the death of his father: he made war against the Grecians, and past out of Asia into Europe, where he defeated the Bulgarians, and took in Thrace the town of Adrianopolis, and Philippolis. Some others say, that he died in his father's life time, falling from his horse going a hunting, and that soon after his father died of grief. Wherefore some do not number him among the Turkish Emperors.  
Amurath the first, the son of Orcanes, was Emperor of the Turks in the year of our Lord God 13●0. He being incited by john Paleologus, sent two thousand Turks to his succour, the which was the fountain of the ruin of Constantinople: for being 〈◊〉 with the wealth of Europe, he transported at another time six thousand Turks in the galleys of Genoa, under colour to secure the Emperor of Constantinople; but his design was to usurp Greece. Thus he crossed the arm of Hellespont at Abide: he took Gallipolis, and other towns, and then he fell upon the Emperor himself, who never suspected him, and he took Servia, and Bulgaria, and defeated the princes. But a servant to Lazare Despote of Servia, to revenge his master who was dead, slew Amurath, in the year of Christ 1378.  
●●●●zeth, Emperor of the Turks, the first of that name, after the death of his father Amurath, slew Solyman his elder brother by treason, and enjoyed the empire alone, in the year of our Redemption 1378. In revenge of his father's death, he made war against Mar● Lord of Bulgaria, whom he vanquished, and put to death, and subdued a great part of his country. He was called Ba●azeth Hildrin, that is to say, Lightning, he was so sudden in all his affairs. He subdued in a manner all Greece, and besieged Constantinople, but he was taken by Tamerlane, who put him into a cage of iron, and carried him in that sort over all Asia and Syria, and in the end Bajazeth died in this misery. After his death, some hold there was a vacancy unto Mahomet, who was one of his sons.  
josua, or Cyriscelebes, which some unproperly call Calapin, eldest son to Bajazeth, after the defeat of his father, was dispossessed of Asia by Tamerlane, and carried captive to the Emperor of Constantinople, who entreated him beseeming a prince, and then he suffered him to go into Asia, where he recovered his father's realm. He was slain by his brother Mustapha, otherwise called mussulman, in the flower of his age, in the year of Christ 1407.  
Mustapha, or mussulman, was Emperor of the Turks a very short time, for his brother Moses seized upon the State, and expelled him. Some call this man Mustapha Orcha●●● the s●cond, and they say, that he was son and heir to josua, and that he was slain by 〈◊〉 his uncle by the father's side: but Moses did soon suffer the punishment which he had deserved: for he was also slain by his own brother Mahomet. There are some which writ that Mahomet reigned immediately after Bajazeth his father, and they make no mention of josua nor of Mustapha, but after Bajazeth they place his son Mahomet. Moses' expelled and slew his brother Mahomet, or as some say, his nephew Orcanes, and afterwards he was also slain by his brother Mahomet. These two are not by some put among the Emperors of the Turks, for that they reigned little.  
Mahomet the first, brother to josua, Mustapha, and Moses, was Emperor, in the year 1407▪ Some attribute to him that which is spoken of josua: he recovered all the places which Ta●erlan had taken from his father, and he expelled his own kinsfolks out of Galacia, the country of Pontus, and Cappadocia. Being returned into Greece, he remained at Adrianopolis, which he made the seat of his Empire, driving away the Christians that were within it. He died the twelfth year of his reign, and of Grace 1418.  
Amurath the second, son to Mahomet the first, succeeded his father in the year 1418. He first instituted the janissaries, which were Christians renegadoes, for the guard of his person. He invaded Hongarie, Bosnia, Albania, Valachia, and Greece. He took Thessalonica from the Venetians. Having held the Empire two and thirty years, he left it to his son Mahomet the second, in the year 1450.  
Mahomet the second, caused his younger brother to be presently slain. He was most wicked, and did not believe in any God: he said that Mahomet was a false Prophet, and like unto himself, he mocked at the holy Patriarches and Prophets. He purchased the surname of Great, and left it to the house of the Ottomans. He ruined the Empire of Constantinople, taking the city by assault, the nine and twentieth day of May 1453, and he did the like to the Empire of T●ebysonde. He took twelve realms, and two hundred towns from the Christians. In the year 1479▪ he besieged the Island of Rhodes, but it was well defended by the knights, and their great Master Peter of Aubusson, or of Amboise, a Frenchman. In the end he died of the colic, being eight and fifty years old, and having reigned one and thirty.  
Bajazeth the second, son to Mahomet the second, was Emperor by means of the janissaries, in the year 1481. He subdued Valachia, than he went against the Sultan of Egypt, who was the stronger. He took Lepanto, Modon, and Duras from the Venetians. Selim his younger son, whom by the janissaries means, he had preferred before his elder, and declared Emperor in his life-time, first expelled him, and then poisoned him, in the year 1512.  
Selim was Emperor in the year 1512. He added to his father's murder, that of his brethren Achmet and Corcut, and he caused seven of his brother's children to be strangled. He vanquished and expelled the Sophy of Persia, and he defeated the two Souldan's of Egypt, Campson and Tomumbeye, with the Mamm●●us, and Arabians. He added Egypt and Arabia to his Empire, and took● the great Cairo▪ than returning into Greece, he had an ulcer in the rains of his back, the which increasing daily, was the cause of his death, the eight year of his Empire, and of Grace 1519.  
Solyman, which some say to be the second of that name, Emperor of the Turks, recovered Syria, defeated Gazel, who had revolted, took Belgrada, Rhodes, and Buda twice. In the year 1543 he took Strigonia, and Alba regal in Hongarie. He conquered the realms of Assyria, and Mesopotamia, with the city of Babylon. He spoilt the frontiers of Armenia, Media, and Persia, and took Tauris, the chief city of Persia twice. He caused his eldest son Mustapha to be strangled, to please his concubine Rosa, who desired that her son Selim might be Emperor after his father. He besieged the Island of Malta, and Vienna in Austria; but he was repulsed by the great Master called Peter Parisot or La Valette a Frenchman, & by Charles the fift, Emperor. And Solyman died in Hongarie, in the year 1566, before the Castle of Sighet, the which he besieged, having reigned seven and forty years.  
Selim the second, entered into possession of the Empire by the means of Mehemet Bassa, before the death of his father was discovered. He took the Island of Cypress in the year 1571: but he lost his naval army the same year, at the battle of Lepanto, which he had against the Christians; but he repaired it soon, and having recovered Tunes and Gou●● 〈◊〉 Africa from the king of Spain, he died, in the year 1574, in the eight of his 〈◊〉. He did all this by his Ba●●●ss, whilst that he took his pleasure, being much 〈…〉 women and wine.  
〈…〉 the third, son to 〈◊〉, enjoyed the Empire eight days after his father's death, in the year 1574. 〈…〉 brethren to be slain, and two of his father's ●●●●●biness th●● 〈…〉 ●●began to govern at the age of eight and twenty years, being 〈…〉 religion, and a great justieer. He was much gi●en to w●● 〈…〉. He was father to one hundred and twenty children, and g●ew 〈…〉. He died in januarie 1595, the one and twentieth year of his Empi●●, 〈…〉 years old.  
〈…〉 the third, succeeded his father Amurath in the year 1595. He slew nineteen 〈…〉 ●●●threns, and drowned some of his father's concubines, whom he found with child 〈…〉 of his death. He put to death his eldest son with his mother, for that they 〈…〉 of Astrologers how long he should reign. In the year 1603, the Sophy of 〈…〉 covered P●●●ls and Bages from him with a great part of his country, which Se●●● the first, and Solyman the seconh had usurped. He died of the plague in januarie 1604, 〈◊〉 ●●igned nine years.  
〈◊〉, who reigneth this year 1612, succeeded to his father's Empire in the year 1604, ●●ing but sixteen or seventeen years old. In the year 1605, he took Strigonia, and 〈◊〉 other places in Hungary. They say that he causeth his father's body to be carried 〈…〉 a●●ie, being embalm, and in a coffin of lead, believing that his designs shall succeed the better. He hath made a truce with the Emperor Rodolphus, and them of the house of Austria, for fifteen years, and hath turned all his forces against the Sophy. He is ● courteous prince, and of great hope.      

The Estate of the Empire of Presbyter John.  

❧ A DISCOURSE OF THE EMPIRE OF PRESBYTER JOHN.  

The Contents.  
1THe opinion of divers Geographers touching the length, breadth, and limits of the empire of Presbyter john. 2. Titles and qualities which this prince gives himself. 3. Description of the provinces subject to Presbyter john, and first of Barnagas, the extent, limits of this country, and situation of the chief town called Beroe or Barue: and of other Cities, Islands, Lakes, Ports, and famous Promontories. 4. Another description of the country which he holds upon the firm land, and of his principal abode, and city of Beimalechi, where he keeps his Court. 5. Fertility of this country, abounding in Barley, Millet, Pease, beans, and other unknown pulses: Sugar, Wine, Oranges, Citrons, Lemons, Oil of Gove, Honey, Wax, Flax, and Cotton: four footed beasts, and fowl of all sorts, Camels, Elephants, Lions, Tigers (except Bears, Coneys, and Goldfinches) Apes, partridges, Geese, and Hares: mines of gold, silver, iron, and brass. This country is also remarkable for that it hath two Winters, and two Summers in the year. 6. The beginning of these Aethi●pians, inventors of the ceremonies of sacrifices, and of the Hieroglyficall letters: Idolaters to their kings, esteeming gold little in regard of Copper: worshipping the Sun rising, and cursing the setting: putting their dead bodies in vessels of glass, and believing two deities, the one immortal, the other mortal. 7. Description of Presbyter john's Court, his lodging commonly under tents, his apparel, and baggage when he travels. 8. Of the disposition, complexion, garments, and manner of building of the modern inhabitants of this empire: their ordinary meat, and their custom of feasting upon carpets, without table cloth, upon the ground. Their drink made of the fruit of Tamerins. Their language, characters, and letters: Their ceremonies in mourning: Their navigation. 9 Their riches rising from mines of gold, silver, copper, iron, sugar, cotton, etc. And what his revenues be. 10. The forces of this emperor, what numbers of men he may arm, and with what princes he confines, his allies, and his neighbour enemies. 11. His rigorous and imperious manner of government, whom his subjects honour and respect as God. His beginning and extraction from one of Salomans' sons, and the Queen of Saba. Of the succession to the crown. Of Ecclesiastical benefices, and administration of the sacraments. Of common women and strumpets. Of the many officers of the crown, divided into three ranks. Of the punishment of adulterous women. 12. Two sorts of religion brought into the dominions of Presbyter john, the Christian, and Mahometism, and after what sort the Christian faith hath crept into those countries. 13. Of the error and false belief of the Abyssins' retaining circumcision. Their parishes made like convents. The form of their Churches, into the which it is not lawful to enter with shoes, nor to spit in them: Of their Churchyard, Baptism, Sacramental confessions, and marriages. Of the austere penance of the religious of the order S. Anthony, and of another order called Cestifanes; and their ceremonies in the celebration of the holy Week: and of two notable prophecies importing that the Francs should join with them. 14. Embassages for the 〈◊〉 of the Abyssins', and Presbyter john, with the Church of Rome.   

IN a manner all that have made any mention heretofore of that which 〈◊〉 monarch holds, have spoken according to the ancient greatness of his predecessors, and not according to the extent of his Estate that now reigns; to whose empire they all give divers bounds. Some stretch it from the one unto the other Tropic, giving it near fifty degrees, or at the lest seven and forty in latitude, which would make one thousand and four hundred French ●●aguess, and this should be the length: and on the other side, they will have the breadth, go from East to West, that is, from the Read Sea to the Aethiopian. And these, to show more plainly the bounds, say, That this empire confines upon the North with Egypt, which lies towards Nubia; to the East, with the Read Sea & a part of that of the Indies, the gulf called Barbarico, unto the country of Melinda; towards the South, the mountains of Luna, or the Moon, which serve as a natural wall; and upon the West, the river of Nyger, or Senega, and the realms of Nubia, and Manicongo, and the river of Nile which waters it. And these are the limits which Belforest and Mercator have set down after other Geographers. Others confine it almost after the like manner, giving it for bounds upon the North, Nubia, and Bugia, which are near to Egypt; upon the South, the mountains of the Moon; to the East, the Read Sea, and the Barbarian gulf, with the countries of Ajana, and Dancale, which belong to the exterior Aethiopia; and upon the West, the realms of Manicongo, and Nubia, with the rivers of Nile, and Senega. This is the opinion of Magin, and some others. Hugh of Linscot, in his navigations faith, That this empire stretcheth from the entry of the Read Sea unto the Island of Syenna, under the Tropic of Cancer, except the side of this gulf, which the Turk hath held seventy years: so as (in his opinion) Presbyter john should have upon the East, the Read Sea, towards the North, Egypt, and the deserts of Nubia; and to the South, the realm of Monoemugi; so as this Emperor should have about four hundred Italian miles under his command.  
But john de Baros, being followed by Boterus, saith, That at this day the lake of Barcena is the centre of his Estate, which extends upon the East, by the Read sea unto Suaquem, for the space of one hundred twenty two leagues: but betwixt the Sea and his dominions, there is a ridge of mountains inhabited by Moors, which command also upon the Sea coast, except it be in the port of Ercocco, which belongs to Presbyter john. Upon the West, there is another rank of mountains along the current of Nile, inhabited by Idolaters which pay him tribute: we must make the bounds of this empire upon the North, by an imaginary line drawn from Suaquem unto the beginning of the Island of Mero●, called in ourtime Nobe, which shall extend for the space of one hundred twenty five leagues. Then must you make a bow, but not much bend towards the South, unto the realm of Adea, (from the mountains whereof, flows the river which Ptolemy calls Ratto, and falls into the Sea beneath Melinda) for the space of two hundred fifty nine leagues, there bordering upon it certain idolatrous black Moors, with curled hair: from thence it turns and ends at the realm of Adel, whereof Arar is the chief town, and is in the ninth degree of altitude: so as all this empire should not have in circuit above six hundred seventy two leagues.  
This prince, who says that he is issued from David, gives himself the titles of emperor of high and base Aethiopia, king of Go, of the Caffoetes, Fatigar, Angola, Barn, and Baliguaze, of Adea, Vangue, Goyame's, (where the springs of Nile are) of Amare, Baguamodri, Ambea, Vanguci, Tygremahon, Sabaim, the country of the Queen of Saba, and also of Barnagas, and Lord unto the town of Nubia, which doth extend towards Egypt.  
But ta●ing his empire as it is at this day, we will describe the provinces with as much brevity, and as exactly as we can. Among all the provinces subject to Presbyter john, there is not any one better known unto us, than that which they call Barnagas, by reason of the neighbourhood of the read sea, right against the which, it extends from Suaquem almost unto the entry of the straight: yet it hath not any port upon the sea but that of Ercocco. The chief town of this country is called Beroe or Barue, and stands upon a very pleasant river. Not many years since, the Turks made a great spoil in this country, ruining many places, & carrying away a great number of prisoners; but in the end he made an accord with the Bassa (which they call of Abassia, who makes his residence at Suaquem) paying him a thousand ounces of gold.  
In the most Western part of the province of Barnagas, there is a mountain which being spacious in the beginning, grows strait by little and little, and then it enlargeth itself again like unto a Mushroom, being a little league in circuit. Upon t●e ●op thereof, there are royal buildings, a Church, a Monastery, and two very great cisterns, with a large piece of ground which may easily entertain five hundred men. There is no passage up but one, and that only to a certain mark, beyond the which they cannot ascend, but with cords and baskets: and to conclude, this place is such, as it cannot be taken by force, by reason of the height, nor by famine, for that they have provision gro●ing there. Leaving Barnagas, they encounter betwixt the East and South with the mountains of Mandafo, Ofale, and Grare, which divide Pesbiter john's Estate, from the realm of Adel.  
In the province of Dafila which is subject to the realm of Barnagas, besides the town of Ercocco, whereof we have made mention, they do also reckon those of Sautar, Giabel, Laccari, and Abarach. After that the gulf of Ercocco goes, bending to a place called by the ancients Adulite, the which without doubt is the point of Ercocco, which extends unto Bebul, with a nook which the sea makes towards Arabia, upon the beginning of the straight, by the which they come out of the Arabian gulf, or the read sea, the which in this place is very narrow, and the water shallow, and full of Islands.  
Having past the town of Ercocco, which hath opposite unto it the Island of Mazua, they come to Zagnani and Zama, which are of the province of Lacca, then unto the port of Velle, sometimes Antifila. Beyond the point of Ercocco, there are two lakes where crocodiles live as in Nile, and beyond it, they come unto the port and promontory called sometimes Mosylon, and now the Cape of Docono, which is in the realm and country of Dangali. In this place of Dangali and Docono, the sea makes a little gulf, and suddenly it straightens itself again; so as the channel cannot be above ten or twelve good leagues broad: and upon this channel are five or six Islands which hinder the passage, so as sailors must have good experience to avoid the rocks which lie near unto these Islands.  
Next unto the country of Dangali, they come unto the port of Zeiloi, or Zeila, and then to Daphne, an ancient port, whereas the town of Barbara stands, near to Mount Fellez, after which is the Cape or Promontory of Guarda Funi, whereas the town of Met (in former times called Acanne) is situated: here they double the cape, and from the East, they turn along the coast towards the South, and the inward Aethiopia. Upon this coast they first found Carfur, sometimes called Opene, and the cape of Zingi, and running along this gulf, they found a bending of the sea towards Azun and Zazel●●, in old time Essina and Tonica: then they come to Magadazo, wehreas the Portugals traffic, and after that to the last maritime provine, which is Barris, comprehended in the titles of Presbyter john, having upon the sea, the two towns of Pate and Brave, whose lands divide the countries of the king of great Aethiopia, and of the king of Melinde: but having thus run along the coast, and it may be surveyed more places than was needful, for the description of the Empire of Presbyter john, let us take some view of that which he holds on the firm land.  
The realm of Tigremahon lies betwixt the rivers of Marabo, Nile, the read sea, and the realm of Angote. They put this realm among the country's subject to Presbyter john, for that their king is his tributary. The realm of Tygri hath the good town of Caxumo, ●he which they say, was the abode of the queen of Saba, who as the Aethiopian● 〈…〉, was called Maqueda, and had by Saloman a son whose name was Meilec. T●● 〈…〉 was also the place of residence for queen Candace.  
〈◊〉 realm of Angote is set 〈◊〉 the realms of Tygremahon, and Amaran. The provinces of Abug●ne, 〈◊〉, and others, are in this realm. There stand also upon the river of Saba 〈…〉 of Angotine, Bachle, Corcore, and Betmaria, and upon the river of 〈…〉 the chief town of Angote, near to the which stands another town, whi●● 〈…〉 name of S. Peter.  
The 〈◊〉 of A●ara hath for bounds upon the North, the realms of Angote; to the 〈…〉 Xoa; and upon the South, that of Damut; and towards the West, it exte●●● 〈…〉 to the river of Nile. The realm of Xoa lies betwixt the realms of 〈…〉 Damut, and Fatigar.  
〈…〉 is greater than any other of this Aethiopia, for that 〈…〉 the cour●● o● the river of Nile, it extends itself from of the realm Gayame's, 〈…〉 Island of Gueguere, in old time called Meroe, and this tract of country contai●e● 〈…〉 hundred miles.  
〈…〉 of Meroe, or of Gueguere, is not subject to Presbyter john, as some think, 〈…〉 inhabited by Mahometans, who are sworn enemies to the Abyssins'.  
Th● realm of Fatigar lies betwixt the realms of Adel and Xoa; and that of Damut is near unto Xoa, and enclosed betwixt the lake of Barcena, and the country of Zanq●●bara. Some others hold that the realm of Damut lies beyond the realm of Vang●●, and of Goyame's, towards the West, the which I found more probale.  
This is all that can be said concerning this Empire, in the description whereof, the greatest part of Cosmographers speak by conjectures; for that the reports which have 〈…〉 by the Abyssins', which have left their countries, are full of 〈…〉, as the most patiented man in the world would found them distasteful. Finally, they tha● have appointed the chief abode of this Emperor in the town of 〈…〉 for that it is most certain, according to the report of them of the 〈…〉 he makes his ordinary, and in a manner his continual abode in the town of 〈◊〉, as Hugh of Linscot (who hath run along all the coast of Aethiopia, and who could not be deceived by the Abyssins' in that point) reports.  

¶ The Quality.  
THe whole Estate of this great Monarch, to speak in general, is very fertile: for although it yields little wheat, yet it hath store of barley, millet, pease, beans, and other pulses, whereof some are unknown to us. It yields also abundance of sugar: but the Abyssins' know not the manner how to boil it, nor to refine it. They have great store of un●●●ss, and there grows such abundance of oranges, citrons, and lemons, as it almost exceeds belief: but they have no melons, roots, nor olives; yet they make oil of a certain fruit, which the inhabitants call Gove. Finally, they have abundance of ho●●e for that the bees are kept even in those places whereas the men remain: by reason whereof they have such store of wax, as they of the country have sufficient to make 〈…〉 without any use of ●allow. This country doth also bear flax, but the 〈…〉 not the art to make any linen cloth, the which they make most commonly of cotton, whereof they have great abundance.  
Moreover, this country hath in a manner all sorts of four footed beasts, and all foul that we have in Europe or elsewhere, as oxen, sheep, asses, horses, cammells, and besides 〈◊〉 elephants, lions, tigers, o●ceses, and stags: but they have no bears, coneys, nor 〈◊〉. These countries have this inconvenience, that there comes sometimes such ●●●●dance of grasshoppers, as they darken the air with their multitudes, & spoil 〈…〉 province, sometimes another, devouring all their harvest, and eating the leaves 〈…〉 of trees.  
The 〈◊〉 of the country are small, but they have many races of Arabia and Egypt, and they 'cause their colts to suck kine three or four days after they are foaled. They have great Apes, which are exceeding furious.  
These countries want no mines of gold, silver, iron, and brass: but the inhabitants know not how to draw it. In the realm of Zagamedra, they found mines of very pure silver, the which they cannot draw but by fire, the which doth make it run like long rods. Goyama abounds in gold, and in the realm of Damut they draw it, and refine it something better.  
Their fields are full of partridges, geese, and hares, for that the Abyssins' never hunt. To conclude, there is no country fit for the generation and multiplication of beasts, fowls, and plants, than this: but the inhabitants know not how to use this happiness, nor the bounty of their country, which might make them live with as much ease as any people on the earth.  
The inhabitants of these countries have two summers, and two Winters, which they do not distinguish by the heat or cold, but by the continual showers, or by the fair weather, and clear sky.   

¶ The manners of the Ancients.  
THe Ancients have believed, that the Aethiopians came not from any other place to inhabit that country, and that they were the first that instituted the service of the gods, and the ceremonies of sacrifices. They used two kinds of letters, whereof the one which they called sacred, were unknown to all men but the priests; and the other were common to all the people: yet the figures of their letters were not such, as they might frame any Syllables, but did resemble the shapes of some beasts, or the extremities of man's body, with many instruments of handicrafts men, and every figure had his signification; as the Sparrow-hawk did signify swiftness, the Crocodile, evil, the Eye, a careful regard, and so of the rest.  
They did hold him most holy among their priests, that did run as if he were frantic: And when they had chosen their king, they did worship him as if he had some divinity in him, or at the lest that he was given them by the divine providence; and he that was advanced to this dignity, was bound to live according to the laws, and to do all things after the custom of the country. He might not recompense nor punish any one that was under his power: but whenas he desired to have any one punished for some offence, or crime, he sent a Sergeant, who carried him the mark or sign of his death, and presently he to whom it was brought, upon the sight thereof, was the executioner of his own death.  
They did so honour their king, as if by chance he were blind of one of his eyes, or lame, or had any other imperfection or disability of body, they put out one of their eyes, or broke a leg, or some other part of the body, thinking they should perform their duties very ill, if they should remain in good estate, whenas their king was mayhemed in any part or member. They hold also, that they which were beloved of the king, killed themselves at his death, believing that this death would bring them glory, and that it was a certain testimony of true friendship.  
The Island of Meroe was in ancient time the place of residence or abode of the kings of Aethiopia, and it was inhabited by shepherds, which gave themselves to hunting, & by labourers which manured the ground. Herodotus writes, That the Aethiopian Macrovies did more esteem brass than gold, the which was held for vile among them, as the ambassadors of Cambyses, going into that country, saw fountains all environed, & as it were bound with chains of gold; others say, that it was Latin. The women practised arms, and went to the war, and making holes in their lips, they put in hoops of brass.  
Some did worship the Sun rising, and did curse the setting thereof with a thousand imprecations. Some did cast their dead bodies into rivers, others did put them into vessels of earth, and some laid them in glass, where they kept them a year in their houses▪ and did worship them with very great devotion, offering the first first-fruits unto them. Some hold that they declared him king which did exceed the rest in beauty, and in knowle●●● to feed cattle, that was the strongest, and richest: They say also, that they belee●●●●n immortal God, Creator of all things, and King of all the world; and another mortal, and uncertain. He that was their king, was honoured by them as a God, and in like manner, he that next the king was known to be of greatest merit.   

¶ The manners at this day.  
THe Em●●●●r of the Abyssins', whom the Arabians call Aticlabassa, and some of his 〈◊〉 him the name of Bel, or Belul Gian, which is as much to say, as powerful 〈…〉 from thence by corruption of language we have given him the name of 〈◊〉 or Presbyter john) and others call them Acegue, which signifies Emperor, or 〈◊〉 which is to say, King, according to an ancient custom, hath no certain abode; ●●● re●●ines sometimes in one place, sometimes in another, and he lives most common●● in the open fields under Tents, which they carry with him to the number of 6000, so as his Court contains ten or twelve miles in compass, when every man is lodged.  
He hath great store of vessel of gold and silver, and other rich movables. Some say, that he is not black, like unto the other Aethiopians, but inclining something to white. His ordinary days journey when he travels, as also his subjects, is twelve miles. When he travels the country, he is compassed about with certain read curtains, which are very high behind him, and of either side. He carries upon his hand a crown half gold, and half silver, and in his hand a Cross of silver. His face is covered with a piece of blue taffeta, the which he lifts up or pulls down more or less, as he favours them that have to deal with him.  
The inhabitants of these countries are black, ignorant, and without all knowledge of lear●●●● as some report; yet that great scholar Escala, who hath left us so great cause to commend him, doth witness, in his book of the Correction of times, That they are not so ignorant, as some hold them. They have no use of physic. Their ordinary garments are of beasts ski●●, or of cloth made of cotton: but the better and richer sort wear sheep skins, and they that are in greatest dignity, Lions, Tigers, and Onces.  
Their houses are low, and of no worth, for they are built of chalk, and of straw, & they remain in the lowest room. Their doors are always open, but not any one enters into another man's house. They neither have tables, nor tablecloths, and when they eat, they sit on the ground upon carpets, or some other cloth: There are many among them that eat fresh beef raw. They use no manner of coin, but in stead thereof, they give gold by weight. They use trucking or changing in all things, and that whereof they make greatest use therein, is salt and pepper. They are not much given to hunting nor fishing, and there are few handicrafts men among them. They call all the people of Europe, Francs, for that the French have in former times extended their names over all the world, especially in the conquest of the Holy land. But they call all other people that be white, Ghlibetes. Although they have vines, yet there is no wine made but in the king's house, and the Patriarches, whom they call Abuna: but in stead of wine, they make a certain beverige of the fruit of Tamariske, which is somewhat sharp.  
They are for the most part dull witted, and exceeding slow, for they have flax, and can make no cloth: They have canes of sugar, and cannot draw it: iron, and have not the wit to work it, yea they hold smiths to be sorcerers and wicked men.  
Great men entreat the poorer sort very roughly, so as they sow but what will serve their necessities; for that the mightier take it from them. Their language is without rule, and to writ a letter, they must have many days: yet they have goodly characters, much more pleasing than the Arabians and Turks; as we may see in the book of the Correction of ●●mess, written by joseph Escala, and in the Onomasticke of Turnerus. The Noblemen, Bur●●●●●, and Common people, have their dwellings distinct, and the meanest may purchase hi●●e●●e the title of a gentleman, by some famous exploit.  
There is no town in all the Abyssins' country that hath above 2000 households, and there are few of that sort. They remain for the most part dispersed here and there in hamlets. They give salt for the weight of gold. The people never swear but by the life of their king, wherein the Spaniards do imitate them. They do commonly use mules to bear their burdens, and to travel on, and horses to fight on. They do never wear any apparel which is black, but when they mourn, for that they hold this colour to be a true sing of sorrow and heaviness. They lament the death of their friends for the space of forty days. Whenas they make any great and stately feast, the second service is raw flesh, the which they eat with much spices, and found that it is one of their daintiest dishes.  
They are much given to navigation, and in a manner all that are of a free condition at the East Indies are mariners, and well practised in that trade, so as they are employed in the merchant's ships of Goa, China, Bengala, and other places.  
They serve in this trade for little money, and they are ready for all kind of drudgeries, enduring whipping, and other outrages very patiently, differing very little from slaves. They have for the most part their families in these ships, and they seem properly borne to be slaves. If any one suffers that which he carries upon his head to fall into the sea, or any other thing of less price, yea when their ships are under sail, there is one amongst them that casts himself into the sea, and swimming recovers the thing that was lost. They sing in a manner continually when they travel. And when they have nothing else to do, (especially in the Portugals ships) they drink drunk with their wives and children, repeating a thousand songs in the midst of their excess. Their wives do also wear long breeches, after the mariners fashion, at the East Indies, like unto the Arabians and Mahometans.   

¶ The Riches.  
THe gold and silver which is found in this country, will sufficiently prove that there is infinite wealth, besides brass, iron, and especially sugar, whereof there is great abundance, and might yield them much money, if the inhabitants had as well wit, and curiosity to refine it, as they have good hap to gather it plentifully.  
This prince hath three sorts of revenues: the first consists in the first-fruits of his land and demeans, the which he causeth to be tilled and manured by oxen and slaves, which multiply continually, for that they marry among themselves, and the children are of their father's condition: the second kind of his revenues, grow from his subjects, who pay him so much for every fire, and the tenth part of all the minerals which are drawn by any other than himself: the latter sort comes from princes which are his subjects, whereof some give him horses, others oxen, and some sand him cotton, or other things▪ and these give him the revenues of one of their towns; so as it be not that whereas they make their ordinary abode.  
Some hold that he hath great treasures, as well of cloth and precious stones, as of gold, and that he hath great places full, the which may easily be conjectured by a letter written to the king of Portugal, by the which he offered to give, towards a war against the Infidel, one hundred thousand drachmas of gold, with great store of men and victuals. Some holds that he lays up yearly three millions of gold in the Castle of Amara. It is true, that before the time of king Alexander, they did not lay up so much gold, for that they knew not how to purge it, and refine it: but in recompense, they laid up great store of p●●tious stones, and pieces of gold. The viceroy of Barnagas gives yearly to Presbi●en john one hundred and fifty good horses, with great store of silks wrought. The king of Tygrema on sends him yearly two hundred Arabian horses, with many pieces of silk and cotton, and a great quantity of gold: and others sand him that whereof they have abundance, or can easily recover.   

¶ The Forces.  
THe people subject to this Monarch are not very valiant, both for that he holds them as slaves, as also by reason they want the generosity of courage which makes men apt to arms, and hardy, and resolute in dangers; so as they seem to have their hands continually bound by the respect they bear unto their prince, and the fear they have of him: as also for that they have no defensive arms, but some paltry headpieces, and shirts of mail, wherewith the Portugals have furnished them. We must add hereunto the great want of forts, for that these people having neither strong places to retire themselves unto, nor arms wherewithal they should defend themselves, remain a pray to their enemies. Their offensive arms are arrows without feathers, and the zagay, or lance like a pike. Moreover, they have a Lent of fifty days, which doth so extenuat and weaken them, by reason of their great abstinence during that time, as they have not force to go nor move for many days after. This makes the Moors to watch their opportunity, and to assail them with great advantage. And for that, as we have said, there are no places of note found in all Presbyter john's country, in regard of their strength or otherwise, the Portugals discoursing sometimes with the Abyssins', have told them, that it were better) to avoid the great spoils which the Mahometans and some other Idolaters do continually make in those countries, carrying away both goods and men (that their prince should build towns and castles, and fortify them with ditches, walls, and other things necessary to make a place defensive: whereunto they have answered, that the power of their Neguz doth not consist in walls of stone, but in the arms of his people. Francis Aluares doth writ, that this Monarch may raise a great many hundred thousands of men: yet it hath not been seen in his greatest necessity, that he hath drawn together such great numbers. He hath a military religion, under the protection of Saint Anthony, to the which every father of a family that is a gentleman must appoint one of his sons if he have three, but not the eldest; and of these they make about the number of twelve thousand horse, the which are appointed for the king's guard. The end of this religion, is to defend the frontiers of this Empire, and to make head against the enemies of the faith. Finally, Presbyter john confines with three potent and mighty princes, whereof the one is the king of Bourne, the other the Turk, and the third the king of Adel. The king of Bourne doth command in that country, the which doth extend from Guangale towards the East about five hundred miles, betwixt the deserts of Set and Barca, the which country is unequally divided into plains and mountains. The king of Bourne hath a great number of subjects, the which he doth charge with no other impositions than the tenth of their first-fruits. Their trade is to steal, and rob their neighbours, and to make them slaves, and then to exchange them for horses with the merchants of Barbary. He hath under him many kingdoms, and doth much annoy the Abyssins', taking all that he finds in their mines, and carrying away the men captives. These people fight altogether on horseback à la genette, with short stirrups: they use lances with two heads, zagays, and arrows, and they invade the country suddenly, sometimes of one side, sometimes of another; but these may rather be called thieves and muderers, than enemies.  
The Turk which confines with the Abyssins' upon the East, and the king of Adel which environs their country betwixt the East and the South, infested Presbyter john much, and have restrained the bounds of his Empire, and reduced this country to great misery: fo● besides that the Turks have spoiled a part of Barnagas, whereas they entered in the year 1558, and were repulsed, yet they have taken from Presbyter john, all that he held along the coast, and especially, the ports of Suaquem, and Ercocco, at which two places, the mountains which lie betwixt the Abyssins' country, and the Read sea, open to make passage for traffic betwixt the Abyssins' & Arabians: and not long since, the king of Ba●nagas was forced to make an accord with the Turk, and to purchase a peace of him, paying a yearly tribute of a thousand ounces of gold. But he receives no less loss by the king of Adel, who confines with the realm of Fatigar, and commands unto the Read Sea, where he hath Assam, Salir, Met, Barbora, Bidar, and Zelle. There arrive at Barbora, many vessels from Aden, and Cambaia, with their merchandise to exchange, for the which they receive store of flesh, and victuals, honey, and wax for Aden: much gold, juorie, and other things for Cambaia: and they also draw much victuals from Zeila, for that there is abundance of honey, and wax, store of grain, and divers first-fruits which they lad to carry to Aden, and other places of Arabia; then cattle, especially certain sheep, whose tails weigh five and twenty pounds or more, having the head and neck black, and all the rest white, and certain others which are all white, having long tails, and crooked like unto the stock of a vine, with a neck hanging down like unto a bull. There are certain kine which have horns branched like unto a stag. There are some black, and others red, having one horn in the forehead, a foot and a half long, bending backward. The chief town of this realm is Arar, eight and thirty leagues from Zeila, lying Southeast. The king of this country, who is a Mahometan, by a perpetual vow to make war against the Christians of Presbyter john's countries, hath purchased himself the name of Holy among the Barbarians. He attends until the Abyssins' are grown weak and consumed, by that long and strict fast of fifty days; and whenas they are scarce able to do any necessary business in their houses, he enters the country, spoils the villages, carries away many Abyssins' captives, and commits a thousand outrages. The Abyssin slaves are of great profit out of their country: wherefore princes do much esteem them, and among others, these slaves, by means of their industrious service, are grown free and rich in Arabia, Cambaia, Bengala, and Sumatra: for that the Mahometan princes of the East, being all tyrants, of the realms usurped from idolaters, cannot trust their subjects, when they seek to assure their Estates, but they make themselves strong by the multitude of slaves that be strangers, to whom they commit the guard of their persons, and the government of the realm. Among all the sorts of slaves, the Abyssins' are most esteemed, by reason of their great fidelity, and their good complexion. And for that the king of Adel, by the great number of prisoners which he took in the countries of Presbyter john, did fill Egypt and Arabia with slaves of that nation, receiving in exchange, arms, munition, and soldiers, from the Turk, and princes of Arabia: Claudius, king of the Abyssins', finding himself priest, in the year of our Lord God 1550, by Gradaamed king of Adel, who had much annoyed him by the space of fourteen years, by his continual incursions; and seeing himself forced to abandon the frontiers, and to retire into the heart of his Estates, he demanded succours of Stephen de Gama, Lieutenant to john the third, king of Portugal, at the Indies, who was then in the Read Sea, with a good army. Gama sent Christopher his brother unto him with four hundred Portugalls, and a good number of Harquebusses, and other arms. With these he defeated his enemy twice, by reason of the advantage of his shot: but in the third battle, the king of Adel having received a thousand Turkish Harquebuziers, from the Governor of Zebit, with ten pieces of ordnance, the Abyssins' were put to rout, and many of the Portugals slain upon the place. But the king of Adel having sent back his Turks, he was suddenly set upon near unto the river of Zeila, and to Mount Sanal by king Claudius, who had sixty thousand foot, five thousand Abyssin horses, and the Portugals which remained of the last defeat, whereof one of them wounded Gradaamed very ●ore. But in the year of our Redemption 1559, king Claudius coming to fight with the Moors, was slain upon the field, and the king of his enemies did triumph upon an Ass. He had for successor Adamas his brother, against whom (for that he was half a Mahometan) a great part of the Abyssin nobility revolted; so as the viceroy of Barnagas defeated him, in the year of our Lord God 1562: but the affairs of Aethiopia wavering thus for a time, they were soon after restored under Alexander, by the help of the Portugals, who brought them offensive and defensive arms, and stirred up the spirits and courages of the Abyssins' by their example in the war: for all they that remained of the defeat of Christopher de Gama, and many others which have come since, are settled and married there: so as they have brought in our order and discipline of war, the use of arms, and the manner how to fortify the country, and places of importance. Some Florentines have also traveled into this country, partly through curiosity, and partly for traffic.  
The Emperor of the Abyssins' doth use to cherish and give kind entertainment to the Francs (so they call all the people of Europe) and will hardly suffer them to go out of his country, when they are once entered. Presbyter john hath many enemies, besides those of whom we have made mention; as the king of Dancali, to whom belongs the port of Suela, upon the Read Sea. Moreover, the Moors, which are in the province of Dobe, divided into fourteen Seigneuries, do much annoyed him: for although they remain within the confines of Fresbiter john's country, yet they revolt often. There is a law among them, that no man may marry until he hath slain twelve Christians. In our time, this great prince took the king of Mozambique in battle. He put to rout the Queen of Bersaga, at the Cape of good Hope; defeated Termides prince of the Negroes, towards the West; and vanquished the king of Manicongo, which is right against the Island of S. Thomas, under the Equinoctial line; and afterwards, one of his Captains put Azamur, Bassa to the great Turk at Suaquem, thrice to rout, and in the third, he took his son prisoner, and cut off his head, taking from him many pieces of ordnance.  
He holds Egypt in great fear, and many Arabian princes, by reason of the water which he may take from them, for the which they pay him tribute. He may famish Egypt, as Pope Pius the second and other Authors writ, taking from it the river of Nile: the which the Abyssins' know well; but they say, they forbear to do it, lest the Turks should ruin the Holy Sepulchre of our Lord and Saviour Christ. To conclude all in a word, there is no doubt-but if Presbyter john had men out of Europe, which could fortify his countries in divers places, fill it with arms after our manner, and instruct the Abyssins', and train them in our kind of fight; he should not only be able to chase the Turk out of all the countries which his predecessors held in old time, but also to give a law to all his neighbours that assail him; considering the great abundance of gold, and silver, that he hath, and also the great numbers of men that live in his kingdoms and territories.   

¶ The Government.  
THis monarch keeps all his subjects both great and small in wonderful awe, and doth entreat them more like slaves than subjects, and the better to entertain them in this estate, he maintains himself in such reputation amongst them, as they hold him for a sacred and divine person: All bend themselves hearing the name of their prince, and in honour thereof, touch the ground with their hands: They do reverence to his Tent, although he be not in it. The kings of the Abyssins' had a custom to show themselves but once a year to their subjects: Then he appeared thrice, that is to say, upon Christmas day, Easter day, and of the Holy Cross in September: but since they are grown more familiar.  
The king takes away and gives Seigneuries to whom he pleaseth, and it is not lawful for him that is deprived, to show any discontent. He disposeth both of religious and lay men, and of their goods, of the collation of holy orders, and the administration of Sacraments. There is not any one among them that hath vassals, but the King himself, to whom the kings that are his subjects come every year to do their homage, and to promise' obedience.  
This prince descends (as they hold opinion) from a son of Saloman, called Meilech, and the Queen of Saba, and these people received the Christian faith under Queen Canda●eses, in whose time the house of Gaspar began to reign in Aethiopia, and from him there descended thirteen generations. john the Holy, about the time of the Emperor Constans having no children, left the empire to the eldest son of Caie his brother, and he invested balthasar in the realm of Fatigar, and Melchior in that of Goyame's: by reason whereof, the blood royal was divided into three families, of Gaspar, Melchior, and balthasar. He ordained that the Empire should be given by election to one of those three families, although he were not the eldest, for that the particular realms remained to the eldest. And to avoid all troubles, he ordained that the emperors brethren, and his nearest kinsfolks should be shut up in the castle of Mount Amara, and carefully kept; willing also that the Emperor's sons should be put there, except the eldest, in whose place, if he dies, the next is always drawn forth.  
This Monarch gives and takes away benefices at his pleasure, and makes no difference betwixt the Clergy and Laymen, but the administration of sacraments belongs to the Abuna, the which is their Patriarch. Incontinent women which make profession of that lewd life, live without bourroughs and towns, and are paid by the commonalties. It is not lawful for them to enter into any town, and they must of necessity beattired in yellow.  
The eldest succeed in the father's goods, according to the laws of the country. It is ordained by an ancient law, that the king shall not keep himself retired above two days, for that if he should stay longer in one place, there would be great want of victuals, considering the infinite number of noblemen, officers, and others which follow the court.  
The first rank of dignity, and the greatest is that of Bishops, and the Clergy; the second, is of sages and learned men, which they call Balsamates, and Tenquares; and the nobility holds the third: the last are those which receive pay, to what estate soever they are called.  
Although that judges take knowledge of crimes worthy of death, yet they are bound to make their report to the governor of the place where they remain, who carries the title, and is in effect the king's lieutenant, and represents his person. They have no written law, but all things are decided according unto natural reason.  
If a woman be accused of adultery, the punishment belongs to them that are interessed, and found themselves as it were wronged in their honour. The viceroy of Batnagas remains in the town of Barue, and hath under him the governments of Danfile, and Canfile, which are upon the frontiers of Egypt.   

¶ The Religion.  
THe subjects of Presbyter john are for the most part Christians, who remain very obedient, and well affected to their prince. There are also some Mahometans which are his tributaries; but these continually seek means to revolt. But to speak of them that follow the Christian religion, and to discourse of their belief, which differs something from ours, although we all acknowledge one Saviour, it shall be fit in my opinion to relate after what manner the faith crept into these countries.  
The Abyssins' in the beginning received judaisme, which extended unto the neighbour countries, by the means of Meilech the son of Saloman, of queen Maqueda his mother, and of the jews which accompany him. At the lest, the Abyssins' say, that this is found in an old chronicle, the which is kept in the town of Caxume. They received the Christian faith by the means of queen Candaces' eunuch, who was baptized by Philip, as we read in the Acts of the Apostles. The first place which was converted to the faith, was that of Tygia, and at this day, they make all their public instruments and writings in the Tygian tongue. They fell afterwards with the Cosites of Egypt into the error of Eutiches, for that they depend of the Patriarch of Alexandria, whom they acknowledge for their head, and from whom they receive their Abuna or Patriarch: for this people following the authority of this Patriarch of Alexandria, and his doctrine, came 〈◊〉 corrupted: for that the brook must of necessity savour like the spring; especially 〈◊〉 ●hat the Abyssins' could have no intercourse with them of Rome, but by the means 〈◊〉 ●●●xandria and Egypt.  
〈◊〉 that the mischief doth still increase, the Abyssins' hold with the errors of the Cosites, many other impertinencies. Their ignorance and error augments by the commerce and conversation they have with idolates and Mahometans which environ them round about; yea there are many idolaters which live in the midst of the Abyssins', as in the realms of Damur, Corague, and Agaos.  
But to let you understand their belief, you must know that the Abyssins' hold circumcision obstinately, and not only the men are circumcised, but also the women, I know not after what manner; the which the jews did not use. Moreover, following the law of Moses, they eat not any beast that is not cloven footed; and for this cause they abhor hares, geese, and ducks. They do reverence Saturday more than Sunday, following therein the jews, who were so zealous in the observation of the Sabbath day.  
Lay men wear their hair long, and shave the chin and upper lip, wearing a little cross about their necks. Contrariwise the priests shave their heads, and wear their beards long, having a cross in their hands, (the which is not allowed among the laity, but only with the Lords) and a vessel of holy water, to give unto those that shall require it, with a blessing; and they are accustomed to cast of this holy water into the meat they eat, and into their drink.  
King john ordained that there should be but four parishes in every town. These parishes are made like unto convents, and in either of them there are thirteen priests to say Mass: and these judge of civil causes, as the judges do of criminal in the king's name. Of all the number of priests, they choose twelve canons, the which do continually assist the Bishop, who is chosen out of that number, as the Archbishop is taken out of the number of the Bishops, and the eldest Bishop is made Archbishop.  
The Monks wear a long garment unto the ground, the which for the most part is yellow and very hairy: Nuns use also a long gown, their heads are shaven, and they are girt with a leather belt. They are not shut up in the Monasteries, but in certain villages, under the obedience of the nearest Convent.  
Their Churches have two curtains, the one near unto the Altar; and no man enters into this place but the priests: the other in the midst where the clerks remain, at the lest, they that have the meanest orders: wherefore many seek to be admitted, to the end they may have access unto this place.  
Every Church hath but one Altar, on which they say but one Mass a day. The walls of these Churches are covered with the pictures of our Lady, and of Saints, especially, of S. George on horseback. They have no graven images, and some think the only reason is for that they have not wit enough to make them. They will not allow any to paint jesus Christ crucified, saying, that they are not worthy to see him in that passion and torment.  
They make the bread and wine, which the priests do afterwards consecrat at Mass, with wonderful care & ceremony. They put off their shoes when they enter into their Churches, and they spit not in them, neither do they suffer any beasts to enter into them. If any one passeth on horseback before a Church, he lights, to witness the honour he bears unto it. Their Churchyards are environed with high walls, to the end no beasts may enter into them. They have bells of stone which are long and thin, whereon they strike with a staff: they have some also of iron, with a clapper of the same metal, and use to carry some in their processions, which they found.  
They do not baptizm their male children but forty days after their birth, and females after sixty; and if any die in the mean time without baptism, they say that the mother's receiving of the communion during the time of her being with child sufficeth: they baptizm not but upon Saturday and Sunday, and they presently give the Eucharist to them that are baptized. In remembrance of our saviours baptism, than cause themselves to bebaptised every year upon Twelfth day: and to this end, there are pools, and little lakes, whether they transport themselves.  
They confess themselves standing, and they keep not much secret in their confession. They communicate under both kinds, and they consecrated bread without leaven. They go to the communion with their hands open, and lifted up before their shoulders, and they receive standing. They never say Mass without Incense, nor without three persons, that is, the Priest, the Deacon, and Subdeacon.  
Marriages are made by the means of priests, but they are not firm. Priest's may marry, but they can have but one wife, and if she dies, they may marry no more, or if they do, they become lay men (the which is practised also among the Muscovites) even as if they had lain with another woman. All the religious men are of the order of S. Anthony. It is true, that from this there is another sprung, called Cestifanez, which is rather held for jewish than Christian.  
There reigns an heresy in this empire, which holds, that they aught not to worship any other Cross, than that whereon jesus Christ was crucified. They give not the extreme unction to them that are near death, but they cast Incense upon the dead, wash them, wrap them up, say the office for them, and carry them to the ground, with a Cross, Incense, and Holy water. They keep Lent strictly, and with great abstinence. Their best meats at that time are herbs, dried raisins, and some fish; which notwithstanding they use in few places. But many Priests, Monks, and Nuns, eat nothing but herbs, either during the whole Lent, or every two days: yet in the realms of Barnagas, and Tygremaon, they eat flesh on Saturday, and Sunday.  
Their Monks and Nuns do very austere penances, as to wear a girdle of iron upon their flesh; to pass the whole Lent, and never sit; to remain in the coldest weather up to the neck in water, or else in woods, valleys, or caves, far from all company. All Clerks fast from Whitsuntide until Christmas, except Saturday, and Sunday, and lay men from Trinity Sunday unto Advent, Wednesdays, and Fridays. Priest's may not marry after they have taken orders: but they may be received being married, unless they have had two wives.  
In the Holy week they never say Mass, but on Thursday and Saturday, and during all this week, the Abyssins' salute not one another, and if they meet, they pass by, and lift not up their eyes: and men of quality, go attired in black or blue, and they light no candles in their Churches. Upon Maundie Thursday they use the ceremony to wash the poors feet. On good Friday they do acts so full of piety, and give such testimonies of sorrow, as it is almost incredible. They beaten one another with their fists and rods: And they do willingly receive so many stripes or blows from their priest, as the blood runs down their bodies. During the time that our saviours body lay in the grave, they attire themselves in mourning, and they eat not any thing, neither do they go out of their Churches.  
They hold seven Churches to be most ancient, for that (say they) they were built whenas they received the Gospel. They will have that of Caxumo under the name of S. Mary of Zion, to be the first, for that the first stone of the Altar was sent them from this mountain. There are one hundred and fifty cannons, and as many Monks. Women enter not into their Churches, unless it be at the town of Bazua, where there are two, one for men, under the name of S. Michael, and the other for women, under the title of S. Peter, and S. Paul. There are very many Monasteries: twelve miles from Chaxune, there is one, among the rest, which is called hallelujah; for that (as they say) a religious man being attentive at his ordinary prayers, heard the Angels sing hallelujah in the place.  
Monks may not marry, and women may not enter into the cloisters of men, nor any beast of that sex. There are many among them that marry two wives, yea more, at one time, which are not punished: yet it is not lawful for them to enter into the Church, but they may be divorced. They fear excommunication wonderfully, and they are so devout, as many come yearly to the holy Sepulchre.  
They confess and hold the Church of Rome to be the first in the world, and the Pope for the greatest man that is, and for the Vicar of jesus Christ, and the successor of S. Peter, and their seat, which they call of David, from whom they say they are descended, the second. They have prophecies which import, that they should not have above one hundred Abunes, that is to say, Patriarches, from the Church of Alexandria, and that he which they had in the year of our Lord God 1520, was the last, after which they had a new Rector or head from the Church of Rome. They have the prophecies of two holy Hermits, which say, That the Francs shall join themselves with them, and ruin T or, Ziden, and Mecca, and take Egypt; at what time the way to unite them unto the Christians in these parts, shall be open: And the Moors have a prophesy, which saith, That Mecca, whereas the Prophet Mahomet hath his Sepulchre, shall be ruined by the Aethiopians. They have not the heresy of the Monothelites amongst them, but they hold two natures in jesus Christ, as we do: the which appears in their Aethiopian Mass, translated into Latin.  
Presbyter john saith, in a letter sent unto the Pope, that it is written in the life of S. Victor, and in the Books of the holy fathers, That a great Christian Lord should make a strict league with the king of Aethiopia.  
Now that we have set down the Abyssins' Estate touching spiritual matters, it shall be fit to make some mention of that which hath been done in our time touching their reconciliation with the Church of Rome, and first we will begin with a famous embassage. A little before our time, David king of the Abyssins', being yet but young, and under the government of Helen his grandmother, moved with the same of the happy success of the Portugals at the Indies, sent one called Matthew, an Armenian by nation, with an Abyssin Lord, to Alphonso of Albuquerque, viceroy at the Indies, to contract friendship with king D. Emanuel, to whom they brought letters from their prince in a little pipe of gold, and among other things, they presented unto him a piece of the true Cross in a box of gold.  
These being afterwards returned from Portugal to the Indies, were ten years after their departure conducted to Ercocco, by Sequeira General of the Portugals: And there, by the means of the kind reception they gave unto Matthew, and of the joy that the Abyssins' did show for his return, the Portugals were assured of that whereof they doubted, that he was ambassador unto the great Neguz. With this occasion, Sequeira contracted a league, and made a perpetual peace, in his king's name, with this monarch, in whose name the viceroy of Barnagas swore the league.  
At the same time, Sequeira sent Roderick de Lima Ambassador to this Prince's Court, with whom went Francis Aluares, who afterwards writ all this History. He returned from his embassage six years after his departure, that is to say, in the year of Christ 1526; bringing with him Zagazabe, an ambassador sent by Presbyter john to the king of Portugal, and Francis Aluares with presents and letters which he sent unto the Pope. The letters were presented at Bolonia, at the coronation of the Emperor Charles the fift. The emperor of the Abyssins' made mention in his letters, of Pope Eugenius the fourth, who had sent the Council of Florence to his predecessors, and he remembered the union of the Eastern Church with the Roman.  
In the year of our Redemption 1555, john the third, king of Portugal, had a design to try all possible means to reconcile Presbyter john wholly to the Church of Rome: for although that David's Ambassador had done his obedience to Clement the seventh in his king's name, yet they doubted (as it was likely) that for want of spiritual help, it would be unprofitable; seeing they still followed the heresies of Eutiches and Dioscores, and depended of the authority of the Patriarches of Alexandria, and received the Abuna from him which was the arbitrator of Ecclesiastical things, and administrator of the Sacraments, who gave orders throughout all Aethiopia, and was master of the ceremonies, and Doctor of the faith. Whereupon, they thought they could not do any thing more profitable, nor more necessary than to sand a lawful Patriarch from Rome, to govern those souls, and with him certain Priests of good life, and great learning, to convert and maintain those people in the true faith, by disputation, preaching, public and private discourses.  
It seemed there was a good overture for this effect, for that claud, king of the Abyssins' had some years before received important succours from the Portugals against Gradaamet king of Adel, who had reduced him to extremity, and in a letter written to Stephen de Gama governor at the Indies, he had called his brother Christopher de Gama Martyr, for that he died in that war. Having therefore imparted this design, first to Pope julio the third, and then to Pope Paul the fourth; they concluded to sand thirteen jesuite Priests into Aethiopia, men held to be of great piety & learning. john Nugnez Barette was made Patriarch, and they gave him two Bishops for coadjutors, Melchior Carnee, and Andrew Oueido, with the titles of Bishops of Nicaea, and Hierapolis. King john did furnish this Embassage not only with things necessary for their voyage, but with all that might be destred concerning sacred things, and with rich presents for Pesbiter john.  
But to make the matter more easy, they sent james Diaz before, from the town of Goa, into Aethiopia, by commandment from the king of Portugal, and with him Gonsaluo Rodrigues to discover the humour and disposition of the great Neguz, and of his subjects. They having ●ad audience of this prince, they delivered him king john's letter, by which he did congratulat with him in the name of all Christians, for that following the example of his father and grandfather, he had embraced the faith and Catholic religion: whereat this Monarch was amazed, as a matter he had never dreamt of; and having examined why the king of Portugal had written those words, he excused himself upon his secretaries, or the interpreter of the letters; adding, that although he did much esteem this king, as his good brother, yet he had never any design to stray from the faith of his ancestors. Rodrigues did not faint, but first of all did what he could to draw claud to the truth, and the greatest difficulty he found, was the ignorance of councils, and of all ecclesiastical Histories, which was in the king, and in all the princes of Aethiopia.  
Seeing then that the great Neguz gave him no willing audience, he composed and published a book in the Chaldean tongue, wherein confuting plainly the errors of the Abyssins', he showed the sovereign authority of the Church of Rome; and this bred a great rumour, so as the king was forced to suppress it cunningly, to free himself from danger.  
james Diaz seeing that he lost his labour, and that the time of his return grew near, took leave of Presbyter john, and having given an account at Goa, in what estate he had left the business, it was not thought convenient, that the Patriarch should with his person put the reputation of the Holy See to compromise. But they resolved (for that they would not quite abandon so holy an enterprise) to sand the Bishop of Hierapolis with two or three of his companions, to treat with more authority of that which father Rodrigues had treated of with so small fruit. This Bishop having embraced this enterprise with much content, went on his way with father Emanuel Fernandes, and some few others. Being come into the Abyssins' country, he had more subject to suffer, than to dispute, for that king claud having been vanquished and slain, he had for successor Adamas his brother, a sworn enemy to the holy See. This prince drew the bishop and his companions after him to the wars, and entreated them very cruelly, using no less rigour to the Abyssins' that were converted. He was afterwards defeated in battle by the Turks, who stripped the Bishop and his companions of all they had: so as they fell into so great misery and poverty, as all succours failing them, they were forced to get their living by digging of the ground, until they all died there except one, who continued there, and governed about five hundred Catholics, whereof some were Portugal's, and some Abyssins' converted, with wonderful patience.      

The Realm of Monomotapa.  

❧ A DISCOURSE OF THE KING OF MONOMOTAPA.  

The Contents.  
1. A Description of the situation, form, and circuit of the realm of Benomotana, or Monomotapa, and the chief town Benomotaxe. 2. Temperature of the air of this country, abounding in rivers, carrying gold in their sand, in forests, corn, and elephants, in pastures, and mines of gold. 3. Complexion and good disposition of body of these people, being of a mean stature, and black of hue, their apparel, and cotton cloth, their manner of living, of flesh, rice, fish, millet, and oil of Susyman: their manner of serving their king upon the knee, his guards and arms. The generosity of the women which go to the war like Amazons. 4. Wherein the revenue of this prince consists. 5. Policy of this nation, and their speedy execution of justice, which decides all causes presently by witnesses, and without prisons, and punisheth three crimes severely, sorcery, theft, and adultery. 6. Apostasy of this people which had been converted by Gonsaluo de Sylva, a jesuite, whom afterwards they put to death by the persuasion of certain Mahometans: and how his death was revenged by the Portugals.   

ALthough we have no great knowledge of this Estate, yet we must speak something according to that small relation which hath been made unto us: whereby we may make some probable conjecture of divers other neighbour princes, as of the kings of Adel, Monoemugi, Angola, and Matama, which are not so great and powerful princes, as this whereof we now treat.  
The realm then of Benomotana, Benomotaxa or Monomotapa, is of a very great extent, and obeys one prince, which carries the name of Monomotapa, that is to say, Empire, in that country language. This Estate is fashioned like an Island, betwixt two branches of a great river, which runs from the lake of Zembre toward the South; and from this lake the river of Nile hath her spring, and runs towards the East and North, and Zaire towards the West. The branch of this river which encloseth the North part of this Island is called Cuama, and the other which bounds in this Island upon the West and South, carries the name of Spirito Sancto: then upon the East it is bordered by the sea Some hold that this Island hath in circuit seven hundred and fifty Spanish leagues, or three thousand Italian miles.  
The principal town of this country is called Benomotaxa, whereas the king makes his ordinary abode, and there is another called Simbas. Besides this Island, this king commands over other places; for that his Empire extends far, as well within the land, as along the sea coast, unto the capes of Mozambique, and Bonne Esperance, and many neighbour kings are his tributaries. Among other realms, they reckon that of Torre, or of Butue, which runs from the river of Spirito Sancto, to the Cape of Courantes, and also far within the land. There is to be seen in this realm, the famous building of Simbaoe, built in old time of square stone, wonderful hard, and of exceeding greatness: and somehold, that in this place should be the country of Agyssimbe, mentioned by Ptolemy, as well by reason of the situation, as for the nearness of their names.  

¶ The Quality.  
THis realm is watered by many rivers, as that of Panami, Luanga, Arruya, Mangiano, and others, which carry gold with them. The air is temperate, and the country very good, and pleasant, yet full of forests. It abounds in grain, and divers beasts, especially Elephants, whereof there are great numbers, as may be easily conjectured by the abundance of Elephants teeth that are brought yearly out of that country, where those beasts are very huge and great. But to speak something in particular, that part of this Island which extends from the river of Cuama to Cape Courantes, hath certain places within the land, which are cool, healthful, and very yielding. From Cape Courantes unto Spirito Sancto, there are plains full of beasts, both great and small, but they are cold by reason of the winds which blow from the Sea, and these plains want wood. Along the river of Cuama, there are many mountains covered with trees; hills and valleys, watered with rivers, and places well peopled, and pleasing and in these places they found many Elephants. In all this Estate, they have great store of gold, as well in mines, as in rocks and rivers. As for the realm of Butue, it is very rich in mines of gold: and moreover, there are very good pastures, but it wants wood: The cold is very great by reason of the winds which come from the Antarctike pole.   

¶ The Manners.  
THese people are of a mean stature, black, of a good complexion, and active. They are appareled, in cotton cloth, which they make, or is brought from some other places: but the king may not wear cloth coming from any other country, for fear of poison, or some such like practice, and the people of base condition are covered with beasts skins. The most warlike people that this prince hath (as some would make us believe) are women, who carry themselves like unto the ancient Amazons. They handle their bows exceeding well, and they sand their male children to their fathers out of the province, and retain their daughters for themselves, and their abode is upon the West, near to the river of Nile. The prince is served upon the knee, and it is all one, to sit before him, and to stand amongst us, the which is not allowed to any but to great persons, They take taste of all that which is set before him, after that he hath drunk and eat. He doth not commit the guard of his person to many men, as other princes usually do, but hath two hundred great dogs to that end, the which he holds to be the safest guard. He bears for his arms, a pickaxe, and two darts. The inhabitants of this country live of flesh, rice, fish, millet, and a certain oil called Susiman. They are courageous, and exceed horses in running. They marry as many wives as they list. In some parts of this monarchy, especially in the realm of Butue, they burn dung for wood.   

¶ The Riches, and Forces.  
IT is most certain, that seeing they have so great store of that metal which every man so much desireth, they cannot be but very rich. The king exacts no tribute from his subjects but certain days service, and many presents, without the which no man may show himself before this prince. As for his forces, there are great numbers of men in his countries, which lives of little, and are valiant, but the misery for them is, that they are ill armed.   

¶ The Government.  
THis monarch keeps about him the heirs of princes his vassals, to assure himself of them. He hath not any prisons, for that all causes are decided at the same time when the crime is committed, by witnesses; and they do not punish any crimes to severely, as sorcery, theft, and adultery. Although they marry as many wives as they list, yet the first hath the pre-eminence over the rest, so as her children are heirs to her husband, and the other wives obey and serve her.   

¶ The Religion.  
THe subjects of the king of Monomotapa, are not Idolaters, but worship one only God, whom they call Mozimo. In the time of Sebastian, king of Portugal, the king of Inanior, a vassal to Monomotapa, was converted by Gonsaluo de silva, a jesuit, who soon after baptised the king of Monomotapa, and his wife; the king was called Sebastian, and the Queen, Marie; after which there were three hundred of the chief baptised. But it happened that four Mahometans, beloved and favoured of the king, gave him to understand, that Gonsaluo was a Magician, and that he ruined kingdoms with his enchantments, and that he was come as a spy into his Estate, to make his subjects revolt: so as the king being young, persuaded by these wretches, resolved to put Gonsalua to death, who was slain by eight of the king's servants, whilst he slept after a long prayer, and his body was cast into the river of Mensigina, and near unto the place, they slew, with the like fury, fifty persons that were newly converted. This fury being past, whenas the chief of the realm, and some Portugals, had let the king see the error which he had committed, he excused himself as well as he could, and caused some of those Mahometans, which had seduced him, to be slain, and caused the rest to be fought for, being hidden, to the end he might put them to death: so as it seemed the faith would be more advanced, than ever in this realm: but the Portugals, in stead of sending new preachers into this country, to preserve that which jesus Christ had gotten, and to make new conquests, resolved to be revenged by arms. Wherefore, they sent out of Portugal an army by Sea, with a good number of gentlemen, Portugals, led by Francis Barret. The king of Monomotapa, being full of fear at the noise of this war, which threatened him, sent to demand a peace of Barret: but this general aspiring to the gold of this realm, contemned all conditions that were offered him: The event of this enterprise, was, that this army, which was fearful to so puissant a monarch, was consumed by the intemperature of the air, which is insupportable to them of Europe. Since some few Christians remained, but the rest live at this present in darkness.      

The Realm of Congo.  

❧ A DISCOURSE OF THE REALM OF CONGO.  

The Contents.  
1THe extent and bounds of the realm of Congo, divided into six provinces, and a particular description of either of them, with their chief towns. 2. The temperature of the air of these countries, held inhabitable by the ancients: the equality of days and nights throughout the year, and continual rain during Winter, being then Summer in our Horizon. 3. Description of the chief rivers of those countries, whereof the most famous are Zaire, and Lelonde, the which engender crocodiles, and hippopotames, or seahorses. 4. A particular mention of the singularities which are found in every province: as elephants and tigers in that of Bamba, zebre, a beast like unto a mule, empalanges, wild bugles, civit cats, serpents five and twenty foot long, which the inhabitants of the country eat, rams with wings, chameleons, parrots, and pelicans. In the province of Congo, elephants, apes, and crystal. In the countri of Pemba, luco, a kind of grain, white millet, Indian figs or barnanes, and certain palm trees, from which they draw oil, wine, vinegar, fruit, and bread: mountains of jaspe & Porphire. In the Island of Loande, grey cockle shells very glistering and transparent; and that wonderful tree called Ensanda, which bears a certain kind of cloth, whereof the people make garments: black whales, and pilchards. 5. The colour, countenance, and disposition of body of the inhabitants of this country, the form of their houses and buildings: their money for traffic, and their boats of war wherein they fight: of their fishing for cockles; and of their custom and manners like to other Negroes: their manner of saluting in the morning: of their garments made of mats, or barks of trees: of their drinking, eating, and sleeping: of their curing themselves by the virtue of simples, and herbs known unto them: and of the respect they bear unto their king. 6. Their riches, consisting in the traffic of metals, elephants, civit cats, fishing of cockles, cloth of Songo, which they draw from palm trees, and Crystal. 7. The forces of this realm, their arms, and how many thousand men he may arm. 8. What order the king observes for the government of his realm, his laws, and the governors which he appoints in every province to do justice: their military discipline, and in what order their armies march, and the three instruments which a general of an army doth use, as signs to make them march or stand, and to signify his will to all the squadrons. 9 Of the idolatry of the inhabitants of the realm of Congo: in what time, and by whom the Christian faith was denounced unto them, and how it is at this day received by means of the Jesuits which are planted there.   

ALthough it be impossible to make an exact discourse of those remote countries which lie under the burning zone, having been held by the ancients to be inhabitable, and are not yet fully discovered by any of our modern writers; yet to discharge my duty, and to give the reader some satisfaction, I have thought it fit to set down as much as I could learn of this Estate of Congo, the which doubtless is very great.  
It extends from Saint Katherine's Cape, which is two degrees and a half from the Equinoctial, bending towards the South, unto the Cape of Leo. It hath for bounds upon the West, the Aethiopian sea: to the South, the mountains of the Moon, and the Cafres': towards the East, the mountain, from whence flow the rivers which run unto the springs of Nile: and upon the North, the realm of Benin: and this realm which comprehends from the moiety of the third degree towards the South, unto the thirteenth degree of altitude, contains by this means six hundred and sixty Italian miles or there abouts.  
The king of Congo doth also command in the Island of Loande, which lies betwixt a branch of the river of Dande, the which is now called by the name of Bengo, and the river of Coanze. There are moreover certain Islands which are upon the river of Zaire, whose inhabitants are feudataries to the king of Congo. This realm is divided into six famous provinces, and those are Bamba, Songo, Sunde, Pango, Batta, and Pemba.  
The province of Bamba, lies upon the sea coast, from the river of Ambrisi, unto that of Coanze, and this country contains many seigneuries. The town of greatest note in this province, is called Bamba, for the chief towns give their names to all the rest of the country. It stands betwixt the rivers of Loose and Ambrisi, and it is about one hundred Italian miles from the sea.  
The second province of the realm of Congo, is called Songo, and lies about the rivers of Zaire and Loango, extending itself unto the river of Ambrisi, towards the North, in the seventh degree and a half, and it ends near to the read rocks of the frontier of the realm of Loango. The chief town of this province is called Songo, whereof the country takes the name.  
The province of Sunde is seated about the town of Congo, to which the Portugals have given the name of S. Saviour, and from thence it extends for the space of forty Italian miles, or eight german leagues, taking five miles for every league, to the river of Zaire. The principal town is also called Sunde.  
The province of Pango was in former times a realm by itself, and was not subject to the king of Congo. It confines upon the North, with the province of Sunde; to the South, with that of bat; towards the West, with the country of Congo; and upon the East, with the mountains of the Sun. The capital town of the country is called Pango, and is situated towards the Western part of the river of Barbela, which comes from the lake whereas the river of Nile hath her spring.  
The province of bat confines upon the North, with that of Pango: and towards the East, with the river of Barbela; and extending itself to the mountains of the Sun, and to the foot of the mountains of Aphronitre: upon the South part of these mountains it joins to Barbela, as far as the burnt mountain. The chief town is Batta, which gives name unto the province like unto the rest.  
In the province of Pemba stands the town of Congo, sometimes called Banze, that is to say, Court, and now S. Saviour. It is situated upon a mountain, and it is about one hundred and fifty Italian miles from the sea. There is a mountain of a reasonable height, the which contains about two Germane leagues: it is full of boroughs, villages, and houses, the which comprehends about one hundred thousand persons.  

¶ The Quality.  
ACcording to the opinion of the Ancients, this country was inhabitable, for that they held all that was under the burning Zone (where they place this country) to be so burnt up, as there was no means to live there. But experience hath proved the contrary, as Edward Loup a Portugal doth witness, who lived long in those parts, with many other Portugals. This Author reports, That the air is so temperate, as Winter is like unto Autumn, at Rome; so as they change not their garments, neither do they seek for any fire in that season. The tops of mountains are free from any sharp cold; and generally in Winter the heat is greater than in Summer, by reason of the rain which falls continually, especially for the space of two hours before noon, and as much after: And this is the heat that is most insupportable to the men of Europe when they come there.  
The night is in a manner equal to the day, and throughout the year they observe very little difference. They have their Winter when we have the Spring: it gins the fifteenth day of March, and Summer in the midst of September. The rain continues five months, during April, May, june, julie, and August: you shall seldom see a clear day during that time; and rain pours down so abundantly, as it is in a manner admirable; all the moisture being consumed, and drunk up by the pores of the dried and parched ground. Summer, on the other side, is exceeding dry, and it seldom rains during all that season. This is the reason why that rivers are filled up with a thick and muddy water, and overflowing the land, leaves upon it that gross humour.  
In Summer, they have the winds, whic julius Caesar, and Hypocrates before him, called Etesies: the Portugals give it the name of Mestro, or General, for that they be common to that country, and we take them for the Easterly winds. This wind causeth rain by the agitation of mists upon the tops of mountains, for being encountered, they dissolve into rain, and fall to the ground: And commonly they see mists upon the tops of mountains, whenas rain approacheth. This continual rain causeth the swelling of the rivers of Nile, and Nyger, or Senega, and others of this country, which discharge themselves into the Ocean or Mediterranean Seas, and do moisten and fatten the countries which they water. Wherefore, there f●lling such abundance of rain during their Winter, which is our Summer, as well in the realm of Congo, as in the countries of Presbyter john, it is no wonder at the swelling and inundation of the rivers: yet in Egypt, and in the driest countries which are never watered with rain, except the country which is about Alexandria, they hold the swelling of Nile for admirable, which never fails at a certain time of the year to come and fatten their lands with a slime and muddy water, the which otherwise would yield no fruit, unless they are watered after this manner: by reason whereof, in former times they did sacrifice to Nile, giving it the name of good Angel, as Prolome doth witnesses; and the Christians at this day which devil in those countries, hold the inundation of Nile for a miraculous thing, without the which they should be famished. Wherefore, the West and northwest, which blows here in the Summer season, during the which they have their Winter, gathers mists and vapours together upon the tops of mountains, and calls the rain, which there doth temper the Winter, by reason of their hot vapours. It is the rain therefore that doth commonly 'cause the swelling of Nile, and of other rivers of those countries.  
But whenas those people have their Summer, their winds are contrary, being Southeast or North East, the which are cold winds, and refresh the grounds as they do in our countries: for it makes their sky clear, whereas they 'cause mists with us▪ and threatens rain, by a natural disposition of the air, ground, and climate. And without doubt if this wind did not cool and refresh the countries of Congo, and Aethiopia, the heat would be insupportable. The inhabitants of Greece, Candie, Cypress, Anatolia, Syria, and Egypt, enjoy the same wind.  
You must all observe, that no snow falls upon the mountains of Aethiopia, Congo, and the neighbour countries, but upon those which are towards the Cape of good Hope, or upon those which the Portugalls call the mountains of Snow. If the realm of Congo had snow or ice, without doubt one of these two would be more esteemed than gold, for that by this means they might refresh their drink: wherefore, we must conclude, that it is contrary to the truth to affirm, that the rivers increase when the snow melts, for that the continual rain during five months, is the cause.  
The chief river of these countries is that of Zaire, which comes from the second lake of Nile, and is very great among all them of Africa. It is eight and twenty miles broad at the mouth. She makes divers great Islands in her course, and among others receives the river of Vambe and Barbela, which come from the first lake; and also, many others which have their springs in the lake of Aquelond.  
The principal are Coanze, which bounds the realm of Congo, and Angola: and Lelonde, which engenders Crocodiles, and Sea-horses, from the which the Island of horses hath taken her name. It doth also engender a fish called Hog, which are so great and fat, as there are some of five hundred weight, or more.  
The Hippopotame, or horse of the river, is tawny, hath little hair, and leaps to land to feed, and in the day time returns to the water. The Afrikans make some of them tame, and they are exceeding swift, but they must not pass over deep rivers, for they will presently dive. There do also engender in those rivers certain water oxen, which live for some days upon the land. The abundance of water, together with the heat, by reason of the nearness of the Sun, makes the country exceeding fertile, and to abound in plants, fruit, herbs, and grain, and it would yield much more, if the industry of the inhabitants did help nature.  
But let us come to the particularities of the provinces which we have described, having discoursed in general of all these countries.  
In the province of Bamba, there is a mountain, where they found many mines of silver, and other metals. They have also in this country many Elephants, by reason of the many forests, and rivers. These Elephants are exceeding great, for that they grow unto the midst of their age, and they live commonly unto the age of one hundred and fifty years.  
Those which we have seen in Portugal, and elsewhere in Europe, were less, for that they were brought away too young. The greatness of these beasts may be conceived by their teeth, which have been gathered up, whereof some have been two hundred weight. In the language of Congo, the Elephant's tooth is called Mene Manzao. The young Elephants are called Moana Manzo. Their ears are not less than the greatest Turkish targets; the greatest are six foot long, fanshioned like an egg, and they are narrow towards the shoulder. With the motion of their ears and tail, they drive away flies, and they kill them when they rest upon them, drawing together their skin. The hair of their tail is very thick, and like to little black shining reeds, and those of the younger are the fairest and strongest, and of greater price.  
Without doubt the Ancients did not know the nature of the Elephant, whenas they said they could not bend their hams, and therefore they did lean against some tree to sleep, and by this means were easy to be taken: for the Portugals and Flemings have seen the contrary, for they get up into trees drawing up their haunches to gather leaves orboughes, or stoop easily down when they drink in any place where the water is low, the which they could not do if they had no joints.  
This province hath Tigers of the same form we see them painted in these parts. These beasts, as Edward doth witness, do never set upon white men, but they often assail the Negroes; so as at a time finding two men, the one white, and the other black, sleeping together, these beasts did furiously fall upon the black man, and never offered to hurt the white. Whenas they are priest with the sharpness of hunger, they fall upon tame cartel, whenas they found nothing in the field. The people of Congo call them Engoi. They hold that the arm holes of this beast are venomous, and that if any eats them, he dies mad.  
The same province breeds another beast called Zebre by the inhabitants, the which is like unto a mule, but it engenders. Finally, the disposition of the hair is very strange; for from the ridge of the back to the belly, there are lines or strikes of three colours, white, black, and yellow, all being ordered by a just proportion, and every strike being of the breadth of three fingers. These beasts multiply greatly, for that they have young every year. They are wild, & exceeding swift; so as the Portugals among their proverbs, have that of the swiftness of the Zebre. This beast being made tame, might serve for a horse in the war, bearing and drawing men and burdens, to the end we may see how God hath provided for things necessary.  
But for that this country wants horses, and the inhabitants have not the art to make the Zabre tame, nor know how to use oxen, notwithstanding they have many in these countries: the men do the office of beasts; for being set at the corners of streets or highways, they carry litters or chairs: so as they that are to make a journey speedily, change the men often that carry them, and by this means they soon dispatch the way they are to go.  
They do also found other beasts, whereof some are as big as an ox, others are less, which they call Empalanges: then they have wild bugles or oxen, wolves which smell very far off, and which do exceedingly love a certain oil which they draw out of palm trees. Moreover, they have foxes, stags, goats, coneys, and hares, in great abundance, for that they pursue them not to death when they hunt, as they do in Europe. They have great numbers of civit Cats, the which they take and make tame, to the end they may get the good scent which comes from this beast, the which is wonderful pleasing unto them.  
There are divers sorts of serpents and vipers, whereof some are five and twenty foot long. and five broad, having the belly very large, and the throat so wide, as they will devour a stag, or any other beast of the like bigness. They live as well upon the land as in the water. When they are full they sleep willingly, and then the inhabitants kill them, and feed upon their flesh, which they hold to be better than that of any foul. Finally, there are vipers whose poison is so strong, as when they have bitten any one, he dies within five and twenty hours. There are also to be seen certain beasts as big as a ram, having wings like a dragon, they have a tail, a long beak, and many ranks of teeth. they live of raw flesh, and have but two legs: their skin is read mixed with green and blue.  
The same province hath also chameleons, with great store of hens, turkeys, peacocks, geese, ducks, tame & wild partridges, pheasants, pigeons, turtles, eagles, falcons, sparrowhaukes, and pelicans: and this country abounds in parrots both green and grey; and there are great numbers of read birds, which are exceeding fair, with many other kinds of small birds, which sing like unto them of the Canaries.  
The province of Congo breeds many elephants, and there are divers sorts of apes, the which will play a thousand tricks, seeking to imitat men. There are many kine and divers of those other beasts whereof we have made mention. Besides all these things, there grows great store of crystal, and other metals, among the which, the inhabitants prefer iron.  
In the country of Pemba, they found iron in that great mountain whereof we have made mention in the description of provinces. The soil of this mountain is very fruitful, by reason of the bounty of the air. It hath excellent good water, which never hurts any man that drinks it. There is store of grass, and abundance of cattle, and fruit trees, which are continually green. This soil yields all kind of grain that is ordinary in those countries, especially, that which they call Luco, the which they esteem as much as we do our best wheat: it is like unto mustard seed, but that it is somewhat bigger. They grinned it in a hand mill, and it makes good meal, of a good taste, and very pleasing. The bread which is made thereof, yields nothing in bounty to ours. There is great abundance of this grain in Congo, whether it hath been brought of late years from the country whereas Nile hath her spring, especially from that, whereas Nile fills the second lake.  
This province doth also bear abundance of white millet, which they call mazze, that is to say, grain of Congo. It doth also yield meaz or Turkey wheat, which they esteem but little, and the inhabitants call it Mazza Mamprito, that is to say, corn of Portugal. There is store of rice, but they esteem it not. The same province hath divers fruit trees, whereof the poor people live, as cytron and lemon trees, which bear fruit of a wonderful pleasing taste. There grow bananes, which some hold to be the same that the Egyptians and Syrians call muse, and some others Indian figs: there taste is very good and pleasing, having a sweetness mixed with sharpness, and it is a good food, and hath nothing hurtful.  
The fields are full of divers sorts of palm trees, whereof the one bears dates, and the other nuts. There is also another kind of palm tree, unlike unto the other two, from the which, they draw oil, wine, vinegar, fruit, and bread. They dray oil from the fruit, as from olives, and this oil hath the colour and substance of our butter: yet it is somewhat green tending to yellow. They use it in steed of oil and butter, putting it in their lamps, and rubbing their bodies, that they may run more nimbly. To conclude, it is of great use in time of necessity, for that they of these countries which have traveled thither, had died for hunger without this oil. They draw wine from the tops of the trees which they pierce, and then there runs out liquor which is white, clear, and fresh. First of all it is sweet, and then it grows sour; so as they may put it upon their salads in s●eed of vinegar. This liquor being taken fresh provokes urine; so as there are few in these countries that are troubled with gravel or the stone. Moreover, when they drink much, it makes them drunk, and doth nourish exceedingly. They make bread of the stones or shells of this fruit, and these stones are fashioned like an almond, but harder. The meat that is within is of a very good taste, and this fruit is green both within and without, and it is good raw or roasted. There are other trees which bear a fruit called Cola, as big as a pineapple, and somewhat like unto chestnuts, in the which there be four stones, the which are read, or incarnate, the which they break with their teeth, and roll them in their mouths to disalter them. These first-fruits being cast into the water, make it sharp and pleasing to the taste, they fortify the stomach, and correct the corruption of the liver. There are other kinds of wild palm trees, which bear great store of fruit good to eat, and whose leaves serve to cover their cottages, and to make baskets, and other thing necessary for the household. There are yet other trees called ogegues, which carry fruit like to yellow plums, whose taste and smell is very pleasant. Besides these first-fruits, they have others which may serve for physic, and are also of a good taste, as the Tamarindes, which are sweet and sharp, and are good against burning fevers. The Moors and Turks which travel by land, take the pap of the Tamerinde, and mingle it with water, the which they drink to cool the liver, the reins, and the inward parts, as also to keep the body soluble, using Cassia for the same effect. This province hath Melons, coucumbers, and such like, in great abundance.  
There is moreover great store of stone, and mountains of as goodly marble as can be seen, which were sufficient to build a whole Temple: and besides there are mountains of jaspis and Porphyry, as also of white marble, and of many other colours, and it is this marble which at Rome they call of Numidia, and of Africa. And in some there grow jacinth stones, which may easily be separated from the rest. They may make whole pillars, obelisks, and other works, which would be very fair, yea admirable, by reason of the jacinths which are mixed among the stone. There are other rocks, in which they found metals, as brass which is green and yellow, whereof they may make goodly statues, and other things.  
But I am resolved in the conclusion hereof to speak something of the river of Zaire, which is the greatest river of the realm of Congo, and comes partly from the same lake, from whence Nile hath her spring. This river hath such abundance of water, as it is almost incredible, being five miles and a half broad, before it comes unto the sea, and when it enters, her water runs among the salt, and looseth not her freshness for the space of eight, ten, yea sixteen leagues: whereby Sea men do easily know where they are. They may go with their boats five leagues up the river very safely, but afterwards they found the water very violent and forcible, for that the rivers falls in that place from a praecipe with a great noise, like unto Nile, and Danowe in some places.  
As for the river of Lelonde, which runs at the foot of the mountain, where the royal town of Congo is built, whenas the rain ceaseth, it dries up, and one may easily wade over it.  
They found upon the shore of the Island of Loande, certain cockles, which be grey, and very glistering; and although there be some upon the other shores of the realms of Congo, yet those of Loande are most esteemed. There grows also a strange tree called Ensanda, the which is always green, and hath many virtues. The branches grow very high, and there hung down certain small threads, which coming to the ground, take root; so as these trees multiply strangely. Upon the first bark of this tree, there grows a kind of linen cloth, which being made clean, serves to make garments for the common people.  
In that part which is nearest to the firm land, there grows certain trees, at the foot whereof salt water springs up. There they found oysters as big as a man's hand, of a very good taste, the which are well known to the inhabitants, who call them Ambizimitare, as a man would say, fish of a stone. Near unto this Island, about the exterior part, there are many black Whales seen, which commonly make war together; so as many die, which the inhabitants fish for, and having caught them, they take their fat, with the which, being mingled with pitch, they calke their ships. Here they also found many Pilchards, and very great store of Soles, Sturgeons, Mulets, and Crafish, which are of good substance.   

¶ The Manners.  
THe inhabitants of these countries are black, yet some women incline to yellow. These for the most part have their hair black or reddish. The men are of a mean stature, and in a manner therein like unto the Portugals. They have all the apple of the eye of divers colours, black, and of the colour of salt water. Their lips are thick, but not so great as the inhabitants of Nubia, and other Negroes. Their faces are also very different, for some are lean, others are fat, and some are betwixt both, like unto the Portugals, and they differ something from other Negroes, which are foul, and ill favoured.  
They of the province of Bamba, are so strong, as they will cut a slave a sunder in the midst, and they will strike off the head of an ox at one blow. They of the province of Songo are continually in war with the Anzicains their neighbours: And as for the inhabitants of the province of Sunde, they esteem iron more than all other metals in the world, as we have formerly made mention, whereof they make swords, knives, and other things, which are very profitable, whereas other metals serve not for so necessary uses.  
In the province of Pemba, in which the town of Congo stands, the inhabitants cut the branches of certain trees called Ogegues, and make hedges, alleys, and arbours, to keep them from the Sun. They carry Tamarinde in their mouths, to prevent thirst. The houses of the inhabitants of Congo, are low, and very narrow; not for want of materials, (as we have showed discoursing of their quarries of stone and marble, besides the which, there is store of lime and timber;) but by reason of the little industry of the inhabitants, who know not how to build, nor have any carpenters, nor masons, for the erecting of houses. They of Congo use cockles instead of gold and coin, and make their traffic therewith.  
The Islanders of the river of Zaire have in former times had great wars against them, and they did fight in boats which they made of the bodies of trees made hollow. This tree is called Liconde, and it is sometimes of that bigness, as two or three men, yea more, cannot sadome it; so as many times a boat made of one of the biggest trees, will be able to contain two hundred men. They make these boats to go very swiftly, every man holds his oar, and a bow, and when they are to fight, they let slip their oars, and use their bows against their enemies.  
As for them of the Island of Loande, they fish for their cockles after this manner. The women go a little into the sea, and bring forth baskets full of sand, the which they lay upon the shore, and then they take the sand from the cockles, which are very small, and of divers forms: for there be some males, and some females, and these have the best colour, and are most pleasing to the sight. All things are bought with these cockles, yea gold, silver, and victuals. To conclude, they not only take away the use of gold coined, or of any other metal, in all the country's subject to the king of Congo, but also in other parts of Africa, and in the realm of China, and some places at the Indies: for in Aethiopia they give pepper instead of gold or silver coined, and in the realm of Tombut, near to the river of Senega, they give cockles. These Islanders have boats made of Palm trees, or Indian nut trees, which go with sails and oars. They are such expert and cunning swimmers, as many times they swim over the straight, to go to the firm land.  
But to speak in general of the manners of all the inhabitants of Congo, they participate much with the other Negroes, at the lest with them that are their neighbours. They always pour something out of the pot before they take any drink. They do never drink whilst they dine: but after their meat, they quench their thirst with store of water, or with the wine of Palm trees, or else with water mixed with honey. Whenas they meet in a morning, or in the day time, they salute one another: And whenas they will honour any one, they kneel down, and clap their hands, remaining in that sort until the other hath rendered the salutation, with these words, Fuio, Fuio, Fuio, with the which they wish them good luck.  
They steal willingly from strangers, but they use no theft among themselves. The women are all given to make love, especially with strangers, not caring for their reputations, so as they may satisfy their lustful desires. The women and men go equally bore headed, having their hair artificially bound up, and yet it is but short. Some wear hats of the bark of a tree, or else made of Indian nuts. Some have great bunches of feathers tied to their hair with wire. There are many, both men and women, which wear very heavy pendants at their ears. Their garments are in a manner all of mats made of the bark of trees, and read: They wear upon these mats, Ape skins, and of other beasts. Many wear girdles of Bugle skins, and some of them are above two or three foot broad. Many of the women wear hoops of iron, copper, or tin, about their thighs, and the ends are so artificially joined, as they can hardly be discerned: And there are some men which delight to go after that manner. They lie on the ground upon mats, and eat divers first-fruits, fish, and flesh, all which they put together in a dish. The chief among them do most commonly eat alone upon mats. They never do their business upon the ground, holding it a sin; but they make great broad holes. They use drums, which are narrow beneath, and wide above, and flutes made of Aelephants teeth. This is practised most commonly by them that live in the country, for in towns they live more daintily, and with more civility.  
The inhabitants of Congo do honour unto their kings, sweeping all the way very carefully where he is to pass. I have said that the men went clothed with mats: but now they imitat the Portugals much. And as for the women, they have three jupes one upon another, wherewith they cover the lower part of their bodies. Every jupe hath a girdle, and the lowest goes down to their heels, the second unto their knees, and the third unto their thighs; and in stead of welts, they have tassels of divers colours. Before they cover themselves with a veil, and behind with a little cloak, and all is made of the leaves of Palm trees. They cover their heads with a kind of bonnet, like unto men, and have their faces bore. It is true that women of base condition and slaves have nothing covered but the lower part. But now women of quality seek to attire themselves after the Portugal manner, wearing upon their heads velvet caps, with precious stones, and chains of gold; yet the meaner sort follow the ancient custom.  
The king eats after the Portugal manner, and doth justice publicly without any great formality; for that all things are debated before him in few words. The courtiers use flutes, by the sound whereof they dance a la moresco, keeping time with great gravity, and an active disposition that is very pleasing. They all know the virtues of many herbs, so as every one is his own physician and Chirurgeon. They cure the fever with the wood of sandal in powder, and the pain in the head by opening a vein. They purge themselves with a certain powder made of the bark of trees.   

¶ The Riches.  
WE may easily conjecture of the wealth of the inhabitants of the realm of Congo, seeing they have such abundance of metals, as they may impart to their neighbours, retaining a great quantity to themselves. And if we shall consider their elephants, we may easily imagine, that they receive in exchange for their teeth, whereof they have great numbers, matters of no small price. If in like manner we shall cast our eyes upon the civit cats, wherewith they abound, we shall soon see how much they are sought unto by foreign merchants which traffic into these countries. If passing on, we shall look unto their king, there is no man would doubt, but that he which hath all these countries under his obedience is exceeding rich. It is impossible to say what he draws from his Estates, for that he hath not his revenue in coin, like unto our princes; but we may confidently affirm that this king receives great riches from all parts; for if his subjects be very rich by reason of their great traffic, their king must needs be held very rich, powerful, and as well furnished with all things, as any monarch in Africa.  
The fishing of sea cockles in the Island of Loande, is very beneficial to this prince: and he doth commonly entertain a governor in this Island, who hath a care of this fishing. He draws much from the province of Pemba, which is held to be very rich, by reason of her mines of silver, and other metals, as also for their sea cockles which they found along the shore, which serve in those countries in steed of coin. They have also great traffic of slaves, whereof the Portugalls buy a great number, sending them to cell in other provinces. After this, the linen cloth of the province of Songo (which is made of Indian palm trees) is much sought after, as also in the province of Sunde, and the Portugals do willingly buy it. The Crystal which they found in this province is of no little esteem, and yields the inhabitants some commodity; but yet not so great as the rest abouementioned. This king doth also receive great presents from the king of Angola, the which is a kind of tribute.   

¶ The Forces.  
THis monarch hath so many men in his dominions, and so apt to arms, as he will trouble him very much that shall attempt any thing against his Estate: yet he wants towns and places of strength, and hath nothing upon the frontier that is defensible. His people are not well armed; so as they of Europe should annoyed them very much, if they should enter into this country with any good numbers. But as for their neighbours, they are able to prescribe them a law, and to keep them under, or to subdue them, if they once assail them.  
But to speak something in particular, Pamba is the bulwark of all the realm of Congo. From thence they draw their soldiers which make war against the rebels, for that the inhabitants of this country are very valiant, and accustomed to war; so as upon any urgent necessity, the king may easily raise four hundred thousand men armed after the country manner.  
These men (who are exceeding strong, as hath been said) wear swords 〈◊〉 and broad, like unto the Swisses, and these the Portugals do bring them. Besides these swords, they are good archers, and handle their targets well, the which are made of the barks of trees.  
The governor of Batta hath hargue busiers, for that near unto the mountains of the S●nne and Aphronitre, towards the East and West countries of Nile, there are certain men called Giaquas, among them of Congo, and in their own language, they are called Agag, who are furious and watchful to get some spoil; so as they make daily incursions into the neighbour provinces, especially, into that of Batta, by reason whereof the inhabitants are always watchful, and ready to arm upon the lest bruit of their coming. This province may sand to the wars seventy or eighty thousand good soldiers well armed, and fit for any good exploit. You may easily judge of the rest, by these two provinces whereof we have made mention.   

¶ The Government.  
THe king hath a governor in every province, who makes his abode in the chief town of his government. He hath many noblemen in his dominions, but they all acknowledge the king for absolute lord of what they hold These lords are called Mani, as Mani Loanda, Mani Coanza, etc. Lord of Loanda, Lord of Coanza. The king is wonderfully honoured by his subjects: & there is a good policy observed throughout all his realm by the means of his governors. They have no written laws and ordinances, but they judge according to their ancient customs, and the equity of every man's cause. Among the rest, there is one law, that no man may cell Zebres skins▪ unless with all he cell that which is under the arm holes (the which is venomous) to take away all means and subject to do ill. And as for the sea hog, the fishermen are bound to bring it presently unto the king upon pain of death.  
The inhabitants of Cong observe these orders in time of war: they are all footmen, and they stretch themselves out, or march close together, according to the commodity of the place, or they divide themselves into divers squadron●. The army doth march, and is governed by the signals and cries which come from the general being in the midst: for be it to begin the battle, or that he will have the army turn to the right hand, or to the left, advance, or retire, or do any other thing, he hath particular signs, and certain cries which declare his will, and what they must do. He hath three chief instruments which he useth to give any sign: for, first they use instruments of wood, which make a horrible noise whenas they sound them, or else drums, putting a skin on the bark of some hollow tree, and they beaten them with sticks of ivory. They have also a triangular instrument like unto a pyramed turned upward, which being made of plates of iron closely joined together, is beaten with sticks of wood. Lastly they use elephants teeth, the which are made hollow, and pierced on the side like unto phyphes; these make a warlike sound, the which puts courage into the soldiers, and makes them contemn dangers.  
The general of the army is forced to carry a great number of these kinds of instruments, both great and small: for whenas he gives a sign to the whole army, he must use the great instrument: if to a part, than he useth a less; so as every troop hath a particular sign, the which they understand. The soldiers have also signals amongst themselves; for the foremost are for the most part men exceeding active, who in the midst of the fight, give courage to the rest with little bells, and instruct them how to avoid dangers.  
Whenas they begin to fight, they open their ranks, that they may the more eas●y cast their darts, and avoid their enemy's blows by their disposition: whenas the foremost seem to be weary, they presently sound a retreat, and then they that fight retire by little and little, to give place to them that are fresh; and this they do sometimes until that both armies join.  
There is not any one in the realm of Congo that hath any thing proper to himself, or that can dispose of any thing to his heirs, for that all belongs unto the king, who gives and takes away at his pleasure. The king's children are subject to this law, so as if they pay not that yearly, which they own unto the king, they are deprived of that which they hold.  
The Governor of the province of Batta, who is of the blood royal, sits always nearest unto the king, and hath such authority in consultations, as no man dares contradict him. He eats sometime at the king's table, but standing, and no man receives this honour, not not the kings own children. He carries with him flute players, and other musicians like unto the king, and he hath this privilege, to have Harquebuziers of his own government, the which is not granted unto the king's children, to whom, if need require, they give Harquebuziers that be strangers.  
They seldom put any criminal offendor to death, and if any one of Congo hath a suit against one of Portugal, it is decided according to the laws of Portugal.   

¶ The Religion.  
ALthough that the faith and Christian religion be crept into this realm, yet it is full of Idolaters, whereof some worship the Sun as husband to the Moon, and hold it for their sovereign god: and they do also honour the Moon, as his wife, giving it the second rank. Some others worship those beasts which are like unto dragons, whereof we have made mention, treating of the quality of the country. And some worship the Earth, as the nurse and mother of all things. To conclude, they are so full of foolish errors, as we may justly say, that in all their belief, they know not what they believe. But it shall be fit to let the Reader see by what means the name of Christ hath been planted in these countries, and in what esteem and honour it is at this day.  
The realm of Congo was converted unto the Christian faith by the means of D. john the second, king of Portugal, after this manner: james Canon, a Captain to this king, coasting Africa by his commandment, after a long voyage came unto the great river of Zaire, and continuing his navigation, he discovered many lands, whereas he found the inhabitants much more tractable than those which had been formerly discovered. And to give a more particular account unto his king, he resolved to go to the Court of this realm, where being arrived, and courteously entertained, he began to show the vanity of idolatry, and the greatness of the Christian faith, and he found this prince so well disposed, as returning into Portugal, he not only carried an Ambassador back with him, but also some noblemen's children, to the end they might learn the Christian faith, and be well instructed, then having received baptism, be sent back unto their houses, with certain Portugal Priests fit to preach the Gospel, and to plant the faith in this realm.  
These children continued two years in Portugal, and were well entertained, carefully instructed in the Christian faith, and baptized with great solemnity. Being confirmed in the faith, King john sent them into their countries, with an honourable embassage, and withal, three Friars of the order of S. Dominicke, men of integrity, and of great learning, to instruct that nation. Being arrived at Congo, they first converted the king's uncle together with a son of his. The King and Queen were afterwards baptized, and this prince in short time caused a goodly Church to be built under the name of the Holy Crosse.  
The king was christened by the name of john, his queen by that of Elinor, and their eldest son was called Alphonso. This prince was excellent in bounty and liberality, who not content with his own conversion, employed himself with great love an zeal to convert the subjects: but we must not think, that the word of God, or his Cross, can be planted without much pain. These fathers of S. Dominicke, besides the malignity of the air, and insupportable heat which consumed and wasted them, were also ill entreated by them of Congo: for although that when they spoke of the holy ceremonies and divine mysteries, they seemed tractable, for that they thought that those things which were above the capacity of man, were more fit for the majesty of God; yet whenas they begun to speak of temperance, continency, restitution of another man's goods, pardon of offences received, with articles of Christian profession, they not only discovered a difficulty, but also a contrariety, and opposition. The king himself, who in the beginning had showed so great zeal, grew cold, and being loathe to leave their southsaying and sorceries, but especially the multitude of wives (which is a general difficulty among the Barbarians) he gave no ear unto those preachers, and the women not able to endure to be chased away, or confined into any place by their husbands, or to have one preferred before another, troubled the whole Court, and the city where the king made his abode. They were the more incited to this disorder by Panse Aquitime, the kings second son, who would not be baptized; by reason whereof, there grew great hatred betwixt him and his elder brother, who was wonderfully affected to the Christian religion, and maintained Christ's cause as much as might be.  
Upon these contrarieties the king died, and the brethren fell to arms. The event was, that Alphonso, with six and thirty soldiers, calling upon the name of jesus Christ, and that of S. jaques, after the Portugal manner, defeated his enemy, who was taken, and died in his detestable opinion. Doubtless God favoured Alphonso in this war●e with apparent miracles; for they say, that being ready to give battle, there was so great a light, as his eyes, and his companions, were dazzled for a time, wherewith they conceived a great hope to obtain the victory. But afterwards, lifting up their eyes to heaven, they saw five shining swords, which the king took at that time for his arms, and his successors have continued unto this day. His enemies confessed that they had not been vanquished by the king, or his soldiers, but by a woman which was wonderful white, who dazzled their eyes with an insupportable light, and by a knight, who mounted upon a bay horse having a purple cross upon his breast, struck them, and bore them to the ground.  
After the victory, he drew all the noblemen of his kingdom together, commanding them to 'cause all their Idols to be brought into one place, the which he burned upon the topof a high mountain. He reigned fifty years in peace, during the which, he advanced the Christian faith wonderfully, by his authority, example, yea and by his preaching. King D. Emanuel did not abandon the enterprise, for he sent out of Portugal into Congo, twelve Friars, of those which the Portugals call Blue, of the which father john Marien was the chief, with Architects, Carpenters, and Masons to build Churches, and with a rich furniture for divine service: And king Alphonso sent his son Henry, with many princes of his realm, to Rome, where they were received with very much honour. King Alphonso had his son Peter for successor, in whose time they sent an Eunuch into the Island of S. Thomas, who had the care of Congo, where they erected a College in the town of S. Saviour, of eight and twenty Channoins, in the Church of the holy Crosse. The second bishop was of the royal house of Congo, who went to Rome, and died in his return. Peter had Francis for his successor in the realm, who reigned little, and being dead, Diego his kinsman succeeded him. In his time, john the third, king of Portugal, hearing that the king cared not much for religion, and that the Merchants and Priests of Europe did not much advance it, but did scandalise the new Christians by their bad lives, sent four jesuits thither to repair all disorders. These religious men coming first to S. Thomas, and then to Congo, were received courteously by the king, and employing themselves presently in the work for the which they were sent, one of them began to instruct six hundred children in learning, and in the Christian doctrine, and the rest went into the country, preaching with admirable fruit, for in five months they converted above five thousand persons, and built three Churches. But falling afterwards one after another into troublesome and languishing diseases, they were forced to return into Europe. At that time, they made a third Bishop, who was a Portugois by nation, who found great difficulty by reason of the contumacy of the Channoins, and the Clergy.  
In the mean time, king Diego died, and after his decease, there grew great contention for the succession of the realm, during which in a manner all the Portugois which were at S. Saviour were slain, except the priests. In the end Henry brother to Diego obtained the crown, and after him (who died soon after in barraile against the Anziques) Alvaro his son reigned. He to reconcile himself unto the Portugois, assembled them altogether that lived dispersedly throughout the realm, as well religious, as lay men, & he wrat for his discharge unto the king and the bishops of S. Thomas. The bishop having seen the letters, passed into the realm of Congo, where having set some order for the discipline of the clergy, he returned to S. Thomas, where he ended his days.  
It happened partly through the absence, and partly for the want of bishops, that the advancement of religion was much hindered, and likely to decline in all those countries, for that one called Francis, a man of great authority, both in regard of his house, as of his wealth, began to say openly that it was a vain thing to have but one wife, and in the end he abandoned the Christian faith, and was the cause that the king lost much of his former zeal,  
They say, that this Francis being dead and buried in the Church of the holy Cross, the devils uncovered a part of the Church, and with a fearful noise drew him out of his grave, and carried him away, the which did much trouble the king: but he was moved more by an accident which happened afterwards: for the Giaguas leaving their country entered by great numbers into the realm of Congo, and coming to fight with this king, they put him to flight, and did so terrify him, as not holding himself safe in his chief city, he abandoned the realm, and retired himself into an Island of Zaire called the Horse Island, with the Portugal priests, and the princes of his realm. Seeing himself reduced to this extremity, for that besides the loss of his country, his people died of hunger, and they sold themselves one to another for a vild price to have meat; he had recourse to Don S●bastian king of Portugal, from whom he obtained six hundred soldiers, by whose valour he chased his enemies out of the realm, and was restored to his former estate within one year and a half. In his time the Bishopric of S. Thomas was given to Anthony of Gliove a castilian, who after many difficulties propounded by the governor of that Island, was in the end conducted to Congo, with two religious men, and four priest, where for a time he maintained things in good estate. In the mean time, king Alvaro died, and had for successor his son bearing the same name, who failed not to solicit D. Sebastian, and D. Henry kings of Portugal, and after them the Catholic king, to sand him preachers, and other church men to maintain and augment the faith in his realm. And amidst these goodly designs he died, leaving for successor his son bearing the name of Alvaro.  
In the midst of these troubles, certain jesuits passed into Congo, and began to preach unto the people. These religious men have built a house in the Island of Loande, where there remains six or seven priests, who go up and down where necessity calls them. For the number of the baptised being very great, there are so few men to entertain them in devotion, as the bad grain exceeds the good. In the year 1587., king Alvaro, who for that he was not borne of lawful marriage was little esteemed of the most part of his subjects, would have near unto his person one of these fathers, by whose means and authority he purchased himself reputation, and came to be honoured. And God favoured his intention, for that having against him a sister of his by the father's side, with a brother of hers, he gave them battle with a great army, and carried himself so valiantly in the fight, as he not only defeated the army, but also slew the general. After which, he ordained that in the place where he was slain, they should build a church in honour of our lady: and to encourage others by his example, he first of all laid hand to work, and by very favourable edicts advanced the preaching of the Gospel, and the enterprise of these religious men.      

The Estate of the Emperor of Morocco.  

OF THE ESTATE OF THE EMPEROR OF MOROCCO.  

The Contents.  
1. THe discourse of an Estate which comprehends two famous kingdoms here follows: and first of all is represented the situation of the realm of Morocco, the which is divided into seven provinces, whereof there is made a particular description. And first of all of the province of He, the extent, bounds, and chief towns. 2. A description of the province of Sus, the situation, limits, and towns. 3. Of Morocco. 4. Of Guzale. 5. Ducale. 6. H●scora. 7. Tedle. 8. The realm of Fezdivided into seven provinces, the bounds, and extent in general. 9 Of Tenesme, the first province of the realm of Fez, and the chief towns. 10. Of the province of Fez, her length, and breadth, and her towns, with an ample relation of the great and stately city of Fez, the Mosques and stately Temples to the number of seven hundred Hosptitalls, Stoves, Colleges, Inns built like palaces, with divers other sumptuous buildings. 11. Of the province of Asgar, the bounds, towns, and strong places. 12. Of Elhabet, or Ellabat, and her towns. 13. Of Errif. 14. Garet. 15. Chauz. 16. Of the quality of the air of these provinces, and of their soil abounding in oils, honey, wax, sugar, cotton, goat's hair whereof they make chamlets, goats skins, with the which they make Spanish leather, and mines of gold: and what diseases reign in these countries. 17. divers opinions of the beginning and descent of these Barbarians, always commended for their subtle wits, and great learning, and knowledge in physic, excellent in the art of riding a la Genette, and at joco de Canna, living in old time of the flesh of apes, and clothing themselves in goat's skins; worshipping the Sun and Moon as Deities: and their abominable sacrificing in the night, where the lights being put out, they committed adultery with the first woman that came. 18. The disposition of the inhabitants of Fez and Morocco, who are ambitious, treacherous, choleric, bragger's, suspicious, and active, but not given much to labour. 19 Of the abode of the Arabians in the deserts of these countries, living under tents an pavilions, given to labour, runting, and poesy. Of the apparel of the women, and painting of their faces. 20. The manner and kind of life of the provinces of the realm of Morocco, and first of all what meat they of He use, their apparel, and kind of bedding etc. 21. The manners and life of the inhabitants of the realm of Fez, and especially of the civility of them of Fez, their goodly stoves, inns, traffic of mills, distinct dwellings for mechanic arts, & places, whereas they make their traffic of all kinds of merchandise. Their ceremonies, and feasts at marriages, the fashion of their apparel, and of their eating and drinking, their dances, and solemn feasts, & the manner of their mourning at the death of their parents. Their sports and ordinary exercises. The discipline & breeding up of their youth. 22. Of three sorts of divines, Philosophers, Alchemists, Charmers & Sorcerers of this realm. 23. The riches of the country, abounding in corn and fruit, citrons, oranges, sugar, olives, chamlets, spanish leather, and cotton cloth: and of the great revenues of their prince, which consists in the first first-fruits and tenths of cattles, and other things: In taxes which he exacts upon every ●●●e of ground, and of persons which are come to the age of marriage, be they males or females: In the customs and imposts of Fez, and other towns: In the succession of goods left by the Governors of his provinces, the which he takes after their death. 24. His forces consisting in foot and horse, and his men at arms of many sorts, composed of divers parts, by the consideration whereof, we may easily consider what number of men this monarch may draw to field. 25. Of what family he is that commands at this day in the realm of Morocco, and Fez; and by what means it came unto this empire. 26. The king's Council, and the Chamber of justice erected in Morocco. 27. Of the creation and Court of the kings of Fez, his officers, captains of horsemen, governors in every town, Commissaries appointed for matters of justice, Barons, Gardiens, Purveyor, master of the Stable, Trumpeters, master of the ceremonies, etc. and what order they hold whenas the king marcheth in field. 28. Of the Governor, judges, Customers, Apothecaries, and policy of the city of Fez. 29. Of Mahometism divided into divers sects: and who it was that brought the law of Mahomet into Barbary. 30. Of the bringing in, and settling of the jews in the realm of Morocco: and of the miserable estate of Christian slaves in these countries.   

I Come now to discourse of an Estate which cannot remain in one estate and being, and which hath of late years endured so many changes and alterations, as it would seem incredible unto him that were not assured by an infinite number of good testimonies. They are no strangers that run daily to the ruin thereof, but the prince of one house and family, which have come to the command thereof, by a thousand wicked and unworthy acts, fight one against another, and expelling one another in their ●urness: for Muley Cydan, who is at this day emperor of Morocco, was some few years passed driven away, and now Muley Cheq, who had seized thereon, is a fugitive in Algarbe in Portugal, with a certain number of Moors, and his son Abd●lla is now in the mountains to draw the Arabians together, to come in arms against Muley Cydan, and to serve him, as he had done them. But for that the matter is too well known, and that they are like to have new stirs and combustions in those countries, whereas things will be always doubtful whilst that Muley Cydan, Muley Abdalla, and Muley Bousers live, I will forbear this discourse to come unto the description of the Estates which are held by this prince. The Xerifes estate, which comprehends all that part of Mauritania, which the Romans called Tingetana, extends from Cape Bajador unto Tanger, and from the Atlantic sea unto the river of Muluia, and beyond it; and in this tract of country, are the two famous kingdoms of Fez and Morocco.  
To come to the description of the realm of Morocco, it lies betwixt Mount Atlas, and the Atlantic sea, and takes his name of the chief town which is so called. This realm is divided into seven great provinces, which are, He, Suz, Guzale, Morocco, Ducale, Hascore, and Tedle.  
The province of He hath for bounds upon the West and North, the Ocean; to the South, Mount Atlas; and upon the East, the river of Esfivale. One of the towns of He, and the most ancient, is that which is called Tednest, which stands in a goodly plain, upon the river of Tensist, and was sometimes called Tamusis. It is not well inhabited, or rather wholly abandoned, for that the inhabitants being advertised that the Arabians had a practice to cell the town unto the Portugals, meant to fly away; but they could not escape, for many of them were put to the sword, about the year 1514, and Teculet was used in like manner, being a fair and rich town, with a good port, and of better traffic than Tednest. Hadecehis is in a manner ruined. The fort of Il●usugaguen escaped this storm, but that of Tenent fell into the Portugals hands.  
Besides these places, you may see Te●elgdet, Tagtesse, Denet, and Culeihat Elmuridin, which signifies the fort of Disciples, the reason was, for that a certain Heretic of Mahomet's law, kept there with his Disciples, preached his doctrine, and defended it against the king of Morocco.  
There is also in the province of He, the town of Iguilinguiguil, seated upon the top, of a hill, whereas the natural inhabitants of Africa fortify themselves against the Arabians, with whom they are continually in war. In the same province stands the town of Tefethne, the which hath a good port, but not capable of any great shipping.  
The principality of Suz is now erected to a kingdom, being but a private S●igneurie, before that the Xerif made himself king of Morocco. It lies betwixt Mount Atlas, towards the Negro's country, that is to say, upon the extremity of that which is properly called Africa. It gins at the Ocean Sea towards the West, and hath the deserts of Lybia upon the South; to the East, the great river of Suz; and Mount Atlas lies upon the North, towards He.  
The chief of her towns is Messa or Massa, situated upon a Cape, which the Moderns call the Cape of Gilon, and it is a heap of three towns seated upon the point of this Cape, betwixt the which passeth the river of Suz. This town is of no worth, by reason of the bad soil where it stands. Besides Messa, there is the town of Teijeut, in a goodly large plain, and divided into three parts, as it were a triangle, these parties being separated one from another. Tarudant is also one of the towns of Suz, whereas the king of Fez his Lieutenant did usually remain, whenas they of Fez commanded in Mauritania. The town of Tedse stands in the realm of Suz, betwixt the Ocean Sea, and Mount Atlas; and the last place of this realm is Tagavost, which is the greatest of the towns of Suz, seated in a plain, whose inhabitants are very rich.  
The province of Morocco hath for bounds upon the West, the mountain of Nefise, which extends towards the East to Mount Hadimei, and declines towards the North unto the river of Tensifit, until it joins unto that of Asifinuad, which doth separate it from the country of He, and is made of a triangular form. Besides Morocco, it contains the town of Tenezze, and of Delgumuba, which is a strong place built upon a very high mountain, and environed with many other hills, and at the foot of it, is the spring of the river of Asifinuad. Moreover, there is the town of Imizmisi, standing upon a rock of Mount Atlas. It is somewhat spacious, and hath near unto it a narrow passage of Mount Atlas, called Burris, by the which he that will go into Guzule, must of necessity pass: but this town decays daily, and is not so flourishing as it hath been. In the plain near unto the town, stand three castles, called Tumeglast. There is also the town of Tesrast, seven small leagues from Morocco. As for the town of Morocco, it is not so beautiful as it hath been, and that which is yet to be seen of any note, is the castle and royal palace which Mansor, or Almansor, the powerful king of all Barbary, caused to be built as big as a good town. Near unto Morocco, stands Agmet, built upon the side of Mount Atlas, and it is near unto the river of Tensect. It is all ruined except the fort, where there remain but few persons.  
Guzule confines with the province of Suz, and hath for bounds upon the West, the mountain of Ilde; to the North, Mount Atlas; to the East, the province of He; and upon the South, Lybia, and in all this country, there is neither town, city, nor castle, but only some villages and hamlets.  
As for Ducalia, it is a province near to the Ocean upon the West, and to the Cape called Vsagium by the Ancients, and by some others, the mountain of the Sun; but the Moderns of Europe call it the Cape of Cantin, and the Moors, Gebelelhudic. It hath upon the South, the river of Habid; to the East, the country of Tedle; and upon the North, that of Temesne. There are few walled towns, and they are in a manner all held by the Portugois, who in our time took the town of Aza●i, under pr●text to make a Storehouse for their merchandise. There is also Tic, which yielded in a manner at the same time to the Portugois. Elmedina was abandoned by the inhabitants, for fear they had of the Christians, as also the towns of Centpuis, Subeit, Temeracost, Terga, and Bulahuan, all which were sacked and ruined whenas the Portugois took the town of Azamor, standing at the mouth of the river of Ommirabili, the which happened in the year of Christ 1513, in the month of September, under the reign of D. Emanuel of Portugal.  
The province of Hascora gins at the mountains of Ducale towards the North, it confines with the Ocean upon the West, with Tedle upon the East, and with Morocco towards the South. The towns of this country are Alemdin, Tagodast, Eluim●a, a new town, and Bzo an ancient town seated upon a high mountain.  
Tedle is the last of the provinces of Morocco, and hath for bounds upon the West, the river of Quadelhabid, which signifies a river of Slaves, that of Ommirabili towards the East, Mount Atlas upon the South, and the country of Tenesme to the North. This country hath a triangular form, the point being towards the South, and extending itself to the North. The chief town of this province is Tesza, an ancient town, and which takes her name of certain stones so called, wherewith the whole town is built: it stands upon the river of Deyme. Near unto this town is that of Elfza, built upon the river of Ommirabili, into which that of Deyme doth run, and both flow from Mount Atlas. This town is under the jurisdiction of the former. Then comes Chythite, which hath long maintained war against the king of Fez, and the last place is called Eithiad, abounding in all sorts of victuals.  
As for the realm of Fez, it is divided into seven provinces, the which are Tenesme, Fez, Az●ghar, Elhabet, Errif, Garet, and Elchaus, all which in former times were but particular se●gneurieses, as in like manner Fez was but a simple jurisdiction, until that one called Marin, made it a realm.  
This whole realm hath for bounds upon the West, the Atlantic sea, and on that side it extends from the river of Ommirabili, and the town of Azamor, unto the town of Zanger; towards the North, the straight of Gibraltar, and the Mediterranean sea, and a part also of the Atlantic; upon the West, the river of Miluia; and towards the South the realm of Morocco.  
The province of Teneseme gins upon the Antlanticke Ocean towards the West, and the inhabitants are they which Ptolemy calls Cawes. Her other bounds are upon the East, the river of Buragrag; and to the North, the Ocean. This country is more long than broad, being forty leagues long, and it is no broader than from Atlas unto the Ocean. In old time it was the flower of all Mauritania and Tingitana, for it contained above four hundred towns, and three hundred castles and villages. The first town of this province is Amfa, which the Romans in old time built upon the Ocean shore. It is thirty leagues from Mount Atlas, and hath been in a manner quite ruined by the Portugals: near unto the which stands the town of Mansor, the which hath run the like fortune. The town of Adendum is situated near unto a little river which is called Guirla, by whose walls there passeth a great spring of water like unto a pool. The town hath been ruined like unto the rest of Mauritania, the which have felt the fury of the war, whenas the Mahometans contended upon the differences of the doctors of their false law.  
The town of Tegeyet stands upon the coast, inhabited only by certain poor people and some smiths, whom the Arabians force to live there, to work for the labourers that manure the land. For the Arabians are masters, or to speak more properly, the stronger command there, and this country is as it were a land of conquest. Near unto the sea shore, is the town of Rabat or Rubut, whereof king Mansor or Almansor was founder. It is seated at the mouth of the river of Burugrug, and is nothing to that it hath been in former times; for that there are not above five hundred households, whereas in the time of Mansor, it was one of the best peopled of Africa: at this day there is nothing within the walls, but gardens, vines, and meadows.  
Bending towards the straight of Gibraltar stands the town of Sala, which carries the ancient name, yet the Barbarians call it Zale. There is a palace which did serve for the interring of the kings of the country, and the princes of their blood. Near to Zale are the ruins of Fanzara, built upon the river of Subu; which holds yet the old name. And not far from Fanzara, stands Mahmore or Marmora, about half a league from the sea, before the which the Portugal army was defeated by the king of Fez, notwithstanding that the Christians held the place, which they were forced to leave by the bad intelligence which was betwixt the Generals of the armies of the kings of Portugal and Castille. Upon this river stands the town of Macnase in a goodly plain, the which is very well peopled: it is about six or seven leagues from mount Atlas, from Zaile five and twenty, and fifteen or sixteen from Fez. It is reasonable great and strong, and hath broad streets, with abundance of water, by the means of an aqueduct, which shows that it hath ta●●ed of the ancient industry of the Romans. There are also the towns of Gemiha, Elchaman, Camis, Metgara, and Bambasil, the which are ruined, and the last belongs to Mahometan priests. Moreover, there is the town of Tefelfelt built in a sandy plain, betwixt the rivers of Other and Bat, being five small leagues from the sea.  
The province of Fez extends towards the ●ast from the river of Buragraga, unto that of In●●●, which is about one hundred miles, the river of Subu is upon the North, and mount Atlas upon the South. In it stands the great and stately city of Fez, called Silde 〈◊〉. It was first of all divided into two, there being one part of either side of the river, and either had his Lord and Mofti of Mahomet's sect: but the king of Luntana sacked these two towns, putting the Mofiz to death, and of two made but one town.  
But to make a description thereof, Fez is a very great town, and at this day the greatest of all Mauritania. It is situated in a manner all upon mountains and hills, so as there 〈◊〉 no part but the heart & the midst of the town that is plain. The water enters by two currents, by reason that the river divides itself into two channels, whereof the one running towards the South, waters the walls of the new town of Fez, and the other which is towards the West washeth the streets of the old. The water being within the town, it disperseth itself into many channels, and runs by the king's palace, and the houses of noblemen, gentlemen, and citizens, and every mosque or temple, college, and hospitals, whereof there are great numbers, have their part of the said water. Near unto their temples, there are places made in form of a square house, to reserve the water, to the end, that when the streets are soul, they may let go the channels and sluices, and by the violence of the water the filth is carried away.  
All the houses of Fez are in a manner built of brick and free stone, and richly painted in leaves and small trees, with azure, and other colours. There is not any lodging but hath his court, about the which they build, making galleries to go from one lodging unto another, and there is not any house but hath a high tower, and within it many little chambers well aired, whither the women go to recreate themselves being weary of their work.  
There are about seven hundred Temples or Oratories, among the which they do number fifty which are great, and stately built, with pillars of marble, and other ornaments. There is not any Mosque or Temple, but hath his fountain made of marble and other rare stones, and a tower to cry Ala. The chief Mosque of Fez is called Carrwen or carven, the which is wonderful great, being about a mile and a half in circuit, and hath one and thirty great doors to enter in by. There are eight and thirty arches in the vault in length, and some twenty in breadth. Round about it, upon the East, West, and North, there are certain galleries and porches, the which are very broad and long, and serve as storehouses to keep the oil, lamps, and other things necessary for the service of the Mosque, for that there is not any arch but hath a lamp burning, and they make account that every night there are nine hundred lamps light. In that rank of arches which is in the midst of the choir of this temple, there are certain great candlesticks made of brass, whereof every one hath place, as some writ, for one thousand and five hundred lamps, and that they were made of the bells of certain Christian towns that were taken by some of the kings of Fez. This great Mosque (not more than the rest) hath but one priest, whose office is to say the prayers, and to have care of the revenues of the Temple, the which he distributes to the ministers thereof, and for all things necessary. The revenues of this Temple are two hundred ducats a day, whereof above a moiety 〈◊〉 for the service of the Temple, and the wages of officers, and with all he doth 〈◊〉 other Temples that have no means, with things necessary. The rest-goes to the 〈◊〉 profit of the town, for that it hath no revenues.  
There are in Fez many colleges, among the which there are two exceeding well built, by divers kings of the house of Murin. Whereof there is one that is admirable both for greatness and beauty, the which king Habu Henon caused to be built, and spent therein four hundred and eighty thousand crowns. There are also many hospitals and stoves, which yield nothing in beauty to the foresaid Colleges. In former times, strangers did use to lodge in them: There are also many without the gates, which are no less beautiful than the rest within the town. These hospitals were very rich; but during the war of Sahid, the king having use of a great sum of money, he was advised to cell the revenues thereof: whereunto the people refusing to yield, the king's Attorney let them understand that the said hospitals had been built and founded with the alms which had been given by the king's predecessors, who was in danger to lose his realm, and therefore it was better to cell the goods and possessions of the said hospitals, to expel the common enemy, and that the war being ended, he would easily redeem them again; and so they were sold: but the king died before it took effect, and so the hospitals continued poor, and in a manner without means.  
There are one hundred stoves, well built, and beautified, whereof some are little, and others great; but all made after one form, and every one hath four chambers. Without them, are certain galleries, some five or six steps high, whereas the men strip themselves, and put off their clotheses. There are also above two hundred Inns in Fez, exceedingly well built, like unto palaces, or the lodgings of some princes; for some are very great, and built three stories high, as those near unto the great Temple, whereof some contain one hundred and twenty chambers or more, and every one hath his fountain or ●a●e, with little conduits and channels which carry away all the filth and uncleanness. There are above four hundred mills in the town of Fez, or at the lest, places where mills stand, the which are built like unto a great hall upon pillars, in some of which you shall see four, five, or six mills: most of the which, belong unto Colleges, and Temples, and are let out at a dear rate, that is to say, two hundred ducats for a place where they grinned.  
As for the new town of Fez, it is environed with two fair, strong, and high walls, and is built upon a goodly plain near unto the river, and about half a league from the old town, betwixt the West and the South. A part of the river enters betwixt the two walls upon the North side, where the mills stand, and the other part divides itself into two arms or channels, whereof the one passeth betwixt the two towns by the fort, and the other r●nss by certain valleys and orchards which are near the old town of Fez, and enters into it upon the South side. The other part enters into the fort, and passeth by the College of king Abuttiman. jacub, son to Abdula, the first king of the family of Marin, having conquered the realm of Morocco, and expelled the kings, he resolved to build this city, and to transport the royal seat thither, calling it, the White town, but since the vulgar people have given it the name of New Fez. This king divided it into three parts distinct one from another. In the one, he caused his royal palace to be built, and other houses for his children and brethren, ordaining, that all should have their gardens of pleasure; and near unto his palace he caused a goodly Temple to be built. In the second part, there were nothing but the king's querries and stables, and many fair houses for his captains, and other men most favoured in his Court. From the port, upon the West part unto that which looks towards the East, was made the place of the town, of a great circuit, in the which are the shops of merchants, and of all sorts of trades. Near unto the gate, upon the West, at the second wall, he caused a great house to be built, with many lesser, for the Captain of the town, and his soldiers, and near unto it, two goodly stables to contain three hundred horses appointed for the guard of his palace. The third part of the town was assigned for a lodging for them that guarded the king's person: and near unto it, is the place whereas they mint all their money, and it is called Zecque, the which is made of a square form, and hath certain galleries round about it, whereas the masters of the mint remain.  
As for the towns of this province, there is Macarmeda upon the river of Inaven, in a goodly plain: but it is in a manner all ruined but the walls. Three leagues from Fez, stands Bavia upon the same river; but the civil wars have ruined it. Upon Mount Zarbon, the town of Gualili shows itself, the which was ruined by the Africans, and reedi●●●d by Idris, who lies buried there, and honoured as a holy man. Near unto it stands another ancient town called the palace of Pharaoh, and yet the Egyptians never commanded over this province. There is also Maquille, an ancient place, and then the villages of Bemignariben, and Af●is.  
The province of A●gar hath for bounds upon the North, the Ocean; upon the West, the river of Buragrag, called Lix by the Ancients; towards the East, the mountains of Cumera, and a part of Zarbon, and Zelag, which divide it from the country of Fez; and towards the South, the river of Bunazar. It is forty leagues long, and about thirty broad.  
The towns and places of this province are Giumba, the which was built by the ancient Africans, and is nothing at this day, for that there is not any thing to be seen but the ditches. Upon the Sea stands Lorache, or Laras, built upon the river of Luccus, where there is a good port, although the entry be very difficult. Then they found the town built by Mansor king of Morocco, called Caesar Elcabir, which signifies the great palace of the foundation.  
The province of Elhabet, or Ellabat, or Habat, hath for bounds upon the North, the Ocean; to the South, the river of Guarga; towards the East, the mountains near unto the straight of Gibraltar; and upon the West, the marshes of Azgar. This country is of a greater extent than that of Azgar. The towns are Exagen, seated upon the top of a mountain, near unto the river of Guarga, or Zuerga, five and thirty leagues from Fez. The Portugals make their incursions thither, and therefore the inhabitants do commonly entertain four hundred horse in garrison. Upon the same river stands the town of Bani●ende, which is little inhabited, and near unto it is Mergo, then Tansor, Agla, Narangia, and Basra, which is now but a desert, although the walls be standing. After which, comes Homar, sometimes well peopled, but now little inhabited for that the Portugals command upon that coast.  
The country of Erif gins at the corner of the straight of Gibraltar towards the West, and runs towards the East to the river of Nochor, called Molochat by Ptolemy, which is above seventy leagues. It hath for bounds upon the South, Mount Atlas, towards the river of Guarga, which is the proper country called Fez; and upon the North, lies the Mediterranean Sea. It hath few towns, but a great number of villages.  
The first town is Terga, then Belis standing betwixt two mountains, and having a good port, near unto which are the town of Tegassa, Gebba, and Mezemme, seated upon a mountain.  
The province of Garet confines upon the East with the river of Muluia, and a part of the country of Chauz; towards the West, with the river of Nochor, and a part of the country of Erif; upon the South, with the neighbour mountains of the deserts of Numidia, or Biledulgerid; and towards the North, with the Mediterranean Sea, upon which side it looks towards the Island of Formentaria, and the ancient realm of Valencia. It is about five and twenty leagues long, and twenty broad. The towns and places of most note are, Tezzota, standing upon a little hill; to the which there is but one passage, than the town of Miggeo, and also another place upon the Sea, called jafferin, lately built by the Mahometans, of the race and lyniall descent of Marin. All this province of Ga●et is divided into three parts; in the one are towns, in the other mountains, and in the third the desert, which extends from the Mediterranean sea unto the desert of Chauz.  
Chauz, the last province of the realm of Fez, contains in a manner the third part, being one hundred and ninety miles long, from the river of Zha, towards the East unto ●at● of Gurguigara upon the West, and it hath in breadth one hundred and seventy miles▪ for it contains all that part from Mount Atlas, which looks towards Mauritanian 〈◊〉 good part of the plain, and mountains joining to Lybia.  
The●p●● among her towns Teure●t, built upon a hill in a large plain, and it is environed with deserts. There are also to be seen the walls of Hadaggia, which is like unto an Island betwixt the river of Mululo and Muluia: and the town of Dubdu, which carries the ancient name of the mountain. After this comes the town of Teza, the which is strong and rich, seated in a plain, at the foot of the mountain of Dubdu, upon the river of Mululo: it is as it were the university of the neighbour countries, and hath colleges like unto Fez. Betwixt the mountains stand two towns, whereof the one is called Sofroy, hal●e ruined, and the other Mezedaga. Near unto the mountain of Cunaigel ●herben which signifies the passage of Ravens, stands the little town of Tezergue subject to the Arabians, who have ruined another near unto it, called Vmen junaibe.  

¶ The Quality.  
SPeaking generally of the realm of Morocco, it abounds in corn, fruit, oil, honey, wax, sugar, and goats hair, whereof they make chamlets, and goat skins, which being dressed, they call Marroquins, of the name of the country where they are made. It is watered by the rivers of Tensist, and Ommirabili, which comes from Mount Atlas; but that of Tensist ●lowess out of the territory of Morocco, and receives the rivers of Sifemel and Naffi, and as for Ommirabili, she hath her spring in very high mountains, whereas the province of Tedle confines with the realm of Fez.  
But to speak something in particular of the quality of this country, being not all of one sort, you must understand that the province of He is rough, stony, full of mountains, and hath much wood, and yet there are many valleys, and little rivers; so as it abounds with barley, millet, and honey, where with the inhabitants live: they make no account of their wax, neither have they any wheat. There is a kind of fruit which they call Arga, like unto olives, but the tree is thorny, and of this fruit they make oil of small price, the which they use to dress their meats with, and to put in their lamps. There is store of venison, as stags, wild goats, and hares. In the mountain of Demensera, which is a part of Mount Atlas, there is store of iron. Mastic and box trees grow very great, and there is abundance in these mountains.  
In the country of Suz, and along that coast, they found great store of fine amber, and the soil of the town of Tejeut is far, fertile, and abounding in barley,, wheat, and other grain. There grows store of sugar, which the inhabitants cannot boil nor refine, and therefore it is black. They have gold, and some little silver, and there they dress their Marroquin skins, which we call Spanish leather. Near unto Tarudant the inhabitants have their pasture for the feeding of their cattle. The soil of the town of Teldsi is fertile in grain, sugar, and wood. There come goodly figs, peaches, and dates out of the country of Suz, for that in many places there are store of palm trees, but the dates are of no great price. There are mines of gold in the mountain of Halem, for which cause the inhabitants are continually in war.  
The province of Morocco abounds in all sorts of grain, cattle, first-fruits, and good water: but the mountains which are very cold are also barren, so as their grows little but barley; yet there are few, and all this provinces is in a manner a continued plain, as Leo Affricanus doth witness.  
Guzule yields great store of barley, and feeds much cattle: there are also mines of iron and brass.  
As for Ducale, some part of the country is good, but it is all they can do to entertain the inhabitants with that it yields. There is a lake near to the green mountain, which doth feed the whole country with fish.  
Hascora abounds wonderfully in oil and goats, whose hair they employ for the making of chamlets, and their skins for leather. The fields are very fruitful, and there are many orchards full of all sorts of first-fruits: orange trees grow wonderfully, and the vines bear read grapes as big as walnuts. There is store of honey, and goodly ●igss, and there are some mines of iron.  
The Champion country of Tedles yields all good things necessity for the life of man, and the bill● abound in batley, and feed great herds of goats.  
As f●● the realm of Fez, the air in some places is very temperate, and in others 〈◊〉 troublesome. For although the country be altogether rough, and hath in many pla●●●●● cold mountains, and some deserts: yet to consider it in general, it is very fruit●●●●●ut in one place more than another; for it abounds so in corn, and fruit, as in that ●espect, it yields to few others. There are many vines, and olive trees, and great store of eggs, almonds, and c●tton. It feeds great numbers cattle of all sorts: likewise there are many horses, cammells, goats, and hares. But let us examine in particular all these provinces.  
The province of Fez is altogether plain, and the air is very temperate. There are great store of horses, and such numbers of weathers, ewes, and such like, as it not only hath sufficient for her own provision, but doth also furnish all the mountains of Gumera. There are few forests, and yet there are many wild goats and hares: and there grows 〈◊〉 of cotton.  
In the province of Temesne, which is in a manner all plain, and fruitful, there is along the river of Odera great and thick forests full of Lions, the which are the fiercest in all Afrique; so as they of Tefelfelt dare not go abroad but in great troops, and travelers which are sometimes forced to lie in the field all night, entrench themselves, and also they do keep a guard upon necessity, if they will not be devoured by these beasts.  
The province of Azgar is great and fertile, seated in a large plain. They of Gumera draw their victuals out of this country. This province is very pleasing, and the air wholesome. There grows store of cotton, and it hath like commodities to the province of Tez.  
As for the country of Elhabat, it is wonderful fertile, and yields all sorts of fruit: yet the soil about Tanger is not very good, but in certain places where the found some fountains, and make gardens, the rest is nothing but sand.  
There are many mountains, and among others, eight, that is to say, Rabona, Bemifenseca●e, Beniharos, Chebib, Benichessen, Angera, Quadrez, and Beniguedarfeth, which are exceeding fertile; and among the mountains of this country there are some excecding high, and of hard access.  
The country of Erif, is altogether rough, and full of cold mountains, where there are great deserts stored with thick trees, the which are exceeding fair and strait. It yields no wheat, but there is abundance of vines, figs, olives, and almonds. There are few oxen and sheep, but it hath great numbers of goats, asses, and apes.  
The country of Garet is dry, sandy, and unpleasant, and in a manner like to the deserts of Numidia, and these deserts are wholly without water. There are many wild beasts of divers sorts, so as travelers dare not pass that way but in great troops. The mountain of Sahid which is in this country, abounds with iron and ba●ley, and in the mountain of Guardan there are many horses.  
As for Chauz, the country for the most part is rough and stony, and there are many deserts. The mountain of Dubdu is exceeding fertile, by reason of the great number of fountains which flow from thence: but this fertility extends but to gardens, for that they of Dubdu are forced to fetch their other victuals out of the territory of Tezze, whereas they found very good wines, and abundance of all things necessary.  
In the mountain of Magara, which is near unto Tezze, there are many woods, and a soi●e, which yields store of grain, flax, oil, and troops of cattle, especially goats. In the mountain of Gavara they found great store of leopards and apes in the woods and elsewhere, and there grows abundance of wheat and barley. Upon Mount Baronis, there grow grapes, but the inhabitants which drink no wine have no care to multiply their vines. The mountain of Guertenage is high & difficult, but it abounds with corn, 〈…〉, citrons, and quinces. Upon the mountain of Gueblen, there lies snow contiti●●●●y. That of jefferen is full of iron mines, but there grows not any thing for the nour●●●●●●● of man. The mountain of Selelgo hath store of pine trees and fountains, and it is full of Lions, Leopards, and Apes. Upon Mount Beni Merasen, there are many Asses, and Horses, which is the cause they have such numbers of Mules.  
But to conclude this point, and to say all that concerns the quality of these two realms, having considered the one and the other, it shallbe convenient to show in gross, all that is necessary for a general knowledge of both together.  
I say therefore, that all the country which is environed by Mount Atlas, is more subject to cold than heat, and that there is sufficient of fruit and grain, except wheat; but they have little good water. Mount Atlas is cold, and always covered with snow, and the valleys which lie near unto it, are very fertile, but more towards the Ocean than the Mediterranean Sea. In these countries, the cold gins in October, but more by rain than frosts, and they have no cold but in the morning.  
The weather is inconstant in February, and the winds are very strong and loud in the month of March, yet very necessary for the corn and trees. But in April, all things grow; so as in middle May, they eat ripe figs, and in june, grapes, and betwixt june and julie, apples, pears, plums, and such like fruit, are in their season, and maturity. In the time of October, they gather quinces, pomegranates, and certain apples, and in November, olives. From the end of February unto May, the weather is exceeding fair; yet if it rain not from the five and twentieth of April until the fift of May, they have no hope of any good year, and the inhabitants call this rain, Nasan, as one should say, Holy water. Summer is exceeding hot, the time being always clear; but if it chance to rain, that water is nothing wholesome, but causeth strange fevers, whereof many dye. The diseases which ordinarily reign in these countries, are these, pains in the head, teeth, and stomach, scurse in children, colliques, the sciatica, and gout, and they are all subject to be scabbed; and which is worse, the great pox are so ordinary among them, as there is not any town in Barbary, whereas most of the inhabitants have not been touched therewith.   

¶ The manners of the Ancients.  
THe country of Barbary was destitute of inhabitants for many ages, like unto Numidia. Whereupon some say, that the people of these countries have drawn their beginning from them of Palestina, who retired themselves into these parts, being expelled by the Assyrians. Some others say, that these Barbarians are descended from the Sabeans, a people of Arabia the Happy, before they were chased away by the Assyrians or Aethiopians. Others are of opinion, that they are issued from certain inhabitants of Asia, who fled first into Greece, being expelled their country by their enemies, then being pursued by them, they came into Barbary, and there stayed, leaving their enemies in Greece. In former times there were excellent men, and very learned in these countries, and the people were wonderfully civil: for among the Mahometans they cannot sufficiently commend king Almansor or Mansor, Marin, and Huceph, men excellent in their superstitions. During whose reigns, the most famous physicians and philosophers among the Arabians have flourished, as for example, Auicenna, Rasis, Albumazar, averroes, with many others, all bred up by the kings of Morocco, who held Barbary, and a part of Spain. The Colleges which are in some towns, show how much they esteemed learning. Finally, there was not any nation more witty to invent a thousand gallant devices for turneys, and such like; they brought them into Spain, and there practised them with much wit and dexterity, the which the Romans have also used. They brought in the manner of riding a●la Genette, with short stirrups, and their joco de Canna, wherein they yet excel. They made themselves fearful to all their neighbours, and gave proofs in all places, that they were full of courage. Some ancient Authors have rightly said, that they love changes and innovations. They lived in former times of apes which are found in their mountains, and they did wear no garments but of goat's skins. They did offer sacrifice to the Sun and Moon, and buried their dead.  
At Ham Lisnan, in the countries of Chauz, they did assemble at a certain season of the year in the beginning of the night, and having done their sacrifice, they put out their lights, and every man laid hold of the first woman he met, and had his pleasure of her: and all the women that had been at this feast, were forbidden to lie within one year with their husbands: and the children that were borne of this conjunction, were kept by the Priests of the Temple.   

¶ The manners at this day.  
BEfore we discourse particularly of the manners of every one of these provinces, it shall be fit to speak of all in general, and of the Arabians, who hold a good part of these countries.  
The inhabitants of Fez and Morocco are somewhat tawny, but the one more than the other. These people are almost like in conditions and qualities to the Arabians, but they are somewhat more civil. They are wonderful ambitious of honour, and they are as inconstant and subtle as any people in the world. Treachery is as much practised among them, as in any other place of the earth. There are none more choleric than the inhabitants of this country, and they are great bragger's, suspicious, and exceeding jealous.  
Moreover, they are wonderful nimble, and active, especially in fights on horseback, where they show their readiness: but they cannot long endure labour, and their disposition is to end speedily, or soon to give over. Thus we have deciphered their manners in general, but before we come to the particulars, I will speak something of the Arabians which live among these people.  
The Arabians live commonly in the deserts, feeding their horses, camels, and great troops of cattles, wherewith they furnish the neighbour countries. They are very powerful, as well by reason of their valour and dexterity, as for their numbers: but they are very ill armed. They that live near to Mount Atlas, and betwixt it and the Mediterranean Sea, are richer and more at their ease than the rest, they attire themselves properly, they are well mounted, and have fairer and greater pavilions than the rest (for they live all under tents) and their horses are fatter and smother, but yet not so smooth as of the deserts of Numidia.  
These Arabians are industrious, and given to manual labour, and devil in a fertile country, whereas they reap abundance of corn, and have infinite troops of cattles, and oxen without number; and for this cause they are forced every day to change the place of their abode, and to remove their pavilions to seek new pasture, and these use great liberality and courtesy to strangers which pass through their country, whereas the other Arabians are very cruel. Some of them pay tribute to the Emperor of Morocco: others have lived long, and never acknowledged any lord, nor paid any tribute: but since that the Portugois have held Azamor and Asaphi, they have been forced to receive a law from them.  
Finally, they are much given to hunting, and keep many dogs, and although they lodge passengers courteously, yet are they so accustomed to theft, as a man can hardly escape without some loss, but they never attempt any thing against their persons. They are much given to poesy in their own language, but it hath no more that ancient quickness, yet they have a singular grace in their verses, and they that can make them best, are countenanced by their commanders, and recompensed for their invention. As for the Arabians wives, they are reasonably well attired after their country fashion, having for their garments, black smocks, with great and large sleeves, upon the which they carry as it were a mantle of the same colour, or Turkish blue, and they wrap themselves so prettily in it, putting it into divers plaits, as it joins together upon the shoulder, where they make it fast with clasps of silver very curiously and artificially made. Moreover, they have rings of silver hanging at their ears, as well as on their fingers, and they put little hoops of the same metal about their legs, like unto the other women of Africa. They do also wear little masks of linen cloth, where there is no overture but for their eyes, lest they should tempt men, so much they love to live honestly; and when as these women see any one that is not their kinsman, they cover their faces, and they will not in any sort entertain them: but before their kinsmen or husbands they are bore faced. The Arabians going from one place unto another, carry their wives upon Camels, and in certain saddles covered with tapestry, to the end the heat may not offend them: and these saddles are made in such sort, as but one woman alone can sit in them. Whenas they go to the war, even on the day of battle, they have their wives with them, to the end they may have the more courage in their fight. These women before they go unto their husbands, either on the marriage day, or at any other time, to lie with them, paint their faces, breasts, arms, and hands, with a certain azured colour, thinking that they are very handsome after this manner, and they hold this custom from the Arabians which first entered into Africa, and these learned it from the Africans; yet at this day the towns of Barbary inhabited by them of the country, do not imitate this custom; but their wives love to maintain their natural complexion. It is true that sometimes they have a certain black painting made of the smoke of galls and saffron, with the which they make little spots upon their cheeks and they paint their eyebrows of a triangular form, and they lay some upon the chin, which resembles an olive leaf: and this being commended by the Arabian Poets in their amorous songs; their is not any African of great note but will carry it in a bravery. But you must understand that these women dare not wear this painting above two or three days, nor show themselves before their kinsmen in this equipage, for that it savours something of a whore. They only give the sight and content thereof unto their husbands to incite them to love, for that those women desire the sport much, and they think that their beauty receives a great grace by this painting. But we have spoken sufficiently of the Arabians, let us now come to the manners of the provinces of the realm of Morocco.  
They of the province of Heezes, eat bread made of barley without leaven, like unto cakes, and they bake them in pans of earth upon a hot hearth, as the Italians do their tarts: for there are few that bake their bread in an oven, as we commonly do. They live also of barley meal mixed with hot water, putting it into oil, unless it be in Summer and the Spring, whenas they seethe it in milk, and put butter into it in steed of oil. They have neither cloth nor napkins, but use certain mats which they spread upon the ground, whereon they eat sitting. They are attired with a certain woollen cloth made like the common coverings which they lay upon beds. They wrap this cloth about their bodies, and tie it about their buttocks, covering their privy parts with a kind of cloth made also of wool.  
They have bands of the same wool upon their heads, being five foot long, and a foot broad, the which they die black, and wreathe them so about their heads, as the crow●e is always bore, and there is not any man that wears a cap, but he that is aged, or learned, if there be any such; and these caps are round & double, such as Churchmen were wont to wear in France. Their beds are course rugs, like those which are made in Catalogne, whereof the one serves for a mattress, & another for a sheet and covering, and their bolsters and pillows are sacks of course wool. They that are not married date not wear a beard: but when they are married, they suffer it to grow. They have much venison, and yet they care not for hunting. They have many rivers, and yet they use no mills, and the women make the meal. There is scarce any one that can read & writ. They have not any physician, chirurgeon, or apothecary: fire is their ordinary remedy for all things. To conclude, the virtue of this people consists in war, during the which, they never do wrong to strangers, but give them passports. The people of Ileusugeglien are the most savage and cruel of all the realm.  
The inhabitants of Teferne are whiter than their neighbours, and very courteous to strangers, for whom they have a hospital, and they lodge them in their own houses, the which is not very usual in Africa.  
The inhabitants of Mount Idevacall are gross, but very valiant.  
In the country of Suz, and near to the town of Teijeut, they use no other money but gold, as it is drawn out of the ground, and for small money they use certain pieces of iron of the weight of an ounce. The inhabitants have the art to dress their Barbary ski●●● much esteemed; and to be short, the country of Suz is peopled with men which are exceeding valiant.  
The people of the province of Morocco are courteous and liberal. They read Mahomet's law in the chief town, and there are colleges rent to that end, and hospitals for passengers that 〈◊〉 of their sect. They that live in the Champion country are so brutish, as having no sufficient man among them to decide their controversies, they use to stay strangers as they pass to give sentence of that which is in question, and this Arbitrator must be both Register and judge. Their feeding is not very dainty, for their food is barley flower mixed with boiling water, and the flesh of the oldest he goat that they can get.  
As for them of Guzule, they are wonderful brutish, and yet they make of the iron of their mines artificial vessels, which they exchange for cloth, horses, spices, and other things they need, at the fairs and markets of the neighbour countries, whether they commonly go. In a manner in all the country they do not acknowledge any Superior by reason whereof they are in continual war; so as their truce doth never last above three days in the week, whereunto they are forced by reason of their traffic. But whenas they meet, the truce being expired, they murder one another without any respect of age or sex. For their apparel, they have shirts of wool without sleeves, and straight at the neck, and upon their heads they wear hats of the leaves of palm trees.  
The days of their Fairs and Markets are so strictly and solemnly kept, as one dares not offend another were he his enemy, for that they have a captain chosen by all parts, who takes knowledge of crimes which are committed during the traffic. Thest is punished with death, without any other form of process, and they put the thief to death with a kind of Partuisan, than they leave the dead body for an example, and for food to beasts and birds.  
The inhabitants of Ducale are rude and uncivil, and voided of all courtesy. And as for them of Hafcora, there are many tanner's of leather, where they make the best skins of Africa. The women are fair and white, and take great delight in strangers, but the Africans are exceeding jealous.  
In the country of Tedle, there are many rich merchants in towns, and citizens which are ●xceeding courteous. The women spin wool very well, the which is excellent to make rare works. They are white in some places of this province, and we are much silver in their apparel. But if we consider the inhabitants of Mount Dedez in the same country's, we shall found that they have neither towns nor villages, but live in houses dispersed here and there, and most part remain in caves, and are thieves and traitors, and they are so wicked, as they will kill a man for a small matter. And as for their women, they are the foulest of all Africa.  
As for the realm of Fez, the inhabitants of the province of Azgar are in a manner all rich Arabians, and sumptuously attired: they are very valiant, and therefore the king of Morocco doth use them commonly in his wars.  
The people of the country of Elhabat are very valiant and hardy, in whom the king of Morocco puts very great confidence, drawing great services from them by the incursions they make upon the Christians lands.  
The inhabitants of Errif are but uncivil, yet they are exceeding valiant and strong. They go ill attired, and are much given to drunkenness. They of the mountains have lumps of flesh under their throats like unto them that devil in the Alpes. The inhabitan●● of Belis of Gomera are great pirates, and do much annoyed the Christians upon the 〈◊〉 of Spain.  
〈◊〉 the country of Garet, the inhabitants of Mount Sahid pay not any tribute, and are all 〈◊〉 and given to polish iron, the which is carried to Fez in round bullets, for that they cannot draw it into bars, as they do in Europe.  
The mountains of Teza, and the country of Chauz, fear not their kings, against whom they have often fought, for that they are strong, both by situation, men, and victuals. They of the mountain of Gavata are all weavers, and faint-hearted, not daring to go to the foot of the mountain, for that they will pay no tribute unto their king, and they cannot be forced in the mountain, being furnished with all things necessary for the use of man.  
The people of Mount Baronis are reasonable white: the women are fair, and lovely, but their husbands are wonderful jealous. The inhabitants of Mount jesseten are very poor, miserable, and the dullest witted in all Africa. And the dwellers upon the mountains of Ziz, Mezettaza, and Beni Merazen, which they call Zanagas, are valiant and fierce, and the greatest thieves in Africa, every one carrying three Zagays, or Lances for his arms, the which they cast with such dexterie, as they seldom or never miss, and withal, they have a sword and a dagger, and they have intelligence with the Arabians.  
I come now to the manners of them of the town of Fez, who (in my opinion) have exceeded all the other inhabitants of these realms in neatness. First of all, I say that they have very fair stoves or hot houses, where they observe an excellent order. Without the halls, there are certain lodgings whereas men disrobe themselves, and leave their apparel, as I have formerly noted. Whenas a man will go into one of these stoves, having past the first door, he enters into a chamber which is cold, whereas they keep water to refresh the other when it is too hot. Then he goes by another door to a second chamber, which is something hotter, and there they wash and cleanse the person that will bathe himself. After which, he passeth to a third chamber, which is very hot, and there he sweats some time. They heat their water with dung, for the masters of these stoves keep men which go up and down to gather up dung in stables, who carry it out of the town, and make little mountains, and there leave it two or three months to dry. And this they burn in stead of wood to heat their stoves. The women have also their stoves; and there are some which are common both to men and women: but the men have their limited hours, according to the quality of the days; and the rest of the day is for the women, and whenas they enter into the stoves, there is a cord drawn at the entry, so as no man may enter: and if any man would speak with his own wife, he is not suffered, but he must signify his will unto her by one of the maids. Both men and women eat often in the stoves, and most commonly they spend their time after divers sorts, and sing merrily. All young men enter naked into the stoves without any respect one of another: but they that are of any quality above the common sort, enter with certain linen clothes about their bodies, and sit not in the common places, but retire themselves into certain little chambers, which are always ready, and separated for men of quality. But you must understand, that when they that serve in the stoves wash any one, they make him lie down, and then they rub him, sometimes with restorative ointments, and sometimes with instruments which take away the filth. But whenas they wash any ladies, they make them lie down upon carpets of felt, and to rest their heads upon pillows covered with felt.  
There are many barbers for every stove, which pay a certain sum unto the master of the stove, that their instruments may remain there, and that they may work. Most of these stoves belong to the Mosques and Colleges, and are rent out, some for one hundred ducats, some more, and some less.  
The boys which serve in these stoves, are accustomed to have a certain feast once in the year, after this manner: They invite all their friends, and go out of the town with trumpets and physes: then they take an onion, and put it into a fair vessel of Latin, and covering it with a certain linen cloth that is very white, they return unto the town, sounding even unto the door of the stove: then they put the onion into a basket, and hung it at the door of the stove, saying, that it brings profit to the house, and that many will repair unto it.  
There are goodly Inns in the same town, but they have no beds; for they give you nothing to sleep on, but a piece of a mat and covering. If any man will eat, he must buy his own meat, and then he gives it them to dress. Poor widows, which have neither house, nor kinsmen to lodge them, retire themselves into these Inns, where they 〈◊〉 them a chamber, and sometimes they put two together; and these women have a ●●re of the lodgings and kitchen. As for the innkeepers, they are of a race called Elchena, and they are attired, and decked up like women. They have their beards shaven, and imitat women in their speech. Every one of these men hath a boy which lies with him, and lives with him as a husband doth with his wife. They also keep women which live like the common courtesans of Europe. These have liberty to cell and buy wine, and cannot be restrained by the king's officers; and dissolute men do commonly frequent these places, some to be drunk, others to pass the heat of their amorous lust, and such like. These innkeepers have a Consul, and pay a certain tribute to the Governor of the town. Moreover, they are bound, when need requires, to give unto the king's army, or to the princes, a great number of their people to dress meat for the soldiers, for that there are few others which understand the trade. But you must understand, that no man of learning, merchant, or honest tradesman, will speak unto them: and they are forbidden to enter into the Mosques, to converse among merchants, to come into stoves, or into their houses. They may not also keep the Inns that are near unto the Temple, whereas rich merchants lodge. The people hate them exceedingly, but the noblemen use them (as I have fomerly said) in their armies, suffering them to lead this dishonest life.  
There are certain merchants which take mills to farm, who buy corn, and grinned it; and then they cell the meal unto shops, whereby they reap a great commodity; for that handicrafts men, who have not means to make their provision of corn, buy this meal, and make bread in their houses: but men of quality buy corn, and have it ground in certain mills appointed for the citizens. Most of these mills belong unto Temples and Colleges, and are rent out, as hath bee●e said.  
Arts and trades in this city are separated one from another, and the most noble are about the great Mosque, as Notaries, of which there are about eighty shops, part whereof are joining to the walls of the Temple, and the rest are right against it, and in every shop there are two Notaries or Sc●ibeses. Somewhat farther of, towards the West, are thirty shops of Bookesellers; and upon the South side, about fifty shops of merchants of shoes, who buy great numbers of shoes and buskins from the Shoemakers, and cell them by retail. Near unto it, are the Shoemakers which make shoes for children; and upon the East, are they that cell implements made of copper, and latten. Right against the great door of the Temple, stand they that cell fruit, and after them, the sellers of things made in wax, the which are very beautiful to behold. After, come they that cell flowers, and citrons; and these want no buyers, for that such as are accustomed to drink wine, will always have flowers. Then follow, the sellers of milk, who buy it of certain Cowherd's every morning, and of that which remains unfold, they make butter, and cell it to the people. Moreover, there are many merchants of cotton and hemp, whereof the last make cords and halters for horses. Besides these, there are some which make horsecollers of leather, wrought with silk. And there are sellers of bits and bridles for horses; petrells, saddles, and stirrups.  
There are also many porters and bearers of burdens, who live together like brethren, for whenas any one of them dies, and leaves young children, they entertain his wife in common, until she be married again, and have a care of the children until they be of age fit to learn some trade. Whenas any one marries, or hath a child borne, he makes a feast to all the company, and every one in requital presents him with something, and no man may be of the troup until he hath feasted the rest; and if he enters otherwise, when he labours he hath but half the gain. Whenas they work, they have a certain short garment, all of one colour; but when they are idle, they may wear what they list. There is a place where they cell carrots and turnips, the which they so esteem, as no man may ●u● them, but such as pay a certain sum to them that keep the Customehouse, and every day they cell fifty burt hens, yea sometimes more. They also sel● little balls of flesh stamped and fried with oil, with much spice, and every piece is as big as an ordinary fig. And there are some which cell certain loaves fried with oil, like unto the bread made with honey, which is sold in Rome, and they of the town eat often of this bread to breakfast, especially upon feasting days, and before their fasting days, and they eat it with their meat roasted, or with honey, or with certain flesh stamped, the which they bray the second time after it is boiled, making broth thereof, and colour it with read earth. They do not roast their meat with a spit, but they have two ovens one upon another, and put fire in the undermost: whenas the uppermost is well heat, they put in a whole sheep, at a hole that is in the top of it, lest they should burn their hands: the flesh bakes very well after this manner, and hath a delicate taste, for that it smells not of the smoke, nor hath too great a fire, but it is baked with a temperate heat all the night long, and in the morning they begin to cell it.  
They also cell certain flesh fried, and fish after the same manner, and another sort of fine bread, which they eat with butter and honey. The butchers weigh their flesh, and cell it by the pound, and they kill not their beasts in the shambleses, but in a place a part near unto the river, whereas they flay them. As for clotheses, they that will cell any, give them unto criers, who take them upon their shoulders, and go up and down crying the price, and this they do from noon until night. There are many which make cages of canes for foul, for that every citizen keeps a great number to fat, and for that they will have their houses clean, they shut them up in these cages. There are some which cell corn and pulses to sow, and there is a place whereas many attend with mules and horses to carry this grain. Whereas they cell linen cloth, you shall sometimes see an infinite number of women, who many times fall to words, and in the end, to blows, scolding bitterly on at another, and giving delight to them that hear them. There are some that make targets of leather, after the manner of Africa. There are many Launderers, men of base condition, who wash exceeding well. They dry their linen upon lines, as we do in these parts, and fold it as handsomely as any people in the world. There are shoemakers which make shoes for gentlemen, the which neither artisens', soldiers, nor any other courtiers may wear. There is a street of certain artisens' which make tresses at the end of clotheses, which the inhabitants of Fez wear upon their heads. The Apothecaries cannot make any julops, Syrups, nor Electuaries, for that the Physicians make all these things in their own houses, and then sand them to their shops, where they keep boys which distribute them according to the physicians prescription: but most of the people know neither Physician nor Physic. There are certain shops whereas they cell birds, as well to eat, as to delight them with their singing. There are some that make pantofles which the gentlemen wear when the streets are foul, and these are artificially made with certain works, and they are shod with iron, and have coverings with leather sowed with silk. They make the brooms which they use with certain wild palm trees, like unto those which they bring from Sicily unto Naples. These they carry up and down the town, and exchange them for ashes, and old shoes: the ashes they cell to launderers, and the broken shoes to cobblers.  
There are sellers of wool who buy the skins from the butchers, keeping boys to wash them, than they draw off the wool, and dress the skins, but of none but sheep; for there are others which tan bullocks hides. There are some which make bonds to tie horses by the leg. There are many places in the town, whereas they saw timber of divers sorts; in which work they employ Christian slaves, whom their masters feed with part of the money they get of their labour, and they never give them any rest, but on Friday, from noon till night, and some eight days at divers seasons of the year. There are public stews, whereas common women abandon themselves for a small price: and these are countenanced by the captains of the watch, or the governor of the town. And there are certain men which have wine and women in their houses, which they expose for money.  
They keep their corn in certain deep holes, the which will hold a very great quantity some writ, above a thousand quarters: and the inhabitants of this place whereas these holes are (who are commonly men of mean condition) live of the rent thereof, the which is one measure for a hundred every year.  
The inhabitants of the town are civil. In Winter they wear woollen cloth made out of the country. Their habit is a jupe upon a shirt, with very straight sleeves, and the● on they wear a certain large robe sewed together before, and upon all they have their cloaks, made after the Moresco manner, which they call Albornoz. Upon their heads they wear single bonnets made like unto some which they wear by night in Italy, but without ears: and upon them they put certain bands of linen cloth wreathed about their heads and beards. They wear long breeches of linen cloth like unto mariners, except it be in Winter, whenas going to horseback they put on buskins. The people wear cassocks under their gowns, and have nothing on their heads but bonnets of small price.  
The Doctors and Gentlemen wear gowns which have wide sleeves, like unto the gentlemen of Venice, which have some honourable charge. To conclude, they that are of base condition wear course white cloth, made of the country wool, and their cloaks are of the same stuff.  
The women are reasonably well appareled, but in Summer they wear nothing but a smock, and they bind their foreheads about with certain bands which are not very pleasing. In Winter they use gowns with wide sleeves, and sewed together before like unto the men. But whenas they go abroad they wear mariners breeches, which hide all their legs, and they have a vail which covers their heads and bodies: they do also cover their faces with a fine linen cloth, so as nothing is seen but their eyes. They wear great rings of gold at their ears, with very rich jewels, and they that are not of quality have them of silver without stones. They also wear bracelets of gold, whereof a pair weigh about one hundred ducats: the others have them of silver, and many of these women of either condition wear bracelets upon their legs.  
As for their diet, the common people are accustomed to eat fresh meat two days in the week, but gentlemen eat every day at their pleasure, and they make three meals in the day. That in the morning is very light, for they eat nothing but bread & fruit, and certain broths made of flower and wheat, the which are more liquid than others, and in Winter for this broth, they take liquid flower, with pouldered flesh. At noon they feed but sparingly of salt meat and olives, but in Summer they feed plentifully at this second meal. Their third repast is at night, whenas they eat nothing but bread with melons, grapes, or milk: but in Winter they eat boiled flesh with cuscusu, which is like unto our tarts of paste, and they put it into a vessel full of little holes to receive the some of other pots whereon they set it, and then they mix butter with it, and sprinkle broth upon it: but they are not accustomed to eat any thing roasted. Thus the tradesman and po●rer sort live: but men of quality live much better, and more delicately; yet in regard of our kind of diet, theirs is very base and miserable, not for the little quantity of meat, but for that they are so stovenly in their feeding; for they eat their meat sitting on the ground upon certain low tables, without either cloth or napkins, and they use no other instrument but their hands. Whenas they eat cuscusu, they put it into a great platter, and eat it without spoons. They put all their flesh and broth pell mel in one dish, and every man takes as much flesh as he lists, and lays it before him without any trencher, and then without a knife he tears it with his teeth and keeps the rest in his hand. They eat very speechly, and no man drinks until he be full: then every man drinks a great cup of water; and this is their ordinary kind of diet. But to conclude, the poorest gentleman in these parts lives more honourably than the greatest lords of Africa.  
As for their marriages, if any one intends to take a wife, whenas the father hath pro●●fed his daughter, (if she have a father) he draws his friends together, and entreats them to come to the Mosque, carrying with him two notaries, who writ the contract, and conditions of marriage, the husband & wife being present. They of mean quality use to give thirty ducats in ready money, a woman Negro slave of fifteen ducats price, a piece of cloth made of silk and flax of divers colours chequer wise, and certain other pieces of silk which women wear upon their heads. They use also to give them a pair of shoes well made, and two pair of buskins artificially wrought, divers works of silver, and many other little toys, as combs, perfumes, and very fine fans. The contract being ended, and both parties contented, the bridegroom carries all them to dinner with him that have assisted at his marriage, and he gives them of that fried flesh, whereof we have spoken, with baked meats and honey. The bride's father doth also make his feast, and invites his friends. If the father will set forth his daughter in any good sort, he may do it; but that proceeds from his own bounty, for that he is not bound to give any thing but silver: yet it were a shame for him to give no more. And at this day besides the thirty ducats, the father (or he that hath the care to make the marriage) doth use to spend two or three hundred ducats to furnish the new bride, as well with apparel, as with movables: but their manner is not to give any land. Their custom is to give to the married wife three gowns of fine cloth, and three of taffeta, damask, or satin, many smocks, and store of sheets wrought of either side, with bands of silk; and moreover, bolsters and pillows richly embroidered. They do also give eight quilts, whereof they keep four for show, upon cubbards in their chambers; they put two, which are of course wool, upon their beds, and they have other two of leather to beautify their c●●mberss.  
The father doth also give a Turkey carpet, about ten ells long, and three coverlets, ●●ereof the one side is of woollen and linen cloth, and the other side of wool. They cover their bed with one of these coverings, putting one pattabove, & another beneath, for that they are four ells long. They give them in like manner three of silk, which have fair works on the one side, and linen cloth on the other: and these coverings are full of cotton. These are like unto the quilts which we use in Europe. They give also another light quilt for Summer, with a little piece of fine cloth divided into parts, like flames, and full of other goodly works, bordered with gilt leather indented, at the which they hung tassels of silk of divers colours, and at every tassel there is a button of silk to fasten this cloth unto the wall. This is that the father adds unto the dowry of his daughter, yea sometimes more: so as many gentlemen are grown poor for that they have given too much unto their daughters.  
Some hold opinion, that in Africa the men give a certain dowry unto women, but they are abused. Whenas the bridegroom is to conduct his wife home unto his house, he first makes her enter into a lodge made of wood, eight square, and covered with goodly tapestry of silk, or cloth of gold, and she is carried by porters upon their heads, being accompanied by her friends and father, (if she hath any) and her husband, with physes, drums, and many trumpets, and torches; and the husband's friends go before with torches, and the fathers follow after, and all this troop doth commonly pass by the great place, near to the Mosque. When they are come unto the place, the bridegroom salutes the father, and the kinsmen of his bride, and then without any long stay, he goes into his lodging, and attends her in a chamber. The father, brother, and uncle, accompany her unto the door of the said chamber, and all together deliver her into the hands of her husband's mother: being entered into the chamber, the husbands sets his foot upon his wives, which done, they shut themselves in. In the mean time, they of the house prepare the feast, and there remains a woman behind the door, until the husband hath deflowered his wife: which done, she presents unto him a bloody cloth, with the which she goes crying with a loud voice, That the bride was a maid. The husband's kinsmen give her meat, and afterwards she goes with some others unto the bride's mother's house, who also makes her very good cheer. If happily the new bride be not found a virgin, the husband returns her to her kinsfolks, which is a great disgrace for them, and the guests departed without any feast. They make three feasts; the first, the night they bring home the bride; the second, the night after, to the which they invite none but women; and the third is made the seventh day after the marriage. The father doth commonly sand on that day goodly presents to the bridegrooms lodging, the which, for the most part, are comfitures, and whole sheep. Whenas the husband goes out of his lodging, which is after seven days, he buys a certain quantity of fish, and carries it home. They hold this for a good sign, and it is an ancient custom. They do also make two banquets at their father's house, the one the day before his daughter's marriage, to the which inviting all his friends, he makes them the best cheer he can, and entertains them with sports and dancing, the best part of the night. The day after, the women which use to attire the bride, come, and trim up her hair, putting vermilion upon her cheeks, and a certain black colour upon her hands and feet. But this tincture lasts little; and the second feast is made that day, and they set the maiden upon a scaffold, to the end that every man may see her. Then they feast them that have attired her; and whenas the wife is brought unto her lodging, all her husband's nearest friends sand her certain great vessels full of bread fried with oil, and some mixed with honey, and whole sheep roasted; and the bridegroom inviting many persons, divides these presents to the company. In their dancings, which continued all night, they have players of instruments, and singers which make a pleasant consort. They dance but one at a time, and when he hath ended his dance, he draws a piece of money out of his mouth, and casts it upon the tapestry, whereas the musicans and singers are: If any friend will do honour to him that danceth, he causeth him to stay upon his knee, than he covers all his face with money, which the singers take presently away.  
The women dance a part, having women for their musicans and singers. They ●●serue this custom whenas, a maid marries with her virginity, but if any one hath 〈◊〉 formerly married, the marriage is celebrated with less solemnity; and they give them to eat, beef, mutton, and boiled hens: but they mingle therewith divers sauces, setting twelve dishes in a great round bowl of wood, and this feast is made for ten or twelve. This is the manner of gentlemen, and merchants: but the common people use a certain kind of pottage made of found bread, which they mingle with the broth of flesh cut in great slices, all this they put in a great vessel with the pottage, and they eat it without spoons, being ten about this vessel.  
They also make a feast on the day of the circumcision of a male child, which is the seventh day after his birth; at what time the father having called the Barber, and invited his friends, he gives them a supper, after which, every one of the guests gives a present unto the Barber, some a ducat, some two, some more, some less, according to the quality of the person, and one after another lays the silver upon the face of the Barber's child, and the child names the person, and thanks him. After this, the Barber circumciseth the infant, and then they dance, and spend the time as hath been said: but the joy is not great for a daughter.  
They have in Fez some remainders of certain feasts left by the Christians. They have a custom, upon the day of the Nativity of our Saviour, to eat a certain pottage made with seven several sorts of herbs; and they seethe all kind of pulses whole, as beans, pease, and such like, the which they eat that night, as a delicate meat. And on the first day of the new year, the children go masked to gentlemen's houses, singing certain childish songs. Upon S. john Baptist's day, they make great bonfires of straw in all the streets. Whenas an infant's teeth gins to put forth, the parents make a feast for other children. They have many other customs and means to take their divinations, the which are yet observed in some places of Italy.  
Whenas the husband, father, mother, or brother of any woman dies, the women gather together, and leaving their ordinary apparel, they cover themselves with course sacks, than they take the soot of their pots, and rub their faces, and they have before them those wicked men which go attired like women, who carry certain square drums, which they found, and then they sing pitiful verses in praise of the dead, and at the end of every verse, the women cry out with a loud voice, beating their breasts and cheeks until the blood come abundantly, and they pull off their hair, crying and weeping continually. This continues seven days, after which they are at rest forty days, which being expired, they renew their complaints for three days. This is the use of the common people: but gentlemen mourn after a more modest manner, and beaten not themselves. Old men come to comfort them, and all their nearest kinsmen sand them presents of something that is good to eat, for it is not their custom to dress any meat in a dead man's house whilst the body is within it, and women do not accompany the course, were he their father or brother.  
There are many in Fez which take delight to feed pigeons, and they are very fair, and of divers colours. They keep them upon the tops of their houses in certain cages, made like Apothecary's boxes, the which they open twice a day, that is, once in the morning, & once at night, taking great delight to see them fly, and that pigeon which maintains her flight longest, is of greatest price, for that many times the pigeons being mingled together, they fall many times to quarrel. There are some that with a little net fastened to a long cane, being upon the top of their houses, take as many pigeons as pass that way.  
As for play, men of quality use none but chess. They have other games, but they are gross, and none but the common people play at them. At certain seasons of the year, the young men meet together, and they of one quarter encounter another with staves, and sometimes both parties grow into choler, and fall to arms; so as many are slain upon the place, especially at those feasts, whenas the young men meet without the town, and when their encounter is ended, they cast stones one at another; so as sometimes the Captain of the watch cannot make them give over, but is forced to apprehended some, who are put into prison, and whipped about the town. In the night many disordered lewd men go out of the town armed, and run about the gardens and fields; if by chance they meet with the like people of the enemy's quarter, they begin a cruel combat, but many times they are severely punished.  
There are very many poets which make verses in their vulgar tongue upon divers subjects, but especially of love: some describe the love they bear to women, and others how they affect children, and many times they blush not to name them whom they love. These poets do every year make verses in the praise of Mahomet, upon the day of his birth, who meeting in the morning in one place go up into a pulpit, where one after another recites his song in the pre●ence of much people: then he that is adjudged to have made the best verses, is declared and held for prince of poets all that year. But in the time of the kings of the house of Marin, the king invited all the learned men of the town, into his palace, where making a solemn feast to all the good poets, he ordained that every one should recite his song in the praise of Mahomet in his presence, and of his whole court; the which was done upon a high scaffold, and according to the judgement of some that were learned in that art, the king gave to him that was held to be the best Poet one hundred ducats, a woman slave, a horse, and the cloak he then aware. And as for the rest, he gave to every one fifty ducats; so as they all went away with some recompense.  
But touching children, they have masters which teach them to read and writ, not in any book, but in great tables. The lesson they learn is every day an article of the Koran, which having ended in two or three years, they begin again, yea they repeat it still, until the child hath learned all by heart; most commonly they spend seven or eight years in this study. After this, the masters teach them a little Orthography with the grammar in colleges, and also other sciences, and these masters have a small pension. But whenas the child is come to certain places of the Koran, the father is bound to give him a certain present. Having learned the whole Koran, the father makes a great feast to all the scholars, and the son is attired as if he were page to some great lord, and is mounted upon a goodly ho●se of great price, which the Governor of the town is bound to lend him, with the furniture: the other scholars accompany him also on horseback unto the father's house, where they enter singing many songs to the praise of Mahomet: after which they feast these children, and all the father's friends, every one of which gives something to the master, and the child gives him a new suit of clothes. These children do also make a feast at the birth of Mahomet, and their fathers are bound to sand a torch unto the college, so as every scholar hath one, whereof some weigh thirty pounds. These torches are artificially made, and they are wreathed about with sloures of wax.  
They burn from the break of day until Sun rising. The Master is accustomed to have certain singers, who commonly sing the praises of Mahomet, and when the Sun ariseth, the feast is ended. This is the greatest profit that the Masters have, for that sometimes they cell the wax for one hundred ducats, and there is not any one but pays a certain rent, for that the colleges are made of alms, and given by divers persons for their souls. The first-fruits and flowers of torches are the presents which they giu● to singing men and children: and the scholars in colleges have two days of vacation every week.  
There are three sorts of Diviners or Soothsayers: the first is of Soothsayers which divine by art of Geomancy, making their figures: the second is of some others which putting water into a vessel of glass and a drop of oil thereunto, it becomes clear and transaparent like a looking-glass: they say, that they see great troops of devils like unto a great army that is ready to camp, and that of these, there are some which go by water, and others by land. Whenas the Southsaier sees them quiet, he demands the things which he desires to know, and the devils answer him by signs of the hand, or of the eye. Sometimes they put the vessel into the hands of a child of eight or nine years old, and they ask him if he hath seen such, and such a devil, and the child who is simple answers yea; so as many fools give so great credit to these abusers, as they spend great sums therein: the third kind is of women, who make the people believe that they have friendship with certain spirits of divers sorts, for that some are called read devils, others white, and some black, and when they will divine at the request of any one, they perfume themselves with certain scents, and then (as they say) the devil which they call enters into them; by reason whereof they presently change their voice, feigning, that it is the devil that speaks within them. The party that comes to know any thing, demands what he lifts of the spirit, with great reverence and humility, and having received his answer, he leaves a present for the devil, and so departs. But men of judgement and experience call these women Sahacut, that is to say, Rubbers or Ticklers, for they have that cursed custom to tickle one another like unto the Tribades; for whenas any fair women come among them, they fall in love with them, as a young man doth with a maiden, and for their hire they require to lie with them, wherein they are so subtle, as many filly women thinking to please the spirit consent unto it.  
There are also many which taking pleasure in this sport, put themselves into their company; so as counterfeiting themselves sick, they sand for one of these women, and many times the foolish husband doth the message: presently they discover their desires unto these diviners, who inform the husband that a spirit is entered into his wives body, and that if he love her health, he must suffer her to be of the number of the diviners, and to practise secretly with them: the husband believes what they say, and making a stately feast, he than suffers her to go where she pleaseth. But some one conjures the spirit out of his wives body with a cudgel: and some feigning to be possessed, deceive these witches, as they have abused their wives.  
There is another sort of Soothsayers, which they call Muhahazzimin, that is to say, enchanters. These are held able to free one that is possessed, not for any reason, but for that sometimes it succeeds, and if they fail, they say the devil is faithless, or that it is a celestial spirit. Their manner of conjuring is to make certain characters and circles, then certain marks upon the hand or forehead of the possessed, and they perfume him with certain perfumes: after which they make the charm, and demand of the spirit how he entered into that body, and by whose means, and what his name is, and in the end, they command him to departed. There are others who work by a rule called Zairagia, that is to say, Cabal: but they draw not their operations from the scripture, for that their knowledge is held to be natural. And without doubt, they are able to give an infallible answer of things that are demanded: but this rule is wonderful difficult, for that he that will make profession thereof, must be a perfect Arithmetician, and ginger. They make many circle's one within another. In the first, they frame a Cross, upon the extremities whereof, they make the four parts of the world. Within the Cross, that is to say, where the two pieces of wood join, they mark the two poles, and without the first circle, the four elements. Afterwards, they divide this circle into four parts, & the circle following, into as many, and then they subdivide every part into seven, and they make in either of them great Arabian Characters, to the number of seven or eight and twenty for every element. In another circle they make the seven planets, in another the twelve signs; in another, the twelve months of the year; in another, the eight and twenty houses or mansions of the Moon; in another, the 365 days of the year; and without that, the four principal winds. Then they, take one letter of the things demanded, and they multiply it with all the things above mentioned, until they found the number which the character bears. Afterwards, they divide it after a certain manner, than they put it into parts, according to the character, until that after the multiplication and division, they found what character agrees with this number that remains; and they do with this character, as they did with the first, and so of the rest, until they have raised 28 characters. Then they compound a word, and of this word a sentence, which is the answer to the demand; and it hath always the number of the first sort of Arabian verses, which they call Ethavila. This verse, which riseth from the foresaid characters, carries the true answer, and first of all it shows the thing demanded, and then the answer unto the demand. These men are never deceived, and their Cabal is admirable. There are divers other learned men, which take the surname of Sages and moral philosophers, and they keep certain laws, besides those Mahomet hath made: These men are held by some for the true observers of the law, and by some, otherwise: but the people hold them for Saints, and yet they will have many things allowed which are forbidden by the law of Mahomet. It is not lawful by this law to sing any love song by the rule of music. There are certain men in Fez, called Elcanesin, who busy themselves to seek for treasures, which they believe lie buried in the foundations of ancient ruins. These foolish men go out of the town, and enter into many caves and deep places under ground, to found these treasures, believing confidently, that whenas the Romans lost the dominion of Africa, and fled to the province of Betica in Spain, they buried many precious things about that place which they could not carry with them, and that they made enchantments, by reason whereof, these enchanters hunt after these treasures. Some say, that they have seen gold or silver in such a place, but they could not draw it up, for that they had not the enchantments, nor fit perfumes; so as digging under the ground, upon this vain belief, they many times ruin houses and sepulchers; and sometimes they are led ten or twelve days journey from Fez; and they are so confident in this opinion, as having books which make mention of certain mountains and places where there are treasures, they keep them as Oracles. Fez hath no want of Alchemists, which are the filthiest men of all the town, and stink most, by reason of the sulphur, and other vild smells which are ordinary unto them. Most commonly many of them meet in the evening in the great Temple, whereas they dispute of their fantastical imaginations. They have many books of this art, composed by eloquent men, whereof the first is Geber, the which we have in Latin, who was one hundred years after Mahomet, and they say he was a Graecian Renegado. They have another Author, called Attrogrehi, Secretary to the soldan of Bagadet, who hath made another great work: And there is another composed by Canticles, containing all the articles of this art, and the Author was called Mugairiti, borne at Granado, and his book was commented on by a Mamalu of Damas', a very learned man in that art; but the commentary is more obscure than the text. There are two sorts or kinds of Alchemists; whereof one part seek the Elixir, that is to say, the matter which gives colour to all metals; and the others are given to found out the multiplication of the quantity of metals, mingled one with another.  
There are also many charmers which stand singing in Market places, and playing upon certain drums, violons, haps, and other instruments, and these cell certain briefs unto the ignorant people, the which are good, as they say, against divers infirmities. There is another sort of base men, which be all men of one family, and these go up and down the town, making apes to dance, carrying many Serpents about their necks & arms. They make certain figures of Geomancy, and tell women their fortune: And they lead stallions with them to cover mares when they are required.  
The inhabitants of ●his town are proud, and do not much affect strangers: but the noblemen and gentlemen are the most arrogant and insupportable people in the world; so as few men frequent them, nor the Doctors and judges in like manner, who, to keep their reputations, will not converse with any.   

¶ The Riches.  
THey that live in these countries have all things necessary for life, for what wants in one country, abounds in another, so as they may live without strangers; and if a peace were well settled, as they have war upon every occasion, it is most certain that this empire would be most happy, and not envy the commodities of any other. In a manner, in all their mountains they feed great store of cattles, and they have plenty of corn; their plains yield so much corn and fruit, as they do furnish foreign provinces, namely with Citrons, Oranges, Sugar, and Olives. Moreover, they transport into foreign countries their Chamlets, Barbary skins, Cotton cloth, and Sugar, whereof they make great commodity.  
But to speak of the revenues and riches of the Emperor of Morocco, he is master of all his subjects goods, yea and of their persons, for that no men dares impugn any charges or impositions that he lays upon them: yet the usurpation of the empire, the fear of an accident like unto that of Muley Cheq, and the continual wavering of affairs, are the cause why this man seeks to govern his subjects with mildness, and to settle in them a desire to live always under his command.  
He draws from his subjects that are liable unto taxes, the tenths and first first-fruits of cattles and fruit. It is true, that touching the tenths, he takes but one for twenty; and if there be one hundred and more, he hath never but two. He hath for every acre of ground, five parts of a ducat; 
It seems they divide the ducat into ten parts.  and the other five for every fire, and as much for all that have past the age of fifteen years, be they males or females; and at need he exacts a greater sum. And to the end the people may pay more willingly that which is imposed, he always demands a moiety more than he shall exact; for that by this means, his subjects think they have a favour done them, when they are not forced to pay all. It is true, that in the mountains there live people which are not under command, whom they cannot force to pay any thing, by reason of the strong situation of the places where they live; & they only receive the tenths of their first-fruits and harvest, the which they pay that they may have leave to descend into the plains. Besides these revenues, this monarch hath all the customs and imposts of Fez, and other towns, for that the citizens of Fez pay two in the hundred for all that enters, and strangers ten. Moreover, he hath the revenues of mills, and of many other things, which amount to a great sum: As for the mills, he hath almost three pence for every great bushel of corn that is ground in Fez, in which there are above four hundred mills. The Mosque of Carwen had eighty thousand crowns yearly revenues, and the Colleges and Hospitals of Fez had many thousands of crowns in rents, all which the king hath at this day: And moreover, he is heir to all the Governors, and to all such as he hath given pension, and whenas they die, he takes possession of their horses, arms, apparel, and in a word, of all their goods. It is true, that if any one leave sons fit to serve in the wars, he gives them the same pension which the father had. But if the childen be little, he entertains the sons until they be able to bear arms, and the daughters till they be fit for marriage: and to have the goods of rich men, he gives them some government, or some charge, with a pension: wherefore, every man seeks to hide his wealth when he dies, to the end the king may not seize thereon, or retires from court out of the king's sight.   

¶ The Forces.  
THe Emperor of Morocco hath no forts of importance, but upon the seashore, where he hath Cape d' Aguero, Larach, and Tetuan; for he grounds the force of his Estate (as the Turk and Persian doth) in his men of war, and especially in his horsemen: this is the reason why he hath no great store of artillery; yet he hath some good quantity, which his predecessors have taken from the Portugals, and others, at Fez, Morocco, Tarudant, and in the foresaid ports, and every Emperor doth cast new when need requires, for which he hath expert masters. He hath an Arsenal full of munition at Morocco, whereas they commonly make every month 46 quintals of powder, with many harguebuzes.  
In the year 1569, fire took his Arsenal with such fury, as a great part of the town was ruined. As for his men of war, they are of divers sorts: the first is of 2700 horse, and 2000 harquebusiers, whereof part remain at Fez, and part at Morocco, but most in the latter place, where he makes his abode, and these are in a manner all for his guard: the second, is a battalion of 6000 horse, all gentlemen of note. These show themselves bravely mounted upon horses richly furnished, with their arms, and it is a gallant thing to see them, as well for the divers colours of their garments, as for the richness of their arms; for that they have store of gold, silver, pearl, and precious stones, and all that may content the eyes, and please the curiosity of them that behold them. These (besides the provision of corn, oats, oil, butter, and flesh, for them, their wives, and children) receive betwixt seventy and a hundred ounces of silver.  
The third kind of horsemen is his Timarets; for that the Emperor of Morocco doth use to give unto his sons, brethren, and other men of mark and authority among the people of Africa, as also to the princes of the Arabians, and to the greatest men among them, the profits of lands. These manure the ground, and reap the first-fruits, the which they keep for the entertainment of the horsemen: and the governors draw rice, oats, oil, butter, sheep, foul, and silver, and they distribute all things monthly unto the soldiers according to the quality of the persons. They give them moreover both woollen and linen cloth, silk to clothe them, arms, and horses, with the which they serve in the war, and if they die in fight, they give them other. Every one of these commanders strives to bring his men well clothed, well armed, and well mounted: and moreover these have betwixt four and twenty and thirty ounces of silver every year. The fourth sort of horsemen is of Arabians, who live continually in their Auares (so they call their colonies whereof every one doth consist of one or two hundred tents) divided under divers governors, to the end they may be ready upon all occasions. These serve on horsebake, but they are liker to thieves than soldiers. The fift kind of soldiers, is like unto the levies which Christian princes make, and herein the inhabitants of the towns and villages of the Empire are enrolled. It is true that the kings make small account of these, ●either do they arm them willingly for fear of revolts, unless it be in their wars against the Christians, for than they cannot stay them. And whereas they have in their law, that if a Mahometan kill a Christian, or is slain by him, he goes strait to Paradise; both men and women of all ages and all qualities run to the war, at the lest that they may die there, and by that means purchase heaven, according to their foolish opinion. And we found no less heat to our great loss in the Turks, especially for the defence of their sect. It seems they go unto a marriage, and not to the war, and they will scarce attend the day that is prescribed them. They hold them blessed and happy which die fight against their enemies, and those miserable and cowards which die in their house amidst the tears of children, and the lamentations of women.  
We may easily comprehend by that which hath been said, what number of men this prince may draw to field, but we shall judge better by experience. For Muley Abdala in the year 1562, besieged Magazan with two hundred thousand men, he filled up the ditch with a mountain of earth, and made the walls plain with his artillery: but for all this he was forced to abandon the enterprise by the valour of the Portugois, and by the loss he received by their mines. Moreover this prince hath this discommodity, that he cannot continued a great war above two or three months; for that the soldiers live only upon the provision of victual which they receive daily, and this provision cannot be easily conducted where it shall be needful for the wars; so as of necessity they are constrained to return home again unto their houses for victuals: and it is most certain that he which is not rich in silver cannot continued a long war. Muley Moluc, who defeated Don Sebastian king of Portugal, had about forty thousand horse, and four score thousand foot, besides Arabians and voluntaries: but some hold opinion, that he might have drawn together three score and ten thousand horse, and more foot than he had at that time.   

¶ The Government.  
ALthough it be a very difficult and hard thing to discourse of the government of an Estate which is always in combustion, and subject to continual changes, whereas one gets it by force to day, and another to morrow; so as there can be nothing but dissension and discord: yet I will as near as I can endeavour to relate what I have learned, and to show the manner of government of all these countries, I will come unto that of Fez, as it was when it flourished most, and as it is now for the most part; entreating the reader to consider that amidst so many confusions, it is impossible to observe a politic government exactly.  
And for that it seems the reader is not well satisfied, whenas they discourse to him of an Estate whereas any one doth rule, if withal he doth not understand what he is that governs: I thought that I should give some contentment to such as had this expectation, if I did let them understand what family commands now in the realms of Morocco and Fez, and by what means it came unto this Empire. There was an Alfaqui or high Priest of Mahomet's law, borne at Tigumedet a town in the province of Dara, a subtle and an ambitious man, and well instructed in the sciences whereunto the Mahometans give themselves. This man whom they called Mahomet and Benamet, and who called himself Xerif, began to be in some reputation about the year 1508: he said, that he was issued from the race of Mahomet, and he propounded in his mind (seeing the division of the Estates of Africa, where the Portugalls were then very powerful) to make himself Master of Mauritania Tingitana. To this end, he first sent his three sons, Abdala, Hamet, and Mahomet in pilgrimage to Mecca, and to Medina, to visit and honour the Sepulchre of Mahomet their false Prophet. These young men made their voyage with such reputation of sanctity and religion, as at their return, the people went to meet them, kissed their garments, and honoured them as holy men. These abusers feigning to be drawn to some high contemplation, went through the country, sighing or calling Ala or God, with cries interrupted with sighs and groans, living only of alms. The father having received them into his house with unspeakable joy, and being loathe to suffer the applause and credit which they had gotten by this pilgrimage to grow cold, sent Hamet and Mahomet to Fez, where having been very courteously received by the king, the one of them become reader of the Amorodache, a famous college in that town, and the younger was schoolmaster to the king's children. Finding themselves in good grace with the king, and well respected by the people; being thrust on by their father, taking for their subject the losses, which the Arabians did unto them of their law under the Portugals ensigns, under which they did fight, being entertained by them: they demanded leave of the king to display a banner against the Christians, promising him (as it fell out in effect) that they would easily draw the Moors, which followed the Portugals, unto them, and by that means assure the provinces of Suz, He, Ducale, Morocco, and others which were continually molested by the Portugals.  
Muley Nazzer the king's brother opposed himself against this proposition and demand, saying, that if the brethren, under pretext of religion, made any progress with their armies, it would be impossible to stay them, and to make them lay them down as before; for that arms make men hardy, victories insolent, and being followed by the people, they grow desirous of innovations. But the king, who had a great opinion of their holiness, making little regard of his brother's reasons, gave them a standard, a copper drum, and twenty horses to accompany them, and withal, letters of recommendation to the Arabians, and to the lords and towns of Barbary.  
With these beginnings, much people flocking unto them at the bruit of their enterprise, they entered the country of Ducale, and came unto the cape of Aguero, which was then held by the Portugals, and seeing themselves well followed, and in good esteem, they required the people (who lived for the most in liberty, and joined with whom they liked best) that seeing they made war against the Christians for the law of Mahomet, to assist them, giving them the tenths due unto God: the which was presently granted by the people of Dara, and by this means by little and little they seized upon Tarudant, (whereof their father was made Governor) and of Suz, He, Ducale, and the neighbour places. They stayed first at Tednest, and afterwards at Tesarota, and defeated Lope Barriga, a famous Captain of the Portugals, in fight: but they lost their eldest brother, then entering with many good words into the town of Morocco, they poisoned the king, and Hamet Xerif called himself king of Morocco in his place, and seized upon the realm.  
In the mean time, the Arabians of Ducale and Xarque came to arms against them of Garbie, either party assuring himself of the Xerifes favour: but they seeing many slain of either side, turned their forces against these two enemies, and enriched themselves with their spoils. They had before sent unto the king of Fez, the fift part of all their booty; but after this victory, making little account of it, they only ●●nt him six horses, and six weak camels; whereat the king being moved, he sent to demand of them the fist part of their spoils, and the tribute which the king of Morocco paid him, threatening, if they refused it, to make war against them. But in the meantime, this king dying, Hamet his son, who had been disciple to the younger Xerif, was not only pacified, but also confirmed Hamet Xerif in the imperial dignity of the realm of Morocco, so as he made some acknowledgement to the kings of Fez, as sovereign princes. But on the other side, the Xerifes (whose power and reputation increased daily) whenas the time to pay the tribute was come, sent the king word, That being lawful successors to Mahomet, they were not bound to give him any tribute, and that they had more right to Africa than he: That if he would have them for friends, they would remain so, but if he sought to divert them from the war against the Christians, they neither wanted courage, nor power to defend themselves.  
The king incensed at this answer, proclaimed war presently against them, and went in person to besiege Morocco: but he was forced at the first to dislodge, and to raise the siege; then returning with eighteen thousand horse, among which were two thousand harquebuziers & crossebows, he was defeated by the Xerifs, at the passage of a river, they having but seven thousand horse, and one hundred and twenty harquebuziers. By the means of this victory, the Xerifs exacted tribute of this country; and passing Mount Atlas, they took Tasilet a town of importance, and partly by love, and partly by force, they brought under their obedience divers people of Numidia, and of the mountains. In the year 1536, the young Xerif, who called himself king of Suz, having levied a mighty army, and drawn many canons to field, whereof part he took from the king of Fez, and part were made by Christian Renegadoes, went to the enterprise of Cape d'Aguero, a place of great importance, held then by the Portugals, who had fortified it much, first at the charge of Lopez Seguere, and afterwards (finding the commodity of the situation) by Emanuel king of Portugal, the which he assailed valiantly In the end, fire falling into their munition of war within the town, and the soldiers who defended it, being amazed with this accident, the Xerif entered, and took most of them that were in garrison. With this victory, all Mount Atlas, the realm of Morocco, and the Arabians who had joined with the Portugal, yielded obedience to the Xerif; by reason whereof, john the third, king of Portugal, seeing that the charge did much exceed the profit, willingly abandoned the towns of Safin, Azamor, A●zi●la, and Alcazar, which he held upon the coast of Barbary.  
These prosperities were the cause of a great dissension betwixt the two brethren, and the event was, that the younger having obtained the victory in two battles against his elder, and taken him prisoner, he confined him to Tafilet: then turning his forces against the king of Fez, having taken him once, and set him at liberty, he had him the second time in his power, (for that he had broken his word) and at the same instant he made himself master of his Estate, and in the end he put him with his children to death. After this manner this empire came into the hands of them of this family, who command at this day, but with so many divisions and changes of fortune, as it is strange they are not tired with such combustions, or ruined with so many changes. Let us now see how these realms are governed.  
First, they know not what it is to do justice in the country of He, and especially in the mountains, and the gentlemen can hardly keep any order in the towns. In the country of Suz, the inhabitants of the town of Tedfy lived in former times at liberty, and they governed themselves after the manner of a Commonweal; but now the Emperor of Morocco hath his Chancery there. We must observe, that in the mountains of the province of Morocco, and in the country of Guzule, the inhabitants do seldom yield obedience freely unto their prince, and so in like manner in many other places.  
The king hath his Council in Morocco, and a chamber of justice, and in all the provinces and good towns he hath governors, who are entreated as hath been said. And for that the discourse of the government of the rest is of small moment, I will come unto that of Fez, to the train the king had, and to all that hath been observed most remarkable, the which will show the order they hold in these countries, and also in this princes Court.  
Among all the lords of Africa, they found not that ever any one was created king or prince by the election of the people; and by the law of Mahomet, no temporal lord can term himself lawful, but their high priests: But since the authority of their high priests decayed, all the leaders of people which lived in deserts, began to come into the inhabited countries, and by force of arms made divers lords, against the law of Mahomet, and against their Bishops, as it happened in the East, whereas the Turks, Tartarians, and others, coming from the same countries, seized upon their lands that were the weaker. Thus the families of Lontuna and Marin reigned in Africa. It is true, that they of Lon●nna came to secure the people of the West. Wherefore, for this cause, they make no lords by succession, nor by the election of the people, nor of great men, nor by the General of the army; but every prince before his death makes the greatest men of his court to promise', that after his decease they will created his son or brother for their head: yet many times they break their oath, for that most commonly they choose him whom they most affect, for their lord. After this manner, they did most commonly created the king of Fez, who presenty made one of the chief men of his realm his great Councillor, assigning unto him a third of the revenues of his realm. After which, he did choose a Secretary, who supplied the place of Treasurer, and Lord Steward of his household. He made captains of the cavalry, which were ordained for the guard of the realm, and these remained most commonly in field. He appointed a governor in every town, which enjoyed the revenues of the town, and was bound to entertain a certain number of horses, which should be ready at need, and whensoever he should levy an army. He ordained also certain Commissaries over the people that lived in the mountains, and for the Arabians that were his subjects. These Commissaries did administer justice, according to the diversity of the laws of those people. They had also charge to exact the rents, and to keep an account of the ordinary and extraordinary payments. Then they made certain Barons, which in their language they call by a word which signifies as much as Guardians, every one of which had a castle, or one or two villages, from the which they drew a certain revenue to live, and to maintain their degrees, and to be able to accompany the king in his armies. He also entertained light horsemen at his charge, whenas the king kept the field; but in time of peace, he gave them corn, butter, and flesh to salt for the whole year, but little silver. It is true that he gave them a garment every year; and these had no care of their horses, neither within the town, nor without, for that the king did furnish them with all things; and all the grooms of his stable were Christians slaves, who carried great irons about their legs: but whenas the army marched they were mounted upon the cammells which carried the baggage. He had another Commissary over the cammells, who divided the fields to them that fed them, & made provision of such cammells as the king should need: and every camel keeper held two ready to lad when they should be commanded.  
He had also a purveyor whose charge was to furnish, keep, and distribute the victuals, as well for the king, as for his army: and he had ten or twelve great pavilions, where he kept the said victuals, employing cammells continually to have new brought, lest the army should want. Under him were the officers of the kitchen. Then there was a master of the stable, who had charge of all the king's horses, mules, and cammells, and the purveyor did furnish him with all things necessary. Moreover there was a Commissary for corn, whose charge was to see barley and other necessary things brought for the feeeding of the said cattle: and this Commissary had clerks to writ what corn wap distributed, and to give an account to the lord Steward. There was also a Captain of fifty horse, who were as posts, and they made the imposition by commandment from the Secretary, in the king's name. They had another Captain, who was the chief of a secret guard, and he had authority to command in the king's name, the Officers which made executions and confiscations. He had power to take the greatest persons of the realm, and put them into prison, and to use the rigour of justice, if the king commanded him.  
The king had near unto his person a Chancellor, who kept his seals, and wrat such letters as were needful, and sealed them. He had a great number of footmen, which had a Captain, who received them, put them away, and gave them wages according to their sufficiencies: and whenas the king gave audience, this captain was always present. He had also a Captain of the baggage, whose office was to see the tents carried, whereas the kings light horsemen lodged: and you must understand that the king's tents were carried upon mules, and those of the soldiers by cammells. He had a troop of men which carried the standards folded up, but there was one who marched always before the army with an ensign displayed. All these did serve as guides, and knew the ways and passages of woods and rivers. He had a great number of drummers, who had drums of copper, made like a great platter, broad above, and narrow beneath, covered with skins, and they carried them upon their horses with pack saddles; but they had right against their drum a certain counterpoise, for that it is very weighty: these horses are the best and swiftest that can be found, for that it is a great dishonour among them to lose a drum: and these drums make so great a noise, as they are heard fa●●e off, being beaten with the sinews of a bull. The king did not entertain his trumpeters at his own charge, but they of Fez were bound to defray a certain number, and these were as well employed when the king did eat, as in his armies.  
He had a Master of the ceremonies, who was always at the king's feet whenas he called a Council, or gave audience, appointing places, and making them speak one after another according to their ranks and dignities. The king's house was full of women slaves Negroes, who served in the queen's chamber: and there were also some Christian slaves, which for the most part were Spaniards and Portugals: and all these women were under the guard of certain eunuchs that were Negro sl●ues.  
Whenas the king would go to any place, the Master of the ceremonies did first advertise the posts and messengers, and these made it known to the king's kinsmen, to the captains, guards, and other horsemen, all which came unto a place without the palace, and into the streets near adjoining. Whenas the king came out of his palace, the said posts appointed after what manner they should march. The ensign bearers went first, than followed the drums, and after them the Master of the querrie or stable, with his officers and household: then came the purveyor with his people, the guards, master of the ceremonies, the king's secretaries, the treasurer, judge, and captain of the army: the king marched after them with his great councillor, and some prince; and there were always some officers who marched before the king, whereof one carried his sword, another his target, and the third his bow. His footmen went about him, whereof one carried his partuisan, and another the cover of his saddle, with a horse collar, and whenas the king did light, they covered his saddle, and put the collar over the horse bridle to hold him thereby. The king was followed by him who is the Captain of his foot men, then by the eunuchs, his household, light horsemen, and in the end by the crossbow men and harquebusiers.  
Whenas the king kept the field, they did first of all set up a great tent in the midst of the army for him, the which was made like the walls of some Castle with battlements, (such as I have seen some great noblemen have in strangers armies) and square of every side. This tent had four gates, and either of them had a guard the which were eunuchs. About his tent were the lodgings of his officers, and of such courtiers as he favoured most, and about them tents for his guards, the which are made of goat's skins like unto them of the Arabians. Almost in the midst was the king's larder, kitchen, and buttery, and near unto it were the pavilions where the light horsemen lodged; all which did commonly eat in the king's buttery. Near unto it were the stables, the which were certain places covered for horses, and without it were the muletors for the king's baggage, and there were also shops for butchers. The merchants and tradesmen which came unto the army, lodged by the muletors; so as the whole camp was as it were a town, for that the guards tents did serve in steed of walls, for that they were so joined one unto another, as they could not enter into their lodgings but by certain passages: and they kept good guard by night about the king's tent; yet these guards were but base persons, and they were men which never carried arms. There were some in like manner about the stables; but by reason of the idleness and baseness of these guards, they did not only steal away the horses, but they also found some of their enemies come into the tent where the king was to kill him. The king was in a manner all the year in field, as well to defend his realm, as to maintain the Arabians his subjects in peace. We have spoken sufficiently of the king Fez, and of his court; let us now see how other things were governed.  
First of all in Fez, there were customs imposed, for that cloth was sold as it were at an outcry, and they that had the charge, did first carry it unto the customers to seal, than they went and cried it among the merchants; and there were about sixty criers of this kind.  
The Apothecaries had a quarter which was shut up of both sides with two very fair gates, and they entertained guards at their own proper costs and charges, who went about in the night with lanterns, dogs, and arms. There were people which made the measures of corn, which the Council added, taking a double of every one. Within the town there are only certain petty Officers and Magistrates, whose charge is to do justicst to every man. There was a Governor both for civil and criminal causes, a judge which took knowledge of that which concerned the laws of the books of Mahomet, and another judge, who was as it were Lieutenant to the first, and decided matters which did belong to marriage: he had authority to examine witnesses, and did justice to all men. There was an Advocate, with whom they did consult touching the law, and before whom they did appeal from the judges sentences, either when they had been deceived, or when they had given sentence upon the authority of some judge that was not so excellent. The Governor did draw great sums from condemnations, and in a manner all their criminal punishment was whipping in the governors presence, and they gave one hundred or two hundred stripes. After this the Executioner put a chain about the offenders neck, and led him in that manner throughout the town, all naked except his privy parts, publishing the fact which he had committed, and many times they led many thus chained together. The Governor had a ducat and a half of every offendor, as also of all those which entered into the prison: he had also something given him by certain merchants and artisans appointed to that end. The judges of the canon law, or of the law of Mahomet, had no wages, for that it was defended by his law to give any thing unto a judge: but they lived of other fees or recompenses, as of lectures, or the Priesthood of some Mosque. Their Proctors and Advocates were for the most part full of ignorance. The judges had a certain place whereas they did imprison debtors, and others, for matters of small importance. There were four captains of the watch within the town, who went up and down two hours when night was come, and these had no wages, but some small matter from them they took, the which was taken out of the fine wherein they were condemned: but either of them might keep a Tavern, and be a bawd. The Governor of the town had neither judge nor Register, but gave sentence according to his will and pleasure. There was but one man that did farm the customs and imposts, who paid every day unto the king's chamber thirty ducats, and he had guards and scribes at every gate, whereas matters of small price paid their duties; and the rest were conducted by one of the guard to the Custom house, and there was certain money appointed for the scribes and guards, according to the quantity of the things which entered: sometimes these guards went out of the town to meet with the Mulitors, lest they should hide something; which if they did, they afterwards paid double custom, and they commonly paid two ducats in the hundred: yet they paid not anything for the corn, wood, oxen, and fowl, that were brought in, and they had not been accustomed to pay any thing at the gate for sheep, but only in the butchery.  
The Governor, who was chief of the Consuls, had commonly twelve sergeant, and went often on horseback about the town, to view the bread, and to try the butcher's weights, and to see what they sold. He caused the bread to be weighed, and if he found it not just, he pulled it in pieces, and gave him that stood to ●ell it many blows upon his neck with his fist, yea sometime he caused him to be whipped, if he found it too light.  
The king hath given this office for these hundred years to gentlemen which have demanded it: but in former times they gave it only to learned men who were much esteemed for their wisdom. There were many places whereas the Governor was accustomed to give audience, and to do justice and equity. There is so great a prison in Fez, as it is able to contain three thousand persons, if not above; and there is not any one private, for that it is not the manner of Fez to put any prisoner a part, or into a close prison. This is all that I have learned touching the realms of Fez and Morocco; and concerning that which I have said was practised in Fez, it is most certain that the Emperor of Morocco doth at this day in a manner keep the same orders, as well in his Court, as elsewhere.   

¶ The Religion.  
ALl the inhabitants of these realms are Mahometans, except the slaves, of whom we have made mention in the end of this discourse. But there are many sects in the law of Mahomet, which have their heads and doctors to defend them: for there are many which have commented upon the Koran, and do not directly allow of that which it hath prescribed, but proceed farther, and contradict it in many things.  
Among others, there is one who began some eighty years after Mahomet, and the first and most famous Author was called Elhes●mbnu Abilhasen of the town of Basra, who gave certain precepts to his disciples, but left nothing in writing. A hundred years after, there was another, a sufficient man in that matter, called Elharit Ibnu Esed, of the town of Bagadet, who writ a goodly work general to all his disciples. Afterwards this sect was condemned by the Bishops of their law, and all those that should observe the rules of this doctor, and maintain his Maxims, were declared heretics in the law of Mahomet. The same sect was revived some eighty years after by another sufficient man, who was followed by many disciples, and preached his doctrine publicly, so as all Lawyers and high Priests condemned him to death, with all his disciples, and concluded to have all their heads cut off. The which the doctor understanding, he presently wrote a letter to their high Priests, entreating them to do him so much favour as to suffer him to dispute with their Lawyers, offering to die if they did vanquish him, and requiring if he did show his doctrine to be better than theirs, that so many poor innocents might not perish upon a false slander. The high Priests found his request just, and granted his demand. This learned man being come to dispute, did easily confute all the Lawyers; so as the great Mofti weeping, become of this sect, and favoured it whilst he lived, causing Colleges to be built, and other places, for them that were of the same belief and opinion.  
This sect continued about two hundred years, until that Malicsach, an Emperor of the Turkish race, came out of Asia, who persecuted this sect: so as some fled to Chair, and others into Arabia, and they remained twenty years in this estate, unto the reign of Caselhab, nephew to Malicsach, whose Councillor called Nidam Elmule, a man of great spirit, who was of this sect, revived it again, and did so strengthen it, as by the means of a very learned man, called Elgazzuli, who composed a great volume, divided into seven Books, reconciled the Lawyers with these Sectaries, in such sort, as the Lawyers had the title of Doctors, and preservers of the law of the Prophet; and these were called Reformers of the same law.  
This union continued until that Bagadet was ruined by the Tartarians, which happened the 656 year of the Egyra or Era of Mahomet: but this division did not in any sort hurt it, for that Afrique and Asia were full of people which followed this doctrine. At that time, they admitted none into this sect, but men learned in all the sciences, but especially which understood the law well, that they might defend it against the adverse party. But for some hundreds of years, the ignorant have sought to enter, saying, that there was not any need of learning, seeing the holy spirit gives knowledge of the truth to them that have pure and clean hearts; to prove the which, they produce certain weak reasons. Whereupon, leaving as well the superfluous as necessary commandments of the order, they only observe the same thing that the Legists, touching offices; but otherwise they take all the pleasures which they think are allowed in their sect, for they make many feasts, they dance often, and sing many amorous songs. Sometimes there are some among them who tearing their garments according to the subject of the verses which they sing, and according to their own fantasies, say, that they are inflamed with the fire of divine love, whenas in truth they are full gorged with meat; for that every one of them eats more meat than would suffice three men: or else they pour forth these cries mixed with tears, for the love they bear to certain young men which have no beards; for many times it falls out that some gentleman invites one of the chief of these masters, with his disciples, to his marriage, who say prayers, and sing divine songs in the beginning of the feast; but in the end, the eldest will begin to tear his garments; and if it happens that any of them falls in dancing, having made good cheer, he is presently taken up by one of his young disciples, whom he kisseth often lasciviously, whilst he is doing this office.  
Wherefore at Fez they say in a common proverb of this vice: That it is the feast of Pilgrims, meaning thereby, that after the banquet every one of these children becomes spouse to his master, and they whom they call Pilgrims may not marry.  
Amid these sects, there are some orders which the doctors of both opinions hold for heretics, for that they not only differ from the rest in law, but also in faith.  
There are some which hold for certain that man may purchase to himself a divine and Angelical nature, by the means of his good works, feasts, and abstinence; for that they say fasting cleanseth the heart and understanding of man; so as he cannot sin, although he had a will: but he must first pass fifty degrees of discipline; and although he sinneth before he hath passed the fiftieth degree, yet God imputes no more any sin unto him. Without doubt they use strange abstinence in the beginning, but afterwards they take all the delights in the world.  
There is another strict rule made by a learned and eloquent man called Essehravard of Sehravard a town in Corasan. There is another author called Ibnul Farid, who put all his doctrine into goodly verses, the which notwithstanding are full of allegories, and it seems they treat of nothing but love. For this cause one called Elfargani commented upon his work, and made a rule, and the degrees they are to pass. He was so good a Poet, as they of this sect sing no other verses in their feasts, for that no man for these four hundred years hath written so well. These people hold an oponion that the Planets, Firmament, Element, and all the Stars make one God, and that no faith nor law can err, for that all men think in their souls, and hold for certain that they worship him which desires to be worshipped; and they believe that the knowledge of God is contained in a man called Elcorb, chosen and participate of God, and like unto God touching knowledge.  
There are forty other men among them which are called Elauted, that is to say, the Stocks, for that they are of the basest degree, and of the lest knowledge. When the Elcorb dies, they created another out of the number of the forty; and he is chosen by lot out of seventy. There are also other 765, out of which number they take one to put among the seventy, whenas any one of that troop dies. Their law commands that they go unknown throughout the world either like fools, or great sinners, or the most basest men upon the earth. It is the only reason why many men wander about Africa all naked, showing their privy parts; and they are so dissolute and impudent, as they sometimes have the company of women publicly, and in the open market place like bruit beasts, and yet they are held of the vulgar sort for holy men.  
We must now see who first brought the impiety of Mahomet into Barbary. This wicked and cursed doctrine entered into Egypt in the year 637, by the means of the conquests of Omar: and a captain to Odman past first into Africa, in the year 650, with eighty thousand men, and defeated Gregory Patricius. They chased the Romans for ever out of Africa, and the troops of Absimacus, and of Leo the Emperor, in the year 699, and made themselves absolute Masters of Barbary. But the Arabians increased this mischief, first by their arms, and whereas arms could not come and prevail, they have advanced it by preaching and traffic.  
The heresy of Arrius, with which the Vandals and Goths inhabiting Africa were infected, did much favour their enterprise. To make their design easy, they brought in the Arabian language and letters: they built universities and colleges, and added great revenues to the stately buildings, which they made to that end at Morocco and Fez. But there is nothing that hath more advanced the sect of Mahomet than the victories of the Miramamolins of Africa, since which time this infection hath continued.  
There are Jews also in this Empire, who having greatly multiplied in Spain, passed by little and little into Africa, especially goldsmiths; for this art is forbidden them by the law of Mahomet, and practised much by the jews, as well as d●u●●s others, especially that of smiths, as we see in the mountain of Sessave, in the province of Morocco. They say, that Edivet, a place in the realm of Morocco, was inhabited by the jews of the race of David, (as they affirm) who by little and little are become Mahom●tans. The jews increased afterwards in Africa, whenas Ferdinand king of Spain, surnamed the Catholic and Emanuel king of Portugal, chased them out of their realms, whereof many past into the countries of Fez and Morocco, and brought the arts and trades of Europe, which before were unknown to these Barbarians. At this day the streets are full of them at Belis, Teza, Elmedin●, Tezza, and Segemessa.  
As for the Christians which are in realms of Fez & Morocco, (excepting such as live in places held by the Portugals) there are few but slaves, and their number is very great, yea greater than can be imagined. Their estate is worthy of compassion & pity, not only for the misery wherein they spend their lives, but also for the danger of their souls, which are daily in hazard to be lost. They spend their days in perpetual 〈◊〉, and are without rest the greatest part of the night, enduring many blows, and bearing ●●supportable burdens. To conclude, they endure more pain among these Barbarians, 〈…〉 do among us. they lad them with chains of iron: they beaten them 〈…〉 of oxen hardened, and with hoops, and they baste them with scalding oil, and with lard. But if the pains of the body be great, that of the mind is not less, for besides that these miserable creatures have not any one to preach the word of God unto them, or to assist them with the sacraments to live well, and to die Christianlike, it cannot be imagined nor expressed how many temptations they endure in regard of the faith. They have two small consolations among so many miseries, whereof the one is of Priests which are brought into slavery with them; for that these do sometimes administer the sacraments unto them, and sometimes preach the word of God as well as they can; by reason whereof they are much honoured and respected by the rest: the other consolation comes from religious men, who employ themselves for their delivery. Wherein Spain deserves very great commendations, for that there are two orders of religious men, who have for their exercise the redeeming of those miserable wretches: one of these orders is commonly called de la Merced, which is in Arragon: the other which is much greater hath the name of the redemption of captives. These two orders gather together yearly great sums of money, with the which they free a great number of slaves. They sand men to Fez, Morocco, and Alger, who manage this business with great diligence and fidelity, and they first redeem all the religious men and priests, than the younger sort, beginning with the king of Spain's subjects, and afterwards w●●h the rest. There is always a religious man at Fez, who informs himself of the quality and necessity of slaves, to prepare a way for their delivery the year following. But Spain hath a greater interest therein than any other country, for that most of them that are slaves in this Empire, are subjects to the king of Spain. I will conclude that the Moors of the realm of Fez and Morocco differ in many points from the Turks, touching the false law and religion of Mahomet, and among other things they subject themselves to the Calise of Bagadet, leaving him of the great Cairo, to whom the Turks yield obedience.      

Of the Knights of Malta.  

A DISCOURSE OF THE ESTATE OF THE KNIGHTS OF MALTA.  

The Contents.  
1THe divers abodes of the knights of the order of S. john of Jerusalem, before they were settled at Malta, the which they had by gift from the Emperor Charles the fift. 2. A description of the Island of Malta, sometimes called M●lita, how many leagues it hath in circuit, the length and breadth, situation, climate, parallel, and ports. 3. A description of the Island of Goza, near to Malta. 4. The soil of Malta stony, and yet bearing fruit trees, as Figs, Apples, Almonds, Vines, and Palm trees: Cotton, Roses, Tin, and F●nnell: it feeds Sheep, Goats, Oxen, Asses, Mules, Coneys, and Partridges: They make salt and honey. It wants fresh water. In old time it was much esteemed in regard of little dogs fit for gentlewomen. It is free from Serpents, since the coming of S. Paul into this Island. 5. The manners of the ancient inhabitants of this Island, and their Temples, dedicated to Hercules, and the goddess juno. 6. The disposition of the Maltois at this d●y, like to them of Africa. The manner of their garments, and the humour of the women of that country. Their sports at Shrovetide: Their devotion, and religious ceremonies in time of Lent. 7. The revenues of the great Master of this Island: and the riches of the order consisting in treasure and commandaries dispersed over all Christendom. 8. The forces consisting in strong places and the valour of knights. 9 A distinction and division of the order of knights into three ranks: The laws and ordinances of this order, and the ceremonies which are used in the reception of knights. 10. After what manner they deprive a knight of the habit, when he hath committed any great crime: and the ceremonies with the which they restore the habit to an offendor, who hath had his pardon. 11. Of the great Cloak of the order, and upon what days the knights aught to wear it. 12. Of the Hospital, and the commander of the lesser Hospital: Physicians and other persons entertained to tend the sick: of their burials and funerals. 13. Of the receivers of the Revenues, Keepers of the treasure, Auditors of accounts, their power and offices. 14. Of the general Chapter, and to whom it belongs to call it, what the ceremonies be, and whereon they treat. 15. Of Provincial Chapters which are held yearly, and how they proceed. 16. Of the order of justice and judgement, and of two sorts of councils, and what judges precide and assist. Of lots, public audience, and of the form of judgement called Esgard. 17. Of the obedience which all they of the order yield unto the great Master: his dignity, greatness, and power: his rights and privileges: and what commaundaries are appointed for his entertainment, and of which he may dispose, and confer to whom he pleaseth. 18. Of the office of bailiffs, great Conseruator, Marshal, and great Prior of the Church of Malta, their wages, and to what end they are instituted. 19 Of the election of the great Master, and the ceremonies observed at that act. 20. Of the capacity or incapacity to hold commaundaries: and to whom purchases made by commanders belong. 21. Of the visitation which is made of commandaries every five year. 22. Traffic of merchandise, making of wills, donations, and many other things forbidden to knights. 23. For what crimes a knight may be deprived of his habit. 24. Of the Bishop of Malta, subject to the Archbishop of Palermo: of the divine service, and of the feasts and abstinences, whereunto the knights of Malta, and the brethren of the order, are bound.   

THe knights of the order of S. john of Jerusalem, having been put out of Rhodes by the Turks, in the year of Grace 1522, upon Christmas eve, after that they had held this Island for the space of 212 years, came first into Candie, whereas they remained some time; then they retired themselves, part to Venice and part to other places of Italy. Having made some stay at Venice, and in other places of Italy, they obtained leave of the duke of Savoy, to retire themselves to Nisse, and to make it the abode and seat of their order; and the rather, for that the Turks and Moors of Africa, and Barbary, spoiled all the Christians coasts, and assailed all the sea towns. Afterwards, they resolved to go to Saragosse in Sicily, being a place near unto Greece for that the common bruit was, That the Turk would come and invade Italy, especially the Island of Sicily, and the realm of Naples. In the end, the emperor Charles the fift gave them the Island of Malta to live in, as a place commodious to hinder the Turks incursions into these countries, and to cross the success of their enterprises. But before I engage myself any farther in this discourse, you must understand, that in former times there were three places which had this name of Malta or Melita; whereof one was in Greece near unto Marathon; another in Cappadocia, not far from the river of Euphrates, and this whereof we now treat.  
The Island of Malta lies distant from Sicily about sixty miles opposite to Cape Pass●ro, and from Africa above sixty good leagues at Sea, the which hath made many to put it among the Islands of Europe. It hath about thirty small leagues in circuit, and the greatest length is but twenty miles, and the breadth twelve. It stands in the sea of Aricke, having upon the North, Cape Passero in Sicily; upon the South, Africa, and the town of Tripoli in Barbary; to the West, the Island of Lampadouse; and to the East, the Mediterranean Sea. The length extends towards Morea, and is situated in the beginning of the fift climate, and the eight parallel, about three and thirty degrees from the line.  
This Island hath many ports, but among the rest, two are capable of much shipping, whereof one was called Marzamusetto, and the other, Marzasirocco. The ports are made by gulfs which advance into the Island, the which in the beginning are straight, than they enlarge themselves having past the mouth, and make Peninsulas of some parts of the Island, which stretching far into the Sea, are joined to the Island by some little piece of ground. Moreover, it hath also the ports of S. George, Benarat, S. Paul, Antofegue, Mugiar, and that of Marzascala, which are not very safe. There, upon a point of land which extends betwixt two little gulfs, (which makes divers others less) the knights have of late built a new town, whereas S. Elm or Herme stood, and they have given it the name of the great Master la Valette, who defended this place very valiantly against the Turks. Upon another point, stands S. Michael, and the Bourg. In the midst of the Island, and among those Peninsulas, is the Old city, which Diodorus writes had been built by the Carthaginians, and which in old time was famous for the fine cloth that was made there.  
The Island of Goza is the same which some Ancients have called Glaucos, and others, as Strabo, Gaudos. Her port lies betwixt the West and South, and it is above a league from Malta. It hath in circuit about twenty miles: and there is a castle belonging to the knights of Malta. The Turks carried away three thousand souls out of this Island, in the year of Christ 1551.  

¶ The Quality.  
THe soil of this Island is in a manner all stony, but the stone is soft and easy to work, and the ground lies three or four foot above the stone. Yet it bears fig trees, apple trees, almonds, vines, and other trees, namely, palm trees; yut there are few vines: and as for palm trees they are barren: and their wheat and wood comes from Sicily. Those things which this Island bears are excellent, as the cotton, first-fruits, and flowers, especially, roses, time, and fennel, and certain wild thistles the which are very good, and the inhabitants do also burn them for wood. They have store of sheep, oxen, goats, asses, mules, coneys, and partridges. They also make salt in a place called the salt pits, and they have the best honey that can be eaten: as for their salt, it is solt, fine, and exceeding white. They many times have harvest twice a year, especially, of barley and cotton. They want fresh water, as well that which comes from heaven, as from the earth, and all that they have is in a manner reserved of their Winter's rain: for their waters are brackish, & they dry up in the great heat of Summer, which makes the inhabitants tawny, and in a manner like in colour to the Moors of Africa. Wherefore in Winter and in Autumn all things grow with more cheerful colour, and more readily than in Summer.  
In ancient times this Island was much esteemed for the little dogs which were found there, fit for ladies. It is much subject to winds, as well as to heat, as hath been said. It hath this particularity, that since S. Paul's being there, there were never any serpents seen, although there were some before, as may be gathered by the Acts of the Apostles, and scorpions, which in other places are very hurtful, and should be as much or rather more in this Island by reason of the excessive heat, do no harm to them that handle them. And moreover they say, that God hath given force and virtue to insencible things which have had the happiness to lodge the Saints, and that the stones which were drawn out of the cave whereas S. Paul was a prisoner, are carried over all Europe, and have a great virtue against the biting of serpents, and especially against the poison of scorpions and vipers; and these pieces of the rock are called the grace of S. Paul.   

¶ The manners of the Ancients.  
WHenas the Romans conquered this Island from the Carthaginians; the Maltois were esteemed very happy, by reason of the Commerce of divers nations, and the great number of arts which were practised in this Island: and they made great account of the cotton cloth which was made at Malta; so as Cicero did never object unto Ʋerro the excess and daintiness of Malta, but in regard of the garments which he ware. And it is most certain that the Maltois were wondered delicate, and their women very nice and dainty, and given to voluptuousness. In this Island king Batta entertained Dido, and her sister Anna: and Phalaris tyrant of Agrigentum in Sicily was a great friend to the Maltois, and went often to visit them.  
Appian Alexandrinus writes, that the Maltois being revolted, Caesar vanquished them by a long and tedious war, for that they held the sea, and made roads into all places, kill the little children, and exposing the rest to sale. And seeing he had such difficulty to vanquish them, we must believe that the Maltois were rich and powerful, and that although they had been subdued whenas the Romans vanquished the Charthaginians; yet they had gotten new courage, and finding themselves strong, rejected the Roman servitude.  
They worshipped the goddess juno, and there was a very ancient temple, whither all the neighbour people carried gifts of great price. They had also a temple dedicated to Hercules, whereof the ruins are yet to be seen: and it is most certain that they of this Island were always friends to the Sicilians.   

¶ The manners at this day.  
THe people of this Island are harsh and uncivil, and savour something of the disposition of them of Africa: yet they are much affected to the Catholic religion, and do all their best endeavours against the Turks for the defence of their country. They live very poorly, for that the Island is not fruitful: and they have all a particular devotion to S. Paul.  
The women are fair and lovely, and remain shut up in their lodgings, according to the ancient custom of the country, for that the men are exceeding suspicious and jealous. They never go without a vail, & most commonly there are many of them very devout, for they are of a disposition to be extreme in all their actions; so as if they give themselves to evil, there is nothing so bad but they will undertake it to satisfy their wicked desires.  
The language which they of Malta use is like unto the Africans, at the lest there is little difference, and both are nothing but the Arabian corrupted, or the vulgar Arabian, which doth very much differ from that which is printed, the which they speak only about Mecca. There are many Mahometan slaves which are but rudely entreated, but not equal to that which they of their sect make the Christians to suffer that are under their power.  
The knights who are of divers nations have also divers manners, and it sufficeth to say, that they are very absolute, and that they dispose very freely of all that is within the Island, especially they that have any authority, who give themselves content when they desire it, and found no great resistance. I will say in a word, that at Shrovetide they invent a thousand honest pastimes: some make masks, others make parties to run at the ring, or to fight at barriers, and some make forts, and have men to defend them, and others to assail them. But Lent being come, there can be nothing seen more devout than all this company.  
Upon Maundie Thursday, the great master washeth the feet of many poor men, which done, they are set at a table, and are served with eighteen dishes of several meats, not accounting the last, which is of a certain quantity of pieces of silver or gold which he gives them, so as they have more than they can spend in the whole year: having served these poor with his own hand, the knights of the order having brought the service, he goes to visit the hospital, and carries the sick meat himself, being all served in vessel of silver.   

¶ The Riches.  
IF this Island makes any benefit of her cotton and such like things, it is disbursed in that which they have brought from foreign countries. Yet the great Master who enjoys the revenues of this Island makes ten thousand ducats yearly: & to the end he may show himself more liberal unto all men, they give unto him certain thousands of crowns out of the treasure of the order, and besides, he hath a good Commaundarie in every nation, which is of great revenue. Moreover if the Knights get any thing from the enemy, he hath always the tenth part of the booty; and it is well known their prizes are very great every year.  
As for the order it is exceeding rich, considering the good Commaundaries they hold in Christendom: and without doubt, the treasure of the order grows great, both by the revenues, and also by the spoils which the Knights make in their incursions. And seeing they are to maintain war continually, it is convenient they should enjoy goodly revenues, the which do come unto them by the bounty of princes: and therefore every year, all the bailiffs, Priors, and Commanders are bound to give in a certificate of their goods and revenues to the provincial Chapter, and they pay the charges whereunto they are bound to the public treasure of the religion, according to the value of the commandarie, for the which there is a knight deputed by the order to be Receivor, to whom those duties are paid every year at the feast of S. john Baptist. You must understand, that no man is received to the profession of this order, but he must pay a duty, which they call the passage of the public treasure, which amounts to the u●●ue of above one hundred and fifty crowns for knights, and a hundred for those that are called brothers servants, and if after his passage, he hath not given them, he that receives them for the order, must make them good, notwithstanding any dispensation, and whenas any one hath satisfied this duty, they cannot deny him his right of antiquity. The goods of knights dying, come also to the public treasure, unless they have any gold or silver vessel which were proper to the service of the Church; for those things are left unto the Church, according to the ordinance of Deodat de Gozon. But whenas the officers which follow the great master, as the Seneshal, Chastelain, & other knights which serve him, die, their goods go not to the public treasure, but they come to the great master.   

¶ The Forces.  
THe Island of Malta hath all the approaches so well fortified, as it is not only a difficult thing, but in a manner impossible to make any descent, or being landed, to advance or gain any thing. But I esteem more than all these forts, the valour of the knights which live there, and their ordinary resolution, as also, of the brother's servants, and of the soldiers which remain there, the which in truth is such, as their small number is able to defeat a great army, the which they showed sufficiently whenas they slew so great a number of Turks before the castle of S. Elm, they being but a handful. Finally, they are so far from being assailed in their Island, as contrariwise, they make daily incursions into Greece, towards Rhodes and Barbary, yea many times they go near to Constantinople. They have commonly many galleys, either of which is able to contain five hundred soldiers, and sixteen good pieces of ordnance wherewith they furnish them; so as they want no munition of war. To conclude, they have made themselves so fearful, as for a long time they have suffered them to enjoy their Island with peace.   

¶ The Government.  
THere are three ranks of them which make profession of this order; the first, is of knights, which must be of a noble extraction; the second, of priests; and the third, are called brothers servants. After this, the priests which wear the cross, are divided into two; the one are called Conuentualls; and the other, of the obedience. And as for the brother's servants, there are servants of arms, and servants of office, whereof the last cannot attain to the degree of honour of arms, like unto the first; for the brother's servants at arms make the same profession that the knights do, taking the same oath, and there is no difference betwixt them and knights, but in regard of their gentry, for that being no gentleman, they are not admitted to the great cross, to be Grand Priors, bailiffs, or to have any other great charge in the order. They have commaunderies, and may be made Governors of places belonging to their religion, and called to the managing of money, and to the visitation of places belonging to the order; whereas the other servants cannot be received into the order of knighthood, no more than the priests, be they conventual, or of obedience. The ordinances of the reception are those which follow:  
By the ordinances of Hugh Revel the great master, no bastards might be received into this order, without the consent of a general Chapter, or that he be descended from some great family: And moreover, among the lawful and noble, no man issued from a jew, a Marran, or a Mahometan, were he the son of a prince, is to be admitted into this company. If he that would enter into this order hath formerly made profession of any other, by the ordinances he may not be received: yet this hath not been always observed, for the Chanoins of the holy sepulchre have been joined to this order by the Pope's authority, although they had made profession under another than the great master. Moreover, a man that is much indebted, or married, may not be admitted▪  
In like manner, they may not receive a man that hath committed a murder, or any infamous crime. It is not lawful to give the habit to any one that is not eighteen years old: yet the great master may choose eight children of what nation soever, and make them knights, so as they be gentlemen; if they be otherwise, he may make them brothers servants, to exercise them in arms, and dispense with them for all services, but they must be at the lest fourteen years old, and they cannot take from them their right of antiquity in the rank of commaunderies. He that will be admitted into this order, must be found and well composed of his members, and fit for labour, and before he enters, he must prove that he is a gentleman by name and arms, and that he is of the language and Priorie●to whose Auberge or company he desires to make his entry. Auberge signifies as much as a house or lodging, and it is a place whereas every nation assembles at Malta, to eat there, and consult of the affairs of the house. Having made his proofs before them that are deputed by the Grand Prior, and by the assembly of the province, into whose language he enters, he is then solemnly admitted, but as for the habit, he must receive it by the sole authority of the great master. The habit of the knights must be a black cloak, and a white cross, according to the ancient statute of the great master Raymond du Puy: yet he adds, that according to the time and place they are dispensed withal touching the colour; so as the cross be according to the order, but this is to be understood of religious men that bear arms, and not of others. He that will be received a professed knight into this religion, must first of all confess himself, then with a long secular robe, without a girdle, present himself upon both his knees before the Altar, holding a burning taper in his hand, where he must hear Mass, and receive the Sacrament. Then being presented before the brother that is to receive him, with this reverence, he humbly entreats him that he will be pleased to admit him into the company of the brethren of the holy religion of the Hospital of Jerusalem. They then make a discourse unto him of that which he is to do being received, and having demanded of him, If he hath a will to accomplish all these things? he answereth, yea; then he that receives him, passeth on, and inquires, If he hath made any other vow? if he hath promised marriage to any one? or if he be in servitude to any one? for if he be touched with any of these things, they reject him: but if he be free, he that receives him, opens the Mass book, making him to speak these words following: I vow and promise' to God, to the blessed virgin Marie, and to S. john Baptist, that with the grace and succours of God, I shall be always obedient to the superiors which God and the religion shall give me, and that hereafter I will live chastened, and not enjoy any thing proper to myself. After which, he is received kisseth the Mass book, and taking it, carries it to the Altar, the which he kisseth; then he takes up the book again, and brings it in sign of obedience to him that receives him, who taking the black cloak; shows the white cross to him that is professed, ask him, if he doth not believe that it is the sign of the cross whereon our Saviour jesus Christ was fastened for our sins.  
He confesseth it, and kisseth the Cross, than he that receives him takes the cloak, and sets the cross upon his breast on the left side, and kissing it, faith unto him: Receive this sign in the name of the Holy Trinity, of the blessed virgin Marie mother of God, and of S. john Baptist, for the increase of the faith, defence of the Christian name, and service of the poor: And we set the cross upon this side, to the end thou mayst love it with all thy heart, and that with the right hand thou mayst defend it, and having defended it, preserve it whole: for if fight against the enemy of jesus Christ, thou fliest away, and dost abandon the cross, and his holie-ensigne, then shalt be justly deprived of this sacred sign and as a rotten member ●●●sed from our company. After this, he ties the string of 〈◊〉 cloak saying, Receive the yoke of our Saviour, which is sweet and light, and tho● 〈◊〉 therein found rest for thy soul. This done, he kisseth him, and so do all the other knights which assist, and they say many prayers, as it is contained in the book of their statutes, by the which it is decreed that if any one is received against the form prescribed, if he be a knight he shall be a brother servant, if a servant at arms, he shall be of office, and if he be a chaplain, he shall be a brother of obedience, and never be able to hold commaunderie, or to attain to any dignity of the order, or to the managing of the goods of the religion. As for Priests and Chaplains, no man is received before he hath first served a whole year, to the end they may know his life and sufficiency, during which time he is fed at the charge of the treasure of the order. It is not lawful for the knights to receive of their own authority any other brother than the Chaplains, when there is want in their Churches or chapels, and also of servants of office for the service of their Commaunderies, and these must be approved and confirmed by the Provincial Chapter, to whom they must be represented, with the assignation which they give them for their living and apparel.  
There are also fellows of the same order which do not vow the same things that the brethren do, but they only promise' to love the order, and that which depends thereon, and to defend the good of the religion with all their power, and to discover unto the superiors such as shall annoyed it or betray it, as much as in them lieth. These contribute to the order according to their devotion, as companions do in a brotherhood, to participate of that which shall be given. And yet it is not lawful for any Priors, Chastelins, bailiffs, or any other Commanders and Knights to receive any of these companions that are vowed to the order, without the commandment of the great Master: and if any doth it, he shall be deprived of his habit, and they that are received shall not be enrolled among the other associates, nor enjoy the privilege which they do commonly enjoy. These associates do not carry a whole cross, as all they do that make profession, but only three branches, as we see in the habit of the religious of S. Anthony, whereas the upper part of the cross is taken away: and if they do otherwise, they shall not enjoy their privilege.  
As for the deprivation of the habit, it is made after this manner. The great Master or his Lieutenant inquires carfully of the crime whereof any one is accused, and having drawn the proof, and seen that he must proceed to extremities, he frames a complaint before the assembly, which come thither at the sound of a bell, and propounds the crime in the presence of the offender, who is brought thither by the chief Vsher. The complaint being propounded, the great Master being present in the Council, gives charge to the bailises to have an Esgard (for so they call the judgements given in this order) against the offendor, and to proceed according to God and reason, and according to the commendable and ancient customs of the religion.  
After this, the great Master appoints a chief of the Esgard, and an upright man which is his Attorney General, to pled the cause before him that hath the Esgard delivered unto him; and the prisoner hath power to answer and to defend himself, and then he must either confess or deny the crime: if he confesseth it, he presently demands grace, and then the Esgard or judge makes his report to the great Master and the Assembly, and demands grace three times for the offendor: if the great Master will not insist upon the rigour of their laws, they proceed no farther, but if he continues to demand justice, than the Esgard retires himself into a place a part to consult again of the matter, and to execute that which is contained in their statutes.  
But if the offendor denies the fact, they come to witnesses, proofs, and informations, so as being convicted, either by his own mouth, or by proofs, he is condemned in Council to lose the habit. This done, they sand for the Attorney General, to whom they declare what they have decreed, and he exhorts the offendor to follow the Esgard, who goes before the great Master, and the assembly, whereas the accused comes full of tears, beseeching them to do him grace, and the Esgard in like manner entreats the great Master, and all the Knights that assist. If they will not incline to mercy, but insist to have the sentence pronounced, after they have thrice reitrerated the commandment to the chief bailiff of the Esgard to judge according unto law, he pronounceth the sentence of his degradation in the presence of the offendor, and condemns him that hath been convicted of the crime whereof he had been accused. The party condemned, to purchase some grace, and to move them to pity, casts himself upon his knees before the great Master, near unto him the Usher stands, who doth but attend his commandment, or ●ha● of his Lieutenant; and one of them speaks to the offender after this manner: For that by thy actions thou hast made thyself unworthy of the sign of the Cross, and of our order, into the which for thy former virtues we had received thee; according to our statutes and ordinances, for a praise unto the good, a terror unto the bad, and an example to all men, we deprive thee of our habit, and declare thee unworthy of the company of our brethren, from the which we expel thee, as a rotten, corrupted, and contagious member.  
Then the Usher attending the great Master, takes away the offenders habit after this manner: at the first command, he doth only lay his hand upon the offenders cloak: at the second, he unties the string, and opens the cloak before: and at the third, he takes it quite away, saying, Using the authority which the superior hath given me, auntie this knot, and take from thee the pleasing yoke of the Lord, whereof thou hast made thyself unworthy. This done, according to the statute and ordinance of the great Master, he leads the offendor to prison, where he remains perpetually, being once thus degraded.  
They use in a manner the like ceremonies against one that is absent, and hath refused to appear. It is true that they proceed not but with great deliberation and apparent proofs: neither are their punishments so severe; but if they found any one truly repentant of his faults they will show him grace: so as the offendor having been long in prison, and being found penitent, and desirous to amend his life, they pardon him, and restore him his habit with this ceremony: The great Master or the Lieutenant causeth a bell to be rung for the assembly, whereas the great Master, Balises, and others being set, every man according to his rank, the great Master or the Lieutenant commands them to bring the prisoner, who is led in a secular weed by the Usher, who had degraded him of his habit, and sometimes in his bore shirt, with a halter about his neck, according to the quality of the crime, having his hands bound, and holding a taper burning, and in this manner he kneels before the great Master, humbly beseeching him that he will be pleased to restore him his habit, and receive him again into the order and company of brethren, protesting to live an honest man, and never to do any thing contrary to the rule whereof he hath made profession.  
Then the great Master answers him: although thy offence hath made us to take thy habit from thee, yet upon hope of thy amendment, we restore thy habit, pardon thy crime, and admit thee again into the company of our brethren; be therefore an honest man, and do so as hereafter we may have no cause to use the rigour of our justice with all extremity against thee. Then the chief Usher puts on his cloak with the like ceremony, as he had taken it from him; but being thus restored, he doth not enjoy the right of his antiquity nor residence, according to a law made by the great Master Sangle.  
When as they go upon any enterprise, they are bound to make a declaration of all their goods, as if they did presently leave them, and this they call by a proper word disproprying, or a renouncing of that they had. They give all sealed and signed to the Prior of the Church, upon pain to fast forty days, to have the discipline of the Chapter, and to lose the revenues for one year, the which is applied to the profit of the treasure for them that are commanders.  
The knights do not always wear the great cloak of the order, the which they take when as they make profession, but it sufficeth to have a cross sewed upon their ordinary cloaks on the left side, and also on their cassocks, and coats of arms when they go unto ●he war. But there are certain days when they are bound to wear them, as upon Christmas Eve at Evensong, on Christmas day at Mass and Evensong, upon Saint john's day at Mass, the day of the Circumcision at Mass, and to be short, upon all principal feasts of our Saviour, of the Virgin Marie, of S. john Baptist, and of the blessed Apostles, whenas they are to communicate, and at their Chapters, and Assemblies: and at the election of a great Master, the Priors, bailiffs and Electors must wear the great cloak, upon pain to undergo the judgement of the forty.  
There is a commander of the little hospital, and a register, with two honest men, chosen to visit the sick, and to see them furnished with all things necessary, and these take an oath to discharge their places faithfully, and not to deliver any thing to the sick, but by the physicians prescription. They are also to make an Inventory yearly of that which is in the hospital, be it gold, silver, or other movables, and they sign this Inventory, and 'cause the overseer of the hospital to swear, That he shall not suffer any of them to be lost, nor employ them to any other use but to the service of the sick: Moreover, the Apothecary's shop must be visited every year, lest the sick and diseased be wronged with old and corrupt drugs.  
There are physicians and chirurgeons entertained by the order, for the brethren, as well knights, clerks, as servants, and if they die, they are interred as they aught with their habit and white cross, and there are four clothed in black, which carries them to the ground, and it is not lawful for any other to wear a mourning weed, not not at the death of the great master, according to the ordinance of claud de la Sangle: wherein he would show, that it was a vanity to mourn for them that were held happy, or else that the pomp of mourning robes was not sitting for them that made profession of poverty.  
The hospital of this order serves as a sanctuary, so as it is not lawful to draw out an offendor. It is true, they do not enjoy this liberty in all cases, but they look whether the fact deserves this freedom. If it merits, they sand the offendor out of the Island by the first ship; and he may no more return to any place that is under the jurisdiction of the order. But this privilege doth not avail the eves, nor them that spoil the Champion country in the night, nor fierers of houses, Sodomites, robbers, conspirators, nor such as have wilfully slain or poisoned any man, nor the household servants to knights which commit any crime. They also that strike or wound any of the order, or any one of the judges and officers shall not enjoy this privilege, nor they that are indebted, nor false witnesses, forgers of writings, nor Church robbers, nor they that have committed any crime within the hospital.  
As for the receivors and proctor's of money, they must swear in the hands of the great Master, the Prior, or the Conuentuall bailiff, that they will do their duties in the receipt, and they are bound every year to carry their accounts to the provincial Chapter, with the names of such as have paid, and of them that owe.  
To the end the accounts may be heard, and a care had of the treasure, there is one who is called the great commander, and two proctor's chosen among the wisest of all the knights; either of which carries a key of the treasury; and in like manner all the storehouses, be they of arms, munition, or any other thing, are under their guard. But the great commander, must not go out of the Convent, whilst be is in charge, nor yet the proctor's which assist and serve him for the space of two years; neither may they leave their offices all together, but when they change, they always leave one of the ancient, to the end there may be one that understands the managing of the business.  
Moreover, they have a conseruator or protector of the treasure, who hath charge to distribute the money, according to the will of the great Master, and with the leave of the great Commander; and this Conseruator is but one year in charge, and is changed every year in the Chapter, and chosen of any tongue whatsoever. But they have this observation, That when any one goes out of charge, they choose not another of the same tongue within ten years.  
There are also eight knights, one of every tongue or nation, who are as it were auditors of accounts, and have one day in the week appointed to this end. Their authority is to see and examine how matters are managed, and when they found any fault which requires reformation, they make report unto the great master, and to the ordinary Council. These are two years in charge, and they are not to make any payment out of the common treasury, without their assistance, to the end that so many witnesses may prevent all abuses.  
They give unto the Conseruator an adjunct, chosen from among the most expert of the order, and that best understands matters of accounts, and he assists at all the receipts of the Conseruator general, and also at the giving up of his accounts; and of two books of the receipts, the Conseruator hath one, and he another, setting down that which hath been received, to the end it might be certainly known, and he is in charge as long as it pleaseth the great Master, and the ordinary Council.  
As for the Chapter general of this order, the great master appoints it, and prescribes the day and time when it shall be held. The day being come, and all assembled, before they treat of any affairs, they go at the break of day to the Church, whereas Mass is sung by the Conuentuall Prior, after which, the great Master, with all the Knights, and Clergy go in procession to the place whereas the Chapter is held, whereas they sing the Hymn of the Holy Ghost. This done, the great Master, the bailiffs, Priors, and others, having voice in Chapter sit down according to their rank, and then there is a Sermon made, which being done, they all departed that may not assist, such as the Chapleins be. Upon the first day, they consider who are absent, and whether the excuses which their Attorneys allege, be lawful or no: After this, the bailiffs, Priors, and Chastelins, whom they call Emposte, and other commanders, carry a purse, in which there are five pieces of silver in sign of purchase, and a roll about it which contains the names and value of their Estates, and offices, and in like manner their advice touching that which is to be done for the public good, and their seal being set unto it, every one goes and presents his purse, according to his rank to the great Master, kissing his hand, and making a courtesy. This done, the great Marshal of the order comes in his rank, to present the standard of the religion to the great Master; and the rolls which be presented, are read by the Vicechauncellor with a loud voice; then they proceed to the election of sixteen Capitulans, to whom they give charge to determine all matters that shall be propounded and debated in Chapter. They are chosen by the nations a part, and every one chooseth two, who understand the language, and the affairs of the nation, and whenas they found them not sufficient of any one nation, they choose another. These take an oath before the great master, and the whole assembly, to judge sincerely, and not to be transported with any private passion, of all that shall be to the honour and profit of the order, and of the great master, and the rest promise' to allow and confirm whatsoever they shall decree. Then they enter into a private place, and with them the great masters Proctor general, who hath a deliberative voice; but he cannot determine nor judge of any thing. They decide that which concerns impositions upon commandaries for the subvention of the order: of the government of the treasure: the reformation of manners, and institution of laws; and finally, of all things which happen, and may concern the public good. This done, they go forth, and in the presence of all, as well Chapleins as others, they publish, by the mouth of the Vicechancellor, the things which they have determined; and then the purses are restored, as also, the seals and standard to the bailiffs, Martial, and commanders, who had delivered them into the great masters hands, and so the Chapter ends: Then they return in procession to the Church. But you must understand, that if any one of the sixteen Capitulans finds any matter in question that concerns his particular, he may not be present when it is decided: neither may any man protest against them, nor appeal from their sentence.  
As for the Provincial Chapters, it belongs to the bailiffs, and great Priors, to call them yearly in their provinces, which be, France, and it hath five and forty commandaries: Aquitaine, hath sixty five commandaries in that government: Champagne, two and forty: S. Giles, fifty and four: Auvergne, seventy seven: Tolousa, five and thirty: Rome, nineteen: Pisa, six and twenty: Venice, seven and twenty: Lombardie five and forty: Barle●te, and Capova, five and twenty: Messina, twelve: Base or Low Germany, forty: High Germany, seven and twenty: Lion and Castille, seven and twenty: Chastelain of Emposte, nine and twenty: Catelonia, eight and twenty: Navarre seventeen: and Portugal one and thirty. In these provincial Chapters the bailiffs or great Priors may not do or say any thing to the prejudice of any knight, nor trouble the quiet nor right of any of their provinces. They proceed in a manner like unto the General touching prayers, than they read the rule with a loud voice, to the end, that all men in general may be warned to keep it, and they speak of the observers or breakers of the same: of the jurisdiction of Priors: of Commaundaries and Commanders: of visitations and other matters which concern the profit of the houses of the province.  
But for that it is impossible that amidst so great a troop, so different of humours, of life, and language, there should fall out no quarrels nor contentions, they have also wisely provided touching judgements: and for that they would not make suits immortal, they have ordained that they should not put those controversies in writing which fell out among the brethren, neither should there be any other Advocates or Attourneys than the parties themselves, who must deliver the matter with their own mouths before them that are deputed to hear the cause. True it is, there are some causes, as matters of debt, whereas writings are necessary, and they must have witnesses to prove them: and the schedules & depositions must be set down in writing, and the judges refer themselves to the writings which they have seen. But to to understand who they be, and to whom they commit these judgements, I will set it down as well as I can.  
The Maltois have two sorts of councils, the one is Ordinary, and the other is called Accomply or Perfect. In the Ordinary, there assist the great Master, his Lieutenant, if there be any, the Bishop of Malta, the Prior of the Church of the order, who is equal to the Bishop in that which concerns his rank, and the eight conventual bailiffs, or their Lieutenants, the grand Priors of provinces which are within the Convent, the chief Treasurer or his deputy, and the great masters Seneschal, but he hath no voice in judgement.  
In the Council of the Accomply, besides the abovenamed, there are two knights of every nation, and the Vicechauncellor must be called to both, but no other are necessariely bound to assist, but the Conuentuall bailiffs, without whom they cannot hold an assembly, and neither these nor any other can keep a court without leave from the great Master. The parties interessed, or that fear the credit and favour of their adverse parties, may refuse any judge whatsoever, yea the great Master, showing good reason for his recusation, according to the ordinance of Baptista Vrsino.  
The parties before they come to the Council, must go unto the Chancery to deliver their names in writing, and the cause why they contend, and to be enrolled: after which every one is called in his rank and order by the Vicechauncellor. And for that they judge definitively in this order, it is not lawful for any other to meddle with the deciding of any causes which concern the religious. It is true that secular men which have to deal with knights, may have Attorneys and Advocates to defend them, whereas any difference may arise, either in Provincial Chapters, or in other assemblies.  
They have also a good order to cast lots whenas two pretend for one office, and therein they have regard to antiquity, unless one were of the great Cross, for than he is always preferred, and they proceed in their choice after this manner: After an oath taken by the Competitors, the Vice Chancellor takes two vessels in his hands, whereof the one is white, and the other black; then he goes first to the great Master, and then to every one of the Councillors in their order, offering them these vessels, to the end they may put their lots into which they please: for if they will favour him that hath moved the suit, they will put them into the white, and contrariwise into the black. This done, they tell the lots publicly, and the Vice Chancellor puts the white in writing, and he doth the like when there are two or three competitors; then he numbers all the lots, and he that hath most, is without all contradiction called to the dignity which he pursues. If there be as many lots of one side, as of another, than the most ancient carries it, or all shall be referred to the discretion of the Council, which doth judge of all contentions whereas the lots are equal.  
The knights do also use this casting of lots every one in their nation, when there is any question of graces, or of nominations, and elections of bailiwickes, and dignities; for that it is not lawful to do grace, that is to say, to grant any dignity to any one of the brothers before his rank, without the consent of all the knights. It is not lawful for the knights to determine of any other thing in the private councils of their nations, but of possessiions, vines, houses, and such like, which belong unto the company, and not to dispute of the public affairs of the religion.  
They have ● public audience which is held every Friday at Malta, whereas they of the ordinary Council assist, and in like manner the judges of appeals, the Vicechancellor, the Captain of the Island of Malta, and the judge of the town. They do justice ●● the inhabitants of the Island, and to all other secular men, which are subject to the lords of this religion, or which have to deal with them.  
〈◊〉 knight may convent any one before any other judge than him of his order for ●●at cause soever, and whosoever doth the contrary looseth his right of antiquity, is deprived of all administration in this order for the space of five years, looseth his cause, and may not enjoy that which he pretended, although he had obtained it by sentence. And without doubt they have reason, for that such appellations derogate much from the right of sovereignty, and if they suffered such appellations and sentences to go before other judges, they should in time be deprived of their ancient authority, like unto some others, who could not preserve that which was gotten for them.  
These knights have also another form of judgement, which they call Esgard, the which is fit to decide their controversies speedily which have not leisure to attend long suits. They choose a knight of every language, and they add a ninth man to this number of what nation soever. This is made Precedent of the Esgard by the great Master, or by the Marshal of the order, when as the brethren are of his jurisdiction; and the other eight are named by the Conuentuall bailiffs, to whom the Usher gives notice, but with this condition, that the bailiffs of nations may not name any other but such as the parties shall willingly receive for judges. For this Esgard they have recourse to other judges called the Rentfort of the Esgard, where the number of the judges is double, and also to the Rentfort of the Rentforts, whereas they take three of every nation in steed of one; yet the first Precedent continues still. But whenas the business cannot be ended after this manner, the great Master adds the Esgard of Conuentuall bailiffs, or of the Vice-bailives: and if it happens that the Precedent be a bailiff, he is dismissed, and one of the ancientest knights put in his place; and they have but one voice a piece, except the Precedent, who hath two. This Precedent demands of the parties contending if they suspect any of the judges? then every one delivers his matter verbally, and they do them summary justice according to the order of their lots.  
As for the great Master, all they of the order, as well clerks as laymen are bound to yield him all obedience; and none can attain to this dignity, but he that is a knight, and by consequence of a noble extraction, and come of a lawful marriage. But notwithstanding that the great Master be the head and sovereign of his order, yet he hath not liberty to do all things, and upon his voyage (if happily he be not at Malta at the time of his election) he may not take more money than the Council hath appointed the Receivors to give him and if he will spend more, he must use his own. Moreover his estates, dignities, and commaunderies are voided from the day of his election, and the collation belongs to the great Master, to the Convent, and to the Assembly: neither may he resign any thing, but the distribution of all those things passeth by the Council, although he hath his part of the power to confer them, being already great Master. As for the goods of his Predecessor, he may only pretend so much corn and wine as he shall need from the day of his election, unto the next feast of Christmas, and the rest comes to the trea●ure of the order. As for his plate, he shall have to the value of six hundred marks of silver and no more, with a cup and ewer of gold, if there be any, and the rest is put into the public treasure.  
There have been always a good number of Commaunderies appointed for the great masters entertainment, the which are so incorporated to his dignity, as it is not possible to dismember them, the which is done to the end he may with the more credit entertain his train. But he hath power to give them for a time to what knight he shall like best, or to give them some pension out of them. The commaunderies are these which follow:  
In the great Priory of S. Giles, the commaunderie of Pezenas is affected unto him: in that of Tolousa, that of Poysubran: In that of Auvergne, the commaunderie of Salins: in the grand Priory of France, that of Haynault: in that of Aquitaine, the commandry of the Temple of Rochel: in the Priory of Champagne, that of Merz: in the Priory of Lombardy, that of Inuerni: in the Priory of Rome, the commaunderie of Mugnan: in that of Venice, that of Treviso: in the Priory of Pisa, that of Prato: in that of Capova, the commaunderie of Sician: in the Priory of Bari, that of Brindes: in that of Messina in Sicily, that of Polizi: in the Priory of Cattelonia, that of Masdea: in that of Navarre, the commaunderie of Calzetes: in the Chastelaine of Emposta, the commandery of Aliaga: in the Priory of Castille, that of Olmos: in that of Portugal, the commandry of Cove: in the grand Priory of Germany, that of Bucs: and in Bohemia, the commandry of Vuladeslavia. To conclude, there is not any great Priory in Christendom, whereas the great Master hath not some piece.  
The great Master chooseth a Lieutenant whom he pleaseth, and he gives leave to all the brethren of that which they demand, for (as we have said) at their entering into the order, they renounce their own wills.  
But you must observe, that before that any brother which is accused, be condemned, the great Master cannot give him pardon for his offence, nor to them that are deprived of the habit for ever, without the consent of a general Chapter: yet he may change the punishment to one that is lighter: but the bailiffs must first entreat him. And this is done whenas one brother hath hurt another, for that the antiquity is taken from him that is in the wrong, and given to them that are new come, who are called brothers Arnauds, unless he die, or be may hemed of some member, for than they must follow the rigour of the law.  
The great Master may not make any gift of the rights, prerogatives, and revenues of the Mastership, that shall prejudice his successor, which if he do, the grant is of no force, and shall not stand good.  
As for the bailiffs, they were instituted to assist the great Master, as Councillors, and Senators. These are called Conuentuall Priors, and they have also the titles of great commander, and marshal, of which we have made mention, of Hospitalier, an ancient title of the chief of the order of Admiral, who hath charge of the galleys, and of all matters belonging to the sea. It is true, that the Marshal being in an army, commands as General over all the knights and brethren servants which bear arms: yet he hath no power over Bailiffs, as well conventual as capitulary, nor over Priors, nor Chastelains, who are held as companions to the great Master.  
There is moreover he whom they call Drappier, which is one of the bailiffs whom they now call great Conseruator; and also, one whom they call Turcopolier, which signifies Captain of the light horse, in the time of the holy war; and this office did belong to the English nation. It belongs unto the Marshal to call and command assemblies, whereas the grand Prior of the Clergy is bound to assist. He also makes Gonfalonnier, or Standard bearer of the order, whom soever he pleaseth, but not without the council and consent of the great Master, or his Lieutenant. But neither the Marshal, Admiral, nor any Bailiff, may displace any officer which they have; but this honour is due to the great Master and the ordinary Council, who shall judge of the crimes for the which they are to be deposed.  
Victuals are under the charge of the great commander, who is also (as we have said) Superintendant of the treasure. The great Bailiff of Germany had in oldtime charge of the castle of S. Peter, which stood in the town of Halicarnasses: but this charge was lost whenas the Turks took Rhodes.  
The Marshal hath charge of the tower whereas they put their prisoners, yet he may not deliver any one but with the consent of the Council. He is also to see if the usher doth his duty, and to repair defaults. As for the Hospitalier, he hath charge of the hospital, and to appoint a guardian, who must be of the French nation, if there be any one capable; which if he found not, then may he choose at his pleasure: and this office of guardian continues only two years.  
The Drappier hath care of their garments that wear the Cross, who may not make any without his permission. The bailiffs have only sixty crowns wages yearly, whenas they live in the Convent: but whenas they are absent, they have not any. As for their Lieutenants, they have forty to bear the charge of the houses: The Prior of the Church, eight and forty; and the Treasurer the like sum.  
The Treasurer may not be chosen of any other nation but of that of France, and he is numbered among the capitularie Bailiffs, having in his custody the Iron Bull of the order, under the seals of the great Master and bailiffs. He assists at councils, and at the giving up of accounts, and is chosen as well of the knights, as of the servants at arms, and Chaplains. True it is, his wages are greater if he be a knight, than if he were of a meaner quality.  
Then follows the Chancellor, who makes the eighth Bailiff, and he must always be of the Spanish nation: he hath under him a Vicechauncellor, who makes the dispatches in his absence, and seals patents freely, reserving only the rights which are due to the great masters Seneschal for those dispatches. All the bailiffs are of the great Cross, the which notwithstanding they may not take until they come into the Conuentuall assembly at Malta. And seeing we have so often made mention of bailiffs, it shallbe fit to set down the number, which be these: The bailiffs of the nation or language of Provence, are the great Commander, the Prior of S Giles, the Prior of Tolousa, and the bailiff capitularie of Monosco: They of the nation of Auvergne, are the Marshal, the great Prior of Auvergne; the bailiff of Lion, whom in old time they called Lureoil: Those of the nation of France, are the great Hospitalier, the great Prior of France, Aquitaine, and Champagne, the bailiff capitulary of Morea, and the Treasurer general: Of the nation of Italy, are the Admiral, the great Priors of Rome, Lombardy, and Venice, Pisa, Barri, Messina, Capova: the bailiff capitulary of S. Eufeinia, of S. Stephen near to Monopoli, of the Trinity, of Venouse, and of S. john of Naples: the bailiffs of the nation of Arragon, Cartelogne, and Navarre, are the great Conseruator, in old time called Drappier, the Castelain of Emposta, the great Priors of Cartelogne, and Navarre, and the bailiffs capitularie of Majorca: Those of the English nation, were in old time, the Turcopolier, the great Priors of England and Ireland, and the Bailiff capitulary of Aigle: The bailiffs of the nations of Castille, Lion, and Portugal, are the Chancellor, the great Priors of Castille, Lion, and Portugal, and the bailiff capitularie of Bovedo. Finally, the capitularie bailiffs, the great Prior of the Church of the order, and the commanders of Cypress, and Langon, are common to all nations; but he of Negrepont belongs only to the nations of Arragon, and Castille: and all the above named are of the great Cross, and of the Council of the accomply. The great Prior of the Church of Malta, hath power over all the Chaplains, & others which are of the body of the Clergy, except those which serve in the great masters Chapel: I mean the Chaplains which make their abode at Malta, for the rest are under the great Priors, in the commandaries where they live.  
Having spoken sufficiently of the dignity, greatness, and power of the great Master, it shall be fit to say something of his election, and of that which he doth, that is in charge whenas he finds himself oppressed with sickness. Whenas the great Master feels himself sick, he causeth the Bulls of silver, and of iron, with the privy Seal, to be hidden in some secret place, to the end that no man may wrong or abuse them, and if so be he cannot do it, than the Seneschal takes the matter in charge. When the Master is dead, he i● bound to carry them to the ordinary Council, whereas all are broken, to the end they may be never more used. After this is done, they inter the dead body with as much honour as may be, and yet without any superfluity. After which, they choose a Lieutenant to the deceased, whose dignity continues until they have named the Commanders whom they call unto the election. In the mean time they take an inventory of the goods which are found in the house of the great Master deceased; then they prepare to choose another, and they appoint a day for the election. The day being come, they meet at the church, where mass being said, they go to the public place whereas their assemblies are held. The lieutenant propounds the causes for which they meet, and commands that the knights and brethren of every nation go and consult together; and these must swear that they will proceed with all sincerity to the election of a Precedent, & of the three Electors of the great master, that is to say, a knight, a brother servant, and a chaplain.  
Eight of these brethren chosen out of the nations, go and take an oath for the choice of a knight precedent of the election, & he being chosen, the lieutenant gives over his charge. This precedent of the election being in his seat, the foresaid eight come before him, and take an oath to name the 3 electors without any favour: and these must choose them to whom the election of the great master must concern. This done, they enter into the conclave, & they secretly name among them these 3 electors, & then they name them to the assembly, and so Presently leave their charge. Then the three electors take an oath in the hands of the precedent of the election, that they will name a fourth which shall not be of their nation; and he being received, they swear to choose a fift, & so of the rest, till they come to eight, and then to sixteen; so as there are two brethren of every nation, among which they may put two chaplains, and three servants at arms only; for the rest must be knights. These being chosen and having confessed themselves, and received the communion, they go and present themselves before the judge of the election, where bear headed, and upon their knees, they swear one after another with a loud voice, that they will lawfully choose, and according to the ancient statutes of the order, a head and prince, a good man, and profitable for the order.  
This oath being taken, the commander of the election and all the assistants swear also that they will hold for firm and stable whatsoever they shall do in that respect, and obey the great Master that shall be chosen by them. Being thus entered into the conclave, they begin to speak their opinions freely of the lives and manners of them that are propounded, and for whom any one doth speak. Having diligently examined every one of their lives, they put their lots into vessels, & he that hath most voices carries it; so as the commander of the election dares not name any other than him that shall be chosen by these sixteen electors, by reason of the oath which they have taken. This election being ended, they come before the precedent of the assembly, demanding thrice of the whole assembly, if they will allow of their election, and if they ratify it: the knight of the election, who is one of the three first nominated, (all the rest bein set) names him with a loud voice that hath been chosen great master, who being present, is conducted to the great altar, there to take an oath to observe the laws of the order, to maintain the privileges, and to do nothing without the consent of the council: and if he be absent they enter again into chapter to choose a lieutenant until he come; whereas if he be present, he makes his own choice.  
During the time of the election it is not lawful for any knight to wear any arms in the place where it is made, for he should lose his voice, and if any one should complain, they would take away his habit. As for bailiffs, and conventual prior's, the election is made before the great master, who disposeth, having the ordinary council with him, the which is also observed in the election of the prior of the church of Malta.  
The knights of Malta have commonly a procurator, or agent in the court of Rome, who is created at a general chapter, and many times the great master and the council may dismiss him, and put another in his place, upon certain reasons, making his insufficiency known. His charge is to defend the graces, privileges, and immunities of the order, and to maintain the grants, donations, and provisions the which are made by the great master and convent: and it is his duty to oppose himself against any of the brethren that shall be rebellious and disobedient, and shall blame them, and pursue them with all rigour, and shall give advice to the great Master of matters which concern the order, neither may he take any thing but the ordinary fees, the which he hath from the treasure. To conclude, there is not any office in this order but is electre: 〈◊〉 is when they are to undertake a wa●re, and to make a General by land, he must be chosen out of the nation of awergne, if there be any one worthy of that charge: and if they are to have a commander at sea, he must be of Italy; and when there is not any one sufficient, they choose some other, yet without prejudice to the nation, or to his antiquity.  
In rega●● of Commaunderies, it is not lawful for any knight to hold two at one time, nor for the grand Priors or Chastelains to have any in their province. It is true, that Priors and bailiffs lawfully advanced, may have Magistral chambers, which are granted them or those which fall unto them by right, by the deprivation of some knight of their ●●●uince which hath offended.  
He that before he takes the habit, having been married, hath children, cannot obtain nor hold any Commaunderie whilst they live: neither may any man have a commandry by grace or by cabiment: that is to say, coming according to the order of his antiquity, if he hath not served five years at the lest, after he took the habit, and he cannot enjoy any pension, or any member, if he hath not served three years. To conclude, no man may hold a Commaunderie either by grace, order, or melioration, if he hath not been in the convent, and if he hath not had his antiquity, or expectative: and the lette●s of these expectatives must be taken within the year of the execution by the Commanders: and no man may come to a melioration of his benefice, if he hath not served five years, and continued a year in his Commaunderie.  
All purchases and acquisitions made by Commanders, belong unto the order; if they he immovables, they fall to the Commaunderie that is nearest to the purchased lands; and if they be movables, all come to the public treasure. All places where there are nominations of benefices or provisions, or presentations depending upon fees of Commanderies the Commander disposeth, if the custom and privilege of the place be not otherwise▪ and the said prior's, bailiffs, and commanders cannot dispose, if those benefices fall voided during the time that the great Master is upon the place where this vacancy happens; for than it belongs to the great Master, although they should come unto it by election; unless those benefices were assigned by the right of cabiment, or the order of antiquity of some one of the knights. It is precisely forbidden in this order, that no man which hath made profession shall demand either office, commandry, or benefice secretly, nor in any other sort, directly or indirectly from any but the great Master, the Convent and religious of this order, who have the right to dispose of them: and if it chance that any one prevails by any other means, it is ordained that he shall quit that which he hath obtained, and resign it up to the great Master, and if he makes refusal, he shall be deprived of his habit, and committed to perpetual prison.  
The grand Prior●▪ Bailiffs, and Chastelains, are bound every five year to visit the Commaunderies which are subject unto their jurisdiction, or if they be otherwise employed or seek, they must sand a knight that is a Commander, and a Chaplain, who hath also a commandry to make this visitation, and to see if any thing be ill governed, if the house go to ruin and if their be any thing that needs reparation. A knight also, and a chaplain must visit the chambers and commanderies of grand Priors and bailiffs, for the same reason.  
If the grand Prior's neglect to do their d●●●eses in that behalf, they do by the custom lose their rank, jurisdiction, and pre-eminence of priority, and if the visitors deputed by the chapter favour the in●ringerss of the laws, they shall lose one years revenues of their commaundaries.  
It is not lawful for Commanders to use any trade of merchandise, and much less to 〈◊〉 or take any money to interest, neither may they cell nor engage any thing belonging to the order, without express leave of the great Master, and the consent of the General Chapter: and it is forbidden to treat of such alienations in provincial Chapters. And if the knights have purchased any thing, it is not lawful for them to alienat it, without the consent of the Master and the Chapter, for they have the use of it but for their lives. It is not lawful for the Receivors to rend out the commandaries of any knights deceased, unless it be in the Provincial Chapter, in the presence of the grand Prior, & four knights of the most ancient. It is not lawful for the brethren of this order to make a will, nor to give any thing, not not unto their servants, unless it be their wages. And as for creditors, they must declare their debts. Finally, they must submit themselves in all to the will of the superior, who will not suffer them to testate but of the sixt part of their movables, and they the debts of the deceased, with such ready money as they found. The great Master himself cannot dispose of his movable goods, without leave from the general Chapter, neither may he do it but when he is near his end.  
And for that it happens many times that the knights have great numbers of slaves, Moors, and Turks, by reason of their prizes at Sea, they are forbidden to enfranchise and set them at liberty without the permission of the great Master, and a general Chapter.  
All knights are forbidden to solicit for the crimes of secular men which are subject to the jurisdictions of this order, for that they must as ecclesiastical persons leave them to the secular power; and in like manner, in civil causes they may not solicit neither openly nor secretly. Moreover, if any knight, or other of the Cross, hath committed an offence. It is not lawful for any of his friends or companions to entreat for him, until that sentence be given, and then they may sue unto the great Master to moderate his punishment.  
All knights are forbidden to swear fealty and homage, or to make a league with any prince, without the leave of the great Master, or his Prior; and in like manner to make any assembly without the like permission. This is in regard of the jealousy of princes, in whose countries these knights live; for if they did follow one more than another, it would hinder the good of the order. It is not lawful for them of the Cross to be night-wanderers up and down, and to go out of the limits of their provinces and commaunderies, without the express leave of their superior. If they be found thus wandering, and without any leave in writing, all commanders are enjoyed to seize upon them, and to put them in prison, and then to advertise the grand Prior, to the end he may do justice.  
And to take away all means to steal from the public, the knights are forbidden, or any other, having any charge, estate, or office in the order, to arm any galley, or other vessel, to make any enterprise, openly, or secretly, or by any interposed persons; but they must leave it to private men, who dare not have intelligence with officers, without incurring the punishment of perjury: And the knights may not go to any enterprise without the consent of the great Master, and leave from the ordinary Council; and before this leave, they must have served five years, and they must swear not to commit any spoils upon the lands of Christians, nor in their havens: And whilst they are in those actions, they enjoy the right of their antiquity, as if they were at Malta.  
It is not a lawful for any, but the great Master, and the ordinary Council, to give safe conducts to pirates, the which may not be done, but upon great necessity, neither to fugitives, nor to bankrupt merchants. None but the great Master, and the Council called Accomply, may make a truce or accord with the Turks, Moors, or other Infidels: And all men are forbidden to draw artillery, powder, and other munition, out of the Island and houses of the order: only the great Master, and the Council, may take such courses as necessity shall require. No knight nor servant at arms may intermeddle with the wars which are among Christians, nor take any oath, or receive pay, unless the prince of the country expressly command them, for than they shall be dispensed withal: but they may not carry the ensigns of the order, unless it be for the defence of religion.  
There is a punishment ordained for such as do not carry the Cross upon their cloaks. All quarrels are forbidden them in their houses, and if any one strikes, or proceeds by way of fact, there are punishments appointed as the case requires, and according to the laws of the order.  
But for that we have spoken of the punishment inflicted upon knights, and others of the order, I think it fit to let the Reader understand the causes for the which they are thus disgraced. They receive this infamy if they be accused and convicted of heresy, Sodomy, theft, robbery, or to have retired themselves to Infidels, if they have abandoned the standard of the order, displayed in war against the enemies of the faith; if any one flies from the battle, and leaves his companions, or yields any fort unto the enemy: but they proceed herein very exactly and carefully, lest they should condemn a man, and not hear his justifications. False witnesses and forgers which sergeant letters of the order; they that forswear themselves, and which attend the spoil only being at the war, are to be deprived for a year. They that accuse others of these crimes, and cannot prove their accusations to be true, are subject to receive the disgrace of the loss of their habit, whereunto they sought to make others subject. Keeping of common women, and all kinds of disordered excess, are particularly forbidden in the rules of this order: And to conclude, there can be nothing seen better disposed; but if all things be not as they aught, the fault is not in the institution and order, but in the minds of men which are not disposed to do well.   

¶ The Religion.  
IT is sufficiently known, that the knights of this Island are the bulwarks of the Catholic religion against the Infidels. There is a Bishop in the Island of Malta, who is under the Archbishop of Palermo in Sicily. Finally, the brethren of this order are bound by the ancient custom, and by their profession, to say every day at once, or at several times, one hundred and fifty Pater nosters in stead of the Canonical hours: but the Priests, Deacons, and others of the Clergy, are bound to say the service every day, according to the order and custom of the Church of Jerusalem. They are all bound to fast the time of Lent, from Ash-wednesday unto Easter, at the Rogations, S. john Baptist, S. Mark, at Whitsuntide, the four Ember weeks, the Apostles eves, S. Laurence, at the Assumption, Nativity, Conception, Purification, and Annunciation of our Lady, at the feast of all Saints, and nativity of our Saviour. They are in like manner bound to communicate at Christmas, Easter, and Whitsuntide. Whenas they go to any enterprise, they must confess themselves, which they may not do but unto their priests, but if there be not any, than they may in that necessity confess themselves unto another, with the leave of the Prior, or Subprior, in the absence of their head. The knights being in the Convent, are bound to assist at divine service, and procession, every man in his rank, and according to his antiquity, and no man man may presume to sit in the place of Priors or Conuentuall bailiffs, nor of their Lieutenant, to the end they may observe the honour which is due unto the Clergy. They say for every brother deceased, thirty Masses, at the first of which, all the brethren that assist, go & offer a wax candle, and a denier, which must be given to the poor. Every Priest doth own unto the deceased a Mass, the Deacons, and Subdeacons, a Psalter; and the servants the office of the dead, or one hundred and fifty, Pater nosters. It is ordained, that there should be a learned man feed to instruct young Clo●keses, and to teach them the Latin tongue, and another to teach them to sing, and no man shall be admitted a Subdeacon before the age of eighteen years, nor a Deacon before five and twenty, and every Priest must be six and twenty years old; and they must all have made profession of their order.      

Of the great Masters of S. John of Jersualem.  

❧ THE NAMES OF ALL THE GREAT MASTERS OF THE ORDER of S. john of jerusalem, commonly called at this day great Master of the Knights of Malta.  
Having discoursed of the knights of Malta, and of their orders and government, I hold it necessary for the reader's satisfaction to speak something of the first institution and beginning of this order, and of the several names and titles which they have carried, according to the places of their abode; and withal (observing my author's method) to set down the names of all the great Masters successively in order as they have governed, and the memorable exploits which they did during the time of their governments. The Saracens being masters of jerusalem, and of the holy Temple which they ruined. About the year 1048, certain gentlemen and Italian merchants used to frequent the ports and maritime towns of Syria and Egypt, who (for that they brought merchandise which was pleasing into those countries) were well entertained not only by the government of the town, but by the Galife of Egypt: these Christians going often to jerusalem to visit the holy places, and having no place of retreat within the city, they obtained leave to build a Church, a Palace, with certain Monasteries for the lodging of Pilgrims▪ but in the end they caused an Hospital to be built for the receiving of all sorts of Pilgrims both sick and whole, and in like manner a Church which was dedicated to S. john Baptist. And these were entertained by the care and charge of those which had founded them, unto the time that the Christian princes had conquered the city from the Infidels, and that Godfrey of Bovillon was chosen king, which was in the year 1099.  
1. Whenas the city was taken, Gerrard was rector or governor of the hospital of S. john, who (during the Christians siege) was ill entreated by the Infidels, who kept him long in prison, for that they feared he had some secret intelligence with the Christians, who besieged it: but the Christians being Masters, he was set at liberty, and governed the hospital of S. john carefully, persuading Christian kings and princes to endow it, the which they did bountifully; so as in France, Italy, Spain, and other countries of Christendom, the hospital of S. john had in short time great possessions. In the year 1113, Pope paschal the second received Gerrard, and the Knights of S. john into the protection of the Apostolic See, and gave them great privileges, ordaining that after the decease of Gerrard they should proceed canonically to the election of another Rector and Governor, who from that time was called great Master of the order of S. john of jerusalem, a name which hath continued five hundred years till this day, and the knights were called hospitaliers, or knights of the hospital of S. john of jerusalem, afterwards they were called knights of Rhodes, and now knights of Malta. Gerrard died in the year 1118.  
2. Raymond du Puy or Podio succeeded by election: in his time the order of the Templars began. He called a general Chapter in jerusalem with the advice of the knights, where he made the statutes of the order, and instituted the rule and form of life which the knights should use: he was called great Master of the order; and qualified himself by his titles, Servant of the poor of jesus Christ, and guardian of the hospital of jerusalem. His rule was confirmed by Calixtus the second, and his successors, who ordained that the knights should live according to the rule of S. Agustine. This great Master seeing the revenues of the hospital to increase daily, and that he could not better employ it than in making war against the Infidels, he offered himself with his religious men, and all their forces to the king of jerusalem, carrying in their ensigns a Cross Argent in a field Gueles, by the order of Pope Innocent the second, in the year 1130. From that time the brethren and religious men were distinguished into three degrees, some were knights, others chaplains, and the third servants, whereas in the beginning there was no distinction, but that some were priests and clerks, and others laymen. From that time there was no enterprise in Palestina against the Infidels, but the great Master was present in person with his knights and religious men. They grew to be in great credit and reputation, and had the managing of great affairs. In the year 1153 Raymond the great Master continued the siege of Ascalon, the which the Infidels had defended above fifty years against the Christians, and in the end took it in the year 1154, for which worthy prize. Pope Anastatius the fourth, gave great privileges to the order of the hospital of S. john, and freed them from the jurisdiction of the Eccelesiastical Prelates of the East, the which bred great troubles betwixt the Bishops of that country, and the knights of this order, who were always supported and favoured by the See of Rome, and the Cardinals. Some hold that Raymond was a Florentine, but the most certain is, that he was a Frenchman borne in Dauphine of a noble family, called du Puy. He died in the year 1160; being reputed a religious, wise, and valiant man.  
3. Auger of Balben was chosen great Master in the place of Raymond, in whose time there was nothing done worthy of memory, but that Baldovin the third, king of jerusalem died, who was much lamented by the Christians, yea by the Infidels, who said that the Christians had great cause to complain for his death, having lost a prince, who had not his equal in all the world. Auger having governed the order in peace about three years, died in the year 1163.  
4. Arnold of Comps succeeded him: he was a man of great valour and council, who soon after his election entered into Egypt with Amolry the new king of jerusalem, who made war against the Calife of Egypt, for that he refused to pay the yearly tribute, having bound himself to Baldo●in the third to pay it continually to the kings of jerusalem. This Arnold having governed four years with great wisdom and valour, died in the year 1167, and there succeeded him  
5. Gilbert of Assalyor Sailly, who was of a great courage, and so liberal, as he inclined to prodigality, especially to soldiers; so as he exhausted all the treasure of the religion, and was forced to borrow money upon interest, upon condition that if he took from the Infidels the town of Balbeis, sometimes called Pelusium, it should remain to the order, the which he happily effected, the third of November 1168, in which year he held a general Chapter in jerusalem, and seeing himself much indebted, and that he had charged the order with above one hundred thousand crowns debt, grieving that all his enterprises succeeded not to his desires, he resolved to renounce the great Mastership, the which he did, in the year 1169.  
6. Gastus or Castus was chosen great Master by the resignation of the other, of whom there is nothing found memorable, his government being so short; for he died in the same year of his election.  
7. joubert, a very religious man, was his successor, who in the year 1176, joined with Philip Earl of Flaunders, who was come into Syria to secure king Baldwin the fourth, against Saladin, who had a mighty army defeated by the Christians being few in number, in the year 1177. In the end Saladin retired out of the country of Damas' in the year 1179, whenas joubert Master of the hospitalliers died, being very charitable and bountiful unto the poor diseased: some writ that grieving to see the affairs of Christendom go manifestly to ruin in Syria, and the dishonourable and prejudicial truce which was made by the king of jerusalem, and the Earl of Tripoli, with Saladin, it shortened his days, having governed the order of S. john ten yerares or thereabouts.  
8. In his place Roger of Molins a man of great valour and judgement, was chosen in the same year 1179. In his time there grew great dissension betwixt the prince of Antioc he and the Patriarch of that place, and Roger was chosen mediator of a peace and accord betwixt them, in the year 1181. Soon after, Roger with Heracleus Patriarch of jerusalem, and Arnold of Troge Master of the Templars, were sent Ambassadors by the king of jerusalem into the West, to demand succours of Christian princes; who were well received by the Pope, Emperor, Philip Augustus the French king, the kings of England, Sicily, and Hungary, and then they returned into Syria, only the master of the Templars died upon the way. In the year of our Redemption 1187, the Earl of Tripoli entering into league with Saladin, he gave him passage, and relieved his army with victuals, who besieging the town of Ptolemaide, the knights of S. john, and the Templars, put his army to rout, and Roger the great Master fight valiantly, died, his horse falling upon him, being bruised with the weight of his arms, and trodden on by the enemy's horse, his body was found among the dead, and buried with much grief: notwithstanding this loss, the knights won the battle, there being 15000 Saracens slain upon the place, after whom  
9 Garnier of Naples in Syria (which was the ancient town of Sichem in Canaan) was chosen great Master, in whose time a bloody battle was given betwixt the Christians and Infidels, in which Guy of Lusignan king of jerusalem was taken prisoner, with the chief in his realm, and the true Cross which the Christians carried in battle, was taken by the Infidels, and almost all the knights of S. john, and the Templars, were slain, some in the battle, and others were beheaded in cold blood, and Garnier the great Master fight valiantly, and being wounded mortally in many places of his body, escaped by the swiftness of his horse, and fled to Ascalon, where he died within ten days after, upon the fourteenth day of the month of julie, having been great Master two months and six days.  
10. Ermengard of Aps was chosen great Master by the knights that were in jerusalem, in the year of our Lord God 1187, the same year, upon the second of October, the city of jerusalem was made subject to the power of Saladin, eighty eight years, two months, and seventeen days, after it had been taken from them by Godfrey of Bovillon, from whence all the Knights, Hospitaliers, and Templars, with all the Christians Latins, were chased, the Hospitaliers redeeming one thousand captives with their own money from the Barbarians. After the loss of jerusalem, the Hospitaliers were always in arms, assisting faithfully the Christian princes, which had crossed themselves for the recovery of the Holy Land, and they did worthy exploits at the siege of Ptolemaide, the which after a long siege of three years was recovered by the Christians, in the year of our Salvation 1191, and in this town the knights of S. john made their residence, and ordinary abode, and the same year the Christians obtained a famous victory against the Infidel and Saladin, wherein they were much assisted by the knights of S. john, and the Templars. The year after, in Winter, in the year of Christ 1192, the great Master of Aps died in the city of Ptolemaide, and in his place was chosen  
11. Geoffrey Duisson; in his time there was a truce made for five years betwixt the Christians and Saladin, whereupon many noblemen and gentlemen of divers nations, which had gotten great possessions in those parts, returned into their countries, and gave their goods to the religion of S. john, the which did much augment the revenues, and after the decease of Henry Earl of Champagne, the Hospitaliers, and Templars, remained governors of the realm of jerusalem, or at the lest of that small part which remained to the Christians, who chose Amaulry of Lusignan (who had succeeded in the realm of Cypress) king of jerusalem, with the consent of the Patriarches, Prelates, and Barons of the realm, in the year of Grace 1194, and soon after the great Master died, to whom succeeded  
12. Alphonso of Portugal, a knight of the order, issued from the house of Portugal, but it is not known for certain what kings son he was; notwithstanding, he made very worthy and commendable statutes, whereof some are inviolably kept at this day; and for that he was of great courage, and too severe, he purchased the hatred of most of the knights of S. john, which made him renounce the Mastership, and to embark for Portugal in the same year that he was chosen, which was in the year 1194, where he died, in the year of Christ 1207.  
13. Geoffrey le Rat, who was grand Prior of France, was chosen great Master by the renunciation of Alphonso; and Saladin died, to whom succeeded his son Noradin, lord of Al●ppo: In his time, Simon, earl of Montfort, was sent by king Philip Augustus with ●● army into Syria, where finding great disorders, he made truce with the Infidels for ten years, in the year of our Redemption 1198: during the which, there was great dissension betwixt the Hospitaliers and Templars, the first, complaining that the Templars had attempted upon their jurisdiction, and contemned them which quarrel, after many skirmishes and furious encounters, was pacified and reconciled by the means of king Amaulry, the patriarches of Antioch and jerusalem, and other Christian Princes and Prelates, who made them refer it to Pope Innocent the third, the which was the cause of great good, for next unto God, the only hope and support of the affairs of the Holy Land depended upon the love and concord of these two military orders. In the year 1●●6, the great Master le Rat died, to whom succeeded  
14 Guerin of Montagu, of the nation of Auvergne, who with the knights of his order relieved Livon, king of Armenia, against the Barbarians, who had invaded his realm, and for recompense, he gave them the town of Salef, with the castles of Camard and Chasteaneuf, and their dependences, and recommended himself, with his heir and realm, to the knights of the Hospital of S. john, which gift was confirmed by Pope Innocent the third, about the year of our Salvation 1209, whenas john of Brienna and Marie his wife, herre to the realm, were crowned King of Jerusalem: The same Pope confirmed and augmented the statutes and privileges of the order of S. john: Soon after, by the persuasion of Pope Honorius the third, the king of Hungary, and the Archduke of Austria, crossed themselves, and were recommended by him to the great Master Guerin, and the knights of S. john, to assist them in the recovery of the Holy Landlord Andrew king of Hungary lodged in their palace, and entreated them to receive him into the number of the brethren of their religion, giving them five hundred marks of yearly rent, the which he assigned upon the Salt-pits of his realm. In the year of our Redemption 1222, the great Master Guerin pacified a great discord betwixt Isabel Queen of Cypress, and king Henry her son, and the Lords and Barons of the realm of the one part: and the Archbishops, Bishops, and Prelates of the realm of the other, in regard of their tenths and possession. In the year of our Salvation 1230, the great Master Guerin died in the city of Ptolemaide, who for his wisdom and great valour was much esteemed by the Christian princes, and greatly lamented by the knights and religious of his order, in whose place was chosen  
15. Bertrand of Texi: during his government the Christian affairs depended wholly upon the Hospitaliers and Templars, who although they had great quarrels among themselves; yet they agreed well, for that which concerned the good and advancement of the Christians against the Infidels. In the year of our Lord God 1240, Bertrand died at Ptolemaide soon after the arrival of Richard earl of Cornwell, brother to Henry king of England into Palestina, with an army of forty thousand men, to whom succeeded by election  
16. Gerin, whose surname is not known; he gave to the earl of Cornwall a small portion of the blood of our Lord and Saviour jesus Christ, the which was kept in jerusalem by the Master of the Hospiaall of S. john, the which he brought into England. The great Master Gerin fight valiantly against the Corasmins' Infidels, was taken prisoner, and sent to the soldan of Egypt, where he ended his mortal life, in the year of our Lord God 1244, in whose place the knights of S. john did choose for their great Master  
17. Bertrand of Comps, who being in a furious battle which was given against the turcomans', who spoiled the country about Antioch, in the year of our Redemption 1●●8, received many deadly wounds whereof he died, in whose place, in the city of Ptole●ai●e, was chosen  
18. Peter of Villebride, in whose time S. Lewis the French king came into Syria, with many Princes and Prelates of France, and besieged Damiette, where, being assisted by the hospitaliers and templars, the town soon yielded to the king. In the year 1250, the soldan of Egypt gave battle to the Christians, whereas king Lewis was taken prisoner with his brethren Charles and Alphonso, and the king of Cypress, with the great Master of S. john, and Templars, and the greatest part of their knights: whereupon there was an accord made betwixt the king S. Lewis and the soldan, and the knights of S. john lent S. Lewis money to pay his ransom. In the year 1251, the great Master Villebride died in the city of Ptolemaide, to whom succeeded by election  
19 William of Chasteauneuf or Castelnau, of the nation of Auvergne, who was a great observer of justice. In his time the Christians of the holy Land lost all hope to be relieved by the Christians of Europe. He died in the year 1260, and there succeeded  
20. Hugh Revel, in whose time Pope Vrbain the fourth gave unto the knights of S. john Mount Tabor, in the year 1261, and soon after they took the Castle of Lilion from the Saracens, & defeated two of their colonels, which made the soldan of Egypt resolve to ruin the knights of S. john; so as in the year 1265, he took from them the Castle of Assur, at the which there were ninety knights of the order slain. This did much weaken the religion of S. john, and in the year 1267 the hospitaliers and templars were defeated in battle by the Sarrazins near to the city of Ptolemaide. In the year 1270, the soldan took the Castle of Crac by assault from the hospitaliers, whereas all the knights were put to the sword. Some hold that the great Master Revel assisted the king S. Lewis in his voyage towards Tunis, where he died of the plague. In the year 1278, the great Master ended his days, having held five Chapters of the religion of S. john, where there were goodly statutes made for the government and reformation of the order.  
21. Nicholas Lorgue was chosen after him, who not to yield to his predecessor, knowing that nothing did more ruin commonweals and states, than discord and dissension, he laboured in such sort, as he reconciled the knights of S. john, and the templars, and made them good friends. In the year 1282, the knights of S. john obtained a famous victory against the Sarrazins, who were come to besiege the Castle of Margat, which was their chief fort, the which moved the soldan to besiege it, in the year 1285; but it was valiantly defended by the knights, who in the end yielded it by composition, and retired to Polemaide with their ensigns displayed. In the year one thousand two hundred eighty and eight, the great Master Lorgue died of grief, to see the Christians affairs so decline in the holy Landlord  
22. john of Villiers of the nation of France was chosen great Master. In his time the towns of Tripoli, Sydonia, Barut, and tire were taken from the Christians, and reduced under the power of the soldan, with whom the Christians of Ptolemaide made a truce, and in the mean time the great Masters of S. john and of the Templars, came to Brundisium to solicit Christian princes to undertake the conquest of the holy Landlord In the year 1291, the soldan came and besieged Ptolemaide, the which was valiantly defended by the knights of the Hospital and Temple, who made many sallies, and the great Master being wounded did long withstand the assaults of the Barbarians, but in the end it was taken the eighteenth of May the same year, and with this loss the Christians were driven out of the holy Land nineteen years, ten months, and three days after that Godfrey of Bovillon had conquered it. The great Master with the rest of the knights retired by sea into the Island of Cypress, where they were well entertained by the king, who gave to them & the templars the town of Limisson, which is a sea port to dwell in, whereas the great Master called two general Chapters, one in the year one thousand two hundred ninety and two, and the other was in the year following, where he made new statutes for the order: and in the year 1294 he died at Limisson, and there succeeded him  
23. Odo des Pins of the nation of Provence. He incurred the hatred and disgrace of the knights of his order, who had an intent to deprive him by reason of his negligence and covetousness, but it was stayed by Pope Boniface the eight to avoid scandal, and in the end he was cited to appear personally at Rome to answer the complaints of the hospitaliers, but he died upon the way before the came into Italy in the year 1296.  
24. The knights hearing of the death of their great Master des Pins, chose William of Villaret at Limisson, the four and twentieth of March 1296, to succeed him. He was also of Provence, and prior of Saint giles, where he was at the time of his election; but being advertised thereof, he went presently into the realm of Cypress, and governed in this charge very wisely. In his time Vssum Cassan king of the Tartarians become a Christian, and recovered the city of jerusalem, in the year 1300, into the which he put the knights of the hospital and temple in Garrison, but it was soon taken again by the Infidels, and the knights returned into Cypress, whereas the great Master passed to a better life, in the year 1308, having held five general Chapters at Limisson, and seen the total ruin of the knights of the temple.  
25. Folquet of Villaret, of the same nation of Povence, was chosen in his place, being a man of a quick spirit, and of great courage. Seeing himself advanced to this sovereign dignity, he resolved to put that in exeution which had been often treated of in his predecessors time, but could not be effected, which was to retire out of the Island of Cypress, and devil in some other place, the which he brought happily to pass: for in the year of his election, being 1308, he made a voyage to Constantinople, and afterwards into France, whereas the Pope gave him the Island of Rhodes, the which he conquered with his knights, in the year 1309, and seven Islands near unto it, into which was transferred the abode of the order of S. john; so as they were afterwards called the knights of Rhodes. Presently after Ottoman, who was the first Emperor of the Turks, came and besieged Rhodes with a mighty army, the which was relieved by Amedee the fourth, Earl of Savoy, and Ottoman was forced to raise the siege. The templars having been suppressed by a general Council held at Vienna in Dauphine, most of their possessions were given to the religion of S. john by Pope Clement the fift. In the year 1314, the knights of Rhodes conquered the Island of Lango, and other Islands of the Archipelagus, and in the year 1317, the great Master Folquet pleasing himself in his victories and conquests become glorious and proud, which purchased him the hatred of the religion, and the knights of the order revolted against him, and had seized upon his person if he had not fled into a Castle, but not being able to take him, they deposed him of his dignity, and chose in his place  
26. Maurice of Pagnac, whereof Pope john the two and twentieth, being advertised, he was much troubled, deputing two prelates to go to Rhodes, and to inform themselves of the fact, and to cite the great Masters of Villaret and Pagnac to appear personally at avignon, whereunto they obeyed, and the Pope in the mean time created Gerard des Pins lieutenant general of the order of S. john; in whose time Orcanes Emperor of the Turks made preparation to besiege the Island of Rhodes, of whom the knights of Rhodes obtained a wonderful victory in the year 1321, where there were ten thousand Turks cut in pieces. In the mean time Maurice of Pagnac died at Mountpelier, in the year one thousand three hundred twenty and two, and Folquet of Villaret was restored to his dignity of great Master, who seeing himself hateful to the knights, he renounced it in the year 1323, and lived as a private knight until the first of September 1327, when he died, and was interred at Montpelier.  
27. The year of his renunciation the knights of Rhodes presented unto Pope john, Elion of Villeneufe of the nation of Provence, and prior of S. giles, to be their great Master, whereat his holiness, and all the Cardinals, and Knights of Rhodes were much contented, for that he had the reputation to be honourable, virtuous, and honest. This great Master held a general chapter at Montpelier, in the year 1330, and going towards Rhodes, he fell very sick at Marceilles, but he recovered his health in the year 1332, and came in the end to Rhodes, and the same year he held a general Chapter, where there were good statutes made: under his government the order not only freed itself fi●● debt, but also grew rich; so as many envied it, and persuaded the Pope in the year 1342, to divide it into two military orders, the which took no effect. In the year 1343, there was a league made betwixt the signory of Venice, the religion of S john, and the king of Cypress. The great Master, in the year of our Lord God 1346, having purchased the name of happy Governor, died at Rhodes, having in his life time enclosed the great masters palace with walls and towers, and divided the nations, bailiwicks, and dignities of the order.  
28. Presently after the death of Villeneufue, Deodate of Gozon, a knight also of Provence, was chosen great Master. About four years before he was advanced to this sovereign dignity, he had fought with a monstrous Dragon, which afflicted the Island of Rhodes, and had slain it, for the which he was so much honoured, as his memory will be for ever commendable to posterity. In the year 1347, he relieved the king of Armenia against the soldan of Egypt: Pope Clement the sixt did so esteem the knights of Rhodes, as in a manner all the forts which the holy See did hold in Italy were governed by them; and, in the year 1353, the son of john Cantacuzen, emperor of Constantinople, came to Rhodes to demand succours of the great Master, who having governed the religion of S. john seven years, six months, and ten days, died, in the year 1353, and was buried in the Church of S. john of Rhodes, having caused the peer there to be built, and the bourough of Rhodes to be walled about: He had held two general Chapters, one in the year 1346, and the other 1362.  
29. Peter de Cornilian, Prior of S. giles, of the nation of Provence, was chosen great Master, the which he held but a year, eight months, and seventeen days; for falling sick in the town of Rhodes, he died, in the year 1355. He was a man of an exemplary life, and so severe, as he was called the Corrector of manners: He held a general Chapter at Rhodes, in the year of Christ 1354, where many good and profitable laws were made.  
30. After the great masters decease, according to their accustomed form, Roger des Pius, of the nation of Provence, was chosen great Master. In his time the Pope persuaded the religion of S. john to purchase the principality of Achaia of james of Savoy, Prince of Piedmont; and there was a general assembly of the knights of Rhodes in the town of avignon, to treat of this purchase, and to reform certain abuses which were crept into this order. In the year of our Lord God one thousand three hundred sixty five, the great Master died, and was much lamented, especially of the poor, to whom he was very charitable.  
31. Raymond Berengier, of the same nation of Provence, was chosen great Master, having been before commander of castle Sarrazin: He presently sent his Ambassador to avignon to the Pope, to yield him obedience and fealty. In his time, the king of Cypress, and the religion of S. john, made a league together, and took the town of Alexandria in Egypt by force, the which they spoiled, and burnt; and in the year of our Redemption 1366, the Pope wrote to all Christian Princes, persuading them to secure the religion of S. john, and the king of Cypress, giving great indulgences to such as should relieve them. The Armenians being expelled their houses by the Satrazins, were charitably received by them of the religion into the Island of Lango; and at the same time, the town of Tripoli in Syria was taken and spoiled by the king of Cypress, and the knight of Rhodes. In the year of our Redemption 1371, the great master was chosen Nuncio of the apostolic See, to pacific the divisions which were in the realm of Cypress, whither he went in person, and suppressed all dissensions by his authority and wisdom. In the year 1373, the great master had a will to resign his place, to the which end, he sent a divine his kinsman to the Pope to demand leave, the which Pope Gregory the eleventh would not grant, but commanded him to continued in that charge for the good of Christendom. Soon after, he died, having governed the order about eighteen years and a half, during the which he had held two general Chapters at Rhodes, where many good laws were made, according to the necessity of the time.  
32. Robert of juliac, or juli, great Prior of France, was chosen great Master when he was in the government of his Priory, who hearing the news of his election went presently to avignon to kiss the Pope's feet, whereas he was very well entertained, and much honoured, and there he held a general assembly of the order, and the Pope gave the government of the town of Smyrne to the order of S. john, commanding the great Master to accept thereof upon pain of excommunication, who, in the year 1374, embarked for Rhodes, where he arrived happily, and by his presence pacified all rumours and disorders which had grown by his absence. He died in 1376, to whom succeeded  
33. john Fernandes of Heredia, of the nation of Arragon, borne at Valencia, who had been Prior of Cattalogne, and Chastelain of Embosta, and had been twice married, who being a widower, took the habit, and was made knight of Rhodes in the time of the great Master of Villeneufue; being a simple knight, with the leave of the great Master, he went to visit the holy Sepulchre. When he was great Master, he went towards Rhodes, in the year 1377, and being required by the General of the Venetian army to join with him, and to go into Morea, in the year 1378, they besieged the town of Patras, and took it with the castle, and the great Master fight body to body with the governor of Patras, slew him, after which he was taken prisoner in an Ambuscadoe of Turks, and known by them; so as to recover his liberty, they restored to the Turks, Patras, and other places which they had conquered, and yet they carried him away into Armenia, and detained him captive three years: He was redeemed in the year 1381, and returned to Rhodes; the year following, he held a general Chapter, where it was resolved, That the great Master should go into France, who coming to avignon, Pope Clement the seventh was acknowledged by him, and the whole order of S. john, for the true Vicar of jesus Christ: whereupon, Pope Vrban the sixt, who lived then at Rome, deprived him of his dignity of great Master, and subrogated in his place Richard Caracciola, a Neapolitan, in 1383; but the order would never acknowledge him for great Master, who died at Rome, in the life time of Heredia. In the year 1395, Bajazet, emperor of the Turks, made some preparations to besiege Rhodes; whereupon, Philibert of Naillac, prior of Aquitaine, was sent from the Convent of Rhodes, to the great Master, being at avignon, with letters to demand succours against Bajazet, from whence he returned to Rhodes in 1396, in which year the great Master Heredia died, and was buried in Caspe.  
34. News of the great masters decease being come to Rhodes, Philibert of Naillac, of the nation of France, and grand Prior of Aquitaine, was chosen great Master, in the year 1396. He was entreated by Sigismond, king of Hungary, to secure him against Bajazet, the which he did in person, in the year 1397: and there was a battle given at Nicopolis, whereas Bajazet had the victory, from the which the king of Hungary escaped, and retired himself, with the great Master, to Rhodes, whither the Emperor of Constantinople sent his most precious jewels to keep, fearing lest Bajazet should take Constantinople, but he was hindered by Tamberlan, who defeated Bajazet, and took him captive; and the siege of Constantinople being raised, the great Master sent back the emperors jewels. After the defeat of Bajazet, the great Master sailed with an army into Caria, where he built an inexpugnable for't, which he called the castle of S. Peter. In the year 1399, there was war betwixt the king of Cypress and the Genevois, the which was pacified, and they reconciled by the authority and wisdom of the great Master of Naillac, to whom the soldan of Egypt sent an Ambassador to demand a peace. During his time there were divers general assemblies held, and he died in the year 1421, in whose place was chosen.  
35. Anthony Flwiano, or Riviere, of the nation of Arragon. In his time there was a general Chapter held at Rhodes, in the year of Christ 1430, where there were Ambassadors deputed by the order of S. john to assist at the Council of Basil. In the year of our Lord 1434, the soldan of Egypt grown proud with the victory which he had gotten at Cypress, broke the truce, and made great preparations with an intent to besiege Rhodes, but hearing that the great master had made good provisions to defend himself, he gave over the enterprise, so as the order lived in peace. In the year 1437, the great Master died, having governed the order with much wisdom about sixteen years and a half.  
36. Nicholas of Lastic, of the nation of Auvergne, was chosen great Master in his place, who at the time of his election was absent, and remained in Auvergne, where he was prior: before his going to Rhodes, he held an assembly at Valencia, and came to Rhodes in December 1438. In the year of our redemption 1440, the soldan of Egypt coming near unto the Island of Castelrouge, which did belong unto the religion, with an army, and turning from thence towards Rhodes, he was chased by the army of the knights, who had but eight galleys; and in the Souldan's army there were eighteen: in which fight there were but seven hundred Saracens slain, and a great number hurt, which did so incense the soldan, as he made a league with Amurath Emperor of the Turks, with an intent to take Rhodes, and to chase away the knights: and in the year one thousand four hundred forty four, he came to besiege Rhodes, the which was valiantly defended by the knights, and in September the same year there was a general assembly held at Rhodes, to supply the necessity of the order. The next year following, the great Master made a peace with Amurath, and in the year one thousand four hundred forty and six, there was a peace concluded betwixt the religion and the soldan. In the year one thousand four hundred fifty and one, a general Chapter was held at Rhodes, where the government of the treasure, and convent was given to the great master, who, in the year 1452, after the death of Amurath, renewed the peace with Mahomet the second, his son. And the year following, having taken the city of Constantinople, he grew proud of this happy success, and sent word to the great master, that he should pay him two thousand ducats tribute yearly, otherwise he meant not to entertain the peace which he had sworn, to whom the great Master made a courageous answer, that neither the religion, the Island of Rhodes, nor he were subject to any but to the apostolic See, and that he would never pay him any tribute, being resolved rather to die, than in his time to suffer the religion to be subject and tributary, having been always free; whereupon he deputed Ambassadors to the Pope and the Christian princes to have succours from them against perjured Mahomet: and in the year 1454, the great Master died, having valiantly governed the religion sixteen years, six months, and thirteen days.  
47. james of Milly, of the nation of Auvergne, whereof he was prior, succeeded him, being in his priory at the time of his election, whereof his nephew George of Boisrond, brought him the first news, whereupon he went presently to Rhodes, where he held a general Chapter. In the year 1456, the Island of Rhodes was much afflicted with pestilence and famine; so as it was half desert: for the repeopling whereof, there were general citations sent to all the knights to repair thither within a certain time. In the year 1457, Mahomet besieged the Island of Lango, and the Castle of the Island of Apes, but he was valiantly repulsed, and the knights won a famous victory: and the same year Charles the seventh, the French king, gave sixteen thousand crowns to the order. In the year of our salvation 1460, there was a general Chapter held at Rhodes, to the which there were many Priors, bailiffs, and Commanders of the order, cited for the defence of the religion; and the year following, the great Master died, having governed the order seven years, two months, and sixteen days, with great wisdom, in a very turbulent and troublesome time. He was much lamented, for that he was mild, affable, and courteous, and desirous to entertain peace and unity among his religious.  
38. Peter Reymond Zacosta, of the nation of Arragon, Chastellain of Emposta, was chosen great Master, being then absent in Spain, from whence he parted in the year one thousand four hundred sixty and two, and passing by Rome, he came to Rhodes, where he held a general chapter, during the which, the eight tongue or nation of Castille and Portugal was erected in the order, there being but seven nations, which were France, Auvergne, Provence, Italy, Arragon, England, and Germany. In the year of our redemption one thousand four hundred sixty and four, the Venetians army besieged Rhodes, but the siege was soon raised, and the Venetians returned home again, the war being pacified by the wisdom of the great Master, who caused the tower of Saint Nicholas to be built at the mouth of the port of Rhodes, in the same place, whereas in old time did stand that great Colosse of the Sun, numbered among the wonders of the world: towards which building Philip duke of Bourgandie gave ten thousand crowns. In the year 1465, the great Turk sent Ambassadors to Rhodes, to mediate a peace betwixt the knights and him, but it was refused by them of the order, who in the presence of the Ambassador denounced was against the Turk. The year following the Pope transferred the celebration of a general Chapter to Rome, whither the great master came in person, and died there in the year 1467, having governed five years, six months, and ten days. He was buried in S. Peter's Church.  
39 Baptista Orsino prior of Rome, of the nation of Italy, succeeded him, and was advanced to this dignity by the Pope, for that it was voided in the court of Rome, but it was with the advice and consent of all the religious of the order of S. john which were then in Rome, and the great master did presently take an oath in the Pope's hands, and then went to Rhodes, where in the year 1469, having had certain intelligence that the great Turk prepared a mighty army to besiege Rhodes or Negrepont, he sent for a great number of knights that were absent to come to the defence of the Island, and he made a league with the signory of Venice against the Turk; but in the year 1470, Mahomet took the town of Negrepont by force, where he committed horrible cruelties, kill all the Latins in cold blood, and proclaiming war against them which were of the order, by the sound of a trumpet, upon which occasion the great master sent to demand succours from the Pope, and the Rhodians began to fast to make vows, prayers, and public processions to implore the aid of heaven, making all the preparations they could to defend themselves against the Turkish army. And in the year 1471, the great master held a general Chapter at Rhodes, where there was some question against the procurators of the treasure, the which was ended by the Legate of Pope Sixtus the fourth, who came to Rhodes to that end. In the year one thousand four hundred seventy and six, the great master died of a long and tedious sickness which had held him a whole year, having governed the order with great authority, gravity, and wisdom, nine years, three months, and three days.  
40. Peter of Aubusson, prior of Auvergne, and of that nation, and captain of the town of Rhodes was chosen great master, who swore solemnly, according to the custom, to keep the statutes of the order, sending an Ambassador to Rome to advertise the Pope of his election, and to yield unto him due obedience. In the year one thousand four hundred seventy and seven, he went to visit all the Island of Rhodes, and made very great and extraordinary provisions for the defence thereof against the Turks army, citing many prior's, commanders, and knights to assist at a general Chapter, and the defence of the Island, and he renewed the peace with the soldan of Egypt. The same year king Lewis the eleventh, obtained a jubilee in France of the Pope, in favour of the knights of Rhodes, whereby they raised great sums of money, the which was wholly employed in the fortification of the Island. In the year of our salvation one thousand four hundred seventy and eight, the great master held a general Chapter, where the administration of the treasure was given him, and the religion of the holy Sepulchre of jerusalem was united to that of S. john. The year following, it was resolved in Mahomet's Council, that Rhodes should be besieged, whereof, the great master being advertised, he sent presently advice unto the Pope, and demanded succours, and in the year one thousand four hundred and eighty, the great Turk came before the town of Rhodes with a mighty army: at this siege there were many sallies made, and the Turks were still repulsed, having in their army one hundred thousand fight men, and one hundred and sixty sail: the great master was relieved by Anthony of Aubusson, viscount of Montelis, his brother, who was a great soldier, and was made general of the army of the besieged. The Turks had in few days discharged three thousand and seven hundred cannon shot against the walls, and gave a furious assault with 40000 men, who were valiantly repulsed, in which the great master received five wounds, whereof one was held mortal; but in end the Turks, after eighty and nine days siege were forced to rise, and to return with a great loss and shame, to Constantinople. In memory of this victory, there was a Church built at Rhodes, and it was dedicated to our Lady of victory. After this siege, Mahomet the second resolved to come in person to Rhodes, and there was a general assembly made of knights, but the death of Mahomet disappointed this design, and his children, Bajazet and Zizime, were in war after their father's decease, the which gave some rests to the knights of Rhodes; yea Zizime fled to Rhodes to the great Master for aid, in the year of our Lord God 1482, where he was received with much honour, and so conducted into France. In the time of this great master of Aubusson, the statutes of the order were reform, and reduced into one volume, and a peace was concluded betwixt the knights of the order of S. john, and the great Turk Bajazet, the Pope having given the great master power to treat. He was made a Cardinal Deacon by Pope Innocent the eighth, in the year 1488, who sent him a cardinals hat, and made him his Legate in Asia; and in the year 1500, Pope Alexander the sixt made him Legate and General of the army of the league against the Turk: Finally, he died at Rhodes, in the year 1503, full of honour and reputation, and was interred with a great funeral pomp: He had lived eighty years, three months, and four days, and governed the order seven and twenty years, and sixteen days. In his time there were five general Chapters held at Rhodes, in which many commendable statutes were made.  
41. There were 387 knights assembled at Rhodes when he died, who chose to succeed him Emery of Amboyse, brother to George of Amboyse, Cardinal and Legate in France, and Archbishop of Roven. He was of the French nation, and great Prior in France, where he was at the time of his election. In the year 1504, he made a solemn entry into Rhodes, where he was received with much joy, the kings of France and Spain having written letters of commendation to the Convent in his favour. Presently after his arrival, he held a general Chapter, where it was ordained, That there should be a sumptuous sepulchre made for the deceased Cardinal and great master; and in the year 1510, he held another general Chapter in which year the knights of Rhodes obtained a famous nanall victory against the soldan of Egypt, by the conduct of Philip of Villiers of Lisle Adam, a French knight, who was afterwards great master. In the year 1512, the great master died, having governed nine years, four months, and three days, being above seventy eight years old.  
42. The knights of the order being assembled to the number of four hundred and ten, choose for their great master Guy of Branchfort, Prior of Auvergne, nephew to the deceased great master of Aubusson, being resident at in his priory the time of his election. In the year 1513, the great master of Blanchfort embarking himself at Nice in Provence to go to Rhodes, he was surprised with sickness upon the way, whereof he died a year and two days after his election.  
43. Fabricio of Caretto, a Genevois, of the nation of Italy, was chosen to succeed him in a general assembly held at Rhodes, where there were five hundred and fifty knights, Caretto himself being present, having before been Admiral of the order. The body of the deceased great master of Blanchfort was brought to Rhodes, and honourably interred in S. john's Church. In the year 1514, a general Chapter was held at Rhodes, after which, Philip of Villiers of Lisle Adam, Seneshal to the great master, was sent into France with sovereign authority over all the priories of the realm, with the quality of Visitor, Corrector, Lieutenant, and Ambassador to the great Master and Convent. In the year 1516, a peace was made betwixt them of the religion of S. john, and Tomombey soldan of Egypt, successor to Campson Gauri, who a little before had been slain in battle by Selym Emperor of the Turks; but Tomombey was unfortunate, for in the year 1517, he was taken and hanged in one of the gates of the great Cairo, by the commandment of Selym: Whereupon, the great master fortified the Island of Rhodes, and sent Ambassadors to the Pope, and Christian Princes, to advertise them of Selyms victories, and to crave aid: but, in the year 1520, Selym died, and Sultan Soliman his son succeeded him; and the year following, the great master of Caretto ended his days at Rhodes, having governed seven years, and six and twenty days, leaving great store of provision and munition, whereof his successor had afterwards need.  
44. Philip of Villiers, of Lisle Adam, grand Prior of France, where he was at the time of his election. During his absence, Gabriel of Pomereux, great Commander, was chosen Lieutenant to the great Master, whom he presently advertised of the death of Caretto, and that he had succeeded him by election, entreating him to come presently to Rhodes, where he arrived soon after, and made a solemn entry, swearing to observe the statutes of the order. The same year of his election, Sultan Solyman resolved to besiege Rhodes, and to execute the last will of his father Selym, whereof the great Master of Villiers being advertised, he made all the preparations he could to defend himself against the Turks enterprises, fortifying the town of Rhodes with all speed, and sending an Ambassador to Pope Adrian the sixt, to congratulat his election, and to demand succours, the which he could not obtain, by reason of the wars which were betwixt king Francis the first, and the Emperor Charles the fift. In june, in the year of our Lord 1522, began that memorable siege of the town of Rhodes, before which there was an army of two hundred thousand Turks, the which was afterwards increased to 300000: They defended themselves most valiantly, and there were brave exploits of war done, especially by the great Master, who was continually armed: The enemy was repulsed in many assaults, in one of which there were twenty thousand Turks slain upon the place, and Solyman was resolved to raise the siege, but there were trayt●rss which stayed him, and those were punished; yet in the end, the great Master having no succours, was forced to yield the town by composition, the four and twentieth of December, in the year of our Salvation 1522, the Turks having lost above one hundred thousand men. Solyman would needs see the great Master, whom when he saw, tears fell from his eyes for compassion. Upon the first of januarie, in the year of our Redemption 1523, the great Master parted from Rhodes with fifty sail, and bend his course towards Candie, after that the Island of Rhodes had been in the power of the knights of the Hospital two hundred and thirteen years. After the loss of Rhodes, the great Master and his knights had no certain abode, until that the Island of Malta was given them by the Emperor Charles the fift: for they retired first into Candie, from thence they came into Sicily and Italy, whereas the Pope did furnish them with the town of Viterbe, in which they held a general Chapter: Afterwards, they stayed some time at Cornette, and then at Villefranche, and at Nice, from whence the great Master made a voyage into England, and from thence into France, and being at Lion, he fell very sick, but after his recovery, he went to Chambery to christian prince Philibert Emanuel son to Charles duke of Savoy, and so returned to Nice, from whence he parted with the army of the religion, and all the Convent, to go to Malta, where he arrived the six and twentieth of October, in the year of Christ 1530, and there he built a palace in the castle of S. Ange for him and his successors, where, having made a solemn entry, he caused another palace to be built in the old city of Malta; and finally, having governed the religion thirteen years, and seven months, being seventy years old, he died at Malta, the one and twentieth of August, in the year 1534, and was buried in a Chapel which he had caused to be built in the castle of S. Ange, and there succeeded by election.  
45. Pierrin of Pont, borne at Astella, of the nation of Italy. Before the taking of Rhodes, he was governor of the Island of Lango, and after the loss thereof, he parted with all the knights of his government, and came and joined with the army of the religion in the Island of Candie. He was made Seneschal to the great Master, and Bailiff of Lango, and was sent in embassage to the Lord of Lautrec: He was chosen Bailiff of S. Eufemia in the Convent of Nice, where remaining, he was chosen great Master, after the decease of his predecessor, the which he much lamented, showing little joy of his election: He embarked in the galleys of the religion, and came to Malta the tenth of November, the same year 1534. In his time, the Emperor Charles the fift went in person to Tunes of Africa, where he was assisted by the galleys of the religion, the knights doing great exploits of arms, especially at the taking of Golette, which was held inexpugnable. This war being ended, the great master died, in the year 1535, being seventy three years old, having governed but fourteen months, and two and twenty days, and was buried near to his predecessor Villiers.  
46. Dydier of S. jaille of Tolon, prior of Tolousa, of the nation of Provence, was chosen great Master: being in his priory at the time of his election, and being advertised thereof, the good old man lifting up his hands to heaven, said, God, God, if it be necessary for thy people, I will not refuse this pain and toil; and soon after he began his journey to go to Malta being very old, and coming to Montpelier, he cell exceeding sick, whereof he died the six and twentieth of September 1536, and was buried with great honour in the Church of the Commaunderie of S. giles without the gates of Montpelier, being much lamented, for the great opinion they had of his justice, bounty, and valour. The religion being advertised of his decease the eighteenth of October, proceeded presently to the election of  
47. john of Homedes, of the nation of Arragon, who was then in Spain, from whence he parted, and came to Malta in januarie 1538, where he was received with great joy; but he was discontented, for that they had not sent the galleys, nor the carrack of the religion to conduct him, whereupon he caused the great carrack to be disarmed and broken, for the which there was some complaints made against him. He discoursed willingly of the siege of Rhodes, to let the world know that he had lost an eye there. He made a park for beasts, and a goodly garden in the Island of of S. Michael, which ministered occasion to murmur against him, saying that he was forgetful of the government of the commonweal; yea he was taxed of negligence and little care to provide for the Island of Malta against the Turks army, for that he relied too much upon the Castle of S. Ange. In his time the town of Tripoli in Batbarie, was taken by the Turks from them of the religion, whereat he was much amazed. In the year 1552, Leo Strozzi prior of Cap●ua made an enterprise upon the Island of Zoara, the which succeeded ill, for there were many knights slain of all nations, especially, French, Awergnacs, and Provençals, whereof the great Master being advertised, he was much grieved, saying, that it was the greatest loss that came to the religion since the taking of Rhodes. He caused the forts of S. Elm, and S. Michael to be built, and being eighty years old, he died in the year 1558, having governed sixteen years, ten months, and fifteen days, and was interred in the chapel of the great Masters.  
48. claud de la Sangle was chosen great Master, at whose election there assisted about four hundred knights and religious men which were then in Malta: he was of the nation of France, and Ambassador at Rome for the religion, where he received news of his election, whereof he advertised the Pope, and yielded him personal obedience: soon after, divers knights were sent expressly unto him, to accompany him to Malta, where he arrived in januarie 1554. He governed the order very wisely by the advice of five worthy knights his household officers, the which were his Seneschal, Steward, Esquire, Receivor, and Secretary; so as the Estate of the order was very happy during his government, having obtained a privilege of neutrality from Henry the second, the French king, and the Emperor Charles the fift, who were in arms: he was very religious, and governed the revenues of the order frugally, leaving a great treasure, being sixty and three years old, he died of a Catharre in the year 1557, having been great Master three years, eleven months, and seven days, to whom succeeded  
49. john of Valette called Parisot of the nation of Provence. This election was most pleasing to all the order of S. john, for that he was generally beloved of all the nations, and desired as most worthy of that great charge and dignity. In less than two years, he was general of the galleys, bailiff of Lango, great commander, prior of S. giles, and lieutenant to the great Master, and in the end came to the great Mastership. He so loved his order, as after the time he took the habit, he would never return into his country; so as having made his continual residence in the convent, he passed through all the offices and degrees of honour of his profession, showing himself in all his actions to be of a rare judgement, of perfect integrity, and great valour. Being advanced to this sovereign dignity, he resolved to build a new town upon the mountain of S. Elm, knowing that all the other forts were not able to withstand the battery of a powerful enemy, but this design was deferred to an other time. He caused the castle of the Island of Goza to be fortified, and leaving the castle of S. Ange, he came to devil in the bourough of Malta, the which he defended most valiantly against the siege of the Emperor Sultan Soliman, where he was grievously wounded in the leg, in the year 1565; but the siege being raised to the shame and confusion of the Turks, he fortified the Island of Malta, began to build the new city, which was called by his surname Valette, whereof the first stone was solemnly laid by him upon the eight and twentieth of March 1566, and by his care they continued still the building, yea upon festival days, for the which Pope Pius the fift gave a dispensation to the workmen, being to the number of eight thousand; yea he sent a commissary to advance the building, paying five thousand crowns monthly to the workmen, which charge he continued seven months. In the year 1568, the great Master died, the same day he had been chosen, having governed the order eleven whole years. He was much lamented by all his religious, and in like manner by the Pope, and all Christian kings and princes. In his time there were two general Chapters held at Malta, where there were many new statutes made for the government of the religion.  
50. After the obsequies of the great Master Valette, they proceeded to the election of a successor, which was Peter de Monte, of the nation of Italy, being then prior of Capo●a. Presently after his promotion, he caused the body of his predecessor to be brought into the new town, and to be buried in the chapel of our Lady of victory, having deserved the name of the father of soldiers, the buckler and defender of the Catholic faith, and the scourge of Infidels. The new great Master, before he came to this sovereign degree, had showed his wisdom and valour in many other honourable charges; for first of all he had been patron of the admiral galley of the religion, than lieutenant to the general of the galleys, chastellain or governor of the castle of S. Ange at Rome, he was admiral, then general of the galleys, and ambassador for the order to Pope Pius the fourth, and Pope Pius the fift: coming from Rome to Malta, he was soon after chosen great Master, where he caused the new city to be finished, resolving to transfer the convent thither; for this good old man thought to win as much glory in causing the new town of Valette to be inhabited, as his predecessor had done in causing it to be built; so as upon Sunday, the eighteenth of March 1571, the great master made his solemn entry with the convent and knights of the order. In his time the memorable naval battle of Lepante was fought, and a victory gotten of the Turks, in which the knights of the religion did brave exploits of war. This great master was very subject to choler, and soon pacified; so as the knights were not very obedient unto him, and grew careless to execute his commands: whereupon, he began to grow weary, and to have a will to resign the place, writing to Pope Pius the fift, to that end, and beseeching him to suffer him to retire to mount Cassin there to end his days, the which he could not obtain, but soon after he died at Malta, in the year one thousand five hundred seventy and two and there succeeded him  
51. john le Euesque of Cassiere, of the nation of Auvergne, who before his election had showed his valour in many goodly charges; for at the enterprise of Zoara, he was ensign bearer to the religion, whose standard he defended valiantly, and carried it back to Malta, having cast himself therewith into the sea, and recovering one of the galleys of the religion, after that he had fought long against the Infidels. He was afterwards chosen captain general of the horse, commissary of the fortifications, and marshal of the order, and in the end he came to the sovereign degree of great master, where he lived very religiously, there passing no day but he did assist at divine service, and fed thirteen poor folks with his own hands: he caused the church dedicated to S. john Baptist, in the new city of Valette, to be built with his own money, and endowed it with a thousand crowns of yearly rent, and he caused a goodly sepulchre to be built for the bodies of the great masters his predecessors. In the end of his days, he fell into a great inconveniency, for being hated by some discontented knights, he was by their practices suspended from his charge, and a guard set upon him in the castle of S. Ange, the sixt of julie 1581., the which he endured very patiently and virtuously, and complaining to Pope Gregory the thirteenth, and to Christian kings and princes, the Pope sent Gasper Visconte, Auditor of the Rota, and afterwards Archbishop of Milan, to Malta, to govern the religion in the absence of the great Master, whom he sent for to Rome; but the knights had chosen Mathurin of Escut, called Romegus, a Frenchman, to be lieutenant to the great Master, who excused himself, for that he had accepted this charge by force, and against his will. Visconte being come to Malta, the great master embarked in the galleys of the religion, being accompanied by four of the great Cross, and two hundred knights, and entering into Rome, he was received with much honour, and lodged in the palace of the Cardinal of Est at Montecavallo; after which, he went to salute the Pope and Cardinals, and was visited reciprocally by them: In the end, either for grief, or being weary with so long a journey made in the extremity of his age, being seventy eight years old, he fell sick, and died in the year of our Redemption 1581., having governed almost ten years. His body was laid in the Church of S. Lewis, where his obsequies were made, and his funeral oration pronounced by Anthony Muret; his heart was interred there, and his body carried to Malta, and buried in the new sepulchre which he had made for the great masters. After his death, the Pope declared the suspension of the said great master to be voided and unjust, and ordained, that the decree should be enrolled in the Registers of the religion.  
52. Hugh of Loubeux, Verdale of the nation of Provence, was chosen great Master, in the year of our Salvation 1582, who had joined learning to arms from his youth: He was very young when he was made a knight, and was at the enterprise of Zoara, where, having fought valiantly, he escaped, and afterwards past many honourable charges. He was deputed Ambassador to Pope Gregory the thirteenth, whereof he discharged himself very worthily, and was so pleasing unto the knights, as they jointly chose him great Master, having news of the decease of Cassiera. He soon pacified the divisions which were among the knights, and governed the order with much wisdom. Pope Sixtus the fift made him a Cardinal Deacon, in the year of our Lord God 1587., and returning to Malta, he built a Convent of Capucins, fortified the Island, reform the statutes of the order, caused the history to be written in Latin by james Bosius, and freed it of debt, which amounted to above two hundred thousand crowns; yet he was accused to Pope Clement the eighth, to have governed the treasure ill: whereupon, he sent his nephew to Rome to purge himself of this imputation, but the matter being undecided, the great master and Cardinal Verdale died at Malta upon the Ascension day, in the year of our Redemption 1595, being sixty four years old, and having governed thirteen years, three months, and one and twenty days, leaving in the public treasure a great mass of money: He was buried in the Cathedral Church of S. john, with great honour and funeral pomp.  
53. Martin Garzes, of the nation of Arragon, was chosen to succeed him: He was a knight of great bounty, and generally beloved and respected, who although he had passed the age of sixty years, yet was he of a strong and vigorous complexion. He soon pacified the disorder of the knights which had banded against his predecessor: He abolished the imposts which had been imposed, and forbade all the officers of the religion to give any new form to their governments, and that which was most pleasing unto the knights, he did expressly prohibit any knight, yea the great master himself, to have any particular galley or vessel at Sea to make any enterprise to his own profit: and in the end, having governed the religion five years, and nine months, he died at Malta, in the year of our Lord God 1601, and was buried in the sepulchre ordained for the great Masters.  
54. After the decease of the great Master, the knights assembled to choose a new, and on the tenth of February, in the year of our Redemption 1601. Aloph of Vignacourt, of the nation of France, was installed in this sovereign dignity: He came to Malta, in the year of our Salvation 1566, with many other French gentlemen, upon a bruit that the Island should soon be besieged by the Turks army, where he took the habit of the religion under the great Master of Valette: After which, he had great charges wherein he showed his bounty, valour, and wisdom; and amongst others, having been captain of the town of Valette, and soon after, great Hospitalier of the religion: his virtues and good fortune have advanced him to this supreme dignity, in which he now lives with much honour and reputation.    

Of the beginning of Military Orders.  

❧ THE BEGINNING OF MILITARY ORDERS, AS WELL Regular, which have been allowed by the bolie See, under any rule and discipline, as Secular, instituted by Emperors, Kings, and Christian Princes, with their Blazons, and other devices.  
Having discoursed in the former treaty of the religious order of the knights of Malta, it is now fit to speak something of the orders of knighthood, as well Regular as Secular; who like unto other Maccabees have laboured to fight the Lords fight, and who by their true valour, have by the strength of their arms & great courage, most commonly terrified the enemies of their Redeemer, and of his holy religion, how powerful and fearful soever they were; to the end that if the others did fight against invisible enemies in their Cloisters, these defeated and did cut in pieces the visible in open field, both tending to one end, that is to say, to give peace to the Church, and to make the Saviour of the world to be acknowledged.  
He then, to whom all power was given both in heaven and earth, meaning to have the effects of his triumphant victories seen, as well of spiritual as corporal things, presently after the birth of his Church, and that the blood of Martyrs had cemented a good part of the building, he not only made peaceful and quiet spirits to vow their whole lives to holiness; but also, the most warlike dispositions to consecrat their valour and arms to the increase, protection, and defence of the Catholic religion: so as the monarches, and most mightiest potentates of the world, marched under his standard, against whom a little before they had made cruel and bloody wars: witness Constantin the Great, Valentinian the Theodosy, with many other Emperors, who began to carry the Cross in their Blazons and Armouries, yet all of divers colours, some white, some green, some read, and in a manner of the same form that it appeared to Constantin the Great. And for that there are few realms or commonwealths, but had some order of knighthood, it was fit there should be some company which should take the order of the king of kings, and vow itself particularly to his service. It is therefore held, That in the time Constantin the Great, the order of the knights of the holy sepulchre of our Saviour began: for S. Helen his mother going to Jerusalem to found out the holy Cross, and Sepulchre, and having found them by a divine revelation, she caused a stately temple to be built, in the honour of the glorious resurrection of jesus Christ, the which in time was made a monastery of regular Chanoins of S. Augustine. But at that time the guard of the holy Sepuchre was committed to certain gentlemen of her train, who were the first knights of this order, which was continued in that place; so as, even when the Saracens and Turks had seized upon all the East, and particularly of Palestina, tyrannising the Christians in jerusalem, against whom they used all sorts of cruelty: these were tolerated, paying a yearly tribute; yet feeling of the common miseries of the faithful, these Barbarians crossing them all they could. Their chief charge was to guard the holy Sepulchre, to make war against Infidels, to redeem captives, to hear mass daily, having opportunity, to recite the hours of the Cross, and to wear five read crosses in remembrance of the five wounds of our Saviour. Some refer their beginning and institution to the Apostle S. james Bishop of jerusalem, who suffered death for the faith, in the year 63: and it seems that in consideration thereof, the knights of this order are under the obedience of the patriarch of that city.  

¶ The order of the knights of S. Maurice, and S. Lazare among the Savoyards.  
SOme hold that the order of S. Lazare began in the time of the great S. basil, by the report of Gregory of Nazianzene, which S. basil built an hospital under the title of S. Lazare, which afterwards gave name unto this order: whereof so many lazar houses dispersed into all parts of Christendom serve to bear witness. But this first institution having been as it were smothered in the cradle by the incursions of Barbarians and other injuries of those former times, it seemed to revive and spring up again in that happy age, whenas Christian princes united into one holy league, took from the Saracens the city of jerusalem, and other places of the holy Landlord The knights of this order receiving charitably into their hospitals the faithful which did run from all parts of Europe to so glorious a conquest, yea furnishing them towards the charge of this happy enterprise, which good office was the cause that Christian princes gave them many houses and possessions, in the year 1154, which donations were confirmed by the bulls of Pope Alexander the fourth, Nicholas the fift, Clement the fourth, john the two and twentieth, and Gregor●e the tenth.  
They make profession of the rule of S. Augustin, and bear for the blazons of their order a green Cross, which Emanuel Philibert duke of Savoy being confirmed their great Master by Gregory the thirteenth, and joining this order with that of Saint Maurice, he environed it about with a white border, in the midst of the which, that of S. Maurice was enclosed.  
As for the order of S. Maurice, the ancient Aunalists of Savoy say, that this was the beginning: Amedee duke of Savoy (who, after his promotion to be Pope, took upon him the name of Felix the fift) having abandoned the world, he confined himself to Ripalle near to the lake Leman, being accompanied by ten knights of noble families, where he embraced a hermits life in a monastery built by his ancestors in honour of S. Maurice, being attired in a long robe of an ashy colour, having a girdle imbroithered with gold, with a cloak upon it of the colour of his robe; upon the which was sewed a cross imbroithered with gold. Francis Modius in his Pandectes, affirms that these hermits, whom he calls knights of S. Maurice, assisted in this habit at the consecration of Felix the fift, their founder, in the year 1440, showing thereby what their religion had been, and what ordinary apparel this new bishop had worn in former times.   

¶ The order of the dog and the cock in France.  
authors have written nothing certain touching the institution of these two orders; yet they do attribute them to the house of Montmorencie, both for that they of this house carry a dog upon their crest, as also for that Philip Morcus in his tables of the armouries of France, writes that Bouchard of Montmorency came to the court to Philip the first, king of France, being followed by many other knights, every one of which did wear a collar full of stag's heads, whereat did hung the image of a dog, to signify the fidelity and sincere affection which they had, and would always carry to the service, protection, and defence of the Christian commonweal, and especially of France, and also to note thereby their ancient nobility, the dog having been the Symbol with all nations, as Lipsius hath observed in his four and fortieth Epist. of the first century.  
As for the order of the knights of the Cock, all that can be said is, that they which have written the genealogy of that famous house report, that one Peter of Montmorency was a knight of this order: whatsoever it be, it is very like that this order took a cock for their Blazon, for that it is the most martial of all other soul; and the ancients call it Mars his bird: it hath been sometimes taken for an Hieroglyfike of victory and vigilance; these knights inferring thereby that they were warlike, vigilant, and victorious.   

¶ The order of the knights of the Genette in France.  
HE who made the use of rings most common in France, was Charles martel that great and valiant prince, who in his time raised the languishing sceptre of our kings, making both Rebels and Infidels to feel his redoubted valour. As this prince was naturally inclined to arms, so he instituted an order of knighthood, which he called Genette, by reason of his wife, as du Haillan writes, for that her name being jeanne, he commonly called her jannette, commanding they should all carry a figure of a Genette or weasel graven upon their arms: but du Bellay is of another opinion, and holds that this invincible prince having defeated the Saracens in that memorable battle, near to the city of Tours, in the year 738, to eternize the memory, and to let future ages know the valour and courage of the French nobility, by whom he was particularly assisted, instituted this order, and gave it the surname of Genette, for that he had ruined that nation which did inhabit that part of Spain, which was so called, by reason of the multitude of such like beasts, the which is a kind of weasel, or rather fox, having the skin pied, white, and ash colour, with a goodly mixture of white and black spots. This order was maintained unto the reign of S. Lewis.   

¶ The order of the knights of the Lily in the realm of Navarre.  
During the reign of Garcias the sixth, king of Navarre, surnamed Navarre, a place memorable for the birth, breeding, ordinary abode, and burial of this prince. The ancient Historians of Spain writ, that the image of our Lady which is in the Church of the royal monastery of that town was miraculously found, and that in honour thereof, this good king, and Tiennette his wife, issued from the houses of Foix and Candelle built a monastery to S. Bennet; but that Garcias alone instituted the order of the knights of the Lily, carrying for their Blazon a pot of lilies, upon the which was painted the image of our Lady, ordaining that the robes of these knights should be very rich and stately. The infants of the royal blood entered into this order, with many great noblemen, both French, Navarrois, and strangers.  
The knights of this order are bound by the ordinance of Garcias their first founder, to maintain and defend the faith against all the enemies thereof, and to increase it with all their power, and they must repeat daily certain prayers, with a certain number of Pater nosters, and ave Maries. Ferdinand of Arragon, who was called the Infant of Antiquera, in the year 1403, entered into this knighthood with some others, who were not so commendable for their noble extractions, as for their virtues, and took the order solemnly in our Lady's Church in the town of Metymne. This devise was a lily pot, and a griffin.   

¶ The order of the Knights of S. john of Jerusalem, called of Malta.  
THe beginning and first institution of this order is attributed to divers, but chiefly and more likely to one Gerrard, who, before the time of Godfrey of Boulloin, being come to visit the holy places of Jerusalem, moved with an extraordinary devotion, and assisted by some other gentlemen who had the like design, they began to build the Hospital of S. john of Jerusalem, and so gave beginning to this order of knights, who were called by the name of their first abode Hospitaliers. Pope Gelacius the second did first allow of this institution: Their garment was a rob, upon the which was sewed a white Cross, with eight points, for a mark of their purity, and of the eight beatitudes whereunto they did aspire, by the concession of Pope Henorius the second. The duty of their profession was, to receive with all charity such as came from any part of the world to visit the holy places, to assist them upon the way, and to secure them against the Arabians and all other Infidels, against the which, with the assistance and succour of Christian princes, they have raised whole armies, and encountered them happily. They conquered from them the Island and town of Rhodes, the which they held above two hundred years, during the which, they were called knights of Rhodes; but in the end, Solyman the second, Emperor of the Turks, dispossessed them. Since, the Emperor Charles the fift gave them the Island of Malta, the which they have always valiantly defended, especially during two sieges which the Turks have laid before it, the one under Solyman the second, and the other under Selimus the second, both Monarches of the Turks, and have forced their enemies to rise with much loss and dishonour. They are at this day called knights of Malta, of the name of the Island No man may come to this degree unless he be of a noble extraction. Their first great master was Raymond de Podio, who afterwards composed and published the constitutions by the which the knights are now governed. They observe the rule of S. Augustin, and say certain numbers of Pater Nosters in stead of the Canonical hours, and they promise' faith, obedience, and chastity. They carry arms in the honour of God, and of S. john Baptist (whom they hold for their patron) for the defence of the Christian faith.   

¶ The order of Knights called Templars.  
THe expedition of the holy war, having been as happily performed, as it was religiously undertaken under the victorious conduct of Godfrey of Bovillon, the order of the knights of the Temple, or Templars (whose institution is referred to the time of Galacius the second) was erected by the princes of France, to preserve that which they had conquered in the Holy Land, from the Saracens. The two first Authors of this institution were Hugon of Payennes, and Godfrey of S. Aumard, knights. And for that king Baldwin appointed them a certain place near unto the Temple for their abode, the knights of this order were called the brethren of the warfare of the Temple, and most commonly Templars. Afterwards, the king, and the chief of the realm, with the Patriarch Grandmont, who did then govern the Church of Jerusalem, assigned them certain lands and revenues for their entertainment. They were bound by the Patriarch and the Bishops, that for the remission of their sins, they must keep the ways free from thieves, for the safety of Pilgrims, whom they were to guard. After this first institution, they continued nine years in a secular habit, the which the people gave them of cha●i●ie and alms. But afterwards, in a Council held at Troy's in Champagne, there was a rule given them, which some hold was set down by S. Bernard, without any Cross, by the ordinance of Pope Honorius, and of Stephen Patriarch of jerusalem. They continued some years in this habit, after which they began to multiply, as they grew rich. In the time of Pope Eugenius the third, and by his authority, they began to wear a read Cross on their cloaks, to be known from others, and to show that they have consecrated their blood for the protection of the Holy Land, and other places of Christendom against infidel's. This Cross had eight points, like unto that of the knights of S. john; but jerosme Romain, a Spaniard, maintains that it was double, such as the Hungarians did carry in their arms. This order in the end grew so powerful, as they did equal great kings in wealth. And whenas Jerusalem was taken by the Infidels, in the year of our Lord God 1187; yet the Templars did still fight valiantly for the religion. Notwithstanding, in the year of our Redemption 1311, it pleased Pope Clement the fift to abolish this order of Templars for the foul crimes, and great offences which they said they had committed: Their possessions were distributed to divers orders of knights, as to them of Rhodes, of S. james, of Calatrava, and Alcantara in Spain.   

¶ The order of the Teuton Knights, of the Hospital of S. Marry in Jerusalem, otherwise called Porte-Croix, or Marianes.  
ABout the same time, Frederick the second, at the instance of Pope Gregory the seventh, having conducted an army into Syria, to advance the progress of the holy war, he was the means to institute this order, and to install it in the Hospital and Church of S. Marry in Jerusalem; the which was confirmed by Pope Celestin the third, under the rule of S. Augustin. These, with the Knights of the Temple, and S. john, aspired to one end and intent, being as it were associated in one profession, differing in nothing but their black Cross, which they wear upon their cloaks, being white. Henry Walpot was their first master: Afterwards, they added the rosary, or our Lady's Psalter, to their scutcheons, the which did environ the Crosse. Thereupon, they were called Marianes, and Porte-Croix. After the taking of Jerusalem, being retired to Ptolemaide, the Emperor Frederick transported them into Germany, and placed them in the Province of Prussia, being at that time enemy to our religion, to the end they might conquer it, and make it subject to Christianisme, the which was done by the authority of Gregory the ninth. In the year of our Salvation 1279, this province having been subdued, they were called Teutoniks and Prussians. This conquest was made under the conduct of Herman Saltza, who first planted the ensign of the Cross in this province, the which purchased them the love and favour of all Christian princes. Afterwards, they had great wars against the Lituanians, Polonians, and Tartarians. The priests, and knights of this order, wear upon their cloaks a black Cross, embroidered with silver. Maximilian of Austria is now their great master, who carries the arms of Austria, quartered with them of the order. And although that Prussia be now subject to the king of Poland, yet they choose a great master, who with his knights enjoys the revenues which they have in Germany.   

¶ The order of the knights of S. john of Accon, and of S. Thomas.  
IN imitation of the aforesaid orders, they have instituted many others, amongst the which was that of the knights of Accon, and of S. Thomas, of whose beginning and institution although we found nothing certain, yet we found that in the beginning they employed themselves to assist them charitably with all needful things that came to visit the holy places: but in time they added arms in imitation of the knights of S. john: for which cause they have been inserted among military orders. jerosme Romain saith, That they flourished in Spain during the reign of Alphonso, surnamed the Wise, and that this King bequeathed unto him all his movables, with a certain sum of money. But Tostat upon josua saith, That there is scarce any memory left of them. As for the order of S. Thomas, which marched under the rule of S. Augustin, it was united with the former by Pope Alexander the fourth.  
Palestina hath also given us some other orders, as that of S. Bleise, of S. Marry, and that of the Repentance of holy Martyrs. jerosme Romain affirms, That he had seen brethren of this last order, who carried a read Cross, and held the rule of S. Augustin.   

¶ The order of the knights of S. Saviour in Arragon.  
ABout the year 1118, Alphonso king of Spain, Navarre, Arragon, Castille, and Toledo by his wife Vrraca, desiring to root out the Moors of Sarragossa & Arragon, and seeing how well the neighbour provinces had prevailed by the military orders which they had made, he instituted the order of the knights of S. Saviour, in the town of Montreal, after the taking of Calatrava, promising to favour, and be a support to those that should carry themselves most valiantly in the war, which he pretended to make against the Infidels: which succeeded so happily, as in the year 1120, he forced them to leave the countries which they held, whereupon the king gave unto this order rich possessions.   

¶ The order of the knights of Mont-Ioy in Syria, which in Castille they call of Monfiac, and in Cattelonia of Mongoia.  
WHenas the Christian princes conquered Syria, the order of the knights of Mont-Ioy was instituted, who took their name of a mountain so called near to the city of jerusalem, as the Bull of their approbation, given by Pope Alexander the third, in the year 1180, and kept in the records of Calatrava, doth witness. This order received great favours and advancements from Christian princes, in regard of the assistance which they had gi●en them in the recovery of the holy Landlord  
jerosme Romain makes mention of another order of knights, which he calls of Truxillo, having taken this name of the town where they began this order, the which was enriched with many great gifts by king Alphonso, who in the year 1233, gave unto them the towns of S. Croix, Zuforle, Cabime, Albate, and some others.   

¶ The order of knights called Port-glaive, or men at arms of Christ in Livonia.  
BEtwixt Prussia, Lituania, Russia, and Muscovie, lies the province of Livonia, the potentates whereof having allied themselves with the Teuton knights, of whom mention hath been made, in their imitation they ma●e an order of knighthood, confirmed by Innocent the third, taking for their blazon two swords of a read colour, in form of a S. Andrews cross, the which they did sew upon their cloaks. Their first great master was called Vniws, with whom they did great exploits, and conquered many places in Russia. Afterwards they joined themselves unto the Teutons: but there falling great quarrels betwixt them, they separated themselves again in consideration of a good sum of money which they paid, about the year 1348. In the end, the profession of Luther coming into this province, this order was quite extinct, having flourished three hundred fifty and seven years.   

¶ The order of the knights of S. james in Spain.  
THe Sepulchre of the Apostle S. james, having, as they writ, been discovered in Spain, and the same of the miracles which were done daily in that place, spread over all, it caused great devotion not only in the people of Spain, but in others of remote provinces. But for that the way by reason of the rocks and barrenness of the soil was very difficult, and that the Moors did rob and spoil the Pilgrims, the fear of danger kept many from undertaking the voyage. This was the cause that made the regular Chanoins of Saint Eloy, whose abode was near unto Compostella, to build many lodgings upon the way coming from France, for the lodging of Pilgrims, and to defend them from dangers: the principal and most excellent was that which was built in the suburbs of the town of Leon, under the name and title of Saint Mark, the which did purchase them such love generally, as many kings and princes sent them great presents in requital of that good deed. Soon after, in imitation of these Chanoins, many gentlemen of Castille desired to do the like: and the better to effect their designs, they made a stock of all their wealth, that they might use it in common.  
These gentlemen then by the care and diligence of Cardinal jacinth, having taken a resolution to join with the said Chanoins, they propounded to set down a course of life, such as they desired to observe afterwards, according to the rule of S. Augustine, the which these Chanoins followed, and they sent it to Pope Alexander the third, making Peter Fernandez of Pont Eucalate, chief of this Embassage, who obtained a Bull from the Pope, dated the fift of julie 1175, with a rule of life which they should observe. Their first great Master was this Fernandes, and the house of S. Mark at Lion was given to these knights for their ordinary abode. Their badge or mark of honour, is a read Cross, made in form of a sword. This is according to the opinion of john Mariana, in the second book of his history of Spain: but others hold this order to be more ancient, drawing the beginning from the time of king Alphonso the chaste: others refer it to the year 848, whenas D. Ramire king of Castille, defeated sixty thousand Moors near unto Clavige, for that in this battle the soldiers cried, God and S. james help us, whom they saw on horseback, carrying a white banner charged with a read cross. But the Bull whereon they ground, the which was given to the Nuns of the cloister of the holy Ghost in Salamanca, is not authentic, as the said Mariana hath observed: and Francis Rados Dandrada, who hath written the Chronicle of the three orders of S. james, Calatrava, and Alcantara in Spanish, saith, that this order was instituted in the year 1170, in the realms of Leon, & Galacia by D. Fernand king of the said countries: and that long before, there had been a company or brotherhood of knights of S. james without any form of religion. He saith moreover, that this order was brought into Castille by king D. Alphonso the ninth, and approved in the year 1175; so as the founders of this military order, are this king D. Fernand, and D. Peter Fernandez the first great master. Onufrius Pawinus in his Chronicle refers this beginning to the year 1170. The statutes of this order are newly printed by Plantin at Antuerpe.   

¶ The order of the knights of Calatrava in Spain.  
Calatrava having been taken from the Moors by king Sancio the third, surnamed the Desired, in the year 1158; it was delivered into the hands of the Templars, that by their fortifications it might be made as it were a bulwark against the Infidels; but the Templars being advertised that an infinite number of Moors were coming against them, they delivered up the place into the king's hands, and left it, holding it too weak to endure a siege; and there being no nobleman in the realm, that would undertake the defence thereof, two monks of Cisteaux making then their abode at Toledo, one called Raymond Pilterius Abbot of Pisorius, & the other Didacus' Velesons, both valiant, having left the profession of arms; yet for the service of God, they resolved to enter into this place, and to defend it with all their power: the which being imparted to king Sancio, he was well satisfied, as also john Archbishop of Toledo, who furnished them with men and means, persuading by his authority & entreaty both noblemen and others, to undertake the defence of this place, with these two religious men, for the good of Christendom: whereupon men of all conditions came to secure them; so as the town was so well fortified, as the enemy durst not besiege it: this was the happy beginning of this order; for the king gave this place in recompense to these two men, and to their companions, in the name of the Virgin Mary, patroness of the order of Cisteaux. The Abbot gave to his companions the habit & rule of Cisteaux. The Blazon of this order was first a read cross, adn two shakles under it, whereto in time were added 4 flowers de Luce by Benet 13. Alexander 3, in the year 1164, approved this institution by his Bull, and their first great master was called Garsia. When these knights are in any assembly they wear a white robe, and on it, as also on their breasts, a read cross, as hath been said. The Pope in the year 1396, gave them leave to marry once, but they might not take a second wife, for in old time they were bound to live like religious men in perpetual chastity; so as you may see that the first institutors of this order, were Sancho king of Gastile, & Raymond Abbot of Filtere.   

¶ The order of the Gensd'armes of jesus Christ, instituted by S. Dominick, against the Albigots.  
THe counties of of Tolousa and Lombardy being in a manner all infected with the opinion of the Albigois, S. Dominick preached against them, where he profited in such sort, as they say he converted one hundred thousand persons, choosing certain devout men to root out them by the material sword, that would not believe his spiritual doctrine: To these he ordained a certain rule to live by, more spiritual than the common sort of secular men, but not so strictly as Monks. They were called in those times the brethren of the warfare of S. Dominick.  
The Albigois being rooted out, they which had dedicated themselves to that end, continued this course of life unto their death; and their wives surviving them, they lived continently, and the men did the like if they survived their wives. Some time afterwards, people, married or not married, embraced this order, and in the end, they were called the brethren or sisters of the repentance of S. Dominick. Innocent the sixt approved their rule, in the year 1360.   

¶ The order of the Knights of Alcantara, in the kingdom of Lyon.  
GOmesius Ferdinand, a knight, and great lord among them of Lion, under the reign of Ferdinand king of that realm, and of Galicia, instituted this order against the Moors; which in the beginning had the name of S. julian of Pirario, for that the first house they had, was in a bourough of that name. The king declared himself protector of this order, by his letters patents, in the year 1176; and Pope Alexander the third approved it; and, in the year 1183, Pope Lucius the third exempted it from the jurisdiction of the Diocesains. Their arms were a green Pear tree in a field Or, until that Alphonso the eighth gave unto the knights of this order, Alcantara, a place situated upon the banks of the river of Tagus, (remarkable for the artificial structure of the bridge) by the incorporation which he made with them of the order of Calatrava, to whom this place had been first given: but by reasons of State, it was left unto these last; yet upon condition, that they should be subject unto the other, in sign whereof, by the ordinance of their great Master, were added two schakles, which were in the others device; and they were afterwards called knights of Alcantara. Finally, in the year 1411, the knights of this order obtained of Pope Bennet the thirteenth, who called himself Pope in Spain, to carry upon their breast, towards the left side, a green cross made like a lily. They live under the rule of S. Bennet, and promise' in their profession, obedience to their Superiors, conjugal chastity, and to live as holy as they can all the days of their lives. Pope Adrian the sixt did afterwards, in favour of Charles the fift, who had been his scholar, annex these three orders of S. james, Calatrava, and Alcantara, to the crown of Castille, and Lion forever.   

¶ The order of the knights of the glorious Virgin Marie in Italy.  
IN the year 1233, Bartholomew of Viceney, of the order of the Preaching Friars, was the Author of these knight, the which he instituted to purchase a peace in the towns of Italy, and to root out all discord and division. Pope Vrbain the fourth, in the year 1262, approved it. Their habit was a white rob, and a russet cloak, and they carried for their device a purple Cross in a field Argent, with certain stars over it. Their duty was to take widows and orphans into their protection, and to procure peace and concord among others. They were called the joyful brethren, for that they lived quietly and contentedly in their houses, with their wives and children, as Sigonius and others reports.   

¶ The order of the Knights of Montese, in the realm of Valencia.  
THe knights of Montese were so called of the chief place of their abode, having been instituted at the same time that the Templars were suppressed; so as all the possessions which they held in the realm of Valencia, were given to them of Montese, upon condition, to defend and keep the frontiers of Valencia against the Moors. Their order was approved by Bennet the thirteenth, and Martin the fift. They ware a white habit, and upon it a plain read Crosse.   

¶ The order of the Knights of jesus Christ in Portugal.  
DEny●, surnamed Perioca, king of Portugal, nephew to Alphonso the tenth, king of Castille and Lion, instituted this order, commonly called of Portugal, or of Christ. He ordained, That their Blazons should be a black rob, and a black Cross cut upon one of white. Pope john the two and twentieth, in the year of our Redemption 1321, prescribed them the rule of S. Bennet. Their duty was to make war against the Moors which did inhabit Betica. By their virtue, the Portugals empire hath extended itself far into the East, into Africa, Brasil, and other parts of the West.   

¶ The order of the Knights of la Banca, and la Scama in Spain, and of la Calza at Venice.  
IN the year of our Lord God 1332, Alphonso the eleventh, king of Castille, before he came to the crown instituted the order of the Knights of the Band, in the town of Victoria, so called, for that upon the day of their creation by the king, as great Master, he hung about them a read Band four fingers broad, baldric wife, from the top of the right shoulder under the left arm. The children of noble men, except the eldest, were admitted into this order, having served at the lest ten years in the war. It was sometimes much esteemed, but in the end, to show the inconstancy and alteration of human things, it is decayed. As for that of la Scama, john the second, king of Castille, was the Author, and it was much honoured during his reign, by the report of jerosme Romain, who saith, That he could never truly understand what la Scama was, notwithstanding any search which he had made.  
In imitation of the Knights of the Band, the Venetians instituted at the same time them of la Calza, in a manner with the same laws. No man might be received by the Duke, or Senate, unless he were of a noble extraction. This order was renewed, in the year of our Salvation 1562, and was favoured with new privileges. Andrew Etten, excellent in an Annotomie and physic, and well studied in all sciences, doth not found that they had any other arms, but a collar of Gold, at which did hung the image of S. Mark, or a winged Lion, with this Motto, Pax tibi Marce, and this he speaks but by conjecture, grounding it, for that the Duke and Senate of Venice, desiring to give some worthy recompense to many great personages among them, which had bound the common weal by some notable services, they made them Knights, and gave them this collar of Gold, with this device.   

¶ The orders of the Knights Auesiens, commonly called of avis, in Portugal.  
THe Christians being masters of the town of Ebora, famous in Portugal for the or●●●arie abode of their kings. King Alphonso finding that both for the situation and strength it was fit to make war against the Moors, he made it the chief abode of the Knights which in the realm of Castille are called of Calatrava, and in Portugal of avis, who in the beginning were called Eboriaces, of the name of Ebora, a town which some hold had been given them by Ferdinand Monteyro, their first great master, in the honour of the virgin Mary, patroness of the order of Cisteaux, to the end that by their continual incursions upon the Barbarians, they should force them in the end to leave the country.  
The third great master, who was called Alphonso Auensis, having conquered the castle of Auisin; he gave it to the company which he transported thither, to the end they might be nearer to their enemies, and annoyed them more, since which time they have retained the name of this castle. This order was confirmed by Pope Innocent the third, in the year 1204. Finally, Roderigo Garzia the eight, great master of Calatrava, having enriched these knight's Auisins with many great revenues, they submitted themselves to the laws and reformations of this order, under the government whereof they continued unto the time of john their great master, who was base son to Peter the eight, king of Portugal: for this king at the instance (as it is credible) of his son, divided this order of the Auesiens from that of Calatrava, ordaining that they should carry in their Blazons a green cross upon a long stock, having taken away the Pear tree to distinguish them from the knights of Alcantara; yet before they carried a read cross like the knights of Alcantara, as may be seen in the ancient seal of the order, where, at the foot of the cross (as Francis Radosius saith) were two little birds. They follow the rule of Cisteaux: but howsoever, Radosius confounds these two orders of Auesiens and Calatrava; for that in tract of time they are made but one: whereas contrariwise, Volateranus is deceived, who joins them with the knights of Alcantara, as jerosme Romain, and Gonsalue Argotes of Melina in the first Book, chap. thirty and two, of the nobility of Spain have observed.   

¶ The order of the knights of the round Table.  
THey say, that Arthure king of England having chosen four and twenty of the most warlike gentlemen he could found, and best experienced in arms, he made them knights, and as being equal in virtue, he loved them equally: and to take away all subject of envy, meaning to favour one as much as another, he caused a round table to be made, whereas they did commonly eat, there being no difference of places; so as no man could say, he was first or last, nor more or less honoured than his companion: whereupon they were called knights of the round table. The common people of England believe that this table is kept in the Castle of Windsor, and that the names of those that were of this knighthood are graven thereon. Master Camden holds this institution to be of a latter time, and refers it to a custom which they had to make tourneys, and to exercise themselves in arms; for to the end the first or last places should give no occasion of quarrel to great men which did assist, they used round tables, where they did sit indifferently, not observing who was first or last.   

¶ The Order of the knights of the Garter in England.  
EDward the third, king of England, instituted this order of the gartar, in the year 1350, to purge the suspicion which some had of the countess of Salisbury, whom he loved honourably, having taken up a blue garter which fell from her in dancing, and he added for his motto, honey soit qui mal y peuse, for that the gentlemen which were present began to laugh, saying, that he would make that garter honour them that should wear it; the which happened by the institution of this order of knights, to whom he gave the name. Others say that this order took the name of a band or garter which Edward the third gave unto his knights for a perpetual memory of the victory which he had gotten at Poitiers against the French king. They wear this band or garter under the left knee, the which is fastened with a buckle, in sign of the love and concord which should be in this society, whereon was graven his motto: upon their cloaks they wear a S. George's cross in a scutcheon. The great collar of their order which they use to wear upon the day of their creation, and of all other festival days, is nothing but the garter doubled many times together, with the which are intermixed white and read roses, whereat doth hung the image of S. George, whom he would have their patron, in whose honour he had built a stately Church in the castle of Windsor. Upon ordinary days these knights wear a blue ribon above their necks, with the image of S. George hanging thereon. Others refer the 〈◊〉 of this order to Richard the first, and say, that Edward did but renew it; but this 〈…〉 uncertain. The solemnities of this order are celebrated yearly upon S. George 〈◊〉, the king being head and precedent.   

¶ The order of the knights of the Bath in England.  
WE have nothing certain of these knights, but that Henry the fourth, king of England, upon the day of his coronation in the town of London, created six and forty 〈◊〉, knights having watched the night before and bathed themselves, giving to 〈…〉 a green coat with long sleeves hanging down to the ground, and a furred mantle the which was fastened upon their left shoulder with a double cord of white silk.  
In former times two of the nobility, who had not received knighthood, were chosen to be admitted into this order with much ceremony. These knights were made upon the day of their coronation, or at the marriage of kings and queens, or whenas any of their children were invested in some duchy or earldom: for the day before, they were attired in grey gowns, almost like hermits, with a hood, having linen caps, and they were booted; in this equipage they heard Mass devoutly: night being come, they supped all together, every one having two esquires, and a footman to attend him. After supper they retired themselves to their chamber, whereas every one had his bed prepared with read curtains, whereon were set the arms of their houses, and near unto every one was a bathing vessel covered with sheets, where having recommended themselves to God, they bathed, to put them in mind, that they should for ever afterwards keep their bodies and minds clean. The next day early in the morning, they were saluted by many musical instruments, and they attired themselves as the day before. Then the constable of England, a marshal, and others deputed by the king, came unto them, and calling them in order, by their names, they propounded unto them the oath which they should take, which was, To serve God above all, to defend the church, to honour the king, and defend his rights, to take into their protection, widows, virgins, and orphans, and to maintain them with all their power. Having sworn to these articles, they were conducted to morning prayer, the king's musicans and heralds going before them. Service being ended, they were carried back unto their chambers, whereas they disrobed themselves, and took a sky coloured mantle of velvet or satin, to show that their martial heat should be all celestial, and they wear a white hat with white feathers, and gloves which they fastened to their mantle with a little white string: then they went to horseback, their saddles being of black leather mixed with white, and a white cross fastened upon the horse's forehead. Their footmen marched before them, carring their swords, and spurs hanging thereon all gilt, and their esquires were on horseback of either side: and in this pomp, they came before the king, the trumpets sounding before them. Being come after this manner into his presence, they were conducted by two ancient knights, than their footmen gave their swords with their hangers to the lord chamberlain, who presented them to the king with great reverence to gird the new knights, the which he did: then he commanded the ancient knights to put on their spurs; and these were wont in old time (the ceremony being ended) to kiss their knees, wishing them all happiness.  
These new knights being thus made, they were accustomed in old time to cover the king's table, and to dine there altogether being set of one side. The hour of Evensong being come, they went unto the chapel, and there offered their swords upon the altar, the which they redeemed for a certain sum of money; returning, the king's master cook met them, and presenting his knife unto them, threatened to cut off their spurs ignominiously, if they did not show themselves faithful and good soldiers. Upon the day of the king's coronation, they did accompany him in pomp in their ranks, wearing their swords and spurs, with their blue mantles, fastened before with a ribon of white silk, tied like a Cross, having a hood hanging upon the left shoulder. Thus much Master Camden sets down particularly touching these knights. The Blazon of this order, is three crowns Or, in a circle of gold, with this device, Tria in unum, hanging at a carnation ribon.   

¶ The order of the Knights of the Star in France.  
IOhn of Valois, the French king, in the month of October, in the year of our Lord God 1352, instituted an order of Knights, in remembrance of the Star which conducted the Kings of the East to Bethelem, to worship the Saviour of the world newly borne, who were called the brethren of our Lady of S. Audoen, for that that the place of their residence was so called, which was a league from Paris, and was in former times called the palace of Cheley, and was given them with all the dependences. In the beginning, they did not admit any into this order but the greatest of the realm. Their Blazon was a Star, hanging at a collar of gold, or fastened to the hood of their rob, or upon some other apparent place, with this device, Monstrant regibus astra viam. But whenas many base and unworthy persons had crept into this society upon false suggestions, it soon lost her beauty; so as Charles the son of john, ordained, That his guards should wear the ensigns to make it more contemptible. At this day, the archers of the watch of the city of Paris, have a Star upon their cassocks.   

¶ The order of the Annonciado in Savoy.  
AMedee the sixt, Earl of Savoy, having instituted this order, he made it famous by the great and rich revenues wherewith he endowed it. He would have this order composed of four thin plates of gold, fastened to little chains of gold, being tied one unto another with little knots, which they call the snares of love, and on either of the plates was graven these four letters, F.E.R.T. The image of the Virgin Marie, and the history of the Annunciation hanging in the midst, of which this order took the name. As for the four letters, they signified, Fortitudo eius Rhodum tenuit, the which was spoken in honour of Amedee, who as the Annals of Savoy say, took this town from the Turks, and conquered it to jesus Christ, or rather defended it against their forces: so as after that time, the Knights of Rhodes took the arms of Savoy, the which were quartered with them of the dukes of Saxony, for that the first princes of this duchy are descended from that house, the which they added to the Cross Argent of their order, in a field Gules, that is to say, whenas the Island of Rhodes was given them by the Emperor of Constantinople: And this device, F.E.R.T. remained to Amedee, and his successors, in remembrance of his valour. The ceremonies of this order are reiterated yearly upon the day of the Annunciation of the blessed Virgin Marie, and those were made Knights whom the prince did choose. As for Count Amedee, he was not content to institute this order, but he would be also himself enrolled with fourteen of the chief noblemen of his countries, with the which he made fifteen, in honour of the fifteen mysteries of the holy Virgin.   

¶ The order of the Knights of the Golden Fleece, in the houses of Bourgondie, and Austria.  
PHilip, surnamed the Good, Duke of Bourgondie, for the love he bore to nobility, in the month of januarie, in the year of our Lord God 1430, erected this order upon the day of his marriage with Elizabeth, daughter to john king of Portugal, to the glory of God, and of his holy mother, and of S. Andrew the Apostle; and the more to stir up their hearts to virtue, and to the advancement of the holy faith: He gave to this order, the title of the Golden Fleece, making an allusion to Gedeons fleece which was found in the air, which was full of dew on the one side, and dry on the other, as we may see in the tapestries of his time, which are hung up at the feast of S. Andrew, a day dedicated to the solemnities of this order. It is true, that some say these Knights had their beginning from the Thebain Legion: but that is too obscure to ground any good foundation. Duke Philip having erected this order, he declared himself great Master, and gave unto these new Knights, a rob of scarlet, the which his son Charles the Hardy changed into silk, at a Chapter held at Valenciennes, and a collar of gold, where was interlaced an iron, which seemed to strike fire out of a flint, the Emblem of his deceased father; at the end of which collar hung the Golden Fleece, they being bound to restore it again to the order when they died, to be given to them that should deserve it. Paradin, in his Symbols, interprets the Blazon after this manner, to the iron, he gives this device, Ante ferit quam flamma miscet: And to the fleece, Pretium non vile laboris. The first dignities of this institution, are the Chancellor, the Treasurer, the King at arms, and Register, who judge without appeal of all controversies that fall out among them, and of crimes, if there happen any. Philip, in the beginning, made but five and twenty, but three years after, he added six, so as they were one and thirty. Afterwards, Charles the fist by reason of many provinces where he commanded, augmented the number to one and fifty: and since, in a Chapter held at Gant, by the authority of Gregory the thirteenth, it was granted to Philip the second, king of Spain, and confirmed since to Philip the third, by Pope Clement the eighth, that they might created Knights out of Chapter when they lift. These Knights must be of such houses as in Spain they do call Grandes.  
Richard of Vuassebourg, in his Antiquities of Belgia, makes mention of the ancient Knights of the Swan, instituted by one Suluius Brabon, of whom (as some hold opinion) Brabant took the name; giving them this bird for an Hieroglifike, of the love and concord he would have among them.   

¶ The order of the Knights of the Porcupine, in the house of Orleans.  
CHarles, Duke of Orleans, in imitation of Philip Duke of Bourgondie, erected the order of the Knights of the Porcupine, carrying upon their baudricks or belts, the figure of this beast, with this Symbol, Cominus & Eminus, as Paulus iovius saith. No man was enrolled into this company, unless he were of a very noble extraction, and of great perfection in arms. Afterwards, Lewis the twelfth, the French king, duke of Orleans, and Earl of Bloys, as his heir, took the device of a Porcupine crowned, with this inscription, Vitus Auos Troiae: He also caused that figure to be graven upon his coin, the which, with that of the Wolf, were the ancient arms of the Earls of Bloys. Charles took this for his device, for that the Porcupin defends himself near and far off against dogs, darting forth his pricks like arrows; and to show that he was resolute against all the crosses of fortune, and always ready to defend himself against any that should wrong him, he gave it for a blazon to the knights.   

¶ The order of the Knights of the Thistle, of the Virgin Marie, in the house of Bourbon.  
LEwis the second, Duke of Bourbon, surnamed the Good, son to Peter the first, who was slain at the battle of Poitiers, which king john lost against the enemies. Having served king Charles the fift, and Charles the fixed, against that nation, and being returned from Africa, whither he had conducted an army against the Infidels, whenas by the factions of the houses of Orleans and Bourgondie, the realm seemed to be in a manner ruined; the Bourgondian having instituted the order of the golden Fleece, and the duke of Orleans, that of the Porcupin: he erected the order of the knights of the Thistle of the Virgin, the better to countenance his authority and power, which he employed wholly to assist and protect Charles duke of Orleans, Philip Earl of Eureux, and john Earl of Angolesme, pupils to Lewis duke of Orleans his nephew, against the Bourgondian, who had miserably slain him. The colour of this order was of gold, woven with flowers de Luce's, with the which were interlaced the leaves of thistles by equal distances, at which did hung a cross, and about it this devise, Esperance. This prince honoured those gentlemen with this order, which had done some notable service to the house of Bourbon, and he declared himself great master. In sign whereof, he added the collar unto his arms, which was all pouldered with flower de Luce's in a field Argent, and Gules on a scutcheon Azure, with this inscription Esperence. As for this Emblem composed of lilies and thistles, duke Lewis would thereby signify his constancy against all crosses that might happen, and that he did hope for better fortune: the thistle by his pricking leaves, signifying affliction; and the lily whose leaves are always green, hope, whereof it hath been ever the Hieroglyphic among the ancients.   

¶ The order of the knights of S. Andrew, of the Thistle, and of the Rue, in the realm of Scotland.  
HVngus king of Scotland, being ready to give battle to Athelstan king of the English, there appeared unto him in the firmament a bright shining cross, in form like unto that whereon S. Andrew died a Martyr for the faith of Christ: the which he having taken for a good sign, he charged his enemy, vanquished him, and cut in a manner all his army in pieces. In memory of which victory, the king would that this cross should be graven upon his arms, and painted in the ensigns which they used in their armies, the which the kings of Scotland observe to this day. Hence the order of the knights of S. Andrew (famous in that realm) took his beginning, being commonly called the knights of the Thistle. The king's arms and coin are environed with the collar of this order, being full of thistles, with this motto, Nemo me impune lacessit: for that no man can handle a thistle, but he shall prick himself. This collar is made of gold with many knots, in the which are grafted the flowers of thistles, whereat doth hung the image of S. Andrew holding before him the cross of his Martyrdom. The arms environed with the collar, are a Lion Gules, the ancient and first Blazon of king Fergus, in a mantle Azure, fringed at the borders with two lines read, and two ranks of lilies one opposite to another upon a fillet of gold, which Charlemaigne joined to those arms, in testimony of the alliance which he had treated with king Achaius, and the Scottish men, as they bear it at this day, for that if the Lion be the arms of that realm, the lily is of France, whereof this Emperor was king, who not content therewith, the better to confirm the league and friendship which he had sworn, he added to the circle of the crown of Scotland four lilies of gold, with four crosses of the same equality distant one from another; yet the lilies were somewhat more elevated, to the end that all the world might know that this nation did at that time excel in the observation of Christian religion and integrity of faith. Some refer the institution of these knights to Charles the seventh, the French king, who renewed the ancient league with them of Scotland; and that in recompense of the succours which they had given him in his most desperate affairs, he increased their arms with those of France: but the first opinion is more certain.  
Among the Scottish men, hath also flourished the order of the knights of the Rue: their mark was a collar made of two branches of rue or of thistle, whereon did hung the Image of S. Andrew with his cross: but there is nothing found certain of their beginning.   

¶ The order of the knights of S. Marry, or of the Elephant.  
IN Denmark hath flourished the order, which they say had been instituted by the father of Christiern, king of that realm, their blazon is a collar powdered with elephants, having their towers and castles upon their backs, with spurs interlaced, having hanging at it, the image of the Virgin Marie, environed with Sun beams, and to it is joined a little medal of gold, whereon are graven three nails, representing those wherewith our Saviour was fastened to the cross. The arms of these kings which are three Lions Verte in a field Or, powdered with rears of blood, or the hearts of men, are environed with this collar.  
The kings of Denmark have given the title of Elephant to this knighthood, and have adorned their arms, for that these beasts seem to approach nearest unto the nature of man, and to shine in a manner in all virtues, as military force, providence, religion, piety, and royal clemency; to the end that they which should be honoured with this order, should labour as much to exceed those beasts in the perfection of these virtues, as the nature of man is more excellent than theirs.   

¶ The order of the knights of Cypress.  
THe house of Lusignan, which hath furnished Christendom with so many kings and princes, especially jerusalem, Armenia, and Cypress, gave beginning to this order, but the certain time is not known. The ensigns was a collar made of a cord of gold interlaced with saint, in great characters, and beneath did hung a sword, having the blade silver, and the handle gold, with this devise about it, Pour loyautè maintenir, to teach them that were of this order, that they should never lose any occasion to show themselves generous and valiant, carrying the sword to that end, and that they should maintain concord and friendship among themselves for the defence of their country, the letter S signifying silence, among the ancient Romans. The arms of the house of Lusignan are compassed about with this collar.   

¶ The order of the knights of the Dove, and of the Reason in Castille.  
IOhn the first, king of Castille, to encourage his courtiers and gentlemen to undertake something worthy of the rank which they held, invented this order in the year 1390, their Blazon was the figure of a Dove, environed with Sun beams, the which did hung upon a collar of gold, which collar (being at Segobia, whenas they did celebrated the feast of Saint james) he distributed many of them in the Cathedral Church, taking them away from the Altar with great solemnity, and giving them unto those which he would make of that order, with a book of the constitutions which he desired should be observed.  
This king instituted another order which he called of the Reason, less noble than the first, to the which he admitted gentlemen of meaner quality, but yet such as carried themselves valiantly in military exercises.   

¶ The order of the Dragon among the Germans and Hongarians, of the Tusin in Bohemia, and of the Discipline in Austria.  
THe Emperor Sygismond did show so great zeal to the advancement of Christian religion, as he not only gave many battles to the Turks, and won great victories; But also by this means there were two general counsels held; the one at Constance; the other at Basile, for the rooting out of heresies and schisms, which at that time did much afflict Christendom, as he thought, especially in Bohemia and Hungary. And to make show of this his devotion, ●e erected the Military order of the Dragon, so called for that the Knights carried for their device, a Dragon cast down headlong, to witness that by this means schism and heresy (the devouring Dragons of religion) had been vanquished and supplanted.  
jerosme Romain faith, That in the time of king john, and of the emperors Sigismond and Albert, there were three famous orders in Germany, and that one called Moses Didaco, of Valero, a Spaniard, for his force and valour obtained all three, that is to say, that of the Dragon, of Albert, as King of Hungary, that of the Tusin, as King of Bohemia, and the collar of the order of the Disciplines, enriched with a white Eagle (which are the arms of the Kings of Poland, in a field Gules) as Duke of Austria. In the History of Hungary, mention is made of those Hungarian Knights, whose badge was a green Cross set upon a cloak of scarlet. jerosme Megyserus, Historiographer to the Archduke of Austria, in the treaty which he hath made of the three kinds of Knights, saith, That this order was instituted two hundred years since in Hungary, to oppose them against the Turks, who sought to invade it.   

¶ Military orders in the realm of Suethland.  
THe care which the Kings and Princes of the Goths had in former times to eternize the honour and glory which they had gotten by arms, is observed in their arms, ensigns, blazons, and targets, which they have left graven in many places of South Flanders, in the stately Port of Angoa, a town, whereas the kings of Suethland held their consultations both of peace, and war. There are also to be seen upon rocks graven by Alphabetical order, the ancient arms of the worthiest men which have lived among them. These Kings had in old time for their device, two Virgins crowned, attired in cloth of gold, and embracing one another mutually in a green forest, as glorying at the fair nymphs and goddesses which frequented that province: yet after some ages, the Princes of Suethland took for their arms three Crowns in a field Azure, by reason of the great extent of their dominion, their worthy expeditions in war, and the abundance of metals which are found in those countries. Being converted to the faith, they instituted Military orders in imitation of other Christian Princes, whereof the one had for blazon, a collar of Gold made of many Cherubins, and Seraphins, fastened one unto another, and intermixed with patriarchal Crosses, at the which did hung the image of our Saviour.   

¶ The order of the Knights of the Sword and Baldric in Suethland.  
THere was another order in Suethland, called Porte-Espees, or Carrie-swords, for that their collar was made of swords of gold, joining together with a belt or baldric, the which did seem to shock one against another with their bloody points, as a Symbol of justice and arms, the two pillars of an Estate. Their blazon was a shield of gold, which had a reddish Bosse, whereon was painted a yellow Lion rampant, and about it three royal Crowns, with as many read Bells: upon this shield was a Helmet, with a mural Crown Argent, covered with a green feather, out of the which came two ensigns Argent, whereon were painted two read Cocks: but since this country changed their religion, this order hath been wholly extinct.   

¶ The order of the Knights of the Ear of Corn in Brittany.  
FRancis, first of that name, Duke of Brittany, son to john the fift, and grandchild to john the fourth, surnamed the Conqueror, who first transported this Duchy to the house of Montfort, descended from that great Euerard of Montmorency; in the year 1450, instituted the order of the Ear of Corn, as well to honour the memory of his grandfather as to grace the Nobility. He gave to them which he admitted a collar of gold made of Ears of Corn, and tied together with love knots, being in a manner like to Co●eses Crown. At this collar did hung by two little chains, an Ermine upon a green hill with this device of john the Conqueror, Amaire: a symbol of a pure and generous soul. This beast, as Pliny writes, doth so delight in cleanness, as if he be pursued by huntsmen, seeking to ●ave himself in his clapper, if he finds the entry foul and beastly, he had rather be taken, than to enter and defile himself. Anne, daughter to Francis the second, king of Brittany, and to Marguerite of Foix, daughter to Gast●n of Foix, and to Elli●or Queen of Navarre, took in a manner the like device, which was, Plustost mourir, as you may see in the castle of Bloise. This order of the knights of the Ear ended whenas the duchy of Brittany was united to the crown of France by the marriage of the said Anne to king Charles the eighth, and after his decease, to Lewis the twelfth, French kings.   

¶ The order of the Knights of the Crescent, or half Moon, among the Angevins and Sicilians.  
REne, Duke of Apiou, and King of Sicily, Naples, and jerusalem, instituted this order, in the Cathedral Church of S. M●urice at Angers, and gave to them he admitted, a collar of gold, at the which did hung a Crescent with this device, Los en croissant. No man was admitted into thi● order, if he had not first given some notable proof of his valour. It was well known at how many combats he had assisted, by certain little sticks which wer● bond together with a ring, and did hung about his neck by a ribbon.  
The first that were honoured with this order, were john eldest brother to the said king, who was Duke of Lorraine and C●labria; the Vicont of Ballora, Estagi Bertrand Lord of palacois, and others, whose names are recorded in the said Church of S. Maurice at An●●●. These knights were bound to participate equally one with another's fortune, were it good or bad, and charitably to aid and assist in all necessities, & not to wrong one another by arms. The family of Anjou being extinct by the death of this king, this order ended.   

¶ The order of the Knights of the Ship, or of the Cockle.  
THe French were in old time very expert in arms, as Pacatus, Apollinaris, and S. Renè report, giving themselves with such affection to navigation, as they resolved that in what country soever they should build a town for their abode, they should give the ship for their arms. These men say▪ That they might well have learned this experience from the ●epide●, who in former times held all the German Ocean; so as in the end they grew so expert, as they exceeded all other nations in gallant expeditions beyond 〈◊〉. In witness whereof, S. Lewis caused a certain kind of money to be coined with a sh●● and cockle shells. And there was a certain order in France, whose knights carried for their device two ships ●abless in a shield Or, made of cockle shells, in the which were two Cressants Gules, in remembrance of so many victories which the kings of France. had gotten of the Barbarians of the East, and of their ensigns which they had taken from them, marked with the figure of this ●ight Stat, which is the Turks ensign, as the Eagle was of the Romans, having taken it from the ancient Byzantium, whose blazon it was, as L●psius' faith he had observed in Busbec, and in certain ancient Medals, upon the 〈◊〉 whereof there was a half Moon, with this inscription; Byzantium.   

¶ The order of S. Michael in France.  
LEwis the eleventh, transported from the Romans to the French, faith Gaguin, the custom which great men had to wear a collar of gold; whenas upon the first of August, in the year 1469, he instituted the order of S. Michael at Amboyse, the which he augmented with new constitutions at Plessis near Tours, giving for devise to those which should be admitted to this knighthood, a collar of gold woven with cockle shells, fastened one unto another like unto those which the Roman Senators did use to wear upon their arms, with this devise: Immensitremor Oceani, being moved thereunto by the example of his father Charles the seventh, who had in his ensigns the image of this Archangel, whenas he made his entry into Roven, for that as they say by a special miracle he had been seen upon the bridge at Orleans, defending that town against the English at an assault which they gave. In the beginning, the number of those knights were but thirty of the noblest and most virtuous of the whole realm, whereof the king would be great Master. They that were admitted to this company, were bound by special promise● to obey the king, and might not be degraded but for heresy or treason, or when they had left their ranks in battle, and fled for fear. Whenas any of them died, they were to choose another in his place, the which was not done by voices and suffrages, but with little notes signed, putting them into a basin, which being numbered by the Chancellor, he that had most was received by the prince in his place that was dead, with these words: The order holds thee for a brother and companion, & therefore I give thee this collar; God grant thou mayst wear it long. After this in sign of love he kisseth all the knights. This order hath a Chancellor, a Treasurer, a King at arms, called S. Michael, and a Register, who enrolls the names and brave exploits of the knights. The French kings did also honour foreign princes with this order, in testimony of their love, who if they would declare themselves their enemies, sent back their order to be free from their oath.   

¶ The order of the knights of S. George of Carynthia.  
ROdulphus of Habfpurg, who was the first of the house of Austria which came unto the Empire, instituted the order of S. George to defend Hongarie, Stiria, and Carynthia against the invasions of the Turks, who seemed to threaten them with ruin, giving to the great Master and General thereof the town of Carynthia, of a goodly situation, there to make his ordinary abode, and he honoured him with the dignity of prince. He would also that the bishop of the city, being come from Austria, should depend of him touching the temporalty, with his Chanoins, who for that cause were transported into the fort, and they did wear a read cross in the arms of their houses. And to the end there should want nothing for the honouring of this new order, the Emperor transferred unto them the castles and demesnes of the Toparches of Cranichberg, newly slain with their families, that is to say, the lands of Trautmansdorf, Scharfenech, and S. Petronilla.  
Bernard of Luxembourg, in his book of military orders saith, that the order of S. George was instituted by Pope Alexander the sixt, and the Emperor Maxmilian, against the Turks, whose Blazon was a cross Or, with a crown in a ring of gold.   

¶ The order of the Bourgondian Cross in the realm of Thunes.  
Charles' the fift, Emperor and king of Spain, having restored Muleasses king of Thunes to his realm, from whence he had been expelled by that notable Pirate Barbarousse, he entered in pomp like a conqueror into Thunes, wearing a cloak whereon there was a Bourgondian cross, the which he had been accustomed to wear in the war. As he was of a noble and generous courage, so he desired to purchase the love of all men, wherefore to acknowledge the valour of such as had assisted him in this conquest, and in memory of that famous victory, he instituted the order of the Bourgondian Cross upon Mary Magdalens day, in the year 1535; to which cross he added an iron which stroke fire out of a flint, with this inscription, Barbaria.   

¶ The Order of the knights of S. Stephen in Tuscanie.  
COsmo de Medicis, first duke of Florence, in the year 1561, instituted the order of S. Stephen, Pope and Martyr, on the sixt of August, upon which day he had won the battle of Marciano: and the same year Pope Pius the fourth confirmed it, granting them all the privileges which they of Malta enjoy under the rule of S. Bennet, upon condition that all that would be of this order should make a vow of charity, conjugal chastity, and obedience, not admitting any one unless he were noble, and borne in lawful marriage, a Catholic, and without note of infamy. They wear a white chamlet robe with a read cross upon the left side, as well upon their cloaks, as their ordinary garments, and they are bound to carry arms for the defence of the Christian faith both by sea and land, redeem Christian prisoners, and help the poor, and to say daily one hundred Pater nosters, and as many Auie Maries for their ordinary service, and upon certain solemn days, double the number: and whenas any of the company dies, every one is bound to say one hundred Pater nosters, and as many Auie Maries for his sake, or else the office of the dead. The duke of Florence is their great Master: the form of their cross is like unto that of Malta; they have also Priests, and brother's servants among them.   

¶ The order of the knights of the Holy Ghost in France.  
HEnry, the third of that name, king of France and Poland, for a mark of eternal piety, and to acknowledge the benefits which he had received from God, upon the day of the sending down of the holy Ghost, having been that day chosen king of Polonia, succeeded to the crown of France, by the death of king Charles the ninth, his brother; and having been also borne the same day, instituted the order of knights of the holy Ghost, in the year 1579, the first of januarie at Paris, in the church of the hermits of S. Augustin. This order being instituted for the rooting out of heresies, and for the increase of the Romish religion: he would that at the ceremony, every knight should have a mantle of black velvet powdered and embroidered with lil●●● and flames of gold and silver, and wear a collar of gold interlaced with lilies and flames, whereon doth hung a cross of Malta, having a dove in the midst of it. There is a particular book written of this institution.   

¶ The order of the knights of the sacred blood of our Lord jesus Christ at Mantous.  
VIncent of G●●zague the fourth duke of Mantova, and second of Montserrat, instituted this order in the year 1608, at the marriage of Francis his son with Margueri●e of Sovoy, for the defence and increase of Christian religion, making to the number of twenty knights: which order hath been confirmed by Pope Paul the fift. And for that they of S. Andrew's Church in Mantova hold, that they have a part of the sponge of our Saviour, and three drops of his blood, which they say, had been gathered up by S. Lungs a Centenier and Martyr: he therefore erected his order upon that subject, with this inscription, Nihilisto triste recepto. He caused the collar to be made of little rods of gold bound together, and fire on the top of them, yet intermixed with others, where these words were written, Domine proba●ti me, teaching them of his order by this Cymbole, that in their greatest adversities they should keep their faith, and live in perpetual love and concord together.   

¶ The order of the Knights of our Lady of Mont Carmel, and of S. Lazare in France.  
IN the beginning of this treaty, mention hath been made of the reunion of the two orders of S. Maurice, and S. Lazare in Savoy, but the Knights of S. john had also obtained from Pope Innocent the eighth, that it should be united unto their order, in regard of France: the which they held unto the time of Amarus the chaste: who being a knight of S. john, and master of the order of S. Lazare, laboured to have the lands which did belong unto his brethren, restored unto them. His death hindered the effect of his design: but in our time, Philibert of Nerestan, endowed with as great piety and courage, as force and modesty, took his predecessors course, although he were no Knight of S. john; and to this end he went to Rome to Pope Paul the fist, where he obtained what he desired; and moreover, that from that time the French Knights of S. Lazare, should call themselves Knights of our Lady of Mont Carmel, and of S. Lazare, and for their blazon they should wear about their necks a violet Cross, whereon should be the image of our Lady, and another should be sewed upon their cloak, of the same colour and form.   

¶ Knights instituted by Popes.  
THe Bishops of Rome have instituted many orders of knighthood, as the Knights of jesus Christ, of the Holy Ghost, of S. Peter, of S. Paul, of S. George, of Pope Pius, of Lorette, of S. Anthony, of julio, and of the Lily. Of which knights some are secular men, and some of the Clergy, all pensioners to the Pope, distinguished one from another by their Crosses of divers colours. The knights of jesus Christ carry a read Cross, in a manner like to that of the Knights of the same name in Portugal, having a border about it of gold. They were instituted by Pope john the two and twentieth, as Francis Tarafe affirms, and john Confettius, in his collection of the privileges of begging Friars.  
The knights of the Holy Ghost, called at Rome the brethren of the Hospital of the Holy Ghost, carry a white Cross upon their robes or cloaks. john Azores saith, That in Saxony there is also an order of the knights of the Holy Ghost. Leo the tenth instituted the order of S. Peter against the Turks, as Alphonso Ciaconius writes, in the History of Popes and Cardinals, the which Pope Paul the third confirmed. They of S. George were made by Alexander the fourth, and Pope Pius the fourth, in the year of our Lord God 1560, erected th● which carry his name, whom he would have precede all other order made by E●●●●●orss and other Princes, yea the knights of Malta themselves, for that they were of his household, and did eat at his Table. Sixtus the fift, in the year 1586, instituted them of Lorette. This is briefly all that can be spoken of the orders of knighthood which have been of any note in Christendom. As for their statutes and particular constitutions, the Reader may receive more ample instruction in those Authors which have been quoted in this little treaty, the which would not allow of a larger discourse.     

Of the beginning of all Religious Orders.  

❧ A DISCOURSE OF ALL THE RELIGIOUS ORDERS which have been in the world, unto this day, wherein is briefly set down, who have been the Authors, in what Province, under what Popes and Emperors, and at what time they were instituted.  
Having discoursed at large of all the Monarchies and Kingdoms of the earth, and of their governments and religion: I hold it not inconvenient to speak something of all the Religious orders which have been in them, and of their first institution. But I must crave pardon if I have not herein directly followed mine Author, who, without just ground, makes Enoch, the Patriarches, and Prophets, Christ, S. john Baptist, and the Apostles, the first Institutors and Founders of an Heremitical and Monastic life. 
Monarchal or Monkish.  Wherefore, leaving this question to the learned Divines, I will come to three kinds of Monks, which he propounds to have been among the jews, whereof the first were called.  
Pharises, 
Pharises, Monks among the jews.  whom Alexandra, the mother of Hircanus, and Aristobulus, did much honour, for that they were held to excel all others in the knowledge of the holy Scriptures, and in integrity of manners; for they were diligent interpreters of the law, from whence many hold they took their name; for that Phariseus signifies a Doctor or Expositor: yet some are of opinion they were called so of Pharez, that is to say, Separation, for that they would be distinguished in their habit from other 〈…〉 men, whose living and apparel they held unclean, and their lives polluted with 〈◊〉 ●hey would seem great observers of the law, yet they held many errors in the chief points of divine doctrine: for as they held one true God, so they believed there was but one Person, and they accused Christ of blasphemy, for that he did affirm himself to be the true son of God, and very God: They did believe that the Messiah should only have a human nature, and that he should restore the earthly kingdom of the jews. They held also that it was inmans free will to fulfil the law of God, which made them to contemn the grace and merci●●f God, and to rely upon their own merits and justice. They were strict observers of outward ceremonies, to purchase an opinion of holiness with the ignorant. These, with many other errors, they held, which for brevities sake I omit.  

●aduce●.  The second order of jewish Monks were the Saduces, who had purchased unto themselves a stately name from justice. As the Pharises had charged men with unreasonable ceremonies, so these sought to give them some liberty: They denied the chief points of faith and religion, as the providence of God, the immortality of the soul, and the resurrection of the body: They held that the good had no retribution for their good works, no razors the wicked any punishmen but in this life: That there was no hell, nor any heaven in which there should be eternal life. They taught, that men should study justice, not for any hope of future reward, but for justice itself. They maintained, that it was in our own power to b● happy or unhappy.  
The third kind were called Essaei or Essaeni, that is to say, holy, 
Essaei.  who attributed salvation to the good works of men, and not to the grace of God. These men, whenas they could neither endure the too great licentiousness of the Saducees, nor the hypocrisy and dissimulation of the Pharises, went into a certain desert of Palestina, not far from jericho, whereas they lived a Monastic life, having private schools, in which, besides the law of God, they taught liberal Arts, especially, that part of Philosophy which treats of manners. They were enemies to all pleasures, and held continency for the greatest virtue. They hated marriage, not for that they would have all mankind perish, but believing that no woman kept her faith unto her husband. They contemned riches, and lived in common, so as not one was richer than another, having made a law, That whosoever would follow their sect must bring their goods in common; so as they lived together like brethren in their houses with great silence. They might not give any thing to their own kinsfolks, without leave from their superiors; yet they had free liberty to relieve the poor. They were deadly enemies to swearing, and held him to be guilty of lying, that could not be credited, unless he called God to witness. Although there were four thousand of this sect in divers places, yet their possessions, money, provision, apparel, meat, and all things belonging to the life of man were common. Their chief Temple or abode was set upon a pleasant hill, near unto the lake of Maria, or Asphaltes', the which is at this day called the Fen of Maria, and this is the great desert, in which since were the famous Monasteries of Nestria and of Thebaide.  

¶ Religious Orders since Christ.  
THe Popes of Rome challenging a succession from S. Peter, 
Priest's  and seeking to imitate the Hebrews, began to institute Ushers, Readers, and Exercists, Acolites, Deacons, and Subdeacons, all which were commonly near to those that were called Clerks; and these were chosen to be men full of religion, integrity of life, faithfulness, and bounty, after the example of the Churches of jerusalem and Antioch, who were called Clerks, consecrating them with the imposition of hands, and making some of them Priests, and others Deacons, to the end the Bishop of Rome might employ them to instruct the Christians which then increased, & were so many, as he could not alone execute that charge: he gave the chief care of souls unto priests, to the end, that administering the Sacraments to the people of God, they might with the Bishop attend prayers and preaching. To Deacons they gave the charge to relieve widows and orphans, and other poor faithful people, and to distribute unto them the alms which devour Christians had given to that intent: and moreover they appointed them to serve the Priests in their service. Pope Cletus and Euaristes reduced them to a prefixed number, for Cletus made the number of Roman Priests five and twenty, and Euaristes, conformable to the Apostles, augmented the Deacons to the number of seven. Some say that Pope Gaius the first, issued from the race of Dioclesian, was the first which made a distinction of orders, to the end that by degrees they might come to the office of Priesthood. Others say, it was Pope Iginius, one hundred forty and eight years before Gaius; but it was held for certain that the institution comes from the Apostles, who ordained seven Deacons, the which have continued from time to time.  
Having spoken of Priesthood, 
Chanoins.  the order of this subject seems to require that I should say something of Chanoins, whose beginning although it be doubtful; yet it is most certain, that good and religious men instituted colleges for Priests and Chanoins; whereas Clerks ordained for the service and ministery of the Church, and Priests settled in the ministery of the Church might live after a certain and prescript rule, the which although it were not so strict as the Monastic, yet were they tied to certain laws and canons; so as they that made profession of this life were called Chanoins. The opinions of their first institution are very divers; for some hold, that they had their first beginning from the Apostles, and that since, they were restored by S. Mark of Alexandria, as Castranus writes. Some refer the beginning of a Canonic all life oh Urbin the first, a Roman Bishop, who lived about the year of Grace 230. Others, and namely Possidonius make S. Augustin the chief Author of this institution, who when he had gathered together a company of godly men, who lived religiously, far from the noise and company of the multitude, being made a Bishop, he built a monastery for Clerks and Priests within his palace, with whom he might live in common. Onufrius Panuinus writes, that Pope Gelasius the first, about the year 493, placed the regular Chanoins of S. Augustin at Latran. Some writ, that in the year 1396, a reverend Clergy man called Bartholomew, a citizen of Rome, and an excellent preacher, associating himself with one james of Auogard of the country of Bergamo, set up this order again, which was much declined, in a poor Monastery called S. Mary of Frisonnaye, who for the poverty of the place were relleved by certain religious men called jesuastes. And as for the Church of S. john of La●●an, Pope Gelasius an African borne, and Disciple to S. Augustin, after the death of 〈◊〉 master, came to Rome, and stayed in this Church with his companions, where they lived according to the rule given by this holy Doctor, the which was continued by them that followed after for the space of eight hundred years, until that Pope Boniface, in the year 1298, placed secular Chanoins there. Gregerie the twelfth restored the regular, and would have all the congregation of Latran called of S. Saviour. Calistus the third brought in secular Chanoins again, and Pope Paul the second of that name, dispossessed them, and restored the regular. But in the end, under Sixtus the fourth, the regular Chanoins lost the possession, there remaining nothing unto them but the titles, rights, and privileges of the Church of Latran. The chief charge in the beginning of these regular Chanoins, was daily to attend the administration of Sacraments, and public prayers, and not trouble themselves with singing, for that the people in those days performed that office, the which was afterwards transferred to the Monks of the order of S. Bennet, whenas the heat of devotion began to grow cold, the Church of Latran being no more frequented; yet the secular Chanoins sung for a certain time, after that the Monasteries of Mont had been ruined by the Lombard's. The rule of these Chanoins, and of them of Frisonnaye (of whom mention hath been made) consisted chiefly upon three points, to have nothing of their own, to be chaste, and to keep their cloisters. The secular Chanoins continued at Latran unto this day.  
Besides the regular Chanoins of Latran, there are also the Chanoins of S. Mark of Mantova, who say, they had their first foundation in Alexandria of Egypt from S. Mark the Evangelist, and therefore they are called Chanoins of S. Mark, not only of the title of their Church, but also of the name of their Author, as they affirm: S. Mark they take for their Patron, and Pope Innocent the third, confirmed it by a Bull dated in the year 1205. Honorius the third, added four convents to their congregation, and many Popes confirmed their rule and privileges. They were wont to sleep upon matresses, and had blankets of wool: they fasted much, used great silence, and lived in common, having nothing proper to themselves: they used exercises two hours in the day, and at the end of the year, they made their profession. They did not admit any one to the habit until he were seventeen years old, and they gave themselves to study and preaching. There are also Monasteries of religious women of this order; but at this present, they have no other Monastery, but that of S. Mark of Mantova, and a member depending thereon at Neise near unto Padova. In their house they are attired like unto the Chanoins of La●ran, with a Rochet; but whenas they go into the town, they cast on a white frock. They wear a square white cap. Whenas they go into the choir, they wear no frock, but a rochet, and a surplus upon it, like unto a Bishop. They wear also a skin of fur upon their ●●mess, like unto the secular Chanoins. johannes Andreas in the first Clemintin saith, that in his time they were so attired.  

hermits.  We now come to the hermits life, of whose beginning and first authors, there is great ●●estion, the which I leave unto the learned, and will only say, that Sozomenus, Nicepho●●●▪ and some others affirm, that the times of persecution were the first cause of this kind of life. For whenas in the time of Decius and Valerianus Emperors, about two hundred fifty and two years after Christ, they prepared horrible torments against the Christians, many distrusting the weakness of the flesh, and fearing to deny the name of God by their intolerable persecutions, thought it fittest to seek their safety by flight: wherefore, many leaving towns, friends, and all their wealth, retired themselves into deserts, and held themselves in solitary places and caves, where they built poor cottages: yea many times they went wandering up and down in thick woods, lest they should be taken. But when the fury of their persecution and tyranny ceased, they returned not unto the world, but lived voluntarily in deserts, so being accustomed to divine contemplation, and a quiet kind of life, they continued in that course until death.  
Among the first which entered into this course of a solitary life, of whom histories make mention, Paulus Thebeus is held the chief, 
Paulus Thebeus.  who being about the age of fifteen years old, during the persecution of Decius, having lost his parents, and being left a rich patrimony, with a sister that was married, her husband sought means to betray him for a Christian, to the end he might enjoy his father in laws whole estate alone; whereupon, he fled into a solitary place for his safety, hiding himself in a cave at the foot of a rock, where, being delighted with the pleasantness of the place, he spent the rest of his life in solitariness. They writ, That in this cave there was a goodly Palm tree, the which extended her bows by an overture in the top: This tree was so great, as it covered all the place, near unto the which was a clear fountain which was his daily drink, he fed upon the first-fruits of the Palm tree, and was relieved, as they say, by the space of sixty years, or more, by a Raven, which brought him half a loaf every day at nine of the clock in the morning: His clotheses were made of the leaves of the Palm tree. S. jerosme writes, That from the time he entered into this solitary place, which was about the year of our Redemption 260, unto the end of his life, he never went forth, having continued there about one hundred and ten years; that he never saw any man but Anthony, who came unto him the last day of his life, and buried him; wherefore many call him the first Hermit.  
Many have since imitated him, not only for fear of persecution and tyranny, but upon zeal, being weary of the world, lest they should be polluted with the unclean conversation of worldlings, and to the end they might more freely spend their times in divine contemplations, in the meditation of heavenly things, and in prayer.  
The first after Paul of Thebes, which lived a solitary life, was Anohonie, 
Anthony.  who instituted an Hermit's life in Egypt, the which was afterwards dispersed into other countries, and therefore is by some called the Father of the Hermits of Egypt. He was borne of noble and religious parents, and being about twenty years old, he sold his Estate, and gave part of it to his sister, and the rest he distributed to the poor; and in the beginning went and lived in a remote place alone, from whence he went often to his Disciples. Being five and thirty years old, he went into the Desert, and propounded unto himself a stricter kind of life, where, having lived twenty years, he came again into the world, and had familiarity with other Monks, with whom he did often converse. Coming into cities, he preached Christ faithfully: but in the end, returning to a more strict course of life, he built him a cottage upon the top of a high hill, where he died, having lived one hundred and five years, which was in the year of our Salvation 345, under the empire of Constantin the second, who reigned, with Constans and Constantius his brethren, at what time julius the second held the apostolic See. He was called the Father of the Monks, in regard that he was the most valiant Champion, yea the most excellent Captain that ever entered the lists against the Devil. It was a custom in those days, that who so would leave the world, retired themselves into solitary places, where, being separated from the people, they did what penance they thought good, and every man took what habit he held most decent, but it was without form or rule of life, and no man bound himself thereunto by vow, but all were at liberty to go where they pleased; and if any, changing his mind, went to another place, he was not noted of inconstancy, as we see at this day. All these did visit Anthony, & did acknowledge him for their Father. He was so much esteemed for his virtues throughout the world, as Emperors, Kings, and Princes, wrote often unto him for his council, and recommended themselves unto his prayers.  
Yet to prove that Anthony was not the Author of a Monastic life, they produce Denis Ariopagita, who in his Book of the Celestial Hierarchia, saith, That the Apostles called Monks the servants of God: And Philo judeus, who lived in the time of the Emperors, Tiberius and Caligula, in the treaty which he made of a contemplative life, in the which he doth greatly magnify the Christians, whom he calls the servants of the great God (the name of Christians which took his beginning at Antioch, being not yet in use) saith, That they had nothing proper to themselves; none were rich nor poor; they spent their time commonly in praying to God, and singing, desirous to learn, and living in great continency. He saith also, that their habitations were called Monasteria, that is to say, Solitudes. S. jerosme hold, That S. Mark the Evangelist was the Head and Founder of a Monastic life, and that what Philo hath written in praise of Christians, was in regard of the commendable behaviour which he saw in S. Mark, and his Monks at Alexandria: And Peter Damian, and Cassianus affirm, That the Monastic order was in the Apostles time: but this doth not infer that Anthony was not Father of the Monkes● for by his example, and the reputation of his Holiness, the deserts of Egypt were 〈◊〉 with Monks, yet this is no consequence, that there were none before, not only 〈◊〉 deserts, but also in them of Thebaide, Lybia, and Palestina.  

Hilarion.  Many did imitate Anthony in this solitary course of life, among which was Hilarion, who was the first Hermit in Palestina and Syria, and was the Head of a great number of Monks. Some writ, that being fifteen years old, moved with the fame of Anthony, he retired himself into the Desert, whereas he built a little cottage, the which was four foot square, and five foot high, so as standing, he was forced to stoop, and lying, to draw up his feet, where he lived many years an Hermit, and did many miracles, according to the testimony of Sozimenus, and S. jerosme. Macarius, a Disciple to S. Anthony, (for they are all canonised for Saints) an Egyptian, living in the time of Hilarion, was Author of the Monks of Thebaide. And they writ of a holy Abbot in Thebaide, who dwelled upon the confines of the city of Hermopolis, whether, they say, that the Virgin Marie, with joseph, and jesus her son, retired themselves to fly the cruelty of Herod, who, by the report of Heraclides, had command over five thousand Monks. And the same Author affirmeth, that the Abbot Isodorus caused a Monastery to be built in Thebaide, environed with walls, which contained above one thousand Monks.  
In the mountain of Nitria, distant about forty miles from Alexandria, as S. jerosme and Heraclides writ, there were fifty Monasteries one near unto another, in some of the which the Monks did live in common, and in others they lived a part; but they were all governed by one Superior and Head, which may seem very strange, and yet Heraclid●s writes, that he found in these Monasteries about two thousand Monks of great perfection: And S. jerosme doth affirm, that he found in a town of Thebaide, two thousand Virgins, and above ten thousand Monks which lived there. The same mirror of repentance, S. jerosme, 
Three kinds of Monks.  writing to Eustachius, saith, That there were three kinds of Monks in Egypt: The first were Anchorites, or Hermits, who lived alone in deserts, far from the company and conversation of men: The second kind were of Coenobites or Monks, which lived together in common; yet Isidorus makes a difference betwixt Monasterium, and Coenobium, for that Monasterium may be called the dwelling or abode of one Monk alone, and Coenobium is of many.  
The third kind of Monks that were in Egypt, were called Rembo●ss, or Remboth, men which were little esteemed, and in a manner contemned. They lived together by couples, or three and three, according to their own humours, and they were not subject to any Superior, neither yielded they obedience to any: They laboured with their hands, and what they got, they kept as their own proper, conferring some small portion, that they might have their meat in common. Their abode was most commonly in towns and castles, as if the air had been holy, and not the life: what they sold, they esteemed more than the goods of other men. There were ever some jars among them, for that, living of their own, they would not endure any Superior. They had all things wonderfully affected, the sleeves of their garments wide, their slops puffed up, and their gowns gathered thick, they sighed much, and went into the Monasteries of Virgins speaking ill of the Clergy, and upon festival days they full gorged themselves: thus S. jerosme writes of them.  
Besides these three orders S. Benedict adds a fourth, which were called Gyrovagis, vagabonds or night-wanderers, never abiding any certain place, but wandering through divers regions and provinces, standing at the doors of Churches to beg money. They lodged in Hospitals and Inns, and were gluttons given to sensuality and pleasure, for what they had gotten together with much labour and long time, they consumed in an hour, and wandering up and down they corrupted many by the example of their ill lives.  
As for the Cenobites or Monks, the first vow they made was to obey whatsoever their superiors should command. They were divided by ten and hundreds, so as the tenth man had charge over the other nine, and the Centinier over the hundred. They lived of bread, pulses, and some herbs, and they wrought many factures, the rest of the time they spent in prayer and devotion: they fasted all the year, and whenas Lent came they observed it more strictly. After Whitsunday, they changed supper to dinner, to satisfy (as they said) the traditions of the Apostles. Some of the Anachorets or hermits, before they entered into solitude, made their Probations in Monasteries: the thing wherein they most exercised themselves, was to quiet their own wills, practising humility and patience: and whenas they saw themselves fortified in all virtue, they went into solitude to do penance, and into places so far from all company, as their nearest neighbours spent above seven days to found them out. The author of this life was that Paul of Thebes of whom we have made mention, unless we had rather say (but erroneously) that S. john Baptist was the first which put it in practice.  
Cariton borne at Icome, 
Cariton.  having suffered much under the Emperor Aurelian for the faith of Christ: in the end being ●reed, during the reign of the Emperor Tacitus which succeeded him, going the voyage of the Holy Land, they writ that he was taken by thieves, who bond his hands, and put an iron collar about his neck, and so led him into a desert place, near unto the de●d sea, which was called the Fonnes of Asphaltides, or the lake of Sodom. These ●h●evess going to seek for some other booty, a viper entered into their cave, and drank of the u●ssell in which the thieves kept their wine, the which she poisoned, so as they coming afterwards to drink d●ed, all instantly: and they say, that the bonds of this holy man Cariton were miraculously broken at the same time; so as he remained Master of all their wealth, whereof he distributed part to the poor Chri●●ian● that were retired into the deserts, stying persecution; and with the rest, he built the Monast●rie of Laura in the same place, the which was afterwards one of the most famous of all the East: the Church was consecrated to S. Macaire, who was one of the fathers that came to the Cou●cell of Nice▪ but being oppressed by the multitudes of people which came thither unto him, he retired farther into the desert, where in time he was forced to build another Monastery, the which he also abandoned; for he greatly loved solitariness, and went into the de●●rt of Tecori, where having converted many to the Christian faith, (whereof a great number took the habit of religion) he built a third Monastery, which was afterwards called of the Suryans, Sura, and by the Grecians old Laura: yet in the end he retired himself to another cave, called Co●ruastris, that is to say, hanging, for they went up to it by a ladder, where having lived long, he fell sick, and was carried to his first monastery, where he ended his days in the time that julio a Roman was Bishop of Rome, under the Emperor Constantin the second, and Constance his brother, who was an Arrian, and persecuted the Christians that favoured not his error.  
julian the Martyr, 
julian.  he which was of the city of Antioch in Surya (for there were three and twenty of that name, and all canonised) having made a vow of chastity; yet marrying, they say that by a revelation which he had the first night of his marriage he so disposed his wife Basilissa (who was very fair and of a good house) as she made a vow to live with him in perpetual continency unknown to the world. Their parents being dead, a while after they gave part of their goods to the poor, and with the rest, they built a great Monastery, the which is able to contain an infinite number of Monks, which were under the government of julian. They also built another Monastery for Basil ssa, who was mother to a thousand Nu●nes. Afterwards in the time of the tenth persecution, under the emperors Dioclesian and Maximian, having suffered many martyrdoms by the commandment of Martial Precedent of Antioch, in the end he received the crown of martyrdom with his companions, this tyrant having caused them to be slain by the sword.  

S. Basil.  But for the better understanding of these religious orders, it is necessary to know that there are four rules, the which are propounded by the Church of Rome, that is to say, tha● of S. basil, S. Augustin, S. Benedict, and S. Francis, under the which all other orders are comprehended, and governed. As for S. basil that learned man, who was surnamed the Great, he lived about the year of Grace 300, being a Priest at Caesaria, the chief city of Cappadocia, where he was borne, and afterwards chosen Bishop, he was slandered to Eusebius the Bishop of that place, who hated him in such sort, as he sought to expel him the Church, if he had not been prohibited; but S. basil being loathe to oppose himself against Eusebius, willingly gave way to his hatred, and retired himself into a certain Monastery of Pontus, where he instructed the Monks diligently in religion, and the word of God: then going from thence into the country and cities of Pontus, he was the author of the building of Monasteries, whereas many might live together, for before his time they dwelled in caves and cells alone, in deserts, and solitary places, from the which S. basil drew the Monks into Monasteries, and instituted a discipline, by the which they should no more wander, but be always bound by one form of religion. These Monasteries, as Nazianzenus and Ruffinus do writ, were schools, in the which the arts and Philosophy, together with Divinity, true religion, and pierie, were taught, to the end there might be learned and fit men always ready to govern the Church: wherefore the Monks under S. basil were militant, retired from the world, and from all worldly cares, to the end they might learn good arts, and true religion, and serve God more freely by watching, hymns, and prayers. They hold that he was the first which caused Monks to make a vow, after a years probation, to live in their Monasteries until death, to promise' full obedience to their superiors, and not to contradict their ordinances, and moreover to vow continency and poverty. This rule was accepted by all the Monks of those times, and allowed by the said Church as good and holy; wherefore they say that the rule of S. basil is the first of all others, for that he was the first which restrained religious men into one place, and forced them to make possession of a certain rule. He built so great and spacious a Monastery in Armenia, as it contained above three thousand Monks, and in the end he reduced all the religious men of the East to hold a good form of life.  
The order of this holy man did also flourish in some parts of Greece, but especially in the dominions of the famous city of Venice. There are likewise some of this order in Italy, namely at Grottaferrata twelve miles from Rome. They celebrated their office after the Roman manner, but in the Greek tongue, and with Greek characters, for they are Grecians. In the belief, according to the Latin Church, they say, Qui ex patre filioque procedit, the which they of the East do not. The orders are conferred unto them by the Pope's Vicar, having been examined by some learned man in the Greek tongue: they make profession under their Archimandrite, which signifies the chief of the convent: they eat no flesh nor any fat, and before they say Mass, they wash the Altar, and use great abstinence: they labour with their hands in imitation of the perfect Monks of Egypt, and what they get with their labour they bring in common, retaining nothing to themselves. All the other Monasteries of Italy which are of this order acknowledge the Abbey of Grottaferrata for their mother. The founder of this Monastery was S. Nile, borne in Calabria. All continued in the rule which was given them at a Council held at Florence by Pope Eugenius the fourth. As for S. Basil, he died in the year three hundred seventy and nine, whenas Damasus the first of that name, held the See of Rome, and the Emperor Valens, an Arrian, governed the East.  
Next to S. Basile, according to the order of times, we are to speak of the Abbot Pacomes, who first of all lived an Hermit's life in the Island of Tabenna, in the province of Thebaide, about the time of Constantius, son to Constantine the Great, after which, he instituted Monasteries in the same place, 
Thabennensiotae institute by Pacomo●.  and his Monks were called Thabennensiotae. They writ, That an Angel came unto him sitting in his cave, and said unto him, Veni, & omnes iuniores Monachos collige, eosque juxta regulam vitae, quam à me disces, institue, Come, and gather together all the young Monks, and instruct them according to the rule of life which thou shalt learn of me: whereupon, he gave him two Tables of brass, in which the rule was written, and then vanished away, leaving such a zeal in him, upon this miraculous occasion, to execute his Commission, as they writ, that within few days he gathered together above seven thousand Monks, who lodged themselves in divers Monasteries, which they built one near unto another, about the chief place whereas Pacomes remained, whom Gennadius, in his Book of Ecclesiastical Consonances, calls a man endowed with an Apostolical grace, as well for his manner of teaching, as for the miracles which he did. He had afterwards fifteen hundred Monks, besides the seven thousand above mentioned, all under his discipline; and he divided them into four and twenty orders or forms, according to the disposition of the Greek letters, as they said, he had in charge from the Angel; for by this means he needed only to sand for the heads, to know the estate of his Monks. They laboured with their hands, as they do in all the Monasteries of Egypt, and they did not receive any one into their profession, but he promised to labour in the trade wherein he had been bred, and what he got, to deliver into the steward's hands, who, by order from the Abbot, provided for all their necessities. This holy man died, in the year of our Redemption 405, being one hundred and ten years old, in the ninth year of the emperors Honorius and Arcadius, whenas Innocent the first governed the Church of Rome.  
S. Simphorian lived in Pacomes' time, 
Simphorian.  who caused a monastery to be built without the tie of Milan, whither he retired himself with many Disciples, to whom he gave a rule, the which is not to be found at this day, nor how they were attired, for that presently after, the Monastic order was reduced all into one: yet after the time of S. Benedict, it was divided into many branches. He lived in the time of S. Ambrose, and it was to him that the Holy Ghost sent S. Augustin after his baptism, as to a man which was more famous for his piety and learning than the rest: He was very learned, and did converse familiarly with Victorin, an excellent and famous Orator, to whom S. jerosme confesfeth himself to have been sometime a Disciple and Auditor.  
I must now speak of S. Martin, who was borne at Sibaria, 
S. Martin.  a famous castle in Hungary, bred up at Pavia, and received baptism at Poitiers, by S. Hilary, Bishop of that town. He built a Monastery at Milan, and another at Poitiers, where he continued with his Monks, living so holy a life as they held themselves happy that might have any one of them for Bishop, and he himself was soon after chosen Bishop of Tours, where he caused that famous Monastery of Marmoutier to be built, half a league from that town, a man of great sanctity, as well for his obedience, and humility, as for his charity and poverty, doing many great miracles; among others, they writ (how true I know not) that he raised three from the dead, and made many blind to see and cured very many sick and diseased. He died in the time of the emperors Arcadius and Honorius, Siricius the first sitting at Rome.  
But who can pass over with silence, Great S. jerosme, 
jeromit●.  that mirror and pattern of true Repentance, who was a father to all other Doctors, and from whose labours ●he Church reaps so great first-fruits. This great parsonage had to his father a gentleman, whose name was called Eusebius, Lord of a castle called Stridonia; upon the confines of Hungaria, and Dalmatia: He grew so learned above the common sort, as S. Augustin saith of him, that his knowledge was such in all the liberal arts and tongues, as unto his time he knew not any one that might be compared unto him. He traveled seven years with great toil and difficulty, after which, he went into the most uncouth deserts of Egypt, whereas he maids his abode four whole years: And he that would know the fasts, pains, and austerity which he endured in that place, let him read the Epistle which he himself wrote to Eustachius. But notwithstanding that he contented himself with this kind of solitary life, yet the necessities of the Church called him out of Syria to Rome, whereas he behaved himself in such sort, as Damasus being dead, he was held worthy by many to be Bishop, only the Clergy hated him, for that he inveighed bitterly against their wicked lives: whereupon, they slandered him to the people, so as he grew hateful unto them, and was in such danger of himself, as he left Rome, and went again into Syria, and came to Bethelem, a city of judea, without the gates whereof, upon the West part, not far from the place where our Saviour was borne, by the permission of Syrillus, Archbishop thereof, he built a goodly Monastery, where, within a short time, he gathered together a great number of Disciples, among which were Eusebius of Cremona, who hath since written his masters life, and Sympronius, who hath also written very learnedly. S. jerosme lived in that place, with his Disciples, according to the institution of the Apostles, who, notwithstanding all his toil (spending his time continually in the traduction of the holy Scriptures) omitted nothing of his penance. They make him Author of the order which they call jerosmiens, or jeronimites, whereof there be many at this day in the country of Spain. They wear a white Cassock, and upon it a tawny cloak plaited above like unto the je●uastss. The chief Monastery of all this order is called S. Bartholomew of Lupiena, three leagues from the town of Gardayes, and there are two and thirty Monasteries of this order in Spain, who are commonly called the Monks of S. jerosme of Guadeloupe. They make profession of the rule of S. Augustin, and observe some of his constitutions: There are none of this profession in Italy, yet they entertain a Procurator. As for S. jerosme, he died the last day of September, in the year of our Lord God 420, the twelfth year of the Emperor Honorius, and in the first of Pope Boniface the first.  

Augustins.  The next rule approved by the Church of Rome, after that of S. Basile the Great, was that of the Doctor (as I may term him) of all Doctors, that is, S. Augustin: This great and worthy spirit, who can never be honoured according to his merits, was borne, about the year of our Redemption 358, in the castle of Tegast, and had to father one called by the name of Patricius, and his mother was termed Monica: At the age of eighteen years, the reading of a Book called Hortensis, made him a Manichean, who coming to Rome, he purchased such reputation and credit for his learning, as the Romans erected a statue in his honours; and going from thence to Milan, the entreaties of his mother Monica, and the profound and learned Sermons of S. Ambrose, drew him from the error wherein he had continued unto the age of thirty years: from thence he returned into his own country, where he obtained of the Bishop of Hippona, a garden without the town, causing a Monastery to be built there, in which he lived of the labour of his hands, in all integrity, according to the institution of the Primitive Church. Whenas he took the habit of religion, he had twelve companions, whose names be these which follow; Augustin, Nembrides, Enodes, Alipe, Pontient, Dieudonne, or Theodore, Simplician, Faustin, a Graecian by nation, Hordulus, Valerius, justin, and Paul. All which girt themselves with a belt of leather, to be distinguished from other Monks. Having continued some time in this Monastery, with his companions, seeing the concourse of people that came daily to visit him, he retired himself two miles from the town, and they that would follow him, built themselves little lodgings upon the side of a hill, whence they say the Hermits of Saint Augustin had their first beginning, who at that time were to the number of one hundred and twenty, or near thereabouts, under his obedience. They drank no wine but in cases of necessity. This number multiplied greatly, so as in a short time there were a great many monasteries in Africa; but the persecutions of the Goths and Vandals forced them to abandon and leave the country, and to go into other provinces, where this order was also so persecuted by Heretics and Infidels, as it was in a manner altogether extinct, until the time of William duke of Guienne, who afterwards become a Monk of this order, whose holiness of life was the cause that he obtained leave from Pope Anastasius, and Adrian the fourth of their name, to leave their cells, and to retire himself with the brethren of his order into towns: upon which grant he caused a very great and goodly monastery to be erected and built at Paris, which was the first of this order that was erected in any town, and his Monks, in regard of their Restorer, were called Guillemins. This happened in the year of our Salvation one thousand one hundred fifty and seven.  
Afterwards, about the year of our redemption one thousand and two hundred, this order which carries the name of Augustins began to flourish in Italy, by the means of john, surnamed the Good, borne at Mantova, who made himself a Monk of this order, getting so great reputation, as well by his holiness of life, as learning, as through his occasion they built many monasteries of the order of Saint Augustin, as well in Romagna, and the duchy of Spoletum, as in the marquisat of Ancona and Lombardie; so as he may well be called the the Father and Reformer of this order in Italy. He died in the year of our salvation one thousand two hundred twenty and two. His body rests at Mantova in the Church of Saint Agnes, famous for many mirackles. Some hold that he was schoolmaster to Saint Francis of Assize, and that he made profession under the said john, after whose death the order multiplied greatly: but the Monks took divers habits, some calling themselves of Saint Augustin, others of Saint William, some of Soint john the Good, some of the congregation of Saint Fabales, and others of the order of the Britins; whereupon, in the year one thousand two hundred forty and three, Pope Innocent the fourth ordained that all the hermits, and other religious men of the order of Saint Augustin should be called by one name, Augustins, or Hermitans of Saint Augustin: and although they made their residence in towns, yet they should be called Hermitans, and should live according to the profession and rule which they ascribed to S. Augustin, so as their divers sorts of habits were reduced into one.  
This order of S. Augustin is divided into two, whereof the one are called Conuentualls, and the other of the Observance: and that of the Observance is again divided into eleven companies, the which since the time of Pope Innocent have been reform, that is to say, the Observance, Miletane, Carbonian, Perusian, that of Lomdie, that of Mont Orthon, Baptistella, that of Povillia, Calabria, Dalmatia, and that of S. Paul, of all which mention shall be made hereafter.  
Having made mention of the founders of a monastic life, 
Benedictus,  and of the beginning of the Religious orders, the which have flourished in Egypt, Syria, Armenia, and Africa: it shall be fit to observe what hath passed in these Western parts, whereas first of all Saint Benedict or Saint Bennet presents himself, as the Patriarch and Father of all the Monks of Europe: He was borne about one hundred sixty and six years after Anthony, who was the first Hermit in Egypt, and near about forty years after Saint Augustin, being in the year of our salvation four hundred eighty and two in the town of Nursia, the which is a region of the Sabins, otherwise called Vmbria, of the noble family of the Regards, who were then powerful and famous, not only in Nursia, but in all the country about: his father's name was Proper, and his mother Abundance: he was sent to Rome at the age of ten years to learn the liberal Arts, but he left his study and wealth, and fled into a Castle the which was called Effida, being followed by none but only his nurse, but being weary of the tumults and war the which were grown during the reign of the Emperor justinian, he went from thence into a desert the which was near to Sublac, sometimes a good town of the Latins, being about forty miles distant from Rome, where he continued for the space of three years or thereabouts, doing very austere penance, and being unknown to any but to a Monk, the which was called Romain; but being afterwards discovered by certain shepherds, the people flocked from all parts to see him, who had such force to persuade them to abandon the world, as in a short time they built twelve monasteries, and having given to every one of them a good Superior or Abbot, desiring solitariness, he retired himself, with a good number of his best disciples, to the place whereas now stands the monastery of Mount Cassin, and whereas in old time was the town of Cassina, the which is near unto that of Aquin in Beasse, having before ruined all the Temples of the Idols, and broken their images, where he built him a monastery, and there settled himself, drawing all the Monks, dispersed in Italy, into one society and company; so as he was the first which declared the name of jesus Christ in that place, where having gathered his Monks together, he gave unto them a rule in writing, by the which they and their successors should govern themselves: and this rule was the third, accounting ●hat of S. basil, the which was allowed by the See of Rome: by the preaching and good life of Paul, who was one of the most famous disciples of this Saint Benedict, the Monastic life which was used in France was reform; and Placidus was another who did the like in Sicily. This tree hath cast forth very many branches, as the orders of Cluni, Comalduli, Val d'Ombre, of Cisteaux, the Humbled, Celestins, Olivetains, and that of Saint justin. Saint Benedict being made Abbot, would have the Monks which were of his monastery, live after the rule and order which he had prescribed: but as some writ, they who were not accustomed to so strict a of life, but given altogether to their pleasures, resolved in the end to kill Saint Benedict, mixing poison with wine in a glass, the which broke in pieces, and so the wine was spilled; whereupon they paint Benedict with a broken glass in his hand, and a serpent, which signifies poison.  

The order of Cluni.  All things degenerate in time, and stray in a manner from the right course. The order of Saint Benedict having flourished with great reputation, differed so much from the first institution of their Founder, as both General and Provincial councils had made many decrees to reform them, and to draw them to their first principles, but what neither the decrees, nor the authority of holy fathers could effect, the holiness and sanctity of an Abbot of Cluni, who was called Odo, brought happily to pass, reviving in a manner from death to life the Monastic order, forcing them to observe, and observing himself from point to point all that was practised in the time of Saint Benedict; so as many of their Abbots which were drawn by his good example, reform also their Abbeys, the which was not only done in France, but also in Spain, Germany, and Italy: and for that this reformation had his first beginning at Cluni, the union of so many Abbeys (amounting unto the number of two thousand, or near there about) was called the congregation of Cluni, and every year by the Pope's permission and authority, all the Abbots of this congregation met at a certain place, and they called it the general Chapter, whereas they treated of the order and life of Monks, putting out, and punishing such as had offended. This Saint Odo lived in the year of Grace nine hundred and thirteen, and died under the Empire of Henry the second, john the tenth borne at Ravenna, being then Pope.  

The order of Comalduli.  The order of Comalduli began in Italy about the year one thousand and twelve, and it had for Founder Romoald borne at Ravenna, of the family of the Saxes, the which was of great fame and nobility in that city, who being naturally given to solitariness, although he were the eldest and only son of his house, left the world at the age of twenty years, and retired himself to the Monastery of Chasses near to Ravenna, where he drew an infinite number of people to Christ by his good life, so as Peter Damian writes, not only in the Marquisat of Treviso, Romagna, and Tuscanie, but also in France and Syria, so great numbers were converted, as they say, if they had not taken some order, in a manner, the best part of the world had become Monks; many Earls, Marquises, Dukes, and others which were of very great personages, being, as I may term them, his Disciples, and daily Scholars. He built many Monasteries of his profession in Tuscanie, in the Marquisat of Auvergne, in Romagna, and in the parts of Istria, all which he filled with Monks: After which, he built that famous Monastery of Comalduli in Tuscanie, near unto Arezzo, so called of one Maldo, a gentleman of that City, who seeing the holy and devout life of Romould, gave him a part of the Appenin hills, where this Monastery was built, the which Romould would have so called in remembrance of his benefactor. This Monastery maintains itself in his first vigour, and observes the originary rule strictly unto this day, the which makes it to be generally honoured, and much respected. As for Romould, he flourished in the time of Basilius, and Constantin, both Emperors of Greece, and Otho the third, Emperor of Germany. He died when he was one hundred and twenty year old, having been twenty years in the world, three years a Monk, and ninety seven an Hermit. They of his order are attired in white, after a Monastic manner, and they observe the rule of S. Bennet.  
The order of Grand Mont was instituted at Grand Mont in Limosin, 
The order of Grand Mont.  about the year of our Redemption one thousand seventy six, under the rule of S. Benedict, by Stephen a gentleman of Au●ergne, who being sent by his father to Molon, Bishop of Beneuent, to be instructed by him, he spent twelve years, learning the institutions and rule of S. Benedict. Going from thence, and having duly observed the lives of many Hermits, and Monks, and seen what was worthy of imitation, in the end he settled himself upon the top of a high hill in Limosin, being at that time thirty years old, whereas he built a little cottage. He prescribed a rule out of that of S. Benedict, to his Disciples, himself living with bread and water, and died, being eighty years old.  
In the year of our Lord God one thousand ninety five, 
The order of S. Anthony's Hospital.  was instituted the order of those which served the sick in S. Anthony's Hospital, that is to say, of such whose members consume away by little and little by S. Anthony's fare, as they call it, whose first Author was a French gentleman, called Gaston, of the country of Vienna, with Gerin his son, having eight more joined unto them, who being lay men, took a black habit, having the letter Tau, of a sky colour, sowed upon their breasts. Some writ, That S. Anthony's Monks are very troublesome to men by their importunate begging: : They continually threaten S. Anthony's fire to them that contribute nothing: whereupon, poor superstitious people do every year give them a fat hog, to the end they may have their favour and prayers to God, and be free from their threats.  
The order of Val d'Ombre depending of that of S. Benedict, 
The order of Val d'Ombre●  having certain private constitutions added to the rule, had his beginning about the year 1040, from john Gualbert, a Florentin, Lord of Pretrevol, and Val de Pesche, who upon Good Friday having met with his enemy, who had slain his brother, and pursuing him in such sort as he could by no means possibly escape, the other casting himself from his horse, entreated him to save his life, even for his sake who upon that day died upon the Cross to save and redeem them all; whereat john was so moved, as he not only gave him his life, but also lighting from his horse, embraced him lovingly and kindly, promising to esteem him as his own brother, who was dead; from whence he went to the Church of S. M●niat, near Florence, to pray, where being upon his knees, before the Crucifix, which was in the midst of the Church, they writ, That the image bowed down the head visibly towards him, the wood of the Cross cracking and making a noise, seeming thereby, as they would infer, that God was pleased with the work which he had done, and as they say thanked him for that he had pardoned his enemy for his sake. john being moved with this prodigious miracle, resolved to leave the world, and as Christ was hanged naked upon the Cross, so to follow him naked: wherefore, leaving all worldly things, he gave himself wholly to the study of religion, and went to profess himself a Monk in the Monastery of S. Miniat; but leaving that place for certain causes, he came unto an arm of the Appenin hills, twenty miles from Florence, and stayed in a place called Val Ombreux, where he built a poor cottage, the which afterwards grew to be a rich and famous Monastery. From this place the order of Val d'Ombre took his name and beginning. He died in the year of our Redemption 1037, under the empire of Henry the third, Gregory the seventh being Bishop of Rome, who canonised him, as some writ, others say it was Calixtus. The Monks of this place have a habit of a smoky colour, to distinguish them from the black Monks, and they observe the rule of S. Benedict.  

The order of the Charthufiens.  They writ, that another fearful miracle soon after the erecting of the order of Val d'Ombre, was the cause of the beginning of the Carthusiens, that is to say, in the year of our Lord God 1080, a Doctor of Paris, a man of great learning and reputation being dead, and carried to the Church to be buried, at Evensong, whenas they sung over his body the Lesson which gins, Respond mihi, the body sitting up in the coffin, answered the first day with a terrible voice, justo Dei judicio accusatus sum, I am accused by the just judgement of God: At which voice, all the company being much amazed, they deferred his interment until the next day, at what time the body did rise in the like manner, and said, justo Dei judicio iudicatus sum: Then attending the event of this wonder until the third day, the people flocking thither from all parts of the city, and the Priests coming to the words, Respond mihi, he raised himself up as before, saying, justo Dei judicio condemnatus sum, with so fearful and strange a voice, as it not only amazed them that were present, but all such as heard speak of this wonder. Among many Doctors which assisted, there was one called Bruno a German, borne at Colleyne, of a rich and noble family, Channoin of the Cathedral Church of Rheims in Champagne, and Doctor of Divinity in the Canon law, who being much amazed at this strange and never heard of spectacle, said unto the Assistants: You see how miserable the end of this man is, who in all our opinions was held religious and holy: Shall we perish after this manner? Believe me, there is no hope of salvation, unless we leave the world; If this be done unto a great tree, what shall become of that which is sere and withered: whereupon, he resolved to leave the world, and to retire himself into some solitary place, imparting this his resolution to six of his companions, whose names were Lewis a Doctor of Paris, who was the first Prior of the Charthusiens after Bruno; two which carried the name of Stephen, and both Channoins, Hugh a Priest, with Andrew, and Gerin, lay men, who being moved by the persuasions of Bruno, resolved to accompany him into some desert place, so as going all together to Grenoble, a city of Dauphine in France, they presented themselves to Hugh, who was then Bishop there, whom they requested to give them some solitary place, where to spend the remainder of their days. Being come before the Bishop, he had a vision, in which he thought that God was come down to the place whereas now the great Charthusiens stands, and that he saw seven stars, of the colour of gold, rise out of the earth, differing much from those of the firmament. This was the night before the holy man and his troops arrived, who being come before Bishop Hugh, whenas he saw them to be seven in number, and had heard their request, he doubted no more of the interpretation of his vision, so as he gave them in perpetuity, a certain place twelve miles from Grenoble, called Charthusia, from which the whole order hath since taken his name. It was a large desert place among high hills, unknown and unfrequented by any but wild beasts: there were high steep rocks full of wild trees, without any fruit, and it was exceeding cold, and for the most part of the year covered with snow: It was so steep, barren, and unfruitful, as they could neither sow, nor reap any thing: the entry into it was difficult and dangerous, by reason of two high rocks, which seemed to join together in the top; so as it was a terror to them that went in. In the midst of it ran a little river, which was gathered together in those mountains, making a noise like a torrent, or inundation of waters; so as it might better seem to deserve the name of a prison, than the dwelling of any human creature; yet notwithstanding, they began to inhabit this place, wherein they were much assisted with all necessary things by Bishop Hugh, who also not long after joined himself to that company.  
They built a Church, or rather a Monastery upon the top of a hill, and small houses or cells about the fountain, the which unto this day is called Brunos Well, not far d●st●nt from the Church, yet separated, lest they should interrupt one another's quiet, and in these cells they lived by couples, & like unto the old Monks of Egypt, they gave themselves to silence, prayer, and reading, spending some hours in the labour of their hands, especially in writing of books, both to relieve their wants, and to do service to the Church of God: they did macerate their bodies by fasting and discipline; and in the end resolved to eat no flesh during their lives, and to wear sackcloth, the which they observe at this day. They are attired in white, wearing a short cape, or cloak of black: they fast often, observe great silence, and eat every man alone, but on Sundays, and certain festival days, whenas they feed all together: they are allowed upon certain days betwixt Noon and Evensong to discourse together without any scruple: their service is very long, and they study for nothing but a solitary life. The donation of Bishop Hugh was confirmed by Hugh Archbishop of Lion, and afterwards by Pope Vrbain the second.  
This order extends itself into divers parts of Christendom, and it is divided into seventeen provinces, in the which there are ninety and three Monasteries: they have had the name of Charthusiens of the place, as hath been said, whither their preacher first retired himself, who having been sent for to Rome by Pope Vrbaine, who had been his disciple, he remained there, and did help much to pacify the troubles which were then in the Church by his prayers: he parted from Rome, and taking his way by Calabria, he came into a desert, called the tower in the diocese of Squilace, where he stayed with his companions, making their residence in certain caves under the ground, the which Roger the prince of that country understanding, he went to visit this holy man Bruno, and gave to him, and to his society all that desert, whereas they built a Church, in the which Bruno remained alone, where his companions lived, and in this place he died, in the year one thousand one hundr●d and one, paschal the second holding the See of Rome, and Henry the fourth, the Emprie. He was cannonized in the year 1520.  
Next unto the order of the Charthusiens, follows that of Cisteaux, 
The order of Cisteaux.  founded by Robert Abbot of Molesme, a town in the duchy of Bourgondie near to Langres, who seeing that he could not reform the Monks of his Abbey, their great wealth having made them proud and idle, he took with him one and twenty of the honestest men, and parting from Chalon, one of the chief towns of Bourgondie, he made his abode in a solitary place called Cisteaux, where by the permission of Gualther Bishop of that place, of Hugh Archbishop of Lion, and of Odo duke of Bourgondie, he gave beginning to the Monastery of Cisteaux, from whence all this order hath taken their name and beginning: but the Monks of the Abbey of Molesme prevailed so with the Bishop, as he returned to Molesme, and one among them called Stephen, was chosen in his place. Fifteen years after this foundation, Bernard borne at the Castle of Fountanay in Bourgondie, whereof his father was Lord, with thirty of his companions, among which there were three of his brethren become religious men in this Monastery, where he profited so in a spiritual life, as he exceeded all the religious men of his time in learning, and in holiness of, life: his learned and divine writtingfull of sweetness, witness the first, and his charity, humility, patience, labour to relieve the Church being then afflicted in many places, and his austerity will make him for ever commendable. This great learned man was sent by his superior to lay the foundation of that great and famous Abbey of Clairevaux seated near to the river of Aulbe, about Langres, the which before was called the valley of Wormwood, either by reason of the abundance of that herb which grew there, or for the cruelty of certain thieves which made their retreat thither, the which happened in the year 1098, Henry the fourth holding the Empire, and Philip the first being king of France; then continuing to build a great number of Abbeys in France and elsewhere, he did so amplify and enrich this order, as he may justly be called the father and restorer thereof; for they found that in his time he re-established and built one hundred and sixty Abbeys, yea he was held of all the world for a holy, learned, and wise man, and of admirable Council. The Monks of Cisteaux observe the rule of S. Benedict, they wear a white cassock, and are girt with a cord of wool, and the rest of their habit is black. They did not use to eat any flesh, but in the year 1560, they obtained a brief to eat flesh certain days in the week: at Milan, they call them religious of S. Ambrose: at Rome, of the Holy Cross: and at jerusalem, they have the title of the Church.  

The order of the Humbled.  The order of times requires that we speak now of the order of the Humbled, which was erected upon this occasion: The Emperor Frederick of Barbaroussa, having made himself Master of the city of Milan, destroyed it quite in despite of the Milanois; and to the end there should remain no memory of them, he sowed the soil with salt, and sent many noble and worthy personages, not only of Milan, but of all the neighbour cities, with their wives and children, to exile into Germany, among which was Gualuagne, Vicont and Duke of Milan, son to great Andrew: all which after many years, grieving to remain so long in exile, they attired themselves in white, and having prostrated themselves often at the emperors feet, in the end they obtained leave to return into their country, where with the same habit they spent the remainder of their days in great chastity and holiness, getting their living with making of woollen cloth, and giving the gain unto the poor, and feeding themselves with the rest very soberly. But seeing they could not live long in that sort, unless they were under some rule, by the advice of a good priest called john, who was a gentleman, and borne at Como in the duchy of Milan, others say at Mede, a place belonging to Como, and twelve miles distant from it, they put themselves under that of S. Benedict; the rule which he gave them, was afterwards allowed by Pope Innocent the third, and by his successors, so as in many parts of Italy, there are many Monasteries of this order. At Milan they have ten provostships, for so they call them, and three convents of religious Nuns, whereof the most famous is that which they call Cerceau. They were the first which brought the art of cloth working to Florence, whenas they went to devil there. This order began in the year 1180, in the time of Pope Lucius the third, and of the Emperor Frederick: they are attired in white, having a little hood sewed behind, and upon it they have a long robe open of either side for their arms, and upon it a great hood which covers their shoulders like unto a cardinals scarlet cloak: they have round caps, but their Prelates wear them square like unto other Priests, yet they are white. They were wont to live in common, but their revenues being fallen into the hands of their Prelates, they suffer them to live at liberty; but in the year 1568, Cardinal Charles Boromee laboured to reduce them to their first estate, that is to say, to live in common, and as religious men, but it was not without many difficulties, and great scandals, many of them refusing to be reform.  

The order of the Carmolites.  We are now to speak of the order of Carmes or Carmolites, which they say is very ancient, drawing their first institution from Elias the Prophet, Elizeus, and S. john Baptist, but Sabellicus, Baleus, and others writ, That this order of Carmelites had his beginning about the year of our Redemption 1121, not doubt from Mont carmel in Syria, as the name doth show, being famous by reason that Elias, and other Prophets, had lived there, which place was afterwards inhabited by many Hermits, whom Almeric, Bishop of Antioch, drew together, living before dispersed about the mountain, who hearing that the Latin Hermits of Mont carmel were ignorant of the Greek tongue, he caused a Greek Book, written by john Bishop of Jerusalem, of the institution of the first Monks, to be translated out of Greek into Latin. He built the first Monastery for them, and appointed one Berthold of Aquitaine to be their Prior. Some write, That Albert Patriarch of Jerusalem, a very famous man, set down a rule, drawn (as they say) from the life of Elias, and the Book of the foresaid Patriarch john, and from the rule of S. Basile the Great, giving it to keep, by his own authority, to Brocard, who was Prior of Mont Carmel, and to his Hermits, which rule of Albert they have ever since observed, the which was afterwards confirmed by Pope Honorius the third. It appears by this rule, that the Carmes were Hermits, for the said Patriarch Albert appointed such as could not read, to say a great number of Pater Nosters: And for that they affirm, that the Virgin Marie appeared to one of this order, presenting unto him a Scapularie, and saying, 
A Scapularie is a narrow piece of cloth which Monks wear over their habit, hanging down before and behind.  Receive (my beloved) this Scapularie which I give unto thy order in sign of my fellowship: they do now use to wear it. Pope Honorius the fourth suffered them to wear white Capes or Cloaks, and in the year of our Lord God 1287, it was decreed in a general Chapter at Mont Pelier, that all they of the said order should wear them, the which Nicholas the fourth confirmed.  
They were not allowed to eat flesh, by the rule of the Patriarch Albert: but the Pope's Eugenius the fourth, and Pius the second, dispensed with them; and moreover, granted them a moderation of certain strict fastings whereunto they were bound; but Master john Soret, a man of great knowledge, reform this order, and obtained from Pope Nicholas the fourth, that all they that should withstand the said reformation, should be excommunicated, and that the Friars reform, might choose a Prior and Vicar general: hereupon, this order was divided into two parts, under the names of Conuentuall, and of the Observance. Since which time, the happy Eresa of Ahumade, who was of the town of Auila in Spain, reform this order of Carmes, and restored it to his first beauty, beginning first with the Cloisters of women, whereof she founded many, and afterwards with them of men, who are at this day called Carmes discalced, or barefooted, for whom she made certain constitutions, and comprehended them in a bull, which she obtained from Pope Pius the fourth, bearing date the seventeenth of julie, in the year of our Salvation 1565, and were afterwards confirmed by the apostolic authority, in a general Chapter held at Alcala de Henares, in the year of our Redemption 1581. And as this order is wholly given to mental devotion, so there is a special Article by the which she will have all Friars and Nuns, both without and within their cells, or near unto them, meditate day and night in the law of the Lord, and watch in prayer, if they be not otherwise employed in some just occupation. This is all that can be now said touching the order of the Carmes.  
After these, follow the religious of the holy Cross, 
The order of the Holy Crosse.  whose beginning was before them, but they had many Crosses. Some say, That one Syriacus, a Bishop of Jerusalem, was their first founder: but the Bulls of Pope Alexander the third, Alexander the eighth, and Pius the fift, with the Chronicle, Martimades, and Sabellius, hold that Cletus, who they writ was Disciple to S. Peter, and Bishop of Rome, was the first beginner: Having been admonished by a divine Oracle to provide lodgings for poor Christian Pilgrims which came to Rome for devotion, the which he did, giving his own house which was in the place of the Roman Patricians, to make a public Hospital, furnishing it with all necessaries, the which he caused to be marked with a great sign of the Cross, giving the charge thereof to certain worthy person, and devout in the Christian Religion: And to the end they should be the better known, he enjoined them to carry a Cross in their hands, in remembrance of our saviours passion, in whose honour he made that holy work: Finally, their charge and office was to lodge, accompany, and defend the poor Christian Pilgrims which came unto Rome.  
After the death of Cletus, the Christians having been greatly persecuted, in the end they began to take breath under Constantin the Great; and Queen Helen his mother going to Jerusalem, found the Holie-Crosse, by the means of great promises which she made to those that could show her where it was, and threatening such as should dissemble their knowledge. In the end, a jew (as they writ) called judas showed her the place, whither coming, there was suddenly a great earthquake, and there came forth so sweet a savour, as it seemed they had poured forth most odoriferous perfumes: whereupon, this jew was converted to the faith, crying out with a loud voice, OH Christ thou art the true Saviour of the world, and receiving the holy Baptism, he called himself Cyriacus, after which time, preaching the virtues and miracles of the Holie-Crosse, with many Disciples, he was in the end, Bishop of Jerusalem: whereof, many of Cletus Disciples, who had secretly continued in the exercise of Hospitality, being advertised, they came and discovered themselves to Cyriacus, who restored this order, and gave it a new birth, in the year of our Redemption 325, the which continued and increased unto the year of our Salvation 365, under julian the Apostate, who put Cyriacus to death the same year, whereby this order was in a manner extinct, by reason of the great persecution. Afterwards, it was revived again under Vrbain the second, whenas the Christian Princes, joining together, went to conquer Aritulla, Jerusalem, and other cities of Asia. Pope Alexander the third, long after the persecution of jone Barbaroussa, gave many great privileges to this order. After, came the opinion of the Albigeois, which did so trouble the Church, as all they of this order which were able to carry arms, were forced to go in person to fight against them. And Pope Innocent the third, at the Council of Lateran, confirmed it, and granted many privileges, by reason of the great losses this order had sustained. Afterwards, there was another general Council celebrated at Mantova, where it was ordained, That the religious of this order should be clad in Turkey blue, whereas before, they were in course russet. Clement the seventh, of the house of Medicis, reform this company, and, in the year 1568, the Fathers of this order holding their general Chapter in the city of Bolognia, Pope Pius the fift sent them a Visitor, and afterwards approved the order, and increased it, with indulgences and privileges, all according to the rule given by Alexander the third, and the institution of Cletus.  

Dominicans.  As for the order of the preaching Friars, it took beginning from S. Dominicke, a Spaniard, (as all men know) borne in a town called Calogora, in the Diocese of Osma, where he was a regular Channoin; afterwards, he came into Gasconie, where he continued ten years, preaching, and drawing Christian Princes into arms against the Albigeois: from thence he went to Rome, to the Council of Lateran, under Innocent the third, as hath been said, of whom he obtained leave to put himself under what rule he should like best that were allowed by the Church: whereupon, he made choice of that of S. Anthony, with sixteen of his Disciples, and having made certain constitutions, it was confirmed by Honorius the third, in the year of Grace 1206, the first year of his Popedom, and in the sixt year of the Empire of Frederick the second: Then, going to Tolousa, he exhorted his Friars, and sent them to preach two and two together, persuading them to be preachers both in deed and name: for Pope Innocent had already given them leave to take upon them the name of preachers. This order having showed great first-fruits in the world, even to the farthest bounds of the Indies, it is divided into two, that is to say, those of the Observance, and Conuentualls; and in Italy, they of the Observance are of two sorts, the Lumbards' and Tuscans, but the Lumbards' hold the first place, they remain in Rome at S. Sabina, which was in old time the Pope's palace, and was given by Honorius the third, to Dominicke, who was cannonized by Gregory the fourth, in the year 1221.  
In the time of Dominicke flourished that great and admirable S. Francis, 
Franciscans.  borne in the town of Assize, in the country of Vmbria, or the duchy of Spoletum, about eight miles from Peruse, who dealing in the trade of merchandise unto the age of two and twenty years, was by the reason of a great sickness transformed to another man, of proud, he become very humble, of covetous, a giver of alms, of rich, poor, of a lover of the world, a contemner of it, who passing one day before S. Damians Church, and entering into it to pray, they hold that the Image of the Cross before which he made his prayer, spoke miraculously unto him, and said, Francis, go and repair my house, the which as thou seest falls to ruin: then having conformed his life to the passion of our Saviour Christ, he put a shire of hair upon his bore skin, and a sack upon it, girding himself with a cord, going also without hose or shoes, to make himself the more contemptible, so as the same of him being spread over the neighbour country, many drawn by his holiness abandoned the world, & become his disciples, making profession of poverty and beggary: for which cause he wrote a rule, as well for those that were united unto him, as for such as should come after him, the which he presented to Pope Innocent the third, woh confirmed in the year of Grace 1212: it was also approved by Honorius the third, successor to Innocent. And after the confirmation thereof, he ordained that his Friars should be called Minors, to witness their greater humility. That which is remarkable in this order, is, that there was never any religion invented by man that increased faster; for in an instant it filled all the world. As for the Seraphical S. Francis, he died the fourth of October 1226, and was cannonized by Gregory the ninth, 1236. Besides the Friars which he called Minors, he erected also a second order of Nuns, under the government of S. Clara. And he instituted a third order, which were called Penitents, for such as being married desired to do penance. They might have goods proper to themselves, and continued married, and they did actual service only. They were not called religious, yet they had a religious kind of living.  
The order of the Valley of scholars began in campaign a province of France, 
The order of the Valley of Scholars.  by a doctor of Divinity called William borne in England, who having been long a scholar at Paris, and afterwards a professor in the said city, and in Bourgondie, in the end he retired himself into a certain Hermitage with his disciples and scholars, wherefore this order was called the Valley of scholars, and was approved by Pope Honorius the third, in the year 1218. Among the first companions of the said William, were Richard, Euerard, and Manasses: they hold the rule of S. Augustin, and wear a white habit with a black cloak. They have made profession at Mons in Haynault, at Mackli●, and Louvain in Brabant, at Gerontsart, in the country of Namur, at Liege, and at Hofalize, at Paris, and at Orleans, whereas most commonly the general of the order remains,  
Great S. Lewis whose piety can never be sufficiently recommended to posterity, 
The order of the Penitents.  being stirred up by queen Blanch his mother, in the year of our salvation 1261, retired into a great house standing before the palace, on the other side of the river of Seine, which passeth beneath S. Michael's bridge, certain religious men of the Repentance of jesus Christ, commonly called in Latin Saccarij, that is to say, Friars carrying sacks, for that they were clad in sackcloth, giving them the said house to remain there for ever, but they made no long abode, for in the year 1293, and upon the fourteenth day of October, they yielded it up by contract into the hands of Friar Giles at Rome, at that time Prior General of the whole order of the Augustin hermits, pretending that without scruple of conscience they could no longer stay there by reason of their poverty, and for that their order decayed daily. There were also Nuns of this order, who had a convent behind S. Andrew des Arts at Paris, and they were called Sachettes, but they were expelled in the time of the same king, leaving only the name of Sachettes unto the street. The same order was in England in the city of London, in the year of our Redemption 1257, by the report of Matthew Paris, who calls them Saccati.  

Servants of the blessed Virgin Mary.  Presently after the death of S. Francis, began the order of Friars called the Servants of the blessed Virgin Mary, which took its beginning from seven rich merchants of Florence, which were of a brotherhood called the Praises of the blessed Virgin, who being upon the day of the Assumption in prayer, heard a voice which said unto them, that they should be like seven stars, and that within short time they should give beginning to a Religious order, carrying the name of the holy mother of God, this voice (as they writ) counseling them in the mean time to separate themselves from their kinsfolks, to live a more strict life, and to give themselves to prayer, which they put in effect, and took a black robe in remembrance that the blessed Virgin mourned at the death of her son, and they retired themselves unto a high mountain called Senaria, or Mount Asenay, eight miles from Florence, standing in the midst of six other mountains, whereas they led a very austere life, spending all their time in prayer for the necessities of the Church: the names of these seven are, Bo●fils, others say, Monaldy, Amedee, Bonaionta, Manetto of Antelli, Alexis Fauconnier, Sostegno of Sostegni, and Vguecione of the family of the Vguecioni, who being come to Florence upon a Twelfth day to demand alms, the young children began to cry, as divinely inspired, Give alms to the servants of the Virgin Mary; so as from that time this order was called by that name, and Pope Innocent the eight, confirmed it. As for the black robe, and the Scapularie which they took, putting themselves under the rule of S. Augustin, the reason was for that it had been revealed unto them (as they say) by the ●olie Virgin, seven years after they had retired themselves into the mountain; so as having taken this rule, the first head of their order was father Bonfils, than they built a Church, ●nd the monastery of the Anonciado, famous throughout all Italy, where there is to beseene the Portrait of the Virgin Maries face, painted (as they hold) twenty years after their foundation. One called Philip Binitij being entered miraculously into their order, received so many graces of the holy Virgin, as he become admirable both in France and Germany, converting a great number of sinners; so as the same of his holiness, and that of many others of this order, began to spread itself over all the world. Pope Alexander the fourth, approved and confirmed this order, in the year of our salvation 1255, giving them power to create a General, like to the sour begging Friars, being so augmented, as it is dispersed into all parts. In the year of our Redemption 1427, Nicholas Perusien their General divided this order into two, whereupon the one are called Friars servants Counentuals, and the other, Father's servants of the Observance. This company began in the year of our Salvation one thousand two hundred thirty and three, in the time of Gregory the ninth, whenas the Guelphs and Gibelins began to make their spoils in Italy, the which was also much afflicted with earthquakes, inundations, and bitter frosts.  

Celestins.  He that was head of the order of the Celestins, was first called Peter, and surnamed Moron borne in Heruia, a town of the Samnites, now called Sergue in the country of Laben, in the year 1215. His father was called Angelieri, and his mother Marie, a man given wholly to austerity and solitariness from his youth: having spent three years in penance upon a mountain, in the end he was received a Monk into the monastery of jeseli of the order of S. Bennet, where having spent some time, he demanded leave of his Abbot to retire himself into a desert cave under the mountain of Moron, from the which he took his surname, but being sought after by multitudes of people which came from all parts, he went into the mountain of Salmonne called Magella, where in the end, not able to smother the scent of his sanctity, many having followed him, he began to found the order of the Celestins, building a little Church upon this Mountain, which he called of the Holy Ghost. He ware always a chain of iron upon his bore flesh, and upon it a shirt of hair being in continual prayer, and reforming the rule of S. Bennet, which was then much degenerated. The same of his Holiness adorned with many goodly miracles, was so spread over all Europe, as the number of the Celestins increased much, and a Council being then held at Lion in ●rance, under Gregory the tenth, of the noble family of the Vilconti: He obtained of the Pope, a confirmation of his rule, and then returning into Italy, he celebrated the first general Chapter of his order: Finally, after the decease of Nicholas the fourth, the Church of Rome, having been two years without a Pastor, he was chosen Pope, in the year of our Lord God 1294, in the seventy nine year of his age, having done what he could to avoid this burden, in the which he continued but six months, for he voluntarily left it: others say, it was by the practices of Boniface the eighth, his successor, who condemned him afterwards (without any subject) to perpetual prison, in the Castle of S. Simon, where he continued ten months, others say, two years, doing miracles, foretelling things to come, and praying to God for his successor, in which prison he died, saying these words of the Psalmist following: Every soul praise the Lord He was canonised by Clement the fift. This order is divided into thirteen provinces through France, Germany, and Italy, and it contains at this present one hundred twenty and four Monasteries.  
In the year of our Lord God 1319, john the two and twentieth being Pope at Rome, 
Order of Mon● Olivet.  and Henry the seventh, Emperor in Germany, the order of Mont Olivet b●gan by three gentlemen of Syenna, the first was called Bernard Tolomei, the other Ambrose Piccolomimt, and the third Pat●●●●us of Patricij, who, by the persuasion of Bernard, retired themselves unto a mountain called Olivet, being in the county of Montalein, where they remained to do penance, and being accused unto the Pope as Authors of new superstitions, they went unto him, who having heard the reasons which they alleged, he sent them back to Guide Pietramala, Bishop and Lord of Arezzo, under whose Diocese the said mountain of Olive● was, who before their arrival, they writ, had a vision, in the which he saw the Virgin Marie environed with a great multitude of Angels, which did reach unto him a white rob or habiliment, and instructions for the rule of S. Bennet: whereupon, he gave them a white habit in the Church of the Trinity, with the rule of S. Bennet, under the protection of the blessed Virgin Marie. After this, they built a goodly fair Monastery, upon Mont Olivet, called the Cloisters. This order extends not out of Italy, and it hath above sixty Monasteries. In old time they did wear wooden shoes, and of late years they made their novices upon Mont Olivet, to wear them, but now they have dispensed with them, and have gotten more liberty.  
As for the order of the jesuastes of S. jerosme, 
jesua●●●.  they had their beginning from one john Colombin, a gentleman of Syenna, and one of the most eminent men of the town, who, in the year of our Redemption 1355, was converted and turned unto God, by the reading of the life of S. mart, the Egyptian, the manner of which conversion would be too tedious for this Abridgement: but having in the end so disposed his wife, as she suffered him to live in chastity; they writ, That the miracle of a L●per which he brought home unto her, and left in her keeping, was the cause that she herself was content to make a solemn vow of chastity, and to give all their goods to the poor: for in stead of the Leper, she found nothing in the chamber where he had been left, but a most sweet sent, so as they did believe that it was our Lord and Saviour jesus Christ, who in the shape of a Leper had appeared unto them; then associating himself with one called Francis Vincent, one of the chief men of Syenna, they two led a very austere and contemptible life for the space of two whole years together, so as many put themselves into their company, to the number of seventy, most of which were learned, the which Colombin seeing, he went unto the Pope to Viterbe, having seen him before at Tuscanelle, for he and his Disciples were accused to hold the error of the Fratricelli: but having been examined by the Inquisitor, in the presence of the Cardinal of Marseille, and finding that it was but slander, the Pope received them, and would have them attired in white at his own charge, giving them afterwards the habit with his own hand. He would have them live in towns and boroughs, and they had for their first Protector, the Cardinal of avignon the Pope's brother. This happened, in the year of our Lord God 1367, upon S. john Baptist's day. As for the name of jesuastes, Paulus Mauricius affirms, That it was not given them for that they had the name of jesus often in their mouths, but by a prophetical spirit, the little children crying whenas they saw them, Behold the jesuasts; and that john Colombin, in a prophetical spirit, said one day to his companions, We may well work, jesus Christ by his power hath given us his holy name. And for that the rule which is under that of S. Augustin, is not common, it shall not be unfit to set it down here in particular, as Paulus Mauricius hath delivered it. He saith, That they are bound to say but one hundred sixty and five Pater Nosters, and as many ave Maries, going three times to the oratory, having a certain number to say at every time, from the which not any one is exempt. Betwixt the morning and evening, they are five or six hours in prayer: Matins being ended, the Prior doth every day make a Lecture, and then a little Sermon, which being done, they stay a while to pray mentally to God: Moreover, every one doth discipline himself twice a day in his oratory privately, and never fails, but upon the three principal feasts of the year, that is to say, once at the break of day, and another time in the evening. They fail not to go twice in the night to the Church, and to light a taper upon the Altar, than they make their prayers apart for the Holy Church, for their benefactors, and especially for their souls, in whose recommendation they have most alms given them; and every Monday, (unless it be some feast) they all together (whenas Mass is ended) sing certain Psalms, and other Prayers, in the Choir, for the souls of the dead: In like manner, every Saturday at night, having accused themselves of their faults, they make prayers for all sorts of people, as well faithful as Infidels, as the Church of Rome hath been accustomed to do upon good Friday. As often as they enter into their oratory, they say five Pater Nosters, and as many A●e Maries, in honour and commemoration of our saviours passion: They do not say Mass like unto the ancient Monks. As for the office of the Virgin, the which in a manner all do generally say, that of the dead, the seven penitential Psalms; and every other divine office, this order is not bound unto, but only upon devotion. S. john Colombin did also institute the order of religious Nuns, called jesuates, of which the chief was Ka●herine of Syenna, cousin to the said Colombin. There is a Monastery in Luca, which they commonly call the jesuates of S. joseph, and whereas they are called the jesuates of S. jerosme, the reason is, for that in the beginning of their order, they took this great mirror of penitence, and light of religious men, for their particular protector: and their love and devotion was such towards this Saint, as they built in a manner all their Churches and secret oratory's in his name. Pope Alexander the fourth ordained by his Bull, That they should no more be called jesuates simply, but jesuates of S. jerosme.  

Chanoins of S. Saviour.  After the jesuates, the order of times calls us to speak of the regular Chanoins of S. Saviour, of whom, they say, Helias was the beginning. Two miles from Bolognia, there was sometimes a College of Chanoins of the order of S. Augustin, which they called by the name of S. Marry of the Rind, the which having been ruined by john Visconte; Duke, and Archbishop of Milan, whenas he took the town of Bolognia, the Chanoins were forced to retire themselves into the town to the Monastery of S. Saviour, which had been built long before in memory of a great miracle which happened in the image of the Crucifix, in the town of Baruc in Syria, Athanasius being Bishop of Alexandria, in the year of Christ 785, the ninth day of September. During this time there was one called Stephen of Syenn, of the order of the Hermitans of Lecette, a place about three miles from Syenna: of whose holy life, Pope Gregory the twelfth being informed, and knowing the desire which he and his companions had to restore the canonical order, he gave charge to three Cardinals to give a canonical habit to Stephen, and to one Friar james, the which was done in the city of Luca the four and twentieth of April 1408, and Stephen did afterwards give the same habit to many of them of Lecette. They then took the habit of S. Saviour by reason of the place, where they had made profession of the Hermitan order. In this Cloister of S. Saviour, whereof mention hath been made, there remained one Gillier alone, who hearing of the fame of Stephen, and of his chanoins, desiring to see that canonical order restored, sent for Stephen, and having conferred together with him, they sent a Procurator to Pope Martin the fift, of the house of the Co●●nneses, having succeeded Gregory, who having heard their demand, granted a commission to Nicholas Dalbergati, then Bishop of Bolognia, (and afterwards made Cardinal of Saint Croix by Pope Eugenius the fourth) to take some order for that which they demanded, and then he united the convent of S. Ambrose of Gobre, & that of S. Marry of the Rhine, with the Chano●rie of S. Saviour of Bolognia, which was confirmed by the Apostolic authority, as it appeared by a brief given the fift of june 1518, and they had permission to call a general Chapter by a Bull given at Mantova, the nineteenth of December, in the second year of Pope Martin, after the union of certain convents. This order began to take the name of a congregation, and they were called Chanoins of Saint Saviour: they were also called Scopetins by them of Florence, by reason of john of Scopette, who was of this company, but it was the fourth convent, whereas the other was the first; and they were commonly called the Chanoins of S. Saviour.  
After these Chanoins, follows the company of S. Peter of Pisa, 
Order of S. Peter of Pisa.  who was of the family of jambes' Courts, one of the chiefest of that city, who having resolved to imitate the life of that great Doctor Saint jerosme, ● was presently followed by many disciples, with the which he went into the county of Urbin to a goodly hill the which was called Monte Bello, and it is environed on every side with a very pleasant forest, where he built a little Church, which he called the Trinity, with some few lodgings, the which were made after the manner of a Monastery, getting their living with the labour of their hands, and observing the evangelical community, yet they say no Mass, but are continually in prayer. This good father was desirous that they who were of his congregation, should call themselves the hermits of Saint jerosme, as they are at this day, adding only of the congregation of S. Peter of Pisa, which company hath so multiplied, as there are at this present thirty and seven Monasteries only in Italy, there being none without it. They are clad in a long jacket, and girt with a leather girdle, carrying a cloak upon it, upon the which they do cast their scapularie; but when they go into the town they have their cloak uppermost, and all their habit is russet. Pope Pius the fift, would have them make profession, for before they might leave it, and go where they list. This order began in the year of Grace 1380.  
The company of S. jerosme of Fesola, began soon after in the year of our Salvation one thousand four hundred and six, in the time of Pope Innocent the seventh, by one called Charles earl of Gravella, a Florentine, who bring inspired by God, went into the mountains, where in old time stood the ancient town of Fesola, ruined by the florentines, where he take the habit of an Hermit, and with him Rhedon Gra●elle, and Walter Marsie, whereas they continued not long, before that many came unto them, to whom they gave a rule, the which was allowed by Pope Gregory the twelfth, who gave them another habit of a grey colour, girding their frockes with a girdle of leather, and on it they had a long cloak gathered thick & open before, and they ware wooden shoes; but since they have left them: & for that they were held to be the authors of the third order of S. Francis as some think, that grey habit which they ware was given them. They extend not out of Italy, where they have thirty or forty Monasteries: they which do remain at Milan are called the Friars of Saint Anne.  

George Dalegue.  In the year 1407, Gregory the twelfth being Pope, and Robert of Bavaria holding the Empire, began the company called S. George Dalegue surnamed Azzurine, which had for author Anthony Corrara a gentleman of Venice, who was of the company of the regular Clerks, jesuates of Saint jerosme. The Friars of this order ware wooden shoes, and begged for their living: he gave them certain rules confirmed by Pope Gregory, who added more, but especially Laurence justinian, first Patriarch of Venice, who was to this congregation, as Saint Bernard had been to that of Cisteaux. They of this order ware underneath, a habit of white cloth, make like a cassock, the which was buttoned before, and upon it a robe of sky colour, a bonnet upon their heads, and upon their shoulders a hood of the same colour. They live in common, their commanders are called Priors, and they created a General. They were not wont to make profession, but if anyone of them having continued some time in the order, changed his mind, they gave him a certain sum of money, and attired him like a secular Priest, and then suffered him to go at his pleasure, but Pope Pius the fift, in the year of our Redemption one thousand five hundred and seventy, ordained that they should all make solemn profession, as they do, not derogating their privileges, nor the order and precedence of place in public processions: yet there are still four Monasteries of this order which live after their manner: they hold their Chapters, and they created their Priors, as they think good; and although there be of these but four convents, yet they have a General, and their chief is the Monastery of LoVieil.  

Mont Cassin.  The congregation of Mont Cassin, which took his beginning from Lewis le Begue a gentleman of Venice, began in the Monastery of Saint justin, and therefore was called the company of Saint justin, in the year of Grace one thousand four hundred and ten, under Pope john the three and twentieth, Sigismond being Emperor of Germany. Pope Martin the fift, and Eugenius the fourth, seeing this company to increase daily in holiness of life, they gratified it with many privileges, for which cause it was full of learned men. Afterwards the Abbey of Mont Cassin was added unto it; and for that it was the first and most honourable of all those of Saint Bennet, it took the name thereof, and was called the congregation of Mont Cassin, and so all the black Monks which live under the Observance, are the true and first Monks of Saint Bennet, who were many times destroyed and reform. This order of S. Bennet was grown to that greatness, not only in wealth (which was the chief cause of their ruin) but also in number of men and monasteries, as it is found, they had three and thirty thousand Abbeys, and fourteen thousand Provostships and Priories: but whenas they made the last reformation of S. justin, it was so low, as the name of the Monks of S. Bennet was in a manner extinct; yet since it is so augmented, as there are above ten thousand Abbeys in Italy and Spain, which live according to this reformation, many of which, besides that they live according to the rule of S. Bennet, give themselves to study, to public disputations, and to preaching, like unto the begging Friars, which make them to be much respected in those countries.  

S. Anthony in the wood.  It will at the first seem to have been more convenient to have put the Friars which are of Saint Anthony in the wood, with the most ancient orders, than now, but it is by reason they are more dilated, and have made a greater show in their reformation than in their beginning, which happened after this manner: In the suburbs of the port of Como at Milan, whereas now stands the Church of S. Ambrose in the wood, there was in old time in that place a goodly wood, and very thick, in the midst whereof was a little Chapel, wherein was painted the image of the Virgin Marie, and near unto it did run a brook of clear water, which came from a fair fountain, the which is at this day held in such reverence, as many drink of this water for devotion. In this wood there remained three Gentlemen Milanois, who lived as Hermits; the first was called Alexander, of the noble family of the Crevelli; the second was named Albert Bozosse; and the third was termed Anthony Pierre Sancte, from whence it comes that the Pierri Sancti have at this day a certain jurisdiction in a Monastery of this order, called Casterne. At such time as these men lived in their solitude, that admirable S. Ambrose shined in the city of Milan, who being advertised of their kind of life, went often to visit and comfort them, and many times continued for the space of one or two days with them, praying unto God, or discoursing of divine and heavenly things. After his death, they continued many years in this place, and in succession of time, they added another habit to their Hermit's weed, and took the rule and profession of S. Augustin: The Milanois did afterwards build them a Monastery in the same place, in the honour of S. Ambrose, and they called it S. Ambrose in the Wood, for that this Saint frequented that place in his life time: They are since augmented in divers places, namely in the duchy of Milan. They have a General, Visitors, and Priors, and every three years they celebrat their general Chapter in that place where they had their beginning. They have many places whereas they say service, according to the rule of S. Ambrose.  
The like may be said of the company of the Hermitaine Monks of S. jerosme, 
Hermitaine Monks of S. jerosme.  of whom something hath been formerly spoken, but since it was reform by Loup Solmete, a learned Spaniard, who coming to Rome, obtained leave from the Pope to reform this order, begging of him the Church of S. Alexis at Rome, standing upon Mont Auentin with the circuit, and all the rents and revenues thereof, giving them a form and rule to live by, the which he had drawn out of the works of S. jerosme. Some say, That they began in the time of Eusebius of Cremona, a Disciple of S. jerosmes, and that the Monks of Gardeloupe in Spain followed their order: It may be they had been reform by the said Loupe, that afterwards seeing their order ready to be dissolved, they had reform it again, and that Loup had divided these from the others, and had made a new company. They are attired in a white habit, with a tawny Scapularie. Whenas they go into town, they wear a cloak which is close before like unto Monks, the which is also tawny. Loup of Olivete died in the year of Grace 1433, in the third year of Pope Eugenius the fourth. This company hath in Italy about twenty Monasteries, whereof the chief and principal is the hospital of Lodeiane in Lombardie. They had six monasteries in Spain, the chief of which was S. Isidore, a league from Sevill. They make profession, and seem to observe the rule of S. Augustin.  
In the year of our Lord God 1400, 
Order of the Observance.  which was the jubilee at Rome, there reigned a great plague at Syenna, and other neighbour places, whereof there died great numbers of people, so as at Syenna, (either for that there were few men remaining, or for fear of death,) there was not any one that would tend the poor diseased of the Hospital. At that time S. Bernard lived in Syenna, whose father was called by the name of Patricius, and his mother by the name of Nona, of a noble extraction, borne at Massa, of Maremma, a near town, and (as some writ) subject to Syenna. This holy man (moved with a holy and zealous charity) went unto the hospital, where he tended such as were sick of the plague, and never left them until the plague ceased, being then but twenty years old; from whence he retired himself solitarily into a wood, where having lived some time very austerely, in the end he become professed of the order of the friars Minors, where he carried nothing but only a simple habit, and a cord for to gird them, and for that sanctity of life began to grow as it were cold in this order, he laboured much to have the order of the good Observance maintained and kept, the which he reform, taking away all the abuses which were crept in, and causing the Friars to live in common, and to have nothing proper to themselves, following simply the institution of their father S. Francis; wherein he was much assisted by many which followed his new reformation; but there were others which would not leave that which they had gotten with labour and pain. Hence it grows (at the lest wise it savours somewhat of likelihood) that the religious of the order of S. Francis, are divided into two, that is to say, Conuentualls, and that of the Observance, who were called Sabottiers, which have so increased since, as they exceed many other orders in number. This happened under Pope Eugenius the fourth, and in the time of the Emperor Frederic the third.  
About the year of our Lord God 1450, the religious order of Minims began to flourish, by the means of Francis, surnamed of Paul, in regard of the castle of Paul, where some say he was borne, the which is situated in the realm of Naples, betwixt Abrusse, and Lucania, now called by the name of the Principality, joining to Calabria, and about thirty miles from the famous city of Cossence. His father was called by the name of Martetille, and his mother by the name of Vienna: He was given, (as a man may say, even from his cradle) to austerity, loving a religious life above all terrestial things: being come to the age of a perfect man, he had a resolution to build a Church, with certain little lodgings to devil in, the which (by the permission of one Pyrrhus, who was then Archbishop of Cossence, and the help of his neighbours) he effected as he had propounded, and having built this Monastery, he continued not long there, but notwithstanding he had a great number of Disciples, both of men and women. Wherefore, he wrote three rules, the one was ordained for the brethren of his fellowship, the other was instituted for the sisters of his order (either of which he distributed into ten Chapters,) and the third was made for the professors thereof: ordaining, That they should be called Minims, or Minors, and that among other things, they should especially observe the Lenten fast, that is to say, they should neither eat Flesh, Eggs, Butter, Cheese, nor Milk, during their lives, but in cases of great necessity, as for the preseruance of life in sickness, and such like: He would have them attired in a kind of dark tawny, with a hood of the self same colour, which hangs down to the girdle, that they should be girt with a cord of the same colour: They that are dignified with the title of Priests, have it tied with five knots; but the Clerks, which are as it were novices, to distinguish them from the Priests, have it tied but with three knots. Lewis the eleventh, the French king, who reigned at that present time, sent an Ambassador to entreat Pope Sixtus the fourth to sand him this holy man, the which he willingly did, and he came unto the king at Tours, who (for the love which he bore unto him) caused the Church and Monastery at Pleffis, which is near to the said town, to be built for him. This order being in France and Spain, there are not any in Lombardie, but at Milan.  

The order of Ami-Dieu.  In the time of Francis de Paulo, lived that holy man Ami-Dieu, borne in Portugal, who came in a Hermit's habiliment or weed into Lombardie, where he stayed in a place called S. Marry in Bresanois, towards Cremona, of the dependences of the duchy of Milan, where he gave beginning unto his order. Soon after, he went to Rome, and lived upon the hill which is at this day called S. Peter, in Montorio, and whereas now stands a goodly Monastery of this order. He was much given to contemplation, and had many profetique visions, presaging and foretelling things to come. Of him this order hath taken the name of Amis-Dieu, or Amidees: They are clothed in a russet habit, and wear wooden shoes, and have no breeches, being girt with a cord, like unto the Sabottiers: They have eight and twenty convents at this day in Italy, for it extends no farther. Their order began in the year of our Redemption 1460; but Pope Pius the fift united it with that of Cleruaux, and the Sabottiers, that is to say, of the Observance of S. Francis.  
As for the order of the Apostolins, 
Apostolins.  otherwise called Friars of the Apostles, they writ that it had his beginning or first original from Saint Barnaby the Apostle, who being come unto Milan, was the first that ministered there. In that place he gathered together a good number of disciples, which lived in a manner according to the ancient custom of the Primitive Church, whom whilst he lived they called Christian Disciples, and after his death they were called Apostolins, and now Friars, of the Apostles or Barnabites. They were for a long time dispersed here and there, and did not celebrated the Mass, but attended prayer only, and to live in common, as they did in the Primitive Church: but in the year of our Redemption one thousand four hundred eighty and four, Innocent the eight, at their request, suffered them to say Mass, and gave unto them a certain habit, ordaining that they should make profession, and giving unto them the rule of Saint Augustin to observe. He gave them leave to enjoy the same privileges that the Augustins did enjoy. They are attired in a frock of tawny cloth, with a scapularie of the same colour, and after this manner they commonly go abroad, and without any cloak, but in Winter they wear one which is of the same colour, like unto the Sabottiers of Saint Francis. They hold a Chapter, and their head is called Vicar General. The first of this order which said Mass, were Friar Simon of Morane, Friar john Scarpe, and Friar Nicholas Cesterie Genevors.  
The beginning of this order of the Capucins, came upon this occasion. 
Capucins.  In the Marquisat of Ancona, under the signory of Fermo, there is a castle which is called Mount Falcon, in the which the jacobins have a goodly Monastery, where there was a Monk, who was called Matthew Basci, a man of an honest and good life, and a great observer of the holy institutions. It happened on a day, that he went with some of his companions to a place hard by to assist at some office, which being done, they all returned to the Monastery, he remaining a little behind: upon the way, his companions found a poor man lying upon the ground almost naked, and shaking for cold, for that it was Winter, and there had great store of snow fallen, who having demanded some cloth in charity to cover him, he had no answer from the rest; but Friar Matthew coming after, and seeing this poor and impotent man, moved with compassion, and fearing lest he should die with the extremity of the cold which he endured, he took two good pieces of cloth which he had under his habit, according to the custom of their order, and gave them to this poor man, and then going on his way towards the Monastery, he was amazed that this poor man was suddenly vanished away. This made that good father to think that he had made profession of poverty, and yet there were some that were poorer; so as he did not truly imitate his father Saint Francis, and much less observed that which he had promised entering into the order, whereupon he prayed continually unto God that he might peforme the vow which he had made. After much lamentation, he had an inspiration which said unto him, that he should give a new beginning to the ancient observance of his fathers which first followed the institution of Saint Frances; so as he took a frock that was all torn and rend, and tied a hood upon it, as they wear at this day, then without speaking to any man, he went to Rome to Pope Clement the seventh, demanding leave of him to carry the habit which Saint Francis and his Friars did wear in the beginning, the which he easily obtained, the Pope telling him thrice that he would have that order obeserued in every point. A while after, one which was called Friar Lewis, with a companion of his, both jacobins of Fossebona, the which is a town of the Marquisat, and of the Duchy of Urbin, moved with zeal of the observation of their rule, left their convent, and joined themselves with the said Matthew: but to the end it might be more permanent, and without scruple, Lewis went to the Pope, and obtained a brief, not only to carry the habit, and observe the rule, but also to give it to any that should demand it, the which happened in year of our Salvation 1526, the eight and twentieth day of May, and in the third year of Pope Clement; so as in a short time there were twelve Friars, their first General was Matthew, and the first Monastery they had, was in the town of Cameria, in the Marquisat which was given unto them by Katherine Cibo who was duchess of Cameria. This order increased so, as within the space of two and forty years or near thereabout, it had about the number of two hundred twenty and two Monasteries, divided into fifteen provinces, and there were religious men amounting unto the number of two thousand two hundred and forty. Besides these, there are the reformed of the order of S. Francis, as the Clairains, Clarueaux, and Recolets, of whom something may be spoken hereafter.  

Orders of the Observance.  Although we have formerly discoursed of the beginning of those orders which live under the rule of Saint Augustin, yet it shall not be unfitting to speak something of those company which live according to this rule, under the name and title of the Observance. The first is the company of Lecette: This place is about three miles distant from Syenna, 
Lecette.  and was in old time called Lissiette Foltignan, founded of Saint Saviour, and since, Saint Saviour of Lecette in the wood of the Lake. This lake was inhabited by the hermits of Saint Augustin, since the year of our Redemption 1050. This place was always maintained in holiness, secret poverty, and fit for contemplation. Bartholomew a Venetian, did set down goodly rules in the year of our Salvation one thousand three hundred eighty and seven, the like did Nicholas Cassin, and Gerard of Rimini, both Prior's General of this order, the which did afterwards so multiply and increase, as there are to be seen at this day eleven convents in the countries of Syenna and Florence, either of which hath at the lest a hundred religious men.  

Charbonnier.  The second congregation of the Observance of the Hermitans is that of Charbonniere in the Land of Labour, which they call at this day Campania, the which is also called the Congregation of Saint john of Naples, it was begun by one whose name was Friar Simon of Cremona, who was a great Philosopher, and Divine in his time, who lived in the year of our Redemption one thousand three hundred ninety and nine.  

Perusina.  The company called Perusina, or Saint Mary, of the people in the province of Vmbria, began in the year of our Redemption 1414, and hath about fourteen Monasteries.  
The company of Lombardie, so called by themselves: it was begun in the year of our Salvation one thousand four hundred forty and four, 
Order of Lombardie.  by a father called john Roque of Pavia, and another who 〈◊〉 called Friar Gregory of Cremona, within the Castle of Crana. This company is the greatest, and of most note of all those of the Observance of the Hermitans, as well by reason of their great numbers, as for that they of this order are altogether men of great learning, and such as make profession of preaching. There are in this order sixty and eight Monasteries, which are well appointed.  

S. Marry of Mont Orton.  The order of Saint Mary of Mont Orton, distant about five miles from Pudone, instituted by a learned man called Friar Simon borne at Camerin a town in the Marquisat of Avernus. It hath but three convents, and was begun in the year of Christ 1460.  

Baptistes.  The order of the Baptistes, so called in regard of Friar Baptista, who was the Author, began in the year of our Salvation one thousand four hundred eighty and four. They wear wooden shoes, and they are also called Genevois, for that their founder was of Genova.  

hermits called Povilliouse  The company of hermits called Povilloise or Doucette, which had his beginning in Povillia, by one Felix, who was of that country, in the year of our Redemption one thousand four hundred ninety and two.  
The Zumpane the which was instituted in Calabria, in the year 1502, 
Zumpane.  by one Francis Zumpane a Portuguese, who in those times was much honoured for his good parts. The same year began the order called of S. Augustin of Dalmatia, 
Dalm●●●a.  for that it began in Sclavonia.  
Fourteen years after, 
Of Andrew Pro●●●  there was instituted in Germany a new company or fellowship of Hermits, which they call the Congregation of Andrew Proles of Germany.  
The last company of this order was that of S. Paul, the first Hermit, wearing the same habit that the rest, and it began in the year of our Redemption 1550. There are Monasteries of this order in Italy and Spain, whereof there are four about Rome. Of these orders of Hermits of the Observance, there are few known in Italy, except that of Lombardie, which is more famous than all the rest: but that of the Conuentualls is not only dispersed into France, Italy, Spain, Flanders, and Germany, but also at the new world.  
The company of S. Paul, the first Hermit, of Hungary, 
S. Paul the first Hermit.  was begun in the Monastery of S. james of Potach in Hungary, by a Strigonian called Eusebius, who with his companions observed a certain rule and kind of life, which had been given them by Bartholomew Bishop of Quinque Ecclesia, in the year of our Lord God 1215. A while after, their number increasing, they entreated Pope Vrbain the fourth to give them the rule of S. Augustin, but they could not obtain it: Whereupon, Paul Bishop of Vesprin gave them that form of life which they now hold, in the year of our Salvation 1263, and then this order began to be called the Congregation of S. Paul the first Hermit: Since, in the year of our Redemption 1300, they made one Friar Laurence, a Strigonian, their first Prior general: About eight years after, the order was confirmed by a Cardinal which Pope Clement the fift had sent Legate into Hungary, who was called Friar Gentil, of Mont fleur, and had been before a Friar Minor: He gave to them of the same company the rule of S. Augustin, and granted them leave to make constitutions, and to hold a general Chapter, the which happened upon the sixt of November, in the year of our Redemption 1308, in the Monastery of S. Laurence, near to the town of Bade. Afterwards, john the two and twentieth being made Pope, he confirmed their order, and received them under the protection of the See of Rome, and then it began to increase much, not only in number, but also in sanctity of life, so as in Hungary they were held the best religious men of all that were in the realm. In the time of Pope Nicholas the fift, the Church of S. Stephen de la Rotonde at Rome, upon Mont Celio, was given them by the holy See, with all the revenues thereof, and they were about one hundred and twenty years before they had any other Convent in Italy, into the which they admit not any one but Hungarians. They are attired in white, & have a great round Scapularie that covers all their shoulders, and upon it a cloak which is also white, and somewhat shorter than that which they usually carry.  
The order of S. Brigide began under Pope Gregory the eleventh, 
Order of S● Brigide.  in the year of our Lord God 1376, who confirmed it to this holy Lady, Queen of Sueden; who going to Rome, she obtained of him, that the Monasteries of the said order should be common, as well for men as women, yet there should be such a separation by walls, as the one should have no means to come unto the other, but upon great necessity. He would also have but one Church for both sexes, and that the Monks as Ministers of sacred things should be below, and the Nuns above, to say their service and prayers: but the Abbess should have power to command both, yet the men should have charge of that which did belong to the divine service, and to the ornaments of the Church, and that there should be one amongst them that should be called Prior or Confessor. It was also ordained, That they should have lands and possessions whereon to live, but the superintendancie to provide for all that should be needful for the one and the other, as well for victuals as apparel, should belong unto the Abbess: That it should not be lawful for either men or women to go out of their Monastery, without great necessity, and then they should demand leave of the Abbesie. They hold the rule of S. Augustin, with certain Articles added by this famous Queen. Some are of opinion, that this form of religion was first invented in Greece, but that the fathers had ordained, that the men should remain separated from the women, lest they should give occasion of scandal: wherefore, S. Brigide desiring to revive this order, she found means how, without any suspicion, the Church and house should be common to both. She ordained, That they should wear a russet habit, with a cloak of the same colour, with a red Cross upon their breasts; she would have but sixty Nuns, and five and twenty Monks in every Monastery, that is to say, thirteen Priests, according to the number of the thirteen Apostles, comprehending S. Paul: Then four Deacons, who might also be Priests, and represented the four Doctors of the Church, and eight Converts, who must always be ready to labour for the affairs of the house: so as the Friars and the Nuns all together made the number of the thirteen Apostles, and the seventy two Disciples of our Saviour: and to the end they might be distinguished one from another, the Priests carried a red Cross upon the left side of their cloak, under which Cross they put a little piece of white cloth, as broad as a wafer, which they offer up in reverence of the holy Sacrament. And the four Deacons, for a difference from the Priests, carry a round wreath of white cloth, which signifies (as they say) the sapience of the four Doctors whom they represent, and upon it they put four little pieces of read, made like unto tongues, to show that the Holy Ghost inflames their tongues to deliver the sacred mysteries of Divinity. But the Converts wear a white Cross upon their cloaks, which shows the innocency of their lives, upon the which there are five pieces of read, in commemoration of the five wounds of our Saviour. This holy Lady died at Rome, and her daughter Katherine, Princess of Nerice, caused the rule, after her death, to be confirmed by Pope Vrbain the fift. She began her Revelations, in the year of our Lord God 1344, and in the year of our Redemption 1346. She came to Rome at the age of two and forty, where she continued eight and twenty years; she was canonised in the year of Grace 1391.  

Premontre.  The beginning of the order of Premontre came from one Norbert, borne at Cologne, and afterwards Archbishop of Magdebourg, to whom they writ that the Virgin Marie appeared on a time, saying, Norbert, take a white habit: Whereupon he left the world, and with certain companions which he had, retired into a very solitary and desert place, called Premontre, to do penance, in the year of our Lord God 1120, the which he did by the permission of the Archbishop of Lion, for that this Desert was in his Diocese: Thus from this place, called Premontre, the company took the name which it bears unto this day: afterwards, he caused it to be confirmed by Calixtus the second, in the year of our Redemption 1121, and then by Honorius the second, his successor, who gave them the rule of S. Augustin, and made them regular Chanoins; which ordinance was again approved by Pope Innocent the third. This company is so multiplipied in France, Spain, and elsewhere, as it is divided into thirty provinces, in the which they have above one thousand and three hundred Monasteries, and about four hundred convents of women. Their Abbots are perpetual, and must be consecrated by Bishops. They have power to confer the lesser orders to their Monks, and to bless all the ornaments of the Church, and to do all other ceremonies, but whereas consecration is required in the blessing: yet they may celebrat solemn and public Mass, with the Mitre, Crosier, Staff, cap, and other ornaments which belong to the Episcopal dignity and honour. Their service, or Book of Common Prayer, differs from that of the Church of Rome, and they have also a Breviare conformable to their Mass Book, and they observe a kind of note in all their orders which is particular to themselves. As for their habit, they wear a white frock, and a rochet of fine linen cloth, and upon it a white cloak, the which was open before, like unto the Carmes. This order was instituted under Henry the fourth, who was Emperor of Germany. William Tyr saith, that in his time one which was called Almeric a regular Chanoin of Premontre, was made Bishop of Sienna, in the year of our Redemption one thousand one hundred and eighty. As for their founder, having done many miracles as well in his life time, as after his death he was canonised.  
The first founder of the order of Font-Auellana was Saint Lodolfe, 
Font-Auellana.  who being persecuted by a temporal Lord, retired himself betwixt two high mountains the which were in the Appenin hills, and they are called Mont Latria, and Mont Coruo, both celebrated by the Poet Dante, the which are about five miles distant from the town of Cailles, and twenty from Urbin or near thereabouts; and yet they are under the Diocese of Aggobia. This good and virtuous man, being retired into this place, where he lived solitarily after the manner of an Hermit, in a short time he purchased to himself such reputation of sanctity, as a great many went and submitted themselves unto him, to follow his kind of life; whereupon he caused a Monastery to be erected and built, carrying the title of the holy Cross; so as at this day it is called by them that inhabit or devil thereabouts the Mountain of the holy Cross: but after his death, this order began to be altogether corrupted. Peter Damian who was a Monk of the Abbey of Classi at Ravenna of the order of Camaldoli, the which was a great parsonage, not only for that he had been Bishop and Cardinal, but also, for his great sanctity and holiness, for the which he deserved to be canonised, restored this order to her ancient rule and observance, causing them to observe the rule of Saint Bennet, and having caused a Cloister to be built, he put into it such hermits as he thought fit for that place. Their habit was a white frock, with a scapularie of wool, and a white hood, they made profession in the hands of a Notary: since they grew disordered again; so as the Abbey was held in Comendam: and since all Monastic order and discipline being overthrown, Pope Pius the fift, gave this Abbey in Comendam for sempeternitie to the Cardinal of Rovere, who was brother to the duke of Urbin, who in the year of our Salvation one thousand five hundred and seventy, took Monks of the order of Camaldoli; so as in a manner all the religious men that were within it took on them that habit and profession, but the younger sort cast away their frockes, and they which were of the elder sort remained, to the number of thirty or thereabouts, who lived afterwards with so religious an observance, as this Monastery hath been commended in the remotest provinces. Their first Abbot was called Balueoli of Bagnacavalli, and their Prior Ambrose Cagnoli, a gentleman of Lodese. The Poet Dante remained sometime in this place, where he composed part of his verses. This order was begun about the year of Grace 1050.  
The company which they call the hermits of the Lady of Gonzaga grew upon this occasion: Francis of Gonzaga, the fourth Marquis of Mantova, 
hermits of our Lady of Gonzaga.  who had made himself famous among the most valiant, and worthiest captains of his time, going one day to disport himself in a house of his the which was about twelve miles distant from Mantova, passing by a part of the wall whereon was painted the image of the Virgin Marie, suddenly his horse rose upright and fell backwards, the Marquis being under him, who was so bruised, as all his gentlemen held him for dead: than one of the company who was called jerosme Regini of Castle Geoffrey, which is in the country of Mantova, a devout man and fearing God, being wonderfully grieved for the loss of so great prince, having a constant faith, fell down (as they say) upon his knees before this image, and made a vow to God, and to Saint Mary that if it pleased him of his mercy to restore the Marquis to life, he would abandon the world, and become a Hermit in that place, the which prayer was presently heard, for the Marquis rose up safe and found: this being afterwards known to the Marquis, he caused a very fair and goodly Monastery to be built for jerosme, appointing it a good rent, whither he retired himself, and was the cause that many came and joined with him: some time after, by the favour of the Bishop of Rhegium, they chose a rule and form of living, the which, they say, they keep at this present day, being established and confirmed by Pope Alexander the sixt. They make no profession, neither are they bound to any article upon pain of deadly sin. They have certain privileges which were given them by the holy See: they choose a General, and have at this present day about three score and ten Monasteries, whereof the chief is that of Gonzaga, in which there are about twelve hermits. It began under Pope Innocent the eight, and during the Empire of Maximilian the first.  

〈…〉  Richard Ear of Cornwall, brother to Henry the third, king of England, having remained some time in Germany, at his return he brought with him a small portion of the blood of jesus Christ, and built a Monastery near unto a village the which was about five and twenty miles distant from London, where he put this precious blood, bringing in this order, which they call Bons Hommes, or good men, who observe and follow the rule of Saint A●gusti●, and wear a habit of a smoky colour, the which is almost like unto that of the hermits. Their Prior or Abbot is called by the name of Rector, and the chief and most famous Monastery of their order is called Asseris. It began in the year of our Redemption one thousand two hundred fifty and seven.  

Of the Common life.  The company of the Common life began in the time of Pope Gregory the eleventh, by one called Gerrard, who was a man of great holiness, in the diocese of T●rentum, in the year of our Salvation one thousand three hundred seventy and three. He was a German borne, and composed many excellent works, the which were worthy to be read for their doctrine. 
Barefooted.  In Spain there was another congregation called the Barefooted, which attire themselves in course cloth, like unto the Capucins; but they wear a round capuche or hood: they do great penance, and observe the rule of Saint Francis very severely and strictly. They have many monasteries, all which are in places retired from the world. At Venice there is also a very fair and goodly monastery which they call of the Holy Ghost, 
Of the holy Ghost.  the which is alone of that order, only it hath a member in Padove which depends thereon, and it is called Saint Michael: they attire themselves like unto the regular Chanoins of Latran: they live in common, and observe the rule of Saint Augustin. They are all Venetians, and enjoy great revenues.  

Order of the Redemption of Captives.  In the year of our Lord God one thousand two hundred sixty and four, in the time of Clement the fourth, began the order of the Redemption of captives, whose charge is to redeem prisoners that are under the Turks hands, and to restore them to their full liberty: they attire themselves in white, a wear a cloak, the which is open before, after the manner of the Carmes, but it is white: they have upon the right side of their breast a scutcheon, the which is as broad as an apple, where from the midst upward there is a white Cross in a read field, and on the neither part the arms of the realm of Arragon. There are no Monks of this order in Italy but eight which are in the Church of Saint Quir●e near unto the tower of Conte at Rome, who obtained it from the Pope with some revenue, in the year 1564. They observe the rule of Saint Augustin.  

Order of the Trinity.  The order of the holy Trinity was instituted to deliver poor prisoners out of the Turks hands. Paul M●ris● holds that their first monastery was Saint Thomas des Monts in Mont Celia, and the reason of the foundation is, for that entering into the little Church (the greater being all uncovered, and half ruined) there is to be seen on the right hand an arch or ancient sepulchre of marble, on the which these Latin words are graven: Anno Domini & Incarnationis 1197, Pontificatus verò Domini Innocentij Papae terty, Anno primo 15 Calendis januarij, institutus est nutu Dei ordo Sanctissimae Trinitatis, & captivorum, à fratre johann, sub propriaregula sibi ab Apostolica sede concessa; sepultus est idem frater johannes in hoc loco: Anno Domini 1213, Mense Decembris vicesimo primo. It was begun whenas Pope Innocent the third declared Otho the fift, Emperor of the West, and cro●ned him, and at the same time that Constantinople was taken by the French and Venetians.  
In the year of our Lord God 1198, 
Hospital of the Holy Ghost.  Pope Innocent the third caused to be built in Rome, that goodly and famous Hospital of the Holy Ghost, in Saxony (which place is so called, for that in old time the Saxons, a people of Germany, inhabited there) and endowed it with many goodly possessions to relieve poor, sick, and needy persons, and to the end that they might have divine service, he ordained a rule for all the Friars and Nuns that would be of this order and fellowship, the which was since confirmed by the apostolic See of Rome; yet, in the year of our Redemption one thousand five hundred sixty four, the reverend Father Bernard, in Cirilli of Aquila, Preceptor, and Master general of the said order, reform and amended it in such sort, as the sick are better tended, the alms augmented, a great number of Virgins married, divine Service well administered, the revenues much increased, and the place very well entertained with reparations. This rule commands, that all the brethren and sisters of the fellowship, live in obedience and chastity, having nothing of their own, and that above all other things, they be careful of the sick: And whenas they make their promise and vow, they do it after this manner, (but in Latin words) I such a one, give and present myself to God, to the blessed Virgin Marie, to the Holy Ghost, and to my Lords the poor and sick, to be their servant all the days of my life: I promise' (by the grace of God) to keep chastity, and have nothing in my own possession, and to yield all obedience to you ●y Master and General, and to all your successors, and to have a faithful care of the good of the poor, as God me help, and the holy Evangelists; and so he presents himself at the Altar, with the Book of the Evangelists: then the Preceptor, or he that is the most ancient, makes him this answer: For the promise which thou hast made unto God, and to the Virgin Marie, and to all our Lords the poor sick, and diseased, we receive thee, and the souls of thy father and mother, to be partakers of the Masses, Matins, Fast, Prayers, Alms, and all other good things which are or shall be done in the house of the Holy Ghost, God grant thee such a part, as every one of us intends to have: Finally, the house of the Holy Ghost promiseth thee bread and water, and to give thee an humble rob. Having said this, the Ancient takes a cloak whereon there is a Cosse, the which he showeth him, then putting it upon his shoulders, he saith unto him: By virtue of this sign of the Cross, let thy bad spirit be chased from thee, and jesus Christ lead thee to the everlasting kingdom. This Congregation hath many Hospitals in divers parts of Christendom, whereof that at Rome is the chief: Their general Chapters are held there, and there an account is given of the government of all the rest. If a brother of this order were he Rector of a place, or General, be found at his death to have had any thing proper to himself, he is not interred in any holy or sanctified ground, but is held for an excommunicated person. They wear a black sacerdotal habit, and must carry a white Cross upon their gowns like unto that of Archbishops, who have it in the midst of their breasts, and upon the left side of their cloaks. The children are attired in a blue habit.  
The Author of the Congregation of Priests which gather together Orphans, 
The order of Priests.  was a Venetian gentleman called jerosme Miani, who having an intent to do some work pleasing unto God, and persisting in this holy resolution, there fell out a great death in a manner general over all Italy, in the year of our Lord God 1528, but particularly at Venice, where it was so great, as the poor died in the streets of h●nger: which this good man seeing, moved with charity and compassion of this public calamity, he went up and down, taking them up in the streets and public places, leading some, and carrying others unto a certain place which he had prepared to that end, where, with his own substance, he fed them, and provided for their necessities, and not content with that which he had done in his own city, having ordered all things for the good of his hospital, he went towards Lombardie to gather up others, and came into a town called Semasco, the which is upon the confines betwixt the countries of Bergamo and Milan, whereas he found that of three parts, two were dead of the plague, which was dispersed over all that province; and seeing that the corn was ready to reap, he took with him a certain number of poor, (yet not omitting daily at certain hours devoutly to say the office of the Virgin Marie) with such as were with him, living only of bread and water, and not caring for any other meat: The which being divulged into all the neighbour and bordering places, many of those people came flocking unto him, and there was a lodging given in that town whereas he and his did live in all holiness of life, the which did move many by his example to abandon their goods to follow him, and to live with him in poverty. Being thus settled in this place, and desiring to show some first-fruits in other places, he went into the town of Bergamo, whereas he caused three hospitals to be built, one for poor sword another for the Converts, and the third for women children which were 〈◊〉. This being done, he took his way towards Milan, where being safely arrived, he began to seek out, and to draw together the poor orphans, having assembled to the number offiftie, in the Church of the Crucifix, where he had taken his lodging. He had not been long in this place, but the brui● of his sanctity came unto the ears of Francis Sforce the second, Duke of Milan, who assisted him much to continued this holy and religious enterprise, giving him the place whereas they now lodge, and binding himself to pay the rent thereof to the great hospital of Milan, for that it did belong solely unto it, so as even at this day, the rent of that hospital is paid out of the Duke's treasury. After that this good gentleman had laboured long in this holy and godly work, going to divers towns to build places fit to receive poor orphans: he retired himself to Semasco, where he was very well known, and there he ended the remainder of his days. After his death, this company still increased, so as it was dispersed into many towns of Italy, and especially in Lombardie. The priests of this company or fellowship once a year hold their Chapter, and may confirm their General, with two Councillors, for three years, and it is in the power of this General (if he be so minded) to call a Chapter where he pleaseth, and there all they of the Congregation, as well they which be Converts, as those which be Priests, are called by name and surname, and they are changed from one place unto another, according as need shall require, and they take great care that the poor orphans may be well governed, both in regard of their souls, as of their bodies: And therefore the General is bound once a year at the lest to visit all the places, which are appointed for their abode and entertainment. They observe diligently and carefully all the points of their institution, and yet they make no solemn profession, but he that will live with them, must promise' to be obedient to his superiors: finally, they live in common. This company was confirmed by Pope Paul Farnese the third, and afterwards by Pius the fourth, who suffered them to continued as they had begun, and accepted, under the protection of the Church, not only all the places and convents which they had then, but all others they should have hereafter. Since, they began to make profession, the which was confirmed by Pope Pius the fift: It began in the year of Grace 1528, Clement the seventh holding the Holy See, and Charles the fift being Emperor.  
Whenas all Christian princes were in war one against another, and that Italy was wonderfully afflicted, which was in the year of our Redemption one thousand five hundred twenty and eight, Francis Ssorce the last duke of that house, was besieged in Milan, and retiring himself into the Castle, he was forced for want of victuals to yield himself to Anthony de Leave, and to the Marquis of Pescara, leaving the city and castle to the Emperor Charles the fift. Moreover Milan was so afflicted with the plague, as at the lest two parts of the people were dead: at that time three gentlemen, the first was called james Anthony of the house of Moris' (the which is very ancient, as may appear by the two Martyrs Nabor and Foelix of the said house, who received the crown of Martyrdom under the Empire of Maximian and Disclesian, the which was about three ●eore and ten years before Saint Ambrose:) the second was of Cremona who was called Francis Maria Z●charie: and the third was a Milanois, and his ●ame was Bartholomew Ferrera: 
Regular Priest's of S. Paul.  these three instituted the company of Regular Priests of Saint Paul in Milan, dedicating themselves to a devout and contemplative life, and abstaining from all pleasures and vanities of the world, exhorting sinners continually to repentance and amendment of life, and reading the Epistles of Saint Paul publicly, hearing all men in confession, and administering the Sacraments of the holy Communion. Finally they lived in common, and held nothing in proper: they had a custom to discipline and whip themselves in streets and public places, the more to contemn the world. After their death they were held and reverenced as Saints. There are some monasteries, but the chief is that of Milan, founded by S. Barnaby.  
The order of the Regular Priests Theatins took his beginning from john Peter Caraphe son to john Anthony Caraphe a famous ●aron of the city of Naples, 
Theatins.  who having been Bishop of Theate, renounced his Bishopric, to the end he might live solitarily in a part of Mont Piatio: in the end, upon the day of the exaltation of the holy Cross, in the year of our Lord God one thousand five hundred twenty and eight, Clement the fift, being Pope, and Charles the fift Emperor, accompanied by Ca●eta● Tienne of Vicenes, Apostolic Prothonotary, Boniface Colly Alexandrin, and Paul who was a Roman, all 〈◊〉 and agreeing in one devotion, they went together into the Church of Saint Peter, where they were conducted by the whole Clergy in solemn Procession to the great Altar, where are the holy Relics of Saint Peter and Saint Paul, upon which Altar they did swear and promise' before all the world to observe and keep the three vows which other religious and holy men are accustomed to promise' in their profession, that is to say, Poverty, Chastity, and Obedience. These four (which are here mentioned) were the first which made this vow, and all they that have since entered into this order have done the like; and for that the chiefest among them was Bishop of Theate, they are at this day called Theatins. It is true that this Bishop a●ter he had instituted this order, was made Cardinal by Pope Paul, and since, after the death of marcel, who was Pope for the space of one and twenty days, he was advanced to the Pontifical See, and was called Paul the fourth; foe as many of this order are called Paulists, but more commonly Theatins.  
The order of the Jesuits is now so well known throughout the whole world, 
Jesuits.  as it were superfluous to writ much: it sufficeth only to observe that the Founder was Ignatius of the noble family of the Loyoles, who are near to the town of Alpeithia in the province of Guipuscoa in Spain, who being accompanied by Peter Febure, Alphonso Salmeron, Claud ●aye, Francis Xaives, james Laynes, Nicholas Bou●dille, Simon Rodrigues, john Cordure, and Pasquis Broet, made a vow in the Chapel of Martyrs, which is upon the hill of Mont-Martre, near to the city of Paris, where having cra●ed the assistance of the blessed Virgin, and of Saint Denis Areopagita, patron and protector of the city of Paris, they made a vow to God to renounce the world, and to serve it in perpetual poverty to the glory of God, and the health of souls, namely at a certain day to pass by sea to Jerusalem, with an intent to employ themselves in the conversion of Infidels, and to seek by all means to win the crown of Martyrdom: and if it happened their resolution were hindered by any one, the year being ended, they should go to Rome, and offer their labour and service to Saint Peter, for the health and spiritual succour of their neighbours, without any expectance of recompense, or exception of time and place, which vow they made in the year of our Lord one thousand five hundred thirty and four, on the fifteenth day of August, whenas the Church doth solemnize the feast of the Assumption of the mother of God; and since, the rule of Ignatius having been established and confirmed by the holy See, upon the eight and twentieth day of October, in the year of Grace one thousand five hundred and forty; upon Friday before the Calendss of May, Ignatius and his companions made a new profession in the Church of Saint Paul at Rome. This order was confirmed at the Council of Trent, as may be seen in the five and twentieth Session, Chap. seventeen. They writ that a vision which Ignatius had of our Saviour jesus Christ when he was at Rome, (who promised to be favourable unto him) was the only cause that made him to give the most holy name of jesus to his Society.  

Priests of the Oratory.  There are also the Priests of the Oratory, of which Philip Nerio who was a Florentine, was the Founder, in the year of our Redemption one thousand five hundred sixty and four. His three first Imps were that famous and renowned parsonage Caesar Baronius, the second Francis Bourdin, who was afterwards Bishop of avignon, and the third Alexander Fidelle, they began their congregation at Rome in Saint jerosmes Church, whereas after their number increased, they daily chose some among them to preach unto the people, Saturday excepted. His principal intent was to reduce the order of Priesthood to his ancient beauty.  
This last year Peter of Berule, a French man borne at Paris, of a good and noble family, (whose piety and holiness cannot be sufficiently recommended, nor the great and fervent zeal which he hath to the glory of God, and the health of souls, having laboured infinitely for the conversion of such as have strayed from the true Religion) hath instituted an order of the Oratory, the which differs in many things from the first; yet it is approved by Paul the fift, now Bishop of Rome, from which they attend great first-fruits by the goodly rules and reformations which they expect from them in many things.  
There are other companies for Christian doctrine, instituted chiefly to catechise young children, 
Ursulines.  the which gins now to be much used in France, among the which there are Virgins called Ursulines, both at Lion, avignon, and in other places which instruct the youth, yet they make no vow: but the last year being one thousand one hundred and twelve, in the month of November upon Saint Martin's day, other Virgins which are also called Ursulines, who have a house in the sub●rbeses of Saint jaques at Paris, took a new habit under the rule of Saint Augustin, and made the three solemn vows which they had obtained from Paul the fift. They are yet but twelve.  

Orders condemned. The White.  Having treated of the orders allowed by the Church, it shall not be from the purpose to speak something of those which are condemned, among others of the Whites, which had this beginning. In the time of Boniface the ninth, there came out of Germany a certain Priest, who descending from the Alpes with some that followed him, stayed at Lucca, where he presently drew above 3000 persons unto his devotion. He attired himself all in white, wearing a surplus of linen, with a hood upon his head like unto a religious man, and they that followed him both men and women did the like. He carried a Crucifix in his hand, and cried out of human miseries; of the calamities of his time; and of the sins of men, so as with his grave carriage, his modest gesture, his composed speech, and other goodly shows, he was held and reverenced for a holy man. His company (which was great) followed him two and two, in the manner of a Procession; the most apparent went before, and the common people, with the women, followed after, and going thus from town to town, they cried often all together, Mercy, Peace, with other invocations: This is the contemplation of the most holy Mother of God, composed by S. Gregory, that is to say, Stabat Mater dolorosa, etc. and whereas night surprised them, they lay down upon the ground, and lived of that which good men brought unto them: This did so move the people to devotion, as many personages of great quality, yea and Churchmen, followed them, and attired themselves also in white, wherefore they were called the White. This company having run over a great country, in the end their leader resolved to carry them directly to Rome, where, being upon the way, Pope Innocent the ninth, who was at Viterbe, about forty miles distant from Rome, being advertised thereof, caused their leader to be apprehended, and then carried to Rome, where being examined, he was presently condemned to die, and executed as a superstitious man: so the head and guide being taken away, this company was soon dissolved, and every man returned to his own house, the which did happen in the year of our Redemption one thousand four hundred. The Crucifix which this man carried for a banner, is at Luca, by the which, as they say, they do many miracles, as may appear by the great number of images which are hung in the Church where it remains, the which is called the Church of the Crucifix, and when it was brought by them of Luca, at their return, after the death of their leader, it did great miracles and strange wonders upon the way, as may be seen by authentic writings, made by public Notaries, the which are kept in the treasury of the brotherhood of the Whites: so they of Luca seeing the continuance of miracles, which they say God did by that holy image, they built a goodly Church for it of that name, whereas they did place it upon the high Altar. This place is governed by a fraternity or brotherhood, the which hath retained the name of Whites unto this day, whereas they say service very devoutly. There is also another Crucifix at Florence, in the Church of S. Peter of Moron, the which is also much reverenced for the great miracles it doth, and they say, it is the same which the women of that company carried in Procession whenas they followed this Churchman. There is also in this Church, a brotherhood of the Whites. This company began about the year of our Lord God 1396, and was extinct in the year of jubilee 1400. In the city of Luca there is a Church of S. Martin, which Pope Alexander the second caused to be built, whenas he was Bishop of that place: and being Pope, he granted a privilege to the Chanoins which are there, to wear miters of white silk in certain solemnities: The which they have always observed since, unto the time of Paul the third, who not only confirmed this privilege, but also gave them leave to wear an Episcopal habit when they would.  
After these, we may place them of the Coquinerie, 
The Coquinerie.  who had rather endure all discommodities, than to labour; yet they would raise a new company under a kind of religion, wearing a long jacket of course canvas, wandering up and down bore headed, and bore feet, standing at the doors of Churches, or at the corners of streets to demand alms. They say that an idle man of Cremona, called james, was the Author; they did eat all kinds of meat, and what they would, and they slept when and as much as they pleased, they went where they list, and did use money, and which was worst of all, they yielded no obedience to any man, but lived at discretion, being neither subject to Bishop, Prior, General, nor to any temporal Lord  
There was also the company of Friars of the Opinion, 
Friars of the Opinion.  who had their beginning in the year of Christ 1278, by one called Herman, and it was much favoured by many Princes, but in the end, when their villainies were discovered, they were suppressed, and their company was excommunicated by Pope Boniface the eighth.  

Doulcins.  In the year of our Lord God 1300, began the company of the Doulcins, which was invented by one borne at Navarre, a town in the Duchy of Milan, called Doulcin, who in less than a year drew together above six thousand persons, which followed the same order, or rather disorder, like to those we have formerly spoken of. This company was excommunicated by Pope Clement the fift.  

The poor of Lyon.  As for the company of the poor of Lion, they were chased away by Pope john the two and twentieth. They term themselves to be of the order of S. Francis, and held certain opinions against the Romish faith; wherefore, the Pope did not only banish them, but decreed they should be all burnt. The Author of this sect, was one Peter, of the order of the friars Minors.  

Orders in Aethiopia.  But before we end this discourse, it shall be fit to content the Readers curiosity, to speak something of the orders which they have in Aethiopia. The greatest Monastery which they have in that country, is that of Bisan, that is to say, of the Vision, the which is near to the town of Ercoco, in the government of Bernagas, subject unto Presbyter john: There are in this Monastery above three thousand Monks, this being the chief of six others which are situated thereabouts, whereof the farthest is not thirty miles distant. In either of them there is a Davitte, that is to say, a Guardian, who is subject, and yields obedience to the Abbot of the Vision. This Monastery is seated upon the top of a high rock, having a fearful Precipice of every side: within it there is a great kitchen full of all necessary implements, and near unto it a great place where they feed, and they eat three together in a broad platter of wood which is not very deep. Their meat is very gross, and their bread in like manner, being made of millet, barley, and of another little black grain which they call Tuse. This bread is made round, of the bigness of an apple, and they give to every Monk three for his portion, and to a Novice, one and a half, and with it they give them a few Coleworts without salt or oil, of which unseasoned meat they sand as an honour to the most ancient of the house, who are dispensed withal for coming into the room whereas they eat together. They feed a great number of children above eight years old, most of which want their arms, are lame, or else blind: but as for the religious men, they never eat flesh, nor drink any wine, but out of the Convent, when they are all alone, or in private. They have a custom, That whenas they give the habit to any Novices, they sand them out of the Monastery, to labour for their living while they are young, the reason is, for that the Monastery is not able to maintain them without their own industry, although their revenues be great: but whenas they grow old, than they remain in the Monastery, where they spend the rest of their days: They are careful that no women, mules, cows, hens, or any other beast of the female sex, come within arqebus shot of their Convent. In every Monastery of this order, they keep a Cock, tying two bells to his legs, the which serves to give them notice of the hours of Matins and Evensong. They that live abroad, give themselves only to manure the ground for the sowing of millet, and to keep hives of bees, and whenas night approacheth, they presently retire to their houses for fear of wild beasts. The revenues of this monastery of the Vision are very great; for first of all the mountain whereon it stands, contains about thirty mile in compass, where there grows great store of millet, barley, rye, and tufes, whereof they pay the tithes, and in like manner the pastures whereon they feed their cattle, yield them a tribute. At the foot of this mountain there are many good farms, most of which belong unto this monastery, and from thence for two days journey they found an infinite number of other places of their possessions, which they call Gultus, that is to say, the liberties of the Vision: they have moreover one hundred small villages, either of which pays them a horse every third year, but the Alicasin, that is to say, the Steward or bailiff of the monastery takes fifty kine for every horse, for such is their custom; so as of all the places that belongs unto this monastery (whereof some are fifty days journey off) he receives yearly one thousand six hundred and fifty kine, besides the which they are charged with certain duties of corn which they pay unto this Monastery, the dependences whereof extend above fifteen days journey into the realm of Tigremalun: these lands are called Adetyeste, and pay yearly forty horses valued with kine as hath been said, with many other rights. There are also many other places which belong unto the king, which pay unto them certain horses, which they hold by an ancient custom. Finally, some hold that they may go above thirty days journey upon their own land. Some among them are very devout, and others vicious. They have many superstitions which they hold of the jews; they observe the Sabbath very strictly, causing their coleworts to be boiled, and their bread to be made upon the eve, lest they should labour with their hands on the Sabbath day, not not to kindle a fire; so as they are the most disordered of all Aethiopia. Their garments are made of goat's skins, dressed like Chamois, which hangs down unto the ground, and they are died of a yellow colour, than they have upon it a cloak, like unto that of the jacobins, made of the same skins: as for their heads both they and all other religious men of Aethiopia wear their hair, except Priests, who are altogether shaven.  
The rest of the religious of Aethiopia, are in a manner all of the order of S. Anthony, although they have some diversity in their fasts and abstinences: for there are some which eat flesh, and drink wine, and others which will not once see it, nor suffer it to enter into their convents. Their garments are all yellow, some being made of course cotton, and others of goat's skins dressed like Chamois. The religious women have the like habit, but they wear no cloak upon their frock, nor hair like to the men, but they wear a bore frock, and their heads are shaven, about the which they wear a band of leather very close, but when they are old, and then they wear certain coifs and veils: they do not live shut up in any monasteries, but in farms and villages which depend thereon, and for that (as we have said) all their religious are of one order, they are subject to the next monastery, whereas they receive the habit: they enter not into the Church no more than other women. Some of them are good and religious, and others which are not so reform have children. All the Monks and Priests of that country carry a Cross of black wood in their hands; and as for the Priests they have their heads always shaven, and wear their beards long, but laymen let their hair grow, and shave their moustaches, and under the chin. Most of their Monks go barefoot, and there are few Churches with Priests, but there are also Monks, and there are some which have two hundred Debeteras, that is to say, Chanoins, and as many Monks which are honourably entertained. In the Church of Caxumo (which was the first built by queen Candace, after that she had been baptised by the Eunuch, who had first received baptism from Saint Philip) there are three hundred Chanoins, and as many Monks: they never say but one Mass a day, and they come not to it, but there are three Priests ready at the altar with incense, and barefoot, for every man puts off his shoes before he comes into the Church, neither do they spit when they are once entered. Lay● men and women never enter but stay without in a round circle, and there receive the Sacrament from Churchmen, be they Priests or Monks. They have bells of stone and iron, and the Monks rise always two hours before day to Matins, the which they say by heart, and they have no other light but a lamp, which burns always in the midst of the Church, whereunto they put butter in steed of oil, for that they have no olive trees in that country. They sing Matins with a loud voice, and a bad grace, like men that cry without either art or Music: their service is not said by verses and couplets, but as it were in prose, and it consists all in psalms, to the which they add upon festival days a prose, according to the solemnity which they celebrated; and whilst they are in the Church at Martins they stand always: they say but one lesson, the which they tune as ill as the rest, and almost in the same manner as they have been accustomed to represent the jews speech in the passion of our Saviour; and besides that their voice is rude and untunable, they run as fast as their tongues will go, and this lesson is read before the principal feast, which being ended, they go in procession with four or five crosses set upon staves, which are no longer than Pilgrim staves, the which they carry in their left hand, and in the right they hold a censor, for there are always as many censors as crosses. Finally, they wear certain copes of silk very unhandsome, for that they are no brother than a piece of damask or some other silk.  
As for their fasts, they begin their Lent upon the Monday of Sexagesima, which is ten days before our Lent: their general abstinence during their Lent, is to live of bread and water, for in truth they should found no fish if they would eat any, there being little in that country, for that it is too far from the sea: true it is, they have good fish, and some store in their rivers, but they know not how to take it; and they fish but seldom at the instance of great men. Their ordinary feeding is bread, for their Lent being just in the heart of their Summer, for want of rain, they can have no coleworts; yet in some monasteries they plant them so well, as they want not any throughout the year: in other places they live of grapes and peaches which grow ripe in the end of February, and continued to the end of April, whereof they feed, and they that have such first-fruits are much better entreated than the rest: besides their bread, they use a kind of grain, which they call Caufa, and they make a sauce wherein they steep their bread, the which is sharp, and bites in the mouth: they make also another sauce of a certain grain which they call Thebba, the which they prepare like unto mustard, calling it Cenafrica, and of all these three things they use during Lent: they eat no milk not butter, and drink no wine made of grapes or honey, but their ordinary beveridge is a kind of beer which they call Zauna, and they make it of barley or millet, the which hath a taste like unto ale: there are many Monks, who for devotion eat not any bread during Lent, and there are others which forbear all their lives, but in steed of bread they use Agrione, which is an herb of that country, the which they boil a little without salt, oil, or any other seasoning, and whenas they found not any, they eat malloes and lintelles, the which they steep in clear water. Some wear a habit of leather without sleeves, having their arms naked, and a great many of them wear on their bore skin a girdle which is made of iron, and it is about four fingers broad, whereof the pieces are joined together with certain points which are turned towards the flesh. Others during the time of Lent never sit, but do continually stand: and there are some which during the Lent put themselves into cases of wood, the which are made fit for their bodies, being like unto coffins which are without covers, being fitted behind to place their buttocks, and upon the top to lean their elbows, and to lay a book before them: their habit is a shirt of hair, the which is made of the hair of an ox, and underneath it upon their flesh they have that girdle of iron. There are others which during the time of Lent shut themselves into caves, where they live of herbs and lentils only. There are also some both Monks and Nuns, which every Wednesday and Friday in Lent stand all night in the water up to the necks, near unto the town of Cassimur, the which was built by queen Candace, where there is a lake, in the which there are many little lodgings of stone, whereas many Monks and other Priests sit upon those days: there are others which not only forbear to eat bread, but retire themselves into deep valleys in very thick forests, whereas no creature living comes, and there they do penance all the Lent with water. The fasting of most of the religious during Lent, is to eat once in two days, and always at night, but they never fast upon Sunday nor Saturday, and therefore they make fifty days of Lent. And for that they say but one Mass a day, they do celebrated it at night, whereas all of them do communicate; then they go to supper, alleging for it, the Supper of our Lord and Saviour jesus Christ, who (as they report) consecrated his blessed body upon a fasting day, being almost night. Upon other days, which are not to be celebrated as fasting days, they say their Mass early in the Morning; and as for them that eat flesh, they make no difference of Friday, nor of Saturday, but eat it indifferently, or (as a man would say) all days alike: Besides the holy time of Lent, they have divers other fasts, that is to say, first the Monday after Trinity Sunday, from which time they begin to fast every day, except Saturday and Sunday, unto the Birth of our Lord and Saviour jesus Christ, from which day, unto the Purification of our blessed Lady the Virgin Marie, which they commonly call the feast of S. Savere, they have no fasts. The three first days after the Purification, they fast very strictly and carefully, and they say it is the repentance of Ninive: Upon these three days, the time of Aduent, and the holy time of Lent, all indifferently, as Priests, Seculars, men, women, and children, both great and small, fast inviolably, without any respect of persons. Having spoken of the Monks which march under the Standard of the Crucifix, it shall not be much from the purpose (in my opinion) to writ a word of those which are now enrolled for the better part, under that triumphant and glorious ensign, and which were heretofore tied to the superstitions of Idolatry and ungodliness, that is to say, of those of the great Island of japon, or of Zipang●, as Francis Xavier the jesuit relates, in a letter which he hath written to the fathers of his society, of the town of Conub●e, in the year of our Salvation one thousand five hundred forty nine, for that they had many conformities with our holy and religious men: for he saith, that besides their ordinary Bonzes, which are with them as Priests, they have also three sorts which are like our Monks, whom they call Lequixil, and women which resemble our Nuns called Hamaca●a, all which have Monasteries both within and without towns. They that live in cities, never marry; they live of alms, and have their heads and beards shaven: they wear long robes with wide sleeves, in Winter they have their heads covered, and all the rest of the year it is bore: they eat together, and fast many days in the year; they eat no beast whatsoever, to do the greater penance, the which is common to all the other Monks of japon. They rise at midnight to go to pray, making their prayers and supplications, with singing, for the space of half an hour, which done, than they return to their beds, until the break of the day, whenas they rise again to pray; the like they do at the rising of the Sun, at Noon time, and also at Night, at which time they make a certain noise, which being heard by the people, they presently (without any delay whatsoever) fall down upon their knees, and joining their hands together, (with many signs and tokens of unfeigned and hearty devotion) they lift them up to heaven, and pray very zealously. These kind of religious men, which they commonly call Lequixil, preach, and exhort the people, and are very much followed by the common people: They weep and seem very country and sorrowful when they preach, and by this means they as it were force tears from their Auditor's, they are so persuasive and forcible in their discourse. There is moreover, another sort or kind of these Lequixil, and Hamacata, which are clad in a russet weed or habiliment, and to whom it is not lawful to marry. The Monasteries of men, are near unto those of the women, which gives much cause of jealousy and talk: They make many prayers, and fast often, these are very rude, and without learning. The third sort of these religious men do much penance, they live all in common, and are attired in black. They all worship many Idols, as Xaca (which they say was borne 8000 years before his mother had conceived him) Amida, and Quanon. They do also worship the Sun and the Moon, which they call Denix, this people being so devout to their superiors, as father Michael Vilette, a jesuit, saith, in an Epistle which he hath written, that in a mountain near to the royal town of Meaco, there were in old time seven thousand Monasteries dedicated to Idols, and among others, there was one very rich, where their king, and all the rest of the people, go to make their vows, and there they offer great and rich presents, the devil appearing in a vision to such as offer their oblations in that place, letting them understand that he is pacified by their devotion, and that he will free them from all trouble and danger, and that hereafter their affairs shall succeed well or ill, according to the care, or negligence, they have showed to his service.  
Thus I have briefly set down what may be said of the orders and companies of religious men which are in Christendom.    
FINIS